GREEK- ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT άρ^ ίταιδεύσεω? rj των ονοα,άτων «πίσκεψις. Epictetus, Diss. L 17, 12. maius quiddam atque divinius est sermo humanus quam quod totum mutis litterarum figuris comprehendi queat. Hermann, Opuscc. iii. 253. TA ΡΗΜΑΤΑ A ΕΓΩ ΛΕΛΑΛΗΚΑ YMIN ΠΝΕΥΜΑ ΕΣΤΙΝ ΚΑΙ ISM ΕΖΤΙΝ GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT BEING ®rimm'0 tDilke'e Clauis Νουί @:e0tamenti TRANSLATED REVISED AND ENLARGED BY JOSEPH HENRY /^HAYER, D.D. HON. LITT.D. DUBLIN BDSSET PBOFESSOB OF NEW TESTAMENT CRITICISM AND INTERPBETATION IH THE DIVINITT SCHOOL OF HASVASD ΠΝΙΤΕΒβΙΤΤ CORRECTED EDITION NEW λ'ΟΕΚ • CINX'INNATI • CHICAGO AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY Copyright, 1886, by Harper & Βεοιήεηβ. All rights reserved. Copyright, 1889, by Harprr & ΒβοϊΗΕΕΛ All rights reserved. Ί0) PREFACE. '~pV3WAEDS the close of the year 1862, the "Amoldische Buchhandlung" in Leipzig JL published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared, upon the basis of the " Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica " of C. G. Wilke (second edition, 2 vols. 1851), by Professor C. L. Wilibaid Geimji of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen's Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of Passow's Dictionary edited by Rost and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a word's significations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became current, but also duly to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual criticism, of exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg ; and since its completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the New Testament extant. An arrangement was early made with Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheca Sacra for October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun ; but it was protracted by engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity — as it seemed — of preparing the authorized translation of Liinemann's edition of Winer's New Testament Grammar, which was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann. Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm's work was called for. To the typogi-aphical accuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared in its completed form in 1879. " Admirable ", " unequalled ", " invaluable ", are some of the epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of the book by competent critics in (Jermany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor Schurer's review of it in the Theologische Literatnrzeitung for January 5, 1878 : " The use oi Professor Grimm's book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a work ντ PREFACE. of the highest intrinsic merit, and one which is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament, and consequently for the study of Theology in general." Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such changes in his work as might in my judgment the better ada^jt it to the needs of English- speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all quarters, in a strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing a new book prepared on my predecessor's as a basis, and — alike in justice to him and for the satisfaction of students — to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should render them distinguishable at once from Professor Grimm's work. (See [] in the list of "Explanations and Abbreviations" given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor draw- backs the procedure will, I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respect- ing debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation. Som.e of the leading objects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here be repeated in substance as follows: to verify all references (biblical, classical, and — so far as practicable — modern) ; to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words ; to give the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of interest to the general student ; to render complete the enumeration of (rej)resentative) verbal forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others) ; to append to every verb a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament ; to supply the New Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk ; to note more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions ; to introduce brief discussions of New Testament synonyms ; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the " Authorized Version " but also of the Revised New Testament ; to multiply cross references ; references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical (Kiihner, Kriiger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, etc.) ; also to the best English and American Commentaries (Lightfoot, Ellicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The Speaker's Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, etc.), as well as to the latest exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare, etc.) ; and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopsedias (Smith, Alexander's Kitto, McClintock and Strong, the completed Riehm, the new Herzog, etc.), besides the various Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul. Respecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place : One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings in the current editions of the Greek text. A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage may PREFACE. νπ entail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In the absence of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant printed texts to the exclusion of its rivals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of the text of the ' Receptus ', together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf. In his secou>I edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm's second edition undergone thorough revision (see, for example, " Griesbach " in the list of " Explanations and Abbrevia- tions "), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of Tregelles and of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted. Again : the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions holding in classic usage (as they axe laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the several articles. On the contrary, the exposition of classic usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of comparison by which the direction and degree of a word's change in meaning can be measured. When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and instructive. On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand, although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Pick, or even more frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vanicek, as the most compendious digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon. The nature and use of the New Testament writings require that the lexicographer should not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. A student often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it bears in a given context or discussion : — or, to state the same truth from another point of view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least to some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the objections to opposing interpretations. Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter into his labors. Any one wlio consults such articles as αΙών, αιώνιο?, βασιλύα τοΐ θΐοΰ etc., Succuo; and its cognates, Βόξα, έλπί?. ζ^η, θάνατος, θΐός, κόσμος, κιριος, ττίστις, m-cv^io, σαρξ, σοφία, σω^ω and its cognates, ν16<; τον άνθρ^τσυ, υίο? του θεον. Χριστός, and the like, will find, it is believed, all the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have been yni PEEFACE. added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded as supplemeating or correcting those of Professor Grimm. Convenience often prescribes that the archaeological or historical facts requisite to the understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for fuller information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor ; yet with the constant exercise of self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that succinctness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original. In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist will often find it serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten. Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies dissent from him. It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen — now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi- nal ; now because they furnish the most copious references to other discussions of the same topic ; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access ; now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether. It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The expert can easily train his eye to run over them ; and yet even for him they may have their use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but also as continually recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest. Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament vocabulary, or investigating questions — whether of criticism, authorship, or biblical theology — which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found elsewhere. Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen, by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, must Oe made to George B. Jeavett, D.D., of Salem and to Professor W. W. Eato.v now of Atiddlebury College, Vermont. The former has verified and re-veritied all the biblical and classical PREFACE. IX references, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering valuable aid in conectiug many of the proofs ; the latter has gathered the passages omitted from words marked with a final asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation, and in many other particulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the lamented Dr. Abbot been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, id accordance with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorf's Editio Oetava Critica Major. To Dr. C-iSPAR Rexe Geegort of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins Uni- versity, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena ;ust named in advance of their publication ; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press, Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott's Lexicon. No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several laborers, having at their command larger resources than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every remaining blemish — 'va 6 Xoyog toC κυρίον τρε)(β καΧ ζοξάζηταΐΜ J. a THAYER. Cambridge, Massachusetts. Dec. 25, 1SS5. In issuing this " Corrected Edition " opportunity has been taken not only to revise the supplementary pages (725 sq.), but to add in the body of the work (as circumstances per- mitted) an occasional reference to special monographs on Biblical topics which have been published during the last three years, as well as to the Fourth Volume of Schmidt's S3-non3'mik (18S6), and also to works \vliich (like Meisterhans) have appeared in an improved edition. The Third edition (1888) of Grimm, however, has yielded little new material; and Dr. Hatch's " Essays in Biblical Greek " comes to hand too late to permit references to its valuable dis- cussions of words to be inserted. To the correspondents, both in England and this country, who have called my attention to errata, I beg to express my thanks ; and I would earnestly ask all who use the book to send me similar favors in time to come : — UTcAts oiScv οϋδο-ός μίτρον. April 10, 1889. LIST OF ANCIENT AUTHORS QUOTED OR REFERRED TO IN THE LEXICON. N. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been made of the lists in the Lexicons of Llddell and Scott and of Sophocles, also ef Freuini's Triennlam Philologicam (1S74) vols i. and ii., of Smith's Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography, of Smith and Wace'» IMctionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann's Bibliotheca Scriptoram Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of reference. An asterisk (•) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk it) death. B.O A.D. Achilles Tatius 500 ? Acts of Paul and Thecla, of Pilate, of Thomas, of Peter and Paul, of Barna- bas, etc., at the earliest from ... 2d cent, on Aelian . c. 180 Aeschixes 345 Aeschylus *525, t456 Aesop 1 570 Aetius . . c. 500 Agatharchides 117» Alcaeus Mttilenaeus 610 Alciphron• 200? Alcmas 610 Alexander Aphrodisiensis . . . 200 Alexis 350 Ambrose, Bp. of Milan 374 Ammianus Marcellinus .... t c. 400 Ammonius, the grammarian .... 390 Asacreon 5.30 Anaxandrides 350 axaximander 580 asdocides ... 405 Ajjtiphaxes 380 AxTiPHON ... 412 Antokinus, M. Aurelius .... tl80 Apollodorcs of Athena 140 Apollonius Dtscolus 140 Apollonius Rbodics 200 Appian 150 Appcleics 160 Aqcila (translator of the O. T.) . . {^ Si^f" Aratus 270 Abchilochus 700 Archimedes, the mathematician . . 2.50 Archytas c. 400 < Bat the current Fables are not his; on the History of Greek Fable, Bee Rutherford, Babrius. Introd. ch. ii. ' Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genain«. B.C. Aretaeus Aristaexetus Aristeas' 270 Aristides, p. Aelics Aristophanes '444, t380 Aristophaxes, the grammarian . . . 200 Aristotle '384, T322 Arriax (pupil and friend of Epictetus) Artemidorcs Daldianus (oneiro- eritica) Athaxasius Athexaeus, the grammarian . . . Athexagoras of Athens AiGUSTixE, Bp. of Hippo Alsonics, Decimcs Magxcs . . . Babrics (see Rutherford, Babrius, Intr. ch. i.) (some say 50 ■? ) Barxabas, Epistle written .... Bartich, Apocryphal Book of ... . Basilica, the - Basil the Great, Bp. of Csesarea . Basil of Seleucia Bel and the Drai/on 2d cent. ? Biox 200 Caesar, Gaids JcLiDS . . tMarchlS, 44 Callimachus 260 Canons and Constitutions, Apostolic . . Capitolixus, Julius (one of the "Hist. August, scriptures sex ") .... Cebes 399 Cedrexus A.D. 80? 450? 160 •c. 100 160 1373 228 177? t430 tc. 390 C.225 c. 100? C 75? C.900 t379 450 3dud 4tb ΐ c. 310 1050 ' But his letter is spurious; see Body, De BibL text. orig. L 1.; A Kurz, Arist. ep. etc (Bern 1S72). - The law-book of the Byzantine Empire, founded upon the work of Justinian and consisting of sixty books. It was begun under the emperor Ba.«il of Macedonia (t886), completed under his son Leo. and revised in 945 under Constantise Porpbyrogenitue: (ed. Heimbach, 6 vols. 1833-70). ANCIENT Authors. XII Ancient Authobs. B.O. Celsus, a. Cornelius, the medical wT-iter Chares 320 Charitos CiiiiYsiPPns of Tyana (iu Atheuaeus) CiiRVSosTOM, Dio, the orator, see Dio Chrys. Chrysostom, John, Bp. of Coiistau- tinople Cicero tDec. 7,43 Clemens Alexandrinus Clkmens KoMAJiOS, Epistle written . Clkomedes Columella Constantinds Poephtrogenitus, emperor from Coiistituliones apostolicae CratinuS t423 Critias 411 Ctesias 401 CURTICS Cyprian Cyril of Alexandria Cyril o£ Jerusalem Democritus 430 Demosthenes *385, t322 Dexippus, the historian DiDYMUs of Alexandria Dio Cassios Dio Chrysostom DiocLES 470 DlODORUS SiCuLUS 40 Diogenes Laurtius DioGNETDS, Epistle to DioNYsics Pseudo-Areopagita . . DiONYSiuS of Halicarnassus .... 30 DiONY'Sins Periegetes DiOSCORIDES DiPHiLcs 300 Ecclesiaslicus (Wisdom of Jesus the Son of Sirach; Grk. trans.) . . .c. 132? EsNIDS tl69 Enoch, Book of 2d cent, on Ephrem Syrds . . Epicharmus 480 Epictetus Epicurds *342, t270 Epimenides 600 Epiphanius, Bp. of Salamis .... Eratosthenes t c. 196 Esdrns, First Boot o/( Vulgate Third) 1st cent.? Esdras, Secoud Boot o/"( Vulgate Fourth) Esther, Additions to 2d cent. ? Eti/mologicum Maijnum EuDCLuS 350 Euclid 300 EupOLis 429 Euripides '480, t406 EusEBius, Bp. of Caesarea* .... Eustathius of Constantinople, gram marian 20 450? 1 t407 200 93-97 100? 50 911-959 3d and 4tb ooaL 50 t257 t444 t386 C.270 C.395 200 100 C.200 2d or 3d cent 500? 300? 100? C.375 100 T403 Istcent ? 1000? to. 340 1160 430 510 390 500 432 250 ' CaUe>< Pamphlll (as friend of the mart;r PampMlos). EuTHYMios ZiGABENDS 0Γ Zigadenus (Zygadenus) Florus, Julius Galen Gellius, Aulus (author of Noctes Atticae) Genesius Ueopunica (20 bks. on agriculture com- piled by Cassianus Bassus) .... Geujianus of Constantinople, the younger Gorgias of Leontini Gregory of Naziauzus Gregory' of Nyssa Harpocration (lexicon to the Ten Attic ( )rators) Hecataeus Hegesippus (quoted in Eusebius) . . liELioDORUs, Bp. of Tricca iu Tliessaly Heraclides Ponticds (but the Alleg. Homer, are spurious) IIeraclitus IIermas IIermippds Hermogenes Hero Alexandrinus Herodian, the grammarian .... Herodian, the historian Herodotus '484, t408 Hesiod 850? Hesychids of Alexandria, the lexicog- rapher HiEROCLES IIiERONY'sius, see Jerome. HlMERIUS Hippocrates 430 Hippolytus HiPPONAX 540 Hirtius (the coutinuator of Caesar's Commentaries) t43 Homer 900? Horapollo, grammarian Horace t8 Hyperides t322 Ignatius Irenaeus, Bp. of Lyons IsAEus 370 Isidorus Hispalensib, Bp. of Seville Isocrates '436, t338 Jamrliciius Jfmninh, Ep. o/"(6th ch. of Baruch) Jerome (Soplironius (?) Eusebius Hie- ronymus) Joannes Damascenus Joannes Moschus , josephus Judith 175-100 Julian, Roman emperor from . . . Justinian, Roman emperor from . . Justin, the historian Justin Martyr Juvenal 1100 C.125 nsi, to. ta 150 950 c925 c. 1230 t390 t395 S501 Cl75 390? 140 f 170 160 t240 6001 450 360 225 400 f Clio 178 t636 300 1st cent t t420 730 t620 75 361-363 527-566 150? 150 lOO Ancient Authors. XIII Ancient Acthobs. B.C. Α.Ώ. Lactantids 310 Lampridi us, the historian . . . . 310 Leo ' Philosophus ', emperor .... 886 LiBANius, the rhetoriciau 350 LiVT •53 tl7 LONGINUS u50 LoNGus 400? LucAN, the epic poet t65 LuciAN of Samosata, the satirist . . ICO ί LuciLius, the Komau satirist . . . tl03 LcCRETius, tlie Koman poet .... t55 Lycophron C. 270 Lycurg us of Athens, the orator . . t329 Lynceds 300 Lysias, the Atlienian orator, opened his school 410 Lysippus 434 Macarius C.350 Maccabees, First Book of ... , 105-63 ? Maccabees, Second Book of c. 75? Maccabees, Third Book of C. 40 ? Maccabees, Fourth Book of ... , 1st. cent ? Machon 280 Macrobius 420 Malalas, John, the annalist . . . 600 ? Manasses, Prayer of 1st cent. ? Manetho, the Egyptian priest . . . 300 Marcion 140 Maximus Ttkius 150 Mela, Pojiponius, the Roman geog- rapher 45 Meleager, the founder of the epi- gram, anthologies 60 Melito, Bp. of Sartlis c. 175 Menander, the poet 325 Menander, the Byzantine historian . 583 MiMNEKMUs, the poet c. 600 Moeris, the "Atticist" and lexicog- rapher 2d cent. MOSCHION 110? Moscuus 200 MusoNiuS RuFuS 66 Nemesius 400? Nepos *90, t24 NiCANDER 160? Nicephorus, patriarch of Constanti- nople t828 NicEPiiORDS Bryennius, the histo- rian tll37 Nicephorus Gregoras, Byzantine his- torian tl359 NicETAS AcoMiNATCs (also Choniates), Byzantine historian 1200 Nicodemus, Gospel of, see Acts of Pilate NicoLAUs Damascenus 14 NiCO.MACHUS Gerasends 50 NiLus, the pupil and friend of John Chrysostom 420 NoNNus of Panopolis in Upper Egypt, the poet 500 ? Numenius of Apameia, the philoso- pher (as quoted by Origen) .... c. 150 B.C A.D. Ndmenius (as quoted by Athen.) . . c. 350 Ocellus Lucanus 400? Oecumenius, Bp. of Tricca .... 950? Olympiodorus, the Neo-Platonic phi- losopher 525 Oppian of Auazarbus in Cilicia (anth. of the oAieuTi/ca) 180? Oppian of A])ameia in Syria (anth. of the /cyyTj-yeTi/ca) 210? ORIGEff tc. 254 Orosius Paulus 415 Orphica, the ? Ovid tl7 Palaephatus ? Papias, Bp. of Hierapolis, first half of 2d cent. Pausanias 160 Petrus Alexandrinus t311 Piialaris, spurious e[)istles of . . . ? PiiAvoRiNus, Varinus' Philemon, Comicus 330 Philo 39 Philodemus 50 Philostratus . . 237 PlIOCYLIDES 540 Pseddo-Phocylides (in the Sibyl. Orac, q. V.) 1st cent. Ϊ Photius (Patriarch of Constantinople) 850 Phrynichus, the grammarian . . . 180 Phtlarchos 210 Pindar . . *521 (4 yrs .after Aeschylus), t444 Plato, Comicos, contemporary of Ari- stophanes 427 Plato, the philosopher *427, t347 Plautus tl84 Pliny the elder, the naturalist . . . t79 Pliny the j'ouuger, the nephew and adopted sou of the preceding ... tll3 Plotinus, the philosopher .... t270 Plutarch tl20 Pollux, author of the ονομαστίκόν . . 180 Polyaenus, author of the στρατηγή- ματα 163 PoLYBiuS tl22 POLYCARP tl5S,Feb.23 Porphyry, pupil of Plotinus .... 270 PosiDippus 280 P0SIDONIU.S, philosopher (teacher of Cicero and Ponipey) 78 Proclus, philosopher 450 Propertius *48, tl6 Prolevangellum Jacobi 2d cent. Psalter of Solomon 63-48? PsELLUs the younger, philosopher . . 1050 ProLEiMT, the geographer 160 Pythagoras 531 Quintilian, rhetorician, teacher of Pliny the younger t95 Quintus Smyrnaeus 380? ' The I.atln name of the Italian Guartao Favorino, who died A. D. 1537, and was tlie author of a Greek Lexioon compiled mainly from SuYdas, Hesychius, Harpocration, Eustathius, and Phrymt ctius. 1st ed. Rome, 1523, and often elsewhere since. Ancient Autuoks. XIV Ancient Autuors. B.C. A.D. Sallust #86, t35 Sapientia (Sal.), see Wisdom of Solomon. Sappho 610 Seneca, L. Annaeus, the philosopher (son of the rhetoriciau) t65 Septuagint, Greek translation of O.T. c. 280-150 Sextus Empiricus 225? Sihijiline Onicles, of various dates, rang- ing perhaps from 170 lolhtttbonl. SiLius Italiccs, poet tlOl SiiMONiDES of Amorgos, " lambo- graphus" 693 SiMoxiDES of Ceos (author of the epi- taph on the Spartans that fell at Thermopylae) . 525 SiMPLicius, the commentator on Aris- totle and Epictetus 500 Sirachj see Ecc/esiasticus. Socrates ' Scholasticus ', of Constan- tinople, historian 439 Socrates (in Stobaeus) SoLiNUS, surnamed Polyhistor . . SOOt Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter etc. Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom etc. Solon, the lawgiver and poet .... 594 Song of the Three Children .... 2d cent. ? Sophocles '496, t406 SopiiRONins of Damascus 638 SOTADES 1 SozOMEN, historian 450 Statius, the Koraau poet t96 Stobaeus, i. e. John of Stobi in Mace- donia (compiler of Anthol.) , . . 500 ? Strabo, the geographer *66 124 Straton, epigrammatist 150? Strattis, comic poet 407 Sdetonius, the historian, friend of Pliny the younger tl60 SuYdas, the lexicographer 1100? Susanna 1st cent. ? Symmachus (translator of the O. T. into Greek) 200? Synesius, pagan philosopher and bishop of Ptolemais 410 Tacitus tc. 117 Tatian c. 160 Teaching of tht Twelve Apostles ... 2d cent. ? Terence tl59 Βία A.D. Tertdllian t220? Testaments of the Twelve Patriarch» , . C. 125? Theages 1 280 Themistius 355 Theodoret 420 Theodorus Metochita 1300 Theodotion (translator of 0. T. into Greek) before 160 540 Theophilus, Bp. of Antioch .... 180 TiiKOPHRASTUS, pupil and successor of Aristotle 322 Theopiivlact, Abp. of Bulgaria . . 1078 Theophylact Simocatta .... 610 Thomas Magister, lexicographer and grammarian . 1310 Thucydides 423 tl8 260 Timaeds, tlif historian of Sicily . . TiMAEDs the Sophist, author of Lexicon to Plato 250? Timaeds of Locri, Pythagorean phi- losopher 375» TiMON, the " Sillographus " or satirist . C.279 350 200? Tobit c Trypiiiodorus, a versifier .... 400? Tzetzes, Byzantine grammarian and 1150 Valerius Maximus 30 Varro, " vir Romanorum eruditissi- mus" (QuintU.) t26 Vegetius, on the art of war .... 420? Vergil tl9 ViTRirvius, the only Roman writer on architecture 30 VopiscDS, historian (cf. Capitolinus) . C.S10 Wisdom of Solomon {abhi. Sap.) . . c. 100 9 Xenophanes, founder of the Eleatic 540 Xenophon (Anabasis) 401 Xenophon of Ephesus, romancer . . 400? Zeno of Citiura 290 Zenodotus, first librarian at Alexan- 280 ZoNARAS, the chronicler Ills ZosiMUS, Roman historian .... 420 LIST OF BOOKS REFERRED TO MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR'S NAME OR BY SOME EXTREME ABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE. Albert! = Joannes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in sacros Novi Foederis Libros. Lugd. Bat., 1725. Aristotle: when pages are cited, the reference is to the edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and Brandis ; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 183I-I870. Of the Rhetoric, Sandys's edition of Cope (3 vols., Cambridge, 1877) has been used. Buumlein = W. Baumlein, Untersuchungen iiber griechi- sche Partikeln. Stuttgart, 1861. B.D. = Dr. AVilliam Smith's Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols. London, 1860-64. The American. edition (4vols., N. Y. 1868-1870), revised and edited by Professors Hackett and Abbot, has been tlie edition used, and is occjisionally referred to by the abbreviation " Am. ed." BB.DD. = Bible Dictionaries: — comprising especially the work just named, and tlie third edition of Kitto's Cyclo- paedia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alex- ander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870. Bnhdy. = G. Bernhai or " etc. appended to a verse-numeral designates the first, second, third, etc., occurrence of a given word or construction in that verse. The same letters ap- pended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first, second, third, columns of that page. A small a. b. c. etc. after a pnge-numeral designates the subdivision of the page. The various forms of the Greek Text referred to are represented by the following abbreviations : R or Rec. = what is commonly known as theTextus Recep- tns. Dr. F. H. A. Scrivener's last edition (Cambridge and London 1877) has been taken as the standard. > To designate a particular form of this " Protean text " an abbreviation has been appended in superior type ; as, * for Elzevir, " for Stephen, '" for Beza, "" fur Erasmus. G or Grsb. = the Greek text of Griesliach as given in his manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Oiving to a dis- regard of the signs by which Griesliach indicated his judgment respecting the various degrees of probability belonging to different readings, he is cited not infre- quently, even m critical \vorks, as supporting readings which he expressly questioned, but was not quite ready to expel from the text. L or Lchm. = Lachraann's Greek text as given in his larger edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. When the text of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 18.31.) is re- ferred to, the abbreviation " min." or " ster." is added to his initial. Τ or Tdf. = the text of Tischendorf's "Editio Octava Critica Major" (Leipzig, 1869-1872). Tr or Treg. = " Tlie Greek ΝοΛν Testament " etc. by S. P. Tregelles (London, 1857-1879). WIl = "The New Testament in the Original Greek. The Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott Ό.Ό. and Fen- ton John Anthony Ilort D.D. Cambridge and London, Macmillan and Co. 1881." KG = " Novum Testamentum ad Fidem Codicis Vatican! " as edited by I'rofessors Kueuen and Cobet (Leyden, 1860). Tlie textual variations noticed are of course mainly those which affect the individual word or construction under dis- cussion. AVhere an extended passage or entire section is textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9-20 ; .In. v. 3 fin-4; vii. 53 fin. — viii. 11), that fact is assumed to be known, or at least it is not stated under every word contained in the passage. As respects the numbering or the verses — the edition of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been > Respecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, wMch wae followefl by Professor Grimm, see Carl Bertheaa to the llieojo- gisclie Literatnrzeltung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106. Explanations and XIX ABBBEVIAUOmt followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of Tregelles, Westcott and Hort, etc. ). Variations from this standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-nu- meral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek. In quotations from the English Bible — A. V. = the current or so-called " Authorized Version " ; R. v. = the Revised New Testament of 1881. But when a rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the con- trary be expressly stated. A translation preceded by K. V. is found in the Revision only. A. S. = Anglo-Saxon. Abp. = Archbishop. absoL = absolutely. ace. or accns. = accusative. ace to = according to. ad L or ad loc. = at or on the passage. al. = others or elsewhere. al. al. = others other^vise. Aid. ^ the Aldiue text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List of Books). Alex. = the Alexandrian text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List of Books), ap. = (quoted) in App. = Appendix. appos. = apposition. Aq. = Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books). art. = article, augra. = augment, auth. or author. = author or authorities. B. or Bttm. see List of Books. B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books. betw. = between. Bibl. = Biblical. Bp. = Bishop. br. = brackets or enclose in brackets. c. before a date = about. Cantabr. = Cambridge. cf. = compare. ch. = chapter. el. ^ clause. cod., codd. = manuscript, manuscripts. Com., Comm.= commentary, commentaries. comp. = compound, compounded, etc. compar. = comparative. Comp. or Compl =the Complutensian text of the Septnar gint (see Sept. in List of Books), coutr. = contracted, contract, dim. or dimin. = diminutive, dir. disc. =^ direct discourse, e. g. = for example, esp. = especially. ex., exx. = example, examples. exc. = except. excrpt. = an excerpt or e.xtract. fiu. or ad fin. ^ at or near the end. G or Grsb. = Griesbach's Greek text (see above). Graec. Ven. = Graecns Venetns (see List of Books). i. e. = that is. ib. or ibid. = in the same place. indir. disc. = indirect discourse. init. or ad init. ^at or near the beginning. in 1. or in loc. ^ in or on the passage. i. q. = the same as, or equivalent to. KC = Kuenen and Cobet's edition of the Vatican text (see above). L or Lchm. = Lachmann's Greek text (see above). L. and S. = Liddell and Scott (see List of Books). 1. or lib. = book. 1. c, U. CO. =passage cited, passages cited. Lag. = Lagarde's edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List of Books), mrg. = the marginal reading (of a critical edition of the Greek Testament). 0pp. = Works, opp. to = opposed to. paral.^the parallel acconnts (in the Synoptic Gospels). Pt. or pt. = part. q. v. = which see. R or Rec. = the common Greek text (see above). r. = root. rel. or relat. = relative. sc. = namely, to wit. Skr. = Sanskrit, sq., sqq. = following. Steph.^ Stephanus's Thesaurus (see List of Books). Stud. u. Krit. ^the Studien und Kritiken, a leading Get- man Theological Quarterly, s. V. ^under the word. Symm. = Syramachus, translator of the Old Testament into Greek (see Sept. in the List of Books). Τ or Tdf. = Tischendorf's Greek text (see above). Theod. or Theodot. = Theodotion (see Sept. in the List of Books). Tr or Treg. = Tregelles's Greek text (see above), u. i. = as below. n. s. =as above. V. = see. var. = vari.int or variants (various readings). Vat. = the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. in the List of Books). Vulg. = the Vulgate (see List of Books). w.= with (especiiilly before abbreviated names of cases), writ. ^ w^ter, writers, writings. WH = Westcott and Hort's Greek text (see above). Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselve». NEW TESTAMENT LEXICON. A a, αΧφα A, a, έίλψα, TO, the first letter of the Greek alphabet, opening the series which the letter ω closes. Hence the expression (ya (Ιμι το A [L Τ Tr WH ίιΚφα] κα\ τό Ω [Ώ L WH], Rev. i. 8, 11 Rec, wliich is explained by the appended words ή αρχή και τ6 rtKos, xxi. 6, and by the further addition 6 πρώτος κα\ 6 (σχατα, χχϋ. 13. On the meaning of the phrase cf. Rev. xi. 17; Is. xli. 4; xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p. 73]. A, when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is 1. privative (^στ(ρητίκόν'), like the Lat. in-, the Eng. tm-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is prefixed, as άβαρης ; or signifj-ing what is contrary to it, as ίίτιμος, άτιμόω ; before vowels generally άν-, as άναίτίο:. 2. copulative (άθμοιστικόν), akin to the particle άμα [cf. Curtius § 598], indicating community and fellow- ship, as in ά&€λφύς, άκόλονθοί. Hence it is 3. in- tensive (ενιτατικόι/), strengthening the force of terms, like the Lat. con in composition ; as άτινίζω fr. άτονης [yet cf. W. 100 (95)]. This use, however, is doubted or denied now by many [e. g. Lob. Path. Element, i. 34 s<[.]. Cf. Kuhner i. 741, §339 Anm. 5; [Jelf §342 5]; Dllm. Gram. § 120 Anm. 11; [Donaldson, Gram. p. 334; New Crat. §§ 185, 213 ; L. and S. s. v.].• 'Ααρών, indecl. prop, name (ό Ααρών, -ώκοΓ in Joseph.), -ο -ν prj** (fr. the unused Hebr. radical "'Di?, — 8^τ.]ι.Αβι| libidinosus, lascivus, — [enlir/hlened, Fiirst; ace. to Die- trich wealth)/, or fluent, like "'piS], ace. to Philo, de ebriet. § 32, fr. "(Π mountain and equiv. to opeivoi), Aaron, the brother of lloses, the first high-priest of the Israel- ites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order : Lk. i. 5 ; Acts vii. 40; Ileb. v. 4; vii. 11; ix. 4.* ΆβαδΒων, indecl., ΐΙΊΠΧ, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr. ^^X to perish). Job xxxi. 12. 2. the place o/ destruc- tion i. q. Orcus, joined with S'XiV, Job .xxvi. 6 ; Prov. XV. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to the an- gel-prince of the infernal regions, the minister of death and author of havoc on earth, and is rendered in Greek by Άπολλυ'ωΐ' Destroyer, Rev. vx. 11.* Αβιάθαρ όβαρη?, -tr, (βάροί weight), without weight, light; trop. not burdensome: άβαρη ίμίν ΐμαντον ('τήρησα I have avoided burdening you with expense on my account, 2 Co. xi. 9 ; see 1 Th. ii. 9, cf. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)• Άββά [WH -βά], Hebr. 2V. father, in the Chald. em- phatic state, X3X i. e. 6 πατήρ, a customary title of Grod in prayer. WTienever it occurs in the N. f . (ilk. xiv. 36; Ro. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation subjoined to it; this is apparently to be explained by the fact that the Chaldee K2S, through frequent use in prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added the appellative from their own tongue.* Άβίλ [WH "Αβ. (see their Intr. § 408)], indecl. prop, name (in Joseph, [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] 'A^eXor, -ov), San (breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam (Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from liis short life and sudden death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxLx. 6) : Mt. .xxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi. 51 ; Heb. xi. 4 ; xii. 24.• Άβιοί, indecl. prop, name (Joseph, antt. 7, 10, 3 ; 8, 10, 1 ό Άβιας [Λν. § 6, 1 m.], -α), Π^ίΚ and ίΠ;2Ν (my father is Jehovah) , Abia [or Abijah, cf. B. D. s. v.], 1. a king of Judah, son of Rehoboam : Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv. 31; XV. 1). 2. a priest, the head of a sacerdotal family, from whom, when David divided the priests into twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Abia, the eighth in order, took its name : Lk. i. 5.• Άβιαβαρ, indecl. prop, name (though in Joseph, antt. 6, 14, 6 Άβιάθαροί, -ov), 1Π'3Ν (father of abundance), Ahiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest: Mk. ii. 26, — where he is by mistake confounded with Aliimelech his father (1 S. .xxi. 1 sqq.) ; [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1 Clir. xviii. 16; xxiv. 6, 31 ; also 2 S. xv. 24-29; 1 K.iL 26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would seem that double names were esp. common in the case of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph, vit. §§ 1, 2) and that father and son often bore the same name (c£ Lk. i. 5, 59; Joseph. 1. c. and antt- 20, 9, 1). See λΐ» Clellan ad loc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].• Άβιληΐ'η ά'^αθό'ί Άβιληνη [WH "Aj3f ιλ. (see S. ν. « » )], -ψ, η, (sc. χώρα, the district belonging to the city Abila), Abilene, the name of a region lying between Lebanon and Hermon towards Phoenicia, 1 Η mik's distant from Damascus and 37 [ace. to the Itin. Anton. 38] from Heliopolis ; Lk. iii. 1. Cf. Xvaavias [and 15. D. s. v.].* Άβιον8, ό, indecl. prop, name, HiT^X (father of the Jews [al. of glory]), Abiud, son of Zorobabel or Zeriib- babel: Mt. i. 13.• •Αβραάμ [Rcc" '^βp. ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] (Joseph. Άβραμο!, -ου), ΟΠΊΟΚ (father of a multitude, cf. Gen. xvii. 5), Abraham, the renowned founder of the Jewish nation : Mt. i. 1 f.i\.•, xxii. 32; Lk. xLx. 9; Jn. viii. 33; Acts iii. 25 ; Heb. vii. 1 sqq., and elsewhere. He is ex- tolled by the apostle Paul as a pattern of faith, Ro. iv. 1 sqq. 1 7 sqq. ; Gal. iii. 6 (cf. Heb. xi. 8), on which account all beUevers in Clirist have a claim to the title sons or posterity of Abraham, Gal. iii. 7, 29; cf. Ro. iv. 11. όίβνσ-σοΐι in classic Greek an adj., -ot, -oi', (fr. ό βυσσόί i. q. βυθός), bottomless (so perhajjs in Sap. x. 19), un- bounded (ττλοΰτοί Άβυσσος, Aesclivl. Sept. (931) 950). In the Scriptures ή άβυσσος (Sept. for ΠΪΠΓΙ) sc. χώρα, the pit, the immeasurable depth, the abyss. Hence of 'the deep ' sea : Gen. i. 2 ; vii. 11; Deut. viii. 7 ; Sir. i. 3 ; xvi. 18, etc. ; of Orcus (a very deep gulf or chasm in the lowest parts of the earth : Ps. l.\x. (Ix.xi.) 21 f κ των άβνσ- σων της γης, Eur. Phoen. 1632 (1605) ταρτάρου αβυσσα χάσματα, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 άβύσσων ανεξιχνίαστα κλίματα, ibia. 59, 3 ό επιβλέπων ev ταίς άβΰσσοις, of God ; [Act. Thom. 32 ό την άβυσσον τον ταρτάρον οικών, of the dragon]), both as the common receptacle of the dead, Ro. X. 7, and especially as the abode of demons, Lk. viii. 31; Rev. ix. 1 sq. 11; xi. 7 ; xvii.8;xx. 1,3. Among prof, autli. used as a siibst. only 1)y Diog. Laert. 4, (5.) 27 κατήλ- θες fis μέλαιναν Πλουτέως αβυσσον. Cf. Knapp, Soripta var. Arg. p. 554 sq. ; [./. G. Miiller, Philo's Lehre von der Weltschopfung, p. 173 sq.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Deep].* "Αγαβο5[οη the breathing see WH. Intr. § 408], -ov, ό, the name of a Christian prophet, Arjabus : Acts xi. 28 ; xxi. 10. (Perhaps from 2:i\ to love [cf. B. D. s. v.].)* ά-γαθοερΎΕω, -ω ; (fr. the unused ΕΡΓΩ — equiv. to ?ρδω, εργάζομαι — and αγαθόν) ', to be αγαθοεργοί, beneji- cent (towards the poor, the needy) : 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. do good'\. Cf. άγαθουργέω. Found besides only in eccl. writ., but in the sense to do reell, act rightly.* άΎαθο-ποΐί'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. inf. άγαθοποιήσαι ; (fr. άγαθο- iroios) ; 1. lo do good, do something which profls others : Mk. iii. 4 [Tdf. αγαθόν ποιησαι ; Lk. vi. 9] ; to show one's self beneficent. Acts xiv. 17 Rec. ; τινά, to do tome one a favor, ,o benefit, Lk. vi. 33, 35, (equiv. to a'P'H, Zeph. i. 12; Num. x. 32; Tob. xii. 13, etc.). 2. to do well, do right: 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20 (opp. to άμαρτάνω); iii. 6, 17 ; 3 Jn. 11. (Not found in secular authors, ex- cept in a few of the later in an astrological sense, lo /urnish a good omen.)' β,γαθοποιΐα [WH -jrotia (see I, c)], -as, ή, a course of right action, well-doing: iv άγαθοπούα, 1 Pet. iv. 19 i. q. ύγαθοποιουντε! acting uprightly [cf. xii. Patr. Jos. § 18]; if we read here with L Tr mrg. iv άγαθοποιιαις we must understand it of single acts of rectitude [cf. W. § 27, 3; B. § 123, 2]. (In eccl. writ, άγαθοπ. denotes benefi- cence.)* άγαθοποιός, όν, acting rightly, doing well: 1 Pet. ii. 14. [Sir. xlii. 14; Plut. de Is.'et Osir. § 42.]* άγαθ09, -ή, -όν, (akin to άγομαι to \vonder at, think highly of, αγαστός admirable, as explained by I'lato, Crat. p. 412 c. [al. al.; cf. Donaldson, New Crat. § 323]), in general denotes " perfectus, . . . qui habet in se ac facit omnia quae habere et facere debet pro notione norainis, officio ac lege" (Irmisch ad Hdian. 1, 4, p. 134), excelling in any respect, distinguished, good. It can be predicated of persons, things, conditions, quali- ties and affections of the soul, deeds, times and sea^ sons. To this general signif. can be traced back all those senses which the word gathers fr. the connec- tion in which it stands; 1. of a good constitution or nature: γη, Lk. viii. 8; hiv&pov, Mt. vii. 18, in sense equiv. to 'fertile soil,' 'a fruitful tree,' (Xen. oec. 16, 7 γη άγαθη, . . . γη κακή, an. 2, 4, 22 χώρας πολλοί κ. αγαθής οΰσης). In Lk. viii. 15 άγαθη καρδία corresponds to the fig. expression " good ground ", and denotes a soul in- clined to goodness, and accordingly eager to learn sav- ing truth and ready to bear the fruits (καρπούς αγαθούς, Jas. iii. 17) of a Christian life. 2. usifid, xaliiUn-y: δόσις αγαθή (joined to δώρημα τελειον) a gift which is truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 1 7 ; δόματα αγαθά, Mt. vii. 1 1 ; εντολή άγ. a commandment profitable to those who keep it, Ro. vii. 12, ace. to a Grk. scholium equiv. to eZr τά συμφέρον είσηγουμένη, hence the question in Vs. 1 3 : το ουν αγαθόν εμο\ γέγονε θάνατος ; άγ. μερίς the 'good part,' whicli insures salvation to liim ivho chooses it, Lk. x. 42 ; έργον άγ. (differently in Ro. ii. 7, etc.) the saving work of God, i. e. substantially, the Christian life, due to divine efficiency, Phil. i. 6 [cf. the Conim. ad loc] ; fir αγαθόν for good, to advantage, Ro. viii. 28 (Sir. Λ^ίΐ. 13; πάντα τοις εύσεβέσι εΙς αγαθά, . . . τόϊς άμαρ- τωλοίς εις κακά. Sir. xxxix. 27 ; το κακόν . • • γίγνεται εις αγαθόν, Theogui» 162) ; good for, suited to something : προς οίκοδομήν, Eph. iv. 29 [cf. W. 363 (340)] (Xen. mem. 4, 6, 10). 3. of the feeling awakened by what is good, plea.<:ant, agreeable, Joyful, happy : ήμέραιάγ- 1 Pet. iii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 IMacc. x. 55); ελπίς, 2 Th. ii. 16 (μακάρια eXmV.Tit. ii. 13); σννείδησις, a ])caccful conscience, i. q. consciousness of rectitude. Acts xxiii. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 5, 19; 1 Pet. iii. 13; reconciled to God, vs. 21 . 4. excellent, distinguished : so t\ αγαθόν, Jn. 1. 46 (47). 5. upright, honorable: Mt. xii. 34 ; xix. 16 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; Acts xi. 24 ; 1 Pet. iii. 11 , etc. ; πονηροί κ. αγαθοί, Mt. ν, 45 ; xxii. 10 ; άγαθ. και δίκαιος, Lk. x.xiii. 50 ; καρδία αγαθή κ. κάΚή, Lk. viii. 15 (see καλός, b.); fulfilUng the duty or service demanded, δοϋλε άγαθί κ. ττίστ/, Mt. χχν. 21, 23 ; upright, free from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the people, Jn. vii. 12; pre-eminently of God, as consum- mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19) ; άγ. θησαυρός in Mt. xii. 35; Lk. vL 4δ ayadovp'yew 'ά αγατταω denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure thoughts which are brought forth in speech; πίστα άγ. the fidelity due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10 [WH mrg. om.] ; on άγαθ- epyov, άγ. tpya, see fpyov. In a narrower sense, benevolent, l.iinJ, r/enerous : Mt. XX. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18; μν€ία, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii. 20) ; beneficent (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 4; αία, Jer. xxxiii. 11 ; Ps. xxxiv. 9 ; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 " optunus i. e. beneficentissimus"), Ro. v. 7, where the meaning is, Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death ; for if he even dares hazard his life for another, he does so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [Gifford in the Speaker's Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively de- notes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and in partic. a. in the plur., external goods, riches : Lk. i. 53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4 ; Sap. vii. 11) ; τα αγαθά σου comforts and deliglits which thy wealth procured for thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to κακά, as in Sir. xi. 14) ; outward and inward good things. Gal. vi. 6, cf. Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic king- dom : Ro. X. 15 ; τα μέλλοντα άγ. Heb. ix. 11 ; χ. 1. 2. what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Ro. xii. 2 ; €ργάζ(σθαι το άγ. Ro. ii. 10 ; Eph. iv. 28 ; πράσσίΐν, Ro. ix. 11; [2 Co. v. 10]; διώκ€ΐν, 1 Tli. v. IS; μι /ici- σθαι^ 3 Jn. 11 ; κολλάσθαί τω άγ. Ro. xii. 9; tl μ€ έρωτας ιτ(ρ\ τοϋ άγαθοΰ, JMt. xix. 1 7 G L Τ Tr WH, where the word expresses the general idea of right. Spec, what is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs : in the phrase huiKovos els to άγ. Ro. xiii. 4 ; of rendering ser- vice, Gal. vi. 10; Ro. xii. 21 ; τ6 άγ. σου the favor thou conferrest, Philem. 14. [" It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the Sept. that 31Π good is predominantly [?] rendered by κολιίϊ. . . . The translator of Gen. uses ά7οβ<ί5 only in tlie neut., good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for tlie other translators. ... In the Greek O. T., where ol δίκαιοι is the technical designation of the pious, oi αγαθοί or 6 ayaSis does not occur in so general a sense. The at/rip ayados is peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3) ; cf. besides the solitary instance in 1 Ivings ii. 32. Thus even in the usage of the 0. T. we are reminded of Christ's \vords, Mk. x. 18, ouSels ά7α9ίΐ! d μ^ι efs 6 Beos. In the 0. T. the term ' right- eous ' makes reference rather to a covenant and to one's rela- tion to a positive standard ; ayaBas would express tlie abso- lute idea of moral goodness " {yCi-zscliwit:, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p. 19. On the comparison of ayaSos see B. 27 (24)] άγαθουρ-γ€'ω, -ώ ; Acts xiv. 1 7 L Τ Tr WII for R άγαθο• ■ποιώ. The contracted form is the rarer [cf. WII. App. p. 145], see άγαθο(ργ€ω; but of. KaKovpyos, 'κρονργίω.* ογαθωσ-ίνη, -ης. ή, [on its formation see W. 95 (90); TI7/. App. p. 152], found only in bibl. and eccl. writ., uprightness of heart and life, [A. Y. goodness"] : 2 Th. i. 11; Gal. v. 22 (unless here it denote kindne-^s, benefi- cence) ; Ro. XV. 14 ; Eph. v. 9. [Cf. Trench § bdii. ; Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c] • άγαλλιάομαι, see άγαΧΚιάω. d-yoWCcuris, -fojs, ή, (άγαλλιάω), not used by prof. writ. but often by the Sept. ; exultation, extreme joy : Lk. i. 14, 44; Acts ii. 46; Jude 24. Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xiv.) 8) oil of gladness with which persons were anointed at feasts (Ps. xxiii. 5), and which the writer, alluding to the inaugural ceremony of anointing, uses as an emblem of the divine power and majesty to which the Son of God has been e.xalted.* ά-γαλλιάω, -ώ, and -άομαι. (but the act. is not used exe. in Lk. i. 47 [ήγαλλίασα], in Rev. xix. 7 [dyaX- \ώμ€ΐ'} L Τ Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. i. 8 WH Tr mrg. (uyoXXiUTe), cf. 117/. App. p. 169]); 1 aor. ηγαλλιασά• μην, and (with a mid. signif.) ήγαλ'>^ιάθην (Jn. v. 35; Rec. ηγαλλιάσθην) ; a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr. άγάΧΚομαι to rejoice, glory [yet cf. B. 51 (45)]), often in Sept. (for h'i. l'S;\ |:i, bic). to exult, rejoice exceed- ingly: Mt. V. 12; Lk. X. 21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 34; 1 Pet. i. 8 ; iv. 13 ; ίν nvi, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in which the joy originates [cf. W. § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)] ; but Jn. V. 35 means, ' to rejoice while his light shone ' [i. e. «n (the midst of) etc.]. tVi Ttvi, Lk. i. 47; foU. by ίνα, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it had been promised him that he should see. This divine promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise ; cf. W. 339 (318) ; B. 239 (206). On this word see Gelpke in the .Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.» ά-γαμ.ο5, -ov, (-yci/xor), unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32; used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11, 34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said avavSpos.* άγανακτ€'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ηγανάκτησα ; (as jrXfocf κτί ω comes fr. πλοΐνίκτης, and this fr. πλϊον and (χω, so through a conjectural άγανάκτης fr. άγαν and άχομαι to feel pain, grieve, [al. al.]) ; to be indignant, moved with indigna- tion: Mt. xxi. 15; xxvi. 8; Mk. x. 14 ; xiv. 4; nepinvot [cf. W. § 33 a.], Mt. .XX. 24 ; Mk. x. 41 ; foil, by ότι, Lk. xiii. 14. (From Hdt. down.) • άγανάκτη(Γΐ5, -ίω5, η, indignation : 2 Co. vii. 11. [(From Phit. on.)]* αγαπάω, -ώ ; [impf. ψ/άπων] ; fut. αγαττήιτω ; 1 aor. fjya• πησα; pf. act. [1 pers. plur. ηγαιπικαμ(ν 1 Jn. iv. 10 AVH txt.], ptcp. ηγαπηκώί (2 Tim. iv. 8) ; Pass., [pres. άγα- πωμαι] ; pf. ptcp. ηγαττημίνοί ', 1 fut. άγαπηθήσομαι; (akin to άγαμοι [Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see αγαθά:, init.]); to love, to be full of good-will and exliibit the same : Lk. vii. 47 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 sq. ; with ace. of the ρ e r s ο n, /o hare a pre- ference for, wish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. v. 43 sqq.; xix. 19; Lk. vii. 5; Jn. xi. 5; Ro. xiii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 11; xii. 15; Gal. v. 14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and elsewhere ; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Chris- tians towards one another ; of the benevolence which God, in providing salvation for men, has exliibited by sending his Son to them and giving him up to death, Jn. iii. 16; Ro. viii. 37; 2 Th. ii. 16; 1 .Jn. iv. 11, 19; [noteworthy is Jude 1 L Τ Tr WH tois iv θιω πατρϊ ηγατϊημίνοκ ; see iv, \. 4, and cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 12] ; of the love which led Christ, in procuring human salvation, to undergo sufferings and death, Gal. ii. 20 ; Eph. V. 2 ; of the love with which God regards Christ, Jn. iii. 35 ; [v. 20 L mrg.] ; x. 1 7 ; xv. 9 ; Eph. i. 6. TNTien used of love to a master, God or Christ, the word α'^αττη aycLTTTjTOt; involves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obe- dience, iji-ateful ri.'cognition of benefits received: Mt. vi. 24; x.\ii.37; lio.viii.28; 1 Co. ii. 9; viii.3; Jas.i.l2; 1 Pet. i. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 10, 20, and elsewliere. With an ace. of the thing αγαπάω denotes to take pleasure in the thing, prize it abure other things, be unwilling to abandon it or do without it : ίικαιοσΰιην, Ileb. i. 9 (i. e. steadfastly to cleave to) ; την £όξαν, Jn. xii. 43 ; τη^ πρωτοκαθιδρίαν, Lk. xi. 43 ; το σκότο! and το φώί, Jn. iii. 1 9 ; το» κόσμον. 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; τον νΰν αΙωνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which last phrases signify to set the heart on earthly advan- tages and joys; την ^Ι^υχην αΰτων, Rev. xii. 11; ζωήν, 1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it agreeable to himself) ; to welcome with desire, long for : την (πίφάνίίαν αίτοϋ, 2 Tim. iv. 8 (Sap. i. 1 ; vi. 13; Sir. iv. 12, etc.; so of a person: ήγαπήθη. Sap. iv. 10, ef. Grimm ad loc). Concerning the uniijue proof of love which Jesus gave the apostles by washing their feet, it is said ^yaTnjCTfv airois, Jn. xiii. 1, cf. Liicke or Meyer ad loc. [but al. take ήγάπ. here more comprehensively, see AVeiss's Mey., Godet, AVestcott, Keil]. The combi- nation άγάπην αγαπάν τίνα occurs, when a relative inter- venes, in Jn. xvii. 26 ; Eph. ii. 4, (2 S. xiii. 15 where TO μΐσοί b (μίσησαν αυτήν is contrasted ; cf. Gen. xlix. 25 ίνΚόγησί σ( (ϋλογίαν ; Ps. .Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude- pig. Vet. Test. ed. Fabric, i. p. 966 ; Libri Apocr. etc., ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] 8όξαν ήν (8όξασ€ν αυτήν) ; cf. W. § 82, 2; [Β. 148 sq. (129)]; Grimm on 1 Mace. ii. 54. On the difference betw. άγαηάω and φιΚίω, see φιΚίω. Cf. άγάττη, 1 fin. άγάττη, -i/f, ή, a purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyt- tenbach, following Reiske's conjecture, long ago re- stored άγαπήσων in place of αγάπης, l>v in Plut. sympos. quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof, auth. fr. [.\ristot.], Plut. on used άγάπησκ. " The Sept. use άγάπτ; for Π^ΠΧ, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8; vii. 6; viii. 4, 6, 7; [" It is noticeable that the word first makes its ajjpearance as a current term in the Song of Sol.; — certainly no undesigned evidence respect- ing the idea which the Alex, translators bad of the love in this Song" (^Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63)] ; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1, 6 ; [2 S. ,\iii. 15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas. ; it occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and Rev., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter, Jude" {Bretschn. Lex. s. v.) ; [Philo, deus immut. § 14]. In signification it follows the verb αγαπάω; conse- quently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, bene- volence: Jn. XV. 13; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the love of men to men ; esp. of that love of Christi.ins towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by their religion, whether the love be viewed as in the soul or as expressed : Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8 ; xiv. 1 ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Gal. v. 6 ; Philem. 5, 7 ; 1 Tim. i. δ; Heb. vi. 10; x. 24 ; Jn. xiii. 35 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 ; Rev. iL 4, 19, etc. Of the love of men towards God ή αγάπη τον βίοϋ (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]), Lk. xi. 42; Jn. v. 42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (jov πατρόί) ; iii. 17; iv. 12; v. 3. Of the love of God towards men : Ro. v. 8 ; viii. 39 ; 2 Co. xiii.l3(14). Of the love of God towards Christ : Jn. xv. 10 ; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men : Jn. XV. 9 sq. ; 2 Co. v. 14; Ro. viii. 35; Eph. iii. 19. In construction : ay. t'lt τίνα, 2 Co. ii. 8 [?] ; Eph. i. 15 [L WII om. Tr mrg. br. την άγάπην] ; τ!} (ξ υμών iv ήμ'ιν i. e. love going forth from your soul and taking up its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co. viii. 7 [W. 193 (181 sq.) ; B. 329 (283)]; μ^& ίμών i. e. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24 ; μfff ημών i. e. seen among us, 1 Jn. iv. 1 7. Phrases : ίχαν άγάπην fU τίνα, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Col. i. 4 [L Τ Tr, but WII br.] ; 1 Pet. iv. 8 ; άγάπην dtbovai to give a proof of love, 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; αγαπάν άγάπην τινά, Jn. xvii. 26 ; Eph. ii. 4 (v. in αγαπάω, sub fin.) ; άγ• τοΟ πνεύματος i. e. enkindled by the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 30; 6 vlus τη! άγάιτηί the Son who is the object of love, i. q. αγαπητοί. Col. i. 13 (W. 237 (222); [B. 162 (141)]) ; ό ueos τής ay. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; κόπος της άγ. troublesome service, toil, undertaken from love, 1 Th. i. 3 ; άγ της άληθΰας love which embraces the truth, 2 Th. ii. 10 ; ό θιος άγά-πη (στΊν God is wholly love, his nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. 8, 1 6 ; φίλημα άγάττης a kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual aftec- tion, 1 Pet. v. 14 ; &ιά την άγ- that love may have oppor- tunity of influencing thee (' in order to give scope to the power of love' De W., Wies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; €i> άγάττη lovingly, in an affectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21 ; on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element], Eph. iv. 15 (where tv άγ. is to be connected not with oXifdrvovrtt but with αϋξήσωμ(ν), vs. 16 ; ΐξ αγάπης influ- enced by love, Phil. i. 17 (16) ; κατά άγάπην in a manner befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3; V. 8 ; Col. i. 4 sq. ; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words αγάπη, αγαπάν, cf. Gclpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 646 sq. ; on the idea and nature of, Christian love see Kostlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. etc. p. 248 sqq., 832 sqq.; RUckert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 188 sqq. ; IReuss, Thdol. Chrdt. livr. vii. chap. 13]. 2. Plur. άγάπαι, -ων, agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mu- tual love which used to be held by Christians before the celebration of the Lord's supper, and at which the poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and par- took in common with the rest of food provided at the expense of the wealthy: Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13 L Tr txt. WII mrg.), ef. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq. ; Acts ii. 42, 46 ; XX. 7 ; Tertull. Apol. c. 39, and ad Martyr, c. 3 ; Cypr. ad Quirin. 3, 3 ; Dreschcr, De vet. christ. Agapis. Giess. 1824; Mangold in Schenkel i. 53 sq.; [B. D. s. v. Love-Feasts; Diet, of Clu-ist. Antiq. s. v. Agapae; more fully in SIcC. and S. s. v. Agape]. άγαττητόϊ, ij, -όν, {αγαπάω), beloved, esteemed, dear, favorite ; (opp. to ΐχθρός, Ro. xi. 28) ; 6 vior μου (τον Θεοί) ύ αγαπητός, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. iii. 17 'Ayap ar/ye\o^ There WH mrg. take ό άγ. absol., connecting it with what follows] ; xii. 18 ; xvii. 5 ; Mk. i. U ; ix. 7 ; Lk. iii. 22 ; ix. 35 (where L mrg. Τ Tr WH ό t jcXtXt-y/je'i/os) ; 2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xx. 13 ; [cf. Ascensio Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq.; viii. 18, 25, etc.]. αγα- πητοί θ€οΟ [W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (165)] is apjilied to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by him to be worthy of eternal life : Ro. i. 7, cf. xi. 28 ; 1 Th. i. 4; Col. iii. 12, (Sept., Ps. lix. (Ix.) 7; cvii. (cviii.) 7 ; cxxvi. (cxxvii.) 2, αγαπητοί σου and αύτοϋ, of pious Israehtes). But Christians, bound together by mutual love, are αγαπητοί also to one another (Philem. 16 ; 1 Tim. vi. 2) ; hence they are dignified \vith this epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro. xvi. 5, 8; Col. iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, etc.) and direct (Ro. xii. 19 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; [Philem. 2 Rec] ; Heb. vi. 9 ; Jas. i. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ; [1 Jn. ii. 7 G L Τ Tr WH], etc.). Generally foil, by the gen. ; once by the dat. άγαπ. ήμ'ιν, 1 Th. ii. 8 [yet cf. W. § 31, 2 ; B. 190 (165)]. άγαπητο! iv κνρίω beloved in the fel- lowship of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro. xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rev. In class. Grk. fr. Hom. II. 6, 401 on ; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, 41.] "Αγαρ [WH 'Ay. (see their Intr. § 408)], ή, indecl., (in Joseph. Άγάρα, -η:), "'■JH (flight), lUujar, a bond- maid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael (Gen. xvi.) : Gal. iv. 24, [25 L txt. Τ om. Tr br.]. Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had for- merly dwelt among them. Gal. i. 17) called the rocky Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to "'JH ( «rv ^ i. e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred to em- ploys the name Hagar aUegorically to denote the servOe sense of fear Λvith which the Mosaic economy imbued its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note"; Bp. Lghtft.'s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal. 1-c-]* άγγαρεΰω ; fut. άγγαρήσω ; 1 aor. ηγγάριυσα ; Ιο em- p!o>/ a courier, despatch a mounted messenger. A word of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sicyon. 4], but adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. anr/ariare). Άγγαροι were public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by apjiointment of the king of Persia at fixed localities, with horses ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from one to another and so convey them the more speedily to their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson's note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. s. V. n'l^lX; [B. D. s. v. Angareuo; Vanitek, Fremd- worter s. v. ayyapos]. These couriers had authority to press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels, even men they met, [cf. Joseph, antt. 13, 2, 3]. Hence ayyapevfiv τινά denotes to compel one to go a journey, to bear a burden, or to perform any other service : Mt• V. 41 (οσηρ σ€ άγγαρ€νσ(ΐ μίλιον Ζν i. e. whoever shall compel thee to go one mile) ; xxvii. 32 {τιγγάρ^νσαν Ίνα άρη ι. e. they forced him to carry), so Mk. xv. 21.* άγγίΐον, -ου, τό, (i. q. το ayyos), a resse!, receptacle : Mt. xiii. 48 [R G L] ; xxv. 4. (From Hdt. down.) * ayyeXCa, -as, ή, (άγγίλοί), a message, announcement, thing announced ; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where Rec. has tVayytXia) [cf. Is. .xxviii. 9]; iii. 11. [From Hom. down.]* άγγί'λλω ; [1 aor. ηγγιίλα, Jn. iv. 51 Τ (for άπήγγ. R G L Tr br.)] ; («yyfXos) ; to announce : άγγΐλλουσα, Jn. XX. 18 L Τ Tr AVH, for R G άπαγγίλλ. [From Hom. down. CoMP. ; av-, απ-, θι-, ί'ξ-, fir-, προ-ϊττ-, κατ-, προ-κατ-, παρ-αγγίλλω.] * άγ7€λθ5ι -ου, ό, 1. α messenger, enroy, one who is sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vii. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. ii. 25. [Fr. Hom. down.] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test, and of the New, one of that host of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to e.xecute his purposes (Mt. iv. C, 11 ; xxviii. 2 ; Mk. i. 13 ; Lk. xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, cf. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (Lk. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq. ; Acts X. 3 ; xxvii. 23 ; Mt. i. 20 ; ii. 13 ; xxviii. 5 ; Jn. XX. 12 sq.) ; hence the frequent expressions SyyfXos (^angel, messenger of God, 'JxSp) and άγγελοι κυρίου or nyy. ToC θ(οΰ. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq. ; 1 Pet. iii. 22, cf. Eph. i. 21 ; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as ser- vants and attendants: Mt. .xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv. Ά\ ; XXV. 31 ; 2 Th. i. 7, cf. Jude 14. Single angels have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv. 18; waters, Rev. xvi. 5, cf. vii. 1 sq. ; Jn. v. 4 [R L]. Respecting the ayyeXor της άβΰσσον. Rev. ix. 11, see Άβαδδώΐ', 3. Guardian angels of individuals are men- tioned in Mt. xviii. 10; Acts xii. 15. ' The angels of the churches' in Rev. i. 20; ii. 1, 8, 12, 18; iii. 1, 7, 14 are not their presbyters or bishops, but heavenly spirits λυΙιο exer- cise such a superintendence and guardianship over them that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into the assemblies; cf. De Wette, Dusterdieck, [Alford,] on Rev. i. 20, and Lucke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. ii. p. 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 199 sq.]. δίά Tovs ayyf'Xoui that she may show reverence for the angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. ωφθη ayyeXois in 1 Tim. iii. 16 is probably to be explained neither of angels to whom Christ exhibited himself in heaven, nor of demons triumphed over by him in the nether world, but of the apostles, his messengers, to whom he appeared after his resurrection. This appel- lation, which is certainly extraordinary, is easily un- derstood from the nature of the hymn from which the passage (φαν^ρώθη . . . eV ^όξη seems to have been taken ; cf. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic. ad loc.]. In Jn. i. 51 (52) angels are employed, by a beau- tiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent the divine power that will aid Jesus in the discharge ί/γγον aycot of his Messianic ollife, and the signal proofs to appear in his history of a divine sui)erintendence. Certain of the angels have i)rovcd faithless to the trust committed to them by God, and have given themselves up to sin, Jude 6 ; 2 Pet. ii. 4 (Enoch c. vi. etc., cf. Gen. vi. 2), and now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41 ; Rev. xii. 7, cf. 1 Co. vi. 3 [yet on this last passage cf. Meyer; he and others maintain that Λγγ. without an epithet or hmitation never in the N. Ϊ. signilies other than good angels]. Hence SyyeXos Σατάι» is trop. used in 2 Co. xii. 7 to denote a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See δαίμων; [ioy)/i. Lex. s. v. ayyeXos; and for the literature on the whole subject B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the reff. there given add G. L. Halm, Theol. des N. T., i. pp. 260-384; DeHlz.ich in Riehm s. v. Engel; Kiibcl in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.]. «ίγγοϊ, -foi, TO, (plur. άγγη), ΐ. q. άγγιων q. v. : Mt. xiii. 48 Τ Tr AVH. (From Hom. down ; [cf. Rutherforr!, New Phryn. p. 23].) * &^f, (properly impv. of άγω), come ! come now ! used_, as it often is in the classics (W. 616 (481)), even when more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.* άγί'λη, -ijf, ή, (πγω to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.; Mk. V. II, 13 ; Lk. viii. 32 scp (From Hom. doivn.) * άγίνίαλόγητοϊι -ου, ό, (yei/f αλογ/ω), of ichose descent there is no accuuiit (in the O. T.), [R. V. loithout gene- alogii~\ : Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 μη y(vtάKoyoΰμtvos)• No- where found in prof, auth.* άγίνήϊι -ίΟΓ (-oCt), ό, η, (yevos), opp. to ciyo/^y, of no family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or repu- tation ; often used by prof, writ., also in the secondary sense iynohte, cmrardli/, mean, base. In the N. T. only in 1 Co. i. 28, τα ayevrj τον κόσμου i. e. those who among men are held of no account; on the use of a neut. adj. in ref. to persons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].* αγιάζω; 1 aor, ήγίασα; Pass., [pres. αγιάζομαι] ; \){. ήγί- ασμαι; 1 aor. ή-^ιάσθην; a word for which the Greeks use dyiffii/, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to tyip, V"\DT() and eccl. writ. ; to make ayiov, render or declare sacred or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render or ack'nowledr/e to be venerable, to hallow : το όνομα τον 6eoC, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxLx. 23 ; Ezek. xx. 41 ; xxxviii. 23; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 4); [Lk. xi. 2]; τον XptoTiiv, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (R G deav). Since the stamp of sacredness passes over from the holiness of God to ■whatever has any connection with God, ά-γιάζ^ιν de- notes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to God, to consecrate and so render inviolable ; a. things (πάν ■πρωτότοκου, τα αρσενικά, Deut. χν. 1 9 ; ημίραν, Ex. XX. 8 ; οίκον, 2 Chr. vii. 16, etc.) : τον χρυσόν, Mt. xxiii. 17; τόδώρον, vs. 19; σ /tfOof, 2 Tim. ii. 21. b. persons. So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn. xvii. 19 ; God is said πγιάσηι Christ, i. e. to have selected him for his service (cf. αφόριζαν, Gal. i. 15) by having committed to him the oflice of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf. Jer. i. 5 ; Sir. xxxvi. 1 2 [c^ αυτών ijyiaae, και nput αίτον ηγγισιν, of his selection of men for the priesthood] ; xlv. 4 ; xlix. 7. Since only what is pure and without blemish can be devoted and offered to God (Lev. xxii. 20; Deut. xv. 21; xvii. 1), αγιάζω signifies 3. to purify, (άπ6 των ακαθαρσιών is added in Lev. xvi. 19; 2 S. xi. 4) ; and a. to cleanse externatli/ (wpot την rrjs σαρκοί καθαρότητα), to jmrifij leviticalli/ : Heb. ix. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 5. b. to purify bi/ expiation, free from the guilt of sin: 1 Co. vi. 11 ; Eph. v. 26; Heb. x. 10, 14, 29; .xiii. 12; ii. 11 (equiv. to 133, Ex. xxL\. 33, 36); cf. Pjleiderer, Paulinismus, p. 340 sqq., [Eng. trans, ii. 68 sq.]. c. to purify internally by reformation of soul: Jn. xvii. 17, 19 (through knowledge of the truth, cf. Jn. viii. 32) ; 1 Th. V. 23 ; 1 Co. i. 2 ((V Χριστώ 'ΐΓ^σοΟ in the fellowship of Christ, the Holy One); Ro. xv. 16 {iv πνιΰματι άγίω imbued with the Hoi}' Spirit, the di\ine source of holiness) ; Jude 1 (L Τ Tr WH ηγαπημίνοί! [q. v.]) ; Rev. xxii. II. In general. Christians are called ήγιασμίνοι [cf. Deut. xxxiii. 3], as those who, freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been brought near to God by their faith and sanctity. Acts XX. 32; xxvi. 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 άγίάζισθαιϊ^ used in a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, with- drawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and brought under the saving influence of the Holy Spirit dis- playing itself among Christians ; cf. Neander ad loc* ά-γιασ-μύ;, -οΰ, 6, a word used only by bibl. and eccl. writ, (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion. Hal. 1, 21, άγισμόί is the more correct reading), signifying 1. consecration, purification, το άγιαζαν. 2. the effect of consecration : sanctification of heart and life, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to whom we are indebted for sanctification) ; 1 Th. iv. 7 ; Eo. vi. 19, 22; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; αγιασμός πτίΐ'/ιστοΓ sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th. ii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 3 sq. (It is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 3 [Alex.] ; Ezek. xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11] ; Sir. vii. 31, etc.) [On its use in the N. T. cf. ElUc. on 1 Th. iv. 3 ; iii. 13.]• ίγιοϊι -α, -ov, (fr. το ayor religious awe, reverence ; άζω, άζομαι, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents, [Curtius § 118]), rare in prof, auth.; very frequent in the sacred writ. ; in the Sept. for u;np; 1. properly reverend, worthy of veneration ; το όνομα τοΰ β(οΰ, Lk. i. 49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev. iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, etc.), i. q. ίΊ/δοξοΓ. Hence used a. of things which on account of some connection with God possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as places sacred to God which are not to be profaned, Acts vii. 33 ; τόπο? ayiot the temple, Sit. xxiv. 15 (on which pass, see βδίλνγμα, c.) ; Acts vi. 1 3 ; xxi. 28 ; the holy land or Palestine, 2 Mace. i. 29 ; ii. 18 ; τ6 άγιον and τα ΰγια [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec, that part of the temple or tabernacle which is called ' the holy place' (i^^pO, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2 [here Rec" reads άγια'] ; άγια άγιων [W. 246 (231), cf. Ex. xxix. 37; xxx. 10, etc.] the most hallowed portion of the temple, ' the holy of holies,' (Ex. xxvi. 33 [cf. Joseph. ajioi άτ/νιζα: antt. 3, 6, 4]), Heb. ix. 3, in ref. to which the simple ra ayia is also used : Heb. ix. 8, 2S ; x. 19 ; xiii. 11 ; fig. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8, 12 ; x. 19 ; ayia ττόλίί Jerusalem, on account of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5 ; xxvii. 03; Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 2; xxii. 19, (Is. xlviii. 2; Neh. xi. 1, 18 [Compl.], etc.) ; το opor τό ayiop, because Christ's transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18; ή (5fov) άγια δίαβήκη i. 6. which is the more sacred be- cause made by God himself, Lk. i. 72 ; τό αγιον, that worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35 ; the blessing of the gospel, Mt. vii. 6 ; άγιωτάτη jrioTtt, faith (quaecredituri.e.the object of faith) which came from God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude 20 ; in the same sense ayia ίντολή, 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; κΚησί! ayia, because it is the invitation of God and claims us as his, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; aytai γραφαί (τα βιβλία τα ayia, 1 Mace. χϋ. 9), which came from God and contain his words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God employs ; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5 ; angels, 1 Th.'iii. 13 ; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec] ; Rev. xiv. 10 ; Jude 14 ; prophets, Acts iii. 21 ; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (oi) jytoi (toC) fleoO άνθρωποι, 2 Pet. i. 21 [R G L Tr txt.] ; worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their piety, 'Mt. xxvii. 52 ; 1 Pet. iii. 5. 2. set apart for God, to be, as it were, exclusively his; foil, by a gen. or dat. : τω κνρίω, Lk. ii. 23 ; τοϋ βιοΰ (i. q. (kK(kt6s τοϋ ieoC) of Christ, Mk. i. 24 ; Lk. iv. 34, and ace. to the true reading in Jn. vi. 69, cf. x. 36 ; he is called also 6 Syios παίϊ ToO β(οϋ, Acts iv. 30, and simply ό Syios, 1 Jn. ii. 20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the title o! ayiot, because God selected them from the other nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22; 2 Esdr. viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the N. T. transferred to Christians, as those whom God has se- lected e'/c τοΰ κόσμου (Jn. xvii. 14, 16), that under the influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered, through holiness, partakers of salvation in the kingdom of God : 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xLx. 6), cf. vs. 5 ; Acts ix. 13, 32, 41; xxvi. 10; Ro. i. 7; viii. 27; xii. 13; xvi. 15; 1 Co. vi. 1, 2 ; Phil. iv. 21 sq. ; Col. i. 12 ; Heb. vi. 10 ; Jude 3 ; Rev. v. 8, etc. ; [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Saints]. 3. of sacrifices and offerings ; prepared for God with solemn rite, pure, clean, (opp. to ακάθαρτος) : 1 Co. vii. 14, (cf. Eph. V. 3) ; connected with άμωμος, Eph. i. 4 ; V. 27 ; Col. i. 22 ; απαρχή, Ro. xi. 16 ; θυσία, Ro. xii. 1. Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, uprif/hl, holy : 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2 ; xi. 44) ; 1 Co. vii. 34 ; SUatos K. ayws, of John the Baptist, Mk. vi. 20 ; ayios κ. δίκαιοι, of Christ, Acts iii. 14; distinctively of him. Rev. iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn. xvii. 11 ; Sytai άναστροφαί, 2 Pet. iii. 11 : νόμο! and ί'ντολι), i. e. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii. 1 2 ; φίΚημα, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love, 1 Th. V. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii. 12 ; Ro. xvi. 16. On the phrase rb oytov πν^ϋμα and τό τηκΐμα τό ayiov, see πτίίμα, 4 a. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes, in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq. ; [Baudissin, Stud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 3 sqq.; Delitzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq. ; esp.] Cremer, Worterbueh, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans, of 2d ed. p. 34 sqq. ; Oehler in Herzog xix. C 1 8 sqq. ; Zezschwitz, Pro• fangracitiit u. s. w. p. 15 sqq.; Trench § Ixxxviii. : Camp- bell, Dissertations, diss, vi., pt. iv. ; esp. Schmidt ch. 181]. άγιότηβ, -;;τογ, ή, sanctity, in a moral sense ; holiness : 2 Co. i. 12 L Ϊ Tr WH ; Heb. xu. 10. (Besides only in 2 Mace. xv. 2; [cf. W. 25, and on words of thif termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) • άγιωστίνη [on the ω see reff. in άyaθωσϋvη, init.], -ης, ή, a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 ( G4)] ; 1. (God's incomparable) majesty, (joined to μ€γα\οπρ(π(ΐα, Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 6, cf. cxliv. (cxlv.) 5) : πικϋμα άγιωσνι/ης a spirit to which belongs άγιωσΰνη, not equii•. to πνινμα Sytov, but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted with his σαρξ, Ro. i. 4 ; cf. RUckert ad loc, and Zeller in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet cf. Mey. ad loc. ; Gifford (in the Sjicaker's Com.). Most commentators (cf. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness']. 2. moral purity : 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Co. vii. 1.* αγκάλη, -ης, ή, {ayKrj, dyKas [fr. r. ak to bend, curve, cf. Lat. uncus, anrjuhis, Kn^.anyle, etc.; cf. Curtius § 1; Vanicek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm : δίξασθαι fir τάς α'γκόλαί, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also said ayKas λαβ(ΐν, iv ayKoKaii π^ριφίρ^ιν, etc., see ivay καλίζομαι. [(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.)] • άγκιστρον, -ου, τό, (fr. an unused άγκίζω to angle [see the preceding word]), afsh-hook : Mt. xvii. 27.* όίγκυρα, -af, ή, [see άyκaKη], an anchor — [ancient an- chors resembled modern in form : were of iron, pro\'ided with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities often but by no means always without flukes ; see Roschach in Daremberg and Saglio's Diet, des Antiq. (1873) p. 267; Guhl and Koner p. 258] : piirretv to cast (Lat. jacere). Acts xxvii. 29 ; eKTeiveiv, vs. 30 ; ntpiaipelv, vs. 40. Fig- uratively, any stay or safeguard : as hope, Heb. vi. 19; Eur. llec. 78 (80) ; Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).* αγναψος, -ου, ό, ή, (γνάτττω to dress or full cloth, cf. άρραφοί), unmilled, unfulled, undressed : Mt. ix. 16; Mk. ii. 21. [Cf. Moeris.s. V. άκνατΓτοΓ»; Thorn. ^lag. p. 12, 14.]* ayveCa [WH ayvta (see I, t)], -as, ή, (άyveiω), purity, sinlessness of life : 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Nazirite, Num. vi. 2, 21.) [From Soph. O. T. 864 down.] * a^vC^u ; 1 aor. ίίγνισα; pf. ptcp. act. ήγνικώ;'• pass. rjyvισμίvos\ 1 aor. pass, ήγνι'σ^ν [W. 252 (237)] ; (ayi/or); to purify ; 1. ceremonially : ίμαυτόν, Jo. xi. 55 (to cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices) ; the pass, has a reflexive force, to take upon one's self a purifica- tion. Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (■''ΤΠ, Num. vi. 3), and is used of Nazirites or those who had taken upon them- selves a temporary or a life-long vow to abstain from wine and all kinds of intoxicating drink, from every defilement and from shaving the head [cf. BB. DD. s. v. Nazarite]. 2. morally : τΟγ Kapbiat, Jas. iv. 8 ; ras ψνχαΓ, 1 Pet. i. 22; ί'αυτόΐ', 1 Jn. iii. 3. (Soph., Eur., Pint., al.)• α')νί,σμο<; 8 aypavXeoj άγνκτμόΐ, -οΰ, ύ, purification, lustration, [Dion. Hal. 3, 22, i. p. iu'J, 13 ; Plut. de defect, orac. 15] : Acts .\xi. 26 (equiv. to i;j, Num. vi. 5), Naziritic ; see άγνϊζω, 1.* άγνο(ω (ΓΝΟ [cf. yιvώσκωJ), -ω, [impv. άγνυιίτω 1 Co. xiv. 38 Κ G Tr t.\t. Wll mrg.] ; iuipf. ηγνόουν ; 1 aor. ηγρύησα ; [Pass., pres. άγνοοϊιμαι, ptcp. ά-γνουνμίνος ; fr. Iloin. down]; a. to he ignorant, not to know, absol., 1 Tim. i. 13; τινά, τι, Acts xiii. 27 ; xvii. 23 ; Ko. x. 3 ; tv Tivi (as in [Test. Jos. § 14] Fabricii Pseudepigr. ii. p. 717 [but the reading f^yvonw iir'i πάσι τοΰτοΐΓ is now given here ; see Test. xii. Patr. ad fid. cod. Cant, etc., ed. isinker, Cambr. 1869]), 2 Pet. ii. 12, unless one prefer to resoh e the expression thus : eV rouVoir, a άγνοοΟσι βλασ- φημοίντα, W. 629 (584), [cf. Β. 2«7 (246)] ; foil, by ΐ,τί, Ko. ii. 4 ; vi. 3 ; vii. I ; 1 Co. xiv. 38 (where the antece- dent clause on κτλ. is to be supplied again) ; oi θίλω ίμίΐ! aymdv, a phrase often used by Paul, [an emphatic] scitote: foil, by an ace. of the obj., Ro. .\i. 25; ύπιμ tivos, oTt, 2 Co. i. 8 ; nepi twos, 1 Co. xii. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 3 ; foil, by ότι, Uo. i. 13; 1 Co. x. 1; in the pass, άγνούται 'he is not known' i. e. ace. to the conte.\t 'he is disregarded,' 1 Co. xiv. 38 L Τ Tr mrg. WH txt. ; άγνοοϋμ(νοι (opp. to ϊπιγινωσκόμ(νοι) men unknown, obscure, 2 Co. vi. 9; άγΐΌονμ^νός τινι unknown to one, Gal. i. 22 ; ονκ ayvouv to know very well, τι, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10). b. not to understand : τί, Mk. L\. 32 ; Lk. ix. 45. c. to err, sin throufjh mistake, spoken mildly of those who are not high-handed or wilful transgressors (Sir. v. 15; 2 Mace, xi. 31) : Ileb. v. 2, on which see Dehtzsch.* άγνόημα, -ror, τό, a sin, (strictly, that committed through ignorance or thoughtlessness [A. V. error~\) : Heb. Lx. 7 (1 Mace. xiii. 39; Tob. iii. 3; Sir. x.xiii. 2) ; cf. άγΐΌί'ω, c. [and Trench § Ixvi.].* άγνοια, -af, ή, [fr. Aeschyl. down], want of knowledge, ignorance, esp. of divilie things; Acts xvii. 30; 1 Pet. i. 14 ; such as is inexcusable, Eph. iv. 18 (Sap. xiv. 22); of moral blindness. Acts iii. 17. [Cf. ayj/of'm.]• ayvos, -ij, -όν, {άζομαι, see ayiof) ; 1. exciting rever• ence, venerable, sacred : Trip και ή σποδοί, 2 Mace. xiii. 8; Eur. El. 812. 2. pure (Eur. Or. 1604 ayms yap ci/ii \ΰρας, αλλ* ου τάς φρξνας, Hipp. 316 sq. ayvus . . . )^€'ipas αίματος φ^ρας, X^ip^s pi^ ayvai^ Φρ^'^ ^ ^X^t μίασμα) ; a. pure J'ruin carnality, chaste, modest : Tit. ii. ό ; παρθΐνος an unsullied virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2 (4 Mace, xviii. 7). b. pure from every fault, immaculate : 2 Co. vii. 1 1 ; Phil. iv. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 2; 1 Jn. iu. 3 (of God [yet cf. eKUvos 1 b.]) ; Jas. iii. 1 7. (From Horn, down.) [Cf. re£f. s. v. ayior, fin. ; Westc. on 1 Jn. iii. 3.] * άγνότηϊ, -ψοί, η, [ayvor], purity, uprightness of life : 2 Co. vi. 6 ; in 2 Co. xi. 3 some critical authorities add κα\ της ayvOTqros after άπΧότητος (so L Tr txt., but Tr mrg. WH br.), others read της αγνότητας καϊ before άπ\ότ. Found once in prof, auth., see Boeckh, Corp. Inscrr. i.p.583 no. 1133 1. 15: ^ικαιοαννης evexev και αγνό- τητας* άγνώϊ, adv., purely, with sincerity: Phil. i. 16 (17).* ά-γνωσ-ία, -at, η, (γνώσΐϊ), want of knowledge, igno- rance : 1 Pet. ii. 15 ; 1 Co. xv. 34, (Sap. xiii. 1).* όί-γνωστοϊ, -ov, [fr. Horn, down], unknown : Acts xvii. 23 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Altar].* αγορά, -ας, ή, (αγίίρω, pf. ηγαρα, to collect), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. any collection of men, congregation, as- sembly. 2. place where assemblies are held; in the N. T. the forum or public place, — where trials are held, Acts xvi. 19; and the citizens resort. Acts xvii. 17; and commodities are exposed for sale, Mk. vii. 4 (άπ αγοράς sc. ίΚθόντ^ς on returning from the market if they hare not icashed themselves they eat not ; AV. § 66, 2 d. note) ; accordingly, the most frequented part of a city or vil- lage: Mt. xi. 16, (Lk. vii. 32) ; Mk. vi. 56 ; Mt. xx. 3; xxiii. 7 ; Mk. xii. 38 ; [Lk. xi. 43] ; xx. 46. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Market.] • αγοράζω ; [impf. ήγόραζον ; fut. αγοράσω] ; 1 aor. ηγό- ρασα\ Pass., pf, ptcj). ηγορασμίνος; 1 ior. ηγοράσθην*, {αγορά); 1. to frcfjuent the markcl-pkice. 2. to buy (properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.] ; used a. hterally: absol., Mt. x.xi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45 [not G Τ Tr WH] ; τι, Mt. xUi. 44, 46 ; xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8 ; vi. 5 ; with παρά and gen. of the pers. fr. whom. Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., Polyb.] ; ck and gen. of price, Mt. .xxvii. 7 ; simple gen. of price, Mk. vi. 37. b. figuratively: Christ is said to have purchased his disciples i. e. made them, as it were, his private property, 1 Co. vi. 20 [this is commonly understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9, 10]; 1 Co. vii. 23 (with gen. of price added ; see τιμή, 1) ; 2 Pet. ii. 1. He is also said to have bought them for God eV τώ αίματι ανταν, by shedding his blood. Rev. v. 9 ; they, too, are spoken of as purchased άπο της γης, Rev. xiv. 3, and άπο των ανθρώπων, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked) men. But αγοράζω does not mean redeem (ϊξαγοράζω), — as is commonly said. [Comp. : ΐξ-αγοράζω^ αγοραίο; (rarely -ala), -a'lov, (αγορά), rtlating to the market-place ; 1. fretjuenling the market-place, (either transacting business, as the «:άπ>;λοι, or) sauntering idly, (Lat. subrostranus, subbasilicanus. Germ. Pflastertreter, our loafer) : Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 c. αγοραίοι και ψαΟλοι, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2. of affairs usually transacted in the market-place : άγορα'ιοι (sc. ήμίραι [W. 590 (549)] or σΰχοδοι [Mey. et al.]) άγονται, judicial days or assemblies, [A. Y. mrg. court-days'], Acts xix. 38 (ras αγοραίου? ποιύσθαι, Strabo 13, p. 932), but many think we ought to read αγοραίοι here, so G L cf. W. 53 (52); but see [Alf. and Tdf. ad loc; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 26 ;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5 ; Gottling p. 297 ; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].* άγρα, -ar, ij. [άγω] ; 1. a catching, hunting: Lk. v. 4. 2. the tiling caught: ij άγρα των ΐ,γίύωΐ' 'the catch or haul of fish ' i. e. the fishes taken [A. V. draught], Lk. v. 9.* άγράμματο5, -OK, [γράμμα], illiterate, without learning: Acts iv. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish schools ; cf. Jn. vii. 15 γράμματα μη μ(μαθηκώς).* άγρ-αυλί'ω, -ώ ; to be an άγραυλας (αγρός, αίλή), i. e, to live in the f elds, be under the open sky, even by night; Lk. ii. 8, (Strabo p. 301 a. ; Plut. Num. 4).• uypeva 9 ay CO aypda : 1 aor. ijypfvca ; (άγρα) ; In catch (properly, wild animals, fishes) : fig., Jlk. xii. 13 Ίνα αΐτον ά-γρήσωσι λόγω in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate re- mark eUcited from him in conversation, cf. Lk. xx. 20. (In Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of love, captivate; cf. πα^ίδηίω, Mt. xxii. 15; σαγηνινω, Lcian. Tim. 25.) * άγρι-ίλαιοϊ, -ov, (Sypios and ?λαιθΓ or tXaia, like άγριάμ- ττίλοί) ; 1. ofov belonging to the oleaster, or wild olive, (σκυτάλην άγριίλαιον, Anthol. 9, 237, 4; [cf. Lvb. Para- lip, p. 376]); spoken of a scion, Ro. xi. 17. 2. As subst. ή aypteXaios the oleaster, the wild olive, (opp. to καλλι^λαιοΓ [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 6]), also called by the Greeks κότινοί, Ro. xi. 24 ; cf. Fritzscheon Rom. vol. ii. 495 sqq. [See B. D. s. v. Olive , and Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377, • ' the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster or Oil-tree '.]* άγριοϊ, -a, -ou, (dypos), [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. living or growing in the fields or the woods, used of animals in a state of nature, and of plants which grow without cidture : μίλι Sypiov wild honey, either that which is deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the bare ground (1 S. xiv. 25 [cf. vs. 26]), etc., or more cor- rectly that which distQs from certain trees, and is gath- ered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sic. 19, 94 fin. speaking of the Nabathaean Arabians says φϋίται παρ' αντοίς μελξ. πολύ το καΚονμξνον ayptov* ω χρώνταί ποτώ μ(& Zbaros; cf. Suid. and esp. Suicer s. v. άκρίς) : Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6. 2. fierce, untamed: κύματα Θα\άσ<τη5, Jude 13 (Sap. xiv. 1).* Άγρίτηταϊ, -α (respecting this gen. see W. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59) ; B. 20 (18)), 0, see Ήρώδι?ί, (3 and) 4. άγρύς, -οϊι, δ, [fr. άγω ; prop, a drove or driving-place, then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager. Germ. Aci-er, Eng. acre; Fick, Pt. i. p. 8] ; a. α fi'eld, the country : jNIt. vi. 28 : xxiv. 18, Lk.xv. 15 ; [Mk. xi. 8 TTr WII], etc. b. i. q. χωρίον, apiece of land, bit of tillage : Acts iv. 37 ; ^Ik. X. 29 ; Mt. xiii. 24, 27, etc. c. οι aypoi the farms, country-seats, neighboring hamlets : Mk. v. 14 (opp. to jToXif) ; vi. 36 ; Lk. ix. 12. [(From Horn, on.)] άΎρυπνεω, -ω; (aypvnvos equiv. to αϋπΐΌ?) ; to be sleep- less, keep awake, watch, (i. q. γρηγορίω [see below]) ; £fr. Theognis down] ; trop. to be circumspect, attentive, ready : Mk. .xiii. 33 ; Lk. xxi. 36 ; eis τι, to be intent upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18 ; imlp twos, to exercise con- stant vigilance over something (an image drawn from shepherds), Heb. xiii. 17. [Syx. aypvnve'iv, γρηγο- pflv, νήφ€ΐν: " aypvnvf'iv may bo taken to express sim- j)ly . . . absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of it when due to nature, and thence a w..keful frame of mind as opposed to listlessness ; while γρτ,γοριΐν (the offspring of typ^yopa) represents a waking state as the effect of some arousing effort . . . i. e. a more stir- ring image than the former. The group of synonyms is completed by νηφ(ΐν, Avhich signifies .. state untouched by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence, one that is guarded against advances of drowsiness or bewilderment. Thus it becomes a term for warines» (cf. vacpe κα'ι μϊμνασ άπιστιϊν) against spiritual dangers and beguilements, 1 Pet. v. 8, etc." Green, Crit. Notes on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 33 sq.).]* αγρυπνία, -at, ή, sleeplessness, watching : 2 Co. vi. 5 ; xi. 27. [From Ildt. down.]• άγω ; impf. ηγον ; fut. όξω ; 2 aor. ήγαγον, inf. ayaye'iv, (more rarely 1 aor. ηξα, in ί'πάγω 2 Pet. ii. 5) ; Pass., pres. άγομαι; impf. ηγύμην; 1 aor. ήχθηρ ; 1 fut. άχθή- σομαι ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to drive, lead. 1. properly [A. V. ordinarily, to bring~\ ; a. to lead by laying hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of desti- nation: of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7 ; Lk. xix. 35 ; Mk. xi. 7 (T Tr WH φ(ρονσιν) ; [Lk. xix. 30] ; τινά foil, by els with ace. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 c] ; x. 34 ; (Jjyayov κ- flaTjyayov fls, Lk. xxii. 54) ; Jn. ΧΛ'ϋϊ. 28 ; Acts vi. 12; ix. 2; xvii. 5 [R G] ; xxi. 34 ; xxii. 5, 24 Rec. ; .xxiii. 10, 31 ; tVi with ace., Acts xvii. 19; cws, Lk. iv. 29; npos τίνα, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii. 40 ; Acts Lx. 27 ; Jn. viii. 3 [Rec.]. b. to lead by accom- panying to (into) any place: eij, Acts xi. 26 (25) ; ΐωί. Acts χΛ-ϋ. 15 ; wpos τίνα, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; ix. 13 ; Acts xxiii. 18; foil, by dat. of pers. to whom. Acts xxi. 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at length, [cf. B. 284 (244)], (1 Mace. vii. 2 aydv αυτού: αΙτώ). C. to lead with one^s self, attach to one's self as an attendant : τινά. 2 Tira. iv. 11 ; 1 Th. iv. 14. (.loscph. antt. 10, 9. 6 anrjpfv fit την Αίγυπτοί" ίϊγωΐ' και 'If peplav). Some refer Acts .xxi. 10 to this head, resolving it ayorrer Ννάσωνα παρ' ω ξfvίσβωμfv, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as above. d. to conduct, bring: τινά, [Lk. xix. 27]; Jn. vii. 45; [xLx. 4, 13]; Acts v. 21, 26, [27]; xix. 37; x.x. 12; XXV. 6, 23; πώλοι/, Mk. xi. 2 (where Τ Tr λΥΙΙ φ(ρ(τ() ; [Lk. .xi.x. 30, see a. above] ; τιά tim or τί rii/t, Mt. xxi. 2 ; Acts xiii. 23 G L Τ Tr WH. e. to lead o'cay. to a court of justice, magistrate, etc. : simply, Mk. xiii. 11 ; [Acts xxv. 17] ; eVi with ace, Mt. x. 18; Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH arraynpfvovs) ; [Lk. xxiii. 1]; Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic); [προς w-ith ace. Jn. xviii. 13 L Τ Tr WII] ; to punishment : simply (2 Jlacc. vi. 29; vii. 18, etc.), Jn. xLx. 16 Grsb. (R και απήγαγαν, ivhich L Τ Tr AVH have expunged) ; with telic inf., Lk. xxiii. 32; [foil, by Ίνα. Mk. xv. 20 Lchm.] ; fVi σφαγην, Acts viii. 32, (en'i βανάτω, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 3 ; an. 1, 6, 10). 2. tropically ; a. to lead, guide, direct: Jn. x. 16; els μίτάΐΌΐαν. Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead through, conduct, to something, become the author of good or of evil to some one : eir 8όξαν, Heb. ii. 10. (fls [al. fVi] καλοκάγαθίαν, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14 ; fls 8ov\fiav, Dem. p. 213, 28). c. to more, impel, of forces and influences affecting the mind : Lk. iv. 1 (\vhere read e» Tji (ρήμω [with L t.\t. Τ Tr AVH]) ; πvfϋμaτι θίον άγ(σθαι, Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; ΐπιθνμίαιί, 2 Tim. iii. 6; sim- ply, urged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2 — unless in»- pelled by Satan's influence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20 ; Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (328) sq.]. 3. to pass a day, keep or celebrate a feast, etc : τρίτην ήμίραν Syei sc. S Ισραήλ, Lk. x.xiv. 21 [others (see Meyer) supply airos ayωyη 10 αδελφός or ό Ίησον!•, still others take όγ« as impers., one passen, ^ uli;. terliii (lie.i est ; fee B. 134 (118)] ; yfvfalwv ά-γομί- ■κΰν, Mt. xiv. 6 R G ; αγοραίοι (q. v. 2), Acts xix. 38 ; often in the O. T. Apocr. (cf. IVahl, Clavis Apocr. s. v. άγω, 3), in ridt. and Attic writ. 4. intrans. to go, depart, (W. § 38, 1, p. 251 (236) ; [B. 144 (126)]) : Άγαμων let us go, Mt. xxvi. 46 ; Mk. xiv. 42 ; Jn. xiv. 31 ; irpos riva, Jn. xi. 15; cir with aec. of i)lace, Mk. i. 38; Jn. xi. 7, (Epict. diss. 3, 22, 55 αγαψβν fVi tuv άνθυπατον) ; [foil. Ijy ifo, Jn. xi. 16. Co.Ml". : av-. f'n-av-, tm-, σνν-αη-, hi-, iiV-, παρ-Είσ-, f ^-, eV-. κατ-, μ(Ί-, παρ-, irtpi-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, (πι-αυν-, νπ-ά-γω. Syn. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] * αγωγή, -ης, ή. (fr. άγω, like βδωδή fi'. ?δω) ; 1. prop- erly, η leading. 2. liguratively, a. trans, a cunduct- iny, training, education, discipline. b. intrans. the life led, wag or course of life (a use which arose from the fuller expression άγωγη τον βίου, in Polyb. 4, 74, 1. 4 ; cf. Germ. Lehensftilirung) : 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. λ", conduct'], (Estli. ii. 20 ; 2 Mace. iv. 16 ; ή e'• Χριστώ αγώγι). Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; άγνι) αγωγή, ibid. 48, I). Often in prof. auth. in all these senses.* άγων, -ωνοί, ό. (άγω) ; 1. a place nfass-emhli/ (ITnm. II. 7, 298 ; 18, 376) ; spec, the place in which the Greeks assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pytliian, the OljTnpian) ; hence 2. α contest, of atliletes, run- ners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase (used by the Greeks, see τρίχω, b.) τρίχιιν τον αγώνα, Ileb. χϋ. 1, that is to say 'Amid all hindrances let us exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of perfection set before the followers of Christ ' ; any struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the gospel: 1 Th. ii. 2 ; Phil. i. SO ; 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 7. b. intense solicitude, anxiety : irepi τίνος. Col. ii. 1 [cf. Eur. Ph. 1350; Polyb. 4, 56,4]. On the ethical use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf. Grimm on Sap. iv. 1 ; [Howson, ]Meta]ihors of St. Paul, Essay iv. ; Congb. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St. PauC ch. XX. ; Mc. and S. iii. 733' sq. ; BB.DD. s. v. Games].• άγων(α, -as, ή; 1. i. q. άγων, which see. 2. It is often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 ην ό ■ φίλιππα iv φόβω και π6\\η αγωνία) down, of severe mental struggles and emotions, agony, anguish : Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; (2 Mace. iii. 14, 16 ; XV. 19 ; .Joseph, antt. 11, 8, 4 ό άρχκριίς ην tV αγωνία κα! 8ί>ι)• [Cf. Field, Otium Xorv. iii. on Lk. I.e.]' αγωνίζομαι; impf. ^γο)ΐΊ^ι!μτ;>'; pi. ήγώνισμαι; a depon. mid. verb [cf. W\ 260 (244)] ; (άγων) ; 1. to enter a contest ; contend in the gymnastic games : 1 Co. ix. 25. 2. univ. to contend with adversaries, fghl : foil, by Ίνα μή, Jn. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, with difficulties and dangers antagonistic to the gospel: Col. i. 29 ; 1 Tim. iv. 10 (L Τ Tr txt. WH txt. ; for Rec. ονιι8ιζόμ(θα) ; αγωνίζομαι αγώνα (often used by the Greeks also, es]). the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7. 4. to endeavor with strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain something ; foil, by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24 ; vntp T-ivot iv rait προσιυχαίς. 'να. Col. iv. 12. [CoMP. : an-, <π-, κατ-, σνν-αγωνίζομαι.] * Ά8άμι, indecl. prop, name (but in Joseph. Άδα /iot, -ου), DIK (i. e. ace. to Philo, de leg. allcg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62 ed. Mang., γή'ίνοί ; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 γηγινής ; ace. to Josepli. antt. 1, 1, 2 πυρρός, with which Gcscnius agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first man and the jiarent of the whole human race : Lk. iii. 38 ; Ro. V. 14 ; 1 Co. XV. 22, 45 ; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq. ; Jude 14. In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the former Adam (;Τώ'Χ''Π DIN), the first man, the author of 'all our Avoe,' and the latter Adam (;ΐ"'ΠΙ<Π D"1X), the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ is called ό (σχατος Ά&άμ (see ίσχατος, 1) and contrasted with ό πρώτος άνθρωπος', Ro. V. 14 ό μίΚΚων sc. Άδά /i. [2. one of the ancestors of Jesus : Lk. iii. 33 AVH nirg. (cf. Άδ/ΐίί.Ί').]• άεάπανοΐ, -ov. (δαπάνη), without expense, rerjuiring no outlog : 1 Co. i.\. 18 (Jva ahanavov Βτισω το (ναγγίΧιον ' that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous').* 'A88C or Άδδ€ί Τ Tr WII [see WII. App. p. 155, and s. v.et,i],o, the indecl. i)rop. name of one of the ances- tors of Christ : Lk. iii. 28.* ά8€λψή, -ης, ή, (see άδΛφόί), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sis- ter; 1. Ά full, own sister (i.e. by birth) : ΛΙΐ. xix. 29; Lk. X. 39 sq. ; Jn. xi. 1, 3, 5; xix. 25; Ro. xvi. 15, etc. ; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in Mt. xiii. 56; Mk. vi. 3, see άδίλφόί, 1. 2. one connected lig the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 15; i.x. 5; Philem. 2 LTTr Wll ; Jas. ii. 15 ; with a subj. gen., a Christian woman especiall)• dear to one, Ko. xvi. 1. ά8€λψός, -ov, 6, (fr. α copulative and δ(\φνς, from the same tcomh ; cf. άγάστωρ), [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. α brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only of the same father or the same mother) : Mt. i. 2 ; iv. 1 8, and often. That '■the brethren of Jesus,' Mt. xii. 4G, 47 [but WII only in mrg.] ; xiii. 55 sq. ; Mk. vi. 3 (in the last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 sq. ; Jn. ii. 12; vii. 3; Acts i. 14; Gal. i. 19; 1 Co. ix. 5, are neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary (which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [ef. Thilo, Cod. Ajiocr. N. T. i. 362 sq.])', nor cousins, the chOdren of Alphaeus or Cleophas [i. e. Clopas] and Jlary a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Au- gustine [cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal., diss, ii.]), accord- ing to that use of language by which άδ^λφόί like the Hebr. ΠΝ denotes any blood-relation or kinsman (Gen. xiv. 16;'l S. XX. 29; 2 K. x. 13; 1 Chr. .xxiii. 22, etc.), but own brothers, born after Jesus, is clear prin- cipally from Mt. i. 25 [only in R G] ; Lk. ii. 7 — ivhcre, had INIary borne no other children after Jesus, instead of vtov πρωτότοκον, the expression viov μονογ(νη would have been used, as well as from Acts i. 14, cf. Jn. vii. 5, where the Lord's brethren are distinguished from the apostles. See further on this point under ΊάκωβοΓ, 3. [Cf. B. D. s. V. Brother ; A ndrews. Life of our Lord, pp. 104-116; Bib. Sacr. for 1864, pp. 855-869; for 1869 αδελφότης 11 uBi pp. 745-758; Laurent, Ν. Τ. Studien pp. 153-193; Mc- Clellan, note on Mt. xiii. 55.] 2. according to a Hebr. use of ΠΚ (Ex. ii. 11 ; iv. 18, etc.), hardly to be met with in prof, auth., having the same national ances- tor, helongivfj to the same penpie, countryman ; so the Jews (as the σπέρμα Άβμαάμ. υ'ιοϊ Ισραήλ, cf. Acts xiii. 26; [in Deut. xv. 3 opp. to ό άΧλότριοί, cf. xvii. 15; XV. 12; Philo de septen. § 9 init.]) are called ά8(λφοί: Mt. V. 47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. xviii. 15); vii. 23; xxii. 5 ; xxviii. 15, 21 ; Ro. ix. 3 ; in address, Acts ii. 29 ; iii. 1 7 ; xxiii. 1 ; Heb. vii. 5. 3. just as in Lev. xix. 1 7 the word nS is used interchangeably with ;η (but, as vss. 16, 18 show, in speaking of Israelites), so in the sayings of Christ, Mt. v. 22, 24 ; vii. 3 sqij., άθίλφόί is used for ό πλησίον to denote (as appears from Lk. x. 29 sqq.) any fellow-man, — as having one and the same father with others, viz. God (Heb. ii. 11), and as de- scended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26) ; cf. Epict. diss. 1, 13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to another by the bond of affection ; so most frequently of Christians, constituting as it were but a single famil}' : Mt. xxiii. 8 ; Jn. xxi. 23 ; Acts vi. 3 [Lchm. om.] ; ix. 30; xi. 1; Gal. i. 2 ; 1 Co. v. 11 ; Phil. i. 14, etc.; in courteous address, Ro. i. 13 ; vii. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7 Rec, and often elsewhere ; yet in the phraseology of John it has reference to the new life unto which men are begotten again by the efficiency of a common father, even God: 1 Jn. ii. 9 sqq.; iii. 10, 14, etc., cf. v. 1. 5. «ii associate in employment or ojfice : 1 Co. i. 1 ; 2Co.i.l;ii.l3(12); Eph.vi.21; Col.i. 1. 6. brethren of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood ; see 1 above, b. all men : Mt. xxv. 40 [Lchm. br.] ; Heb. ii. 11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to d.] c. apostles: Mt. xxviii. 10: Jn. xx. 17. d. Christians, as those who are destined to be exalted to the same heavenly δόξα (q. v. ΠΙ. 4 b.) which he enjoys: Ro. viii. 29. άδ€λφότη5, -ητος, ή, brotherhood ; the abstract for the concrete, a band of brothers i. e. of Christians, Chris- tian brethren : 1 Pet. ii. 17 ; v. 9. (1 Mace. xii. 10, 17, the connection of allied nations ; 4 Mace. ix. 23 ; x. 3, the connection of brothers; Dio Chrys. ii. 137 [ed. Reiske] ; often in eccl. writ.) * α-8ηλα$) -ov, (SrjXos), not manifest : Lk. xi. 44 ; indis- tinct, uncertain, obscure : φωνή, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk. auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. δήλοΓ,βη. ; Schmidt ch. 130.]* ahr\Kon\i, -ητος, ή, uncertainty : 1 Tim. vi. 17 πλούτου άδηλότητι equiv. to πλοΰτω άδήλω, cf. W. § 34, 3 a. [Pulyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]* αδήλως, adv., uncertainly : 1 Co. ix. 26 οίτω τρίχω, τηΐ εξουσία: τοΰ aepos in Eph. ii. 2 signifies ' the ruler of the powers (spirits, see ίξονσία 4 c. ββ.) in the air," i. e. the devil, the prince of the de- mons that according to Jewish opinion fiU the realm of air (cf. Mey. ad loc. ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air ; Stuart in Bib. Sacr. for 1843, p. 139 sq.]). Sometimes indeed, άηρ denotes a hazy, obscure atmosphere (Hom. Π. 17, 644; 3,381; 5, 356, etc. ; Polyb. 18, 3, 7), but is nowhere quite equiv. to σκότοί, — the sense which many injudi- ciously assign it in Eph. I. c. άίρα 8epciv (cf. verberat ictibus auras, Verg. Aen. 5, 377, of pugilists who miss their aim) i. e. to contend in vain, 1 Co. ix. 26 ; «r iepa λαλΰν (verba ventis profundere, Lucr. 4, 929 (932)) ' to speak into the air ' i. e. without effect, used of those who speak what is not understood by the hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 9.* άθαναο-ία, -as. 17. (αθάνατος), immortality : 1 Co. xv. 53 sq. ; 1 Tim. vi. 16 where God is described as ό μόνος ΐχων άθανασίαν. because he possesses it essentially — ' ίκ της οίκΐίας οίσίας, ονκ (κ θίΚηματος αΚ\ον, καθαπΐρ οί λοιποί πάντες αθάνατοι ' Justin, quaest. et resp. ad orthod. 61 p. 84 ed. Otto. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.) * α-θίμιτοϊ, -Dv, a later form for the ancient and prefer- able άθίμίστος, (θεμιτός, θιμίστός, θ(μίζω. θίμις law, right), contrary to late and justice, prohibited by laiv, illicit, criminal : 1 Pet. iv. 3 [here A. V. abominable'] ; άθ^μιτόν (στί τινι with inf., Acts x. 28.* OL-Oeos, -OK, (θΐός). [fr. Pind. down], u-ithout God, knotc- inq and worshipping no God, in which sense Ael. v. h. 2, 31 declares ότι μηδ(\ς των βαρβάρων 3θ(ος; in classic auth. feneraUv slighting the gods, impious, repudiating the gods recognized by the state, in which sense certain Greek philosophers, the Jews (Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 14, 4), and subsequently Christians were called oieoi by the heathen (Justin, apol. 1, 13, etc.). In Eph. ii. 12 of one who neither knows nor worsliips the true God; so of the heathen (cf. 1 Th. iv. 5 ; Gal. iv. 8) ; Clem. Alex, protr. ii. 23 p. 19 Pott. άθ(ονς . . . o2 τον όντως όντα θ(6ν ηγνηήκασι, Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 25 αιγυπτιακή πθ(ότης, Hos. iv. 15 Symm. o'/cos άθιιας a house in which idols are worshipped, Ignat. ad Trail. 10 άθίοι τουτίστιν άπιστοι (of the Docetae) ; [al. understand Eph. 1. c. passively deserted of God, Vulg. sine Deo ; on the various mean- ings of the word see Mey. (or EUic.)].* ά-θ«τμοΐ, -ox, (θfσμός), lawless, [A. V. wicked] ; of one who breaks through the restraints of law and gratifies liis lusts: 2 Pet. ii. 7; iii. 17. [Sept., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.]* άθ(Τ€'ω, -<ΰ ; fut. άθιτήσω ; 1 aor. ηθίτησα : a word met with first (yet very often) in Sept. and Polyb. ; a. properly, to render αθιτον ; do away with θιτόν τι i. e. something laid doicn, prescribed, established : διαθηκην, Gal. άθίτησι<; 14 Λίβιυψ iii. 15, (1 Mace. xi. 30 ; 2 Mace. xiii. 25, etc.) ; ace. to tlie context, ' to act towards anything as though it ivere annulled ' ; hence to deprive a law of force hy opinions or acts opposed to it, to trantigrc^s it, Mk. vii. 9 ; Ileb. X. 28, (Ezek. .xxii. 26) ; η'ιστιν, to break one's promise or engagement, 1 Tim. v. 12; (Tolyb. 8, 2, 5; 11, 2!), 3, al.; Diod. excerpt, [i. e. de virt. et vit.] p. 5()2, 07). Ilence b. to thwart llie e/ficnr;/ υ/ (iiiijthing, iiulli/i/, muke void, fruKlrale : την βουΚην τοί θ(οϋ, Lk. vii. 30 (they ren(U'red inelficaciuus tlie saving purpose of God) ; την avvfaiv to render prudent plans of no effect, 1 Co. i. 19 (Is. xxix. 14 [where κρύψω, yet cf. Bos's note]). c. to reject, refuse, slight : την χάριν τοΟ Beoi, Gal. ii. 21 Pal. refer this to b.] ; of persons : Alk. vi. 26 (by break- 'iug the promise given her); Lk. x. 16; Jn. .xii. 48; 1 Th. iv. 8 ; Jude 8 (for wliicli καταφρονιΐν is u.sed in the parallel pass. 2 Pet. ii. 10). [For exx. of the use of tliis woril see Soph. Lex. s. v.]* άθίτηΐΓκ, -(ως, ή, {άθίτίω, q. v. ; like νονθίτησίί fr. νονθΐτίΐν), abolition : Ileb. vii. 18 ; ix. 26 ; (found occa- sionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9 ; Diog. Laert. 3, 39, CC ; in the grammarians rejection \ more frequently in eccl. writ.).* •Αθήναι, -£>v, al, (on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166)), .■l//itii.v, the most celebrated city of Greece: Acts xvii. 15 sq. ; xviii. 1 ; 1 Th. iii. 1.* 'Αθηναίο;, -aia, -a'tov, Athenian: Acts xvii. 21 sip* άίλίω, -ώ ; [1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. άθλήση'Ι ; (άθλος a contest) ; to engage in a contest, contend in pulAic games (e. g. Olympian, Pythian, Isthmian), with the poniard [?], gauntlet, quoit, in wrestling, running, or any other way : 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; (often in classic auth. who also use the form άθλ(ύω). [Comp. : συν-αθλίω.] ' άθλησίΒ, -(ως, ή, contest, conihat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down) ; fi^. άί^λι^σΐΓ παθημάτων a struggle with sufferings, trials, Ileb X. 32; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4 ; Clem. mart. 2.5].* όθροΟζω : pf. pass. ptcp. ηθροισμίνος ; (f r. αθρόος i. q. θρόος [a noisy crowd, noise], with η copulative [see A, a, 2]) ; to collect together, assemble; pass, to be asse7nbled, to convene : Lk. xxiv. 33 L Τ Tr WII. ([.Soph.,] Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al. ; O. T. Apocr. ; sometimes in Sept. for i'3p.) [CoMP. : «π-, συν-αθροίζω.Ί ' άθυμιω, -ώ ; common among the (ireeks fr. [Aeschyl.,] TIhic. down; to be άθυμος (θυμός spirit, courage), to be disheartened, dispirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21. (SLqit. 1 S. i. 6 sq., etc. ; Judith vii. 22 ; 1 Mace. iv. 27.)• άθωο$ [R G Tr], more correctly αθώος (L WH and Τ [but not in his Sept. There is want of agreement among both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars ; cf. Steph. Thes. i. col. 875 c. ; Lob. Path. Element, i. 440 sq. (cf. ii. 377) ; see I, «]), -ov, (θωή [i. e. θα:'ίη, cf. Etym. Mag. p. 26, 24] punishment), [fr. Plat, down], unpunished, innocent: αΤμα άθώον, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mrg. WH txt. δίκαιον'], (Deut. xxvii. 25 ; 1 S. xix. 5, etc. ; 1 Mace. i. 37; 2 Mace. i. 8) ; από τίνος, after the Hebr. Ρ "i?? ([Num. xxxii. 22 ; cf. Gen. xxiv. 41 ; 2 S. iii. 28 ; W. 197 (185); B. 158 (138)]), ' innocent (and therefore far) from,' innocent of, Matt, xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the mur- der of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; άπο της αμαρτίας, Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [cf. Num. v. 31]. The Greeks say άθώός τίνος [both in the sense of free from and unpunished for].' αϊγιιοϊ [WH -yior ; see their App. p. 154, and I, i], -fia, -fiov, (,αίξ, gen. ^ur goat, male or female), of it goat, (cf. καμηλίΐυς, ιππίίος, Cfios, προβάτίίος, etc.) : Heb. xi. 37. [From Horn, down.]* al-yiaXds, -οΰ, ό, the shore of the sea, beach, [fr. Hom. down] : Mt. xiii. 2, 48 ; Jn. xxi. 4 ; Acts xxi. 5 ; xxvii. 39, 40. (Many derive the word from άγννμι and aXr, as though equiv. to ακτή, the place where the sea breaks ; others fr. aιγfς billows and αΚς [Curtius § 140 ; Vanicek p. 83] ; others fr. αΐσσω and αλί [Schcnkl, L. and S., s. v.], the [ilace where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.)* ΑΙγύτΓτιοϊ, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian : Acts vii. 22, 24, 28 ; xxi. 38 ; Ileb. xi. 29.* ΑϊγυίΓΓΟϊ, -ου, ή, [always without the art., B. 87 (70) ; W. § 18, 5 a.], the ])roper name of a well-known coun- try, Egupt : Mt. ii. 13 sq. ; Acts ii. 10 ; Heb. iii. 16, etc. ; more fully yrj Αΐγνπτος, Acts vii. 36 [not L WH Tr txt.], 40 ; xiii. 17 ; Heb. viii. 9 ; Jude 5, (Ex. v. 12 ; vi. 26, etc. ; 1 Mace. i. 19 ; Bar. i. 19 sq., etc.) ; ή γη Αίγυπτος, Acts vii. 11 ; iv Αΐγνπτου sc. yfj, Heb. xi. 26 Lclim., but cf. Bleek ad loc. ; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)]. In Rev. xi. 8 Ai'y. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. e. for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and his followers, and so to be Ukencd to the Egyptians in their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeav- ors to crush his peoi)le. dtSios, -ov, (for aciSios fr. oft), eternal, everlasting : (.Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20 ; Jude 6. (Hom. hj-mn. 29, 3 ; lies. scut. 310, and fr. Thuc. down in prose; [freq. in Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (ζωΐ) oiStos•), § 31 ; de oj)if. mund. § 2, § 61 ; de cherub. § 1, § 2, § 3 ; de post. Cain. § 11 fin. Syx. sec αΐώνιοί].) * alSus, (-όος) -οΰς. ή ; f r. Ilom. down ; a sense of shame, modi'stg : 1 Tim. ii. 9 ; reverence, Ileb. .xii. 28 (XoTpeueiv θ(ώ μ(τά αϊδοΟί και (ΐ^αβ(ίας, but L Τ Tr WH (ΰλαβιίας κα'ι d(ovs). [Sys. αι8ως, αισχύνη : Ammonius distin- guishes the words as follows, αΙδως και αισχύνη διαφέρει, ΟΤΙ ή μίν αιδώς ΐστιν (ντροπή προς ΐκαστον, ως σ^βομίνως τις (χ(ΐ ' αισχύνη δ εφ οίς (καστος άμαρτων αισχυνΐται. ώς μη δίον τι πράζας- και αιδί'ιται μξν τις τον πατέρα • αισχύν€- ται hk (ις μιθύσκίται, etc., etc. ; accordingly αϊδ• is ]iromi- nciitly objective in its reference, having regard to others ; while αίσχ. is subjective, making reference to one's self and one's actions. Cf. Schmidt ch. 140. It is often said that ' αίδ. precedes and prevents the shame- ful act, αΙσχ- reflects upon its consequences in the shame it brings with it' (Cope, Aristot. rhet. 5, 6, 1). οϊδ. is the nobler word, αΙσχ. the stronger; while " αίδ. would always restrain a good man from an unworthy act, αΙσχ. would sometimes restrain a bad one." Trench §§ xix. XX.] • Αίθίοψ, -οποΓ. ό. (αϊθω to burn, and ωψ [ό'ψ•] the face ; swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. "^13): .Vcls viii. 27, here ί-ιμα 15 αίμορροεω the reference is to upper Ethiopia, called Habesh or Abyssiaia, a country of Africa adjoining Egypt and including the island Meroe ; [see Dillmann in Schenkel i. 285 sqq. ; Alex.'s Kitto or Me. and S. s. v. Ethiopia. Cf. Bib. Sacr. for 1866, p. 515].• αίμα, -ΤΟΓ. TO, blood, whether of men or of animals ; 1. a. simply and generally : Jn. .xL\. 34 ; Rev. viii. 7 sq. ; xi. 6 ; xvi. 3 sq. 6 '' (on which passages cf. E.\. vii. 20 sqq.) ; xix. 13 ; piais αΐματο!, Jlk. v. 25, [^{πηγη αίμ. 29)] ; Lk. viii. 43 sq. ; θρόμβοι, αϊματο!, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden, Acts XV. 20, 29 ; xxi. 25 ; cf. Lev. iii. 17 ; vii. 16 (26) ; xvii. 10 ; see Knobel on Lev. vii. 26 sq. ; [Kalisch on Lev., Preliminary Essay § 1] ; Ruckert, Abendmahl, p. 94. b. As it was anciently believed that the blood is the seat of the Ufe (Lev. xvii. 11 ; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl. Psychol, pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans, p. 281 sqq.)]), the phrase σαρξ κ. αίμα (ΠΊΙ ""i^?, a common phrase in Rab- binical writers), or in inverse order αίμα κ- σαρξ, denotes man's hving body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co. XV. 50 ; Heb. ii. 14, and so hints at the contrast between man and God (or even the more exalted creatures, Eph. vi. 12) as to suggest his feebleness, Eph. vi. 12 (Sir. xiv. 18), which is conspicuous as respects the knowledge of divine things. Gal. i. 16 ; Mt. ΧΛ -i. 17. c. Since the first germs of animal life are thought to be in the blood (Sap. vii. 2; Eustath. ad Ή. 6, 211 (ii. 104, 2) to δε αίματοί αυτί τοΰ σπίρματόί φασιν οί σοφοί, ώί τον σπίρματο! ϋλην το αίμα e;(oiTos•), the word serves to denote generation and origin (in the classics also) : Jn. i. 13 (on the plur. cf. W. 177 (166)); Acts xvii. 26 [R G]. d. It is used of those thinirs which by their redness resemble blood : al σταφυ}ίηζ the juice of the grape [' the blood of grapes,' Gen. xlix. 11 ; Deut. xxxii. 14], Sir. x.xxLx. 26; 1. 15; 1 Mace. vi. 34, etc.; Achill. Tat. ii. 2; ref- erence to this is made in Rev. xiv. 18-20. els αίμα, of the moon, Acts ii. 20 (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)), i. q. is αϊμα. Rev. vi. 12. 2. hloo'l shed or to be shed bij violence (very often also in the classics) ; a. : Lk. xiii. 1 (the meaning is, whom Pilate had ordered to be massacred while they were sacrificing, so that their blood minsled with the blood [yet cf. W. 623 (579)] of the victims) ; at άθωον [or SUaiov Tr mrg. WH txt.] the blood of an innocent [or righteous] man viz. to be shed, Mt. xxvii. 4 ; (κχ(1ν and (κχΰν^ιν αίμα (DT '^3U', Gen. hi. 6 ; Is. lix. 7, etc.) to shed blood, slat/, Mt. xxiii. 35 ; Lk. xi. 50 ; Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6• [here Tdf. αίματα^ ; hence αϊμα is used for the bloody death itself : Mt. xxiii. 30, 35; xxvii. 24; Lk. xi. 51; Acts [ii. 19, yet cf. 1 d. above ;] xx. 26 ; Rev. xvii. 6 ; μίχρίί αίμα- τοί unto blond i. e. so as to undergo a bloody death, Heb. xii. 4, (τόκ αίτιον Trjs . . . μίχρί! αίματος στάσεως, Heliod. 7, 8) ; τιμή αίματος ' price of blood ' i. e. price received for murder, Mt. .xxvii. 6 ; d-ypos αίματος field bought with the price of blood. Mt. xxvii. 8, i. q. χωρίον αίματος. Acts i. 19 — unless in this latter passaare we prefer the explanation, which agrees better with the context, 'the field dyed with the blood of Judas'; the guilt and punishment of bloodshed, in the following Hebraistic expressions: (v αίτί} αίματα (Rec. αίμα [so L Tr WH]) (νρίθη i. e. it was discovered that she was guilty of murders. Rev. xviii. 24 (cf. ηόΚις αιμάτων, Ezek. XXIV. 6) ; το αϊμα αυτοΰ 4φ' ημάς (sc. (\θ(Τω) let the penalty of the bloodshed fall on us, Mt. xxvii. 25 ; TO αίμα νμών ίτη την κίφαλην ίμων (sc. ί\ΘΙτω) let the guilt of your destruction be reckoned to your own ac- count, Acts xviii. 6 (cf. 2 S. i. 16 ; Josh. ii. 19, etc.) ; (Ttayiiv TO αιμά τίνος ίπί τίνα to cause the punishment of a murder to be visited on any one. Acts v. 28 ; ίκζητί'ιν TO αιμά τίνος από τίνος ('2 TO '2 D'l ίϊΡ3, 2 S. iv. 11 ; Ezek. iii. 18, 20; .xxxiii. 8), to exact of any one the penalty for another's death, Lk. xi. 50 ; the same idea is expressed by ίκ8ικ(ίν το αϊμά τίνος, Rev. vi. 10 ; xix. 2. b. It is used specially of the blood of sacrificial victims having a purifying or expiating power (Lev. xvii. 11): Heb. Lx. 7, 12 sq. 18-22, 25; x. 4 ; xi. 28; xiii. 11. c. Frequent mention is made in the N. T. of the blood of Christ (αϊμα τοΰ Χριστού, 1 Co. χ. 16 ; τοΰ κυρίου, xi. 27; τοΐι όρνιου. Rev. νϋ. 14; χϋ. 11, cf. xix. 13) shed on the cross (al. τοΰ σταυροί. Col. i. 20) for the salvation of many, Mt. .xxvi. 28 : Mk. xiv. 24. cf. Lk. xxii. 20; the pledge of redemption, Eph. i. 7 {άττσ- λντρωσίΓ δια τοΰ αι αυτοΰ ; so too in Col. i. 14 Rec.) ; 1 Pet. i. 19 (see αγοράζω, 2 b.); having expiatory efli- cacy, Ro. iii. 25 ; Heb. ix. 12 ; by which beUevers are purified and are cleansed from the guilt of sin, Heb. ix. 14; xii. 24; [xiii. 12]; 1 Jn. i. 7 (cf. 1 Jn. v. 6, 8) : Rev. i. 5 ; vii. 14 ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ; are rendered acceptable to God, Ro. V. 9, and find access into the heavenlv sanc- tuary, Heb. X. 19: by which the Gentiles are brought to God and the blessings of his kingdom, Eph. ii. 13, and in general all rational beings on earth and in heaven are reconciled to God, Col. i. 20; with which Christ purchased for himself the church, Acts xx. 28, and gathered it for God, Rev. v. 9. Moreover, since Christ's dying blood served to establish new reUsrious institutions and a new relationship between men and God, it is hkened also to a federative or covenant sacri- fice : TO αϊμα της διαθήκης the blood by the shedding of which the covenant should be ratified, Mt. xxvi. 28 ; Mk. xiv. 24, or has been ratified, Heb. x. 29 ; xiii. 20 (cf. hi. 20) ; add, 1 Co. xi. 25 ; Lk. xxii. 20 [ΛΥΗ reject this pass.] (in both which the meaning is, ' this cup con- taining wine, an emblem bf blood, is rendered bv the shedding of my blood an emblem of the new covenant '), 1 Co. xi. 27 ; (cf. Cic. pro Sestio 10, 24 foedus san- guine meo ictum sanciri, Liv. 23, 8 sanguine Hannibalis sanciam Romanum foedus). mvfiv τό αϊμα αυτοΰ (i. e. of Christ), to appropriate the saving results of Christ's death, Jn. vi. 53 sq. 56. [ Wcslcolt, Epp. of Jn. p. 34 sq.]• αίμ.ατ€κχυσ(α, -ay, ή, (αϊμα and tκχίvω), shedding of blood : Heb. Lx. 22. Several times also in eicl. writ.* αίμορρο<ω, -ω ; to be α'ιμόρροος (αίμα and ρ/ω), lo sufft' from a flow of blood: -Mt. ix. 20. (Sept. Lev. xv. SS, where it means menstruous, and in medical writ.^ * Aivea^ ]6 ιρω ACvc'as, -ov, 6, Ae'neas, the prop, ικιιηυ of the parar lytic cured by Peter : Acts ix. 83 sq.• alvciris, -r, ή, (aiwa), praise: θυσία alvcaews (Π3Ι rrjinn, Lev. vii. 13), Ileb. xiii. 15 a tkunk-offerinii, [A. V. ' sacrifice of praise '], presented to God for some benefit received ; see θυσία, b. (αΧικαις often occurs in Sept., but not in prof, auth.) ' otvi'ii), -ώ; (found in prof. auth. of every age [" only twice in good Attic prose " (where ίπαιν. παραιν. etc. take its place), Veitch], but csp. freq. in Sept. and the Apocr. of the O. T.; from aivos); to praise, extol: τον β(όν, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 37; x.\iv. 53 [AVH om. Tr txt. br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii. 8 sq.; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of person, τώ θ(ώ, to sing praises in honor of God, Rev. xix. 5 l't Tr WH, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for h ΠΤΠ), 1 Chr. xvi. 36; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 etc. (for 4 S^Vl) ; [W. § 31, 1 £.; B. 176 (153). Comp. eV-, παρ- αινί'ω.].* αίνιγμα, -ros, τό, (common fr. [Pind. frag. 165 (190),] Aeschvl. down ; fr. αΐνίσσομαι or αΐνίττομαί τι to express something obscurely, [fr. αΓίΌί, q. V.]); 1. an obscure saying, an enigma, Hebr. Π"1'Π (Judg. xiv. 13, Sept. ιτρόβλημα). 2. an obscure thing: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where ff αιιήγματί is not equiv. to αινιγματικών i. e. άμαυρώς obscurely, but denotes the object in the discerning of which w6 are engaged, as βλίπιιν ίν τινι, Mt. vi. 4 ; cf. De Wette ad loc. ; the apostle has in mind Num. xii. 8 Sept. : tv tibei και ου hi αινιγμάτων. [ΑΙ. take iv lo- cally, of the sphere in which we are looking ; al. refer the pass, to 1. and take (v instrumentally.] * alvos, -ου, ό, (often used by the Grk. poets) ; 1. a saying, proverb. 2. praise, laudatory discourse : Mt. xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3) ; Lk. xviii. 43.* Αίνων, ή, (either a strengthened form of ["j* and equiv. to •γ},\ or a Chaldaic plur. i. q. Jir;" sjmngs ; [al. al.]), AdiDii, indecl. prop, name, either of a place, or of a fountain, not far from Salim : Jn. iii. 23, [thought to ba Wady Far 'ah, running from Mt. Ebal to the Jordan ; see Conderin "Pal. Explor. Fund"for July 1874,p.l91 sq.; Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq. ; esp. aVei-ens in Journ.of Exeget.Soc, Dec. 18S3, pp. 128-141. Cf. B.D. Ara.ed.].* atpco-ts, -€(»s, ή ; 1. (fr. αίμ^ω), act of talcing, cap- ture : τήί πόλίωί, the storming of a city ; in prof. auth. 2. (fr. α'φίομαι), choosing, choice, very often in prof. writ. : Sept. Lev. xxii. 18 ; 1 Mace. viii. 30. 3. that which is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action ; hence one's chosen opinion, tenet ; ace. to the context, an opinion varying from the true exposition of the Christian faith (^heresy) : 2 Pet. ii. 1 (cf. De Wette ad loc.), and in eccl. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 4. a body of men separating themselves from others and following their own tenets [n sect or party"] : as the Sad- ducees. Acts v. 1 7 ; the Pharisees, Acts xv. 5 ; xxvi. 5 ; the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Diog. LaSrt. 1 (13,) 18 sq., al., used of the schools of philosophy). 5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and urns : Gal. v. 20 ; 1 Co. xi. 19. [Cf. Mey. II. cc. ; B.D. I Am. ed. s. v. Sects ; Burton, Bampt. Lect. for 1829 ; Campbell, Diss, on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. iv.] * οΙρ€τ£5ω : 1 aor. ^ρίτισα [Treg. ήρ., see I, t] ; (fr. alpe- TOs, see α'ιρίω) ; to choose : Mt. xii. 18. (Often in Sept. in O. T. Apocr. and in eccl. writ. ; the mid. is found in Ctes. Pers. § 9 [cf. Hdt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, p. 354]. Cf. Slur:, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 144.) ' alpETiKOs, -η, -όν, [see αίρίω] ; 1. filed or able to take or choose a thing ; rare in prof. auth. 2. schis- matic, facliotis, a follower of false doctrine : Tit. iii. 10.• alpc'u, -ώ : [thought by some to be akin to άγρα, άγρίω, χιίρ, Eng. grip, etc.; cf. Bitm. Lexil. i. 131 — but see Curtius § 117]; to take. In the N. T. in the mid. only : fut. α'φησομαι ; 2 aor. (Ί\6μην, but G L Τ Tr WH ύλάμην, 2 Th. ii. 13, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 1G5;] W. § 13, 1 a.; B. 40(35), see άπίρχομαι init. ; [ptcp. cKopevoi, Ileb. xi. 25] ; to take for one's self to choose, pmfcr : Phil. i. 22; 2 Th. ii. 13; μ3λλον foil, by inf. with ή (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Comp. : av-, αφ-, di-i ίξ-, καθ-, vepi-, προ-αιρίω.] * οϊρω (contr. fr. poet, ά(ίρω) ; fut. άρω; 1 aor. ηρα, inf. 3pa«, impv. Spov ; pf. ηρκα (Col. ii. 14) ; Pass., [pres. αίρομαι]; pf. ημμαι (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ήρθην; (on the rejection of iota subscr. in these tenses see Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439;['W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. άρθήσομαι ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; in the Sejit. generally i. q. Niyj ; lo lift up, 7-aise. 1. to raise up ; a. to raise from the ground, lake up : stones, Jn. viii. 59 ; serpents, Mk. xvi. 18 ; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise up- icards, elevate, lifi up : the hand. Rev. x. 5 ; the eyes, Jn. xi. 41 ; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, cry out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof, writ.); την ψυχήν, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly (with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, etc.); in Jn. x. 24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and hope, cf. Liicke [or Jlcyer] ad loc. c. to draw np : a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 {άνασττάν, Ilab. i. 15); σκάφην. Acts xxvii. 1 7 ; anchons from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii. 13, where supply ras άγκυρα!; cf. Kuinocl ad loc; [AV. 594 (552) ; B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one's selj and carry what has been raised, to bear : τινά «πί χάρων, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xc. (xci.) 12) ; a sick man, Mk. ii. 3 ; ζυγόν, Mt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27) ; a bed, Mt. ix. 6; Mk. ii. 9, Π sq. ; Lk. v. 24 sq. ; Jn. v. 8-12: τον σταυροί', Mt. [χ. 38 Lchm. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32; Lk. ix. 23 ; Mk. viii. 34 ; x. 21 [in R Lbr.] ; xv. 21 ; [λίθον,'} Rev. xviii. 21 ; to carry with one, [A. V. take] : Mk. vi. 8• Lk. ix. 3 ; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed in class. Grk. by the mid. α'ρίσθαι. 3. to bear away what has been raised, carry off; a. to move from its place : Mt. xxi. 21 ; Mk. xi. 23, (μρθητι be thou taken up, removed [B. 52 (45)], sc. from thy place); Alt. xxii. 13 [Rec.]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; x.x. 1. b. to take off or away what is attached to anything: Jn. xix. 31, 38 sq. ; to tear away, Mt. ix. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21 ; to rend away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. c. to remove : 1 Co. v. 2 (cast out from the church, where άρθ{ι should be read for Rec. (ξαρθή) ; tropically : faults, Eph. iv. 31 ; fijr αΙσθάνομαι 11 άμαρτίαν, Jn. i. 29, [36 Lchra. in br.], to remove the guilt and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin be neither imputed nor punished {alpftv αμάρτημα., 1 S. XV. 25 ; ανόμημα, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. e. to grant pardon for an offence) ; but in 1 Jn. iii. 5 τας αμαρτία^ ημών alptiv is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin, while we enter into fellowship \vith Christ, who is free from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20 ; xv. 37; XX. 14; xxiv. 17 sq. ; Mk. vi. 29,43; viii. 8, 19 sq. ; xiii. 15 sq. ; Lk. ix. 17; xvii. 31 ; Jn. xx. 2, 13, 15; Acts XX. 9. e. to appropriate what is taken : Lk. xix. 21- sq.; Mk. xv. 24. f. to lake away from another what is his or what is committed to him, to take hy force : Lk. vi. 30 ; xi. 52 ; τϊ από with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii. 12; xxi. 43; xxv. 28; Lk. viii. 12, 18; xix. 24, 26; [Mt. XXV. 29]; Mk. iv. (15), 25; Jn. x. 18; xvi. 22; perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom anj-thing is taken, Lk. vi. 29 ; xi. 22 ; Jn. xi. 48, unless one prefer to regard these as possessive gen. g. to take and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11; 1 Co. vi. 15. h. to fake from among the liviny, either by a natural death, Jn. .xvii. 15 (ex τοΐι κόσμου take away from intercourse with the world), or by violence. 'Sit. x.xiv. 39 ; Lk. xxiii. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition of από TTJs γη!, Acts x.xii. 22 ; a'perai από τ^γ yrjs ή ζωη αύτοΟ, of a bloody death inflicted upon one. Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). i. of things; to take out of the way, de- stroy : χ(ΐρ6γραφον. Col. ii. 14 ; cause to cease : την κρίσιν, Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). [Comp. : air-, (ξ-, eV-, μ€τ-, σνν-, ύπερ-αίρω.] * αίσ-θάνομαι : 2 aor. ήσθόμην ; [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; depon. mid. to perceive ; 1. by the bodily senses ; 2. with the mini. 23 ; wre'p τίνος foil, by icu. Col. i. 9 [cf. B. 237 (204)] ; αιτΛ- σθαι with the ace. and inf., Lk. .xxiii. 23 ; Acts iii. 14 ; with inf. only. Acts vii. 46 (ητήσατο tlpdv he asked that he A/m.se//" might find ; others wrongly translate τίτήσατο desired) ; Eph. iii. 13. With the idea of demanding prominent : aiTctv τι, Lk. i. 63 ; 1 Co. i. 22 ; τι»ά τι, Lk. xu. 48 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15. [The constructions of this word in the GreA Bible, the αίτημα 18 Apost. Fathers, etc., are exliiliited iu detail by Prof. Ezra Abbot in the No. Am. Rev. for Jaii. 1872, p. 182 sq. He there .sliow.s also {in opposition to Trench, § xl., and otiiers) that it is nut " the constant word for the seeking of the infe- rior from the superior," and so diffcriufr froai f ρωτάω, which has been assumed to imply 'a certain eijualitv or faniiliaritv between the parties '; that tlie distinction lietweeu the woriis does not turn upon the relative dignity of the person asking and tlie person asked ; but that αίτ/ω signifies to ask for sometliing to be given not done, giving prominence to the thing asked for rather than tlie person, and iience is rarely used in cxliortation. Ερωτάω, on the other hand, is to re- quest a person to do (rarely to give) something ; referring more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhorta- tion, etc. The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer, 4te AuH. s. V. The latter distinguislies α1τ4ω from similar words as follows: " αιτί'α? denotes the request of the will, ίπιβυμίω that of the sensibilities, ίίομαι the asking of need, while ερωτάω marks the form of the request, as does (ΰχισθαι also, which in classic Greek is the proper expres- sion for a request directed to the gods and embodying itself in prayer." 'Ερωτάω, αΐτίω and ζίομαι are also compared briefly by Green, Critical Notes, etc. (on Jn. xiv. 13, 16). who concludes of ίρωτάω *' it cannot serve to indicate directly any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent. The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing inseparable from the act of direct interrogation " ; cf. further Schmidt ch. 7. Cojii'. : απ-, 4ξ•, iir-, τταρ(-μαι), ττροσ-αιτί'ω.] οϊτημα, -tos, to, (αΐτίω), [fr. Plato down], what ii or has been asked for: Lk. xxiii. 24; jjlur. [A. V. reque.itsl, Phil. iv. 6 [cf. EUic. ad loc] ; things asked for, 1 Jn. v. 15. [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.] * α(τ(α, -as, ή ; 1. canse, reason : Acts x. 21 ; xxii. 24 ; xxviii. 20 ; κατά πάσαν αιτίαν for every cause, Mt. xix. 3 ; bi ην αΙτίαν for tr/iich cause, wherefore, Lk. viii. 47 ; 2 Tim. i. 6, 12 ; Tit. i. 13 ; Ileb. ii. 11 ; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy of punishment ; crime of which one is accused : Mt. xxvu. 37 ; Mk. χ v. 26 ; Jn. xviii. 38 ; xix. 4, [6 ; Acts xxiii. 28]; αίτια θανάτου [Α. V. cause ofdealh~\ crime deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 18. 3. charije of crime, accusation: Acts xxv. 18, 27. (All these signif. in prof. writ, also ; [but L. and S. now make signif. 3 the primary].) In Mt. xix. 10 tlie words €t ουτίύς (στιν η αίτια του ανθρώπου μΐτά της •γυναίκόί find a simple explanation in a Latinism (causa i. q. res : si ita res se hahct, etc.) if Ike case of the man icith his wife is so* αΐτίαμα, -tos, to, see αΐτίωμα. [αΐτιάομαι, -ώμαι: Ιο accuse, hrintj a charge against; τιτιασάμ(θα is a various reading in Ro. iii. 9 for the προϊ]τιασάμίθα of the printed texts. (Prov. xix. 3 ; Sir. xxix. 5 ; freq. in prof, writ.) Syn. see κατηγοράω.'} atrios, -a. -uv, that in which the cause of anything resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. ό αίτιοΓ the author : σωτηρία!, Heb. v. 9 (tlie same phrase is freq. in prof. writ. ; cf. the opp. al τής άπωΧ^ία! in Bel and the Dragon vs. 41 ; των κακών, 2 Mace. xiii. 4 ; Lcian. Tim. 36 ed. Lips. ; των αγαθών, Isncr. ad Phil. 49 p. 106 a.; cf.^leek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 94 sq.). 2. το αίτιοι» i. q. η αιτία; a. cause: Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. 400 (342) n.]. b. crime, offence : Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 22. (aiTios culprit.) [See αίτια, 3.]* αΐτίωμα, -toc, to, (αιτιάομαι) ; in Acts xxv. 7 the read- ing of the best codd. ado|)ted by G L Τ Tr WH for Rec. αιτίαμα: accusation, charge of guill. (A form not found in other writ. ; [yet Mcy. notes αίτίωσίΓ for αίτίασίί, Eustath. p. 1422, 21 ; see B. 73 ; 117/. App. p. 166].)• αΙφνίδιΟΐ, -ov, (α'ίφνηί, άψανη!, άφνω q. v.), unexpected, sudden, unforeseen : Lk. xxi. 34 [here WH (φνίί., see their Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151] ; 1 Th. v. 3. (Sap. xvii. 14; 2 Mace. xiv. 17; 3 Mace. iii. 24; Aeschyl., Time. 2, 61 to αιφνί&ιον κα\ (ΐπροσ8όκητον, Polyb., Joseph., Plut., I)i(m. Hal., ah)• αίχμ-αλωσία, -as, ή, (αιχμάλωτο!, q. v.), captivity: Rev. xiii. 10; abstr. for concr. i. q. αιχμάλωτοι (cf. άδ('\φάτη! above), Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19, [cf. 15. 14.S (129) ; W. 225 (211)]) ; also « th αΙχμαΧωσίαν συνάγιι (ace. to the common but doubtless corriqjt text), Rev. .xiii. 10 (as in Num. xxxi. 12, etc.). [Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut, al.]• αίχμαλωτίνω ; 1 aor. ΐ);(μαλώτβΐ)σ•α ; a later word (cf . Loh. ad Phryn. p. 442; [\V. 92 (88)]) ; to male captive, lake captive : 2 Tim. iii. 6 Rec. ; freq. in the Sept. and O. T. Apocr. ί to lead captive : Eph. iv. 8 (Ezek. .\ii. 3 ; [1 Esdr. vi. 15]).• αΙχμαλωτίζω ; 1 fut. pass. αΙχμαΧωτισθησομαι ; a. Cijuiv. to αίχμάλωτον ποιώ, which the earlier Gi'ccks use. b. to lead away captive : foU. by ίί^ with ace. of place, Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33; Tob. i. 10). c. fig. to sub- Jugate, bring under control : 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage see νόημα, 2) ; τινά τινι, Ro. vii. 23 [yet Τ Tr Ν etc. in- sert (V before the dat.]; to take captive one's mind, capti- vate : ywaiKUpia, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Rec], ( Jiulith xvi. 9 TO KiiKKo! αντη! ί}χμαΧώτισ€ yj /υχην αντυϋ). The word is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr., Heliod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); EUic. on 2 Tim. I. c.].* αίχμι-όλωτο?, -ov, (f Γ. αιχμή a spear and άλωτο!, verbal adj. fr. άλώναι. prop, taken by the spear), [fr. Acscliyl. down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).* αΙών, -ώΐΌΓ, ό, (as if altv — poet, fordfi — ών, .«ο teaches Aristot. lit• caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279», 27; [so Proohis lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241 ; et al.] ; but more prob- able is the conjecture [cf. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that αΙών is so connected with άημι to breathe, blow, as to denote properly that which causes life, vital force; cf. Harless on Eph. ii. 2). [But αΙών (^αί^ώκ) is now gen- erally connected with alei. aft, Skr. eras (aivas), Lat. aenim, Goth, aivs. Germ, eicig, Eng. aye, ever; cf. Curtius § 585; Pick, Pt. i. p. 27; Vanicek p. 79; Benfey, Wur- zellex. i. ]). 7 sq. ; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400 ; Poll, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442; Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. aci; Cremer, edd. 2, 3,4 (al- tliough in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm) ; Pott and Pick, however, connect it with Skr. ayus rather than evas, although both these forms are derived from i to go (see Pott, Schleicher, Fick, VaniCek, u. s.).] la 19 Greek authors 1. age (Lat. nevum, wliich is αΙών with the Aeohc difjamma), a human lifetime (in Horn., Ildt., Find., Tragic poets), life itself (Horn. II. 5, 685 μ( κα\λίιτοι αιών etc.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity of lime, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 37 d. 38 a.; Tim. Locr. p. 97 d. [([uoted belcw] ; Plut., al.). With this signifi- cation the Hebrew and Rabbinic idea of the word □'7l>' (of Λvhieh in the Sf pt. αΙών is tlie equiv.) combines in the bibl. and eecl. \YTit. Hence in the X. T. used 1. a. Univ.: in the phrases fifxoi/ αιώνα, D^li'*? (Gen. vi. 3), for ever, Jn. vi. 51, 58 ; xiv. 16 ; Heb. v. 6 ; vi. 20, etc. ; and strengthened fir τον αΙώνα τον αΐώνο!, Heb. i. 8 [fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7 Alex., cf. W. § 36, 2] (Tob. vi. 18; Ps. Ixxxii. (ixxxiii.) 18, etc.); els αιώνα, Jude 13; fls ημίραν aimvos unto the day which is eternity (gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [cf. Sir. xviii. 10 (9)] ; ivith a negation: yierer, Jn. iv. 14 [Lchm. in br.] ; viii. 51; X. 28; xi. 26; xiii. 8; 1 Co. viii. 13; or not for ever, not always, Jn. viii. 35 ; eir rois αΙώνα! unto the ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. denotes the individual ages whose sum is eternity) : [Lk. i. 33] ; Ro. i. 25 ; ix. 5 ; xi. 36 ; [xvi. 27 R G Tr WH] ; 2 Co. xi. 31 ; Heb. .xiii. 8 ; els navras τ. awvas, Jude 25 ; els Tovs oMvas τών αιώνων (in which expression the endless future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of which are comprehended in the longer [cf. W. § 36, 2 ; among the various phrases to express duration com- posed of this word with prep, or adjuncts, (which to the number of more than fifteen are to be found in the Sept., of. Vaughan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of the double plural seems to be peculiar to the N. T.]) : [Ro. xvi. 27 L T] ; Gal. i. 5 : [Phil. iv. 20] ; 1 Tim. i. 17; [2 Tim. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 11]; Rev. i. 6, 18; iv. 9 sq. ; V. 13; vii. 12 ; x. 6 ; xi. 15; xv. 7 ; xix. 3 ; xx. 10; xxii. 5 ; els αΐώναζ αιώνων, Rev. xiv. 11 ; 6 αιών τών αιώνων the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) ages. E[>h. iii. 21 (cf. iley. [or Ellic] ad loc.) ; από τών αΙώνων from the ages down, from eternity. Col. i. 26 ; Eph. iii. 9 ; rrpo τών αιώνων before time ivas, before the founda- tion of the world, 1 Co. ii. 7 ; npodeais τών αιώνων eternal purpose, Eph. iii. Π. b. in hyperboUc and popular usage : ojro τοΟ αΐώνο! (oSiiO, Gen. vi. 4, cf. Deut. x.xxii. 7) from the most ancient time down, (within the memory of man), from of old, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21 ; XV. 18, (Tob. IV. 12 01 narepes ημών οπό τον a^ώvos : Longin. 34 tovs απ αιώνος ρτ)τορας) ; also €κ τοΰ αιώνος, Jn. ix. 32, (1 Esdr. ii. Ιί), 22 (2:3) : Diod. iv. 83 of the temple of Venus την ΐξ αΐώνης αρχήν λαβόν, 17, 1 τους ίξ α'ώνο! /3ασίλ«Γ, [excerpt, de legal, xl.] p. 632 την ϊξ αΙώνος napaSeSopevqv eXfvBepiav). 2. by meton. of the container for the contained, o'l alώves denotes the worlds, the universe, i. e. the aggregate of things contained in time,[on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)]: Heb. i. 2; .xi. 3; and (?) 1 Tim. i. 17; [Rev. xv. 3 AVH txt.; cf. Ps. cxUv. (cxlv.) 13; Tob. xiii. 6, 10; Sir. .x.xxvi. 22; Philo de plant. Xoe § 12 bis; de numdo § 7; Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 2; 35, 3 (πατήρ τ. α.); 55, 6 (θ(6ς τ. α.); Constt. Αρ. 7, 34 : see Abbot in Journ Soc. Bibl. Lit. eic. i. p. 106 n.]. So αιών in Sap. xiii. 9 ; xiv. 6 ; xviii. 4 ; the same use oc- curs in the Talmud, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic ; cf . Bleek, Hebraerbr. ii. 1, p. 36 sqq. ; Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 1036; [cf. the use of o! alώves in the Fathers i. q. the world of mankind, e. g. Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 2]. 3. As the Jews distinguished ΠΙΠ D'7i>n the time before the Messiah, and S3ri Ο'ΐύ'Π the time after the advent of the Messiah (cf. Riehm, Lehrb. d. Hebraerbr. p. 204 sqq. ; [Schiirer § 29, 9]), so most of the X. T. writers distin- guish ό αΙών ovTos /his or/e (also simply ό αιών, Mt. xiii. 22 ; Mk. iv. 19 G L Τ Tr WH : ό eworiis αιών. Gal. i. 4 ; ό vvv αΙών, 1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; [2 Tim. iv. 10] ; Tit. ii. 12), the time before the appointed return or truly Messianic ad- vent of Christ (i. e. the παρονσία, q. v.), the period of insta- bility, weakness, impiety, wickedness, calamity, misery, — and αιών μίΧΚων the future age (also ό αιών t'lcfivoi, Lk. .XX. 35 ; ό αιών 6 epxopevos, Lk. xviii. 30 ; Mk. x. 30 ; o£ awvfs oi (πιρχόμίνοι. E]ih. ii. 7), i. e. the age after the return of Christ in majesty, the period of the con- summate estabUshment of the divine kingdom and all its blessings : Mt. xii. 32 ; Eph. i. 21 ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the things of ' this age ' are mentioned in the X. T. with censure : 6 αΙών oCros, by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and pursuits of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called viol τοΰ αι. τοντου in Lk. xvi. 8 ; xx. 34 ; κατά τον αιώνα τοΰ κόσμου τοντου conformably to the age to which this (wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [cf. Trench § lis. sub fin.]; αγαπάν τόν vvv αιώνα, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see αγαπάω) ; apxovTes τοϋ al. τούτον, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see άρχων) ; ό θίός τοΰ al. τοΰτου the devil, who rules the thoughts and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4 ; al μίριμναι τοϋ αιώνος the anxieties for the things of this age, Mk. iv. 1 9 ; πλοι^σιοΓ cV τω vvv αΐώνι rich in worldly wealth, 1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; σοφία τοΟ αι. τοντ. such wisdom as be- longs to this age, — full of error, arrogant, hostile to the gospel, 1 Co. ii. 6 ; συζητητής τοΰ al. τοντ. disputer, sophist, such as we now find him, 1 Co. i. 20 ; avvreXeta τον αι. τοντ. the end, or rather consummation, of the age preceding Christ's return, with which will be connected the resurrection of the dead, the last judgment, the de- molition of this world and its restoration to a more ex- cellent condition [cf. 4 Esdr. vii. 43], Mt. xiii. 39 sq. 49; xxiv. 3 ; xxviii. 20 ; it is called σνντΐΚίΐα τών αιώνων in Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 1 0, test. Benj. 1 1 (cf. Vorstman p. 133)] ; τα Τ(\η τών αιώνων the ends (last part) of the aires before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 11 ; δυνάμιις toC μιλλοι^οϊ αίώι-οΓ powers which present them- selves from the future or divine order of things, i.e. the Holv S]iirit, Heb. vi. 5 ; τοϋ αΙώνος cKeivov Tvxelvto partake of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among the X. T. writers James does not use the word αιών. [On the word in its relation to κόσμο! see Trench § lix. Its biblical sense and its relation to D7i> are discussed by Stuart, Exeget. Ess-ays on Words relating to Fnt. Punish- ment, Andover, 1#30 (and Preslnt. Pabl. Committee, Phil.) ; Tayler Lewis in Lange's Com. on Eccl. pp. 44-51 ; J. W, Hanson, Aion-Aionios, (pp. 174), Chicago, 1880. See esp. 20 αιωνιο<ί Ε. Abbot, Literature of the Doctrine of a Future Life, etc., (New York, 1867), Index of subjects s. v. For its meanings in eccl. writ, see Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. i. col. 140 sqq., cf. ii. col. 1609; IJtiet, Origeuiana (Λρρ. to vol. iv. of De la Hue's Origcn) lib. ii. c. ii. quacst. 11, § 26. Its use in Horn., Hes., Find., Aesch.vl., Soph., Eur., Aristot., Plato, Tim. Locr., is exhibited in detail by E. S. Goodwin in the Christ. Exam, for March and May.'lS.'Jl, March and May, 18.32. " On αιών as the complete period, either of each particular life or of all existence, see Arist. cael. 1, 9, 15; on αΙών and xpovos, cf. Fhilo [quis ror. div. her. § .34] i. 496, 18 sq. ; [de null. nom. §47] i. 619, lO.sq." L. and S. ed. 6 ; see also Pliilo dc allcg. leg. iii. 8 ; quod deu-s ininmt. § 6 fin. ; de prof. §11; de pracm. et poen. § l.i; and (do mund. o]iif. § 7) esp. ./. G. Mailer, Philu's Lehre v. d. Weltscluipfung, p. 168 (Berl. 1864). Schmidt (ch. 44) gives the distinction, for substance, as fol- lows : both words denote the abstract idea of time and with special reference to its extent or duration ; xpovos is the general designation for time, Λvhich can be divided up into portions, each of which is in its turn a xpivos ; on the other liand, αιών. which in the concrete and siuijile language of Homer (I'indar and the Tragedians) denotes the allotted lifetime, even the life, of the intiividual (II. 4, 478 μινυνθά^ιο^ Si oi αΙων etc.), in Attic prose differs from xpovos by denote ing time unlimited and boundless, which is not conceived of as divisible into alCives (contrast here biblical usage and see below), but ratlier into χρόνοι. In pliilo.sophical speech it is Avithout beginning also. Cf. Tim. Locr. 97 c. d. χρόνω hi το μίρΐα τόσδ€ τάϊ πρριόδωί KtyovTi, &s 4κ6σμτ}σζν δ dehs συν κόσμω • ου yap ^ν ττρί) κόσμω άστρα ■ Sitiirep οϋδ' eviavrhs οΰδ' ωραν TrepioSoi αΐί μΐτρίΐται ό yevvarhs χρ6νο$ οΰτοί. cIk&iv 5e ^στί τώ ά^ίί'ϊ'άτω χρόνω.ί>ν αιώνα πoτayopeΰoμes ' ώϊ yap ποτ* ai'Stov πapάS€ιyμa, τίιν ιδανικών κόσμον, δδε & upavhs iyivvadT}. o'UTOis ws irpbi ^τapάδetyμa. τόν αιώνα, bSe ό χρ6νο$ συν κόσμφ eSaμtoυpyr|β■η — after Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d. (wliere see Stallbaum's note and reff.) ; Isocr. 8, 34 του$ Sh /i€T* ΐύσ^βΐίαί κ. δικαιοσύνης ζώντας {όρώ) iv Te to7s τταροΰσι χρόνο IS άσφαλώϊ διάyovτas και ττΐρΐ τοΰ σύμπαντος αιώνος 7]δΊους τας 4\πίδας έχοντας. ΊΊιο adj. άχρονος independent of time, above and l>eyond all time, is synon. «ith αιώνιος ; where time (with its subdivisions and limitations) ends eter- nity begins: Nonnus, metaiili. evang. Johan. i. 1, άχρονος ήν, ακίχ-ητος, iv αρρ-ητψ λιίγοΓ αρχτι. Thorougldy Platonic in cast are the dctinitions of (iregory of Nazianzus (orat. xxxviii. 8) αϊων yap otJTe χρόνος οΰη χρόνου τι μίρος ' ούδΐ yap μΐτρητόν. αλλ* οπΐρ ημϊν ό χρόνος ηλίου ψορα. μετρούμενος, τούτο τοΓϊ αίδ'ιοις αιών, τί) συμπαρεκτεινόμενον τοΊς οϋσιν οϊόν τι xpovmbv κίνημα κα\ διάστημα (Suicer u. s.). So Clem. Alex. .Strom, i. 13, p. ".'56 a. ed. Migne, Ό y' olv αιών τοΰ χρόνου τί> μ(\λον καΐ τδ ^νεστώς. αύτάρ δί; ifoi τδ παρίρχ-ηκί/ς άκαριαίως συνίστησι. Instances from extra-liiblical writ, of the use of αιών in tlie plural are: Thv απ' αιώνων μύθον, Anthol. vol. iii. pt. ii. p. 5.5 ed. Jacobs; eis αιώνα?, ibid. vol. iv. epigr. 492 ; ix περιτροπής αιώνων, Joseph, b. j. 3, 8, 5 ; εις αιώνας διαμένει, Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. i. 62. The dis- cussions whicli have been raised respecting the \vord may give interest to additional reff. to its use liy Philo and Jo- sephus. Philo : i πάς (απαί, σόμπας) or πας (etc.) i αιών: de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de dierul). § 1 (a noteworthy passage, cf. de congressu erud. § 1 1 and reff. s. v. βό>/ατοι) ; de sacrif. Ab. et Caini §11; quod det. pot. § 48 ; quod dens immut. § 1, § 24 ; de plantat. § 27 ; de solirietate § 13 ; de migr. Abr. §2; deprof.§9; de mut. nom. § 34 ; de somn. ii. § 15, § 31, § 38 ; de legat. ad Gaium § 38 ; (δ) μακρδς al : de sacrif. Ab. et Caini § 21 ; de ebrietate § 47 ; de prof. § 20 ; οι. μ-Ιικιστος : de sobrietate § 5 ; de prof. § 21 ; δ άπειρος al. : de legat. a4 Gaium § 11 ; δ έμπροσθεν at.: de praem et. poen. § 6 ; oL ποΚύς : de Alirali. § 46 ; τις at. : de mere, meretr. § 1 ; δι' οί. : de cherub. § 26 ; de plantat. § 27 ; eij τίιν al. : de gigant. § 5; iv {τψ} αι.: de raut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction)! (juod deus immut. § 6 ; ίξ οί. : de sonui. i. § 3 ; ίπ' al. : de plantat. § 12 (bis) ; de muudo § 7 ; πρ)) al. : de nmt. nom. § 2 ; πρίις οί. : de mut. nom. § 11 ; (δ) οί. : de prof. § 18 ; de alleg. leg. iii. § 70 ; de clierub. § 22 ; de migr. Al)r. § 22 ; de .somn. i. § 18, § 22; de Josepho § 5 ; de vita Moys. ii. § 3; de decalogo § 14; de victimis § 3; frag, in Mang. ii. 660 (Kichter vi. p. 219) ; de plantat. § 12 (bis) ; de mundo § 7. Jose ρ bus: (δ) πάς αΙών : antt. 1, 18, 7 ; 3, 8, ΙΟ; c. A]). 2, 11,3; 2, 22, 1 ; μακρ}ις al. : antt. 2, 7, 3 ; πο\υς οί. : c. Αρ. 2, 31, 1; τοσούτος al.: c. Αρ. 1, 8, 4; πλήθος αιώνος: antt prooem. § 3 ; όιτ'οί. : b. j. prooem. § 4; 5i' αι. : antt. 1,18,8; 4, 6,4; b. j. 6, 2, 1 ; εΙς {Thv) αι.: antt. 4, 8, 18; 5, 1, 27; 7, 9, 5; 7, 14, 5; i^ αι.: b. j, 5, 10, 5; (δ) οί. : antt. 19, 2, 2; b. j. 1, 21, 10 ; plur. (see above) 3, 8, 5. See αΙώνιος.] αΙώνιος, -ov, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Ileb. ix. 12; Num. XXV. 13; riat. Tim. p. 38 b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1; [cf. 117/. A]ip. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -or, -a, -ον,(αΐών)•, 1. wUhout hcijinnhtrj nr end, lltat which ahriii/s lias been and always trill be : θεοί, Ro. xvi. 2G, (i μόνο! αιώνιοι, 2 Mace. i. 25) ; πνενμα, Heb. ix. 14. 2. U'ilhimt heijinning : χρόνοκ αιωνίου, Κο. xvi. 25 ; ττρΑ χρό- νων αιωνίων, β Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. i. 2 ; ciayye\iov a gos])ei whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. tlie saving ])urpose of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. G. 3. wilh- oul end, never In cease, ecerlaslinr/: 2 Co. iv. 18 (o|)p. to πρόσκαιρο!) ; αϊώνιον αυτόν, joined to thee forever as a sharer of the same eternal life, I'hilem. 15 ; βάρος δόξη!, 2 Co. iv. 17; βασι'Κεία, 2 Pet. i. 1 1 ; 8όξα, 2 Tim. ii. 10; 1 Pet. V. 1 ; ζωη (see ζωή, 2 b.) ; κληρονομιά, Ileb. ix. 15; λϋτ-ρωσίΓ, Heb. L\. 12; παράκλησίί, 2 Th. ii. 16; σκηναί, abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (tlie liabifations of the blessed in heaven are referred to, cf. .In. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernaeula aeterna, quae praeparaveram illis, 4 Esdr. (Fritzsrlie 5 Esdr.) ii. 11]; similarly Ilades is called αιώνιος τόπ -or, Tob. iii. 6, cf. Eccl. xii. 5); σωτηρία, Ileb. V. 9; [so ilk. xvi. AVII, in the (rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']. Ojiposite ideas are : κόΧαπις, Mt. xxv. 46 ; κρίμα, Ileb. vi. 2 ; κρίσκ, Mk. iii. 29 (Rec. [but L Τ WII Tr txt. αμαρτήματος; in Acta Thom. § 47, p. 227 Tdf., εσται σοι τούτο eif ίίφεσιν αμαρτιών και Χντρον αιωνίων παραπτωμάτων, it has been [ilausibly conjectured we should read λυΓμοι/ αΙώνιον (cf. Ileb. ix. 12)]); όλεθρος [Lehm. txt. ολέθριος], 2 'J'h. i. 9, (4 Mace. x. 15); πύρ, Mt. xxv. 41, (4 Mace. xii. 12 αιωνίω πνρ\ κ. βασάνοις, αι εις όλον τον αιώνα ουκ άνησουσί σε). ■ JOf the examples of αιώνιος from Philo (with whom it is less common than ϊάδιος, q. v., of which there are .some fifty instances) the following are noteworthy: de mut. nom. § 2; de caritate § 17; κόΚασις αι. frag, in Mang. ii. 667 fin. (Richter vi. 229 mid.) ; cf. de praem. et poen. § 12. Other exx. are de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de poster. Caini § 35; quod deus imnuit. § 30 ; quis rer. div. her. § 58 ; de congressu quaer. erud. § 19 ; de prof. § 38 ; de somn. ii. § 43 ; de Jose- pho § 24 ; quod omn. prob. hb, § 4, § 18 ; de elirietate § 32; de Abrah. § 10; ζωίι al. : de prof. § 15 ; θε>ις (δ) αι. : de plan ακαθαρσία 21 ακαταστασία tat. § 2, § 18 (bis), § 20 (bis) ; de mnndo § 2. From Jose- phus: autt. 7, 14, 5; 12, 7, 3 ; 15, 10, 5; b. j. 1,33,2; 6, 2, 1 ; "cAeos o/. : antt. 4, 6, 5 ; b. j. 3, 8, 5 ; μνί\μΎ\ al. : antt. 1 , 13, 4; 6, 14, 4; 10, 11,7; 15, 11,1; οίκον μ^ν αϊύνιον ex€is (of God), antt. 8, 4, 2 ; ^ψυΚάχθη ό Ίωιίννη$ ^^σμο'ΐί alwvioLS, b. j. 6, 9, 4. Syn. its 10 s, alwytos: cdS. covers the complete philo- sophic idea — without beginning and without end ; also dlhcr without beginning or without end ; as respects the past, it is applied to what has existed lijne out of mind, alwvtos (fr. Plato on) gives prominence to the immeasuraldeness of eter- nity (while such words as ffuj/ex^s continuous, unintermitted, διοτ6λήί i>erpetual, lasting to the end, are not so applicable to an aijstract term, like αιών) ; alavios accordingly is esp. adapted to supersensuous things, see the N. T. Cf. Tim. Locr. 96 c. θΐίν Se rhv μΐν αΐώνιον voos δρτ) μονοί etc. ; Plat. Tim. 37 d. (and Stallbaum ad loc); 38 b. c. ; legg. x. p. 904 a. ανωΚΐθρον δέ hv "γΐνόμ^νον, άλλ' οίικ αΐώνιον. Cf. also Plato's Siaidvios (Tim. 38 b. ; 39 e.). Schmidt ch. 45.] ακαθαρσία, -as, ij, (ακάθαρτοι), [fr. Hippoor. down], uncliaiuiess; a. physical: Mt. .xxiii. 27. b. in a moral sense, the impurity of lustful, luxurious, profli- gate living: Ro. i. 24; vi. 19; 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 1 9 ; Eph. iv. 19; v. 3 ; Col. iii. 5 ; 1 Th. iv. 7 ; used of impure motives in 1 Th. ii. 3. (Dem. p. 553, 12.) Cf. Tittmann i. p. 150 Sep* ακάθαρτη?, -ητοί, ή. iwpiirily: Rev. xvii. 4; — not found elsewhere, and the true reading here is τα ακάθαρτα Trjs' ακάθαρτοι, -ov, (καβαίρω), [fr. Soph, down], in the Sept. i. q. S'?t3, not c/eaiiseil, unclean\ a. in a ceremonial sense, that which must be abstained from according to the levitical law, lest impurity be contracted : Acts x. 14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28 ; 1 Co. vii. 14 (of men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. Hi. 11, of things pertain- ing to idolatry) ; Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. in a moral sense, unclemi in tliour/lit ami life (freq. in Plat.) : Eph. V. 5 ; τα ακάθαρτα τψ πορνιίας. Rev. xvii. 4 (ace. to the true reading); πνιύματα, demons, bad angels, [in twenty-three pass, of the Gospels, Acts, Rev.] : Mt. x. 1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26; iii. 11, etc.; Lk. iv. 33, 36; vi. 18, etc.; Acts v. 16; Yiii. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2, (πνεύματα πονηρά in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2; xi. 26 ; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.). aKaipeOp.ai, -οϋμαι : [iuqif. ηκαιρούμην^ ; (άκαιρο! inoji- portune) ; to lack opportunily, (opp. to (ίικαιρίω ) : Pldl. iv. 10. (Phot., Suid., Zunar. ; άκαιρων, Diod. excerp. Vat. ed. Mai p. 30 [frag. 1. x. § 7, ed. Dind.].)* άκαίρωΐ, (/caipos), adv., unseasonabti/, [A. V. out of sea.swi], (opp. to ti/taipus) : 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether sea- sonable for men or not). (Sir. xxxv. 4 ; [Aeschyl. Ag. 808]; Plat, de rep. x. p. 606 b. ; Tim. 33 a.; 86 c. ; Xen. Eph. 5, 7 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) * οί-κακο;, -ov, (kokOs) ; a. icilhout (juile or fraud, harmlens; free from f/uilt: Heb. vii. 26; [cf. Clement, frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. Lfihlft. S. Clement of Rome etc. p. 219) : άκακος 6 Ώατηρ ττνΐνμα ΐ^ωκΐν ακακον\ b. fearing no evil from others, dislrustiiij/ no one, [cf. Eng. (/uiVete.?] : Ro. xvi. 18. ([Aeschyl.,] Plat., Dem., Polyb., al. ; Sept.) [Cf. Trench § Ivi. ; Tittmann i. p. 27 sq.]* άκανθα, -ης, ή, (άκή a point [but see in άκμη]) ; a. α thorn, bratnhle-bush, brier : Mt. vii. 16 ; Lk. vi. 44 ; Heb. vi. 8 ; els Tar άκανθας i. e. among the seeds of thorns, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 7 [L mrg. inC], 18 [Tdf. eVt]; Lk. viii. 14 (vs. 7 (V μϊσω των ακανθών) ; fVt ras άκ• i. e. upon ground in which seeds of thorns were lying hidden, Mt. xiii. 7. b. a thornij plant : στίφανον (ξ ακάνθων, Mt. χχνϋ. 29; Jn. xix. 2,- — for bare thorns might have caused delirium or even death ; what species of plant is referred to, is not clear. Some boldly read ακάνθων, from άκανθος, acanthus, bear' s-foot\ but the meaning of άκανθα is somewhat comprehensive even in prof. writ. ; cf. the class. Grk. Lexx. s. v. [On the "Crown of thorns" see BB.DD. s. v., and for reff. Mc. and S.] * άκάνθινο?, -or, (άκανθα; cf. άμαράντινος), thorny, ii'oren out of the twigs of a thorny j>lanl : Mk. xv. 17 ; Jn. .\ix. 5. .(Is. xxxiv. 13.) Cf. the preceding word.* o-Kapiros, -ov, (καρπός), [fr. Aeschyl. down], without fruit, barren ; 1. prop. : hivhpa, Jude 1 2. 2. metaph. not yielding what it ought to yield, [A. V. iinfruitfuQ : Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; destitute of good deeds, Tit. iii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 8; contributing notliing to tlie instruc- tion, improvement, comfort, of others, 1 Co. xiv. 14; by litotes pernicious, Eph. v. 11, (Sap. xv. 4 ; cf. Grimm oil Sap. i. 11).* ό-κατά-γνωσ•τθ5, -ov, (καταγινώσκω), that cannot he con- demned, not to be censured: Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47, and several times in eccl. Λvrit.) * <ϊ-κατα-κάλυΐΓΤ09, -ov, (κατακαλϋπτω), not covered, un- veiled: 1 Co. xi. 5, 13. (Polyb. 15, 27, 2; [Sept., Philo].) * (ΐ-κατ<1-κριτο5, -oi», (κατακρίνω), uncondemned; punished witliont being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Xot found in [jrof. writ.) * οϊ-κατά-λυτοβ, -ov, (καταλύω), indissoluble; not subject to destruction, [A. V. endless~\ : ζωή, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Mace. X. 11 ; Dion. Ilal. 10, 31.)* άκατάτΓαο -Tos, -ov, — found only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd. A and B, from wliich L λ\\\ Tr mrg. have adopted it instead of the Rec. άκαταπανστηνς, q. v. It may be derived fr. πατίομαι, pf . πίπασμαι, to taste, eat ; whence άκατάπαστος insatiable. In prof. writ, κατάπαστοί [Λvllich Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading] signifies be.-vord in Roman Law, άκροατ. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a place set apart for hearing anil deciding cases, [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. (Several times in Plut. and other later writers.) * ακροατής, -oC, ό, (άκροάομαι, [see the preceding word]), α hearer: τηϋ νόμου, Ro. ii. 13; τον λό^ου , Jas. i. 22 sq. 25. (Thuc, Isocr., Plat., Dem., Plut.) • άκροβνσ-τία, -ας, ή, (a word unknown to the Greeks, who used η άκροηοσθία and το (ΐκροπόσθιον, fr. πόσθη i. e. membrum virile. Accordingly it is likely that την ττήπθην of the Greeks was pronounced την βίστην by the Alex- andrians, and άκροβυαττία said instead of άκροηοσθία — i. e. TO άκρον της πάσθης; cf. the acute remarks of Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 136, together with the opinion which AViner prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te Aufl. s. V.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of nS'i;? the prepuce, the skin covering the glans penis ; a. prop. : Acts xi. 3 ; Ro. ii. 25, 26 " ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; Gal. v. 6 ; vi. 15 ; Col. iii. 11; (Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); iv άκροβυστία ων having the foreskin ( TertuU. praeputiiilus), imcir- cumci.sed i.e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10; e'l/ άκρ. sc. ων, 1 Co. vii. 18; equiv. to the same is Si άκροβυστίας, Ro. iv. 11 ; ή fv Tji άκροβ. πίστις the faith wliich one has while he is uncircumcised, Ro. iv. 1 1 sq. b. by meton. of the abstr. for the concr., having the foreskin is equiv. to α (Jentile : Ro. ii. 26 ' ; iii. 30 ; iv. 9 ; Eph. ii. 1 1 ; ή tx φύσ€ως άκροβ. one uncircumcised by birth oraGentile, opp. to a Jew who ehowshimselfaGentile in character, Ro.ii. 27; fiayyi• λιον της άκροβ. gospel to be preached to the (ientiles. Gal. ii. 7. c. in a transferred sense : ή οχροβ. της σαρκός (opp. to the π(ριτομή άχ€ΐροποίητος or regeneration, Col. ii. 11), the condition in which the corrupt desires rooted in the σαρξ were not yet extinct. Col. ii. 13 (the expression is derived from the circumstance that the foreskin was the sign of impurity and aUenation from God, [cf. B. D. s. V. Circumcision]).* άκρο-γωνιαΐος, -aia, -alov, a word wholly bibl. and eccl., [W. 99 (94); 236 (221)], {άκρος extreme, and yωvίa corner, angL•), placed at the extreme corner; ^ίθος cor- ner-stone; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii. 6; Eph. ii. 20; Sept. Is. xxviii. 16 for Π33 J5S. For as the corner-stone holds together two walls, ,so Christ joins together as Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet cf. Mey. ad loe.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq. And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice, but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner carelessly ; so some are built up by the aid of Christ, while others stumbling at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8 ; see γωνία, a." άκροθίνιον, -ου, τό. (fr. άκρος extreme, and θίς, gen. θινός, a heap ; extremity, topmost part of a heap), gener- ally in plur. τα άκροθίνια the first-fruits, whether of crops or of .ipoils (among the Greeks customarily selected from the topmost part of the heaps and offered to the gods, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 35) ; in the Bible only once : Heb. vii. 4, of booty. (Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc, Plut., al.)* cucpos, -a, -OK, (άκή point [see άκμΙ)]), [fr. Horn, down], highest, extreme ; to άκρον the topmost point, the extremity [cf. B. 94 (82)]: Lk. xvi. 24; Ileb. xi. 21 [see προσ- κυνΐω, a. fin.] ; άκρα. άκρον γης, οίρανον, the farthest bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven : Mt. xxiv. 31 ; Mk. xiii. 27 ; cf. Deut. iv. 32; xxviii. 64 ; Is. xiii. 5; Jer. xii. 12.* Άκνλας, -ου, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see B. 20 (18)], 0, Aquilii, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in propagating the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi. 3 ; 1 Co. xvi. 19 ; 2 Tim. iv. 19 ; [see B. D.].* όκυρο'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ηκΰρωσα : (άκυρος without author- ity, not binding, void ; fr. κϋρος force, authority), to render void, deprive offeree and authority, (opp. to κυρόω to confirm, make valid) : {'ιτολήν, Mt. xv. 6 [R G ; νόμον, ibid. Τ AVH mrg.] ; λόγοκ [ibid. L Tr WH txt.] ; Mk. vii. 13, (cf. άθ(Τ(ω) ; 8ιαθήκην, Gal. iii. 17. ([1 Esdr. vi. 31] ; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut.)• άκωλΰτως, adv., (κωλύω), without hindrance : Acts xxviii. 31. [Plato, Epict., Hdian.] * άκων, άκουσα, ακον, (contr. fr. άίκων. a priv. and ΐκων willing), not of one's oicn tcitl, unwilling: 1 Co. L\. 17. (Very freq. among the Greeks.) * [όλο, to', read by Tdf. in Mt. v. 13 ; Mk. ix. 50 ; Lk. xiv. 34 ; see uXas.] άλάβαα-τρον, -ου, τό, (in the plur. in Theocr. 15, 114; Anth. Pal. 9, 153 ; in other prof. writ, ό and η αΚάβα- στρος; [the older and more correct spelling drops the p, cf. Sleph. Thesaur. s. v. 1385 d. ; L. and S. s. v. άλά- αλαζονεία 25 αΚεκτοροφωνία βαστροί]), α box made of alabaster, in which undents are preserved, (PUn. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13, 19,] " unguenta optima servantur in alabastris ") ; with the addition of μΰρον (as in Lcian. dial. mer. 14, 2 ; [Hdt. 3, 20]) : Lk. vii. 37 ; Mt. xxvi. 7 ; Mk. xiv. 3 (where L Τ adopt τον ά\άβ., Tr WH [Mey.] την άλ. ; Mt. and Lk. do not add the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they use the word, [cf. Tdf.'s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win. RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.» dXaioveta, and άΚαζονία (which spelUng, not uncommon in later Grk., Τ WII adopt [see I, t]), -as, ή, (fr. άλαζο- νιύημαι i. e. to act the άλαζών, q. v.) ; a. in prof. Avrit. [fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, braggart talk, some- times also empty display in act, swagger. For illustration see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7 ; Aristot. eth. Nic. 4, 13, p. 1127 ed. Bekk. ; [also Trench § xxLx.]. b. an insolent and empty assurance, tcliich trusts in its own power and resources and shamefully despises and violates divine laivs and human rights : 2 Mace. ix. 8 ; Sap. v. 8. c. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the stability of earthly things, [R. V. vaunting'] : Jas. iv. 16 (where the plur. has reference to the various occasions on which tliis presumption shows itself; [cf. W. § 27, 3; B. 77 (67)]); ToO βίου, display in one's style of living, [R. V. vainglory], 1 Jn. ii. 16.* άλαλων, -όνος, ό, ή, (αλη wandering), [fr. Arstph. on], an empty pretender, a boaster : Ro. i. 30 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2. [Trench §xxix.; Tittmanni. p. 73sq. ; Schmidt ch. 172,2.]* αλαλάζω; [fr. Find, down]; a. prop, to repeat fre- quently the cry αΚαΚά, as soldiers used to do on entering battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout : Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 2 ; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 2 ; and in prof. writ. c. to wail, lament: Mk. v. 38, (VVn Jer. iv. 8; xxxii. 20 (xxv. 34)) ; cf. ολολύζω, Lat. ululare. [Syn. see κλαίω fin.] d. to ring loudly, to clang : 1 Co. xiii. 1 , [cf . iv κνμβάλοι: όλαλιιγμοΟ, Ps. cl. 5].* ά-λάλητο$, -OK, {λαλητός fr. λαλίω; [cf. W. 23]), not to be uttered, not to be expressed in words: στεναγμοί mute sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief, Ro. viii. 26, [al. 'wliich (from their nature) cannot be uttered'; cf. Mey. ad loc; AV. 97 (92)]. (Anth. Pal. 5, 4 συνίστορα άλαλητων i. e. of love-secrets.) * α-λαλο;, -ox, (λάλοί talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl. on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech : Mk. vii. 37; πνεύμα, Mk. ix. 17, 2S, because the defects of demoniacs vrere thought to proceed from the nature and peculiarities of the demons by which they were pos- sessed. (Sept. Fs. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14; xxx. (xxxi.) 19; <ΐλ(άλου και κακού πνήματο! πληρηι. Pint, de orac. def. 51 p. 438 b.)• όίλαβ, -aros, to, (a later form, found in Se])!. and N. T. [Aristot. de mirab. ausc. § 138 ; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4, 3, 3], cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220 ; dat. αλάτι Col. iv. 6), and a\s, άλας, ό, (the classic form [fr. Horn, down] ; Sir. xxii. 15 (13) ; xUii. 19 ; Sap. x. 7 ; 1 Mace. x. 29, etc. ; Mk. ix. 49 άλί dat. [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.], and in vs. 50 L Τ Tr WII αλα ace. [yet without the art.] with nom. τό άλαί), finally, nom. and ace. Ska Tdf. in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see liis note)] (similar to γάλα, gen. γάλατοί, a form noted by certain grammarians, see [ ]VH. App. p. 158 ;] KUhner i. 353 sq. ; but see what Fritzsche, Com. on Sir. (xxxix. 26) p. 226 sq., says in opposition) ; salt ; 1. Salt with which food is seasoned and sacrifices are sprinkled: Mk. ix. 49RG; cf. άλί^ω. 2. aXas της γης, those kinds of saUne matter used to fertilize arable land, Mt. v. 13*; here salt as a condiment cannot be understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxix. 23; Zeph. ii. 9; Judg. ix. 45); cf. Grohmann in Kiiuf- fer's Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is, ' It is your prerogative to impart to mankind (likened to arable land) the influences required for a life of devo- tion to God.' In the statement immediately following, iav St okas κτλ., the comparison seems to be drawn from salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended; [but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout the pass., and take -γη to denote the mass of mankind, see s. V. 4 b. and cf. Tholuck et al. ad loc.]. In Mk. Lx. 50 * and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue; [cf. Mey. on the former pass.]. 3. Salt is a symbol of lasting concord, Mk. ix. 50 •, because it protects food from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged. Ac- cordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to par- take of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz ; [BB.DD. s. V. Salt] ; Knobel on Leviticus p. 370. 4. Wisdom and grace exhibited in speech : Col. iv. 6 [where see Bp. Lghtft.].* "Αλασ-σ-α : Acts xxvii. 8 ; cf. ί\.ασαΙα. [άλί€ύ5, ό, Τ WH uniformly for oKuis, see Tdf.'s note on Mk. i. 16 and N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. 1.; esp. ed. 8, Prolcg. p. 82 sq. ; WH. App. p. 151.] αλ(ίφω : impf. ηλαφον; 1 aor. ήλ(ΐ\Ι/α: 1 aor. mid. impv. αλίίψαί; [allied vf'ith λίπ-ος grease; cf. Curtius § 340; Vaniick p. 811 ; Feile p. 407; fr. Hom. down]; to anoint : τινά or τι, Mk. xvi. 1 ; Jn. xii. 3 ; τινά or τί Tivi [W. 227 (213)], as Ααίω, Lk. vii. 46 ■; Mk. vi. 13; Jas. V. 14; μϋρω, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46"; Mid.: ]\It. vi. 1 7 (lit. ' anoint for thyself thy head,' ui\ge tibi caput tuum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Salbe; [B.D. or McC. and S. s. v. Anoint, etc. Syn. : " αλείφειν is the mundane and profane, Xpietv the sacred and religious, Λvord." Trench § x.xxviii. COMP. : (γλείφω].* όλίκτοροφωνία, -as, η, (άλίκτωρ and φωνή [W. 25]), the crowing if a cock; cock-crowing: Aesop, fab. 79 [44]. Used of the third watch of the night : BIk. xiii. 35 ; in tliis passage the watches arc enumerated into which the Jews, follpwing the Roman method, divided the night ; [cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Nachtwachen; B. D. s. v. Watches of Night ; Ale.x.'s Kitto s. v. Cock-crowing ; Wetst. on Mt. xiv. 25 ; Wieseler, Chron. Syn. j). 406 note]. (For writ, who use this word see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229, [and add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Strab. 7, frag. 35 p. 83, 24 ; Orig. i. 825 b. ; Constt. Ap. 5, 18 ; 5, 19 ; 8, 34].) * αλέκτωρ 26 αΚηθβ αλέκτωρ, -οροί, ό, α cod; (Lat. rjallu.•! (jallinnceu.•!) : Mt. xxvi. 34, 74 S(|. ; Mk. xiv. 30, 6S [Lchiii. br.], 72 : I.k. xxii. 34, 60sq. ; Jn. xiii. 38; xviii. 27. Ci. Loh. ad I'liryn. p. 229; [RutherfonI, Xew Pliryn. p. 307; W. 23 ; see also BB.DD. s. V. ; Trhimm, Nat. Hist, of tlie Bible, i). 221 sq. ; esp. Egti, Zeitsclir. f. wiss. Theol., 187i) |). 5I7siiii.].• 'AXcgavSpcvs, -«'ωί, ό, an Alexandrinn, a native or a resi- dent of -Vle.xaiidria (a celebrated city of Egypt) : Acts vi. fl: -wiii. 24. [(Plut. Pomp. 49, 6; al.)]* 'AXegavSpivos [cf. Tdf.'s note on Acts xxvii. 6 ; G LTr Cubet, al. -ίρϊΐΌΓ ; Chandler §397 note], -ή, -όν, Alexan- drian : Acts xxvu. 6; xxviii. 11. [(Polyb. 34, 8, 7.)]* 'Αλί'ξανερο5 [i. e. defender of men], -ou, ό, Alcxamler; .'1. a son of that Simon of Cyrene who carried the cross of Jesus: Mk. xv. 21. 2. a certain man of the kin- dred of the hig;li priest: Acts iv. 6. 3. a certain Jew : Acts xix. 33. 4. a certain coppersmith, an op- ponent of the apostle Paul : 1 Tim. i. 20 ; 2 Tim. iv. 14; [al. doubt whether both these passages relate to the same man ; cf. e. g. EUic. on the former].* oXcvpov, -ov. TO, (ά\(ίω to grind), wlitaten flour, meal: Mt. xiii. o.'i ; Lk. .xiii. 21. Ilesych. aKtvpa κυρίως τα τοϋ σίτου, αλφίτα fie των κριθών. (Ildl., Xen., Plat., Jo- seph., al.)• αλήθεια, -as, ij, {αΚηθής), [iv. Horn, down], veritij, truth. 1. objectively; 1. un'iv. irliat >.■< true in nni/ matter under consideration (opp. to what is feigned, fictitious, false) : Jas. iii. 14; άληθ^ιαν Xcyetv, epciv, Jn. viii. 45 scp ; xvi. 7 ; Ro. ix. 1•; 1 Co. xii. 6 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; clwfv αυτω πάσαν την ά\ήθ(ίαν, everything as it really was, Mk. v. 33, (so in classics) ; μαρτυρύν ttj αλήθεια to testify ac- cording to the true state of the case, Jn. v. 33 ; in a broader sense, λαλίίΐ' αλί]θ(ΐαν to speak always according to truth. Eph. iv. 2.5 ; [αΚηθ(ίαί ρ!)ματα άποφθίγγομαι, as opp. to the vagaries of madness, Acts xxvi. 2.5] ; aXiJitta tye'vcTo, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14. ev άληθ(ία in truth, truly, as the case is, according to fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the divine nature) ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; Col. i. 6 ; ΐπ άληθίία! a. trull/, in truth, according to truth; Mk. xii. 32; Lk. iv. 25, (Job ix. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys.i. § 1). b. of a truth, in realili/, in fact, certainli/: Mk. xii. 14; Lk. XX. 21; [xxii. 59]; Acts iv. 27; x. 34, (Clem. Rom. iCor. 23,5and47, 3); [cf. W. § 51, 2 f. ; B. 336 (289)] ; κατ άλήθ^ιαν in accordance with fact, i. e. (ace. to the context) justly, without partiaUty: Ro. ii. 2; eire προ- φάσα, (iTf άΧηθ^ία, Phil. i. 18; c'v fpya> <■ άΚηθύα, 1 Jn. iii. 18 [Rec. om. «V; so Eph. iv. 21 AVII mrg.]. 2. In reference to religion, the word denotes witat is true in things appertaining to God and the duties of man, (' moral and religious truth ') ; and that a. with the greatest latitude, in the sceptical question τΐ ia-nv άλψ Ofia, Jn. .xviii. 38 ; b. the true notions of ftod which are open to human reason without his supernatural in- tervention ; Ro. i. 18; al.so ij άλήβαα dtoi the truth of which God is the author, Ro. i. 25, cf. 19, (ij αΚήθ^ια τοϋ Χρίστου, Evang. Nicod. c. 5, 2 ; accordingly it is not, as many interpret the phrase, the true nature of God [yet see Mey. ad loc.]) ; truth, the embodiment of which tlie Jews sought in the Mosaic law, Ho. ii. 20. c. Ihi: truth, as taught in the Christian religion, respecting God and the execution of his purposes through Christ, and respect- ing the duties of man, opposed alike to the superstitions of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and to the corrupt opinions and precepts of false teachers even among Christians : ή άλήθιια toC eiayy. the truth which is the gospel or which the gospel presents. Gal. ii. 5, 14, [cf. W. § 34, 3 a.]; and absol. η αλήθ(ΐ(ΐ and ά\ήθ(ία: Jn. i. 14, 17; viii. 32, 40; [xvi. 13] ; xvii. 19; 1 Jn. i. 8 ; ii. 4, 21 ; 2 Jn. 1-3; Gal. iii. 1 (Rec.) ; v. 7; 2 Co. iv. 2; xiii. 8; Eph. iv. 24; 2 Th. ii. 10, 12; 1 Tim. ii. 7 (eV πίστίΐ κ. άΚηθ(ία in faith and truth, of which I became a partaker through faith) ; iii. 15 ; iv. 3 ; vi. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18 : iii. 8 ; iv. 4 ; Tit. i. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 12 ; [3 Jn. 8, 12] ; ό λόγο? τηι άΧηθιία!, Col. i. 5 ; Eph. i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; λόγοί άΧηθ^ίαι, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 18; όδοΓ τ^Γ άλ. 2 Pet. ii. 2; πίστα ά\ηθ(ία5, 2 Th. ii. 13 [AV. 186 (175)]; Ιπακοη της ά\. 1 Pet. i. 22 ; ίπι>ω- σίΓ τη! α\. Heb. χ. 26 ; 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 25 ; iii. 7; [Tit. i. 1] ; πνιΰμα της άλ. the Spirit (of God) whidi is truth (1 Jn. v. 6) and imbues men with the knowledge of the truth. Jn. xiv. 17 ; [xvi. 13] ; xv. 2G ; 1 Jn. iv. 6 ; e'yi (ΐμι ή άλήθαα I am he in whom the truth is summed up and impersonated, Jn. xiv. 6 ; ή άλήθιιά σου [Rec] (i. e. Seoi) the truth which is in thee and proceeds from thee, Jn. .xvii. 1 7 ; [ίστιν άΚηθ€ία Χρίστου ev (μοί i. e. controls, actuates, me, 2 Co. xi. 10] ; dvai cV της άληθίίας to be eager to know the truth, Jn. xviii. 37 (see «,Π. 7, and fi/ii,V. 3 d.) ; to proceed from the truth, 1 Jn. ii. 21 ; to be prompted and controlled by the truth, 1 Jn.iii. 19; μαρτνρ(ΐν Tjj άληθ. to give testimony in favor of the truth in order to establish its authority among men, Jn. xviii. 37 ; άληΰ^ιαν iroietv to exemplify truth in the life, to express the form of truth in one's habits of thought and modes of living, Jn. iii. 21 ; 1 Jn. i. 6, (Tob. xiii. 6 ; iv. 6 ; cf. Neh. ix. 33 ; odov άληθ(ίας αΊρ(τίζ(σθαι, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 30) ; so also irtpmaTciv iv τη άλ. 2 Jn. 4 ; 3 Jn. 3 sq. ; anfiBdv τη άλ. is just the opposite, Ro. ii. 8; so also πλανηθηναι άπο της άλ. Jas. v. 19. II. sub- jectively; truth as a personal excellence; that candor of mind which is free from ajfectation, pretence, simula- tion, falsehood, deceit : Jn. viii. 44 ; sincerity of mind and integrity of character, or a mode of life in harmony with divine truth : 1 Co. v. 8 ; xiii. 6 (opp. to αδικία) ; Eph. iv. 21 [see L 1 b. above] ; v. 9 ; [vi. 14] ; σοϋ ή άληθ(ΐα the truth as it is discerned in thee, thy habit of thinking and acting in congruity with truth, 3 Jn. 3 ; ή άλί]θ(ΐα τοϋ Oeoi which belongs to God, i. e. his holi- ness [but cf. π(ρισσ(ΰω, 1 b. fin.], Ro. iii. 7 ; spec, ve- racily (of God in keeping his promises), Ro. xv. 8 ; iv άληθ^ία sincerely and truthfully, 2 Jn. 1 : 3 Jn. 1. The word is not found in Rev. ([nor in 1 Thess., Philem., Jude]). Cf. iroZc/na«n, "Bibelstudien",(Lpz. 1859) Ite Abth. p. 8 sciip ; [ ]Vendl in Stud. u. Krit., 1883,p. 51 1 sqq.]• αληθεύω ; in prof. writ. ([ Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) to speak the truth ; a. to teach the truth : τινί α\ηθη<; 27 aWa Gal. iv. 16. b. to profess the truth (true doctrine) : Epb. Iv. IS. [R. Λ'. mrg. in botli ])ass. lo deal lntli/.'\ • αληθής, -ίς. (α priv. and \ηθω, Χαθί'ϊν [\ανθάι/ω~\^ το \ηθο!, — cf. άμαθης; lit. tiot liklden, uncunceulcil), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. true : Jn. iv. 18 ; x. 41 ; xix. 35 ; 1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp. to όραμα) ; Phil. iv. 8 ; μαρτυρία, Jn. v. 31 sq. ; viii. 13 sq. 17; xxi. 24 ; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. i. 13; κρίσα, just, Jn. viii. 16 (L Τ Tr Wll αληθινή) ; παροιμία, 2 Pet. ii. 22; χάρΐ!, grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12. 2. loL'iiif/ the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to πλάΐΌί) ; of God, Jn. iii. 33 ; viii. 26 ; Ro. iii. 4 (opp. to ψ(ύστης). 3. i. q. αληθινό!, 1 : Jn. vi. 55 (L Τ Tr AVII ; for Rec. αληθώς), as in .Sap. xii. 27, where αληθής θ(ός is contrasted with ους ϊδύκουν θ(ούς. Cf. Ruckert, Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this word and tlie ne.\t, see Trench § viii. ; Schmidt ch. 178, 6.]* αληθινός, -ή, -όν, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down ; [twenty-three times in Jn.'s writ. ; only five (ace. to Lchm. sLx) times in the rest of the N. T.]) ; 1. " that which has not only the name and semblance, but the real nature corresponding to the name" (Tittmann p. 155; [" particularly applied to express that which is all that it pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adul- terated metal " Donaldson, New Crat. § 258 ; see, at length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to the idea signijied by the name, real and true, genuine; a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary, simulated, pretended : θ(άς (nox 'Π Sx, 2 Chr. xv. 3), 1 Th. i. 9 ; Heb. ix. 14 Lchm. ; Jn. .xvii. 3 ; 1 Jn. v. 20. {αληθινοΧ φίλοι. Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) b. it con- trasts realities with their semblances : σκηνή, Heb. viii. 2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (6 Γπποί contrasted with 6 iv TJi (ΐκόνι, Ael. v. h. 2, 3.) c. opp. to what is imperfect, defective, frail, uncertain : Jn. iv. 23, 37; vii. 28 ; used without adjunct of Jesus as the true Messiah, Rev. iii. 7; φως, Jn. i. 9; 1 Jn. ii. 8; κρίσις, Jn. viii. 16 (LTTrWII; Is. lix. 4); «piVfir, Rev. xvi. 7; xLx. 2; άρτος, as nourishing the soul unto life everlasting, Jn. vi. 32; άμπελος, Jn. xv. 1 ; μαρτυρία, Jn. xix. 35; μάρτυς, Rev. iii. 14; δισπότης. Rev. vi. 10; οδοί, Rev. xv. 3; coupled with πιστός. Rev. iii. 14; xix. 11 ; substantively, TO άληθινόν the genuine, real good, opp. to external riches, Lk. xvi. 11, ([oir μ(ν γαρ αληθινός πλοντος iv οίρανώ, Philo de pracm. et poon. § 17, p. 425 6d. Mang. ; cf. AVetst. on Lk. 1. c] ; άθληταϊ, Polyb. 1, 6, 6). 2. i. i|. αληθής, true, verarious, sincere, (often so in -Sept.) : KapSia. Heb. x. 22 ίμ(τ ά'>'ηθύας 'ν καρδία άληθιν!). Is. xxxviii. 3); λο'γοι. Rev. [xix. 9]; xxi. 5; xxii. 6, ( Plut. apoph. p. 184 e.). [Cf. Cremer 4te .A.ufl. s. v. άλήθίΐα.} * άλήθω ; (a com. Grk. form for the Attic άλ^'ω, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151); to grind: Mt. xxiv. 41 ; Lk. xvii. 35. It was the custom to send women and female slaves to the mill-houses [?] to turn the hand-mills (Ex. xi. 5), who were called by the Greeks γυναίκας άλιτρίδ^ς (Horn. 0(1. 20, 105) ; [cf.' B. D. s. v. Mill].• αληθώς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], truly, of a truth, in reality ; most certainly : Jn. i. 47 (48) ; iv. 42 ; vi. 14, 55 Rec; vii. 26, 40; viii. 31; xvii. 8; Mt. xiv. 33; xxvi. 73 ; [Mk. xiv. 70 ; Mt.] xxvii. 54 ; [Mk. xv. 39] ; Lk. ix. 27; xii. 44; xxi. 3; Acts xii. 11 ; 1 Th. ii. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 5.» άλκνς, -c'ojf, 0, {αΚς, αλός, the sea), [fr. Horn, down] ; a Jisherman, Jisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq. ; Mk. i. 16 sq.; Lk. V. 2, — in all which pass. Τ and WH hai e άλ(ύς It. the form αλ(€ϋς, q. v.* <ίλΐ€ύω; ((ΐλΐΐΐς); to fish: Jn. xxi. 3. [Philo, Plut.]* άλίζω : (αλς. αλός, salt) ; to salt, season with salt, sprin- kle with sail ; only the fut. pass, is found in the N. T. : iv τίνι άλισθήσ(ται ; by what means can its saltness be restored? Mt. v. 13 ; θυσία αλ\ άλισθήσίται, the sacrifice is sprinkled with salt and thus rendered acceptable to God, Mk. ix. 49 [R G L Tr txt. br.], (Lev. ii. 13 ; Ezek. xliii. 24 ; Joseph, antt. 3, 9, 1 ; cf. Knobel on Lev. p. 369 sq. ; Win. RWB. s. v. Salz ; [BB.DD. s. v. Salt]) ; πάς π-υρι αλισθήσιται, every true Christian is rendered ripe for a liuly and happy association with God in his kingdom by fire, i. e. by the pain of afllictions and trials, which if endured with constancy tend to purge and strengthen the soul, Mk. ix. 49. But this ex- tremely difficult passage is explained differently by others ; [cf. Meyer, who also briefly reviews the history of its exposition]. (Used by the Sept., Aristot., [cf. Soph. Lex.]; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10 [shorter form] άλί- σθητί iv Χριστώ, iva μη διαφθαρη τις iv υμιν.) [CoMP. I συν-αλίζω, — but see the ivord.] * άλία-γημα, -rot, to. (άλισ-γίω to pollute, which occurs Sir. xl. 29 ; Dan. i. 8; Mai. i. 7, 12; akin to άλίνω άλινιω to besmear [Lat. linere, cf. Lob. Pathol. Element, p. 21 ; Rhemat. p. 123; Steph., Hesych., Sturz, De Dial. Alex, p. 145]), pollution, contamination : Acts xv. 20 (του άπϊχίσθαι κτλ. to beware of pollution from the use of meats left from the heathen sacrifices, cf. vs. 29). Neither άλισγΐω nor άλίσγημα occurs in Grk. writ.* αλλά, an aihersative particle, derived from πλλα, neut. of the adj. αλλοί, which was originally pronounced άλλόί (cf. Klotz ad DCvar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things sc. than those just mentioned. It difl^ers from fie, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [cf. W. 441 sq. (41 1 )]. I. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to con- cessions ; nerertheless, notwithstanding : Mt. xxiv. 6 ; ]\Ik. xiii. 20 ; xiv. 28 ; Jn. xvi. 7, 20 ; Acts iv. 1 7 ; vii. 48; Ro. V. 14 sq. ; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4 ; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (αλλ' ό θ(ός etc.), etc. 2. an objection : Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq. ; 1 Co. .xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception : Lk. xxii. 53 ; Ro. iv. 2 ; 1 Co. viii. 7 ; X. 23. 4. a restriction : Jn. xi. 42 ; Gal. iv. 8 ; Mk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nay rather, yea moreover : Jn. xvi. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; esp. with και added, Lk. xii. 7; xvi. 21 ; xxiv. 22. αλλ' oiSi, but . . . not even (Germ, /a nicht einmal) : Lk. xxiii. I.'»; Acts xix. 2; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. cure]; cf. Fritzsche o> Mk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardina» matter, especially before imperatives : Mt. Lx. 18; Alk, «λλα 28 α\\ομαι i.\. 22; xvi. 7; Lk. vii. 7; Jn. viii. 26; xvi. 4; Acts L\. 6 [not Rec.]; x• 20; xxvi. 16. 7. it is put ellipti- cally : αλλ* (ιό, i. e. αλλίΐ τοντο yiynvev. tun. ΛΙΙί. xiv. 49 ; Jn. xiii. 18; xv. 25; 1 .In. ii. 19. 8. after a condi- tional or concessive protasis it si'j;nilies, at the begin- ning of the apodosis, i/el [c£. W. 442 (411)]: after κάί «, 2 Co. xiu. 4 [U G] ; Mk. xiv. 29 R G L, (2 Mace, viii. 15); after d καΐ, Mk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH]; 2 Co. iv. 16 ; V. 16 ; xi. 6 ; Col. ii. 5, (2 Mace. vi. 26) ; after el, 1 Co. ix. 2; Ko. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after ΐάν, 1 Co. iv. 15; after emep, 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. AVII br. αλλ']; cf. ΚΙυίζ ad Devar. ii. p. 93 sq. ; Kulmer ii. p. f*27, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding μίν. Mk. VI. 13 [T oin. Tr br. /itV] ; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20; 1 Co. xiv. 1 7. 10. it is joined to other particles ; άλλα γ€ [Grsb. άλλάye] (twice in the N. T.) : yet at leaM, 1 Co. ix. 2; yet surely (aher freUich), Lk. ,xxiv. 21 [L Τ Tr WH add και yea and etc.], cf. Bornemann ad loc. In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are not combined Avitliout the interposition of the most emphatic word between them ; cf. Bornemann 1. c. ; Klolz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 scj. 24 sq. ; ΛχΙ, Lex. Plat. i. p. 101 ; [W. 444 (413)]. αλλ' ^ (ari.-ing from the blending of the two statements olhiv «λλο ^and ol&iv άλλο, άλλα) save only, except : 1 Co. iii. 5 (where άλλ' ^ omitted by G L Τ Tr WII is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sir. xxxvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after άλλα itself, 2 Co. i. 13 [here Lchm. br. άλλ' before ij] ; cf. Klotz u. s. ii. 31 sqq. ; Kuhner ii. p. .S24 sq. § 535, 6; W. 442 (412); [B. 374 (320)]. άλλ' οί lint )i/>i, yet not: Heb. iii. 16 (if punctu- ated τταιΚπίκρανην : ηλλ' οΰ) for 'but Λνΐιν do I ask? did not all,' etc.; cf. Hluek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. άλλ' ουχί will he not rather ? Lk. -xvii. 8. H. preceded b_v a negation : but (Lat. sed. Germ, sondern) ; 1. ουκ {μη) . . . άλλα: Mt. xix. 11 ; Mk. v. 39; Jn. vii. 16; 1 Co. i. 17; vii. 10, 19 [oiSiV] ; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tun. v. 23 [μηκϊτι], etc. By a rhetorical construction ουκ . . . άλλα sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much . . . as: Mk. ix. 37 (ουκ ίμί iexfTai. άλλα rbv άττοστίί- λαντά /If) ; Mt. X. 20 ; Jn. xii. 44*: Acts v. 4 ; 1 Co. xv. 10 : 1 Th. iv. 8 ; by this form of speech the emphasis is laid on the second member ; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. [). 773 sqq. ; W. § 55, 8 b. ; [B. 356 (306)]. oi μόνον . . . άλλα και not only . . . but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [άλλ* ίνα και, etc.] ; Ro. i. 32, and very often. When «αϊ is omitted (as in the Lat. non solum . . . sed), the grada- tion is strengthened : Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. adds και] ; 1 Jn. V. 6; άλλα ττολλω μάλλον, Phil. ii. 12: cf. Fritzsche 1. c. p. 786 sq.j. ; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317)]. 2. The negation to which άλλα pertains is suppressed, but can easily be su|)plicd upon reflection [W. 442 (412)]: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in c.ich pa.ssage, before άλλα supply 'you will say you did not go out into the wilderness for this purpose') ; Acts xix. 2 (we have not received the Holy Spirit, but . . .) ; Gal. ii. 3 (they said not one word in opposition to me, but . . .) ; 2 Co. vii. 1 1 (where before άλλα. repeated sLx times by ana- phora, supjily ου μόνον with the accus. of the preceding word). It is used in answers to questions having the force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vii. 49; Acts XV. 1 1 ; 1 Co. x. 20. άλλα ίνα [or άλλ' ίνα, cf. AV. 40 ; Β. 10] elliptical after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297); 620 (576) ; Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq.] : Jn. i. 8 (sup- ply άλλα ηλθοι, ίνα) ; i.x. 3 (άλλα τυφλοί iytvfro [or eytv- νηθη], Ίνα) \ Mk. iv. 22 (άλλα τοίοΟτο iyivero, ίνα). [" The best ilss. seem to elide the final α before nouns, but not before verbs" Scrivener, Plain Introduction, etc., p. 14; but see Dr. Gregory's full exhibition of the facts in Ί\Ι/. Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it appears that " elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a, almost always before υ, often before t and i;, rarely before ο and ω, ne\ er before ι ; and it should be noticed that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words fv, tva, ότι, ού, ώί, prefer the form άλλ' " ; see also WH. App. p. 146. Cf. W. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10.] άλλά<Γσω : fut. αλλάξω ; 1 aor. ηλλαξα ; 2 fut. pass. άΚλαγήσομαι ; (άλλοί) ; [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; to change : to cause one thing to cease and another to take its place, τα ίθη, Acts vi. 14 ; την φωνήν to vary the voice, i. e. to speak in a different manner according to the different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now severely, now gently, Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad loc.]. to exchange one thing for another: r\ ev τιι /t, Eo. i. 23 (3 τηπ Ps. cv. (evi.) 20 ; the Greeks say άλ- \άσσ€ΐν τι τιι/ο£ [cf. W. 206 (194), 388 (363) ; Vaughan on Rom. I.e.]). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq. ; Heb. i. 12. [CoMP. : άτΓ-, St-, (coT^, άττο-κατ^, /i€T-, ΐΓϋΐ'^ιλλάσσω.] * όλλαχόθ£ν, adv., from another place : Jn. x. 1 (i. q. άλλοίίκ [which the grammarians [irefer, Thom. Mag. ed. Ritsohl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed. Piers, p• 11] ; cf. €καστηχόθ€ν, ιτανταχόθζν). [(Antiph., al.)]• άλλαχον, ad\., i. q. άλλοΛ, elsewhere, in another place : Mk. i. 38 (T Tr txt. WH Tr mrg. br.). Cf. Borne- mann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph., Xen., al. ; see Thom. M. and Moer. as in the preced. word.] * άλληγορί'ω, -Si : [pres. pass. ptcp. άΚληγοροΰμίνο!] ; i. e. άλλο μϊν άyopfiω. άλλο fie vota, " aliud verbis, aliud sensu ostendo " (Quint, instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle- gorically or in a figure : Gal. iv. 24. (Pliilo, Joseph., Plut.. and cram. writ. : [cf. Mey. on Gal. 1. c.].) * όλληλονϊα, [WH. Άλλ. and ά: see Intr. § 408], Hebr. T\—\bhr}, prai.'ie ye the Lord, Hallelujah : Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq. 6. [Sept. Pss. passim ; Tob. xiii. 18 ; 3 Itlacc. vii. 13.] • αλλήλων, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat. -oif, -ait, -Oit; ace. -ous, -ar, -a, one another ; reciprocally, mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxviii. 25; Ro. i. 12; Jas. v. 16; Rev. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Horn. down.] άλλογ£νή5, -if, (άλλοί and yeVot), sprung from another race, a foreigner, alien : Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen. xrii. 27 ; Ex. xii. 43, etc.], but nowhere in prof, writ.)* άλλομαι; impf . ήλλόμι;κ ; a.or. ήΧάμην and ήλόμην (Bitm. Auff. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)]); to leap (Lat. salio) : Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. ^λλίτο ; άλλο? 29 αΚώττηξ G L Τ Tr WH ijAoTo) ; to spring up, gush up, of water, Jn. iv. 14, (as in Lat. satire, Verg. eel. 5, 47; Suet. Octav. 82). [Co.MP. : ff , ίφ-άλλομαι.] * άλλοΐ, -ι;, -ο, [ef. Lat. alius. Germ, alles, Eng. else ; fr. Horn, down], another, other; a. absol. : Mt. xxvii. 42; XX. 3; Mk. τι. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (άλλοι μίν ίΤλλο), and often. b. as an adj. : Mt. ii. 12; iv. 21 ; Jn. .xiv. 16 ; 1 Co. x. 29 (άλλι; (τυν(ί&ησΐί i. e. ή συν. άλλον τινός). c. with the art. : ό «λλο£ the other (of two), Mt. V. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)]; oi άλλο( all others, the remainder, the rest : Jn. xxi. 8 ; 1 Co. xiv. 29. [Sr>'. άλλοί, €T€po j: δλ. as compared with eV. denotes numerical in distinction from qualitative diSereuce ; i\. adds (' one besides '), €τ. distinguishes (' one of two ') ; every er. is an i\., but not every δλ. is a er. ; &\. generally ' denotes simply distinction of iudivi duals, eVepoi involves the sec- ondary idea of difference of k i η d ' ; e. g. 2 Co. xi. 4 ; Gal. i. 6, 7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass. ; Trench § xcv. ; Silimidt ch. 198.] άλλοτριο-€ΐΓί(Γκο'πΌ5 (L Τ Tr WH άλ\οτρΐ€π.), -ου, ό, (αλλότριο: and eViVicorrof ), one who takes the superrision of affairs pertaining to others and in no wise to himself, [a meddler in other men's matters 2 '■ 1 Pet. iv. 1.5 (the writer seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether public or private, civil or sacred — in order to make them conform to the Christian standard). [Hilgenfeld (cf. Einl. ins 2i. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat. delator.'\ The word is found again only in Dion. Areop. ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another's oflice), and [Germ, of Const, ep. 2 ad Cypr. c. 9, in] Coteter. Eccl. Gniec. Mon. ii. 481 b. ; [cf. "w. 25, 99 (94)].• αλλότριος, -α, -ov ; 1. belonging to another (opp. to iSior), not one's own : Heb. ix. 25 ; Ro. xiv. 4 ; xv. 20 ; 2 Co. X. IS sq. ; 1 Tim. v. 22; Jn. x. 5. in neut., Lk. xvi. 12 (opp. to TO v^irepov). 2. foreign, strange: ■γη, Acts vii. 6 ; Heb. xi. 9 ; not of one's own family, alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq. ; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Hom. Ή. 5, 214: Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).* άλλόψνλοΐ, -oi>, (άλλο5, and φϋλον race), foreign, (in prof. auth. fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down) ; when used in Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies a Gen- tile, [A. V. one of another na/io;i] : Acts x. 28. (Philo, Joseph.)* άλλωΐ, adv., (άλλοϊ), [fr. Hom. down], otherwise : 1 Tim. V. 25 (τα πλλωί ίχοντα, which are of a different sort i. e. which are not καλά epya, [al. which are not ΐΓρο'δί;λα]).* άλοάω, -ώ ; (connected with η άλως or η άλωη, the floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out) ; to thresh, (Ammon. το tVt τ^ αλω ττατΐ'ιν και τρίβΐΐν τας στάχνας) : 1 Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv. 4). In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.* ό-λογο5, -Of , (λόγοί reason) ; 1. destitute of reason, brute: ζωα, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap. xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 3, al.). 2. contrary to reason, absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11, 1 ; Thuc. 6, 85; often in Plat., Isocr., al.).* αλόη [on the accent see Chandler § 149], -ijr. ή, (com- monly ξνλάλύη, άγάλλυχον). Pint., the aloe, aloes : Jn. xi.x. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in embalming the dead (as, ace. to Hdt., the Egyptians did), Hebr. D"'7n!< and niSpx [see Muhlau and Volck s. vv.], Num. xxiv. 6 ; Ps. xiv. 9 ; Prov. vii. 1 7 ; Cant, iv. 14. Arah. Alluwe; Linn.: Excoecaria Agallochum. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Aloe [Low § 235 ; BB.DD].• αλί, αΚός, 6, see άλα;. άλυκό$, -η, -όν, salt (i. q. αΚμνρός) : Jas. iii. 12. ([Hippocr., Arstph..] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e. ; Aristot., Theophr., al.) * ciX\)iros, -Of, (\νπη), free from pain OT grief : Phil. ii. 28. (Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Plat, down.)* όίλυσ -is, or as it is com. written αΚνσις [see WH. App. p. 144], -ear, ή, (fr. α priv. and λύω, because a chain is άΚντος i. e. not to be loosed [al. fr. r. val, and allied w. (ΐλίω to restrain, άλί^ω to collect, crowd ; Curtius § 660; A'anicek p. 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound : Mk. v. 3 ; Acts x.\i. 33 ; xxviii. 20 ; Rev. xx. I ; tV aXvad in chains, a prisoner, Eph. vi. 2U : οϋκ ΐτταισχϋνθη την αλ. μου he was not ashamed of my bonds i. e. did not desert me be- cause I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec, used of a manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by which the hands are bound together [yet cf. Mey. on Jlk. u. i. ; per contra esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 8] : Mk. v. 4; [Lk. viii. 29]; Acts xii. 6 sq. (From Hdt. doΛvn.)* ά-λυσ"ΐτ€λή5, -ίς, (λυσιτΐλης. see λυσίτβλί'ω), unprojit- able, (Xen. vectig. 4, 6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious: Heb. xiii. 1 7. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)* άλφα, to', indecl. : Rev. i. 8; xxi. 6 ; xxii. 13. See A. 'Αλφαίοβ [WH Άλφ., see their Intr. § 408], -αίου, ό, ('3^Π, cf. -jn 'Ayyaios, Hag. i. 1), Alphceus or Alpheus; 1. the father of Levi the publican: Mk. ii. 14, see Aevt, 4. 2. the father of James the less, so called, one of the twelve apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. He seems to be the same person who in Jn. xix. 25 (cf. Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40) is called Κλωτ,άς after a different pronunciation of the Hebr. "STl ace. to which Π was changed into κ, as Π03 φασίκ, 2 Chr. XXX. 1. Cf. 'Ιάκωβος. 2 ; [Β. D. Am. ed. s. v. Alphaeus ; also Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. pp. 256, 267 (Am. ed. pp. 92, 103) ; Wetzel in Stud. u. Krit. for 18s3, p. 62υ sq.].* αλων, -ωνος, ή, (in Sept. also ό, cf. Ruth iii. 2 ; Job .x.vxix. 12), i. q. ή άλως. gen. άλω, ο ground-plot or thresh- in g-foor, i. e. a place in the field itself, made hard after the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed out: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. In both these pass., by meton. of the container for the thing contained, αλων is the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebr. p:, Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12 (Sept. in each place άλωνα) ; [al. adhere to the primary meaning. Used by Aristot. de vent. 3, Opp. ii. 973•, 14].* ««λώττηξ, -ΐκοΓ, ή, a fox : Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58. α\ωσι<: 30 αμαρτία Metaph. a sly and crafty man : Lk. xiii. 32 ; (in the same sense often in the Grk. writ., as Solon in Plut. Sol. 30, 2; I'ind. Pyth. 2, 141 ; I'lut. SuUa 28, 5).' άΚωσιι, tms, ή, (άλοω, άλίσκο/ιαι to be caught), a catch- ing, cd/jlure: 2 Pet. ii. 12 fir άλωσιν lo be tuken, [some would here take the word actively: lo lake']. (Fr. Pind. and Ildt. down.) * ofia [Skr. sa, sania ; Eng. same ; Lat. simul ; Germ. sammt, etc.; Curtius § 449; VaniCek p. 972. Fr. Horn, down] ; 1. adv., at the same lime, at once, together : Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 3; 1 Tim. v. 13; Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. iii. 12. 2. prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat. : Mt. xiii. 23. άμα πρωί ear/ 1/ in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk. writ, άμα τω ήλίω, αμα ττ/ ημίρα). In 1 Th. iv. 17 and V. 10, vvhci-e άμα is full, by σύν, άμα is an adv. (<(/ the same time) and must be joined to the verb.• [Syx. &.μα, όμοϋ: the distinction given by Ammouius (de dift. voc. s. v.) et al., tliat o^ia is temporal, o/ioC local, seems to hold in tlie main ; vet see Ro. iii. 12, ami cf. Ilesvch. S.V.] άμαθήβι -ί'ί, gen. -οϋ:, (μανθάνω, whence ϊμαθον, το μΰθοί, cl. αληθή•;), unlearned, ignorant: 2Pet. iii. 16. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)* ofiapdvTivosi -ov, (fr. αμάραντο!, as ρόδινο! made of roses, fr. poSov a rose; cf. άκάνθινο!), composed of ama- ranth (a flower, so called because it never withers or fades, and when plucked oft' revives if moistened with water ; hence it is a symbol of perpetuity and immor- tality, [see Paradise Lost iii. 353 sqq.] ; Plin. h. n. 21 (15), 23 [al. 47]) : στΐφανο!, 1 Pet. v. 4. (Found besides only in Philostr. her. 11», p. 741 ; [and (conjecturally) in Boeckh, Corp. Inscrr. 155, 39, c. B. C. 340].) • αμάραντοι) -ov, (fr. μαραίνω; cf. αμίαντο!• άφαντο!, etc.), not fading away, unfading, perennial ; Vulg. immarcesci- bilis; (hence the name of the flower, [Diosc. 4, 57, al.] ; see άμαράντινο!) : 1 Pet. i. 4. Found elsewhere only in Sap. vi. 13; [ζωή άμαρ. Sibyll. ><, 411; Boeckh, Corp. InsciT. ii. p. 1124, no. 2942 c, 4; Lcian. Dom. c. 9].* άμ.αρτάνω ; fut. αμαρτήσω (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15; in the latter pass. LTTrWII give ήμαρτήσωμ^ν for R(i αμαρτήσομ(ν), in class. Grk. άμαρτήσομαι', 1 aor. (later) ήμάμτησα, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, l(i (cf. W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. ημαρτον; pf. ήμάρτηκα; (ace. to a conjecture of Bttm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. α priv. and μιίρω. μύρομαι, μίρο!, prop, to be without a share in, sc. the mark) ; prop, to 7niss the mark, (Horn. 11. 8, 311, etc.; with gen. of the thing missed, Horn. Γ1. 10, 372; 4, 491 ; ToC σκοπού. Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a. ; τη! όδοΰ, Arstph. Plut. 9(;i, al.) ; then to err, be mistaken; lastly to miss OT wander from the palli of uprightness and honor, lo do or go wrong. [" Even the Sept., although the Ilebr. Kipn also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve άμαρτ. exclusively for the idea of sin ; and where the llebr. signifies to miss one's aim in the literal sense, they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in par- ticular ΐξαμαρτάναν, Judg. XX. 16." Zezschwitz, Profan- graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63 sq.] In the X. T. to wander from the law of God, violate God's law, sin ; a. absol. : Mt. xxvii. 4; .In. v. 14; viii. 11; L\. 2 sq. ; 1 Jn. i. 10; ii. 1 ; iii. 6, 8 sq. ; v. is ; Ro. ii. 12 ; iii. 23 ; V. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 34; Eph. iv. 26 ; 1 Tkn. v. 20 ; Tit. iii. 1 1 ; Ileb. iii. 17; x. 26 (ίκανσίω!) ; [2 Pet. ii. 4] ; of the violation of civil laws, which Christians regard as also the transgression of di\ ine law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. άμαρτάν(ΐ.ν άμορτίαν to commit (lit. sin) a sin, 1 Jn. v. 16, (μ(γαλην άμαμτίαν, Ex. xxxii. 30 si[. Ilebr. ΠΝϋΠ «"Π ; αίσχράν άμ. Soph. Phil. 1249; μfyάλa αμαρτήματα άμαρτύνίΐν, Plat. Pliaedop.113 e.) ; cf. αγαπάω, sub liu. άμαρτάναν fl's Tiva [B. 173(1 50) ; W. 233 (219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (LTWllom.Tr mrg.br. ei'j σί), 21 ; Lk. XV. 18, 21 ; xvii. 3 Rec, 4 ; 1 Co. viii. 12 ; τ1 dt Καίσαρα, Acts x.xv. 8 ; els τό 'iSiov σώμα, 1 Co. vi. 18, (cis airov! tc και fis άλλου!, Plat. rep. 3, p. 396 a. ; fis το θίΐον, Plat. Phacdr. p. 242 c.; f'n θιου!, Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 19, etc. ; [cf. άμ. κυρίω β(ω. Bar. i. 13 ; ii. 5]) ; Hcbraisti- cally, ϊνώπιόν ("JD'?) τινο! [Β. § 146, 1] in the presence of, before any one, the one Λvronged by the sinful act being, as it were, present and looking on : Lk. χ v. 18, 21, (1 S. vii. 6 ; Tob. iii. 3, etc. ; [cf. ίναντι κνρίον. Bar. i. 1 7]). [For reff. fee αμαρτία. CoMP. : ηρο-αμαρτάνω.^' αμάρτημα, -ros , τό, (fr. άμαρτϊω i. t\. άμαρτάνω, cf. αδί- κημα, αλίσγημα), a sin, evil deed, [" Diflerunt ή αμαρτία et τό αμάρτημα ut Latinorum peccat u s et peccat u m. Nam TO αμάρτημα et pecoatum proprie malum facinus indi- cant ; contra ή αμαρτία et peccatus primum jjeccationcm, TO peccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequentcm, valent." Fritzsche ; see αμαρτία, fin. ; cf. also Trench § Ixvi.] : Mk. iii. 28, and (LTTrtxt.WH) 29; iv. 12 (where (iTTr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. τα άμαρτ.) ; Ro. iii. 25 ; 1 Co. vi. 18; 2 Pet. i. 9 (R[LWH txt. Tr mrg.] αμαρτιών). In prof. auth. fr. Soph, and Thuc. down ; [of bodily de- fects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; άμ μνημονικόν, Cic. ad Att. 13, 21 ; άμ. γραφικήν, Polyb. 34, 3, 1 1 : όταν μϊν παραλάγω! ή βλάβη •yf'i'rjTui, ατύχημα• όταν δι μη παραλάγω!, avfv δι κακία!, άμιίρτημα • ϋταν δι ίίδώί μϊν μή ττμοβουλ(νσα! δι, αδίκημα, Aristot. eth. Xic. 5, 10 [i. 1135'', 16 M|.].* αμαρτία, -as, ή, (fr. 2 aor. άμαρτ€Ϊν, as ΰττοτνχία fr. άποτνχί'ιν), a failing to hit the mark (see άμαρτάνω). In Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thuc. down). 1st, an error of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christl. im Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861) p. 57 n. 99]). 2d, a bad action, evU deed. In the N. T. always in an ethical sense, and 1. ccpiiv. to τύ άμαρ- raveiv a sinning, whether it occurs by omission or com- mission, in thought and feeling or in speech and aclior (cf. Cic. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; ίφ' άμαρτίαν flvai held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9 ; (■ιημίν(ΐν τ!/ αμαρτία, Ilo. vi. 1 ; άπηθνήσκ(ΐν ττ) άμ. and ζην iv αίτϊ], Ro. λ i. 2 ; την άμ. •γινώσκίΐν, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 21 ; ν(κρο! τί; άμ. Ro. νί. 1 1 ; irep'i αμαρτία! to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [cf. ]\Iev.] ; σώμα τη! άμ. the body as the instrument of sin, Ro. vi. 6 : απάτη τη! άμ. the craft by which sin is accus- tomed to deceive, Heb. iii. 13; Άνθρωπο! τη! άμ. [άνομίαι TTrtxt. WH txt.] the man so possessed by sin that he seems unable to e.xist without it, the man utterly given up (Ιμαρι 31 αμεμτΓΤο•; tu sin, 2 Th. ii. 3 [W. § 34, 3 Note 2]. In this sense ή αμαρτία (i. (J. to άμαρτάνιιν) as a power exercising domin- ion over men {sin as a principle and poiver) is rhetorically represented as an imperial personage ia the phrases ή άμ. βασΐΚίνΐί, Kvpifvet, κατΐργάζ€ται, Ro. v. 21; \i. 12, 14; vii. 17, 20; dov\€V€iv ttj άμ, Ko. vi. 6; 8ov\os της άμ. Jn. viii. :!4 [WH br. (j om. τψ άμ-Ί ; Ko. vi. 1 7 ; νάμυ: της άμ. the dictate of fin or an im]iulse ])roceeding from it, Ro. vii. 23 ; viii. 2 ; δύναμα της άμ. 1 Co. xv. 56 ; (the prosopopoeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, ace. to the read- ing αμαρτία, in Sir. xxvii. 10). Thus αμαρτία in sense, but not in s i g η i fi c a t i ο n, is the source whence the several evil acts proceed ; but it never denotes vitiostiy. 2. that which is done wrong, committed or resultant sin, an offence, a violation of the dicine law in thought or in act (ή αμαρτία (στιν ή ανομία, 1 Jn. iii. 4) ; a. generally: Jas. i. 1.5 ; Jn. viii. 4G (where άμαρτ. must be taken to mean neither etrur, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupt- ing the people, but sin viewed generally, as is well shown by Liieke ad loc. and UUmann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [cf. his Siindlosigkeit Jesu p. 66 sqq. (Eng. trans, of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)] ; the thought is, ' If any one convicts me of sin, then you may lawfully question the truth and di\ inity of my doctrine, for sin hinders the perception of truth ') ; χωρ\ς αμαρτίας so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. lo ; Troifii/ άμαρ- τίαν and την άμ. Jn. viii. 34 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 22 ; ίχαν άμαρτίαν to have sin as though it were one's odious private property, or to have done something needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, .In. ix. 41 ; XV. 22, 24 ; xLx. 11 ; 1 Jn. i. 8, (so αίμα ?χ(ΐν, of one who has committed murder, Eur. Or. ol4); very often in the plur. άμαρτίαι [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing, occurs but once: Mt. xii. 31]: 1 Th. ii. 16; [Jas. v. 16 LTTrWII]; Rev. xviii. 4 sq., etc.; ττληθος αμαρτιών, Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; ποκϊν αμαρτίας, Jas. v. 15; also in the expressions άφ(σις αμαρτιών, άφιίναι τας άμ., etc. (see άφίημι, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself denote the guilt οτ penalty of sins, but the sins are con- ceived of as removed so to speak from God's sight, regarded by him as not having been done, and there- fore are not punished, iv άμαρτ. συ ϊγιννήθης όλο? thou wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born, i. e. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. L\. 34 ; cV ταις άμ. άποθνησκ€ΐν to die loaded with evil deeds, therefore uureformed, Jn. viii. 24 ; en cV άμαρτίαις tivai still to have one's sins, sc. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17. b. some particular evil deed: την άμ. ταντην. Acts vii. 60 ; πάσα αμαρτία, Mt. xii. 31 ; αμαρτία πράς θάνατον, 1 Jn. V. 16 (an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from the state of ζωή received from Christ into the state of θάνατος (cf. θάνατος, 2) in which he was before he be- came united to Christ by faith ; cf . LUcke, DeWette, [esp. Westcott, ad 1.]). 3. collectively, the com/Hex or aggregate of sins committed either hg a single person or hg many : aipeiv την άμ. τυϋ κόσμου, Jn. i. 29 (see α'ψω, 3 c.) ; άπυθνί)σκ(ΐν i:• Trj άμ. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ; jTip'i αμαρτίας, sc. θυσίας [W. 5S3 (542) ; B. 393 (336)], expiatory sacrifices, Ileb. x. 6 (ace. to the usage of the Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. ΠΝϋΠ and ηΚΒΠ, e. g. Lev. v. 1 1 ; vii. 27 (37) ; Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7) ; χωρϊς αμαρτίας having no fellowshij) with the sin wliich he is about [?] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for the concrete, i. q. αμαρτωλός : Ro. vii. 7 (ό νόμος αμαρτία, opp. to ό νόμος nytoi, vs. 12) ; 2 Co. V. 21 (τον . . . άμαρτίαν ΐποίησιν he treated him, who knew not sin, as a sinner). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq. ; [see αμάρτημα ; Trench § Ixvi.]. αμάρτυρο;, -ov, (μάρτυς), without witness or testimony, unattested : Acts xiv. 1 7. (Thuc, Dem., Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Hdian.) * οψ:αρτωλέ9ι -όν, (fr. the form άμάρτω, as φ(ίδω\ος from φ(ίδομαι), devoted to sin, a (masc. or fern.) sinntr. In the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called αμαρτωλοί who is a. not free from sin. In this sense all men are sinners ; as, Mt. ix. 13 ; Mk. ii. 1 7 ; Lk. v. 8, 32; xiii. 2; xviii. 13; Ro. iii. 7; v. [8], 19; iTim. i. 15; Heb. vii. 26. b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked; a. univ. ; 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Jude 15 ; Mk. viii. 38 ; Lk. vi. 32- 34 ; vii. 37, 39 ; xv. 7, 10 ; Jn. ix. 16, 24 sq. 31 ; Gal. ii. 1 7 ; Heb. xii. 3 ; Jas. iv. 8 ; v. 20 ; 1 Pet. iv. 18 ; αμαρτία itself is called αμαρτωλός, Ro. vii. 13. β. spec, of men stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g. the tax-gatherers : Lk. xv. 2 ; .xviii. 13 ; xL\. 7 ; hence the combination τιλώναι και αμαρτωλοί, Mt. ix. 10 sq. ; xi. 19 ; Mk. ii. 15 sq. ; Lk. v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1. heathen, called by the Jews .sinners κατ ΐξοχήν (1 Mace. i. 34; ii. 48, 62 ; Tob. xiii. 6) : Mt. .xxvi. 45 [?] ; Mk. xiv. 41 ; Lk. x-xiv. 7 ; Gal. ii. 15. (The word is found often in Sept., as the equiv. of ΝΠΠ and Ι'ψ^^, and in the O. T. Ajiocr. ; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 9 p. llOi)', 33 ; Plut. de audiend. poet. 7, p. 25 c.)* άμαχο9, -αν, {μάχη), in (irk. writ. [fr. Pind. down] commonly 7iot to be withstood, invincible; more rarely abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 16; HeU. 4. 4, 9) ; in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious : 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. iii. 2.* άμάω, -ώ : 1 aor. ημησα ; (fr. άμα together ; hence to gather together, cf. (ierm. sanimeln ; [al. regard the init. α as euphonic and the word as allied to Lat. meto, Eng. 7now, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that of gathering in secondary; cf. \^anicek p. 6 73]) ; freq. in the Grk. poets, to reap, 7now down : τάς χώρας, Jas. v. 4.* άμ-ίθυσ-τοϊ, -ου, ή, amethyst, a precious stone of a violet and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19 ; ace. to Phavorinus so called δια το andpytiv τής μίθης [so Plut. quaest. conviv. iii. 1, 3, 6]) : Rev. xxi. 20. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] * αμ€λ€ω, -ω ; fut. α/ΐίλήσω ; 1 a.or. ημίλησαΧ {ίτ. άμΐλης, and tliis fr. a priv. and μίλω to care for) ; very com. in prof. auth. ; to be careless of, to neglect : τινός, Heb. ii. 3 ; viii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 14; foil, by inf., 2 Pet. i. 12 R G; without a case, άμ(\ήσαντ(ς (not caring for what had just been said [A. V. tin g made light of it^), Mt. xxii. 5.* ά-μ€μ•ιιτο5, -ov. {μέμφομαι to blame), blameless, deserv- ing no censure (Tertull. irreprehensibilis), free from fault or defect : Lk. i. 6 ; Phil. ii. 15 ; iii. 6 ; 1 Th. iii. 13 [WH a^,eu.^πτω<; 32 Μ^αττλίαϊ mrj;. άμίμπτω^] ; Ilcb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is lack- ing) ; in Se|)t. i. (j. DP, Job i. 1, 8 etc. Com. in Grk. writ. [Cf. Trench § ciii.] * ά-μ(μπτω$, adv., hlamekssly, so that there is no cause for censure: 1 Th. ii. 10; [iii. 13 WII mrg.] ; v. 23. [Fr. Ae.schyl. do\vn. Cf. Trench § ciii.] * ά|κ'ριμνοΐ, -ov, (μέριμνα), free from anxiety, free from care : Mt. xxviii. 14 ; 1 Co. vii. 32 (free from earthly cares). (Sap. vi. 16 ; vii. 23 ; Hdian. 2, 4, 3 ; 3, 7, 11 ; Anth. 0, :l.')!), ."i ; [in pass, sense, Soph. Ajax 1206].)• ά-μιίτόθ£το$, -ov, (μ(τατίθημι), not transposed, not to be transferred ; fixed, unalterable : Ileb. vi. 18 ; το Ιιμ(τάθ€- τον as subst., immutahility, Ileb. vi. 17. (3 Mace. v. 1 ; Polyb., Diod., Pint.) * ά-μίτα-κ£νητο5, -ov, {μ(τακινίω), not to he moved from its place, unmoved ; metaph. finnly persistent, [A. V. unmov- ai/e] : 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a. ; Dion. Hal. 8, 74 ; [Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 16, 9 ; 2, 32, 3 | 2, 35, 4].) • ά-μιταμ^λητος, -ov, (μ(ταμ(\ομαί, μfτaμ£\fl), not re- pented of, unregretted : Ro. xi. 29 ; σωτηρία, by litotes, salvation affording supreme joy, 2 Co. vii. 10 [al. con- nect it with μ(τάι/οιαν]. (Plat., I'ol} b., Plut.) * άμ.€τανόητο;, -ov. {μ(τανο(ω, q. v.), admitting no change of mind (amendment), unrepentant, impenitent : Ro. ii. 5. (In Lcian. Abdic. 11 [passively], i. q. άμ^ταμίΚητα, q. v. ; [Philo de praem. et poen. § 3].)* άμετρος, -ov, (μίτρον a measure), irithout measure, im- mense : 2 Co. X. 13, 15 S(j. (tir τα aperpa καυχάσθαι to boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, ex- cessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206, ed. Jacobs.)* αμήν, Ilebr. |9l< ; 1. verbal adj. (fr. ρκ to prop; Nii)h. to be nrm), firm, mehiph. faithful : 6 αμήν. Rev. iii. 14 (where is added ό μάρτυς ό πιστός κ. αληθινός). 2. it came to be used as an adverb by ivhich something is asserted or confirmed : a. at the beginning of a dis- course, surely, of a truth, truly ; so fret), in the discourses of Christ in Mt. Mk. and Lk. : αμήν λίγω ύμ'ιν ' I sol- emnly declare unto you,' e. g. Mt. v. 18; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. iv. 24. The repetition of the word (αμήν αμήν), em- ployed by John alone in his Gospel (twenty-five times), has the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52) ; iii. 3. b. at the close of a sentence ; so it is, so be it, may it be fulfilled (yivoiro, Sept. Num. v. 22 ; Deut. xxvii. 15, etc.): Ro. i. 25 ; ix. 5 ; Gal i. 5 ; Eph. iii. 21 ; Phil. iv. 20 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7 ; Ileb. xiii. 21 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; Rev. i. 6, and often ; cf. Jer. xi. 5 ; xxxv. (xxviii.) 6 ; 1 K. i. 30. It was a custom, which passed over from the synagogues into the Christian assemblies, that when he who had lead or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to God, the others in attendance responded Ajnen, and thus made the substance of what was uttered their own : 1 Co. xiv. 16 {to αμήν, the well-known response Amen), cf. Num. v. 22 ; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq. ; Neh. v. 13 ; viii. 6. 2 Co. i. 20 al eVayytXiat ... το ναι', και . . . τό αμήν, i. e. had shown themselves most sure. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Amen.] άμήτωρ, -opor, ό, ή, (μήτηρ), without a mother, mother- less; in Grk. writ. 1. bom without a another, e. g. Minerva, Eur. Phocn. 666 sq., al. ; God himself, inasmuch as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4, 13, 2. 2. bereft of a mother, Ildt. 4, 154, al. 3. born of a base or un- known mother, Eur. Ion 109 cf. 837. 4. unmotherly, unworthy of the name of mother : μήτηρ άμήτωρ, Soj)h. El. 1 154. Cf. Bleek on Ileb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqq. 5. in a signif. unused by the Greeks, ' whose mother is not recorded in the genealogy ' : of Melchizedek, Ileb. vii. 3 ; (of Sarah by Philo in de temul. § 14, and rer. div. liaer. §12; [cf. Bleek u. s.]) ; cf. the classic άνολυμπιάς.* ά-μίαντο$, -ov, (μιαίνω), not defiled, unsoiled ; free from that by which the nature of a thing is deformed and de- based, or its force and vigor impaired : κοίτη ])ure, free from adultery, Ileb. xiii. 4; κληρονομιά (without defect), 1 Pet. i. 4 ; θρησκιία, Jas. i. 27 ; pure from sin, Ileb. vii. 26. (Also in the Grk. writ. ; in an ethical sense, Plat, legg. 6, p. 777 e.; Plut. Pericl. c. 39 βίος καθαρός κα\ αμίαντος.)* Άμιναδάβ, ό, 37ΓΘ;ί (servant of the prince, [al. my people are noble; but cf. B. D. s. v.]), [A. V. Aminadab], the prop, name of one of the ancestors of Christ (1 Chr. ii. 10 [A. Λ'. Amminadab]) : Mt. i. 4; Lk. iii. 33 [not λΥΐΙ. See Β. D. s. V.].* άμμο;, -ου, ή, .vrnd; ace. to a Ilebr. comparison tip. της θαλάσσης and αμ. πάρα τό p^flXos της θαλ. are used for an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Ileb. xi. 12; Rev. XX. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Aoc. to the con- text sandy ground, Mt. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr. often, Plut., Sept. often.) * αμνό;, -oO, ό, [fr. Soph, and Arstph. down], a lamb : Acts viii. 32 ; 1 Pet. i. 19 ; roC θ^οϋ, consecrated to God, Jn. i. 29, 36. In these passages Christ is Ukened to a sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and patiently endured, to expiate sin. See άρνίον.* αμοιβή, -ης, ή, (fr. άμΰβω, as αλοιφή fr. αλείφω, στοιβή fr. στ(ίβω), a very com. word with the Greeks, requital, recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of the mid. άμ(ίβομαι to requite, return like for Hke) : in a good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.* ^ircXos, -ου, ή, [fr. Ilom. down], α vine: Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. xxii. 18 ; Jas. iii. 12. In Jn. xv. 1, 4 sq. Christ calls himself a vine, because, as the vine imparts to its branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses into his followers his own divine strength and life. άμπ. της γης in Rev. xiv. 18 [RecT* om. της άμπ.'], 19, signifies the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruction, are likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off, thrown into the wine-press, and trodden there.* άμίΓΕλονργός, -οϋ, ό, ή, (fr. άμπιλος and ΕΡΓί2), a vine- dresser : Lk. xiii. 7. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al. ; Sept. for D")3.)* όμπελών, -ωνης. ό, a vineyard : Mt. xx. 1 sqq. ; xxi. 28, [33], 39 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sqq.; Lk. [xiii. 6]; xx. 9 sqq.; 1 Co. ix. 7. (Sept. ; Diod. 4, 6 ; Plut. pro nobilit. c. 3.)• Άμιτλίαϊ [Τ '\μπλίατος, Tr WII L mrg. Άμπλιατος; hence accent Άμπλιά? ; cf. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505 ; Chandler § 32], -ου, 6, Amplias (a contraction from the Lat. Ampliatus, which form appears in some authorities, ^ ΑμτΓ\ίατο<; 33 cf. W. 102 (97)), a certain Christian at Rome: Ro. xvi. 8. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 1 74 ; cf. T/ie AthencEum for March 4, 1882, p. 28Γ» sq.] * Άμιτλίοτοβ (Tdf.) or more correctly Ά/ιπλιάτοί (L mrg. Tr WH) i. q. Άμπλΐας, q. v. άμννω: 1 aor. mid. ήμυνάμην; [allied w. Lat. munio, mocn'id, etc., Vanicek p. 731; Curtius § 451]; in Grk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] to tvard off, keep off any thing from any one, τι nui, ace. of the thing and dat. of pers. ; hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assitit any one (Time. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Jlid. αμύνομαι, with ace. of pers., to keep off, ward off, any one from one's self; to defend one's selfar/ainst any one (so also 2 Macc.x. 17 ; Sap. xi. 3 ; Sept. Josh. x. 13) ; to take vengeance on any one (Xen. an. 2, 3,' 23; Joseph, antt. 9, 1, 2) : Acts vii. 24, where in thought supply τόν aSiKoivra [cf. B. 194 (168) note; W. 258 (242)].* άμψιάζω ; [fr. άμφί, lit. to put around] ; to put on, clothe : in Lk. xii. 28 L Wll άμφιάζιι for Rec. άμφιίΐ'ΐ'υσι. (A later Grk. word; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Alex.]; Joh xxix. 14; [xxxi. 19]; xl. 5 ; Ps. Ixxii. 6 Syram. ; several times in Themist. ; cf. Btttn. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 1 1 2 ; [Veitch s. V. ; B. 49 (42 sq.) ; Steph. s. v. col. 201 c. quotes from Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 το μίν άμφύζω ίστ\ Koivws, το δι άμφιάζω Αωρίκον, ωσπιρ το ίποπιίζω κα\ ίϊΓοπίίί^ω].) Cf. άμφίίζω.* άμψι-βάλλω ; to throw around, i. q. πfptβά\\ω, of a gar- ment (Hom. Od. 14, 342) ; to cast to and fro now to one side now to the other : a net, Mk. i. 16 G L Τ Tr WH [ace. to TTrWH used absol. ; cf. oi αμφίβολη!. Is. xLx. 8]. (Ilab. i. 17.)* αμφίβληστρον, -ου, τό, (αμφιβάλλω), in Grk. writ, any- thiiiij thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains, a garment; spec, α net for fishing, \casting-nef]•. Mk. i. IG RGL; Mt. iv. 18. (Sept.; Hes. scut. 215 ; Hdt. 1, 141 ; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Syx. see δικτύου, and cf. Trench § Ixiv. ; B. D. s. v. net.] * άμφκ'ζω, i. q. άμφιϊννυμί \ in Lk. xii. 28 άμφιίζ(ΐ Τ Tr. Cf. άμφίάζω. άμφι-ίννυ\ιι; pf. pass, ημφίισμαι; (ίνννμι) ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to put on, to clothe : Lk. xii. 28 (R G ; cf. άμφύζω) ; Mt.vi.30; ίκτιι/ι[Β. 191 (166)], Lk. vii. 25; Mt. xi. 8.* ■Α|χφί•7Γθλΐ5, -ίωϊ, ή, Amphipolis, the metropolis of Macedonia Prima [cf. B. D. s. v. Macedonia] ; so called, because the Stryraon flowed around it [Thuc. 4, 102]; formerly called 'Ewea οδοί (Thuc. 1,100): Acts xvii. 1 [see B. D.].* αμφο8ον, -ου, τό, (άμφί, όδύς), prop, a road round any- thing, a street, [Ilesych. αμφοδα• al ρΰμαι. ayviai. δίοδοι (al. δΐί'^οδοι δίορυγμαί, al. i; πλατίία) ; Lex. in liekk. An- ecdota i. p. 20.'), Ιί'λμφοδον ή ωσπιρ (κ τ(τραγώνου διιτγίγραμμίνη όδόί. For e.xx. see Soph. Lex. ; AVetst. on Mk. 1. c. ; cod. D in Acts xix. 28 (where see Tdf.'s note)] : Mk. xi. 4. (Jer. xvii. 27; xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and in Grk. writ.) * (ψφότοροι, -αϊ, -α, [fr. Hom. down], both of two, both the one and the other: Mt. ix. 17, etc. ; τα άμφότ(ρα. Acts xxiii. 8 : £ph. ii. 14. ά-μώμτγτοί, -ox, (μωμάομαι), that cannot be censureci, blameless: Phil. ii. Ι.ϋ Rti (cf. τίκνα μωμητά, Deut. xxxii. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Horn. II. 12, 109; [Uesiod, Find., al. ;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)* οίμωμον, -ου, TO, amomum, a fragrant plant of India, having the foliage of the white vine [al. ampeloleuce] and seed, in clusters like grapes, from which ointment was made (Plin. h. n. 12, 13 [28]): Rev. xviii. 13 GL Τ Tr WII. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v.] * ά-μιωμο5, -ov, (μωμοι), without blemish, free from faulti- ness, as a victim without spot or blemish : 1 Pet. i. 1 9 (Lev. xxii. 21); Ileb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is made to the sinless life of Clirist. Ethically, without blemish, faultiest!, unblamable: Eph. i. 4 ; v. 27; Col. i. 22; Phil. ii. 15 LTTrAVII; Jude 24; Rev. xiv. 5. (Often in Sept.; [Ilesiod, Simon., Iambi.], Hdt. 2, 177; Aeschyl. Pers. 185; Theocr. 18, 25.) [Syn. see Trench § ciii. ; Tittmann i. 29 sq.] * Άμ,ών, ό, indecl., Anion, ([ΙΏΝ artificer [but cf. B. D.]), king of Judah, son of Manasseh, and father of Josiah : Mt. i. 10, [L Τ Tr WII -μώς. Cf. B. D.].* Άμώϊ, ό, Amos, (]'ns strong), indecl. prop, name of one of Christ's ancestors : [Alt. i. 1 L Τ Tr \\l\] ; Lk. iii. 25.* civ, a particle indicating that something can or coidd occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of certain fortuitous causes. In Lat. it has no equivalent ; nor do the Eng. haply, perchance. Germ, ivohl (wol), etwa, exactly and everywhere correspond to it. The use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious ex.x. fn Grk. writ., is shown by W. § 42; [cf. B. 216 (186) sqq. Its use in classic Grk. is fully exliibited (by Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.]. It is joined I. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen- tences 1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the impf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 ((-γίνωσκ^ν Sv, sciret, he would know) ; Lk. xvii. 6 (e'Xe'-yeTe an ye would say) ; Jit. xxiii. 30 (non essemus, we should not have been) ; Jn. v. 46 ; viii. 42 ; ix. 41 ; xv. 19 ; xviii. 36 ; 1 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 10 ; iii. 21 [but WII mrg. br.] ; Hcb. iv. 8 ; viii. 4, 7. 2. with the indie. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the plpf. subj. like the fut. ])f. subj., / would have done ii), to express what would have been, if this or that either were (el with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or had been (el with the aor. or plpf. preceding) : Mt. xi. 21 and Lk. x. 13 (Sv μ(τ(νόησαν they would have re- pented) ; Mt. xi. 23 ; xii. 7 (ye would not have con- demned) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 (he would have watched), 22 and Mk. xiii. 20 (no one would have been saved, i. e. all even now would have to be regarded as those who had perished ; cf. W. 304 (286)) ; Jn. iv. 10 (thou would.it have asked); xiv. 2 (fiiTov &v I would have said so) ; 28 (ye would have rejoiced) ; Ro. ix. 29 (ice should have become) ; 1 Co. ii. 8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14. Sometimes tlie condition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered from what is said : Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 (/ should have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given it to the bankers). 3. with the Plupf. : Jn. xi. 21 [R Tr mrg.] (ονκ &v (Τ(θνήκίΐ [L Τ Tr txt. WII άπ(θαΡ€ν} 34 ava tcould not have died, for which, in 32, the aor. οίκ fiv aniaave) ; Jn. xiv. 7 [not Tilf.] (fi with the plpf. pi-oc-od- ing) ; 1 Jn. ii. 19 (>l(ei/ troutii liare remaiiicil icitli us). Sometimes (as in Grk. writ., esp. the later) άκ is omitted, in order to intimate that the thing %vanted but little (impf.) or had Λvanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being done, which yet was not done because the condition was not fulfilled (cf. Alex. Bllm. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858, p. 489 sqq. ; [X. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)]; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 33 ; W. § 42, 2 p. 305 (286)), e. g. Jn. viii. 39 (where the ίίν is spurious) ; xv. 22, 24; xL\. 11; Acts xxvi. 32; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 (av before ΐ^ώκατι has been correctly expunged by LTTrAVlI). II. Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and ad- verbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ, irgenil, etwa). 1. foil, by a past tense of the Indicative, when some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken of ; where, " when the thing itself which is said to have been done is certain, the notion of uncertainty involved in t'l/ belongs rather to the relative, whether pronoun or particle " {Klolz ad Dev. p. 145) [cf. W. § 42, 3 a.] ; Saot Sv a.< manij as : Mk. vi. 56 (όσοι tiv ^πτοντο [η^αντο L• txt. Τ Trtxt. WII] avToi as main/ as Imii-Iied liiiii [cf. 15. 216 (187)]) ; Mk. xi. 24 (όσα άρ ■ιτροσ(υ)^όμ(νοι αΙτείσθ( [Grsb. om. «μ], but L txt. Τ Tr \VH have rightly restored όσα προσ(ύχ(σθ( κ- αΙτ(ΐσθ(). καθότι άν in so far or so often as, accordiiii/ as, ((ierm.yc naclidem i/ernde') : Acts ii. 45; iv. 35. i)! Sv: 1 Co. xii. 2 (in whatever manner ye were led[ef.B.§139, 13; 383(329)sq.]). 2. foll.byaSuI> junctive, a. the Present, concerning that which may have been done, or is usually or constantly done (where the Germ, uses mo(jen); ήνίκα Άν ichrnsoever, as οβεη as : 2 Co. iii. 15 L Τ Tr WII ; or tiv ichoever, he he who he ma;/ : Mt. xvi. 25 (L Τ Tr WII ίάν) ; [Mk. viii. 35 (where TTrAVII fut. indie.; see WH. App. p. 172)] ; Lk. X. 5 (L Τ Tr WH aor.), 8 ; Gal. v. 1 7 (T Tr λΥΗ ϊάν, L br. eav) ; 1 Jn. ii. 5 ; iii. 1 7 ; Ro. ix. 15 (Ex. xxxiii. 19); xvi. 2; 1 Co. xi. 27, etc. όστκάΐ': 1 Co. xvi. 2 [TrWII fall ; WH mrg. aor.] ; Col. iii. 1 7 ( L txt. Tr WII fav). όσοι 5v: Mt. vii. 12 (TWII t'd./) ; xxii. 9 (LTTrAVH ^άν). όπου άν whithersoever : Lk. ix. 57 (L Tr iav) ; Rev. xiv. 4 (LTr [T ed. 7 not 8, WH] have adopted inayti. defended also by B. 228 (196)); Jas. iii. 4 (RG LTr mrg. in br.). όσάκΐ5 άν how οβεη soever : 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. (where LTTrWH ϊάν). ώί άν in u'fiat wa;/ soever: 1 Th. ii. 7 ([cf. EUic. ad loc. ; B. 232 (200)], LTTrWH i'ai/). b. the A ο r i s t, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf . ; os άν. Mt. V. 21, 22 ((ϊπ,ι; whoever, if ever any one shall have said) ; 31 sq. [in vs. 32 L Τ Tr WII read πάί ό άπ-ολύωι/] ; χ. 1 1 ; xxvi. 48 (Tdf . eav) ; Mk. iii. 29. 35 ; ix. 4 1 , etc. δστίΓ άν: Mt. X. 33 [L Tr WH txt. om. άν']; xii. 50; Jn. ,\iv. 13 [Trmrg. WH pres.]; Acts iii. 23 (Tdf. eav), etc. όσοι άν: Mt. xxi. 22 (Treg. uiv) ; xxiii. 3 (T WH iav); Mk.iii. 28 (Tr WH iav) ; Lk. ix. 5 (L Τ Tr WH pres.) ; Jn. xi. 22; Acts ii. 39 (Lchm. oCf ) ; iii. 22. όπου αν: Mk. xiv. 9 (T WH foi') ; ix. 18 (L Τ Tr WH iav). άχρα oS &> until (donee) : 1 Co. xv. 25 Rec. ; Rev. ii. 25. ίωί 5v until (usque dum) : Mt. ii. 13 ; x. 11 ; xxii. 44 ; Mk. vi. 10 ; Lk. xxi. 32 ; 1 Co. iv. 5, etc. iji/iita άν, of fut. time, not until tlun, u-hen ... or then at Itnt/lh, when . . . : 2 Co. iii. 16 (T WH txt.iav) [cf. Kuhner ii. 951 ; Jelf ii. 565]. ώί άν as soon as [B. 232 (200)] : 1 Co. xi. 34 ; Phil. ii. 23. αφ' ου άν iytpef/, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what- ever the time is, when he shall have risen up). But ia» (q. V.) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs men- tioned, instead of άν ; and in many i)laces the Mss. and edd. fluctuate between άν and iav, (exx. of which have already been adduced); [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; 117/. App. p. 1 73 " predominantly άν is found after conso- nants, and iav after vowels "]. Finally, to this head must be referred όταν (i. q. Srf άν) ivith the indie, and much oftener with the subj. (see όταν), and όπως άν, al- though this last came to be used as a final conjunction in the sense, that, if it be po-tsihle : Lk. ii. 35 ; Acts iii. 20 (19) ; XV. 17; Ro. iii. 4 ; see onmt, U. 1 b. [Cf. AV. 309 (290 sq.) ; B. 234 (201).] ΙΠ. άν is joined to the Optat. [W. 303 (284); B. 217(188)]; when a certain condition is laid down, as in wishes, / n'ould that etc. : Acts xxvi. 29 ((Ιξα'ιμην [Tdf. (Ιξάμην~\ άν I could prat), sc. (lid it depend on me) ; in direct iiiieslions [W. 1. c. ; B. 2.14 (219)] : Acts viii. 31 (ηως άν δυναίμην; i. β. on what condition, by what possibility, could I? cf. Xen. oec. 11, 5); Acts xvii. 18 (τι άν θ(\οι . . . \eyeiv what would he say ? it being assumed that he Avishes to utter some defi- nite notion or other) ; Acts ii. 12RG; in dependent sentences and indirect questions in which the nar- rator introduces another's thought [W. § 42,4; B. 1. c.]; Lk. i. 62 ; vi. 11 ; ix. 46 ; [xv. 26 L br. Tr WII ; cf. xviii. 36 Lbr. Trbr. Wllmrg.]; Acts v. 24; x. 17; xvii. 20 R G. IV. άν is found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5 (fi μή τι άν [WH br. άν], except perhaps, sc. ycvoiTo, [but cf. Bttm. as below]), ώί άν, adverbially, tanquam (so already the Vulg.), as if; 2 Co. x. 9 (like οισττίρ άν in (Jrk. writ. ;'cf. Kiihner ii. 210 [§ 398 Anm. 4; Jelf § 430] ; B. 219 (189) ; [L. and S. s. v. D. lU.]). civ. contr. from iav, if; foil, by the subjunc. : Jn. x.x. 23 [Lchm. iav. Also by the (pres.) indie, in 1 Jn. v. 15 Lchm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)]. Further, L Τ Tr WII have received άν in Jn. xiii. 20 ; xvi. 23 ; [so ΛΥΗ Jn. xii. 32 ; cf. W. 291 (274) ; B. 72 (63)].* άνά, prep., prop, upwards, up, (cf. the adv. άνω, opp. to κατά and κάτω), denoting motion from a lower place to a higher [cf. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only with the accus. 1. in the e.xpressions άνά μισόν (or jointly άνάμίσον [so R" Tr in Rev. vii. 17]) into the jnidst, in the midst, amidst, among, between, — with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 25 ; Mk. vii. 31 ; Rev. vii. 17 [on this pass, see μίσος, 2 sub fin.] ; of pers., 1 Co. vi. 5, with which cf. Sir. XXV. 18(1 7) nva μίσον τον (Fritz, των) πΧησίον αυτοϋ; cf. W. § 27, 1 fin. [Β. 332 (285)], (Sir. xxvii. 2 ; 1 Mace. vii. 28 ; xiii. 40, etc. ; in Sept. for γη2, Ex. xxvi. 28 ; Josh, xvi. 9 ; xLx. I ; Diod. 2, 4 άνά μίσον των χ(ΐ\(ων [see μέσο;, 2]) ; άνά μΐρο!, (\\ήζ. per parte.i), in turn, one after an- other, in succession : 1 Co. xiv. 27 [where Reci'writes άνα- ,«pos], (Polyb. 4, 20, 10 ανα μίρος άδ(ΐν). 2. joined to αναβαθμό'; 35 ava'yaiov numerals, it has a distributive force [W. 398 (372); B. 331 sq. ("285)] : Jn. u. 6 {ava μιτρητα! δύο η rpeif two or three metretae apiece) ; Mt. xx. 9 sq. (fXatiov ανά δηνάριον they received each a denarius) ; Lk. ix. 3 [Tr br. W'll om. am; ix. 14]; x. 1 (ανά δύο [λΥΙΙ ανά δίο [δύο]] two by two) ; Mk. vi. 40 (L Ϊ Tr WH κατά) ; [Rev. iv. 8] ; and very often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 39S (372). It is used adverbially in Rev. x.xi. 21 (ora ds ΐκαστοί, like ανά ησ- σαρις, I'lut. Aem. 32 ; cf. W. 249 (234) ; [B. 30 (2G)]). 3. Prefixed to verbs ανά signifies, a. u/nranls, uji, up to, (Lat. ad. Germ, auf), as in ανάκρουαν, ανάβαιναν, άναβάλλαν, άνακράζαν, etc. b. it corresponds to the Lat. ad (Germ, an), to [indicating the goal], as mavay- γί'λλίίν [al. would refer this to d.], άνάπταν. c. it de- notes repetition, renewal, i. q. denuo, anew, over again, as in avayfvvav- d. it corresponds to the Lat. re, retro, back, backn-urd.t, as in άνακάμττταν, άναχωράν, etc. Cf. AV in. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 3 sq.* άνα-βαθμόΐ, -οΰ, ό, (βαθμός, and this fr. βαίνω) ; 1. an ascent. 2. a means of going up, ajlight of steps, a stair : Acts xxi. 35, 40. Exx. fr. Grk. writ, in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324 sq.* άνα-βαΐνω ; [impf . ανάβαιναν Acts iii. 1 ; fut. άναβήσομαι Ro. X. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. άναβίβηκα; 2 aor. άνίβην, ptcp. αναβάς, impv. άναβα Rev. iv. 1 (άνάβηθι Lchm.). plur. nva.iare (for RG άνά,ίητί) Rev. xi. 12 L TTr[WII; cf. TKi/. App.p. 168']; W.§14, Ih.; [B. 54 (47) ; fr. Horn, down]; Sept. for TY)]J,', au to gu up, move to a higher place, ascend : a tree (fVi), Lk. xix. 4 ; upon the roof of a house (fVi). Lk. v. 19 ; into a ship {(Is), ]\Ik. vi. 51; [JUt. xv. 39 GTrt.xt. ; Acts xxi. 6 Tdf.] ; (Is TO Spot, Mt. V. 1 ; Lk. ix. 28 ; Jlk. iii. 13 ; ds το υπ^ρώον. Acts i. 13 ; ds τον ουρανόν, Ro. χ. 6 ; Rev, xi. 12 ; (Is Tovoiip. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52) ; vi. 62, and in the phrase άναβ. πρία τον πατ(ρα, Jn. xx. 1 7. (It is commonly maintained that those persons are fig. said άναβ(βηκίναί (Is τόν ουρανόν, who have penetrated the heavenly mysteries; Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12; Prov. xxiv. 27 (xxx. 4) ; Bar. iii. 29. But in these latter pass, also the expression is to be understood Uterally. And as respects Jn. iii. 13, it must be remembered that Christ brought his knowledge of the divine counsels λτΙιΙι him from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to his incarnation. Jsow the natural language was oiSeis ην iv τω ονρανώ ; but the expression άναβ(βηκ€ν is used because none but Christ could get there except by a s- c e η d i η g. Accordingly d μή refers merely to the idea, involved in aj'a(iie'/3?)Kri', of a past residence inheaven. Cf . Meyer [or Westcott] ad loc.) L sed of travelling to a higher place : ds 'UpoaoX. Mt. xx. 17 sq. ; Mk. x. 32 sq., etc.; eis TO I'epoi', Jn. vii. 14; Lk.xviii. 10. Often the place to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but is easily understood from the context : Acts viii. 31 (into the chariot) ; Mk. xv. 8 (to the palace of the governor, ace. to the reading άναβάχ restored by L Τ Tr txt. WH for R G αναβοήσας), etc. ; or the place alone is men- tioned from which (από, ΐκ) the ascent is made . ]\it. iiL lli ; Acts viii• 39; Rev. xi. 7. b. in a wider sense of things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring up: of a fish swimming up, Mt. xvii. 27 ; of smoke rising up. Rev. viii. 4 ; ix. 2 ; of plants springing up from the ground, Mt. xiii. 7; Mk. iv. 7, 32, (as in Grk. writ.; Theophr. hist, plant. 8, 3, and Hebr. nS>•) ; of things which come up in one's mind (Lat. suboriri) : άναβαίν. (πι την καρδ. or ev ττ) καρδία, Lk. xxiv. 38 ; 1 Co. ii. 9 ; Acts vii. 23 {άνίβη fVl τήν κ. it came into his mind i. e. he re- solved, foil, by inf.), after the Hebr. ^VSk ri'7J,;, Jer. iii. 16, etc. [B. 135 (118)]. Of messages, prayers, deeds, brought up or reported to one in a higher place : Acts X. 4 ; xxi. 31 (tidings came up to the tribune of the cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). [Comp. : προσ-, σνν-αναβαίνω.Ί άνα-βάλλω : 2 aor. mid. άνίβάλόμην ; 1. ίο throw or toss up. 2. to put back or ojf, delay, postpone, (very often in Grk. writ.) ; in this sense also in mid. (prop, to defer for one's self) : τινά, to hold back, delay ; in a forensic sense to put off any one (Lat. ampliare, Cic. Verr. act. 2, 1, 9 § 26) i. e. to defer hearing and decid- ing {adjourn) any one's case : Acts xxiv. 22 ; cf. Kypke [or AVetst.] ad loc* άνα-βίβάζω ; 1 aor. άν(βίβασα ; to cause to go up or as- cend, to draw up, (often in Sept. and Grk. writ.) : Mt. xiii. 48, (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 2 jrpos tjjv γην άν(βίβαζ( τάί (αντον Tptrjp^Ls).* άνα-βλ(πω ; 1 aor. αν(β\(^α ; [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. to look up : Mk. viii. 24, [25 R G L] ; xvi. 4 ; Lk. ,xix. 5 ; xxi. 1 ; Acts xxii. 13 ; Λ τίνα, ibid. ; ds τον oipavov, Mt. xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41; vii. 34, (Plat. Axioch. p. 370b.; Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 9). 2. to recover (lost) sight : Mt. xi. 5; XX. 34; Lk. xviii. 41 sqq., etc. ([Hdt. 2, 111 ;] Plat. Phaedms p. 243 b. παραχρήμα άνϊβ\η\τ(, Arstph. Plut. 126) ; used somewhat loosely also of the man blind from birth who was cured by Christ, Jn. ix. 1 1 ( 1 2) (cf. Mever ad loc), 17 sq. (Pans. 4. 12, 7 (10) συνίβη τόν Όφωνία . . .τον (Κ y(V€Tr}s τνφλον άναβ\(ψαί). Cf. Il'in. De verb, comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 7 sq. άνά-βλ(ψι$. -ίωί, ή, recovery of sight: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Sept. Is. Ixi. 1). [Aristot.]• άνα-βοάω, -ω : 1 aor. άν(βόησα ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; to raise a cry, to cry nut anything, say it shout- ing : Lk. ix. 38 (L Τ Tr WH ^βόησ() ; Mk. xv! 8 (where read άναβα!, see αναβαίνω, a. sub fin.) ; with the addition of φων^ μ(γάλη. ^It. xxvii. 46 [TrWII L mrg. (βόησίΐ, (as Gen. xxvii. 38 ; Is. xxxvi. 13, etc.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iiL p. 6 sq. ; [and see βοάω, fin.].* άνα-βολή, -ής. ή, (αναβάλλω, q. v.), often in Grk. writ., a putting off, delay: ποιιίσθαι αναβοΧήν to interpose (Ut. make) delay. Acts ,\xv. 1 7, (as in Thuc. 2, 42 ; Dion. Hal. 11, 33 ; Plut. CamiU. c. 35).* άναΎαιον, -ου, τό, (fr. ανά and ytxia i. e. y^), prop, any- thing above the ground; hence a room in the upper part ofahouse: Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. 12,(in GL Τ Tr AVH). Also written av^yaiov (which Tdf. formerly adopted ; cf. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. άνακ(ίων'\), άνώγίον (Rec), άνώγίων; on this variety in writing cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 297 sq. ; [Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 358] ; άναγ^ΐ\\ω 36 άναΒίίκνυμι Fritzsche on Mk. p. 611 sq.; B. 13 (12); [WH. App. p. 151].• άν-αγγίλλω ; imjif . άνήγγ(\\ον ; [fut. άναγγιΧω] : 1 aor. ainiyy(i\a; 2 aor. pass, άνηγγίλην, Ko. .\v. 21 ; 1 Pet. i. 12 (several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 31 ; W. 82 (78); [Veitch s. V. oyyf'XXo)]) ; lo announce, male known, [cf. ανά, 3 b.] : τί, Acts xix. 18 ; foil, by ότι, Jn. y. 1.0 [L mrg. WH txt. Τ (Ιπίν] ; όσα κτλ. Acts kiv. 27 ; [Mk. v. 19 R GLmrg.]; [absol. with tls, Mk. v. 14 Rec] ; equiv. to diiclose : τί nvt, Jn. iv. 25; xvi. 13-15; used of the for- mal proclamation of the Christian religion : Acts x.\. 20 ; 1 Pet. i. 12 ; 1 Jn. i. 5 ; jrepi twos, Ro. xv. 21 (Is. lii. 15) ; lo report, bring back tidings, rehearse, used as in Grk. writers (Aeschyl. Prom. 664 (661); Xen. an. 1, 3, 21 ; Polyb. 25, 2, 7) of messengers reporting what they have seen or heard, [cf. ανά u. s.] : τί, Acts xvi. 38 (where L Τ Tr AVII άπήγγ.) ; 2 Co. vii. 7. άνα-Ύΐννάα, -ώ : 1 aor. άνιγΐννησα ; pf. pass, avayfytv- νημαι \ tf) produce again, beget again, beget anew ; metaph. : τινά, thoroughly to change the mind of one, so that he lives a new life and one conformed to the will of God, 1 Pet. i. 3 ; passively ΐκ tivos, ibid. i. 23. (In the same sense in eccl. writ. [cf. Soj)h. Lex. s. v.]. Among prof, auth. used by Joseph, antt. 4, 2. 1 των ex τον στασίαζαν αντοίς άναγαη/ωμίνων [yet Bekker άι/ -γίνομ^νων^ δεινών which originated.)' άνα-γινώσκω ; [impf. άν^/ίνωσκΐν Acts λ'ίϋ. 28] ; 2 aor, άνίγνων, [inf. άναγνωναι Lk. iv. 16], ptcp. dvayvovs; Pass., [pres. αναγιΐ'ώσκομαι] ; 1 aor. άνίγνώσθην ; in prof. auth. 1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately, to acknowledge ; hence 2. lo read, (in this signif. ["first in Find. O. 10 (11). 1"] fr. [Arstph.,] Time, down) : τϊ, Mt. .xxii. 31 ; ]Mk. xii. 10 ; Lk. vi. 3 ; Jn. xix. 20; Acts viii. 30, 32; 2 Co. i. 13; [Gal. iv. 21 Lchm. mrg.] ; Rev. i. 3 ; v. 4 Rec. ; rtra, one's book. Acts viii. 28, 30; e'v with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 5 ; xxi. 42; ilk. xii. 26 ; with ellipsis of tv τω νόμω. Lk. χ. 26 ; foil, by ότι [objective], Mt. xix. 4 ; [foil, by ότι recitative, Mt. x.xi. 16]; τί (-ποίησα, Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes : Mt. xxiv. 15 ; Mk. xiii. 14 ; Acts xv. 31 ; xxiii. 34 ; Eph. iii. 4 ; pass. 2 Co. iii. 2. lo read to others, read aloud : 2 Co. iii. 15; Acts xv. 21, (in both places Μωϋσ^Γ i. q. the books of Moses) ; [Lk. iv. 16 ; Acts xiii. 27] ; 1 Th. V. 27; Col. iv. 16.• αναγκάζω ; [impf. ηνά•γκαζον^ ; 1 aor. ηνάγκασα ; 1 aor. pass, ηναγκάσθην: (fr. ανάγκη); [fr. Soph, down]; to necessitate, compel, drive to, constrain, whether by force, threats, etc., or by persuasion, entreaties, etc., or by other means : τινά, 2 Co. xii. 1 1 (by your behavior towards me); ηνά foil, by inf.. Acts xxvi. 11; xxviii. 19; Gal. ii. 3, 14 (by your example); vi. 12; Mt. xiv. 22; Mk. vi. 45; Lk.'xiv. 23.• αναγκαίος, -ala, -alov, (^ανάγκη), [fr. Hom. down (in vari- ous senses)], necessary ; a. what one cannot do with- out, indispensable : 1 Co. xii. 22 (τα μί\η) ; Tit. iii. 14 (χράαι). b. connected by the bonds of nature or of friendship: Acts x. 24 (αναγκαίοι [A. V. near^ φίλοι). c. what ought according to the law of duly lo be done, what is reijuired by the condition of things: Phil. i. 24. άναγκαΐόν «Vti foil, by ace. with inf.. Acts xiii. 46 ; Heb. viii. 3. άνα-γκα'ιον ήγάσθαι to deem necessary, foil, by inf., Phil. ii. 2.j; 2 Co. L\. 5.• άναγκα<Γτως, adv., by force or conslrairit ; opp. to «ου- σίωί, 1 Pet. v. 2. (Plat. Ax. p. 36G a.)• ανάγκη, -ης, ή ; 1. necessity, imposed either by the external condition of things, or by the law of duty, re- gard to one's advantage, custom, argument : κατ ανάγκην perforce (opp. to κατά ίκούσιον), Pliilem. 14 ; ΐξ ανάγκης of necessity, compelled, 2 Co. ix. 7; lleb. vii. 12 (ntcrs- sarily) ; ΐχω ανάγκην I have (am compelled by) neces- sity, (also in Grk. writ.) : 1 Co. vii. 37 ; lleb. vii. 27 ; foil, by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 R L br. ; Jude 3; dv. /loi ijsiKfiTai necessity is laid upon me, 1 Co. ίχ. 16; ανάγκη (i. q. άναγκαΐόν ίστι) foU. by inf. : Mt. xviii. 7 ; Ro. xiii. 5 ; lleb. ix. 16, 23, (so Grk. writ.). 2. in a sense rare in the classics (Diod. 4, 43), but very common in Hellen- istic writ, (also in Joseph, b. j. 5, 13, 7, etc. ; see W. 30), calamity, distress, straits : Lk. xxi. 23 ; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; 1 Th. iii. 7 ; plur. iv άνάγκαις, 2 Co. vi. 4 ; xii. 10.• άνα-γνωρίζω : 1 aor. pass, avfyvmpiaftjv; lo recognize: Acts vii. 13 [Trtxt. ΛΥΠ txt. (γνωρίσθη~\ was recognized by his brethren, cf. Gen. xiv. 1. (Plat, politic, p. 258 a. αναγνώριζαν τους συγγ^νάς•)* άνά-γνω(Γΐ5ι -(ως, ή, (άναγινώσκω, q. τ.) ; a. α know- ing again, owning. b. reading, [fr. Plato on] : Acts xiii. 15 I 2 Co. iii. 14 ; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i. q. x-ip•:.)• αν-άγω : 2 aor. άνηγαγον, inf. avaya-yt tv, [ptcp. ai^aya- γών] ; Pass., [pres. ανάγομαι] ; 1 aor. [cf. sub fin.] άνή- χθην; [fr. Horn, doivn] ; lo lead up, lo lead or bring into a higher place; foil, by eh with ace. of the place: Lk. ii. 22; iv. 5 [T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.] ; xxii. 66 [T TrWH άπήγαγονί; Acts Lx. 39; xvi. 34; Mt. iv. 1 {ας τ. ΐρημον, sc. fr. the low bank of the Jordan), τίνα €κ ν(κρων fr. the dead in the world below, to the upper world, Heb. xiii. 20 ; Ro. x. 7 ; τινά τω λαώ to bring one forth who has been detained in prison (a lower place), and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4 ; θυσίαν τω α&ωΧω to ofifer sacrifice to the idol, because the victim is lifted up on the altar. Acts vii. 41. Navi- gators are κατ (ζοχην said άνάγ^σθαι (pass, [or mid.]) when they launch out, set sail, put to sea, (so dvayajy^ in Justin. Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 142 [and in the classics]) : Lk. viii. 22 ; Acts xiii. 13; xvi. 11; xviii. 21 ; xx. 3, 13; xxi. [1], 2; xxvii. 2, 4, 12, 21 ; xxviii. 10 sq. (Polyb. 1, 21, 4; 23, 3, etc.) [CoMP. : ίττ-ανάγω.] • άνα-8(ίκνυμ.ι : 1 aor. άνίδ(ΐξα. [impv. ανά8(ΐ^ον; fr. Soph, down] ; to lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all to behold (Germ, aufzeigen) ; hence to show accurately, clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Mace. ii. 8 cf. 6) : Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast chosen). Hence αναδ. τινά Ιο proclaim any one as elected to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general, etc., messenger) : Lk. x. 1, (2 Mace. ix. 14, 23, 25 ; x. 11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48, άνά8€ΐξΐζ 37 αναθΐματίζα 3; 51, 3; Diod. i. 66; 13, 98; Plut. Caes. 37, etc.; Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al.)• Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 12 jq.* άνά-ε<ιξι$, -ΐωί, ή, {άνα5(ίκημι, q. v.), α fowling out, public showing forth ; τών χρόνων, Sir. xliii. G. a pro- claiming, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected to office (Plut. Mar. 8 νπάτων avabfi^it [cf. Polyb. 15, 26, 7]) : Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced [A. V. of his shewingl to the people as the forerunner of the Messiah ; this announcement he himself made at the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).* άνα-δ<χομαι : 1 aor. άv(Sfξάμηv ; fr. Horn, down ; to take up, take upon one's t^e/f, undertake, assume; hence to receive, entertain any one hospitably : Acts xxviii. 7 ; to entertain in one's mind : τάί eVoyyeXias, i. e. to em- brace them with faith, Heb. xi. 1 7.* dva-S(Sοί dc και μ(τ' άκμιβίίιις (ξ(ταζόμ(ΐ/ος ; 14, 10!); 2, 5; Lcian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Plut. Aem. P. 1 [uncertain]; Cat. min. 14; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)* άνά-βημα, -TOf, τύ, {άρατίθημι,), a r/ift consecrated anil laid up ill a temple, a volire oj/ering (see άνάθιμα, 1) : Lk. xxi. 5 [RGTrWII]. (3 Mace. iii. 17; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 2 ; κοσμ(Ίν άναθημασι occurs also in 2 Mace, ix. 16; Plato, Alcib. ii. § 12, p. 148 e. άναθήμασΐ re «- κοσμηκαμ€ν τα Upa αντων, Hdt. 1, 183 το μΐυ drj Upbv οΰτω Κ(κόσμητίΐι • cart δί κα\ ιδία αναθήματα πολλά.)* dvaCScia (Τ \\ΊΙ άναιδία; see Ι, ι), -as, η, {avai&rji, and this fr. ή αιδώς a sense of shame) ; fr. Horn, down ; skaynelessness, impudence : Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate man, persisting in his entreaties; [A. V. imporlunitij]).'' dv-aCpco-Ls, -6ωί, ή, (fr. άναιρίω, 2, q. v.), a destroying, killing, murder, ' taking off ' : Acts viii. 1 ; xxii. 20 llec. (Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4 ; 2 Mace. V. 13. Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 5 ; Ildian. 2, 13, 1.)* av-aipe'w, -ώ; fut. άι/(λώ, 2 Th. ii. 8 (L Τ Tr WH txt. cf. Jud. vii. 13 ; Dion. Hal. 11,18; Diod. Sic. 2, 25 ; cf. W. 82 (78); [B. 53 (47); A'eitch s. v. α'ψίω, " perh. late ίλώ"]), for the usual άναιρησω; 2 aor. avf'iKoV, 2 aor. mid. άνιιΚόμην (but άνίΐΚατο -Vets vii. 21, aveWav Acts X. 39, oi/iiXure Acts ii. 23, in G L Τ Tr W'll, after the Alex, form, cf. W. 73 (71) sq. ; B. 30 (.M) sq. [see αΊρίω']); Pass., pres. άι/αιμοίμα»; \ Άον. ανιιρίθην ; 1. to lake up, to lifi up (from the ground) ; mid. lo take up for myself as mine, to oim, (an exposed infant) : Acts vii. 21 ; (so άναιρύσθαι. Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7; [Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortiuia Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18, etc.]). 2. to take airay, abolish ; a. ordinances, es- tablished customs, (to abrogate) : Heb. .\. 9 : b. a man, to put out of the tvay, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt. 4, 66] Thuc. down) : Mt. ii. 16 ; Lk. x.xii. 2 ; xxiii. 32 ; Acts ii. 23 ; v. 33, 36 ; vii. 28 ; ix. 23 sq. 29 ; x. 30 ; xii. 2; xiii. 28; xxii. 20; xxiii. 15, 21, 27; XXV. 3 ; xxvi. 10 ; 2 Th. ii. 8 L Τ Tr WH txt. ; ίαντόν, to kill one's self. Acts xvi. 27.• av-aiTioSi -ov, (αίτια) guiltless, innocent: Mt. xii. 5, 7. (Often in Grk. Λvrit.; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q. 'pj; Sus. 62.)* άνα-καθ-ίζω : 1 aor. avf κάθισα ; to raise one's self and sit upright: lo sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lchm. mrg. WHmrg. ίκάθισίν}; Acts ix. 40. (Xen. cyn. 5, 7, 19; Plut. Alex. c. 14 ; and often in medical writ. ; with (αυτόν, Plut. Philop. c. 20 ; mid. in sume sense, Plat. Phaedoc.3 p. COb.)' άνα-καιν(ζω ; (καίχόί) ; to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ. auffrischen) : τίνα fir μ(τάνοιαν so to renew that he shall repent, Heb. vi. 6. (Isocr. Areop. 3 ; Philo, leg. ad Gaiura § 11 ; Jo.se])h. antt. 9, 8, 2; Plut. Marcell. c. 6 ; Lcian. Philop. c. 12; Sept. Ps. cii. (eiii.) 5; ciii. (civ.) 30, etc.; eecl. ivrit.) Cf. 117». De verb. com]). Pt. iii. p. 10.* άνα-καινόω, -ώ : [pres. pass, άνακαινοΐμαι^ ; a word peculiar to the apostle Paul ; prop, ta cause to grow up (ανά) neip, to make new ; pass., new strength and vigor is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16 ; to be changed into a new kind of life, o])posed to the former corrupt state. Col. iii. 10. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10 [or Jley. on Cul. I.e.; Test. ,\ii. Patr., test. Levi 16, 17 ανακαινο- ττούω. Cf. Kosllin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq.]• άνα-καίνωσ-ις, -ίωτ, η, a renewal, renovation, comjilete change for the better, (cf. άνακαινόω) : τοί νοόί. object, gen., Ro. xii. 2; ■πνιίματοί άγιου, efteeted by the Holy .Sjiirit, Tit. iii. 5. (Ktym. Magn., Suid. ; [Ilerm. vis. 3, 8, 9 ; other eccl. writ.] ; the simple καίνωσΐ! is found only in Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 10.) [Cf. Trench § xviii.] * άνα-καλνπτω : [Pass^ pres. ptcp. άνακα\υπτύμ(νος ; pf. ]Λι•\ι. άνακίκαλυμμίνος^; to unveil, to uncover (by drawing back the veil), (i. q. TV)}, Job xii. 22 ; Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 16) : κάΧυμμα . . . μη άνακα\υπτόμ€νορ the red . , . not being lifted (lit. unveiled) [so WH punctuate, see W. 534 (497); but L Τ Alf. etc. take the ptcp. as a neut. ace. absol. referring to the clause that follows with oTi : it not being revealed that, etc. ; (for άνακαλ. in this sense see Polyb. 4, 85, 6 ; Tob. xii. 7, 11) ; see Meyer ad loc], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understand- ing, 2 Co. iii. 14, (άνακαλΰπτΐΐν συγκάί^νμμα, Deut. .\,\ii. 30 Alex.) ; άνακίκαλυμμίνω προσώπω with unveiled face, 2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded, but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ. (The word is used by Eur., Xen., [Aristot. de sens. 5, vol. i. p. 444', 25], Polyb., Plut.)• άνα-κάμπτω : fut. ανακάμψω; 1 aor. άνίκαμψα; to bend back, turn back. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth. ; in Sept. i. q. 3'!!') intrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk. X. 6 (where the meaning is, 'your salutation shall leturn to you, as if not spoken ') ; Acts xviii. 21 ; Heb. xi. 15.* άνά-κίΐμαι ; [imj)f. 3 pers. sing, ai/t'icfn-o] ; depon. mid. to be laid up, lidil: Mk. v. 40 R Lbr. [cf. Eng. to lay ouQ- In later iJrk. to lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris [cf. B.D. s. V. Meals] ; the earlier Greeks used κ(ΐσθαι, κατα- κίίσθαι. of. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 sq. ; Fritzsehe [or Wetst.] on Mt. ix. 10) : Mt. Lx. 10; xxii. 10 sq. ; xxvi. 7,20; Mk. [vi. 26TTrWH]; xiv. 18; xvi. 14; Lk. vii. 37 (LTTrWH κατάκ(ΐται) ; .xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec. αυνανακ(ΐμ.) ; xiii. 23, 28. Generally, to eat together, to dine: Jn. vi. 11. [Cf. άναττίπτω, fin. CoMP. : συν-ανά- κξΐμαι.~\ * άνα-κ€ψαλαιόω, -ώ : [pres. pass. άνακ(φα\αιοϋμαι ; 1 aor. mid. inf. άνακ(φα\αιώσασθαι\ ', (fr. κίφαΧαιόω, q. v., and this fr. κ(ψά\αιον, q. v.) ; to sum up (again), to repeat summarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the substance of a speech ; Quintil. 6. 1 ' rerum repetitio et congregatio, quae graece άνακιφάΚαίωσΐ! dicitur ', [fpyox άνακΚίνω 39 άνύ\υσί<ί ρητορικής . . . άvaκfφa\aιώσaσθaι irpos άνάμνησιν, Aristot. frag. 123, vol. v. p. 14!i;i', .'i.'S]) ; so in Ko. .\iii. '■>■ In Eph. i. 10 God is said άνακίφαλαιώσασθαι τα πάντα iv τώ Χριστώ, to bring together again for himself (note the mid.) all things and beings (hitherto disunited by sin) into one combined state of fellowsliip in Christ, the uni- versal bond, [cf. Mey. or Ellic. on Eph. 1. c] ; (Protev. Jac. 13 CIS 6/je άν(κ(φάΚαιώθη ή ιστορία Αδάμ, where cf. Thilo).* άνα-κλίνω : {ut. άνακλινω; 1 aor. άνίκλινα; Pass., 1 aor. άνίκλίθψ; fut. άρακλιθήσομαι; [fr. Hom. down]; to lean against, lean upon ; a. to lay down : τινά, Lk. ii. 7 («V (t^) φάτντ)). b. to make or bid to recline : Mk. vi. .39 (fweTO^ev αϋτοΪΓ, sc. the disciples, άνακλϊναι [-κλιθηναι L Wir txt.] πάντας l e. the people) ; Lk. ix 15 (T Tr WH κατίκλιναν); xii. 37. Pass, to lie back, recline, lie down: Alt. xiv. 1 9 ; of those reclining at table and at feasts, Lk. vii. 36 (RG); xiii. 29; Mt. viii. II, — in the last two pass, used fig. of participation in future blessedness in the Messiah's kingdom.* άνο-κόΐΓτω : 1 aor. άνίκοψα ; to beat bad; checl; (as the course of a ship, Theophr. char. 24 (25), 1 [var.]) ; τινά foil, by an inf. [A. V. hinder^. Gal. v. 7 Rec, where the preceding (τρίχ(τ( shows that Paul was thinking of an obstructed road ; cf. ί'γκόπτω.* άνα-κράζω : 1 aor. [" rare and late," Λ'eitch s. v. κράζω ; Β. ijl (.J3)] άν(κραξα; 2 aor. άνίκραγον (Lk. xxiii. 1« Τ Trtxt. Wll) ; to raise a cry from the depth of the throat, to crij out : Mk. i. 23 ; vi. 49 ; Lk. iv. 33 ; viii. 28 ; x.xiii. 18. Exx. fr. prof. auth. in Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq.* άνα-κρίνω ; 1 aor. avt κρίνα ; Pass., [pres. ανακρίνομαι] ; 1 aor. άν€κρίθην ; (freq. in Grk. writ., esp. Attic) ; prop. by looking throu(fh a series (ανά) of objects or particulars to distinguish (κρίνω) or search afier. Hence a. to investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sift, ques- tion: Acts xvii. 11 (τάί γραφάς) ; 1 Co. χ. 2.J, 27 (not anxiously questioning, sc. whether the meat set before you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Spec, in a forensic sense (often also in Grk. writ.) of a judge, to hold an investigation ; to interrogate, examine, the ac- cused or the rvitnesses; absol.: Lk. xxiii. 14; Acts xxiv. 8. Tti /ά, Acts xii. 1 9 ; xxviii. 18; pass.. Acts iv. 9. Paul has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term άποΚογία shows) when in 1 Co. ix. 3 he speaks of τοίί (μι άνακρίνουσι. investigating me, whetlier I am a true apostle. b. umv. to Judge of, estimate, determine (the excellence or defects of any person or thing) : τι, 1 Co. ii. 15 ; τικά, 1 Co. iv. 3 sq. ; pass., 1 Co. ii. [14], 15 ; xiv. 24. [Cf. Lghtfi. Fresh Revision, etc. iv. § 3 (p. 67 sq. Am. ed.).]* άνά-κριΐΓίς, -(ως, ή. an examination ; as a law-term among the Greeks, the preliminary investigation held for the purpose of gathering evidence for the informa- tion of the judges (Meier and Schomann, Att. Process, pp. 2", [622; cf. Diet, of Antiq. s. v.]); this seems to be the sense of the word in Acts xxv. 26.• ovorKvXC» : 1. to roll up. 2. to roll back : draice- κύλισται ό λίθοι, Mk. xvi. 4 Τ Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen. vi. p. 237 c. ; Lcian. de luctu 8 ; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.)* ανα-κύιιτω : 1 aor. άνίκνψα ; to raise or lift one's self up; a. one's body: Lk. xiii. 11; Jn. viii. 7, 10; (Xen. de re equ. 7, 10, al. ; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one's soul; to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28 ; (Xen. oec. 11, 5; Joseph, b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).* άνα-λαμβάνω ; 2 aor. άνίλαβον ; 1 aor. pass. άνιΚήφθην (άνίλήμφΰην LTTrWII; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54); Λ'eitcll ( s. v. λαμβάνω) ; see λαμβάνω, and s. v. M, μ}) ; [fr. Ildt. down] ; 1. to take up, raise : ds τον οΰρανόν, Mk. xvi. 19; Acts i. 11 ; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. II) ; without case, Actsi. 2, 22; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385)], (Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to carry or use it) : Acts vii. 43 ; Eph. vi. 13, 16. to take to one's self: τινά, in order to conduct him. Acts xxiii. 31 ; or as a companion, 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; or in Acts xx. 13 sq. to take up sc. into the ship.* άνά^ληψίϊ (άνάλημψις L Τ Tr WH ; see M, μ), -(ωϊ, η, (αναλαμβάνω), [fr. Ilippocr. down], a taking up: Lk. ix. 51 (sc. €15 τον ονρανόν of the ascension of Jesus into heaven ; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi § 18 ; Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. s. v. ; and Meyer on Lk. 1. c.]).* άν-αλί<Γκω : fr. the pres. άναλόω [3 pers. sing, άναλοι, 2 Th. ii. 8 WH mrg.] come the fut. αναλώσω ; I aor. άνήλωσα and ανάλωσα [see Λ\■itch] ; I aor. pass, άνηλώ- θην; (the sinqile verb is found only in the pass, άλίσκυμαι to be taken ; but a in άλίσκομαι is short, in άνάΚίσκω long; cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 113; [Veitch s. vv. ; "the diff. quantity, the act. form, the trans, sense of the pf., and above aU the difference of sense, indicate a diff. origin for the two verbs." L. and S.]) ; [fr. Pind. down] ; 1. to expend ; to consume, e. g. χρήματα (to spend money ; very often in Xen.). 2. to consume, use up, destroy : Lk. ix. 54 ; Gal. v. 15 ; 2 Th. ii. 8 R G WH mrg. (Sept. Jer. xxvii. (1.) 7 ; Prov. xxiii. 28 ; Gen. xii. 30, etc.) [CoMP. : κατ-, προσ-αναλίσκω.^* άναλο-γία, -as. ή. (ανάλογος conformable, [iroportional), proportion : κατά την άναλο-γίαν rrji ττίστ^ως, i. q. κατά το μίτρον πίστεως received from God, Ro. xii. 6, cf. 3. (Plat., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.)* dva-XoYC^o^ai : 1 aor. άν€λογισάμην ; dep. mid. to think over, ponder, consider: commonly with ace. of the thing, but in Heb. xii. 3 with ace. of the pers. ' to consider by weighing, comparing,' etc. (3 Mace. vii. 7. Often in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, and Xen. down.) * αναλος, -ov, (αλς salt), saltless, unsalted, (άρτοι άναλοι, Aristot. probl. 21, 5, 1 : SpTot avaXos. Plut. symp. v. quaest. 10 § I) : SXas άναλον salt destitute of pungency, Mk. Lx. 50.• [αναλύω, see αναλίσκω.] άνά-λυ(Γΐΐ, -(ως. ή, (αναλύω, q. v.): 1. an unloosing (as of things woven), a dissolvltig (into separate parts). 2. departure, (a metaphor drawn from loosing from moorings preparatory to setting sail. cf. Hom. Od. \5, 548 ; [or, ace. to others, fr. breaking up an encampment; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 23]), (ierm. .4 ufbruch : 2 Tim. iv. 6 (departure from Ufe ; Philo in Flacc. § 21 [p. 544 ίναΚυω 40 (ίνατταυω ed- Mang.] ή ίκ τοΟ βίου τίλίντοία avά\υσ^s^, [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 5 tyKitpnov κ• TfKdav ίσχον την avaXvaif; Euseb. h. e. 3, 32, 1 μαμτνρίω τον βίον άναλϋσαι, tf. 3, 34]. Cf. draXi/ais άπο συνονσίαί, Joseph, antt. 19, 4, 1).* άνα-λΰω : fut. αναλύσω ; 1 aor. avf\vv avtXvfv; add Ael. V. h. 4, 23 ; [avfXvafv ό (ττίσκοττος Ώλάτων iv κνρίω. Acta et mart. Matth. § 31]). to return, ex των γάμων, Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] cf. Kuinoel [and Wetstein] ad loc. ; (irimm on 2 Mace. viii. 25.* άνομάρτητο5, -ov, (fr. av priv. and the form άμαρτίω), sinless, both one who has not sinned, and one tcho cannot sin. In the former sense in Jn. viii. 7; Deut. xxLx. 19; 2 Mace. viii. 4; xii. 42; [Test. xii. Patr. test. Benj. § 3]. On the use of this word fr. Hdt. down, cf. Ult- mann, Siindlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng. trans, p. 99 ; Cremer s. v.].* άνο-μί'νω ; [fr. Horn, down] ; τινά, to wait for one ((ierm. erharren, or rather heranharren [i. e. to await one whose coming is known or foreseen]), with tiie added notion of patience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [cf. El- licott ad loc.]. Good Greek ; cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 15 sq.* [άνα-μκ'ρα$, i. e. ava μίρος, see ανά, 1.] [ονά-μίσ-ον, i. e. ava μίσον, see ανά, 1.] ανα-μ.ι.μνή<Γκω ; fut. άναμνήσω (fr. the form μνάω) ; Pass., [pres. άναμιμνήσκομαι^ ; 1 aor. άνΐμνησθην ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to call to remembrance, to remind : τινά Tt one of a thing [W. § 32, 4 a.], 1 Co. iv. 17; to admonish, τινά foU. by inf., 2 Tim. i. 6. Pass, to recall to one's own mind, to remember; absol. : Mk. xi. 21. with gen. of the thing, Mk. xiv. 72 Rec. τί, Mk. xiv. 72 L Τ Tr WH ; context- ually, to (remember and) weigh well, consider: 2 Co. vii. 15;"Heb. x. 32; cf. W. § 30, 10 c; [B. § 132, 14]; Matth. ii. p. 820 sq. [Comp. : ΐπ-αναμιμνησκω. Syji. see άνάμνησί! fin.]* ΰ'άμνη(Γΐ$, -ίωί, η, (άναμιμνήσκω), a remembering, recol- lection : (ΐς τ. ^μην άνάμνησιν to call me (affectionately) to remembrance, Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.] ; 1 Co. xi. 24 sq. €v avTals (sc. θνσίαις) άνάμνησις αμαρτιών in offering sacrifices there is a remembrance of sins, i. e. the memory of sins committed is revived by the sacri- fices, Heb. X. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down.* [Stn. ανάμν-ησί!, υπόμνησί! : The tlistinction between these words a.s stated by Ammonius et al. — viz. that ανάμν. denotes an unassisted recalling, ΐπτόμν. a remembrance prompted by auotber, — seems to be not wholly without warrant ; note the force of υπό (cf. our ' surj-^est '). But even in class. Grk. the ivords are easily interchanpeable. Schmidt ch. 14; Trench § cvii. 6, cf. p. 61 note; Ellic. or Holtzm. on 2 Tim. i.5.] άνα-ν^όω, -ω : ίο reneic, (often in Grk. writ.) ; Pass. [W. § 39, 3 N. 3 ; for the mid. has an act. or reciprocal force, cf. 1 Mace. xii. 1 and Grimm ad loc] άνανιοϋσθαι τώ ττνΐύματι to be renewed in mind, i. e. to be spiritually transformed, to take on a new mind [see vois, 1 b. fin. ; nvfif-a, fin.], Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Tittm»nn i. p. 60 ; [Trench §§ Ix. xviii.], and άνακαινόω above." άνα-νήψω : [' in good auth. apparently confined to the pres.'; 1 aor. ανίνηψα^; to return to soberness (f'/c μίθη!, which is added by Grk. writ.) ; metaph. : 2 Tim. ii. 26 (K της τοϋ διαβόλου παγίδοί [W. § 66, 2 d.] to be set free from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind [' one's sober senses ']. (Philo, legg. alleg. ii. § 1 6 Avar vήφfι, τοϋτ ϊστι μ(τανού; add Joseph, antt. C, 11. 10; Ceb. tab. 9; Antonin. 6, 31; Charit. 5, 1.) [See άγρυ- τινίω, fin.] * 'Avavias [WH. Άναν., see their Intr. § 408], -a [but on the gen. cf. B. 20 (18)], ό, Ananias (Π -Jjn, fr. [jn to be gracious, and ΓΤ Jehovah, [cf. Mey. on Acts v. 1]): 1. a certain Christian [at Jerusalem], the husband of Sapphira: Acts v. 1-6. 2. a Christian of Damascus: Acts ix. 10-18 ; xxii. 12sqq. 3. a son of Nedebaeus, and high priest of the Jews c. A. D. 47-59. In the year 66 he was slain by the Sicarii : Acts xxiii. 2 sq. ; xxiv. 1 sq. ; Joseph, antt. 20, 5,2; 6, 2 ; 9,2-4; b. j. 2, 1 7, 6 ; 9. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] • άν-οντ£-ρρητθ5 [AVH άναντίρητο!', see P, p], -ov, (a priv., άντϊ, and ρητΟ! fr. ΡΕΩ to say), not contradicted and not to be contradicted ; undeniable, [noi to be gainsaid'^ ; in the latter sense. Acts xix. 36. (Occasionally in Grk. writ, fr. Polyb. down.)* αναντιρρήτως [WH άναντιρητως, see their App. p. 163, and P, p], adv., without contradiction : Acts x. 29 (I came without gainsaying). Polyb. 23, 8, 11, [al.].* άν-άξιο;, -ov, (a priv. and άξιος), [fr. Soph, down], un- worth// (τινός) : unfl for a thing, 1 Co. vi. 2.* άι^«ξlω$, adv., [fr. Soph, down], in an unworthy man- ner : 1 Co. xi. 27, and 29 Rec. [Cf. W. 463 (431).] * afa.^avai$, -ίωί, η, (αναπαύω), [fr. Mimnerm., Pind. down] ; X. intermission, cessation, of any motion, busi- ness, labor : άνάπαυσιν οΰκ ίχουσι λίγοντίς [Rec. λίγοντα} equiv. to ουκ αναπαύονται λίγυντίς they incessantly say. Rev. iv. 8. 2. rest, recreation : Mt. xii. 43 ; Lk. xi. 24; Rev. xiv. 11, (and often in Grk. writ.); blessed tranquillity of soul, Mt. xi. 29, (Sir. vi. [27] 28 ; Ii. 27 ; Sap. iv. 7). [The word denotes a temporary rest, a respite, e. g. of soldiers ; cf. Schmidt ch. 25 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 7 ; Trench § xh.] * άνα-ιι-ανω : fut. αναπαύσω : 1 aor. άνίπαυσα ; pf. pass. άναπ('πανμαι ; Mid., [pres. αναπαύομαι^ ; fut. άναπαύσομαι (Rev. vi. 11 [Lchm. ed. min., Tdf. edd. 2, 7, WH ; but G L Τ Tr with R -σωνται]), and in the colloquial sjieech of inferior Grk. άναπαήσομαι (Rev. xiv. 13 LTTrWH, cf. Bttm. (57) esp. Eng. trans, p. 64 sq. ; Kuhner i. 886 ; [Tilf. Proleg. p. 123; ΤΓ//. App. p. 170]; see also in ΐπαναπαύω); 1 aor. άν^παυσάμην ; (a common verb fr. Hom. down) : to cause or permit one to cease from any movement or labor in order to recover and collect his strength (note the prefix άνά and distinguish fr. κατα- τταύω, [see άνάπαυσις, fin.]), to gi>:e rest, refresh; mid. to (jive one's self rest, lake rest. So in mid. absol. of rest after travelling, IHk. vi. 31 ; and for taking sleep, Mt. xxvi. 45 ; Mk. xij. 41 ; of the sweet repose one enjoys after avaTreiVo) ίθα 41 ανάσταση toil, Lk. χϋ. 19 ; to keep quiet, of cahn and patient expec- tation, Rev. vi. 11; of the blessed rest of the dead, Rev. xiv. 13 (tK των κόπων exempt from toils [cf. B. 158 (138)]; Plat.Critiasin. ίκμακράίόδοΟ). By a Hebraism ("7^' nij, Isa. xi. 2) TO πνίϋμα (φ' νμάί αναπαύεται rests upon jou, to actuate you, 1 Pet. iv. 14. Act. to refresh, the soul of any one : τινά, Mt. xi. 28 ; to πνεϋμά Ttvos, 1 Co. xvi. 18; τα σπλάγχνα τινός. Pliilem. 20. In pass., Philem. 7; 2 Co. vii. 13 (άπο πάντων υμών from your sight, attentions, intercourse). [CoMP. : ε'π-, /- (-/xai)•]* άνα-^Μω; to stir up by persuasion (cf. Germ, aufreizen), to solicit, incite : τινά τι ποιησαι, Acts xviii. 13. So also in Hdt., Thuc, Plat., Xen., al.» άνάτΓίΐροϊ, a false spelling (arising from itacism, [cf. Phrvn. in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 9, 22 : δια toC η την τρίτην, oil δίά της et διφθόγγου ως οι αμαθ€ίς~\ ) in some Mss. in Lk. xiv. 13. 21 (and adopted by L Tr WH ; [see WH. Ap]). p. 151]) for ανάπηρος, q. v. άνα-η-ίμιτω : 1 aor. ανέπεμψα ; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down] ; 1. to send up ; i. e. a. to a higher place ; b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Pint. Marius c. 1 7 ; [Philo de creat. princip. § 8 ; Joseph, b. j. 2, 20, 5]) : τινά προς τίνα, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15 ; Acts xxv. 21 LTTrWIL 2. to send back; τινά, Philem. 12(11); τινά Tiin, Lk. xxiii. 11.• άνα-ιτηΒάω : [1 aor. ptcp. άΐΌττηδήσαί] ; (Horn. Π. H, 379 ; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.) ; to leap up, spring up, start up : άναπηδησας, ilk. x. 50 L Τ Tr WH ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. (1 S. XX. 34 ; Prov. xviii. 4 [Aid. etc.] ; Tob. ii. 4 ; vi. 3 ; vii. 6.)• άνά-πηροΐ, -ov. (prop. 7π)ρ09 fr. the lowest part to the highest — ανά ; hence Suid. 6 xaff νπερβο\ην πιπηρωμίνος, [cf. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs, maimed, crippled; injured in, or bereft of, some member of the body : Lk. xiv. 13, 21 ανάπηρους, χωΧονς, τνφΧονς. In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain Mss. the spelling άναπίίρους — manifestly false, as aris- ing from itacism. (Plat. Critop. 53 a. ;(ωλο( και τυφ\ο\ καϊ άλλοι ανάπηροι : Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. p. 585', 29 γίνονται ςξ ανάπηρων άνάττηροι ; Lys. ap. Suid. ptva κα\ Ζ>τα ανάπηρος '. 2 Mace. \\ϊ\. 24 τοΐ? μίλεσιν ανάπηρους.')* άνο-^ίτΓτω: 2 aor. άνίπεσον, 3 pers. plur. άνϊπισον Mk. vi. 40 (TTrWH άνέπεσαν): Jn. vi. 10 (LTTrAVH άνίπεσαν). inf. άναπεσύν. impv. άνάπισι Lk. xiv. 10 (Rec. άνάπεσον fr. 1 aor. άνεπεσα, [(Grsb. άνάπεσαι i. e. 1 aor. mid. impv.)]) ; Lk. xvii. 7 [RG άνάπεσαι, cf. WH. App. p. 164; T'i//". Proleg. p. 123; see πίπτωΐ, \>tcp. άναπεσών ; cf. W. § 13, 1 p. 73 (71) ; [B. 39 (34) sq., 67 (59) ; fr. Eur. down] ; to lie back; lie down : absol., Mk. vi. 40 ; Jn. vi. 10, (sc. on the ground) ; eVl τηνγην, Mt. xv. 35 ; (Vt της γης, Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 ; [W. 23 (22)]) for άνακλίνομαι to recline at table : Lk. xi. 37 ; xiv. 10 ; .xvii. 7 ; xxii. 14 ; Jn. xiii. 12 ; x.xi. 20 [al. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back; Jn. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an ac t rather than a state, and in the last pass, differs from άνάκειμαι, vs. 23, by indicating a change of position.]' άνα-πληρόω, -ω; fut. αναπληρώσω; 1 aor. αναπλήρωσα; [pres. pass, άναπληροϋμαι] ; (άι/ά to, up to, e. g. to fill a vessel up to the brim ; up to the appointed measure or standard, Germ, anfiillen); [fr. Eurip. down]; 1. to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6 p. 223) ; hence trop. αμαρτίας, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is stiU wanting to complete the number of their sins ; on the meaning, cf. Gen. xv. 16 ; Dan. viii. 23 ; Lx. 24 ; Mt. xxiii. 32; 2 Mace. vi. 14). άναπληροϋται ή προφητεία the prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completelv corre- sponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. roc νόμον to fulfil i. e. observe the law perfectly, Gal. vi. ?, (Barn. ep. 21 ά^πλ. πάσα» έντολήν) ; τον τέητον τινός to fill the place of any one, 1 Co. xiv. 1 6 (after the rabbin. Dipo N^p to hold the position of any one, [yet cf. Aley. ad loc.]). 2. to supply : το υστέρημα, Phil. ii. 30, (Col. i. 24) ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 7 (they by their presence supplied your place in your ab- sence) ; cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 e. άλλ' εΙ τι εξέλιπαν, σον έργον (sc. εστίν) άναπληρώσαι. Cf. Win. De verb, comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 11 sq. ; [EUic. on Phil. 1. c, or Mey. on Gal. 1. c. CoMP. : άντ-, προσ-αναπληρόωΐ." άναπολό^το5ι -ov, icithout defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20 ; also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1. (Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46 ; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) * «ια^τΓΓύσσω : 1 aor. ανέπτυξα; (ανά — cf. the Germ, auf i. q. auseinander, see αναλύω — and πτύσσω to fold up, roU together) ; to unroll, [i. e. open for reading] : το βιβλίον (as in Hdt. 1, 48 and 125), Lk. iv. 17 [RGT], (2 K. xix. 14). The books of the Hebrews were rolls (jIlSj•?) fastened to [one or] two smooth rods and fur- nished with handles, so that they could be rolled up and unrolled; [cf. B. D. s. v. Writing].* άν-άΐΓτω ; 1 aor. άνήψα ; 1 aor. pass, άνήφθην ; to tight up, kindle : Lk. xii. 49 ; Acts .vxviii. 2 [R G] ; Jas. iii. 5. [From Hdt. down.] • αν-αρίθμητθ5, -ov, (a priv. and άριθμέω), innumerable : Heb. xi. 12. [From Pind. down.]* άνα-σ^ί» ; 1 aor. άνέσεισα ; to shake up ; trop. to stir up, excite, rouse : τον οχλον, Mk. xv. 1 1 ; τον λαόν, Lk. xxiii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91 ; 14, 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 8, 81.)* άνα-ο-κευάζω ; (σκευάζω, fr. σκεύος a vessel, utensil) ; 1. to pack up baggage (Lat. vasa colligere) in order to carry it away to another place: Xen. an. 5, 10, (6, 2) 8. Mid. to move one's furniture (when setting out for some other place, Xen. C_\t. 8, 5, 4 όταν 8ε άνασκευάζωνται, σνντίθησι μεν έκαστος τα σκεύη) ; hence 2. of an enemy dismantling, plundering, a place (Thuc. 4, 116); to overthrow, ravage, destroy, towns, lands, etc. ; trop. ψνχάς, to turn away violently from a right state, to un- settle, subvert : Acts xv. 24.* άνα-σπάω, -ώ : ανασπάσω; 1 aor. pass. ά«στΓα'σΛ;ΐ'; to druirup: Lk. xiv. 5 ; Acts xi. 10. [From Horn, down.]* ova-o-rouriSi -εως, η, (ανίστημι), [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; 1. a raiding up, rising, (e. g. fr. a seat) : Lk. ii. 34 (opp. to πτώσΐΓ; the meaning is 'It lies [or 'is set' A. Λ".] like a stone, which some will lay hold of in order to cUmb; but others will strike against it and fall'). 2. a rising from the dead (eccl. Lat. resurrectio), [AeschyL αναστατοω 42 άνατίθημι Eum. C48]; a. that of Christ : Acts i. 22; ii.31; iv. 33 ; Ro. vi. 5 ; Phil. iu. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; Λvith the addi- tion of vcKpaiv, Ro. i. 4 (a generic phrase : Ihe remrrection- uf-lhc-iUiiil, althoiij;h it has come to pass as yet only in the case of Christ alone; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. § 30, 2 a. fin.); cK νικρών. 1 Pet. i. 3. b. that of all men at the end of till• jirescnt age. This is called simply άνάστασι: or ή άνάστασίί. Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Mk. xii. 18, 23; I.k. XX. 27, 33, 3G ; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18 ; by melon, i. q. the author of resurrection, Jn. xi. 25; with the addition of ή ck νικρων, Lk. xx. 3.") ; Acts iv. 2 ; or simply of τώχ νεκρών [on the distinction which some (e. g. Van Hengel on Ro. i. 4 ; Van Ilengel and Bp. Lghlft. on Phil. iii. 1 1 ; Cremer s. v.) would make between tircse phrases, see W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Mt. xxii. 31; Acts xvii. 32; xxiii. 6 ; xxiv. 15 [Rec], 21 ; xxvi. 23 ; 1 Co. XV. 12 S(i. 21, 42 ; Ileb. vi. 2. άνάστ. ζωη! res- urrection to life (of. fit ζωψ, 2 Mace. vii. 14 [cf. Dan. xii. 2]), and av. TJjs κρίσεως resurrection to judgment, Jn. v. 29, (on the genitives cf. W. 188 (177)) ; the former is ή άνάστ. των δικαίων, Lk. xiv. 14 ; κρί'ιττων άνάστασις, Ileb. xi. 35 (so called in comparison witli a continuance of life on earth, which is spoken of as an ανύσταπί! by a kind of license; [cf. AV. 460 (429)]). 17 άνάστ. ή πρώτη in Rev. XX. 5 sip will be tliat of true Christians, and at the end of a thousand years will be followed by a second resur- rection, that of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq. On the ipiestion whether and in what sense Paul also believed in two resurrections, separated from each other by a definite space of time, cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr. fur wissenschaftl. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the res- urrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were restored to life before burial : Heb. xi. 35.* άναστατόω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άνιστάτωσα ; a verb found no- where in prof, auth., but [in Dan. vii. 23 Sept. ; Deut. xxix. 27 Graec. A'enet.] several times in the O. T. frag- ments of Aijuila [e. g. Ps. x. 1] and Symmachus [e. g. Ps. Iviii. 11 ; Is. xxii. 3], and in Eustatliius, (fr. ανάστατος, driven from one's abode, outcast, or roused up from one's situation ; accordingly equiv. to άνάστατον ποιώ), to slir up, excite, unsettle ; foil, by an ace. a. to excite tumults and seditions in the State : Acts xvii. 6 ; xxi. 38. b. to upset, unsettle, minds by disseminating religious error: Gal. v. 12.* ώα-<ΐΓταυρ<ίω, -c5 ; to raiae up upon a crons, crucify, (ανά as in άνασκολοπίζω) : Heb. vi. 6, (very often in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 9 sq. ; [Winer admits that in Heb. 1. c. the meaning to crucify ai/ain, or a/rexli, may also be assigned to this Terb legitimately, and that the absence of a precedent in prof. writ, for such a sense is, from the nature of the case, not surprising].* )ΐνα-<ΓΤ(νάζω : 1 3.or. άΐ'ΐστίναξα; to draiD siffh.'! up from the bottom of the breast, to sigh deeply: Mk. viii. 12. (Lam. i. 4; Sir. xxv. 18 (17); 2 5Iacc. vi. 30, and in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. choeph. 33."..] Hdt. 1, 86 down.)* άνα-στρίφω ; fut. άΐΌσ7-ρ{'ψ•ίι); [1 aor. άκίστρίΐ/Ό; Pass., pres. άναστρίφομαι^ ; 2 aor. άνιστράφην ; 1. to turn upside down, overturn : τάί τραπίζας, Jn. ii. 15, (δι'φρουί, Horn. E. 23, 436). 2. to turn back; intrans. [W. 251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. reverter, (as in Grk. writ. ; in Sept. i. q. 2W) : Acts v. 22 ; xv. 16 (here ακαστρίψω και has not like the Hebr. 3'i? the force of an advcM-bj {. άνατίτάΚκα; a. trans. to cause to rise : roi- riXiov. Mt. v. 45, (of the earth bring- ing forth plants. Gen. iii. 18; of a river producing something, Hom. R. 5, 777). b. intrans. to rise, arise : light, Mt. iv. 16, (Is. Iviii. 10) ; the sun, Mt. xiii. 6 ; Mk. iv. 6 ; xvi. 2 ; Jas. i. 11 ; the clouds, Lk. .xii. 54 ; φωσφό- ρος, 2 Pet. i. 19. trop. to rise from, be descended from, Heb. vii. 14. The earlier Greeks commonly used ava- TeWfiv of the sun and moon, and eVn-cXXfiv of the stars; but Aelian., Pans., Stob. and other later writ, neglect this distinction ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124 sq. [CoMP. : (ζ-ανατζ\'Κω.~\ * άνα^ίθημ.1 : 2 aor. mid. αν^θίμην : [in various senses fr. Hom. down] ; in the mid. voice to set forth a thing drawn forth, as it were, from some corner {ανά), to set forth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before'\ : τινί τι, Acts άνατοΧή 43 ΑνΒρόνικος XXV. 14 ; Gal. ϋ. 2, (2 Maec. iii. 9 ; [Mic. νϋ. 5] ; Artem. oneir. 2, 64 τιιίι το Svap; Diog. Laert. 2, 17, 16 p. 191 ed. Heubn. I Plut. amat. narr. p. 772 d.) Cf. Fritzschio- rum Opuscc. p. 1C9 ; \_Holslcn, Zum Evang. des Paulus u. d. Petrus p. 256 sq. Comp. : προσ-ανατίβημι.^ * ανατολή, -ης, ή, (fr. ανατέλλω, q. v.), as iu Grk. writ. ; 1. a rising (of the sun and stars) ; light rising e| C^ous, Lk. i. 78. 2. t?ie east (the quarter of the sun's ris- ing) : Mt. ii. 2, 9 ; Rev. xxi. 13 (Grsb. άρατοΚών) ; Ildian. 2, 8, 18 (10) ; 3, 5, 1 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 14, 3, [6 ; 1, 26, 6 ; Mk. xvi. AVH (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 6; Ignat. ad Ro. 2, 2; Melito ap. Euseb. h. e. 4, 26, 14 ; with ήλΙου added, Rev. vii. 2 [R G Τ Tr Wli t.xt.] ; Plur. eastern regions, the east, [W. 1 76 (166)] : Mt. ii. 1 ; viii. 11 ; xxiv. 27 ; Lk. xiii. 29, (Sept., Hdt., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al. ; Philo in Flacc. § 7) ; with the addition of ήλίον, Rev. xvi. 12 \_-λης Τ Tr txt. WH txt. ; vii. ■> L Wll mi-g.].* ava-Tpe'iru ; [1 aor. άνετρ«(/α\ ; to overthrow, overturn, dt stray: [τάς τραττίζας, Jn. ii. 15 WH txt.] ; ethically, to sub tert: οίκους families, Tit. i. 11. tIjv τίνων πίστιν, 2 Tim. ii. 18. (Common in Grk. writ., and in the same sense.)* αναθρέφω : 2 aor. pass, άνιτράφην ; pf. pass. ptcp. ava- Tfepappevos; 1 aor. mid. ai'f^^f\|/u/ii)>'; to nurse up, nour- ish up, (Germ, aufnaliren, aufjiUtern) ; prop, of young children and animals nourished to promote their growth (Xen. mem. 4, 3, 10, etc. ; Sap. vii. 4) ; to briny up : Lk. iv. 16 Τ λΥΗ mrg. ; Acts vii. 20 sq. ; with the predomi- nant idea of forming the mind. Acts xxii. 3, (4 Mace. X. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 4.* άνα-ψαίνω : 1 aor. ανίφανα, Doric for the more com. άνίφηνα, (Acts xxi. 3 U Τ WII [with Erasm., Steph., Mill] ; cf. Passow p. 2199 ; [A'citch, and L. and S., s. v. φαίνω; ΛΥ. 89 (85); Β. 41 (35)]; see ϊπιφαίνω) ; Pass., [pres. αναφαίνομαι^ ; 2 aor. άνιφάνην ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to hriitf/ to liylil, liold up to rieu; show. Pass, to appear, he mu'le apparent: Lk. xix. 11. An unusual phrase is άναφανΐντις την Κύιτρον having sighted Cyprus, for άναφα- νιίσηί ήμίν τη! Κύπρου, Acts .xxi. 3 ; cf. Β. 190 (164) ; W. § 39, 1 a. p. 260 (244) ; here R" Τ WH [see above] read άναφάναντα την Κ. after we had rendered Cyprus visible (to us) ; [K. V. hnil come in sight of Cyprus-I* άνα-φε'ρω ; fut. άνοίσω (Lev. xiv. 20 ; Num. xiv. 33, etc.) ; 1 aor. άvήvfγκa ; 2 aor. ά}^ήν(γκον : [see refP. s. v. φίρω; impi. pass. ην(φ(ρόμην; fr. Horn, down]; 1. to carry or bring up, to lead up ; men to a higher place : Mt. xvii. 1 ; Mk. L\. 2 ; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf. om. ΛΥΗ reject the cl.]. άναφίριιν Tas αμαρτίας ίπι το ξύΧον, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, sc. in order to expi- ate them by suffering death, [cf. W. 428 sq. (399)]). 2. to put upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer, (Sept. for 7\hj;T\ of presentation as a priestly act, cf. Kurtz on Hebr. p. 154 sq.), θυσίας, θυσίαυ. etc., (Isa. Ivii. 6, etc.): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 5; with eVi το θυσιαστηριον added, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20 ; Lev. xiv. 20; [Bar. i. 10; 1 Alacc. iv. 53]) ; [«'αυτ^, Heb. vii. 27, Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. 7rpoff£«'yicar]. Cf. Kurtz u. s. 3. to lift up on one's self, to take upon one's self, i. e. to place on one's self anything as a load to be upborne, to sus- tain: Tas αμαρτίας i. e. by meton. their punishment, Heb. ix. 28 (Is. liii. 12; την πορν^ίαν, Sum. xiv. 33); cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.* άνα-ψωνΕω, -ώ : 1 aor. άν(φώνησα ; to cry out with a loud voice, call aloud, exclaim: Lk. i. 42. (1 Chr. xv. 28 ; .xvi. 4; [Aristot. de mund. C, vol. i. p. 400", 18]; Polyb., often in Plut.)* όνά-χυσΐ5ι -(ως, ή. (άναχίω [to pour forth]), rare in Grk. writ. [Strabo, Philo, Plut. ; άν. ψυχής, in a good sense, Philo de decal. § 10 mid.]; an overflowing, a pouring out : metapb., 1 Pet. iv. 4 ασωτίας άνάχνσις the excess (flood) of riot in which a dissolute life pours itself forth.• όνα-χωρ<'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άνιχώρησα ; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ; 1. to go back; return : Mt. ii. 1 2 S(j. [al. refer this to next head]. 2. to withdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room : Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some other place, or shun sight : Mt.ii. 14,22; iv.l2; .xii. 15; xiv. 13; XV. 21 ; xxvii. 5; Mk. iii. 7; Jn. vi. 15 [Tdf. ^fvyet] ; Acts xxiii. 19 (κατ ιδίαν) ; xxvi. 31.* άι>ά-ψυξι$, -(ως. ή. (άναψΰχω, q. v.), a cooling, refresh- ing : Acts iii. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven ; Vulg. refrigerium. (Ex. viii. 15; Philo de Abr. § 29 ; Strabo 10, p. 459 ; and in ecd. writ.)* άνα-ψνχω : 1 aor. άνίψυξα ; to cool again, to cool off, recover from the effects of heat, (Hom. Od. 4, 568; Ώ. S, 795 ; Plut. Aem. P. 25, etc.) ; trop. to refresh : τινά, one's spirit, by fellowship, consolation, kindnesses, 2 Tim. i. 16. (intrans. to recover breath, take the air, cool off, re- vive, refresh one's self, in Sept. [Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 14; 2 S. xvi. 14 ; Ex. xxiii. 12: 1 S. xvi. 23 ; etc., in] 2 Mace, iv. 46 ; xiii. 11 ; and in the later Grk. writ.)* ανδραίΓοδιστής, -ov. ό, (fr. άv^pa^τoδίζω, and this fr. το άν8ράπο8ον — fr. άνήρ and πους — a slave, a man taken in war and sold into slavery), α slave-dealer, kidnapper, man-stealer, i. e. as well one who unjustly reduces free men to slavery, as one who steals the slaves of others and sells them : 1 Tim. i. 10. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem., Isocr., Lys., Polyb.)* 'AvSpi'as, -ου, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v. ; B. D. s. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ : Jn. i. 40, 44 (41, 45) ; vi. 8 ; xii. 22 ; Mt. iv. 18 ; x. 2 ; 5Ik. i. 16, 29 ; iii. 18 ; xiii. 3 ; Lk. vi. 14 ; Acts i. 13.• dvSpC^u : {ανήρ) ; to make a man of or make brave, (Xen. oec. 5, 4). Mid. pres. ανδρίζομαι; to show one's self a man, be brave: 1 Co. xvi. 13 [A. V. quit you like me;i]. (Often in Sept.; Sir. xxxiv. 25; 1 Mace. ii. 64; Xen.. Plat.. App.. Plut., al.)* 'AvSpoviKos, -ου. ό, Androni'cw<, (a Grk. name, [lit. man of victory ; for its occurrence see Pape, Eigennamen, s. V.]), a Jewish Christian and a kinsman of Paul : Ro xvi. 7,* άνΒροφονο'ί 44 ανίχω άνδρο-ψόνος, -ου, ό, α iiuinslaijer : 1 Tim. i. 9. (2 Mace, ix. 28 ; Horn., Tlat., Dem., al.) [Cf. φονιν:.] ' αν-ίγκλητοϊ, -on, (α priv. and ϊγκαΚίω, q. v.), thai can- not be culled to account, unre/trocaUe, unaccused, blame- less : 1 Co. i. 8 ; Col. i. 22 ; 1 Tim. iii. 10 ; Tit. i. « sq. (3 Maec. V. 31; Xen., Plat, Dem., Aristot., al.) [Cf. Trt-MU'li § ciii.] * άν-ίκ5ιήγητο8, -ov, (a ])riv. and (κ8ιη-γ€θμαι, q. v.), un- spi-akahle, indescrilialile : 2 Co. ix. 15 δωμίά, to describe and commemorate which words fail. (Only in eccl. writ. [Clem. Rom. iCor. 20, 5 ; 49,4 ; Athenag., Theoph., al.].)* άν-ίκ-λάλητοϊ, -ov, (a Jjriv. and (κλιιλ(ω), unspeakable : 1 Pet. i. 8 (to which words are inadequate). ([Diosc. medieam. p. 93 ed. Kuhn] ; Ileliod. ti, 15 p. 252 (296); and in eccl. writ.)* avcKVeiiTTOs, -ov, (a priv. and ίκλιίηω to fail), unfailinf/: Lk. xii. 33. ([llyperid. p. 58* ed. Teiibner] ; Diod. 4, 84 ; 1, 36, cf. 3, 16 ; Pint, de orac. defect, p. 438 d., and in eccl. writ.)* «iv-cKTOs, -Of, and in later Grk. also -as, -ή, -όν [cf. W. 68 (67); B. 25 (22)], {άνίχομαι to bear, endure); fr. Horn, down ; bearable, tolerable : avfKToTcpov ίσται the lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15 ; xi. 22, 24 ; Mk. vi. 11 RLbr. ; Lk. x. 12, 14. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn. down.)' άν-ΐλ^ήμων, -ov, gen. -ovos, (a priv. and ί\(ήμων), without mercij, merciless : Ko. i. 31. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 37 p. 1442% 13]; Prov. v. 9, etc. ; Sir. xiii. 12, etc.; Sap. xii. 5; xix. 1.)* av-4\ios, -ov, without mercij, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 LT Tr WH, unusual form for aw'Xftuc R G. The Greeks said avqkefjs and aveXtfis, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 710 sq. ; W. 100 (95).• αν€μ(ζω: (άνεμος); to arjilate οτ drive by the wind; pres. pass. ptcp. άνίμιζόμινος, Jas. i. 6. Besides only in schol. on Ilom. Od. 12, 336 ΐνθα ην σκίπη προ: το μη άνιμίζ(σθαι, [Hesych. S. ν. άΐΌλ/ζι/Ιαί • άνιμίσαι; .loaunes Moscluis (in Patr. Graec. l.\xxvii. p. 3044 a. ) άν(μίζοντο! τοΟ πλοίου reli/iconte ηαί•«]. The Greeks said ά^^μόω. Cf. κλυδω- νίζομαι* avE^os, -ou, 0, (άω, άημι to breathe, blow, [but etymolo- gists connect άω with Skr. ra, Grk. αήρ, Lat. ventus, Eng. winil, and άνιμοί vi\U\ Skr. on to breathe, etc. ; cf. Curtius §§ 419, 5S7 ; Vanicek p. 28]), [fr. Horn, down], wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [cf. (Trench § Ixxiii.) πν(ϋμα, 1 fin.] : Mt. xi. 7 ; xiv. 24 ; Jas. iii. 4, etc. ; of a very strong and tenqiestuous wind : Mt. vii. 25 ; Mk. iv. 39 ; Lk. viii. 24, etc. oi τίσσαρ^! άν(μοι. the four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)), τη! γη!. Rev. vii. 1 ; hence the four quarters of the heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow) : Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24). Metaph. awfiot τής διδασκαλιαί, variabiUty and empti- ness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14. ov-cvScKTOS, -ov, (a priv. and ev&eicros, and this fr. fVSe- χομαι, q. v.), that cannot be admitted, inndmissdjle, unal- lowable, improper : avivbtierov t στί τοϋ μη ίΧθΰν it cannot be but that they will come, Lk. xvii. 1 [W. 328 (308) ; B. 2G9 (231)]. (Artem. oneir. 2, 70 6 αριθμός npos τον μίλλοντα χρόνον avcvSfKTot, [Uiog. Laert. 7, 50], and sev- eral times in eccl. and Byzant. writ.)* ονίξίρίννητοί,Τ Tr WH -ραίνητο! [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 81 ; B. 58 (50) ; Sturz, De dial, ilaced. ct Alex. p. 11 7 ; see ίραυνάω^, -ov, (a priv. and ί^ιριννάω), that cannot be searrheil out : Ro. xi. 33. (Symm. Prov. .xxv. 3 ; Jer. xvii. 9. Dio Cass. 69, 14.)* άνίξί-κακο!, -ην, (fr. the fut. of ανίχομαι, and κακοί'; cf. classic άλΐ^ίκακος, άμνησικακος), Jialit^nl oj' ills and wroni/s, forbeurin;/: 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Lcian. jud. voc. 9; [Justin M. apol. 1, 16 init.; Pollux 5, 138].)* όν€|ιχνίαστοί, -ov, (a priv. and (ξιχνιάζω to trace out), that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended, [A. V. unsearchabW] : Ro. xi. 33 ; Eph. iii. 8. (Job v. 9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24] ; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. cd. Tdf., Proleg. § xxix.] ; several times in eccl. writ.)* άν-€ΐΓ-αί<Γχυντθ5, -ov, (a priv. and £παισ;^ύ>'ω), (Vulg. incunfusibilis), liacintj no cause to be ashamed : 2 Tim. ii. 15. ([Joseph, antt. 18, 7, 1] ; unused in Grk. ivrit. [W. 236 (221)].)• άν-ίττί-ληΐΓτοβ [L Τ TrAVH -Χημπτο!', see M, fi], -ov, (a priv. and ίπιλαμβάνω), prop, not apprehended, that cannot be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open to censure, irreproachable, [Tittmann i. p. 31 ; Trench § ciii.] : 1 Tim. iii. 2 ; v. 7 ; vi. 14. (Freq. in Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)* άν-ε'ρχομαι : 2 aor. άνηλβον; [fr. Horn, down] ; to f/o up : Jn. vi. 3 ; t(j a hii/her place ; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 1 7 [LTrmrg. άπήλθον], 18; (1 Κ. -xiii. 12). [CoMP. : (π-ανίρχομαι.^ * αν-«σΐ5ι -ίωί, ή, (άνίημι to let loose, slacken, anything tense, e. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing ; spoken of a more tolerable condition in captivity : fxfiv άνισιν to be held in less rigorous confinement [R. \ . hare indulgence^. Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 10 φυ\υκή μίν yap και τήρηπίί ην, μ(τα μίντοι άνίσίω! της fls διαίταχ). relief, rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7 ; from the troubles of poverty, 2 Co. viii. 1 3 ; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; vii. 5. (Sept. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. [Hdt. 5, 28] down.) [Stn . see άνάπαυσις, fin.] * άν-(τίΛ,ω ; pres. pass, άνιτάζομαι ; (ϊτάζω to examine, test); to investigate, examine; τινά, to examine judicially : Acts xxii. 24, 29. (Judg. vi. 29 cod. Alex. ; Sus. [i. e. Dan. (Theod.) init.] 14; [Anaph. Pilati A 6 p. 417 ed. Tdf.]. Not found in prof, auth.)* oviu, prep, with gen., without : 1 Pet. iii. 1 ; iv. 9. with gen. of the pers. without one's will or intervention, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) : Mt. x. 29. [Compared with χωρίς, see Tittm. i. p. 93 sq. ; EUic. on Eph. ii. 12 ; Green, Crit. Notes, etc. (on Ro. iii. 28).]* άν-<ΰ-βίτθ5, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not Jit: Acts xxvii. 12. (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53].)' άν-<νρί<Γκω : 2 aor. avevpov, 3 pers. plur. avfvpav, Lk. ii. 16 (TTrAVH; see ιίρίσκω) ; to find out by search: τινά, Lk. ii. 16; Acts xxi. 4. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 13 sq.* άν-ί'χο) : in the N. T. only in the mid. άνίχομαι ; fut. o.pe\jnov, unless άς be preferred [B. 161 (140); cf. W. 202 (190)]). foil, by μικρόν τι with gen. of both pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (ace. to the reading μου μικρόν τι άφροσίνη! [R•»"»" L TTr WH] ; cf. Meyer ad loc). without acase, 1 Co. iv. 12 (weeni/ure). foil, by ft Ttr, 2 Co. xi. 20. Owing to the context, to bear with i. e. to listen : with gen. of the pers.. Acts xviii. 14 ; of the thing, 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; Heb. .\iu. 22. [CoMP. : προσ- αν£χω.^ * άνεψιέδ, -οϋ, ό, [for ά-νιπτ-ιο! con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne- pos. Germ, niclile, Eng. nephew, niece; Curtius § 342], a cousin : Col. iv. 10. (Num. xxxvi. 1 1 ; Tob. vii. 2.) [Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 306 ; but esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c; also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister's Son.] * άνηθον, -ου, τό, dill, anise [(?) ; cf. BB.DD. s. v. ; Tris- tram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 419 sq.] : A[t. xxiii. 23. (Arstph. nub. 982 ; [Aristot., al.] ; often in Theophr. hist, pi.) • άν^κω; [impf. άνηκαν] ; in Grk. writ, to have come up to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foil, generally by fir T« ; hence in later ΛνΓΪϋ. av^Kti τι τινι somelhinrj apper- tains to one, is due to him sc. to be rendered or performed by others (1 Mace. x. 42 ; xi. 35 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 8), and then ethically τό ανήκον η -hat is due, dutt/, [R. V. befitting'], Philem. 8 ; τα ουκ ανήκοντα ujihecominrj, discreditable, Eph. V. 4 (L Τ Tr WH & ουκ άνηκιν, W.'48G (452) ; [Β. 350 (301)]); impers. ώς άνήκ( as was fitlinrj, sc. ever since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270 (254); cf. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* άν-τ|μ<ρο$, -ov (a priv. and rjpfpus), not tame, savage, fierce : 2 Tim. iii. 3. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Anacr. 1, 7] Aeschyl. down.)* άνήρ, avSpus, 6, a man, Lat. (•/;•. The meanings of this word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage ; for it is employed 1. with a reference to s e x, and so to distinguish a man from a woman ; either a. as a male: Actsviii. 12; xvii. 12; iTim. ii. 12; or b. as a husband: Mt. i. 16; Mk. x. 2 ; .In. iv. 16 sqq. : Ro. vii. 2 sqq.; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27 ; 1 Tim. iii. 2, 12; Tit. i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband : Mt.i. 19; Rev. xxi. 2, etc. 2. with a reference to age, and to dis- tinguish an adult man from a boy : Mt. xiv. 21 ; χ v. 38 (where SvSpts, γυναίκα and παιδία are discriminated) ; with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue : 1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to vijnios) ; Eph. iv. 13 : .las. iii. 2, (in the last two pass. TiXfior άνήρ). 3. univ. ani/ male person, a man ; so where tIs might have been used : Lk. viii. 41; L\. 38 ; Acts vi. 11; x. 5, etc. where άνήρ and Ttf are united: Lk. viii. 27; Acts v. 1 ; x. 1. or άνήρ and oy he u-ho, etc.: Ro. iv. 8; .las. i. 12. where mention is made of something visually done by men, not by women : Lk. xxii. 63 ; Acts v. 36. where angels or other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms of men : Lk. ix. 30 ; xxiv. 4 ; Acts x. 30. where it is so connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force of a substantive: άνήρ αμαρτωλός a sinner, Lk. v. 8; λβττμυΐ avSpfi, Lk. .xvii. 12: or is joined to appellatives: άνήρ φονΐΰί. Acts iii. 14 ; av. προφήτης, Lk. .\.\iv. 19, (X gp C-X, Judg. vi. 8 ; [cf. W. 30 ; § 59, 1 ; B. 82 (72) ; other reff. s. \. άνθρωπος, 4 a. fin.]) ; or to gentile names: άν&ρ(ς Νί«υίται, Mt. xii. 41 ; άνήρ Ίουδαίοί, Acts x.xii. 3; av. Αίθίοψ, Acts viii. 27 ; 3v8. Κύπριοι, Acts xi. 20 ; esp. in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5 d. ; B. 82 (72)], Actsi.ll ; ii. 14; xiii. 16; xvii. 22, etc. ; even ivSpfs ά5(\φοί, Acts i. 16 ; [ii. 29, 37 ; vii. 2] ; xiii. [15], 26, etc. 4. when persons of either sex are included, but named after the more important : Mt. xiv. 35; Acts iv. 4 ; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts 1. c.) to dispute even these examples ; but al. would refer several other instances (esp. Lk. xi. 31 ; Jas. i. 20) to the same head]. άνβ-ίστημι : pf. άνθίστηκα ; 2 aor. αντίστην, [impv. άι^ TiVn/Tf], inf. άντιστηναι: Mid., pres. ανθίσταμαι; impf. άνθιστάμην: (άιπ-ί and ϊστημι); to set against; as in Grk. writ., in the mid., and in the pf. plpf. [having pres. and impf. force, W. 274 (257)] and 2 aor. act., to set one's self against, to withstand, resist, oppose : pf. act., Ro. ix. 19; xiii. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 15 [RG]. 2 aor. act., Mt. v. 39; Lk..xxi. 15; Acts vi. 10; Gal. ii. Π ; Eph. vi. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; [iv. 15 L Τ Tr WH]. impv., Jas. iv. 7 ; 1 Pet. v. 9. ΛΜ. : pres., 2 Tim. iii. 8. impf., Acts xiii. 8.* άνθ-ομολογ€Όμαι, -οΰμαι : [impf. άνθώμοΧογούμην] ; (αντί and όμο'Χογίομαι) ; in Grk. writ. (fr. Dem. down) 1. to reply by professing or by confessing. 2. to agree mutually (in turn), to 7nal:e a compact. 3. to acknowl- edge in the presence of (αντί before, over against; cf. ίζομοΚογΐίσθαι tvavTi κυρίου, 2 Chr. vii. 6) any one, (see Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 19 sq.) : τας αμαρτίας to confess sins, Joseph, antt. 8, 10, 3 [Bekk. reads άνομο- Xoyou/ievout] ; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). τιι/ί, to declare something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give Moni. ππίΐλήΐ', to i/ire up, omit, calm [?], Ejjh. vi. 9 ; (την ίχθραν, Thuc. 3, 10 ; την οργην, Plut. Alex. Μ. 70). to leave, not to uphold, to let sink : Ileb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).* dv-tXcus, -ων, gen. -ω, (ϊλιως, Attic for iXaos), without mere;/, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 [R G]. Found nowhere else [exc. Hdian. epim. 257]. Cf. άνίΚιος.* aviiTTOS, -ov, (νίπτω to wash), unwashed : Mt. xv. 20 ; Mk. vii. 2, and R L mrg. in 5. (Horn. II. 6, 266, etc.)* άν-6θΓτημι : fut. άιιαστί]σω ; 1 aor. άνίστησα ; 2 aor. av- Ιστην, impv. άνάστηθι and (Acts xii. 7 ; Eph. v. 14 and L WH txt. in Acts ix. 1 1 ) ανάστα (AV. § 14, 1 h. ; [B. 47 (40)]); Mid., pres. άνίσταμαι; fut. άναστησομαι ; [fr. Horn, down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1 aor. and fut. act., to cause to rise, raise tip, (Π'ρΠ) ; a. prop, of one lying down : Acts ix. 41. b. to raise up from death : Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54 ; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34, (so in Grk. writ.). c. to raise up, cause to be born : σπίρμα offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [cf. W. 33 (32)] ; τον Χριστόν, Acts ii. 30 Rec. to cause to ap- pear, hrimj forward, τινά τινι one for any one's succor: προφήτην, Acts iii. 22 ; vii. 37 ; το/ τταίδα αντοΰ, Acts iii. 26. II. Intransitively, in the pf. plpf. and 2 aor. act., and in the mid. ; 1. to rise, stand up ; used a. of persons lying down (on a couch or bed) : Mk. i. 35 ; V. 42 ; Lk. viii. 55 ; xi. 7 ; Acts ix. 34, 40. of per- sons lying on the ground: Mk. ix. 27; Lk. xvii. 19; xxii. 46; Acts ix. 6. b. of persons seated: Lk. iv. 16 (άνίστη άναγνώναι) ; Mt. xxvi. 62; Mk. xiv. 60 ; Acts xxiii. 9. c. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere . Mt. ix. 9 ; Mk. ii. 14 ; [x. 50 R G] ; Lk. iv. 38 ; xxiu. 1 ; Acts ix. 39. Hence of those who prepare themselves for a journey, (Germ, sich aufmachen) : Mk. vii. 24 ; x. 1 ; Lk. i. 39; xv. 18, 20; Acts x. 20; xxu. 10. In the same way the Hebr. Dip (esp. Dp'j) is put before verbs of going, departing, etc., according to the well known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to the full pictorial delineation of an action or event; hence formerly DP'l and άναστάς were sometimes incorrectlv said to be redundant ; cf. W. 608 (565). άναστηναι από to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground : Lk. xxii. 45. d. of the dead ; 2 aor., with ix ν^κρώρ added : Mt. xvii. 9 R G WH mrg. ; Mk. ix. 9 sq. ; xii. 25 ; Lk. xvi. 31 ; xxiv. 46 ; Jn. xx. 9 ; Eph. v. 14 (here fig.) ; with (K ν(κρων omitted : Mk. viii. 31 ; xvi. 9 ; Lk. Lx. 8, 1 9, [22 L Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg.] ; xxiv. 7 ; Ro. xiv. 9 Rec. ; so (without ix vfKp.) in the fut. mid. also: jNIt. xii. 41 ; [xvii. 23 L WH mrg.] ; xx. 1 9 [R G L Tr mrg. AVH mrg.] ; Mk. X. 34; Lk. xi.32; xviii. 33; Jn. xi. 23sq.; 1 ThTiv. 16. 2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, proph- ets, priests, leaders of insurgents : Acts v. 36 sq. ; vii. 18. mid., Ro. XV. 12; Heb. vii. 11, 15. of those about to enter into conversation or dispute with any one, Lk. x. 25 ; Acts vi. 9 ; or to undertake some business, Acts v. 6 ; or to attempt sometliing against others, Acts v. 17. Hence άναστηναι cVi τίνα to rise up against ant/ one : Mk. iii. 26, (Si* Dip). [Syx. see (γιίρω, fin. CoMP. : ctt-, €^ανίστημι.^ "Αννα [WH "Αννα, see their Intr. § 408], -as [on this gen. cf. B. 17 (15) ; Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 138], η, Anna, (ΠϊΠ grace), the prop, name of a woman (so in 1 S i. 2 sqq. ; ii. 1 Alex. ; Tob. i. 9, 20, etc.), a prophetess, in other respects unknown : Lk. ii. 36.* "Awas [WIl "Αννας, see their Intr. § 408], -a (on this gen. cf. AV. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59)), ό, (in Joseph. 'Araw-r; fr. Hebr. Jjn to be gracious), a high-priest of the Jews, elevated to the pontificate by Quirinius the governor of S^Tia c. A. P. 6 or 7 ; but afterwards, A. D. 15, deposed by A'alerius Gratus, the procurator of Judasa, who put in his place, first Ismael, son of Phabi, and shortly after Eleazar, son of Annas. From the latter, the office passed to Simon; from Simon c. A. D. 18 to Caiapha.s, (.loseph. antt. 18, 2. 1 sq.): but Annas, even after he had been put out of office, continued to have great iiitlu- ence : Jn. .xviii. 13, 24. This explains the mistake [but ανόητος 48 ανομω•; see reff. below (esp. to Schiirer), and cf. άρχκρήι, 2J by which Luke, in his Gospel iii. 2 (ace. to the true read- in<; άρχκρίωί) and in Acts iv. 6, attributes to liim the ρ intiticate long after he had beer, removed from office. L'f. Win. RVVB. s. v. Annas ; Keim in Schenkel i. p. I. So sq. ; Schiirer in the Zeit.iclir. fiir wissensch. Theol. for 1876, p. 580 sq. [also in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv. ; and BB.DI). s. v.].* a-vOTfTot, -ov, (κοττοΓ fr. νοίω) ; 1. nol understood, unintelligibU ; 2. generally active, not understanding, unwise, foolish: Ro. i. 14 (ojjp. to σοφοί) ; Lk. xxiv. 25; Gal. iii. 1, 3; Tit. iii. 3. ΐπιθυμίαι άιιάητοι, 1 Tim. vi. 9. (Prov. xvii. 28 ; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 13 ; and often in Attic writ. ; [cf. Trench § Ixxv. ; EUic. on Gal. iii. 1 ; Schmidt eh. 147 § 20].)• άνοια, -at, ή, (avovt [i. e. άνοοί without understand- ing]), want of understanding, /olli/ : 2 Tim. iii. '■>. mad- ness expressing itself in rage, Lk. vi. 11, [δύο δ' άνοια; γίνη, το μΐν μανίαν, το 5c άμαθίαν, Plato, Tim. p. 8ΰ b. ]. ([ITieogn. 453] ; Hdt. β, 69 ; Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.)* άν-οίγω ; {ανά, οίγω i. e. olyvvpi) \ fut. ανοίξω ; 1 aor. ήνοιξα and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) άνίωξα (an earlier form) [and ηνίωξα W'H in Jn. ix. 17, 32 (cf. Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when (corrected), but without iota subscr. ; .«ee I, t] ; 2 pf. aviwya {to be or stand open ; cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 s(|. ; lliul/ier/ord, New Phryn. p. 247; Veitch s. v.] ; the Attic writ, give this force mostly to the pf. pas?.); Pas.«., [pres. ανοίγομαι ΛΠ. vii. 8 LTrtxt. Wllmrg. : Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.] ; pf. ptcp. άν^ωγμ^νος and ηνίω-γμίνοί, (ηνοιγμΐνοΐ Acts ix. 8 rdf.) ; 1 aor. άν^ωχθη". ην€ωχθην. aiiil ηι*οίχθην. inf. avf- ωχθήναι (with double augiii. Lk. iii. 21 ) ; 2 aor. ηνοίγην (tlie usual later form); 1 fut. άνοιχθί]σομαι ( Lk. xi. 9 Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. άνοιγήσομαι: (on these forms, in the use of wliich botli codd. and edd. differ much, cf. ['/■ικο-δομ(Ίι>, -ώ : fut. ανοικοδομήσω ; to liuild αηαΐη, ( Vulg. reoii/i/i'co): Acts xv. 16. ([Thuc. 1, 89, 3]; Diod. 11, 39; Plut. Them. 19; Cam. 31; Ildian. 8, 2, 12 (5 ed. Bekk.].)• άνοφΐ, -(ωt ή, {ανοίγω, q. v.), an opening : iv ανοίξίΐ ToC στάματόί μου as often as I open my mouth to sjieak, Eph. vi. 19. (Thuc. 4, 68, 4; των πυλών, id. 4, 07, 3; χηλών, Plut. mor. [symp. 1. ix. quaest. 2, 3] p. 738 c.)* ανομία, -ar, ή, (ovo/ioc); 1. prop, the condition oj one u;itlioul loir, — either because ignorant "^f it, or because violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquit;/, wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (TTrtxt. WH txt. ; cf. αμαρτία, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7 ; Tit. ii. 14 ; 1 Jn. iii. 4. opp. to ή ίικαιοσννη, 2 Co. vi. 14 ; Ilcb. i. 9 [not Tdf.], (Xen. mem. 1, 2. 24 ανομία μάλλον ή δικαιοσύνη χρύιμ(νοι) ; and to ή δικαιοσύνη and ό άyιnσμόt, Κο. vi. 19 {τή ανομία fir την άνομίαν III iiilijuiti/ — per.-^onified — in order to worh Inii/ulri/) ; noif'iv την άνομίαν to do iniquity, act wickedly, Mt. xiii. 41 ; 1 Jn. iii. 4; in the same sense, ίργάζισβαι την αν. Mt. vii. 23 ; plur. at ανομίαι manifestations of dis- regard for law, ini(iuities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. xxxi. (.\xxii.) 1); Heb. viii. 12 [RGL]; .x. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 1, 96] Thuc. down; often in Sept.) [Syn. cf. Trench § Ixvi. ; Tittm. i. 48 ; EUic. on Tit. ii. 14.] • ά-νομοΐ, -ov, (νόμοι) ; 1. destitute of (the Mosaic) law : used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any sugges- tion of ' iniquity ' ; just as in Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where άνομοι άπιρίτμητοι and άλΧότριοι are used together). 2. departing from the law, a violator of the law, lawless, wicked; (Vulg. iniquus ; [also injustusi) : Mk. xv. 28 [R LTrbr.]; Lk. xxii. 37; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.); opp. to 6 di'icotor, 1 Tim. i. 9 ; ό άvoμot (κατ ίξοχήν), he in whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abov άνομο; θ(ού [Β. 169 (147)] (Rec. Λω), 1 Co. Lx. 21. (Very often in Sept.) [Syn. see ανομία, fin.] * Tords with one another, Lk. .\.\iv. 17, [of. 2 Mace. xi. 13].• οντι-δια-τΙβημ.ι : [pres. mid. άντι8ιατίθ(μαι] ; in mid. to place one's self in opposition, to oppose: of heretics, 2 Tim. ii. 25, of. De Wette [or lloltzm.] ad loc. ; (several times in eccl. writ. ; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand in turn : τινά, Diod. e.xc. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed. Dind. ; absol. to retaliate, Pliilo de spec. legg. § 15; de concupisc. § 4]).* ovtCSikosi -01', (5ίκη) ; as subst. 6 αντίδικο! a. an op- ponent in a suit at law : Mt. v. 25 ; Lk. .\ii. 58 ; xviii. 3, (Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an adversary, enemij, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41 ; Sir. xxxiii. 9; 1 S. ii. 10 ; Is. .\li. 11, etc.) : 1 Pet. v. 8 (unless we prefer to regard the devil as here called αντίδικος because he ac- cuses men before God).* άντ1-β€σΐ5, [{τίθημι), fr. Plato down], -ίω?, η ; a. nj)- posillon. b. that irhirh is opposed: 1 Tim. vi. 20 (dp- TiitVeif τη! ψίυδων. -γνώσ- the inventions of false knowl- edge, either mutually oppugnant, or opposed to true Christian doctrine).* όντι.-καβ-ί(Γτημ.ι : 2 aor. άντικατίστην ] [fr. Hdt. down] ; in the trans, tenses 1. to put in place of anotlicr. 2. to place in opposition, (to dispose troops, set an army in line of battle) ; in the intrans. tenses, to stand against, resist: lleb. xii. 4, (Thuc. 1, 02. 71).* άντι-κοιλί'ω, -ω : 1 aor. άντικαΚ^σα ; to invite in turn : τινά, Lk. xiv. 12. [Xen. conviv. 1, 15.]" άντ£-κ£ΐμιαι ; 1. to be set over against, lie opposite to, in a local sense, ([Ilippocr. de aere p. 282 Foes. (191 Chart.) ; Strab. 7, 7, 5] ; Hdian. 6, 2, 4 (2 Bekk.) ; 3, 15, 17 (8 Bekk.) ; [cf. Aristot. decaelo 1, 8 p. 277', 23]). 2. to oppose, he adverse to, withstand : tiki, Lk. .xiii. 1 7 ; .xxi. 15; Gal. V. 17; iTim. i. 10. simply (6) αντικείμενο!, an adversary, [Tittmann ii. il] : 1 Co. xvi. 9 ; Phil. i. L'« ; 2 Th. ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. v. 14. (Dio Cass. 39, 8. Ex. xxiii. 22; 2 Mace. X. 26, etc. ; [see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * dvTiKpu (L Τ WII αντίκρυ! [Chandler § 881 ; Treg. αντικρύ!. Cf. Loh. Path. Klementa ii. 283] ; ad Phryn. p. 444; {Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 500 sq.] ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr ii. 366), adv. of place, over aijainst, opposite: with gen., Acts xx. 15. (Often in Grk. writ. ; Philo de vict. off. § 3 ; de vit. Moys. iii. § 7 ; in Place. § 10.) • άντι-λαμβάνω : Mid., [pres. άνηλαμβάνομαιΊ; 2 aor. άντίλαβόμην; to take in turn or in return, to receive one thin η for another given, to receive instead of; in mid., freq. in Attic prose writ., 1. to lai/ hold of, holdfast to, anything : titoe. 2. to take a person or thing in order as it were to he held, to take to, emhrace ; with a gen. of the pers., to help, succor : Lk. i. 54 ; Acts xx. 35, (Diod. 11,13; Dio Cass. 40, 27 ; 46, 45 ; often in Sept.). with a gen. of the thing, to he a partaker, partake of. της eifpyeaiai of the benefit of the services rendered by the slaves, 1 Tim. vi. 2 ; cf. De Wette ad loc. (μη:( ΐσθί- ων ττΚΐΐόνίύν ηδονών άντιληψεται, Porphyr. de abstin. 1, 46 ; [cf. Eu.seb. h. e. 4, 15, 37 and exx. in Field, Otiiim Norv. pars. iii. ad 1. c.]) [COMP. : σνν-αντι-\αμβάνομαι.^ ' αντι-λί'γω ; [inipf. άπΆί^οκ] ; to speak against, gainsay, contradict; absol.: Acts xiii. 45 [L Tr WII om.]; xxviii. 19; Tit. i. 9. τικί. Acts xiii. 45. foil, by μή and ace. with inf.: Lk. xx. 27 [Lmrg. TrWII Xf'yoiTii], (as in Grk. writ. ; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. ; [λΥ'. § 65, 2 β. ; Β. 355 (305)]). to oppose one's self to one, decline to obey him, declare one's self against him, refuse to have anything to do with him, [cf. W. 23 (22)] : τινί, .In. xix. 12, (Lcian. dial, inferor. 30, 3) ; absol., Ro. x. 21 [cf. Meyer] ; 'J"it. ii. 9, (Achill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. avriKtyopai I am dis- puted, a.isent or compliance is refused vie, (W. § 39, ]): Lk. ii. 34 ; Acts xxviii. 22.* όντί-ληψιβ [L Τ TrWII -Χημψις; see M, μ], -epa and Ciesarea, in a very fertile region, not far from the coast ; formerly called Χαβαρζαβά [al. Καφαρσα- βά (or -σάβα)] (Joseph, antt. 13, l.'i, 1), and afterwards rebuilt by Herod the Great and named Antipatris in lionor of his father Antipater (Joseph, b.j. 1,21, 9): Acts xxiii. 31. Cf. Robinson, Researches etc. iii. 45 sq. ; Later Researches, iii. 138 sq., [also Bib. Sacr. for 1843 pp. 478- 498; and for 1853 p. 528 sq.].* άντι-ΐΓί'ραν, or (ace. to the later forms fr. Polyb. down) άντίπιρα [Τ WIl], avrnrepa [L Tr ; cf. B. 321; Lob. Path. Elem. ii. 206; Chandler § 867], adv. of place, oi-er (if/ainst, on the opposite shore, on the other side, with a gen. : Lk. viii. 26.• άντι^π-ΙτΓτω ; a. to fall upon, run against, [fr. Aristot. down] ; b. to be adverse, oppose, strive against : τινί. Acts vii. 51. (Ex. x.wi. 5 ; xxxvi. 12 ed. Compl. ; Num. xxvii. 14 ; often in Polyb., Plut.)* ώρΓΐ-<Γτρατίνομ.οι ; 1. to make a military expedition, or take the feld, against any one : Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 26. 2. to oppose, war against : rtw, Ro. vii. 23. (Aristaenet. 2, 1, 13.)• άντίΓ^ιύτσω or -ττω : [pros. mid. αντιτάσσομαι] : to range in battle against; mid. to oppose one's self, resist : tiki, Ro. xiii. 2 ; Jas. iv. 6 ; v. 6 ; 1 Pet. v. 5 ; cf. Prov. iii. 34. absol.. Acts xviii. 6. (Used by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * «ivTC-Tviros, -ov, (τύπτω), in Grk. writ. 1. prop. a. actively, repelling a blow, striking back, echoing, reflecting light ; resisting, rough, hard. b. passively, struck back, repelled. 2. metaph. rough, harsh, obstinate, hostile. In the N. T. language αντίτυπου as a subst. means 1. (1 thi7ig formed after some pattern (τΰποΓ [q. v. 4 a.]), (Germ. Abbild) : lleb. Lx. 24 [R. V. like in pattern]. 2. a thing resembling another, its counterpart; something in the Messianic times which answers to the type (see Tvnos, 4 y.) prefiguring it in the 0. T. (Germ. Gegenbild, Eng. antitype), as baptism corresponds to the deluge : 1 Pet. iii. 21 [R. V. txt. after a true likeness].* ovrt-xpicTTos, -ου, ό, (αντί against and Χριστοί, like άντίθίο! opposing God, in Philo de somn. 1. ii. § 27, etc., Justin, quaest. et resp. p. 463 c. and other Fathers ; [see Soph. Lex. s. v., cf. Trench § xxx.]), tlie adversary of the Messiah, a most pestilent being, to appear just before the Messiah's advent, concerning whom the Jews liad con- ceived diverse opinions, derived partly fr. Dan. xi. 36 sqq. ; vii. 25 ; viii. 25, partly fr. Ezek. x.xxviii. xxxLx. Cf. Eisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, ii. 704 sqq. ; Gesenius in Ersch and Gruber's Encycl. iv. 292 sqq. s. V. Antichrist ; Bohmer, Die Lehre v. Antichrist nach Schneckenburger, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. vol. iv. p. 405 sqq. The name ό αντίχριστος was formed perhaps by John, the only writer in the N. T. who uses it, [five times] ; he employs it of the corrupt power and influence hostile to Christian interests, especially that which is at work in false teachers who have come from the bosom of the church and are engaged in disseminating error: 1 Jn. ii. 18 (where the meaning is, 'what ye have heard concerning Antichrist, as about to make his ap- pearance just before the return of Christ, is now fulfiUtMl in the manv false teachers, most worthy to be called antichrists,' [on the om. of the art. cf. B. 89 (78)]) ; 1 Jn. iv. 3 ; and of the false teachers themselves, 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; 2 Jn. 7. In Paul and the Rev. the idea but not the η a m e of Antichrist is found ; yet the conception differs from that of John. For Paul teaches that Antichrist will be an individual man [cf . B. D. as below], of the very worst character (τον ανθρ. της άμαρτίαί; see αμαρτία, 1), in- stigated by the devil to try to palm himself off as God : 2 Th. ii. 3-10. The author of the Apocalypse discovers the power of Antichrist in the sway of imperial Rome, and his person in the Emperor Nero, soon to return from the dead : Rev. xiii. and xvii. (Often in eccl. writ.) [See B. D. s.v. (Am. ed. for additional reff.), also B. D. 8. V. Thess. 2d Ep. to the ; Kdhler in Herzog ed. 2, i. 446 sq.; Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 68, 89. j* ώτλίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ήντ'λησα ; pt. ήντληκα ; (fr. ό SvrXot, or TO "ivrXov, bilge-Λvater, [or rather, the place in the hold where it settles, Eustath. com. in Ilom. 1728, 58 6 τόποι ΐνθα ΰδωρ συρρ((ΐ, τά Te άνωθεν κα\ ίκ των αρμονίων]) ; a. prop, to draw out a ship's bilge-water, to bale or punw αντΧτημ,α 52 αξιο<; Dili. b. univ. to draw water : Jn. ii. S ; iv. 15 ; ΰδωρ, .In. ii. 9; iv. 7. (Gen. xxiv. 13, 20; Ex. ii. 16, 19 ; Is. xU. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. lldt. tlown.) * Αντλημα, -Tor, to ; a. prop, irltat is drawn, (Dioscor. 4, 64). b. Me at•/ w/V)-φθα\μος looking in the eye) ; 1. prop. Id look nrjdinst or straii/lit at. 2. metaph. to Ixar 11/) at/ainul, withstand : τώ άνίμω, of a ship, [cf. our 'look the wind in the eye,' ' face ' (U. V.) tlie wind] : Acts xxvii. 1.^. (Sap. xii. 14; often in Polyb. ; in eccl. writ.)* &wSpo$, -oi/, (a priv. and ΰδωρ), ivithout water: πηγαί, 2 Pet. ii. 1 7 ; τόττοι, desert places, Alt. xii. 43 ; Lk. xi. 24, (ή SvvSpos the desert, Is. xliii. 1 9 ; Ildt. 3, 4, etc. ; in Sept. often γη anSpot), [desert places were believed to be the haunts of demons; see Is. xiii. 21 ; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.), and Gesen. or Alex, on the former pass. ; cf. further. Bar. iv. 35 ; Tob. viii. 3 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 8 ; (Enoch x. 4) ; Rev. xviii. 2 ; cf. d. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Ge.sell. xxi. 609] ; «φίλαι, waterless clouds (Verg. georg. 3, 197 s(i. arida nuhUa), which promise rain but yield none, .lude 12. (In Grk. writ. fr. lldt. down.)* QV-uiroKpiTos, -ow, (a priv. and υποκρίνομαι), unfeigned, niidisr/uised : Ro. xii. 9 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; 1 Tim. i. 5 ; 2 Tim. i. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22 ; Jas. iii. 17. (Sap. v. 19 ; xviii. 16. Not found in prof, auth., except the adv. αννποκρίτωί in Antonin. 8, 5.)* άίππΓο'τακτοϊ, -ov, (a priv. and υποτάσσω) ; 1. [pas- sively] not made subject, unsulijected : Ileb. ii. 8, [Artem. oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [actively] that cannot be subjected to control, disobedient, unruli/, refractory : 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. i. 6, 10, ([Epict. 2, 10, 1 ; 4, 1, 161 ; Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 1]; ίιήγησί! άνυπ. a narrative which the reader cannot classify, i. e. confused, Polyb. 3, 36, 4 ; 3, 3§, 4 ; 5, 21,4).• ίνω, adv., [fr. Horn, down]; a. above, in a higher place, (opp. to κάτω) : Acts ii. 19; ivith the article, ό, ή, το ανω : Gal. iv. 26 (ή άνω '{(ρουσαλήμ the upper i. e. the heavenly .Jerusalem) ; Phil. iii. 14 (ij άνω κλησκ the call- ing made in heaven, equiv. to ίπουράνιοί, Ileb. iii. 1); the neut. plur. τα άνω as subst., hea\enly things, Col. iii. 1 sq. ; e. from the first: Lk. i. 3; then, from the begin- ning on, from the very first : Acts xxvi. 5. Hence c. anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a use some- what rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among them ; cf. his comm. on .In. and Gal. as below]) : Jn. iii. 3, 7 άν. γίννηθηναι, where others explain it from above, i. e. from heaven. But, ace. to this exjilanation, Nicodemus ought to have wondered how it was possible for any one to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; [cf. Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 63]. Of the repetition of phys- ical birth, we read in Artem. oneir. 1, 13 (14) p. 18 [i. p. 26 ed. lleiff] (άι/δρΐ) ίτι τώ c;(oit» ΐγκυον γυναίκα σήμαινα iraiba αντω γ(ννησ€σθαι ομοιον κατά πάντα, οΰτω γΰμ άνωθεν αυτός do^fif γΐννάσθαι ; cf. .Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 3 φιλίαν άνωθιν ποκ'ισθαι, where a little before stands προτί'ρα φίλια; add, Martyr. Polyc. 1, 1 ; [also .Socrates in Stub. Hor. cxxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meinekc {iii. 438 ed. Gaisf.) ; Ilarpocration, Lex. s. vv. άναίικάσασθαι, άναθί- σθαι, άναποΒιζύμινα, άνασϋνταξί! ; Canon, apost. 4(ϊ (al. 39, Coteler. patr. apost. opp. i. 444) ; Pseudo-Basil, de bapt. 1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537) ; Origen in Joann. t. xx. c. 12 (opp. iv. 322 c. De la Rue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fijurlli Gospel, etc. (Boston 1S80) p. 34 sq.]. πάλιν άνωθιν (on this combination of synonymous words cf. Kiihncr § .Ί34, 1 ; [Jelf § 777, 1]; Grimm on Sap. xi.x. 5 (6)) : (ial. iv. 9 (again, since ye were in bondage once before).* <ΐνωτ(ρι.κ6$. -η, -Of, {άνώτ(μοί), u/ipcr: τα άνωτιρικα μίρη, Acts xi.x. 1 (i. e. the part of Asia Minor more remote from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is used by [Hippocr. and] Galen.)* ovUTcpos. -tpa, -epnv, (compar. tr. άνω, cf. κατώτερος, see W. §11, 2 c.; [B. 28 (24 sip)]), higher. The neut. άκώτίρον as adv., /i/(//ier; a. oimotion, to a higher place, {up higher) : Lk. xiv. 10. b. of rest, in ared (Num. xv. 19-21), Ro. xi. 16. Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons consecrated to God, leading the rest in time: απ. τη! Άχαια! the first person in Achaia to enroll himself as a Christian, 1 Co. xvi. 15; with eit Χριστόν added, Ro. xvi. 5 ; with a reference to the moral creation effected by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called απαρχή τ is (a kind of first-fruits) τών toD Beov κτισμάτων, Jas. i. 18 (see Huther ad loc), [noteworthy is eiXaro νμα! ό deos άπαρχήν etc. as first-fruits^ 2 Th. ii. 13 L Tr mrg. AVII mrg.; Christ is calleil άπ- τών κ^κοιμημίνων as the first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep, 1 Co. XV. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is guaranteed ; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the har- vest), b. of persons superior in e χ c e 1 1 e η c e to others of the same class : so in Rev. xiv. 4 of a certain class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ beyond all others, (Schol. ad Eur. Or. 96 άπηρχή ίΚί- yfTO οΰ μόνον το πρώτον τή τάξΐΐ. αλλά κα\ το πρώτον rfj τιμή). C. οί €χοντΐ5 την άπ. τοϋ ττνΐνματος who have the first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (τοΟ πν. is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23 ; cf. what AViner § 59, 8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see AA^eiss in ed. 6] who take τοΟ ητ. asa partitive gen., so that oi €χ. τ. άπ. τοϋ πν. are distinguished from the great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph..] Hdt. down.) * ot-iras. -ασα. -αν, (fr. άμα [or rather ά (Skr. .ia ; cf. α copulative), see Curtius § 598 ; Vaniiek p. 972] and nis ; stronger than the simple Trot), [fr. Hom. down] ; r/uite αναστται^ομαί 55 ατΓΐΐραστος all, the whole, all together, all ; it is either placed before a subst. having the art., as Lk. iii. 21 ; viii. 37 ; xix. 37 ; or placed after, as Mk. xvi. 15 («s τόι» κόσμον άπαντα into all parts of the world) ; Lk. iv. (i (this dominion ichole-ly i. e. all parts of this dominion which you see) ; xix. 48. used absolutely, — in the maso., as Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. iii. 16 [T WH Tr" mrg. πάσιν] ; [iv. 40 WH txt. Tr mrg.] ; v. 26 ; L\. 15 [WH mrg. πάντας^ ; ilk. xi. 32 [Lchm. πάντί?] ; Jas. iii. 2; — in the neut., as Mt. xxviii. 11; Lk. v. 28 [R G] ; Acts ii. 44 ; iv. 32 [L ΛλΉ Tr mrg. πάντα] ; χ. 8 ; xi. 10 ; Eph. vi. 13 ; once in John viz. iv. 25 Τ Tr WII ; [SffoiTef oJtoi, Acts ii. 7 L Τ ; άπαντ€! ύμfΐs, Gal. iii. 28 Τ Tr; cf. πάί, Π. 1 fin. Rarely used by Paul; most fre- quently by Luke. On its occurrence, cf. Alford, Grk. Test. vol. ii. Proleg. p. 81 ; Ellicott on 1 Tim. i. 16]. ά•ΐΓ-ασιτάζο|ΐαι : 1 aor. άπησπασάμην ; to salute on leav- ing, hid farfirell, take leave of: τινά. Acts xxi. 6 L Τ Tr λΥΙΙ. (Ilimer. eclog. ex Phot. IL p. 194.)• απατάω,- ώ ; 1 aor. pass, ήπατήθην; (απάτη); fr. Horn, down ; to cheat, deceive, beguile : τήν KapSiav αυτοΰ [RT Tr \VH mrg., αίτ. G, eavr. L AVH txt.], Jas. 5. 26 ; τινά τινι, one with a thing, Eph. v. 6 ; pass. 1 Tim. li. 14 (where L Τ Tr WH (ξαπατηθ€Ίσα).οί. fien. iii. 13. [CoMP. . ί'έ-απ-ατάω.]• άττάτη. -ης, ή. [fr. Horn, down], deceit, deceitfulnesn : Col. ii. 8 ; τον πλούτου, Mt. xiii. 22 ; Mk. iv. Ill ; τητ aStxt'o;, 2 Th. ii. 10; της αμαρτίας, ileb. iii. 13; ai ΐπίθνμίαι της απάτης the lusts excited by deceit, i. e. by deceitful influ- ences seducing to sin, Ejih. iv. 22, (others, 'deceitful lusts ' ; but cf. Mey. ad loc.). Plur. άπάται : 2 Pet. ii. 13 (where L Tr txt. WH mrg. iv άγάπαις), by a paragram (or verbal play) applied to the agapae or love-feasts (cf. αγάπη, 2), because these were transformed by base men into seductive revels.* άπάτωρ, -ορός, ό, ή, (πατήρ), a word which has almost the same variety of senses as άμήτωρ, q. v. ; [fr. Soph. down] ; [icithout father i. e.] whose father is not recorded in the genealogies : Heb. vii. 3.* άΐΓ-αίγασ-μο, -ror, to, (fr. απανγάζω to emit brightness, and this fr. avyj) brightness ; cf. άποσκίασμα, άπ^Ικασμα, απίΐκόνισμα, άπήχημα), reflected brightness : Christ is called in Heb. i. 3 άπανγ. της δόξης τοΰ θ(οϋ, inasmuch as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God ; so that the same thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically, which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii. 45 (xiv. 9) : ό θιωρων ΐμί θ(ωρ(ϊ τοι» πίμψαντά μ€. (Sap. TU. 26 ; Philo, mund. opif, § 51 ; plant. Xoe § 1 2 ; de con- cup, § 11; and often in eccl. writ.; see more fully in Grimm on Sap. 1. c, p. 161 sq.) [Some interpreters still adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distin- guished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad loc. ; Soph. Lex. s. v, ; Cremer s, v.] * dir-{tSov, (από and «Γδον. 2 aor. of obsol. ίϊδω), serves as 2 aor. of αφοράω, (cf. Germ. a^.^eAen) ; 1. to look aiL-ay from one thing and at another. 2. to look at from somewhere, either from a distance or from a certain present condition of things; to perceive : ur ά» απι'δω (L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ άφίδω [see άψ^δοκ]) τα Trepi f^ie as soon as I shall have seen what issue my affairs will have [A. V. fiow it will go with me], Phil. ii. 23. (In Sept., Jon. iv. 5, etc.)• anlSua [WH -θία, exc. in Heb. as below (see I, i)],-ar, ή, (άπ(ίβής), disobedience, (Jerome, inobedientia), obsti- nacy, and in the X. T. particularly obstinate opposition to the divine will : Ro. xi. 30, 32 ; Heb. iv. 6,11; «iol τ. απά- θειας, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see ν'ιός, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph. ii, 2 ; v, 6 ; Col. iii. 6 [R G L br.]. (Xen. mem. 3,5,5; Plut., al.) * iamiia, -a ; impf. ηπεΐθουν; 1 aor. ήπιίθησα ; to be άπιιθής (q. V.) ; not to allow one's self to be persuaded ; not to com- ply with ; a. to refu.^e or withhold belief (in Christ, in the gospel ; opp. to πιστ(ΰω) : τω υΐώ, Jn. iii. 36 ; τω λόγω, 1 Pet. ii, 8; iii. 1 ; absol. of those who reject the gospel, [R. V. to be disobedient ; cf. b.] : Acts xiv. 2 ; xvii. 5 [Rec] ; xLx, 9 ; Ro. xv, 31 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (T Tr WH άπιστονσιν). b. to refuse belief and obedience : with dat. of thing or of pers., Ro. ii. 8 (τρ αΚηθιΊα) ; xi. 30 sq. (τώ β(ω) ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; absol, Ro. x. 21 (Is. L\v. 2) ; Heb. iii'. 18 ; xi. 31 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to ΓΤίρ, lie ; In Grk. writ, often fr. Aeschyl. Ag. 1049 down ; in Horn, et al. άπιθ^Ίν.) * άΐΓ^ιθή;. -«, gen. -oCi, (π(ίβομαι), impersuasible, uncom- pliant, contumacious, [A. Λ'. disobedient'] : absol., Lk. i. 17 ; Tit, i. 16 ; iii. 3 ; τινί, 2 Tim. iii. 2 ; Ro. i. 30 ; Acts xxvi. 19. (Deut. xxi. 18; Xum. xx. 10; Is. xx:x. 9; Zech. vii, 1 2 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down ; [in Theogn, 1235 actively not persuasive].)* άπ«λ(ω, -ά> : impf. ήπιιΚονν ; 1 aor. mid. ηπιιλησάμην ; to threaten, menace ; 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; in mid., ace. to later Grk, usage ([App, bell. civ. 3, 29] ; Polyaen. 7, 35, 2), actively [B. 54 (47)] : Acts iv. 1 7 (άττ^λ, [L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ cm,] άπ(ΐ\(Ίσθαι, with dat, of pers, foil, by μή with inf,, with sternest threats to forbid one to etc, W, § 54, 3 ; [B. 183 (159)]). (From Horn, down.) [CoMP. : προσ- απf ιλ€ω-] * άΐΓίΐλή, -ης, ή, α threatening, threat : Acts iv, 17 R G (cf. άπίΐΧίω), 29 ; Lx. 1 ; Eph. vi. 9. (From Horn, down.) * απ -ciiu ; («fii to be) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to be away, be absent : 1 Co. v. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 1, 11 ; xiii. 2, 10 ; Col. ii. 5 ; Phil, i, 27 ; [in all cases exc. Col, 1. c. opp, to πάραμι].* άΐΓ-ίίμι : impf. 3 pers, plur, άττ^ισαν ; (ιΊμι to go) ; [fr. Hom, down] : to go away, depart : Acts xvii, 10,* oiT-iiirov : (ίΓττοί', 2 aor. fr. obsol. ίπω) ; 1. to speak out, set forth, declare, (Ilom. II. 7, 416 άγγ(\ίην ancenrfv, 9, 309 τον μΰθον άποίΐπ(Ίν). 2. to forbid : 1 Κ. xi, 2, and in Attic writ, 3, to give up, renounce : with ace. of the thing. Job x. 3 (for CN3), and often in Grk. writ, fr, Hom, down. In the same sense 1 aor, mid. άπ(ΐπάμην, 2 Co. iv. 2 [see WH. App. p. 164], (cf. αισχύνη, 1) ; so too in Hdt. 1, 59 ; 5, 56 ; 7, 14, [etc.], and the later writ, fr. I'nlyb, down,* QTetpcuTTos. -ov, (π(ΐράζω), as well untempted as un- templable : άπιΐραστος κακών that cannot be tempted by evil, not liable to temptation to sin. Jas. i. 13; cf. the full remarks on this pass, in W. § 30, 4 [cf. § IC, 3 a. : B. 170(148)]. (Joseph, b. j. 5, 9, 3 : 7, 8, 1, and eccl. writ The Greeks said άπίίρατοΐ, fr. πίΐράω.) ' ατΓΕ/,οο? 56 ατΓΐρ-χομαί aircipos, -nv, (πύρα trial, experience), inexperienced in. without fxperience of, with ^en. of the thin"; (as in Grk. writ.) • lleb. V. IS. [(Pind. and Ildt. down.)] * άΐΓ-«κ-είχομ.οι ; [iiiipf. άη(ζ(^(χόμην^, assiduuusli/ and palienllijto wait for, [if. Kng. wait it out]: absol., I Pet. iii. 20 (Kec. «δί'χομαι ) ; W, lio. viii. VJ, 23, 20; 1 Co. i. 7 ; Gal V. 5 (on this pa.-s. of. (Knis sub uu.) ; witli the ace. of a pers., Christ in liis return from lieaven : Phil, iii. 20; lleb. L\. 28. Cf. C. F. Λ. Fritzsche in Frilz- schiorum Opuscc. p. 15.^ sq. ; Win. De verb. comj). etc. Pt. iv. p. 14 ; [Ellic. on Gal. 1. c.]. (Scarcely found out of the X. T. ; lleliod. .Veth. 2, Sb ; 7, 23.)' άΐΓ-<κ-ενομαι : 1 aor. αττ(κ&υσάμψ ; 1. ichoUy to put ojf'j'roin one's: self (ιϊπό (leiiotinj: separation fr. what is put off) : Toi/ παλαιοί' ύνθρωπον, Col. iii. 9. 2. icIioUy to strip οβ' for one's self (lor one's Oivn advantage), de- spoil, di.iarm: τικά, Col. ii. la. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 14 sq., [esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. ii. 1.")]. (Jo- seph, antt. 6, 14, 2 mrtKSiis [but ed. Bekk. /ΐΓΓ«δϋί] την βασιλικην ί'σθητα.) ' όΐΓ-ί'κ-δυσΐ5, -f άπf\πίζovτ(s nothing despairing sc. of the hoped-for recompense from God the requiter, Lk. vi. 35, [T WIl mrg. μηδίνα άπ(λπ. ; if this reading is to be tolerated it may be rendered despairing of no one, or even causing no one to despair (cf. the Jerus. Syriae). Tdf. himself seems half inclined to take μηίίνα as neut. plur., a form thought to be not wholly un- precedented ; cf. .Steph. Thesaur. v. col. 962]. (Is. xxix. 19 ; 2 Mace. ix. 18 ; Sir. xxii. 21 ; [x.wii. 21 ; Judith ix. 11]; often in Polyb. and Diod. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)* ώτ-ΐναντι, adv., with gen. [B. 319 (273)]; 1. over against, o/iposite: τοΰ τάφηυ, Mt. xxvii. 61 ; [τοΰ γαζοφυ- λακίου, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. WH mrg.]. 2. i;i sight of, before : Mt. xxi. 2 R G ; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WH txt. κατίναντι) ; Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. .xxxv. (xxxvi.) 2). 3. in opposition to, against : τών δογμάτων Kai- βαροί. Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Apocr. ; Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)* (im'pavTOf , -ok, (ntpaiva to go through, finish ; cf. άμά- pavTos), that cannot be passed through, boundless, endless % ■ytvtaXoyim, protracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job xxxvi. -.iu : 3 Mace. ii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down.) * άΐΓ<ρκητά<Γτω$, adv., {πιρισπάω, q. v.), without distrac- tion, without solicitude : 1 Co. vii. 35. (The adjective occurs in Sap. xvi. 11 ; Sir. xli. 1 ; often in Polyb. [the adv. in 2, 20, 10; 4, 18, 6; 12, 28, 4 ; cf. W. 463 (431)] and Plut.) * ά-τΓ€ρί-τμητο5, -of, (π(ριτίμνω), uncircumcised ; metajjh. άπ(ρίτμψοι ττ) καρδία (Jer. i.\. 26 ; £zek. xliv. 7) καϊ τ. ωσί (Jer. vi. 10) whose heart and ears are covered, i. e. whose soul and senses are closed to divine admonitious, obdurate, Acts vii. 51. (Often in Sept. for S"i>' ; 1 Mace, i. 48; ii. 46; [Philo de migr. Abr. §39];'Plut. am. prol. 3.) • άΐΓ-(ρχομαι; fut. άτ!(\(νσομαι (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. XV. 28; W. 8G (82)); 2 acr. άπηλθον (άπηΧθα in Rev. x. 9 [where R G Tr Sov}, ά-πηλθαν L Τ Tr WH in Wt. xxii. 22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), etc., and WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. § 13, 1 ; Mullach p. 17 sq. [226] ; B. 39 (34) ; [Soph. Lex. p. 38 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 23 ; WH. App. p. 164 sq. ; Kuenen and Cobel, N. T. p. Ixiv. ; Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, etc., p. liv. sq.]); pf. άτΓίλι/λυία ( Jas. i. 24) ; plpf. ά■πfXη\ΰθflv (Jn. iv. 8) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a i)lace), to depart; 1. properly, a. absol. : Mt. xiii. 2.3 ; xix. 22 ; Mk. v. 20 ; Lk. viii. 39 ; xvii. 23 ; Jn. xvi. 7, etc. Ptcp. άπλθκίιψ with indie, or subj. of other verbs in past time to go (away) απί/ etc.: Mt. xiii. 28, 46 ; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25; xxvi. 36 ; xxvii. 5 ; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37 ; Lk. v. 14. b. with specification of the place into which, or of the per- son to whom or from whom one departs: ds >vith ace. of place, Mt. v. 30 L Τ Tr WH; xiv. 15; xvi. 21; xxii. 5 ; Mk. vi. 36 ; ix. 43 ; Jn. iv. 8 ; Ro. xv. 28, etc. ; fit όδίιν (θνων, Mt. X. 5 ; fit το πίραν, Mt. viii. 18 ; Mk. viii. 13; [δι' ΰμύν fit Μα«δ. 2 Co. i. 16 Lchm. txt.]; ϊπί ■κ\ύ\ ace. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 R G T] ; xxiv. 24 ; (Vi with ace. of the business which one goes to attend to : ('πί (the true reading for R G (it) την (μπορίαν αϋτοϋ, Mt. xxii. 5; («ί, Mt. ii. 22; ίξω with gen.. Acts iv. 15; προς Tiva, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec] ; Rev. x. 9 ; άπό Tirat, Lk. i. 38 ; viii. 37. Hebraistically (cf. '"^ΠΚ ^'^Π) άπίρχ. οπίσω Tivot Ιο go away in order to follow any one, go after him figuratively, i. e. to follow his party, follow him a? a leader: Mk. i. 20 ; Jn. xii. 1 9 ; in the same sense ατζίρχ. ■npos τίνα, Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9, 16 (29); used also of those who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicog- raphers (following Suidas, ' άπίΚθτ) ■ άντΊ τοΰ (ττανίλθη') incorrectly ascribe to άπίρχισθαι also the idea of return- ing, going linrk, — misled by the fact that a going away is often at the same time a going hack. But where this is the case, it is made evident either by the connection, as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as fit τον ooto» αντοϋ. Mt. ix. 7; Mk. vii. 30, (οίκαδ(, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6); πpόt ίαυτόν [Trej. πρ. αυτόν] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G, but L Tr br. Τ WH reject the vs.] ; Jn. xx. 10 [here Τ Tr irpos αυτούς, WH jr. αΰτ. (see αύτοΰ)] ; fit τα σττίσω, Jn. vi. 66 (to return home) ; xviii. 6 (to draw back, re• ητΓΐ'χω 57 treat). 2. trop. : of departing evils and sufferings, .\rk. i. 42; Lie. τ. 13 (^ Xiitpa άπήλβιν άπ αντοϋ) ; Rev. is.. 12 ; xi. 14 ; of good things taken away from one, Rev. xviii. 14 [R G] ; of an evanescent state of things, Rev. x.\i. 1 (Rec. παρήλθί), 4 ; of a report going forth or spread els, Mt. iv. 24 [Treg. mrg. (ξήλθ(ΐ/]. άΐΓ-ί'χω; [impf. mrfixov Mt. xiv. 24 Tr txt. AVH txt. ; pres. mid. άπϊχομαι^ ; 1. trans, a. to hold hack, keep off,preccn', (Horn. Ή. 1, 97 [Zenod.] ; 6, 96; Plat. Crat. c. 23 p. 407 b.). b. to have wholly or in full, to have receiceil (what one had a right to expect or de- mand; of. anohihovoi, άποΧαμβάνιιν, [ ΙΙ7;ί. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 8 ; Gram. 275 (258) ; B.203(17U); aec. to Bp. Lghtft. (on Phil. iv. 18) άπό denotes correspon- dence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the pos- session to the desire, etc.]): τινά, Philem. 15; μισθόν, Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; ■παράκΚησιν, Lk. ^i. 24 ; πάντα, Pliil. iv. 18; (often so in Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.]). Hence c. άπίχ^ι. impers., it is enough, suffi- cient: Mk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is 'ye have slept now long enough'; so that Christ takes away the permission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; (in the same sense in (Pseudo-) -Vnacr. in Odar. (15) 28,33; Cyril Alex, on Hag. ii. 9 [but the true reading here seems to be άπιχω, see P. E. Pusey's ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intraus. to be aicay, absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; άπό, Lk. τϋ. 6; xxiv- 13; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.] ; xv. 8; Mk. vii. 6, (Ts.xxLx. 13). 3. Mid. to hold one's self off, abstain : άπό τιιόγ, from any thing. Acts xv. 20 [R G] ; 1 Th. iv. 3 ; v. 22, (.lob i.'l ; ii. 3 ; Ezek. viii. 6) ; Tivos, Acts .XV. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11. (.So in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.t * άιη<ΓΤ£ω, -ώ; [impf. ϊ^;Γίστουΐ'] ; 1 aor. ηπίστησα; {ani- CTOs) ; 1. to helraif a trust, he unfaithful : 2 Tim. ii. 13 (opp. to ίτιστοί μίν€ΐ) ; Ro. iii. 3 ; [al. deny this sense in the X. T. ; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. 1. c. ; Ellic. on 2 Tim. I. c.]. 2. to havn nu belief, disbelieve : in the news of Christ's resurrection, Mk. xvi. 1 1 ; Lk. x.\iv. 41 ; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11 ; in the tidings con- cerning Jesus the Messiah, Mk. xvi. 16 (op]), to ni- στ(ύω), [so 1 Pet. ii. 7 Τ Tr WH] ; Acts xxviii. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)* oirwrrto, -or, ή, (fr. άπιστα), tcani of failh and trust; 1. unfaithfulness, faithlessness, (of persons betraWng a trust) : Ro. iii. 3 [cf. reff. s. v. άπιστ^ω, 1 ]. 2. iranI of faith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine power, Mk. xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii. 19; in the divine mission of Jesus, Mt. xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 6 ; by opposition to the gos- pel, 1 Tim. i. 13; with the added notion of obstinacy, Ro. xi. 20, 23 ; Heb. iii. 1 2. contextually, iceakness of failh : Mt. xvii. 20 (where L Τ Tr WH ολιγοπιστίαν) ; Mk. ix. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)* ά-ιηο-ΓθΓι -ο», (πιστοί), [fr. Hom. down], without faith OT trust; 1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted, perfidious) : Lk. xii. 46 ; Rev. xxi. 8. 2. incredible, of things : Acts xxvi. 8 ; (Xen. Hiero 1,9; symp. 4, 49 ; Cyr. 3, I, 26 ; Plat. Phaedr. 245 c. ; Joseph, antt. 6, 10, 2, etc.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas disbelieving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn. XX. 27; of those who refuse belief in the gospel, 1 Co. vi. C; vii. 12-15; x. 27 ; xiv. 22 sij<[. ; [iTim. v. 8]; with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co. iv. 4 ; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians them- selves who reject the true faith, Tit. i. 15. without trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 1 7 ; Mk. ix. 19 ; Lk. ix. 41.* όπλότη?, -ητος, ή, singleness, simplicit'j, sincerity, men- tal honcstij; the virtue of one who is free from pretence and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cvr. I, 4, 3 ; HeU. 6, 1, 18, down) : iv άπ'Χότητι ( L Τ Tr WH ayii- τητί) και fWiKpweici Bfuv i. e. infused by God through the Spirit fW. g 3>;, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; ev άπλ. τηί καρδίαι (334 -^ψ', 1 Chr.xxix. 17), Col. ui. 22; Eph. vi. 5, (Sap. i. 1) ; (if Χριστόν, sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e. single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wi.-^dom in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi. 3 ; c» άπλόπρ-» in simplicity, i. e. without self-seeking, Ro. xii. 8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions, liberality, [Joseph, antt. 7, 13, 4; but in opposition see FritzscheonRom. vol. iii. 62 .«(j.] : 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11, 13 (t^s κοινωνία!, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling s. v. ' Einfalt ' in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.* άπλοίϊ, -ή, -oiv, (contr. fr. -o'or. -όι;, -όον), [fr. AeschyL down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing compli- cated or confused; without folds, [cf. Trench § Ivi.]); whole; of the eye, ^oof/, fulfilling its office, .«oun//: Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, — [al. contend that the moral sense of the word is the only sense lexically Avarranted ; cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Isacli. § 3 oi κατιΚάλησά τίνος, etc. 7iop€vop€vos (V άττΧοτητι οφθαλμών, ibid. § 4 ττάντα 6pa ev ά-π\ότητι, μη €πι8€χόμ€νυς υφθαλμοίς ηονηρίας οπό της πλάνης ταϋ κόσμου ; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xii. 8].* απλώς, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], simply, openly, frank- ly, sincerely : Jas. i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).* «TO, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs. Germ. von. ah, weg, [cf. Eng. of, o//]), from, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in wliich the influence of the Hebr. ]P is traceable, cf. W. 364 sq. (342), 369 (346) sqq. ; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Tdf Proleg. p. 94 ; cf. W. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10 sq. ; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition, άπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, feeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αίρω, απέρχομαι, άττοηνάσσω, αποχωρ(ω, άφίστημι, φΐίτγω, etc.) : άπίσπά- σθη άπ* αυτών, Lk. xxii. 41 ; βάλ€ άπό σον. ^It. ν. 29 sq. ; ίΚ(3άλω το κάι^φος άπο [L Τ Tr λλ Η f'lc] τον όφθαλμον, ^It. vii. 4 : αφ' [L WH Tr txt. παρ' (q. v. I. a.)] ης (κβ(β\ηκα Saipovia,yik. xvi. $; καθ(ΐ\( άπο θρόνων, Lk. 1.52. 2. of the separation of a part from the whole; whereof a whole some part is taken : άπό Toij ιματίου, Mt. ix. 16 ; 58 από μ(\ισσίου κηρίου, Lk. xxiv. 42 [R G, but Tr br. the clause] ; πττύ τών υψαρίων^ Jn. xxi. 10 ; τα αττό του πλοίου fragments of the ship, Acts xxvii. 44 ; ('νοσφίσατα άπο Tfjt τιμηί. Acts V. 2 ; (κχιω άπο τοΟ πΐ'ίνματοί, Acts ii. 17; ΐκ\(ξάμ(νος αττ* αΰτώι/, Lk. vi. 13; τίνα άπο των δυο, Wt. xxvii. L'l ; όχ ΐτιμήσαντο άττύ υίώκ Ισραήλ, sc. τι«γ [Κ. V. whom certain of the children of Israel tiul jirice (cf. τΪΓ, 2 c.) ; but al. refer this to Π. 2 d. aa. fin. q. v.], ilt. xxvii. 9, {ίξηΚθον άπο των 'κρϊων, sc. Tivts, 1 Mace. vii. 33) ; after verbs of eating and drinkimj (usually joined in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [cf. B. 1S9 (139) ; W. 198 (186) sq.]) : Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28 ; πίνιιν άπύ, Lk. xxii. 18 (elsewhere in the N. T. «). 3. of any kind of separation of one thing from another by which the union or f e 1 1 ο w s h i [) of the two is destroyed; a. after verbs of avertinij, loosenin/j, lihernlinf/, ransoin- inq, preserving : see αγοράζω, απαλλάσσω, αποστρί'φω, ί\ίνθ(ρόω. θΐραπίυω, καθαρίζω^ λούω, Χντρόω^ Χνω, ρνομαι^ σώζω, φυλάσσω, etc. b. after verbs of desisliiii/, tilislain- ing, a raiding, etc. : see άπ€χω, παύω, καταπάνω, βλέπω, προσέχω, φυλάσσομαι, etc. C. after verbs of concealing and hindering: see κρύτττω, κωλύω, παρακαλύτττω. d. Concise constructions, [cf. esp. B. 322 (277)]: ανάθεμα άπο ToC Χριστοί, Ro. ix. 3 (see ανάθεμα sub fin.) ; λούειν άπο τών πληγών to wash away the blood from the stripes, Acts xvi. 33 ; μετανοείν άπο TTJt κακίαί by repentance to turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; άποθνήσκειν άπό nvot by death to be freed from a tiling, Col. ii. 20 ; φθείρεσθαι άπο της άπλότητο! to be corrupted and thus led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3 ; ίϊσακου- σθε'ΐ! άπο τ. ευλάβειας heard and accordingly delivered from his fear, lleb. v. 7 (al. heard for i. e. on account of Ai's godly /ear [cf. II. 2 b. below]). 4. of a state of separation, i. e. of distance; and a. of distance of Place, — of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii. 34; xxiv. 31, etc.; after μακράν, Mt. viii. 30; Mk. xii. 34 ; Jn. xxi. 8 ; after άπέχειν, see απέχω 2 ; απο άνωθεν εως κάτω, Mk. xv. 38 ; άπο μακρόθεν, Mt. xxvii. 55, etc. [cf. Β. 70 (G2) ; W. § B5, 2]. Ace. to later Grk. usage it is put before nouns indicating local distance : Jn. xi. 1 8 (ην έγγνς ώί άπο σταδίων δεκαπέντε about fifteen fur- longs off) ; Jn. xxi. 8 ; Rev. xiv. 20, ( Diod. i. 51 επάνω της πόλεως άπο δέκα σχοίνων λίμνην ώρυζε, [also 1,97; 4, 56 ; l(i, 46; 17,112; is, 40; I'.t, 25, etc.; cf. Soph. Lex. s. V. 5] ; Jose))h. b. j. 1, 3, 5 τοντο αφ' εξακοσίων σταδίων εντεύθεν «στιν. Plat. Aem. Paul. c. 18, 5 ώστε τους πρώ- τους νεκρούς άπο δνοΊν σταδίων καταπεσεΐν. vit. Oth. c. 11, 1 κατεστρατοπέδευσεν άπο πεντήκοντα σταδίων, vit. Philop. c. 4, 3 ην yap άγρίις αύτω άπο σταδίων ε'ίκοσι της πόλεως) ; cf. W. 557 (518) sq. ; [Β. 153 (133)]. b. of distance of Time, — of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat. Inde a) : άπό της ώρας εκείνης, Mt. ix. 22 ; xvii. 18 ; Jn. xix. 27 ; άπ' εκ- της ημέρας, Mt. xxii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 53 ; [άπό πρώτης ημέρας.'] Actsxx. 18; Phil. i. 5 [LTTr^VHT^r πρ. ημ-Ί ; άφ' ημερών αρχαίων. Acts χν. 7 ; άπ' ετών, Lk. viii. 43 ; Ro. XV. 23 ; άπ* αιώνος and άπό τ. αιώνων. Lk. i. 70, etc. ; άπ* άρχης, Mt. xix. 4, 8, etc. ; άπό καταβολής κόσμου, Mt. xiii. 35 [L Τ Tr WH om. κοσμ-Ί, etc. ; άπό κτίσεως κόσμου, Ro. i. 20; άπό βρέφους from a child, 2 Tim. iii. 15 ; άπο της παρθενίας, Lk. ii. 36 ; άφ* ης (sc. ημέρας) since, Lk. vii. 45 ; Acts xxiv. 11; 2Pet. iii. 4; άφ' ης ημέρας, Col. i. 6, 9 ; άφ* ου equiv. to άπό τούτου ότε [cf. Β. 82 (71); 105 (92)], Lk. xiii. 25; xxiv. 21; Rev. xvi. 18, (Ildt. 2, 44 ; and in Attic) ; άφ' ου after τρία ετη, Lk. xiii. 7 TTrWII; άπότοΟ νΰν from the present, henceforth, Lk. i. 48; V. 10; xii. 52; x.vii. 69; Acts xviii. 6; 2 Co. v. 16; άπό TOTf, Mt. iv. 1 7 ; xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 16 ; Lk. xvi. 16 ; άπό πέρυσι since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; L\. 2; άπό πρωί. Acts xxviii. 23 ; cf. ΛΥ. 422 (393) ; [Β. 320 (275)] ; Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. c. of distance of Order or Rank, — of the terminus from which in any succession of things or persons : άπό διετούς (sc. παιδός) Kill κατωτέρω, Mt. ii. 16, (τοϋί Αευΐτας άπο ίΐκοσαίτοΟί κα\ επάνω. Num. i. 20 ; 2 Esdr. iii. 8) ; άπό Αβραάμ εως Δανείδ, ^It. i, 17; έβδομος άπο Αδάμ. J udi^ 14; άπό μικρού έως μεγάλου. Acts viii. 10; Ileb. viii. 11 ; άρχεσθαι άπό τίνος. .Mt. XX. 8 ; Lk. xxiii. 5 ; xxiv. 27 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; Acts viii. 35; x. 37. II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place whence ; or of causal origin, the cause from which. 1. of the Place whence anything is, comes, befalls, is taken ; a. after verbs of coming ; see έρχομαι, ηκω, etc. : άπό [L Tr λνΐΐ άπ'] αγοράς sc. ελθόντες. Jlk. vii. 4 ; άγγελος άπ' (τοϋ) oipavoi, Lk. xxii. 43 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; τον άπ' ουρανών sc. λαλοΟντα, Ileb. xii. 25, etc. ; of the countrv, province, town, village, from which any one has originated or proceeded [cf. W. 364 (342); B. 324 (279)]: Mt. ii. 1 ; iv. 25; Jn. i. 44 (45) ; xi. 1 ; μία άπό όρους Σινά, Gal. iv. 24. Hence ό or οί άπό τίνος a native of, a man of, some place : ό άπό ΐ^αζαρέθ the Nazarene, Mt. xxi. 11:0 άπό Άριμαθαίας. Mk. xv. 43 ; Jn. xix. 38 [here G LTrWII om. ό] ; οί άπό Ίόππης, Acts χ. 23; οί άπό ΊταλιαΓ the Italians, Heb. .xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6]. A great number of exx. fr. prof. writ, are given by Wieseler, Untersuoh. iib. d. Ilcbriierbr. 2te Ilalfte, p. 14 sq. b. of the party or society from which one has proceeded, i. e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary of it: οί άπό της εκκλησίας. Acts xii. 1 ; οί άπό της α'ιρέ- σεως τών Φαρισαίων. Acts XV. 5, (as in Grk. writ. : οί άπό της Στοάς, οί άπό της Ακαδημίας, etc). C. of the material from which a thing is made : άπό τριχών καμήλου, Mt. iii. 4 [W. 370 (.•!47) ; Β. 324 (279)]. d. trop. of that friim or hi/ which a thing is known : άπό τών καρπών έπιγινώσκειν. Mt. vii. 16, 20 [here Lchm. εκ τ. κ. etc.] (Lys. in Andoc. § 0; Aescbin. adv. Tim. p. 69 ed. Reiske) ; μανθάνειν άπό τίνος to learn from the example of any one, Mt. xi. 29 ; xxiv. 32 ; Mk. xiii. 28 ; but in Gal. iii. 2 ; Col. i. 7 ; Heb. v. 8, μανθ. άπό τίνος means to learn from one's teaching or training [cf. B. 324 (279) c. ; W. 372 (348)]. e. after verbs of seeking, in- quiring, demanding: άπαιτε'ιν, Lk. xii. 20 [Tr WU αϊτ.]; friTiiv, 1 Th. ii. 6 (alternating there with έκ [cf. W. § 50, 2] ) ; έκζητε'ιν, Lk. xi. 50 sq. ; see αίτί'ω. 2. of c a u s a 1 origin, or the C a u s e ; and a. of the material cause, so called, or of th-at which supplies the material for the maintenance of the action expressed by the verb: so 59 άτΓοβαίνω 'ν€μΙζ(σθαι, χορτάζίσθαι, πλουτίΐΐ', Βιακονΰν από Ttt^'^s , — see those verbs, b. of the cause on account oi which anything is or is done, where commonly it can be ren- dered for (La,t. prae, Germ, vor) : υίκ ήΒίνατο άπο τοΰ οχλον, Lk. xix. 3 ; ούκίτι ίσχυσαν άπο τοΰ πλήθους, Jn. xxi. C, (Judith ii. iO) ; άπό τ. δόξη! toC φωτόί, Acts xxii. 1 1 ; [here many would bring in ileb. v. 7 (ΛΥ. 371 (348) ; Β. 322 (27G)), see I. 3 d. above], c. of the mo ving or impelling cause (Lat. ex, prae; Germ, aus, vor), for, out of: άπό της χαράς αϋτοϋ inrayti, Mt. xiii. 44 ; άπο τοΰ φόβου for fear, Mt. xiv. 26 ; xxviii. 4 ; Lk. xxi. 26. Ilebraistically : φοβ(Ίσβαι άπό nvos (jrp Κ")•), Mt. x. 28 ; Lk. xii. 4 ; φ(ϋγ(ΐν άπό rims { ρ CU ), to flee for fear of one, Jn. x. ό ; Mk. xiv. .j2 (R G, but L Tr mrg. br. άπ' αυτών) ; Rev. ix. 6 ; cf. φ(ίγα and \V. 223 (209 sq.). d. of the e f f i c i e η t cause, viz. of things from the force of which anything proceeds, and of persons from whose will, power, authority, command, favor, order, influence, direction, anything is to be sought; aa. in general: άπο τοί ϋπρου by force of the sleep, Acts xx. 9 ; άπο σοϋ σημάον. Mt. xii. 3S ; άπο δόξης fls Βόξαν, 2 Co. iii. 18 (from the glory which we beliold for ourselves [cf. W. 254 (238)] in a mirror, goes out a glory in which we share, cf. Meyer ad loc. ) ; άπό κυρίου πνιύματοί by the Spirit of the Lord [yet cf. B. 343 (295)], ibid. ; όλιθρον άπό προσώπου τοΟ κυρίου destruction proceeding from the (incensed, wrathful) countenance of the Lord, 2 Th. i. 9 (on this passage, to be explained after Jer. iv. 26 Sept., cf. Ewald) ; on the other hand, άνάψυξις άπό προ- σώπου τ. κ. Acts iii. 20 (19) ; άπ^κτάνθησαν άπό (Rec. ίπό) τών πλί/γώι/, Rev. ix. 18. άφ' έαυτοϋ. άφ' βαυτών, άπ €μαυ- τοϋ, an expression esp. com. in John, of himself {mt/self etc.), from his own disposition or judgment, as distin- guished from another's instruction, [cf. AV. 372 (348)] : Lk. xii. 57 ; xxi. 30 ; Jn. v. 19, 30 ; xi. 51 ; xiv. 10 ; xvi. 1 3 ; xviii. 34 [L Tr WII άπό σ<αυτ.] ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; x. 7 [T Tr WII (φ' i. (see eVi' A. I. 1 c'.)] ; of one's oicn will and motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another: Jn. vii. 17 sq. 28; viii. 42 ; x. 18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; by one's own power : Jn. xv. 4 ; by one's power and on one's own judyment : Jn. viii. 28 ; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kjipke, Observ. i. p. 391. [Cf. (ϋχψ ΐχοντα άφ' (al. ϊφ' see ί'πί Α. L 1 f.) (αυτών, Acts xxi. 23 WII txt.] after verbs oflearniny, knowiny, receiriny, άπό is used of him to whom we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf . W. 370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. etc. Ft. ii. p.7 sq. ; B. 324 (279) ; Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23 ; per contra Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 12] : άκοΰ^ιν. Acts ix. 13 ; 1 Jn. i. 5; -γινώσκιιν, Mk. XV. 45 ; Χαμβάναν, Mt. xvii. 25 sq. ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; iii. 22 L Τ Tr WII ; ϊχαν, 1 Jn. iv. 21 ; 2 Co. ii. 3, etc. ; παραλάμβαναν, 1 Co. xi. 23 : δίχισθαι, Acts xxviii. 21 ; respecting μανθάν(ΐν see above, II. 1 d. ; λατρει'ω τω θ(ω άπό προγόνων after the manner of the λατρεία received from my forefathers [cf. W. 372 (349) ; B. 322 (277)]. 2 Tim. i. 3. yiVcrai /lot, 1 Co. i. 30 ; iv. 5 ; χάρις άπό θ(οϋ or τοΰ θ(ον. from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 3 ; Gal. i. 3, and often ; κα\ τοΰτο άπό θιοϋ, Phil. i. 28. άπόστολοΓ άπό etc., constituted an apostls by authority and commission, etc. [cf. W. 418 (390)], Gal. i. 1. after πάσχ(ΐν, Mt. xvi. 21 ; [akin to this, ace. to many, is Mt. xxvii. 9 ov ζτιμησαντο άπό τών υιών ΊσραηΧ, R. V. mrg. whom they priced on the part of the sons of Israel ; but see in I. 2 above], bb. When άπό is used after passives (which is rare in the better Grk. auth., cf. Bnhdy. p. 222 sqq. ; [B. 325 (280) ; W. 371 (347 sq.)]), the connection between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser and more temote than that indicated by υπό, and may often be expressed by on the part of (Germ, ron Seiten), [A. V. generally o/"] : άπό τοΰ θ(οΰ άποδ€δ(ΐγμ(νον ap- proved (by miracles) according to God's wiU and ap- pointment. Acts ii. 22 ; άπό β(οϋ παράζομαι the cause of my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 1 3 ; άπ€- στ(ρημ€νος [Τ Tr WII άφι/στίρ.] άφ' ύμώΐ' by your fraud, flas. V. 4 : άποδοκιμάζ^σΟαί, Lk. xvii. 25 ; [^ΐδικαίώθη η σοφία άπό τών τέκνων, Lk. vii. 35 ace. to some ; see δικαιόω, 2] ; τόποί' ήτοιμασμίνον άπό τοΰ ieoC by the will and direction of God, Rev. xii. G ; όχλούμινοι άπό ( Rec. υπό, [see όχλίω^) πνευμάτων άκαθάρτ. Lk. vi. 1 8 (whose annoyance by dis- eases [(?) cf. vs. 1 7] proceeded from unclean sjiirits [A. V. vexed (troubled) with etc.]) ; άπό τ. σαρκός ί'σπιλω- μίνον by touching the flesh, Jude 23 : [add Lk. i. 26 Τ Tr WII απεστάλη 6 αγγΐλος άπό (R G Ι..νπό) τοΰ ^eoO], As in prof. auth. so also in the X. T. the Mss. sometimes vary between άπό and ύπό : e. g. in Mk. viii. 31 ; [Lk. viii. 43] ; Acts iv. 36 ; [x. 17, 33 ; xv. 4] ; Ro. .xiii. 1 ; [xv. 24]; Rev Lx. 18 ; see W. 370 (347) sq. ; B. 325 (280) sq. ; [cf. X'incent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. §41]• in. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and in- dicating the manner or degree in which anything is done or occurs, are the following : άπο τ. καρδιών ίμώ» from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. .xviii. 35 ; άπό μίρους in part, 2 Co. i. 14 ; ii. 5 ; Ro. xi. 25 ; xv. 24 ; άπό μιας sc. either φωνής with one voice, or γνώμης or ψυχής with one consent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kuinoel ad loc; [W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.) ; yet see Lob. Par- alip. p. 363]). IV. The extraordinary construction άπό ό ων (for Rec. άπό ToC ό) κα\ ό ην κα\ ό (ρχόμ(νος. Rev. i. 4, finds its ex- planation in the fact that the writer seems to have used the words ό ών κτλ. as an indeclinable noun, for the purpose of indicating the meaning of the proper name Π1Π• ; cf. AY. § 10, 2 lin. : [B. 50 (43)]. V. Li composition άπό indicates separation, liberation, cessation, departure, as in αποβάλλω, άποκότττω. άποκνλίω, άπόλΰω, άπολΰτρωσις, άπαλγϊω, άπίρχομαι ; finishing and completion, as in απαρτίζω, άποτίλί'ω ; refers to the pat- tern from wldch a copy is taken, as in άπογράφ€ΐν, άφομοι- οϋν, etc. ; or to liim from whom the action proceeds, as in άποδίίκνυμι. άποτολ/ιάω, etc. άτΓΟ-βαίνω : fut. άποβήσομαι; 2 aor. άπΐβην; 1. to come down from : a ship (so even in Horn.), άπό. Lk. v. 2 [Tr mrg. br. άπ* αυτών^ ; €ts την γήν, Jn. xxi. 9. 2. trop. to turn out, 'eventuate,' (so fr. Hdt. down) : άποβψ σίται Ιμ'ιν fit μαρ/τνριον it will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; tls σωτηρίαν, Phil. i. 1 9. (Job xiii. 16 ; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) • άτΓοβά\\ω 60 άτΓοΒίΒωμι άίΓο-βάλλω : 2 aor. άπίβάΧον ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to throw off, cast away : a garment, Mk. x. 50. trop. confidence, Heb. X. 35.• όίΓΟ-βλίττω : [impf. άπ(β\(πον] ; Ιο turn lite eyes away from other Ihiiiys ami fix them on someone thing ; to look at attentively : (it τι (often in (Irk. writ.) ; trop. lo look with steadfast mental gaze : dt τ. μισθαποδοσίαν, Heb. xi. 26 [W. § 66, 2 d.].• άιτΑ-βλητοί, -OK, thrown away, to be thrown away, re- jected, despised, abominated : as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4, (in Hos. ix. 3 Symm. etiuiv. to S?u unclean ; Horn. II. 2, 361 ; 3, r,r>; Lcian., riut.).* άπο-βολή, -ης, ή, (I thniiving away; 1. rejection, re- pudiation, (άπο^α'λλίσίαι In throw away J'rom orii's self, cast iff, repudiate) : Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to πρόσΧημψΐ! αϊτών, objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. άττο/ϋύλλω in the sense of lose) : Acts xxvii. 22 anofSuX!) ψυχή! oiSf/ii'a ΐσται (ξ νμων no one of you shall lose his life [W. § U7, 1 e.]. (Plat., Pint., al.)• άίΓο-γίνομαι : [2 aor. άπ(γ(νήμην^ ; 1. to be removed from, depart. 2. lo die, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down); hence trop. άπογ. τιχι to die lo any thing: raU άμαρτίαΐ! άπογ(νόμ(νοι i. e. become utterly alienated from our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. §52,4, 1 d.; B. 178 (15.:.)].• άτΓΟ-γραφή, -η!, ή. (απογράφω) ; a. a writing off, trans- cript (from some jjattern). b. an enrolment (or regi.s- tration) in the public records of persons together with their property and income, as the basis of an άποτίμησίί (census or valuation), i. e. that it might appear how much tax should be levied upon each one: Lk. ii. 2; Acts v. 37; on the occurrence spoken of in both pass. cf. Schiirer, Ntl. Zeitgesch. § 17, ι>ρ. 251, 262-286, and books there mentioned ; [McClcllan i. 392-399 ; B. D. s. v. Taxing].• ότΓΟ-γράφω : Mid., [pres. inf. απογράφίσθαι^ ; 1 aor. inf. άπογράψασθαι ; [pf. pass. ptcp. άπογίγραμμίνο! ; fr. Ildt. down] ; a. lo write off', copy (from some pattern). b. lo enter in a register or records; spec, to enter in the public records the names of meri,their properly and income, lo enroll,((:i■άπoyρaφή,h.); mid.lohave one's self registered, lo enroll one's self [ \V.§ 38, 3] : Lk. ii. 1, 3, 5 ; pass, ol ev oipapo'is άπογιγραμμίνοι those whose names are inscribed in the heavenly register, Ileb. xii. 23 (the reference is to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the figure being drawn fioin civil communities on earth, whose citizens are enrolled in a register).* άπο-ε£(κννμι ; 1 aor. άπίδίΐξα ; pf. pass. ptcp. a)ro6f δίΐ -y- /liVos; (freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Find. Nem. 6, 80 down); 1. prop, lo point away froin one's self, to point out, show forth; to expose lo view, exhibit, (Ildt. 3, 122 and often) : 1 Co. iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare : τικά, lo shoic, prove what Kind of a person any one is. Acts ii. 22 (where cod. i) gives the gloss 18(Βοκιμ^ασμίνον) ; 2 Th. ii. 4 [Lchm. mrg. anoSfiyviovra^. to prove by arguments, demonstrate : Acts xxv. 7. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.* άιτό-8«ξΐΐ, -ίω5, ή, (άποδίίκηι/ιι, q. v.), [fr. Hdt. down] ; a. a making manifest, showing forth, b. a demonstration, prooj': άπόδ»^ΐί πνήματος και ίυνάμούΐ a proof by the Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring in the minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and thus ])ersuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (conte.xtually opposed to |)roof by rhetorical arts and philosophic arguments, — the sense in which the (ireek philosophers use tlie word ; [see Ilelnrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 s([.]).• άΐΓο-8ίκοτ€«ω, Lk. xviii. 12, for άπο8<κατόω (j. v. ; [cf. 117/. App. p. 171]. ότΓΟ-δίκατόω, -ώ, inf. pres. άπ-οδίκατοίκ, Heb. vii. 5 Τ Tr WH (cf. DeUtzsch ad loc. ; B. 44 (38) ; [Tdf.'s note ad loc. ; WH. Intr. § 410]) ; (δ(κατοω q. v.) ; a bibl. anil eccl. word ; Sept. for "ib^'; lo tithe i. e. 1. with ace. of the thing, to give, pay, a tenth of any thing : Mt. xxiii. 23 ; Lk. xi. 42 ; .xviii. 12 where Τ WH, after codd. K* 1! only, have adopted αττοδίκατΕύω, for which the simple δίκατ(ΐ'ω is more common in (irk. writ.; (Gen. xxviii. 22; Dcut. xiv. 21 (22)). 2. Ttva, to exact, receive, a tenth from any one : Heb. vii. 5 ; (1 S. viii. 15, 1 7). [B. D. s. v. Tithe.] ' άΐΓΟ-δίκτο5 [so L τ WH accent (and Rec. in 1 Tim. ii. 3); al.ilTroSiKTUs, cf. Zot. Parahp. p. 498; Gottling p. 313 sq. ; Chandler § 529 sq.], -ov, (see άποδίχομαι), a later word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable : 1 liiu. ii. 3 ; v. 4.* άπο-8<χομ.αι ; depon. mid. ; impf. aπfSfχ6μηv ; 1 aor. άπ€- 8(ξάμην; 1 aor. pass. άπ(8(χθην; common in (irk. writ., esp. the Attic, fr. Ilom. down ; in the N. T. used only by Luke; to accept what is offered from without (από, cf. Lat. excipio), to accept from, receive: τινά, sim])ly, to give one access to one's self, Lk. ix. 11 L Τ Tr WH ; Acts xxviii. 30 ; with emphasis [cf . Tob. vii. 1 7 and Fritzsclie ad loc.], to receive with joy, Lk. viii 40 ; to receive to hosi)itality. Acts xxi. 17 L Τ Tr AVH ; to grant one ac- cess to one's self in the capacity in which he wishes to be regarded, e. g. as the messenger of others. Acts xv. 4 (L Τ Tr WH παρ(8ίχδησαν) ; as a Christian, Acts xviii. 27 ; metaph. τι, lo receive into the mind with assent : to aj/• jirove. Acts x,xiv. 3; lo believe, τον λόγον, Acts ii. 41 ; (so in (irk. ΛνηΙ. esp. Plato; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).• άπο&ημ(ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άπ(&ήμησα ; (απόδημος, q. v.) ; to go away to foreign parts, go abroad : Mt. xxi. 33 ; xxv. 14 sq. ; Mk. xii. 1 ; Lk. xv. 13 (els χώραν) ; xx. 9. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * όΐΓΟ-δημο5, -ov. (fr. από and δημο! the people), away from one's peojile, gone abroad: Mk. xiii. 34 [R. V. so- journing in another country"]• [From Find, down.]' ά'πΌ-SC8(ι>μι, pres. ptcp. neut. άποδιδοΟν (fr. the form -διδόω. Rev. xxii. 2, where Τ Tr AVH mrg. -δώοίς [see WH. App. p. 167]) ; impf. 3 pars. plur. άπ-ίδι'δουΐ' (for the more com. άπίδίδοσαν, Acts iv. 33 ; cf. W. §14,1 c.) ; fut. αποδώσω ; 1 aor. άπίδωκα ; 2 aor. άπίδων, impv. άπόδυν. subj. 3 pers. sing, άπ-οδώ and in 1 Thess. v. 15 Tdf. άποδοί (see δίδω^ιι), opt. 3 pers. sing, άποδώι; [or rather, -δώη ; for -δώι? is a subjunctive form] (2 Tim. iv. 14, for άσοδοι'ι;, cf. W. § 14, 1 g. ; B. 46 (40) ; yet L Τ Tr WH άποδώσ(ί) ; Pass., 1 aor. inf. άποδοΑήκαι ; Mid., 2 aor. άπιδόμην, 3 pers. sin", άττίδοτο (Heb. xii. 16, where L WH άπίδιτο ; cf. B. 47 (41) ; Delitzsch on Hebr. p. 632 note; [WH. App. p. 167]); a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, and the N. T. does not deviate at aU from their use of it ; prop, lo put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ οΒιορίζω 61 άτΓοθνησκω abgeben, [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq. who regards από as denoting to give /rom some reserved store, or to give over something which might have been retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty ; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1,1,7]); 1. ?o delicer, rehnquish what is one's own : to σώμα τοΰ Ίησοϋ, Mt. .x.wii. 58 ; hence in mid. lo gice away for one'a own jn'ofit what ώ one's own, i. e. lo sell [\V. 253 (238)] : τ<', Acts v. 8 ; Heb. xii. 16 ; Ttra, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp. the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down; in Sept. for ijp, Gen. XXV. 33 etc. ; Bar. vi. [i. e. Ep. Jer.] 27 {2i)). 2. to pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, like a burden, is thrown ojf, από, by being paid) : a debt (Germ. ablragen), Alt. v. 26 ; xviii. 25-30, 34 ; Lk. vii. 42 ; x. 35 ; xii. 5!) ; wages, Mt. xx. 8 ; tribute and other dues to the government, Mt. xxii. 21 ; Mk. xii. 17 ; Lk. xx. 25 ; Ro. xiii. 7 ; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41 ; Ileb. xii. 1 1 ; Rev. xxii. 2 ; opKovs tilings promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf. Num. x.KX. 3, {(ΰχήν a vow, Deut. xxiii. 21, etc.); con- jugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3 ; αμοιβάς grateful requitals, 1 Tim. v. 4 ; λόγοι» lo render account : Mt. xii. 36 ; Lk. xvi. 2 ; Acts xix. 40 ; Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. Tr txt. ; Heb. xiii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; μαρτϋριον to give testimony (as sometliing officially due). Acts iv. 33. Ilence 3. lo gice bad; re- store: Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lchm. mrg.] ; ix. 42; xLx. 8. 4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense : Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 ; xvi. 27 ; Ro. ii. ; 2 Tim. iv. [8], 14 ; Rev. xviii. 6 ; xxii. 12 ; κακόν αντί κακοϋ, Ro. xii. 1 7 ; 1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [CoMP. : άντ-αποδιδωμι.] * οίΓο-δι-ορΙζω ; {Βιορΐζω, and this fr. upos a limit) ; by drawing boundaries to disjoin, part, separate from anoth- er : Jude 19 (oi άπο^ιορίζοντα «αυτοί r those who by their wickedness separate themselves from the living fellowship of Christians ; if iavr. be dropped, with Rec? G L Τ Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or sep- arnli(iNs). (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 12110', 25].)* άττο-δοκιμάζω : (see δοκιμάζω); I aor. άττί δοκίμασα ; Pass., 1 30Τ.ά/ι(δοκίμάσθην; pi. ptcp.aπoδf8oκίμaσμ(tιos^, to dis- approve, reject, repudiate : Mt. xxi. 42 ; Mk. viii. 31 ; xii. 10 ; Lk. ix. 22 ; xvii. 25 ; xx. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4, 7 ; Heb. xii. 1 7. (Equiv. to DSO in Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22 ; Jer. viii. 9, etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 6, 130 down.)* άΐΓθ-8οχή, -ης, ή, (αποδέχομαι, q. v.), reception, admis- sion, acceptance, approbation, [A. V. acceptation'] : 1 Tim. i. 15 ; iv. 9. (Polyb. 2, 56, 1 ; 6, 2, 13, etc. ; ό Xo'yot άττο- δοχη! Tvyxavei id. 1, 5, 5 ; Diod. 4, 84 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 14, 4 ; al. [cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 124].) * άιτό-β«Γΐ$, -ΐωί, ή, [αποτίθημι], a putting offoT away: 2 Pet. i. 14 ; 1 Pet. iii. 21. [In various senses fr. Hippoc. and Plato down.] * άίΓΟ-βήκη, -η!, η, {άποτίΰημι), a place in which any thing is laid by or up ; a storehouse, granary, [A. V. garner, bam]: Mt. iii. 12; vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; .xii. 18, 24. (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 26; Thuc. 6, 97.)* άη-ο-θησ-αυρίζω ; to put away, lay by in store, lo treasure away, [seponendo thesaurum coUigere, Tl'/n. De verb, comp. etc Pt. iv. p. 10]; to store up abundance for future use : 1 Tim. vi. 19. [Sir. iii. 4 ; Diod., Joseph., Epict., al.] * άτΓΟ-βλΙβω ; to press on all sides, squeeze, press hard : Lk. viii. 45. (Num. xxii. 25 ; used also of pressing out grapes and olives, Diod. 3, 62; Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 2; [al.].) * άπο-βνήο'κω, impf. ηπίθνησκον (Lk. viii. 42) ; 2 aor. απ ( θανόν ; tut. άποθανοΐμαι, Ro. v. 7; Jn. viii. 21, 24, (see θνησκω) ; found in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; lo die (από, so as to be no more; [cf. Lat. emorior; Eng. die oJJ or out, pass away] ; Germ, absterben, versterben); I. used properly 1. of the η at u ral death of men: Mt. ix. 24 ; xxii. 24 ; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. ίν.4Γ ; Ro. vii. 2, and very often ; αποθνήσκοντα άνθρωποι subject to death, mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [13.206 (lis)]. 2. of the violent death — both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt. .xxvi. 35 ; Acts xxi. 13 etc. ; 1 Pet iii. 18 L Τ Tr \\H txt. ; (V φάνω μαχαίρας, Ileb. xi. 37; of the punishment of death, Ileb. x. 28 ; often of the violent death which Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 33; Ro. v. 6, etc. 3. Phrases : άποθνήσκ. ΐκ τίνος to peri.'h by means of some- thing, [cf. Eng. to die of]. Rev. viii. II; ev TJi αμαρτία, iv ταΊς άμαρτΐαις, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed, Jn. viii. 21, 24 ; eV τώ 'Αδά;:ι by connection with Adam, 1 Co. XV. 22 ; cv κυρίω in fellowshi]) with, and trusting in, the Lord, Rev. xiv. 1 3 ; άποθνί^σκ- τι to die a certain death, Ro. vi. 10, (θάνατον μακρόν. Charit. p. 12ed. D'Or- ville [I. i. c. 8 p. 1 7, 6 ed. Beck ; cf. W. 227 (213) ; B. 149 (130)]); τρ αμαρτία, used of Christ, 'that he might not have to busy liimself more with the sin of men,' Ro. vi. 10 ; ίαυτω to become one's own master, independent, by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [cf. Meyer] ; τώ κνρίω to become subject to the Lord's will by dying, Ro. xiv. 8 [cf. Mey.] ; διύ Tiva i. e. to save one, 1 Co. viii. 1 1 ; on the phrases άπο- θνήσκ. πfpί and ΰπί'ρ τίνος, see jrfpi I. c. δ. and ίπίρ I. 2 and 3. Oratorically, althougli the proper signification of the verb is retained, καθ' ήμίραν αποθνήσκω I meet death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31, cf. 2 Co. vi. 9. 4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12 ; of seeds, which while being resolvea into their elements in the ground .seem to perish by 7-olling,Jn. xii. 24 ; 1 Co. xv. 36. n. tropically, in various senses ; 1. of e t e r η a 1 death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery, and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13; Jn. vi. 50; xi. 26. 2. of moral death, in various senses ; a. to be deprived of real life, i. e. esp. of the power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the spiritual torpor of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ, the fountain of true life, Rev. iii. 2, b. with dat. of the thing [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from all connection with it : τώ νόμω, Gal. ii. 19, which must also be suppUed with αποθανόντες (for so we must read for Rec"!^ αποθανόντος) in Ro. vii. 6 [cf. W. 159 (150)] ; Tj αμαρτία, Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see I. 3 above) ; από των στοιχείων τοΰ κόσμου so that your re- lation to etc. has passed away, Col. ii. 20, (απο των παθών, PorphjT. de abst. animal. 1,41 [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 370 (347)]) ; true Christians are said simply άποθανείν, as hav- ing put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them άτΓοκαθίστημι 62 άτΓοκαραΒοκία away from God, Col. iii. 3 ; since they owe this habit of mind to the death of Christ, they are said also άποθαικϊν σύκ Χριστώ, Κο. vi. 8 ; Col. ii. 20. [CoMP. : σνν-απο- άττο-καβ-Ισ-τημι. αποκαθιστάω (Mk. be. 12 αποκαθιστά ΙΚ;), and άπυκαθιστάνω (Mk. i.\. 12 L Τ Tr [but W II άποκατιστάνω, see their App. p. ICS]; Acts i. li ; cf. W. 78 (7.")); [B. 44 sq. (39)]); fut. αποκαταστήσω; 2 aor. άπ(κατ(στην (with double augm., [cf. E.\. iv. 7 ; Jer. .\xiii. 8], Mk. viii. 2.j Τ Tr WH) ; 1 aor. pass. άπηκατ(στάθην or, ace. to the better reading, with double augm. άηίκατί- στάθην, Mt. xii. 13 ; Mk. iii. ο ; Lk. vi. 10 (Ignat. ad Smyrn. 1 1 ; ,f.[ WIl. App. p. 162]; W. 72 (69 sq.) ; [B. 35 (31)]; ;\lullach p. 22) ; as in Grk. writ, to restore to its former state ; 2 aor. act. to be in its former state : used of parts of the body restored to health, Mt. xii. 13 ; Mk. iii. 5 ; Lk. vi. 10 ; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. viii. 25 ; of the restoration of dominion, Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 3) ; of the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii. 11 ; Mk. ix. 12 ; of a man at a distance from his friends and to be restored to them, Ilcb. xiii. 19.' άΐΓθ-καλνιιιτω:ίηΙ.<ζ7Γθκαλΰ\|'ω; 1 aor. άπ€ κάλυψα; [Pass., pres. αποκαλύπτομαι]; 1 aor. άπικα\νφθην; 1 fut. άπο- καλυφθί^σομαι; in (irk. writ. fr. [Ildt. and] Plat, down ; in Sept. equiv. to Τλ'ΐ} ; 1. prop, to uncover, lay open what has been veiled or covered up ; to disclose, inake hare : Ex. XX. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq. ; Num. v. 18; Sus. 32; τα στήθη, Plat. Prot. p. 352 a. ; ttjk κ(φαλήν, Plut. Crass. 6. 2. metaph. to make known, make manifest, disclose, what before was unknown ; a. pass, of any method whatever by which something before unknown becomes evident : Mt. x. 26 ; Lk. xii. 2. b. pass, of matters which come to light from thingsdone: Lk. ii. 35 [some make the verb mid. here] ; Jn. xii. 38 (L«. liii. 1) ; Ro. i. 18; from the gospel: Ro. i. 17. c. άποκαλΰπτίΐι/ τί Tii'i is used of God revealing to men things unknown [Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28 ; Ps. xcvii. (xcviii.) 2 ; 1 S. ii. 27, cf. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation; — whether by deeds, Mt. .\i. 25 ; xvi. 1 7 ; Lk. x. 21 (by in- timacy with Christ, by his words and acts) ; — or by the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10; xiv. 30 ; Eph. iii. 5 ; Phil. iii. 15 ; 1 Pet. i. 12 ; τον υίόΐ' αϋτοΰ iv ίμοί who, what, how great his Son is, in my soul, Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men: Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass, of tilings, previously non-existent, coming into being and to view : as, ή δό|α, Ro. viii. 18 (els ημάς to be conferred on us); 1 Pet. v. 1 ; ή σωτημία, 1 Pet. i. 5 ; ή πι'στίΕ, Gal. iii. 23 ; the day of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. e. pass, of persons, previ- ously concealed, making their appearance in public : of Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30 ; of Anti- christ, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.• [On this word (and the foil.) cf. Westcott, Introd. to the Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. .34 sq.) ; Liicke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq. ; esp. F. G. β. ran Bell, Disput. theolog. de vocabulis ipavepovv et αττοκαλύπτ^ιν in N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1 849. ipavfpou is thought to describe an ex- ternal manifestation, to the senses and hence open to all, but single or isolated ; αποκαλιηττω an internal disclosure, to the believer, and abiding. The άιτοκιίλκψυ or unveiling precedes and produces tlie tpavepwais or matuf sttitiuu ; the former looks toward the object revealed, the latter toward the persons to wliom the revelation is made. Cithers, however, seem to question the possibility of discrimination ; see e. g. Fritz- schc ou Horn. vol. ii. 149. Cf. 1 Co. iii. 13. j άτΓΟ-κάλυψΐ!, -fwt, r), (ΰποκαλνπτω, q. v.), a» uncovcrinij; 1. prop, a laijimj hiirc, mukinij naked (1 S. xx. 30). 2. tropically, in Λ'. Ϊ. and eccl. language [see end], a. a disclosure of truth, instruction, concerning divine things before unknown — esp. those relating to the Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself, or by the ascended Christ, esp. tlirough the operation of the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished from other methods of instruction ; hence, κατά ΰποκά- λυψ-ιν γνωρίζίσθαι, Ej)h. iii. 3. ττυίϋμα απυκαλι'ψίωϊ, a spirit received from God di.-closing what and how great are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 1 7, cf. 18. with gen. of the obj., ToC μυστηρίου, Ro. xvi. 25. with gen. of the subj., κυρίου, Ίησοϋ Χριστού, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by ecstasies and visions, [so 7]) ; Gal. i. 12 ; Rev. i. 1 (rev- elation of future things relating to the consummation of the divine kingdom) ; κατ οποχάλ υψιι», Gal. ii. 2 ; XaXciv s, Mk. xii. 28 ; νουν^χώς, 34 ; όρβω!. Lk. X. 28 ; προς τι, Mt. xxvii. 14. b. with ace. : λόγοι/, Mt. xxii. 46 ; ουδίν, Mt. xxvii. 12 ; Mk. xiv. 61 ; xv. 4 sq. c. with dat. etc. : cv'i (κάστω. Col. iv. 6 ; together with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7, 1 1 ; vi. 7, 68, etc. ; the dat. omitted : Jn. vii. 46 ; viii. 19, 49, etc. προς Tiva, Acts xxv. 16. joined with φάναι. or \eyfiv. or ciVeii/, in the form of a ptcp., as άποκριθιΊς fifff or ίφη or \eyei : Mt. iv. 4 ; viii. 8 ; xv. 13 ; Lk. ix. 19 ; xiii. 2 ; Mk. X. 3, etc.; or άπικρίθη \(ywv: Mt. xxv. 9, 37, 44; Lk. iv. 4 [R G L] ; viii. 50 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; Jn. i. 26 ; X. 33 [Rec] ; xii. 23. But John far more frequently says άπίκρίθη και (ΐπ€ : Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 19 ; iv. 13 ; vii. 16, 20 [R G], 52, etc. d. foil, by the inf. : Lk. xx. 7 ; foil, by the ace. with inf. : Acts xxv. 4 ; foil, by ότι : Acts xxv. 16. 2. In imitation of the Hebr. Π:;• {Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 1047) ίο begin to speak, but always where something has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks refer [W. 19] : Mt. xi. 25 ; .xii. 38 ; xv. 15 ; xvii. 4 ; xxii. 1 ; xxviii. 5 ; :\Ik. Lx. 5, [6 Τ Tr WH] ; x. 24: xi. 14 ; xii. 35 ; Lk. xiv. 3 ; Jn. ii. 18 ; v. 1 7 ; Acts iii. 12 ; Rev. vii. 13. (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10; iii. 4, etc.: 1 Mace. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Mace. xv. 14.) [Comp. : άντ-αποκρίνομαι.^ άΐΓΟ-κρισ•ΐ5. -(ως. ή. (αποκρίνομαι, see άποκρίνω), α reply- ing, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i. 22; xix. 9. (From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., and] Hdt. down.) * άτΓο-κρϋίΓΓϋ) : 1 aor. άπίκρνψα ; pf. pass. ptcp. άποκ(κρυμ- μίνος ; a. Ιο hide : τι, Mt. .\xv. 18 (L Τ Tr ΛΥΠ «ρυψ -f). b. Pass, in the sense of concealing, keeping secret : σοφία, 1 Co. ii. 7 ; μυστήριον. Col. i. 26 (opp. to φανιροναθαι) ; with the addition of tV τω θ(ω, Eph. iii. 9 ; τϊ από rivot, άτΓοκρυφο^ 64 ατΓοΧΧχ,μΛ Lk. χ. 21 ; Mt. xi. 25 (L Τ Tr Wll (κρυψαι), in imitation of the Ilebr. |?3, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 10 ; cxviii. (cxix.) 19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; cf. κρίΛττω, [Β. 149 (130); 189 (168);\V. 227 (213)]. (In Crk. writ. fr. Iloni. down.) * άπόκρυψοςι-ον, (αποκρύπτω), /( iihlrii, secreted : Mk. iv. 22 ; l.k. viii. 17. slond «/< : Col. ii. 3. (Dan. xi. 43 [Tlieod.]; Is. xlv. 3 ; 1 Miicc. i. 23 : Xen., Eur. ; (il. Up, Lgblft. on the word, Col. 1. c•.. jnill Igu. i. 351 sq] )* άΐΓο-κτ«(νω, and Aeol. -κτίννω (Mt. x. 28LTTr; Mk xii. .5 G L Τ Tr ; Lk. xii. 4 1> Τ Tr ; 2 Co. iii. 6 Τ Tr ; cf. Fritzsclie on Mk. p. 507 sq. ; [7V//: Proleg. p. 79] ; W. 83 (79); [B. 01 (54)]),a7j-0KTeVa)(Grsh.inMt. X. 28; Lk. xii. 4), άποκταίνω (Lchni. in 2 Co. iii. (I ; Rev. xiii. 10), άηοκτ(ΐ/ιιυντ€ς (Mk. xii. 5 Wll) ; fiit. anoKrevi); 1 aor. antKTetva; I'ass., pros. inf. αττο<τίνν(σθΜ (l{ev. vi. 11 G LTTr UTI) ; 1 aor. άττίκτάνθην (Jiilin. Aiisf. Sj)r. ii. 227 ; W. L c. ; [B. 41 (3."i s(|.)] ) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. prop, to kill in any way wliatever, (από i. e. so as to put out of the way; cf. [Eng. to kill o//], Germ, absclilacli- ten) : Mt. xvi. 21 ; xxii. C ; Mk. vi. 19 ; ix. 31 ; Jn. v. 18 ; viii. 22 ; Acts iii. 15 ; Rev. ii. 13, and very often ; [αηοκτ. Ινβανάτω, Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, cf. B. 184 (loll)! ^\'• 33!) (319)]. lo (li-^lroi/ i;vllow to perisli) : Mk. iii. 4 [yet al. take it here absol., In kill']. 2. metaph. to extinr/iiiuli, ahrtlish : τηνϊχθμαν, Eph. ii. 16 ; lo iiijlici moral dedlli, Ro. vii. 11 (see αποθνήσκω, IL 2) ; lodeprirc of sjiiriltiol life (iii'l jirorure cterniil tiiiscri/, 2 Co. iii. U [Lchm. αποκταΐΜΐ ; see above]. diro-KD€(o, -ώ, or άποκνω, (hence 3 pors. sing. pres. either anoKvt'i [so AVII] or άττοκι/ίΐ, Ja.«. i. 15 ; cf. W. 88 (84) ; B. 02 (54)) ; 1 aor. απίκνησα; (κίω. or κυ/ω, to be preg- nant; cf. ΐγκυης) ; lo brinij forlli from the womb, give birth to: ηχά, Jas. i. 15; lo produce, ibid. 18. (4 Mace. XV. 17; Dion. Hal. 1, 70; Phit., Lcian., Ael. v. h. 5, 4 ; Hdian. 1, .5, 13 [5 od. Bekk.]; 1,4,2 [1 cd. Bekk.].)• άίΓο-κυλίω: fut. άποκυΚ'ισω: 1 aor. άπ(κν\ισα; pf. pass. [3 pers. sing. <ίπο«κύλιστίΐι Mk. xvi. 4 R (ί L but Τ Tr WII araitf/c.], ptcp. offo/cfKuXicr^e'iOs; to roll off'oTaway: Mt. xxviii. 2 ; Mk. xvi. 3 ; Lk. xxiv. 2. (Gen. xxix. 3, 8, 10; Judith xiii. 9; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 3; Lcian. rhet. pracc. 3.) But see άνακυλι'ω.' άπο-λαμβάνω ; fut. άπολήψομαι (Col. iii. 'J-l ; L Τ Tr WII άπο\ήμψ(σθ( ; see λαμβάνω) ; J aor. άπίλαβον ; 2 aor. mid. άπf\a:iύμηv■, fr. Ildt. down; 1. lo n-ceiri' (from another, από [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5 ; Ellic. ibid, and Win. De verb. comp. etc. as below]) irhat is due or promined (cf . αποδιδωμι, 2 ) : τ. υΐοθίσίαν the adoption promised to believers. Gal. iv. 5 ; τά αγαθά σου thy good tilings, " which thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed due to thee " ( Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 1 3), Lk. xvi. 25. Hence 2. lo lake atjain or hack, to recover: Lk. vi. 34 [T Tr txt. WII λαβΛν] ; xv. 27 ; and to receive by way ofrelrdiulinn : Lk. xviii. 30 (L txt. Tr mrg. WH t.xt. λάβτι); xxiii. 41 ; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn. 3; Col. iii. 24. 3. to take from otherf^, take apart or aside; Mid. τίνά, to take a person with one aside out of the view of others : with the addition of άπ-ο τοΰ όχλου κατ Iblav in Mk. vii. 83, (Joseph, b. j. 2, 7, 2 ; and in the Act., 2 Mace. vi. 91 ; Ύστά(Γπ€α απολαβών μουΐΌΐ/, Ildt. 1, 209; Arstph. ran. 78 ; ιδία €fa των τριών άπολαβύιν, A pp. b. civ. 5, 40). 4. to receive any one hospitably ; 3 Jn. 8, where L Τ Tr WII have restored ύπολαμβάν^ιν.' άπόλανσις, -ίωΓ, ή, (fr. απολαύω to enjoy), etifoyment (Lat. fniclus): 1 Tim. vi. 17 (tit άπόληυσιι» to enjoy); Ilcb. xi. 25 (αμαρτίας άπόλ. pleasure born of sin). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. nnd] Thuc. down.)* άίΓΟ-λίίττω: [inipf. απίλαπον, W II txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20 ; Tit. i. 5] ; 2 aor. άπίλιπον ; [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. to leave, leave behind: one in some ])lace, Tit. i. 5 L Τ Tr WII ; 2 Tim. iv. 13, 20. Pass. άπίΐλ(Ιπ(ται il remains, is reserved: Heb. iv. 9 ; x. 26 ; foil, by ace. and inf., lleb. iv, G. 2. lo desert, forsake : a place, Jude 6.* άΐΓο-λ6£χω: [inipf. άπίλίίχον]; In lick <ι/Γ, lirk up : iik, xvi. 21 RG; cf. ("πιλ^,^^ω. ([Apollon. Rhod. 4, 478]; Allien, vi. c. 13 p. •jr>0 a.)* άΐΓ-<5λλυμι and άπολλΰω ( [άπολλΰΕΐ Jn. xii. 25 Τ TrWH], impv. ανόλλυί Ro. xiv. 15, [cf. B. 45 (39) ; WII. App. p. 1118 sq.]) ; fut. άπολίσω and (1 Co. i. 19 άπολώ fr. a pass, in the O. T., where often) άπολώ (cf. AV. S3 (80) ; [B. 64 (56)]) ; 1 aor. άπώλίσα ; to destroy, ^lid., pres. άπόλ- λυμαι; [inipf. 3 ]iers. jihir. άίΓώλλυι/το 1 Co. -x. 9 Τ Tr AVH] : fut-. (ίτΓολοΟμαι ; 2 aor. απωλομην; (2 pf. act. ])tcp. άπηλωλώς) ; [fr. Iloni. down]; to perish. 1. to destroy i. e. lo j)ul nut of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to, ruin : Mk. i. 24 ; Lk. iv. 34 ; xvii. 27, 29 ; Jude 5 ; τήν σοφίαν render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived, 1 Co. i. 19 (fr.Sept. of Is. xxix. 14) ; to kill: Mt. ii. 13; xii. 14 ; Mk. ix. 22 ; xi. 18 ; Jn. x. 10, etc. ; contextually, to declare that one must be put to death : Mt. xxvii. 20; metaph. lo devote or give over lo eternal misery : Mt. x. 28; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one's conduct to cause another to lose eternul salvation : Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. to perish, to he lost, ruined, destroyed; a. of persons; o. properly : Mt. viii. 25 ; Lk. xiii. 3, 5, 33 ; Jn. xi. 50 ; 2 Pet. iii. 6; Jude 11, etc.; άπόλλυμπι λιμω, l.k. xv. 1 7 ; (V μαχαίρα, Mt. xxvi. 52 ; καταβαλλόμΐνοί, αλλ* ονκ αϊτολλίΛ /icKot, 2 Co. iv. 9. β. tropically, to incur the loss of true or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: .In. iii. 15 [R Lbr.], 16 ; x. 28; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in mind, that ace. to John's conception eternal life begins on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by faith); Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. viii. 11; χ v. 18; 2 Pet. iii. 9. Ilencc o! σωζόμ(νοι they to whom it belongs to partake of salvation, and oi άπολλΰμινοι those to whom it belongs to perish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are con- trasted by Paul : 1 Co. i. 18 ; 2 Co. ii. 15 ; iv. 3 ; 2 Th. ii. 10, (on these pres. ptcps. cf. W. 342 (321); B. 206 (178)). b. of things; to be blotted out, lo vanish away: ή (ίττρίπαα, Jas. i. 1 1 ; the heavens, Heb. i. 1 1 (fr. Ps. ci. (cii.) 27) ; lo perish, — of things which on being thrown away are decomposed, as μίλο! τοΰ σώματος. Mt. v. 29 sq. ; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; — or which perish in some other way, as βρώσΐί, Jn. vi. 27 ; χρυσίον, 1 Pet. i. 7 ; — or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve the use for which they were desi°;ned, as o! ασκοί: Mt. ^ ΑτΓοΧΧύων β5 ατΓολυω ix. 1 7 ; Mk. ii. 22 ; Lk. v. 37. 2. to (/e.itroi/ i. e. to lose ; a. prop. : Alt. x. 42 ; Mk. ix. 41 {τον μισθον αντον) ; Lk. XV. 4, 8, 9; ix. 25; xvii. 33; Jn. -vii. 2.>; 2 Jn. K, etc. b. nietaph. Christ is said (o lose am/ one of his followers (wliom the Father has drawn to disciplesliip) if such a one becomes wicked and fails of salvation : Jn. vi. 3'J, cf. xviii. 9. Mid. to be lost : θρίξ ix τηι κίφαλη!, Lk. .\.\i. 18; Θ. άπο τη! κίφάΚηί, Acts .\xvii. 34 (Rec. ntae'iTm) ; τα λυμπμα αττωλ^το «ττό σου. Rev. .wiii. 14 (Kcc. άπηλθf). Used of slieep, straying from the Hock : prop. Lk. xv. 4 (to άττολωλοΓ, in Mt. xviii. 12 το πλανώμ(νυν). Aletaph. in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people of Israel to a tlock (.ler. xxvii. (1.) G ; Ezek. .xxxiv. 4, 16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left to themselves and thereby in danger of losing eternal sal- vation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are called τα πρόβατα τα άπολωλότα του οίκου ^Ισραήλ : Alt. .\. 6; ,χν. 24, (Is. Ιίϋ. 0; 1 I'et. ϋ. 2.j); and Christ, reclaim- ing them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and is said ζητιΊν και σώζιιν το οπολωλόί : Lk. .\ix. 10; Alt. xviii. 11 Rec. [CoMP. : συν-απόλλυμι.] ΆίΓολλύων, -uiTor, ό, (ptep. fr. άπυΧΧϋω), ΛροΙΙι/οη (a prop, name, formed by the author of the Apocalypse), i. e. Destroyer : Rev. ix. 1 1 ; cf. 'Λ^άδδωΐ', [and B. D. 8. v.].* 'Απολλωνία, -at, ή, ΛροΙΙοηία, a maritime city of Mace- donia, aliout a day's journey [ace. to the Antonine Itiner- ary 32 Roman miles] from Amphipolis, through which Paul passed on his way to Thessalonica [311 miles fur- ther] : Acts xvii. 1. [See B. D. s. v.]* ΆίΓολλώϊ [ace. to some, contr. fr. ΆπολλώνιοΓ, W. 102 (97) ; ace. to others, the ο is lengthened, cf. Fick; (iriech. Personennamen, p. xxi.], gen. -ώ (cf. B. 20 (18) sq. ; [W. 62 (61)]), accus. -ώ (Acts xi.x. 1) and -ώι; (1 Co. iv. 6 Τ Tr WH; Tit. iii. 13 Τ WII; cf. [IF//. App. p. 157]; Kiihner i. p. 315), 6, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity, attached to the apostle Paul : Acts xviii. 24 ; xix. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 12; iii. 4 s»;/ own cause [R. V. make ?ni/ defencel, Acts xxiv. 10; πfpίw)th gen. of the thing and «πί with gen. of pcrs., concernlnf/ a thing before one's tribunal. Acts xxvi. 2 ; with dat. of the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that I am innocent or upright, to defend or justi/'i/ mi/self in one's eyes [A. V. untol. Acts xix. 33 ; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat. Prot. p. 359 a. ; often in Lcian., Pint. ; [cf. B. 172(149)]). 2. to defend a person οτ a thing (.so not infreq. in prof, auth.) : Ro. ii. 15 (where ace. to the context the deeds of men must be understood as defended) ; τά πιρί ίμοϋ. Acts .\.\vi. 2 (but see under 1).* άπολοΎία, -ar, ή, (see aπo\oy(oμaι), rerbal defence, speec/i in defence: Acts xxv. 16; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 7, 1 7 (16); 2 Tim. iv. 16 ; ivith a dat. of the pers. whois tohear the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make good his cause: 1 Co. L\. 3 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15 ; in the same sense ή άπυλ. ή πρΟ! τίνα, Acts x.xii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4, 8, 5).* άίΓΟ-λούω : Ιυ icas/i of or airay; in the N. T. twice in 1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. noni. § 6, i. p. 58.5 ed. Mang.] : άπ(\ονσασθ(, 1 Co. vi. 11 ; βάπτισαι κα'ί άπύλουσαι τίΐ! άμαμτία! σου. Acts χχϋ. 16. For the sin- ner is luiclean, polhited as it were by the filth of his sins. Whoever obtains remis.«ion of sins has his sins put, so to speak, out of God's sight, — is cleansed from them in the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] ob- tained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have gone down into the baptismal bath [lacacrum, cf. Tit. iii. 5 ; Eph. v. 20] arc said άπο'λούσασθαι to have washed theniselces, or ras αμαμτ. άηολονσοσβαι to have washed away their sins, i. e. to have been cleansed from their sins.* άπο-λύτρωσ•ΐ5, -^ω?, η, (fr. (ϊττολυτρόω signifying a. to redeem one by paying the price, cf. Χύτρον: Plut. Pomp. 24 ; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8 ; Zeph. iii. 1 ; b. to let one go free on receiving the price: Plat. legg. 11 p. 919 a.; Polyb. 22, 21, 8; [cf.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected by payment of ransom ; redemption, deliverance, liberation procured by the payment of a ransom; 1. prop. : πόλίωκ αΙχμαΚώτων, Plut. Pomp. 24 (the only pass, in prof. writ, where the word has as yet been noted ; [add, Joseph, antt. 12, 2, 3 ; Diod. frag. 1. xxxvii. 5, 3 p. 149, 6 Dind. ; Philo, «juod omn. prob. lib. § 17]). 2. everywhere in the N. T. metaph., viz. deliverance effected through the death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God and the merited penalty of sin : Ro. iii. 24 ; Eph. i. 7 ; Col. i. 14, (cf. (ξαγοράζω. αγοράζω, λυτρόω, etc. [and Trench § Ixxvii.] ) ; άποΧύτρ. των παραβάσιων deUverance from the penalty of transgressions, effected through their expiation, Ileb. ix. 15, (cf. Delitzsch ad loc. anri Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 178) ; ημίρα άπιΧυτρώσ(ωί, the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and from all the ills and troubles of this life, Eph. iv. 30 ; in the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1 Co. i. 30 (where Christ himself is said to be redemption, i. e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we couM have none), and is to be taken in the phrase άπο- \ντρ. τηί π(ριποιησ(ως. Eph. i. 14, the redemption Avhicli will come to his possession, or to the men who are God's own through Christ, (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; του σώματο!. deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Ro. viii. 23 [W. 187 (176)]; deliverance from the hatred and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ from heaven, Lk. xxi. 28, cf. xviii. 7 sq. ; deliverance or release from torture, Heb. xi. 35.* άίΓο-λύω ; [impf. ππίλυοι/] ; fut. απολύσω ; I aor. απί- λι/σιι ; Pass., pf. απο\ί\υμαι\ \ Άοτ. άπ(\ϋθην\ [fut. άπο- ατΓομασσω 66 UTTOppiTTTU) λι/Οΐ)σομαι] ; impf. mid. άπ(\νόμην (Acts xxviii. 25) ; used in tlif X. T. only in llii• liistorical books and in Hub. xiii. 23; lo loose from, sever bi/ loosenint/, ιιιχίυ, [see από, v.] ; 1. lo set free : τινά Ttvos (so in Grk. writ, even fr. Horn, down), to liberate one from a tiling (as from a bond), Lk. xiii. 12 (άποΚίλυσαι [tliou hast been loosed i. e.] be thou free from [cf. W. § 40, 4] t^s άσθιιχίαί [L Τ άτΓο τ. άσ^.]). 2. to let go, dismiss, (to detain no longer) ; τινά, a. a suppliant to whom liberty to depart is given by• a decisive answer : Mt. xv. 23 ; Lk. ii. 29 (' me whom thou hadst determined to kee]) on earth until I had seen the salvation prepared for Israel, cf. vs. 26, thou art now dismissing with uiy wish accomplished, and this dismis- sion is at the same time dismission also from life ' — in ref- erence to Λvhich άπολϋί»' is used in Num. xx. 29 ; Tob. iii. 6 ; [cf. Gen. xv. 2 ; 2 Mace. vii. 9 ; Plut. consol. ad ApoU. § 13 cf. 11 fin.]) ; [Acts xxiii. 22]. b. to bid de- part, send away : Mt. xiv. 15, 22 sq. ; xv. 32, 39 ; Mk. vl. 36,45; viii. 3,9; Lk. viii. 38 ; ix. 1 2 ; xiv. 4 ; Acts xiii. 3 ; xix. 41 {την (κκΚησίαν) ; pass. Acts xv. 30, 33. 3. lo let fjn free, lo release ; a. a captive, i. e. to loose his bonds and bid him depart, to give him Uberty to depart : Lk. xxii. 68 [R G L Tr in br.] ; xxiii. 22 ; Jn. xix. 10 ; Acts xvi. 35 sip ; xxvi. 32 {απολ(\ΰσθαί eSivaro [might have been set at liberty, cf. B. 21 7 (187), § 139, 27 c. ; W. 305 (286 ) i. e.] mif/ht be free ; pf. as in Lk. xiii. 1 2 [see 1 above, and W. 334 (313)]) ; Acts xxviii. 18 ; Heb. xiii. 23 ; άηολ. τινά τινι Ιο release one Ιο one, grant him liis liberty : Mt. xxvii. 15, 17,21,26; Mk. xv. 6, 9, 11,15; Lk. xxiii. [16], 1 7 [K L in br.], 18, 20, 25 ; [Jn. xviii. 39]. b. to acquit one accused of a crime and set him at liberty : Jn. xix. 12 ; Acts iii. 13. c. indulgently to grant a prisoner leave todepart: Actsiv. 21, 23; V. 40; xvii. 9. d. to release a debtor, i. e. not to press one's claim against him, to remit his debt: Mt. xviii. 27 ; metaph. to pardon another his offences against me : Lk. vi. 37, (t^s αμαρτία: άπολΰ(σθαί, 2 Mace. xii. 45). 4. used of divorce, as άπολϋωτην ■γννα'ικα to dismiss from the house, to repudiate : Mt. i. 19; v. 31sq. ; xix. 3, 7-9; Mk. x. 2, 4, 11; Lk. .xvi. 18; [1 Esdr. ix. 36] ; and improperly a wife deserting her husband is said τον άν&ρα άττολΰίΐν in Mk. .\. 12 [cf. Diod. 12, 18] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to historic accuracy [yet cf. Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 10], makes Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage, ace. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [reff. in l^Iey. ad 1.]) ; (cf. η'^ψ, Jer. iii. 8 ; Deut. xxi. 14 ; xxii. 19, 29). 5. Mid. απολύομαι, prop, to send one's self away; to depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (re- turned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).* άίΓΟ-μάσσ-ω : (μάσσω to touch with the hands, handle, work with the hands, knead), to wipe off; Mid. άπομάσ- σομαι Ιο wipe one's self off, to ivipe off for one's self: τόχ (ίοι/ιορτοι» ΰμ'ιν, Lk. χ. 11. (In Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down.) * άίΓο-νί'μ» ; (vtμω to dispense a portion, to distribute), to assign, portion out, (από as in άπο8ί8ωμι [q. v., cf. aro.V.]) : Ttvi Ti viz. τιμήν, showing honor, 1 Pet. iii. 7, (so Hdian. 1, 8, 1 ; την τι/ιήκ και την (ίχαριστίαν, Joseph, antt. 1, 7, 1 ; τω ίπκτκόπω πάσαν ϊντροττήν, Ignat. ad Magnes. 3 ; first found in [.Simon. 9 7 in Anthol. Pal. 7, 253, 2 (vol. i. p. 64 ed. Jacobs)] : Pind. Isthm. 2, 68 ; often in Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.).* άτι-ο-νίτΓτω : lo u'ash off; 1 aor. mid. άπινι^άμην ; in mid. to wash one's self off, to wash off for one's self: Tas Xf'ipas, Mt. xxviL 24, cf. Deut. xxi. 6 sq. (The earlier Greeks say άπονίζω — but with fut. άπονίψω, 1 aor. ane- «ψ-α; the later, as Theophr. char. 25 [30 (17)]; Plut. Phoc. 18; Athen. iv. c. 31 p. 149 c, άπονίπτω, although this is found [but in the mid.] even in Horn. Od. 18, 1711.)• άίΓο-ιτΟίΓΓω : 2 aor. άπtπfσυv; [(cf. πίπτω); fr. Iloin. down] ; to fall off, slip down from : Acts ix. 18 [W. § 52, 4, 1 a.].• άπο-Ίτ\αν&ω, -ω ; 1 aor. pass, ^^πf πλανήίΐ)» ; to cause to go astral/, trop. to lead away from the truth lo error : τικά, Mk. xiii. 22 ; pass, to go astray, stray away from : άπο τή{ πίστfωs, 1 Tim. vi. 10. ( [Ilippocr.] ; Plat. A.x. p. 369 d. ; Polyb. 3, 57, 4 ; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.) • άΐΓ0-π•λ('ω ; 1 aor. άπeπ\evσa ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to sail airuy, dejxirl by ship, set sail : Acts xiii. 4 ; .xiv. 26 ; xx. 15 ; xxvii. 1.* άίΓΟ-ΊτλΟνω : [1 aor. άπίπλυνα (?)] ; to trash off: Lk. v. 2 (where L Tr WH t.\t. ίπλυνον, Τ WH mrg. -av, for R G άπ€π\νναν [possibly an impf. form, ef. B. 40 (35); Soph. Glossary, etc. p. 90]). (Horn. Od. 6, 95 ; Plat., Plut., and subseq. writ. ; Sept. 2 S. xix. 24, [cf. Jer. ii. 22 ; iv. 14; Ezek. xvi. 9 var.].) * ά'ΐΓθ--ΐΓν£γω : 1 aor. άπ^πνιζα ; 2 aor. pass, άπ^πνίγην ; (από as in άποκτ^ίνω q. v. [cf. to choke off^); lo choke: Mt. xiii. 7 (T WH mrg. ίπι^Ιακ) : Lk. viii. 7 (of seed over- laid by thorns and killed by them) ; to suffocate with water, to drown, Lk. viii. 33 (as in Dem. 32, 6 [i. e. p. 883, 28 etc.; schol. ad Eur. Or. 812]).* duopc'u, -ώ : impf. 3 pers. sing. ηπόρ(ΐ (^Ik. vi. 20 Τ WH Tr mrg.) ; [pres. mid. άποροΰμαι] ; lo be αποροί (fr. α priv. and πόρο! a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e. lo be without resources, lo be in straits, lo be lef tcanling, lo be embarrassed, lo be in doubl, not to k-now which way to turn ; [impf. in Mk. vi. 20 (see above) ποΧλίι ήπόριι he was in jierplexity about many things or much pirjilexed (cf. Thuc. 5, 40, :i ; Xen. HeU. 6, 1. 4 ; Hdt. 3. 4 ; 4, 1 79 ; Aristot. tneteorolog. 1, 1) ; elsewhere] Mid. to he at a loss with one's self, be in doubl; not to know how lo deride οτ what to do, to he perplexed : absol. 2 Co. iv. 8 ; πίρί tivos, Lk. xxiv. 4 L Τ Tr WH ; πfp\ tIvos rts Xf'yf i, Jn. xiii. 22 ; άποροΰμαι iv ΰμίν I am perplexed about you, I know not how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Gal. iv. 20 ; άπορούμίνο! fya> fi's [T Tr AVH om. ci'f] την πιρΊ τούτον [των L Τ Tr WH] fiyTrjaifl being perplexed liow to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him [or these things']. Acts xxv. 20. (Often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down ; often also in Sept.) [Comp. : hi-, φαπηρ^ω.] * απορία, -at, ή, (άπορίω, q. v.), the stale of one who is άπορος, perplexity : Lk. xxi. 25. (Often in Grk. writ, fr [Pind. and] Hdt. down; Sept.)* άττο-ρρΙτΓτβ : 1 aor. άπίρριψα [Τ WH write wifh one μ; άττορφαι'ίζω 67 ατΓοστελΛω see Ρ, ρ]; [fr. Horn, down] ; to throw away, cast flown ; re- flexively, to cast one's self down : Actsxxvii. 43 [K.Y. cast themselves overboard^. (So in Lcian. ver. hist. 1, 30 var. ; [Chariton 3, 5, see D'OrviUe ad lot-.] ; cf. W. 251 (23(J) ; [B. 140(127)].)* air-op4>avC^u : [1 aor. pass. ptcp. άτΓορφανισΰίΪ!^ ; (fr. ορφανός bereft, and από sc. tikos), to bereace of a parent or parents, (so Aeschyl. choeph. 247 (249)) ; hence metaph. άπορφανισθίντα αφ' υμών liereft of vour intercourse and society, 1 Th. ii. 1 7 [here Rec"•!^ (by mistake) άποφανι- crfleVrff].* άίΓΟ-ΐΓΚίυάζω : 1 aor. \\\\Λ. άπ^σκ^νασάμην, {σκΐνάζω to prepare, provide, fr. σκ£ Oof a utensil), to carry ojf goods and chattels ; to pack tip and carry off; mid. to carry off' one's personal property or provide for its carrying away, (Polyb. 4, «1, 11 ; Diod. 13, 91 ; Dion. Hal. 9, 23, etc.) : άποσκ.(νασάμ(νοι having collected and removed our bag- gage, Acts xxi. 1 5 ; but L Τ Tr WH read ίπισκευασάμι- voi (<[■ V.).* άΐΓθ-(Γκίασμιο, -roc, τό, (σκιάζω, fr. σκιά), a shade cast by one object upon another, a shadow : τροπής άττοσκίασμα shadow caused by revolution, Jas. i. 1 7. Cf. Ιιπανγασμα* άίΓΟ-σ-ιτάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άπίσπασα ; 1 aor. pass, άπίσπάσθην ; to draw off', tear away : τ. μάχαψαν to draw one's sword, Mt. xxvi. 51 ((κσπαν T. μάχ. {or ρομφαίαν), 1 S. -xvii. 51 [AJex. etc.]; σπάχ, 1 Chr. .\i. 11 ; Mk. xiv. 47); άποσπάν τους μαθητίις οπίσω ίαυτών to draw away the disciples to their own party, Acts xx. 30, (very similarly, Ael. v. h. 13, 32). Pass, reflexively : αποσπασθίντ^ς απ αΐτων having torn ourselves from the embrace of our friends. Acts x.xi. 1 ; άπ^σπάσθη απ' αυτών he parted, tore himself, from them about a stone's cast, Lk. .xxii. 41 ; cf. Meyer ad loc. (In prof. auth. fr. [Find, and] Hdt. down.) * άτΓοσταο-ία. -ας, ή. (άφίσταμαι), a falling away, defection, apostasy ; in the Bible sc. from the true religion : Acts xxi. 21 ; 2 Th. ii. 3 ; ([Josh. xxii. 22 ; 2 Chr. xxLx. 19 ; xxxiii. 19] ; Jer. ii. 19 ; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl. ; 1 Mace. ii. 15). The earlier Greeks say άπόστασις; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. .528 ; [W. 24].* άτΓοστάσ-νον, -ου, τό, very seldom in native Grk. writ., defection, of a freedman from his patron, Dem. 35, 48 [940, 16]; in the Bible 1. dirorce, repudiation: Mt. xix. 7 ; Mk. x. 4 (βιβλίον άποστασίου, equiv. to "\3D Jin""13 book or bill of divorce, Deut. xxiv. 1,3; [Is. 1. 1 ; Jer. iii. 8]). 2. a bill of divorce: Mt. v. 31. Grotius ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc, give a copy of one.* άΐΓΐ«ΓΤ€γάζω : 1 aor. άπ€στ(γασα ; (στ€γάζω, fr. στί-γη) ; to uncovir, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, ivitb his hearers, was in the ύπ(ρωον q. v., and it was the roof of this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus are said to have ' dug out ' ; [cf. B. D. s. v. House, p. 1104]). (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303 ; 8, 3, 30, p. .542.) * άπο-<ΓΤ(λλω; fut. αττοστ^λώ ; 1 aor. άττίστ? ίλα : pf. άπί- σταλκα, [3 pers. plur. άπίσταΧκαν Acts xvi. 'M'> I, Τ Tr Λ\ II (see -γίνομαι init.) ; Pass., pres. άποστί\\ομαι] ; pf . άπiστa\- μαι ; 2 aor. απ^σταΚην ; [fr. Sojili. down] ; prop, to send off, send away ; 1. to order (one) to go to a place ap- pointed; a. either persons sent with commissions, or t h i η g s intended for some one. So, very frequently, Jesus teaches that God sent him, as Mt. x. 40; Mk. ix. 37 ; Lk. X. IG ; Jn. v. 36, etc. he, too, is said to have sent his apostles, i. e. to have appointc ing ; cf. Joel (iii. 18) iv. 13 ; Rev. xiv. 15 (s. ν.πίμπω. b.)] ; τον λόγον. Acts X. 36 ; xiii. 26 (L Τ Tr WH (ξαπ(στά\η) ; την ΐπαγγΐΚίαν (equiv. to τό ίΤτηγγ^'Κμΐνον, i. e. the prom- ised Holy Spirit) ί'φ' υμάς, Lk. xxiv. 49 [T Tr WII c|a- ποστί'λλω] ; τ\ διό χ^φός τίνος, after the Hebr. Ύ3, Acts xi. 30. b. The Place of the sending is specified :<ΐποοτ. €Ϊϊ Τίνα τάτΓον, Mt. xx. 2 ; Lk. i. 26 ; Acts vii. 34 ; x. 8 ; xix. 22 ; 2 Tim. iv. 12 ; Rev. v. 6, etc. God sent Jesus eis τον κόσμον: Jn. iii. 17; x. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9. «j \_unto ie.] among : Mt. xv. 24 ; Lk. xi. 49 ; Acts [xxii. 21 AVH mrg.] ; xxvi. 1 7 ; \tv (by a pregnant or a Lat. con- struction) cf. W. ? 50, 4 ; B. 329 (283) : Mt. x. 16 ; Lk. X. 3 ; yet see 1 a. above] ; οπίσω τινός, Lk. .xix. 14 ; ΐμπρο- σθίν τίνος, Jn. iii. 28 ; and προ προσώπου τινός, after the Hebr. "'JsS, before (to precede) one: Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2 ; Lk. vii. 27 ; x. 1. προς τίνα, to one : Mt. xxi. 34, 37; Mk. xii. 2 sq. ; Lk. vii. 3, 20; Jn. v. 33; Acts viii. 14; 2 Co. xii. 17, etc. W h e η c e, or by or from whom, one is sent: ΰπο toC βιοϋ, Lk. i. 26 (T Tr WII από) ; πάρα β(οΰ, Jn. i. 6 (Sir. xv. 9) ; από with gen. of pers., from the house of any one : Acts .x. 1 7 [T WH Tr mrg. υπό'], 21 Rec. ; ex with gen. of place : Jn. i. 19. c. The Object of the mission is indicated by an infin. following: Iilk. iii. 14 ; Mt. xxii. 3 ; Lk. i. 19 ; iv. 18 (Is. Lxi. 1, [on the pf. cf. AV. 272 (255) ; B. 197 (171)]) ; Lk. ix. 2 ; Jn. iv. 38 ; 1 Co. i. 1 7 ; Rev. xxii. 6. [foil, by eh for. eif διακονίαν, Ileb. i. 14. foU. by ίνα : Mk. xii. 2, 13 ; Lk. .XX. 10, 20 ; Jn. i. 19 ; iii. 17 ; vii. 32; 1 Jn. iv. 9. [foil, by όπως: Acts ix. 17.] foil, by an ace. with inf. : Acts v. 21. foil, by τινά with a pred. ace. : Acts iii. 26 (fiXoyoivTa υμάς to confer God's blessing on you [cf. B. 203 (176) sqq.]) ; Acts vii. 35 (άρχοντα, to be a ruler) ; 1 Jn. iv. 10. d. άποστίλλιιν by itself, without an ace. [cf. W. 594 (552) ; B. 146 (128)] : as άττοστίλλ^χ προς τίνα, Jn. v. 33 ; with the addition of the ptcp. "Κΐγων, Χίγουσα, λε- yovTfs, to say through a messenger: Mt. xxvii. 19; Mk. iii. 31 [here φωvoϋvτfς αυτόν R G, κάΚοϋντ(ς air. L Τ Tr WH] ; Jn. xi. 3 ; Acts xiii. 15 ; [xxi. 25 nep\ τών πιπιστ^ν- κότων ΐθνών ημ^ΐς ancOTfiXapfv (L Tr txt. Λ\ Η txt.) κρί- ναντις etc. we sent imrd, giving Judgment, etc.]. ^ten one accomplished anything thniM αΐτόν). 2. to send away i. e. to dismiss ; a. (o «//««• one to ile- part : τίνα e'v άφίσίΐ, that he may be in a state of liberty, Lk. iv. 18 (I'J), (Is. Iviii. 6). b. tn order one to depart, send off: Mk. viii. 26 ; rira κινάν. Mk. xii. .S. c. to drive nw-rtii : Mk. V. 10. [Co.Ml•. ; ΐξ-, σνν-αηηστίΧΚω. Syn. see πίμπω, fin.] απ-ο-<ΓΤΕρ<'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. άπισηρησα ; [Pass., pres. απο- στ(μονμαι] ; pf. ptcp. άπιστίρημίνα ; '" defraud, roll, de- spoil : absol., Mli. .\. 19; 1 Co. vi. 8; άλλίίλουΓ to with- hold themselves from one another, of those who mutually deny themselves cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5. Mid. to allimi one's self to be defrauded [W. § 38, 3] : 1 Co. vi. 7 ; τινά Tt» Γ (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a lltinr/; pass. άπίοτίρημίνοι rijs ά\ηθ(ίαί, 1 Tim. vi. 5 [ W. 1 9G ( 1 85 ) ; B. 158 (138)]; τι to defraud of a tliinrj, to withdraw or keep back a thinj by frau. 238 ed. Hard. ; to repeat to a pupil (anything) /or him to commit to mem- ory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 c, 277 a.; used of a Sibyl prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. lo ply with questions, catechize, and so to entice lo [off-hand] answers : τινά, Lk. xi. 53.• diro-OTpf φω : fut. άποστρί'ψω ; 1 aor. aTtioTpf^a ; 2 aor. pass, άπιστράφην; [pres. mid. αποστρέφομαι; fr. Iloni. down] ; 1. lo turn away : τίνα or τ1 άπό τιιόε, 2 Tim. iv. 4 {την άκοην ΰπο τήί άΧηθι'ια!) ; Ιο remove anytliing from any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. Ux. 20) ; άποστρϊφίΐν τίκά simjjly, to turn him away from allegiance to any one, tempt to defection, [A. V. perverti, Lk. ,xxiii. 14. 2. lo turn hack; return, bring back: Mt. xxvi. 52 (put b.ack thy sword into its sheath) ; Mt. xxvii. 3, of Judas bringing back the shekels, Avhere Τ Tr WH ίστρ(ψ(, [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Jos. § 1 7]. (In the same sense for 2'ur\, Gen. xiv. 16; xxviii. 15; xUii. 11 (12), 20(21), etc. ; Bar. i. 8 ; ii. 34, etc.) 3. intrans. to turn one's self away, turn hack, return : άιτϊι των πονηριών. Acts iii. 26, cf. 19, (άττο άμαρτίαί. Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.] ; to return from a place, Gen. xviii. 33 ; 1 Mace. xi. .54, etc. ; [see Kneucker on Bar. i. 13] ; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 12) ; cf. Meyer on Acts I.e.; [al. (with A. V.) take it actively here: in turning away every one of you, etc.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor. pass., to turn one's self atcay from, with ace. of the obj. (cf. [Jelf § 548 obs. 1: Krug. § 47, 23, 1] ; B. 192(166)); lo reject, refuse: τινά, Mt. v. 42; Heb. xii. 25; την ά\ή- θίΐαν,ΎΊΐ. i. 14; in the sense of rfesert/n 7, rtra, 2 Tim. i. 15.* όΐΓθ-<Γτνγί'ω, -ώ ; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro. xii. 9; (Hdt. 2, 47; 6, 129; Soph., Eur., al.). The word is fully discussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes the άττο- as expressive of separation (cf. l.at. refor- midare), al. regard it as intensive; (see άπό,ν.)].• όίΓοστηΆγοιγοϊ, •ον, (συναγωγή, q. v.), excluded from the sacred assemblies of the Israelites ; excommunicated, [A. V. put out of the synagogue]: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2. Whether it denotes also exclusion fr. all intercourse with Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in doubt ; cf. Win. [or Riehm] R W B. s. v. Bann ; Wieseler on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Riddle in Schaff's Lange's Romans pp. 304-306 ; cf. B. D. s. v. E.xcommunication]. (Not found in prof, auth.)• ατΓοτασσω 69 ατΓοχρησκ «το^άσ-σ-αι : to set apart, to separate ; in the N. T. only in Mid. αποτάσσομαι ; 1 aor. άπίταξάμην ; 1. prop, to separate one's self, withdraw one's sel/irom any one, i. e. lo take leave of, bid farewell to, (Vulg. valefacio [etc.]) : Tivi, Mk. vi. 40 ; Lk. L\. 61 ; Acts .wiii. 18, 21 [here L Τ Tr om. the dat.] ; 2 Co. ii. 1.3. (That the early Grk. writ, never so used the word, but said άσπ<ίζ(σθαί τίνα, is shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 23 sq. ; [cf. \V. 23 (22) ; B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: τινί, Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 8 ; Phil, alleg. iii. § 48 ; ταΐί τοΰ βίου φροντίσι, Euseb. h. e. 2, 17, 5 ; [τώ /3ιω, Ignat. ad Philadelpli. 11, 1 ; cf. Herm. mand. 6, 2, 9; Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 6, 4 and 5 Λvhere see Gebh. and Ilarn. for other e.x.x., also Soph. Lex. s. v.].) • aircM-tXtu, -ώ ; [1 aor. pass. ptcp. αποτ(λίσίίίί] ; to per- fect; to briufj quite lo an end : ιάσβί?, (n cf/nt/>/ish, Lk. xiii. 32 (LT Tr \V Η for R G (πιτίΧω) ; η αμαρτία αττοτίλβ- σθ(Ίσα having come to maturity, Jas. i. 15. (Hdt., Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) * άίΓο-τίθημι : 2 aor. mid. ατκθίμην ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to put off or aside ; in the N. T. only mid. to put off frum one's self: τα ιμάτια. Acts τϋ. 58 ; [to lay up or awai/, iv tSj φυλακή (i. e. put), Mt. xiv. 3 L Τ Tr WH (so tts φυ\α- κήν, Lev. xxiv. 1 2 ; Num. xv. 34 ; 2 Chr. xviii. 26 ; Polyb. 24, 8, 8; Diod. 4, 49, etc.)]; trop. those things are said to be put off or away which any one gives up, renounces : as τα (pya τοϋ σκότους, Ro. xiii. 12 ; — Eph. iv. 22 [cf. \V. 347(325); B. 274 (236)], 25; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 21 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 ; Heb. xii. 1 ; (την όργήν. Plut. Coriol. 1 9 ; τον πλοΰ- τον, την μαΧακίαν, etc. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; τ. (\(υθ(ρίαν κ. τταρρησίαν, ibid. 9, etc.).* άίΓο-τινόο-σω ; 1 aor. αποτίναξα ; [1 aor. mid. ptcp. άττο- τιναξιΊμίνο!, Acts xxviii. 5 Tr mrg.] ; to shake off: Lk. ix. 5; Acts xxviii. 5. (1 S. x. 2; Lam. ii. 7; Eur. Bacch. 253 ; [αποτιναχθτι, Galen 6, 821 ed. Kuhn].) * ΟΊΓΟ^τίνω and αττο-τ/ω : fut. αποη'σω; (από as in αττοδί- δωμι [cf. also από, V.]), to pay off, repay: Philcm. 19. (Often in Sept. for Ώ^ΰ; in prof. auth. fr. Horn, down.) * άπο-τολμάω, -ω ; prop, to be bold of one's self (από [q. v. V.]), i. e. to assume boldness, make bold : Ro. x. 20 ; cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 15. (Occasionally in Thuc, Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) * άιτοτομία, -as, ή, (the nature of that which is απότομο!, cut off, abrupt, precipitous like a cliff, rough ; fr. άπο- τίμνω), prop, sharpness, (differing fr. απητομή a cutting off, a segment); severity, roughness, riyor: Ro. xi. 22 (where opp. to χρηστάτης, as in Plut. de lib. educ. c. 18 to TrpaoTijf, in Dion. Ilal. 8, 61 to το tmfiKes, and in Diod. p. 591 [excpt. Lxxxiii. (frag. 1. 32, 27, 3 Dind.)] to ήμι- ρότη!).' άίΓοτόμως, adv., (cf. άποτομία) ; a. abruptly, precipi- tously, b. trop. shar/jiy, severely, [cf. our curtly'\ : Tit. i. 13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. απότομο! cf. Grimm on Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20, 22: vi. 5, 11; xi. 10: xii. 9; xviii. 15, refers to the similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim. 27 ; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Λ'al. Max. 2, 7, 14, etc. ; see also Polyb. 1 7, 1 1, 2 : Polyc. ad Phil. 6, 1].* amy^piira : [fr. Horn, down] ; to turn away; Mid. [pres. αποτρέπομαι, impv. άποτρίπον] lo turn one's self away from, to shun, avoid : τινά or τ» (see άποστρίφω sub fin.) 2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33 ; Aeschyl. Sept. lOiJO ; Eur. Iph. Aul. 336; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 815•', 18; Polyb. al.].)• άπ-ονσία, -as, ή, (άπίϊναι), absence : Phil. ii. 1 2. [From Aeschyl. down.] * απ&.ψ€'ρω : 1 aor. άπηνίγκα ; 2 aor. inf. απ f vf-yjceti^ ; Pass., [pres. inf. άποφίρ(σθαι}; 1 aor. inf. άπ^νίχβήναι; [fr. Horn, down] ; to carry off,take away : τινά, with the idea of violence included, Mk. xv. 1 ; fit τόττον τιι/ά. Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10; pass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring airay (Lat. defero) : τι els with ace. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3 ; τι από Tivos ίπί τίνα, ivith pass.. Acts xix. 12 (L Τ Tr WH for Rcc. (πιφ(ρ(σθαι).* άίΓο-φίύγω [jjtcp. in 2 Pet. ii. 18 L Τ Tr WH ; W. 342 (321)]; 2 aor. άπ(φυ•/ον; [fr. (Ilom.) batrach. 42, 47 down]; to fee from, escape; with ace, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (where L Τ wrongly put a comma after άποφ. [W. 529 (492)]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the prep. [B. 158 (138) ; W. § 52, 4, 1 c], 2 Pet. i. 4.• άτΓθ-ψθ€'γγομαι ; 1 aor. άπ(φ6(•γξάμην ; to speak out, speak ftjrih, jironounce, not a word of every-day speech, but one " belonging to dignified and elevated discourse, like the Lat. profari, pronuntiare; properly it has the force of to utter or declare one's self, give one's opinion, (einen Ausspruch thun), and is used not only of prophets (see Kypke on Acts ii. 4, — adding from the Sept. Ezek. xiii. 9 ; Mic. v. 1 2 ; 1 Chr. xxv. 1), but also of wise men and philosophers (Diog. Laert. 1,63; 73; 79; whose pointed sayings the Greeks call άποφθί'γματα, Cic off. 1, 29) " ; [see φθίγγομαι]. Accordingly, " it is used of the utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illus- trious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14 ; and also of the disclosures made by Paul to [before] king Agrii)pa concerning the άποκάλυψις κυρίου that had been given him. Acts xxvi. 25." Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16.' άπο-ψορτίζομαι ; (φορτίζω to load; φύρτο! a load), lo disburden one's self; τι, to lay down a hail, unlade, ΐΓολή•πτω5 [-\ημπτω! L Τ Tr WII ; cf. reff. s. v. M, μ\, a word of Ilcllenistic origin, (a priv. and προσω- ποΧ'ΐτΓτης, (^. \.), irilhoul respect of persons, i. e. impar- tially: 1 Pet. i. 17, (Ep. of Barn. 4, 12; [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1,3]). (The adj. άπροσωπόληπτος occurs here and there in ecd. writ.) * o-irraiiTTOS, -ov (πται'ω, (|. v.), not stumbling, standing firm, ercmpt from falling, (prop., of a horse, Xen. de re eq. 1, 6) ; metaph. : Jude 24. [Cf. W. 97 (92) ; B. 42 (37).]• dwTu ; 1 aor. Jitcp. n\|/as ; (cf. Lat. apto. Germ, hefen) ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. prop, lo fasten to, make adhere to ; hence, spec, to fasten fire to a thing, to kindle, set on fire, (often so in Attic) : λΰχνον, Lk. viii. 16 ; xi. 33 ; xv. 8, (Arstph. nub. 57; Theophr. char. 20 (18); Joseph, antt. 4, 3, 4) : πίρ, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. AVH π^ρι- αψάιηων^ ; πυράν. Acts xxviii. 2 Ij Τ Tr WH. 2. Mid., [pres. άτΓτομαι] ; impf. ήπτόμην [Mk. vi. 56 RG Tr mrg.] ; 1 aor. ήψάμην ; in Sept. generally for j,'ii^ il'Jn ; prop. to fasten one's self to, adhere to, cling to, (Horn. H. 8, 67) ; a. to touch, foil, by the obj. in gen. [W. § 30, 8 c.; B. 167 (146); cf. Donaldson p. 483] : Mt. viii. 3 ; Mk. iii. 10; vii. 33; viii. 22, etc.; Lk. .wiii. 15; xxii. 51, — very often in Mt., Mk. and Lk. In Jn. xx. 1 7, μη μου απτού is to be explained thus : Do not handle me to see whether I am still clothed with a body ; there is no need of such an examination, "fornot yet" etc.; ci. Baumg.-Crusiusand Mejer ad loc. [as given by Ilackett in Bib. Sacr. for 1868, p. 779 sq., or B. D. Am. ed. p. 1813 sq.]. b. γυι-αι- Kos. of carnal intercourse with a woman, or cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 1, like the Lat. tangere, Hor. sat. 1, 2, 54 ; Ter. Heaut. 4, 4, 15, and the Hebr. ^rj:. Gen. xx. 6 ; Prov. vi. 29, (Plat, de legg. viii. 840 a. ; Plut. Alex. Magn. c. 21). c. with allusion to the levitical precejit ακαθάρτου μη απτ(σθ(, have no intercourse with the Gentiles, no fel- lowship in their heathenish practices, 2 Co. vi. 1 7 (fr. Is. Hi. 11) ; and in the Jewish sense, μη a\jrt] Col. ii. 21 (the things not to be touched appear to be both women and certain kinds of food, so that celibacy and abstinence from various kinds of food and drink are recommeniled ; cf. De Wette ad loc. [but also Meyer and Bp. Lghtft. ; on the distinction between the stronger term άπτίσθαι (to handle!) and the more delicate eiyiiv (lo loucht) cf. the two commentators just named and Trench § xvii. In classic Grk. also απτισθαι is the stronger term, denoting often lo lay hold of hold fast, appropriate ; in its carnal reference differing from Biyyavfiv by suggesting unlaw- fulness. iiyyai/fiK is used of touching by the hand as a means of knowledge, handling for a purpose ; ψηΧαφά» signifies to feel around with Ihe fingers or hands, esp. in searching for something, often lo grope, fumble, cf. x/^ijXa- φίvδal^lindman'shuff. Schmidt ch. 10.]). d. to touch i.e. assail: τινός, any one, 1 Jn. v. 18, (1 Chr. xvi. 22, etc.). [COMP. : av-, καθ-, πφΐ-άτττω.] Άττφία, -ας. ή, Apphiii. name of a woman : Philem. 2. [Apparently a Phrygian name expressive of endearment, cf. SuidaeLex. ed. Gaisf. col. 534 a. Άπφιί: ά8(λφης κ. άδίλφοϋ υποκορισμό, etc. cf. Άπφΰς- See fully in Bp. Lglitft.'s Com. on Col. and Philem. p. 306 sqq.] * άπ-ωθε'ω, -ώ : Ιο thrust aicay, push away, repel ; in the N. T. only Mid., pres. άπωθίομαι (-οϋμαι) ; 1 aor. άπωσάμην (for which the better writ, used άπιωσάμην, cf. W 90 (86) ; B. 69 (61)) ; to thrust away from one's self, lo drive away from one's self, i. e. to repudiate, reject, refuse : τινά. Acts vii. 27, 39; xiii. 46 ; Ro. xi. 1 sq. ; 1 Tim. i. 19. (Jer. ii. 36 (37) ; iv. 30 ; vi. 19 ; Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 14 and often. In (irk. writ. fr. Ilom. down.)* άπώλΜα, -as, ή, (fr. άπόλΧυμι, ({■ v.) ; 1. actively, a destroying, utter de.itruction : as, of vessels, Ro. ix. 22 ; ToO μύρου, waste, Mk. xiv. 4 (in Mt. xxvi. 8 without a gen.), (in Polyb. 6, 59, 5 consumption, opp. to τήρησις) ; the putting of a man to death. Acts xxv. 16 Rec. ; by meton. a destructive thing or opinion: in plur. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Rec. ; but the correct reading aaeXyfiais was long ago adopted here. 2. passively, α per/.v/imi/, rui'n, destruction ; a. in general : to apyipiav σον συν σοι (ΐη f is απ. let thy money perish with thee. Acts viii. 20 ; βυθίζιιν Tiva fi's SXfflpox K. άπωΚιιαν, with the in'-hldsd idci or apa 71 άραφο^ misery, 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; aipcVfif άπω\€Ίας destructive opin- ions, 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; enayfiv eavrms άπώ\€ΐαν, ibid. cf. vs. 3. b. in particular, llie destruction which consists in the loss of eternal life, eternal misery, perdition, the lot of those excluded from the kingdom of God : Rev. xvii. 8, 11, cf. xix. 20 ; Phil. iii. 19 ; 2 Pet. iii. Ifi ; opp. to ή πιριποίησί! TJjs ijnif(!js, Heb. x. 39 ; to ή ζωη. Ml. vii. 13 ; to σωτηρία, Phil. i. 28. 6 νΙοΫ της άπωλιίας, a man doomed to eternal misery (a Hebraism, see vlos, 2) : 2 Th. ii. 3 (of Anti- christ) ; .In. xvii. 1 2 (of Judas, the traitor) ; ήμ(ρα κρίσ£ωι κ. άπωλ(ία! των άσφων, 2 Pet. iii. 7. (In prof. auth. fr. Polyb. u. s. [but see Aristot. probl. 1 7, 3, 2, vol. ii. p. 916", 26 ; 29, 14, 10 ibid. 952', 2G ; Nicom. eth. 4, 1 ibid. 1120", 2, etc.] ; often in the Sept. and O. T. Apocr.)* άρα, an illative particle (akin, as it seems, to the verbal root AP£2 to join, to be fitted, [cf. Curtius § 488 ; VaniCek p. 47]), whose use among native Greeks is illustrated fully by Kuhner ii. §§■ 509, 545 ; [Jelf §§ 787-789], and Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 160-180, among others; [for a statement of diverse views see Btiumlein, Griech. Par- tikeln, p. 1 9 sq.]. It intimates that, " under these cir- cumstances something either is so or becomes so " (Klotz 1. c. p. 167) : Lat. ir/itur, consequentlij, [differing from ουν in ' denoting a subjective impression rather than a positive conclusion.' L. and S. (see 5 below)]. In the N. T. it is used frequently by Paul, but in the writings of John and in the so-called Catholic Epistles it does not occur. On its use in the N. T. cf. W. §§ 53, 8 a. and 61,6. It is found 1. subjoined to another word : Ro. vii. 21 ; viii. 1 ; Gal. iii. 7 ; ϊπά άρα since, if it were other- wise, 1 Co. vii. 14 ; [v. 10, cf. B. § 149, 5]. When placed after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a preceding assertion or fact, or even to something exist- ing only in the mind . τις Spa n-ho then ? Mt. .xviii. 1 (i. e. one certainly will be the greater, who then ?) ; Jit. xix. 25 (i. e. certainly some will be saved ; you say that the rich will not ; who then ?) ; Mt. xix. 27 ; xxiv. 45 (I bid you be ready; who then etc.? the question follows from this command of mine) ; Mk. iv. 41 ; Lk. i. 66 (from all these things doubtless something follows ; what, then f) ; Lk. viii. 25 ; xii. 42 ; xxii. 23 (it will be one of us, which then f) ; Acts xii. 18 (Peter has disappeared ; what, then, has become of him?), dapa, Mk. xi. 13 (whether, since the tree had leaves, he might also find some fruit on it) ; Acts vii. 1 [Rec] (Spa equiv. to ' since the witnesses tes- tify thus') ; Acts viii. 22 (if, since thy sin is so grievous, perhaps the thought etc.) ; e'lnep Spa, 1 Co. xv. 15, (NJ-DS, ei Spa, Gen. xviii. 3). ουκ Spa, Acts xxi. 38 (thou hast a knowledge of Greek; art thou not then the Egyptian, as I suspected?); μητι Spa (Lat. nnm iffitur), did I then etc., 2 Co. i. 17. 2. By a use doubtful in Grk. writ, (cf. B. 371 (318) ; [W.'sSS (519)]) it is placed at the beginning of a sentence ; and so, so then, acrordinf/li/, equiv. to ωστ( with a finite verb : Spa paprvpe'iTf [μάρτυ- ρας etrrc Τ Tr WHJ, Lk. xi. 48 (Mt. xxiii. 31 ώστ( μαρ- Tvptne) ; Ro. χ. 17 ; 1 Co. xv. 18 ; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (in LT TrWH no conditional protasis preceding) ; 2 Co. vii. 12 ; Gal. iv. 31 (L Τ Tr WH δ.ό) ; Ileb. iv. 9. 3. in an apodosis, after a protasis with el, in order to brin» out what follows as a matter of course, (Germ, so ist ja the obvious inference is) : Lk. xi. 20 ; Mt. xii. 28 ; 2 Co. v. 14 (15) (R (J, a protasis with el preceding); Gal. ii. 21 ; iii. 29; V. 11 ; Heb. xii. 8; joined to another word, 1 Co. XV. 14. 4. with -ye, rendering it more pointed, upaye [L Tr uniformly Spa ye; so R WH in Acts xvii. 27 ; cf. W. p. 45 ; Lips. Gram. Untersuch. p. 123], surely then, so then, (Lat. itar/ue eryo) : Mt. vii. 20; xvii. 26; Acts xi. 18 (L Τ Tr WH om. ye) ; and subjoined to a word, Acts xvii. 27 [W. 299 (281)]. 5. Spa ουν, a combination peculiar to Paul, at the beginning of a sen- tence (W. 445 (414) ; B. 371 (318), ["άρα ad internam potius caussam speetat, ουκ magis ad externam." Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 717; Sp.i is the more logical, ουν the more formal connective; " άρα is illative, oiv continua- tive," Win. 1. c. ; cf. also Kiihner § 545, 3]), [R. V.] so then, (Lat. hinc igitur) : Ro. v. 18 ; vii. 3, 25 ; viii. 12 ; ix. 16, 18 ; xiv. 12 (L Tr om. WH br. ουν) ; 1 9 [L mrg. 2ρα] ; Gal. vi. 10 ; Eph. ii. 19 ; 1 Th. v. 6 ; 2 Th. ii. 15.* άρα, an interrogative particle ["implying anxiety or impatience on the part of the questioner." L. and S. s. v.], (of the same root as the precedins; Spa. and only differing from it in that more vocal stress is laid upon the first syllable, which is therefore circumtlexed) ; 1. num igitur, i. e. marking an inferential question to which a negative answer is expected : Lk. xviii. 8 ; with yt rendering it more pointed, ipa ye [G Τ ipaye'] : Acts viii. 30 ; [Ipa ουν . . . 8ti>Kopev Lchm. ed. min. also maj. mrg. are we then pursuing etc. Ro. xiv. 19]. 2. ergone i. e. a question to which an affirmative answer is expected, in an interrogative apodosis, (Germ, so ist also u-ohl?), he is then ? Gal. ii. 17 (where others [e. g. Lchm.] write Spa, so that this example is referred to those mentioned under Spa, 3, and is rendered Christ is then a minister oj sin ; but μη yevoiro, which follows, is everywhere by Paul opposed to a question). Cf. W. 510 (475) sq. [also B. 247 (213), 371 (318); Herm. ad \\%. p. 820 sqq. ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 180 sqq.; speaking somewhat loosely, it may be said " Tipa expresses bewilderment as to a possible conclusion. . . apa hesitates, while Spa con- cludes." Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c.].* άρα, -ας, η, 1. a prayer ; a supplication ; much oftcn- er 2. an imprecation, curse, malediction, (cf. κατάρα) ; so in Ro. iii. 14 (cf. Ps. ix. 28 (x. 7)), and often in .Sept. (In both senses in native Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) ' 'Αραβ(α, -ας, ή, [fr. Hdt. down], Arabia, a well-known peninsula of Asia, lying towards Africa, and bounded by Egypt, Palestine, Syria, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, the Gulf of Arabia, the Persian Gulf, the Red Sea [and tlie Ocean]: Gal. i. 17; iv. 25.• [άραβών Tdf., see άρραβών.] [άραγί, see Spa, 4.] [apUYC, see &pa, 1.] Άράμ, Aram [or 7?nm]. indecl. prop, name of one of the male ancestors of Christ : Mt. i. 3 sq. ; Lk. iii. S3 [not Τ WH Tr mrg. ; see Άδμίΐ'ΐ' and 'Apvei].' άραφοϊ Τ Tr for αρραφος, q. v. *Αραψ 72 Άρέτας "Αραψ, -afios, 6, an Arabian: Acts ii. 11.' άργί'ω, -ω ; (to be apyos, •3, Actsvi. 5, (1 K. iii. 10; Gen. xxxiv. 18, etc.). b. to strive to please; to accommodate one's self to the opinions, desires, interests of others: τιι/ί, 1 Co. X. 33 (πάντα πασιν άρίσκω) ; 1 Th. ii. 4. αρισκαρ ίαυτω, to please one's self and therefore to have an eye to one's own interests : Ro. xv. 1, 3.* άρ«ο~ΓΟ$, -ή, -όν, (άρίσκω), pleasinej, ar/reeable : nvl, Jn. viii. 29; Acts xii. .!; ϊνώπιόρ rtvos, 1 Jn. iii. 22 (cf. άρίσκω, a.) : άριστον ίστι foil, by ace. with inf. it is fit. Acts vi. 2 [yet cf. Meyer ad loc.]. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.] Hdt. down.)•" ■ApiVos [WII '\p., see their Intr. § 408], -a (cf. W. § 8, I ; [B. 20 (18)]). ό, AretCLs, (a name common to many of the kings of Arabia Petraea or Nabathaean Arabia [cf. B. D. s. V. Nebaioth] ; cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 1 7 b. p. 233 sq.) ; an Arabian king who made war (a. d. 36) on his son-in-iaw Herod Antipas for having repu• αρΐτη 73 ΑρμαΎΐΒών dialed his daughter ; and with such success as complete- ly to destroy his army (Joseph, antt. 18, 5). In conse- quence of this, Vitellius, governor of Syria, being ordered by Tiberius to march an army against Aretas, i)re])ared for the war. But Tiberius meantime having died [March 16, A. D. 37], he recalled his troops from the march, dismissed them to their winter quarters, and departed to Rome. After his departure Aretas held sway over the region of Damascus (how acijuired we do not know), and placed an ethnarcli over the city : 2 Co. xi. 32. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Wieseler in Ilerzog i. p. 488 sq. ; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 238 sq. ; ScliUrcr in Riehm p. 83 sq. ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Aretas ; Meyer on Acts, Einl. § 4 (cf. ibid. ed. Wendl)].• αρ£τή, -ης, ή, [see Spa init.], a word of very wide signi- fication in Grk. writ. ; any excellence of a person (in body or mind) or of a thing, an eminent endnwmeri', proj>- ertif or quality. Used of the human ;nind and in an ethical sense, it denotes 1. a virluuus course of thought, feeling and action ; virtue, moral goodness, (Sap. iv. 1 ; V. 1 3 ; often in 4 Mace, and in Grk. %vrit.) : 2 Pet. i. 5 [al. take it here specifically, viz. moral vigor; cf. ne.\t head]. 2. ang particular moral excellence, as modesty, purity; hence (plur. a! aperai. Sap. viii. 7; often in 4 Mace, and in the Grk. pliilosophers) rlr άριτή, Phil. iv. 8. Used of God, it denotes a. his pou-cr : 2 Pet. i. 3. b. in the plur. his excellences, perfections, ' which shine forth in our gratuitous calling and in the whole work of our salvation ' (Jn. Gerhard) : 1 Pet. ii. 9. (In Sept. for lin splendor, glory, Hab. iii. 3, of God; Zech. vi. 13, of the Messiah ; in plur. for niSiin praises, of God, Is. xliii. 21 ; xlii. 12; Lxiii. 7.)* άρήν, ό, nom. not in use ; the other cases are by syncope αρνόί (for apfvoi), αρνί, άρνα ; plur. apvfi, αρνών, αρνάσι, άρνας, a sheep, a lamb: Lk. x. 3. (Gen. xxx. 32; Ex. xxiii. 19, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * άριθμ£<ι>, -ώ : 1 aor. ηρίθμηιτα ; pf. pass, ηρίθμημαι ; {αριθμόν) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to number: Mt. x. 30; Lk. xii. 7 ; Rev. vii. 9. [CoMP. : κατ-αριθμίω."] ' αριθμός, -oC, ό, [fr. Horn, down], η number; a. a fixed and definite number: τον αριθμόν nfVTaKia\t\iot, in nu7n- ber, Jn. vi. 10, (2 Mace. viii. 16 ; 3 Mace. v. 2, and often in Grk. writ.; W. 230 (21G); [B. 153 (1-34)]); « τοΟ αριθμόν των 8ώ^ΐκα, Lk. xxii. 3 ; αρ. ανθρώπου, a niunber whose letters indicate a certain man. Rev. .\iu. 18. b. an indefinite number, i. q. a multitude : Acts vi. 7 ; xi. 21 ; Rev. XX. 8. Άριμ-αθοΙο [WH 'Αρ., see their Intr. § 408], -as, ή, Arimalhcea, Ilebr. Π3Ί (a height), the name of several cities of Pal'jstine; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1275. The one mentioned in Mt. xxvii. 57 ; Mk. χ v. 43 ; Lk. xxiii. SI ; Jn. xix. 38 appears to have been the same as that which was the birthplace and residence of Samuel, in Mount Ephraim : 1 S. i. 1, 19, etc. Sept. Άρμαθαΐμ, and without the art. 'Ραμαθίμ, and ace. to another read- ing 'Ραμαθαΐμ, 1 Mace. xi. 34 ; 'Ραμαθά in Jose])h. antt. 13, 4, 9. Cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 34; Keim, Jesus Ton Naz. iii. 514; [B. D. Am. ed.].* "AptoTOpxos, -ou, ό, [lit. best-ruling], A rislarchus, a cer- tain Christian of Thessalonica, a ' fellow-captive ' witli Paul [cf. B. D. Am. ed. ; Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on Col. as below]: Acts xLx. 29; xx. 4; xxvii. 2; Col. iv. 10; Philem. 24.* άρΜΓτάω, -ώ : 1 aor. ηρίστησα ; (το άριστον, q. v.) ; a. to breakfast: Jn. xxi. 12, 15; (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 1 ; and often in Attic), b. by later usage to diie : παρά τινι, Lk. xi. 37 ; (Gen. xUii. 24 ; Ael. v. h. 9. 19).* apurr(po$, -ά. -6v, lift : Jit. vi. 3 ; Lk. xxiii. 33 ; [Jlk. X. 37 Τ Tr WH, on the plur. cf. W. § 27, 3] ; 5πλα api- στίρά i. e. carried in the left hand, defensive weapons, 2 Co. vi. 7. [From Horn, down.] * Άριστόβουλοϊ, -ov. ό, [lit. best-counselling], Aristobulus, a certain Christian [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. and Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 174 s(i.] : Ro. xvi. 10.* cipurrov, -ov. to, [fr. Ilom. down] ; a. the first food, taken early in the morning before work, breakfast; dinner was called Suttvov. But the later Greeks called breakfast το άκράτισμα, and dinner άριστον i. e. bt'twor μισημβρινόν, Athen. I, 9, 10 p. 1 1 b. ; and so in the X. T. Hence b. dinner: Uk. yAv. 12 (ttou'iv άριστον η beWvov, to whicli others are invited) ; Lk. .\i. 3-< ; Mt. xxii. 4 (ϊτοιμάζ^ιν). [Β. D. s. V. Meals ; Becker's Charicles, sc. vi. excurs. i. (Eng. trans, p. 312 .sq.).] * opKiTOs, -η. -όν. (άρκίω), sufficient : Mt. vi. 34 (where the meaning is, ' Let the present day's trouble suffice for a man, and let Mm not rashly increase it by anticipating the cares of days to come ' ; [on the neut. cf. W. § 58, 5 ; B. 127 (111)]) ; άρκ(τόν τω μαθητί} [A.V. it is enough for the dUciple i.e.] let him be content etc., foil, by Iva, Mt. x. 25 ; foil, by an inf., 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Chrysipp. ap. Athen. 3, 79 p. 113 b.)• άρκΕω. ώ : 1 aor. ήρκ(σα ; [Pass., pres. άρκοϋμαι] ; 1 fut. άρκίσθήσομαι ; to be possessed of unfailing strength ; to be strong, to suffce, to be enough (as against any danger; hence to defend, ward off', in Horn. ; [al. make this the radical meaning, cf. Lat arceo ; Curtius § 7]) : with dat. of pers., Mt. xxv. 9 ; Jn. vi. 7 ; άρκύ σοι ή χάρις μου my grace is sufficient for thee, sc. to enable thee to bear the evil manfully ; there is, therefore, no reason why thou shouldst ask for its removal, 2 Co. xii. 9 ; impersonally, άρκή ήμ'ιν 'tis enough for us, we are content, Jn. xiv. 8. Pass, (as in Grk. writ.) to be satisfied, contented : τινΙ, with a thing, Lk. iii. 14 ; Heb. xiii. 5 ; 1 Tim. vi. 8 : (2 Mace. v. 15); iniTivi, 3 Jn. 10. [CoMP. : ('π-αρ«'ω.]• CLpKTos, -ου, ό, ή, or [so G L Τ Tr WH] όρκος, -ου, ό, ή, a bear : Rev. xiii. 2. [From Horn, down.] * όίρμα, -ατο9, τό, (fr. ΑΡί2 to join, fit ; a team), a chariot : Acts viii. 28 sq. 38 ; of war-ohariots (i. e. armed with scrthes) we read άρματα Ίτπτων πολλών chariots drawn by many horses, Rev. ix. 9, (Joel ii. 5. In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down).* Άρμαγ€8ών [Grsb. Άρμ., WH*Ap Μαγ(8ών, see their Intr. § 408 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] or (so Rtc.) Άρμαγίδδώκ, llar-Magedon or Armageddon, indecl. prop, name of an imaginary place : Rev. xvi. 16. Many, following Beza and Glassius, suppose that the name is compounded of αρμόζω 74 άρττάζω ΊΠ mountain, and fljp or 'ΛΊ}'^., Sept. Μαγ(3ω, Μαγίίδώ. Wegiddo was a city of the Manassites, situated in the great plain of the tribe of Issacliar, and famous for a double slaughter, first of the Canaanites (.ludg. v. 19), and again of the Israelites (2 K. xxiii. 29 sq. ; 2 Chr. XXXV. 22, cf. Zech. xii. 11); so that in the Apocalypse it woulii signify the place where the kings opposing Christ were to be destroyed with a slaughter like that which the Canaanites or the Israelites had experienced of old. But since those two overthrows are said to have taken place en'i ΰδατι May. (Judg. 1. c.) and c'v τω TifHtio May. (2 Chr. 1. c.), it is not easy to perceive what can be the meaning of the mountain of Megiddo, wliieh could be none other than Carmel. Hence, for one, I think the conjecture of L. Capellus [i. e. Louis Cappel (akin to that of Drusius, see the Coram.)] to be far more easy and probable, viz. that Άρμαγι^ών is for 'Aρμaμfy(ίώv, compounded of Κ^ΠΠ destruction, and inj-D . [Wieseler (Zur Gesch. d. N. T. Schrift, p. 188), Hitzig (in ffi///r>,f. Einl. p. 440 n.), al., revive the deriva- tion (cf. llUler, Simonis, al.) fr. "3 "^"^city of Megiddo.]* ά(>μό{», Attic άρμόττω : 1 aor. mid. ήρμοσάμην \ {άρμόί, ([. v.); 1. to join, to fit together; so in Horn, of car- penters, fastening together beams and j)lanks to build houses, ships, etc. 2. of marriage : άρμόζην τινι την BvyoTipa (Ildt. 9, 108) to hetroth a daughter to any one; j)ass. άρμόζίται γννη avSpi, Sept» Prov. xix. 14 ; mid. άρμύσασθαι την θυγατ(ρα nvos (Ildt. 5, 32 ; 47; 6, 6ϋ) to Join to one'.-! self, i. e. to marry, the daughter of any one ; άρμόσασθαΐ τινί τίνα to betroth, to give one in vtar- riage to any one : 2 Co. xi. 2, and often in Philo, cf. Loesner ad loo.; the mid. cannot be said to be used actively, but refers to liim to whom the care of betroth- ing has been committed ; [cf. B. 193 (167) ; per contra Mey. ad loc; AV. 258 (242)].• όρμ05, -oC, 0, (APQ to join, tit), a joining, a joint : Heb. iv. 12. (Soph., Xen., al. ; Sir. xxvii. 2.)* αρνας, see αρην. 'Apvit, o, indocl. prop, name of one of the ancestors of Jesus : Lk. iii. 33 Τ WII Tr mrg.* αρν€Όμαι, -οΰμαι ; fut. άρνησομαι ; impf. ηρνονμην ; 1 aor. ηρνησάμην (rare in Attic, where generally ηρνήβην, cf. Mattli. i. p. .538 pietter Veitch s. v.]); pf. ήμνημαι: a depon. verb [(fr. Horn, down)] signifying 1. to deny, i. e. eindv . . . ουκ [to .lay . . . not, contradict'] : Mk. xiv. 70 ; Mt. xxvi. 70 ; .In. i. 20 ; xviii. 25, 27 ; Lk. viii. 45 ; Acts iv. 16; foil, by ότι ού instead of simple ότι, in order to make the negation more strong and explicit : ΛΙΐ. xxvi. 72 : 1 .In. ii. 22 ; (on the same use in Grk. writ. cf. Kuhner ii. p. 761 ; [Jelf ii. 450; W. § 65, 2 β.; Β. 355 (305)]). 2. to deny, with an ace. of the pers., in various senses : a. άρν. Ίηο-οϋν is used of followers of Jesus who, for fear of death or persecution, deny that Jesus is their master, and desert his cause, [to di.-town] : Mt. X. 33 : Lk. xii. 9 ; [Jn. xiii. 38 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ; 2 Tim. ii. 12. (άρν. το όνομα αντοϋ. Rev. iii. 8, means the same) ; and on the other liand, of Jesus, denying that one is his follower: Mt. x. 33 ; 2 Tim. ii. 12. b. upv. God and Christ, is used of those who by cher• i.shing and disseminating pernicious opinions and immo- rality are adjudged to have apostatized from God and Christ : 1 Jn. ii. 22 (cf. iv. 2 ; 2 Jn. 7-11); Jude 4 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1. c. άρν. iavTov to deny himself, is used in two senses, a. to disregard his own interests : Lk. ix. 23 [R WII mrg. άπαρν.] ; cf . άπαρνίομαι. β. to prove false to himself, act entirely unlike hiuiteLf : 2 Tim. ii. 13. 3. to deny i. e. alinegate, abjure ; τι. to renounce a thing, forsake it : τη» άσίβflav κ. τάί ΐπιθυμία!. Tit. ii. 12; liy act to show es- trangement from a tiling : τήν πίστιν. 1 Tim. v. 8 ; Rev. ii. 13 ; την Βίναμιν τη! ιίσίβίίαΐ, 2 Tim. iii. 5. 4. not to accept, to reject, refuse, something offered : τινά. Acts iii. 14 ; vii. 35 ; with an inf. indicating the thing, Ileb. xi. 24. [CoMP. : άπ-ηρνίομαι.'] όρν(ον, -ου, TO, (dimin. fr. άρήν, q. v.), [fr. Lys. down], a liitle land), a himb: Rev. xiii. 11; Jesus calls his fol- lowers τα άρνία μου in Jn. .\xi. 15 ; το άρνίον is used of Christ, innocently suffering and dying to expiate the sins of men. very often in Rev., as v. 6, 8, 12, etc. (Jer. xi. 1 9 ; xxvii. (1.) 45 ; Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6 ; Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 10.) • όροτριάω, -ω ; (ήρατρον, q. v.) ; lo plough : Lk. xvii. 7 ; 1 Co. Lx. 10. (Dent, .x.xii. 10; [1 K. xix. 19] ; Mic. iii. 12. In Grk. writ. fr. Theophr. down for the more ancient άρόω ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 254 sii- [W. 24].) * άροτρον, -ου, τό, (άρόω to j)lough), a plough : Lk. ix. 62. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * αρπαγή, -ής, ή. (αρπάζω), rapine, pillage; 1. the act of plundering, rotihery : Ileb. x. 34. 2. plunder, .ψοΙΙ : Mt. xxiii. 25 ; Lk. xi. 39. (Is. iii. 14 ; Nah. ii. 12. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * <ίρπα7|ΐ05, -οΰ, ό, (αρπάζω) ; 1. the act of seizing, rob- bery, (so Plut. de hb. educ. c. 15 (al. 14, 37), vol. ii. 12 a. the only instance of its use noted in prof. auth.). 2. a thing seized or to be seized, booty : άρπαγμον ήγύσθαί τι to deem anything a prize, — a thing to be seized upon or to be held fast, retained. Pliil. ii. 6 ; on the meaning of this i^ass. see μορφή : (ήγ(ίσβαι or ποκΊσθαί τι άρπαγμα, Euseb. h. e. 8, 12, 2 ; vit. Const. 2, 31 ; [Comni. in Luc vi., cf. Mai, No.•. Bibl. Patr. iv. p. 165] ; Ileliod. 7, 11 and 20 ; 8, 7 ; [Plut. de Alex. virt. 1, 8 p. 330 d.] ; ut om- nium bona praedam tuam duceres, Cic. Ύ^ττ. ii. 5, 15, 39 ; [see Bp. Lghtft. on I'liil. p. 133 sq. (cf. p. U 1; ; \\ etsteiu ad loc. ; Cremer 4te Aufl. p. 153 sq.]).' a.frmiX,iD ; fut. άρπάσω [A^eitch s. v. ; cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 407] ; 1 aor. ηρπασα; Pass., 1 Άοτ.ήρππσθην; 2 aor. ήρηάγην (2 Co. xii. 2, 4 ; Sap. iv. 11 ; cf. W. 83 (80) ; [B. 54 (47) ; WH. Apj). p. 170]) ; 2 fut. άρπαγή- σομαι; [(Lat. rapio; Curtius § 331); fr. Ilom. down]; to seize, carry off by force: τί, [Mt. xii. 29 not RG, (see Βιαρπάζω)']; Jn. x. 12; to seize on, claim for one's self eagerly: την βασϊΚίΙαν τοϋ θ(ον, Mt. xi. 12, (Xen. an. 6, 5, 18, etc.); to snatch out or airay: τί, Mt. xiii. 19; τι eV Xdpos τινης, Jn. x. 28 sq. ; τίνα tV jrupor, proverbial, to rescue from the danger of destruction, Jude 23, (Am. iv. 11 ; Zech. iii. 2) ; rifo, to seize and carry off speedily, Jn. vi. 15; Acts xxiii. 10; used of divine power tran»• αριταξ lb αρτοί femn" a person marTellousl)' and swiftly from one place to another, to snatch or catch away : Acts viii. 39 ; pass. irpos T. θΐάν. Rev. xii. 5 ; foil, by eat with gen. of place, 2 Co. xii. 2 ; eis τ. ttapahnaov, 2 Co. xii. 4 ; ets atpa, 1 Th. iv. 1 7. [CoMP. : St-, σκιζ-αρπάίω.]' οριι•α|, -αγοί, ό, adj., rapacium, raceiwus: Mt. vii. 15; Lk. xviii. 11 ; as subst. a robber, an extortioner: 1 Co. v. ;0 stj. ; vi. 10. (In both uses fr. [Arstph.],Xen. down.)* άρραβών [Tdf. άραβών : 2 Co. i. 22 (so Lchm.) ; v. 5, (but not in Eph. i. 14), see his Proleg. p. SO ; II•'//. App. p. 148 ; cf. W. 48 (47 sq.) ; B. 32 (28 sq.) ; cf. P, p],-£ivas, 6, (Hebr. jU-)i^ Gen. xxxviii. 17 sq. 20; fr. 3-i>; to pledge ; a word which seems to have passed from tlie Phid. 51, 1 ; της αποστασίας, of the devil, Iren. 4, 40, 1 ; τοιαύτης φιλοσοφίας, of Thales, Aristot. met. 1, 3, 7 [p. 98.3" 20]. Hence 3. the author : τής ζωής. Acts iii. 15 ; τής σωτη- ρίας, Heb. ii. 10. (Often so in prof. auth. : των ττάντων, of God, [Plato] Tim. Locr. p. 96 c. ; τοΰ γίνους των αν θρώπων, of God, Diod. 5, 72 : αρχηγός κα'ι αίτιος, leader and author, are often joined, as Polyb. 1, 66, 10; Hdian. 2, 6, 22 [14 ed. Bekk.]). Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii.l,p.301 sq.* άρχι, (fr. άρχω, άρχος), an inseparable prefix, usually to names of office or dignity, to designate the one who is placed over the rest that hold the office (Germ. Oher-, Erz-, [Eng. arch- {chief-, high-)']'), as αρχάγγελος, άρχι• ποίμην [q. v.], άρχκρής, αρχίατρος, άρχκυνοίχος, άρχυπ(- ρΐτης (in Egypt, inscriptions), etc., most of which belong to Alexand. and Byzant. Grk. Cf. Thiersch, De Pen- tateuch! versione Alex. p. 77 s(|. άρχ-κραηκός, -ή, -όν, (άρχι and ίίρατικός, and this fr. ΐίράομαι [to be a priest]), high-priestly, pontijical : γίνος. Acts iv. 6, [so Corp. Inscrr. Graec. no. 4363 ; see Schurer as cited s. v. άρχκρίίς, 2 fin.]. (Joseph, antt. 4, 4, 7 ; 6, 6, 3; 1.5, 3, 1.) • ofx-upiii, -ίως, 6, chief priest, high-priest. 1. He who abo\ e aH others was honored with the title of priest, the chief of the priests, 'ίΠΰΠ [713 (Lev. xxi. 10; Num. x.x.w. 25, [later ϊ^ΝΊΠ [Π3, 2 Κ. xxv. 18 ; 2 Chr. xL\. 11, etc.]) : Mt. -xxvi. 3, and often in the Gospels, the Acts, and the Ep. to the Heb. It was lawful for him to perform the common duties of the priesthood ; but his chief duty was, once a year on the day of atonement, to enter the Holy of holies (from which the other priests were ex- cluded) and offer sacrifice for his own sins and the sins of the people (Lev. xvi. ; Heb. ix. 7, 25), and to preside over the Sanlicdrin, or supreme Council, when convened for judicial deliberations (Mt. .xxvi. 3 ; Acts xxii. ; xxiii. 2). According to the Mosaic law no one could aspire to the high-priesthood unless he were of the tribe of Aaron, and descended moreover from a high-priestly family ; and he on whom the office was conferred held it till death. But from the time of Antiochus Epiphanes, when tlie kings of the Seleucids and afterwards the Ilerodian princes and the Romans arrogated to them- selves the power of appointing the high-priests, the office neither remained vested in the pontifical family nor was conferred on any one for Ufe ; but it became venal, and could be transferred from one to another according to the will of civil or military rulers. Hence it came to pass, that during the one hundred and seven years inter- vening between Herod the Great and the destruction of the holy city, twenty-eight persons held the pontifical dignity (Joseph, antt. 20, 10; see Άννας). Cf. Win. II W B. s. V. lloherpriester; Oehhr in Herzog vi. p. 198 sqq.; [BB.DD. s. vv. Highpriest, Priest, etc. The names of the 28 (27?) above alluded to are given, to- gether with a brief notice of each, in an art. by Schurer in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, pp. 597-607]. 2. The plur. άρχΐ(ρ(Ίς, which occurs often in the Gospels and Acts, as Mt. ii. 4 ; xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 3 ; xxvii. 41 ; Mk. viii. 31 ; xiv. 1 ; XV. 1 ; Lk. .\ix. 47 ; xxii. 52, 66 ; xxiii. 4 ; xxiv. 20 ; Jn. vii. 32 ; xi. 57 ; xviii. 35 ; Acts iv. 23 ; v. 24 ; ix. 14, 21 ; xxii. 30; xxiii. 14, etc., and in Josephus, comprises, in addition to the one actually holding the high-priestly office, both those who had previously discharged it and although deposed continued to have great power in the State (Joseph, vita 38 ; b. j. 2, 12, 6 : 4, 3, 7 : 9 : 4, 4, 3; see'Avwas above), as well as the members of the families from which high-priests were created, pro\ ided they had much influence in public affairs (Joseph, b. j. 6, 2, 2). See on this point the learned discussion by Srhiirer, Die άρχι^ρΛς im N. T., in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1872, p. 593 sqq. and in his Neutest. Zeitjesch. § 23 iii. p. 407 sqq. [Prof. Schurer, besides reviewing the opinions of the more recent writers, contends that in ao instance where indubitable reference ίο um heads of the twenty- four classet ii luad-i (neither in the Sept. 1 Chr. xxiv αρχίΤΓΟίμην 78 "■ΡΧ^ 3 sq. ; 2 Ckr. xxxvi. 14 ; Ezra χ. 5 ; Neh. xii. 7 ; nor in Joseph, antt. 7, 14, 7) are they called αρχκρίίί ; that the nearest approximations to this term are perii)lirases such as άρχοιττα των Icpewv, Neh. xii. 7, or φυΚαρχοι των ίίρίων, Esra apocr. (1 Esilr.) viii. 92 (!)4) ; Joseph, antt. 11, 5, 4 ; and that the word apxupds was restricted in its application to those who actually held, or had held, the hio-h-priestly office, together with the members of the few prominent families from which the high-priests still continued to be selected, cf. Acts iv. 6 ; Joseph, b. ]. 4, 3, C] 3. In the Ep. to the Ileb. Christ is called ' hish-priest,' because by undergoing a bloody death he offered himself as an expiatory sacrifice to God, and has entered the heavenly sanctuary where he continually intercedes on our behalf: ii. 17 ; iii. 1 ; iv. 14 ; v. 10; vi. 20 ; vii. 2G ; viii. 1 ; ix. 1 1 ; cf. Winzer, De sacerdotis officio, quod Christo tribuitur in Ep. ad Hebr. (three Programs), Leips. 182.5 sq. ; Riehm, LehrbegrifE des Ile- briierbriefes, ii. pp. 431-4S8. In Grk. writ, the word is used by Ildt. 2, [(37), 142,] 143 and 151 ; Plat. legg. 12 p. 947 a.; Polyb. 23, 1, 2; 32, 22, 5 ; Plut. Xuma c. 9, al. ; [often in Inscrr.] ; once (viz. Lev. iv. 3) in the Sept., where Uptis /i/yaf is usual, in the O. T. Apocr. 1 Esdr. v. 40 ; ix. 40, and often in the bks. of Mace. άρχι-ίΓοίμην, -ffor [so L Τ Tr WII KC (after Mss.), but Grsb. al. -μήν, -pivoi; cf. Lob. Paralip. ρ 19.5 sq. ; Steph. Thesaur. s. v. ; Chandler § 5iS0], ό, a bibl. word [Test. .\ii. Patr. test. Jud. § 8J, chief shepherd : of Clirist the head of the church, 1 Pet. v. 4 ; see ποψήν, b.* 'Apxiinros [Chandler § 308], -ου, ό, [i. c. master of the horse], Archippus, a certain Christian at Colossae : Col. iv. 17; Philem. 2. [Cf. B. D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. and Philem. p. 308 sq.] * οφχισ-υνάγωγοϊ, -ου, ό, (σνναγωγή), ruler of a syna/jogue, η?:;π Ci'Sl : Mk. V. 22, 35 sq. 38 ; Lk. viii. 49 ; xiii. 14 ; Acts xiii. 15 ; χ viii. 8, 1 7. It was his duty to select the readers or teachers in the synagogue, to examine the discourses of the public speakers, and to see that all things were done with decency and in accordance with ancestral usage ; [cf. Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Synagogue]. (Not found in prof. writ. ; [yetSchiirer (Theol. Literatur- Zeit., 1878, p. 5) refers to Corp. Inscrr. Graec. no 2007 f. (Addenda ii. p. 994), no. 2221• (ii. p. 1031), nos. 9894, 990G; il/omm.sen, Inscrr. Regni Neap. no. 3657; Garrucci, Cimitero degli antichi Ebrei, p. 67; Lampridius, Vita Alexandr. Sever, c. 28 ; Vopiscus, Vit. Saturnin. c. 8 ; Codex Theodos. xvi. 8, 4, 13, 14; also Acta Pilat. in Tdf.'s Ev. Apocr. ed. 2, pp. 221, 270, 275. 284; Justin, dial. c. Tryph. c. 137 ; Epiph. haer. 30, 18 ; Euseb. h. e. 7, 10, 4 ; see fully in his Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt (Leips. 1879), p. 25 sq.].) * άρχι.τ€'κτων, -ovos, 6, (τίκτων, q. v.), a master-builder, architect, the superintendent in the erection of buildings : 1 Co. iii. 10. (Hdt., Xen., Plat, and subseq. writ.; Is. iii. 3; Sir. xxxviii. 27; 2 Mace. ii. 29.)• )φχι-τ(λώνηΐ, -ου, ό, α chief of the tax-collectors, chief publican : Lk. xix. 2. [See reXcii^s.] * άρχι-^ρίκλινοΐ, -ου, ό, (τρικλιμον [or -vof (sc. οίκοί), a room with three couches]), //iCsu/ierinienrfenio/"a dining-room, a τρίϋΧινίάρχηί, table-master : Jn. ii. 8 sq. [cf. B.D. s. v. Governor]. It differs from " the master of a feast," σνμποσιιΊρχψ. toast-master, who was one of the guests se- lected by lot to prescribe to the rest the mode of drink- ing ; cf. .Sir. .xxxv. (.xxxii.) 1. But it was the duty of the άρχιτρίκλινο! to place in order the tables and couches, arrange the courses, taste the food and wine beforehand, etc. (Ilehod. 7, 27.) [Some regard the distinction be- tween the two words as obliterated in later Grk. ; cf. Soph. Lex. s. v., and Schaff's Lange's Com. on Jn. 1. c] * άρχομαι, see άρχω. £ρχω ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; lo be first, 1. to be the first to do (anything), to begin, — a sense not found in the Grk. Bible. 2. to be chief, leader, ruler : rti/os [B. 169 (147)], Mk. X. 42 ; Ro. .xv. 12 (fr. Is. xi. 10). See άρχων. Mid., ])res. άρχομαι : fut. άρξομαι (once [/iiiice], Lk. xiii. 2(i [but not Tr mrg. WII mrg. ; xxiii. 30]) ; 1 aor. ηρξά- μην, to begin, make a beginning: από Tivot, Acts x. 3 7 [B. 79 (69) ; cf. Matth. § 558] ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; by bra- chylogy ap^apevos από Tivot ίως Tivos for, having begun from some person or thing (and continued or continu- ing) to some person or thing : Mt. xx. 8 ; Jn. viii. 9 [i. e. Rec] ; Acts i. 22 ; cf. W. § 66, 1 c. ; [B. 374 (320)] ; άρξά- μ(νον is used impers. and absol. a beginning being made, Lk. xxiv. 27 (so in Hdt. 3, 91 ; cf. W. 624 (5H0) ; [B. 374 sq. (321)]) ; carelessly, άρζάμξνος άπο Μωυσίως και άπο πάντων προφητών &ιηρμήν(υ(ν for, beginning from Clo- ses he went through all the prophets, Lk. xxiv. 27 ; W. § 67, 2 ; [B. 374 (320 sq.)]. S>v ήρξατο ττοκί!- τί κα'ι Μά- fficfi»», άχρι ηί ήμίρας which he began and continued both to do and to teach, until etc., Acts i. 1 [W. § 66, 1 c. ; B. u. s.]. Άρχομαι is connected with an inf. and that so of- ten, esp. in the historical books, that formerly most inter- preters thought it constituted a periphra.^is for the finite form of the verb standing in the inf., as ηρξατο κηρΰσσιιν for ίκήρυξί. But through the influence principally of Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 539 sq.), cf. "\V. § 65, 7 d., it is now conceded that the theory of a periphrasis of this kind was a rash assumption, and that there is scarcely an example which cannot be reduced to one of the following classes : a. the idea of beginning has more or less weight or im- portance, so that it is brought out by a separate word : Mt. xi. 7 (the disciples of John having retired, Christ began to speak concerning John, wliich he did not do while they were present) ; Lk. iii. 8 (do not even begin to say; make not even an attempt to excuse yourselves) ; Lk. XV. 14 (the beginning ot want followed hard upon the squandering of his goods) ; Lk. xxi. 28 ; 2 Co. iii. 1 ; esp. when the beginning of an action is contrasted with its continuance or its repetition, Mk. vi. 7 ; viii. 31 (cf. ix. 31 ; X. 33 sq.) ; or with the end of it, Lk. xiv. 30 (opp. to tKTeXiaai) ; Jn. xiii. 5 (cf. 12). b. άρχ. denotes some- thing as begun by some one, others following : Acts xxvii. 35 sq. [λν. § 65, 7 d.]. C. άρχ. indicates that a thing was but just begun when it was interrupted by something else : Jit. xii. 1 (they had begun to pluck ears of com, ίρ^ων 79 aaeXyeia but they were prevented from continuing by the inter- ference of the Pharisees) ; Mt. xxvi. 22 (Jesus answered before all had finished), 74; Mk. ii. 23; iv. 1 (lie had scarcely begun to teach, when a multitude gathered unto him) ; Mk. vi. 2 ; x. 41 ; Lk. v. 21 ; xii. 45 sq. ; xiii. 25 ; Acts xi. 15 (cf. X. 44) ; xviii. 26, and often, d. the ac- tion itself, instead of its beginning, might indeed have been mentioned ; but in order that the more attention may be given to occurrences which seem to the writer to be of special importance, their initial stage, their be- ginning, is expressly pointed out : Mk. xiv. H5 ; Lk. xiv. 18 ; Acts ii. 4, etc. e. άρχ. occurs in a sentence which has grown out of the blending of two statements : Mt. iv. 17; xvi. 21 (fr. άπο rare €κηρνζζ . . . eSet^f, and totc ήμξατο κηρΰσσ€ΐν . ■ ■ betKvvtiv). The inf. is wanting when discoverable from the context : αρχόμενοι, sc. to di.^charge the Messianic office, Lk. iii. 23 [W. 349 (328)]; άρξάμ^νοΐ sc. Xeyetv, Acts xi. 4. [CoMP. : iv- (-/iui), προ-(ΐι-(-μαι), νπ-, ττρο-ϋπ -άρχω.] άρχων, -OVTOS, ό, (pres. ptcp. of the verb άρχω), [fr. Aeschyl. down], a ruh-r, rnmmander, chief, leader : used of Jesus, άρχων των βασιλίων της yrjs, Rev. i. 5 ; of the rulers of nations, Mt. xx. 25 ; Acts iv. 26 ; vii. 35 ; univ. of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 3 ; Acts xxiii. 5 ; espe- eially judges, Lk. xii. 58; Acts vii. 27, 35 (ivhere note the antithesis : whom they refused as άρχοντα και δικα- στήν, him God sent as άρχοντα — leader, ruler — και λυτρω- την) ; Acts xvi. 19. οί άρχοντας τον αιώνος τούτον, those who in the present age (see αιών, 3) by nobility of birth, learning and wisdom, power and authority, wield the greatest influence, whether among Jews or (ientiles, 1 Co. ii. 6, 8 ; cf. Neander ad loc. p. 62 S((q. Of the members of the Jewish Sanhedrin : Lk. xxiii. 13, 35; x.xiv. 20; Jn. iii. 1 ; vii. 26, 48 ; xii. 42 ; Acts iii. 17; iv. 5, 8 ; xiii. 27; xiv. 5. of the officers presiding over synagogues : Mt. ix. 18, 23 ; Lk. viii. 41 (άρχων της συναγωγής, cf. Jlk. V. 22 αρχισυνάγωγος), and perhaps also Lk. xviii. 18 ; άρχων των ΦαρισαΙων, one who has great influence among tlie Pliari.«ees, Lk. xiv. 1. of the devil, the prince of evil spirits: (ό) άρχων των δαιμονίων, Mt. ix. 34 ; xii. 24; Mk. iii. 22 : Lk. xi. 15 ; ό άρχ. τον κόσμου, the ruler of the irreligiouB mass of mankind, Jn. xii. 31 ; xiv. 30 ; xvi. 1 1, (in rabbin, writ. D^1>*n "^t^ ; άρχ, τοΰ αιώνος τοντον, ί mat. ad Eph. 19, 1 [ad JIagn. 1,3]; άρχων τοϊι καφοϊι τής ινομίας. Barn. ep. 18, 2) ; της ΐξουσίας τοϋ άίρος, Eph. ii. 2 (see αήρ). [See Horl in Diet, of Chris. Biog., s.v. Archon.]* αρωμ,α, -το?, τό, (fr. ΑΡΩ to prepare, whence αρτνω to season ; [al. connect it with r. ar (άρόω) to plough (cf. (ien. xxvii. 27) ; al. al.]), spice, perfume : Mk. xvi. 1 ; Lk. xxiii. 56 ; xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xix. 40. (2 K. xx. 13 ; Esth. ii. 12 ; Cant. iv. 10, 16. [Hippocr.], Xen., Theophr. and subse([. writ.) * Ασ-ά, ό, (Chald. NOK to cure), A.in, king of Judah, son of king Abijah (1 K.' xv. 8 sqq.) : Mt. i. 7 sq. [L Τ Tr "WH read Άσάφ q. v.] • βταίνω : in 1 Th. iii. 3, Kuenen and Cobet (in their N. T. ad fidem cod. Λ"at., Lugd. 1860 [pref. p. xc.]), fol- iDwing Lchm. [who followed Valckenaer in following J. J. Reiske (Animad. ad Polyb. p. 68) ; see Valck: Opuscc. ii. 246-249] in his larger edit., conjectured and received into their text μηδϊν άσαίνισθαι, which they think to be equiv. to άχθισθαι. χαλ(πώς φίραν. But there is no ne- cessity for changing tlie Rec. (see σαίνω, 2 b. β.), nor can it be shown that άσα'ινω is used by Grk. writ, for άσάω* ά-σάλίυτοβ, -ov, (σαλίύω), umliaken, unmoved: prop. Acts xx\ii. 41 ; metajili. βασιΚΰα, not liable to disorder and overthrow, firm, stable, Ileb. xii. 28. (Eur. Bacch. 391 ; eKcvOepia, Diod. 2, 48 ; (ϋδαιμονία, ibid. 3,47; ήσνχία, Plat. Ax. 370 d.; Plut., al.)* Άσάφ, ό, (^DK collector), a man's name, a clerical error for R G Άσά (ip v.), adopted by L Τ Tr WH in Mt. i. 7 sq.* oro-picTTos, -ov, {σβ(νννμι), unrjuenched (Ovid, inexstinc- tus), unquenchable (Vulg. inexstinguibilis) : ττϋρ, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17; Mk. ix. 43, andRGLbr. in45. (Often in Hom. ; πΰρ άσβ. of the perpetual fire of Vesta, Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 76 ; [of the fire on the altar, Philo de ebriet. § 34 (Mang. i. 378) ; de vict. off. § 5 (Mang. iL 254); of the fire of the magi, Strabo 15, (3)15; see also Plut. symp. 1. vii. probl. 4; Aelian. nat. an. 5, 3; cf. Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 6, 41, 15].)• άσ-( β<ια, -ας, ή, (άσιβής, q. v.), want of reverence towards God, impiety, ungodliness : Ro. i. 18 ; 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit. ii. 12; plur. ungodly thoughts and deeds, Ro. xi. 26 (f r. Is. lix. 20) ; τα epya ασ(β(ίας [Treg. br. άσfβ.'\ works oj wujndliness, a Hebraism, Jude 15, cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B. § 132, 10]; ai (πιθυμίαι τών άσ(β(ΐών their desires to do ungodly deeds, Jude 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur.], Plat, and Xen. down ; in the Sept. it corresponds chiefly to ;>Π3.)• άο-£β<ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ήσίβησα ; {άσίβής, q. v.) ; from [Aeschyl.], Xen. and Plato down ; to he ungodhj, act im- pioushj : 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; άσ(β(Ίν ?ργα άσ^βύαί [Treg. br. άσφιίαςί, J"de 15, cf. W. 222 (209) ; [B. 149 (130)]. (Equiv. to yU2, Zeph. iii. 11 ; ^'d"}, Dan. ix. 5.) * άσ-(βή$, -€5, (σίβω to reverence) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Thuc. down, Sept. for ^•α"ΐ ; destitute of reverential awe towards God, contemning Gnd, impious: Ro. iv. 5 ; v. 6; 1 Tim. i. 9 (joined here with άμαρτω\άς, as in 1 Pet. iv. 18) ; 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; iii. 7 ; Jude 4, 15.* oiTtKytia,, -ας, ή, the conduct and character of one who is άοίλγής (a word which some suppose to be com- pounded of a priv. and Σίλγη, the name of a city in Pi- sidia whose citizens excelled in strictness of morals [so Etym. Magn. 152, 38; per contra cf. Suidas 603 d.] ; others of α intens. and aaXayfiv to disturb, raise a din ; others, and now the majority, of a priv. and σ/λγω i. q. θ(\γω. not affecting pleasantly, exciting disgust), un- bridled lust, excess, licentiousness, lasciviousness, wanton- ness, oulrageousness, sliamelessness, insolence : ^Ik. vii. 22 (where it is uncertain what particular vice is spoken of) ; of gluttony and venery, Jude 4 ; plur., 1 Pet. iv. 3 ; 2 Pet. ii. 2 (for Rec. άπωλύαις), 18; of carnality, lasciviouxness : 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 19; Eph.iv. 19; 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; plur. " wanton (acts or) manners, as filthy words, indecent bodily movements, unchaste handling of άσημο•; 80 Ά σιαρχτι<; males and females, etc." (Fritzsche), Ro. xiii. 13. (In bibl. (irk. besides only in Sap. .\iv. 26 and 3 Mace. ii. 26. Among Grk. writ, used by Plat., Isocr. et sqq. ; at length by Plut. [LucuU. 38] and Lcian. [dial, uieretr. 6] of the wantonness of women [/,οδ. ad Phryn. p. 184 n.].) Cf. Tittmann i. p. l.il sq. ; [esp. Trench § xvi.].' άσημοβ, -ov, (σημχι a mark), unmarked or unstamped (money) ; uiiknoivn, of no niark, insignificant, ignoble : Acts .\.\i. 39. (3 Mace. i. 3 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; trop. fr. Eur. down.) * Άσ-ήρ. ό, an indecl. Ilebr. prop, name, (ΐϋΚ [i. e. hap- py. Gen. .\.\x. 13]), (in Joseph. 'Affij/jot. -ov, ό), As/ici; the eighth son of the |)atriarch Jacob : Lk. ii. 36 ; Rev. vii. ().• ciir6cvcia, -at, ή, (άσθινίΐί), [fr. Hdt. down], want of strength, weakness, injirmiltj; a. of Body; «i. its native weakness and frailty : 1 Co. xv. 43 ; 2 Co. xiii. 4. β. feeble- ness of health ; sickness : Jn. v. 5 ; xi. 4 ; Lk. xiii. 11,12; Gal. iv. 13 {άσβίναα τήί σαρκόί) ; Heb. xi. 34 ; in plur. : Mt. viii. 17; Lk. v. 15; viii. 2 ; Acts xxviii. 9 ; 1 Tim. v. 23. b. of Soul ; want of the strength and capacity re- quisite o. to understand a thing : Ilo. vi. 19 (where άσ^. σαρκόί denotes tlie weakness of human nature), β. to do things great and glorious, as want of human wisdom, of skill in speaking, in the management of men : 1 Co. ii. 3. γ. to restrain corrupt desires ; procUvity to sin : lleb. V. 2 ; vii. 28 ; plur. the various kinds of this proclivity, Heb. iv. 15. S. to bear trials and troubles : Ro. viii. 26 (where read rj άσίίΐ/ίΐ'α for Rec. rais aa6eveiais) ; 2 Co. xi. 30 ; xii. 9 ; plur. the mental [?J stales in which this weakness manifests itself : 2 Co. xii. 5, 9 sij.* urOcvcii), -ώ ; inipf. ησθίνουν; pf. ησθίνηκα (2 Co. .xi. 21 L Τ TrWII ) ; 1 aor. ηαθίυησα : (aa^evj/s) ; [fr. Eur. down] ; to be weak, fi I hie ; univ. to be without strength, power- less : Ro. viii. 3 ; rhetorically, of one who purposely ab- stains from the use of his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 4 ; and of one who has no occasion to prove his strength, 2 Co. xiii. 9 ; contextually, to be unable to wield and hold sway over others, 2 Co. .\i. 21 ; by o.xymoron, όταν ασθίνώ, τύτ( 8υνατός (Ιμι when I am weak in human strenjith, then pect added : Triurfi, to be weak in faith, Ro. iv. 19 : πίστα, to be doubtful about things lawful and unlawful to a Chris- tian, Ro. xiv. 1 ; simple aaSevdv with the same idea sug- gested, Ro. xiv. 2, 21 [T Wll om. Tr mrg. br.] ; 1 Co. viii. 9 Rec., 1 1 stp ; rir άσθ^νΛ, και ουκ άσθ(νω ; who is weak (in his feelings and conviction about things law- ful), and I am not filled with a compassionate sense of the same weakness? 2 Co. -xi. 29. contextually, to be weak in means, needy, poor; Acts xx. 35 (so [Arstph. pax 636] ; Eur. in Stob. 145 vol. ii. 168 ed. Gaisf.), cf. De Wette [more fully Hackett, per contra Meyer] ad loc. Specially of debility in health : with νόσοκ added, Lk. iv. 40 ; simply, to be feeble, sick: Lk. vii. 10 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; Mt. xxv. 36, 39 L txt. Τ Tr λ\Ή ; Jn. iv. 46 ; xi. 1-3, 6; Acts ix. 37; Phih ii. 26 sq.; 2 Tim. iv. 20; Jas. V. 14 ; oi aaetvoimfs, and (urdcvouvrcc, the sick, sick folks : Mt. x. 8 ; Mk. vi. 56 ; Lk. ix. 2 Rec. ; Jn. v. 3, 7, 13 Tdf. ; vi. 2; Acts .xi.x. 12.* ι>σ-θ£νη|ΐα, -arof, to, {ΰσθ€νίω), infirmity : Ro. xv. 1 (where used of error arising from weakness of mind). [In a physical sense in Aristot. hist. an. 11, 7 vol. i. 638', 37 ; gen. an. 1, IS ibid. p. 726' 15.]• αο-θ(νή$. -i's, (to σθίνος strength), weak, infirm, feeble; [fr. Pind. down] ; a. univ. : Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Alk. xiv. 38 ; 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; το aadtvis toC θ^οϋ, the act of God in which weakness seems to appear, viz. that the suffering of the cross should be borne by the Messiah, 1 Co. i. 25. b. spec.: contextually, unable to achieve anything great, 1 Co. iv. 10; destitute of power among men, 1 Co. i. 27 [I.chm. br.] ; weaker and inferior, μίλοί, 1 Co. xii. 22 ; sluggish in doing right, Ro. v. 6 ; wanting in manliness and dig- nity, 2 Co. X. 10; used of the religious systems anterior to Christ, as having no power to promote piety and sal- vation. Gal. iv. 9; Heb. vii. 18; wanting in decision about things lawful and unlawful (see άσθίνίω), 1 Co. viii. 7, 9 L TTr \VH, 10; ix. 22; 1 Th. v. 14. c. of the body, feeble, sick : Mt. xxv. 39 R G L mrg., 43 scp ; Lk. ix. 2 LTr br. ; x. 9; Acts iv. 9; v. 15 sq.; 1 Co. xi. 30.* Άο•(α, -as, ή, Asia; 1. Asia proper, η Ihiwi κα\ον- μίνη Ασία ( Ptol. 5, 2), or proconsular A?ia[of ten so called from tlie 16th cent, down ; but correctly speaking it was a provincia c ο nsulari'!, although the ruler of it was vested with ' proconsular power.' The ' Asia ' of the N. T. must not be confounded with the ' Asia proconsularis ' of the 4tli cent.], embracing Mysia, Lydia, Phrygia and Caria [cf. Cic. pro Flac. c. 27] : Acts vi. 9 [L om. Tr mrg. br.] ; xvi. 6 sqq. ; 1 Pet. i. 1 ; Rev. i. 4 ; and, a[)parently. Acts xix. 26 ; XX. 16 ; 2 Co. i. 8 ; 2 Tim. i. 15, etc. Cf. Win. R W B. s. V. Asien ; Stark in Schenkel i. p. 261 sq. ; [BB. DD. s. V. Asia; Conyb. and Iloirxon, St. Paul, ch. viii.; Wieseler, Cliron. d. apost. Zeit. p. 31 sqq.]. 2. A part of proconsular Asia, embracing Mysia, Lydia, and Caria, (Plin. h. n. 5, 27, (28) [al. 5, 100]) : Acts ii. 9. 'Airiavos, -oC, ό, a native of Asia, Asian, Asiatic: Acts ΧΛ. 4. [(Thuc, al.)]• Άσ•ιάρχη5, -ou, ό, an Asiarch, President of Asia: Acts xix. 31. Each of the cities of proconsular Asia, at the autumnal equinox, assembled its most honorable and opulent citizens, in order to select one to preside over the games to be exhibited that year, at his expense, in honor of the gods and the Roman emperor. Thereupon each city reported the name of the person selected to a general assembly held in some leading city, as Ephesus, Smyrna, Sardis. Tliis general council, called το κοινόν, selected ten out of the number of candidates, and sent them to the proconsul ; and the proconsul, apparently, chose one of these ten to preside over the rest. This explains how it is that in Acts I.e. several Asiarchs are spoken of, while Eusebius h. e. 4, 15, 27 mentions only one; [perhaps also the title outlasted the ser- vice]. Cf. Meyer on Acts 1. c. ; Win. RAVE. s. v. Asiarchen ; [BB.DD. s. v. ; but esp. Le Bos et Wadding- ton, Voyage Archeol. Inscrr. part. v. p. 244 sq.; Kuhn, ίσίΤία 81 αστήρ i)ie stadtische u. bflrserl. Verf. des rbm. Reiths, i. 10Θ sqq. ; Marquarill, Rom. S'aatsverwalt. i. 374 sΐ, adv., (for ησμ,ίνω! ; fr. ηδομαι), icith joy, glad- ly : Acts ii. 41 [Rec] ; xxi. 1 7. (lu Grk. writ. fr. Horn, [the adv. fr. Aeschyl.] down.) * ά-σοψοΐ, -OK, (σοφοί), unwise, foolish: Eph. v. 15. [From Theogn. down.]* άσιτάζομαι; [iinpf. ησπαζίιμην]; 1 aor. ησπασάμην; (fr. σπάω with α intensive [q. v., but cf. A'anicek p. 1103 ; Curtius, Das \'erbum, i. 324 sq.] ; hence prop, to draw to one's self [W. § 38, 7 fin.] ; cf. αακα'φω for σκαίρω. άσπαί- ρω for σπαίρω, άσπαρίζω for στταρί^ω) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; a. witli an ace. of the pers., to salute one, greet, bid tcet- come, wish well to, (tlie Israelites, on meeting and at parting, generally used the formula ^ Dl'7 'ΰ') ; used of those accosting any one : Mt. x. 12; Jfk. Lx. 15; xv. 18; Lk. i. 40; Acts xxi. 19. of those who visit one to see him a little while, departing almost immediately af- terwards : Acts xviii. 22 ; xxi. 7 ; like the Lat. salutare, our ^pay one's respects to,' of those who show regard for a distinguished person by visiting him : Acts xxv. 1 3, (Joseph, antt. 1, 19, 5; 6, 11, 1). of those who greet one whom they meet in the way : Mt. v. 47 (in the East even now Christians and Mohammedans do not salute each other) ; Lk. x. 4 (as a salutation was made not merely by a slight gesture and a few words, but generally by em- bracing and kissing, a journey was retarded by saluting frequently), of those departing and bidding farewell: Acts XX. 1 ; xxi. 6 [R G]. of the absent, saluting by letter: Ro. xvi. 3, 5-23; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Co. xiii. 12 (13) ; Phil. iv. 21 sq. ; Col. iv. 10-12, 14 sq. ; 1 Th. v. 26, etc. (u φίΧήματι: Ro. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii. 12; 1 Pet. V. 14. b. with an ace. of the thing, to receive joyfully, welcome: ras fVayyeXi'ar, Heb. xi. 13, (την σνμ- φοράν, Eur. Ion 587; την (ϋνοιαν, Joseph, antt. 6, 5, 3 ; Toii Xoyout, ibid. 7, 8, 4 ; so saluto, Verg. Aen. 3, 524). [CoMP. : aw-aάλ(ΐα, -as, ή, {ασφαλής), [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; a. frniness, stability: tV ττάση άσφ. most securely, Acts v. 23. trop. certainty, undoubted truth : \όγων (see λόγος, I. 7), Lk. i. 4, (τοΰ λόγου, the certainty of a proof, Xen. mem. 4, 6, 15). b. security from enemies anil dangers, safety : 1 Th. v. 3 (opp. to κίνδυνος, Xen. mem. 3, 12, 7).• άσ-ψαλής, -es, (σφάλλω to make to totter or fall, to cheat, [cf. Lat. fallo. Germ, fallen, etc., Eng. fall, fail], σφάΧλομαι to fall, to reel), [fr. Ilom. down] ; a. firm (that can be relied on, confided in) : άγκυρα, Ileb. vi. 19 (ivhere L and Tr have received as the form of ace. sing. ασφαλήν [Tdf. 7 -λήν ; cf. Tdf . ad loc. ; Delitzsch, Com. ad loc] see ϊΊρσην). trop. certain, true : Acts xxv. 26 ; TO ασφαλές. Acts xxi. 34 ; xxii. 30. b. suited to confirm : TIKI, riiil. iii. 1 (so Joseph, antt. 3, 2, 1).* άο-ψαλίζω : 1 aor. pass. inf. άσφαλισθήναι ; 1 aor. mid. ήσφαλισάμην ; (ασφαλής) ; esp. freq. fr. Polyb. down ; to 'make firm, to make secure against harm ; pass, to be made secure: Mt. xxvii. 64 (ό τάφος) [Β. 52 (46)]; mid. prop, to make secure for one's self or for one's own ad- vantage, (often in Polyb.): Mt. xxvii. 65 s([. ; to make fast Tois πόδας (Ις το ξύλον, Acts xvi. 24 [W. § 66, 2 d. i B. § 147, 8].• άο-φαλύΐ, adv., [fr. Horn, down], safely (so as to prevent escape) : Mk. xiv. 44 ; Acts xvi. 23. assuredly : γινώ- σκ(ΐν. Acts ii. 36 ((Ιδάτίς, Sap. xviii. 6).* ά(ΓχημΌν(ω, -ώ ; (to be άσχημων, deformed ; την κ(φα- \ήν άσχημονίΐν, of a bald man, Ael. v. h. 11, 4) ; to act un- bcromingly ([Eur.], Xen., Plat., al.) : 1 Co. xiii. 5 ; ϊπίτινα, towards one, i. e. contextually, to prepare disgrace for her, 1 Co. vii. 36.• άσχημοσ-ύνη, -r;s, ή, (άσχημων ) ; fr. Plato down ; un- seemliness, an unseemly deed : Ro. i. 27 ; of the pudenda, one's nakedness, shame : Rev. xvi. 15, as in Ex. xx. 26 ; Deut. xxiii. 14, etc. (In Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down.)* ώτχήμων, -ovos, neut. άσχημον, (σχήμα) ; a. dejnrmed. b. indecent, unseemly : 1 Co. xii. 23, opp. to ίϋσχήμων. ([Hdt.], Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.)* ά(Γωτ(α, -ας, ή, (the character of an πσωτοΓ, i. e. of an abandoned man, one that cannot be saved, fr. σαόω, σύω i. <]. σώζω, [ά-σω-το-ς, Curtius § 570] ; hence prop, incor- rif/ibleness), an abandoned, dissolute, life; profligacy, prod- igality, [R. V. riof] : Eph. v. 18 ; Tit. i. 6 ; 1 Pet. iv. 4 ; (Prov. xxviii. 7 ; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Plat. rep. 8, p. 560 e. ; Aristot. eth. Nic. 4, 1, 5 (3) p. 1120', 3 ; Polyb. 32, 20, 9; 40, 12, 7; cf. Cic. Tusc. 3, 8; Hdian. 2, 5, 2 (1 ed. ασωτω(ί 83 αυθύΖη'ϊ Bekk.), and elsewhere). Cf. Tittmann i. p. 152 sq. ; [Trench § xvi.].* oe-UTus, adv., (adj. ΰσωτοί, on which see ασωτία), dis- solulely, profliyately: ζην (Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 8), Lk. XV. 13 [A. V. riotijua la-iri(i\* άτακτ€'ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ητήκτησα ; Ιο hi- utuktos, Ιο he disor- derhj ; a. prop, of soldiers marching out of order or quitting the ranks : Xen. Cjr. 7, 2, U, etc. Hence b. to be negleclful of duUj, lo be lawless : Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 22 ; oec. 5, 15 ; Lys. 141, 18 [i. e. c. Alcib. or. 1 § 18], ah c. to lead a disorder! i/ life : 2 Th. iii. 7, cf. 11.* SrroKTOi, -Of, {τάσσω}, disorderhj, out of tlie ranks, (often so of soldiers) ; irregular, inordinate (άτακτοι ήδοναί immoderate pleasures, Plat. legg. 2, 6G0 b. ; Plut. de lib. educ. c. 7), deviating from the prescribed order or rule : 1 Th. v. 14, cf. 2 Th. iii. G. (In Grk. writ. fr. [lldt. and] Thuc. down ; often in Plat.) * ά^τ^κτω?, adv., disorderly : 2 Th. iii. 6 άτάκτωί π^ριπα- Tciv, ivhicli is explained by the added και μη κατά την napddoaiv ην παρ€λαβ€ τταρ ημών; of. ibid. 11, where it is exiilained by μη5ϊν ίμ-γαζόμινοι, άλλα π€ρΐ(ργαζόμ(νοι. (Often in Plato.) * ατ£κνο5, -OK, (τΐκνον), without offspring, childless : Lk. XX. 28-30. (Gen. xv. 2 ; Sir. xvi. 3. In Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod opp. 600 down.)* άτίνίζω ; 1 aor. ητίνισα; (fr. άτίνής stretched, intent, and this fr. τ(ίνω anil α intensive ; [yet cf. ^V. § 1<>, 4 B. a. fin., and s. v. A, a, 3]) ; tofj: the eyes on, gaze upon : with dat. of pars., Lk. iv. 20 ; .xxii. 56 ; Acts iii. 1 2 ; x. 4 ; xiv. 9 ; xxiii. 1 ; foil, by t if with ace. of pers.. Acts iii. 4 ; vi. 15 ; xiii. 9 ; metaph. to fix one's mind on one as an exam])le, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 2 ; eis τι. Acts i. 10 ; vii. 55 ; 2 Co. iii. 7, 13; fir n, lo look into anything. Acts xi. G. (3 Mace. ii. 26. [Aristot.], Polyb. 6, 11, 5 [i. e. 6, 11% 12 Uind.] ; Diod. 3, 39 [Dind. tWr.] ; Joseph, b. j. 5, 12, 3 ; Lcian. cont. 16, al.) * arep, prep., fre([. in the poets [fr. Horn, down], rare in prose writ. fr. Plat. [?] down ; without, apart from : with gen. [Dion. Hal. 3, 10 ; Plut. Num. 14, Cat. min. 5] ; in the Bible only in 2 Mace. xii. 15; Lk. xxii. 6 (arep όχλου in the absence of the multitude ; hence, without tumult), 35. [' Teaching '3, 10 ; Herm. sim. 5, 4, 5.] • ατιμάζω ; 1 aor. ητίμασα ; [Pass., pres. ατιμάζομαι] ; 1 aor. inf. άτιμασ^^και ; (fr. im^oj; hence) ίο mo/.f άημοϊ, to dishonor, insult, treat with contumely, whether in word, in deed, or in tliought : [Mk. xii. 4 Τ Tr mrg. WH (cf. άτιμάω and -μόω)] ; Lk. .XX. 1 1 ; Jn. viii. 49 ; Acts v. 41 ; Ro. ii. 23 ; Jas. ii. 6 [\V. § 40, 5, 2 ; B. 202 (1 75)]. Pass. : Ro. i. 24, on which cf. W. 326 (305 sq.) ; [and § 39, 3 N. 3]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; Sept.) * άττιμάω, -ώ : [1 aor. ητίμησα^; (τιμή); to deprive of honor, despise, treat with contempt or contumely : τινά, Mk. xii. 4 L Tr txt. ήτίμησαν (see ατιμάζω and -μόω). (In Grk. writ, [chiefly Epic] fr. Horn, down.) * ατιμία, -αί, ή, (άτιμος), dishonor, ignominy, disgrace, [fr. Horn, down] : 1 Co. xi. 14; opp. to δόξα, 2 Co. vi. 8; 1 Co. XV. 43 (ev ατιμία sc. of, in a state of disgrace, used of the unseemUness and offensiveness of a dead body) ; κατ άτιμίαν equiv. to άτιμο»?, with contempt sc. of myself, 2 Co. xi. 21 [R. V. by way of disparagement, cf. κατά, II. fin.] ; πάθη ατιμία: base lusts, \ile passions, Ro. i. 26, cf. W. § 34, 3 b. ; [B. § 132, 10]. ei's άτιμίαν for a dishonor- able use, of vessels, opp. to τιμή : Ro. ix. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 20.* άτιμοί, -ov, (τιμή) ; It. Hom. down ; without honor, un- honorcd, dishonored : Mt. xiii. 57; Mk. vi. 4; 1 Co. iv. 10 (opp. to (νδοξοί) ; base, of less esteem: 1 Co. ,xii. 23 [here the neut. plur. of the compar., άτιμότ(ρα (Rec."''' άτιμώτίρα)^* άτιμόω, -ώ : [pf. pass. ptcp. ήτίμωμίνος^ ; (άτιμος) ; fr. Acschyl. down ; to dishonor, mark with disgrace : Mk. xii. 4 R G, see άτιμάω [and ατιμάζω^' άτμίϊ, -I'Sof, ή, i-apor: Jas. iv. 14; καττνοϋ (Joel ii. 30 [al. iii. 3]), Acts ii. 19 [opp. to καπνός in Aristot. meteor. 2, 4 p. 359', 29 sq., to νίφος ibid. 1, 9 p. 346', 32]. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 75 and] Plat. Tim. p. 86 e. down.) * έ^τομοϊ, -ov, (τί'μνω to cut), ihal cannot he cut in two or dirided, indivisible, [Plat. Soph. 229 d. ; of time, Aristot. phys. 8, 8 p. 263', 27] : iv άτόμω in a moment, 1 Co. XV. 52.* arTOTro%, -ov, (τύπος), out of place; not befitting, unbe- coming, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down ; verv often in Plato) ; in later Grk. in an ethical sense, improper, wicked : Lk. xxiii. 41 (άτοπον τι πράσσαν, as in Job .xxvii. 6; 2 Mace. xiv. 23); Acts .\.\v. 5 LTTrWH; (Sept. for [IN Job iv. 8; xi. 11, etc. Joseph, antt. 6, 5, 6; Plut. de aud. poet. c. 3 φαυλά and άτοπα) ; of men : 2 Th. iii. 2 (άτοποι κα\ πονηροί ; Luth. unartig, more correctly unrighteous [^(iniquus), A. V. unreasonable, cf. Ellic. ad loc.]). inconvenient, harmful : Acts xxviii. 6 μηδίν άτοίΓοκ e?r αυτόν γινόμ(νον, no injury, no harm coming to him, (Time. 2, 49; Joseph, antt. 11, 5, 2; Hdian. 4, 11, 7 [4, ed. Bekk.]).• 'Αττάλ€ΐα [-λία Τ WH (see I, i)], -ας, ή, Altalia, a mar- itime city of Pam])hylia in Asia, very near the borders of Lycia, built and named by Attains Philadelphus, king of Pergamum ; now ^1 ntali \_OTAdalia ; cf. Diet, of Geog.] : Acts xiv. 25.• αϋ^άζω : 1 aor. inf. αϋγάσαι ; (αυγή) ; 1. in Grk. writ, transitively, to beam upon, irradiate. 2. in the Bible intrans. to be bright, to shine forth : 2 Co. iv. 4 [L mrg. Tr mrg. καταιτ/. see φωτισμός, b.], (Lev. xiii. 24-28, [etc.]). [Co.MP. : 8i-, κατ-αυγάζω.}' αΐγή. -ήί, ή, brightness, raditince, (cf. Germ. -■! uge [fi/e], of which the tragic poets sometimes use αυγή. see Pape [or L. and S. ; cf. Lat. luminaj), especially of the sun ; hence ήλιου is often added (Hom. and sqq.), daylight; hence άχρις [-pi Τ Tr WH] αΰγης even till break of day. Acts XX. 11 (Polyaen. 4, is p. 386 κατά την πρώτην αϊγήν της ήμ(ρας). [Syn. see 0e'yyor fin.]* Αύ'γουστοϊ, -ου, ό, Augustus [cf. Eng. Majesty; see σιβαστός, 2], the surname of G. Julius Caesar Octavia- nus, the first Roman emperor: Lk. ii. 1.* αυθάδη?, -if, (fr. αϊτός and ή5ομαι), self-pleasing, self- willed, arrogant : Tit. i. 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10. (Gen. xlix. 3, 7 1 αυθαίρετοι 84 αυταρκοΛ Prov. xxi. 24. In Grk. writ. fr. ApFcliyl. and Hdt. down.) [Trench § xciii.] * αύθ-α(ρ<τοΐ, -ov, (ir. αυτό; and αίρίομαι), silj-chosen ; in (irk. writ. esp. of states or conditions, as δαι/λ»'α, Thuc. 6, 40, etc., more rarely of jiersons; voluiiltiri/, of free rhoice, of m}c*s own accord ^ (as στρατηγός^ Xen. an. 5, 7, •J!', explained § 28 by or (αυτόν ίληται) : Ί Co. viii. 3, 1 7.• ανθ£ΐπ<ο>. -ώ ; ( a bibl. and eccl. word ; f r. αίθ(ντη! contr. fr. αντοίιηηι, and this fr. airos and tirrfa arms [al. ΐντης, cf. Ilesyeh. συνίντης- avvepyos; cf. Lobeck, Teclmol. p. 121]; hence a. ace. to earlier usage, one who with his own hand kills either others or himself, b. in later Grk. writ, one who does a thing himself, the author (τήί npa^tus, Polyb. 23, 14, 2, etc.); one who acts on his own aullturity, autocratic, i. q. αυτοκράτωρ an absolute master ; cf. Loheck ad Phryn. p. 120 [also as above; cf. W. § 2, 1 c.]) ; to govern one, exercise ilominion over one: Tivor, 1 Tim. ii. 12.• ανλ(ω, -5> : 1 aor. ηνΚησα ; [pres. pass. ptcp. τό αί\ού- μινον] ; (αύλόϊ) ; to ρίαι/ on the flute, to pipe : Mt. .\i. 1 7 ; Lk. vii. 32 ; l.Co. xiv. 7. (Fr. [Alcm., Hdt.,] Xen. and Plat, down.) ' αυλή, -ής, ή. (άω to blow ; hence) prop, a place open to the (nr {^ianvfttpfvoi tOjtos ανλη Xe'yfrat, Athen, 5, 15 p. 189 b.) ; i. among the Greeks in Homer's time an uncovered space around the house, enclosed ΰι/ a wall, in which the stables stood (Ilom. Od. 9, 185; 11. 4, 433); hence among the Orientals that roofless enclosure in the open country in which flocks were herded at night, a sheep- fold : Jn. X. I, 16. 2. the uncovered court-yard of the house, Ilebr. ΊΧΠ, Sept. αυλή, Vulg. atrium. In the O. T. particularly of the courts of the tabernacle and of the temple at Jerusalem ; so in the X. T. once : Rev. xi. 2 {τήν αυΚήν την Ζ^ωθ(ν [Rec.^ ίσωθ^ν'] τοΰ ναοΰ). The dwellings of the higher classes usually had two αϋλαι, one exterior, between the door and the street, called also προαυΚιον (i|. v.); the other interior, surrounded by the buildings of the dwelling itself. The latter is mentioned Mt. xxvi. 69 (where ΐξω is opp. to the room in which the judges were sitting) ; Mk. xiv. 66; Lk. .xxii. 55. Cf. Win. RAVB. s. V. Hiiuser ; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Court ; BB.DD. 8. V. House]. 3. the house itself, a palace : Mt. xxvi. 3, 58 ; Mk. xiv. 54 ; xv. 16 ; Lk. xi. 21 ; Jn. xviii. 15, and so very often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. Od. 4, 74 down [cf. £)ustath. 1483, 39 τω τη<ί αυΚης ονόματι τα δώματα δϊ/λοΐ, Suid. col. 6.")2 C. αυλή ■ ή τοϋ βασιλίωί οικία. Yet this sense is denied to the N. T. by Meyer et al. ; see Mey. on Mt. 1. c.].* οΰλητήϊ, -οΰ, ό, (αύλ/ω), a flute-player : ^It. ix. 23 ; Rev. xviii. 22. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn. and] Hdt. 6, 60 down.) * αΰλίζομαι : depon. ; impf. ηυλιζόμην ; 1 aor. ηΙΧΙσθην [ Veitch s. V. ; B. 51 (44) ; W. § 39, 2] ; {αΙ\ή) ; in Sept. mostly forjl?; 1. prop, to lodge in the court-yard esp. at night ; of flocks and shepherds. 2. to pa-ss the night in the open air, bivouac. 3. univ. to pass the night, lodge: so Mt. xxi. 17; Lk. xxi. 37 {ί'ξ(ρχ6μίνο! ηνΧίζ^Γο οι Fr. 130 (Bergk )'])αϋ|ω (Eph. ii. 21 ; Col. ii. 19); impf. ηϋξανον; fut. αίξήσω ; 1 aor. ηίξησα; [Pass., pres. αυξάνομαι] ; 1 aor. ηΰξΐιθην; 1. trans, to cause to grow, to augment: 1 Co. iii. 6 sq. ; 2 Co. ix. 1 0. Pass, to grow, increase, become greater : Mt. xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 8 L Τ 'Jr WH ; 2 Co. x. 1 5 ; Col. i. 6 [not Kec] ; fir τήν ΐπιγνωσιν τοϋ θ(οΰ unto the knowledge of (iod, Col. i. 10 (G LTTr WHtj ίπιγκώσί» τοΰ θίοϋ) : els σωτηρΙαν\ηοί Rec] to the attaining of sal- vation, 1 Pet. ii. 2. 2. ace. to later usage (fr. Aristot. an. ])ost. 1, 13 p. 78', 6, etc., down ; but nowhere in Sept. [cf.B. 54(47); 14.") (127); W. § 38, 1 J) intrans. /» i/roi/•, increase: of jilant.s, Mt. vi. 28; Mk. iv. 8 Rec; Lk. xii. 27 [not Tdf. ; Trmrg. br. αύ|.] ; Lk. xiii. 19; of infants, Lk. i. SO ; ii. 40 ; of a nHiltitu I myself, the very man who seems to be inimi- cal to the Israelites) ; 2 Co. x. 1 (I myself, who bore myself lowly in your presence, as ye said) ; αυτά τα epya. Jn. V. 36 ; often in Luke cV avrfi rf/ ημίρα or ώρα, αυτώ τω καιρώ, in that very day, hour, season : Lk. ii. 38 ; x. 21 ; xii. 12; xiii. 1, 31 ; .xx. 19; xxiii. 12 ; x\iv. 13, 33 ; Acts xvi. 18. In the writings of Paul αϋτο τοϋτο l/iis very lliiny: Gal. ii. 10; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 6; ds αυτό τοϋτο for this very purpose, on this very account: Ro. i.x. 1 7 ; xiii. 6 ; 2 Co. v. 5 ; Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; and in the same sense \_for this very thing] the simple accus. (as in Attic, cf. Matth. § 470, 7 ; Kiihner ii. 267 Anm. 6 ; W. § 21 N. 2) ToiTo αυτό, 2 Co. ii. 3 [but see Mey. ad loc], and αϋτο τοϋτο, 2 Pet. i. 5 [Lchm. reads here airoQ. d. even, Lat. rel, arleo, (in Horn. ; cf. Hrrm. ad A'ig. p. 733 ii.) : και αυτή η κτίσις, Ro. viii. 21 ; ouSe η φνσις αυτή, 1 Co. xi. 14 : καϊ [Tr om. L AVII br. και] αϋτος 6 υίΟ£, 1 Co. XV. 28 ; «col αϋτη 2άρρα even Sarah herself, although a feeble old woman, Ileb. xi. 11 [yet WII mrg. reads the dat. ai/Tji 2άρρα; see καταβολή, 1]. II. αύτόί has the force of a simple personal pronoun of the third person, answering to our unemphatic he, she, it; and that 1. as in classic Grk., in the oblique cases, him, her, it, them, etc.: numberless instances, — as in the gen. absolute, e. g. αυτού ίΧθόιττος. \ηΧήσαντος, etc.; or in the ace. with inf., ds το dvai airois αναπολό- γητου!, Ro. i. 20 ; or after prepositions, (ξ αίτοϋ. tv αϋτώ, etc. ; or where it indicates the possessor, ό πατήρ αΰτοΰ ; or a person as the (dir. or indir.) object of an active verb, as f π•ι8ώσ€ΐ αϋτω, Mt. vii. 9 ; άσπάσασθ( αυτήν, Jit. X. 12 ; άφ(\5 αϋτον!, Mt. xxvi. 44 ; ην 8ιαν(ύων αύτοΐί, Lk. 1. 22 ; ουκ €ia αΰτα λαλ^ίι^. Lk. iv. 41 ; η σκοτία αυτό ου κατ(\αβ(, Jn. i. 5. But see αυτού below. 2. Contrary to Grk. usage, in the X. T. even in the Nominative it is put for a simple personal pronoun of the third person, where the Greeks say ούτος or ό δί, or use no pronoun at all. This has been convincingly shown by B. 107 (93) sqq. ; and yet some of the examples adduced by him are not decisive, but either must be or can be referred to the usage illustrated under I. 1 ; — those in which avras is used of Christ, apparently to I. 1 b. But, in my opinion, the question is settled even by the following: αϋτο!, Mt. xiv. 2 ; Mk. xiv. 15 ; Lk. i. 22 ; xv. 14 ; so too in the Sept (cf. Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 98) ; Sir. xlix. 7; Tob. vi. 11 ; αΰτοΙ, Mk. ii. 8 (ούτως αϋτο\ 8ια\ο•γίζονται in Grsb.) ; Lk. ix. 36 ; xiv. 1 ; xxii. 23 ; αυτό, Lk. xi. 14 [Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.]. AVhether αΰτη and αϋταί also are so used, is doubtful; cf. B. 109 (95). 3. Sometimes in the oblique cases the pron. is omitted, being evident from the context : Mk. vi. 5 (ΐπιθύς, sc. aUToIr); Jn. iii. 34 (δι'δωσ», sc. αιίτω); Jn. x. 29 (δί'δωκί μοι, sc. αυτούς) ; Acts xiii. 3 (άπίλυπαν, sc. αυτούς) ; Rev. xviii. 21 (i/3aAfi',sc. αντόν), etc. 4. Not infre Τ λ\ II οπι. Tr br. αϋτόι/]) ; 1 Co. viii. 6 {ϊξ ηΐ τα πάντα και ήμύς eif αίτόν, for κα\ (Is όν ήμιΐί) ; 2 Pet. ϋ. 3. This is the usage likewise of Greek as weU as of Hebrew ; cf. W. 149 (141); [B. 283 (243)]; Bnhdy. p. 304. m. 6 αϊτός, ή αυτή, το αυτό, with the article, the same ; 1. without a noun : ό αυτός, immutable, Ileb. i. 12 ; .\iii. 8, (Thuc. 2, 61) ; το αϋτό. — ποιι'ιν. Mt. v. 46 [R G Τ Wll txt., 47 L Τ Tr WH] : Lk. vi. 33 ; Uynv, to profess the same opinion, 1 Co. i. 10; oKfiSiffii', not in the same manner but reproached him with tlie same, cast on him the same reproach, Mt. xxvii. 44, (ui/f iSiff iv τοιαϊττα. Soph. Oed. Col. 1002). τί αυτά: Acts xv. 27 ; Ro. ii. 1 ; Eph. vi. 9. fVl TO αυτό [Rec* passim fViroauro] (Hesych. όμον, eVi τον αϋτόκ τόπον), to the same place, in the same place : Mt. xxii. 34 ; Acts i. 15 ; ii. 1 ; 1 Co. xi. 20 ; xiv. 23, (Ps. ii. 2 ; 2 S. ii. 13 ; 3 Mace. iii. 1 ; Sus. 14) ; together : Lk. xvii. 35 ; Acts iii. 1 [L Τ Tr AVH pin it to ch. ii. ; 1 Co. vii. 5]; κατά το αυτό, (Vulg. simul), together: Acts xiv. 1 (for ΊΠ", Ex. xxvi. 24; 1 K. iu. 18; exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 69 sqq.). Like adj. of equality ό αυτός is foil, by the dat. : ii/ κα\ TO alToTji ί^νρημίντι, 1 Co. xi. 5, (Sap. xviii. 11 ; 4 Mace. viii. 5 ; x". 2, 13, and often in Grk. writ., cf. W. 150 (141)). 2. AVith a noun added : Mt. xxvi. 44 ; Mk. xiv. 39 (τοι» αύτοί' Xoyof) ; Lk. vi. 38 [R G L mrj.] (τώ αντω μίτρω) ; Phil. i. 3υ ; 1 Co. i. 10 (eV τώ αίτώ ιό?) ; 1 Co. xii. 4 (το he αυτό πν(ϋμα), etc. τα αϊτό (with the force of a subst. the same kind) των παθημάτων, 1 Pet. v. 9. [Cf. τβίτά.] οϋτον, prop, neuter genitive of the pron. airos. '" thai place, there, here : Mt. xxvi. 36 ; [Lk. Lx. 27 (R L &8i)] ; Acts XV. 34 (a spurious vs. [see WH. App. ad loc.]) ; xviii. 19 (LTr mrg. eftei) ; x.xi. 4 (Lchm. αΰτοΐς).* αΰτοϋ, -ής, -οϋ, of himself , herself, itself, i. q. /αυτοί, q. v. It is very common in the edd. of the N. T. by the Elzevirs, Griesbach, Knapp, al. ; but Bengel, Matthaei, Lchm., Tdf., Trg. have everywhere substituted αΐτοΰ, αΰτω, etc. for αίτοΟ, αΰτω, etc. " For I have observed that the former are used almost constantly [not always then? Grinwi] not only in uncial codd. of the viii. ix. and x. cent., but also in many others (and not X. T. codd. alone). That this is the correct mode of writing is proved also by numerous examples where the pron. is joined to prep- ositions ; for these last are often found written not (φ, αφ, μ(θ, καθ, ανθ, etc., but ίττ, απ, μ(τ, κατ, αιτ." Tdf. Proleg. ad Χ. Τ., ed. 2 p. x.xvi. [ed. S p. 126]; cf. his Proleg. ad Sept., ed. 1 p. Ixx. [ed. 4 p. xxxiii. (not in ed. 6)]. Bleek entertains the same opinion and sets it forth at length ir "^is note on Heb. i. 3, vol. ii. 1 p. 67 sqq. The questiou ''ard to decide, not only be- cause the breathings and acvjnts are wanting in the oldest codd., but also because it often depends upon the mere preference of the writer or speaker whether he will speak in his own person, or ace. to the thought of the person spoken of. Certainly in the large majority of the passages in the X. T. αντοϋ is correctly restored; but apparently we ought to write hi αυτοί (Rec. /αυτοί [so L mrg. Τ WH]). Ro. xiv. 14 [L txt. Tr δι' αΙτ."] ; eU αυτόν. Col. i. 20 [al. f is αύτ.] ; αυτός π(ρ\ αΰτοϋ [Τ Tr txt. WHi'auToO], .Tn.ix.21. Cf. W. 151 (143): [B. Ill (97) sq.; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c, and see esp. Hort in Westcott and Hort's Grk. Test., App. p. 144 sq. ; these editors have in- troduced the aspirated form into their text " nearly twen- ty times" (e. g. Mt. vi. 34; Lk. xii. 17, 21 ; xxiii. 12; xxiv. 12: Jn.ii. 24 ; xiii. 32; xix. 17; xx. 10; Acts .xiv. 17; Ro. i. 27 ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; Eph. ii. 15 : Phil. iii. 21 : 1 Jn. v. 10 ; Rev. viii. 6, etc.). Cf. Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 432]. αυτόφωροι, -ov, (αυτός and φώρ a thief, φωρά a theft), [fr. Soph, down] ; prop, caught in the act of theft ; then univ. caught in the act of perpetrating any other crime; very often in the phrases ίπ' αυτοφώρω (as one word (παυτοφώρω) τινά 'Καμβάνίΐν, J)ass. Χαμβάνίσθαι, καταλαμ- βάνισθαι, άΧίσκίσθαι, (fr. Hdt. Ο, 72 on), the crime being specified by a participle : μοιχ(υομίνη, Jn. viii. 4 [R G], as in Ael. nat. an. 11, IS; Plut. mor. vi. p. 446 ed. Tauchn. [x. p. 723 ed. Reiske, cf. Xicias 4, 5 ; Eumen. 2, 2] ; Sext. Empir. adv. Rhet. 65 [p. 151 ed. Fabric.].* αύτό-χ€ΐρ, -ρος, ό, (αυτός and χ(ίρ, cf. μακρόχ€ΐρ, άδικο• χ(φ), doing a thing icilh one's own hand: Acts xxvii. 19. (Often in the tragedians and Attic orators.) * ανχεω ; (in pres. and impf. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, but rare in prose) ; prop, to lift up the neclc, hence to boast : μι-γάΚα αίχύ, Jas. iii. 5 L Τ Tr WH for R G pf- ■γά\αυχ(Ί q. v.* αυχμηρός, -ά, -όν, (σύχμ/ ω to be squalid), squalid, dirty, (Xen., Plat., sqi].), and since dirty things are destitute of brightness, dark: 2 Pet. i. 19, Aristot. de color. 3 to Χαμπρόν ή στίλβοί' . . . η τουναντίον αίχμηρον και άλαμπ^ς. (Hesych., Suidas, Pollux.) • άψ-αιρ/ω, -ώ : fut. άφαιρήσω (Rev. xxii. 1 9 Rec. [fr. Erasmus, apparently on no Ms. authority ; see Tdx.'s note]), and άφ(\ω (ibid. G L Τ Tr WH ; on this rarer fut. cf. Blim. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 100) : 2aor. άφίΐΧον; 1 fut. pass. άφαιρ(θήσομαι : Mid., pres. αφαιρούμαι: 2 aor. άφ(ίλόμην•, [see αίρί'ύ)] : in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; to take f mm, take away, remove, carry off: τι. Lk. i. 25 ; to cut οβ', το ώτίον, Mt. xxvi. 51 ; Mk. xiv. 47 [L Τ Tr WII τοώτάριον] ; Lk. xxii. SO [to οΰϊ], (την κ(φά\ήν tiios, 1 Mace. vii. 47 ; for n^3, 1 S. xvii. 51) ; to tak'^ away, τϊ από with gen. of a thing. Rev. xxii. 19; τι από with gen. of pers. Lk. X. 42 [T WH om. L Tr br. άπό], (Gen. xxxi. 31 ; Job xxxvi. 7 ; Prov. iv. 16 [Alex.], etc.) ; mid. (prop, to take away or bear off ft>r one's self), Lk. xvi. 3, (Lev. iv. 10 ; Mic. ii. 8 : in Grk. writ, with a simple gen. for από τίνος) : άφαιρ€ΐν τάς αμαρτίας to take away sins, of αφανή•; 88 άφι'ημι victims expiating them, Ilcb. χ. 4, (Jer. xi. 15 ; Sir. xlvii. 11) ; mid. of (iod i>iitting out of his sight, remembering no more, tlie sins coininitted by men, i. e. granting par- don for sins (see αμαρτία, 2 a.) : Uo. xi. 2i.' άψανή;, -€s, (φ ύνω), not maiii/csl, liiddeii : Ileb. iv. 13. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. down.) [C'f. ίήλοί, and Schmidt cli. 130.]' αφανίζω ; [Pass., pres. αφανίζομαι] ; 1 aor. ηφανίσθην ; (αφανής) ; a. to snatch out oj'sl ///(/, to /ntt out of view, to moke unseen, (Xen. an. 3, 4, 8 ηλιον νιφίλη παρακαλΰψασα ήφάνισί se. ■nji' πάλιν, Plat. Phil. G6 a. άφανίζυιττα κρύ- πτομ(ν). b. Ιο cause to vanish airai/, to destroij, consume : Mt. vi. 19 sq. (often so in Grk. writ, and Sept. [cf. B. §130, 5]); Pass, to perish: Acts xiii. 41 (Luth. vor Schrecken veryehen) ; to vanish awui), Jas. iv. 14, (Ildt. 7, 6; 167; Plat, et S(i-co-t;, -(ως, ή, (άφίημι) ; 1. release, as from bond- age, imprisonhient, etc.: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. bci. 1 sq. ; Polyb. 1, 79, 12, etc.). 2. άφ(σις άμαρηων forgiveness, pardon, of sins (prop, the letting them go, as if they had not been committed [see at length Trench § x.\xiii.])i remission of their penalty: ΛΙΐ. xxvi. 28; Mk. i. 4; Lk. i. 77; iii. 3; xxiv. 47 ; Acts ii. 38 ; v. 31 ; x. 43; xiii. 38; .\.\vi. 18; Col. i. 14; των παρατττωμάτων, Eph. i. 7; and simply άφισις: Mk. iii. 29; Ileb. ix. 22; x. 18, {φόνου, Plat. Ic'.'g. 9 p. 869 d. ; iyκ\ημάτωv, Diod. 20, 44 [so Dion. Hal. 1. 8 § 50, see also 7, 33; 7, 46; esp. 7, 64; αμαρτημάτων, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 17; al.]).* αφή, -ης, ή, (άπτω to fasten together, to fit), (Vulg. junclura [and nexus]), bond,connection,[A. Y. Joint (see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below)] : Eph. iv. 16 ; Col. ii. 19. (Plut. Anton, c. 27.)• άφθαροτία, -at, ή, (άφθαρτος, cf. ακαθαρσία), (Tertull. and subseq. writ, incorriiplibililas, Vulg. incorruplio [and incorruptela]), incorruption, perpetuity: τοΰ κόσμου, Philo de incorr. nuind. §11; it is ascribed to τό βύον in Plut. Arist. c. 6 ; of the body of man exempt from decay after the resurrection, 1 Co. xv. 42 (fV άφθ. sc. Sv), 50, 53 sq. ; of a blessed immortality (Sap. ii. 23; vi. 19; 4 Mace, xvii. 12), Ko. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 10. τικά ά-γαπάν i ν αφθαρ- σία to love one with never diminishing love, Eph. vi. 24 [cf. Moy. ad loc. The word seems to have the mean- ing purity, sincerity, incorruptness in Tit. ii. 7 Rec."].* α-φθαρτο;. -ov, (φθ(ίρω), uncorrupled, not liable to cor- ruption or ill cay, imperishable : of things, 1 Co. ix. 25 ; 1 Pet. i. 4, 23; iii. 4; [_άφθ. κήρυγμα τής αιωνίου σωτηρίας, Mk. xvi. WII in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion ']. im- mortal : of the risen dead, 1 Co. xv. 52; of God, Ro. i. 23 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7. (Sap. xii. 1 ; xviii. 4. [Aristot.], Phit., Leian., al. [Cf. Trench § Ixviii.])* ά-φθορία, -as, ή, (άφθοριις uncorrupted, fr. φθ(ίρω), un- corru/ttiiess : Tit. ii. 7 L Τ Tr WII ; see άδιαφθορία* άφ-(ημ.ι ; pres. 2 pers. sing, άφιις (fr. the form άφίω. Rev. ii. 20 for Rec. e'af), [3 pers. plur. άφιοϋσιν Rev. xi. 9 Tdf. edd.2, 7,fr. a form άφιίω ; cf. B. 48 (42)] ; impf. 3 pers. sing, ήφκ, with the augm. before the prep., Mk. i. 34; xi. 16, fr. the form άφίω; whence also pres. 1 pers. plur. άφίομ(ν Lk. xi. 4 L Τ Tr WH for άφίιμιν Rec. and 3 pers. άφίουσιν Rev. xi. 9 L Τ Tr WH ; [see 117/. App. p. 167]; fut. άφιίσω; 1 aor. άφτ)κα, 2 pers. sing. -«s Rev. ii. 4 Τ Tr WH [cf. κοπιάω] ; 2 aor. irapv. άφις, άφίΤΓ , sul)j. 3 pers. sing, αφή, 2 pers. plur. άφητι, [inf. άφ(ϊναι (Mt. xxiii. 23 L Τ Tr WH ; Lk. v. 21 L txt. Τ Tr Wll)], ptcp. άφίίς, άφίντις; Pass., pres. άφίιμαι, [yet 3 pers. plur. άφίονται .Τη. xx. 23 WH mrg. etc. ; cf. άφΙω above] ; pf. 3 pers. plur. άφίωνται (a Doric form [cf. W. § 14, 3 a.; Β 49 (42) ; Kuhner § 285, 4], Mt. Lx. 2, 5 ; Mk. ii. 5, [9] — in both these Gospels L [exc. in Mk. mrg.] Τ Tr WH have restored the pres. 3 pers. plur. αφί^νται ; Lk. v. 20, 23; vii. 47, [48]; Jn. xx. 23 L txt. Τ Tr t.xt. AVHtxt.; 1 Jn. ii. 12) ; 1 aor. άφίθην; fut. άφιθήσομαι ; cf. W. § 14, 3; B. 48 (42) ; [IK//. App. p. 167 ; Veitch s. v. ϊημι]; (fr. από and ΐημι); [fr. Horn, down] ; to send from (άπα) one's self; 1. to send away ; a. to bid go away or depart : τους όχλους, Mt. xiii. 36 [al. refer this to 3 be- low] ; την γυναίκα, of a husband putting away his wife, 1 Co. vii. 11-13, (Hdt. 5, 39; and subst. άφισις, Plut. Pomp. c. 42, 6). b. to send forth, yield up, emit: τΑ αφίημι 89 άφομοιοω τηιήμα, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 (την ψνχην, Gen. xxxv. 18; I Idt. 4, 1 90 and often in other Grk. writ, [see πνινμα, 2']),φ<ιΐνην lo utter a cri/ (emitlere t-ocem, Liv. 1, 58), Mk. XV. 37 (Gen. .xlv. 2 and often in Grk. writ. ; [cf. Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 8, 14, 17]). c. lo lei go, lei alone, let be ; a. lo disregard : Mt. xv. 14. β. lo leave, not lo discuss noir, a topic, used of teachers, writers, speakers, etc. : Heb. vi. 1, (Eur. Andr. 392; Theophr. char, praef. § 3; for other examples fr. Grk. writ, see Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2 p. 144 sq.), [al. take the word in Ileb. 1. c. as expres- sive of the duty of the readers, rather than the purpose of the writer; and consequently refer tlie passage to 3 be- low], γ. lo omit, neglect : Mt. xxiii. 23, [Lk. xi. 42 R G] ; Mk. vii. 8 ; Ro. i. 27. d. to let go, gice up, a debt, by not demanding it (opp. to κρατύν, Jn. xx. 23), i. e. lo remit, forgive : το Savfioi/, Mt. xviii. 27 ; την οφαλήν, Mt. xviii. 32 ; τα οφιί^ηματα, Mt. vi. 1 2 ; τα παραπτώματα, vi. 14 sq. ; Mk. xi. 25 sq. [T Tr WH om. verse 26] ; tus αμαρτίας, τα αμαρτήματα, τάί ανομία;, Mt. ix. 2, 5 sq. ; -xii. 31 ; Mk. ii. 5, 7 ; iii. 28 ; I>k. v. 20 sq. 23 ; Ro. iv. 7 (fr. Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 1); 1 .In. i. 9 ; Jas. v. 15, (Is. xxii. 14 ; xxxiii. 24, etc.) ; T. inivotav της καρΒίας, Acts viii. 22, (την αΐτίαν, Hdt. ΰ, 30 ; τα χρία, Ael. v. h. 14. 24) ; absolutely, άφάναι τινί Ιο forgive one: Mt. .xii. 32; xviii. 21, 35 ; Mk. iv. 12; Lk. xi. 4 ; xii. 10 ; xvii. 3 sq. ; xxiii. 34 [L br. WH reject the pass.], e. to give up, keep no longer : την πρώτην άγάττην, Rev. ii. 4. 2. lo permit, allow, not to hinder ; a. foil, by a pres. inf. [B. 258 (222)] : Mk. x. 14: Lk. xviii. 16 i^cTf fp^faOai Ka\ μή κωλν€Τ€ αυτά, Mt. xiii. 30 ; Mk. i. 34 ; Jn. xi. 44 ; xviii. 8. by the aor. inf. ; Mt. viii. 22 ; xxiii. 13 (14); Mk. V. 37; vii. 12, 27; Lk. viii. 51; ix. 60 ; xii. 39 ; Rev. xi. 9. b. without an inf. : Mt. iii. 1 5 (ίΊφfς άρτι per- mit it just now), with ace. of the pers. or tiling permitted : Mt. iii. 15 ToTf άφίησιν αυτόν, Mk. v. 19 ; xi. 6 ; xiv. 6 ; Lk. xiii. 8 ; Jn. xii. 7 R G ; xi. 48 ; Acts v. 38 (L Τ Tr WH ; RG βασατί); Rev. ii. 20 (Rec. fof). c. άφίημι τινί τι, to give up a thing lo one : Mt. v. 40 (άφα αυτω καΊ τό Ιμάτιον). d. foil, by Ινα : Mk. xi. 16 ; Jn. xii. 7 L Τ Tr WH, a later construction, cf. W. § 44, 8 ; B. 238 (205). e. foil, by the simple hortative subjunc. : Mt. vii. 4 ; Lk. vi. 42 (άφί Γ (κβαΚω) \ Mt. xxvii. 49 : Mk. .xv. 36, (άφfτf Ίδωμιν) ; Epict. diss. 1, 9, 15 Sφfs ^(ίξωμίν, 3, 12, 15 άφίί ΐδω. Cf. Β. 209 (181) sq. ; ΛΥ. 285 (268). 3. to leave, go away from one ; to depart from any one, a. in order to go to another place : Mt. xxii. 22 ; xxvi. 44 ; Mk. viii. 13 (Mt. xvi. 4 καταλιπώκ); xii. 12; xiii. 34; Jn. iv. 3; xvi. 28. b. to depart from one whom one wishes to qiiit : Mt. iv. 11 ; so of diseases departing, άφηκίν τίνα 6 Trvprros, Mt. viii. 15 ; Mk. i. 31 ; Lk. iv. 39 ; Jn. iv. 52. c. to de- part from one and leave him to himself, so that all mutual claims are abandoned : τον πατίρα, Mt. iv. 22 ; Jlk. i. 20 ; Mt. xviii. 12 (Lk. xv. 4 χαταλίίττίΐ). Thus also άφιίναι τα eavroi to leave possessions, home, etc. : Mt. iv. 20 ; xix. 27, 29 ; Mk. i. 18 ; x. 28 sq. ; Lk. v. 1 1 ; xviii. 28 sq. d. to desert one (wrongfully) : Mt. xxvi. 56 ; Jlk. xiv. ^0 ; Jn. X. 12. β. to go away leaving something behind : Mt. v. 24 ; Jn. iv. 28. f. to leave one by not taking him as a companion : opp. to παράΧαμβάνίΐν, Mt. xxiv. 40 sq. ; Lk. xvii. 34 sq. g. to leave on dj-ing, leave behind one : TfKva, γυναίκα, Mt. xxii. 25 ; Mk. .xii. 20, 22, (Lk. xx. 31 καταλίίπω). h. to leave so that what is left may re- main, leave remaining: oi μη άφ(θή Zi&€ λίθος fVi λίθορ [or \ίθω], Mt. .\.\iv. 2; Mk. xiii. 2 ; Lk. xxi. 6. i. άφωνοι foil, by the ace. of a noun or pron. with an ace. of the predicate [B. § 144, 18]: Lk. x. 30 (ήμιθανη); Jn. xiv. 18 (Ttva όρφανόν) ; Mt. xxiii. 38 ; Lk. xiii. 35, (but Lchm. om. ίρημος in both pass., WH txt. om. in Mt., G Τ Tr WH om. in Luke ; that being omitted, άφι^ναι means to abandon, to leave destitute of God's help); Acts xi- . ' 7 (άμάρτνρον ίαντάν [L Τ Tr αυτόν (WH αΰτ. q. v.)]). άψ-ικν(Όμαι, -οϋμαι : 2 aor. άφικύμην ; ( ίκνίομαι to come) ; very often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; lo come from (από) a place (but often the prep, has almost lost its force) ; to come to, arrive at ; in the N. T. once, tropically : Ro. xvi. 19 (υμών υπακοή etf πάντας άφΊκΐτο your obedi- ence has reached the ears of [A. V. is come abroad unlo^ all men ; Sir. xlvii. 16 eis νήσους άφίκ€το το ονομά σον. Joseph, antt. 19, 1, 16 eh το θίατρον ■ . ■ ύφίκ(το ό λόγος).* ά-ψιλ-άΎαθος, -ον, (α priv. and φιΧάγαθος), ojiposed Ιο goodness and good men, [R. V. no lover of good^ ; found only in 2 Tim. iii. 3.* ά-ψιλ-άργυρο$, -ov, (a priv. and φιλάργυρος), not loving money, not avaricious ; only in the N. T., twice viz. 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Heb. xiii. 5. [Cf. Trench § xxiv.] • άφ-ιξιβ, -foir, ή, (άφικνίημαι), in Grk. Λvrit. generally arrival ; more rarely departure, as Hdt. 9, 17; Dem. 1463, 7; [1484, 8] ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 47; 3 Mace. vii. 18; and so in Acts xx. 29.• αφ-ίστημς ; 1 aor. άπίστησα; 2 aor. άπίστην: Mid., pres. άφίσταμαι, impv. άφίστασο (1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec. ; cf. W. § 14, 1 e.) ; [impf. άφιστάμηνΐ; fut. άποστήσομαι; 1. transitively, in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. active, to make stand off, cause to withdraw, to remove; trop. lo excite to revolt : Acts v. 37 (άπέστησ^ λαόν . . . οπίσω αντον drew away after him ; Tica άπα τίνος. Deut. vii. 4, and in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 76 down). 2. intransitively, in pf., plpf., 2 aor. active, lo stand off, stand aloof, in various senses [as in Grk. writ.] ace. to the context : από with gen. of pers. lo go away, depart, from any one, Lk. xiii. 27 (fr. Ps. vi. 9 ; cf. Jit. vii. 23 ά7Γο;^ωρίίτί άπ' €μοϋ) ; Acts xii. 10 ; xLx. 9 ; lo desert, withdraw from, one. Acts XV. 38 ; lo cease to vex one, Lk. iv. 13 ; Acts v. 38 ; xxii. 29 ; 2 Co. xii. 8 ; to fall away, become faithless, άπο β(οϋ, Heb. iii. 12 ; to shun, flee from, άπο τής άίικίας. 2 Tim. ii. 19. Mid. /ο withdraw one's self from: absol. lo fall away, Lk. viii. 13 : \της πίστιως, 1 Tim. iv. 1, cf. W. 427, 428 (398)] ; lo keep one's self away from, absent one's self from, Lk. ii. 37 (ουκ άφίστατο άπο [Τ Tr ΛΥΗ om. από] ToC Upov, she was in the temple every day) ; from any one's society or fellowship. 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec* άψνω, adv., (akin to αίφνης, see in αιφνίδιος above), sud- denly : Acts ii. 2 ; xvi. 26 ; x.xviii. 6. (Sept. ; [Aeschyl.], Time, and subseq. writ.) * άφόβ««, adv., (φόβος), without fear, boldly: Lk. i. 74 ; Phil.i. 14; 1 Co. xvi. 10; Jude 12. [From Xen. down.] ' άφ-ομοιί», -i> : [pf. pass. ptcp. άφωμοιωμϊνος (on augm. αφοράω 90 αχΚύς see IF//. Αρρ. p. 161)]; to cause a model to pass off (από) into an image or shape like it, — to express itself in it, (cf. άπ€ΐκάζ(ΐΐ', avfiKoviCfiv, άποπ\άσσ<ίν, άπομιμύσθαι); to copy; to produce a J'ac-siiuik ; τά κάΚίκ'ώη, of painters, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 2; often in Plato. Pass, to be made like, rendered similar: so Heb. vii. 3. (Ep. Jer. 4 (5), 62 (G3), 70 (71) ; and in Plato.) • άφ-οράω, -ω ; to turn the ei/es away from other things and fix them on something; cf. άποβ\€πω. trop. to turn one's mind to : e'is rtva, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 6G, 2 d.], (els θ(όν, 4 Maeo. xvii. 10 ; for ex.x. fr. Grk. writ. cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2 p. 8fi"2). Further, cf. aTre'iSov." άψ-ορίζω; impf. άφώρι^οι/ ; Attic (ut. άφοριω Mt. xxv. 32 (T Wll αφορίσω) : xiii. 49, [W. § 13, 1 c. ; B. 37 (32)] ; 1 aor. άφώρισα ; Pass., pf. ptcp. άφωρισμίνος \ 1 aor. impv. άφορίσθητί ; (ορίζω to make a Spot or boundary) ; to mark off' from (ajro) others by boundaries, to limit, to separate : ίαυτόν, from others, Gal. ii. 12; rois μαβητάί, from those unwilling to obey the gospel. Acts .\ix. 9 ; ex μ(σον ηνων, Mt. xiii. 49; άπύ nvos, -X.xv. 32. Pass, in a reflex, sense : 2 Co. vi. 1 7. absol. : in a bad sense, to exclude as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22 ; in a good sense, τίνα (Is n, to appoint, set apart, one for some purpose (to do something), Acts xiii. 2 ; Ro. i. 1 ; τινά foil, by a teUc inf.. Gal. i. 1.5 [(?) seetheComm. adloc.]. ([Soph.], Eur., Plat., Isocr., Dem., Polyb., al. ; very often in Sept. esp. for ν•13Π, η'^Π, D"in, -\JD, etc.) • άψ-ορμή, -ης, ή, (από and ορμή q. v.) ; 1. prop, a place from ichich a movement or attack is made, a base of operations : Thuc. 1, 90 {τήν ΐΙΐΚοπόννησον ττασιν άνα- \ωρησίν τ€ και άφορμήν Ίκανην eiviii) ; Polyb. 1,41,6. 2. metaph. that by ichich endeavor is excited and from ichich it goes forth ; that which gives occasion and supplies matter for an undertaking, the incentive ; the resources we avail ourselves of in attempting or performing anything: Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4 (τοί? (αιτών παισί καλΧΙους άφορμάί (is τον βίον καταλίΐτιονσι), and often in Grk. writ. ; λαμβάν€ΐν, to take occasion, find an incentive, Ro. vii. 8, 11 ; SiSovai, 2 Co. V. 12 ; 1 Tim. v. 14, (3 Maec. iii. 2 ; both phrases often also in Grk. writ.) ; 2Co.xi.l2; Gal.v.l3. Onthemean- ings of this word see Viger. ed. //cnn. p. 81 sq. ; Phryn. ed. Loh. p. 223 sq. ; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 304]. * αφρίζω ; (αφρός) ; to foam : Mk. ix. 18, 20. (Soph. El. 719; Diod. 3, 10; Athen. 11, 43 p. 472 a.; [al.].) [C'OMP. : ('π-αφρίζω.]* άφρόϊ, -ϋΟ, ό, foam: Lk. ix. 39. (Hom. II. 20, 168: [=Ί;]•) * _ άφρασ-ννη. -ης, ή, (άφρων), foolisJiness, folly, senseless- ness : 2 Co. xi. 1, 1 7, 21 ; thoughtlessness, recklessness, Mk. vii. 22. [From Horn, down.]* άφρων, -ovor, 0, 17, -ov, to, (fr. a priv. and φρήν, cf. ev- φρων. σώφρων), [fr. Hom. down], prop, without reason ([ίΐδωλα, Xen. mem. 1, 4, 4] ; of beasts, ibid. 1, 4, 14), senseless, foolUh, stupid ; without reflection or intelligence, acting rashly : Lk. xi. 40 ; xii. 20 ; Ro. ii. 20 ; 1 Co. xv. 36 ; 2 Co. xi. 16, 19 (opp. to φρόνιμος, as in Prov. xi. 29) ; 2 Co. xii. 6,11; Eph. v. 1 7 (opp. to σννιίντις) ; 1 Pet. ii. 15. [A strong term; cf. Schmidt ch. 147 § 17.]* άφ-νττνόω, -ώ : 1 aor. άφύπνωσα ; (ύττνόω to put to sleep, to sleep) ; a. to awaken from sleep (Antliol. Pal. 9, 517, 5). b. to fall asleep, to fall off to sleep : Lk. viii. 23 ; for this the ancient Greeks used καθυπνόω; see Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 224. [Herm. vis. 1,1.]* <ίφ-«<ΓΤ€ρί'ω, -ω : (a later Grk. word) ; 1. to be be- hindhand, come too late (από so as to be far from, or to fail, a person or thing) ; used of persons not present at the right time : Polyb. 22, 5, 2 ; Posidon. ap. Athen. 4, 37 (i. e. 4 p. 151 e.) ; [al.]; άποάγαβήςήμίρας io ia\\ (to make use of) a good day, to let the opportunity pass by. Sir. xiv. 14. 2. transitively, to cause to fait, to wilh- dra'c, take away from, defraud: τό μάννα σου ούκ άφυστί- ρησας άπο στόματος αυτών, Nell. ix. 20 (for^'JO to with- hold) ; pf. pass. [jtcp. άφνστ^ρημίνος (μισθός), Jas. v. 4 Ϊ Tr λ\ΓΙ after SB', [Rec. άπ(στ(ρημίνος, see άποστ(- ρίω, also s. v. από, Π. 2 d. bb., p. όΟ"•].* άφωνος, -ov, (φωνή), voiceless, dumb ; without the faculty of speech ; used of idols, 1 Co. xii. 2 (cf. Ps. cxv. 5 (cxiii. 13) ; Hab. ii. 18) ; of beasts, 2 Pet. ii. 16. 1 Co. xiv. 10 τοσαΰτα "^ίνη φωνών και ovhev αντών [L Τ Tr AVII om. αύτ.'] άφωνον, i. e. there is no language destitute of the power of language, [R. Λ'. txt. tio kind (of voice) i's with- out signification'], (cf. the phrases βίος αβίωτος a life un- worthy of the name of life, χάρις άχαρις), used of one that is patiently silent or dumb : αμνός. Acts viii. 32 fr. Is. liii. 7. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theog.], Pind., Aeschyl. down.)* "Αχαξ [WH Άχας], 6, (so Sept. for ΙΠΚ possessing, pos- sessor; in Joseph. Άχάζης, -ου, ό), Ahaz, king of Judah, [fr. c. B. c. 741 to c. B. c. 725 ; cf. B. D. s. v. Israel, king- dom of], (2 K. xvi. 1 s(jq. ; 2 Chr. xxviii. 16 sqq. ; Is. vii. 1 sqq.) : Mt. i. 9.' ΆχοΙα [WH ΆχαΙα (see I, 1)], -as, ή, Achaia; 1. in a restricted sense, the maritime region of northern Peloponnesus. 2. in a broader sense, fr. b. c. 146 on [yet see Diet, of Geog. s. v.], a Roman province em- bracing all Greece except Thessaly. So in the N. T. : Acts xviii. 12, 27 ; xix. 21 ; Ro. xv. 26 ; xvi. 5 Rec. ; 1 Co. xvi. 15; 2 Co.i. 1; Lx. 2 ; xi. 10; 1 Th. i. 7 sq. [B. D. .s. v.] • Αχαϊκό», -oC, ό, Achaicus, the name of a Christian of Corinth : 1 Co. xvi. 1 7.• άχάρισ-ΓΟϊ, -ov, (χαρίζομαι), ungracious ; a. unpleasing (Hom. Od. 8, 236 ; 20, 392; Xen. oec. 7, 37 ; al.). b. unthankful (so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 1, 90 down) : Lk. vi. 35 ; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (Sir. xxix. 1 7 ; Sap. xvi. 29.) * ["Axas, Mt. i. 9 WH ; see'Axaf.] Άχ6£μ, ό, Achim, prop, name of one of the ancestors of Christ, not mentioned in the O. T. : Mt. i. 14.* ά-χ£ΐρο-ΐΓοίητο5, -ov, (χιιροποίητος, q. v.), not made with hands : Mk. .xiv. 58 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; Col. ii. 1 1 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor in the Sept. [W. §34. 3].)* [Άχελδαμόχ : Acts i. 19 Τ Tr for R G Άκ(\8αμά q. v.] άχλύϊ, -ίος, ή, a mist, dimness, (Lat. caligo), esp. over the eyes, (a poetic word, often in Hom. ; then in Hesiod, Aeschyl. ; in prose writ. fr. [Aristot. meteor. 2, 8 p. 367', axpeiot 91 άψνχ^ο<; η etc. and] Polyb. 34, 11, 15 on; [of a cataract, Dios- cor. Cf. Trench § c.]) : Acts xiii. 1 1 . (Joseph, antt. 9, 4, 3 raff των πολίμίωυ ολ/^€ι? άμαυρώσαί τον 6f6v παϋίκάλ€ί άχλυν αυταΐς (πιβαλόντα. Metaph. of the minil, Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 1, li άχ\ύο! γίμιιν.) * d-Xpcios, -ov, (xpdus useful), useless, good for nouting: ;Mt. .XXV. 30 (SoCXot, cf. Plat. Ale. i. 17 p. 122 b. των οΐκίτών τον άχρ€ΐότατον) ; by an hyperbole of pious mod- esty in Lk. -wii. 10 'the servant' calls himself άχρ(Ίον, because, although he has done all, yet he has done noth- ing except what he ο u g h t to have done ; accordingly he possesses no m e r i t, and could only claim to be called 'projilahle,' should he do more than what he is bound to do; cf. Bengel ad loc. (Often in firk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; Xen. mem. 1, 2, 54 άχρΰον κα\ άνωφιλί!. Sept. 2 S. vi. 22 equiv. to Ssu low, base.) [Syn. cf. Tittmann ii. p. 11 sq. ; Ellic. on Philem. 11.]* άχρ€ΐόω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ηχρ^ιωθην : (^άχρΐΐος, q. v.) ; to make useless, render unserviceable : of character, Ro. iii. 12 (fr. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 3), where L mrg. Τ Tr WH read ηχριώθησαν fr. the rarer 3χρ€ος i. q. άχριΊος. (Several times prop, in Polyb.) * ί-χρη<ΓΤ05, -ov, {χρηστός, and this fr. χράομαι), uselesn, unproftable : Philem. 11 (here opp. to ei;(p7)aTor). (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. [i. e. Batrach. 70 ; Theogn.] down.) [Sym. cf. Tittmann ii. 1 1 sq. ; Trench § c. 17; EUic. on Philem. 11.]* άχρι and αχριβ (the latter of which in the ϊί. Τ. is nowhere placed before a consonant, but the former be- fore both vowels and consonants, although euphony is so far regarded that we almost constantly find άχρι ης ήμίρας, ΰχρις ου, cf. Β. 10 (9) ; [W. 42] ; and άχρι ου is not used except in Acts vii. 18 and Rev. ii. 2.0 by L Τ Tr WII and Lk. xxi. 24 by Τ Tr WH ; [to these in- stances must now be added 1 Co. xi. 26 Τ WH ; xv. 25 Τ WH ; Ro. xi. 25 WH (see their App. p. 148) ; on the usage in secular authors (' where -pt is the only Attic form, but in later auth. the Epic -pis prevailed ', L. and 5. s. v.) cf. Loheck, Pathol. Elementa, vol. ii. p. 210 sq. ; Rutherford, New Phrjn. p. 64 ; further, Klolz ad Devar. vol. ii. 1 p. 230 sq.]); a particle indicating the terminus ad quem. (On its use in the Grk. writ. cf. Klotz u. s. p. 224 sqq.) It has the force now of a prep, now of a conj., even to ; until, to the lime that ; (on its derivation see below). 1. as a Preposition it takes the gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6], and is used a. of Place: Acts xi. 5 ; xiii. 6 ; xx. 4 [T Tr mrg. WH om., Tr txt. br.] ; xxviii. 15 ; 2 Co. X. 13 sq. ; Heb. iv. 12 (see μερισμός, 2) ; Rev. xiv. 20; xviii. 5. b. of Time: άχρι καιροϋ, until a sea- son that seemed to him opportune, Lk. iv. 13 [but cf. καιρός, 2 a.] ; until a certain time, for a season. Acts xiii. 1 1 ; [πχρι (vel μίχρι, q• v. la.) toC θ(ρισμοϋ, Mt. .xiii. SO WH mrg. cf. ΐως, II. δ] : άχρι ης ήμίρας until the day that etc. Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20: xvii. 27; Acts i. 2; [άχρι (Rec. et al. ίως) της ήμίρας ης, -\cts i. 22 Tdf.] ; ίχρι ταύτης της ήμίρας and άχρι της ήμΐρας ταύτης. Acts ii. 29 ; xxiii. 1 ; xxvi. 22 ; άχρι [-ρις R G] ήμιρών wiWe even to the space of five days, i. e. after [A. V. in] five days, Acts xx. 6 ; άχρις [-pi Τ Tr \VH] aiyijs, .\cts xx. 1 1 ; ivoi ToC viv, Ro. viii. 22; Phil. i. 5; άχρι Te'Aout. Heb. vi. 11 ; Rev. ii. 26 ; see besides. Acts iii. 21 ; [xxii. 22] ; Ro. i. 13 ; V. 13 ; 1 Co. iv. 11; 2 Co. iii. 14 ; Gal iv. 2 ; Phil. i. 6 [-pt L Τ WH]. c. of Manner and Degree: άχρι θανάτου. Acts xxii. 4 (even to delivering unto death) ; Rev. ii. 1 (to the enduring of death itself) ; Rev. xii. 11 ; and, in the opinion of many interpreters, Heb. iv. 12 [see μερισμός, 2]. d. joined to the rel. ου (άχρις oS for άχρι τούτου, ω) it has the force of aconjunc- tion, until, to the time that : foil, by the indie, pret., of tilings that actually occurred and up to the beginning of which something continued. Acts vii. 18 {άχρις ου άνοστη βασιλίύς) ; xxvii. 33. foil, by a subj. aor. having the force of a fut. pf., Lk. xxi. 24 L Τ Tr WH ; Ro. xi. 25 ; 1 Co. xi. 26 [Rec. άχρις ου άν'] ; Gal. iii. 1 9 [not WH t.xt. (see 2 below)]; iv. 19 [T Tr WH μίχρις^; Rev. vii. 3 Rec.**^ G ; άχρις ου άν until, whenever it may be [cf. W. § 42, 5 b.], 1 Co. xv. 25 [Rec] ; Rev. ii. 25. with indie, pres. as long as : Heb. iii. 13 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. and B. 231 (199). 2. άχρις whhout ου has the force of a simple Conjunction, until, to the time that: foil, by subj. aor., Lk. xxi. 24 R G; Rev. vii. 3 L Τ Tr WH ; xv. 8 ; [xvii. 1 7 Rec] ; xx. 3, [5 '^ L Τ Tr WH] ; with indie, fut., Rev. xvii. 17 [L Τ Tr WH] ; [a;(pit άν foil, by subj. aor.. Gal. iii. 19 WH txt. (see 1 d. above)]. Since άχρι is akin to άκή and άκρος [but cf. Vanicek p. 22; Curtius § 166], and μίχρι to μήκος, μακρός, by the use of the former particle the reach to which a thing is said to extend is likened to a height, by the use of μίχρι, to a length; άχρι, indicating ascent, signifies up to; μίχρι, indicating e.xtent, is unto, as far as ; cf. Klotz u. s. p. 225 sq. But this primitive distinction is often disregarded, and each particle used of the same thing; cf. άχρι τίλους, Heb. vi. 11; μίχρι reXour, ibid. iii. 6, 14 ; Xen. sym p. 4, 37 ττ^ρί^στΊ μοι και (σθΊοντι άχρι τοΰ μη ττΐΐνην άφικίσθαι και ηίνοντι μίχρι τοΰ μη δί^/^μ. Cf. Fritz- sche on Ro. v. 13, vol. i. p. 308 sqq. ; [Ellic. on 2 Tim. ii. 9. Άχρι occurs 20 times in the writings of Luke ; else- where in the four Gospels only in Mt. .xxiv. 38.].* άχυρον, -ου, τό, a stalk of grain from which the kernel! have been beaten out j straiv broken up by a threshing machine, chaff: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. (In Grk. writ, fr. Hdt. 4, 72 ; Xen. oec. 18. 1, 2, 6 down ; mostly in plur. τα άχυρα; in Job xxi. 18 Sept. also of the chaff wont to be driven away by the wind.) * ά-ψ£υ8ήΐ, -er, (i/ceC8of), without lie, truthful : Tit. i. 2. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. theog. 233 down.) • άφινθοΐ. -ου, η, wormwood. Absinthe: Rev. viii. 11; ό ήψικίοΕ ibid, is given as a prop, name to the star which fell into the waters and made them bitter.' άφυχο9, -ov. (ψυχή), without a soul, lifeless : 1 Co. xiv. 7. (In Grk. writ, from [Archil., Simon, and] Aeschylus down.) • 92 Β Βαα\ Βαάλ [so accented also by Pape (Eigenn. s. v.), Kue- nen and Cobct (Ro. as below) ; but L Τ (yet the name of the mon tli, 1 K. vi. 5 (38), Βαάλ) Tr \VH etc. Βάαλ ; so Etym. Magn. 194, 19; Suid. 174G a. etc. Dind. in Stcph. Thesaur. s. v. Βάαλ or Βαάλ], ό, ή, an indecl. noun (Ilebr. '7;•3, Chald. "73 contr. fr. ^i'2), lor,/: Ro. xi. 4. Tills was the name of the supreme heavenly divinity worshipped by the Sheniitic nations (the Phtcniciaus, Canaanites, liabylouians, Assyrians), often also by the Israelites themselves, and represented by the Sun: tj Βαάλ, Ro. xi. 4. Cf. Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v. and J. G. Mailer in Herzog i. p. «37 sqcj. ; Merx in Schen- kel i. 322 sqq.; Schlollmann in Riehm p. 126 sq. Since In this form the supreme power of nature generating all things, and conseipiently a male deity, was wor- shipped, with which the female deity Astarte Avas as- sociated, it is hard to explain ivhy the Sept. in some places say ό Βαί^"» (Num. xxii. 41 ; Judg. ii. 13; 1 K. xvi. 31 ; xi.x. 18, etc.), in others ή Βαύλ (llos. ii. 8 ; 1 S. vii. 4, etc. [yet see Dillmann, as below, p. CI 7]). Among the various conjectures on this subject the easiest is this: that the Sept. called the deity ή Βαάλ in derision, as weak and ini po ten t, just as the Arabs call idols goddesses and the Rabbins niil'7X ; so Gfsenius in Rosenmiiller's Repert. i. p. 139 and Tholuck on Ro. I.e.; [yet cf. Dillmann, as below, p. 602 ; for other opinions and reff. see Meyer ad loc. ; cf. W. § 27, 6 N. 1. But Prof. Dillmann shows (in the Monatsbericht d. Akad. zu Berlin, 16 Juni 1881, p. 601 sqq.), that the Jews (just as they abstained from pronouncing the word Jehovah) avoided uttering the abhorred name of Baal (Ex. xxiii. 13). As a substitute in Aramaic they read nii'D, X/m or Χ"Ι3Π3, and in Greek αίσχϋνη (cf. 1 K. xviii. 19, 25). This substitute in Grk. was suggested by the use of the fem. article. Hence we find in the Sept. ή Β. every- where in the prophetic bks. Jer., Zeph., Hos., etc., while in the Pentateuch it does not prevail, nor even in Judges, Sam., Kings, (exc. 1 S. vii. 4 ; 2 K. xxi. 3). It disap- pears, too, (when the worship of Baal had died out) in the later versions of Aq., Sym., etc. The apostle's use in Ro. 1. c. accords with the sacred custom ; cf. the substi- tution of the Ilebr. ΠΕ/3 in Ish-bosheth, Mephi-bosheth, etc. 2 S. ii. 8, 10 ; iv. 4 with 1 Chr. viii. 33, 34, also 2 S. xi. 21 with Judg. vi. 32; etc.]* Βαβυλών, -ώνοΓ, ή, (Hebr. S33 fr. SSa to confound, ace. to Gen. xi. 9 ; cf. Aeschyl. Pers. .52 ^αβυλων δ" ή τιοΚύ- χρυσο! πάμμικτον όχΚον ■πίμττίΐ σνρ8ην. But more cor- rectly, as it seems, fr. Ss 3X3 the gate i. e. the court or city of Belus [Assyr. Bab-H the Gate of God; (perh. of n, the supreme God) ; cf. Schroder, Keilinschr. u. d. βαθύνω Alt. Test. 2te Aufl. p. 127 sq. ; Oppert in the Zeitsch. d. Deutsch. Morg. (xesellschaft, viii. p. S Jo]), Buliijlon, formerly a very celebrated and large cit;•, the residence of the Babylonian kings, situated on both banks of the Euphrates. Cyrus had formerly captured it, but Darius llystaspis threw down its gales and walls, and Xerxes destroyed [?J the temple of Belus. At length the city was reduced almost to a solitude, the popidation hav- ing been drawn off by the neighboring Seleucia, built on the Tigris by Seleueus Nicanor. [Cf. Prof. Rawlin- son in B. D. s. v. and his Herodotus, vol. i. Essays vi. and viii., vol. ii. Essay iv.J The name is used in tUu N. T. 1. of the city itself: Acts vii. 43; 1 Pet. V. 13 (where some have understood Babylon, a small town in Egypt, to be referred to ; but in opposition cf. Maijerliaff, Einl. in die petrin. Schriften, p. 121! sqq.; [cf. 3 fin. below]). 2. of the territory. Babylonia: Mt. i. 11 sq. 17; [often so in Grk. writ.]. 3. alle- goricallv, of Rome as the most corrupt seat of idolatry and the enemy of Christianity : Rev. xiv. 8 [here Rec."'' Βα/ίουλών] ; xvi. 19; xvii. 5; xviii. 2, 10, 21, (in the opiniim of some 1 Pet. v. 13 also; [cf. 1 fin. above]).* βαθ('ως, adv., deeply : ορθρην βαθίωι sc. Svtos (cf. Bnhdy. p. 338), deep in the morning, at early dawn, Lk. xxiv. 1 L Τ Tr WH ; so Meyer ad loc. But βαθίωί here is more correctly taken as the Attic form of the gen. fr. βαθύς, q. v.; cf. B. 2G (23); [Loh. Phryn. p. 247].• βαθμός, -ov, 6, (fr. obsol. βάω i. (j. βαίνω, like σταθμός [fr. 1-στη-μι]), threshold, uteji ; of a grade of dignit)• and wholesome influence in the church, [R. V. slandiny'], 1 Tim. iii. 13 [cf. Ellic. ad loc.]. (Used by [Sept. 1 S. v. 5 ; 2 K. XX. 9 ; also Sir. vi. 36] ; Strabo, [Plut.], Leian., Appian, Artemid., [al.] ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324.) * βάθος, -eot (-ουί), τό, (connected with the obsol. verb βάζω, βάω [but cf. Curtius § 635; Vanit'ek p. 195]; cf. βαθύς, βάσσων, and ό βυθός, ό βυσσός ; Germ. Boden), depth, heifjht, — [ace. as measured down or up] ; 1. prop. : Mt. xiii. 5 ; Mk. iv. 5 ; Ro. viii. 39 (opp. to ΰψωμα) ; Eph. iii. 18 (opp. to v^os) ; of ' the deep ' sea (the ' high seas '), Lk. v. 4. 2. metaph. : ή κατά βάθους πτωχίία αυτών, deep, extreme, poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 ; τα βάθη τοΰ θ(οϋ the deep things of God, things hidden and above man's scrutiny, esp. the divine counsels, 1 Co. ii. 10 (τοΰ Σατακά. Rev. ii. 24 Rec. ; καρδίας ανθρώπου, .Tudith viii. 14; Ιταβ.τήςθ(ίας•/νώσ(ως,01βτη. Rom. 1 Cor. 40,1 (cf. Lfhtft. ad loc.)]) ; inexhaustible abundance, immense amount, πλούτου, Ro. xi. 33 (so also Soph. Aj. 130 ; βαθίις πλοΟτοΓ, Ael. v. h. 3, 18; κακών, [Aeschyl. Pers. 465, 712]; Eur. Hel. 303; Sept. Prov. xviii. 3).* βαβνν» : [impf. ίβάθυνον'] ; (βαΰΰς) ; to make deep : Lk. βαθύς 93 βάΧΚω vi. 48, where ίσκαψι και (βάθνν^ is not used for βαθίω^ ίσκαψ(, but ΐβάθννί expresses the continuation of tlie work, [he dug and deepened i. e. went deep] ; cf . W. § 54, 5. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * βαθύ;, -fi I, -ύ, [cf. βάθοί], deep ; prop. : Jn. iv. 11. metaph. : invos, a deep sleep. Acts xx. 9 (Sir. xxii. 7 ; often also in Grk. -writ.) ; όρθροι (see βαθίωί), Lk. xxiv. 1 ([Arstpli. vesp. '.iie J ; Plat. Crito 43 a. ; Polyaen. 4, 9, 1 ; cTt βαθιοί όρθρου, Plat. Prot. 310 a. [cf. also Pliilo de mutat. nom. § 30; de vita Moys. i. § 32]) ; τά /3u5i'a ToO 2αται/3, Rev. ii. 24 (G L Τ Tr WII ; cf. βάθοί).' βαίον [al. also βάϊον (or even βαίον, Chandler ed. 1 p. 272) ; on its deriv. (fr. the Egyptian) cf. Step/i. Thesaur. s. v. /3uis], -oi;, TO, a palm-branch ; with των φοινίκων added [so Test. xii. Patr. test. Naph. § 5] (after the fashion of oiKO^fanorrjs rrjs οικίας, νττοπόδίον των ττο^ών, [cf. λ\ . G03 (5G1)]), Jn. xii. 13. (A bibl. and eccles. word : 1 Mace, xiii. 51 ; Cant. vii. 8 Symm. ; Lev. xxiii. 40 unknown trans. In tlie Grk. church Palm-Sunday is called ή κυριακη των βαΐων. Cf. Fischer, De vitiis Le.xx. N. T. p. 18 scjq. ; \^Slnr:, Dial. Maced. etc. p. 88 sq. ; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)* Βαλαάμ, ή, indecl., (in Sept. for D>;S3, ace. to Gesenius [" perhaps "] fr. '73 and Di' non-populus, i. e. foreign ; ace. to Jo. Simonis equiv. to D>J i''^? a swallowing up of the people; in Joseph, ό Βάλαμος), Balaam (or Bileam), a native of Pethor a city of Mesopotamia, endued by .Je- hovah with prophetic power. He was hired by Balak (see Βαλάκ) to curse the Israelites ; and influenced by the love of reward, he wished to gratify Balak ; but he was compelled by .Jehovah's power to bless them (Niun. xxii.- xxiv. ; Deut. xxiii. 5 sq. ; Josh. xiii. 22 ; xxiv. 9 ; Mic. vi. 5). Hence the later .Tews saw in him a most abandoned deceiver: Rev. ii. 14; 2Pet. ii. 15; .Tude 11. Cf. Win. RWB.[andBB.DD.]8.v.• Βαλάκ, 0, indecl., (p^S empty [so Gesen. in his Thesaur., but in his later works he adopts (with Fiirst et al.) an act. sense ' one who makes empty,' ' a devastator,' ' spoUer ' ; see BD. Am. ed. s. v.]), Balak, king of the Moabites (Num. xxii. 2 sq. and elsewhere) : Rev. ii. 14.* βαλάντιον and βάΚλάντιον (so L Τ Tr WH ; cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 79] ; Fritzsche on Mk. p. G20 ; W. p. 43 ; Pasxou; Lex. [also L. and .S.] s. v.), -ov, τά, a money-bar/, purse : Lk. X. 4 ; xii. 33 ; xxii. 35 sq. (Sept. .Job xiv. 1 7 cf. [Simon. 181]; Arstph. ran. 772; Xen. symp. 4, 2; Plat. Gorg. p. 508 e. ; Hdian. 5, 4, 4 [3 ed. Bekk.], and other writ.) • βάλλω; fut. βα\ώ; γιί. βίβληκα; 2 aor. ίβαΧον (3 pers. plur. ίβά\ον in Lk. xxiii. 34 ; Acts xvi. 23, ίβαλαν. the Alex, form, in Acts .\vi. 37 L Τ Tr WH ; [Rev. xviii. 19 Lchm., see WH. App. p. 1G5 and] for reff. άηίρχημαι init.) ; Pass., [pres. βύλλομηι] ; pf. βίβΧημαι ; plpf. f'^i- βΚήμην; I ΆΟΤ. ίβΧήθην; 1 fut. βληθησομαι ; In ihrow, either with force, or without force yet with a purpose, or even carelessly; 1. with force and effort: βάλ\€ΐν Tiva ραηίσμασι to smite one with slaps, to buffet. Mk. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, τίνα βή\- Xfii/ \ίθοις, /StXfCTi, To^oif, etc., κακοί?, ψογω, σκώμμασι, etc., in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow i. p. 487 ; [L. and S. s. v. T. 1 and 3] ; for the Rec. ϊβαΧΚον we must read with Fritzsche and Schott ίβάλον, fr. which arose (XajSor, adopted by L Τ Ί r W'U ; /iaXeix and \αβ(1ν are often confounded in codd. : cf. (jrimni on 2 Mace. v. G ; [.Scriv- ener, Introd. p. 10]) ; βά\λfιv λίθους ΐπί τινι or τίνα, .In. viii. (7), 59; χουν fjiX rat «φαλάί, Rev. xviii. 19 [WH mrg. (πίβ.] ; κονιορτ'ον ds τϋν άίρα. Acts x.xii. 23 ; τι eic την θάλασσαν, Mk. ix. 42 ; Rev. viii. 8 ; xviii. 21 ; tU τό nip, Mt. iii. 1 ; xviii. 8 ; Lk. iii. 9 ; Mk. ix. 22 ; Jn. xv. 6 ; fi's κλίβανον, Mt. vi. 30 ; Lk. xii. 28 ; (tt yetmav, Mt. v. [29], 30 [R G] ; Mk. ix. 47 ; els τ. γήν. Rev. viii. 5, 7 ; xii. 4, 9, 13; eisT. ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 19; f is τ. λιμι/ήκ. Rev. xix. 20 ; .XX. 10, 14 sq. ; els r. αβυσσον. Rev. xx. 3 ; absol. and in the pass, to be violently displaced from .• position gained. Rev. xii. 10 L Τ Tr WH. an attack of disease is said βάKλeιv τινά els κλινην, Rev. ii. 22 : Pass, to lie sici abed, be prostrated hij sickness : βίβλημαι e'rr'i κλίνης. Mt. Lx. 2 ; Mk. vii. 30 [R G L mrg.] ; with ίπ'ι κ\ίvηs omitted, Mt. viii. 6, 14, cf. Lk. xvi. 20 ; rira els φυλακην, to cast one into prison, Mt. v. 25; .xviii. 30; Lk. .xii. 58; xxiii. 19 [R G L], 25 ; Jn. iii. 24 ; Acts xvi. 23 sq. 37 ; Rev. ii. 10 ; [_β. eVt Tiva την xe'ipa or τάς xelpas to latj hand or hands on one, apprehend him, .In. vii. 44 L Tr WH, also ."JO L mrg.] ; hpevavov els yrjv to appl}• with force, thrust in, the sickle. Rev. xiv. 19 ; μάχαφαν βάλλeιv (to cast, send) ί'ττΐ τ. -γην. Mt. χ. 34, which phrase gave rise to another foimd in die same passage, viz. Λρηνην βάλ\. «VI τ. yffv to east (send) peace ; ΐξω, to cast out or forth : Mt. v. 13 ; xiii. 48 ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ; 1 Jn. iv. 18 ; Jn. χ v. 6 ; ίαυτον κάτω to cast one's self down : Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9 ; eavTov els τ. θάλασσαν, Jn. xxi. 7 ; pass, in a reflex, sense [B. 52 (4.5)], βλήθητι, Mt. xxi. 21 ; Mk. .xi. 23; τί άφ' eauToi to cast a thing from one's self, throw it away : Mt. V. 29 sq. ; xviii. 8 ; ύδωρ e'x τοϋ στόματος. Rev. xii. 15 sq. (eoii out of his mouth, Luther scho.is aus ihrem Munde) ; ίνώπιον with gen. of place, to cast before (eagerly lay down). Rev. iv. 10; of a tree casting its fruit because violently shaken by the wind, Rev. vi. 13. Intrans. to rush (throw one'sself[cl. AV. 251 (236) ; 381 (357) note'; B. 145 (127)]) : Acts xxvii. 14 ; (Hom. E. II, 722 ; 23, 462, and other writ. ; [cf. L. and S. s. v. ΙΠ. 1]). 2. without force and effort; to throic or let go of a Ihini/ without caring where it falls : κληρον to cast a lot into the urn [B. D. s. v. Lot], Mt. xxvu. 35 ; Mk. xv. 24; Lk. xxiii. 34 ; Jn. xLx. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19 ; («cv/Souf, Plat, legg. 12 p. 968 e. and in other writ.), to scatter: κάπρια [Rec." κοπρίανί, Lk. xiii. 8 ; seed twi τής γης, Mk. iv. 26 ; its κηπον, Lk. xiii. 1 9. to throw, cast, into : άμγΰριον els τον κορβανάν [L mrg. Tr mrg. κορβάν], Mt. xxvii. G ; ;^αλκόΐ', haipa, etc., els το γαζοφυλάκιον, Mk. xii. 41^4 ; Lk. xxi. 1-4, cf. .In. xii. 6. βάλλeιv τί Tivt, to throw, cast, a thing to: τΰκ ΪΊρτον to'is Kvvaplois. Mt. xv. 26 ; Mk. vii. 27; eμ1τpoσθίv Tivos, Mt. Λ'ϋ. G; ίνωΈΐόν Ttvos, Rev. ii. 14 (sec σκάν^αλον, b. /3.) ; to gire orer to one's care uncertain about the result : apyipiov τοις τpaπeζlτa^s, to deposit, Mt. XXV. 27. of fluids, to pour, to pour in : foil, by els, Mt. be. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37; Jn. xiii. 5, (oivov els top πίθον, Epictet. 4,13,12; of rivers, βόον els όλα. Αρ. Rhixl. 2, 401, etc. : Sept. Judg. vi. 19 [Aid.. Compl.]) ; to pour βατΓτίζω 94 βάτΓΤοσμα out, fiii Tfvot, Mt. xxvi. 12. 3. to move, give motion to, not with force yet with attention and for a pur- pose; (Xs Ti, to put into, insert : Mk. vii. .'Hi (rovs δακτύλου? tiff τα ωτα) ; Jn. XX. 25, 27 ; xviii. 1 1 ; χ^άλίνονς ίΐς το σπιμα-, Jas. iii. 3 ; to let down, cast down : Jn. v. 7 ; Mt. iv. 1 8 [cf. Mk. i. 16 Rec.] ; Mt. xvii. 27. Metaph. : fit την καρ&ί- Qv τινός, to auf/f/est, Jn. xiii. 2 (τ1 tv θνμώ τίνος-, Horn. Od. 1, 201 ; 14, 2(;9; (Ις νουν, .schol. ad Pind. Pyth. 4, 133; al. ; ϊμβΆλιιν ei's νουν τινι, Plut. vit. Timol. c. 3). [CoMP. : αμφι-, άνα-, άι^ι-, άπο-, δια-, €Κ-, €μ-, ηαρ-^μ-, cm-, κατά-, μ€τα-, πάρα-, nfpt-, προ-, συ/χ-, υπ€ρ-, υπο-βά\\ω.} βαΐΓτίζω; [iiupi. ϊβάτττιζον^; fut. βαπτίσω; 1 aor. c'/Su- ίττιτα ; Pass., [pres. βατιτί^ο/ιαι] ; inipf. {'ίίαπτι^ϋμτ;!'; ]>t. l)tfp. β(βαπτίσμίνος\ 1 Άον. ϊβαπτίσθην; 1 fut. βαπτισθή- σομαι ; 1 aor. mid. ίβαπτισάμην ; (frcqufnt. [?] fr. βάπτω, like βαΧΧίζω fr. βάλλω) ; here and there in Phit., Polyb., Dioil., Strab., Joseph., Phit., al. I. 1. prop. /» dip repeatedly, to immerge, suhmcrr/c, (of vessels sunk, Polyb. 1, 51, 6 ; 8, 8, 4 ; of animals, Diod. 1, 36). 2. to cleanse by dipping or submerging, to wash, to make clean with water ; in the mid. and the 1 aor. pass, to icash one's self, bathe ; so Mk. vii. 4 [where AVH txt. ρακτι'σωιται] ; Lk. xi. 38, (2 K. v. 14 (βαπτίσατο ev τω 'lophavrj, for IDU ; Sir. xxxi. (x.xxiv.) 30; Judith xii. 7). 3. metaph. to orerfrhelni, as ι^ιώτας ταΐς (ΙσφοραΙς, Diod. 1,73; υφλημασι, Plut. Galba 21 ; rji συμφορά βιβαπτισμίνος, Helidd. Aetli. 2, 3 ; and alone, to inflict ^^i-eat and abounding calamities on one : (βάπτισαν την πολιν, Joseph, b. j. 4, 3, 3 ; ^ ανομία μ( βαπτίζίΐ. Is. xxi. 4 Sept. ; hence βαπτίζ(σθαι βάπτισμα (cf. W. 225 (211) ; [B. 148 (129)] ; cf. λούίσθαι τά λου- τρόν, Ael. de nat. an. 3, 42), to be overwlielmed tcith ca- lamities, of those who must bear them, Mt. xx. 22 sq. Rec. ; Mk. X. 38 sq. : Lk. xii. 50, (cf. the Germ, elwas aitszubaden hahen, and the use of the word e. <;. respectinp; those who cross a river with difficulty, ΐως των μαστών οι π(ζο\ βα- πτιζύμ(νοι 8ΐίβαινον. Polyb. 3, 72, 4 ; [for exx. see Soph. Lex. s. V. ; also T. ./. Conant, Baptizein, its meaning and use, N. Y. 1864 (printed also as an App. to their revised version of the Gosp. of Mt. by the " Am. Bible Union ") ; and esp. four works by J. W. Dale entitled Classic, Ju- daic, Johannic, Christie, Baptism, Phil. 18i;7 s()q. ; D. B. Ford, Studies on the Bapt. Quest, (including a review of Dr. Dale's works), Bost. 1.S79]). II. In the N. T. it is used particularly of the rite of sacred ablution, first in- stituted by John the Baptist, afterwards by Christ's com- nianil received by Christians and adjusted to the con- tents and nature of their religion (see βάπτισμα, 3), viz. an immersion in water, performed as a sign of the re- moval of sin, and administered to those who, impelled by a : Acts xxviii. 27, (Is. vi. 10). [From Hdt. on.]* Βαρθολομαιοε, -ου, ό, ("ο'^ΓΙ "'S son of Tolmai), Bar- tholomew, one of the twelve apostles of Christ : Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 14; Acts i. 13. [See ΐίαθαναήλ ana BB.DD.] • BapLTfaow 96 βασιΧΐία Βαρ-ιησον$, ό, (13 son, yw_ Jesus), Bar-Jc.tus, a cer- tain false prophet : Acts xiii. 6 [where Tdf . -σοΟ ; see his note. Cf. ΈλίμαΓ].* Βαρ-ιωνάς, -α [cf. Β. 20 (17sf|.)], ό, (fr. 13 son, and njv Jonali [al. [ jnv i. e. Johanan, Jona, John ; cf. Mey. on Jn. i. 42 (43) and Lghtft. as below]), Bar-Jonah [or Bar-./nna.•''], the surname of the apostle Peter : Mt. xvi. 1 7 [L Τ WII ; in Jn. i. 42 (43) ; x.\i. 15 sqq. son of John ; see Lghlfi. Fresh Revision, etc., p. 159 note (Am. ed. p. 137 note)] ; see in βΑρ and Ίωνά;, 2.* Βορνάβαβ, -a [Β. 20 (18)], ό, (13 son, and N3: ; ace. to Luke's interpretation v\bs -παρακΚήσίω!, i. e. excelling in the power τηί παρακΚήσιωί, Acts iv. 3t; ; see παράκΧησα, 5), Baniahiis, the surname of Joses [better Josejih], a Levite, a native of Cyprus. He was a distinguished teacher of the Christian religion, and a companion and colleague of Paul: Acts ix. 27; xi. 22, [25 Rec], 30; xii. 25 ; xiii.-xv. ; 1 Co. ix. G ; Gal. ii. 1, 9, 13 ; Col. iv. 10.* papos, -foi, TO. heaviness, weir/ht, burden, trouble : load, (πιτιθίνηι τιν'ι (Xen. oec. 1 7, !)), to impose upon one dilH- cult rcipiirements, Acts xv. 28 ; βαΚΧΐί" itti τίνα. Rev. ii. 24 (where the meaning is, ' I put upon you no other in- junction which it might be dillicult to observe'; cf. Dusterdieck ad loc.) ; βαστάζ(ΐν το βάροί τινός, i. e. either the burden of a thing, as to βάρος τψ ήμίρας the weari- some labor of the day Mt. xx. 12, or that which a [lerson bears, as in Gal. vi. 2 (where used of troublesome moral taults; the meaning is, 'bear one another's faults'). αΐώνιον βάρος δόξης a weight of glory never to cease, i. e. vast and transcendent glory (blessedness), 2 Co. iv. 17; cf. W. § 34, 3 ; (πλούτου, Plut. Alex. M. 48). wei//hl i. q. aulhority : ev βάρα elvai to have authority and influence, 1 Th. ii. 7 ((1), (so also in Grk. writ.; cf. Wesselinr/ on Diod. Sic. 4, lil ; [exx. in Suidas s. v.]). [Syn. see oyicos.] * Βαρσαβ<κ 1-σαβ3άς LTTrWII; see WH. App. p. 159], -5 [B. 20 (l.S) . a, Barsabas [or Barsabbas] (i. e. son of Saba [al. Zaba ) ; 1. the surname of a certain Joseph : Acts i. 23, [B. D. s. v. Joseph Barsabas]. 2. the surname of a certain Judas : Acts xv. 22, [B. D. s. v. Judas Barsabas].• BafHrCp.aio$ [Tdf. -μαϊος, yet cf. Chandler § 253], -ov, 6, (son of Timsus), Barlimceus, a certain bUnd man : ilk. X. 46.• βαρύνω: to icerqh dotcn, overcharrje : Lk. xxi. 34 (1 aor. pass, suh].) βαρννθώα IV Rec. [cf. W. 83 (80) ; Β. 54 (47)], for βαρηθώσιν, see βαρίω. [CoMP. : κατα-βαρϋνω.^* Papvs, -ίΐα, -ΰ, heavi/ ; X. prop. i. e. heavy in weight : φορτίον, Mt. xxiii. 4 (in xi. 30 we have the opposite, ίλαφρόν). 2. metaph. a. burdensome : ϊντολη, the keeping of which is grievous, 1 Jn. v. 3. b. secere, stern : eVtoToXij, 2 Co. X. 10 [al. imposing, impressive, cf. Wet- stein ad loc.]. c. weifihty, i. e. of great moment : τα βαρϋ- Tfpa τον νήμον the weightier precepts of the law, Mt. xxiii. 23 ; αΐτιάματα [better αΐτιώματα (q. v.)], Acts xxv. 7. d. violent, cruel, unsparing, [A. V. grievous'] : Xvicot, Acts XX. 29 (so also Horn. 11. i. 89; Xen. Ages. 11, 12).• ρα^ντιμο$, -ov, (βαρύς and τιμή), of weighty (i. e. great) value, very precious, costly : Mt. xxw. 7 [R G Tr txt. WH], (so Strabo 17 p. 798; selling at a great price, Heliod. 2, 30 [var.] ; jiossessed of great honor, Aeschyl. suppl. 2.j [but Dindorf (Lex. s. v.) gives here (after a schol.) sefereli/ punishing~\).' βα<Γαν(ζω: [inipf. c'/Saaai'tfoi']; ΐΆθτ.ίβασάνι<τα; Pass., []iTVf. βασανίζομαι] ; 1 aor. €βασανίσθην\ 1 fut. βασανι- a^ijaoiiai ; {βάσανος) ; 1. prop, to test (metals) by the touchstone. 2. to question by applying torture. 3. to torture (2 Mace. vii. 13) ; hence 4. univ. to vex with grievous pains (of body or mind), to torment : τινά, Mt. viii. 29; Mk. v. 7 ; Lk. viii. 28; 2 Pet. ii. 8 ; Rev. xi. 10; passively, Mt. viii. ; Rev. ix. 5 ; xx. 10 ; of the pains of child-birth, Rev. xii. 2 (cf. Anthol. 2, p. 205 ed. Jacobs); with eV and the dat. of the material in which one is tor- mented. Rev. xiv. 10. 5. Pass, to be harassed, dis• tressed; of those who at sea are struggling with a head wind, Mk. vi. 48 ; of a ship tossed by the waves, Mt xiv. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. Often in O. T. Apocr.) • βαα^ανιο-μόΐ, -ov. 6. (βασανίζω, q. v.) ; 1. a testing by the touchstone or //// torture. 2. torment, torture; a. the act of tormenting: Rev. ix. 5. b. the state or con- dition of those tormented : Rev. xriii. 7, 10, 1.0 ; ό κάπνος ToC βασανισμού αντών the smoke of the tire by which they are tormented, Rev. xiv. 11. (4 Mace. ix. fi ; xi. 2 ; [al.] ; bad wine is called βασαιαυμός by Alexis in Athen. 1, 56 p. 30 f.) * βασ-ανιστήί, -οϊι, ό, (βασανίζω), one who elicits the truth by the uxc of the racL; an inquisitor, torturer, ([Antiphon ; al.]; Dem. p. 978, 11 ; Philo in Place. § 11 end; [de concupisc. § 1 ; (|Uod omn. prob. lib. 16 ; Plut. an vitios. ad infel. suff. § 2]); used in Mt. xviii. 34 of a jailer (8(σμοφΰ\αξ Acts xvi. 23), doubtless because the busi- ness of torturing was also assigned to him.* βά<Γανο$, -ου, ή, [Curtius p. 439] ; a. the touchstone, [called also basanite, Lat. lapis Lydius], by wliich gold and other metals are tested, b. the rack or instrument of torture by which one is forced to divulge the truth, c. torture, torment, acute pains : used of the pains of disease, Mt. iv. 24 ; of the torments of the wicked after death, (V βασάνοις ύπάρχ^ιν, Lk. xvi. 23 (Sap. iii. 1; 4 Mace, xiii. 14) ; hence ό το'ποί τζ? βασάνου is used of Gehenna, Lk. xvi. 28. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn.], Pind. down.) * βασιλεία, -as, ή. (fr. βασιλεύω; to be distinguished fr. βασίλίΐα a queen ; cf. Upda priesthood fr. Ίιρήω, and Upfia a priestess fr. itpetr), [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. royal power, kingship, dominion, rule: Lk. i. 33; xix. 12, 15; xxii. 29 ; Jn. xviii. 36 ; Acts i. 6 ; Heb. i. 8 ; 1 Co. xv. 24 ; Rev. xvii. 12 ; of the royal power of Jesus as the triumphant Messiah, in the phrase ΐρχισθαι iv τη βασ- αντοΰ, i. e. to come in his kingship, clothed with this pow- er : Mt. xvi. 28 ; Lk. xxiii. 42 [fif την β. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.] ; of the royal power and dignity conferred on Christians in the Messiah's kingdom : Rev. i. 6 (ace. to Tr txt. WH mrg. (ποίησιν ήμίν or L ημών [yet R G Τ ΛΝ'Η txt. Tr mrg. ήμας] βασιΚιίαν [Rec. βασιλι'ις]) ; τοΰ βιοΰ, the royal power and dignity belonging to God, Rev. xij. βασιΧβια 97 βασιΧΐία 10. 2. α kingdom i. e. the territory subject to the rule of a king: Mt. xii. 25 sq. ; xxiv. 7 ; Mk. iii. 24 ; vi. 23 ; xiii. 8 ; Lk. xi. 17 ; xxi. 10 ; plur. : Mt. iv. 8 ; Lk. iv. S ; Heb. xi. 33. 3. Fieijuent in the N. T. in refer- ence to the Reign of thi- Μ e s s i a h are the following phrases: ή βασίλιία τοΰ θ(υΰ {Κη^ΚΊ ΝΓΙ13^•?, Targ. Is. xl. 9 ; Mic. iv. 7), prop, l/ie kinijdom ocer li-hich God /-ules; ή βασι\( ία τοΰ Χρίστου (NT'ir/m jloSo, Targ. Jonath. ad Is. liii. 10), Ike kingdom of the Messiah, which will be founded by God througli the Messiah and over whicli the Messiah will preside as God's vicegerent ; ή βασ. των ουρανών, only in Matthew, but very freijuently [some 33 times], the kiiir/dnm of liearen, i. e. the kingdom which is of heavenly or divine origin and nature (in rabbin, writ. D'pU'n noSo is the rule of God, the theocracy viewed universally, not the Messianic kingdom) ; sometimes simply ή βασιΧιΙα : Mt. iv. 23, etc. ; .las. ii. 5 ; once ή βασ. ToO Aauf ι'δ, because it was supposed the Messiah would be one of David's descendants and a king very like David, Mk. xi. 10; once also ή βασ. την Χριστού και θ(οϋ, Eph. ν. :>. Relying principally on the prophecies of Daniel — who had declared it to be the purpose of God that, after four vast and mighty kingdoms had succeeded one an- other and the last of them shown itself hostile to the people of God, at length its despotism should be broken, and the empire of the world pass over for ever to the holy I)eopIe of God (Dan. ii. 44; vii. 14, 18, 27) — the Jews were expecting a kingdom of the greatest felicity, which tloil through the Messiah would set up, raising the dead to life again and renovating earth and heaven ; and that in this kingdom they would bear sway for ever over all the nations of the world. This kingdom was called the kingdom of God or the kingdom of the Messiah ; and in this sense must these terms be understood m the utter- ances of the Jews and of the disciples of Jesus when conversing with him, as Mt. xviii. 1 ; xx. 21 ; Mk. xi. 10; Lk. .xvii. 20; xix. 11. But Jesus employed the phrase kingdom of God or of heaven to indicate that perfect order of things which he teas about to establish, in trhich all those of every nation irlio should believe in him tvere to be gathered together into one society, dedicated and intimately united to God, and made partakers of eternal salvation. This kingdom is spoken of as now begun and actually pres- ent, inasmuch as its foundations have already been laid by Christ and its benefits realized among men that believe in him: Mt. xi. 12; xii. 28; xiii. 41 (in this pass, its earthly condition is spoken of, in which it includes bad subjects as well as good); Lk. xvii. 21; 1 Co. iv. 20; Ro. xiv. 17 (\vhere the meaning is, 'the es- sence of the kingdom of God is not to be found in ques- tions about eating and drinking') ; Col. i. 13. But far more fre(piently the kingdom of heaven is spoken of as a future blessing, since its consummate establishment IS to be looked for on Christ's solemn return from the skies, the dead being called to life again, the ills and wrongs which burden the present state of things being done aivay, the powers hostile to God being vanquished : Mt. vi. 10 : viii. 1 1 ; xxvi. 29 ; Mk. ix. 1 ; xv. 43 ; Lk. ix. 27; xiii. 28 sq. ; xiv. 15; xxii. 18; 2 Pet. i. 11 ; also in the phrases fiaip^taBai tls τ. βασ. τ. ουρανών or τ θ(οϋ : Mt. V. 20; vii. 21 ; xviii. 3 ; xix. 23, 24 ; Mk. ix. 47 ; x. 23, 24, 25 ; Lk. xviii. 24 [T Tr txt. WH ΰσπορίΰονται], 25; Jn. iii. 5; Acts xiv. 22: κληρονόμο! της βασιλείας, Jas. ii. 5 ; κληρονομ^ιν τ. β. τ. θ- : see d. below. Βν a sin- gular use η βασ. τον κυρίου η ίττονρόνιος God^s heavenly kingdom, in 2 Tim. iv. is, denotes the exalted and perfect order of things which already exists in heaven, and into which true Christians are ushered immediately after death ; cf. Phil. i. 23 ; Heb. .\ii. 22 sq. The phrase βασ. i των ουρανών or τοΟ θ(θν, while retaining its meaning' king- dom ofheitven or of (Jiid, must be understood, accordin•' to the reijuircments of the context, a. of the beginning, growth, potency, of the divine kingdom : Mt. xiii. 31-33 ; Mk. iv. 30 ; Lk. xiii. 18. b. of its fortunes : Mt. xiii. 24 ; Mk. iv. 26. c. of the conditions to be complied with iu order to reception among its citizens : Mt. xviii. 23 ; xx. 1; xxii. 2; xxv. 1. d. of its blessings and benefits, whether present or future ; Mt. xiii. 44 sq. ; Lk. vi. 20: also in the phrases ζητάν την βασ. τ. β(οϋ, Mt. vi. 33 [L Τ WH oin. τ. 5(oO] ; Lk. \ii. 31 [αυτοί L txt. Τ Tr WH] ; δίχιαθαί τ. βασ. τ. β- ώς τταιδίον, Mk. χ. 15 ; Lk. xviii. 1 7 ; κΚηρονομΰν τ. β. τ. θ- Mt. xxv. 34 ; 1 Co. vi. 9 sq. ; xv. 50 ; Gal. v. 21 ; see in κληρονομίω, 2. e. of the congregation of those who constitute the royal 'city of God ' : ποίίίκ τινας βασί\(ίαν, Rev. i. 6 (ΐ Τ WH txt. Tr mrg. [cf. 1 above] ; v. 10 (here R G βασιλί'ΐ!, so R in the preceding pass.), cf. Ex. xix. 6. Further, the foU. expressions are noteworthy : of persons fit for admis- sion into the divine kingdom it is said αντών or τοιοΰτω»' ί'στίΐ/ η βασ. τών ονρ. or τον θ(οΰ : Mt. ν. 3, 10 ; χίχ. 14 ; Mk. χ. 14; Lk. xviii. 16. δίδομαι τινΊ τ. βασ. is used of God, making men partners of his kingdom, Lk. xii. 32; παρα\αμβάν(ΐν of those who are made jiartners, Heb. xii. 28. διά την βασ. τ. ονρ to advance the interests of the heavenly kingdom, Mt. xix. 1 2 : tvfxfv ttjs βασ. τ. θ. for the sake of becoming a partner in the kingdom of God, Lk. xviii. 29. Those who announce the near approach of the kingdom, and describe its nature, and set forth the condi- tions of obtaining citizenship in it, are said htayyiWfiv τ. βασ• τ. θ- Lk. ix. 60 ; (ΰαγγιΧίζίσϋαι την β. τ. θ- Lk. iv. 43 : viii. 1 ; .\vi. 1 (> ; π(ρΙ της βασ. τ. θ. Acts viii. 1 2 ; κηρίσσιιν την βασ. τ. θ- Lk. ix. 2 ; Acts xx. 25; xxviii. 31 ; το eu'ay yCKiov τη!βασ. Mt. iv. 23 : ix. 35 ; xxiv. 14 ; with the addi- tion of ToC Bfov, Mk. i. 14 R L br. ήγγικ(ν ή βασ. τ. ουρ. or τοΰ θ(οΰ, is used of its institution as close at hand ; Mt. iii. 2 ; iv. 17 ; Mk. i. 15 ; Lk. x. 9, 11. it is said ίρχισθαι i. e. to be established, in Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20; Mk. xi. 10. In accordance with the comparison which likens the kingdom of God to a palace, the power of ad- mitting into it and of excluding from it is called κλίϊί της β. τ. οΰρ. Mt. -xvi. 19 : κλ(ΐ(ΐν την β. τ. ουρ. to keep from entering, Mt. xxiii. 13(14). vioi της βασ. are those toΛvhom the prophetic promise of the heavenly kingdom extends : used of the Jews, Mt. viii. 12; of those gathered out of all nations who have shown themselves worthy of a share in this kingdom, Mt. xiii. 38. (In the O. 1'. βασίΧΐίος 98 βαστάζω Apocr. ή βασ. τον dfoti ilonotes God's rule, the divine ad- ministmtioti, Sap. vi. 5 ; x. 10 ; Tob. xiii. 1 ; so too in Ps. cii. (ciii.) 19; civ. (cv.) 11-13; Dan. iv. 33; vi. 26; the universe suljjc:t to God's sicni/, God's royal domain, Song of the Three Children 32: ή βασιλεία, simplv, the O. T. theocratic commonwealtli, 2 -Mace. i. 7.) Cf. Fleck, De regno (livino, Lips. 1829; Baumy.-Crusius, Bibl. Theol. p. 147 S(iq. ; Thohicl•, Die Bergrede Christi, Ste Aufl. p. 55 sqq. [on Mt. v. 3] ; Ciilln, Bibl. Theol. i. p. 067 sqq., ii. p. 108 s(iq. ; Schmid, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. p. 262 sqij. ed. 4; Baiir, Neutest. Theol. p. 69 sqq.; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T. § 13 ; [also in his Leben Jesu, bk. iv. ch. 2] ; SchUrer, [Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29 (esp. par. 8) and reff. there ; also] in the Jahrbb. fUr protest. Theol., 1876, pp. 166-187 (cf. Lipsius ibid. 1878, p. 189) ; [B.D. Am. eil. s. v. Kingdom of Heaven, and reff. there]. βασ-(λ(ΐοΐ, (rarely -f ία), -eioK, roijal, l^'inyh/, regal: 1 Pet. ii. 9. As subst. το βασίΧαην (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 3 ; Prov. xviii. 19 Sept.; Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 4), and much oftener (fr. Hdt. 1, 30 down) in plur. τα βασί\(ΐα (Sept. Esth. i. 9, etc.), the royal palace : Lk. vii. 25 [A. V. kings' courts'].' βα<Γΐλ(ΐί$, -€ως, 6, leader of the people, prince, com- mander, lord of the land, kini/; univ. : oi βασιλΛ τηί yjjs. Mt. xvii. 25 ; Rev. xvi. 14 [L Τ Tr WII om. της yijf], etc. ; τωνϊθνων, Lk. xxii. 25 ; of the king of Egypt, Acts vii. 10, 18 ; Heb. xi. 23, 27 ; of David, Mt. i. 6 ; Acts .xiii. 22 ; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq. ; Lk. i. 5 ; Acts xii. 1 ; xxv. 13 ; of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv. 9 ; Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of a king, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; "re- ges Syriae, regis Antioclii pueros, scitis Romae nuper fuisse," Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17, 59 ; [Verg. Aen. 9, 223]) ; of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; 1 Pet. ii. 17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 (10), (so in prof. writ, in the Roman age, as in Joseph, b. j. 5, 13, 6 ; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk.] ; of the son of the emperor, ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]) ; of the Alessiah, ό βaσiKfυs των Ιουδαίων, Mt. ii. 2, etc. ; τοϊι Ισραήλ, Mk. XV. 32; Jn. i. 49 (50) ; xii. 13; of Chris- tians, as to reign over the world with Christ in the mil- lennial kingdom. Rev. i. 6 ; v. 10 (Rec. in both pass, and Grsb. in the latter ; see βασιλεία, 3 e.) ; of God, the su- preme ruler over all, Mt. v. 35 ; 1 Tim. i. 1 7 (see αΙών, 2) ; Rev. XV. 3 ; βασιΚ^ί: βασιΚίων, Rev. .xvii. 14 [but here as in xix. 16 of the Victorious ^Messiah]; ό βασ. τών βασιλ(υόντων, 1 Tim. vi. 15, (2 Mace. xiii. 4 ; 3 JIacc. v. 35; Enoch 9, 4; [84, 2; Philo de decal. § 10]; cf. [κύ- ριοι των βασ. Dan. ii. 47] ; Kvpios τ. κυρίων, Deut. χ. 1 7 ; Ps. cxxxv. (cxx.xvi.) 3 ; [so of the king of the Par- thians, Plut. Pomp. § 38, 1]). pcuriXevu; fut. βασι\(ϋσω•, 1 aor. (βασί\(νσα; (βασι- kfvs) ; — in (!rk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] Λvith gen. or dat., in the sacred writ., after the Hebr. (Si' Si?0), foil, by ίττί with gen. of place, Mt. ii. 22 (where LT Wllom. Irbr. ί'πί) ; Rev. v. 10; foil, by eVi with ace. of the pers., Lk. i. 33 ; xLx. 14, 27 ; Ro. v. 14 ; [cf. W. 206 (193 sq.); B. 169 (147)] — to he king, to exercise kingly power, ") riign: univ., 1 Tim. vi. 15; Lk. xi,x. 14, 27 ; of the governor of a country, although not possessing kingly rank, Mt. ii. 22; of God, Rev. xi. 15, 17; xix. 6 ; of the rule of Jesus, the Messiah, Lk. i. 33 ; 1 Co. xv. 25 ; Rev. xi. 15 ; of the reign of Christians in the millennium, Rev. v. 10; xx. 4, 6; xxii. 5; hence Paul transfers the word to denote tlie supreme moral ilignity, liberty, bless- edness, which will be enjoyed by Christ's redeemed ones: Ro. v. 1 7 (cf. De Wette and Thol. ad loc.) ; 1 Co. iv. 8. Metaph. to exercise the highest in_fluence, to control: Ro. V. 14, 17, 21; vi. 12. The aor. ίβασίλινσα denotes / obtained royal pouter, became king, have come to reign, in 1 Co. iv. 8 [cf. W. 302 (283); B. 215 (185)]; Rev. xi. 1 7 ; xix. 6, (as often in Sept. and prof. writ. ; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 1 1 ; Breitenbach or Kuhner on Xen. mem. 1, 1, 18; on the aor. to express entrance into a state, see Bnhdy. p. 382; Kriiger § 53, 5, 1 ; [Kiiliner § 386, 5; Goodwin § 19 N. 1]). [CoMP. : συμ-βασι- λί'υω.] * βα<Γΐλικ(ί$, -ή, -όν, of or belonging to a king, kingly, royal, regal; of a man, the officer or minister of a prince, a courtier: Jn. iv. 46, 49, (Polyb. 4, 76, 2; Plut. Sol. 27 ; often in Joseph.), sxibject to a king: of a country, Acts xii. 20. befitting or worthy of a king, royal: iaO^s, Acts xii. 21. Hence metaph. principal, chief: νόμος, Jas. ii. 8 (Plat. Min. p. 317 e. to υρθον νόμο! ΐστι βασιΧικόί, Xen. symp. 1, 8 βασιλικοί' κάλλοί; 4 ^lacc. xiv. 2).* [βα<Γΐλ1σκο$, -ου, ό, (dimin. of βασιλΐυ!), a petty king; a reading noted by WH in their (rejected) marg. of Jn. iv. 46, 49. (Polyb., al.)•] βασίλισ-σα, -η!, ή, queen : Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31 ; Acts viii. 27; Rev. xviii. 7. (Xen. oec. 9, 15; Aristot. oec. 9 [in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 84 ; cf. frag. 385 (fr. Poll. 8, 90) p. 1542•, 25]; Polyb. 23, 18, 2 [excrpt. Vales. 7], and often in later writ. ; Sept. ; Joseph. ; the Atticists prefer the forms βασιΚίς and βασίλίΐα ; of. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 225 ; [on the termination, corresponding to Eng. -ess, cf. W. 24; B. 73; Soph. Lex. p. 37; Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 151 sqq.; Curtius p. 053].)* βΟΜΓΐ$, -€ω£, ή, (ΒΑΩ, βαίνω) ; 1. α stepping, walh ing, (Aeschyl., Soph., al.). 2. that with which one steps, the foot: Acts iii. 7, (Plat. Tim. p. 92 a. et al. ; Sap. xiii. 18).* βοίο-καίνω: 1 aor. (βάσκανα, on which form cf. W. [75 (72)] ; 83 (80) ; [B. 41 (35) ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 25 f^i\. ; Paralip. p. 21 sq.] ; (βάζω, βάσκω [φάσκω] to speak, talk) ; τινά [AV. 223 (209)] ; 1. to speak ill of one, to slander, traduce hirn, (Dem. 8, 19 [94, 19] ; Ael. v. h. 2, 13, etc.). 2. to bring evil on one by feigned praise or an evil eye, to charm, bezvitch one, (Aristot. probl. 20, 34 [p. 926'', 24] ; Theocr. 6, 39 ; Ael. nat. an. 1, 35) ; hence, of those who lead away others into error by wicked arts (Diod. 4, 6) : Gal. iii. 1. Cf. Schott [or Bp. Lghtft.] ad loc. ; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 462.• βοσ-τάζω; fut. βαστάσω; 1 aor. fjSd στα σα ; 1. to take up ivith the hands : Χίθουί. Jn. x. 31, (λάαν, Horn. Od. 11, 594; την μάχαιραν από τήί γηι, Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 7). 2. to take up in order to carry or bear ; to put upon one's self (something) to be carried ; to bear what is burden- some : τον σταυρόν, Jn. xix. 17 ; Lk. .\iv. 27, (see σταιτο! βάτος 99 βίβαιοοα 2 a. and b.) ; Metaph. : βαστάζιιν τι, to be equal to un- derstanding a matter and receiving it calmly, Jn. xvi. 12 (Epict. ench. 29, 5); φορτίον. Gal. vi. 5; βαστάσίΐ TO κρίμα, must take upon himself the condemnation of the judge. Gal. v. 10 (tJiJiyp Χ'ΰ/:, Mic. vii. 9). Hence ίο bear, endure : Mt. xx. 12 ; Acts xv. 10 (ζυγόν) ; Ro. XV. 1 ; Gal. vi. 2; Rev. ii. 2 sq. (Epict. diss. 1, 3, 2; Anthol. 5, 9, 3 ; in this sense the Greeks more com- monly use φερβικ.) 3. simply ίο fcear, can-)/ : Mt. iii. 11; Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. vii. 14; xxii. 10; Rev. xvii. 7; pass., Acts iii. 2 ; xxi. 35. το ονομά μου ^νώττιον ΐθνων, so to bear it that it may be in the presence of Gentiles, i. e. by preaching to carry the knowledge of my name to the Gentiles, Acts ix. 15. to carry on one's person : Lk. X. 4 ; Gal. vi. 1 7 [cf. EUic. ad loc] ; of the womb carrying the foetus, Lk. xi. 27; to sustain, i. e. uphold, support : Ro. xi. 18. 4. by a use unknown to Attic writ., to bear away, carry off: νόσον!, to take away or remove by curing them, Mt. viii. 1 7 (fialen de compos, medicam. per gen. 2, 14 [339 ed. Bas.] ψώρας re Bepa- iTfvei και νπώπια βαστάζει) [al. refer the use in Mt. 1. c. to 2 ; cf. Meyer]. Jn. xii. 6 (ϊβάσταζι used to pilfer [R. V. txt. took away ; cf. our ' shop^i/?ing ', though perh. this Ιϊβ is a diff. word, see Skeat s. v.]) ; Jn. .\x. 15, (Polyb. 1, 48, 2 6 ανΐμος τοίις TTvpyovs τί] βία βαστάζΐΐ, ApoUod. bibl. 2, G, 2; 3, 4, 3 ; Athen. 2, 26 p. 46 f.; 15, 48 p. 693 e.; very manv instances fr. Joseph, are given by Krebs, Observv. p. 152 sqq.). [Syx. cf. Schmidt ch. 105.] * pUTos, -ου, ή and (in Mk. xii. 26 GLTTrWIl) 0, (the latter ace. to Moeris, Attic ; the former Hellenistic ; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 532; W. 63 (62) [cf. 36 ; B. 12 (11)]), [fr. Horn, down], a thorn or bramble-bush [cf. B. D. s. V. Bush] : Lk. vi. 44 ; Acts vii. 30, 35 ; cVi τοΰ (της) βάτου at the Bush, i. e. where it tells about the Bush, Mk. xii. 26 ; Lk. xx. 37 ; cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xi. 2; [B.D. s. V. Bible IV. 1].* βάτο5, -ου, ό, Hebr. Γι2 a bath, [A. V. measurel, a Jew- ish measure of liquids containing 72 sextarii [between 8 and 9 gal.], (Joseph, antt. 8, 2, 9) : Lk. xvi. 6 [see B.D. s. V. AVeights and Measures Π. 2].* βάτραχοι, -ου, ό, afroij, (fr. Horn. [i. e. Batrach., and Hdt.] down) : Rev. xvi. 13.* βαττολογί'ω [TWH ^ατταλ. (with Ν Β, see WH. App. p. 152)], -ώ: 1 aor. subj. βαττολογήσω; a. to slammer, and, since stammerers are accustomed to repeat the same sounds, b. to repeat the same things over and over, to use many and idle words, to babble, prate ; so. Mt. vi. 7, where it is explained by in tj πολυλογία, (Vulg. multum loqui ; [A. V. to use vain repetitions]) ; cf. Tho- luck ad loc. Some suppose the word to be derived from Battus, a king of Cyrene, who is said to have stuttered (Hdt. 4, 155) ; others from Battus, an author of tedious and wordy poems : but comparing βατταρίζίίν, which has the same meaning, and βάρβαρος (q. v.), it seems far more probable that the word is onomatopoetic. (Sim- plic. in Epict. [ench. 30 fin.] p. 340 ed. Schweigh.) * βε<λνγμα, -rof , τό, (βδίλύσ-σομαι), a bibl. and eccl. word ; in Sept. mostly for Π3;;ίη, also for ]'ψΰ and ]'p.P> afoul thing (loathsome on acct. of its stench), a detestable thing; (TertuU. abominamentum) ; Luth. Greuel ; [A. V. abom• ination]; a. univ. : Lk. xvi. 15. b. in the O. T. often used of idols and things pertaining to idolatry, to be held in abomination by the Israelites ; as 1 K. xi. 6 (5) ; XX. (xxi.) 26 ; 2 K. xvi. 3 ; xxi. 2 ; 1 Esdr. vu. 13 ; Sap. xii. 23 ; xiv. 1 1 ; hence in the X. T. in Rev. xvii. 4 sq. of idol-worship and its impurities ; nniflv βδίλυγμα κ. ψήιΒος, Rev. xxi. 27. c. the expression το βδ. της (ρψ μώσίως the desolating abomination [al. take the gen. al. ; e. g. Mey. as gen. epex.] in Mt. xxiv. 15 ; Mk. xiii. 14, (1 Mace. i. 54), seems to designate some terrible event in the Jewish war by which the temple was desecrated, perh. that related by Joseph, b. j. 4, 9, 11 sqq. (Sept. Dan. xi. 31 ; .xii. 11, /3δ. (τής) (ρημώσ^ως for DOiPO ]"ip» and DOW "a, Dan. Lx. 27 β8. των ΐρημώσούν for D"X1pt7 D"Dt?O the abomination (or abominations) wrought by the desolator, i. e. not the statue of Jupiter Ohinpius, but a Uttle idol-altar placed upon the altar of whole burnt- ofiferings; cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 31; Hengstenberg, Authentic des Daniel, p. 85 sq. ; [the principal explana- tions of the N. T. phrase are noticed in Dr. Jas. Mori- son's Com. on Mt. 1. c.].) * β8€λυκτόΐ, -η, όν, (βδίλϋσσομαι), abominable, detestable : Tit. i. 16. (Besides only in Prov, xvii. 15 ; Sir. xii. 5; 2 Mace. i. 27 ; [cf. Philo de victun. offer. § 12 sub fin.].)* β8<λν(Γσ-ω : (βδίω quietly to break wind, to stink) ; 1. to render foul, to cause to be abhorred: την οσμήν, Ex. V. 21 ; to defile, pollute : τας ψνχάς, τ. ψυχην. Lev. xi. 43 ; XX. 25 ; 1 Alacc. i. 48 ; pf. pass. ptcp. (βδ(λχτγμ€νο! abomi- nable. Rev. xxi. 8, (Lev. xviii. 30 ; Prov. viii. 7 ; Job xv. 16; 3 Mace. vi. 9; β8€\νσσόμ(νος, 2 Mace. v. 8). In native Grk. writ, neither the act. nor the pass, is found. 2. βδίλΰσσομαι: depon. mid. (1 aor. (β8(\νξάμην often in Sept. [Joseph, b. j. 6, 2, 10] ; in Grk. writ, depon. pas- sive, and f r. Arstph. down) ; prop, to turn one's self away from on account of the stench ; metaph. to abhor, detest: Ti, Ro. ii. 22.* β«βαιθ5, -βία (W. 69 (67); Β. 25 (22)), -aiov, (Β.λΩ, βαίνω), [fr. Aeschyl. down], stable, fast,frm ; prop. : άγκυ- ρα, Heb. vi. 19; metaph. sure, trusty: inayytKia, Ro. iv. 16; κΚησις (cat ϊκΧογή, 2 Pet. i. 10; λόγο? προφητικός, 2 Pet. i. 19; unshaken, constant, Ilcb. iii. 14 : (\πίς, 2 Co. i. 7 (6), (4 Mace. xvii. 4) ; παρρησία, Heb. iii. 6 (but WH Tr mrg. in br.) ; valid and therefore inviolable, 'Κόγος, Heb. ii. 2 : διαθήκη, Heb. ix. 17. (With the same mean- ings in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) * β<βαιέ(ι>, -ω : fut. βφαιώσω \ 1 aor. (βιβαίωσα \ Pass., [pres. βfβaιoΰμaι'\ ; 1 aor. ϊβιβαιώθην ; {βίβαιος) ; to make βηη, establish, confirm, make sure : τον λόγον. to prove its truth and divinity, Mk. xvi. 20; τας (παγγ(\ίας make good the promises by the event, i. e. fulfil them, Ro. xv. 8 (so also in Grk. writ, as Diod. 1, 5) ; Pass. : τό μαρτίριον τοΰ Χριστού, 1 Co. i. 6 ; ή σωτηρία . . . (Ις ημάς ίβ€βαιώθη, a eonstructio praegnans [W. § 66, 2 d.] which may be re- solved into fty ημάς παρεδόθη κα\ tv ημΐν βίβίΐιος tyiviTO, Heb. ii. 3 cf. 2 ; see βίβαιος. of men made steadfast and constant in soul : Heb. xiii. 9 ; 1 Co. i. 8 {βίβαιώσιι υμάς βΐβαίωσκ 100 ΒηθεσΒά άικγκλητουί will so confirm you that ye may be unre- provable [W. § 59, 6 fin.]); 2 Co. i. 21 (βφαιώι> ήμά: €κ Χριστύν, causing us to be steadfast in our fellowship with Christ ; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; tV TJ πίστα, Col. ii. 7 [L Τ Tr Wll om. tV]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. and Plat, down.) [COMP. : 8ια-β(βαιόομαι.] ' βίβαίωσ-ιβ, -<ω5, ή. (βίβαιύω), coii/irmafion : τοΟ (ΰαγγ(- λίου, ΙΊύΙ. i. 7 ; fif βιβαίωσιν to produce confidence, lleb. vi. κ;. (Sap. vi. i:i. Tlmi•., I'lut., Dio Cass., [al.])' Ρ«'βηλθ5, -Of, (BAG, βαίνω, βηλός tlireshold) ; 1. ac- cessible, lawful to be trodden ; \η•ο\). used of places ; hence 2. profane, equiv. to '7Π [i. c. unhallowed, common]. Lev. X. ] ; IS. x.\i. 4 ; opp. to oymt (as in [Ezek. .\xii. 26]; Philo, vit. iMoys. iii. § 1«): 1 Tim. iv. 7; vi. 20; 2 Tim. ii. 16; of men, profane i. e. ungodly : 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Heb. xii. 16. (Often in Grk. >vrit. fr. Aeschyl. down.) [Cf. Trench § ci.] ' β<βηλό(ι>, -ώ ; 1 aor. {'/3ί/3ΐ)λωσα ; (βίβηΧος); to profane, desecrate : το σάββατον, Mt. xii. .'J ; το Ίιμύν, Acts .vxiv. 6. (Often in Sept. for Ί'^π; Judith ix. 8; 1 Mace. ii. 12, etc.; Ilcliod. 2, 25.)• Β(€λζΕβονλ and, as written by some [yet no Greek] autlioritics, Βιιλζιβούβ [cod. Β Βιιζφούλ, so cod. Ν exc. in Mk. iii. 22 ; adopted by WH, see their App. p. 159 ; cf. B. 6], 0, indecl., Beelzebul or Beelzebub, a name of Satan, the prince of evil spirits: Mt. x. 25 ; xii. 24, 27 ; Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk. xi. 15, 18, 19. The form BfeAff/3ouX is composed of S?3I (rabbin, for '731 dung) and ^i'3, loril of ilunc/ or of filth, i. e. of idolatry; cf. Lightfoot on Mt. xii. 21. The few who follow Jerome in preferring the form BifX- ζφοϋβ derive the name fr. 30I '7|^3, lord nf flies, a false god of the Ekronites (2 K. i. 2) having the power to drive away troublesome flies, and think the Jews trans- ferred the name to Satan in contempt. Cf. Win. RWB. 8. V. Beelzebub : and ./. G. M(uller) in Ilerzog vol. i. p. 768 sqq. ; [BB.DD. ; cf. also Meyer and Dr. Jas. Mori- son on Mt. X. 25 ; some, as ΛVeiss (on Mk. 1. c. ; Bibl. Theol. § 23 a.), doubt alike whether the true derivation of the name has yet been hit upon, and whether it denotes Satan or only some subordinate ' Prince of demons ']. (Besides only in eccl. writ., as Ev. Nicod. c. 1 sq.) * Β(λ(αλ, ό, (^;?'S3 worthlessness, wickedness), Belial, a name of Satan, 2 (Jo. vi. 15 in Rec.**"'^ L. But Be\iap (q. V.) is preferable, [see WH. App. p. 159; B. 6].* BcXiap, ή, indecl., Beliar, a name of Satan in 2 Co. vi. 1 5 Rec." G Τ Tr AVH, etc. This form is either to be as- cribed (as most suppose) to the harsh Syriac pronuncia- tion of the word BcXiaX (q. v.), or must be derived from "^J?'. ^3 loi'd of the forest, i. e. who ndes over forests and deserts, (cf. Sept. Is. xiii. 21 ; Mt. xii. 43; [BB.DD. s. v. Belial, esp. Alex.'s Kitto]). Often in eccl. writ.• β«λόνη, -η!, ή. (βίλοί); a. the point of a spear, b. a needle: Lk.xviii. 25 L Τ TrWH; see ραφΙ?. ([Batr.130], Arstph., Aeschin., Aristot., al. ; cf. Lnb. ad Phryn. p. 90.)* β«λθΐ, -iof, TO, (βάλλω), a missile, a dart, javelin, arrow. Eph. vi. 16. [From Horn, down.]' β(λτ(<ιΐν, -ov, gen. -ovot, better ; neut. adverbially in 2 'lim. i. 18 [W. 242 (227); B. 27 (24). Soph., Thuc., al.]• Β<νιαμ1ν [-/ifiV L Τ Tr WH ; see WH. App. 155, and s. V. «, »],o,(j"P'.J3, i. e. rp"-|3 son of the right hand, i. e. of good fortune. Gen. xxxv. 18), Benjamin, Jacob's twelfth son ; φυλι) Bfwu/ii'i/ the tribe of Benjamin : Acts xiii. 21 ; Ro. xi. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. vii. 8.* Β<ρν(κη, •ΐ)Γ, jj, (for BtptviicTj, and this the Macedonic form [cf. aturz, De dial. Mac. p. 31] of Φ^ρινίκη [i. e. vic- torious]), Bernice or Berenice, daughter of Herod Agrip- pa the elder. She married first her uncle Ilcrod, king of Chalcis, and after his death Polemon, king of Cilicia. Deserting him soon afterwards, she returned to her brother Agrip])a, with whom previously when a widow she was said to have lived incestuously. Finally she became for a time the mistress of the emperor Titus (Joseph, antt. 1 9, 5, 1 ; 20, 7, 1 and 3 ; Tacit, hist. 2, 2 and 81 ; Suet. Tit. 7) : Acts xxv. 13, 23; xxvi. 30. Cf. Hiiusrat/i in Schenkel i. p. 39G sq. ; l^Farrar, St. Paul, ii. 599 sq.].• Bc'poia, -at. ή, (also Bcppoia [i. e. well-watered]), Bercea, a city of Macedonia, near Pella, at the foot of Mount Bermius : Acts xvii. 10, 13.* Bcpotaios. -a, -ov, Bera:an : Acts xx. 4.• [Βηδσαϊδά, given by L mrg. Tr mrg. in Lk. x. 13 where Rec. etc. ΒηθσηϊΒά, q. v.] Βηθαβαρά, -a?, [-pi Rec.•"»•', indecl.], ή, (Π•;ΐ3>' iT3 place of crossing, i. e. where there is a crossing or ford, cf. Germ. Furthhausen), Bethahara : Jn. i. 28 Rec. [in Rec.'" of 1st decl., but cf. W. 61 (60)]; see \_WH. Ajip. ad loc. .and] Βηθανίη, 2.* Βηβανία, -at, ή, {7V)y Π"3 house of depression or misery [cf. B.D. Am. ed.]), Bethanij; 1. a town or village beyond the Mount of Olive?, fifteen furlongs from Jeru- salem : Jn. xi. 1, 18; xii. 1 ; Mt. xxi. 17; xxvi. 6; Lk. xix. 29 [liere Wll give the accus. -via (see their App. p. 160), cf . Tr mrg.] ; xxiv. 50 ; Mk. xi. 1 , 1 1 sq. ; xiv. 3 ; now a little Arab hamlet, of from 20 to 30 families, called el- 'Azirii/eh or el-'Azir (the Arabic name of Lazarus) ; cf. Robinson i. 431 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.]. 2. a town or village on the cast bank of the Jordan, where John bap- tized : Jn. i. 28 L Τ Tr WH, [see the preceding word]. But Origen, although confessing that in his day nearly all the codd. read tV Βηθανία, declares that when he journeyed through those parts he did not find any place of that name, but that Bethahara was pointed out as the place where John had baptized ; the statement is con- firmed by Eusebius and Jerome also, who were well ac- quainted witli the region. Hence it is most probable that Bethany disappeared after the Apostles' time, and was restored under the name of Bethahara; cf. Liicke ad loc. !>. 391 sqq. [Cf. Prof. J. A. Paine in Phila. S. S. Times for Apr. 16, 1881, p. 243 sq.]* Βηβίσδά, η, indec, (Chald. KIDO i^'5> '• ^• ''""*"' "^ mercy, or place for receiving and caring for the sick), Belhesda, the name of a pool near the sheep-gate at Jerusalem, the waters of which had curative powers : Jn. V. 2 [here L mrg. WH mrg. read ΒηθσαΊ&ά, Τ WH txt. Βηθζαθά (q. V.)]. A\Tiat locahty in the modern city is its representative is not clear ; cf. Win. RWB. 9. v. ; Βηθζαθά 101 βιβΚίον Arnold in Ilerzog ii. p. 117 sq.; Robinson i. 330 sq. 342 sq.; [B.D. s. v.; "The Recovery of Jerusalem" (see index)].* Βηβζοβά, ή, (perh. fr. Chald. Κ.Ί" n-3 house of olives; not, as some suppose, ϋη-[η n'3 house of newness, Germ. Neuliaus, since it cannot be shown that the Hebr. Π is ever represented by the Grk. ζ), BethzcUha : Jn v. 2 Τ [AVU txt.] after codd. Κ L D and other authorities (no doubt a corrupt reading, yet approved by Keim ii. p. 177, [see also WH. App. ad loc.]), for Rec. Βηθ(σ^ά, q. V. [Cf. Kauizsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 9.] * Βηθ룫ν< ή• [indecl.], (in Joseph, not only so [antt. 8, 10, 1], but also Βηθλίίμη. -ης. antt. 6, 8, 1 ; 11, 7 ; [7, 1, 3] ; από Bηβ\fμωv, 5, 2, 8 ; «κ Βηθλ((μο>ν, 5, 9, 1 ; [cf. 7, 13 ; 9, 2]), Bethlehem, {uvh. Π"? house of bread), a little town, named from the fertility of its soil, six Roman miles south of Jerusalem ; now Beit Lachm, with about 3000 [" 5000 ", Baedeker] inhabitants : Mt. ii. 1, J sq. 8, 16 ; Lk. ii. 4, 1.5 ; Jn. vii. 42. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. ; Rob- inson i. p. 470 sqq.; Raumer p. 313 sqq. ; Tobler, Beth- lehem in Palastina u.s.w. 1«49; [Socin (i.e. Baedeker), Hdbk. etc., s. v. ; Porter (i. e. Murray) ib. ; BB.DD.].• Βηβο•αϊ5ά [WH -σαίδά; see I, i] and (Mt. -xi. 21 RG Τ WII) -δά». τ;, indecl. but with ace. [which may, how- ever, be only the alternate form just given ; cf. WH. App. p. 160] ΒηθσαϊΒάν [Β. 17(16 sq.) ; Win. 61 (60) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 sq.], (Syr. jl_» ii_ts i• e. house or place of hunting or fisldng), BethMiida ; 1. a small city (jroXii, Jn. i. 44 (4.5)) or a village (κώμη. Mk. viii. 22. 23) on the western shore of the Lake of Gennesaret : Jn. i. 44 (45) ; Mt. .xi. 21 ; Mk. vi. 45 ; Lk. x. 13 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. ΒφσαΓώά : cf. Tdf. Proleg. u. s.] ; Jn. xii. 21 (where της ΤάΚίΚαίας is added). 2. a village in lower Gaulanitis on the eastern shore of Lake Gennes- aret, not far from the place where the Jordan empties into it. Philip the tetrarch so increased its population that it was reckoned as a city, and was called Juliax in honor of Julia, the daughter of the emperor Augustus (Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 1 ; Plin. h. n. 5, 15). Many think that this city is referred to in Lk. ix. 10, on account of Mk. vi. 32, 45 ; Jn. vi. 1 ; others that the Evangelists disagree. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.: Raumer p. 122 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. V. 3. In Jn. v. 2 Lchm. mrg. WH mrg. read Βηθσάίδά; see s. v. Bηθfσδά■'\' Βηθψα-γή [but Lchm. uniforml)•. Treg. in Mt. and λΠί. and R G in Mt. -γή (Β. 15 : W. .52 (51 ) ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103) ; in Mt. .x.xi. 1 Tdf. ed. 7 -σφαγή'], ή. indecl., (fr. n'5 and J3 house of unripe figs), Bethphagc, the name of a country-seat or hamlet (Euseb. calls it κώμη, Jerome villula), on the Mount of Olives, near Bethany: Mt. x.xi. 1 ; Mk. xi. 1 R G Tr txt. WH txt., but Tr erg. in br. ; Lk. xLx. 29. [BB.DD. s. v.]* βήμα, -rof, TO, (fr. ΒΑΩ. βαίνω), [fr. Horn. (h. Merc), Pind. down] ; 1. a step, pare : βήμα πο80! the space which the foot covers, a foot-breadth, Acts vii. 5 (for ^^-!-η3 Dent. ii. 5. cf. Xcn. an. 4. 7, 10: Cyr. 7, 5, 6). 2. a raised place mounted by steps ; α platform, tribune : used of the official seat of a judge, Mt. xxvii. 19; Jn. xi.x. 13 : Acts xviii. 12, 16 sq.; xxv. 6, 10, [17] ; of the judgment-seat of Christ, Ro. xiv. 10 (LTTrWH τοΰ 0foO) ; 2 Co. V. 10 ; of the structure, resembling a throne, which Herod built in the theatre at Cssarea, and from which he used to view the games and make speeches to the people. Acts xii. 21 ; (of an orator's pulpit, 2 Mace, xiii. 2i; ; Neh. viii. 4. Xen. mem. 3, 6, 1 ; Hdian. 2, 10, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.]).• βήρνλλο$, -ου, ό, ή, beryl, a precious stone of a pale green color (Plin. h. n. 37, 5 (20) [i. e. 37, 79]) : Rev. xxi. 20. (Tob. xiii. 1 7 ; neut. βηρϋΧΚιαν equiv. to □niy, Ex. xxviii. 20 ; xxxvi. 20 (xxxLx. 13)). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 11 ; [esp. Riehm, IIAVB. ib. 3 and 12].• βία, -at, ή ; 1. strength, whether of body or of mind : Hom. and subseq. writ. 2. strent/tk in violent action, force : μίτά βία! by the use of force, with violence, Act.i v. 26 ; xxiv. 7 [Rec] ; shock τών κυμάτων. Acts xxvii. 41 [R G, but Tr txt. br. al. om. τών κυμύτων] ; δω τ. βίαν τοΰ όχλου, the crowd pressing on so violently. Acts xxi. 35. [SVN. see 8ύναμις, fin.] * βιά^ω : Οία) ; to use force, to apply force ; τινά, to force, inflict violence on, one ; the Act. is very rare and almost exclusively poetic, [fr. Hom. down] ; Pass. [B. 53 (46)] in Mt. xi. 12 ή βaσιλfίa τ. oip. βιάζεται, the king- dom of heaven is taken by violence, carried by storm, i. e. a share in the heavenly kingdom is sought for with the most ardent zeal and the intensest exertion ; cf. Xen. Hell. 5, 2, 15 (23) -rrSKeit ras βίβιασμίνας; [but see Weiss, Jas. Morison, Norton, in loc]. The other explanation : the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence sc. from its ene- mies, agrees neither with the time when Christ spoke the words, nor with the context ; cf. Fritzsche, De Wette, Meyer, ad loc. Mid. βιάζομαι foil, by tU rt to force one's wai/ into a thing, (is την Ποτίδηιακ, Fhuc. 1, 63 ; «i το (ξω, 7, 09 : i.'r την παρ(μβο\ήν, Polyb. 1, 74, 5; t's τα evras, Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19; iir to στρατόπίδον. Pint. Ollio 12, etc.) : eif τ. βασι\(ίαν τοΰ θ(οΰ, to get a share in the kingdom of God by the utmost earnestness and effort, Lk. xvi. 16. [COMP. : παραβιάζομαι.Ί* β(αιοΐ, -a, -ov. (βία), violent, forcible : Acts ii. 2 [A. V. mighty']. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)* βιοστή5, -oC, 6, (βιάζω) ; .1. strong, forceful : Pind. 01. 9, 114 [75]: Pyth. 4, 420 [236; but Pind. only uses the form |3ιατάί, so al.]. 2. using force, violent: Philo, agric. § 19. In Mt. xi. 12 those are called βιασταί by whom the kingdom of God βιάζιται, i. e. who strive to obtain its privileges with the utmost eagerness and effort.* βιβλαρίδιον. -ου, τ<5, (dimin. of the dimin. βιβλάριον fr. 17 βίβλος), a little book: Rev, x, 2, 8 [LTrWH βιβΧίον. Tilf. 2 .anil 7 βιβΧΜριον, q. v.], 9, 10. Not found in prof, auth. [Hcrm. vis. 2, 4. 3]; cf. W. 96 (91).• βιβλι8άριον, -ου. TO, (fr. βιβλίδιον. like Ιματιδάριον fr. ίμ.ιτι'διοί'). 'ί little book: Rev. x. 8 Tdf. [edd. 2 and] 7. (Ar^tph. frag. 596.)• βιβλίον -ου, τά, (dimin. of βίβ\ο{). a small book, a scroll : Lk. iv. 17, 20: Jn. xx. 30: Gal. iii. 10:2 Tim. iv. βίβλος 102 βΧασφημία 13, etc.; a written (looiinicnt; a sheet on which some- tliing has been written, β. άποστασίου \Jiill of (Ih-orre- merit']: Mt. xix. 7 ; Jlk. x. 4 ; see άίΓϋστάσιοκ, 1. βιβλίον ζωη!, the list of those whom God lias appointed to eter- nal salvation : Rev. xiii. 8 [Rec. τ!} βι'/ϋλω] ; xvii. 8 ; xx. 12; xxi. 27; see ζωη, 2 b. [From lldt. down.] βίβλος, -ου, ή, (or rather ή βίβλος [but the form βίβλ. more com. when it denotes a w r i t i η ^], the plant called papyrus, Theophr. hist. |ilant. 4, 8, 2 sq. ; [Plin. h. n. 13, 11 sq. (21 sq.)] ; fr. its bark [rather, the cellular sub- stance nf its stem (for it Λvas an endogenous plant)] paper was made [see Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 433 sq. ; esp. Dureati de la Malle in the Memoires de I'Acad. d. Inscrr. etc. torn. 19 pt. 1 (18.01) pp. 140-183, and (in correction of current misapprehensions) Prof. E. Abbot in the Library Journal for Nov. 1878, p. 323 sq., where other reff. are also given]), a written hook; a roll or scroll: Mt. i. 1 ; Lk. iii. 4 ; Mk. xii. 2(Ί ; Acts i. 20 ; rrjs ζωής, Phil. iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5, etc. ; see βιβΧίον. [From Aeschyl. down.] βιβρώσκω : pf. βίβρωκα: to eat: Jn. vi. 13. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; often in Sept.) • ΒιθννΟα, -as, ή, Billii/nia, a province of Asia Minor, bounded by the Euxine Sea, the Propontis, Mysia, Phrycria, Galatia, Paphlagonia : Acts xvi. 7 ; 1 Pet. i. 1. [Cf. B. D. s. V. ; Diet, of Grk. and Rom. Geog. s. v. ; Coni/- heare and Howson, St. Paul, etc. ch. viii.] * βίο5, -ου, ό, [fr. Horn, down] ; a. life extensively, i.e. the period or course of life [see below and Trench § xxvii.] : Lk. viii. 14 ; 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; 2 Tim. ii. 4 ; 1 Jn. ii. 16 ; 1 Pet. iv. 3 [Rec.]. b. (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Hes. opp. 230, 57.5 ; Hdt., Xen.) that by which life is sustained, resources, wealth, [A. V. living] : Mk. xii. 44; Lk. viii. 43 [WII om. Tr mrg. br. cl.] ; xv. 12, 30; xxi. 4; 1 Jn. iii. 17 [^goods]. (For onS in Prov. xxxi. 14 (xxL\. 32).)* [SvN. /3/oj. ζω-ί): ζ. existence (having death as its antithe- sis) ; 0. the period, means, manner, of existence IleiHc the former is mure uaturally used of animals, the latter ol men ; cf. zoology, 1) i υ grapliy. X. T. us.age exalts ζω•Ιι, ami so teiiils to deba.se /3'us- Hut see Up l/jhilt. Igu. ad Horn. 7.) βιίω, -ω : 1 aor. inf. βιώσαι ; for which in Attic the 2 aor. inf. βιώ^αι is more common, cf. W. 84 (80) ; [B. .54 (48) ; Veitch or L. and S. s. v.] ; (/3ior) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to spend life, to lire : τίιν χρόνον, to pass the time, 1 Pet. iv. 2; (Job xxix. 18; ήμίρας, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 2). [Syn. see βίος, fin.]* ρ£ω(Γΐ5, -f ωί, i;, manner ofliring and nctinrj, iray nf life : Acts xxvi. 4. (.Sir. prolog. 1 bia της ivvipov βι,ώσιως ; not found in prof, auth.) * βιωτικόί, -ή, -όν, pertaining to life and the affairs of this life : Lk. xxi. 34 ; 1 Co. vi. 3 sq. (The word, not used in Attic, first occurs in Aristot. h. a. 9, 17, 2 [p. 616'', 27] ; ypt'tat βιωτικαί is often used, as Polyb. 4, 73, 8 ; Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 18 fin. : Diod. 2, 29; Artemid. oneir. 1, 31. Cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 3.54 sq.) * βλαβερός, -ά, -όν. (βλάπτω), hurtful, injurious, (Xen. mem. 7, .5, 3 opp. to ωφίλιμος) : 1 Tim. vi. 9 ίττιθυμίαι βλαβίραί, cf. ήίοναί β\. Xen. mem. 1, 3, 11. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. [i. e. h. Merc. 36 (taken fr. lies. opp. 365)] down; once in Sept., Prov. x. 26.)• βλάπτω : fut. βλάψω ; 1 aor. ΐβλαψα ; to hurt, harm, in- jure : Ttxtl, Mk. xvi. 18 ; Lk. iv. 35. (Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; Tob. xii. 2 ; 2 Mace. xii. 22, etc.) * βλασ-τάνω, 3 pers. sing. pres. subj. βλαστό fr. the form βλαστάω, .Mk. iv. 27 LTTr WH (cf. 15. 5.5(48) ; [Eccl. ii. 6 ; Ilerm. sim. 4, 1 sq.]) ; 1 aor. (βλάστησα (cf. W. 84 (80) ; [B. 1. c.]) ; 1. intransitively, to sprout, hud, put forth leaves: Mk. iv. 27 ; Mt. xiii. 26 ; Heb. ix. 4 ; (Num. xvii. 8; Joel ii. 22, etc. ; in (irk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 2. in later Grk. writ, transitively, "^3 i. e. sons of thunder (as Mark himself explains it), [the name given by our Lord to James and John the sons of Zebedoe] : Alk. iii. 1 7 ; 3 pronounced Boa as Noabhyim for Xtbhy- im ; see Lghlfl. Horae llebr. ad loc. ; uJl, in Ps. Iv. 15 a tumultuous crowd, seems in Sj-riac to have signified thunder; so that the name Boavηpγe's seems to denote fiery and destructive zeal that may be hkened to a thun- der-storm, and to make reference to the occurrence nar- rated in Lk. ix. 54. [Cf. 1 )r. Jas. Morison's Com. on Mk. Lc. ; Kautzsch, Grain, d. Bibl.-.\ram. p. 9.]* βοάω, -ώ ; rim[)f. ίΊ3όωΐ' Acts xxi. 34 Rec] ; 1 aor. (βόησα ; (jSo^)'; fr. Ilom. down ; in Sept. mostly for i^^R, p>!;, PilV' '" '^'^y "'"'"'• ^^0^1^ (Lat. boo) ; 1. to raise a cry: of joy. Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1); of pain. >0€9 104 βονΚή Μι. xxvii. 4G Lrarg. TrWII; Actsviii. 7. 2. to cri/ i. e. speah with a high, strong voice : Mt. iii. 3, Mk. i. 3, Lk. iii. 4, Jn. i. 23, (all fr. Is. xl. 8) ; Mk. xv. 34 ; Lk. Lx. 38 (IIG άναβ.); [xviii. ;!8]; Acts xvii. C ; .xxi. 34 Rec. ; .x.xv. 24 (R(; cV(/3.). 3. πμύί τίνα Ιο erg to one for help, implore his aid: Lk. xviii. 7 [T TrAVII αίτώ ; cf. W. 212 (109)], (1 S. vii. 8; 1 Clir. v. 20; IIos. vu. 14, etc. for ^X pv). [CoMP. : ava-, ίττί-βοάω.] * [Syx. βοάω, κα\4ω, κράζω, κραυ-γάζω: It is not UU- iiistriK'tlvo to notice that in elas.fic us.age κα\(!ν denotes 'to cry out ' for a purpose, to cull; βοΰν to try out as a mani- festation of feeling; κράζαν to cry out liars lily, often of an inarticulate and hratisli sound ; tluis Ka\ctv suggests i n- telligence; βοΰν sensibilities; κρίζαν instincts; hence, $oav esp. a cry for help, κραιτγάζίΐν, intensive of κράζω, denotes to cry coarsely, in contempt, etc Cf . iScluuidt ch. 3.] Boc's, o, Mt. i. 5 Τ WII, for Rcc. Βοόζ, q. v. βοή, -ης, ή, fi erg : Jas. v. 4 (of tliOFC imploring ven- geance). From Ilom. down.* βοήθεια, -at, ή, (see βοηθίω), help : Ileb. iv. IC, (often in Sept., cliictly for TV^VJ,, and "ITjj; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. and Xen. down) ; plur. helps : Acts xxvii. 1 7 [see ILackett ad loc. ; B.D. s. v. Ship 4 ; Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul, pp. 106 sq. 204 sq. ; cf. ύπ-ο^ώΐ'- νυμι]* βοη-θ<ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. (βοήθησα ; (f r. βοή a cry and β(ω to run) ; in Sept. chiefly for Ίΐ;; ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. and] II3 a torch, a lamp; Sept. Brup, Num. xxii. 5 ; -x.xxi. 8 ; Dcut. x.xiii. 4 ; by change of i' into σ, Βοσόρ), liosor, the father of Balaam : 2 Pet. ii. 15 [WII txt. Βίώρ].• βοτάνη, -ης, ή. (βόσκω), an herb Jit for fodder, green herb, growing jilant: Ileb. vi. 7. (Ilom., Pind., Plat., Eur., Diod., Ael., al. Sept. for χ•ή, ΤΧΠ, ab^. [Met- aph. of men, Ignat. ad Eph. 10, 3; ad Trail. 6, 1 ; ad Philad. 3, 1].)• βότρυς, -nor, ό, a bunch or cluster of grapes : Rev. xiv. 18 [cf. B. 14 (13)]. (Gen. xl. 10; Num. xiii. 24 sq. Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down.) • βουλευτή?, -οϋ, ό, a councillor, senator, (buleuta, Plin. epp.) : first in Horn. II. 6, 114; of a member of the Sanhedrin, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 50. (Job iii. 14; xii. 17.)* βουλ(νω : i. to deliberate, take counsel, resolve, give counsel, (Is. xxiii. 8 ; [fr. Horn. down]). 2. to be η councillor or senator, discharge the office of a senator : Xen. mem. 1,1,18; Plat. Gorg. p. 473 e. ; [al.]. In the N. T. Mid., [pres. βουλ(ύομαι ; impf. ίβουλιυόμην ; fut. βουλίΰσομαι, Lk. xiv. 31 L mrg. Τ WH ; 1 aor. ίβουλινσά- μην] ; 1. to deliberate with one's self, consider : foil, by «, Lk. xiv. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 6, 8). 2. to take counsel, resolve : foil, by inf., Acts v. 33 [R G Τ Tr mrg.]; xv. 37[Rec.]; xxvii. 39 ; τί, 2Co. i. 17; foil, by "i/a, Jn. xi. 53 L Τ Tr txt. WH ; xii. 10 [cf. W. § 38, 3]. [COMP. : irapa- (-μαι), σνμ-βουλ(ΰω.^ * βουλή, -ής, ή, (βούλομαι), fr. Hom. down ; often in Sept. for 71V ;• ; counsel, purpose: Lk. xxiii. 51 (where distinsuished fr. ή πράξις) : Acts v. 38; xxvii. 12 (see τίθημι. 1 a.), 42 ; plur. 1 Co. iv. 5 ; ή βουλή τοΰ θ(οΰ, Acts xiii. 36 ; esp. of the pnr|iose of God respecting the sal- vation of men through Christ : Lk. vii. 30 ; Acts ii. 23 ; iv. 28; [Ileb. vi. 17] ; πάσαν τήν βουλήν τον θ(οΰ all the βούΧημα 105 βρέχω contents of the divine plan, Acts xx. 27; ή βηυ\ή τοϋ θ(\ήματο! αίτοΰ the counsel of his will, Eph. i. 11.' βονλημα, -ros. to, (βούλομαι), will, counsel, purpose: Acts xxvii. 43; Ko. ix. IJ; 1 Pet. iv. 3 (Rec. ΘΛημα). (2 Mace. XV. 5 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down.) [Syn. cf. BeXa,, fin.] • βονλομαι. 2 pers. sing. /SovXec Lk. xxii. 42 (Attic for βούλη, cf. W. § 13, 2 a.; B. 42 (37)); impf. {βουλόμην (Attic [(cf. Veitch), yet commonly] ηβουλύμην) ; 1 aor. (βυνληθηυ ( Mt. i. I'J) and ήβουληθην (2 Jn. 12 KG; but al. (βουλί,θ. cf. [ 117/. App. p. 162] ; W. § 12, 1 c. ; B. 33 (29)) ; Sept. for n^X, γ2Γ\ ; [fr. Horn, down]; lo will, wi^li ; and 1. commonly, to will deliberalebj, have a purpose, be minder! : foil, by an inf., Mk. xv. 15 ; Acts v. 28, 33 (L WH Tr txt. for R G Τ ϊβουλήοντο) ; xii. 4 ; xv. 37 (L Τ Tr WH for R ί'βουλίΐΐσατο) ; xviii. 27 ; xLx. 30 ; xxii. 30; xxiii. 28; xxvii. 43; xxviii. 18; 2 Co. i. 15; Heb. vi. 17; 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 10 (τους βονλομίνου! sc. €πώ(\(σθαι Tois ά5(\φον!) ; Jude 5 ; Jas. i. 18 (βουΧηθι'ί! άτικυησιν ήμίις of his own free will he brought us forth, with which will it ill accords to say, as some do, that they are tempted to sin by God), with an ace. of the obj. ToCro, 2 Co. i. 17 (L f .Tr WH for R βουλ^νόμίης) ; foil. by an ace. with inf. 2 Pet. iii. 9. of the will electing or choosing between two or more things, answering to the hat. placet milii: Mt. i. 19 (cf. ίνθυμιίσθαί. 20) ; xi. 27 [not L mrg.] ; Lk. x. 22 ; xxii. 42 ; Acts xxv. 20 ; [1 Co. xii. 11]; Jas. iii. 4 ; iv. 4 ; foil, by the subj. βού\(σθ(, ύμ'ίρ απολύσω ; is it ijour icill I should release unto i/nul (cf. W. § 41 a. 4 b.; B. § 139, 2), Jn. xviii. 39. oif the will prescribing, foil, by an ace. with inf.: Phil. i. 12 (γινώσκαν ίμάς βονλομαι I would have you know, know ye) ; 1 Tim. ii. 8 ; v. 14 ; Tit. iii. 8. 2. of will- ing as an affection, to desire : foil, by an inf., 1 Tim. vi. 9 (οι βουΧόμ(νοι nXovrdu) ; Acts xvii. 20; .xviii. 15; ίβουλόμην (on this use of the impf. see B. 217 (187) sq. ; [cf. W. 283 (2ΰ6); Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 13]), Acts XXV. 22 ; Philem. 13. On the difference between βοΰλομαι and θίλω, see θί\ω, fin.* βουνέβ, -oC, 0, a Cyrenaic word ace. to Hdt. 4, 199, which Eustath. [831, 33] on E. 11, 710 says was used by Pldlemon [No5. 1], a comic poet (of the 3d cent. B. c). It was rejected by the Atticists, but from Polyb. on [who (5, 22, 1 sq.) uses it interchangeably with λόφοΓ] it was occasionally received by the later Grk. writ. (Strabo, Pausan., Plut., al.) ; in Sept. very often forn>'3J ; (perh. fr. Β.λΩ to ascend [cf. Hesych. βοννοϊ- βωμοί, and βωμίδις in Hdt. 2, 125 (Schmidt eh. 99, 11)]); α hill, eminence, mound : Lk. iii. 5 (Is. xl. 4) ; xxiii. 30 (Hos. x. 8). Cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc p. 153 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 355 sq. ; ^Donaldson, Xew Crat. § 469].* βοΰϊ, βοΟ!, ace. sing, βοϋν, [ace. plur. βόας, Β. 14 (13)], ό. ή, an οχ, a cow : Lk. xiii. 15 ; xiv. 5, 19 ; Jn. ii. 14 sq.; 1 Co. ix. 9 ; I Tun. v. 18. [From Hom. down.] • βραβ<ΐον, -ου, τό, (βραβ(νς the arbiter and director of a contest, who awards the prize ; called also βραβΐυτής, Lat. designator), the award lo the victor in the garner, a prize, (in eccl. Lat. brabeuni, brabium), (V'ulg. brarium) : 1 Co. ix. 24 ; metaph. of the heavenly reward for Chris- tian character, Phil. iii. 14. (Oppian, cyn. 4, 197; Lycophr. 1154; ujro/ioi/ijs βρ. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 5 [where see Lghtft., Gebh. and Ham.] ; άφδαρσίοΓ, Mart. Polyc. 17.)• βραβΐΰω ; in Grk. writ. fr. Isoc. and Dem. down ; 1. to be a βμαβής or umpire (see βραβ(Ίιιν). 2. to decide, determine. 3. to direct, control, rule : Col. iii. 1 5 [where see -Meyer ; contra, Bp. Lghtft. CoMP. : κατα-βριιβιυω.] ' βραδύνω ; (βρα8νς) ; to delay, be slow ; 1. rarely trans, lo render slow, retard : την σωτηρίαν, Sept. Is. xlvi. 13 ; pass. ό8ός. Soph. El. 1501 [cf. O. C. 1628]. Mostly 2. intrans. lo be long, to tarry, loiter, (so fr. Aeschyl. down) : 1 Tim. iii. 15 ; unusually, ivith gen. of the thing which one delays to effect, 2 Pet. iii. 9 τήι eVoyytXiat [A. V. is not slack concerning his promise} i- e. to fulfil his promise ; cf. W. § 30, 6 b. (Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22.)• βραδιητλο^'ω, -ώ ; (βρα8νς and ττΧηίς) ; to sail slowly : pres. ptcp. in Acts .xxvii. 7. (Artem. oneir. 4, 30.) • βρα8ν$ -da, -ύ, slow; a. prop. : e's τι, Jas. i. 19. b. metaph. dull, inactice, in mind ; stupid, slow lo apprehend or believe, (so Hom. II. 10, 226; opp. to σν«τΟΓ, Polvb. 4, 8, 7 ; τον νουν, Dion. Hal. de Att. oratt. 7 [de Lys. judic.]; 6υσμαθία• βρα&υτ!)ς tv μαβήσΐΐ. Plat, defin. p. 415 ε.) : with a dat. of respect, rj καρδία, Lk. xxiv. 25. [Syx. see αργός, fin.] * βρα8υτή5 (on accent cf. Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 417 sq. ; [Chandler §§ 634, 635 ; W. 52 sq. (52)]), -^ror, ή, (βρα- δύς), slowness, delay : 2 Pet. iii. 9. (From Hom. down.) * βραχούν, -ofos, 0, [fr. Hom. down], Ihe arm : the βρα- χίων of God is spoken of Hebraistically for the might, the power of God, Lk. i. 51 (cf. Deut. iv. 34 ; v. 15 ; xxvi. 8) ; Jn. xii. 38 (Is. Uii. 1) ; Acts xiii. 17.• βραχΰ$, -f ία, -ύ, short, small, little, (fr. Pind., Hdt., Thuc. down); a. of place; neut. βραχύ adverbially, α sAort dL-itance, a little : Acts xxvii. 28 (2 S. xvi. 1 ; Thuc. 1, 63). b. of time; βραχνή a short lime, for a little vrhiie: Heb. ii. 7, 9, (where the writer transfers to time what the Sept. in Ps. viii. 6 says of rank); Acts v. 34 [here L Τ Tr WH om. τι] ; μ(τά βραχύ shortly afler, Lk. xxii. 58. c. of quantity and measure; j3pa;^i τί [Tr txt. AVH om. L Tr mrg. br. τι] some little part, a little : Jn. vi. 7 (βραχύ τι τοΰ μίλιτος, 1 S. xiv. 29 ; ίλαιον βραχύ, Joseph, antt. 9, 4, 2 ; |3ρα;(ΰτατοΓ Χιβανωτός, Philo de vict. off. § 4) ; δια βραχίων in few sc. words, briefly, Heb. xiii. ii (so [Plat., Dem., al. (cf. Bleek on Heb.'l. c.)] Joseph, b. j. 4. 5, 4 ; iv βραχυτάτω δηΧοΰν to show very briefly, Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 15).' βρ«'φθ5, -ouf . TO ; a. an unborn child, embryo, foetus : Lk. i. 41, 44 ; (Hom. H. 23, 266; Plut. rep. Stoic. 41 TO βρ. iv TJi γαστρί). b. a new-born child, an infant, a babe, (so fr. Pind. down) : Lk. ii. 12, 16 ; xviii. 15 ; Acts vii. 1 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 2 ; άπο βρίφους from infancy, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (so « βρίφους. Anth. Pal. 9, 567).* βρ<χ» ; 1 aor. e/3pf |a ; fr. Pind. and Hdt. down : 1. to moisten, wet, water: Lk. vii. 38 (τ. πόδας δάκρυσι, cf. Ps. vi. 7). 44. 2. in later writ. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 291 [W. 23]) to water with rain (Polyb. IC, 12, 3). lo βροντή 106 βωμός cause to rain, to pour the rain, spoken of God : iirl τίνα, Mt. V. 45 ; to send down tike rain : xipios ίβρ(ξ( ifiof κ. Trip, Gen. xix. 24 ; χάλαζαν, Ex. ix. 23 ; [μάννα, I's. Li.wii. (Ixxviii.) 24] ; inipers. βρίχιί it rains (cf. W. § 58, 9 b. j3.) : Jas. V. 17; with added ace, πνρ κ. θ(Ίον, Lk. xvii. v.) ; with added subject, ieros, Rev. xi. 6.' βροντή, -it, ij, thunder: Mk. iii. 17 (on which see Boavfpyis) ; Jn. xii. 29 ; Rev. iv. 5 ; vi. 1 ; viii. 5 ; x. 3 sq.; xi. 19; xiv. 2; xvi. 18; xix. 6. [From Horn, down.]* βροχή, -ης, ή, (βρίχω, q. v.), a later Grk. word (cf. Lob. ad rhrvn. p. 291), a bcsprinL-linr/, watering, rain: used of a heavy shower or violent rainstorm, Mt. vii. 25, 27 ; Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 10; civ. (cv.) 32, for Dt?;.* βρόχοϊ, -ου, ό, α noose, slip-knot, by which any person or thing is caught, or fastened, or suspended, (fr. Horn, down) : βρόχον (ττιβάλΧίΐ,ν τινί to throw a noose upon one, a, fin•, expression borrowed from war [or the chase] (so j3p. π(ριβάλλ(ΐν Tivl, Philo, vit. Moys. iii. § 34 ; Joseph. b. j. 7, 7, 4), i. e. by craft or by force to bind one to some necessity, to constrain him to obey some command, 1 Co. vii. 3.j.• βρνγμός, -oC, 0, (βρύχω, q. v.), a gnashing of teeth : with των οδόντων added, a phrase denoting the extreme an- guish and utter despair of men consigned to eternal condemnation, Mt. viii. 12; xiii. 42, 50 ; xxii. 13; xxiv. 51 ; XXV. 30 ; Lk. xiii. 28. (In Sir. li. 3 βρυγμάς is atr tributed to beasts, which gnash the teeth as they attack their prey; in Prov. xix. 12 Sept. for Dpi snarling, growling; in the sense of biting, Nic. th. 716, to be de- rived fr. βρνκω to bite ; cf. Fritzsche on Sir. as above, p. 308.)• βρνχω ; [impf. (βρυχονί ; to grind, gnash, with the teeth : όδόνταί ΐπί τίνα, Acts vii. 54, (Job xvi. 9 ; Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 16; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) Γ2 for a'yd2 ρ^^Π and 0"4i? ρ"ίΠ ; intrans. without odovras, [Ilermipp. ap.] Plut. Pericl. 33 fin. ; [Hipp, (see L. and S.)]). Of the same origin as βρνκω (cf. δίχω and δ/κω), to bite, chew ; see Hermann on Soph. Philoct. 735 ; [Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. V. βρύκω\' βρνω ; 1. intrans. tn abound, gush forth, teem with juices, ([akin to βλύω, φλνω ; see Lob. Techn. p. 22 sq. ; Curtius p. 531], cf. Germ. Jinist, Briihe); often so fr. Horn, down (II. 17, 56 epvos άνθι'ί βρύα). 2. more rarely trans, to send forth abundanlli/: absol. to teem, ή yfj βρϋ(ί, Xen. venat. 5, 12; with an ace. of flowers, fruits, XapiTf Γ ρόδα βρνονσι, Anacr. 44, 2 (37, 2) ; to send forth water, Jas. iii. 1 1 .* βρωμά, -rof, τό, (βρόω i. q. βιβρώσκω), that which is eaten, food; (fr. Thuc. and Xen. down) : 1 Co. viii. 8, 13; x. 3; Ro. xiv. 15,20; plur.: Mt. xiv. 15; Mk. vii. 19; Lk. iii. 11 ; ix. 13 ; 1 Co. vi. 13 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; Heb. xiii. 9 ; βρώματα κ. πόματα meats and drinks, Heb. ix. 10 (as in Plat, legg- 1 1 p. 932 e. ; 6 p. 782 a. ; Critias p. 1 1 5 b. ; in sing. Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 17). of the soul's aliment, i. e. either instruction, 1 Co. iii. 2 (as solid food opp. to to γαΚα), or that which deUghts and truly satisfies the mind, Jn. iv. 34.• βρύσ-ιμοΐ, -ov, (βρώα -is), eatable : Lk. xxiv. 41. (Lev. xix. 23 ; Ezek. xlvii. 12. Aeschyl. Prom. 479; [Antiatt. in JJekker, Anecd. p. 84, 25].) * βρωσ-ΐΐ, -eojs, ή, (βρόω, βιβρώσκω) ; 1. the act of eat- ing, (TertuU. esus): βρωσκ κ. τιόσις, Ro. xiv. 17 (on which see βασιλιία, 3) ; with gen. of the obj. 1 Co. viii. 4 (Plat, de rep. 10 p. 619 c. παίδων αϊιτοΰ) ; in a wider sense, corrosion: Mt. vi. 19 sq. 2. as almost every- where in Grk. writ, that which is eaten, food, aliment : Heb. xii. IC; (if βρώσιν for food, 2 Co. ix. 10 (Sap. iv. 5) ; βρώσις κα'ι [so WH txt. Trmrg. ; al. rf\ νάσΐί. Col, ii. IC, (Horn. Od. 1, 191 ; Plat. legg. 6, 783 c. ; Xen. mem. 1, 3, 15; [cf. Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 200 note; \icr contra Mey. or EUic. on Col. 1. c.]). used of the soul's aliment — either that which refreshes it, Jn. iv. 32, or nourishes and supports it unto life eternal, Jn. vi. 27, 55.• βρύσ-κω, unused pres. whence pf. βίβρωκα ; see βι- βρώσκω- βνβίζω ; [pres. pass, βυθίζομαι] ; (βυθός. q. v.) ; to plunge into the deep, to sink : ώστ( βυθΙζ(σθαι αυτά, of ships (as Poly b. 2, 10, 5; 16,3,2; [Aristot., Diod., al.]), so that thei/ began to sink, Lk. v. 7; metaph. τινά its o\e- θρον [A. V. drown], 1 Tim. vi. 9.• βυθό$, -οϋ, 6, the bottom (of a ditch or trench, Xen. oec. 19, 11) ; the bottom or depth of the sea, often in Grk. writ, fr. Aeschyl. Prom. 432 down; the sea itself, the deep sea: 2 Co. xi. 25, as in Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 24 ; so Lat. profundum in Lucan, Phars. 2, 680 "profundi ora videns."* βυρσίΐίΐ, -ί'ωΓ, ό, (βύρσα a skin stripped off, a hide), a tanner: Acts ix. 43; x. 6, 32. (Artem. oneir. 4, 56.) [Cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Tanner.] • βΰσίΓίνος, -η, -ov, (ή βνσσος, q. v. ; cf. άκάνθινος. άμα- ράντινος), made of fine linen ; neut. βΰσσινον se. ιμάτιον (W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (72)]), {a) fine linen (garment) : Rev. xviii. 12 (Rec. βίσσου), 16; xLx. 8, 14 [WHmrg. \(υκοβΰσσινον (for βΰσσινον XfvKov)]. (Gen. xii. 42; 1 Chr. XV. 27. Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Diod. 1, 85 ; Plut., al.)• βνσσΌί, -ου, ή. [Vanicek, Fremdworter, s. v.], byssus, a species of Egyptian flax (found also in India and Achaia) — or linen made from it — very costly, delicate, .soft, white, and also of a yellow color, (see respecting it Pollux, onomast. 1. 7 c. 17 § 75) : Lk. xvi. 19; Rev. xviii. 12 Rec. (In Sept. generally for vi'd, also 1'13, cf. 1 Chr. XV. 27; 2 Chr. v. 12; cf. Win. R\V"B. s. v. Baumwolle; [BB.DD. s. vv. Byssus and Linen]. Joseph, antt. 3, G, 1 sq. ; 3, 7, 2; Philostr. vit. ApoU. 2, 20 [p. 71 ed. Olear.] ; on the flax of Achaia growing about EUs, cf. Pausan. 5, 5, 2; 7, 21, 7.)• βω|ΐό$, -οΰ, ό, (see βοννός), an elevated place ; very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, a raised place on which to offer sacrifice, an altar : Acts xvii. 23. (Often in Sept. for Π3η.) * 107 Γαββαθα Γαββαθά [-θά WH], η, indecl., Gabbaiha, Chald. Sn3J, (Ilebr. 3J the back) ; hence a raised place, an elevation, (cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche, Ueber die Verdienste Tholucks u.s.w. p. 102 sq. ; Delilzsrh in the Zeitschr. f. luth. Tlieol. for 1876, p. 605 ; \_WUnschc, Neue Beitrage u.s.w. p. 560]; but see the somewhat diff. opinion of Keim, Jesu von Nazara, iii. 365): Jn. xix. 13, where is added the rather loose interpretation 'Κίθόστμωτον, i. e. a stone pave- ment, wliich some interpreters think was a portable pavement, or the square blocks such as the Roman gen- erals carried with them, to be laid down not only under their seats in general, but also under those they occupied in administering justice (cf. Suet. Jul. Caes. 46 and Casauhon ad loc). This opinion is opposed by the cir- cumstance that John is not accustomed to add a Greek interpretation except to the Hebr. names of fixed Jewish locaUties, cf. v. 2 ; ix. 7 ; xix. 1 7 ; and that this is so in the present case is evident from the fact that he has said i?f τόποι/, i. e. in a definite locality which had that name. Besides, it cannot be proved that that custom of the military commanders was followed also by the gov- ernors of provinces residing in cities. Doubtless the Chald aic name was given to the spot from its shape, the Greek n:ime from the nature of its pavement. Cf. below under λιθόστρωτοι'; Win. RWB. s. v. Litho- stroton ; [BB. DD. s. v. Gabbatha ; Tholuck, Beitrage zur Spracherkliirung u.s.w. p. 119 sqq.].* Γαβριήλ, ό, (■7X'"13J, fr. "laj strong man, hero, and Sx God), indecl., Gabriel, one of the angel-princes or chiefs of the angels (Dan. viii. 16; ix. 21) : Lk. i. 19, 26; see αμχύγ^ίλοί [and reff. s. v. «γγίλοί-, fin. ; BB.DD. s. v.].• •γάγγραινα, -ijt, ή, (γράω or ypaiva to gnaw, eat), a gan- grene, a disease by which any part of the body suffering from inrtammation becomes so corrupted that, unless a remedy be seasonably applied, the evil continually spreads, attacks other parts, and at last eats away the bones : 2 Tim. ii. 1 7 [where cf. Ellic.]. (Medical writ, [cf. Wetst. ad 1. c] ; Plut. discr. am. et adulat. c. 36.) • Γάδ, ό, (IJ fortune, cf. Gen. xxx. 1 1 ; [xlix. 19 ; on the meaning of the word see B.D. s. v.]), indecl., Gar!, the seventh son of the patriarch Jacob, by Zil]iah, Leah's maid : Rev. vii. 5.* Γαδαρηνόϊ, -ή, -όν, (fr. the prop, name Γαδαρά; cf. the adj. ΆβιΚηνή, ΜαγδαΚηνη). ofGailara, a Gadarene. Gad- ara Λvas the capital of Pera>a (Joseph, b. j. 4, 7, 3), situated opposite the southern extremity of the Lake of Gennesaret to the south-east, but at some distance from the lake on the banks of the river Ilieromax (Plin. h. n. 5, 16), 60 stadia from the city Tiberias (Joseph, vita 65), inhabited chiefly by Gentiles (Joseph, antt. 1 7, ΎαζοφυΚάκιον 11,4); cf . Win. Έ,νΓΒ. s. v. Gadara ; Riielschi in Herzog iv. p. 636 sq. ; Kneucker in Schenkel ii. 313 s(|. ; Rielim, HWB. p. 454 ; [BB.DD. s. v.]. χώρα των Γαδαρψων the countrij of the Gadarenes, Gcdaris: Jlk. v. 1 Uec. ; Lk. viii. 26 Rcc, 37 RG[but here ή Tifpixapos τών Γ.], and in Mt. viii. 28 Τ Tr WH ; but the Mss. differ in these pass. ; see Γ(ρασηνοί and TepyfOTjvol.' γάζα, -η!, ή, a Persian word, adopted by the Greeks and Latins (Cic. off. 2, 22), the royal treasury, treasure, riches, (Curt. 3, 13, 5 pecuniam regiam, quam gazam Persae vocant) : Acts viii. 27. ([Theophr.], Polyb., Diod. 17, 35 and 64; Plut., al. Sept. 2 Esdr. v. 17; vii. 20.)• Γάζα, -,f [B. 17 (15)], ij, (rt]}.] i. e. strong, fortified, (cf. Valentia) ; the i' being represented by y, cf. n^bj' Τομόρρα), formerly a celebrated city of the Philistines, situated on a hiU near the southern border of the land of Israel, between Raphia and Ascalon, twenty stadia ['at the most,' Arrian.exp. Alex. 2, 26 ; " seven," Strabo 16, 30] from the sea and eleven geographical miles from Jerusalem. It was fortified and surrounded by a mas- sive wall. Although held by a Persian garrison, Alex- ander the Great captured it after a siege of two months, but did not destroy it ([Joseph, antt. 11, 8, 4]; Diod. 1 7, 48 ; Plut. Alex. 25 ; Curt. 4, 6 sq.). Afterwards, in the year B. c. 96, Alexander Jannjeus, king of the Jews, took it after a year's siege and destroyed it (Joseph. antt. 13, 13, 3). Gabinius rebuilt it B. c. 58 (Joseph. 1. c. 14, 5, 3). Finally the emperor Augustus gave it [b. c. 30] to Herod the Great (Joseph. 1. c. 15, 7, 3), after whose death it was annexed to Syria (Josej)h. 1. c. 17, 11, 4). Modern Ghiizzeh [or Ghazzeh'], an unforti- fied town, having an area of two English miles, with between fifteen and sixteen thousand inhabitants. Men- tioned in the N. T. in Acts viii. 26, where the words αντη f στίκ ίρημο! refer to ή όδόί ; Philip is bidden to take the way which is ΐρημης, solitary ; cf . Meyer ad loc. ; [W. § 18, 9 N. 3; B. 104 (91)]. A full history of the city is given by Stark, Gazau. d. philistiiische Kiiste. Jena, 1852; a briefer account by Ifm. RWB. [see also BB. DD.] s. v. Gaza; Arnold in Herzog iv. p. G7I sqq.* γαζο-φυλάκιον, -ου. τό. (fr. γάζα, q. v., and φυΚακη ; hence i. q. θησανρυφυλάκιον, Hesych.), a repository of treasure, esp. of public treasure, a treasury : Esth. iii. 9 ; 1 Esdr. viii. 18, 44 : 1 Mace. iii. 28. In Sept. used for n3cS and 7\Tai of apartments constructed in the courts of the tem[)Ie, in which not only the sacred offerings and things needful for the temple service were kept, but in which also the priests, etc., dwelt : Neh. xiii. 7 ; χ 37 sqq. ; of the sacred treasury, in which not only treasure but also Τάϊο•{ 108 Ύαμεω the public records (Ι Mace. xiv. 49 ; cf. Grimm ad loc.) were stored, and the property of widows and orphans was depositcanquet, a marriage-feast: ^It. xxii. 8, 10 [here Τ AVH Tr mrg. ννμφών], 11, 12; plur. (referring apparently to the several acts of feasting), Mt. xxii. 2 sqq. 9 ; XXV. 10 ; Lk. xii. 36 ; xiv. 8, (cf. AV. § 27, 3 ; B. 23(21)). 2. marriage, matrimonii: Heb. xiii. 4.* γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, ye and ήρα (i. q. άμ), is properly a particle of affirma- tion and conclusion, denoting Iruh/ thfrrfhre, rerih/ as the case stands, " the thing is first affirmed by the par- ticle ye, and then is referred to what precedes by the force of the particle άρα" (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p. 232; cf. Kuhner ii. p. 724 ; [.Telf § 786 ; W. 445 (415) sq.]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently the reason and nature of something previously men- tioned are set forth, it comes to pass th.at. by the use of this particle, either the reason and cause of a forego- ing statement is added, whence arises the causal or argumentative force of the particle, /or (Lat. nam, enim; Germ, denn) ; or some previous declaration is ex- plained, whence yap takes on an explicative force: for, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet. Germ, ndmiich). Thus the force of the particle is either conclusive, or demonstrative, or explicative and declara- tory; cf. Host in Passow's Lex. i. p. 535 sqq.; Kiihner ii. pp. 724 sqq. 852 sqij. ; [cf. L. and S. s. v.]. The use of the particle in the N. T. does not differ from that in the classics. I. Its primary and original Conclusive force is seen in questions (in Grk. writ, also in exclamations) and answers expressed with emotion ; where, ace. to the con- nexion, it may be freely represented by assuredly, verily, forsooth, why, then, etc. : ev yap τούτω etc. ye profess not to know whence he is; herein then is assuredly a mar- vellous tiling, why, herein etc. Jn. ix. 30; oi yap, άλλα etc. by no means in this state of things, nay verily, but etc. Acts xvi. 37 ; certainly, if that is the case, 1 Co. viii. 11 L Τ Tr AVH. It is joined to interrogative particles and pronouns : μη yap etc. Jn. vii. 41 (do ye then sup- pose that the Christ comes out of Galilee? What, doth the Christ, etc. ?) ; μ!) yap . . . ουκ, 1 Co. xi. 22 (what ! since ye are so eager to eat and drink, have ye not, etc.?) ; Ti'r yap, Ti yap : Mt. x.xvii. 23 (τί yap κακόν 4ποίησ(ν, ye demand that he be crucified like a malefactor, Why, what evil hath he done f) ; Mt. ix. 5 (your thoughts are evil ; which then do ye suppose to be the easier, etc. ?) ;'^It. xvi. 26 ; xxiii. 17, 19; Lk. ix. 25 ; Acts xix. 35 ; τί γάρ ; for τί yap ί'στι, what then ? i. e. what, under these circumstances, ought to be the conclusion ? Phil. i. 18 [cf. EUic. ad loc] ; πώ£ yap, Acts viii. 31 ; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 245 sqq. ; Kuhner ii. p. 726 ; [Jelf ii. p. 608] ; AA' . 447 (416). Here belongs also the vexed passage Lk. xviii. 14 ζ yap eKe'ivos (so G Τ Tr mrg., but L AA^H Tr txt. παρ' eKclvov) or do ye suj>- pose then that that man went down approved of God? cf. AV. 241 (226). II. It adduces the Cause or gives the Reason of a preceding statement or opinion ; 1. univ. : Mt. ii. 5 ; vi. 24 ; Mk. i. 22 ; ix. 6 ; Lk. i. 15, 18 ; xxi. 4 ; Jn. ii. 25 ; Acts ii. 25 ; Ro. i. 9, 11 ; 1 Co. xi. 5 ; Heb. ii. 8 ; 1 Jn. ii. 19; Rev. i. 3, and very often. In Jn. iv. 44 yap assigns the reason why now at length Jesus betook him- self into Galilee ; for the authority denied to a pro])het in his own country (Galilee), he had previously to seek and obtain among strangers ; cf. 45 ; Meyer [yet see ed. 6 (AA^eiss)] ad loc; Strauss, Leben Jesu, i. 725 ed. 3; Neander, Leben Jesu, p. 385 sq. ed. 1 [Am. trans, pp. 100, 168] ; Ewald, Jalirbb. d. bibl. Wissensch. x. p. 108 sqq. 2. Often the sentences are connected in such a way that either some particular statement is established by a general proposition (' the particular by the uni- versal'), as in Mt. vii. 8 ; xiii. 12: xxii. 14 ; Mk. iv. 22, 25 ; Jn. iii. 20 ; 1 Co. xii. 12 ; Heb. v. 13, etc. ; or what has been stated generally, is proved to be correctly stated by a particular instance ('the universal by the particular') : Mk. vii. 10; Lk. xii. 52, 58; Ro. vii. 2; 1 Co. i. 26 ; xii. 8. 3. To sentences in which some- thing is commanded or forbidden, yap annexes the rea- son why the thing must either be done or avoided : Mt. i. 20 .sq. ; ii. 20 ; iii. 9 ; vii. 2 ; Ro. xiii. 1 1 ; Col. iii. 3 : γαρ 110 ye 1 Th. iv. 3 ; Ileb. ii. 2, and very often. In Phil. ii. 13 yap connects the verse with vs. 12 thus: work out vour salvation with most intense earnestness, for nothing short of this accords with God's saving eflicicncv within your souls, to whom you owe both the good desire and the power to execute that desire. 4. To (luestions, yap annexes the reason why the question is asked : Mt. ii. 2 (we ask this with good reason, for we have seen the star which announces his birth) ; Mt. .xxii. 28 ; Ro. xiv. 10; 1 Co. xiv. 9; Gal. i. 10. 5. Fretjuently the statement which contains the cause is interrogative ; n'r, τι yap: Lk. xxii. 27; Ro. iv. 3; xi. 34; 1 Co. ii. IG; vii. 1 1) ; Ileb. i. 5 ; xii. 7 ; τί yap for τι yap ί'στι, Ro. iii. 3 (cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; [Ellic. on Phil. i. 18]); ha τί yap, 1 Co. X. 29 ; ποίο yap, Jas. iv. 14 [WII txt. oni. Tr br. yap]. 6. Sometimes in answers it is so used to make good the substance of a preceding question that it can be ren- dered yea, assuredly: 1 Co. ix. 10; 1 Th. ii. 20; cf. Kuhner ii. p. 724. 7. Sometimes it confirms, not a sin- gle statement, but the point of an entire discussion : Ro. ii. 2.5 (it is no advantage to a wicked Jew, for etc.). On the other hand, it may so confirm but a single thought as to involve the force of asseveration and be rendered assurer! 1 1/, yea : Ro. χ v. 27 ((ΙΒόκησαν yap) ; so also και yap, Phil. ii. 27. 8. It is often said that the sentence of which yap introduces the cause, or renders the reason, is not expressed, but must be gathered from the eon- text and supplied in thought. But that this ellipsis is wholly imaginary is clearly shown by Klolz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 236 scj., cf. W. 446 (415) sq. The particle is everywhere used in reference to something expressly stated. Suffice it to append a very few examjiles; the true nature of many others is shown under the remain- ing heads of this article: In Mt. v. 12 before yap some supply ' nor does this happen to you alone ' ; but the rea- son is added why a great reward in heaven is reserved for those who suffer persecution, which reason consists in this, that the prophets also suffered persecution, and that their reΛvard is great no one can doubt. In Ro. viii. 18 some have supplied "do not shrink from this suffer- in;/ with Christ ' ; but on the use of yap here, see III. a. below. On Mk. vii. 28 [T Tr λ\ΊΙ om. L br. yap], where before κα\ yap some supply 'but lielp me,' or 'yet wc do not suffer even the dogs to perish with hunger,' 'see 10 b. below. In Acts ix. 11 before yap many supply 'he will listen to thee'; but it introduces the reason for the preceding command. 9. Λ^Πιεη in successive state- ments yap is repeated twice or thrice, or even four or five times, either a. one and the same thought is confirmed by as many arguments, each having its own force, as there are repetitions of the particle [Mey. denies the coordi- nate use of yap in the N. T., asserting that the first is argumentative, the second explicative, see his Comm. on the pass, to follow, also on Ro. viii. 6] : Mt. vi. 32 ; Ro. xvi. 18 sq.; or b. every succeeding statement contains the reason for its immediate predecessor, so that the state- ments are subordinate one to another : Alk. vi. 52 ; Mt. xvi. 25-27 ; Jn. iii. 19 sq. ; v. 21 sq. ; Acts ii. 15 ; Ro. iv. 13-15 ; viii. 2 sq. 5 sq. ; 1 Co. iii. 3 sq. ; ix. 15-1 7 (where five times in G L Τ Tr WH) ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Jas. ii. 10, etc. ; or c. it is repeated in a different sense : Mk. ix. 39-41; Ro. V. 6 sq. (where cf. W. 453 (422)); x. 2-5 (four times) ; Jas. iv. 14 [WII txt. om. Tr br. the first yap, L WII mrg. om. the second]. 10. καϊ yap (on which cf. Kuhner ii. p. 854 sq. ; W. 448 (417) ; [Ellic. on 2 Thess. iii. 10]) is a. for, and truly, (^etenim, nami/ue, [the sim- ple rendering for is regarded as inexact by many ; cf. Mey. on 2 Co. xiii. 4 and see Ilartunt/, Partikeln, i.l37 sq. ; Kruger § 69, 32, 21]) : Mk. .xiv. 70; Lk. xxii. 37 [L Tr br. yap] ; 1 Co. v. 7 ; xi. 9 ; xii. 1 3. b. for also, for even, (nam etiani) : Mt. viii. 9 ; Mk. x. 45 ; Lk. vi. 32 ; Jn. iv. 45; 1 Co. xii. 14, etc. In Mk. vii. 28 (cai yap [R (i L br.] τα Kvvaput etc. the woman, by adducing an exam])Ie, con- firms what Christ had said, but the example is of such a sort as also to prove that her request ought to be granted. Te yap for indeed (Germ, dennja) : Ro. vii. 7 ; cf. Fritz- sche ad loc.; W. 448 (417). ιδού yap, see under Ihoi. III. It serves to explain, make clear, illus- trate, a preceding thought or word: for \. q. that is, namely ; a. so that it begins an exposition of the thing just announced [cf. W. 454 (423) sq.] : Mt. i. 18 [R U] ; xix. 12 ; Lk. xi. 30 ; xviii. 32. In Ro. viii. 18 yap introiluces a statement setting forth the nature of the συκδο^ασΑήι/αι just mentioned. b. so that the explana- tion is intercalated into the discourse, or even added by way of appemlLx : Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16; ii. 15; v. 42; Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. xvi. 5. In Mk. xvi. 4 the information ην yap peyas σφόδρα is added to throw light on all that has been previously said (in vs. 3 sip) about the stone. rV. As respects Position: ydp never occupies the first place in a sentence, but the second, or third, or even the fourth (ό τοΰ deov yap utof, 2 Co. i. 19 — ace. to true text). Moreover, "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be no- ticed," Hermann on Soph. Phil. 1437. ■γοστήρ, -ρύς (poet, -f'pos), ή, in Girk. auth. fr. Horn, down; in Sept. for IDS; 1. the belly; by melon, of the whole for a part, 2. Lat. uterus, the womb : ev ya- στρΐ (χ(ΐν Ιο he with child [see (χω, I. 1 b.] : Mt. i. 1 8, 23 ; xxiv. 1 9 ; Mk. xiii. 1 7 ; Lk. xxi. 23 ; 1 Th. v. 3 ; Rov. xii. 2 ; (in Sept. for Π^ΓΙ, fien. xvi. 4 sip ; xxxviii. 25 ; Is. vii. 14, etc. ; Hdt. 3, 32 and vit. Ilom. 2; Artem. oneir. 2, IH p. 105; 3, 32 p. 177; Pausan., Hdian., al.) ; συ\- \αμβάν(σθαι iv yaaTpi to conceive, become pregnant, Lk. i. 31. 3. Ilic stomach; by synecdoche α ylutton, gor- mandizer, a man who is as it were all stomach, Hes. theog. 26 (so also yaaTpn. Arstph. av. 1604 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 28 ; and Lat. renter in Lucil. sat. 2, 24 ed. Gerl. ' vivite ventres ') • yaoTipei άργαί. Tit. i. 1 2 ; sec apyor, b.* yi, an enclitic particle, answering exactly to no one woid in Lat. or Eng. ; used by the bibl. writ, much more rarely than by Grk. writ. How the Greeks use it, is shown by (among others) Hermann ad Vig. p. 822 sqq. : Klolz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 272 sqq.; Rost in Passow's Lex. i. p. 538 sqq. ; [L. and S. s. v. ; T. S. Evans in Journ. of class, and sacr. Philol. for 1857, p. 187 sqt].]. It indi- ye 111 Γβθσημανη cates that the meaninpr of the word to which it belongs has especial promineinT•, and therefore that that word is to be distinguished from the rest of the sentence and uttered with greater emphasis. This distinction " can be made in two ways, by mentioning either the least important or the most; thus it happens that ye seems to have contrary significations : at least and even " (Her- mann I.e. p. 822). 1. where what is least is indi- cated ; indeed, truly, at least : Sia y( την avaiSfiav, Lk. xi. 8 (λνΙιβΓβ, since the force of the statement lies in the substantive not in the preposition, the Greek should have read δια τήν ye άραίδ-, cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 327 ; Rost 1. c. p. 542 ; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]); διά ye to wapexeiv μοί (coVof, at least for this reason, that she troubleth me [A. V. yet because etc.], Lk. xviii. 5 (better Greek δια τά ye etc.). 2. where what ismost or greatest is indicated ; even : or ye the very one who etc., precisely he tvlio etc. (Germ. der es ja ist, u-elcher etc.'), Ro. viii. 32 ; cf. Klotz 1. c. p. 305; Matthiae, Lex. Euripid. i. p. fil3 sq. 3. joined to other particles it strengthens their force ; a. άλλα ye [so most edd.] or aWaye [(irsb.] (cf. AV. § 5, 2) : Lk. xxiv. 21 ; 1 Co. ix. 2 ; see άλλα, L 10. b. άρα ye or 'tpaye, see άρα, 4. 2ρά ye, see Spa, 1. c. «ye [so G T, but L Tr WII el ye: cf. W. u. s. ; Lips. Gram. Unters. p. 123], foil, by the indie, if indeed, seeing that, " of a thing be- lieved to be correctly assumed" {Herm. ad Vig. p. 831 ; cf. Fritzsche, Praeliminarien u.s.w. p. 67sqq. ; Anger, Laodicenerbrief, p. 46 ; [W. 448 (41 7 sq.). Others hold that Hermann's statement does not apply to the N. T. instances. Ace. to Meyer (see notes on 2 Co. v. 3 ; Eph. iii. 2 ; Gal. iii. 4) the certainty of the assumption resides not in the particle but in the context ; so EUicott (on Gal. 1. c., Eph. 1. c.) ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c. ; Col. i. 23. Her- mann's canon, though assented to by Bornemann (Cyrop. 2, 2, 3 p. 132), Stallbaum (Meno p. 36), al., is qualified by Baumlein (Partikeln, p. 64 sfj.), who holds that ye often has no other effect than to emphasize the condition expressed by ei ; cf. also Winer ed. Moulton p. 5G1]), if, that is to say ; on the assuynption that, (see etnep s. v. el. III. 13) : Eph. iii. 2 ; iv. 21 ; Col. i. 23 ; with καί added, if that also, if it be indeed, ((ierm. wenn denn audi) : eiye [L Tr WH mrg. e" irep] και evSvaa^evoi, οΰ yu^KOi evpeO. if indeed we shall be found actually clothed (with a new body), not naked, 2 Co. v. 3 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; eiye κα\ eiKTi sc. τοσαΟτα enaBere, if indeed, as I believe, ye have experienced such benefits in rain, and have not already received harm from your inclination to Judaism, Gal. iii. 4 [yet cf. Mey., ElHc, Bp. Lghtft., al. ad loc.]. d. ei Se μr;ye[oΓ ei ie μή ye Lchm. Treg.] (also in Plat., Arstph., Plut., al. ; cf. Bornemann, Scholia ad Luc. p. 95 ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 527), stronger than el Se μη [Β. 393 (336 sq.) ; cf. W. 583 (543) ; 605 (563) ; Mey. on 2 Cor. xi. 16], a. after affirmative sentences, but unless perchance, but if not : Mt. vi. 1 ; Lk. x. 6 ; xiii. 9. β. after negative sen- tences, otherwise, else, in the contrary event: Mt. ix. 17; Lk. V. 36 sq. ; xiv. 32 ; 2 Co. xi. 16. e. Kaiye [so G T, but LTrWH καί ye; cf. reff. under etye above], (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 319 ; [W. 438 (408)]), a. and at least : Lk. xix. 42 [Tr txt. ΛΥΗ om. L Tr mrg. br.]. β. and truly, yea indeed, yea and : Acts ii. 18; xvii. 27 L Τ Tr WII. f. xaiVoiye [so G Τ WH, but L καίτοι ye, Tr καί Toi ye ; cf. reff. under c. above. Cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 654 ; W. 444 (413)], although indeed, and yet indeed : Jn. iv. 2 ; also in Acts xiv. 17 [R G] ; xvii. 27 Rec. g. μevoΰvye see in its place, h. μητιye, see μηη, [and in its place].' FcSeuv, 0, indecl. [in the Bible (cf. B. p. 15 (14)), and in Suidas (e. g. 1 737 a.) ; but] in Joseph, antt. 5, (;, [3 and] 4 re8ef. -γΐγ^νι/ημαι ; 1 aor. €γ(νιήθην ; (fr. yivva, poetic for yei/os) ; iu Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down ; in Sept. for iV ; tu ber/el ; 1. properly : of men begetting children, Mt. i. 1-16; Acts vii. 8, 29; foil, by ex with gen. of the mother, Mt. i. 3, 5, 6 ; more rarely of women giving birth to children, Lk. i. 13, 57; xxiii. 29 ; Jn. xvi. 21 ; fls Sov^eiau to bear a child unto bondage, that will be a slave, Gal. iv. 24, ([Xen. de rep. Lac. 1, 3] ; Lcian. de sacrif. 6; Plut. de liber, educ. 5; al. ; Sept. Is. Ixvi. 9 ; 4 Mace. x. 2, etc.). Pass, to be hef/otlen : το tv αίτη γ^ννηθίν that which is begotten in her womb, Mt. i. 20; lo he born: Mt. ii. 1, 4 [\V. 266 (250) ; B. 203 (1 76)] ; ,\ix. 12 ; x.xvi. 24 ; Mk. xiv. 21 ; Lk. i. 35 ; Jn. iii. 4 ; [Acts vii. 20] ; Ro. ix. 1 1 ; Heb. xi. 23 ; with the addition eis τον κόσμον, Jn. xvi. 21 ; foil, by ev with dat. of place. Acts xxii. 3 ; από tivos, to spring from one as father, Ileb. xi. 12 [L WH mrg. cyeinju. see Tdf. ail loc.] ; ϊκ rtvot to be born of a molluT, Mt. i. 16 ; (κ nopvfias, Jn. viii. 41 ; e^ αΙμάτων, €κ θξΧηματος άνδρόζ, Jn. i. l.'i; €K της σαρκός, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.•^''• γίγ^νημ.] ; ev άμαρ- τίαΐί δλοί, Jn. ix. 34 (see αμαρτία, 2 a.) ; fl'sTt, to be born for something, Jn. xviii. 37; 2 Pet. ii. 12 [Tdf. γ^γινημ. 80 Rec.'""^^]; with an adj.: τυφλΰς yeyeWi/^ai, Jn. ix. 2, 19 sq. 32; 'Ρωμαίος to be supplied, Acts xxii. 28; rij dia\f κτω, fv η ίγ€ννηθημΐν. Acts ii. 8 ; γ^ννηθίΐς κατά σάρκα begotten or born according to (by) the working of nat- ural passion ; κατίι πν(νμα according to (by) the working of the divine promise, Gal. iv. 29, cf. 23. 2. metaph. a. univ. lo engender, cause to arise, excite : μάχας, 2 Tim. ii. 23 φλάβην, Χύπην, etc. in Grk. writ.), b. in a Jew- isli sense, of one who brings others over to his way of Ufe : υμάς (γίννησα I am the author of your Christian life, 1 Co. iv. 15; Philera. 10, (Sanhedr. fol. 19, 2 "If one teaches the son of his neighbor the law, the Scrijv ture reckons this the same as though he had begotten him"; [cf. Philo, leg. adGaium § 8]). c. after Ps. ii. 7, it is used of God making Christ his son ; a. formally to show him to be the Messiah (vwv toC β(οϋ), viz. by the resurrection : Acts xiii. 33. β. to be the author of the divine nature which he possesses [but cf. the Comm. on the pass, that follow] : Heb. i. 5 ; v. 5. d. peculiarly, in the Gospel and 1 Ep. of John, of God conferring upon men the nature and disposition of his sons, imparting to them spiritual life, i. e. by his own holy power prompting and persuading souls to put faith in Christ and live a new life consecrated to himself; absol. : 1 Jn. v. 1; mostly in pass., « 0(θϋ or ΐκ τοϋ θιοΰ ϊγίννήβησαν, ytytv- νηται, γ^γΐννημίνος, etc. : Jn. i. 13 ; 1 Jn. ii. 29 [Rec.*' yt- ■ye'i/T/rai] ; iii. 9; iv. 7; v. 1, 4, 1-^; also c< τοϋ ττνίνματυς γΐννΰσθαι, Jn. iii. 6 [Rec.*'"'• yeyei^^.], 8 ; ΐξ ύδατος κα\ πνεύματος (because that moral generation is effected in receiving baptism [(?) cf. Schaff's Langc, (iodet. West- cott, on the words, and reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3]), Jn. iii. 5 ; άνωθ(ν γfvvάσθaι, Jn. iii. 3, 7 (see avwufu, c.) e(juiv. to TtKvov θΐου γίνίσθαι, i. 1 2. [CoMr. : avayfvvam.l * ■γί'ννημα, -tos. to, (fr. yewάω), that wliicli has lieen be- l/ollen or bin-n ; a. as in the earlier Grk. writ. fr. Soph, down, the ojl'sprinr/, prorjenij, of men or of animals ; ϊχι- hvuv, Mt. iii. 7 ; xii. 34 ; xxiii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 7 ; {yvvaiKUv, Sir. X. 18). b. fr. Polyb. [1, 71, 1 etc.] on [cf. W. 23], the fruits of the earth, /iroducts of arjrieulture, (in Sept. often yf ννηματα της γης) : Lk. xii. 1 8 (where Tr [txt. WH] τον οΊτον) ; της άμπίλον, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; SIk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. xxii. 18; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 286. Metaph. /ruiV, reward, jirnfit : της δικαιοσύνης, 2 Co. ix. 10, (Hos. x. 12 ; της σοφίας. Sir. i. 17; vi. 19). Further, see γίνημα* Γίννησαρί'τ [so G Τ Tr WH], -ρίθ [Lchm. in Mt. xiv. 34], \Γ(νησαρίτ Rec. in Mk. vi. 53 ; cf. Tdf. ed. 2 Proleg. p. xxxv., ed. 7 Proleg. p. liv. note^]. (Targunis "^O'^j or "ID13J [ace. to Delitzsch (Romerbr. in d. Ilebr. iibers. ]>. 27) Ίρ^ί, ipuj] ; Γ(ννησάρ, 1 Macc. xi. 67; Josepli. b.j. 2, 20, 6 etc.; Oenesaru, Plin. 5, 15), Gennesaret, a very lovely and fertile region on the Sea of Galilee (Josei)h. b. j. 3, 10, 7) : η yi, Γ(ννησ. Mt. xiv. 34 ; Mk. vi. 53; ή λίμνη Γίννησ. Lk. v. 1, anciently Π133 D", Num. xxxiv. ll,orrili:2) D", Josh. xii. 3, fr. thecity niJ3,Deut. iii. 1 7, which was near b}• ; called in the (iospels ή θάλασσα της Γαλιλαίας, ^Ik. i. 16; Mt. iv. 18; η θάλασσα της Ύιβ(ρι- άδος, Jn. vi. 1 ; xxi. 1. The lake, ace. to Josei)h. b.j. 3, 10, 7, is 140 stadia long and 40 wide ; [its extreme di- mensions now are said to average 12Jm. by 6 J m., and its level to be nearly 700 ft. below that of the Jlediter- ranean]. Cf. liuelschi in Ilerzog v. p. 6 sq. ; Furrer in Schenkel ii. p. 322 sqq. ; \_Wilson in "The Recovery of Jerusalem," Pt. ii. ; Robinson, Phys. Geog. of the Holy Land, p. 199 sqq. ; BB.DD. For conjectures respecting the derivation of the word cf. Alex.'s Kitto sub fin. ; Mer- rill, GaUlee in the Time of Christ, § vii.].* γί'ννησίϊ, -(ως, η, (yfwάω), a heiiettiug, enrjendering, (often so in Plat.) ; uutiritg, birth : Rec. in Mt. i. 18 and Lk. i. 14 ; see y«Ί') ; nation (i. e. nationalitii or descent from a particular people) : Mk. vii. 26 ; Acts iv. 36; xviii. 2, 24. d. concr. the aggregate of many mdi- Γΐρασηνός 114 Υ') viduals of the same nature, Und, sort, species : Mt. xiii. 47 ; xvii. 21 [T WHoni. Tr br. the vs.]; Mk. L\. 'dd ; 1 Co. xii. 10, 28; xiv. 10. (AVith the same significations in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)* Γίρασ-ηνόβ, -oO, 0, Gerasene, i. e. belonging to the city Gerasa (ja Τίρασα, Joseph, b. j. 3, 3, 3) : ISIt. viii. 28 [Lchm.]; >lk. v. 1 [L Τ WH Tr txt.]; Lk. viii. 26 and 37 [L Tr WIl] ace. to very many eodd. seen by Origen. But since Gerasa was a city situated in the southern part of Persea (Joseph. 1. c, cf. 4, 9, 1), or in Arabia (Orig. opp. iv. 140 ed. De la Rue), that cannot be referred to here ; see Ταίαρηνήί, and the ne.ft word.* Γ€ργίσην05, -r;, -ox, Gergesene, belonging to the city Gergesa, whiuh is assumed to have been situated on the eastern shore of Lake Gennesaret: Mt. viii. 28 Rec. But this reading depends on the authority and 0])inion of Origen, who thought the variants found in his Mss. Τα6αρψων and Τιρασηνων (see these words) must be made to conform to the testimony of those who said that there was formerly a certain city Gergesa near the lake. But Josephus knows nothing of it, and states expressly (antt. 1, 6, 2), that no trace of the ancient Gergesites [A. V. Girgashites, cf. B. D. s. v.] (mentioned Gen. xv. 20; Josh. -xxiv. 1 1 ) had survived, except the names preserved in the O. T. Hence in Mt. viii. 28 we must read Γαδα- ρηνων [so Τ Tr WH] and suppose that the jurisdiction of the city Gadara extended quite to the Lake of Gennes- aret ; but that Matthew (viii. 34) erroneously thought that this city was situated on the lake itself. For in Mk. V. 14 sq. ; Lk. viii. 34, there is no objection to the sui> position that the men came to Jesus from the rural dis- tricts alone. [But for the light thrown on this matter by modern research, see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Gadara ; Thomson, The Land and the Book, ii. 34 sqq. ; Wilson in " The Recovery of Jerusalem " p. 286 sq.] * Ycpous-Ca, -at, ή, (adj. yepoiaios, belonging to old men, ykptov), a senate, council, of elders; used in prof, autli. of the chief council of nations and cities (fV raii noKeai al ytpovaim, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 16 ; in the O. T. of the chief council not only of the whole people of Israel, Ex. iii. 16, etc. ; 1 Mace. xii. 6, etc. ; but also of cities, Deut. xix. 12, etc.) ; of the (ireat Council, the Sanhedrin of the Jews : Acts v. 21, where to to awkbpiov is added και τιάσαν την ytpovaiav των υιών ΊσραηΧ and indeed (και explicative) all the senate, to signify the full Sanhedrin. [Cf. Schiirer, Die Gemeindeverfassung d. Juden in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargestellt. Leips. 1879, p. 18 sq.; Hatch, Bamp. Lects. for 1880, p. 64 sq.]* γί'ρων, -ovTos.o, [fr. Hom. down], an oUI man : Jn. iii. 4. [Syn. cf. Augustine in Trench § cvii. 2.] * ^eiu:,[cf. LaA. gusto, (ierm. kosten; Curtius § 131]; to cause to taste, to give one a taste of τινά (den. xxv. 30). In the N. T. only Mid. ydopai : fut. γίύσομαι ; 1 aor. (γ€νσάμην ; 1. to taste, try the flavor of: Mt. xxvii. 34 ; contrary to better Grk. usage (cf. W. § 30, 7 c. [and p. 36 ; Antiiol. Pal. 6, 120]) with ace. of the obj. : Jn. ii. 9. 2. to ta.ile, i. e. perceive the flavor of, partake (f. enjoy : rivor, Lk. xiv. 24 (yt uo-irai μον toC SdViOu, i. e. shall par- take of my banquet) ; hence, as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. down, i. q. to feci, ynake trial of experience : twos, IIcl). vi. 4 ; ρήμα flfoC, ib. 5, (τής γχώσίωί. Clem. Koui. 1 Cor. 3G, 2). as in Chald., Syr. and Rabbin, writers, yeufffiai ToC θάνατον [W. 33 (32)] : Mt. xvi. 2S ; Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27; Jn. viii. 52 ; lieb. ii. 9 ; [cf. Wetsti-in on Mt. 1. c. ; Meyer on Jn. 1. c. ; Bleek, Liinem., Alf. on Heb. 1. c.]. foil, by on: 1 Pet. ii. 3 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 9). 3. to take food, eat: absol., Acts x. 10; xx. 11; cf. Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 47 ; to take nourishment, eat — [but sul> stantially as above], with gen. μι^δίχόί, Actsxxiii. 14; with the ellipsis of a gen. denoting unlawful food, Col. ii. 21.* ■yewpYc'w, -ώ : [pres. pass, y(ωpyoϋμaι] ; (yetopyos, (|. V.) ; to practise agriculture, to till the ground: την γην (Plat. Theag. p. 121 b.; Eryx. p. 392 d. ; [al.] ; 1 Esdr. iv. 6 ; 1 Mace. xiv. 8) ; Pass. : Ileb. vi. 7.* -ycώp7ιov, -ου, τό, a (cultivated) flel•! : 1 Co. iii. 9 [A. V. husbandry (with marg. tillage)']. (Prov. xxiv. 45 (30) ; xxxi. 16 (xxix. 34) ; Theag. in schol. Pind. Nem. 3, 21 ; Strabo 14, 5, 6 p. 671 ; [al.].)* γ€ωργ05, -οΰ, ό, (fr. yf) and ΕΡΓΩ), fr. [Hdt.], Xen. and Plat, down; a husl/andmnn, tiller of the soil: 2 Tim. ii. 6 ; Jas. V. 7 ; several times in Sept. ; used of a vine-<]resser (Ael. nat. an. 7, 28; [Plat. Theaet. p. 178 d. ; al.]) in Mt. xxi. 33 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sq. 7, 9; Lk. .xx. 9 sq. 14, 16; Jn. XV. 1.* γή, gen. y^f, ή, (contr. fr. yea, poet, yaia), Sept. very often for y>t< and Π3ΊΚ, earth; 1. arable land: Mt. xiii. 5, 8, 23 ; Mk. iv! S, 20, 26, 28, 31 ; Lk. xiii. 7 ; xiv. 35 (34) ; Jn. xii. 24 ; Ileb. vi. 7 ; Jas. v. 7 ; Rev. ix. 4 ; of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed, with the implied idea of frailty and weakness : ίκ y!js χοϊκός, 1 Co. .XV. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a standing-place, (Cierm. Boden) : Mt. x. 29 ; xv. 35; xxiii. 35 ; xxvii. 51 ; Mk. viii. 6 ; ix. 20 ; xiv. 35 ; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.] ; xxiv. 5 ; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i. e. Rec] ; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main land, opp. to sea or water : ISIk. iv. 1 ; vi. 47 ; Lk. v. 3 ; viii. 27 ; Jn. vi. 21 ; xxi. 8 sq. 11 ; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole, the world (Lat. terrarum orhis) ; a. the earth as ojip. to the heavens: Mt. v. 18, 35; vi. 10; xvi. 19; χ viii. 18; xxiv. 35 ; Mk. xiii. 31 ; Lk. ii. 14 ; Jn. xii. 32 ; Acts ii. 1!» ; iv. 24 ; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 7, 10, 13 ; Rev. .xxi. 1 ; τα fVi τής γήί the things and beings that are on the earth, Eph. i. 1 ; Col. i. 16 [T WHom. LTrbr. τά]; involving a suggestion of mutability, frailty, infirmity, alike in thought and in action, Mt. vi. 19; τά fVl T^t y^s (equiv. to τα en-iyfia, Phil. iii. 19) terrestrial goods, pleasures, honors. Col. iii. 2 (opp. to τα άνω) ; τα μίλη ίμων τά f πϊ της γής the mem- bers of your earthly body, as it were the abode and instruments of corrupt desires. Col. iii. 5; oS)v ίκ τη! y^s . . . λαλίί (in contrast with Christ as having come from heaven) he who is of earthly (human) origin, has an earthly nature, and speaks as his earthly origin and nature prompt, Jn. iii. 31. b. the inhabited eirth, the abode of men and animals : Lk. xxi. 35 ; Acts i. 8 ; x. 1 2 ; xi. 6 ; xvii. 26 ; Heb. xi. 13; Rev. iii. 10 ; aiptiv ζαην Tivos or Tiva από της y^r, Acts viii. 33; xxii. z2 ; κΚηρο- yVpav\cts iv. 5; ix. 3 [without δί], 32. 37; xi. 26 RG; χΙΛ V j [xvi. 16 ; xix. 1]; xxviii. 8, [17]. 8. f'yiV. δί [ώς δί'^ν.] foU. by τοϋ with inf. : Acts x. 25 (Rec. om. τοί), cf.^Iey. ad loc. andW.328(307); [B. 270 (232)]. d. with dat. of •yivufiat, 116 ΎΙΙΌμαΐ |)cr8. ίο occur or Ιιαρρηι to nnf, he- fall one : foil, by inf., Acts x.\. 16 ; fiiv γίιηται (sc. αντω) tiipdv αυτά, if it liap])en t<) him, Mt. xviii. I.j ; (μ<ιΊ St μη yti/oiro κανχάσθαι Jar he it from me to i/ly ace. with inf. it happened to me, thai etc.: Acts xi. 26 LTTr WII [but aec. implied]; xxii. 6, 17, [cf. W. 323 (303); B. :W:> (262)] ; with adverbs, go, fare, (Germ, ergehen) : d, Ejih. vi. 3, (μη γίνοιτό σοι οΰτω κακώί, Ael. V. h. 9, 36). with specification of the tliini; befalling one: τί ytyovtv [LT Trtxt. Wll e'yfv.] αύτώ. Acts vii. 40 (fr. Ex. xxxii. 1); tyfvtTo [L 'Γ Tr WH e'yiVeTo] πιίσι; ψυχ;/ φύβο! fear came upon. Acts ii. 43. — Mk. iv. 11 ; ix. 21 ; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. v. 14 ; XV. 7 ; Ro. xi. 2.5 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; 2 Co. i. 8 [G L Τ Tr VVIIora.d:it.]; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; 1 Pet. iv. 12; with the ellipsis of ήμΐν, -fn. i. 1 7. iyivtro (αίτώ) γνώμη a purpose occurred to him, he determined, Actsxx. 3 [B. 268 (230), but Τ Tr WII read eytv. γνώμης; see below, 5 e. a.]. foil, by prepositions : «V airrj upon (Germ, bei or an) her, Mk. v. 33 [Rti L br.] ; etsriva. Acts xxviii. 6. 3. to arise, appear in history, come upon the stage : of men appearing in ])nblic, Mk. i. 4; Jn. i. 6, [on which two pass. cf. W. 3U0 (;J28) ; B. 308 (2ιί4) Sij.] ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; yeyavaat, have arisen and now exist, 1 .In. ii. 18. 4. In lie iniide, done, Jinis/ied : τα fpya, Ileb. iv. 3; Sia χαρών, of things fabricated, Acts xix. 26 ; of miracles to he performed, tcrought: δια τών χαρών τίνος, Mk. vi. 2; διύ Τίνος, Acts ii. 43 ; iv. 1 6, 30 ; xii. 9 ; ύπό τίνος, Lk. i.\. 7 (11 L [but the latter br. ϋπ' αυτόν]); xiii. 17; xxiii. 8; yfvopeva (1ς Καφαρν. done unto (on) Capernaum i. e. for its benefit (W. 416 (388) ; [cf. B. 333 (2S6)]), Lk.iv. 23 [Rec. (V TTj K.]. of commands, decisions, purposes, re- quests, etc. to be done, executed : Mt. vi. 10; xxi. 21 ; xxvi. 42 ; Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 22 ; xxiii. 24 ; Acts xxi. 14 ; y(- νήσίται ά λόγος will be accomplished the saying, 1 Co. xv. 54. joined to nouns implying a certain action : ή άπώ- Xfia γίγονί, Mk. xiv. 4 ; απογραφή, Lk. ii. 2 ; f jrayycXm ■γινομΐνη ύπό ^fou given by (iod. Acts xxvi. 6; άνύκρισις. Acts XXV. 26 ; νόμου μ€τάθ(σις, Heb. vii. 12 ; άφισις, Ileb. iz. 22. of institutions, laws, etc. to be established, en- acted: TO σάβίίατον ΐγίνιτο, the institvition of the Sabbath, Mk. ii. 27 ; ό νίψος, ( Jal. iii. 1 7 ; οΰ γίγονιν οϋτως hath not been so ordained, Mt. xix. 8. of feasts, marriages, en- tertainments, to be kept, celebrated : το ττΰσχα, Mt. x.xvi. 2 (i. q. npi'i, 2 K. xxiii. 22) ; to σάβϋατον. Mk. vi. 2 ; τα iyKaivia, Jn. x. 22 ; [γ(ν(σίοις γινομίνοις (cf. W. § 31 , 9 b. ; R (j γίνισίων άγομίνων), Mt. xiv. 6], (τά 'Ολύμπια, Xen. Ilell. 7, 4, 28 ; Ίσθμια, 4, 5, 1) ; γάμος, Jn. ii. 1. οΰτω; γνηται iv (μοί so done with me, in my case, 1 Co. ix. 15. 5. to become, be made, " in passages where it is speci- fied who or what a person or thing is or has been ren- dered, as respects quality, condition, place, rank, charac- ter " (Wahl, Clavig Apocr. V. T. p. 101). a. with a predicate added, expressed by a subst. or an adj. : oi λίθοι ovTOi άρτοι γίνωνται, Mt. iv. 3 ; Lk. iv. 3 ; ύδωρ οΓΐΌΚ yfyf- νημίνον, .In. ii. 9 ; άρχιιριυί γ(νόμ(νος, Heb. vi. 20 ; δκίκοκο;, Col. i. 25 ; 6 λόγος σαρξ iyevfTo, Jn. i. 14 ; άνηρ, 1 Co. xiii. 11, and many other exx. ; χάρις οΰκίτι γίνιται χάρις grace ceases to have the nature of grace, can no longer be called grace, Ro. xi. 6 ; άκαρπος γίνιται. Ml•, xiii. 22; Jlk. iv. 1 !» ; — in Mt. xvii. 2 ; Lk. viii. 1 7 ; Jn. v. 6, and many otlier places, contextually, to show one's self, proce one's self: Lk. X. 36 ; xix. 17 ; xxiv. 19 ; Ro. xi. 34 ; xvi. 2 ; 2 Co. i. 18 Rec. ; 1 Th. i. 6 ; ii. 7 ; Ileb. xi. 6, etc. ; esp. in exhor- tations : γΊν(σβ(, Mt. X. 16; xxiv. 44; Lk. vi. 36; Eph. iv. 32 ; Col. iii. I J ; μη γίνου, Jn. xx. 27 ; μη γίν(σθ(, Mt. vi. 16 ; Eph. v. 7, 1 7 ; 1 Co. x. 7 ; μή γινώμιθα, (Jal. v. 26 ; hence used declaratively, i. q. to he found, shown : Lk. xiii. 2 (that it was shown by their fate that they were sinners); Ro. iii. 4; 2 Co. vii. 14; — γίνομαι τινί τκ to show one's self (to be) some one to one: 1 Co. ix. 20, 22. b. with an interrog. pron. as predicate : τί ό Πίτρος (γίνίτο wliat had become of Peter, Acts xii. 18 [cf. use of Ti ίγίν. in Act. Phil, in IIcU. § 23, Tilf. Acta apost. apocr. p. 104]. c. γίνισθαί ώς or ώσά τίνα Ιο become as or like to one : Mt. x. 25 ; xviii. 3 ; xxviii. 4 ; Mk. ix. 26 ; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WII reject the pass.] ; Ro. ix. 29 (fr. Is. i. 9) ; 1 Co. iv. 1 3 ; Gal. iv. 1 2. d. γίν(σθαι (ϊς τι Ιο become i. e. be changed into somethint), come to he, issue in, something (Germ, zu elwas werden) : ίγινήβη ίΐς κιφαλήν γωνίας, Mt. x.xi. 42; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. xx. 17; Actsiv. Π ; 1 Pet.ii. 7, — all after Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22. Lk. .xiii. 1 9 ((if Sfv^pov μίγα) ; .Τη. xvi. 20 ; Acts v. 3G ; Ro. xi. 9 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (lxix.)23);l Th.iii.5; Rev. viii. 1 1 ; xvi. 19,etc. (Cipiiv. to S T\'J\ ; but the expression is also classic ; cf. W. § 29, 3 a. ; B. 150(131)). e. yiViffflai with Cases ; a. with the gen. to become the properly of any one, to come into the power of a person or thing, [cf. W. § 30,5; esp. B. 162 (142)] : Lk. XX. 14 [L nirg. «σται], 33 ; Rev. xi. 1 5 ; [γνώμης, Act.i xx. 3 TTr WH (cf. ί'λπι'δο? μίγάλης γίν. Plut. Phoc. 23, 4)] ; προφητεία Ιδίας (πιλνσ^ως ου γίνεται no one can ex- plain prophecy by his own mental power (it is not a mat^ ter of subjective interpretation), but to explain it one needs the same illumination of the Holy Spirit in which it originated, for etc. 2 Pet. i. 20. yeveauai with a gen. indicating one's age, (to be) so many years old : Lk. ii. 42 ; 1 Tim. v. 9. β. with the dat. [cf. W. 210 sq. (198)] : γίν(σθαι avhpi to become a man's wife, Ro. vii. 3 s(j. {7\''^ O'if.'-', Lev. xxii. 1 2 ; Ruth i. 1 2, etc.). f. joined to prep- ositions with their substantives ; tv tiki, to come or pass into a certain stale [cf. B. 330 (284)] : (v αγωνία, Lk. xxii. 44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; ev ί'κστάσ«. Acts xxii. 17 ; Ινπνίΰματι, Rev. 1. 10; iv. 2 ; iv δόξη [R. V. came with (in) glory], 2 Co. iii. 7; iv παραβάσιι, 1 Tim. ii. 14; er ίαυτώ, to come to himself, recover reason, Acts xii. 1 1 (also in Grk. writ. ; cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 749) ; iv Χριστώ, to be brought to the fellowship of Christ, to be- come a Christian, Ro. xvi. 7 ; iv όμοιώματι ανθρώπων, to become like men, Phil. ii. 7 ; iv λόγω κολακ(ίας [R. V. were we found using'] flattering speech, 1 Th. ii. 5. ίπάνω Tivo'f to be placed over a thing, Lk. xix. 19. μ€τά τιι/οί or σύν τιι/ι to become one's companion, associate wllh him : Mk. xvi. 10 ; Acts vii. 38 ; xx. 18 ; νπό τίνα to he made subject to one. Gal. iv. 4. [Cf. h. below.] g. with speci- fication of the terminus of motion or the place of rest : tit with ace. of place, to come to some place, arrive at some •γιρωσκω 117 Ύΐνωσκω thing, Acts χχ. 16; xxi. 17; χχν. 15; ώι iyivtro . . . tls τα ωτά μου when the voice came into my ears, Lk. i. 44 ; els with ace. of pers., of evils coming upon one, Kev. xvi. 2 II G ; of blessings, Gal. iii. 1 4 ; 1 Th. i. 5 [ l.clmi. προς ; Acts xxvi. 6 L Τ Tr \VH] ; yeveaBai in'i τοϋ τόπον, Ik. xxii. 40; fVi τη! γήί, .In. vi. 21 [Tdf. im Tijf -y.] ; liSe, ib. 25 (ί«Γ, Xen. an. 6, 3 [5], 20 ; [cf. B. 71]) ; ^πί with ace. of place, Lk. xxiv. 22 ; Acts xxi. 35 ; [Jn. vi. 21 Tdf.] ; fyevero διωγμό? en'i την ίκκΚησίαν, Acts viii. 1 ; eyevero φόβος or θαμβοί fjrl iravras, Lk. i. 65; iv. 36; Acts v. 5, 11 ; [ίκστπσΐί. Acts x. 10 (Rcc. eTreweffci/)] ; cXkos kukov K• τιονημΐίν €πϊ τ. άνθμώττυνί, Kcv. xvi. 2 \j 'Γ 'i r AVll ; tyiviio μημα ΐπΐ τίνα, λόγο? or φωνή npos τίνα (^came /ο) : Lk. iii. 2; Jn. χ. 35 ; Acts vii. ;jl [llec] ; x. 13, (Gen. xv. 1,4; Jer. i. 2, 1 1 ; xiii. 8 ; Ezek. vi. 1 ; Hos. i. 1) ; [enay- yf\ia, Acts xiii. 32 ; xxvi. 6 Rec] ; κατά with ace. of jjlace, Lk. x. 32 [Tr WII om.]; Acts xxvii. 7, (Xcn. Cyr. 7, 1, 15) ; κατά with gen. : το yevόμ(vov μημα καθ' ύλη: της Ίοχ/- δαι'π? the matter the report of whicli sjjread throughout all Judiea, Acts x. 37 ; ττρό? τίνα, 2 Jn. 12 (Rec. (\θ(1ν) ; 1 Co. ii. 3 ; συν Tti/t, to be joined to one as an associate, Lk. ii. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, .H) ; fyyi.? ylvfaUai, Eph. ii. 13 ; Tti/u?, Jn. vi. 19; h. [with ΐκ of the source (see 1 above): Mk. i. 11 (Tdf. om. cy/i/.) ; ix. 7 (TTrmrg. WII); Lk. iii. 22; ix. 35; Acts xix. 34]; yiveaOat ck μίσου, to be taken out of the way, 2 Th. ii. 7 ; yeviadai ομοθυμαδόν, of many come together in one place, Acts xv. 25 cf. ii. 1 [but only in R G ; yfvoμfvoιs ομοθυμαδόν in xv. 25 may mean either having become of one mitid, or possi- bly hwirifj come together with one accord. On the alleged use of yίvoμa^ in the N. T. as^ interchangeable with (Ιμί see Fritzschior. Opuscc. p. 284 note. CoMP. : άπο-, δια-, €irt-, πάρα-, συμ- πάρα-, πpo-yίvoμaι.'j γινύσ-κω (Attic γιγνώσκω, sci" yίvoμa^ init. ; fr. ΓΝΟΩ, as βίβρώσκω fr. ΒΡΟΩ) ; [ini])f. ey'ivωσκov^ ; fut. yvώσoμat ; 2 aor. iyiOJi» (fr. ΓΝΩΜΙ), impv. γνώθι, γνώτω, subj. γι/ώ (3 pers. sing.yrai, Mk. v. 43 ; ix. 30 ; Lk. xix. 15 L Τ Tr WH, for R G γνω [Β. p. 46 (40) ; cf. ίίδωμι init.]), inf. γνώναι, ptcp. yvovs; pf. tyvwKa (Jn. xvii. 7 ; 3 pers. plur. ίγνωκαν for eyi /ώκασι, see reff. in γίνομαι init.) ; plpf. tyvwKtiv; Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing, γινώσκιται (Mk. xiii. 28 Trmrg.)] ; pf. ίγνωσμαι ; 1 aor. ίγνώσθην ; fut. γνωσθή- νομα> ; in Grk. writ, f r. Horn, down ; Sept. for ^Ύ ; Lat. tiosco, novi (i. e. gnosco, gnovi) ; I. univ. 1. to learn to know, come to know, get a knowledge of; pass, to become known : with ace, Mt. xxii. 18 ; Mk. V. 43 ; Acts xxi. 34 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Col. iv. 8 ; 1 Th. iii. 5, etc. Pass., Mt. x. 2G ; Acts ix. 24 ; Phil, iv. 5,etc.; [iinpers. γιι/ώσ«ται, Mk. xiii. 28 Trmrg.T2, 7]; ΤΪ (K Tivos, Mt. xii. 33; Lk. vi. 44; 1 Jn. iv. 6; τίνα or τ\ (V Tivi, to find a sign in a thing by which to know, to recog- nize in or by something, Lk. xxiv. 35 ; Jn. xiii. 35 ; 1 Jn. iv. 2 ; κατίι τι γνώσομαι τοϋτο, the truth of this promise, Lk. i. 18 (Gen. xv. 8) ; ntp'i της διδαχής, Jn. vii. 1 7. often the object is not added, but is readily understood from what precedes : Mt. ix. 30 ; xii. 15 (the consultation held by the Pharisees) ; Mk. vii. 24 (he would have no one know that he was present) ; Mk. ix. 30 ; Ro. x. 19, etc. ; foil, by ότι, Mt. xxi. 45 ; Jn. iv. 1 ; v. 6 ; xii. 9, etc. ; foil, by the interrog. W, Mt. vi. 3; Lk. xvi. 4; από τινας, to learn from one, Alk. xv. 45. with ace. of jiers. to recoi'- nize as worthy of intimacy anϊ(•ο, Ovid. met. 4,596; lioci, Justin, hist. 27, 3, 11). II. In particular γινώσκω. Ιο become acquainted with, to knoir, is employed in the N. T. of the knowledge of God and Christ, and of the things relating to them or pro- ceeding from them ; a. τόν θίόν, the one, true God, in contrast with the polytheism of the Gentiles: Ro. i. 21 ; Gal. iv. 9 ; also Tof μόνον αληθινον θιόν, Jn. xvii. 3 cf. 1 Jn. V. 20; τον θ(όν, the nature and will of God, in contrast with the false wisdom of both Jews and (ientiles, 1 Co. i. 21 ; τον πατί'ρα, the nature of God the Father, esp. the holy will and affection by which he aims to sanctify and redeem men through Christ, .In. viii. 55; xvi. 3; 1 Jn. ii. 3 sq. 14 (13); iii. 1, 6; iv. 8; a peculiar knowl- edge of God the Father is claimed by Christ for him- self, Jn. X. 15; xvii. 25; γνώθι τον κϋριον, the precepts of the Lord, Heb. viii. 11 ; to θίΧτιμα (of God). Ro. ii. 1 8 ; vovv κυρίου, Ro. xi. 34 : 1 Co. ii. 16 ; την σοφίαν τοΰ '^ίνωσκω 118 '^Κώσσα θ(ον, 1 Co. ii. 8; Tos ohovs τοϋ θ(θΰ, Ileb. iii. 10 (fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10). b. Χριστόκ, his blessings, Phil, iii. 10; in \ριστυν tyvwKtvai κατά σάμκα^ 2 Co. v. 16, Paul speaks of thai kiiuwledge of Clirist which he had before his conversion, and l)y which he knew him merely in the form of a servant, and therefore had not yet seen in him the Son of (iod. Ace. to J oh η 's usage, γινώσκιιν, e'yvwKevai Xpiorov denotes lo come to know, lo Know, his Messianic dignity (Jn. xvii. 3; vi. 69) ; his divinity {τον απ αρχηί, 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. cf. Jn. i. 10), his consummate kindness towards us, and the benefits redounding to us from fellowship ivith him (in Christ's words -γινώσκομαι ίηυ των ΐμων, Jn. χ. 14 [ace. to the crit. texts •γινώσκονσίν fif τα (μα]); his love of (iod (Jn. xiv. 31); his sinless holiness (1 Jn. iii. C). John unites πιστ{ΐ!«ν and yivaiaKdv, at one time putting πίστωναν first : vi. 69 [cf. .Schaff's Lange or Mey. ad loc.] ; but at another time γίνώσκίΐν : X. 38 (ace. to 11 G, for which L Τ Tr AVH read iva γνώτ^ και γινώσκητί [II. V. know and understandy) ; xvii. 8 [L br. κ tyi/.] ; 1 Jn. iv. 16 (the love of God). C. y. τα τοϋ πνινματυ! the things which proceed from the Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 14 ; TO πνίΰμα τ. αληθείας και το πν. της πλάνης, 1 Jn. iv. 6 ; τα μυστήρια της βασιΧίίας των ουρανών, λΐΐ. xiii. 11 ; την άλήθίίαν, .In. viii. 32; 2 Jn. 1; absol., of the knowledge of divine things, 1 Co. xiii. 12; of the knowledge of things lawful for a Christian, 1 Co. viii. 2. [SvN. y IV ώ σ κ f IV, dZ e ν ai, 4νίστασθαι, trvvtevai: In classic usajre {cf. Schmidt ch. 13), yivwaxeiv, distiuguished from t he rest by its original inchoative force, denotes a dis- criminating apprehension of external impression.s, a knowl- edge grounded in personal experience. ti'SeVai, lit. ' to have seen with the mind's eye,' signifies a clear and purely mental perception, in contrast both to conjecture and to knowledge derived from others. ίνίστασΒαι primarily expresses the knowledge obtained by ρ ro .\ i m i ty to the thing known (cf. our Hiidt'rstiind, (ierm. vcrstehen) ; then knowledge viewed as the result of jirolonged practice, in oppo.'^ition to the process of learning on the one hand, and to the uncertain knowledge of a dilettante on the other. avvUvai implies native insight, the soul's cap.iclty of itself not ouly to lay hold of the phe- nomena of the outer world tlirough the senses, but by combi- nation (σύν and I'eVai) to arrive at their underlying laws. Hence ffiivieVai may mark an antithesis to sense-perception; wherea.s ytvutaKfiv marks an advance upon it. As appUed e. g. to a work of literature, yivwGKfiv expresses an acquaint- ance with it ; ^ηίστασθαί the knowledge of its contents ; συνίΐναι the understanding of it, a comprehension of its mean- ing. yivMuTKeiv and ciScVai most readily come into contrast with each other ; if dSfvai ami 4πίστασθαι are contrasted, the former refers more to natural, the latter to acquired knowl- edge. In the N. T., as might be expected, these distinctions are somewhat less sharply marked. Such passages as John i. 26,31,48 (49) ; vii. 27 Jq. ; xxi. 17; 2 Co. v. 16; 1 Jn. v. 20 may seem to indicate that, sometimes at least, yιvύσκω and olSa are nearly interchangeable; yet see Jn. iii. 10, U ; viii. .53 (yet cf. xvii. 25) ; 1 Jn. ii. 29 {biow . . . percetce), and the characteristic use of flStvat by John to describe onr Lord's direct insight into divine things: iii. 11 ; v. 32 (contrast 42) ; vii. 29 ; viii. 55 ; xii. 50, etc ; cf. Bp. Lghtft.'s note on Gal. iv. 9; Green, 'Critical Notes' etc. p. 75 (on Jn. viii. 35); Westcott on John ii. 24. 711/ώσκω and ΐττίσταμαι are associ- ated in Acts xix. 15 (cf. Green, as above, p. 97) ; οίδο and yiviiaxu in 1 Co. ii. 1 1 ; Kph v. 5 ; οϊδο and Ιττίσταμαι in Jude 10. CoMP. : άνα-,ίια-, iiri-, κατά-, -npo-ytvaaKii).] ^XcvKos, -out, TO, muxl, the sweet juice pressed from the grape; Nicand. alex. 1«4, 299 ; Plut., al. ; Jobxxxii. 19; swL-i-t wine : Acts ii. 13. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Mine] • γλ«κν5, -(Ία, -ΰ, itweel : Jas. iii. 1 1 (opp. to πικρόν) ; 1 2 (oiqi. to άλυκύν) ; Rev. x. 9, [10]. [From Ilom. down.] * γλώσσα, -ης, η, [fr. Horn, down], the lon//ue ; 1. the tonijue, a member of the body, the organ of speech : Mk. vii. 33, 35 ; Lk. i. C4 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Co. xiv. 9 ; Jas. i. 26 ; iii. 5, 6, 8; 1 Pet. iii. 10; 1 Jn. iii. 18; [Rev. xvi. 10]. By a poetical and rhetorical usage, esp. Hebraistic, that member of the body which is chielly engaged in some act has ascribed to it what belongs to the man ; the tonijue is so used in Acts ii. 26 (ήγαλλιάσατο ή γλωσσά μου) ; Ro. iii. 13 ; xiv. 11 ; Phil. ii. 11 (the tongue of every man) ; of the little tongue-like flames .symbolizing the gift of foreign tongues, in Acts ii. 3. 2. a tongue, i. e. the Umguarje used by a particular people in distinction from that of other nations : Acts ii. 11 ; henceinlater Jewish usage (Is. Levi. 18 ; Dan. iii. 4 ; v. 19 Theod.; vi. 2.3 ; vii. 14 Theod.; Jud. iii. 8) joined with φυ\ή. λαός, ΐθνος, it serves to desig- nate people of various languages [cf. AV'. 32], Rev. v. 9 ; vii. 9 ; X. 1 1 ; xi. 9 ; xiii. 7 ; xiv. 6 ; xvii. 15. λαλΕΪν ίτί- ραις γλώσσαις to speak irith other than their native i. e. in foreign tongues, Acts ii. 4 cf. 6-11 ; y\ώσσaις XaXdv και- να'ις to speak with new tonijues which the speaker has not learned previously, Mk. xvi. 1 7 [but J'r txt. WII t.xt. om. Tr mrg. br. καιναΊς] ; cf. De Wette on Acts p. 27 sqq. [cor- rect and supplement his reff. by Mey. on 1 Co. xii. 1 ; cf. also B. D. s. v. Tongues, Gift of~\. From both these expressions must be carefully distinguished the sim])le phrases \a\eiv γλώσσαις, γλώσσαις λαλίΓν, λαλ^ίν γλώσστ], γΧώσστ] λα\('ιν (and ττροσ^ύχίσθαι γΧώσση, 1 Co. xiv. 14), to s/ienk with [in) a tongue (the organ of sjieech), to sjieak toitk tongues ; this, as appears from 1 Co. xiv. 7 sqrp, is the gift of men who, rapt in an ecstasy and no longer quite masters of their own reason and consciousness, pour forth their glowing spiritual emotions in strange utterances, rugged, dark, disconnected, quite unfitted to instruct or to influence the minds of others: Acts x. 46; xix. 6; 1 Co. xii..30; .xiii. 1 ; xiv. 2,4-6, 13, 18, 23,27,39. Theoriginof the expression is apparently to be found in the fact, that in Hebrew the tongue is spoken of as the leading instru- ment by which the praises of (iod are proclaimed (ή των ϋίίων ϋμνων μ(λωδός, 4 Macc. Χ. 21, cf. Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 28; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 17; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 24; c.xxv. (cxxvi.) 2; Acts ii. 26 ; Phil. ii. 1 1 ; XaXt'iv iv γΧώσσι/, Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 4), and that according to the more rigorous conception of inspiration nothing human in an inspired man was thought to be active except the tongue, put in motion by the Holy Spirit (καταχμηται (Τ€ρης ηϋτοϋ το'ις φωνητημίοις οργάνοις, στόματι κα\ γλώττη προς μηννσιν ων αν θ(\η, Philo, rer. div. haer. § 53, [i. 510 ed. Mang.]) ; hence the contrast Κιάτου νοος [crit. edd. τώ ι/οί ] λαλ^ν, 1 Co. xiv. 19 cf. 9. The phir. in the phrase γλώσσαις XaXtiv, used even of a single person (1 Co. xiv. 5 sq.), refers to the various motions of the tongue. By meton. of the cause for '^Χωσσοκομον 119 γΐΌ^στος the eflfect, -γΚωσσαι tongues are equiv. to Xoyot cV γΧώσατ) (1 Co. xiv. 19) words spoken in a tongue (^Zuniji'nrortra- ge) : xiii. S ; xiv. 22 ; -γίνη γλωσσών, 1 Co. xii. 10, 28, of which two kinds are mentioned viz. τιροσινχή and ψ-αλ /iof, 1 Co. xiv. 15 ; -γΚώσσαν ΐχω, something to utter with a tongue, 1 Co. xiv. 26. [On ' Speaking with Tongues ' see, in addition to the discussions above referred to, Wendt in tlie 5th ed. of Meyer on Acts (ii. 4) ; Heinrici, Korinthierbriefe, i. 372 sqq. ; Schaff, Hist, of the Chr. Cliurcli, i. 2.34-245 (1882) ; Farrar, St. Paul, i. 95 sqq.] * Ύλωσ-σ-όκομ,ον, -ου, τό, (for the earlier ■γΚωσσοκομ€Ίον or γ\ωσσοκ6μιον [W. 24 (23), 94 (90); vet see Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. 2448, viii. 25, 31], fr. -γΚώασα and κομίω to tend) ; a. a case in which to keep the mouth-pieces of wind instruments, b. α smallhoxfor other uses also ; esp. a casket, purse to keep money in : Jn. xii. 6 ; xiii. 29 ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 98 sq. (For ρ'ΊΧ a chest, 2 Chr. xxiv. 8, 10 sq. ; Joseph, antt. 6, 1, 2; Plut., Longin., al.)* γναψενβ, -ίως, 6, (also [earlier] κιιαφ(ΰς, fr. yvUTrra or κνάπτω to card), a fuller: Mk. ix. 3. (Ililt., Xen., and sii'[. ; Sept. Is. vii. 3 ; xxxvi. 2 ; 2 K. xviii. 1 7.) * γνήσιο?, -α, -ο», (by syncope for γίΐ/ήσιοί fr. -γίνομαι, yev-, [cf. Curtius § 128]), legitimately horn, not spurious ; genuine, true, sincere : Phil. iv. 3 ; 1 Tim. i. 2 ; Tit. i. 4 ; TO της αγάπης γνησιον i. q. την γνησιότητα [Α. V. the sin- cerity'], 2 Co. viii. 8. (From Horn, down.) * γνησ-ίωϊ, adv., genuinely, faithfully, sincerely : Phil. ii. 20. [From Eur. down.] * •γνόψο;, -ου, -ό, (for the earlier [and poetic] 8ν6φος, akin to νίφος [so Bttm. LexU. ii. 266 ; but see Curtius pp. 704 scj. 706, cf. 535; Vanicek p. 1070]), darkness, gloom : Ileb. xii. 18. (Aristot. de mund. c. 2 fin. p. 392', 12 ; Lcian. de mort. Peregr. 43 ; Dio Chrys. ; Sept. also for rjif a cloud, Deut. iv. 11, etc. and for Ssi^^ 'thick cloud,' Ex. XX. 21, etc. ; [Trench § c.].) * γνώμη, -ης, η, (fr. γινώσκω) ; 1. the faculty of know- ing, minil, reason. 2. that which is thought or known, one's mind ; a. view, Judgment, opinion : 1 Co. i. 10 ; Rev. xvii. 13. b. mind concerning what ought to be done, aa. by one's self, resolve, purpose, intention : ίγίν(το γνώμη [TTrWll γνώμης, see γίνομαι 5 e. α.] τοΰ νποστρί- φ(ΐν. Acts XX. 3 [Β. 208 (230)]. bb. by other.s judg- ment, advice : Μύναι γνώμην, 1 Co. vii. 25, [40] ; 2 Co. viii. 10. cc. decree: Kev. xvii. 17; χωρΧς της σης γνώμης, without thy consent, Philem. 14. (In the same senses in Grk. writ. ; [cf . Schmidt, ch. 1 3, 9 ; Mey. on 1 Co. i. 1 0].) * γνωρίζω; fut. γνωρίσω (Jn. xvii. 26 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. iv. 7), Attic -ιώ (Col. iv. 9 [LWII -ίσω ; Β. 37 (32); WH. App. p. 163]) ; 1 aor. f γνώρισα; Pass., [pres. γνωρί- ζομαι]; 1 aor. (γνωρίσθην; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down [see ad fin.] ; Sept. for i'"lin and Chald. ;πίπ ; 1. trans, to make knoum : τι, Ro. ix. 22 sq. ; τί τινι, I-k. ii. 15; Jn. xv. 15; xvii. 26; Acts ii. 28; 2 Co. viii. 1 ; Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass, in these two exx.] ; Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. iv. 7, 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 16; τιν\ τό μυστήριου, Eph. i. 9; iii. 3 [G L Τ Tr WH read the pass.] ; vi. 1 9 ; τινι ότι, 1 Co. xii. 3 ; τινι τι, ότι i. q. τινι ότι τι, Gal. i. 1 1 ; foil. l)v Ti interrog. Col. i. 27 ; ττίρί tii/oe, Lk. ii. 1 7 L Τ Tr WH ; γνωριζίσθω προς τον θ(ύν be brought to the knowledge of God, Phil. iv. 6 ; γνωρίζ(σθαι (Is πάντα τα ΐθνη to be made known unto all the nations, Ro. xvi. 26 ; contextually and emphatically i. q. to recall to one's mind, as though what is made known had escaped him, 1 Co. xv. 1 ; with ace. of pers. [(Plut. Fab. Max. 21, 6)], in pass., to become known, be recognized; Acts vii. 13 Tr txt. \\\l txt. 2. intrans. to know : τί α'ιρήσομαι, οϋ γνωρίζω, Phil, i. 22 [WH mrg. punctuate τί alp. ; οϋ yv. ; some refer this to 1 (R. V. mrg. / do not make known), cf. May. ad loc. In earUer Grk. γνωρίζω signifies either 'to gain a knowledge of,' or ' to hare thorough knowledge of.' Its later (and N. T.) causative force seems to be found only in Aeschyl. Prom. 487; cf. Schmidt vol. i. p. 287; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c. Comp. : ava-, bia -γνωρίζω].' γνώσ -is, -ecuy, ή, {γινώσκω), [fr. Thuc. down], knowl- edge: with gen. of the obj., σωτηρίας, Lk. i. 77; τοΰ β(οϋ, the knowledge of God, such as is offered in the gospel, 2 Co. ii. 14, esp. in Paul's exposition of it, 2 Co. X. 5 ; της 8όξης τοΰ β(οΰ ϊν προσώπω Χρίστου, 2 Co. iv. 6 ; Ίι;σοϋ Χρίστου, of Christ as a saviour, Phil. iii. 8 ; 2 Pet. iii. 18 ; with subj. gen. toC Bfoi, the knowledge of tilings which belongs to God, Ro. xi. 33. γνώσις, by itself, sig- nifies in general intelligence, understanding : Eph. iii. 19 ; the general knowledge of the Christian religion, Ro. xv. 14; 1 Co. i. 5; the deeper, more perfect and enlarged knowledge of this religion, such as belongs to the more advanced, 1 Co. xii. 8 ; xiii. 2, 8 ; xiv. 6 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; viii. 7 ; xi. 6 ; esp. of tilings lawful and unlawful for Christians, 1 Co. viii. 1, 7, 10 sq. ; tlie higher knowledge of Christian and divine things which false teachers boast of, ψί υδώχυ- μος γνώσις, 1 Tim. vi. 20 [cf. Holtzmann, Pastoralbriefe, p. 132 sq.] ; moral wisdom, such as is seen in right living, 2 Pet. i. 5 ; and in intercourse with others : κατά γνώσιν, wisely, 1 Pet. iii. 7. objective knowledge : what is known concerning divine things and human duties, Ro. ii. 20 ; Col. ii. 3 ; concerning salvation through Christ, Lk. ,v1. 52. T^Tiere γνώσις and σοφία are used together the for- mer seems to be knowledge regarded by itself, the latter wisdom as e.xhibited in action: Ro. xi. 33; 1 Co. xii. 8 ; Col. ii. 3. [" γν. is simply intuitive, σοφ. is ratiocinati ve also; yv. applies chiefly to the appre- hension of truths, σοφ. sujieradds the power of reason- ing about them and tracing their relations." Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. To much the same effect Fritzsche (on Ro. 1. c), "yK. perspicientia veri, σοφ. sapientia aut mentis sollertia, quEe cognita intellcctaque veritate utatur, ut res efficiendas efliciat." Meyer (on 1 Co. 1. c.) nearly re- verses Lghtft. 's distinction ; elsewhere, however (e. g. on Col. 1. c, cf. i. 9), he and others regard σοφ. merely as the more general, γν. as the more restricted and special term. Cf. Lghtft. u. s. ; Trench § Ixxv.] * γνώστηϊ, -ου, ό, (a knower), an expert; a connoi.i.'^eur : Acts xxvi. 3. (Plut. Flam. c. 4 ; θ(6ς 6 των κρυπτών γνώστης. Hist. Sus. vs. 42 ; of those who divine the future, 1 S. xxviii. 3, 9, etc.) * γνωστοί, -ή, -όν, known : Acts ix. 42 ; τινι, Jn. xviii. 15 .«([.; Acts i. 19 ; xv. 18 RL; xix. 17; xxviii. 22; γνωστό» ■γο'γ'γύζω 120 •γράμμα ίστω ύμίl>be il (rnown Ιο you : Acts ii. 14 ; iv. 10 ; xiii. 38 ; xxviii. 28; contextiiiiUv, notable, Acts iv. 16; γνωστόν voif'tv to make known, disclose : Aits xv. 17 sij. (ϊ Τ Tr Wn [al. construe yi /ωστ. as pred. of ταϊιτα : II. V. mrg. who doeth these thiiit/s wliich were known ; cf. Mey. ad loc.]. TO γνωστόν τοϋ θ€οϋ, eitlier llutt which may be known of God, or i. (j. γνωσκ τοϋ Bioi, for both come to the same thing ; Ro. i. 1 9 ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and W. 2.3.') (220), [and Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. plur. oi γνωστοί acijuninlance, intimates, (I's. .\xx. (xxxi.) 12; (Ixxxvii. (Ixxxviii.) !), Ill]; Nell. v. 10): Lk. ii. 44 ; xxiii. 411. (In (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * γογγύζω ; hnpi. fγόγγυζnv ; 1 aor. €γιΊγγυσα; to murmur, mutter, ijrumlile, say anyt/iiny in a low tune, (ace. to Pollux and Phavorinus used of the cooing of doves, like the τονβρί'ζαι and τονθορνζω of the more elegant Grk. writ. ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. ],. 358 ; [W. 22 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Phil, ii. 14]) ; hence of those who confer together secretly, τι π(ρί TWOS, •Ιη. vii. 32; of those who discontentoilly com- plain : 1 Co. X. 1 ; npos rtva, Lk. v. 30 ; μ(τ' αλλήλων, Jn. vi. 43; κατά tivos, Mt. xx. 11 ; nept tivos, . : δια- γογγνζω.'\' γογγυσ•μ05, -οϋ, ό, {γογγνζω, ([. v.), α murmur, murmur- inrj, muttering ; applied to a. secret debate : πτρί riraf, Jn. vii. 12. b. secret displeasure, not openly avowed: irpos Tiva, Acts vi. 1 ; in plur. χωρίς or av€v γογγνσμών without querulous discontent, without murmurings, i. e. with a cheerful and willing mind, Phil. ii. 14 ; 1 Pet. iv. 9 (where L Τ Tr WII read the sing.). (Ex. xvi. 7 stiq. ; Sap. i. 10 sq. ; Antonin. 9, 37.) • γογγυστήϊ, -oO, ό, a murmurer, (Vulg., Augustine, mur- viuralor), one who discontentedly complains (against God; for /if^\//iyoipot is added) : .lude 16. [Prov. -x.xvi. 21 Theod., 22 Symin. ; xxvi. 20, 22 Graec. Ven.] * γόη5, -ijTos, ό, (γοάω to bewail, howl) ; 1. a waller, howler: Aeschyl. choeph. 823 [Hermann et al. yoTjnji]. 2. a jugr/ler, enchanter, (because incantations used to be uttered in a kind of howl). 3. a deceiver, impostor: 2 Tim. iii. 13 ; (Ildt., Eur., Plat., and subseq. writ.).* Γολγοθά [Tr λνΐΐ, or -Sh II G L Τ (see Tdf. Proleg. p. 102 ; Kautzsch p. 10) ; also -όβ L WII mrg. in Jn. xix. 1 7 ; ace. -av Tdf. in Mk. xv. 22 (WII -άν, see their App. p. 160), elsewhere indecl, W. 61 (60)], Golgotha, Chald. K-iSjSj, Heb. nSj-'J (fr. '^Sj to roll), i. e. κρανίυν, a siuil [Lat. calvaria'], the name of a place outside of Jerusa- lem where Jesus was crucified ; so called, apparently, because its form resembled a skull : Mt. xxvii. 33 ; Mk. XV. 22; Jn. xix. 1 7. Cf. Tobler, Golgatha. St. Gall. 1851 ; Furrer in Schenkel ii. 506 sqq. ; Keim, Jesus von Naz. iii. 404 sq. ; \^Porler in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. ; F. Howe, The true Site of Calvary, N. Y., 1871].• Γόμορρα [or Γιιμόρρα, cf. Chandler § 1 6 7], -at, ή, and -ων, τά, [cf. Β. 18 (16) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 116; WH. App. p. 156], Gomorrah, (rT)"D;', cf. DJi* Gaza), the name of a city in the eastern part of Judaea, destroyed by the same earth- quake [cf. B. D. s. V. Sea, The Salt] with Sodom and its neighbor cities : Gen. xix. 24. Their site is now occu- pied by the Asphaltic Lake or Dead Sea [cf. BB. UD. s. vv. Gomorrali and Sodom] : Mt. x. 15 ; Mk. vi. 11 11 I, in br. ; Uo. ix. 29 ; 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; Jude 7.• γόμοΐ, -ου, ό, (γί'μω) ; a. the lading or J'reight of a ship, cargo, merchandise conveyed in a ship : Acts -x.xi. 3, (Ildt. 1, 194; [Aeschyl.], Uem., al. ; [in Sept. the load of a beast of burden, Ex. xxiii. 5 ; 2 K. v. 1 7]). b. any mer- chandise : Rev. xviii. 1 1 sq.* γονίίϊ, -{'ωΓ, ό, (ΓΕΝΩ, γίγονα), [Hom. h. Cer., Hes., al.] ; a begetter, parent ; plur. oi yowit the parents : Lk. ii 41,43 Ltxt. TTrWII; [viii. 56] ; xxi. 16; Jn. ix. 2, 3, 20, 22, 23; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; Ko. i. 30 ; Ejdi. vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 20; 2Tim. iii. 2; ace. jilur. yoi-eis ; Mt. x. 21 ; [xix. 29 Lchm.mrg.] ; Lk. ii. 27 ; [xviii. 29] ; Mk. xiii. 12; [Jn. i.x. 18]; on this form cf. W. § 9, 2 ; [B. 14 (13)].• yaw, yoi/aTos, to, [fr. Ilom. down], fhe Knee : Heb. xii. 1 2 ; τίβίναι τά γιΊνατα Ιο bend the knees, kneel down, of persons supi)licating : Lk. .\xii. 41; Acts vii. 60 ; ix. 40; x.x. 36; xxi. 5; of [mock] worshippers, Mk. xv. 19, so also προσπίιττιιν rots γόνασί tivos, Lk. v. 8 (of a suppliant in Eur. Or. 1332) ; κύμηταν τα γόνατα to bow the knee, of those worshipping God or Christ : τινί, Ko. xi. 4 ; npas Tiva, Eph. iii. 14 ; reflcxively, yoiu κάμπτιι τινί, to i.e. in honor of one, Ro. xiv. 11 (1 K. xix. 18) ; fv ύνόματι Ίησον, Phil. ii. 10 (Is. xlv. 23).* γον\)ΐΓ€Τί'ω, -ω; 1 aor. ptcp. γοια/ττίτήσαί ; (γονυπίτήί, and this fr. γόνυ and ΠΕΤΩ i. ip πίπτω) ; to fall on the knees, the act of one imploring aid, and of one e.xpress- ing reverence and honor: τινί, Mt. xvii. 14 Rec. ; τινά, ibid. G L Τ Tr Wl 1 ; Mk. i. 40 Κ G Tr txt. br. WH br. ; x. 17; cf. W. 210 (197); [B. 147 sq. (129)]; ίμπροσθίν Tii/os, Mt. xxvii. 29. (Polyb., Ileliod. ; eccl. Λvrit.) * Ύράμμα, -rot, Tci, (γράφω), that ir/iicti Ikis been written ; 1. a letter i. e. the character : Lk. xxiii. 38 [R G L br. Tr mrg.br.]; Gal. vi. 11. 2. any writing, a document οτ record ; a. a note of hand, bill, bond, account, icrilten ac- knowledgment of debt, (as script io in Varr. sat. Men. 8, I [cf. Edersheim ii. 268 sqq.]) : Lk. xvi. 6 scj. ([Joseph, antt. 18, 6,3], in Ltxt. Τ Tr WH plur. τα γράμματα; so of one document also in Antiph. p. 114, (30) ; Dem. p. 1034, 16; Vulg. cautio). b. a letter, an epistle: Acts xxviii. 21 ; (Hdt. 5, 14; Time. 8, 50; Xen. Cyr. 4, .5, 26, etc.). C. τα 'κραγράμματα the sacred writings (of the 0. T. ; [so Joseph, antt. prooem. § 3 ; 10, 10, 4 fin. ; c. Ap. 1, 10 ; Philo, de vit. Moys. 3, 39 ; de praem. ct poen. § 14 ; leg. adGai. § 29, etc. — but always τα t.y ]): 2 Tim. iii. 15 [here Τ WH om. L Tr br. τά] : γράμμα i. q. the written law of Moses, Ro. ii. 27; ΜωΟσ/ωί -γράμματα, Jn. v. 47. Since the Jews so clave to the li-ttcr of the law that it not only became to them a mere letter l.'iit also a hin- drance to true religion, Paul calls it -γράμμα in ;i ilisparag- ing sense, and contrasts it with τό πνιϋμα i. e. the divine Spirit, whether operative in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 29, or in the gospel, by which Christians are governed, Ro. vii. 6 ; 2 Co. iii. 6 sq. [but in vs. 7 R (i Τ WH read the plur. written in letters, so L mrg. Tr rarg.]. 3. τα ■γράμματα, like the Lat. litterae, Eng. letters, i. q. learning : Acts xxvi. 24 ; dhivai, μίμαθηκίναι γρ. (cf. G«rm. stwlirl Ύραμματεν•! 121 Ύράφύ haben), of sacred learning, Jn. vii. 15. (μανθάναν, iiriara- σθαι. etc., -γράμματα are used by the Greeks of tlie rudi- ments of learning; of. Passow i. p. 571 ; [L. and S. s. v. II. a.].)• γραμματ£ύ5, -t'ws, (ace. plur. -iij, W. §9, 2; [B. 14 03)]), 0, (γράμμα), Sept. for 130 and ^OU ; 1. in prof. auth. and here and there in the O. T. [e. g. 2 S. viii. 17; xx. 25; 2 K. xix. 2; x.w. 19; Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 2], a clerk, scribe, esp. a public scribe, secretary, recorder, whose office and influence differed in different states : Acts XLX. 35, (Sir. x. 5) ; [cf. Lijlitft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294; Wooif, Discoveries at Ephesus, App. Inscrr. fr. the Great Theatre, p. 49 n.]. 2. in the Bible, a man learned in the Mosaic law and in the sacred writings, an interpreter, teacher : Mt. xxiii. 34 ; 1 Co. i. 20, ("called also νομικός in I^k. x. 25, and νομοΒιίά- σκαλο! in Lk. v. 1 7 ; [Meyer (on -Mt. xxii. 35 ), while deny- ing any essential diff. betw. γραμματιίί and νομικοί (ef. Lk. xi. 52, 53 — yet see crit. txts.), regards the latter name as the more specific (a jurisconsult) and Classic, γρ. as the more general (a learned /natt) and Hebraistic; it is also the more common in the Apocr., where νομ. occurs only 4 ilacc. v. 3. As teachers they were called νυμοδιδάσκαλοι. Cf. B. D. s. v. Lawyer, also s. v. Scribes I. 1 note]) ; Jer. viii. 8 (cf. ii. 8) ; Neh. viii. 1 sq. ; xii. 2C, 3G; 2 Esdr. vii. 6, 11, and esp. Sir. xxxviii. 24, 31 sqq. ; xxxix. 1-11. The γραμματείς explained the mean- ing of the sacred oracles, j\It. ii. 4 [γρ. τον λαοΰ. Josh. i. 1 ; 1 Mace. V. 42 ; cf. Sir. xliv. 4] ; xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11 ; xii. 35 ; examined into the more difficult and subtile ques- tions of the law, Mt. ix. 3 ; Mk. ii. 6 sq. ; xii. 2S ; added to the Mosaic law decisions of various kinds thought to elucidate its meaning and scope, and did this to the detri- ment of religion, Mt. v. 20 ; xv. 1 sqq. ; xxiii. 2 sqq. ; Mk. vii. 1 sqq. ; cf . Lk. xi. 46. Since the advice of men skilled in the law was needed in the examination of causes and the solution of difficult questions, they were enrolled in the Sanhedrin ; and accordingly in the X. T. they are often mentioned in connection with the priests and elders of the people : Mt. xxi. 15 ; xxvi. 3 R G ; Mk. xi. 1 8, 27 ; xiv. 1; XV. 1; Lk. xix. 47; xx. 1 ; xxii. 2. Cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 25 ii. ; Klop/ier in Schenkel v. 247 sqq.; [and thorough articles in BB.DD. ?. v. Scribes; cf. W. Robertson Smith, The O. T. in the Jewish Ch., Lect. iii.]. 3. univ. a religious teacher : γραμματιϋί μαθητευ- θ(\ί (U ιή" βασιλ. των οχιρ. a teacher so instructed that from his learning and ability to teach advantage ftiay redound to the kingdom of heaven, Mt. xiii. 52 [but G Τ Tr WH read μαθ. rfi βασιλεία (L ev τ. β.): and many in- terpret made a disciple unto the k. ofh. (which is person- ified) ; see μαθητεύω, fin.]. γραΐΓΓ05. -ι;, -όν. written : Ro. ii. 15. [Gorg. apol. Palam. p. UiOsub fin. ; Sept.: al] * γραφή, -TJs, ή, (γράφω. cf. γλυφή and γλύφω) : a. α writing, thing written, [fr. Soph, down] : πάσα γραφή every scripture sc. of the O. T., 2 Tim. iii. 16; plur. γραφαΧ σγιαι, holy scriptures, the sacred books (of the O. T.), Ro. i. 2 ; προφητικαί, Ro. xvi. 26 ; at γραφαϊ των προφητών. Mt. xxvi. 56. b. ή γραφή, the Scripture «car' εξοχήν, the holy scripture (of the O. T.), — and used to denote either the book itself, or its contents [some would restrict the sing, γραφή always to a particular passage ; see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 22] : Jn. vii. 38 ; x. 35 ; Acts viii. 32 ; Ro. iv. 3 ; Gal. iii. 22 ; iv. 30 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6 ; 2 Pet. i. 20; also in plur. at γραφαϊ: Mt. xxi. 42 ; xxvi. 54; Mk. xiv. 49; Lk. xxiv. 27 ; Jn. v. 39 ; Acts xvii. 2, 11 ; xviii. 24, 28 ; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq. ; once a'l γραφαϊ comprehends also the books of the N. T. already begun to be collected into a canon, 2 Pet. iii. 16; by melon, ή γριφή is used for God speaking in it : Ro. ix. 1 7 ; Gal. iv. 30 : ή γραφή is introduced as a person and distinguished from God in Gal. iii. 8. ε'ώε'ναι τάς γραφάί, Mt. xxii. 29 ; Mk. xii. 24 ; σννύναι, Lk. xxiv. 45. c. a certain portion or section oj holy Scripture: Mk. xii. 10; Lk. iv. 21 ; Jn. xix. 37; Acts i. 16. [Cf. B. D. s. V. Scripture.] γράψ<ι>; [impf. εγραφον'\; fut. γράψ-ω ; 1 aor. έγραψα; pf. γίγραφα; Pass., [jjres. γράφομαι]; pf. γέγραμμαι; [plpf. 3 pers. sing, ε'γέγραπτο, Kev. xvii. 8 Lchm.] ; 2 aor. ε'γράφην ; (prop, to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave ; cf. (ierm. graben, eingraben ; γρά\Ι/εν δε οί ΰστέον άχρκ αιχμή, Horn. Π. 1 7, 599 ; σήματα γράψας εν πινάκι, ib. 6, 169 ; hence to draw letters), to write ; 1. with reference to the form of the letters; lo delineate (or form) letters on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material : τω 8α- κτνλω εγραφεν f is την γήν made figures on the ground, Jn. viii. 6 Rec. ; ούτω γράφω so am I accustomed to form mv letters, 2 Thess. iii. 1 7 : πηλίκοι: γράμμασι έγραψα with how large (and so. ill-formed [?]) letters I have written, Gal. vi. 11 ; cf. AViner. Ruckert, Hilgenfeld ad loc. [for the views of those who regard εγρ. as covering the close of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. ; cf. W. 278 (261); B. 198 (171 sq.)]. 2. with reference to the contents of the writing ; a. to express in written char- acters, foil, by the words expressed : έγραψε λέγων Ιωάν- νης έστι το όνομα αυτόν, Lk. i. 63 ; μή γράφε- ό βασιλεύς των Ιουδαίων κτλ. Jn. xix. 21 ; γράψον- μακάριοι κτλ. Rev. xiv. 13. γράφω Tt. Jn. xix. 22; pass. Rev. i. 3; τι επί τι. Rev. ii. 1 7 ; xix. 16; Tt επί τίνα, iii. 12; επί Ttfor. xiv. 1. b. to commit lo writing (things not to be for- gotten), write down, record : Rev. i. 19 {γράψον ά είδες) ; χ. 4 ; γράφειν εις βιβλίον. Rev. i. 1 1 ; fVt το βιβλίον rrjs ζωής. Rev. xvii. 8 : γεγραμα. εν τ. βιβλία [or τη βίβλωΐ, ει- το'ις βιβλίοις. Rev. xiii. 8 ; xx. 12, 15; .xxi. 27; xxii. 18, 1 9 ; τα ονόματα χιμων ε'γράφη [cV(f y- Tr see Ν, ν)γέγρ.Ύ Tr WH] εν το'ις οϋρανο'ις. i.e. that ye have been enrolled with those for whom eternal blessedness has been pre- pared. Lk. X. 20 ; γράφειν τι τινι. to record something for some one's use. Lk. i. 3. c. έγράφη and γέγραπται (in the Synoptists and Paul), and γεγραμμένον εστί (in John), are used of those tilings which stand written in the sacred books (of the O. T.) ; absol. γέγρα-πται. foil, by the quo- tation fr. the sacred vol.: Mt. iv. 4, 6 S(j. 10; xxi. 13: Mk. vii. 6; xi. 17; xiv. 27; Lk. iv. 8: xix. 46 : καθώς ■γέγραπται. Acts xv. 15, very often in Paul, as Ro. i. 1 7 ; ii. 24; iii. 4 [see below] ; iCo. i. 31: ii. 9; 2Co. viii. 15: ix. 9; καθάπερ γίγρ. Ro. xi. 8 Τ Tr WTI; [iii. 4 Τ Tr γραώΒη<; 122 '/υμνοτηι; WH] ; yey pairrai yap, Mt. XX vi. 31; Lk. iv. 10; Acts xxiii. 5; llo. xii. 19; xiv. U ; 1 Co. iii. 19; (ial. iii. 10, 13 Rec. ; iv. 22, 27 ; ό \oyos ό yfypaμμΐvoς, 1 Co. xv. 54 ; Kara TO γ€γραμμ(νον, 2 Co. iv. 13 ; yfyμaμμ€uov «στί, Jn. ii. 17 ; vi. 31 ; xii. 14; ΐγράφη δ« Trpot νονθίσίαν ημών, 1 Co. χ. 1 1 ; (^ράφη 8ι ήμάί for our sake, Ro. iv. 24 ; 1 Co. L\. 10 ; with the name of the autlior of the written words or of the hooks in wliich they are foiinil : yiypainai iv βίβΧω ψαλμών. Acts i. 20 ; fV βίβΧω των προφητών. Acts vii. 42 ; (V τω πρώτω [RAVII θίυτίρω] ψάΚμω, Acts xiii. 33 ; eV Ήσαία, Mk. i. 2 [not Rec], etc. τιι/ά or W lo write of\. e. in writing lo mention or refer to a person or a tiling : ov (ypa\j/e Μωϋση! whom Moses had in mind in Avriting of tlie Messiah, or whose likeness Moses delineated, Jn. i. 45 (46) ; Μωνίτης γράφει την 8ικαίθσννην την €Κ vo/iov, Moses, writing the words on ό ηηιήσα! αυτά κτ\., points out tlie righteousness Avhich is of the law, Ro. x. 5. yi- γμαπται, ypάφ(ιv, etc. irfpi Tivos, concerning one : Mt. xxvi. 24 ; 'Slk. xiv. 21 ; .In. v. 46 ; Acts xiii. 29 ; tVi τόκ vwv τηϋ ανθρώπου, that it should find fulfilment in him, Mk. ix. 12 .s(). [cf. ίνα, II. 2 b.] ; cV αυτώ, on him i. e. of him (cf. W. 393 (368) [and eVi, B. 2 f. β.]), Jn. xii. 16 ; τά yfypaμμΐva τω νΐώ του άνθρ. written for him, allotted to him in Scripture, i. e. to be accomplished in his ca- reer, Lk. xviii. 31 ; cf. W. § 31, 4 ; [yet cf. B. 1 78 (154)] ; Μωνσης (ypaijffv Ιμΐν 'να etc. Moses in the Scripture cora- nianiled us that etc. [cf. B. 237 (204)], Mk. xii. 19; Lk. XX. 28. d. γρύφίΐν τίνί to write to one i. e. hi/ writing (in a written epistle) to give, information, directions, etc. fo one: Ro. xv. 15; 2 Co. ii. 4, 9 [dat. implied]; vii. 12; Philem. 21 ; 2 Pet. iii. 15 ; 1 Jn. ii. 12 sqip ; it' όλίyωv, 1 Pet. V. 12; 8ta μίΚανος κα\ κάΚάμου, 3 Jn. 13; foil, by the words written or to be written in the letter: Acts xv. 23; Rev. ii. 1,8, 12, 18; iii. 1,7,H ; ypάφfLvτιvίn, 1 Co. xiv. 37 ; 2 Co. i. 13 ; ii. 3 [L Τ Tr AVII om. the dat.] ; Gal. i. 20 ; 1 Tim. iii. 14 ; 1 Jn. i. 4 [R f r L] ; ii. 1 ; π€ρΙ tivos, 1 Jn. ii. 26 ; Acts xxv. 26 ; 2 Co. ix. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 9 ; v. 1 ; Jude 3 ; δια χαράς τινοί, to send a letter by one, Acts xv. 23 [see χιίρ] ; ypύφeιv τινί, foil, by an inf., by letter to bid one do a thing. Acts xviii. 27; foU. by μη with inf. (to forbid, write one not to etc.), 1 Co. v. 9, 11. 3. to βΙΙ with writing, (Germ, beschreiben) : βιβΧίον yeypaμ- μίνον ΐσωθ(ν κα\ Smadfv a volume written within and he- hind, on the bach; hence on both sides. Rev. v. 1 (Ezek. ii. 10) ; cf. DUsterdieck, [ALford, al.] ad loc. 4. lo draw up in writing, compose : βιβλίον, 'Mk. x. 4 ; Jn. xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs. ; see IF//. App. ad loc] ; τίτλοι/, Jn. xix. 19; ίπιστολήν. Acts xxiii. 2.5; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ; ΐντολην Tivi to write a commandment to one, Mk. x. 5 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7 Sip ; 2 Jn. 5. [CoMP. : άπο-, iy-, ΐπι-, κατά-, πpo-ypάφω■2 ■γραώ8ηΐ, -is, (fr. ypavs an old woman, and t'Sof), old- womanish, anile, [A. Λ'. old wives'1 : 1 Tim. iv. 7. (Strabo 1 p. 32 [p. 44 ed. Sieben.] ; Galen ; al.) • γρηγορί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ί'γρηγόρησα ; (f r. (γρήγορα, to have been roused from sleep, to be awake, pf. of ^'y(ίpω ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 118 sq. ; Ultm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 158; [W. 26 (25); 92 (88)]); to icalch; 1. prop.: Mt. xxiv. 43 ; xxvi. 38, 40 ; Mk. xiii. 34 ; xiv. 34, 37 ; Lk. xii. 37, 39 RG L Trtxt. WII txt. As to .■sleep is often i. q. lo die, so once, 1 Th. v. 1 0, ypηγ. means to lice, be ulice on earth. 2. Metaph. to watch i. e. give strict attention to, he cautious, active : — to take heed lest through remiss- ness and indolence some destructive calamity suddenly overtake one, Mt. xxiv. 42 ; xxv. 13 ; Mk. xiii. 35, [37] ; Rev. xvi. 15; or lest one be led to forsake Christ, Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 ; or lest one fall into sin, 1 Th. v. 6 ; 1 Co. xvi. 13 ; 1 Pet. v. 8 ; Rev. iii. 2 sq. ; or be cor- rupted by errors. Acts xx. 31 ; «i/ τινι. lo be watchful In, employ the most punctilious care in a thing : Col. iv. 2. (Sept. ; [Bar. ii. 9 ; 1 Mace xii. 27; Aristot. plant. 1, 2 p. 816^2^.37]; Joseph, antt. 11, 3,4 ; AchiU. Tat. ; al.) [Syn. see aypuTrwm. COMP. : δια- ypr/yopf ω.] * γνμνάζω ; [pf. pass. ptcp. γίγυμχασμίΐ/ΟΓ] ; (γυμνοί) ; com. in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; 1. prop, to ex- ercise naked (in the palaestra). 2. to exercise vigor- ously, in any way, either the body or the mind : ίαυτόν προ! (ίσ€β(ΐαν, of one who strives earnestly to become godly, 1 Tim. iv. 7 : γιγνμνιισμίνοί exercised, Hcb. v. 14 ; xii. 11 ; Kaph'tav ■yf-yupi'. πλίονιξίαι (Rec π\(ον(ξιαις), a soul that covctousness or the love of gain has trained in its crafty ways, 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; cf. W. § 30, 4.• yυμvaσ■la, -as, ή, (γυμνάζω) ; a. prop, the exercise of the bodi/ in the pahestra. b. any exercise whatever: σωματική γυμνάσια, the exercise of conscientiousness rel- ative to the body, such as is characteristic of ascetics and consists in abstinence from matrimony and certain kinds of food, 1 Tim. iv. 8. (4 Mace. xi. 19. In Grk. writ. fr. Plat. legg. i. p. 648 c down.) * γυμνητίύω (γυμνϊτίύω L Τ Tr AVH ; [cf. Tdf. Prolog, p. 81 ; W. 92 (88)]) ; (γυμνητης) ; [A. V. Uterally to be naked \. e.'\ lobe lightbj or poorly clad: iCo. iv. 11. (So in Dio Chrys. 25, 3 and other later writ. ; to be a light- armed soldier, Plut. Aem. 16 ; Dio Cass. 47, 34, 2.) ' ■γνμνόϊ, -f), -iv, in Sept. for ΟΊ'Ι' and Dl^i;, naked, not covered; 1. prop. a. unclad, without clothing : 5Ik. xiv. 52; Rev. iii. 17; xvi. 15; xvii. 16; το γυμνόν, sub- stantively, the naked bodij : έπι γνμνοΰ, Mk. xiv. 51 ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc; (τά γυμνά, Lcian. nav. 33). b. ill- clad: Mt. XXV. 36, 38, 43 sq. ; Acts xLx. 16 (with torn garments) ; Jas. ii. 15 ; (Job xxii. 6 ; xxiv. 10 ; xxvi. 6). c. clad in the undergarment only (the outer garment or cloak being laid aside) : Jn. xxi. 7 ; (1 S. xix. 24 ; Is. xx. 2 ; lies. opp. 389 ; often in Attic ; so nudus, Verg. Georg. I, 299). d. of the soul, whose garment is the body, strip! of the body, without η body : 2 Co. v. 3, (Plat. Crat. c 20 p. 403 b. ή ψυ;(ΐ7 yii^i'i) ToC σώ/ίατοί). 2. meta])h. a. naked, i. e. open, laid bare : Ileb. iv. 13, (γυμνός ό α8η! (νώπιον αντοϋ. Job xxvi. 6 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. see in Blcek on Heb. vol. ii. 1 p. 585). b. only, mere, hare, i. q. ψιλοΓ (like Lat. nudus) : γυμνός κόκκος, mere grain, not the plant itself, 1 Co. xv. 37, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 24, 5 σπίρματα π(σόντα (Is την γην ζηρα και γυμνά δια\ΰ(ται) .* γυμνότηΒ, -ητος, ή. (γυμνός), nakedness : of the body, Rev. iii. 18 (?ee αισχύνη. 3); used of want of clothing, Ro. viii. 35; 2 Co. xi. 27. (Deut. xxviii. 48; Antonin. II, 27.)• yvi'aiKapiov Ϊ2'ό δαιμόνιον γυναικάριον, -ου, τό, (dimin. fr. γννη}, α Utile woman ; used cunlemptuously in 2 Tim. iii. ij [A. V.sUli/ iromen ; cf. Lat. maliercula^. (Diodes, com. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 87, 4; Antonin. 5, 11; occa.siuniilly in Epictet.) On dimin. ending in άμιον see Lob. ad Pliryn. p. 180 ; Fritz- sche on .Alk. p. 638; [cf. λ\ . 24, 90 (91)].* γυναικείοι, -eia, -elov, of or belonging to a woman, femi- nine, female : 1 Pet. iii. 7. (From Horn, down ; Sept.) * γυνή, -aiKos, ή ; 1• univ. a woman of any age, wheth- er a virgin, or married, or a widow : Mt. i.\. 20 ; xiii. 33 ; xxvii. 55 ; Lk. xiii. 11 ; Acts v. 14, etc. ; ή μ(μνηστ(υμ4νη Tiv\ γυνή, Lk. ii. 5 RG; ή ΰπίΐν8ρο!γυνή, Ro. vii. 2 ; yui/ij χήρα, Lk. iv. 26 (1 K. vii. 2 (14); xvii. 9; femina vidua, Nep. praef. 4). 2. a wife : 1 Co. vii. 3 sq. 10, 13 sq. ; Eph. V. 22, etc. ; γυνή Tti/or, Mt. v. 31 sq. ; xL\. 3, 5 ; Acts V. 1, 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 2 ; Eph. v. 28 ; Rev. ii. 20 [G L WH mrg.^, etc. of α 6eiroi/ie) ; τίΡίύματα δαιμονίων (Kcc. δαιμιΊνων) i. e. of that rank of spirits that are demons (^eii. of appos.). Rev. xvi. 14 ; ΰμχων των δαιμο- νίων, tlie prince of the demons, or the devil : Mt. ix. 34 ; xii. 24 ; Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk. xi. 15 ; they are said ίΐσίρχ^σθαι t'i Tiva, to enter into (the body of) one to vex him with diseases (see δαιμονίζομαι) : Lk. viii. 30, 32 sq. ; ίφ\η- Sijvai and (ξ€ρχ(σθαι (κ Tivos or από Tivof, wlien they arc forced to come out of one to restore him to health : Mt. i.\. 33; xvii. 18; .Mk. vii. 29, 30; Lk. iv. 35,41; viii. 2, 33, 3.5. (κβάλλΐΐν δαιμόνια, is used of those who compel demons to come out : Alt. vii. 22 ; xii. 27 sip ; Mk. i. 34, 39; Lk. ix. 49, etc. e;(eii' δηιμόΐ'ΐοΐ', to have a demon, be possessed by a demon, is said of those who either suffer from some exceptionally severe disease, Lk. iv. 33 ; viii. 27 (ϊχ. δαιμόνια) ; or act and speak as though they were mad, Alt. xi. 18 ; Lk. vii. 33 ; Jn. vii. 20 ; viii. 48 sq. 52 ; X. 20. Accordint; to a Jewish opinion which passed over to the Christians, the (lem- ject under discussion, it serves to take up the discourse again [cf. W. 443 (412)] : Mt. iii. 4 ; Lk. iv. 1 ; Ro. v. 8 ; 2 Co. ii. 12; v. 8 ; x. 2 ; Eph. ii. 4 ; cf. Klolz ad Devar. Βέησι, arated, it stands tliird (as in Alt. -x. 11 ; -xviii. 25; Mk. iv. 34 ; Lk. X. 31 ; Acts xvii. 6 ; xxviii. 6 ; Gal. iii. 23 ; 2 Tim. iii. 8, etc. ; in oi μόνον 8e, Ro. v. 3, 11, etc.), or even in the fourth place, Mt. x. 18 ; Jn. vi. 51 ; viii. 16 sq. ; 1 Jn. i. 3; 1 Co. iv. 18: [Lk. xxii. 69 LTTrWH]. 8ίητιβ. -€ωΓ, ή. ( &ίομαι) ; 1. need, indiijenre, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 25 ; Aeschin. dial. 2, 39 sq. ; [Plato, Eryx. 405 e. bis]; Aristot. rhet. 2, 7 [ii. p. 1385% 27]). 2. a xeek- inii, asking, entreating, entreaty, (fr. Plat, down) ; in the N. Ϊ. requests addressed by men to God (Germ. Bittgc- bel, supplication); univ. : Jas. v. Ifi ; 1 Pet. iii. 12; as often in the Sept., joined with προσ€υχη (i. e. any pious address to God [see below]) : Acts i. 14 Rec. ; Eph. vi. 18 ; Phil. iv. 6 ; plur. 2 Tim. i. 3 ; joined ivilh -προσίνχαΐ, 1 Tim. V. 5; with ι/ηστΐ7αι, Lk. ii. 37; τΐυΐΐ'ίσθαί ^ίησιν, Phil. i. 4 ; π. Stijfrfif, Lk. v. 33; 1 Tim. ii. 1. contextu- allv, of prayers imploring God's aid in some particular matter: Lk. i. 13; Phil. i. 19; plur. Heb. v. 7; suppli- cation for others : [2 Co. i. 11]; nfpi nvot, Eph. vi. 18 ; imcp Ttvof, 2 Co. ix. 14; Phil. i. 4; Λνίιΐι the addition npiis-Tuv θ(ον, Ro. X. 1.* (Svv. δβτισίϊ, προσίΐ/χή, tvrtv^ts: irp., as Prof. Oriinm remarks, is mirestricted as respects its contents, ivliile 8. is petitiKnary; moreover irp. is a word of s ao re d char- acter, being limited to prayer to God, whereas 5. may also l)e used of a request addressed to man. In Byzantine Grk. it is used of a w r i 1 1 e η supplication ( like our /« titiou ) \ cf . Sopli. Lex. s. V. See more at length Trencli § Ii. ; also Bp. Lghtft. on I'liil. iv. 6 ; Kllie. on Eph. vi. 18 ; cf. Schmidt ch. vii. In 1 Tim. ii. I to tliese two words is added exreulis, Avhicli ex- presses couKdin}; access to God ; thus, in comliination, S(r\ais fjives prominence to the expression of personal need, τροσ- euxi) to tlie element of devotion, ίντ^υξα to that of child- like confidence, by representing: prayer as tlie lieart's con- verse with God. See Huther's extended note ad loc. ; Ellic. ad loc. ; Trench n. s.] 8ii: subjunc. pres. Se'i; ; impf. eiei; an impers. verb [cf. R. § 132, 12; cf. § 131, 3; fr. Ilom. down]: (δ/ω, sc. TITOS, to have need of, be in want of; cf. Germ, e.i bedarf), it is necessnri/, there is need of, it behooves, is right and proper ; foil, either by the inf. alone (cf. our one ought), or by the ace. with.) * SeiX09, -η, -όν, (θίίδω to fear), timid, fearful: Mt. viii. 26 ; Mk. iv. 40 ; in Rev. xxi. 8 of Christians who through cowardice give way under persecutions and apostatize. (From Horn, down.) * 8€Ϊνα, ό, η, TO ; gen. Sfii/o? ; dat. fieiw ; ace. τον, την, το διϊνα (cf. Matthiae § 1•51), such a one, a certain one, i. e. one whose name I cannot call on the instant, or whose name it is of no importance to mention ; once in the Scriptures, viz. Mt. xxvi. 18. (Arstph., Dem., al.) * 8civ(I>s, adv., (δανός), lerrihhj, grievously. Mt. viii. 6; Lk. xi. .j3. [From Ildt. down.] • Seiirvt'w, -ω : [fut. &^ιιτνήσω] ; 1 aor. ^δάπνησα ; (5fi- πνον) ; to sup : Lk. xvii. 8 ; xxii. 20 [AVIi reject the whole pass., see their App.] ; 1 Co. xi. 23 ; in an alle- gory, 8(ΐπνήσω μίτ αΰτοϋ, I will make him to share in my most intimate and blissful intercourse : Rev. iii. 20.* Selirvov, -ου, τό, and ace. to a rare and late form ό &(1πνυς in Lk. xiv. 16 Lchm. [cf. Tdf. on Rev. xix. 9, 17, also λν^. 6o (64) ; on deriv. cf. ίαπάνη], (in Hom. the morning meal or breakfast, cf. Passow [more fully L. and S.] s. V. ; this the Greeks afterwards call το άριστον q. v. [and reff. there], designating as to Seinvov the evening meal or supper) ; 1. supper, esp. a formal meal usu- ally held at evening: Lk. xiv. 17, 24; Jn. xiii. 2,4; xxi. 20 ; plur. : Mt. xxiii. 6 ; IMk. xii. 39 ; Lk. (xi. 43 Lchm. in br.) ; xx. 46 ; used of the Messiah's feast, symbolizing salvation in the kingdom of heaven : Rev. xix. 9,17; κυριακίιν iemvov (see κνριακός. Π, 1 Co. xi. 20; ποκΐν Sf'mvov, Lk. xiv. 12 (άριστον η Se'mvov) : 16 (Dan. v. 1 [Theodot.]) ; with the addition τινί, Mk. vi. 21 ; Jn. xii. 2. 2. nniv. food taken at evening: 1 Co. xi. 21.* ε€ΜΓΐ5αιμον£α, -ας, η, (5(ισιSaίμωv),fear of the gods ; 1. in a good sense, reverence for the gods, piety, religion : Polyb. 6, 56, 7; Joseph, antt. 10, 3, 2; κα\ θιοφιλης βίος, Diod. 1, 70. 2. i. q. ή SeiKia προς το δαιμόνιο» (Theophr. char. 16 (22) init. [cf. Jebb p. 263 Sip]) ; su- perstition : [Polyb. 12, 24, 5] ; Plut. [SoL 12, 4] ; Alex. 7.i, 1 ; de adulat. et am. 2.j, and in his Essay πιρί της Sfiat- Βαιμονίας; Antonin. 6, 30 θιοσ^βης χωρ'ις δ(ΐσι8αιμηνίας. 3. religion, in an objective sense ; in which sense Jose- phus, antt. 19, 5, 3, says Claudius commanded the Jews μη τάς των άλλων ί6νών δεισιδαιμονίας ϊξουδίνίζίΐν. Festus in the presence of Agrippa the Jewish king employs the word ambiguously and cautiously, in Acts xxv. 19, of the Jewish religion, viz. so as to leave Ids own judg- ment concerning its truth in suspense. Cf. Zezschwitz, Profangr'acitat u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 59 ; [^K. F. Her- mann, Lehrb. d. gottesdienstl. Alterthiimer, §8 note 6; Trench § xlviii.; (cf. Kenricl; Bibl. Essays, 1864, p. 108 sqq. ; Fii'hl, Otiiun Xorv. iii. p. 80 scp)].* δίκτι-Βαίμων, -ov, gen. -όνος, (δίίδω to fear, and δαίμων deity), fearing the deity or deities, like the Lat. religiosus; used either 1. in a good sense, reverencing god or the gods, pious, religious : Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 58 ; Ages. 11,8; Aristot. pol. 5, 1 1 [p. 1315", 1] ; or 2. in abad sense, superstitious: Theophr. char. 16(22); Diod. 1, 62; 4, 51 ; Plut. de adul. c. 16 ; de superstit. c. 10 sq. Paul in the opening of his address to the Athenians, Acts xvii. 22, calls them, with kindly ambiguity, κατίι πάντα δασιδαιμονιστύρους (sc. than the rest of the Greeks [W. 244 (229)], cf. Meyer ad loc), as being devout without the knowledge of the true God ; cf. Bengel ad loc.* StKtt, 01, a'l. τά, [fr. Hom. down], ten : Mt. .\x. 24, etc. θλίψις ήμερων δίκα, i. e. to last a short time : Rev. ii. 10; cf. Dan. i. 12, 14; Xum. .xi. 19; Ter. beaut. 5, 1, 36 decern dierum vix mi est familia. 8ίκα-δύο, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later (see Passow s. v. δέκα [esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. ; cf. W. 23 (22) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept. ; i. q. δώδεκα, twelve: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places L Τ Tr \VH δώδεκα : [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. edd. 2, 7].* [Ε(κα-«'ξ, sixteen : Rev. xiii. 18 Lmrg. (Sept., al.) *] [δίκα-οκτώ for δέκα κα'ι οκτώ, eighteen : Tdf. in Lk. .xiiL 4, 11, Init Wllom. L Tr br. και; cf. s. v. και, I. 1 b.*] ScKa-ireWe, for the earlier πεντεκαίδεκα, Jifleen : Jn. xi. 18; Acts xxvii. 28; GaL i. 18; [Gen. vii. 20 Aid., Compl. ; Ex. xxvii. 15; 1 Mace. x. 40; Polyb. 3, 56, 3 var. ; Diod. 2, 13; Plut. Dion 38, 1 ; al. ; cf. δίκαδύο].* Δ£κά-ΐΓολΐ5, -εως, ή, Decnpolis {regio decapolilana, Plin. h. n. 5, 16. 1 7), i. e. a region embracing ten cities. This name is borne by a district of the tribe of Manasseh beyond the Jordan and bordering upon Syria, embrac- ing ten principal cities with smaller towns also scattered in among them. But the ancient geographers vary in their enumeration of these ten cities. Plinv 1. c. reckons Damascus among them, which .losephus seems to have excluded, calling Scythopolis μεγίστην της δεκαπόλεως, b. j. 3, 9, 7. All seem to agree in this, that (iadara, Hippo, Pella and Scythopolis were of the number. Cf. BeKaTeaaapet 128 Sextos' Win. RWB. 8. V. Decapolis ; Vaihinger in Herzog iii. 325 sq. ; Riehm, IIWB. 2U6 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.] : Mt. iv. 25; Mk. V. 20; y'u. 31.• ε<κα-τ{(Γσαρ($, -ων, οί, αί, -σάρα, τά, fourteen : Mt. i. 17 ; 2Co. xii. 2; (Jal. ii. 1. [(ieii. xxxi. 41 ; Tob. viii. 19; x. 7; Polyb. 1, :»<, 11 ; cf. if καδύο.] ' &<κάτη, -ijf, ή. (bUaTos), tlie tenth part of any tiling, a tithe ; specially the tenth part of booty taken from the enemy : Ileb. vii. 2, 4 ; the tithes of the fruits of the earth anil of tlie Hocks, wliich, by the law of Moses, were presented to the Lcvites in the congregation of Israel : Heb. vii. 8 sq. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Simon. 133 Bgk. ; Hdt. 2, 135]; 4, 152 down; Sept. for IE/;:,•?.) [Cf. BB.DD. s. V. Tithe.] • 8<κατοΐ, -I), -ov, (δίκα), [fr. Horn, down], the tenth : Jn. i. 39 (40) ; Rev. xxi. 20 ; το δίκατον, subst., the tenth part : Kev. xi. 13.* 8(κατόω. -ώ : pf. δ(δ(κάτωκα : pf. pass. &(&€κάτωμαι ', (δί- KOTos); Ιυ KXiicI or riceire the tenth part (for ivhich (irk. writ, use &(κατ(ΰω [W. 24]) : with ace. of pers. from whom, Heb. vii. 6 [on the pf. of. W. § 40, 4 a. ; Li/hlfi. St. Clement, App. p. 414] ; Pass, to pay tithes (Vulg. decimor) : Heb. vii. 9. (Neh. x. 37.) [Co.MP. : άπο- δίκατοω.] * Sektos, -ή, -όν, (δ(χομαι), accepted, acceptable : Lk. iv. 24; I'liil. iv. 18; nvi. Acts .\. 35; the phrases καφΰς SeKTOs, 2 Co. vi. 2 (Is. xlix. 8 for |ΐϊτ ny_), and €i>iavT6s 8(KTOs, Lk. iv. 19 (Is. Ixi. 2 for ρϊΐ r^yj), denote that most blessed time when salvation and the free favors of (lod profusely abound. (Ex. x.xviii. 34 ; Is. Ivi. 7, [etc.]. Among prof. auth. used by Jambl. protr. symb. § 20 p. 350.) • {κλεάζω ; [pres. pass, δίλίά^ο/ιαι] ; (SeXtap a bait) ; 1. prop, tn bait, catch bij a bait: Xeu. mem. 2, 1, 4, et al. 2. as often in prof, auth., metaph. to beffuile hi) blandish- ments, allure, entice, deceire: τινά. 2 Pet. ii. 14, 18; Jas. i. 14, on this pass. cf. Philo. ΐ|ΐιΐ)(1 omn. prob. lib. § 22 wpiii ΐτηθνμίαί (λαννίται η ύφ' ήδονης SeXeaffrai.* [Δ£λματ(α see £ίά\ματία^\ Sf'vSpov, -ου, τό, α tree : Mt. vii. 1 7, etc. ; γίικσθαι Se'vSpov or fit SfvSpov, to grow to the shape and size of a tree, Mt. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19. [(Horn., Hdt.), Arstph., Thuc. down.] ε^ξΐΌ-βόλοΐ, -ου, ό, (fr. 6(ξιΟ! and βάΧλω), throwing with the ri;/hl band, a sliniji-r, an archer : Acts xxiii. 23 in Lchm. ed. min. ; cf. the foil, word.' 8<|<Όλάβο!, -ου, ό, (5(ξιάί and λαμβάνω), a word un- known to the earlier writ'., found in Constant. Por- phyro','enitus (10th cent.) de them. 1, 1, who speaks of 8(ξιοΚάβοι, as a kind of soldiers, in company with bow-men (τοξοφάροι) and peltasts; [they are also men- tioned by Theoph. Simoc. (hist. 4, 1) in the 7th cent. ; see the quotations in Meyer]. Since in Acts xxiii. 23 two hundred of them are ordered to be ready, appar- ently spearmen are referred to (carrying a lance in the right hand) ; and so the Vulg. has taken it. The great number spoken of conflicts with the interpretation of those who suppose them to be soldiers whose duty it was to guard captives bound by a chain on the right hand. Meyer ad loc. understands them to be [either] javelin- men [or slingers^.' Serins, -ά. -όΐ', (fr. δίχομαι, fut. ϋίξομαι, orfr. Se'icui, which is akin to δίίκνυμι; ])rup. of that haii to want, need ; whence mid. δέομαι to stand in need of, want_/Or one's self) ; [fr. Ildt. down] ; 1. lo want, luck : Tivos. 2. to ilesire, long for : tivos• 3. to ask, beg, (Germ, bitten): a. iiniv. — the thing asked for be- ing evident from the context : with gen. of the pers. from whom, (ial. iv. 12: the thing sought being specified in direct discourse: I.k. v. 12; viii. 28; ix. 38 (ace. to the reading (ττίίίλιψον Κ L) ; Acts viii. 34 (δίομαί σου, jTfpl TiVof ό προφήτης Ae'yfi toCto; of whom, I )jray thee, doth the prophet say this ?) ; Acts xxi. 39 ; 2 Co. v. 20 ; foil, by the inf., Lk. viii. 38 ; ix. 38 (ace. to the reading (7!ΐβ\'(ψαι Tr '^VII) ; Acts xxvi. 3 (where CI T. Τ Tr VTU ova. σοϋ after 8(ομαι) ; foil, by ίνα, Lk. ix. 40 (cf. AV. 335 (315) : [B. 2.58 (222)]) ; foil, by τ6 with inf. 2 Co. x. 2 [cf. B. 2:;3 (226), 279 (239); \V. 321, 322 (301 sq.)]; with gen. of pers. and ace. of thing, 2 Co. viii. 4 (G L Τ Tr WII ; for Rec. .adds 8ίξασθαι ^fidt without warrant), [cf. B. 164 (143) : W. VJs (18ii)]. b. spec, of requests addressed to God : absol. to prni/, make supplication : Acts iv. 31 ; τοΰ θ(οϋ. Acts χ. 2; foil, by el Spa, Acts viii. 22 [B. 256 (220) ; W. 300 (282)] ; τοΟ κυρίου, 5ηωί etc. Mt. ix. 38 ; Lk. x. 2 ; without the gen. ieoC, — foil, by d ττωι, Ro. i. 10 [cf. W. and B. 11. cc] : by Tra. Lk. xxi. 36 ; xxii. 32; by the telic els to. 1 Th. iii. 10 [cf. B. 265 (228)]; vnkp τίνος ττρίις τον κί'ρίον. όπως. Acts viii. 24. [Syn. see αΐτίω άώΛ 6ίησις. CoMP. : προσ-δίομαι.']* δί'ον, -ofTos, τό, (ptcp. of Se'i, i). v.), fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down, titat of wliick there is need, uihich is requisite, due, proper : Seov earl there is need, 1 Pet. i. 6 [T Tr txt. WH cm. 'J'r mrg. br. c.] ; foil, by ace. with inf. Acts xLx. 36 ; τα μη SeovTa that are not proper, 1 Tim. v. 13.* Si'os. -ους, TO, (δίΐ'δω), [fr. Horn, down], /en;-, awe : μeτά ev'>^aβ(ίaς καΐ δίους, Ileb. xii. 2S L Τ Tr WH.* [Sv\. δ eoi {'ij>/ireliension).tpo βοί { fi^ar): Ammoninss.v. δ. s.avs Sfos καϊ φόβοε 5ια.ψίρ€ΐ• Seos μ\ν yap etTTt ττολυχρό- vios κακόν υπόνοια, ψό β os 5e η παραυτίκα τττόησίί. Plato (Laches p. 198 b.) : Seos yap f tVoi προσδοκίαν μϊΚΧηντο^ κακόν. Cf. StaUbaum on Plato's I'rotag. p. 167 ; Sclimii.lt eh. 139 ; and see s. v. δειλία.] Δ^ρβαϊο;, -ου, ό, of Derbe, a native ofDerbe : Acts xx. 4.* Δί'ρβη, -ης, ή, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, on the confines of Isauria, [on its supposed site see Leicin, St. Paul, i. ISl sq. ; B.D. s. v. ; cf. Conyb. and Hows. St. Paul, Index 8. v.] : Acts xiv. 6, 20: xvi. 1.* ε^'ρμα, -Tos, TO, (fr. 8epw or διίρω, as κίρμα fr. xeipa), a skin, hide, leather: Ileb. .\i. 37. (Horn, et sτήριον, -ου, τό, α prison, Jail : Mt. xi. 2 ; Acts v. 21, 23 ; xvi. 26. (Gen. .\1. 3 ; [Ildt.], Tliuc, Plat., Dem., al.)• 8€σ-μύτη$, -ου, ό, one hound, a prisoner: Acts x.wii. 1,42. ((ion. .\.\.\i.\. 20 ; Bar. i. 9 ; Hdt., AeseLyl., Soph., Tlnic, siibseq. writ.)* 8ί<ηΓΟτη5, -ου, ό, [fr. Pind. down], a master, lord (as of δοΰλοί. οΊκ(ται) : 1 Tim. vi. 1, [2] ; 2 Tim. ii. 21 : Tit. ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. IS ; God is thus addressed by one wlio calls himself liis δοί;λοΓ : Lk. ii. 29, cf. Acts iv. 24, 29, (δίσττό- τη! των πάντων, Job v. 8 ; Sap. vi. 8) ; Christ is so called, as one who has bought his servants, 2 Pet. ii. 1 ; rules over his church, .lude 4 [some take δ. here as designating God; cf. R. V. mrg.]; and whose prerogative it is to take vengeance on those who persecute his followers, Rev. vi. 10.• (Syn. ί(σπότη5, Kvpios: S. was strictly the correla- tive of slave, Sov\oi, and licnee denoted absolute ownership and uncontrolled power ; Kvpios had a wider meaning, appli- cable to the various ranks and relations of life, and not sug- gestive either of property or of alisolutism. Ammouius s. v. ζΐσττότηί says δ. δ των άρ-γυρωνητων • κΰριοί δί καϊ ιτατήρ υίον καϊ aiiTOs Tis eaurov. So l*hilo, (piis rer. div. heres § 6 ώστβ Tbv ίΐσπότ-ην κίιριον flvai καΧ ίτί ωσανύ φο0ΐρί)ν κύριον, ου μόνον τδ KUpos καϊ τό κράτο$ απάντων αν-ημμΐνον, αλλά καϊ Sfos καϊ φόβον iKavbv ίμττοιησαι. Cf. Trench § xxviii. ; Wool• eey, in Bib. Sacr. for 1861, p. 599 sq. ; Schmidt ch. 161, 5.) Sevpo, adv., fr. Horn, down ; 1. of place, a. hither; to this place, b. in urging and calling, here ! come ! (Sept. esp. for ^S and npS): Mt. xix. 21; Mk.x. 21 ; Lk. xviii. 22 ; Jn. xi. 43 (δ€ΰρο ΐξα come forth). Acts vii. 34 ; Rev. xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9; hevpo els γην, ην κτλ. Acts vii. 3 (^dfvpo ft? τον οίκόν σον, 1 Κ. i. 53 ; fls Πτολ^/ζαΓδα, 1 Mace, xii. 45). 2. of time, hitherto, nou• : άχρι τοΐι δ(ϋρο up to this time, Ro. i. 13 (μίχρι, 8eiipo, [Plat. legg. 7 p. 811 c.] ; Atlien. 1, 62 p. 34 c. ; Pint. vit. Num. 4 ; Pomp. 24).* Siire, adv., used when two or more are addressed [cf. B. 70 (61)]; perhaps fr. δήιρ' hf [yet see Bttm. Gram. 21te Aufl. § 115 Anm. 8], see δίϋρο, 1 ; 1. fr. Hom. down, come hither, come here, come : foU. by an impv., δίΟτί, κ\ηρονομήσατ(, Mt. .xxv. 34 ; δη)τβ, iScTf, Jit. xxviii. 6 ; Jn. iv. 29 ; SivTf, άριστήσατ(, Jn. .xxi. 12; δίϋτί, σννά- χθψ -e (Rec. δ• και συνάγισθι), Rev. xi.x. 17. δήιτί οπίσω μου come after me, he my disciples : Mt. iv. 19 ; JMk. i. 1 7, (equiv. to "^ΠΧ O^, 2 K. vi. 19) ; 8(ΰτ( els T.yapovs. Mt. xxii. 4 ; els ΐρημον τόπον. Mk. vi. 31 ; devTe npos pe, Alt. xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an interjection, come ' come now ! foil, by a hortat. subj. : heire, άπoκτe^vωμev, Mt. xxi. 38 ; Mk. xii. 7 and R G in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept. mostly for o'7, sometimes for W3.) * SeuTipalos, -ala, -alov, (Sevrepos), [Hdt., Xen., al.], of or belonging to the second ; of one who comes, or does a thing, on the second day (cf. TpiToios. TeTapraios, etc.) : δ(υτ€ραΐοι ηΚθομ(ν, Acts xxviii. 13; cf. W. § 54, 2; [B. §123, 9].• 8€VT€po--?rps»Tos, -ov, second-first (cf. hexnepiaxaTos sec- ond-last, last but one) : iv σαββάτω δeυτepoπpώτω in Lk. vi. 1 seems to be, the .second of the first salihaths after the feast of the Passover ; cf . Redslob in the Intelligenzblatt zur Hall. Lit. Zeit. 1847, N. 70 ; Ewald, Jahrbb. d. bibl. AVissensch. i. p. 72; ^WII. App. ad loc.]. The various opinions of others are reviewed by Meyer [and McC'lel- lan] ad loc. and Liibkert in the Stud, und Krit. for 1^35, p. 664 s(|ο%, -epa, -epov, [fr. Ilom. down; Curtius §277], second : Mt. xxii. 26 ; Mk. xii. 21 ; Lk. xii. 38 ; Jn. iv. 54 ; Rev. iv. 7, etc. ; the second, the other of two : Alt. xxii. 39 ; Mk. .xii. 31 ; 1 Co. xv. 47 ; Tit. iii. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 1 ; Heb. viii. 7; x. 9; devTepos BavaTos (see ^άι/ατοΓ, 3), Rev. ii. 11 ; XX. 14 ; xxi. 8 ; SevTepa χάρΐΓ in 2 Co. i. 15 is not a double benefit, but a second, o()p. to the former which the Corinthians would have had if Paul in passing through Achaia into Macedonia had visited them πρότε- pov, [WII txt. Trmrg. read SevT. χαράν, q. v.]. The neuter SevTepov is used adverbially in the second place, a second time [cf. W. § 37, 5 Note 1] : Jn. iii. 4 ; Rev. xix. 3 ; πάλι» is added, as often in Grk. writ, (see avwdev, fin.): Jn. xxi. 16; also το Seirepov, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Jude 5; fV SevTepov (1 Mace. ix. 1), Mk. xiv. 72; Jn. ix. 24; Actsxi. 9; Heb. ix. 28;cf. W. § 51, 1 d. ; with πάλιν added, Mt. xxvi. 42 ; Acts x. 15, (Hom. Od. 3, 161 em SevTepov alns) ; ev τώ bevrepa at the second time. Acts vii. 1 3 ( when they had come the second time) : hevTepov in a partition, then, in the second place : 1 Co. xii. 28. Sc'xopiai ; [fut. 2 pers. plur. Seξeσθe, Eph. vi. 1 7 Rec.•""] ; 1 aor. fSeξάμηv^. pf. 8ebeypai (Acts viii. 14) ; depon. mid.; Sept. mostly for npS ; 1. to take with the hand : to γράμμα [L txt. Τ Tr AVH ra γράμματα^, Lk. xvi. 6 sq. ; τό ποτήμιον. Lk. xxii. 1 7 ; ίο take hold of take up, r. nepi- κεφαλαίαν, τ. μάχαιραν, Eph. vi. 1 7 ; το παώίην els Tas ayKoXas. Lk. ii. 28. 2. to take up, receive, (Germ, auf- nehmen, annehmen) ; a. u.«ed of a place receiving one: ov bf'i olpavov δίξασθαί (ovp. is subject). Acts iii. 21, (Plat. Theaet. ]). 177 a. re\evτησavτas avToi/s . . . ό των κακών KaeaposTOnosoi&e^eTai). b. with ace. of pers. ίο receive, grant acces, to, a visitor; not to refuse intercourse or friend- ship: Lk. Lx. Π RG; Jn. iv. 45; 2 Co. vii. 15; Gal. iv. 14 ; Col. iv. 10 ; to receive to hospitality, ]\It. x. 14, 40 sq. ; Mk. vi. 11 ; Lk. Lx. 5, 53 ; x. 8, 10 ; Acts xxi. 17 Rec. ; Heb. xi. 31, (often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down) ; παιδι'ον, to receive into one's family in order to bring up and edu- cate, !Mt. xviii. 5; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. ix. 48: to receive els T. oXkovs. Tas σκηνάε, Lk. ΧΛ'ϊ. 4, 9 ; Se^ai to πvevμά μον, to thyself in heaven. Acts vii. 59. c. with ace. of the thing offered in speaking, teaching, instructing; to receive fa- 131 ΒηΧόύ vorably, give ear to, embrace, make one's oivn, approve, not to reject: τον Xoyov, Lk. viii. 13; Acts viii. 14; xi. 1 ; xvii. 11 ; 1 Th. i. (J ; ii. 13 ; Jas. i. 21 ; τα τού nvev- ματος, 1 Co. ii. 14 ; την πίΐράκΚησιν, 2 Co. viii. 1 7 ; την άγάπην της άληθίίας sc. commeiuled to them, 2 Til. ii. 10; [add the elliptical constr. in ;\It. xi. 14], (often in Grk. writ.) ; to receive a benefit offered, not to reject it, 2 Co. viii. 4 Kec. d. to receive i. q. to take upon one's self, sustain, bear, endure : τινά, his bearing and behavior, 2 Co. xi. IG, (τη» ahiKiav, Hebr. Nb^J, Gen. 1. 1 7 ; πάν, ο iav ΐπαχθη. Sir. ii. 4 ; μϋθον χα\ΐπόν, Horn. Od. 20, 271, and often in Grk. writ.). 3. to receive, get, (Germ, empfangen) : (πιστολάς. Acts xxii. S ; γράμματα. Acts xxviii. 21 ; την βασιλ(ίαν τοΰ θιοϋ, to become a partaker of the benefits of God's kingdom, Mk. x. 15 ; Lk. xviii. 17 ; \oyia ζωντα, Acts vii. 38 ; ίναγγίΚιον, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; r^i; χάριν τοΰ θίον, 2 Co. vi. 1 ; — i. q. to learn: Phil. iv. 18 [(?) see the Comm. ad loc.].* [Syk. δέχομαι, λαμβάνω: The earlier classic nse of these verbs sustains in the main the distinction laid down in the glossaries (e. g. Amraonius s. v. λαβΐΐν: λαβΐΐν μίν έστι, Th κίίμΐνάν τι ανΐΚίσθαι • δΐξασθαι Se, τίι 5ώόμ€νον 4κ Xeipis), and the suggestion of a self-prompted taking still adlieres to λ. in many connexions (ef. λαβιΊν τίνα γυναΊκα, apxhv \αβ(7ν} in distinction from a receiving of what is offered ; in use, however, the words overlap and distinctions disappear ; yet the suggestion of a w e 1 c ο m i η g or an a p- propriating reception generally cleaves to δ. See Schmidt eh. 107, who treats of the comp. of 8. in detail. Comp. : ava-, Ο7Γ0-, δια-, €(V-, €K-, άτΓ-εκ-, eV-, dm-, irapa-, wpotr-, ύτΓο-δ€χομαι.\ Sc'ti) : [fut. 8ησω1 ; 1 aor. ίδησ-α ; pf . ptcp. SeSexas (Acts xxii. 29) ; Pass., pf. 8ί8(μαι ; 1 aor. inf. Sedr/vai (Acts xxi. 83) ; Sept. chiefly for "tpx ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to hind, tie, fasten ; 1. prop. : τΐ, fls δ€σμάς, ilt. xiii. 30 [Tr WII br. G prob. om. ds. cf. B. 150 (131 ) ; W. 225 (211)]; οθόνη Τΐσσαρσιν άρχα'ις dfdep. a sheet bound by the four cor- ners (to the sky). Acts x. 11 (G L Τ Tr WII om. SfSf^. και) ; an animal, to prevent it from straying about, ovos 8(^(μ£νη, πώλοΓ δ(8(μίνος, Mt. xxi. 2 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; Lk. xix. 30 ; with προς τ. θνραν added, ^Ik. xi. 4 ; with ace. of pers. to bind, to fasten with chains, to throw into chains : αγγέλους, Rev. ix. 14 ; a madman, wi8ais και άλύσ^σι, Mk. τ. 3 sq. ; captives, Mt. [xii. 29] ; xiv. 3 ; xxii. 13 ; xxvii. 2; Mk. [iii. 27]; vi. 17; xv. 1 ; Jn. xviii. 12 ; Acts ix. 14; xxi. 1 1 ; xxii. 29 ; Rev. xx. 2 ; Pass., ^Ik. xv. 7 ; ,In. xviii. 24 ; Acts ix. 2, 21 (in the last two pass. 8f8epfvov tiyeiv τινά) ; Acts -xxi. 13 ; xxii. 5 ; xxiv. 27 ; Col. iv. 3 ; αΚύσίσι, Acts xii. 6 ; xxi. 33 ; ό λό -yor τοΰ utoi) ου 8(8(ται, fig. for these bonds of mine in no Avay hinder its course, i. e. the preaching, extension, and efficacy of the gospel, 2 Tim. ii. 9 ; the bodies of the dead, which ivere wont to be bound with bandages and linen cloths : ό τ^θνηκως 8(8(μίνος τους πόδα? κ- τας χ^ρας κΐΐρίαις, bound hand and foot with grave-cloths, Jn. xi. 44 ; το σώμα υθονίοις (Tdf. 2, 7 tV οίον.), to swathe in linen cloths, Jn. xix. 40. 2. metajih. a. Satan is said 8ησαι a woman bent together, i. e. by means of a demon, as his messenger, taking pos- session of the woman and preventing her from standino• upright, Lk. xiii. 16 cf. 11. b. to bind, i. e. piU under obligation, sc. of law, duty, etc. : 8ί8ίμίνοί τω πνήμαη, bound or constrained in my spirit, i. e. compelled by my convictions, Acts xx. 22 (so not infreq. in Grk. auth. as Plat. rep. 8 p. 567 d. avayK-rj 8(8(ται η ττροστάττΐΐ αύ- τώ) ; witli dat. of pers. 8(8(σθαι τινί to he hound to one : άνδρί, of a wife, Ro. vii. 2 ; yvvaiKi, of a husband, 1 Co. vii. 27; SefitTut absol., opp. to {Xevdipa tori, ibid. 39; (Acldll. Tat. 1, 11 p. 41 αλλ^ δί8(μαι παρθίνω, Jambl. vit. Pyth. 11, 56 την μ€ν ayapov, . . . την δί πμό? άνδρα δ^- διμίνην). C. by a Chald. and rabbin, idiom (equiv. to IDX) to forbid, prohibit, declare to be illicit: Mt. xvi. 19; xviii. 18. [Comp.: κατά-, nept-, συν-, νπο-δ(ω.'\* δη, (shortened fr. ^δι; [al. al.]), a particle which, the Epic plirases δ^ totc, δ^ yap excepted, is never placed at the beginning of a sentence, but is joined to some pre- ceding word, and indicates that " what it introduces can be taken as something settled, laid down in deed and in truth " (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 392) : now therefore, then, verily, in truth, (Lat. jam, igitur, sane, etc. — al- though neither Lat., Gerin., [nor Eng.] has a word pre- cisely equiv. to δή). 1. added to relative pronouns : Of δή tvho is such a one as, iclio preeminently, who then, Mt. xiii. 23. 2. joined to imperatives and hortatory subjunctives it signifies that the thing enjoined must be done forthwith, at once [cf. W. § 43, 3 a.], so that it may be evident that it is being done (cf. Passow i. p. 6 12'), where the Lat. says agcdum,jam. Germ, doch, nwr, [Eng. now, only, 6ui] : Lk. ii. 15 ; Acts [vi. 3 L WH mrg. br.] ; xiii. 2; xv. 36 ; 1 Co. vi. 20, (Sir. xliv. 1). 3. surely, certainly : 2 Co. xii. 1 R G.* δηλανγώϊ, (fr. δήλοί and αυγή), radiantly, in full light, clearly: Mk. viii. 25 Τ WII mrg. with codd. N*CLa for Rec. τηΧανγώς. Ilesych. says δηλαι^ώς ■ ayav φανςρώς ', add δηΧαυγίσι τ(κμηρίοις, Democrit. in Fnhricius, ISibliolh. Gr. iv. p. 333. With the exception of this word [δι;λο- τΓοίί'ω, (Phit. Pericl. 33, 8 ; al.)] and the very rare δι;λο- φανής. δήλος is not found in composition.* δήλο9, -η, -ov, [fr. Ilom. down], clear, evident, manifest : Mt. xxvi. 73 ; fiijXov sc. ίστιν it is manifest, evident, foil, by oTi (4 Mace. ii. 7 ; Xen. an. 1,3, 9; al.) : 1 Co. xv. 27 [here some would take the words adverbially and paren- thetically i. e. δ;;λονότι manifestly cf. W. § 64, 2 a.] ; Gal. iii. 11; 1 Tim. vi. 7 (hereLTTrWII om. δ^λον).* [Svy. δηλοϊ, φανΐ pos: S. eridejit, what is known and un- derstood, (p. mniiifesl, as opp. to what is concealed or invisible ; δ. points rather to inner perception, φ. to outward appear- ance. Cf. Schmidt ch. 129.] δηλόω, -ώ ; [inipf. (δήλουν; fut. δηλώσωΐ; 1 aor. ϊ8ή• λωσα; Pass., [impf. 3 pers. sing, ίδηλοντο (1 Pet. i. 11 WII mrg.)]; 1 aor. (δηλύθην: (δήλος); Sept. for ;yiin and sometimes for ΓΙ^ΙΠ ; in Grk. auth. fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; to make manifest: τΐ, 1 Co. iii. 13; /o make known by relating, to declare : τι. Col. i. 8 ; Ttvi nfpl tlvos, Sti, 1 Co. i. 1 1 ; to give one to understand, to indicate, signify: τί, Heb. xii. 27; 2 Pet. i. 14; foil, by ace. with inf. Heb. ix. 8 ; Λ τι, point unto, 1 Pet. i. 11.* [Syx. Β-ηΚόω, e μφανί ζω : ίμφΛοηΐΆηϋθ^ί to the sight, make visilile : δ to render evident to the m i η d. of such dis- closures as exhibit character or suggest inferences ; hence Δήμα.'; 132 δια eep. of prophetical, typical, or other supernatural diedosDres. t"f. Scluiii.it ch. 129 § 6; Bleei; on Ileli. ix. 8.] Δημά;, ό, Dennis, (prop, name, coiitracliMl apparently ft•. Λημήτμιοί, ef. \V. 1U3 (117) ; [on its (ieclensioii, of. 15. 'JO (I8)J),acoiiii)aiiioii of Paul, Λνΐιο Jeserted the ajios- tle when he was a jirisoner at Uouie anJ returned to Thessalonica : Col. iv. 14; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. 10.• &ημηγορ€(ι*, -ώ : [inipf. ί^ημηγήμονν'] ; (to be a δημηγορος, fr. δήμος ami dyopf ύω Ιο liaraiiL;iK• the people) ; la iii/ilrc.sx it jiiiliiic (isscmhii/, make a uprech to t/ie peiijile : ΐδημτιγόρα npus αυτούς [Λ. V. 7Hiiile an oriitlon^, Aets xii. 21. (.Vr- stph., Xen., Plat., Dem., al. Prov. xx.\. 31 (xxiv. ISC); 4 .\huc. V. 1.5.)• Δημήτριο;, -ου, ό, Di'metr'lus ; 1. a silversniitli of Epliesti.s a heathen: Acts xL\. 24, 38. 2. a certain Christian: 3 Jn. 12.• εημιουρ-γόΐ, -oD, ό. (δήμιος |)ul)lie, bclonpng to tlie jieo- pU', ami ΙίΙ'Γίί; cf. Itpovpyos, ά^πίλ«υ/)γύϊ, etc.), often in (jrk. writ. fr. lloni. do\vn ; a. prop, a workman for ilie pulilic. b. univ. ///« author of any work, an artisan, fravicr, hulUltr: τίχνίτης κ. δημιουργός, IIcl)..\i. 10; (Χΐ'π. mem. 1,4, 7 [cf. 9] σοφοϋ rii/oy δημιουργού τίχνημα. God is called 6 του ουρανού δημιουργός in Plat. rep. 7 ]>. 5;.i0 a. ; ό δημ. των οΧων ill Joseph, aiitt. 1, 7, 1, and often in eccl. writ, from Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 11; 2G, 1 ; 33, 2 on; [cf. Pliilo, de mut. nom. § 4 ; de opif. mund. ed. Jliiller p. 133; Piper, Einl. in monument. Theol. §20; Sup/i. Lex. .s. V.]. In the Scriptures, besides, only in 2 Mace. iv. 1 κακών δημ.). [Cf. Trench § cv.] * δήμος, -ου, ό, tlie people, the mass of (he people ussemlihrl ill II pulilic place: Acts xii. 22; .\ix. 3.'!; ayfii/ [11(11, (ΐσ('\θ(ΐν €ΐςτον δήμον: Acts xvii. 5 [fj Τ Tr λ\ II προαγ.]; xix. 30. [From Horn, down.]" [ Syn. ίημο!, Kaos: in clas.sic Grk. $ήμο! denotes the peo- ple a.s or^'aiiizcd into a body politic, \aos the unorganized people at larfje. But in biblical Grk. \aii is u.sed esp. of the chosen people of God ; Βημο: on the other hand (found only in Acts) denotes the people of a heathen city. Cf. Trench § xcviii,; Schmidt ch. 199.] &ημόσ-ι.ος, -α, -ov, esp. fre(|. in Attic; belonijinrj to the people or stale, puldic (ojip. to ίδιος) : Acts v. 18 ; in dat. fem. δημοσία used adverbially (opp. to ίδια) [cf. W. 591 (549) note], puhlicli/, in public places, in view of all : Acts xvi. 37; xviii. 28; δημ. κα'ι κατ οίκους, Acts χχ. 20; (2 Mace. vi. 10 ; 3 Mace. ii. 27 ; in Grk. writ, also hi/ public authoriti/, al the public expense).' ,8ηνάριον, -ου, τό, [Pint., Epiet., al.], a Lat. word, a de- narius, a silver coin, oristinally consisting of ten [whence its name], afterwards [fr. b. c. 217 on] of sixteen asses; about [3.89S orrams, i. c. Si pence or 1C| cents; rapidly debased fr. Nero on ; cf. BB.DD. s. r. Denarius] : Jit. -xviii. 28; XX. 2, 9, 13; .x.xii. 19; Jlk. vi. 37; xii. 15; .xiv. 5 ; Lk. vii. 41 ; x. 35 ; xx. 24 ; .In. vi. 7 ; .xii. 5 ; Rev. vi. 6 [ef. W. 587 (540) ; B. 1G4 (143)] ; το άνα δηνάριον sc. 3» the pay of a denarius apiece jiromised to each work- man, Mt. XX. 10 Τ Tr [txt., Trmrg. WII br. τό].* δή -iroTe (fr. δή and ποτί), adv., now at loir/th (Jam aliquanilo) ; at an;/ lime ; at last, etc., /«.al. iii. 18; hov\fveiv 8ιά τηί σγάτπ^ί, (tal. v. \'Λ\ (ττιστίλλει^ δία /:ίρα;^£ωΐ', ΙΚΊ). χίϋ. 2"2; -γράφίΐν δι' ολίγωι/. 1 IVt. ν. 12, (I'liit. Gor•;. |). 449 b. δια μακρών Xuyovs ττοί^ισθαι [si'i• oXlyos^ ίιπ. ; οι- Η • § 51, 1 b.]); δια χάρτου και fieXncor, 2 .In. 12: δια μίλανο! κ. κάΚάμου, 3 Jn. 13, (I'liit. Sol. 17, 3). To this head 1 should refer also the use of διό tivos in exhortations etc., where one seeks to strcngtlien his exhortation by the mention of a thin^ or a jierson held .«acred by those whom he is admonishing (διή eijuiv. to //// an allusion to, hii rcm'indint] ijou of [cf. W. 381 (357)]) : Ho. xii. 1 ; XV. 30 ; 1 Co. i. 10 ; 2 Co. x. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 2 [yet cf. ΛΥ. 379 (355) note] ; 2 Th. iii. 12 II G. B. with the Accusative [W. 398 (372) sq.]. I. of Place; through ; often so in the Grk. poets, once in the N. T. ace. to L Τ Tr WII viz. Lk. xvii. 1 1 δια piaov 2αμαρ(ίαί, for R G Sta μίσον Σαμ. [but see /icVor, 2]. II. of the Ground or Reason on account of which anything is or is not done ; bi/ reason of, because of ((ierm. aus GrunJ). 1. of the reason for which a thing is done, or of the efficient reason, wlien for greater perspicuity it may he rendered hi/ [cf. Kiihner § 4:i4 Anm.] ; a. with ace. of the thing : δι' ην, viz. την τοϋ Biuv ήμίραν (jirop. by reason of which day i. e. because it will come [cf. W. 400 (373)]), 2 Pet. iii. 12; 8ia T. \όγον (prop, by reason of the word i. e. because the word has cleansing power), Jn. xv. 3 ; δια το θίλημά σηυ (^'ulg. propter voluntatem tuani i. e. because thou didst will it). Rev. iv. 11; add, Rev. xii. 11; xiii. 14, (^άναβίώσκΐται. dia την τον πατρός φνσίν, Plato, symp. p. 203 e.) ; cf. (jrinim on 2 Mace. iii. 1. b. with ace. of the person, by whose will, agency, favor, fault, any- thing is or is done : Bta τον πατίρα ... δι' ίμί (prop, be- cause the father lives . . . because I live [cf. W. 399 (373)]), Jn. vi. 57; hia το» νποτάξαντα, by the wiU of him who subjected it, ojjp. to ουχ ίκοΰαα, Ro. viii. 20 [cf. W in. 399 (373) note] ; μη (ΐπηι οτι δια κνριον άπί- στην. Sir. χν. 1 1 ; so too in the Grk. writ, of every age ; cf. Kriiger § 68, 23 ; Grimm on 2 Mace. vi. 25. Much oftener 2. of the reason or cause on account ο f which anything is or is done, or ought to be done ; on account of, because of; a. in the phrases δια τούτο for thix cause ; for this reason ; therefore ; on this account ; since this is so: Mt. vi. 25; xii. 27, 31; xiii. 13, etc.; Mk. vi. 14; xi. 24; Lk. xi. 49; xiv. 20; Jn. vi. 65; ix. 23 ; Acts ii. 26 ; Ro. i. 26 ; iv. 16 ; v. 12 ; xiii. 6 ; xv, 9 ; 1 Co. iv. 17; xi. 10, 30; 2 Co. iv. 1 ; Eph. i. 15; v. 17; vi. 13 ; Col. i. 9 ; 1 Th. ii. 13 ; iii. 5, 7 ; 2 Th. ii. 11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 10; Ileb. i. 9: ii. 1 ; 1 Jn. iv. S; 3 Jn. 10; Rev. vii. 15; xii. 12; xviii. 8. foil, by ότι, for this cause ... be- cause, therefore . . . because: Jn. v. 10, 18; viii. 47; x. 17 ; xii. 18, 39 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; cf. Tholuck ed. 7 on Jn. x. 17, [he questions, at least for x. 1 7 and xii. 39, the canon of Meyer (on xii. 39), Luthardt (on x. 1 7), al., that in this phrase in Jn. the toCto always looks backwards], in the opposite order (when the words that precede with ότι are to be emphasized) : Jn. xv. 19. It indicates the end and purpose, being foil, either by ίνα, 2 Co. xiii. 10; 1 Tim. i. l(i ; Philem. 15, (in the opp. order, Jn. i. 31) ; or by όπως, Ileb. ix. 15. δια τί [.so L Tr WII] and written togetlier διατι [so G Τ ; cf. \V. 45 ; Lijisius, Gram. Unters. p. 12i;], ιΗιι/ΐ wherefore.' Mt. ix. 11, 14; xiii. 10; xvii. 19; Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 30 ; Jn.vii.45; Acts v. 3 ; Ro. ix. 32 ; 1 Co. vi. 7 ; Rev. xvii. 7. δι ην αΐτίαν, see αίτια, 1 . τι'γ ή αιτία, δι ην, Acts χ. 21 ; xxiii. 28 ; δια ταϋτην την αιτιαν. Acts xxviii. 20; διαταΟτα, Eph. v.6,etc. b. used, with the ace. of any noun, of the mental affection by which one is im- pelled to some act [Eng./or; cf. λΥ. 399 (372)] : δια φθύ- νον, because prompted by envy, /'or envy, Mt. xxvii. 18; Mk. XV. 10; δια ToK φϋ /doKTii/ut, .In. vii. 13 ; xix.;i8; xx. 19 ; Rev. xviii. 10, 15 ; hia την ττοΧΚην άγάηην, Κ\Λ\. ii. 4. of any other cause on account of Avhich one is said to do or to have done something, — as in Mt. xiv. 3,9; xv. 3, 6 ; Jn. iv. 39, 41 sq. ; xii. 11 ; xiv. 11 ; Acts xxviii. 2; Ro. iii. 25 (δια την πάρισιν των npoyfy• άμαρτημ. because of the pretermission etc., i. e. becausi' lie liad left the sins un- |)unislicd); Ro. vi. 19; χ v. 15; 2 Co. ix. 14; Gal. iv. 13 ( δι' άαθίνιιαν της σαρκός, on account of an inlirniity of the fk'sh, i. e. detained .among you by sickness; cf. Wieseler [or Bp. Lghtf t.] ad loc.) ; — or to suffer or have suffered something, Mt. xxiv. 9 ; xxvii. 19 ; Lk. xxiii. 19, 25 ; Acts x.\i. 35 ; 2 Co. iv. 11 ; Col. iii. 6 ; 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; Rev. i. 9 ; vi. 9; — or to have obtained something, Ileb. ii. 9; v. 14 ; 1 Jn. ii. 1 2 ; — or to be or to become something, Ro. viii. 10; xi. 28; Eph. iv. 18; Heb. v. 12 [W. 399 (373)]; vii. 18. of the impeding cause, where by reason of some per- son or thing something is said to have been impossible : Mt. xiii. 58; xvii. 20; Alk. ii. 4 ; Lk. v. 19; viii. 19; Acts xxi. 34 ; Ileb. iii. 19 ; iv. 6. διά with the ace. of a pers. is often i. q. for the benefit of, [Eng. /or the sake of^ : Mk. ii. 27 , Jn. xi. 42 ; xii. 30 ; 1 Co. xi. 9 ; Heb. i. 14 ; vi. 7 ; δια τους e'κ'\fκτoΰς, Mt. xxiv. 22 ; Mk. xiii. 20 ; 2 Tim. ii. 10; δια Χριστόν for Christ's sake, to promote his cause, 1 Co. iv. 10; δι' υμάς, Jn. xii. 30; 2 Co. iv. 15; viii. 9; Phil. i. 24 ; 1 Th. i. 5. δκί τικα, because of the example set by one : 2 Co. ii. 10 ; Ro. ii. 24 ; 2 Pet. ii. 2 ; δια τον Χριστόν for Christ, to become a partner of Christ, Phil, iii. 7 (cijuiv. to ΐνα Χριστόν κ€ρδήσω, vs. 8). c. διά τό, bn-ausc that, for that, is placed before the inf., — either standing alone, as Lk. ix. 7 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; — or having a subject ace. expressed, as Mt. xxiv. 12 ; Mk. v. 4 ; Lk. ii. 4 ; xix. 1 1 ; Acts iv. 2 ; xii. 20 ; xviii. 2 ; xxvii. 4, 9 ; xxviii. 1 8 ; Phil. i. 7 ; Heb. vii. 24 ; x. 2 ; Jas. iv. 2 ; — or with its subject ace. evident from the context, as Mt. xiii. 6 ; Mk. iv. 6 ; Lk. xi. 8 ; xviii. 5 ; xxiii. 8 ; Acts viii. 11 ; xviii. 3. C. In Composition διά indicates 1. a passing through space or time, through, (διαβαίνω, δπρχομαι, διυ- λίζω, etc.) ; hence 2. continuity of time (διαμίνω. δια- Τ(λί'ω, διαττ^ρί'ω). and completeness of action {διακαθαρίζω, διαζώνννμι). 3. distribution (διαδίδωμι, διαγγίλλω. δια- φημίζω). 4. separation (διαλύω, διαιρίω). 5. rival- ry and endeavor (διαπίνω, διακατίλίγχομαι ; cf. Ilcrm. ad Vig. p. 854; [AVincr, as below, p. 6]). 6. transitioa from one state to another (διαλλάσσω, διορθόω). [Cf. Wirt' er, De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. ; Valckcnaer on Ildt. 5, 18 ; Cattier. Gazophyl. ed. Abresch, Cant. 1810, p. 39 ; ^. διαβαίνω 135 Βίά'γω Rieder, Ueb. d. mit mehr als ein. prap. ziisammeng. verba im X. T. p. 1 7 sq.] No one of the X. T. writers makes more freq. use of verbs compounded with διό than Luke, [see the list in Winer, u. s. p. 3 note ; on their constr. W. § 52, 4, 8]. Sia -βαίνω : 2 aor. &ιίβην, inf. διαβήναι, ptcp. διαβάι ; as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; (Plin. pertranieo) ; to pass through, cross over ; a. transitively : την θάλασσαν ώί διά ξηράς, Heb. xi. 29. b. intrans. : προς τίνα, Lk. xvi. 2ublish abroad, declare, [see δ«ι, C. 3] : τι, Lk. ix. 60 ; Acts xxi. 26 {διαγ- γίΧλων, sc. to all who were in the temple and ivere knowing to the affair) ; with the addition ev πάση τη γή, Ro. ix. ] 7 fr. Ex. ix. 16. (Lev. xxv. 9 ; Josh. vi. 10 ; Ps. ii. 7 ; [Iviii. (hx.) 13] ; Sir. xliii. 2 ; 2 Mace. iii. 34.) • Sid^^c, see ye, 1. δια-γ£νομαι: 2aor. eifyfyo^ij»; 1. lo be through, con- tinue. 2. lo be between, intervene; hence in Grk. writ, fr. Isaeus (p. 84, 14, 9 [or. de Hagn. hered.] χμόνων διαγι- νομ€'νων} down, the aor. is used of time, to hare intervened, elapsed, passed meamchile, [cf. χρόνου μεταξύ διαγαιομίνου Lys. 93, 6]: ήμερων διαγινομίνων τίνων, Acts xxv. 13 ; ίκανον χρόνου διαγί fo^eVou, Acts xxvii. 9 ; διαγ(νυμ£νου τοϋ σαββάτον, Mk. xvi. 1.* δια-γινώσ-κω ; fut. διαγνώσομαι ; 1. to distinguish (Lat. dignosco), i. e. to know accurately, ascertain exactly: τί. Acts -xxiii. 15; (so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn. down). 2. in a legal sense, to examine, determine, decide, (cf. Cic. cognosce) : τα Kaff υμάς your case, Acts xxiv. 22 ; (2 Mace. ix. 15 ; Dem. p. 629, 25 ; p. 545, 9 ; al.).* δια-^ωρ£ζω : 1 aor. δκ-γνώρισα ; to publish abroad, make known thoroughly : nepi titoe, Lk. ii. 17 RG. Besides, only in [Philo, quod det. pot. § 26, i. 210, 16 ed. Mang. and] in Schol. in Bekk. Anecd. p. 787, 15 to discriminate.* διά-γνωσιβ, -(ως. ή, (see διαγινώσκω) ; 1. α distin- guishing. 2. in a legal sense (Lat. foi/niiio), exam/nn- tion, opinion, decision, (Sap. iii. 1 8 ; Plat. legg. 9 p. 865 c.) : Acts XXV. 21.* δια-γογγΰζω : impf. δκγόγγυζον ; to murmur (8ιά i.e. either through a whole crowd, or ' among one another,' Germ, durch einander [cf. διό, C.]) ; hence it is always used of many indignantly complaining (see γογγϋζω) : Lk. XV. 2 ; xL\. 7. (Ex. xvi. 2, 7, 8 ; [Xum. xiv. 2] ; Josh. ix. 24 (18), etc.; Sir. xxxiv. (xxxi.) 24; Clem. Alex. i. p. 528 ed. Pott.; Heliod. 7, 2 7, and in some Byzant. writ.) Cf. TI7/i. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16 sq.* δια-γρηΎορί'αι, -ώ : 1 aor. διeypηyόρησa : to watch through, (Hdian. 3, 4, 8 [4 ed. Bekk.] πάσης της νυκτός . . . δια- γρηγορησαντ£ς, Xiceph. Greg. Hist. Byz. p. 205 f. and 571 a.) ; lo remain awake : Lk. ix. 32 (for they had overcome the force of sleep, with which they were weighed down, βφαρημ. ΐιπνω) \ [al. (e. g. R. Λ^. txt.) lo be fully awake, cf. Xiceph. u. s. p. 205 f. δόξαν άπ(βαλόμην ωσπιρ οΊ δια- γρηγορησαντες τά iv το\ς νπνοις oveipara; Win. De Λ'6γΚ comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11 sq.].* δι-άγω ; 1. to lead through, lead across, send across. ΒιαΒΐχ^ομαι 136 ΒίαθήκΊ) 2. Willi τον βίον. τΰν xpoyov, etc., added or un δκζωσμίνος, Jn. xiii. .5 ; Mid. διαζώνννμαί τι Ιο gird one's self with a lliing, gird a Ihing around one's self: Jn. xxi. 7 ; (Ezek. xxiii. 15 [Alex.], in Grk. writ, occasionally fr. Thue. on). Cf. Win. Dc verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 13.* διαθήκη, -i;f, η, (δ^ατίθημι) ; 1. a dispfisilion, nrrange- menl, of any sort, which one wi.shes to be valid, (Germ. Verordnung, Willensverjugung): Gal. iii. 1.5, where un- der the name of a man's ilisposilion is meant specifically a leslainenl, so far forth as it is a specimen and example of that dispositiijii [cf. Mey. or P.p. I.ghtft. ad loc.]; esp. Ilie last disposal which one makes of his earthlv possessions after his death, a IcslamenI or rvill (so in Grk. writ. fr. [Arstph.], Plat. legg. 11 p. 922 c. sc[i\. down) : Heb. ix. 16 S(j. 2. ο comparl, covenant (Arstph. av. 440), very often in the Seiiptures for n"\3 (Vulg. teslamen- lum). For the word covenant is used to denote the close relationshi]) which God (entered into, first with Noah (Gen. vi. 18; ix. !l sipp [cf. Sir. xliv. 18]), then with Abraham, Isaac and .Jacob and their posterity (Lev. xxvi. 42 [cf. 2 Alacc. i. 2]), but esp. with Abraham (Gen. XV. and xvii.), and afterwards through Moses with the people of Israel (Ex. xxiv. ; Deut. v. 2 ; xxviii. 69 (xxix. 1)). By this last covenant the Israelites are bound to obey God's will as exjiressed and solemnly promulged in the Mosaic law ; and he promises them his almighty protection and blessings of every kind in this world, but threatens transgres.sors ivith the .severest ])iinisli- mcnts. Hence in the N. T. we find mention of αϊ πΧάκα TVS διαθήκη! (η•"ΐ3Π ΠΙΠΙ^, Deut. ix. 9, l.O), the tables oj the lair, on which the duties of tlie covenant were inscribed (Ex. XX.) ; of ή κιβωτοί τήί διαθ. (η"ΐ3Π [Ι^Κ, Deut. χ. 8 ; xxxi. 9; Josh. iii. 6, etc.), the ark of the covenant or laiv, in which those tables were deposited, Ileb. ix. 4 ; Rev. xi. 19; o{ ή διαθήκη πιριτυμήί tlie covenant of cir- cumcision, made with .\brahani, whose sign and seal was circumcision ((!en. ,\\ii. 10 .sijip). Acts vii. 8; of το αίμα της διαθήκης the blood of the victims, by the shedding and sprinkling of Λvllich the Mosaic covenant was ratified, llcb. ix. 20 fr. Ex. xxiv. 8; of αϊ διαβήκαι the covenants, one made willi Abraham, the other through Moses with the Israelites, Ro. ix. 4 [L txt. Tr mrg. ή διαθήκη] (Sap. xviii. 22 ; Sir. xliv. 1 1 ; 2 Mace. viii. 15 ; Ε]), of Barn. !l ; [cf. W. 177 (166)]); of αϊ διαθήκαι της (ViiyyfXi'af, the covenants to which the promise of salvaiion through the Messiah was annexed, Eph. ii. 12 {συνθήκαι αγαθών νπο- axfo-fwv. Sap. xii. 21); for Christian sahation is the fulfilment of the divine promises annexed to those cov- enants, esp. to that made with Abraham: Lk. i. 72s(p: Acts iii. 25; Ro. xi. 27; Gal. iii. 17 (Avliere διαθήκη is God's arrangement i. e. the promise made to Abiaham). As the new and far more excellent bond of friendship which God in the Messiah's time ivould enter into with the peojile of Israel is called ΠΠΊΠ Π")3, καινή διαθήκη (.Ter. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31), — which divine jiromise Christ has made good (Ileb. viii. 8-10 ; x. 16), — we find in the N. T. two distinct covenants spoken of, δυο διαθήκαι (Gal. iv. 24), viz. the Mosaic and the Christian, with the former of which {τ;ι πρώττ) διαθήκ;/. ΙΙιΊ). ix. l.j, 18, cf. viii. 9) the latter is contrasted, as καινή διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi. 28 ; Mk. xiv. 24 (in both pass, in R G L [in Mt. in Tr also]) ; Lk. xxii. 20 [WIl reject the jiass.] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; 2 Co. iii. 6 ; Heb. viii. 8 ; κρύττων διαθήκη, Ileb. vii. 22; αιώνιο! διαθήκη, Heb. xiii. 20; and Christ is called κρύτ- Tiivos or καινί;; or vtas διαθήκη: μ(σίτης : Heb. viii. ti ; ix. l.'i; xii. 24. This new covenant binds men to exercise faith in Christ, and God promises I hem grace and salva- tion eternal. 'J'his covenant Christ set up and ratified by un(lergoin<4 death; hence the phra>cs τό αΓ/χη τήί καινήί διαθήκηί, τι) αίμα τήί διαθήκης, (sec α'μα sub fin.), [Heb. χ. 211] : τϊι αίμιί μου της διαθήκης, my blood by the shed- ding of which the covenant is established, Mt. xxvi. 28 Τ λ\ΊΙ and Mk. xiv. 24 Τ Tr \VH (on two gen. after one noun if. .Matthiae § 380, Anm. 1 : Kiihner ii. p. 288 sq.; ίιαίρεσκ 137 διακονία [Jelf § 543, 1, cf. § 466 ; W. § 30, 3 Note 3 ; Β. 155 (136)]). By metonymy of the contained for the container ή παλαιά ίιαθηκη h used in 2 Co. iii. 14 of Ihe sacred bouls of Ike O. T. because in them the conditions and principles of the older covenant were recorded. Finally must be noted the amphiboly or twofold use [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § G] by which the ivriter to the Hebrews, in i.\. 16 sq., substitutes for the meaning rucenant which διαθήκη bears elsewhere in the Ep. that of leslamenl (see 1 above), and likens Christ to a testator, — not only because the author regards eternal blessedness as an inheritance be- «jueathed by Christ, but also because he is endeavoring to show, both that the attainment of eternal salvation is made possible for the disciples of Christ by his death (i.\. 15), and that even the Mosaic covenant had been consecrated by blood (18 sqq.). This, apparently, led the Latin Λ'ulgate to render διαθήκη where\ er it occurs in the Bible [i. e. in the 'Sew Test., not always in the Old ; see B. D. s. v. Covenant, and B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Testament] by the word leslamentum.' Si-aCp«ris, -(ω!, ή, {διαιρΐω, q. v.) ; 1. division, dis- tribution, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. distinction, differ- ence, (Plat. Soph. p. 267 b. τίνα διαίρ^σιν άγνωσίας τ€ και γνώσεως βήσομ^ν ; al.) ; in particular, a distinction arisimj from a different distrihutinn to different persons, [A. Λ^. dirersili/'] : 1 Co. xii. 4-6, cf. 1 1 διαιμοϋν ιδία ίκάστω καθώς βον\€ται.* 8ι-αιρ«ω, -ώ ; 2 aor. δκΐλον ; 1. to divide into parts. Ιο part, to tear, cleave or cut asunder, (Hom. and subseq. writ. ; Gen. xv. 10 ; 1 K. iii. 25). 2. to distribute : τί τίΜ (Xen. C>T. 4, 5, 51 ; Hell. 3, 2, 10) : Lk. xv. 12; 1 Co. xii. 1 1 ; (Josh, xviii. 5 ; 1 Chr. xxiii. 6, etc.).* [8ια-καθαίρω : 1 aor. δκκάθαρα (un-Attic and later form ; cf. Moeris, ed. Piers, p. 137 ; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 25 ; Veitch s. v. καθαιρώ), inf. διακαθάραι : to cleanse (throughly cf. διά, C. 2 i.e.) t/ioriiu//lilii : Lk. iii. 17 Τ WII Lrarg. Tr mrg. : for lie. διακαθαρίζω. (Fr. Arstph. and Plat, down.)*] εια-καθορίξω : fut. διακαθαριώ [Β. 37 (32) ; AV. § 13, I c. ; WH. App p. 163]; to cleanse tliorouf/hli/, (Vulg. per- mundo) : την αΚωνα, Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 1 7 [T WH etc. διακαθάραι, q. \.~\. (Not found in prof, auth., who use διακαθαίρω, as τήν πλω, Alciphr. ep. 3, 26.) * εια-κατ-Λί'γχομιαι : impf. διaκaτη\fyχ6μηv ; to confute with riralri/ and e^'ort or in a contest (on this use of the j)rep. διά in compos, cf. Ilemi. ad Vig. j). KS4 ; [al. give it here the sense of completeness ; .«ee διά, C. 2]) : with dat. of pers. [W. § 31, 1 f. ; B. 177 (154)] ; not found exc. in Acts xviii. 28 [R. V. powerfully confuted'].' SiaKovc'u, -ω: impf. διηκόνουν (as if the verb were com- pounded of διά and άκοι/ί'ω, for the rarer and earlier form ίδιακήνουν, cf. B. 35 (31 ) ; Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 86 Anm. 6 ; Kriiger §28, 14. 13): [fut. διακονήσω]; 1 aor. διηκό- νησα (for the earlier (διακιΊνησα) : Pass., pres. ptcp. δια- κονονμινο! : 1 aor. inf. διακονηθηναι, ptcp. διακοιτηθύ: '■ (διάκονος, i\. V.) ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.], Hdt. down ; to be a .servant, attendant, domestic; to serve, wait upon : 1. nniv. : [absol. ο διακόνων, Lk. xxii. 26] ; with dat. of pen. to minister to one: render ininisterini/ offices to : Jn. xii. 26 ; Acts xix. 22 ; Philem. 1 3 ; Pass, to be served, ministered unto (W. § 39, 1 ; [B. 188 (163)]): Mt. \x. 28 ; Mk. X. 45. 2. Like the Lat. ministrare, to wail at table and oβ'er food and drink to the yuests, [cf. W. 593 (552)] : with dat. of pers., Mt. iv. 1 1 ; viii. 15 ; Mk. i. 13, 31; Lk. iv. 3U ; xii. 37; xvii. 8; absol. ό διακόνων, Lk. xxii. 27 ; so also of ivomen i)reparing food, Lk. x. 40 : .In. xii. 2 ; (Menand. ap. Atht-n. 6 c. 46, p. 245 c. ; Anacr. 4, 6 ; al. ; pass, διακονύσθαι υπό τινοι; Diod. 5, 28 ; Pliilo, vit. contempl. § 9). 3. to minister i. e. supply food and the necessaries of life : with dat. of pers., Mt. xxv. 44 ; xxvii. 55 ; Mk. xv. 41 ; διηκόνουν airois eV (Rec. άττό) των υπαρχόντων aira'is, Lk. viii. 3 ; to relieve one's neces- sities (e. g. by collecting alms) : Ro. .xv. 25 ; Heb. vi. 10; τραπίζαις , to jjrovide, take care of, distribute, the things necessary to sustain life, Acts vi. 2. absol., those are said dioKovfiv. i. e. to take care of the poor and the sick, ivho administer the office of deacon (see διάκονος, 2) in the Christian churches, to serve as deacons : 1 Tim. iii. 10, 13; 1 Pet. iv. 11 [many take this last ex. in a gen- eral rather than an official sense]. 4. with ace. of the thing, to minister i. e. attend to, ani/thinr/. that may serve another's interests : χάρις διακουουμίνη ίφ' ημών, 2 Co. viii. 19 ; [άδμοτήί, ibid. 20] : όσα διηκόνησι, how many things I owe to his ministration, 2 Tim. i. 18; ΐπιστολή διακονηθίίσα ίφ' ημών, an epistle written, as it were, by our serving as amanuenses, 2 Co. iii. 3. with ace. of the thing and dat. of pers., to minister a Ihinr/ unto one, to serve one with or b;/ supplying any thing: 1 Pet. i. 12; τϊ ftr eavTois, i. e. fii άλλ^λονΕ to one another, for mutual use, 1 Pet. iv. 10.• SiaKovCa. -at. ή, (διάκονος), [fr. Tluic, Plat, down], ser- vice, ministering, esp. of those who e.xecute the commands of others; 1. univ. : 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; Heb. i. 14. 2. of those who by the command of God proclaim and pro- mote reliffion among men ; a. of the office of Moses: ή διακ. τοϋ θανάτου, concisely for the ministration by which the law is promulgated that threatens and brings death, 2 Co. iii. 7 ; της κατακρίσιως, the ministration by wliich condemnation is announced, ibid. 9. b. of the office of the apostles and its administration: Acts i. 17, 25; XX. 24; xxi. 19; Ro. xi. 13; 2 Co. iv. 1 ; vi. 3: 1 Tim. i. 1 2 ; τοϋ λύγου, Acts vi. 4 ; τοΐι πνίΐματος, the ministry whose office it is to cause men to obtain and be governed by the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. iii. 8 ; ttjs δικαιο- σύνης, bv which men are taught how they may become righteous with God, ibid. 9 ; της καταΚ'Χα•/ης, the ministry whose work it is to induce men to embrace the offered reconciliation with God, 2 Co. v. 18 ; προς την υμών δια- κονίαν, that by preaching the gospel I might minister unto vou, 2 Co. xi. 8. c. of the ministration or ser\ ice of all who, endowed bv' God with powers of mind and heart peculiarly adapted to this end, endeavor zealously and laboriously to promote the cause of Christ among men, as apostles, prophets, evangelists, elders, etc. : 1 Co. xii. 5 ; Eph. iv. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 5. AVhat ministry is re- ferred to in Col. iv. 17 is not clear. 3. the 7ninistra- tion of those who render to others the offices of Christian δ. ακονος 138 Βιακρίν affection : 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; Rev. ϋ. 19, esp. of those who succor need by either collecting or bestowing benefac- tions [Acts xii. 25] ; the caie of the poor, the supplying or distributing of charities, (Luther uses Hanilreickunt/) : Acts vi. 1 ; 2 Co. i.\. 13 ; ή διακονία ή eis rovr aylovt, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; ix. 1 ; ή διακονία τή( XtiTovpyiat, the ministration rendered througli this \{ΐτουργία, 2 Co. ix. 12; ηίμπαν fh SiaKoiilav τινί, to send a thing to one for the relief of his want [.V. V. to send relief unto'], Acts xi. 2!) {κόμιζαν χρήματα ττολλα fts ^ίακοιήαν των χηρών. Acta Thoniac § 5G, ]). 23.'! ed. I'dt. ); ή δίακηνία μου ή tts Ίιρουσαλ. "my min- istration in bringing the money collected by me, a minis- tration intended for Jerusalem" (Fritzsche), Ro. xv. 31 [liere L Tr mrg. read ij 8ωροφορία . . . e'v etc.]. 4. the office of deacon in the primitive cliurch (see Siokovos, 2) : Ro. xii. 7. 5. the service of those who prepare and present food : Lk. x. 40 (as in Xen. oec. 7, 41).* SiOKovos, -ου, ό, ή, (of unccrt. origin, but by no means, as was formerly thouglit, compounded of διό and kovls, so as to mean prop. ' raising dust by hastening ' ; cf. iyKovfiv \ for α in the prep, δια is short, iu διάκονος long. littin. Lexil. i. p. 218 sqq. [Eng. trans, p. 231 S(|.] tliinks it is derived fr. obsol. διάκω i. q. διηκω [allied with διώκω ; cf. Vanicek p. 363]); one who executes the commands of another, esp. of a master ; a servant, attendant, tnin- isler; 1. univ. : of the servant of a king, Mt. xxii. 13 ; with gen. of the pers. served, Mt. xx. 26 ; xxiii. 1 1 ; Mk. ix. 35; x. 43, (in which pass, it is used fig. of those who advance others' interests even at the sacrifice of their own) ; T-^E {'κκλησίας, of one who does what promotes the welfare and prosperity of the church, Col. i. 25 ; διάκονοι τοΰ θ(οΰ, those through whom God carries on his admin- istration on earth, as magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4 ; teachers of the Christian religion, 1 Co. iii. 5 ; 2 Co. vi. 4 ; 1 Th. iii. 2 RTTr WH txt. Lmrg. ; tlie same are called διάκονοι (τοΰ) Χρίστου, 2 Co. .\i. 23 ; Col. i. 7 ; 1 Tim. iv. G ; cV κυρίω, in the cause of the Lord, Col. iv. 7; [E])h. vi. 21] ; 6 διάκ. μου my follower, Jn. xii. 2G ; toC Σατανά, whom .Satan uses as a servant, 2 Co. xi. 15; [αμαρτία!, (!al. ii. 17]; διάκ. ■!Τ(ριτομης (abstr. for eoncr.), of Christ, who laijored for the salvation of the circumcised i. e. the Jews, Ro. xv. 8 ; with gen. of the thing to whicli service is rendered, i. e. to wliich one is devoted : καινής διαθήκης, 2 Co. iii. C ; τοΰ fΰaγγe\ίoυ, Eph. iii. 7 ; Col. i. 23 ; δικαιοσύνης, 2 Co. xi. 15. 2. a deacon, one who, by virtue of the oflice assigned him by the church, cares for the poor and has charge of and distributes tlie money collected for their use, [cf. BB.DD., Diet, of Chnst.Anti(|.. Schaff-IIerzog s. V. Deacon ; Bp. Li/hlfl. Com. on Phil, dissert, i. § i. ; Julius Mailer, Dogmatische Alihandhingen, p. 560 sqq.] : Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 8, 1 2, cf. Acts vi. 3 sqq. ; ή διάκονος, a deaconess (ministra, Plin. epp. 10, 97), a wo- man to wlioin the care of either poor or sick women was entrusted, Ro. xvi. 1 [cf. Diets, as above, s. v. Deaconess ; Lghtft. as above p. 191 ; B. D. s. v. Phoebe]. 3. a waiter, one who serves food and drink : Jn. ii. 5, 9, as in Xen. mem. 1, 5, 2; Hier. 3. 11 (4, 2); Polyb. 31,4, 5; Lcian. de merced. cond. § 26; Athen. 7, p. 291 a.; 10, 420 e. ; see διακονίω, 2 and -via, 5 ; [also Wetst. on Mt. iv. [SvN. ίιάκονο s, 5ov\os, θ f ράηων, 6v7jp4Trj s: " δί(£• Kovos represents the servant in his activity for the w ο r k ; uut iu Ills relation, either servile, a-s tliat of the δοΟλοι, or more voluntary, a-s iu the case of the β(ράπων, to a person" Trencli; [yet cf. e. g. Ho. xiii. 4; 2 Cor. vi. 4 etc.]. iovKos opp. to 4\fueepos, anil correlate to ίίσττότηί or /tupios, denotes a liondman, one vvlio sustains a permanent servile relation to another, θιράπων is the voluntary iierforjuer of services, wlietlier as a freeman or a slave ; it is a nulilcr, temlorer word than δοϋλοϊ. ύττ-ηρ. ace. to its etymol. suggests subordi- nation. Cf. Trench § ix. ; B. D. s. v. Minister ; Mcy. on Eph. iii. 7 ; Schmidt cU. 164.] SiaKOcriot, -ai, -a, tiro hundred : Mk. vi. 37 ; Jn. vi. 7, etc. 8ι-ακονιω : fut. διακοι/σομαι ; prop, to hear one throur/h, hear to the end, hear irith care, hear full;/, [cf. δια, C. 2] (Xen., Plat., sqq.) : of a judge trying a cause. Acts xxiii. 35 ; so in Deut. i. 16 ; Dio Cass. 36, 53 (36).' 8ια-κρΐνω ; uu\}i. διίκρινον; 1 aor. δκ'κρο'α ; ^lid., [pres. διακρίνομαι]; iinjif. δκκρινόμην; I aor. διικμίθην (in prof, auth. in a ])ass. sense, to he separated ; cf. W. § 39, 2 ; [B. 52 (45)]) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down ; in Sept. cliiefly for Uaiy, also for Γ"1ΓΙ etc. 1. to separate, make a dis- tinction, discriminate, [cf. δια, C. 4] : ονδιν διίκρινι μεταξύ ημών τ€ κα\ αυτών. Acts .\ν. 9 ; μηδ€ν διακρίναντα, making no difference, sc. between Jews and Gentiles, Acts xi. 12 L Τ Tr \VH ; like the Lat. distimjuo, used emjihalically : to distinguisli or separate a person or thing from the rest, in effect i. q. to prefer, yield to him llie preference or honor : τινά, 1 Co. iv. 7 [cf. W. 452 (421)] ; το σώμα (τοϋ κυρίου), 1 Co. xi. 29. 2. to learn by discrimination, to try, decide: Mt. xvi. 3 [Tbr. WIl reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xiv. 29 ; ίαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 31 ; to determine, ijire judg- ment, decide a dispute : 1 Co. vi. 5. Pass, and Mid. to he parted, to separate one's self from; 1. to icilhilnur from one, desert him (lluic. 1, 105; 3, 9); of heretics withdraw- ing from the society of true Chrislians (.Sozimi. 7, 2 []). 705 ed. ^'ales.] cV τούτου o'l μΐν διιικριθίντζς idia ΐκκΧησίαζον) : Juile 22 ace. to the• (])refcrable) reading of I^TTrtxt. (\(γχ(Τ€ διακρινομίνους, those who separate Ihemsetccs from you, i. e. tcho apostatize ; instead of the Rec. tXtfirt bia- Kpivopevoi, Λvhich is to be rendered, making for yourselres a selection; cf. Iluther ad loc. ; [others though adopting the reading preferred above, refer διακρ. to the following head and transhate it while tliey dispute with you; but Wl I (see their App.) Tr mrg. follow codd. NB and a few other author, in reavith ace. of the obj. to confirm a thin;/ bij (the interposition of) testimonij, to lesli/i/, cause it to be believcil : τον λόγον τοΟ κυρίου, Acts vili. 25 ; το evayytXtov, Acts xx. 24 ; την β.ι- atXfiav ToO θ(οϋ, Acts xxviii. 2.i ; for all the apostolic in- struction came back linally to testimony respecting; thing's Λvhich llicy themselves had seen or heard, or Avhicli had been disclosed to Ihcui b_v divine revelation, (Acts i. 21 S(|.;v. 32; x. 41; xxii. IS); ivith the addition of fit ami an ace. of the place unto which the testimony is borne : τά jTfoi ('μοΰ ίίϊ 'ΐ(ρουσ. Acts xxiii. 1 1 ; with the addition of a dat. of the pers. to whom the testimony is given : rolt 'loudalots τον Χριστον Ίησοϋν, the Messianic dignity of Jesus, Acts xviii. 5 ; Ίουδ. την μίτάνοιαν και πίστιν, the necessity of repentance and faith, Acts xx. 21 , (τί; 'ΐ(ρουσ. τπί ανομίας, into what sins she has fallen, Ezek. xvi. 2).* Βια-μάχομιαι ; \ni]if. 8ΐ(μαχι'>μην; Ιο Ji(/ht it out ; coiUeiiil fiercely : of disputants, .Vets xxiii. 9. (Sir. viii. 1, 3 ; very freq. in Attic writ.) * εια-μ<νω ; [imjjf . &ύμ(νον'] ; 2 pers. sing, f ut. Sia^ei-fis (Ileb. i. 11 Knapp, Bleek, al., for Koc. [GLTTr WH al.] SiafifVfis) ; I aor. Sie/i"'"' ! γί• hιaμfμ(vηκa•, Ιο stai) permancnihf, remain /lermnnenlti/, continue, [yi. per- iliirt ; δκί, C. 2] ( I'hilo de gigant. § 7 πνεύμα θιΐον μίναν bvvarov (v ψυχή, ^ιαμίνΐίν de αδύνατον) : (ial. ii. ii ; opp. to άπόλλυ/ιαι, llel). i. 11 fr. Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; with an adj. or ad\ . added denoting the condition : Sic'/icti/c κωφός, Lk. i. 22 ; οΰτω, as they are, 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; to jiersercrr : ίν τινι, Lk. xxii. 28. (Xen., Plat, and subseq. writ.) * εια-μcp(ζω: impf. 8ΐ(μ*ριζον; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. hiapfpiaaTf ; Pass., [pri'S. ίίημιρίζομαι] ; pf. ptcp. διαμί- μΐρισμίνης', 1 aor. Ηί(μ€ρίσθιιν\ f ut. διαμίρισθί}(τομαι ; [Alid., pres. ίιημερίζομαί ; 1 aor. &tfμ(pισiΊμηv^ ; to diriilr: ; 1. to cleare asunder, cut inpie•/' : ζώα δίαμιρισθ^ντα so. by the butcher. Plat. legg. 8 p. 849 <1. ; ace. to a nse pecu- liar to l.k. in ])ass. to be dirided into opposing purls, to be at variance, in dissension : fVt Ttva, against one, Lk. xi. 17 sq. ; eVi nvi, xii. 52 sq. 2. to dislribule (Plat, polit. p. 289 c. ; in Sept. cliiefly for pSn) : τί, Mk. xv. 24 Rec; Ti Tivi, Lk. xxii. 1 7 (whore L Τ Tr WII eis ίαυτούς for 11 G tauToIr) ; Acts ii. 45 ; Pass. Acts ii. 3 ; Mid. to dis- tribute amonrj themselves : τί, Mt. xxvii. 3.Ϊ ; ^Ik. xv. 24 GLTTr WII; Lk. xxiii. 34; with ίαυτοίί added, [Mt. xxvii. 3.'. Rec.]; Jn. .xix. 24 fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19.* Sta-iiEpurpuis, -οΰ, 6, {&ιαμ(ρίζω), divi.'. 210 a. down; to open bg di- viding or drawing asunder (διά),Ιο opt η Ihornughlg (ν;\ι-Λΐ had been closed) ; 1. prop. : apatv διακοίγοκ μήτρα», a male o[)ening the womb (the closed matrix), i. e. the first-born, Lk. ii. 23 (Ex. xiii. 2, etc.); oipavois, pass.. Acts vii. 56 L Τ Tr WH ; the ears, the eges, i. e. to restore or to give hearing, sight : Mk. vii. 34, 35 R G ; Lk. xxiv. 31, (Gen. iii. 5, 7; Is. xxxv. 5 ; 2 K. vi. 17, etc.). 2. troj). : Tos γραφάς, to open the sense of the Scriptures, explain thcui. Lk. xxiv. 32 ; τον loiiv Tiros to open the mind of one, i. c. cause him to umlcrstand a thing, Lk. xxiv. 4.") ; T/jv καρδίαν to open one's .-oul, i. e. to rouse in one the faculty of understanding or the desire of learn- ing. Acts xvi. 14, (2 Alacc. i. 4; Themist. orat. 2 de Constantio imp. [p. 29 ed. Ilarduin] διανοΊγίταί /ίου ή κα/)- δία κ. diavyeoTtpa γίνεται ή ψυχή) ; ai>sol., foil, by ότι, to explain, txpoiind se. airiU, i. c. t : impf. pass, δκπριήμην ; to saw asunder or in twain, to divide by a saw: 1 Chr. xx. 3; Plat. conv. p. 193 a.; Arstph. eijq. 768, and elsewhere. Pass. trop. to be sawn through mentally, i. e. to be rent with vexation, [A. V. cut to the heart]. Acts v. 33 ; with the addition Tats καρδίαις αυτών. Acts vii. .54 (cf. Lk. ii. 35) ; μρ^άλω? (χάΚίτταινον κα\ δκττρίοντο καθ' ημών, Euseb. h. 6. 5, 1, 6 [15 ed. Ileinich. ; cf. Gataker, Advers. misc. col. 916 g.].* 8ι-αρΐΓάζω : fut. διαρπάσω ; 1 aor. [subj. 3 pers. sing, διαρπάστ;], inf. διαρπάσαι ; to plunder : Mt. .\ii. 29* (where L Τ Tr WH άρπάσαί). 29" (R Τ Tr WH) : Mk. iii. 27. [From Horn, down.] * 8ια-ρρήγνυμιι and διαρρησσω (Lk. viii. 29 [R f; : see be- low]) ; 1 aor. δύρρηξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers. sing, δκρρήγνντο (Lk. V. G, where Lchm. txt. δι^ρήγνυτο and Τ Tr AVII δΐ(ρήσσ(το (L mrg. διιρρ.), also LTTrWII διαρήσσων in Lk. viii. 29 ; [WH have δύρηξ^ν in Mt. xxvi. 65, and δίαρηξαί in Mk. xiv. 63 ; see their App. p. 163, and s. V. P, p]) ; to break asunder, burst through, rend asunder : τά δ(σμά, Lk. viii. 29 ; to δίκτνον, pass., Lk. v. 6 ; τά ίμάτια, χίτώναί, to rend, which was done by the .7ews in extreme indignation or in deep grief [cf. B. D. s. v. Dress, 4] : Mt. .x.xvi. 65 ; Mk. xiv. 63 ; Acts .xiv. 14, cf. Gen. xxxvii. 29, 34, etc. ; 1 Mace. xi. 71 ; Joseph, b. j. 2, 15, 4. (Sept., [Uom.], Soph., Xen., subseq. writ.) " 8ιοσ•αφ€ω, -ώ: 1 aor. δκσάφησα; {σαφήί clear); 1. to make clear or plain, to ex/itain, unfold, declare: τήν παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 36 L Tr txt. AVH ; (Eur. Phoen. 398 ; Plat. legg. 6, 754 a. ; al. ; Polyb. 2, 1, 1 ; 3, 52, 5). 2. of things done, to declare i. e. to tell, announce, narrate : Mt. .xviii. 31; (2 Mace. 1, 18; Polyb. 1,46,4 ; 2,27, 3). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 622 sqq. ; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 11.* 8ia-a-c((i> : 1 aor. δΰσ(ΐσα ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; to shake thoroughly ; trop. to make to tremble, to terrify (Job iv. 14 for ΤΠϊΙΓΙ), to agitate; like concutio in juridical Latin, to extort from one by intimidation money or other property : τινά, Lk. iii. 14 [.\. V. do violence to] ; 3 Mace, vii. 21 ; the Basilica; [Heinichen on Euseb. h. e. 7, 30, 7].* 8ια-<ΓΚορτΓ(ζω ; 1 aor. δκσκόρπισα; Pass., pf. ptcp. δκ- σκορπισμ^νος ; 1 aor. δΐξσκηρπίσθην ; 1 fut. δΐίσκορπισθη- σομαι ; often in Sept., more rarely in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. 1,47,4; 27, 2, 10on(cf.Z,o/i. adPhryn.p. 218; [W. 25]); to scatter abroad, disperse: Jn. xi. 52 (opp. to σννάγω); of the enemy, Lk. i. 51 ; Acts v. 37, (Num. .x. 30, etc. ; Joseph, antt. 8, 15, 4; Ael. v. h. 13, 46 (1, 6) ό δράκων τυνς μ€ν δί(σκόρπίσ€, tovs δΐ dneKTftvc). of a flock of sheep: Mt. xxvi. 31 (fr. Zech. xiii. 7) ; Mk. xiv. 27; of property, to squander, waste : Lk. .xv. 13 ; xvi. 1, (likeSta- στΐίίρω in Soph. El. 1291). hke the Hebr. Π">ί (Sept. Ezek. V. 2, 10, 12 [Aid.], etc.) of grain, to scatter i. e. to winnow (i. e. to throw the grain a considerable distance, or up into the air, that it may be separated from the chaff; opp. to συνάγω, to gather the wheat, freed from the chaff, into the granary [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Agriculture]) : Jit. XXV. 24, 26.* Sta-cnrou : Pass., [pf. inf. δκσττάσθαι] ; 1 aor. δΐίσττά- σθην; to rend asunder, break asunder: τάί oKuaets, Mk. V. 4 (τάί vevpai, Judg. xvi. 9) ; of a man, to tear in pieces : Acts xxiii. 1 0, (tovs SvSpas κριηυργηδόν, Hdt. 3, 13).• 8ia-«nreCpu : 2 aor. pass, δκσπάρην ; to scatter abroad, disptrse ; Pass, of those who are driven to different places, Acts viii. 1, 4; xi. 19. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down ; very often in Sept.) * 8ια-οηΓορά, -as, η. (δίαστ7(1ρω, cf. such words as ayopa, διαφθορά), (Vulg. dispcrsio), a scattering, dispersion : ατά- μων. opp. to (τίμμιξίί κ. πapάζeυξts, Plut. mor. p. 1 1 05 a. ; in the .Sept. used of the Israelites dispersed among foreign nations, Deut. .xxviii. 25 ; .xxx. 4 ; esp. of their Babylo- nian exile, Jer. xU. (.xxxiv.) 17; Is. xlix. 6; Judith v. 19 ; abstr. for concr. of the exiles themselves. Ps. cxlvi. (cxlvii.) 2 (i. q. D'niJ expelled, outcasts) ; 2 Mace. i. 27 ; f is T. διασποράν τών ΈΧΚηνων unto those dispersed among the Greeks [W. § 30, 2 a.], Jn. vii. 35. Transferred to Christians [i. e. Jewish Christians (?)] scattered abroad 5ιαστί\\ω 142 Βιατίθημί amon^ the Oontilos : .Tas. i. 1 (tv τΐ/ Starrnopa. so. oieri) ; τταμίΐτί^ημοι διασποράς Πόιτου, sojourners far awav from home, in I'ontus, 1 Pet. i. 1 (fcc παρ(πί5ημος). [I5B.UD. s. V. Dispersion; esp. Scliiirer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 31.]* Sia-e-TcWa : to draw asunder, diciile, distinguish, dis- pose, order, (Plat., Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut. ; often in Sept.); Pass. TO διαστ(\\όμ(νυν, the injunction : Ileb. xii. ■JO, (2 Mace. xiv. 2>i). Mid., [pres. δίαστί'λλομαι] ; impf. δίίστίλλομι;»' ; 1 aor. δκστίΐλάμην ; to open one's selj i. e. one's mind, to set forth distinctly, (Ariitot., Polyb.) ; hence in the N. T. [so Ezek. iii. 18, 19; Judith xi. 12] In admonish, order, charge: τινί, λΐΐί. viii. 15; Acts xv. 24 ; foil, by ira [cf. B. 237 (204)], Mt. xvi. 20 R Τ Tr WII mrg. ; Mk. vii. 36 ; ix. 9 ; διίστείλατο π-ολλά, ίνα etc. Mk. V. 43.• διάστημα, -rof, τό, 1(9ιαστηνμι)^, an interval, distance; spare of time : i>t ώμων τμιων biairr. Acts v. 7, ([(V πολλού διαστήματος, Aristot. de audib. p. 800"•, 5 etc.] ; τιτρα^τίς δ. J'olyb. 9. 1, 1 ; \_σνμιτας ό χμόνος ήμίρων κ- νυκτών toTt διά- στημα, Philo, alleg. leg. i. § 2 etc., see Siegfried s. v. p. 6«j).• διίΜΓΤολή, -ής, ι), (διαστίλλω, cf. άνατο\η), a distinction, difference: Ro. iii. 22; x. 12; of the difference of the sounds made by musical instruments, 1 Co. xiv. 7. ([Aristot., Theophr.], Polyb., Plut., al.) ' εια-<Γτρ{'ψω ; 1 aor. inf. διαστρίψαι: pf. pass. ptcp. δκ- στραμμίνο! [cf. WH. App. p. 1 70 sip] ; fr. Aeschyl. down ; a. to distort, turn aside : τάς οδούς κυρίου τωγ (ϋθύας, fig- uratively (Prov. χ. 10), to oppose, plot against, the saving purposes and plans of God, Acts xiii. 10. Hence b. to turn aside from the right path, to pervert, corrupt : τό ίθνος, Lk. xxiii. 2 (Polyb. 5, 41, 1 ; 8, 24, 3) ; τίνα από Tims, to corrupt and so turn one aside from etc. Acts xiii. 8, (Ex. V. 4 ; voluptates animum detorquent a vir- tute, Cic.) ; δκστραμμίνα perverse, corrupt, wicked : Mt. xvii. 17; Lk. ix. 41 ; Acts xx. 30; Phil. ii. 15.• δια-σ-ώζω : 1 aor. διΐσωσα ; 1 aor. pass, δι^σώθηυ ; in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; often in Sept., esp. for dSo and J?"iyin ; to preserve through danger, to bring safe through ; to save Ί. e. cure one who is sick (cf. our colloq. bring him through) : Lk. vii. 3 ; pass. Mt. xiv. 36 ; to save i. e. leep safe, keep from perishing : Acts xxvii. 43; to save our of danger, rescue : Acts xxviii. 1 ; « της θαλάσσης, ibid. 4 ; — as very often in Grk. writ, (see exx. in Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 9 sq.) with specification of the person to whom or of the place to which one is brought safe through: προς Φήλικα, Acts xxiii. 24; eVi την γήν. Acts xxvii. 44 ; fit τι, 1 Pet. iii. 20.* I δια-ταγή, -ης, ή, (διατάσσω), a purely bibl. [2 Esdr. iv. 11] and eccl. word (for which the Greeks use διάταξις), a disposition, arrangement, ordinance: Ro. xiii. 2; ίΚά- /3fTe Toi» νυμον €ΐς διατηγας άγγίΧων, Acts vii. 53, ye re- ceii ed the law, inlluenced by the authority of the ordain- ing angels, or because ye thought it your duty to receive what was enjoined by angels (at the ministration of an- gels [nearly i. q. as being the ordinances etc.], similar to CIS όνομα δίχίσθαι. Mt. X. 41 ; see iif. B. II. 2 d. ; [AV\ 398 (372), cf. 228 (214), also B. 151 (131)]). On the Jewish opinion that angels were employed as God's assistants in the solemn proclamation of the Mosaic law, cf. Deut. xxxiii. 2 Sept. ; Acts vii. 38; (jal. iii. 19 ; Ileb. ii. 2 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 5, 3 ; [Philo de somn. i. § 22; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. 1. c.].• διά-τα-γμια, -τοί, τό, (διατάσσω), an injunction, mandate: Ileb. xi. 2.'i [Lchm. δάγμα]. (2 Esdr. vii. 11 ; Add. Esth. iii. 14 [in Tdf. ch. iii. lin., line 14]; Sap. xi. 8; Pliilo, decal. § 4; Diod. 18, 64; Plut. MarceL. c. 21 fin.; [al.].)• διαταράσσω, or -ττω ; 1 aor. pass, διιταράχθην ; to agi- tate greatly, trouble greatly, (Lat. pcrturbare) : Lk. i. 29. (Plat., Xen., al.) • δια-^άσσω; 1 aor. δάταξα; pf. inf. διατίτα;^^!^! (Acts xviii. 2 [not Tdf.]) ; Pass., pf. ptcp. διατίταγ/ΐί'ι-οί; 1 aor. ptcp. διαταχθίΐς ; 2 aor. ptcp. διαταγιίς ; Mid., pres. δια- τάσσομαι: fut. διατάζομαι; 1 aor. δ^ταξάμην; (on the force of δΐίί ef. Germ, verordnen, [Lat. d isponcre, Π'ί'η. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 7 sq.]) ; to arrange, ap- point, ordain, prescribe, give order : τινί, Mt. xi. 1 ; 1 Co. xvi. 1 ; foil, by ace. with inf., Lk. viii. 55 ; Acts xviii. 2 [here Τ τ^ταχ. Tr mrg. br. διη- ; τινί foil, by inf. 1 Co. ix. 14] ; Ti, pass., ό νόμος διαταγιΐς δι" άγγίλων (see διαταγή) : Gal. iii. 19, (lies. opp. 274); τινί τι, pass.: Lk. iii. 13; xvii. 9 [Rec], 10; Acts xxiii. 31. Mid.: 1 Co. vii. 17; ο?τω ην διaτfτayμ(voς (cf. W. 262 (246) ; [B. 193 (167)]), Acts XX. 13; TiW, Tit. i. 5; τι, 1 Co. xi. 34; τινί, foil, by inf. : Acts vii. 44 ; .xxiv. 23. [Comp. : «πι-διατιίσσομαι.] * εια-τ<λ£ω, -ώ ; to bring thoroughly to an end, acronijilish, [cf. δια, C. 2]; with the addition of τον βίον, τον χρόνον, etc., it is joined to participles or adjectives and denotes the eontinuousness of the act or state expressed by the ptcp. or adj. (as in Hdt. 6, 117; 7, 111 ; Plat. apol. p. 31 a.) ; oftener, however, without the accus. it is joined with the same force simply to the ptcps. or adjs. : thus άσιτοι διατ(λ(ΐτ( ye continue fasting, constantly fast. Acts xxvii. 33 (so άσφαλίστιρος [al. -τατοί] διατίλίί, Thuc. 1, 34; often in Xen.; W. 348 (326); [B. 304 (2C,1)]).• δια-τηρ«ω, -ώ ; 3 pers. sing. impf. δκτήριι; to keep con- tinually or carefully (see διά, C. 2) : Lk. ii. 51, (Gen. xxxvii. 11) ; ΐμαυτον ίκ τίνος (cf. rqpe'iv ίκ τίνος, Jn. xvii. 15), to keep one's self (pure) from a thing. Acts xv. 29; άπά Ttvoy for 13Ei foil, by [D, Ps. xi. (xii.) 8. (Plat., Dem., Polyb., al.) * 6ia-Tt, see διά, Β. XL 2 a. p. 134'. δια-^£0ημι : to place separately, dispose, arrange, appoint, [cf. διά, C. 3]. In the N. T. only in Jud., pres. διατίθι- μαι; 2 aor. δκθίμην; fut. διαθήσομαι; 1. to arrange, dispose of, one's oicn affairs; a. τι, of something that belongs to one (often so in prof. auth. fr. Xen. down) ; with dat. of pers. added, in one's favor, to one's advan- tage ; hence to assign a thing to another as hL<: pnsse.'tsion : Tivi βασί\€ίαν (to appoint), Lk. xxii. 29. b. to dispose of by will, make a testament: Heb. ix. 16 sq. | (Plat. legg. 11 p. 924 e. : with διαθήκην added, ibid. p. 923 c, etc.). 2. διατίθ(μαι διαθήκην τινί ("£3 ΓΧ η"!3 Π^?, Jer. xxxviiL (xxxi.) 31 sqq.), to make a covenant, enter into cove- nant, with one, [cf. W. 225 (211); B. 148 (129 sq.)]: ίιατρίβω 143 Οια•χ\βνάζ<ύ Heb. viii. 10, (Gen. xv. 18) ; προ? τιι«ι, Acts iii. 25 ; Heb. X. 16, (Deut. vii. 2); μιτά Tipos, 1 Mace. i. 11. The Grks. said συντίθιμαι npos τίνα, al npus τίνα σννθηκαι, Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 21. [Comp. : άντι-διατίθημι.] ' 8ια-τρ(β<β ; impf. 8ύτριβον ; 1 aor. δύτριψα ; to rub between, rub hard, (prop. Horn. II. 11, 847, al.) ; to wear away, consume ; χράνον or ημέρας, to spend, pass lime : Acts xiv. 3, 28 ; .xvi. 12 ; xx. 6 ; xxv. 6, 14, (Lev. xiv. 8 ; Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.) ; simply to stay, tarry, [cf. B. 145 (127); W. 593 (552)]: Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54 [WII Tr t.\t. ΐμ(ΐν(ν~\ ; Acts xii. 19 ; xiv. 18 (Lchm. ed. min.) ; xv. 35 ; (Judith x. 2 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 23, and often in prof, auth. fr. Horn. II. 19, 150 down).• εια-τροψή, -ης. ή, (διατρίφω to support), sustenance : 1 Tim. vi. 8. (Xen. vect. 4, 49 ; Menand. ap. Stob. floril. 61, 1 [vol. ii. 386 ed. Gaisf.] ; Diod. 19, 32 ; Epict. ench. 12; Joseph, antt. 2, S, 7 ; 4, 8, 21 ; often in Plut.; 1 Mace. vi. 49.) * ει-αυγάζω : 1 aor. διηύγασα ; lo shine through, (Tnlg. elucesco), to dawn ; of daylight breaking through the darkness of night (Polyb. 3, 104, 5, [cf. Act. Andr. 8 p. 116 ed. Tdf.]) : 2 Pet. i. 19. [Plut. de plac. philos. 3, 3, 2; al. (see Soph. Lex. s. v.).]* ειαυγή9. -ff, (αΐ-γή), translucent, transparent : Rev. xxi. 21, fur the Rec. διαφανής. ([Aristot.], Philo, Apoll. Rh., Lcian., Plut., Themist. ; often in the Anthol.) * Sicut>aWjs, -if, (δίαψαίνω to show through), transparent, translucent : Rev. xxi. 21 Rec. ; see διαν-γής. (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., al.) * 8ια-φίρω; 2 aor. SirjveyKov [but the subj. 3 pers. sing. δκν^γκη (Mk. xi. IG), the only aor. form which occurs, can come as well fr. 1 aor. διήνιγκα ; cf. Λ'eitch s. v. φίρω, fin.] ; Pass., [pres. διαφίρομαι^ ; impf. δκφίρόμην ; [fr. Ilom. (h. Merc. 255), Pind. down] ; 1. to hear or carry through any place : oKevos δια τοϋ Upoi, 2\Ik. xi. 16. 2. to carry different ways, i. e. a. trans, to carry in different directions, to different places: thus persons are said διαφίρ^σθαι, who are carried hither and thither in a ship, driven to and fro. Acts xxvii. 27, (Strab. 3, 2, 7 p. 144 ; σκάφος νπ (ναντίων πνινμάτων διαφ^ρόμίνον, Philo, migr. Abr. § 27; Lcian. Ilermot. 28; often in Plut.); metaph. to spread abroad : δΐ(φΐρ(το 6 Xoyor τοϋ κυρίου δι όλης της χώρας. Acts xiii. 49, (dyyfXiar, Lcian. dial. deor. 24, 1 ; φήμη διαφ(ρ(ται. Plut. nior. p. 1 63 d.). b. intrans. (like the Lat. diff'ero) to differ: δοκιμάζ(ΐν τα διαφίροντα to test, prove, the things that differ, i. e. to distinguish between good and evil, lawful and unlawful, Ro. ii. 18 ; Phil. i. 10, {διάκρισις καλοΟ τ( κα\ κακοϋ. Ileb. v. 14); cf. Thol. Com. on Rom. p. Ill ed. 5.; Theoph. Ant. ad Autol. p. 6 ed. Otto δοκιμάζοντις τα διαφέροντα, ήτοι φως. ή σκότος, η \(υκ6ν, ή μίλαν κτλ.) ; [al.. adopting a secondary sense of each verb in the above passages, trans- late (cf. A. Λ'.) to approve the things that excel; see Mey. (yet cf. ed. Weiss) on Ro. 1. c. ; Ellic. on Pliil. 1. c.]. διαφίρω τινός, to differ from one, Ί. e. to excel, surpass one: Mt. vi. 26; x. 31 ; xii. 12; Lk. xii. 7, 24, (often so in Attic auth.) ; τίνος tv τινι, 1 Co. xv. 41 ; \τινος ούδίν, Gal. iv. 1]. c. impersonally, διαφίρίΐ it makes a differ- ence, it matters, is of importance : οίδίν μυι διαφίρίΐ it matters nothing to me. Gal. ii. 6, (Plat. Prot. p. 316 b. ήμίν οϋδΐν διαφ(ρ(ΐ, p. 358 e. ; de rep. 1 p. 340 c. ; Dem. 124, 3 (in Phil. 3, 50) ; Polyb. 3, 21, 9 ; Ael. v. h. 1, 25 ; al. ; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 394 ; Wetst. on Gal. 1. c.]).* δι.α.ψίΰ'γΐι• : [2 aor. διtφvyoυ] ; fr. Hdt. down ; to fee through danger, to escape : Acts .xxvii. 42, (Prov. xix. 5; Josh. viii. 22).* 8ια-ψημ£ζω ; 1 aor. δκφήμισα ; 1 aor. pass, δκφημισθην ; to spread abroad, blaze abroad : τόι/λό^οκ, Mk. i. 45 ; Mt. x.xviii. 15 [T WH mrg. ϊφημίσθ.^ ; τικά, to spread abroad his fame, verbally diffuse his renown, Mt. ix. 31 ; in Lat. diffamare aliquem, but in a bad sense. (Rarely in Grk. writ., as Arat. phaen. 221 ; Dion. Hal. 11, 46; Palaeph. incred. 14, 4; [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 14 sq.].) • $ια-ψθείρω: 1 aor. δΐ(φθ(ΐρα\ Pass., [pres. διαφθιίρο- μαι]; pf. ptcp. δκφθαρμίυος ; 2 aor. δκφθάρην; Sept. very often for ΠΠί7, occasionally for San ; in Grk. writ, fr. Horn, down ; 1. to change for the worse, to cor- rupt : minds, morals ; τήν γήν, i. e. the men that in- habit the earth. Rev. xi. 18 ; δι^φθαρμίνοι τοννοϋν. 1 Tim. vi. 5, {τήν διάνοιαν. Plat. legg. 10 p. 888 a.; την •γνώμην, Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 21 ; τους οφθαλμούς, Xen. an. 4, 5, 12). 2. to destroy, ruin, {hat. perdere); a. ioco/isuwic, of bodily vigor and strength : ό ίξω ημών άνθρωπος δ^aφθc^pfτaι \_is decaying'], 2 Co. iv. 16 ; of the worm or moth that eats pro- visions, clotliing, etc. Lk. xii. 33. b. to destroy (Lat. de- lere) : Rev. viii. 9 ; to kill, διαφθ^Ιρ^ιν τους etc. Rev. xi. 1 8.* Sia -ψθορά, -ας, ή, (διαφθ(ίρω), corruption, destruction ; in the N. T. that destruction which is effected by the de- cay of the body after death: Acts ii. 27, 31 ; xiii. 34-37 [cf. AV. § 65, 10], see {ΐδω, I. 5 and ΰποστρίφω, 2. (.Sept. for ΡΠϋ ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)' 8ιά-φορο$, -ov, (διαφίρω) ; 1. different, varying in kind, (Hdt. and sqq.) : Ro. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10. 2. excellent, surpassing, ([Diod.], Polyb., Plut., al.) : corn- par, διαφορώτιρος, Heb. i. 4 ; viii. 6.* Βια-φυλάσσω : 1 aor. inf. διαφυλάξαι ; fr. Hdt. down ; to guard carefully: τινά, Lk. iv. 10 fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 11. " The seventy chose to employ this term esp. of God's providential care; cf. Gen. xxviii. 15; Josh. xxiv. 17; Ps. xl. (xii.) 3. Hence it came to pass that the later writers at the close of their letters used to write διαφυ- λάττοι, διαφυλάξοι υμάς 6 θ^ός, cf. Theodoret. iii. pp. 800, 818, 826, (edd. Schulze, Nosselt, etc. Hal.)." Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 16.* Sia-x«pC^u : 1 aor. mid. δκχαρισάμην ; lo move by the use of the hanils, take in hand, manage, administer, govern, (fr. [Andoc, Lys.], Xen. and Plato down). Mid. to lay hands on, slay, l-ill [with one's own hand] : τινά (Polyb. 8, 23, 8; Diod. 18, 46; Joseph., Dion. Hal., Plut., Hdian.), Acts V. 30 : xxvi. 21.* 8ια-χλΕυάΐω ; to deride, scoff, mock, [" deridere i. e. ridendo exagitare" Win.] : Acts ii. 13 G L Τ Tr WH. (Plat. Ax. p.364 b. ; Dem. p. 1221, 26 [adv. Polycl. 49 I : Aeschin. dial. 3,2; Polyb. 1 7, 4, 4 ; al. ; eccles. writ.l Cl. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. v. p. 1 7.* ύιαχ^ωρίζω 144 όώαχη 8ια-χωρ(ζα: Ιο separate thoroughly or wholly (cf. Sia, C. 2), (Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept.). Pass. pres. Dia- χωρίζομαι ([in reflex, sense] cf. αποχωρίζω) to separate one's self, depart, ^Gen. .\iii. 9, 1 1, 14 ; Diod. 4, 53) : οπό Tu/oi, Lk. L\. 33.* SiSaicTiKOs, -ή, -6v, (i. q. ΜασκαΚικυ! in (irk. writ.), apt and skilful in teaching : 1 Tim. iii. -' ; 2 Tim. ii. 24. (δι- Βακτικη afxri), the virtue which renders one teachable, docility, Philo, praem. et poen. § 4; [de congressu erud. §7]•)• SiSoKTis, -ή, -6v, (διδάσκω); 1. 'hat can be taught (Pind., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. taught, instructed, foil, by gen.%one [cf. W. 189 (178); 194 (182); B. 169(147)]: ToO θ(ον, by God, .In. vi. 45 fr. Is. liv. 13 ; ττνίίματοί aylou [(; L Τ Tr WII om. <5yiW], by the (Holy) Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 13. (νουθίτηματα κ(ίι/η! διδακτά, Soph. El. 344.)' 8ι8ασκαλία, -at, ή, (διδάσκαλοΓ), [fr. Pind. down] : 1. teaching, instruction : Ho. xii. 7 ; xv. 4 (fts την ήμίτίραν διδασκαλία^, that we might be taught, [A. V. for our learning]); 1 Tim. iv. 13, 16; v. 17; 2 Tim. iii. 10, 16; Tit. ii. 7. 2. teaching i. e. that which is taught, doc- trine : Eph. iv. 14; iTim.i. 10; iv. 6 ; vi. 1,3; 2 Tim. iv. 3; Tit.i. 9; ii. 1, 10; plur. 5ι8ασκα\ίαι teachings, precepts, (fr. Is. xxix. 13), Mt. xv.O; Mk. vii. 7 ; ανθρώπων. Col. ii. 22; δαιμοΐΊων, 1 Tim. iv. 1.* SiSoo-KoXos, -ου, ό, ( διδάσκω), a teacher ; in tlie N. T. one who teaches concerning the things of God, and the duties of man ; 1. of one who is fitted to teach, or thinks himself so: Heb. v. 12; Ro. ii. 20. 2. of the teachers of the .Jewish religion : Lk. ii. 46 ; .Tn. iii. 10 ; hence the Hebr. 3"i is rendered in Greek διδάσκαλοι : .In. i. 38 (39) ; XX. 16; cf. below, under βαββί, and Pressel in Ilerzog xii. p. 471 sq. ; \_CampheU, Dissert, on the Gospels, diss. vii. pt. 2]. 3. of those who by their great power as teachers drew crowds about them ; a. of -Jolin the Baj)- tist:Lk.iu. 12. b. of Jesus : .In. i.38 (39); iii. 2; viii.4 ; xi. 28 ; xiii. 13sq.; xx. 16 ; often in the first three Gos])els. 4. by preeminence used of Jesus by himself, as the one wlio showed uien the way of salvation : Mt. xxiii. 8 L Τ Tr WII. 5. of the apostles : ό διδάσκαλο: των ίθνων, of Paul, 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; 2 Tim. i. 1 1 . 6. of those who in the religious assemblies of Christians undertook the work of teaching, with the special assistance of the Holy Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 s([. ; Eph. iv. 11; Acts xiii. 1, cf. •Tas. iii. 1. 7. of false teachers among Christians : 2 Tim. iv. 3. [Horn. (h. Merc. 556). Aeschyl., al.] Si8ao-K. 8ι8αχή, -ης, η, (διδάσκω), [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. teach- ing, viz. that which is taught : Mk. i. 27 ; Jn. vii. 16 ; Acts xvii. 19 ; Ro. [vi. 17]; xvi. 17 ; 2 Jn. 10 ; Rev. ii. 24 ; η διδ. TITOS, one's doctrine, i. e. what he teaches : Mt. \ ii. 28 ; xvi. 12 ; xxii. 33 ; Mk. i. 22 ; xi. 18 ; Lk. iv. 32 ; Jn. xviii. 19 ; Acts v. 28; Rev. ii. 14 sq. ; ή &ι8αχη of God, τοϋ κυρίου: τοϋ Χρίστου, the doctrine which has (Jod, Christ, the Lord, for its author and sujtporter : Jn. vii. 1 7 ; Acts xiii. 1 2 ; 2 Jn. 9 ; with the gen. of the object, doctrine, teaching, concerning something : Heb. vi. 2 [W. 187 (176); 192 (181); 5S1 (513)]; i)lur. Heb. .xiii. 9. 2. [tlie act o(]teaching, instruction, (cf. διδασκαλία [on the supposed distinction betw. the two words and their use in the N. T. see Ellic. on 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; they are asso- ciated in 2 Tim. iv. 2, 3 ; Tit. i. 9]) : Acts ii. 42 ; 2 Tim. iv. 2 : f V τή Μαχή. irhile he was teaching, a phrase by which the Evangelist indicates that he is about to cite some of the many words which .Jesus spoke at that time, Mk. iv. 2; xii. 38; τοϋ κατά την ΒιΒαχην πιστοί λόγου, the faithful word ivhich is in accordance with the received (2 Tim. iii. 14) instruction, Tit. i. 9 ; in partic• δίδραχμου 145 ^8ωμι ular, the teaching of the δώάσκαλοΓ (q. v. 6) in the relig- ious assemblies of Christians : XaXfiv ev δώσχη to speak in the way of leaching, in distinction from otlier modes of speaking in public, 1 Co. xiv. 6 ; ί;;^ω διδα;^^!', to have something to teach, ibid. 26.* SiSpa\^ov. -ου. τό. (neut. of the adj. δίδραχμοι, -ov, fc. νόμίσμα; fr. Sis and 8ραχμη), a didraclimun or double- ilrntlima, a silver coin equal to two Attic drachmas or one Alexandrian, or half a shekel, [about one third of a dollar] (see in apyipiov, 3) : Mt. .xvii. 24. (Sept. often for Sptrj ; [PoU., Galen].) * εί5υμας, -ij, -ov, and -or, -ov, twofold, twain, (double, Hom. Od. 1!>, 227; as τρίΒυμο! triple, τ(τρά8νμος i|uadniple, €7Γτπδυμο9) ; hence twin (sc. τταΐς, as τρίδυμοι παϊδβί. νΙοί, Germ. Drillinr/e, three born at a birth), Ilebr. DSn, a surname of the apostle Thomas [cf. Luthardt on the first of the foil, pass.; B. D. s. v. Thomas]: Jn. xi. 16; XX. 24 ; xxi. 2. (Hom. D. 23, 641.) * δί8ωμι (διδώ, Rev. iii. 9 LTAVII ; [δ.δω Tr, yet see WH. App. p. I»i7]), 3 pers. plur. Μόασι (Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]), impv. δίδου (Jit. v. 42 RG); imi)f. 3 pers. sinK€tv, Mk. xiv. 44 : and L txt.TTrWH in Lk. xix. 15 ; 3 pers. plur. δίδώ«ισαμ. .In. zi. 57 ; 2 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing, δω [8ώη, Jn. xv. 1 (i Tr mrg. ; Eph. i. 1 7 WH mrg. ; 2 Tim. ii. 2S L WH mrg. ; ίοΓ, Mk. viii. 37 Τ Tr WH ; cf. B. 46 (40) ; WH. App. p. 16S ; Kuenen and Cobet, praef. p. Ixi.], plur. δώμΐκ, δώτί, δωσιν, optat. 3 pers. sing. 8ώη for δοι'τ;, Ro. xv. 5 ; [2 Th. iii. 16] ; 2 Tim. i. 16, 18 ; [ii. 2.5 Τ Tr WH txt. ; Eph. i. 17RG; iii. 16 RG] and elsewhere among the variants ([cf. Λν. § 14, 1 g.; B. 46 (40), cf. § 139, 37 and 62] ; see [WH. App. u. s.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122:] Lob. ad Phryn. p. 346; [Kiihner § 282 Anm. 2; A'eitch s. v. διδω^^ί ad fin.]), impv. 6os, δότ(, inf. δοϋναι. ptcp. Sois; Pass., pf. SfSopxu; 1 aor. ίδόθψ; 1 fut. δοθήσομαι; cf. B. 45 (39) sq. ; [WH u. s.]. In the Sept. times without number for [no, sometimes for 0>U ; and for Chald. 27)' ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to give ; A. absolutely and generally : μακάριόν iari μάλλον διδόκαι, η λαμβάνίΐν, Acts χχ. 35. Β. In construction ; I. τινί τι. to give something to some one, — in various senses; 1. nf one's own ac- cord to give one something, to his advantage; to bestow, give as a gift : Mt. iv. 9 ; Lk. i. 32 ; xii. 32, and often ; Ιοματα [cf. B. 148 (129)], Mt. vii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 13 ; Eph. iv. 8 (Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 19); τα υπάρχοντα what thou hast Totf BTw^oir, Mt. xix. 21 ; χρήματα. Acts xxiv. 26. 2. to grant, give to one asking, let have : Mt. xii. 39 ; χΐτ. 7sq.; xvi. 4; xx. 23 ; Mk. vi. 22, 25; viii. 12; x. 40; Lk. xi. 29 ; xv. 16 ; Jn. xi. 22 ; xiv. 16 ; xv. 16 ; xvi. 23 ; Acts iii. 6 ; Jas. i. 5 ; [noteworthy is 1 Jn. v. 1 6 δώσ« (sc. prob. ό peof) αίτω ζωήν τοΪγ άμαρτάνουσιν etc., where αϋτω seems to be an ethical dat. and τ. άμαρ. dependent on the verb; see B. 133 (116) note, cf. 179 (156); W.523 (487), cf. 530 (494)] ; in contradistinction from what one claims: Jn. iii. 27; xix. 11. 3. to supply, furnish, necessary things : as άρτον τινί, Mt. vi. 1 1 ; Lk. xi. 3 ; Jn. vi. 32, 51 ; τροφήν, Mt. xxiv. 45 : βρύσιν, Jn. vi. 27 ; be- sides in xMt. XXV. 15, 28 sq. ; Mk. ii. 26 ; iv. 25 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; viii. 18 ; xii. 42 ; xLx. 24, 26 ; Jn. iv. 10, 14, 1.3 ; Eph. vi. 19. 4. to give over, deliver, i. e. a. to reach out, extend, present: asMt. xiv. 19; xvii. 27; Mk. vi. 41 ; xiv. 22 sq. ; Lk. ix. 16 ; xxii. 19 ; to ψωμίον, Jn. xiii. 26 ; TO τιοτήριον, Jn. xviii. 1 1 ; Rev. .\vi. 1 9 ; tqs χ^Ίρας διδό- vai to give one the hand. Acts ix. 41 ; Gal. ii. 9. b. of a writing: αττοστάσιον, 5It. v. 31. c. to give to one's care, intrust, commit; aa.. something to be administered; Univ.: τταιτί ω (δόθη πολύ, Lk. xii. 4>ί; property, money, Mt. XXV. 15 ; Lk. xix. 13, 15 ; άμπιλωνα, a vineyard to be cidtivated, Mk. xii. 9 ; Lk. xx. 16; rat kKcIs [κΚύδας] της βασ. Mt. xvi. 19; τήν κρίσιν, Jn. v. 22; κρίμα. Rev. XX. 4; την (ξονσίαν ίαντων. Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]; τα fpya, iva τβλβίώσω αίτα, Jn. v. 36 ; το epyov, ΐνα ττοιήσω, Jn. .xvii. 4; τό όνομα τοΟ 6(οΰ, to be declared, .In. xvu. il [not Rec, 12 Τ Tr WII]. bb. to give or commit to some one something to he rtligiousli/ observed : διαθήκην irepiTO- μηί. Acts vii. 8 ; την πιριτομήν, the ordinance of circum- cision, .In. vii. 22; τον νόμον, ibid. vs. 19; λόγια ζωντα. Acts vii. 38. 5. to give what is due or obligatory, to pay: wages or reward, Mt. xx. 4, 14 ; xxvi. 15; Rev. xi. 18; apyvpiov, as a reward, Alk. xiv. 11 ; Lk. xxii. 5; taxes, tribute, tithes, etc. : Sit. xvii. 27; xxii. 17; Mk. xii. 14(15); Lk. xx.22: xxiii. 2; Heb. vii. 4 ; βυσίακ sc. τώ Kvpita, Lk. iL 24 (^υσι'αι^ αττοδοΟι^αι τω 6ftu, Joseph, antt. 7, 9,1); λόγοκ, τρηι-ΖίΓ ac(O!/ni, Ro. xiv. 12 [L txt. Trtxt. άτΓοδ•]. 6. δίδωμι is joined with nouns denoting an act or an effect ; and a. the act or effect of him who gives, in such a sense that what he is said διδόναι (either absolutely or with dat. of pers.) he is conceived of as effecting, or as becoming its author. Hence δίδωμι joined with a noun can often be changed into an active verb expressing the effecting of that wliich the noun de- notes. Thus διδόναι aivov τω θ(ω is equiv. to alvtiv το» θ(όν, Lk. xviii. 43 : άπόκρισίν τινι i. q. άποκρίνΐσθαι. Jn. i. 22 ; xix. 9 ; (γκοπήν δούναι τω €ναγγ€λίω i. q. ίγκότττην το (ΰαγγ. to hinder (the progress of) the gospel, 1 Co. i.x. 12; (ντοΧην τινι i. q. ftntWfodat τινι, Jn. xi. 57; xii. 49 ; xiii. 34 ; 1 Jn. iii. 23 ; δόξαν τινί i. q. δοξάζιιν τιμά (see δόξα. Π.) ; (ργασίαν, after the Lat. ojicram dare, tale pains, [A. Λ'. give diligence'}, i. q. (ρ•γάζ(σθαι, Lk. xii. 58 ; [σνμβοΐίλιον, cf. the Lat. consilium dare, i. q. σ-υμβου\(ν• (σβαι. Mk. iii. 6 Tr txt. WH txt.] ; διαστολής tiw i. q. διaστCK\ftv τι, 1 Co. xiv. 7 ; jropayyeXiai', 1 Th. iv. 2 ; ■ηαράκΧησιν. 2 Th. ii. 16; (λ(οί i. q. ί\((Ίν. 2 Tim. i. 16, 18 ; ayaivnv, show [A. V. bestow], 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; ϊκδϊκησιν, 8ί8ωμι 146 ΒίΒωμί 2 Th. i. 8 ; βασανισμόν, Rev. xviii. 7 ; μάπισμα i. q. ραπί- ζ(ΐν τινά, .)η. xviii. 22 ; .χίχ. 3 ; φίλημα i. (). φιλίϊκ τίνα. Lk. νίϊ. 45. οΓ b. the noun denotes something to bo (lone by liim to whom it is said to be given : δώόναι t4w μίτάνοιαν, to cause him to rei)ent, Acts v. 31 ; xi. 18; γνώσιν σωτηρία!, Lk. i. 77 ; Λπίδα τίκί, 2 Th. ii. 16. 7. Joined with nouns dcnotin•; slrin^'th, faculty, power, virtue, δί&ωμι (τινί τι) is e(|uiv. to h, funtial,, endue, (one with a tiling) : Lk. xxi. IS (δώσω ΰμίν στόμα κ. σοφίαν) ; Acts vii. 10; (ξυυσίαν, Mt. ix. 8 ; χ. 1 ; Lk. χ. 19; .In. xvii. 2; Kev. ii. 2(i ; vi. 8; xiii. 7; διάνοιαν, 1 .In. v. 20; σύνισιν, 2 Tim. ii. 7 ; and in the very common phrase tiSovai TO πνινμα. [I'. δ• "i-i rtvostu give to one (a part) «/etc. : Rev. ii. 1 7 (G L Τ Tr WH) δώσω αύτώ τοϋ μάννα, cf. W. 1Π8 (186); Β. 159 (139).] II. δίδωμί τι without a dative, and δίδωμί τίνα. 1. δίδωμίτι; a. with tlie force of lo cause, produce, give forth from one's self: ύ(τόν, from heaven, Jas. v. 18; καρπόν, Mt. xiii. 8 ; Mk. iv. 7, 8 sq., (Deut. xxv. 19 ; Sir. xxiii. 25) ; σι;;ΐίία, Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 [not Tdf.] ; Acts ii. 19, (Ex. vii. 9 ; Deut. xiii. 1, etc.) ; xmohfiypji, Jn. xiii. 15; φ«'γγοΓ, Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 24, (φώϊ, Is. xiii. 10); φωνην, 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq. ; δια της γλώσσηί Xoyov, ibid. 9 ; γνώμην, to give one's opinion, to give ad- vice, 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Co. viii. 10. b. διδόΐΌΐ κλήρονι (^"'IJ ΙΠ3, Lev. xvi. 8), lo //ire i. e. hand out lots, sc. to be cast into the urn [see xXijpot, 1], Acts i. 26. c. δίδωμί τι with pred. ace. : Mt. xx. 28 ; Mk. x. 45, (to give up as a λΰτροκ) ; Mt. xvi. 26 ; Mk. viii. 37, (to pay as an equiv- alent). 2. δίδωμί τίνα ; a. wliere the noun refers to the office one bears, lo appoint : κριτάς, Acts xiii. 20. b. to cause to come forth : δίδωμι ίκ της συναγωγής τοϋ ΐατανά των \(γ6ντων (sc. τι^άί [cf. Β. 158 (138) ; W. § 59, 4 b.]). Rev. iii. 9 ; so also the sea, death. Hades, are said to give {up) the dead who have been engulfed or received by them. Rev. xx. 13. 3. δίδωμί τιι/ά τινι; a. to give one to some one as his own : as the object of his saving care, Ileb. ii. 13 ; to give one to some one, to follow liim as a leader and master, .In. vi. 37, 39 ; x. 29 ; xvii. 6, 9, 12 [but see B. I. 4. c. aa. above], 24 ; xviii. 9 ; in these pass. God is said to have given certain men to Christ, i. e. to have disposed them to acknowledge Christ as the author and medium of their salvation, and to enter into intimate relations with him, hence Christ calls them 'his own' (τα {μά, .Τη. χ. 14). b. to give one to some one to care for his interests: Jn. iii. 16 {ίδωκ(ν sc. αϋτώ, i. e. τώ κόσμω); Acts xiii. 21. c. to give one to some one to vhnm he already belonged, to return: Lk. vii. 15 (ix. 42 άπί- δωχ€ [so Lmrg. in vii. 15]). d. δίδωμι ϊμαυτόν τικι, to one demanding of me something, / give mt/selfup as it were; an hyiierbole for disregarding entirely my private interests, I give as much as ever I can : 2 Co. viii. 5. 4. δίδωμί Tiva with a predicate ace. : {αντον τύπον, to render or set forth one's self as an example, 2 Th. iii. 9 ; with a predicate of dignity, olfice, function, and a dat. of the per.«on added for whose benefit some one invested Λνίΐΐι said dignity or oHice is given, that is. Is l/eslotred : αΰτον ΐδωκιν κίφαλην ίιπίρ πάντα tji ί'κκΚησία, head over all things to the ehurch, Eph. i. 22 ; ίδωκιν tovs μϊν απο- στόλου! κτλ. sc. Tjj ίκκλησία. Eph. iv. 11. For in neither of these ])assages are vm obUged, with many inter])reter8, to translate the word appointed, made, after the use of the Ilebr. jjij ; esp. since in the second Paul seems to wish to confirm the words (juoted in vs. 8, (δωκ( δύματα Tois άνθρωποι!• Those in the church whom Christ has endued with gifts and functions for the connnon advan- tage the ai>ostle reckons among the δύματα given by him after his ascension to heaven. III. Phrases in which to the verb δίδωμι, cither stand- ing alone or joined to cases, there is added 1. an infinitive, either alone or with an accusative ; δίδωμί τινι foil, by an infin. denoting the object : δίδωμί τινι φαγιΐν, give, supply, something to eat, give food [B. 261 (224); W. 318 sq. (299)], Mt. xiv. 16; xxv. 35, 42; Mk. vi. 37; V. 43 ; Lk. viii. 55 ; ix. 13 ; Rev. ii. 7 ; π«ίκ, .In. iv. 7, 10 ; with the addition of an object ace. depending on the φαγ(Ίν or ττκίι/ ; Mt. xxvii. 34 ; Mk. xv. 23 [R G L] ; with an ace. added depending on the verb δίδωμι : .In. vi. 31 ; Rev. xvi. 6 ; foil, by an infin. indicating design [cf. B. u. s.], to grant or permit one to etc. : Lk. i. 73 sq. (δοΰκαι ήμΐν άφόβω! λατρ(ύ(ΐν αΰτω) ; .Jn. V. 26 ; Acts iv. 29 ; Ro. XV. 5; Eph. iii. 16 ; Rev. iii. 21 ; vi. 4 ; vii. 2 ; [foil, by els with the infin. : Ro. xv. 16, cf. B. 265 (228)] ; by aconstr. borrowed from the Hebrew, καΐ δώσω to'is . . ■ κα'ι πρυφη- τίύσουσι. Rev. xi. 3; in the passive, Mt. xiii. 12; Mk. iv. 1 1 {ΰμ'ιν δίδοται γνώναι [(! L Τ Tr ^Vll om. γνώναι] to you it has been granted etc.); foil, by the ace. and inf.: δώη [LTTrWII δώ] ύμ'ιν . ■ . κατοικησαι τον Χριστοί' ίν τα'ΐ! καρδίαΐ! νμών, Ε])1ι. iii. 16 sq. ; ί'δωκίν αΰτον ΐμφανη γινίσθμι. Acts χ. 40 ; ου δώσ(ΐ! τον όσιόν σου ίδ(Ίν δια- φθοράν (fr. Ps. XV. (xvi.) 10), Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35. 2. δίδωμί τινι, foil, by ίνα, lo grant or permit, that etc. [B. 238 (205) ; W. 337 (316), cf. .545 (507)] : Mk. x. 37 ; Rev. xix. 8. to commission, Rev. i.\. 5. IV. δίδωμί τι, or τικί τι, or τιχί or τινά, foil, hy a prep- psition with a noun (or pronoun) ; 1. τιν\ ex τινυς [cf. W.§28,1; 15. 159 (139)]; δάτf ήμ'ιν (ά part) (ΚτοϋϊΧαίου υμών, Mt. XXV. 8 ; tx τώχ άρτων, easily to be siqjjilied fmiu the context, Mk. ii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; t'x τοΟ πν(ύματο! οΰτοϋ ΐδωκ(ν ήμΐν, 1 Jn. iv. 13 ; otherwise in Jn. iii. 34 ό ifos οϋ δίδωσι το πνιϋμα f'x μίτρου, by measure i. e. according to measure, moderately, [cf. W. §51, 1 d.] ; otherwise in Rev. iii. 9 δίδωμι ίκ τ^γ συνα-γωγης, (see II. 2 b. above). τιιΊ από τιΐΌ? : Lk. xx. 10 Ίνα οπο τοϋ καρπον τοϋ αμπελώ- να! δώσιι. [LT TrWII δώσουσιΐ'] αντώ, sc. the portion due. τί foil, by et! with a noun, lo give something to be put into, Lk. vi. 38 μίτρον δώσουσιν (is τ!>ν κόλπον υμών (shall they give i. e. pour into your bosom), or upon, Lk. XV. 22 δότί δακτύλιον els την χ('φα αυτού (put a ring on his hand) ; ei! τον άγρόν for the field, to pay its price, Mt. xxvii. 10; τικί τι iis τα! χιΊρα!, Ιο commit a thing to one, deliver it into one's power: Jn. xiii. 3 (Ilebr. "3 T3 ]Π3, Gen. ix. 2 ; xiv. 20 ; Ex. iv. 21 ) ; fit τ. διάνοιαν, or fVl τάι καρδία! (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 33), put into the mind, fasten upon the heart, Ileb. viii. 10; x. Ifi; or (if τ. καρδία! with inf. of the thing, Rev. xvii. 1 7 ; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 20 διδόναι Bieyeipci 147 Ζιίρ-χομαι Tivi τι eli την ^|nJχηv). Ιαντον hihovai fls with acc. of place, to betake one's self somewhere, to go into some place : Acts xix. 31, («s τότΓουΕ παραβόλου^, Polyb. 5, 14, 9; ti's τόπους τραχ(ίς^ Diod. 14, '^1 ; (Is Tas (ρημίαί, Diod. 5, 59 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 7 ; dt κώμην τινά, rIo^eph. antt. 7, 9, 7). 2. δίδωμί τι ev τινι, i. e. to be or remain in, so that it is in, [of. AV. 414 (386) ; B. 329 (283)] : ev ττ, χαρί tivos, Jn. iii. 35 ; €1/ τάις καρδίαίς, 2 Co. i. 22 ; fv ttj καρ8. τινός, 2 Co. viii. 16, (cf. 1 K. X. 24) ; (ΐρήνην Boivai iv rf/ yj to bring peace to be on earth, Lk. xii. 51. 3. δίδωμΙ τι imip Tivor, give up for etc. [cf. W. 383 (358) sq.] : Jn. vi. 51 ; tavTov xmip Tivos, Tit. ii. 14 ; ίαντον άντίλντρον νπίρ Tivos, 1 Tim. ii. 6 ; (αυτόν nepi [R WH txt. ύπίρ ; cf. nepi, I. c. δ.] των αμαρτιών, for sins, i. e. to expiate them. Gal. i. 4. 4. diSovai Tivi κατά τα (pya, την πρΰζιν, to give one acc. to his works, to render to one the reward of his deeds : Rev. ii. 23 [Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 4] ; (cf. άττο8ώσ(ΐ, Mt. xvi. 27; Ro. ii. 6). 5. Hebraistically, δί'δωκα ΐνώπιόν σου θύραν άνιωγμίνην Ι have set before thee a door opened i. e. have caused the door to be open to thee. Rev. iii. 8. [Syn. SiSovai, ζωρΐΐσθαι: SiS. to give in general, an- tithetic to λάμβαναν ; Sap. specific, to bestow, present ; SiS. might be used even of e ν i 1 s, but δωρ. could be used of such things only ironically ; see δόμα, fin. Comp. : oco-, άπο-, ανταπο-, δίο-, 4κ-, €ΐΓί-, μετά-, τταρα-, ιτρο- δίδωμι.] Si-e-yetpu ; 1 aor. Sirjycipa ; Pass., impf. διη-γιιρόμην [but TrAVH (Tedd. 2, 7) eifytipfi-oin Jn. vi. 18,cf. B. 34 (30) ; WH. App. p. 161] ; 1 aor. ptcp. heyepdfis; to wake up, awaken, arouse (from repose ; differing from the simple €γ(ίρω, which has a wider meaning) ; from sleep : τινά, Mk. iv. 38 [here Τ Tr WH f'yf ιρουσιν] ; Lk. viii. 24 ; pass., Lk. viii. 24 TTr txt. WII ; .Mk. iv. 39 ; with the addi- tion άπο τοϋ ύπνου, Mt. i. 24 (L Τ Tr WH iyepdeis) ; from repose, (juiet : in pass, of the sea, which begins to be agi- tated, to rise, Jn. vi. 18. Metaph. to arouse the min/l ; stir up, render active: 2 Pet. i. 13 ; iii. 1, as in 2 Mace. XV. 10, Tim Tois θυμο'ΐί. (Several times in the O. T. Apocr. [cf. W. 102 (97)]; Hippocr., [Aristot.], Hdian.; occasionally in Anthol.) * ει-(νθυμ<Όμαι, -οϋμαι ; to wcir/h in the mint!, consider : jrepi TITOS, Acts X. 19, for Rec. ϊνθυμ. (Besides, only in eccl. writ.) * δι-ίξ-ί'ρχομαι : [2 aor. δ^Ι^λ^οκ] ; to go out through something ; δΐ(ζ(\βηνσα, sc. δια (jypvyaviuv. Acts xxviii. 3 Tdf. edd. 2, 7. (Sept. ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Soph., Hdt.], Eur. down.) * Si-c'^-oSos, -ου, η ; fr. Hdt. down ; a way out through, outlet, exit : 5ιίξο&οι των οδών, Mt. xxii. 9, lit. wai/s through which ways go out, i. e. acc. to the context and the design of the parable places before the city where the roads from the country terminate, therefore outlets of the country high- ways, the same being also their entrances; [cf. Ob. 14; Ezek. xxi. 21 ; the R. V. renders it partings of the high- ways']. The phrase figuratively represents the territory of heathen nations, into which the apostles were about to go forth, (as is well shown by Fischer, De vitiis le.xx. N. T. p. 634 sqq.). Used of the boundaries of countries, it is equiv. to the Hebr. ηιΚϊΐη, Num. xxxiv. 4 sq. 8 sq., and often in the book of Joshua, [cf. Rieder, Die zusammen- gesetzten Verba u. s. w. p. 18. Others understand the crossings or thoroughfares here to represent the most frequented spots.]* δι-ίρμηνίία, -as, ή, (δΐ(ρμην(νω, q- v.), interpretation: of obscure utterances, 1 Co. xii. 10 L txt. (Not yet found elsewhere.) ' 8ι-ίρμ.ην£νΓή5, -οΰ, ό, (δΐ(ρμην(νω, q. v.), an interpreter: 1 Co. xiv. 28 [LTr Wllmrg. (ρμην.]. (Eccles. writ.)* ει-€ρμην(νω ; impf. 8ιηρμήν(νον and (without augm. cf. B. 34 (30)) δι(ρμήν(υον (Lk. xxiv. 27 L Tr mrg.) ; 1 aor. (also without augm. ; so " all early Mss." Hort) Sup- μήνιυσα (Lk. 1. c. Τ Tr txt. ΛΥΗ) ; [pres. pass, δκρμηνιϋο- μαι] ; to interpret [δια' intensifying by marking transition, (cf. Germ, verdeutlichen) ; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. V. p. 10 sq.] ; 1. to unfold the meaning of what is said, explain, expound : τι, Lk. xxiv. 27 ; absolutely, 1 Co. xii. 30; xiv. 5, 13, 27. 2. to translate into one's native language : Acts ix. 36, (2 Mace. i. 36 ; Polyb. 3, 22, 3, and several times in Philo [cf. Siegfried, Glossar. Phil. S.V.]).* 8ι-{ρχομ.αι; impf. διηρχόμην; fut. δΐ(\(ΰσομαι (Lk. ii. 35 ; see W. 86 (82) ; [cf. B. 58 (50)]) ; 2 aor. δι^λ^ο.-; pf. ptcp. δκληλυθώί (Heb. iv. 14); [fr. Horn, down]; 1. where διό has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf. διό, C.]) : to go through, pass through, [on its construc- tions cf. W. § 52, 4, 8] ; a. διό τίνος, to go, walk, jour- ney, pass through a place (Germ, den Durchweg neh- men) : Mt. xii. 43 ; xix. 24 R L Tr mrg. WH mrg. ; Mk. X. 25 [Rec." fi'aeXifli/] ; Lk. xi. 24 ; xviii. 25 L Tr mrg. ; Jn. iv. 4 ; 1 Co. x. 1 ; δια μίσου αϋτων, through the midst of a crowd, Lk. iv. 30 ; Jo. viii. 59 Rec. ; [δια μίσου (L Τ Tr WH δ. μΐσον, see διά, Β. I.) Σαμαρύας, Lk. xvii. 11]; δι' ΰμων, i. e. διά τήί χώρα! υμών, 2 Co. i. 1 6 (where Lchni. txt. άπ€\θ(Ίν) ; [δια πάντων sc. των άyίωv (see πάί, II. 1), Acts ix. 32]. b. with acc. to travel the road which leads through a place, go, pass, travel through a region : Lk. xix. 1 ; Acts xii. 10 ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 24 ; .xv. 3, 41 ; xvi. 6 ; xvii. 23 (τά σ(βάσματα) ; xviii. 23 ; xix. 1,21; xx. 2 ; 1 Co. .xvi. 5; Heb. iv. 14; of a thing: την >\τυχην δΐίΚ(ΰσίταί ρομφαία, penetrate, pierce, Lk. ii. 35, (of a spear, dart, with gen. Horn. II. 20, 263; 23, 876). c. absolutelv: (κ(ίνη! SC. όδοΰ (δι' before «ei'wjs in Rec. is spurious) ήμ(\- \f δΐ(ρχ(σθαι, for he was to pass that way, Lk. xix. 4. d. Avith specification of the goal or limit, so that the pre^ fix διά makes reference to the intervening space to be passed through or gone over: ΐνθάδι, Jn. iv. 15 Τ AVH, Trmrg. ; [fit τήκ Άχαι'αΐ', Acts xviii. 27]; «s το nepav, to go, cross, over to the farther shore, Jlk. iv. 35 ; Lk. viii. 22 ; ό θάνατος διήλθαν tis πάντας ανθρώπους, passed through unto all men, so that no one could escape its power, Ro. v. 12 ; ίως τινός, go even unto, etc. Lk. ii. 15 ; Acts ix. 38 ; xi. 19, 22 R G [W. 609 (566)]. 2. where διά answers to the Latin dis [cf. διά, C] ; to go to differ- ent places (2 Chr. xvii. 9 ; Am. vi. 2) : Acts viii. 4, 40 ; [x. 38] ; δΐ(λθόντ(ς άπο της Πιργης having departed from Perga sc. to various places. Acts xiii. 14 [al. refer this to 1, understanding δΐίλθόιττίς oi passing through the ex- Βι^ρωτΜΟ 148 Βίκαιο^ tout of country] ; tv mt ^ιηλθον nmonrj ii'hom i. e. in whose countrv / m nt nhtmi, or visiti-il different places, Acts x.\. 2.) ; ίιήμχοντιι κατά τιΊί κώμας tliev went about in various Uiiecliuns from one village to another, Lk. ix. (i ; of a report, to spread, i/o abroad : Βιίμχιται 6 Xo-yos, Lk. V. 15; Thuc. 6, 46; Xen. an. 1, 4, 7. [Syn. see (ρχομαι.] ' ει-«ρωτάω : 1 aor. ptep. δiff,ωτησas ; In ask through (i. e. ask many, one after another) : W, to find out by asking, to ini|uire out. Acts x. 17. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Polyb., Dio Cass. 43, 10 ; 48, 8.) Gf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. V. p. 1.5.• δ«τή5, -f'f, (Si's and fror), [fr. Ildt. down], of two years, two years old : diro SifToCs sc. ttoiSos, Jit. ii. 1 6, cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; [otliers take SiiroOt here as neut. ; see Meyer].* Sicrla, -as, η, (from tuTT)s, cf. τρκτία, τίτραβτιη), the space of tivo years: Acts x.xiv. 27; xxviii. 30. (Philo in Flacc. § IG ; [Grace. Ven. Gen. xli. 1 ; xlv. 5].) * ει^γ€Όμ.αι, -οϋμαι. [impv. 2 pers. sing. iiij-yoO, ptcp. διι;- yovpfvos^ ; fut. ^ιηγησομαι ', 1 aor. δίηγησάμην ', to lead or carry a narration Ihrouyh to the end, (cf. the fig. use of Germ, durc/ifutircn) ; set forth, recount, relate in full : absol. Ilcb. xi. 32; τι, describe, Acts viii. 33 (see yfvta, 3) ; Tivi foil. Ijy indir. disc, πώς etc., Mk. v. 16 ; Acts ix. 27 ; xii. 1 7 [here Τ om. Tr br. tlie dat.] ; foil, by a elSov, .Mk. ix. 9; όσα ίποίΐ)σ€ or (ποίησαν, Lk. viii. 39; ix. 10. (Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. often for ISO.) [CoMI'. : «-Sti/ye'o/jat.] * δι-ήγησ-ΐϊ, -ίωί, ή, (Siijye'ofiai), a narration, narrative: Lk. i. 1 ; used of the Gosjiel narratives also in Euseb. h. e. 3, 24, 7 ; 3, 39, 1 2 ; cf. Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsilie Theol. 1871, p. 36. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.; Sir. vi. 35 (34); ix. 15, etc.; 2 Mace. ii. 32; vi. 17.)* δι-ηνίκήβ, -f's, (fr. 8ίήν(γκα, &ιαφίμω, as the simjile ηνίκής fr. ήιχγκα, φίμω), fr. Ilom. down, continuous: fit TO diij^Kif, continually, lleb. vii. 3 ; x. 1, 12, 14, (δι- κτάτωμ fV το 5ιην(κίς ημίθη, Α])ρ. b. c. 1, 4).* διθάλασσος, -ον, (δίΓ and ^ιίλίίσσα) ; 1. resembling [οτ formingl two seas : thus of the Euxine Sea, Strab. 2, 5, 22; Dion. Per. 156. 2. lying between two seas, i.e. washed by the sea on botli sides (Dio Chrys. 5 p. 83) : τόπος δίθάλασσος, an isthmus or tongue of land, the ex- tremity of which is covered by tlie waves, Acts xxvii. 41; al. understand liere a projecting reef or bar against which the waves dash on both sides ; in opposition cf. Meyer ad loc. (In Clem. hom. p. 20, ed. Dressel [Kp. Petr. ad Jacob. § 14], men αλόγιστοι κ. ϊνδοιάζοντα π(μ\ των της άληθιίας (παγγιλμάτων are allegoricaUy styled ΤίίτΓοι διθύλασσοί fit κα\ βημίώδΐΐς.) * ει•ϊκvioμαι [L Wll Suic>'.(see I, ι)], -ονμαι ; logo through, penetrate, pierce: Ilcb. iv. 12. (Ex. xxvi. 28 ; Thuc, Theophr., Pint., al. ; in Homer transitively, to go through in narrating.)' δι-ίστημι: 1 aor. Σύστησα; 2 aor. ίιϊστην; [fr. Horn, down] ; to place .separately, put asunder, disjoin ; in the mid. [or pass.] and the pf. and 2 aor. act. to stand apart, to part, depart : βρα)^ν δ< δίαστ^σαι /Tff, sc ίαντοΰς or την vavv (ef. B. 47 (41)), when they had gone a little distance viz. from the place before mentioned, i. e. }iaving gone a little farther. Acts xxvii. 28; of time: &ίαστάαης ΰιμα< μιϋί one hour haviiig intervened, Lk. xxii. :>'.); διίστη απ' αϋτίν parted, withdrew from them, Lk. xxiv. 51.* δι-ϊιτχυρίζομαι [L \V 1 1 δασχ. (see I, «)] : impf. δΰσχνμιζό• μην; 1. to lean upon. 2. to aj/irm stoutly, a.iserl confidently: Lk. xxii. 59; Acts xii. 15. (Lys., Isae., Plat., Dem., Joseph, antt. 2, 6, 4 ; Ael. hist. an. 7,18; Dio Cass. 57, 23; al.) • [δικάζω; 1 aor. |)ass. (δικάσθην; fr. Horn, down; to Jnilyi', pass judgment: absol. Lk. vi. 37 Tr mrg. (al. κα- τηδ«.).•] δικαιοκρκτία, -ur, η, rigliteous judgment : Ivo. ii. 5. (an uncert. trans, in llos. vi. 5 [where Sept. κμίμα^; Test, xii. patr. [test. Levi § 3] p. 547, and [§ 15J p. 581, ed. Fabric. ; Justin. Mart. resp. de resurrect, xi. (15) 28 p. 360 ed. tert. Otto; [Hippol. p. 801 a.ed. Migne] ; Basil iii. p. 476 d. ed. (iarn. or p. 694 ed. Par. alt. 1839. [Cf. W. L'5: 99 (94)].)• δ£καιθ5, -aia, -αίον, (ίτ. δίκη right), [fr. Ilom. down], pro]), the Ilebr. ρ^^ϊ, observant of ή δίκη, righteous, ob- serving divine and human laws ; one who is such as hi• ought to he ; (Germ, rechtbescha/l'cn ; in the earlier lan- guage, whence ap[)ropriated by Luther, gerecht in a broad sense; in (irk. writ, used even of physical things, as Ίπποί, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 5 ; γήδιον δικαιότατοι/, most fer- tile, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 38; [άρμα δίκαιον, ib. 2, 2, 26]) ; 1. in a wide sense, upright, righteous, virtuous, keeping Ihi• commands of God ; a. univ. : Mt. i. 19 (the meaning is, it was not consistent with his uprightness to expose his betrothed to ])ublic reproach); Mt. x. 41 ; xiii. 43, 49,• xxiii. 28; XXV. 37, 46 ; Lk. i. 6, 17; xiv. 14; xviii. 9; xx. 20 ; Ro. V. 7 [cf. W. 1 1 7 (1 1 1)] ; 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Jas. v. 6, 16; 1 Pet. iii. 12; 1 Jn. iii. 7, [10 Lchm.] ; Rev. xxii. 11; opp. to άμαρτω\ο\ και άσ(βΰς, 1 Pet. iv. 18; δίκαιοι κάΊ άδικοι, Mt. V. 4 J ; Acts xxiv. 15 ; used of O. T. char- acters noted for piety and probity : Mt. xiii. 1 7 ; [xxiii. 29] ; Ileb. xii. 23 ; thus of Abel, Mt. xxiii. 35 ; Ileb. xi. 4 ; of Lot, 2 Pet. ii. 7 sq. (Sap. x. 4 S(|.) ; of those who seem to themselves to be righteous, who pride them- selves on their virtues, whether real or imaginary : Mt. ix.13; Mk.ii.l7; Lk. v. 32; xv. 7, (Eccl. vii. 1 7 (16))• .Joined with (ϋλαβίις, Lk. ii. 25 (ήθη (νλαβή κ- δίκαια, το δίκαιον κ. ιϋλαβίς, Plat, polit. p. 311 a. b.) ; with άγιοϊ, Mk.vi. 20; with άγαβόε, Lk. xxiii. 50; with φοβούμινος τ!>ν 6(όν, Acts χ. 22; tpr^a δίκαια, opp. ίυπονημά, 1 Jn. iii. 12. Neut. τύ δίκαιον, that which regaril J'lir duty demands, what is right: 2 Pet. i. 13; plur. Phil. iv. 8; δίκαιοι/ (Vti, Eph. vi. 1 ; Phil. i. 7 ; witli the addition of ϊνώπιοντον θ<υΰ, God being judge, Acts iv. 19. b. the negative idea preilomi- nating: innocent, faultless, guiltless, (for 'pi, Prov. i. 11 ; Job ix. 23, etc) ; thus used of Christ in the speech of Gentiles: Mt. xxvii. 19, 24 RG Lbr. Trbr. WII mrg.; Lk. xxiii. 47; αίμα δίκαιον (Prov. vi. 17; Joel iii. 19 (24) ; Jon. i. 14), Mt. xxiii. 35 ; [xxvii. 4 Tr mrg. WII txt.] ; η fvToXti άγια κ δικαία (having no fellowship with sin [al. al., .see the Comm. ad loc]) : δοκι- μιou 8i στρατιωτών κάματος, Ildian. 2, 10, 12 [G ed. Bekk.] ; in Sept. of a crucible or furnace for smelting : Prov. xxvii. 21 ; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7. 3. e([uiv. to 6οκιμή, 2 : ίμων της πίστ€α)9, your proved faith, 1 Pet. i. 7. This word is treated of fully by Fritzsche in his Prali- minarien u.s.w. pp. 40, 44.* 8s, -a, -ov, (δόλοί) ; fr. Hom. on; deceitful: 2 Co. xi. 13.* 8ολιόω : (SoXtof) ; to deceive, use deceit: in Ro. iii. 13, fr. Ps. V. 10, impf. «δολιοΟσαν an Alexandrian form for iSoXiovv, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 349 ; W. § 13, 2 f. ; ΛΙηΙ- lach p. 16 ; B. 43 (37) ; [cf. «χω]. (Not found in prof, writ. ; [Numb. xxv. 18 ; Ps. civ. (cv.) 25. Cf. W. 20 (25)].) * SoXos, -ov, 6, (fr. δίλω to catch with a bait [(?) ; Lat. dolus, cf. Curtius § 271] ; see διλιάζω above) ; prop, bait, Hom. Od. 12, 252; a lure, snare; hence craft, deceit, guile : Mt. xxvi. 4 ; Mk. xiv. 1 ; vii. 22 ; Jn. i. 47 (48) ; Acts xiii. 10; 2Co. xii. 16; Ro. i. 29 ; 1 Th. ii. 3 (οϋκ ?στι tV δολω, there is no deceit under it) ; 1 Pet. ii. [1], 22, and Rev. xiv. 5 Rec, after Is. liii. 9 ; λαλ^ί» δόλο» to speak deceitfully (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14), 1 Pet. iii. 10.• δολόω, -ώ ; (δόλοί) ; 1. to ensnare : Hes., Hdt. and succeeding writers. 2. to corrupt, ([βδίλλιοκ and Χίβαι/ον, Dioscor. 1, 80. 81] ; τον otvov, Lcian. Hermot. 59) : Tiiv λύγοχ τοϋ dfoi, divine truth by mingling with it wrong notions, 2 Co. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixii. and see καπη- Xf υω.] * εόμα, -ros, τό, (δίδωμι), a gift : Mt. vii. 1 1 ; Lk. xi. 13; Eph. iv. 8; Phil. iv. 17. (Plat. def. p. 415 b.; Plut. ; often in Sept., chiefly for Tijnp.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 291 sq. fwho quotes Varro de ling. Lat. 1. iv. p. 48 ed. Bip. " dos erit pecunia si nuptiarum causa data : haec Graece δωτΐνη, ita enim hoc Siculi• ab eodem Donum. Nam Graece ut ipsi SOipov, ut alii δόμα, et ut Attici δόσι? ."] * [Stn. So μα, ζόσΐί. Βώρον, SwpecE; Sotr. act. a giving, pass, thing given, cf . medical " dose " ; δώρ. specific " present," yet not always gratuitous or wholly unsuggestive of recom- pense ; but Supfa differs from ίώρ. in denoting a gift ivhich is also a gratuity, hence of the benefactions of a sover- eign ; a Slinilur, l/ri'/liliic'^s ; 1. properly: τον φωτο!, Acts xxii. 11; of Uut sun, moon, stars, 1 Co. .\v. 40 sq. ; used of the heavenly brightness, by which God was conceived of as surrounded, Lk. ii. 9 ; Acts vii. 5.'>, and by ivhich heavenly beings were sur- rounded when they appeared on earth, Lk. i.\. 31 ; Rev. xviii. 1 ; with which the face of Moses was once made luminous, 2 Co. iii. 7, and also Christ in his transfigura- tion, Lk. ix. 32; δάξα τον κυρίου, in Sept. ecpiiv. to 1132 niri", in the targ. and talui. ΓυΟϋ/, Slu'kinah or Shechi- nah [sec BB.DD. s. v.], Ilie r/lori/ nfl/ir Lord, and simply ή δό|α, a bright cloud by which (Jod made manifest to men his presence and power on earth (Ex. xxiv. 17 ; xl. 28 (34 ) sqq., etc.) : Ro. ix. 4 ; Rev. χ v. 8 ; xxi. 1 1 , 23 ; hence, ό ieorr^s δόξηΐ (God to whom belongs 8όξα) ωφθη. Acts vii. 2 ; Χ(ρυνβ(\ν δόξη^, on whom the divine glory rests (so 8όξα without the article, Ex. xl. 28 (34) ; 1 S. iv. 22 ; Sir. xlix. 8 ), Ileb. ix. 5. 2. magnifk-enrc, excellenrr, preiimiiwnce, rli()iiitij, grace : βασίΚ(ΐαι τοΰ κόσμου κ. ή δόξα αϋτων, Ί. e. their resources, wealth, the maguilicence and greatness of their cities, their fertile lands, their throng- ing population, Mt. iv. 8 ; Lk. iv. 6 ; ή δόξα των βασιΧιίων της -γης, Rev. xxi. [24 ; των ϊθνών, ibid.] 2U ; used of royal state, splendid apparel, and the like : Mt. vi. 29 ; Lk. xii. 27, (Esth. v. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 8, G, 5) ; glorious form and api)earance : e. g. of human boiiies restored to life, opp. to ή άτίμία which characterized them when they were buried, 1 Co. .w. 43 ; ή δόξα τής σαρκός "omne id, (piod in rebus humanis magnifieum dicitur " (Calvin), 1 Pet. i. 24 ; flval τινι δόξα to be a glory, ornament, to one, 1 Co. xi. 1 5 ; univ. preeminence, excellence : 2 Co. iii. 8-11. 3. majesty; a. that which belongs to (jod; and a. the kingly majesty Avhich belongs to him as the supreme ruler ; so in pass, where it is joined with βασΐΚΰα, δύναμις, κράτος, ίξουσία. and the like: Mt. vi. 13 Rec. ; esp. in doxologies, 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; v. 11 RG; Jude 2.5 ; Rev. i. 6 ; these pass. I have preferred to distinguish fr. those cited above, II. fin., and yet in pass, similar to each other in form it is not :ilways clear whether δόξα is used to de- note praise and honor, or regal majesty, as in Rev. vii. 12»; (ifXoyta κ. ή δόξα κ- ή σοφία κ. ή (νχαριστία κ. ή τιμή κ. ή Ισχΰί, Rev. xix. 1 ή σωτηρία κ. ή δόξα κ. ή τιμή κ- ή δΰναμις; likewise in Rev. v. 12, [13]. of the judicial majesty of God as exhibited at the last day, Jude vs. 24. άνήρ (Ικων κ. δόξα θ(οΰ ίητάρχων, whose function of govern- ment rellects the majesty of the divine rider, 1 Co. xi. 7 ; {ή) γυνή δόξα «ι/δμόί, because in her the preeminence and authority of her husband are conspicuous, ibid. β. maj- esli/ in the sense of the absolute perfection of the deity : Ro. i. 23 : 2 Co. iv. 6 ; Heb. i. 3 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 14 ; eV δόξη i. q. (νδόξως, i. e. as accords with his di- vine perfection, Phil. iv. 19 [cf. Mcy. and lij). Lghtft. adloc.]; of the majesty of his savinggrace: Ro. ix. 23 ; Eph. i. 12, 14, 18; iii. 16; 1 Tim. i. 1 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 3 [W. 381 (3Γ)6)] ; more fully δόξα της χάριτος, Eph. \. G ; 6 πα- τήρ τής δόξης, the Father whose characteristic is majesty, Ejih. i. 17 ; the majesty of (iod a.* exhibited in deeds of poΛver: Jn. xi. 40 ; Ro. vi. 4 (whenci• δύξα for Ij,', Sept. Is. xii. 2 ; xlv. 24) ; hence ru κράτος τής δόξης αυτοί, the might in which his majesty e.\cels. Col. i. 11. b. maj- e.sly which belongs to Christ; and o. the kingly majesty of the Messiah, to which belongs his kingly stale, the splendor of his external appearance, the retinue of angels, and the like (see in III. 1) : Mk. x. 37; in this sense it is said that Christ will come hereafter to set up the Messianic kingdom ev τή δόξι; τοϋ πατρός, clothed by the Father in kingly array, Mt. xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 2lj ; μ€τα δυνάμίως κ. δόξης πολλής, Mt. .xxiv. 30; Mk. xiii. 21) ; Lk. xxi. 27 cf. Mt. xxv. 31 ; Tit. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet. iv. 13; also καθίσαι (π\ θρόνου δόξης αυτόν, Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31, ef. 1 S. ii. 8 ; ή δόξα της ισχύος αντοΐι, the majesty of his Messianic power with which he will punish his adversaries, 2 Th. i. 9. β. lite absolutely perfect inward or personal excellence of Christ : 2 Co. iii. 18 ; iv. 4 ; in which he excels by virtue of his nature as ό θιίος Xdyor, Jn. i. 11; xii. 41 ; of which majesty he gave tokens in the miracles he performed, Jn. ii. 1 1 cf. xi. 40 ; ό κνριος τής δόξης, 1 Co. ii. 8 ; Jas. ii. 1. γ. the majtslii (yl'iry) nf iinijils, as apparent in their e.xterior brightness, Lk. ix. 26 ; in a wider sense, in which angels are called δόξαι as being spiritual beings of preeminent dignity : Jude vs. 8 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10. 4. α most r/lorious condition, most exalted slate; a. of that condition with (iod the Father in heav- en to which Christ was raised after he had achieved his work on earth: Lk. xxiv. 26; Jn. xvii. .5 (ivhere he is said to have been in the same condition before his incar- nation, and even before the beginning of the world); ib. 22, 24 ; Ileb. ii. 7, 9 ; 1 Pet. i. 1 1, 21 ; τό σό>μα τής δόξης αίτον, the body in which his glorious condition is mani- fested, Phil. iii. 21 ; άνιλήφθη Iv δόξ;/, was taken uj) (into heaven) so that he is now «i/ δόξη, 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385); B. 328 (283)]. b. the glorious condition o/ blessedness into which it . is appointed and promised that true Christians shall enter afier their Saviour's return from heaven : Ro. viii. 18, 21 ; ix. 23 ; 2 Co. iv. 17 ; Col. i. 27 (twice ; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; iii. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 10 ; Ileb. ii. 10; 1 Pet. V. 1; which condition begins to be enjoyed even now through the devout contemplation of the divine majesty of Christ, and its influence upon those who con- template it, 2 Co. iii. 18 ; and this condition will include not only the blessedness of the soul, but also the gain of a more excellent body (1 Co. xv. 43 ; Phil. iii. 21) ; cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Reehtfertigungslehre, p. 203 sqq. ; ή δόξα ToC θ(ον, which God bestows, Ro. v. 2 ; 1 Th. ii. 12; δόξα τοΰ κυρ. ήμ- Ίησ. Χρ. the same in which Christ rejoices, 2 Th. ii. 14 (cf. Ro. viii. 17, etc.); (is δόξαν ήμων, to render us partakers of δόξα, 1 Co. ii. 7. Cf. Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. § 76 d.* Βοξάζα 157 BovXot ίοξάΛ,ω ; [impf. ϋόξαζυν] ; fut. δοξάσω ; 1 aor. (8όξασα ; Pass., [pres. δοξάζομαι^ ; jif. δίδό|ασμαι ; 1 aor. ϊδοξάσθην; {δόξα) ; Vulg. konorifico, glor'ifico, clarifico ; Sept. chiefly for 133, several times for 1X3, (in E.\. xxxiv. 29 sq. 35 δοξάζισθαί stands for y\\>^ to shine) ; 1. to think, suppose, be of opinion, (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., Thuc, et sqq. ; nowhere in this sense in the sacred writ- ings). 2. fr. Polyb. (6, 5.3, 10 διδοξασμίνοι ck apfTrj) on to praise, extol, magnify, celebrate : τινά, pass., Mt. vi. 2; Lk. iv. 15 : ίαντόν, to glorify one's self, Jn. viii. 54; Rev. xviii. 7 ; τον "Koyov τον κνρίαν, Acts xiii. 48 ; το όνομα του κυρίου, Rev. χν. 4 ; τονθ^όν, Mt. v. IC ; ix. 8 ; xv. 31 : Mk. ii. 12 ; Lk. v. 25 sq. ; vii. 16 ; xiii. 13 ; xvii. 15 ; xviii. 43; xxiii. 47 ; Acts xi. 18 ; xxi. 20 [Rec. κνριον~\ ; Ro. xv. 6, 9 [W. §44, 3 b.: 332 (311)]; 1 Pet. ii. 12; iv. 14 Rec; with the addition of tVi τινι, for something, Lk. ii. 20 ; Acts iv. 21 ; 2 Co. ix. 13 ; eV «μοι, on account of me (projv erly, finding in me matter for giving praise [cf. W. 3S7 (362) sq.]). Gal. i. 24 ; eV τω ονόματι τοντω, 1 Pet. iv. IG L TTrWH. 3. lo honor, do honor to, hold in honor: την διακονίαν μου, by the most devoted administration of it endeavoring to convert as many Gentiles as possible to Christ, Ro. xi. 13 ; a member of the body, 1 Co. xii. 26; 6eov, lo worship, Ro. i. 21 ; with the adjunct ίν τω σώματι, by keeping the body pure and sound, 1 Co. vi. 20 ; τω βανάτω, to undergo death for the honor of God, Jn. xxi. I'J. 4. By a use not found in prof. writ, lo make glori- ous, adorn with lustre, clothe with splendor; a. to impart glory to something, render it excellent : pf. pass, διδάξα- σμαι to e.xcel, be preeminent ; διδοξασμΐνος excelling, emi- nent, glorious, 2 Co. iii. 10 ; δ^δοξασμίνη χάρα surpassing i. e. heavenly joy, [A. \.full of glory'], I Pet. i. 8. b. to make renowned, render illustrious, i. e. to caiwse the dignity and icorth of some person or thing to become mani- fest and acknowledged : τον λόγον τοί; 0foO, 2 Th. iii. 1 ; Christ, the Son of God, Jn. viii. 54 ; xi. 4 ; xvi. 14 ; xvii. 10 ; God the Father, Jn. xiii. 31 sq. ; xiv. 13 ; xv. 8 ; .xvii. 1,4; 1 Pet. iv. 11; το όνομα τοϋ 5ίθΟ, Jn. xii. 28. c. to exalt to a glorious rank or condition (Is. xliv. 23 ; Iv. 5, etc. ; joined to Ιψοϋν, Is. i v. 2 ; Esth. iii. 1 ) : ονχ iavTov (δόξασ( did not assume to himself the dignity (equiv. to ονχ ίαντω την τιμήν eXa^f, vs. 4). the \vords γ^νηθηναι άρ- χκρία being added epexegetically (W. § 44, 1), Heb. v. 5 ; of (iod e.xalting, or rather restoring, Christ his Son lo a state of glory in heaven : Jn. vii. 39 ; xii. 16, [23] ; xiii. 31 sq. ; xvii. 1, 5 : Acts iii. 13 ; (see δόξα. III. 4 a.) ; i>f God bringing Cliristians to a heavenly dignity and londition, (see δόξα. III. 4 b.) : Ro. viii. 30. [Comp. : fv-, σνν-δοξόζω,] ' Δορκάε, -άδοί. ή. (prop, a wild she-goat, a gazelle, " πάρα TO δίρκω, TO β\(πω• ϋξυδιρκΪ! yap το ζωον κ- (νόμματον " Etym. Magn. [284, 6]), Dorcas, a certain Christian wo- man : Acts ix. 36, 39 ; see Ταβιθά.' So*, are those whose agency God employs in executing his pur- poses: used of apostles. Acts iv. 29; xvi. 17; of Moses (Josh. i. 1), Rev. χ v. 3 : of prophets (Jer. vii. 25 ; xxv. 4), Rev. i. 1 ; x. 7 ; xi. 18 ; of aU who obey God's com- mands, his true worshippers, Lk. ii. 29 ; Rev. ii. 20 ; vii. 3 ; xix. 2, 5 ; .xxii. 3, 6 ; (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 23 ; Ixviii. (IxLx.) 37 ; Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 4, 21). γ. SoCXot Ttras, devoted to another to the disregard of one's own interests : Mt. xx. 27 ; Mk. X. 44; strenuously laboring for another's sal- vation, 2 Co. iv. 5. 2. a servant, atle7ulant,(oi aiing): Mt. xviii. 23, 26 sqq. [Stn. see διάκονος-Ί 8ουλόω, -ω : fut βουλώσω ; 1 aor. (8ού\ωσα ; pf. pass, δίδΐίΰλωμοί; 1 aor. pass, ίδουλώ^ι?!» ; (δοι'λοί) ; [fr. Aes- chyl. and lldt. down] ; to make a slave of, reduce to hond- aije ; a. prop. : τινά, Acts vii. 6 ; τούτω και [yet Τ WH cm. Tr br. και] δ^δούλωται to him he has also been made a bondman, 2 Pet. ii. 19. b. metaph. : ΐμαυτόν τινι give myself ivhoUy to one's needs anω, Ro. vi. 18, 22; likewise into τι. Gal. iv. 3 ; δίδουλω- μίνο! οϊνω, wholly given up to, enslaved to, Tit. ii. 3 {8ov\fCfiv οΐνω, T.iban. ei)ist. 319) ; δίδονλωμαι (v τινι, to be under bondage, held by constraint of law or necessity, in some matter, 1 Co. vii. 15. [CoMP. : κατα-δοι/λ<5ω.]* δοχή- -ήί- ή> ί.Βίχομαι to receive as a guest), a feast, banquet, [cf. our reception'] : 8οχην ποιώ, Lk. v. 29 ; xiv. 13. (i. q. ΠΓΙψα, Gen. [xxi. 8] ; xxvi. 30 ; Esth. i. 3 ; v. 4 sqq. ; Athen. 8 p. 348 f. ; Plut. moral, p. 1102 b. [i. e. non posse suav. vivi etc. 21, 9].) • SpdKuv, -ovTos, 6, (apparently fr. ίίρκομαι, 2 aor. {δρά- κοι»; hence δράκων prop, equiv. to οξν β)ίίπων [Etym. Magn. 286, 7; cf. Curtius § 13]) ; Sept. chiefly for \•)η ; a drarjon, a great serpent, a fabulous animal, (so as early as Ilom. II. 2, 3o« s•2 (330)]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; Sept.)* εριχμήι -ψ, η, {Βράσσομαι. [hence prop, a grip, a hand- ful]), [fr. lldt. down], n drachina, a silver cuin of [near- 1}] the same weight as the Roman denarius (see 5ηνάριον) : Lk. XV. 8 sq.• SpeVavov, -ου, τό, (i. q. hpcnairq, f r. δρί'ττω to pluck, pluck off), a sickle, a pruning-hook;ahooked vine-knife, such as reapers and vine-dressers use : Mk. iv. 29 ; Rev. xiv. 14-19. (Ilom. and subseq. writ.; Sept.)* 8p6p.os, -ου, ό, (fr. ΔΡΑΜΩ [q. v.] ; cf. νάμης, τρόμος, and the like), α course (Horn, et .sijq.) ; in the N. 1". fig., t/ie course of life or of office : πΚηροίσθαι τόι/ δρόρον. Acts xiii. 25 ; TfKfiovv, Acts x.x. 24 ; τ(\ύν, 2 Tim. iv. 7." ΔρουσΙλλα [al. Δρούσιλλα, cf. Chandler § 120], -ης, ή, Drusilla, daughter of Agrippa the elder, wife of Felix, the governor of Juda;a, a most licentious woman (Joseph, antt. 20, 7, 1 sq.) : Acts xxiv. 24; cf. Win. RWB. [and B. D.] s. v.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19, 4.• εύναμ,αι, depon. verb, pres. indie. 2 pers. sing, δϋνασαι and, ace. to a rarer form occasional in the poets and fr. Polyb. on to be met with in prose writ, also (cf. Lnli. ad Phryn. p. 359; [TI7/. App. p. 168 ; W. § 1.3, 2 b.; Veitch s. V.]), δύνη (Mk. ix. 22 sq. L Τ Tr WII ; [Lk. xvi. 2 Τ WII Tr txt. ] ; Rev. ii. 2) ; impf. (δννάμην and Attic ηδυνάμην, between which forms the Mss. and editions are almost everywhere divided, [in Mk. vi. 19; xiv. 5; Lk. viii. 19; xix. 3; Jn. ix. 33; xii. 39 all edd. read ηδ., so R G in Mt. xxvi. 9 ; Lk. i. 22 ; Jn. xi. 37 ; Rev. xiv. 3 ; on the other hand, in Jit. xxii. 46 ; Lk. i. 22 : Jn. xi. 37 ; Rev. xiv. 3, L Τ Tr WII all read ί'δ., so Τ WH in Mt. xxvi. 9; RGin Mt. xxii. 46. Cf. TI7/. App. p. 162; AV. § 12, 1 b. ; B. 33 (29)] ; fut. δυνήσομαι : 1 aor. ήδυνί,θη» and (in Mk. vii. 24 Τ WII, after codd. SB only ; in Mt. xvii. 16 cod. B) ηδυνάσθην (cf. [WII u. s. and p. 169]; Kuhner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.; W. 84 (81); B. 33 (29) ; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 402]) ; Sept. for Sj; ; to be able, have power, whether by virtue of one's own ability and resources, or of a state of mind, or through favora- ble circumstances, or by permission of law or custom ; a. foil, by an inf. [AV. § 44, 3] pres. or aor. (on the dis- tinction between which, cf. λΥ. § 44, 7). ο. foil, oy a pres. inf. : Mt. vi. 24 ; ix. 15 : Mk. ii. 7 ; iii. 23 ; l.k. vi. 39; Jn. iii. 2; v. 19; Acts xxvii. 15; 1 Co. x. 21 : Ileb. v. 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 9 ; Rev. ix. 20, and often, β. foil, by an aor. inf. : Mt. iii. 9 ; v. 14 ; Mk. i. 45 ; ii. 4 ; v. 3 ; Lk. viii. 19 ; xiii. 11 ; Jn. iii. 3 sq. ; vi. 52 ; vii. 34, 36 ; Acts iv. 16 [RG]; V.39; x. 47; Ro. viii. 39; xvi. 25 ; 1 Co.ii. 14; iii. 1 ; vi. 5 ; 2 Co. iii. 7 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; Eph. iii. 4, 20 ; 1 Th. iii. 9; 1 Tim. vi. 7, 16 ; 2 Tim. ii. 13 ; iii. 7, 15 ; Heb. ii. 8ύναμιau' : [pres. pass. 8νι>αμοίμαι] ; to make strong, conjinii, .■. : (V -δυναμόω.] ' δυνάο-τηϊ, -ου, ό, {δύνομαι) ; fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. on ; powerful; 1. α prince, poleniiile: Lk. i. 52 ; used of God (Sir. xlvi. 5 ; 2 ]\Iacc. xv. 3, 23, etc. ; of Zeus, Soph. Ant. 608), 1 Tim. vi. \^). 2. a courtier, high officer, royal viinixler: Acts viii. 27 [A. V. (a eunuch) of great authoriti/ ; but see Meyer ad loc], (δυχάσται Φαραώ, Gen. 1. 4).• ■ SvvaTt'u, -ω: (δυνατοί); to be powetful or might;/; shoiv one's self powerful : 2 Co. xiii. 3 (opp. to άσβ(νω) ; to be able, have power : foil, by an inf., Ro. xiv. 4 L Τ Tr WII ; 2 Co. ix. 8 L Τ Tr WII. Not found in prof. writ, nor in the Sept.* SvvaTOs, -ή, -όν, (,δϋναμαι) ; [fr. Pind. down], Sept. for ■'ISJ ; ahte, powerful, mighty, strong ; 1. absolutely ; a. mighty in wealth and influence : 1 Co. i. 26 ; (Rev. vi. 15 Rec.) ; o< δυνατοί, tlie chief men, Acts .xxv. 5, (Joseph. b. j. 1, 12, 4 ηκον Ιουδαίων οι δυνατοί; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 1 ; Thuc. 1,89; Poly b. 'J, 23, 4 ). ό δυνατά:, the preeminently mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i. 49. b. strong in soul: to bear calamities and trials Λvith fortitude and patience, 2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. -xiii. 9; firm in conviction and faitli, Ro. .\v. 1. 2. in con- struction ; a. δυνατό: (Ιμι with inf., to be able (to do soyne- thing; [H. 260 (224); W. 319 (299)]) : Lk. xiv. 31 ; Acts xi. 17; Ro. iv. 21 ; xi. 23 ; xiv. 4 R G ; 2 Co. ix. 8 R G ; 2 Tim. i. 12 ; Tit. i. 9 ; Heb. xi. 19 (Lchm. δύναται) ; Jas. iii. 2. b. δυνατοί fv nvi, mighty i. e. excelling in some- thing : fV tpytf K. λόγω, I>k. xxiv. 19 ; cV λό -yois και tpyois. Acts vii. 22 ; tv γραφα'ι:, excelling in knowledge of the Scriptures, Acts xviii. 24. c. προς τι, mighty i.e. having power for something : 2 Co. x. 4. d. neuter δυνατόν [in pass, sense, cf. B. 190 {16b')'] possible : tl δυνατόν (cari). Ml. xxiv. 24 ; xxvi. 39 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; xiv. 35 ; Ro. xii. 18; Gal. iv. 15; ούκ ην δυνατόν foil, by inf. Acts ii. 24; δυνατόν τί fOTi' Tivt [B. 190 (165)], Mk. ix. 23 ; xiv. 36 ; Acts XX. 16 ; πάρα Ufa πάντα δυνατά (στι, Mt. xix. 26 ; Mk. .X. 27; Lk. xviii. 27. to δυνατόν αΰτοϋ, what his power could do, equiv. to την δύναμιν αΰτοΰ, Ro. ix. 22, cf. W. § 34, 2.• Suvu, δΰω ; 2 aor. (δυν ; 1 aor. (in Grk. writ, transi- tively) (δυσα (Mk. i. 32 L Tr WII), cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 156 sq. ; W. p. 84 (81 ) : B. 56 (49) ; [Veitch s. vv.] ; to go into, enter; go under, be plunged into, sink in : ic the N. T. twice of the setting sun (sinking as it were into the sea), Mk. i. 32 ; Lk. iv. 40. So times without niiinber in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. on ; Sept., Gen. xxviii. 1 1 ; Lev. xxii. 7, etc. ; Tob. ii. 4 ; 1 Mace. x. 50. [CoMP. : «-, djr-tn- {-μαι), fV-, eV-fv-, παρ-ίΐσ-, cVi -διΙνΐι).] * δύο, genit. indcd. δύο (as in ICpic, and occasionallv in Ildt., Time., Xen., Polyb., al. for δυηΐν, more common in Attic [see liulherford, New Pliryn. p. 289 sq.]) ; dat. δυσί, δυσι'ν. ([-σι in Mt. vi. 24 ; l,k. xvi. 13 ; Acts xxi. 33 ( ΐν-σίν), -ai'vin Mt. xxii. 40 ; Mk. xvi. 1 2 ; Lk. xii. 52 (R G -ai); Actsxii. 6 (RGL -σι'); Ilcb. .\. 28; Rev. xi.3(RG -σί) ; ci.Tdf. Proleg. p. 98; WII. App.p. 147] — aforiii not found in the older and better writ., met with in Ilippocr., Aristot., Theophr., frecpient fr. Polyb. on, for the Attic δυοίν); ace. δύο (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 210; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 276 si].; W. § 9, 2 b. : Passow i. p. 729); two: absol., ovK (Tl fiVt δύο, αλλά σαρξ μία, Mt. .xix. 6 ; Mk. .\. 8; δύο η Tpf if , ^It. xviii. 20 ; 1 Co. xiv. 29 ; Tpeit ίπ'ι δυσι κ. δύο fVi τρισί, Lk. xii. 52; άνά and κατά δ'ο, two by Iwo [W. 398 (372); 401 (374); B. 30 (26)]. Lk. ix. 3 [WH om. Tr br. άνά]; χ. 1 [WII άνά δύο [δύο]; ef. Acta Philip. § 36, ed. Tdf. p. 92] ; Jn. ii. 6 [apiece] ; 1 Co. xiv. 27 ; δύο δύο two and two, Mk. vi. 7 (so, after the Ilebr., in Gen. vi. 1 9, 20 ; but the phrase is not altogether foreign even to the Grk. poets, as Aeschyl. Pers. 981 μυρία μυρία for κατά μυριάδας, cf. W. 249 (234), [cf. 39 (38)]) ; neut. e.'t δυ'ϋ into two parts, Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38; with gen. δΐΌ τών μαθητών{αΙτου),Μ^.. xi. 1 ; xiv. 13; Lk. xix. 29 ; [Mt. -xi. 2 RG] ; τών οίκιτων. Acts χ. 7. δύο (ζ αυτών, Lk. xxiv. 13 [ef. Bttm. 158 (138); Win. 203 (191)]. with a i]0un or pronoun : δύο δαιμονιζι>μ(νοι, Mt. viii. 28. δύο μάχαιραι, Lk. xxii. 38 : cVt στόματος δύο μαρτύρων, Mt. xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1 ; δυσί κυμιΌκ, Mt. vi. 24 ; Lk. xvi. 13 ; (ϊδ( δύο άδίΧφούς, Mt. iv. is ; preceded by the article, 01 δύο the Iwo, the liniin : Mt. xix. 5 ; Mk. x. 8 ; 1 Co. vi. 1 6 ; Eph. V. 31 ; τούί δύο, Eph. ii. 15 ; a! [Rec. only] δύο διαθήκαι. Gal. iv. 24 ; ούτοι [Lchm. br. ούτ.] οί δύο υιοί μαυ, Mt. XX. 21 ; TTfpl τών δύο άδίλφών, Mt. χχ. 24 ; t'v ταύταΐί ταίς δυσίν ΐντολαις, Mt. xxii. 40 ; τοϋί ^νο ιχθνας, Mt. xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41 ; Lk. ix. 16 ; δύο δηνάρια, Lk. χ. 35. δυ5, an inseparable prefix conveying the idea of diffi- culty, opposition, in juriousness or the like, and eorres])onding to our mis-, un- [Curtius § 278] ; opp. to tl. δυσ--βά<Γτακτο$. -ov, (βαστάζω), hard [A. V. grierous] to be borne : Mt. xxiii. 4 [T WII txt. om. Tr br. δυσβάιττ.] and Lk. xi. 46 φορτία δυο-βάστακτα, said of jirecepts hard to obcv, and irksome. (Sept. Prov. xxvii. 3 ; Philo, omn. prob. lib. §5 ; Phit. (piaest. nat. c. 16, 4 p. 915 f.) • δυ<Γίντ€ρία, -ας. ή. (fvTtpov intestine), dysentery, (Lat. tormina inteslinormn, bowei-complaint) : Acts xxviii. 8 RG; see the foil. word. (Ilippocr. and med. writ.; Hdt., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al.) * 6>)criVTepiov, -ου, τό, a later form for δυσιντΐρία, q. v. : Acts xxviii. 8 L Τ Tr AVH. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 518.' ε«<Γίρμήν€υτθ5, -ov, (ίρμηνήω), hard to interpret, diffi- cult of explanation : Heb. v. 1 1. (Diod. 2, 52 ; Philo de somn. § 32 fin. ; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) " δύσί? 161 δωροφορία [8«σ•ΐί, -tar, ή; Χ. α sinking or setting, esp. of the lieavenly bodies; 2. of the quarter in which the sun sets, the west : Mk. xvi. WII (rejected) ' Sliorter Conchi- sion.' (So both in sing, and in plur. : Aristot. de mund. 3 p. 393% 17 ; 4 p. 394', 21 ; Polyb. 1, 42, 5 etc.)*] 8νο•κολθ5, -ov, (κο'λοί' food); 1. prop, hard to βηά agreeable food for, fastidious about food. 2. difficult to please, always Jinding fault; (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al.). 3. univ. difficult (Xen. oec. 15, 10 η γιωρ- γία δύσκολόί ΐστι μαθ(Ίν) : ττώί 8νσκο\όν (στι, foil, by aoc. witli inf., Mk. x. 24.» StKTKoXus, adv., (δύσκολο?), [fr. Plato down], iciiA diffi- cult;/ : Mt. xix. 23 ; Mk. x. 23 ; Lk. xviii. 24.* 8νσ-μ.ή, -ης. ή. [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down], much often- er in plur. [W. § 27, 3] δνσμαί, αί, (δύω or δύνω, q. v.), sc. ήλι'ον, the setting of the sun : Lk. xii. 54 [ace. to the reading of Τ WII Tr mrg. cVl δ. may possibly be un- derstood of time (cf. W. 375 sq. (352)) ; see tVi, A. II. ; al. take the prep. locally, over, in, and give δνσμ. the meaning which follows ; see cVt, A. I. 1 b.] ; the region of sunset, the west, [anarthrous, W. 121 (115)] : Rev. xxi. 1 3 ; ίΐπό άνατοΚώιι και δυσμων, from all regions or nations, Mt. viii. 11 ; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29; in Ilebr. COU/H KUO, Josh. i. 4. Often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. on, both with and without ήλΙου* δυοτόητοϊ, -ov, (νοίω), hard to be understood : 2 Pet. iii. 16. {χρησμός, Lcian. Alex. 54; Diog. Laert. 9, 13 δυσ- νόητΰν Te καί δυσιζήγητον ; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. SlCjS].)* δυσ-ψημ^ϋ», -ώ : [pres. pass, δυσφημούμαι] ; {δνσφημος) ; Ιο use ill icords, defame ; pass, to lie defamed, 1 Co. iv. 13 'Γ WH Tr mrg. (1 Mace. vii. 41 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aes- chyl. Agam. 1078 down.)* 8\ΚΓψημ(α, -as, η, both the condition of a δΰσφημος, i. e. of one who is defamed, viz. ill-repute, and the action of one who uses opprohriaus language viz. defamation, re- proach : δια δυσφημίαί κ (νφημίας [Α. Λ^. hg eril report and good report], 2 Co. vi. 8. (1 M.acc. vii. 38 ; 3 ^lacc. ii. 26. Dion. II. 6, 48 ; Plut. de gen. Socr. § 18 p. 587 f.) • 8νω, see δύνω. 8ύ8Εκα, 01. αϊ, τπ, [fr. Hom. down], twelve : Mt. ix. 20 ; X. 1 ; [I^ Τ Tr WH in Acts xix. 7 ; xxiv. 1 1 for δβκαδύο]; Rev. vii. 5 [R G t/3'] ; xxi. 21, etc. ; at δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence : Mk. L\. 3") ; X. 32 ; xi. 11 ; Mt. x.xvi. 14. 20; Lk. xxii. 3, etc. ScoSeKaTos, -ij, -ov, twelfth : Rev. xxi. 20. [ Fr. Horn, on.]* 8ω8€κά-ψυλον, -ου, τό, (fr. δώδΐκα. and φνλη tril)e), the twelve tribes, used collectively of the Israelitish people, as consisting of twelve tribes : Acts xxvi. 7. (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 55, 6 ; Prot. Jac. c. 1, 3 ; 'λαοί 6 δωδeκάφv\os, Orac. Sibyll. Cf. δίκάφυλοί, τιτράφυλοί, Hdt. 5, 66 ; [W. 100 (95)].)• 8ΰμα, -Tot, TO, (δ(μα> to build) ; 1. a building, house, (Horn, et sqq.). 2. a part of a building, dining-room, hall, (Hom. et sqq.). 3. in the Script, equiv. to JJ, house-top, roof [λ\. 23]: Mt. .xxiv. 17; Mk. xiii. 15; Lk. V. 19; xvii. 31. The house-tops of the Orientals were (and still are) level, and were frequented not only for walking but also for meditation and prayer : Acts x. 9 ; hence fVi δωμάτων, on the house-tops, i. e. in public : jSIt. X. 27 ; Lk. .xii. 3 ; eVt to δώμα . . . κατ οφθαλμούς παιηος Ισραήλ, 2 S. xvi. 22.* Supcd, -ac, ^, (δίδωμι) ; from [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ; a gift : Jri. iv. 10 ; Acts viii. 20 ; xi. 17 ; Ro. v. 15 ; 2 Co. ix. 1 J ; Ileb. vi. 4 ; ή χάρις ΐδόθη κατά το μίτρον της δωριας τοΰ Χριστού, according to the measure in wliich Christ gave it, Eph. iv. 7 ; ivith an epexegetical gen. of the thing given, viz. τοϋ αγίου ην(ΰματος, Acts ii. 38; -x. 45; δικαιοσύνης, Ro. v. 17 [L WH Tr mrg. br. τ δωρ.]\ της χάριτος τοΰ θ(ον, Eph. iii. 7. The ace. δωριάν ( prop, as a gift, gift-wise [cf. W. 230 (216) ; B. 153 (134)]) is used adverbially ; Sept. for D3n ; a. freely, for naught, gratis, gratuitously : Mt. x. 8 ; Ro. iii. 24 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; Rev. xxi. 6; xxii. 17, (Polyb. 18,17,7; Ex. x.xi. 11 ; δωρίαν Avev αργυρίου, Is. Iii. 3). b. by a usage of which as yet no example has been noted fr. Grk. writ., without Just cause, unnecessarily. Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 5; xxxiv. (.XXXV.) 19) ; Gal. ii. 21, (Job i. 9 [?] ; Ps. xxxiv. (x.xxv.) 7 [where Symm. άΐ'αιτίως] ; so the Lat. gratuitus : Liv. 2, 42 gratuitus furor. Sen. epp. 105, 3 [bk. xviii. ep. 2, § 3] odium aut est ex offensa . . . aut gratuitum). [Syn. see δόμα, fin.] * δωρεάν, see δωρ^ά. 8ωρ<ω, -ω : Ιο present, bestow, (Hes., Find., Hdt., al.) ; pass. Lev. vii. 5 (Heb. text vs. 15). But much more frequently as depou. mid. δωρίομαι, -οϋμαι (Hom. et sqq.) : 1 aor. ίδωρησάμην ; pf. δίδώρημαι ; τιιί' Tt, Mk. xv. 45 ; 2 Pet. i. 3,4.* δώρημα, -τος, τό, (δωρίομαι) ; a gift, bounty, benefaction : Ro. V. 16 ; Jas. i. 17. ([Aeschyl.], Soph., Xen., al.) [Cf. δόμα, fin.] * δώρον, -ου, τό, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. generally for [3")p, often also for nnj"? and ΛΧνύ; a gifl,present: Eph. ii. 8; Rev. xi. 10; of gifts offered as an expression of honor, Mt. ii. 1 1 ; of sacrifices and other gifts offered to God, Mt. v. 23 sq. ; viii. 4 ; xv. 5 ; xxiii. 18 scj. ; Mk. vii. 1 1 ; Heb. v. 1 ; viii. 3 stp ; ix. 9 ; xi. 4 ; of money cast into the treasury for the jiurposes of the temple and for the support of the ])ii(ir, I.k. xxi. 1. [4]. [Syn. see δόμα, fin.] * δωροφορία, -ας. ή. (δωραφόρος bringing gifts), the offering of a gift or of gifts : Ro. χ v. 3 1 L Tr mrg. cf . διακονία, 3. (Alciphr. 1, 6 ; Pollux 4, 47 [p. 371 ed. Hemst.]; several times in eccles. writ.) • 162 Ε t6» «α, an interjection expressive of indignation, or of wonder mixed with fear, (derived apparently from the impv. pres. of the verb lav [ace. to others a natural, instinctive, sound]), freq. in the Attic poets, rare in prose writ, (as Plat. Prot. p. 314 d.), ha! ah!: Mk. i. 24 RG; Lk. iv. 34; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 32 sq.* cav ; I. a conditional particle (derived fr. ei au), which makes reference to time and to experience, introducing something future, but not determining, before the event, whether it is certainly to take place; if, in case, (Lat. si ; Germ, tcenn ; im Fall, dass ; falls ; u-ofern) ; cf ., among others, Hermann ad Viger. p. 832 ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 450sqq.;W. 291 (273) sq. It is connected 1. with the Subjunctive, according to the regular usage of the more ancient and elegant classic writers. a. with the subjunc. Present: Alt. vi. 22 (eax ουν 6 οφθαλμοί σου άπλοίί rj, if it be the case, as to which I do not know, that thine eye etc.) ; ibid. 23 ; xvii. 20 ; Lk. x. 6 ; Jn. vii. 17; viii. 54 [RGL mrg.] ; ix. 31 ; xi. 9. 10; Acts v. 38 ; xiii. 41 ; Ro. ii. 25 sq. ; 1 Co. ix. 16 ; Gal. v. 2 ; 1 Tim. i. 8 [not Lchm.]; Heb. xiii. 23; 1 Jn. i. 9; ii. 3, 15 etc. b. with the subjunc. Aorist, corresponding to the Lat. fut. perf. : lilt. iv. 9 (ea» προσκννήστ)! μοι if thou shalt have worshipped me) ; v. 46 ; ix. 21 ; Mk. iii. 24 ; ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 34 ; xvii. 4 ; xx. 28 ; Jn. v. 43 ; xi. 57 ; Ro. vii. 2; X. 9; 1 Co. vii. 8, 39: viii. 10; xvi. 10 (Jav ΐ\θη Τιμά- β(ος ; for although he was already on his way to Cor- inth, yet some hindrance might still prevent his arriv- ing) ; 2 Co. ix. 4 : Gal. vi. 1 ; Jas. ii. 2 ; 1 Jn. v. 16 [Lchm. pres.] ; Rev. iii. 20, and often ; also in the oratio obliqua, where the better Grk. writ, use the Optative : Jn. ix. 22 ; xi. 57 ; Acts ix. 2 (W. 294 (276; ; [cf. B. 224 (193)]). The difference between the Pres. and the Aor. may be seen especially from the following passages : 2 Tim. ii. 5 iau 8e και affKJj Tis, oil στfφavoΰτnt, iav μη νομιμω; άθΧηστ), 1 Co. .xiv. 2:i eav ovf συνίΧθη ή (κκλησία . . . κα\ πάντα γλώσ- σαΐΓ ΧαΚώσιν, (ΐσί\βωσί hi Ihiunat η απιστοί, vs. 24 iav δί nairret προφητΐΰωσίν, (Ισί\θτι δί τίί άπιστος, Mt. XXI. 21 iav ΐχητ( πίστιν καΐ μη 5ίακριθήτ(. Also ft (" quod per • se nihil significat praeter conditionem," Klotz 1. c. p. 455) and eav are distinguished in propositions subjoined the one to the other [W. 296 (277 S(i.)] : Jn. xiii. 17 it' ταΰτο olSaTf, μακάριοι «OTf , cav noirjTt αυτά, Jn. iii. 1 2 ; 1 Co. vii. 36 ; in statements antithetic. Acts v. 38 sq. ; or parallel, Mk. iii. 24-26. Finally, where one of the evan- gelists uses «I anotlier has tav, but so that each particle retains its own force, inasmuch as one and the same thing is differentlv conceived of by the different minds : Mk. ix.43 (av σκανίαλίζη [-λίστ/ L mrg. Τ WII txt.] ή χ(ίρ σου, and vs. 47 iav 6 οφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζτ) at, i. e. if so be that etc. ; on the other hand, Matthew, in xviii. 8 sq. and V. 29 sq. concerning the same thing says ft. c. irreg- ularly, but to be ex])lainedasan imitation of the Ilehr. DX which is also a particle of time (cf. (lesenius, Thesaur. s.v. 4), iav with the Subjunc. Aor. is used of things which the speaker or writer thinks will certainly take place, where σταν when, whenever, should have been used : iav ΰψωθα, Jn. .\ii. 32; iav ττοριυθώ, Jn. xiv. 3; fa» φανιρωθη, 1 .In. ii. 28 (LTTrWII, for όταν RG) ; iii. 2: iav άκούσητ(, Heb. iii. 7 fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8 ; (iav (Ισίλθ;μ fit τόκ νυμφώνα, Tob. vi. 17 (!•') [al. οταν~\ : iav άπύθάνω, θάψυν /If, Tob. iv. 3, cf. vs. 4 όταν άποθάνη, θάψον αυτήν ; for CK ίΐ'Λέη, Is. xxiv. 13; Am. vii. 2). d. sometimes when the particle is used with the Subj. Aor. the futurity of a thing is not so much affirmed as imagined, it being known to be something which never could happen : iav (ΐπη ά ποΟί, if the foot should say, or were to say, 1 Co. xii. 15 ; fa» (Κθω npos ίμα! ■γλώσσακ λαλώ», 1 Co. xiv. C. 2. By a somewhat negligent use, met with from the time of Aristotle on, ta» is connected also with the I n- dicative, [cf. Klotz I.e. p. 468 .«([([. ; Kiihner § 575 Anm. 5; W. 295 (277); B. 221 (191) sq.; Tilf Prolog, p. 124 .sq. ; WH. App. p. 171 ; Si>/)h. Lex. s. v.; Vin- cent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 77]; and a. with the indie. Future, in meaning akin, as is well known, to the subjunc. : [fo» δύο συμφωνήσουσιν, Alt. xviii. 19 Τ Tr] ; iav ούτοι σιωττήσουσι, Lk. xix. 40 L Γ Tr W 1 1 ; fa» . . . όδ7}γήσ(ΐ. Acts viii. 3 1 Τ Tr WH, (fa» β(βη- λώσουσι» αυτά. Lev. xxii. 9) ; but also b. with the indie. Present: iav 8a»fi'ffTi, Lk. vi. 34 Lmrg. Trtxt. ; iav στήκ^τ(, 1 Th. iii. 8 Τ Trtxt. WH; fa» re άποθνήσκομιν, Ro. .\iv. 8 Lchm. with an indie. Preterite, but one having the force of a Pres. : f a» [Lchm. 5»] οϊ8αμιν, 1 J η. V. 15 without var. 3. fd» joined with other particles; a. fo» &i και but if also, but even if, [A. V. but and if (re- tained by R. V. in 1 Co.)] ; with the Subjunc. : Mt. xviii. 17; 1 Co. vii. 11,28; 2 Tim. ii. 5. b. iav καί: Gal. vi. 1. c. iav μη if not, unless, except; with the subjunc. Present: Mt. x. 13; Lk. xiii. 3 [Lchm. txt. aor.]; Acts XV. 1 [Rec.]; 1 Co. viii. 8; ix. 16 [RG L mrg. Τ WII mrg.] ; Jas. ii. 1 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 21 ; with the subjunc. Aorist : Mt. vi. 15 ; xviii. 35 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; Jn. iii. 3 : viii. 24 ; 1 Co. xiv. 6 sq. 9 ; Ro. x. 15 ; [xi. 23 R L] ; 2 Tim. ii. 5 ; Rev. ii. 5, 22 [R L], and often, with the Indicative pres. : iav μη moTfvfTf , Jn. X. 38 Tdf. In some passages, although the particles fa» μή retain their native force of unless, if not, yet so far as the sense is concerned one may translate them but that, ii-ithout : Mt. xx\-i. 42 (the cup cannot pass bv without my drinking it) ; οΰ yap iariv κρυπτόν, iav μη φανιρωθ^ (Treg.), there is nothing hid, but that it shall eavTrep 163 Εβραΐο<{ be made manifest (properly, nothing whatever is hid, ex- cept that it should be made manifest), Mk. iv. 22 ; oOSei'i• (στιν, or άφηκ^ν οίκίαν . . . ίαν μη ^άβτ), but that shall re• ceive (properly, unless he shall receive ... it cannot be said that any one has left), Alk. x. 29, 30, [cf. B. § 149, C. On the supposed use of ίάν μή {d μή) as equiv. to άλλα, cf. Mey. on Mt. xii. 4 ; Gal. i. 7 ; ii. IG ; Fritzsche on Ro. xiv. 14 fin. ; Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 11. cc. See ei, ΠΙ. 8 c. /3.] d. (ainrep [L Tr separately, iav wfp] if only, if indeed : Ileb. iii. ti (where L br. π(ρ, and Ϊ Tr AVH ,read eofV 14 ; vi. 3 ; it occurs neither in the Sept. nor in the O. T. Apocr. ; on its use in Grk. writ. cf. Klotz, 1. c. I p. 483 sq. e. tmiTt . . . eaV τί, sice . . . sive, whether . . . or : Ro. xiv. 8 ; (often in Sept. for DK . . . DS, as Ex. xix. 13; Lev. iii. 1 ; Deut. xviii. 3). Cf. Klotz, 1. c. p. 479 sq.; KUhner § 541 ; [B. 221 (191)]. f. καν for και eav, see κάν. II. The classic use of the conditional par- ticle ίάν also in the contracted form άν (see p. 34'' above) seems to have led the biblical writers of both Testaments to connect fan with relative pronouns and adverbs in- stead of the potential particle άν, as os f άν [so Tdf. in 12 places], ο eav [so Tdf. uniformly], etc. (this use among prof. writ, is very doubtful, cf. W. p. 310 (291); B. 72 (63)) : Mt. V. 19 ; x. 14 [R G] ; xv. 5 ; Mk. vi. 22 sq. ; Lk. Lx. 48 [WII Sv'] : xvii. 33 ; Acts vii. 7 [R G T] ; 1 Co. vi. 18; Eph. vi. 8 [RGLt.xt.]; 3 Jn. 5, etc.; όπου fav, Mt. viii. 19 ; xxvi. 13 ; Mk. vi. 10 [L Tr ήν]. οσάκις (άν. Rev. xi. 6. οί eav, 1 Co. xvi. 6 (1 Mace. vi. 3G). κα66 (άν, 2 Co. viii. 1 2 [Tdf. άν ; οστί! Ιάν, Gal. v. 1 Τ Tr WH ; ijris (άν. Acts iii. 23 Tdf. For many other exx. see Soph. Lex. s. v. (άν, 3.] In many places the codd. vary between (άν and &/; cf. άν, Π. p. 34 ; [and esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96]. cav-ircp, see (άν, I. 3 d. «αντοϋ, -r)s, -ov, etc. or (contracted) αίτον, -^t, -av. (see p. Ν7): plur. (αυτών; dat. -ois, -ais, -ois, etc.; reflexiie pronoun of the 3d person. It is used 1. of the 3d pers. sing, and plur., to denote that the agent and the person acted on are the same ; as, σώζ(ΐν (αυτόν, Mt. xxvii. 42; Mk. xv. 31 ; Lk. xxiii. 35; i\\roiv (αυτόν, Mt. xxili. 12, etc. (αυτω, (αυτόν are also often added to middle verbs : Βκμίρίσαντο eairroir, Jn. xix. 24 (Xen. mem. 1, 6, 13 ποκΊσθαι (αυτω φίλοι/) ; cf. W. § 38, 6 ; [Β. § 135, 6]. Of the phrases into which this pronoun enters we notice the following : άφ' ίαυτοΰ, see από, Π. 2 d. aa. ; di (αιτΓοϋ of itself, i. e. in its own nature, Ro. xiv. 14 [Tr L txt. read αϋτ.^ ; ίν (αντώ, see in 8ια\ογίζ(σθαι. λίγΕίν, (Ιπ(^ν. (Is (αυτόν (ρχίσθαι to come to one's self, to a better mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Diod. 13, 95). καθ' (αυτόν hij one's self, alone : Acts xxviii. 16 ; Jas. ii. 1 7. παρ' ίαντώ. by him i. e. at his home, 1 Co. xvi. 2 (Xen. mem. 3, 13, 3). προί (αυτόν, to himself i. e. to his home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G ; Τ om., WH (hut with air.) reject, L Tr (hut the latter with αντ.) br., the verse]; Jn. xx. 10 [T Tr αιτ. (see αύτοϋ)] ; with [cf. our ίο] himself i. e. in his own mind, προσ(νχ(σθαι, Lk. χ viii. 11 [Tdf. om.], (2 Mace. xi. 13) ; in the gen., joined with a noun, it has the force of a pos- sessive pronoun, as τους (αυτών vixpois : Mt. viii. 22 ; Lk. ix. 60. 2. It serves as reflexive also to the 1 st and 2d pers., as often in classic Greek, when no ambiguity is thereby occasioned ; thus, (v ίαυτοΊς equiv. to iv ήμίν αν- τοΪΓ, Ro. viii. 23 ; (aurovs equiv. to ήμάί αΰτοΰί, 1 Co. ,\i. 31 ; άφ' (αυτοϋ i. q. άπό σ(αυτοϋ [read by L Tr VV'H], Jn. xviii. 34 ; ίαντόν i. q. σ(αυτόν [read by L Τ Tr WH], Ro. xiii. 9 ; eatrrois for ΙμΊν ai/Toit, Mt. xxiii. 3 1 , etc. ; cf . Mat^ thiae § 489 H. ; W. § 22, 5 ; [B. § 127, 15]. 3. It is used frequently in the plural for the reciprocal pronoun αλλήλων, άλλήλοΐί, άλλήλουΓ. reciprocally, mutually, one another: Mt. xvi. 7; .xxi. 38 ; Mk. x. 26 [Trmrg. WH αΰτόν'\ ; xvi. 3 ; Lk. xx. 5 ; Eph. iv. 32 : Col. iii. 13, 16 ; 1 Pet.iv. 8, 10; see Matthiae § 489 IIL ; Kuhnerii. p.497 sq. ; Bnhdy. p. 273; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 13]. ί'άω, -ω ; impf. ("ιων ; fut. (άσω ; 1 aor. ("υισα ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to allow, permit, let : foil, by the inf., ουκ άν (ϊασ( διορυγ}ναι [Τ Tr WH -χθηναιΊ, Mt. xxiv. 43 ; by the ace. of the person and the inf., Lk. iv. 41 (οίκ da αίτά λαλίΐν); Acts xiv. 16; xxiii. 32; .xxvii. 32; xxviii. 4 ; 1 Co. X. 13; by the ace. alone, when the inf. is easily supplied from the context, ουκ (ΐασ(ν αυτούς, sc. πορ(νθί}ναι. Acts xvi. 7 ; οίκ (ϊων αυτόν, sc. (ΐσ(λ6(Ίν, Acts χΐχ. 30 ; [cf. AV. 476 (444)]. 2. Ttvd, to suffer one to do what he wi.shes, not to restrain, to let alone : Rev. ii. 20 Rec. ; Acts v. 38 R G ; (άτ( sc. airrois, is spoken by Christ to the apostles, meaning, ' do not resist them, let them alone,' (the fol- lowing (ως τούτου is to be separated from what precedes ; [al. connect the words closely, and render ' suffer them to go even to this extreme ' ; but cf. Mey. ad loc. ed. AVeiss]), Lk. xxii. 51. 3. To give up, let go, leave : τάς αγκύρας . . . (ίων (ΐς την θάλασσαν, they let down into the sea [i. e. abandoned ; cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 3009' hot.], Acts xxvii. 40. [CoMP. : προσ-ίάω.]* ίβ8ο(ΐήκοντο, οί. αϊ, τά, [fr. Hdt. down], seventy: Acts vii. 14 [here Jiec.'^' (βδομηκονΓαπ(ντ(~\; xxiii. 23 ; xxvii. 37 ; οί (βδομήκοντα \_(βδ- δύο L br. AA'H br.], the seventy disciples whom Jesus sent out in addition to the twelve apostles : Lk. x. 1, 17. [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Seventy Dis- ciples.] * [€βδομ.ηκοντ(Μ'ξ for (,ίδομήκοντα (ξ, seventy-six: Acts xxvii. 37 Rec.*J (βεομηκοντάκΐΐ, [Gen. iv. 24], seventy limes : ίβ&ομηκον- τάκις (πτά, seventy times seven limes, i. e. countless times, Mt. xviu. 22 [cf. W. § 37, 5 Note 2 ; B. 30 (26) and see (πτά, fin. ; al. (cf. R. V. mrg.) seventy-seven limes, see Mey. ad loc.].* [ίβ8ομ.ηκοντα-ΐΓ€'ντί, seventy-fve : .Acts vii. 14 Rec."» (^Gen. XXV. 7 ; Ks.. xxxix. 6 (xxxviii. 27) ; 1 Esdr. v. Γ2).•] Ι'β£ομ.οΐ, Τ}, -ov, seventh : Jn. iv. 52; Heb. iv. 4 ; Jude 14 ; Rev. viii. 1 ; xi. 15, etc. [From Hom. down.] Έβί'ρ [R" G], more correctly [L Τ AA'H] 'Έβ(ρ [on the accent in codd. see Tdf Proleg. p. 103 ; Treg. "Εβ., cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 107; WH. Intr. § 408 ; cf. B. D. s. v. Heber], ό, Eber or Heber, indeclinable proper name of a Hel)rew : Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24 sq.).* Έβραϊκίϊ, -ή. -όν, Hebrew: Lk. xxiii. 38 (R G L br. Tr mrs. br.).* Έβραΰ)? [WH 'Έ.βρ., see their Intr. § 408], -ου, ό, α ' Εβραίς 164 eyyi"? Hebrew ('13j> a name first given to Abraham, Gen. xiv. 13, afterwards transferred to his posterity descended from Isaae and Jaeob ; by it in tlie (). 'Γ. the Israelites are bolli distinguished from and desii;nated by foreign- ers, as afterwards by I'aiisan., I'hilaruli, al. The name is now generally derived from "15;• for '^'Π^'ΤΙ ι^^• i. e. 0/ the region beyond the Euphrates, whence "^Z)!, e(iuiv. to one who comes from the region beyond the Euphrates; Gen. xiv. 13 Sept. ό π(ράτη{• Cf. Gesenius, Gesch. d. hebr. Sprache u. Schrift, p. 11 sq. ; Thesaurus, ii. p. 987; Knoliel, A'olkertafel der Genesis, p. 17(i sqq.; Bleek; Einl. in d. Λ. T. ed. 1, p. 73 sq. [Eng. trans, i. 7i) pcj.] ; [13. D. s. v. Hebrew. For Syn. see'louSaios.]). In the N. T. 1. any one of the Jewish or Israelitish nation : 2 Co. xi. 22; Phil. iii. 5. (In this sense Eiiseb. Ii. e. 2, 4, 3 calls Philo, the Alexandrian Jew, Έβμα'ίος, although his education was (Ireek, and he had little [if any] knowledge even of the Hebrew language; and in Praep. evang. 8, 8, 34 he applies the same viord to Aristobulus, who was both an Alexandrian, and a Greek-speaking Jeiv.) 2. In a nar- rower sense those are called ΈβμαΙυι who lived in Pales- tine and used the language of the «oiuitry, i. e. Chaldee ; from whom are distinguished oi Έλληΐ'ΐσταί, (ρ v. That name adhered to them even after tbcy had gone over to Christianity : Acts vi. 1. (Philo in his de conf.lingg.§26 makes a contrast between 'E/3p(uoi and ήμfΐς•. and in his de eongr. erud. grat. § 8 he calls («reek 17 ήμ(τ(ρη &ίαΚ(κτος. Hence in this sense he does not reckon himself as a He- brew.) 3. All Jewish Christians, whether they spoke Aramaic or Greek, ecpiiv. to πιστοί f| Εβραίων ; so in the heading of the E[iistle to the Hebrews; called by Euseb. h. e. 3, 4, 2 01 f| Εβραίων ovTft. [Cf. A'. Wicseler, Unters. ii. d. Ilebriicrbrief, 2te Ilalfte. Kiel, 1861, pp. 25-30.]• Έβραίϊ [AVII Έβρ., see their Intr. § 408], -iSos, ψ He- Ortii•, the Ilebreiv language; not that however in which the (). T. was written, but the Chaldee (not Syro-Chal- daic, as it is commonly but incorrectly called; cf. A. Th. Hoffmann, Grammat. Syriac. p. 14), which at tlie time of Jesus and the apostles had long superseded it in Palestine: Actsxxi. 40; xxii. 2; xxvi. 14; 'ΐ.βραΊς φωνή, 4 Mace. xii. 7; xvi. 15. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Shemitic Lan- guages etc. ; ib. Am. ed. s. ν . Lang, of the New Test.] * Έβραϊο -TC [WH 'Έ,βρ., see their Intr. § 408], adv., [ίβραΐζω). III f/chreir, i. e. in Chaldee (see the foregoing word and reff.) : Jn. v. 2; xix. 13, 17, 20; [xx. 16 TTr ΛνΐΙ Lbr.]; Rev. \\.\\; .xvi. 16. [Sir. prol. Hne 13.]• ί'γγίζω; \m\ii. ήγγιζον: Attic fut. tyyiw (.las. iv. 8 [Bttm. 37 (32); W. § 13, 1 c.]) ; 1 aor. ^yyio-a ; pf. ηγγικα; (cyyus) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on ; Sept. for U^J3 and 31p. 1. trans, to bring near, to Join one thing to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7 ; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v. 8. 2. intrans. lo ilraw or come near, to approach ; absol., Mt. xxi. 34: Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28; xxii. 1; xxiv. 1.'); Acts vii. 17; xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [Heb. x. 25] ; pf. 7yy«< has come nigh, is at hand : ή βασιλ. τοΰ θίοϋ, Mt. iii. 2 ; iv. 1 7 ; χ. 7 ; Mk. i. 15 ; Lk. x. 1 1 ; with the addition (φ' υμάς, vs. 9 ; η ίρημωσκ, Lk. xxi. 20 : ή ωρα, Mt. xxvi. 45 ; ό παραδώονι /if, Mt. xxvi. 46 ; [Mk. xiv. 42 (where Tdf. ήγγισίν)]; 6 xaipus, Lk. xxi. 8; ή ήμί'ρα, Κο. xiii. 12 ; το τΛογ, 1 Pet. iv. 7 ; η παρουσία roi κνμίυυ, J as. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the i)erson or the place approached : Lk. vii. 12; xv. 1, 25; xxii. 47; Acts ix. 3 ; X. 9 ; xxii. 6 ; eyyifdi» τω Θ(<λ (in Sept. used esp. of the priests entering the teuqile to olfer sacrifices or to perform other ministrations there, Ex. xix. 22 ; xxxiv. 30 ; Lev. X. 3, etc.) : to worship God, Mt. xv. 8 Rec, fr. Is. xxix. 13 ; to turn one's thoughts to God, to become ac- (piainted with him, Ileb. vii. 19 ; Jas. iv. 8 ; ό fltor fyyi'f« Tii/i, God draws near to one in the bestowment of his grace and help, Jas. iv. 8. Foil, by f is and the ace. of the place : Mt. xxi. 1 ; Mk. xi. 1 ; Lk. xviii. 35 ; xix. 29 ; xxiv. 28; [foil, by προί w. the dat., Lk. xix. 37, see P. § 147,28; al. regard this as a pregn. constr., cf. W. §§ 48, e. ; 66, 2 d.] ; μίχρι θανάτου ήγγισί, to draw nigh unto, be at the pointof, death, Phil.ii. 30 {ίγγίζαν ιΐς θάνατον, Λ t>h \-a\ni. 22) ; with an adv. of place, όπου κΚίπτης ουκ (γγίζίΐ, Lk. xii. 33. [COMP. : πpnσ-fyyίfω.] * [ϊγγκΓτο. neut. plur. superl. (fr. (γγία) as adv., nearest, next: WH (rejected) mrg. in IMk. vi. 36 (al. κΟ/Λω).•] «γ-γράψω [Τ WH evyp., see tv. III. 3]: pf. jiass. (γγί- γραμμαι ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; to engrai:e ; m- scrilic, write in or 071 : τί, pass, with dat. of the means [wiV/i] and foil, by iv with dat. of the place (in minds, tablets), 2 Co. iii. 2, 3 ; to record, enrol : τα ονόματα, pass. Lk. X. 20 Τ Tr WH. * ?γγυθ5. -ου, ό, η. a surety, (Cic. and Vulg. sponsor) : κρύττονοί ^ίαθήκης ίγγυος, he by whom we get full assur- ance of the more excellent covenant made by God with us, and of the truth and stability of the promises con- nected with it, Ileb. vii. 22. (2 Mace. x. 28 ; Sir. xxix. 15s(i. Xen. vect. 4, 20 ; Aeschin. Epp. 11, 12 p. 128 a. ; Aristot. occ. 2, 22 [vol. ii. p. ΓΊ.ΟΟ•, 19], Polyb., Diod., al.)* iyyii, adv., (fr. ev and γυΐοκ [limb, hand], at hand ; [but rather allied w. «γχι. όγχω. anxius, anguish, etc. ; see Curtius § 166 ; Vaniiek p. 22]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for 311 ρ ; near; 1. of Place and posit ion ; a. prop. : absol. Jn. xix. 42, [cf. also 20 G L Τ Tr WH (but see below)]; with gen. (Matthiae §339, 1 p. 812; W. 195 (183) ; [471 (439) ; B. § 132, 24]), Lk. xix. 11 ; Jn. iii. 23; vi. 19,23; xi. 18,54; xix. 20 [Rec, but see above]; Acts i. 12 : with dat. (Matthiae § 386, 6 ; Kiihner § 423, 13; [Jelf § 592, 2]), Acts ix. 38; xxvii. 8. b. trop- ically; oi eyy^^' t''o^e ^^i" ^i"" near of access to God i. e. Jews, and oi μακράν, those who are alien from the true God and the blessings of the theocracy, i. e. Gentiles : Eph. ii. 1 7 (cf. Is. Ivii. 19) ; iyyis ■γίνισθαι, to he brought near, sc. to the blessings of the kingdom of God, Eph. ii. 13, (so with the Rabbins not infrefpiently lo male nigh is eipiiv. to to male η proselyte, cf. Wetstcin ad I.e.; [Srhiiltgen. Ilorae etc. i. 761 sq. : Vnlrl: Schol. i. 363]); eyyis σου το ρημά ίστιν. near thee i. e. at hand, already, as it were, in thy mind. Ro. x. 8 fr. Deut. xxx. 14, [cf. B. § 129, 11; W. 465 (4.34)]. 2. of Time; concern- ing things imminent and soon to come to pass : Mt. xxiv. 32"; xxvi. 18; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30, 31 ; Jn. ii. 13; vi. 4 ; vii. 2 ; xi. 55 ; Rev. i. 3 ; xxii. 10 ; of the near ad- tyyvrepov 165 eyKaivia Tent of persons : ό κύριος (yyis, of Christ's return from heaven, Phil. iv. 5 (in anotlier sense, of God in Ps. cxliv. (cxlv.) 18) ; with the addition ίη'ι θύραις, at the door, Mt. xxiv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. 29 ; i'yyis κατάρας, near to being cursed, Heb. vi. 8 ; αφανισμού, soon to vanish, Heb. viii. 13.• ίγγύτ€ρον, neut. of the compar. ίγγύτ(ρος (fr. ι-γγύς), used adverbially, nearer: Ro. xiii. 11.* «Yctpu ; fut. iyfpii ; 1 aor. ήγαρα ; Pass., pres. eyfipo- μαι, impv. 2 pers. sing, iyfipnv (Mil. ii. 9 Tr WH), Lk. viii. 54 (where L Tr Wll (ydpt), 2 pers. plur. eyfipfaOc, pf. cy^yeppai; 1 aor. rjyipdqv [cf. B. 52 (45); W. § 38, 1]; 1 fut. €γ(ρθήσομαι; Mid., 1 aor. impv. tyeipat Rec. ; but, after good codd., Grsb. has in many pass, and lately L Τ Tr Wll have everywhere in the N. T. restored fyfipf , pres. act. impv. used intransitively and employed as a formula for arousing ; properly, rise, i. e. up ! come ! cf. ayf, so in Eur. Iph. A. 624; Arstph.ran.340; cf. Fritzsche onMk. p. 55; [B. 56 (49), 144 (126) sq. ; Kuhner§373, 2]; Sept. generally for Τ^|Π and D'pn ; to arouse, cause to rise ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Homer down, to arouse from sleep, to awake : Acts xii. 7 ; [Mk. iv. 38 Τ Tr WH] ; pass, to he awaked, ivake up, [A. V. arise, often including thus the subseq. action (cf. 3 below)] : Mt. xxv. 7 ; Mk. iv. 27; \anh τού ύπνον, Mt. i. 24 L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ] ; ίy(pβeiς with the impv. Mt. ii. 13, 20 ; with a finite verb, Mt. ii. 14, 21 ; viii. 26 ; [Lk. viii. 24 R G L Tr mrg.] ; iyelpeaOe, Mt. xxvi. 46 ; Mk. xiv. 42. ΛIetaph. c| ΰπνον €γ€ρθψ'αι, to arise from a state of moral sloth to an active life devoted to God, Ro. xiii. 11 : likewise tyeipt [Rec. -pai] arise, 6 καθ(ύδων, Eph. v. 14. 2. to arouse front the sleep of death, to recall the dead to life : with νικρούς added, Jn. v. 21 ; Acts xxvi. 8 ; 2 Co. i. 9. tyeipe [Rec. -pai] arise, Mk. v. 41 ; pass, iyflpov, Lk. viii. 54 [R G T] , iyipθητι, arise from death, Lk. vii. 14 ; iydpovrai ot vcKpoi, Mt. xi. 5; Lk. vii. 22 ; xx. 37; 1 Co. xv. 15, 16, 29, 32, (Is. .xxvi. 19); eydpeiv (K vexprnu, from the company of the dead [cf. W. 1 23 ( 1 1 7 ) : B. 89 ( 78 )], Jn. xii. 1,9; Acts iii. 1 5 ; iv. 10; xiii. 30; Ro. iv. 24: viii. 11 ; x. 9; Gal. i. 1 ; Eph. i. 20 ; Col. ii. 12 ; 1 Th. i. 10 ; Heb. xi. 19 ; 1 Pet. i. 21 ; pass., Ro. vi. 4, 9 ; vii. 4 ; 1 Co. xv. 12, 20 ; Jn. ii. 22 ; xxi. 14 ; Mk. vi. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. (κ ν^κρ.] ; Lk. ix. 7 ; [Mt. xvii. 9 L Τ Tr WH txt.] ; άπο των νικρών, Mt. xiv. 2 ; xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 7, {vcKpov e'lc θανάτου κα\ ϊξ άδου, Sir. xlviii. 5; for T'pD, 2 K. iv. 31); iyelpciv sim])ly: Acts V. 30; X.40; xiii. 37; 1 Co. vi. 14; 2θυ. iv. 14; pass., Mt. xvi. 21 ; xvii. 23 [L WH mrg. άναστήσ(τιιι'\ : [xx. 19 Τ Tr txt. WH txt.]; xxvi. 32; xxvii. 63: Mk. [vi. 16 Τ WH (see above)] ; xvi. 6 ; Lk. xxiv. 6 [WII reject the clause], 34 ; Ro. iv. 25 ; 1 Co. xv. 4, etc. 3. in later usage gen- erally to cause to rise, rnise, from a seat, bed, etc. ; pass, and mid. to rise, arise ; used a. of one sitting : c'yf i- p€Tai [LTr W^H r|yfpθη'] ταχύ. Jn.xi. 29, cf. vs. 20; pres. act. imperative eyeipe (see above), Mk. .x. 49 [not Rec], cf. vs. 46 ; hence (like tlie Ilebr. Dip, Gen. xxii. 3 ; 1 Chr. xxii. 1 9), in the redundant manner spoken of s. v. ανίστημι, ΤΙ. 1 c. it is used before verbs of going, etc. : eyfpifif ήκο\ούθ(ΐ [^-ησιν R G] αΰτω, ΛΙΐ. ix. 19 ; eycipf [R G -pai] κα\ μίτρησον, Rev. xi. 1. b. of one reclining : tydptTai (K τού fieiVyou, Jn. xiii. 4 ; ('γ(ίρ(σθ€, Jn. xiv. 31. c. of one lying, to raise up : ήγίίριν αυτόν, Acts χ. 26 ; (γίρθητψ arise, Mt. xvii. 7 ; iyfipi (see above) Acts iii. 6 [L Tr txt. br.] ; ηy^pθη άπο της γης he rose from the earth. Acts ix. 8 ; to [raise up i. e.] draw out an animal from a pit, Mt. xii. 11. d. of one 'down' with disease, lying sick: act., Mk. ix. 27 ; Acts iii. 7; eytpd αντον ή κύριος, will cause hiui to recover, Jas. v. 15; j)ass. Mt. viii. 15, (yfipf ([Rec. -pat, so Grsb. (doubtfully in Mt.)], see above) arise : Mt. ix. 5 ; Jn. v. 8 ; Acts iii. 6 [T WH om. Tr br.]. 4. To raise up, produce, cause to appear ; a. to cause to appear, bring before the public (any one who is to attract the attention of men) : rjyeipf τώ 'ίσραηΧ σωτήρα, Acts xiii. 23 Rec. ; ήγαρ^ν αύτυΐς τύν Δαν^ΐδ (Ις βασιλία, Acts xiii. 22 (so D'pn, Judg. ii. 18 ; iii. 9, 15) ; pass. (γ(!ρομαι, to come before the public, to appear, arise : Mt. xi. 1 1 ; xxiv. 11, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Lk. vii. 16 ; Jn. vii. 52 [cf. W. 266 (250); B. 204 (177)]; contextually, to appear before a judge : Mt. xii. 42; Lk. .xi. 31. b. ίπΐ τίνα to raise up, incite, stir up, against one ; pass, to rise against : Mt. .xxiv. 7 ; Mk. xiii. 8 ; Lk. .xxi. 10. o. to raise up i. e. cause to be born : τίκνα τινί, ^It. iii. 9 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; κΐρας σωτηρίας, Lk. i. 69 (see ανίστημι, I. C. ΐξανίστημι, 1) ; ΘΚίψιν τοις 8(σμοϊς μου, to cause affliction to arise to my bonds, i. e. the misery of my imprisonment to be increased by trib- ulation, Phil. i. 16 (17) L TTr WH. d. of buildings, to raise, construct, erect : τον ναόν, Jn. ii. 19 sq. (so D'pn, Deut. xvi. 22; 1 K. xvi. 32. Aelian. de nat. an. 11, 10; Joseph, antt. 4. 6, 5 ; Hdian. 3, 15, 6 [3 ed. Bekk.]; 8,2,12 [5 ed. Bekk.] ; Lcian. Pseudomant. § 19 ; Anthol. 9, 696. 1 Esdr. V. 43 ; Sir. xlix. 13 ; Lat. excito turrem, Caes. b. g. 5, 40 ; sepulcrum, Cic. legg. 2, 27, 68). [Ammonius : ava- στήναι κα\ ίγιρθηναι 8ιαφίρ(ΐ• άναστήναι μίν yap en't tpyov, iyf ρθήναι δί e^ νπνου: cf. also Thorn. ^Jag. ed. Ritschl p. 14, 10 scj. But see exx. above. Comp. : δι-, ίξ-, 67Γ-, σνν-€γ€ίρω.~\ cYcptris, -€ως, ψ {ίγίίρω), α rousing, excitation : τον θνμην. Plat. Tim. p. 70 c. ; a rising up, Ps. cxxxviii. (cxxxix.) 2; resurrection irom death: ^!t. xxvii. 53.* «γκάβίτοϊ [Τ WH ivK; see fv. III. 3], -ου, ό, η, (e'yicaflt- ι;;ιιι [to send down in (secretly)]), suborned to lie in wait; a lier-in-wait, spy, [cf. Lat. insidiator; Eng. insid- ious^ : used in Lk. xx. 20 of one who is suborned by others to entrap a man by crafty words. (Plat. Ax. p. 368 e. ; Dem. p. 1483, 1 ; Joseph, b. j. 6, 5, 2; Polyb. 13, .5, l,al. ; Sept.. Job [xix. 12]; xxxi. 9.)* cYKaCvia [T WII ίνκ-, see ev. III. 3], -ων, τά, (fr. iv and καινός) ; only in bibl. and eccl. writ., [on tlie plur. cf. W. §27,3; B. 23 (21)]; dedication, consecration•, thus in 2 Esdr. vi. 16, 17; Neh. xii. 27 for Π3^Π ; in particular, [Vulg. encaenium i. e. renovation'}, an annual feast cele- brated eight days beginning on tlie 25tli of Chislev (mid- dle of our December), instituted by Judas Maccaljaeus [b. C. 164] in memory of the cloansingof the temple from the pollutions of Antioclius Epiphancs (αί ήμίραι e'yicai- νισμον τον θυσιαστηρίου, 1 ^lacc. iv. 59) : Jn. .\. 22. Cf. Win. RWB. ra.so Kiehm, HWB.] s. v. Kirchweihfest ; ΐ'γκαινίζίο 166 eyKpareia Oehler in llerzog iv. p. 3S9; Grimm on 1 Mace. i. 54 ; iv. 52; Dillmaiin in Sjcliuiikel iii. i>'ii sq. ; [BB.DU. (esp. Kitto) s. V. Dcditaiiuii, Feast of tht•].' €γ-καινίζω [Τ W'il ΐνκ.^ sec (v^ III. 3J : 1 aor. (ν(καΙνισα\ pf. pass. ϊγκ(κιιίΐΊσμαι ; a word exclusively bibl. and eccl. [\V. 33]; la iiiii ; pass. 2 Co. iv. 9; after the Ilebr. 3;;• with 7, Ttva fit αδου [or αδτ)!/], by forsaking one to let him "O into Hades, abandon unto Hades, Acts ii. 27, 31 (not R). to deserl,forsalce : τινά, 2 Tim. iv. 1 0, 1 6 ; tiji/ ίπισυνα-γωγην, Heb. X. 25. 2. to leave behind among, to leave surviv- ing: ήμ'ιν σττίρμα, Ro. ix. 29 fr. Is. i. 9. (Hes. opp. 376; Thuc, .s [Τ WII ivK-, see iv, III. 3] : 1 aor. iveKei>- τρισα ; Pass., 1 aor. iveκ(vτpίσθηv ; 1 fut. {γκΐντρισθησομαι ; lo cut into for the sahe if inserting a scion; lo inorulale, ingraft, graft in, (Aristot. ap. Athen. 14, (i8 [p. 653 d.] ; Theophr. h. p. 2, 2, 5 ; Antonin. 1 1, M) : τινά, llo. xi. 17, 19, 23, 24 [cf. W. §52, 4,5]; in these pass. Paul likens the heatlien who by becoming Christians have been ad- mitted into fellowship with the people for whom the Messianic salvation is destined, to scions from wild trees inserted into a cultivated stock ; [cf. Beet on vs. 24 ; B. D. s. V. Olive].• «γκλημα [see f μ. III. 3], -rot, to, (eyxaXeiu), accusation: the crime of which one is accused. Acts xxv. 1 6 ; (γκΧημα (χ(ΐν, to have laid to one's charge, be accused of a crime, Acts xxiii. 29. (Often in Attic writ. fr. Soph, and Thuc. on.)• [Syn. see κατη•γορ4ω\ cf. Isoc. 16, 2 τάϊ μ^ν yap StKas ί /vip των 15ίων ^ y κ Krj μάτ ω ν Kayxayovai, τάί δέ KaT-qyo- pias ίιτΓΐρ των τηί TTOAews ^Γpayμάτωv ττοιοΰνται, καΐ πλεΐ» χρόνον 5ιατρί$ουσί rhv πατίρα μου δ ια β ά\Κο ντ € s ί) ίίτλ.] €γ-κομ.βόομιαι [sec εκ.ΙΙΙ. 3], -ονμαι : [1 aor. mid. ivtKop• βωσάμην^; (fr. fV and κομβόω Xo knot, tie, and tliis fr. κόμβος knot, band, (Germ. Schleife), by which two things are fastened together), lo fasten or gird on one's self; the ίγκόμβωμα was the white scarf or apron of slaves, which vras fastened to the girdle of the vest [cfu/it't], and dis- tinguished slaves from freemen ; hence 1 Pet. v. 5 την ταηιινοφρ. (γκομβώσασθι, gird yourselves with humility as your servile garb ((-γκόμβωμα) i. e. by putting on humil- ity show your subjection one to another. That this idea lies in the phrase is shown by C. F. A. Frilzsche, withliis usual learning, in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p. 259 styi.' «γ-κοιτή [WII ivK• Τ fKK-, see iv. III. 3], -^t, f), (iyKO-rrTw), properly, a cutting (made in the road to impede an en- emy in pursuit [(?)], hence), a hindrance: 1 Co. ix. 12. (Diod. 1, 32 ; Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 157, 15 (22) ; Longin. de sublim. 41, 3 ; [al.].)* ίγ-κόιττω [in Acts Τ WII ivK., so Τ in 1 Pet. where R iKK.; see iv. III. 3] ; 1 aor. ivtKoi^ra; Pass., [pres. ίγκόητο- μαι] ; impf. iυtκoπτόμηv ; lo cut into, lo impede one's course hg culling off his way; hence univ. /« hinder (Ilesych. : iμπo8ίζω, διακωλΰω) ; with dat. of the obj., Polyb. 24, 1, 12; in the N. T. with ace. of the obj.. 1 Th. ii. 18; foil, by inf.. Gal. v. 7 (see ανακόπτω) ; inf. preceded by τοϋ, Ro. XV. 22 ; fit TO μη (γκόπτισθαι ras προσ(νχαί νμων, that ye be not hindered from praying (together), 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; i. q. to detain [A. V. lo be tedious unU)] one. Acts χχίτ. 4 [cf. Valcken. Schol. i. 600 sq.].• <γκράτ»α [see iv. III. 3], -at, η, (ίγκρατη!), self-control. βΎκρατΐνομαι 167 έΒαφίζο} Lat. continentia, temperantia, (the virtue of one who mas- ters his desires and passions, especially his sensual ap- petites) : Acts xxiv. 25; Gal. v. 23 (22); 2 Pet. i. 6. (Xen., Plat., sqq. ; Sir. .xviii. 29; 4 Mace. v. 34.)* «γκρατίίομαι [see iv, III. 3] ; depon. mid. ; to be self- controlled, continent ((γκρατήί) ; to exhibit self-government, conduct one's self temperately : [used absol. Gen. xliii. 30] ; with dat. of respect, r^ ■γΚώσση, Sir. xix. 6 var. ; πάντα, in everything, every way, 1 Co. Lx. 25 (in a figure drawn from athletes, who in preparing themselves for the games abstained from unwholesome food, wine, and sexual indulgence) ; ονκ (γκρατ(ύ(σθαι. said of those who cannot curb sexual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. Thougli this word does not occur in the earlier Grk. writ, that have come down to us [exc. in Aristot. eth. Eudem. 2, 7 p. 1223', 13 ed. Bekk.], yet its use is approved of by Phry- niehus ; of. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442 ; [W. 25].* ίγκρατήϊ [see iv. III. 3], -e's, (/c/jiiros) ; 1. prop, equiv. to ό tV lepUTit ων, strong, robust : Aeschyl., Thuc, sqq. 2. having power over, possessed of (a thing), with a gen. of the object ; so fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down. 3. mastering, controlling, curbing, restraining : αφροδισίων, Xen. mem. 1, 2, 1 ; ηδονής, ibid. 4, 5, 10 ; iavroi. Plat. ; absol. (without a gen.), controlling one's self, temperate, continent, ([Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 4 p. IHG', 10 sqq.]; Sir. xxvi. 15 ; Sap. viii. 21 ; Philo de Jos. § 11) : Tit. i. 8.* ty-Kptvu [T WH ivK; see iv. III. 3] : [1 aor. iveKptva^ ; to reckon among, judge among : τινά τινι, to judge one worthy of being admitted ίο a certain class [A. V. to number with'], 2 Co. x. 12. (From Xen. and Plato down.) * ίγ-κρίτΓτω : 1 aor. iveKpv\j/a ; to conceal in something, t1 i'ls- Ti (Diod. 3, 63 ; ApoUod. 1, 5, 1 § 4) ; conte.xtually, to mingle one thing with another : Mt. .xiii. 33 ; Lk. .xiii. 21 here Τ Tr WH ίκρυψιν. (τι τινι, Horn. Od. 5, 488.) * £γκυθ5 [WH fVK-, see iv. III. 3.], -ov, for the more usual iγκvμωv, (fr. iv and κύω), big with child, pregnant: Lk. ii. 5. (Hdt. 1, 5 etc. ; Diod. 4, 2 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 33.)* ί'γ-χρίω [see iv, ΠΙ. 3] : 1 aor. act. impv. ΐγχρισον, mid. (in Γ Tr) ίγχρισαι [but L WH 1 aor. act. infin. (γχρΊσαι (Grsb. iyxpiaai ; cf. Veitch s. v. χρίω, tin.)] ; to rub in, besmear, anoint ; Mid. to anoint for one's self: Toir οφθαλ- μούς. Rev. iii. 18 [cf. Bttm. 149 sq. (131) ; W. § 32, 4 a.]. (Tob. vi. 9 ; xi. 7 ; Strab., Anthol., Epict., al.)* ί'γώ, gen. ipoi, enclitic μοϋ : dat. e'^oi, enclitic ^oi ; ace. ipi, enclitic μι ; phir. ήμ(1ς, etc. ; personal pronoun, /. 1. The nominatives iyώ and ήμ(ΐί, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 8 ; Lk. iii. 16 (iya> μίν . . . 6 8e) ; Alt. iii. 14 (iyai . . . ίχω. και σύ) ; v. 22, 28, 39, and often ; ήμίϊί, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ήμ(Ϊ! κ. ol Φαρι- σα'ιοι, Mt. ix. 14 ; cf. W. § 22, 6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. X. 16 ; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; cf. B. § 129, 12. Ιδον iyo>, "Jjn, behold me, here am I : Acts ix. 10 (1 S. iii. 8). iya), like -JX, I am : Jn. i. 23 ; Acts vii. 32, [cf. W. S85 (544) ; B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ϊμπροσθίν μου, Jn. i. 15; οπίσω μου, Mt. iii. 1 1 ; Ισχνροτ€ρύς μου, ibid. ; τις μου ι^ψατο, ^Ik. v. 31 ; Xc'yfi μοι, llev. v. 5 ; άρνησηταί μΐ, Mt. χ. 33 ; Lk. xii. 9, (on the accent in these expressions cf. W. § 6, 3 ; [iip- sius. Gram. Untersuch. p. 59 sqq. ; Lob. Path. Elementa ii. p. 323 sq. ; Tdf N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. Ixi. sq.; ed. 8 p. 104]) ; but δι iμoΰ, κατ iμoΰ, ττρο iμoΰ, etc., συν, iv (μοι, TTfp'i, δι, in, κατ, fls ipi• The only exception is προς, to which the enclitic fic is generally joined, Mt. xxv. 36 ; Mk. ix. 19, and very often; very rarely iipos ίμί, Jn. vi. 37', and ace. to LTTrWIl in Acts xxii. 8, 13; x.xiv. 19; [also Acts xxiii. 22TTrWH ; Jn. vi. 35 and 45 Τ Tr txt. WH ; Lk. i. 43 Τ WH ; Mt. xix. 14 ; Jn. vi. 37*, 65, Tdf. ; Jn. vi. 44 Tr txt. λΥΗ mrg.; 1 Co. xvi. 11 LTr; but wpof pi, Mt. iii. 14 Tdf. and xi. 28 Grsb.; cf. Lipsius u. s. p. 61 note]. Moreover, the full forms (μοϋ, (μοι, ίμί are used in case of emphasis or antithesis ; thus, (μοϋ, Lk. X. 16 ; ίμοί, Jn. vii. 23 ; x. 38, etc. ; ipi, Mk. xiv. 7 ; Jn. vii. 7, etc. 3. As in classic Greek, μοϋ and ήμων are very often used for the possessive pronouns ίμός and ήμίτίρος [Β. § 127, 21]; and when so used, a. they are generally placed after their substantives, as 6 oIkus μου, η ζωη ημών, etc. — the fuller form (μοϋ only for the sake of distinction or antithesis [cf. B. § 1 27, 22], as μψίρα αϋτοϋ κα\ (μοϋ, Ro. χλΙ. 13; ■ηίστ(ως ίμων τ( καΐ iμoϋ, Ro. i, 12. But b. they are sometimes placed before substantives, even which have the article, when no emphasis resides in the pron. or antithesis is involved in its use [W. § 22, 7 N. 1 ; B. u. s.] : μου τοϋϊ λο'γουί, Mt. vii. 24, 26 ; even before prepositions, μου ύπο την στίγι/ν, Mt. viii. 8 ; less frequently ημών, as ημών την πύλιν. Acts xvi. 20 ; it is prefixed for emphasis in ημών το πολίτ(υμα. Phil. iii. 20, cf. W. u. s. ; Rost § 99, 4 p. 452 sqq. 7th ed. adduces a multitude of exx. fr. Grk. auth. ; [cf. Kriiger, § 47, 9, 12 who states the rule as follows: when joined to a subst. having the art. the reflexive gen., with αϋτοϋ ipsius, and αλλήλων, requires the attributive position, the personal gen., and αΰτ-οϋ ejus, the partitive posi- tion]. 4. τί (μοΊ (ήμ'ιν) και σοι (ΰμΐν) ; ichat have I (we) to do with thee (i/ou) ? [cf. B. 138 (121) ; W. 211 (198) ; 585 (544)] : Mt. viii. 29 ; Mk. i. 24 ; v. 7 ; Lk. viii. 28 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; Heb. ■^'ί\ 'b-nr?, Judg. xi. 12 ; 2 K. iii. 13, 2 S. xvi. 10; 2 Chr. xx.xv. 21; 1 Esdr. i. 24; also in classic Greek; cf. Gell. n. a. 1, 2: Epict. diss. 2, 9, 16; τί ήμινκ. αΰτω, ibid. 1, 1, 16 ; τί (μοΊ κα\ airoir, ibid. 1,27, 13; 22, 15. τί yap μοι, what does it concern mel tchat have I to do etc. : 1 Co. v. 12 ; cf. Bos, EUipses Grace, p. 599, ed. Schaefer; Bnhdy. p. 98; Kriiger § 48,3,9; Kiihner ii. 364 sq. ; [B. as above, also 394 (337); W. 586 (545)]. ίβαφίϊω : Attic fut. ίδαφιώ [Β. 37 (32) ; W. § 13, 1 c] ; (see ίδαφοϊ) ; to throiv to the ground, — both of cities, buildings, to raze, level with the earth, and of men ; in both applications in Lk. xix. 44 [by zeugma (?) cf. W. § 66, 2 e.]. (Ps. cxxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 9 ; Is. iii. 26 ; Ezek. xxxi. 12; Hos. xii. 1 (xiii. 16); Am. ix. 14 [Aid.] ; rare in prof, writ., as [Aristot. probl. 23, 29] ; Polyb. 6, 33, 6.)• ίΒαφυ•; 168 £(, ( ϊδαψοΐ, •*οΓ (-ουι), τό, bottom, base, ifround : mirretv (is TO ίϋαφο!, Acts xxii. 7. (Sept. ; in t'hiss. writ. fr. llotu. (ii)wn.) • iSpoios, (rarely fem. -αία [\V. § II, 1]),-αίοΐ', («ίρα seat, eliair) ; 1. sillini/, saleiitartj, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. firm, immovable, steculJ'axt,(VA\T.,l'\-dl., al.) ; in the N. T. metapli., of those who are fi.xed in purpose : 1 Co. xv. 58; Col. i. 23; ίστηκιν t'u τή καρδία, 1 Co. vii. 37.* (Βραίωμα, -τοί, τ», {(δραα'ιω to make stable, settle (irmly), (I sluji, jirop, support, (Vul•^. finitainenlum) : 1 Tim. iii. 1 J [A.V. i/rounil]. (Eccl. writ.)' Έζ€κίο5 [WH Έζ-: L -Kfias, see Ti/f. Proleg. p. «5], (Π'")!!! stri'ni;tl> of Jehovah, i. e. streni;th given by Je- hovah ; Germ. Gottliard ; Sept. 'EfiKiar), [gen. -ου, cf. B. 17 (Hi) no. «], Hezeliah, king of Judah (2 K. xviii. 1 mj(j. ; XX. I S(iq. ; Is. xxxviii. 1 sqq.) : Mt. i. 9, 10. * (θ<λο-6ρη<ΓΚ€ία [Τ WH -κία, see I, t], -at, η, (fr. (βί\ω anil βρησκίΐα, <\. v. [cf. W. 100 (Ho)]), t'nluritari/,(ir/j>lmri/ irors/ii/i, (V'ulg. sapcrslilio), [A. V. will-worship'], i. e. worship which one devises and prescribes for himself, contrary to the contents and nature of the faith which ought to be ilirectcd to Christ ; .said of the misdirected zeal and i)ractices of ascetics: Col. ii. 23; .Suid. (β(\ο- θρησκύ ■ ΐδιω θιλήματί σίβιι τό 8οκονν. Cf. (δίλόδουλοί, (θ(λοδουλ(ία, (θίλοπρυξίνος one who acts the part of a proxenus without ha\ ing been ajjpointed to the office, etc. The explanation of others : simulated, counterfeit re- lii/ion (cf. in Greek lexicon.t «Λλοφιλόσοφο?. (θίλάκωφο!, etc.), does not scpiare so well with the context. (The word is found besides in Mansi, Collect. Concil. vol. iv. p. 1380, and in Theodoret, vol. iv. ep. elxi. p. [1460 b. ed. Migne]. 13.il, Ilalle ed.; [Euseb. h. e. 6, 12, 1 ; Jerome ep. cxxi. vol. i. 1034 ed. Migne]. Epiph. haer. I, 16 [i. p. 318, 3 ed. Dind.] attributes (θ(λοπ( ρισσοθρησκίία ΙΟ the Pharisees.)• <β<λω, see ϋ(\ω. ϋΐζω : ((θυς ([. v.) : Ιο accustom ; Pass. Ιο he accustomed ; |it. |itc[). TO (Ιθισμίνον lisar/e, custom: τοΰ νόμου, pre- scribed by the law, FA. ii. 27. (Eur., [Arstph.], Thuc, Xen., Plat., al.) • ίθνόρχη!, -ου, ό, (fr. eOvor and άρχω), [i. q. founder of a nation, Philo, cpiis rer. div. her. § 56], an ethnarch, one set over a people as ruler, but without the authority and name of king (l.cian. in Macrob. §17 άντ\ (θνάρχου iiiiai\(vs avayopcudus Βοσπόρου; .so the governor whom the Alexandrian Jews used to have was called (θνάρχης, of whom Josephus says, antt. 14, 7. 2, hs διοι«ί rt τό ϊθνοί κα\ δίαιτα κρίσας κα\ συμβολαίων fntpfXtirai και προσταγ- μάτων, ωί αν noXiTfias άρχων αϋτοτ(\οϋς ; likewise .Simon Maceabaiius, 1 Mace. xiv. 47; xv. 1, 2; Joseph, antt. 1 3, 6, 6 ; cf. [ 1 ■>, 5, 2] ; b. j. 2, 6, 3) : 2 Co. xi. 32 ό ΐθνάρχη, 'ApeVd ToO βασιΚίως, the governor of Damascene Syria, ruling in the name of king Aretas [(q. v.) ; cf. B. D.'s. v. Governor, 1 1 ].• cSviKOs, -ή, -όν, (ίθνης) ; 1. adapted to the t/enius or customs of a people, peculiar to a people, national: Polyb., Diod., al. 2. suited to the manners or loiu/uai/e of for- eigners, strange, foreign ; so in the grammarians [cf. our ' gentile ']. 3. in the N. T. savoring of the nature of pagans, alien to the worship of the true God, heathenish ; substantively, ό fixiKot //('■ pagan, the Gentile: Mt. xviii. 17; i)lur., Mt. v. 4 7 V, L Τ Tr WIl; vi. 7; and 3 Jn. 7 L r Tr WII.• «θνικΰδ, adv., {sii(iieviKOs),like the Gentiles : Gal. ii. 14, [W. 463 (431). Apollon. Dysk. p. 190, 5 ; Diog. Laert. 7, 56].• iOvos, -out, TO ; 1. α multitude (whether of men or of beasts) associated or liriitg toi/rther ; a coin/iiitii/, troop, Sicar7n : (6voi ίταϊρων, (θνος Άχαιων, (θνον Χαών, 1 loin. II. ; f^KOS μίλισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ΐεθνια, ib. 469. 2. η multitude tif individuals of the same nature or fjenus, (το ίθνο! TO θήλυ η το appev, Xen. oec. 7, 26) : nav ίθνοί άνθράιπων, the liuman race, Acts χ vii. 26 [but this seem» to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation : Mt. xxi. 43 ; Acts x. 35, etc. ; i^i-os fVl ϊθνο!, Mt. xxiv. 7 ; Mk. xiii. 8; oi άρχοντα, οί βασιλι'ις τωνΐθνών, Mt. χχ. 25; Lk. xxii. 25 ; used [in the sing.J of the .Jewish people, I.k. vii. 5 ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53 ; xviii. 35 ; Acts x. 22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4 ; xxviii. 19. 4. (τα) ϊθνη, like D'ljn in the O. Ύ., foreign nations not worshi/iping the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [cf. Trendi § xcviii.] : Mt. iv. 15 (Γαλιλαια των (θνών), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7 KG; cf. Rev. XV. 3 G L Τ Tr WII mrg. after Jn. x. 7], and very often ; in plain contradistinction to the Jews : Ro. iii. 29 ; ix. 24 ; [1 Co. i. 23 G L Τ Tr Wil] ; Gal. ii. 8, etc. ; ό λαό? (τοΰ ΰ(οΰ, Jews) κα'ι τα (θνη, Lk. ii. 32 ; Acts xxvi. 1 7, 23 ; Ro. XV. 1 0. 5. Paul uses τα (θνη even of (ien- tile Christians : Ro. xi. 13; xv. 27; \vi. 4; (ial. ii. 12 (opp. vs. 13 to oi Ιουδαίοι i. e. Jewish Christians), vs. 14 : Eph. iii. l,cf. iv. 17 [\V. §59, 4 a.; B. 130 (114)]. cOcs, -eof (-ous), [cf. v^or], τό, fr. Aeschyl. [Agam. 728 (?) ; better fr. Soph.] down, custom: Lk. xxii. 89; (θοΐ (στί Tiw foil, by an inf., Jn. xix. 40 ; Acts xxv. 16 ; Ileb. .X. 25; contextually, usage prescribed hi/ law, in- stitute, prescription, rite : Lk. i. 9; ii. 42 ; Acts xvi. 21; xxi. 21 ; .xxvi. 3 ; .xxviii. 1 7 ; τ7(ριτΐμν(σθαι τω (θ(ΐ Μωΐ•ο-ιΰ>?, Acts .\\". 1 ; άλλίί^ϊ ί τό (θη η παρ(δωκ( Μοιΐ-σί)?, A("ts \ i. 14.* ίθω (of the pres. only the ])tc]). ίθων is used, in Ilom.) : pf. (ϊωθα, to be accustomt'd, used, wont ; [j'lpf. as impf. (W. 274 (257 sq.)) (Ιώβ(ΐν] : foil, by inf. : Mt. xxvii. 15 ; Mk. X. 1. Ptcp. TO (ΐωθός in a ])ass. sense, that which is wont; usage, custom: κατά τό (Ιωθόί tiw as one's custom is, as is his wont, Lk. iv. 16; Acts .xvii. 2.* [ei, i: fi and i are frec|. interchanged in N. T. .spelling. This is due partly to itacism, |iartly to the endeavor to mark tlie 1 sound as long or short. See tlie remarks on this suliject in IF//. App. p. 152 sq. (cf. lutr. § 399) : Tdf Prolog, p'. 83 si[,; Soph. Lex. s. v. ei. The use of i for ci is noticed s. v. I, i ; instances iu which ii is substituted for ι are the foil. : Ά$(ΐ- K-qvi] \TH ; ■ASSei Τ Tr WH ; 'Ai-Tf /ttos T ; ' ^pfo^rayι:h■ηs Τ ; Bei/iaittiV LTTr WH; Δαυίίδ L Γ Tr WII ; 'Efeif ias L ; Έλαμίίττ,ϊ Τ WH ; 'EAf.o-a/SeT WH; Έσλβί Τ Tr WH ; EC- «.Vt, Rec." ; 'HAe/TTrWH; 'HAtias Τ WH ; ΊίρίΐχύΎ WH ; Ί(ροσο\υμ(Ιτν5 Τ WH ; '1σραη\(1τηί Τ WH, so Tr iu Jn. i. 47 (48) ; Ίωσίία! L Τ Tr WH ; Ki/s L Τ Tr WH ; ΚκρίΓΐΌϊ Tr mrf. WH mrg. ; Aevtit Τ WH, so Trexc. in Mk. ii. 14 : \(v(iT7]s Τ WH, so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36 ; AfvetTiKOs Τ WH , Μι\χι: Γ Tr WH ; Nupcl Τ Tr WH ; Ni«i.€iTr)s Τ et 169 WH, so Tr in Mt. xii. 41 ; O(eias h Τ Tr WH ; Π€ΐλ5το5 Τ WH ; SeMte.V Τ Tr WH ; Ταβαθά WH ; Χίρουβίίν L Τ TrWH (-/3ίμ Κ (J); XopaCeh Τ Tr WH; άψ€/δ€ΐα L ; β,δί'α Τ Tr WH ; ϊτταρχίΐα Τ WH ; 4πιπόβίία WH ; ijAei Τ ; wafoiKe'i TWH; βαββ^ί I'WH; ραββουν^ί WH ; σα.βαχβακί Ύ Tr WH ; TaKftOaWll; τάχαον WH ; τραπ€^ίΐτ7|$ Τ WH.] f(, is lirst a conditi(jual particle, //' (Lat. si) ; secondly, an interrogative particle, ic/it;l/ier, (Lat. an, num, ne). I. £1 Conditional (ou the dift'erence between it and fav, see iav, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety of conditions, with various tenses and moods ; viz. 1. with the Indicative of all tenses, ivhen anything is simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2 ; cf. 42, 2; [B. 220(100)]). a. with the Ind. Present; o. foil, in the apodosis by the ind. pres. : Mt. ,\i.\. 10 (« οϋτωί ίστΧν η αιτία . . . οΰ σνμφίρΐί -γαμήσαι) ; .\i. 1-4 ; Κο. νϋ. 1U, 20; viii. 25; xiv. 15; iCo. i.x. 17; (ial. ii. 18 ; v. IS; Heb. xii. 8 ; .las. ii. 8 sq., etc. β. foil, by an Imperative in the apodosis, — either the pres., as [Mt. xix. 1 7 L Tr txt. WH txt.] ; Mk. iv. 23 ; vii. 1 6 R G L ; Jn. xv. 1 8 ; Acts xiii. 15 ; xxv. 5 ; 1 Co. vii. 12, 15 ; Jas. iii. 14, etc. ; or the aor., as Mt. v. 29, 30; viii. 31 ; xix. 17 [H ϋ Τ Tr mrg. WII mrg.] ; Mk. ix. 22 [cf . B. 55 (48)] ; Lk. xxu. 6 7 (6(i) ; 1 Co. vii. 9. y. foil, by the Future in the apodosis : Lk. xvi. 31 ; Acts V. 39 LTTrWII; xi.x. 39 ; lio. viii. 11,13; 2 Co. -xi. 30, etc. 8. foil, by the Perfect or the Aorist in the apodosis, where it is declared that, if this or that is, something else has or has not occurred : Mt. xii. 2C, 28 ; Lk.xi. 20; 1 Co. xv. lu; Gal. ii. 21 ; Ko. iv. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 20. (. foil, by the Imperfect, either with or without αχ, where in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be the case. Three passages falling under this head have a doubtful or disputed text : ii ?χ£Τ€ (Τ Tr VVH, for the R G L €ΐχΐτ€) . . • ελί'γ€Τ6 αν etc. Ijk. xvii. G ; tt , . . μνημο- vfvovatv ( Τ 1 r, for It G L \\ II ΐμνημόνΐυον) . . . fi^ov αϊ/, Heb. xi. 15 (where by the pres. tense tlii^ writer refers to the language of the Jewish Fathers as at present re- corded in the sacred Scriptures ; cf. τοιαντα λίγοντα vs. 14) ; ft τίκνα τοϋ Άβρ. eare (G L Τ Tr \λ'ΙΙ, for R ητ() . . . iVoieiTf ([WH txt. ποι.] R L add άι/), .In. viii. 39; cf. Bum. in Stud. u. Krit. for 1858 p. 474 sqq. [N. T. Gram. § 1 39, 26 ; but cf. Mey. on Lk. 1. c.]. But 2 Co. xi. 4 el . . . κήρυσσα. . . . άν(ίχ£σθ( ('• Τ Tr Wll mrg. (άνίχ(σθ( L WII t.xt.) must not be referred to this head ; here Paul in the protasis supposes something which actually occurred, in the apodosis censures a thing which actually occurred viz. the readiness with which his readers gave ear con- tinually (this is indicated by the impf.) to false teachers. On the difficulty of the passage cf. Hols/en in the Zeit- schr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1874, p. 1 sqq. ; [cf. also B. 226 (195) ; but W. 300 (287) and Mey. ad loc.]. ζ. with a (|uestion as the apodosis : Mt. vi. 23 ; >In. v. 47 ; vii. 23 ; viii. 46; 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. with the Ind. Future: Mt. xxvi. 33 ; Jas. ii. 1 1 R G ; 1 Pet. ii. 20. c. with the Ind. Perfect: Jn. xi. 12; Acts xvi. 15; Ro. vi. 5 ; xi. 6 (ivhere after « supply \(ΐμμα yiynvfvir. what precedes), 2 Co. ii. 5; V. 16; vii. 14. d. with the Ind. Aorist, — foU.bythe Pres. in the apodosis, Lk. xix. 8 ; Ro. iv. 2 ; xv. 27 ; foil. by a question in the apodosis, Lk. xvi. 11, 12 ; Jn. xviii. 23 ; 1 Co. iv. 7 ; ix. 11 ; foil, by the Aor. in the apodosis. Rev. XX. 15 ; by the Impv. in the apodosis, .Jn. .xviii. 23 ; XX. 15; Ro. xi. 17 sq. ; 1 Tim. v. 9, 10; Philem. 18; by the Fut. in the apodosis, .Tn. xiii. 32; xv. 20 ; Ileb. xii. 25 (where supjily ουκ (κφ(υξιΊμ£θα in the apodosis). 2. Not infre(|uenlly, when a conclusion is drawn from some- thing that is ([uite certain, « with the Indie, is used argu- mentatively so as to be equiv. in sense to «jrW, (cf. the use of Germ, ivenn) [cf. W. 448 (418)] : Mt. xii. 28 ; Lk. xxiii. 31 ; Jn. vii. 4 ; Ro. v. 1 7 ; vi. 5 ; viii. 31 ; xi. 6, 12; Col. ii. 20 ; iii. 1, etc. 3. When it is .«aid what would have been, or what would be now or in the futiue, if something else were or had been,ii is used with the luipf., Plpf., and Aor. ind.; in the apodosis it is followed in direct disc, by Sv with the impf. or the Jilpf. or the aor. ; sometimes Sv is omitted, (on the causes of the omission, see B. § 139, 27) ; sometimes the apodosis is made a ques- tion, [cf. W. 304 (285) sq.]. a. (t with the Impf., foil, in the apodosis by ev with the impf. : Mt. x.viii. 30 ; Lk. vii. 39 (ei oiros ην προφήτη;, (γίνωσκίν αν if this man were a prophet, he would know) ; .In. v. 46; viii. 42 ; ix. 41 ; XV. 19; 1 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 10; Heb. viii. 4, 7 (if . . . were etc. there would not be sought etc. viz. in the O. T. passage quoted vs. 8) ; by a (piestion in the apodosis : 1 Co. xii. 1 9 ; Heb. vii. 1 1 ; by άν with the aor., where the Latin uses the plupf. subjunc. : Jn. xi. 32 {d ης iSc if thou hadst been here, οϋκ άν άπϊθανί μου ό άδΕλφόί my brother would not have died [Λvhen he did (cf. below) ; B. § 139, 25 regards the impf. in prot. as expressing dur- ation]) ; Jn. iv. 10; xviii. 30 (ii μή ην ούτος κακοποίός, ηνκ αν σοι τταρΐ^ώκαμΐν αυτόν, we woukl not have delivered him to thee); Acts xviii. 14; by ήι- with the plupf. : .In. xi. 21 {el ης lihf . . . οϋκ αν ίτ(θνήκ(ΐ, ivould not have died [and be now dead; cf. W. 304 (285) and see above; but L Τ Tr txt. WH read the aor. here also]) ; 1 Jn. ii. 19. b. ei with the Plpf., foil, in the apodosis by άν with the ]jll)f. or the aor., in the sense of the Latin plpf. subj. : Mt. xii. 7 (fi fyvaiKeiTe if ye had understood i. e. if ye knew, οϋκ &v κατ(8ικάσατ( τους αναίτιους ye would not have condemned the guiltless) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 and Lk. xii. 39, (fi fj8(i if he had perceived i. e. if he knew, (-/ρη-γύρη- σινιιν he would have watched, sc. before the thief had api)roached [Tr txt. ΛλΤΙ om. άν in Lk. 1. c.]) ; Jn. iv. I ϋ ; viii. 19; xiv. 7 [RGL]. c. with the Aor. in the same sense as the Lat. plpf- subjunc. : ti ΐδόθη νόμος ■ ■ ■ όντως &v CK νόμου ην ή δικαιοσύνη if a law had been given, right- eousness would in truth come from the law, Gal. iii. 21 : ίί αϋτοϋς Ίησοΰς κατίπαυσιν if Joshua had given them rest, οϋκ άν nfp'i άλλης tXaXei he would not be speakin•;, sc. in the passage i|uatcd, Heb. iv. 8 ; apodosis wiihout 3v, .In. XV. 22, see άν I. 3 p. 33 sq. 4. As in classic Greek, a with the Ind. is often joined to verbs expressing wonder, surprise, or other strong emotion (where ότι might have been expected), when the thing spoken of is either not (|uile certain, or, although certain, yet in ac- cordance with the well-known Greek urbanity is repre- 170 sented as not quite free from doubt (Matthiae ii. p. 1474 s αίτω, d ουκ (γίννήθη, good were it for him not to have been born. Ml. xxvi. 24 ; Mk. xiv. 21. 8. the whole emphasis is placed on the negative itself : fi σϋ ουκ ft ό Χριστός, J η. i. 25. b. the oi coalesces, as it were, with the word to which it belongs into a single idea : ft 8f oiic ϊγκρατιΰον- ται, if they are incontinent, 1 Co. vii. 9 ; fi rtf τώι/ ιδίωκ oi προνο(ϊ [or -firat Τ Tr txt. WII mrg.], nci/lecis, 1 Tim. V. 8 ; add, Lk. xiv. 2(i ; 1 Co. xvi. 22 ; Rev. xx. 15, etc. 12. ft οΰν, if then : Mt. vi. 23 ; vii. 1 1 ; Lk. xi. 13, 30; .In. xiii. 14; xviii. 8; Acts xi. 17; Col. iii. 1 ; Philem. 17. [On fc'/teVoUKSce/ii'i'II. 4.] 13. fiTrf/j [soT WII (exc. in 2 Co. v. 3 mrg.), but L Tr fi nep; ef. W. 45 ; Lipsius, Gram, l.'nters. p. 123], («' and Trep, and this ap- parently from π(ρί), prop, if on the whole ; if only, pro- dded that, is used " of a thing which is assumed to be, l)!it whether rightly or wrongly is left in doubt" {Herm. ail Vig. p. 831, [.so W. 448 "(417); but cf. Baumlein, (iriech. Partikeln, p. 202 (cf. 64 bot.) ; K/otz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 528, and esp. s. v. fiyf (in yt, 3 c.) and the reff. to Mey., Lghtft., Ellic, there given]) : Ro. viii. !», 1 7 ; 1 Co. \iii. 5 ; XV. 15 ; 1 Pet. ii. 3 (where L Τ Tr WII «'); by a species of rhetorical politeness it is used of that about which there is no doubt : 2 Th. i. 6 ; Ro. iii. 30 L Τ Tr W II ; 2 Co. V. 3 L Tr WH mrg. 14. ct wws [LTr \VH] or tΐπωs [G T], if in any way, if by any means, if possibly: with the optat. pres. (see 1. 7 abo\e). Acts xxvii. 12: interrogatively, with the indie, fut. Uo. i. 10; with the subjime. aor., so that before tl the word σκοπώ» or π(ΐρώμ<νοί must be mentally supplied (see 11. 1 d. above): Ro. xi. 14 ; Phil. iii. 11. 15. ftxf . . . ftrf, a. whether . . . or [as disjunc. conjunc, sice . . . sice; cf. W. 440 (409 sq.) ; B. 221 (191)], without a verb follow- ing : Ro. xii. 6-8 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; viii. 5 ; 2 Co. v. 9 sq. ; Phil. i. IS, 20, 27 ; 2 Th. ii. 15 ; Col. i. 16, 20 ; 1 Pet. ii. 13 s({. ; firf ovv . . . ftrf, 1 Co. xv. 11 ; foil, by the indie, pres., 1 Co. xii. 26 ; xid. 8 ; 2 Co. i. 6 ; foil, by the sul»- june. pres. 1 Th. v. 10, where the u.se of the subjunc. was occasioned by the subjunc. ζήσωμιν in the leading clause; cf. W. 294 (27G): B.221 (191). b. trhcther ...or [as indirect interrogatives, utrum . . . an ; cf. B. 250(215)] (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Matthiae p. 1476 stp) : after ούκ ui8a, 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. 16. fi tis, ei rt : exx. of this coudjiuation have already been given among the preced- ing; here may be added ft rtf tTtpns, fi τι mpov, and if (there be) any other jienson or thing, — a phrase used as a conclusion after the mention or enumeration of several particuhirs liclonging to the .«ame class (in the classics ft Tty fi'Wos, el Kin Tts «λλοϊ, κα\ ft τι άλλο, etc., in lldt., Xen., Plat., al.) : Ro. xiii. 9; 1 Tim. i. 10; fi Tit with subjunc. pres. Rev. xi. 5 Rec. ; with the subjunc. aor., ibid. Τ Tr WII txt. [ctYf, see ye, 3 c] f ISe'a, -as, ij, Mt. xxviii. 3 Τ Tr WII, a poet, form for l&ea, (J. V. [cf. WII. App. p. 153], (Bar. vi. [ep. Jer.] 62 ; Arstph. Thesm. 438 var.). Cf. B. 5 ; [W. 48 (47) ; see ft, i]." itSos, -out, TO, (ΕΙΔΩ), in Sept. chiefly for ΠΚ^Ο and "^ΚΠ ; prop, that which strikes the eye, which is exposed to λ lew ; 1. the external appearance, form, fiyure, shape, (so fr. Horn, down) : ,In. v. 37; σωματικά eibei, Lk. iii. 22 ; το ftoos του προσώπου αϋτυν, Lk. i,\. 29; δια eiSuvs, as encompassed with the visible appearance (of eternal things), (see διό, A. I. 2), 2 Co. v. 7, — com. ex- plained, by sight i. e. beholding (Luth. : im Schauen) ; but no ex. has yet been adduced fr. any Grk. writ, in ivhich f tSot is used actively, like the l.at. species, of vision ; {στόμα κατά στόμα, ev ei^ ei, κα\ ου δι* οραμάτων καί ενυ- πνίων, Clem, homil. 17, 18; cf. Xum. xii. 8 .Se])t.). 2. farm, kiml : άποπαντός eihovi πονηρού απί\(σθ€, i. e. from every kind of evil or wrong, 1 Th. v. il [ef. πονηρός, sub fin.]; (.loseph. antt. 10, 3, 1 παν tiSos πονηρίας. The Grks., esp. Plato, oppose το fiSor to τό yffor, as the Lat. does species to genus. Cf. Schmidt ch. 182, 2).* ίϊδω, ϊδω. Lat. video, [Skr. vid, pf. veda k-nov; vind-a- mi find, (cf. Vedas) ; Curtius § 282], an obsol. form of the present tense, the place of which is supplied by όράω. The tenses coming from f ί'δω and retained by usage form two families, of Avhich one signifies to see, the oilier to ktiow. L 2 aor. elhov, the com. form, with the term, of the 1 aor. (see reff. s. v. άπίρχομαι, init.) eiSa, Rev. xvii. 3 L, 6 LTTr; 1 pers. plur. e'iSapev, LTTr WII in Acts iv. 20; Mk. ii. 12; Tr WII in Mt. xxv. 37 ; WH in Vt. XXV. 38; Mk. ix. 38; Lk. ix. 49; 3 pers. plur. elSav, Τ WH in Lk. ix. 32 ; TrAVII in Lk. x. 24 : Acts vi. 15; xxviii. 4 ; Τ Tr WII in Mk. vi. 50 ; L Τ Tr WH in Jn eiBa 173 i. 39 (40) ; Acts L\. 35 ; xii. 16 ; WH in Mk. vi. 33 ; add iSav Tdf . in Mt. xiii. 1 7 ; Lk. x. 24 ; l8ov (an Epic form, cf. Matthiae i. p. 564 ; [Veitch p. 215]; very freq. in Sept. and in 1 Mace, cf. Grimm on 1 Mace. p. 54 ; on tlie freq. interchange of Ιδον and elSov in codd., cf . Jacobs ad Achill. Tat. 2, 24 ; [IKi/. App. pp. 162, 164; Tdf. Sept. Proleg. p. Ix. ; N. T. Proleg. p. 89; B. 39 (34)]), Tdf. in Rev. iv. 1 ; vi. 1, 2,5, 8, 9,12; vii.l.etc; 3 pers. sing, ififv, Tdf. in Lk. v. 2 ; Rev. i. 2 ; 2 pers. plur. iSfrc, Phil. i. 30 Rec. ; 3 pers. plur. ί'δον, Tdf. in [Lk. ii. 20] ; Jn. xix. 6; subjiinc. ΐδω; impv. i'if (Attic ίδί',ί'ί. VV. § 6, 1 a. ; [B. 62 (54) ; Gotllinij, Accentl. 52]), [2 pers. plur. ISfTf, Jn. i. 39 (40) RGL]; mi.lbe'iv, ptcp. ιδών; (Sept. mostly for ΠΧΐ, sometimes for ΠΙΠ and i'T) ; to see (have seen), be seeing (saw), i.e. 1. lo perceive (with the eyes ; Lat. conspicere, Germ, erblicken) ; a. univ. τινά or W : Mt. ii. 2 ; iv. 16 ; xiv. 14 ; xxviii. 6 ; Mk. i. 10, 16 ; ii. 14 ; Lk. v. 26 ; vii. 22 ; Jn. i. 47 (4s) sq. ; vi. 26 ; xix. 6 ; Acts ix. 35 ; xii. 16 ; Gal. i. 19 ; 1 Tim. vi. 16, ami very often. oiSinoTf οϋτωι ίΐδαμ^ν we never saw in such fash- ion, i. e. such a sight never befell us, Mk. ii. 12, old Germ. also hat man r.icht gesehen, seil etc. ; cf. Kuinoel ad Mat. p. 280 ed. 4. ISe'iv τι and άκοίσαί Tt are conjoined in Lk. vii. 22 ; Acts xxii. 14 ; 1 Co. ii. 9 ; Jas. v. 11 ; iSelv and ISf'ii/ Tt are also used by those to whom something is pre- sented in vision, as the author of the Apocalypse relates that he saw this or that: Rev. i. 12, 17; iv. 1 [here βιδον i it has the signification of a pres- ent lo know, undcr.itand ; and the plpf. the signif. of an impf.; [cf. W. 274 (257)]. 1. to know : with ace. of the thing, Mt. xxv. 13 ; Mk. X. 1 9 ; Jn. X. 4 ; xiil. 1 7 ; xiv. 4 ; Acts v. 7 ; Ro. vii. 7 ; 1 Co. ii. 2 ; Rev. ii. 2, 9, etc. ; τοΟτο [Rec. ; al. νάντα] foil. by oTi etc. Jude 5 ; with ace. of pers., Mt. xxvi. 72, 74 ; Jn. i. 31 ; vi. 42 ; Acts iii. IG ; 2 Co. v. 16, etc. ; τόν Sfov, Tit. i. 16, cf. .In. viii. 19; xv. 21 ; Gentiles are called o! μη fihUTd T. θ(ύν in 1 Th. iv. 5 ; 2 Th. i. 8, cf. Gal. iv. 8 ; the predicate of the person .is added (as often in Attic), elbius avTov iiubpa δίκαίον, SO. όντα, Mk. vi. 20 [B. 304 (2G1 )] ; in the form of a ptcp. 2 Co. xii. 2. to an accus. of the object by attraction ( W. § 66, 5 a.; B. 377 (323)) an epexegetical clause is added [cf. esp. B. 301 (258)], with oTi, 1 Co. xvi. 15 ; 2 Co. xii. 3 sq. ; Acts xvi. 3 ; or an indirect question [B. 250 (215) sq.], Mk. i. 24 ; Lk. iv. 34; xiii. 25, 27; Jn. vii. 27; ix. 29. elSivat is used with the ace. and inf. in Lk. iv. 41 ; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; foil, by ort, Mt. ix. 6 ; Jn. xix. 35 ; Acts ii. 30 ; Ro. v. 3, and very often ; οϊδαμ(ν foil, by on is not infrequently, so far as the sense is concerned, equiv. to it is well known, ac- knowledged : Mt. xxii. 16 ; Lk. xx. 21 ; Jn. iii. 2 ; ix. 31 ; Ro. ii. 2 ; iii. 19 ; vii. 14 ; viii. 22, 28 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 8 ; 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; v. 20 ; cf. Lightfoot [in his Horae Hebr. et Talm.] and Baumg.-Crusius on Jn. iii. 2. freq., esp. in Paul, is the interrog. formula ουκ oiSart and η οίκ οίδατΕ οτ(, by which something well known is commeniled to one for his thoughtful consideration : Ro. xi. 2 ; 1 Co. iii. 16; V. 6; vi. 2 sq. 9, 15 sq. 19; ix. 13, 24; ουκ oihare foil, by an indir. quest. Lk. ix. 55 [Rec] ; ουκ albas ότι, Jn. xix. 10; οίκ xi&eiTe, Lk. ii. 49; cliivai foil, by an indir. quest, [cf. B. u. s.], Mt. .xxvi. 70; Jn. ix. 21, 25, 30; xiv. 5; XX. 13; iCo. i. 16; vii. 16; 2 Co. xii. 2 sq. ; Ro. viii. 26 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 5, and very often. 2. lo know i. e. get knnn'ledge of, understand, perceire ; a. any fact : as, tos ίvθυμήσfίs, Mt. xii. 25 ; την ΰπόκρισιν, Mk. xii. 15 ; τους διαλογισμούς αυτών, Lk. vi. 8 ; xi. 17 ; with the addition of eV ίαντω foil, by on, Jn. vi. 61. b. the force and meaning of something, which has a definite meaning: 1 Co. ii. 11 sq. ; την παραβοΧήν, Mk. iv. 13; μυστήρια, 1 Co. xiii. 2; foil, by an indir. quest. Eph. i. 18. c. as in class. Grk., foil, by an inf. in the sense of to know how (Lat. calleo, to he skilled in) : Mt. vii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 13; .xii. 56; Phil. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 4 ; 1 Tim. iii. 5; Jas. iv. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; ur οίδατί, sc. άσφαΚΊσασθαι, Mt. .xxvii. 65. 3. Hebraistically, eihivm τίκά to have regard for one, cherish, pan attention to: 1 Th. v. 12, (Sept. Gen. x.xxix. 6 for i'T). [Syn. see γινώσκω.] <18ωλ<ϊον [-λιοκ Τ Wll ; .see I, i],-ou, τό, ((ϊδωλοί', q. v.; cf. 'ΧσκΚηπύον, ' \πολ\ων(Ιον, 'ΜρακΚύον, etc. [W. 95 (90)]), an idol's temple, temple consecrated to idols : 1 Co. viii. 10 (1 Mace. i. 47; x. 83 ; 1 Esdr. ii. 9; not found in prof, autli. ; for in the frag. fr. Soph. [152 Dind.] in Plut. de amico et adul. c. 36 «δώλια has of late been restoH'd).' 6ΐ5ωλόθυτο5, -ην, {('ίδωΚον and θύω), a bilil. and eccl. word [W. 26; 100 {'Ji)], sacrijiced to iilols ; το (Ιδωλύθυ- τον and τα «'δωλόίυτα denote the flesh left over from the heathen sacrifices ; it was either eaten at feasts, or sold (by the poor and the miserly) in the market : Acts xv. 29; x.xi. 25; 1 Co. viii. 1, 4, 7, 10; x. 19, 28 (here L txt. TTrWII read 'κρόθυτον, q. v.); Rev. ii. 14, 20. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. γ>. 308 sq.] * «ΐε<ι>λο-λατρ(1α [-rpm WH ; see I, i], -as, ή, {ΛδωΚον, q. v., and Xarpfia), (Tertull. al. idololatria), the worship of false gods, idolatry : Gal. v. 20 ; used of the formal sac- rificial feasts held in honor of false gods, 1 Co. x. 14 ; of avarice, as a worship of Mammon [q-v.], Col. iii. 5 [Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.] ; in plur., the vices springing from idolatry and pceuliar to it, 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 26].)• (18ωλολάτρη$, -ου, ό, («δωλον, and λάτρις i. e. a hireling, servant, slave), a worshipper of false gods, an idolater, (Tertull. idololatres) : 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xxi. 8; xxii. 15; any one, even a Christian, participant in any way in the worship of heathen, 1 Co. v. 11 ; vi. 9 ; esp. one Λνΐιο at- tends their sacrificial feasts and eats of the remains of the offered victims, 1 Co. x. 7 ; a covetous man, as a worshipper of Mammon, Eph. v. 5 ; ef. Meyer ad loc. (Eccl. writ. [cf. W. 100 (94 sq.)].)* €Ϊ8ωλον, -ου, τό, (eiSos [cf. W. 96 (91); Etym. Magn. 296, 9]), in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, an image, likeness, i. e. whatever represents the form of an object, either real or imaginary ; used of the shades of the departed (in Horn.), of apparitions, spectres, phantoms of the mind, etc. ; in bibl. writ, [an idol, i. e.] 1. the image of a heathen god : Acts vii. 41 ; 1 Co. xii. 2 ; Rev. ix. 20, (Is. XXX. 22; 2 Chr. xxiii. 17, etc.; θ^ών ή δαιμόνων (ΐδωλα, Polyb. 31, 3, 13); 2. a false god: Acts xv. 20 (on which see άΚίσγημα) ; Ro. ii. 22 ; 1 Co. viii. 4, 7 ; X. 19 ; 2 Co. vi. 16 ; 1 Th. i. 9, (often in Sept.) ; φυΧάσ- (Tfif iavTov άπ6 τ. (Ιδώλων, to guard one's self from all manner of fellowship with heathen worship, 1 Jn. v. 21.* ίΐκή (L WII 11°" eUij•, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 342; B. 69(61); [W. §5,'4e.; Jelf § 324 Obs. 6 ; Kuhner § 336 Anm. 7 ; esp. Etym. Magn. 78, 26 sq. ; and reff. s. v. I, i]), adv.; in (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down; 1. in- consideralelji, without purpose, without Just cause : Mt. v. 22 R(; Trbr. ; Ro. xiii. 4 (i. e. 'not to hide it in the scabbard, but to draw it' Fritzsche); Col. ii. 18. 2. in vain; without success or effect: 1 Co. xv. 2; Gal. iii. 4; iv. 11. [From Xenophon, Aeschyl. down.]* ίϊκοσ-ι Tor -σιν ; Tdf. uses σι ten times before a conso- nant, and savs -σι " ctiam ante vocalem fere semper in ΐίκω 17ί €ίμι codd. antiquiss." Proleg. p. 98 : WH everywhere -at. cf. their App. p. 148 ; B. 9], oi. αϊ, τά, twenty : Lk. xiv. 31 ; Acts i. 15, etc. [From Horn, down.] v καϊ ην [W. 68(66), cf. 182(172); B. 50 (43)], Rev. i. 4, [8 ; iv. 8] ; xi. 1 7 ; xvi. 5 ; eV άρχη ην ό λόγο:, Jn. i. 1 ; πριν Άβρααμ -γΐνΐσθαι, €γω (ίμί, Jn. viii. 58 [so WH mrg. in 24, 28 ; xiii. 19 (see II. 5 below)] ; προ τοϋ τον κόσμον civai, Jn. χνϋ. 5 ; ην, και ονκ €στι καίπ^ρ (στίν Rec, ace. to the better reading καΊ πάρισται [G Tr WH, but L Γ παρίσται, correctly; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 108 Anm. 20; Chandler § 803], Rev. xvii. 8 ; ϊσμίν. Acts xvii. 28 ; τα μη οντά and τα όντα things that are not, things that are, Ro. iv. 17; things that have some or have no influence, of some or of no account, 1 Co. i. 28, {eKOXeaev ημάς ονκ οντάς κα\ ηθί\ησ(ν ξκ μη ovtos eivai ημάς, Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. i. 8 [cf. Gebh. and Ilarn. ad loc. and esp. on Herm. vis. 1,1, 6]). Hence b. i. q. to lire : el ήμ(θα [or ημ(ν Rec.] iv ταις ημίραις των πατίρων ημών if we had been (viz. living) in the days of our fathers, Mt. .xxiii. 30: oiiK elvai is used (as in class. Grk., cf. Passow i. p. 792, [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 1]) of the dead [who are not, are no more'\ : Mt. ii. 18. c. i. q. to stay, remain, be in a place : Mt. ii. 13, 15 ; Mk. i. 45 [L WH br. ?.-] ; v. 21 ; Lk. i. 80; see V. 4 below. d. i. q. lo be found, the subject bein» anarthrous; as, ην άνθρωπος there wa^ (found, Germ, es gab) a man, etc.: Lk. xvi. 1, 19; xviii. 23; Jn. iii. 1 ; iv. 6 ; V. 2; vi. 10; 1 Co. viii. 5; xii. 4-6; xiv. 10; xv. 44; 1 Jn. v. 16, and often; ίσονται ϊμπαΊκται. Jude 18; iiTTi, ην, ΐσται with a negative : ονκ ΐστι δίκαιης there is not (sc. found) a righteous man, Ro. iii. 10; add 12, 18; χηόνος ουκ eorai ίτι there shall be no longer time. Rev. x. 6 ; add. Rev. xxii. 3, 5 [Rec. adds t/cfi] ; xxi. 25 [here cKe'i stands] ; άνάστασις νικρων ουκ ίστιν, 1 Co. XV. 1 2 ; μή eivai άνάστασιν, Mt. xxii. 23 and its parall. ; Acts xxiii. 8. Here belong also the phrases dcriv, o'l etc., olni/ft etc., there are (some) who etc. : Mt. xvi. 28 ; xix. 12 : Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27 ; Jn. vi. 64 ; Acts xi. 20 ; ονδιίς (στιν, ος, Mk. ix. 39 sq. ; x. 29 ; Lk. i. 61 , xviii. 29 ; with a noun added, (ξ et/it 17») €ίμι ήμ€ραί fiVtV. (fa's etc. Lk. xili. 14 ; m «στιν, St, Mt. vii. 9 [L Tr WII 0111. «στ.] ; -xii. 1 1 [Tr om. W 1 1 l>r. ('στ.] ; (o-ri»' ό with a ptcp. there is (viz. is not wanting) one tlinl etc. .In. V. 32 [?J, 45; viii. 50. e. ivhen used of things, events, facts, etc., ctvatis i. q. to happen, lake place: mv κρίσκ iariv, Jn. xii. 31 ; -γογγναμος ην, Jn. vii. 12: Oopvlioi τον λαοΰ, Mk. xiv. 2 ; σχίσμα, σχίσματα, Jn. i-\. 1 li ; 1 Co. i. 1 ; xii. 25 ; tptSts, 1 Co. i. 1 1 ; α'ιμίσίΐί, 1 Co. .\i. 19 ; ηίνθοί, nouot, κραυγή. Rev. x.\i. 4 ; ϊσονται λιμοί κ. λοιμοί [II G Tr mrg. in br., al. om. κ. λοιμ.] κ. σ(ΐσ^ιοι, ΛΙΐ. xxiv. 7 ; ανάγκη μ€'γάλη, Lk, X-\i. 23 ; άνάστασιν ptX- \(ΐν ίσισθαι, Acts χχιν. 1 5. of times and seasons : χίΐμών ίοτίκ, .Τη. χ. 22; νύ^, Jn. xiii. 30; ι\ηιχοί, •ίη. xviii. 18; καύσων, Lk. xii. 55 ; ίσπίρα, Acts iv. 3 ; πρωία, Jn. xviii. 28 [Ilec] ; σκοτία, Jn. .xx. 1 ; (στ», ην ωρα, — as ίκτη, Lk. xxiii. 44 ; Jn. iv. 6 ; xix. 14 [L Τ Tr WH] ; i. 39 (40), etc.; also of feasts: Jn. v. 1, 10; ix. 14 ; Acts xii. 3; Lk. xxiii. 54 ; Mk. xv. 42. univ. to €σόμ(νου what will be, follow, happen : Lk. xxii. 4!) ; πότ( ταϋτα ΐσται ; Mt. xxiv. 3 ; ίτώί ίσται τοΟτο ; Lk. i. 34 : after the Hebr., και (σται (e/] ye [we] are to be regarded as the temple of (Jod, 2 Co. vi. 16, cf. 1 Co. vi. 19 ; ό θ(6ί ναός αυτής eerriv [(στί(ΐ') R G Tr], κ. το άρνίον, they are to be reganled as its temple, they occupy the place of a tem- ple in the city because present with every one in it, Rev. xxi. 22. Hence 3. eivai, getting an explicative force, is often i. (j. to denote, sir/nifi/, itnport, as ό αγρός ('στίκ ό κόσμος, Mt. xiii. 37-39, 19 S(|. 22 sq. : Lk. viii. 1 1 sq. 14 sq. ; Gal. iv. 24 sq. ; Rev. xvii. l.'j; xix. 8, (Sept. Gen. xii. 26 sq. ; Ezek. xxxvii. 11 ) ; roOr' ίστιν [so Τ Wil uniformly, exc. that WH om. ν (φ(λκ. in Heb. ii. 14j, Lchm. τουτίστιν [exc. in Ro. x. 6, 7, 8 ; also Treg. exc. in Mt. xxvii. 46: Mk. vii. 2; Acts i. 19; Ro. ix. 8;x. 6, 7,8; sometimes written ToCro eartv, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 1 1 ; cf. W 45; B. 11 (10)], an explanatory formula (equiv. to τοϋτο σημaίveι) ivhich is either inserted into the discourse as a parenthesis, or annexed to words as an apposition [cf.W. 530(493); B.400(342). It is to be distinguished from toCto He eoTiv. τοϋτ eariv introduces an inciilent;il explanation for the most part of the language; τούτο δ(' eστtv subjoins an explanatory statement, relating gen- erally to the thought; (cf. our "that is to sa;/," and "that i.s"); see Ro. i. 12 and Fritzsche ad loc] ■ Mt. xxvii. 46 ; Mk. vii. 2; Acts i. 19 ; Ro. vii. 18 ; x. 6-8 ; Pliilem. 12; Heb. ii. 14; vii. 5, etc.; Mkewi.-:e ό cστt, Mk. iii. 17; vii. 11, 34 ; Heb. vii. 2 ; ό eστι μeθeρμηveυόμevov, this signifies, when interpreted, etc. Mk. xv. 34 ; Acts iv. 36 ; see G c. below. 4. In the Bible far more fretpient- ly than in prof, auth., and in the N. T. much oftener in the historical than in the other books, a participle without the article serves as the predicate, being connected with the subject by the verb eivai (cf. W. § 45, 5 and esp. B. 309 (2H5) sqq.) ; and a. so as to form a mere periphrasis of the finite verb ; o. with the Pres- ent ptcp. is formed — a periphrasis of the pres. : (Vri τζροσηνα•η\ηροΰσα . . • και ^:epισσevoυσa, 2 Co. ix. 12, — a |icriph. of the inq)f. or of the aor., mostly in Mark and Luke [B. 312 (2i;8)] : ήν καθ(ΰ&ων. Mk. iv. 38 ; ην πρηά- γων, χ. 32; ην σ^Jγκaθήμevoς, xiv. ut ; ήν διavevωv, Lk. i. 22 ; ήσαν κaθήμevot, v. 1 7 ; ήν ίκβάλλων, xi. 14 ; ήσαν καθ(- ίο'μ(ΐΌΐ [Lchm.. al. καθήμ(νοι]. Acts ii. 2, and other exx. ; once in Paul, Phil. ii. 26 ίττιπηθων ήν, — -a periph. of the fut. ; eσovτan!i■πτovτeς [(W. R G], Mk. xiii. 25. β. Avith the Perfect ptcp. is formed — a periph. of the aor. [impf. (?)] : ήν ίστώς, Lk. v. 1 ; — a periph. of the plpf. : ήσαν e\η\υθότeς,συve\η\υθυΊaι,hk.^■.\'! ; xxiii. 55 ; esp. with the pf. pass. ptc|). : ήν ή ίτιιγραφή e'πιyeγρaμμe'vη, Mk. XV. 26 ; ήν αυτά κeχpημaτ^σμe'vov, Lk. ii. 2il ; ήν TeBpapptvos, Lk. iv. 16 ; add, viii. 2 ; xxiii. 51 ; Acts i. 1 7, etc. -y. once with an Aorist ptcp. a periph. of the plpf. is formed: ήν . ■ . β\ηθe\s (R G L Tr mrg. βιβΧημίνος) iv τη φυλακή, Lk. xxiii. 19 Τ Tr txt. WH ; on the same use of the aor. sometimes in Grk. writ. cf. PassoΛV i. p. 793 ; [L and S. s. V. B. 2 ; yet cf. B. § 144, 24 fin.]. b. so as to indi- cate continuance in any act or state [B. 310 sq. 177 €ΐμΛ (266)] : ην 8ιδάσκω^ was wont to teach, Mk. i. 22 ; Lk. iv. 31 ; xix. 47 ; ^i/ [T Tr txt. WH ηΧθινΙ κηρύσσων, Mk. i. 3y ; Lk. iv. 44 ; ήσαν νηστ^ϋοντα held their fast, Mk. ii. 18 ; ήσαν σνΚ\α\ονντ(ί νκπ: talkinij, Λϋ. i.\. 4 ; ην σνγκύ- ϊΓτουσα. Lk. xiii. 11 : ην θίΧων, Lk. .\xiii. 8 ; ην προσδ(χό- fiifos, Mk. .XV. 43 (Lk. xxiii. .31 πρoσeStχfτo) ; once in Paul, fial. i. 23 ήσαν άκηϋοντα. with the Future [cf. B. 311 (267)]: ίσται 5€Β€μ^νυν,εσταίλ(λνμ(νον,\.(\. ΑυλΙ] remain bound, shall remain loosed, Mt. .xvi. 19; ίσται πατονμίνη shall continue to be trodden down, Lk. x.xi. 24, and other e.xx. o. to signify that one is in the act of doing something ; ην (ρχόμ(νον was in the act of coming, Jn. i. 9 [cf. Mey. ed. Weiss ad loc] ; ην ϋποστρίφων, Acts TUi. 28. d. the combination of elvat with a ptcp. seems intended also to give the verbal idea more force and prominence by putting it in the form of a noun [see B. and W. u. s.] : ην ϊχων κτήματα -noWa (Germ, wohlha- beml, [Eng. was une lliat /tadj), Mt. χίχ. 22 ; Mk. x. 22 ; €ση σιωπών, Lk. i. 20 : ην ί-ττΐ^τασσόμίνος (^obedient, in sub- j'eclion), Lk. ii. 51 ; ϊσθι ϊξουσίανίχων, be thou ruler over, Lk. xix. 1 7 ; ^1/ συνινΒοκων. Acts viii. 1 ; ζων f ί/χι. Rev. i. 1 8, and in other exx. three times in Paul ; it . . . >;X7riitOTfs (σμίν μόνον if we are those who have only hoped, or to whom nothing is left but hope, 1 Co. xv. l'.> ; ην . . . καταλ- Χάσσων, the reconciler, 2 Co. v. 1 1) ; ΰτινά e'irrt Xoyox ίχοντα σοφίας, are things having a reputation of wisdom. Col. ii. 23, (Mattliiae § 560 [(so Kiihner § 3.j3 Anm. 3)] gives exx. fr. prof. auth. in which several words intervene be- tween i'l/m and the ptcp.). e. Of quite another sort are those exx. in which dvat has its own force, being equiv. to ίο be found, to he present, to stay, (see I. above), and the ptcp. is added to e.xpress an act or condition of the subject (cf. B. § 144, 27) : fv τοΙς μνημασι . . . ην (was i. e. stayed) κράζων. Mk. v. .3 ; ην Be (Kt'i (was kept there) . . . βοσκομίνη, Mk. V. 11 ; ^It. viii. 30; ήσαν ev τη 66ω αναβαίνοντίΫ, Luther correctly, they tcere in the road, i/o- ing up etc. Alk. x. 32 ; fla\v av8p€s . . . ^νχην (χοντίς, Acts xxi. 23 ; add, Mt. xii. 10 [R G] ; x.xvii. 55 ; Mk. ii. 6, (in the last two e.xx. ήσαν were present) ; Lk. iv. 33 ; Jn. i. 28 ; iii. 23; Acts xxv. 14; Ro. iii. 12, etc.; άνωθϊν eWtv, καταβαΐνον etc. (insert a comma after ίστίν), is/rom abore, καταβα'ίνον etc. being added by way of explanation, Jas. i. 17 [cf. B. 310 (266)]. 5. The formula ΐγύ «/« (/ am he), freq. in the Gospels, esp. in John, must have its predicate supplied mentally, inasmuch as it is evident from the context (cf. Kriiger § 60, 7) ; thus, ΐγώ (Ιμι, so. Ίησοΰς ό Ναζ. Jn. xviii. 5 [here L mrg. expresses ό Ίησοϊΐ!, WII mrg. 'Iijo•.], 6, 8 ; it is I whom you see, not another, Mt. xiv. 27 ; Mk. vi. 50 ; Lk. xxiv. 36 (Lchm. in br.) ; Jn. vi. 20 ; sc. ό καθημινος κ. προσαιτων, Jn. ix. 9; simply €ΐμί, I am teacher and Lord, .In. .xiii. 13 ; οΰκ ΰμί sc. ίξ αΰτων, Lk. xxii. 58 ; Jn. xviii. 25 ; / am not Elijah, Jn. i. 21 ; spec. I am the Messiah, Mk. xiii. 6 ; xiv. 62; Lk. xxi. 8 ; Jn. iv. 26 ; viii. 24, 2S ; xiii. 19 ; I am the Son of God, Lk. xxii. 70 (like Kin •:κ. Deut. xxxii. 39 ; Is. xliii. 10) ; cf. Keim iii. 320 [Eng. trans, vi. 34: Ho/mann, Schrittbeweis, i. 63 sq.]. The third pers. if used in the same wav : tKUvos ίστιν, sc. ό v'los τοϋ βιοϋ, Jn. Lx. 37 ; sc. ό παραδώσων ipi, .In. .xiii. 26. 6. Of the phrases having a pronoun in place of a predi- cate, the following deserve notice : a. Ws (Ιμι, ei, ϊστίν, a formula of inquiry, used by those desiring — either to know what sort of a man one is whom they see, or what his name is, Jn. i. 1 9 ; viii. 25 ; .x.xi. 1 2 : Acts xxvi. 15; — or that they may see the face of some one spoken of, and that he may be pointed out to them, Lk. xix. 3 ; Jn. ix. 36 ; σύ ris ft ό with a ptcp., tc/io (i. e. how petty) art thou, that etc.? the question of one administering a rebuke and contemptuously denying another's right to do a thing, Ro. Lx. 20 ; xiv. 4, (Strabo 6, 2, 4 p. 271 σν tIs et ό τονΌμηρον ψί'γων ώί μνθύγραφον ;) ; iya3 Tis (Ιμι; tcho (how small) am I '! the language of one holding a modest opinion of himself and recognizing his weakness, Acts xi. 1 7, cf . Ex. iii. 11. b. (\μι ris, like sum aliquis in Lat., to be somebody (eminent) : Acts v. 36 ; tlvai τι, Uke the Lat. aliquid esse, to be something (i. e. something excel- lent) : Gal. ii. 6 ; vi. 3 ; in these phrases τ\ί and τι are emphatic; cf. Kuhner § 470, 3 ; [W. 170 (161) ; B. 114 (100)] ; flvai τι after a negative, to be nothing, 1 Co. iii. 7, cf. Mey. ad loc. ; also in questions having a negative force, 1 Co. x. 19 [cf. λ\. § 6, 2]. οίδίν fi>i, 1 Co. xiii. 2 ; 2 Co. xii. 1 1 ; ovhtv ΐστιν, it is nothing, is of no ac- count, Mt. .x.xiii. 16, 18: Jn. viii. 54 ; Acts xxi. 24 ; 1 Co. vii. 19. c. Ttf fVrt, e. g. ή παραβολή, what does it mean ? what is the explanation of the thing ? Lk. viii. 9 tis ΰη ή παραβοΧή αυτή ; Acts χ. 1 7 Tt &ν fu] το όραμα ; Mk. i. 27 Tt ΐστι τοϋτο ; what is this ? expressive of astonishment, Lk. XV. 20 Tt (ΐη ταϋτα; what might be the cause of the noise he heard? Lk. .xviii. 36 ; Jn. x. 6 τίνα ην, & eXaXfi αύτοΪΓ. τι c'trrt what does it mean? Mt. Lx. 13; .xii. 7; Lk. x.x. 1 7 ; Jn. xvi. 1 7 sq. ; τι eartv el μή orj. Eph. iv. 9 ; see n. 3 above. d. oiror, αΰτη, τοΟτό cVtik foil, by a noun, equiv. to in this is seen, is contained, etc. a. is so employed that the pronoun refers to something which has just been said : oJtos γάρ ίστι 6 νόμος, the law is summed up in what I have just mentioned, comes to this, Mt. vii. 12. p. in John's usage it is so employed that the pronoun serves as the subject, which is defined by a noun that follows, and this noun itself is a substitute as it were for the predicate : αΖτη ΐστΊν ή νίκη . . . ή πίστα ήμων, 1 Jn. ν. 4 ; αυτή (στ\ν ή μαρτυρία τοΰ 6eov, ην etc. 1 Jn. V. 9 Rec. οίτοί, αΰτη. τοΟτό ίστι foil, by ότι [Β. 105 (92) ; cf.W. 161 (152)]: Jn. iii. Ul ; 1 Jn. i. 5 ; v. 11, 14; foil, by Iva (to say that something ought to be done, or that something is desired or demanded [cf. W. 338 (317); B. 240 (207)]) : Jn. vi. 29, 39 sq.; xv. 12; 1 Jd. iii. 11, 23 ; v. 3; foil, by Zre etc. Jn. i. 19 [W. 438 (408)]. 7. The participle ων, ούσα. Sv, ovret, όντα. joined to a sub- stantive or an adjective, has the force of an intercalated clause, and may be translated since or although I am, thou art, etc., [here the Eng. use of the ptcp. agrees in the main with the Grk.] : ft ovv iipeis, πονηροί ovrei. otfiaTf, Mt. vii. 1 1 ; add, xii. 34 ; Lk. xx. 36 ; Jn. iii. 4 ; iv. 9 ; Acts xvi. 21 ; Ro. V. 10 ; 1 Co. viii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 3 ; Jas. iii. 4, and often; twice with other participles, used adjectively [B. 310 (266)] : ovres άττηΚΧοτριωμίνοι, Col. i. 21 : (σκοτίσμ(νοί ειμί, 178 et/it [U G, al. -τωμΓΐΌί], Eph. iv. 18. 8. Sometimes the copula eoTtx (with the accent [see Chandler § U38]) stands at the beginning of a sentence, to emphasize the triitli of what the sentence aillrms or denies : Lk. viii. 1 1 ; 1 Tim. vi. (i ; ΐστι St mortt etc. Ileb. .\i. 1 (although some explain it here [as a subst. verb], ' but failli exists' or ' is found,' to wit in the examples ailduced immediately after [see W. § 7, ;i]) ; several times so used in Philo in statements (quoted by Delitzsch on Ileb. xi. 1) resembling defini- tions, ουκ (στιν : Mt. xiii. 57 ; Mk. xii. 27 ; Acts x. 34 ; I Co. -xiv. 33; Jas. iii. 15. m. tt/ii joined with Adverbs; 1. with adverbs of place; a. where? to he, he husy, somewhere : ixet, Mt. ii. 15 ; xxvii. 55 ; Mk. iii. 1 [L om. Tr br. ην}, etc. ; ivBahf, Acts xvi. 28; taw, .In. xx. 26 ; ol, Mt. ii. 9; xviii. 20; Acts xvi. 13; ίπον, Mk. ii. 4 ; v. 40; Jn. vi. G2; Acts xvii. 1, etc.; ποϋ, Mt. ii. 2; Jn. vii. 11, etc.; iiSe, Mt. xxviii. 6; Mk. ix. 5, etc. b. with adverbs of dis- tance : απίναντί Ttvos, Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xx.wi.) 2) ; fKTOs τ«>Όί, 2 Co. xii. 2, [3 χαίρι! τ. LT Tr WII] ; (μπρο- σθίν TiiOf, Lk. xiv. 2 ; «Wdr τινοί, Lk. xvii. 21 ; ivamiop nvoi. Rev. i. 4 ; vii. 1 5 ; μακρίιν από twos, Jn. xxi. 8 ; Mk. xii. 34 ; πόρρω, Lk. xiv. 32 ; (πάνω, .In. iii. 31", [31'' G Τ WII mrg. om. the cl.] ; of the situation of regions and places : άντιπίρα [or -riVfpa etc. see s. v.] tivos, Lk. viii. 2G ; iyyis, — now standing absol. .In. xix. i2; now with gen., .In. xi. 18; xix. 20, etc. ; now with dat.. Acts ix. 38 ; xxvii. 8. c. whence? ίο fte from some quarter, i. e. to come, originate, from : πόθ(ν, Mt. xxi. 25 ; Lk. xiii. 25, 27 ; Jn. vii. 27 ; ix. 29 ; xix. 9 ; ii. 9 (wdifK ΐστίν sc. ό olvos, whence the wine was procured) ; cWeOfiej/, .In. xviii. 36. 2. with adverbs of quality; οΰτωί (Ιμί, to be thus or so, to be sur/t ; absol. Mt. xiii. 49 ; with tV νμίν added, Mt. xx. 2G [here R G Τ ίσται] ; οϋτως ίσται. so will it be i. e. come to pass, Mt. xiii. 40, (49 [see above]) ; ovrms (στίν or ίσται, of things, events, etc., such >< or will he the state of the case [W. 465 (434)] : Mt. xix. 10 ; xxiv. 27,37,39; Mk. iv. 26; Ro. iv. 18 (Gen. xv. 5): so of persons, Jn. iii. 8. καθώς ίστιν as, even as, he etc. is, 1 .Jn. iii. 2, 7 ; iv. 1 7 ; (ΐμ\ ωσπ(ρ τις to be, to do as one, to imitate him, be like him, Mt. vi. 5 [RG]; Lk. xviii. II [R G Τ WII txt.] ; ίστω σοι ωσπ(ρ etc. regard him as a heathen and a publican, i. e. have no fellowship with him, Mt. xviii. 17 ; ίΙμ\ ώί or iiad tis, to be as i. e. like or equal to any one, Mt. [vi. 5 L Τ Tr WII] ; xxii. 30 ; xxviii. 3; Lk. xi. 44 ; [xviii. II LTrWIImrg.]; xxii. 27; 1 Co. vii. 29 sq. ; τα σπλά-γχνα π€ρισσοτ£ρως us vpas ϊστιν he is moved with the more abundant love toward you, 2 Co. vii. 15. — But see each adverb in its place. rV. (ΙμΊ with the oblique cases of substantives or of pronouns; 1. «και tikos, like the Lat. alicuius esse, i. q. to pertain to a person or a thing, denotes any kind of possession or connection (Possessive Genitive); cf. Krii- ger§47, 6,4sqq.: W.§30,5b.;B.§132, 11. a. ofthings which one owns : ίσται σοΰ πάσα [Rec. πάντα}, Lk. iv. 7 ; ου (στ\ν ή ζώνη αύτη, Acts xxi. 1 1 ; add, Jlk. xii. 7 ; Jn. X. 12; xix. 24 ; — or for the possession of which he is 'itted : τινός iol €if ίλάχιστόν iari, it results for me in, i. e. I account it, a very small thing, 1 Co. iv. 3, (els ωφέλ^ιαν, Aesop, fab. 124, 2). d. In imitation of the Ilebr. ry7\ folL by ^7, fivat el's Ttca or τι stands where the Greeks use a nomi- native [W. and B. u. s. ; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. tir, 3] : Mt. xix. 5 and Mk. x. 8 and 1 Co. vi. 16 and Eph. v. 31 ίσονται fit σάρκα μίαν (fr. Gen. ii. 24) ; 1 Jn. v. 8 eis το ΐν flaiv, unite, conspire, towards one and the same result, agree in one ; 2 Co. vi. 18 (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 1) ; Heb. i. 5 (2 S. vii. 14) ; viii. 10. 3. ίκ tivos, a. to be of i. e. apart of any thing, to belong to, etc. [W. 368 (345) ; cf. B. 159 (139)] : 1 Co. xii. 15 sq. ; ?κ τίνων, of the num- ber of: Mt. xxvi. 73 ; Mk. xiv. 69 sq. ; Lk. x.xii. 58 ; Jn. i. 24 ; vi. 64, 7 1 [R T] ; vii. 50 ; x. 26 ; xviii. 1 7, 25 ; Acts xxi. 8 ; 2 Tim. iii. 6 ; 1 Jn. ii. 19 ; Rev. xvii. 11, (Xen. mem. 3, 6, 17) ; ϊκ τοϋ άριθμοϋ τίνων, Lk. .xxii. 3. b. to he of'i. e. to have originated, sprung, come, from [W. § 51, 1 d.; B. 327 (281 sq.)]: Lk.xxiii. 7; Jn. i. 46 (47); iii. 31 (0 iiv ίκ Tr]s yr]s) ; iv. 22 ; vii. 52 ; viii. 23 ; xviii. 36 ; Acts iv. 6 ; xix. 25 ; xxiii. 34 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; 1 Jn. iv. 7 ; or iariv c'l νμων, your fellow-countryman, Col. iv. 9. o. to be of i. e. proceed from one as the author [W. 366 (344) sq. ; B. 327 (281)] : Mt. v. 37; Jn. vii. 17; Acts v. 38 sq. ; 2 Co. iv. 7 ; 1 Jn. ii. 16 ; Heb. ii. 11 ; elvai (ξ oipavoi, (ξ ανθρώπων, to be instituted by the authority of (iod, by the authority of men, Mt. xxi. 25 ; I\Ik. xi. 30 ; Lk. xx. 4 ; to be begotten of one, Mt. i. 20. d. to he of i. e. he con- nected with one ; to be related to, [cf. Win. §51,1 d. ; cf. in fK, II. 1 a. and 7] : 6 νόμος ονκ εστίν Ικ πίστεως, has no connection with faith. Gal. iii. 12; e^ έργων νόμου fivai (Luth. mit Werken umgehen). Gal. iii. 10 ; esp. in John's usage, to depend on the power of one, to he prompted and governed hi/ one, and reflect his character : thus fivat εκ τηΰ Βιαβόλυν, Jn. \\ύ. 44 ; 1 Jn. iii. 8 ; εκ τον πονηρού, 1 Jn. iii. 12; ck τοϋ κόσμου, Jn. .xv. 19; xvii. 14, IC; 1 Jn. iv. 5; when this expression is used of wickedness, it is equiv. to produced by the world and pertaining to it, 1 Jn. ii. 16 ; opp. to εκ τον θεοϊι είναι, Jn. viii. 47 ; 1 Jn. iv. 1-3 ; this latter phrase is used esp. of true Christians, as begotten anew by the Spirit of God (see γεννάω, 2 d.) : 1 Jn. iv. 4, 6 ; V. 19 ; 3 Jn. 1 1 ; « της αληθείας είναι, either to come from the love of truth as an effect, as 1 Jn. ii. 21, or, if used of a man, to be led and governed by the love and pursuit of truth, as Jn. xviii. 37 ; 1 Jn. iii. 19; 6 iiv εκ της γης εκ της γης εστί, he who is from the earth as resjjects origin bears the nature of this his earth- ly origin, is earthly, Jn. iii. 31. e. to be of i. a. formed from : Rev. x.xi. 21 ; 1 Co. xi. 8. 4. ev τινι, a. with dat. of place, to he in i. e. he present, to stay, dwell ; a. prop. : Mt. xxiv. 26 ; Lk. ii. 49, etc. ; on the surface of a place (Germ, auf), as ev rfj όδω, Mk. x. 32 and elsewhere; εν τω άγρω, Lk. xv. 25. at : ev δεξιά τοΰ θεον, Ro. viii. 34 ; to live, dwell, as in a city : Lk. xviii. 3; Acts is. 10; Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 2, etc. ; of God, εν ονρανοίς, Eph. vi. 9 ; of things which are found, met with, in a ])lace: 2 Tim. ii. 20, etc. β. things so pertaining to locality that one can, in a proper sense, be in them or be surrounded by them, are spoken of in the same way metaph. and improp., as eivai ev τω φωτί, ev ttj σκοτία : 1 Jn. ii. 9, 11 ; 1 Th. V. 4 ; iv σαρκί, Ro. vii. 5 ; viii. 8, (see σαρξ, 4). b. tobe in a state or con d i tion [see B. 330 ( 2S4 ) ; cf. W. § 29, 3 b. and ev, I. 5 e.] : ev εΙρηνη, Lk. xi. 21 ; e'v εχθρό, xxiii. 12 ; ev κρίματι, ibid. 40 ; εν περιτομί/, εν άκρο- βυστία, Ro. iv. 10; eV δόξη. 2 Co. iii. 8, etc.; hence spoken of ills which one is afflicted with : έν ρνσει αίματος, Mk. V. 25 ; Lk. viii. 43, {iv tji νόσω. Soph. Aj. 271 ; in morbo esse, Cic. Tusc. 3, 4, 9) ; of wickedness in which one is, as it were, merged, iv ταΐς άμαρτίαις, 1 Co. xv. 1 7 ; of holiness, in which one perseveres, iv πίστει, 2 Co. xiii. 5. o. to be in possession if, provided with a thing [ W. 386 (361)] : Phil. iv. 11 ; iv i^ovaia, Lk. iv. 32; iv βάρει (see βάρος,Άη.), 1 Th. ii. 7 (6). d. to he occupieil in a thing (Bnhdy. p. 210 ; [see iv, I. 5 g.]) : iv ττ) έορτϊ), in cele- brating the feast, Jn. ii. 23 ; to he sedulously devoted to [A. V. give one's self wholly ίο] α thing, 1 Tim. iv. 15, (Hor. epp. 1, 1, 11 omnis in hoc sum). e. a person or thing is said to he in one, i. e. in his soul : thus, God (by his power and influence) in the prophets, 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; Christ (i. e. his holy mind and power) in the souls of his disciples or of Christians, Jn. xvii. 26 ; 2 Co. xiii. 5 ; τό πνενμα της αληθείας, Jn. xiv. 1 7 ; friends are said to be iv TJI καρδία of one Λνΐιο loves them, 2 Co. vii. 3. vices, virtues, and the like, are said to be in one : as δόλοί. .Τη. i. 47 (48) ; αδικία, .In. vii. 18; άγνοια, Eph. iv. 18 ; αμαρτία, 1 Jn. iii. 5 ; αλήθεια, .Τη. viii. 44 ; 2 Co. xi. 10; Eph. iv. 21 ; 1 Jn. i. 8 ; ii. 4, {αλήθεια και κρίσις, 1 Mace. vii. 18) ; αγάπη, Jn. xvii. 26 ; 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; ό Xoyof αντον (τ. θεοϊι) ουκ ίστιν iv ήμ'ιν, God's word has not left its impress on our souls, 1 .In. i. 10; το φως ουκ εστίν iv αντώ, the effi- cacy or influence of the light is not in his soul, [rather, an obvious physical fact is used to suggest a spiritual truth : the light !.•? not in him, does not shine from within outwards], Jn. xi. 10; σκοτία, 1 .Τη. i. 5 ; σκάνδαλον, 1 Jn. ii. 10 i. e. there is nothing within him to seduce him to sin (cf. Diisterdieck and lluther ad loc). Acts xiii. 15 (if ye have in mind any word of exhortation etc. [W. 218 (204 sq.)]). f. iv τω θεω είναι is said α. of Christians, as being rooted, so to speak, in him, i. e. inti- m.ately united to him, 1 .Tn. ii. 5 ; v. 20 ; β. of all men, because the ground of their creation and continued being is to be found in him alone, Acts xvii. 2S. g. with a dat. of the pers. to he in, — [i. e. either] among the num- ber of. Mt. xxvii. 56 ; Mk. xv. 40 ; Lk. ii. 44 ; Ro. i. 6 ; — [or, in the midst of: Acts ii. 29 ; vii. 44 Rec, etc.] ΐΐμί 180 h. notcworthv, further, arc the followinc;: tirri rt tvTivi there is soinethini; (to hiame) in one, Acts xxv. ϋ ; some- thinj; is (founded [A. V. stand']) in a thing, 1 Co. ii. 5 ; ούκ ίστίχ iv oibevi ήλλω ή σωτηιιία salvation is (laid up, cmhodied) in none other, can be e.\i)eeted from none, Acts iv. 12 ; with dat. of the thing, is (contained, wrapped up) in something : Ej)!). v. 1« ; Ileb. x. 3; 1 .In. iv. 18. 5. ίί /il ί'πί a. Tivof, to be oJi: cVJ τοϋ &ώματο!, I>k. xvii. 31 ; tVi T^r κ(φιι\η!, .In. xx. 7 ; to be (set) over a thing. Acts viii. 27 ; to ])reside, rule, over, Ro. ix. 5. b. Ttfi, to be at [W. 392 (367)] : em Supatt, Mt. xxiv. S3 ; Mk. -xiii. 29. c. τινά, to he ujMti une : χάρα ην ('πι τίνα, was with him, assisted him, Lk. ii. 40 ; Acts iv. 33 ; πνιϋμα ην ί'πί τίνα, had come upon one, was im|)elling him, Lk. ii. 2.'j, cf. Lk. iv. 18 ; Sept. Is. Ixi. 1 ; add, (Jal. vi. lli ; elvai iVl TO αυτό, to be (assembled) together [cf. ainas. III. 1], Acts i. 15; ii. 1, 44 ; of cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5 (ace. to the reading ητ( for liec. σννίρχισβί). 6. fi^i κατά a. Tti/dt, ti) he against one, to oppose him: Mt. xii. 30; Lk. Lx. 50; xi. 23; Gal. v. 23; Ro. viii. 31 (opp. to νπίρ TiKot, as in Mk. ix. 40). b. κατά τι, acconlini/ til something ; κατά σάρκα, κατά irvevpa, to bear the char- acter, have the nature, of the flesh or of the Spirit, Ro. viii. 6 ; e'rat κατ άνθρωπον, Gal. i. 1 1 ; κατ άΧηθ(ΐαν, Ro. ii. 2. 7. μ(τά TiiOf, a. to be with (i. e. to associate with) one: Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. iii. 14; v. 18; Lk. vi. 3; .In. iii. 26 ; xii. 17; xvi. 32 ; Acts ix. 39, and often in the Gos- pels ; Rev. xxi. 3 ; of ships accompanying one, Mk. iv. 36 ; of wh.at is present with one for his profit, 2. In. 2 ; Ro. xvi. 20; Ilebraistically, to be with one i. e. as a help, (of God, becoming the companion, as it were, of the righteous) : Lk. i. 66 ; Jn. iii. 2 ; viii. 29 ; xvi. 32 ; Acts vii. 9 ; x. 38 ; xi. 21 ; xviii. 10 ; 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; Phil. iv. 9 ; 2 ,In. 3, cf. Mt. xxviii. 20, (Gen. xxi. 20 ; .ludg. vi. 1 2, etc.). b. to be (i. e. to cooperate) with : Mt. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23, (Xen. an. 1, 3, 5 [al. iVrat]). 8. (Ιμι παρά a. rivdr, to (have come and so) be from one : Christ is snid eivai παρά τού θιοϊ), .In. vi. 46; vii. 29; ix. 16, 33; τι παρά TWOS, is from i. e. given by one. .In. xvii. 7. b. τινί, to Ite icith one: Mt. xxii. 25; oiic elvai παρά τω Λώ is used to describe (pialities alien to God, as προσωπολημ-^ία, Ro.ii.ll ; Eph.vi. 9; αδικία, Ro.ix. 14. c. τινά (τόπον), by, by the side of: Mk. v. 21; Acts x. 6. 9. πρΟ! T«ra [cf. W. 405 (37H)], a. towards: προς ίσπίραν ϊστΐ it is towards evening, Lk. x.xiv. 29. b. by (turned tow- ards) : Mk. iv. 1. c. with one: Mt. xiii. 56 ; Mk. vi. 3; ix. 19 ; Lk. ix. 41 ; .In. i. 1 [cf. Mey. ad loc.]. 10. συν Tivi, a. to associate leith one: Lk. xxii. 56; xxiv. 44; Acts xiii. 7 ; Phil. i. 23 ; Col. ii. 5 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 7. b. to be tin: companion of one, to accompani) him : Lk. τϋ. 1 2 [R''' TTr br. WU]; viii. 38; Acts iv. 13; xxii. 9; 2 Pet. i. 18. e. to be an adherent of one. be on his side: Acts v. 17 ; xiv. 4 [A. V. to hold with], (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 37). 11. <ϊμ\ ίπίρ a. Tivoc, to be for one, lo favor his side: Mk. l\. 40; Lk. ix. 50; Ro. viii. 31, (opp. to ιϊμΧ κατά Turns), b. τινά, to be above one, to surpass, excel him : Lk. vi. 40. 12. ίπό τίνα [cf. Β. 341 (293)], a. to be under (i. e. subject to) one : Mt. viii. 9 R G Τ Tr ; Ro. iii. 9 ; vi. 14 sq. ; Gal. iii. 10, 25 ; v. 18 : 1 Tim. vi. 1. b. to be (locally) under a thing : e. g. under a tree, Jn. i. 48 (49); a cloud, 1 Co. x. 1. Further, see each preposition in its own place. VI. As in classical (5rcek, so also in the N. T. ii/xt is very often omitted (cf. Winer § 64, I. 2, Λvho gives nu- merous exx. [cf. 596 (555) ; 350 (328 s.p)] ; B. 136 (119) sq.), ί'στίι» most freiiuently of all the parts: Lk. iv. 18: Ro. xi. 36 ; 1 Co. iv. 20 ; 2 Tim. iii. 16 ; Ilcb. v. 13, etc. ; in exclamations. Acts xix. 28, 34; in (piestions, Ro. ix. 14 ; ί Co. vi. 14-l(i ; τί yap, Phil. i. 18 ; Ro. iii. 3 ; τΐοΐν, Ro. iii. 9 ; vi. 15 ; also ei. Rev. xv. 4 ; (Ιμί, 2 Co. xi. 6; ίσμίν,ίστί, 1 Co. iv. 10 ; eiai, Ro. iv. 14 ; 1 Co. xiii. 8,etc. ; the impv. ?στω, Ro. xii. 9 ; Heb. xiii. 4 s<|. ; corf, Ro. xii. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 8; ΰη in ivishes, INIt. xvi. 22; (Jal. vi. 16, etc.; even the subjunc. 3 after ΐκα, Ro. iv. 16; 2 Co. viii. 1 1 [after οπωί], 13 ; often the ptcp. ων. Svrts, as (. [cf. Lob. Technol. p. 137] : on the other 181 hand, from ΡΕί2 come pf. fφηκa, 3 pers. plur. (Ιρήκασιν (Acts xvii. 2S), ί'φηκαν (Rev. xix. 3; see γίνομαι), inf. (Ιρηκίναι, Heb. X. 15 LTTrWH; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing, (ϊρηται, ptcp. (ΐρημίΐΌν ; plpf. ίΐρήκαν ; 1 aor. ϊρρίθην (Rev. vi. 11 ; ix. 4 and R G Τ WII in Mt. v. 21 S(j(i.; L Τ Tr WII in Ro. ix. 12, 2i; ; Gal. iii. 16), ["strict" (cf. Veitch p. 575)] Attic ίρρηθηυ (Mt. V. 21 sqq. LTr; R G in Ro. ix. 12, 26 ; Gal. iii. 16 ; [cf. B. 57 (50) ; WH. App. p. 106]), ptcp. ρηθήΐ, ρηθίν ; Sept. for lOS ; tospeak, say, whether orally or by letter ; 1. with an accus. of the obj. : a. with ace. of the thing: (Indv'Koyov, Mt. viii. 8 Rec. ; Jn. ii. 22 [L Ϊ Tr WII]; vii. 36; xviil. ■), 32; ρήμα, Mk. xiv. 72 [Knapp et al.] ; einelv Aoyoi/ eis τίνα, i. s (πος (Ιττύν, so fo sai/ (a phrase f reij. in class. Grk., cf . Weiske, De iilconasmis gr. p. 47 ; Matthiae § 545 ; Delitzsch on Heb. as below ; [Kiih- ner § 5S5, 3 ; Kriiger § 55, 1, 2 ; (Joodwin § 100 ; W. 449 (419); 317 (298)]), Heb. vii. 9, (opp. to άκριβι: λόγω. Plat. rep. 1, 341 b.) ; την αΚήθααν, Mk. v. 33; αΚήθ^ιαν ipS>, 2 Co. xii. 6 ; τοΰτο αληβΐς (ίρηκαί, •Ιη. iv. 18 [W. 464 (433) η.] ; τΙΛπω; ivhat shall I saij? (the expression of one who is in doubt what to say), Jn. xii. 27 ; πως ΐρύ τό άμην . . .; 1 Co. xiv. 16; τί epovp^v ; or tl qvv epovpev; what shall we say? i. e. what rejily can we make? or, to what does that bring us? only in the Ep. to the Ro. [W. § 40, 6] viz. iii. 5 ; vi. 1 ; vii. 7 ; ix. 14, 30 ; with wpot ταϋτα added, viii. 31 ; elne'tv τι π(ρί rivot, Jn. vii. 39 ; x. 41. Sayings from the O. T. which are quoted in the New are \isually introduced as follows : to ρηθϊν νπο του [LT Tr WH om. τοϊί] κυρίου Sia τοϋ ττροφήτον, Mt. i. 22 ; ii. 15 ; υπό τοϋ θίον, Mt. xxii. .'il ; ΰπο του προφήτου Rec. Mt. xxvii. 35, cf. ii. 17 ; το ρηθίν διά τίνος. Mt. ii. 17 LT Tr WH, 23 ; iv. 14 ; viii. 1 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 35 ; xxi. 4 ; xxvii. 9 ; το (Ιρημίνον διά τον ττροφ. Acts ii. 16 ; τό (Ιρημί- νον, Lk. ii. 24; Acts xiii. 40; Ro. iv. 18; ΐρρίθη, Mt. v. 21, etc. ; καβως eipijKfi», Heb. iv. 3. b. with ace. of the pers. to speak of, designate by words: ov tlnov, Jn. i. 15 [(not WII txt.) ; B. 377 (323) ; cf. Ro. iv. 1 WH txt. {say o/")] ; ό ρηθ(ίς, Mt. iii. 3. flndv τίνα καλώς. Ιο speak well of one, praise him, Lk. vi. 26, (ίί elwe'iv τίνα, Horn. Od. 1, 302) ; κακώς, to speak ill of one. Acts xxiii. 5 fr. Ex. x.xii. 28; cf. Kuhner § 409, 2; 411, 5; [W. §32, 1 b. β. ; Β. 146 (128)]. c. with an ellipsis of the ace. αίτά (see αύτοΓ, II. 3) : Lk. xxii. 67; Jn, ix. 27; xvi. 4, etc. r. ΐξίστην; pf. Ίηί. (ξ(στακ(ναί; Mid., [pres. inf. (ξίστασθαι'] ; impf. 3 pers. plur. (ξίσταντο ; 1. In pres., impf., fut., 1 aor. act. to throw out of position, to displace : τίνα τοϋ φρον(Ιν, to throw one out of his mind, drive one out of his senses, Xen. mem. 1, 3, 12; φρινών, Eur. Bacch. 850 ; hence simply to amaze, astonish, l/iron• into wonderment: τινά, Lk. xxiv. 22; Acts viii. 9. 2. In perf., pluperf., 2 aor. act. and also the mid., a. to be amazed, astounded: Mt. xii. 23 ; Mk. ii. 12; Lk. viii. 56: Actsii. 7, 12; viii. 13; ix. 21 ; .x. 45; xii. 16, (Sept. for Tin, to tremlile, Ex. xix. 18 ; Ruth iii. 8, etc.) ; e|e'- στησαν ίκστάσιι μ(•γάΚτ), they were amazed with a great amazement (see ίκσ-τασις, 3), Mk. v. 42; iv ίαυτο'ις (ξί- σταντο, Mk. vi. 51 ; ivith dat. of the thing: μαγιίαις (ξ- ίστακίναι, had been put beside themselves with magic arts, carried away with wonder at them. Acts viii. 11 [but this form of the perf. is transitive; cf. B. 48 (41) ; Veitch 339] ; (ξίσταντο (πί with dat. of tiling, Lk. ii. 47 (Ex. .xi.x. 18; Sap. v. 2). b. to be out of one's mind, be- side one's self, insane : 2 Co. v. 13 (opp. to σωφρόνων) ; Mk. iii. 21 [cf. Β. 198(171); W. § 4o, ."> b.] ; (Grk. writ., where they use the word in this sense, generally add τοϋ φρονιΐν, τών φρίνών : Isoc, Eur., Polyb., al.).* ίξ-Μτχνω : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. (ξισχΰσητί, to be eminently able, to have full strength, [cf. eV, VI. 6] : foil, by an inf. Eph. iii. 18. (Sir. vii. 6; rare in Grk. writ., as Dioscor., Strab., Plut.) * cg-oSos, -ou, ή. (oS()f), exit, i. e. departure: Heb. xi. 22; inetaph. ή (ξο86ς τίνος the close of one's career, one's final fate, Lk. ix. .i 1 ; departure from life, decease : 2 Pet. i. 15, as in Sap. iii. 2; \ii. 6; [Philo de caritate § 4]; with addition of τοϋ ^v. Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 2 ; [of τοϋ βίου. Just. dial. c. Tryph. § 105].• {ξ-ολοθρ£νω and (ace. to the reading best attested by the oldest Mss. of the Sept. and received by LTTrWH [see ο\οθρ(ΰω^) (ξ6λ(θρ(ΰω: fut. pass. (ξο\οθρ(υθησομαι; to destroy out of its place, destroy utterly, to exlirpale : ex τ»ϋ Καοϋ, Acts iii. 23. (Often in the Sept., and in the 0. T. Apocr., and in Test. xii. Patr. ; Joseph, antt. f<, 11,1; 1 1, C, (i ; hardly in native (Jrk. writ.) * ίξ-ο(ΐολογίω, -ώ : 1 aor. (ξωμολιΊγησα ; Mid., [pres. (ξ- ομυλογυίμαι]; fut, (ξιιμολογήσυμαι; [1 aor. subj. 8 pers. sing, -γήσηται, Phil. ii. 1 1 U (i L txl. Tr txt. WH] ; (f'| eilher_/»iV/iy;-o)n the heart, freely, or publicly, openly [cf. W. 102 (97)]) ; act. and depon. mid. to confess, to pro- fess ; 1. to confess : tqs αμαρτίας, Mt. iii. G ; Mk. i. 5 ; [Jas. V. 16 L Τ Tr WII], (Jose|)h. antt. 8, 4, 6 ; [cf. b. j. 5, 10, 5 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 51,3; Barn. ep. 19, 12]) ; τάς πράξ(ΐς. Acts xix. IS; τα τιαραιττώμητα. Jas. v. 16 RG; {iiTTav, Plut. Eum. c. 17; την αλίιβίίαν άν(υ βασά- νων, id. Auton. c. 59). 2. to jinfrss i. e. to acknoirt- edge openly and joyfully: το ονομά Ttras, Rev. iii. 5 Rec; foU. by ότι, Phil. ii. 11 ; with dat. of pers. [cf. W. § 31, If.; B. 176 (153)] to 07ie's honor, i. e. to celebrate, gice praise to (so Sept. for h ΓΤΙΙΠ, Ps. xxix. (xx.\.) 5 ; cv. (cvi.)47; cxxi. (cxxii.)'4, etc. ; [W. 32]) : Ro. xiv. 11; XV. 9 fr. Ps. xvii. (.xviii.) 50, (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 3); τινί (dat. of pers.) foil, by o-t : jMt. xi. 25 ; Lk. x. 21. to profess that one will do something, to promise, agree, engage: Lk. .xxii. 6 [Lchm. oni.] ; (in tliis sense the Greeks and Josephus use opoXoyelv).' ί|-όν, SLO (ξ(στι. (ξ-ορκίζω ; 1. Ιο exact an oath, to force to an oath, (Dem., Polyb., ApoUod., Diod., Plut., al.), for which the earlier (irks, used (ξορκάω, [cf. W. 102 (97)]. 2. to ad- jure : τινά κατά τίνος, one by a person [cf. κατά, I. 2 a.], foil, by Ίνα [Β. 237 (20."))], Mt. xxvi. 63 ; (Gen. x.xiv. 3).• 6ξ-ορκι<Γτή5, -oO, 0, ((ξορκίζω) ; 1. he who exacts an oath of another. 2. an exorcist, i. e. one who employs a formula of conjuration for expelling demons : Acts xix. 13. (Joseph, antt. X, 2, 5 ; Lcian. epigr. in Antliol. 11, 427; often in the church Fathers.) * ίξ-ορ«<Γ<Γω : 1 aor. ptep. (ξορϋξαντ(ς; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to dig out: τους οφθαλμούς (l)rop. to pluck out the eyes; so Judg. xvi. 21 [Alex.]; 1 S. .xi. 2; Hdt. 8, 116; Joseph, antt. C, 5, 1 ; Lcian. dial. deor. 1, 1 ; al.) kqI διδύναι τινί. metaph. to renounce the most precious things for another's advantage. Gal. iv. 15 (similar expressions see in Ter. adelph. 4, 5, 67; Hor. sat. 2, 5, 35 ; [Wet- stein ad loc.]) ; in opposition to a very few interp. vrhu, assuming that Paul suffered from a iveakness of the eyes, understand the words literally, " Ye would have plucked out your sound eyes and have put them into me," see Aleyer ad loc. ; [cf. reff. s. v. σκόλο^, fin.]. 2. to diq through : την στίγην, Mk. ii. 4.* eJ-o\)Siveii>, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, subjunc. 3 pers. sing, (ξου- 8(νηθη ; pf. pass. ptcp. (ξουδίνημίνος ; Ιο hold and treat as (If' no account, utterly to despise : τον Xoyov, pass., 2 Co. X. 10 Lchm. to set at nought, treat with contumely: a person, pass., IVPk. ix. 12 L Tr WII, (Ezek. xxi. 10). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 182 ; [B. 28 (25) ; VV^ 91 (87) ; Soph. Lex. s. v.; WH. App. p. 166].• c^-ovS; power. 1. power of choice, liberty of doing a.i one pleases; leave or permission: 1 Co. ix. 12, IS; (χαν (ξυνσΐαν, 2 Th. iii. 9 ; with an inf. added indicating the thing to be done, Jn. x. 18 ; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq. ; Heb. xiii. 10 [WH br. (ξ.~\ ; foil, by an inf. with τοϋ, 1 Co. ix. 6 (L Τ Tr WII om. ToO) ; with a gen. of the thing or the pers. with regard to Avhich one has the power to decide : Ro. ix. 21 (where an ex])lanatory infin. is added [B. 2(50 (224)]); 1 Co. ix. 12; tVi to ξνλον rrjs fuj^f. permission to use the tree of life. Rev. xxii. 14 [see enl, C. I. 2 e.] ; (ζονσίαν ΐχ(ΐν Trepl τον ίδιου θίΧηματοζ (ορρ. to ανάγκην (χαν [cf. W. § 30, 3 Ν. ό]), 1 Co. νϋ. 37; iV τή 18ία (|ουσία, [appointed, see τίθημι, 1 a. sub fin.] according to his own choice. Acts i. 7 ; cV τη ση (ξουσία ίπήρχ(ν, i. e. at thy free disposal. Acts v. 4 ; used of liberty under the gospel, as opp. to the yoke of the Mosaic law, 1 Co. viii. 9. 2. physical and mental power; the ability or strength with which one is endued, which he either possesses or exercises: Mt. ix. 8; Acts viii. 19; Rev. ix. 3, 19; xiii. 2, 4 ; xviii. 1 ; foil, by an inf. of the thing to be done, Mk. iii. 15 ; Lk. xii. 5 ; Jn.i.l2; Rev.ix. 10; xi. 6 : xiii. .5 ; full, by τοϋ with the inf. Lk. x. 19 ; αΰττ; ίσ-τιν ή (ξουσία τοϋ σκάτουί, this is the power that darkness exerts, Lk. xxii. 53 ; noielv (ξονσίαν to exert power, give e.xhibitions of power, Rev. xiii. 12; cv ίξουσϊα elvai, to be possessed of power and influence, Lk. iv. 32; also ίξου- σίαν ΐχιιν (both expressions refer to the ability and weiglit which Jesus exhibited in his teaching) Mt. vii. 29 ; [Mk. i. 22] ; κατ ίξουσίαν powerfully, Mk. i. 27 ; also (V (ξουσία, Lk. iv. 36. 3. the power of authority (influence) and of right : Mt. xxi. 23 ; Mk. xi. 28 ; Lk. XX. 2 ; spoken of the authority of an apostle, 2 Co. x. 8 ; .xiii. 10; of the divine authority granted to Jesus as Messiah, with the inf. of the thing to be done, Mt. ix. 6 ; Mk.ii. 10; I^k. v. 24; Jn. v. 27; iv ποία ίξουσία ; clothed in what authority (i. e. thine own or God's?), Mt. xxi. 23, 24, 27; Mk. xi. 28, 29, 33; Lk. xx. 2, 8; delegated authority (Germ. VoUmachi, authorization) : παρά τίνος, with gen. of the pers. by whom the authority is given, or received. Acts ix. 14 ; xxvi. 10, 12 [R G]. 4. the power tfrnle or government (the power of him whose will and commands must be submitted to by others and obeyed, [generally translated authority]) ; a. univ. : Mt. xxviii. 18; Jude 25; Rev. xii. 10; xvii. 13; 'λaμβάvfιv ίξονσίαν ώϊ βασιλί t'f, Rev. xvii. 12 ; ίΐμί ΰ-πο ίξουσίαν, 1 am under authority, ^It. viii. 9 ; with τασσό /iei/of added, [Mt. viii. 9 LWHbr.]; Lk. vii. 8; ϊξουσία τιι /o's, gen. of the object, authority (to be exercised) over, as των πνευμάτων των ακαθάρτων, ^Ik. \ΐ. 7 ; with ωστ€ (κβάλΧΐΐν αυτά added, Mt. χ. 1 ; (ξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός, authority over all mankind, Jn. xvii. 2, (πάσης σαρκός κυριίαν, Bel and the Drag. vs. 5) ; [gen. of the subject, toC 2ατανΰ, Acts xxvi. 18] ; tVi two, power over one, so as to be able to subdue, drive out, destroy. Rev. vi. 8 ; fVt τα δαιμόνια, Lk. ix. 1 ; or to hold submissive to one's wUl, Rev. xiii. 7 ; €7ri Tos πΧηγάς, the power to inflict plagues and to put an end to them. Rev. xvi. 9 ; €ϊτϊ των ΐθνών, over the heathen nations, Rev. ii. 20 ; em' τίνος, to destroy one. Rev. .XX. G ; (χιιν (ξηνσίαν t ττι τοϋ πυρός, to ])reside, have control, over fire, to hold it subject to Ids ivill, Rev. xiv. 18 ; €7Γι τώι* υδάτων, ,\i. G ; ΐπάνω τίνος (ξουσίαν €\(ΐν, to be ruler over a thing, Lk. xLx. 1 7. b. specifically, a. of the power of judicial decision; ϊξουσίαν ίχαν with an inf. of the thing decided : σταυρώσαι and άττολί- σαί τίνα, Jn. xix. 1 ; foil, by κατά τίνος, the power of deciding against one, ibid. 11 ; vapadoivai τίνα ■ . . τή (ξουσία τοϋ ήγιμόνος, Lk. xx. 20. β. of authority to manage domestic affairs: Mk. .xiii. 34. c. me- tonymically, a. a thing subject to authority or rule: Lk. iv. 6 ; jurisdiction : ίκ της (ξουσία: Ήρώδου eori'i', Lk. xxiii. 7(1 Mace. vi. 11 [cf. Ps. cxiii. (exiv.) 2; Is. xxxi.\. 2]). β. one who possesses authority; (cf. the Lat. use of honestales, dignitates, auctorilates [so the Eng. authori- ties, digiuties, etc.] in reference to persons ) ; αα. a ruler, human magistrate, (Dion. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32): Ro. xiii. 1-3; plur. : Lk. xii. 11; Ro. xiii. 1; Tit. iu. 1. ββ. the leading and more powerful among created be- ings superior to man, spiritual potentates ; used in the plur. of a certain class of angels (see αρχή, δΰναμις, ^/jo'iOr, κυρίότης) : Col. i. 16 ; 1 Pet. iii. 22, (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 226 sq.; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. I.e.]) ; with t'l» Totf (πονρανίηις added, Eph. iii. 10; πάσα (ξουσία, 1 Co. XV. 24 ; Eph. i. 21 ; Col. ii. 10; used also of demons : in the plur., Eph. vi. 12; Col. ii. 15; collectivel}• [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 469], ή (ξουσία τοί ά(ρος (see at'ip), Eph. ii. 2; τοϋ σκότους. Col. i. 13 [al. refer this to 4 a. (or c. a.) above (cf. Lk. .xxii. 53 in 2), and regard σκότος as per- sonified; see σκότοί, b.]. d. a sign of the husband's authority over his tcife, i. e. the veil with which propriety required a woman to cover herself, 1 Co. xi. 10 (as /3a- σί\(ία is used by Diodorus 1, 47 for the sign of regal power, i. e. a crown). [Syn. see δΰναμις, fin. On the inf. after cf and (ξ. (χ(ΐν cf. Β. 260 (223 sq.).] * 6ξον<ηάζω ; 1 f ut. pass, (ξουσιασθήσομαι ; ((ξουσία) ; i. q. (ξονσίαν (χω, to have power or authority, use power: [el' π\(ίοσι (ξ. πολλών μοναρχιών, Aristot. eth. End. 1, 5 p. 1216% 2] ; (v άτίμοις, Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 44 ; Tirar, to be inasler of any one, exercise authority over one, Lk. xxii. 25 ; τοϋ σώματος, to be master of the body, i. e. to have Φχή 226 eirarfyeXla full and entire authority over the body, to hold the body subject to one's will, 1 Co. vii. 4. Pass. foil, by υπό Ttxot, to be brought under the power of any one, 1 Co. vi. 12. (Sept. several times in Neh. and EccL, chiefly for hp^ and DSr•) [COMP. : κατ-(ξουσίάζω.'\ * 'ξοχή• "if' ή' (fr. ί'^ί'χω to stand out, be prominent; of. imfftox^q); 1. prop, in tirk. writ, aiii/ prominence or prujectiiin, as the peak or summit of a moimlain («V ίξοχϊ] πίτρας, Job xxxix. 28 Sept.) ; in medical writ, a protuberance, sirelling, wart, etc. 2. metajjli. eminence, excellence, superiority, (Cic. ad Att. 4, 15, 7 (ζοχί) in nuUo est, pecunia omnium dignitatem exacijuat) ; άν- Hpfs oi κατ (ζοχην oiTf s riji πόλίωι, the prominent men of the city. Acts xxv. 23.* ίξ-υιτνίζω : 1 aor. subjunc. {'^υπνίσω; (Uttios) ; to Jcal'e up, awaken out of sleep: [trans, αίτόν^, Jn. .xi. 11. ([.lud^. xvi. 14]; 1 K. iii. 15; Job xiv. 12; Antonin. 6, 31 ; I'lut. [de solert. anim. 20, 4] ; Test. xii. Patr. [Levi § 8 ; Jud. § 25, etc.] ; the better Grks. said αφυπνίζω, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 224 ; [W. § 2, 1 d.].)* i|-uirvos, -ov, (ϋπνος), roused out of sleep : Acts xvi. 27. (1 Esdr. iii. 3 ; [Joseph, antt. 11,3, 2].) ' ίξω, adv., (fr. ίξ, as ?σω and (ΐσω fr. c's and els) ; 1. without, out of doors; a. adverbially: Mk. xi. 4 ; joined with verbs: ί'στάναι, Mt. xii. 46,47 [WH t.\t. om. the vs.]; Mk. iii. 31 ; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; Jn. xviii. IG; xx. 11 [Lchm. om.] ; καθησθαι, Mt. xxvi. G9 ; or with some other verb declaring that the person without is doing something, Mk. iii. 31. Preceded by the art. 6 ίξω, absol. he who is without, prop, of place; metaph., in plur., those who do not belong to the Christian church [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below ; Mey. on Mk. as below] : 1 Co. v. 12, 13; Cob iv. 5; 1 Th. iv. 12; those who are not of the number of the apostles, Mk. iv. 11[ (cf. Meyer) Wllrarg. ίξωθ^ν, q. v.]. With a noun added: al ίξω TiuXett, foreign, Acts xxvi. 1 1 ; ό ϊξω άνθρωπος, the outer man, i. e. the body (scii άνθρωπο!, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16. b. it takes the place of a prep, and is joined with the gen., without i. e. out of, outside of, [W. § 54, 6] : Lk. xiii. 33 ; Acts xxi. 5; lieb. xiii. 11, 12. 2. after the verbs of going, sending, placing, leading, drawing, etc., which commonly take prepositions or adverbs signifying rest in a place rather than those expressive of motion toward a place, (^ω has the force of the Lat. fora.i (Germ. hinaus, heraus), forth out, out of ; a. adverbially, after the verbs (ξίρχομαι, Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. xiv. 6S; Lk. xxii. 62; Jn. xix.4,5; Rev.iu.l2; άγω,.Τη. xix. 4, 13 ; προάγω, Acts xvi. 30 ; (ξάγω, Lk. x.xiv. 50 [R G I>br.] ; βάΚλω and «βάλλω, Mt. v. 13 ; xiii. 48 ; Lk. viii. 54 R G ; xiii. 28 ; xiv. 35 (34) ; Jn. vi. 37; ix. 34, 35 ; xii. 31 ; xv. 6; Acts ix. 40; 1 Jn. iv. 18; Rev. xi. 2 RG; StCpo ίξω, Jn. xi. 43 ; ίξω ποκίν τίνα, Acts v. 34. b. as a ])rep. with the gen.: after <ΐπίλβ«ι<. Acts iv. 15; άποστίΚ\(ΐν, Mk. v. 10; ίκβαΚλίΐν, Mk. xii. 8 ; Lk. iv. 29 ; xx. 15 ; Acts vii. 58; (ξ(ρχ€σθαι, Mt. xxi. 17 ; Acts xvi. 13; Heb. xiii. 13; (κπορ(ΰ(σθαι. Mk. xi. 19 ; i^ayeiv, Mk. viii. 23 [R G L Tr mrg.]: σΰρΕί^/τίκά, .Vets xiv. 19; eXiceii/Tii/a, Acts xxi. 30. {{uSfv, adv., (fr. ΐξω, opp. to ΐσωθΐν fr. ίσα; cf. άνωθιν, πάρρωθ(ν), from without, outward, [cf. W. 472 (440)]; 1. adverbially: (ou/«'ari//^), Mt. xxiii. 27 sq.; Mk. vii. 18; 2 Co. vii. 5 ; τό (ξωβ(ν, the outside, the exte- rior, Mt. .vxiii. 25 ; Lk. .\i. 39 sc). ; (κβάΧ\(ΐν ίξωθιν (for Η G ίξω), Rev. xi. 2' L Τ Tr WII ; oi ίξωβ^ν lor <,! i^u,, those who do not belong to the Christian church, 1 lim. iii. 7 ; [cf. Mk. iv. 1 1 WH mrg. and s. v. ίξω, 1 a.] ; d ίξωθ(ψ κόσμοί the outward adorning, 1 Pet. iii. 3. 2. as a ])rep• osition with the gen. [cf. W. § 54, 6]: Mk. vii. 15; Rev. xi. 2• [R"""• G L Τ Tr WH ; xiv. 20 where Rec. ΐξωΥ (ξ-ωθ«ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίξωσα [so accented by (i Τ ed. 7 Tr, but L WH ΐξώσ-α] and in Tdf. f'ξίωaa [ \ΙΊί. Ai)p. p. 1G2] (cf. W. p. 90 (8G); [B. 69 (Gl); Steph. Thesaur. and Veitch 8. V. ωθίω]) ; to thrust out; expel from one's abode: Acts vii. 45, (Thuc, Xen., al.). to propel, drire : το πλοΐον fi'f αιγιαλό», Acts x.wii. 39 [WH txt. (κσ'άισ'αι; see (κσώζω~], (the same use in Tliuc, Xcn., al.).* ίξώτίροϊ, -fpa.-fpov, (a comparative fr. ίξω, cf. ίσώτιοο!, ανώτερος, κατωτ(ρος), outer : τό σκύτος το €^ωτ€ρον, the darkness outside the limits of the lighted palace (to which the Messiah's kingdom is here likened), Mt. viii. 12; xxii. 13; xxv. 30. [(Sept.; Strabo, al.)]* coLKa, see EIKi2. (Όρτά^ω; (ίορτή) ; to heep a fcasl-dai/, celebrate a fes- tival : 1 Co. V. 8, on which j}ass. see άζυμος. (Sept. for Jjn ; Eur., .'Vrstjih., Xeu., Plato, al. ; όρτάζω, Hdt.) * ί'ορτή, -ης, ή, Sept. for jn ; Grk. ν,-τϊΐ. fr. Horn, down; in Hdt. όρτή; a feast-dni/, festival : Lk. ii. 42; Jn. v. 1 ; Λ'ί. 4 ; vii. 2, 37 ; Col. ii. IG ; ή ΐορτη τοΟ πάσχα : Lk. ii. 41 [W. 215 (202); Β. 186 (161)]; Jn. xiii. 1; i. q. ή ίορτη των αζύμων, Lk. xxii. 1 ; ev rrj topTji, during the feast, Mt. xxvi. 5; Mk. xiv. 2; ein. iv. 45; vii. 11 ; xii. 20 ; flvai tv TJj ioprij, to be engaged in celebrating the feast, Jn. ii. 23, cf. Baumg.-Crusius and Meyer ad loc. ; els την ίορτήν, for the feast, Jn. xiii. 29; άναβαίνιιν (to Jerusalem) els την ΐορτην, Jn. vii. 8, 10; ερχ(σθίΐί ets την (ορτην, Jn. iv. 45 ; xi. 56 ; xii. 1 2 ; της ΐορτης μίο-ονσης, in the midst of the feast, Jn. vii. 14 ; κατά ίορτήν, at every feast [see κατά, II. 3 a. β.], Mt. xxvii. 15 ; Mk. xv. 6 ; Lk. x.\iii. 1 7 [Rec] ; την ίορτήν ποι^ΐν to keep, cele- brate, the feast. Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.]; κατά το ίθο! τήί ίορτής, after the custom of the feast, Lk. ii. 42.* €ΐΓ-αγγ€λ(α, -as, ή, {ίπαγγίΧλω) ; 1. announcement : 1 .Τη. i. 5 (l{ec., Λvherc <ϊyyfλt'α was long since restored); κατ iirayyikiav ζωής της e'v Χριστώ 'Ιησοΰ, to proclaim life in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 [W. 402 (37G); cf. κατά, II. fin. But others give ίπαγγ. here as else- where the sense of promise, cf. 2 below]. 2. promise; a. the act of promising, a promise given or to be given: προσ^ίχ(σθαι την από Tivos ίπαγγιλίαν {assent ; the ref- erence is to a promise to surrender Paul to the power and sentence of the Jews), Acts xxiii. 2i ; [add, ΐπαγγι- \ίας δ λόγοί ούτος, Ro. ix. 9]. It is used also of the divine promises of blessing, esp. of the benefits of salva- tion by Christ, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 14] : Acts vii. 17; Ro. iv. 14, 16; [plur. Ro. ix. 4]; Gab iii. 1 7 sq. 21; iv. 23 ; Heb. xi. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 (on which see βραϋνα. "^I ; Heb. viii. 6 ; xi. 9 ; foil, by the inf. Heb. iv. 1 ; -yivfTai ΐΤΓογγίΧΧω 227 ετταφω run, Ro. iv. 13 ; πρόι nva. Acts xiij. 32; xxvi. 6 ; ίρρήθη TIKI, Gal. iii. lU: ϊστΊ. tiw, belongs to one, Acts ii. 39; iVayyeXXcCT^ai την en. 1 Jn. ii. 25 ; ίχ(ΐν ewayycXias, to have received, Heb. vii. 6; 2 Co. vii. 1, [cf. W. 177 (166)] ; to have linked to it, 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; etvm iv i-nayyt- λι'α, joined with a promise [al. al. ; cf. W. 3'Jl (366)], Eph. vi. 2,η•γή TTJs eVayyeXtat, the promised land, Heb. xi. 9 ; τα τίκνα της eVayytXias, born in accordance with the promise, Ro. ix. 8 ; Gal. iv. 28 ; το πιχνμα της ΐπαγ- yeXias το aytov, the promised Spirit, Eph. i. 13; αί διαθή- και της fVayyeXiof, covenants to which was united the promise (of salvation through the Messiah), Eph. ii. 12; ή fVayyeXia τοΰ θ(οϊι, given by God, Ro. iv. 20 ; in the plur. 2 Co. i. 20 ; αί cVayyf Xi'at των τιατίρων, the promises made to the fathers, Ro. xv. 8 ; with the gen. of the object, T^ff ζωης^ 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; της τταρονσΊας αυτον^ 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; κατ iirayyiKlav according to jiroinise. Acts xiii. 23 ; Gal. iii. 29 ; hi ϊπαγγ^λίας, Gal. iii. 18. b. by meton. a promised good or blessing (cf. ίλπίς, sub fin.) : Gal. iii. 22 ; Eph. iii. 6 [yet here cf. Mey. or Ellic] ; άποστξΧλζΐν την ΐπαγγΐΧίαν τοΰ πατρός μου, the blessing promised by my Father, Lk. x.xiv. 49 ; rrfpi^evtw. Acts i. 4; κομίζ^σθαι την inayyeXiav, Heb. x. 36; xi. [13 Τ Tr WH, προσ^(\€σθαι L], 39 ; λαμβάνΐΐν τάς eTrayycXtaff, Heb. xi. 13 [R G] ; tniTvyxaveiv (παγγίΧιών, ib. vs. 33; κλϊ^ρονομείΐ' Tcts eVayyfXi'af, Ileb. vi. 12; entTvy^aveLV της fVayyeXi'aff, ib. 1.5 ; κληρονόμοι, της ΐπαγγξλύις, vs. IT — (to reconcile Heb. vi. 12, 15, 17 with .xi. 13, 39, which at first sight seem to be in conflict, we must hold, in ac- cordance with xii. 22-24, that the O. T. saints, after the expiatory sacrifice ofi^ered at length to God by Christ, were made partakers of the heavenly blessings before Christ's return from heaven ; [al. explain the appar- ent contradiction by the difference between the initial and the consummate reception of the promise; see the Comm. ad 1.]) ; with the epexeget. gen. Χαβί'ϊν την ΐπαγγίλίαν τον άγιου ττνήματος, the promised blessing, which is the Holy Spirit. Acts ii. 33; Gal. iii. 14, [cf. \\ . § 34, 3 a. fin.] ; την tnayyiXlav της αιωνίου κληρονο- μιάς, Heb. Lx. 15. ([Dem. 519, 8; Aristot. eth. Xic. 10, 1 p. 1164% 29] ; Polyb. 1, 43, 6, and often ; Diod. 1, a ; Joseph, antt. 3, 5, 1 ; 5, 8, 11 ; 1 Mace. x. 15.)* ίτΓ-αγγίλλω : [pres. mid. ΐπαγγίλλημαι] ; pf. pass, and mid. ϊπήγγίΧμαι ; 1 aor. mid. ίπηγγ^ιλάμην ; from Hom. down ; X. to announce. 2. lo jiromise : pass, ω inrjyyeXTai, to whom the promise hath been made. Gal. iii. 19. Mid. lo announce concerning one's self; i. e. 1. to announce that one is about to do or to furnish some- thing, i. e. lo promise (of one's own accord), to engage (voluntarily) : 6 ίπαγγ(ΐλάμ(νος. Heb. x. 23 ; xi. 11 ; ίττηγ- yeXToi, he hath promised, foil, by λίγων, Heb. xii. 26 ; Ti»/, to give a promise to one, Heb. vi. 1 3 ; τι, Ro. iv 21 ; Tit. i. 2 ; Tin' τι, Jas. i. 1 2 ; ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 9 ; (παγγιλίαν, to give a promise, 1 Jn. ii. 25 (Esth. iv. 7 ; [cf. λ\. 225 (211) ; Β. 148 (129)]); foU. by the inf. [cf. W. § 44, 7c.] : Mk. xiv. 11 ; Acts vii. 5. 2. to profess ; τί, e. g. an art, to profess one's self skilled in it (την άριτήν. Xen. mem. 1, 2, 7 ; την στρατιάν, Hell. 3, 4, 3 ; σοφίαν, Diog. Laert. prooem. 12 ; σωφροίτϋνην, Clem. Al. paedag. 3, 4 p. 299, 27 ed. Klotz ; [cf. L. and S. s. v. 5]) : θ^οσίβααν, 1 Tim. ii. 10; γνώσιν, vi. 21. [CoMP. jrpo-CTrayyi'XXa).] * ίΐΓ-άγγΛμο, -ros, to, (ίτιαγγίλΧω), a promise : 2 Pet. i. 4 ; iii. 13. (Dem., Isoc., al.) * eir -όγω, [pres. ptcp. ίπ-άγωκ] ; 1 aor. ptcp. ιπάξας (W. p. 82 (78) ; [Veitch s. v. άγω]) ; 2 aor. inf. ίπαγαγί'ιν ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for ΧΌΠ ; to lead or bring upon : Tivi Ti, to bring a thing on one, i. e. to cause something to befall one, usually something evil, 2 Pet. ii. 1,5, (-πημα, Hesiod. opp. 240; άταν. Soph. Ajax 1189; γήρας νόσους €πάγ(ΐ, Plat. Tim. 33 a. ; ίαυτοϊς SovXfiav, Dem. p. 424, 9 ; Sfiva, Palaeph. 6, 7 ; κακά. Bar. iv. 29 ; άμίτρητον ν8ωρ, 3 Mace. ii. 4, and in other exx. ; in the Sept. ΐπί τινά τι, as κακά, Jer. vi. 19; xi. 11, etc.; πληγήν, Ex..xi. 1 ; also in a good sense, as άγαίά, Jer. xxxi.x. (.xx.xii.) 42; τιν\ (ΰφρο- σννην. Bar. iv. 29). ίττάγΐΐν το αιμά τίνος «Vt τίνα, to bring the blood of one upon any one, i. e. lay upon one the guilt of, make him answerable for, the violent death inflicted on another : Acts v. 28, (Uke (πάγ(ΐν άμαρτίαν eni nva. Gen. .\x. 9 ; Ex. xxxii. 21,34; αμαρτίας πατέρων em τίκνα, Ex. xxxiv. 7).* ίΐΓ-αγωνίζομ,ΟΑ ; to contend : τινί, for a thing, Jude 3. (τω Αννίβα, against Hannibal, Plut. Fab. 23, 2 ; τα'ις νίκαις, added a new contest to his victories, id. Cim. 13, 4 ; by others in diif. senses.) * ί'ΐΓ-αθροίξω : [pres. pass. ptcp. iTraipotfo/ieiOr]; lo gather together (to others already present) : pass, in Lk. xi. 29. (Plut. Anton. 44, 1.)• ■EiraivcTcs [so W. § 6, 11. (cf. Chandler § 325) ; Έπαι- veTof Rec'.' T; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103; Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 30 sq. ; Roehl, Inscrr. index iii.], (ίπαινίω), -ου, 6, Epcenetus, the name of a Christian mentioned in Ro. xvi. 5.• iir-oivew, -ω ; fut. ίπαινίσω (1 Co. xi. 22, for the more com. ίπαινίσομαι. cf. \X . 86 (82) ; [B. 53 (46)]: L txt. Tr mrg. ίπαινω) ; 1 Άοτ.ίιτήν(σα ; (ΐτταινος) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for S^n and r\Td ; to approve, lo praise, (νιϊύι the ΐπί cf. Germ, be- in beloben [Passow s. v. ϊπί. TV. C. 3 cc.]) : τινά, Ro. XV. 11 ; 1 Co. xi. 22; τινά, foil, by ότι [cf. W. § 30, 9 b.], Lk. xW. 8 ; 1 Co. .xi. 2 ; absol.,' foil, by ότι, 1 Co. xi. 1 ".* ίτΓ -oivos, -ου, <5, (iVi and aivos [as it were, a tale for an- other; cf. Bum. Lexil. § 83, 4 ; Schmidt ch. 155]) ; ap- probation, commendation, praise : Phil. iv. 8 ; e/e τίνος, bestowed by one, Ro. ii. 29 ; ΐπαινον (χ^ιν €κ τίνος, sen. of pers., Ro. xiii. 3 ; 6 έπαινος γΐνησ(ται (κάστω από τοΰ θίοΰ, 1 Co. iv. 5 ; with gen. of the pers. to whom the praise is given, Ro. ii. 29 ; 2 Co. viii. 18: «s ίπαινον, to the obtaining of praise, 1 Pet. i. 7 ; fh ίπαινόν τίνος, that a pers. or thing may be praised, Eph. i. 6, 14 ; Phil. i. 1 1 ; [ηίμπίσθαι fis ίπ. τίνος, 1 Pet. ii. 14] ; tivai ei's ίπαινόν τίνος to be a praise to a pers. or thing, Eph. i. 1 2.* cir-aCp ; 1 aor. cTrrjpa, ptcp. ΐττάρας, impv. 2 pers. plur. €πάρατ€, inf. ίτΐαραι : pf. €7Γηρκα (Jn. xiii. 18 Tdf.) : [Pass, and Mid., pres. (τταίρομαιΊ ; 1 aor. pass, ίττηρθην; (on the om. of iota subscr. see αίρω init.) ; fr. Hdt. down; Sept. chiefly for X'^J, also for 0"!Π ; to lifi up, raise up, raise ίτταισ-^ννομαι 228 eTTavce on /liijh : τον άρτίμονα, to hoist up, Acts xxvii. 40 (τα ίστία. Pint, iiior. p. 870 [de llerod. ii>alijrn. § 3!)]) ; rat χί'ψα!. in offi-ring prayer, 1 Tim. ii. 8 (Neh. viii. 6 ; Ps. c.\.x.\iii. (cxx.\iv.) 2) ; in blessiii•,'. Lk. xxiv. 50 [cf. W. § 6.5, 4 c] (Lev. ix. 22 [yet here i'^npar] ; Sir. 1. 20) ; rat κίφαλάί, of the timid and sorrowful recoverin•» spirit, Lli. xxi. 28 (so αίχίνα, Pliilci dc prof. § 20) ; roit οφθαΚμοίί, to look lip, Mt. xvii. 8; l,k. xvi. 23; .la. iv. 3.j ; vi. 5; tir TiiO, Lk. vi. 20; «r τοκ οίρανόν, Lk. χ viii. 13; Jn. xvii. I ; την φωνην, Lk. xi. 27 ; Acts ii. 14 ; xiv. 11 ; xxii. 22, (Dcin. 419, 13 ; Sept. Judg. ii. 4 ; ix. 7 ; 2 S. xiii. 3(3) ; Την iTTtfivav (πι Ttva, to lift the heel against one (see WTf'/jra), .In. xiii. 18. Pass, ίττήμθη, was taken np (of Christ, taken up into heaven). Acts i. 9; reflex, and metaph. lo be lij'led up with pride, to exalt one's self: 2 Co. xi. 20 (.ler. xiii. 15; Ps. .\lvi. (xlvii.) 10; Sir. xi. 4; XXXV. (xxxii.) 1 ; 1 Mace. i. 3 ; ii. (i3 ; Arstph. nub. 810 ; Thuc. 4, 18; Aeschin. 87, 24; with dat. of the thing of which one is proud, Prov. iii. 5; Zeph. i. 11; Ildt. 9, 49 ; Thuc. 1, 120 ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24) ; —on 2 Co. x. 5 see τψ-ωμη.* *ιτ-<ιισ-χΰνομαι ; ίη\.(7Γαίσχννθησημαι; 1 aor. ί7ΐ7;σ;^;υΐ'^τ;ΐ', and with neglect of augm. ΐπαισχννθην (2 Tim. i. Ill L Τ Tr \VH ; cf. [ 117/. App. p. lUl J ; 15. 34 (30) ; [W. § 12 fin.]) ; fr. Aeschyl. down ; to be iixliamed (eVi on account of [cf. Is. i. 29 Alex. ; Ellic. on 2 Tim. i. 8] ; see αίσχΰνω) : ahsol. 2 Tim. i. 12 ; τικά [on the accus. cf. AV. § 32, 1 b. a. ; I{. 192 (1G6)], of a person, Mk. viii. 38; Lk. i\. 2i; ; τι, of a thing, Ro. i. 1 •! ; 2 Ί'ίηι. i. 8, 1 β ; eVi τινι, dat. of a thing, Ko. vi. 21 ; foil, by the inf. Ileb. ii. 11 ; with the ace. of a pers. and the inf. of a thing, Ileb. xi. IG. (Twice in the Sept. : Is. i. 29 [Alex. ] ; Job xxxiv. 19.) • tir-oiTi'ti), -ώ ; 1. Ιο ask besides, ask for more : Horn. 11. 23, 593. 2. to ask again and again, importunatel ij : Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1416; to beg, to ask alms: Lk. xvi. 3; [xviii. 35 L Τ Tr WII] ; (Ps.'cviii. (cix.) 10 ; Sir. xl. 28 ; S\ properly, to avail or be stronr) enough for . . . (see άμκίω) ; hence a. to ward off οτ drive αιηαι/,τί rivt, a, tinn'^ior another's advantage i. q. a thing from any one (Horn.), to defend. b. to aid, give aisislance, relieve, (Hdt., Aeschyl., al.) : τινί, 1 Tim. v. 10; Mid. to give aid from one's own resources, 1 Tim. v. Ifi ace. to the reading (παρκ^Ισθω (L txt. Τ Tr WII mrg.) for ίπαρκ(ίτω (R G L mrg. WH txt.) ; (κατά ^ΰναμιν αλλι^λοίϊ ΐπαρκΐϊν, Xen. mem. 2, 7, 1).* Επάρχ»οΐ, -ov, belonging to an ίπαρχος or prefect ; ή (πάρχ(ΐος sc. ΐξουσία, i. q. ή ΐπαρχία (see the foil, word), a prefecture, province : Acts xxv. 1 Τ WII mrg. So ή ϊπάρχιο!, Euseb. h. e. 2, 10, 3 (with the var. (πάρχ^ιον) ; 2, 26, 2; 3, 33, 3; de mart. Pal. 8, 1 ; 13, 11.* cirapx(a [-χβία Τ WH (see fi, t)], -as, ή, (fr. ίπαρχοί i. e. ό cV ap!(fj ων the one in command, ])refect, gov- ernor), prefecture ; i. e. 1. the office of ίπαρχος or prefect. 2. the region subject to a prefect ; a province of the Roman empire, either a larger province, or an ap- pendage to a larger province, as Palestine was to that of .Syria [cf. Schiirer, Zeitgesch. p. 144 sqq.] : Acts xxiii. .'U; XXV. 1 [see the preced. word]; (Polyb., Diod., Plut., Dio Cass.). Cf. Krebs, Observv. etc. p. 2.5fi sqq. ; Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. N. T. p. 432 sqq. ; [BB.DD. (esp. Kitto) s. V. Province].* eir-au\is, -fwf, ή, (ΐπί and αυλις tent, place to pass the niglit in ; hence a country-house, cottage, cabin, fold), a farm; a dicelling, [A. V. habitation'] : Acts i. 20 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 26. (Diod., Plut., al. ; also a camp, military iinarlcrs, Plato, Polyb.)* ('π-ανριον, adv. of time, i. q. eV avpiov, on the morrow ; in the N. T. τη ίπαΰμιον, sc. ήμίρα, the next day, on the morrow: Mt. xxvii. 62; Mk. xi. 12; Jn. i. 29; Acts x. 9, etc.; Sept. for η";πα::. cir -αυτοψώρω, see αυτόφωρος, p. 87". Έπαφρά?, -a [B. 20 (17 sq.)], ό, Epaphrns, a Christian man mentioned in Col. i. 7; iv. 12; Philem. 23. The conjecture of some that the name is contracted from 'Έπαφρό^ιτοί (q. v. [cf. W. 103 (97)]) and hence that these two names belong to one and the same man, is not probable; [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epa])hras; Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Phil. p. 61 note ■*]. The name is com. in inscriptions.* ίτΓ-αφρίξω; to foam up (Mosch. 5, 5); to cast out as foam, foam out: τι, Jude 13 calls the godless and grace- less set of whom he speaks κύματα ϊπαφρίζοντα ras ίαυτών αΐηχύνας, i. e. (dropping the figure) impelled by their restless passions, they unblushingly exhibit, in word and deed, their base and abandoned spirit ; cf. Is. Ivii. 20.' 'ΕτταφρόΒιτοϊ, -ου, ό, (fr. Αφροδίτη, prop, 'charming'), Epnphroditus, an associate with Paul in the ministry : Phil. ii. 2.) ; iv. 18. See Έπαφρα! above.* ΐπ-£γ(£ρω : 1 aor. eTTrjyfipa ; to raise or excite against : t\ ('πι nva. Acts xiii. 50 (διωγ/ιόκ) ; κατά τίνος, to stir up against one : τας ψνχας . . . κατά των άδ(λφων. Acts xiv. 2.* iml, [fr. temporal iVi and fi, lit. thereupon when; Cur- tius, Erlaut. etc. p. 182; cf. Etym. Magn. 35G, 7], conjunc- tion, (Lat. cum), tchen, since, [cf. W. § 53, 1] ; used 1. of time, after; so once in the N. T. : Lk. vii. 1 (where L Τ Tr txt. WH txt. (π(ώή). 2. of cause, etc., since, seeing that, because: Mt. xviii. 32; [xxi. 46 TTrWII]; xxvii. 6 ; Mk. xv. 42 ; Lk. i. 34 ; Jn. xiii. 29 ; xix. 31 ; 1 Co. xiv. 12; 2Co. xi. 18; xiii. 3; Heb.v. 2, 11; vi. 13; ix. 17; xi. 11; end olv since then, Heb. ii. 14; iv. 6. Agreeably to a very common abbreviation of speech, we must often supply in thought between iVti and the proposition depending upon it some such phrase as if it is (or were) otherwise ; so that the particle, although retaining the force of since, is yet to be rendered other- wise, else, OT for then, (Germ, sonst) ; so in Ro. xi. 6, 22 ; Heb. ix. 26 ; (π(1 άρα, 1 Co. v. 10 ; vii. 14, [cf. W. § 53, 8 a.]; ί'πίΐ alone before a question [cf. W. 480 (44 7); B. 233 (200)]: Ro. iii. 6; 1 Co. xiv. 16; xv. 29; Heb. x. 2; (4Macc. i. 33; ii. 7, 19; vi. 34 (35) ; vii. 21 ; viii. 8). Cf. Matthiae § 618; [B. § 149, 5].* ίΐΓίΐ-8ή, conjunction, (fr. (π(ί and 5η), Lat. cum Jam, when now, since now, [cf. W. 434 (404), 448 (417) ; Ellic. on Phil. ii. 26] ; 1. of time ; when now, after that ; so once in the N. T. : Lk. vii. 1 L Τ Tr txt. WH txt. 2. of cause; since, seeing that,forasnnich as: Mt. xxi. 46 [RGL]; Lk. xi. 6: Acts xiii. 46; xiv. 12; χ v. 24; 1 Co. i. 21, 22; xiv. 16; xv. 21 ; [2 Co. v. 4 Rec."']; Phil. ii. 26.* €ΐΓίΐ-δή-ΐΓ£ρ [f7rfi6i7 π(ρ Lchm.], conjunction, (fr. en-it, δή and πε'ρ), seeing that, forasmuch as; Itala and Vulg. . and Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.) * «ir-ttSov [Tdf. 7 (φ(18ον~\ ; inipv. ΐπιδί (Lchm. ίφιδί, cf. W. § 5, 1 d. 14 ; B. 7 ; [reff. s. v. άφ(ΐδον] ; besides see (ίδω, I.) : til look upon, to regard : foil, by a telic inf., (π(Ίδ(ν άφβλίίκ το όν(ΐδόί μου ([R. V. looked upon me to take away etc.]. Germ, hat hergehlickt), Lk. i. 25 ; ίπΐ τι, to look upon (for the purpose of punishing, cf. Lat. o;i/- madvertere). Acts iv. 29.* ίτΓ-ίίμι; (ί'πί, and dpi to go) ; to come upon, approach ; of time, ίο come on, be at ham! ; ptcp. (πιών, -οίσα, -ov, next, following : τη ίπιονση, sc. ήμ(ρα• on the following day. Acts xvi. 11; xx. 15; xxi. 18, (Pulyb. 2, 25, 11 ; 5, 13. 10; Joseph, antt. 3, l,(i; [Prov. xxvii. 1]; etc.): with ήμ(ρα added (as in the earlier writ. fr. Hdt. down), Acts vii. 26; τη (πιοΰση ννκτί. Acts xxiii. 11. Cf. f.ob. ad Phryn. p. 464.* iiTii-irep, conjunction, (ϊπίί, π/ρ), since indeed, since al all events; [it introduces a " known and unquestioned certainty "] : Ro. iii. 30 R G (but L Tr d π(ρ. Τ WH (ΐπίρ). Cf. Hermann SiaWg. p. 7Si; [Baumlein p. 204 ; AV. 448 (417). Fr. the Tragg. down.]* ΐττεισαΎωΎη 230 eire ρώτημα «ΐΓ<ισ-αγωγή, -^r, ij, a bringing in hexides or in n'l(Ution to ir/iiil i.\' or has hcen hrouf/ht tn : κρύττονος Λττιδοί, Hub. vii. 19. (Ill .Iose])li. aiitl. 1 1, (!, 2 used of the introduotion of a new ivife in place of one repmliated; ίτίρων Ιητρων, Hippocr. p. 27 [vol. i. )). 81 ed. Ki'ibn]; προσώπων, of characters in a plav, Dion. Hal. scr. cens. 2, 10; in the plur. of places for lettin<; in the enemy, Thuc. 8, 92.) * έΐΓ-«ισ--^ρχο|χαι : fut. itrticeXfiaopai ; 1. to come in besides or lo llmse who are alreaili/ aithin; to enter aftev- umrds, (lidt., Time, Plalo, al.). 2. lo come in upon, come upon !>>/ enterinf] ; lo enter against : cVt τίνα, ace. of pers., Lk. .\.\i. ;ί3 L Τ Tr txt. Wll ; with simple (hit. of pers. 1 Maec. -wi. 16.* ϊτΓίΐτο, adv., (eVi, (Ιτά), thereupon, thereafter, then, afiericards; used a. of time: Mk. vii. 5 II G; Lk. xvi. 7; Gal. i. 21 ; .las. iv. 14 ; μίτά τοϋτο is added re- dundantly in Jn. xi. 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc. ; W. § G5, 2 ; [15. 397 (340)]) ; a more definite specification of time is added epe.\c'(;etically, μιτα ΐτη τρία, (ial. i. 18; δια 8e• KuTfaaapav ΐτων, Gal. ii. 1. b. in enumerations it is used a. of time and order: πρώτον . . . ΐπΐίτα, 1 Co. XV. 46; I Th. iv. 17; πρότ^μυν . . . ΐπατα, Ileb. vii. 27; απαρχή . . . «πίΐτα, 1 Co. XV. 23 ; tiTa [but Τ Tr mr^.WII nirg. Ιπίΐτα] . . . ίπατα, 1 Co. xv. 5, 6 ; iireira . . . ίπατα, ib. 7 Lmrg. Τ Tr mi-n;. U'H mrg. β. of order alone : πρώτον . . . ίπατα, Ileb. vii. 2 ; τρίτον . . . «jrftra . . . £πίΐ- τα (II G «τα), 1 Co. .xii. 2S.* cir-cKciva (i. ([. «V (Kelva sc. μίρη [cf. W. § 6, 1 1. fin.]), adv., l/eijond : with the '.xcn., Βαβυλώνας, Acts vii. 43. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down both with and without the gen.; in the Sept. x\m. v. 2"; Gen. xxxv. IG; Jer. xxii. 19.)• 6ΐΓ-ίκ-τίΙνω : [pres. mid. ptcp. eVeKrciTO/jfi/of] ; to stretch out to or towards ; Mid. to stretch (one's self) for- ward to : with dat. of tiling indicating the direction [W. §52,4, 7], Phil. iii. 13 (14), (see ϊμπροσθίν, 1 fin.).* ίτΓίνεύτηϊ, -ου, ό, {^π^νδυνω or ίπΐνδνω, q. v., [cf. U . 25 ; 94 (90)]),(/ii n/i/iirijarmeni, (TertuW. superindumentum) : Jn. xxi. 7, whore it seems to denote a kind of linen blouse or frock which fishermen used to wear at their work. (Soph. frag. 391 Diml. [(248 Ahrens) ; Poll. 7, 45 p. 717]; Sept. twice [thrice] for 4'i'"3, 1 S. xviii. 4 [Alex.] ; 2 S. xiii. 18 ; [add Lev. viii. 7 Alex.].) * iir-iv -δύω: I aor. mid. inf. ΐπινδύσασθαι ; to put on over [A. V. to he clothed upon] ; 2 Co. v. 2, 4. (Plut. Pelop. U ; actively, Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 12.) * ίΐΓ-ί'ρχομαι ; fut. ΐπ(\(ϋσομαι ; 2 aor. (πηλθον (3 pers. plur. (πηλθαν. Acts xiv. 19 L Τ Tr VVII) ; Sejrt. chiefly for Kl3 ; 1. In come lo, to arrive ; a. univ., foil, by από with a gen. of place. Acts xiv. 19. b. of time; In come on, he at hand, be future : iv toIe αϊώσι to'is ίπιρχο- μίνοκ, Eph. ii. 7, (Is. xli. 4, 22, 23 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down); of that \vliich time will bring, lo impend: ή τα- λαιπωρία ή ίπίρχομίνη, Jas. V. I ; τινί, Lk. xxi. 26, (Is. Ixiii. 4 ; also of things favorable, η ei\oyia. Sir. iii. 8). 2. to come upon, overtake, one ; so even in Hom., as of rfeep, τινά. Od. 4, 793; 10, 31 ; τιι-ί, 12, 311 ; of disease, 11, 200; ί'πί τίνα, a. of calamities: Lk. xxi. 35 RG; Acts viii. 24 ; xiii. 40 [L Τ Tr txt. WII om. Tr mrg. br. ίφ' ύ.], (Gen. xiii. 21 ; Mic. iii. 1 1 ; Zeiih. ii. 2 ; 2 Cli. xx. 9; Jer. v. 12 [here ^|it]). b. of the Holy .Spirit, de- scending and ojieratiug inone : Lk. i. 35; Acts i. 8. c. of an enemy attacking one : ΐπίλθων νικήσ-η αίτιΊν, Lk. xi. 22; (Horn. II. 12, 136; 1 S. x.xx. 23; w. dat. of jiers. Ildian. 1, 8, 12 [6 Bekk.]).• 4π-«ρωτάω, -ω ; impf. «τιτ/ρώτων? fut. ίττ^ρωτησω; 1 aor. (πηρώτησα; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. {πίρωτηθύς; Sept. mostly for ^Vt.O, sometimes for ϋ"Π ; 1. lo accost one with an iiii/uiri/, put a i/ueslion to, inquire of, ask, inlerrogale, [cV; directive, uniformly in the N.T.; Mey. on .Mk. xi. 29 (cf. f ίτι, D. 2)] : tito, Mk. i.\. 32 ; xii. 34: λΜΙ. xxii. 46 ; Lk. ii. 46 ; 1 Co. xiv. 35 ; Jn. xviii. 21 Κ (J; τιχά τι, ask one any tlUng, Mk. vii. 1 7 L Τ Tr \V II ; xi. 29 ; Lk. .\x. 40 ; Tiva πίρί Ttvoj, one about a thing, Mk. vii. 1 7 II (ΐ ; [Lk. ix. 45 l.chm.], (Ildt. 1, 32; Dem. 1072, 12); foil, by λίγωκ with the words used by the questioner, Mt. xii. 10; xvii. 10; Mk.ix. 11 ; xii. IH; Lk. iii.lO, 14; xx. 27; xxiii. 3 [K(; L]. and often in the Synoptic Gospels; foil. by cl, irhi'lher, Mk. viii. 23 ; xv. 44 ; Lk. xxiii. 6 ; or some other form of the indirect question, Acts xxiii. ;i4 ; ϊπηρώ- των Xiyovres [L Τ Tr WH om. Aty.], τι'γ ("η, Lk. viii. 9 ; (π(ρωτάν θ(όν Ιο consult God (Num. x.xiii. 3 ; .Josh. Ix. 20 (14) ; Judg. i. 1 ; xviii. 5 ; Is. xi.x. 3, etc.; Thuc. 1, 118, [etc.]), hence to seek to know God's purpose and lo do his ici!/, Ro. X. 20 fr. Is. bcv. 1. 2. by a usage foreign to the Greeks, lo addi-ess one with a request or demand; to ask of or demand of one : foil, by the inf. Mt. xvi. 1 (so cVfp. τινά τι, Ilebr. hw, in Ps. cxxxvi. (cxxxvii.) 3 : [this sense is disputed by some; see Zezschwitz as referred to at end of next word; cf. Weiss on Mt. 1. c, and see ίρωτάω, 2]). ίτΓΐρώτημα, -ros, τ<5, (ί'ττίρωτάω) ; 1. an inquiry, a question : Ildt. 6, C7 ; Thuc. 3, 53. 68. 2. a demand; so for the Cliald. xSKl^ in Dan. iv. 14 Theod.; seet^eptu• τάω, 2. 3. As the terms of in(iuiry and demand often include the idea of desire, the word thus gets the signi- fication of earnest seeking, i. e. a craving, an intense de- sire (so ΐπιρωτανιΐίτι, lo long for something, 2 S. xi. 7 — [but surely the phrase here (like ^ O^'d) means simply to ask in reference lo, ask about]). If this use of the word is conceded, it affords us the easiest and most con- gruous explanation of that vexed passage 1 Pet. iii. 21 : "which (baptism) now saves us [you] not because in re- ceiving it we [ye] have put away the filth of the flesh, but because we [ye] have earnestly sought a conscience reconciled to God " (σ-υν(ώησ(ως άγαβης gen. of the obj., as opp. to σαρκ6ς ρίπου). It is doubtful, indeed, whether fif 6(ύν is to be joined with ίπψώτημα, and signifies a, craving directed tinio God [W. 194 (1.S2) — yet less fully and decidedly than in ed. 5, p. 21 G sq.], or with συνίίδησκ, and denotes the attitude of the conscience towards (in relation to) God ; the latter construction is favored by a comparison of Acts xxiv. 16 άπρόσκοπον συνιίδησιν ?χ(ΐν προ: τόι/ θιάν. The signification of tVip. which is ap)- proved by others, viz. stipulation, agreement, is fir.st met with in the Byzantine writers on law ; " moreover, tli» εττεχω 231 €7ri formula κατά το ΐπ^ρωτημα της σ(μνοτάτης βουλής, common in inscriptions of tlie age of the Antonines and the follow- ing Cxsars, exhibits no new sense of the word 1,::ρώτημα•, for this formula does not mean ' ace. to the decree of the senate' (ex senatus consuUo, the Grk. for which is κατά τά δό^αιτα τη βου\η), but ' after inquiry of or application to the senate,' i. e. ' with government sanction.' " Ze- zschwitz, Petri ap. de Christi ad inferos descensu senten- tia (Lips. 1857) p. 45; \_Farrar, Early Days of Christi- anity, i. 138 n.; Kahler, Das Gewissen, i. 1 (Halle 18 78) pp. 331-338. Others would adhere to the (more ana- logical) passivi; sense of iTsep. \\z. 'the thing asked (the demand) of a good conscience towards God ' i. q. the avowal of consecration unto him].* «Γ-ί'χω ; impf. ίπ^Ιχον ; 2 aor. ίπίσχον ; 1. to have or hold upon, apply : sc. τον νουν, to observe, attend to, foil, by an indir. quest., Lk. xiv. 7 ; τίνί, dat. of pers., to give attention to one. Acts iii. 5 ; 1 Tim. iv. 16, (with dat. of a thing, Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 2 ; 2 Mace. hi. 25 ; Polyb. 3, 43, 2, etc. ; fully οφθαλμάν τινι, Lcian. dial. mar. 1, 2). 2. to hold towards, hold forth, present : λόγον ζωής, as a light, by which illumined ye are the lights of the world, Phil. ii. 16 [al. al., cf. Mey. or Ellic. ad loc.]. 3. to check ([cf. Eng. hold up']. Germ, anhalten) : sc. ίμαυτάν, to delay, stop, stay, Acts xix. 22, and in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; [cf. W. § 38, 1 ; B. 144 (126) ; Fritzsche on Sir. v. 1].* «τηρίάζω; {ίττήραα [spiteful abuse, cf. Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 4]) ; to insult; to treat abusively, use desjjitefully ; to re- vile : ηνά, Mt. V. 44 R G ; Lk. vi. 28, (with dat. of pers., Xen. mem. 1, 2, 31 ; 3, 5, 16) ; in a forensic sense, to accuse falsely: with the ace. of a thing, I Pet. iii. 16. (Xen., Isaeus, Dem., Philo, Plut., Lcian., Hdian. ; to threaten, Hdt. 6, 9 [but cf. Cope on Aristot. u. s.].) * «rt, [before a rough breathing /φ' (occasionally in Mss. ίπ; see e. g. Ps. cxlv. (cxlvi.) 3), and also in some in- stances before a smooth breathing (as 4(f> Ikirihi, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20(21) Tdf.) ; seea0e(8oi/. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exc. hlyvwrov Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.'s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq. ; cf. Λν. §5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius §335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note]). Δ. with the Geniti\t: [cf. TV. § 47, g. ; B. 33G (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl.. Germ, ou/with the dat.); after verbs of abid- ing, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ΙτΛ κλίνης, ilt. ix. 2: Lk. xvii. 34 ; (πι του δώματος, Mt. xxiv. 17; Lk. xvii. 31 : cir' ίρη- μίας (cf. on a desert), Jlk. viii. 4 : ini των νιφΛών, Mt. -xxiv. 30 ; xxvi. 64 ; ίπ\ (της) γ^ς, Mt. vi. 1 ; ix. 6 ; xxiii. 9; xxviii. 18; Lk. xxi. 25; Acts ii. 19, and very often; em T^r θαλάσσης, on (the surface of) the sea, Mt. xiv. 25 RG; 26 LTTr WII; Mk. vi. 48, [49]; Rev. v. 13, and,acc. to theinterp. of raany,.Tn.vi. 19: but cf . Baumg•- Crusius ad loc. [per contra, cf. LUcke ad loc. ; Meyer on Mt. 1. c.], (.Job ix. 8 ; βάδιζαν ΐφ' CSaros, Lcian. philops. 13 ; ζττϊ Toil πίλάγονς ^ιαθίοντξς, v. h. 2,4; [Artem. oneir. 3, 16] ; on a different sense of the phrase in't τής θαλάσ- σης see 2 a. below [\V. 374 (351)]) ; nou'tv σημ(Ία (ττΐ των άσθ(νοΰντων, to be seen upon the bodies of men, exter- nally, {on the sick [cf. AV. 375 (351)]), Jn. vi. 2 ; ίκάθισα and κάθημαι [καθίζομαι} etri, Jit. xix. 28 ; xxiii. 2 ; xxiv. 3 ; XXV. 31 ; xxvii. 1 '.} ; ,In. xix. 13 ; Acts xx. 9 : Rev. ix. 1 7, etc. ; ΐστην, ΐστηκα inl, Lk. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 40 ; Rev. X. 5, 8 ; where parts of the body are spoken of : im χιιρων, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11 ; i^i τής κίφαλής, Jn. xx. 7; 1 Co. xi. 10 ; Rev. x. 1 R G [al. ace] ; xii. 1 ; σινδόνα ΐπ\ γυμνού, Mk. xiv. 51 ; ejr! toC μετώπου [or -ττων]. Rev. vii. 3 ; i.x. 4 ; xiii. 16 [Rec, al. ace] ; xiv. 9. b. Like the prep, t» (see the exposition s. v. h, I. 7 p. 21 2••), so also ίττί with the gen. is used after verbs expressing motion to indi- cate the rest following the motion ; thus after β,ιλλ^ιν, Mk. iv. 26 ; Mt. xxvi. 12 ; anflpeiv, Mk. iv. 31 : τιθίναι, .In. xix. 19; Acts V. 15; [Lk. viii. 16 L Τ Tr WH] ; (πιτιθίναι, Lk. viii. 16 [R G] ; καθύναι. Acts x. 11 ; πίπτ^ιν, Mk. ix. 20; xiv. 35 ; ίπιγράφ^ιν, Heb. x. 16 R G ; ίλκίίΐν, Jn. xxi. H R G ; ίρχισθαι, Heb. vi. 7 ; Rev. iii. 10 ; [άι/α- Γίλλίΐι», Lk. xii. 54 Τ Tr mrg. AV'H]; ■γ(νόμ(νος ϊττι τοΰ τόπου (cf. our having arrived on the spot), Lk. xxii. 40, [cf. W. p. 376 (352) and see below, C. L 1 b. fin.]. Kpepip Tiva fni (Hebr. ^•^_ nSri, Gen. xl. 19 ; Deut. x.xi. 22, etc.), for which the Latin has su./s o/""] ; at the time when an office was held h>i one ; under the administration of, [cf. AV. 375 (352); B. 33G (289)]: Mk. ii. 26; Lk. iii. 2; iv. 27; Acts xi. 2>i ; (1 Mace. xiii. 42; xiv. 27, [for other exx. in which this phrase is equiv. to " in or of the reign etc. of" and is preceded by a specification of the year etc., see B. D. Am. ed. p. 651 note'']; 2 Mace. viii. 19; xv. 22; for nunierou.s exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow i. 2 p. 1035, [less fully in L. and S. s. v. A. Π.]). with the gen. of a thing, at the time of any occurrence: em τής μ(τοίκ(σίαί Ba/3vXoufot, at the time of the deportation to I>al)ylon, Mt. i. 1 1 ; [on Lk. xii. 54 Τ Tr mrg. WH see δυσμή} : of the time when any occupation is (or was) carried on : ΐπι των προσ(υχων μον, Lat. in precibus meis, at my prayers, when I am praying, Ko. i. 10 (9); Eph. i. 16; 1 Th. i. 2; Philcm. 4. of time itself, in ΐσχάτων and (ace. to another reading) ίσχάτου των ήμ(ρων (lit. at the end of the days) : 2 Pet. iii. 3; lleb. i. 2 (1), (for the Hebr. D"p;n η'1.ΠΚ3, Gen. xHx. 1 ; Xum. xxiv. 14; .Ter.xx.xvii. (xxx.)24 : Mic.iv. 1 : Dan. x. 14); ϊπ ϊσχάτου τοΐι χρόνου. Jude 18 L Τ TrWII ; [τύνχράνων, 1 Pet. i. 20 L Τ TrWH]. B. with the Dative, used of Place [W. 392 (366) sq. ; B. 33U (289) sq.] ; and 1. properly ; a. of the place where or in which (Lat. in with the abl., (ierm. aw/ with the dat.) [Eng. on, etc.], where contin- uance, position, situation, etc., are spoken of: ίφ' ω (L txt. Τ Tr WII όπου) κατίκατο, Mk. ii. 4 ; λίθος i'lrl λί^ω Ι-θον Τ Tr WII], Mk. xiii. 2 ; «'πϊ πίνακί, Mt. xiv. 8, ΐΓ; Mk. vi. 25; en't τοίί κροββάτοΐί, Mk. vi. 55; άνηκλ'ίναί πάντας <πί τω χύρτω, ^ik. vi. ;>!Ι ; ίπίκίΐτο (π αΰτώ. lay upon it, Jn. xi. 38 ; ΐφ' imrois, Kev. xix. 14. b. of the place in which (Lat. in with the abl.. Germ, auj with the ace), after verbs expressing motion towards a place, to denote a remaining in the place after the motion, [Eng. upon, at, etc.] : βά\λ(ΐν\ίθον ϊηίτινι. dat. of pers.. Jn. viii. 7 Rec. ; οικοδομ(Ίν, Mt. xvi. IK ; (ποικο8ομ€Ϊν, Eph. ii. 20; (πιβάΧλιιν,Μΐ. ix. 16 (Lk. v. 3i; (ττιβάλλίΐν ίπί τι) ; (πφράπτ{ΐν, Mk. ii. 21 (where L Τ Tr Wll have ini with ace); ίπιπίπταν, Acts viii. 16. c. of the place above which (Lat. super. Germ, iiber, [Eng. overl) : ϊπ αίτω, over his head, Lk. xxiii. 38 (for which Mt. xxvii. 37 (πάνω Trjs κ(φα\ή! αυτού). d. of the place at, or by, or near which: ίπι θύρακ and «π! τ^ βΰρα, Mt. xxiv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. 29 ; Acts v. 9. (and often in Grk. writ.; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1037'; [L. and S. s. v. B. I. la.; cf. A. I. 2 a. above]) ; em τή προβατικη, Jn. V. 2; cttI τω ιτοταμω. Rev. ix. 14 ; «ττΐ τη στοά. Acts iii. 11; i'lr' [L Τ 'J"r Wll παρ'] αίτοί! fVi/jfii/tu, .Vets xxviii. 14. 2. Metaph. ; a. of that upon which any action, effect, condition, rests as a basis or sup port; prop. upon the ground of; and a. of that upon which any- thing is sustained or upheld: ζήν ίπί τινι, to sus- tain life on (by) a thing, Mt. iv. 4 (where LTr, the sec- ond time, fV, [cf. W. 3.s9 (364) note]) ; Lk. iv. 4, (Deut. viii. 3 for S^ Π'ΓΙ ; Plat. Alcib. 1 p. 105 c. ; Pint, de cup. divit. 7 p. 526 d. ; Alciphr. epp. 3, 7, etc.) ; auvUvat en'i To'is opTois, to understand by reasoning built upon the loaves, .Mk. vi. 52 [cf. W.392 (367) ; B. 337 (290)]. β. of that upon which anything rests (our upon): en (XntSi [see in {λπίϊ, 2], supported by hope, in hope, [cf. W. § 51, 2 f.], Acts ii. 2C ; Ro. iv. 18 ; 1 Co. ix. 10, [differently in f . below] ; to do any thing tni τω ονόματι Ttvos, relying upon the name i. e. the authority of any one [cf. W. 393 (367)] : iXcvaovTai ίπΐ τω ονόματι μου, appropriating to themselves the name of .Messiah, which belongs to me, Mt. xxiv. 5 ; Mk. xiii. 6 ; Lk. xxi. 8, (in ivhich pass, λί'γοντα, ότι ίγώ fipi ό Χρισ-τόί is added by way of explanation) ; βαπτίζ(σθαι «πϊ [L Tr Wll tv] τω όν. Χριστοί", so as to repose j'our hope and confideucc in his Messianic authority. Acts ii. 38 ; 8(χ(σθ<ιί τίνα (Vi τω όν. μου, to receive one because he bears my name, is devoted to my authority and instruction, Mt. xviii. 5 ; Mk. ix. 37 ; Lk. ix. 48. to do anything upon the name of Christ, his name being introduced, appeal being made tohis authority and command : as κήρυσσαν, bihaoKfiv, etc., Lk. x.xiv. 4 7 : Acts iv. 17, 18 ; v. 28, 40 ; βνναμιν noittv, δαιμόνια (κβαΚ \fiv, using his name as a formula of exorcism, [cf. W. 393(367)], Mk.ix. 39; Lk. ix. 49 [VVH Tr mrg. cv]. γ. of that unon which as a foundation any super• 233 structure is reared : νομοθρτίΐσθαι, Heb. vii. 11 (eV aiiT^, for which L Τ Tr WH have eV αΐτης) ; viii. 6 ; after verbs of trusting, belie vinj. hoping, etc.: άμκ(ΐ- σθαίίττίτινι. 3 Jn. 10 ; τταρρησίάζΐσθαί. Acts xiv. 3 ; irtnoi- θίναι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L txt. WII mrg. ; Lk. xi. 22; xviii. 9 ; Mk. X. 24 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; 2 Co. i. 9; Heb.ii.13; iriareufii', Lk. xxiv. 2.5 ; Ro.ix.33; x.ll, etc.; ίλπίζίΐν (see ελπίζω), [cf. C. I. 2 g. a. below]. 8. of the reason or motive underlying words and deeds, so that fVt is equiv. to for, on account of, [AV. 394 (368) ; B. 337 (290)] : Mt. xLx. 9 R G Τ Tr WH txt. ; Lk. v. 5 (iVi τω ρήματί a ου, at thy word, Germ, auf; [cf. W. §48, c. d. ; in reliance o/i]) ; Acts iii. IG [WH om.] ; iv. 9; xi. 19 [L Tr mrg. have the gen.] ; xxi. 24 ; 1 Co. viii. 11 (άποΚΧυσίαι eVi Tiw, Germ, zu Gruii.αί(ΐν, Lk. xix. 41 R G ; KOTitTov ποκϊν. Acts viii. 2 •. κό-πτισθαι. Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr WII txt. tlie ace.]; οίυνάσθαι. Acts xx. 38; υΚ6Κύζ(ΐν, Jas. V. 1 ; o-ruyrafeif. Mk. x. 22 ; συ\\υπ(Ίσθαι. Mk. iii. 5; μίτανοί'ιν eVi. to grieve over, repent of 2 Co. xii. 21 ; σπ\αγχν:ζ(σθαι, Mt. xiv. 14 GLTTr WH ; Mk. vi. 34 R Ct ; Lk. vii. 13 [Tdf. the ace] ; μακροθνμιΊν, Mt. xviii. 26 [Tr the ace], 29 [L Tr the ace.]; Lk. xviii. 7 [see μακροθυμΐω, 2] ; Jas. v. 7 ; οργίζ€σθαι, Rev. xii. 1 7 [Lchm. om. iVi] ; (κπλήσσισθαι. Mt. vii. 28 ; Mk. i. 22 ; Lk. iv. 32 ; Acts xiii. 1 2 ; διαταράσσισθαι, Lk. i. 29 ; (ξίστασθαι, Lk. ii. 47 ; θαμβύσθαι. Mk. x. 24 ; θάμβος, Lk. v. 9 ; Acts iii. 10 ; θανμάζ(ΐν. :\Ik. xii. 17 ; Lk. ii. 33 ; iv. 22 ; ix. 43 ; .xx. 26 ; Acts iii. 12 ; κανχάσθαι. Ro. v. 2; ίπαισχύν^σθαι, Ro. vi. 21 ; παραζηΚονν ΆηΛ ^τapoρyίζ€lv τινα€πΊτινι,\\ο.'Χ.. 19. €. of the rule, orcondition [W. 394 (36S) d.] : in ίΚπίδι, a hope being held out or given, Ro. viii. 20 ; Tit. i. 2, (differ- ently in β. above) ; eVl 8υσ\ν . . . μάρτνσιν. on condition that two witnesses testify to the matter in question, [a/ (the mouth of) two etc. : cf. W. 392 (367)], Heb. x. 28; f'lri vtKpoU, equiv. ίοόντων νεκρών (in the case of the dead), if any one has died, Heb. ix. 17. J. of the purpose and end \^u>ito, for ; W. 394 (368) e.] : cV ονόματι αΰτοϋ, to worship and profess his name. Acts xy. 14 Rec. : KaXeir Tiva «Vi Tivi, Lat. ad aliquid. Gal. v. 13 ; 1 Th. iv. 7. (fVi $fvia, Xen. an. 7,6,3; cf. λΥ. u. s.") ; κτισθίντις t πι 'pyoK άγαθοίς, Eph. ii. 10 ; φpovf^v cm τινι to take thought for a thing, Pliil. iv. 10 ; €φ' ω (by a later Grk. impropriety for eVi τίνι, cf. W. § 24, 4 ; [B. § 139, 59 ; but on the e.x- treme doubtfulness of this alleged use of or in direct questions, see Pres. T. D. AVoolsey in the Bibliotheca Sacra for Apr. 1874, p. 314 sqq.]) jra'pei; for what pur- pose art thou come? Vulg. ad quid [al. quod^ venistif Ut. xxvi. 50 R [but G L Τ Tr AVH ϊφ' S. see C. I. 2 g. γ. aa. below] (Theoph. cm ποίω σκοπώ; cf. Ildt. 7, 146 Trvftl/xfOf) fT' οΐσι ηλΰυν ; [but the view of many ancient expositors which explains the passage by an aposiopesis : "that for which thou hast come — do" is thoroughly es- tablished by Dr. Woolsey u. s.]). of the issue or unde- signed result; \ογομαχ€Ϊν fVi καταστροφή των άκονόν• των, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; (τοϊς cni ώφΐλ^ία π^ττοιημίνοις «πϊ ^\ut:ijj χρήσθαι, Xen. mem. 2, 3, 19). η. of the pattern or standard [A.Y. after; W. 394 (368) f.] : καλΛ τίνα iVl τω ονόματι τίνος, to call one after the name of another, Lk. i. 59 (Xeh. vii. 63 [W. 410 (3.S2)]) ; cVi τώ όμοιώματί τt^of after the likeness of a thing, Ro. v. 14. b. of that over which one is placed, for its care or adminis- tration: eVi Tois νπάρχουσΐ τίνα καθιστάναι, Lk. xii. 44 (cf. A. I. 1 d. above, [also C. I. 2 e. below] ; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 474 sq. ; Bnhdy. p. 249; [W. 393 (367) a.]). c. used of a hostile aim, against (for exx. fr. Grk. writ, fr. Horn, down, see Passow i. 2 p. 1036* ; [cf. L. and S. s. v. B. L 1 c; W. 392(367); B. 337 (290)]): Lk. xii.52sq.; θλίψις "/(νυμίνη em Στιφάνω [-νου, L Tr mrg.]. Acts xi. 1 9 [A. V. aiou/]. d. of that to which anytliing is added (so that it is, as it were, upon it ) ; in addition to ; over ami above, [W. 393 (367 sq.) b.] : 2 Co. vii. 13 (L Τ Tr AVH eVl δβ Tfi 7Γαρακ\ησ€ΐ νμων [but L Τ Tr AA Η ημων~\ ττ^ρισ- σοτίρως κτλ. but in addition to the comfort given (us) by you, we rejoiced the more exceedingly etc. [A. V. in etc. (of condition)]); Kfpbaivdv τι ίττ'ι τινι, Mt. xxv. 20, 22 R G J (Xfiv \νπην em λίπτ;, Phil. ii. 27 Rec. (Eur. Iph. T. 197 φόνος em φάνω, Troad. 596 em δ* αλ•/(σιν u\yea. Soph. O. C. 544 em νόσω νόσον; [cf. Mey. on Phil. I.e.; but G L Τ Tr AA'H give the ace, see C. ί. 2 e below]) ; προσ- τιθίναι ίπί, Lk. iii. 20 ; em πάσι τοίΛ-οίΓ, besides all this, Lk. xvi. 26 [L mrg. Τ Tr mrg. AA'H iv, see ev, I. 5 e p. 211•] ; Eph. vi. 16 [L txt. Τ Tr ΑΑΉ ev (and there is no τούτοις) ; see iv, u. s.] ; Col. iii. 14, (Sir. xxxvii. 15:1 Mace -x. 42 ; [classic exx. in AVetst. on Lk. 1. c.]) ; add also Ileb. viii. 1 [see LUnem. ad loe] ; ix. 10 ; 1 Co. xiv. 16. e. of that which is connected as an adjunct (esp. of time) with the principal matter under consideration, (in Germ, generally bei, i. e. at, on, etc.) [AA^ 392 (367)] : €νχαριστω τω Be^ μου em πάση ttj pveia νμων. at every men- tion of you. as often as I call you to mind, Phil. i. 3 [but see Mey., EUie, Bp. Lghtft. ad 1., and s. v. πάς, I. 2] ; σπίν- δομαι fVi TJj θυσία, while engaged in (busied over) the sacrifice, Phil. ii. 17; iπΊ συντίλίία των αιώνων. Heb. ix. 26; ίπ\ ττ/ πρώττ} διαθηκτ], ib. 15: ^Keipeiv and θepίζeιv 234 (π fiXoylaii, so that blessings attend, i. e. bountifully, frt'cly, 2 Co. ix. β ; tm πάση τη ανάγκη, 1 Tb. iii. 7 ; «πι τω παροργισμώ ίμων wliiio your anger lasts, Eph. iv. 26 ; fVi τηΰτω meanivliile, i. e. wliile this was fjoing on [(?), upon t/ii.t], .In. iv. 27. f. of tlie object of an action, and a. where tlie Germ. uses«/i, [Eng. ir(in/ : (ΐταίρω,(πανάγω,(παφ)ΐίζω, etc. 7. against : cVi/iouXr;, (πανίστημι, ΐπίηρκυς, eVt- ομκίω, etc. 8. superintendence : ίπιστάτης. ίτΓΐ-βαίνω ; 2 aor. (πίβην; pi. ptcp. (πίβιβηκώς: 1. to get upon, mount: eVi τι, Mt. xxi. 5 (Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 1, etc.; (ien. xxiv. CI); τω πλοίω [to embark in'], Acts xxvii. 2 (Tliuc. 7, 70); els το πΧο'ίον, Acts xxi. G RG; used without a case, of going almaril (a ship). Acts xxi. 2 ; to go up : ds 'Upoa-oX. Acts xxi. 4 L Τ Tr WII, [yet al. refer this to 2]. 2. to set foot in, enter: «s with the ace. of place, Acts xx. 18; with the dat. of place (as also in Grk. writ.). Acts xxv. 1.* ^πι- βάλλω ; impf. ίπίβαΧλον; fut. ί'πιβπλώ ; 2 .lor. eVf- βα>.αν, [3 [lers. plur. -λαΐ'. Acts xxi. 27 Τ Tr WII ; Mk. xiv. 4li TWII, (seeiin-e'p;(o/aa(, init.)]; 1. Transitiveh', a. to cast upon : τινι βρόχον, 1 Co. vii. 35 ; τιν\ τα Ιμάτια, Mk. xi. 7 ; [χουν eVl τας κ(φ. Rev. xviii. 19 WII nirg.] ; to laij upon, iiri τίνα την χ^Ίρα or τάς χίΊρας, used of seizing one to lead hiu» off as a prisoner : Mt. xxvi. 50 ; Mk. xiv.46 R G L ; Lk. xx. 19 ; xxi. 1 2; Jn. vii. 30 [L mrg. ?/3αλβν], 44 (L• Tr WII the simple βάλλαν) ; Acts v. 18 ; xxi. 27, (for the Ilebr. "3 '7N Τ nSu, Gen. xxii. 12); also τικ Xe'tpas Tivi, Mk. xiv. 46 f Tr WII , Acts iv. 3, ( Polyb. 3, 2,8; 5,5; Lcian. Tim. 4) ; (πιβάλ\(ίν τάς xfipas (oW.hy the inf. indicating the purpose. Acts xii. 1 ; την χύρα ι'π άροτρην, to put the hand to the plough (to begin work), Lk. ix. G2. b. to put (i. e. sew) on : ('πίβλημα fVt Ίμάτιον, Lk. V. 36 ;'eVi Ιματίω, Mt. ix. 16. 2. In- trans. (as in Grk. writ. fr. Ilom. down, [cf. W. 251 (236) ; li. 144 (126) sq.]) to throw one's self upon, rush upon: «if TO πλοΐοκ, of waves rushing into a ship, Mk. iv. 37; to put one's mind upon a thing, attend to, with the dat. of the thing: τούτω ynp <πι/3άλλωι/ for if you think thereon, Antonin. 10, 30; μη8(ν\ yap ϊπιβάλλιιν μη&ιτι'ραν (i. e. την α"σθησιν κα\ την νόησιν) χωρίί τηϋ προσπίπτοντος dSa- λου, I'lut. plac. phil. 4, 8 ; absol. ΐπιβάλών, sc. τώ ρήματι τοΰ Ί>;<τοϋ, when he had considered the utterance of Jesus, Mk. xiv. 72 ; cf. Kypke, [AVetst., McClellan] ad loc.; B. 145 (127); [and for the ditT. inter|)p. see Mey. andesp. Morisonad loc.]. 3. Impersonally, fVi/iiXXfc pot it litliings lo mr, falls to my aliare: τύ ('πιβ'ιλλην (sc. μοί) μϊροί τη! ουσία!. Lk. xv. 12 (κτημάτων το (πιβάλΧον, lldt. 4, 115; τύ επι/ίαλλοί' αϋτοίί μί'ρυ?, Dioi Ι. 14, 1 7, and the like often in other writ, [see .Meyer; σοϊ ίπιβάΚΧα ή κληρονομιά, Tob. vi. 1 2 (cf. iii. 1 7 ; 1 Mace. x. 30, etc.)])." ίτη-βαρίω, -ά> ; 1 aor. inf. (πιβαρήσαι ; Ιο put a burden upon, to load, [cf. cVi, D. 3] ; trop. lo he burden.iome ; so in the N. T. : τινά, 1 Tli. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; absol. ΐνα μη eVi- βαρώ ' that I press not too heavily ' i. c. lest I give |)ain by too severe language. 2 Co. ii. 5. (Dion. Ilal., Appian.)* έΐΓΐ-βιβάζω: 1 aor. ΐπιβίβασα: lo I'ause lo mount; to place tipon, [cf. «Vi, I). 3] : τίνα or τι <'πί τι, Lk. χ. 34 ; xix. 35; Acts xxiii. 24. (Time, Plat., Diod., al. ; Sept. several times for D'3"\ri.) " ί•ΐΓΐ-βλ€'•ΐΓω : 1 aor. eV<'/3Xe^a ; in the Sept. often for D'2n and nj3, also for ΠΝί ; lo turn the eyes upon. In look upon, gaze upon, (eVi upon [cf. eVi, D. 2]) : eVi τίνα, contextually, to look upon one Λvith a feeling of admira- tion and respect, to look up lo, regard, Jas. ii. 3 ; contextu- ally, to look upon in pity for the sake of giving aid, i. <|. /() //(((■(' regaril for, to rigurd, Lk. ix. 38 (where for cVi- βΧφ,ν [KL] and ίπίβλιψαι [G T] write [with Tr WII] (πιβλίψαι, 1 aor. act. inf. ; cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad loc, and above in Βίομαι, 3 a., [also B. 273 (234) note]) ; (VI την ταττ(ίνωσΙν twos, Lk. i. 48 ; often in the O. T. in the same sense, as 1 S. i. 11; ix. 16; Ps. xxiv. (x.xv.) IG; Ixviii. (Ixix.) 1 7 ; Tob. iii. 3, etc. (In Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Phito down, both lit. and fig.) * eirt -βλημιο, -rof, το'. (f7ri/3iiAXci>), that which is thrown or put upon a thing, or tliul which is added to it ; an aildilion ; spec, that which is sewed on to corer a rent, a patch ; Vidg. assumenlum [(also commissnra)']. (i. q. (πίρραμα) : Alt. ix. IG ; Mk. ii. 21 ; Lk. v. 36. [Sept., Plut., Arr.] * ί'ΐΓΐ-βοάω, -ω ; to cry out to [cf. (πι, D. 2], cry out : foil. by ace. with inf. Acts xxv. 24 R G, [but L Τ Tr WH βοάω, (|. v. 2, and fin. From Ilom., Ildt. down].* ίπι-βουλή, -ης, ή, a plan formeil against one [ef. fVi, D. 7], a plot : Acts i.x. 21 ; yLucrat τινι ΐπιβουλη υπό tivos, Acts XX. 3; ('is Tiva, Acts xxiii. 30; plur. Acts xx. 19. (From [Iiat.], Thtic. down.)• ίΐΓΐ-γαμβρίνω : fut. (ττιγαμβρίΰσω ; lo he related lo by marriagi•, oiler into njfinily with ; 1. Sept. for [ΓΙΠίΙΠ, to become Any one's father-in-law OT son-in-law : τιν'ι, (ien. xxxiv. 9 ; 1 S. xviii. 22 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xviii. 1 ; 2 Esdr. ix. 14 ; 1 Mace. x. 54, 56. 2. τινά, for D3', to marry the widow of a brother who has died childless: Gen. xxxviii. 8 ; Mt. xxii. 24, where allusion is made to the levirate law recorded in Deut. xxv. 5-10; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Leviratsehe ; [BB. DD. s. v. Marriage]. (Not found in native Grk. auth. [e.xc. schol. ad Kur. Or. 574 sqq.; cf. W. 2li].)• eir(-Y(ios, -ov, («πί and y^), existing upon the earth, earthli/, terrestrial: οικία, the house we live in on earth, spoken of the body with which we are clothed in this world, 2 Co. V. 1 ; σώματα eVt'yfia, opp. to (πονράνια, I iviyivofMU 237 Ι^ημ^ω Co. XV. 40 ; absolutely, oi iniytioi (opp. to o! iirovpavioi and oi καταχθόνιοι), those who are on earth, the inhabits ants of the earth, men, Phil. ii. 10; τα enlyeia, things done on earth, spoken of the new birth wrought by the Holy Spirit, Jn. iii. 12; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. p. 212 sq. ; τα in'iyna φρονύν, to set the mind on the pleasures and good things of earth, Phil. iii. 19 ; σοφία iVi'yfiof (<*(ip. to 15 άνωθιν κατιμχομίνη), the wisdom of man, liable to error and misleading, .las. iii. 15. (From Plato down; nowhere in the O. T.) * ί'ΐΓΐ-γίνομαι : 2 aor. (πιγινόμην ; 1. to become or happen afterwards ; to be born afler. 2. to come to, arrive : of time, τ^σσαρΐσκαι^ΐκάτη ννξ cntyivfTo, Acts xxvii. 27 L [ed. ster.], Τ [edd. 2, 7] ; {ϊαρος eViyiyi/erai ωρη, Ilom. II. 6, 148). 3. to arise, spring np, come on: (πιγ€ΐ/ομίνου νήτον, a south wind having sprung up, Acts xxviii. 13; (Thuc. 3, 74; 4, 30).* ίΐΓΐ-γινώσ'κω ; [impf. επίγ/ι^ωσΑίοι/] ; ίιύ, €πιγνώσομαι \ 2 aor. ίπ^γνων'. yti. ^ιτίγνωκα; [Pass., pres. iVtyifojaKo^at ; 1 aor. (π(γ•'ώσθην^; («Vi denotes mental direction tow- ards, application to, that which is known) ; in the Sept. chiefly for i*T and 13J, "^"27) ; 1. to become thorough- ly acquainted with, to know thoroughly; to know accu- rately, know tcell, [see reff. s. v. (πίγνωσις. init.J : 1 Co. xiii. 1 2 (where γινώσκω «κ μίρουί and entyiu. i. e. to know thoroughly, know well, divine things, are contrasted [W. § .•!9, 3 Ν. 2]) ; with an ace. of the thing, I.k. i. 4 ; 2 Co. i. 1 3 ; την χάριν τον θΐοΰ, Col. i. 6 ; την άλη6€ΐαν, 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; την όδύν της δικαιοσύνης, 2 Pet. ii. 21 [cf. Β. 30,5 (262)]; το δικαίωμα τοϋ θ^οϊι, Ro. i. 32 ; τι foil, by οτι (by the fa- miliar attraction [AV. «26 (581) ; B. 376 (322) ; some bring this ex. under 2 a. in the sense of acknowledge']), 1 Co. xiv. 37; τινά, one's character, will, deeds, deserts, etc., 1 Co. xvi. 18 ; 2 Co. i. 14 ; [pass. opp. to ΰγνοοΰμ^νοι, 2 Co. vi. 9] ; Tiva από τίνος (gen. of thing), Mt. vii. 16, 20 [Lclim. ίκ~\ (" a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cogno- scere," for the more common ex, Caes. b. g. 1, 22, 2 [cf. B. 324 (278 sq.); W. 372 (348)]); by attraction τινά, on etc. 2 Co. xiii. 5 ; (πιγινώσκιι τΐ>ν ν'ιόν, τον πατίρα, Jit. .xi. 27. 2. univ. to know; a. to recognize : τινά, i. e. by sight, hearing, or certain signs, to perceive who a person is, Mt. xiv. 35 ; Mk. vi. 54 ; Lk. x.xiv. 16, 31 ; Mk. vi. 33 [R T, but G WH mrg. without the accus.] ; by attrac- tion, τινά, ότι. Acts iii. 10; iv. 13; τιι/ά, his rank and authority, I\It. xvii. 12; with ace. of the thing, to recog- nize a thing to be what it really is : την φωνην τοϋ XIcVpou, Acts xii. 14; την γήν. Acts xxvii. 39. b. to know i. q. to perceive : τι, Lk. v. 22 ; ev (αντω, foil, by ace. of the thing with a ptcp. [B. 301 (258)], Mk. v. 30 ; foil, by 5τι, ϋ. i. 22 ; τω ννινμΛτι foil, by ότι. JMk. ii. 8. c. to know i. e. to find out, ascertain : sc. αϊτό. Acts ix. 30 ; foil, by ότι, Lk. vii. 37 ; xxiii. 7 ; Acts xix. 34 ; xxii. 29 ; xxiv. 1 1 L Τ Tr WH ; xxviii. 1 ; τί, foil, by an indirect quest.. Acts xxiii. 28 L Τ Tr WH ; [δι' ην αΐτίαν etc. Acts xxii. 24] ; τταρά Tiraf (gen. of pers.) Trepi tixos (gen. of thing). Acts xxiv. 8. d. to know i. e. to understand : Acts xxv. 10. [From Hom. down.]" iir(-7V Tr br. in Lk. xxiii. 38; ονόματα. Rev. xxi. 12; €v τινι. Acts xvii. 23; fig. to write upon the mind, i. e. to fi.x indelibly upon it, cause to cleave to it and to be always vividly present to it : νόμους ini καρδίας [-δίακ Τ WH mrg.], Heb. viii. 10; tTrt των διανοιών, Ileb. X. 16 R G, en\ την διάνοιαν, ibid. L Τ Tr λλ Η, (τουί Χόγονς 6πι το πΧάτος της καρδίας, Prov, vii. 3). [From Horn, down.] * €ΎΓΐ-8€£κνυμ.ι ; 1 aor. iiredfi^a ; [jires. mid. ΐττιδίίκννμαι] ; to exhibit, shon; [as though for c .x ρ ο s i t i ο η or e .χ a m i- nation (Schmidt ch. 127, 5); fr. Pind.. Hdt. down.]; a. to bring forth to view : τί, Jit. xxii. 1 9 ; and Lk. x,\. 24 Rec. ; τί Tiw, Lk. xxiv. 40 R G ; ('αυτόκ τικι, Lk. xvii. 14 ; to show i. e. bid to look at, τί τινι, Mt. .xxiv. 1 ; to show i. e. furnish to be looked at, produce what may be looked at : σημΛον, Mt. xvi. 1 ; Mid. with ace. of the thing, to display something belonging to one's self: χιτώνας, the tunics as their own. Acts ix. 39 [see Meyer], b. to prove, demonstrate, set forth to be knoioi and acknowledged: Heb. vi. 1 7 ; foil, by the ace. and inf. Acts xviii. 28.* ίττι-δΕχομιαι ; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to receive hospi-' tably : τικά, 3 Jn. 10 (Polyb. 22, 1, 3). 2. to admit, i. e. not to reject : τινά, one's authority, 3 Jn. 9 (τους Xo'yous, 1 Mace. X. 46 ; naihfiav. Sir. Ii. 26). [Cf. δίχομαι, fin.] * Ι-ηδημεω, -ω ; (ϊπίδημος); 1. to be pre.', 4 and 1348% 32) : Mk. xii. 14 WH (rejected) mm. for κηνσον (al.).*] 'EiriKoipeios [-pioy Τ λΥΉ ; see I, 1]. -ov, 6, Epicurean, belonging to the sect of Epicurus, the philosopher : Acts xvii. 18.• cniKoupCa, -as, ή, (επικουρεω to aid), aid, succor: Acti xxvi. 22. (Sap. xiii. 18 ; fr. Thuc. and Eur. down.) * ewivptj/tB 240 ΐΤΓΐμβνα {m-Kpivu : 1 aor. ατίκρινα ; to aiijudije, approve oy one's decision, decree, give sentence : full, by the ace. with inf., Lk. .xxiii. 24. (Plato, Dera., Pint., Ildian., al.) * ίΐΓΐ-λαμβάνω ; 2 aor. mid. ϊιτίΚαβύμψ ; to take in addi- tion [ef. cVi, D. 4], to take. Ια;/ hold of, take possession of, overtake, attain to. In the Hible only in the mid. ; Sept.. for ΙΠΧ and ρ'ΙΠΠ ; a. ])ΐ•ϋρ. to lay hold of or to seize upon anylhintj with the hands (Germ, sich an etwas anhalten) : των άφλάστων νηόί, Hdt. 6, 114 ; hence, univ. to take hold of, lay hold of: with gen. of pers., Mt. xiv. 31 ; Lk. ix. 47 [Tr AVII ace.]; (x.\.iii. 2G KG); Acts xvii. 19; xxi. 30, 33; with ace. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 26 L Τ Tr WII, but in opposition see Meyer ; for where the ptcp. ('πιΚαβόμιΐΌ! is in this sense joined with an ace, the ace, by the σχήμα απο κοινού, depends also upon the accompanying finite verb (cf. B. § I.'i2, 9; [so AV. (ed. Liinem.) 202 (190)]): Acts ix. 27; xvi. 19: xviii. 17. cf. Lk. xiv. 4. with the gen. of a thing : t^s χ(Ίρύί nvos. Mk. viii. 23; Acts xxiii. 19; of a leader, and thus niet- aph. of God, Ileb. viii. 9 [cf. W. .57] (Γ)31); Β. 31(; (271)] ; with gen. of a pers. and of a thing : «ViX. rivos λόγου, ρήματος, to take any one in his speech, i. e. to lay hold of something said by him which can be turned against him, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr λόγοι/], 26 [WH Tr mrg. τοϋ for αύτοΰ] : «ττίλ. της αιωνίου [:d. οι/τωϊ] ζωής, to seize upon, lay hold of, i. e. to struggle to obtain eternal life, 1 Tim. vi. 12, 19, [cf. W. 312 (29:i)]. b. by a metaph. drawn from laying hold of another to rescue him from peril, to help, to suci-or, (cf. Germ, sich eincs annehmen) : τινός, Ileb. ii. 16 ; in this sense used besides only in Sir. iv. 11 and Schol. ad Ae-schyl. Pens. 739. In .Appian.bel. civ. 4, 96 the act. is thus used with ilie diil.: ήμΊν rb δαιμόυιον ΐπιΧαμβάνίΐ. (Ίτι-λανθάνομαι. ; pf. pass, «πιλίλτ/σμαι ; 2 aor. mid. eVi- λαθάμην, Sept. often for UD'd ; tojoiy/il: foil, by the inf., Mt. xvi. .') ; ^Ik. viii. 11; foil, by an indir. (picst. .las. i. 24 ; in the sense of iief/lecting, no longer rtirini/ for : with the gen.. Ileb. vi. 10; xiii. 2, 16 ; with the ace. (cf. \V. § 30, 10 c. ; Matthiae § 347 Anm. 2, ii. p. 820 S(i.), Phil. iii. 13 (14) ; with a pass, signification (Is. xxiii. 16 ; Sir. iii. 14 ; .\x.\ii. (xxxv.) 9 ; Sap. ii. 4, etc. [cf. B. .52 (46)]) : ίΐτιΧ(\ησμίνος forgotten, given over to oblivion, i. e. nnciired fur, ίνώπιον τοϋ aeoij before God i. e. by God (Sir. xxiii. 14), Lk. xii. G. [(From Horn, on.)]* ίτΓΐ-λίγω: [pres. |)ass. ptcp. {'π-ιλίγόμί ras] ; I anr. mid. ptcp. €πΟ^(ξάμ(νος ; 1. to say htsides [cf. cVi. D. 4], (lldt. et al.) ; to surname (Plato, lesg. 3 p. 700 b.) : in pass. .In. V. 2 [Tdf. roXfy.]. unless the meanins to name (put a name u])on) be jireferred here; cf. επονομάζω. 2. to choose for (Hdt. et sqq. ; Sept.) ; mid. to choose for one's self : Acts xv. 40 (2 S. x. 9 ; Hdt. 3, 157; Time. 7, 19: Diod. 3, 73 (74); 14, 12; Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 4, and others).* ίτη-λίίιτω : fnt. eViXf ίψω ; to fail, not to suffice for (any purpose, for the attainment of an end) : τίνα ό χρόνος, time fails one, Ileb. xi. 32 and many like e.\x. in Grk. writ, f r. Dem. dowu ; see Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 818.• {ιη-λ((χω ; impf. ίπί'Κιιχον ; to lick the surface of, licit over ([cf. ί'πί, D. 1] ; Germ, belecken) : with the ace. of a thing, Lk. xvi. 21 L Τ TrWH ; (in Long. past. 1, 24 (11) a var. for Ι-πιτριχω).' ίΐΓίλησμονή, -ης, ή, ((ττιλήσ/ιωΐ' forgetful [W. 93 (89)]), forgetfiilness : άκροαττ^ς ΐπιΧησμονης, a forgetful hearer [cf. W. § 34. 3b.: B. nil (140)], .Jas. i. 25. (.Sir. xi. 27 (25).)• iir£Aoiiros, -ov, (λοιπός), remaining besides, left over, [cf. eni, D. 4] : 1 Pet. iv. 2. (Sept. ; Grk. writ. fr. lldt. down.) * ίιτί-λυσίϊ, -iwf, ή, (ί'πιλύω, q. v.), α loosening, unloosing (Germ. Λ ufliisung) ; metaph. interpretation : 2 Pet. i. 20, on which pass, see yivopai, 5 e. o. (Gen. xl. 8 Aq. ; Ileliod. 1, IS ; but not I'hilo, vitacontempl. § 10, where ϊπι8(ίξ(ως was long ago restoied.) * ίτΓΐ-λνω : impf. ('ττίλυοΐ'; 1 fut. pass. eViXu^ijffo^ot ; a. projierly, to vnloosi; untie (Germ, (lujliisrn) anything knotted or bound or sealed up ; (Xen., Theocr., I Idian.). b. to clear (a controversy), to ileci/le, settle: Acts xix. 39 ; to explain (what is obscure and hard to understand) : Mk. iv. 34 (as in Gen. xli. 12 var. ; Philo, vita contempl. § 10: de agricult. § 3 ; Sext. Empir. 2, 246; γρίφους, Athen. 10 p. 449 e. ; also in mid., Athen. 10 p. 450 f. ; .Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 5, and often by the Scholiasts).• 4ΐΓΐ-μορτυρ€'ω, -ώ ; to hear iritness In, establish liy testi- mony: full, by the ace. with inf., I Pet. v. 12. (Plato, .Joseph., Pint., J/cian., al.) [CoMi•. : συν-ιπιμαρτυρίω.^' 4ΐΓΐμ€λ»α, -ας, ή, (fVi^eXiiscareful), rare, attention : Acts xxvii. 3. (Prov. iii. 8; 1 Mace. xvi. 14 ; 2 Mace. xi. 23 ; very com. in Grk. prose writ., not used in the poets.)* ^ι-μ€λΕθμαι, -ονμαι, and (πιμίλομαι: fut. €7τιμ€λήσομαι\ 1 aor. ίττίμίΧήβην: with gen. of the object, to lake cure oj a person or thing {Ι-πί denoting direction of the mind toward the object cared for [cf. ini, D. 2]) : Lk. x. 34 sq. ; 1 Tim. iii. 5. (Gen. xliv. 21 ; 1 Mace. xi. 37 ; 1 Esdr. vi. 2(i : used by Grk. writ. esp. of prose fr. lldt. down.) * «πιμελώβ, adv., ililigenlly, carefully : Lk. xv. 8.* ΙΐΓΐ-μίνω; [impf. Ιττΐμΐνον^; fut. Ιτημ^νω; 1 aor. «Ve- ptiva ; to stay at or with ; to tarry still ; still to abide, to continue, remain; a. prop, of tarrying in a place: eV Έφ/σω. 1 Co. xvi. 8; iv TTJ σαρκί, to live still longer on earth, I'liil. i. 24 (G Τ WU om. ev) ; αυτοί, there. Acts xv. 34 [Rec.]: xxi. 4 [Lchm. αυτοΊ.ς"\•, with dat. of thing: τΓ; σαρκί, to abide as it were a captive to life on earth, Phil. i. 24 G Τ WH ; tVi τινι. ivith one. Acts xxviii. 14 [LT Tr WII παρ''\ : προς τίνα, with one, 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Gal. i. 18; with specification of time how long: Acts x. 48; xxi. 4, 10; xxviii. 12, 14; 1 Co. xvi. 7. b. trop. toper- severe, continue ; with dat. of the thing continued in [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 10 sq.] : Ty αμαρτία, Ro. vi. 1 ; TT) απιστία, Ro. xi. 23 ; tjj πίστ(ΐ. Col. i. 2.'! ; U\ the work of teaching. 1 Tim. iv. 16 (τω μι) aSiKtiv, Xen. oec. 14, 7 : τη μνηστ^ία, Acl. v. h. 1 0. 1 5 ) : with dat. of the blessing for which one keeps himself fit : ry χάριτι, Acts xiii. 43 Rec; Ty χρηστότητι, Ro. xi. 2-'; with a ptcp. denoting the action persisted in : .In. viii. 7 Rec. ; Acts xii. 16 ; cf. B. 299 sq. (257) ; [W. § 54, 4].* ίΤΓίΐ'βυω 241 έττιητοθεω 4irtrvcuii> : 1 aor. enivevaa ; fr. Horn, down ; to nod to ; trop. (by a nod) to express approval, to asseril : Acts xviii. 20, as often in Grk. writ.* eirCvoia, -ar, ή, (ίττινοίω to think on, devise), thought, purpose : Acts viii. 22. (Jer. ,\x. 10 ; Sap. vi. 17, etc.; often in Grk. writ. fr. .Soph, and Thue. down.) * «ΐΓίορκίω, -ώ : fut. ϊπιορκήσω, cf. Kriiger §40 s. v., and §39,12,4; [Veitch s. v. ; B. 53 (4G)] ; (eViopicor, q.v.) ; to swear falsebj, forswear one's self: Mt. v. 33. (Sap. xiv. 28 ; 1 Esdr. i. 46 ; by Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * €irC-opKos, -ov, (fr. tVi [q. v. D. 7] against, and ορκοί) ; [masc. as subst.] a false swearer, a perjurer : 1 Tim. i. 10. (From Horn, down.)* ίΐΓίοΰΐτα, see CTrei^t. tiriovcrios, -ov, a word found only in Mt. Ti. 1 1 and Lk. .\i. Ά, in tlie phrase npros i-niovaios ([Pesh.] Syr. (^^ »«\ 7 > —laiQIffJ the bread of our necessity, i. e. necessary for us [but the Curetonian (earlier) Syriac reads j ' -^"] continual; cf. Bp. Lghtft. as below, I. 3 p. 214 sqq. ; Tay- lor, Sayings of the Jewish Fathers, p. 139 sq.] ; Itala [Old Lat.] panis quolidianus). Origcn testifies [de orat. L'7] that the word was not in use in ordinary speech, and accordingly seems to have been coined by the Evange- lists themselves. Many commentators, as Beza, Kui- noel, Tholuck, Ewald, Bleek, Keim, Cremer, following Origen, Jerome (who in Mt. only translates by the bar- barous phrase panis supersuhstantialis"), Theophylact, Euthymius Zigabenus, explain the word by bread for sustenance, which serves to sustain life, deriving the word from ουσία, after the analogy of (ξοΰσιος. ivoiaios• But ουσία very rarely, and only in philosoiihic language, is e()uiv. to ΰπαρξΐ!, as in Plato, Theaet. j). 18.!) c. (opp. to TO μη flvat), Ari.stot. de part. anim. i. 1 {ή yap yevfais tv(Ka της ουσία? ίστίν, uhW ονχ η ουσία ΐνΐκα της γΐνίσίως; for other ex.x. see Bonitz's Index to Aristot. p. 544), and generally denotes either essence, real nature, or sub- stance, property, resources. On this account Leo Meyer (in Kuhn, Zeitschr. f. vergleich. S])rachkunde, vii. pp. 401-430), Kamphausen (Gebet des Ilerrn, pp. 8G-102), with whom Keim (ti. 278 sq. [Eng. trans, iii. 340]), Weiss (Mt. 1. c), Delitzsch (Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. 187(! p. 402), agree, prefer to derive the word from ineivat (and in particular fr. the ptc|). ίπών, (-ποϋσιος for (πόντιος, see below) to be present, and to understand it bread which is ready at hand or suffices, so that Christ is conjectured to have said in Chald. NJpnT «onS (cf. 'Pn onS my allow- ance of bread, Prov. xxx. 8) or something of the sort. But this opinion, like the preceding, encounters the great objection (to mention no other) that, although the ι in tVt is retained before a vowel in certain words (as ίτιιορκος, f'mopKfiu, ΐπιόσσομαι, etc. [cf. Bp. Lghtft., as below, I. § I ] ), yet in iiruvai and words derived from it, {'πούσια, (πουσιώ^ης, it is always elided. Therefore much more cor- rectly do Grotius, Scaliger, Wetstein, Fischer (De vitiis Ifxx. etc. p. 306 sqq.), Valckenaer, Fritzsche (on Mt. p. •ifi 7 sqq.), Winer (97 (92)), Bretschneider, Wahl, Meyer, [Bp. Lghtft. (Revision etc., App.)] and others, compar- ing the words ίκονσιος, (StXovaios, yepovaios, (fr. ίκών, ίθί- \ων, yiptav, for ίκοντιος, ΐβΐΚόντιος, yepovrios, cf. Kiihner i. § (i3, 3 and § 334, 1 Anm. 2), conjecture that the adjec- u\e ('πιοϋσιος is f(jrmed fr(jm (πίών, ϊπιοϋσα, with refer- ence to the familiar expression ή ϊπιοίσα (see ΐπαμι), and ίίρτος eVtouVtoy is eijuiv. to πρτιις της ^πιπίσης ημέρας, food for (i. 6. necessary or sufficient for) the morrow. Thus ΐπιούσιον and σίιμφον admirably answer to each other, and that state of mind is portrayed which, piously contented vfithfood sufficinrj from one day to the next, in praying to God for sustenance does not go beyond the absolute necessity of the nearest future. This explana- tion is also recommended by the fact that in the Gospel according to the Hebrews, as Jerome testifies, the word επιούσιος was represented by the Aramaic ΊΠ"?, "quod difitur crastinus " ; hence it would seem that Christ him- self used the Chaldaic expression nno^ 'T ί<"3π'7. Nor is the prayer, so understood, at variance with the mind of Christ as expressed in Mt. vi. 34, but on the contrary harmonizes with it finely; for his hearers are bidden to ask of God, in order that they may themselves be relie\ ed of anxiety for the morrow. [See Bp. Lghtft., as above, pp. 195-234; McCtellan, The New Test. etc. pp. 632-647 ; T/io^uct, Bergpredigt, Mt. 1. c, for earlier reff.] » ίΐΓΐ-^ίΐΓτω ; 2 aor. t πίπεσοι/, 3 jiers. phir. ΐπίπίσαυ, Ro. XV. 3 L Τ Tr AVII [ef. άπΐρχομαι init.] ; pf. ptcp. inmf- πτωκώς ; [see πίπτω] ; Sept. for 73J ; to fall upon ; to rush or press upon; a. prop.; rm, upon one, Mk. iii. 10; to He upon one, Acts xx. 10; «Vi τον τράχηλήν τίνος, to fall into one's embrace, Lk. xv. 20 ; Acts xx. 37, (Gen. .xlvi. 29; Tobit xi. 8, 12; 3 Mace. v. 49); to fall back upon, ίπίτΰ στηθός τίνος, Jn. xni. 2.>Ή,ΟΎ. b. metaph. 6πι' Tiva. Ii> fidl upon one, i. e. to seize, take possession oj him: φό^οί, Lk. i. 12 ; Acts xix. 17 [LTroriaci'] ; Rev. xi. U LTTr AVH ; (κστασίί, Acts x. 10 Rec; άχΚίς, Acts xiii 11 [RG]. used also of the Holy Spirit, in its inspiration and impulse : <'πί τινι. Acts viii. 16 ; eVi τίνα, X. 44 [Lchm. £7Γίσί] ; xi. 15, (Ezek. xi. 5) ; of reproaches cast upon one : Ro. xv. 3 [Noteworthy is the absol. use in Acts xxiii. 7 WH mrg. Ιπίπ^σ^ν (al. iyivtro) στά- σις. (From Hdt. down.)] " ίτη-ίΓλήσ-σ-ω : 1 Hor. ίπίπ\ηζα; a. prop, to strike upon, beat upon : Horn. II. 1 0, 500. b. trop. to chas- tise tcith words, to chide, upbraid, rebuke : 1 Tim. v. 1. (Horn. Π. 12, 211 ; Xen., Plato, Polyb., al.) • ίΐΓΐ^ίΓοβί'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. ίπ(πό6ησα ; prop, πόθαν ίχω ίπι τι [i. e. c'lri is directive, not intensive; cf. ΐπί, D. 2] (cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. p. 30 sq.) ; to long for, de- sire : foil, by the inf. 2 Co. v. 2 ; ISfiv τίνα. Ro. i. 1 1 ; 1 Th. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 4 ; Phil. ii. 26 L br. WH txt. br. ; τί, 1 Pet. ii. 2 (f'n-i Ti, Ps. xli. (xlii.) 2) ; τινά. to be possessed with a desire for, long for, [W. § 30. 10 b.], Phil. ii. 26 RGTTrWHmrg. ; to pursue with love, to long afer; 2 Co. ix. 14 ; Phil. i. 8, (τας (ντο\ας θ(οϋ, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 131); absol. to lust [i. e. harbor forbidden desire] : Jas. iv. 5, on which pass, see φθόνοι• (Hdt., Plat., Died., Plut., Lcian.) * ε7η7Γοθησι; ; ras δυνάμίΐί, 3 Mace. i. 4), and also to make a hnnlile inroad, ocerrun, march over).' ίπχ-ρράπτα (Τ Tr WII ίπιράπτω, see P, p) ; (βάτη-ω to sew) ; to sew upon, sew to: t'nl τινι [R G; al. τίνα], Mk. ii. 21.• im-ppCirr» (LTTrWlI ('πφίτττω, see P, p) : 1 aor. ΐπιρρίψα ; (ρίπτω) ; Ιο throw upon, place upon : τί «Vt τι, Lk. xix. 35 ; ( Vulg. projicere, to throw away, throw off) : την μίριμναν «πι θ(όν, i. β. to cast upon, give up to, God, 1 Pet. V. 7, fr. Ps. liv. (Iv.) 23. [Occasionally fr. Horn. Od. 5, 310 down.]• ί•π•ίσ-ημο5, -01/, (σήμα a sign, mark) ; 1. prop, hnring a mark on it, niar/ccd, stamped, coined : άργΰριον, χρυσοί, (lldt., Thuc.,Xen., Polyb., Joseph.). 2. trop. nmricd (Lat. insignis). both in a good and bad sense ; in a good sense, of note, illustrious : Ro. xvi. 7 (Hdt. et sqq.) ; in a bad sense, notorious, infamous: Mt. xxvii. 16 (Eur. Or. 249 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 7, 1 ; Plut. Fab. Max. 14 ; al.).* «η(Γΐησ-μ6$, -oC, ό, {(πισιτίζομαι to provision one's self) ; 1. a foraging, providing food, (Xen., Plut., al.). 2. supplies, provisions, food lA.y. victuals']: Lk. L\. 12 (.Sept., Xen., Dem., Ildian., al.).* ίτη-σκί'τΓτομαι ; fut. 3 pers. sing, ϊπισκίψίται, Lk. i. 78 Tr mrg. WII ; 1 aor. ϊπ(σκ(ψάμην•, fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. often for ΊΓ53 ; to look upon or after, to inspect, examine with the eyes ; a. τινά, in order to see how he is, i. e. to visit, go to see one : Acts vii. 23 ; xv. 3G, (Judg. xv. 1) ; the poor and afflicted, Jas. i. 27 ; the sick, Mt. xxv. 36, 43, (.Sir. vii. 35; Xen. mem. 3, 11, 10 ; Plut. mor. p. 129 c. [de sanitate praecept. 15 init.] ; Lcian. philops. 6, and in med. writ.). b. Hebraistically, to look upon in order to help or to benefit, i. q. to look afler, have a care for, pro- vide for, of God : Tira, Lk. vii. 16 ; Heb. ii. 6, (Gen. xxi. 1 ; Ex. iv. 31 ; Ps. viii. 5; Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 15 ; Sir. xlvi. 14 ; Jud. viii. 33, etc.) ; foil, by a telic inf. Acts xv. 14 ; absol. (Sir. xx.xii. (xxxv.) 21) yet with a statement of the effect and definite blessing added, Lk. i. 68 ; (Vt- σκίψατο [WH Tr mrg. ίπισκίψΐται'] ημάς ανατολή (ξ ΰψουΓ a light from on high hath looked [al. shall look] upon us (cf. our the sun looks down on us, etc.), i. e. sal- vation from God has come to us, Lk. i. 78. (In the O. T. need also in a bad sense of God as punishing, Ps. Ixxxviii. (Lxxxix.) 33 ; Jer. ίχ. 25; xi. 22, etc.) c. to look (about) for, look out (one to choose, employ, etc.) : Acts vi. 3.• ίτι-σ-κΓυά^ω : to furnish with things necessary; Mid. to fitmish one's self or for one's self: (ΐτισκ(νασάμ€νοι, hav- ing gathered and made ready the things necessary for the journej, Acts x.xi. 15 L Τ Tr WII, for HGanooKcv ασάμινοι (which see in its place).* ίτΓΐ-σκηνόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίπ(σκηνωσα ; to fx a tent or habi- tation on : ίτΓΐ ras o'lKiat, to take possession of and live in the houses (of the citizens), Polyb. 4, 18, 8; rais oiKiais, 4, 72, 1 ; trop. eVi τίνα, of the ])owcr of Christ descending upon one, working within him and giving him help, [A. V. rest upon], 2 Co. xii. !).• «Γΐ-ο-κιάζω ; [impf. {πίσκιαζον, Lk. ix. 34 Lmrg. TTr txt. WH] ; fut. €πισκιάσα> ; 1 aor. ίπισκίασα ; to throw a shadow upon, to envelop in shadow, to overshadow : τινΙ, Acts V. 15. From a vaporous cloud that casts a shadow the word is transferred to a shining cloud surrounding and enveloping persons with brightness: τικύ, Mt. xvii. 5 ; Lk. ix. 34 ; τινί, Mk. ix. 7. 'JVopi- cally, of the Holy Spirit exerting creative energy upon the womb of the virgin Mary and impregnating it, (a use of the word which seems to have been drawn from the familiar O. T. idea of a cloud as symbolizing the immediate presence and power of God) : with the dat. Lk. i. 35. (In prof. auth. generally w. an ace. of the object and in the sense of obscuring : Hdt. 1, 209 ; Soph., Aristot., Theophr., Philo, Lcian., Ildian., Geop. Sept. for ^po to cover, Ps. xc. (xci.) 4 ; cxxxix. (cxl.) 8 ; for pci, Ex. xl. 29 (35) (π(σκίαζ(ν im την σκηνΐ]ν η νιφίλη ; [cf. W. § 52, 4, 7].) * έτΓΐ-σ-κοίΓί'ω, -ώ ; to look upon, inspect, oversee, look after, care for : spoken of the care of the church which rested upon the presbyters, 1 Pet. v. 2 [T WH om.] (with τη» ΙκκΚησΐαν added, Ignat. ad Rom. 9, 1); foil, by μή [q. v. II. 1 a.] i. q. Lat. caveo, to look carefully, beware : Heb. xii. 15. (Often by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.)• ίτη-σ-κοττή, -ης, η, (eniaKonf'w), ins]>ection, visitation, (Giirm. Be.iichtigung); a. prop.: fis «ττισκ. τοϋ παιδόί to visit the boy, Lcian. dial. deor. 20, 6 ; Avith this ex- ception no example of the word in prof. writ, has yet been noted. b. In biblical (Jrk., after the llebr. mpiJ, that act by which God looks into and searches out the ways, deeds, character, of men, in order to ad- judge thtm their lot accordingly, whether joyous or sad; inspection, investigation, vi.-dtalion, (Vulg. usually visita- tio) : so univ. iv ίπισκοπη ψυχών, when he shall search the souls of men, i. e. in the time of divine judgment, Sap. iii. 13; also iv ωρα ίπισκοπης, Sir. xviii. 20 (19); so perhaps iv ήμίρα ίπισκυπης, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [see below] ; in a good sense, of God's gracious care : τον καιρόν τη! ίπισκοττης <τον, i. e. τ6ν καιρόν iv ω €π€σκΐψατο σ€ ό θ^ος. Ία which God showed himself gracious toward thee and offered thee salvation through Christ (see ίπισκίτττομαι, b.), Lk. xix. 44 ; iv καιρώ ίπισκοπής, in the time of divine reward, 1 Pet. v. 6 Lchm. ; also, in the opinion of many commentators, 1 Pet. ii. 12 [al. associate this pass, with Lk. xix. 44 above ; cf. De Wette (ed. Briickner) oi Iluther ad loc] ; fr. the O. T. cf. Gen. 1. 24 sq. ; Job xxxiv. 9 ; Sap. ii. 20 ; iii. 7, etc. with a bad reference of divine punishment : Ex. iii. 16 ; Is. x. 3 ; Jer. x. 15 Sap. xiv. 11 ; xix. 14 (15) ; [etc. ; cf. Soph. Lex. β. v.J κΤΓίσκοτΓος 243 ίττιστρΐφω ο. after the analogy of the Hebr. rnp3 (Num. iv. 16; 1 Chr. xxiv. 19 [here Sept. (πtσκeψis], etc.), oversight i. e. overseerskip, office, charge ; Vulg. episcopatus : Acts i. 20, fr. Ps. cviii. (cLx.) 8 ; spec, the office of a bishop (the overseer or presiding officer of a Christian church): 1 Tim. iii. 1, and in eccl. writ.* iiri-o-Koiros, -ου, ό, (ίπισκίπτομαι), an overseer, a man charged with the duty of seeing that things to be done by others are done rightly, any curator, guardian, or superintendent ; Sept. for TpS, Judg. ix. 28 ; Neh. xi. 9, 14, 22; 2 K. xi. 15, etc.; 1 Mace. i. 51. The word has the same comprehensive sense in Grk. writ. fr. Homer Odys. 8, 163; Π. 22, 255 down; hence in the N. •Τ. ίπίσκ. των ψυχών guardian of souls, one who watches over their welfare : 1 Pet. ii. 25 ([^rbv παντύι ην(ίματο! κτίστην κ. (πίσκοπον, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3] ; άρχίίρ^νς και προστάτης των ψυχών ημών ^Ιησοΰς Χρ. ibid. 61, 3; [cf. Sir. i. 6]), cf. Heb. xiii. 17. spec, the super- intendent, head or overseer of any Christian church ; Vulg. episcopus : Acts xx. 28 ; Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 2 ; Tit. i. 7 ; see πρισβΰτίρης, 2 b. ; [and for the later use of the word, see Diet, of Chris. Antiij. s. v. Bishop].* «Γΐ-σιτάω, -'α;^ίίί'ί ; [fut. {πισυΐ'α;(5ήσομα», Lk. xvii. 37 Τ Tr WII] ; Sept. several times for -px, -,'^η SnP; 1. to i/ather together besides, to bring together to others ahead I assembled, (Polyb.). 2. to gather together against (Mic. iv. 11 ; Zech. xii. 3; 1 Mace. iii. 58, etc.). 3. to gather together in one place («Vt to) : Mt. xxiii. 37 ; xxiv. 31 ; Mk. xiii. 27 ; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Pass. : Mk. i. 33 ; Lk. xii. 1 ; xvii. 37 Τ Tr WII, (Ps. ci. (cu.) 23 ; cv. (cvi.) 47 ; 2 Mace. i. 27, etc.; Aesop 142).* ^νίτο-υν-α-γωγή, -ης, ή, (ίπισυνάγω, q. v.) ; a. a gather- ing together in one place, i. <|. το ϊπισννάγ(σθαι (2 Mace. ii. 7) : iVi Tiva, to one, 2 Th. ii. 1. b. (the religious) assembly (of Christians) : Heb. x. 25. * €•ιη-<Γυν-τρ«χω ; to run together besides (i. e. to others already gathered) : Mk. ix. 25. Not used by prof. writ.• €in.-OT)OToo-is, -*ω!, ή. {i -πισννΊσταμαί to collect togeth- er, conspire against) a gathering together or combining against or at. Hence 1. α hostile banding together or concourse : ποιι'ιν (πισΰστασιν, to excite a riotous gather- ing of the people, make a mob, Acts xxiv. 12 RG; 1 Esdr. v. 70 Alex.; Sext. Empir. adv. eth. p. 127 [p. 571, 20 ed. Bekk. ; cf. Philo in Flac. § 1] ; Tivor, against one, Num. xxvi. 9 ; a conspiracy, Joseph, c. Ap. 1 , 20. 2. a troublesome throng of persons seeking help, counsel, comfort : Ttvor, thronging to one, 2 Co. xi. 28 R G (see ιπίστασκ) ; Luther, dnss ich werde angelaufen* {ιηο-φαλήϊ, -ίς, (σφάλλω to cause to iaW), prone to fall: πλοΰι, a dangerous voyage, Actsxxvii. 9. (Plato, Polyb., Plut., al.) * ίΐΓ-Μτχν» : [impf. iViV;^voi»] ; 1. trans, to give addi- tional strength ; to make stronger, (Sir. xxix. 1 ; Xen. oec. 11, 13). 2. intrans. ίο receive greater strength, grov stronger, (1 Macc. vi. 6 ; Theophr., Uiod.) : ίπΐσχυο» XtyovTut, they were the more urgent saying, i. e. they alleged the more vehemently, Lk. xxiii. 5.* ίΐΓΐ-σ-ωρίνω : fut. (πισωρίύσω ; to heap up, accumulate in piles ; διδασκάλου;, to choose for themselves and run after a great number of teachers, 2 Tim. iv. 3. (Plut^ Athen., Artemid., al.) * ίΐΓ^ταγή, -ijf, ή, ((πιτάσσω), an injunction, mandate, command : Ro. .\vi. 26 ; 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 1 'Jim. i. I ; Tit. i. 3 ; μ(τά πάση! ίπιταγη!, with every possible form of atilhop- ity, Tit. ii. 15; κατ ΐπιταγήν, by way of command, 1 Co. vii. 6 ; 2 Co. viii. 8. (S;ip. xiv. 1 ιϊ, etc. ; Polyb., Diod.) * «η-τάο-σω ; 1 aor. ϊπίταξα ; (τάσσω) ; to enjoin npon, order, command, charge: absol. Lk. xiv. 22; τινί, Mk. i. 27 ; ix. 25 ; Lk. iv. 36 ; viii. 25 ; tiw to ανήκον, Philein. 8 ; Tii/i foil, by the inf., Mk. vi. 39 ; Lk. viii. 31 ; Acts xxiii. 2 ; foil, by ace. and inf. Mk. vi. 27 ; foil, by direct dis- course, Mk. ix. 25. (Several times in Sept. ; Grk. writ, fr. lldt. down.) [Syn. see KeXfim, fin.]* ίτη-τίλί'ω, -ω ; fut. ίπιτ(\(σω ; 1 aor. (π(τίΚ(σα ; [pres. mid. and pass. Εττίτβλοϋ^χαί] ; 1. to bring to an end, accomplish, perfect, execute, complete : substantively, τΑ eVireXeVat, 2 Co. viii. 11 ; τι, Lk. xiii. 32 [R G] ; Ro. xv. 28; 2 Co. vii. 1 ; viii. 6, 11 ; Phil. i. 6 ; Ileb. viii. 5 ; τ« Xarpeiai, to perform religious services, discharge relig- ious rites, Ileb. ix. 6 (similarly in prof, writ., as θρησκιΊαί, Hdt. 2, 37; όρτάί, 4, 186; βνσίαν, θυσίας, 2, 63; 4, 26; Ildian. 1. 5, 4 [2 ed. Bekk.]; Χιιτου ,yias, Philo de som. i. § 37). Mid. (in Grk. writ, to take upon one's srlf: τα ToO γήρω!, the burdens of old age, Xen. mem. 4, 8, 8 ; θάνατον, Xen. apol. 33 ; with the force of the act. : τί, Polyb. 1, 40, 16 ; 2, 58, 10) to make an end for one's self, i. e. to leave off (cf. παύω) : tj σαρκί, so as to give your- selves up to the flesh, stop with, rest in it. Gal. iii. 3 [oth- ers take it passively here : are ye perfected in etc., cf. Meyer]. 2. to appoint to, impose upon : nvl παθήματα, in pass. 1 Pet. v. 9 (την Βίκην, Plat. legg. 10 fin.).* «ιητή&Μθ$, -(ία, -€«»', also -or, -ov, [cf. W. §11,1], (tVp TijSc'f, adv., enough ; and this ace. to Buttmann fr. tVl TOSe [? cf. Vanicek p. 271]) ; 1. fit, suitable, conven- ient, advantageous, 2. needful; plur. τα ίπιτι^δί la esp. the necessaries of life (Thuc. et sqq.) : with addition of τον σώματος, Jas. ii. 16.* ίιη-τίθημ.ι, 3 pers. plur. (πιτιθίασι (Mt. xxiii. 4 ; cf. W. § 14, 1 b. ; B. 44 (38) ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 505 ; Kuh- ner i. p. 643 ; [Jelf § 274 ; and on this and foil, forms see Veitch s. vv. τιδι;μι, τιθίω^), impv. ϊπιτίθιι (1 Tim. V. 22; see Matthiae § 210, 2 and 6; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 508; Kiihner § 209, 5 ; [Jelf § 274 obs. 4]) ; impf. 3 pers. plur. (π^τίθουν (Acts viii. 17 RG), (π(τίθ(σαν (ib. L Τ Tr WH ; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509 ; B. 45 (3!•)) ; fut. ίπιθήσω; 1 aor. t ττί ^7x0 ; 2 aor. ίπίθην, impv. ΐπίθα (Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. !>»; Judg. xviii. 19); Mid. ΐττιτιμαω 245 έτΓΐφύνεια [pres. (πιτίβίμαι^ ; fut. (ττιθήσομαι ; 2 aor. <π(θ('μην ; [1 aor. pass, ίπιτΐθην (Mk. iv. 21 11 (ί)] ; in Sept. chiefly for [jlj, Ώνύ and D'Cri; 1. Active: a. to put or lay upon : Ti im τι, Mt. xxiii. 4 ; xxvii. 29 R G L ; Mk. iv. 21 R G; Lk. XV. 5; Jn. ix. [G WH txt. Trmrg.], 15; [xL\. 2 Lmrg., see below] ; Acts xv. 10 [of. W. 318 (298) ; B. 2ϋ1 (224)]; xxviii. 3; τ1 eVi Ttfor, gen. of thing, Jit. xxvii. 29 Τ Tr WII ; iv with dat. of thing, Mt. xxvii. 29 L Τ Tr WII ; την χ(ψα [or ras χ€φα! or χίφα:^ eVi τίνα, Mt. ix. 18; Mk. viii. 2.5 [(WII Trt.xt.tflTjKfv)] ; xvi. 18; Acts viii. 1 7 ; [ix. 1 7] ; Rev. i. 1 7 Ilec. ; (πι rtva TrXijydf, calamities. Rev. xxii. 18 [but see b. below] ; (πάνω τινός, Mt. xxi. 7 RG; xxvii. 37 ; tncTivos, Lk. viii. Ki RG ; τι Tivi, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; Jn. xix. 2 [not L inrg., see above] ; Acts XV. 28 ; rtvl όνομα, ilk. iii. Ifi sq. ; τινί tos Xflpas, Mt. xi.\. 13 [cf. B. 233 (201) ; W. 288 (270 »<[.)]. 1.5 ; Mk. v. 23 ; [viii. 23, here Tr mrg. αΰτοϋ] ; Lk. iv. 40 ; xiii. 13 ; Acts vi. 6 ; viii. 19 ; xiii. 3 ; .\ix. 6 ; xxviii. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 22; l^Tivi την χρίρα, Mk. Λ'ϋ. 32] ; χε'ϊρα [RG, χίΐρας or rasxctpas L Τ TrAVlI], Acts ix. 12 ; τιν'ι πληγά:, to in- flict blows, lay stripes on one, Lk. x. 30 ; Acts xvi. 23. b. to add to : Rev. xxii. 18 (opp. to άφαιρΕΐκ vs. 19). 2. Middle; a. to have put on, bill to he laid on ; tIcViti (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 4) ; τα irpbt την χρ^ίαν, sc. Ttvi, to ]5rovide one with the things needed [al. jiut on hoard sc. the ship]. Acts xxviii. 10. b. to lay or tlirow one's self upon; with dat. of pers. to attack one, to make an assault on one : Acts xviii. 10 ; Ex. xxi. 14 ; xviii. 11 ; 2 Chr. xxiii. 13, and often in prof. writ. ; cf. Kuinoel ad loc. ; [W. 593 (552). CoMP. : ονν-ίπιτίβημι-Ί * ίΐΓΐ^ιμάω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. sing, ϊπιτίμα, 3 pers. plur. (πίτίμων ; 1 aor. (πιτίμησα ; Sept. for Ί;Μ ; in Grk. writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor : τινά, Ildt. 6, 39. 2. to raise the price of: 6 σίτος ΐπίτιμήθη, Dem. 918, 22; al. 3. to adjudge, aicanl, (fr. ημή in the sense of merited penalty) : την Βίκην, Ildt. 4, 43. 4. to tax with fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so Thuc, Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; τιι/ί, charge one with wrong, Lk. [i.x. 55] ; xvii. 3 ; xxiii. 40 ; to rebuke — in order to curb one's ferocity or violence (hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to re- strain ; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), IMt. viii. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39, 41 ; viii. 24; ix. 42; Jude 9 [where Rec.'•^ strangely ίπιτιμησαι (1 aor. act. inf.) for -μήσαι (opt. 3 pers. sing.)] ; or to keep one away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Jlk. x. 13; foil, by ίνα (with a verb expressing the opposite of what is censured) : Mt. xx. 31 ; Mk. x. 48; Lk. xviii. 39 ; with the addition of λίγων [και Xeytt, or the like] arid direct discourse : Mk. i. 25 [T om. WII br. Xeyav] ; viii. 33 ; ix. 25 ; Lk. iv. 35 ; xxiii. 40, (cf. Ps. cv. (cvi.) 9; cxviii. (cxix.) 21 ; Zech. iii. 2; and the use of l^'J inNah. i. 4 ; Mai. iii. 11). Elsewhere in a milder sense, to ad- monish or charge sharply: τιν'ι, Mt. xvi. 22; Mk. viii. 30; Lk. ix. 21 (('πιτιμήσας αΰτο'ις παρήγγΗλίν, foil, by theinf.), xix. 39; with Ίνα added, Mt. xvi. 20 L WII txt.; Mk. Tiii. 30; ίνα μη, 'Mt. \ύ. 16 ; Mk. iii. 12. [Cf. Trench Jiv; Schmidt ch. 4, 11.]• ϊπιτιμία, -at. r; {(πιτιμάω), punishment (in Grk. writ, το ίπιτίμιον) : 2 Co. ii. U [B. § 147, 29]. (Sap. iii. 10; [al.].)* [tiri -το-αυτό, Rec.'' in Acts i. 15; ii. l,etc. ; see αΰτόϊ, III. 1, and cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Unters. p. 125 sq.] eiri-rpt'iro) ; 1 aor. ΐπίτρίψα ; Pass., [pres. ίπιτρίπομαί] ; 2 aor. ίπΐτράπην ; pf. 3 pers. sing, (πιτίτραιτται ( 1 Co. xiv. 34 R G) ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. to turn to, transfer, commit, intrust. 2. to permit, allow, give leave : 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Heb. vi. 3 ; τινι, Mk. v. 13 ; Jn. xix. 38 ; with an inf. added, Mt. viii. 21 ; xix. 8 ; Lk. viii. 32 ; ix. 59, 61 ; Acts xxi. 39 sq. ; 1 Tim. ii. 12; and witliout the dat. iMk. X. 4 ; foil, by ace. with inf. Acts xxvii. 3 (where L Τ Tr WH πορ(νθέντι} ; cf. Xen. an. 7, 7, 8; Plato, legg. 5 p. 730 d. Pass, ΐπιτρΐπίταί τινι, with inf. : Acts xxvi. 1 ; xxviii. 1(5 ; 1 Co. .xiv. 34.* [iiriTpoireuu ; (fr. Ildt. down); to he ίττΊτ poinos or proc- urator: of Pontius Pilate in Lk. iii. 1 WII (rejected) mrg. ; see their App. ad loc* ] ίΐΓΐ-τροτΓή, -ης, ή, {ϊιτιτρίπω), permission, power, commis- sion : Acts xxvi. 12. (From Thuc. down.) * eiriTpoiros, -ου, 6, ((πιτρίπω), univ. one to whose care or honor anything has been intrusted; a curator, guardian, (Pind. 01. 1, 171, et al. ; Philo de mundo §76 θ(6ς και ηατηρ κα\ Τ€χνίτης και €πιτροπος των iv ονρανω τ€ και ev κόσμω). Spec. 1. α sleivard or manager of a house- hold, or of lands ; an overseer: Mt. xx. 8; Lk. viii. 3; Xen. oec. 12, 2; 21,9; (Aristot. oec. 1, 5 [p. 1344", 26] δούλων Be fi'Sij δυο, (ττίτροπος και ΐ(Γ/άτης). 2. one who has the care and tutelage of children, either where the father is dead (a guardian of minors : 2 Mace. xi. 1 ; xiii. 2; iir'iTpmroi ορφανών, Plato, legg. 6 p. 766 c. ; Plut. Lye. 3 ; Cam. 15), or where the father still lives (Ael. V. h. 3, 26) : Gal. iv. 2.* eiri -τνγχάνω : 2 aor. (πίτνχον, 1. to light or hit upon any person or thing (Arstph., Thuc., Xen., Plato). 2. to attain to, obtain : Jas. iv. 2 ; with gen. of thing, Heb. vi. 15 ; xi. 33 ; with ace. of tiling : τοντο, Ro. xi. 7 (where Rec. τούτου). Cf. Matthiae §328; [W. 200 (188)].• ίΐΓΐ-φοίνω; 1 aor. inf. ΐπιφάναι (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 24 sqq. ; AV. 89 (85) ; B. 41 (35) ; [Sept. Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 17; cxvii. (cxviii.) 27, cf. Ixvi. (Ixvii.) 2]); 2 aor. pass. ϊπίφάνην ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. trans, to show to or upon ; to bring to light. 2. intrans. and in Pass, to appear, become visible ; a. prop. : of stars. Acts xxvii. 20 (Theocr. 2, 11); τινί, to one, Lk. i. 79. b. fig. i. q. to become clearly known, to show one's self: Tit. iii. 4 ; Tivl, Tit. ii. 11.* «πιψάνΜα, -ας, ή, (ίττιφαι/ήί), an appearing, appearance, (TeHuU. apparent ia); often used by the Greeks of a glorious manifestation of the gods, and esp. of their ad- vent to help; in 2 Mace, of signal deeds and events betokening the presence and power of God as helper; cf. Grimm on Mace. p. 60 sq. 75, [but esp. the thorough exposition by Prof. Abbot (on Titus ii. 13 Note B) in the Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exegesis, i. p. 16 sq. (1882)]. In the N. T. the 'advent'of Christ, — not only that which has already taken place and by which βτΓΐφανή<: 246 67Γ0ν his presence and power appear in the saving light he has shed upon mankind, 2 Tim. i. lU (note the word φωτίσαιττο! in this pass.); but also that illustrious return from lioaven to earth hereafter to occur : 1 Tim. vi. 14 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1,8; Tit. ii. i:i [on which .see esp. I'rof. Abbot u. s.] ; ή ίπιφάνίΐα (i. e. the breaking forth) της παρου- σία! αίτον, 2 Th. ii. 8. [Cf. Trench § xciv.j * (ΐηφανής, -«, ((πιφαίνω), conspicuous, manifest, illus- Irioux: Acts ii. 20 [Tdf. om.] fr. Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4) ; the Sept. here and in Judg. xiii. 6 [Alex.]; Ilab. i. 7; Mai. i. 14 thus render the word KilJ terrible, deriving it in- correctly from nX"; and so confounding it with HKIJ.* €ΐΓΐ-φαΰ(Γκω (i. (J. the ίπιφώσκω of (irk. writ., cf. W. 90 (SS) ; B. Ii7 (59)): fut. ίπιφαύσω; to shine upon: Tivi, Eph. V. 14, where the meaning is, Christ will pour upon thee the light of divine truth as the sun gives light to men aroused from sleep. (Job xxv. 5 ; xxxi. 26 ; [xli. 9] ; Acta Thomae § 34.) * ciri -ψερω ; [impf. (π(φ€ροι>2 ; 2 aor. inf. iniveyKciv ; [pres. pass, (πιφίρομαι] ; 1. to bring upon, bring for- ward : αΐτίαν, of accusers (as in Hdt. 1, 26, and in Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down; Polyb. 5, 41, 3; 40, 5, 2; Joseph, antt. 2, 6, 7; 4, 8, 23; Hdian. 3, 8, 13 (6 ed. Bekk.)), Acts XXV. 18 (where LTTrWII (φ(ρον); κρίσιν, Jude 9. 2. to lay upon, to inflict : την όργήν, Κυ. iii. 5 (πληγην, Joseph, antt. 2, 14, 2). 3. to bring upon i. e. in addition, to adil, increase : θλίφιν τοΐί δίσμοϊί, Phil. i. 16 (17) Rec., but on this pass, see e'yf /ρω, 4 c.; (πϋρ (ΐηφ(ρ(ΐν πνρί, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [cf. W. § .52, 4, 7]). 4. to put upon, cast upon, impose, {φάρμακον, Plat. ep. 8 p. 3.'>4 b.) : τ\ ίπί τίνα, in pass.. Acts xix. 12, where L Τ Tr ΛΥΙΙ άποφίρίσθαι, q. v.* ίτη-φωνίω, -ώ : [impf. ίπβφώνουΐ'] ; to call out to, shout : foil, by direct disc., Lk. xxiii. 21 ; Acts xii. 22; foil, by the dat. of a pers.. Acts xxii. 24 ; τι. Acts xxi. 34 L Τ TrWII. [(Soph, on.)] • ίΐΓΐ-φώ(Γκω ; [impf. ('πίφωσκον] ', to grow light, to dawn [cf. B. 68 (60)] : Lk. xxiii. 54 ; foil, by «r, Mt. xxviii. 1, on which see tU, A. II. 1.• ίιτιχίΐρίω, -ω: impf. (πίχύρουν; 1 aor. ίπιχΰρησα; (χ(ίρ) ; 1. prop, to put llie hand to (Ilom. ()d. 24, 386, .•ί95). 2. often fr. Ildt. down, to take in hand, undertake, attempt, (anything to be done), foil, by the inf. : Lk. i. 1 ; Acts ix. 29 ; xix. 13 ; (2 Mace. ii. 29 ; vii. 19). Grimm treats of this word more at length in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 36 sq.• £m-x«'ci>; fr. Horn, down; to pour upon: τι, Lk. x. 34 (sc. iVi τα τραύματα; Gen. xxviii. 18; Lev. v. 11).* ίτη-χορηγί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. unpv. (-πιχορηγήσατί; Pass., [pres. (Vt;(opi;yoC/jai] ; 1 fut. {7π;(ορι;γ^^ΐ7σοραι; {sen χορη- yia); to suppli), furnish, present, (Germ, darreichen): Tivi Ti, 2 Co. ix. 10 ; Gal. iii. 5; i. q. to show or afford by deeds : την άρ(την, 2 Pet. i. 5 ; in pass., elaoSot, fur- nished, provided, 2 Pet. i. 11 ; Pass, to be supplied, )nin- utered unto, assisted, (so the simple χορη-γάσθαι in Xen. rep. Athen. 1, 13 ; Polyb. 3, 75, 3 ; 4, 77, 2 ; 9, 44. 1 ; Sir. xliv. 6; 3 Mace. vi. 40): Col. ii. 19, Λvhere Vulg. subministratum. (Rare in prof. writ, as Dion. Hal. 1, 42; Phal. ep. 50; Diog. Laert. 5, 67; [Alex. Aphr. probl. 1, 81].)* ϊ-ΐΓΐ-χορηγία, -as, ή, {('ττιχορηγίω, q. v.), (Vulg. submin- istratio), a supplying, supply: Eph. iv. 16; Phil. i. 19. (Eccl. writers.) * i-iri -χρίω: 1 aor. ϊπίχρισα; to spread on, anoint: τ\ em Tt, anytliiug upon anything, Jn. ix. 6 [W'll txt. Tr mrg. (π(θηκ(ν] ; Ti, to anoint anything (sc. with anything), ibid. 11. (Ilom. Od. 21, 179; Lcian. hist, scrib. 62.)* ί•π--«ικοδομί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίπωκο8όμησα, and without augm. ίποικο&όμησα (1 Co. iii. 14 Τ Tr WH ; cf. Tdf.'s note on Acts vii. 47, [see οίκοδο/χί'ω]) ; Pass., pres. tiroi- κο&ομοϋμαι; 1 aor. ptcp. (τιοικο&ομηθίντίς; in the N. T. only in the fig. which likens a company of Christian believers to an edifice or temi)le; to build upon, build up, (Vulg. superaedi/ico) ; absol. [like our Eng. build up] viz. 'to finish the structure of which the foundation has already been laid,' i. e. in plain language, to give con- stant increase in Christian knowledge and in a life con- formed thereto: Acts xx. 32 (where LT TrWH oiVod. [Vulg. aedifco']); 1 Co. iii. 10; (1 Pet. ii. 5 Tdf.); (Vi Tuf θ(μί\ιον, 1 Co. iii. 12; τι, ibid. 14 ; tV Χριστώ, with the pass., in fellowship with Christ to grow in spiritual life. Col. ii. 7 ; ΐποίκο^υμηθ. €πι θ(μ€\ίω των άποστόΧων, on the foundation laid by the apostles, i. e. (dropping the fig.) gathered together into a church by the ajjostlcs' preaching of the gospel, Ej)h. ii. 20 ; ίποικο8ομ(Ίν ίαντον Trj ■nioTfi, Jiule 20, where the sense is, ' resting on your most holy faith as a foundation, make i)rogress, rise like an edifice higher and higher.' (Thuc, Xen., Plato, al.) * <ΐΓ-οκ€λλω : 1 aor. <'πώκ(ΐλα ; to drive upon, strike against: την ναΰν [i. e. to run the ship ashore'\. Acts xxvii. 41 RG; see ΐπικίλλω. (Hdt. 6, 16; 7, 182; Thuc. 4, 26.) * «■ΐΓ-ονομόξω : [pres. pass, ί'ποκο^ιά^ομαι] ; fr. Ildt. down; Sept. for K"ip ; to put a name upon, name ; Pass, to be named : Ro. ii. 17; cf. Fritzsche ad loc* ίΐΓ-οΐΓΓ€ύω [ptcp. 1 Pet. ii. 12 LTTrWII]; 1 aor. ptcp. (πο7ΓΤ(ίσαντ(! ; 1. to be an overseer (Homer, Hesiod). 2. univ. to look upon, view attentively; to watch ( Aeschyl., Dem., al.) : τι, 1 Pet. iii. 2 ; ίκ tivos, sc. την άναατροφην, 1 Pet. ii. 1 2.* eiroim]s, -ου, ό, (fr. unused (πότττω) ; 1. an over- seer, inspector, see επίσκοπος; (Aeschyl., Pind., al. ; of God, in 2 Mace. iii. 39 ; vii. 35 ; 3 Mace. ii. 21 ; Add. to Esth. V. 1 ; ανθρωπίνων (ργων, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 3). 2. a spectator, eye-witness of anything : so in 2 Pet. i. 1 6 ; inasmuch as those were called (πόπται by the Grks. who had attained to the third [i. e. the high- est] grade of the Eleusinian mysteries (Plut. Alcib. 22, and elsewh.), the word seems to be used here to desig- nate those privileged to be present at the heavenly spec- tacle of the transfiguration of Christ.* €iros, -€0f, (-ouf), TO, a tvord : ως βπος €ΐπ(ΐν (see ftnov, I a. p. 181"), Heb. vii. 9.• [SvN. eiros seems primarily to desifinate a word Jis an ar- tirul.ate manifestation of a mental state, and so to differ from βήμα (q. v.), the mere vocable; for its relation to Aiiyos see kayos I. I.] εττουρανιος 247 epycuria «ir-oupavios, -οι», (οίρανός), prop, existing in or above heaven, heavenly ; 1. exislinij in heaven : 6 ττατηρ ί'που- ράνιος, i. e. God, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. (θ(οί, fleof, Horn. Od. 17,484; E. 6, 131, etc. ; 3 Mace. vi. I'S ; vii. 6) ; ol ίπου- ράνιοι the heayenly beings, the inliabitants of heaven, (Lcian. dial. deor. 4, 3 ; of the gods, in Theocr. 25, ft) : of angels, in epp. to iniyeioi and καταχθόνιοι, Phil. ii. 10 ; Ignat. ad Trail. !), [cf. Polyc. ad Philipp. 2] ; σώματα, the bodies of the stars (which the apostle, ace. to the universal ancient conception, seems to have regarded as animate [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 37(5; G/riirer, Philo etc. 2te Aufl. p. 349 sq. ; Siegfried, Phiio von Alex. p. 306 ; yet cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad loc], cf. Job xxxviii. 7 ; Enoch xviii. 14 sqq.) and of the angels, 1 Co. .w. 40; η βασιλ€ΐ'α ή f -πουρ. (on which seep. 97), 2 Tim. iv. 18; sub- stantially the same as ή πατρΊς ή enovp. Ileb. xi. 16 and ΊίρουσάΚημ ϊπουρ. xii. 22 ; κΧησίί, a calling made (by God) in heaven, Heb. iii. 1 [al. would include a ref. to its e η d as well as to its ο r i g i η ; cf . Liinem. ad loc.], cf. Phil. iii. 14 [Bp. Lghtft. cites Philo, plant. Noe § 6]. The neut. τα evovpavia denotes [cf. W. § 34, 2] a. the things that take place in heaven, i. e. the purposes of God to grant salvation to men through the death of Christ: Jn. iii. 12 (see ΐπίγίίος). b. the heavenly re- gions, i. e. heaven itself, the abode of God and angels: Eph. i. 3, 20 (where Lchm. t.xt. ovpavoii) ; ii. 6 ; iii. 10 ; the lower heavens, or the heaven of the clouds, Eph. vi. 12 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air]. c. the lieavenly temple or sanctuary : Heb. viii. 5 ; ix. 23. 2. of heavenly origin and nature : 1 Co. xv. 48 sq. (opp. to χοϊκύί) ; η δωρεά ή ϊπουρ. Heb. vi. 4.* ί'ΐΓτά, οϊ, at, τά, seven : Mt. xii. 45 ; xv. 34 ; Mk. viii. 5 sq. ; Lk. ii. 36 ; Acts vi. 3, etc.; often in the Apocalypse; 01 ίπτά, sc. διάκονοι, Acts xxi. 8. In ]\It. .xviii. 22 it is joined (instead of (πτάκις) to the numeral adv. ίβδομη- κοντάκις, in imitation of the Hcbr. > DO, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 164 ; Prov. xxiv. 16 ; [see (βδομηκοντάκις, and cf. Keil, Com. on Mt. 1. c.]. €ΐΓτόκΐ8, (ίπτά), seven times: Mt. xviii. 21 sq. ; Lk. .xvii. 4. [(Pind., Arstph., al.)]• ΪΊΓτακι$-χΙΧιοι,•αι,-α, seven thousand : Ro. xi.4. [(Hdt.)]* €ΐΓω, see eiirov. "EpaoTos, -ου, 6, Erastus, (ipacrTos beloved, [cf. Chan- dler § 325 ; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 30]), the name of two Christians : 1. the companion of the apostle Paul, Acts xix. 22 ; 2. the city treasurer of Corinth, Ro. xvi. 23. 'Which of the two is meant in 2 Tim. iv. 20 cannot be determined.* «ραννάω, a later and esp. Alexandrian [cf. Sturz, Dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 117] form for eprvvaa, q. v. Cf. Tdf. ed. 7 min. Proleg. p. xxxvii. ; [ed. maj. p. x.xxiv. ; esp. ed. 8 Proleg. p. 81 sq.] ; B. 58 (50). ΐργά^ομαι; depon. mid.; impf. {ϊργαζόμην (ηργαζόμην. Acts -xviii. 3 LTTrWH; [so elsewli. at times; this var. in augm. is found in the aor. also] ; cf . W. § 1 2, 8 ; B. 33 (29 sq.) ; Steph. Thesaur. iii. 1970 c.;lCurtius, Das A^erbum, i. 124 ; Cramer, Anecd. 4, 412 ; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. (Ιργασάμην (ηργασ. Mt. xxv. 16 ; [xxvi. 10] ; Mk. xiv. 6, in Τ WH, [add, 2 Jn. 8 WH and Hebr. xi. 33 Τ Tr WH ; cf. reff. as above]) ; pf. (ΐργασμαι, in a pass, sense [cf. "W. § 38, 7 e.], Jn. iii. 21, as often in Grk. writ. [cf. Veitch s. v.] ; (epyov) ; Sept. for ^^'3^ np;?, sometimes for T\tiy^ ; 1. absol. a. to work; labor, do work: it is opp. to inactivity or idleness, Lk. xiii. 14; Jn. V. 17; ix. 4 ; 2 Th. iii. 10; with addition of Toir χιρσί, 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Th. iv. 11; with ace. of time: νύκτα (cat ήμ^ραν, 2 Th. iii. 8 [but L txt. Τ Tr WH the gen., as in 1 Th. ii. 9 (see ήμίρα, 1 a.) ; cf. W. § 30, 11 and EUic. on 1 Tim. v. 5] ; with the predominant idea of working for pay, Mt. xxi. 28 (cV τω άμ•π(\ωνι) ; Acts xviii. 3 ; 1 Co. ix. 6 ; 2 Th. iii. 12 ; ace. to the concep- tion characteristic of Paul, ό (ργαζόμινο! he that does works conformed to the law (Germ, der Werlclhalige) : Ro. iv. 4 sq. b. to trade, to make gains by trading, (cf. our " do business ") : ?v τινι. ivith a thing, Mt. xxv. 1 6 (often so by Dem.). 2. trans, a. (to work i. e.) to do, work out : τΊ, Col. iii. 23 ; 2 Jn. 8 (with which [ace. to reading of L Τ Tr txt.] ef. 1 Co. xv. 58 end) ; μφίν, 2 Th. iii. 11 ; epyov. Acts xiii. 41 (-!^\2 bi\2, Hab. i. 5) ; fpyov καλόν (is Tiva, Mt. xxvi. 10 ; ei» τινι (dat. of pers. [cf. W. 218 (205)]), Mk. xiv. 6 [Rec. ds ('μι']; tpya, wrought, pass., Jn. iii. 21 ; τα ?pya toC θ(οΰ, what God wishes to be done, Jn. vi. 28 ; ix. 4 ; roG κυρίου, to give one's strength to the work which the Lord wishes to have done, 1 Co. xvi. 10; το αγαθόν, [Ιίο. ii. 10]; Eph. iv. 28; προΓ τίνα, Gal. vi. 10; κακόν τινι τι, Ro. xiii. 10 {τινά τι is more com. in Grk. writ. [Kiihner § 411, 5]) ; Tt fit Tiva, 3 Jn. 5. with ace. of virtues or vices, {to work i. e.) to exercise, perforin, commit : δικαιοσύνην. Acts x. 35 ; Heb. .xi. 33, (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 2 ; Zeph. ii. 3) ; tjji- οιό- μίαν, Mt. vii. 23 (Ps. v. 6 and often in Sept.) ; άμαρτίαν, Jas. ii. 9. σημί'ίον, bring to pass, effect, .In. vi. 30 ; τα Upa, to be busied with the holy things i. e. to administer those things that pertain to worship, which was the busi- ness of priests and among the Jews of the Levites also, 1 Co. ix. 13 ; την θάλασσαν lit. work the sea {mare exerceo, Justin, hist. 43, 3) i. e. to be employed on [cf. " do busi- ness on," Ps. cvii. 23] and make one's living from it. Rev. xviii. 17 (so of sailors and fishermen also in native Grk. writ., as Aristot. probl. 38, 2 [p. 966', 26] ; Dion. Hal. antt. 3, 46 ; App. Punic. 2 ; [Lcian. de elect. 5 ; AV. 223 (209)]). to cause to exist, produce : τι, so (for R G κα- τ(ργάζ€ται) 2 Co. vii. 10 L Τ Tr AVH ; Jas. i. 20 L Τ Tr WH. b. to tpork for, earn by rrorking, to acquire, (cf. Germ, erarbeiten) : την βρώσιν, Jn. vi. 27 (χρήματα, Hdt. 1, 24; TO (πιτήδιια, Xen. mem. 2, 8, 2 ; Dem. 1358, 12; apyvpiov, Plato, Hipp. maj. p. 282 d. ; βίον, Andoc. myst. [IS, 42] 144 Bekk. ; θησαυρού!, Theodot. Prov. xxi. 6; βρώμα, Palaeph. 21, 2; al.) ; ace. to many interpreters also 2 Jn. 8 ; but see 2 a. above. [Comp. : κατ-, wepi-, προσ-€ργάζομαι.~\ * (ρΎοσία, -ας, η, (ΐργάζομαι) ; 1. i. q. ro {'ργάζ(σθαι, a working, performing : ακαθαρσίας, Eph. iv. 19. 2. work, business : Acts xi.x. 25 (Xen. oee. 6, 8 et al.). 3. gain got by work, profit : Acts xvi. 19 ; παρίχ^ν epya- σίαν τινι, ib. 16; xix. 24 [yet al. refer this to 2 above] ; (ρ-γατης 248 epyov (Xen. mem. 3, 10. 1 ; cvnec;. 3, 3 ; Polyb. 4, 50, 3). 4. endeaviir, pains, [Λ. V. ilitKjence] : δι'βωμι ipyaaiav, after the I.atinism operant do, Lk. xii. 58 (llermo;;. iK• invent. 3, 5, 7).• ίργάτηϊ, -ου, 0, (('(ιγάζυμαι) ; 1. as in (!rk. writ.» icoriimin, a laborer: usually one who works for hire, ^It. X. 10; Lk. X. 7; I Tim. v. 18; esp. an agricultural laborer, Mt. ix. 37 sq. ; XX. 1 sq. 8 ; Lk. x. 2 ; .las. v. 4, (Sap. xvii. 16) ; those whose labor artificers employ [i. e. workmen in the restricted sense]. Acts xLx. '25 (opp. to roir τ(χνί• Tacf [A. V. craftsmen'}, ib. 24), cf. Bengel ad loc. ; those wlio as teachers Labor to propagate and promote Christi- anity among men: 2 Co, xi. 13 ; Phil. iii. 2; 2 Tim. ii. 15, cf. Mt. ix. 37 S(i. ; Lk. x, 2. 2. one xrho iloex, a worker, perpetrator : της αδικίας, Lk. ,\iii. '27 (της άνομίαί, ι Mace. iii. ; τώι/ καλών και σ<μνων. Xen. mem. 2, 1, 27).* Ιργον, -ου, τό, anciently /"fpyoi/, (Germ.WerL; [Eng. work; cf. Vanicek p. 922]) ; Sept. for Si'S, ΓΤ13>1 and count- less times for TUnSd and niyjt?"3 ; work i. e. 1. busi- ness, emploi/meni, thai willi which ani/ one is occupied : Mk. xiii. 34 {8ώόναι τινί τό ίργον αΰτοϋ) ", Acts xiv. 26 (πληρούν) ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; thus of the work of salvation committed by God to Christ : διδόναι and rtXtiovv, Jn. xvii. 4 ; of the work to be done by the apostles and other Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2 ; xv. 38 ; 1 Th. v. 13 ; Pliil. i. 22 ; το ίργον τινός, gen. of the subj., the work which one does, service which one either performs or ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; epyov ποκϊν τίνος to do the work of one (i. e. incumbent upon him), iuayyfXi- στοϋ, 2 Tim. iv. .5 ; τό ϊργον τινός i. e. assigned by one and to be done for his sake : τό ίμγον τοΰ ifou rfXttouf, used of Christ, Jn. iv. 34 ; (τον) Χρίστου (WH txt. Tr mrg. κυρίου), Phil. ii. 30 ; toC κυρίου, 1 Co xv. 58 ; xvi. 10; with gen. of thing, ei't tpyov διακονίας, E])h. iv. 12, which means either to the work in which the ministry consists, the work performed in undertaking the ministry, or to the execution of the ministry. of that which one under- takes to do, enterprise, undertakinij : Acts v. 38 (Deut. XV. 10; Sap. ii. 12). 2. any product whatever, an;/ thini/ accomplished hi/ hand, art, industry, mind, (i. q. 7701- ημα, κτίσμα) : 1 Co. iii. 1.3-15 ; with the addition of των χίίρων, things formed by the hand of man. Acts vii. 41 ; of tlie works of God visible in the created world, Heb. i. 1 0, and often in Sept. ; τα iv Tjj γη (ργα. the works of nature and of art (Bengel), 2 Pet. iii. 10 ; of the arrange- ments of God for men's salvation: Acts xv. 18 Rec. ; to tpy. τοΰ θ(οϋ what God works in man, i. e. a life dedi- cated to (iod and Christ, Ro. xiv. 20 ; to the same effect, substantially, ίργον αγαθόν, Phil. i. 6 (see dya^or, 2) ; τα tprya τοΰ διαβόλου, sins and all the misery that springs from them, 1 .In. iii. 8. 3. an act, deed, thing done: the idea of workinac is emphasized in opp. to that which is less than work, Jas. i. 25 ; Tit. i. 16 ; τό ίργον is dis- tinguished fr. ό λύ -yof : Lk. xxiv. 19; Ro. xv. 18 ; 2 Co. X. II; Col. iii. 17; 2 Th. ii. 17; 1 Jn. iii. 18, (Sir. iii. 8) ; plur. (V Χόγοις κα\ iv ΐργοις. Acts vii. 22 (4 Mace. v. 38 (37); for the same or similar contrasts, com. in Grk. writ,, see Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 268 sq. ; Bergler on Alciphr. p. 54; Bornemann and KUhner on Xen. mem. 2, 3, 6 ; Passow s. v. p. 1151) ; [L. and S. s. v. L 4 ; Lob. Paralip. pp. 64 sq., 525 sq.]). ίργα is used of the acts of God — both as creator, Heb. iv. 10; and as gov- ernor, .In. ix. 3; Acts xiii. 41; Rev. xv. 3; of .sundry signal acts of Christ, to rouse men to believe in him and to accomplish I heir salvation: Mt. xi. 2 [cf. ίργα της σοφίας ib. 1 !) Τ \VH Tr txt.], and esp. in the Gosp. of John, as v. 20, 36 ; vii. 3 ; x. 38 ; xiv. 1 1 sq. ; xv. 24, (cf. Grimm, Instit. theol. dogmat. p. 63, ed. 2); they are called τα ίργα τοΰ πατρός, i. e. done at the bidding and by the aid of the Father, Jn. x. 37; ix. 3s(i., cf. x. 25, 32; xiv. 10 ; κπλύ, as beneficent, .In. x. 32 sq. ; and connected with the verbs btiKvvvai, ποιύν, ipγάζ(σβaL, Ttk^iouv. ίργα is applied to the conduct of m e n, measured by the standard of religion and righteousness, — whether bad, Mt. xxiii. 3 ; Lk. xi. 48 ; Jn. iii. 20 ; Rev. ii. 6 ; xvi. 11, etc.; or good,Jn.iii. 21 ; Jas.ii. 14,17sq. 20-22, 24-26; iii. 13; Rev. ii. 5, 9 [Rec.], 19; iii. 8; νόμος ίργων, the law which demands good works, Ro. iii. 27 ; with a suggestion of toil, or struggle with hindrances, in the phrase κατάπαυαν από των ίργων αντοΰ, lleb. iv. 10; to recompense one κατίι τα ίργα αίτοΰ, Ro. ii. 6 ; 2 Tim. iv. 14; Rev. ii. 23 (Ps. Ixi. (Ixii.) 13),cf. 2Co. xi. 15; Rev. xviii. 6 ; xx. 1 2 sq. ; the sing, τό ίργον is used collectively of an aggregate of actions (Germ, das Handeln), .Jas. i. 4 ; τινός, gen. of pers. and subj., his whole way of feeling and acting, his aims and endeavors : (!al. vi. 4 ; 1 Pet. i. 1 7 ; Rev. xxii. 12 ; τό ίργον τοΰ νόμου, the course of action demanded by the law, Ro. ii. 15. With epithets: άγαθορ ίργον, i. e. either a benefaction, 2 Co. ix. 8 ; ])lur. Acts Lx. 36 ; or every good work springing from piety, Ro. ii. 7; Col. i. JO; 2 Th. ii. 17; Tit. i. IC; 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; iii. 17; Ileb. xiii. 21 [T WHom. ίμγ-']; plur. Eph. ii. 10; or what harmonizes with the order of society, Ro. xiii. 3 ; Tit. iii. 1 ; ίργον καλόΐ', a f/ood deed, noble action, (see καΚός, b. and c.) : Mt. xxvi. 10 ; Mk. xiv. 6 ; plur. (often in Attic writ.), Mt. v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25 ; vi. 18 ; Tit. ii. 7 ; iii. 8, 14 ; Heb. x. 24 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12 ; τά ίργα τα iv δικαιοσύνη equiv. to τά δίκαια. Tit. iii. 5 ; τα ίργα τοΰ θ(οΰ, the works required and approved by God, Jn. vi. 28 (Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 10; 1 Esdr. vii. 9, 15), in the same sense ίργα μου i• e. of Christ, Rev. ii. 26 ; ίργον πίστιως, wrought by faith, the course of conduct whirli springs from faith, 1 Th. i. 3 ; 2 Th. i. 1 1 ; ίργα άξια τής μιτανοίας. Acts x.wi. 20 ; ίριγα πιπληρωμίνα ίνώπιον τοΰ 6(οΰ, Rev. iii. 2 ; ίργα πονηρά. Col. i. 21 ; 2 Jn. 1 1, cf. Jn. iii. 19 ; vii. 7; 1 Jn. iii. 12; ίργα νικρά, works devoid of that life which has its source in God, works so to speak unwrouffht, which at the last judgment will fail of the approval of God and of all reward : Heb. vi. 1 ; ix. 14 ; άκαρπα, Eph. v. 11 (άχρηστα. Sap. iii. 11 ; the wicked man μ€τά των ίργων αντοΰ συναπο\(Ίται, Barn. ep. 21, 1) ; άνομα, 2 Pet. ii. 8 ; ίργα άσφύας, Jude 15 ; τοΰ σκότους, done in dark- ness, Ro. xiii. 1 2 ; Eph. v. 1 1 ; [opp. to ίργ. τοΰ φωτός, Ro. xiii. 12 L mrg.] ; in Paul's writ, ίργα νόμου, works demanded by and agreeing •with the law(cf. Wieseler, ίρεθίζα. 249 4ριφιορ Com. lib. d. Br. an d. Gal. p. 194 sqq.) : Ro. iii. 20, 28; ix. 32 Rec. ; Gal. ii. 16 ; iii. 2, .5, 10 ; and simply tpya : Ro. iv. 2, 6 ; Lx. 12 (11) ; ib. 32 G L Τ Tr WH ; xi. 6 ; Eph. ii. 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 9, (see δκαιόω, 3 b.). τα ΐργα vivos ποκίρ, to do works the same as or like to those of anoth- er, to follow in action another's e.xample : Abraham's, Jn. viii. 39 ; that of the devil, ,Tn. viii. 41. ί(κ6ίΧ,ω; 1 aor. ηρίθισα; {ίμίθω io exe'iie); lo stir up, excite, stimulate : τινά, in a good sense, 2 Co. i.x. 2 ; as com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, in a bad sense, lo pro- voke: Col. iii. 21, where Lchm. παροργίζ(τ(.* (ptiSa: to βχ, prop firmly; intrans., 1 aor. ptcp. ipfi- σασα (ή πρώρα), stuck [R. V. struck'], Acts xxvii. 41. (From Horn, down.) * (p(iyo}i.ai : fut. epev^opai ; 1. to spit or spue out, (Horn.). 2. to he emptied, discharge itself, used of streams (App. Mithr. c. 103) ; witli the ace. to empti/, discharge, cast forth, of rivers and waters : Lev. xi. 10 Sept. 3. by a usage foreign to classic Greek [W. 23 (22 sq.)], to pour forth words, to speak out, utter: Mt. xiii. 35 (Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 2 ; of. xviii. (xix.) 3 ; cxliv. 7 [Alex.]). The word is more fully treated of by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 63 ; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 138].* ερευνάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. impv. ίρ^ΰνησον ; {ή tpfwa a search) ; fr. Horn, down ; to search, examine into : absol. Jn. vii. 52 ; τί, Jn. v. 39 ; Ro. viii. 27 ; 1 Co. ii. 10 ; Rev. ii. 23 with which passage cf. Jer. xi. 20; xvii. 10; xx. 12; foil. by an indir. quest. 1 Pet. i. 11 (2 S. x. 3; Prov. xx. 27). The form €ραννάω (q. v. in its place) Τ Tr WH have received everywhere into the text, but Lchm. only in Rev. ii. 23. [Comp. : f|- ^ρηνύω.] * 4ρημία, -OS, ή, (ίρημος), η solitude, an uninhabited re- gion, a waste \ Mt. XV. 33 ; Mk. viii. 4; Heb. xi. 38; opp. to π-όλίί, 2 Co. xi. 26. as in Joseph, antt. 2, 3, 1.* ?ρημο5, -OK, (in classic Grk. also-or, -ij, -oi/, cf. ^AΓ. § 11, 1 : [B. 25 (-23) ; on its accent cf. Chandler §§ 393, 394 ; W. 52 (51)]) ; 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, unin- habited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15 ; 'Mk. i. 35 ; vi. 32 : Lk. iv. 42 ; ix. 10 [R G L], 12; Acts i. 20, etc. ; ή όδόϊ, leading through a desert. Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see Τάζα, sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances, kindred ; berefi ; (so often by Grk. writ, of every age, as Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 1Γ2; ίρημός T( και ΰτΓο πάντων καταλ^ιφθίΐί, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed. Bekk.] ; of a flock deserted by the shepherd, Hom. Ώ. 5, 140) : yvvri, a woman neglected by her husband, from whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is. liv. 1 ; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ's presence, in- struction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 f L and WH txt. om.] ; Lk. xiii. 35 Rec. ; cf. Bleek, Erkliir. d. drei ersten Ενν. ii. p. 206, (cf. Bar. iv. 19 ; Add. to Esth. viii. 27 (vi. 13) ; 2 Mace. viii. 35). 2. subst. ή fpr)ftof, sc. χώρα ; Sept. often for 13T3 ; a desert, wilderness. (Hdt. 3, 102) : Mt. xxiv. 26 ; Rev. ,xii. 6, 14 ; xvii. 3; at ΐρημοι. desert places, lonely regions : Lk. i. 80 ; v. 16; viii. 29. an unculti- vated region fit for pasturage, Lk. xv. 4. used of the desert of Judaja [cf. ΛΥ. § 18. 1], Mt. iii. 1 : Mk. i. 3 sq.; Lk. i. 80 ; iii. 2, 4 ; Jn. i. 23 ; of the desert of Arabia, Acts vii. 30, 36, 38, 42, 44 ; 1 Co. x. 5 ; Ileb. iu. 8, 17. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. AVuste; Furrer in Schenkel v. 680 sqq. ; [B. D. s. vv. Desert and Wilderness (.\m. ed.)]. ίρημόω, -ώ : Pass., [pres. 3 pers. sing. (cf. B. 38 (33)) ϊρημονται]; \>f. ptcp. ηρημωμίνος ; 1 ΆΟΤ.ημημώθην; {ίρψ /lot); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. usually for 2"'_Π, 3")ΠΓΙ, DOiV; to make desolate, lay waste ; in the N. T. only in the Pass. : πόλιΐ', Rev. xviii. 19; to ruin, bring to desolation: βα- σιλίίαν, Mt. χϋ. 25 ; Lk. xi. 17; to reduce to naught : ττλοΰτοί'. Rev. xviii. 17 (16) ; ηρημωμίνην και yvpvrjv ποΐ(ΐν τίνα, to despoil one, strip her of her treasures, Rev. xvii. 16.• ί'ρήμωσι;, -(ως. ή. ((ρημόω), a making desolate, desola- tion: Mt. -vxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Lk. xxi. 20; see jSSe- \νγμα, c. (Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 9, 13 ; Sept. several times for Π3•'Π, H'DC', etc.) * t'pC^u: [fut. (ρίσω, cf. B. 37 (32)]; (epts) ; to wrangle, engage in strife, {hat. rixari) : Mt.xii. 19, where by the phrase οϋκ iplati the Evangelist seems to describe the calm temper of Jesus in contrast with the vehemence of the Jewish doctors wrangling together about tenets and practices. [(From Hom. down.)]* ίριβίία (not ipiSfia. cf. W. § 6, 1 g. ; [Chandler § 99]) [-^ίαλΥΗ ; see I, ι and Tilf. Proleg. p. 88], -eiai, i}. {ίριθιύω to spin wool, work in wool, Heliod. 1,5; Mid. in the same sense, Tob. ii. 1 1 ; used of those who electioneer for office, courting popular applause by trickery and low arts, Ar- istot. polit. 5, 3 ; the verb is derived from ΐριθος working for hire, a hireling ; fr. the Maced. age down, a spinner or weaver, a worker in wool. Is. xxxviii. 12 Sept.; a mean, sordid fellow), electioneering or intriguing for office, Aristot. pol. 5, 2 and 3 [pp. 1302^ 4 and 1303•, 14] ; hence, apparently, in the N. T. a courting distinction, a desire to put one's self forward, a partisan and factious spirit which does not disdain low arts: partisanship, factiousness: Jas. iii. 14, IC ; κατ ίριθιίαυ, Phil. ii. 3 ; Ignat. ad Phila- delph. § 8 ; oi «ξ ipiBelas ( see «, Π. 7), Phil. i. 1 6 ( 1 7) [yet see ί'κ, Π. 12 b.] ; i. q. contending against God. Ro. ii. 8 [yet cf. Mey. (ed. Weiss) ad loc.] ; in the plur. a'l (ριθι'ιαι [W. § 27, 3'; B. § 123, 2] : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20. See the very full and learned discussion of the word by Fritzsche in his Com. on Rom. i. p. 143 sq. ; [of which a summary is given by Ellic. on Gal. v. 20. See further on its derivation, Lobeck, Path.. Proleg. p. 365 ; cf. W. 94 (89)].* Ipiov. -ου, TO, (dimin. of τό epos or i'pot), wool : Heb. ii. 19; Rev. i. 14. [From Hom. down.]* ipis, -i8of, η, ace. epiv (Phil. i. 15), pi. iptSfs (1 Co. i. 11) and fp«f (2 Co. xii. 20 [R G Trtxt. ; Gal. v. 20 R G WHmrg.]; Tit. iii. 9 [R GLTr]; see [WH. App. p. 157] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326 ; Matthiae § 80 note 8 ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. p. 191 sq. ; [W. 65 (63) ; B. 24 (22)]) : conten- tion, strife, wrangling : Ro. i. 29 ; xiii. 13 ; 1 Co. i. 11 ; iii. 3 ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20 ; Phil. i. 15 ; 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; Tit. iii. 9. [From Hom. down.]' ίpCφιov, -ου. TO, and ίριφο!, -ου, ό, σ kid, a young goat : Mt. XXV. 32 sq. ; Lk. xv. 29. [Ath. 14, p. 661 b.] * Έρμα,ί 250 βρχομαι Έρι«!β, ace. Έρμα» {cf. Β. 20 (18)], 6, (Doric for Έ,pμηt)y Hennas, a certain Christian (wliom Origcn and Otliers thought to be tlie author of tlie book untitled " The Shepherd " [cf. Salmon in Diet, of Chris. Biog. 8. V. ricrmas 2]) : Uo. xvi. 14.* ίρ)ΐην((α [WIl -via; see I, t], -as, ή, (ίρμηνινω), inlcrpre- talion (of what has been spoken more or less obscurely by others) : 1 Co. xii. 10 [L t.xt. δκρμ. q. v.] ; xiv. 26. [From Plato down.] * ίρμηνίΐιτή5, -οΰ, ό, (Ιρμην(νω, q. v.), an interpreler : 1 Co. xiv. 2S L Tr WIl mrg. (Plat, politic, p. 290 c; for y•*?? in Gen. xlii. 23.) • <ρ|χην€νω : [pres. pass. Ιρμηιχΰομαι^ \ (fr. Έρμη!, who was held to be the god of speech, writing, eloquence, learning); 1. to explain in words, expound : [Soph., Eur.], Xen., Plato, al. 2. to interpret, i. e. to trans- late what has been spoken or written in a foreign tongue into the vernacular (Xen. an. 5, 4, 4) : Jn. i. 38 (39) R G T, 42 (43) ; ix. 7 ; lleb. vii. 2. (2 Esdr. iv. 7 for DJlJI.) [CoMP. : St-, μ(θ-(ρμηι>ήω.^* 'Ep(if|s, ace. Έρμην, 6. prop, name, Hermes; 1. a Greek deity called by the Romans Mercurius (Mercury): Acts xiv. 12. 2. a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 14.* Έρμογ€νηβ, [i. c. born of Hermes; Tdf. Έρμογ.^, -ους, 6, Herm(ji/enrs, a certain Christian: 2 Tim. i. 15.* ipircTOv, -oO, TO, (fr. ίρπω to creep, crawl, [Lat. serpo; hence ser[)ent, and f r. same root, reptile ; Vanicek p. 1030 sq.]), a creeping thing, reptile; by prof. writ, used chiefly of serpents ; in Horn. Od. 4, 418 ; Xen. mem. 1, 4, 1 1 an animal of any sort ; in bibl. Grk. opp. to quad- rupeds and birds, Acts x. 12 ; xi. 6 ; Ro. i. 23 ; and to marine animals also, Jas. iii. 7 ; on this last pass. cf. Gen. ix. 3. (.Sept. for iVOT and ]'yd.) ' ίρνθρόϊ, -ά, -όν, red; fr. Ilom. down ; in the N. T. only in the plirase η ϊρυθρα θάΚασσα the Red Sea (fr. Hdt. down [cf. Rawlinson's Herod, vol. i. p. 143]), i. e. the Indian Ocean washing the shores of Arabia and Persia, with its two gulfs, of which the one lying on the east is called the Persian Gulf, the other on the opposite side the Arabian. In the N. T. the phrase denotes the upper part of the Arabian Gulf (the Herod polite Gulf, so called [i. e. Gulf of Suez]), through which the Israelites made their passage out of Egypt to the shore of Arabia : Acts vii. 36 ; Heb. xi. 29. (Sept. for tllD^D', the sea of sedge or sea-weed [cf. B. D. as below]. Ci. Win. RWB. s. v. Meer rothes; Pressel in Herzog ix. p. 239 sqq. ; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 150 sqq.; [B. D. s.w. Red Sea and Red Sea, Passage of; Trumbull, Kadesh-Barnea, p. 352 sqq.].) ' ϊρχομαι. impv. ίρχου. ϊρχ(σθ(, (for the Attic Mi, irt fr. ii/ii) ; impf. ηρχόμην (for rjeiv and f/a more com. in Attic) ; fut. fXfϋσoμaι; — (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 103 sqq. ; \''eitch s. v.] ; Matthiae § 234; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq. ; Krtiger §40 s. v.; KUhner §.343; W. § 15 s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]); pf. ΆήΧυθα; plpf. ί\η\νθ(ΐν; 2 aor. ξλβοί' and (occasionally by L Τ Tr WIl [together or severally] — asMt.vi. 10; [vii. 25, 27; x. 13; xiv. 34;xxv. 36: Mk. i. 29; vi. 29; Lk. i. 59; ii. 16; v. 7; vi. 1 7 ; viii. 35 ; xi. 2 ; xxiii. 33 ; .\.\iv. 1, 23] ; Jn. [i. 39 (40) ; iii. 26] ; iv. 27 ; [xii. 9] ; Acts xii. 10 ; [xiv. 24] ; xxviii. 14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form ηΚθα (see άπΐρχομαί init. for relf.) ; Sept. for Ni3, rarely for ΤλΤ}'^ and T)S; ; [fr. Horn, down] ; I. to come; 1. prop. a. of persons; a. univ. (o come from one place into another, and used both of persons arriving, — as in Mt. viii. 9 ; x.xii. 3 ; Lk. vii. 8; xiv. 17 [here WH mrg. read the inf., see their Intr. § 404], 20 ; .In. v. 7 ; Acts x. 29 ; Rev. xxii. 7, and very often ; oi ϊρχόμίνοι κ. οί vnayovrfs, Mk. vi. 31 J — and of tho.se returning, as in .In. iv. 27 ; ix. 7 ; Ro. ix. 9. Constructions : foil, by από w. gen. of place, Mk. vii. 1 ; XV. 21 ; Acts xviii. 2 ; 2 Co. xi. 9 ; w. gen. of pers., Mk. V. 35 ; Jn. iii. 2 ; Gal. ii. 12, etc. ; foil, by « w. gen. of place, Lk. v. 1 7 [L txt. συνίρχ.'] ; Jn. iii. 3 1 , etc. ; foil, by €ts w. ace. of place, to come into : as eir τ. οΐκίαν, τον οίκοι», Mt. ii. U ; viii. 14; Mk. i. 29; v. 38, etc. ; ds την πύλιν, Mt. L\. 1, and many other exx. ; foil, by tls to, towards, Jn. XX. 3 sq. ; elt το vepav, of persons going in a boat, Mt. viii. 28 ; of persons departing ϊκ . . . ds, Jn. iv. 54 ; διό w. gen. of place foU. by eis (Rec. Trpos) to, Mk. vii. 31 ; tit T. ίορτήν, to celebrate the feast, Jn. iv. 45 ; xi. 56 ; i» w. dat. of the thing with which one is equipped, Ro. xv. 29 ; 1 Co. iv. 21 ; foil, by ΐπί w. ace. of place, (Germ. uber, over), Mt. -xiv. 28 ; (Germ, auf), Mk. vi. 53 ; ((ierm. an), Lk. ,\ix. 5; [xxiii. 33 L Tr] ; Acts xii. 10, 12; to w. ace. of the thing, Mt. iii. 7; xxi. 19 ; Mk. xi. 13; xvi. 2; Lk. xxiv. 1; w. ace. of pers., Jn. .\ix. 33; to one's tribunal. Acts xxiv. 8 Rec. ; against one, of a military leader, Lk. xiv. 31 ; κατά w. ace, Lk. x. 33 ; Acts xvi. 7 ; παρά w. gen. of pers. Lk. viii. 49 [Lchm. άττό] ; w. ace. of place, to [the side of], Mt. xv. 29 , προς to, w. ace. of pers., Mt. iii. 14 ; vii. 15 ; [xiv. 25 L Τ Tr WlI] ; Mk. ix. 14 ; Lk. i. 43 ; Jn. i. 21» ; 2 Co. xiii. 1, and very often, esp. in the Gospels ; από twos (gen. of pers.) npos tivu, 1 Th. iii. 6 ; with simple dat. of pers. (prop. dat. commodi or incommodi [cf. W. § 22, 7 N. 2 ; B. 179 (1.05)]) : Mt. xxi. 5 ; Rev. ii. 5, 16, (exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1184• bot.; [L and S. s. v. Π. 4]). with adverbs of place: πό^ί », Jn. iii. 8 ; viii. 14; Rev.vii.l3; άνωθΐν, Jn. iii. 31 ; όπισθιν, Mk. v. 27; 2>8f, Mt. viii. 29; Acts i.x. 21; ϊνθάδί, Jn. iv. 15 [R G L Tr], 16; «ft, Jn. xviii. 3 [cf. W. 472 (44i.)] ; jroC, Heb. .xi. 8 ; cat nvos, Lk. iv. 42; άχρι τινήί. Acts .\i. 5. The purpose for which one comes is indicated — either by an inf., Mk. [v. ]4LTTrWH]; .xv. 36; Lk.i. 59; iii. 12; Jn. iv. 15 [T WH δκ'ρ;^.], and very often ; or by a fut. ptcp., Mt. xxvii. 49; Acts viii. 27; or by a foU. ha, Jn. xii. 9; «t toCto, ίνα. Acts ix. 21 ; or by διό τίνα, Jn. xii. 9. As one who is about to do something in a ])lace must neces- sarily come thither, in the popular narrative style the phrases (ρχ^ται και. ηΚθί και, etc., are usually placed be- fore verbs of action : Mt. xiii. 19, 25; Mk. ii. 18; iv. 15; v.33; vi.29; xii. 9 ; xiv. 37; Lk. viii. 12, 47; Jn. vi. 15 ; xi. 48; xii. 22; xLk. 38; .\x. 19, 26; xxi. 13; 3 Jn. 3; Rev. V. 7; xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9 ; (ρχου κ. iSe (or jtJXi'n-f), Jn. i. 46 (47) ; xi. 84 ; [and Rec. in] Rev. vi. 1, 3, 5, 7, [also Grsb. exc. in vs. 3] ; plur. Jn. i. 39 (40) ([T Tr WH o^fffif], see €Ϊ8ω, I. 1 e.) ; — or ίλθών is used, foil, by a άρχομαι 251 €ρχομαι finite verb: Mt. ϋ. 8 ; viii. 7 ; ix. 10, 18 ; xii. 44 ; xiv. 12, 33 [R G L] ; xviii. 31 ; xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 13 ; Mk. vii. 25 [Tdf. fiVfXfl.] ; xii. 14, 42 ; xiv. 45 ; xvi. 1 ; Acts xvi. 37, 39; — or ep;(o/xi>'of, foil, by a finite verb : Lk.xui.l4; xvi. 21 ; xviii. 5. in other places ίΚθών must be rendered when I Qhou, he, etc.) am come : Jn. xvi. 8 ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Phil. i. 27 (opp. to απών). β. to come i. e. to appear, make one's appearance, come before the public : so κατ €ξοχΊ]ν of the ilessiah, Lk. iii. 16; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 27, 31; Heb. .X. 37, who is styled pre-eminently ό ΐρχόμίνοί, i. e. he that cometh (i. e. is about to come) ace. to prophetic promise and universal expectation, the coming one [W. 341 (320) ; B. 204 (1 76 sq.)] : Mt. xi. 3 ; Lk. vii. 19 sq. ; with fir τόΐ" κόσμοι» added, Jn. vi. 14 ; xi. 27 ; tv τω ονόματι τοΰ κνμ'ιου, he who is already coming clothed with divine authority i. e. the Messiah, — the shout of the people joy- fully welcoming Jesus as he was entering Jerusalem, — taken fr. Ps. ex vii. (ex viii.) 25 sq. : Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiu. 35 ; .xLx. 38 [Tdf. om. ίρχ. (so WH in their first mrg.)] ; Jn. xii. 13. ΐρχ^σθαι used of Elijah who was to return fr. heaven as the forerunner of the Messiah: Mt. xi. 14; xvii. 10; Mk. Lx. 11-13; of John the Baptist, Mt. xi. 18 ; Lk. vii. 33 ; Jn. i. 31 ; with els μαρτνρίαν added, Jn. i. 7; of Antichrist, 1 Jn. ii. 18; of "false Christs" and other deceivers, false teachers, etc. : Mt. xxiv. 5 ; Mk. xiii. (> ; Lk. xxi. 8, (in these pass, with the addition eVl τω ονόματι μου, relying on my name, i. e. arrogating to themselves and simulating my Messianic dignity) ; Jn. x. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Rev. xvii. 10; with the addition eV τώ ονόματι τω Ιδίω in his own authority and of his own free-wiU, Jn. v. 43. of the Holy Spirit, who is represented as a person coming to be the invisible helper of Christ's disciples after his departure from the world: Jn. xv. 26 ; xvi. 7 sq. 13. of the ap- pearance of Jesus among men, as a religious teacher and the author of salvation : Mt. xi. 19 ; Lk. vii. 34 ; .In. v. 43 ; vii. 28 ; viii. 42 ; with the addition of fir T. κόσμον foU. by iva, Jn. xii. 46 ; xviii. 37 : fis κρίμα. Ίνα, Jn. ix. 39 ; foU. by a telic inf. 1 Tim. i. 15 ; ?ρχ(σθαι οπίσω TITOS, after one, Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30; ό ίΚθών δι' ΰδατοΓ καΐ αίματοί, a terse expressioij for, 'he that publicly appeared and approved himself (to be God's son and ambassador) by accomplishing expiation through the ordinance of baptism and the bloody death which he imderwent '[cf. p. 210* bot.], 1 Jn. v. 6 ; ΐρχ^- σθαι foil, by a telic inf., Mt. v. 17; x. 34 sq. ; Lk. xix. 1 ; ' foil, by Ίνα, Jn. -x. 10; ίΚηΚνθίναι and ΐρχισθαι iv σαρκί are used of the form in which Christ as the divine Logos appeared among men : 1 .Jn. iv. 2, 3 [Rec] ; 2 Jn. 7. of the return of Jesus hereafter from heaven in majesty: Mt. x. 23 ; Acts i. 11 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; xi.26; 1 Th. V. 2 ; 2 Th. i. 10 ; with ev rj δόξη αϋτοΰ added, Mt. xvi. 27; xxT. 31 ; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. ix. 20 ; (π\ τώνν(φ(λων (borne on the clouds) pera 8υνάμ(ως κ. &όξη!. Mt. .xxiv. 80 ; Cf ν(φίλαΐί, iv ν(φί\τ} κτ\., Mk. xiii. 26 ; Lk. xxi. 27; tv T3 βασί\(ία αυτού (see iv, I. 5 c. p. 210' top), Mt. xvi. 28 ; Lk. xxiii. 42 [th την β. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.] b. of time, like the Lat. venio : with nouns of time, as ίρχονται ημίραι, in a fut. sense, will come [cf. B. 204 (1 76 sq.) ; W. § 40, 2 a.], Lk. xxiii. 29 ; Heb. viii. 8 fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31 ; ίΚήσονται ήμίραι, Mt. ix. 15; Mk. ii. 20 ; Lk. v. 35 ; xvii. 22 ; x.xi. 6 ; ηλθ^ν ή ήμίρα, Lk. xxii. 7; Rev. vi. 17 ; ίρχΐται ωρα, ore, Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25; xvi. 25 ; foil, by Iva, Jn. xvi. 2, 32 ; ηΚθΐν, is come, i. e. is present, Jn. xvi. 4, 21 ; Rev. xiv. 7, 15 ; ίΧηΚυθΐ ή ώρα. Ίνα, Jn. xii. 23 ; xiii. 1 (L Τ Tr WH ηλθιν) ; xvi. 32 ; xvii. 1 ; (λη\ΰθ(ΐ ή ωρα αυτόν, had Come (Lat. aderal), Jn. vii. 30; viii. 20 ; €ρχ^. νΰξ, Jn. ix. 4 ; η ημ^ρα τοΰ κυρίου, 1 Th, V. 2; καιροί. Acts iii. 19. with names of events that oc- cur at a definite time : ό θίρισμός, .Jn. iv. 35 ; ό γάμο; τοΰ άρνίου. Rev. xix. 7 ; ηΚβίν η κρίσις, Rev. xviii. 10. in imi- tation of the Hebr. Χ3Π, ό, η, το €ρχόμ(νος, -ίνη, -tvov, is i.q. to come, future [cf. B. and W.u. s.] ; ό αΙών, Mk. χ. 30 ; Lk. xviii. 30 ; ή ίορτή, Acts xviii. 21 [Rec.J ; ή οργή, 1 Th. i. 10; τάipχόμeva, things to come, Jn. xvi. 13 (□"SSn the times to come, Is. xxvii. 6) ; in the periphrasis of the name of Jehovah, ό t>v και ό ην καΊ ό (ρχόμκνο!, it is equiv. to iσόμevoς, Rev. i. 4; iv. 8. c. of things and events(so very often in Grk. auth. also) ; of the advent of natural events : ποταμοί, Μ t. vii. 25 [RG]; κατακλυ- σμός, Lk. xvii. 27 ; λιμοί. Acts vii. 11 ; of the rain coming down Επί TJjs yrjs, Heb. vi. 7 ; of alighting birds, Mt. xiii. 4, 32; Mk. iv. 4; of a voice that is heard (Hom. D. 10, 139), foil, by e'lc with gen. of place, Mt. iii. 1 7 [?] ; Uk. Lx. 7 [T WH Tr mrg. eycVrro] ; Jn. .xii. 28 ; of things that are brought: ό λύχνος, Mk. iv. 21 ^πιστοΚή, Liban. ep. 458; other e.x.x. fr. Grk. writ, are given in Kypke, I'iui- noel, al., on Mk. 1. c.). 2. metaph. a. of Christ's invisible return from heaven, i. e. of the power which through the Holy Spirit he will exert in the sotds of his disciples : Jn. .xiv. 18, 23 ; of his invisible advent in the death of believers, by which he takes them to himself into heaven, Jn. xiv. 3. b. equiv. to to come into being, arise, come forth, shotc itself, fnd place or in- fluence : τα σκάνδαλα, Mt. xviii. 7 ; Lk. .xvii. 1 ; τα αγαβά, Ro. iii. 8 (Jer. xvii. t; ) ; το TtKnov, 1 Co. .xiii. 10 ; ^ πίστις. Gal. iii. 23, 25 ; η αποστασία, 2 Th. u. Ζ', η βασιλεία τοΰ θ(οΰ, i. q. be established, Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2; xvii. 20, etc. ; ή {'κτολή, i. q. became knoicn, Ro. vii. 9. c. with Prepositions: «κ τής [Lchm. άπο] &Κί•^(ως, suffered tribulation. Rev. vii. 14. foil, by «s, to come (fall) into or unto: άς τό χ(Ί.ρον, into a worse condition, Mk. τ. 26; ftf π€ΐρασμ6ν. Mk. χϊλ'. 38 Τ ΛΑ Η ; ίΐς άπ^λεγμόν (see άτΓρλργμό?), Acts xix. 27 ; ft? την ώραν ταντην, .Jn. xii. 27 ; (Ις κρίσιν, to become liable to judgment, .Τη. v. 24: Wj iπίγvωσιv, to attain to knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Tim. iii. 7 ; fir το φαν(ρόν, to come to light, Mk. iv. 22 ; fiy προκοπην ίΚή\υθ(. has turned out for the advancement, Phil. i. 12 ; ΐρχ. tts τι, to come to a thing, is used of a writer who after discussing other matters passes on to a new topic, 2 Co. xii. 1 ; fit ΐαυτόν, to come to one's senses, return to a healthy state of mind, Lk. xv. 17 (Epict. diss. 3, 1, 15 ; Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. § 3, p. 702 ed. Fabric), ΐρχ. ivl τίνα to come upon one : in a bad sense, of calamities, .Jn. xviii. 4 ; in a good sense, of the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16; Acts xix. 6: to devolve epot 252 τθίω upon one, of the t;uilt and punishment of murder, Mt. xxiii. 35. ίρχ. npot τον Ίησοϋν, to commit one's self to the instruction of Jesus and enter into fellowship with him, Jn. v. 40 ; vi. 35, 37, 44, 45, Co ; jrpor τό φως, to sub- mit one's self to the power of the lisht, Jn. iii. 20 sq. n. loffo: οπίσω Tims ("^T^i^ t^^)' '" follow one, Mt. xvi. 24 ; [.Mk. viii. 34 KL Tr mrg.' Wll]; Lk. i.\. 23; xiv. 27, (Cien. x.xiv. J, 8; χ.χχνϋ. 17, and elsewhere); npos τίνα, Lk. XV. 20; σύν τινι, to accompany one, Jn. xxi. 3 [cf. B. 210 (1S2)] ; 6h6v ίμχ(σθαι. Lk. ii. 44 [cf. W. 220 ( 2 1 2 )]. [Com P. : άι^, ίπ-αν-, απ-, δι-. (iV-, ί'π-ίΐΓ-. παρ- 'ΐα-, σνν•(ΐσ-, (ζ-, ti-e^-, in-, κατ-, παρ-, άντι-παρ-, vtpi-, ηρυ-, προσ-, ίτνν-ίρχομαί.~\ [SvN.: ίρχΐσθαι, {βαίνΐΐν,) ττορΐύ^σθα ι, χωρ€7ν: with the Ν. Τ. use of these verlis ami their compounds it may be interesting to comp.ire the distiuotious ordinarily recognized in classic Grk., where (ρχισβαι denotes motion or progress generally, and of any sort, hence to rom<• and (esp. ίλβίΓι/) arrive at, as well a.s to i/o (βαίναν). βα,ίνιιν primarily signi- fies to walk, lake sttps, picturing the nioile of motion ; to go away, πορίΐίίσβαί expresses motion in general. — often con- fined within certain limits, or giving prominence to the bearing; hence the regular word for the march of an army, χωριϊν .ilways empliasizes the idea of separation, ch.ange of place, and does not, like e. g. πορ6ΐ/6σ9οι, note the external ami perceptible motion, — (a man may he recog- nized liy Ids Troptla). Cf. Schmidt ch xxvii.] €ρώ, see cmov. {ρωτάω, -it, [(inf. -^av L Τ Tr, -rav R G WII ; .see I, «)] ; impf. 3 pers. plur. ηρώτων and (in Mt.xv. 23 LT Tr WH, Mk. iv. 10 Tdf.) ημώτουν, cf. B. 44 (38) ; [W. 8S (82) ; r 253 €σχατο9 iii. 8 ; τα ιταρά rtms, the things supplied by one, L,k. x. 7, i. q. τα παρατιθίμ^να in vs. 8 [cf. W. 3(JG (343)]; 1 Co. .\. 27 ; μτΐ7( apTov ΐσθ• μητ€ oivov Ήΐναν-, to live frugally, Lk. vii. 33 ; το κυριακον biinvov φαγ€ΐν, to celebrate the Lord's supper, 1 Co. .xi. 20 ; τό πύσχ^α, to eat the paschal lamb, celebrate the paschal supper, Mt. xxvi. 1 7 ; Mk. -xiv. 12, 14; Lk. xxil. 8, 11, 15, 16 L Τ Tr WH ; Jn. xviii. 28 ; τας θυσίας, to celebrate the sacrificial feasts, said of Jews, 1 Co. x. 18; of animals, in Lk. xv. 16 (where Sit> stands by attraction for ά, because eaBUiv ivith a simple gen. of thing is nowhere found in the N. T. [W. 198 (187) note]), by a usage hardly to be met with in class. Grk. (W. § 28, 1 ; [B. 159 (139)]), l< Tims, to (take and) eat of a thing: Lk. xxii. 16 [RG] ; Jn. vi. 26, 50 sq. ; 1 Co. xi. 28 ; on the other hand, ίκ τυϋ καρπού (L Τ Tr WFI τον καρπόν), €κ τοϋ -γάΧακτος ίσθίΐΐν, in 1 Co. ix. 7, is to support one's self by the sale of the fruit and the milk [but cf. B. as above, and Meyer ad loc.]. t'/c with gen. of place : e'/c τοϋ Upov, draw their support from the temple, i. e. from the sacrifices and offerings, 1 Co. ix. 13 [but Τ Tr WH read τά ί'κ τ. ί.] ; also i< θυσιαστη- ρίου, i. e. from the things laid on the altar, Heb. xiii. 10 [W. 366 (344)]. by a Hebraism (p SjK), άπά τινοί [cf. \V. 199 (187)]: Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28. Metaph. (o devour, consume: τινά, Heb. x. 27; τι, Rev. xvii. 16; of rust, Jas. V. 3. [Comp. : κατ-, συν-ισθίω^} (TI, see αιών, 3) which precedes the times of the Jlessiah or the glori- ous return of Christ from heaven will be closed : Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, [54] ; xi. 24 ; xii. 48. of the time nearest the return of Christ from heaven and the consummation of the divine kingdom, the foil, phrases are used : (σχάτη ώρα, 1 Jn. ii. 18 ; ex καιρώ ίσχ. 1 Pet. i. 5 ; iv ΐσχ. χρόνω, Jude 18 Rec, in ίσχάτου χρόνου ibid. Tr WH; iv (σχά- Tais ήμepaιs, Acts ii. 1 7 ; Jas. v. 3 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; for other phrases of the sort see 2 a. below ; in iσχάτωv των χρό- νων, 1 Pet. i. 20 R G, see below. 2. 6, ή, τό ίσχ absol. or with the genitive, a. of time: o'l ίσχατοι, who had come to work last, Mt. xx. 8, 12, [14] ; the meaning of the saying έσονται πρώτοι έσχατοι και ίσχατοι πρώτοι is not always the same : in Lk. xiii. 30 it signifies, those who were last invited to enter the divine kingdom will be first to enter when the opportunity comes, i. e. they will be admitted forthwith, while others, and those too who were first among the invited, will be shut out then as coming too late; in Mt. xix. 30; xx. 16 it means, the same portion in the future kingdom of God will throuo^h his goodness be assigned to those invited last as to those invited first, although the latter may think they deserve something better; cf. Mk. x. 31. ό πρώτος κ 6 ?σχ. i. e. the eternal. Rev. i. 11 Rec, 17; ii. 8 ; xxii. 1 3. ΐσχατος as a predicate joined to a verb adverbially [cf. W. 131 (124); § 54, 2]: Mk. xii. 6 ; iσχάτη (RG: but see below) πάντων άπίθανι, Mk. xii. 22. ΐσχατον, ίσχατα, used substantively [cf. B. 94 (82) § 125, 6] in phrases, of the time immediately preceding Christ's return from heaven and the consummation of the divine kingdom : in' iaxarou or iσχάτωv τών ήμιρών, Heb. i. 2 (1) ; 2 Pet. iii. 3, (Barn. ep. 16, 5) ; τών χρόνων, 1 Pet. i. 20 ; iπ' iaxarov τοΟ χρόνου, Jude 1 8 L Τ (see 1 abo\e, and iπί, A. Π. fin.), cf. Riehm, Lehrbegr. d. Hebraerbriefes, p. 205 sq. TO ίσχατα with gen. of pers. the last state of one : Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ; 2 Pet. ii. 20 [but without gen. of pers.]. Neut. ΐσχατον, adv., lastly : [w. gen. of pers., Mk. xii. 22 LTTrWH]; 1 Co. xv. 8. b. of space: το ?σ•;ΐ(ατοΐ' τ^γ y^r, the uttermost part, the end, of the earth, Acts i. 8 ; xiii. 47. c. of rank, grade of ίσγατωϊ 254 Ir» worth, last i. e. lowest : Mk. ix. 35 ; Jn. viii. 9 Rec. ; 1 Co. iv. !.,• »σχί.τ«)ί, adv., extremely, [Xen. an. 2, 6, 1 ; Aristot., al.j i €<τχάτω! «χί"' (in extremis esse), to be in the last gn.-p, at the point of death : Mk. v. 23. Diod. excrpt. Vales, p. 242 [i. e. fr. 1. 10 § 2, 4 Dind.] ; Artcm. oneir. 8, GO. The phrase is censured by the Atticists ; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 704 sq.; Lob. ad Thryn. p. 889; Fritzsche on Mk. p. 178 sq. ; [Win. 26].• 4'σ•ω, adv., (fr. e's, for ίϊσω [fr. Horn, on] fr. eis\ cf. W. 52 ; [B. 72 (63) ; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 432]) ; 1. to within, into : Mt. xxvi. 58 ; Mk. xiv. 54 ; with gen. Mk. XV. 16 [W. § 54, 6]. 2. within : Jn. .xx. 26 ; Acts V. 23 ; 6 Ισω ήνθρωπο!, tlie internal, inner man, i. e. the soul, conscience, (see ΰνθρωττοί, 1 e.), 2 Co. iv. 16 LTTr Wll; Ro. vii. 22; Eph. iii. 16; o! εσω, those who belong to the Christian brotherhood (opj). to oi ΐξω [q. v. in ?|ω, 1 a.]), 1 Co. V. 12.• ϊσ-ωβεν, («σω), adv. of place, fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; [1. adverbially;] a. from irithin (Vulg. de intus, ab intus, intrinsecus, [etc.]) : Mk. vii. 21, 23; Lk. xi. '< ; 2 Co. vii. 5. b. within (cf. W. § 54, 7) : Mt. vii. 15; xxiii. 25, 27, 28; Rev. iv. 8; v. 1 [ef. γράφω, 3]; ό ΐσωθιν άνθρωπος, 2 Co. iv. 16 RG (see ?σω, 2); τά ϊσωθιν, that which is within, the inside, Lk. xi. 40 ; with gen. of pers. i. q. your soul, ibid. 39. [2. as a prop, with the gen. (W § 54, 6) : Rev. xi. 2 Rec." (see ΐξωθ^ν, 2).] • ίσώτίροΐ, -fpa, -epov, (compar. of ΐσω, [cf. B. 28 (24 sq.)]), inner: Acts xvi. 24; το iawrepov τοΰ καταπ^τά- σματος, the inner space Λvhich is behind the veil, i. e. the shrine, the Holy of holies, said of heaven by a fig. drawn from the earthly temple, Ileb. vi. 19.* έταϊροΐ, -ου, 6, [fr. Horn, down], Sept. yn; a comrade, male, partner, [.\. Ύ. fellow']: Mt. xi. 16 (where Τ Tr Wn τ,,Ις irepoi, [q. v. 1 b., and cf. IF//. Intr. § 404]) ; voc. in kindly address, yWeni/ (?n^ (70O'/y"ne«(/) : Mt. xx. 13; xxii. 12; xxvi. 50.* ίτίρ<5-γλωσ•σ-05, -ου, 6, (erfpos and γλωσσά), one who speaks [another i. e.] a foreign tongue (opp. to όρόγΧωσ- aot) : Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 1 Aq. ; Polyb. 24, 9, 5 ; Strab. 8 p. 833 ; [Philo, confus. Ungg. § 3 ; al.] ; but different- ly in 1 Co. xiv. 21, viz. one who speaks what is utterly strange and unintelligible to others unless interpreted ; see what is said about ' speaking with tongues ' under γλώσσα, 2.* ϊτ6ροει8ασ-καλ(ω, -ώ; (errpos and θιδίίσκαλοΓ, cf. κακό• hihaaKu^fiv, Clem, liora. 2 Cor. 10, 5) ; to tcarh other or different doctrine i. e. deviating from the truth : 1 Tim. L 3 ; vi. 3. (Ignat. ad Polyc. 3, and al. eccl. writ.) * ίτερο-ζνγί'ω, -ώ; (ίτίρόζυγος yoked with a different yoke; used in Lev. xix. 19 of the union of beasts of different kinds, e. g. an ox and an ass), to come under an unequal or different yoke (Beza, impari j'ugo copidor), to be unequalh/ yoked : τιυ'ι (on the dat. see W. § 31, 10 N.4 ; B. § 133, 8), trop. to hare fellowship with one who is not an equal: 2 Co. vi. 14, where the apostle is forbid- ding Christians to have intercourse with idolaters.• rcll done .' Lk. xix. 1 7 L Τ Tr WII. (Arstph., Plat., al. ; Sept. for ΠΚΠ.) Cf. eS. fin.' «νγίνήϊ, -eV, (fr. eS and ytvos) ; 1. well-born, of noble race: Lk. xix. 12 (of a prince) ; iCo. i. 26. 2. noble- minded: compar. eiyevearepos. Acts xvii. 11. (Sect.; often in Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. andTragg. down.)* ■tiBia 258 ■ΰθύν ciSCa, -as, η, (fr. «iSiot, -ov, and this fr. fiJ and Z)]) ; Sej)!. mostly for ΠΧΤ ; among Grk. Λvrit. used esp. by Polyb., Diod., and Dion. Hal.; 1. as in prof, auth., foil, by an inQn., ii seems good ίο one, is one's (jood pleasure ; to think it good, choose, determine, decide : Lk. xii. 32; 1 Co. i. 21 ; Gal. i. 15; once foil, by ace. w. inf., Col.i. 19[cf. Rp.Lghtft.; W. § «4, 3 b.; B. § 129, 16]; with the included idea of kindness accompanying the de- cision, Ilo. XV. 2(j sip ; to do icillinijlij what is signified by the inf., to be rcadi/ to, 1 Th. ii. 8 ; to prefer, choose rather, [A. V. we thought it good], 1 Th. iii. 1; Sir. xxv. 16; more fully μαΚλον ευδοκώ, 2 Co. v. 8. 2. by a usage peculiar to bibl. writ., foil, by en tiw, to be well pleased rvith, take pleasure in, a pers. or thing [cf. W. 38, 232 (218); B. 185 (160)]: Mt. iii. 17; xii. 18 Tr ; xvii. 5; Mk. i. 11; Lk. iii. 22, [on the tense in the preceding pass.cf. W. 278 (261); B. 198 (171)]; 1 Co. x. 5 ; 2 Co. xii. 10; 2Th. ii. t2RGLbr. ; Ileb. x.38, (3 ]•3Π, 2 S. xxii. 20 ; Mai. ii. 1 7 ; 3 ΠΧ^, Ps. cxlix. 4). foil, by fts Tiva (i.e. when directing the mind, turning the thoughts, unto), to be fiicorabty inclined towards one [cf. W. § 31, 5; B. § 133, 23]: Mt. xii. 18 RG; 2 Pet. i. 17; w. sim- ple ace. of pers. to be favorable to, take pleasure in [cf. W. 222 (209)] : Mt. xii. 18 L Τ WH; with ace. of the thing : Heb. x. 6, 8, (Ps. 1. (Ii.) 18, 21 ; Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 2; Gen. xxxiii. 10; Lev. xxvi. 34,41); as in Grk. writ, also, w. the dat. of the pers. or thing Λvith which one is well pleased: 2 Th. ii. 12 Τ Tr WII (see above); 1 Mace. i. 43 ; 1 Esdr. iv. 39. [CoMi•. : συι/-Γυδοκί'ω.] * cvSoKla, -as, ή, (fr fΰSoκ('ω, as (νλογία fr. (υλογιω), unknown to prof. auth. [Boeckh, In.scrr. 5960], found in the O. T. in some of the Pss. (for ρϊ"^) and often in Sir.; on itcf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 371 sq. ; [esp. Β p. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 15]; prop, beneplacitum (Vulg. [ed. Clement.] Eph. i. 9); 1. icill, choice: Mt. xi. 26; Lk. x. 21, (on both pass, see ίμπροσθιν, 2 b.) ; Sir. i. 27 (24) ; xx.xvi. 13, etc. ; in particular, {/nod-wi/l, kindly intent, be- nevolence : Eph. i. 5, 9 ; Phil. ii. 1 3. (Ps. 1. (Ii.) 20 ; Sir. ii. 16 ; xj. 1 7 ( 1 5) etc.) : 8i' (νδοκίαν, prompted by good will, Phil. i. 15. 2. delight, pleasure, satisfaction : with gen. of the thing that pleases, 2 Th. i. 11 ; fv άνθράτποκ fiSoKia, either among men pleasure produced by salvar tion, or God's pleasure in men, Lk. ii. 14 R G Tr mrg. WII mrg.; Sv6pwrroi (iSoKias, men in whom God is well picased [i. e. η ο t a particular class of men (viz. believ- ers), but the whole race, contemplated as blessed in Clirist's birth], ibid. LTTr txt. WII txt. [see WH. Ap]). ad loc. ; Field, Otium Norv. iii. ad loc], (Ps. cxliv. (cxlv.) 10 ; Sir. ix. 12). 3. desire (for delight in any absent thing easily In-gets a longing for it) : Ro. x. 1 ; cf. Philii)|)i and Thohick ad loc.* c^cp7«ria, -as, ij, (iicpytVijf ) ; a good deed, benefit : 1 Tim. vi. 2 (on which see άι/τ-ιλιιμ^άι/ω, 2) ; with gen. of the pers. on whom the benefit is conferred [\ν. 185 (174)], Actsiv. 9. (2 Mace. vi. 13; ix. 26 ; Sap. xvi. 11, 24 ; in Grk. auth. fr. Horn, down.) * (v(py(T((i>, -ώ ; (eiepyίτηs), to do good, bestow benefits : Acts X. 38. (Sept. ; often in Attic writ.) * ιύίργί'τηβ, -ου, ό, a benefactor (fr. I'ind. and Ildt. down); it was :dso a title of honor, conferred on such as had done their country service, and upon princes; equiv. to Soter, Pater Patriae : Lk. xxii. 25. (Cf. Hdt. 8, 85; Thuc. 1, 129; Xen. vect 3, 11; HeU. 6, 1, 4; Plat, de virt. p. 379 b. ; al. ; cf. 2 Mace. iv. 2 ; joined with σωτημ, Joseph, b. j. 3, 9, 8; Addit. to Esth. vi. 12 [Tdf. viii. 1. 25]; Diod. 11,26.)• («-βίτο5. -OV. (fr. ei and θ^τύς), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and IIip|i()cr. down; \>yo\>. ircll-placed; λ. fit : ut τι, Lk. ix. 62 II G ; xiv. 35 (34), (Diod. 2, 57 et al.) ; with dat. of the thing /or which : Lk. ix. 62 L Τ Tr WH (τω πράγματι, Nicol. Stob. fl. 14, 7 [149,4]). b. useful: Tivi, Ileb. vi. 7 [some would make the dat. here depend on the ptcp.] ; (of time, seasonable, Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 6 ; Susan. 15).* ίίθί'ω;, adv., (fr. (vBis), straightway, immediately, forth- with : Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks., esp. Mark's Gospel [where, however, Τ Tr WII have substituted (Ιθν% in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere only in (ial. i. IG ; Jas. i. 24 ; Rev. iv. 2, (for 0ΝΠ3, .lob V. 3). shortly, soon : 3 Jn. 14. [From Sopli. down.] (ίθυ8ρομ£ω, -ω : 1 aor. (ίθυδρόμησα [see ίίδοκί'ω] ; (fu- 6v8pόμos, i. e. eieis and δρόμos) ; to make a straight course, run a straight course : foil, by els w. ace. of place. Acts xvi. 11; (ΰθυδρομήτα! ηλθον ei's. Acts xxi. 1. (Philo, alleg. legg. iii. § 79 : ile agricult. § 40.) • «ΰθυμίω, -ώ ; (tC^iiuor) ; 1. trans, to put in good spirits, (jladden, make cheerful, (Aeschyl. in Plat, de rep. 2, ;i83 b.). Mid. to be of good spirits, to be cheerful, (Xen., Plat.). 2. intrans. to be Joyful, be of good cheer, oj good courage: Acts xxvii. 22, 25; Jas. v. 13. (Eur. Cycl. 530 ; Plut. de tranquill. anim. 2 and 9.) • cv -θυμος, -nv, (fS and θυμά^) ; 1. well-disposed, kind, (Hom.Od. 14,63). 2. of good cheer, of oood courage : kcts xxvii. 36 ; [compar. as adv. xxiv. 10 Ren. (see fii^i^ws)], (Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Pind. down ; Si Mace. xi. 26).• £ύθύμω5, adv., [Aeschyl.. Xen., al.], cheerfully: Acts xxiv. 10 L Τ Tr WII, for Rec. (ίθυμότ(ρον the more con- fidently.• (ϊιθννω ; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. phir. ίΰθΰνατί ; (fvuis) ; a. to make straight, level, plain : την ohuv, Jn. i. 23 (Sir. ii. fi ; xxxvii. 15). b. to lead or guide straight, to keep straight, to direct, (often so in Grk. writ.) : δ eieivw, the steersman, helmsman of a ship, Jas. iii. 4. (Eur. Cycl evUvi 259 €v\oyiu 15; of a charioteer, Num. xxii. 23; Isocr. p. 9; al.) [CoMP. : Kar-evdifw.} * iieis, -(ta, -V, Sept. for Ίψ'^, [fr. Find, down"], slraight; a. prop, straight, level : of a way, [Mt. iii. 3] ; Mk. i. ."! ; Lk. iii. 4 ; Acts ix. 1 1 ; (Ις fvOflav ( L Τ Tr WH eis eidfias), sc. ό&όυ (an elli[)sis com. also in class. Grk. cf. AV. § iJ4, 5), Lk. iii. 5; elSela ohas the straight, the right u-ai/, is fig. used of true religion as a rule of life leading to its goal i. e. to salvation, 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; at oSoi κυρίου, the right and saving purposes of God, Acts xiii. 10 (Song of the Three vs. 3). b. trop. straightforward, upright, true, sincere, (as often in prof, auth.) : καρδία. Acts viii. 21 (ei^fts rfi KapSia often in the Pss., as vii. 11; xxxi. (.\xxii.) 11 ; x.xxv. (.xxxvi.) 11).* ίνβί?, adv., [fr. Find, down], i. q. (υθΐως, with which it is often interchanged in the Mss. [see (ΙΘΙως^ ; straight- wag, immediatebj, forthwith: Mt. iii. 16; xiii. 20; Jn. xiii. 32, etc. [Cf. Phrvn. ed. Loh. p. 145.] βϋθύτηϊ, -T)Tof, ή, ( f r. the adj. deus), rectitude, upright- ness ; trop. paiiSos eiourijTOf, an impartial and righteous government, Ileb. i. 8 fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7.* cvKaipc'ie, -<5 : impf. (υκαίρουν [so L Τ Tr WH in Mk. vi. 31 ; KG in Acts xvii. 21] and ηυκαίρουν [R G in Mk. 1. c. ; L Τ Tr WH in Acts 1. c], (betw. which the Ms.S. vary, see dhoKiw, init.) ; 1 aor. subjunc. (ίκαιρήσω ; (ei"ftaipos) ; a later word, fr. Polyb. onwards (cf. Luh. ad Pliryn. p. 125 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 205; Soph. Lex. s. v.]) ; to have opportunity : 1 Co. xvi. 12 ; to have leisure, foil, by an inf., to do something, Mk. vi. 31 [(Plut. ii. p. 223 d. Cleora. Anax. §9)]; to give one's time to a thing, (It τι. Acts xvii. 21.* evKoipCa, -as, ή, ((ϋκαιρος), seasonable time, opportunity: ζητιϊν eiK; foil, by [ΐνα Β. 237 (205)], Mt. xxvi. 16; [Lk. xxii. 6 Lchm. mrg.] ; by τοϋ with inf. Lk. xxii. C. (.Sept. : in Grk. writ, first in Plat. Phaedr. p. 272 a.) * (ύ'-καιροΐ, -ov, ((υ and καιρός), srasonahle, timely, op/ior- lune : βοήθεια, Heb. iv. lii; ήμίρα ίΰκ. a convenient day, Mk. vi. 21. (2 Mace. xiv. 29 ; [Fs. ciii. (civ.) 27; Soph. O. C. 32] ; Theophr., Polyb., al.) * cvKa(p(i>s, adv., seasonably, opportunely ; ivlien the op- portunity occurs: Mk. xiv. 11 ; opp. to άκαίρωι (q. v.), 2 Tim. iv. 2. (Xen. Ages. 8, 3 ; Plat, and sqq. ; Sir. xviii. 22.) * iv-Koiros, -ov, (fv and Konos), that can be done with easy labor; easy: Polyb. et al. ; Sir. xxii. 15; 1 Mace, iii. 18 ; in the N. T. only in the phrase (ϋκηπώτ(ρόν eVn. — foil, by inf., Mt. ix. 5 ; Mk. ii. 9 ; Lk. v. 23 ; by ace. w. inf., Mt. xi.x. 24; Mk. x. 25; Lk. xvi. 17; .xviii. 25.• euXdpcia, -eiaj, η, the character and conduct of one who is (υλαβήί (q. v.) ; 1. caution, circumspection, dis- cretion : Soph., Eur., Plat., Dem., sijq. ; Sept. Prov. xxviii. 14 ; joined w. πρόνοια, Plut. Marcell. 9 ; used of the prudent delay of Fabius Maximus, Polyb. 3, 105, 8 ; ή fix. σώζ(ΐ πάντα, Arstph. av. 377; i. q. avoidance, π'\ηγων. Plat. legg. 7 p. 81 5 a. et al. (in which sense Zeno the Stoic contrasts ή (1\άβ. caution, as a rUXoyns (κκΧισκ a reasonable shunning, with ό φάβα, Diog. Laert. 7, 116, cf. Cic. Tusc. 4, 6, 13). 2. reverence, veneration: η προ! το θ^ίον fix. Diod. 13, 12; Plut. Camill. 21 ; de ser. num. vind. c. 4, and elsewh. ; πρία tovs νόμου!, Plut. Ages. 15 ; θ(οϋ, objec. gen., Philo, Cherub. § !) ; simply reverence towards God, godly fear, piety : lleb. xii. 2H and, in the opinion of many, also v. 7 [cf. από, II. 2 b. ; see below]. 3. fear, anxiety, dread : Sap. xvii. 8 ; for rtjNT , Josh. xxii. 24 ; Joseph, antt. 11,6,9; Plut. Fab. 1 (the f ί/3ουλι'α of Fabius seemed to be fiXa^fia) ; so, most probably, in Ileb. V. 7 (see [above and] άπό, I. 3 d.), for by using this more select word the ivriter, skilled as he was in the Greek tongue, speaks more reverently of the Son of God than if he had used φάβα. [Syn. see SaXia, fin. ; cf. Trench § xlviii. ; Delitzsch on Ileb. v. 7.] * ίϋλαβί'ομαν, -ovpat : 1 aor. ptcp. (ϋλαβηθ^ΐ! ; prop, to show one's self (ίλαβήί, i. e. 1. to act cautiously, cir- cumspectly, (Tragg., Xen., Plato, and sqq.). 2. to be- ware, fear: as in 1 JIacc. iii. 30; xii. 40 [Alex, etc.] and often in prof, auth., foil, by μή lest [B. 241 sq. (208)], Acts x.xiii. 10 IIG (Deut. ii. 4; 1 S. xviii. 29; Job xiii. 25 ; Jer. v. 22 ; Dan. iv. 2 ; 2 Mace. viii. 16 ; Sir. .xii. 3). 3. to reverence, stand in awe of, (τον θ(όν. Plat. legg. 9 p. 879 e. ; Sept. Prov. ii. 8; xxiv. 28 (.x.xx. 5) ; Nah. i. 7) : God's declaration, Ileb. xi. 7.* ΐϋλαβή$, -f'r, (fu and \αβ(1ν), in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down ; 1. taking hold tcell, i. e. carefully and surely; cautious. 2. reverencing God, pious, religious, [A. V. devoull : Acts ii. 5 ; viii. 2, (Mic. vii. 2 [Alex, etc.]) ; joined with δίκαιο? (as in Flat, polit. p. 311 b.) : Lk. ii. 25; fix. κατά τόι» νόμον, Acts xxii. 12 LT Tr λ\Ή. [Cf. reff. s. v. fiXd^fia, fin.] * €ΰλογ€ω,-ώ: fut. f ΰλογ^σω ; irapf. f iXo-youi/ and ϊ^ύλό-^ουΐ' (Mk. x. 16, where the Mss. fluctuate betw. the two forms [cf. ]VH. App. p. 162]) ; 1 aor. (υΚόγησα (ηνλόγησα, Mt. Xiv. 19 LTr; Lk. xxiv. 30 L ; Ileb. xi. 20 and 21 L) ; pf. fiXoyijKa (ηϋΧόγηκα, Heb. vii. 6 L ; see elSoKeoi init. [cf. Vcitch s. v.; Tdf. un Lk. I.e.]); Pass., pf. ptcp. fiXoyi;- μΐνο!; 1 hit. (ΰλογηθήσομαι; (fvXoyoi) ; Sept. very often for Yf2 and ';]'^3; Vulg. benedico; mostly w. ace. of the obj., to bless one; 1. as in Grk. writ., to praise, cele- brate with praises : τον deov, Lk. i. 64 ; ii. 38 ; xxiv. 51, 53 [Tdf. om.] ; Jas. iii. 9; absol. in the giving of thanks : Mt. xiv. 19 ; .xxvi. 26 [cf. 3 below] ; Mk. vi. 41 ; viii. 7 R G Τ [?] ; xiv. 22 [cf. 3 below] ; Lk. xxiv. 30 ; 1 Co. xiv. 16. (AVlien used in this sense fiXoyfif differs from (ΰχαριστύΐ' in referring rather to the for m, fi;^. to the substance of the thanksgiving.) By a usage purely bibl. and ecel. like the Hebr. ^Il^^a, 2. to in- voke blessings : rtra, upon one, Mt. v. 44 Rec. ; Lk. vi. 28 ; Ro. xii. 14; absol., 1 Co. iv. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; of one tak- ing lea^'e, Lk. xxiv. 50 sq. ; of one at the point of death, Heb. xi. 20 sq. (Gen. xlviii. 9) ; in congratulations, Heb. vii. 1, 6 sq. (Gen. xiv. 19) ; Mk. x. 16 11 (', L ; Lk. ii. 34 ; (ίλογημινος (^OS), praised, blessed, [cf. iiXoyiji-os] : Mt. xxi. 9; xxiii. 39; ^Ik. xi. 9 .sq. ; Lk. xiii. 35; xix. 38; Jn. xii. 13, (in all which pass, it is an acclamation borrowed fr. Ps. cxvii. (cwiii.) 26). 3. with ace. of a thing, to consecrate a thing with solemn prayers; to ask God's bless- ing on a thing, pray him 'o bless it to one's use, pronounce ΐνΚο•/ητος 260 αέόω U rottuccralory blessing on : Ιχθϋια. Mk. viii. 7 L Tr λΛ II ; rout άμτουί, Lk. ix. 16; το πυτήριον, 1 Co. χ. 16; την θνσίαν, 1 S. ix. 13; and perh. γο» άριτον, Mt. xxvi. 26; .Mk. \iv. 22, (but see above under 1); cf. Riiekert, Das Abindni.ihl, p. 220 *i\. 4. of God, to cause to prosper, lo initLe li"/>l>!f, lo IjcsIow lilessiii'j.i on, [cf. W. 32] : τινά. Acts iii. 26; foil, by iv with dat. of the blessing, ev ηάση flXiiyia. with every kind of blessing, Eph. i. 3 (f\ ayuSols, Test. .\ii. I'atr. [test. -Jos. § 1.H] p. 722 [tV eiXoyiuLt γης, iv ημωτογα/ήμασι καμπών, test. Isach. § .') p. 626 sip J) ; ίϊλι,γών (ΪΧογ'ισω σ( (after the Ilebr., (ien. xxii. 17; see iiiW, I. 1 a. [for reff.]), I will bestow on thee the greatest blessings, lleb. vi. 14; Gal. iii. 8 liec. "'■'<■■ (see tWuXo- yia>), :) ; ίίλογημίν.)! fncoreil of God, lilessetl, Lk. i. 42' (ef. Deut. xxviii. 4) : iv γυναιξί, blessed among virouien, i. e. before all other wunien, l.k. i. 2S Η G L Tr txt. br. ; 42", (ef. W. 246 (2:!1) ; [15. K;i (?3)]); (νΚογημϊυυι τοϊι ηατρόί (i. cp νπό τοΟ πατμός, like tiX. ίπο θ(ον. Is. Ixi. 9; Ixv. 2:i;cf. \V. ls9 (1 78) and § 30, 4 ; [ef. B. § 132, 23]), appointed to eternal salvation by my father, Mt. xxv. 34. [Com I'.: iv-, κατ-ΐνΧογίω.~\* €νλογητό$, -όν, ((ϋλογίω), Sept. for '^1''3, a bibl. and eeel. word; blessed, praised, \'^ulg. benediclus: applied to (!od, Lk. i. 68; Ro. i. 25; ix. 5 [on its position here cf. W. o.Jl (."jr2s(p); Ps. Ixviii. (Ixvii.) 20; Gen. xxvii. 2:1 ; I'ss. of Sol. 8, 40. 41 ; also 1 K. x. 9; 2 Chr. ix. 8; Job i. 21 ; Ps. cxii. (cxiii.) 2; Ruth ii. 19; Dan. ii. 20, and esp. the elaborate discussion of Ro. 1. c. by Professors Dwight anil Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc. i. pp. 22-.J.5, 87-154 (1882)]; 2 Co. i. 3; xi. 31 ; Eph. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 3 ; cf. B. § 129, 22 Rem. [contra, W. .'586 (545) ; Mey. on Gal. i. 5]; absol. ό f uXoyijTOr, of God : Mk. xiv. 61. [The distinction betw. €ν\ογητόί and (ϋΧογημίνοί is thus stated by Pliilo (ile migr. Abr. § 19, i. 453 Mang.) : iiXoyrjros, οΰ μόνον (ι\ογημίνηί ' ... TO μίν γαρ τω π^φυκ^ναι. το δί τω νομίζΐσθαι Χίγίται μόνον ... τω ττ^φυκίναι (vXoyias άξιον . . . οπ(ρ €ν\ογητ6ν iv To'is χρησμοίς adfTai. Cf. Gen. .\iv. 19, 20; 1 S. xxv. 32,33; Tub. xi. 16 cod. Sin. ; contra, Jud. xiii. 18. Έΰλογητός is applied to men in Gen. xxiv. 31; xxvi. 29; Deut. vii. 14; Judg. xvii. 2; 1 S. xv. 13; Ruthii. 20; .Tud. and Tob. u. s. etc. See Prof. Abbot's careful exposition u. s. p. 152 sq.] * (νλογία, -at, ij, (f iXoyos) ; Sept. for Πρ";3 ; Vulg. bene- dictio; as in class. Grk. 1. praise, laudation, pane- f/yric: of God or Christ, Rev. v. 12, 13; vii. 12. 2. /ine f/i.vcour.s'c, polisliitil lanr/uar/e : Plat. rep. 3 p. 400 d. ; Luc. Lexiph. 1 ; in a Ijail sense, language artfully adapted to captivate the hearer, Jhir speaiinr/, fine .speeches : Ro. xvi. 18 (joined with χρηστηΧογία, the latter relating to the substance, dXoyla to the e.xpression) : plur. in Aesop, fab. 229 p. 150 ed. Cor. iav aii (ίΧογίας einopjjs, ίγωγί σου oi κή8ομαι, [but why not gen. sing.?]. By a usage unknown to native Grks. 3. an invocation of blessinifs, benediction: Heb. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 10, (Gen. xxvii. 35 sq. 38. al. ; Sir. iii. 8 ; xxxvii. 24 ; Joseph, antt. 4,8,44): see {ύλογί'ω, 2. 4. consecration: το ποτήριον τη! (ΰΧογΐαί, the consecrated cup (for that this is the meaning is evident from the explanatory adjunct €UXo- γοϋμτν, see iiXoyco) 3 [al. al. ; cf. Mey. ed. Heinrici ad loe.; W. 189 (W8)]), 1 Co. x. 16. 5. a (concrete) blessing, benejit, (Deut. xi. 26, etc. ; Sir. vii. 32 ; xxxix. 22, etc.) ; univ. 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; of the blessings of Chris- tianity, Ro. xv. 29 ; Eph. i. 3 ; ή tiXoyia τοϋ Άβρ. the salvation (by the Messiah) promised to Abraham, Gal. iii. 14; of the continual fertility of the soil granted by (iod, Heb. vi. 7 (Lev. xxv. 21 ; itTos fiXoyiat, Kzek. .x.\xiv. 26 ; cf. (ΰΧογί'ιν άγρόν, Gen. xxvii. 27) ; of the bless- ing of a ijollection sent from Christians to their brethren, 2 Co. i,\. 5 (of the gifts of men, (!cn. xxxiii. 1 1 ; Judg. i. 15; 1 S. XXV. 27); tV (iXoyiais. tliat blessings may ac- crue, bountifullij (opp. to φιώνμ^νως), 2 Co. ix. 6 (see tVi, B. 2 e. p. 234" top).• €ύ-μίτό-8οτοϊ, -υν, ((υ and μfτa&Ί&a)μι), ready οτ free to imparl; lil/eral: 1 Tiin. vi. 18 [A. V. ready lo distribute^. (.Vntunin. 1, 14; 6, 48.)* Εύνίκη [R" -νίίκη (see €1, i) ; lit. conquering well], -i;t, ή, /Cnni'i; the mother of Timothy: 2 Tim. i. 5.' (ύ-νοΐω,-ώ; {(ϋναος); Ιο irish {una} well; to be wcll-dis- poscil, of a peaceable s/)iril : τινί, towards any one, Mt. V. 25. (3 Mace. vii. 1 1 ; Sui)h., Arstph., Xen., Polyb., Plut., Hdian.) • cvvoia, -as, η. (fvvoos), i/ood-irlll, L'indness : 1 Co. vii. 3 Rec. ; μ(τ' (ivoias, Kjjh. vi. 7. [From Aesehyl. down.] * ίϋνουχίζω : 1 aor. €ΰνοΰχισα ; 1 aor. pass, (ΰνουχίσθην ; [on the augm. cf. B. 34 (30) ; 117/. .\pp. ]>. 162J ; lo cas- Irate, nnmnn : pass. ϋπ;ΰρισκον (cf. Kijhner § 343, i. 825 sq. [esp. Λ'eitch s. V. fin.] and i-eff. under ei/SoKiai) ; fut. tύpήσω■, pf. (ϋρηκα; 1 aor. (υρησα (which aor., unknown to the earlier Grks., occurs in Aesop, f. 131 [f. 41 ed. Furia, p. 333 ed. Cor.] ; Maneth. 5, 137 and in Byzant. writ. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 721; W. 8G (82) ; [cf. B. 36 (31)]), Rev. xviii. 14 Rec. ; 2 aor. evpov, 1 pers. plur. in Alex, form [ WH. App. p. 164; B. 39 (34) ; W. § 13, 1 (56βάπ(ρχομαι)](ϋραμ(ν, Lk. xxiii. 2 Τ Tr WH, 3 pers. plur. dpav, Lk. viii. 35 Tr WH ; Acts v. 10 Tr (in Sept. often eupotrav) ; Pass., pres. (ύρίσκομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing, ινρίσκιτο, Heb. xi. 5 RG, ηί,ρίσκίτο LT Tr WH, (cf. Bleek and DeUtzsch ad loc. [Veitch u. s.]) ; 1 a.OT. (νρίθην, hit. (νρ(θήσομαι; 2 aor. mid. (ίρόμην and later (ϋράμην (Ileb. ix. 12, [cf. reff. above (on 2 aor. act.)]) ; Sept. numberless times for SXD, sometimes for ΤΌΤ\ to attain to, and for Chald. n^E? ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to find ; i. e. 1. \>τογ. to come upon, hit upon, to meet with; a. after searching, to find a thing sought : absol., opp. to ζητ^Ιν, Mt. vii. 7 sq. ; Lk. xi. 9 sq. (fijTfi και (ΰρήσίΐς, Epict. diss. 4, 1, 51) ; Tim, Mt. ii. 8 ; Mk. i. 37 ; Lk. ii. 45 ; Acts xi. 2G (2.j) ; xiii. 22; 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; 2 Tim. i. 17; Rev. xx. 15, etc. ; οίχ^ (ύρίσκιτο, lie had vanished, Heb. xi. 5 ; with a specification of place added : πίμαν w. gen. .in. vi. 25 ; eV w. dat. Acts V. 22 ; (ίρ^θη fir, Acts viii. 40 (see eis, C. 2) ; w. ace. of the thing, Mt. vii. 14 ; xiii. 46 ; xviii. 13 ; Lk. xxiv. 3; Jn. x. 9; Acts vii. 11; Ro. vii. 18 Rec, etc. ; foil, by indir. disc, Lk. v. 1 9 ; οΐχ (ίρίθησαν, had disappeared. Rev. xvi. 20, cf. .xviii. 21 ; v/. dat. of ad- vantage. Rev. XX. 11 ; foil, by ev w. dat. of place, Mt. .xxi. 19; Rev. xii. 8. τικά or τί ζητίϊν κ οΐχ (ίρίσκιιν: Mt. xii. 43 ; x.xvi. CO ; Mk. xiv. 55 ; Lk. xi. 24 ; xiii. G sij.; Jn. vii. 34 ; Rev. ix. 6, (2 K. ii. 17; Xeh. vii. G4 ; Ps. ix. 36 [x. 15]; Eccl. vii. 29; Ezek. xxii. 30; xxvi. 21 Aid. Comp. ; Hos. ii. 7) ; γη καϊ τα ev αντγι fpya ίνρΐ6ί]σίται .■ihall be found sc. for destruction, i. e. will be unable to hide themselves from the doom decreed them by God, 2 Pet. iii. 10 Tr WII, after the strange but improbable reading of codd. ΪΈ and other authorities ; [see 1Γ//. Intr. § 365 and App. ad loc]. b. without previous search, to find (by chance), to fall in with : τινά, Mt. .xviii. 28; .xxvii. 32 ; Jn.i. 41 (42), 45 (46); v. 14; ix. 35; Acts xiii. 6 ; xviii. 2 ; xix. 1 ; xxviii. 14 ; foil, by eV w. dat. of place, Jn. ii. 14. τί, Mt. xiii. 44 ; xvii. 27 ; Lk. iv. 17 ; Jn. xii. 14 ; Acts xvii. 23 ; foil, by ev w. dat. of place, Mt. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 9. c. (ύρίσκω Tti /ά or τι with a prcd. ace. is used of those >vho come or return to a place, the predicate ptcp. or adj. describing the state or condition in which the pers. or thing met with is found, or the action which one is found engaged in : Λν. an adj.. Acts v. 10; 2 Co. ix. 4; xii. 20: Λν. a ptcp. [cf. B. 301 (258)], Mt. xii. 44; xx. 6; xxi. 2: .xxiv. 46 ; xxvi. 40, 43 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; xiii. 36 ; xiv. 37, 40 ; Lk. ii. 12; vii. 10; viii. 35 ; xi.25; xii. 37, 43; xix. 30; xxiii. 2: xxiv. 2, 33; Acts v. 23; ix. 2; x. 27; xxi. 2; xxiv. 12. IS: xxvii. 6: foil, bv κ:ιθύ,ς. Mk. xiv. Ifi: I.k. ίύροκλ.ύ8α}ν 262 ευσχτιμοσνιηι xix. 32 ; xxii. 13 ; foil, by a pred. substantive to which Sirra must be supplied, Acts xxiv. 5 [cf. W. § 45, 6 b. ; B. 304(201)]. 2. \.TO\)U:\\\\\, Ιοβ'κΙ hi/ inquiry, llioughl, exarninalion, scrutini/, observation, hearing ; lo Jind out by practice anil experience, i. e. to see, learn, discover, un- derstand : κατηγιψίαν, Lk. vi. 7 [T Tr t.\t. AVII κατηγο- ρίίκ]; τινά full, by ptep. in the predicate, Acts .\.xiii. -J'J ; by ort, Ilo. vii. 21 ; after an examination (πίφάζα,ν), τινά [τι] w. a i)red. adj. [ptep.]. Rev. iii. 2 ; of a judye : ιΰτιαν ϋανάτην. Acts .\iii. 28 ; αΐτίαν, κακόν, αδίκημα ΐν τινι, Jn. .wiii. 38; .xix. 4, 6 ; Acts xxiii. 9 ; xxiv. 20; after a com- putation, w. an ace. of tlie price or measure, Acts xix. 19 ; xxvii. 28 ; after ileliln'ralion, το τ/ ποιήσωσι, Lk. xix. 48; TO πώς κοΧάσωνται αυτούς. Acts iv. 21. lass, (vpi- σκομαι to lie found, i.e. to he seen, be present: Lk. ix. 36 ((ien. xviii. 31); often like the Ilebr. KSOJ ίο be dis- covered, recognized, detected, to show one's self out, of one's character or state as found out by others (men, God, or both), (cf. W. §65, 8) : ίίρίβη f'v yaaTfA ίχονσα, Mt. i. 18 ; 'tva ίνρΐθώσι καθώς κ• ήμ^ΐς, 2 Co. .\i. 12; cv- pt3q μηι ή evTuXtj f if θάνατον so. οίσα, the commandment, as I found by experience, brouglit death to me, Ro. vii. 10; add, Lk. xvii. 18 (none sliowed themselves as hav- ing returned) ; Acts V. 39; 1 Co. iv. 2; xv. 15; 2 Co. v. 3 ; (jal. ii. Π ; 1 Pet. i. 7 ; Rev. v. 4 ; τινί, dat. of the pers. taking cognizance and judging [W. §31,10; B. 187 (162)], 2 Pet. iii. 14, [add 2 Co. xii. 20, yet cf. B. 1. c. and § 133, 14 ; W. § 31, 4 a.] ; ίνα (Ιριθω ϊναΐτω i. e. iv Χριστώ, sc. ων, Phil. iii. 9 ; σχί]ματι (νρίθΛς i>s άνθρω- πος, Phil. ii. 7 (8), (Joseph, b. j. 3, 6, 1 ; so the Lat. inrenior, Cic. de amic. 19, 70; reperior, Tuscul. i. 39, 94). (νρίσκΐΐν θ(6ν (opp. to ζψ^Ι-ν αυτόν, see ζητΐω, 1 c. [cf. €κζητ€ω, a.]), to get l-noiclidgr of, come to know, God, Acts .xvii. 27 ; (ύμίσκίταί (6 θ(ός) τινι, discloses the knowledge of himself to one. Sap. i. 2 ; cf. Grimm, exgt. Ildb. ad loc. [who refers to Philo, monarch, i. § 5 ; Orig. c. Cels. 7, 42]. On the other hand, in the O. T. (ίρίσκίται 6 θίός is used of God hearing prayer, granting aid im- plored, (1 Chr. xxviii. 9 ; 2 Chr. xv. 2, 4, 15 ; Jer. xxxvi. (xxix.) 13); hence ιύρίθην [L and Tr in br. WII mrg. add ex] To'itf'pe μη ζητοϋσι, Ro. X. 20 fr. Is. l.w. 1, means, ace. to Paul's conception, / granted the knowledge and deliverance of the gospel. 3. Mid., as in Grk. writ., to find for one's self, to acquire, get, obtain, procure : λύτρωσιν, Ileb. i.x. 12; contrary to better Grk. usage, the Act. is often used in the Scriptures in the same sense [cf.B. 193(167); W. 18; 33 (32) n.] : την yjrvxfiv, Mt. x. 39; xvi. 25; άνάπαυσιν (Sir. xi. 19) rah ψνχαΐς υμών, Mt. xi. 29 ; μιτανοίας τόπον, place for recalling the de- cision, changing the mind, (of his father), Ileb. xii. 17 [cf. \V. 147 (139)]; σκήνωμα τω θ(ω. opportunity of building a house for God, Acts vii. 46 ; dp χάριν, grace, favor, Ileb. iv. 16; χάριν πάρα τω θ(ώ. Lk. i. 30 ; ίνώπιον του θ(οϋ, Acts vii. 46 ; ί\(ος παρίι κυρίου, 2 Tim. i. 18; (\ri*,3 ;Π KVD, Gen. vi. 8; xviii. 3; x.\.x. 27; xxxii. 6; Ex. xxxiii. 12; Deut. xxiv. 1, etc.; 1 Esdr. viii. 4). [CoMP. ; άν-{υρίσκω.] «νρο-κλίδων, -ωνος. ό, (fr. fupos the S. E. wind, and κ\ΰδων a wave), a S, E. leind raising mighty waves : Acts xxvii. 14 Rec. But respectable authorities read eipt- κλίδων, ])referred by Griesbach et al., from (ίρΰς broad, and κλίδων, a tcind causing broad waves (Germ, der BreilspUlintle, the Wide-washer); Etyni. Magn. p. 772, 30 s. v. τνφών "τυψώΐ' yi'tp ίστιν ήτοϋ άνίμυυ σφοδρά πνοή, ος και (ΰρυκλυδων KoKeiTai." Others (νρακνΧων, (ΐ. ν.• £ΰρν-χωρθ5, -ον, ((ΰρΰς broad, and χώρα), .'spacious, broad: Mt. vii. 13. (Sept. ; Aristot. h. anim. 10, 5 [p. 637•, 32]; Died. 19, 84; Joseph, antt. I, 18, 2; [8, 5, 3 ; c. Ap. 1, 18, 2].)• fv-a-iPfia, -ας, ή, ((ύσ(βής), reverence, respect; in the Bible e\ery wliere piety towards God, godliness : Acts iii. 1 2 ; 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; iv. 7, 8 ; vi. 5 Sip 1 1 ; 2 Tim. iii. 5 ; 2 Pet. i. 3, 6 sq. ; ή κατ (νσίβ(ΐαν διδασκαλία, the doctrine that promotes godliness, 1 Tim. \ i. ;j [see κατά, II. 3 d.]; ή ύλήθιια ή κατ (ΰσίβ(ΐαν, the truth that leads to godli- ness, 'lit. i. 1 ; TO μυστήριον της ίϋσ(β(ίας, the mystery which is held by godliness and nomishes it, 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; in plur., aims and acts of godliness, 2 Pet. iii. 1 1 ; cf. Pfleiderer, Paulinism. p. 477 sq. [Eng. trans, ii. 209 .sq.]. (Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plat., sqq. ; often in Joseph. ; Sept. Prov. i. 7; xiii. 11 ; Is. xi. 2; Sap. x. 12; often in 4 Mace; προς τοι/ θ(όν, Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 2; \π(ρι το ieioi/] c. Αρ. 1, 22, 2 ; fit θ(οΰς κα'ι γονέας, Plat. rep. 10 p. 615 c.) [Cf. Schmidt eh. 181.] • ίν-σ-ιβίω, -ω; ((ΰσfβήt) ; to be (ίσίβής (pious), to act piously or reverently (towards God, one's country, magis- trates, relations, and all to whom dutiful regard or rev- erence is due) ; in prof. auth. foil, by (ίς, πιρί, προς τίνα ; rarely also trans., as Aeschyl. Ag. 338 (τους θ(ούς) and in the Bible : τοι/ Ίδιον οίκον, 1 Tim. v. 4 ; θ€Ον, to wor- ship God, Acts xvii. 23 ; 4 Mace. v. 24 (23) var. ; xi. 5 ; [Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 11, 1].* (νσ-(βή;, -tr, (d and σίβομαι), pious, dutiful (towards God [A.V. devout, godly^ ; (υσ^βίω) : Acts x. 2, 7; xxii. 12 RG; 2 Pet. ii. 9. "([Theogn.], Pind., Tragg., Ar- stph.. Plat., al. ; thrice in Sept. for 3'nj noble, gener- ous, Isa. xxxii. 8 ; for p'^S, Is. xxiv. 16 ; xxvi. 7 ; often in Sir. and 4 Mace.) [Cf. Trench § xlviii.] * «io-ipMs, .adv., piously, godly: ζην, 2 Tim. iii. 12; Tit. ii. 12. (Pind. [-^c'ws], Soph., Xen., Plat., al. ; 4 Mace, vii. 21 [Fritzsche om.].)* «ϋο-ημο;, -Of, (el and σήμα a sign), well-marked, clear and definite, distinct : "Kiyoi, 1 Co. xiv. 9 [A. V. easy to be understood:]. (Aeschyl., [Soph.], Theophr., Polyb., Pint.) * ίίσττλαγχνοϊ, -ov, (ev and σπλάγχνον, q. v.), prop, hav- ing strong bowels ; once so in Ilippocr. p. 89 c. [ed. Foes., i. 197 ed. Kiihn] ; in bibl. and eccl. lang. compassionate, tender-hearted: Eph. iv. 32 ; 1 Pet. iii. 8 ; prec. Manass. 7 [(see Sept. ed. Tdf. Proleg. § 29) ; Test. xii. Patr. test. Z.ib. § 9 : cf. Ilarnack's note on Herra. vis. 1, 2].• (ΰο-χημίνωϊ, adv., (see (υσχήμων), in a seemly manner, decently: 1 Co. .\iv. 40; π(ριπατ(ΐν, Ro. xiii. 13; 1 Th. iv. 12. (Arstph. vesp. 1210; Xen. mem. 3, 12, 4; Cyr. 1,3,8 sq. ; al.) • ί{σχημ.ο<Γύνη, -ης, ή, ((υσχήμων, q. v.), charm or elegance ευσχήμων 263 ευχαριστεω of figure, external beauty, decorum, modesty, seemliness (Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) ; of external charm, comeliness : 1 Co. xii. 23.* ιΰσχήμων, -ov, (fi, and σχήμα the figure, Lat. habitus) ; 1. of i-lerjanl frpirc, shapely, yraceful, comely, bearing one's self becomingly in speech or behavior, (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat.) : τα (υσχημονα ήμων, the comely parts of the body that need no covering (opp. to τα άσχήμονα ήμων, vs. 23), 1 Co. xii. 24 ; of morals : iipos τό (ΰσχημον, to promote decorum, I Co. vii. 35. 2. in later usage (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 333), of good standing, honorable, in- fluential, iceallhy, respectable, [β.. Y. of honorable estate^'- Mk. .XV. 43; Acts xiii. 50; xvii. 12. (Joseph, de vita sua § 9 ; Plut. parallel. Graec. et Rom. c. 15 p. 309 b.) * cirovws, adv., (fr. evrovos, and this fr. ev and τίίρω to stretch [cf. at full stretch, tcetl strung, etc.]), vehemently, forcibly: Lk. xxiii. 10; Acts xviii. 28. (Josh. vi. 8; 2 Mace. xii. 23; Xen. Hier. 9, 6; Arstph. Plut. 1095; Died., al.) * (ντραπ<λ(α, -as, η, (fr. (ϋτράτΓ(\θ!, fr. (S, and τρίπω to turn ; easily turning; nimble-witted, witty, sharp), pleas- antry, humor, facetiousness, ([Hippocr.], Plat. rep. 8 p. 563 a.; Diod. 15, 6; 20, 63; Joseph, antt. 12, 4, 3; Plut., al.) ; in a bad sense, scurrility, ribaldry, low jesting (in which there is some acuteness) : Eph. v. 4 ; in a mild- er sense, Arist. eth. 2, 7, 13; \_η ^ντραττΐΧία ττ^παιδ^νμΐνη νβρκ €στίν, rhet. 2, 12, 16 (cf. Cope in loc.) ; cf. Trench § xxxiv. ; Matt. Arnold, Irish Essays etc. p. 187 sqq. (Speech at Eton) 1882].* ΕίΙτυχοϊ [i. e. fortunate; on accent cf. W. 51 ; Chan- dler § 331 sq.], -ov, 6, Eutychus, a young man restored to life by Paul : Acts xx. 9.* ίύφημία, -as, ή. (eϋφημos, q. v.), prop, the utterance of good or auspicious tcords ; hence good report, praise : 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to 8υσφημία), as in Diod. 1, 2 [4 ed. Dind.] ; Ael. v. h. 3, 47. (In difE. senses in other auth. fr. Pind., Soph., and Plat, down.) * ίνφημοϊ, -ov, (fS and φήμη), sounding well; uttering words of good omen, speaking auspiciously : neut. plur. (ϋφημα, things spoken in a kindly spirit, with good-will to others, Phil. iv. 8 [A. V. of good report, (R. V. mrg. gracious)']. (In very diverse senses com. in Grk. writ, fr. Aeschyl. down.)* «ν-ψορΕω, -ώ : 1 aor. (υφόρησα (Ixhm. ηϋφόρησα, see reff. in (ϋδοκίω, init.) ; (cC^opor [bearing well]) ; to be fertile, bring forth plentifully : Lk. xii. 16. (Joseph, b. j. 2, 21, 2; Hippocr., Geop., al.)* €ΰψρα(νω ; Pass., pres. ευφραίνομαι', impf. ίνφραινομην (Acts vii. 41, where a few codd. ηΰφρ. [cf. WH. App. p. 162]) ; 1 aor. (νφράνθην and L Τ Tr WH ηΰφρ. (Acts ii. 26 ; see reff. in t ΰδοκί'ω, init.) ; 1 fut. ίϋφρανθήσομαι ; (fu and φρήν) ; in Sept. very often actively for Π^ϋ to make joyful, and pass, for Π3Π to be joyfiJ, sometimes for μ"ΐ to sing; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to glad- den, make joyful : Τίνα, 2 Co. ii. 2 (opp. to Xmrfiv). Pass. to be glad, to be merry, to rejoice: absol., Lk. xv. 32; Acts ii. 26 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 9) ; Ro. xv. 10 (fr. Deut. xxxii. 43) : Gal. iv. 27 (fr. Is. liv. 1) ; Rev. xi. 10 ; xii. 12 ; ei» rtw, to rejoice in, be deUghted with, a thing, Acts vii. 41 (Xen. Hier. 1, 16); eVt rtvi, Rev. xviii. 20 L Τ Tr WH (for Rec. eV αΐτήν) ; of the merriment of a feast, Lk. xii. 19; xv. 23 sq. 29, (Deut. xiv. 25 (26); x.wii. 7); with \aμ■πp<ύs added, to live sumptuously: Lk. xvi. 19 (Horn. (J, UM I'olyb. 8, 14, 8; Add. to Esth. vi. 4 ed. Fritz. ; 2 ilacc. ii. 27; Sir. xxxvii. 11 ; ■πρόί τίνα, Diod. 17, OU; .Joseph, antt. 3, 3. 2. the (jiciiKj of llianks: Acts xxiv. 3 ; for (iod's blessings, 1 Co. xiv. 16; 2 Co. iv. 1.ϋ; Eph. v. 4 (cf. 1 Th. V. IS) ; Phil. iv. 6 ; Col. ii. 7 ; iv. 2 ; 1 Th. iii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 3 Si). ; Rev. iv. 9 ; vii. 12; Λν. dat. of the pers. to whom thanks are given : τω 6(ω (cf. W. §31,3; [H. 180 (lot;)]; KUlmcr§424, 1), 2Co. ix. 11 (toC flioO, Sap. xvi. 28); in phir., 2 Co. ix. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 1.' €ΰχάρΐ(Γτο5, -ov, (d and χαρίζομαι), iiiinilful offacora, grulijul, tliauhful: to God, Col. iii. 15 (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 49; Plut. ; al.); pleasing, agreeable [cf. Eng. grateful in its secondary sense] : fu\api(TT0L Xoyoi, pleasant conver- sation, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 1 ; ui-replable to others, winning: yvinj (ϋχάριστος tyfipii avdpl ^o^av, I*rov. xi. 1 (i ; hheral, lieiiifieint, Diod. IX, 2.S.• «ΰχή, -ijs, ή, {(ϋχομαι), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. α pray- er to Ood : Jas. v. 1.'). 2. a vow (often so in Sept. for 11} and TIJ, also for IIJ consecration, see ά-γνίζω) : (ΰχην ϊχίΐν, to have taken a vow, Acts .xviii. 18; with ίφ' ίηυτών added (see ini, A. I. 1 f. p. 232'), Acts xxi. 23.* (ίίχομαι.; impf. ηνχήμηυ (Ro. ix. 3) and (ΰχόμην (Acts xxvii. 29 Τ Tr, see (νδοκίω init. [cf. Veitcli s. v.; Tilf. I'roleg. p. 121]) ; [1 aor. mid. (ίιξάμην Acts xxvi. 29 Tdf., where others read the opt. -αίμην, depon. verb, cf. AV. § 38, 7]; 1. to prai/ to Gixl (Sept. in this sense for '7^iJi"in and ^Hi') : τω θ(ώ (as very often in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down [cf. W. 212 (199); 15. 177 (1."j4)]), foil. by ace. w. inf.. Acts xxvi. 29 ; προς τον βιάν (Xen. mem. 1, 3, 2; symp. 4, 55 ; often in Sept.), foil, by ace. w. inf. 2 Co. xiii. 7; xnrfp w. gen. of pers., /i;;• one, Jas. v. 16 where L WII txt. Tr mrg. προσ(ί•χ(σθ( (Xen. mem. 2, 2, 10). [Syn. see Ηΐτ-ί'ω, fin.] 2. to wi.ih : τι, 2 Co. xiii. 9 : full, by ace. with inf. 3 Jn. 2, [al. adhere to the re- ligious sense, to prn>i, prni/ for, in both the preceding pass.] ; Acts xxvii. 29 ; ηνχόμην (on this u.'ie of the impf. cf. W. 283 (2;.fi) ; 15. S 139, 1.5 ; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 13]) f'l/Qi, I could wish to be, Ro. ix. 3. [CoMi>. : προσ- fv\opat.1 * '""Xi"l''"'"'S, -ov, (eS and χράομαι), easy to make use of useful: w. dat. of pers. 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; opp. to άχρηστος, Philem. 11 : tU τι, for a thing, 2 Tim. iv. 11. (Diod. 5, 40 ; Sap. xiii. 13 ; προς τι, Xen. mem. 3, 8, 5.) * (ΰ\)ηιχ<'ω, -ώ ; ^f!'■■ι|rvχoς) ; Ιο he of good courage, to be of (I ehnrful spirit: I'liil. ii. 1'). (Joseph, antt. 11, 6, 9; [Poll. 3, 28 § 13.") fin.]; in epitaphs, €ϋψΰχ(ΐ\ i. cj. Lat. hare pia nnima .') ' evioSta, -ας, ή, (fr. (ίώ8ης ; and this fr. ιυ and ί^ω, pf. ίδωία) ; a. astt'sc/.s-meZ/jyTai^traHrc, (Xen., Plat., Pint., lldian., al.) ; metaph. Χρίστου {ύωδι'α ϊσμϊν τω β(ω, i. e. (dropping the fig.) our efficiency in wliii-h the power of Christ himself is at work is well-pleasing to Cod, 2 Co. ii. 15. b. a fragrant OT sweet-smelling tiling, incense: Diod. 1, 84; 1 Esdr. i. 11, etc.; hence ΰσμη (ίω&ίας, an odor of something sweet-smelling, in Sejjt. often for ΠΙΠ'ί'Π""^, an odor of acijuiescence, satisfaction; a sweet odor, spoken of the smell of sacrifices and oblations, Ex. xxix. 18; Lev. i. 9, 13, 17, etc., agreeably to the ancient [anthropopalhic] notion that (iod smells and is pleased with the odor of sacrifices, (ien. viii. 21 ; in the N. T. by a metaphor borrowed from sacrifices, a thing well- pleasing to God: Eph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18, [W. 60.) (562) cf. 237' (222)].• [EuwSCa, -aj, Phil. iv. 2 Rec.•' for Εϋοδία, ([. v.] «ίώνυμοϊ, -ov, {(υ and Άνομα) ; 1. of good name (lies., Pind.), and of good omen (Plat, polit. p. 302 d. ; legg. 6 p. 754 e.) ; in the latter sen.se used in taking auguries; but those omens were euphemistically called (ϋώννμα which in fact were regarded as unlucky, i. e.^ which came from the lef, sinister omens (for which a good name was desired) ; hence 2. left (so fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down): Acts xxi. 3; Rev. x. 2; ί'ξ (Ιωνίμων [cf. W. § 27, 3; § 19 s. v. iefio; B. 89 (78)], on the left hand (to the left) : Mt. xx. 21, 23; xxv. 33, 41 : xxvii. 38; Mk. x. 37 [RG L], 40; xv. 27.* ίφ-άλλομαι ; 2 aor. ptc|). (φαλόμινος L Τ Tr WII; (eVi and Άλημαι, c|. v.) ; fr. Horn, down; to leap upon, spring upon: eVi τίνα, Acts xix. 16 [here RG pres. ptcp.] ; (1 S. X. C; xi. 6; xvi. 13).* ίφ-άτΓοξ [Treg. in Ileb. ϊφ' άπαξ ; cf. Lipsius, gram. Unters. p. 127], adv., (fr. tVi and άπαξ [cf. W. 422 (393) ; B. 321 (275)]), once; at once i. e. a. our all al once: 1 Co. xv. C. b. our once for all: Ro. vi. 10; Ileb. vii. ■27 ; ix. 1 2 ; x. 10. (Lcian., Dio Cas.s., al.) • £ψ€ΐ&ον, see «Vf ϊδον. Έφίσ -ivos, -η, -ov Ephesian : Rev. ii. 1 Rec* ■Εφ€σιο5, -α, -ov, (an) Ephesian, i. e. a native or in- habitant of Ephesus : Acts xix. 28, 34 sq. ; xxi. 29.• Έφ€<Γ05, -ου. ή. Ephesus, a maritime city of Asia Minor, capital of Ionia and, under the Romans, of proconsular Asia [see Ασία], situated on the Icarian Sea between Smyrna and Miletus. Its chief splendor and renown came from the temple of Artemis, which was reckoned one of the wonders of the world. It was binned down B. c. 356 by Ilerostratus, rebuilt at the connuon expense of Greece under the supervision of Deinocrates (Pausan. 7, 2, 6sq.; Liv. 1,45; Plin. h. n.5, 29 (31) ; 36,14(21)), and in the middle of the third century after Christ utterly destroyed by the. Goths. At E|)hesus the apostle Paul founded a very flourishing church, to which great praise is awarded in Rev. ii. 1 sijq. The name of the city oc- curs in Acts xviii. 19, 21, 24 ; xix. 1, 17, 2(j ; xx. 16 sq.; 1 Co. XV. 32; xvi. 8; Eph. i. 1 (where ίΐ/Έφίσω is omitted bv cod. .Sin. and other ancient author., [bracketed by Τ WII Tr mrg. ; see WH. App. ad loc. ; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Ephesians, The Ep. to the]) ; 1 Tim. i. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. 18; iv. 12; Rev. i. 11, and (ace. to G L Τ Tr WII) ii. 1. Cf. Zimmermann, Ephesus im 1. christl. Jahrh., Jena 1874; [Wjjod, Discoveries at Ephesus (1877)].• ΐφΐρρετης 265 «χω ίφ-£υρ£τή9. -οϋ, ό, {ίφενρίσκω to find out), an inventor, contriver, (Anacr. 41 (36), 3; Schol. ad Arstph. ran. 1499) : κακών, Ro. i. 30 {κακωρ dperai, Philo in Flacc. §4 mid.; ό καινών αδικημάτων (ύριτής, ibid. § 10; πάση: κακίαί fipfrijr, 2 JMacc. vii. 31 ; Sejanus facinoruin om- nium rrperlor. Tacit, ann. 4. 11).* ίφ-ημ.€ρ£α, -as, ή. (ΐφημίριοί, -ov, \>y day, lasting or act- ing for a da\-, dail)), a ivurd not found in prof. auth. ; Sept. in Chron. and Nell. ; 1. a service limited to a staled series of days (cf. Germ. Taydiensl, Woclien- dienst) ; so used of tlie service of the priests and Levites : Neh. xiii. 30; 1 Chr. x.w. 8; 2 Chr. .\iii. 10, etc. 2. the class or course itself of priests who for a week at a time performed the duties of the priestly office (Germ. Wbch- nerzunf) : 1 Chr. .xxiii. 6 ; xxviii. 1 3, etc. ; 1 Esdr. i. 2, 15; so twice in the N. T. : Lk. i. 5, 8. For David di- vided the priests into twenty-four classes, each of which in its turn discharged the duties of the office for an en- tire week from sabbath to sabbath, I Chr. xxiv. 4; 2 Chr. viii. 14 ; Neh. xii. 24 ; these classes Josephus calls ηατριαί and ίφημ(ρ18α, antt. 7, 14, 7 ; de vita sua 1 ; Suidas, ϊφψ μ€ρια • η πατριό• Xeyerai δε καΊ η της ημέρας XeiTovpyia. Cf. Frilzsche, Com. on 3 Esdr. p. 12. [BB.DD. s. v. Priests; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. ii. ch. iii.] * 4<|>-ήμ(ρο$, -ην, (i. q. ό eV! ήμ/ραν ων) ; 1. lasting for a f/ny (Find., Hippocr., Plut., Galen.; al.). 2. daily: η τροφή (Diod. 3, 32; Dion. Hah 8, 41 ; Aristid. ii. p. 31t8 [ed. Jebb; 537 ed. Dind.]), Jas. ii. 15." εψιδε, see cne'iSov. (φ-ικνε'ομαι, -οϋμαι : 2 aor. inf. εφικέσβαι ; [fr. Ilom. down]; to come to : άχρι w. gen. of pers. 2 Co. x. 13 ; to reach : Λ τίνα, ibid. 14.* «φ-ί<Γτημι: 2 aor. έπε'στην, ptcp. (πιστός, impv. (πΐστηθι; pf. \iie\>. ίφ(στώς\ to place at, place ujion, place over; in the N. T. only in the mid. [pres. indie. 3 pers. sing. (πί(τταται (for ΐφίστ.), 1 Th. v. 3 Τ Tr WH; see reff. s. V. αφ('ώον~\ and the intrans. tenses of the act., viz. pf. and 2 aor. (see άνίστημι) ; to stand by, be present: Lk. ii. 38; Acts xxii. 20; ΐπόνα> w. gen. of pers. to stand over one, place one's self above, Lk. iv. 39 ; used esp. of per- sons coming upon one suddenly : simply, Lk. x. 40 ; xx. 1; Acts vi. 12; xxii. 13; xxiii. 27; of an angel, Acts xii. 7 ; w. dat of pers.. Acts iv. 1 ; xxiii. 1 1 ; of the advent of angels, Lk. ii. 9 ; xxiv. 4, (of Hephaestus, Lcian. dial, deor. 17, 1 ; freq. of dreams, as Horn. II. 10, 49fi; 23, 106; Hdt. 1, 34; al.) ; w. dat. of place. Acts xvii. 5; foil, by eVi with ace. of place. Acts x. 17; xi. 11; of evils coming upon one : w. dat. of pers., 1 Th. v. 3 [see above] ; enl τιυα, Lk. xxi. 34 (Sap. vi. 9 ; xix. 1 ; Soph. O. R. 777; Thuc. 3, 82). i. q. to be at hand i. e. be ready: 2 Tim. iv. 2, cf. Leo ad loc. (Eur. Andr. 547; Dem. p. 245, 11). to be at hand i. e. impend: of time, 2 Tim. iv. 6. tn come on, of rain. Acts .xxviii. 2. [CoMP. : κατ-, σνν-€φίστημι.~\ * [ίφνίΒιΟϊ, see αΙφνί8ιος.1 'Εφρο(μ or (so R Tr) Έφραίμ [cf. I, I, fin.], (N L Η Έφρ(μ, Vulg. Ephrem, Efrem), Ephraim, prop, name of a city situated ace. to Eusebius eight [but ed. Larsow and Parthey, p. 196, 18, twenty], ace. to Jerome twenty miles from Jerusalem; ace. to Joseph, b. j. 4, 9, not far from Bethel ; conjectured by Robinson (Palest, i. 444 sq. [cf. Bib. Sacr. for May 1845, p. 398 sq.]), Ewald et al. dissenting, to be the same as the village now called et-Taiyibeh, a short day's journey N. E. of Jerusalem : Jn. xi. 54. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. ; Keim iii. p. 7 .sq. [Eng. trans, v. 9: esp. Schi/rer, Gesch. i. 183].' έφφαβά, ephphatha, Aram. ΠΓΐϊΙΠΚ (the ethpaal impv. of the verb ΠΠ?) Hebr. ΠΓΙ^, to open), be thou opened (i. e. receive the power of hearing; the ears of the deaf and the eyes of the blind beingeonsidered as closed) : ^Ik. vii. 34. [See Kautzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 10.] * ί'χθΕϊ and (Rec, so Grsb. in Acts and Heb.) χθϊς (on which forms cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 323 sq. ; [esp. Ruth- erford, New Phryn. p. 370 sq.] ; Bleel•, Br. an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 1000; ^Tdf Proleg. p. 81 ; W. pp. 24, 45; B. 72 (63)]), adv., ve.sVerf/(7// : Jn. iv. 52; Acts vii. 28 ; of time just past, Heb. xiii. 8. [From Soph, down.] • ί'χθρα, -ας. ή, (fr. the adj. (χθρός), enmity: Lk. xxiii. 12; Eph.ii. 14(15), 16; plnr. Gal. v. 20 ; f^flpa (Lclim. (χθρά fern. adj. [Vulg. inimical) ^"S, towards God, Jas. iv. 4 (where Tdf. τω θεώ) ; ei'r Sfav, Ro. viii. 7 ; by meton. i. q. cause of enrnity, Eph. ii. 14 (15) [but cf. Meyer. (From Pind. down.)] * ίχθρίϊ, -ά, -όΐ', (ϊχθος hatred) ; Sept. numberless times for U'lS also for ii", several times for NJID' and Ν3ϋΟ, a hater; 1. passively, Λα /erf, odious, hateful (in Horn, only in tliis sense) : Ro. xi. 28 (opp. to αγαπΎ/τός). 2. actively, hostile, hating and opposing another : 1 Co. xv. 25 ; 2 Th. iii. 15; w. gen. of the pers. hated or opposed, Jas. iv. 4 Lchm. ; Gal. iv. 16, cf. Meyer or Wieseler on the latter pass, used of men as at enmity with God by their sin: Ro. v. 10 (cf. Ro. viii. 7; Col. i. 21 ; Jas. iv. 4) [but many take ϊχθρ. here (as in xi. 28, see 1 above) pas- sively; cf. Meyer]; rfi hiavo'ia, opposing (God) in the mind, Col. i. 21; ίχθρος άνθρωπος, a man that is hostile, a certain enemy, Mt. xiii. 28 ; ό έχθρας, the hostile one (well known to you), i. e. κατ ϊξοχήν the devil, the most bitter enemy of the divine government : Lk. x. 19, cf. Mt. xiii. 39 (and ecch writ.). 6 ΐχθρός (and {χθρός) sub- stantively, enemy [so the word, whether adj. or subst., is trans, in A. V., exc. twice (R. V. once) /"of : ίσχατος (χθρός, 1 Co. .XV. 26] : w. gen. of the pers. to whom one is hostile, Mt. v. 43 sq. ; x. 36 ; xiii. 25 ; Lk. i. [71], 74 ; vi. 27, 35; xLx. 27, 43; Ro. xii. 20; Rev. xi. 5, 12; in the words of Ps. cix. (ex.) 1, quoted in Mt. xxii. 44 ; Mk. xii. 36 ; Lk. xx. 43 ; Acts ii. 35 ; 1 Co. xv. 25 [L br. ; al. om. gen. (see above)]; Heb. i. 13; x. 13. w. gen. of the thing : Acts xiii. 10 ; toC σταυρού τον Χριστοϊι, who given up to their evil passions evade the obligations imposed upon them by the death of Christ, Phil. iii. 18.* «χιδνα, -ης, ή, a viper: Acts xxviii. 3 (Hes., Hdt., Tragg., Arstph., Plat., al.) ; γίννήματα (χι5νών offspring of vipers (anguigenae, Ovid, metam. 3,531), addressed to cunning, malignant, wicked men : Mt. iii. 7 ; xii. 34 ; xxiii. 33 ; Lk. iii. 7.* «χω ; flit, (ξω : inipf. f';(o>», [1 pers. plur. ('χαμ(ν, 2 Jn. €χ(. 266 ^χω 5 Τ Τγ WH], 3 pers. plur. (ΐχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L Τ Tr WH ; Rev. ix. 8 L Τ Tr WH ; but cf. [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38 ; T,lf. Proleg. p. 123; IVH. App. p. 1G5]; B. 40 (35)) and ύχοσαν(_\. Τ Tr WII in Jn. xv. •>■>, 2i ; but cf. Btlm. in 'I'liful. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 Sijq. 491 ; see bis N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Sojili. Lex., lutr. p. 39; Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; 117/. App. p. 1U5; cf. δολίόω]) ; pres. mill. ptcp. (χόμ(>/ο!; to have, — witli 2 aor. act. ίσ)^ον; pf. (σχηκα ; I. Transitively. 1. tn have i. q. to hold; a. lo have (hold) in the hand: τ\ ev rfj χ(ψί, Kev. i. 16 ; vi. 5; X. 2 ; xvii. 4 ; and simply, Rev. v. 8 ; viii. 3, 6 ; xiv. (I, etc.; Heb. viii. 3. b. in the sense of wearini/ (Lat. geslare) ; of garments, arms and the like : το ΐν^υμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατά κ(φαλής (χων, sc. τι, having a cov- ering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. § 130, 5 ; W. § 4 7, k. cf. 594 (552)], 1 Co. xi. 4 ; θώρακας, Kev. ix. 17; μά^^αίρακ, Jn. xviii. 10; add, Mt. xxvi. 7 ; Mk. xiv. 3 ; of a tree having (bearing) leaves, Mk. xi. 13; tV γαστρι (χιιν, sc. ίμβρυον, to be pregnant [cf. W. 594 (552) ; B. 144 (126)], (.see γαστήρ, 2). ^letaph. ev ΐαντω fXfiv τό απόκριμα, 2 Co. i. 9 ; την μαρτυρΐαν, 1 Jn. v. 1 ; cv KapSia (χ(ΐν τινά, to have (carry) one in one's heart, to love one constantly, Phil. i. 7. c. trop. to hare (hold) possession of the mind ; said of alarm, agitating emotions, etc. : ^ιχ€ν αντάς τρόμος κ. (κστασις^ Mk. xvi. 8 (Job x.xi. 6 ; Is. xiii. 8, and often in prof, auth. ; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1294 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 8]). d. to hoid fast, keep : η μνα σου, ην αχον άποκςι- μίνην iv σον8αρίω, Lk. xi-x. 20 ; trop. τον Beov txfiv eV ί'πιγί'ώσίΐ. Ho. i. 28 ; to keep in mind, τας ϊντολάς, Jn. xiv. 21 (see ίντοΧή, sub fin.) ; την μαρτυρΐαν. Rev. vi. 9 ; xii. 1 7 ; xix. 10 ; το μνστηριον της πίστ€ως iv καθαρά σννίΐ- δ^σβι, 1 Tim. iii. 9 ; ί/ποτύπωσιν υγιαινόντων λύγων, 2 Tim. 1. 13. e. to have (in itself or as a consequence), com- prise, involve : ipyov, Jas. i. 4 ; ii. 1 7 ; κόΧασιν, 1 Jn. iv. 18; μισθαποΒοσίαν, Heb. x. 35 (Sap. viii. 16). See exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. p. 1296 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. I. 8 and 10]. f. by a Latinism i. q. aestimo, to re- gard, consider, hold as, [but this sense is still denied by Aleyer, on Lk. as below ; Mt. xiv. 5] : τινά w. ace. of the predicate, ίχι μ( ιταρτιτημίνον, have me excused, Lk. xiv. 1 8 ; Ttva ως προφητην, Mt. xiv. 5 ; .\xi. 26, (ίχ€ΐν ^\αννην κ. Ίαμβρην ώς θ(ονς. Εν. \icod. 5) ; τινά Ιντιμον (see Ιντιμης), Phil. ίί. 29 ; την ψ•υ;^τ}ΐ' μον [(i οπι. μου] τιμίαν (μαντώ, Acts XX. 24 R G ; τινά (ΐς προφητην (a llebr.aism [see fir. Β. IL 3 c. γ. fin.]), for a prophet, Mt. xxi. 46 L Τ Tr AVH, cf. B. § 131, 7 ; τινά, ότι όντως [Τ Tr WII όντως, ότι etc.] ττρο- φήτης ην, Mk. xi. 32, cf. Β. § 151, 1 a. ; [λΥ. § 66, 5 a.]. 2. to have i. q. <ο ο«Ώ, /josses.f ; a. external things such as pertain to property, riches, furniture, utensils, goods, food, etc. : as τον βίον, Lk. xxi. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1 7 ; κτήματα, Mt. xix. 22 ; Mk. x. 22 : θησαυρόν, Mt. xix. 21; Mk. X. 21 ; αγαθά, Lk. .xii. 19; πρό3ατα, I-k. xv. 4; Jn. x. 16; Βραχμάς, Lk. .xv. 8; πλοία, Rev. .xviii. 19; κληρονομίαν, Eph. V. 5; [cf. Mt. xxi. 38 LT TrWlI, where RGicaT i. 15; Rev. xii. 12; (ξουσίαν, see (ξουσίη, passim ; «ipi/fTji/ διά τίνος, Ro. v. 1 (where we must read ίχομ^ν, not ^Tith Τ Tr WII L mrg. (cf. WH. Intr. § 404)] €χωμ€ν) ; ίΚΐυθ^ρΙαν, Gal. ii. 4 ; irvfvpa θ;οϋ, 1 Co. vii. 40 ; πν^ΰμα Χριστού, Ro. viii. 9 : vovv Χριστού, 1 Co. ii. 16 ; ζωήν, Jn. v. 4 " ; x. 10; xx. 31 ; την ζωήν. 1 Jn. V. 12; ζωην αιώνιον, Mt. xi.t. 16; Jn. iii. 15 sq. 36 [cf. W. 206 (249)] ; v. 24, '?9 ; vi. 4 \ 47, 54 : 1 Jn. v. 13 ; i^rayyiKΊaς, 2 Co. vii. 1 : Heb. vii. 6 ; ρ'σθόν, Mt. v. 46 ; vi. 1 ; 1 Co. i.x. 17; τα αιτήματα, the things which we have asked, 1 Jn. v. 15 ; ϊπαινον, Ro. xiii. ■" ; τιμήν, Τη. iv. 44 ; Heb. iii. 3 ; \όγον σοφίας, a reputation f^r wisdom. Col. ii. 23 [see \όγος, I. 5 fin.] : καρπόν, Ro. i. 1." ; vi. 21 sq. ; χάριν, benefit, 2 Co. i. 15 [where Tr mrg. WH txt. χαράν] ; χάρισμα, 1 Co. vii. 7; προσαγωγή-: Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12; άνιίπηυσιν, Rev. iv. 8 ; xiv. 1 1 ; άττοΚαυσΐν τίνος, Heb. xi. 25 ; νρόφασιν, Jn. xv. 22 ; καύχημα, that of which one may glory, Ro. iv. 2 ; Gal. vi. 4 ; καύχησιν, Ro. .xv. 1 7. k. ίχαν τι is used of one on whom something has been laid, on whom it is incumbent as something to be borne, observed, performed, discharged : άνάγισιν, 1 Co. vii. 37 ; ανάγκην foil, by inf., Lk. xiv. 18 ; xxiii. 17 [R L br. Tr mrg. br.] ; Heb. vii. 27 ; xpfiav τινός (see xpfia, 1) ; €νχην €φ' ίαντών, Acts xxi. 23 ; νόμον, Jn. xi.\. 7 ; ivroXjjv, 2 Jn. 5 ; Heb. vii. 5 ; ιπιταγήν, 1 Co. vii. 25 ; Βιακυνίαν, 2 Co. iv. 1 ; ττράξιν, Ro. xii. 4 ; άγωνα, Phil. i. 30 ; Col. ii. 1; ίγκλημα, Acts .xxiii. 29; κρίμα, 1 Tim. v. 12. 1. €χ€ίν τι is used of one to whom something has been i n- trusted: τας κλίϊς, Rev. i. 18; iii. 7; το γλωσσόκομον, Jn. xii. 6 ; xiii. 29. m. in reference to complaints and disputes the foil, phrases are used: ?χω τι [or without an ace, cf. B. 144 (126)] κατά τίνος, ίο have something to bring forward against one, to have some- thing to complain of in one, Mt. v. 23 ; Mk. xi. 25 ; foil, by ότι. Rev. ii. 4 ; ίχω κατά σού 6\ίγα, ότι etc. ib. 14 [here L WH mrg. om. on], 20 [here G L Τ Tr WH om. όλ.] ; «χω τι προς τίνα. Ιο hare some accusation to bring against one. Acts .x.xiv. 19 ; συζήτησιν iv ίαυτο'ις. Acts .xxviii. 29 [Rec.]; ζητήματα προς τίνα, Acts x-xv. 19; λόγοκ (χ(ΐν προς τίνα. Acts xix. 38 ; πράγμα προς τίνα, 1 Co. \i. 1 ; μομφήν προς τίνα. Col. iii. 13 ; κρίματα μ(τά τίνος, 1 Co. vi. 7. η. phrases of various kinds : ΐχ(ΐν τινά κατά πρόσω- πον, to have one before him, in his presence, [A. Υ .face to face ; see πρόσωπον, 1 a.]. Acts x.xv. 16 ; κοίτην ίκ τίνος, to conceive by one, Ro. ix. 10 ; τούτο ΐχ^ις, ότι etc. thou hast this (which is praiseivorthy [cf. λ^'. 595 (553)]) that etc. Rev. ii. 6 ; iv iμoΊ ονκ ?χ« οίδίν, hath nothing in me which is his of right, i. q. no power over me (Germ, er hat mir nichts on), Jn. xiv. 30 ; 5 ίστιν . . . σαββάτου ϊχον όΒάν, a sabbath-day's journey distant (for the distance is something which the distant place has, as it were). Acts i. 12; cf. Kypke ad loc. o. ΐχω with an inf. [W. 333 (313); B. 251 (216)], o. like the Lat. Aaieo ^uorf w. the subjunc, i. q. to be able : ίχω αποδούναι, Mt. xviii. 25 ; Lk. vii. 42 ; xiv. 14 ; τϊ ποι^σαι, Lk. .xii. 4 ; olhkv ιίχον άντιιπΛν, they had nothing to ppose (could say nothing against it). Acts iv. 14 ; κατ ouScfos «ιχί μείζονος όμόσαι. Heb. vi. 13; add, Jn. viii. 3 (Rec); Acts xxv. 26 [cf. B. as above]; Eph. iv. 28; Tit. ii. 8 ; 2 Pet. i. 15 ; the inf. is om. and to be supplied fr. the context : ο ίσχ(ν, sc. ποιήσαι, Mk. xiv. 8 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. V. p. 1297*; [L. and S. s. v. A. HI. 1]. β. is used of what there is a certain necessity for doing : βάπτισμα (χω βαπτισθήναι, Lk. .xii. 50 ; ίχω σοι τι fίπ(Ίv, vii. 40 ; άπαγγίίλαι. Acts x.xiii. 17, 19; λαΧήσαι. 18; καττ/γορ^σαι, Acts xxviii. 19; ποΧΚα γράφιιν, 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 13. II. Intransitively. a. (Lat. me habeo) to hold one's selforfnd one's self so and so, to be in such or such a condition : ίτοίμως ίχω, to be ready, foil, by inf.. Acts x.xi. 13 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 [not WH] : (σχάτως (see €σχάτως), Mk. v. 23 ; κακώς, to be sick, Mt. iv. 24 : viii. 16; is. 12; [xvii. 15 LTrtxt. WH txt.], etc.; καλώ?, to be well, Mk. xvi. 18 ; κοαψότιρον,Ιο be better, Jn. iv. 52 ; πώς. Acts xv. 36 ; iv ίτοίμω, foil, by inf., 2 Co. x. 6. b. impersonally : ίΐΚΚως ίχ(ΐ, it is otherwise, 1 Tim. v. 25 ; όντως. Acts vii. 1 ; xii. 15 ; xvii. 11 ; xxiv. 9; το vit (χον, as things now are, for the present, Acts xxiv. 25 (Tob. vii. 11, and e.xx. fr. later prof. auth. in Kypke, 6ω<Γ 268 ?&)? Observv. ii. p. 1 24 ; cf. Vig. ed. Ilerm. p. 9 ; [cf. \V. 4C3 («32)]). _ III. Mid. ΐχομαί Tivot (in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down), prop. In hold υηβ'χ self to a tiling, to lay hold of a tiling, III (tdhcre or cliiif) to ; to he closeli/ joined to a pers. or thin'j [cf. W. 202 (1!K>) ; B. 192 (ICG sq.), 161 (110)]: Tίas, Vulg. ficiiiiora stduli, conncctoil ividi s:ilvatii)n, or wliicli lead to it, Ileb. vi. 9, where cf. Hleek ; S ίχόμοΌΐ, neiir, (idjoiniiii/, ricii/ld/orinr/, liiinler- ing, next: of place, κωμοπόΧιΐί, Mk. i. 38 (^νησοί, Isocr. paneg. § 9G ; oi ϊχιψ^νοι, nci^^libors, Ildt. 1, 134); of time, rfi ΐχομίνη sc. ήμίμα, tlie following day, Lk. .\iii. 33 ; Acl.s XX. 1."), (1 .Mace. iv. 28; Polyb. 3. 112, 1; 5, 13, 9); with ήμίμα added, Acts xxi. 26; σαββύτω, Acts .\iii. 44 (where R Τ Tr WII txt. ('ρχημίνω) ; ιρκιντω, 1 Maec. iv. 28 (with var. ϊιΐχημ^νω iV.) ; τυϋ (χαμένου crou?, Thuc. 6, 3. [C*)MP. ; «1^, τ:μοσ-αν•, άντ-, άπ-, iV-, e'ff-, κατ-, μ(τ-, ττιιμ-, jTfpi-, trpo-j Ίτροσ-, σνν-, imtp-, ν7:-ίχω.~\ ?us, a particle marking a limit, and I. as a C0N.JUNCTION signifying 1. the tempo- ral terminus ad quem, Idl, until, (Lat. doner, usque diim) ; as in the best writ. a. with an indie, pret., where something is spoken of which continued up to a certain time: Mt. ii. 9 («ω? . . . 'στη [('στάθη L ϊ TrWII]) ; xxiv. 39, (1 Mace. .\. 50 ; Sap. x. 14, etc.). b. Avith άκ and the aor. subjunc. (e(|iiiv•. to the Lat. fiit. perf. ), where it Is left doubtful ivhen that will take place till which it is .said a thing will continue [ef. W. § 42, 5] : ϊσθι «Vfi, «otAKctn-u) σοι, Mt. ii. 13 ; add, v. 18; x. 11 ; xxii. 44; Mk. vi. 10; xii. 36; Lk. xvii. 8 ; xx. 43 ; Acts ii. 3.5 ; Ileb. i. 13; after a negative sentence: Mt. v. 18, 26; x. 23 [T Wlloin. άχ]; xii. 20; xvi. 28; xxiii. 39; xxiv. 34; Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27; xxi. 32; 1 Co. iv. 5; with the aor. subj. Avithoiit the addition of Sv. Mk. vi. 45 RG; xiv. 32 [here Trnu'/.fut.]; Lk.xv.4; [xii. 59TTrWII; xxii. 34 L Τ TrWII]; 2 Th. ii. 7; Ileb. x. 13; Rev. vi. 11 [Rcc. ia,s ου] ; ουκ άνίζησαν ίως Τίλίσθη τα χίλια 'ίτη, s ϊπάν(ΐσιν). d. once Λνϊίΐι the indie, f ut., ace. to an inqirobable readins; in Lk. xiii. 35 : ίως ηξ(ΐ Tdf., ίως tiv iJIfi I.ehm., for R G e'ws ho ^^rf, [but WII (omitting av ηξη !Ίτ() read ίως (Ίπητι; Tr om. άν and br. 17. 5.; cf. B. 231 (199) sq.]. 2. as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, as lonr/ at, while, foil, by the indie, in all tenses, — in the N. T. only in the pres. : tuis ήμίρα ίστίν, .In. ix. 4 [Tr mrg. WII ilirg. ώί] ; ("ω? (L Τ TrWII ώς) το φως (χ(Τ(, Jn. xii. 35 sq., (ίως en φως ΐστιν. Plat. PIkumIo p. 89 c.) ; [Mk. vi. 45 (cf. c. above)]. H. By a usage chiefly later it gets the force of an ΑοΛΈΠΒ, Lat. Η!Ί]ηι• (id: and 1. used of a tempo- ral terminus ad quem, until, (unto) ; a. like a prep- osition, w. a gen. of time [W. § 54, « ; B. 319 (274)] : (ως αώνος, Lk. i. 55 Grsb. (Ezek. xxv. 15 Alex.; 1 {.'hr. xvii. 16; Sir. xvi. 26 Fritz.; .xxiv. 9, etc.); τήί ημίρας, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; xxvii. G4 ; Lk. i. 80 ; Acts i, 22 [Tdf. <%)i] ; l!o. xi. 8, etc.; ώρας, Mt. xxvii.45; Mk. xv. 33; Lk. xxiii. 44 ; της -πεντηκοστής, 1 Co. .xvi. 8 ; τ^Κονς, 1 Co. i. 8 ; 2 Co. i. 13; της σί)μ(ρον sc. ημίρας, Mt. xxvii. 8; τοί νϋν, ΛΙί. xxiv. 21 ; Mk. xiii. 19, (1 Mace. ii. 33) ; χΐιρα ϊως «τω» I'lySoifK. τίσσύρων a widow (who had attained) even unto eighty-four years, Lk. ii. 37 L Τ TrWII; before the η a m e s of i 1 1 u s t r i ο u s in e η by which a period of time is marked: Mt.i.l7; xi.l3; Lk.xvi.lG (whereTTrWH μίχμι) ; Acts xiii. 20; before the names of events: Mt. i. 17 (ίως μ(τηικ(σίας ΰαβυλωΐΌς) : ii. I'l; xxiii. 35; xxviii. 20; Lk. xi. 51 ; Jas. v. 7 ; (ως τον (λθ(1ν, Acts viii. 40 [Β. 266 (228); cf. W. § 44, 6 ; .ludith i. 10; xi. 19, etc.]. b. with the gen. of the neul. rel. pron. oJ or oTou it gets the force of a conjunction, until, till (the time when) ; a. ίως ου (first in Ildt. 2, 143 ; but after that only in later aiitli., as Plut. et al. [W. 296 (278) note; B. 230 sq. (199)]) : foil, by the indie., Mt. i. 25 [WH br. ου]; xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21; Acts xxi. 26 [B. 1. e.]; foil. by the subj. aor., equiv. to Lat. fiit. pf., Mt. xiv. 22 ; xxvi. 36 (where AVH br. ου and I. chin, has ίως ου ίΐν) ; Lk. xii. 50 [Rec. ; xv. 8 Tr WII] ; xxiv. 49 ; Acts xxv. 21 ; 2 Pet. i. 19 ; after a negative sentence, Mt, xvii. 9 ; Lk. xii. 59 [RGL; xxii. 18 TrWII]; Jn. xiii. 38; Acts xxiii. 12, 14, 21. β. ίως ότου, αα. until, till (the time when) : foil, by the indie., Jn. ix. 18; foil, by the subj. (without Sv), Lk. xiii. 8 ; xv. 8 [R G L T] ; after a negation, Lk. -xxii. 16, 18 [RGLT]. ββ. as long as, u-hilst (Cant. i. 12), foil, by the indie, jires., Mt. v. 25 (see ίίχρι, 1 d. fin.). c. before adverbs of time (rarel)• so in the earlier and more elegant writ., a» (ως ΰψ-ί. Time. 3, 1 08 ; [cf. W. § 54, G fin. ; B. 320 (275)]) : ίως άρτι, up to this time, until now [Λ^ig. ed. IIen7i. p. 388], Mt. xi. 12; Jn. ii. 10; v. 1 7 ; xvi. 24 ; 1 Jn. ii. 9 ; 1 Co. iv. 1 3 ; viii. 7 ; xv. G ; ΐως ware; how long f Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; Jn. X. 24 ; Kev. vi. 10, (Ps. xii. (xiii.) 2 sq.; 2 S. ii. 26 ; 1 Mace. vi. 22) ; ίως σήμιρον, 2 Co. iii. 15. 2. acc. to a usage dating fr. Aristot. down, employed of the local terminus ad (juem, unto, as far as, even to; a. like a prep., with a gen. of place [W. § 54, G ; B. 319 (274)] : (ως abov, (ως του ουρανού, Mt. xi. 23; Lk. x. 15; add, Mt. xxiv. 31; xxvi. 58; Mk.xiii.27; Lk.ii.l5; iv. 29 ; Acts i. 8; xi. 19, 22; xvii. 15; xxiii. 23; 2 Co. xii. 2; with gen. of pers., to the place where one is : Lk. iv. 42 ; Acts ix. 38, (ίως Ύπ(ρβορ4ων, Ael. v. h. 3, 18). b. with ad- verbs of [ilace [W. and B. as in c. above] : ίως ϊίνω, Jn. ii. 7; ίως ίσω, Mk. xiv. 54; ίως κάτω, Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. XV. 38 ; ίως Ue, Lk. xxiii. 5 [cf. W. § 66, 1 c.J. c. ivith prepositions : ίως ίξω της πόΧίως, Acts .xxi. 5 ; ίως (Ίς. Lk. xxiv. 50 [RGL mrg., but L txt. Τ TrWII (ως πρής as far as ίο (Polyb. 3, 82, 6 ; 12,17,4; Gen. xxxviii. 1)]; Polyb. 1. 11, 14; Ael. v. h. 12, 22. 3. of the limit (terminus) of cjuantity; with an adv. of number: ίως ίπτάκις, Mt. xviii. 21 ; with numerals: Mt. ΖΛ 269 ξπΜ .Txii. 26 (evas the son of Bara- chiah (cf. Zech. i. 1), and whose jirophecics have a ]jlace in the canon. For Christ, to prove that the Israelites throughout their sa red history had been stained with the innocent blood of righteous men, adduced the first and the last example of the murders connnitted on good men ; for the bks. of the Chron. stand last in the Hebrew canon. But rpinions differ about this Zachariah. For according to an ancient tradition, which the Greek church follows (and which has been adopted by C/ir. W. MilUer in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1841, p. 673 sqq., and formerly by Ililr/enfeliJ. krit. L'ntersuchungen iib. die Evangg. Justins, etc., p. 1.">.J and die Evangg. nach ihrer Kntstehung, p. 100), Zachariah the father of John the Baptist is meant (cf. Protcv. Jac. c. 23); others think (so quite recently Keim, iii. 184 [Eng. trans, v. 218], cf. Weisr, das Matthauscvang. p. 4'.)9) a certain Zachariah son of Baruch (ace. to anotlicr reading Βαρισκαίου). wlio during the war between the Jews and the Rouiaus was slain by the zealots ev μίσω τω iepa. as Jo?e|ih. b. j. 4, 5, 4 relates. Those who hold this opinion believe, either diat Jesus di\inely predicted this murder and in the prophetic style said ίφονήσατί for φον(ΰσ(τί [cf. B. §137,4; W. 273 (250) n.; §40,5 b.], or that the Evango- list, writing after the destruction of Jerusalem, by an anachronism jnit this murder into the discourse of Jesus. These inventions are fully refuted by Fritzsc/ie on Mt. 1. c, and Bleek, Erkliir. der drei ersten Evangg. ii. p. 177 sίΰ μάτι, fervent in spirit, said of zeal for what is good, Acts xviii. 25 ; Ro. xii. 1 1 ; cf. esp. RUckert and Fritzsche on Ro. 1. c* ζηλ(νω; i. q. ζηλόω, q. v. ; 1. to envy, be jealous: Simplicius in Epict. c. 26 p. 131 ed. Salmas. [c. 19, 2 p. 56, 34 Didot] ον^ΐΧ^των τ ά•γιιθοντ6 άνθρώτνίνον ζητουντων φθονίΐ η ζηΚιίίΐ ποτί. 2. in a good sense, to imitate eniulousli/, strive after: tpya άρ€της, ov Xoyovs, Democr, ap. Stob. flor. app. 14, 7, iv. 384 ed. Gaisf. ; intrans. to be full of zeal for (joo/l, be zealous: Rev. iii. 19 LTTr txt. Wli, for Rec. ζήλωσον [cf. WH. App. p. 171].• ζήλο?, -ου, 6, and (in Phil. iii. 6 L Τ Tr WH ; [2 Co. ix. 2 Τ Tr WII]) TO ζήλος (Ignat. ad Trail. 4 ; διό ζήλος, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4, 8 [" in Clem. Rom. §§ 3, 4, 5, 6 the masc. and neut. seem to be interchanged without any law " (Lghtft.). For facts see esp. Clem. Rom. ed. 2 Hilgenfeld (1876) p. 7; cf. WH. App. p. 158 ; W. § 9, N. 2; B. 23 (20)]; (fr. ζ^ω [Curtius § 567; Vanidek p. 757]) ; Sept. for nXJP ; excitement of mind, ardor, fervor of spirit ; 1. zeal, ardor in embracinrj, pursuing, de- fending anything : 2 Co. vii. 11; ix. 2 ; κατά ζηλης, as re- spects zeal (in maintaining religion), Phil. iii. 6; with gen. of the obj., zeal in behalf of for a pers. or thing, Jn. ii. 17 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10; Ro. x. 2, (1 Mace. ii. 58; Soph. O. C. 943) ; vnep tivos, gen. of pers., 2 Co. vii. 7 ; Col. iv. 13 Rec. with subject, gen. ζήλω θιοΰ, with a jealousy such as God has, hence most pure and solicitous for their salvation, 2 Co. xi. 2 ; the fierceness of indignation, punitive zeal, trvpos (of penal fire, which is personified [see ττϋρ, fin.]), Ileb. x. 27 (Is. xxvi. 11; Sap. V. 18). 2. an envious and contentious rivalry, jealousy : Ro. xiii. 13 ; 1 Co. iii. 3 ; Jas. iii. 14, 16 ; tVAij- σθησαν ζήλου, Acts v. 17; xiii. 45 ; plur. ζήλοι, now the stirrings or motions of ζήλος, now its outbursts and man- ifestations : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; Gal. v. 20 ; but in both pass. L Τ Tr [WH, yet in Gal. 1. c. WH only in txt.] have adopted ζήλος (ζήλοι re και φθόνοι. Plat. legg. 3 p. 679 c). [On the distinction betiveen ζήλος (which may be used in a good sense) and φθόνος (used only in a bad sense) cf. Trench, Syn. § xxvi.; Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 11, I (Bio κα\ cVifiKt'f (OTiv ό ζήλος και (πκικων, τό δί φθονι'ιν φανλον καΐ φαύλων).]* ζηλόω, -β ; 1 aor. ΐζήλασα ; pres. pass. inf. ζηλοϋσθαι ; \ζήλος, q. ν.) ; Sept. for KJP ; to burn with zeal; 1. absol. to be heated or to boil [A.V. to be movetT] tvith envy, hatred, anger : Acts vii. 9 ; xvU. 5 (where Grsb. om. ζηλώσ.) ; 1 Co. xiii. 4 ; Jas. iv. 2 ; in a good sense, to be zealous in the pursuit of good, Rev. iii. 19 RGTrmrg. (the aor. ζήλωσον marks the entrance into the mental state, see βασιλ(ΰω, fin. ; (ζήλωσ^, he was seized with indignation, 1 Mace. ii. 24). 2. trans.; τί, to desire earnestly, pursue: 1 Co. xii. 31 ; xiv. 1, 39, (Sir. Ii. 18; Thuc. 2, 37; Eur. Hec. 255 ; Dem. 500, 2; al.) ; μάλλον 8e, sc. ζηλούτ(, foil, by ti-a, 1 Co. xiv. 1 [B. 237 (205); cf. W.577(537)]. τινά, a. to desire one earnestly, to strive afier, busy one's self about him : to exert one's self for one (that he may not be torn from me), 2 Co. xi. 2 ; to seek to draw over to one's side, Gal. iv. 17 [cf. Γχα, II. 1 d.]; to court one's good will and favor, Prov. xxiii. 1 7 ; xxiv. 1 ; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1 ; so in the pass, to be the object of the zeal of others, to be zealously sought after: Gal. iv. 18 [here Tr mrg. ζηλοΐ,σθί, but cf. WH. Intr. § 404]. b. to envy one: Gen. xxvi. 14; xxx. 1 ; xxxvii. 11; Hes. opp. 310; Horn. Cer. 168, 223 ; and in the same sense, ace. to some interpp., in Acts vii. 9 ; but there is no objection to considering ^77λώσαι/τεΓ here as used absol. (see 1 above [so A.V. (not Η.Λ^)]) and τον'ίωσήφ as depending on the verb άπίδοντο alone. [COMP. : rrapa- ζηλόω.]* ζηλωτή?, -oC, ό, (ζηλόω), one burning tvith zeal ; a zealot ; 1. absol., for the llebr. S3P, used of God as jealous of any rival and sternly vindicating his control : Ex. xx. 5 ; Deut. iv. 24, etc. From the time of the Maccabees there existed among the Jews a class of men, called Zealots, who rigorously adhered to the Mosaic law and endeavored even by a resort to violence, after the ex- ample of Phinehas (Num. xxv. 11, ζηλωτής Φιι /ee's 4 Mace, xviii. 12), to prevent religion from being violated by others ; but in the latter days of the Jewish common- wealth they used their holy zeal as a pretext for the basest crimes, Joseph, b. j. 4, 3, 9 ; 4, 5, 1 ; 4, 6, 3 ; 7, 8, 1. To this class perhaps Simon the apostle had belonged, and hence got the surname ό ζηλωτής: Lk. vi. 15; Actsi. 13; [cf. Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch., Index s. v. Zeloten ; Edersheim, Jesas the Messiah, i. 237 sqq.]. 2. with gen. of the obj. : w. gen. of the thing, most eagerly desirous of, zealous for, a thing ; a. to acquire a thing, [zealous o/] (see ζηλόω. 2) : 1 Co. xiv. 12; Tit. ii. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 13 L Τ Tr Wll, (άρβτής, Philo, praem. et poen. § 2 ; τής (ΰσ€β€ίας, de monarch. 1. i• § 3 ; (ΰσ(β(ίας κ- δικαιοσύνης, de poenit. § I ; των πολεμικών ΐργων, Diod. 1, 73; rrtpl των ανηκόντων fit σωτηρίαν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 45, 1). b. to defend and uphold a thing, vehemently contend- ing for a thing, [zealous fori : νόμου, Acts xxi. 20 (2 Mace. iv. 2) ; των πατρικών παραδόσίων, Gal. i. 14 (των αιγχηττιακών πλασμάτων, Philo, vit. ^loys. iii. § 19 ; τής αρχαίας κ. σώφρονος άγίύγής, Diod. e.xcerpt. p. 611 [fr. 1. 37, vol. ii. 564 Didot]) ; w. gen. of pers. : flfoC, intent on protecting the majesty and authority of God by contend- ing for the Mosaic law. Acts xxii. 3. (In prof. auth. also an emulator, admirer, imitator, follower of any one.)' ζημία, -iot), 8.' ζημιό», -ώ ; (ζημία), (ο affect with damage, do damar;e Id : τίκά ([Tliiic], Xeii., Plat.) ; in the N. T. only in Pass., fut. ζημιωθήσημαι ([Xcn. luem. .i, 9, 1 ■>, a\. ; but '• as often"] in prof. aulh. [fut. mill.] ζημιώσομαι in pass, sense; cf. Kniger § 39, 11 Auni. ; Kuliner on Xen. mem. u. s.; [L. and S. s. v.; Veitch s. v.]) ; 1 aor. (ζημιά- θην ; absol. Ιο suslain damage, to receive injury, suffer loss : I Co. iii. 15 ; tv nin ίκ rivos, in a thing from one, 2 Co. vii. 9 ; with ace. of tlie tiling : (one from whom another is taken away [as a penalty] by death, is said την ψυχήν τιΐΌϊ ζημιοϋσθαι, lldt. 7, 39), την ^Ιτνχην αϋτον, to forfeit his life, i.e. ace. to the context, eternal life, Mt. xvi. 2(i ; Mk. viii. 3(i, foi• which Luke, in i.x. 25, tauTOv i. e. him- self, by bcini slmt out from the everlasting kingdom of God. πάντα ϊζημιώθην, retlexive [yet see Meyer], I for- feited, gave up all things, I decided to suffer the loss of aU these [(?)] tilings, Phil. iii. 8.• Ζτ,νά3 [ef. 1{|.. l/.'htft. on Col. iv. 1.5 ; W. § 16 N. 1], -av, [B. 20 (!•*>)]. 0, Zdiik, at first a teacher of the Jewish law, afterwards a Christian: Tit. iii. 13. [B.D. s. v.]* ζητί'ω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. sing, (ζήτα, plur. ΐζήτουν; fut. ζητήσω: 1 aor. (ζήτησα; Pass., pres. ζητούμαι : impf. 3 ]iers. sing. ϊζητιΊτο (Ileb. viii. 7); 1 fut. ζητηθήσομαι (Lk. xii. 48); [fr. llom. on]; Sept. for vyi, and much oftener for Β?'Γ)3 ; to seel; i. e. 1. to seek in order to tinil ; a. imiv. and absol. : ^It. vii. 7 srp ; Lk. xi. 9 sq. (see ίνρίσκω. 1 a); τιι/ά, Mk. i. 37: Lk. ii.[4oRLrarg.],48: [iv. 42 Roc.]; Jn. vi. 24; xviii. 4, 7; Acts x. 19, and often ; foil, by iv w. dat. of place, Acts ix. 11 ; w. ace. of the thing (μαμ-^αμίταί), of buyers, Jit. xiii. 43 ; something lost, Mt. xviii. 12 ; Lk. xix. 10; τϊ ev τίνι, as fruit on a tree, Lk. xiii. 6 stj. ; άνάπανσιν, a jjlace of rest, Jit. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 21; after the Ilebr. {"3 iVarriK u;p3 [cf. \V. 33 (32) ; 18]) ■^υχήν tivos, to seek, plot against, the life of one, Mt. ii. 20 ; Ro. xi. 3, (Ex. iv. 19, etc.) ; univ. Ti frjTfti; what dost thou seek? what dost thou wish? Jn. i. 38 (39) ; [iv. 27]. b. to seek [i. e. in order to find oul\ hji lliiiilinfi, meditating, reasoning; to inquire into: ffep! TiVor ζητ(Ίτ( μιτ αΚ\ή\ων•, Jn. xvi. 19; foil, by indi- rect disc, σώί, τ'ί, Tim: -Mk. xi. 18; xiv. 1, 11 ; Lk. xii. 29 ; xxii. 2 ; 1 Pet. v. 8 ; τύι/ θ(όν, to follow up the traces of divine majesty and power, Acts xvii. 27 (univ. to seek the knowledge of God, Sap. i. 1 ; xiii. 6 ; [Philo,monaroh. i. § 5]). c. to seek after, seek for, aim at, strire afer: (ΰκαψίαν, Mt. x.\vi. 16; Lk. xxii. 6; ^f υδομαρτ-υρίακ, Mt. xxvi. 59 ; Mk. xiv. 55 ; τόκ θάνατον, an (){)portunity to die. Rev. ix. 6; Χύσιν, 1 Co. vii. 27; την βασΛ. τοϋ θ(οΰ, Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31 ; τα άκω. Col. iii. I : (Ιμήνην. 1 Pet. iii. I I : άφθαρσΐαν etc. Ro. ii. 7 ; Βόξαν ίκ Ttvos, 1 Th. ii. 6 : τήν So^av τήν πα\ιά τίνος, Jn. v. 44 : τά Ttvos. the property of one. 2 Co. xii. 14 ; τήν Βόξαν β(οΰ, to seek to promote the glory of (tod, Jn. vii. 18 ; viii. 50 ; τό θίλημά tivos, to at- tempt to establish. Jn. v. 30 ; το σύμφορόν twos, to seek to further the profit or advantage of one, 1 Co. x. 33, i. q. ζητ(Χν τά Tivof. ib. X. 24 ; xiii. 5 ; Phil. ii. 21 ; υμάί, to seek to win your souls, 2 Co. xii. 14 ; τ6ν θιό», to seek the favor of God (see ('χζητϊω, ά.), Ro. χ. 20; [iii. 11 Trmrg. AVM mrg.]. foil, by inf. [B. 258 (222) ; \V. § 44, 3] to seek i. e. desire, endeavor: Mt. xii. 46, [47 (Wll in mrg. only)]; xxi. 46; Mk. [vi. 19LTrmrg.]; .xii. 12; Lk. v. 18; vi. 19; i.\. 9; Jn. v. 18; vii. 4 [B. § 142, 4], 19 S(|.; Acts xiii. 8: xvi. 10; Ro. .X. 3; Gal. i. 10; ii. 17; foil, by Ίνα [Β. 237 (205)], 1 Co. xiv. 12. 2. to seek i. e. require, demand: [σημιΐον, Mk. viii. 1 2 L Τ Tr WII ; Lk. xi. 29 Τ Tr WIT] ; σοφίαν, 1 Co. i. 22 ; δοκιμήν, 2 Co. xiii. 3 ; τΐ παμά tivos, to crave, demand something from some one, Mk. viii. 11 ; Lk. xi. 16; xii. 48 ; tv tiw, dat. of pers., to seek in one i. e. to reiiuire of him, foil, by Ίνα, 1 Co. iv. 2. [CoMP. : ava-, iV-, «Vi-. σν-ζητίω.^ ζήτημα, -ros, τό, ( ζητ(ω), a question, debate : Acts xv. 2 ; xxvi. 3 ; νόμου, about the law. Acts xxiii. 29 ; πίρί tihos, Acts xviii. 15; xxv. 19. [From Soph, down.]* ζήτησίί, -«us, ή, ( ζητίω) ; a. a seeking : [lldt.], Thuc. 8, 57; al. b. inquiry (Germ, die Frage) : ττίρί T-jvor, Acts xxv. 20. c. a questioning, debate : Acts xv. 2 (for Rec. cri>fi)TT;CTit) ; 7 Τ Tr txt. WH ; rtfpi tivos, Jn. iii. 25. d. a subject of questioning or debate, mutter of controversy; 1 Tim. i. 4 R V, L ; vi. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; Tit. iii. 9.• ζιζάνιον, -ου, τό, (doubtless a word of Semitic origin ; Arab. M'jV i^yi". i^W^} [see .S^c/iOf?/, Lex. s. V. p. 148], Talmud ]"Jir or ["Jli; Suid. ζίζάνίον ή tv τω σ/τω αίμα), zizanium, [Α. V. tares'], a kind of darnel, bastard wheat [but see reff. below], resembling wheat except that the grains are black: Mt. xiii. 25-27, 29 sq. 36, 38, 40. (Geop. [for reff. see B. D. Am. ed. p. 3177 note]). Cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Lolch ; Furrer in .Schenkel B. L. iv. 57 ; [B.D., and Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, s. v. Tares].* Ζμίρνο, so Tdf. in Rev. i. 11. etc., for Σμύρνα, q. v. Ζοροβάβίλ, in Joseph. Ζοροβά;ίη\ος, -ου. ό, ('733"JI , i. e. cither for '753ίτ; dispersed in Babylonia, or for '733 i'lll begotten in B.abylonia), Zerubbabel, Vulg. Zorobabel, a descendant of David, the leader of the first colony of the Jews on their return from the Babylonian exile : Mt. i. 12 sq. ; Lk. iii. 27.• ζόψοΐ, -ου, ό, (akin to γνόφο!, δνόφοί, νίφος, κνίφας. see Btlm. Lexil. ii. p. 2G6 [Fishlake's trans, p. 378]; cf. Ciir- tius p. 706), darkness, blackness: Heb. xii. 18 L Τ Tr WII;asinHom.Il. 15,191 ; 21,56, etc., used of the dark- ness of the nether world (cf. Grimm on Sap. xvii. 14), 2 Pet. ii. 4 ; Jude 6 ; ζΰφο! τοΰ σκότου! (cf. n'72N-:|tyn, Ex. X. 22), the blackness of (i. e. the densest) darkness, 2 Pet. ii. 17; Jude 13. [Cf. Trench § c] * ξιτγόϊ, -οϋ, ό, for which in Grk. writ, before Polyb. τά ζυγόν was more com., (fr. ζ(ϋγννμι); 1. a yoke; a. prop, such as is put on draught-cattle. b. metaph. used of any burden or bondase : as that of slavery, 1 Tim. vi. 1 (Lev. xxvi. 13), δηνλίΐαί. Gal. v. 1 (Soph. Ai. 944; SouXoauwjr, Dem. 322, 12); of troublesome laws imposed on one, esp. of the Mosaic law. Acts xv. 10; Gal. V. 1 ; hence the name is so transferred •.o the com- mands of Christ as to contrast them with the commands of the Pharisees which were a veritable 'yoke'; yet ζύμη 273 ζωή even Christ's commands must be submitted to, though easier to be kept : Mt. xi. 29 sq. (less aptly in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 16, 17 Christians are called ot νπο τον ζvy6v ttj! χάριτο! (Κθόντα [cf. Harnack ad loc.]). 2. u balance, pair of scales : Rev. vi. .5 (as in Is. ,\1. 12; Lev. xix. 36; I'lat. rep. 8, 550 e. ; Ael. v. h. 10, 6 ; al.).* ζύμη, -ης, ή, {ζ^ω [but cf. Curtius p. 62U sq. ; Vanicek, p. 760]), leaceit : Mt. .\iii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 21, (Ex. xii. 15; Lev. ii. U ; Deut. xvi. 3, etc. ; Aristot. gen. an. 3, 4 ; Jo- seph, antt. 3, 10, 6; Plut. mor. p. 2s9 s([. [(juaest. Rom. 103j) ; Toil SpTov, Mt. xvi. 12; metaph. of inveterate mental and moral corruption, 1 Co. v. [7], 8, (Ignat. ad Magnes. 10); viewed in its tendency to infect others, ζύμη των ΦαρισαΙων: Mt. xvi. 6, 11 ; Mk. viii. 15; Lk. xii. 1, which fig. Mt. xvi. 12 explains of the teaching of the Phar., Lk. 1. c. more correctly [definitely ?] of their hypocrisy. It is applied to that which, though small in ([uantity, yet by its influence thoroughly pervades a thin"• : either in a good sense, as in the parable ^It. xiii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 21, (see ζνμόω) ; or in a bad sense, of a per- nicious influence, as in the proverb μικρά ζνμη ολοκ τό φν^ιαμα ζυμοΐ α Utile leacen leaveneth the wltule lump, which is used variously, ace. to the various things to which it is appUed, viz. a single sin corrupts a whole church, 1 Co. V. 6 ; a slight inchnation to error (respecting the necessity of circumcision) easily perverts the whole con- ception of faith. Gal. v. 9 ; but many interpp. explain the passage ' even a few false teachers lead the whole church into error.' * |υ|ΐόω, -ώ ; 1 aor. pass, ίζνμώθην ; (ζνμη) ; to leaven (to mix leaven with dough so as to make it ferment) : 1 Co. T. 6 ; Gal. v. 9, (on which pass, see ζύμη) ; «or ΐζυμώθη όλον, sc. TO SXevpov, words which refer to the saving power of the gospel, which from a small beginning will gradually pervade and transform the whole human race: Ht. xiii. 33 ; Lk. xiii. 21. (Sept., Hipp., Athen., Plut.) * ζω-γρεω, -ώ ; pf. pass. ptcp. (ζωγρημίνος : (ζωΟ! alive, and α-γρίω [poet, form of άγρίΰω, ([. v.j) ; 1. to take eZue (Ilom., Udt., Thuc, Xen., al. : Sept.). 2. univ. to lake, catch, capture : ΐζω-γρημίνοι υπ αίτοϋ (i.e. τοϋ δια- βόλου) fls το sKeivov θίΚημα, if they are held captive to ido his will, 2 Tim. ii. 26 [al. make cf. νπ αΰτ. paren- thetic and refer exflvov to G ο d ; see ixdvot, 1 c. ; cf. EUic. in loc] ; ανθρώπους ?σΐ) ζωγρών, thou shalt catch men, L e. by teaching thou shalt win their souls for the king- dom of God, Lk. v. 10.* ζωή, -^f , ή, (fr. ^άω, ζω), Sept. chiefly ίορΟ^'Π; life; 1. univ. life, i. e. the slate of one who is possessed of vital- it// or is animate : 1 Pet. iii. 10 (on which see ά-γαπάω) ; Ileb. vii. 3, 16 ; αντος (ό ^«of) didovs πάσιν ζωην #c. πνοην. Acts xvii. 25 ; πνινμα ζωής ίκ τού if οΰ, the vital spirit, the breath of (i. e. impartint;) life. Rev. xi. 11 (Ezek. xxxvii. 5) ; πάσα ψνχη ζωής, gen. of possess.,ei'er^ living soul. Rev. xvi. 3 (ί L Τ Tr txt. Wll ; spoken of earthly life: 17 ^ωή TiiOs, Lk. xii. 15; Acts viii. 33 (see αίρω, 3 h.); tfas. iv. 14 ; iv rij ζωή σον, whilst thou wast Uving on earth, Lk. xvi. 25 (c'v rj ^ω^ αϋτοϋ. Sir. xxx. 5: 1. 1); f'v τη ζωη ταντΊ], 1 Co. Χ v. 19: ττάσαι at ημίραί της ζωής τίνος. Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. iii. 14; Ps. cxxvii. (cxxviii.) 5 ; Sir. xxii. 12 (10)). ('παγγίλία ζωής της vvv κ. τής μιΚΚοϋσης, a promise looking to the present and the future life, 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; ζωή and θάνατος are contrasted in Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; Phil. i. 20 ; of a life preserved in the midst of perils, with a suggestion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 12 (the life of Paul is meant here, which exerts a saving power on the Corinthians by his discharge of his apostolic duties) ; of the life of persons raised from the dead : e» καινότητι ζωής, figuratively spoken of a new mode of life, dedicated to God, Ro. vi. 4 ; of the life of Jesus after his resurrection. Acts ii. 28; Ro. v. 10; of the same, with the added notion of vigor, 2 Co. iv. 10 sq. 2. used emphatically, a. of the absolute fulness of life, both essential and ethical, which belongs to God, and through him both to the hypostatic λόγος and to Christ in whom the λόγοΓ put on human nature : ωσπιρ 6 πατήρ ίχ(ΐ ζωήν ίν (αντώ, οΰτως ΐ8ωκ(ν καί τώ νΐω ζωήν (χ^ιν €v ίαντω, Jn. ν. 26 ; ίν αυτώ (sc. τω λύγω) ζωή ην και η ζωή ην το φως τώ» ανθρώπων, in him life was (comprehended), and the life (transfused from the Logos into created natures) was the lifht (i. e. the intelligence) of men (because the life of men is self-conscious, and thus a fountain of intelligence springs up), Jn. i. 4 ; ό Χόγος της ζωής, the Logos having life in itself and communicating it to others, 1 Jn. i. 1 ; ή ζωή (φαν^ρώθη, was manifested in Christ, clothed in flesh, ibid. 2. From this divine fountain of life flows forth that life wliich is next to be defined: viz. b. life real and genuine, " vita quae sola vita nominanda" (Cic. de sen. 21, 77), α life active and vigorous, devoted to God, blessed, the portion even in this world of those who put their trust in Christ, but afier the resurrection to be consummated by new accessions (among them a more perfect body), and to last forever (the writers of the O. T. have anticipated the conception, in their way, by em]iloying D"n to de- note a happy life and every kind of blessing : Deut. xxx. 15, 19; Mai. ii. 5; Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Prov. viii. 35 ; xii. 28, etc.) : Jn. vi. 51, 63 : xiv. 6 ; Ro. vii. 10 ; viii. 6, 10; 2 Co. ii. 16 ; PhU. ii. 16 : [Col. iii. 4] ; 2 Pet. i. 3 ; 1 Jn. V. 11, 16, 20; with the addition of τοϋ θίοΰ, sup plied by God [λΥ. 186 (175)], Eph. iv. 18; ή iv Χριστώ, to be obtained in fellowship with Christ, 2 Tim. i. 1 ; μ€ταβ(βηκ€ναι €Κ τον θάνατον fi'ff ^ωι^ΐ', Jn. v. 24 ; 1 Jn. 111. 14; όψίσθαι τήν ζωήν, Jn. iii. 36 ; (χ(ΐν ζωήν, Jn. v. 40; X. 10 ; 1 Jn. v. 12; with ev (αντω (or -rois ) added, Jn. v. 26 ; [vi. 53] ; διδύι-αι, Jn. vi. 33 ; ;^; Pass., pres. ζωυπηιηϋμαι; 1 fut. ζωοποιηθήσομαι; 1 aor. ptcp. ζωοπυιηθιίς ; ( ζωοποιοί making alive) ; 1. to produce alive, beget or bear living young, (Aristot., Theophr.). 2. to cause to live, make alive, give Hfe : τά πάντα, of God, 1 Tim. vi. 13 R G [cf. Neh. ix. 6 ; 2 K. V. 7 ; Diogn. ep. 5 fin.] ; by spiritual power to arouse and invigorate, 2 Co. iii. 6 ; Gal. iii. 21 ; to give ζωή αΙώνιος (in the Johannean sense), Jn. vi. 63 ; of the dead, to re- animate, restore to life: iCo. XV. 45; Ttra, Jn. v. 21 ; Ro. iv. 1 7 ; viii. 1 1 ; pass. 1 Co. xv. 22 ; i. q. to give increase of life: thus of physical life, πρώτον το παιΒίον μίΚιτι, (ΐτα γάλακτι ζωοποιιΊται, Barn. ep. c. 6, 1 7 ; of the spirit, ζωοποιηθ<Ίς πνίΰματι, quickened as respects the spirit, endued with new and greater powers of life, 1 Pet. iii. 18, on which cf. Lechler, Das apost. u. nachapost. Zeitaltcr, p. 182 ed. 2; [Zezschtoitz, De Christi ad inferos de- scensu (Lips. 1857) p. 20]. metaph. (Geop. 9, 11, 7) of seeds quickening into life, i. e. germinating, springing u]), growing : 1 Co. xv. 36. [COMP. : σ-υ-ζωοπούω.^ * 275 Η η, a disjunctive conjunction [of. W. § 53,6]. Used 1. to distinguish things or thoughts which either mu- tually exclude each other, or one of which can take the place of the other : ο r (Lat. out, vel) ; a. to distin- guish one thing from another in words of the same con- struction : Mt. V. 17 (τον νόμον η τονς προφηταί), 36 (Χ€νκην ή μίλαιναν) ; vi. 31 ; νϋ. l(i ; ilk. vi. 56 ; vii. 11 sq. ; Lk. ii. 24 ; ix. 25 ; Jn. vii. 48 ; xiii. 29 ; Acts i. 7 ; iii. 12 ; iv. 7 ; Ro. i. 21 ; iii. 1 ; 1 Co. iv. 3 ; v. 10 sq. ; x. 19 ; Gal. i. 10, etc. b. after an interrogative or a de- clarative sentence, before a question designed to prove the same thing in another way : Mt. vii. 4, 9 ; xii. 29 ; xvi. 26 ; xxvi. 53 ; Mk. viii. 37 ; Lk. xiii. 4 ; xiv. 31 ; xv. 8 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; xiv. 10 ; 1 Co. vi. 16. c. before a sen- tence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand : Sit. XX. 15 (i. e. or, if thou wilt not grant this, is thine eye etc.) ; Ro. iii. 29 ; 1 Co. ix. 6 ; x. 22 ; xi. 14 [Rec] ; xiv. 36 ; 2 Co. xi. 7 ; η ayvoe'iTe etc., Ro. vi. 3 ; vii. 1 (cf. vi. 14) ; η οίκ o'tdare etc., Ro. xi. 2 ; 1 Co. vi. 9, IG, 19. d. η .. .ή, either. . . or, Mt. vi. 24 ; xiL 33 ; Lk. xvi. 13; Acts xxiv. 20 sq. ; 1 Co. xiv. 6. 2. in a disjunctive ques- tion it corresponds to the Lat. an after utrum ; a. pre- ceded by nOTfpov, .Tn. vii. 1 7 ; cf . Kiolzad Dev. ii. 2 p. 574 sq. ; i)receded by the interrog. μή, 1 Co. ix. 8 ; preceded by μήτι, 2 Co. i. 1 7. b. without an interrog. particle in the first member of the interrogation : ri f trrt (ίκοπώ- τΐραν. elne'iv . . . η tlndv, Mt. ix. 5 ; Mk. ii. 9 ; Lk. v. 23 ; add, Mt. xxi. 2J ; xxiii. 17,19; xxvii. 1 7 ; ]\Ik. iii. 4 ; Lk. vii. 19 ; Acts viii. 34. c. η ... η ... ή, Mk. xiii. 35. 3. as a comparative conj., than ; a. after compara- tives : Mt. X. 15 ; xi. 22 ; Lk. ix. 13 ; xvi. 1 7 ; Jn. iii. 19 ; iv. 1 [Tr mrg. om. WII br. if] ; Acts iv. 19; Ro. xiii. 11, and often, ή is wanting after ifKtiovi foil, by a noun of number: Mt. xxvi. 53 TTrWII; Actsiv. 22; xxiii. 13, 21 ; xxiv. 1 1 (where Rec. adds η)\ cf. Matthiae § 455 note 4 ; Kuhner ii. p. 847 ; [Jelf § 780 Obs. 1] ; W. 595 (554) ; [B. 168 (146)] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 410 sq. b. after ϊτιρον : Acts xvii. 21. c. πρ\ν ή, before that, before, foil, by ace. with inf. [cf. B. § 139, 35 ; W. § 44, G, also p. 297(279)]: Mt. i. 18; Mk. xiv. 30; Actsii. 20 R G WH mrg. ; vii. 2; foil, by the aor. subjunc, Lk. ii. 26 Trtxt. om. WH br. rj; xxii. 34 R G [al. ϊως] : foil, by pres. optat. Acts .XXV. 16. d. after βίλω i. q. tn prefer : 1 Co. xiv. 19 (foil, by ηΐΓίρ. 2 Mace. xiv. 42) ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Kloi: ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 589 sq. ; W. § 35, 2 c. ; [B. § 149, 7] ; Kuhner ii. p. 841 ; [Jelf § 779 Obs. 3]. e. after oi: Jn. xiii. 10 R G, where after oi χρύαν ΐχα the sentence goes on as thoucrh the writer had said οίκ άλλου Ttfos xpelav (χ(ΐ, [cf. AV. 508 (473)]. f. after ήy€μωv positive notions, to which in this way a comparative force is given : after καλόν eori [ii is good . . . rather Man] i. q. it is better, Mt. xviii. 8 sq. ; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47 ; cf. Menander's saying κάΚον το μη ζήν, η ζην άθλίω!, and Plant, rud. 4,4, 70 tacita niulier est bona semper, quam loquens; similar exx. in the O. T. are Gen. xlix. 12; Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 8 ; Jon. iv. 3, 8 ; Tob. vi. 13 ; xii. 8 ; Sir. XX. 25 ; xxii. 15 ; 4 Mace. ix. 1 ; also after λυσιτίλίΐ [ii is gain . . . rather than^ i. q. it is better (Tob. iii. 6), Lk. xvii. 2 ; after χαρά iOrot [there will be Joy . . . more than], Lk. XV. 7 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bttm. Gram. § 149, 7 ; [B. p. 360 (309)] ; AViner, Kuhner, al, as above. 4. with other particles; a. αλλ' ή. see άλλύ, I. 10 p. 28'. b. η yap, see yap, I. fin. c. η καί [cf. W. § 53, 6 note], a. or even, or also, (Lat. out etiam, rel eliam) : [Mt. vii. 10 LTTrAVH]; Lk. .xi. 11 GLTTrAVH, 12; xviii. 11 ; Ro. ii. 15; 1 Co. xvi. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 13. β. or also (Lat. an etiam), (in a disjunctive question): Lk. xii. 41 ; Ro. iv. 9. d. ηπ(ρ, than at all (Lat. quain forte ; Germ. als etwa), after a compar. [cf. Jelf § 779 Obs. 5] : Jn. xii. 43 [L η nep. WII mrg. ΰπί'ρ], (2 Mace. xiv. 42; Horn., Hes.). e. ήτοι . . . ή, either indeed [cf. Kuhner § 540, 5] ... or: Ro. vi. 16 (Sap. xi. 19 ; Hdt. and sqq.). η |ΐήν, assured! ι/, most certainly, full surely, (a particle used in asseverations, promises, oaths [cf. W. § 53, 7 b. ; Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 38 sq.]) : Heb. vi. 14 R G ; see el, III. 9. (.Sept. ; very often in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down.) * η-γεμονενω ; {ήγ(μών) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; a. to be leader, to lead the 'ray. b. to rule, command : with gen. of a province [cf. B. 169 (147)], to be governor of a prov- ince, said of a proconsul, Lk. ii. 2 ; of a procurator, Lk. iii. 1.• ηγεμονία, -as, η, (ήγ(μών), [Hdt., Thuc, Plat., al.], chief command, rule, sovereignty : of the reign of a Ro- man emperor, Lk. iii. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 18, 4, 2.* η-γεμών, -ovoj, a, {ή-γ^ομαι), in class. Grk. a word of very various signification : α leader of any kind, a guide, ruler, prefect, president, chief, general, commander, sover- eign ; in the N. T. spec. 1. a ' legatus Caesaris,' an officer administering a province in the name and with the authority of the Roman emperor; the governor of a prov- ince: Mt. X. 18; Mk. .xiii. 9; Lk. xxi. 12 ; 1 Pet. ii. 14. 2. a procurator (Vulg. praeses; Luth. Landpfleger), an officer who was attached to a proconsul or a propraetor and had charge of the imperial revenues ; in causes re- lating to these revenues he administered justice, (called fViVpoTrof, δίοικΐ)τήί, in prof. auth.). In the smaller provinces also, which were so to speak appendages of the greater, he discharged the functions of governor of the province ; and such was the relation of the procu- ήΎίομαι 276 ηκιο rator of <Ιιι<1α>α to the governor of Syria (cf. Krchs, Obscrvv. J), (il s(i(|. ; Fiic/iei; De vitiis lexx. etc. p. i'J'i s) : leading as respects influence, controlling in counsel, tv τισι, among any. Acts .w. 22 ; with gen. of the ])ers. over whom one rules, so of the overseers or leaders of Christian churches: lleb. xiii. 7, 17, 24, (οϊκου, 2 Chr. xxxi. 13; των πάτριων, 1 Esdr. V. 65 (66), G7 (6H) ; της πά\(ως, Judg. ix. 51 Alex.; a military leader, 1 Alacc. ix. 30; 2 Mace. xiv. 16; used also in (!rk. writ, of any kind of a leader, chief, com- mander, So))h. Phil. 3S6; often in Polyb. ; Diod. 1, 4 and 72; I.cian. Alex.44; al.); witligen.of tliething, ToOXoyou, tlie leader in speech, chief speaker, spokesman ; Acts xiv. 12 of Mercury, who is called also τοί λόγου ήγfμώv in Jambhch. de myster., init. 2. (like the Lat. (/«co) L q. to consider, deem, account, lliink: with two ace, one of the obj., the other of the pred., Acts xxvi. 2 ; Phil. ii. 3, 6 (on which see άρπα-γμός, 2 [\V. § 44, 3 c.]) ; iii. 7 [cf. B. 59 (51) ; W. 274 (2.^8)] ; 1 Tim. i. 12; vi. 1 ; Heb. X. 29; xi. 11, 26; 2 Pet. i. 13; ii. 13; iii. 9, 15. τικα i)S Tiva, 2 'I'h. iii. I. τ [cf. W. § 65, 1 a.] ; Tivh νπ(ρ(κπ(ρισ- σωί, to esteem one exceedingly, 1 Th. v. 13 (jrfpi η-ολλοΟ, Ildt. 2, 115 ; 77f/)! πλίίστου, Thuc. 2, 89) ; w. aco. of the thing foil, by όταν. .las. i. 2 ; arayieaioi', foil, by an inf., 2 Co. ix. 5 ; Phil. ii. 25 ; hUamv, foil, by an inf., 2 Pet. i. 13 ; foil, by an ace. w. inf., Phil. iii. 8. [Comp. : δι-, cV- i»-. (f-, πρι>•ηγ(ομαί' Syn.: Sojffo) 1, τΐΎΐομαι 2, νομίζω 2, οίομαι: rjy. and νομ. denote a holief restini: not on one's inner feelini^ or sentiment, but on tiie due consideration of external f^rounds, the weighing and comparing of facts ; Sok. and oi., on the other hand, describe a snlijective judgment growing out of inclination or a view of facts in their relation to us. 7/7. denotes a more deliberate and careful judgment than νομ. ; of. a subjective judgment which hius feeling rather than thought {Son.) for its ground. Of. Schmidt ch. 17.] T)8('ci>f, adv., (fr. ή6ύ{ sweet, nleasant), with /ilrn.oire, gladly: Mk. vi. 20; xii. 37; 2Cj. xi. 19. [From .Soph., Plat, down.] ' ήΒη, adv., [fr. Horn, down ; on deriv. see Vanicek p. 745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. every wh. of time, uoic, al- ready, {hsA. jam): Mt.iii. 10; v. 28; xiv. 1.') ; .Mk.iv.37; xi. 11; Lk. vii. 6; xii. 49; [xxiv. 29 Τ WH Tr txt., L Tr mrg. br.] ; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51 ; xix. 28 (that all things were now finished and that nothing further remained for him to do or to suffer) ; Acts xxvii. 9 ; l!o. xiii. 1 1 (that it is already time to wake up and imlidge no longer in sleep) ; 1 Co. iv. 8, and often ; νϋν . . . iJSij, now already (Lat. Jam nunc) : 1 Jn. iv. 3 ; ή&η -ποτί, now at last, at length /tow: with fut. Ro. i. 10; [with aor. I'hil. iv. 10. Syn. see ιΊρτι, Hn.] ήεκΓτο (neut. |)lur. of the superl. rjbtcrroi fr. {j8vs), adv., most glailly (cf. ή&ϊω!) : 2 Co. xii. 9. 15. (Soph., Xen., Plat., al.) • ηδονή, -η!, ή, (ηδομαι), [Simon. 1 1 7, Ildt. down], pleas- ure: 2 Pet. ii. 13; plur., Lk. viii. 14 (al ή&οναι τ. βίου); Tit. iii. 3 ; Jas. iv. 3 ; by meton. desires for pleasure (Grotius, cupiditales rerum voluptariarum), Jas. iv. 1.* ήδνι-οσ•μο5, -ov, {^hvs and οσμή), .^wect-smelling (Plin. jucmide olens) ; neut. to ήδ. as subst. garden-mint (i. q. μίνθη, Strab. 8, 3, 14 p. 344; Theojdir. hist. i)lant. 7, 7; cf. cans, jilant. 6, 22 (20)), a kinδ(κά (Ισιν ωραι της ημίρας, Jn. xi. 9 ; to the number of dav.s are added as many nights, Mt. iv. 2; ,\ii. 40; yiverai ήμιρα, day dawns, it grows light. Lk. iv. 42 ; vi. 13 ; xxii. 66; Acts xii. 18; xvi. 35; xxiii. 12; xxvii. 29, 33, 39, (Xen. an. 2, 2, 13 ; 7, 2, 34) : πιριπατίΊν iv τ. ήμϊρα, .In. xi. 9 ; ή ήμίρα φαίνιι. Rev. λ iii. 12 ; ij ήμ^ρα κλίνιι, the day declines, it is towards evening, Lk. L\. 12 ; xxiv. 29. b. metaph. the ' day ' is regarded as the time for abstaining from indulgence, vice, crime, because acts of the sort are perpetrated at night and in darkness: 1 Th. v. 5, 8; hence ό αίων αυτοί (see αιών. .i) is likened to the night, αιών μίλλων to dag, and Christians are admonished to live decorously as though it were liiilit, i. e. as if ό αΙών 6 μίλλων were already come, Ro. xiii. 1 2 sq. ίως ήμίρα ΐατίν while it is day, i. e. while life gives one an ojjpor- tunity to work, Jn. ix. 4. of the light of knowledge, 2 Pet. i. 19. 2. of the civil dag, or the space of twenty-four hours (thus including the night) : Jit. vi. 34 ; Mk. vi. 21 ; Lk. xiii. 14, etc. ; opp. to an hour, Mt. xxv. 13; to hours, months, years, Rev. ix. 15; Gal. iv. 10: r; (V ημίρα τρυφη. the revelling of a day, i. e. ephemeral, very brief, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [al. refer this to 1 b. above]; ήμ€ρα 278 ήμερα (πτάκΐ! τ^Γ ήμ. seven times in the (space of a) day, Lk. xvii. 4 ; the dat. ήμίρα of tlie day on (in) ichich [cf. W. § 31, 9 ; B. § 133 (.'(i)] : as τρίττ, ήμίρα, Mt. xvi. 21 ; Mk. ix. 31 [Rec.] ; Lk. xvii. 29 sq. ; Acts ii. 41, etc. ; ήμίρα κ. ήμίρα, day by day, every day, 2 Co. iv. 16 (after the Ilebr. DV1 DV Esth. iii. 4, where Sept. naff ίκάστην ημί- pav. and Dl" DV Ps. Ixvii. (Ixviii.) 20, where Sept. ήμίραν κα<)' ήμίραν; [cf. W. 4G3 (432)]) ; ήμίραν (ξ ήμίρα! (see (Κ. \\. 2), 2 Pet. ii. 8; as an ai-e. of time [\V. 230 (215 sq.) ; B. § 131, 11] : οΚην τ. ήμίραν, Κο. viii. 3G ; χ. 21 ; μιαν ήμίραν. Acts xxi. 7; and in the phir., .In. ii. 12; iv. 40; xi.fi; Actsix.l9; x.48; xvi.l2; xx.6; xxi. 4,10; x.w. (!, 14; xxviii. 7, 12[Ldat.], 14; Gal. i. 18; Rev. .\i. 3, 9. joined vpith Prepositions: άπο with gen. from . . .forth, from . . . on, Mt. xxii. 46 ; Jn. xi. S3 ; Acts x. 30; XX. IH; Phil. i. 5; άχρι w. gen. until, up to, Mt. xxiv. 38; Lk. i. 20; xvii. 27; Acts i. 2 ; [22 Tdf.] ; ii. 29 ; xxiii. 1 ; xxvi. 22 ; άχρι niirrc ήμερων, until five days had passed, i. e. after five days. Acts xx. li ; μίχρι w. gen. until, Mt. xxviii. 1.5 [LTr, Wll in br.]; ίωί w. gen. until, Mt. xxvii. 64 ; Acts i. 22 [T άχρι] ; Ro. xi. 8 ; διά w. gen., see διό, A. II. ; ττρό w. gen. before, .In. xii. 1 (on which see προ, b.) ; (v w. dat. sing., Mt. xxiv. 50 ; Lk. i. 59 ; Jn. v. 9 ; 1 Co. X. 8 [L Τ Tr WH txt. om. eV] ; Heb. iv. 4, etc.; iv w. dat. plur., Mt. xxvii. 40 ; Mk. xv. 29 [L Τ Trom. AVH br. iv'] ; Jn. ii. 1 9 [Tr ΛΥΗ br. iv], 20, etc. ; ds, unto, (ar/ainst), Jn. xii. 7 ; Rev. ix. 15 ; «Vi w. ace. for, (Germ, auf . . . hin), Actsxiii.31 (for many days successively) : xvi. 18; xxvii. 20; Heb. xi. 30; Kaff ήμίραν, daily [\V. 401 (374 sq.)], Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 49 ; Lk. xvi. 19 ; xxii. 53 ; Acts ii. 46 »i\. ; iii. 2 ; xvi. 5 ; xix. 9 ; 1 Co. xv. 31 ; 2 Co. xi. 28 ; Heb. vii. 27 ; x. 1 1 ; also τό Kaff ήμίραν, Lk. xi. 3 ; xix. 4 7 ; Acts xvii. 11 [L Τ Tr txt. ora.AVH br. το], (Polyb. 4, 18, 2 ; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 734 ; [Jelf § 456] ; Bnhdy. p. 329; B. 96 (84)); Kaff ίκάστην ήμίραν, every day, Heb. iii. 13 (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 12); also κατά πάσαν ήμ. Acts xvii. 1 7 ; μ^τά, after, Mt. xvii. 1 ; xxvi. 2 ; .x.xvii. 63 ; Mk. viii. 31 ; Lk. i. 24 ; Jn. iv. 43 ; xx. 2G ; Acts i. 5 ; .xv. 36, etc. οΰ jrXiiout flalv efiol ήμίραι αφ' ή{, sc. ήμίρα!, Acts xxiv. 11. A specification of the number of days is thrust into the discourse in the nominative, as it were adverbially and without any grammatical connection, (cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 310 sq.; ΛΥ. 516 (481) and § 62, 2; [B. 139 (122)]) : ήδη ήμίραι (Rec. ήμίρα!. by correc- tion) Tpfii, Mt.xv. 32 ; Jlk. viii. 2 ; ώσύ ήμίραι όκτιά, Lk. ix. 28. ήμ€ρών Βιαγίνομίνων τίνων, certain days having intervened. Acts .xxv. 13. ήμίρα and ήμίραι are used w. the gen. of a noun denoting a festival or some solemnity usually celebrated on a fixed day : τύν άζΰμων. Acts xii. 3; T^t nfvTeKooTrJ!, Acts ii. 1; xx. 16; τον σαββάτου, Lk. xiii. 14, 16 ; Jn. xix. 31 ; ή κυριακή ήμίρα, the Lord's day, i. e. the day on which Christ returned to life, Sun- day therefore. Rev. i. 10; the foil, phrases also have reference to sacred or festival days : Kpiveiv ήμίραν παρ' ήμίρα", to exalt one day above another, and Kplvciv πάσαν ήμίραν. to esteem every 't"DV, Ezek. xxii. 24; Π•ίΠ•-•1Χ Dl", Zeph. ii. 3 sq. ; [rT)3j'-D1", Prov. xi. 4 ; Zeph. i. 15, 18, etc.]); ή ήμ. ή μιγάλη τη! όργήι αντοΰ, Rev. vi. 17; ήμ. σφαγής, of slaughter (of the wicked), Jas. v. 5 [(.Jer. xii. 3, etc.)]. Paul, in allusion to the phrase ήμίρα κυρίου, uses the expression ανθρωπινή ημ,ετερον 279 ηρ€μθ=; ήμίρα for a tribunal of assembled judges on the day of trial [A. V. ynan's judgment'] (cf. the Germ. Landtag, Reichstag), 1 Co. iv. 3. 4. By a Hebraistic usage (though one not entirely unknown to Grk. writ. ; cf. Soph. A]. 131, 623 ; Eirr. Ion 720) it is used of time in general, (as the Lat. dies is sometimes) : Jn. xiv. 20 ; xvi. 23, 26; Heb. viii. 9 [cf. B. 316 (271); W. 571 (531)]; την (μην ήμΐραν, the time when I should appear among men as ^Messiah, Jn. viii. 56 ; cV τί) ημ τΐ] πονηρά, in the time of troubles and assaults with wliiuli demons try Christians, Eph. vi. 13 ; ήμ. σωτηρίας, the time wlien any one is or can be saved, 2 Co. vi. 2 ; eh ήμίραν αΙωνος, for all time, forever (see αιών, 1 a.), 2 Pet. iii. 1**; much uftener in the plur. : ημίραι πονηροί, Eph. v. 16 αφ' ήμε- ρων αρχαίων. Acts XV. 7; αί πρϋτΐρον ήμ. Heb. ΧΓ 32; πάσα! rat ήμ€ρας, through all days, always, Mt. xxviii. 20 (D'P'n-S^, Deut. iv.40; v. 26 (29), and very often; ηματα πάντα, Horn. II. 8, 539 ; 12, 133 ; 13, 826, etc.) ; ai Εσχα- τοι ήμ. (see βσχατοΓ, 1 sub fin.), Acts ii. 1 7 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 ; Jas. V. 3 ; αϊ ήμ. ανται, the i)resent time, Acts iii. 24 ; the time now spoken of, Lk. i. 39; vi. 12; Acts i. 15, etc.; €v Ta'ts ήμ. €K€tvais (see €Κ€ίνος, 2 b. p. 195'') ; προ τούτων των ήμΐρόιν, Acts V. 36 ; xxi. 38 ; προς ολίγας ήμ. for a short time, Heb. xii. 10; ίΚίΰσονταί ήμ. όταν etc., Jit. i.x. 15 ; Mk. ii. 20 ; Lk. v. 35 ; 6τ€ etc. Lk. xvii. 22 ; ήξουσιν ήμ. €πι at, και foil, by a fut. Lk. xix. 43 ; Ζρχονται ήμ.. και foil, by fut. Heb. viii. 8 ; ζΚΐΰίτονται or άρχονται ήμ., tv αίς [ etc., Lk. xxi. 6 ; xxiii. 29. with a gen. of the thing done | or to happen: της απογραφής. Acts v. 37; της φωνής, Rev. X. 7 ; τής σαρκός αϋτοϋ, of his earthly life, Heb. v. 7. ai ήμ. with the gen. of a pers., one's lime, one's days, i. e. in which he lived, or held office : Mt. ii. 1 ; xi. 12 ; xxiii. 30; xxiv. 37; Lk. i. 5; iv. 25; xvii. 26, 28; Acts vii. 45 ; xiii. 41 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20, (Gen. xxvi. 1 ; 1 S. xvii. 10 ; 2 S. xxi. 1 ; 1 K. x. 21 ; Esth. i. 1 ; Sir. xliv. 7 ; xlvi. 7 ; Tob. i. 2 ; 1 Mace xiv. 36, etc.) ; αί ήμίραι τοϋ υίοΰ τοϋ άνθρ. the time immediately preceding the return of Jesus Christ from heaven, Lk. xvii. 26 ; μίαν των ήμ. τοϋ vi. τ. άνθρ a single day of that most blessed future time when, all liostile powers subdued, the Messiah will reign, Lk. xvii. 22. Finally, the Hebrews and the Hellenists who imitate them measure the duration and length also of human I ife by the number of days : πάσας τάς ήμίρας [L mrg. Tr mrg. WH dat.] της ζωής [G L Τ Tr WH om.] ήμων, during all our life, Lk. i. 75 Rec. (Gen. xlvii. 8 sq. ; Judith X. 3 : Tob. i. 2 (3) ; Sir. xxii. 12 ; xxx. 32 (24) ; I Mace. ix. 71) ; προβίβηκως ev τάϊς ήμ^ραις αντον, far advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36 (D'p-a X3, [Sept. προβ. ήμερων or ήμίραις]. Gen. xviii. 11 ; xxiv. 1; Jo.sh. xiii. 1 ; [xxiii. 1 ; 1 K. i. 1 ; see προβαίνω, fin.]); αρχή ήμfpώv, beginning of life, Heb. vii. 3 (αί ίσχαται ημίραι τινός, one's last days, his old age, Protev. Jac. c. 1); ήμΐραι αγαθοί, 1 Pet. iii. 10. ήμί'τίροβ. -e'pa, -fpov, {ήμιΐς), possess, pron. of the 1 pers. plur., [fr. Hom. down], our : with a subst.. Acts ii. II ; xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; xxvi. 5; Ro. xv. 4; [1 Co. xv. 31 Rec.•• "■"] ; 2 Tim. iv. 15 ; 1 Jn. i. 3 : ii. 2 ; oi ήμίτ^ροι, suostantively, ^our people,' (the brethren): Tit. iii. 14. [Xeut. TO ήμίτ. substantively: Lk. xvi. 12 WH txt. Cf. W. § 22, 7α<ι<[.; Β. § 127, i9sqq.]• η μην, see ή. ήμιθανή$, -ίς, (fr. ήμι half, and θνήσκω, 2 aor. ίθανον), half dead: Lk. χ. 30. ([Dion. Hal. 10, 7]; Diod. 12, 62; Strab. 2 p. 98; Anthol. 11, 392, 4; [4 Mace. iv. 11]; al.)' ημιστ)5, -fia, -u ; gen. ήμ'σους (Mk. vi. 23 [Sept. Ex. XXV. 9 ; etc.], for the uncontr. form ήμίσ^ος which is more com. in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. [fr. Ildt. down]) ; neut. plur. ήμίση, Lk. xix. 8 R G, a form in use from Theophr. down, for the earlier ημίσεα adopted by Lchm. (cf. Passow [also L. and S.] s. v.; W. § 9, 2d.; ημίσεια in Τ Tr [τιμίσια WH] seems due to a corruption of the copyists, see Steph. Thes. iv. p. 1 70 ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 248; Alex. Bttm.in Stud. u. Krit. for 1862, p. 194 sq. ; [N. T. Gram. 14 (13); Γ(//. Proleg. p. 1 1 8 ; but esp. WH. App. p. 158]); Sept. for Π'ΪΠΟ, much oftener 'ΪΠ ; h a If; it takes the gender and number of the annexed substantive (where to ήμισυ might have been expected) : τά ήμίση των υπαρχόντων, Lk. xix. 8 (so Grk. writ, say ό ήμισυς τοΰ βίου, οί ήμίσζΐς των ιππέων, see Passow s. v.; [L. and S. s. v. I. 2 ; Kiihner §405, 5 c.]; Tos ήμίσίΐς των δυνάμιων, 1 Macc. iii. 34,37); neut. το ήμισυ, substantively, the half; without the art. a half: €ως ήμίσους τής βασϊΚΐίας μου (Esth. v. 3 ; Λ'ϋ. 2), Mk. Λ"ί. 23; ήμισυ καιροί. Kev. xii. 14; as in class. Grk., καΧ ήμισυ is added to cardinal numbers even where they are connected with masc. and fern, substantives, as rptii ήμίρας κα\ ήμισυ, three dai/s and a half. Rev. xi. 9, 11, {ό^Ιτωνξ'ιν δυοΊν δραχμών κα\ ήμίσους, Ath. 6 p. 274 c. ; δύο or 4ν6ς πήχεων κα\ ήμίσους, Ex. χχν. 16; xxvi. 16; xxxviii. 1 [Alex.]); with κα\ omitted: Rev. xi. 9 Tdf. ed. 7 {^μυριάδων ίπτα ήμίσους, Plut. Mar. 34).* ήμιώριον and (L Τ Tr WH) ήμίωρον (cf. Kiihner § 185, 6, 2 ; [Jelf § 165, 6, 1 a.]), -ου. τό, (fr. ήμι and ώρα, of. το ήμικυτυΧίον, ήμιμοίριον. ήμικόσμιον. ήμιχοινίκιον. ήμιωβύλιον, etc.), half an hour . Kev. viii. 1. (Strab. 2 p. 133 ; Geop. ; al. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].) * ήν(κα, a rel. adv. of time, [fr. Hom. down], at tchich time ; when : foil, by the indie, pres., of a thing that actually takes place, 2 Co. iii. 15 RG ; foil, by 5v Λνίιΐι subj. pres., whensoever : ibid. L Τ Tr WH ; foU. by Sv and the aor. subj. with the force of the Lat. fut. pf., at length when (whensoever it shall have etc.) : 2 Co. iii. 16; Ex. i. 10; Deut. vii. 12; Judith xiv. 2. [On its constr. see W. 296 (278) sq. ; 308 (289) ; B. § 139, 33.] * ήΐΓίρ, see ή, 4 d. ή'τΓίοβ, -α, -ov, rarely of two terminations, (apparently derived fr. en-ur. eiVelK, so that it prop, means affable [so Etym. Magn. 434, 20 ; but cf. VaniC-ek p. 32]) ; fr. Horn, down ; mild, gentle : 1 Th. ii. 7 (where L WH νήπιος, q. v. fin.) ; προς τίνα, 2 Tim. ii. 24.* "Hp. Lchm. 'Up [on the breathing in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 107], ("\|• watchful, fr. Ίί^• to be awake), Er, one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 28.* ηρ<μος, -ox, ipiiel, tranquil : rjpepov κ. ήσύχιον βίον, 1 Tim. ii. 2. (Lcian. trag. 207 ; Eustath., Hesych. ; com• HpujoTj'i 280 'HprnBiwi parat. ηριμίστιροί. fr. an unused ηριμή^, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, t'.;i ; more cDni. in llic o.irlier (irk. writ, is the adv. ήμίμα. [Cf. W. § II lin. ; B. 28 (24).]) * Ήρωεη$, -oil, o, (equiv. to Ήρωίδη!, sprung from a hero : honoc the Ktym. Magn. i)[). U!.5, -l.'i ; 4.i7, 56 directs it to be written 'HpoJSijs [so ^\'H], as it is found also in certain inscriptions [cf. Lipsius, (!ram. Unters. ]). 9; 117/. Intr. § 410; Til/. Proleg. 100; I'ltpc, Eiiicnnamen, s. v.]), Herod, the name of a royal family tliat (loiirished among the Jews in the time of Jesus and flu• apostles. In the N. T. are mentioned, 1. the one who gave the family its name, Herod surnamcd the Greal, a son of \ntipater of Iduma;a. Appointed king of Jud;ea B.C. 40 by the Roman senate at the suggestion of Antony and with the consent of Octavian, he at length overcame the great o])p()silion which the country made to him and took possession of the kingdom B. c. 37 ; and, after the battle of .Xctium, he was confirmed in it by Octavian, whose favor he ever after enjoyed. He was brave and skilled in war, learned and sagacious ; but also extremely sus- picious and cruel. Hence he destroyed the entire royal family of the llasmonieans, put to death many of the Jews that opposed his government, and proceeded to kill even his dearly beloved wife Mariamne of the Ilas- nionxan line and the two sons she had borne him. By these acts of bloodshed, and especially by his love and imitation of Roman customs and institutions and by the burdensome taxes imposed upon his subjects, he so alienated the Jews that he was unable to regain their favor by his splendid restoration of the temple and other acts of munificence. He died in the 70th year of his age, the 37th of his reign, the 4th before the Dionysian era. Cf. Joseph, antt. 14, 14, 4 ; 15, 6, 7; 7, 4 ; 8, 1 ; 16, 5, 4 ; 11,6, etc. In his closing years John the Baptist and Christ were born, Mt. ii. 1 ; Lk. i. 5 ; Matthew narrates in ch. ii. (cf. Macrob. sat. 2, 4) that he commanded the male children in Bethlehem from two years old an'J_ i. e. hairy [Gen. xxv. 25 ; Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 1]), indecl., Esau, the firstborn son of Isaac : Ro. ix. 13; Heb. xi. 20; .xii. IG.* ΐ)(Γ(Γ<1ομ.αι, see ήττάω and s. v. S, σ, c [η<Γσ•ων, see ήττων•'] ησ-νχάζω ; 1 aor. ησν\ασα\ {iJav)(os [i. q- ήσυ^^ιοςΎ) ', as in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down, lo keep quiet, i. e. a. to rest, to cease from tabor: Lk. xxiii. 56. b. to lead a quiet life, said of those who are not running hither and thither, but stay at home and mind their business : 1 Th. iv. 11. c. to be silent, i. e. to say nothing, hold one's peace : Lk. xiv. 4 (3) ; Acts xi. 18 ; xxi. 14, (Job ix.xii. 7 ; ησύχασαν κα\ οϋχ (υροσαν \6yov, \eh. v. 8).* [8γΝ.ήσυχά^Ρί ν, σ lyav, σ ιωπ αν: ησ. describes a quiet condition in tlie general, inclusive of silence; σιγ. de- scribes a mental condition and its manifestation, especially in speechlessness (silence from fear, grief, awe, etc.) ; σιωπ., the more external and physical term, denotes abstinence from speech, esp. as antithetic to loquacity. Schmidt i. ch. 9; iv. ch. 175.] ήσ-υχία, -at, ή, (fr. the adj. ήσϋχια. q- v.; the fem. ex- presses the general notion [W. 95 (90)], cf. αίτια, άριτή. ΐχΰρά, etc.), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. quietness : descri[»- tive of the life of one who stays at home doing his own work, and does not officiously meddle with the affairs of others, 2 Th. iii. 1 2. 2. silence : Acts xxii. 2 ; 1 Tim. ii. 1 1 sq.* ή(Γΰχιο5, -a, -ov, [(perh. akin to ξμαι to sit, Lat.serfa^ux; cf. Curtius § 568 ; Vanicek p. 77)]; fr. Horn, down; quiet, tranquil : 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; iilos, 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; Joseph. antt. 13, 16, 1.* ήτοι. see η, 4 e. ήττάω ; ( ήττων) ; to make less, inferior, to overcome (the Act. only in Polyb., Diod., Joseph, antt. 12, 7, 1 [other exx. in Veitch s. v.]); Pass, ήττάομαι, fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down; pf. ηττημαι; 1 aor. ηττήθην (ήσσώθην, 2 Co. xii. 13 LTTrWIl; in opp. to which form cf. Fritzschc, De conform. N. T. crit. ipiani Lchm. ed. p. 32 [yet see Kuenen and Cohet, N. T. ad fid. cod. Vat. p. .\c. ; ivH. App. p. 166 ; B. 59 (52) ; Veitch s. v.]) ; to he made inferior ; to be overcome, worsted : in war, νπό τ»ιόϊ, 2 Mace. χ. 24; univ., τιή [cf. Β. 168 (147); W. 219 (206)], to be conquered by one, forced to yield to one, 2 Pet. ii. 19 ; absol. ib. 20. τ\ imp τίνα, i. q. ήττον ίχω τι, to hold a thing inferior, set beluic, [on the ace. (o) cf. B. § 131, 10; and on the compar. use of Ιπίρ see imfp, U. 2 b.], 2 Co. xii. 13.• ή'ττημ,οι [cf. B. 7; WH. App. p. 166], -roy. τύ, (ήττάο- μαι) ; 1. a diminution, decrease : i. e. defeat. Is. xxxi. 8; αυτών, brought upon the Jewish people in that so few of them had turned to Christ, Ro. xi. 12 [R. V. loss]. 2. loss, sc. as respects salvation, 1 Co. vi. 7 [R. Λ^. txt. defect]. Cf. Meyer [but cf. his 6te Aufl.] on each pass. (Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) * ήττων or [so L TTr WII, see Σ, σ. s] ησσων, -ov, infe- rior; neut. adverbially [fr. Horn, down] less, 2 Co. xii. 15; CIS TO ησσον, fir the worse (that ye may be made worse; opp. to ds το κριίττον), 1 Co. xi. 17.* ήχίω(-ώ); (ξχοί, q. v.); [f r. Hesiod down] ; to sound: 1 Co. xiii. 1 ; used of the roaring of the sea, Lk. xxi. 25 Rec. [COMP. : (ξ-, κατ-ηχίω.] ' ηχοϊ [cf. Lat. echo, cox. Germ, sprechen, etc.; A'anicek p. 858], -ou, ό, and (Lk. xxi. 25 GLTTr WH) τό ήχος. -ovs (cf. W. 65 (64) : [B. 23 (20)] : Delitzsch on Heb. xii. 19 p. 638; [or ήχους may come fr. ήχώ, -οΰς, see esp. WII. App. p. 158'; Mey. on Lk. as below]); 1. a sound, noise : Acts ii. 2 ; Heb. xii. 1 9 ; spoken of the roar of the sea's waves, Lk. xxi. 25 G L Τ Tr WH. 2. rumor, report : nepl tii/os, Lk. iv. 37.• 282 Θ θαΒΒαΐος Θα88αΐο$, -ου, ό, C'^Pi, peril, large-hearted or coura- geous, although it has not been shown that ΊΠ e(iuiv. to the Hebr. "W can mean pectus as well as mamma : [some would connect the terms by the fact that the ' child of one's heart ' may be also described as a ' 6o.so»i-child ' ; but *ee B. D. s. v. Jude]), Thaddceus, a surname of the a])0stle Jude ; he was also called Lebbceus and was the brother of James the less: Mt. x. 3 R G L Tr Wll ; Mk. iii. 18. [Cf. B. D. s. V. ; Keil on Mt. 1. c. ; Wll. App. p. ll'. The latter hold the name Α(ββαΐο{ to be due to an early attempt to bring Levi (Acutis) the publican (Lk. V. 27) within the Twelve.]* βάλασ-σ-α [cf. B. 7], -ijr, i), (akin to όλϊ [better, allied to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing ; cf. VaniCek, p. 303] ; Sept. for d;), [fr. Horn, down], the sea; [on its distinc- tion from TreKayos see the latter word] ; a. univ. : iMt. .\.\iii. 15; Mk. .\i. 23; Lk. .xvii. 2, 6; x.xi. 2ή; Ro. ix. 27; 2 Co. .xi. 26 ; Ilcb. xi. 12 ;, Jas. i. 6 ; Jude 13 ; Rev. vii. 1-3, etc. ; ΐργάζισθαι την θαΚ. (see (μγάζυμαι, 2 a.), Rev. xviii. 17; το rrf^ayot Trjs θαλ. (<{•(' πίλαγος, a.), Mt. xviii. 6 ; joined with y^ and oipavas it forms a periph- rasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24 ; xiv. 15 ; Rev. v. 13; X. 6 [LWHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hagg. ii. 7; Ps. c.xlv. (cxlvi.) 6 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 3, 2 ; [c. Ap. 2, 10, 1]) ; among the visions of the Apocalypse a i/lassi/ sea or sea of (jlass is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this is not quite clear : Rev. iv. 6 ; -xv. 2. b. spec, used [even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115) ; B. § 124, 8 b.] of the Mediterranean Sea: Acts x. C, 32 ; xvii. 14; of the Red Sea (see ίρυθρόί), ή ipvdpa θάΚ., Acts vii. 36 ; 1 Co. X. 1 sq. ; Heb. xi. 29. By a usage foreign to native Grk. writ. [cf. Aristot. meteor. 1, 13 p. 351', 8 ή ίπο τον Κανκασορ Χίμνη ην κάλοΰσιν οί tK€L θάΧατταν, and Ilcsyeh. defines \ίμνη : ή θάΚασσα και ό ώκ€ανός} em- ])loyed like the Hebr. D', [e. g. Num. xxxiv. 11], by Mt. Mk. and Jn. (nowhere by Lk.) of the Lake of Γιννησα- ptT (q. V.) : I) θάλ. τηί Γαλιλαι'αΓ, Mt. iv. 18 ; xv. 29 ; Mk. i. I G ; vii. 31, (similarly Lake Constance, der Bodensee, is called mare Suebicum, the Suabian Sea) ; Trjs ΎιβίριάΒο!, Jn. xxi. 1 ; τη! Γαλιλ. τηί Ύφιριάδοι (on which twofold gen. cf. W. §30, 3 Ν. 3; [B.400 (343)]), Jn. vi. 1 ; more frequently simply ij θάλασσα : Mt. iv. 15, 18 ; viii. 24, 26 sq. 32; xiii. 1, etc.; Mk. ii. 13; iii. 7; iv. 1, 39; v. 13, etc. ; Jn. vi. 16-19, 22, 25 ; xxi. 7. Cf. Furrer in Schen- kel ii. 322 sqq. ; [see ΓιννησαρίτΊ. θάλπ»; 1. prop, to irnrm, keep warm, (Lat./bceo) : Horn, et sqq. 2. like the Lat. fovea, i. q. to cherish with tender love, to foster with tender care: Eph. v. 29; 1 Th. ii. 7; ([Theocr. 14, 38]; Alciphr. 2, 4; Antonin. 5, υ-• θάνατος Θάμαρ [Treg. θαμάρΊ, ή, (ΊΏΓΙ [i. e. palm-tree]). Τα- mar, prop, name of a woman, the daughter-in-law of Judah, son of the patriarch Jacob (Gen. x.xxviii. 6) : Λΐι. i. 3.• θαμβ<ω, -ω ; Pass., impf. ΐθαμβοΰμην; 1 aor. ίθαμβήθην ; (θάμβος, q. v.) ; 1. to he astonished : Acts ix. fi Rec. (Hom., Soph., Eur.) 2. to astonish, terrify : 2 S. xxii. 5; pass, to be amazed: Mk. i. 27; x. 32; foil, by Μ w. dat. of the thing, ilk. x. 24 ; to he frightened, 1 Mace. vi. 8; Sap. xvii. 3; Plut. Caes. 45; Brut. 20. [Comp. : (κ-θημβίω.^ ' θάμβος [allied with τάφοι amazement, fr. a Sanskrit root signifying to render immovable ; Curtius § 233 ; Vanicek p. 1130], -ode, to; fr. Ilom. down; amazement: Lk. iv. 36 ; v. 9 ; Acts iii. 10.* θανάσ-ιμοΐ, -ov, (θανι'ίν, θάνατος), dead/;/: Mk. .xvi. 18. ([Acschyl.], Soph., Eur., Plat., s(jq.) • θανατη-φόρο9, -ov, {θάνατος and φίρω), deatli-brinqitiq, deadly: Jas. iii. 8. (Num. xviii. 22; Job xxxiii. 23; 4 Mace. viii. 17, 25; xv. 26; Aeschyl., Plat., Arist., Dio.l., Xen., Plut., al.) • θάνατος, -ου, ό, (θανάν); Sept. for ΠΙΟ and ΠΙ'Ο, also for Ί^Τ pestilence [AV. 29 note] ; (one of the nouns often anarthrous, cf. W. § 19, 1 s. v.; [B. § 124, 8 c.]; Grimm, Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop, the death of the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent) of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Trmrg. άδου] (on this see iihiv) ; Phil. ii. 27, 30 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; ix. 15 sq. ; Rev. ix. 6 ; xviii. 8 ; opp. to ^ωι;, Ro. viii. 38 ; 1 Co. iii. 22 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; Phil. i. 20 ; with the implied idea of future misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. χ v. 21 ; 2 Tim. i. 10 ; Ileb. ii. 14 sq. ; i. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12. Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was con- ceived of as being very dark, χώρα κα\ σκιίι θανάτου (j^irDSx) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e. figurativclv, a region enveloped in the darkness of igno- rance and sin: Mt. iv. 16; Lk. i. 7Π, (fr. Is. ix. 2); θάνα- τος is used of the punishment of Christ, Ro. v. 1 : vi. 3-5 ; 1 Co. xi. 26 ; Phil. iii. 10 ; Col. i. 22 ; Heb. ii. [9], 14 ; σώζαν τίνα e/c θανάτου, to free from the fear of death, to enable one to undergo death fearlessly, Heb. v. 7 [but al. al.] ; ρϋισθαι Ικ θανάτου, to deliver from the danger of death, 2 Co. i. 10 ; plur. θάνατοι, deaths (i. e. mor'oi perils) of various kinds, 2 Co. xi. 23 ; π(ρίλυπος tees θανάτου, even unto death, i. e. so that I am almost dying of sorrow, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34, (λίλΰτη/μαι ίως θανά- του, Jonah iv. 9 ; \ΰπη (ως θανάτου. Sir. .xxxvii. 2, cf. Judj. xvi. 16) : μίχρι θανάτου, so as not to refuse to un- I dergp even death, Phil. ii. 8 ; also άχρι θανάτου, Rev. ii. θάτι 283 θανμα 10; χϋ. 1 1 ; ίσφαγμίνος eir θάνατον, that has receired a deadly wound, Rev. xiii. 3 ; πληγή θανάτου, a deadly wound [_dealh-stroke, cf. W. § 34, 3 b.]. Rev. xiii. 3, 12; Ibeiv θάνατον, to experience death, Lk. ii. 26 ; Heb. xi. 5 ; also yeifaSai θανάτου [see -yeu&j, 2], Mt. xvi. 28 ; Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27 ; 8ιώκ(ΐν τίνα άχρι θανάτου, even to de- struction, Acts xxii. 4 ; κατακρίν(ΐν τινά θανάτω, to con- demn one to death (ad mortem damnare. Tacit.), Mt. x.x. 18 [here Tdf. eis θάν.'\; Mk. x. 33, (see κατακρίνω, a.); Ίίοριΰισθαι els θάν. to undergo death, Lk. xxii. 33 ; τταρα- hibavai τινά fit θάν. that he may be put to death, Mt. X. 21 ; Mk. xiii. 12 ; pass, to be given over to the peril of death, 2 Co. iv. 11 ; παραδ. els κρίμα θανάτου, Lk. xxiv. 20; άποκτΐΐναί τίνα iv θανάτω (a Hebraism [cf. B. 184 (159 sq.)]). Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, [cf. W. 29 note]; αιτία θανάτου (see αΙτία, 2), Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 18; άξιον τι θανάτου, some crime worthy of the penalty of death. Acts xxiii. 29; xxv. 11, 25 ; [xxvi. 31] ; Lk. x.xiii. 15, 22 [here αίτιοι» (q. v. 2 b.) θαν.'\ ; evo^os θανάτου, worthy of punishment by death, Mt. xxvi. 66; Mk. xiv. 64; θανάτω τΕλίυτάτω, let him surely be put to death, Mt. xv. 4 ; Mk. vii. 10, after Ex. xxi. 1 7 Sept. (Ilebr. npv Πή) ; cf. λν. § 44 fin. X. 3 ; [B. u. s.] ; θάν. σταυροϊι, Phil. ii. 8 ; ■ποία θανάτω, by what kind of death, Jn. .xii. 33 ; xviii. 32; -xxi. 19. The inevitable necessity of dying, shared alike by all men, takes on in the popular imagination the form of a person, a tyrant, subjugating men to his power and confining them in his dark dominions : Ro. vi. 9 ; 1 Co. xv. [26], 54, 56 ; Rev. xxi. 4 ; Hades is associated with him as his partner : 1 Co. xv. 55 R G ; Rev. i. 18 (on which see kKcIs) ; vi. 8; xx. 13, [14'], (Ps. xvii. (.xviii.) 5 ; c.xiv. (cxvi.) 3 ; Hos. xiii. 14 ; Sir. xiv. 12). 2. metaph. the loss of that life which alone is worthy of the name, i. e. the misery of soul arising from sin, which begins on earth but lasts and increases after the death of the body: 2 Co. iii. 7; Jas. i. 15, (Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 6 says of life before conversion to Christ, ό βlos ημών o\os άλλο olhev ην el μη θάνατο5 [cf. Philo, praem. et poenis § 12, and refi. in 4 below]) ; opp. to ή ζωή. Ro. vii. 10, 13; 2 Co. ii. 16; opp. to σωτηρία, 2 Co. vii. 10; i. q. the cause of death, Ro. vii. 13; σώζeιv ψυχήν «κ, θανάτου, .las. v. 20 ; μeτaβeβηκevaι ex τοΟ θανάτου els τ. ζ.ιιήν, Jn. v. 24 ; 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; μΐνΐΐν iv τω θανάτω, 1 Jn. iii. 14; θίωρΐ\ν θάνατον, Jn. viii. 51 ; yeveaSai θανάτου, 52 (see 1 above) ; αμαρτία and άμαρτάν€ΐν npos θάνατον (see αμαρτία, 2 b.), 1 Jn. v. 16 s([. (in the rabbin, writers ΠΙΟ"" Xan — after Num. xviii. 22, Sept. αμαρτία θανατη- φ6ρο5 — is a crimen capitate), 3. the miserable slate of the wicked dead in hell is called — now simply ίάκατοΓ, Ro. i. 32 (Sap. i. 1 2 sq. ; ii. 24 ; Tatian or. ad Graec. c. 13; the author of the ep. ad Diognet. c. 10, 7 distin- guishes between ό δοκών ivθάhe θάνατο!, the death of the body, and ό όιτωτ θάνατοί, os φυ\άσσ(ται to'is κατακριθη- σoμivoιs els το πνρ το αΐώνιον) ; now ο beυτepos θάνατο5 and ό θάν. ό 8(ϋτ. (as opp. to the former death, i. e. to that by which life on earth is ended). Rev. ii. 1 1 ; xx. 6, 14' ; xxi. 8, (as in the Targums on Deut. x.xxiii. 6 ; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 11; Is. xxii. 14; Ixvi. 15; [for the Grk. use of the phrase cf. Plut. de facie in orbe lunae 27, 6 p. 942 f.] ; θάνατο! alaivios. Barn. ep. 20, 1 and in eccl. writ, [ό atSios θάvaτos, Philo, post. Cain. § 1 1 fin. ; see also Wetstein on Rev. ii. 11]). 4. In the widest sense, death comprises all the miseries arising from sin, as well physical death as the loss of a life consecrated to God and blessed in him on earth (Philo, alleg. legg. i. § 33 ο \|/υχήs Bavaros dpfr^f μζν φθορά iaTi. κακία! de άνάλη^Ι/ΐ!, [de profug. § 21 θάvaτns ψυχήs 6 peTa κακίας ί'στϊ βίος, esp. §§ 10, 1 1 ; quod det. pot. insid. §§ 14, 15 ; de poster. Cain. § 21, and de praem. et poen. as in 2 above]), lo be followed by wretchedness in the lower world (opp. to ζωή aliuvios) : θάνατος seems to be so used in Ro. v. 1 2 ; vi. 16, 21, [23 ; yet al. refer these last three exx. to 3 above] ; vii. 24 ; viii. 2, 6 ; death, in this sense, is per- sonified in Ro. V. 14, 17, 21 ; vii. 5. Others, in all these pass, as well as those cited under 2, understand physical death; but see Philippi on Ro. v. 12; Messner, Lehre der Apostel, p. 210 ^i{>{.' θανατόω, -ώ ; fut. θανατώσω; 1 aor. inf. θανατώσαι, [3 pers. plur. subjunc. θανατώσωσι, Mt. xxvi. 59 R G] ; Pass., [pres. θανατοϋμαι] ; 1 aor. 4θανατώθην ; (fr. θάνα- τος) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. for Vi"!yr\j J">n, etc. 1. prop, to put to death : τινά, Mt. x. 21 ; xxvi. 59; xxvii. 1 ; Mk. xiii. 12; xiv. 55; Lk. xxi. 16; 2 Co. vi. 9; 1 Pet. iii. 18; pass., by rhetorical hyperbole, to be in the state of one who is being put to death, Ro. viii. 36. 2. metaph. a. to make to die i. e. destroy, render extinct (something vigorous), Vulg. mortifco [A. V. mortify'] : τί, Ro. viii. 13. b. Pass, with dat. of the thing, by death to be liberated from the bond of anything [Ut. to be made dead in relation to; cf. W. 210 (197) ; B. 178 (155)]: Ro. vii. 4.* βό-ΐΓτω : 1 aor. ίθα-^α ; 2 aor. pass, ίτάφην ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 13P; to bury, inter, [BB.DD. s. v. Bur- ial ; cf. Becker, Charicles, sc. ix. Excurs. p. 390 sq.] : τινά, Mt. viii. 21 sq. ; xiv. 12 ; Lk. ix. 59 sq. ; xvi. 22 ; Acts ii. 29 ; v. 6, 9 S(j. ; 1 Co. xv. 4. [Co.MP. : συν-θάτττω.'] * θάρα [WH Qapa], 6, (ΓΤ^ΓΙ a journey, or a halt on a journey [al. 'loiterer']), indecl. prop, name, Terah, the father of Abraham : Lk. iii. 34.* βαρρΐ'ο) (a form current fr. Plato on for the Ionic and earlier Attic ίαρσί'ω), -ω ; 1 aor. inf. ίαμρ^σαι ; [fr. Hom. on] ; to be of good courage, to be hopeful, cimfident : 2 Co. V. 6, 8 ; Heb. xiii. 6 ; to be bold : rfj πeπoιθήσeι, with the confidence, 2 Co. x. 2 ; e's τίνα, towards (against) one, 2 Co. X. 1 ; ev τινι, the ground of my confidence is in one, I am made of good courage by one, 2 Co. vii. 1 6. [Syx. see τολμάω.] * θαρσ-ΐ'ω, -ώ ; (see θαρρίω) ; to be of good courage, be of good cheer ; in the X. T. only in the impv. : θάρσeι, Lk. viii. 48 R G; Mt. ix. 2, 22; Mk. x. 49; Acts xxiii. 11, (Sept. for sy ri-Sx, Gen. xxxv. 1 7, etc.) ; θapσeΊτe, Mt. xiv. 27; Mk! vi. 50; Jn. xvi. 33, (Sept. for ΙΚΤΗ"'?», Ex. xiv. 13 ; Joel ii. 22, etc.). [Syn. see τολμάω.] * θάρσ-οΐ, -Off, TO, courage, confidence; Acts x.xviii. 15.* βαϋμα, -tos, to, (ΘΑΟΜ.^Ι [to wonder at], to gaze at, cf. Bum. Gram. § 114 s. v. ; Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 196 ; Curtius θαυμάζω 284 Oeiov § 308) ; 1. α wonderful thini/. a marvel : 2 Co. xi. 14 L Τ Tr WH. 2. wonder: θαύμαζαν θαϋμα μί'-γα (cf. \V. § 32, 2; [Β. § 131, 5]), to wonder [with great wonder i. e.] exceedingly. Rev. xvii. 6. (In both senses in C!rk. writ. fr. Horn, down; Sept. Job xvii. 8; xviii. 20.) * θαυμάζω; iinpf. ιθανμαζυν; fut. θανμάσομαί{Κκν. xvii. 8 R (i Τ I'r, a form far more com. in tlie best (irk. writ, also than θανμάσω ; cf. Kriiger § 40 s. v. ; KUliner § IW.! s. V. ; [Veitcli s. v.]) ; 1 aor. (θαύμασα ; 1 aor. pass, euav- μάσθψ in a mid. sense (Rev. xiii. .'i R" LTrt.st.); uImi 1 fill. ]iass., in I he sense of the mill., θαυμασθήσομαι (Re. . xvii. 8 L WII ; but the very few cxx. of the mid. use in prof. auth. are doubtful ; cf. Stephanus, Thesaur. iv. p. 259 s(j. ; [yet see Veitch s. v.]) ; to wonder, wonder at, maroel: absol., Mt. viii. 10, 27; ix. 8 Rec, ΆΖ; xv. 31 ; xxi. 20 ; x.xii. 22 ; .\xvii. 14; Mk. v. 20 ; vi. 51 [Rec. ; L br.Trmrg.br.]; xv. 5; Lk. i. 21 [.see below], G3; viii. 25; xi. 14 ; xxiv. 41 ; .In. v. 20; vii. 15; Acts ii. 7; iv. 13; xiii. 41 ; Rev. xvii. 7 sip ; with ace. of the pers. Lk. vii. !) ; with ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Tr br. WII reject the v.s. (see πρόί. I. 1 a. init. and 2 b.)]; Jn. v. 28 ; Acta vii. 31 ; θαύμα μίγα (.-ice θαύμα, 2), Rev. xvii. 6 ; πρόσωπον, to admire, ])ay regard to, one's external appearance, i. e. to be influenced by partiality, Jude 16 (Sept. for D-:D NV.}, Dent. x. 17; Job xiii. 10; Prov. xviii. 5 ; Is. ix. 14, etc.) ; foil, by Siti τι, Mk. vi. G ; Jn. vii. 21 where Sia τούτο (omitted by Tilf.) is to be joined to vs. 21 [so G L Tr nirg. ; cf. Meyer (ed. Wei-i of pious admiration, admirable, excellent: 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 36, 2 ; for I'lK, Ps. viii. 2; xcii. (xciii.) 4, (5)). b. passinr/ human comprehension : Mt. xxi. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, (fr. Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22 sq., where for n'^SJ, as Job xiii. 3 ; Mic. vii. 15, etc.). c. causini/ amazement joined with terror: Rev. xv. 1, 3, (so for N-iu, Kx.xv. 11, etc.). d. marvellous i. e. extraordinary, slrikiny, surprising: 2 Co. xi. 14 11 G (see θαύμα, 1) ; Jn. Lx. 30.• βίά, nut, ή, (feni. of flfcis), [fr. Horn, down], a goddess: Acts xix. 27, and Rec. also in 35, 87.' β€(ίομοι, -ωμαί : 1 aor. ϊθ(ασάμην ; pf . τ^θύιμαι ; 1 aor. pass. ίθ(οθψ in pass, sense (Mt. vi. 1; xxiii. 5; Mk wi. 11; Thuc. 3, 3.^, 3; cf. Kriiger §40 s. v. ; [but Kriiger himself now reads Βρασθίν in Thuc. I.e.; see Veitch 8. v.; W. § 38, 7 c. ; B. 52 (40)]); depon. verb; (fr. 0ea, ΘΑΟΜΑΙ, with which θαύμα is connected, q. v.) ; lo behold, look upon, view alteniivelg, contemplate, (in Grk. writ, often used of public shows; cf. θία, θάιμα, θία- τρον, θαιτρίζω, etc. [see below]) : τί, Mt. xi. 7 ; Lk. vii. 24 ; Jn. iv. 35 ; xi. 45 : of august things and persons that are looked on with admiration : τι, Jn. i. 14, 32 ; 1 Jn. i. 1 ; Acts xxii. 9, (2 Mace. iii. 36) ; tiwi, with a ptcp., Mk. xvi. 14 : Acts i. 1 1 ; foil, by ΰτί, 1 Jn. iv. 14 ; θ(αθηναι υπό T»Ot, Mk. .\vi. 1 1 ; npiis το θίαθηνηι αύτο'α, in order to make a show to them, Mt. vi. 1 ; xxiii. 5; lo view, take a view of: τ/, Lk. xxiii. 55 ; τινά, Mt. xxii. 11 ; in the sense of visiting, meeting with a person, Ro. xv. 24 (2 Chr. xxii. 6; .Joseph, antt. 16, 1,2) ; lo learn by looking: foil. by oTt, Acts viii. 18 Rec.; to see ivilh Ihe eyes, 1 Jn. iv. 12; \.(\. (Lat. conspirio) to perceive: τιι/ά, Jn. viii. 10 RG; Acts xxi. 27; foil, by ace. with ptcp., Lk. v. 27 [not Lmrg.]; Jn. i. as ; foil. In ΰη, Jn. vi. 5." Cf. 0. F. Fritzsche, in Fritzsihiorum Opuscc. p. 295 sqq. [Ace. to Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 11, θίοσβοι in its earlier ilas.sic use denotes often a w ο η d e r i η g regard, (if. even in Stralio 14, 5, τα eiTTo θί(ί/ιοτα i. q. βοΰ^ιατο). This spoiific sliaile of meaning, however, gradually faded out. anil left tlie more general signification of such a looking as seeks merely the satisfaction of the sense of sight. Cf. fliiupe'ii).) OcarpC^u : (θίατρον. q. v.) ; prop, to bring ujion Ihe stage ; hence /i< sil firlli ax ii s/i< rtacle, expose lo contempt; Pass., pres. ptcp. θ(ατριζόμ(νο! [A. V. being made a gazing- slock'], lleb. x. 33. (Several times also in eccl. and , Jiyzant. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.] ; but in the same sense (κθ(ατρίζω in Polyb. 3, 91, 10; al. ; [cf. W. 25 (24) note; also Tilf. ed. 7 Proleg. p. lix. sq.].) * βί'ατρον, -ου, τ<5, (θίάομαι) ; 1. a theatre, a place in which games and dramatic spectacles are exhibited, and public assemblies held (for the Greeks used the theatre .also as a forum): Acts xix. 29, 31. 2. i. q. θία and ίί'ημα, a public show (Aeschin. dial. socr. 3, 20 ; Achill. Tat. 1, 16 p. 55), and hence, metaph., a man who is ex- hibited to be gazed at and made sport of: 1 Co. iv. 9 [A. V. a spectacle'}.' θ6ΐον, -ου. TO, (apparently the neut. of the adj. ίίίοι i. q. divine incense, because burning brimstone was regarded as having power to purify, and to ward of? contagion [but Curtius § 320 allies it w. θνω ; cf. Lat. fumux, Eng. rfws•/]), brimstone : Lk. xvii. 29 ; Rev. ix. 1 7 sq. ; xiv. 10 ; xix. 20 ; [xx. 10] ; xxi. 8. (Gen. xix. 24 ; Ps. x. (xi.) 6; Ezek. xxxviii. 22; Horn. II. 16, 228; Od. 22, 481, ββίος 285 θβ\ω i'J3; (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 99 c. ; Ael. v. h. 1.3, 15 [16]; Hdian. 8, 4, 26 [9 ed. Bekk.].) • Oeios, -tia, -dou, (θ(6:), [fr. Horn, down], divine : ή θ(ία Ιΰναμις, 2 Pet. i. 3 ; φύσΐ! (Diod. 5, 31), ibid. 4 ; neut. to Beiov, divinily, deity (Lat. numen diciniini), not only used by the Greeks to denote tlie divine nature, power, providence, in the general, without reference to any individual deity (as Hdt. 3, 108; Thuc. 5, 70; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 15 ; Hell. 7, δ, 13; mem. 1, 4, 18; Plat. Phaedr. p. 242c.; Polyb. 32, 25, 7 ; Diod. 1,6; 13, 3; 12; 16,60; Lcian. de sacrif. 1 ; pro imagg. 13, 17. 28), but also by Philo (as in mundi opif. § 61 ; de agric. 1 7 ; leg. ad Gai. I), andby Josephus (antt. 1,3, 4; 11,1; 2,12,4; 5,2, 7; 11, 5, 1; 12, 6, 3; 7, 3; 13,8, 2; 10, 7 ; 14,9,5; 17, 2, 4; 20,11, 2; b. j. 3, 8, 3; 4, 3, 10), of the one, true God; hence most appositely employed by Paul, out of regard for Gentile usage, in Acts xvii. 29.* β€ΐότη5, -))Tor, ή, dioinitij, dioine nature : Ro. i. 20. (Sap. xviii. 9; Pliilo in opif. § 61 fin.; Plut. symp. 6G.0 a. ; Lcian. calumn. c. 17.) [Syn. see θ(ότης.~\* θίΐώΒηϊ, -€s, (fr. Belov brimstone [q. v.]), of brimstone, ."ulpliuroux: Rev. ix. 17; a later Grk. word; of. Lob. ad Phryn. ρ 228; ISopli. Lex. s. v.].• βί'λημα, -το$, το, (θίλω), a word purely bibl. and eecl. [yet found in Aristot. de plant. 1, 1 p. 815'', 21]; Sept. for ί'3Π and Jii'l ; tvil I, i. e. a. what one wishes or has determined shall be done, [i. e. objectively, thing willed^ : Lk. xii. 47 ; Jn. v. 30 ; 1 Co. vii. 37 ; 1 Th. v. 18 ; 2 Tim. ii. 26 ; Heb. x. 10 ; Rev. iv. 11 ; θίλημα τοΟ 6cod is used — of the purpose of God to bless mankind through Christ, Acts .xxii. 14 ; Eph. i. 9 ; Col. i. 9 ; of what God wishes to be done by us, Ro. xii. 2 ; Col. iv. 12 [W. Ill (105)]; 1 Pet. iv. 2; and simply το ίίλι;μα, Ro. ii. 18 [W. 594 (553)] (Sir. xliii. 16 (17) [but here the better txt. now adds αϋτοΟ, see Fritzsche; in patrist. Grk., how- ever, θίλημα is so used even without the art. ; cf. Ignat. ad Rom. 1,1; ad Eph. 20, l,etc.]) ; toC κυρίου, Eph. v. 1 7 ; plur. commands, precepts : [Mk. iii. 3.') WIL nirg.] ; Acts xiii. 22, (Ps. cii. (ciii.) 7; 2 Mace. i. 3) ; eW! ro θί- λημά Ttvos, foil, by ΐι/α, Jn. vi. 39 sq. ; ! Co. xvi. 12, cf. Mt. xviii. 14 ; foil, by inf., 1 Pet. ii. 15 ; by ace. with iuL, 1 Th. iv. 3. [Cf. B. 237 (204) : 240 (207) ; W. § 44, 8.'] b. i. q. TO eiXftv. [i. e. the abstract act of wHlin;/, the subjective] trill, choice: 1 Pet. iii. 17 [cf. W. 604 (562)]; 2 Pet. i. 21 ; nouh τ. θΐλ. tivos (esp. of God), Mt. vii. 21 ; xii. 50 ; xxi. 31 ; Mk. iii. 35 [here WH mrg. the plur., see above] ; Jn. iv. 34 : vi. 38 ; vii. 1 7 ; ix. 31 ; Eph. vi. 6; Ileb. X. 7, 9,36; xiii. 21 ; iJn.ii. 17; το ifX. (L Τ Tr WII βοί\ημα) TIVOS κατ(ργάζ(σθαί, 1 Pet. iv. 3; yivfrcu το ei\. Tivot. Alt. vi. 10 ; xxvi. 42 ; Lk. xi. 2 L R ; .xxii. 42 ; Acts xxi. 14 ; ή βου\η τοϋ 6(\ήματος, Eph. i. 11 ; ή {ϋ8ο- κία τοϋ θ(\. ib. 5 ; cV τω θ(\. τοΐι θίοϋ, if God will, Ro. i. 10 ; δίά ΘΛηματοί θ€ού, Ro. χν. 32 ; 1 Co. i. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 1 ; viii. 5 ; Eph. i. 1 ; Col. i. 1 ; 2 Tim. i. 1 ; κατά το θ(\. ToC etoi. Gal. i. 4 ; [1 Pet. iv. 19] ; 1 Jn. v. 14. i. ((. pleasure : Lk. xxiii. 25 ; i. q. inclination, desire : aapxas, avSpos, Jn. i. 13; plur. Eph. ii. 3. [Syn. see θίλω, fin.]• βΛησαϊ, -tos, η, (θίΚω), i. q. το θ^\(ίν, a williny, urill : Heb. ii. 4. (Ezek. xviii. 23; 2 Chr. xv. 15; Prov. viii. 35; Sap. xvi. 25 ; [Tob. xii. 18]; 2 Mace. xii. 16; 3 Mace. ii. 26 ; [plur. in] Melissa epist. ad Char. p. 62 Orell. ; ace. to Pollux [1. 5 c. 47] a vulgarism ^ίδtωτiκόv) ; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 353].) * StXa (only in this form in the N. T. ; in Grk. auth. also ί'^ίλω [Veitch s. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]); impf. ήθιλον; [fut. 3 pers. sing. βιΧήσα, Rev. xi. 5 WII mrg.] ; 1 aor. ηθέλησα ; (derived apparently fr. eXtii' with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop, to seize with the mind ; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its root as uncertain [he inclines, however, to the view of Pott, Fick, Vanicek and others, which connects it with a root meaning to hold to]) ; Sept. for Π3Χ and vsn ; TO WILL, (_have in mind,) intend; i. e. 1. to be resolved or determined, to purpose: absol., ό θ(\ων, Ro. ix. 16; roC OfoC ii'AoiTos if God will. Acts .xviii. 21 ; eiv ό xipiot θίληση (in Attic eai/ ifof ίί'λι;, ηιι οι θ(οΊ θί\ωσιν [cf. Lob. u. s.]), 1 Co. iv. 19; Jas. iv. 15: καθώς ήθίλησι, 1 Co. xii. 18 ; XV. 38; τί, Ro. vii. 15 sq. 19 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 36; Gal. v. 1 7 ; with the aorist inf., Mt. .xx. 14 ; xxvi. 15 ; Jn. vi. 21 (where the meaning is, they were willing to receive him into the ship, but that was unnecessary, because unexpectedly the ship was nearing the land ; cf. Liicke, E-Crusius, Ewald, [Godet], al. ad loc. ; W. § 54, 4 ; [B. 375 (321)]) ; Jn. vii. 44 ; Acts xxv. 9 ; Col. i. 27 ; 1 Th. ii. 18 ; Rev. xi. 5, etc. ; with the present inf., Lk. x. 29 RG; Jn. vi. 67; vii. 17; viii. 44; Acts xxiv. 6 [Rec.]; Ro. vii. 21 ; Gal. iv. 9 [here Τ Trtxt. WH txt. 1 aor. inf.] ; with an inf. suggested by the context, Jn. v. 21 (oCr fliXet, sc. f ωοποιί}σαι ) ; Mt. viii. 2; Jlk. iii. 13; vi. 22; Ro. ix. 18; Rev. .xi. 6, etc. οΰ θίλω to be unwilling: with the aorist inf., Mt. ii. 18; xv. 32; xxii. 3; Mk. vi. 26; Lk. XV. 28 ; Jn. v. 40 ; Acts vii. 39 ; 1 Co. xvi. 7 ; Rev. ii. 21 [not Rec.], etc. ; with the present inf., Jn. vii. 1 ; Acts xiv. 13; .xvii. 18; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc.; with the inf. om. and to be gathered fr. the context, Mt. xviii. 30; xxi. 29 ; Lk. xviii. 4, etc. ; ΘΛω and ού θίΚω foil, by the ace. with inf., Lk. i. 62; 1 Co. x. 20; on the Pauline phrase ου θ(\ω ίμάς d-yi'Ofii', see ά•/νο(ω, a. ; corresponding to θίλω ίμας elStvat, 1 Co. xi. 3; Col. ii. 1. θ(λ€ΐν, used of a purpose or resolution, is contrasted with the carry- ing out of the purpose into act: opp. to Troirlv, πράσ- aeiv, Ro. vii. 15, 19; 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. (on which latter pass. cf. De Wette and Meyer; W. § 61, 7b.); to evtp- yfii/, Phil. ii. 13, cf. Mk. vi. 19 ; Jn. vii. 44. One is said also θΐΚα,ν that which he is on the point of doing : Mk. vi. 48 ; Jn. i. 43 (44) ; and it is used thus also of things that tend or point to some conclusion [cf. W. § 42, 1 b. ; B. 254 (219)]: Acts ii. 12; xvii. 20. "Κανθάνιι airroiis rovTo θίλοιηας this (viz. what follows, ότι etc.) escapes them of their own will, i. e. they are purposely, wilfully, ignorant, 2 Pet. iii. 5, where others interpret as follows: this (viz. what has been said previously) desiring (i. e. holding as their opinion [for e.xx. of this sense see Soph. Lex. s. v. 4]), they are ignorant etc. ; but cf. De Wette ad loc. and W. § 54, 4 note; [B. § 150, 8 Rem.], τάς θί\(ύ 286 θ€μέ\ιο<; ΐπιθνμΐα! τοΰ πατροί νμων ufKtTt Trottlv it is your purpose tu fullil tlie lusts of jour father, i. e. ye are actuated by him of your own free knowledge and choice, Jn. viii. 44 [W. u. s. ; B. 375 (321)]. 2. i. q. to ilesire, to wish: Tt, Mt. XX. 21 ; Alk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.] ; Jn. XV. 7 ; 1 Co. iv. 21 ; 2 Co. xi. 1 2 ; foil, by the aorist inf., Mt. V. 40 ; xii. 38 ; xvi. 25 ; xix. 1 7 ; Mk. x. 43 sq. ; Lk. viii. 20 ; xxiii. 8 ; Jn. v. 6, 35 (ye were desirous of rejoicing) ; xii. 21 ; Gal. iii. 2; Jas. ii. 20 ; 1 Pet. iii. 10 ; foil, by the present inf., Jn. ix. 27 ; Gal. iv. 20 (ήθ(\ον I could wish, on wliicli impf. see (ΰχημαι, 2) ; the inf. is wanting and to be supplied fr. the neighboring verb, Mt. xvii. 12; xxvii. 15; Mk. ix. 13 ; Jn. xxi. 18 ; foil, by the ace. and inf., Mk. vii. 24 ; Lk. i. 62 ; Jn. x.xi. 22 sq. ; Ro. xvi. 19 ; 1 Co. vii. 7, 32 ; xiv. 5 ; Gal. vi. 13 ; οϋ ίί'λω to be unwilling, {desire not) : foil, by the aor. inf., Mt. xxiii. 4 ; Lk. xLx. 14,27; 1 Co. x. 20 ; foil, by 'tva, Ut. vii. 12; Mk. vi. 25; ix. 30 ; x. 35 ; Lk. vi. 31; Jn. xvii. 24 ; cf. W. § 44, 8 b.; [B. § 13Π, 46]: foil, by the delib. aubj. (aor.) : OtKeis σνλλίξωμ^ν αυτά (cf. the Germ, willst ilii, sollen wir zusammenlesen'i [Goodwin § 88]), Mt. xiii. 28 ; add, Mt. XX. 32 [where L br. adds Ίνα] ; xxvi. 1 7 ; xxvii. 17, 21; Mk.x.51; xiv. 12; xv. 9, 12 [Trbr. iA.]; Lk. ix. 54 ; xviii. 41 ; xxii. 9, (cf. W. § 41 a. 4 b. ; B. § 139, 2) ; foil, by «i, Lk. xii. 49 (see tl, I. 4) ; foil, by ij, to prefer, 1 Co. xiv. 19 (see ή, 3 d.). 3. i. q. to love; foil, by an inf., to like to do a thing, be fond of doing: Mk. xii. 38; Lk. .XX. 46 ; cf. W. § 54, 4 ; [B. § 150, 8]. 4. in imi- tation of the ITebr. |'3Π, to take delight, have pleasure [opp. by B. § 150, 8 Rem. ; cf. AV. § 33, a. ; but see exx. below] : ίν nw, in a thing. Col. ii. 18 (tV κάΚω, to delight in goodness. Test. xii. Patr. p. 688 [test. Ash. 1 ; (cf. th ζωήν, p. 635, test. Zeb. 3) ; Ps. cxi. (cxii.) 1 ; cxlvi. (cxlvii.) 10]; ei» tiw, dat. of the pers., 1 S. xviii. 22; 2 S. XV. 26 ; [1 K. X. 9] ; 2 Chr. ix. 8 ; for 3 Πϊ"!, 1 Chr. xxviii. 4). τινά, to love one : Mt. xxvii. 43 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 9; [xvii. (xviii.) 20; xl. (xii•) 12]; Ezek. xviii. 32, cf. 23 ; Tob. xiii. 6 ; opp. to μισ^Ίν, Ignat. ad Rom. 8, 3 ; θίληθήναι is used of those who finil favor, ibid. 8, 1). τί, Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, (fr. Hos. vi. 6) ; lleb. x. 5, 8, (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7). As respects the distinction between ^ονΧομαι and βίΚω, the former seems to desig- nate the will which follows deliberation, the latter the will which proceeds from inclination. This ap- pears not only from Mt. i. 19, but also from the fact that the Sept. express the idea of pleasure, delight, by the verb ei\fiv (see just above). The reverse of this dis- tinction is laid down by Bitm. Lexil. i. p. 26 [Eng. trans, p. rJ4]; Delitzsch on lleb. vi. 17. Ace. to Tiltmann (Syn. i. p. 124) θίΧα,ν denotes mere volition, βούλισθαι inclination; [cf. Whislon on Dem. 9,5; 124, 13]. [Philip Buttmann's statement of the distinction between the two words is quoted with approval by Srhmidt (Syn. iii. ch. 146), who adduces in confirmation (hesides many exx.) the assumed relationship between β. and feK-rls, 4\nls ; the use of β. in the sense of ' resolve ' in such passages as Thuc. 5, 9 ; of SeKav i. q. ^Setoi in the poets ; of 0. as parallel to ί-κιθυμΰν in Dem. 29, 45, etc. ; and pass, in which the two words occur together and β. is apparently equiv. to ' wish ' while β. stands for ' will,' aa Xen. an. 4, 4, 5 ; Eur. Ale. 281, etc., etc. At the same time it must be confessed that sdiolars are far from harmonious on the subject. Many afrrec with Prof, (iriinm that Θ. f;ives prominence to the emotive ele- ment, β. to the rational anil volitive; that β. signifies the choice, while β. marks the choice as deliberalr and mielliqent ; yet tliey acknowledge that the words are sometimes used indi,scriminately, and esp, that β. as the less siiarjily dclined term is put wlicre β. woidd be proper; see Klltmli, Lex. Soph.; I'ape, Haudwurterb. ; Seder, Worterb. d. Horn., s. v. βονΚομοί ; Suhle und Schnetdewin, Haudwurterb. ; Croshy, Lex. to Xen. an., s. v. efle'Aia; (Arnold's) Pdlon, Grk. Syn. §129; Webster, Syut. and Syn. of the Grk. Test. p. 197; Wilke, Clavis N. T., ed. 2, ii. 603 ; Schlensner, N. T. Lex. s. V. βούκ. ; Munthe, Observv. pliil. in N. T. ex Diod. Sic. etc. p. 3 ; Valckenaer, Scholia etc. ii. 23 ; Westermann ou Dem. 20, 111 ; the commentators generally on Mt. as abo\e ; Bp. L•Jtitβ. on Philem. 13, 14; liiddie in Schaff's Lange on V.\A\. p. 42; this seems to be roughly intended i^y Ammonias also ; βοΰΚΐσθαι μίν eVl μόνου Κΐκτίον του XoytKOv ' τί) δέ θ(\(ΐν κώ Ιτ\ a\6you ζύου; (and Kustath. on Iliad 1, 112, p. 61, 2. says oij\ απλών βίΚω, αλλά βοΰΚομαι, oirtp 4πίτασί$ τοΟ θ4Κ(ΐν (στίν). On the otlier hand, L. and S. (s. v. ίβ(\ω) ; Passim' ed. 5 ; Rost, Wiirterb. ed. 4 ■ Sdieiikl, Schulwiirterh. ; Donaldson, Crat. § 463 sq. ; Wahl, Clav. Apocr., s. v. βοΰ\. ; Cremer s. vv. βούΚαμαι and θέλω ; esp. Stallb. on Plato's de repub. 4, 13 p. 437 b., (cf. too Cope on Aristot. rhet. 2, 19, 19) ; Franke on Dem. 1, 1, substantially reverse the distinc- tion, as does EUicott on 1 Tim. v. 14 ; Wordsworth on 1 Th. ii. 18. Although the latter opinion may .seem to be favored by that view of the derivation of the words which allies βούΚ. with voliiptas (Curtius § 659, cf. p. 726), and makes β4\. sig- nify 'to hold to something,' 'form a fixed resolve' (see above, ad init.), yet the predominant usage of the N. T. will be evident to one who looks out the pass, referred to above (Fritzsche's explanation of Mt. i. 19 is hardly natu- ral) ; to which maybe added such as Mt. ii. 18 ; ix. i;) ; xii. 38; XV. 28; xvii. 4 (xx. 21, 32) ; xxvi. 15, 39 (cf. Lk. xxii. 42) ; Mk. vi. 19 ; vii. 24 ; ix. 30 ; x. 35 ; xii. 38 ; .xv. 9 (cf. .In. ΧΛ'ίϋ. 39), 15 (where R. V. wishing is questionable; cf. Lk. xxiii. 20) ; Lk. x. 24 ; xv. 28 ; xvi. 26 ; Jn. v. 6 ; vi. 1 1 ; xii. 21 ; Acts X. 10; xviii. 15; Ro. vii. 19 (cf. 15, its opp. to μισώ, and indeed ihe use of Θε λα? throughout tins chapter) ; 1 Co. vii. 36,39; xiv.35; Kph. i. 11; 2 Th. iii. 10, etc. Such passages as 1 Tim. ii. 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 9 will be ranged now on one side, now on the other; cf. 1 Co. xii. 11, 18. β4Κω occurs in the N. Τ about five times as often as βού\ομαι 'on tlie relative use of the words in classic «Titers see Tycho Mommsen in Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 415 sq.). The usage of the Sept. (beyond the particular specified by Prof. Grimm) seems to afford little light ; see e. g. Gen. xxiv. 5, 8 ; Deut. xxv. 7 ; Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7, 9, etc. In modern Greek β4\ω seems to have nearly driven βοΰλομαι out of use ; on θίΚω as an auxiliary cf. Jebb in V^incent and Dickson's Handbook, Α\ψ. §§ 60, 64. For exx of the associated use of the words in classic Grk., see Ste/ih. Thesaur. s. v. βού\ομαι p. 366 d. ; Bp. Lghtft., Cremer, and esp. Schmidt, as above | βΕμΐ'λιοΐ, -OK, (θίμα [i. e. thing laid down]), laid down as a foundation, belonging to a foundation, (Diod. 5, 66; θιμίΚιοι λίθοι, Arstph. av. 1137); generally as a subst., ό θ(μ(λιο! [sc. λίθος] (1 Co. iii. 11 sq. ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Rev. xxi. 19), and το iffitAtow (rarely so in Grk. writ., as [Ar- istot. phys. auscult. 2, 9 p. 200', 4] ; Pans. 8, 32, 1 ; [al.]), the foundation (of a building, wall, city): prop., Lk. vi. θεμίλιόω 287 Oeo^ 49 ; Tiffevai θ(μίΚιον, Lk. vi. 48 ; xiv. 29 ; plur. oi θ(μίΚιυι \ (chiefly so in Grk. writ.), Heb. xi. 10 ; Rev. x.xi. 14, 19 ; neut. TO θ(μ. Acts xvi. 26 (and often in the Sept.) ; metaph. the foundations, beginnings, first principles, of an institution or system of truth: 1 Co. iii. 10, 12; the rudiments, first principles, of Christian life and knowl- edge, Heb. vi. 1 (μίται/οιαε gen. of apposition [W. 531 (494)]) ; a course of instruction begun by a teacher, Ro. XV. 20; Christ is called θιμίΧ- i. e. faith in him, which is like a foundation laid in the soul on which is built up the fuller and richer knowledge of saving truth, 1 Co. iii. 11; των άπο<ηο\ωυ (gen. of appos., on account of what follows : ovtus ■ ■ ■ Χριστού, [al. say gen. of origin, see ΐποικο^ομίω ; cf. W. § 30, 1 ; Meyer or Ellicott ad loc.]), of the apostles as preachers of salvation, upon which foundation the Christian church has been built, Eph. ii. 20 ; a solid and stable spiritual possession, on which resting as on a foundation they may strive to lay hold on eternal life, 1 Tim. vi. 19; the church is appar- ently called θ€μ. as the foundation of the ' city of God,' 2 Tim. ii. 19, cf. 20 and 1 Tim. iii. 15. (Sept. several times also for ji'D'^X, a palace. Is. x.w. 2 ; Jer. vi. 5 ; Amos i. 4, etc.) * θεμΑιόω : fut. θιμ^Χιωσω ; 1 aor. 4θ(μ(Κίωσα ; Pass., pf. ptcp. τ(θ(μ(\ιωμ(νος \ plupf. 3 pers. sing. Teic/xfXtwro ( .Mt. vii. 25 ; Lk. vi. 48 R G ; without augm. cf. λ\. § 1 2, 9 ; [Β. 33 (29) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]) ; Sept. for ip;; [fr. Xen. down]; to laij the foundation, to found : prop., την yi)v, Heb. i. 10 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 26 ; Prov. iii. 1 9 ; Is. xlviu. 13, al.) ; t\ cVi Ti, Mt. vii. 25 ; Lk. vi. 48. metaph. (Diod. II, 68 ; 15, 1) to make stable, establish, [A. V. ground'] : of the soul, [1 aor. opt. 3 pers. sing.] 1 Pet. v. 10 [Rec. ; but T, Tr mrg. in br., the fut.] ; pass., Eph. iii. 17 (18) ; Col. i. 23.* 6eo-S(SaKTo$, -ok, (flfoj and StdaKTos), taui/lit of God : 1 Th. iv. 9. ([Barn. ep. 21, 6 (cf. Harnack's note)]; eccles. writ.)* β£θ-λ<ίγο8, -ου, ό, (θ(6ς and Χίγω), in Grk. writ. [fr. Aris- tot. on] one who speaks (treats) of the gods and divine things, versed in sacred science ; ( Grossmann, Quaestiones Philoneae,Lp. 8, shows that the word is used also by Pliilo, esp. of Moses [cf. de praem. et poen. § 9]). This title is given to John in the inscription of the Apocalypse, ace. to the Rec. text, apparently asi/ie publisher and interpre- ter of divine oracles, just as Lucian styles the same per- son OfoKoyos in Alex. 19 that he calls προφήτης in c. 22. The common opinion is that John was called ^ioAoyot in the same sense in which the term was used of Gregory of Xazianzus, viz. because he taught the θιστη! of the \oyot. But then the wonder is, why the copyists did not prefer to apply the epithet to him in the title of the Gospel.* θ(ομαχ(<ι>, -ω ; (θ(ομάχος) ; to fight against God : Acts xxiii. 9 Rec. (Eur., Xen., Diod., al. ; 2 Mace. vii. 19.)* θ€θμάχο5, -ου, ό, (Bfot and μάχομαι), fighting against God, resisting God: Acts v. 39. (Symm.,Job xxvi. 5; Prov. ix. 18; xxi. 16; Heracl. Pont, alleg. Homer. 1; Lcian. Jup. tr. 45.) • θίόίΓνοΛΓτοί, -ov, (fifos and πνίω), inspired by God: ■γραφή, i. e. the contents of Scripture, 2 Tim. iii. 16 [see ■πάς, 1. 1 c] ; σοφίη, [pseudo-] Phocyl. 121 ; Svetpoi, Plut. de plac. phil. 5, 2, 3 p. 904 f. ; [Orac. Sibyll. 5, 406 (cf. 308) ; Nonn. paraphr. ev. loan. 1, 99]. (βμπνίνστος also is used passively, but απν^υστος, ΐνπνΐνστος, ττυριπνΐνστος, [δυσδιάτΓΐ'ίυστοί], actively, [and ^υσανάπι/ιυστος appar. either act. or pass. ; cf. W. 96 (92) note].)* θ€05, -οϋ, ό and ή, voc. fl«', once in the X. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24 ; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25 ; Is. xxxviii. 20] ; Sir. xxiii. 4 ; Sap. ix. 1 ; 3 Mace. vi. 3 ; 4 Mace. vi. 27 ; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57 ; Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 16 ; [5, 20, 7 ; vit. Const. 2, 55, 1. 59] ; cf. W. § 8, 2 c. ; [B. 12 (11)] ; ([on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vanicek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root mean- ing to supplicate, implore ; hence the implored ; per con- tra cf. Max Mailer, Chips etc. iv. 227 sq. ; L. and S. s. v. fin.]) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; Sept. for '^X, DTibN and 7iy\' ; a god, a goddess ; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ή β^ός. Acts xLx. 37 G L Τ Tr Wll ; θ(οϋ φωνή neat ουκ ανθρώπου, Acts xii. 22 ; άνθρωπος i)v ιγοιεΙγ aeaurov θ€Ον, Jn. χ. 33 ; plur., of the gods of the Gentiles : Acts xiv. 11 ; xix. 26 ; Xeyo/jfiOi θ(οί, 1 Co. viii. 5' ; oi φΰσ€ΐ μή όντ(ς θ(οί. Gal. iv. 8 ; τοϋ θιοϋ 'Ρ^φάν [q. v.]. Acts vii. 43 ; of angels: (ΐσ\ θ(οϊ πολλοί, 1 Co. viii. 5' (on which cf. Philo de somn. i. § 39 ό μίν άληθίΐα θ(ος fis ίστιν, οΊ δ' ev κατάχρηση Xfyofierai πλ(ίους). [On the use of the sing. θ(ός (and Lat. deus) as a generic term by (later) heathen writ., see Norton, Genuinen. of the Gosp. 2d ed. iii. addit. note D; cf. Dr. Ezra Abbot in Chris. Exam, for X'ov. 1848, p. 389 sqq.; Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, ch. i. §ii. ; see Bib. Sacr. for July 1856, p. 666 sq.. and for addit. exx. Nagelsbach, Homer. Theol. p. 129 ; also his Nachho- merische Theol. p. 139 sq. ; Stephanus, Thes. s. v. ; and reff. (by Prof. Abbot) in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. and Exeg. i. p. 120 note.] 2. Wliether Christ is called God must be determined from Jn. i. 1 ; xx. 28 ; 1 Jn. v. 20 ; Ro. ix. 5 ; Tit. ii. 13 ; Heb. i. 8 .sq., etc. ; the matter is still in dispute among theologians; cf. Grimm, Insti- tutio theologiae dogmaticae, ed. 2, p. 228 sqq. [and the discussion (on Ro. ix. 5) by Professors Dwight and Ab- bot in Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. etc. u. s., esp. pp. 42 sqq. 113 sqq.]. 3. spoken of the only and true God: with the article, Mt. iii. 9 ; Mk. xiii. 19; Lk. ii. 13; Acts ii. 11, and very often; with prepositions: « τοϋ θ. Jn. viii. 42, 47 and often in John's writ. ; νπο τον θ. Lk. i. 26 [Τ Tr WH άπό] ; Acts xxvi. 6 ; παρά τον θ. Jn. viii. 40 ; ix. 16 [L Τ Tr WH here om. art.] : παρά τω θ. Ro. ii. 13 [Tr txt. om. and L WH Tr mrg. br. the art.] ; ix. 14 ; iv τω θ- Col. iii. 3 ; c'ffi τώ θ. Lk. i. 47 ; it's τον θ. Acts xxiv. 15 [Tdf. προς] ; (π\ τον θ. Acts χν. 19; xxvi. 18, 20 ; προς τον θ- Jn. i. 2 ; Acts xxiv. [15 Tdf.], 16, and many other exx. without the article: Mt. vi. 24; Lk. iii. 2 ; XX. 38 ; Ro. viii. 8, 33; 2 Co. i. 21 ; v. 19 ; vi. 7; 1 Th. ii. 5, etc. ; with prepositions : άττο θ(οΰ, Jn. iii. 2 ; xvi. 30 ; Ro. xiii. 1 [L Τ Tr AVH ύπο] ; παρά θίοί, Jn. ί. 6; 6e6i! 288 OepairevM U θίον. Acts V. 39 ; 2 Co. v. 1 ; Phil. iii. 9 ; trapa βίώ, 2 Th. i. 6 ; 1 Pet. ii. 4 ; κατά θιύν, Uo. viii. 27 ; 2 Co. vii. 9sq. ; cf. W. § 19 s. v. ό ^for xii-or (gen. of pers.), Ihe (guardian) God of any one, blessing and protecting him : Mt. xxii. 32 ; Mk. .\ii. 26 sq. [29 \VH mrg. (see below)]; Lk. XX. 37; .In. xx. 17; Acts iii. 13; xiii. 17; 2 Co. vi. 16; Ileb. xi. 16; Rev. .x.xi. 3 [without ό : but GTTrWII txt. om. the phrase] ; ό flfut μου, i. «j. οί flμί, ω και λατρεύω (Acts xxvii. 23) : Κο. i. 8 ; 1 Co. i. 4 [Tr mrg. br. the gen.] ; 2 Co. xii. 21 : Phil. i. 3; iv. 19; Philera. 4 ; Kvpios ό ifoi σου, ημών, υμών, αυτών (in imit. of Ilebr. ^'r!"7S ΠΙΓΤ , irn'7!< "■, DD-riSx "•, Dn'nSlj! '"): Mt. iv. 7; xxii. 37; Mk. xii. 29 [see above]; Lk. iv. 8, 12; x. 27; Acts ii. 39 ; cf. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test. p. 169 ; [and Bp. Lghtft. as (juoted s. v. Kupios, c. a. init.]; ό fleor κ. ιτατηρ του κυρίου ημών Ίησοΰ Χριστού : ΙΙο. .\ν. 6 ; 2 Co. 1. 3 ; XI. 31 [L Τ Tr W'll om. ήμ. and Χρ.] : Eph. i. 3 ; Col. i. 3 [L Wllom. καί] ; 1 Pet. i. 3; in which combination of words the gen. depends on ό flfuf as well as on πατήρ, cf. Fritz- sche on Rom. iii. p. 232 sq. ; [Oltramare on Ro. 1. c; Β p. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 4 ; but some would restrict it to the latter; cf. c. g. Meyer on Ro. 1. c, Eph. I.e.; EUic. on Gal. 1. c, Eph. 1. c] ; ό flfos τοϋ κυρ. ήμ- Ίησ- Χρ- Eph. i. 17; ό ifor κ. πατήρ ημών, (ial. i. 4 ; Phil. iv. 20 ; 1 Th. i. 3 ; iii. II, I •! ; edit ό πιιτήρ, 1 Co. viii. 6 ; ό θ(6ί κ. πατήρ, 1 Co. XV. 24 ; Eph. v. JO ; .las. i. 27 ; iii. 9 [Rec. ; al. κΰριο! κ. 7Γ.] ; άπο θίού πητροί ημών, Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co. 1. 3 ; 2 Co. ι. 2 ; Eph. i. 2 ; Phil. i. 2 ; Col. i. 2 ; 2 Th. i. 2 ; 1 Tim. i. 2 [Rec., al. om. ήμ."] ; Philem. 3 ; [ό θ(θ! πατήρ. Col. iii. 17 LTTr WH (cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.) ; elsewhere with- out the art. as] θ(οΰ πατρο! (in which phrase the two words have blended as it were into one, equiv. to a prop, name, Germ. Gollrnter [A. V. God the Father]) : Phil. ii. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. i. 2 ; άπό θιοΰ πατρός. Gal. i. 3 ; Eph. vi. 23 ; 2 Tim. i. 2 ; Tit. i. 4 ; παρά θίοΰ πατρός, 2 Pet. i. 1 7 ; 2 ■In. 3; cf. Wieseler, Com. ub. d. Brief a. d. Galat. p. 10 sqq. ό flfiif w. gen. of the thing of which God is the au- thor [cf. W. § 30, I] : T^t ΰίτομοι/^ί it. της παρακλήσιως. Ro. XV. 5 ; της (λτη'δοί, ib. 1 3 ; t^s (Ιρήνης, 33 ; 1 Th. V. 23 ; της παρακ\ήσ(ως, 2 Co. i. 3. τά τοΰ θ(οϋ, the things of Goil,i.e. o. his counsels, 1 Co. ii. 11. β. his interests, Mt. xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33. γ. things due to God, Mt. xxii. 21 ; Mk. .xii. 17 ; Lk. xx. 25. τά προς τον θιόν, things respecting, pertaining to, God, — contextually i.q. the sacrificial business of the priest, Ro. xv. 17; Ileb. ii. 17 ; v. 1 ; cf. Xen. rep. Lac. 13, 11 ; Fritzsche on Rom. iii. p. 262 sq. Nom. ό 6(ός for the voc. : Mk. xv. 34 ; Lk.xviii.11,13; .In. XX. 28; Acts iv.24 [RG; Heb.i.8?]; X. 7 ; cf. W. § 29, 2 ; [B. 140 (123)]. τω θ(ώ, God being judge [cf. W. § 31, 4 a.; 248 (232 sq.)'; B.' § 133, 14] : after Βυνατός, 2 Co. x. 4 ; after άστftoς, Acts vii. 20, (after άμίμτΓτος, Sap. .X. 5 ; after μίγας. .Jon. iii. 3 ; see άστ(ΐος, 2). For the expressions άνθρωπος θ(οΰ, ϋναμις θ(οϋ, υΙος θιοΰ, etc., θ(6ς της (\π18ος etc., ό ζών θ(ός etc., see under άνθρω- πος 6, ^νναμις a., ν(όί τον ^(οΰ, ί\πίς 2, ^άω L 1, etc. 4. θ€(Ίς is used of trhnlerer can in any respect he likened to God, or resembles him in any way : Hebraistically i. q. God's representative or vicegerent, of magistrates and judges, Jn. x. 34 sq. after Ps. Ix.x.xi. (Ixxxii.) 6, (of the wise man, Philo de mut. nom. § 22 ; (juod omn. prob. lib. § 7 ; [ό σοφός Xiytrat θίίις τοϋ άφρονος . . . θ€6ς προς φαν• τασίαν κ. 8άκησιν, <\ιιοά det. pot. insid. §41]; πατήρ κ. μήτηρ (μφανί'ίς fiVt θίο\, μιμονμΐνοι τί)ν άγΐννητον ev τω ζωοπ'^αστί'ιν, de decal. § 23 ; ωνομάσθη (i. e. Moses) ο\ηυ τοϋ (βνους θ(6ς κ. βασίΧίϋς, de vita Moys. i. § 28 ; [de niigr. Abr. § 1.5; de alleg. leg. i. § 13]); of the devil, ό 6(ος τοϋ αιώνος τούτου (see αΙών, 3), 2 Co. iv. 4 ; the |>ers. or thing to which one is wholly devoted, for which alone he lives, e. g. ή κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19. SeocTiPcia, -ας, ή, {θίοσ(βής), reference towards God, qodliness: 1 Tim. ii. 10. (Xen. an. 2, 6,26; Plat. epin. p. 985 d. ; Sept. Gen. xx. 1 1 ; Job xxviii. 28 ; Bar. v. 4 ; Sir. i. 25 (22) ; 4 JLaec. i. 9 (Fritz.) ; vii. 6, 22 (var.).) • θ€θσ£βής, -if, (θιύς and σίβομαι), icorshijipinr/ God, pious: Jn. ix. 31. (.Sept.; Soph., Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ; [cf. Trench § xlviii.].)• θ€οσ"τνγή5, -€f, (θ(ός anil στυγ€ω; cf. 6(ομισής, θ(θμνσής, and the subst. θιοστυγία, omitted in the lexx., t'iem. Rom. 1 Cor. 35, 5), hateful to God, exceptionally impious and wicked ; (Vulg. deo odibilis) : Ro. i. 30 (Eur. Troad. 1213 and Cyclop. 396, C02; joined with «δικοί in Clem, horn. 1, 12, where just before occurs οί θ('υν μισοϋνης). Cf. the full discussion of the word by Frilzschr, Com. on Rom. i. p. 84 s<|q. ; [and see W. 53 sq. (53)].* eeirqs, -ητος, ή, (deltas, TertuU., Augustine [de civ. Dei 7, 1]), deity i. e. the state of being God, Godhead: Col. ii. 9. (Lcian. Icar. 9; Plut. de defect, orac. 10 p. 415 c.)• [Syn. βίότηί, θαίτης: β(ότ. deity differs from flcKJT. divinity, as essence differs from quality or attribute; cf. Trench § ii. ; Bp. Lghtft. or Mey. ou Col. 1. c. ; Fritzsche on Ro. i. 20.] Θεόφιλο;, -ου, (θίάς and φίλος). Theophilus, a Christian to whom Luke inscribed his (iospel and Acts of the Apostles : Lk. i. 3 ; Acts i. 1. The conjectures concern- ing his family, rank, nationality, are reviewed by (among others) Win. R\VB. s. v. ; Bleek on Lk. i. 3 ; [B. D. s .v.] ; see also under κράτιστος.' 6cpairc(a, -at, ή. {θ(ραπ(ύω) ; 1. service, rendered by any one to another. 2. spec, medical service, curiny, healiny : Lk. ix. 11; Rev. xxii. 2, ([Hippocr.], Plat., Isocr., Polyb.). 3. by melon, household, i. e. body tij attendants, servants, dotnestics: Mt. ,xxiv. 45 RG; Lk. xii. 42, (and often so in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 469 : for m?;•, Gen. xlv. 16).* θίραπενιι) ; impf. fθepάπιυov: (at. θeρnπfίσω: 1 aor. t ί(- ράπ(υσα; Pass., pres. Sfpantvopai: iuqif. (θ(ραπίυύμην; pf. ptcp. τίθιραπιυμίνος; 1 aor. €'θ(ραπ(νθην: (θίραψ, i.;f, ή, heal: Acts .xxviii. 3. (Eccl. iv. 1 1 ; Job vi. 1 7 ; Ps. xviii. (xix.) 7 ; Thuc, Plat., Menand., al.) * Bc'pos, -ου£, TO, (ίί'ρω to heat), summer: Mt. xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; Lk. xxi. 30. (From liom. down; Hebr. ]•'ρ, Prov. vi. 8 ; Gen. viii. 22.) • Θίσ-σ•αλονικίν5, -(tut, 6, a Thessalonian : Acts xx. 4 ; xxvii. 2 ; 1 Th. 1. 1 ; 2 Th. i. 1.• Θε(Γ(Γαλον(κη, -ijr, ή, Thessalonica (now Saloniki), a celebrated and populous city, situated on the Thermaic Gulf, the capital of the second [(there were four ; cf. Liv. xiv. 29)] division of .Macedonia and the residence of a Roman governor and quaestor. It was anciently called Therme, but was rebuilt by Cassander, the son of Anti- pater, and called by its new name [which first appears in Polyb. 23, 11, 2] in honor of his wife Thessalonica, the sister of Alexander the Great; cf. Strabo 7, 330. Here Paul the .apostle founded a Christian church : Acts .xvii. 1, 11, 13; Phil. iv. 16; 2 Tim. iv. 10. [BB. DI). s. v. ; Leirin, St. Paul, i. 225 .s<|q.] • @ev8as [prob. contr. fr. 6(όδωρο!, W. 103 (97); esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15 ; on its infiection cf. B. 20 (18)], 0, Theudas, an impostor who instigated a rebeDion which came to a wretched end in the time of Augustus : Acts V. 36. Josephus (antt. 20, 5, 1) makes mention of one Theudas, a magician, who came into notice by pretend- ing that he was a prophet and was destroyed when Cuspius Fadus governed Judiea in the time of Claudius. Accordingly many interjireters hold that there were two insurgents by the name of Theudas ; while others, with far creater probability, supjiose that the mention of Theudas is ascribed to Gamaliel by an anachronism on the part of Luke. On the different opinions of others cf. Sleyer on Acts 1. c. ; Win. RWB. s. v. ; Keim in Schenkel v. 510 sq. ; [esp. Ilackett in B. D. s. v.].• 6(ωρίω, -ω ; inipf. (θ(ώρονν\ [fut. βιωρησω, Jn. vii. 3 Τ Tr WH] ; 1 aor. ϊθιώρησα ; (θ(ωράς a spectator, and this fr. θίάομαι, q. v. [cf. Vanicek p. 407; L. and S. s. v.; Allen in the Am. Journ. of Philol. i. p. 131 sq.]); [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; Sept. for nX") and Chald. nm ; 1. to he a spectator, look al, behold, Germ, schauen, (the Bempoi were men who attended the games or the sacri- fices as public deputies; cf. Grimm on 2 Jlacc. iv. 19); absol.: Mt. xxvii. 55; Mk. .\v. 40; Lk. xxiii. 35; foil, by indir. disc, Mk. xii. 41 ; xv. 47 ; used esp. of persons and things looked upon as in some respect noteworthy : τινά, Jn. vi. 40; xvi. 10, 16 .sij. 19; Acts iii. IC ; xxv. 24; Rev. xi. 1 1 sq. ; ό θ(ωρών τον νίον θιωρίϊ τον πατέρα, the majesty of the Father resplendent in the Son, Jn. xii. 45 ; τινά with ptcp. [B. 301 (258) : Mk. v. 15] ; Lk. X. 18; Jn. vi. 19; [x. 12]; xx. 12, 14; [1 Jn. iii. 17]; τί, Lk. xiv. 29 ; xxi. 6 ; xxiii. 48 ; Acts iv. 1 3 ; τα a-qpeia, Jn.ii.23; vi.2LTrWH; Acts viii. 13, (ίαυ^ιαστα τί'ρατα. Sap. xi.x. 8) ; τα tpya τοΰ Χρίστου, Jn. vii. 3 ; τί with ptcp., Jn. XX. 6 ; Acts vii. 56 ; x. 11 ; foil, by oTt, Acts ί>€ωρΜ 290 θ ησαυρο^ χχχ. 26; to view attentively, take a view of, survey: τ», Mt. xxviii. 1 ; to view mentally, consider : foil, by oral, obliq., lleb. vii. 4. 2. to see ; i. e. a. lo perceive with the eyes : πικΰμα, Lk. xxiv. 37 ; rtra with a ptcp., ibid. 39 ; τίκά, ότι, fin. ix. 8 ; τΰ πρόσοητόν Tivof (after the Ilebr. ; see ιτρόσωπον, 1 a.), i. ij. to enjoy the presence of one, have intercourse with him, Acts xx. 38 ; oixtTi Bfrnpe'iv Tiva. used of one from whose si^lit a person lias been withdrawn, .In. .xiv. 19 ; οΰ θιωρύ A κύσμο! το πιχνμα, ϊ. e. SO to speak, has no eyes with which it can see the Spirit; he cannot render himself visible to it, cannot give it his presence and power, .In. xiv. 1 7. b. to discern, descry: Ti, Mk. V. 38 ; τινά, Mk. iii. 1 1 ; Acts Lx. 7. c. to ascer- tain, Jind out, by seeing : τινά with a pred. ace., Acts xvii. 22; τί with ptcp., Acts xvii. IG ; xxviii. 6; ort, Mk. xvi. 4; .In. iv. 19; xii. 19; Acts xix. 26; xxvii. 10; foil, by indir. disc, Acts xxi. 20; Ilebraistically (see €ίδω, I. .ϋ) i. q. to yet knowledge of: Jn. vi. G2 (r. vlov τ. άνθρώιτον άναβαίνοντα the Son of Man by death ascending; cf. LUcke, Meyer [yet cf. Weiss in the 6te Aufl.], Baumg.-Crusius, in loc.) ; τ6ν θάνατον i. e. to die, Jn. viii. 51 ; and on the oth- er hand, την &ύξαν τοϋ Χριστού, to be a partaker of the glory, i. e. the blessed condition in heaven, which Christ enjoys, Jn. .wii. 24, cf. 22. [Comp. : ava-, παρα-θ(ωρίω.1 * [Syv. θ(ωρ€ίν, θΐασθαι. bpav, σκοΐΓ€Ϊν: θΐωρ, is used primarily not of an indifferent spectator, but of one who looks at a thing with interest and for a purpose : βίωρ. would be used of a general officially reviewing or inspecting an army, θιασθ. of a lay spectator looking at the parade, flfwp. as denoting the careftd observation of details can even be contrasted with Spav in so far as the latter denotes only perception in the general ; so used Oewpftv quite coincides with σκοτ. Schmidt i. ch. 11; see also Green, ' Crit. Xote ' on Mt. vii. 3. Cf. s. vv. bpicji, σκοττίω.] Ociupla, -ar, ή, (θιωράι, on which see θιωρΐω inlt.) ; fr. [.Veschyl.], lldt. down ; 1. a viewing, beholding. 2. that which is viewed; a spectacle, sight: Lk. x.xiii. 48 (3 Mace. V. 24).• βήκη, -i)y, η, (τΊθημι) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Ildt. down ; that in which a thing is put or laid aicay, a receptacle, reposi- tory, chest, box: used of the sheath of a sword, Jn. xviii. 11; Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 7; Poll. 10, (31) 144.* θηλάζω ; 1 aor. ϊθήΧασα ; (θη^η a breast, [cf. Peile, Etym. p. 124sq.]); 1. trans, to give the breast, give such,lo sucHe: Mt. xxiv. 19; Mk. xiii. 17; Lk. xxi. 23, (Lys., Aristot^ al. ; Sept. for ρ'ΓΠ) ; μαστοί (θηΚασαν, Lk. x.xiii. 29 KG. 2. intrans. to suck: Mt. .xxi. 16 (Aristot., Plat., Lcian., al. ; Sept. for pj;) ; μαστοΐί, Lk. xi. 27; Job iii. 12; Cant. viii. 1; Joel ii. 16; Theocr. iii. 1*;.• θήλνϊ, -fio, -υ, [cf. θηΚάζω, init.], of the female sex; η θή\€ΐα, subst. a wnman, a female : Ro. i. 26 sq. ; also τί θ'ηΧν, Mt. .\i.x. 4 ; Mk. x. 6 ; Gal. iii. 28. (Gen. i. 27 ; vii. 2 ; Ex. i. 16, etc. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)* θήρα [Lat. fera ; perh. fr. root to run, spring, prey, Vanicek p. 415; cf. Curtius §314], -as, ή; fr. Horn, down; a hunting of wild beasts to destroy them; hence, fio-uratively, of preparing destruction for men, [A. V. a trup'l, Ro. xi. 9, on which cf. Fritzsche.• βηρ<ν« : 1 aor. inf. θηρησαι ; (fr. ΰηρα, as ατγρήω fr. iypa [cf. Schmidt ch. 72, 3]) ; fr. Ilom. down \ to go a hunting, to hunt, lo catch in hunting; metaph. to lay wail for, strive to ensnare ; to catch artfully : τ\ « στόματόί Tivos, Lk. xi. 54.• θηριομαχ€<ιΐ, -ά : 1 aor. €θηριομάχησα : (θηριομάχοΐ) ; to fight with wild beasts (Dioil. 3, 43, 7 ; Artem. oneir. 2, 54 ; 5, 49) ; fi (θηριομάχησα iv Έφίπαι, 1 Co. xv. 32 — these words some take literally, supposing that Paul was con- demned to fight with wild beasts; others explain them tropically of a fierce contest with brutal and ferocious men (so θηριομαχι'ιν in Ignat. ad Rom. 5, [etc.] ; oioir θηρίοί! μαχόμίθα says Poinpey, in Apji. bell. civ. 2, 61 ; sec θηρΐον). The former opinion encounters the objec- tion that Paul would not have omitted this most terrible of all perils from the catalogue in 2 Co. xi. 23 sqq.• θηρ(ον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of θηρ ; hence a little beast, little animal; Plat. Theaet. p. 171 e.; of bees, Theocr. 19, 6; but in usage it had almost always the force of its primi- tive ; the later dimin. is ϋηρίδιον [cf. Epictet. diss. 2, 9, 6]) ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; Sept. for Π'Π and Π3Π2, an ani- mal; a icild animal, wild beast, beast: prop., Mk. i. 13; Acts X. 12 Rec. ; xi. 6; χ.χτϋ1. 4 sq. ; lleb. xii. 20; [.Jas. iii. 7] ; Rev. vi. 8 ; in Rev. xi. 7 and chh. xiii.-xx., under the fig. of a 'beast' is depicted Antichrist, both his person and his kingdom and power, (see αντίχριστος) ; metaph. a brutal, bestial man, savage, ferocious. Tit. i. 12 [coUoq. 'ugly dogs'], (so in Arstph. eqq. 273 ; Plut. 439; nub. 184; [cf. Schmidt ch. 70,2; apparently never with allusion to the stupidity of beasts]; still other e.xx. are given by Kypke, Observv. ii. p. 379; θηρία άνθμωπήμορφα, Ignat. Smyrn. 4, cf. ad Ephes. 7). [Syn. sec ζώον.] ' θησ-αυρίζω ; 1 aor. (θησαύρισα ; pf. pass. ptcp. τίθησαυ- ρισμίνος ; (θησαυρό:) ; fr. Ildt. down ; lo gather and lay up, to heap up, store up : to accumulate riches, Jas. v. 3; Tivi, Lk. xii. 21 ; 2 Co. xii. 14 ; τί, 1 Co. xvi. 2 ; θησαυρού! ίαντώ, Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; i. q. to keep in store, store up, reserve : pass. 2 Pet. iii. 7 ; metaph. so to live from day to day as to increase either the bitterness or the happiness of one's consequent lot : όργην ίαυτω, Ro. ii. 5 ; κα<ά, Prov. i. 1 8 ; ζωήν, Pss. of Sol. 9, 9, ((ντνχίαν, .•\ρρ. Samn. 4, 3 [i. e. vol. i. p. 23, 31 ed. Bekk.] ; τιθησανρισμίνο! κατά tivos φθόνος, Diod. 20, 36). [CoMP. : άπο- θησαυρίζω.]* θησαυροί, -oO, ό, (fr. ΘΕΩ [τίθημί] with the paragog. term, -αυρος) ; Sept. often for lyiK ; Lat. thesaurus ; i. e. 1. the place in which goods and precious things are col- lected and laid up; a. α casket, coffer, or other recep- tacle, in which valuables are kept: Mt. ii. 11. b. a treasury (Ildt., Eur., Plat., .\ristot., Diod., Plut., Hdian. ; 1 Mace. iii. 29). c. storehouse, repository, magazine, (Neh. xiii. 12; Deut. xxviii. 12, etc. ; App. Pun.88, 95) : Iklt. xiii. 52 [cf. jroXoio't, 1] ; metaph. of the soul, as the repository of thoughts, feelings, purposes, etc. : [Mt. xii. 35* G L Τ Tr AVH, 35'] ; with epex. gen. τηι KopSias, ibid, xii. 35' Rec. ; Lk. vi. 45. 2. the things laid up in a treasury; collected treasures: Mt. vi. 19-21; Lk. xii 33 sq. ; Heb. xi. 26. θησαυρον (χ(ΐν iv ονρανω, to have uiTfyav 291 θρήνοι; treasure laid up for themselves in heaven, is used of those to whom God has appointed eternal salvation : Mt. xLx. 21; Mk. X. 21; Lk. xviii. 22; something precious, Mt. xiii. 44 ; used thus of the Ught of the gospel, 2 Co. iv. 7 ; with an epex. gen. της σοφίας (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 9 ; Plat. Phil. p. 1.5 e.) κ. -γι/ώσ^ω!, i• q- πάσα ή σοφία κ. -γνώσΐ! ωί θησαυροί, Col. ii- 3.* βιγγάνω [prob. akin to τ(Ίχο5, Jingo, βοΐίοη, etc.; Cur- tius § 14.5]: 2 aor. ΐθιγον; to touch, handle: μηίΐ θίγτ)! touch not sc. impure things, Col. ii. 21 [cf. άπτω, 2 c] ; Tira's, Heb. xii. 20 ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Tragg., al.); Uke the Hebr. ;'JJ, to do violence to, injure : τινόί, Heb. xi. 2-S (Eur. Iph. Aul. 13S1 ; hv a'l βλάβαι αύται θιγγά- ί-ουσι. Act. Thom. § 12). [Syx. see άτιτω, 2 c] * θλίβω; Pass., pres. θλίβομαι: pf. ptcp. τιθΚψμίι/ος ; l^aXWftdviuiflagrum, affliction: fr. Hom. down] ; to press (as trrapes), press hard upon : prop, τινά [A. \ . throng^, Mk. iii. 9 ; oSor τΐθλιμμίνη a compressed wag, i. e. nar- row, straitened, contracted, Mt. vii. 14; metaph. to trouble, aβict, distress, (Vulg. tribulo) : τινά, 2 Th. i. 6 ; pass. (Vulg. Iribulor, [also angustior^ ; tribulationem potior) : 2 Co. i. 6; iv. 8; vii. 5; [1 Th. iu. 4 ; 2 Th. i. 7]; 1 Tim. V. 10; Heb. xi. 37. (oi θλίβοντις for πηΧ in Sept.) [COMP. : άπο-, σνν-θ\ίβω.'] * βλίψΐί, or ίλΙψίΓ [so L Tr], (cf. W. § 6, 1 e. ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -(ws, ή, (θλίβω), prop, a pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Ga- len) ; in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, afflic- tion, tribulation, distress, straits; Vulg. tribulatio, also pressura (2 Co. i. 4*•; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. 16 (17) ; and in Col. i. 24 passioj) ; (Sept. for ΓΤΐγ, also for Ίϊ, ■(•nSetc.): Mt.xxiv.9; Acts vii. 1 1 ; xi. 1 9 ; Ro. xii. 1 2 ; 2 Co. i. 4, 8 ; iv. 17 ; vi. 4 ; vii. 4 ; viii. 2 ; 2 Th. i. G ; Rev. i. 9 ; ii. 9, 22 ; vii. 14 ; joined with στfvoχωpίa [cf. Trench § Iv.], Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35, (Deut. xxviii. 53 sq. ; Is. [viii. 22] ; xxx. 6) ; with ανάγκη, 1 Th. iii. 7 ; with διωγμοί, Mt. xiii. 21 ; Jlk. iv. 17 ; 2 Th. i. 4 ; of the afflic- tions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24 ; of the straits of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil. iv. 14 [here al. give the word a wider reference] ; Jas. i. 2 7 ; of the distress of a woman in child-birth, Jn. xvi. 21. θλίψιν ίχω (i. q. θλίβομαι), Jn. xvi. 33 ; 1 Co. vii. 28 ; Rev. ii. 10 ; θλίψα Ιπί τίνα ΐρχίται. Acts vii. 11; eV θλίψιι, 1 Th. i. 6. plur. : Acts vii. 10 ; xiv. 22 ; xx. 23 ; Ro. v. 3 ; Eph. iii. 13 ; 1 Th. iii. 3 ; Heb. x. 33 ; roC Χρίστου, the afflictions which Christ had to undergo (and which, therefore, his fol- lowers must not shrink from), Col. i. 24 (see ανταναπλψ ρόω) ; θλί^Ι/κ τη! KapSias (κ. συνοχή), anxiety, burden of heart, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; ΘΧίψιν ΐπιφίρ^ιν ( L Τ Tr ΛΥΗ iyeipeiv, see iyfipo}, 4 c.) τοΐί δ€σμοΪΓ τίνος, to increase the misery of my imprisonment by causing me anxiety, Phil. i. 16 (17).• θνήβ-κω : pf. τίθνηκα, inf. τ(θνάναι and L Τ Tr WH Τ(θνηκ(ναι (in Acts xiv. 19), ptcp. Τ(θνηκώς: plupf. 3 pers. sing. (τ(θνήκ(ΐ (.Jn. xi. 21 Rec); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for nn ; to die ; pf. to be dead : Mt. ii. 20 ; Mk. xv. 44; Lk. vii. 12 [L br.] ; viii. 49 ; Jn. xi. 21, Rec. in 39 and 41, 44 ; xii. 1 [T WH om. L Tr br.] ; xix. 33 ; Acts xiv. 1 9 ; XXV. 1 9 ; metaph., of the loss of spiritual life : ζώσα τ(θνηκ(, i. e. κ&ν δοκ,ή ζην ταύτην την αίσθητην ζωήν, τίθνηκί κατά πν(ϋμα (Theoph.) : 1 Tim. ν. Ο (Philo de prof. § 10 ζώντις tvioi τιθνήκασι και τ(θνηκάτ€ς ζωσΐ). [CoMP. : άπο-, σνν-απο-θνησκω.^* θνητόϊ, -ij, -oV, (verbal adj. fr. θνήσκω), [fr. Hom. down], liable to death, mortal: Ro. vi. 12; viii. 11; 1 Co. XV. 53 sq. ; 2 Co. iv. 11 ; v. 4. [θνητός subject to death, and so still living ; νεκρός actually dead.'] * θορυβάξω : {θόρυβος, q. v.) ; to trouble, disturb, (i. e. τυρβάζω, q. v.) ; Pass. pres. 2 pers. sing, θορυβάζτ] in Lk. X. 41 L Τ Tr WH after codd. ν Β C L etc. (Xot found elsewh. [Soph. Lex. s. v. quotes Euseb. of Alex. {Migne, Patr. Graec. vol. Ixxxvi. 1) p. 444 c.].) * θορυβί'ω, -ώ : impf. (θορυβούν: pres. pass, θορυβούμαι; {θόρυβος) ; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to make a noise or up- roar, be turbulent. 2. trans, to disturb, throw into con- fusion : την πόλιν, to " set the city on an uproar," Acts xvii. 5 ; pass, to be troubled in mind, Acts xx. 10 [al. here adhere to the outward sense]; to wail tumultuously, Mt. Lx. 23 ; Mk. v. 39.» θόρυβο$, -ου, ό, (akin to θρόος, τνρβη, τυρβάζω, [but τίιρβη etc. seem to come from another root ; cf. Curtius § 250]), a noise, tumult, uproar : of persons wailing, Mk. V. 38 ; of a clamorous and excited multitude, Mt. xxvii. 24 ; of riotous persons. Acts xx. 1 ; xxi. 34 ; a tumult, as a breach of public order, Mt. xxvi. 5 : Mk. xiv. 2 ; Acts xxiv. 18. (In Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; several times in Sept.)* θρανω: pf. pass. ptcp. τιθραυσμίνος; fr. [Hdt.], Aes- chyl. down, to break, break in pieces, shatter, smite through, (Ex. XV. 6; Num. xxiv. 17, etc.; 2 Mace. xv. 16) : re- θραυσμίνοι, broken by calamity [A. V. bruisedl, Lk. iv. 18 (19) fr. Is. Iviii. 6 for D-yiX";• [Stn. see ρήγνυμι.]* θρ«'μ.|ΐα, -τος, τό, (τρίφω), whatever is Jed or nursed; hence 1. a ward, nursling, child, (Soph., Eur., Plat., al.). 2. a flock, cattle, esp. sheep and goats : Jn. iv. 12. (Xen. oec. 20, 23; Plat., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Aelian, al.) * βρηνεω, -ά : impf. ϊθρήνουν : fut. θρηνήσω ; 1 aor. ^θρη- νησα ; {θρήνος, q. V.) ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for ^"Vn, nip, etc. ; 1. to lament, to mourn: Jn. xvi. 20 ; of the singers of dirges, [to wait], Mt. xi. 17; Lk. vii. 32. 2. to bewail, deplore: τινά, Lk. xxiii. 27.* [On Θρην4αι to lament, κόπτομαι to smite the breast in fimf, \υτΓ(ομαι to he pained, saddened, πινθίω to ninum, cf. Trench § Ixv. and see κλαίω fin. ; yet note that in classic Grk. \tnr. is the most comprehensive word, designating every species of pain of body or sonl ; and that ττ^νβίω expresses a self- contained L'rief. never riolent in its manifestations ; like our Eng. word " mourn " it is associated by usag-e with the death of kindred, and like it used pregnantly to suggest that event. See Schmidt vol. ii. ch 83.] θρήνος, -OV, 0, (θρίομαι to cry aloud, to lament ; cf. Germ. Thrane [(?), rather dronen; Curtius § 317]), a lamentation : Mt. ii. 18 Rec. (Sept. for nrp, also "HJ ; O. T. Apocr.; Hom., Pind., Tragg., Xen. Ages. 10, 3; Plat., al.)• θρησκεία 292 θιτγάτηρ βρησκ€(α T(lf. -ία [see !, «], (a later word ; Ion. θρησκίη in Ililt. [2, 18. 37 J), -at, ή, (fr. θμησκ(ύω, and this fr. θρήσκοι, q. V. ; hence apparently primarily fear of the gotls); religious worship, esp. external, that which consists in ceremonies : hence in plur. θρησκίας (iriTtkdv μυρίαί, Hdt. 2, 37 ; καθίστας ayvfiai re κα\ θρησκΐία^ καΐ καθαρ- μού!, Dion. Hal. 2, (ill; univ. riliijinus worshij), .las. i. 26 sq. ; with gen. of the obj. [W. 1S7 (Ι'ΰ)] τ-ώκ ayyt- λω]/, Col. ii. IH {των (Ι^ώλων, Sap. ,\iv. 27 ; των 6αίμύνων, Euseb. h. e. G, 41, 2; τύν θ(ών, ib. 9, 1», 14; toC θtuϋ, Ildian. 4, 8, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.] ; often in Josephus [cf. Krebs, Observv. etc. p. 339 sq.] ; Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 45, 7) ; reliijious discipline, rfligion : ήμιτίρα θρησκ(1α, of Judaism, Acts .xxvi. 5 (την ΐμην θμησκιίαν καταλιπών, put into the mouth of (iod by .Tosepli. antt. 8, 11, 1 ; with gen. of the subj. των Ίονδαίων, i Mace. v. 6, 13 (12); Jose[)h. antt. 12, 5, 4; θρ. κοσμική, i. e. worthy to be embraced by all nations, a wnrlil-rcliijion, b. j. 4, .O, 2; pieti/, TTtpi τ. θιόν, antt. 1, 1.'!, 1; κατίι την ίμφυτον θρησκ(ίαν των βαρβάρων προ! το βασιΧικον όνομα, L'liarit. 7, 6 ρ. 165, 18 ed. Keiske; of the reverence of An- tiochus the Pious for the Jewish religion, Josejih. antt. 13, 8, 2). Cf. Grimm on 4 Mace. v. 6; [esp. Trench § xlviii.].• βρή(Γκο5 (TWn θρησκό!, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]; W. § 6, 1 e. ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 28), -ou, ή, fearing or loorshipping God; religious, (apparently fr. Tp(u> to tremble ; hence prop, trembling, fearful ; cf. J. (1. MiUler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 121 ; on the different conjectures of others, see Passow s. v. [Cur- tius § 316 connects with θρα; hence ' to adhere to,' 'be a votary of ' ; cf. Vanicek p. 395]) : Jas. i. 26. [Cf. Trench § xlviii.] • βριαμβίύω ; 1 aor. ptcp. θpιaμβfiσas ; (θρίαμβος, a hymn sung in festal processions in honor of Bacchus ; among the Romans, a triumphal procession [Lat. triumphus, with which word it is thought to be allied ; cf. Vanicek p. 317]) ; 1. to triumph, to celebrate a triumph, (Dion. Hal., App., Plut., lldian., al.) ; τιι/ά, over one (as Plut. Thes. and Rom. comp. 4) : Col. ii. 15 (where it signifies the victory won by God over the demoniacal powers through Christ's death). 2. by a usage unknown to prof, auth., with a Iliphil or causative force (cf. W. p. 23 and § Ά8, 1 [cf. B. 147 (129)]), with the ace. of a pers., to cause one to triumph, i. e. metaph. to grant one complete success, 2 Co. ii. 14 [but others reject the causative sense ; see Mey. ad loc. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c.].* βρίξ, τριχήί, dat. phir. θριξί, ή, [fr. Hom. down], the hair; a. the hair of the head: Mt. v. 36; Lk. vii. 44; xxi. 18 ; Jn. xi. 2 ; xii. 3 ; Acts xxvii. 34 ; 1 Pet. iii. 3 [Lchra.om.]; Rev. i. 14; with της κ(φα\η! added (Hom. Od. 13, 399. 431), Mt. X. 30; Lk. vii. 38 ; xii. 7. b. the hair of animals: Rev. ix. 8 ; evSfSvp. τρίχας καμήλου, with a garment made of camel's hair, Mk. i. 6, cf. Mt. iii. 4 ; iv . . . τριχών καμη\(ίων π\(γμασιν πιρκτιάτησαν, Clem. Ale.x. strom. 4 p. 221 ed. .Sylb.* epoc'u, -ώ : (θροός clamor, tumult) ; in Grk. writ, to cry alowl, make a noise by outcry ; in the N. T. to trouble. frighten; Pass. pres. θροονμαι; to be troubled in mind, to be frightened, alarmed: Mt. xxiv. 6 [B. 243 (209)] ; Mk. xiii. 7 ; 2 Th. ii. 2 ; [1 aor. ptcp. θροηθίντα, Lk. xxiv. 37 Trmrg. WHmrg.]. (Cant. v. 4.)* θρόμβος, -ου, ό, [allied with τρϊφω in the sense lo thicken; Vanicek p. 3U7], a large thick drop, esp. of clotted blood (Aeschyl. Eum. 184); with αίματος added (Acschyl. choeph. 533, 546; Plat. Critias p. 120 a.), Lk. xxii. 44 [Lbr. WH reject the pass, (.see WII. App. ad loc.)].• θρόνοϊ, -ου, ό, (ΘΡΑ12 to sit; cf. Curtius §316), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for {e body, and the rage with which the man pants and swells), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. often for nx anger, and non excandescentia ; also for tnn aestus. In the N. T. 1. passion, angry heat, {excandescentia, Cic. Tusc. 4, 9, 21), anger forthwith boiling np and soon subsiding again, (ΰργή, on the other hand, denotes indignation which has arisin grailually and become nwre settled; [cf. (Plato) deiT. 1 1 5 e. θυμός- ορμή (iiaLos nv€v λογισμού• νόσος τάζ^ως ψνχης αλόγιστου. ιΊργή• παράκλησα τοΰ θυμικυϋ fir τό τιμωρύσθαι. Greg. Naz. carm. 31 θυμός μίν ΐστιν αθρόος ζίσις φρ€νύς. οργή δί θυμός ίμμίνων, Herm. mand. 5, 2, 4 4κ fie της πικρίας θυμός, (Κ Si τοΰ θυμού οργή ; cf. Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 1 and Cope's note] ; hence we read in Sir. xlviii. 10 κοπάσαι οργην πρ6 θυμού, before it glows and bursts forth ; [see further, on the distinction betw. the two word.s, Trench § xxxvii., and esp. Schmidt vol. ϋί ch. 142]): Lk. iv. 28; Acta xix. 28; Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8 ; Heb. xi. 27 ; 6 Θ. τοί flfoi. Rev. xiv. 19 ; xv. 1, 7 ; xvi. 1 ; exeix θυμόν, to be in a passion. Rev. xii. 12 (Ael. v. h. 1, 14) ; οργή κα\ θυμός (as Sept. Mic. v. 15; Isocr. p. 249 c. ; Hdian. 8, 4, 1 ; al.) : Ro. ii. 8 (Rec. in the in- verse order; so Deut. ix. 19 ; xxix. 23, 28, [cf. Trench u. s.]) ; plur. θυμοί impulses and outbursts of anger [W. 176 (166); B. 7 7 (67)]: 2 Co. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20, (2 Mace. iv. 25, 38 ; ix. 7 ; x. 35 ; xiv. 45 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 20; Sap. x. 3 ; Soph. Aj. 718 [where see Lob.'] ; Plat. Pro- tag, p. 323 e. ; [Phileb. p. 40 e. ; Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, 13] ; Polyb. 3, 10, 5 ; Diod. 13, 28 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 ; Plut. Cor. 1 ; al.). 2. glow, ardor : a οΐης τού θυμού [see oifor, b.] the wine of passion, inflaming wine. Germ. Glutwein (which either drives the drinker mad or kills him with its deadly heat ; cf. Is. Ii. 1 7, 22 ; Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15) sqq.) : Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3; with τού θ(ού added, which God gives the drinker, Rev. xiv. 10 ; with T^s υργης τού θ(ού added [Α. Ύ . ferceness]. Rev. xvi. 19 ; xix. l.j ; cf. Ewald, Johann. Schriften, Bd. ii. p. 269 note.• θνμ,όω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ίθυμώθην ; {θυμός) ; to cause one to become incensed, to proroke to anger ; pass. (Sept. often for Π1Π) to be wroth: Mt. ii. 16. (In Grk. writ, fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down.) * θύρα, -ας, ή, (fr. θΰω to rush in, prop, that through which a rush is made ; hence Germ. Thiir [Eng. door ; Curtius § 319]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for ri'^T and nr\3, sometimes also for fyV; a (house) dom-; [in plur. i. q. Lat. fore.i, folding doors; cf. W. 176 (166) ; B. 24 (21) ; cf. πΰλη] ; a. prop. : Kkeieiv etc. την θ., Mt. vi. 6 ; Lk. xiii. 25 ; pass., Mt. x.xv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; Jn. xx. 19, 26; Actsxxi. 30; άνοίγΐΐν. Acts v. 19; pass. Acts xvi. 26 sq. ; κροΰιιν. Acts xii. 13 ; δια της θ. Jn. χ. 1 sq. ; προς την θ., Mk. i. 33; .xi. 4 [Tr WH urn. τ^ι/; cf. W. 123 (IK))]; Acts iii. 2; τά πρΌς την θ. the vestibule [so Β. § 125, 9 ; al. the space or parts at (near) the door], Mk. ii• 2 ; προς τη θ. Jn. xviii. Hi ; eVi τ^ θ. Acts v. 9 ; προ της θ. Acts xii. 6 ; eVi των θυρών, Acts v. 23 [RG πρό]. b. θΰρα is used of any opening like a door, an entrance, way or passage into : ή θ. τού μνημείου, of the tomb, Mt. xxvii. 60 ; xxviii. 2 R G ; Mk. xv. 46 ; xvi. 3, (Horn. Od. 9, 243 ; 12, 256 ; al.). c. in parable and metaph. we find a. ή θύρα των προβάτων, the door through which the sheep go out and in, the name of him who brings salvation to those who follow his guidance, .In. x. 7, 9; cf. Christ. Fr. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 20 sqq. ; (in I'^nat. ad Philad. 9 Christ is called ή θΰρα τοΰ πατρός, δι ης (ΐσίρχουται Άβρααμ . . . και οΊ προφήται ; cf. Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48. 3 sq.). β. 'an open door ' is used of the opportunity of doing something : t^s πΐστίως, of getting faith. Acts xiv. 27; open to a teacher, i. e. the opportunity of teaching others, 2 Co. ii. 12; Col. iv. 3; by a bold combination of metaph. and literal language, the phrase θΰρα μιγάλη κ. (νιργής [Α. V. α great door and effectual] is used of a large opportunity θυρΐός 294 θώραξ of teacliing a great nuiltitiule the way of salvation, and one encouraging tlie liui)e of tlie most successful results: 1 Co. xvi. 9. γ. Ilie dour of Ike kingdom of heaven (likened to a palace) denotes the conditions which must be comi)lied ivilh in order to be received into the kingdom of Uod: l.k. xiii. 24 (for Rec. πνληί) ; power of entering, access into, God's eternal kingdom, Kev. iii. 8 cf. 7, [but al. al. ; add here Kev. iv. 1 ]. 8. he whose advent is just at hand is said tnl uvprns αναι, Mt. .\.\iv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. '2'K and προ θιψων ίστηκίναι, Jas. v. 9. 6. (στηκω! (υματικΟ!, 3 a.), 1 Pet. ii. 5; θυσία, a free gift, which is likened to an offered sacrifice, Phil, iv. IS; Heb. xiii. 10 (τοιαίταΐ! θνσίαα, i. e. with such things as substitutes for sacrifices God is well pleased) ; θυσία ζώσα (sec ζάω, II. b. fin.), Ro. xii. 1 ; άναφίραν θυσίαν αΐνίσίω!, Heb. xiii. 15 (if this meant, as it can mean, aiWatv ώί θυσίαν, the author would not have added, as he has, the explanation of the words; he must therefore be supposed to have reproduced the Hebr. phrase min""n3I, and then defined this more e.\actly ; Lev. vii.'s (13) [cf. 2 (12)]; Ps. cvi. (cvii.) 22; see αΐνίσα) ; «Vi ttj θυσία . . . τη! ττίστίωί ίιμών (e|>ex. gen.), in the work of exciting, nourishing, increasing, your faith, as if in providing a sacrifice to be offered to (;od [ef. tVi, p. 233" bot.], Phil. ii. 17.• θυοΓίασ-τήριον, -ου, τό, (ncut. of the adj. θυσιαστήριοι [cf. \V. 90 (91)], and this fr. θυσιάζω to sacrifice), a word found only in Philo [e. g. vita Moys. iii. § 10, cf. § 7; Jose|)h. autt. 8, 4, 1] and the bibl. and ccd. writ. ; Sejrt. times without number for Π3ΐρ ; prop, an altar for the slaying and burning of victims ; used of 1. the altar of tchole burnt-offerings which stood in the court of the priests in the temple at Jerusalem [B. D. s. v. Altar] : Mt. V. 23 sq. ; xxiii. 18-20, 35 ; Lk. xi. 51 ; 1 Co. ix. 13 ; x. 18; Ileb. vii. 13; Rev. xi. 1. 2. the altar of incense, which stood in the sanctuary or Holy place [B. D. u. s.] : TO θυσιαστ. τοϋ θυμιάματα!, Lk. i. 11 (Ex. XXX. 1) ; [sym- bolically] in Heaven: Rev. vi. 9; viii. 3, 5; ix. 13; xiv. 18; .xvi. 7. 3. any other altar, Jas. ii. 21 ; plur. Ro. xi. 3 ; metaph., the cross on which Christ suffered an expiatory death: to eat of this altar i. e. to appropriate to one's self the friuts of Christ's expiatory death, Heb. xiii. 10.• θύω; impf. (θυον; 1 aor. ΐθυσα; Pass., pres. inf. θΰ(- σθαι; pf. jjtcp. Teflu/ifVor; 1 aor. fTui?)!' (1 Co. V. 7, where Rec.'•"'" (θίθην, cf. W. § 5, 1 d. 12); [fr. Horn, down]; Sept. mostly for ΠΠ!, also for DDE', to slay ; 1. to sac- rifice, immolate: absol. Acts xiv. 13; τινί, dat. of pers. (in honor of one), Acts xiv. 18 ; τινί τι, 1 Co. χ. 20. 2. to slay, kill : absol., Acts x. 13 ; xi. 7 ; τι, Lk. χ v. 23, 27, 30; pass. Mt. xxii. 4 ; το ττάσχα, the paschal lamb, Mk. xiv. 12; pass., Lk. xxii. 7; 1 Co. v. 7, (Deut. xvi. 2, G). 3. to slaughter: absol. Jn. x. 10; τίΐ/ά. Sir. xxxi. (xxxiv.) 24; I .Mace. vii. 19.• Θωμάς, -a, 6, (DISn [i. e. twin], see δίδυμο!), Thomas, one of Christ's apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; Jn. xi. 16; xiv. 5; .xx. 24-29 [in 29 Rec. only] ; x.xi. 2; Actsi. 13. [B. D. s. v.] • θώρα|, -ακο!, ό ; 1. the breast, the part of the body from the neck to the navel, where the ribs end, (Aristot. hist. an. 1, 7 [cf. 8, p. 491% 28] ; Eur., Plat., al.) : Rev. ix. 9 [some refer this to the next head]. 2. a breast- plate or corselet consisting of two parts and protecting the body on both sides from the neck to the middle, (Ilom., Ildt., Xen., Plat., al.) : Rev. ix. 9, 1 7 ; ίνδίισθαι τ. θώρακα τη! δικαιοσύνη!, i. e. δικαιοσννην ω! θώρακα, Eph. vi. 14 ; θώρακα πίστ(ω!, i. e. ιτίστιν ω! θώριικα, 1 Τ1ι. ν. 8, {ίνδϋισθαι δικαιοσύνην ώϊ θώρακα, Is. hx. 1 7 ; ϊνδ. θώρακα δικαιοσύνην. Sap. ν. 19 (18)).* 295 I I,c [I, t : on iota subscript in Mss. and edd. of the N. T. see Lijjsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 3 sqq. ; Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 42, and Index II. s. v. ; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. Vat., praef. p. xi. sq ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 109; iVH. Intr. §410; W. § 5, 4 ; B. pp. 1 1, 44 sq., 69 ; and 3. vv. αβψο!, ζφον, Ήρψ8η5 etc., τρφρα, Ύρψάί, tfoy. ι is often substituted for ei, esp. in nouns ending iu eia (ία; on tlieir accent see Cliandler §95 sqq.), in proper names, etc.; cf. WII. Λρρ. p. 153; lutr. § 399 ; TJf. I'roleg. pp. 83, 86 sq. ; Scrivener, Introd. etc. p. 10 sq. ; Soph. Lex. s. v. EI ; Meisterhans p. 23 sq. ; (on the u.sage of the Mss. cf . Tdf. Conlatio critica cod. Sin. c. text. Elz. etc. p. xviii. ; Scrivener, Full Collation of the cod. Sin. etc. 2d ed. p. lii.). Examples of this spelling in recent edi- tions are the following : άγν ta WH, αΚαζονία Τ WH, avaiSia Τ WH, ο7Γ6ΐβ/ο WH (exc. Heb. iv. 6, 1 1 ), ίρ^σκία Τ WH, SovKla T, ίθβλοθρ-ησκία Τ WH, €ΐ'δωλολατρίο Wil, elKixpivia Τ WH, iirtetKLa WH, βριθία WH, ίρμηνία WH, θρησκία Τ, Uparia WH, κακοηθία WH, κακοπαβία WH, καΚακία Τ WH, κυβία Τ WH, μαγία Τ WH, μιθοΒία Τ WH, ορθαΚμο3ου\ία Τ WH, παιίΐα Τ (everywhere ; see his note on Heb. xii. 5), νραγματία TWH,πpα^παθiαTWH,ίlαp/^α^cίαTWH(πow in Gal. v. 20), ΰφ€\ία WH, Άτταλία Τ Wll, Kmaapia Τ WH, Λαοδικίο Τ WH,2ajUopiaT WH {'Σαμαρίτηί, 2a/xapiTiS,T),26A6Uic/aTWH, ΦιλαδΕλφία Ϊ WH ; occasiouaUy the same sub.stitutiou occurs iu other words : e. g. alyios WH, "Apioy (πάγοτ) Τ, 5ανίζω Τ W Η, SaULQi/ \Vli,5ayifrT7is 'V Wll, eiSwKiOf Τ WH, 4ξαΚιψβηναί WH, 'ETifcouptos Τ WH, ημίσία WH (see ii/iiffus), κατα\€Κιμ- μίνοί WH, χίμμα WH, NecpflaAiV WH in Rev. vii. 6, opivos WH, TTtfltis WH, σκοτίνόί WH, ίιπ6\ιμμα Wll. φωτιι^ύ^ WH, χρ(οφι\4τ-η5 (Τ?) WH ; also in augm., as iVt^kch' WH, iSov (see fiSw I. iuit.) ; cf. WH. App. p. 162'». Un ί as a dem- onst. addition to adverbs etc., see νυνί ad init. On the use and the omission of the mark of diajresis with i in certain words, see Tdf. Proleg. p. 108; Lipsiiis, Gram. Untersuch. p. 136 sqq.) 'luipos, -ου [cf. B. 18 (16)], ό, (ΤΧ' [i. e. whom Jeho- vah enlightens], Xum. xxxii. 41 ), .fairus [pron. Ja-i'-rus], a ruler of the synagogue, whose daughter Jesus restored to life: Mk.v. 22; Lk.viii. 41. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v.]* 'Ιακώβ, ό, (2pm [1. e. heel-catcher, supplanter]), Ja- cob ; 1. the second of Isaac's sons : Mt. i. 2 ; viii. 1 1 ; Jn. iv. 5 sq. ; Acts vii. 8 ; Ro. ix. 1 3, etc. Hebraistieally i. q. the descendants of Jacob : Ro. xi. 26, (Num. x.xiii. 7 ; Is. xli. 8; Jer. [Hebr. txt.] xxxiii. 26 ; Sir. xxiii. 12; 1 Mace. iii. 7, and often). 2. the father of Joseph, the husband of Mary the mother of the Saviour : Mt. i. 1,5 sq. Ίάκωβοί, -ου, ό, (see the preceding word [and cf. B. 6, 18 (16)]),/(im«s; 1. son of Zebedee, an apostle, and brother of the apostle John, (commonly called James the greater or elder). He was slain with the sword bv the command of king Herod Agrippa I. (c. a. d. 44) : Mt. iv. 21; X. 2 (3); xvii. 1; Mk. i. 19, 29; iii. 17; v. 37; i.x. Ίαμβρηι; 2 ; X. 35, 41 ; xiii. 3 ; xiv. 33 ; Lk. v. 10 ; vi. 14 ; viii. 51 ; ix. 28, 54; Acts 1.13; xii. 2. 2. James (commonly called the less), an apostle, son of Alphteus : Mt. x. 3 ; Mk. iii. IH ; Lk. vi. 15 ; Acts i. 13 ; apparently identical with Ίάκωβο! ό μικροί James the little [A. V. the less'\, the son of Mary, Mk. xv. 40 (Mt. xxvii. 56) ; xvi. 1, wife of Cleophas [i. e. Clopas q. v.] or Alphieus, Jn. xix. 25 ; see in ΆλφαίοΓ, and in Μαρία, 3. 3. James, the brother of our Lord (see ΰδελφόί, 1) : Mt. xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3 ; Gal. i. 19 (where «' μή is employed ace. to a usage illustrated under ei, III. 8 c. β.) ; ii. 9, 12 ; Acts xii. 17; χ v. 13 ; xxi. 18; 1 Co. XV. 7 (?) ; Jas. i. 1, the leader of the Jewish Christians, and by them surnamed ό δίκαιος the Just, the overseer (or bishop) of the church at Jerusalem down to the year 62 or 63 (or ace. to Hegesippus in Euseb. h. e. 2, 23 [trans, in B. D. p. 1206] down to 69, which is hardly probable [see Heinichen's note ad loc.]), in which year he suffered martyrdom, Joseph, antt. 20, 9, 1. In opposi- tion to the orthodox opinion [defended in B. D. s. v. James], which identifies this James with James the son of Alphffius, and understands ό άδιλφος τοϋ κυρίου to mean his cousin, cf. esp. Clemen in Winer's Zeitschr. f. wis- sensch. Theol. for 1829, p. 351 sqcp ; Dlom, Diss, de ro'is a8eX<^ois . . . τον κυρίου. Lugd. 1839; 117/(4. Grimm in Ersch u. Gruber's Encycl., Sect. 2, vol. 23 p. 80 sqq.; Schaff, Das Verhiiltniss des Jacobus, Bruders des Herrn, zu Jacobus Alphui. Berl. 1842 [also his Church Hist. (1882) i. 272 sq.]; HiUjenfeld, Galaterbrief etc. p. 138 sqq.; Hausrath in Schenkel iii. p. 175 sqq.; \_Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2, vi. 464 sqq. ; and reff. s. v. ά&(Κφόί, 1 (esp. Bp. Lghtft.)]. 4. An unknown /ame.s-, father of the apostle Judas [or Jude]: Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13, ace. to the opinion of those interpreters who think that not άδίλφόν but υ'ιόν must be supplied in the phrase Ίοϋδαν Ιακώβου; see 'loijfias, 8. ΐαμα, -τοί, τό, (Ιάομαι) ; 1. α means of healing, rem• edi/, medicine; (Sap. xi. 4; xvi. 9; Hdt. 3, 130; Thuc. 2, 51 ; Polyb. 7, 14, 2 ; Plut., Lcian., al.). 2. a heal- ing: plur., 1 Co. xii. 9, 28, 30 ; (Jer. xl. (xxxiii.) 6, etc. ; Plat. legg. 7 p. 790 d.).* Ίαμβρή;, ό, and ό Ίαννή; [cf. Β. 20 (18)], Jamhres (for which the Vulg. seems to have read Μαμβρης, as in the Babylonian Talmud tract. Menaeh. c. 9 in the Ge- mara; cf. Buxtorf Lex. Talm. p. 945 sq. [p. 481 sq. ed. Fischer]), and Jannes. two Egyptian magicians who in the presence of Pharaoh imitated the miracles of Aaron in order to destroy his influence with the king : 2 Tim. iii. 8 (cf. Ex. vii. 11 sq.). The author of the Epistle de- rived their names from the tradition of the Talmudists and the Rabbins, [cf. B.D. art. Jannes and Jambres']• Ιαννά 296 10ί0% I'Lese Magi are riientioneil uot onl)- in the tract of the Babyl. Talmud just referred to, but also in the Targ. of Jonath. on Ex. vii. 11 ; the book Sohar on Num. .\.\ii. 2'2 ; Numenius nepi τάγαθοϋ in Orig. c. Cels. 4, .51 ; Euseb. praep. evang. H, Η ; Evang. Nicod. c. 5, and other writ, enumerated by Thilo in his Cod. a|)i)cr. p. .5.52 sq. ; [and VVetstein on 2 Tim. I.e.; Ilohzmann ibid. p. 140 sq.].* "Ιαννά, (L Τ Tr WII ΊανναΙ) ; Jannni, Vulg. Janne [Tdf. txt. (cod. Amiat.) Iτη<: 297 Ίδ, ουμαΐΛ 12; Ihineown: eV τώ ίδίω όφίαλ^ώ, Lk. νί. 41. b. of what pertains to one's property, family, dweUing, country, etc. ; of property, οϋδε f is τι τώι/ υπαρχόντων αυτω tKcytv iStov ttvai. Acts iv. 32 ; τά ϊδια, res noalrue, our own things, i. e. house, family, property, Lk. xviii. 28 L Τ Tr WH [cf. B. § 127, 24; W. 592 (551)]; rrj Ιδία ytvea, in his own yeiieration, i. e. in the age in which he lived. Acts xiii. 36 ; ή ιδία πόλΐΓ, the city of which one is a citizen or inhabi- tant, Lk. ii. 3 [R G Tr mrg.]; Mt. ix. 1 ; tjj I8ia διαλ^κτω, in their native tongue, Acts i. 19 [WHom. Trbr. ίδια]; ii. 6, 8 ; ij IBia δfισιδαι/lOl/ία, their own (national) religion. Acts XXV. 19 ; oi ίδιοι, one'.•! own people (Germ, die An- gehorigen), one's fellow-countrymen, associates, Jn. i. 11, cf. 2 Mace. xii. 22 ; one's household, persons belonging to the house, family, or company, Jn. xiii. 1 ; Acts iv. 23 ; xxiv. 23 ; 1 Tim. v. 8 ; ds τα ί'δια (Germ, in die Heimat), to one's native land, home, Jn. i. 11 (meaning here, the land of Israel) ; xvi. 32 ; xix. 27, (3 Mace. vi. 27 ; 1 Esdr. V. 4() (47) ; for in'3-'7K, Esth. v. 10 ; vi. 12) ; ό Ibioi άνήρ, a husband, 1 Co. vii. 2 [B. 117 (102) note; cf. W. 154 (146)] ; plur., Eph. v. 22 ; Tit. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1,5; Eph. V. 24 R G; Col. iii. 18 R; oi ίδιοι δίσπόται (of slaves). Tit. ii. 9. of a person who may be said to belong to one, above all others : vias, Ro. viii. 32 ; πατήρ, Jn. v. 18 ; μα- βηταί, Mk. iv. 34 Τ WH Tr mrg. o. harmonizing with, or suitable or assigned to, one's nature, character, aims, ads ; appropriate : ttj ιδία ϊξουσία, Acts i. 7 ; τον t8iov μισθόν, due reward, 1 Co. iii. 8 ; το ίδιον σώμα, 1 Co. .\v. 38; κατά την Ιδίαν δνναμιν, Mt. ,χχν. 15; tv τω ίδι'ω τάγματί, 1 Co. XV. 23 ; το ίδιοι' οίκητηριον, Jude 6 ; fis τον τόποκ τόι/ ΐδιοχ, to the abode after death assigned by God to one ace. to liis deeds. Acts i. 25 (Ignat. ad Magnes. 5 ; Baal Turim on Num. xxiv. 25 Balaam ivit in locum suum, i. e. in Gehennam ; see τόπος, 1 α. fin.) ; κάψω ίδι'ω, at a time suitable to the matter in hand [A. V. in due season']. Gal. vi. 9 ; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 6 ; vi. 15 ; Tit. i. 3. d. By a usage foreign to the earlier Greeks, but found in the church Fathers and the Byzant. writ, (see W. § 22, 7 ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 208 sq. ; [B. 117 sq. (103)]), it takes the place of the poss. pron. αύτοΰ : l\lt. xxii. 5 ; XXV. 14; Jn. i. 41 (42), (Sap. x. 1). 2. private (in class. Grk. opp. to δημόσιος, koivos) : ιδία [cf. W. 591 (549) note] adv. severally, separately, 1 Co. xii. 11 (often in Grk. writ.), κατ Ιδίαν (sc. χώραν), a. apart: Mt. xiv. 13; xvii. 19; xx. 17; xxiv. 3; Mk. vi. 31 sq. ; vii. 33 ; ix. 2, 28 ; .xiii. 3 ; Lk. ix. 10 ; x. 23 ; Acts xxiii. 19, (Polyb. 4, 84, 8) ; with μόνος added, Mk. ix. 2 ; β. in private, privately: Mk. iv. 34; Gal. ii. 2, (Diod. 1, 21, opp. to κοινή, 2 Mace. iv. 5 ; Ignat. ad Smyrn. 7, 2). The word is not found in Rev. ιδιώτη?, -ου, ό, (ίδιοϊ), very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down ; prop, a private person, opp. to a magistrate, ruler, king; but the noun has many other meanings also, each one of which is understood from its antithesis, as e. g. a common soldier, as opp. to a military officer ; a writer of prose, as opp. to a poet. In the N. T. an unlearned, illiterate, man, opp. to the learned, the educated : Acts iv. 13; as often in class. Grk., unskilled in any art: in eloquence (Isocr. p. 43 a.), with dat. of respect, τώ λόγφ, 2 Co. xi. 6 [A. V. rude in speech] ; a Christian who is not a prophet, 1 Co. xiv. 24 ; destitute of the • gift of tongues,' ibid. 16, 23. [Cf. Trench § Ixxix.]• tSou, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Ilebr. Τ\ί'Γ], and giving a pecuhar vivacity to the style by bid- ding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said : be- hold I see ! lo ! It is inserted in the discourse after a gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1, 13 ; ix. 18 ; xii. 46 ; xvii. 5; xxvi. 47 ; xxviii. 11. κα\ Ιδυύ is used, when at the close of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9 ; iii. 16; iv. 11; viii. 2, 24, 29, 32, 34 ; ix. 2 sq. 20 ; .\ii. 10; XV. 22 ; xvii. 3 ; xix. 16 ; xxvi. 51 ; xxvii. 51 ; xxviii. 2, 7; Lk.i. 20,31,36; ii. 9 [RGLTrbr.], 25; Lx.30,38sq.; x. 25 ; xiv. 2 ; x.xiv. 13 ; Acts xii. 7 ; xvi. 1 ; when a thing is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9 (και ιδού ζάιμιν, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4 ; when a thing is specified which seems impossible and yet occurs, Lk. xi. 41 ; Acts xxvii. 24. The simple ιδού is the e.xclamation of one pointing out sometliing, Mt. xii. 2, 47 [WII here in mrg. only] ; xiii. 3 ; xxiv. 26 ; Mk. iii. 32; Lk. ii. 34 ; and calling attention, Mk. xv. 35 [TTr WII ίδ(] ; Lk. xxii. 10 ; Jn. iv. 35; 1 Co. xv. 51 ; 2 Co. V. 17; Jas. V. 9 ; Jude 14; Rev. i. 7; ix. 12; xi. 14 ; xvi. 15 ; xxii. 7 [Rec] ; in other places it is i. q. observe or consider : Mt. x. 16 ; xi. 8 ; xix. 27 ; xx. 18 ; xxii. 4 ; Mk. x. 28, 33 ; xiv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 48; vii. 25 ; xviii. 28, 31, etc.; also κα\ ιδού, jMt. xxviii. 20; Lk. xiii. 30; ι'δοΰ yap, Lk. i. 44, 48 ; ii. 10 ; vi. 23 ; xvii. 21 ; Acts ix. 11 ; 2 Co. vii. 11 ; Ιδού where examples are adduced: Jas. iii. 4 sq. ; v. 4, 7, 1 1 ; for the Hebr. 'Jjn, so that it includes the copula: Lk. i. 38; i. q. here I am: Acts ix. 10; Heb. ii. 13. ιδού is inserted in the midst of a speech, Mt. xxiii. 34 [here WH mrg. Ίδοϋ (see the Comm.)] ; Lk. xiii. 16 ; Acts ii. 7 ; xiii. 1 1 ; xx. 22, 25. The passages of the O. T. containing the particle which are quoted in the New are these : Mt. i. 23 ; xi. 10 ; xii. 18; x.xi. 5 ; Mk. i. 2 ; Lk. vii. 27 ; Jn. xii. 15 ; Ro. ix. 33 ; Heb. ii. 13 ; viii. 8 ; x. 7, 9 ; 1 Pet. ii. 6. Like the Ilebr. T\iTy, Ιδού and κα\ ιδού stand before a nominative which is not followed by a finite verb, in such a way as to in- clude the copula or predicate [cf. B. 139 (121 sq.)] : e. g. tvas heard, Mt. iii. 1 7 ; is, is or was here, exists, etc., Mt. xii. 10 LT Tr WII, 41 ; Mk. xiii. 21 R GL; Lk. v. 12, 18 ; vii. 37 ; xi. 31 ; xiii. 1 1 (R G add ην) ; xvii. 21 ; xLx. 2, 20; xxii. 38, 47 ; xxiii. 50 ; Jn. xix. 26 [Rec, 27 R G] ; Acts viii. 27, 30 ; 2 Co. vi. 2 ; Rev. vi. 2, 5, 8 ; vii. 9 [not L]; xii. 3 ; χ1λ•. 14; xix. 11; xxi. 3; is approaching, Mt. XXV. 6 G L Τ Tr WH (Rec. adds Ιρχίται) ; but also in such a way as to have simply a demonstrative force : Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. Ίδουμαία, -ας, ή, Idumcea, the name of a region be- tween southern Palestine and Arabia Petraea, inhabited by Esau or Edom (Gen. -xxxvi. 30) and his posterity (the Edomites), (Josh. xv. 1, 21 ; xi. 17; xii. 7). The Edomites were first subjugated by David; but after ΙΒρως 298 lepov his death they disputed Solomon's authority and in the reign of Joram recoveri'd their liberty, which tliey main- tained, transmitting from generation to generation their hatred of Israel, until they were conquered again by Hyrcanus and subjected to the government of the Jews: Mk. iii. 8. [For details of boundary and history, see Bertheau in Sehenkel and Porter in B. D. s. v. Edom ; also the latter in Kitto's Cycl. s. v. Idumaea.] * Ϊ8ρώ5, -ώτοΓ, ό, [allied w. Lat. sudor, Eng. sweat ; Cur- tius § 28:!; fr. Mom. down], sweat: Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WI I reject the pass. ; (Tr accents ISpHs, yet cf. Chandler §n.i,)].• Ίίζάβιλ ([soGTAVII, L 'Iff.; Tr -0A ] ; Rec. 'Ufa- βη\), ή, (^3"« ['perh. intact, chaste; cf. Agnes' ((Je- senius)]), Jezebel [mod. Isabel], wife of Ahab ([c.] B. c. 917-897; 1 K. xvi. 29), an impious and cruel queen, who protected idolatry and persecuted the prophets (1 K. xvi. 31-2 K. ix. 30) ; in Rev. ii. 20 i. q. a second Jez- ebel, the svmbolic name of a woman who pretended to be a prophetess, and who, addicted to antinomianisni, claimeriesl ; one who offers sacrifices and in general is busied with sacred rites ; a. prop., of the i)riests of the Gentiles, Acts xiv. 13 ; of the priests of the Jews, Mt. viii. 4; xii. 4 sq. ; Mk. i. 44; [ii. 26]; Lk. i. 5 ; v. 14; Jn. i. 19 ; Heb. vii. [14 L Τ Tr WH], 20 (21) ; viii. 4, etc.; of the hif/h-priesi, Acts v. 24 RG (Ex. xxxv. 18; 1 K. i. 8 ; 1 Mace. xv. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 1) ; and in the same sense Christ is called UptCs in Heb. v. 6 (fr. Ps. cix. (ex.) 4); Heb. vii. 17; also ie/jtvs fieyar, Heb. X. 21 (see apxitpeis, 3) [al. take the adj. here not as blending with Up. into a technical or official appellation, but as descriptive, yreat; cf. iv. 14]. b. metaph. of Christians, because, purified by the blood of Christ and brought into close intercourse with God, they devote their life to him alone (and to Christ) : Rev. i. 6 ; v. 1 ; XX. 6, cf. i. 5 ; V. 9. Ίίριχώ (Tdf. Ί(ρ(ΐχώ [see his Proleg. p. 85 ; WH. App. p. 15.5, ands. V. ft, i; WH 'Up. see their Intr. §408; on its accent in codd. cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 103]), 17, indccl. (on its dedens. in other writ. cf. W. § 10, 2 ; in Strabo 'Upικoΰς -οΰντος ; 'ΐ€ριχοϋ!, -ονντοί in Joseph., cf. Λν. 1. c; Hebr. ixvy , fr. Π'Ί to smell, so called from its fertility in aromatics), Jericho, a noted city, abounding in balsam [i. e. perh. the opobalsamum ; cf. Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 33 7; B. D. s. v. Balm], honey, Cyprus [prob. Arab, "el-henna"; cf. Tristram u. s., s. v. Cam- phire], myrobalanus [Arab. " zukkum "], roses, and other fragrant productions. It was situated not far from the northern shore of the Dead .Sea, in the tribe of Benjamin, between the city of Jerusalem and the river Jordan, 150 stadia from the former and (!0 from the latter. Josejjh. b. j. 4, 8, 3 calls its territory Sflov χωρίον. It is mentioned in the N. T. in Mt. xx. 29 ; Mk. x. 46 ; Lk. x. 30 ; xviii. 35; xix. 1 ; Heb. xi. 30. As balsam was exported thence to other countries, we read Lk. xix. 2 that reXavai were stationed there, with an άρχιΤί'Κώνης, for the purpose of collecting the revenues. For a fuller account of the city see Win. RWB. s. v.; Arnold in Herzog vi. p. 494 sq. ; Furrer- in Sehenkel iii. 209 sq. ; Keim iii. 17 sq. [Eng. trans, v. 21 sq. ; BB.DD. s. v. ; cf. also Robinson, Re- searches etc. i. 547 sqq.].* ίίρόθυτοί, -ov, (fr. Upas and θΰω, cf. (Ι&ωλόθυτο!), sac- rificed, offered in sacrifice, to the gods ; as in Plut. symp. 8, 8, 3 init., used of the flesh nf animals offered in sac- rifice : 1 Co. X. 28 L txt. Τ Tr WH. On the use of the word in Grk. writ. cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 159.* Up<5v, -oi), TO, (neut. of the adj. Upas, -a, -ov, cf. to δγιον), [fr. Ildt. on], a sacred place, temple : of the tem- ple of Artemis at Ephesus, Acts xix. 27 ; of the temple at Jerusalem twice in the Sept., Ezek. xlv. 19 ; 1 Chr. tepoTrpeTrr)^ 299 ίΐροσυΧέω xxix. 4 ; more freq. in the 0. T. Apocr. ; in the N. T. often in the Gospels and Acts ; once elsewhere, viz. 1 Co. ix. 13. TO iepov and ό vaos di£Eer, in that the former designates the whole compass of the sacred enclosure, embracins; the entire agirregate of buildings, balconies, porticos, courts (viz. that of the men or Israelites, that of the women, that of the priests), belonging to the temple ; the latter designates the sacred edifice prop- erly so called, consisting of two parts, the 'sanctuary' or 'Holy place' (which no one except the priests was allowed to enter), and the'HoIy of holies ' or 'most holy place' (see Syior, 1 a.) (which was entered only on the great day of atonement by the high-priest alone) ; [cf. Trench, Syn. § iii.]. Upov is employed in the N. T. either explicitly of the whole temple, Mt. xii. 6; x.xiv. 1 ; Mk. xiii. 3 ; Lk. .xxi. 5 ; xxii. 52 ; Acts iv. 1 ; xxiv. 6; XXV. 8; 1 Co. ix. 13, etc. ; or so that certain definite parts of it must be thought of, as the courts, esp. where Jesus or the apostles are said to have gone up, or entered, ' into the temple,' to have taught or encoun- tered adversaries, and the like, ' in the temple,' ilt. xxi. 12, 14 ; xxvi. 55 ; Mk. xiv. 49 ; Lk. xis. 47 ; .xxi. 37 ; xxii. 53 ; xxiv. 53 ; Jn. v. 14 ; vii. 14, 28 ; viii. 20 ; xviii. 20; Acts iii. 2 ; v. 20; xxi. 2G, etc. ; of the courts and sanctuary, Mt.xii. 5 ; of the court of the Gentiles, out of which Jesus drove the buyers and sellers and money-changers, Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. .xix. 45; Jn. ii. 14 sq.; of the court of the women, Lk. ii. 37; of any portico or apartment, Lk. ii. 46, cf. Jn. x. 23. On the phrase to nrepiyiov τοϋ Upov see Trrcpiyiov, 2. tepoirpt-nnfis, -e's. (fr. iepos. and ffpeVfi it is becoming), hefitlinq men, places, actions or things sacred to God; rev- erent: Tit. ii. 3. (4 Mace. ix. 25 ; xi. 19; Plat., Philo, Joseph., Lcian.,al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii. sub fin.]* Upos, -ά, -όν, [its primary sense is thought to be might'/; cf. Curtius § 614 ; Vaniiek p. 88 ; jet see Schmidt u. i. ; fr. Hum. down], sacred, consecrated to the deity, pertaining to God : Upa γράμματα, sacred Scriptures, because inspired bv God, treating of divine things and therefore to be de- voutly revered, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (.Toseph. antt. prooem. 3; [10, 10,4 fin.]; b. j. 6,5,4; c. Ap. 1,[10, 3; 18,6]; 26, 1 ; lepal βίβλοι, antt. 2, 16, 5 ; [c. Ap. 1, 1 ; 23, 4], etc. ; ουκ ίνίτράφη! olh( ϊνησκήθηί Toif iepoli γράμμασι, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 29, ed. Mang. ii. p. 574) ; [κήρυγμα, Mk. xvi. W'll in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; neut. plur. as subst. τα iepa, the holy things, those which pertain to the worship of God in the temple, 1 Co. ix. 13, cf. ϊργάζο- μαί, 2 a. [See reff. s. v. ayior, fin. ; esp. Schmidt ch. 181.] • Ί£ροσόλυμα [WIT 'Up., see their Intr. § 408], -ων, τά, (the invariable form in Mk. and Jn., almost everywhere in Mt. and Joseph, [c. Ap. 1, 22, 13, etc. ; Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 36 ; (cf. Polyb. 16. 39, 4) ; al.]), and Ιερουσαλήμ [WH 'Up. (see ref. u. s.)], ή, indecl., (the invariable form in the Sept. [Josh. x. 1, etc. ; Philo de somn. ii. 39 init. ; so Aristot. in Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 (where see Miiller)] ; in the N. T. where a certain sacred emphasis, so to epeak, resides in the very name, as Gal. iv. 25 sq. [see Bp. Lshtft. ad loc] ; Heb. xii. 22 ; Rev. iii. 12 ; xxi. 2, 10 ; thus in direct address : Mt. xxiii. 37 ; Lk. xiii. 34 ; both forms are used promiscuously [yet with a marked pref- erence for the indeclinable form] in the O. T. Apocr., and in the writ, of Luke and of Paul ; [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 119; WH. App. p. 160]. Whether there is also a third and unusual form 'UpoσoKυμa, -ης, ή, in Mt. ii. 3 ; iii. 5, is extremely doubtful ; for in the phrase ϊξίπο- pciero . . . 'Upoa-uXupa, iii. 5, the noun can be taken as a neut. plur. with a sing, verb, cf. W. § 58, 3 a. ; and in the former passage, ii. 3, the unusual coupling of the fem. πάσα with the neut. plur. Ιεροσόλυμα is easily ex- plained by the supposition that the appellative idea, ή πόλίί, was in the writer's mind; see Fritzsche and Bleek ad loc; cf. B. 18 (16); [yet see Pape, Eigennamen, s. V.]. Hebr. P7Dn' and D'Syin- , Chald. Ο*?!?!"!•, S)t. / ON ^^ol- Many suppose that the Hebr. name is com- posed of lyn' possession, and Ο'ΐψ, so that it signifies tran- quil possession, habitation of peace ; but the matter is very uncertain and conjectures vary ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 628 sq. ; [B. D. s. v.] ; on the earlier name of the city see below in ^α\ήμ ; Lat. Hierosolyma, -orum, also [ Vulg. e. g. codd. Amiat. and Fuld. Mt. x.xiii. 37; but esp.] in the ch. Fathers Hierusalem, but the form Hierosolyma, -σί•, is uncertain [yet see even Old Lat. codd. in Mt. ii. 1, 3]), — Jerusalem [λ.Ύ. Hierusalem and ferusalemi, the capital of Palestine, situated nearly in the centre of the country, on the confines of the tribes of Benjamin and Judah, in a region so elevated that ανάβαιναν, nSj/, to go up, fitly describes the approach to it from any quarter. The name is used in the K. T. 1. to de- note, either the city itself, Mt. ii. 1 : Mk. iii. 8 ; Jn. i. 19, etc. ; or its inhabitants, Mt. ii. 3 ; iii. 5 ; xxiii. 37 ; Lk. xiii. 34. 2. ή νϋν 'Uρoυσ. [_the Jerusalem that now isl, with its present religious institutions, i. e. the Mosaic system, so designated from its primary external location. Gal. iv. 25, with which is contrasted ή άνω 'Up. (after the rabbin, phrase π'7>Ό '71? D'Si?11', Jerusalem that is above, i. e. existing in heaven, according to the pattern of which the earthly Jerusalem Πϋ"3 Sty D'Siyn" was supposed to be built [cf. Schottgen, Horae Hebr. i. 1207 sqq.]), i. e. metaph. the City of God founded by Christ, now wearing the form of the church, but after Christ's return to put on the form of the perfected Messianic kingdom. Gal. iv. 26 ; 'Upoυσ. επουράνιος, the heavenly Jerusalem, i. e. the heav- enly abode of God, Christ, the angels, beatified men (as well the saints of the O. T. as Christians), and as citizens of which true Christians are to be rejarded while still liv- ing on earth, Heb. xii. 22 ; ή καινή 'Up. in the visions of John 'the Revelator,' the neu• Jerusalem, a splendid visi- ble city to be let down from heaven after the renovation of the world, the future abode of the blessed : Kev. iii. 12: xxi. 2. 10. Ίίροσολνμίτη? [Tdf. -μείτης, see it, i ; WH 'Upoσo\xr■ μείτης, see their Intr. § 408], -ου, 6, a citizen or inhabitant of Jerusalem : Mk. i. 5 ; Jn. vii. 25. [Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 17, etc.]* κρο-<Γυλί'ω, -ω ; (ιερόσυλος, q. V.) ; to commit sacrilege, iepoavXo^ 300 to rob a templt: : Ro. ii. 22, where the meaning is, ' thou who abhorrest idols and their contamination, dost yet not liositale to plunder tlieir shrines '; cf. Fritzsche [and Delitzsch] ad loc. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al.) * 1<ρό(Γυλο$, -OK, (fr. ifpov and συλάω), guill>/ ofsacrileije : Acts xix. 37 [Λ. V. ruhhtrs of temples; cf. Bp. LghlJ'U in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 2:H sq.]. (2 Mace. iv. 42; .\rsti)li., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Diod., al.) * 1(ρουρΎ(<ι>, -ώ ; (fr. Itpovpyos, and this fr. If put and ΕΡΓΩ) ; '" I'd Inisiril irilh .s-a(,-/-t'i/ iJiini/s ; lo perform sacred riles, (Pliilo, Ildian.); used esp. of persons sacrificing (Joseph, antt. 7, 13, 4, etc.) ; trans, to minister in the man- ner of a priest, minister in priestly service: τϋν νόμον, of those who defend the sanctity of the law by undergoing a violent death, 4 .Mace. vii. 8 ; to eiayyeKtov, of the preaching of the gospel, Ro. xv. 16 (where Fritzsche treats of the word fully; [cf. W. 222 sq. (209)]).• Ί^ρουσΌλήμι, si'c Ίιροσόλυμα. 'ufm> "• '^OAa, i. e. whose help is Jehoirah; Germ. Golthilf; but later writ, gave the name the force of Π^'ί!?', see Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ί^σοΟ? ot iytvero κατά το όνομα αντοΰ ptyas €7Tt σωτηρία €κ\€κτων αυτόν, of .Toshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 'lijaoif €ρμηνζν(ται σ ωτηρία κυρίου), a very com. prop, name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der .lesusname, in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or Talmud. Stud. xv.]. In the N. T. 1. Joshua [fully Jehoshna], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses' successor : Acts vii. 45 ; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son of Eliezer, one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 29 L Τ Tr WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of m.-inkind : Mt. i. 21, 25; Lk. LSI; ii. 21, and very often ; see Kvpios and Xpiarot. 4. Jesus Burabbds ; see βαραββά^- 5. Jesus, gurnamed Justus, a Jewish Christian, an associate with Paul in preaching the gos- pel: Col. iv. 11. Ikovos, -fj, -iv, (fr. Χκω, Ίκάνω ; prop. ' reaching to ', ' at- taining to'; hence 'adequate') ; as in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. and Thuc. down, sufficient; a. of number and ([uantity ; >vith nouns, many enough, or enough with a gen. : Ιίχ\ΐ}ί ικανοί, a great multitude [A. V. often much people], Mk. K. -Ιΰ ; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26 ; xix. 2G; λαοί, Acts v. 37 11 (i; κ\ανθμι'>!, Acts xx. 37; άργίτ pia Ικανά, [A. \'. large money, cf. the eollo(|. ' money enough 'J, Mt. xxviii. 12; \αμπιώ(!, Acts xx. 8; Xiryot, Lk. xxiii. 9; φώί Ίκανόν, a considerable light [A. V. a great light]. Acts xxii. 6. of time: ϊκανιύ χμόνω [cf. W. § 31, 9 ; B. § 133, 26] for a long time, [l.k. vi'ii. 27 TTrtxt. WII]; Acts viii. 11; also Ίκανον χράνον. Acta xiv. 8; and plur. Lk. xx. 9; i| Ίκανον, of a long time, now for a Ion•.; time, Lk. x.\iii. 8 RfJ; also «. 89 n.]. Acts ix. 23, 43 ; xviii. IS; xxvii. 7. absol. Ικανοί, many, a considerable num- ber : Lk. vii. 1 1 [R G L br. Τ Tr mrg. br.] ; Acts xii. 1 2 ; xiv. 21 ; xix. 19; 1 Co. xi. 30, (1 Mace. xiii. 49, etc.). ίκίΐνόν (στιν, it is enough, i. q. enough has been said on this stibjc'tt, Lk. xxii. 38 (for Jesus, saddened at the paltry ideas of the disciples, breaks off in this way the conversation ; the Jews, when a companion uttered any thing absurd, were wont to use the phrase DpS 2"^^ [A. V. let it suffice thee, etc.], as in Dent. iii. 20, where Sept. Ικα- νονσθω) ; Ίκανον τω τοιοντω η (πιτιμία αΰτη, se. ΐστί, stllli- cient ... is this punishment, 2 Co. ii. 6 ; after the LaU idiom satisficcre alicul, to ik. iroitiv Ttvi, to take away from one every ground of complaint [A. \. to content], iMk. XV. lo (Polyb. 32, 7, 13; App. Pun. p. 68 ed. Toll. [§ 74, i. p. 402 ed. Schweig.] ; Diog. Laert. 4, 50) ; τ4 Ίκ. λαμβάνω (Lat. satis accipio), to take security (either by accc[)ting sponsors, or by a deposit of money until the case had been decided). Acts xvii. 9. b. suffi- cient in ability, i. e. meet, βΐ, (Germ, tuchtig [A. V. worthy, able, etc.]) : npos τί, for something, 2 Co. ii. 16 ; foil, by an inf. [B. 260 (•22.! sq.)], Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7 ; Lk. iii. 16 ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; 2 Co. iii. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; foil, by Ίνα with subjunc. [B. 240 (207); cf. W. 335 (314)]: Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 6.• ίκονότηϊ, -ijTor, ή, sufficiency, ability or competency to do a thing : 2 Co. iii. 5. (Plat. Lys. [p. 215 a.] ap. Poll. ; [al.].)• ίκανόω, -ώ: 1 aor. Ικάνωσα; (ικανοί); to male suffi- cient, render fit ; with two ace, one of the obj. the other of the predicate: to equip one with adequate power to perform the duties of one, 2 Co. iii. 6 ; τίνα tis τι. Col. i. 12. [Sept.; Dion. Hal, al.] • ίΚ€ΤηρΐΟa'nis, -i)Tof, ή. cheerfulness, readiness of mind : Ro. xii. 8. (Prov. xviii. 22 ; [Diod., Philo (de plant. Noe § 40), Plut., al.] ; Acta Thorn. § 14.) * Ιλάο-κομαι ; (see below) ; in class. Grk. the mid. of an act. ιΚάσκω {to render propitious, appease) never met with ; 1. to render propitious to one's self, to ap- pease, conciliate to one's self (ΐτ. ΐλαος gracious, gentle) ; fr. Horn, down ; mostly w. ace. of a pers., as fleoi/, Άθη- νην, etc. (τόκ deov ΐΚάσασθαι, .foseph. antt. 6, 6, 5) ; very rarely w. ace. of the thin^;. as την δργήν, Plut. Cat. min. 61 (with which cf. (ξι\άσκ(σθαί θυμόν, Prov. xvi. 14 Sept.). In bibl. Grk. used passively, to become propitious, be placated or appeased ; in 1 aor. impv. ΙΧάσθητι, be pro- pitious, be gracious, be merciful, (in prof. auth. 1\ηθι and Dor. ΐΧαθι, which the gramm. regard as the pres. of an unused verb ιΧημι, to be propitious; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Sp. ii. p. 20G ; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 8:59; Passow [or L. and S., or Veitch] s. v. 1X17^1), with dat. of the thing or the pers. : Lk. xviii. 13 (ταϊς άμαρτίακ, Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 9 ; [Lxxvii. (Ixxviii.) 38] ; rrj αμαρτία, Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 1 1 ; ίλάσ^ι; ό Kvpms ircp'i της κακίας, Ex. xxxii. 14 Alex. ; Ί\ασθήσ€ταί κίρ. τω δούλω σου, 2 Κ. ν. 18). 2. by an Alexandrian usage, to expiate, make propitiation for, (as ίξί\ύσκ(σθαί in the O. T.) : xar αμαρτίας. Ileb. ii. 17 {ήμων τας ψνχάς. Philo. allej. leg. 3, 61). [Cf. Kurt;, Com. on Heb. 1. c. : AV. 227 (213) fWestcolt, Epp. of S. Jn. p. 83 sq.]• lX(urp.os, -ov, a. ('t\άσκnμai) : X. an appeasing, propitiating, Vulg. propitiatio, (Plut. de sera num. vind. c. 17; plur. joined with καθαρμοί, Plut. Sol. 12; with gen. of the obj. των θιών. Orph. Arg. 39: Plut. Fab. 18; Bftiiv μηυιν ιλασμον κα\ χαριστηρίων δ^ημίνην. vit. CamiU. 7 fin. ; ποκίσθαι ίΧασμόν, of a priest offering an expia- tory sacrifice, 2 Mace. iii. 33). 2. in Alex, usage the means of appeasing, a propitiation : Philo, alleg. leg. iii. §61; ττροσοίσουσιν ΐΚασμόν, for ΓΚφΠ, Ezek. xliv. 27; irepX των αμαρτιών, of Christ, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10, (leptor ToD ίΚασμοϋ, Xum. v. 8; [cf. ημίρα τ. ΐΚασμον. Lev. xxv. 9]; also for ΠΠ'^ρΟ, forgiveness, Ps. cxxi.\. (cxxx.) 4; Dan. ix. 9 Theodot.). [Cf. Trench § lxxvii.]' IXouriTJpios, -a, -ov, (]Χάσκομαι, q. v.), relating to aj)- peasing or expiating, hacing placating or expiating force, expiatory : μνήμα ΙΧαστήριον, a monument built to propi- tiate God, .loieph. antt. 16, 7, 1 : ίΧαστηριος θάνατος, 4 Mace. xvii. 22 ; χείρας ίκίτηρίονς, cl βούΧΐί δε ίλαση/- ρίους, (κτίίνας θ(ώ, Xice]ih. in act. S.S. ed. Mai, vol. v. p. 335, 1 7. Xeut. ro ΊΧαστήριον, as subst., a means oj appeasing or expiating, a propitiation, (Germ. Vcrsoh- nungs- oder SiHinmittel) ; cf. W. 96 (91); [592 (-"'51)]. So used of 1. the well-known cover of the ark of the covenant in the Holy of holies, which was sprinkled with the blood of the expiatory victim on the annual day of atonement (this rite signifying that the life of the people, the loss of which they had merited by their sins, was offered to God in the blood as the life of the victim, and that God by this ceremony was appeased and their sins were expiated) ; hence the lid of expia- tion, the propitiatory, Vulg. propilialorium ; Luth. Gna- denstuhl, [A. V. mercy-seal'] : Heb. ix. 5 (Sept. Ex. xxv. 18 sqq. ; Lev. xvi. 2, etc. ; more fully ΊΧαστήριον eVi^eiwi. Ex. xxv. 17; xx.xviii. (xxxvii.) 7 (6), for the Ilebr. jT'iJS, fr. liJi to cover, sc. sins, i. e. to pardon). Theod- oret, Theophyl., Oecum., Luther, Grotius, Tholuck, Wilke, Philippi, L'mbreit, [Cremer (4te Auti.)] and others cive this meaning to the word also in Ro. iii. 25, viz. that Christ, besprinkled with his own blood, was truly that which the cover or • mercy-seat ' had been t y ρ ί- ο ally, i. e. the sign and pledge of expiation; but in opp. to this interpretation see Fritzsche, Meyer, A'an Hengel, [Godet. Oltramare] and others ad loc. 2. an expiatory sacrifice ; a piacular victim (Vulg. propitia- tio) : Ro. iii. 25 (after the analogy of the words χαρι- στήρια sacrifices expressive of gratitude, thank-ofierings, σωτήρια sacrifices for safety obtained. On the other hand, in Dion Chrys. or. 11, 121, p. 35.5 ed. Reiske, the reference is not to a sacrifice but to a monument, as the preceding words show : KaraXti^fiv yap αΐτοϋς ανάθημα κάΧΧιστον κα\ μίγιστον ττ/ Αθηνά και eViypo- ψίΐν, ΙΧαστήριον "Αχαιοί TJj ΊΧιάδι). [See the full discus- sion of the word in Dr. Jas. Morison. Crit. Exposition of the Third Chap, of the Ep. to the Rom. pp. 281-303.]• iXeus, -ων, (Attic for ΤλαοΓ [cf. W. 22], fr. Horn. down), propitious, merciful • ίσομαι "Χ- τα'ις άδικίαις, i- e. I will pardon, Heb. viii. 12; Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34; xliii. (xxxvi.) 3: also ταϊς άμαρτίαις. 1 Κ. viii. 34 ; 2 Chr. vi. 25, 27, etc.; ΤΚιώς σοι, sc. ϊστα> [or (Ίη, Β. § 129, 22] ό θ(6ς, i. e. God avert this from thee, Mt. xvi. 22; Sept. for nS-Sn foil, by ^7, be it far from one, 2 S. xx. 20 ; xxiii. 17.• 'Ιλλυρικόν, -oC, TO, Illi/rictim, a region lying between Italy, (Jermany, Macedonia and Thrace, having on one ιμα<ί 302 ινα side the Adriatic Sea, and on the other the Danube : Ro. XV. 1 9 [cf. B. D. Am. ed.].' l|ias, -avTos, 6, (fr. iij^i to .«end ; sc. a vessel, wliich was tied to thongs of leather and let down into a well for the purpose of drawing water; hence ίμάω also, to draw something made fa.st to a thong or rope [recent etymol. connect it w. Skt. si to bind ; cf. Curtius § 602 ; Vanicek p. 1041]) ; fr. Horn, down ; a titonij of leather, a strap ; in the X. T. of the thongs with which captives or crimi- nals were either bound or beaten (see ηροτ(Ινω), Acts xxii. 25 (4 Mace. ix. 11; Sir. xxx. 35); of the thongs or tics by which sandals were fastened to the feet, Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16 ; Jn. i. 27, (so also in Is. v. 27; Xen. .anab. 4, 5, 14; Plut. symp. 4, 2, 3 ; Suid. ίμα!• σφαψω- τηρ σαν^αΚΊου, ζανίχιον, οίον το \ώριον τοΟ νποδήμΑ,ιτος).' ίματίζω : pf. pass. ptcp. ipaTiapevos '• (Ιμάτιον); to clntlie : Mk. v. 15 ; Lk. viii. 35. (Found neither in Sept. nor in prof. auth. [cf. W. 26 (23)].) ' ιμάτιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of ϊμα i. q. (ΐμα, an article of clothing, garment ; and this fr. ΐνννμι to clothe, cf. Germ. Hemd) ; [fr. Hdt. down] ; Sept. mostly for 1J2, also for nSpty, no^i^, etc.; 1. a garment (of any sort) : Mt. ix. 16 ; xi. 8 [R G Lbr., al. om. ; cf. W. 591 (550) ; B. 82(72)]; Mk. ii. 21; XT. 20; Lk. v. 36; vii. 25; Heb. i. 11 ; plur. garments, i. e. the cloak or mantle and the tunic [cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24(23)]: Mt. xvii. 2; xxiv. 18 [Rec] ; xxvii. 31, 35 ; Jn. xLx. 23 ; Acts vii. 58 ; Jas. V. 2, etc. ; to rend τα Ίμ. (see htapρήywμ^), Mt. xxvi. 65 ; Acts xiv. 14; xxii. 23. 2. the upper garment, the cloak or mantle (which was thrown over the tunic, ό χιτών) [Rutherford, Xew Phryn. p. 22] : Mt. be. 20 ; [xxiv. 18 L Τ Tr Wll] ; Mk. v. 27 ; Lk. viii. 44 ; Jn. xix. 2 ; Rev. xLx. 16; it is distinguished from the χιτών in Mt. V. 40 ; Lk. vi. 29 ; [cf. Jn. xix. 23] ; Acts ix. 39. [Cf . Trench § 1. ; BB. DD. s. v. Dress ; Edersheim, Jewish .So- cial Life, ch. xiii. ; esp. 'Jesus the Messiah,' i. CJOsci^.J Ιματισμός, ~ov, ό, {Ιματίζω). rlo/hiitg, apparel: univ., Lk. vii. 25 ; Acts xx. 33 ; 1 Tim. ii. 9; of the tunic, Mt. xxvii. 35 Rec. ; Jn. xix. 24 ; of the cloak or mantle, Lk. ix. 29. (Sept.; Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Plut., Athen.) [Cf. Trench § 1.] • Ιμίίρω : mid. Ιμ(ίρομαι ; (ΐμιρο! desire, longing, [allied w. ΐλιως: \'anicek p. 88]; cf. οίκτιίρω) ; to desire, long for, esp. of the longing of love : ΰμων [W. § 30, 10 b.] i. e. your souls, to win them to Christ, 1 Th. ii. 8 Rec. ; see όμ^ίρο- μαι. (Sept. Job iii. 21 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) • ίνα, I. an adv. of Place, fr. Horn, down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in ichat place. b. lo ivhat place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836 ; differently in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p. 186 sqq.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. ΛΥ. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. Iva μη φνσιοΰσθί, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus : where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leafned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted lo the other's disadvantage; the second, Xva avroiis fijXoOre, Gal. iv. 1 7, thus : where ye zealously court them ; but see Π. 1 d. below. Π. a final Conjunction (for from local direc- tion, indicated by the adverb, the transition was ea.μ(θα, ίϋαγγίΧίζωνται in Gal. ii. 9, cf. W. 587 (546); [B. 394 (338)]; ΐνα κατά χάριν, sc. .τ', that the promise may I"; a gift of grace, Ro. iv. 16 [W. 598 (556) ; B. 892 (336)] ; ΐνα άΚλοις ,'ν(σις sc. γίνηται, 2 Co. viii. 13 [W. 586 (545) ; B. § 12», 22]; ΐνα sc. γίνηται, 1 Co. i. 31, unless preference be given there to an anaco- luthon [W. 599 (557) ; B. 234 (201)] : ΐνα . . . καυχάαθω for καυχάται- {ΐνα ώς άνθρωπος, sc. (ργάζ;ι, Epict. diss. 3, 28, 4.) 5. (Jenerallv "ιό stands first in the final sentence; sometimes, however, it is preceded by those words in which the main force of the sentence lies [W. 550 (511); B. §151, 18] : Acts xix. 4; Ro. xi. 31 (join τω ύμίτΐρω (•λ«ι ΐνα) ; 1 Co. ix. 15 fin. [R G] ; 2 Co. ii. 4 ; xii. 7 ; Gal. ii. 10; TO \οιπί>ν ΐνα κτ\. 1 Co. vii. 29 Rec."= ^" L T. Among N. T. writ. John uses this particle oftener, Luke more rarely, than the rest; [on Jn.'s use see \V. 338 (317) .sq.; 461 (430); B. 286 (203) ; 244 (210) note; § 140, 10 and 12; on Luke's cf. B. 285 sq. (203)]. It is not found in the Epistle of Jude. [For Schaeffer's reff. to Grk. usage (and edd.) see the Lond. (Valpy's) ed. of Stephanus s. v., col. 4488.] iva τ( 805 lovBauK tvo t£ [so L WH uniformly, also Tr exc. (by mistake?) in Mt. xxvii. 46], and written unitedly ίνατΐ [so Rec." ^' G Τ uniformly ; see W. § 5, 2] ; Lat. ut quid f i. e.for what purpose f whereforei tchi/? an elliptical formula, due to the fact that a questioner begins an answer to bis own iiuestion with the word ϊνα, but not knowing how to com- plete it reverts again to the (juestion, as if to ask what will complete the answer: that (^what?) may or miyht liuppen, (ut (quid ?) fat or fierel) ; see Henn. ad Vig. p. «47; Kuhner § 587, 5 ii. p. 1020; W. § 25, 1 fin.; [B. § 149, 2] : Mt. Vi. 4 ; xxvii. 46 ; Lk. xiii. 7 ; Acts iv. 25; vii. 26 ; 1 Co. x. 29. Add, from the Sept., Gen. iv. 6 ; XXV. 32; xxvii. 46; Num. xiv. 3 ; .xxii. 32 [Aid.] ; Judg. vi. 13[Ale.\.,Ald.,Compl.]; IS. i. 8; 2S. iii. 24; xv. 19; Job iii. 12; x. 18; Jer. ii. 29; .xiv. 19; xv. 18; Dan. x. 20 [Theodot.] ; Ps. ii. 1 ; x. 1 (ix. 22) ; .x.xi. (xxii.) 2, etc.; Sir. xiv. 3 ; 1 Mace. ii. 7. (Arstph., nub. 1192; Plat. apol. c. 14 p. 26 c; al.)* ΊόιπΓη (to which com. spelling the ancient lexicogra- phers prefer Ίόττη, cf. Movers, Phbnizier, ii. 2 p. 176 Anm.),-i)E, ή, (Hebr. 13; i. e. beauty, fr. ns^ to shine, be beautiful; [al. make the name mean 'an eminence'; al. al.]), Joppa, a city of Palestine on the Mediterranean, lying on the border of the tribes of Dan and Ephraim. It was subject to the .Tews from the time of the Macca- bees. It had a celebrated but dangerous port and car- ried on a flourishing trade ; now Yufa (not Jaffa) : Acts ix. 36, 38, 42 sq. ; x. 5, 8, 23, 32 ; xi. 5, 13. Cf. 117/1. RWB. β. V. Joppe ; Ruelschi in Ilerzog vii. p. 4 sq. ; Fritzsche in Schenkel iii. 376 sq.; [BB.DD.].* 'Ιορδάνη;, -ου [Β. 17], ό [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (ρΎ_, fr. ΠΊ; to descend ; for other opinions about the origin of the name see Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 626 [cf. Alex.'sKitto s. v. Jordan]), the Jonian, the largest and most celebrated river of Palestine, which has its origin in numerous tor- rents and small streams at the foot of Anti-Lebanon, flows at first into Lake Samochonitis {Mnrom soKialled ; [mod. el-HMeh; see BB.DD. s. v. Merom (Waters of)]), and issuing thence runs into the Lake of Tiberias (the Sea of Galilee). After quitting this lake it is augmented during its course by many smaller streams, and finally empties into the Dead Sea : Mt. iii. 5 sq. 13 ; iv. 1.5, 25 ; xix. 1 ; Mk. i. 5, 9 ; iii. 8 ; x. 1 ; Lk. iii. 3 ; iv. 1 ; Jn. i. 28 ; iii. 26 ; X. 40 ; cf . Win. RWB. [and BB.DD.] s. v. -Jordan ; Arnold in Herzog vii. p. 7 sqq. ; Furrer in Schenkel iii. p. 378 s(iq. ; \_Rohinsoti, Phys. Geogr. of the Holy Land, pp. 144-186].• Ws, -oO, 0, (on its very uncert. deriv. see Kreussler in Passow s. v.; Curtius § 591 ; [Vanicek p. 9G9]) ; 1. poison (of animals) : I'of ααττϋων imo τα χ(ίλη αυτών, the poison of asps is under their hps, spoken of men given to reviling and calumniating and thereby injuring others, Ro. iii. 13 (fr. Ps. cxxxix. (cxl.) 3 (4)) ; by the same fig. (γλώσσα) μ^στη Ιοϋ θανατηφόρου, Jas. iii. 8 ; (in Grk. writ, fr. Pind. down). 2. rust : Jas. v. 3 ; (Ezek. xxiv. 6. 11 sq. ; Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer.] 11 (12), 23 (24) ; Theogn., Theocr., Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Lcian., al.).* 'lovSa, (see 'loiSas, init. and 1), indecl., Judah, a prop. name ; in Sept. 1. the fourth son of the patriarch Jacob. 2. the tribe that sprang from him. 3. the region which this tribe occupied (cf.W. 114 (108)); so in the N. T. in Mt. ii. 6 (twice) ; πόλΐΓ 'loiba (Judg. xvii. 8), a city of the tribe of Judah, Lk. i. 39, where it is a matter of dispute what city is meant ; the most probable conjecture seems to be that Hebron is referred to, — a city assigned to the priests, situated ' in the hill country ' (\(βρών iv τω opti Ίοΰ&α, .Tosh. x.xi. 11), the native place of John the Baptist ace. to Jewish tradition. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Juda, a City of.] * 'Ιουδαία, -at, ή [cf. W. § 18, 5 a.], (sc. γή, which is added Jn. iii. 22, or χώρα, Mk. i. 5 ; fr. the adj. Ίουδαίοί, q. v.), Judtea (Hebv. ΠΙ^Π") ; in the O. T. a region of Palestine, named after the tribe of Judah, which inhabited it: Judg. xvii. 7-9 ; Ruth i. 1 sq. ; 2 S. ii. 1, etc. Its bound- aries are laid down in Josh. xv. 1 sqq. After the time of David, when the kingdom had been rent asunder, the name was given to the kingdom of Judah, to which were reckoned, besides the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, cer- tain cities of the tribes of Dan and Simeon, together with the metropolis of Jerusalem : 1 K. xiv. 21, 29 ; xv. 7, etc. In the N. T. the name is given 1. in a narrower sense, to the southern part of Palestine lying on this side of the Jordan and the Dead Sea, to distinguish it from Samaria, Galilee, Peraa, Idumaea (Mk. iii. 8) : Mt. ii. 1, 5,22; iii. 5 ; iv. 25; xxiv. 16; !Mk. iii. 7 ; xiii. 14; Lk. ii. 4 ; Jn. iv. 3, 47, 54 ; Acts i. 8; viii. 1, etc. ; it stands for its inhabitants in Mt. iii. 5 ; Mk. i. 5, (2 Chr. xxxii. 33 ; XXXV. 24). 2. in a broader sense, to all Palestine : Lk. i. 5; [iv. 44 WH Trmrg.] ; vii. 17; xxiii. 5; Acts ii. 9; .X. 37; xi. 1, 29, (and perh. 2 Co. i. 16; Gal. i. 22); πάσα η χώρα της Ιουδαίας, Acts xxvi. 20 ; els τα όρια της Ιουδαίας ττίραντοϋ Ιορδανού, into the borders of Judaea (in the broader sense) beyond the Jordan, i. e. into Periea, Mt. xix. 1 ; on the contrary, in the parallel pass. Mk. x. 1 R G, fit τα όρ. της Ίουδ. δια toC πίραν τοϋ Ίορδ., Jesus is said to have come into the borders of Judaa (in the nar- rower sense) through Percea ; but ace. to the reading of L Τ Tr WH, viz. κα\ πίραν τοϋ Ίυρδ. and (in particular that part of .Juda-a which lay) beyond the Jordan, Mark agrees with Matthew; [others regard πίραν τοϋ Ίορδ. here as parall. with της Ίουδ. and like it dependent upon Spta^. Ίο«8αίζω ; (fr. Ιουδαίο?, cf. Ελληνιστής [W. 92 (87)]), to adopt Jewish rustoms and rites, imitate the Jews, Juda- ize : of one who observes the ritual law of the Jews, Gal. ii. 14. (Esth. viii. 1 7 ; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10, 3 ; Evang. Nicod. c. 2 ; Pint. Cic. 7 ; to favor the Jews, Joseph, b. j. 2,18,2.)• Ίουδαϊκόϊ, -ή, -όν, Jewi.ih : Tit. i. 14. (2 Mace. viii. 11 ; xiii. 21 ; Joseph, antt. 20, 11, 1 ; Philo [in Flac. § 8].) * Ίουδαϊκώβ, adv., Jewi.shly, after the manner of the Jews: Gal. ii. 14. [(.Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 3.)]* 'Ιουδαίοι, -αι'α, -αΐοκ, (Ιούδα), [ Aristot. (in Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, 7 where see Miiller), Polyb., Diod., Strab., Plut., al. ; Sept. ; (cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.)], Jewish ; a. joined to nouns, belonging to the Jewish race : άνηρ, .\ct8 x. 28 ; xxii. ΊουΒαϊσμόί 306 Ίο'α 3, (Ι Mace. ii. 23); άνΰρωΠΌΐ, Aci,3 xxi. 89; ψ-ίυδοπρο- φήτη!, Acts xiii. G ; άρχκρ^νί, Acts xix. 14 ; γυνή, Acts xvi. 1 ; xxiv. 24; γή, .In. iii. ■_'2; χώρα, ilk. i. 5. b. without a iiouu, substantively, Jewish as respects birth, race, religion; a Jew. Jn. iv. 9; Acts xviii. 2, 24 ; Ro. ii. 28 sq. ; plur., Kev. ii. 9 ; iii. 9 ; o! "Ιουδαίοι (D'lin", be- fore the exile citizens of the kiiiyduiii ufJaduh ; after the exile all the Israelites [cf. Wright in B.U. s. v. Jew]), the Jews, the Jewish race : Mt. ii. 2 ; xxvii. 11, 29 ; Mk. vii. 3 ; XV. 2 ; Jn. ii. 6 ; iv. 22 ; v. 1 ; xviii. 33, etc. ; Ιουδαίοι T( κηΐ "Ελληιια, Acts xiv. 1 ; xviii. 4 ; xL\. 10 ; 1 Co. i. 24 ; 'Ιουδαίοι re κα'ι προσήλντοι, Acts ii. 11 (10); ίθ^η τ( καί Ιουδαίοι, Acts xiv. ΰ ; sing., Κο. i. 16 ; ii. 9 ; οϊ κατά τα ίθνη 'Ιουδαίοι, who live in foreign lands, among the (rcn- tiles. Acts xxi. 21 ; Ιουδαίοι is used of converts from Judaism, Jewish Christians (see tBi/os, 5) in Gal. ii. 13. [Syn. Έ3ραΐο5, 'Ιουδαίο?, Ίσραηλίτ7)$: " restricting our- selves to the employment of tliese tliree words in tlie N. T. we may8.iyth.it in the first is preilomiuautly noted language; in the second, nationality; in the third (the augustest title of all), theocratic privileges and glorious vocation" (Trench § xxxix.); cf. B.D. s. vv. Hebrew, fcraehte, Jew.] The apostle John, inasmuch as agreeably to the state of things in his day he looked ujinn the Jews as a body of men hostile to Christianity, witli whom he had come to see that both he and all true Christians had nothing in common as respects religious matters, even in liis record of the life of Jesus not only himself makes a dis- tinction bet\veen the Jews and Jesus, but ascribes to Jesus and his apostles language in which they distin- guish themselves from the Jews, as though the latter sprang from an alien r.ace : Jn. xi. 8 ; xiii. 33. And those who (not only at Jerusalem, but also in Galilee, cf. vi. 41, 52) opposed his divine Master and his Master's cause, — esp. the rulers, priests, members of the .Sanhe- drin, Pharisees, — he does not hesitate to style oi Ίου- βαίοι, since the hatred of these leaders exhibits the hatred of the whole nation towards Jesus : i. 19 ; ii. 18, 20; v. 10, 15s(i. 18; vi. 41, 52 ; vii. 1, 11, 13; ix. 18, 22;x. 24, 31,33; xviii. 14. [Cf. B.D. s. v. Jew ; Franlce, Stel- lung d. Johannes z. V'olke d. alt. Bundes. (llalle, 1882).] Ιου8αΐσ-μό;, -oO, o, {Ιουδαίζω), the Jewish faith and wor- ship, the rclii/ion of the Jews, Judaism: Gal. i. 13 sq. (2 Mace. ii. 21, etc. ; cf. Grimm, Com. on 2 Mace. p. 61. [B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Judaism].) * "loiSas, -a, dat. -a, ace. -αϊ», [Β. 20 (18)], S, (ΉΊλη], fr. the Hoph. of r\T, praised, celebrated; see Gen. .xxix. 35), Judah or Judas (see below) ; 1. the fourth son of the patriarch .lacob : Mt. i. 2 sq. ; Lk. iii. 33 ; Rev. v. 5 ; vii. 5 ; by meton., the tribe of Judah, the descendants of .Judah: Heb. vii. 14; 6 οΊκος Ιούδα, citizens of the kingdomof Judah, IIeb.viii.8. 2. Judah {or Judas) an unknown ancestor of Christ : Lk. iii. 26 R G L. 3. another of Christ's ancestors, equally unknown : Lk. iii. 30. 4. Judas surnamed the Galilcean, a man who at the time of the census under Quirinus [better Quiri- nius], excited a revolt in Galilee: Acts v. 37 (Joseph, antt. 18, 1, 1, where he is called ό rauXai/i'j-ijs because he / came from the city Gamala, near the Lake of Galilee in lower (iaulanitis; but he is called also ό Γαλιλαίοί by Joseph, antt. 18, 1, 6 ; 20, 5, 2 ; b. j. 2, 8, I). 5. [Ji<- ilas] a certain .lew of Damascus: Acts ix. 11. 6. Jwlas surnamed 'Ισκαριώτη: (q. v.), of Carioth (from the city of Kerioth, .Josh. .xv. 25 ; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.) 41 ; Amos ii. 2; [but see BB.DD. s. v. Kerioth]; some codd. in .In. vi. 71 [cf. Tdf.'s note in loc.] ; xii. 4, read άπ6 Καριώτου instead of Ίσκαριώττ^ί), the son of one Simon (who in Jn. vi. 71 LTTrWll; xiii. 26 Τ TrWIl, is himself sur- named Ισκαριώτης), one of the apostles of Jesus, who betrayed him : -Mt. x. 4 ; xxvi. 14, 25, 47 ; xxvii. 3; ]\Ik. iu.l9; xiv. 10,43; Lk.vi.l6; xxii. 3, 4 7 Sij. ; Jn.vi.71; xii. 4 ; xiii. 2, 26, 29 ; xviii. 2 sq. 5 ; Acts i. 16, 25. Mat- thew (xxvii. 5), Luke (Acts i. 18), and Papias [cf. WeniU in Meyer's Apostelgesch. 5te Aufl. p. 23 note] in a frag, quoted by Oecum. on Acts i. 18 differ in the account of his death, [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v.] ; on his avarice cf. Jn. .xii. 6. 7. Judas, surnamed Barsabas [or iJar- sabbas, see the word], a prophet of the church at Jeru- salem: Acts XV. 22, 27, 32. 8. Judas, an apostle, Jn. xiv. 22, who is called Ίοΰδαί Ιακώβου in Lk. vi. 16; Acts i. 13 (see Ιάκωβο:, 4), and, as it should seem, was surnamed Lebbceus or Thaddaus (see Qahha'ios). Ac- cording to the opinion of the church he wrote the Epistle of Jude. 9. Judas, the brother of our Lord : Mt. xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3, and very probably Jude 1 ; see Ιάκω- βος, 3.• 'lovXCa, -at, ή, Julia, a Christian woman [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 177] : Ro. xvi. 15 [Lmrg. Ίουκιαν].* ΊοΟλιοϊ, -ου, 6, Julius, a Roman centurion : Acts xxvii. 1,3.• 'IcuvCas [al. -Mat, as contr. fr. Junianus ; cf. W. 102 sq. (97)], -a [but cf. B. 17sq. (16)], ό, /«niVis, a convert from Judaism, Paul's kinsman and fellow-prisoner : Ro. xvi. 7 [(here A. V. Junia (a woman's name) which is possi- ble). The name occurs again as the name of a Christian at Rome in Ro. xvi. 15 Lchm.mrg. (where al. Ίουλίαι/).]• Ίοΰσ -Tos, -ου, ό, Justus [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. U], the surname 1. of Jose/)/;, a convert from Judaism, who was also surnamed Barsabas [better Barsabbas q. v.] : Acts i. 23. 2. of Titus, a Corinthian [a Jew- ish proselyte] : Acts xviii. 7. 3. of a certain Jesus, [a Jewish Christian] : Col. iv. 11.* ΙτπΓίύϊ, -io)t, 6, {miTos), a horseman : Acts xxiii. 23, 32. [From Horn, down.]* iinriKOs, -ή, -όν, equestrian ; τό Ίππικάν, the horse (-men), cavalri/: Rev. ix. 16 (as Ildt. 7, 87 ; Xen., Plat., Polyb., al. ; more fully τό ίππικΙ>ν στράτιυμα, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 26 ; so TO πίζικόν, the foot (-forces), infantry, Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 38).• tinros, -ου, ό, [Curtius § 624; Peile, Grk. and Lat• Etymol., Index s. v.], a horse : .las. iii. 3 ; Rev. vi. 2, 4 sq. 8; ix. 7, 9, 17, [19 GLTTrΛVH] ; xiv. 20; xviii. 13; xix. 11-21. [From Horn, down.]* tpis, -i&ot, ή, (Iris), a rainbow : Rev. iv. 3 ; x. 1. (Horn., Aristot., Theophr., al.) * Ίο-οάκ. ό. indecl. (ρηΤ., fr. ρπΧ to laugh : Gen. xxi. 9; ισάγγ^λοϊ 307 ίστημι χνϋ. 1 7 ; in Joseph. Ίσακος, -ου), Isaac, the son of Abra- ham by Sarah: Mt. i. 2 ; viii. 11; xxii. 32; Ro. ix. 7, 10; Gal. iv. 28 ; Heb. xi. 9, 17 sq. 20; Jas. ii. 21, etc. 1<Γάγγ€λθ5, -ov, (ίσοί and a-yycXos, formed like laoBfOS [cf. ίσάδελφοί (Eur. Or. 101.JJ, Ισάστιροί (4 Mace. xvii. 5), and other compounds in Koumanuudes, Συναγωγή κτλ. p. 166 sq.]), like the angels: Lk. xx. 36. (Eccl. writ.; [cf. ίσος άγγf\oιt γίγονώί, Philo de sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 2 ; W. § 34, 3 cf. p. 100 (95)].) * Ίσαίτχάρ [Rec."^] and Ίσαχάρ [R" G L] [ΊσσιΙχαρ Tdf., Ίσσαχάρ TrWH),o, (Jtyc>p\, fr. t^'. there is, and 13ty a reward [(cf. Jer. xxxi. 16) yet cf. Miihlau u. Volck s. v.] ; Joseph. Ίσάσχαρκ ["Icraj^apts^), Issachar, the son of the patriarch Jacob by Leah (Gen. xxx. 18) : Rev. vii. 7.* ϋσημι, found only in the Doric form Χσαμι, to know, from which some derive the forms lore and ϊσμιν, con- tracted from Ίσατί and ϊσαμ(ν; but these forms are more correctly derived from Είδω, 'ίσμ^ι/ i. q. 18μ^ν, etc., (cf. Blliii. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 548) ; on the phrase 'ίστ( [RcVre] γινύύσκοντζς-, Kph. v. 5, see γινώσκω, I. 2 b. Ίο-καριώτη5, and (Lchm. in Mt. x. 4 ; Τ WH in Mk. xiv. 10 ; L Τ Tr WH in Mk. iii. 19 ; Lk. vi. 16) Ίσκαριώθ, i. e. ni'")p ϋ'ϋ ; see 'loiSat, 6 and 2ιμωι/, 5. £" G Tr -avM in Acts xii. 14] (nowhere έστηκίναι), ptcp. masc. εστηκώς with neut. «στι^κόί, and in the shorter form ίστώς, εστώσα (Jn. viii. 9), with neut. ίστώς and (LTTr WH in Mt. xxiv. 15 [here R" also]; Rev. xiv. 1) ί'στόί, (cf. Bllm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 208; [^Rutherford, Babrius p. 39 sq. ; W. § 14, 1 i. ; B. 48 (41)]) ; plupf. εΐστήκειν [(but WH uni- formly ίστ.; see I, t) with force of impf. W. 274 (257)], 3 pers. plur. ε'ιστήκεισαν (Mt. xii. 46 ; Jn. xviii. 18 ; Acts ix. 7 and L Τ Tr WH in Rev. vii. 11) and έστήκεσαν (Rev. vii. 11 R G [cf. W. § 14, 1 a. ; yet B. 43 (38)]) ; Pass., 1 aor. εστάθην ; 1 fut. σταθήσομαι ; 1 fut. mid. στήσο- μαι (Rev. xviii. 15) ; I. Transitively in the Pres., Impf., Fut., and 1 Aor. act.; likewise in the tenses of the Pass. [cf. B. 47 (41) contra W. 252 (237)], (Sept. for TOi-ri. Ο'ρΠ, 3'ΧΠ) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to cause or make to stand; to place, put, set ; 1. univ. a. prop, τινά, to bid to stand by, [set up] : Acts i. 23 ; vi. 13 ; in the presence of others : tv μέσω, in the midst, Jn. τϋΐ. 3, and cv τω μέσω, στί;/*4 308 t(rrope',, D'p? 1• prop. a. foil, by prepositions or adverbs of place : foil, by fv w. dat. of place [ef. B. 329 (283)], Mt. vi. 5 ; XX. 3; xxiv. 15; Lk. xxiv. 36; Jn. viii. 9 ; xi. 56 ; Acts T. 25 ; vii. 31! [L Τ Tr WII t jri w. dat.] ; Rev. v. 6 ; xix. 17 ; ΐνώπιόν nvos. Acts x. 00 ; Rev. vii. 9 ; viii. 2 ; xi. 4 ; xii. 4 ; πμΟ! w. dat. of place, Jn. xviii. 16 ; «πί Λν. gen. of place (Germ, auf, upon), Lk. vi. 17; Acts .\xi. 40; Rev. x. 5, 8 ; w. gen. of the judge or tribunal, before [cf. cTri, A. L 2 b.], Acts xxiv. 20 ; xxv. 10 ; πΐραν with gen. of place, Jn. vi. 22 ; rrpri, Acts v. 23 [R G ; but L Τ Tr WII tVl των θυρών (at, Germ, an ; cf. above and see eVi, A. I. 2 a.)] ; xii. 14 ; ΐμπροσθϊν tivos, before one as judge, Mt. xxvii. 11 ; κύκλω (τικογ), around, Rev. vii. 11 ; pea-os υμών. in the midst of you, living among you, Jn. i. 26 ; cV ίιξιώ* TiTOf, Lk. i. 1 1 ; Acts vii. 55 stp ; iv μ<σ&>, Jn. viii. 9 ; πρό( w.acc. ((i LTTr WII w.dat. [seewpot, II.]) of place, Jn. XX. 11 ; iπΊ w. ace. of place (see ini, C. I.), Mt. xiii. 2; Rev. iii. 20 ; vii. 1 ; xiv. 1 ; xv. 2 ; «Vi τους πό^αί, to stand upright. Acts x.xvi. 16 ; Rev. xi. 1 1 ; παρά vf. ace, Lk. v. 2 ; vii. 38 ; «it, Jn. xxi. 4 (L Ϊ Tr mrg. WII mrg. «Vi [see iπi, C. I. 1 d.]) ; ixfi, Jit. xxvii. 4 7 ; Mk. xi. 5 ; Jas. ii. 3 ; iSf, Jit. xvi. 28; XX. G; Mk. ix. 1 ; Lk. ix. 27 [here TTr Wll αίτοΟ, q. V.]; όπου, Μ k. xiii. 14; «^ω, Mt. xii. 46, 47 [here WII in mrg. only]; Jlk. iii. 31 ; Lk. viii. 20; xiii. 25; ^laKpuifv, Lk. xviii. 13; xxiii. 49 [RG Trtxt.] ; ιϊπύ μακρύθ(ν, Rev. xviii. 10, 17; [Lk. xxiii. 49 L Τ WII Tr mrg. (butan-<5 in br.)] ; πόρρωθ(ν, Lk. xvii. 12. b. ab- solutely; a. lo stand by, stand near, (m Ά ])lace al- ready mentioned, so that the reader readily luiderstands where): Mt. xxvi. 73; Jn. i. 35; iii. 29; vii. 37; xii. 29; xviii. 18, 25 ; .\x. 14; Acts xvi. 9 ; xxii. 25; Avithaptcp. or adj. (indicating the purpose or act or condition of the one standing) : Mt. xx. 6 ; Lk. xxiii. 10 ; Acts i. 1 1 ; ix. 7 ; xxvi. 6 ; opj). to καθίζ^ιν, Ileb. x. 11 sq. β. if what is said to stand had been in motion (walking, (lowing, etc.), to slop, stand still : Mt. ii. 9 (Rec. ϊστη, L Τ Tr WII ίστάθη [cf. 1. 1 a.]) ; Mt. XX. 32 ; Mk. X. 49 ; Lk. viii. 4Λ ; Acts viii. 38. γ. contextually, to sland immovable, sland firm, of the foundation of a building : 2 Tim. ii. 19. 2. metaph. a. to sland, i. e. conlinue safe and sound, stand unharmed : Acts xxvi. 22. b. to stand ready or prepared: with a ptcp., Eph. vi. 14. c. to be of a steadfast mind; so in the maxim in 1 Co. x. 12. d. foil, by a ptcp. of quality. Col. iv. 12 ; os ϊστηκιν iSpinos, who does not hesitate, does not waver, 1 Co. vii. 37 ; in a fig., of one who vancpiishes his adversaries and holds the ground, Eph. vi. 13 ; also of one vvho in the midst of the fight holds his position προς τίνα, against the foe, Eph. vi. 11, (cf. Ex. xiv. 13 ; Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 13). In persist, continue, persevere : τ^ πΐσ■τfι, dat. commodi (so as not to fall from thy faith [al. take the dat. instru- mentally, by thy faith ; cf. W. § 31, 6 c. ; B. § 133, 24]), Ro. xi. 20 ; ίν τη άληθ(ία, Jn. viii. 44 (where the meaning is, his nature abhors, is utterly estranged from, the truth; Vulg. incorrectly, in verilale non stelil; Luther, iVinic/i/ beslanden [A. V. abode not etc.] ; but the Zurich version correctly, heslehl nicht [WII read ΐστηκιν. inipf. of στήκω, q. V.]) ; iv τη χάριτι, Ro. v. 2 ; iv τω (vayyi^im, 1 Co. xv. 1 ; fir ην (sc. χάριν) ίστή<ατ(, into which ye have entered, that ye may stand fast in it, 1 Pet. v. 12 [but L Τ Tr WII read στψ( (2 aor. act. impv. 2 pers. plur.) enter and standfast ; B. § 147, 16, cf. p. 329 (283)]. N. B. From ίστηκα is formed the verb στήκω, which see in its place. [CoMP. : av-, ίπ-αν-, i^-av-, άνθ-, αφ-, δι-, iv-, ίξ-, iV- (-μαι), {'φ-, κατ-(φ-, συν-(φ-, καθ-, άντι-καθ-, άπο-καθ-, μ(θ-, παρ-, πίρι-, προ•, συν-Ιστημι•} Ιστορί'ω : 1 aor. inf. Ίστορησαι ; {'στωρ [allied with oiSa (ίστω), videre (visus), etc. ; Curtius § 282], -opos, one that has inquired into, knowing, skilled in) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; 1• to inquire into, examine, inves- tigate. 2. lo find out, learn, by inquiry. 3. t- ισχυροί; 809 Ιωάννη<: gain knotcledge of hy visiting : sometliing (worthy of being seen), την χώραν, Plut. Thes. 30 ; Pondp. 40 ; rti-a, some distinguished person, to become personally ac- quainted with, know face to face : Gal. i. 18 ; so too in Joseph, antt. 1, 11, 4 ; b. j. 6, 1, 8 and often in the Clem. homiUes; cf. Hilgenfeld, Galaterbrief, p. 122 note; [El- licott on (lal. 1. c.].* Ισ-χυρ<55, -ά, -όν, (ίσχιΐω). [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. mostly for Sx, "ii3j, pjn, Dli'>;, and Chald. =]'ρΐΊ; strong, mighty; a. of living beings : strong either in body or in mind, Mt. xii. 29 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; Lk. xi. 21 .--(j. ; Kev. v. 2 ; x. 1 ; xviii. 21 ; ΐνποΧίμω, mighty i. e. valiant, Heb. xi. 34, cf. Rev. xix. 18 ; of one who has strength of soul to sustain the assaults of Satan, 1 Jn. ii. 14 ; univ. strong, and therefore exhibiting many excellences, 1 Co. iv. 10 (opp. to άσθίνήί) ; compar., Mt. iii. 11 ; Mk. i. 7; Lk. iii. 16 ; mighty, — of God, 1 Co. i. 25 ; Rev. xviii. 8, (Deut. x. 1 7 ; 2 Mace. i. 24, etc.) ; of Christ raised to the right hand of God, 1 Co. X. 22 ; of those who wield great influence among men by their rank, authority, riches, etc., τα ισχυρά i. q. Tovs Ισχυρούς (on the neut. cf. W. § 27, 5), 1 Co. i. 27 (o! Ισχυροί της γης, 2 Κ. xxiv. 15) ; joined with πλούσιοι. Rev. vi. 15 (Rec. oi Βυνατοί). b. of inanimate things : strong i. q. violent, άν(μος, Mt. xiv. 30 [T WII om. Ισχΐ ; forcibly uttered, φωνή. Rev. xviii. 2 [Rec. μfyά\η] (Ex. xi.x. 19); κραυγή. Htb. v. 7; jSpoi/rai, Rev. xix. 6 ; λιμός, great, Lk. xv. 14 ; (τηστοΧαί (stern, [forcible]), 2 Co. x. 10; strong i. q. /iVm, χιινβ,παράκΚησις, Heb. vi. 18; fitted to withstand a forcible assault, πολκ, well fortified. Rev. xviii. 10 (τ(ϊχος, 1 Mace. i. 33 ; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 7 ; ηύργος, Judg. ix. 51). [Cf. δΰναμίΓ. fin.] * Ισχύϊ, -ύος, ή, (ϊσχω [allied w. ΐσχον; to hold in check]), [fr. Hes. down], Sept. esp. for r\2, S'n, T>, ΓΤ^Ο:; abil- ity, force, strength, might: 2Pet.ii. 11 (joined w.6wa;xit) ; Rev. V. 12; vii. 12; το κράτος της Ισχύος, power (over ex- ternal things) afforded by siranglli, Eph. i. 19 ; vi. 10, (Is. xl. 2)) ; ή 8o'|a της Ισχ. (see δό|α, ΠΙ. 3 b. α. fin.), 2 Th. i. 9 ; κράζ(ΐν iv Ισχύιι, with strength, mightily. Rev. xviii. 2 Rec. ; «ξ ισχύος, of one's strength, to the extent of one's ability, 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; with όλης added, Mk. xii. 30, 33 ; Lk. x. 27 [here L txt. Τ Tr Λ\Ή read tv ολη τή Ισχίί]. [Syn. see ίΰναμις, fin.]* [(τχύω ; impf. ίσχυαν ; fut. Ισχύσω ; 1 aor. Ίσχυσα ; (ισχύς) ; Sept. for ρίΠ, Ι'Πίί, Di'>;, etc. ; to be slrnng, i. e. 1. ti) be strong in body, to be robust, to he in sound health : a'l ισχύοντας, as subst., Mt. ix. 1 2 ; Mk. ii. 1 7, (.Soph. Tr. 234 ; Xen. CjT. 6, 1, 24 ; joined with iytaiveiv, id. mem. 2, 7, 7). 2. to have power, [fr. Aeschyl. down], i. e. a. to have a power evinced in extraordinary deeds, i. e. to exert, wield, power: so of the gospel. Acts xix. 20; Ilebraistically, to have strength to overcome : ουκ Ίσχυσαν, [Α. V prevailed not i. e.] succumbed, were conquered, (so h'3' N^, Gen. xxxii. 2G (25)), Rev. xii. 8; κατά TtKor, against one, i. e. to use one's strength against one, to treat him with violence. Acts xix. IG. b. i. q. to be of force, avail (Germ, gelten) : Heb. ix. 1 7 ; τί. Gal. v. 6, and Rec. in vi. 15. c. to be serviceable: t's τ» [A. V. φΜχ/ for"], Mt. ▼. 13. d. foil, by inf. to be Me, can: Mt. viii. 28 ; xxvi. 40 ; Mk. v. 4 ; [ix. 18 (inf. to be sup- plied)]; xiv. 37; Lk. vi. 48; viii. 43; [.xiii. 24]; xiv. 6,29 sq.; xvi. 3; xx. 26; Jn. xxi. 6 ; Actsvi. 10; xv. 10; xxv. 7 ; xxvii. 16, (Plut. Pomp. 58). with ace, πάντα, Phil. iv. 13; πολύ, Jas. V. 16. [CoMP. : ΐν-,ϊξ-, ΐπ-,κατ-ισχύω.^' lo-us, (ϊσοί, q. v.), adv., [fr. Soph, down] ; 1. equally, in Hie manner. 2. agreeably to expecta- tion, i. e. it may be, probably ; freq. an urbane expression of one's reasonable hope (Germ, wohl, hoffentlich) : Lk. XX. 13, and often in Attic writ.* "ItoXCo, -as, η, Italy: Acts xviii. 2; xxvii. 1, 6; Heb. xiii. 24.* 'Ιταλικό?, -ή, -Of, (Ιταλία), [fr. Plat, down], Italian : σπίίρα Ιταλική, the Italian cohort (composed of Italian, not provincial, soldiers). Acts x. 1 ; cf. Sckiirer, in the Zeitschrift f. wissensch. Theol. for 1S75, p. 422 sqq. ; [HacL-ett, in B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Italian Band].* ΊτονραΙα, -or, ή, Ilurcea, a mountainous region, lying northeast of Palestine and west of Damascus (Strabo 16 p. 756 §18; Plin.h. n. 5, (23) 19). Ace. to Luke (iii. 1) at the time when John the Baptist made his public appearance it was subject to Philip the tetrarch, son of Herod the Great, although it is not mentioned by Joseph, (antt. 1 7, 8, 1 ; 1 1 , 4, 1 8 ; 4, 6 and b. j. 2, 6, 3) among the regions assigned to this prince after his father's death ; (on this point cf. Schurer in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1877, p. 577 sq.). It was brought under Jew- ish control by king Aristobulus c. B.C. 100 (Joseph, antt. 13, 11, 3). Its inhabitants had been noted for robbery and the skilful use of the bow (Verg. geor. 2, 448 ; Cic. Phil. 13, 8, 1« ; Strabo 16 p. 755 sq. ; Lucan, Phar. 7, 230, 514). Cf. Miinter, Progr. de rebus Ituraeorum, Hafn. 1824 ; Win. RAVB. s. v. Ituraea; Kneucker in Schenkel iii. p. 406 sq. ; [B.D. Am. ed. s. v.].* ίχθύ8ιον, -ου, το', (dimin. fr. ιχθύς), η little fsh : Mt. xv. 34 ; !Mk. viii. 7. [From Arstph. on.] * Ιχβίϊ, -ύος, ό, [fr. Horn, down], a fsh : jMt. vii. 10; Mk. vi. 38; Lk. v. 6; Jn. xxi. 11, etc.; 1 Co. xv. 39. txvos, -fos (-out), TO, (fr. ΰω i. q. Ίκνίομαι, to go), [fr. Horn, down], a footprint, track, footstep: in the N. T. metaph., of imitating the example of any one, we find στοιχύν τοΊς Χχνίσί τίνος, Ro. iv. 12; π^ριπατΐΐν τοις ιχν. τ. 2 Co. xii. 18 ; ΐπιικολουθΰν τ. ίχν. τ(ΐ/. 1 Pet. ii. 21, (e'l' ΐχν(σί τίνος ίον πόδα vipeiv, Pind. ^em. 6, 27) ; cf. Lat. insistere vestigiis alicuius.' Ίωάθαμ, [-θάμ WHl, ό, (ΠΠν i. e. Jehovah is perfect), indecl., Jotham [A. V. (1611) Joatham^, king of Judah, son of L'zziab, B.C. 758-7 to 741, or 759 to 743 : Mt. i. 9.* "Ιωάννα [Tr Wll Ίωάνα ; cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 79 ; WH. App. p. 159 ; s. v. N, v], -ης. ή, (seeΊωάw/7;5), Joanna, the wife of Chuzas, Herod's steward, and a follower of Jesus : Lk. viii. 3; xxiv. 10.* Ίωαννάβ, -a, and (ace. to L Τ Tr WH) Ίωανάν, indecl., (see Ιωάννης), δ, Joannas [or Joanan"], one of the ances- tors of Christ : Lk. iii. 27.* 'Ιωάννη? and ([so Wll uniformly, exc. in Acts iv. 6 ; xiii. 5 ; Rev. xxii. 8] Tr in the Gospels of Lk. and Jn., [in the Acts, exc. iv. 6] and the Rev. [exc. xxii. 8]) Ί<μι>% Ίωάννηί 310 Ιωσης [cf. Τ(ί/. Proleg. p. 79 ; WH. App. p. 159 ; Scrivener, Intr. p. 562 (cf. s. V. N, k)], gen. -ου, tlat. -p and (in [Mt. xi. 4 ΛΥΙΙ ; Kev. i. 1 WII] ; Lk. vii. 18 Τ Tr WH, [22 Τ Tr WH]-€»[cf. Π'//.Αρρ.ρ. 158; B.17 (16), 7J), ace. -i;v, (5, (pni' and ΜΠΙΠ", to whom Jehovah is gracious, [al. whom Jehovah has graciously given], Germ. Gutlhold; Sept. Ίωαννάν [Tdf. Ίωανά»'], 1 Chr. iii. 24 ; Ίωνά, 2 Κ. XXV. 23 ; Ίωάνη:, 2 Chr. .xxviii. 12, [cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Johanan]), John ; in the N. T. the men of this name are, 1. John the Baptist, the son of Zacharias the priest and EUsabeth, the forerunner of Christ. By order of Her- od .\ntipas he was cast into prison and afterwards be- headed : Mt. iii. 1 ; xiv. 3, and often in the histor. blcs. of the X. T. ; Joseph, antt. 18, 5, 2, [B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Machierus]. 2. John the apostle, the writer of the Fourth Gospel, son of Zebedee and Salome, brother of James the elder : Jit. iv. 21 ; x. 2 (3) ; Mk. i. 19 ; ix. 2, 38 ; Lk. V. 10 ; vi. 14 ; Acts i. 13, and often ; Gal. ii. 9. He is that disciple who (without mention by name) is spoken of in the Fourth Gospel as esp. dear to Jesus (Jn. xiii. 23 ; xix. 26 ; xxi. 7, 20), and ace. to the traditional opinion is the author of the Apocalypse, Rev. i. 1, 4, 9 ; xxi. 2 Rec. ; xxii. 8. In the latter part of his life he had charge of the churches in Asia Minor, and died there at a very advanced age. That he never came into Asia Elinor, but died in Palestine somewhat in years, the following writers among others have attempted to prove, though by considerations far from satisfactory : Liitzelberger, Die kirchl. Tradition Ub. d. Ap. Johannes u. s. Schriften. Lpz. 1840 ; Keim, i. p. 161 sqq. [Eng. trans, i. 218 sqq.] ; Hottzmann in Schenkel iii. p. 332 sqq.; Scholten, Der Ap. Johannes in Kleinasien. Aus. d. Holland, deutsch v. Spiegel. Berl. 1872. On the other side cf., besides oth- ers, Grimm in Ersch u. Gruber's Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. xxii. p. 6 sqq. ; Steitz, Die Tradition Ub. die Wirksam- keit des Joh. in Ephesus, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1868, 3d Heft; Krenkel, Der Apost. Johannes. Berl. 1 868 ; Hilgenfeld in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1872,p. 372sqq., andfor 18 7 7, p. 508 sqq. ; [also Einl. in d. N. T. p. 394 sqq.] ; Luthardt, Der johann. Ursprung des4tenEvang. (Lpz. 1874) p. 93 sqq. [Eng. trans, p. 115 sqij. ; Godet, Commentaire etc. 3d ed. vol. i. Intr. 1. i. § iv. p. 57 sqq. ; Bleel; Einl. in d. N. T. (ed. Mangold) p. 167 sqq. ; Fisher, The Beginnings of Christianity, p. 327 sqq.]. 3. the father of the apostle Peter : Tdf. in Jn. i. 42 (43) and xxi. 15 sqq. (in both pass. R G Ίωνά, L Tr λ\ Η Ίωάνου) [see Ίωι /as, 2]. 4. a certain man eV ytvov! άρχκρατίκοϋ, a member of the Sanhedrin [cf. apxieptis, 2] : Acts iv. 6. 5. John sumamed Mark, the companion of Barnabas and Paul: Acts xii. 12, 25; xiii. 5, 13 ; xv. 37, [Tr everywh. with one ν ; so WH exc. in .xiii. 5]; see ΜάρκοΓ. 6. John, ace. to the testi- mony of Papias in Euseb. h. e. 3, 39 [cf. Westcnit, Canon, 5th ed. p. 70], a disciple of Christ and afterwards a Chris- tian presbyter in Asia Minor, whom not a few at the present day, following the opinion of Dionysius of Alex- andria [in Euseb. h. e. 7, 25] regard as the author of the Apocalypse, and accordingly esteem him as an eminent prophet of the primitive Christians and as the person referred to in Rev. i. 1, 4, 9 ; .xxi. 2 Ree. ; .vxii. 8. Full articles respecting him may be found — by Grimm in Ersch u. Gruber's Encyklop. 2d sect. vol. x.\iv. p. 217 Sfj. ; Gass in Herzog vi. p. 763 stjq. ; Ilollzmann in Schen- kel iii. p. 352 sq. ; \_Salmon in Diet, of Chris. Biog. iii. 398 sqq. ; cf. C. L. Leimbach, Das Papiasfragment (Gotha, 1875), esp. p. 114 sqq.]• Ίώβ, ό, indecl., (31'K i. e. harassed, afflicted [but queer tioned ; see Gesenius, Lex. (8th ed., by Miihlau and Volck) s. V.]), Job, the man commended in the didactic poem which bears his name in the canon of the O. T. (cf. Ezek. xiv. 14, 20) for his piety, and his constancy and fortitude in the endurance of trials: Jas. v. 11.* Ίωβή8, ό, indecl.. Jolted : Mt. i. 5 and Lk. iii. 32 in L Τ Tr [ WH ; (yet WH in Lk. 1. c. -/3ήλ)] for R G Ώβή», q. v.* [Ίωβήλ, see the preceding word.] Ίωδά, ό, indecl., Joda : Lk. iii. 26 Τ Tr WH, for R G L 'loiSa, see 'loiSas, 2.* Ίωήλ, ό, indecl., (Sxv whose God is Jehovah, i. q. a worshipper of God, [al. ' Jehovah is God ']), Joel, the eminent prophet who ace. to the opinion of very many recent writers prophesied in the reign of Uzziah [cf. B. D. s. V. Joel, 3] : Acts ii. 16.• Ίωνάν and (so Τ Tr WH) Ίωνάμ, 6, indecl., (see Ίωάν- ι^ί), Jonan [or Jonaiii], one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 30.• Ίωνάβ, -ά [Β. 20 (17 sq.)], ό, (njV a dove), Jonah (or Jonas) ; 1. Jonah, the O. T. prophet, a native of Gath-hepher in the tribe of Zebulun. He lived during the reign of Jeroboam II., king of Israel (2 K. xiv. 25). The narrative of his miraculous experiences, constructed for a didactic purpose, is given in the book which bears his name [on the historic character of which cf. B.D. (esp. Am. ed.) or McC. and S. s. v. ; also Ladd, Doctr. of Sacr. Script, i. 65 sqq.] : Mt. xii. 39—41 ; xvi. 4 ; Lk. xi. 29 sq. 32. 2. Jonah (or Jonas), a fisherman, father of the apostle Peter : Mt. xvi. 1 7 [L Τ WH here βαριωνα, see Βαριωκάί] ; Jn. i. 42 (43) [R G L mrg. Tr mrg., and RG in] xxi. 15. [16, 17], (see Ιωάννης, 3).* Ίωράμ, 6, indecl., (ΟΙΙΠ' i. e. whom Jehovah exalted), Joram, the son and successor of Jehoshaphat on the throne of Judah, fr. [c] B. c. 891 to 884 (2 K. viii. 16 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xxi. 2 sqq.) : Mt. i. 8.* Ίωρ<(μ. ό, indecl., Jorim, one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 29.* Ί&κΓαψ<1τ, ό, indecl., (uSCnTT. i. e. Jehovah judges), Jehoshaphat, king of Judah fr. [c.] B. c. 914 to 889 (1 K. xxii. 41 sqq. ; 2 Chr. xvii.-.xx.) : Mt. i. 8.* [Ίωο-ή (A. V. Jose, incorrectly), see Ίωσήί, init.] Ίοκτήϊ, gen. Ίωση [R G in Lk. iii. 29 Ίωση (which A. V. incorrectly takes as nom. Jose)] and (L Τ Tr WH in Mk. vi. 3 ; XV. 40, 47) Ίωσητο! (cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 199; B. 19 (17) sq. ; W. § 10, 1 ; [IF//. App. p. 159']), 6, Joses; 1. one of the ancestors of Christ : Lk. iii. 29 ([see above] ; L Τ Tr WH Ίησοϋ, q. v. 2). 2. the own brother of Jesus : Mk. vi. 3, and R G in Mt. χϋί 'Ιωσήφ 811 καθαφέω 55 (where L TTr WH 'Ιωσήφ, q. v. 6) ; see Ιάκωβο!, 3. 3. the son of Mary, the sister of the mother of Jesus [see Μαριάμ, 3] : Mt. xxvii. 56 (where Τ Tr mrg. WH txt. Ιωσήφ [Ίωση! and Ιωσήφ seem to have been difi. forms of one and the same name ; cf. Renan in the Journ. Asiat., 1864, ser. vi. T. iv. p. 536; Frankel, Hodeget in Misch. p. 31 note; Bohl, Volksbibel u. s. w. p. 15]); Mk. XV. 40, 47. 4. a Levite, surnamed Βαρνάβας (q. v.) : Acts iv. 36 (where LTTrWH Ίω- <τήφν Ίωσ-ήφ, indecl., (in Joseph, [e. g. c. Ap. 1, 14, 16 ; 32, 3 ; 33, 5] ΊώστρΓοί), ό, (J\OY, It. ηρ' to add, Gen. xxx. 23 sq. [cf. B. D. 6. V. Joseph]), Joseph ; 1. the pa- triarch, the eleventh son of Jacob : Jn. iv. 5 ; Acts vii. 9, 13 sq. 18 ; Heb. xi. 21 sq.; φυΚή Ιωσήφ, i- e. the tribe of Ephraim, Rev. vii. 8. 2. the son of Jonan [or Jonam], one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 30. 3. the son of Judah [or Judas ; better Joda] another an- cestor of Jesus : Lk. iii. 26 (where L mrg. Τ Tr WH Ί&>- <"7Xi <1• ■^■)• *• Λβ son of Mattathias, another of the same: Lk. uL 24. 5. the husband of Mary, the mother of Jesus : Mt. i. 16, 18-20, 24 ; ii. 13, 19 ; Lk. L 27; ii. 4, 16, 33RL, 43RGLmrg.; iii. 23 ; iv. 22; Jn. i. 4a (46) ; vi. 42. 6. an own brother of our Lord : Mt. .\iii. 55 LTTr WH (for R G Ίωση! [q. v. 2]). 7. Joseph of Arimathaa, a member of the Sanhedrin, who favored Jesus: Mt. xxvii. 57, 59; Mk. xv. 43, 45 ; Lk. xxiii. 50 ; Jn. xix. 38. 8. Joseph, surnamed Βαρι/ά- βα! (q. V.) : Acts iv. 36 L Τ Tr WH (for R G Ίωσήί [q. V. 4]). 9. Joseph called Barsabas [better Barsab- bas; see the word], and surnamed Justus: Acts i. 23. [See Ίωσ^Γ, 3.] Ίωσ-ηχ, Josech, see Ιωσήφ, 3. Ίωσ -Cos (LTTrWH Ίωσίΐ'αΓ [see WH. App. p. 155; s. V. fi, i]),-oD, 0, (in'CiN" i. e. whom 'Jehovah heals'), Josiah, king of Judah, who restored among the Jews the worship of the true God, and after a reign of thirty-one years was slain in battle c. b. c. 611 (2 K. xxiL sq. ; 2 Chr. xxxiv. sq.) : Jit. i. 10 sq.* Ιώτα, TO, tola [A. 'V.Jot']. the Hebr. letter \ the small- est of them all ; hence equiv. to the minutest part : Mt. v. 18. [Cf. I, I.]• Κ κάγώ [so the recent edd. usually, (in opp. to the κάγά stc. of Grsb. et al., cf. Herm. Λ^ig. p. 526 ; W. § 5, 4 a. ; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 4 ; cf. I, i)], (by crasis fr. «al eya [retained e. g. in Mt. xxvi. 15 Τ ; Lk. ii. 48 WH; .-cvi. 9 Τ Tr WH ; Acts x. 26 Τ Tr WH ; xxvi. 29 WH, etc. ; cf. B. 10 ; W. § 5, 3; WH. App. p. 145 : esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96 sq.], for tlie first time in Horn. H. 21, 108 [var., cf. Od. 20, 296 var. (h. Merc. 1 7, 3) ; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Horn. p. 619]), dat. κά,>«)ί [και 4μοΊ Acts χ. 28 R G], ace. (cd^t; 1. nnf/ /, the ν Ιουδαίων, of the washings of the Jews before and after their meals, Jn. ii. 6 ; without a gen., of baptism (a symbol of moral cleansing), Jn. iii. 25 ; with a gen. of the obj., and that a person, — of the levitical purification of women after childbirth, Lk. ii. 22 ; and of lepers, Jlk. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14 ; with a gen. of the thing, αμαρτιών or Αμαρτημά- των, a clea7ising from the guilt of sins (see καθαρίζω, 1 b. j3.) : wrought now by ba|)tism, 2 Pet. i. 9, now by the ex- piatory sacrifice of Christ, Heb. i. 3 on ivhich ef. Kurtz, Com. p. 70 ; (Ex. xxx. 10 ; της αμαρτίας μου, Job vii. 21 ; of an atonement, Lcian. asin. 22).• KaOapos, -a, -όν ; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng. chaste, chasten ; Curtius § 26; VaniCek p. 177]; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. mostly for ΙΙΠϋ ; clean, pure, (free from the admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulter- ates, corrupts) ; a. jjhysically : Mt. xxiii. 26 ; .xxvii. 59 ; Heb. x. 22 (23) ; Rev. xv. 6 ; xix. 8, 14, and Rec. in xxii. 1 ; χρυσίον, purified by fire. Rev. xxi. 18, 21 ; in a similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted to bear fruit, Jn. .xv. 3 ; ό \(\ουμ. . . . καθαρός o\os (where the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows : ' he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not need radical renewal, but only to be cleansed from every se\ eral fault into which he may fall through intei^ course with the unrenewed world'), Jn. .xiii. 10. b. in a levitical sense ; clean, i. e. the use of which is not for- bidden, imparts no uncleanness : πάι^α καθαρά, Ro. xiv. 20 ; Tit. i. 1 5. c. ethically ; free from corrupt desire, from sin and guilt: Tit. i. 15; ίμ(1ς καθαροί, Jn. xiii. 10, [11]; oi K. Tji καρδία (as respects heart [W. § 31, 6 a.]), Mt. V. 8 (καθαρός χ(Ίρας, Hdt. 1, 35 ; κατά το σώμα κ. κατίί την ψυχήν, Plat. Crat. p. 405 b.) ; free from ercry admix- ture of what is false, sincere, (κ καθαρός καρδίας, 1 Tim. i. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22, and R G in 1 Pet. i. 22 ; eV καθαρά avvti- δήσιι, 1 Tim. iii. 9 : 2 Tim. i. 3 ; genuine (joined with αμί- αντος) θρησκεία, Jas. i. 27 : blameless, innocent. Acts xviii. 6. Hebraistically with the addition of από τίνος, pure from, i. e. unstained with the guilt of, any thing [W. § 30, 6a.; B. 157 (137) sq.]: άπό τ. ai/iaros. Acts xx. 26 ; Sus. 46 Alex., cf. Gen. xxiv. 8 ; Tob. iii. 14 ; καθαρας ΐχιιν τάς χ^Ίρας από τοΰ φόνου, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 16 ; in class. Grk. with a simple gen., as φόνου, Plat. legg. 9 p. 864 e. ; cf. καθαρότηι 313 κάθιζα. Passow 6. V. p. 1528' ; [L. and S. s. v. 3] ; Kiihner § 421, 4 ii. p. 344. d. in a levitical and ethical sense: ηάντα καθαρά ΙμΙν. Lk. xi. 41, on whicli see cv«/x(. [Syn. see ίίΚικρίνήί; cf. Westcott on I Jn. iii. 3.]' καθορότη5, -ijTor, ή, (καθαροί), cleanness, purity; in a levitical sense, Tti/or, Heb. ix. 13. (Xen. mem. 2, 1, 22; Plato, al.) * καθ -cSpa, -as, ή, (κατά and ίδρα), η chair, seat: Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15, (Sir. .\ii. 12; Hdian. 2, 3, 17 [7 ed. Bekk.]) ; of the exalted seat occupied by men of eminent rank or influence, as teachers and judges: eVi rrjs Μωϋ- σ(ω! καθ€δρας ('κάθισαν, sit on the seat which Moses for- merly occupied, i. e. bear themselves as Jloses' succes- sors in explaining and defending his law, Mt. xxiii. 2. (Sept. for 2mo and i^Td. [Xen., Aristot., al.]) • καβ-ί'ξομω; impf. ίκαθιζόμην; [fr. Horn, down]; to sit down, seat one's self, sit : Jn. xx. 12 ; foil, by fv with dat. of place, Mt. xxvi. 55 ; Lk. ii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 20; Acts vi. 15; foil, by eVi with gen., Acts xx. 9 L Τ Tr WH ; by eVi with dat., Jn. iv. 6 ; f«i, Jn. vi. 3 Tdf. ; [oi where. Acts ii. 2 I^hm. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 336 sq.; B. 56 (49) ; 60 (52). CoMP. : παρα-καθ^ζομαι.']' καθ-£ΐ$, more correctly καθ" (h, see eh, 4 c. p. 187'. καθ-<ξή3, (κατά and e^^f, q. v.), adv., one after another, successively, in order : Lk. i. 3 ; Acts xi. 4 ; .xviii. 23 ; oi ΐίαθ(ξ. those that follow after. Acts iii. 24 [cf. W. 633 (.588)] ; iv τω καθ. sc. χρόνω [R. V. soon aferwards'], Lk. viii. 1. (Ael. v. h. 8, 7; Plut. symp. 1, 1, 5; in earlier Grk. l^rjs and (φιξη: are more usual.) * καθ-<νδω ; impf. 3 pers. plur. €κάθ(υδον ; f r. Horn, down ; Sept. mostly for 33ΐ7 ; 1. to fall asieep, to drop off to sleep : Mt. xxv. 5. 2. to sleep ; a. prop. : Mt. viii. 24 ; Lx. 24 [on this and its paral. cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 1198']; .xui. 25; xxvi. 40, 43, 45 ; Mk.iv. 27, 38; v. 39; xiii. 36 ; xiv. 37, 40 sq. ; Lk. viii. 52 ; xxii. 46 ; 1 Th. v. 7. b. euphemistically, ?o Je rfead: 1 Th. v. 10 ; (Ps. Ixxxvii. (Ix.xxviii.) 6 ; Dan. xii. 2). c. metaph. to yield to sloth and sin, and be indifferent to one's salvation : Ejih. V. 14; iTh. v. 6.• καβηγητή5, -oO, ό, {καθηγίυμαι to go before, lead) ; a. prop, a guide: Numen. ap. Ath. 7, p. 313 d. b. a master, teacher: Mt. xxiii. 8 R G, 10. (Dion. H. jud. de Thuc. 3, 4 ; several times in Plut. [cf. Wetst. on Mt. I.e.]) * καθ-ήκ» ; [fr. Aeschyl., Soph, down] ; 1. to come down. 2. to come to, reach to ; impers. καθήκ€ΐ, it is hccoming, it is fit (cf. f!erm. zukommen), Ezek. xxi. 27; οΰ καθηκίν (Rec. καθήκον), foil, by the ace. with inf., Acts xxii. 22 [W. 282 (ίβό) ; Β. 21 7'(187)] ; rh μή καθήκοντα, things not fitting, i. e. forbidden, .shameful, Ιίο. i. 28 ; 2 Mace. vi. 4. Cf. ανήκω.* κάθ-η|χαι, 2 pers. sing, κάθη a later form for κάθησαι (.\ct3 xxiii. 3), impv. κάθου for κάθησο [yet cf. Kiihner as below] (cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 359 ; Kriiger §38, 6 sq. i. p. 147; Kuhner § 301 i. p. 671 ; W. § 14, 4 ; [B. 49 (42)]), [subjunc. 2 pers. plur. κάθησθ^, Lk. xxii. 30 Tr mrg. ; but WH txt. καθήσθ^ : see Veitch s. v.; Kriiger §38, 6, 1 (cf. καθίζω), inf. καβήσθαι, ptcp. καθήμ€νοί] ; impf (καθήμην; and once the rare [cf. Veitch p. 34 7] fut. καθή- σομαι, Lk. xxii. 30 Τ Tr txt.WH mrg. [so WH in Mt. xix. 2.S also ; cf. καθίζω, fin.] ; (ήμαι) ; a verb of wliich only the pres. and impf. are in use in class. Grk. [cf. B. 60 (52)] ; Sept. for 21?\; 1. to sit down, seat one's self: foil, by fv w. dat. of place [cf. W. § 52, 4, 9], Mk. iv. 1 ; Lk. x.xii. 55 [here Τ Tr WH ^tVor] ; els, Mk. xui. 3 [B. § 147, 16]; μeτά w. gen. of pers., Mt. .xxvi. 58; κάβου e[■ v.), general, unirersal (oc- casionally in i)rof. auth. fr. [Aristot. and] Polyb. down, as καθ. και κοιχή 'ιστορία, Polyb. 8, 4, 11 ; often in eccl. writ. ; the title ή καθολική iκκλησta first in Ignat. ad Smyrn. c. 8 and often in Polye. martyr, [see ed. (Gebh. Ilarn.) Zahn, p. 133 note] ; cf. καθολική άvάστaσιs, [Justin c. Tryph. 81 sub fin.]; Tlieoph. ad Autol. [I. i. § 13] p. 40 ed. Otto) ; ίπιστολαΊ καθολικοί, or simply καθολικοί, in the title of the E])p• of Jaiucs, I'eter, John, and .hide (RGL; cf. των ίπτά λ€γομ(νων καθολικών sc. επιστολών, Eus. h. e. 2, 23, 25), most |)rob. because they seemed to be written not to any one church alone, but to all the churches. [Cf. Diet, of Chris. Antiq. s. v. Catholic] * καθόλον (i. e. καθ' όλου [" as it is written in auth. before Aristot." (L. and S.)]), adv., u-holly, entirely, at all : Acts iv. 18. ([Ex. xxii. 11] ; Ezek. xiii. 3, 22; Am. iii. 3, 4; Xen., Plat., Dem., .\risl(it. and sq(i.) * κοθ-οιτλίζω : pf . pass. ptcp. καθωπλισμίνο! ; to arm [fully (cf. κατά. III. 1 fin.)], yur/iisA with arms: Lk. xi. 21. (Xen., Pint., al.; Sept.) * καθ-οράαι, -ώ : 1. to look down, see from above, view from on high, (Hom., Ildt., Xen., Plat., al.). 2. to see thoroughly [cf. κατά, III. 1 fin.], perceive clearly, un- derstand (Germ, erschauen) : pres. pass. 3 pers. sing, κα- θοραται, Ro. i. 20 (3 Macc. iii. 11, and often in class. Grk.). Cf. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 61.* καθότι (i. e. κα^ δ Ti), according to what, i. e. 1. so far as, according as: Acts ii. 45; iv. 35, (Polyb. 18, 19 (36), 5; for 11?Ν3, Ex. i. 12, 17). 2. because that, because, [cf. W. § 53, 8] : Lk. i. 7; xix. 9; Acts ii. 24, and LTTr WH (for Rec. διότι) in Acts xvii. 31, (Tob. i. 12; xiii. 4 ; Polyb. 18, 21 (38), 6). 3. as, Just as : Bar. vi. (Ep. Jer.) 1 ; Judith ii. 13, 15 ; x. 9, and often in Thuc. et al.* καθω; (i. e. καθ" ώς), a particle found occasionally in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic καθά and κοβό, but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists ; cf. Slurz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 74 sqq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p.425sq. ; [W. 26 (25)]; 1. according as, just as, even as : in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31 ; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; foil, by οΰτως in the second member [cf. W. §53, 5],Lk. xi. 30; xvii. 26 ; Jn. iii. 14; 2Co.i. 5; x. 7; Col. iii. 13 ; 1 Jn. ii. 6 ; foil, by κοί also, Jn. xv. 9 ; xviL 18 ; XX. 21 ; 1 Jn. ii. 18 ; iv. 1 7 ; 1 Co. xv. 49 ; it is annexed to precedinc: words after the demonstrative οΰτωϊ, Lk. xxiv. 24 ; with οΰτως unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6 ; xxviiL 6; Mk. xvi. 7; Lk. i. 2, 55, 70; xi. 1 ; Jn. i. 23: v. 23; Acts x. 47 [here LTTr WHii]; XV. 8; Ro.i.l3; xv.7; 1 Co. viii. 2 ; x. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 14 ; ix. 3 ; xi. 12 ; Eph. it. 17, and κασωστηρ 315 often ; καθίο^ διδάσκω, agreeably to my method of teach- ing, 1 Co. iv. 17 ; καθίΰί yiypanTai, Mt. xxvi. 24 ; Mk. ix. 13 ; Acts vii 42 ; xv. 15 ; Ho. i. 17, and often in Paul ; the apodosis wanting, and to be gathered fr. the con- text : καθωί παρΕκάλίσά σϊ . . . iv πίστί t, sc. ούτω και νυν παρακαλώ, 1 Tim. i. 3, cf. W.570 (530); [Β. 38(; (331)]; ήρξατο αΙτ(Ίσθαί (sc. οΰτω ποίί'ιν airois), καθωι κτλ. Mk. XV. 8 [Β. § 151, 23 b.; cf. W. 584 (543 sq.)] ; in com- parison by contrary we find the negligent use : ά-γαηωμιν άλληΚονι, οϋ καθώς Κάιν κτλ. 1 Jn. ϋϊ. 11 sq., cf. De Wette ad loc. and W. 623 (579); οίτ09 eVtiv ό apros . . . οΰ καθώς etc., not such as they ate etc., Jn. vi. 58. with the verb ίΐμί, equiv. to Lat. qualis, such as, 1 Jn. iii. 2; in a parenthesis, 1 Th. ii. 13 (as it is in truth). 2. according as i. e. in proportion as, in the degree that : Mk. iv. 33 ; Acts vii. 1 7 (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; xl. 29 ; 1 Co. xii. 11,18; 1 Pet. iv. 10. 3. since, seeing that, agreeably to the fact that, [cf. W. § 53, 8; 448 (417)]: Jn. xvii. 2 ; Ro. i. 28 [yet here al. regard καθ. as c ο r- responsive rather than causal or explanatory] ; 1 Co. i. 6 ; V. 7 ; Eph. i. 4 ; Phil. i. 7. 4. it is put for the simple ώϊ, a. after verbs of speaking, in indir. disc. Acts XV. 14 ; it serves to add an epexegesis, 3 Jn. 3 (to σον Tg άληθ(ία). b. of time, when, after that, (cf. Lat. ui) : 2Macc. i. 31; [Neh. v. 6]; here many bring in Acts vii. 1 7 ; but see 2 above. καθώσ-ΐΓ£ρ, [Tr καθώς Trfp], just as, exactly as : Heb. v. 4 Τ Tr WH [also 2 Co. iii. 1» Wfl mrg.]. (Himer., Psell., Tzetz.) * κα£, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the par- ticles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3 sqq. ; B. 361 (310) sqq., and cf. EUicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difiference between it and τί see s. v. re ad init.] I. It serves asacopulativei. e. to connect (Lat. el, atque. Germ, und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as oi ΦαρίσαΙυι καΙ Σαδδουκαΐοι, Mt. xvi. 1 ; ό θ(6ς κα\ -πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θ(6ς, 3) ; iv καρδία καλή και αγαθή, Lk. viii. 15 ; πολυ- μ(ρώς κα\ πολντρόπως, Heb. i. 1 ; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weicrht is thus given : ή υιοθεσία κα\ ή 8όξα και α'ι 8ιαθήκαι καϊ ή νομοθίσία και ή λατρι'ια κα\ α'ι ϊπαγγ(λίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ayia κα\ δικαία και αγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 21 ; Jn. xvi. 8 ; Acts xv. 20, 29 ; xxi. 25 ; Heb. ix. 10 ; Rev. V. 12 ; .xviii. 12 sq. ; cf. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it connects numerals ; and so that (contrary to the more com. usage) the greater number precedes: δίκα κ. οκτώ, Lk. xiii. 4, 11, [but in both pass. L and Tr br. WH om. και; Tdf. δίκαοκτώ], 16 ; τισσαράκοντα κ. ϊξ, .Jn. ii. 20; add, Jn. v. 5 (i T; Acts xiii. 20; cf. W. § 37, 4 ; [Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18 ; noteworthy also is its use in 2 Co. xiii. 1 (cf. Deut. xLx. 15 Sept.) fVi στάματος δΰο μαρτύρων και τριών (in Mt. xviii. 16 η τρ. cf. W. 440 (410) note) al the mouth of two witnesses and (should there be so many) of three ; a similar use of και, to lend a certain indefinite- ness to the expression, occurs occasionally with other than numerical specifications, as Jas. iv. 13 σήμ(ρον κα\ (R"G; but LTTr WH t,) αΰριον; cf. Kiihner § 521, 2; Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 614•]. c. it joins to par- titive words the general notion ; so that it is equiv. to and in general, and in a word, in short : 6 Πέτρος κ. οΊ απόστολοι. Acts v. 29 ; οι άρχΐίρ(ϊς [^καϊ οΊ πρεσβύτεροι Rec] και το σννέδριον όλον, Mt. -x.xvi. 59 ; καϊ δικαιώμασι σαρκός, Heb. ix. 1 Rec. Tr br. WH mrg. ; κα\ in'i τον 'Ισραήλ τον θεοϋ. Gal. vi. 16, and often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 437sq. (407); 520sq. (485); [B. 363 (311 sq.) ; 400 (343)] ; with re preceding, η τ( . . . αντοϋ δύναμις κα'ι θειότης, Ro. i. 20 [see re, 2 a.] ; and, on the other hand, it joins to a general idea something particular, which is already comprised indeed in that general notion but by this form of expression is brought out more emphatically (which Strabo 8 (1) p. 340 calls συι/καταλ/γ^ικ το μέρος τω όλω) ; so that it is equiv. to and especially [cf . W. u. s.] : τα πάντα και τα τών δαιμονιζομίνων, Mt. viii. 33 ; τοϊς μα- θηταις αντον κ. τω Ώετρω, Mk. xvi. 7 ; αί φωνάι αυτών κ. τών αρχιερέων, Lk. xxiii. 23 [RG] ; σννγνναιξϊ κα\ Μαριάμ, Acts i. 14; iv Ιούδα κ. Ιερουσαλήμ, 1 Mace. ii. 6; πας Ίοίδα κ. Ιερουσαλήμ. 2 Chr. χχχν. 24, cf. xxxii. 33 ; often so in Grk. writ. also. 2. It connects clauses and sentences; a. univ., as διακαθαριεί την άλωνα αυτοϋ κ. συνάξει τον σ'ιτον κτλ. Mt. iii. 12 ; εισήλθαν . . . κα'ι έδί- δασκον. Acts ν. 21 ; and in innumerable other e.xx. b. In accordance with the simpUcity of the ancient popular speech, and esp. of the Hebr. tongue, it links statement to statement, the logical relations of which the more cul- tivated language expresses either by more exact parti- cles, or by the use of the participial or the relative con- struction (cf. W. § 60, 3 ; B. 288 (248) sqq. ; 3G1 (310) sq.) : e. g. that very freq. formula iytveTo . . . κα'ι (see γίνομαι, 2 b.) ; και ειδον και (equiv. to οτι) σεισμός iγivετo, Rev. vi. 12 ; τεξεται υΐον κ. καίΧεσεις το όνομα αυτού (equiv. to ου όνομα καλέσεις). ^It. i. 21 ; καλόν εστίν ημάς 2>δβ είναι, κα\ (equiv. to όθεν) ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς, Mk. ix. 5 ; clauses arc thus connected together in clusters ; as, Mt. vii. 25, 27 (an examjile of six clauses linked together by και) ; ]Mt. xiv. 9 sqq.; Mk. i. 12-14; Lk. xviii. 32-34; Jn. ii. 13-16; x. 3; 1 Co. -xii. 5-6 ; Rev. vi. 2, 8, 12-16 ; ix. 1-4 (where nine sentences are strung together by και), etc. after a designation of time καί annexes what will be or was done at that time : ήγγικεν ή ώρα και πapaδίδoτa^ κτλ. Mt. xxvi. 45 ; ην δε ώρα τρίτη κα\ εσταυρωσαν αυτόν, Mk. XV. 25 ; iγyύς ην το πάσχα ... κ. άνεβη εΙς Ίεροσ. ό Ιησούς, Jn. ii. 13; ήμεραι έρχονται και συντελέσω, Heb. viii. 8 ; add, Lk. xxiii. 44 ; Jn. iv. 35; v. 1 ; xi. 55 ; Acts V. 7 ; and not infreq. so in Grk. writ., as ^δτ; δέ ήν όψί και οΊ Κορίνθιοι εζαπίνης πρύμναν εκρούοντο. Thuc. 1, 50; cf. Matthiae § 620, 1 a. p. 1481 ; W. 436 (405 sq.) ; [B. 361 (310)]. c. it joins affirmative to negative sentences, as μή συκοφαντήσατε κα\ άρκεΐσθε, Lk. iii. 14 ; ουτ€ αντλημα έχεις και το φρέαρ εστ\ βαθύ, Jn. iv. 1 1 ; οϋτε . . . iπιδέχετaι καΐ . . . κωλύει, 3 Jn. 10, (rarely so in Grk. writ., as Eur. Iph. Taur. 578; cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714); much oftener it annexes a clause depending on the preceding negative : μήποτέ σε παραδω . . . και 6 κριτής σε παραδα . . . και εις φυλακήν βληθήστ/, Mt. ν. 25 ; add, Mt. vii. 6 ; χ. 38 ; xiii. 15 ; xxvii. 64 ; Lk. xii. 58 ; xxi. 34 ; Jn. vi. KM 816 ΚΛ 53 ; xii. 40 ; Acts xxviii. 27 ; 1 Tb. iii. 5 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; Heb. xii. 15 ; Rev. xvi. 15 ; [see 15. 368 (.ilS) d. ; cf. W. §56. 2 a.]. d. it anne.xes what follows from something eaiil before (καί consecutive), so as to be equiv. to mid so : Mt. V. 15 {και λάμπ(ΐ) ; Mt. xxiii. 32 (και ηληρώσατί) ; 2 Co. xi. 9 (και eV παι^ί) ; Heb. iii. 19; 1 Jn-. iii. 19 {και ίμπροσθίν); 2 Pot. i. 19 {και ΐχημίν); so in statements after imperatives and words havin;; the force of an im- perative : beiiTf ΰπίσω μου, και πυιήσω ίμα! etc. jMt. iv. 19; ecVe λόγω, και Ιαθησίται ό miif μου. Mt. viii. 8; Lk. vii. 7 ; άντίστητί τω δισ^όλω και φ(ύξ(ται αφ' ίμων, .las. iv. 7; add, Mt. vii.'? ; Mk. vi. 22; Lk. x. 28; Jn. xiv. Iii ; Rev. iv. I ; cf. Fritzscbe on Mt. pp. 187 (and 416), [cf. Sir. ii. 6 ; iii. 1 7]. e. with a certain rhetorical em- phasis, it annexes something apparently at variance with what has been previously said ; so that it is equiv. to ami yet (cf. Stallbaum on Plat. apol. p. 29 b.) ; so the Lat. alque (cf. Beicr on Cic. de off. 3, 11, 48) : Mt. iii. 14 («at σϋ tpxn wp6s μ^); Mt. vi. 2S ; x. 29 ; Jlk. xii. 12; Jn. i. 5 (και ή σ<οτία κτλ.), 10 (και ό κόσμος) ; Jn. iii. 11, 32 ; V. 40 (καΊ oi θί\(τ() : Jn. vi. 70 ; vii. 28 ; viii. 49, 55 (και ουκ ΐγνώκατί) ; Jn. ix. 30 ; 1 Co. v. 2 ; 2 Co. vi. 9 ; Heb. iii. 9; Uev. iii. 1 (. . . f^s, και veKpos ft), etc. wlien a vain attempt is spoken of : Mt. xii. 4:i {ζητιϊ και οίχ ίΰ- ρίσκα) ; xiii• Π; xxvi. 60; Lk. xiii. 7; 1 Th. ii. 18. f. like the Ilebr. 1 (see Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 396°), it begins an apodosis, which is thus connected with the protasis, cf. the derm, da [or Eng. /Ac/i], (in class, (irk. some- times «i ; see hi, 8) [cf. B. 362 (311) d.; W. § 53, 3 f. ; Ellic. on Phil. i. 22] : with orf or a temporal if preced- ing in the protasis [as sometimes in Grk. prose (e. g. Thuc. 2, 93, where see KrUger)], Lk. ii. 21 ; Acts xiii. 1 8 sq. [here WH txt. om. και ; see a>r, I. 7] ; ir . . . κα\ ;8ού, Lk. vii. 12; .\ctsi. 10; .\. 17 [RGTrmrg. br.]; iav . . . και eiVcXfio•. Rev. iii. 20 Τ WH mrg., although here και may be rendered also (I also will come in, etc.), de- claring that, if tlie first thing (expressed in the protasis) be done, the second (expressed in the apodosis) will be done also. g. as in class. Grk., it begins a question thrown out with a certain impassioned abruptness and containing an urgent rejoinder to another's speech (cf. W. § 53, 3 a. ; Matthiae § 620, 1 d. ; Kiibner § 521, 3 ii. p. 791 Sfj.) ; και τΙς δύναται σωθηναι; Mk. χ. 26; Koi τις ίστΊ μου πλησίον ; Lk. χ. 29 ; και τι? cVtik κτλ. Jn. ix. 36 [G Τ Tr WH] ; .add, Jn. xiv. 22 [G T]. Peculiar is 2 Co. ii. 2 : el yap cyoj λυπώ ΰμας, και tic . . . (μου (a swarm of exx. of this form of speech occur in Clem, homil. 2, 43, e. g. ft ό 6ebs ψ? uScrat, καΐ τις άληθ(ΰ£ΐ ;), where the writer after the conditional protasis, interrupting him- self as it were, utters the substance of the negative apodosis in a new question, where we render who then is he that etc., for then there is no one who etc. h. it introduces parentheses [cf. W. § 62, 1] : και ίκωλΰθηρ άχρι τοΐι 8fCpo, Ro. i. 13 (Dem. Lept. p. 488, 9; so the Lat. et, e. g. praeda — et aliriuanturo ejus fuit — militi concessa, Liv. 27, 1); cf. Fntz.'^che, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 35 sq. 3. It annexes epexegetically both words and sentences {καΐ epe.xegetical or 'explicative'), so that it is equiv. to and indeed, namely, [ W. § 53, 3 c. ; cf. § 66, 7 fin.] : χάριν και αποστολήν, Ro. ί. 5, where ct. Fritzsche ; ircpt ίλπί^ος και αναστάσεως ν€κρών, Acts .\xiii. 6 ; πολλά ... κ. ίτίρα, Lk. iii. 1 8 ; πολλά . . . και άλλα σημΰα, Jn. .\χ. 30 ; πολλά και βαρ^α αιτιώματα, Acts .\χν. 7 ; πολλοί κ. ΰιαιπ<ίτακτοι. Tit. i. 10 [Ιί G; on the prec(Mling use of και cf. ττολΰς, d. a. lin.] ; και [L br. κ.] όταν άπαρθ!/, and indueil [i. e. viz.] when he shall be taken away etc. Lk. v. 35 [others find here an aposiopesis ; cf. Meyer ad lac. (ed. )tV(.<,<)] ; και χάριν άντΊ χάριτος, Jn. i. 16 ; και 7τ>ρισ- σϋν ίχωσιν, Jn. χ. 10, add 3.i (where the words και ότι κτλ. show what kind of blasphemy is meant) ; Acts v. 21 (on which see ■γ(ρουσία) ; Ro. ii. 15 (where και μιταξυ κτλ. adds an explanation respecting the testimony of conscience) ; 1 Co. iii. 5 ; xv. 38, etc. ; cf. Borne.mann, Scholia, p. 38 ; Fritzsche, Quaest. Lcian. p. 9 sqq. ; so the Lat. el in Cic. Tusc. 3, 20, 48 laiidat. et saepe, virtulem; pro Mih 25 te enim jam apjiello et ea voce ut me exau- direpossis; cf. /iu;ns7ior;i, Lat. Gram. ii. p. 809; [Har- pers' Lat. Diet. s. V. et, II. Λ.] ; i. q. and inileed, to make a climax, for and besides : και ηκατάκριτο», AcIm .xxii. 25 ; και toCtoi' ίσταυρωμίνον, 1 Co. ii. 2 ; και τούτο, Lat. idque (Cic. off. 1, 1, 1 te . . . audientem Cratippum idque Athenis), our and this, and that, and that too, i. q. especially : Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. vi. G, and LT Tr WH in 8, (4 Mace. xiv. 9) ; also και ταύτα (com. in Grk. writ.). 1 Co. vi. 8 Rec; Heb. xi. 12; cf. Klolz, Devar. i. p. lOS; ii. 2 p. 052 sq. ; [cf. W. 162 (153)]. 4. it connects whole narratives and expositions, and thus forms a tran- sition to new matters : Mt. iv. 23 ; viii. 14, 23, 28 ; ix. 1, 9, 27,35; x. 1; Mk. v. 1, 21; vi. 1,6; Lk. viii. 26; Jn. i. 19 (cf. 15) ; 1 Jn. i. 4, etc. ; esp. in the very com. και eyt- v€TO, Mt. vii. 28; Lk. vii. 11 ; viii. 1, etc. (see γίνομαι, 2 b.). 5. καί . . . και, a repetition which indicates that of two things one takes place no less than the other: both . . . and, as well . . . as, not only . . . but also, [W. § 53, 4] : it serves to correlate — not only single terms, as κάί [L br. K.] ^υχην κα\ σώμα, Mt. χ. 28 ; add, Mk. iv. 41 ; .In. iv. 36 [here Tr WH om. first κ.] ; Ro. xi. 33 ; Phil. ii. 13 ; iv. 1 2, etc. ; και iv ολίγω κα\ iv πολλώ [L Τ Tr WH μ(γαΚω\ both with little effort and with great [but see μίγας, 1 a. ■y. fin.]. Acts xxvi. 29 ; but also clauses and sentences, as Mk. ix. 13; Jn. vii. 28; i.\.37: xii. 28 ; 1 Co. i. 22; and even things that are contrasted [cf. W. u. s.; B. § 149, 8 b.] : Jn. xv. 24 ; Acts xxiii. 3 ; καί . . . και ού, Lk. v. 36 ; ,Τη. vi. 36 ; now . . . now, >Ik. ix. 22 ; και οΰ . . . καί, Jn. xvii. 25. 6. τί . . . και, see ri, 2. II. It marks something added to what has already been said, or that of which something already said Iiolds o-ood ; accordingly it takes on the nature of an adverb, also (Lat. enam, quoque. Germ, auch [cf. W. and B. as ad init. In this use it generally throws an emphasis upon the word Λvhich immediately follows it; cf. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p. 63S.]) ; 1. used simply, a. also, likewise: Mt. v. 39 sq.; xii. 45; Mlc. ii. 28; Lk. iii. 14; Jn. viii. 19; Ro. viii. 17 ; 1 Co. vii. 29 ; xi. 6. etc.; very freq. with pronouns: και νμ(ϊς, Mt. xx. 4, 7; Lk. xxi. :ll : .7n. vii. 47, etc. : κά-γώ. καί rye, see κά-γώ, 2 ; koJ 317 καίνοf . . . και, Mt. vi. 10; Lk. xi. 2 RLbr. ; Acts vii. 51 [L καθώ^; 2 Co. xiii. 2 see it, L 1 fin.] ; GaL i. 9; Phil. i. 20, (Tliuc. 8, 1 ; ωστΓίρ . . . «αί, Xen. mem. [2, 2, 2 (and Kuhneradloc.)] ; 3, 1,4; [4,4, 7; cf. B. 3G2 (3U)c.]); with d preceding, GaL iv. 7. sometimes και stands in each member of the comparison: 1 Th. ii. 14; Ro. i. 13; Col. iii. 13, (2 Mace. ii. 10; vi. 14; also in Grk. writ., cf. Kluiz ad Dev. ii. 2 p. 635 ; Kiihner on Xen. mem. 1,1,6 [also in his GrK. Gram. § 524, 2 vol. ii. 799 ; cf. Ellic. on Eph. v. 23 ; W. § 53, 5]). b. i. q. even [A. V. sometimes yea], (Lat. vel, adeo; Germ, sogar, selbst) : Mt. v. 46 sq. ; .\. 30; Mk. L27; Lk. X. 17; iCo. ii. 10; Gal. ii. 17; Eph. v. 12, etc. c. before a comparative it augments the gror dation, even, slill, (Germ, nock) : Mt. xi. 9 ; [Jn. xiv. 12]; lleb. viii. 6 [B. 363 (311) g. ; al. regard the και in this pass, as corresponsive {also) rather than ascensive, and connect it with 5σω]. d. with a ptcp. i. q. al- t/wurjh [cf. Kruger § 56, 13, 2]: Lk. xviii. 7 RG [see μακροθυμίω, 2]. 2. joined with pronouns and par- ticles, also ; a. with comparative adverbs : ώί και, Acts xi. 17; 1 Co. vii. 7 ; ix. 5, etc. ; καθώς και, Ro. xv. 7 ; 1 Co. xiii. 12; 2 Co. i. 14; Eph. iv. 17, 32; v. 2, etc.; οΖτω και, Ro. V. 15 [WH br. /cai], 18 sq. ; vi. 11 ; 1 Co. xi. 12, etc.; ομοίως και, Jn. vi. 11 ; ωσαύτως καί, Lk. .\.\ii. 20 [R G LTrmrg., TTrtxt. WH κ. ώσ. (but \VIi reject the pass.)] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; καβάη^ρ καί (see καθάπ(ρ). b. added to words designating the cause, it marks some- thing which follows of necessity from what has been previously said : 8to και, Lk. i. 35 ; Acts x. 29 ; Ro. i. 24 Rec. ; lleb. xiii. 12 ; [1 Pet. ii. 6 R] ; 8ιά τοϋτο καί, Lk. xi. 49 ; Jn. xii. 18 [here Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. καί]. c. after the interrog. τί, κα'ι (which belongs not to τι, but to the following word [to the whole sentence, rather; cf. Baumtein, Partikeln, p. 152]) points the significance of the question, and may be rendered besides, moreover, (Germ, noch) [cf. AV. § 53, 3 a. fin.; esp. Kriiger § 69, 32, 16]: τί και βατττΊζονται; [Α. Λ'^. why then etc.], 1 Co. XV. 29; τί κα\ (\πίζ€ΐ; (prop, why doth he also or ye! hope for, and not rest in the si'r/ht ?), Ro. viii. 24 [R G T] ; tva τί καί, Lk. .xiii. 7. d. άλλα καί, hitt also: Lk. xxiv. 22; Jn. v. 18 ; Ro. i. 32 ; v. 3, 11 ; viii. 23 ; ix. 10 ; 2 Co. vii. 7 ; viii. 10, 19, 21 ; ix. 12 ; 1 Jn. ii. 2, etc. ; i. ([. Lat. at et'iam (in an apodosis after fi) : Ro. vi. 5 [W. 442 (412)]. e. he καί, and 8e . . . καί, hut also, and also: Mt. iii. 10 [RG]; .xviii. 17; xxvii. 44; Mk. xiv. 31 [WH br. it"]; Lk. ii. 4; ix. 61 : xiv. 12. 26 [L txt.TrAVH ίτι T( καί, see €Ti, 2 fin.] ; xviii. 1 [R G], 9 [L br. καί] ; Jn. ii. 2; iii. 23; xviii. 2, 5 ; Acts v. 16; iCo. i. 16; iv. 7 ; xiv. 15 ; XV. 15 ; 2 Co. iv. 3, etc. καί . . . yap. iav καί. el καί, ή καί, Kaiyf, κα'ι , . . &e, see γάρ II. 10, (άν I. 3, fi HI. 6 sq., ή 4 c, ye 3 e., St 9. The examples of crasis with καί in the N. T., viz. κάγώ (χαμοί, κάμί), Kwtei, KaKfieev, κάκιΐνος, καν, are noticed each in its place ; for references see especially κάγώ, init. Καϊάφα; [λΥΉ Καϊάφας (cf. I, ι fin.) ; Lchm. in Lk. iii. 2 Καιφας], -a [B. 20 (18) ; W. § 8, 1], 6, (supposed by many to be the same as H2'2, a stone, a rock ; others more cor- rectly i. q. X0;3, depression, Targ. on Prov. xvi. 26 [ace. to DeUtzsch (Brief an d. Rom. ins Ilebr. etc. p. 28) ΝϊΙ•;[^]), Cuia/jhas • ace. to Joseph, (antt. 18, 2, 2) Ίώσηπος, ό και Καϊάφας {^ϊώσηττον, τον καΐ Καϊίίφαΐ' eπικa\^)ΰμevov, antt. 18, 4, 3), high-priest of the Jews. He was ap- pointed to that office by Valerius Gratus, governor of Judaea, after the removal of Simon, son of Caraith, a.d. 18 [cf. Sc/iurer, N. T. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.], and Avas re- moved A.d. 36 by A'itellius, governor of Syria, who ap- pointed Jonathan, son of the high-priest Ananus [i. e. Annas, father-in-law of Caiaphas, Jn. xviii. 13], his suc- cessor (Joseph, antt. 1 8, 4, 3) : Mt. x.xvi. 3,57; Lk. iii. 2 ; Jn. xi. 49 ; xviii. 1 3 sq. 24, 28 ; Acts iv. 6. Cf. Hausrath in Schenkel iii. 463 sq.* καίγΕ, sec ye, 3 e. Κάϊν [WH Καίν (cf.I, ι fin.)].-o,indecl., (in Joseph.with a Grk. ending, Kat't, -tos ; Hebr. Γρ i. e. a spear, although the author of Genesis, iv. 1, derives itfr. njp_ to produce, beget, acquire, so that it is i. q. rjp, Ps. civ. 24 [cf. B.D. Am.ed. s. v.]), Cain, the fratricide, the first-born son of Adam : Heb. xi. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 12 ; Jude 11.* Καΐνάν [so R G L both 1 and 2 ; Tr ΚαΧνάν in 1 and Tr txt. in 2, but Tr mrtr. Καινάμ in 2, WH Καινάμ 1 and 2; Τ Kaii/apboth 1 and 2], ό, (Hebr. M'p a lance-maker [al. ' possessor ' or 'possession']), Cainan ; 1. son of Enos (Gen. v. 9 sq.) : Lk. iii. 37. 2. son of Ar- phaxad, ace. to the Sept. of Gen. x. 24 ; xi. 12 ; [1 Chr. i. 18 Alex.], which Luke follows in iii. 36. [See B. D. s. v.] * καινό$, -η, -6v ; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down] ; Sept. for tyin ; neiD, i. 6. a. as respects form ; recently made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to παλαιοί old, antiquated) : as ασκός, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 [Tom. Tr WH br. the cl.] : Lk. v. 38 ; ίμάτιοκ, Lk. v. 3G ; πλήρωμα, Mk. ii. 21 ; μvημeΐov, Mt. .xxvii. 60 ; with ev ώ oi8eπω olSe'is (τίθη added, Jn. xi.x. 41 ; καινά κ- τταΧαιά, Mt. xiii. 52; new, which as recently made is superior to what it suc- ceeds : Βιαθήκη, ]Mt. xxvi. 28 (S" AVH om. καιν.) ; Mk. xiv. 24 R L ; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25 ; 2 Co. iii. 6 ; Heb. viii. 8, 13 ; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 31); καινοί ουρανοί, καινή yri, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1, (Is. Ixv. 17 ; l.xvi. 22) ; 'leρπvσάλήμ (see Ίίροσολυμα, fin.). Rev. iii. 12; xxi. 2; άνθρωπος (see the word, 1 f.), Eph. ii. 15 ; iv. 24, (καρΒία, ττν^μα. Ezck. xviii. 31 ; x.xxvi. 26) ; καινά ιτάντα ποιώ. I bring all things into a new and better condition. Rev. .x.xi. 5 ; γίννημα της άμπίΧου, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; ^Ik. xiv. 25. b. as respects substance ; o/ a new kind ; unprecedented, novel, uncommon, unheard of, {eTtpa καί καινά δαιμόνια, Xen. mem. 1,1,1): διδα;^^, Mk. i. 27; Acts xvii. 19 ; ΐντοΧή. given now for the first time, Jn. xiii. 34 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7sq.; 2 Jn. 5; όι/ομα, with the added explana- tion ο ouSf is otSf ν (("γνω Rec), Rev. ii. 1 7 (Is. Ixii. 2 ; Ixv. 15) ; ώδή. Rev. v. 9 ; xiv. 3, (Ps. cxliii. (c.xliv.) 9 : νμνος. καινοτηί 318 καψος Is. xlii. 10; άσμα, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 3; xxxix. (xl.) 4, etc.) ; Xf'yfii' Ti καΐ \_η L Τ 'JV WIIJ άκοίκιν καινότ(ρον, Acts xvii. 21 (newer so. than that which is already ; [cf. W. 244 (228 sq.)]); κτίσΐί, Gal. vi. 15; καινά τά ■πάντα, all things are new, previously non-existent, begin to be far dilTerent from what they were before, 2 Co. v. 17 [L Ϊ Tr ^VΊ1 cm. τά πύι^α] ; μηκίτι υνσης τηί ανυμίαί, καινών Bi γΐγονότων πάντων νπο κυρίου, ϋ'Λνη, ϋρ, 1ϋ, 7. γλώσσαι (see γλώσσα. 2) : -Mk. xvi. 17 [Tr txt. Wll txt. om. Tr mrg. br. καιν] ' (SvN. καινό s, v4os: v. denotes the new primarily in refer- ence to time, the young, recent; κ. denotes the new prima- rily in reference to quality, the fresh, unworn; 'vtos ad teiii/mx refertur, xaivos ad rem ; ' see Trench § Ix. ; Tittmaun i. p. 59sq. ; Green, 'Crit. Note' on Mt. ix. 17 (where the words occur together). The same distinction, in the main, holds in classic usage; cf. Schmidt ii. ch. 47.] καινότη5, -i?roi, 17, (καινός), neivncs^ : iv καινότητι TTVfv- ματοί, in the new state (of life) in which the Holy .Spirit places us, Ro. vii. 6 : iv καινότητι ζωηί in a new condition or state of (moral) Ufe, Ko. vi. 4 {ds καινάτητα aiSiov ζωής, so as to produce a new state which is eternal life, Ignat. ad Eph. 19 ; among prof. writ, it is used by Thuc. 3, 38 ; Isocr., Athen., al. ; often by Plut., [applied to the 'novelties' of fashion (French nouvcaute)^).* καίπερ [Treg. καί irep in Ileb. ; fr. Horn. Od. 7, 224 down], conjunc., [originally even very much, cf. Donald- son § G21 ; Hiiumlein p. 200 sq.; Krtiger § .56, 13, 2; B. § 1 14, 23 ; ^y. § 45, 2 tin.], alllioiir/h ; it is joined to a ptcp. (in Grk. writ, sometimes also to an adj., so that ων must be supplied) : Piiil. iii. 4 ; Heb. v. 8 ; vii. 5 ; xii. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 12; contrary to ordinary usage [yet so occasionally in Grk. writ.] with a finite verb, Kaiirep ΐστίν, Rev. xvii. 8 Rec. ; but since Grsij. κα'ι πάρισται [correctly τταρίσται (see in iTaptipi)'\ has been restored after the best codd.* καιρός, -oO, 0, (derived by some fr. κάρα or κάρη, τ6, the head, summit, [al. al. ; cf. Vanicek p. 118]); Sept. for I\y and ^>M■^; in Grk. writ. [fr. lies, down] 1. due measure ; nowhere so in the bibl. writ. 2. a measure of time ; a larger or smaller portion of time ; hence a. univ. a fixed and definite lime: Ro. xiii. 11 ; 2 Co. vi. 2; νστιροι καιροί, 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; άχ^ρι καιροΰ, up to a certain time, for a season, Lk. iv. 13 [but in ΰχρι, 1 b. referred apparently to b. below ; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 309 scp] ; Acts xiii. 11 ; n-por καιρόν, for a certain time only, for a season, Lk. viii. 13 ; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; π/)0Γ καιρόν ώρας, for the season of an hour, i. e. for a short season, 1 Th. ii. 17; κατά καιρόν, at certain seasons, (from time to time), Jn. v. 4 [K G L] ; at the (divinely) appointed time, Ro. v. 6 [al. bring this under b.J ; before the time ap]jointed, Mt. viii. 29 ; 1 Co. iv. 5 ; ίσται καιρός, ότ( etc. 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; ολίγον καιρόν ίχ(ΐ, Ά short time (in which to exercise his poiver) has been granted him. Rev. xii. 12; (v ϊκίίνω τω καιρώ, Mt. xi. 25; xii. 1; xiv. 1; Eph. ii. 12; κατ tKf'ivov τ. κ-. Acts .xii. 1 ; xix. 23 ; κατά τ. κ. τοϋτον, Ro. ix. 9 ; ev αΰτω τώ κ. Lk. xiii. 1 ; eV ω κ. Acts vii. 20 ; fv τώ viv κ., Ro. iii. 26 ; xi. 5; 2 Co. viii. 14 (13); cv παντΊ κ. always, at every season, [Aristot. top. 3, 2, 4 p. 1 1 7*, 35], Lk. x.xi. 36 ; Eph. vi. 18; its τίνα καιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 11. with the gen. of a thing, the time of etc. i. e. at which it will occur: τη! ('μής άναλϋσ€ω!, 2 Tim. iv. 6; τής (πισκοπης, 1 Pet. v. 6 Lchm. ; Lk. xix. 44 ; πιιμασμοΰ, Lk. viii. 13 ; τοϋ αρξασθαι το κρίμα, for judgment to begin, 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 ; καιροΊ των λόγων, of the time when they shall be proved by the event, Lk. i. 20 ; — - or when a thing usually comes to pass : toC θιρισμοϋ, Mt. xiii. 30 ; των καρπών, ivhen the fruits ripen, Mt. xxi. 34, 41 ; σύκων, Mk. xi. 13. with the gen. of a pers. : καιροΊ ϊθνών, the time granted to the Gentiles, until God .shall take vengeance on them, Lk. xxi. 24 ; ό iavToi (T Tr ^\'H αυτοϋ) κ. the time when antichrist shall show himself openly, 2 Th. ii. 6 ; ό καιρός μου, the time appointed for my death, Mt. xxvi. 18; των ν(κρών κριθηναι, the time appointed for the dead to be recalled to life and judged. Rev. xi. 18 [B. 260 (224)] ; ό ίμός, 6 ίμίτίρος, the time for appearing in public, a])p()inted ( by God) for me, for you, Jn. vii. 6, 8 ; καιρώ ΙΆίω. the time suited to the thing under consideration, at its |)roper time. Gal. vi. 9; plur., 1 Tim. ii. G; vi. 15; Tit. i. 3. 6 καιρός alone, the time when things are brour/ht to a crisis, the decisive epoch waited for : so of the time when the Messiah will visibly return from heaven, Mk. xiii. 33 ; ό καιρός ήγγικ(ν, Lk. xxi. 8 ; ΐγγύς ϊστιν. Rev. i. 3 ; xxii. 10. b. opportune or seasonable time : with verbs suggestive of the idea of advantage, καιρόν μ(ταλαμ• βάνιιν, Acts xxiv. 2.5 ; (χ€ΐν, (ial. vi. 10 (Plut. Luc. 16) ; (ξαγοράζ€σθαι, Ej>h. v. 16; Col. iv. 5, see εξαγοράζω, 2; foil, by an inf., opportunity to do something, Ileb. xi. 15 ; παρά καιρόν ηλικίας, past the opportunity of Ufe [A. V. pojit af/e], Heb. xi. 1 1 (simi)ly παρά καιρόν, Pind. 01. 8, 32 ; several times in Plato, cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 1 26). c. the right time : ev καιρώ (often in class. Grk.), in due sea- son, Mt. xxiv. 45; Lk. xii. 42; xx. 10 RG L [(ed. ster- eotyp. only)] ; 1 Pet. v. 6 ; also καιρώ, Lk. xx. 10 L Τ Tr WII ; τώ καιρώ, ^Ik. xii. 2. d. a (limited) jieriod of time : [1 Co. vii. 29] ; plur. the periods prescribed by God to the nations, and bounded by their rise and fall, Acts .xvii. 26 ; καιροί καρποφόροι, the seasons of the year in which the fruits grow and ripen. Acts xiv. 1 7 [cf. Gen. i. 14 Sept.]; καιρόν και καιρούς και ήμισυ καιροΰ, a year and two years and si.x months [A. V. a lime, and times, and half a time; cf. W. §27, 4], Rev. xii. 14 (cf. 6; fr. Dan. vii. 25 ; xii. 7) ; stated seasons of the year sol- emnly kept by the Jews, and comprising several days, as the passover, pentecost, feast of tabernaclef;, Gal. iv. 10 [2 Chr. viii. 13 ; cf. Bar. i. 14]. in the divine arrange- ment of time adjusted to the economy of salvation : ό καιρός (π(πλήρωται), the preappointed period which ace. to the purpose of God must elapse before the divine kingdom could be founded by Christ, Mk. i. 15; plur., the several parts of this period, Eph. i. 10; ύ καιρός ό (νιστώς, the present period, i. q. ό αΙών ούτος (see αιών, 3), Heb. i.\. 9, opp. to καιρός 8ιορθώσ(ως, the time when the whole order of things will be reformed (i. q. αιών μίλ- λων), ib. 10; ό καιρός ούτος, i. q. ό αίο^ν ούτος (see αιών, 3), Mk. χ. 30; Lk. xviii. 30; ό νϋν καιρ. Ro. viii. 18; ΐν καιρώ ΐσχάτω, the last period of the present age, the time just before the return of Christ from heaven (see ΐσχατος, Krricrao 319 κακ€ΐνη'1 ; 1. malir/nili/, malice, ill-will, ile- sire to injure : Ho. i. 29 ; Eph. iv. 31 ; Col. iii. 8 ; Tit. iii. 3; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet.ii. 1. 2. wickedness, depravily: 1 Co. V. 8 [cf. W. 120 (114)] ; xiv. 20; Acts viii. 22 (cf. 21); wickedness that is not a.sliamed to break the laws, iPet. ii. 16. 3. Ilellenistically, evil, trouble: Mt. vi. 34 (as Amos iii. 6 ; [IS. vi. 9] ; Eccl. vii. 15(14); .\ii. 1 ; Sir. xix. 6 ; I Mace. vii. 23, etc.).* [Syn. κακία, ΐΓονηρία: a.s.sociated Ro. i. 29 ; 1 Co. v. 8. Ace. to Treiicfi, Syn. § xi., endorsed by EUic. (on Eph. iv. 31 ) and Bp. Lghtft. (on Col. iii. 8), κακία denotes rather the vi- cious disposition, ττονηρία tlni ;ictive exercise of the same ; cf. Xen. mem. 1.2, 28 ei μίΐ'αΐ'τΐ)^ (i.e. ^ωκράτη$) ΐπο'ΐΐΐ τι φανΚον, fiKOTus hv fSOKft πονηρίιί flyai ' ft δ' auris ffdj^pofaif StfreAfi, irdj fef StKG'.ujs Tris οί/κ (Vovai}s αντω κακίας aWiav «χοί; But Fritzsche, Meyer (on Ro. 1. c. ; yet cf. Wei.^is in ed. 6), al. dis- sent, — seemin}.' nearly to rever.se tliis distinction: cf. Suidas s. v. κακία• ίσην τ) τον κακώσαι rhif nf\as σττουΒ-η, πάρα τψ αποστ&\ψ\ see •πονηρ6ί, 2 Ι).] κακοήθεια [-5ίσ WII ; see Ι, t], -πγ, η, (fr. κακοήθης, and this fr. κακής and ήθος), bad character, depravity of heart and life, Xen., Plat., Isocr., al. ; 4 Mace. i. 4, where cf. Grimm p. 21)0 : spec, used of malir/nanl sublleli/, malicious craftiness : Ro. i. 29 (3 Mace. iii. 22; Add. to Esth. viii. 1. 12; Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 3."), 5; Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 4; 16, 3, 1 ; [c. Ap. 1, 24, 4]; Polyb. 5, 50, 5, etc.). On the other hand, Aristot. rhet. 2, 13, [3 p. 81] defines it το tVl TO χ(7ι)ον ίπo\aμβά<'fιv πάντα, \jaking all things in the evil part, (ienevan N. T. Cf. Trench § xi.].* κακολογί'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. inf. κακοΚογησαι; {κακοΚό-γος); ΐ. q. κακώς λί'γω (which the old grammarians prefer, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 200) ; 1. to speak ill of, revile, abuse, one; to calumniate, traduce: τινά, Mk. i.\. 39; τί. Acts xix. 9 ; (2 Mace. iv. 1 ; Lys., Plut., al.). 2. Hellenistically, to imprecate evil on, curse : τινά, Mt. xv. 4; Mk. vii. 10, (so for SSp, Prov. .xx. 20; Ezek. .xxii. 7; E.\. .xxii. 28).• κακοττάθεια [-θία WH ; see 1, j], -at. ή, (κακοτταθής suffer- ing evil, afflicted), prop, the suffering of evil, i. e. Iniulile, distres.'s, affliction: Jas. v. 10 (Mai. i. 13; 2 Mace. ii. 2G sq.; [Antipho]; Thuc. 7, 77; Isocr., Polyb., Uiod., al.).* κακοπαθεια, -ώ ; 1 aor. impv. 2 sing, κακοπάθησον ; (κα- κοπαθής); to suffer {endure) evils (hardship, troubles); to be afflicted: 2 Tim. ii. 9; Jas. v. 13 [W. § 41 a. 3 fin. ; cf. § 60, 4 c.; B. § 139, 28], (Sept. Jon. iv. 10 ; Xen., Plut., al.) ; used freq. of the hardships of military service (Thuc. 4, 9; Polyb. 3, 72, 5; Joseph, antt. 10, 11. 1 ; b. j. 1, 7, 4); hence elegantly κακοπάιίι/σοι/ (I. TTrWII σνγ- [T WH σνν- (q. V. fin.)] κακοπάθησον) ojt καΧος στρατιώτης, 2 Tim. ii. 3 ; ib. iv. 5. [CoMP. : ανγ-κακοπαθίω.] ' κακο-ίΓΟκ'ω, -ω ; 1 aor. inf. κακοποιι;σαι; (κπκοτΓοιόί); 1. to ao harm : Mk. UL 4 ; Lk. vi. 9. 2. to do evil, do wrong: iPet. iii. 17; SJn. 11. ([Aeschyl., Arstph. I, Xen., Polyb., Ant(min., Plut. ; Sept.) * KaKoirouSs, -όν, (κακόν and ποκ'ω), doing evil; subst. an evil-iluer, malefactor : Jn. xviii. 30 [but L mrg. Τ Tr WH κακό» ποιώχ] ; 1 Pet. ii. 12, 14 ; iii. 16 [T Tr mrg. WII om. the cl.]; iv. 15. (Prov. xii. 4; Pind., Aristot., Polyb., Plut.) * κακό%,•ή,•όν, Sept. for ^n, [fr. Horn, down], bad, [A.V. (almost uniformly) evil] ; 1. univ. of a bad nature; not such as it ought to be. 2. [morally, i. e.] of a mode of thinking, feeling, acting ; base, wrong, wicked : of persons, Mt. xxi. 41 [cf. AV. 637 (592); also B. 143 (126)]; xxiv.48; Phil. iii. 2; Rev.ii. 2. διαλογισμοί', . Μ k. vii. 21 ; όμιλίαι, 1 Co. xv. 33 ; ΐπιθυμία. Col. iii. 5 ( Prov. .xii. 12) ; ίργα [better tpyoi/], Ro. xiii. 3. neut. κακόν, το κακόν, evil i. e. what is contrary to law, either divine or human, wrong, crime: [.Jn. .xviii. 23] ; Acts x.\iii. 9; Ro. vii. 21; xiv. 20; xvi. 19 ; 1 Co. xiii. 5 ; Heb. v. 14 ; 1 Pet. iii. lOsq. ; 3 Jn. 11 ; plur. [evil things^ : Ro. i. 30; 1 Co. X. 6 ; 1 Tim. vi. 10 [πάντα τα κακά all kinds of eviQ; Jas. i. 13 [W. § 30, 4 ; B. § 132, 24] ; κακόν nou'iv, to do, com- mit evil : Mt. xxvii. 23 ; Mk. xv. 14 ; Lk. xxdi. 22 ; 2 Ca xiii. 7 ; iPet. iii. 12; το κακό», Ro. xiii. 4 ; τά κακά, iii. 8; κακόι/, TO κακό» τΓρίίσσίίΐ/, Ro. vii. 19; ix. II. [Hec.]; .\iii. 4 ; [2 Co. V. 10 11 (; L Tr mrg.] ; το κακόν κατ(ι>γάζ(σθαι, Ro. ii. 9. spec, of wrongs inflicted: Ro. xii. 21 ; κακόν ϊργάζομαί Tiw [to work ill to one], Ro. xiii. 10; tvSfίκvvμί, 2 Tim. iv. 14; ποιώ. Acts ix. 13 ; αττοδίδω/α κακόν άντϊ κα• καν, Ro..xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9. 3. Iroublf some, injurious, pernicious, destructive, baneful : neut. κακόν, an evil, that which injures, .las. iii. 8 [W. § 59, 8 b. ; B. 79 (69)]; with the suggestion of ivildness and ferocity, θηρία. Tit. i. 1 2 ; substantially i. q. had, i. e. distressing, whether to mind or to body : ίΧκος κακόν κ. πονηρόν [A.V. α noisome and grievous sore'\. Rev. xvi. 2; κακόν πράσσα ϊμαυτω, l.at. vim mihi infero, to do harm to one's selj. Acts xvi. 28 ; κακόν τι πάσχω, to suffer some harm. Acts xxviii. 5 ; τα κακά, evil things, the discomforts which plague one, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to τα αγαθά, the good things, from which pleasure is derived). [Syn. cf. κακία-] * κακοΰρ-γος, -ov, (contr. from κακούργος, fr. κακόν and ΕΡΓΩ ; cf. πανούργος, and on the accent of both see Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 321 ; [Chandler § 44.5]), as subst. a malifaclor: 2 Tim. ii. 9; of a robber, Lk. xxiii. 32s(i. [cf. W.530(493); B. § 150, 3], 39. (Prov. xxi. 15; in Grk. Λvrit. fr. [Soph, and] Ildt. down.) * κακουχε'ω, -ώ : (fr. obsol. κακονχος, fr. κακόν and f\<•^) ; to treat ill, oppress, plague : τινά : pres. pass. ptcp. κακου- ;(ούμίΐ'οι, maltreated, tormented, Heb. xi. 37; xiii. 3. (1 K. ii. 26; xi. 39 Alex.; Diod. 3, 23 ; 19, 11 ; Dio C. 35 (36), 9 (11) ; Plut. mor. p. 114 e.) [Comp. : (τυγ-κακου- χί'ω.]• κακόω, -ώ : f ut. κακώσω ; 1 aor. ίκάκωσα \ (κακός) ; 1. to oppress, afflict, liarm. maltreat : τινά. Acts vii. 6, 1 9 ; xii. 1 ; .xviii. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 13, (Ex. v. 22; xxiii. 9 Alex. ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down). 2. by a usage foreign to the classics, to embitter (Vulg. ad iracundiam concίιo^ ; render evil affected, (Ps. cv. (cvi.) 32 ; Joseph, antt. 16, Λακως 321 <αΛ6(• 1, ? ; 7, 3 ; 8, 6) : την >|α;χίΐ'τ•ι«Γ κατά nirot, against one, Acts xiv. 2.• κακώς, (kcucos), adv., [fr. Horn, down], badly, ill, i. e. a. [in a physical sense] miserably : ίχαν, to be ill, sick [see ίχω, II. a.], Mt. iv. 24 ; viii. 1 (i ; ix. 1 2 ; xiv. 35 ; [xvii. 15 LTrtxt.WHtxt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 1 7 ; [vi. 55]; Lk. V. 31 ; vii. 2, etc. ; πάσχαν, Mt. xvii. 15 [R GT Tr mr!;. \VH mrg.] ; δαιμονίζισθαι, Mt. -xv. 22 ; κακοϋς κακώς άπολίσ(ΐ, Mt. xxi. 41, υπ tliis combination of words with verbs of destroying, perishing, etc., which is freip in Grk. writ, also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc; W. §68, 1. b. [mor- ally] improperly, wrongly : Jn. xviii. 23 ; kokqis iiVfii* τίνα, to speak ill of, revile, one. Acts xxiii. 5 ; with bad in- tent, αϊτίίσθαι. .las. iv. 3.* κόκωσ -is, -ewf, ψ (κακόω), ill-lrealment, ill-usage, (Vulg. αβίι'ύο) : Acts vii. 34. (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 19 ; Ex. iii. 7, 17 ; Job xxxi. 29 [Symm.]; Thuc, Xen., Plut., al.)• καλάμη, -η!, ή, a slalL' of grain or of a reed, the stalk (left after the ears are cut off), stubble: 1 Co. iii. 12. (Ex. v. 12 ; XV. 7 ; Is. xvii. 6 ; Horn, et sqq.) * κάλαμο;, -ου, ό, fr. Find, down, Lat. calamux i. e. a. α reed : Mt. xi. 7 ; xu. 20 (fr. Is. xlii. 3) ; Lk. vii. 24. b. a staff made of a reed, a reed-staff, (as in 2 K. xviii. 21) : Mt. xxvii. 29 sq. 48 ; Mk. xv. 19, 36. o. α measuring reed or rod: Rev. xi. 1 ; xxi. 15 sq., (Ezek. xl. 3-6; xlii. 16-19). d. a tcriter's reed, a pen: 3 Jn. 13; [see Gardtkausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 71 sq.].* καλ^'ω, -ώ; inipf. ίκαΚουν: fut. καλέσω ( W. § 13, 3 c.) ; 1 aor. f κάλεσα; pt• κίκίηκα; Pass., pres. καλοΟμαι ; pf. 3 pers. sing, κίκληται (1 Co. vii. 18 LTTrWH; [Rev. xix. 13 LTTrWH]), ptcp. κ(κ\ημίνο!; 1 aor. (κ\ήθην; 1 fut. κΧηθησομαί ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Ilebr. Xip ; Lat. roco; i. e. 1. to call (Germ, rtifen [cf. βοάω, fin.]) ; a. to call aloud, utter in a loud voice : άχριι ου το σημίρον καΚ(Ίται, as long as the word ' to-day ' is called out or proclaimed, Ileb. iii. 13; τινά. to call one to ap- proach or stand before one, Mt. xx. 8; xxii. 3 (where it's Toiis γάμους seems to belong to tovs κfκ^ημfvovi) : ^It. XXV. 14 ; [Mk. iii. 31 L Τ Tr\VH] ; Lk. xix. 13 ; τά TSta πρόβατα κατ όνομα, his own sheep each by its name, .In. X. 3 (where LTTrWH φωι/ίί); used of Christ, calling certain persons to be his disciples and constant compan- ions, Mt. iv. 21 (note what precedes in 19 : Stirf όπΙσω μου) ; Mk. i. 20 ; to order one to be summoned, Mt. ii. 1 5 [see just below]; before the judges. Acts iv. 18; xxiv. 2 ; foil, by ck with gen. of place, i. q. to call out, call forth from : Mt. ii. 15, cf. Heb. xi. 8. metaph. to cattse to pass from one state into another : τίνα €κ σκότουρ fit το φως, 1 Pet. ii. 9. b. like the Lat. voco i. q. to invite ; a. prop. : iis τους γάμους. Mt. xxii. 3, 9 ; Lk. xiv. 8 sq. ; Jn. ii. 2; to a feast, Lk. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 27 [cf. W. 593 (552)]; Rev. xix. 9; ό κα\4σας. Lk. vii. 39; xiv. 9; ό κίκληκώς Tiva.ih']'] 10,12; οί «κλι/μ/ι/οι, Mt. xxii. 8: Lk. xiv. 7, 1 7, 24 : (2 Sam. xiii. 23 : Esth. v. 12 ; and often soinGrk.writ.fr. Horn. Od. 4, 5:!2; 11, 187 down"). β. metaph. : to invite one, «f τ», to something i. e. to par- ticipate in it, enjoy it; used thus in the Epp. of Paul and Peter of God as inviting men by the preaching of the gospel (8ta toG (Ιαγγ(\Ίου. 2 Th. ii. 14) to tfie tiless- in^s of the heavenly kingdom : els την i::aat\fiav τοϋ 6fov, 1 Th. ii. 12; ιΐς ζωήν αιώνων, 1 Tim. vi. 12; (is 8ύξαν οίώνιον,' ι Pet. v. 10 ; (ίς τί)ν κοινωνίαν του υίον αντον, 1 Co. i. 9 ; so Kohf'iv τίνα used alone : Ro. viii. 30 ; ix. 24 sq. ; 1 Co. vii. 17'sq. 20-22, 24; rti/a καλίίν κλησίΐ, 2 Tim. i. 9; eV ω (κλήθημιν, in whom lies the reason why we were called, who is the ground of our having been invited, Eph. i. 1 1 Lchm. ; άξιος τής κλήσεως, ης (by attraction for rj [or perh. i^v: cf. W. § 24, 1 ; B. 287 (24V) ; EUi- cott in loc.]) (κλίιθητ(, Eph. iv. 1 ; God is styled ό καλώ» τίνα (he that calleth one, the caller, cf. W. § 46, 7), Gal. v. 8 ; 1 Th. V. 24 ; and ό καλίπας τινά. Gal. i. 6-, Col. i. 12 Lchm. ; 1 Pet. i. 15 ; 2 Pet. i. 3. ol κ(κ\ημ<νοι, Ueb. ix. 15 ; KoKfiv and κοϊΚύσβαι are used with a specification of the mediate end (for the highest or final end of the call- inc is eternal salvation): eV ίΚ^υβιρΙα. Gal. v. 13; οίκ ΐπ ακαθαρσία αλλ' eV άγιασμω, 1 Th. iv. 7 ; cv (ΐρηντ), 1 Co. vii. 15 ; 4v ίνϊ ί\πί&ι. that ye might come into one hope, Eph. iv. 4 (see iv, I. 7 [yet cf. W. 417 (389) ; B. 3i9 (283); esp. ElUcott in loc], and fVi, B. 2 a. ζ.); (Ις dpif νην τοϋ Χρίστου iv ivi σώματι, that ye may be in one body i. e. be members of one and the same body, Col. iii. 15; eis toCto (which refers to what precedes) foil, by Ίνα, 1 Pet. ii. 21 ; iii. 9; (but everywhere in the N. T. Epp. only those are spoken of as called by God who have listened to his voice addressed to them in the gosjiel, hence those who have enlisted in the service of Christ — see Ro. viii. 30 and Riickert's Com. in loc. p. 464. cf. 1 Co. i. 24 ; those who have slighted the invitation are nut reckoned among the called); Christ also is said KoKeiv Tiva, sc. to embrace the offer of salvation by the Messiah, in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17 (in both which pass. Rec. adds etr μ(τάνυιαν). God is said to call those who are not yet born, viz. by promises of salvation which have respect to them, so that KoKtiv is for substance equiv. to to appoint one to salvation, Ro. ix. 12 (11) ; καΚοίντος τα μη όντα ως όντα. Ro. iv. 1 7, where cf. Fritzsche, [al. al., cf. 'Sleyer (esp. ed. Weiss) ad loc.]. to call (i. ip to select) to assume some offce, τινά. of God appointing or commit- ting an office to one, (Germ, berufen) : Gal. i. 15; Heb. V. 4, (Is. xlii. 6 ; xlix. 1 : Ii. 2). to invite i. q. to rouse, summon : to do something, ίϊί μίτάνοιαν, Lk. v. 32, added in Rec. also in Mt. ix. 13 and Mk. ii. 17. 2. to call i. e. to name, call by name; a. to give a name to; with two ace, one of the object the other of the name as a predicate [to call one (by) a name : Mt. x. 25 Rec. ; cf. W. § 32, 4 b.; B. 151 (132) note] ; pass. w. the nom. of the name, to receive the name of receive as a name : Mt ii. 23 ; xxvii. 8 ; Lk. i. 32, 60, 62 ; ii. 4, etc. ; καλούμ(νος. called, whose name or .surname is, Lk. vii. 11 ; Lx. 10; -χ. 39 ; Acts vii. 58 ; xxvii. 8, 16 ; ό καΧοϋμιΐ'ος [on its posi- tion cf. B. § 144, 19] : Lk. vi. 15 ; viii. 2 ; [.vxii. 3 Τ Tr Will: xxiii. ••!3; Acts i. 23 ; x. 1 ; xiii. 1 ; [xv. 22 L Τ Tr WIT] : xxvii. 14 ; Rev. xii. H : xvi. 16 ; with ονόματι added, Lk. xix. 2 : κα\ί~ισθαι ονόματι τινι. to be called bv a name, Lk. i. 61 : κα\(Ίν τίνα ϊπ\ τω ονόματι τ^^of, ' Lk. i. 59 (see tVi, Β. 2 a. η. p. 233") ; aiter the Hebr. K-;p, χαλλίέΧαιοί 822 κάλυμμα 102?-ΠΚ, καλίίι» τΑ ίνομά τινοί, with the name in the ace, ίο give some name to one, call hia name : ^It. i. 21, 23, 25 ; Lk. i. 13, 31 ; pass., Lk. ii. 21 ; Rev. .xL\. 13 ; Gen. xvii. 19 ; 1 S. i. 20, etc. (simihirlv sometimes in Grli. writ., cf. Fritzsche on ISIt. p. 45 [B. 151 (132)]). b. Pass. καλούμαι with |)rcclicale nom. to he called i. e. to bear a name or lille (among men) [cf. W. § 65, 8] : Lli. i. 35 ; xxii. 25 ; Acts viii. 10 [llec. om. καλ.] ; 1 Co. xv. 9 ; to be said to be (i. q. to be acknowledged, pass as, the nomina- tive expressing the judgment passed on one) : Mt. v. 9, 19; Lk. i. 32, 35, 76 ; ii. 23 ; xv. 19; Ro. ix. 26 ; Jas. ii. 23 ; opp. to dvai, 1 Jn. iii. 1 L Τ Tr WH ; Ilebraistioally (Gen. xxi. 12) , 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7 ; ομολογία, 1 Tim. vi. 12 sq. ; tpyov, Mt. x.xvi. 10 ; Mk. xiv. G ; Jn. x. 33 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; plur. Jn. X. 32. καλόν ίστιν, it is expedient, proftable, wholesome : foil, by an inf. as subject, 1 Co. vii. 1 ; w. Ttxi added [so in 1 Co. 1. c. also], Mt. xviii. 8 sq. [cf. W. 241 (226) ; B. § 149, 7] ; Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, R (ί [also L Tr mrg. in 47] ; 1 Co. vii. 26 ; ix. 15 ; κ. icrriv foil, by the ace. and inf., Mk. ix. 43, 45, 47, L (but see above) Τ Tr (but not mrg., see above) WH ; Heb. xiii. 9 ; foil, by d [cf. B. 217 (187sq.); W. 282 (265)], Mt. xxvi. 24 ; Mk. ix. 42 ; xiv. 21 ; foil• by iav [B. and W. u. s.], 1 Co. vii. 8 ; it is pleasant, delightful, foil, by ace. witli inf. : Mt. xvii. 4 ; Mk. ix. 5 ; Lk. ix. 33. c. beautiful by rea- son of purity of heart and life, and hence praiseworthy ; morally good, noble, (Lat. honrslus; [cf. Aristot. το καθ' αντί) καλοΊ»]): διάκρισις καλοϋ τί και κακοΟ, Ileb. ν. 14; tpya, Mt.v. 16; 1 Tim. v. 10, 25 ; vi. IS ; Tit. ii. 7, 14 ; iii. 8, 1 4 ; Ileb. x. 24 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2, and Lchm. in 2 Pet. i. 1 ; ανάστροφη, Jas. iii. 13 ; 1 Pet. ii. 12; καλή σννίίδησις, con- sciousness of good deeds, [A.V. a gooii conscience'], Heb. xiii. 18; καλά, καλόκ ίνώπιόν τίνος, in one's judgment, Ro. xii. 17 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 ; 1 'Jim. ii. 3 and Kec. in v. 4 ; ζηλοϋ- σθαι iv κιϊλω, Gal. iv. 18 ; το καλοί/ κατ(ρ-/άζ(σθαι, Ro. vii. 1 S ; noiiiv, ib. 21 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Jas. iv. I 7 ; καλόν ίστιν, it is right, proper, becoming, foil, by an inf. : Mt. xv. 26 (L Τ ^(στιν) ; [Mk. vii. 27] ; Gal. iv. 1 8 [here Tr mrg. impv.] ; Ro. xiv. 21. d. honorable, conferring honor: μαρτυρία, 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; όνομα, Jas. ii. 7 ; οΰ kclKov to καύ- χημα ίμων, 1 Co. V. 6. e. affecting the mind agreeably, comforting and confirming : θ(οϋ ρήμα (Sept. for 2)0 "^y^, which is spoken of the divine promises. Josh. xxi. 45 ; Zech. i. 13), the gospel and its j)romises full of consola- tion, Heb. vi. 5. Compar. καλλίωι^, -ov, better: neut. adverbially, σϋ καλλιον ίπιγινώσκ(ΐς, i. e. better than by thy question thou seemest to know, Acts xxv. 10 [W. 242 (227)]. The word is not found in the Apocalypse. [Cf. Trench § cvi. fin.; Zezschwitz, Profangracitat u. s. w. p. 60 sq. (cf. ά•)ΐαθός, fin.) ; Westcott on Jn. x. 11.] * κάλνμμα, -ros, το, (καλϋητω), a veil, a covering : 2 Co. iii. 13 (Ex. xxxiv. 33) ; [καΚνμμα, or its equiv., is suggested ΐίίΧυ-Ί 323 καν to the reader by tlie context in 1 Co. xi. 4 κατά Κ€φαλή! ϊχων; see ίχω, I. 1 b.] ; metapb., 2 Co. iii. 14-16, of that which prevents a thing from being understood. (Ilom., Tragg., Arstph., al. ; Sept.)* καλνίΓτω ; fut. καλύψω; 1 aor. (κά\υψα\ Pass., pres. inf. καλντττςσθαί ; pf. ptcp. κΐκάλυμμ^νυς ; [allied with κρύπτω ; Vanicek p. 1091 ; Curliu:<, Das Verbum, i. 242;] Sept. for nD3 ; often in Horn., Tragg. and otlaer poets, more rarely in prose ; to cover, cover up ; prop. : τινά, Lk. xxiii. 30 ; Ti Tivi, a thing with anything, Lk. viii. Hi ; pass. Mt. viii. 24 ; trop. to hide, veil, i. e. to hinder the knoidedge of a thing : pf. pass., ^It. x. 2ti ; 2 Co. iv. 3 ; πλήθος αμαρ- τιών, not to regard or impute them, i. e. to pardon them, 1 Pet. iv. 8 ; to procure pardon of them from God, Jas. V. 20; cf. Ps. Ixxxiv. (Ixxxv.) 3 (2) ; xxxi. (xxxii.) 1 sq. [CoMP. : ava-, ano-, iiri-, κατά-, πάρα-, π(ρι-, συγ-καΧΰπτω.^ ' καλώϊ, (καλός), adv., [fr. Hom. down], beaitlifuUij, fine- ly, excellenlhj, well: [univ. δια το καλώς οίκο8ομήσθαι (Tr -μά,σθαι, q. v.), Lk. vi. 48 Τ Tr WII] ; spec. a. righthj, xo that there shall he no room for blame: joined to verbs of speaking {άποκρίν^σθαι, λαΧξΙν, Xi'yfii/, προφη- Tfidv, etc.), well, truly, ΛΙΐ. xv. 7 ; Mk. vii. 6 ; Lk. xx. 3'j ; Jn. iv. 1 7 ; viii. 48 ; xiii. 13 ; [xviii. 23] ; Acts xxviii. 25 ; fitlg, i. e. agreeably to the facts and words of the case, Mk. xii. 28 ; καλώς right .' well ! an expression of approv- al: Mk. xii. 32; Ro. xi. 20; of deeds: κ- ποκΊν, to do well, act uprightly, Jas. ii. 19 ; 1 Co. vii. 37 sq. (where the teaching is, that one can do καλώ?, but another κρύσσον) ; καλώς ποκίν with ptcp. to do well that, etc. [B. § 144, 1.5 a. ; W. 345 (323)], Acts x. 33 ; Phil. iv. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 19 ; 3 Jn. 6. (1 Mace. xii. 18, 22; 2 JNIacc. ii. 16, etc.); with verbs denoting a duty or office which one fulfils wtU : 1 Tim. iii. 4,12 sq. ; v. 17; spec, honestly, uprightly : Gal. iv. 17 ; άναστρ(φ(σβαι, Heb. xiii. 18 ; jroieiv, Jas. ii. 8. b. excellently, nobly, commendably : 1 Co. xiv. 1 7 ; Gal. V. 7; καλώς πάντα π(ποίηκ(, Mk. vii. 37; with bitter irony, Mk. vii. 9 (where cf. Fritzsche p. 271 sq.) ; 2 Co. xi. 4. c. honorably, in honor : Jas. ii. 3 [al. give it here an outward reference, i. q. in a good place, comfori- ably']. d. καλώς eme'iv τίνα, to speak well of one, Lk. vi. 26 ; K. πο^'ϊν τίνα, to do good to, benefit one, Mt. v. 44 Rec. ; Tivi [\V. § 32, 1 0. ; B. 146 (128)], Lk. vi. 27 ; καλώς TTOieiv, simply, to do good : Mt. xii. 1 2. e. καλώς ΐχιιν, to be well (of those recovering health) : Mk. xvi. 18.* [κάμΐ€, see κάγώ.] κάμηλο?, -ου, ό, ή, Hebr. 70J, [fr. Hdt. down], a camel [BB.DD. s. V. ; Tristram, Nat. Ilist. etc. p. 58 sqq.] : Mt. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6 ; in proverbs, Mt. xix. 24 ; Mk. x. 25 ; Lk. xviii. 25, (meaning, ' something almost or altogether impossible' [cf. Farrar in The Expositor for 1876 i. p. 369 sqci- ; esp. Wetzstein in the Sitzungsberichte d. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu MUnchen, 1873, pp. 581-596]) ; Mt. xxiii. 24 (of one who is careful not to sin in trivial mat- ters, but pays no heed to the more important matters).* κάμιλοΐ, -ου, ό, a cable ; the reading of certain Jlss. in Mt. xix. 24 and Lk. xviii. 25, [see Tdf.'s notes]. The word is found only in Suidas [1967 c] and the .Schol. on Arstph. vesp. [1030] : " κάμιλος τό παχύ σχοινίον Sia τοϋ t." Cf. Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.; [WH. App. p. 151"].* κάμινοϊ, -ou, ή, ή. [Hom. ep. 14, 2 etc., Hdt. on], a furnace (either for smeUing, Xen. vectig. 4, 49, or for burning earthen ware, or baking bread, Gen. xix. 28 ; Ex. xix. 18 ; Jer. xi. 4 ; Dan. iii. 6) : Mt. xiii. 42, 50 ; Rev. i. 15 : i.x. 2.* καμμΰω, a form which passed over from the Epic (cf. Hom. batrach. 191) and com. language [ApoU. Dysc. synt. 323, 22 ; 326, 9] into the Alexandrian and decaying Greek ; condemned by Phryn. [as below] ; derived by syncope and assimilation from καταμνω (which the earlier and more elegant Greeks use), (cf. καμμίν, καμμονή, κάμ- μορος, fr. κατά μίν, καταμονη, κατάμορος, cf. Bttm. Gram. § 117, 2 Anm. 2; Ausf. Gram. ii. p. 373; Fischer, De Vitus lexx. N. T. p. 678 sq.; Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 173 sq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 339 sq.; Schafer ad Lamb. Bos p. 368 ; [cf. B. 62 (55) ; W. 24, 46]) ': 1 aor. eVd^- μυσα; to shut the eyes, close the eyes : often w. τους οφθαλ- μούς added ; so Mt. xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Sept. Is. vi. 10, for i^pri, i. e. to besmear), in both which pass, the phrase designates the inflexible pertinacity and ob- stinacy of the Jews in their opposition to the gospel. (Is. .xxix. 10; Lam. iii. 43; καμμύ^ιν το της ψνχής όμμα, Philo de somn. i. § 26.) * κάμνω ; 2 aor. ϊκαμον ; pf. κίκμηκα ; 1. to grow iceary, be weary, (so fr. Hom. down) : Rev. ii. 3 Rec. ; Heb.xii. 3. 2. ίο ie s/ct: Jas. v. 15 (Soph., [Hdt.], Arstph., Eur., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Lcian. al.).* [κάμοί, see κάγώ.] κάμίΓτω; fut. κάμψω; 1 aor. ίκαμψα; a. to bend, bow : TO yo'n; (and τα γούνατα), the knee (the knees), used by Hom. of those taking a seat or sitting down to rest (Π. 7, 118; 19, 72); in bibb Grk. with dat. of pers. to one i. e. in honor of one, in religious veneration ; used of worsliippers : Ro. xi. 4 and 1 K. xix. 1 8 (where for >'Ί3 foil, by S) ; προς τίνα, towards (unto) one, Eph. iii. 14. b. reflexivelj', to bow otie's self: κάμψει πάν γόνν ΐμοί, shall bow to me (in honor), i. e. every one shall worship me, Ro. xiv. 11 (fr Is. xlv. 23) ; iv τω ονόματι Ίι/σοϋ, in devout recognition of the name (of κύριος) which Jesus received from God, Phil. ii. 10 [cf. W. 390 (365) ; Bp. Lghtft., Meyer, in loi,.; also όνομα, esp. sub fin. CoMP. ; ava-, σνγ-κάμπτω~]* Kciv [Grsb. καν; see κά•/ώ, init.], by crasis for καΐ (άν [cf. W. § 5, 3 ; B. p. 10 ; Tdf Proleg. p. 97 ; T17/. Α]ψ. p. 145'] ; hence joined with tlie subjunctive ; 1. and if: Mt. x. 23 G L; Mk. xvi. 18 ; [Lk. xii. 38 (bis) Τ Tr txt. WH ; Jn. viii. 55 L Τ Tr WH; 1 Co. .xiii. 2' L WH, 2' Tr txt. WH, 3» L Tr WH, 3' L AVH]; Jas. V. 15 ; by aposiopesis Avitli the suppression of the apodo- sis, K&v μ£ν ποιήα-τ) καρπόν, sc. (S ίχ€ΐ it is well (or some such phrase), Lk. xiii. 9 ; cf. W. 600 (558) ; [B. § 151, 26]. 2. also or even if; a. if only, at least, in abridged discourse : κ&ν τών Ιματίων αυτού, sc. αψωμηι, Mk. V. 28 ; also ίνα (sc. αψωνται avTov) καν τον κρασπίδου . . . άψωνται, Mk. vi. 56 ; ινα ΐρχομίνον Τΐίτρον (sc. τι αύτοϋ ϊπισκιάση αντών) κ&ν η σκιά etc. Acts ν, 15 ; κ&ν ώς Κα 324 «αττηλευω δφρονα SC. ϋξησθί μ(, 2 Co. xi. IG : (Sap. xiv. 4 ; χ v. 2). Cf. B. §149, G; [W. 584 (543): Green, Gram, of the N. T. p. 230 ; Klol: ad Devar. ii. 1 p. 189 sq. ; L. and S. s. V. ; Soph. Lex. s. v.]. b. even if: Mt. xxi. 21 ; xxvi. 35; Jn. viii. 14; x. 38; [.\i. 2.^>] ; Ileb. xii. 20.• Κανά Ι-νά AVII; cf. T,lf. ProU•-. p. 103; W. § G, 1 m.], ή [Β. 21 (19)], Caim, indecl. [W. Gl (GO); but dat. -ι/ά Kec." in .In. ii. 1, 11], prop, name of a village of (ialilee about three hours distant from Nazareth towards tlie northwest, surviving at jiresent in a place (partly unin- habited and partly ruinous) called Kana el-.Iei'il\ cf. Robinson, Bibl. Researches, ii. 346 sq. ; also his Later Bibl. Researches, p. 108; cf. Ewald, Gesch. Christus u. s. w. p. 147 (ed. 1) ; ΛϋείΛ'Λί in Herzog vii. 234; [Por- ter in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Several recent writers are in- clined to reopen the question of the identification of Cana ; see e. g. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. ; Zeller, in Quart. Statem. of Palest. Expl. Fund, Xo. iii. p. 71 sq.; Arnawl, Palestine p. 41 2 sq. ; Conder, Tent Work etc. i. 150 sq.] : Jn. ii. 1, 11 ; iv. 4G ; xxi. 2.• Kavovaios I.. Ϊ Tr WII in Mt. x. 4 and :\Ik. iii. 18 (for RG \ίανανίτψ, q. v.) ; ace. to the interp. of Bleek (Erkliir. d. drci ersten Ενν. i. p. 41 7) et al. α native of Cana (see Καΐ'ά) ; but then it ought to be ivritten Kavaios. The reading Kuvavaios seems to be a clerical error occasioned by the preceding θαδδαίοΓ [or Af/3,3aios] ; ef. Fritz.sche on Mt. X. 4. [But -aios is a common ending of the Gre- cized form of names of sects (cf. Άσσιδαϊοί, ΦαρισαΊηί, 2αδδουκηΐ()5, Έσσαίοί). Hence the word is prob. derived fr. the Aramaic [KJ") (see next word) and corresponds to ^Γ;λωτ7)Γ, q. V. (cf. Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13). See Bp. Lijlilfl. Fresh Revision etc. p. 138 sq.] * Κοναν(τη5, -ου, ό, (fr. Chald. JSjp, Ilebr. Κρ,), i. q- 6 ζηλί^της (acc. to the interpr. of Luke in vi. 15; Acts i. 13), q. v., the Zealot, a surname of the apostle Simon : RG (the latter with small κ) in Mt. x. 4 and Mk. iii. 18.* Κανδάκη, -η!. ή.ΟαηιΙαπ', a name common to the queens of a region of Ethiopia whose capital Avas Napata; just as the proper name Ptolemi/ was common to the Egyp- tian kings, and Ilcnnj to the Reuss princes (Strabo 1 7, 1, 54 p. 820 ; Plin. h. n. G, 35 ; Dio Cass. .54, 5) : Acts viii. 27; cf. Laurent, Die Konigin Kandake, in the Zcitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 18(;2, p. i;32 scjq. [reprinted in his N. T. Studien p. 140 sq. ; cf. esp. B. I). Am. ed. s. v.].• κανών, -ovos, 6, (κάννα. Ilebr. r\^n^ a cane, reed; Arab. <5 isLo a reed, and a spear, and a straight stick or staff [ef. Vaiucek; Fremdworter etc. p. 21]), prop, a rod or straight piece of rounded wood to which any thing is fastened to keep it straight ; used for various purposes (see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.) ; a measurinc; rod, rule; a carpenter's line or measuring tape, Scliol. on Eur. Ilippol. 468 : hence i. (j. to μίτρον τοί -πήγματος (Pol- lux, Onom. 3, 30, 151), the measure of a leap, as in the Olympic games ; accordingly in the N. T. 1. a definitely bounded or fixed space within the limits of which one's power or influence is confined ; the province assigned one; one's sphere «f activity: 2 Co. x. 13, 15 sq. 2. Metaph. any rule or stayidard, a principle or law of in- vestigating, judging, living, acting, (often so in class. Grk., as τον καΚον, Eur. llec. G02; opoi των αγαθών κ. κανόνα, Dera. pro cor. p. 324, 27) : Gal. vi. 16; Phil. iii. 16 Rec. Cf. Credner, Zur Geseli. des Kanons (Hal. 1847), p. G sq((.; [esp. Westcott, The Canon of the N. T., App. A; briefly in 15. D. s. v. Canon of Scripture; for exx of later usage see Soph. Lex. s. v.].' ΚαΐΓίρναούμ or more correctly (with LTTr AVIl [cf. WII. App. p. USO; Scrivener, Introd. p. 5GI]) Καφαρ- ναονμ, (133 a village, and Dinj consolation; hence 'the village of consolation,' [aL 'village of Nachum' (a prop, name)]; Καπαρναοίμ,νίοΙ. 5,16,4), ή,Capernnum or Caphamaum, a flouri.shing city of (ialilee (Mt. xi. 23 ; Lk. X. 15), situated on the western shore of the Sea of Galilee or Lake of Gennesaret (Jn. vi. 17, 24 ; hence ή παραθαλάσσια, Mt. iv. lo), near the j)lace where the Jor- dan ilons into the lake. Being nowhere mentioned in the (). T. it seems to have been built after the exile [cf. also B. D. s. V. Caphar]. Josephus mentions (b. j. 3, 10, 8) a fountain in Galilee called by the neighboring residents Καφαρνηυύμ, and (vita 72) ' κώμηυ Κιφαρνώμην', and it is (piil(i jirobable that he meant the town we are speaking of. It is mentioned in the N. T. (besides the pass, already cited) in Mt. viii. 5 ; xvii. 24 ; Mk. i. 21 ; ii. 1 ; ix. 33; Lk. iv. 23, 31 ; vii. 1 ; Jn. ii. 12; iv. 46; vi. 59. Cf. n'i'n. RWB. s. v. ; Vaihint/er in Ilerzog vii. 3(19; Fiirrer in Schenkel iii. 493 S([. ; [the last nanii'd writ. gives at length (see also Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Palaest.- Vereins for 1879, p. 63 sqq.) his reasons for preferring (contra Robinson, Scpp, etc.) to identify C. with Tell Hum ; so (after earlier writ. ; cf. Arnaud p. 414),AViner u. s.. Dr. AA'ilson, Lynch, Ritter, Delitzsch, Tristram (Land of Israel, ed. 3, p. 428 sqq.) and more recently Capt. AVilson (-Our Work in Palestine' p. 186 sq. and ' Recovery of .Jerusalem ' p. 2(ji; sq. (292 sq(j.)). But Con- der (Tent Work in Palestine ii. 182 sqcj.) argues fr. Jewish author, in favor of Khan ^finyeh ; see B. D. Am. ed. s. V.].• κα•ΐΓηλ€ύω ; (κάηηΚος, i. e. a. an inn-keeper, esp. a vint- ner; b. a petty retailer, a huckster, pedler; cf. Sir. xxvi. 20 οϋ ^ικαΐίύθησίται. κάπηΚοί άττο αμαρτίας) ; a. to be a retailer, to peddle ; b. with ace. of the thing, to make money by sellinr/ anything; to get sordid gain by dealing in anything, to do a thing for base gain (oi τα μα- θήματα nfpu'tyovTfs κατά ηολίΐς κα\ ττωλονντίς κ. καπηΧ^ν- ovTtt, Plat. Prot. p. 313 d.; μάχην, Aeschyl. Sept. 551 (545) ; Lat. cauponari bellum, i. e. to fight for gain, trade in war, Enn. ap. Cic. offic. 1, 12, 38; έταίραν το τηί upas άνθο! κατΓηΚίύουσαν, Philo de caritat. § 14, cf. leg. ad Gaium § 30, and many other exx. in other auth.). Hence som(i suppose that κατπ)\(ύ(ΐν τ. λόγον τοί θιοΐι in 2 Co. ii. 1 7 is eipnv. to lo trade in the icord of God, i. e. to try to get base gain by teaching divine truth. But as jied- lers were in the habit of adulterating their commodities for the sake of gain (oi κάηηΚοί σου μΐσγονσι τον otvov ν5ατι. Is. i. 22 Sept. ; κάπηΧοι, ol τον otvnv κ(ρανννντα, Pollux, onomast. 7, 193; oi φϊΚόσοφοι ano&idovrat τα ματ «■ατΓίΌί 325 τρΒία βήματα, ωσπ(ρ ο! κάττηΚοι, κ(ρασάμ(νοί ye οΐ πολλοί και δϋλώσαιτίί κα\ κακομ(τροϋντ(ί, Lucian. Ilermot. 59), καπψ \(ΰ(ίν τι was also used as synonymous with to corrupt, to adulterate (Themist. or. 21 p. 247 ed. Hard, says that the false philosopliers τό θίίότατον των ανθρωπίνων ά-/αθων κίβδηλ(ΰ(ΐν τί και αισχννιιν κ. καπη\(ΰ(ίν) ; and most in- terp. ri'.;htly decide in favor of this meaning (on account of the context) in 2 Co. ii. 1 7, cf. δολοϋν τον λο^ον τοΟ ieoO, ib. iv. 2. [Cf. Trench § l.\ii.] • Kairvos, -oC, ό, [fr Horn, down], smoke : Rev. viii. 4 ; ix. 2sq. 17, 18; .xiv. 11; xv. 8; xviii. 9, 18; xix. 3 ; άτμΐ! καπνού, Α. V. vapor of smoke. Acts ii. 19 after Joel ii. 30 Cm. 3).• ΚαΐΓπ•α8οκ£α, -as, ή, Cappadocia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded under the Roman empire on the N. by Pontus, on the E. by Armenia Minor, on the S. by Cilicia and Commagene, on the W. by Lycaonia and Galatia [BB. DD. s. v.] • Acts ii. 9; 1 Pet. i. 1.• KopSCa, -as, 17, poetic κρα8ία and καρ8ίη (in the latter form almost always in Horn, [only at the beginning of a line in three places; everywhere else by metathesis κρα- ίΐΐη . Ehelinrj, Lex. Hom. s. v.]), [fr. a root signifying to quiver or palpitate ; cf. Cartius § 39 ; Λ^anit•ek p. 1097 (Etym. Magn. 491, 56 πάρα το κραδαίνω, το σ(ίω• ά€ΐκίνητο! yap ή καρ8ία) ; allied with Lat. cor; Eng. heart] ; Sept. for 2'! and 33'7 ; the heart ; 1. prop, that organ in the animal body which is the centre of the circulation of the blood, and hence was regarded as the seat of physical hfe : 2 S. xviii. 14; 2 K. ix. 24; Tub. vi. 5 (4), 7 (6) sq., 17(16). Hence 2. univ. καρ8ία denotes the seat and centre of all physical and spiritual life; and a. the vigor and sense of pht/sical life (Ps. ci. (cii.) 5 ; στηρισον την καρδίαν ,σον ψωμώ αρτον, Juilg. xix. 5 ; to which add Ps. ciii. (civ.) 1.5) : τρ€φ(ιν tos καρ- δίας, Jas. v. 5 ; ΐμπιπΚων τας καρδίας τροφής. Acts xiv. 1 7 ; βαρΐΐν τ. καρδίας κραιπάΧη και μ*θτ], Lk. xxi. 34 ; [but see b. 8. below] ; b. the centre and seat of spiritual life, the soul or mind, as it is the fountain and seal of the thoughts, passions, desires, appetites, affections, purposes, endeavors [so in Eng. heart, inner man, etc.] ; o. univ.: Mt. v. 8; vi. 21 ; Mk. vii. 19; Lk. i. 51 ; ii. 51 ; viii. 12, 15 ; Acts v. 3 ; Ro. x. 9 sq. ; 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; 2 Co. vi. 1 1 ; Eph. vi. 5 ; Col. iii. 22 ; 1 Pet. iii. 4, etc. ; Plur. : Mt. ix. 4; Mk. ii. 6, 8; iv. 15 [R L txt. Tr mrg.] ; Lk. i. 17; ii. 35;v. 22; [xxiv. 38 RGLmrg. ; Acts vii. 51 L Τ Tr WH t.x't.] ; Ro. ii. 1 5 ; xvi. 18 ; 2 Co. iii. 2 ; Gal. iv. 6 ; Phil. iv. 7; Eph. v. 19 Lchm.; Heb. viii. 10 [TAVII mrg. sing.] ; X. 16, etc. ί καρδία is distinguished fr. το στόμα or fr. τά xelXea: Mt. χ v. 8, 18 sq. ; Mk. vii. C ; 2 Co. vi. 1 1 ; Ro. X. 8 sq. ; fr. τό πρόσωπον : 2 Co. v. 12 ; 1 Th. ii. 17; πιριτομή καρδίας, Ro. ii. 29 ; ά7Τ€ρίτμητοι τη καρδία. Acts vii. r>\ [L Τ Tr WIl txt. -8iais, AVH mrg. gen. -δίας, cf. B. 1 70 (148)]. of things done from the heart i. e. cordialli/ or sincerely, truh/ (without simulation or pretence) the foil, phrases are used : eK καρδίας (.Arstph. nub. 86), Ro. vi. 1 7; and L Τ Tr AVH in 1 Pet. i. 22, where R G ϊκ καθαρός καρ- ii'ar, as in 1 Tim. i. 5 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 ■ άπο των καρδιάιν, Mt. xviii. 35 (άπο καρδίας €ϋχάριστος τοίί dfoic, Antonin. 2, 3) ; ev οΚχ] τ. κ. and (ξ όλης τ. κ., Mt. χχϋ. 37 ; Mk. xiL 30, 33 ; Lk. .χ. 27, and Kec. in Acts viii. 37, (Deut. vi. 5; -x.xvi. 16; Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 34); μιτ (5λτ)5ιι/ήί καρίιαΓ, Heb. χ. 22. epewav τίις καρδίας, Ro. viii. 27 ; Rev. ii. 23; δοκίμαζαν, 1 Th. ii. 4; γινώσκιιν, Lk. xvi. 15, (ί'τάζην, Jer. xvii. 10; Ps. vii. 10) ; διάνοιγαν την κ. (see διανοίγω, 2), Acts xvi. 14; ην ή καρδία κ- ή ψνχή μία, there Λν35 perfect unanimity, agreement of heart and soul. Acts iv. 32; Tiuevai Tt fv τη κ. (11^3 and 3S '7i' O\V, 1 S. xxi. 12; MaL ii. 2 ; Dan. i. 8 ; τιθίναι iv στήθισσιν, iv φρισίν, etc., in llom.), to lay a thing up in the heart to be considered more carefully and pondered, Lk. i. 66 ; tofx in the heart i. e. to purpose, plan, to do something, Acts v. 4 [A. V, conceived in thy heart'\ ; also tis τ. καρδίαν [L Τ Tr WH iv T. ) : χόρ- Tor, Mk. iv. 28 (φυτά, .Sap. x. 7). b. metaph. to bear, briny forth, deeds : thus of men who show their knowl- edge of religion by their conduct, INIt. xiii. 23 ; Mk. iv. 20 ; Lk. viii. 15 ; fv (for R G L Tr mrg. WH mrg. ίν [cf. B. 103 (90), see (ΐς, 4 a.]) τριάκοντα etc. sc. καρποΐς, Mk. iv. 20 Τ Tr txt. WH txt. [see e'v, I. 5 f.] ; iv παντί ipyia άγαθώ. Col. i. 10; τινί (dat. commodi) to one who reaps the fruit, i.e. fruit acceptable to him, τω θιω. Ro. vii. 4 ; τώ θανάτω, i.e. (without the fig.) to produce works re- warded with death, Ro. vii. 5 ; in mid. to hear fruit oj one's self Col. i. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].• καρΐΓθ-φόρο5, -ov, (καρπός and φίρω), fruit-beariny, fruitful, productive : Acts xiv. 1 7. (Pind., Xen., Theo- [ihr., Diod., Sept.) * καρτ€ρ(ω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίκαρτίρησα ; (καρτιρός [f r. κάρτος i. e. κράτος, ' strong ']) ; to be steaelfast : Heb. xi. 27 [A.V. endured^ (Job ii. 9; Sir. ii. 2; xii. 15; often in (irk. writ. fr. Soph, and Thuc. down.) [Co>lP. : προσ-καρ- Τ(ρβω.^ κάρφοϊ, -COS (-ους), τό, (fr. κάρφω to contract, dry up, wither), a dry stalk or twig, a straw; chaff, [A. V. mote'] : Mt. vii. 3-5 ; Lk. vi. 41 sq., where it figuratively denotes a smaller fault. (Gen. viii. 1 1 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.) * κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95 ; cf. W. § 5, la.; B. 1 ; WH. App. p. 146•], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower ; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the ace. I. With the Genitive (W. §47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. §147,20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατά 327 ToC κρημνού, Mt. viii. 32 ; Mk. v. 13 ; Lk. viii. 33 ; κατ(χ((ν κατά Trjs κίφαΧής (so that it flowed down from his head [cf. W. 381 (3οΓ) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LTTrWH; see καταχτώ), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατά κεφαλή: (a veil hanging down from his head) ΐχων, 1 Co. -xi. 4 ([A. V. harinr/ his head covered] cf. κα- ταπίτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but see ΐχω 1. 1 b.]). b. doivn upon (dotvn into) anytliing : Acts.x.wii. 14 [W. 381 (357) notei; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Crete]; trop. ή κιιτά liadovs πτωχ€ία reaching down into the depth, i. e. deep or extreme poverty, 2 Co. viii. 2 (cf. Strabo 9, 5 p. 411) €στι TO μαντΐΐον ίιιηρον κοίλοι' κατά βάθους)- C. used of motion or extension tlirough a space from top to bottom ; hence through, throughout : in the N. T. [and in Luke's writ.; B. § 147, 20] everywh. with tlie adj. oKos, as Kaff όλη! Trjs πίριχώρου τή: Ίουδαι'αΓ, της 'Io'tttitjs, l^k. iv. 14 ; .xxiii. a ; Acts i.x. 31 ; .x. 37, (8ΐ(σπάρησαν κατά τη! νήσου, Polyb. 3, 19, 7 ; ΐσκΐ^ασμίνοι κατά της χώρας, 1,17, 10; 3, 76, 10; μη παραβαίν€ΐν τάς άρματοτροχίας, αλλά κατ αυτών Ιίναι, Ael. ν. h. 2, 27). 2. metajih. a. after verbs of swearing, adjuring, (the hand being, as it were, placed down upon the tiling sworn by [cf. Bnhdy. p. 238 ; Kiiliner § 433 fin.]), by : Mt. xxvi. 63 ; Heb. vi. 13, 16, (Is. xlv. 23 ; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 13 ; Judith i. 12 ; Dem. 553, 17 ; 554, 23). b. against (prop, down upon [W. 382 (358)] ; Hebr.S;•) : opp. to ύηίρ, Mk. ix. 40 ; 2 Co. xiii. 8 ; Ro. viii. 31 ; opp. to μ^τά, Mt. -xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23 ; after ίτηθνμύν. Gal. v. 1 7 ; emflv πονηρον (ρήμα), Mt. V. 1 1 ; XaXtii', Acts vi. 13; .lude 1 5 ; μαρτυρία, Mk. xiv. 55 ; Mt. xxvi. 59 ; μαρτυρύν, 1 Co. xv. 15 [here many take κ. i. q. with regard to, of; cf. De Wette ad loc. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 272] ; ^(υ^ομαρτυρύν, Mk. xiv. 56 sq. ; yoyyύζflv, Mt. xx. 11 (Ex. .xv. 24 Alex.) ; διδάσκΕίν, Acts -xxi. 28; ^eiSf σίαι, Jas. iii. 14 (Xen. apol. 13) ; συμβούλων λαβίΐν or ηοκ'ιν, Mt. xxvii. 1 ; Mk. iii. 6 ; αιτ€ΪσθαΙ τι. Acts XXV. 3, 15; after verbs of a c c u s i η g, etc. : ίχαν τι, Mt. V. 23; Mk. xi. 25; Rev.ii.4, 14, 20; κατηγορύν, Lk. .xxiii. 14; κατηγορία,. Τ n. xviii. 29 [Tdf. om. κατά] ; (γκαλίίν, Ro. viii. 33; ϊντυγχάνΐΐν τινί, Ro. .xi. 2; add. Acts -xxiv. 1 ; XXV. 2 ; Jas. v. 9 ; το χ€ίρό-γραφον. Col. ii. 14 ; κρίσιν noielv, JudelS; after verbs of rebelling, fighting, pre- vailing: Mt. X. 35; xii. 25; Acts xiv. 2; 1 Co. iv. 6; 2 Co. X. 5 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 1 ; [Rev. xii. 7 Rec] ; ισχίκιν. Acts xix. 16 ; ίξουσίαν ίχ(ΐν, •Τπ. xix. 11. II. AVith the Accusative; cf. W. § 49d.; Bnhdy. p. 239 sqq. 1. of Place; a. of the place through which anything is done or is extended (prop, down through ; opp. to ανά, up through^ : Kaff ΰλην την ■πάλιν κΐιρυτσΐΐν, Lk. viii. 39 ; Ικφίρ^ιν κατά τάς τνλατ(ίας. Acts \. i5 [R G] ; add, Lk. ix. 6 ; xiii. 22 ; xv. 14 ; Acts viii. 1; xi. 1 ; xv. 23; xxi. 21 ; xxiv. 5, 12; xxvii. 2; τους κατά τα ίθνη (throughout Gentile lands) ττάντας Ιουδαίους, Acts xxi. 21, cf. Grimm on 2 ^lacc. i. 1 ; κατά την obov, along the way i. e. on the journey [W. 400 (374) note '], Lk. X. 4; Acts viii. 36 ; xxv. 3; xxvi. 13; along (Ijixt. secun- dum or praeter [R. V. off"]), πίλα-γος το κατά την Κιλικίαν, Acts xxvii. 5. b. of the pl.ace t ο which one is brought (down) : yevo^cvoi ΓTrΛVlI om. y.] κατά τον τόπον [«λ- θών etc.], Lk. χ. 32 [cf. Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad loc] ; ikeovTfS κατά την Μυσίαν, Acts -xvi. 7 ; κατά την Κκ/δοι/, Acts x.xvii. 7 ; κατ αυτόν, (came) to him, i. e. to the place where he was lying, Lk. x. 33. c. of direc- tion ; towards : Α,ιβύη ή κατά Κυρήνην, that Libya which lay towards Cyrene, i. e. Libya of Cyrene (i. e. the chief city of wliich was Cyrene), Acts ii. 10 ; βλίπ^ιν, to look, lie towards (see/3λtVω, 3), Acts .xxvii. 12; nopdeadai κατά μ^σημβρίαν. Acts viii. 26 ; κατά σκοπόν, towards the goal, my eye on the goal, Phil. iii. 14. against (Lat. adrersus w. the ace); over against, opposite: κατά πρόσωπον, to the face. Gal. ii. 11 (see -πρόσωπον, 1 a.) ; i. q. present, Acts -XXV. 16 [A. Y.face to face] ; 2 Co. x. 1 ; w. gen. of pers. added, before the face of, in the presence of, one: Lk. ii. 31; Acts iii. 13; τά κατά πρόσωπον, the things that are open to view, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7 ; κατ οφθαλμούς, before the eyes, Gal. iii. 1 ; here, too. ace. to some [cf. W. 400 (374) note ^] belongs κατά θ(όν, Ro. viii. 27, but it is more correctly referred to 3 c. a. be- low, d. of the place where: κατ οΓκοι/ (opp. to iv τω if ρω), at home, privately [W. 400 (374) note'], Acts ii. 46 ; v. 42. e. of that which so joins itself to one thing as to separate itself from another; ourybr, by : κατ ιδίαν, apart, see ίδίοί, 2 ; καθ' (αυτόν, alone (hi/ himself). Acts xxviii. 16 ; Jas. ii. 17 [R. V. in itself], (2 Mace. xiii. 13; oi καθ' αύτοϋς "Ελληνας, Thuc. 1, 138; oe BotwTol καθ' αΰτονς, Died. 13, 72; other ex.x. are given by Alberti, Observv. etc. p. 293; Loesner, Observv. e Philone p. 460 sq.) ; (χ^ιν τι καθ' (αυτόν, to have a thing by and to one's self, i. e. to keep it hidden in one's mind, Ro. xiv. 22 (Josei)h. antt. 2, 11, 1 ; Heliod. 7, 16 ; [cf. W. 401 (375) note']); hence, of that which belongs to some pers. or thing : κατά την ουσαν (κκΚησίαν, belonging to [Α. V. in] the church that was there. Acts xiii. 1 ; ή (κκλησία κατ οΐκόν τίνος, belonging to one's household (see Ικκλησία, 4 b. aa.) ; hence it forms a periphrasis — now for the gen., as τά κατά Ιουδαίους ϊθη (i. q. των Ιου- δαίων), Acts .xxvi. 3 ; now for the possessive ])ron., oi Kaff υμάς ποιηταί, your own poets, Acts xvii. 28 [here WH mrg. καθ' {]μάς, see their Intr. § 404]; νόμου τοΰ καθ' υμάς, [a law of your own]. Acts xviii. 15; το κατ ϊμί πρόθυμον, my inclination, Ro. i. 15 [see πρόθυμος]; ή καθ' υμάς πίστις, Eph. i. 15, (ή κατά τον τΰραννον ώμότης re και δύναμις, Diod. 14, 12; μίχ^η των καθ' ημάς χρόνων, Dion. Hal. antt. 2, 1; cf. Grimm on 2 JNIacc. iv. 21 p. 88 ; a throng of e.x.x. fr. Polyb. may be seen in Schweighaeuser, Lex. Polyb. p. 323 sq.; [cf. W. 1.54 (146); 400 (374) note^; esp.B.§ 132,2]). 2. of Time [cf. W. 401 (374)]; during, about; hat. tempore : κατ (Ke'ivov or τού- τον Tor καιρόν. Acts xii. 1 ; xix. 23; Ro. ix. 9 ; Heb. ix. 9 [R G] ; κατά TO αυτό, at the same time, together, Acts xiv. 1 (see αϋτοΓ, III. 1); κατά το μισονύκτιον. Acts xvi. 25 ; κατά μίσον της νυκτός. Acts xxvii. 27 ; [possibly also κατά μ(σημβρίαν, at noon. Acts viii. 2G (see μισημβρία, b.)] ; κατά καιρόν, see καιρός, 2 a.; κατ αρχάς (Hdt. 3, 153), in the beginning (of things), Heb. i. 10 ; κατά την ήμίραν το« πίΐρασμοΰ, Heb. iii. 8 [as the Sept. in this ])ass. have ren- dered the prep. 3 in the context by ως (Jv τ^ παραπικρα 328 σμω, Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8), some would take it and κατά here i. ij. ^iXe ; lCo.i.26; x.l8; 2Co.xi.l8; oc κί'ριοι κατά σ. (I>uther well, tlie leiblichen Herren), in eartlily relations, ace. to the arransements of society, Eph. vi. 5 ; κατά το flayy., κατά την ϊκΚογήν, Ro. xi. 28 ; add Ro. i. 4; vii. 22; Pliil. iii. 5 S(i.; Ileb. ix. 9; τά κατά Τίνα, one's affairs, one's case, Acts xxiv. 22; xxv. 14; Eph. vi. 21 ; Phil. i. 12; Col. iv. 7, (and very often in class. Grk.) : κατά πά«τα τρόπον, in every way, in every re- spect. Ho. iii. 2 ; the op[). κατά μηδίνα τρήπον, in no wise, 2 Th. ii. 3; κατά ηάντα, in all respects, in all things, Acts xvii. 22; Col. iii. 20, 22; Ileb. ii. 17: iv. 15, (Thuc. 4, 81). c. accordintj to, arjreeahlij to; in reference to agreement or conformity to a standard, in various ways [W. 401 (375)]; o. accordintj to anything as a stand- ard, agreeahhj to : rrepnraTe'iv κατά τι, Mk. vii. 5 ; Ro. viii. 1 [Rec.], 4 ; xiv. 15:2 Th. iii. 6 ; Eph. ii. 2 : ζήν κατά. Acts xxvi. 5; Ro. viii. 12 sq. ; πηρίύισθαι. 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; άσοδι- Sorat τινί, Mt. xvi. 27, etc. (see άττοδ/δωμι, [esp. 4]); Χαμβάνίΐν, 1 Co. iii. 8; so with many other verbs a thing is said to be done or to occur κατά, as in Lk. ii. 27, 29; Jn. vii. 24 ; Col. ii. 8 , iii. 10 ; 1 Tim. i. 18 ; Heb. vii. 15 ; viii. 5, 9 ; 1 Jn. v. 14, etc.; (on the phrase κατ' άνθραιπον, see άνθρωπο!, esp. 1 c. ; [cf. t. below : W. 402 (376)]) ; κατά την γραφήν, rat γραφάί, Jas. ii. 8 ; 1 Co. xv. 3 sq. ; κατά TO γίγραμμίνον, 2 Co. iv. 1 3 ; κατά ri ίϊρημίνον, Ro. iv. 18; κατά τϊιν νόμον, Lk. ii. 39; Jn. xviii. 31 ; xix. 7; lleb.ix. 22; κατά το ii'ayy. μου, Ro. ii. IG; xvi. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 8, cf. 1 Tim. i. 1 1 ; κιιτά τό ίαρισμίνον, Lk. xxii. 22; καθ' όμοι'ωσιν θtoϋ, Jas. iii. 9 ; κατά λόγοχ rightly, justly, [.\. v. nasoii irould etc.]. Acts xviii. 14 ; κ<ιτά τίνα, agree- ably to the ivill of any one, as pleases him, [W. 401 sq. (375)]: so κατά β(όν, llo. τίϋ. 27 [cf. 1 c. above]; 2 Co. vii. 9, 11 ; κατά Χριστον Ίησονν, Ro. xv. 5; κατά κίιριην, 2 Co. xi. 17; κατά τον καθαρισμύν, after the manner of purifying, as the rite of purification prescribed, Jn. ii. 6 ; oi κατά σάρκα Ζντα, who bear, refiect, the nature of the ilesh, i. q. oi σαρκικοί, :ind oi κατά πνΐΰμα ot/T€s i. (|. oi πνίνματικοί, Ro. viii. 5; κατά τι γνωσομαι : in accordance with what criterion i. e. by what si.tn shall I know? I,k. i. 18. Here belongs the use of the preposition in the titles of the records of the life of Christ : elayy. (which word codd. Sin. and Vat. omit) κατά ΐΛατθα'ιον, Μύρκοι», etc., as Matthew etc. composed or wrote (it). This use of the prep, was not primarily a mere periphrasis for the gen. (Ματθαίον, etc., see II. 1 e. above), but indicated that the same subject had been otherwise handled by others, cf. η παλίΐιά διαθήκη κατά τους ίβ8ημτ}κοντα (in tacit contrast not only to the Hebrew text, but also to the Greek translations made by others) ; oi υπομνη- ματισμοί oi κατά Nff^tai/, 2 Mace. ii. 13 [see (iriuun ad loc.]. Subse(|uently κατά with an ace. of the writer came to take the |)lace of the gen., as ή κατά Μωνσία π(ντάτ(ν χο! in Epiphanius [haer. 8, 4. Cf. W. 402 (375) ; B. 3; 157(137); and see, further, .?«/;/'. Lex. s. v. c iayyeXioi», Jas. Morison, Com. on Mt., Intr. § 4]. β. //( /iro/iorlion to, arrnrdinfj to Ih'i measure of : χαρίσματα κατίι την χάριν την δοθ(ϊσαν ημΊν διάφορα, 11ο. χϋ. 6 ; κατά τϊι μίτρον, 2 Co. χ. 13; Eph. iv. 7; κατά tijv σκληρότητα σου, Ro. ii. 5; κατά τον χρόνον, Mt. ii. 16; f κιίστω κατά την ιδίαν δυναμιν, Mt. .\χν. 15; without the art. κατά δΰναμιν, 2 Co. viii. 3 (ορρ. to ΰπίρ δΰναμιν, as Hom. II. 3, 59 κατ' αισαν, οΰδ' ΰπϊρ αισαν) ; καθ' όσον, by so much as, inasmuch as, Heb. iii. 3; vii. 20; ix. 27; κατά τοσούτο, by so much, Heb. vii. 22. γ. used of the cause; through, on account of, from, oioing to, (in accordance with i. e. in consequence of, by virtue of) [W. 402 (37fi)] : κατά πάσαν αΐτίαν, [for every cause], Mt. xi.K. 3 ; κατά την χάριν τοϋ θίοϋ, 1 Co. iii. 10; 2 Th. i. 12; 2 Tim. i. 9, {κατά την τοϋ θ(οΰ πρό- νοιαν, Joseph, antt. 20, 8. G) ; κατά χάριν, Ro. iv. 16; also ορρ. to κατά οφίίλημα [II. V. as of . . . as of], Ro. iv. 4 ; oi κατά φίισιν κλάδοι, the natural branches, Ro. xi. 21 [cf. B. 1G2 (141)] ; η κατά φΰσιν άγρύλαιος, the natural wild olive tree, ib. 24 ; ή κατά ττίστιν δικαιοσύνη, righteousness proceeding from faith, Heb. xi. 7; add, Ro. viii. 28; ix. 11; xi. 5; xvi. 25 sq.; iCo. xii. 8; 2Co. xiii. 10; (ial. ii. 2; iii. 29; Eph. i. .'i, 7,9, 11, 19; iii. 7,11, 16,20; Col. i. 11.29; Phil. i. 20: iii. 21 ; iv. 11,19; 2Th. i. 12; ii. 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 8 sq. ; Heb. ii. 4 ; vii. 16 ; Tit. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 3 : 2 Pet. iii. 15. adverbial phrases [W. § 51, 2 g.] : κατ ΐξον σίαν Iwith authority], Mk. i. 27 ; κατ ανάγκην, κατά «ού- σιοκ (q. ν), [ί;/ necessity, ο/" free will], Phileui. 14 ; κατο 329 καταβα\\ω γνώσιν, 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; κατ ('πίγνωσιν, Ro. χ. 2 [cf. W. 403 (37(1)]; κατά ΰγνουζν, [in ignorance], Acts iii. 17. 8. of likeness: as, like as : σνντίΚίσω . . . ^ιαθηκην καίνην, ov κατά την &ιαθήκην κτλ. Heb. viii. 8 Sij. (1 Κ. xi. 10) ; so witli the ace. of a pers. [cf. under a. above], Gal. iv. 28 ; 1 Pet. i. 15 : κατά ^fooafter the inias;e of God, Eph. iv. 24; κρίνισθαι κατά άνθρωπου!, ζην κατά Sfov, to be judged as it is fit men sliould be judged, to live as God hves, 1 Pet. iv. 6. Hence it is used «. of the mode in which a thing is done; of the quality: SfSpes oi κατ•' (ξοχην της πόλεως, the principal men of the city, Acts .x\v, 23 ; Kaff νπομξνήν tpyov άγαθοϋ, i. ij. νκομίνοντ€ς ev ίργω άγαθω, [by constancy in well-doing], Ro. ii. 7 ; esp. in adverbial phrases : κατά ταΰτα in [or afier^ the same [or //iii] mnnner, Lk. vi. 23 (Ltxt. TTrWH κ. τα αίτά, L. mrg. κ. ταϋτά), [26 (edd. as before)] ; Lk. .wii. 30 (T Tr Wll K. τα αυτά, G L κ. ταύτα) ; καθ^ νπ^ρβολην, Ro. vii. 13; 1 Co. xii. 31, etc., [cf. W. 4i;G (434); B. 96 (■S4)]; κατά πίστιν i. q. τ!ΐστ(ΰοντ(ς [A. V. in faith ; cf. W. 403 (376)], Heb. .\i. 13; κατίι σνγγνωμην, ov κατ (πιτο-γην, by way of concession, not by way of commandment, 1 Co. vii. 6, cf. 2 Co. viii. 8; κατά κράτοί. Acts xix. 20; Kaff ομοιότητα, Heb. iv. 15 ; on the phrase κατά άνθρωπον see άνθρωπος, 1 c. [cf. a. above]. d. of the end aimed at; the goal to which anything tends; (Lat. ad [W. 402 sq. (376)]): κατ' inayyeXlav ζωής, to proclaim life, 2 Tim. i. 1 [but see inayytXla, I ] ; κατ (νσίβιιαν, tending to godliness, [1 Tim. vi. 3; Tit. i. ]] (see eiac- fifia ; [yet al. refer these exx., and that which follows, to the use set forth above, in c.]) ; κατά πίστιν, to awaken, produce faith. Tit. i. 1, (exx. of this use of κατά fr. Horn., Hdt.. Thuc, Xen., may be seen in Passow s. v. II. 3 p. 1598'; [L. and S. s. v. B. III. 1] ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 632; Kiihner ii. p. 412) ; many refer to this head also κατ' άτιμίαν (to my dishonor [W. 402 sq. (376)]) λε'-^ω, 2 Co. xi. 21 (κατά την τιμήν τον θ€ον τοντο ποιων, to the honor of (iod, .Joseph, antt. 3, 11,4); but see ατιμία. III. In Composition κατά denotes, 1. /mm. down from, frtDii a higher to a loicer place : with special ref. to the terminus from which, as καταβαίνω, καταβιβάζω, etc. [cf. Λν. 431 (401 sq.)] ; with more prominent ref. to the lower terminus (down), as καταβάΧΧω, καταπατίω, etc. [cf. W. u. s.]; also of the situation or local position, as κατάκίΐμαι. κπθ(ί8ω, κατατίθημι, καθίζω, etc. from lop In hollow, nict;i|ili. of things done ΛνίΐΙι care, thoroughly, as καταμανθύνω, καθιψάω, etc. 2. in succession, in course : καθίξης ; one part after another, καταρτίζω, κατ(ν- βϊινω, etc. 3. under, underneath : καταχθόνιος : the idea of putlinij under resides in verbs denoting victorv, rule, etc., over others, as κατα8νναστ(ΰω, κατακνρκνω, κη- τfξυvσιύζω, καταδουλόω ; likewise in verbs naming that with which anything is covered, concealed, overwhelmed, etc., as κατακαλντΓτω, καταλιθάζω, κατασφραγίζω, κατα- σκιάζω, καταισχύνω, (where the Germ, uses the prefix uher [Eng. oi'er^, as iibersrhalten, uberdecken, or the syllable be, as beschatten, besierjein); also in adjj. denoting an abundance of that with which a thing is filled up or as it were covered up : see below in κατ(ί8ω\ικ. 4. ' like the Germ, i-er-, zer-, it denotes separation•, dissolu- tion, in verbs of wasting, dissolving, etc., as κατα- κΰπτω, κατάγννμι, κατακαίω, κατακλάω, καταΧνω, κατηκ'Κί'ζω, καταναλίσκω, καταφθίίρω, etc. 5. i. q. after, behind : καταδιώκω, καταλείπω. κατακολονΘ€ω, etc. 6. used of proportion and distribution, as κατακλι;ροδοτί'ω, κατακλ>;ροι/ομί'ω, etc. 7. of host ility, ai/ainsi etc.: καταδικυζω, κατακρίνω, καταλαλ^ω, καταγινώσκω, etc. Cf. Hirm. ad Vig. p. 637 sqq. [On the constr. of verbs com- pounded w. κατά, see AV. u. s. ; cf. B. 165 (143 sq.).] κατα-βαίνω: impf. 3 pers. plur. κατΐβαινον, fut. καταβίγ- σομαι; 2 aor. κατίβην, impv. κατάβηθι (Mt. xxvii. 40; Lk. xix. 5 ; Jn. iv. 49 ; Acts x. 20) and κατάβα (Mk. xv. 30 [R G (where L Τ TrAVH ptcp. καταβιΐί)], see αναβαίνω) ; \>ί. καταβίβηκα; [fr. Horn, on] ; Sept. for T1^; lo ijo down, come dijint, descenil ; 1. of persons ; a. prop. : absol., the place from which one has come down being evident from the context, καταβάς ίστη, Lk. vi. 1 7 (cf. 12); xvii. 31 [foil, here by inf., so Mt. xxiv. 17]; Lk. xix. 5 sq.; Jn. v. 7; Acts xx. 10; Eph. iv. 10; foil, by από w. gen. of the place, Mt. viii. 1 ; xiv. 29 ; xvii. 9 Rec. ; xxvii. 40,42; Mk. ix. 9 [LTrmrg. WHtxt. «]; xv.30,32; by ex w. gen. of place, Mt. xvii. 9 G L Τ Tr V\'H [see «, I. 3]; by ds w. ace. of place, Mk. xiii. 15 [RCiLbr. Tr; al. om. ei'r etc.] ; Acts viii. 38 ; [Ro. x. 7] ; Eph. iv. 9. b. lo come down, as fr. the temple at Jerusalem, fr. the city of Jerusalem ; also of celestial beings coming down to earth: absol., Mt. iii. 16 ; Lk. ii. 51 ; x. 31 ; Jn. iv. 47, 49,51; Acts [vii. 34]; viii. 15; x. 20; [xxiii. 10]; xxiv. 1, 22 ; foil, by από w. gen. of the place, Mk. iii. 22 ; Lk. X. 30; Acts XXV. 7; 1 Th. iv. 16; eK τοΰ oipavov, Mt. xxviii.2; Jn.i.32; iii.l3; vi.33,38[RG; 3ΐ.άπό],41 sq. 50 sq. 58, [on these pass. cf. B. 297 (255)] ; Kev. x. 1 ; xviii. 1 ; xx. 1. foil, by els w. ace. of place, Lk. x. 30 ; xviii. 14; Jn. ii. 12; Acts vii. 15; xiv. 25 ; xvi. 8 ; xviii. 22; xxv. 6 ; by ΐπί w. ace. of place, Jn. vi. 16 ; w. ace. of the pers., Mk. i. 10 [R G L mrg.] ; Lk. iii. 22 ; Jn. i. 33, 51 (52) ; by fv w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 4 [R L] (see f'v, I. 7) ; by προς w. ace. of pers., Acts x. 21 ; xiv. 11 ; contextually i. q. lo be cast doicn, of the devil. Rev. xii. 12. 2. of things. In come (i. e. be sent) - μ(νος : 1 aor. pass. κατ€βλήθην : [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for "TSn; 1. lo cast down : τινά, pass., Rev. xii. 10 Rec. ; to throw to the ground, prostrate : pass., 2 Co. iv. 9 καταβαρέω 330 κατα/γωνίζομαι (where the metaph. is taken from an atlilete or combat- ant). 2. Ill put in a lower place : in the phrase dt- μίΚιον κατίΐβάλλομαι, to lay {down) a foundation (Joseph, antt. 11,4, 4; 15,11,3; Dion. li. antt. 3, G9 ; al.), Ileb. \i. I.• κατα-βαρ{(ι>, -ώ : 1 aor. κατ(βάρησα ; prop, to press down III/ (in impost il weight; to weiijii down; ineta|)li. to bur- den: τινά, any one, 2 Co. xii. 1(5. (I'olyb., Diod., App., Lcian.) * κατα-βαρύνω ; i. q. καταβαρίω (q. V.) ; pres. pass. ptcp. καταβαρυι•ύμ(νο!, Jlk. xiv. 40 LTTrWlI; see βαρίω. (Sept. ; Tlicojihr. et al.) * κατά-β(»Γΐ5, -fojs, ή, (καταβαίνω), [fr. Hdt. down], de- scent ; a. the act of descendini/. b. the place of descent : τον Spovs, i. e. tliat part of the mountain where the descent is made, Lk. -xix. 37 ; so Josh. x. 11 Sept. ; Diod. 4, 21 ; opp. to άνάβασις, tlie place of ascent, way up, I Mace. iii. 16, 24 ; Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 3. So Lat. descensus; <■{. Ilerzog on Sail. Cat. 57, 3.* κατα-βιβάζω ; 1 fut. pass, καταβιβασθησομαι ; to cause to godown (Hdt. 1, 87; Xen. Cyr. 7,5, 18; Sept. several times for Tlin ; to bring down. Bar. iii. 29) ; to cast down, thrust down : pass., ecay aSou (see ά^ηί, 2), Mt. xi. 23 RGT; Lk. x. 15 [Tr rarpj,\, etc.; with gen. of jjers. [\V. 206 (193) ; B. 169 (147)], to exercise harsh control over one, ■ to use one's power against one: Jas. ii. 6 [not Tdf. (see below)] (Diod. 13, 73) ; τινά, to oppress one (Xen. conv. 5, 8 ; often in Sept.) : Jas. ii. 6 Tdf. ; pass. Acts x. 38.* κατά-βΕμ,α, -ror, τό, i. q. κατανάθ(μα (q. v.), of which it seems to be a vulgar corruption by syncope [cf. Kou- manoudes, Συναγωγή λί^Εων άθησανρ. κτ\. s. V. κατάς] ; a curse ; by meton. worthy of execration, an accursed thing: Rev. xxii. 3 [Her. κητανάθ€μα ; cf. Just. M. quaest. et resp. 121 fin. ; ' Teaching ' 16, 5]. Not found in prof, auth.* κατα-βίματίξω; (κατάθ€μα. q. v.) ; to rail down direst evils on, to curse vehemently: Alt. xxvi. 74 (liec. καταναθιματί- ζ(ίν). (Iren. adv. haer. 1, 13, 4 and 16, 3.)* κατ-αΐίτχίνω ; Pass., impf. καττ)σχννόμην ; 1 aor. καττι- σχύνθην; fut. κατοίσχυνθήσομαι; Sept. chiefly for ϋ'3ΓΙ and ty'^il; as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; 1. to dis- lionor, disgrace : την κιφα^ην, 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. (σποδω την Κ€φαλήν, Joseph, antt. 20, 4, 2). 2. to put to shame, maheashamed: τινά,Ι Co.i.27; xi. 22; pass, to be ashamed , blush with shame: Lk. xiii. 17; 2 Co. vii. 14; ix. 4; 1 Pet. iii. 16 ; by a Hebr. usage one is said to be put to shame who suβ'ers a repulse, or whom some hope has deceived ; hence ίλπα ού καταισχύνιι, does not disappoint: Ro. v. 5 (cf. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6 ; xxiv. (.xxv.) 2 sq. ; cxviii. (cxix.) 116) ; pass., Ro. ix. 33; .κ. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. G, (Is. xxviii. 16 ; Sir. ii. 10).* κατα-κα(ω : impf. 3 pers. plur. κατίκαιον ; fut. κατακαίσω ; 1 aor. inf. κατακανσαι; Pass., pres. κατακαίομαι; 2 aor. κατ(κάην; 2 fut. κατακαήσομαι [cf. Tilf. Pruleg. p. 123; IFii. App.p. 170»]; 1 iut. κατακαυθήσομαι (Kiihneri. 841 ; [Veitch s. v. καίω; Β. 60 (53); W. 87 (83)]); Sept. chiefly for ^"^i^; fr. Hom. down; to burn up [see κατά, lU. 4], consume by fire: τι, Mt. xiii. 30; Acts xix. 19 ; pass., 1 Co. iii. 15 ; Heb. xiii. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10 [Tr WH ΐύρΐθήσ^ται, see ΐΰρίσκω, 1 a. fin.] ; Rev. viii. 7 ; with ττυρί added, Mt. iii. 1 2 ; xiii. 40 R L Τ WII, but G Tr καίω ; Lk. iii. 17, (Ex. xxix. 14; xxxii. 20 Alex., etc.; see καίω). €v ττνρί (often so in Sept.), Rev. xvii. 16 ; xviii. 8. (καία and κατακαίω are distinguished in Ex. iii. 2.) * κατα-καλύτΓτω : Sejjt. for Γ\Β2 : fr. Hom. down ; to cover up [see κατά. III. 3] ; Mid. pres. κητ-ακαλι'τττομαι. Ιο red or cover one's self: 1 Co. xi. 6 ; την κιφαλήν, one's head, ib. 7.* κατα-καυχάομαι. -ώμαι, 2 pers. sing, κατακαυχάσαι (contr. fr. κατακαυχύ(σαι) for the Attic κατακαυχά (Ro. xi. 18; cf. W.§13, 2b.; [B. 42(37); 5ο/)Λ. Le.x., Introd. p. 40 sq. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 sq.] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 360), impv. 2 pers. sing, κατακαυχω (Ro. xi. 18) ; (κατά against [cf. κατά, III. 7]) ; prop, to glory agaiiist, to exult over, to boast one's self to the injury of (a person or a thing) : Tivor, Ho. xi. 18 ; Tdf. in Jas. iii. 14 ; κατά τίνος, ibid. R G L Tr AVII [B.185(160); W. § 30, 9 b. (cf. 432 (402))]; eAeui(i.q. ό eXfoiv) κατακαυχάται κρίσεως, mercy boasts itself supe- rior to judgment, i. e. full of glad confidence has no fear of judgment, Jas. ii. 13. (Zech. x. 12; Jer. xxvii. (1.) 10, 38; not found in prof, auth.)* κατά-κ£ΐμαι; impf. 3 pers. sing, κατίκίΐτο; (κeiμat,to lie [see κατά. III. 1]); to have lain down i. e. to lie pros- trate; a. of thesick [cf. coUoq. 'ί/οί'Ή sick'] (Hdt. 7, 229; Lcian. Icarom. 31 ; [Plut. vit. Cic. 43, 3]) : Mk. i. 30 ; Jn. v. G ; Acts xxviii. 8 ; foil, by eVi w. dat. of the couch or pallet, Alk. ii. 4 R G L mrg. ; [Acts ix. 33 R G] ; Lk. v. 25 R L ; eVi' τίνος. Acts ix. 33 [L Τ Tr WII] ; eVi' Ti, Lk.v. 25TTrWH[B. §147, 24note; W. 408 (381) note] ; ev w. dat. of place, Jn. v. 3. b. of those at meals, to recline (Athen. 1, 42 p. 23 c. ; Xen. an. 6, 1, 4; conv. 1, 14; Plat. conv. p. 177 d.; rep. ii. p. 372 d., etc. ; Diog. Laert. 7, 1, 19; see άνάκ€ΐμαι) : absol., Mk. xiv. 3; Lk. r. 29 ; foil, by eV w. dat. of place, Mk. ii. 15; 1 Co. viii. 10; Lk. vii. 37 LTTrWII.• κατα-κλάω, -ώ : 1 aor. κατίκ\ασα ; fr. Horn, down ; to break in pieces (cf. Germ, zerbrechen [see κατά. III. 4]) : τους άρτους, Mk. vi. 41 ; Lk. ix. IC.* κατα-κλείω : 1 aor. (tare'/cXf ισα ; fr. [Ildt.], Thuc. and Xen. down; to shut up, confine: τίνα ev rfj φνΧακί}, Lk. iii. 20; fV (which Rec. om.) φυλακα'ις. Acts xxvi. 10 (Jer. xxxix. (.xxxii.) 3).* κατα-κληρο8οτ£'ω, -ώ (sec κατά, III. 6) : 1 aor. κατικΚηρο• κατακΧηρονομέω 332 καταΧαμβάνι» ίάττ^σα; Ιο ilialriliute bi/ lot; Ιο dislriliule αχ an inheritance \ τινίτι. Acts xiii. 19 Rec. ; see the foil. word. (Deut. i. 38; .\xi. Iti ; Josh. xix. 51 Ald.,Compl. ; 1 Mace. iii. 36, — in .all with the var. κατακ\ηρονομάν. Not found in prof, aiitli.) * κατα-κληρονομί'ω, -ώ [see κατά. III. 6] : I aor. κατ(κ\ηρο- νόμησα ; In 'Its/n/tute b;i lol, la datlrihute as an inhcrlidiirr : Tivi Ti, Acts xiii. 19 () L Τ Tr WII. (Num. xxxiv. IS ; Deut. iii. 28 ; Josh. xiv. 1 ; Judg. xi. 24 Alex. ; 1 S. ii. 8; 1 Esr. viii. 82. Also often intrans. to receive, obtain, ac- quire (W an inheritance; as, Deut. i. 8 var., 38; ii. 21. Not found in prof, autli.) * κατα-κλίνω : 1 aoi•. κατίκλινα ; 1 aor. pass. κατ(κ\1θην ; fr. lliDu. down; iu tlie N. T. in ref. to eating, la iiiaLe lu recline: τινά, Lk. ix. 14, [also 15 TTrWll], (eVi το hfltrvov, Xen. Cvr. ■>, 3, 21); mid., with 1 aor. pass., to recline (nl tahle) : Lk. vii. SU L Τ Tr WII ; xxiv. 30 ; ei't Tijv πρίύτοκΚισίαν, Lk. .\iv. 8, (fty το ίσθϊΐΐν, Judith xii. 15 ; iis TO ϋύπνον, Joseph, antt. (i, 8, 1 [var.]).* κατα-κλνζω: 1 iior. pass. ptcp. κατακλιισβίΐί; fr. [Pind., Hdt.], Aeschyl. down ; to overwhelm ivith water, to sulj- merfje, deluge, fcf. κατά. III. 4] : 2 Pet. iii. 6. (Sept. sev- eral times for ΠΟΠ.) ' κατα-κλυσμ05, -οϋ, ό, (κατακλύζω), inundiitinn, deluge : of Noah's dfUr^c, .Mt. xxiv. 3~i ii[. ; Lk. xvii. 27; 2 Pet. ii. 5. (Sept. for ^OO; Plato, Diod., I'hilo, Joseph., Plut.)" κατ-ακολουβί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ptcp. κατακο\ουθ1]σα! ; lu fol- low afer [see κατά. III. 5] : Lk. xxiii. .55 ; riW, .Vets xvi. I 7. [Sept., PoI>b., Plut., Joseph., al.] * κατα-κόΐΓτω; 1. to cut tip, cut to pieces, [see κατά, 111.4]; to slay: Is. xxvii. 9; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 7, ete. ; lldt. et sqq. 2. to beat, bruise : ίαυτον λίθοις, Mk. v. 5 ; [al. retain here the primary meaning, to cut, i/ash, maiif/le'].' κατα-κρημνίζω ; I aor. inf. κατακρημνίσαι; Ιο caxt down a /jrccipice; tn throw doicn heiidloni/: Lk. iv. 29. (2 Chr. XXV. 12; 2 Mace. xiv. 43; 4 Mace. iv. 25; Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 7; 8,3,41; Dem. 446, 11; Diod. 4, 31 ; [Philo de agric. Xoii § 15] ; Joseph, antt. 6, 6, 2; 9, 9, 1.) * κατά-κριμα, -τος, τό, (κατακρίνω), damnrilori/ sentence, condentniilion: Ro. v. 1(1 (on which see κρίμα, '_'). ib. 18; viii. 1. (κατακριμάτων άφίσιΐί, Dion. Ilnl. (i. 61.) ' κατα-κρίνω; ful. i«iri;/cpir/a>; 1 a.or. κατίκρινα: Pass., pf. κατακίκριμαι; 1 aor. κατίκμίίΐ)ΐ'; 1 (ut. κατακριθήσομαι; to f/ioe juilymenl iirjainst (one [see κατά. III. 7]), to judge icorlhy of punishment, to condemn; a. prop.: Ro. viii. 34; τινά, Jn. viii. 10 sq.; Ro. ii. 1, where it is dis- ting. fr. KpineiP, as in 1 Co. xi. 32; 'pass., Mt. xxvii. 3; Ro. xiv. 23 ; Tiva θανάτω, to adjudire one to death, con- demn to death, .Mt. xx. 18 [Tdf. di θάιιατην] ; Mk. x. 33, (κίκριμμίνοι θαράτω. to eternal death, Barn. ep. 10, 5); Tfl καταστροφή, 2 Pet. ii. 6 [AVII om. Tr mrg. br. κατα- στροφήΐ, (the Greeks say κατακρ. τινίι θανάτου or θάνα- τον: cf. W. 210 (197 sip); B. § i:!2, l(i; Grimm on .'^ap. ii. 20); w. the ace. and inf., τινά evo)(ou tivai θιιΐ'άτον. Mk. xiv. 64; simply, of God condemning one to eternal mis- ery: pass., Mk. xvi. 16; 1 Co. xi. 32; Jas. v. 9 Rec. b. improp. i. e. by one's good example to render another's wickedness the more evident and censurable : Mt. xii. 4 I sq. ; Lk. xi. 3 1 sip ; Ileb. xi. 7. In a peculiar u.se of the word, occasioned by the employment of the term κατά- κριμα (ill vs. I ), Paul says, Ro. viii. 3, ό Λογ κατίκρινι την ύμαρτίαν iv τί) σαρκί, Ί. e. through his Son, who partook of hiuiian nature but was without sin, (iod deprived sin (which is the ground of the κατάκριμιι) of its power in human nature (looked at in llie general), broke its deadly sway, (just as the condemnation and punishment of wicked men ])uts an end to their power to injure nr do harm). [(From Pind. and lldt. down.)]* κατά-κρισ-ι;, -fius, ή, (κατακρίνω), condemnation : 2 Co. iii. 9 (see binKouia, 2 a.); πραί κατάκρισιν, in order to con- demn, 2 Co. vii. 3. (Not found iu prof, autli.)* κατα-κυρίίίω ; 1 aor. ptcp. κατακυρκύσας: (κατά [(ρ v. III. ο] under) ; a. lo bring nniler tmi '.< power, to sub- ject til one's self, to subdue, master: t(tos. Acts xix. IC (Diod. 14, 04 ; for ΰ22 Gen. i. 28; Sir. xvii. 4). b. to hold in subjection, to be master of, exercise lordship over : Tivor, Mt. XX. 25; ^Ik. x. 42; 1 Pet. v. 3; (of the benign government of God, Jer. iii. 14). * κατα-λαλίω, -ώ; to speak against one, to criminate, Ira- ilure: τιΐ'όί (in class. Grk. mostly w. the ace; in the Sept. ehielly foil, by κατά tivos), Jas. iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2 ; iii. I G [here Τ Tr mrg. W II e'v ω κατα\ά\(1σθ(, wherelti ye are sjxih η ogaiitst^.* κατα-λαλιά, -as, η, (καταλαλοί, q. v.), defamation, evil- speaking : 2 Co. xii. 20 ; I Pet. ii. 1, [on the plur. cf. VV. 17G (IGG); B. 77 (G7)]. (Sap. i. 11 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 30, 1 ; 35, 5. and eecl. writ. ; not found in class. Grk.) * κατά-λαλο5, -ου, ό, a defamer, evil speaker, [A. V. back- biiers] : Ro. i. 30. (Found nowhere else [Ilerm. sim. 6, 5, 5; also as adj. 8, 7, 2 ; 9, 2G, 7].)* κατα-λαμ.βάνω : 2 aor. κατίλαβον; pf. inf. κατ(ι\ηφίναι; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing. κατ(ΐΚηπται (.In. viii. 4 as given in L Τ Tr WII t.xt.), pf. ptcp. κατ(ΐ\ημμ(νη! ; 1 aor. κα- τ^ι'Κήφθην (Jn. viii. 4 R'"'"e'-G) [on the augm. cf. W. § 12, 6], and κατ(\ήφθην (Phil. iii. 12 RG), and κατ-Ε- λημφθην (ibid. L Τ Tr WTI ; on the μ see s. v. M, μ); Mid., prss. καταλαμβάνομαι; 2 aor. (£ατίλα/3ϋ'μι;ι/ ; cf. Kiihner i. p. 8.')G ; [Veitch, s. v. λαμβάνω] ; Sept. for yUTI 13^, also for Ν jO, etc. ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; to lay hold of; i. e. 1. lo lay hold of so as to make one's own, to obtain, attain lo: w. the ace. of the thing; the prize of victory, 1 Co. ix. 24; Phil. iii. 12 sq. ; την δικαιο- σϋνηι, Ro. ix. 30 ; i. q. to make one's own, to lake into one's self, appropriate : ή σκοτία αΰτ!) (Ί. e. τό φώί) οϋ κα- τίλαβ(ν, Jn. i. 5. 2. lo seize upon, lake possession of, (Lat. occupare) ; a. of evils overtaking one (so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down) : τινά, σκοτία, Jn. xii. 35 ; [so physi- callv, Jn. vi. 17 Tdf.]; of the last day overtaking the wicked with destruction. 1 Th. v. 4; of a demon about to torment one, Mk. ix. 18. b. in a good sense, of Christ bv his holy power and influence laying hold iif the human mind and will, in order to prompt ami govern it, Phil. iii. 1 2. 3. lo delect, catch : nva ίν τινι, in pass. Jn. viii. 3 [WH «Vi τ.] ; with a ptcp. indicating the crime, ib. 4. 4. to lay hold of with the m i nd; καταΧέ'γω 333 καταΚυμα to understand, perceive, learn, comprehend, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 250(1.; Axioch. p. 370 a.; Polyb. 8, 4, 6 ; Philo, vita contempl. § 10; Dion. Ilal. antt. 5, 4β); Mid. (Dion. Hal. antt. 2, 66 ; [cf. W. 253 (238)]), foil, by ότι. Acts iv. 13 ; X. 34 ; foil, by the ace. w. inf., Acts xxv. 25 ; foil. by indir. disc, Eph. iii. IS.* κατα-λί'γω : pres. pass. impv. (caraXeyfVflsi; 1. prop. to lay (lotcn ; mid. to lie down (lloiii.). 2. to narrate at length, recount, set forth, [fr. Horn. on]. 3. to set down in a Hit or register, to enroll, (esp. soldiers ; see Passow s. V. 5 ; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2 (yet the latter connect this use with the signif. to choose)'\) : of those widows who held a prominent place in the church anIur.]; 32, 19, 2; Diod. 14, 93,5; [al.; cf. W. 25, 93 (89)].)• κατα-λύω ; f lit. καταλύσω; \ aor. κατΆνσα; 1 aor. pass. κατ(λύθην ; 1 fut. pass. 3 pers. sing, καταλυβήσίται ; Ιο h. to pain the mind sharply, agitate it vehementli/ : used esp. of the emotion of sorrow ; κατινΰγη- σαν rfi Kapbia (την Kaphiav LTTrWH), they were smit- ten in heart with poignant sorrow [A. V. lit. pricked]. Acts ii. 37 (κατανινυγμίνον Trj KapSia, Ps. cviii. (cix.) IG; add, Gen. xxxiv. 7 ; Sir. xii. 12 ; xiv. 1, etc. ; of lust, Sua. κατα^ιόω 385 κατάρα 10; of violent pity, Joann. Malal. chronogr. 1, 18, ed. Bonn. p. 460). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. ii. p. 558 sqq.* κατ-αξιόω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, κατηξιώθην; Ιο account worthy, judye u-orthij : τίκά rivos, one of a thing, 2 Th. i. 5 (Polyb. 1, 23, 3, etc. ; Diod. 2, 60 ; Joseph, antt. 15, 3, 8) ; foil, by an inf., Lk. xx. 35 ; xxi. 36 [T Tr txt. WH κατισχΰ- om the Holy place (in Hebr. the Π3Ί3 ; ivhartpov κα- ταπίτασμα, Joseph, antt. 8, 3, 3 ; τό ϊσώτατον καταπίτασμα Philo de gig. § 12 ; by the Sept. and Philo this is called pre-eminently τό καταπίτασμα, Ex. xxvi. 31 sqq.; Lev. xxi. 23 ; xxiv. 3 ; Philo, vit. Moys. u. s.). This latter καταπίτασμα is the only one mentioned in the N. T. : το καταπίτασμα τοΰ ναοϋ, Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. xv. 38 ; Lk. xxiii. 4.3 : τό devTepov κατατητασμα, Heb. ix. 3 ; τό (σωτ€• pov τον καταπίτάσματος (cf. Lev. xvi. 2, 12, 15; E.\. .xxvi. 33) the space more inward than the rei7,equiv. to 'the space within the veil,' i. e. the Holy of holies, figura- tively used of heaven, as the true abode of God, Heb. vi. 19; in a similar figurative way the body of Christ is called καταπίτασμα, in (Heb.) x. 20, because, as the veil had to be removed in order that the high-priest might enter the most holy part of the earthly temple, so the body of Christ had to be removed by his death on the cross, that an entrance might be opened into the fellow- ship of God in heaven.* κατο-ιτίνω ; 2 aor. κατίπιον ; 1 aor. pass, κατιπόθην ; [f r. Hes. and Hdt. down] ; prop, to drink down, swallow down : Mt. xxiii. 24 ; Rev. xii. 16; to devour, 1 Pet. v. 8 [here Tr -n-iftK by mistake ; (see πίνω, init.)]; to swallow up, destroij, pass., 1 Co. xv. 54 ; 2 Co. v. 4 ; Heb. xi. 29 ; trop. \νπτ] καταποθηναι, to be consumed with grief, 2 Co. ii. 7.• κατο-ττίτΓΓω ; 2 aor. κατίττεσοζ/ ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to fall dnirn : Acts x.xviii. 6 ; eij την yijv. Acts xxvi. 14 ; eV» τη» ττίτραν, Lk. viii. 6 TTrWlL* κατα-ιτλίω : 1 aor. κατίπλ(υσα ; [fr. Hom. on] ; to sail down from the deep sea to land ; to put in : ets την χώραν, Lk. viii. 26.• κατα^ίΓονίω. -ώ : pres. pass. ptcp. καταπονουμενος ; prop. to tire down with toil, exhaust with labor; hence to afflict or oppress with evils; to make trouble for; to treat roughly: τινά, in pass.. Acts vii. 24 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7 [R. V. sore dis- tressed^. (3 Mace. ii. 2, 13; Hippocr., Theophr., Polyb., Diod., .Tosei)h., Aelian., al.) * κατα-ΐΓθντ£ζω : Pass., pres. καταποντίζομαι ; 1 aor. kotc ποντίσθην; to plunge or sink in the sea; Pass, in the in- trans. sense, to sink, to go down : Mt. xiv. 30 ; a grievous offender for the purpose of killing him, to drown : pass. Mt. xviii. 6. (Lys., Dem., Polyb., Diod., Plut., [Joseph, antt. 10, 7, 5; 14, 15, 10; c. Apion. 2, 34, 3], al. ; Sept.; [cf. W. 24; Loh. Phryn. p. 361 note].)' κατ-άρα, -as, ή, (κατά and αρά, cf. Germ. Verfluchung, VerwUnschung, [cf. κατά. III. 4]); Sept. chiefly for rnip; an execration, imprecation, curse: opp. to fvXoyia (q. v.), Jas. iii. 10 ; y^ κατάρας iyyvs, near to being cursed by God i. e. to being given up to barrenness (the allu- sion is to Gen. iii. 1 7 sq.), Heb. vi. 8 ; ύπ-ό κατάραν tlvai, to be under a curse i. e. liable to the appointed penalty of being cursed. Gal. iii. 10 ; ίξαγοράζίΐν τινά ίκ της κ. to redeem one exposed to the threatened penalty of a curse, ib. 13; τίκνα κατάρας, men worthy of execration, 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; abstract for the concrete, one in whom the curse is exhibited, i. e. underfjoing the appointed penalty of cursing. Gal. iii. 13; eyii κατάρα ίγηηθψ, Protev. Jac c. 3. "(Aesch;-!., Eur., Plat., al.) * και αραομαι 336 κατασκβυάζα κατ-αράομ.αι, -ωμαι ; (dcp. mid. fr. κατάρα) ; 1 aor. 2 pers. sin^. κατηράσω; [pf. pass. ptcp. κατηραμίνο! (_see below)] ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. mostly for 7'7P and T'X; to curse, doom, imprecate, evil on : (opp. to iuXoyiii/) absol. Ho. .\ii. 14; w. dat. of the obj. (as iu the earlier Grk. writ.), Lk. vi. 28 Rec. (Bar. vi. [Ep. Jer. GJ] 6ii ; [.Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 22, IG]) ; w. ace. of the obj. (as often in the later Grk. writ., as Plut. Cat. min. 32, 1 var. [B. § 133, 9; W. 222 (208)]), Mt. V. 44 Uec; Lk. vi. 2$ GLt.\t. TTr Wll; Jas. iii. 9; α tree, i. e. to wither it by cursing, Mk. xi. 21 (see Heb. vi. 8 in κατάρα), pf. pass. ptcp. κατηραμίνος in a pass, sense, accurserl (Sap. .\ii. 11 ; [2 K. ix. 34]; Plut. Luc. 18; and κ(κατηραμ. Deut. .xxi. 23; [Sir. iii. IC]) : Mt. XXV. 41 (also occasionally κίκατάρανηη. Num. xxii. 6 ; xxiv. 9 ; [but Tdf. etc. τηρ- ; see Veitch s. v. άράομοί]).* κοτ-οργ(ω, -ω; fut. καταργήσω ; 1 aor. κατήργησα; pf. κα- τήργηκα; Pass., pres. xaTapyoO/iat; pi. κατήργημαι; 1 aor. κατηργήθη»; 1 fut. καταργηθήσυμαι; causative of the verb άργϊω, equiv. to apyov (i. e. άιργον [on the accent cf. Chandler § 444]) ποιώ; fre(j. with Paul, who uses it 25 times [elsewhere in N. T. onl}• twice (Lk., Heb.), in Sept. 4 times (2 Esdr., see below)] : 1. to render idle, un- emploijed, inactive, inoperative : τήυ yqv, to deprive of its strength, make barren [A. V. cuinhi:r'\, Lk. xiii. 7 ; to cause a pers. or a thing to have no further efficiency ; to deprive of force, influence, power, [A. V. bring to nought, make of none effect^ : τι, Ro. iii. 3; 1 Co. i. 28; τινά, 1 Co. ii. 6 [but in pass.] ; diabolic powers, 1 Co. .xv. 24 (Justin, apol. 2, 6) ; Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 8 ; τον θάνατον, 2 Tim. i. 10 (Barnab. ep. 5, G) ; του 8ιάβη\ον, Ileb. ii. 14 ; pass. 1 Co. XV. 26 ; to make void, τήν tnayyeXiav, Gal. iii. 1 7 ; pass. Ro. iv. 14. 2. to cause to cease, put an end to, do awatj with, annul, abolish : τι, 1 Co. vi. 13; xiii. 11 ; τον νόμον, Ro. iii. 31 ; Eph. ii. 1.5 ; τον καιρόν τον ανόμου, Barnab. ep. 15, 5; pass, πόλ^μοί καταργίΐται (πονρανίων και ϊπιγ^Ίων, Ignat. ad Kph. 13, 2; ινα καταργηθη το σώμα τη! αμαρτία!, that the body of sin might be done away, i. e. not the material of the body, but the body so far forth as it is an instrument of sin; accordingly, that the body may cease to be an instrument of sin, Ro. vi. G. Pass, to cease, pass away, be tlone away : of tilings. Gal. V. 11 ; 1 Co. xiii. 8, 10; 2 Co. iii. 7, 11, 13 sq.; of persons, foil, by από tivos, to be severed from, separated from, di.•'- charged from, loosed from, any one; to terminate all in- tercourse with one [a pregn. eonstr., cf. W. 621 (577); B. 322 (277)] : «Jjro τον Χρίστου, Gal. v. 4 [on the aor. cf. W. § 40, 5 b.]; άπο τοϋ νόμου, Ro. vii. [2 (R•'" om. τ. i».)], 6. The ^τord is rarely met with in prof, auth., as Eur. Phoen. 753 καταργ. χίρα, to make idle, i. e. to leave the hand unemployed ; Polyb. ap. Suid. [s. v. κατηργηκίναι] τονί καιρούς, in the sense of to let slip, leave unused; in Sept. four times for Chald. Sp3, to make to cease, i. e. restrain, check, hinder, 2 Esdr. iv. 21, 23; v. 5 ; vi. 8.* κατ-αριθμ<(ι>, -ώ : to number with : pf. pass. ptcp. καττ;- ριθμημίνος iv (for Rec. σνν) ήμ'ιν, was numbered among ui, Actsi. 17; cf. 2 Chr. xxxi. 19; [Plar. politicus 266 a. etc.].• κατ-αρτ(ζω; fut. καταρτίσω (1 Pet. v. 10 L TTr Wll [B. 37 (32) ; but Rec. καταρτϊσαι, 1 aor. op tat. 3 piTS. *'"?•])• ' '^'^^• 'if• καταρτϊσαι; Pass., pres. καταρτίζομαι; pf. κατήρτισμαι; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing, κατηρτίσω; prop. to render άρτιοι i. e. ft, sound, complete, [see κατά, IIL 2]; hence a. to mend (what has been broken or rent), to repair: τα Βίκτυα, Mt. iv. 21 ; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these exx. to next head], i. q. to complete, τα ίστ(ρήματα, 1 Th. iii. 10. b. to fit oat, equip, put in order, arrange, ad- just: Toic alavat, the worlds, pass. Heb. xi. 3 (so, fur [■jn, ηλιον, Ps. Ixxiii. (Ixxiv.) IG; σ(\ήνηι>, Ixxxviii. (l.>i.\.xix.) 38) ; σκ^ΰη κατηρτισμίνη (It άπώλ(ΐαν. of men whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot es- cape destruction [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) in loc], Ro. ix. 22 (irXula, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like); of the mind : κατηρτισμίνο! u>s etc. so instructed, equipped, as etc. [cf. B. 311 (267) ; but al. take κατηρτ. as a circum- stantial ptcp. when perfected shall be as (not ' above ') his master (see iley. in loc.) ; on this view the passage may be referred to the next head], Lk. vi. 40 ; mid. to fit or frame for one's self, prepare : aivov, Mt. xxi. IG (fr. Ps. viii. 3 ; Sept. for ^y) ; σώμα, Heb. x. 5. c. ethi- cally, to strengthen, perfect, complete, make one what he ought to be: τινά, [1 Pet. v. 10 (see above)]; Gal. vi. 1 (of one Λνΐιο by correction may be brought back into the right way) ; pass., 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; τινά «ν παντΊ ίργω [(Γ WH om.)] άγαθω, Heb. xiii. 21 ; κατηρτισμίνοι iv τω αντω vol κτλ. of those who have been restored to harmony (so τΐάντα ftf τωυτο, Hdt. 5, lOG ; Ίνα καταρτισθη ή στασιά• ζούσα πύλΐί. Dion. Hal. antt. 3, 10), 1 Co. i. 10. [CoMl'. : προ-καταρτίζω.] ' κατ-άρτισ -is, -ίωί, ή, {καταρτίζω, q. v.), α strengthening, perfecting, of the soul, (A'ulg. consummatio) : 2 Co. .xiii. 9. (a training, disciplining, instructing, Plut. Them. 2, 7 [var.]; Alex. 7, 1.)• καταρτΐ(Γμό$, -oC, o, i. q. κατάρτισΐ!, q. v. : tivos fit τι, Eph. iv. 12. [(Galen, al.)] • κατα-σίΐω: 1 aor. κατίσίίσα; 1. to shake down, Ihriiw down, [cf. κατά, KL 1 ; (fr. Thuc. on)]. 2. ίο shake : τήν χιφα, to make a sign by shaking (i. e. ΤΆ\>- idly ivavin'z) the hand (Philo, leg. ad Gaiura § 28 ; τη> Xdpns, ib. de Josepho § 36) ; of one about to speak wlm signals for silence. Acts .\ix. 33 ; hence simply κατασίΐΈιν τινί, to make a sign, to signal with tlie hand to one, Xcn. CjT. 5, 4, 4; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 2; then, with a diire- gard of the origin of the phrase, the instrument, dat. τ?/ χίΐρί was added, Polyb. 1, 78, 3 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 48 ; so of one about to make an address : Acts -xii. 17 ; xiii. 16; xxi. 40; Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 2.* κοτοσ-κάΐΓτω : 1 aor. κατίσκαψα ; pf. pass. ptcp. κατε- σκαμμίνος; to dig under, dig down, demolish, destroy: τι, Ro. xi. 3, fr. 1 K. -xix. 10 ; pass. Acts xv. 16 [R G L], fr. Amos ix. 11 [(but see καταστρ(φ<ύ)'\. (Tragg., Thuc, Xen., sqq.).• κατα-σ'Κ€υίζω : fut. κατασκευάσω ; 1 aor. κατ(σκ(νασα : Pass., pres. κατασκευάζομαι; pf. ptcp. χατεσκενασμίνο!; 1 »or. κατεσκευάσθην ; to furnish, equip, prepare, make ready ; a. of one who makes any thing ready for κατασκηνοω 337 κατατίβημι pers. or thing: την όδό», Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; pf. pass. ptcp. prepared in spirit, hk. Ί. 17 (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5, 10). b. of builders, to construe:, erect, with the included idea of adorning and equipping with all things necessanj, (often so in Grk. auth. ; cf. Bleek, Brief a. d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. .398 sq.) : ol) ; xliii. 7.* κατα-<Γκηνόω, -ώ, inf. -σκηυοΊν (Mt. xiii. 32 LTTrAVH, Mk. iv. 32 WH, see άπ-οδί «ατόω ; [but also -σκηνονν, Mt. 1. c. R G ; Mk. 1. c. R ϋ L Τ Tr ; cf . Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 23]) ; fut. κατασκηνώσω ; 1 aor. κατασκήνωσα ; prop, to pitch one's tent, to fix one's abode, to dwell : (φ' ίΚπΐ8ι, Acts ii. 2t> fr. Ps. XV. (.xvi.) 9 ; foil, by ev w. dat. of place, Jit. xiii. 32; Lk. xiii. 19; ίπά w. ace. of place, Mk. iv. 32. (Xen., Polyb., Diod., al. ; κατ(σκήνωσ(ν ό ieur τω ναω τούτω, Joseph, antt. 3, 8, 5 ; add, Sir. x.xiv. 4, 8 ; Sept. mostly for p-y.) * κατ<ΜΓκήνωσ•ΐ5, -ΐωί, η, (^κατασκηνοω, q. v.), prop, the pitching of tents, encamping; place of tarrying, encamp- ment, abode: of the haunts of birds, Mt. viii. 20; Lk. Lx. 58; (for ]TC)'i, Ezek. xxxvii. 27; cf. Sap. Lx. 8; Tob. i. 4 ; Polyb. 11. 26, 5 ; Diod. 17, 95).• κατα-<Γκιάζω ; to ocershadoic, cover with .shade, [see κατά, m. 3] : τί, Heb. ix. 5. (lies., Eur., Plato, al.; κατασκιάω, Horn. Od. 12, 43u.)• κατα-ο-κοίΓίο), -ώ : 1 aor. inf. κατασκοπήσαι ; to inspect, view closely, in order to spg out and plot against: τι. Gal. ii. 4 ; (of a reconnoitre or treacherous examination, 2 S. X. 3 ; .Tosh. ii. 2 sq. ; 1 Chr..xix.3; Eur. Hel. 1607 (1623); so used, esp. in mid., in the other Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down).* κατά-(ΓΚ0ΐΓ05, -ου. 6, (κατασκίπτομαι [i. q. κατασκοπάω^), an inspector, a spg : Heb. xi. 31. (Gen. xiii. 9, 1 1 ; IS. xxvi. 4 ; I Mace. xii. 26; in prof. auth. fr. Ildt. down.) * κατα-σΌψΓζομαι : 1 aor. ptcp. κατασοφισήμανος ; (σο- φίζω): dep. mid., in prof. auth. sometimes also pass.; to circumvent bg artifice or fraud, conquer by subtle devices: to outwit, overreach ; to deal craftily with : τινά. Acts vii. 19 fr. Ex. i. 10. (.ludith v. 11; x. 19; Diod., Philo, Joseph., Lcian.. al.) * κατα-<ΓΤ€λλω : 1 aor. ptcp. καταστ(ί\αί ; pf. pass. ptcp. κατ(στα\μίΐ'ο( ; a. jirop. to senit or put down, to lower. b. to put or keep down one who is roused or incensed, to repress, re.itrain, appease, quiet: τινά. Acts xix. 35 sq.; 3 Mace. vi. 1; Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 7 ; b. j. 4, 4, 4 : Plut. mor. p. 207 e.* κοταΗΤτημα, -ror, to, (καθίστημι), (Lat. slatwt, habitus), [ilemeanor, deportment, bearing'] : Til. ii. 3. (3 Mace. v. 45; Joseph, b. j. 1, 1, 4 [of a city; cf. άτριμαίω τω κατα- στήματι προς τ. θάνατον άττηαι, Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 5 ; Plut. Marcell. 23, 6 : cf. Tib. Graoch. 2. 2. See Wetst. on Tit. 1. c. ; cf. Ignat. ad Trail. 3, 2 (and Jacobson or Zahn in loc.)].) * κατα-στολή, -ήτ, ή, (καταστί\\ω, q. V.) ; 1. prop. a lowering, letting down; hence 2. in bibl. Grk. twice, a garment let down, dress, attire : 1 Tim. ii. 9, Vulg. habitus, which the translator, ace. to later Lat. 33 usage, seems to understand of clothing (cf. the French I'habit) ; [cf. Joseph, b. j. 2, 8, 4] ; for Πϋ^'Ο, Is. Lxi. 3. with which in mind Hesych. says raTaoroXijii • ηριβοΧήν [cf. W. 23, but esp. Ellicott on 1 Tim. 1. c.].' κατα-ο-τρ€φω : 1 aor. κατίστριψα ; pf. pass. ptcp. «coTf- στραμμίνο! (Acts -XV. 16 T[WH,but Tr -στραμμίνοί; cf. WII. App. p. 170 sq.]) ; 1. to turn over, turn un- der: the soil with a plow, Xen. oec. 17, 10. 2. to overturn, overthrow, throw down: τί, Mt. .xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15 ; [τά κατ f στρ. ruins']. Acts xv. 1 6 Τ Tr WH [(cf. κατα- σκάπτω)]; so Hag. ii. 22: Job ix. 5; Joseph, antt. 8, 7, 6; AnthoL 11, 163, 6; Diog. L. 5, 82.» κατα-στρηνιάω : 1 aor. subjunc. καταστρηνιάσω [(fut. 1 Tim. V. 1 1 Lulim. mrg.)] ; (see στρηνιάω) ; lO feel the im- pulses ofsexiKd desire, [A. V. to grow iranlon]; (Vulg. luxurior) : rifot, to one's loss [A. V. against], 1 Tim. v. 11 ; l^nat. ad .\ntioch. c. 11.* κατα-σ~Γροφή, -ijs, η, {καταστρέφω), (\^ulg. subversio, l_erersio]), ooerlhniw, destruction : of cities, 2 Pet. ii. 6 [WH om. Tr mrg. br. καταστρ.] (Gen. xLx. 29) ; metaph. of the extinction of a spirit of consecration to Christ, [A. V. the subverting] : 2 Tim. ii. 14. (Aeschyl. Eum. 490.)• κατα-<Γτρώννυμι : 1 aor. pass, καταστρώθην ; to strew over (the groimd) ; to prostrate, slay, [cf. our to lay low] : 1 Co. x. 5 [A. V. overthrown]. (Num. xiv. 16; .Judith vii. 14; xiv. 4; 2Macc. V. 26,etc.; Hdt. 8, 53; 9,76; Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 64.)• κατα-στίρω; [fr. Ildt. down]; 1. prop, ίο draw down, pull down, Isee κατά. III. Ϊ]. 2. to draw along, drag forcihhj, (τίνα δια μίση! αγοράς, Philo in Flacc. § 20; leg. ad Gaium § 19) : τιιίΪ προς tow κριτήν, Lk. .xii. 58. (Cic. pro Mil. c. 14, 38 quom in judicium detrain non posset.) * κατα-ιτψάζω [or -σφαττω] : 1 aor. κατάσφαζα; to kill ojf [cf. κατά. III. 1], to slaughter: Lk. xix. 27. (Sept.; Hdt.. Tragg., Xen., Joseph, antt. 6, 6, 4 ; Ael. v. h. 13, 2; Hdian. 5, 5, 16 [8 ed. Bekk.].) • κατα-σ'ψρα'γίζω : pf. pass. ptcp. κατΐσφρα-γισμίνος ; to cover icilh a seal [see κατά. III. 3], to seal up, clo.'^e with a seal: /3»/3λιΌι» σφραγϊσιν, Rev. v. 1. (Job ix. 7; Sap. ii. 5 ; Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Plut., Lcian., al.) * KaT39)], and in the same sense simply κατα- φίρομαι ; cf. [L and .S. s. v. I. 2 d.] ; Steph. Thes. iv. col. 1286 [where the pass. fr. Acts is fully discussed].' κατα-ψεν-γω : 2 aor. κατίφχ/γον; [fr. Hdt. down]; to flee away, flee for refuge : foil, by ds w. ace. of place, Acts xiv. 6 ; oi καταφνγόντ^ς, we who [cf. B. § 144, 9 c] have fled from sc. the irreligious mass of mankind, foil, by an infin. of purpose, Heb. vi. 18 ; cf. Delitzsch ad loc* κατο-φθ€(ρω : pf. pass. ptcp. κατιφθαρμίνος ; 2 fut. pass. καταφθαρησομαι ; [see κατά, ΠΙ. 4] ; 1. to corrupt, deprave ; κατ^φθαρμίνοι τον νουν, corrupted in mind, 2 Tim. iii. 8. 2. to destroy ; pass, to be destroyed, to perish : foil, by tv w. dat. indicating the state, 2 Pet. ii. 12 RG. [From Aeschyl. down.] • κατα-ψιλ('ω, -ώ ; Ίαιγ{. κατ€φίλουν; 1 α,οτ. κατίφίλησα; to kiss much, kiss again and again, kiss tenderly, (Lat. d e- osculor, etc.) : τινά, Mt. xxvi. 49; Mk. xiv. 45 ; Lk. vii. 38,45; XV. 20; Acts xx. 37. (Tob. vii. 6; 3 Mace. v. 49; Xen. Cyr. 6,4, 10; 7, 5, 32; Polyb. 15, 1, 7; Joseph, antt. 7, 11, 7; Ael. v. h. 13, 4; Plut. Brut. 16; Lcian. dial, deor. 4,5; 5,3; φίΚ(Ιν and καταφίΚάν are distinguished in Xen. mem. 2, 6, 33 ; Plut. Ale.x. c. 67. Sept. for puJ prop, to join mouth to mouth.) Cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 780; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 18, note -'.* κατα-ψρον6'ω, -ώ ; iut. καταφρονήσω; 1 aor. κατ(φμύνησα; [fr. Ildt. down]; to conlinm, d(.οι haiing gone through every struggle of the fight, Eph. vi. 13 [cf. Meyer in loc] ; σημ€Ϊα, pass. 2 Co. xii. 12; of disgraceful actions, i. q. to perpetrate, Ro. i. 27; ii. 9; 1 Co. v. 3 ; 1 Pet. iv. 3. b. to work out (Lat. efficere), i. e. to do that from which something results; of man : την σωτηρίαν, make every effort to obtain salva- tion, Phil. ii. 12 ; of things : bring about, result in, Ro. iv. 15; V. 8; vii. 8; 2 Co. vii. 10 (where L Τ Tr WH e'pyaf.) ; Jas. i. 3, and RG in 20; τί τινι, Ro. vii. 13 ; 2 Co. iv. 17; vii. 11 ; ix. 11. c. Karepy. τίνα eitTt, to fashion,!, e.. render one ft for a thing: 2 Co. v. 5. (Often in Cirk. writ. fr. Soph, and Hdt. down ; several times in Sept.)• κατ-€ρχομ.αι ; 2 aor. κατή\θον, 1 pers. plur. κατηΧθαμιν (Acts xxvii. S Τ Tr WH ; on which form see άπΐρχομαι, init.) ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to come dorm, go down ; prop, of one who goes from a higher to a lower locality : foil, by eli w. ace. of place, Lk. iv. 31 ; Acts viii. 5 ; xiii. 4 ; [xix. 1 Τ Tr mrg.] ; and L Τ Tr WH in χ v. 30 ; foil, by οπό w. gen. of place, Lk. ix. 37; Acts xv. 1 ; xviii. 5; xxi. 10; foil, by από and els. Acts xi. 27; xii. 19; of those who come to a place by ship [Eustath. (ad Hom.) 140S, 29 (Od. 1, 18.Ϊ) KUTeXeeiv, ov μόνον το άπ\ώς κάτω που ΐΧθίΙν, άλλα και το es λιμένα (XOeiv, ωσττρρ κα\ καταβηναι κ. καταπ\ξΐ/σαι κ• καταχ^θηναι κ. κατάραι. τυ ίλλιμ^νίσαι Xe'-yerat ; aLso 19.56, 35 (Od. 24, 115) κατηΧθον η άντ\ τοΰ (vf\ipfvi- σθην,• ως ποΧλαχού ίρρίθη, η άντ\ του άπλω? ηΚθον ; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Homer, s. v.] : foil, by eis, Acts xviii. 22; xxi. 3 L Τ Tr WH ; xxvii. 5 ; πρόί τίνα. Acts ix. 32. Metaph. of things sent down from heaven by God : Jas. iii. 15.* κατ-ίσ-βίω, ptcp. plur. κατίσθοντΐς (jNIk. xii. 40 Tr WH ; see ίσθίω and ίσθω ; cf. Fritzsche, Hdbch. z. d. Apokry- plien, i. p. 150 [who says, 'The shorter form occurs freq. in the Sept., Lev. xix. 26 ; Sir. -xx. 15, (16),elsewh. almost e.xclusively poetic; see Bttm. Ausf. Sprachl. ii. p. 185' (cf. Veitch s. v. eVA'w)]) ; fut. καταφάγομαι ( Jn. ii. 1 7 G L Τ Tr WH ; see ΐσθίω) ; 2 aor. κατίφαγον ; Sept. for 75X ; 1. prop, to consume by eating, to eat up, de- vour : τί, of birds, Mt. xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 ; Lk. viii. 5 ; of a dragon, Rev. xii. 4 ; of a man, eating up the little book, i. e. eagerly taking its entire contents into his inmost soul, and, as we say, digesting it (borrowed fr. the fig. in Ezek. ii. 10 ; iii. 1-3, cf. Jer. xv. 16) : Rev. x. 9 sq. 2. Metaph. in various uses ; a. to devour i. e. squander, waste, substance : Lk. .xv. 30 (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Od. 3, 315; 15, 12 down; devorare patrimonium, Catull. 29, 23). b. to devour i. e. forcibly appro- priate : Tas οικίας των χηρών, widows' property, IMt. x.xiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. B. 79 (69); W. § 29, 2] ; Lk. XX. 47. c. with an ace. of the pers. ou to strip one of his goods: 2 Co. xi. 20. β. to ruin (by the infliction of injuries) : Gal. v. 15. d. of fire, to devour i. e. utterly consume, destroy : τινά, Rev. xi. 5 ; x.x. 9. e. of the consumption of the strength of body and mind by strong emotions : rti-a, Jn. ii. 1 7 (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10; Joseph, antt. 7, 8, 1).• κατ-€υβννω : 1 aor. inf. κατ(υθνναι ; 3 pers. sing. opt. καχ€νθϋναι; (see κατά, HL 2) ; Sept. mostly for ID" and p13, riin ; to make straight, guide, direct: τους ποίας (ΐς 686v dp. Lk. i. 79 ; την όδόκ προς τίνα, of the removal uf the hindrances to coming to one, 1 Th. iii. 1 1 ; τάς καρ- δίας (1 Chr. xxix. 18 ; 2 Chr. xix. 3) eif την άγάττην τοϋ θ(ού, 2 Til. iii. 5. (Plat., Aristot., Pint., al.) " KCLT-ivXayto : impf. 3 pers. sing. KoTevXayei (T WH) and κατηυ\όγ€ΐ (Tr), [cf. ίνδοκί'ω, init.]; to call down blessings on : τίκά, Mk. x. 16 Τ Tr WH. (Tob. [x. 13] ; xi. 16; Plut. amator. 4.)* κατ-ΐφ-ίστημι : to set up against ; [2 aor. act. 3 pers. plur.] κατ^πίστησαν τω ΪΙανλω, they rose up against Paul, i. e. with hostile intent, Acts xviii. 12. Found nowhere else.• κατ-ί'χω ; impf. κατιΊχον; 2 aor. subjunc. κατάσχω; impf. pass, κατιιχόμην; 1. to hold back, detain, re- tain ; a. τινά, from going away, foil, by τοϋ μή w. inf., Lk. iv. 42 [B. § 140, 16 β. ; cf. W. 604 (561)] ; rtfa πρ6ς ίμαυτόν, Philem. 13. Pass, (as often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; cf. Passow s. v. p. 1677"; [L. and S. s. v. II. 6]), of some troublesome condition or circumstance by which one is held as it were bound : νοσήματι, Jn. v. 4 [G Τ Tr WHom. the passage] ; ΐντινι, Ro. vii. 6. b. to restrain, hinder (the course or progress of) : τ. a\tf 5f lav fv αδικία, Ro. i. 1 8 ; absol. to κατίχον, that which hinders, sc. Antichrist from making his appearance (see αντίχριστος^ ; the power of the Roman empire is meant ; ό κατίχων he that hinders, checks, sc. the advent of Anti- christ, denotes the one in whom that power is lodgef. κaτηyήρovv : fut. κατηγορήσω: 1 aor. κατηγόρησα ; pres. pass, κατηγορούμαι : (κατά and αγο- ρίΰω, prop, to speak against [cf. κατά. III. 7] in court, in the assembly of the people), lo accuse ; a. before a judge: absol. [lo make accusatioix']. Acts xxiv. 2, 19; Tivas, to accuse one, Mt. xii. 10; Mk. iii. 2 ; I.k. vi. 7 Τ Trtxt.WII; xi. 54 R L Tr br. ; xxiii. 2, 10; Jn. viii. 6 ; Aot.s XXV. 5 : x.xviii. 19 ; with the addition of a gen. of the thing of which "jne is accused (as Dem. 515 fin.): Acts xxiv. 8; xxv. U, (unless it be thought preferable to regard the relative in these instances as in the gen. by attraction [so B. § 132, Iii fin.], since the com. constr. in Grk. authors is κατηγ. τι τινοΐ, cf. Matthiae § 370 Anm. 2 p. 849 sq., and § 37s p. 8.39; cf. W. § 30, 9 a.) ; TWOS Tiep'i Tivos, Acts xxiv. 13 (Thuc. 8, 85 ; Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 2) ; \v. gi'n. of pers. and ace. of the thing, Mk. xv. 3 (unless πολλά should be taken adverbially : much, celi<- mentl;/); πόσα, ib. 4 LTTrWlI (Eur. Or. 28); foil. by κατά w. gen. of pers., Lk. xxiii. 14 (Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 9 [cf. W. § 2-<, I ; p. 431 (402); B. § 132, 16]); pass. , lo be accused (as 2 Mace. x. 13 ; Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 25 ; cf. B. § 134, 4) : υπό τινοί, Mt. xxvii. 12; Acts xxii. 30 L Τ Tr ^VH for Rec. παρά (το τι κτλ. ic/ii/ [Α. V. wherefore] he was accused; unless it is to be explained, whnl accu- sation was hrouf/ht forward etc.) ; ό κατηγοροΰμινος. Acts x.xv. 16. b. of an extra-judicial aciusation (Xen. mem. 1, 3, 4) : absol. Ro. ii. 15 ; rtras, Jn. v. 45 [cf. B. 295 (254)] ; Rev. xii. 10 RG Tr; solecistically τινά. Rev. xii. 10 LTWII [cf. B. § 132, 16].• [SvN. ο ίτιοσβοι, διθι8<£λλ€ If, 6 -yxoA err. iiri It αλί ΐι/. κατηγορ(7ν . α'ιτιασβαι to accuse with primary reference to the ground of accusation (αιτία), the crime; κατηγορίΐν to accuse formally and before a tribunal, brinfr a char<;e against [κατά sugfcstive of animosity) publicly ; ίγκαΚιΐν to accuse with pubhcity (καλιΤν), but not necessarily formally or before a tribunal; ίπικα\(~ν ' to cry out upon', 9ug)ί [W. 16.ί(156); Β. § 143, 7 ; (see above)]. Cf. (jdliKrl, Dissertatio de christianae catecheseos historia (Lips. 1836) Pt. i. p. 1 sqq. ; Zezschwitz, System der christl. Katechetik (Leipz. 1863) i. p. 17 sqq.; [and for eccL usage, Suirer, Thes. ii. 69 sqq.; Soph. Lex. s. v.].* κατ tSiav, see t£ios, 2. κατ-ιόω, -ώ : pf. pass, κατϊωμαι ; (see ιός, 2) ; to rust over [cf. κατά. III. 3], cover with rust : Jas. v. 3. (Epictet. diss. 4, 6, 14; [Sir. xii. 11]•)* κατ-Ητχΰω : impf. κατίσχυαν ; fut. κατισχύσω ; 1 aor κατοικ€ω 841 χανσκ snbjunc. 2 pers. plur. κατισχΰσηη (Lk. xxi. 36 TTrtxt. AVIl) ; Sept. mostly for pin ; among Grk. writ. esp. by Polyb., Diod., Dion. Π. ; prop, to he strong to another's detriment, to prevail against ; to be superior in strength ; to overpower: foil, by an inf., Lk. xxi. 36 TTrtxt. AVH {_prevail (i. e. have full strength) to escape etc.] ; to over- come, τιι /dr (Jer. XV. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (meaning, 'not even the gates of Hades — than which nothing was supposed to be stronger — shall surpass the church in strength'); absol. to prevail (i. e. succeed, accomplish one's desire) : Lk. xxiii. 23." Kar-oiKc'id, -ώ ; 1 aor. κατωκησα ; [f r. Soph, and Hdt. down] ; Sept. times uncounted for yd', more rarely for JD'y, 1. intTan». to (Itvell, settle; a. prop. : foil, by fV w. dat. of place, I.k. xiii. 4 [TrWIIom. if]; Acts i. 20; .5 [T WII mrg. «s• (see below)] ; vii. 2, 4, 48 ; ix. 22 ; xi. 20; xiii. 27; xvii. 24 ; Ileb.xi. 9; Rev. .xiii. 12; foil, by (is (a pregnant construction ; see els, C. 2 p. 186"), Mt. ii. 23; iv. 13 ; Acts vii. 4 ; ί'πί τήί y^r. Rev. iii. 10 ; vi. 10; viii. 13; xi. 10; xiii. 8, 14 ; xiv. 6 Rec. ; xvii. 8, (Num. xiii. 33; xiv. 14; xxxv. 32, 34); inl πάν το πρόσωπον [παιη-ο! προσώπου L Τ Tr WH (cf. ί'πί, C. Ι. 1 a.)] τη! γη!, Actsxvii.26; οπού. Rev. ii. 13; so that exfi must be added mentally, Acts xxii. 1 2 ; demons taking possession of the bodies of men are said κατοικίίκ «'/eel. Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26. b. metapli., ilivine powers, influences, etc., are said KOToiKfiv fv Ttut (dat. of pers.), or tv τί] καρδία τιι/ο'γ, to dwell in his soul, to pervade, prompt, govern it : ό Bebi iv ημ'ιν, Barn. ep. 16,8; ό Χριστός, Eph. iii. 1 7 ; the Holy Spirit, Jas. iv. 5 RG (Herm. past., mand. 5, 2; [sim. 5, 5 etc. ; cf. Harnack's reff. on mand. 3, 1]) ; το πλήρωμα τη! θιότητος in Christ, Col. ii. 9, cf. i. 19 ; ή σοφία iv σώ- ματι, Sap. i. 4 ; δικαιοσύνη is said to dwell where right- eousness prevails, is practised, 2 Pet. iii. 13. 2. trans, to dwell in, inhabit : with ace. of place, Acts i. 19 ; ii.9, 14; iv. 16; ix.32, 35; xix. 10, 17; Rev. xii. 12 Rec. ; xvii. 2 ; God is said to dwell in the temple, i. e. to be always present for worshippers: Mt. xxiii. 21. [Comp. : iy- KaToiKtu).^ * [Syn. κοτοικεΓι', in the Sept. the ordinary renilerinf)^ of ^E/' /o .«'W/f, rfice//, differs from irapoiKftv, the common represen- tative of 1U to sojourn, as the permanent differs from the transitory; e. g. Gen. xxxvii. I κατωκΐί δέ ^λακωβ ^r ττ} 7?) ου τταρφκ-ησίν ό πατήρ αΰτοΰ, ivyri Χαναάν; Philodesacrif. At), et Cain. § 10 ό yap rots 4-γκυκ\Ίοΐί μ6νοι$ 4παν4χων napoiKti σοφίι, oil κατοικίΐ. Cf. Βρ. Lglitft. on Col. i. 19 and on Clem. Horn'. 1 Cor. 1.] κατ-οίκηο•ΐ5, -(ω!, ή, (κατοικίω), dwelling, abode : Mk. v. 3. (Gen. x. 30; Num. xv. 2, etc.; Thuc, Plat., Plut.) * κατ-οικητήριον, -ov, to, (κατοικίω). an abode, a habita- tion: Eph. ii. 22: Rev. xviii. 2. (.Sept.; Barn. ep. [6, 15] ; 16, 7. 8, and other eccl. writ.) ' KOT-oiKCa, -as. ή. (κατοικίω), dirilling, habitation : Acts xvii. 26. (Sept.; Polyb. 2, 32, 4: Strab., Pint., ah)* κατ-οικίζω; 1 aor. κατώκισα; fr. Ildt. down; Sept. for a'Ertn; to cause to dwell, to send or bring into an abode: to give a dwelling to : metaph. to πνημα, ο κατώκισ^ν iv ήμίν, i. e. the Spirit which he placed within us, to pervade smd prompt us (see κατοικί'ω, 1 b.), Jas. iv. 5 LTTrWIL* KaroirrpC^u : (κατοπτρον a mirror), to show in a mirror, to make to reflect, to mirror: κατοπτρίζων ό rfKios την ipiv. Plut. mor. p. 894 f. [i. e. de plac. philos. 3, 5, 11]. Mid. pres. κατστττρίζομαι ; to look at one's self in a mirror (Ar- tem. oneir. 2, 7 ; Athen. 15 p. 687 c. ; Diog. Laert. 2, 33; [7, 17]) ; to behold for one's self as in a mirror [W. 2.J4 (238); B. 103 sq. (167)] : τήκ δόξακ τοϋ κυρίου, the glory of Christ (which we behold in the gospel as in a mirror from which it is reflected), 2 Co. iii. 18. Plainlv so in Philo, alleg. leg. iii. § 33 μΐ)8ί κατοπτρισαίμην iv άλλω τ,ν'ι την σην Ιδίαν η iv σο\ τώ θ(ώ* κατόρθωμα, τοΓ, τό, (κατορθάω to make upright, erect), aright action, a successful achievement: plur. of whole- some public measures or institutions. Acts xxiv. 2 (.i) [RG; see διο'ρίωμα] ; (3 .Mace. iii. 23; Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph., Plut., Leian.). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 251 ; [Win. 25].• κάτω (fr. κατά), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. Karay- τίρω; [cf. AV. 4 72 (440)]; 1. down, downwards: Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 9 ; Jn. viii. 6, 8; Acts xx. 9. 2. below, beneath, [cf. W. u. s.] ; a. of place : iSIk. xiv. 66 ; Acts ii. 1 9 ; ίω! κάτω [Α. V. to the bottom], Mt. xxvii. 51 ; Mk. XV. 38, (Ezek. i. 27; viii. 2) ; τα κάτω, the parts or regions that lie beneath (opp. to τα άνω, heaven), i. e. the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession: άπο SieTois και κατωτίρω, from a child of two years and those that were of a lower age [cf. W. 3 70 (347)], Mt. ii. 16 ; από ίίκοσα€τονς κα\ κάτω. 1 Chr. xxvii. 23.* κατώτερο;, -ίρα, -epuv, (compar. of κάτω, see άνώτ(ρος), [Ilippocr., Theophr., Athen., al.], /o;cer: (ό Χριστοί) κα- τίβη €1? τα κατώτΐμα μίρη της γης, E[)h. iv. 9, which many understand of Christ's descent into Hades (τόκ τόπον τον κάτω KoKovpevnv. Plat. Phaedop. 1 1 2 c), takingT^ry^t as a partit. gen. (see ά&ης. 2). But the mention of this fact is at variance with the connection. Paul is endeavoring to show that the passage he has just before quoted, Ps. Lxvii. (Ixviii.) 10, must be understood of Christ, not of God, because ' an ascent into heaven ' necessarily presup- poses a descent to earth (which was made by Christ in the incarnation), whereas God does not leave his abode in heaven. Accordingly τα κατώτ. της γη! denotes the lower parts (f the universe, which the earth constitutes, — Tijf yfis being a gen. of apposition; cf. W. § 59, 8a.; Grimm. Institutio theol. dogmat. ed. 2, p. 355 Sijq.* κατωτί'ρω, see κάτω, esp. 2 b. Καΰδα. see Κλαυδτ?. καϋμιο, -ros, τό, (καίω), heat: of painful and burning heat. Rev. vii. 16; xvi. 9. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)* καυματίζω : 1 aor. inf. καυματίσαι ; 1 aor. pass, ίκανμα- τίσθην ; (καΟμα) ; to burn with heat, to scorch : τινά, with iv πυρί added. Rev. xvi. 8 ; pass., Mt. xiii. 6 ; Mk. iv. 6 ; w. ail., p">, etc., empty ; 1. prop, of places, vessels, etc., which contain nothing (Judg. vii. 16; Gen. xxxvii. 24); met- aph. empty, vain ; devoid of truth : λόγοι, Ejjh. v. 6 (Ex. v. 9) ; άπατη. Col. ii. 8 ; κήρυγμα, jrioTif , 1 Co. xv. 14. 2. of men, empty-handed ; without a gifl'- άποστε'λλειν and (ξαποστίΚλιιν τινά Kevav (Gen. xxxi. 42; Deut. xv. 13 ; xvi. 16). Mk. xii. 3 : Lk. i. 53 ; xx. lOsq. ; metaph. i/e.sii- tule of spiritual wealth, of one who boasts of his faith as a transcendent possession, yet is without the fruits of faith, Jas. ii. 20. 3. metaph. of endeavors, labors, acts, which result in nothing, vain, fruitless, without efi'ect : η χάρις, 1 Co. xv. 10; κόττοί, ib. 58 : ή εϊσοδοί, 1 Th. ii. 1 ; neut. plur. κενά, things that will not succeed. Acts iv. 25 (fr. Ps. ii. 1) ; «'s Kfvov, in fain, to no purpose, [cf. AV. 592 (551)] : 2 Co. vi. 1 ; Gal. ii. 2; Phil. ii. 16; 1 Th. iii. 5, (Is. Ixv. 23 ; Jer. vi. 29, etc. ; Diod. 19, 9 ; Heliod. 10, 30). [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.]* κενοψωνΟα, -ας, η. (κ^νόφωνος uttering emptiness), (ya- niloquium, Vulg. [ed. Clem, (in 2 Tim. ii. 16)]). empty discussion, discussion of vain and useless matters, [A. V. babbling']: 1 Tim. vi. 20 ; 2 Tim. u. 16. ([Dioscor. 1 prooem. p. 3, 1]; eccles. writ.) * Κΐνοω 344 κΐρατι,ον k€v4m, -ώ : [fut. κινώσω, 1 Co. ix. 1 5 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ; 1 aor. ΐκΐνωσα ; Pass., pf . κίκίνωμαι ; 1 aor. ΐκινώθην ; (Kfvos) ; 1. Ό empty, make emplif : tavrov ϊκίνωσι, BC. του fivai ίση β(ω or t^s μομφήί τον θ(ον, i. e. lie laid aside eiiiiality witli or the form of God (said of Cbrist), Phil. ii. 7 (see a fuller exposition of this passage in μορφή). 2. to make void i. e. deprive of force, ren- der vain, useless, of no effect: pass., Ro. iv. 14; 1 Co. i. 17. 3. to make void i. e. cause a thing to be seen to be empty, hollow, false : to καύχημα, 1 Co. ix. 15 ; pass. 2 Co. ix. 3. (Twiec in Sept. viz. Jer. xiv. 2 ; xv. 9 ; often in Attic writ.) * Kt'vrpov, -ου, TO, {καηίω to prick) ; 1. a sling, as that of bees (1 Mace. xiv. 1 i)), scorpions, locusts, Rev. ix. 10. Since animals wound by their sting and even cause death, Paul in 1 Co. xv. 5.5 (after llos. xiii. 14 Sept.) attributes to death, personified, a κίντρον, i. e. a deadly weapon, and that κίντρον is said to be ή αμαρτία [56], be- cause sin is death's cause and punishment [?] (Ro. v. 12). 2. as in the Grk. writ, an iron goad, for urg- ing on oxen, horses and other beasts of burden ; hence the proverb προί κίντρα λακτίζαν. Ιο kick against the goad, i. e. to oiler vain and perilous or ruinous resist- ance : Acts ix. 5 Rec. ; xxvi. 14 ; cf. Find. Pyth. 2, 1 73 ; Aeschyl. [Ag. 1C24, cf.] Prom. 323 ; Eurip. Bacch. 795 ; Tei-enl. Phorm. 1, 2, 28; Ammian. 18, 5.* Κ€ντυρ6ων, -(ukos, o, a Lat. word, a centurion : Mk. xv. V.\ 44 sq. [Polyb. 6, 24, 5.]» [Ktvxpiat, sec Key;^pfai.] Κίνώ;, adv., raiidij, in rain, [W. 4Π.", (431); Aristot. on] ; Jas. iv. 5.* κφα(α [WII κ(ρία (see their .\])]i. p. 151)], -05, ή. (ice'/j(is), a Utile horn ; extremil;/, (i/icr, point; used by the Grk. grammarians of the accents and diacriti<^■d ])oints. In Mt. v. 18 [(where see Wetstein ; cf. also Edcrshi im, Jesus the Messiah, i. 537 srj.)]; Lk. xvi. 17 of the little lines, or projections, by which the Ilebr. letters in other respects similar differ from each other, as π and Π, Τ and i, 3 and 3. [A.V. iiVi/e]; the meaning is. 'not even the mi- nutest part of the law shall ()erish.' [i .\cschyl.,Thuc.,al.)]' Kcpa|j.Evs, -ί'ωί, ό, {κ(ράννυμί), a poller : ^It. xxvii. 7, 1 ; Ro. ix. 21. (Horn., lies., .Vrstph., Plat., Plut., al. ; Sept. several times for "^ϊΐ".) ' Kepap.iKOs, -ή, -6v, {κίραμος) : 1. in class. Grk. of or h/ldiiging to a potter: hence κ. yij, such as a potter uses, llippoer. ; τ<χνη. Plat, polit. p. 288 a. 2. in the Hible made of dag, earthen : Rev. ii. 27 (Dan. ii. 41), for which the (j reeks use κιραμιοΐΐ!, -ά, -oiv, and Kfpapiot [al. -/ifioi], cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 147; [W. 99 (94)].* κ(ράμιον, -ου, TO, (neut. of the adj. Kcpapwt, see the preceding word [al. make it a dimin. fr. κέραμος]), an earthen vessel, a pot, jar; a jug or jdtclter : with ίδατοΓ added, a Λvater-piteheΓ, Mk. xiv. 13; Lk. xxii. 10. (The- ophr. cans, plant. 3, 4, 3 ; οϊνηυ, Jer. ,χΐϋ. (xxxv.) 5 ; Xen. anab. 6, 1, 15 ; Dem. p. 934, 26 ; Polyb. 4, 56, 3; «λαι'ου, .Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 2.)* Kt'papios, -ου. ό. (κ(ράννυμι) ; 1. clay, potter's earth. 2. ani/lhing made of rlag, earthen ware. 3. spec. α (roofing) tile (Thuc, Athen., Ildian., al.) ; the roo/ itself ( Arstph. f r. 1 29 d.) : so δ»ά των κιράμων, through the roof, i. e. through the tloor in the roof to which a ladder or stairway led up from the street (accordingly the Rabbins distinguish two ways of entering a house, ' the way through the door ' and ' the way through the roof [Lghtft. Ilorae Ilebr. p. 601]; cf. Win. RWR. s. v. Dach; Keim ii. p. 176 S(j. [Eng. trans, iii. 215; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 501 sq. ; Jewish Social Life, p. 93 S(i<].]), Lk. V. 19. Mark (ii. 4) describes the occurrence differently (see άποστί-γύζω), evidently led into error by misap]ire- hending the words of Luke. [Hut, to say nothing of the imi)robability of assuming Mark's narrative to be de- pendent on Luke's, the alleged discrepance disappears if Luke's language is taken literally, "through the tiles" (see διό. A. I. 1); he says nothing of " the door in the roof." On the various views that have been taken of the details of the occurrence, see Ii. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. House; Dr. Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. 1. c] • Κ€ράννυμ.ι {κ( ραννύω) : 1 aor. €κ€ρασα ; pf. pass, κΐκίρα- σμαι (lor I lie more com. κίκραμαι, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 582; Hum. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 211; Kriigcr § 40 s. v. i. p. 175; [Veitch s. v.]); [fr. Iloin. down]; 1. to mix, mingle. 2. to mix rvine and water. 3. to pour out for drinking : τινίτι, Rev. xviii. 6 [R.V. mingle]; pass.. Rev. xiv. 10; (so Bel and the Dragon 11 ; Anthol. 11, 137, 12). [COMP. : σιτ/-<( μάιη^υμι.']* [Syn. κΐράνννμι, μί•γνυμι : iu strict Usage κ€ρ. denotes such a mixing as coniliiues the ingredients into a new compound, chemical mixture; /i!7i/. such a mixing as merely blends or intermingles them promiscuously, mechanical mixture.] K£'pas, -ατοί, phir. κίρατα, gen. -άτων {W. 65 (63) ; B. 15(13)), TO, [fr. Horn, down], Ilebr. ρ|5, a horn; a. prop.: of animals. Rev. V. 6; xii. 3; xiii. 1,11; xvii. 3, 7, 12, 16. b. Since animals (esp. bulls) defend them- selves with their horns, the horn with the Hebrews (and other nations) is a symbol of strength and courage, and is used as such in a variety of phrases (Ps. IxxxviiL (Ixxxix.) 18; cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 17; cxlviii. 14; 1 S. ii. 10; Sir. xlvii. 5, 7, 11 ; 1 Mace. ii. 48, etc. ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1238; [B. D. s. v. Horn]); hence Kepat σωτηρίας (of God, Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 3 ; 2 S. xxii. 3), i. (j. a mighlii and valiant helper, the author of deliverance, of the Messiah, Lk. i. 69. c. trop. a projecting extremity in shape like a horn, a point, apex : as, of an altar. Rev. ix. 13; (Ex. xxix. 12; Lev. iv. 7, 18; xvi. 18; Am. iii. 14: Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 27)." Kcpanov, -ου, τό, (dimin. of κίραί) ; 1. a little horn. 2. the name of the fruit of the Kcparka or Ktparda [or -τία], the Ceralonia siliijua (Linn.) or carott- tree (called also St. John's Bread, [from the notion tiiat its pods, which resemble those of the 'locust', constitut^d the food of the Baptist]). This fruit is shaped like a horn and has a sweet taste ; it was [and is] used not only in fattening swine, but as an article of food by the lower classes: Lk.xv. 16 [A. V. husks]; cf. Win. RWB. s. V. Johannisbrodbaum; [B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) s. v. Husks].• κερΒαίνω 345 ιή]νσ(κ KcpSatvw: [fut. «ρδήσω, Jas. iv. 13 Rec.•"'"'" LTTr Wll; see also below j ; 1 aor. € : 1 aor. (κίφαλαίωσα [Τ WH ϊκίφάλίύχτα (see below)] ; («φάλαιοι/); 1. Ιο bring under heads, to sum up, to summarize, (Thuc, Aristot., al.). 2. in an unusual sense, to smite or wound in the head : Mk. xii. 4. It is of no use to appeal to the analogy of the verb γναθόω, which means eir yvaeovs τίτττω to smite on the cheek, since κfφά\aίov is nowhere used of the head of the body. Tdf. [WH] (after codd. X Β L) have adopted ίκίφάΚίωσαν (fr. κίφάλιον, i. q. κεφάλι';, q. v.). But nei- ther κβφαλιο'ω nor κίφάλίζω has yet been noted in any Greek author. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 95. [CoMP. : άνα-κ^φάλαίόω.Ί * κεφαλή, -rjs, ή, Sept. for lysi ; the head, both of men: Mt. V. 36 ; Mk. vi. 24 ; Lk. vii. 38, 44 [Rec], 46 ; Jn. xiii. 9 ; Acts xviii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 4 ; Rev. i. 14 ; iv. 4, and often ; and of animals: Rev. ix. 7, 17, 19, etc.; on the phrases κλίναν την κ., tnaipciv την κ., see κλίνω. 1 and ΐπαίρω ; on the saying in Ro. xii. 20, see under άνθραξ. Since the loss of the head destroys the life, κιφάΚή is used in phrases relating to capital and extreme punishments: so in TO αίμα υμών cTrt την κ• ίιμων (see αίμα, 2 a. p. IS**), Acts xviii. 6, and similar jihrases in class. Grk.; see Passow s. V. p. 1717•; Pape s. v. 3 ; [L. and S. s. v. L 3 and 4]. Metaph. anything supreme, chief, prominent ; of persons, master, lord: tii/os, of a husband in relation to his wife, 1 Co. xi. 3 ; Eph. v. 23 ; of Christ, the lord of the husband, 1 Co. xi. 3 [cf. B. 124.sq. (109)] ; of the church, Eph. iv. 15; v. 23; Col. ii. 19 [cf. B. § 143, 4 c.]; του σώματοΐ της {κκ\. Col. i. 18; πάσ'η! αρχής και ^ζονσίας. Col. ii. 10 ; so Judg. .xi. 11 ; 2 8. xxii. 44, and in Byzant. writ. of tilings: κ€φ. γωνίας, the corner-stone, see y- vla, a. [(From Horn, down.)]* κεφαλιόω : iMk. xii. 4 Τ WH (approved also by Weiss, Volkmar, al.), for κεφαλαιόω, q. v. κίφαλίϊ, -I'Sof, ή, (dimin. of κιφαλή, formed after the analogy of άμαξίς, πινακίς, etc. ; cf. Bitin. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 443 ; Kuhner § 330 Anm. 5, i. p. 708) ; 1. a little head (Lat. capitellum, capitulum). 2. the highest part, extremity or end of anything ; as the capital of a column, 1 K. vii. 9, 31 etc.; Geop. 14. 6, 6 ; hence the tips or knobs (the umbilici of the Romans [or rather the cornua ; see Gardlhausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 52 sq. ; Rich, Diet, s. V. umbilicus]) of the wooden rod around which parch- ments were rolled seem to have been called κ(φαί\ί8(ς, be- cause they resembled little heads ; so that 3. the Alexand. writ, transferred the name κίφαΧΐς to the roll or volume itself: ev κεφαλι'δι βιβλίου, Heb. .χ. 7 (fr. Sept. of Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 8 for ISD-nSjpa, as in Ezek. ii. 9, and without βιβλίου, iii. 1-3 ; 2 Esdr. vi. 2 [cf. Birt, An- tikes Buchwesen, (Berl. 1882), p. 116]), Itala: in votu- mine libri, in the roll of the book [cf. W. 23 (22)]. The different ojjinions are noticed bj' Bleek ad loc.* κημόαι, -ώ : fut. κημώσω ; (κημός a muzzle) ; to stop the mouth by a muzzle, to muzzle : βοϋν, 1 Co. ix. 9 Τ Tr WHmrg. (Xen. r. eq. 5, 3) ; see φιμόω.* κήνσοΐ, -o«, ό, the Lat. word census (among the Ro- κητΓος 346 κιβωτός mans, denoting a register and valuation of property in accordance with which taxes ivere paid), in tlic X. T. (as in Cod. Just. 4, 47) Ihe tax or tribute lecied on ind'wiiluals and to be paid yearly (Ilesych. κηνσοί• ahot νομίσματα!, (πικ(φά\αίον, our capitation or poll lax) : Mt. xvii. 25 ; .\.\ii. 17; Mk. .\ii. 14; το νόμισμα τοΟ κήνσου, tlie coin with wliifh tlie tax is paid, tribute money. .\lt. xxii. 19.* κήιτ•05. -ov, 6, [thouglit to be allied with σκάτττω, Lat. cayupus, etc.], fr. Horn, down, Sept. for njj, 7Mi, ]J ; a garden: Lk. xiii. 19; Jn. xviii. 1, 26; xLx. 41. [BB. DD. s. V. Garden.]* κηπ -ovpos, -oO, 6, (κηπο! and ovpos), a keeper of a gar- den, a gardener : Jn. xx. 15 [BB. DD. s. v. Garden]. (Plat., Theophr., Polyb., Diod., Epictet., al.) * κηρίον, -ου, τά, (κημόί wax), fr. lies, and Ildt. down, honeycomb : κηρίον μίΧίσσιον, a honeycomb (still contain- inn- the honey), l.k. xxiv. 42 RG Trbr. (1 S. xiv. 27; Prov. xvi. 24; xxiv. 13).* κήρυγμα, -τογ,το, (κηρύσσω), \n Grk. writ.esp. Attic, ίλπί which (i promulgated by a herald or public crier, a procla- mation by herald ; in the N. T. the message or proclama- tion by the heralds of God or Christ: thus the proc- lamation of the necessity of repentance and reformation made by the prophet Jonah [A. V. preaching'], to κήρυγμα Ίωνά. Mt. xii. 41 ; Lk. xi. 32, (Jon. iii. 4) ; the announce- ment of salvation procured by Christ and to be had through him : absol., 1 Co. i. 21 ; Tit. i. 3 ; w. gen. of the subj., made by one, 1 Co. ii. 4 ; xv. 14 ; w. gen. of the obj. Ίησοϋ Χρίστου, concerning Jesus Christ, Ro. xvi. 25, cf. Philippi ad loc. ; [ttjs αΙωνίου σωτηρία!, JMk. xvi. Wll in (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion '] ; the act of pubUsh- ing, absol. 2 Tim. iv. 1 7 [but R. Λ'^. that the message might be fully proclaimed ; see πληροφορίω, a.].* κήρνξ, less correctly [yet so L WII] κήρυξ (on the ac- cent see W. § 6, 1 c. ; [B. 13 (12)]; Li/>sius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 36 ; [Chandler § 622 ; Gbttling p. 254 scj. ; Lob. Paralip. p. 411 ; W. Dindorf in Sleph. Thes. s. v.; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101]), -υκο!, ό, (akin to γηρυ! a voice, a sound, γηρύω to utter a sound, to speak ; [yet cf. Vanicek p. 140]) ; com. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; a herald, a messenger vested with public authority, who conveyed the official messages of kings, magistrates, princes, military commanders, or who gave a public summons or demand, and performed various other duties. In the O. T., Gen. xli. 43 ; Dan. iii. 4 ; Sir. xx. 15. In the N. T. God's am- bnssailor, and Ihe herald or proclaimer of the divine word : Βικαιοσϋνη!, one who summoned to righteousness, of Noah, 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; used of the apostles, as the divine messen- gers of the salvation procured by Christ and to be em- braced through him, 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11.* κηρΐσ-σ-ω; impf. (κήρυσσον : fut. κηρύξω: 1 aor. €Κψ ρυξα. [inf. κηρύξαι R G Tr WII, κηρΰξαι L Τ ; cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 32 sqq. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101 ; W. § 6, 1 f. (see reif. s. v. κήρυξ)] : Pass., pres. κηρύσσομαι ; \ a.oT. (κηρύ-)^θην\ I fut. κηρυχθησομαι; (κήρυξ, <\. v.); fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for Kip ; to be a herald ; to officiate as herald ; to proclaim after the manner of a herald ; always with a suggestion of formality, gravity, and an authority which must be listened to and obeyed ; a. univ. to publish, proclaim openly : something which has been done, Mk. vii. 36 ; τον Xayov, Mk. i. 45 (here joined with &ιαφημίζ(ΐν) ; foil, by indir. disc, Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39; something which ought to be done, foil, by the inf. (cf. W. 322 (302) ; [B. § 141, 2]), Ro. ii. 21 ; νΐωύσήν. the authority and precepts of Moses, Acts xv. 21 ; πιρίτομήν, the necessity of circumcision, Gal. v. 11. b. spec, used of the jiublic proclamation of the gospel and mat- ters pertaining to it, made by .John the Baptist, by Jesus, by the apostles and other Christian teachers : absol., Alt. xi. 1; Mk. i. 38; iii. 14; xvi. 20; Ro. x. 15; w. dat, of the pers. to whom the proclamation is made, 1 Co. ix. 27 ; 1 Pet. iii. 19 ; fit [R «V w. dat.] τα! συνα-γωγάί (see els, A. I. 5 b.; cf.W. 213(200)), Mk.i. 39; [Ll<. iv. 44 TTr txt. WII] ; (0) (ο^ρισσων, Ro. X. 14 ; κτ/ρΰσσΗκ w. ace. of the thing, Mt. x. 27 ; Lk. [iv. 19] ; xii. 3 ; τινίτι, Lk. iv. 18(19); TO eiayyi'Xioi/rijs/SuaiX., Mt. iv. 23 ; ix.35; Alk. i. 14 (where G L br. Τ Tr WII το ti. τοΟ θ(θϋ) ; το dayy. simply, Mk. .xvi. 15; Gal. ii. 2; τό eiayy. του 6eoi eh Tiva! (see above), 1 Th. ii. 9 ; pass., Mt. xxiv. 14 ; xxvi. 1 3 ; Col. i. 23 ; with els πάντα τα ίθνη or els SKov τ. κόσμον added, Mk. xiii. 10 ; xiv. 9 ; τον λογοι-, 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; to ρήμα τη! ^τίστeωs, Ro. -x. 8 ; την βασιΧ. Toij Beoi, Lk. viii. 1 ; ix. 2 ; Acts xx. 25 [here G L Τ Tr WII om. τοίϊ Beoi] ; xxviii. 31 ; βάπτισμα, the necessity of baptism, Mk. i. 4 ; Lk. iii. 3 ; Acts x. 37 ; μeτάvotav και αφΐσιν αμαρτιών, by public proclamation to exhort to rejientance ami promise the pardon of sins, Lk. xxiv. 47; Iva μ^τανοώσιν [RG μeτavoήσωσι] (see tfaJL 2 b.; [B. 237 (204)]), Jlk. vi. 12. τινά τισι, to proclaim to persons one whom they are to become acquainted with in order to learn what they ought to do : Χριστόν. or το^Ίι/σοίν, -Acts viii. 5 ; xix. 13; Phil, i. 15 ; 1 Co. i. 23 ; 2 Co. iv. 5 (where it is opp. to ίαυτον κηρ. to proclaim one's own excellence and authority) ; 2 Co. xi. 4; pass., ό κηρυχθίΐ!, 1 Tim. iii. 16; with διά and gen. of pers. added, 2 Co. i. 1 9 ; with the epexegetic addi- tion, ότι oiiTos e'oTiv ό υίοΓ τ. Seoi, Acts ix. 20 ; ότι ίκ veKpSiv ey^yepTai, 1 Co. xv. 12 ; τινί foU. by ότι. Acts x. 42 ; κηρ. foil, by λίγων ivith direct disc, Mt. [iii. 1 L Τ WH] ; x. 7 ; Mk. i. 7 ; κηρϋσσeιv κ. Xeyeiv foil, by direct disc, Mt. iii. 1 [RGTrbr.]; iv. 17; κ?;/), f'v (omitted in Rec.) φω»^ μ(γάΚη, foil, by direct disc, (of an angel as God's herald ), Rev. V. 2 ; κηρ. with οίτωΓ added, 1 Co. xv. 1 1 . On this word see Zezschwilz, Petri apost. de Christi ad inferos descensu sententia. (Lips. 1857) p. 31 sqq.; [Campbell, Dissert, on the Gospels, diss. vi. pt. v. CoMP. : προ- κηρύσσω.] * κήτοϊ, -for (-ουϊ), τό, a sea-monster, whale, huge f.fh, (Horn., Aristot., al.) : Mt. xii. 40, fr. Jon. ii. 1 where Sept. it^Tf ι μ(γα\ω for Snj y\.* Κηφΰβ. -5 [Β. 20 (18)], <5, (Chald. K3'3 a rock), Cephas (i. (|. ITfVpof [cf. B.D. (.\m. ed.) p. 2459]), the surname of Simon the apostle : .Jn. i. 42 (43) ; 1 Co. i. 12 ; iii. 22 ; ix. 5 ; XV. 5 ; Gal. ii. 9 ; and L Τ Tr WH also in Gal. i. 18; ii. 11, 14.* κιβωτή$, -οϋ. ή, (κίβο! [cf. Siiidas 2094 c]), a wooden chest, box, ([Hecatae. 368 (Miiller's Frag. i. p. 30), Si- κιθάρα 347 Κλαι/δτ) mon.], Arstph., Lysias, Athen., Ael., al.) : in the N. T., the ark of the covenant, in the temple at Jerusalem, Heb. ix. 4 (Philo, Joseph.; Sept. very often for J1"'K) ; in the heavenly temple, Rev. xi. 19 ; of Xoah's vessel, built in the form of an ark, Mt. xxiv. 38 ; Lk. xvii. 27 ; Heb. xi. 7 ; : Pet. iii. 20, (4 Mace. xv. 31 ; Sept. for Π^Π).* κιθάρα, -as, η, a harp [cf. Stainer, Music of the Bible, eh. iv. ; B.D. s. v. Harp]: 1 Co. xiv. 7; Rev. v. 8; xiv. 2; ToC Beoii, to which the praises of God are sung in heaven, Rev. XV. 2; cf. W. § 36, 3 b. [From Horn. h. Merc, Hdt. on.] * κιθαρίζω ; pres. pass. ptcp. κίθαριζόμ(ΐιος ; ίο play upon the harp [(see the preceding word)] : with iv rals κίθάραις added, [Α.Λ'. harping with their harps], Rev. xiv. 2 ; το κιθαριζόμ^νον, what is harped, 1 Co. xiv. 7. (Is. xxiii. 16 ; in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. Π. 18, 570 down.) * κιθαρ-ω$όΐ. -oO, o, {κιθάρα [q. v.], and ώδόί, contr. fr. άοιέύί, a singer), a harper, one u-ho plays on the harp and accompanies it with his voice : Rev. xiv. 2 ; xviii. 22. ([Hdt., Plat., al.], Diphil. in Athen. 6 p. 247 d.; Plut. mor. 166 a. ; Ael. v. h. 4, 2 ; superl. (extended form) KidapaoiSOTaTos, Arstph. vesp. 12 78. Varro de r. r. 2, 1, 3 " non omne«, qui habent citharam, sunt citharoedi.") * Κιλικία, -as, ij, C'iUcia, a province of Asia Minor, bound- ed on the X. by Cappadocia, Lycaonia and Isauria, on the S. by the Jlediterranean, on the E. by Syria, and on the W. by Pamphylia. Its capital, Tarsus, was the birth- place of Paul : Acts vi. 9 ; xv. 23, 41 ; xxi. 39 ; -xxii. 3 ; xxiii. 34 ; xxvii. 5; Gal. i. 21. [Cf. Conyheare and How- son, St. Paid, i. 19 sqq. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 78 sq.]* κινάμωμον, more correctly [so L Τ Tr WH] κιννάρωμον, -ου, TO, Hebr. J1"3;p. [(see L. and S. s. v.)], cinnamon : Rev. xviii. 13. (Hdt., Theophr., Strab., Diod., Joseph., al.; Sept.) Cf. ΤΠη. RWB. s. v. Zimmt; [B.D. s. v. Cin- namon ; Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Kinnamon].* κιν&υν€χίω ; impf. ΐκιν^ννςνον ; (κίΊ/δυΐΌ5) ; to he in jeop- ardy, to be in danger, to be put in peril : Lk. viii. 23 ; 1 Co. XV. 30 ; TovTo to pjpos KivSvvfvft tls άπ(\(γμ6ν ίΚθύν, this trade is in danger of coming into disrepute. Acts xix. 27 ; κιι/δ. (γκαλί'ισ-θαι, we are in danger of being accused, ib. 40. (From [Pind.] and Hdt. down; Sept.)* κίνδυνοι, -ου, ό, danger, peril : Ro. viii. 35 ; ίκ nvos, prepared by one, Ifrom one], 2 Co. xi. 26 ; ibid, with a gen. of the source from which the peril comes, [o/", cf. ' W. § 30, 2 a.] ; so Tijs θαλάσσης. Plat. Euthyd. p. 279 e. ; de rep. i. p. 332 e. ; θαλασσών, Heliod. 2. 4, 65.* κινί'ω, -ω ; fut. κινήσω : 1 aor. inf. κινησαι ; Pass., pres. κινούμαι ; 1 aor. (κινήθην; (fr. κίω, poetic for IQ, ίίμι, Curtius § 57 ; hence) 1. prop, to cause to go, i. e. to move, set in motion, [fr. Hom. down] ; a. prop, in pass. [cf. W. 252 (23 7)] to be moved, move : of that motion which is evidence of life. Acts .xvii. 28 (Gen. vii. 21); Kive'iv SaKTvXcu φορτία, to move burdens with a finger, Mt. .xxiii. 4 : την κ(φαλήν, to move to and fro [A.V. wagl, (expres- sive of derision), Mt. xxvii. 39 ; ^Ik. xv. 29, (Sept. for ύ»Ί iViD) Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 8; Job xvi. 4 ; Sir. xii. 18, etc.) ; b. tn more from a place, to remove : τί eV τοΟ τότΓου, Rev. ii. 5 ; eV τών τόπων, pass., Rev. vi. 14. 2. Metaph. to move i. e. excite : στάσιν, a riot, disturbance, Acts xxiv. 5 ([see στάσΐΓ, 2]; ταραχήν, Joseph, b.j. 2, 9, 4) ; τηνπόλιν, to throw into commotion, pass., Acts xxi. 30. [CoMP. ; ^fTo-, avy-Kivtiu.'\ * κίνησ -is, -(ως, ή, (κινίω), [fr. Plato on], α moving, agita- tion : τον ίδατοΓ, Jn. v. 3 [R L].* Kls (LTTrWII Keis [cf. WH. App. p. 155; Tdf. Proleg. p. 84; B. 6 note', and see ti, t]), a, indecl., (U'p [perh. 'a bow' (Gesen.)] fr. ϊΤίρ to lay snares), Kish, the father of Saul, the first king of Israel : Acts xiiL 21.* κίχρημι : 1 aor. act. impv. χρησον ; to lend : rwi τι, Lk. xi. 5. (From Hdt. down.) [Syn. see δαν(ίζω, fin.]* kXoSos, -oi;, 0, (κλάω) ; a. prop, a young, tender shoot, broken ο if' for grafting. b. univ. α branch : Mt. .xiii. 32; xxi. 8 ; .x.xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 32 ; xiii. 28 ; Lk. xiii. 19 ; as the .Jewish patriarchs are likened to a root, so their posterity are likened to branches, Ro. xi. 16-19, 21; cf. Sir. xxiii. 25 ; xl. 15; Menand. frag. ed. Meineke p. 247 [frag. 182, vol. iv. 274 (Ber. 1841)]. (Tragg., Arstph., Theophr., Geop., al.) * κλαίω; impf . Εκλοίοι/ ; fut. κληΰο-ω (Lk. vi. 25; Jn. xvi. 20 ; and Tr WHtxt. in Rev. xviii. 9, for κΚανσομαι, more com. in Grk. writ., esp. the earlier, and foimd in Lev. x. 6 ; Joel ii. 1 7, and ace. to most edd. in Rev. xviii. 9 ; cf. Kruger § 40 s. v., i. p. 1 75 sq. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. p. 847 ; [\"eitch s. v.] ; B. 60 (53) ; [W. 87 (83)]) ; 1 aor. ΐκΚανσα ; Sept. freq. for Π33 ; [from Hom. down] ; to mourn, weep, lament; a. intrans. : Mk. xiv. 72; xvi. 10; Lk. vii. 13,38; Jn. xi. 31, 33; xx. 11, 13,15; Acts ix. 39; xxi. 13; Rev. [v. 5] ; xviii. 15, 19; πολλά, for which L Τ Tr WH πολύ. Rev. v. 4 ; πικρώς, Mt. xxvi. 75 ; Lk. x.xii. 62 ; weeping as the sign of pain and grief for the thing signified (i. e. for pain and grief), Lk. vi. 21, 25, (opp. to yiXai/) ; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. xii. 15, (opp. to Xaipfiv) ; Phil. iii. 18 ; 1 Co. vii. 30 ; Jas. iv. 9 ; v. 1 ; of those who mourn the dead : Mk. v. 38 sq. ; Lk. τϋ. 32 : viii. 52 ; iVt τινι, over any one, Lk. xi.\. 41 R G (Sir. .vxii. 11) ; also joined with πινθίΊν, Rev. xviii. 11 R G L; κλ. im Tiva, Lk. xLx. 41 L Τ Tr λΥΗ ; xxiii. 28 ; joined with κόπτίσθαι foU. by tVi τίνα, Rev. xviii. 9 Τ Tr AVH. b. trans, τιρά, to iveep for, mourn for, betcail, one [cf. B. § 131, 4; W. 32, ly.] : Mt. ii. 18, and Rec. in Rev. xviii. 9.* [Stn. ίακρύω. κλαίω, οίύρομαι, βρην4ω, άλολό(,Ί» (όλολύί,'α)), στ (νάζω: strictly, δ. denotes to shed tears, weep silently ; κλ. to weep audibly, to cri/ as a child ; όδ. to give verba 1 expression to grief, to lament ; θρ. to give formal expression to grief, to sing a dirge ; άλ. ti_> irtul in oriental style, to howl in a consecrated, semi-Uturgical fasliion ; στ(ν. to express grief by inarticulate or semi-articulate sounds, to groan. Cf. Schmidt chh. 26, 126.] κλάσ-ιβ, -€ως, ή, (κλάω, q. v.), a breaking : τον άρτου, Lk. xxiv. 35 ; Acts ii. 42. (Plat., Theophr., al.) * κλάα-μα, -ros, to, (κλάω), β fragment, broken piece: plur., of remnants of food, Mt. xiv. 20 ; xv. 37 ; Mk. vi. 43; viii. 8, 19 sq.; Lk.ix.l7; Jn.vi.l2sq. (Xen. e_i,-n. 10,5; Diod. 17, 13: Plut. Tib. Gr. 19; Anthol.; Sept.)• ΚλαΐΒη (LTrWH ΚαΟδα [see WH. App. p. 160], Τ Κλανδπ). -ης. ή. Clauda or Cauda the name of a small island lying near Crete on the south, called by Ptolem. ΚΧαυΒία 348 κΧηρονομέο) 3, 1 7, 1 1 KXaC8ot, by Pomp. Mela 2, 7 and Plin. h. n. 4, 20 (12), 61 Oaudo.i, [(now (lauilo-nesi or Clauda-nesay] : Acts xxvii. 16.• Κλαυ8(α, -at, η, Claudia, a Christian woman : 2 Tim. iv.21. [Cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.) 8. v., also re£f. s. v. IIoi^Stjs.] * KXavSios, -ου, 6, Claudius. 1. Tiberiiis Claudius Drufu^ Xuro Germanicus, the Roman emperor, who came into power A. D. 41, and was poisoned by his wife A^rippina in the year 51 : Act.s .\i. 28; xviii. 2. 2. CIdiidiux Li/sias, a Roman military tribune : Acts xxiii. 20 [sec B. U. Am. ed. s. v. Lysias].* κλανθμόΐ, -oC, 0, (κλαίω) ; f Γ. Horn, down ; Sept. for 03 ; u-eepirir/, Imnentalion : Mt. ii. 18; [viii. 12]; xiii. 42, 00; x.xii. 13 ; x.\iv. 51 ; xxv. 30; Lk. xiii. 28; Acts xx. 37.* κλάω; 1 aor. ϊκΧασα; Pass., [pres. ptcp. κλώμ(ΐΌ{, 1 Co. xi. 24 RG (see beloiv)]; 1 aor. ίκ\άσθην (Ro. xi. 20 h Tr); [fr. Horn, down] ; Inbreak: used in the N.T. of the breaking of bread (see ootos, 1), Mt. xiv. 19; xv. 36; xxvi. 26; Mk. viii. 6 ; xiv. 22 ; Lk. xxii. 19; [xxiv. 30]; Acts ii. 46 ; xx. 7, 11 ; xxvii. 35 ; 1 Co. x. 16; xi. 24 ; with els Tivar added, a pregnant constr., equiv. to ' to break and distribute among ' etc. (see fir, C. 1), Jlk. viii. 19; metaph. to σώμα, shattered, as it were, by a violent death, 1 Co. xi. 24 R G. [Comp. : «-, κατα-κλάω.] * κλ((ΐ, -hot, ace. κλίίδα and κΚύυ (l.k. xi. 52; Rev. iii. 7), aec. plur. xXfiSiir and k\(Is (Mt. xvi. 19 ; Rev. i. 18 ; cf. Kuhner § 130, i. p. 357 ; W. 65 (63), cf. B. 24 (22); [ΤΓ//. App. p. 157]), ή, [fr. Horn, down]; a ken. Since the keeper of the kejs has the power to open and to shut, the word icXfir is fig. used in tlie N. T. to denote power and authority of various kinds [cf. B. D. s. v. Key], viz. ToO φρίατος, to open or unlock the pit. Rev. ix. 1, cf. 2; Trjs αβύσσου, to sliut. Rev. xx. 1, cf. 3; τοϋ θανά- του κάί τοΰ α8ον, the power to bring back into life from Hades and to leave tliere, Rev. i. 18; τής ■yi/aaiwf, the ability and opportunity to obtain knowledge, Lk. xi. 52; T^s βασι\(ία! των οίρανων (see βιισϊΚίία, 3 e. p. 9 7' sub fin.), Mt. xvi. 19; τοΰ Δαυίδ, the power of David (who is a type of the Messiah, the second David), i. e. of re- ceiving into the Messiah's kingdom and of excluding from it. Rev. iii. 7 (apparently after Is. xxii. 22, where ή k\- ο'κου Δαυίδ is given to the steward of the royal palace)." κλίίω; fut. κ\(1σω. Rev. iii. 7 LTTrWH; I aor. ίκ\€ΐσα ; Pass., pf. κίκΚιισμαι, ptcp. κ(κλfισμfvos ; 1 aor. ί'κλίίσθην; llcbr. 1J0: [fr. Iloin. down] ; ίο shut, s/iul up; prop.: την θνμαν, Mt. vi. 6 ; pass., Mt. xxv. 10; Lk. xi. 7; plur., Jn. XX. 19, 20; Actsxxi. 30; a prison, pass. Acts v. 23 ; πυλώι/αί, pass. Rev. xxi. 25 ; την άβυσσον, Rev. XX. 3 G L Τ Tr WIL metaph. : τον οΐρανόν. i. e. to cause the heavens to withhold rain, Lk. iv. 25 ; Rev. xi. ; τά a-n\ay\va ainov από tivos, to shut up compassion so that it is like a thing inaccessible to one, to be devoid of pity towards one [AV. § 60, 2 d., cf. B. 322 (277)], 1 .In. iii. 17; την βασιΧ. τώμ ουρανών, to obstruct the entrance into the kingdom of heaven, Mt. x.xiii. 13 (14) ; so used that την βασ• τοϋ θίοϊι must be understood, Rev. iii. 7 ; r. θύραν, sc. TTjs βασ. τ. Beoi, ibid. 8 ; cf. Bleek ad loo. [Co.MP. : άπο-, (Κ-, κατά-, σνγ-κλίίω.] ' κλ€'μ)ΐ,α, -rof, τό, (κΚίπτω); a. thing stolen [.\ri»- tot.]. b. i.ti. κλοπή the/l, i.e. the act committed IKur., Arstph., al.] : plur. Rev. ix. 21.* KXcoiras [on tlie decl. cf. B. 20 (18)], (apparently contr. fr. ΚλίάτΓοτροϊ, see Άντίπας [cf. Letronne in tlie ReMie Archeolugiciue, 1844-45, i. p. 485 stiq.]), ό, Cleojxis, one of Christ's disciples: Lk. xxiv. 18. [Cf. Bp. Li//i'fl. Com. on Gal. p. 267 ; B. U. s. v.] * kXc'os, -out, TO. (κλί'ω equiv. to καλ/ω) ; 1. rumor, rejtnrt. 2. i/lory, praise: 1 I'et. ii. 20. (In both senses com. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; for ^'O'd, Job xxviii. 22.) • κλί'ΐΓτηϊ, -ου, ό. (κλ/πτω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 33J, a thinf: Mt. vi.I9 sq. ; xxiv. 4.i; Lk. xii. 33, 39; .In. x. 1,10; 1 Co. vi. 10 ; 1 I'et. iv. 15 ; an embezzler, jiilferer, Jn. xii. 6 ; Ζρχίσθαι or ηκ^ιν ώ; κΚ. tv ννκτί, i. (j. to come unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2, 4 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. iii. 3; xvi. 15 ; the name is transferred to false teachers, wlm do not care to instruct men, but abuse their conlidence fur their own gain, .In. x. 8. [Syn. see Xt/arijs, fin.]* κλί'ΐΓτω; fut. κλίψ-ω (Sept. also in Ex. x.\. 14 ; Lev. xix. II ; Deut. V. 19, for κλίψομαι more com. [(?) cf. Veitch s. V. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. 848] in prof, auth.) ; 1 aor. ίκλίψ•α ; [fr. Horn, down]; Sept. for 3Jj; a. to sIkiI ; absol. to coinniit a theft: Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; ,xix. 18 ; AXk. X. 19 ; Lk. xviii. 20 ; Jn. .\. 10 ; Ro. ii. 21 ; xiii. 9 ; Eph. iv. 28. b. trans, to steal i. e. take aicay hi/ stealth : τινά, the dead body of one, Mt. xxvii. 64 ; xxviii. 13.* κλήμα, -ατοί, τό, (fr. κλάω, q. v.), i. q. κ\ά8οι, a lender and βexiL•le branch; spec, the shoot or branch of a vine, a vine-sprout : Jn. xv. 2-6 (so Arstph. eccles. 1031 ; Aes- chin. in Ctes. p. 11,21 ; Theophr. h. pi. 4, 13, 5 ; άμπ-Λου κΚημα, Plat. rep. i. p. 353 a.; Sept., Ezek. xv. 2; x\ii. 6 si|. ; .loel i. 7).• Κλήμηϊ [cf. B. 16 sq. (15)], -ίΐτο5, ό, Clement, a com- panion of Paul and apparently a member of tlie climch at I'hilippi: Phil. iv. 3. Ace. to the rather improbable tradition of the catholic church, he is identical with that Clement who was bislio]) of Rome towards the close of llie first century ; [but see Bp. Lghlft. Com. on I'hil. 1. c. ' Detached Note ' ; Salmon in Diet, of Chris. Biogr. i. 555 sq.].* κληρονομ(ω, -ώ ; fut. κληρονομήσω ; 1 aor. ('κληρονόμησα ; p(. Κ(κληρονιΊμηκα; (,κληpovϋμΌS,^[^V.^, ci ■ οικονόμο! ) ', Se]lt. for Sn; and much oftener for wy ; 1. to receive a lot, receive by lot; esp. to receive apart of an inheritance, receive as an inheritance, obtain by right of inheritance ; so, particularly in the Attic orators, w. a gen. of the thing; in later writ, not infreq. w. an ace. of the thing (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 29 ; Slurz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 140 ; W 200 (188) ; [B. § 132, 8]) ; absol. to be an heir, to inherit Gal. iv. 30 fr. Gen. xxi. 10. 2. univ. to receive the portion assigned to one, receive an allotted portion, receive as one's own or as a possession ; to become partaker of, to obtain [cf. Eng. " inherit "], (as φήμην, Polyb. 1 8, 38 κΧηρονομια 349 κ\ησι<ι (55), 8 ; την in ήσφύα Κξαν, 15, 22, 3) ; in bibl. Grk. everywh. w. the ace. of the thing ; so very freq. in the O. T. in the phrase κΚηρ. γην and την γή», of the occupa- tion of the land of Canaan by the Israelites, as Lev. xx. 24; Deut. iv. 22, 26; vi. 1, etc. But as the Israelites after taking possession of the land were harassed almost perpetually by their hostile neighbors, and even driven out of the country for a considerable period, it came to pass that the phrase was transferred to denote the tran- quil and stable possession of the holy land crowned with all divine blessings, an experience which pious Israel- ites were to expect under the Messiah: Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 13; xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 9, 11, 22, 29, 34 Alex.; Is. l.x. 21 ; Tob. iv. 12; « Sturtpaf κΧημονομήσονσι την yijv, Is. Ixi. 7; hence it became a formula denoting to partake nf eternal saloalioti in the Messiah's kingdom: Mt. v. 5 (4) (fr. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 11), where see Bleek. ζωην αΐώνιον. Mt. xix. 29; Mk. x. 17; Lk. x. 25; xviii. 18; την βασι\(ίαν, Mt. xxv. 34 ; βασι\(ίαν θ(θΰ, 1 Co. vi. 9 sq. ; xv. 50; Gal. V. 21; σωτημίαν, Ileb. i. 14; τάϊ enayyeXias^ Heb. vi. 12; άφβαρσίαν, 1 Co. xv. 50; ταϋτα [Rec. πάντα], Rev. xxi. 7 ; όνομα, Heb. i. 4 ; την eiXoyiav, lleb. xii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9. [CoMP. : κατα-κλημοι^ομίω.^ ' κληρονο|ΐ(α, -as. ή, (κληρονόμος), Sept. time and again for rrjn 1, several times for ΠϋΤ, ΠΕ^ιή, etc. ; 1. an inheritance, properly received (or '.o be received) by inheritance, (Isocr., Dem., Aristot.) : Mt. xxi. 38 ; Mk. xii. 7; Lk. .xii. 13; xx. 14. 2. what is given to one as a possession ([cf. Eng. " inheritance "] ; see $(Κψ ρονομίω. 2) : bibavai τι τινι κληρονομίαν. Acts vii. 5; λαμ- βάν(ΐν Tt €if κληρ. Ileb. xi. 8 [(cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 7, 14 p. 1 las'", 33)]. Agreeably to the O. T. usage, which em- ploys nSnj now of the portion of the holy land allotted to each of the several tribes (Josh. xiii. 23, 28, etc.), now of the whole territory given to Israel for a possession (Deut. iv. 38 ; χ v. 4, etc. — and nothing appeared to the Israelites more desirable than the ijuiet, prosperous, per- manent possession of this land, see κΚηρονομίω, 2), the noun κληρονομιά, lifted to a loftier sense in the N. T., is used to denote a. the eternal blessedness iti the con- summated kingdom of God which is to be expected afier the visible return of Christ : Gal. iii. 18 ; Col. iii. 24 (της κληρ. gen. of appos. [W. § 59, 8 a.]); Heb. ix. 15 ; 1 Pet. i. 4 ; ημών, destined for us, Eph. i. 14 ; τ-οΰ θ(οΰ, given by God, 1 8. b. the share tchich an individual tcill have in that eternal blessedness: Acts xx. 32; Eph. v. 5.' κληρο-νόμοΐ, -ου, ό, (κληρο!. and νίμομαί to possess), prop. one who receives by lot ; hence 1. an heir Cin Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down); a. prop.: Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7 ; Lk. XX. 14; Gal. iv. 1. b. in Messianic usage, one who receives his allotted possession by right of sonship : so of Christ, as κληρονόμος πάντων, all things being sub- jected to his sway, Heb. i. 2; of Christians, as exalted by faith to the dignity of sons of .Abraham and so of sons of God, and hence to receive the blessings of (Jod's kingdom promised to Abraham: absol., Ro. viii. 1 7; Gal. iii. 29 ; with τοϋ Seov added, i. e. of God's possessions, squiv. to της 6άξης (see 6άξα, III. 4 b.), Ro. viii. 17 ; βίοίι βιά Χρίστου, by the favor of Christ (inasmuch as through him we have obtained ή uioifoia),Gal.iv. 7 Rec, for which L Τ Tr WH read δια θ(ού [.-^ee δω, Α. III. 1 ] (cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 148 [who advocates the Rec. as that reading in which the others prob. origi- nated (but cf. Meyer in loc.; WH in loc.)]); τοϋ κό- σμου, of government over the world, Ro. iv. 13 sq. ; ζωής αιωνίου. Tit. iii. 7 ; της βασίΚίίας, Jas. ii. 5. 2. the idea of inheritance having disappeared, one who has ac- quired or obtained the portion allotted him : w. gen. of the thing, Heb. vi. 17; xi. 7 ; τοϋ σκότους, used of the devil, Ev. Nicod.c. 20 [orDescens. Chr. ad Inferos 4,1]. (.Sepl^ four times for CiV : Judg. xviii. 7 ; 2 S. xiv. 7 ; Jer. viii. 10; Mic. i. 15.)• κλήρο$, -ου, ό, fr. Horn, down ; Sept. mostly for S"JU and Γ\Ίρΐ ; a lot; i. e. 1. an oliject used in casting or drawing lots, which was either a pebble, or a potsherd, or a bit of wood, (hence κλήρος is to be derived fr. κλά» [cf. Ellicott on Col. i. 12]) : Acts i. 2U (see below); βάΧ- \fiv κληρ., Mt. xxvii. 3'> ; Mk. xv. 24 ; Lk. xxiii. 34 ; Jn. xix. 24, (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 19 ; Jon. i. 7, etc.) ; the lots of the several persons concerned, inscribed with their names, were thrown together into a vase, which was then shaken, and he whose lot first fell out upon the ground was the one chosen (Horn. II. 3, 316, 325; 7, 175, etc.; Liv. 23, 3 [but cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Lot]) ; hence ό κλήρος πίτττίΐ (πι τίνα. Acts i. 26 (Ezek. xxiv. 6 ; Jon. i. 7). 2. tvhat is obtained by lot, allotted portion : Xayx^avdv and λαμβάνίΐν τον κληρον της διακονίας, a portion in Uae min- istry common to the apostles, Acts i. 1 7, 25 R G ; ίστι μοι κλήρος cv τικι, dat. of the thing. Acts viii. 21 ; like κληρονομιά ((J. v.) it is used of the part which one will have in eternal salvation, λαβιΊν TOf κ\. exToIr ί^γιασμίνοις, among the sanctified, Acts xxvi. 18 (Sap. v. 5) ; of eter- nal salvation it>clf, κληρης τών άγιων, i. e. the eternal sal- vation which God has assigned to the saints. Col. i. 12 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.]. of persons, oi κλήροι, those whose care and oversight has been assigned to one [al- lotted charge], used of Christian churches, the adminis- tration of which falls to the lot of the presbyters : 1 Pet. V. 3, cf. Acts xvii. 4 ; [for patristic usage see Soph. Lex. s. v., cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 24G sq.].• κληρόοι, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, (κληρώθην : (κλήρος) ; in class. Grk. 1. to cast lots, determine by lot. 2. to choose by lot: τινά [Hdt. 1, 94 ; al.]. 3. to allot, ail• sign by lot : τινά τινι. one to another as a possession, Pind. 01. 8, 19. 4. once in the N. Ύ.,ίο make a κλήρος L e. α heritage, private possession : τι»ά, pass. cV ω ίκληρύ- θημ(ν [but Lchm. (κλήΰημίν] in whom lies the reason why we were made the κλήρας τοϋ Sfoi (a designation trans- ferred from the .lews in the O. T. to Christians, cf. .\dd. to Esth. iii. 10 [iv. line 12 sq. (Tdf.)] and Fritzsche in loc.; [cf. Deut. iv. 20; ix. 29]), the heritage of God Eph. i. 11 [see Ellicott in loc.]. (In eccles. writ, it sig- nifies to become a clergyman [see re£P. 8. v. «cX^/joj, fin.].) [CoMP. : προσ-κληρόω.] • κλή(Γΐ5, -(ως. ή. (κολ«'ω) ; 1. α calling, calling to, [(Xen., Plat., al.)]. 2. α call, invitation : to a feaet κ\ητόΐ{ 350 κΧνΒωνίζομαι (3 Mace. V. 14 ; Xen. symp. 1,7); in the N. T. every- where in a technical sense, ihe divine invitation to embrace salvation in the kingdom ofOod, which is made esp. tlirough the preaching of the gospel : with gen. of the author, τον βΐον, Eph. i. 18 ; α.μίταμ.ί\. . . . ι} κλ. roC Btov, God does not repent of the invitation to salvation, which he de- cided of old to give to the people of Israel, and which he promised their fathers (i. e. the patriarchs), Ro. xi. 20 ; ij άνω [((. v. (a.)] κλ^σΐί τοϋ θ(θΰ ϊν Χριστώ, which was made in hea\cn by Ciod on the ground of Christ, Phil. iii. 14 ; also ή ίπονράνιοί κλησκ, Ileb. iii. 1 ; κΛ(Ίν Tti/u κλήσίί, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; pass. Kph. iv. 1 ; άξιοϋν τίνα κλήσιως is used of one whom God declares worthy of the calling which he has commanded to be given him, and therefore fit to obtain the blessings promised in the call, 2 Th. i. 11 ; w. gen. of the oljj., νμων, which ye have shared in, Eph. iv. 4; 2 Pet. i. 10; what its character- istics have been in your ease, as liaving no regard to learning, riches, station, etc. 1 Co. i. "26 ; used somewhat peculiarly, of the condition in which the calling finds one, whether circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or freeman, 1 Co. vii. 20.* κλητόϊ, -ή, -όν, (καΚίω), [fr. Horn, down], called, invited, (to a banquet, [1 K. i. 41, 49] ; 3 Mace. v. 14 ; Aeschin. 50, 1 ) ; in the N. T. a. invited {by God in the proc- lamation of the gospel) to obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of God through Christ (see καλίω, 1 b. j3. [cf. W. 35(34)]): Ro. viii. 2H; 1 Co. i. 24; Jude 1; κλιρτοι κ. (κΚ(κτο\ κ. πιστοί, Rev. ,χνϋ. 14; κΧητοί and (kKcktoi are distinguished (see (κλικτός, 1 a.) in Mt. xx. Hi [T Wllom. Trbr. the cl.]; xxii. 14, a distinction which does not agree with Paul's view (see καλ/ω, u. s. ; [ Weiss, Bibl. Theol. § 88; Bp. Λί/λ(/?. Com. on Col. iii. 12]); κ\ητονΐησον ΧμιστοΟ, gen. of possessor [W. 195 (183) ; B. § 132, 23], devoted to Christ and united to him, Ro. i. 6 ; κλητοΊ άγιοι, holy (or 'saints') by Ihe calling of God, Ro. i. 7 ; 1 Co. i. 2. b. called to (the discharge of) some office : kXjjtos απόστολοι, i. e. divinely selected and appointed (see καλΐ'ω, u. s.), Ro. i. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 1 [L br. κλ.] ; cf. Gal. i. 15.• κλίβανος, -ου, 6, (for κρίβανο!, more com. in earlier [yet κ\ίβ. in Ildt. 2, 92 (cf. Athen. 3 p. 110 c.)] and Attic Grk. ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 179; Passow s. v. κρίβανο: ; [W. 22]) ; 1. a clibanus, an earthen vessel for baking bread (Hebr. "Ί3Γ\, Ex. viii. 3 (vii. 29 Ilebr.) ; Lev. ii. 4 ; xxvi. 26 ; Hos. vii. 4). It was broader at the bottom than above at the orifice, and when sufliciently heated bva fire kindled within, the dough was baked by being spread upon the outside [but ace. to others, the dough was placed inside and the fire or coals outside, the vessel being often perforated with small holes that the heat might the better penetrate; cf. Rich, Diet, of Grk. and Rom. Antiq. s. v. clibanus; see Schol. on Arstph. Acharn. 86 (iv. 2 p. 339, 20 sq. Dind.)]. 2. i. q. ιττνόί, a furnace, an oven : so Mt. vi. 30 ; Lk. xii. 28.• κλίμα or κλϊμα (on the accent cf. reff. s. v. κρίμα), -rot, TO, (κ\Ίνω) ; 1. an inclination, slope, declivity : των ορωκ, Polyb. 2, 16, 3; [al.]. spec. 2. Me [supposed] sloping of the earth fr. the equator towards ihe poles, a zone : Aristot., Dion. H., Plut., al.; Joseph, b. j. 5, 12, 2. 3. a tract of land, a region : Ro. xv. 23 ; 2 Co. xi. 10 ; Gal. i. 21 ; (Polyb. 5, 44, 6; 7, 6, 1 ; Hdian. 2, 11, 8 [4 cd. Bekk.]; al.).• κλινάριον, -ου, ro, (dimin. of κλίνη ; see γυναικάριαν), a small beil, a couch: Acts v. 15 LTTrW'll. (Arstph. frag. 33 d. ; Epict. diss. 3, 5, 13; Artem. oneir. 2, 57 ; [cf. κλινίδιον, and Pollux as there referred to].)* κλίνη, -ης, ή, (κλι'κω) ; fr. lidt. down ; Sept. for nUO also for U'}^^ ; a bed : univ., Mk. vii. 30 ; Lk. .wii. 34 ; a couch to recline on at meals, Mk. iv. 21 ; vii. 4 [T AVlIom.]; Lk. viii. 16; a couch on which a sick man is carried, Mt. ix. 2, 6 ; Lk. v. 18 ; plur. Acts v. 15 R G ; /3άλλίΐν els κλίνην, to cast into a bed, i. e. to afllict with disease, Rev. ii. 22.* κλινίδιον, -ου, TO, (κλίνη), a small bed, a couch : Lk. v. 19, 24. (Diun. H. antt. 7, 68; Artem. oneir. 1, 2; An- tonin. 10, 28; several times in Plut. ; [cf. Pollux 10, 7].) • κλίνω; 1 aor. ίκλικι ; pf. «κλίκα ; 1. trans. a. to incline, bow : την κ(φαλήν. of one dying, Jn. xix. 30 ; τά πρόσίιηον els τ. γην, of the terrified, Lk. xxiv. 5. b. i. q. to cause to fall back: παρίμβολάι, Lat. inclinare acies, i. e. to turn to flight, Heb. xi. 34 (μάχην, Horn. Π. 14, 510; ΤμώοΓ, 5, 37; 'A;(aiout, Od. 9, 69). c. torecline: την κe Άττικοϊ, ici/ijitu/ Έλλι/- Pft, Moeris p. 234; [cf. Veitch s. v. κι/άω'].)' Kv(So$. -ου, ή, Cnidus or Gnidus, a peninsula [now Cape Crio] and a city of the same name, on the coast of Caria : Acts xxrii. 7 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D. s. v. Cnidus ; Leu'in, St. Paul, ii. 190.] * κο8ράντη5, -ου [Β. 17 (16)], ό ; a Lat. word, quadrans (i. e. the fourth part of an a.v) ; in the N. T. a coin equal to one half the Attic chalcus or to two Xcirra (see Xfirrav) : Mk. .\ii. 42; Mt. v. 26. The word is fully discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 447 sqq. [A. V.^/ar- thing; see BB. DD. s. v.]• κοιλία, -as, ή, (κοίλοί hollow) ; Sept. for 1D3 the belly, □•;••3 the bowels, 3lp the interior, the midst of a thing, D7T1 the womb; the bell//: and 1. the whole belli/, the entire cavity ; hence ή άνω and ή κάτω κοιλία, the upper [i. e. the stomach^ and the lower belly are distinguished ; very often so in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down. 2. the lower belli/, the alvine region, the receptacle of the ex- crement (Plut. symp. 7, 1, 3 sub fin. fiwfp eis κοίλίαν (χώρ€ΐ δια στομάχου πάν το πίνόμ€νον) : Mt. XV. 1 7 ; Mk. vii. 19. 3. the r/ullet (hat. stomachuii) : Mt. xii. 40; Lk. .XV. 16 [WH Trmrg. χομτασθϊίναι ϊκ etc.] ; 1 Co. vi. 13 ; Rev. x. 9 sq. ; hovKdav τη κοιλία, to be given up to the pleasures of the palate, to gluttony, (see δουλ(ίω, 2 b.), Ro. xvi. 18; also &ν ό 6f6s ή κοιλία, Phil. iii. 19; κοιλία! όρίξκ. Sir. xxiii. 6. 4. the womb, the place where the fcEtus is conceived and nourished till birth : Lk. i. 41 sq. 44; ii. 21 ; xi. 27 ; xxiii. 29 ; Jn. iii. 4, (very often so in Sept. ; very rarely in j)rof. auth. ; Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74 ; of the uterus of animals, ibid. 2, 16,43); (K (beginning from [see ex, IV. 1 ]) κοιλία{ μητρός, Mt. xi.x. 12; Lk. i. 15; Acts iii. 2 ; xiv. 8; Gal. i. 15, (for DK JP?•?, Ps. x.xi. (x.xii.) 11 ; Ixx. (Ixxi.) 6; Job i. 21 ; Is. xlix. 1 ; Judg. xvi. 1 7 [Vat. άπ-ό κ. μ. ; cf. W. 33 (32)]). 5. in imitation of the Hebr. [03, tropi- callv, the innermost part of a man, the soul, heart, as the seat of thought, feeling, choice, (Job xv. 35; x.xxii. 18 [Sept. γαστηρ] ; Prov. xviii. 8 Sept. ψνχη^ ; xx. 27, 30 : xxvi. 22 [Sept. σπλάγχνα]; Ilab. iii. 16; Sir. xlx. 12; Ii. 21) : Jn. vii. 38.* κοιμ,άω, -ω : Pass., pres. κοιμάομαι, κοιμώμαι ; pt. κ€- κοίμημαι [cf. W. 274 (257)]; 1 aor. (κοιμήθην; 1 fut. κοιίίτ'βησομαι ; iaki" to «ί;ιαι ; Curtius §45); to cause to sleep, put to sleep, (Horn, et al.) ; metaph. to still, calm, quiet, (Horn., Aeschyl., Plat.) ; I'ass. to sleep, fall asleep . prop., Mt. xxviii. 13; Lk. xxii. 45; Jn. xi. 12; Acts xii. 6 ; Sept. for 331?. metaph. and euphemistically i. q. to die [cf. Eng. to fall aslee/)'] : Jn. xi. 1 1 ; Acts vii. 60 ; xiii. 36; 1 Co. vii. 39; xi. 30; xv. 6, 51 [cf. W. 555 (517) ; B. 121 (106) note] ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; oi κοιμώμινοι, κ(Κοιμημίνοι, κοιμηθίντί!, i. q. the dead : Mt. x.xvii. 52 ; 1 Co. XV. 20 ; 1 Til. iv. 13-15 ; with ev Χριστώ added (see tv, I. 6 b. p. 211''), 1 Co. XV. 18; in the same sense Is. xiv. 8 ; xliii. 17; 1 K. xi. 43 ; 2 Mace. .xii. 45 ; Horn. II. 11, 241 ; Soph. Electr. 509.* κο(μησ-ΐ5, -€wf, ή, a reposing, taking rest : Jn. .xi. 13 [cf. W. § 59, 8 a.]; of death. Sir. xlvi. 19; xlviii. 13; η lying, reclining, Plat. conv. p. 183 a.* Koivos, -η, -όν, (ir. ξΰν, συν, with ; hence esp. in Epic ξυνός for (coiiiof, whence the Lat. cena [(?) ; seeVanifek p. 1065]) ; 1. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod. (opp. 721) down (opp. to iSios) common (i. e. belonging to several, Lat. communis) : Acts ii. 44 ; iv. 32 ; κοινή πίατί!. Tit. i. 4 ; σωτηρία, Jude 3. 2. by a usage foreign to class. Grk., common i. e. ordinary, belonging to the generality (Lat. vulgaris) ; by the Jews opp. to ayios, η-γιασμίνος, KaSapas; hence unhalloiced, Lat. pro/anus, levitically unclean, (in class, (irk. βίβηλο!, q. v. 2) : Mk. vii. 2, 5 (where RLmrg. ά^ίπτοΐί) ; Ro. xiv. 14; Heb. x. 29; Rev. xxi. 27 [Rec. κοινοϋν^, (1 Mace. i. 47 ; φαγιϊν κοινά, ib. 62 ; κοινοί άνθρωποι, common people, pro/anum vulgus, Joseph, antt. 12, 2, 14; oi τον κοινον βίον προηρημίνοι, i. e. a life repugnant to the holy law, ibid. 13, 1, 1 ; οΰ yap ως κοινον άρτυν ούδΐ ως κοινόν πόμα ταΟτα (i. e. the bread and wine of the sacred supper) λαμβάνομ^ν, Jastia Mart, apol. 1, 66; (oi Χριστιανοί) τράπ^ζαν κοινην παρατίθενται, αλλ' οϋ κοινην, a table communis but not pro/anus. Ep. ad Diogn. 5, on which cf. Otto's note) ; κοινον κάΊ [R G ξ] άκάθαρτον. Acts χ. 1 4 ; κηιν. η άκάθ-, ib. χ. 28 ; .\i. 8, (κοινά η ακάθαρτα ουκ (σθίομ(ν, Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 20). [Cf. Trench § ci.] * κοινόω, -ώ; 1 aor. inf. κοινώσαι [cf. W. 91 (86)] ; pf. KfKoivaKa ; pf . pass. ptcp. κίκοινωμίνος ; (κοινός) ; 1. in class. Grk. to make common. 2. in bibl. use (see κοινός, 2), a. to make (levitically) unclean, render un- hallowed, defile, profane (which the Grks. express by β(βψ λόω, cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. ii. p. 24 note 33 [where he calls attention to Luke's accuracy in putting κοινοΐιν into the mouth of Jews speaking to Jews (Acts xxi. 28) and β(βηλοΰν when they address Felix (xxiv. 6)]) : Rev. xxi. 27 Rec. ; Mt. xv. 11, 18, 20 ; Mk. vii. 15, 18, 20, 23 ; pass. Heb. ix. 13 ; τί, Acts xxi. 28; γαστίρα μιαροφαγία, 4 Mace. vii. 6. b. to declare or count un- clean : Acts X. 15 (cf. 28) ; xi. 9; see δικαιόω, 3.* κοινωνεω, -ω ; 1 a.OT. ^κοινώνησα', ^ί.κ€κοινώνηκα'. {koivqj- νός) ; a. to come into communion or fellowshi/j, to become a sharer, be made a partner : as in Grk. writ. w. gen. of the thing, Heb. ii. 14 [(so Prov. i. 11 ; 2 Maec. xiv. 25)] ; w. dat. of the thing (rarely so in Grk. writ.). Ro. XV. 27; [1 Pet. iv. 13]. b. to enter into fellow- ship, join one's self as an associate, make one's self a sharer χΟΐνωνίΛ 852 κολάζοβ or partner : »β in Grk. writ., w. dat. of the thin°;, 1 Tim. V. 22 ; 2 Jn. 1 1 ; ταίί xpticut titoj, so to make anotlier's necessities one's own as to relieve them [A. V. cummuni- caling to the necessilii-x etc.], I^o. -xii. 13 ; w. dat. of |)ers. foil, by €'is Tt (as in Plat. rep. .5 p. 453 a.), Phil. iv. 15 ; foil, by e'l» w. dat. of the tiling which one shares with another, Gal. vi. (J (κοοΌ,κι/σίΐΓ fv πασι τω πλησίον σον και ουκ i'pe'is ίδια (ΐναι, Barnah. ej). 19, 8) ; cf. W. § 30, 8a.; [Β. § Κ!-', 8; 15p. I.ghtft. or EUicott on Gal. 1. c. CoMP. : συγ-κοινωνίω.^ * κοινωνία, -as, ή, (κοινωι /or), fcUnwxh'ip, association, com- munilji, ciimiuHiiidn, joint participation, intercourse; in the N. T. as in class. Ok. 1. the share u-hich one has in am/lhin;/, jiartici/i'ition; w. gen. of the thinj in wllich lie shares : πνίΰματοί, Phil, ii- 1 ; τοΟ άγιου -πικΰμα- Tos, 2 Co. xiii. 13(14); των παθημάτων του Χριστού, I'hil. iii. 10; τήί πίστίωί, Philem. 6 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ; τοϋ αΐματο! τοϋ Χριστού, i. e. in tlie benefits of Christ's death, 1 Co. .\. Ill [cf. Meyer ad loc] ; του σώματο! τον Xp. in the (mystical) body of Christ or the church, ibid.; r^f δια- κονίας, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; τού μνστηρίον, Eph. iii. 9 Rec. fir κοινωνίαν την υίού τοΰ 6(οϋ, to obtain fellowship in the dignitv and blessings of the Son of (!od, 1 Co. i. 9, where cf. Mever. 2. intercourse, felloicship, intimacy: be^ia κοινωνίας, the right liand as the sign and pledge of fellow.ship (in fulfilling the apostolic office). Gal. ii. 9 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] ; τίς κοιν. <^ωτΊ προς σκότος; what in common has light with darkness? 2 Co. vi. 14 (n't ovv κοινωνία προς 'Απόλλωνα τω μηδ^ν οίκΰον ίπιτ^τηδΐνκότι, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 14 fin. ; « 8c τις ίστι κοινωνία προς flfout ήμΐν, Stob. serm. 2S [i. p. 87 ed. Gaisf.]) ; used of the intimate bond of fellowship which unites Christians: ai)Sol. Acts ii. 42; with fit τό (Ιαγγίλιον added, Phil. i. •5 ; κοινωνίαν ΐχίΐν μίθ ημών, μΐτ αΚ\η\ων, 1 Jn. i. 3, 7 ; of tlie fellowship of Christians with God and Christ, μττα τού πατρός κ. μ^τα τού νιου αύτον, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6, (which fel- lowship, ace. to John's teaching, consists in the fact that Christians are partakers in common of the same mind as God and Christ, and of the blessings arising therefrom). By a use unknown to prof. auth. κοινωνία in the X. T. denotes 3. a benefaction jointly contributed, a col- lection, a contribution, as exhibiting an embodiment and proof of fellowsliip (cf. Grimm, Exeget. Hdbch. on Wisd. viii. 18, p. 17G) : 2 Co. viii. 4 ; f"r τίνα, for the benefit of one, 2 Co. ix. 13; ποκΊσθαι κοιν. (to make a contribu- tion) fis τίνα, Ro. XV. 26 ; joined with (νποιία, Ileb. xiii. 16. [Cf. B. § 132, 8.]• κοινωνικό;, -ή, -όν, (κοινωνία) ; 1. social, sociable, ready and apt to form and maintain communion and fel- lowship: Plat. defif.p.411 e.; Aristot. pol. 3, 13 [p. 12S3', 38; eth. Eudem. 8, 10 p. 1242*, 26 κοινωνικόν άνθρωπος ζωον'] ; Polyb. 2, 44, 1 ; Antonin. 7, 52. 55 ; often in Plut. ; πράξίΐς «coiv. actions having reference to human societ}', Antonin. 4, 33 ; 5, 1. 2. inclined to make others sharers in one's possessions, inclined to impart, free in giv- ing, liberal, (Aristot. rhet. 2, 24, 2 [where, however, see Cope]; Lclan. Tim. 56): 1 Tim. vi. 18.• κοινωνοί, -η. -όν. (κοινοί), [as adj. Eur. Iph. Taur. 1173; commonly as subst.J ; a. σ partner, associate, com- rade, companion : 2 Co. viii. 23 ; (χ(ΐν τίνα κοινωνόν, I'hilem. 1 7 ; (ΙμΊ κοινωνοί τινι, to be one's partner, Lk. v. 10 ; Tivot (gen. of pers.), to be the partner of one doing something, Ileb. x. 33; τινόϊ t'v τώ αΊματι, to be one's partner ia shedding the blood etc. Mt. xxiii. 30. b. (I jitirlaler, sharer, in any thing; Λν. gen. of the thing: των ηαθ ιματων, 2 Co. i. 7 ; t^s δόξης, 1 Pet. T. 1 ; ^fiac φύσιως, 2 Pet. i. 4; τοϋ θυσιαστηρίου, of the altar (at Jerusalem) on which sacrifices are offered, i. e. sharing in tlie worship of the .lews, 1 Co. x. 18; των δαιμονίων, partakers of (or with) demons, i. e. brought into fillow ship with them, because they are the authors of the heathen worship, ibid. 20; (t'v τω άφθάρτω κοινωνοί . . . (V τοΙς φθαρτοις, joint partakers in that which is imper- ishable ... in the blessings which perish, Barnab. ep. 19, 8; see κοινωνΐω, fin.).* κοίτη, -ης, ή, (ΚΕΩ, ΚΕ1Ω, κ(ΐμαι, akin to κοιμάω) ; fl. Ilom. Od. 19, 341 down; Sept. chiefly for 23ψΐρ, als6 for n^Dty etc. ; a. a place for lying down, restitig, steeping in ; a bed, couch : (Ις την κοίτην (see f ϊμί, V. 2 a.) ίίσίν, Lk. xi. 7. b. spec, the marriage-bed, as in the Tragg. : τ. κοίτην pxaiveiv, of adultery (Joseph, antt. 2, 4, 5; Plut. de fluv. 8, 3), Ileb. xiii. 4. c. cohabita- tion, whether lawful or unlawful (Lev. xv. 4 sq. 21-25, etc.; Sap. iii. 13, 16; Eur. .Med. 152; Ale. 249): plur. sexual intercourse (see π^ριπατίω, b. a.), Ro. xiii. 13 [A.V. chambering'] ; by meton. of the cause for the effect we have tlie peculiar expression κοίτην (χιιν ίκ τίνος, to have conceived by a man, Ro. ix. 10 ; κοίτ?; σπίρματος. Lev. xv. 16 ; xxii. 4 ; xviii. 20, 23 [here κ. fls σπιρματισμόν] ; on these phrases cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. ii. p. 291 sq.* κοιτών, -ωνοί, ό, (fr. koi'tij ; cf. νυμφών etc.), a sleeping- room, bed-chamber: 6 ίπ\ τού κοιτ. the officer who is over the bed-chamber, the chamberlain. Acts xii. 20 (2 S. iv. 7 ; Ex. viii. 3 ; 1 Esdr. iii. 3 ; the .-^tticists censure the word, for which Attic writ, generally used δωμάτιον ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 252 sq.).* κόκκινος, -jj, -ov, (fr. κόκκος a kernel, the grain or berry of the ilex roccifera ; these berries are the clusters of eggs of a female insect, tlie kermes [(cf. Eng. carmine, crimson)], and when collected and pulverized produce a red which was used in dyeing, Plin. h. n. 9,41, «5 ; 16, 8, 12; 24, 4), crimson, scarlet-colored: Mt. xxvii. 28; Heb. ix. 19 ; Rev. xvii. 3. neut. as a subst. i. q. scarlet cloth or clothing: Rev.xvii.4; xviii. 12, 16, (Gen. xxxviii. 28 ; Ex. XXV. 4 ; Lev. xiv. 4, 6 ; Josh. ii. 18 ; 2 8. i. 24 ; 2 Chr. ii. 7, 14; Plut. Fab. 15; φορύν κόκκινα, scarlet robes, Epict. diss. 4, 11, 34 ; ev κοκκίνυις π(ριπατιϊν, 3, 22, 10). Cf. Win. RWB.s. v.Carmesin ; nosl.o/fm Schenkel i. p. 501 sq. ; Kamphausen in Riehm p. 220; [B. D. s. v. Colors, IL 3].• KOKKOs, -ου, ό, [cf. Vanicek, Fremdworter etc. p. 26], a grain: Mt. xiii. 31; xvii. 20; Mk. iv. 31; Lk. xiii. 1!) ; xvii. 6 ; Jn. xii. 24 ; 1 Co. xv. 37. [Horn. h. Cer^ Hdt., down.]* KoXdj!» : pres. pass. ptcp. κο\αζόμ^νος ; 1 aor. mid. sub- June• 8 pers. plur. κολάσωνται ; (κ6\ος lopped); in Grk «Hi/va/ceuz 353 ΛόλτΓβ? ■wnc. 1. prop, to lop, prune, as trees, wings. 2. U> chtcl; curb, restrain. 3. to chastise, correct, pun- ish : so in the N. T. ; pass. 2 Pet. ii. 9, and Lclim. in 4 ; mid. to cause to be punished (3 Mace. vii. 3) : Acts iv. 21 .* κολακεία (Τ WH -κία [see I, ^]), -as, ή, (κο\ακ(ΰω), flattery : 'Kayos icoXa(cei'as, flattering discourse, 1 Tli. ii. 5. (I'lat., Dem., Tlieojihr., Joseph., Udian., al.) * κόλαο-ις, -ίωί, ij, (κολάζω), correction, punishment, pen- allij : Jit. x.w. 4C ; κολασιν ίχ^ι, brings with it or has con- nected with it the thought of punishment, 1 Jn. iv. 18. (Ezek. xiv. 3 sq., etc.; 2 Mace, iv, 38 ; 4 Mace. viii. 8; Sap. xi. 14; xvi. 24, etc.; Plat., Aristot., Diod. 1, 77, (9) ; 4, 44, (3) ; Ael. v. h. 7, 15 ; al.) * |Syn. κ6\ασί$, τιμωρία: the noted definition of Aristotle which distinguishes KOKaats from τιμωρία as that which (is disciplinary and) has reference to him who suffers, ivhile the latter (is penal and) has reference to the satisfaction of him who inflicts, niav be found in his rhet. 1, 10, 17; cf. Cope, Intr. to Arist. Ehet. p. 232. To much the same effect, Plato, Protag. 324 a. sq., also deff. 416. But, as iu other cases, usage (esp. the later) does not alwavs recognize the distinc- tion ; see e. g. Philo de legat ad Gaiuui § 1 tin. ; frag, ex Euseb. prep, evang. 8, 13 (Mang. ii. 641) ; de vita Movs. i. 16 fin. ; Pint, de sera num. vind. §§ 9, 11, etc. Plutarch (ibid. § 25 sub fin.) uses κολάζομαι of those undergoing the penalties of the other world (cf. Just. JIart. 1 apol. 8 ; Clem. Kom. 2 Cor. 6, 7 ; Just. Mart. 1 apol. 43 ; 2 apol. 8 ; Test. xii. Patr., test. Reub. 5; test. Levi 4, etc.; Mart. Polyc. 2, 3; II, 2; Ign. ad Rom. .5,3; Mart. Igu. vat. 5 etc.). See Trench, Sj-n. § vii.; McClellan, New Test. vol. i. marg. reff. on Mt. u. s. ; LIurilett, Life and Death Eternal. Note G. ; C. F. Hudson, Uebt and Grace, p. 188 sqq.; Schmidt ch. 167, 2 sq.] ΚολασοΌεΰς, see Κολοσσοί it. Κ.ολασ-(ΓαΙ. .see Κολοσσοί. κολαφίζω ; 1 aor. €κολάφισα : pres. pass. κοΚαφίζομοί ; (κολαφοί a fist, and this fr. κολάτττω to peck, strike) ; to strike with the fist, i/ire one a blow tvith the fist (Terence, cnlaphum infrinrjo, Quintil. col. duco"), [A. V. to buffet'] : Tii/ii, Mt. xxvi. 67; Mk. xiv. 65; as a specific term for a general, i. q. to maltreat, treat with violence and con- tumely, 2 Co. xii. 7 ; pres. pass., 1 Co. iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 20. (Elsewhere only in eccl. writ.) The word is fully discussed by Fischer, De vitiis lex.x. N. T. etc. p. 67 sqq. ; cf. Loll, ad Phryn. p. 1 75 sq.* κολλάω, -ώ : Pass., pres. κολλώμαι ; 1 aor. (κοΧΚήθην ; 1 flit. κοΧΚηθήσομαι (Mt. xix. 5 LTTrAVII); {κ6\\α gluten, glue) ; prop, to glue, glue to, glue together, cement, fasten together; hence univ. to join or fasten firmly to- gether; in the N. T. only the pass, is found, with reflex- ive force, to join one's self to, cleave to; Sept. for p?'l : ό κονιορτος 6 κοΧΚτιθ^Ίς ημίν, Lk. χ. 1 1 ; €Κθ\\ηθησαν αίιτηί αϊ άμαρτίαι ηχρι τοΰ ovpauov. her sins were such a heap as to reach even unto heaven (that is, came to the knowl- edge of heaven). Rev. xviii. 5 GLTTr WII («ολλ. ή ψνχη μου οπίσω σου, Ps. 1\ϋ. (Ixiii.) 9 , αϊ ayvotai ημών νπ9ρην€γκαν (ως τον ουρανού, 1 Esdr. viii. 72 (74) ; ύβρις τ( βίη τ( ουρανον ικ(ΐ, Horn. Od. ϊ:>, 329; 17, 565). of persons, w. dat. of the thing, κοΧλήθηη τω αρμαη join thyself to etc. Acts viii. 29 ; w. dat. of pers., to form an intimate connection with, enter into the closest relations 23 with, unite one's self to, (so Barn. ep. c. 10, 3 sq. 5. 8 •, also with μετά and gen. of pers., ibid. 10, 11 ; 19, 2. 6 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 15, 1 ; 30, 3 ; 46, 2 [cf. Bp. Lghtft.'s note], 4): τη γυναικί, Mt. .\i.\. 5 LTTrΛVII; tj πόρνη, 1 Co. vi. IG (Sir. .\ix. 2); τω κυρίω, 1 Co. vi. 17 (2 K. xviii. 6 ; Sir. ii. 3) ; to join one's self to one as an asso- ciate, keep company with. Acts v. 13 ; ix. 26 ; x. 28 ; to follow one, be on his side. Acts xvii. 34 (2 S. xx. 2 ; 1 Maec. iii. 2; vi. 21) ; to join or attach one's self to a master or patron, Lk. xv. 15 ; w. dat. of the thing, to give one's self steadfastly to, labor for, [AV. cleave to]: τώ άγαθω, Ro. xii. 9, ά-γαθω, κρίσίΐ biKaia, Barn. ep. 20, 2 ; Tji ei'Koyia,so cleave to as to share, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 31, 1. (Aeschyl. Ag. 1566; Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) [CoMP. : προσ-κολλάω.] • κολλούριον (Τ Tr KoWvpiou, the more common form in prof. auth. [cf. Lob. Pathol, proleg. p. 461 ; WH. A pp. p. 152]), -ου, TO, (dimin. of κολΚΰρα, coarse bread of a cylindrical shape, like that known in Westphalia as Pumpernickel), Lat. collyrium [.\.V. eye-salve], a prepa- ration shaped like a κολλύρα, composed of various mate- rials and used as a remedy for tender eyelids (Hor. sat. 1, .5, 30; Epict. diss. 2, 21, 20 ; 3, 21, 21 ; Cels. 6, 6, 7): Rev. iii. 18.• κολλυβιστή;, -οϋ, 6, (fr. κόλΧυβο! i. q. a. a small coin, cf. κολοβό! clipped; b. rate of exchange, premium), a money-changer, banker: Mt. .\xi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Jn. ii. 15. Menand., Lys. in Poll. 7, 33, 170; ό /leV κ6\\υβοί 8όκιμον, το &c κοΧλυ9ιστης αδόκιμοι', Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 440. Cf. what was said under κ(ρματιστήί.' κολλΰριον, see KoWoiptov. κολοβόω, -ώ : 1 aor. «ολό,3ωσα ; Pass., 1 aor. c'koXo- βώθην; 1 fut. κολο^ω6^σο/ιαί ; (fr. (coXo^nr lopped, mu- tilated) ; to cut off (ταί χι'φαί. 2 S. iv. 1 2 ; tovs noSas, Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 [p. 487, 24]; την piva, Diod. 1, 78); to mutilate (Polyb. 1, 80, 13) ; hence in the N. T. of time, (Vulg. brevio) to shorten, abridge, curtail : Mt. xxiv. 22 : Mk. xiii. 20.• Κολοσσαενΐ, and (so LTrWH) Ko\aaaaeus (see the foil, word ; in Strabo and in Inscrr. Κολοσσι/ι/όί ), -ir, ή, [fr. Ilom. down], hair, head of hair : 1 Co. XI. 15. [Ace. to Schmidt (21, 2) it differs fr. θρίξ (the anatomical or physical term) by designating the hair as an ornament (the notion of length being only sec- ondary and suggested). Cf. B.D. s. v. Hair.] * κομ(ΐω : 1 aor. ptcp. fem. κομίσασα ; Mid., pres. ptcp, κομιζόμίνηι; 1 fut. (co/iiVo^ot (Eph. vi. 8 L Τ Tr W'll ; Col. iii. 25 Ltxt. \VH) and Attic κομιοϋμαι (Col. iii. 25 Κ GLmrg.TTr; [Eph. vi. 8 RG] ; 1 Pet. v. 4 ; cf. [WH. App. p. 163 sq.]; B. 37 (33); [W. § 13, 1 c. ; Veitch s. V.]), ptcp. κoμιuvμevos (2 Pet. ii. 13 [here Wll Trmrg. άSικovμevoι^, see ά8ικ(ω, 2 b.]) ; 1 aor. ίκομισάμην [Β. § 135, 1] ; rare in Sept., but in Grk. writ. fr. Hoin. down freq. in various senses ; 1. to care for, take care of, provide for. 2. to take up or carry away in order to care for and preserve. 3. univ. to carry away, bear off. 4. to carry, hear, bring to : once so in the N. T., viz. αλάβαστροι', Lk. vii. 37. Mid. (as often in prof, auth.) to carry away for one's self; to carry off what is one's own, to bring back; i. e. a. to receive, obtain : την inayyeXlav, the promised blessing, Heb. x. 3G; xi. 39 [τάί inayy. L ; so Τ Tr \VH in xi. 13] ; σωτηρίαν yj /νχων, 1 Pet. i. !) ; ttjs δόζηs στίφανον, 1 Pet. v. 4 ; μισθον ahtKlas, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see above], (τον Άξιον Tqs Svaae,-i(ias μισθύν, 2 Mace. viii. 33 ; δύξαν ϊσθλήν [al. καρτΓΐ'^ίται], Eur. Hij)p. 432; την άξίαν παρά θ(ΰ>ν. Plat. legg. 4 p. 718 a., and other exx. elsewh.). b. to receive what was previously one'a own, to get back, receive back, recover : το ipov συν τόκω, Mt. XXV. 27; his son (of Abraham after he had con- sented to sacrifice Isaac), Heb. xi. 19 (2 Mace. vii. 29; τον ά8€\φ6ν άννβριστον, Philo de Josepho § 35 ; oi St παρ ί\πίδas iauTois κ(κομισμίνοι, having received each oilier back, been restored to each other, contrary to their expecta- tions, of Abraham and Isaac after the sacrifice of the latter had been prevented by God, Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 4; την άδ(\φήν, Eur. Iph. T. 1362; used of the recovery of hostages, captives, etc., Thuc. 1, 113 ; Polyb. 1, 83, 8 ; 3, 51, 12 ; 3, 40, 10 ; the city and temple, 2 Mace. x. 1 ; a citadel, a city, often in Polyb. ; την βaσ^\eίav, Arstph. av. 549; την πατρώαν αρχήν, Jose]ih. antt. 13, 4, 1). Since in the rewards and punishments of deeds, the deeds themselves are as it were requited and so given b.ack to their authors, the meaning is obvious when one is said κoμίζeσθaι that which he has done, i. e. either the reward or the punishment of the deed [W. C20 sq. (576)]: 2Co. V. 10; Col. iii. 25; with τταρα κυρ/ου added, Eph. vi. 8 ; ([άμαρτΐαν. Lev. xx. 1 7] ; (koittos, KaBias eπoiησe. Kopie'iTai, Barn. ep. 4, 12). [CoMP. : eV, avy- κομίζω-Ί ' κομψότΕρον, neut. compar. of the adj. κoμ^|fόs (fr. κομίω to take care of, tend) neat, elegant, nice, fine; used ad- verbially, more finely, belter : κομψότ. ίχω to be better, of a convalescent, Jn. iv. 52 {όταν 6 larpos e'errri • κάμι/ΌΚ txtis, Epict. diss. 3, 10, 13 ; so in Latin belle habere, Cic. epp. ad div. 16, 15; [cf. Eng. 'he's doing nicely,' 'he 's getting onfnely'; and] Germ, er befindet sich hilbsch; es geht hilbsch mit ihm). The gloss, of Hesych. refers to this pass. ; κομψότ(ρον • βeλτtώτepov, ί\αφρότ(ρον.* Kovuio), -ώ : pf. pass. ptcp. KcKovtapevos] (fr. κονία, which signifies not only ' dust ' but also ' lime ') ; to cover with lime, plaster over, whitewash : τάφοι κeκovιaμivcι (the Jews were accustomed to whitewash the entrances to their sepulchres, as a warning against defilement by κονιορτος 355 κορβαν touching them [Β. D. s. τ. Burial, 1 fia. ; cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 316 sqq.]), Mt. xxiii. 27; τοίχο! KfKov. is applied to a hypocrite who conceals his malice under an outward assumption of piety. Acts xxiii. 3. (Dem., Aristot., Plut., al. ; for Ύύ, Deut. xxvii. 2, 4.) * KoviopTOs, -oC, (5, (fr. κονία, and όρννμι to stir up) ; 1. prop, raised dusi, flying dust, (Hdt., Plat., Polyb., al.). 2. univ. dust: Mt. x. 14; Lk. ix. 5 ; x. 11 ; Acts xiii. 51 ; xxii. 23. (For pnX, E.x. ix. 9 ; Nah. i. 3 ; for Λ3;•, Deut. ix. 21.)* κοΊτάΙζω : 1 aor. ixcmaaa ; {κόποι) ; prop, to grow iceary or tired ; hence to cease from violence, cease raging : ό άνεμος (Hdt. 7, lf»l), Mt. xiv. 32; Mk. iv. 89; vi. 51. (Gen. viii. 1 : .Jon. i. 1 1 scj. ; [cf. esp. Philo, somn. ii. 35].)* KoireTOs, -ov, a, (fr. κόπτομαι, see κότττω), Sept. for Π3ΡΡ ; Lat. planctus, i. e. lamentation with beating of the breast as a sign of grief : κοπιτον TroieiaBai ίπί τινι. Acts viii. 2 ; ini τίνα, Zech. xii. 10. (Eupolis in Bekker's an- nott. ad Etym. Magn. p. 776; Dion. H. antt. 11, 31; Plut. Fab. l'?.) * κοττή, -ης, η, {κόπτω) ; 1. prop, several times in Grk. writ, the act of cutting, a cut. 2. in bibl. Grk. a cutting in pieces, slaughter : Heb. vii. 1 ; Gen. xiv. 17; Deut. xxviii. 25 ; Josh. x. 20 ; Judith xv. 7.* κοιηάω, -ώ, [3 pers. plur. κοπιοϋσιν (for -ωσιν), Mt. vi. 28 Tr ; cf. (ρωτάω, init.] ; 1 aor. (κοπίασα ; pf. κ(κοπΙακα (2 pers. sing, κικοπίακα. Rev. ii. 3 LTTr WH, cf. [W. § 13, 2 c] ; B. 43 (3s) [and his trans, of ApoUon. Dysk. p. 54 n. ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123 ; WH. App. p. 16G ; Soph. Lex. p. 39]) ; {κόποί, q. v.) ; 1. as in Arstph., Joseph., Plut., al., to grow weary, tired, exhausted, (with toil or burdens or grief) : Mt. xi. 28 ; Rev. ii. 3 ; κίκοπιακίας ck Τη! όδοιτΓορίαί. Jn. iv. 6 {inro ttjs όδοιπορίαί, Joseph, antt. 2,15,3; δραροΰιτακαΐ οΰ κοπιάσουσι, Is. xl. 31). 2. in bibl. Grk. alone, to labor with wearisome effort, to toil (Sept. for >'r, ); of bodily labor: absol., Mt. vi. 28; Lk. V. 5; xii. 27 [not Tdf.]; Jn. iv. 38; Acts xx. 35; I Co. iv. 12 ; Eph. iv. 28 ; 2 Tim. u. 6 [cf. W. 556 (517) ; B. 390 (334)] ; W, upon a thing, Jn. iv. 38. of the toil- some efforts of teachers in proclaiming and promot- ing the kingdom of God and Christ : 1 Co. xv. 10 ; xvi. 16, (cf. Jn. iv. 38) ; foil, by ίυ w. dat. of the thing in which one labors, iv λόγω κ- διδασκαλία, 1 Tim. v. 17; e» νμΐν, among you, 1 Th. v. 12; ev κυρίω (see ev, I. 6 b. p. 211'" raid. [Lbr. the cl.]), Ro. xvi. 12; cU τίνα, for one, for his benefit, Ro. xvi. 6 ; Gal. iv. 1 1 [cf. B. 242 (209) ; W. 503 (4G9)] ; eh τοϋτο, lookins to this (viz. that piety has the promise of life), I Tim. iv. 10; ds a. to which end, Col. i. 29 ; eis Ktvov, in vain, Phil. ii. 16 {κ(νωί ίκοπίασα, of the frustrated labor of the prophets. Is. xlix. 4).* κόποΐ, -ου, ό, (κόπτω) ; 1. i• q- τά κόπταν, a beat- ing. 2. i. q. KOTTfTor, a beating of the breast in grief, sorrow, (Jer. Ii. 33 (xiv. 3)). 3. labor (so Sept. often for Sn;•)' •• β• a• trouble (Aeschyl., Soi)h.) : κόπου! παρίχαν rtvi, to cause one trouble, make work for him, Mt. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7 ; Gal. vi. 17; κόπον παρίχ. nvi, Lk. xviii. 5. b. intense labor united with trouble, toil, (Eur., Arstph., al.) : univ., plur., 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 23 ; of manual labor, joined with μόχθο! [(see below)], 1 Th. ii. 9 ; iv κόπω κ. μόχθω, [toil and travail], 2 Co. xi. 27 (where L Τ Tr WII om.'eV) ; 2 Th. hi. 8 ; of the la- borious eJui'ts of Christian virtue, 1 Co. xv. 58 ; Rev. ii. 2 ; plur. Rev. xiv. 13 ; 5 κόπο! της ά-γά-πης, the labor to which love prompts, and which voluntarily assumes and endures trouble and pains for the salvation of others, 1 Th. i. 3; Heb. vi. 10 Rec. ; of toil in teaching, Jn. iv. 38 (on which see eh, B. I. 3) ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; of that which such toil in teaching accomplishes, 1 Co. iii. 8 ; plur. 2 Co. X. 15 (cf. Sir. xiv. 15).* [Sts. KOiros, μόχβοί,πόνο^: primarily and m general classic usage, iroiOs gives prominence to the effort (work as requiring force ) , xiiTostothe f atigue.^iixeos (chiefly poetic) to the hardship. But in the N. T. πόνοί has passed over (in three instances out of four) to the meaning pa/n (hence it has no place in the 'new Jerusalem', Rev. xxi. 4) ; c£. the deterioration in the case of the allied πονηροί, πΐνηι. Schmidt, ch. 85; cf. Trench § cii. (who would trans ir. ' toil ', κ. 'wea- riness ', μ. ' labor ').] κοΊτρία [Chandler § 96], -a!, ή, i. q. ή κόπρο!, dung: Lk. xiii. 8 Rec." ; xiv. 35 (34). (Job ii. 8 ; 1 S. ii. 8 ; Neh. ii. 13 ; 1 Mace. ii. 62; [Strab., Poll., al.].) * κόπριον, -ου, τό, i. q. ij κόπρο!, dung, manure : plur. Lk. xiii. 8 [Rec." κοπρίαν']. (llevaclit. in Plut. mor. p. 669 [quaest. conviv. lib. iv. quaest. iv. § 3, 6] ; Strab. 16, § 26 p. 784 ; Epict. diss. 2, 4, 5 ; Plut. Pomp. c. 48 ; [Is. v. 25; Jer. xxxii. 19 (xxv. 33); Sir. xxii. 2], and other later writ.) * κότΓτω : impf. 3 pers. plur. ΐκοτττον ; 1 aor. ptcp. κόψ-ΟΕ (Mk. xi. 8 TTrtxt. AVH); Mid., impf. «οτττόμι;!' ; fut. κόβομαι; 1 aor. iκo^|fάμηv■, [fr. Ilom. down]; to cul, strtke, smite, (Sept. for Γ^2T^, n"i3, etc.) : τΐ από or ίκ τινο!, to cut from, cul off, Mt. xxi. 8 ; Mk. xi. 8. Mid. to beat one's breast for grief, Lat. plango [R. V. mourn} : Mt. xi. 17; xxiv. 30, (Aeschyl. Pers. 683; Plat., al. ; Sept. often so for 133) ; Tira, to mourn or bewail one [cf. AV. § 32, 1 y.] : Lk. viii. 52 ; xxiii. 27. (Gen. xxiii. 2; I S. XXV. l,etc.; Arstph. Lys. 396 : Anthol. 11, 135, 1) ; iπi Tiva, Rev. i. 7 ; [xviii. 9 Τ Tr ΛΥΗ], (2 S. xi. 26) ; iπί Tivi, Rev. xviii. 9 [R G L], cf. Zech. xii. 10. [Comp. : dva-, άπο-, iK-, iv-, κατά-, προ-, προσκόπτω. Syn. cf. θρηνίω.] * κόραξ, -ακοί, ό, « roren : Lk.xii. 24. [Fr. Hom. down.] * κοράο-ιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of κόρη), prop, a coUoq. word used disparaginslv (like the Germ. Madel), a little girl (in the epigr. attributed to Plato in Diog. Laert. 3, 33 ; Lcian. as. 6) ; used by later ivrit. without disparagement [W. 24 (23)], a girl, dam,^et, maiden : Mt. ix. 24 sq. ; xiv. II ; Mk. V. 41 sq.; vi. 22, 28; (occasionally, as in Epic- tet.' diss. 2, 1, 28; 3, 2, 8; 4, 10, 33; Sept. for n-^lJ ; twice also for πη'τ., Joel iii. 3 (iv. 3) ; Zech. Λτϋ. 5 ; [Tob. vi. 12: Judith xvi. 12; Esth. ii. 2]). The form and use of the word are fully discussed in Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 73 sq . cf. Sturz, De dial, placed, etc. p. 42 sq.* κορβάν Ι-βάν WH ; but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 102], in- decl., and κορβανάς, ace. -άν [Β. 20 (18)], ό, (Hebr. ]2•}ρ^ i. e. an offering, Sept. every wh. Βωρον, a term which com- prehends all kinds of sacrifices, the bloody as weO as the bloodless); 1. κορβαν, a gift offered (or to be of- Kfl 356 κόσμοι fered) to God: Mk. vii. 11 (Joseph, antt. 4, 4, 4, of the Nazirite?, oi κορβαν airovs ϋνιιμύσαιττα τω θ(ώ, δώμο» Se τοντο σημαΐνΐΐ κατα'ΈΧ\ί}νιαν •γ\ώτταν\ cf. coiiti•. A[tion, 1, 22, 4; [BB.DD. s. v. Corbuii ; Ginsbunj in the liilile Educator, i. 1 Jo]). 2. κορβανά:, -ά [see Β. u. s.], Me sacred treasury : Mt. xxvii. ϋ [L nirg. Tr rarg. κορβαν'\ {τον Upov θησαυρόν, καλίίΓω if κορβαναί, Josejih. b. j. 2, 9,4).• Kop< (in Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 2 sqq. with the Grk. ter- minations -tou, η-, -ην), 6, (Ilebr. nip i. e. ice, hail), Ko- Tnh ( Vulg. Core), a man who, with others, rebelled against Moses (Num. xvi.) : Jmh; 11.* Koptvw|jii; {κόροί satiet)•); to satiate, sale, salisf// : 1 aor. pass. ptcp. κορ^σθίντα, as in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, w. gen. of the thing with wliich one is filled [B. § l.'i2, 19], τροφής, Acts xxvii. 38 ; trop. (pf.) κικορισμί- yot (OTt, every wish is satisfied in the enjoyment of the consummate Messianic blessedness, 1 Co. iv. 8.* Κορίνθιο;, -ου, ό, α Corinthian, an inhnliilant of Corinth: Acts xviii. 8 ; 2 Co. vi. U. [(Hdt., Xen., al.)]• Κόρινθο?, -ου, ή, Corinth, the metropolis of Achaia proper, situated on the isthmus of the Peloponnesus be- twi-en the yEgean and Ionian Seas (hence called bimaris, llor.car. 1, 7, 2; Ovid.metam. 5, 407), and having two harbors, one of which called Cenchrcic (see Ktyxptai) was the roadstead for ships from Asia, the other, called Lechaeon or Lecha!um, for ships from Italy. It was utterly destroyed by L. Mummius, the Roman consul, in the Achaean war, B. c. 14i; ; but after the lapse of a century it was rebuilt by Julius Caesar [b. c. 44]. It was emi- nent in commerce and wealth, in literature and the arts, especially the study of rhetoric and philosophy ; but it was notorious also for luxury and moral corruption, particularly the foul worship of Venus. Paul came I ο the city in his second missionary journey, [c.] A. D. 53 or 54, and founded there a Christian church: Acts xviii. 1 ; xix. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 1, 23 ; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [BB. DD. s. v.; Diet, of Geogr. s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 209 sqq.] * Κορνήλιος, -oi), 0, a Lat. name, Cornelius, a Roman centurion living at Caesarea, converted to Christianity by Peter: Acts x. 1 sqq.* Kopos, -ου, 6, (Ilebr. 13), α corns or cor [cf. Ezek. .\lv. 14], the largest Hebrew dry measure (i. e. for wheat, meal, etc.); ace. to Josephus (antt. 15, 9, 2) equal to ten Attic medimni, [but cf. B.D. s. v. AVeights and Meas- ures sub fin. ; F. H. Cornier in the Bible Educator, iii. 10 sq.] : Lk. xvi. 7 [λ. V. measure]. (.Sept. [Lev. xxvii. 16; Num. .xi. 32]; 1 K. iv. 22 ; v. 11 ; 2 Chr. ii. 10; [xxvii. 5].) • κοσμί'ω, -<3; 3 pers. plur. impf. (κύσμουν; 1 aor. ('κό- σμησα ; pf. pass, κικόσμημαι ; {κόσμος) ; 1. Ιο put in order, arrange, make ready, prepare: τάςλαμπάΒας, put in order [A. V. inm], Mt. xxv. 7 (δόρπ-οι-, Hom. Od. 7, 1 .! ; τράπιζαν, Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 6 ; 6,11; Sept. Ezek. xxiii. 41 for γ>ί\. Sir. xxix. 26; προσφοράκ. Sir. 1. 14, and other exx. elsewhere). 2. to ornament, adorn, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Ilesiod down; Sept. several times for m;;) ; prop. : υΐκο», in pass., Mt. xii. 44 ; Lk. xi. 2.'> ; τΑ μνημύα, to decorate [A.V. i/arnlsh], .Mt. xxiii. 29 (τύφους, Xen. mem. 2, 2, 13) ; τύ irpov λίθοις και άναθίμασι, in pass. Lk. -xxi. 5 ; τους θ(μί\ίυυς του τίίχους λίθω Τίμίιρ, Rev. xxi. 19; τίνά (with garments), νύμφην, pass. Rev. xxi. 2 ; ίαυτάς tv τινι, 1 Tim. ii. 9 (on this pass, see κατα- στολή, 2). nietaph. i. q. to embellish with honor, gain honor, (Pind. nem. 6, 78 ; Thuc. 2, 42 ; κ(κοσμ. τή aptrg, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 21) : ίαυτάς, foil, by a l)lcp. designating the act by which the honor is gained, 1 Pet. iii. 5 ; την διδβ- σκαλίαν iv πάσιν, in all things, Tit. ii. 10.* κοσ-μικό;, -ή, -όν, (κόσμος), of or belonging Ιο the world (Vulg. .<(iiru/aW.s) ; i.e. 1. relating to Ihe universe: τουρανοΰ TouSf και τών κοσμικών πάντων, Aristot. phys. 2, 4 p. 1 96•, 25 ; opp. to ανθρώπινος, Lcian. paras. 1 1 ; κοσμχκη δκίτα|ΐΓ, Plut. consul, ad ApoU. c. 34 p. 119e. 2. earthly: το αγιον κοσμικόν, [its] earthly sanctuary [ll.V. of this worlil~\, Ileb. ix. 1. 3. worldly, i. e. having the character of this (present) corrupt age: a! κοσ/ιικαΐ ΐπιθυμίαι. Tit. ii. 12 ; (so also in eccles. writ.).* κόσμιο;, -ov, of three term, in class. Grk., cf. WH. App. p. I.i7; W. § 11, 1; [B. 25 (22 sq.)], (κόσμος), well-orranged, seemly, modest: 1 Ί im. ii. 9[\VIInirg. -μίως] ; of a man living Λvitll decorum, a well-ordered life, 1 Tim. iii. 2. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Lya., al.) [Cf. Trench § xcii.] * f κο<Γμ(ω5, adv. {decently), fr. κόσμιος, q. v. : 1 Tim. ii. 9 \V1I mrg. (Arstph., Isocr., al.)*] κοσ-μοκράτωρ, -ορός, ό, (κόσμος ami κρατάω), lord of the ivorld, prince of lias agt : tlie devil an, opp. to tlie dead. Col. ii. 20 (λτ/στης ην κα\ κλίπτης iv τω κόσμω, \. e. among those living on eartli, Ev. Nicod. 26). Hy a usage foreign to prof. anth. 5. the inhabitants of the icurlil : θίατρυν ΐγινήθημιν τω κόσμω και oyyEXots κ. άνθρώποις, 1 Co. iv. 9 [W. 127 (121)]; par- ticularly the inhabitants of the earth, men, the human race (first so in Sap. [e. g. x. 1]) : Mt. xiii. 38 ; xviii. 7 ; Mk. xiy.9; Jn. i. 10, 29, [36 L in br.]; iii.l6sq.; vi. 33, 51 ; viii. 26; xii.47; .xiii. 1 ; .xiv. 31 ; xvi. 28; xvii. 6, 21, 23; Ro. iii. 6, 19; 1 Co. i. 27 sq. [cf. W. 189 (178)]; iv. 13; v. 10; xiv. 10; 2 Co. v. Ill; Jas. ii. 5 [cf. W. u. s.]; 1 Jn. ii. 2 [cf. W. 577 (536)]; άρχα'ιυς κόσμος, of the antediluvians, 2 Pet. ii. 5 ; γιννάσθΜ fif τ. κ• Jn. xvi. 21 ; ίρχ(σθαι f if τον κόσμον (Jn. ix. 39) ami (!ς τ. κ- τοντον, to make its appear- ance or come into existence among men, spoken of the light which in Christ shone upon men, Jn. i. 9 ; iii. 19, cf. xii. 46 ; of the Messiah, Jn. vi. 14 ; xi. 27 ; of Jesus as the Messiah, Jn. ix. 39 ; xvi. 28 ; xviii. 37 ; 1 Tim. i. 15 ; also (Ισίρχίσθαι «ί τ. κ. Ileb. χ. 5; of false teachers, 2 Jn. 7 (yet here L Τ Tr WIl ίξίρχ- fU τ. κ. ; [so all texts in 1 Jn. iv. 1]); to invade, of evils coming into existence among men and beginning to exert their power: of sin and death, Ro. v. 1 2 (of death. Sap. ii. 24 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3, 4 ; of idolatry. Sap. xiv. 14). άποστΐ\\(ΐν τινά «Γ τ. ν, 2 Pet. ii. 5. 6. tlte ungodly multitude; the u-hole mass of men alienated from God, and therefore hostile to the cause of Christ [cf. W. 26]: Jn. vii. 7; .xiv. [17], 27; xv. 18 eq. ; xvi. S, 20, 33 ; xvii. 9, 14 sq. 25 ; 1 Co. i. 21 ; vi. 2; xi. 32 ; 2 Co. vii. 10 ; Jas. i. 27 ; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; 2 Pet. i. 4; ii. 20; 1 Jn. iii. 1, 13; iv. 5; v. 19; of the aggregate of ungodly and Avicked men in O. T. times, Heb. xi. 38 ; in Noah's time, ibid. 7 ; with οίτοΓ added, Eph. ii. 2 (on which see αιών, 3 ) ; tivai ix τοΟ κ. and ix τοϋ κ• τούτον (see (Ιμί, V. 3 d.), Jn. viii. 23; xv. 19; xvii. 14, 16; 1 .In. iv. i> ; \aXf~iv ix τοϋ κόσμον, to speak in accordance with the world's character and mode of thinking, 1 Jn. iv. 5; ό άρχων τον κ. τούτου, i. e. the devil, .Τη. xii. 31 ; xiv. 30; xvi. 11 ; 6 iv τω χ. he that is operative in the world (also of the devil), 1 Jn. iv. 4 ; το πν^ϊιμα τοΟ κ. 1 Co. ii. 12; ή σοφία τοΰ κ. τούτον, ibid. i. 20 [here G L ΤΤγ λν^ΙΊ 0Π1. τοΰτ.]; iii. 19. [τα στοιχΰα τοΰ κό- σμου, Gal. iv. 3 ; Col. ii. 8, 20, (see 5 above, and στοι- Xfiov, 3 and 4).] 7. worldly affairs ; the aijijregate of tilings earthly; the whole circle of earthly goods, endow- ments, riches, advantages, pleasures, etc., which, although hollow and frail and fleeting, stir desire, seduce from God and are obstacles to the cause of Christ: Gal. vi. 14; 1 Jn. ii. 16 sq. ; iii. 17; €ivai ix τον κ., to be of earthly origin and nature, Jn. xviii. 36; somewhat differently in 1 Jn. ii. 16 (on ivhich see (Ιμί, V. 3 d.) ; Kfphalvfiv top K- όλον, Mt. xvi. 26; Jlk. viii. 36 ; Lk. ix. 25; o! χρώμ(νοι τω κ, τούτω [crit. txt. τον κόσμον. see χμωιμαι, 2], 1 Co. vii. 31*; μ^ριμναν τα τον κ. 33 S(j. ; φιΚος and φιλία τον κ. .las. iv. 4 ; αγαπάν τον κ. 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; νικάν τον κ., the in- centives to sin proceeding from the world, 1 .In. v. 4 S(|. ; the obstacles to God's cause, Jn. xvi. 33 ; [cf. ΛΛ'τω χάρις χ. παρ(\θίτω 6 κόσμος οίτοί. Teaching of the Twelve Apostles, c. 10]. 8. any aggregate or general col- lection of particulars of any sort [cf. Eng. "a Avorld of curses "(Shakspere), etc.]: ό κόσμος της αδικίας, the sum of all iniquities, .Las. iii. 6 ; τοΰ πιστού όλος ό κόσμος των χρημάτων, τοϋ δί απίστου oiSf όβολός (a statement due to the Alex, translator), Prov. xvii. 6. Among the X. 'Γ. writers no one uses κόσμος oftener than John ; it oceur.s in Mark three times, in Luke's writings four times, and in the Apocalypse three times. Cf. Kreiss, Sur le .■■ens du mot κόσμος dans le N. T. (Strasb. 1837) ; DUaterdicrk on 1 .Tn. ii. 15, pp. 247-259; Zezschwitz, Profangriicitiit u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 21 sqq. ; Diestel in Herzog xvii. p. 676 sq(|.; [Trench, Syn. § lix.]; on .Tohn's use of the word cf. Reuss, Histoire de la th^ologie chretienne au siecle apostolique, ii. p. 463 sqq. [i.e. livre vii. eh. viii.]; cf. his Johanneische Theologie, in the Beitrage zu den theol. Wissenschaften, Fasc. i. p. 29 sqq.; [Westcott on Jn. i. 10, '.\dditional Note'].* Κούαρτος 358 κραταιοΰ» Kotiapros, -ου, 4, (a Lat. name), Quartus, an unknown Christian: Ro. xvi. 23.• Ko5(ii, Tr txt. κοϊμ, Τ λνΐΐ κονμ, (the Hebr. 'Oip [impv. fera. ; the other (niasc.) form niiist be regarded as hav- ing become an inti'rjeetioii]), iirise: Mk. v. 41.' κο«(Γτω8ία, -at [B. 17 (Ui)J, ή, (a Lat. word), (/iinrrf: used of the Roman soldiers guarding the sepulchre of Christ, Mt. xxvii. 65 sq. ; xxviii. 11. (Ev. Kic. c. 13.) * κο«φ[ζω : imi)f. 3 pers. plur. ΐκοι'φιζον ; {κοΰφος light) ; 1. intrans. Ό be light (lies., Eur., Uio C). 2. fr. Ilippocr. down generally trans, lo lighten : a ship, by tluDwing the cargo overboard, Acts xxvii. 38. (Sept. Jonah i. .5, and often in Polyb.) * κόφινοβ, -ου, ό, α hask'et, wicker basket, [cf. B. D. s. v. Basket]: Mt. xiv. 20; [xvi. H] ; Mk. vi. 43; [viii. 1!)]; Lk.ix.17; .In.vi.l3. (.Tiidg. vi. I'J; Ps. Lxx.x. (Ixxxi.) 7 ; Arstph. av. 1310; Xon. mem. 3, 8, 6 ; al.) * κράββατοΐ (L Τ Tr AVI I κμά3αττοί; cod. Sin. κράβακτοί [exc. in Acts v. 15; cf. KC. Nov. Test, ad fid. cod. Vat. praef. p. Ixxxi. sq. ; Til/. Proleg. p. 80]), -ου, ό, (Lat. grabatu.-<), a pallet, ramp bed, (a rather mean bed, hold- ing only one person, called by the Greeks σκίμνονί, σκιμπό^ιον) : Mk. ii. 4, 9, 11 sq. ; vi. 55; Jn. v. 8-Γ2 [in 12 Τ WII om. Tr br. the cl] ; Acts v. 15 ; ix. 33. Cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. l"5sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 62; Volkmar, Marcus u. d. Synopse u.s.w. p. 131; IMcClellan, New Testament etc. p. 106 ; W. 25].* κρά^ω (with a long ; hence ptcp. κράζον. Gal. iv. 6 L Τ TrWH [(where RG^pafw); cf. B.61 (53)]) ; impi. ίκρα- ζοψ; fut. κ(κράξομαι (Lk. .xix. 40 RGLTrmrg.), and κράξω (ibid. Τ WII Trtxt.), the former being more com. in Grk. writ, and used by the Sept. (cf. Mic. iii. 4 ; .lob xxxv. 1 2, etc. [but άνα-κράξομ,αι, Joel iii. 16 Alex. ; cf. W. 279 (262); esp. Β as below]); 1 aor. ίκραξα (once viz. Acts xxiv. 21 TTrWII ϊκίκραξα, a reduplicated form freq. in Sept. [e. g. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 6 ; Judg. iii. 15, 1 Mace. xi. 49, etc. ; see Λ^eitch s. v.] ; more com. in native Grk. writ, is 2 aor. ίκραγονί" the simple expayov seems not to occur in good Attic " (\^eitch s. v.)]) ; pf. κίκραγα, with pres. force [W. 274 (258)] (Jn. i. 15); cf. Bllm. Ausf. Si)r. ii. p. 223 ; B. 61 (53) ; Kiihner i. p. 851 ; [esp. \'eitch s. v.] ; Sept. for p;v^ ρ;•ν, Nip, y^U ; [fr. Aes- chyl. down] ; 1. jirop. [onoraatopoetic] tn crnal• (Germ, krachzen), of the cry of the raven (Theophr.) ; hence univ. In erg nut, erg alnu/l, rnciferatf : particularlv of inarticulate cries, Mk. v. 5 ; ix. 26 ; xv. 39 [here Τ WH om. Tr br. κρ.] ; Lk. ix. 39 ; Rev. xii. 2 ; άπο τον φόβου, Mt. xiv. 26 ; with φωνή peyoKri added. Mt. xxvii. 50; Mk. i. 26 [here TTrWH φωκ^σαι/] ; Acts vii. 57; Rev. X. 3 ; οπισθίν nvos, to cry after one, follow him up with outcries, Mt. xv. 23 ; like Π;;; and ρ;•Υ (Gen. iv. 10; xviii. 20), i. q. tn erg or prng for vengeance, Jas. v. 4. 2. tocrgi.e. call nut alnuiJ,.'liy, Π>'ί"ΐΓ\, etc.; a crying, outcry, clamor: Mt. xxv. 6;' Lk. 1.42 TWHTrtxt.; Acts xxiu. 9; Eph.iv. 31, and R G in Rev. xiv. 1 8 ; of the wailing of those in dis- tress, Heb. V. 7 ; Rev. xxi. 4.* κρία,ζ,τό, [cf. Lat. caro, cruor; Curtius § 74], plur. (tpc'a (cf. W. 65 (63); [B. 15 (13)]); [fr. Horn, down]; Sept. very often for Ιψ2 : (the) Jlesh (of a, sacrificed animal) : Ro. xiv. 21 ; 1 Co. viii. 13.• κρίίττων and (1 Co. vii. 38 ; Phil. i. 23 ; in other places the reading varies between the two forms, esp. in 1 Co. vii. 9 [here TTrWHLtxt. -n-] ; .xi. 17; Heb. vi. 9 [here and in the preced. pass. LTTrWH -σσ-; see WH. App. p. 148 sq. ; cf. Σ, σ, s]) κράσσων, -όνος, neut. -ov, (com par. of κρατϋς, see κράηστος, cf. Kiihner i. p. 436 ; [B. 27 (24)]), [fr. Hom. down], better; i. e. a. 7nore useful, more serviceable : 1 Co. xi. 1 7 ; xii. 31 R G ; Heb. xi. 40 ; xii. 24 ; with ττολλώ μάλλον added, Phil. i. 23 [cf. μάλλον, 1 b.]; κρι'ϊσσον (adv.) ποκΐκ, 1 Co. vii. 38; κρι'.τ- τόν (στιν, it is more advantageous, foil, by an inf., 1 Co. vii. 9; 2 Pet. ii. 21, [cf. B. 217 (188); W. §41 a. 2 a]. b. more excellent: Heb. i. 4; vi. 9; vii. 7, 19, 22; viii. 6; ix. 23 ; X. 34 ; xi. 16, 35 ; κρ. (, |)hir. KprjTes, a Cretan, an inhabitant of tlie island of Crete : Acts ii. 11 ; Tit. i. 12 [cf. Farrar, St. Paul, ii. 534].• Κρήο-κηί [of. B. 17 (!■"))], 6, Lat. Crescens, an un- known man : 2 Tim. iv. 10.* Κρήτη, -T)5, ή, Crete, tlie largest and most fertile island of the Alediterranean archipelago or iEgean Sea, now called Camii'a: Acts xxvii. 7, 12 sq. 21 ; Tit. i. 5. [Diet, of (Jeog. or McC. and S. s. v.]• κριθή, -ης, η, (in Grk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] only in I)liir. αί κρίθιύ), Sept. for ni>'u', barley: Rev. vi. (i κριβηί Κ(•,.κριθωι>1.νΎν\νΗ.•' κρ(θινοΐ, -η, -ον. (κριθή), n/harlcfi, made nf barley : άρτοι (2 Κ. iv.42,cf. Judg. vii. 13), Jn. vi. 9. 1 .Ί. [(Ilippon., al.)]* κpCμα [GTWII] or κρΊμα [L Tr (more commonly)] (on the accent cf. AV. p. 50; Lipstus, Grammat. Unter- such. p. 40 sq. [who gives the preference to κρίμα, as do Bttm. 73 (64) ; Cobet (N. T. ad fid. etc. p. 49 sq.) ; Fritzsche{Rom. vol. i. 9G,107); al.; "videturi antiipiitati Graecae, / Alexandrinae aetati placuisse," Tilf. Proleg. to Sept. ed. 4 p. xxx.; on the accent in extant codd. see Tdf. Troleg. p. 101 ; cf.esp. Lnberl; Paralip. p. 418]), -τογ, TO, (fr. κρίνω, q. v. ; as κ\ΐμα fr. κλι'κω), [Aeschyl. down], Sejjt. very often for ODC/p ; 1. a decree : jihir., τοϋ Bfov, Ro. xi. 33 [al. here (with X. V.) judgments; cf. Weiss in Meyer ad loc.] (Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 75). 2. judgment; i. e. condemnation of wrong, the decision (whether severe or milil) wliioh one passes on the faults of others : κρίματί τιυι Kpivfiv, Sit. vii. 2. In a forensic sense, the sentence of a j udge: with a gen. of the pun- ishment to which one is sentenced, θάνατον, Lk. xxiv. 20; esp. the sentence of (Jod as judge: το κρίμα . . . ds κατάκριμα, the judgment (in which God declared sin to be punishable with de.atli) issued in condemnation, i. e. was condemnation to all who sinned and therefore paid the pen.-ilty of death Ilo. v. 16; esp. where the justice of God in punishing is to be shown, κρίμα denotes condemnatorg sentence, penal Judgment, sentence, 2 Pet. ii. 3 : Jude 4 ; with gen. of the one who pronounces judgment, τοΰ Scoi, Ro. ii. l; s; τινά or rl foil, by a predicate ace, κρίναν τίνα Λξιόν tivos, to judge one (to be) worthy of a thing. Acts xiii. 46 ; 'tmcrro» KpivfToi, Acts xxvi. 8. 4. to dclrrmine, rrsolre, de- cree: Ti, 1 Co. vii. 37 (κρϊναί ri καΐ προβίσθαι, Polyb. 3, 6, 7 ; TO κριθίν, which one has determined on, one's re- solve, 5, 52, G ; 9, 1 3, 7 ; τοΐί κριθΐΊσι ίμμίναν bei, Epict. diss. 2, 15, 7 sqq.) ; δόγματα, pass, [the decrees that had been ordained (cf. A. V.)], Acts xvi. 4; roCro κρίνατι, foil, by an inf. preceded by the art. ro, Ro. xiv. 13 ; also with (μαυτ^ added, for myself \. e. for my own benefit κρίνω 361 Acpiatf (lest I should prepare p-ief fo•• myself by being com- pelled to grieve you), 2 Co. ii. 1 ; foil, by an inf., Acts x.x. IG; .xxv. 25; iCo. ii. 2 GLTTrWH [(see below)]; V. 3; Tit. iii. 12. (1 Mace. -\i. 33; 3 Mace. i. 6; vi. 30; Judith .\i. 13; Sap. viii. 9; Diod. 17, 95; Joseph, antt. 7, 1, 5; 12, 10, 4; 13, 6, 1); with τοΰ prefixed, 1 Co. ii. 2 Ilec. [(see above)] ; foil, by the ace. with inf. Acts .xxi. 25 (2 Mace. xi. 36) ; with τοΰ prefixed. Acts xxvii. 1 [cf. B. § UO, 168.]; (κρ/ι/€ταί Tiw, it is one's pleasure, iV seems good to one, 1 Esdr. vi. 20 (21) sq.; viii. 90 (92)). 5. lojuilrje; a. to pronounce an opinion concerning rif/lit and icrong; o. in a forensic sense [(differing from βικάζ(ΐν, the official term, in giving prominence to the intellectual process, the sifting and weighing of evi- dence)], of a human judge : τινά, to give a decision re- specting one, Jn. vii. 51 ; κατά τόκ νόμον, Jn. .xviii. 31 ; Acts xxiii. 3 ; xxiv. 6 Rec. ; the substance of the de- cision is added in an inf., Acts iii. 13 ; pass, to he judged, Ϊ. e. summoned to trial that one's case mag be examined and judgment passed upon it. Acts xxv. 10 ; xxvi. 6 ; Ro. iii. 4 (fr. Ps. 1. (Ii.) 6 (4)) ; ntpi w. gen. of the thing. Acts xxiii. 6 ; xxiv. 21 ; [x.xv. 20] ; with addition of fVt and the gen. of the judge, before one, Acts x.xv. 9. Where the context requires, used of a condemnatory judgment, i. q. In condemn : simply. Acts xiii. 27. β. of the judg- ment of God or of Jesus the Messiah, deciding between the righteousness and the unrighteousness of men : absol., Jn. V. 30; viii. 50 ; δίκαιοι!, 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; tv δικαιοσΰντ). Rev. xix. 1 1 ; Tira, 1 Co. V. 13; pass. Jas. ii. 12; ζώντας κ. vixpois, 2 Tim. iv. 1 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; ν(κροϋς, pass.. Rev. xi. 18 [B. 2G0 (224)] ; την oικoυμίvηv,t):\e inhabitants of the world, Acts .xvii. 31 [cf. W. 389 (364)] ; τοκ κ6σμον, Ro. iii. 6 ; τα κρυπτά των ανθρώπων, Ro. ii. 1 6 ; κρίνΐΐν το κρίμα Tivbs €κ Tirar (see κρίμα, 2 sub fin.). Rev. xviii. 20, cf. vi. 10; Kpiveiv κατά τά (κάστου fpynv. 1 Pet. i. 1 7 ; tovs νικροϋς €K των -γίγραμμίνων cV τοις βιβλίοις κατά τά ΐργα αυτών, pass.. Rev. χχ. 1 2 sq. ; with ace. of the substance of the judgment, thou didst pronounce thii judgment, ταντα (Kpivas, Rev. xvi. 5 ; contextually, used specifically of the act of condemning and decreeing (or inflicting) pen- altg on one: τινά, Jn. iii. 18; v. 22; xii. 47 sq. ; Acts vii. 7 ; Ro. ii. 12 ; 1 Co. xi. 31 s^\. ; 2 Th. ii. 12 ; Heb. X. 30; xiii. 4; 1 Pet, iv. 6 [cf. AV. 630 (585)] ; Jas. v. 9 (where Rec. κατακρ) ; Rev. xviii. 8 ; xix. 2, (Sap. xii. 10, 22); τον κόσμοΐί, op]), to σώζαν, Jn. iii. 17 ; xii. 47; of the devil it is said ό ήρχιαν τοϋ κόσμου τούτου κίκριται, because the victorious cause of Christ has rendered the supreme wickedness of Satan evident to all, and put an end to his power to dominate and destroy, Jn. xvi. 11. γ. of Christians as hereafter to sit with Christ at the judgment : τον κήσμον, 1 Co. vi. 2 : άγγίΧους, ib. 3 [cf. oyyiXos, 2 sub fin.; yet see Meyer ed. Hainrici ad U. cc.]. b. to pronounce judgment ; to subject to cen- sure; of those who act the part of judges or arbiters in the matters of common life, or pass judgment on the deeds and words of others : univ. and without case, Jn. viii. 16, 26 ; κατά τι, Jn. viii. 15 ; κατ όψιν, Jn. vii. 24 ; tv κρίματί Tiw Kplvciv, Mt. vii. 2 ; Tira, pass, [with nom. of pers.], Rom. iii. 7 ; ίκ τοϋ στόματος σον κρίνω σί, out of thine own mouth (i. e. from what thou hast just said) will I take the judgment that must be passed on thee, Lk. xix. 22 ; τί, 1 Co. x. 15 ; pass. ib. 29 ; το δίκαιον, Lk. .xii. 57 ; foil, by d, whether. Acts iv. 19 ; with ace. of the substance of the judgment : τί i. e. κρίσιν τινά, 1 Co. iv. 5; κρίσιν Kpiveiv (Plat. rep. 2 p. 300 d.) δικαίαν [cf. B. § lol, 5], Jn. vii. 24 (αΚηθινην (c. δικαίαν, Tob. iii. 2; κρίσ^ΐί αδίκου!, .Sus. 53) ; of the di^ciIllinary judgment to which Christians subject the conduct of their fellows, passing censure upon them as the facts require, 1 Co. v. 12 ; of those who judge severely (unfairly), finding fault with this or that in others, Mt. vii. 1 ; Lk. vi. 3 7 ; Ro. ii. 1 ; τινά, Ro. ii. 1, 3 ; xiv. 3 sq. 10, 13 ; foil, by tV with dat. of the thing. Col. ii. 16 ; Ro. xiv. 22 ; hence i. q. to condemn : Ro. ii. 27 ; Jas. iv. 11 sq. 6. Hebraisti- cally i. q. to rule, govern ; to preside over tcith the poicer of giving judicial decisions, because it was the prerogative of kings and rulers to pass judgment : Mt. xix. 28 ; Lk. xxii. 30, (τον \αόν, 2 Κ. χ v. 5 ; 1 Mace. L\. 73 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 3, 3 ; οί κρίνοντα τ. γην, Ps. ii. 10; Sap. i. 1 ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1463 sq.). 7. Pass, and mid. to contend together, of warriors and combatants (Hom., Diod., al.); to dispute (Hdt. 3, 120; Arstph. nub. 66) ; in a forensic sense, to go to latv, have a suit at law: with dat. of the pers. with whom [\V. § 31, 1 g.], Mt. v. 40 (Job ix. 3 ; xiii. 19 ; Eur. Med. 609) ; foil, by μ€τά with gen. of the pers. with whom one goes to law, and f'ni with gen. of the judge, 1 Co. vi. (1), 6. [CoMP. : ava-, άπο-, άντ-αηο- (-/lat), δια-, tv-, ΐπι-, κατά-, συν-, ίπο- (-μιιι). σνν- υπο-(-/χαι).] * KpCo-is, -(ως, η. Sept. for ΓΙ, 3"» (a suit), but chiefly for Dap'•?•. in Grk. writ. [(fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down)] 1. α separating, sundering, separation; a trial, contest. 2. selection. 3. judgment ; i. e. opinion or decision given concerning anything, esp. con- cerning justice and injustice, right and wrong; a. univ.: .In. viii. 16; 1 Tim. v. 24 (on which see ϊπακοΧου- θίω) ; Jude 9 ; 2 Pet. ii. 1 1 ; κρίσιν κρίν€ΐν (see κρίνω, 5 b.), .Jn. vii. 24. b. in a forensic sense, of the judgment of God or of Jesusthe Messiah: univ., Jas. ii. 13; 2 Th. i. 5 ; Ileb. x. 27 ; plur., Rev. xvi. 7 ; xix. 2 ; of the last judgment: Heb. ix. 27; ή ήμίρα κρίσιω: [Mt. χ. 15;xi. 22, 24; xii. 36; Mk. vi. 11 R L in br. ; 2 Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7] or tjjs κρίσ(ω! [1 .Τη. iv. 17], the day appointed for the judgment, see fjpfpa, 3 ; (Ις κρίσιν μ(γά\η! ημίρας, Jude 6 ; ή ώρα τη! κρίσιω! αϋτοΰ, i.e. τοΰ β(οΰ, Kev. xiv. 7; tv τη κρίσιι, at the time of the judgment, when the judgment shall take place, Mt. xii. 41 sq. ; Lk. x. 14; xi. 31 s(|. ; κρίσιν iroie'iv κατά πάντων, to execute judgment against (i. e. to the destruction of) all. .Jude 15. spec. sentence of condemnation, damnatory judgment, condem- nation and punishment : Heb. x. 27 ; 2 Pet. ii. 4 ; with gen. of the pers. condemned and punished. Rev. xviii. 10 ; ή κρίσΐ! αϋτοΰ ήρθη, the punishment appointed him was taken away, i. e. was ended, Acts viii. 33 fr. Is. liii. 8 Sept.; wijrrfii' «r κρίσιν [R" fit ΰπόκρισινί, to become liable to condemnation, Jas. v. 12; αϊώνιο! κρίσΐ!, eternal Κρί'στΓοϊ 362 κρντΓτω damnation, Mk. iii. 29 [Rcc] ; ή κρίσα τη{ yf/vw/r, the judgment condemning one to Gelieiina, tlie jienalty of Gehenna, i. e. to be suffered in hell, Mt. xxiii. 3.i. In John's usage κρίσκ denotes a. tliat judgment whieh Christ occasioned, in that wicked men rejected the salvation he offered, and so of their own accord brought upon themselves misery and punishment : αντη (tTTtu ή κρίσΐϊ, ότι etc. judgment takes place by the en- trance of the hght into the world and the hatred which men have for this light, iii. 19; κρίσιν noif'iv, to execute judgment, v. 27; ΐρχίαθαι ds κρ. to come into the state of one condemned, ib. 24 ; κρ. τοϋ κόσμου τούτου, the condemnatory sentence passed upon this world, in that it is convicted of wickedness and its power broken, xii. 31 ; irepi κμίσίως, of judgment passed (see κρίνω, 5 a. β. fin.), xvi. 8, 11. β. the last judgment, the damna- tion of the wicked : άνάστασα κρίσ(ω!, followed by con- demnation, V. 29 [cf. W. § 30, 2 β.]. y. both the preceding notions are combined in v. 30 ; ή κρίσΐ! πάσα, the whole business of judging [cf. W. 548 (510)], ib. 22. Cf. Groos, Der Begrill der κρίσα bei Johannes (in tlie Stud. u. Krit. for 18(58, pp. 244-273). 4. Like the Chald. ayi (Dan. vii. 10, 26; cf. Germ. Gericht) i. i[. the college nfjuilijes (a tribunal of seven men in the sev- eral cities of Palestine; as distinguished from the San- hedrin, which had its seat at Jerusalem [cf. Scliiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23, ii. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- siah, ii. 287]) : Mt. v. 21 sq. (cf. Deut. xvi. 18; 2 Chr. xix. 6 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 14 ; b. j. 2, 20, 5). 5. Like the Hebr. ϋρ•!??•? (cf. Gesenius, Thes. iii. p. 1464'' [also Sept. in Gen. xviii. 19, 25; Is. v. 7; Ivi. 1; lix. 8; Jer. xvii. 11 ; 1 Mace. vii. 18; and other pass, referred to in Gesenius 1. c.]), rif/lit,Jn.ilice : Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42; what shall have the force of right, anayyeWiiv rtvl, Mt. xii. 18; a Just cause, Mt. .xii. 20 (on which see cV βιάλλω, 1 g.).• KpCd-iros, -ου, 6. Crispus, the ruler of a synagogue at Corinth, Acts xviii. 8 ; baptized by Paul, 1 Co. i. 14.* κριτήριον, -ου, τό, (fr. κριτήρ, i. q. κριτής) ; 1. prop, the instrument or means of trijiny or judijing anything; the rule hij which one judges, (Plat., Plut., al.). 2. the place ivhere juilgmenl is given; the tri- bunal of a judge ; a bench of judges : plur., 1 Co. vi. 2 ; Jas. ii. 6, (Sept. ; Plat., Polyb., Pint., al.). 3. in an exceptional usage, the matter judged, thing to be de- cided, suit, case : plur. 1 Co. vi. 4 [this sense is denied by many ; cf. e. g. Meyer on vs. 2].* κριτή?, -οϋ, ό, (κρίνω), [fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down], Sept. chiefly for ΰ2ύ ; a judge ; 1. univ. one who passes, or arrogates to himself, judgment on anything: w. gen. of the object, Jas. iv. 11 ; w. gen. of quality (see διαλογίσμόί, 1), Jas. ii. 4; in a forensic sense, of the one who tries and decides a case [cf. δικαστής, fin.] : Mt. v. 25; Lk. xii. 14 LTTrWH, 58; [xviii. 2]; w. gen. of quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. § 34, 3 b.], της ά&ικίας, Lk. xviii. 6 ; w. gen. of the object (a thing), an arbiter. Acts xviii. 15 ; of a Roman procurator administering justice. Acts xxiv. 10; of God passing judgment on the charac- ter and deeds of men, and rewarding accordingly, Heb. xii. 23; Jas. iv. 12; alsoof Christ returning to sit in judg- ment. Acts X. 42 ; 2 Tim. iv. 8 ; Jas. v. 9 ; in a peculiar sense, of a person whose conduct is made the standard for iudging another and convicting him of wron^ : w. gen. of the object (a pers.), Mt. xii. 27; Lk. xi. 19. 2. like the Hebr. 030, of the leaders or rulers of the Israel- ites: Acts xiii. 20 (Judg. ii. 16, 18 sq. ; Ruth i. 1 ; Sir. X. 1 Si[. 24, etc.).• KpiTiKOs, -ή, -6v, (κρίνω), relating to judging, fit for judg- ing, skilleil in judging, (Plat., Plut., Lcian., al.) : with gen. of the obj., ΐνθυμησιων κ. fvvoiojv KapSlat, tracing out and passing judgment on the thoughts of the mind, Heb. iv. 1 2.• κροΰω ; 1 aor. ptcp. κρούσης ; to I'noclc : την θύραν, to knock at the door, Lk. xiii. 25; Acts xii. 13, (Arst])h. eccles. 317, 990 ; Xen. symp. 1,11; Plat. Prot. p. 3 1 υ a. ; 314 d.; symp. 212 c.; but κόπτ^ιν την θύραν is better, ace. to Phryn. with whom Lobeck agrees, p. 1 7 7 [cf. Schmidt (eh. 113, 9), who makes Kcnrreiv to knock with a heavy blow, κρού(ΐν to knock with the knuckles]) ; without την θύραν [cf. W. 593 (552)], Mt. vii. 7 s(j. ; Lk. xi. 9, 10; xii. 30; Acts xii. 16; Rev. iii. 20 (on which see θύρα, c. f.).* κρυτττή [so ir'^G L Τ Tr KC], (but some prefer to write it κρύπτη [so WH, Meyer, Bleek, etc., Chandler § 183; cf. Tdf. on Lk. as below]), -^r, ή, a crypt, covered way, vault, cellar: fls κρυπτήν, Lk. xi. 33 (Athen. 5 (4), 205 a. equiv. to κρυπτοί π(ριπατος p. 206; [Joseph, b. j. 5, 7, 4 fin.; Strab. 17, 1, 37]; Sueton. Calig. 58; Juvenal 5, 106; Vitruv. 6, 8 {:>) ; al.). Cf. Meyer ad 1. c. ; W. 238 (223).• Kpuirros, -η, -όν, (κρύπτω), [fr. Horn, down], hidden, con- cealed, secret : Mt. x. 26 ; Mk. iv. 22 ; Lk. viii. 1 7 ; xii. 2 [cf. W. 441 (410)]; ό κρντττος της καρδίας άνθρωπος, the inner part of man, the soul, 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; nout., (v τω κρυπτά), in secret, Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18 Rec. ; iv κρύπτω, pri- vately, in secret, Jn. vii. 4, 10; xviii. 20; ό iv κρύπτω 'λου^αΊος, he who is a Jew inwardly, in soul and not in circumcision alone, Ro. ii. 29 ; τα κρυπτά τοϋ σκότους, [the hidden things of darkness i. e.] things co\ered by darkness, 1 Co. iv. 5 ; τα κρ. των άνθρ. the things which men conceal, Ro. ii. 16; τα κρ. της καρδίας, his secret thoughts, feelings, desires, 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; τα κρ. της αισχύνης (see αισχύνη, 1), 2 Co. iv. 2; eis κρυπτόν into a secret place, Lk. xi. 33 in some edd. of Rec, but sec κρυτΓτη.' κρντΓτω : 1 aor. (Kpv\j/a ; Pass., pf . 3 pers. sing, κίκρυπται, ptcp. κίκρνμμίνος: 2 aor. ϊκρύβην (so also in Sept., for the earlier iκpύφηv, cf. Bitm. Ausf. S])r. i. p. 377 ; Fritzsche on Mt. p. 212; [Veitch s. v.]); [cf. καλύπτω; fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for Κ-3ΠΠ, ■>•ηθΠ, |£)s, pa, 1Π3, Τ\Β3 ; to hide, conceal ; a. prop. : τί, Mt. xiii. 44 and L Τ Tr WIlinxxv.l8; pass., Heb. xi. 23 ; Rev. ii. 17; κρυβηναι i. q. to be hid, escape notice, Mt. v. 14 ; 1 Tim. v. 25 ; iκpύβη ((juietly withdrew [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.]) κ. iξη\θfv, i. e. departed "secretly, Jn. viii. 59 [cf. W. 469 (437)]; κρύπτω τι iv with dat. of place, Mt. xxv. 25 ; pass. xiii. 44 ; K^ ; f αυτόν els with ace. of place, Rev. vi. 15; τίνα από προσώπου Ttvof to covei• (and remove [cf. VV. § 30, 6 b. ; 66, 2 d.]) from the view of any one, i. e. to take away, rescue, from the sight. Rev. vi. 10 ; ϊκρύβη άπ αυτών, withdrew from them, Jn. .xii. 36 (in Grk. auth. generally κρ. τινά τι; of. αποκρύπτω, b.). b. metaph. to conceal (that it may not become known) : κικρυμμίνοί, clandestine, Jn. xLx. 38; t\ από tivos (gen. of pers.), Mt. xi. 25 LTTr WH ; [Lk. xviii. 34] ; κίκρυμμίνα things hidden i. e. unknown, used of God's saving counsels, Mt. xiii. 3 J ; άπ' οφθαλμών tivos, Lk. xix. 42 [cf. B. § 146, 1 fin. CoMP. : άπο-, ev, π^ρι-κρντΓτω.^ * κρϊΐσ-ταλλίξω ; (κρύσταλλο?, q. v.) ; Ιο be of crystalline brightness and transparency ; to shine like crystal : Rev. xxi. 11. (Not found elsewhere.) * κρΰ<Γταλλθ9, -ου. ό, (fr. κρύος ice ; hence prop, anything congealed (cf. Lat. crusla) and transparent), [fr. Horn, down], crystal : a kind of precious stone, Rev. iv. 6 ; xxii. 1 ; [cf . B. D. s. V. Crystal. On its gend. cf . L. and S. s. v. II.] * Kp υφαΐοϊ, -αι'α, -aloi', (κρύφα), hidden, secret: twice in Mt. vi. 18 L Τ Tr Wn. (Jer. xxiii. 24 ; Sap. xvii. 3 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Find, down.) * κρυφή [L WH -φτ) ; cf . όκη, init.], adv., {κρύπτω), secret- ly, in secret: Eph. v. 12. (Find., Soph., Xen. ; Sept.) * κτάομαι, -ωμαι\ fut. κτήσομαι (Lk. xxi. 19 LTrWH) ; 1 aor. ΐκτησάμψ ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for njp ; to acquire, get or procure a thing yor one's self [cf. W. 260 (244)] ; (pf. κίκτημαι, to possess [cf. W. 274 (257) note] ; not found in the N. T.) : τι, Mt. x. 9 ; Acts viii. 20 ; οσα κτώμαι, all my income, Lk. xviii. 12; with gen. of price added [W. 206 (194)], πολλοΟ, Acts xxii. 28 ; with « and gen. of price (see ck, II. 4), Acts i. 18; το ί'αυτοϋ σκίΰοί iv άγίοσμώ κ. τιμή, to procure for himself his own Tessel (i. e. for tlie satisfaction ot the sexual passion ; see σκίϋοί, 1) in sanctification and honor, i. e. to marry a wife (opp. to the use of a harlot ; the words eV ay. κ- τιμή are added to express completely the idea of marrying in contrast with the baseness of procuring a harlot as his ' vessel * ; cf. κτασθαι -γυναίκα, of marrying a wife, Ruth iv. 10; Sir. xxxvi. 29 (xxxiii. 26); Xen. symp. 2, 1 0), 1 Th. iv. 4 ; Tat ψ-υχάί υμών, the true life of your souls, your true lives, i. e. eternal life (cf. the opp. ζημιοϋσθαι την ψ•, αίτοΰ under ζημιάω), Lk. xxi. 19; cf. Meyer ad 'loc. and W. p. 274 (257).* κτήμα, -Tos, τή, (fr. κτάομαι, as χρήμα fr. χράομαι), a possession : as in Grk. writers, of propert}•, lands, estates, etc. Mt. xix. 22; Mk. x. 22; Acts ii. 45; v. 1.• κτήνοϊ, -ουί, TO, (fr. κτάομαι; hence prop, a possession, property, esp. in cattle) ; a beast, esp. a beast of burden : Lk. X. 34 ; plur.. Acts x.xiii. 24 ; Rev. xviii. 13 ; it seems to be used for quadrupeds as opp. to fishes and birds in 1 Co. XV. 39 ; so for Π9Π3, Gen. i. 25 sq. ; ii. 20. [Cf. Horn. hymn. 30, 10; of swine in Folyb. 12, 4, 14.]* κτήτωρ, -οροί, 6, {κτάομαι), a possessor: Acts iv. 34. (Diod. excpt. p. 599, 17; Clem. Alex.; Byzant. writ.) * κτίζω : 1 aor. ίκτισα ; pf . pass, ΐκτισμαι ; 1 aor. pass. ίκτίαθην; Sept. chiefly for X"\3 ; prop, to make habitable, to people, a place, region, island, (Horn., Hdt., Thuc, Diod., al.) : hence to found, a city, colony, state, etc. (Find, et sqq. ; 1 Esdr. iv. 53). In the Bible, to create: of God creating the world, man, etc., Mk. xiii. 19; 1 Co. xi. 9; Col. i. 16 [cf. W. 272 (255)]; iii. 10; Eph. iii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; Rev. iy. 11 ; x. 6, (Deut. iv. 32 ; Eccl. xii. 1 ; often in O. T. Apocr., as Judith xiii. 18 ; Sap. ii. 23 ; xi. 18 (17) ; 3 Mace. ii. 9 ; [Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 1 ; Fhilo de decal. § 20]) ; absol. 6 «τι'σαΓ, the creator, Ro. i. 25 ; [Mt. xix. 4 Tr WH]; i. q. to form, shape, i. e. (for sub- stance) completely to change, to transform (of the moral or η e w creation of the soul, as it is called), κτισθίντα iv Χριστώ Ίησοϋ eVi cpyoif aya^ots, in intimate fellow- ship with Christ constituted to do good works [see iπi, B. 2 a. f.], Eph. ii. 10; Toit 8io €is ίνα καινον άνθρωπον, ibid. 15; τον κτισθ^ντα κατά θ(όν, formed after God's like- ness [see κατά, II. 3 c. δ.], Eph. iv. 24, (καρδίαν καθαρά» κτίσον iv ipoi, Fs. 1. (Ii.) 12).* κτίο -is, -(ω!, ή, (κτίζω), in Grk. writ, the act of founding, establishing,buildiiig, etc. ; in the N. T. (Vulg. everywhere creatura [yet Heb. ix. 11 creatio']) 1. the act of cre- ating, creation : τοϋ κόσμου, Ro. i. 20. 2. i. q. κτίσμα, creation i. e. thing created, [cf. W. 32] ; used a. of in- dividual things and beings, α creature, a creation : Ro. i. 25 ; Heb. iv. 13 ; any created thing, Ro. viii. 39 ; after a rabbin, usage (by wliich a man converted from idolatry to Judaism was called ΤΤάΊΓ\ Π•Ί3 [cf. Schottgen, Horae Hebr. i. 328, 70i sq.]), καιντ] κτίσις is used of a man regen- erated through Christ, Gal. vi. 15 ; 2 Co. v. 1 7. b. col- lectively, the sum or aggregate of created things: Rev. iii. 14 (on which see αρχή, 3 ; [ij κτίσΐί τ. ανθρώπων, Teach- in" of the Twelve etc. c. 16]) ; όλη ή κτίσκ. Sap. xi.x. 6; πάσα ή κτίσις, Judith xvi. 14; and without the art. (cf. Grimm on 3 Mace. [ii. 2] p. 235 ; [Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below]), πάσα κτίσις. Col. i. 15; 3 Mace. ii. 2; Judith i.\. 12; σωτηβ πάσης κτίσεως. Acta Thomae p. 19 ed. Thilo [§ 10 p. 198 ed. Tdf.], (.see πάϊ, I. 1 c.) ; άπ άρχης κτίσιως, Mk. χ. G ; xiii. 1 9 ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; ol ταύτης rijt κτίσεως, not of this order of created things, Heb. ix. 11; ace. to the demands of the context, of some particular kind or class of created things or beings : thus of the human race, πάσΐ} TTj KT. Mk. xvi. 15 ; iv πάση (Rec. adds tj) κτίσει τΐ] im6 t!)v olp-, among men of every race. Col. i. 23 ; the aggre- gate of irrational creatures, both animate and inanimate, (what Ave call nature), Ro. viii. 19-21 (Sap. v. 17 (18); xvi. 24) ; πάσα ij κτ. ibid. 22; where cf. Reiche, Philippi, Meyer, Riickert, al., [Arnold in Bapt. Quart, for Apr. 1867, pp. 143-153]. 3. an institution, ordinance: 1 Pet. ii. 13; cf. Huther ad loc. [(Find., al.)]* κτίσμα, -TO£, TO, (κτί^Ό)) ; thing founded ; created thing; (Vulg. creatura) [A. V. creature~} : 1 Tim. iv. 4 ; Rev. v. 13 ; viii. 9, (Sap. ix. 2 ; xiii. 5) ; contextually and met- aph. KT. θ(οΰ, transformed by divine power to a moral newness of soul, spoken of true Christians as created anew by regeneration [al. take it here unrestrictedly], Jas. i. 18 (see απαρχή, metaph. a. ; also κτί^ω sub fin., κτίσις, 2 a.) ; τά iv άρχη κτίσματα θ(οΰ, of the Israelites, Sir. xxxvi. 20 (15). [(Strab., Dion. H.)]* «TKTTijs' 364 Κ υρήντ) leriimis (on the accent of. W. § 6, 1 h. [cf. 94 (89) ; esp. Chandler §§ 35, 3G]), -ου, 6, (icTifai), a founder \ a creator [Aristot., I'liit., al.J: of (io(i, 1 i'et. iv. 19 [cf. W. 12J (IIG)]; (Jmliili ix. 12; Sir. xxiv. 8: 2 .vlacc. i. 24, etc.).• κυβ«ία Ι-βία Γ W'H ; see I, i],-af, ij. (fr. κυ^ίύω, anil this fr. Ki^fjor a cube, a die). i/icr-/ilai/iii(/ ( Xen., I'lat., Aristot., ai.y ; Irop. ή κ. των άνθρ- the deception [Λ. \. sleir/hQ of men, Kpu. iv. 1 1, because dice-pl.ayers sometimes cheated and dofriiuded their fellow-players." ιαιβ€'ρνη<Γΐ5, -ίωί, ή, {Kv^fpvaui [Lat. gubernare, to gov- ern]), (i i/iirentint. s. v., and to the relT. below add Prov. .\i. 14; Job .x.x.wii. 12 Symm.]; (Prov. i. .j ; x.xiv. 6; Find., Plat., Plut., al.).' κνβ€ρνήτη5, -ου, ό, {κυβ(ρνάω ['to steer'; see the pre- ceding word]) ; fr. Horn, down ; steersman, helmsman, sailing-masler; [A. V. master, ship-master']: Acts xxvii. 1 1 ; Rev. xviii. 17. (Ezek. xxvii. 8, 27 sq.) * kvkXcvcii : 1 aor. «κύκλί υσα ; to go round (Strabo and other later writ.); to encircle, encompass, snrroaml: την jTapepSoKriv, Rev. xx. 9 (where R. (! Tr ίκύκ\ωσαν); [τιι/ά, .In. X. 24 Trmrs. Wllrarg. ; (see 117/. App. ρ 171)].' κνκλήθ€ν, (κϋκλοί [see κύκλω]), adv. round about, from all sides all rouml : Rev. iv. 8 ; κυκλ. τιι/ογ. Rev. iv. 3 sq., and Rec. in v. 11. (Lys. p. 110, 40 [olea sacr. 28]; Qu. Smyrn. 5, 16; Nonn. Dion. 36, 325; Sept. often for 3'D30, 2'20 3'3p, and simply 2'23 ; many exx. fr. the Apocr. are given in Wuhl, Clavis Apocryphorum etc. s. v. ) • κυκλόω, -ά> : 1 aor. ίκϋκΚωσα ; Pass., pres. ptcp. κυκΧηϋ- ucvoc; 1 aor. ptcp. κυκΚωθάί ; (κϋκ\ος)\ Se|)t. chielly for 330; 1. to go round, lead round, (Pind., Eur., Polyb., al.). 2. to surround, encircle, encompass : of persons standui;; round, Tt>'a,Jn. x. 24 [Trmrg.AV'H mrg. ΐκνκΧίνσαν (q. V.)] ; Acts xiv. 20 ; of besiegers (often so in prof. auth. and in Sept.), Lk. xxi. 20 ; Ileb. xi. 3(J, and R (i 'l"r in Rev. xx. 9. [CoMP. : π(ρι-κυκ\όω.^ * κνκλω (dat. of the subst. κνκ\ος, a ring, circle [cf. Eng. cycle]); fr. Horn, down; Sept. times without number for 3'3p,also forD"3D"2 and 3'30 I'lD; in a circle, around, round about, on all sides : Mk. iii. 34 ; vi. 6 ; oi κϋκ'Κωά-γροΙ, the circumjacent country [see aypit, c], Mk. vi. 36 [here WH (rejected) mrg. jives eyyiffra]; Lk. ix. 12; άπο 'Xepova. Km κύκΚω. and in the region around, Ro. xv. 1 9 ; Tiras, around anything (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 5 ; Polyb. 4, 21, 9. al. ; Gen. xxxv. 5 ; Ex. vii. 24, etc.) : Rev. iv. 6 ; v. II [here R icuicXnflfv] ; vii. 11.• κνλΐίτμα, -τοί, τό. {κυ\1ω. q. v.). thing rolled: with epexeget. gen. βαρβάρου, rolled (wallowed) mud or mire, 2 Pet. ii. 22 [R ϋ L Tr mrg.]. The great majority take the word to mean ' wallowing-/)/ace ', as if it were the same as κυΧίστρα, (Vulg. in volutabro luti). But just as TO (ξϊραμα signifies the vomit, thing vomited, and not the place of vomiting; so το κύ\ισμα denotes nothing else than the thing rolled or wallowed. But see [the foil, word, and] βόρβορο:' κνλισ-μόί, -οΰ,ό, \.ι\. κϋΧισκ, α rolling, wallowing, (llii>- piatr. p. 204, 4; [cf. Prov. ii. 18 Theod.]) : «t κυλισμ. βορβόρου, to a rolling of itself in mud, [/o walloiring in the mire], 2 Pet. ii. 22 Τ Tr Ixt. WIl. See the preceding word.* κυλίω : (for κυλάδω more com. in earlier writ.), to roll ; Pass, inipf. 3 jicrs. sing. ϊκυΧίίτο; to be rolled, to icnllow: Mk. ix. 20. ([Aristot. h. a. 5, 19, 18, etc. ; Dion. Hal. ; Sept.]; Polyb. 26, 10, 16; Ael. n. a. 7, 33; Epict. di.ss. 4, 11, 29.) [CoMP. : ava-, άπο-, ίτροσκυλίω.]* κυλλός, -ή, -όν, [akin to κύκλο;, κυλίω. Lat. circus, cur- i'us etc. ; Curtius§81]: 1. crool:eil \ of the mem- bers of the body (Hippocr., Arstph. av. 1379): as dis- tinguished fr. χω\όί, it seems to be injured or disabled in the hands [but doubted by many], Mt. xv. 30, 31 [but here Tr mrg. br. κυλ. and WII read it in mrg, only]. 2. maimed, mutilated, (ols. Ilippocr. p. 805 [iii. p. 186 ed. Kuhn]) : Mt. xviii. 8 ; Mk.'ix. 43.* κνμα, -Tor, τό, [fr. κυί'ω to swell ; Curtius § 79 ; fr. Hoin. down J, a ware [cf. Eng. swell], esp. of the sea or of a lake: Mt. viii. 24 ; xiv. 24; Mk. iv. 37; Acts xxvii. 41 [R G Trtxt br.] ; κύματα όγρια, prop., .Sap. xiv. 1 ; with θαλάιτ- στ/Γ added, of impulsive and restless men, tossed to and fro by their raginj passions,. Judo 13. [Syn. cf. κλύδω».]* κΰμβαλον, -ου, τό, (fr κίμβυς,ό. a hollow [cf. cup, cupola, etc. ; Vanicek p. 164]), a cipnbal. i. e. a hollow basin of brass, producing (when two are struck together) a musi- cal sound [see B. D. s. v. Cymbal ; Stainer, Music of the Bible, ch. ix.] : 1 Co. xiii. 1. (1 Chr. xiii. 8; xv. 16, 19, 28; Ps. cl. 5. Pind., Xen., Diod., Joseph., al.)• κνμινον, -ου, τό, cumin (or cummin). Germ. KummeL, (for ;•35, Ls. xxviii. 2.Ϊ, 27): Mt. xxiii. 23. (Theophr., Diosc, Pint., al.) ITristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 443.] • κυνάριον, •ου, τό, (dimin. of κνων, i. (j. κυνί^ιον, which Phryn. prefers; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1X0; cf. γυι-αικά- piov), a little dog : Mt. xv. 26 sq. ; Mk. vii. 2 7 sq. (Xen., Plat., Theophr., Plut., al)* Kvirpios, -ου, ό, a Ci/prian or Cypriote, i.e. a native or an inhiibitiint of Cyprus: Acts iv. 36; xi. 20; xxi. 16, (2 Mace. iv. 29). [(Hdt., al.)]• Kvirpos, -ov, ή, Ci/prus, a very fertile and delightful island of the Mediterranean, lying between Cilicia and Syria: Acts xi. 19; xiii. 4 ; xv. 39 ; xxi. 3 ; xxvii. 4, (1 JIacc. XV. 23; 2Macc. x. 13). [BB. DD.s. v.; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 s Acts V. 19; viii. 2G ; xii. 7; πνήμα κνμιΌυ, Lk. iv. 18; Acts viii. 39; with prepositions: ίπο (IvG add the art.) Kvplovy Mt. 1. 22; ii. 15; ■πάρα κυρίου, Alt. .x.\i. 42 and Mk. xii. 11, fr. Ps. cxvii. (c.wiii.) 23 ; παμα κυρίω, 2 I'et. iii. 8. β. to the Messiah; and that αα. to the Messiah regarded univ. : Lk. i. 43 ; ii. 1 1 ; Mt. xxi. 8; xxii. 45; Mk. xi. 3 ; xii. SG; Lk. xix. 34 ; xx. 44. ββ. to Jesl'S as the Messiah, .since by his death he acquired a special ownershij) in mankind, and after his resurrec- tion was exalted to a partnershii) in the divine adminis- tralion (this force of the word wlien ajiplied to Jesus appears esp. in Acts x. 36 ; Ko. xiv. 8 ; 1 Co. vii. 22 ; viii. (i ; Phil. ii. 9-11) : Eph. iv. 5 ; with the art. 6 κύρ., Mk. xvi. 19sq.; Actsix. 1; Ro. xiv. 8; iCo. iv. 5; vi. 13sq.; vii. 10, 12, 34 SI).; i.\. 5, 14; .\. 22; xi. 26 ; [.xvi. 22 G L TTrWH]; Phil.iv.5; [2 Tim. iv. 22 TTr \VH] ; Heb. ii. 3 (cf. 7 sqq.) ; .las. v. 7, etc. after his resurrection Jesus is addressed by the title ό κΰρίός μου και ό θ(ός μου, Jn. .\χ. 28. από του κυρ-, 1 Co. xi. 23 ; 2 Co. v. 6 ; προς τον κ. 2 Co. V. 8; 6 κύριος Ίησοΰς, Acts i. 21 ; iv. 33 ; xvi. 31 ; XX. 35 ; 1 Co. xi. 23 ; [xvi. 23 Τ Tr WH] ; 2 Co. i. 14; [2 Tim. iv. 22 Lchm.] ; Rev. .xxii. 20 ; ό κύρ. Ίησ. ΧριστΜ. 1 Co. xvi. 22[R; 23 R G L] ; 2 Co. xiii. 13 (14) [VVIlbr. Xp.]; Eph. i. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 [R G], etc. ; ό κύριος ήμων, 1 Tim. i. 14; 2 Tim. i. 8; lleb. vii. 14; 2 Pet. iii. 15; Rev. xi. 15, etc. ; with Ιησούς added, [L Τ Tr WH in 1 Th. iii. 11 and 13] ; Heb. xiii. 20 ; Rev. xxii. 21 [LTTr (yet without ήμ.)~\; so with Χριστοί, Ro. .xvi. 18 [G L Τ Tr WH] ; and Ιησούς Χριστάς, 1 Th. i. 3 [cf. B. 15.5(136)]; iii. 11 [RGJ, 13 [Rec.]; v. 23 ; 2 Th. ii. 1, 14, 16; iii. 6 [{ήμίν)]; 1 Co. i. 2; 2 Co. i. 3; Gal. vi. 18 [WHbr. ημών]; Eph. i. 3; vi. 24; Ro. xvi. 24 [R G] ; 1 Tim. vi. 3, 14 ; I'hilem. 25 [T WHom. ημών] ; Phil. iv. 23 [G L Τ Tr AVH oui. ήμ•], etc. ; Ίησονς Χρίστος ό κύριος ήμων, Ro. i. 4 ; and \ρ. Ίησ. 6 κύρ. (ημών), Col. ii. 6 ; Eph. iii. 11 ; 1 Tim. i. 2; 2 Tim. i. 2 ; ό κύρ. κα\ ό σωτήρ, 2 Pet. iii. 2 [cf. Β. 15.')(13i;)]; with Ίι^σοίτ Χριστοί added, 2 Pet. iii. 18; without the art., simply κύριος: 1 Co. vii. 22, 25; x. 21; xvi. 10; 2 Co. iii. 17; xii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 24; Jas. v. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 10; leuotos κυρίων i. e. Supreme Lord (cf. W. § 36, 2; [B. § 123, 12]) : Rev. .xix. 16 (cf. in a. above; of God, Deut. X. 1 7) ; Λvith prepositions : άπο κυρίου. Col. iii. 24 ; κατά κύριον, i Co. xi. 1 7 ; προς κύριον, 2 Co. iii. 16 ; συν κυρ. \ Th. iv. 17; ΰπο κυρ. 2 Th. ii. 13; on the phrase iv κυρίω. freq. in Paul, and except in his writings found only in Rev. xiv. 13, see (v, I. 6 b. p. 211'. The appel- lation ό κύριοΕ, applied to Christ, passed over in Luke and John even into historic narrative, where the words and works of Jesus prior to his resurrection are related : Lk. vii. 13 ; x. 1 ; xi. 39 ; xii. 42 ; xiii. 15 ; xvii. 5 sq. ; xxii. 31 [RGLTrbr.]; Jn. iv. 1 [here TTrmrg. Ιη- σούς] ; Ti. 23 ; xi. 2. There is nothing strange in the appearance of the term in the narrative of occurrences after his resurrection: Lk. xxiv. 34 ; Jn. xx. 2, 18, 20, 25 ; xxi. 7, 1 2. d. There are some who hold that Paul (except in his quotations from the O. T. viz. Ro. iv. 8; Lx. 28 sq.; xi. 34; 1 Co. i. 31; ii. 16: iii. 20; .x. 26 ; 2 Co. vi 17 sq.; x. 17; 2 Tim. ii. 19) uses the title κύριος everywhere not of God, but of Christ. But, to omit instances where the interpretation is doubtful, as 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 ; 1 Th. iv. 6 ; 2 Th. iii. 16 (ό Kvpiat τής (Ιρήνης, cf. 6 Bfot της (ΐρήνης, 1 Th. v. 23 ; but most of the blessings of Christianity are derived alike from God and from Christ), it is better at least in the words ίκάστω ως ό κύριος ξ^ωκΐν, 1 Co. iii. 5, to understand God as referred to on account of what follows, esp. on ac- count of the words κατά την χάριν του θ(οΰ την δυθΰσά» ροι in vs. 10. On the other hand, κρινόμενοι ίπο τοϋ κυρ. in 1 Co. xi. 32 must certainly, I think, be taken of Christ, on account of x. 22, cf. 21. Cf. Gabler, Kiel' nere theol. Schriften, Bd. i. p. 186 sqq. ; Winer, De sensi» vocum κύριος et ό κύριος in actis et epistolis apostolonun. Erlang. 1S28; Wesselus Scheffer, diss, theol. exhibena disijuisitionem de vocis κύριος absolute positae in N. T. usu. Lugd. 1846 (a monograph I have not seen) ; [Sluarl in the Bib. Repos. for Oct. 1831 pp. 733-776; cf. Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. X. T. § 76 ; Cremer, Bibl.-theol. Lex. s. v.; Ahbnl in the Journ. Soc. Bib. Lit. and Exeg. for .June and Dec. 1881 p. 126 sqq., June and Dec. 1883 p. 101 sq On the use of a capital initial, see WH. Intr. § 414]. The word does not occur in the [Ep. to Tit. (crit. edd.), the] 1 Ep. of .John, [nor in the Second or the Third ; for in 2 .Jn. 3 κυρίου is dropped by the critical editors. Syn. see ^(σπότης, fin.]. κιιριότη?, -ijTos, ή, (6 κύριος), dominion, power, lordship ; in the N. T. one who possesses dominion (see (ξουσία, 4 c. β.; cf. Germ. Herrschafl, [or Milton's '^dominations"]; in Tac. ann. 13, 1 dominationes is equiv. to dominantes), so used of angels (κύριοι, 1 Co. viii. 5 ; see κύριος, a. fin.) : Eph. i. 21; 2 Pet. ii. 10; JudeS; plur. Col. i. 16. (Eccles. [e. g. 'Teaching' c. 4] and Byzant. writ.)" κυρόω, -ώ : 1 aor. inf. κυρώσαι ; pf. pass. ptcp. κεκνρω- μίνος ; (κΰρος the head, that wliich is supreme, power, iulluence, authority) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; to male valid; to confirm publicly or solemnly, to ratify. 8ιαθήκην, pass. Gal. iii. 15; α-γάπην cXs τίνα, to make a public decision that love be shown to a transgressor by granting him pardon, 2 Co. ii. 8. [Comp. : προ-κυρόω.] * κύων, κυνός ; in prof. auth. of the com. gend., in the N. T. masc. ; Ilebr. 3^3; a dog; prop.: I^k. xvi. 21 ; 2 Pet. ii. 22 ; nietaph. (in various [but always reproach- ful] senses; often so even in Horn.) a man of impure mind, an impudent man, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. I. s.] : Mt. vii. 6 ; Phil. iii. 2• Rev. xxii. 15, in which last pass, others less probably understand sodomites (hke 0''3^3 in Deut. x.xiii. 18(19)) [cf. B. D. s. v. Dog].* κώλον, -ου, τό ; in (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down ; α mem- ber of the body, particularly the more external and promi- nent members, esp. the feet; in Sept. (Lev. xxvi. 30; Num. xiv. 29, 32 sq. ; 1 S. xvii. 46 ; Is. Ixvi. 24) for -^i3 and □"IJS, a dead body, carcase, inasmuch as the mem- bers of a corpse are loose and fall apart : so the plur. in Heb. iii. 17 fr. Num. xiv. 29, 32, [A. V. carca-^es].' κωλύω; irapf. 1 pers. plur. έκωλύομιν (Mk. ix. 38 TTr txt. WH); 1 aor. ίκώλυσα ; Pass., pres. κωλύομαι; 1 aor. ΐκωΧϋθην ; (fr. κόλοί, lopped, clipped ; prop, to cut off, cut κώμη 367 Χάθρα short, hence) to kinaer, prevent,forbid ; [fr. Find, down] ; Sept. for kS3, twice (viz. 1 S. xxv. 26 ; 2 S. xiii. 13) for ;•:•ρ : τινά foil, by an inf. \\\ . § 65, 2 ^. ; cf. B. § 148, 13], Mt. xix. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 2; Atts xvi. 6 ; xxiv. 23 ; 1 Th. ii. 1 6 ; Heb. vii. 23 ; τί κωΚϋα μ€ βαπτισθηναι ; what doth liinder me from being (to be) baptized? Acts viii. 36 ; the inf. is omitted, as being evident from what has gone before, Mk. ix. 38 sq. ; x. 14 ; Lk. Lx. 49 ; xi. 52 ; xviii. 16 ; Acts xi. 17 ; Ro. i. 13 ; 3 Jn. 10 ; αυτόν is wanting, because it has preceded, Lk. ix. 50 ; the ace. is wanting, because easily supplied from the context, 1 Tim. iv. 3 ; as often in Grk. writ., constr. w. τινά nvos, to keep one from a thing, Acts xxvii. 43; with ace. of the thing, την παραφρονίαν, Ιο restrain, check, 2 Pet. ii, 16; to XaXcii/ ■γΚώσσαις, 1 Co. xiv. 39 ; τί, foil, by τοΟ μή, can any one hinder the water (which offers itself), that these should not be baptized? Acts x. 47 ; in imitation of the Hebr. Κ^3 foil, by JD of the pars, and the ace. of the thing, to withhold a thing from any one, i. e. to deny or refuse one a thing: Lk. vi. 29 [B. § 132, 5] (jo μνημύον άπο σον. Gen. xxiii. 6). [Comp. : διακωλύω.] * κώμη, -ηί, η, (akin to κ(1μαι, κιιιμάω, prop, the common sleeping-place to which laborers in the fields return ; Curtius § 45 [related is Eng. homel), [fr. Hes., Hdt. down], a village : Alt. i.\. 35 ; x. 11 ; Mk. xi. 2 ; Lk. v. 17; ix. 52 [here Tdf. πολιι/], and often in the Synopt. Gospels; Jn. xi. 1, 30; with the name of the city near which the villages lie and to whose municipality they belong: Καισαρύας, Mk. viii. 27 (often so in Sept. for mja with the name of a city ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p. 220* [B. D. s. V. Daughter, 7] ; also for '■ιχπ and ΠίΛχπ with the name of a city) ; by meton. the inhabitants of villages, Acts viii. 25 ; used also of a small town, as Beth- saida, Mk. viii. 23, 26, cf. 22 ; Jn. i. 45 ; of Bethlehem, Jn. vii. 42 ; for T;•, .Josh. x. 39 ; xv. 9 [Compl.] ; Is. xHi. 11. [B. D. s. V. Villages.] κωμό-^ολι;, -eas, ή, a village approximating in size and number of iyihabitants to a city, a village-city, a town (Germ. Marhtflecken) : Mk. i. 38. (Strabo; [Josh, xviii. 28 Aq., Theod. (Field)] ; often in the Byzant. writ, of the middle ages.) * κώμος, -ου, ό, (fr. κιΊμαι ; accordingly i. q. Germ. Ge• lag; cf. Curtius § 45); fr. [llom. h. Merc, Theogn.] Hdt. down ; a revel, carousal, i. e. in the Grk. writ. prop, a nocturnal and riotous procession of half-drunken and frolicsome fellows who after su]jper parade through the streets with torches and music in honor of Bacchus or some other deity, and sing and play before the houses of their male and female friends ; hence used generally of feasts and drinking-parties that are protracted till late at night and indulge in revelry ; plur. Irevellingsl : Ro. -xiii. 13 ; Gal. v. 21 ; 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Sap. xiv. 23 ; 2 Mace, vi. 4.) [Trench § Ixi.] • κώνωψ, -ωποΓ, ό, a gnat ([Aesch}l.], Hdt., Hippocr. al.) ; of the wine-gnat or midge that is bred in (ferment ing and) evaporating wine (Aristot. h. an. 5, 19 [p. 552' 5 ; cf. Bocharl, Hierozoicon, iii. 444 ; Buxtorf, Lex. talm. etc. 927 (474" ed. Fischer)]) : Mt. .xxiii. 24.* Kus, gen. Κώ, ή, Cos [A. V. Coos'] (now Stance or Stanchio [which has arisen from a slurred pronuncia- tion of f's ταν Κώ (mod. Grk.) like Stambul fr. cr τά» πόλιν. (Hackett)]), a small island of the ^igean Sea, over against the cities of Cnidus and Halicarnassus, celebrated for its fertility and esp. for its abundance of wine and corn: Acts xxi. 1, where for the Rec. Κώι» Grsb. [foil, by subsequent editors] has restored Κώ, as in 1 Mace. xv. 23 ; see Matthiae § 70 note 3 ; W. § 8, 2 a.; [B. 21 (19); WH. App. p. 157]. Cf. Kuester, De Co insula, Hal. 1833; ["but the best description is in Ross, Reisen nach Kos u. s. w. (Halle 1852) " (How- son) ; cf. Lewin, St. Paid, ii. 96].* Κωσάμ, ό, (fr. DDP to divine, [but cf. B. D.]), Cosam, one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 28.* κωφ09, -ή, -όν, (κότΓτω to beat, pound), blunted, dull; prop. βίΚος, Horn. H. 11, 390; hence a. blunted (or lamed) in tongue; dumb: Mt. ix. 32 sq. ; xii. 22; XV. 30sq.; Lk. i. 22; xi. 14, (Hdt. et sqq. ; Sept. for D^K Hab. ii. 18). b. blunted, dull, in hearing; deaf: Mt. xi. 5; Mk. vii. 32, 37; ix. 25; Lk. vii. 22, (Horn, h. Merc. 92; Aeschyl., Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept. for W^n, Ex. iv. 11 ; Is. xliii. 8; Ps. x.xxvii. (xxxviii.) 14, etc.).• λαγχάνω : 2 aor. ΤΚαχον : 1. to obtain by lot (fr. Horn, down) : with gen. of the thing, Lk. i. 9 [cf. B. 269 (231); W. 319 (299)]; to receive by divine allotment, obtain : τί. Acts i. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 ; on the constr. of this verb w. gen. and ace. of the thing, see Matthiae § 328 ; W. 200 (188); [cf. B. § 132, 8]. 2. to cast lots, determine by lot, (Isocr. p. 144 b. ; Diod. 4, 63, [cf. ps.- Dem. in Mid. p. 510, 26]) : nepl nvos, Jn. xix. 24.* Αάξαροΐ, -ου, δ, (rabb. Iti'S, apparently the same as iti^^S, whom God helps [cf. Philo, quis haeres §12]: ace. to others, i. q. ITJ,' N^ without help), Lazarus ; 1. an inhabitant of Bethany, beloved by Christ and raised from the dead by him: Jn. xi. 1 sqq. 43; xii. 1 sq. 9 sq 17. 2. an imaginary person, extremely poor and wretched : Lk. xvi. 20, 23-25.* λάβρα [so RGTTr] (in Horn, 'λάθρτ;, fr. λανθάνω. ΧαΐΧαψ 308 λαλΐα λαθίΐν), and L [WII KC (see the latter's Praef. p. xii. and s. V. fU^)] λάθμα (fr. \άθρο{, -a, -Of, cf. Passow [esp. L. andS.js.v. ; W. 47; li. ti'J (til)), Άάν. secretly : Mt. i 19; ii. 7; Jn. xi. 28; Acts xvi. 37. (From Horn, down ; Sept.) * λαΣλοψ ([L Τ Tr WII] not λαίλαψ [Grsb.], cf. W. § 6, I e. ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 37 sq.; [Chandler §G20; Ttlf. Prolog, p. 101]), -an-ot, ij [masc. in «• Mk. iv. 37; cf. Thorn. Mag. ed. Uilschl p. -226, 4], a whirlwind, lempesluous wind: 2 I'ct. ii. 1 7 ; \αιλαψ άνίμου (cf. Genu. Sinrmicind \ άνεμος avu λαίλαττί πολλ»/, Horn. 11. 17, 57), a violent attack of wind [Λ. V. " χίοπη of wind], a sijuall [(see below)], Mk. iv. 37 ; Lk. viii. 2;). (Sept. Job .\.\I. 18; xxxviii. 1 ; Sap. v. 15, 24 ; Sir. xlviii. 9.) [Ace. to Schmidt (ch. 55 J" 13), λ. is never a single gust, nor a steadily blowing wind, however violent ; but a storm breaking forth from black thunder-clouds in furious gusts, with floods of rain, and throwing everything topsy-turvy ; ace. to Aristot. du nmiid. 4 p. .'!:>5 •, 7 it is ' a whirlwind revolving from below upwards.'] * ΑΑΚΩ and λακιω, fva Χάσκω. λακτίζω. r. ί\αΧήθηι>; 1 fut. λαλΐ)5ΐ)- σομαι; [fr. Soph, down] ; found in bilil. (Irk. iiiuch more f reif. than in prof, auth., in Sept. times without number for 13") or 13Ί, more rarely for TDSjt ; prop, to utter a sound (cf. [onomatop. la-la, etc.] Germ, lallen), to emit a voice, make one's self heard ; hence to utter or form words with the mouth, to speak, having reference to the sound and pronunciation of the Λvords and in general the for m of what is uttered, while λί'γω refers to the meaning and subs tanee of what is spoken; hence λαλ^ΐκ is employed not only of men, esp. Λvhen chatting and prattlinfi, but also of animals (of birds, Moseh. 3, 47 ; of locusts, Theocr. 5, 34 ; λαλοΟσι μϊν, οΰ φράζουσι δί, of dogs and apes, Plut. mor. ii. p. 909 a.), and so of inani- mate things (as trees, Theocr. 27, 56 (57); of an echo, Dio C. 74, 21, 14). Accordingly, everything Xfyo/ierai' is also λαλού /iei'oi'. but not everything 'ΚάΚηύμΐνον is also λίγόμίκοκ (Eu[>olis in Plut. Ale. 13 XaXfif aptcrros, aSvua- τώτατος \(γ(ΐν) ; [the difference between the words is evident ivhere they occur in proximity, e. g. Ro. iii. 19 οσα ό νομοκ Xeyti, τοίί cv τω νάμω λαλ^ΐ, and the very com. €λά\ησ(ν . . . λίγων. Mt. xiii. 3, etc.]. Moreover, the primary meaning of XoXcti/, to utter one's self, enables us easily to understand its very frequent use in the sacred writers to denote the utterances by which God indicates or gives proof of his mind and will, whether immediately or through the instrumentality of his messengers and heralds. [Perhaps this use may account in part for the fact that, though in classic Grk. λαλ. is the term for light and familiar speech, and so assumes readily a dis- paraging notion, in bibl. Grk. it is nearly if not quite free from any such suggestion.] Cf. Dav. Schulz die Geis- tesgaben der ersten Christen, p. 94 sqq. ; Tittmann de Synonymis N. T. p. 79 sq.; Trench, Syn. § Ixxvi. ; [and on class, usage Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1]. But let us look at the N. T. usage in detail : 1. to utter a voice, emit a sound : of things inanimate, as fipotrrnt. Rev. x. 4 ; with rat iaxnuv φωνάι added, each thunder uttered its particular voice (the force and mean- ing of which the prophet understood, cf. Jn. xii. 2S sq.), ib. 3 ; σάλπιγγο! ληληύση! μ(τ' (μοϋ, λί'γωι» (Rec. λίγουσα) foil, by direct disc. Rev. iv. 1 ; of the expiatory blood of Christ, metaph. to crave the pardon of sins, Ileb. xii. 24 ; of the murdered Abel, long since dead, i. q. to call for vengeance (see Gen. iv. 10, and cf. κράζω, 1 fin.), Ileb. xi. 4 ace. to the true reading λαλίΐ [GLTTrWlI; tlio Rec. λαλοται must be taken as pass., in the exceptional sense to lie talked of, lauded; see below, 5 fin. (πράγμα κατ άγοραν λάΚοΰμίνον, Arstph. Thesm. 578, cf. iraiTit αυτήν λαλοϋσ-ικ, Alciiihro frag. 5, ii. p. 222, 10 ed. NVag- ner)]. 2. to speak; i.e. to use the tongue οτ the faculty of speech; to utter articulate sounds: absoL 1 Co. xiv. II; of the dumb, receiving the power of speech, Mt. ix. 33; xii. 22; xv. 31; Lk. xi. 14; Rev. xiii. 15; (ι-ούϊ [T Tr \VH om.])aXaXouf XaXfii/, Mk. vii.37; ίλάλ€ΐ 6ρθά>!, ih. Ά5 ; of a dumbman,μιί Swapevus λαλήσαι, Lk. i. 20 (of idols, στόμα ί;(ουσί κ- οΰ λάλήσουσι, Ps. c.xiii. 13 (cxv. 5) ; cxxxiv. 16 ; cf. 3 Mace. iv. 16) ; to speak, i. e. not to be silent, opp. to holding one's peace, λάλ» κ. ρ.ή σιωττήσηί, Acts xviiL 9; opp. to hearing, Jas. i. 19; opp. to the soul's in η er experiences, 2 Co. iv. 13 fr. Ps. cxv. 1 (cxvi. 10); opp. to ποΐ€Ϊι/ (as λόγο! to ίργου q. v. 3), Jas. ii. 12. 3. to tfdk ; of the sound and outward form of speech r τη ίδίσ διαλίκτω. Acts ii. 6 ; ίτίραα Koivais γλώσσακ, ib. 4; Mk. xvi. 17 [here Tr txt. AVII txt. om. «cai».], from which the simple γλώσσαΐϊ λαλίίκ, and the like, are to be distin- guished, see γλωσσά, 2. 4. to utter, tell : with ace. of the thing, 2 Co. xii. 4. 5. to use words in order lo declare one's mind and disclose one's thoughts ; to speak: absol., frt αυτού XaXoCrrot, Mt. xii. 46 ; xvii. 5; .xxvi. 47; Mk. V. 35; xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47, 60; with the advs. κακω!, καλώς, Jn. xviii. 23; is νήπίο! ίλάλουκ, 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; it δράκωκ. Rev. xiii. 1 1 ; στόμα np'os στόμα, face to face ((ierm. miindlich), 2 Jn. 12 (after the Ilebr. of Num. xii. 8) ; «is atpa λαλ(Ίν, 1 Co. xiv. 9 ; « τοϋ τκρισ- σίϋματος της Kap8las το στόμα λαλ(ΐ, out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaketh, se. so that it expresses the soul's thoughts, Mt. xii. 34 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; « των ιδίων XoXfic, to utter words in accordance with one's inner character, Jn. viii. 44. with ace. of the thing: τίλαλήσω, λαλήσητ(, etc., what I shall utter in speech, etc., Jn. xii. 50; Mt. X. 19; Mk. ix. 6 [here TTrWH άηοκριθήΐ; .xiii. 11; Ti', anything, Mk. -xi. 23 L Τ Tr t.xt. λΥΗ ; Ro. XV. 1 8 ; 1 Th. i. 8 ; ουκ οϊ8αμ€ν τι λαλίΐ, what he says, i. e. what the words uttered by him mean [WR br. τί λαλ.], Jn. xvi. 18 ; ταύτα, these words, Lk. xxiv. 36 ; Jn. viii. 30; xvii. 1, 13 ; 1 Co. ix. 8; το λάλοίμ^νον, 1 Co. xiv. 9 ; plur. Acts xvi. 14 (of the words of a teacher) ; τον λίγον λάλοΰμ<νον, Mk. v. 36 [see B. 302 (259) note] ; Xoymt, 1 Co. xiv. 19; ρήματα, Jn. viii. 20; Acts x. 44; λαλίΰ) S69 KaKux παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 33; βλασφημίαί, -Mk. ii. 7 [LTTr AVH βΧασφημίΐΥ-, Lk. v. 21 ; ρήματα βλάσφημα (ΐ$ τινα^ Acts νί, 11; ρήματα (Hec. adds βλάσφημα) κατά rifor, Acts vi. 13; σκληρά κατά tivoSj Jude 15 ; υπέρογκα, ib. 16 (Dan. [Theodot.] xi. 36) ; τά μη δ(θντα, 1 Tim. v. 13 (ά μη θ*μις, 2 Macc. .\ii. 14 ; fif τίνα τα μη καθήκοντα^ 3 Mace. iv. 16; [cf. \V. 480 (448)]); διιστραμμίνα. Acts XX. 30; t6 ψ-ίϋδοΓ, .III. viii. 44; δόλον, 1 Pet. iii. 10 fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xx.xiv.) 14 ; ά-γαθά, Mt. -xii. 34 ; σοφίαν, 1 Co. ii. 6 sq. ; μυστήρια, ib. xiv. 2 ; foil, by οτι (eijuiv. to itfp\ τούτου, ότι etc. to speak of this, viz. that they knew him [see on, I. 2 sub fin.]), Mk. i. 34 ; Lk. iv. 41 ; contrary to classic usage, foil, by direct disc, Mk. xiv. 31 Ltxt. Τ Tr WH ; Heb. v. 5 ; xi. 1 8, (but in these last two pass, of the utterances of God); more correctly elsewhere Λάλι^σβ Xiyaiv (in imitation of Hebr. -\OVh 13T [cf. above (init.)]), foil, by direct disc: Mt. xiv. 27; xxiii. 1; xxviii. 18; Jn. viii. 12; Acts viii. 26; xxvi. 31; xxviii. 25 ; Rev. xvii. 1 ; xxi. 9 ; λαλούσα κ. λίγουσα. Rev. χ. 8. λαλώ with dat. of pers. lo speak to one, ad- dress him (esp. of teachers) : Mt. xii. 46 ; xxiii. 1 ; Lk. xxiv. 6; Jn. ix. 29; xv. 22; Acts vii. 38, 44; ix. 27; xvi. 13; xxii. 9; xxiii. 9; Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. iii. 1 ; xiv. 21, 28 ; 1 Th. ii. 16 ; Heb. i. 2 (1) ; of one commanding, Mt. xxviii. 18; Mk. xvi. 19; to speak to, i. e. concerse with, one [cf. B. § 133, 1] : Mt. xii. 46, [47 but WH mrg. only]; Lk. i. 22; xxiv. 32; Jn. iv. 26; xii. 29; ίαυτο'ΐί (dat. of pers.) ψάλμοϊί κ. C/iKoir (dat. of instrument), Eph. V. 19 ; OL• λαλ(ϊι> τινι is used of one who does not answer, Jn. xix. 10; to accost one, Jit. xiv. 27; λαλώ η Tiw, to speak anything to any one, to speak lo one about a thin// (of teaching): Mt. ix. 18; Jn. viii. 25 (on which see αρχή, lb.); x. 6 ; xiv. 25 ; xv. 11 ; xviii. 20 sq. ; 2 Co. vii. 14; ρήματα, Jn. vi. 63; xiv. 10; Acts xiii. 42; οίκοδομήν κ. παράκλησιν, things which tend to edify and comfort the soul, 1 Co. xiv. 3; of one promuli/atinrj a ihinfi to one, τον νόμον, pass. Heb. ix. 1 9 ; λαλώ ■προς τίνα, to speak unto one: Lk. i. 19; [ii. 15 Lmrg. TWII]; Acts iv. 1; viii. 26; ix. 29; xxi. 39; xxvi. 14 [RG], 26, 31; Heb. v. 5, (Sk •^T\_, Gen. xxvii. 6; Ex. xxx. 11, 1 7, 22) ; λό•γθυγ npos τίνα, Lk. xxiv. 4 I ; (λάλησαν προς αυτούς (ύαγγΐλίζόμΐνοι . . . Ίησοΰν, Acts .\i. 20; οσα hv λαληστ] προς υμάς. Acts iii. 22; σοφίαν ί** τισιν, wisdom among etc 1 Co. ii. 6 ; λαλ. μ(τά τίνος, to speak, converse, with one [cf. B. § 133, 3] : Mk. vi. 50 ; Jn. iv. 27 ; ix. 37 ; xiv. 30; Rev. i. 12; x. 8; xvii. 1; xxi. 9, 15; λαλΛν αλήθ(ΐαν μ(τά etc. to show one's self a lover of truth in conversation with others, Kph. iv. 25 [cf. EUicott]; λαλί'ιν π(ρΙ τίνος, concerninij a person or thinr/ : Lk. ii. 33 ; ix. 11 ; Jn. vii. 13; viii. 26; xii. 41 ; Acts ii. 31 ; Heb. ii. 5 ; iv. 8 ; with τιιί', dat. of pers., aihled, Lk. ii. 38 ; Acts xxii. 10; τι ncpi τιι /ot. Acts .xxviii. 21 ; Lk. ii. 17; iiV Tiva πιρί τίνος (gen. of the thing), to speak something as respects a person concerning a thing, Heb. vii. 14 RG; (IS Ttva ntp'i w. gen. of pers., ibid. LTTr WIL Many of the exx. already cited show that λαλίΐι/ is freq. used in the N. T. of t e a c h e r s, — of .Jesus, the apostles, and others. To those pass, may be added, Lk. v. 4 ; Jn. i. 37 ; vii. 46 ; viii. 30, 38 ; xii. 50 ; Acts vi. 10; xi. 15 ; xiv. 1, 9 ; xvi. 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 34 sq. ; 2 Co. ii. 17 ; Col iv. 3 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11; with ιταρρησίφ added, Jn. vii. 26 ; xvi. 29 ; tVi ονόματι Ίησοϋ, Acts v. 40, cf. iv. 1 7, see iVi, B. 2 a. j3. ; τω ονόματι κυρίου [where L Τ Tr WH prefix c'v], of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 (see όνομα. 2 f.) ; Tivi (to one) iv παραβολαις, Mt. xiii. 3, 10, 13, 34 ; cv παροιμίαις, Jn. xvi. 25 ; (ξ ίμαυτοΰ, to speak from my- self (i. e. utter what I ray.self have thought out), Jn. xii. 49; άπ ϊμαυτοϋ (see από, IL 2 d. aa. p. 59'), Jn. vii. 1 7 S(j. ; xiv. 10; xvi. 13 ; (V t^s yrjs (see ίκ, Π. 2 sub fin.), Jn, iii. 31 ; eV του κόσμου, 1 Jn. iv. 5 (see κόσμοι, 6) ; «V ϋ(οϋ, prompted by divine influence, 2 Co. ii. 1 7 ; λαλ(ίρ τον λόγον, to announce or preach the word of God or the doctrine of salvation : Mk. viii. 32 ; Acts xiv. 25 [here in Τ WH mrg. foil, by els τήν Πίργην; see fts, A. I. 5 b.] ; xvi. 6 ; Phil. i. 14, etc. ; τον λόγ. τοϋ θ(οΰ. Acts iv. 29, 31 ; Tivi r. λόγον, Mk. ii. 2 ; Acts xi. 1 9 ; with παραβοΚαΙι added, Mk. iv. 33 ; τινί τον λόγ. τοϋ κυρίου [WH txt. ifoO], Acts xvi. 32 (Barn. ep. 19, 9) ; τινί τ. λόγ. τοΰ θ(οϋ. Acts xiii. 46 ; Heb. xiii. 7 ; τα ρήματα τοΰ θ(οΰ, Jn. iii. 34 ; τά ρήμ, τής ζωής. Acts ν. 20 ; προς τίνα το ιϋαγγ. τον β(θν, 1 Th. ii. 2 ; λαλ<ΐν κ. διδάσκΐΐν τά π(ρι τοΰ ^Ιησον [R G κυρίου], Acts xviii. 25 ; το μυστήριον τοΰ Χρίστου, Col. iv. 3. λαλί ΐν is used of the Ο. Τ. prophets uttei^ ing their predictions: Lk. xxiv. 25; Acts iii. 24; xxvi. 22 [cf. B. § 144, 20, and p. 301 (258)] ; 2 Pet. L 21; Jas. v. 10; of the declarations and prophetic an- nouncements of God: Lk. i. 45, 55; Jn. ix. 29; Acts vii. 6 ; esp. in tlie Ep. to the Heb. : i. 1, 2 (1) ; iii. 5 ; iv. 8; xi. 18 ; xii. 25 ; God, the Holy Spirit, Christ, are said λάλ(ΐν ίν τιν» : Heb. i. 1, 2 (1); Mt. x. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 3 ; δια στόματοΓ τινοΓ, Lk. i. 70 ; Acts iii. 21 ; δια Ησαίου, Acts xxviii. 25 ; of the sayings of angels: Lk. ii. 17, 20; Jn. xiL 29; Acts x. 7; xxiii. 9; x.xvii. 25; the Holy Spirit is said λάλήσιιν what it will teach the apostles, Jn. xvi. 13 ; ό νόμος as a manifestation of God is said λαλ«ν Tifi Λνΐιαΐ it commands, Ro. iii. 19; finally, even voices are said λαλίΐν. Acts x.xvi. 14 [RG] ; Rev. i. 12 ; x. 8. i. q. to make known by speak- ing, lo speak oj, relate, with the implied idea of extolling: Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. xiv. 9; Lk. xxiv. 36; Acts iv. 20; [cf. Heb. xi. 4 Rec. (see 1 fin. above)]. 6. Since λαλ»ν strictly denotes the act of one who utters words with the living voice, when writers speak of them- selves or are spoken of by others as λαλοΰι /rfr, they are conceived of as present and addressing their readers Avith the living voice, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. ix. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 17, 23 ; xii. 19; Heb. ii. 5 ; vi. 9 ; 2 Pet. iii. 16, or λαλίΐ»• is used in the sense of romninnthng, Heb. vii. 14. The verb λαλ{ίν is not found in the Epp. to Gal. and 2 Thess. [CoMP. : δια-, fV, κατά-, προσ-, συλ-λαλίω; cf. the cat- alogue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. ch. 1 § 60.] λαλιά, -of, ή. (λιίλοί, cf. Btlm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 119 Anm. 21), in prof. auth. [fr. Arstph. down] loquacity, talkativeness, talk (Germ. Gerede) [see λαλ/ω, init.] ; in a good sense conversation ; in the N. T. 1. speech, i.q..'iiori/: Jn. iv. 42. 2. dialect, mode of speech, pro• Χαμά 870 \αμβάι>ω nunciation, [W. 23]: Mk. xiv. 70 Rec; Mt. xxvi. 73; speech which discloses the speaker's native country : hence of the speech by which Christ may be recognized as hav- ing come from heaven, Jn. viii. 43 [where cf. Meyer].* λάμα [RG (on the accent see Tdf. Proleg. 102)] in Mt. xxvii. 46 and λαμμί [RG] Mk. XV. 34, (the llebr. word npS fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 1), whi/; in the former pass. Lchm. reads \ημά, in the latter Xcfia, Tdf. λ(μά in both, Tr WH λιμό in Mt. but λαμά in Mk. ; the form in η OT e reproduces the Chald. SoS or noS ; on the re- markable diversity of spelling in the codd. cf. Tdf. on each pass., [WH on Mt. 1. c.], and Fritzsche on Mk. p. 693.• λαμβάνω; impf. ίλάμβανοι•; fut. λήψομα», (LTTrWH λήμιίτομαι, an Alexandrian form ; sec s. v. M, μ) ; 2 aor. (λαβον (2 pers. plur. once [in Tdf. 7 after Β *] ίΚάβίΐτ(, ι Jn. ii. 27; see reff. s. v. άπίρχομαι, init.), imjjv. λά;3ί (Rev. X. 8 sq.), not \aβi (W. § 6, 1 a. ; B. 62 (54)) ; pf. (ΐ\ηφα, 2 pers. (ΐ\ηφα{ [and fΐ\ηφes (Rev. xi. 17 WII; see κοπιάω) ; on the use of the pf. interchangeably with an aor. (Rev. v. 7; viii. 5, etc.) cf. B. 197 (170) ; AV. 272 (25 J) ; Jcbb in Vincent and Dickson's Mod. Grk. 2ded. App. §§ 67, 68], ptcp. (ϊληφά)!; [Pass., pres. ptcp. 'λαμβανόμ(Ρο! ; pf. 3 pers. sing. Λληπται, Jn. viii. 4 Wllmrg. (rejected section)]; Sept. hundreds of times for np'^, very often for XUJ, also for ipS and several times for tnx ; [fr. Ilom. down] ; I. to take,'i. e. 1. to take with the hand, lay hold of, any pers. or tiling in order to use it : absol., where the context shows what is taken, Mt. xxvi. 26 ; Mk. xiv. 22 ; (τον) άρτον, Mt. xxvi. 26 ; Acts xxvii. 35 ; το βιβλΐον. Rev. V. 7-9, [see B. and W. u. s.] ; μάχαφαν (grasp, lay hand to), ^It. xxvi. 52, and in many other e.xx. After a circumstantial style of description (see ai>- ίστημι, II. 1 c.) in use from Horn, down (cf. Passow s. v. C; [L. and S. s. v. I. 11]; :\Iatthiae § 558, Anm. 2; [W. § 65, 4 c.]), the ptcp. Χαβών with ace. of the object is placed before an act. verb where it does not always seem to us necessary to mention the act of taking (as λα^ώκ Kvae χι'ψα [cf. our 'he took and kissed'], Hom. Od. 24, 398) : Mt. .xiii. 31, 33 ; xvii. 27; Mk. i.x. 3G ; Lk. xiii. 19, 21 ; Jn. xii. 3 ; Acts ii. 23 Rec. ; ix. 25 ; xvi. 3 ; λαβών το αίμα • . . τον Xnov €ρράντισ€ (efjuiv. to τω ηιματι . . . τον λ. ίρΡ-)> Ilcb. ix. 19 ; or the verb \αβ(1ν in a finite form foil, by καΐ precedes, as ΓΚαβί τον Ίησοϋν και (μαστ!γωσ(ν, Jn.xix.l; add,ib.40; xxi. 13; Rev.viii.5; alsoXa^cii» Toi» άρτον . . . κα\ βα\(1ν etc., Mt. XV. 26; Mk. vii. 27; ίΧαβον . . . rat (ποίησαν, Jn.. xix. 23. metaph., άφηρμην (see the word, 2), Ro. vii. 8, 1 1 ; ΰπό8ίΐγμά Tims (gen. of the thing) τίνα, to take one as an example of a thing, for imitation, Jas. v. 10; to take in order to wear, τα ιμάτια, i. e. to put on: Jn. xiii. 12 (ϊσθητα, ίπο8ήματα, Hdt. 2, 37; 4, 78); μορφην δούλου, Phil. ii. 7. to lake in the mouth : something to eat, Jn. xiii. 30 ; Acts ix. 19 ; 1 Tim. iv. 4, (cf. I.at. cibum capio, to lake food) ; to take anything to drink, i. e. drink, swallow, vSap, Rev. xxii. 17 ; to drink, το o|or, Jn. xix. 30 ; οϋκ ίλαβί, he did not take it, i. e. refused to drink it, Mk. xv. 23. to take up a thing to he carried ; to take upon one's self: το» σταυρόν αΰτοϋ, Mt. χ. 38 [L mrg. aprf] ; to take ti'ith one for future use : Sprovs, Mt. xvi. 5, 7 ; λαμπάδα!, Mt. xxv. 1; (λαιον μ(θ' (αντών, ibid. 3. 2. tu lake in order to carry away: without the notion of violence, ras άσθ(ν(ία!, i. e. to remove, take away, Mt. viii. 17; v/'iui the notion of violence, to seize, lake away forcibly : Alt. v. 40 ; Rev. iii. 11 ; την (Ιρηνην ίκ [Rec. απο, (WH br. ««)] τ^γ y^r. Rev. vi. 4. 3. to take what is one's own, to lake to one's self, to }nake one's own; a. to ciaim, procure, for one's self: Ti, Jn. iii. 27 (opp. to what is gi ven) ; ίαυτώ βασι- Xcmi/, Lk. xix. 1 2 ; with ace. of the pers. to associate with one's self as companion, attendant, etc. : λαβών τ. aneipav (ρχιται. taking with him the band of soldiers (who:;'; aid he might use) he comes, Jn. xviii. 3 (στρατον λα3'ι>ν ίρχιται. Soph. Trach. 259) ; λαμβ. yvvaiKa, to take i. e. marry a tcife, Mk. .xii. 19-22; Lk. xx. 28-31, ((Jen. iv. 19, etc. ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 16 ; Eur. .\lc. 324 ; with ίαυτΰ added, Gen. iv. 19; vi. 2, and often). b. of that which when taken is not let go, like the Lat. capio, i. q. to seize, lay hold of, apprehend : τινά, Alt. xxi. 35, 39 ; Mk. .xii. 3, 8, and very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down ; trop τι, i. e. to get possession of, obtain, a thing, Phil. iii. 12 [cf. W. 276 (259)] ; metaph., of affections or evils seizing on a man (Lat. capio, orcupo) : τίνα ΐλα- β(ν (κστασις, Lk. v. 26 ; φόβος, Lk. vii. IG (very often so even in Horn., as τρόμος €λλαβ€ γνία, Π. 3, 34 ; μ( ^μ(ρος ai/jfl, 3, 44G ; χόλος, 4, 23; Sept. Ex. xv. 15; Sa[). xi. 13 (12)) ; ττνίίιμα (i. e. a demon), Lk. ix. 39; πιφασμός, 1 Co. X. 13. c. to take by craft (our catch, used of hunters, fisliermen, etc.) : oibiv, Lk. v. 5 ; trop. Ttva, to circumvent one by fraud, 2 Co. xi. 20 ; with &ολφ added, ib. xii. 16. d. to take to one's self lay hold upon, lake possession of, i. 6. to appropriate to one's self: 4αυτω τη» τιμήν, Heb. v. 4. e. Lat. capio, catch at, reach after, strive to obtain : τι παρά τίνος (gen. of pers.), .In. v. 34, 41 ; alternating with ζητιΊν, ib. 44. f. to take a thing due ace. to agreement or law, to collect, gather (tribute) : τα δίδραχμα, Mt. xvii. 24 ; τίλη από tivos, ib. 25 ; δικάτας, Ileb. vii. 8 sq. ; καρπούς, Alt. xxi. 34 ; πάρα των ytapyui» άπο τοϋ καρπού, Mk. xii. 2. 4. to take i. e. to admit, receive: τίνα ραπίσμασιν, Mk. xiv. 65 LTTrWII [cf. I>at. verherihus aliquem accipere'], but see βάλλω, 1 ; τίνα fi's τα ίδια, unto his own home [see Ιδιος, 1 b.], Jn. xix. 27 ; fi'r υΐκίαν, 2 Jn. 10; fit το πλοΐον, Jn. vi. 21. to receive what is offered ; not to refuse or reject : Ttra, one, in order to obey him, Jn. i. 12; v. 43; xiii. 20; τ», prop., to receive, Mt. xxvii. 6 ; trop. : τον Xoyov, to admit or re- ceive into the mind, Mt. xiii. 20; Mk. iv. 16, (for which in Lk. viii. 1 3 δίδονται) ; την μαρτνρίαν, to believe the testi- monv,.Tn. iii. 11,32 sq.; τη pή/lατύτι^of,.Jn. xii. 48; xvii. 8. In imitation of the Hebr. I2"3D Ηψ) (on the various senses of which in the O. T. cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 915 sq.), ■πρόσωπον λαμβάνω, to receive a person, give him access to one's self, i. e. to regard any one's power, rank, external circumstances, and on that account to do some injustice orneglect something: used of partiality [A.V. to ac- cept the person"], Lk. xx. 21 ; with ανθρώπου added, GaL \αμβάνω 371 Λαοίί> ϋ. 6, (Lev. xix. 15; Mai. ϋ. 9, etc. ; θαύμαζαν τό πρόσαητ-, Deut. χ. 17; Job x.\.\ii. 22) ; [cf. Βρ. Lghtf t. on Gal. 1. c.]. 5. to lake, i. q. to choose, select : nm « τίνων, pass. Heb. v. 1. 6. To the signification to lake may be referred that use, freq. in Grk. auth. also (cf. Passow s. V. B. d. fin. ; [L. and S. II. 3]), by which λαμβάνιιν joined to a subst. forms a periphrasis of the verb whose idea is expressed by the subst. : λαμβ. αρχήν Ιο take be- (jinninri, i. q. άρχομαι to begin, lleb. ii. 3 (Polyb. 1, 12, 9, and often; Ael. v. h. 2, 28 ; 12, 53, and in other auth.) ; \ήθην τινός, to forget, 2 Pet. i. 9 (Joseph, antt. 2, 6, 10; 9, 1 ; 4, 8, 44 ; Ael. v. h. 3, 18 sub fin. ; h. anim. 4, 35) ; ίττήμνησίν Tivos, to be reminded of a thing, 2 Tim. i. 5 ; Ttelpav Tivos, to prove anylhiny, i. e. either to make trial of: ης sc. θαλάσσης, which they attempted to pass through, Heb. -xi. 29 ; or to have trial of, to experience : also with gen. of the thing, ib. 36, (in both senses often also in class. Grk. ; see nt'ipa, and Bleek, Br. a. d. Heb. ii. 2 p. 811); συμβούλων λαμβ. Ιο lake counsel,!, q. σvμβoυ\fΰ- €σθαι, to deliberate (a combination in imitation apparently of the Lat. phrase consilium capere, although that sig- nifies to form a plan, to resolve) : Mt. xii. 14 ; xxii. 15; xxvii. 1, 7 ; xxviii. 12 ; θάρσος, to take, receive, courage. Acts xxviii. 15 ; τό χάραγμα rivos, i. q. χαράσσομαι τ(, to receive the mark of, i. e. let one's self be marked or stamped with : Rev. .\iv. 9, 1 1 ; χ1.χ. 20 ; xx. 4. II. to receive (what is given) ; to gain, get, obtain: absol., opp. to αΙτ€Ϊν, Mt. vii. 8 ; Lk. xi. 10 ; Jn. xvi. 24 ; opp. to StSavai, Acts XX. 35 ; Mt. x. 8 ; with ace. of the thing, Mt. XX. 9 sq. ; Mk. x. 30 ; [Lk. xviii. 30 L txt. WHtxt. Trmrg.]; Jn. vii. 39; Acts ii. 38; x. 43; Ro. i. 5 ; V. II ; 1 Co. ii. 12 ; ix. 24 sq. ; 2 Co. xi. 4 ; Gal. iii. 14; Heb. ix. 15; [xi. 13 R G, see eVnyycXta, 2 b. ; cf. W. 237 (222)]; Jas. i. 12; v. 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 10; Rev. iv. 11 ; V. 12, and many other exx. ; μισθάν, Mt. x. 41; Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. iii. 8, 14 ; ίλ^ημοσννην. Acts iii. 3 ; ΐ\(ος, Heb. iv. 16; τόποι» απολογία s, .\cts xxv. IG; την ΐπίσκο- ηήν. Acts i. 20; 8ιάδοχον, Acts xxiv. 27 (successorem nc- cijiio, Plin. ep. 9, 13) ; τό Ίκανον πάρα τίνος (gen. of pers.), Acts xvii. 9 (see Ικανός, a. fin.) ; of punishments : κρίμα, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec; Mk. xii. 40 [cf. W. 183 (172)]; Lk. XX. 47 ; Jas. iii. 1 ; with dat. incommodi added, ίαυτω, Ro. xiii. 2 (δΐκί)!/, Hdt. 1, 115; Eur. Baccli. 1312 ; ποινάς, Eur. Tro. 360). οίκοδομήν, to receive edifying, i. q. οίκο- ίομοϋμαι, 1 Co. xiv. 5; πιριτομί^ν, \. q. ττίριτίμνομαι, Jn. vii. 23; τΊ ϊκ τίνος [?J, Jn. i. 16; ίΚ άναστάσίως τονς ΐ•ΐκρονς, substantially i. q. to receive, get liark. Ileb. xi. 35 [see ex, II. 6] ; f<, a part of a thing [.«ee €/c, II. 0], Rev. xviii. 4 ; t! παρά τίνος (gen. of pers.), [Lk. vi. 31 Τ Tr txt. WH] ; Jn. X. 18; Acts ii. 33 ; iii. 5; xx. 21; xxvi. 10; Jas. i. 7; 1 Jn. iii. 22 RG; 2 Jn. 4; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; aπό Tti-of (gen. of pers.), 1 Jn. ii. 27: [iii. 22 LTTrWII]; on the difference betw. παρά and από τίνος λαμβ. cf. W. 370 (347) note; [B. § 147, 5; yet see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 12] ; υπό τίνος, 2 Co. xi. 24 ; ιτως ίίλι^φαί, hotc thou hast received by instruction in the gospel, i. e. hast learned. Rev. iii. 3. The verb λαμβάνω does not occur in the Epp. to the Thess , Philera., Titus, nor in the Ep. of Jude. [CoMP. : άνα^ ώτι-, σνν-αντι- (-μια), άπο-, (πι-, κατά-, μ^τα-, πάρα-, σνν-τταρα-, προ-, προσ-, σνν-, (nivirfpl•-, νπα-Χαμβάνώ. Syx. see δίχομαι, fin.] Λάμεχ, ό, (Hebr. ^IpS), Lameck, the father of Noah (Gen. V. 25 sqq.) : Lki ui. 36.* λαμμά, see λαμά. λαμητά?, -ά8ος, ή, (λάμπω, cf. our lamp), [fr. Aeschyl. and Thuc. down], Sept. for T3S ; 1. a torch : Rev. iv. 5 [where A. V. lamps'] ; viii. 10. 2. α lamp, the flame of which is fed with oil : Mt. xxv. 1, 3 sq. 7 sq. ; Jn. xviii. 3 ; Acts xx. 8. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlvi. ; Eders- heini, Jesus the Messiah, ii. 455 sqq. ; Becker, Charicles, Sc. ix. (Eng. trans, p. 153).]* λομχρόϊ, -ά, -Of, (λάμπω) ; a. shining; brilliant: αστήρ. Rev. xxii. 16 (Hom. Ή. 4, 77, etc.) ; clear, transpar- ent, Rev. xxii. 1. b. splendid, magnificent, [A. V. gorgeous, bright (see below)] : ΐσθής, Lk. xxiii. 11 ; Acts X. 30; Jas. ii. 2 sq.; λίνον [LTrWH XWov], Rev. xv. 6 ; βίσσινος, xix. 8; neut. plur. splendid [(R. V. sumpt- uous)] things, i. e. elegancies or luxuries in dress and style. Rev. .xviii. 14. The word is sometimes used of briUiant and glistening whiteness (hence λαμπρά τήβιννα, toga Candida, Polyb. 10, 4, 8 ; 10, 5, 1) ; accordingly the Vulg. in Acts x. 30; Jas. ii. 2; Rev. xv. 6 renders it by candidus; and some interpreters, following the YuXg. ("indutum veste alba"), understand 'white apparel' to be spoken of in Lk. xxiii. 11 [A. V. gorgeous; (see above)]; cf. Keim iii. p. 380 note [Eng. trans, vi. 104].* λαμπρότη?, -ητος, ή, brightness, brilliancy : τοΟ ήλΙου, Acts xxvi. 13. [From Hdt. (metaph.) down.]* λαμΐΓρώ5, adv., splendidly, magnificently: of sumptuous Uving, Lk. xvi. 19. [From Aeschyl. down.]* λάμπω; fut. λάμψ-ω (2 Co. iv. 6 Ltxt. TTrWH); 1 aor. (λαμψα; [fr. Hom. down] ; to shine : Mt. v. 15 sq. ; xvii. 2 ; Lk. xvii. 24 ; Acts xii. 7 ; 2 Co. iv. 6. [CoMP.: «<-, π^ρι-λάμπω.] * λανθάνω (lengthened form of λήθω) : 2 aor. ΐλαθο», (whence Lat. latere) ; Sept. several times for dS> ;, etc.; [fr. Hom. down] ; to be hidden : Mk. vii. 24 ; Lk. viii. 47 ; Tifii, to be hidden from one. Acts xxvi. 26 ; 2 Pet. iii. 5 (on which see θίλω, 1 sub fin.), 8 ; ace. to the well- known classic usage, joined in a finite form to a ptcp. i. q. secretly, unawares, without knowing, (cf. Matthiae § 552 β.; Passow s. v. ii. p. 18'; [L. and S. s. v. A. 2]; W. § 54, 4 ; [B. § 144, 14]) : ίλαθον ξινίσαντις, have un- awares entertained, Heb. xiii. 2. [Comp. : tic-, «πι- (-μαΟ•]* λαξίυτόϊ, -ή. -όν. (fr. λαξ(ΰω, and this fr. λάς a stone, and ξίω to polish, hew), cul out of stone : μνήμα, Lk. xxiii. 53, and thence in Evang. Nicod. c. 11 fin.; (once in Sept., Deut. iv. 49 ; Aquila in Num. xxi. 20; xxiii. 14; Deut. .xxxiv. 1 : [.losh. xiii. 20]; nowhere in Grk. auth.).* AaoSiKcCa \_-κία Τ WH (see I, t) ; R G L Tr accent -8ίκ(ΐα, cf. Chandler § 104], -ας, ή, Laodicea, a city of Phrygia, situated on the river Lycus not far from Co- lossae. After having been successively called Diospolis and Rhoas, it was named Laodicea in honor of Laodice, the wife of Antiochus II. [b. c. 261-246]. It was de• ΛαοΒ iKfvi 372 λατρίΐιω stroyed by an earthquake, a. d. 6G [or earlier, see Bp. Lghtfi. Coin, on Col. and Pbilern. p. 38 sij.], together with ColossiE and llierapolia (see ΚοΚοσσαΊ) ; and after- wards rebuilt by Marcus Aurelius. It was the seat of a Christian church: Col. ii. 1 ; iv. 13, 15 sq. [(on the 'Ep. to (or ' from ') the Laodiceans ' see Bp. Lghtfl. Coin, u. s. pp. 274-300)] ; Rev. i. 1 1 ; iii. 14, and in the [Rec] subscription of the 1 Ep. to Tim. [See Bp. Lr/htfl. Com. on Col. and rhileni. Intr. § 1 ; Forbiger, Hndbch. d. alten Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 347 sq.]• AooSiKcvs, -«'(OS, 0, a Laodicean, inhabitant of Laodicea : Col. iv. 16, and Kcc. in Uev. iii. 14.* Xciis, -oO, 0, [(cf. Curtius § .530)]; Sept. more tlian fifteen hundred times for DJi; rarely for Ό and DsS; [fr. llom. down]; pi-nple; 1. a people, tribe, nation, all those who are of the same stock and language : univ. of any people ; joined with γλώσσα, φυ\η, ΐθνοί. Rev. v. !); vii. 9; .\. 11 ; xi. 9; .\iii. 7 [Hec. cm.] ; .\iv. 6; .wii. 1.5, (see γλώσσα, 2) ; Trai^ft oi λαοί, Lk. ii. 31 ; Ro. .\v. 11 ; esp. of the people of Israel : Mt. iv. 23 ; xiii. 15 ; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. ii. 10 ; .In. xi. 50 (where it alternates with ϊθνος) ; xviii. 14; Acts iii. 23 ; Heb. ii. 17; vii. 11, etc. ; with 'laparfK added, .\cts iv. 10 ; distinguished fr. τοΪ£ (θνισιν, Acts xxvi. 17, 23; Ro. xv. 10; the plur. \aoi Ισμαήλ [R. V. the peoples of Is.^ seems to be used of the tribes of the people (like D'3i', Gen. xlix. 10; Deut. xxxii. 8; Is. iii. 13, etc.) in Acts iv. 27 (where the plur. was ap- parently occasioned by Ps. ii. 1 in its reference to Christ, cf. 25) ; oi πpfσβίτfpoι τοΐι λαού, Mt. xxi. 23 ; xxvi. 3, 47; xxvii. 1 ; ot γραμματείς toD λίΐοΟ, Alt. ii. 4; oi πρώτοι ToO \αοΰ, Lk. xix. 47 ; το πρ{σβυτ(μιον τοΟ \αοϋ, Lk. xxii. 6t) ; άρχοντα τοΰ λαοΟ, .\cts iv. S. with a gen. of the possessor, τοΰ ΰ(οϋ, αϋτοϋ, μοΰ (i. e. τοΰ θ(οϋ, llebr. Π1'Π'_ D>', DTlSsn D;'), the people whom chm. Άλασσα, TrWH Αασία [see WH. App. p. 160], Vulg. Thalassa), Lasa;a, Acts xxvii. 8, a city of Crete not mentioned by any ancient geograph- ical or other writer. But this need not excite surprise, since [jrobably it was one of the smaller and less impor- tant among the ninety or a hundred cities of the island ; cf. Kuinoel ad loc. [Its site was discovered in 1856, some five miles to the E. of Fair Havens and close to Cape Leonda ; see Smith, Voyage and Shipwr. of St. Paul, (3d ed. p. 259 sq.) 4th ed. p. 262 sq.; Alford, Grk. Test, vol. ii. Proleg. p. 27 sq.] * λάβ-κω : 1 aor. ίλάκησα ; (cf. Bttm. Ausf. Sprchl. ii. p. 233; Kruger ii. 1, p. 134; Kiihner § 343, i. p. 858; [Veitch s. v.] ; W. 88 (84)) ; 1. to crack, crackle, crash : Horn., Hes., Tragg., Arstph. 2. to burst asunder with a crack, crack open: Acts i. 18; S δράκων φυσηθ(\ς (after having sucked up the poison) (λάκησ€ και άπίθανί και (ζεχυθη 6 ιος αντον και η χολή, Act. Tliomae § 33, p. 219 ed. Tdf.• λατομ€ω, -ώ : 1 aor. (λατόμησα ; pf. pass. ptcp. λβλατο- μημινος; (fr. λατόμος a stone-cutter, and this fr. λάς a stone, and τίμνω) ; to cut stones, to hew out stones : Mt. xxvii. 60 ; Mk. xv. 46. (Sept. several times for 2ΪΠ ■ once for Π"13, Ex. xxi. 33 sq(|. ; Diod., [Dion. H., Strab., al. (cf. So/)h. Lex. s. v.)], Justin Mart.)* XarpeCa, -at, ή, {λατριΰω, (]. V.) ; 1. in Grk. auth. seroice rendered for hire; then any service or ministra- tion (Tragg., Plut., Lcian.) ; the service of God: τον Seov, Plat. apol. 23 b. ; καταφυγεΐν προς θΐων ΐνχάς τ€ κάί λατριίας, ibid. Phaedr. p. 244 e. ; servitus religionis, quam λατρίίαν Graeci vocant, .\ugust. civ. del 5, 15. 2. in the (jrk. Bible, the service or worship of God ace. to the requirements of the levilical law (Hebr. m^JJ. Ex. xii. 25 sq., etc.) : Ro. ix. 4; Heb. ix. 1, (1 Mace, ii^ 19, 22); λατριίαν προσφίριιν τω θιω [to offer service to God] i. q. βυσίαν προσφίρειν ch λατρεία•/ [to offer a sacrifice in service], Jn. xvi. 2 ; επιτιλεΊν τας λατρείας, to perform the sacred services (see επιτελίω, 1), spoken of the priests, Heb. ix. 6 ; univ. of any worship of God, ή λογική λ. Ro. xii. 1 [cf. W. § 59, 9 a.] ; (of the worship of idols, 1 Mace, i. 43).• λατρενω; !iit. λατρεύσω; 1 aor. ελάτρευσα; (λάτρις Λ hireling, Lat. latro in Knn. and Plant. ; λάτρον hire) ; in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. to serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of slaves and of freemen ; in the N. T. to render religious sertHce or homage, to worshi/>,(HehT. Ί2}.', Deut. vi. 13; X. 12; .losh. xxiv. 15); in a broad .=ense, λατρ. θεά: Mt. iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7; xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix. 14; Rev. vii. 15; xxii. 3; of the worship of idols. Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx. 5 ; xxiii. 24 ; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the manner of worshipping are these : θεώ [so R G] λατρεΰεα πνεύματι (ilat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3, Χαχοι/οί' 373 λ^7« but LTTrWH have correctly restored ητίύ/ιατι θίοΰ, i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that the dat. of the pers. (τώ θ<ω) is suppressed ; tv τω ττνίϋ- ματΊ μου fV τ^ (iayy-, in my spirit in delivering the glad tidings, Ro. i. 9 ; τώ θ^ω iv καθαρή σννιι^ησα, 2 Tim. i. 3 ; μίτά αιδοΰ; και tiXafidas or [so L Τ Tr WII] μίτ (ΰλαβ. κ. 8iovs, Heb. xii. 28 ; tv όσιάτητι κ. δικαιοιτΰντ], Lk. i. 74 ; (without the dat. ίίώ) νηστύαϋ κ. ht^afOi, Lk. li. 37; Xarpcifiv, absol., to wors/iiji God [cf. W. 593 (552)], Acts x.wi. 7. in the strict sense ; to perform sacred services, to offer gifis, to worship God in the observance of the riles instituted for his worship: absol., Heb. L\. 9; x. 2; spec. of the priests, to officiate, to discharge the sacred office : with a dat. of the sacred thing to which the service is rendered, Heb. viii. 5; .\iii. 10. [(Eur., al.)]* λάχανον. .ου, TO, (fr. \αχαίνω to dig ; hence herbs grown on land cultivated by digging ; garden-herbs, as opp. to wild plants); any potherb, vegetables: Mt. xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 32; Lk. xi. 42; Ro. xiv. 2. (1 K. xx. (x.\i.) 2 ; Gen. ix. 3 ; Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 2, etc. ; Arstph., Plat., Plut., al.)• Αφβαΐοί, see Oatdaios. λcγcώv and (so T, Tr [but not in ^h. xxvi. 53], WH [see fin.], also Lchm. in Mk. v. 9, 15) Xrytii' (cf. 7\lf. ed. 7 Proleg. p. 1.; [esp. ed. 8 p. 8:3; B. 16 (15)]; so, too, in inscrr. in Boeckh ; [Diod., Plut., al.]), -ώνος, ή, (a Lat. word), a legion (a body of soldiers whose number differed at different times, and in the time of Augustus seems to have consisted of 6S2G men [i. e. 6100 foot, and 726 liorsL•]): .Mt. xxvi. 53; Mb. v. 9, 15; Lk. viii. 30 [here WH' (ex errore) Xtyiwv (cf. Chandler § 593)].» λΐγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass, are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. iXeyav, .In. xi. 5G Tdf. [cf. ΐχω, init.]) : I. in its earliest use in Horn, to lay (like Lat. lega. Germ, legen ; cf. J. G. Mid- ler in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 1 27 siiq. ; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep ; 1. to colled, gather; to pick out. 2. to lag with, count with; to enu- merate, recount, narrate, describe ; [cf. Eng. tale. Germ. ziihlen']. H. to put word to word in speaking, join \vords together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλίίι/, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in II. 2, 222 [yet cf. Schmi,lt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. V. B. 11. 2] ; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic ; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for i^X; often also for DXJ (saying, dictum) ; very rarely for ">3"1 ; and so in N. T. 1. univ. a. absol. ίο. •./«αλ•; Acts xiii. 15 ; xxiv. 10; to say, foil, by direct disc, Mt. ix. 34 ; xii. 44 ; xvi. 2 [here Tbr. WH reject the pass.] ; Mk. iii. 30; Lk. V. 39[WHbr.thecl.]; Jn. i. 29, 38; [1 Co. xii. 3 L Τ Tr AVH] ; .las. iv. 13, and very often ; the di- rect discourse is preceded by ότι recitative, Mt. ix. 18 [T om. ότι]; Mk. i. 15 [Tom. \VH br. Xry.]; ii. 12 [L and WHbr. Xry.]; iii. 21 sq.; v. 28 ; vi. 14sq. 35; vii. 20; Lk. i. 24; iv. 41; xvii. 10; Jn. vi. 14; vii. 12; viii. 33 ; ix. 9, 41 ; xvi. 17; Acts ii. 13; xi. 3; Heb. x. 8; Rev. iii. 17, etc.; foil, by ace. with inf., Lk. xi. 18 ; xxiv. 23 ; Jn. xii. 29; Acts iv. 32; xxviii. 6, etc. ; folL by ότί, Lk. xxii. 70 ; Jn. viii. 48; xviii. 37; 1 Tim. iv. 1, (for other exx. see 2 a. below); foil, by an indir. question, Mt. xxi. 27; Mk. xi. 33; Lk. .xx. 8. b. The N. T. writers, par- ticularly the historical, are accustomed to add the verb \fytu> foil, by direct disc, to another verb which already contains the idea of speaking, or which states an opin- ion concerning some person or thing ; as το ρηθίν . . . προφήτου \iyotn-oc, Mt. ii. 1 7 ; viii. 1 7 ; .xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 35 ; κηρύσσων κ- [L Τ ΛΥΙΙ om. Tr br. και] \(γωυ, Mt. iii. 2; κράζ(ΐν και Xtyitv, Mt. ix. 27; xxi. 15; Mk. x. 47; Lk. iv. 41 [here L Τ Tr mrg. κραύγαζαν] ; Acts xiv. 15 ; ■προσ- φων(1ν κ- \(y€iv, Mt, xi. 1 7 ; l.k. vii. 32 ; άπΐκρίθη και Xt'yft, Mk. vii. 28; aivtiv τ. 6eov κ. \eyeiv, Lk. ii. 13; ■γογγΰζιιν κ. \eyeiv, Jn. vi. 42. to verbs of speaking, judging, etc., and those which denote in general the nature or the substance of the discourse reported, the ptcp. λί'γωι/ is added (often so in Sept. for "iokS [λν. 535 sq. (439). cf. 602 (560)]) foil, by direct disc. : άπ(κ/ιβη Uywv, Mt. xxv. 9, 44 s({. ; Jlk. ix. 38 [T WH om. λί^ωι/] ; Acts xv. 13; Rev. vii. 13, etc. (see αποκρί- νομαι, 1 c.) ; fme λ., Mk. [viii. 28 Τ WII Tr mrg.]; xii. 2G ; Lk. XX. 2, (in Grk. writ, ΐφη Χίγων) ; ΆόΧησι \εγωι> (see λαλώ, 5) ; ϊμαρτΰρησι, Jn. i. 32 ; KtKpaye λ- ib. 15 ; (8ί8ασκ€ λ. Mt. V. 2; [ίβόησί or] άν(βόησ( λ., Mt. x.x\ii. 4ΰ; Lk. ix. 38; άνίκραξί λ-, Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34 [T \VH om. Tr br. λί'γ.] ; also after aheiv, Rev. v. 9 ; xv. 3 ; a'lpdv [or eVa/p.] φωνήν, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts xiv. 11 ; βαχ/• ^ofeif, Mt. viii. 27; ix. 33 ; xxi. 20; nfter προφτμιίην, Mt. XV. 7; yoyyi((iv, Mt. xx. 12; €Ϊπ(ν iv παμαβολαΐς, Mt. xxii. 1 ; παμίθηκ€ παραβοΧήν, Mt. .xiii. 24; 8ΐ€μαρτύ• ρατο, Heb. ii. 6 ; iπr]yyfKτaι, Ileb. xii. 26, and a great many other exx. It is likewise added to verbs of every kind which denote an act conjoined with speech; as έφάνη, φαίνεται Xtyav, Mt. i. 20 ; ii. 13; προσ^κϋν^ι Xtyav, Mt. viii. 2; ix. 18; .xiv. 33; xv. 25; add, Mt. viii. 3 ; ix. 29 ; xiv. 15 ; Mk. v. 35 ; Lk. i. 66 ; v. 8 ; viii. 38 ; .x. 1 7 ; XV. 9; xviii. 3; xix. 18; Acts viii. 10, 18 sq. ; xii. 7; xxvii. 23 sq. ; 1 Co. xi. 25, etc. On the other hand, the verb λίγω in its finite forms is adiled to the participles of other verbs : Mt. xxvii. 41 ; Mk. viii. 12 ; xiv. 45, 63, 67; XV. 35; Lk. vi. 20; Jn. i. 36; ix. 8; Acts ii. 13; Ileb. viii. 8; άποκριθΛς Xiyti, Mk. viii. 29; ix. 5, 19; x. 24, 51 ; .xi. 22, 33 [L Tr mrg. br. Τ Tr WII om. άττ.] ; Lk. iii. 11 ; xi. 45 ; xiii. 8, (nowhere so in Acts, nor in Mt. nor in Jn.) ; κράξας Xfy«, Mk. v. 7 [Rec. ftn-e] ; ix. 24. typafe λί'γων (ibS7 ΙΠΤ, 2 Κ. X. 6 ; 2 S. xi. 15, etc.), he wrote in these words, or he wrote these words [A. V. retains the idiom, he wrote saying (cf. e. below)] ; Lk. L 63; 1 Mace. viii. 31; xi. 57; Joseph, antt. 11, 2. 2 ; 13, 4, 1 ; exx. fr. the Syriac are given by Gesenius in Rosenmuller's Repertor. i. p. 135. ϊπ(μ•^ΐ or άπίστ(ϊΚ( Xcyav, i. e. he ordered it to be said by a messenger : Mt. xxii. 16; xxvii. 19; Lk. vii. llisq. ; xLx. 14; Jn. xi. 3; Acts xiii. 15; xvi. 35, (see in (Ιπον, 3 b.) ; otherwise in Mt. xxi. 37 ; Mk. xii. 6. c. ή φωνή Xeyovσa : Mt. iii. 17 ; xvii. 5 ; Lk. iii. 22 [G L Τ Tr WH om. Xry.] ; Rev. vi. 6 ; X. 4, 8 ; xii. 10 ; xiv. 1 3, etc. Xiyeiv φωηι μeyά\τ|, Rev. V. 12 ; viii. 13 ; cV φωνίί μ., ib. χίτ. 7, a. d. In λΓ/ω 374 λέγω accordance with the Ilebr. conception which regards thought as internal speech (see ctTroc, S), we find Xtyeiv fv ί'αυτώ, to sai/ within one's self, i. e. to lliinic icitk one's self: Mt. iii. 9; L\. 21; Lk. iii. 8; €v τή καρδία αϋτοϋ, Rev. xviii. 7. e. One is said to speak; λίγΕίν, not only when he uses language orally, but also when lie ex- presses himself in writing [(cf. b. sub fin.)]: 2 Co. vii. 3; viii.8; ix. 3, 4 ; xi. IG, 21 ; Γΐύΐ. iv. 11, and often in Paul; so of the writers of the O. T. : Ko.x. 16,20; xi. 9; XV. 12 ; Xe'yfi ή γμαφή. Ho. iv. 3 ; x. 11 ; xi. 2 ; Jas. ii. 23, etc. ; and simply Xt'yij, sc. ή λίγουσα, i. e. ή γραφή (our il is said): Ro.xv. 10, [11 I/l'rmrg.]; Gal. iii. Hi; Eph. iv. 8; v. 14; cf. W. 522 (486 sq.) and 588 (547) ; B. §12Π, 16; λ<'ν«, sc. ό β(6ς, 2 Co. vi. 2 ; Xeyfi Δαυίδ eu ψάλμω, Acts ,\iii. 35 ; Xiyet ό if of, lleb. v. ti ; cV τώ Ώσηί, Κο. ix. 25; eV'HXi'a, Ho. xi. 2; (v Δαυίδ, lleb. iv. 7; Xi'yfi TO πν€νμα το aytoi». lleb. iii. 7 ; 6 νόμος Xeyft. 1 Co. xiv. 34; Ti, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 19. f. Xiyav is used of every variety of speaking: as of inquiry, Mt. ix. 14; XV. 1 ; xvii. 25 ; xviii. 1 ; Mk. ii. 18; v. 30 sq. ; Lk. iv. 22; vii. 20; Jn. vii. 11 ; ix. 10; xix. 10; Ro. x. 18 sq.; xi. 1, 11, etc.; foil, by fi interrog. [seeti, II. 2], Acts xxi. 37; Xe'yti rtf, i q. one bids the question be asked, Mk. xiv. 14; Lk. xxii. 11 ; of reply, Mt. xvii. 25; xx. 7; Mk. viii. 24 [Lmrg fin-ti/l ; Jn. i. 21 ; xviii. 17; of acclaim, Rev.iv 8, 10; of exclamation. Rev. xviii. 10,16, of entreat y, Mt. XXV. 11 ; Lk. xiii. 25 ; i. q. to set forth in language, make plain, Heb. v. 11. g. Xeya> w. acc. of the thing, to say a thing : S, Lk. ix. 33 (i. e. not knowing whether what he said was appropriate or not) ; Lk. xxii. 60 ; to express in ivords, Philem. 21 ; τούτο, Jn. viii. 6 ; xii. 33 ; τοιαϋτα, lleb. .xi. 14 ; ταϋτα, Lk. viii. 8; xi. 27, 45; xiii. 17, Jn. v. 34; Acts xiv. 18; 1 Co. ix. 8; τάδί (referring to what follows), Acts xxi. 11; Rev. ii. 1, 8, 12, 18, iii. 1, 7, 14; W, u-hat * Ro. X. 8; xi. 4; Gal. iv. 30, 1 Co. xiv. 16; πολλά, Jn. xvi. 12; TaXfyojaeiO, Lk. xviii. 34 ; Acts xxviii. 24 : Heb. viii. 1 ; υπό TiiOf, Acts viii. 6; xiii. 45 [LTTrWlI ΧαΧου- fiiVois] : x.xvii. 1 1 ; λίγω άλήθίίαν, Jn. viii. 45 sq. ; Ro. ix. 1 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7 ; άληθΐ;, Jn. xix. 35 ; άνθρώπινον, Ro. vi. 19; σϋ Xt'yfir, sc. αυτό, prop, thnu sayesi, i. e. thou grantest u'hat thou askest, equiv. to it is just as thou sayest ; to be sure, certainly, [seecHrof, 1 c] : Mt. xxvii. 11 ; Mk. XV. 2; Lk. xxiii. 3, cf. xxii. 70; Jn. .xviii. 37, [(all these pass. WH mrg. punctuate interrogatively)]; παραβολήν, to put forth, Lk. xiv. 7 ; to αυτό, to profess one and the same thing, 1 Co. i. 10 cf. 12. h with dat. of the pers. to whom anything is said : foil, by direct discourse, Mt. viii. 20; xiv. 4; xviii. 32; xix. 10 : Mk. ii. 17, 27; vii. 9; viii. 1 ; Jn. i. 43 (44), ii. 10. and scores of other exx. ; Xe'yfti/ τινί ■ κύρΐ€, κίιρκ, to salute any one as lord, Mt. vii. 21 ; impv. λίγι μηι, Acts xxii. 27 (generally (Ιπίμοι. ημίν) ; plur. Lk. x. 9 ; άμην λc'yω νμ'ιν, I solemnly declare to you, (in the Gospels of Mt. Mk. and Lk.) ; for which the Greek said fV όληθιίας λ/γω ύμΐν. Lk. iv. 25, and λeyω νμιν αληθώς, ib. i.\. 27 ; in Jn. everywhere [twenty-five times, and always uttered by Christ] άμην dfiijii λί'γω σοι (ϋμίν), I most solemnly declare to thee (you), i. 51 (52); iii. 11, etc.; with the force of aa asseveration X«'ya τικί, without αμήν: Mt. xi. 22; xii. 36; xxiii. 39; Lk. vii. 9, 2S; χ. 12; xii. 8; xvii. S4 ; xviii. 8, 14 ; va'i λίγοι ϊιμϊν, Mt. xi. 9 ; Lk. vii. 26 ; xi. 51 ; .xii. 5; λίγω σο», Lk. xii. 59. with a dat. of the thing, in the sense of commanding (see 2 c. below), Mt. xxi. 19; Lk. xvii. 6 ; in the sense of asking, i m ρ 1 ο Γ- Ι η g, Lk. xxiii. 30: Rev. vi. 16. λίγω nvi τι, to tell a tiling to one : Mt. x. 27 ; 2 Th. ii. 5 ; τήν άλιΊθιιαν, .Jn. xvi. 7 ; μυστηριον, 1 Co. XV. 51; παραβο^ήν, Lk. .wiii. 1 ; of a promise, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6; i. (i- to unfold, ex- plain, Mk. x. 32 ; foil, by indirect disc, Mt. xxi. 27 ; Mk. xi. 33 ; Lk. xx. 8 ; nvi τίνα, to speak to one about one, Jn. viii. 27; Phil. iii. 18. i. λίγω full, by preposi- tions : irpat τνα, which denotes — either to one (etjuiv. to the dat.) : foil, by direct disc, Mk. iv. 41 ; x. 26 ; Lk. viii. 25; ix. 23; xvi. 1; Jn. ii. 3; iii. 4; iv. 15; vi. 5; viii. 31; Acts ii. 7 [R G], 12: xxviii. 4, 17; foil, by ϋη recitative, Lk. iv. 21 ; irpos τινά τι, Lk. xi. 53 RG L Tr mrg. ; χ xiv 10 ; — or as respects one, in reference to one [cf. B. § 133,3; W. §31.5; 405(378); Kruger § 48,7, 13; Bleek on lleb. i. 7 : Aleyer on Ro. x. 21] : Lk. xii. 41 ; lleb. i. 7, [al. add 8, 13; vii. 21]; μ(τά τίνος, to speak with one, Jn. xi. 56 , jrfpi τίνος, of, concerning, one [cL W. § 4 7, 4], Mt. x.xi. 45 ; Jn. i 47 (48) ; ii. 21 ; xi. 13 ; xiii. 18, 22 ; Heb. ix. 5; irtpl τίνος, on, Lk. xxi. 5; τ\ π(ρί τίνος, .Τη. i. 22 ; i.x. 1 7 ; Acts viii. 34 ; Tit. ii. 8 ; τινι ntpi τίνος, Mt. xi. 7 , Mk. i. 30; viii. 30 [Lchm. (ΐπωσινί ; ττρός τίνα irtpi τίνος, Lk. \\\. 24 ; ίπίρ τίνος, to speak for, on behalf of, one, to defend one. Acts xxvi. 1 [LTTr Wll mrg. TTtpi] ; iVi τίνα, to speak in reference to, oj [see ini. C. L 2 g. yy. ; B. § 147, 23], one, Heb. vii. 13 ; fit Tiva (n βλάσφημων), against one, Lk. xxii. 65 ; in speaking to have reference to one, speak with respect to one, Acts ii. 25 [cf. W. 397 (371)] ; in speaking to refer (a thing) to one, with regard to, Eph. v. 32 ; eh τον κόσμον, to the world (see eir, A. I. 5 b.), Jn. viii. 26 [L Τ Tr Wll Χαλώ]. k. with adverbs, or with phrases having ad- verbial force : καλώί, ί•/ί//)/Λ/, Jn. viii. 48; xiii. 13; ωσαύ- τως, Mk. xiv. 31 ; τ* κατά σνγγνωμην, ίπιταγήν, l)y Λvay of advice [concession (see συγγνώμη)], by way of command, 1 Co. vii. 6 ; 2 Co. viii. 8 ; κατά ανθρωπον [see άνθρωπος, 1 c], Ro. iii. 5 ; Gal. iii. 15 ; 1 Co. ix. 8 ; Αυκαονιστί, Acts xiv. 11. In conformity with the several contexts where it is used, λίγω, like the Lat. dico, is 2. specifi- cally a. i. q. to asseverate, affirm, aver, maintain : foil, by an acc with inf.,Mt. xxii. 23 ; Mk. xii. 18 ; Lk. XX. 41 ; xxiii. 2; xxiv. 23; Acts v. 36; viii. 9; xvii. 7; xxviii. 6; Ro. xv. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18; Rev. ii. 9; iii. 9; with the included idea of insisting on,πfpιτfμv(σθaι{thaί you must be [cf. W. § 44, 3 b. : B. § 141, 2]), Acts xv. 24 Rec ; with the simple inf. without a subject-acc, Lk. xxiv. 23 ; Jas. ii. 14 ; 1 Jn. ii. 6, 9 ; foil, by ότι (where the acc. with inf. might have been used), Mt. xvii. 10; Mk. ix. 11; xii. 35; Lk. ix. 7; ,Tn. iv. 20; xii. 34; 1 Co. XV. 12 ; Xe'yω Tici uri etc. to declare to one that etc. [cf. B. §141,1]: Mt.iii.9; v.20,22; xii. 36; xiii. 17; xvii. 12; xxi. 43 [WH mrg. om. ότι] : xxvi. 21 ; Mk. ix. 13 ; xiv. 18 \€ΐμμα 375 XetTovpyta 25, 30 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; χ. 12 ; xiii. 35 [Tr WH om. L br. Sn] ; xiv. 24 ; xviii. 8 ; xix. 26, 40 [WII txt. om. Tr br. 5τι] ; xxi. 3 ; xxii. 16, 37, etc.; Jn. iii. 11 ; v. 24 sq. ; viii. 34 ; x. 7 [Tr λ\Ή om. L br. ort] ; xvi. 20 ; Gal. v. 2 ; λί'γω τινά, ΟΤΙ, by familiar attraction [cf. W. § 66, 5 a.; B. § 151, 1] for λί'γω, οτι τις: Jn. viii. 54; ix. 19; x. 36 (where for νμ^Ις Xc'yere, οτι ούτος, ov . . , anttjTfike, βλα- σφημά; the indirect discourse passes into the direct, and βλασφημΐ'ις is put for βλασ-φημύ [Β. § 141,1]). b. i. q. to leach : with dat. of pers. foU. by direct disc, 1 Co. vii. 8, 12; τι rtw, Jn. xvi. 12; Acts i. 3 ; τοϋτο folh by Sti, 1 Th. iv. 15. c. to exhort, advise; to command, direct : with an ace. of the thing, Lk. vi. 46 ; λί'γουσι (sc. αντά) κ. oil ποιοϋσιν, Mt. xxiii. 3; W τινι, Jlk. xiii. 37; Jn. ii. 5 ; τινί foil, by an imperative, Mt. v. 44 ; Mk. ii. 11 ; Lk. vii. 14 ; xi. 9 ; xii. 4 ; xvi. 9 ; Jn. ii. 8 ; xiii. 29 ; 1 Co. vii. 12 ; λί'γω with an inf. of the thing to be done or to be avoided [cf. AV. § 44, 3 b.; B. § 141, 2] : Mt. V. 34, 39 ; Acts xxi. 4, 21 ; Ro. ii. 22 ; xii. 3 ; foil, by ίνα. Acts xix. 4 ; ττ(ρί τίνος (gen. of the thing) foil, by ίνα, 1 Jn. V. 16, (see Ίνα, U. 2 b.); foil, by μη with subjunc. 2 Co. xi. 16. in the sense of ask-ing, seeking, entreating : with dat. of pers. foil, by an impv., 1 Co. x. 15 ; 2 Co. vi. 13; foil, by an inf. [W. 316 (296 sq.) ; B. u. s.], Rev. X. 9 [Rec. impv.]. χαίρων rtvl λί'γω, to give one a greet- ing, bid him ivelcome, salute him, 2 .In. 10 sq. (see χαίρω, fin.). d. to point out with words, intend, mean, mean to say, (often so in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow s. v. p. 30» ; [L. and S. s. v. C. 10]) : rtra, Mk. xiv. 71 ; Jn. vi. 71 ; τί, 1 Co. X. 29 ; TovTo foU. by direct disc. Gal. iii. 1 7 ; toCto foil, by ότι, 1 Co. i. 12. e. to call by a name, to call, name ; i. q. καλώ τιιό with ace of pred. : τί μ( 'Ktyfis ayadov; Mk.x.18; Lk.xviu.l9; add, Mk. xii. 37; Jn.v. 18 ; XV. 15 ; Acts x. 28 ; [1 Co. xii. 3 RG] ; Rev. ii. 20 ; pass, with predicate nom. : Mt. xiii. 55 ; 1 Co. viii. 5 ; Eph. ii. 1 1 ; 2 Th. ii. 4 ; Heb. xi. 24 ; ό λίγόμίνος, with pred. nom. he that is surnamed, Mt. i. 16 (so xxvii. 17) ; X. 2; Jn. .\x. 24 ; Col. iv. 11 ; he that is named: Jit. ix. 9 ; xxvi. 3, 14 ; xxvii. 16 ; Mk. xv. 7 ; Lk. xxii. 47 ; Jn. ix. 11 ; cf. Fritzsche on Mt. p. 31 sq. ; of things, places, cities, etc. : το όνομα Xtyerai, Rev. vui. 1 1 ; ptcp. called, Mt. ii. 23 ; xxvi. 36 ; xxvii. 33 ; Jn. iv. 5 ; xi. 54 ; xix. 13 ; Acts iii. 2; vi. 9 ; Ileb. ix. 3 ; with ίβραΐστί added, Jn. xix. 13, 17; [cf. v. 2 Tdf.] ; applied to foreign words translated into Greek, in the sense that is : Mt. xxvii. 3Λ ; Jn. iv. 25 ; xi. 16; xxi. 2; also & λϊγ^ται, Jn. xx. 16 ; ό λίγεται ίρμηνίυόμινον [L TrWII μfθcpμ■^, Jn. i. 38 (39) ; ^κρμην. λί'γίται. Acts ix. 36. f. to speak' out, speak' of, mention : τί, Eph. v. 12 (with which cf οκνώ κα'ι Xtytiv, Plat. rep. 5 p. 465 c.) ; [Mk. vii. 36 Τ Tr txt. WII. On the apparent eUipsis of λί'γω in 2 Co. ix. 6, cf. W. 596 sq. (555) ; B. 394 (338). CoMP. : άντι-, δια- (-μαι), eV, (πι-, κατά-, πάρα- (-μαι),προ-, συλ-λί'γω; cf. the catalogue of comp. in Schmidt, Syn. cli. 1, CO.] λίΐμ.μα [WII λίμμα, see their App. p. 154 and cf. I, »], -ΤΟΓ, TO, (λίίπω), a remnant: Ro. xi. 5. (Hdt. 1, 119; Plut. de prefect, in virtut. c. 5 ; for jTiXC?, 2 K. xix. 4.) • Xcws, -ίι'α, -tioi/. [(cf. Lat. /eii.<)], smooth, level: opp. to τραχύς, of ways, Lk. iii. 5. (Is. xl. 4 Alex. ; Prov. u. 20 ; IS. xvii. 40 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.) * XcCiru; [2 aor. subj.3 pers. sing, λίττ^, Tit. iii. 13T\VH mrg. ; pres. pass, λίίπομαι; fr. Hom. down]; 1. trans, to leave, leave behind, forsake; pass, to be lefi be- hind (prop, by one's rival in a race, hence), a. to lag, be inferior: iv μη^^νΐ, Jas. i. 4 (Hdt. 7, 8, 1); [al. associate this ex. with the two under b.]. b. to be destitute of. to lack : with gen. of the thing, Jas. i. 5 ; ii. 15, (Soph., Plat., al.). 2. intrans. to be wanting o: absent, to fail: XtlTiei τΐ τινι, Lk. xviii. 22; Tit. iii. 13, (Polyb. 10, 18, 8; al.) ; τα λίίττοντα, the things that re- main [so Justin Mart. apol. 1, 52, cf. 32; but al. are tcantitig2. Tit. i. 5. [CoMP. : άπο-, δια-, eV, eVi-, κατά-, iv -κατα-, nepi-, ύπο-λβίπω.] * λίΐτουργί'ω, ptcp. λί4του/>γώΐ' ; 1 aor. inf. XeiTovpyrjaai; (fr. λίΐτοι/ργόί, q. v.) ; 1. in Attic, esp. the orators, to serve the state al one's own cost ; to assume an office which must be administered at one's own expense; to dis- charge a public office at one's own cost ; to render public service to the state, (cf. Melanchthon in Apol. Confes. August, p. 270 sq. [Corpus Reformat, ed. Bindseil (post Bretschn.) vol. xxvii. p. 623, and F. Francke, Conf. Luth., Pt. i. p. 271 note (Lips. 1846)] ; Wolf, Dem. Lept. p. Ixxxv. sqq. ; Bockh, Athen. Staatshaush. i. p. 480 S(jq. ; Liihker, Reallex. des class. Alterth. [or Smith, Diet, of Grk. and Rom. Antiq.] s. v. λίΐτουργία). 2. univ. to do a service, perform a work ; Vulg. ministro, [A. V. to ministerl ; a. of the priests and Levites who were busied with the sacred rites in the tabernacle or the temple (so Sept. often for niU' ; as Num. xviii. 2 ; Ex. xxviii. 31,39; xxix. 30; Joel i. 9, etc. ; several times for 15|•, Num. iv. 37, 39 ; xvi. 9 ; xviii. 6 sq. ; add, Sir. iv. 14 [xiv. 15; 1. 14; Judith iv. 14]; 1 JIacc. x. 42; [Philo, vit. Moys. iii. 18; cf. ύμΐν λίΐτουργοΰσι κ- airoX την \ci- Tovpytav των ηροφητών κ• Βι^ασκάλων (of bishops and deacons), Teacliingof the Twelve Apost. c. 15 (cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 2 etc.)]) : Heb. x. 1 1. b. λ. τω κνρίω, of Christians serving Christ, whether by prayer, or by instructing others concerning the way of salvation, or in some other way : Acts xiii. 2 ; cf. De Wette ad loc. c. of those who aid others with their resources, and re- lieve their poverty : τινι ev τινι, Ro. xv. 27, cf. Sir. x. 25.• λίΐτουργία, -as, ή, (fr. XciTovpyew, q. v.) ; 1. prop. a puhlic'office which a citizen undertakes to administer at his own expense : Plat. Iegg.l2 p. 949 c; Lys. p. 163, 22; Isocr. p. 391 d.; Theophr. Char. 20 (23), 5; 23 (29), 4, and others. 2. univ. any service : of military ser- vice, Polyb.; Diod. 1,63. 73; of the service of work- men, c. 21 ; of that done to nature in the cohabitation of man and wife, Aristot. oec. 1, 3 p. 1343S 20. 3. in biblical Greek a. the service or ministry of the priests relative to the prayers and sacrifces offered to God: Lk. i. 23 ; Heb. viii. 6 ; Lx. 21, (for Din;? , Xum. viii. 22 ; xvi. 9 ; xviii. 4; 2 Chr. xx.xi. 2 ; Diod. 1,21; Joseph.; [Philo de caritat. § 1 sub fin.; al. ; see Soph. Lex. s. v.]); hence the phrase in Phil. ii. 1 7, explained s. v. θυν'ια, b. fin. [(cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44)]. b. α \€novpyiKO<; 87β XevKO'i gifi or benefaction, for the relief of the needy (see Xr«- τονργίω, 2 c.): 2 Co. ix. 12; Phil. ii. 30.* XwTovp^iKOs, -ή, -όν, (XdTovpyta), relating to the perform- ance of service, employed in vimistering : σκήη, Num. iv. [12], :i6, etc.; στολαί, Ι•'χ. .\xxi. 10, etc.; πνίΰματα, of angels cxeoutiiii; (iod"s behests, Ilcb. i. 14 ; also αϊ λ«Γ. τοΰ θ(οΰ ίυνάμαί, Ignat. ad Philad. 9 (longer recension) ; TO vav τΐΚηθος Twc ayytKwv αντοΰ, πωί τω β(\ηματι αντον λίΐτουργονσι παρ(στώτ(ί, Clem, lloni. I Cor. 34, 5, cf. Dan. (Theodot.) vii. 10. (Not found in prof, auth.) * λίΐτουργόϊ, -oC, o, (fr. ΕΡΓΩ i. e. ϊργύζομΜ, and unused Xfi-ros i. c]. XijiVor equiv. to δτ^/ιόσιοί public, belonging to the state (llcsych.), and this troni λ(ώί Attic for Xaot), Sept. for iTlC/p (Piel ptcp. of n^iy) ; 1. a public minister; a servant of the stale : τήΓ jroXfws, Inscrr. ; of the lictors, Plut. Rom. 26 ; (it has not yet been found in its primarj• and proper sense, of one who at Athens as- sumes a public office to be administered at his own ex- pense [cf. L. and S. s. v. I.] ; see Xfiroupye'o)). 2. univ. a minUter, servant : so of military laborers, often in Polyb. ; of the servants of a king, 1 K. x. 5; Sir. x. 2; [of Joshua, Josh. i. 1 Alex.; univ. 2 S. xiii. 18 (cf. 17)]; of the servants of the priests, joined with ύπηρίται, Dion. Hal. antt. 2, 73 ; των ayiaf, of the temple, i. e. one busied with holy things, of a priest, Heb. viii. 2, cf. [Pliilo, alleg. leg. iii. § 46]; N^eh. x. 39; Sir. vii. 30; των β(ων, of heathen priests, Dion. H. 2, 22 cf. 73; Plut. mor. p.41 7 a.; Ίι;σοϋ Χριστού, of Paul likening himself to a priest, Ro. XV. 16; plur. roC θ(ον, tho.se by whom God administers his affairs and executes his decrees : so of magistrates, Ro. xiii. 6 ; of angels, Heb. i. 7 fr. Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4 [cf. Philo de caritat. § 3] ; της χάριτοί τοΰ θιοϋ, those whose ministry the grace of (iod made use of for proclaiming to men the necessity of repentance, as Noah, Jonah : Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 8, 1 cf. c. 7 ; τον άπόστοΧον και λίί- Tovpyhv νμων της xpftas μου, by whom ye have sent to me those things which may minister to my needs, Phil, ii. 25.• [λίμα, see λαμά.] λι'ντιον, -ου, TO, (a Lat. word, Unleuni), a linen cloth, toiri Ί (Arr. perijjl. mar. rubr. 4) : of the loicel or apron, which servants put on when about to work (Suet. Calig. 26), Jn. xiii. 4 sq. ; with which it was supposed the nakedness of persons undergoing crucifixion was cov- ered, Ev. Xicod. c. 10; cf. Thilo, Cod. Apocr. p. S82 sq.* XcirCs, -ι'δοϊ, ή, (λίπω to strip off the rind or husk, to peel, to scale), a scale: Acts L\. 18. (Sept. ; Aristot. al. [cf. Hdt. 7, 61].)* λί'ιτρα, -as, ή, (fr. the adj. \rrrpot, q. v.), Hebr. η;'"^ϊ, lepras// [lit. morbid scaliness], a most offensive, annoy- ing, dangerous, cutaneous disease, the virus of which generally pervades the whole body ; common in Egvpt and the East (Lev. xiii. sq.) : Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42 ; Lk. V. 12 sq. (Hdt., Theophr., Joseph., Plut., al.) [Cf. Orelli in Herzog 2 s. v. Aussatz ; Greenhill in Bible Educator tv. 76 sq. 1 74 sq. ; Ginshurg in Alex.'s Kitto s. v. ; Eders- heim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 492 S( jq. ; McCl. and S. s. v.] * Xnrpis, -oC, ό, (as if for XtTttoos, It. Xeiris, XtVot -«or, TO, a scale, husk, bark) ; 1. in Grk. writ, scaly, rough. 2. specifically, leprous, affected with leprosy, (Sept. several times for i'">i'p and ^nx ; [Theophr. c. p. 2, 6, 4] see \('πρα) : Mt. viii. 2 ; x. 8 ; xi. 5 ; Mk. L 40; Lk. iv. 27; vii. 22; xvii. 12; of one [(Simon)] who had formerly been a leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ; Mk. xiv. 3.* X«imis, -η, -ύν, (λί'πω to strip off the bark, to peel), thin; small; το Xarrov, a very small brass coin, equiv. to the eighth part of an as, [A. V. a mite ; cf. Alex.'s Kitto and B.D. s. v. ; cf. F. R. Conder in the Bible Educator, iii. 179] : Mk. xii. 42 ; Lk. xii. 59; xxi. 2; (Alciphr. epp. 1, 9 adds κίρμα; Pollux, onom. 9, 6, sect. 92, suppUee νόμισμα).' Aevt and Arvts (T Tr (yet see below) WH \tvtU [but Lchm. -ts; see «, t]), gen. Λίυί (TTr WIl AfVii)> ^c. Αηιΐν (Τ WH AfvccV, so Tr exc. in Mk. ii. 14), [B. 21 (19); W. § 10, 1], 6, (Hebr. -iS a joining, fr. niS, of. Gen. .xxix. 34), Levi ; 1. the third son of the patri- arch Jacob by his wife Leah, the founder of the tribe of Israelites which bears his name: Heb. vii. 5, 9 ; [Rev. viL 7]. 2. the son of Melchi, one of Christ's ancestors: Lk. iii. 24. 3. the son of Simeon, also an ancestor of Christ: Lk. iii. 29. 4. the son of Alphaeus, a col- lector of customs [(.\. y. publican)'}: Mk. ii. 14 [here Viii (rejected) mrg. Ίάκωβον (see their note ad loc., cf. Weiss in Mey. on Mt. 7te Aufl. p. 2)] ; Lk. v. 27, 29 ; ace. to com. opinion he is the same as Matthew the apostle (Mt. ix. 9) ; but cf. Grimm in the Theol. Stud, u. Krit. for 1870 p. 727 sqq. ; [their identity is denied also by Nicholson on Matt. ix. 9 ; yet see Patritius, De Evangcliis, 1. i. c. i. quaest. 1 ; Venables in Alex.'s Kitto, s. V. Matthew; Meyer, Com. on Matt., Intr. § 1].* ΛΓυϊτη? (Τ ^VH AeuftTTjs [so Tr exc. in Acts iv. 36 ; see (ΐ,ι.'\),-ου,ό,α Levite; a. one of Levi's posterity. b. in a narrower sense those were called Levites (Hebr. "h Ί2, D"lS) who, not being of the race of Aaron, for whom alone the priesthood was reserved, served as as- sistants of the priests. It was their duty to keep the sacred utensils and the temple clean, to provide the sacred loaves, to open and shut the gates of the temple, to sing sacred hymns in the temple, and do many other things ; so Lk. x. 32 ; Jn. i. 1 9 ; Acts iv. 36 ; [(Plut. quaest. conv. 1. iv. quaest. ύ, 5 ; Pliilo de vit. Moys. i. § 58). See BB.DD. s. v. Levites ; Edersheim, The Temple, 2d ed- p. 63 sqq.] * AeutTiKOs [T WH AeveiT. ; see n, t], -ή, -6v, Levitical, pertaining to the Levites: Heb. vii. 11. [Philo de vit. Moys. iii. § 20.] * 뀫καίνω: 1 aor. ίΚήκανα [cf. W. § 13, 1 d.; B. 41 (35)]; (XfvKrfi); fr. Horn, down; Sept. for [-aSn ; to whiten, make irhite : τί, Mk. ix. 3 ; Rev. vii. 14.* [λίνκοβνσσινον : Rev. xLx. 14 WH mrg., aL βύσ-σινον XevK. see in βύσσινο!.^ \evKi%, -ή, -όν, (Χήσσω to see, behold, look at; akin to Lat. luceo. Germ, leuchlen; cf. Curtius p. 113 and § 87; [Vaniiek p. 817]), Sept. for ]^h; 1. light, bright, brilliant : τα Ιμάτια . . . XevKa u>s τ4 φώί, Alt. xvii. 2 ; esp. bright or brilliant from whiteness, (dazzling) white: λεωι» 377 λί^ά^ω spoken of the garments of angels, and of those exalted to the splendor of the heavenly state, Mk. xvi. 5 ; Lk. ix. 29; Acts i. 10; Rev. iii. 5 ; iv. 4 ; vi. 11; vii. 9, 13; xix. 14, (shining or white garments were worn on festive and state occasions, Eccles. ix. s ; cf. Heindorf on Hor. sat. 2, 2, 61) ; with ώσίϊ or ώί ό χιών added : Mk. ix. 3 RL; Mt. xxviii. 3, {ίπποι. XfVKOrepoi χιόνοί, Horn. Ή. 10, 437) ; c'x XevKois sc. Ιματίοκ (added in Rev. iii. 5 ; iv. 4), Jn. XX. 12; Rev. iii. 4; cf. W. 591 (.^.oO) ; [B. 82(72)]; used of wliite garments as the sign of innocence and purity of soul. Rev. iii. 18; of the heavenly throne, Rev. xx. 11. 2. (dead) while: Mt. v. 3G (opp. to μΐΚας)\ Rev. i. 14 ; ii. 17; iv. 4; vi. 2; xiv. 14 ; xix. 11 ; spoken of the ivliitening color of ripening grain, Jn. iv. 35.* λί'ων, -oiTot, 0, [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for '"iK, Π"";Χ, T33 (a young lion), etc. ; alion; a. prop.: Ileb. xi. 33; iPet. V. 8; Rev. iv. 7; ix. 8, 17; x. 3; xiii. 2. b. metaph. ΐρρΰσθην ϊκ στάματο! Xt'ovrot, I was rescued out of the most imminent peril of death, 2 Tim. iv. 17 (the fif. does not lie in the word lion alone, but in the whole phrase) ; equiv. to a brave ami miijlilij hero : Rev. v. 5, where there is allusion to Gen. xlix. 9 ; of. Nah. ii. 13.' λήθη, -ijr, ή, (\ήθω to escape notice, \ηθομαι to forget), [fr. Horn, dovin'], furgel/ulness : \ήθην Tjrar XajSeii/ (see λαμβάνω, I. G), 2 Pet. i. 9.* [λημά, see λαμά.^ ληνέε, -οΰ, ή, (also ό. Gen. χχχ. 38, 41 [cf. below]), [Theocr., Diod., al.] ; 1. a tub- or trough-shaped receptacle, vat, in which grajjes are trodden [A. V. wine- pressl (Ilebr. r\;) : Rev. xiv. 20 ; xix. 15 ; την Χηνον . . . τον μϊ-γαν (for R Tr mrg. την μι-γαΚην), Rev. xiv. 19 — a variation in gender which (though not rare in Hebrew, see Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 717) can hardly be matched in Grk. writ. ; cf. W. 526 (490) and his Exeget. Studd. i. p. 153 sq. ; B. 81 (71). 2. i. q. ύπαλήνιου (Is. xvi. 10; Mk. xii. 1) or προλήνιον (Is. v. 2), Hebr. 2p', the lower vat, dug in the ground, into ivhich the must or new wine flowed from the press : Mt. xxi. 33. Cf. Win. RWB. 8. V. Kelter; Roskoffia Schenkel iii. 513; [BB.DD. s.v. AVinc-press].* λήροϊ, -ου, ό, idle tall; nonsense : Lk. xxiv. 11. (4 Mace. V. 10; Xen. an. 7, 7,41 ; Arstpli., al.; phir. joined with παιδιαί, Plat. Protag. p. 347 d.; with φλυαρίαι, ib. Hipp, maj. p. 304 b.)* ληστήβ, -οϋ, ό, (for \ηΐστή! fr. λη'ζομαι, to plunder, and this fr. Ion. and Epic Xijis, for which the Attics use λ«η, booty), [fr. Soph, and Ildt. down], a rohher; a plun- derer, freebooter, brigand : Alt. xxvi. 55 ; Alk. xiv. 48 ; Lk. xxii. 52; Jn. x. 1 ; xviii. 40; plur., Mt. .x.xi. 13; xxvii. 38,44; Mk. xi. 17; xv. 27 ; Lk. x. 30, 3C ; xix. 46 ; Jn. X. 8 ; 2 Co. xi. 26. [Xot to be confounded with κΚίπτης thief, one who takes property by stealth, (although the distinction is obscured in A. V.) ; cf. Trench § xliv.]* λήψις (L Τ Tr WH λημψκ, see M, μ), -τωί, ij, (λαμβάνω, Χήψομω), [fr. Soph, and Thuc. down], a receiving : Phil, iv. 15, on which pass, see 8o ; 1 aor. ίΚίθασα ; 1 aor. pass, ίλιθάσθην. (λίθοί) \ Χίθιρος 878 \ίψ to slone; i. e. a. lo ovenDhdm or hury with ntnnef. Qapiilibus cooperio, Cic.) : τινά, of stoning, which was a Jewish mode of punislunent, (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Steini- gung; [B. D. s. v. Punishment, III. a. 1]) : Jn. x. 81- 83 (where λίθάζ(τ( and \ιθάζoμfv are used of tlie act of beginning ; [ef. W. § 40, 2 a. ; B. 205 (Π8_)]) ; .In. xi. 8 ; Ileb. xi. 3 7. b. In pelt one with stones, in order either to wound or lo kill Jiini : Acts xiv. 19; pass., Acts v. 26 [cf. W..'i0.3(471); B.242(208)]; 2Co..\i.25. (Ari.stot., lOIyl)•, Strab. ; Xi^iftii' e'v Ai'floit, 2 S. xvi. 6.) [CoMP. : κατα-\ίβύζω•^ * λίθινοϊ, η, -ov, (λίθο!) ; fr. Find, down ; of stone : Jn. ii. G ; 2 Co. iii. 3 ; Rev. ix. 20.* λιθο-βολί'ω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. phir. f\tθoβόλoυv ; 1 aor. t\iθofίόλησa ; Pass., pres. λιθοβολούμαι ; 1 fut. λιθοβολη- ΰήσομαι ; (λιθοβάλοί, and this fr. λίθος and βάλλω [cf. \V. 102 (OC) ; 23, 2:j]) ; Sept. for hpD and DJT ; i. (p λιθάζω (f\. v.), to stone; i. e. a. to kill hij stoninr/, to slone (of a species of punisliracnt, see λιθάζω^ : τινά, Mt. .\xi. 3j ; xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Acts vii. 58 sq. ; pass., Jn. viii. 5 ; Ileb. xii. 20. b. to pelt with stones : τινά, Mk.xii. 4[Rec.]; Actsxiv.S. ([Diod. 17, 41, 8]; Plut. mor. p. 1011 e.)* λ£θο5, -ου, 6, Sept. for nx, [fr. Horn, down]; a stone: of small stones, Mt. iv. 6 ; vii. 9 ; Lk. iii. S ; iv. [3], 11 ; xi. 11 ; xxii. 41; ,7n. viii. 7; plur., Mt. iii. 9 ; iv. 3 ; Mk. V. 5 ; Lk. iii. 8 ; xix. 40 ; Jn. viii. 59 ; x. 31 ; of a large stone, Mt. xxvii. (JO, G6 ; xxviii. 2 ; Mk.xv.46; xvi. 3sq.; Lk. xxiv. 2; Jn. xi. 38 sq. 41 ; xx. 1 ; of building stones, Mt. xxi. 42, 44 [T ora. L WIl Tr mrg.br. the vs.] ; xxiv. 2; Mk.xii. 10; xiii. 1 sq. ; Lk. xix. 44; xx. 17sq. ; xxi. 5 sq. ; Acts iv. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7 ; metaph. of Christ : λίθος ακρογωνιαίος (q. v.), ΐκλικτός (cf. 2 Esdr. v. 8), ΓιτιμοΓ, 1 Pet. ii. 6 (Is. xxviii. IG) ; ζών (see ζάω, ILb.), 1 Pet. ii. 4 ; λίθος προσκόμματος, one Λvhose words, acts, end, men (so stumble at) take such offence at, that they reject him and thus bring upon themselves ruin, ibid. 8 (7); Ro. ix. 33 ; of Christians : λίθοι ζώντας, living stones (see ^άω, u. s.), of which the temple of God is built, 1 Pet. ii. 5 ; of the truths with which, as with building materials, a teacher builds Christians up in Λvisdom, λίθοι τίμιοι, costly stones, 1 Co. iii. 1 2. λίθος μνλικός, Mk. ix. 42 R G ; Lk. xvii. 2 LTTrAVll, cf. Rev. xviii. 21. of precious stones, gems : λίθ. τίμιος, Rev. xvii. 4 ; xviii. 1 2, 16 ; xxi. 11, 19, (2 S. xii. 30; lK.x.2,11); Wffir, Rev. iv. 3 ; «νδίδυμίκοι λίθον (for ϋΟΎλίνον) καθαμόν, Rev. xv. 6 LTrtxt. Wn (Lzek. xxviii. 13 πάντα [or πάΐ'] λίθον χρηστον evSidfaai; [see \VH. Intr. ad 1. c.]) ; but (against the reading λίθαν) [cf. Scrivener, Plain Introduction etc. p. 6odJ. spec, stones cut in a certain form : stone lab- lets (engraved with letters), 2 Co. iii. 7 ; statues of idols, Acts xvii. 29 (Deut. iv. 28; Kzek. xx. 32).• λιβό-στρωτοϊ, -ov, (fr. λίθος and the verbal adj. στρωτός fr. στρ^Λνννμι), sprewl { pored) iritk slones (νυμφ(Ίον, Soph. Antig. 1204-5) ; το λιθ., substantively, a mosaic or tes- sellated pavement : so of a place near the praetorium or palace at Jerusalem, Jn. xix. 1 3 (see Ταββαθα) ; of places in the outer courts of the temple, 2 Chr. vii. 3 : Joseph b. j. 6, 1,8 and 3, 2; of an apartment whose pavement consists of tessellated work, Kpict. diss. 4, 7, 37, cf. £stk. i. 6; Suet. Jul. Caes. 46; Plin. h. n. 36, 60 cf. 64.* λικμάω, -ώ : fut. λικμήσω ; (λικμόί a winnowing-van) ; 1. to trinnow, cleanse wrivj the chaff from (jrain by iriii- nowiny, (Horn., Xen., Plut., al.; Sept.). 2. in a sense unknown to prof, auth., lo scatter (opp. to σννάγω, Jer. xxxi. (or xxxviii.) 10; add. Is. xvii. 13; Am. ix. 9). 3. to crush lo pieces, grind to powder : τινά, Mt. xxi. 44 [R G L br. WII br.] ; Lk. xx. 18 ; cf. Dan. ii. 44 [Theodot.] ; Sap. xi. 19(18). [But in Dan. 1. c. it repre- sents the Apliel of ^^0 fnem facere, and on Sap. 1. c. see Grimm. Alany decline to follow the rendering of the Vulg. {conterere, comminuere), but refer the e.xx. under this head to the preceding.] * λιμά, so Tdf. ed. 7, for λαμά, q. v. λιμήν, -ίνος, ό, [allied with λίμνη, q. v. ; fr. Horn, down], a harbor, liareii : Acts xxvii. 8, 12; see καλοί λιμίνις, p. 322'.• λ(μνη, -ης, η, (fr. λ(ίβω to pour, pour out [cf. Curtius § 541]), [fr. Horn, down], a lake: λ. Τ^ννησαρίτ [q, v.], Lk. v. 1 ; absol., of the same, Lk. v. 2 ; viii. 22 sq. 33 ; Toi πυρός. Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10, 14 sq. ; καιομίνη πυρΊ, Rev. xxi. 8.* λιμόβ, -οϋ, 6, (and η in Doric and later writ. ; so L Τ Tr WII in Lk. xv. 14; Acts xi. 28; so, too, in Is. viii. 21; 1 K. xviii. 2; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 188; [L. and S. s. V. init. ; 1Γ//. App. p. 157"]; B. 12 (11) ; W. 63 (62) [cf. 36], and 526 (490)) ; Sept. very often for 3;•-;; hun- ger : Lk. XV. 1 7 ; Ro. viii. 35 ; iv λιμώ κ. δίψ -f ι, 2 Co. xi. 27 ; Xen. mem. 1, 4, 13 ; i. q. scarcity of harrest , famine : Lk.iv. 25; xv. 14 ; Actsvii.ll; xi. 28 [cf. B. 81 (71)]; Rev. vi. 8 ; xviii. 8 ; λι/ιοί, famines in divers lands, Mk. xiii. 8 ; λιμπΊ κ. λοιμοί, -Mt. xxiv. 7 [L Τ Tr txt. WII om. »c. Xot/i.] ; Lk. xxi. 1 1 ; Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 9 ; the two are joined in the sing, in lies. opp. 226; Ildt. 7, 171; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 19 ; Plut. de Is. et Osir. 47.* λίνον (Treg. λ'ινον [so R G in Mt. as below], incorrect- ly, for ( is short; [cf. Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 42]), -ου, T(5, Sept. several times for ΠΠί??!), in Grk. writ, fr. Horn, down, /?ax : E.\. ix. 31 ; linen, as clothing, Rev. XV. 6 R G Τ Tr mrg. ; the wick of a lamp, Mt. xii. 20, after Is. xiii. 3.• ACvos (not ΧΊνος [with R G Tr] ; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. ; cf. Lipsius, Graram. Untersuch. p. 42), -ου, ό, Linus, one of Paul's Christian associates ; ace. to eccl. tradition bishop of the church at Rome (cf. Hase, Po- lemik, ed. 3 p. 131 ; Lipsius, Chronologie d. rom. Bischofe, p. 146 ; [Diet, of Chris. Biog. s. v.]) : 2 Tim. iv. 21.* λιιι -apos, -ά, -όν, (λίπα [or rather, λίπος grease, akin to άλfίφω])■, fr. Horn, down; fat: τα λιπαρά (joined with τά λαμπρά, q. v.) things which pertain to a sumptuous and delicate style of living [A. V. dainty], Rev. xviii. 14.• λίτρα, -ας, η, a pound, a weight of twelve ounces : Jn. xii.3; xix. 39. [Polyb. 22, 26, 19; Diod. 14, 116, 7; Plut. Tib. et G. Grac. 2, 3 ; Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 1 ; al.]* λίψ, λιβός, ό, (fr. λίίβω [to pouT forth], because it Xoyc'a 379 λόγιοι; brings moisture) ; 1. the SW. wind: Hdt. 2, 25 ; Polyb. 10, 10, 3; al. 2. Ihe quarter of the heavens whence the SW. wind blows : Acts xxvii. 12 [on which see βλίπω, 3 and κατά, II. 1 c.] (Gen. xiii. 14 ; xx. 1 ; Num. ii. 10; Deut. xxxiii. 23).* λογία, -as, η, (fr. λί'γω to collect), (Vulg. collecta}, a col- lecliiin : of money gathered for the relief of the poor, 1 Co. xvi. 1 sq. (Not found in prof. auth. [cf. W. 2.5].)* λογίζομαι; impf.f'Xoytfo^iji'; 1 ΐίοτ.ίΚογισάμην, adepon. verb with 1 aor. pass. (Χογίσθην and 1 fut. pass. \ογισθή- ίτομαι; in bibl. Grk. also the pres. is used passively (in prof. auth. the pres. ptcp. is once used so, in Hdt. 3, 95 ; [cf. Veitch s. v. ; W. 259 (243) ; B. 52 (46)]) ; (Xoyos) ; Sept. for 3!yn ; [a favorite word with the apostle Paul, being used (exclusive of quotations) some 27 times in his Epp., and only four times in the rest of the N. T.] ; 1. (rationes conferre) to reckon, count, compute, calculate, count ocer; hence a. to take into account, to make ac- count of: τι rm, Ro. iv. 3, [4] ; metaph. to pass to one's account, to impute, [A. V. reckon^ : τι, 1 Co. .xiii. 5; τικί τι, 2 Tim. iv. 1 6 [A. V. lat/ to one's charge^ ; τινΧ δίκαιο- σύνην, άμαρτίαν, Ro. iv. 6, [8 (yet here L mrg. Τ Tr WH txt. read oi)] ; τά παραπτώματα. 2 Co. v. 19 ; in imitation of the Hebr. h Tjnz, \ο-γίζ(ταί τι (or tw) fit Tt (equiv. to ei'f TO or ώστε (ΐραί τι), 'ώσ€ωί, the art of speaking to the purpose about things pertaining to wisdom or knowledge, 1 Co. xii. 8. CO kind (or style) of speaking : iv τταντι λόγω, 1 Co. i. 5 [A. V. utterance^. d. continuous speak- λόγο9 381 Xoyo•; in/j, discourse, such as in the N. T. is characteristic of teachers: Lk. iv. 32, 36 ; Jn. iv. 41 ; Acts iv. 4 (cf. iii. 12-26); xx. 7 ; iCo. i. 17; ii. 1; plur., ISIt. vii. 28; xix. 1 ; xxvi. 1 ; Lk. ix. 26 ; Acts ii. 40 ; Swaros iv 'Kayois κ. ffryois αυτόν. Acts vii. 22. Hence, the thought uf the .subject being uppermost, e. inslruclion: Col. iv. 3; Tit. ii. 8; 1 Pet. iii. 1 ; joined with ΜασκαΚία, 1 Tim. V. 1 7 ; with a gen. of the teacher, Jn. v. 24 ; viii. U2 ; xv. 20; xvii. 20; Acts ii. 41 ; 1 Co. ii. 4; 2 Co. i. 18 (cf. 19); 6 Xiiyof S (μός, Jn. viii. 31,37, 43, 01 ; xiv. 23 ; τ'ιη λόγω, witli what instruction, 1 Co. xv. 2 (where construe, ti κατίχιτι, TiVi λόγω etc.; cf. B. §§ 139, 58; 151,20); i. q. κήρυγμα, preaching, with gen. of the obj. : λ. άλι;- Btiat. 2 Co. vi. 7 ; Jas. i. 18 ; 6 λ. T^f αΚηθιία!, Col. i. 5 ; Eph. i. 13 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15 ; της καταΚΚαγής, 2 Co. v. 19 ; ό λ. rrfs σωτηρία! ταύτης, concerning this salvation (i. e. the saivatiun obtained through Christ) [cf. W. 237 (223); B. 162 (141)], Acts xiii. 26; ό λόγος της βασίΚ( las (τοϋ ΰ(οϋ). Ml. xiii. 19; τον στανροΰ, 1 Co. i. 18; ό τής αρχής τον Χριστοί λόγοΓ, the first instruction concerning Christ [cf. 13.150(136); W. 188(177)], Heb.vi.l. llonce 4. in an objective sen.se, what is communicated by instruc- tion, doctrine: univ. Acts χ viii. l.i; ό λόγ. αυτών, 2 Tim. ii. 17; plur. ήμίτίροι λόγοι, 2 Tim. iv. l.j; vyiaivovrt! \nyoi, 2 Tim. i. 13 ; ivith a gen. of obj. added, τοΟ κνρίον, 1 Tim. vi. 3 ; τής πίστεως, tlie doctrines of faitli [see πίστις, 1 c. /3•], 1 Tim. iv. 6. specifically, the doctrine con- iirning the attainment through Christ of salvation in the l-ingdomofOod- simply, Mt. xiii. 20-23 ; Jlk. iv. 14-20; \ iii. 32; xvi. 20; Lk. i. 2 ; viii. 12; Acts viii. 4; x. 44 ; xi.lO; xiv.2j; xvii.ll; Gal.vi.6; Phil.i.l4; 1 Th. i. 6 ; 2 Tim. iv. 2 ; 1 Pet. ii. 8 ; τον λόγοκ, υν aniarfiXe τοΧς etc. the doctrine which he commanded to be delivered to etc. Acts X. 36 [but L WII txt.om. Tr br. Sv, cf. W. § 62,3fin.; B.§131,13]; τον λόγον d/toutti', Lk. viii. 15; Jn. xiv. 24 ; Acts iv. 4 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7 ; λαλ«>/, Jn. xv. 3 (see other e.xx. s. v. λαλ/ω, 5 sub fin.) ; άπαθί'ιν τω λ., 1 Pet. ii. 8 ; iii. 1 ; 8ι8αχή πιστού λόγου, Tit. i. 9 ; with gen. of the teacher: ό λ. αυτών. Acts ii. 41 ; with gen. of the author : roO Seov, Lk. v. 1 ; viii. 11, 21 ; xi. 28 ; Jn. xvii. 6, 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 3G; 2 Co. iv. 2; Col. i. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 9; Tit. i. 3; ii. 5; lleb. xiii. 7; iJn. i. 10; ii. 5, 14 ; Rev. vi. 9; XX. 4; very often in the Acts: iv. 29, 31 ; vi. 2, 7; viii. 14 ; xi. 1 , 1 9 ; xii. 24 ; xiii. 5, 7, 44, 46 ; xvii. 1 3 ; xviii. 1 1 ; opp. to λ. ανθρώπων [Β. § 1•ό1, 14], 1 Th. ii. 13 ; λόγοι ζών Beov, 1 Pet. i. 23; 6 λ. τοΟ κνρίον. Acts viii, 25 ; xiii. 48 [(WHtxt. Trrarg. 5foD)] sq.; .\v.3.js(i.; xix. 10, 20; 1 Th. i. 8; 2 Th. iii. 1 ; toC Χριστού, Col. iii. IG ; Rev. iii. 8 ; with gen. of apposition, τού fiayyfXiov, Acts xv. 7 ; with gen. of the ol>j., τής χάριτος τοΰ BfoC, Acts xiv. 3 ; XX. 32; 5ικαιοσννης (see δικαιοσνι/ι;, 1 a.), Heb. v. 13; with gen. of quality, t^s ζωής, containing in itself the true life and imparting it to men, Phil. ii. 16. 5. ani/thing reported in speech ; a narration, narrative : of a written narrative, a continuous account of things done, Acts i. 1 (often so in (5rk. writ. fr. Hdt. down [cf. L. and S. s. v. A. IV.J) ; a fictitious narrative, a slori/, Mt. xxviii. 15, cf. 13. report (in a good sense) : ό λόγ. the news concerning the success of the Christian cause, Acts xi. 22; πιρί τίνος, Lk. v. 15; rumor, i. e. current story, Jn. x-xi. 23 ; λόγο» (χιιν τιι/όί, to have the (unmer- ited) reputation of any excellence. Col. ii. 23 (so λόγο» i^et Tts foil, by an inf., Hdt. 5, 60 ; Plat. epin. p. 987 b.; [see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c. (cf. L. and S. s. v. A. IIL 3)]). 6. matter under discussion, thing spoken of, affair: Mt. xxi. 24 ; Mk. xi. 29 ; Lk. .\x. 3 ; Acts viii. 21 ; XV. 6, and often in Grk. writ. [L. and S. s. v. A. VITL] ; a matter in dispute, case, suit at law, (as ιρτ in Exod. xviii. 16; xxii. 8) : ίχίΐνΧύγον ττμός τίνα, to have a ground of action against any one. Acts xix. 38, cf. Kypke ad loc. ; ■παρασος λόγου πορνιίας ([cf. II. 6 below] nut 1?T [-^i! '1?"73 or] "I?'?r3, Delilzsch), Mt. v. 32 ; [xix. 9 LWIImrg.]. 7. tiling spoken of or tailed ahoul; event; deed, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down) : 8io- φημίζίΐν Tiv λογοκ, to blazc abroad the occurrence, Jlk. i. 45 ; plur. Lk. i. 4 (as often in the O. T. ; μ(τα tovs λύγους τούτουΓ, 1 Macc. vii. 33). II. Its use as respects the mind alone, Lat. ratio; L e. 1. rea.fon, the mental faculty of thinking, medi- tating, reasoning, calculating, etc. : once so in the phrase ό λόγος τον θίοϋ, of the di\ ine mind, pervading and nnt- iuT all things by its proper force, Heb. iv. 12. 2. account, i. e. regard, consideration : λόγοι» noie'iaSai Tivot, to have regard for, make accoimt of a thing, care for a thing, Acts x.x. 24 RG (Job xxii. 4; Hdt. 1, 4. 18 etc.; Aeschvl. Prom. 231; Theocr. 3, 33; Dem., Joseph., Dion. H., pint., al. [cf. L. and S. s. v. B. II. 1]) ; also λό- γο» ij^eiv rii/of, Actsl. c. Lchm. (Tob. vi. 16 (15)) [cf. I. S a. above]. 3. account,i.e. reckoning, score : 8όσ(ως κ. λήψεως (see δόσΐΓ, 1 ), Phil. iv. 1 5 [where cf . Bp. Lghtft.] ; fis λόγον νμών. to your account, i. e. trop. to your advan- tage, ib. 1 7 ; σνναίριιν λόγοκ (an expression not found in Grk. auth.), to make a reckoning, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23; xxv. 19. 4. account, i. e. answer or e.x- planation in reference to judgment : λόγοι/ biSavai (as often in (irk. auth.), to give or render an account, Ro. xiv. 12 R G Τ WII L mrg. Tr mrg. : alsodn-oStSoi/oi, Heb. xiii. 1 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5 ; with gen. of the thing, Lk. xvi. 2 ; Acts xix. 40 [IK!]; wept tiios, Mt. xii. 36 ; [Acts xix. 40 LTTrWIl]: tim wept ί'αυτοΟ, Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. br. Tr txt. ; atVfli'Tii'a λόγοι» irepi τίνος, 1 Pet. iii. IS (Plat, polit. p. 285 e.). 5. relation : προς όν ήμ'ιν ό λόγος, with whom as judge we stand in relation [A. V. have to do\ Heb. iv. 13; κατά λόγον, as is right. Justly, Acts xviii. 14 [A. V. reason ivouid (cf. Polyb. 1, 62, 4. 5 ; 5, 110, 10)], (πάρα λόγοι», unjustly, 2 Macc. iv. 36; 3 Macc. vii. 8). 6. reason, cause, ground : Ti'it λόγω, for what reason? why? Acts x. 29 (ίκ τίνος λόγου; Aeschyl. Choeph. 515; «f oiSevo! λόγου. Soph. Phil. 730; Ww δικαι'ω λόγω (ττλ. ; Plat. Ciorg. p. 512 c.) ; παρ(κτος λόγου πορνείας (Vulg. excepta fnrnicationis causa) is generally referred to this head, Mt. v. 32; [xix. 9 L WHmrg.]; but since where λόγο? is used in this sense the gen. is not added, it has seemed best to include this passage among those mentioned in I. 6 above. m. In several passages in the writinijs of John ά Xayot \όyχη 38: denotes the essential Word of God, i. e. the personal (hypostatic) wisdom and power in union witli God, his minister in tlie creation and government of the universe, the cause of all the world's life both physical and ethical, ■wliich for the procurement of man's salvation put on hu- man nature in the person of Jesus the Messiah and shone forth conspicuously from his words and deeds : Jn. i. 1 , 14 ; (1 Jn. v. 7 Rcc.) ; with rijs ζωής added (see ζωή. 2 a.), 1 Jn. i. 1; toC θ(οϋ, Kev. .\i.\. 13 (although the in- terpretation which refers this passage to the hyjiostatic Xoyos is disputed by some, as by Baur, Neulest. Theolo- "ie p. 216 Sep). Respecting the combined Hebrew and Greek elements out of ivhich this conception originated among the Alexandrian Jews, see esp. Lucke, Com. iib. d. Evang. des Johan. ed. 3, i. pp. 243-294 ; [cf. esp. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. A\Ord (and for works which have appeared subseipiently, see Weiss in Meyer on Jn. ed. 6 ; Schurer, Neatest. Zeitgesch. § 34 II.) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Coh i. J 5 p. 143 sq. ; and for reff. to the use of the term in heathen, Jewish, and Christian writ., see Soph. Lex. s. v. lOj. λόγχη, -ης. ή; 1. the iron point or head of a spear: Ildt. 1, .'rj; Xcn. an. 4, 7, 16, etc. 2. alance, spear, (shaft armed with iron) : Jn. .xi.\. 34. (Sept. ; Find., Tragg., sqip) ' XoiSopc'u, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίλοιδόρτ^ση ; pres. pass. ptcp. λοιδο- ρουμ^νο!; (λϋΐδοροί) ; Ιυ reproach, rail αϊ, revile, heap abuse upon: τινά, Jn. i.x. 28; Acts xxiii. 4; pass., 1 Co. iv. 12 ; 1 Pet. ii. 23. (From Find, and Aeschyl. down ; Sept. several times for y\.) [Comp. : axn-XoiSopcw.] * XoiSopCa, -as, ή, {λοώορίω), railing, reviling : 1 Tim. v. 14 ; 1 Pet. iii. 9. (Sept. ; Arstph., Thuc., Xen., sqq.) * XoiSopos, -ου, 6, a railer, reinler: 1 Co. v. 11 ; vi. 10. (Prov. XXV. 24 ; Sir. xxiii. 8; Eur. [as adj.], Plut., al.) * λοιμό;, -ov, a, [fr. Horn, down], pestilence; plur. a pestilence in divers regions (see λιμός). Mt. xxi\'. 7 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; Lk. xxi. 1 1 ; metaj)]!., like the Lat. peslis (Ter. Adelph. 2, 1, 3.5; Cic. Cat. 2, 1), a pestilent fellow, pest, plague : Acts xxiv. 5 (so Dem. p. 794, 5 ; Aeh v. h. 14, 11 ; Prov. xxi. 24 ; plur., Ps. 1. 1 ; 1 Mace. xv. 21 ; Svbpcs λοιμοί, 1 Mace. x. (il, cf. 1 S. x. 27 ; xxv. 17, etc.).* λοιττός. -ή, -ήν, (λίΐ'ττω, λί'λοιπα), [fr. Pind. and Ildt. down], Sept. for -\Γ\•, ΙΠύ, "^Νυ', left ; plur. the remain- ing, the rest : with substantives, as oi λοιπό! απόστολοι. Acts ii. 37 ; 1 Co. ix. ή ; add, Mt. xxv. 11 ; Ro. i. l.i ; 2 Co. xii. 13; Gal. ii. 13; Phil. iv. 3 ; 2 Pet. iii. 16; Rev. viii. 13; absoL the rest of any number or cfes under con- sideration: simply, Mt. X xii. G ; xxvii. 49 ; Mk. xvi. 13; Lk. xxiv. 10; Acts xvii. 9 ; xxvii. 44 ; with a descrip- tion added : ot λοιποί oi etc.. Acts xxviii. 9 ; 1 Th. iv. 'l3 ; Rev. ii. 24; o! λοιποί πάντα, 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; Phil. i. l.i ; πάσι τοις λ. Lk. xxiv. 9 ; with a gen. : o! λοιποί τώΐ' ανθρώπων. Rev. ix. 20 ; τοΰ σ-πΐρματος, ib. xii. 1 7 ; των ν(κρων, ib. XX. 5 ; with a certain distinction and contrast, the rest, who are not of the specified class or number : Lk. viii. 10; xviii. 9; Acts v. 13; Ro. xi. 7 ; 1 Co. vii. 12; 1 Th. V. 6 ; 1 Tim. v. 20 ; Rev. xi. 13 ; xix. 21 ; τα λοιπά, the rest, the things that remain : Mk. iv. 19 ; Lk. xii. 26 ; 1 Co. xi. 34 ; Rev. iii. 2. Xeut. sing, adverbially, το λούω λοιπο'ν what remains (Lat. quod superest), i. e. a. hereafter, for the future, henceforth, (often so in Grk. writ, fr. Pind. down) : Mk. xiv. 41 RT WII (but τί5 in br.); Mt. xxvi. 4.") [WHom.Trbr.To]; 1 Co. vii. 29; Ileb. x. 13 ; and without the article, Mk. xiv. 41 (i L Tr [WH (but see above)]; 2 Tim. iv. 8; ef. Herm. ad Vig. p. 706. ToC λοιποί, henceforth, in the future, Lj)h. vi. 10 LTTrWTI; Gal. vi. 17; Ildt. 2, 109; Arstph. p.ax ltJ84; Xen. Cyr. 4,4, 10, oec. 10, 9; al ; cf. Jlerm. ad Vig. p. 706 ; often also in full τοΰ λ. χρόνου. [Strict!}-, τά λ. is ' for the fut.' τοΰ λ. 'in (the) fut.' ; το λ. may be used for ToC λ., but not τοϋ λ. for το λ. ; cf. Meyer and Ellicott onGaLu. s.; B.§§ 128, 2; 132,26; W. 463 (432).] b. at last ; already : Acts xxvii. 20 (so in later usage, see Passow or L. and S. s. v.). c. το λοιπόκ, drojiping the notion of time, signifies for the rest, besides, moreover, [A. V. oftcnfinally^. forming a transition to other things, to which the attention of tlie liearer or reader is directed : Eph. vi. 10 RG; Phil. iii. 1 ; iv. 8 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 Rec; 2 Th. iii. 1 ; ό δί λοιποί' has the same force in 1 Co. iv. 2 RG ; λοιπό.- in 1 Co. i. 10; iv. 2 LTTrWH; 1 Th. iv. 1 G L Τ Tr WH. AovKOs, -5, 0, (contr. fr. Αουκανός; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 14], W. 103 (97) [cf. B. 20 (18); on the diverse origin of contr. or abbrev. prop, names in of cf. Lobcck,, Patholog. Proleg. p. 50G ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iv. 15]), Luke, a Christian of Gentile origin, the companion of the apostle Paul in preaching the gospel and on many of his journeys (Acts xvi. 10-17; x.x. 5-15 ; xxi. 1-18; xxviii. 10-16) ; he was a physician, and ace. to the tradition of the church from IrcnsEus [3, 14, 1 sq.] down, which has been recently assailed with little success, the author of the third canonical Gospel and of the .\cts of the Apostles : Col. iv. 14; 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; Philem. 24.* Λονκιος, -ου, ό, (a Lat. name), Lucius, of CjTene, a prophet and teacher of the church at Antioch : Acts xiii. 1 ; perhai)s the same Lucius that is mentioned in Ro. xvi. 21.• λουτρόν, -οΰ, τό, (λούω), fr. Horn, down (who uses \oiTpov fr. the uncontr. form λοί'ω), a bathing, bath, i. e. as well the act of bathing [a sense disputed by some (cf. Ellicott on Eph. v. 26)], as the place ; used in the N. T. and in eccles. writ, of baptism [for exx. see i'o/j//. Lex.s. v.]: witliToC Cearos.iddcd, Eph. v. 26; της τταΚιγ- yfVfaias, Tit. iii. 5.* λούω : 1 aor. ΐλονσα : pf. pass. ptcp. 'Kf'Kovpevos and (in Ileb. X. 23 Τ Wll) XeXovapivos, a later Greek form (cf. Lobeck on Soph. Aj. p. 324 ; Steph. Thesaur. v. 397 c.; cf. KUhner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v., who cites Cant. v. 12 Vat.]); 1 aor. mid. ptcp. λoιIσάμf>Όs; fr. Horn, down; Sept. for yrri ; to bathe, wash : prop. τινά. a dead person, Acts ix. 37 ; τίνα άπο των πληγών, by washing to cleanse from the blood of the wounds, Acts xvi. 33 [\V.372 (348), cf. § 30, 6 a. ; B. 322 (27 7)] ; 6 λιλουμίνος, absol., he that has bathed, Jn. xiii. 10 (on the meaning of the passage see καθαρός, a. [and cf. Syn. below]) ; λίλ. τό σώμα, with dat. of the instr., ί8ατι, Heb. x. 22 (23) ; mid. to wash on^'s self [cf. W. § 38, 2 a.] : 2 Pet. ii. 22 ; trop. AvSSa 883 Ανσανϊα^ Christ is described as ό λούσατ ifiar άπο των αμαρτιών ημά>ν, i. e. wlio by suffering the bloody death of a vicari- ous sacrifice cleansed us from the guilt of our sins, Rev. i. 5 R G [al. λνσας (q. v. 2 fin.). COMP. : άπο-λούω•] * [Syn. λούω, νίπτω, πλύνω: πλ. is used of things, 8sp. garments; λ. and v. of persons, — i/. of a part of tlie body (hands, feet, face, eyes), λ. of the whole. All three words occur in Lev. xv. 11. Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlv.] ΔίδΒα, -ι,ί [Acts ix. 38 R G L, but -as Τ Tr WH ; see WH. App. p. 156], {,, and Λι'δδα, -ων, τά ([LTTr\VH in] Acts ix. 32, 35 ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 1 16 ; B. 18 (16) sq. [cf. λν. 61 (60)]); Hebr.l'7(l Chr. viii. 12; Ezraii.33; Neh. xi. 35) ; Lijdda, a large Benjaraite [cf. 1 Chr. I. c] town (Λύδδα κώμη, ττόλΕωΓ τοϋ μργίθου! οΰκ airoSiovaa, Joseph, antt. 20, 6, 2), called also Diospolis under the Roman empire, about nine [' eleven ' (Ordnance Survey p. 21)] miles distant from the Mediterranean; now Ludd: Acts ix. 32, 35, 38. Cf. Robinson, Palestine ii. pp. 244-248; Arnold in Herzog viii. p. 627 sq. ; [BB. DD. s. V.].• AuSCa, -as, η, Lydia, a woman of Thyatira, a seller of purple, converted by Paul to the Christian faith : Acts xvi. 14, 40. The name was borne by other women also, Ilorat. carm. 1,8; 3, 9.* Λυκαονία, -as, η, Lycaonia, a region of Asia Minor, situated between Pisidia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, Galatia and Phrygia, whose chief cities were Lystra, Derbe and Iconium [cf. reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1]. Its in- habitants spoke a peculiar and strange tongue the char- acter of which cannot be determined : Acts xiv. 6. Cf. Win. RWB. s. V. ; Lassen, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Gesellsch. x. ('56) p. 378; [_Wrighl, Hittites ('84j p. 56].* AvkoovuttC, (\νκαονίζω, to use the language of Lyca- onia). adv., in the speech of Lycaonia: Acts .\iv. 11 (see \vKaovia).* Λυκία, -as, η, Lyria, a mountainous region of Asia Minor, bounded by Pamphylia, Phrygia, Caria and the Mediterranean: Acts xxvii. 5 (1 Mace. xv. 23). [B. D. 3. v. ; Diet, of Geogr. s. v. ; reff. in Bp. Lghtft. on Col. p. 1.]• X«Kos, -ou, 0, Hebr. 3S!, a wolf: Mt. x. 16 ; Lk. x. 3 ; Jn. X. 12; applied figuratively to cruel, greedy, rapa- cious, destructive men : Mt. vii. 15; Acts xx. 29; (used trop. even in Ilom. H. 4, 471 ; 16, 156; in the O. T., Ezek. xxii. 27; Zeph. iii. 3; Jer. v. 6).* λυμαίνομαι: impf. f'Xv^aiiO'fiiji/; dep. raid.; (λ u/iij injury, ruin, contumely) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; 1. to affix a sligma to, to dishonor, spot, defle, (Ezek. xvi. 25 ; Prov. xxiii. 8 ; 4 Mace, xviii. 8). 2. to treat shame- fully or with injury, to ravage, devastate, ruin : ίΚυμαίνιτο Την (κκλησίαν, said of Saul as the cruel and violent per- secutor, [A. V. made havock of]. Acts viii. 3.* λνίΓίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίλΰ-πησα ; pf. λ(\νπηκα ; Pass., pres. λυποΟμαί; 1 aor. ίΧυπήθην; fut. Χι/πηθήσομαι; (λύτη;); [fr. Hes. down]; to make sorroirful; to affect icith sad- nes?, ca'jse grief; to Ihrotc into sorrow : τινά, 2 Co. ii. 2, 6 ; vii. 8 ; pass., Mt. xiv. 9 ; xvii. 23 ; xviii. 31 ; xix. 22 ; Xvi 22; Mk.x. 22; xiv. 19; Jn. xvi. 20 ; xxi. 17; 2 Co. iL 4 ; 1 Th. iv. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 6 ; joined with ϋημονιΐν, Mt. xxvi. 37 ; opp. to χαίρ€ΐν, 2 Co. vi. 10 ; κατά θιόν, in a manner acceptable to God [cf. W. 402 (375)], 2 Co. vii. 9,11; in a wider sense, to grieve, offend : τό ηηκϋμα το ayiov, Eph. iv. 30 (see πνίϋμα, 4 a. fin.) ; to make one uneasy, cause him a scruple, Ro. xiv. 15. [CoMP. : σνλ- λυπε'ω. Syn. see θρηνίω, fin.] ' λύττη, -ης, ή, [fr. Aeschyl. and Udt. down^, sorrow, pain, grief: of persons mourning, Jn. xvi. 6 ; 2 Co. ii. 7 ; opp. to χαρά, Jn. xvi. 20 ; Heb. xii. 1 1 ; λΰττην ΐχω (see ϊχω, I. 2 g. p. 267*), Jn. xvi. 21 sq. ; Phil. ii. 27 ; with addition of από and gen. of pers., 2 Co. ii. 3 ; λ. μοί ΐστι, Ro. ίχ. 2 ; iv Χίπτ) ΐρχίσβαι, of one who on coming both saddens and is made sad, 2 Co. ii. 1 (cf. λυπώ vpas, vs. 2 ; and \ύιτην ίχω, vs. 3); άπο τή: λύττης, for sorrow. Lk. xxiL 45 ; eK λύπη!, with a sour, reluctant mind [A. V. grudg- ingly^, (opp. to ιλαροί), 2 Co. ix. 7 ; ή κατά θ(6ν Χύιτη, sorrow acceptable to God, 2 Co. vii. 10 (see λυπίω), and η τοϋ κόσμου λι -mj, the usual sorrow of men at the loss of their earthly possessions, ibid. ; objectively, annoyance, affliction, (Hdt. 7, 152) : \ύπα! νποφΐρ(ΐν [R. V. griefs'\, 1 Pet. ii. 19.* Avcravios, -ου, 6, Lysanias ; 1. the son of Ptolemy, who from B. c. 40 on was governor of Chalcis at the foot of Mount Lebanon, and was put to death B. c. 34 at the instance of Cleopatra: Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 4 and 13, 3; 15,4, 1; b. j.l, 13, I,cf. b. j. 1, 9, 2. 2. a tetrarch of Abilene (see ΆβίΚηνή), in the days of John the Bap- tist and Jesus: Lk. iii. 1. Among the regions assigned by the emperors Caligula and Claudius to Herod Agrippa I. and Herod Agrippa IT., Josephtis mentions η Αυσανίου ΤίτραρχΙα (antt. 18, 6, 10, cf. 20, 7, 1), βασιΧίία η τυΰ Αυσανίου καλούμενη (b. j. 2, 11, 5), ^ΑβΙλα ή Α\υσανίον (antt. 19, 5, 1); accordingly, some have supposed that in these passages Lysanias the son of Ptolemy must be meant, and that the region which he governed continued to bear his name even after his death. Others (as Cred- ner, Strauss, Gfrbrer, \\'eisse), denying that there ever was a second Lysanias, contend that Luke was led into error by that designation of Abilene (derived from Ly- sanias and retained for a long time afterwards), so that he imagined that Lysanias was tetrarch in the time of Christ. This opinion, however, is directly opposed by the fact that Josephus, in antt. 20, 7, 1 and b. j. 2, 12, 8, expressly distinguishes Chalcis from the tetrarchy of Lysanias ; nor is it probable that the region which Ly- sanias the son of Ptolemy governed for only si.x years took its name from him ever after. Therefore it is more correct to conclude that in the passages of Josephus where the tetrarchy of Lysanias is mentioned a second Ly- sanias, perhaps the grandson of the former, must be meant ; and that he is identical with the one spoken of by Luke. Cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. .\bilene; Wieseler in Herzog i. p. 64 sqq., [esp. in Beitrage zur richtig. Wiirdi- gung d. Evang. u.s.w. pp. 196-204] ; Bleek, Synopt. Ei>• klar. u. s. w. i. p. 154 sq.; Kneucker in Schenkel i. p. 26 sq.; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 19 Anh. 1 p. 313 [also in Riehm s. τ. ; Robinson in Bib. Sacra for 1848, pp. 7." eaq.f Λυσία* 384 \vtt Kenan, La Dynastie des Lysanias d'Abilcne (in the Me- moires de I'Acad. des inscrip. et belles-lettres fur 1870, Tom. xxvi. P. 2, pp. 49-84) ; HB.DD. s. v.].• Ανα-ίαί, -ov, 0, (^Claudius) Li/.iias, a Roman diiliarth [A. V. 'chief captain'] : Acts .\.\iii. 2ii ; .\.\iv. 7 [Kec], 22. [15. 1). Am. ed. s. V.]• λΰο•ΐ5, -ίωί, η, (λΰω), [fr. Horn, down], a loosing of any bond, as that of marriage ; hence once in the N. T. of divorce, 1 Co. vii. 27.* λυσιτίλεω, -ω ; (fr. λυσιτϊλ^ί, and this fr. \νω to pay, and τα τίλη [cf. reXos, 2]) ; [fr. Ildt. down] ; prop, to pay the taxes ; to return expenses, hence to be useful, ad- vantaijeous ; impers. \vaiTf\(i, it profits ; foil, by ij (see ij, 3 f.), it is better : τινί foil, by ίϊ, Lk. xvii. 2.* Ανσ-τρα, -as, η, and [in Acts xiv. 8 ; xvi. 2 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11] - της -γΧώσση! τινόι, to remove an impediment of s|ieech, restore speecli to a dumb man, Mk. vii. 35 (Justin, hist. 13, 7, 1 cui nonien Battos propter litujuue ohliijalionem imt; ζ linguae noi/is soluiis loijui primum ooopit) ; an assembly, i. e. lo disinixs, hreak up: την συναγιογήν, pass., Acts xiii. 43 (ayopijv, Horn. II. 1, 30.5; Od. 2, 257, etc.; Apoll. Rh. 1, 708; την στρατών, Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 2) ; of the bonds of death, Xinv ται CiSivas τον θίΐνάτου, Acts ii. 24 (see ωδίν). Laws, as having bind- ing force, are likened to bonds; hence Xifiv is i. q. lo anmil, subvert; tu do away wilk ; to deprive of authoritij, wliether by precejit or by act ■ ιντόΚήν, Mt. v. 19; τον νόμον, Jn. vii. 23 ; το σάββατον, the commandment con- cerning the sabbath, Jn. v. 18 ; την γραφήν, Jn. .\. 35 ; cf. Kuinoel on Mt. v. 1 7 ; [on the singular reading λΰίΐ τον Ίησονν, 1 Jn. iv. 3 Wll mrg. sceWe.ilcolt, Com. ad loc] ; by a Chald. and Talmud, usage (equiv. to "\r\K, 6f1i3 [cf. W. 32]), opp. to δί'ω (q. v. 2 c), to declare lawful: Mt. .xvi. 19; xviii. 18, [but cf. Weixs in Meyer 7te Aufl. ad 11. cc.]. to loose what is compacted or built together, to hreak up, demolixk, destroy : prop, in pass. eXxltro η πρνμνα, was breaking to pieces. Acts x.wii. 41 ; ritv ναόν, Jn.ii. 19; το ρΐσότηιχον του φρα-γμον,Έ,ρΥί. η.Ι-ί {τατΐίχη, 1 Esdr. i. 52 ; ■γίψυραν, Xen. an. 2, 4,17 sq.) ; to dissolve sometliing coherent into parts, to destroy : pass., [τούτων πάντων λυομ/ι/ωι/, 2 Pet. iii. 11]; τα (ττοιχ^ΐα {κανσονμίνα), 2 Pet. iii. 10; ουρανοί {πυροϋμιναι), ib. 12; raetaph. tu overthrow, do away icilli : τα tpya τον διαβιίΚου, 1 Jn. iii. 8. [CoMP. : ava-, άπο-, Sia-, (κ-, ΐπι-, κατά-, τταρα-\ύω.^ * Aiats [WH ΛωΐΓ], -ίδοΓ, ij, Lois, a Christian matron, the grandmother of Timothy : 2 Tim. i. 5.* Αώτ, 6, (ϋι*? a covering, veil), [indecl.; of. B.D.], Lot, the son of Ilaran the brother of Abraham (Gen. xi. 27, 31 ; -xii. 4 sqq. ; xiii. 1 s(iq.; xiv. 12 sqq. ; xix- 1 sqq.): Lk. xvii. 28 sq. 32 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7.• Μ fM, μ: on its (Alexandrian, cf. Slur::, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 130 si).) retention in such forms as λ-Ζιμψομαι, ave- \-ήμφθη, ττροσωίΓολήμιττηί, ανά\ημψΐ5, aud tlie like, see (tlie several words in their places, and) W. 48 ; B. 62 (54) , esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 72; Ktienen and C'ufcci, Praef p. Ixx. ; Scriv- ener, Collation etc. p. Iv. sq., and Introd. p. 14 ; Fntzsche, Rom. Tol. i p. 110; on -μ- or -μμ- in pf. pass, ptcps. (e. g. ϊΐίστραμ- μίνοί, τίρφ(ραμμ(νοί, etc., see each word in its place, and) cf. ΙΓ//. App. p. 170 sq. ; on tlie droppiug of μ iu ίμπίττλημι, ίμττιπράα, see the words.] Μοάβ, 6, (Di'O to be small), Maath, one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 26.* ΜαγαΒάν, see the foil. word. Μαγδαλά, a place on the western shore of the Lake of Galilee, about three miles distant from Tiberias towards the north; according to the not improbable conjecture of Gesenius (Thesaur. i. p. 26 7) identical with SsS^S'lJO (i. e. tower of God), a fortified city of the tribe of Naphtali (Josh. xix. 38) ; in the Jerus. Talmud SlJO {Miii/did or Miydal); now Medsckel or Medjdcl, a wrctclied Mohammedan village with the ruins of an an- cient tower (see Win. IIWB. s. v. ; Robinson, Palest, ii. p. 396 sq.; Arnold iu llcrzog viii. p. 661 ; Kneucker in Schenkel iv. p. 84; [Hackell in B.D. s. v.; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 571 sq.]) : Mt. xv. 39 RG, with the var. reading (adopted by L TTr WH [cf. WH. App. » ρ 7 p. 160]) Vlayahav, Vulg. Magedan, (Syr. 0|~ie) ; if either of these forms was the one used by the Evangelist it could very easily have been changed by the copyists into the more familiar name MaySaXd.' Μαγδαληνή, -ης, η, (Μαγδαλά, q. v.), Magdalene, a ivoman of Magdala: Mt. xxvii. 56, 61 ; xxviii. 1 ; Mk. XV. 40, 47; xvi. 1,9; Lk. viii. 2 ; xxiv. 10; Jn. xix. 25 ; XX. 1,18.• [Μογίδών (Rev. xvi. 16 WH), see Άρμαγίδών.] μαγεία (ΤλλΤΙ μαγία, see I, t), -as, ή, (μάγοί, q. v.), magic; p\ur. magic arts, sorceries: Acts viii. 11. (The• ophr., Joseph., Plut., al.)• μαγεύω; (μίΐ'γοϊ); to be a magician; to practise magical arts : Acts viii. 9. (Eur. Iph. 1338 ; Plut. Artax. 3, 6, and in other auth.) * μαγΟα, see μαγ(ία. μάγο5, -ου, ό, (llebr. JD, plur. D'JO; a word of Indo- Germanic origin; cf. Oescnius, Tlies. ii. p. 766; /. G. MUller in Ilerzog viii. p. G78 ; [ Vanilek, Fremdwdrter, 8. v.; but the word is now regarded by many as of Baby- lonian origin; see Sc/irader, Keilinschriften u.s.w. 2te Aufl. p. 417 sqq.]); fr. Soph, and Ildt. down; Sept. Dan. ii. 2 and several times in Theodot. ad Dan. for '"ΐψΧ; a magus; tlie name given by the Babylonians (Chaldieans), Medes, Persians, and others, to the wise men, teachers, priests, physicians, astrologers, seers, in- terpreters of dreams, augurs, .soothsayers, sorcerers etc.; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. ; J. G. Miiller in Herzog 1. c. pp. 675-685; Hollzmann in Schenkel iv. p. 84 sq.; [BB.DD. s. V. i\Iagi]. In the N. T. the name is given 1. to the oriental wise men (astrologers) who, having dis- covered by the rising of a remarkable star [see αστήρ, and cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Jlessiah, i. 209 sqcp] that the Messiah had just been born, came to Jerusalem to Ma'y(u'y 386 μ,ακραν worship him: Mt. ii. 1, 7, 16. 2. to false prophets and sorcerers: Acts xiii. G, 8, cf. viii. 9, 11.* Μαγώγ, ό, see Γώγ. Μα8ιάμ, ή, (Ilebr. J'TD [i. e. 'strife']), MUUan [in A. V. (cd. 161 1) N. T. Madian'], prop, name of the ter- ritory of the Midianites in Arabia; it took its name from Midian, son of Abraham and Keturah (Gen. .x.w. 1 8(j.) : Acts vii. 29.* lia^os, -οΰ, ό, the breaat: of a man, Rev. i. 13 Lchm. [(see μαστός). From Ilom. do\vn.]* μοθητίύω: 1 aor. (μαθήτιυσα; 1 aor. pass. (μαθητ(νθην\ (μαθητής) ; 1. intrans. τίνί, Ιο be the disciple of one ; to follow his precepts and instruction: Mt. ,\xvii. 57 R G Wil mrg., cf. .In. xix. 38 (so Plut. mor. pp. 832 b. (vit. Antiph. 1), 837 c. (vit. Isocr. 10) ; Jamblichus, vit. Pythag. c. 23). 2. trans, (cf. W. p. 23 and § 38, 1 ; [B. § 131, 4]) to make a disciple; to teach, instruct: Tiva, Mt. xxviii. 19 ; Acts xiv. 21 ; pass, with a dat. of the pers. whose disciple one is made, Mt. xxvii. 57 L Τ Tr WII txt. ; μαθητ€υθ(Ίς fls την βασί\(ίαρ των ovp. (see γραμματινς, 3), Mt. xiii. 52 Rec, wliere long since the more correct reading tjj βασ. των oip. was adopted, but without changing the sense; [yet Lchm. inserts fi»].* μαθητή;, -oC, ό, (μανθάνω), a learner, pupil, disciple : Univ., opp. to διδάσκαλοί, Mt. x. 24 ; Lk. vi. 40 ; Tivor one who follows one's teaching : Ιωάννου, Mt. ix. 14 ; Lk. vii. 18 (19); Jn. iii. 25; των φαρισ., Mt. .x.xii. 16; Mk. ii. 18; Lk. v. 33; ΜωΟσί'ωί , .In. ix. 28 ; of Jesus, — in a wide sense, in the Gospels, those among the .Tews who favored him, joined his party, became his adher- ents ; Jn. vi. 66 ; vii. 3 ; xix. 38 ; οχΚυ! μαθητών αϋτοΰ, Lk. vi. 17 ; οι /ί• αίτον ίκανοί, Lk. vii. 11 ; άπαν τό ττλήόοϊ τών μαθ. Lk. xix. 37 ; but especially the twelve apostles : Mt. X. 1 ; xi. 1 ; xii. 1 ; Mk. viii. 27 ; Lk. viii. 9 ; Jn. ii. 2; iii. 22, and very often; also simply oi μαθηταί, Mt. xiii. 10; xiv. 19; Mk. x. 24 ; Lk. ix. 16; Jn. vi. 11 [Rec], etc. ; in the Acts oi μαθηταί are all those who confess Jesus as the Messiah, Christians : Acts vi. 1 sq. 7 ; ix. 1 9 ; xi. 26, and of ten ; with τοϋ κυρίον added, Acts ix. 1. The word is not found in the O. T., nor in the Epp. of the N. T., nor in the Apocalypse ; in Grk. writ. fr. [Ildt.], Arstph., Xen., Plato, down. μαθήτρια, -as, ή, (a fem. form of μαθητής; cf. ψ•άλτ7)9, ψάλτρια, etc., in Bltm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. iib), a female dis- ciple ; i. q. α Christian woman : Acts ix. 36. (Diod. 2, 52; Diog. Laert. 4, 2; 8, 42.)* [Μαβθαθίαβ, see ΜατταδίαΕ-] Μαθθαίθ5, ίιίαθθάν, see Ματθαίος, Ματθάν. Μαθθάτ, see Ματθάτ. Μαθουσ-άλα, Τ WII Μαθονσα\ά [cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 103], ό, (nSp/ino man of a dart, fr. ino, construct form of the imused nr? a man, and rhp a dart [cf. B. D. s. V.]), Methuselah, the son of Enoch and grandfather of Noah (Gen. v. 21) : Lk. iii. 37.• Μαΐνάν (TTrWH i/iewa), indecl., (Lchm. Miwas, gen. Mfvva),o, Menna or Menan, [A. V. (1611) Menam'], the name of one of Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 31 [Lchm. br. τον Μ.].• μαίνομαι; [fr. Horn, down] ; to he mad, to rave : said of one who so speaks that he seems not to be in his right mind. Acts xii. 15; xxvi. 24; 1 Co. xiv. 23; opp. to σωφροσύνης ρήματα άττοφθίγγΐσθαι. Acts .\.\vi. 25; joined λυΙιΙι ^αιμόνίον ^χαν, Jii. χ. 20. [CoMP. : (μ-μαίνομοί-^ * μακαρίζω; Attic fut. μακαριω [cf. Β. 37 (32)]; (μακά- ριος) ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for "IDN ; to pronounce blessed : τινά, Lk. i. 48 ; Jas. v. 1 1 (here Vulg. bealifico).* μακάριος, -a, -ov, (poetic ^ιάκαρ), [fr. Pind., Plat, down], blessed, happy: joined to names of God, 1 Tim. i. 1 1 ; vi. 15 (cf. μάκαρ^ς θ(θί in Horn, and lies.) ; ίλπίς. Tit. ii. 13; as a predicate. Acts xx. 35; 1 Pet. iii. 14; iv. 14 ; ηγούμαι τίνα μακ. Acts xxvi. 2 ; μακάρ• ίν τίΜ, .las. i. 25. In congratulations, the reason why one is to be pronounced blessed is expressed by a noun or by a ptcp. taking the place of the subject, μακάριος 6 etc. (Hebr. "3 ^"^VH, Ps. i. 1 ; Deut. xxxiii. 29, etc.) blessed the man, who etc. [W. 551 (512 sq.)] : Mt. v. 3-11 ; Lk. vi. 20- 22 ; Jn. xx. 29 ; Rev. i. 3 ; .\vi. 15 ; xix. 9 ; xx. 6 ; xxii. 14 ; by the addition to the noun of a ptcp. which takes the place of a predicate, Lk. i. 45; x. 23; xi. 27 sq. ; Rev. xiv. 13; foil, by 5s with a finite verb, Mt. xi. 6; Lk. vii. 23 ; xiv. 15 ; Ro. iv. 7 sq. ; the subject noun in- tervening, Lk. xii. 37, 43 ; xxiii. 29 ; Jas. i. 12 ; μακ. . . . ΟΤΙ, Mt. xiii. Iii ; xvi. 17 ; Lk. xiv. 14; foil, by fav, Jn. xiii. 17 ; 1 Co. vii. 40. [See Schmidt ch. 187, 7.] μακαρισμός, -oi, 6, (μακαρίζω), declaration of blessed- ness: Ro. iv. 9; Gal. iv. 15; Xtyeiv τ6ν μηκ. τίνος, to utter a declaration of blesseilncss upon one, a fuller way of say- ing μακαρίζ(ΐν τινά, to pronounce one blessed, Ro. iv. 6. (Plat. rep. 9 p. 591 d. ; [Aristot. rhet. 1, 9, 34] ; Plut. mor. p. 471 c. ; eccles. writ.) * MaKeSovCa, -at, ή [on use of art. with cf. W. § 18, 5 a. c], Macedonia, a country bounded on the S. by Thessaly and Epirus, on the E. by Thrace and the ^-Egean Sea, on the W. by Elyria, and on the N. by Dardania and Moesia [cf. B. D. (esp. Am. ed.)] : Acts xvi. 9 sq. 12; xviii. 5 ; xix. 21 sq. ; xx. 1, 3 ; Ro. xv. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 5 ; 2 Co. i. 16 ; ii. 13 ; vii. 5 ; viii. 1 ; xi. 9 ; Phil. iv. 15 ; 1 Th. i. 7 sq. ; iv. 10; 1 Tim. i. 3.» Μακ€&ών, -όνος, ό, a Macedonian : Acts xvi. 9 [cf. B. § 123, 8 Rem.]; xix. 29; x.wii. 2; 2 Co. i.x. 2, 4.* μάκ(λλον, -ου, τό, a Lat. word, maccllum [prob. akin to μάχ-η; Vanicek p. 687 (cf. Plut. as below)], a place where meat and other articles of food are sold, meat-market, pro- vision-market, [A. V. shambles'] : 1 Co. x. 25. (Dio Cass. 61, \9τηνά•/οραντωνο•^ων,τό μάκίΧΚον; [Plut. ii. p. 277 d. (quaest. Rom. 54)].) ' μακράν (prop. fem. ace. of the adj. μακρός, sc. ohov, a long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept. for pin"), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; far, a great way: absol., άπ/χί IK, Lk. .XV. 20 ; of the terminus to which, _/αΓ hence, (ξαποστ(\ω σί. Acts xxii. 21 ; with από τίνος added, Mt. viii. 30 ; Lk. vii. 6 [T om. άττό] ; .Τη. xxi. 8 ; τοκ θ(6ν . . . ov μακράν από ίν6ς (κάστον ήμων υπάρχοντα, 1. 6. who is near every one of us by his power and influence (so that we have no need to seek the knowledge of him from with- out), Acts xvii. 27; oi cU μακράν [cf. W. 415 (387)] μακρ• oOev 387 μαΚΚον those that are afar off, the inhabitants of remote regions, j. e. the Gentiles, Acts ii. 39, cf. Is. ii. 2 sqo. ; Zech. vi. 15. nietapb. οϋ μακράν ti άπο τηί βασ. του θ(οΰ, but little is wanting for thy reception into the kingdom of God, or thou art almost fit to be a citizen in the divine king- dom, ^Ik. xii. 34 ; ot irore ovres μακμάν (opp. to oi eyyu?), of lieathen (on the sense, see iyyis, 1 b.), Eph. ii. 13; also oi μακράν, ib. 1 7.* μακρόθεν, (μακρός), adv., esp. of later Grk. [Polyb., al. ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 93] ; Sept. for ρίΓΤΐΌ, ΡΙΠ";, etc.; from afar, of ar : Mk. viii. 3 ; .\i. 13; Lk. xviii. 13; xxii. 54; xxiii. 49; with the prep, από prefixed (cf. W. 422 (393) ; § G5, 2 ; B. 70 (62)) : Mt. x.xvi. 58 [here Τ om. WH br. άπο] ; xxvii. 55 ; Mk. v. 6 ; xiv. 54 ; xv. 40; Lk. xvi. 23; Rev. xviii. 10, 15, 17 ; alsoLTTrAVH in Mk. xi. 13 ; L Τ Trmrg. AVH in Lk. xxiii. 49 ; Τ Tr WH in Mk. viii. 3, (Ps. cxxxvii. (cxxxviii.) 6 ; 2 K. xLx. 25 cod. .\lex. ; 2 Esdr. iii. 13).• μακροθυμ,ί'ω, -ώ; 1 aor., impv. μακροθύμησυν, ptcp. μακρό- θυμησας ; (tr. μακρόθνμοί, and this fr. μακρός and θυμός) ; to be of a long spirit, not to lose heart; hence 1. to persevere patiently and bravely (i. q. καρτιρω, so Plut. de gen. Socr. c. 24 p. 593 f. ; Artem. oneir. 4, 1 1) in endur- ing misfortunes and troubles: absol., Heb. vi. 15; Jas. V. 8 ; with the addition of ϊως and a gen. of the desired e\ent, ib. 7 ; witli ini and a dat. of the thing hoped for, ibid. ; add, Sir. ii. 4. 2. to be patient in bearing the offences and injuries of others; to be mild and slow in avenging; to be long-suffering, slow to anger, slow to pun- ish, (for f\K ^'"ΙΚΠ, to defer anger, Prov. xix. 11) : absol. 1 Co. xiii. 4 ; προς τίνα, 1 Th. v. 14 ; i-ni with dat. of pers- (see ini, B. 2 a. δ.), Mt. xviii. 26, 29 [here L Tr with the ace, so Tr in 26 ; see fVi, C. L 2 g. /3.] ; Sir. xviii. 11 ; xxix. 8 ; hence spoken of God deferring the punishment of sin : eis τίνα, towards one, 2 Pet. iii. 9 [here L Τ Tr mrg. hia (q. v. B. II. 2 b. sub fin.)] ; ini with dat. of pers., Lk. xviii. 7; in this dilhcult passage we shall nei- ther preserve the constant usage of μακροθυμ^Ίν (see just before) nor get a reasonable sense, unless we regard the words cV' αΰτ-οΐί as negligently (see αντός, II. 6) referring to the enemies of the ΐκΚικτών, and translate κα\ μακροθυ- μων in αυτοΧς even though he is long-siffering, indulgent, to them; — this negligence being occasioned by the cir- cumstance that Luke seems to represent Jesus as speak- ing with Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 22 (18) in mind, where in αύτοίς must be referred to άν€'\(ημόνων. The reading [of L Τ Tr WH] KOL μακροβνμύ in αυτοίς ; by which το μακρο- θυμι'ιν is denied to God [cf. W. § 55, 7] cannot be ac- cepted, because the preceding parable certainly demands the notion of slowness on God's part in avenging the right ; cf. De AVette ad loc. ; [but to this it is replied, that the denial of actual delay is not inconsistent with the as- sumption of ap])arent delay; cf. Meyer (ed. Weiss) ad loc.].• μακροθυμΟα, -ac. η. (μακρόθνμος \ci. μακροθνμΐω]), (Vulg. longanimitax, etc.), i. e. 1. patience, endurance, con- stancy, steadfastness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bear- ing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq. ; άνθρωηος S>v μη5(ποτ( την ά\υπ!αν αΐτοΰ napa θ(ων, άλλα μακρηθυμίαν, Menand. frag. 1 9, p. 203 ed. Meineke [vol. iv. p. 238 Frag, comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]) : Col. i. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v. 10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. Ivii. 15 ; Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 5 ; cf. 1 Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffer- ing, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for D'iJK l|"iS, Jer. xv. 15) : Ro. ii. 4 ; ix. 22 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; Gal. v. 22 ; Eph. iv. 2; CoL iu. 12; 1 Tim. i. 16 [cf. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim. iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 1 ; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1).• [iSvN. μακροβυμία, υπομονή (occur together ΟΓ in the same context iu Col. ill; 2 Cor. \n 4, 6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jas. v. 10, 11 ; cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64 ; Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1) • Bp. Lghtft. remarks (on Col. 1. c), "The difference of meaning is best seen in their opposites. While inro. is the temper which does not easily succumb under suffering, μακ. is the self-restraint which does not hastily retaliate a wrong. The one is opposed to cowardice or despondency, the other to wrath or revenge (Prov. xv. 18 ; xvi. 32) . . . This distinc- tion, though it applies generally, is not true ivithout excep- tion". . . ; cf. also his note on Col. iii. 12, and see (more at length) Trench, N. Τ Syn. § liu.] μακροθνμω;, adv., with longanimity (Vulg. longanimiter, Heb. vi. 15), i. e. patiently : Acts xxvi. 3.• μακρό;, -ά, -όν, [fr. Horn, down], long ; of place, remote, distant, far off : ;(ώρα, Lk. xv. 13 ; xix. 12. of time, /on^, lasting long : μακρά ηροσίΰχομαι, to pray long, make long prayers, Mt. .x.xiii. 14 (13) Rec. ; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47.• μακρο-χρόνιο;, -ov, (μακρός and χρόνος), lit. 'long-timed' (Lat. longaevus), long-lived : Eph. vi. 3. (Ex. xx. 12; Deut. V. 16 ; very rare in prof, auth.) * μαλακία, -ar, ή, (μαλακός) ; 1. prop, sofness [fr. Hdt. down]. 2. in the N. T. (like aadivfia, αρρώ- στια) infirmity, debility, bodily weakness, sickness, (Sept. for ''7Π, disease, Deut. vii. 15 ; xxviii. 61 ; Is. xxxviii. 9, etc.) ; joined with νόσος, Mt. iv. 23 ; ix. 35 ; x. 1.• μαλακές, -t), -όν, soft : soft to the touch : Ιμάτια, Mt. .xi. 8 RGLbr. ; Lk. vii. 25, (Ιματίων πολυτ-ίλώκ κ. μαλακών, Artem. oneir. 1, 78; ισθής, Horn. Od. 23, 290; Artem. oneir. 2, 3 ; χιτών, Ilom. II. 2, 42) ; and simply τα μάΚακά, soft raiment (see λίυκός, 1) : I\It. xi. 8 TTrWH. Like the Lat. mollis, metaph. and in a bad sense: effeminate, of a catamite, a male who submits his body to unnatural lewdness, 1 Co. vi. 9 (Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 2 sub fin.; [Diog. Laert. 7, 173 fin.]).* Μαλ£λ£ήλ (Mfλ€λel7λ, Tdf.), 6, (SxS"7n•? praising God, fr. SSnp and h»), Mahalateel [A. V. Maleleei], son of Cainan : Lk. iii. 37.* μάλιστα (superlative of the adv. μάλα), [fr. Horn, down], adv., especially, chiefly, mast of all, above all: Acts xx. 38; x.xv. 26; Gal. vi. 10; PhU. iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 10; v. 8, 17 ; 2 Tim. iv. 13; Tit. i. 10; Philem. 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 10; μάλιστα γνώστης, especially expert, thoroughly well-informed. Acts xxvi. 3.• μάλλον (compar. of μάλα, very, very much), [fr. Horn. down], adv., more, to a greater degree ; rather ; L added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a μ5Χ\ον 388 μανθανω greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree, morf, more full;/, (Germ, in holiemn (irade, Maa.tse) ; a. words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the ablative (dat.) : πολλώ much, by far, Alk. x. 4H; Lit. xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in both these verses the under- lying thought is, the measure of salvation for which we are in!, i. e. when they ought to liave loved the light they (hated it, and) loved the darkness, vs. 20) ; xii. 43 ; Acts iv. 19; v. 23 ; 2 Tim. iii. 4. that which it ojjposes and sets aside must be learned from the context [cf. W. § 35, 4] : .Mk. XV. 11 (sc. ^ Tov'Ii)(roCv) ; Phil. i. 12 (where the mean- ing is, ' so far is the gospel from suffering any loss or dis- advantage from my imprisonment, that the number of di.sciples is increased in conse([uence of it '). γ. by way of correction, μάλλον 8e', nay rather; to speak more correctly: Gal. iv. 9 (.Joseph, antt. 15, 11, 3; Ael. v. h. 2, 13 and often in prof. auth. ; cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbcb. on Sap. p. 17G sq.). c. it does not do away with that with which it is in opposition, but marks what has the preference: more williitf/ly, more readily, tooner (( ierm. liehcr), θίΧω μάλλοι/ and «ύδοκώ μάλλον, to prefer, 1 Co. xiv. 5; 2 Co. v. 8, {βοΰλομαι μάλλον, Xen. Cyr. 1, 1,1); {ι;λονν, 1 Co. .xiv. 1 (μάλλον sc. ζη\οντ() ; χρωμαι, 1 Co. vii. 21. Μάλχοβ (nV'? Grecized ; cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. Luth. Theol., 1876, p. 605), -ou, o, Malchus, a servant of the high-priest : Jn. xviii. 10. [Cf. Hackelt in B. D. s. v.] • μάμμη, -ijt. η, 1. in the earlier Grk. writ, mother (the name infants use in addressing their mother). 2. ill tlie later writ. ([Pliilo], Joseph., Plut., App., Hdian., Arteui.) i. (j. τήθη, grandmother (see Loh. ad Phryn. pp. l.!3-13.-> [cf. W. 25]): 2 Tim. i. 5 ; 4 Mace. xvi. 9.• μαμωνάΐ ((! L Τ Tr AVII), incorrectly μαμμωνάί (Rec. fin Mt.]),-a [B. 20 (IS) ; W. § 8, \],6, mammon (Chald. NJIOK?, to be derived, apparently, fr. px; hence Wiai u trusted in [cf. Buxtorf, Lex. cliald. talmud. et rabbin. coL 1217 sq. (esp. ed. Fischer p. 613 sij.) ; ace. to (Jeseniui (Thesaur. i. 552) contr. fr. [i^p•? treasure (Gen. xliii. 23); cf. B. D. s. V. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Alessiah, ii. 269]), riches: Mt. vi. 24 and Lk. xvi. 13, (where it is personi- fied and opposed to Goil; cf. Phil. ii!. 19) ; Lk. xvi. 9, 11. (" lucrum punice mammon dicitur," Augustine [do serm. Dom. in monte, 1. ii. c. xiv. (§ 4 7)]; the Sept. trans, the Hebr. nJ1■3^5 in Is. .\x.\iii. 6 θησαυροί, and in Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 3 πλοΟτοΓ.) * Μαναήν, S, (ΠΠ:3 consoler), Manaen, a certain prophet in the church at Antioch: Acts xiii. 1. [See Hacketl in B. D. s. v.]• Μανασ•σ•ή5 [Trcg. Maw. in Rev.], gen. and ace. -η [Β. 11) (17); AV. § 10, 1 ; but see WH. App. p. 159'], 0, (n^:"p causing to forget, fr. T\'.i} to forget), Manas• seh; 1. the firstborn son of Joseph (Gen. xii. 51) : Rev. vii. 6. 2. the son of Ilezekiah, king of Jadah (2 K. xxi. 1-18) : Mt. i. 10.• μανθάνω; 2 aor. ίμαθον; pf. ptcp. μίμαθηκώί; Sept. forip'^; [fr. Horn, doivn] ; lo learn, be apprised ; a. iiniv. : absol. to increase one's knowledge, 1 Tim. ii. II; 2 Tim. iii. 7 ; to be increased in knowledge, 1 Co. xiv. 31 ; τί, Ro. xvi. 17; 1 Co. xiv. 35; Phil. iv. 9; 2 Tim. iii. 14 ; Rev. xiv. 3 ; in Jn. vii. 15 supply αυτά ; folL by an indir. quest., Mt. ix. 13 ; Xpurrov, to be imbued with the knowledge of Christ, Eph. iv. 20 ; τί foil, by ajro w. μανία 389 Μα. ψιαμ gen. of the thing furnishing the instruction, Mt. xxiv. 32 ; illt. xiii. 28; από w. gen. of the pers. teaching, Mt. xi. ■29 ; Col. i. 7 ; as in class. Grk. (cf. Kriiger § 68, 34, 1 ; B. § 1-4 7, 5 [of. 167 (146) anil από, II. 1 d.]) ; foil, by παρά w. gen. of pers. teaching, 2 Tim. iii. 14 cf. Jn. vi. 4.Ϊ; foil, by eV w. dat. of pers., in one i. e. by his e.xaraple [see eV, I. 3 b.], I Co. iv. G [cf. W. 5!I0 (548 sq.) ; B. 394 s,[. (338)]. b. \. i\. Iv (παθ( την ύπακοήν, Ileb. v. 8 [cf. \V. § 68, 1 and από, u. s.]. In the dilfieult passage 1 Tim. V. 13, neither d/jyai depends upon the verb μανθά- κουσί (which would mean " they learn to be idle ", or " learn idleness " ; so Bretschneider [Lex. s. v. 2 b.], and W. 347 (325 sq.) ; [cf. Stallbaum's note and reff. on Plato's Euthydemus p. 276 b.]), nor πιρκρχόμίνοι (" they learn to go about from house to house," — so the majority of interpreters; for, ace. to uniform Grk. usage, a ptcp. joined to the verb μανθάναν and belonging to the subject denotes ichal sort of a person one /earns or perceices him- self to be, as ίίμαθιν ίγκυος ούσα, ".she perceived herself to be with child," Hdt. 1,5); but μανθύραν must be taken absolutely (see a. above) and emphatically, of what they learn by going about from house to house and what it is unseemly for them to know ; cf. Bengel ad loc, and B. § 144, 17; [so Wordsivorth in loc.]. [CoMP. : κατα- μαυθάνω-~\ * μανία, -as, ή, (μαίνπμαι), tnadness, frenzy: Acts x.xvi. 24. [From Theognis, Hdt., down.] * μάννα, TO, indecl. ; [also] ή μάννα in Joseph, (antt. 3, 13, 1 [etc. ; ή μάννη,ΟτΆα. Sibyll. 7, 149]); .Sept. το ^i/ [also TO μάννα. Num. xi. 7] for Hebr. ]0 (fr. the unused rjO^ e - Ara.6. ijjO, to be kind, beneficent, to bestow liberally ; ο whence the subst. ^λΛ, prop, a gift [al. prefer the deriv. given Ex. xvi. 15, 31 ; Jo.seph. antt. 3, 1,6. The \Tord iiiannu is said to be found also in the olil Egyptian ; Ebers, Durch (iosen u.s.w. p. 226 ; cf. "Speaker's Coumientary" E\od. xvi. note]); manna (Vulg. in X. T. manna indecl. ; in O. T. man; yet manna, gen. -fir, is used by Pliny [12, 14, 32, etc.] and Vegetius [Vet. 2, 39] of the grains of certain plants) ; according to the accoimts of travellers a very sweet dew-like juice, which in Arabia and other oriental countries exudes from the leaves [ace. to others only from the twigs and branches; cf. Robinson, Pal. i. 115] of certain trees and shrubs, particularly in the summer of rainy years. It hardens into little white pellucid grains, and is collected before sunri.se by the in- habitants of those countries and used as an article of food, very sweet like honey. The Israelites in their journey through the wilderness met with a great ipiantity of food nf tliis kinIanna ; Knobel on Exod. p. 171 sqq.; Furrer in Schenkel iv. 1U9 sip; \_Itobinson as above, and p. 590 ; Tischendorf, Aus dem hell. Lande, p. 54 sqq. (where on p. vi. an analysis of diff. species of natural manna is given after Berthelot (Coraptes rendus heb- dom. d. seances de I'acad. des sciences. Paris 1861, 2de scmestre (3i) Sept.) p. 5S3 sqq.) ; esp. Ritter, Erdkunde Pt. xiv. pp. 6G5-695 (Gage's trans, vol. i. pp. 271-292, where a full list of reff. is given) ; esp. E. Renaud and E. Lacour, De la manne du desert etc. (1881). Against the identification of the natural raanna with the miracu- lous, see BB.DD. s. v. ; esp. Riehm in his HWB. ; Car- ruthers in the Bible Educator ii. 174 sqq.]. In the N. T. mention is made of a. that manna with which the Israelites of old ivere nourished : Jn. vi. 31, 49, and R L in 58 ; b. that which was kept in tlie ark of the covenant: Ileb. ix. 4 (Ex. .xvi. 33) ; c. thatwliich in the symbolic language of Rev. ii. 17 is spoken of as kept in the heavenly temjile for the food of angels and the blessed; [see δίδωμι, Β. Γ. p. 146"].• μαντ<νομαι ; (μάντί! [a seer ; allied to μανία, μαίνομαι J cf. Curtius § 429]) ; fr. Horn, down ; to act as seer; de- lirer an oracle, prophesi/, dicine : Acts xvi. 1 6 μαντινομίνη, of a false prophetess [A. V. /«/ soolhsayinej']. Sept. for DDp, to practise divination ; said of false prophets. [On the heathen character of the suggestions and associa- tions of the word, as distinguished fr. προφητίΰω, see Trench, N. T. Syn. § vi.] * μαραίνω : 1 fut. pass, μαρανθήσομαι ; fr. Ilom. II. 9, 212 ; 23, 228 on; to exlinyuiah (a flame, fire, light, etc.) ; to render arid, make to waste away, cause to wither; pass. to iclther, trill, dry tip (Sap. ii. 8 of roses ; Job xv. 30). Trop. to waste away, consume away, perish, {νόσω, Eur. Ale. 203 ; τω λιμω, .Joseph, b. j. 6, 5, 1) ; i. q. to have a miserable end: Jas. i. 11, where the writer uses a fig. suggested by what he had just said (10) ; [B. 52 (46)].• μαρανοθά [so Lchm., but μαράν άθά 11 G Τ Tr WH], the Chald. words r\i^Vi "^1?' '■ ^• ""'" Lord cometh or will come : 1 Co. xvi. 22. [BB.DD. ; cf. Klostermann, Pro- bleme etc. (1.S83) p. 220 sqq. ; Kautzsch, Gr. pp. 12, 1 74 ; Nestle in Theol. Stud, aus Wurtem. 1884 p. 186 sqq.]• μαργαρίτης, -ου, ό, a pearl : Mt. .xiii. 45 sq. ; 1 Tim. ii. 9; Rev. xvii. 4 ; .wiii. [12], 16; .xxi. 21 [hereLT WII accent -ρίτω, R G Tr -ρίται (cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 101)] ; Toiis μαργαρίτα! βάΧΚιιν ίμπρυσθίν χοίρα», a proverb, i. e. to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (in- competent as they are, through their hostility to the gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt. vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq. ; .Tob xxviii. IS sq.).• Μάρθα, -at (Jn. xi. 1 [cf. B. 1 7 (15) ; WH. App. p. 156]), 4, (Chald. SniT mistress, Lat. domina), Martha, the sis- ter of Lazarus of Bethany : Lk. x. 38, 40 sq. ; Jn. xi. 1, ft, 19-39; xii. 2. [On the accent cf. Kautzsch p. 8.]* Μαριάμ indecl., and Μαρία, -;σοί, ib. 17 ; xix. 10; xx. 4 {(χ€ΐν this μαρτ. is to hold the testimony, to persevere steadfastly in bearing it, Rev. vi. 9; xii. 17; xix. 10, [see ΐχω,Ι. 1 d.]; others, however, explain it ίο liave the duty of testifying laid upon one's self) ; elsewhere the " testimony " of Christ is that which he gives concerning divine things, of which he alone has thorough knowledge, Jn. iii. 11, 32 sq. ; ή μαρτ. Ιησού, that testimony which he gave concerning future events relating to the consummation of the kinsdom of God, Rev. i. 2 (cf. xxii. 16, 20) : Sia την μ. Ιησού Χριστού, to receive this testimony, ib. 9.* |ΐαρτϋριον, -ου, τό, (μάρτνρ [cf μάρτυς^), [fr. Find., Hdt. down], Sept. for li'_^ rri;^, oftener for :\Mp_ (an or- dinance, precept); most freq. for Ίi^^^2 (an assembly), as though that came fr. IVJ to testify, whereas it is fr. li'^ to appoint ; testimony ; a. w. a gen. of the subj.: της συν(ΐ8ήσ€ως, 2 Co. i. 12; w. gen. of obj. : άπο- SiSovai TO μ rijs άναστάσιως Ιησού, Acts iv. 33. b. ToO Χριστοί, concerning Christ the Saviour [cf. W. § 30, μΜρτυρομαί 392 ματαιο<ί 1 α.] : the proclamation of salvation by the apostles is so called (for reasons given under μαρτυρίω, init.), 1 Co. i. 6 ; also τοΰ κυρίου ημών, "2 lim. i. 8 ; τοϋ tifov, concerning God [W. u. s.], i. e. concerning what (iod has done tlirou^ih Christ for the salvation of men, 1 Co. ii. 1 [here WIl Ixt. μυστήριοι^Ί; w. the subject, gen. ημών, givt'ii by us, 2 Ί h. i. 10. (is μαμτ. τών ^άΚηθησημίνων, to give testimony concerning tho.se things wliich were to be spoken (in the Messiah's time) i. e. concerning the Christian revelation, Ileb. iii. Γ); cf. Delitzsch ad loc. [al. refer it to the .Mosaic law (Num. .\ii. 7, csp. 8); cf. Jliclim, Lehrbegriff d. lleb. i. 3Γ2]. c. (Ις /iii(>- TvfHov auTu'is for a testiiiwni/ unto l/ifm, tliat tlicv may have testimony, i. e. evidence, in proof of this or th.at ; e. g. that a lc|)er has been cured, .Mt. viii. 4; Mli. i. 44; Lk. V. 14 ; that persons may get knowledge of something tlie knowledge of wliich will be for their benefit, .Mt. .\. IS ; xxiv. 14 ; Mk. .\iii. 9 ; that they may have evidence of their impurity, Mk. vi. 11 ; in the same case we find tls μαρτ- iii avToit, for a testimony agahixl them [cf. eVi, C. 1. 2 g. y. β^•], I'k. i.\. ■> ; άποβήσιται ύμ'ιν els μαμτ. it will turn out to you as an opportunity of bearing testi- mony concerning me and my cause, Lk. .\xi. 13; els μ- νμ'ιυ ΐσται, it will serve as a proof of your Avickedness, Jas. V. 3 ; by apposition to the ivhole preceding clause (W. § .59, 9 a.), TO μαρτ. xaipois Ih'ioLs, that wliich (to wit, that Christ gave him.self as a ransom) ivould be (the sub- stance of) the testimony i. q. was to be testified (by the apostles and the preachers of the gospel) in the times fitted for it, 1 'I'iin. ii. 6 [where Lchm. oni. το μαρτ.'] ; cf. the full e.xposition of this pass, in Frilzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 12 sijq. ή σκψη τοΟ μαρτυρίου, Acts vii. 44 ; Rev. XV. 5; in .Sept. very often for Ί;•1Ώ-^ΠΝ (see above), and occasionally for ηη>•Γΐ ^ΠΧ, as Ex. xxxviii. 2G ; Lev. xxiv. 3, etc.* μιαρτνρομ.αι (fr. μάρτυρ [cf. μάρτυ?]) ; 1. to cite a vjitiie.'is, bring forward a witness, call to witness, (Tragg., Thuc., Plato, sqq.) ; to affirm bi/ appeal to God, to declare solemnhj, protest : ταϋτα, Plat. Phil. p. 47 c. ; ort, Actsx.x. 26 ; Gal. v. 3. 2. to conjure, beseech as in God's name, exhort .^olemnl// : tiki. Acts ,\xvi. 22 L Τ Tr WII ; foil, by the ace. w. inf., Eph. iv. 17; els τό foil, by ace. w. inf. [cf. B. § 140, 10, 3], 1 Th. ii. 12 (11) TTrVVII. [Com I*.: dia-, προ-μαρτΰρομαί.]* μ,άρτυς ( Aeolic μάρτυρ, a form not found in the N. T.; [etymologically one who is mindful, heeds ; prob. allied with Lat. memor, cf. Vanicek p. 1201 ; Curtius § 46G]), -vpor, acc. -υρα, 0; plur. piprupfi, dat. plur. /χαρτυσι; Sept. for Λ^; [lies., Simon., Theogn., al.] ; α witness (one who avers, or can aver, what he himself has seen or heard or knows by an_\• other means) ; a. in a legal sense : Wt. xviii. 1(1 ; xxvi. 6.5; Mk. xiv. 63; Acts vi. 13; vii. ■^8; 2 Co. xiii. 1 ; 1 Tim. v. 19 ; Heb. x. 28. b. in an historical sense: Acts x. 41 ; 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; [2 Tim. ii. 2] ; one who is a spectator of anything, e. g. of a con- test, Ileb. xii. 1 ; w. a gen. of the obj., Lk. xxiv. 48; Acts i. 22; ii.32; iii. 15; v.32GLTTrWH; x. 39 ; xxvi. 16 ; 1 Pet. v. 1 ; w. a gen. of the possessor 'one who testifies for one *, Acts i. 8 L Τ Tr WH ; xiii. 31;» a gen. of tlie possessor and of the obj.. Acts v. 32 Rec. ; μάρτυρα eivai τινι, to lie a witness for one, serve him by testiniuny. Acts i. 8 RG; xxii. 15; [Lk. xi. 4.S Ί' Tr WII]. He is said to be a witness, to whose attestation ap|ieal is made; hence the formulas ^upTus μον ίστιν ά Seas, Ro. i. 9 ; Phil. i. 8 ; β(ί>ί μαρτύς, 1 Th. ii. 5 ; μάρτυρα τον det>v eiriKaXovpxii, 2 Co. i. 23 ; iipeis μάρτυρ€5 κ. ό Oeos, 1 Th. ii. 10; tlie faithful interpreters of (iod's counsels are called God's witnesses : Rev. xi. 3 ; Christ is reck- oned among them. Rev. i. 5 ; iii. 14. c. in an ethi- cal sense those are called papTupes Ίησοΰ, wlio after his example have proved the strength and genuineness of their faith in Christ by undergoing a violent death [cf B. D. Am. ed. and Diet, of Cliris. Antiq. s. v. Alarty] : Acts xxii. 20; Rev. ii. 13; .xvii. 6.* μοσθόί, Doric for patrras (q- v.) : Rev. i. 1 3 Tdf. [" this form seems to be Western" {Hort, App. p. 149)]. μ.α<Γσ-άομ.αι (R G) more correctly μασάομαι (LTTr WII): impf. 3 pers. plur. ΐμασάντο; (Μ.\Ω, μάσσω, to knead) ; to chew, consume, eat, derour, {Kpeas, Arstph. Pint. 321 ; τα Seppara των Bupemv, .losepJi. b. j. 6, 3, 3 ; ρίζas ξϋ\ωι>, Sept. ,ΤοΙ) xxx. 4, and other exx. in other auth.) : epaawvTu Tat γλώσσαϊ αίτών, they gnawed their tongues {for pain), Rev. xvi. 10." μαστιγόω, -ώ, 3 pers. sing. μαστιγοΊ ; fut. μαστιγώσω ; I ao\: e'μaστίγωσu^, (μάστιξ); fr. Ildt.down; Sept.cliielly for T\2T^ ; to scourije ; prop. : τινά, ^It. x. 1 7 ; xx. 1 9 ; xxiii. 34 ; Mk. X. 34 ; Lk. xviii. 33 ; .In. xix. 1 ; [cf. B. D. s. v. Scourging; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. i. excurs. xi.]. metaph. of God as a father chastising and training men as chil- dren by afflictions: Heb. xii. 6; cf. Jer. v. .'t ; Prov. iii. 12 ; .Indith viii. 27.* μαστίζω; i. q. μαστιγόω, q. v.; τινά, Acts xxii. 25. (Num. xxii. 25; Sap. v. II, and often in Horn.)* μάστιξ, -tyos, ή, a ivhip, scourge, (for UW, 1 K. xii. 1 1, 14; Prov. xxvi. 3) : Acts xxii. 24; Heb. xi. 36; metaph. α scourge, plague, i. e. a calamity, misfortune, esp. as sent by God to discipline or punish (Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 33; with Δ(05 added, Horn. II. 12,37; 13,812; Beoii, Aesclnl. sept. (i07): of distressing bodily diseases, Mk. iii. 10; v. 29, 34; Lk. vii. 21 ; 2 Mace. ix. 11." μαστόϊ, -oO, 0, (μάσσω to knead [more prob. akin to μαδάω, Lat. mudidus, etc. ; cf. Vanicek p. 693 ; Curtius § 456]), fr. Soph., Hdt. down ; the breast (for -\Ό, Job iii. 12; Cant. i. 13, etc.); phir., the breasts (nipples) of a man, Rev. i. 13 R G Tr WH [here Tdf. paaBo'is (cf. WH. App. p. 149"), Lchm. μαζο'κ'] ; breasts of a woman, Lk. xi. 27 ; xxiii. 29.• [Ματαθ(θ5, see ΜατταΛ'αΕ.] ματαιολο-γία, -as, ή, (ματαιολόγοί), vain lalh'ng, empty talk; ( Vulg. r(inilo(juiiim) : 1 Tim. i. 6. (Plut. mor. p. 6 f. ; Porphyr. de abstin. 4, 16.) * ματαιολέγοΐ, -ου, ό, (ράταιοΓ and λίγω), an idle talker, one who utters empty, sen.seless things : Tit. i. 10.* μάταιος, -αία (1 Co. xv. 17; [1 Pet. i. 18]), -aiof, also -ot,-oi/, (.Tas.i. 26; Tit. iii. 9), [cf. JF/i. App. p. 157; W. § 1 1, 1 ], (fr. μάτην), Sept. for San, HW, 313 (a lie), etc.; ααταιοτη^ 393 μα•χαιρα as in prof. auth. (Lat. rnnus) r/eroiil of force, truth, suc- cesa, result, [A.V. uniforml)• mini : iiniv. : ή θρησκύα, .las. i. 26; useless, tii tin piir/msr, ή ττιστίί. 1 Co Χλ'. 1 '• : fool- ish, διάΚογισμοί, 1 Co. iii. "-Ό ; ζητήσεις. Tit. iii. 9; given to vain things ami luading away from salvation, ανα- στροφή, 1 Pet. i. 18. τά μάταια, vain thhxjs, fwiitics, of htatlien deities ami their worship ('73Π, ,Ier- ii. 5; x. 3 ; S^nn ""inX 1\!\ ΐΓομ(ύ(σθαί ύπίσω τωι> ματ- 2 Κ. χνϋ. 1!> \ Π''73Γ3, ματαία, .Jer. viii. 19 ; τίδωλα, Dent. .\.\xii. 21 ; Jer. xiv. 22) : Aets xiv. 15. [Cf. Trench, Syn. § xlix.] * μοταιότη;, -ητος, ή, (μάταως, ([. v.), a purely bibl. and eccles. «onl [(Polhix 1. υ c. 32 § 134)]; Sept. for Sdd (often in Eccles.), also for Χ'ϋ, etc.; Γί/ίί////; a. irh/it is deriii'l nf (rulli and a/ij>ropri(ileness: ίπίμογκα ματαιή- τψ -os (gen. of quality), 2 Pet. ii. 18. b. jicrrerse- 7iess, dcjiraralitin : τοΰ vans, Eph. iv. 17. c. fraUtij, want of VKpr: Ro. viii. 20.* ματαιόω : (μάταιοί) ; 1 aor. pass, ΐματαιώβην ; to ntakc empty, vain, foolish : (ματαιώθησαν (V Tots διάΚο'^ισμοϊς αντων, were brought to folly in their thoughts, i. e. fell into error, Ro i. 21. (2 K. xvii. 1,5; ,ler. ii. 5; 1 Chr. xxi. 8; [etc.]; nowhere in (!rk. auth.)* μάτην (accus. [cf. W. 230 (21 «) ; B. § 131 , 12] of μάτη, i. q. ματία, a futile attempt, folly, fault), adv., fr. Pind., Aeschyl- down, in rain, fruitlessli/ : RIt. χ v. 9 and Jlk. vii. 7, after Isa xxix. 13 Sept.* Μοτβαΐοϊ (LTTrAVn ΜαθΟαΙος, cf. B. 8 (7); [ΤΓ//. App. 159''; Scrivener, Introd. ch. viii. § 5 p. 562]), -ου [Β. 18 (16)], ό, (commonly regarded as Ilebr. H'TO gift of (iod, fr. |η•? and Π; ; but Π'ΓΙΟ is in Creek ΜατβιαΓ, and the analogy of the names 'jn (fr. jn a festival) in Greek 'Ayyaios, '31 ΖακχαΙο!, and others, as well as the Syriac form of the name before us ■^L•^. [and its form in the Talmud, viz. "iTD or "Xrio ; Sanhedrin 43* ; Meu- schen, Ν Τ. ex Talm. illustr. p. 8] certainly lead us to adopt the Aramaic form 'Γη, and to derive that from the unused sing. nrD, a man, plur. Ό'ΓΟ ; hence i. q. manly, cf. Grimm in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1870, p. 723 sqq.), Matthew, at first a collector of imposts, afterwards an apostle of Jesus : ]Mt. ix. 9 sqq. (cf. Mk. ii. 14 ; Lk. v. 27sqi; 1. oneof Christ's ancestors : Lk. iii. 25 [here Treg. Μαθβαθίου (cf. reff. s. V. Ματθα'ια- init.)]. 2. one of the ancestors of the man just mentioned : Lk. iii. 26 [Trmrg. Ματαθίου]' μάχαιρα, gen. -as [so (with R (i) Lchm. in Lk. xxi. 24] and-iyf, dat. -a [so (with R G) Lchm. in Lk. xxii. 49; Acts xii. 2] and -i; (betw. which forms the codd. vary, cf. [Scriv- ener, Collation, etc. p. Ivi.; Tilf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156"]; AV. 62 (61); B. 11; Delitzsch on Heb. xL 34 p. .584 note), ή, (akin to μάχη and Lat. mactare); 1. a Uir(je knife, used for killing animals and cutting up flesh: Ilom., Pind., Hdt., al. ; hence (ien. xxii. 6, 10 ; Judg. xix- 29 Alex., for nS:3N0. 2. a small siroriJ, distinguished fr. the large sword, the ρομφαία (Joseph, antt. 6, 9, 5 άπο- τί'μκίΐ την κίφάλην τη ρομφαία τη tKtivov (Goliath's), μά- χαιραν οίκ ΐχων alros), and curved, for a cutting stroke; distinct also f r. ξίφος, a strair/hl sword, for thrusting, Xen. r. eq. 12, 11, cf. Hell. 3, 3, 7; but the words are freq. used interchangeably. In the N. T. univ. a sword (Sept. often for 3ΐΠ) : as a weapon for making or repelling aa attack, Mt. x.xvi. 47, 51, 52, [.05] ; Mk. xiv. 43, 47 sq. ; Lk. x.xii. 36, 38, 49, 52 ; Jn. xviii. 10 sq. ; Acts xvi. 27; Heb. xi. 37 ; Rev. vi. 4 ; xiii. 10, [14] ; by a Hebraism, στόμα μαχαίρας, the edijc of the sword (3"ΐΠ "3, Gen. xxxiv. 26 ; Josh. viii. 24 ; 1 S. xiii. 22; Judg. iii. 16, etc. [but in the Sept. the rendering ,Wof, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; apos, Rev. viii. 8; αστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκω!/ Rev. xii. 3, 9; aeros, ibid. 14 ; hhhpov, Lk. xiii. 1 9 [T WII om. L Tr br. /it'y.] ; (tXaSot, Mk. iv. 32; Ιχθϋα, Jn. xxi. 11; β. compass and extent; large, spacious: σκηνή ^μfίζωv), Heb. i.\. 11 ; avaymov [R άνώγίον, q. v.], Mk. xiv. 15 ; αποθήκη, Lk. xii. 18; κάμινο!, Rev. ix. 2; πόλΐΓ, Rev. xi. 8; xvi. 19; xvii. 18; xviii. 2, 16,18, 19; ποταμοί. Rev. ix. 14; xvi. 12; θύρα, 1 Co. xvi. 9 ; 'ληνοί. Rev. xiv. 19 ; οθόνη. Acts x. 11 ; xi. 5 ; χάσμα, Lk. xvi. 26 (2 S. xviii. 17). γ. meas- ure and height : οΐκοδο/ιαι, Mk. xiii. 2 ; ^poi/or. Rev. xx. 11; /οηί7,μά;(αιρα, Rev. vi.4; as respects stature and age, μικρη'ι xat μ(•/άλοι, small and great, young and old. Acts viii. 10; xxvi. 22; Ileb. viii. 11; Rev. xi. 18; xiii. 16; xix. 5,18; XX. 12, (Gen. xLx. 11; 2K. xxiii. 2; 2 Chr. xxxiv. 30). [neut. sing, used adverbially : iv μ(γάλω, Acts xxvi. 29 LTTr WH (for R GtV πολλω, q. v. in πολνί, d.) in great sc. degree. The apostle plays upon Agrippa's words ev όλίγω (q. v.) in a little (time) thou wouldst fain etc. ... I would to God that both in little and in great i. e. in all re- spects etc. ; cf. the use of oXlyov κ. pcya or σμικρόν κ. ptya (vet in negative sentences) to express totality; e. g. Plat. Phileb. 21 e. ; Apol. 19c.; 21b.; 26 b.; but see d. below.] b. of number and quantity, i. q. "u- merous, large: dyi'Xi;, Mk. v. 11; abundant, πορισμός, 1 Tim.vi. 6; μισθαπο^οσ'ια, Heb. χ. 35. c. of age: β μιίζων, the elder, Ro. ix. 12 after Gen.xxv. 23, (Σκιπίων 6 ^c'yas.PoIyb. 18, 18(35), 9; 32, 12, 1). d. used of in- tensity and its degrees : 8νναμις, Acts iv. 33 ; viii. 1 ; neut. ev μιγάλω, with great effort. Acts xxvi. 29 LT Tr WH [but see y- above] ; of the affections and emotions of the mind: χαρά. Jit. ii. 10; xxviii. 8; Lk. ii. 10; xxi v. 52; Acts XV. 3 ; φόβος, Jlk. iv. 41 ; Lk. ii. 9 ; viii. 37 ; Acts v. 5, 11 ; Rev. xi. 11 ; θνμής. Rev. xii. 12; Χΰττη, Ro. ix. 2; ίκστασις, Mk. v. 42 (Gen. xxvii. 33); πίστις, Mt. xv. 28; χάρις. Acts iv. 33; άyάπη, Jn. xv. 13. of natural events μίΎα<; 390 μ€ΐ θοΕεία powerfully affecting the senses, i. q. violent, miglity, strong : άκμος, Jn. vi. 18 ; Rev. vi 1 3 ; βροντή, Rev. xiv. 2 ; χάΧαζα, Rev. xi. 19; xvi. 21 ; σfισμόs, Mt. viii. 24; xxviii. 2; Lk. xxi. 11 ; Acts xvi. 26; Rev.vi. 12; xi. 13; xvi. 18; XalXa^jr, Jlk.iv.ST; πτώσίί, Mt. vii. 2Γ. of other external things, such as are perceived by h e a r i η g: κρα>τ/ή, Acts xxiii. 9 ; Rev. xiv. 18 [R G] ; μίίζυν κράζ(ΐν, to cry out the louder, Mt. XX. 31 ; φωνή. Mt. xxiv. ai [Torn, φ., WH only in mrg.l ; xxvii. iti, 50 ; Lk. xxiii. 23 ; Jn. xi. 43 ; Acts viii. 7; Rev. i. 10; v. 2, 12; vi. 10; vii. 2, 10; viii. 13; x. 3 ; xi. 12, 15; [xiv. 18 LTTr WH; xviii. 2 Rec], and else- where ; γαλήνη, Mt. viii. 26 ; Mk. iv. 39. of objects of sight which excite admiration and wonder : φώί, Mt. iv. 16 ; σημίΐον, Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Lk. xxi. 11 ; Acts vi. 8 ; viii. 13; Rev. xiii. 13; cpya. Rev. xv. 3; μύζω, μιίζονα τοντων, greater things than these, i.e. more extraordinary, more wonderful, Jn. i. 50 (51); v. 20; xiv. 12. of things that are felt: κανμα. Rev. xvi. 9; nvperas, Lk. iv. 38; of other things that distress : ανάγκη, Lk. xxi. 23 ; θλίψΐ!, !Mt. x.xiv. 21 ; Acts vii. 11; Rev. ii. 22; vii. 14 ; διωγμοί•. Acts viii. 1 ; λ:μόί, Lk. iv. 25 ; Acts xi. 28 ; πληγή, Rev. xvi. 21. 2. predicated of r a η k, as belonging to a. persons, eminent for ability, virtue, authority, power; as God, and sacred personages: Of 6s, Tit. ii. 13 [(on which see Prof. Abbot, Xote C. in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc. i. p. 19, and cf. ϊπιφάν(ΐα)] ; Άρτιμις, Acts xix. 27 sq. 34 sq. ; άρχι^ρ^ύί, lleb. iv. 14; ποιμήν, Heb. xiii. 20: προφήτη!, Lk. vii. 16 ; absol. o{ μίγάλοι, great men, lead- ers, rulers, Mt. xx. 25 ; Mk. x. 42 ; univ. eminent, din- tinguished : Mt. v. 19; xx. 26 ; Lk. i. 15, 32; Acts viii. 9. μύζων is used of those who surpass others — either in nature and power, as God : Jn. x. 29 [here Τ Tr WH txt. give the neut. (see below)] ; xiv. 28 ; Heb. vi. 13; 1 Jn. iv. 4 ; add, Jn. iv. 12 ; viii. 53 ; or in excel- lence, w ο r t h, a u t h ο r i t y, etc. : Sit. xi. 1 1 ; xviii. 1 ; xxiii. 11 ; Mk. ix. 34 ; Lk. vii. 28 ; ix. 46 ; xxii. 26 sq. ; Jn. xiii. 16 ; xv. 20 ; 1 Co. xiv. 5 ; iura/ifi /lii'fovff, 2 Pet. ii. 1 1 ; neut. μ(ϊζον, something higher, more exalted, more majestic than the temple, to wit the august person of Jesus the ^Messiah and his preeminent influence, Mt. xii. C L Τ Tr WH ; [cf. Jn. x. 29 above] ; contextually i. q. strict in condemning, of God, 1 Jn. iii. 20. b. t h i η gs to be esteemed highly for their importance, i. q. Lat. gravis ; k. x. 1 ; xix. 4; Jn. vi. 6, 15; vii. 35; xii. 4 ; xiv. 22; Acts v. 35 ; xvii. 31; xx. 7,13; xxii. 26; xxvi. 2; xxvii. 30; Heb. viii. 5; [2 Pet. i. 12 LTTr WII]; Rev. x.4; w. inf. aorist (a constr. cen- sured by Phryn. p. 336, but authenticated more recently /Αβλο? 397 /*ei« by many exx. fr. the best writ. fr. Horn, down ; cf. W. 333 (313) sq. ; Loh. ad Pbryn. p. 745 sqq. ; [but see Rutherford, New Pliryn. p. 420 sqq.]) : Acts xii. 6 LT Wll; Rev. ii. 10 (βαΚ^Ιν RG); xii. 16; xii. 4; w. fut. inf. ίσίοθαι, Acts xxiii. 30 RG. c. as in Grk. writ, fr. Horn, down, of tliose things which will come to pass (or which one will do or suffer) by tixed necessity or divine appointment (Germ. .loUen [are to be, des- tined to be, etc.]) ; w. pres. inf. active : Mt. xvi. 27 ; xvii. 12; XX. 22; Lk. ix.31; Jn.vi. 71 ; vii. 39; xi.51; xii. 33; xviii. 32; Acts xx. 38 ; xxvi. 22, 23 ; Heb. i. 14 ; xi. 8 ; Rev. ii. 10'; iii. 10; viii. 13, etc. ; Ήλίαί ύ μίλλων Ιμχι- σθαι, Mt. xi. 14 ; 6 μίΧΚων λυτρο. τθαι, Lk. xxiv. 21 ; κρΊ- κιν, 2 Tim. iv. 1 [AVIl niig. κρΊναι] ; w. pres. inf. passive : Mt. xvii. 22 ; Mk. xiii. 4 ; Lk. ix. 44 ; xix. 1 1 ; x.\i. 36 ; Acts xxvi. 22 ; Ro. iv. 24 ; 1 Th. iii. 4 ; Jas. ii. 1 2 ; Rev. i. 19 [Tdf. •ν(νίσθαί\\ vi. 11 ; τ^ς μ(\\ονσης άΐΓοκα\υπτ€- σθαι δόξηί, 1 Pet. v. 1 ; w. aor. inf. : την μίλΧουσαν &6ξαν άποκαΚυφθηναί, Ro. viii. 18 ; την μ(\λουσαν ττίστιν άπο- καλνφΰήναι, Cial. iii. 23 ; used also of those things which wu infer from certain preceding events will of necessity follow : w. inf. pres.. Acts xxviii. 6 ; Ro. viii. 13 ; w. inf. fut., Acts xxvii. 10. d. in general, of what is sure to happen: w. inf. pres., Mt. xxiv. 6 ; .In. vi. 71 ; 1 Tim. i. 16 ; Rev. .\ii. 5 ; xvii. 8 ; w. inf. fut. fafa6ai. Acts xi. 28 ; xxiv. 15. e. to be always on the point of doing with- out ever doing, i. e. to detail : τί μίΧλαί ; Acts xxii 16 (Aeschyl. Prom. 36; τί μ(λΚ(τ( ; Eur. Ilec. 1094 ; Lcian. dial, niort. 10, 13, and often in prof. auth. ; 4 Mace. vi. 23; Lx. 1). μ<λο9, -ouf , TO, [fr. Horn, down], α member, limb : prop. a member of the human body, Ro. xii. 4; 1 Co. xii. 12, 14, 18-20, 25 sq. ; Jas. iii. 5; τα μ. τοΐι σώματος, 1 Co. xii. 12, 22; μον, σοΰ, ήμων, νμων, Mt. ν. 29 sq. ; Γνο. vi. 13, 19; vii. 5, 23 ; Col. iii. 5 ; Jas. iii. 6 ; iv. 1 ; πόμνης μίλη is said of bodies given up to criminal intercourse, because they are as it were members belonging to the harlot's body, 1 Co. vi. 15. Since Christians are closely united by the bond of one and the same sjjirit both among themselves and with Chiist as the head, their fellowship is likened to the body, and indiviiiual Christians are metaph. styled μίλη — now one of another, αλλήλων: Ro. xii. 5; Ej)!]. iv. 25; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 7, (cf. Frilzsc/ie, Com. on Rom. iii. p. 45), — now of the mys- tical body, i. e. the church : I Co. xii. 27 ; Eph. v. 30, [cf. iv. 16 WH mrg.] ; τα σώματα of Christians are called μίλη of Clirist, because the body is the abode of the spirit of Christ and is consecrated to Christ's service, 1 Co. vi. 15.* Μίλχ( (Τ Τγ WH Μ(\χ(! ; see ti, .), 6, ("aSn my king), Melchi; 1. one of Christ's ancestors: Ek.iii. 24. 2. another of the same : ib. iii. 28.* Μίλχισίδίκ (in Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 2 Μ(λχισ(8('κης, -ου), ό, (ρ'ΐ>'""3'70 king of righteousness), Melc/iizedek; king of Salem (see under 2αλήμ) and priest of the most high God, who lived in the days of Abraham : Heb. v. 6, 10; vi. 20; vii. 1, 10 sq. 15, 17, 21 [RGL]; cf. Gen. xiv. 18 eqq. ; Ps. cix. (ex.) 4. [Cf. B. D. s. v.] * μ(μβράνα [Soph. Lex. -άι»α; cf. Chandler § 136], -«< [B. 1 7 (15)], ή, Lat. membrana, i. e. jMrchmenI, first made of dressed skins at Pergamum, whence its name : 2 Tim. iv. 13 [Act. Barn. 6 fin. Cf. Birt, Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii. ; Gardthausen, Palaeographie, p. 39 sq.].* μκ'μψομ,αι; 1 aor. (μ^μψάμην, in class. Grk. fr. Hesiod (opp. 1 84) down : to blame, Jiiid fault : absol. Ro• ix. 19 ; the thing found fault with being evident from what pre- cedes, Mk. vii. 2 Rec. ; avTovt, Heb. viii. 8 L Τ Tr mrg. WH txt., where R G Tr txt. Wll mrg. αΙτοΊς, which many join with μιμφόμίνο! (for the person or thing blamed is added by Grk. writ, now in the dat., now in the ace; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v., cf. Kriiger § 46, 7, 3) ; but it is more correct to supply αυτήν, i. e. 6ιιιβήκην, which the writer wishes to prove was not " faultless " (cf. 7), and to join airoit with Xi'yft; [B. § 133, 9].* μ£μ.ψ(μοιρο$, -ov, {μίμφομαι, and μοίρα fate, lot), conv plaining of one's lot, querulous, discontented: Jude 16. (Isocr. p. 234 c. [p. 387 ed. Lange] ; Aristot. h. a. 9, 1 [p. 608% 10] ; Theophr. char. 17, 1 ; Lcian. dial. deor. 20, 4 ; Pint, de ira cohib. c. 1 3.) • μίν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence properly a particle of affirmation: truhj, certainly, surely, irl•• deed, — its affirmative force being weakened, yet re- tained most in Ionic, Epic, and Herodotus, and not wholly lost in Attic and Hellenistic writers (μίν ' con- firmative ' ; cf. 4 JIacc. xviii. 18). Owing to this its oriirinal meaning it adds a certain force tn the terms and phrases with which it is connected, and thus con- trasts them with or distinguishes ther'. from others. Accordingly it takes on the character of a concessive and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which stands related to a following 8e or other adversative con- junction, either expressed or understood, and in a sen- tence composed of several members is so placed as to point out the first member, to which a second, marked by an adversative particle, is added or opposed. It corre- sponds to the Lat. quidem, indeed. Germ, zwar (i. e. prop. zu Wahre, i. e. in Wahrheit [in trutW]) ; but often its force cannot be reproduced. Its use in classic Greek is exhib- ited by Devarius i. p. 122 sqc]., and Klotz on the same iL 2 p. 656 sq([.; Viger i p. 531 sqq., and Hermann on the same p. 824 sq. ; al. ; Matthiae § 622 ; KUhner ii. p. 806 sqq. §§ 527 sqii.; p. 691 scjq.; § 503; [Jelf § 729, 1, 2; §§ 764 sqq.]; Passow, and Pape, [and L. and S.] s. v. I. Examples in which the particle μίν is foUoived in another member by an adversative particle expressed. Of these examples there are two kinds : 1. those in which μίν has a concessive force, and Se (or άλλα) in- troduces a restriction, correction, or amplification of what has been said in the former member, indeed . . . but, yet, on the other hand. Persons or things, or predi- cations about either, are thus correlated : Mt. iii. 11, cf. Mk. i. 8 (where TTrWHom.Lbr. μίν); Lk. ui. 16 (where the meaning is, ' I indeed baptize as well as he who is to come after me, but his baptism is of greater efficacy"; cf. Acts i. 5); Mt. ix. 37 and Lk. x. 2 (al- though the harvest is great, yet the laborers are few) ; μβν by» μα Mt. χνϋ. 11 sq. (rightly indeed is it said that Elijah will come and work tlie άποκατάστασκ, but he has already corae to bring abou' this very thing); Mt. xx. 23; xxii. 8; xxiii. •2« ; Jn. xvi. •22; xix. 32sq. ; Acts xxi. 39 (al- though I am a Jew, and not that Egyptian, yet etc.) ; Acts xxii. 3 [R] ; Ko. li. 2.3 : vi. 1 1 ; 1 Co. i. 18 ; ix. 24 ; xi. 14 sq.; xii. 20 [KG l>br.Trbr. Wllmrg.]; .\v. 51 [R GLbr.J; 2Co.x.lO; Ileb. iii. 5 sij.; 1 I'et. i. 20, and often, fif'i» and θί are added to articles and pronouns : 01 μΐν . . . oi θί, the one indeed . . . but the other (al- though the latter, yet the former), Phil. i. 16 sq. [ace. to crit. txt.] ; OS μίν ... 05 8e, the one indeed, but (yet) the other etc. .Jude 22 sq. ; τινίς μίν . . . nvft St και, Phil, i. 15; with conjunctions: tl μίν ουν, if indeed then, if therefore . . . « 8e, but if, Acts xviii. 14 sq. R G ; xix. 3S sq. ; xxv. 1 1 L Τ Tr WH [W μίν ουν . . . nvi 8e, Ileb. viii. 4 sq. (here R G «i μϊν yap)] ; ti μ^ν . . . viiv 8t, if indeed (conceding or supposing this or that to be the case) . . . but now, Ileb. xi. 15 ; καν μίν . . « δί fiyt. Lk. .xiii. 9 ; μϊν yap . . . 8i, 1 Co. xi. 7 ; Ro. ii. 25 ; μϊν ουν . . , if, Lk. iii. 18 ; fir μίν . . . th 8e, Heb. ix. 6 scj. ; μ£ί> . . . αλλά, indeed . . . but, allliiiiti/h . . . yet, Ro. xiv. 20 ; 1 Co. xiv. 17 ; μίν . . . πλην, Lk. xxii. 22. [Cf. W. 443 (ϋΆ); Β. § 149, 12a.] 2. those in which μίν loses its concessive force and serves only to distin- guish, but 8e retains its adversative power : Lk.xi.48; Acts xiii. 36 sq. ; xxiii. 8 [here WII txt. om. Tr br. μίν] ; 1 Co. i. 12, 23 , Phil. iii. 1 ; Ileb. vii. 8 ; άπο μΐν . . , in'i hi, 2 Tim. iv. 4 ; ό μϊν ουν (Germ, er nun [he, then,"]) . . . oi 8i, Acts .\xviii. 5 sq. ; os μίν ... or it, and one . . . and another, 1 Co. xi. 21 ; oi μΐν . . . ό St (he, on the con- trary), Ileb. vii. 20 S(J. 23 sq. ; (Ke'ivoi μίν ουν . . • ημίΐς 8e, 1 Co. ix. 25; el μϊν oSu . . . (1 8e, Acts xviii. 14 sq. [RG]; xLx. 38; .\xv. 11 [LTTrWH]; and this ha])- pens chiefly when what has already been included in the >vords immediately preceding is separated into parts, so that the adversative particle contrasts that which the writer especially desires to contrast : ίκάστω . . . Toif μίν ζητονσιν . . . Tots δί c^ (pLOfias etc. lio. ii. 6—8 ; ttSs . . . (Kflvoi μιν . . . ημίΐς 8d etc. 1 Co. i.\. 25 ; add, Mt. .xxv. 14 sq. 33 ; Ro. v. IG ; xi. 22. 3. μϊν . . .84 serve only to distribute a sentence intoclauses: both. ..and; not oidy . . .but also ; as well . . .as: Jn. xvi. 9-1 1 ; Ro. viii. 1 7 ; Jude 8 ; πρώτον μίν . . . eneira 8ί, Heb. vii. 2; ο μϊν . . . ο 8e . . . h 8t, some . . . some . . . some, Mt. xiii. 8 ; [eitaoTos . . . ό μϊν . . . 6 8t, each . . . one . . . another, 1 Co. vii. 7 L Τ Tr WII] ; &ς μϊν . . . Ss Se, one . . . an- other, Mt. x.xi. 35 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; 1 Co. vii. 7 [R G]; oi μίν . . . άλλοι [L o2] 6e . . . ίτ(ρυί δί, Mt. xvi. 14 ; ω μ(ν γαρ . . . άλλωδί . . . (τίρωδϊ [here TTrWHom. Lbr. St], 1 Co. xii. 8-10; & μίν . . . foil, by άλλα δί three times, Mt. xiii. 4 sq. 7 sq. ; SKkoi μίν, άλλοι St, 1 Co. xv. 39 ; τοϋτο μίν • . . τοντο δί, on the one hand . . . on the other; partly , . . partly, Heb. x. 33, also found in prof. auth. cf. W. 142 (135). μίν is followed by another particle : ϊτΓίΐτα, Jn. xi. 6 ; 1 Co. xii. 28 ; Jas. iii. 1 7 ; κα\ νΰν, Acts xxvi. 4, 6 ; τα νυν. Acts xvii. 30 ; πολύ [R G πολλώ] (ώλλον, Heb. xii. 9. H. Examples in which μίν is followed neither by 8i nor by any other adversative particle (μίν ' solitarium ') ; cf. W. 575 (534) sq. ; B. 365 (313) sq. These cxx. are of various kinds; either 1. the antithesis is evi- dent from the context; as, Col. ii. 23 ('have indeed a sliow of wi.-idum', but are folly [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in loc.]) ; ή μίν . . . σωτηρίαν, sc. but they themselves prevent their own salvation, Ro. x. 1 ; τά μίν . . . Βυνάμισιν, sc. but ye do not hold to my apostolic authority, 2 Co. xii. 12; (Ίνθρωττοι μίν [L Τ Tr Wll om. /itV] . . . ομνύουσιν, sc. 6 8i if OS καθ' f αυτού ΰμνϋίΐ, Ileb. vi. 16. Or 2. the antithetic idea is brought out by a different turn of the sentence : Acts xix. 4 [Kec], where the expected second member, Ίησοϋί 8( ίστιν ό ι'ρχόμινος, is ivrapped up in ToOr' foriv fi's τόν Ίησονν; Ro. xi. 13 ίφ' όσον μίν κτλ.• where the antithesis παραζηλω δί κτλ. is contained in (ΐπω! πηραζηλώσω; Ro. vii. 12 ό μίν νάμα κτλ., where the thought of the second member, ' but sin misuses the law,' is expressed in another form in 13 sqq. by an anacoluthon, consisting of a change from the disjunctive to a conjunctive construction (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), we find μίν . . . τί, .Vets xxvii. 21 ; μίν . . . και, 1 Th. ii. 18 ; in distributions or partitions, Mk. iv. 4-8 [here R G μίν . . . δ( . . . και . . . και] \ Lk. viii. 5-8 ; or, finally, that member in which 8i would regularly follow immediately precedes {Herm. ad Vig. p. 839), Acts xxviii. 22 [yet see Meyer ad loc. ; cf. B. § 149, 1 2 d.]. Or . 3. the writer, in using μίν, perhaps had in mind a second mem- ber to be introduced by 8ί, but was drawn away from his intention by explanatory additions relating to the first member: thus Acts iii. 13 [ΰν ipels μίν — Kec. om. this μίν — etc., where ό θίος 8ί ήγειρ^ν ίκ νεκρών, cf. 15, sliould have followed) ; esp. (as occasionally in class. Grk. also) after πρώτον μίν : Ro. i. 8 ; iii. 2 ; 1 Co. xi. 18; τον μίν πρώτον λόγοκ κτλ. where the antithesis το* δί 8evTfpov λόγον κτλ. ought to have followed. Acts i. 1. 4. μίν ουν [in Lk. xi. 28 TTr WH μινοΰν], Lat. quidem ifjitur, [Eng. so then, now therefore, verily, etc.], (where μίν is confirmatory of the matter in hand, and ουν marks an inference or transition, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 662 sq. ; \_Herm. A'ig. pp. 540 sq. 842; B. § 149, 16]): Acts i. 18; V. 41 ; xiii. 4; xvii. 30; xxiii. 22 ; xxvi. 9 ; 1 Co. vi. 4, 7 [here Τ om. Tr br. ουν] ; άλλα μίν ουν, Phil. iii. 8 G L Tr ; « μίν ουν, Heb. vii. 11. 5. μίν solitarium has a concessive and restrictive force, indeed, verily, ((ierm. freilich), [cf. Klotz, Devar. ii. 2 p. 522 ; Har• tung, Partikeln, ii. 404] : d μίν, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; μίν ουν note then, (Germ, nun freilich), Ileb. ix. 1 [cf. B. u. s. On the use of μίν ουν in the classics cf. Cope's note on Aristot. rhet. 2, 9, 11.] 6. μ(νοϋνγ(, q. v. in its place. III. .\s respects the Position of the particle: it never stands at the beginning of a sentence, but yet as near the beginning as possible; generally in the second or third place, by preference between the article and noun, [exx. in which it occupies the fourth place are Acts iii. 21 ; 2 Co. x. I ; Col. ii. 23 ; Acts xiv. 12 Rec; the fifth place, Eph. iv. 11 ; Ro. xvi. 19 RWHbr.; 1 Co. ii. 15 Κ G ; (.In. .xvi. 22, see below)]; moreover, in the Meuva 39.9 μερίζω midst of a clause also it attaches itself to a word the force of which is to be strengthened, as και i/itts oiv λύττηρ μίν viv ίχ(τ( [but LT Tr WH . . . ουν viv μΐν λύττ.], Jn. xvi. 22 ; ef. \V. §61,6. The word is not found in the Rev. or in the Epp. of John. Mtwd or Mc'vvas, see MaiVai/. μ€ν-οϋν i. q. μίν ovv^ see μίν, II. 4 sq. (ΐίν-οϋν-γ6 \_μ(νοΙν y( L Tr], (μΐν, oiv, ye), nay surely, nay rather ; three times in answers by which what was previously said is corrected (and standing at the begin- ning of the clause, contrary to Attic usage where μίν oiv is never so placed ; cf. Slurz, De dial. Mac. et Ale.\. p. 203sq.; io6. ad Phryn. p. 342; [B. 370 sq. (318) ; W. § 61, 6]) : Lk. .\i. 2ϋ [where Τ Tr WH μινοΰν] ; Ro. ix. 20; X. 18; also Phil. iii. 8 [where LGTr fiei/ oiv, WH μΐν ουν γε], and Nicet. ann. 21, 11. 415 [p. 851 ed. Bekk.].* μί'ν-τοι, (μίν, Toi), [Tr μΐν τοι in 2 Tim. ii. 19], a par- ticle of affirmation, and hence also often of opposition (on its various use in class. Grk. cf. Devar. p. 124 sq. and Klotz's comments, vol. ii. 2 pp. 60 and 663 sqq. ; Herm. ad Vig. p. 840 sq.), bul yet, nevertheless, howbeit : Jn. iv. 27 ; vii. 13 ; xx. 5 ; xxi. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Jude 8 (the connection of which vs. with what precedes is as follows : 'although these examples were set forth as warnings, nevertheless ' etc.) ; όμως μίντοι, yet nevertheless, Jn. xii. 42 ; μίντοι, i. q. rather, Jas. ii. 8 (if ye do not have re- spect ot persons, but rather observe the law of love, with which προσωττοληψία is incompatible ; [^ij" however, howbeit ij]).* μ,( νω ; impf. ΐμινον; fut. μ(νώ\ 1 aor. ΐμίΐνα; plupf. μ(μ(νήκ(ΐν without augm. (1 Jn. ii. 19 ; cf. (κβάλλω, [and see Tdf- Proleg. p. 120 sq.]) ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. chiefly for 10>; and Dip, also for Π3Π, 3Ei', etc.; to re- main, abide ; I. intransitively ; in reference 1. to PLACE ; a. prop. i. q. Lat. commoror, to sojourn, tarry : cv w. dat. of place, Lk. viii. 27 ; x. 7 ; Jn. vii. 9 ; xi. 6 ; Acts XX. 15; xxvii. 31 ; xxviii. 30 [RGL]; 2 Tim. iv. 20; with adverbs of place: «icei, Mt. x. 11 ; Jn. ii. 12; X. 40; [xi. 54 WHTrt.xt.]; iiSe, Mt. xxvi. 38; Mk. xiv. 34 ; παρά τινι, with one, Jn. i. 39 (40) ; xiv. 25 ; Acts xviii. 20 [R G] ; xxi. 7 ; σν» τινι, Lk. i. 56 ; καθ' ίαυτον, dwell at his own house, Acts xxviii. 16, cf. 30. i. q. tarry as a guest, lodye : ποΟ, Jn. i. 38 (39) ; iv w. dat. of place, Lk. xix. 5 ; Acts i.\. 43 ; παρά τινι, in one's house. Acts ix. 43 ; xviii. 3 ; ,xxi. 8 ; of tarrying for a night, μ(τά τίνος, σνν τινι. Lk. χχίν. 29. i. q. Ιο be kept, to remain : dead bodies «Vl τοΟ σταυρού, Jn. xLx. 31 ; to κ\ημα iv rg άμηί\ω, Jn. xv. 4. b. tropically ; a. i. q. not to depart, not to leave, to continue to be present : μ^τά nvos (gen. of pers.), to maintain unbroken fellowship with one, adhere to his party, 1 Jn. ii. 19 ; to be constantly present to help one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. xiv. 16 R G; also παρά w. dat. of pers., Jn. xiv. 17; iπί τίνα, to put forth constant influence upon one, of the Holy Spirit, Jn. i. 32 sq. ; also of the wrath of God, ib. iii. 36 ; to κάλυμμα «jrl r^ άναγνώσ-(ΐ. of that which continually pre- vents the right understanding of what is read, 2 Co. iii. 14. In the mystic phraseology of John, God is said μίνια in Christ, i. e. to dwell as it were within him, to be con- tinually operative in him by his divine influence and en- ergy. Jn. xiv. 10 ; Christians are said μevfιl> iv τω θ(ω, to be rooted as it were in him, knit to him by the spirit they have received from him, 1 Jn. ii. 6, 24, 27 ; iii. 6 ; hence one is said μίν^ιν in Christ or in God, and conversely Christ or God is said μίν(ΐν in one : Jn. vi. 56 ; xv. 4 sq. ; 1 Jn. iii. 24; iv. 13, 16 ; ό Bebi μίν(ΐ iv αυτω κ. airos it τω θ(ω. 1 Jn. iv. 15; cf. Riickert, Abendniahl, p. 268 sq. iLivei TL iv ipoi, something has established itself perma- nently within my soul, and always exerts its power in me : τά μίγματα μου, Jn. xv. 7 ; ό λόγος τον θξον, 1 Jn. ii. 14 ; ή χαρά ή ίμή (not joy Hi me i. e. of which I am the object, but the joy with which I am filled), Jn. xv. 11 Rec. ; δ ηκοΙσατ(, 1 Jn. ii. 24 ; the Holy Spirit, Jn. ii. 1 7 ; iii. 9 ; η άΚηθιια, 2 Jn. 2 ; love towards God, 1 Jn. iii. 17; in the same sense one is said ίχ^ιν τι μίνον iv ίαυτω, as τον \6yov τον 6eov, Jn. v. 38 ; ζωην αΐώνιον, 1 Jn. iii. 15. i. q. to persevere ; ev τινι, of him who cleaves, holds fast, to a thing: iv τω λόγω. Jn. viii. 31 ; iv ttj άγάπτ;, 1 Jn. iv. 16 ; iv πίστ€ΐ, 1 Tim. ii. Ιό ; iv οις {iv τοίτοις. α) ζμαθα, 2 Tim. iii. 14 ; iv ttj diSa^jj, 2 Jn. 9, (cV τω Ίον^αΐσμω, 2 ^lacc. viii. 1) ; differently iv rfj άγάπτ] Ttraf, i. e. to keep one's self always worthy of his love, Jn. xv. 9 sq. β. to be held, or kept, continually : iv τω θανάτω, in the state of death, 1 Jn. iii. 14 ; iv τη σκοτία, Jn. xii. 46 ; iv τω φωτί, 1 Jn. ii. 10. 2. to time ; lo continue to be, i.e. not to perish, to last, to endure : of persons, to survive, live, (exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in Kypke, Observe, i. p. 415 sq.) : Phil. i. 25 [so iμμiveιv, Sir. xxxix. 11] ; with (Ις τον αιώνα added, Jn. xii. 34 ; lleb. vii. 24 ; also of him Λvho becomes partaker of the true and everlasting life, opp. to παράγ(σβαι, 1 Jn. ii. 1 7 ; ίως άρτι, opp. to o'l κοιμηθίντ^ς, 1 Co. XV. 6 ; ολίγον. Rev. xvii. 10 ; ϋως ίρχομαι, Jn. xxi. 22 sq. ; of things, not to perish, to last, stand : of cities, Mt. xi. 23 ; Heb. xiii. 14 ; of works, opp. to κατακαί^σθαι, 1 Co. iii. 14 ; of purposes, moral excellences, Ro. ix. 11 ; 1 Co. xiii. 13; Heb. xiii. 1; λόγος 6fov, 1 Pet. i. 23; (where Rec. adds eis τ. αιώνα) ; of institutions, Heb. xii. 27. ό καρπός, Jn. xv. Ifi ; ΰπαρξις, Heb. -X. 34 ; αμαρτία, Jn. i.x. 41 ; βρώσις, opp. to ή άπολλυμίνη. Jn. vi. 27 ; one's δικαίοσύΐΊ; with iir τον αιώνα adiled, 2 Co. i.x. 9 ; το ρήμα κυρίου, 1 Pet. i. 25. things which one does not part with are said μ(ν(ΐν to him, i. e. to remain to him, be still in (his) possession: Acts v. 4 (1 Mace. xv. 7). 3. to STATE or condition; to remain as one is, not to become another or different : with a predicate nom. μόνος, Jn. xii. 24 ; άσαλ(ντος, Acts xxvii. 41 ; άγαμος, 1 Co. vii. 11 ; πιστός, 2 Tim. ii. 13 ; ifpeif, Heb. vii. 3 ; with adΛ•eΓbs, όντως, 1 Co. vii. 40 ; ώς κάγώ. ibid. 8 ; iv w. dat. of the state, ibid. 20, 24. II. transitively ; Ttwi, to wait for, await one [cf. B. § 131, 4] : .\cts xx. 23 ; with i» and dat. of place added, ibid. 5. [Comp- : ava-, Dia-, iv-, ini-, κατά-, πάρα-, σνν^παρα-, π(ρι•, προσ-, νπο-μξνω.'\ μερίζω: 1 aor. iμiρισa^, pf. μ(μίρικα (1 Co. vii. 17 Τ Tr txt. WH txt.) ; Pass., pf. μ(μ(ρισμαι ; 1 aor. ίμ(ρΊ- σθην\ Mid., 1 aor. inf. μ(ρίσασθαι: (fr. μΐρος, as μίλίζΐΒ μέριμνα 4U0 μ€ρο^ ft. μίλοι) ; fr. Xen. down ; Sept. for pSn ; to divide ; i. e. a. In separate into parl.t, cut intu pieces : pass. fttyiipiarai 6 Xpta^Tos ; i. e. has Christ himself, whom ye claim as yours, been hke yourselves divided into parts, so that one has one part and another another part? 1 Co. i. 13 [L WII txt. punctuate so as to take it as an e.\- clamatory declaration ; see ^leyer in loc] ; trop. μ(μ(- ρισται ή yvvq και ή παρθίνοί, differ in their aims, follow different interests, [A. V. there ts a difference between; but L Tr W'H connect μιμ. with what precedes], 1 Co. vii. 33 (34) ; to divide into parties, i. e. be split into fac- tions (Polyb. 8, •23, 9 ) : καθ' ϊμαυτοΰ to be at variance with one's self, to rebel [Λ. V. diiuiled] against one's self, Mt. xii. 2J ; also e'lr' (μαυτόν, ib. 26 ; Mk. iii. 24-26. b. to distribute : τί τισι, a thing among persons, Mk. vi. 41 ; to bestow, impart : τινί, 1 Co. vii. 17; τί ««, Ro. xii. 3 ; 2 Co. X. 13; Ileb. vii. 2, (Sir. xlv. 20; Polyb. 11, 28, 9) ; mid. μερίζομαι τι μιτά Tivof, to divide (for one's self) a thing with one, Lk. xii. 13 (Uem. p. 913, 1). [Comp. : δια-, (Τυμ-μ(ριζω•\ ' μ€'ριμνα, -ai, η, (fr. μςμίζίι), μ€ρίζομαί, to be drawn in different directions, cf. [Eng. ' distraction ' and ' curae quaemeumanimum divorse trahunt'] Ter. Andr. 1,5, 25; Verg. Aen. 4, 285 sq. ; [but ace. to al. derived fr. a root meaning to be thoughtful, and akin to μάρτ -js, memor, etc.; cf. Vanicek p. 1201 ; Curtius § 46li ; Fick iv. 283; see μάρτυ!]), care, anxiety: 1 Pet. v. 7 (fr. Ps. liv. (Iv.) '23) ; Lk. viii. 14; xxi. 34 ; w. gen. of the obj., care to be taken of, care for a thing, 2 Co. xi. 28 ; tjO aiCivos (τούτου), anxiety about things pertaining to this earthly life, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19. [(Horn. h. Merc), Hes., Pind., al.] • μ€ριμ.νάω, -ώ ; fut. μερίμνησα ; 1 aor. subj. 2 pers. plur. μ(ρίμνήσητ€ ; {μέριμνα); a. to be anxious; to be troulAed with cares: absol., Mt. vi. 27, 31 ; Lk. xii. 25; μη&(ν pep. be anxious about nothing, Pliil. iv. 6 ; with dat. of the thing for the interests of which one is solicit- ous [cf. W. § 31, 1 b.] : Tjj ψυχή, about sustaining life, τω σώματι, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22 ; πιρί Tivot, about a thing, Mt. vi. 28 ; Lk. xii. 26 ; fit την αϋριον, for the morrow, i. e. about what may be on the morrow, Mt. vi. 34; foil, by an indir. quest, πώς η τί, Mt. χ. 19; I^k. xii. 11 [here Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. WII br. η τί} ; joined with τυρβάζ^σθοί (θορυβάζ.) foil, by nfp\ πολλά, Lk. X. 41 [WH mrg. om.] b. to care for, look out for, (a, th'in^) ; to seek to promote one's interests : τά ΐαντη!, Mt. vi. 34 Rec. ; τα τοΰ κυρίου, 1 Co. vii. 32-34 ; τά τοΰ κόσμου, 1 Co. vii. 34 ; {αυτί)!, Mt. vi. 34 L Τ Tr WII (a usage unknown to Grk. writ., although they put a gen. after other verbs of carinr/ or providing/ for, as (■!τ^μfλe'tσβaι, φροντίζ€ΐν, npovof'iv, cf. Kruger § 47, 11 ; W. 205 (193) ; B. § 133, 25) ; τα π(ρί Tivos, Phil. ii. 20 ; Ίνα το αυτό imep αλλι^λωμ μΐριμνωσι τα μίλη, that the members may have the same care one for another, 1 Co. xii. 25. (Sept. for JXl, to be anxious, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 19; TJ"J to be disturbed, annoyed in spirit, 2 S. vii. 10 ; 1 Chr. xvii. 9 ; in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Soph, down.) [Co.MP. : προ-μιριμνάω.'}' (icpCs, -t8oi, η, (see μίροί), Sept. chiefly for pSn, HpSn, njo ; [fr. Antipho and Thuc. down] ; a part, i. q. \. a part as distinct from the whole: (rijs) MaxcSovt'os, Acts xvi. 12 [on Λvllich see Ilort in WH. App. ad loc.]. 2. an assiipud /tart, a portion, share : Lk. x. 42 (see αγαθοί, 2) ; ΐστι /loi pip'is ptra tivos, I have a portion, i. e. fellow- ship, ivith one, 2 Co. vi. 15. οίκ ΐστι μοί μ€ρΐ! η κληροί (V Ttw, Ι have neither part nor lot, take no share, in a thing. Acts viii. 21 ; ικανοϋν τίνα eis την μ(ρί8α TiM$r, to make one fit to obtain a share in a thing [i. e. partit. gen. J al. gen. of apposition], Col. i. 12.* μερισμοί, -oC, 6, (μίρίζω), a division, partition, (Plat., Polyb., Strab., [al.]) ; 1. a ilistriliulion ; plur. dis- tributions of various kinds : irveipaTos άγιου, gen. of the obj., Ileb. ii. 4. 2. a separation: ά;(μι μ^ρκτμοΰ ^Ιτυχ!]! κ- ττνιϋματοί, which many take actively : ' up to the dividing' i. e. so far as to cleave asunder or separate; but it is not easy to understand what the dividing of the 'soul' is. Hence it is more correct, I think, and more in accordance with the context, to take the Λvord pas- sively (just as other verbal subst. ending in pas are used, e. g. αγιασμό;, -nfipaapus), and translate even to the divi- sion, etc., i. e. to that most hidden spot, the dividing line between soul and spirit, where the one passes into the other, Heb. iv. 12 ; [cf. Siegfried, Fhilo von Alex. u. s. w. p. 325 sq.].* μερισ-τήΐ, -oD, ό, (μερίζω), a divider: of an inheritance, Lk. xii. 14. (Pollux [4, 176].)* μ<'ρο5, -ους, τά, (peipopai to share, receive one's due por- tion), [fr. Pind., Aeschyl., lidt. down], α /)nri; i.e. 1. η pari due or assigned to one, (Germ, .■inthcil) : άφαιριΐν TO μέρος Ttvot (gen. of pers.) από or ?κ rivus (gen. of the thing). Rev. xxii. 19; ίχαν μίρος (v with ilat. of the thing. Rev. XX. 6 ; μίρος ϊχ(ΐν μ(τά τίνος, (participation in the same thing, i. e.) to have pan (fellowship) with one, Jn. xiii. 8 ; hence, as sometimes in class. Grk. (Eur. Alt. 477 [474]), lol, dislini), assigned to one. Rev. xxi. 8; τιδΐναι TO μέρος τινός μ(τά τίνων, to appoint one his lot with cer- tain persons, Mt. .xxiv. 51 ; Lk. xii. 46. 2. one of the constituent parts of a whole; a. univ. : in a con- text where the whole and its parts are distinguished, Lk. xi. 36; Jn.xix. 23; Rev. xvi. 19; w. a gen. of the whole, Lk. .XV. 12 ; xxiv. 42 ; where it is evident from the con- text of what whole it is a part, Acts v. 2 ; Eph. iv. 16 : TO (V μέρος, sc. τοΰ συνιΒρίου, Acts .xxiii. 6 ; τοΰ μέρουί των Φαρισαίων, of that part of the Sanhedrin which con- sisted of Pharisees, Acts xxiii. 9 [not Lchm.] ; τα αίοη, w. gen. of a province or country, the divisions or regions ivhich make up the land or province, Mt. ii. 22 ; Acts iL 10; w. gen. of a city, the region belonging to a city, country around it, Mt. xv. 21; xvi. 13; Mk. viii. 10; τά άνωτ(ρικα μέρη, the upper districts (in tacit contrast with τά κατώτιρα, and with them forming one whole), Acts xix. 1 ; τά μέρη έκί'ινα, those regions (which are parts of the country just mentioned, i. e. Macedonia), Acts XX. 2 ; τά κατώτερα μέρη w. gen. of apposition, της yf r, Eph. iv. 9 (on which see κατώτίροι) ; fir τά δί^ιά μέρη τοΰ η-λοι'ου, i. e. into the parts (i. e. spots sc. of the lake) on the right side of the ship, Jn. xxi. 6. Adverbial phrase• μεσημβρία 401 μ€σο9 βι>ά μίροί (see ανά, 1), 1 Co. xiv. 27 ; κατο fupos, sever- ally, part by part, in detail, Heb. ix. 5 [see κατά, II. 3 a. y•] ; ^/pos η (ace. absol.) in pari, pnrthj, 1 Co. .xi. 18 (Thuc. 2, 64; 4. 'M) ; Isocr. p. 426 d.) ; άπο μ^ρου!, in part, i. e. somewhat, 2 Co. i. 14 ; in a measure, to some de- gree, ib. ii. 5 ; [Ro. xv. 24] ; as respects a part, Ro. -xi. 25 ; here and there, Ro. xv. 15; « μίρουν as respects indi- vidual persons and things, severally, individually, 1 Co. xii. 27; in part, partially, i. e. imperfectly, 1 Co. -xiii. 9, 12; TO CK μίρουί (opp. to το TtXtioj») [A. V. that which is in part'\ imperfect (Luth. well, das Sliick-wcrl-'), ibid. 10. [Green (Crit. Xote on 2 Co. i. 14) says "άπό μ. differs in Paul's usage from tx μ. in that the latter is a contrasted term in express opposition to the idea of a complete whole, the other being useil simply without such aim"; cf. Bnhdy. Syntax, p. 230 ; Meyer on 1 Co. xii. 27.] b. any particular, Germ. Stiick; (where the writer means to intimate that there are other matters, to be separated from that which he has specified) : t'v τώ pJpei τούτω, in this particular i. e. in reyard to this, in this respect, 1 Pet. iv. 16 R; 2 Co. iii. 10; ix. 3; w. a gen. of the thing. Col. ii. 16 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] ; τοΰτο το μίρο!, sc. rijs εργασίας ημών (branch of business). Acts .\i.x. 27, cf. 2.-..• μ<σ-ημβρία, -or, ή, (/if σοΓ and ήμίρα), fr. Hdt. down, mid- day [on the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (11.5)]; a. (as respects time) noon : Acts xxii. 6. b. (as re- spects locality) the south : Acts viii 26 [al. refer this also to a.; see κατά, II. 2].* μΐσ-ιτενω : I aor. ίμίσ'ιτίνσα ; (μισίτης [cf. W. p. 2S e.]); 1. lo act as mediator, betiveen litigating or covenanting parties ; trans, to accomplish something by interposing heliceen two parties, to mediate, (with aec. of the result) : την διύλυσικ, Polyb. 11, 34, 3 ; τάί (τυνθηκαι, Diod. 19, 71 ; Dion. Hal. 9, 59 ; [cf. Philo de plant. Xoe, ii. 2 fin.]. 2. as a μίσίτηι is a sponsor or surety (Jo- seph, antt. 4, 6, 7 ταντα 6μννντ€ς fXfyoi• κα\ τον 6f6v μίσί- την Ζ>ν ντησχνονντο ττοιονμΐνοι [cf. Philo de spec. legg. iii. 7 άοράτω δί πράγματι πάντως αόρατος μΐσιτ€ν(ΐ βίόί etc.]), so μ(σιτ(ΰω comes to signify to pledge one's self, gire surety: όρκω. lleb. vi. 17.' (teo-irqs, -ου, ό. (μίσοί), one who intervenes between two, either in order to make or restore peace and friend- ship, or to form a compact, or for ratifying a covenant ; a medium of communication, arbitrator, (Vulg. [and A. V.] mediator): ό /χ€σίτ;;Γ [generic art. cf. λΥ. § 18, 1 sub fin.], i. e. every mediator, whoever acts as mediator, ivos ουκ ίστι, does not belong to one party but to two or more. Gal. iii. 20. Used of Moses, as one who brought the commands of God to the people of Israel and acted as mediator with God on behalf of the people, ib. 19 (cf. Deut. V. 5 ; hence he is called μισίτη! και Βιαλλακτης by i'hilo also, vit. Moys. iii. § 19). Christ is called μια: 6fov K. ανθρώπων, since he interposed by his death and restored the harmony between God and man which human sin had broken, 1 Tim. ii. 5 ; also μfσ. διαθήκης, Heb. viii. 6 ; ix. 15 ; xii. 24. (Polyb. 28, 1 5. .S ; Diod. 4, S4; Philo de somn. i. § 22; Joseph, antt. 16, 2. 2; Plot. de Is. et Os. 46 ; once in Sept., Job ix. 33.) Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. X. 'Γ. p. 351 sqq.* (Μσ-0-νίκτιον, -ου, τό, (neut. of the adj. μεσονύκτιος in Find, et al., fr. μίσος and νύξ, νυκτός), midnight : /ircro- ννκτίου, at midnight [W. § 30, 11; B. § 132, 26], Mk. xiii. 3.5 [here Τ Tr WH ace. ; cf. W. 230 (215 sq.) ; B. § 131, 11]; Lk. xi. 5; κατά το μ. about midnight. Acts xvi. 25 ; μίχρι μ. until midnight, Acts xx. 7. (Sept. ; Hippocr., Aristot., Diod., Strabo, Lcian., Plut.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 53, [W. p. 23 c.].) * Μ6σ-οΐΓθταμ(α, -αϊ, ή, (fcm. of μεσοποτάμιος, -a, -ov, 8C. χώρα ; fr. μίσος and ποταμός), Mesopotamia, the name, not so nmch j)olitical as geographical (scarcely in use before the time of Alexander the Great), of a region in Asia, lying between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris (whence it took its name ; cf. Arrian. anab. Alex. 7, 7 ; Tac. ann. 6, 37; D;"}riJ DiX, Aram of the two rivers. Gen. xxiv. 10), bounded on the N. by the range of Taurus and on the S. by the Persian Gulf ; many Jews had settled in it (Joseph, antt. 12, 3, 4) : Acts ii. 9 ; vii. 2. [Cf. Socin in Encycl. Brit. ed. 9 s. v. ; Rawlinson, He- rodotus, vol. i. Essay ix.] * μί'σ-οϊ, -ij, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], middle, (Lat. medius, -a, -um) ; 1. as an adjective : μ(σης νυκτός, at mid- night, Mt. XXV. 6 ; μέσης ημέρας. Acts xxvi. 13 (acc. to Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 53, 54, 465, the better writ, said μι- σόν ημέρας, μισούσα ήμίρα, μεσημβρία) ; w. gen. : [e'lta- θητο ό ΐίίτρος μίσος αυτών, l.k. xxii. 55 (R G L iv /ΐί'σω)] ; μίσος υμών ΐστηκι [al. στήκ(ΐ], stands in the midst of you, Jn. i. 2i;, ( Plat, de rep. 1 p. 330 b. ; polit. p. 303 a.) ; ('σχίσβη μίσον, (the veil) was rent in the midst, Lk. xxiii. 45 [W. 131 (124) note]; ί\άκησ€ μίσος. Acts i. 18; ((σταύρωσαν) μίσον τόχ Ίησοΰν, Jn. .xi.x. 18. 2. the neut. TO μίσον or (without the art. in adverb, phrases, as δια μίσου, iv μίσω, cf. W. 1 23 (1 1 7) ; [cf. B. § 1 25, 6]) μίσον is used as a substantive; Sept. for Ijin (constr. state ^in), and i'^p.; the midst: άνά μίσον (see ανά, 1 [and added note below]) ; Sia μίσου (Tiro't), through the midst (.\m. v. 1 7; Jer. xliv. (xxxvii.) 4) : αυτών, through the midst of them, Lk. iv. 30; .In. viii. 59 [Rec] ; Σαμα• ριίας, Lk. xvii. 11 [R G, but LTTrWH διά μίσον (see δια, Β. I.) ; others take the phrase here in the sense of beticeen (Xen. an. 1, 4, 4; Aristot. de anim. 2, 11 vol. i. p. 423', 12; see L. and S. s. v. IIL 1 d.); cf. Meyer ed. Weiss in loc. and added note below] ; tls τό μίσον, into the midst, i. e., acc. to the context, either the mid- dle of a room or the midst of those assembled in it: Mk. iii. 3; xiv. GO Rec; Lk. iv. 35; v. 19; vi. 8; Jn. XX. 19, 26; n'y μίσον (cf. Germ, miltenhin), Mk. xiv. 60 GLTTr WII; ίν τώ μίσω, in the middle of the apart- ment or before the guests, Mt. xiv. 6 ; ev μίσω, in the midst of the place spoken of. Jn. viii. 3, 9 ; in the middle of the room, before all, .\cts iv. 7 ; w. gen. of place, Rev. ii. 7 Rec. ; Lk. xxi. 21 ; (i. q. Germ, miltenauf) τηι π\ατ(ίας, Rev. xxii. 2 [but see below] ; add, Lk. xxii. 55'; Acts xvii. 22 ; riyr θαΧάσσης, in the midst (of the surface of) tlie sea, Alk. vi. 47; w. gen. plur. in the midsl of, amongst : w. gen. of things, JIt. x. 16 ; Lk. viii 7 ; x.3; μΐο οτονχον 402 μρτα Rev. i. 13 ; ii. 1 ; w. gen. of pers., Mt. xviii. 2 ; Mk. ix. 36; Lk. ii. 16; x.xii. 55" [here Τ Tr WII fieVof ; seel above]; x.xiv. 36 ; Acts i. 15; ii. '.'2; xxvii. 21 ; Rev. v. 6 \^Ί (see below); vi. 6]; trop. ev μίσω αύτων (!μι, I am present with them by my divine ])uwer, Mt. .xviii. 20 ; w. gen. of a collective noun, Phil. ii. 15 11 [see 3 below] ; Heb. ii. 12; ΛvheΓe association or intercourse is the topic, equiv. to anion ff, in intercourse with : Lk. xxii. 27; 1 Th. ii. 7. i;i the 7nitlst of, i. e. in the space within, τοΰ θρόνου (which must be conceived of as ha^•ing a semicircular shape) : Rev. iv. 6 ; v. 6 ['?] where ef. De ^Vette and Bleek ; [but De AVette's note on v. 6 runs " A nd I saw between the throne anil the four liviny creatures and the elders (i. e. in the vacant space between the throne and the living creatures [on one side] and elders [on the other side], accordingly nearest the throne " etc.) ; ava μίσον in vii. 1 7 also he interprets in the same way ; fur- ther see xxii. 2; cf. Kliefolh, Com. vol. ii. p. 40. For €v μίσω in this sense see Xen. an. 2, 2, 3 ; 2, 4, 17. 21 ; 5, 2, 27, etc.; llab. lii. 2; άνίί μίσον I'olyb. 5, 55, 7; often in Aristot. (see Bonitz's index s. v. μίσος) ; Num. .\vi. 48 ; Deut. v. 5 ; Josh. xxii. 25 ; Judg. xv. 4 ; 1 K. v. 12 ; Ezek. xlvii. 18; xlviii. 22; cf. Gen. i. 4; see Meyer on 1 Co. vi. 5 ; cf. ανά, 1]. κατά μέσον της νυκτός, about midnight. Acts x.xvii. 27 [see κατά, II. 2]. (κ τοΰ μίσου, like the Lat. e medio, i. e. out of the way, out of sii/ht : αίρω Tt, to take out of the way, to abolish. Col. ii. 14 [Plut. de curiositate 9 ; Is. Ivii. 2] ; γίνομαι c'k μέσου, to be taken out of the way, to disappear, 2 Th. ii. 7 ; w. gen. of pers., fit μϊσου τίνων, from the society or company of, out from amonij: Mt. xiii. 49; Acts -xvii. 33; ,\xiii. 10; 1 Co. V. 2; 2 Co. vi. 17, (Ex. xxxi. 14; Xum. xiv. 44 Alex.). 3. the neut. μέσον is used adverbially with a gen., in the midst q/" any thing : ην μέσον της θαλάσσης, ]\lt. -xiv. 24 [otherwise Trtxt. WH txt. ; yet cf. W. § 54, 6] ([so Exod. xiv. 27]; Τίων yap μέσον (ivai της ^ϊωνίης, Hdt. 7, 170) ; γενεάς σκο\ιάς, Phil. ii. 15 LTTrWH (της ημέρας, the middle of the day, Sus. 7 Theodot.); cf. B. 123 (107 sq.), [cf. 319 (274) ; W. as above].* μκσότοιχον, -ου, τό, (μέσος, and τοίχος the wall of a house), a partition-wall : το μ. τοΰ φραγμού (i. e. τονφραγ- μον TOf μεσάτοιχον όντα [Α. V. the middle wall of parti- tion ; W. § 59, 8 a.]), Eph. ii. 14. (Only once besides, and that too in the masc. : τον της ηδονής κ. αρετής μεσά- τοιχον, Eratosth. ap. Athen. 7 p. 281 d.) * μίσουράνημα, -ror, τό, (fr. μεσουρανέω; the sun is said μεσουρανε'ιν ίο he in mid-heaven, when it has reached the meridian), mid-heaven, the hif/hcst point in the heavens, which the sun occupies at noon, where what is done can be seen and heard by all: Rev. viii. 13 (cf. Dusterdieck ad loc.) ; xiv. 6 ; xix. 1 7. (Manetho, Plut., Sext. Emp.) * μεσόω; (μέσος); Ιο be in the miildle, he midway: της ίορτης μεσοΰσης [where a few codd. μεσαζούσης (νυκτός μεσαζ. Sap. .xviii. 14)], when it was the midst of the feast, tlie feast half-spent, Jn. vii. 14 (μεσούσης της νυκτός, Ex. xii. 29; Judith xii. 5; της ημέρας, Nell. viii. 3 [Aid., Compl.]; in Crk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; θέρους μεσοϋντος, Thuc. 6, 30).* Μίσσ-ίοϊ, -ου [cf. Β. IS (16)], ό, Messiah; Chald. Xn'iyo, Ilebr. ΓΓί^"?» i• q• Grk. χριστός, q. v. : Jn. i. 41 (42); iv. 2J. Cf. Delitzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol., 1876, p. 603; \_Lagarde, Psalt. vers. Memphit., 1875, p. vii. On the general subject see esp. Abbot's sup[>lement to art. Messiah in B. D. Am. ed. and ro£E. added by Oretli (cf. Schaff-Herzog) in Herzog 2 s. v. to Oehler's art.] * μ€€Γτ05, η, -Of, fr. Horn. [i. e. Epigr.] down, Sept. for ithOtfull; w. gen. of the thing: prop., Jn. xix. 29; xxi. 11; Jas. iii. 8; trop. in reference to persons, whose minds are as it were filled with thoughts and emotions, either good or bad, Mt. xxiii. 28; llo. i. 29; xv. 14; 2 Pet. ii. 14; Jas. iii. 17, (Prov. vi. 34).* μεστόω,-ώ; (μεστός); Ιο f II, f 11 full: γΧευκους μεμεστίύ- μένος. Acts ii. 13. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., al. ; 3 Mace. V. 1, 10.)• μ€τά, [on its neglect of elision before proper names be- ginning with a vowel, and before sundry other words (at least in Tdf.'s text) see Tdf. Proleg. p. 95 ; cf. WH. Intr. p. 146''; λν. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10], a preposition, akin to μέσος (as Germ. WiiV to Mitte, mitten) and hence prop, in the 7nidst of, amid, denoting association, union, accom- paniment ; [but some recent etymologists doubt its kinship to μέσος ; some connect it rather with άμα. Germ, sammt, cf. Curtius § 212; Vanicekp. 972]. It takes the gen. and ace. (in the Grk. poets also the dat.). [On the distinc- tion between μετά and συν, see σύν, init.] I. with the Genitive (Se]>t. for ns, Oy, "ΜΊΚ, etc.), among, with, [cf. W. 376 (352) sq.] ; 1. amid, among ; a. prop. : μετά των νεκρών, among the dead, Lk. x.xiv. 5 (μετά νεκρών κείσομαι, Eur. Hec. 209 ; θάψετε με μετάτών πατέρων μου, (xen. xli.x. 29 Sept.; μετά ζώντων είναι, to be among the living. Soph. Phil. 1312) ; Xo-yt- ζεηθαι μετά ανόμων, to be reckoned, numbered, among transgressors, Mk. xv. 28 [G Τ WH om. Tr br. the vs.] and Lk. xxii. 37, fr. Is. liii. 12 (where Sept. iv άνόμοις) ; μετά τέύν θηρίων είναι, Mk. i. 13 ; γογγυζειν μετ άλΧηλων, Jn. vi. 43 ; σκηνή τοΰ θεοΰ μετά τ. ανθρώπων. Rev. xxi. 3 ; add, Mt. xxiv. 51 ; .xxvi. 58; Mk. xiv. 54; Lk. xii. 46 ; .In. xviii. 5, 18; Acts i. 26, etc. b. trop.: μετά 5ιογμών, amid persecutions, Mk. x. 30 (μετά κινδύνων, amid perils, Thuc. 1, 18); ήάγάπη με& ημών, love among us, mutual love, 1 Jn. iv. 17 [al. understand μεθ' ημών here of the sphere or abode, and connect it with the verb; cf. De \Vette,orHuther,orWestcott,inloc.]. Hence used 2. of association and companionship, with (Lat. cum; Germ, mil, often also bei); a. after verbs of going, coming, departing, remaining, etc., w. the gen. of the associate or companion: Mt. xx. 20; xxvi. 36 ; Mk. i. 29 ; iii. 7 ; xi. 1 1 ; xiv. 1 7 ; Lk. vi. 1 7 : xiv. 31 ; Jn. iii. 22; xi. 54; Gal. ii. 1 ; Jesus the Mes- siah it is said will come hereafter μετά των αγγέλων, Mt. xvi. 27; Mk. viii. 38; 1 Th. iii. 13 ; 2 Th. i. 7 ; on the other hand, w. the gen. of the pers. to whom one joins himself as a companion : Mt. v. 41 ; Mk. v. 24 ; Lk. ii. 51 ; Rev. .xxii. 1 2 ; nyyfXoi μετ αυτοϋ, Mt. xxv. 31 ; μττά τίνος, contextually i. q. with one as leader, Mt. xxv. 10; μ€τα 403 μετά xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Acts vii. 45. πιριηατ^Ίν μιτά Ttvo9, to associate with one as his follower and adherent, Jn. vi. 66 ; ■γίνομιιι μ. nvos, to come into fellowship and intercourse with, become associated with, one: Jlk. xvi. 10; Acts vii. 38; ix. 19; xx. 18. παραΚαμβάνίΐν τίνα μίβ" f'auToD, to take with or to one's self as an attend- ant or companion: Mt. xii. 45; xviii. 16; Mk. .xiv. 33; Syety, 2 Tim. iv. 1 1 ; ΐχαν μ(& ίαντοϋ, to have with one's self: τινά, Jit. xv. 30; xxvi. 11; Mk. ii. 19; xiv. 7; Jn. xii. 8; τί, Mk. viii. 14; 'Καμβάναν, Mt. xxv. 3; άκο- "KovSeLv μίτά nvos, see άκολονθίω, 1 and 2, [cf. W. 23S sq. (219)]. b. f'l/ai μ(τά nvos is used in various senses, o. prop, of those who associate with one and accompany him wherever he goes : in ivhich sense the disciples of Jesus are said to be (or to have been) with him, Mk. iii. 14; Mt. .xxvi. 69, 71 ; Lk. xxii. 59, cf. Mk. v. 18 ; with άπ άρχη! added, Jn. xv. 27 ; of those who at a particular time associate with one or accompany him anywhere, Mt. v. 25 ; Jn. iii. 26 ; vs.. 40 ; xii. 1 7 ; xx. 24, 26 ; 2 Tim. iv. 11 ; sometimes the ptcp. ων, οντά, etc., must be added mentally : Mt. xxvi. 51 ; Mk. ix. 8 ; Jn. xviii. 26 ; oi (όντα) μιτά nvos, his attendants or com- panions, Mt. xii. 4 ; Mk. ii. 25 ; Lk. vi. 3 ; Acts xx. 34 ; sc. ovTfs, Tit. iii. 15. Jesus says that he is or has been with his disciples, .Jn. .\iii. 33 ; xiv. 9 ; and that, to ad- vise and help them, .Jn. xvi. 4 ; Jit. xvii. 1 7, (Mk. ix. 19 and Lk. ix. 41 itpos vpas), even as one whom they could be said to have with them, Mt. ix. lo ; Lk. v. 34 ; just as he in turn desires that his disciples may liereafter be with himself, Jn. .xvii. 24. ships also are said /o be tvith one who is travelling by vessel, i. e. to attend him, Mk. iv. 36. β. trop. the phrase [ίο he ivilh, see b.] is used of God, if he is present to guide and help one : Jn. iii. 2; viii. 29; xvi. 32; Acts vii. 9; x. 3S; 2Co. xiii. 11; Phil, iv. 9 ; with dvai omitted, Jit. i. 23 : Lk. i. 28 ; Ro. xv. 33 ; here belongs οσα ΐττοΐησίν ό Ofoi μ€τ αυτών sc. ων, by being present with them by his divine assistance [cf. W. 376 (353); Green p. 21fi"], Acts .xiv. 27; .\v. 4, [cf. h. below] ; and conversely, πλήρωσαν μ( tlφpuσϋvηs μιτα Toi προσώπου σου sc. όντα, i. e. being in thy presence [yet cf. W. 376 (352) note], Acts ii. 23 fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11 ; η χ(\ρ κυρίου is used as a substitute for God himself (by a Hebraism [see χίίρ, sub fin.]) in Lk. i. 66 ; Acts xi. 21 ; of Christ, who is to be present with his followers by his divine power and aid: Mt. x.xviii. 20; Acts xviii. 10, (fii- vdv μίτά is used of the Holy Spirit as a perpetual helper, Jn. xiv. 16 R G) ; at the close of the Epistles, the writers pray that there may be with the readers (i. e. always present to help them) — ό flfof, 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; — ό (tu/jios, 2 Th. iii. 16 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 ; — ή χάρΐϊ τοϋ κ. Ίησοΰ Χρ. (where Ιστω must be supplied [cf . W. § 64, 2 b. ; B. § 1 29, 22]), Ro. .\vi. 20, 24 [R G] ; 1 Co. xvi. 23 ; 2 Co. xiii. IS (14); Gal.vi.lS; Phil.iv.23; lTh.v.28; 2Th.iii.l8; Philem. 25 ; Rev. xxii. 21 ; — ή χάρκ simply, Eph. vi. 24 ; Col. iv. 18; iTim. vi. 21 (22); Tit. iii. 15; lleb. xiii. 25; 2 Jn. 3 ; — ή αγάπη μου, 1 Co. xvi. 24 ; the same phrase is used also of truth, compared to a guide, 2 Jn. 2. γ. opp. to flvai κατά rivoc, to be with one i. e. on one's side: Mt. xii. 30; Lk. xi. 23, (and often in class. Grk.); simi- larly μίναν μ€τά nvos, to side with one steadfastly, 1 .In. ii. 19. c. with the gen. of the person who is another's associate either in acting or in his experiences ; so after verbs of eating, drinking, supping, etc. : Mt. viii. 11 ; ix. 11; xxiv. 49; xxvi. 18, 23, 29; Mk. xiv. 18, 20; Lk. v. 30; vii. 36; .xxii. 11, 15; .x.xiv.30; Jn.xiii.18; Gal. ii. 12; Rev. iii. 20, etc. ; ypnyop('iv,yh.xxvi.3S,40; χαίρίΐν, κ\αί€ίν, Ro. xii. 15; (ΰφραίνισθαι, Ro. .xv. 10; παροικΰν, lleb. xi. 9; Sov\fi(iv, Gal. iv. 2.3; βασι\€ί(ΐν, Rev. xx. 4, 6 ; ζην, Lk. ii. 3i: ; άποθνησκιιν, .Jn. .xi. 16 ; βαΚΚισθαι tit Tijf yiyi». Rev. xii. 9; (tXr/poi/opfiv, Gal. iv. 30 ; auvayfiv, Tilt. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23, and other exx. d. with a gen. of the pers. with whom one (of two) does anything mutually or by turns : so after anvaipfiv Xoyov, to make a reckon- ing, settle accounts, Mt. xviii. 23 ; xxv. 19 ; συνάγίσθαι, Mt. xxviii. 1 2 ; Jn. xviii. 2 ; συμβοϋ\ιον iroiflv, Mk. iii. 6 ; XaXfif (see λαλί'ω, 5) ; σνλλαλίίι/, Mt. .xvii. 3 ; Acts xxv, 1 2 ; poixfitiv, Rev. ii. 22 ; μοΧϋνισθαι, Rev. xiv. 4 ; nof^ vdeiv. Rev. xvii. 2; xviii. 3, 9 ; μιρίζομαι, Lk. xii. 13; after verbs of disputing, waging Λvar, contend- ing at law: ποΚιμύν, Rev. ii. 16; xii. 7 (where Rec. κατά); xiii. 4; xvii. 14, (so for "3 D;• DnSj, 1 S. xvii. 33; I K. xii. 24, a usage foreign to the native Greeks, who say πο\(μ(Ίν τικι, also πp6s τίνα, ιπί nva. Ιο wage war ayauist one ; but TroXepeiv μ€τά tivos, to wage war with one as an ally, in conjunction with, Thuc. 1, 18 ; Xen. Hell. 7,1,27; [cf. B. § 133, 8; W. § 28, 1; 214 (201) ; 406 (379) note]); πόλίμον ποίίίΐ'. Rev. xi. 7; xii. 17; xiii. 7; xix. 19, (so in Lat. bellare cum etc. Cic. Verr. 2,4,33; helium gerere, Cic. de divinat. 1, 46) ; ζήτησκ iyivrro, Jn. iii. 25 ; ζητΰν, Jn. .xvi. 19 ; κρίνισθαι, κρίματα ΐχ^ιν, 1 Co. vi. 6 sq. ; after verbs and phrases which indicate mutual inclinations and pursuits, the entering into agreement or relations with, etc. ; as (Ιρηνήαν, ιΐρήνην btuiKtiv, Ro. xii. 18; 2Tim. ii. 22; Heb. xii. 14; φι'λοΓ, Lk. xxxiii. 12 ; συμφωνΰν, Mt. XX. 2 ; μ(ρ'ί( μ(τά nvos, 2 Co. vi. 15 ; ίχ(ΐν μίρο!, Jn. xiii. 8 ; airyKaTuflfcrif, 2 Co. vi. 16 ; (toii/e- vtav (χ(ίν, 1 Jn. i. 3, 6 sq. ; αίτια (see the word, 3), Mt. xix. 10. e. of divers other associations of persons or tilings; — where the action or condition expressed by the verb refers to persons or things besides those specified by the dat. or ace. (somewhat rare in Grk. auth., as ίσχυν rt και κάλλο; μ€τά iytctas \αμβάΐ'(ΐν, Plat. rep. 9, p. 591 b. [ef. W. § 47, h.]) : «Xf (Rec. ilpov) τέ πα.διΌι- μίτά yiapias, Mt. ii. 11; άνταποδονναι . . . ίμΐν . . . μ(6' ημών, 2 Th. i. 6 sq. ; after ίκδί'χίσ^ιιι, 1 Co. xvi. 1 1 ; after verbs of sending, Mt. xxii. 16; 2Co. viii. 18. άγάττη μ(τα πί(rτeωs, Lph. vi. 23 ; f'v πι'οτίΐ . . . μίτά σωφpoσϋvηs, I Tim. ii. 15; η (Ισίβιια μιτίι airapKeias, 1 Tim. vi. 6; in this way the term which follows is associated as sec- ondary with its predecessor as primary ; but when και stands between them they are co-ordinated. Col. i. II ; 1 Tim. i. 14. of mingling one thing with another, μίγννμί Tc μ(τά nvos (in class, auth. ri rtw [cf. B. § 133, 8]) : Lk. xiii. 1 ; pass. Mt. xxvii. 34. f. with the gen. of mental feelings desires and emotions, of bodily move- ments, and of other acts which are so to speak the at• μ€Τα 404 μίταΒίΒωμ* tcndants of what is done or occurs : so tliat in this way the charac te rist ic of the action or occurrence is de- scribed, — ivliicli in most cases can be expressed by a cognate adverb or ])articiple [cf. W. u. s.] : μ(τα alSois, 1 Tim. ii. 9; Ilcb. xii. 28 [Rec.]; αίσχίνηί, \M. xiv. 9 ; ησνχίϋί, 2 Th. iii. 12; χαραι, Mt. xiii. '20; Ml<. iv. 16; 1Λ. viii. 13; X. 17; xxiv. 52; Phil. ii. 2:i ; 1 Th. i. 6 ; Heb. X. 34 ; ττρηθνμίαί^ Acts xvii. 1 1 ; φόβου κ. τρόμου^ - Co. vii. 15; Eph. vi. .'>; Phil. ii. 12; φόβου κ- χαράς, ^It. x.x viii. 8 ; πραυτητοί κ• φόβου, 1 Pet. iii. 1 G ( 1 ό) ; παρρησίας, Acts ii. 29; iv. 2'J, 31 ; xxviii. 31 ; Heb. iv. Kj ; (Ιχαρί- στΊας, Acts xxiv. 3 ; Pliil. iv. 6 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3 sq. ; άλη- θινης KapSias, Heb. x. '22; ταπ(ΐνοφροσίνης κτΚ., Eph. iv. 2; Acts XX. 19; opyr)!, Mk. iii. .5; elvo'iai, Eph. vi. 7 ; βίας. Acts v. 2(i ; xxiv. 7 Rec. ; μιτίι δακρύων, Λνΐΐΐι tears, Mk.i.x. 24 [RGWH (rejected) mrg.]; Ileb.v. 7; xii. 17, (Plat. apol. p. 34 c); (ίρήνης. Acts xv. 33 ; Ileb. xi. „1 ; ϊτηθισίως των χάρων, 1 Tim. iv. 14 [W. u. s.] ; φωνής μ(γά- λης, Lk. xvii. 15 ; νηστιιων. Acts .xiv. 23 ; όρκου ur ορκωμο- σίας, Mt. xiv. 7; xxvi. 72; Ileb. vii. 21 ; iopifjou, .Vets xxiv. 18; παρακλήσ€ως, 2 Co. viii. 4; παρατηρήσ(ως, Lk. xvii. 20; σπουΒης, Wk. vi. 2.5; Lk. i. 39; ϋβρ(ως κ. ζημίας. Acts xxvii. 10; φαντασίας, xxv. 23; άφροϊι, I-,k. ix. 39; to this head may be referred ptrci κουστωδίας, posting the guard, Mt. xxvii. 6i) [so W. (1. c.) et al. (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; others ' in company with the guard ' ; cf. Jas. Morison ad loc; Green p. 218]. g. after verbs of coming, depart- ing, sending, with gen. of the thing Λνϊΐΐι wliich one is fur- nished or equipped : μιτα δόξης κ. δυνάμεως, Mt. xxiv. 30 ; Mk. xiii. 26; Lk. xxi. 27; ίξουσίας κ- ΐπιτροπής. Acts xxvi. 1 2 ; μαχαιρών κ. ξύλων. .Mt. xxvi. 47, 55 ; Mk. xiv. 43, 48; Lk. xxii. 5.'; φανών κ. όπλων. .In. xviii. 3; μ(τα σάλπιγγος, Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. § 132, 10]. where an in- strumental dat. might have been used [cf. W. §31,8 d.], (ΐίτά βραχίονας ΰψηλοϋ (ξάγίΐν τινά. Acts xiii. 1 7. h. in imitation of the Hebr. ; ίλίος ποίίίκ pera τίνος, to show mercy toward one, and μ(-^αλύν(ΐν ίλ. μ. τ. to magnify, show great, mercy toward one : see το ίλιος, 1. To this head many refer όσα ΐποίησιν ό θ(ας μ(Τ αυτιών, Acts .xiv. 27 ; XV. 4, but see above, 2 b. β. H. with the Accusative [\V.§ 49, f.]; 1. prop. inin the miildle of, into the midst of, amonq, after verbs of coming, bringing, moving; so esp. in Horn. 2. it denotes (fol I oivin θ(1ί, sent for. Acts x. 29*. Mid. to send afer for one's self, rnwii to be sent for: Acts x. 5, 29'; xi. 13; [xx. 1 TTrWH]; xxiv. 24, 26; foU. by eir, w. an ace. of place, Acts X. 22; xxv. 3. (Gen. xxvii. 45; Num. xxiii. 7 ; 2 Mace. xv. 31 ; 4 Mace. xii. 3, 6 ; in prof, auth. fr. Hdt. down.) * |Μτα-<Γτρ^ψ<ι> : 1 aor. inf. μιταστρίψαι ; Pass., 2 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, μιταστραφήτω ; 2 f ut. μ(ταστραφησο- μαι ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for 'IJijri ; to turn about, turn around, [cf. μ(τά, III. 2] : τι t's η [to turn one thing into another], pass., Acts ii. 20 (fr. Joel ii. 31); Jas. iv. 9 [cf. B. 52 (46) ; (WII txt. μίτατρ/π-ω, q. v.)] ; i. q. to pervert, corrupt, τι (Sir. xi. .il ; Aristot. rhet. 1, 16, 24 [cf. 30 and 3, 11, 6]) : Gal. i. 7.* μ€τα.^τχηματΓξω : fut. μfτaσχημaτίσω [cf. B. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. μ(τ( σχημάτισα'. Mid. pres. μετασχηματίζομαι', to chan(/c the f (jure of, to transform, [see μετά, IIL 2J : τί, Phil. iii. 21 [see below]; mid. foil, by tif τίνα, to trans- form one's self into some one, to assume one's appearance, 2 Co. xi. 13 sq. ; foil, by ω: tis, so as to have the appear- ance of someone, 2 Co. xi. 15; μιτασχηματίζω τι ds nva, to shape one's discourse so as to transfer to one's self what holds true of the whole class to which one belongs, i. e. so as to illustrate by ivhat one says of himself what holds true of all : 1 Co. iv. 6, where the meaning is, ' by what I have said of myself and Apollos, I have shown what liolds true of all Christian teachers.' (4 Mace. ix. 22; Plat. legg. 10 p. 903 e. ; [Aristot. de caelo 3, 1 p. 298S 31, etc.]; Joseph, antt. 7, 10, 5; 8, 11, 1; Plut. Ages. 14; def. orac. c. 30; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11]; Sext. Empir. 10, p. 688 ed. Fabric, [p. 542, 23 ed. Bekk.].)• [Syx. μεταμορφόω, μετασχηματίζω: (cf. Phil. iii. 21) " μετασχημ. wuiilil Iiere refer to the transient condition /iom wliiuli, μεταμορφ. to the permanent state to which, the change takes place. Abp. Trench [N. T. Syn. § Ixx.], however, sup- poses that μετασχημ. is here preferred to μεταμορφ. as ex- pressing ' transition but uo absolute solution of continuity ', the spiritual body beiug developed from the natural, as the butterfly from the caterpillar" (Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 'De- tached Note ' p. 131). See μορψίι, fin.] μ€τα-τ£θημι ; 1 aor. μετίθηκα ; pres. mid. μετατίθεμαι ; 1 aor. pass, μετετέθην ; to transpose (two things, one of \vhich is put in place of the other, [see μ€τά, III. 2]) ; i. e. 1. to transfer: τινά foil, by els w. ace. of place, pass., Acts vii. 16; without mention of the place, it being well known to the readers, Heb. xi. 5 (Gen. v. 24 ; Sir. xliv. 16, cf. Sap. iv. 10). 2. to change (Hdt. 5, 68); pass, of an office the mode of conferring which is changed, Heb. vii. 12; ri eit τ(, to turn one thing into another (τίνα (is τττηνην φΰσιν, Anth. 11, 367, 2) ; figura- ti\ely, την . . ■ χάριν ft'r άσέλγειαν, to pervert the grace of God to license, i. e. to seek from the grace of (iod an argument in defence of licentiousness, Jude 4 [cf. Huther in loc.]. 3. pass, or [more commonly] mid., to transfer one's self or suffer one's self to be transferred, i. e. to go or pass over: από τιι/οί fts τί, to fall away or desert from one person or thing to another. Gal. i. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii. 24; Polyb. 5, 111, 8; 26, 2, 6 ; Diod. 11, 4; [6 μεταθεμένοι, turncoat, Diog. Laert. 7, 166 cf. 37; Athen. 7, 281 d.]).* [μ6τα-τρ€'•π•ω : 2 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing. μ(τατρα• πήτω; Ιο turn about, fig. to transmute: Jas. iv. 9 WH txt. From Hom. down; but "seems not to have been used in Attic" (L. and S.).•] μ«τ-ίΐΓ€ΐτο, adv., fr. Hom. down, aferwards, after that: Heb. xii. 17. (Judith ix. 5 ; 3 Mace. iii. 24.) • μίτ-ί'χω; 2 aor. μετέσχον; pf. μετεσχηκα', lO he 0Ϊ become partaker ; to partake : της ίλπίδος αυτόν, of the thing hoped for, 1 Co. ix. 10 Rec, but GLTTrWH μ,ΐΤίωρίζω 407 μετριω<; have rightly restored tV Λπίδι τοϋ μίτίχίΐν, in hope of partaking (of the harvest) ; with a gen. of the thing added, 1 Co. ix. 12; x. 21 ; Heb. ii. 14; φυλή: irepat, to belong to another tribe, be of another tribe, Heb. vii. 13; sc. τήί τροφής, to partake of, eat, 1 Co. x. 30; ya- λακτοΓ, to partake of, feed on, milk, Ileb. v. 13; ex τοϋ (voi άρτου sc. Ti or nvoi (see ex, I. 2 b.), 1 Co. x. 17; cf. B. § 132,8; [W. §§ 28, 1; 30,8 a.].• μετ-εωρ(ζω: [pres. impv. pass. 2 pers. plur. μίτίωρί- ζ(σθΐ; (see below)]; (fr. μετέωρος in mid-air, hiyli; raised on high ; metaph. a. elated with hope, Diod. 13, 46 ; hfly, proud, Polyb. 3, 82, 2; 16, 21, 2 ; Sept. Is. v. 15. b. wavering in mind, unsteady, doubtful, in sus- pense: Polyb. 24, 10, 11 ; Joseph, antt. 8, 8, 2; b. j. 4, 2, 5 ; Cic. ad Att. 5, 1 1, 5 ; 15, 14 ; hence μιτ^ωρίζω) ; 1. prop, to raise on high (as ναΐιν ds το ntXayot, to put a, ship [out to sea] up upon the deep, Lat. propellere in allum, Philostr. v. Ap. G, 12, 3 [cf. Thuc. 8, 16, 2] ; το ϊρυμα, to raise fortifications, Thuc. 4, 90) : ίαυτόν, of birds, Ael. h. a. 11, 33; pass, μιτιωριζίσθαι η καπνίιν ή κονιορτόν, Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 5 ; of the wind, άνΐμος ζηροί μ(τ(ωρισθ('ί!, Arstph. nub. 404 ; and many other ex.x. also in prof. auth. ; in Sept. cf. Mic. iv. 1 ; Ezek. .\. 16 ; Obad. 4. 2. metaph. a. to lift up one's soul, raise his spirits; to buoy up with hope; to inflate with pride : Polyb. 26, 5, 4 ; 24, 3, 6 etc. ; joined with φυσαν, Dem. p. 169, 23; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 35; [quis rer. div. her. §§ 14, 54 ; cong. erud. grat. § 23] ; pass, to be elated ; to take on airs, be puffed up with pride : Arstph. av. 1 44 7 ; often in Polyb. ; Diod. 11, 32, 41 ; 16, 18 etc. ; Ps. cxxx. (cxxxi.) 1 ; 2 Mace. vii. 34 ; with the addition of την Siavoiav, V. 1 7. Hence μή μ(τ(α>ρΙζ(σθ(, Lk. -xii. 29, some (following the Vulg. nolite in sublime tolli) think should be interpreted, do not exalt yourselves, do not seek great things, {Luth. fahret nicht hoch her) ; but this explanation does not suit the preceding context. b. by a meta- phor taken from ships that are tossed about on the deep by winds and waves, to cause one to waver or fluctuate in mind, Polyb. 5, 70, 10 ; to agitate or harass with cares; to render anxious : Philo de monarch. § 6 ; Schol. ad Soph. Oed. Tyr. 914 ; ad Eur. Or. 1537 ; hence Lk. xii. 29 agreeably to its connection is best explained, neither be ye anxious, or and waver not between hope and fear [A. V. neither be ye of doubtful mind (with mrg. Or, live not in careful suspense)]. Kuinoel on Lk. 1. c. discusses the word at length ; and numerous exx. from Philo are given in Loesner, Observv. p. 115 sqq.* IxcToiKecrta, -as, ή, (for the better form μιτοίκησίϊ, fr. μ(τοικίω [cf. W. 24 (23)]), a removal from one abode to another, esp. a forced removal: with the addition Ba- βνΚωνο! (on this gen. cf. W. § 30, 2 a.) said of the Baby- lonian exile, Jit. i. 11 sq. 17. (Sept. for vhl i. e. mi- gration, esp. into captivity ; of the Babylonian exile, 2 K. xxiv. 16 ; 1 Chr. v. 22 ; Ezek. xii. II; for niSj, Obad. 20; Nah. iii. 10. Elsewh. only in Anthol. 7, 731, 6.) * μίτ-οικίζω: fut. (Attic) μ(τοικιώ [cf. B. 37 (32); W. § 13, 1 c] ; 1 aor. μ^τώκισα ; to transfer settlers ; to cause to remove into another land [see μ^τά, III. 2] : τινά foU. by els w. ace. of place. Acts vii. 4 ; tneKtwa w. gen. of place (Amos v. 27), Acts vii. 43. (Thuc. 1,12; Arstph., Aris- tot., Philo, [Joseph, c. Ap. I, 19, 3], Plut., Ael.; Sept. several times for nSjn.) ' μ£τοχή, -ης, ή, (μίτίχω), (Vulg. participatio) ; a sharing, communion, fellowship : 2 Co. vi. 14. (Ps. cxxi. (cx-xii.) 3 ; Hdt., Anthol., Plut., al.) * μ«'τοχθ5, -OK, (μ(Τ(^ω); 1. sharing in, partaking of w. gen. of the thing [W. § 30, 8 a.] ; Heb. iii. 1 ; vi. 4 ; xii. 8 ; Toil Χριστού, of his mind, and of the salvation pro- cured by him, Ileb. iii. 14 ; cf. Bleek ad loc. 2. a partner (in a work, office, dignity) : Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8) ; Lk. v. 7. (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) * μ€τρ€ω, -ω ; 1 aor. ίμΐτρησα ; 1 fut. pass, μςτρηθήσομαι ; {μίτρον) ; fr. Horn. Od. 3, 1 79 down ; Sept. several times for Tio ; to measure; i. e. 1. to measure out or otf, a. prop, any space or distance with a measurer's reed or rule: τόκ ι/αόι», τήΐ'ανλήΐ', etc.. Rev. xi. 2; xxi. 15, 17 ; with τω κάΚάμω added. Rev. xxi. 16 ; ev αΙτω, i. e. τώ καλά/χω. Rev. xi. 1. b. mulaph. to judge according to any rule or standard, to estimate ; iv ω μίτρω μ(τρ(Ίτ(, by what standard ye measure (others) [but the instru- mental iv seems to point to a measure of capacity; cf. W. 38s (363) ; B. § 133, 19. On the proverb see fur- ther below], Mt. vii. 2 ; Mk. iv. 24 ; pass, to be judged, estimated, ibid. ; μίτρίϊν ίαυτον iv ίαυτω, to measure one's self by one's self, to derive from one's self the standard by wlaich one estimates one's self, 2 Co. x. 12 [cf. W. § 31, 8 fin.]. 2. to measure to, mete out to, i. e. to give by measure : in the proverb τω αντω μίτρω ω μξτρίΐτΐ [or (so L Τ Tr WII) ω μίτρω μιτρ-Ί, i. e., dropping the fig., ' in proportion to your own beneficence,' Lk. vi. 38. [CoMP. : άντι-μίτρ£ω.~\ * μ€τρητή5 [on tlie accent see Chandler § 51 sq.], -oC, ό, (μ(τρίω), prop, a measurer, the name of a utensil known as an amjjhora, which is a .species of measure used for liquids and containing 72 sextarii or ξ/στοι [i. e. some- what less than nine Eng. gallons ; see B. D. s. v. Weights and Measures, sub fin. (p. 3507 Am. ed.)] (Hebr. ri3, 2 Chr. iv. 5): Jn. ii. 6. (Polyb. 2, 15, 1; Dem. p. 1045, 7 ; Aristot. h. a. 8, 9.) * μ€τριοΐΓαθ€ω, -ώ ; ([cf. W. 101 (95)]; fr. μιτριοηαθής, adhering to the true measure in one's passions or emo- tions; (φη (viz. Aristotle) τον σοφον μή fivai μςν απαθή, μετριοπαθή he, Diog. Laert. 5, 31 ; μετριοπάθεια, modera- tion in passions or emotions, esp. anger and grief, is opp. to the απάθεια of the Stoics ; fr. μέτριος and πάθος) ; 1. q. μετρίως or κατά το μετρην πάσχω, to be affected moderately or in due measure ; to preserve moderation in the passions, esp. in anger or grief, (Philo de Abrah. § 44 ; de Josepho § 5 ; [Joseph, antt. 12, 3, 2; al.]) ; hence of one who is not unduly disturbed by the errors, faults, sins, of others, but bears with them gently ; like other verbs of emotion (cf. Kriiger § 48, 8), witli adat. of the pers. toward whom the feeling is exercised : Heb. v. 2 ; cf. the full discus- sion by Bleek ad loc* μ€τρ(ω$, (μέτριος), adv., [fr. Hdt. down] ; a. in due measure. b. moderately: ου μετρίως, [Α. V. μέτρο 408 #Μ| swt a Utile], exceedingly, (Plut. Flam. 9, et al.), Acts XX. 12.• μ(τρον, -«υ, Τ($, Sept. chiefly for πηο, [cf. μίτΐ}ρ], mca.'i- ure; \. aninflrwnenlformeasurinij; a. a vessel/or receiving and delermininfj the quanlilij of thiny.<, whether ilnj or Ιίψιιή: in proverb, disc, μβτρ(Ίν μίτρω, of the measure of the benefits whicli oneeoiifiTson others, Lk. vi. 38 ; μίτβον ιτ€πι*σμίνον και σ€σηλ€νμ(ΐ>ον, fig. eiiuiv. to most abundant requital, ibid. ; πληρούν τό pcrpov των πατίρων. Ιο add what is wanting in order to fill u|) tlieir aneestors' preseribed number of crimes, Mt. x.siii. 32 [see πληρόω, Ί a.]; «V μί'τρου [A. V. hij mtitsure; see eV, V. 3J i. e. sjiaritiijly, .In. iii. 34 (also tv μίτρω, Ezek. iv. 11). b. a graduated ata [} f()rmeaxurinij,mcusuritiv, 2 Tim. ii. 9 ; μίχρκ αίματος άντικ.ατίστητ(, Heb. xii. 4. 2. with the force of a con j unction: tul, foil, by the subj., Eph. iv. 13.* μή, Sept. for "^x^ γν., |'X, a particle of negation, which differs from ού (which is always an adverb) in that οϋ denies the thing itself (or to speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively), but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, pref- erence, of some one (hence, as we say technically, in- directly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds oiSett, μηίίίς, ούκί'τι, μηκίτι, etc. But μή is either an a d ν c r b of negation, nnt ( Lat. nou, lie) ; or a conjunction, that . . . not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. nuin) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans. ; in indir. quest. ifAe/Aer not (suggesting ap])reliension)]. Cf. Ilenn. ad \'ig. § 267 p. 802 .S(iq. ; Mattld.ie § 608; Bttm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqcp) ; Kiihner ii. §§ 512 s(i. p. 739 s(iq. ; [.lelf §§ 738 sq.p] ; Rost § 135; Win. §§ 55, 5G ; F. Frauke, De particulis negantibus. (two Comm.) Rintel. 1832 sq. ; G. F. Gayler, Particu- larum Graeci .«ermonis negativarum aceurata disputatio, etc. Tub. 1H36 ; E. Priifer, De μή et ού iiarticulis epi- tome. A'ratisl. 183i; ; [Gildersleeve in Am. Jour, of PhiloL vol. i. no. i. p. 4.") scjq. ; Jebb in A'incent and Dickson's Ildbk. to Mod. Grk. ed. 2, App. §§ 82 sqq.]. I. As a negative adverb; 1. univ. : ω μη πά- pfOTi ταϋτα, where μή is used because reference is made merely to the thought that there are those who lack these things, 2 Pet. i. 9 ; ti μή ίώρακ€ν, which (in my opinion) he hath not seen (because they are not visible). Col. ii. 18 [but here GT Tr AVll om.Lbr. μή; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ; W. 480s(j. (448)] ; η8η κίκριται, ότι μή π(πίστ(υκ(ν, be- cause he hath not heliered, represented by the wi-iter as the thought τον κρίνοντος, μ(ν κτλ., so that these words depend on \iyfiv in the intervening statement [W. 628(583); B. § 141, 3]), Ro. iii. 8. 3. in con- ditional and final sentences (cf. W. § 55, 2; [B. 344 (296) S(iq.]) : iav μή, unless, if not, see e.xx. in (άν, I. 3 c. €01» etc. KQt μή, Mk. xii. 19; ϊάν etc. St μή, .las. ii. 14 ; iav τις "δη ■ • ■ μή ττρος θάνατον, 1 .In. v. 16; el μή, ti be μή, el he μή-γ'. etc., see el. III. p. 171 sq. To this head be- long the formulae that have &v or eav as a modifier (W. § 55, 3 e. ; [B. § 148, 4]), ος, ί'κττις, όσοι Sv or ϊανμή : iMt. X. 14; xi. 6; Mk. vi. 11; x. 15; Lk. vii. 23 ; i.x. 5; xviii. 17; Rev.xiii.l5; Srai/etc.ical μή, Mk. xi. 23 ; Lk.x.lO; 6ς &v . . . μή iVl Topveta, Mt. xix. 9 G Τ Tr AVII txt. ; of the same sort is παν πvevμa, ο μή όμολογίΐ, 1 •Τη. iv. 3. 'να μΐ7,Μί.νϋ. 1; χνϋ. 27; Mk. iii. 9; Ro. xi. 25 ; G.-il.v.l7; vi. 12, etc.; "iva . . . κα\ μή, ]\It. v. 29 sq.; Mk. iv. 12; .In. vi. 50; xi. 50; 2 Co. iv. 7, etc. ; iva . . . μή, 2 Co. xiii. 10; Xva 6 . . . μή, Jn. xii. 46 ; Iva (weakened ; see ίνα, II. 2) μή : after διηστβλλομαι [here L WH txt. ίττιτιμαω], Mt xvi. 20 ; TO θ/λημά eoTiv, "va μή, Jn. vi. 39 ; οϋτωι etc. ίνα ό . . . μή, •Τη. iii. 16; παρακαΧω, Ίνα . . . και μή, 1 Co. i. 10; δπωίμή. Mt. vi. 18; Acts xx. 16; iCo. i. 29; όπως oi . . ■ μτ), Lk. xvi. 26. 4. joined with the Infi nit ive(W. §55, 4 f.; [B. §§140, 16; 148,6; cf. ProL Gildersleeve μη 409 μη U. S. ρ. 48sq.]); a. after verbsof saying, declaring, denying, commanding, etc.: άποκριθήι/αι, Lk. xx. 7; Ψ' αύτω κΐχρηματισμίνον μη iSeif, ίΙι^ιΙ If' slioulil not .«fc, Lk. ii. 2fi ; χρηματισθέν7ΐςμηάνηκάμ^αί,ΛΙ\.•'ύ.\'Ζ'^ ωμοσ( (αυ- Tolf) μη ίΙσ(\(νσ(σ6αι, llcb. iii. 18; after λί'γω, Mt. v. .54, 39; xxii.2.!; Mkxii.lS; Acts.\xi.4; xxiii. 8; Ro. ii. 22; xii. 3 ; κηρύσσω, Ro. ii. 21 ; -γράφω, 1 Co. v. 9, 11 ; παραγ- γί'λλω, Acts i. 4 ; iv.l8; v.2>S,40; 1 Co. vii. 10 sq. ; 1 Tim. i. 3; vi. 17; παρακαλώ, Acts ix. 38 RG; xix. 31; 2Co. vi. 1 ; αιτούμαι, Kpli. iii. 13 ; διαμαρτύρομαι, 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; fv\o- μαι, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; παραιτούμαι, lleb. xii. 19[here WH txt. GUI. μή ; cf. W. and R. as below] ; άξιω. Acts xv. 38 ; ί'πι- /3οώ [L Τ Tr AVU ^οώ]. Acts xxv. 24 ; άντι\(γω{({. W. §(;5, 2/3.; [R. § 148, 13]), Lk. XX. 27 [TrWIl L mrg. Xf'yu>] ; απιψνοϋμαι {([. v.), Lk. xxii. 34 ; also after verbs of d e c i d- i π g : Lk. xxi. 14 ; κρίνω. Acts xv. 19 ; κρίνω τοΰτο, τ6 μή, Ro. xiv. 13 ; 2 Co. ii. 1 ; θίΧω, Ro. xiii. 3 ; after verbs of hindering, avoiding, etc.: ΐγκόπτω (Rec. άνακότττω) τ.νά μή, Gal. V. 7 (cf. W. [and B. u. s.; also § 140, 16]) ; ToC μή, thai . . . not, (Lat. ne), after κατίχω, Lk. iv. 42; κρατούμαι, Lk. x.xiv. 16; κωλύω, Acts x. 47; καταπαύω, Acts xiv. 18 ; η-αι'ω, 1 Pet. iii. 10 ; ϋποστίλΧομαι, Ads xx. 20, 27 ; προσίχω μή, Mt. vi. 1 ; hut τού μή is ailded also to other expressions in the sense of Lat. ui m-, l/ml . . . mil : Ro. vii. 3 ; οφθαλμοί τηύ μή βλίπΐΐν, 2ίτα του μή UKOVfiv, Ro. xi. 8, 10. After clauses denoting necessity, ad- vantage, power, fitness, μή is used with an inf. specifying the tiling [B. § 148, 6], καΧόυ ίση μή, 1 Co. vii. 1 ; Gal.iv. 18 ; foil, by τι) μή, Ro. xiv. 21 ; αλυγυν μή. Acts ,χχν. 27; KpeiTTov ήν. 2 Pet. ii. 21 ; (ξουσία τοΟ [LTTr WII cm. Tiw] μή ϊμ-γάζ(σθαι, a right to forbear working, 1 Co. i.x. 6 ; δίϊ, Acts xxvii. 21 ; ov δϋναμηι μή, ί Cfmnot hul. Acts iv. 20 ; afivScKTOv crm τού μή, Lk. χ vii. 1 [cf. avevbfKTos}. b. μή with an inf. which has the article follows a preposition, to indicate the purpose or end : as, τΓρόίτόμή, ίΛα/ . . . no/, 2 Co. iii. 13; iTh. ii. 9; 2 Th. iii. 8 ; (IS TO μή (Lat. in id . . ne), to the end (or intent) that . . . not, Acts vii. 19 ; 1 Co. x. 6 ; 2 Co. iv. 4 ; foil, by an ace. and inf., 2 Th. ii. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 7 ; διά τόμι;, because . . . not, Mt. xiii. 5 sq. ; Mk. iv. 5 sq. ; Lk. viii. 6 ; Jas. iv. 2 [cf. W. 482 (449)], (2 Mace. iv. 19). c. in other expressions where an infin. ivith the art. is used substan- tivelv : τω μή (dat. of the cause or reason [cf. W. § 44, 5; B. 264 (227)]), 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; in the aceus., το μή : Ro. xiv. 1 3 ; 1 Co. iv. 6 [R G] ; 2 Co. ii. 1 ; x. 2 ; 1 Th. iv. 6, cf. 3. d. in sentences expressing consequence or result: ώστε μή, χο thai . . . not, Mt. viii. 28 ; Mk. iii. 20 ; 1 Co. i. 7 ; 2 Co. iii. 7 ; 1 Th. i. 8. 5. μή is joined with a Participle (W. § 55, 5 g. ; [B. § 148, 7; see C. J. A'^aughan's Com. on Ro. ii. 14]), a. in sen- tences expressing a command, exhortation, purpose, etc. : Lk. iii. 1 1 ; Jn. ix. 39 ; Acts xv. 38 ; xx. 29 ; Ro. viii. 4 ; xiv. 3 ; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; Eph. v. 27 ; Phil. i. 28 ; ii. 4 [here Rec. impv.]; iTh.iv. 5; 2Th. i. 8; iPet. ii. 16; Heb. vi. 1 ; xiii. 1 7, etc. b. in general sentences, in Λvhich no defi- nite person is meant but it is merely assumed that there is some one of the character denoted by the participle : as ό μή t>v /itT i'/ioi, he that i.< not on mi/ side, whoever he is, or if there is any such person, Mt. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23 ; ό 8e μή ιτιστ(νων, whoever believeth not, Jn. iii. 18 ; o'l μή όμολογοϋντα Ίησούν \p. if any do not confess, or belong to the class that do not confess, 2 Jn. 7 ; add, Mt. x. 28 ; Lk. vi. 49 ; xii. 21,47 sq. ; xxii. 36 ; Jn. v. 23 ; x. 1 ; xii. 48; xiv. 24; Ro. iv.5; v. 14; x.20; iCo. vii. 38; xi. 22; 2 Th. i. 8 ; Jas. ii. 1 3 ; 1 Jn. ii. 4, etc. ; παΓ ό μή. Mt. vii. 26; (ττάΐ'δ/ΐ'δροΐ'/χί, Mt. iii. 10; vii. 19); 1 Jn. iii. 10; 2 Jn. 9 ; 2 Th. ii. 12 [here L mrg. Τ Tr WII mrg. άπαντα o'l μή etc.] ; μακάριο! ό μή, Jn. XX. 29 ; Ro. .xiv. 22. o. where, indeed, a definite person or thing is referred to, but in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by theparticiple)isdenied in thethought or judgment either of the ivriter or of some other person [cf. esp. W. 484 (451)] : τά μήοντα, that are deemed as nothing, 1 Co. i. 28; ωί μή λαβών, as if thou hadst not received, 1 Co. iv. 7 ; as μή ίρχομίνου μον, as though I were not coming, 1 Co. iv. 18; ώί μή £φίκνοΰμ€νοι (is ύμά?, 2 Co. .\. 14; add, 1 Co. vii. 29. fjSei . . . Tivfs (Ίσ'ινοΙ μή πιστεΰοντί! (ace. to the opinion of 6 «δώί), Jn. vi. 64 ; the same holds true of Acts XX. 29 ; τα μή βλ(πόμ(να (in the opinion of oi μή σκοπούντα), 2 Co. iv. IS (on the other hand, in Heb. .xi. 1. ού βλεπόμ. actually invisible) ; τον μή γνόντα αμαρτία» vnep ήμων ήμαρτίαν (ποΙησ(ν (μή γνόντα is said agreeably to the judgment of ό ποιήσα!), 2 Co. v. 21 (τόκ oi γνόντα would be equiv. to άγΐΌοΟιτα). in predictions, ivhere it expresses the opinion of those who predict: ϊση σιωπών κα\ μή δννάμ€νθ5 \α\ήσαι, Lk. i. 20; ίση τνφΧο! μή βλΐπων, .\cts .xiii. 11. where the writer or speaker does not re- gard the thing itself so much as the thought of the thing, which he ivishes to remove from the mind of the reader or hearer {Klntz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 666), — to be rendered without etc. (Germ, nhne zu with inf.) [cf. B. § 148, 7 b.]: (ξήλθι μή iπιστάμfvns, πού ίρχιται, Ileb. xi. 8 ; add, Mt. -xxii. 12 ; Lk. xiii. 11 [(but cf. B. § 148, 7 c.)] ; Acts v. 7; XX. 22; Heb. ix. 9. where the participles have a con- ditional, causal, or concessive force, and maybe resolved into clauses introduced by if, on condition that, etc. : θιρίσομίν μή (κλνόμ(νοι. Gal. vi. 9 ; μή ovTOs νόμου, Ro. v. l.'i ; alfhouf/h: νόμον μή t\ovTfS, Ro. ii. 14; μή Siv avTos ϋπο νήμον, 1 Co. ix. 20 [Rec. om.] ; we have both the negative particles in ov αίκ fl8oT€s [or (ivith LTTr WII) ϊδόι^ίΓ] ■ ■ ■ μή ύρώvτes, whom being ignorant of (in person) [or (ace. to crit. txt.) not having seen] . . . although now not seeing, 1 Pet. i. 8; al.so with the article ; τά μή νόμον ίχοντα (Germ, die doch nicht haben, they that have not, etc.), Ro. ii. 14 ; ό δί μή γevtάKoγoύμcvos, but he, althout/h not etc. Heb. vii. G ; — or .lince, because, inasmuch as: μή άσθινήσαί τή πίστ« ού [but G LTTr^^ Η om. οϋ; cf. Β. § 148, 11] κατ(νόησ( το (αυτού σώμα ν(ν(κρωμ. (ουκ άσθ(νήσας would l)e c(|uiv. to δυι/ητόί, slmir/), Ro. iv. 19 ; πώs OVTOS γράμματα o'Se μή μίμαθηκω! ; since he has not learned [W. 483 (450)], Jn. vii. 15; add, Mt. xviii. 25: xxii. 25, 29; Lk. ii. 45; vii. 30; .xi. 24; .xii. 47; x.xiv. 23 ; Acts ix. 26 ; xvii. 6 ; xxi. 34 ; xxvii. 7 ; 2 Co. iii. 14 ; v. 19; also with the article : i μή γινωσκων τον νόμον, since it knoweth not the law, Jn. vii. 49 : add, Jude 5. d. where (with the ptcp.) it can be resolved by (being) such Μ ■410 μη (a person) as not, of such a sort as not : μή ζητών τ6 (μαυτον σνμφορον, 1 Co. χ. 33 ; add, Acts ix. 9 ; Gal. iv. 8. neiit. plur. as subst. : τα μη όντα, Ro. iv. 17; τα μη σηΚ(υόμ(να, Ileb. xii. "27 ; τα μη hiovra, 1 Tim. v. 13 ; τα μη καθήκοντα, Ro. i. 28; 2 Mace. vi. 4, (on the other hand, in τά οίκ ανήκοντα, Eph. v. 4 [wlierc L Τ Tr WII a ουκ ανήκίν~[, the oLK coalesces with ανήκοντα and forms a single idea, un- seemly, unlawful). 6. in independent sentences of forbidding, deliorting, admonishing, desiring, etc., μή is Prohibitive (cf. \V. § oG, 1), Lat. ne, noi; a. with the 1 pers. plur. of the subjunc. present : μη ■γινώμ(θα Κ€νή8οξοι, Gal. V. 26 ; add. Gal. vi. 9 ; 1 Th. v. 6 ; 1 Jn. iii. 1» ; aorist : Jn. xix. 24 ; before the word depending on the e.vhortation, 1 Co. v. 8. b. Avith a present im- perative, generallv where one is bidden to cease from something already begun, or repeated, or continued : Mt. vi. 16, 19; vii. 1 ; xix. 6; Mk. ix. 39; χ iii. 11 ; Lk.vi. 30; vii. 6, 13 ; viii. 49, 52 ; x. 4, 7, 20 ; Jn. ii. 16 ; v. 28, 45 ; vi.43; vii. 24; xiv.1,27; xLx. 21 ; Actsx.l5; xi.9; xx. 10; Ro. vi. 12; xi. 18, 20; xii. 2 [here LTrmrg. AVU mrg. give the inf.], 14; 1 Co. vi. 9 ; νϋ.5; 2Co. vi. 14, 17; Gal. V. 1 ; vi. 7 ; Eph. iv. 30 ; Col. iii. 9, 19, 21 ; 1 Th. v. 19,2 Th. iii. 15 ; 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; v. 16, 19 ; Heb. .xii. 5 ; xiii. 2; Jas. i. 7, 16; 1 Pet. iv. 12, 15 sq. ; Ijn. ii. 15; iii. 13 ; Rev. v. 5, and very often. c. with the third per- son (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist impv. where the prohibition relates to something not to be begun, and where things about to be done are forbid- den : μή ίπιστρ(^άτω, Mt. xxiv. 18 ; Lk. xvii. Zl; μή κα- ταβάτω, Mk. xiii. 15, and LTTrWII in Mt. xxiv. 17 (where R G badly καταβαινίτω) ; μή γνώτω, Mt. vi. 3 ; •γ(νίσθω [but TTr W U γινίσθω^, Lk. xxii. 42; cf. Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 73 ; Aeschyl. Sept. c. Theb. 1036. d. as in the more elegant Grk. writ, where future things are for- bidden (cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 807), with the 2 pers. of the aorist subjunctive: μή ίόξητ€, Mt. iii. 9 ; v. 17 ; μή φα- βηθηί, Mt. i. 20 ; X. 26, 31 [here L Τ Tr WH pres. impv. φοβύσθ(^, (alternating with the impv. pres. φοβύσθί in Mt. X. 28 [G L Τ Tr]) ; μή άψτι. Col. ii. 21 ; μή άποστρα- φής, Mt. v. 42 ; μή κτίισησθί, Mt. χ. 9 ; add, Mt. vi. 2, 7, 13,31; Mk. V. 7; x. 19; Lk. vi. 29 ; viii. 28 ; xiv.8; Jn. iii. 7; Acts vii. 60; Ro. x. 6 ; iCo. xvi. 11; 2 Co. xi. 16; 2 Th. ii. 3, — [in the last three e.xx. with the third pers., contrary to W. 502 (4G7)] ; 1 Tim. v. 1 ; 2 Tim. i. 8 ; Rev. vi. 6; X. Ί(μή γρανίτης, for ?μ(\\ον γράφίΐν precedes ; but in Jn. xix. 21 μή -^ράφί is used, because I'ilate had already written) ; Rev. xi. 2 ; xxii. 10, and very often. We have the impv. pres. and the aor. subj . together in Lk. x. 4 ; Acts xviii. 9. e. with the 2 pers. of the present subjunc. : μή σκληρϋνητ€, Ileb. iii. 8, 15, (a rare constr. though not wholly unknown to Grk. writ. [" more than doubtful " (L. and S. s. v. A. 1.2)] ; see Delitzschon the latter passage, and Schaefer ad Greg. Corinth, p. 1005 sq. ; \^Soph. Lex. Β.ν.μή. Others regard the above exx. as subjunc. aorist; cf.2K.ii.lO; Is.Ixiii.17; Jer.xvii.23; xlx. 15,etc.]). f. with the optative, in wishes : in that freq. formula μή ytvoiTo, far be it ! see γίνομαι, 2 a.; μή alrrois \αγισ6(ίη, 2 Tim. iv. 16 (Job xxvii. 5). n. As a Conjunction, Lat. ne with the subjunc- tive; 1. our that, that not or lest, (cf. W. § 56, 2; [B. § 139, 48sq. ; Goodwin § 46]); after verbs of fear- ing, caution, etc. a. with the subjunc. present, where one fears lest something now exists and at the same time indicates that he is ignorant whether it is so or not (^Hermann on Soph. Aj. 272): eituTKonoivTts, μή . . . ϊνοχλΐ], Ileb. xii. 15. b. with the subjunc. aorist, of things which may occur immediately or very soon : pre- ceded by an aor., iiXaSijftis (LT Tr WII φηβηθιΊς) μή 8uf σττασ^ν. Acts xxiii. 10; by a pres. : φοβοΟ/ιαι, Acts xxvii. 17 ; β\ίπω, Mt. xxiv. 4; Mk. xiii. 5; Lk. xxi. 8; Acts xiii. 40; 1 Co. x. 12; Gal. v. 15 ; Ileb. xii. 25; σκοπίω (μαυτόν. Gal. vi. 1 [B. 243 (209) would refer this to 2 b. below ; cf. (ioodwin p. 66] ; όράω, Mt. xviii. 10; 1 Th. v. 1 5 ; elliptically, όρα μή (sc. τοϋτο ηοιήση! [cf . W. § 64, 7 a.; B. 395 (338)]): Rev. .xi.x. 10; xxii. 9. c. with the indicative fut. (as being akin to the subjunc. [cf. gram, reff. at the beginning]) : φυβυνμαι, μή ταπανώσα μ€ 6 θ€Ος μου, 2 Co. xii. 20 sq. [L txt. Τ Tr] ; add, Col. ii. 8. 2. in order that not (Lat. eo consilio ne) ; a. with the op- tative : των στρατιωτών βηνΚή iyivfTO, iva τοΐ/ς ^ζσμώτας άποκτίίνωσι, μή τα . . . Βιαφΰγοι, Acts χχνϋ. 42 Rec. (the more elegant Greek to express the thought and purpose of the soldiers ; but the best codd. read διαφνγη, which G LTTrWII have adopted). b. with the subjunc- tive aor. : preceded by the pres., Mk. xiii. 36 ; 2 Co. viii. 20 [cf. Goodwin § 43 Rem.] ; xii. 6 ; Col. ii. 4 (where L Τ Tr Wll 'va μηΒύς for R G μή Tts [ — an oversight ; in R G as well as in the recent crit. edd. the purpose is expressed by an inserted ίνα]). III. As an Interrogative particle it is used when a negative answer is expected, Lat. num ; (W. § 57, 3 b. ; [B. 248 (213)]); 1. in a direct question : Mt. vii. 9 sq. ; ix. 15; Mk. ii. 19; Lk. xvii. 9 ; Jn. iii. 4 ; iv. 12, 33; vi. 67; vii. 35, 51 sq. ; Acts vii. 28; Ro. iii. 3; ix. 20; lCo.i.l3; ix.Ssq.; x.22; Jas.ii.[l WH], 14; ui.l2, etc. ; μη yap (see yap, L), Jn. vii. il; μή ουκ (where οίκ be- longs to the verb, and μή is interrogative), Ro. x. 18 sq. ; 1 Co. ix. 4 sq. ; μή yap . . . οϋ, 1 Co. xi. 22. 2. in an indirect question with the indicative (Germ, oh elwa, ob wohl, whether possiht I/, whether perchance), where in ad- monishing another we intimate that possibly the case is as we fear [cf. B. § 139, 57 ; W. § 41 b. 4 a.] : Lk. xi. 35, cf. B. 243 (209) ; Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 334 sq. ; {Rid• dell, Plato's Apol. Digest of Idioms §§ 137, 138]. rv. The particles ol μή in combination augment the force of the negation, and signify not at all, in no wise, by no means; (this formula arose from the fuller ex- pressions oi beivov or hsos or φόβος, μή, wliich are still found sometimes in Grk. auth., cf. Kiihner ii. § 516, 9 p. 773 sq. ; but so far was this origin of the phrase lost sight of that οϋ μή is used even of things not at all to be feared, but rather to be desired ; so in the N. T. in Mt. V. 18, 26; xviii. 3; Lk. xviii. 17; xxii. 16 ; Jn.iv.48;xx. 25 ; 1 Th. V. 3); cf. Matthiae § 517; Kiihner ii. p. 775; Bnhdy. p. 402 sqq. ; [Gildersleeve in the Amer. Jour, of Philol. for 1882, p. 202 sq. ; Goodwin § 89] ; W. § 56, S; αηγε 411 μηΒεϊk. xvi. 26 ; w. a ptcp. after μή w. a ptcp., Lk. xii. 47 ; 2 Co. iv. 2; w. an impv. after μή w. impv., Jn. xiv. 27; Ro. vi. 12 sq. ; Heb. xii. 5; (iijSixi (πιτίθίί, foil, by μηϋ w. impv. 1 Tim. v. 22 ; w. 2 pers. of the aor. subj. after μή w. 2 pers. of the aor. subj., Mt. vii. 6; xxiii. 9sq. ; Lk. xvii. 23; Col. ii. 21; 1 Pet. iii. 14 ; after μη8ί w. an aor. subj. Mk. viii. 26 [T reads μή for the first μη8(, Τ WH Tr mrg. om. the sec- ond clause] ; after μη^ίνα w. an aor. subj. Lk. iii. 14 [Tdf. repeats μη^ίνα] ; μηίί . . . μηδί w. 1 pers. plur. pres. subj. 1 Co. X. 8 sq. [see below] ; παραγγίλλω foil, by μή w. inf. . . . μη8ί w. inf., Acts iv. 18; 1 Tim. i. 4 ; vi. 17; καλόν TO μή • . . ui/Sc with inf. Ro. xiv. 21 ; w. gen. absol. after μήττω w. gen. absol. Ro. ix. 11 ; w. impv. after els TO μή, 1 Co. X. 7 ; μηδέ is repeated several times in a neg- ative e.xhortation after eh το μή in 1 Co. x. 7-1 0. 2. not even (Lat. ne . . . quidem) : w. an inf. after ίγραψα, 1 Co. V. 11 ; after ware, Mk. ii. 2 ; iii. 20 (where R G Τ badly μήτe [cf. W. 489 sq. (456) ; B. pp. 367, 369]) ; w. a pres. impv., Eph. v. 3 ; 2 Th. iii. 10. μηδίίϊ, μηδeμίa. μηδίν (and μηθίν. Acts xxvii. 33 L Τ Tr WH, — a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as early as B.C. 37S, cf. ^leisterhann, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 73] ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 181 sq. ; W. § 5, 1 d. U ; [B. 28 (25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. μηδέ and eU), [fr. Hom. down] ; it is used either in connection with a noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man, neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as μή; ac- cordingly a. with an imperative : μηδeίί being the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii. 18,21; X. 24; Gal. vi. 17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim. iv. 12; Tit. ii. 15 ; Jas. i. 13 ; 1 Jn. iii. 7 ; neut. μηδέν, sc. ea-Tco [A. V. have thou nothing to do with etc.], Mt. xxvii. 19; μηδeίί in the dat. or the ace. depending on the impv., Ro. xiii. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 22 ; μηδίν (accusative), Lk. iii. 13 ; ix. 3 ; μ. φοβοΟ, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH txt. μή]. b. μηδels with the optative : once in the N. T., :Mk. -xi. 14 (where Rec. ov8eis) [cf. W. 476 (443)]. c. with the 2 pers. of the aor. subjunc, the μηδeίς depending on the verb; as, μηδevι eiTnjs, Mt. viii. 4; xvii. 9 ; accus., Lk. iii. 14; x. 4; μι/δίκ (ace). Acts xvi. 28 ; κατά μηδένα τρόπον, 2 Th. ii. 3. d. with the particles ίνα and όπως (see μή, I. 3) : with ίνα, Mt. x^-i. 20; Mk. v. 43; \Λ. 8; vii. 36; ix. 9; Tit. iii. 13; Rev. iii. 11; with όπ-ω;. Acts viii. 24. e. with an infini- tive ; eu with one that depends on another verb : — as on παραγγέλλω, Lk. viii. 56 ; ix. 21 ; Acts x.xiii. 22 ; δίίκνυμι. .\cts X. 2S ; διατάσσομαι, Acts x.xiv. 23 ; ava- θ(ματίζω {'μαυτό». Acts .xxiii. 14; κρίνω (ace. w. inf.). Acts -xxi. 25 Rec; (νχομαι. 2 Co. .xiii. 7; βοΰλομαι (ace. w. inf.), 1 Tim. v. 14; ίπομιμνήσκω τινά, Tit. iii. 2, etc; παρακαλώ τίνα foil, by to μή w. acc and inf., 1 Th. iii. 3 L (ed. ster.) Τ Tr WfL β. with an inf. depend- ing on 8ia to: Acts x.xviii. 18; Heb. x. 2. f. with a participle (see μή, L 5) ; in dat.. Acts xi. 19 : Ro. xii. 17; accus. μI;8f>'α,Jn. viii. 10; Actsix. 7; μι^δβ!». Acts iv. 21; xxvii. 33; iCo. x. 25. 27; 2Co. vi. 10; 2Th. iii. 11: 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; Tit. ii. 8 ; .Jas. i. 6 ; 3 Jn. 7 : μηδίμίαν προ- σκοττήν, 2 Co. vi. 3 ; μηδ(μίαν πτάησιν, 1 Pet. iii. 6 ; μ>;δ€- μιακ αΐτιαν. Acts xxviii. 1 8 ; άναβολήν μηδ. χχν. 1 7. g. noteworthy are — μηδίΪ! with a gen.. Acts iv. 17; xxir. 23; μηδέν SC. τούτων. Rev. ii. 10 [RGTWHmrg.]; tV μηΒέττ-οτί 412 μητΓΟΤί μη6€νί, in nothi'ig, 1 Co. 1. 7 [but χαρίσματι is expressed here] ; 2 Co. [vi. 3 (see h. below)] ; vii. 9; Phil. i. 28; .las. i. 4. μηδίν eirai, to be nothing i. e. of no account, opp. to etvai τί, Gal. vi. .'i (.Soph. Aj. 754 ; other ex.x. fr. (irk. auth. see in Passow ii. j). 231''; [L. and S. s. v. II.; cf. B. § 129, 5]) ; μηδ(ν (aec), nolhimj i. e. not til nil, in no 'expect: Act? .\. L'O ; xi. 12, (I^eiau. dial. deor. 2, 4; Tim. 43) ; as acrus. of the obj. after verbs of harm, loss, damage, advantage, care, [cf. W. 227 (213); 13. § 131, 10]: as, β\άπτ(ΐν, Lk. iv. 35 [cf. \V. 4«3 (450)], ώφί- ΧίΙσθαί, Mk. v. 2G ; νσημιΐν, 2 Co. xi. 5 ; μιριμναν, Phil. iv. 6. h. examples of a d ο u bl e negation, by which the denial is strengthened, where in Lat. i/nisr/nnm fol- lows a negation (cf. W. § 55, 9 b.) : μηκίτι μη8(ί{, Mk. xi. 14; Acts iv. 17; μη8(ν\ μη&ίν, Mk. i. 44 [Lorn. Tr br. ^?;Se>'] ; Ko. .xiii. 8 ; μηδιμίαν iv μηδινί, 2 Co. vi. 3 ; μη ■ ■ ■ (f μηΒ(ΐΊ, Phil. i. 2» , μη . . . μηδίν, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; μη . . . μηδ^μιαν, 1 Pet. iii. (ί : μή Ttff . . . κατά μηδίνα τρό- πον, 2 Th. ii. 3. μηΒίτΓΟΤί, (μι/δί and ποΓί), adv., iiener: 2 Tim. iii. 7.* μηΒεττω, (μηδί and ττώ), adv., rial yet: Heb. xi. 7.' Μή8ο8, -ου, ό, a Meile, a native or an inhabitant of Media, a well-known region of Asia whose chief city was Ecbatana [see B. D. s. v.]: Acts ii. 9. [Cf. B. D. and Schaff-Herzog s. v. Media.] * μηθί'ν, see μηδίΐς. μηκΕτι, (fr. μή and fn), adv., employed in the same constructions as μή; no longer; no more; not here- after: a. with 3 pers. sing. 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 RGTrtxt. with 2 pers. sing. Mk. ix. 25. b. with 1 pers. plur. pres. subj. Ro. xiv. 13. c. with a pres. imperative : [Lk. viii. 49 L Τ Trtxt. WH] : Jn. v. 14 : viii. 1 1 ; Eph. iv. 2S ; 1 Tim. v. 23. d. with the opta- tive : Mk. .\i. 14. e. tm μηκίτι : 2 Co. v. 15 ; Eph. iv. 14. f. \vitli an infin. depending — on another verb : on βοώ ((πιϋοω), Acts xxv. 24; on άπίίλω, Acts iv. 17; on \(γω κ. μαρτΰρομαι, Eph. iv. 17; on f is το, 1 Pet. iv. 2; on ωστ€, Mk. i. 45 ; ii. 2; τοϋ μηκίτί δονΚίνΐίν, Ro. vi. 6. g. with a ptcp. : Acts xiii. 34 [cf. W. § 65, 10] ; Ro. XV. 23; 1 Th. iii. 1. h. ol μηκίτι (see μή, IV. 2): with 2 aor. subj. Mt. xxi. 19 LTTrmrg. WII.* μήκος, -fot (-our), to, fr. Hom. down ; Sept. very often for ^IS : lcn(/lh : Rev. xxi. 16; το πΧάτοί κα\ μήκος και βάθοί και ϋψος, language used in shadowing forth the greatness, extent, and number of the blessings received from Christ, Eph. iii. 18.• μηκννα: (μήκος); fr. Ildt. and Pind. down; to malce long, to lengt/un ; in the Bible twice of plants, i. q. to cauxe to grow, tncreosf^ : ο €φντ€νσ€ κύριος και ν^τος (μήκννΐν C^^r), Is. xliv. 14; hence Pass. [al. Mid.] pres. μηκύνο- μαι; to grow tiji: Mk. iv. 27 [μηκΰνηται (Trmrg. -frai)].' μηλωτή, -ής, ή. (fr. μήλον a sheep, also a goat; as καμη- Χωτή ['camlet'] fr. κάμηλος [cf. Loh. Parali]). p. 332]), α shecpshin: Heb. xi. 37, and thence in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 17, 1. For jT^IX an outer robe, mantle, Sept. in 1 K. xLx. 13, 19; 2 K. ii. 8, 13 sq., doubtless because tliese mantles were made of skins ; hence more closely "yya ΓίΛ/ΙΚ, a mantle of hair, Zech. xiii. 4 (where Sept. δίρρις τρίχινη). In the Byzant. writ. [ ApoU. Dysk. 191, 9] μηλωτή denotes a monk's garment.* μήν, [(fr. Horn, down)], a particle of afBrmatioo, rerih/, rcrla'inhj, truly, (Sap. vi. 25) ; η μήν, see under ή fin. μήν, gen. μηνός, ό, (w. Alex. ace. μήναν. Rev. xxii. 2 Lchm.; on which form see refP. under ciptnji/, fin.); [fr. Hom. down] ; 1. a month : Lk. i. 24, 2ii, 3i;, 5G ; iv. 25 ; Acts vii. 20; xviii. 11; xix. 8; xx. 3 ; xxviii. 11; Jas. v. 17; Rev. ix. 5, 10, 15; xi. 2; xiii. 5; xxii. 2. 2. the time ofnev moon, new moon, (barbarous Lat. novilunium; after the use of the Ilebr. ΰ;ΊΠ, which denotes both a 'month' and a 'new moon,' as in Num. xxviii. 11 ; xxi.x. 1) : Gal. iv. 10 [Bp. Lghtft. compares Is. Ixvi. 23] (the first day of each month, -when the new moon appeared was a festival among the Hebrews; cf. Lev. xxiii. 24 Num. xxviii. 11; Ps. Ixxx. (Ixxxi.) 4); [al. refer tht passage to 1 (see Mey. ad loc.)].* μηνύω [cf. Curtius § 429] : 1 aor. (μήνυσα: 1 aor. pass, ptcp. fem. μηηθί'ισα; as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and Pind. down ; 1. to disclose or make known something secret ; in a forensic sense, to inform, report : foil, by jroO (στίν, .In. xi. 57; τινί τι, pass., Acts xxiii. 30. 2. univ. to declare, tell, make known ■ 1 Co. x. 28. 3. to indicate, intimate : of a teacher ; foil, by ότι, Lk. xx. 37. [A. V. uniformly s/iouj.] • μή ούκ, see μή. III. 1. μήίΓΟτί, (fr. μή and ττοτί), [μή ποτ( (separately) L WH (exc. Mt. xxv. !). see below) Tr (exc. 2 Tim. ii. 25)], dif- fering from ovTToTf as μή does from οϋ ; [fr. Hom. down]. Accordingly it is 1. a particle of Negat ion; not ever, never : (nc\ μήποτι Ισχύα, since it is never of force, because the writer thinks that the very idea of its hav- ing force is to be denied, Heb. ix. 17 [where WH txt. fiij ToTf], on which see W. 480 (447), cf. B. 353 (304) ; but others refer this passage to 3 a. below. 2. a pro- hibitory Conjunction; lest ever, lest at any time, lest hnply, (also written separately μή ποτ€ [(see init.), esp. when the component parts retain each its distinctive force; cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 129 sq.; Ellemll, Lex. .Soph. ii. 107. In the X. T. use of this particle the no- tion of time usual to ποτί seems to recede before that of contingency, lest perchance']), so that it refers to the pre- ceding verb and indicates the purpose of the designated action [W. § 56, 2]: w. a subj. pres. Lk. xii. 58; w. a subj. aor., Mt. iv. 6 and Lk. iv. 11, fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 12 (where Sept. for [3) : Mt. v. 25 [(cf. below)] ; vii. 6 [R G] ; xiii. 15 and Acts xxviii. 27 (both from Is. vi. 10, where Sept. for J3); Mt. xiii. 29 (ov sc. θ(λω); xv. 32; xxvii.G4; >Ik.iv.i2; Lk.xiv.l2; with'i/a prefi.xed, ibid. 29; w. afut. i ndic. [see B. § 139, 7. cf. also p. 368 (315) d.] • [Mt. vii. 6 L Τ Tr AVII ; (cf. v. 25)] ; Mk. xiv. 2 ; [Lk. -xii. 58 L Τ Tr WH]. after verbs of fearing, taking care, [W. u. s.; B. §139, 48]: w. subj. aor., — so after ττροσίχω, to take heed, lest etc., Lk. xxi. 34 ; Heb. ii. 1, (Sir. xi. 33) ; so that an antecedent φοβούμενοι or προσίχοντα must be mentally supplied. Acts v. 39 ; μήττοη ovK άρκίστι, lest perchance there be not enough (so that oi» μηΤΓον 413 itirri ipKecTj forms one idea, and φοβονμ(θα must be supplied before μηποτί), Mt. xxv. 9 R Γ Wli mrg. ; but L Tr \VH txt., together witli Meyer et al., have correctly restored μηπστΐ (sc. τοϋτο γΕίΐσίω [W . § 64, 7 a.]) • ού μη apKfhere,[lesl haply']: Actsxxvii. 29 Τ Tr WH. (Hom. et al.)• μήιτα [or μη ιτω, L Tr in Ro. ix. 11], {μή and πώ). [fr. Hom. down], adv.; 1. not yet: in construction with the ace. and inf., Heb. ix. 8 ; w. a ptcp., μήηω yip •γ(ννηθ(ντΐύν, though they were not yet born, Ro. ix. 11, where cf. Fritzsche. 2. lest in any way [?] : Acts xxvii. 29 Lchm.* μήπ(ι>9 [G T, or μή ιτωί L Tr WH], {μή and πώί), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. a conjunction, lest in any way, lest perchance; a. in final sentences, w. an aor. subj., pre- ceded by a pres. 1 Co. ix. 27; preceded by an aor., 2 Co.u.7; ix.4. b. after verbs of feari η g, taking heed: w. an aor. subj., — after βΧίπΐίν. 1 Co. viii. 9; after φοβ(ϊσθαι. Acts xxvii. 29 R ; 2 Co. xi. 3 ; xii. 20; w. a perf. indie, to indicate that what is feared has actu- ally taken place [AV. § 56, 2 b. a.; B. 242 (209)], Gal. iv. 11 ; w. an aor. subj., the idea of fearing being sup- pressed, Ro. xi. 21 Rec. [B. § 148, 10; cf. W. 474 (442)]. 2. an interrogative particle, whether in any way, whether hy any means : in an indirect question, with an indie, present (of a thing still continuing) and aorist (of a thing already done). Gal. ii. 2 (/ laid be/ort them the gospel etc., sc. inquiring, whether haply etc. ; Paul expects a negative answer, by which he wished his teach- ing concerning Christ to be approved by the apostles at Jerusalem, yet by no means because he himself had any doubt about its soundness, but that his adversaries might not misuse the authority of those apostles in assailing this teaching, and thereby frustrate his past and present en- deavors ; cf. Hofmann ad loc. [B. 353 (303). Others, however, take τρ^χω as a s u b j u η c t i ν e, and render lest haply I should he runninr/ etc. ; see W. 504 sq. (470), cf. EUicott ad loc.]). w. the indicative (of a thing perhaps already done, but which the writer wishes had not been done) and the aor. subjunctive (of a thing future and uncertain, which he desires God to avert) in one and the same sen tence, 1 Th. iii. 5 (where μήπως depends on yvivai ; cf. Schott, LUnemann, [EUicott], ad loc. ; [B. 353 (304) ; W. 505 (470)]).• μηρ6$, ~οϋ, ό, the thigh : Rev. xix. 16. (From Horn, down ; Sept. for l\y_.)' μ,ήτί, (μή and the enclitic re), [fr. Hom. down], a cop- ulative conjunction of negation, neither, nor, (differing fr. ovTf as μή does fr. oi. It differs fr. μη8( in that μη8ί separates different things, but μήτ( those which are of the same kind or which are parts of one whole ; cf. W. § 55, 6 ; [B. § 149, 13 b.]): μήτ( . . . μήτ(, neither . . . nor, hi. vii. 33 [T fi^ . . . fiijSi] ; ix. 3 (five times) ; Acts xxiii 12, 21 ; xxvii. 20 ; Heb. vii. 3 ; (but in Eph. iv. 27 for μή ■ ■ ■ μήτ( we must with L Τ Tr WH substitute μη . . . μη8ί)• μη . . . μήτ€ . . . μήτ(, Mt. V. 34-36 (four times); 1 Tim. i. 7 ; Jas. v. 12 ; Rev. vii. 3 ; iua μή ■ . ■ μψ -t . . . μήτ(. Rev. vii. 1 ; μηϋ ■ ■ ■ μήτ€ ■ . . μήτε. 2 Th. ii. 2 L Τ Tr WH ; μή «ναι άνάστασιν, μη5ί SyyeXov (for that is something other than άι/άστασίί). μήτ( ττν(ΰμα (because angels belong to the genus πνεύματα), .\cts xxiii. 8 Β 6; cf. W. 493 (459) ; [B. 367 (314) sq.].* μήτηρ, gen. μητρός, dat. μητρί, acc. μητέρα, ή, [fr. Horn. down ; fr. Skr. ma ' to measure ' ; but whether denoting the ' moulder,' or the ' manager ' is debated ; cf. Vanicek p. 657 ; Curtius § 472; (cf. μέτρον)'], Ilebr. DX, a mother^ prop. : Mt. i. 18; ii. 11, and often ; trop. of that which is like a mother : Mt. xii. 49 sq. ; >Ik. iii. 35 ; Ja. xix. 27 ; Ro. xvi. 13, cf. 1 Tim. v. 2 ; a city is called ή μήτηρ των πορνών, that produces and harbors the harlots. Rev. xvii. 5 ; of a city where races of men [i. e. Christians] originated, Gal. iv. 26 [here G Τ TrAVH om. L br.iravriiw (on the origin of which cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. 11. μήτι [so G Τ WH R (commonly), but μή nh (exc 1 Co. vi. 3) Tr (exc. Mt. xxvi. 22, 25 ; Mk. iv. 21)], (u? and tl), whether al all, whether perchance, an interroga- tive expecting a negative answer; in a direct question (Germ, doch nicht etwa f [in Eng. generally untranslated• cf. W. § 57, 3 b.; B. 248 (213)]) : Mt. vii. 16; xxvi. 22. 25; Mk. iv. 21 ; .xiv. 19 ; Lk. vi. 39 ; Jn. vii. 31 [RG]: viii. 22; xviii. 35 ; xxi. 5 [here all texts μήπ (properly)]; Acts X. 47 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; Jas. iii. 11 ; μήτι Spa, 2 Co. I. 1 7 ; used by one asking doubtfully yet inclining to believe what he asks about (see μήπυτε, 3 a.) : Mt. xiL ?3 : .Jn, μητί'γί 414 μιμεομαΐ iv. 29. tl μήτι, see fi, III. 10. /i^Tiye (or μηη ye) see in its phice.• μήτιγ£ [so GTWII; but μήτι γ€ RL, μή η ye Tr], (fr. μή, τι, ye), to say nothlni/ of, not to mention, which ace. to the context is either a. much less ; or b. much more, much rather ; so once in the N. T., 1 Co. vi. 3. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 801 54.' μ.ήτΐ5 [so R (; .In. iv. 33], more correctly μή tis ; 1• prohibitive, let no one [cf. B. 31 (28)] : [v^. 1 aor. subj. 1 Co. xvi. 11]; w. 2 aor. subj. 2 Th. ii. 3. 2. inter- roi'ative, (Lat. num ijuis ?) halh ani/one etc. : Jn. vii. 48 ; [2'Co..xii. 17, cf. B.§ 151,7; W. 574 (534)]; wliere one would gladlv believe what he asks about doubtfully (see μήτι. sub fin.) : Jn. iv. 33.* μήτρα, -ας, ή. (μήτη^ί), the womb: Lk. ii. 23 (on which see Smratyco, 1 ) ; Ki). iv. 19. (Hdt., Plat., al. ; Sept. for μ.ητραλω'α5 (alsii μί)Γραλοίαϊ), LTTrWlI [see WII. App. p. 152] μητμολωας, -ου, 6, {μήτηρ. and άλοιάω to thresh, smite), α malricide: 1 Tim. i. 9. (Aeschyl., Plat., Lcian., al.)* μητρό-τΓολΐ5, -βωΕ, ή, (μήτηρ and πολίϊ), a metropolis, chief city; in the spurious subscription 1 Tim. vi. (22) fin. ; [in this sense fr. Xen. down].* μ(α, see under fit. μιοίνω; Pass., 1 aor. subj. 3 pers. plur. μιαι/ίώσΐ!»; pf. 3 pers. sing. μ(μίανται (unless it be better to take this form as a plur.; cf. Kriiger § 33, 3 Anm. 9 ; Bttm. Gram. § 101 Anm. 7; Ausf. Spr. § 101 Anm. 13; B. 41 (36); [W. § 58, 6 b. 3.]), ptcp. μίμιασμίνο! (Tit. i. 15 R ϋ) and μ(μιαμμίνθ! (ibid. LT Tr WH ; also Sap. vii. 25 ; Tob. ii. 9 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 ed. Bekk. ; cf. Matthiae i. p. 415 ; Kriiger § 40 3. v. ; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 35; Otto on Theophil. ad Autol. l,lp. 2sq. ; [Veitchs. v.]); fr. lioni. down ; 1. to dye u'ith another color, to stain : cXt- φαντα φοινίκι, Horn. II. 4, 141. 2. to ilejile, pollute, sully, contaminate, soil, (Se[)t. often for Χ'3ϋ) : in a physi- cal and amoral sense, σάρκα (of licentiousness), Jude8; in a moral sense, τήν συνιίδησιν, τόν νουν, pass. Tit. i. 15; absol. ίο defile with sin, pass. ibid, and in Heb. .\ii. 15 ; for ίί'ϋΠΠ, Dent. xxiv. 6 (4) ; in a ritual sense, of men, pass. Jn. xviii. 28 (Lev. xxii. 5, 8; Num. xix. 13, 20; Tob. ii. 9).• |Stn. μιαίνω, μολύκαι; ace. to Trench (N. T. Syn. § x.xxi.) μιαίνω to stain differs from μοΚύνω to smear not only in its primary and outward sense, hut in the circumstance that (like Hng. stain) it may be used in good part, while μο\. admits of no worthy reference.] μίασ-μα, -Tor, το, (μιαίνω), that which defiles [cf. καύ- χημα, 2] ; defilement (Vulg. coinquinatio) : trop. μιάσματα ToO κόσμου, vices the foulness of which contaminates one in his intercourse with the ungodly mass of mankind, 2 Pet. ii. 20. (Tragg., Antiph., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Plut. ; Sept., Lev. vii. 8 (18) ; Jer. xxxi.x. (xxxii.) 34 ; Judith ix. 2 ; 1 Mace. xiii. 50.) • μιαα-μήΐ, -oC, 6, (μιαίνω), the act of defilinci, defilement, pollution: ΐπιθυμία μιασμοΟ, defiling lust [W. § 34, 3 b.], 2 Pet. ii. 10. (Sap. xiv. 2G•, 1 Mace, iv 43; Plut. mor. p. 393 c. ; Test. xii. Patr. [test. Lev. \7; test. Bcnj. 8; Graec. Ven. (passim) ; Ilerm. Past. sim. 5, 7, 2].) ' μίγμα or (so L T) μΊ-^μα, (on the accent cf. Lipsius, Granim. Untersuch. pp. 32 and 34, [cf. W. § 6, 1 e. ; κρίμα, init.]), -TOf, το', (μίγννμι), that which has been pro- duced by mixing, a mixture : Jn. xix. 39 [WII txt. ίΧιγμα, q. V.]. (Sir. xxxviii. 8 ; Aristot., Plut., al.) * μίγνυμι and μΐα-γω : 1 aor. (μίζα; pf. pass. ptcp. μ(μιγ• μίνο! fr. Hum. down; to mix, mingle: τι τινι, one thing with another, Rev. viii. 7 Rcc; xv. 2; also τΊ tv τινι [cf. B. § 133, 8], Rev. viii. 7 G L Τ Tr WII ; pfra tivos, with a thing, Mt. xxvii. 34 ; Lk. xiii. 1 (on which see αίμα, 2 a.). [Syn. seeicepai/i»v/it, fin. Comp. : συν-ανα-μίγννμι.^' μικρός, -ά, -όν, conipar. μικρότιροί, -tpa, -epov, [fr. Horn, down], Sept. for JQp, JDp, t2;'0, small, little ; used a. of size : Mt. xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 31 ; hence of stature, τή ηλικία, Lk. xix. 3 ; of length, .Tas. iii. 5. b. of space: neut. προιΧθων [προσ^ΧΘ. TTrMIImrg. in Mt., TrWlImrg. in Mk. (see προσέρχομαι, a.)] μικρόν, having gone forward a little, ΛΗ. xxvi. 39; Mk. .xiv. 35, [cf. W. § 32, C; Β § 131, 11 sq.]. c. of age: less by birth, younger, Mk. xv. 40 [al. take this of stat- ure]; oi μικροί, the little ones, young children, Mt. xviii. 6,10,14; Mk.ix.42; άττό μικροί εωίμίγήλου [A. V./rom the least to the greatest']. Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11, (Jer. vi. 13; xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34); μικρός Tf κα'ί μί-γας, [both small and great] i. e. all, Acts xxvi. 22 ; plur.. Rev. xi. IS; xiii. 1(1; xix. 5, IS; .xx. 12. d. of time, shf>rl, brief: neuter — nom., ϊτι [or tTt om.] μικρόν (sc. ίσται) και, (yet) a Utile icliile and etc. i. e. shortly (this shall come to pass), Jn. xiv. 19; xvi. 16 sq. 19, [(cf. Ex. xvii. 4)], fTi μικρόν όσον όσον (see όσος, a.); without καΐ, Ileb. χ. 37 (Is. x.xvi. 20) ; το μικρόν [Tr WII om. to], Jn. xvi. 18; — μικρόν ace. (of duration), Jn. xiii. 33 (Job xxxvi. 2); μικρόν χρόνον, Jn. vii. 33; xii. 35; Rev. vi. 11 ; xx. 3; ^fTii μικρόν, after a little while, Mt. xxvi. 73 ; Mk. xiv. 70, (-προ μικρόν. Sap. xv. .s). e. of quantity, i. e. nundjer or amount : μικρά ζύμη, 1 Co. v. 6 ; (ial. v. 9 ; of niunber, μικρόν ποίμνιον, Lk. xii. 32; of quantity, μικρά δϋναμις. Rev. iii. 8 ; neut. μικρόν (τι), α little, 2 Co. xi. 1,16. f. of rank or influence: Mt. x. 42; Lk. ix. 48; xvii. 2; 6 μικρότερος iv τη βασιλεία των οίφ. he that is inferior to the other citizens of the kingdom of heaven in knowledge of the gospel [R. V. but little in etc.; cf. W. 244 (229); B. § 123, 13], Mt. xi. 11; Lk. vii. 2S,• ΜΛητο5, -ου, ή, Miletus, a maritime city [now nearly ten miles fr. the coast (cf. .\cts xx. 38)] of Caria or Ionia, near the mouths of the ^Ia;ander and not far [c. 35 m. S.] from Ephesus. It was the mother of many [some eighty] colonies, and the birth-place of Thales, Anaximander, and other celebrated men : Acts xx. 15, 17; 2 Tim. iv. 20. [Lewin, St. Paid, ii. 90 sq.] • μίλιον, -ου, TO, (a word of Lat. origin [cf. B. 18 (16)]), a mile, among the Romans the distance of a thousand paces or eight stadia, [somewhat less than our mile] : Mt. V. 41. (Polyb., Strab., Plut.) * μιμ(ομαι, -οϋμαι ; (/ii/i05 [an actor, mimic]) ; to imitate: μιμητη<ι 415 Μιχαήλ τινά, any one, 2 Th. iii. 7, 9; τί, Heb. xiii. 7; 3 Jn. 11. [Find., Aeschyl., Hdt., al.] ' μιμ,ητήΐ, -οΰ, ό, an imitator : ■γίνομαι Ttw)r (gen• oi pers.), 1 Co. iv. 16; xi. I ; Eph. v. 1 ; 1 Th. i. 6; ii. 14; Heb. vi. 12; w. gen. of the thing, 1 Pet. iii. 13 Rec. (where LT TrAVH ζηλωταΐ). [Plat, Isocr., al.]* μιμνήσ-κω : (MNAQ [allied w. μ/κω. μακβάοω ; cf. Lat. maneo, moneo, mentio, etc.; cf. Curtius § 4'29]) ; to remind: Horn., Pind., Theogn., Eur., al. ; Pass, and Mid., pres. μιμνήσκομαι (Ileb. ii. 6 ; xiii. 3 ; rare in Attic) ; 1 ao.•. 4μνησθην \ pf. μίμνημαι ; 1 fut. pass, in a mid. sense, μνησθήσομαι (Ileb. x. 17 LTTrAVH); Sept. for iDf; to be recalled or to return to one's mind, to remind one's self of, to remember; ίμνήσθην, with a pass, signif. [cf. B. 52 (46)], to be recalled to mind, to be remembered, had in remembrance : ivamiov τίνος, before i. e. in the mind of one (see ivairtov, 1 c), Acts x. 31 ; Rev. xvi. 19, (pas- sively also in Ezek. xviii. 22 ; [Sir. xvi. 1 7 Rec.] ; and άναμνησθηναι, Num. x. 9; Ps. cviii. (cix.) 16); — with a mid. signif., foil, by a gen. of the thing [\V. § 30, 10 c], to remember a thing : Mt. .xxvi. 75 ; Lk. xxiv. 8 ; Acts xi. 16; 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; JudelT; μνησβηναι eXeovs, to call to remembrance former love, Lk. i. 54 (cf. Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 6) ; Trjs ίιαθήκη:, Lk. i. 72 ((Jen. ix. 15 ; Ex. ii. 24; 1 Mace. iv. 10; 2 Mace. i. 2); μη μνησβηναι των αμαρτιών Tivot, [Α. V. to remember no more'] i. e. to forgive, Heb. viii. 12 ; x. 17, (after the Hebr. ; see Ps. xxiv. (xxv.) 7; Lxxviii. (Ixxix.) S ; Is. xliii. 25 ; and on the other hand, to remember the sins of any one is said of one about to punish them, Jer. xiv. 10; 1 Mace. v. 4; vi. 12); w. gen. of a pers., to remember for good, remember and care for : Lk. xxiii. 42 ; foil, by on, Mt. v. 23 ; xxvii. 63 ; Lk. xvi. 25 ; Jn. ii. 17, 22; xii. 16 ; by as, Lk. xxiv. 6. pf. μίμνημαι, in the sense of a present [cf. W. 274 (257)], to be mindfid of: w. gen. of the thing, 2 Tim. i. 4 ; πάντα μου μίμνησθί, in all things ye are mindful of me, 1 Co. xi. 2 ; pres. μιμνησκομαι, w. gen. of the pers., to remem- ber one in order to care for him, Heb. ii. 2 (fr. Ps. viii. 5) ; xiii. 3. [Comp. : ava-, in-ava-, νπο-μιμνησκω.'] * μκΓί'ω, -ώ; impf. «yio-oi/f ; fut. /χισι^σω; 1 aor. ϊμίσησα; pf. μ^μϊσηκα; Pass., pres. ptcp. μισοίμινος; pf. ptcp. μ(μισημ4νο! (Rev. xviii. 2) ; Sept. for NJiy ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to hate, pursue with hatred, detest ; pass, to be haled, detested : τινά, Mt. v. 43 and Rec. in 44 ; xxiv. 10; Lk. i. 71 ; vi. 22, 27 ; xix. 14 ; Jn. vii. 7 ; xv. 18 sq. 23- 25; xvii. 14; Tit. iii. 3 ; 1 Jn. ii. 9, [11] ; iii. 13, 15 : iv. 20; Rev. xvii. 16; pass., Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 9; [Mk. xiii. 13]; Lk. xxi. 17; τί: Jn. iii. 20; Ro. vii. 15; Eph. v. 29; Heb. i. 9 ; Jude 23 ; Rev. ii. 6 and Rec. in 15 ; pass. ib. "viii. 2. Not a few interpreters have attributed to μισ(ϊν in Gen. xxix. 31 (cf. 30) ; Deut. xxi. 15 sq. ; Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xiv. 26; xvi. 13; [Jn. xii. 25]; Ro. ix. 13, the signification to love less, to postpone in love or esteem, to slight, through oversight of the circumstance that 'the Orientals, in accordance with their greater excitability, are wont both to feel and to profess love and hale where we Occidentals, with our cooler temperament, feel and express nothing more than interest in, or disregard and indifference to a thing'; Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. iL p. 304 ; cf. Rilckert, Magazin f. Exegese u. Theologie de* N. T. p. 2 7 sqq.* μ.ισ-θαΐΓοεα(Γ(α, -as, ή, {μισθοί and αττοδιδωμι ; cf. the μισθοδοσία of the Grk. writ. [W. 24]), payment of wages due, recompense : of reward, Heb. x. 35 ; xi. 26 ; of pun- ishment, Heb. ii. 2. (Several times in ecdes. writ.)* μισ-θ-οΐΓο-8ότη5, -ου, ό, (μισθο! and άποδίδωμί ; cf. the μισθοδότης of the Grk. writ.), (Vulg. remunerator) ; one u-ho pays wages, a rewarder: Heb. xi. 6. (Several tim^ in eccles. writ.) * (tto-eios, -a, -ov, also of two terminations [cf. W. § 11 . 1], {μισθός), employed for hire, hired: as subst. [A. \. hired servant], Lk. xv. 17, 19, [21 WH in br.], (Sept. for T3U?, Lev. xxv. 50; Job vii. 1. Tob. v. 12; Sir. vii. 20; xxxi. 27; xxxvii. 11. Anth. 6, 283, 3 ; Plut.).* μισθό;, -οΰ, ό, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for "^DU, also for m3ij"0, etc. ; 1. dues paid for work; wages, hire'. Ro. iv. 4 {κατά οφίίλημα) ; in a prov., Lk. x. 7 and 1 Tim. V. 18; Mt. XX. 8; Jas. v. 4; Jude 11 (on which see «χί'ω, fin.) ; μισβόί αδικίας, wages obtained by iniquity, Acts i. 18 ; 2 Pet. ii. 15, [cf. W. § 30, 1 a.]. 2. re- ward: used — of the fruit naturally resulting from toils and endeavors, Jn. iv. 36; 1 Co. ix. 18; — of divine recompense : a. in both senses, rewards and pun- ishments: Rev. xxii. 12. b. of the rewards which God bestows, or will bestow, upon good deeds and en- deavors (on the correct theory about which cf. Weiss, Die Lelire Christi vom Lohn, in the Deutsche Zeitschr. fur christi. Wissenschaft, 1853, p. 319 sqq.; Mchlhom, d. Lohnbegr. Jesu, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol., 1876, p. 721 sqq. ; [cf. Beyer in Herzog xx. pp. 4-14]): Mt. v. 12 ; vi. 2, 5, 16 ; x. 41 sq. ; Mk. ix. 41 ; Lk. vi. 23, 35; 1 Co. iii. 8, 14 ; 2Jn. 8; Rev. xi. 18; ΐχιιν μισθόν, to have a reward, is used of those for whom a reward is reserved by God, whom a divine reward awaits, Mu v. 46; 1 Co. ix. 17; with παρά τω ττατρΧ νμων iv τ. ονρ, added, Mt. vi. 1. c. of punishments : μισθός ahiKias, 2 Pet. ii. 13; τής ivaaf'Mas, 2 Mace. viii. 33.* μισβόο) : {μισθός) \ 1 aor. mid. ΐμισθωσάμην; to let out for hire; to hire [cf. W. § 38, 3]: τινά, Mt. xx. 1, 7. (Hdt., Arstph., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. for IDu, Deut xxiii. 4 ; 2 Chr. xxiv. 12.) * μίσθωμα, -τος, το, (μισθόω) ; 1. the price for which any- thing is either let or hired (Hdt., Isocr., Dem., Ael., al. ; of a harlot's hire, Hos. ii. 12; Deut. xxiii. 18; Mic. i. 7; Prov. xix. 13 ; Ezek. xvi. 31-34, and in class. Grk. [cf. Philo in Flac. § 16 fin.]). 2. that which is either let or hired for a price, as a house, dwelling, lodging [(cf. Β p. Lghtfi. Com. on Philip, p. 9 note *)] : Acts xxviiL 30.• μισθωτοί, -οΰ, d, {μισθόω), one hired, a hireling; Mk. L 20; J n. X. 12 sq. (Arstph., Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. for T3b•.) * Μιτυλήνη. -ης, η, Mitylene, the chief maritime town of the island of Lesbos in the .ilgean : Acts xx. 14. \^Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 84 sq.] * Μιχαήλ, ό, (l^y-Z, i. e, 'who like God?'), Michael μνα 416 μοι•χα\ίί the name of an archangel, who was supposed to be the guardian angel of the Israelites (Dan. xii. 1 ; x. 13, 21) : .lude 9 ; Rev. xii. 7. [BB.DD. s. v.] ' μνό, -as, η, a word of Eastern origin [cf. Schroder, Keil- inschriften u. 8. w. p. 143], Arab. ^^, Syr. ( t IVi . Ilebr. np (fr. n:o to appoint, mark out, count, etc.), Lat. 7tuna\ 1. in the O. T. a weight, and an imaginary coin or money of account, Cijual to one hundred shekels: 1 K. X. 1 7, cf. 2 Chr. ix. l(j ; 2 Esdr. ii. (i9, (otherwise in Ezek. xlv. 12 [cf. Bible Educator, index s. v. Maneh ; Schrarler in Riehm s. v. Mine p. 1000 s(j.]). 2. In Attic a weight and a sum of money cijual to one hun- dred drachuiac (see δραχμή [and B. U. s. v. Pound; esp. Schrwicr in Kiehni u. s.]) : Lk. xix. 13, 16, 18, 20, 24 sq.• μνάομαι, sec μιμνήσκω. Μνάσων, -avos, ό, (ΜΝΑί2), Miuison, a Christian of Cyprus: Acts xxi. 16. (The name was com. also among the Grks. ; [cf. Benseler's Pape's Eigennamen, s. v.].)* μν(ία, -as, ή, (μιμνησκω), remembrance, mcmori/, mention : fir'i πάσιι τή μν('ία υμών, as often as I remember you [lit. 'on all my rciiiinil)rance' etc. cf. W. § 18, 4], Phil. i. 3; ιτοίίϊσθαι μνιίαΐ' rivi'is, to make mention of one, Ro. i. 9 ; Eph.i.16; 1 Th.i.2; Philem.4, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 2.54 a.; Diog. Laert. 8. 2, 6G ; Sept. Ps. ex. (cxi.) 4) ; μν. ίχαν nvos, to be mindful of one, 1 Th. iii. 6 (Soph., Arstph., Eur., al.) ; άδίάλαπτιιν ίχι^ν την irtpi rivos μι /eiav, 2 Tim. i. 3.• μνήμα, -rot, ni, (μνάομαι. pf. pass, μέμνημαι); 1. a )7ionumenl or miniornil to perpetuate the memory of any person or thing (Ilom., I'lnd., Soi)h., al.). 2. a .• i> (/^Μφο/Ό')? blame : ίχαν μομφην πρόί τίνα, to have matter of complaint against any one, Col. iii. 13. (Pind., Tragg., al.) * μονή, -ης. ή, (μίνω), [fr. Hdt. down], a Staying, abiding, dwelling, (iliode : Jn. .xiv. 2; μοιη)ν ποίί ΐν ( L Τ Tr WH ποιΰσθαι, as in Thuc. 1, 131 ; Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 7; 13, 2, \), to make an (one's) abode, παρά rti/i metaph. of God and Christ by their power and spirit exerting a most blessed influence on the souls of beUevers, Jn. xiv. 23 ; see ποιώ, 1 c* μονογίνήί. -is, (μόνος and yevos), (Cic. unigena ; Vulg. [in Lk. unicus, elsewh.] and in eccl. writ. unigenitu.<), single of its kind, only, [A.V. only-begotten'] ; used of only sons or daughters (viewed in relation to their parents), lies, theog. 426, 448 ; Hdt. 7, 221 ; Plat. Critias 113 d.; Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 1; 2, 7, 4 ; μονογίνίς τ(κνον πατρί, Aeschyl. Ag. 898. So in the Scriptures : Heb. .xi. 1 7 ; μονυγ€νή fivai Tivi (to be one's only son or daughter), Judg. xi. 34 ; Tob. iii. 15; Lk. vii. 12; viii. 42; ix. 38 ; [cf. Westcott on Epp. of Jn. p. 162 sqq.]. Hence the ex- pression ό μονηγ. υ'ιος τηϋ θιοϋ and υΙος τοϋ θ(θΰ ό /ιοίΌν., Jn. iii. 16, 18; i. 18 [see below] ; 1 Jn. iv. 9 ; μονο-γ€νής πάρα πατρός, Jn. i. 14 [some take this generally, owin•' to the omission of the art. (cf. Green p. 48 sq.)], used of Christ, denotes the only son of God or one who in the sense in which he himself is the son of God has no brethren. He is so spoken of by John not because ό λόγος which was ΐνσαρκωθίίς in him was eternally generated by God μονός 418 μορφό the Father (the orthodox interpretation), or came forth from the being of God just before the beginnin•; of the world (Subordinationism), but because b^• the incarna- tion (ϊνσάρκωσΐ!) of tlie λόγος in liim he is of nature or essentially Son of God, and so in a very difTi^rent sense from that in which men are made by him τίκνα τον θ(ο{ι (Jn. i. 13). For since in the writings of John the title ό v'lbt τον θ(θν is given only to the historic Christ so called, neither the Logos alone, nor Jesus alone, but ό Xdyof ό ίνσαρκωθ(ί! OT Jesus through the Xoyos united with (iod, is ό μονογ. vibs τοϋ θ(ον. The reading μονογίνηί ^fof (without the article before /xoKo-y.) in Jn. i. 1«, — which is supported by no inconsiderable weight of ancient testimony, received into the text by Tregelies, and W'estcott and llort, defended with much learning by Dr. llort (" On μονογινης Seas in Scripture and Tra- dition " in his " Two Dissertations " Camb. and l>ond. 1876), and seems not improbable to Ilarnack (in the TheoL Lit.-Zeit. for 1S76, p. 541 sqq.) [and Weiss (in Meyer 6te Aull. ad loc.)], but is foreign to John's mode of thought and speech (iii. 16, 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9), dissonant ami harsh, — appears to owe its origin to a dogmatic zeal which broke out soon after the early days of the church ; [see articles on the reading by Prof. Abbot in the Bib. Sacr. for Oct. 1861 and in the Unitarian Rev. for June 1875, (in the latter copious reff. to other discussions of the same passage are given) ; see also Prof. Drummond in the Theol. Rev. for Oct. 1871]. Further, see Grimm, Kxgt. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 152 sq. ; [Westcott u. s.].* |iivo;, -η,-ον, Sept. chiefly for 12^, [fr. Ilom. down] ; 1. an adjective, alaue (without a companion) ; a. with verbs : (ivai, (νμίσ<(σθαι, KaraXiirrfffiui, etc., Mt. -xiv. 23 ; Mk. vi. 47 ; Lk. ix. 36 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; 1 Th. iii. 1 ; added to the pronouns tya, airos, ov, etc.: Mt. xviii. 15; Mk. ix. 2 ; Lk. xxiv. 18 ; Ro. xi. 3 ; xvi. 4, etc. b. it is joined with its noun to other verbs also, so that what is predi- cated may be declared to apply to some one person alone [cf. W. 131 (124) note]: Mt. iv. 10; Lk. iv. 8; xxiv. 1 2 [T om. L Tr br. WII reject the vs.] ; Jn. vi. 22 ; Ileb. ix. 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1 1 ; with a neg. foil, by άλλα, Mt. iv. 4. ύ μάνο! θ(0!, he who alone is God : Jn. v. 44 ; xvii. 3 ; Ro. xvi. 27 ; ό μόνος 8(σπότης, Jude 4. οΰκ ■ . . d μη μόνοΐ : Mt. xii. 4 ; xvii. 8 ; xxiv. 36 ; Lk. vi. 4 ; οϋδί'ΐΓ . . . tl μη μόνο!, Phil. iv. 15. i. q. forsaken, destitute of help, Lk. x. 40; Jn. viii. 16; xvi. 32, (Sap. x. 1). 2. Neut. μόνον as adv., alone, only, vierely : added to the obj., Mt. V. 47 ; X. 42 ; Acts xviii. 25 ; Gal. iii. 2 ; to the gen. Ro. iii. 29 [here WH mrg. μόνα>ν'\ ; referring to an action ex- pressed by a verb, Mt. Lx. 21 ; xiv. 36 ; Mk. v. 36; Lk. viii. ,50; Acts viii. 16; 1 Co. xv. 19; Gal i. 23; ii. 10. μόνον μή. Gal. V. 13 ; ού {μη) μόνον. Gal. iv. 18 ; Jas. i. 22 ; ii. 24 ; foil, by αλλά. Acts xix. 26 [L άΧΚά και ; cf. W. 498 (464) ; B. 370 (317)] ; by άλλα πολλώ μάλλον, Phil. ii. 12 ; by άλλα και, Mt. .xxi. 21 ; Jn. v. 18 ; xi. 52 ; xii. 9 ; xiii. 9; xvii. 20; Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. (see as above, esp. B.)]; xxi. 13; xxvi. 29 ; xxvii. 10; Ro. i. 32 ; iv. 12, 16, 23; 2 Co. vii. 7, etc. ; ov μόνον &€, aWa καί : Acts xix. 27; and often by Paul [cf. W. 583 (543)], Ro. v. 3, 1 1 ; vii:. 23 ; ix. 10; 2 Co. vii. 7; viii. 19 ; Phil. ii. 27 [here οΰ δί μόνον etc.] ; 1 Tim. v. 13 ; [2 Tim. iv. 8. «ατά μάνας (so. χώρας), see κατημόνας^. (ΐον-όφθαλμο;, -ov, (μόνος, οφθαΚμός), (Vu\g. luscus, ML• ix. 47), (lepriri-il of (inc ci/p, having one eye : Mt. xviii. 9 ; Mk. ix. 47. (lldt., ApoUod., Strab., Diog. Laijrt., al. ; \_Lol•. ad Phryn. p. 136; Bukk. Anecd. i. 280; Rulher• ford. New Phryn. p. 209 ; W. 24].) • μονόω, -ώ : {μόνος) ; fr. Ilom. down ; to make single or solitary; to leave alone, forsake: pf. pass. ptcp. χήρα μίμονωμίνη, i. e. without children, 1 Tim. v. 5, cf. 4.* μορφή, -ήί, ή, [fr. root signifying 'to lay hold of ', 'seize' (cfAjenn. Fussung); Fick, Pt. i. p. 174; Vanicek p. 719], fr. Horn, down, the form hy iithirh a person or thing strikes the vision ; the external a/>/>eanince : children are said to reflect ψνχης rt και μορφής ομοιότητα (of their parents)» 4 Mace. XV. 3 (4) ; (φαν€μώθη (v ίτίρα μορφή. Mk.xvi.l2; €V μορφή 6fov υπάρχων, Phil. ii. 6 ; μορφήν δοΰ\ον \αβών^ ibid. 7 ; — this whole passage (as I have shown more fully in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1873, p. 33 sqq., with which compare the different view given by Holsten in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 449 sqq.) is to be explained as follows : ivho, although (for- merly when he was λόγος ϊΊσαρκος) he bore the form (in which he appeared to the inhabitants of heaven) of God (the sovereign, opp. to μορφ. δούλου), yet did not think that this equality with God was to be eagerly clung to or re- tained (see άρπα-γμός, 2), hut emptied himself of it (see κ(νόω, 1) .so as to assume the form of a servant, in that he became like unto men (for angels also are δοϋλο» τοϋ ifoO, Rev. xix. 10; xxii. 8 sq.) and was found in fashion as a man. ((Jod pevei af\ άπλως iv τή αντοϋ μορφή. Plat. de rep. 2 p. 381 c, and it is denied that God φαντόζισθαι άλλοτε iv άΧλαις Ιδϊαις . . . κα'ι άλλάττοντα τό αίιτυϋ (ίδος fts ΤΓολλαΓ μορφας . . . και T^t ίαντον ιδίας iKJiaivtiv, ρ. 380 d.; ηκιστ hv ττολλα^ μορφας ίσ;(;οι 6 6(ός, (). 381 b. ; (νος σώματος οίσίαν μ(τασχηματίζ(ΐν κα'ι μ(τυχαράττ(ΐν els πολυτρόπους μ,ορφάς, Ρΐιίΐυ leg. ad Gaium §11; ου yap ω(τπΐρ το νόμισμα παράκημμα κα\ 6(ον μορφτι yivfTai. ibid. § 14 fin.; (iod ίργοις μΐν κ<η χάρισιν (ναργής και παντός οϋτινοσοϊιν φανιρώτιρος, μορφήν Be κα\ μ(γ(θος ημ'ιν aφave• στατος, Jo.scph. c. Αρ. 2, 22, 2.) * (Syn. μορφ-Ιι. σχήμα: ace. to Βρ. Lghtft. (see the thorough discussion in his ' Detached Note 'on Phil, ii.) and Trench (N. T. Syn. § Ixx.), μορφ-ή form differs from σχνμα figure, shiipe.ftshion, as tliat which is intrinsic and essential, from that which is outward and accidental. So in the main Bengel, Philippi, al., on Ko. xii. 2 ; but the distinction is re- jected by many ; see Meyer and esp. Fritzsche in loc. Yet the last-named commentator makes /ιορψί) Soihov in Phil. 1. c. relate to the c ο m ρ 1 e t e form, or nature, of a .servant ; and σχήμα to the e χ t er u al form, or human body.] μορφόω, -ώ : 1 aor pass. subj. 3 pers. sing, μορφωθή : [cf. μορφή, init.] ; to form : in fig. discourse άχρις [Τ Tr λνΐΐ μίχρις, q. v. 1 a.] ου μορφωθή Χρίστος iv νμ'ιν, i. e. literally, until a mind and life in complete harmony with the mind and life of Christ shall have been formed in you, Gal. iv. 19. (Arat. phaen. 375 ; Anth. 1, 33, 1; Sept Is. xUv. 13.) [COMP. : μίτα-, συμ-μορφ6ω.1' μορφωσι•; 419 μνρον μύρφωσίί. -ίως. ή, (μορφάω) ; 1. α fanning, shap- mg : των Βίνδρων, Theophr. c. pi 3, 7, 4. 2. fonn ; i.e. a. the mere form, semblance: fiafjSfiai, 2 Tim. iii. 5 . b. the form befitting the thing or truly express- ing the fact, the very form: τηί γνώσιω! κ. ttjs αληίίίοΓ, llo. ii. 20.• μο(Γχο-•τΓοΐ€'ω, -ώ : 1 aor, €μοσχοποίησα ', (μόσχος and τΓοίί'ω, [cf. W. 26]) ; to mate (an image of) a calf: Acts vii. 41, for wlaich Ex. .xxxii. 4 (ποίησ( μόσχον. (Eccles. writ.) * μ<5ο-χο5, -ου, ό, [cf. Schmidt ch. 76, 12; Curtius p. 593] ; 1. β tender, juicy, shoot; a sprout, of a plant or tree. 2. 6, ή, μ. offspring; a. of men [(cf. fig. Eng. scion)^, a boy, a girl, esp. if fresh and delicate. b. of animals, α !/oun^one. 3. acalf,abullocl;aheifer; so everywhere in the Bible, and always masc. : Lk. xv. 23, 27, 30 ; Heb. ix. 12, 19 ; Rev. iv. 7; (Sept. chiefly for 15 a bull, esp. a young bull; then for "103 cattle; for ΊΙ'ι^ an ox or a cow; also for hlj,^ a calf). [(Eur. on.)]* μουα-ικός, -ή, -όν, (μοϋσα [music, eloquence, etc.]) ; freq. in Grk. writ. ; prop, devoted to and skilled in the arts sacred to the muses; accomplished in the liberal arts; specifically, skilled in music ; playing on musical instru- ments; so Rev. xviii. 22 [R. V. minstrels'].'' μόχθο5, -ου, ό, hard and difficult labor, toil, travail; hardship, distress: 2 Co. xi. 27; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8; see Kiwros, 3 b. (Hes. scut. 306 ; Find., Tragg., Xen., al. ; Sept. chiefly for ^^>•.) [Syx. see Konos, fin.] * ^veXos, -oi, 6, (enclosed within, fr. μύω to close, shut), marrow: Heb. iv. 12. (From Hom. down ; Sept. Job xxi. 24.) • μνίω, -ω : pf. pass, μ^μϋημαι ; (fr. μϋα> to close, shut [(cf. Lat. muttts); Curtius § 478]); a. to initiate into the mysteries (Hdt., Arstph., Plat., Plut., al. ; 3 Mace, li. 30). b. univ. to leach fully, instruct; to accustom ene to a thing; to give one an intimate acquaintance with a thing : ev παιηΐ κ. ev πάσι μιμύημαι, to every condition and to all the several circumstances of life have I be- come wonted; I have been so disciplined by experience that whatsoever be my lot I can endure, Phil. iv. 12; [but others, instead of connecting (v παντί etc. here (as object) with μ^μ. (a constr. apparently without prece- dent; yet cf. LUnemann in W. § 28, 1) and taking the infinitives that follow as explanatory of the cv παντί etc., regard the latter phrase as stating the sphere (see παΓ, II. 2 a.) and the infinitives as epe.xegetic (W. § 44, 1) : in everything and in all things have I learned the secret both to be filled etc.].* μΰθο$, -ου, ό, fr. Hom. down ; 1. a speech, word, saying. 2. a narrative, story; a. a true narra- tive, b. a fiction, a fable ; univ. an invention, false- hood: 2 Pet. i. 16; the fictions of the Jewish theoso- phists and Gnostics, esp. concerning the emanations and orders of the seons, are cailed μΟΑοι [A. V. fables'] in 1 Tim. i. 4 ; iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 4 ; Tit. i. 14. [Cf. Trench § xc, and reff. s. v. yfveoKoyia.] ' μυκάομοα, -ωμοί ; (fr. μν or μϊι, the sound which a cow ^Lat. mugio']), to low, bellow, prop, of horned cattle (Horn., Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., al.) ; (o roar, of a lion, Rev. x. 3.* μ»)κτηρ£ζω : {μνκτήρ the nose) ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. μυκτηρίζίται; prop, to turn up the nose or sneer al; to mock, deride : τινά, pass, ov μνκτηρίζίται, does not suffer himself to be mocked, Gal. vi. 7. (For J;.;S, Job xxiL 19; Ps. Ixxix. (Ixxx.) 7; Jer. xx. 7; yKJ, Prov. i. 30 ; ni3, Prov. XV. 20 ; [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 39, 1 (and Harnack's note)]. 1 Mace. vii. 34; [1 Esdr. i. 49]; Sext. Emp. adv. math. i. 217 [p. 648, 11 ed. Bekk.].) [CoMP. : «V μυκτηρίζω.] * μυλικ05, -η, -όν, (μύλη a mill), belonging to a mill: Mk. ix. 42 RG; Lk. xvii. 2 LTTr WH.* μύλινοϊ, -i;, -01»; 1. made of mill-stones : Boeckh, Inscrr. ii. p. 784, no. 3371, 4. 2. i. q. μυΧικόί (see the preceding word) : Rev. xviii. 21 L WH.* μΰλοΐ, -ου, ό, [(Lat. mola; Eng. mill, meal)]; 1. a mill-stone [(Anthol. etc.)]: Rev. xviii. 21 [LWH μν- λιΐΌί, q. v.] ; μύΧο! όνικόί, Mt. xviii. 6 ; Mk. ix. 42 L Τ Tr AVH ; Lk. xvii. 2 Rec. ; a large mill consisted of two stones, an upper and an under one; the "nether" stone was stationary, but the upper one was turned by an ass, whence the name μ. dvueos. 2. equiv. to μύλι;, a mill [(Diod., Strab., Plut.)]: Mt. xxiv.41 LTTr WH : φωνή μύλου, the noise made by a mill, Rev. xviii. 22.* μνλών [not paroxytone; see Chandler § 596 cf. § 584], -ωνος, ό, place where a mill runs ; mill-house : Mt. xxiv. 41 R G. (Eur., Thuc, Dem., Aristot., al.) * Mvpa (LTTrWII Μύρρα (Tr pp- see P, p) [cf. Tdf. on Acts as below and WH. App. p. 160]), -ων, τά, Myra, a city on the coast [or rather, some two miles and a half (20 stadia) distant from it] of Lycia, a maritime region of Asia Minor between Carta and Pamphylia [B. D. s. v. MjTa; Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 186 sq.] : Acts xxvii. 5.* μυριάΐ, -aSot, ψ (μυρίοί), ffr. Hdt. down], Sept. for Π33Τ and 13"); a. ten thousand: Acts xix. 19 (on which pass, see άργνριον, 3 fin.). b. plur. with gen. i. q. an innumerable multitude, an unlimited number, ([like our myriads], the Lat. sexcenti. Germ. Tausend): Lk. xii. 1 ; .Acts xxi. 20; Rev. v. 1 1 [not Rec".' ]; ix. 16 [here L Τ δισμυριάδί 9, q. v.] ; used simply, of innumerable hosts of angels: Heb. xii. 22 [here G LTr put a comma after μυρίάσιν]; Jude 14; Deut. xxxiii. 2; Dan. vii. 10.* μυρ(ζω : 1 aor. inf. μνρίσαι; (μίρον); fr. Hdt. down; to anoint : Mk. xiv. S." μυρ£θ5, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down]; 1. innumer- able, countless, [A. V. ten thousaml]: 1 Co. iv. 15; xiv. 19. 2. with the accent drawn back (of. BUm. Ausf. Sprchl. § 70 Anra. 15, vol. i. 278; Passow s. v. fin.; [L. and S. s. V. III.]), μύριοι, -lat, -to, ten thousand : Mt. xviii. 24.* μνρον, -ου, το, (the grammarians derive it fr. μυρω to flow, accordingly a flowing juice, trickling sap ; but prob, more correct to regard it as an oriental word akin to μύρρα, Hebr. "I'D, "ΊΟ ; [pick (i. 836) connects it with r. smar 'to smear', with Λνΐιϊοΐι A'anicek 1198 sq. associates σμύρνα, μνρτος, etc.; cf. Curtius p. 7H]), ointment : Mt. xxvi. 7, 9 Rec, 12; Mk. xiv. 3-5; Lk. vii. 37 sq. ; xjdiL Ml 420 Μωσηι S6 ; .In. xi. 2 ; xii. 3, 5 ; Rev. xviii. 13 ; distinguished fr. cXatov [q. V. and see Trench, Syn. § xx.wiii.j, Lk. vii. 46. ([From Aeschyl., lldt. down] ; Sept. for jOiV fat, oil, I'rov. xxvii. 9; for 310 pi?, Ps. cxxxii. (cxxxiii.) 2.)* Μυσία, -as, ή. Mi/sia, a province of Asia Jlinor on tlie shore of tlie ^Egean Sea, between LyJia and the Pro- pontis ; it had among its cities Pergamum, Troas, and Assos : .\cts xvi. 7 s(i.• μιυστήριον, -ου, τό, {μύστης [one initiated ; fr. μυί'ω, q. V.]), in class. Grk. α liidden thing, secret, mi/steri/: μνστηριόν σου μη κατύττηί τω φίΚω, Menand. ; plur. gen- erally mi/.iteriex, reliyioan secrets, confided only to the initiated and not to be communicated by them to ordi- nary mortals; [of. Λ". F. ILrmnnn, Gottesdienstl. Alter- tliiimer der Griechen, § 32]. In the Scriptures 1. a hliJtlen or secret thing, not ohcioiis to tlie understanding : 1 Co. xiii. 2; xiv. 2; (of the secret rites of the Gentiles, Sap. xiv. 15, 23). 2. a hidden purpose or caiinsil; secret will : of men, τηϋ βασιΧίω!, Tob. xii. 7,11: της βον\ήί αϋτοΰ, .Judith ii. 2 ; of God : μυστήρια flfoO, the secret counsels which govern God in dealing ivith the righteous, which are hidden from ungodly and wicked men but plain to the godly, Sap. ii. 22. In the N. T., God's plan of providing salvation for men through Christ, which was once hidilen but now is revealed : Ro. xvi. 25 ; 1 Co. ii. 7 (on this see ev, I. 5 f.) ; Eph. hi. 9 ; Col. i. 2G sq. ; with toC θ(\ήματος αϋτοΰ added, Eph. i. 9 ; ToC ufov, which God formed. Col. ii. 2 ; [1 Co. ii. 1 Wlltxt.]; ToO Χριστοί, respecting Christ, Col. iv. 3 ; τοΰ (ναγγ(\ίου, which is contained and announced in the gospel, Ejih. vi. 19; (τιΧΐσθη το μυστ. τοΰ θιοϋ, said of the consummation of this purpose, to be looked for when Christ returns. Rev. .\. 7 ; τα μ. ttjs βασίΧιία! τά>ν οΐρ. or τον θ(οΰ, the secret purposes relative to the kingdom of God, Mt. xiii. 11 ; Mk. iv. 11 ; Lk. viii. 10; used of cer- tain single events decreed by God having reference to his kingdom or the salvation of men, Ro. xi. 25 ; 1 Co. XV. 51 ; of God's purpose to bless the Gentiles also with Balvation through Christ [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. i. 26], Eph. iii. 3 cf. δ ; with toC Χριστοί added, ibid. vs. 4 ; oiVo- νόμοι μυστηρίων θίοΰ, the stewards of God's mysteries, i. e. those intrusted with the announcement of (iod's secret purposes to men, 1 Co. iv. 1 ; used generally, of Christian truth as hidden from ungodly men : with the addition of τήί πι'στίωί, της (ίσ(β(1ας, which faith and godliness embrace and keep, 1 Tim. iii. 9, 16 ; ro μυστ. της ανομίας the mystery ο/ lawlessness, the secret pur- pose formed by lawlessness, seems to be a tacit antithesis to God's saving purpose, 2 Th. ii. 7. 3. Like Xn and TiD in rabbinic writers, it denotes the mystic or hidden .sen-fg : of an O. T. saying, Eph. v. 32 ; of a name, Rev. xvii. 5 ; of an image or form seen in a vision. Rev. i. 20 ; xvii. 5 ; of a dream, Dan. (Theodot.) ii. 18 sip 27-30, where the Sept. so render l^. (The Vulg. trans- lates the word sacramentum in Dan. ii. 18; iv. 6 ; Tob. xii. 7 ; Sap. ii. 22 ; Eph. i. 9 ; iii. 3,9; v. 32 ; 1 Tim. iii. 16; Rev. i. 20.) [On the distinctive N. T. use of the ■word cf. Campbell, Dissertations on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. i. ; Kendrick in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Mystery ; B[V Lghtft. on Col. i. 26.] * μυ-ωΐΓ&ζω ; (μϋωψ, and this fr. μίιίίν τους !mat to ebnt the eyes) ; to see dimly, see only what is near : 2 Pet. i. 9 [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) would make it mean here closing the eyes; cf. our Eng. bLink'\. (Aristot. problem. 31, 16, 2.5.)• μώλωψ, -ωποΓ, ό, (Hesych. τραΰμα κα\ 6 (Κ πΧηγης αίματωόης τόπος η και τά ί^(ρ)(όμΐνα των πληγών ΰδατα), α liruise, wale, wound that trickles with blood : 1 Pet. ή. 24 f r. Is. liii. 6 [where A. V. stripes']. (Gen. iv. 23 ; Ex. xxi. 25 ; Is. i. 6. Aristot., Plut., Anthol., al.) * μωμάομαι, -ωμαι : 1 aor. mid. ίμωμησάμην ; 1 aor. pass. ίμωμήθην; (μώμος, (\. V .) ; fr. llom. down ; to blame, βηά fault with, mock at: 2 Co. vi. 3; viii. 20. (Prov. ix. 7; Sap. .\. 14.) • μώμοϊ, -ου, ό, [perh. akin to μΰω, Curtius § 478 ; ct Vanicek p. 732], blemish, blot, disgrace; 1. cen- sure. 2. insult : of men who are a disgrace to a society, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [A. V. blemishes]. (From Horn, down ; Sept. for an, of bodily defects and blemishes. Lev. xxi. 16 sijq.; Deut. xv. 21; Cant. iv. 7; Dan. i. 4; of a mental defect, fault. Sir. xx. 24 (23).) • μωραίνω : 1 aor. ('μώρανα ; 1 aor. pass, ϊμωράνθην ; (μωρός) ; 1. in class. Grk. to be foolish, to act fool- ishly. 2. in bibl. Grk. a. to make foolish : pass. Ro. i. 22 (Is. xix. 11 ; .ler. x. 14 ; 2 S. xxiv. 10) ; i. q. to prove a person or thing to be foolish : την σοφίαν τοΰ κόσμου, 1 Co. i. 20 (την βουΧήν αυτών. Is. .\liv. 25). b. to make Jlat and tasteless: pass, of salt that has lost its strength and flavor, Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34.• μωρ(α, -u;, ή. (μωρός), first in Hdt. I, 146 [Soph., aLj, foolishness: 1 Co. i. 1«, 21, 23; ii. 14; iii. 19, (Sir. xx. 31).• μωρολο -yCa, -at, ή, (μωροΧόγος), (stultiloijuium, Plaut., Yul<^.), foolish talking: Eph. v. 4. (Aristot. h. a. 1, 1 1 ; Plut. mor. p. 504 b.) [Cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xxxiv.] * μωρός, -ά. -όν, [on the accent cf. W. 52 (51 ) ; Chandler §§ 404, AOa],fooli.'ih : with τυφλός, Mt. xxiii. 1 7, 1 9 [here TTr WII txt. om. Lbr. μωρ.~\ ; ro μωρον τοϋ θ(οΰ, an act or appointment of God deemed foolish by men, 1 Co. i. 25; i. q. without learning or erudition, 1 Co. i. 27; UL 18; iv. 10; imprudent, without forethought or wisdom, Mt. vii. 26 ; xxiii. 1 7, 19 [see above] ; x.xv. *? sq. 8 ; i. q. empty, useless, ζητήσας, 2 Tim. ii. 23 ; Tit. iii. 9 ; m imitation of the Hebr. S3: (cf. Ps. xiii. (xiv.) 1 ; Job ii. 10) i. (p impious, godless, (because such a man neglects and despises what relates to salvation), Mt. v. 22 ; [some take the word here as a Hebr. term (ΓΤ113 rebel) e.x- pressive of condemnation ; cf. Num. xx. 10 ; Ps. Ixviii. 8 ; but see the Syriac ; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc. ; Levy, Neuhebriiisch. u. Chald. AVorterbuch s. v. onn]. (.Sept. for ^2:, Deut. xxxii. 6; Is. x.xxii. 5 sq.; for S'p3, Ps. xciii. (xciv.) 8. [Aeschyl., Soph., a!.])* Μωο-ήΐ (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo (16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke) ; Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in Philo [cf. his " Buch v. d. Weltschopf." ed. Muller p. 1 1 7 (but Richter in his ed. has adopted Μωϋσής)], after the Μωσης 421 Ναζαρέτ Hebr. form ΠΠΟ, which in Ex. ii. 1 is derived fr. nc?p to draw out), and Μωϋσήϊ (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.'s 4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Jo-sejihus [" in Josephus tlie readings vary; in the Antiquities lie still adheres to the classic form (Μωσης), which moreover is the common form in his writings," Miiller's note on Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 31, 4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt Κωϋσης uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. cf. Otto's note on Justin ]\lart. apol. i. § 3-2 init.], and in the N. T. ed. Tdf. ; — a word which signifies in Egyptian water- saved, i. e. 'saved from water'; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. vol. ii. p. 313; and esp. 6'esenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 824 ; Knobel on E.K. ii. 10; [but its etymol. is still in dispute; many recent Egyptologists connect it with mesu i. e. ' child ' ; on the various interpretations of the name cf. MuUer on Joseph, c. Ap. I. c. ; Slanle;/ in B. D. s. v. Moses ; Schenkel in his BL. iv. 240 sq.]. From the remarks of Fritzsche, Gesenius, etc., it is evident also that the word is a trisyl- lable, and hence should not be written Μωνσης as it is by L Tr AVH, for ωυ is a dii)hthong, as is plain from lavrm, tuvto, Ionic for iaxrrov, ταΐτό; [cf• Lipsitis, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 140]; add, W. p. 44; [B. 19 (17)]; Eirald, Gesch. des Volkes Israel ed. 3 p. 119 note), -iws, 6, Mo.se.i, (Itala and Vulg. Mot/ses), the famous leader and legislator of the Israelites in their migration from Egypt to Palestine. As respects its de- clension, everywhere in the N. T. the gen. ends in -ίω( (as if from the nominative Μωϋσίύι), in Sept. -η, as Num. iv. 41, 45, 49, etc. dat. -η (as in Sept., cf. Ex. v. 20; xii. 28; xxiv. 1; Lev. viii. 21, etc.) and -el (for the Mss. and accordingly the editors vary between the two [but TWII -J only in Acts vii. 44 (influenced by the Sept. ?), Tr in Acts 1. c. and Mk. ix. 4, 5, ; L in Acts \. c. and Ro. ix. 15 txt. ; see Tdf. Proleg. p. 119 ; \VH. App. p. 158]), Mt. xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 4; Jn. v. 46; ix. 29; Acts vii. 44; Ro. ix. 15; 2 Tim. iii. 8. ace. -ην (as in Sept.), Acts vi. 11 ; vii. 35; 1 Co. x. 2; Heb. iii. 3; once -4a, Lk. xvi. 29 ; cf. [Tdf. and WH. u. s.] ; W. § 10, 1 ; B. u. 8. ; [Etym. Magn. 597, 8]. By meton. i. q. the books of Moses: Lk. xvi. 29; x.xiv. 27; Acts xv. 21; 2 Co. iii. 15. Ν [Ν, V : y {ίφ(\κυστικ6ν), cf. W. § 5, 1 b. ; B. 9 (8) ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 9" sq. ; WH. App. p. 146 sq. ; Thiersch, De Pentat. vers. Alex. p. 84 sq. ; Scrivener, Plain Introd. etc. ch. viii. § 4 ; Collation of Cod. Sin p. liv. ; see s. vv. διίο, (ίκοσι, iras. Its omission by the recent editors in the case of verbs (esp. in 3 pers. sing.) is rare. In ΛΥΗ, for instance, (wliere "the omissions are all deliberate and founded on evidence ") it is wanting in the case of ίση live times only (Mt. vi. 25; Jn. vi. 55ftis; Acts xviii. 10; Gal. iv. 2, — apparently without principle) ; in Tdf. never ; see esp. Tdf. u. s. In the dat. plur. of the .3d decl. the Mss. vary; see esp. Tdf. Proleg. p. 98 and WH. App. p. 146 sq. On c appended toaccus. sing, in α or i; (t)) see ipariv. On the neglect of assimilation, particularly in compounds with σύν and 4v, see those prepp. and Tdf. Pro- leg, p. 73 sq. ; WII. App. p. 149 ; cf. B. 8 ; W.48. On the interchange of ν and vv in such words as αττοκτΐννω {αττο- κτίνω). ΐκχνννω {εκχύνω). evaros {^vvaTos), 4vfvi)Kovra [ivve- ν^κοντα), ivios (evveos), ^Ιωάννη5 {'Ιωάνηί), and the like, see the several words.] Ναασσ-ών, (jlU'nj [i. e. 'diviner', 'enchanter']), ό, in- decl., Naasfoii [or N^aa.ihon, or (best) AVi/i.vAon], a man mentioned in (Ex. vi 23; Num. i. 7; Ruth iv. 20) Mt. I. 4 and Lk. iii. 32.* Ναγγοί, (fr. riJ3 to shine), ό, indecl., (\''ulg. [Naggae, and (so A. V.)] Nagge), Naggai, one of Christ's ances- tors : Lk. iii. 25.• Ναζαρ€τ [(so Rec." everywhere ; Lchm. also in Mk. i. 9; Lk.ii. 39,51; iv. 16; Jn. i. 45 (46) sq.; Tdf. in Mk. i. 9; Jn.i. 45(46) sq.; Tr txt. in Lk. i. 26 ; ii. 4 ; iv. 16; Jn. i. 45 (46) sq. ; Tr mrg. in Mk. i. 9 ; Lk. ii. 39, 51 ; and WII everywhere except in four pass, soon to be mentioned), Na^apcO (so Rec."' ten times, Rec.'"^' six times, Τ and Tr except in the pass, already gi\ en or about to be given; LinMt. ii. 23; xxi. 1 1 (so AVH here) ; Lk. i. 26 ; Acts .\. 38 (so WII here)), Νο^αράθ (L in Mt. iv. 13 and Lk. ii. 4, after cod. Δ but with "little other at- testation" (Ilort)), Ν αζαρά (Mt. iv. 13TTrWH; Lk. iv. 16 TWII)], ή, indecl., (and τά Νά^αρα, Orig. and JuL African, in Euseb. h. e. 1, 7, 14 ; cf. Keim, Jesu von Naz. i. p. 319 sq. [Eng. trans, ii. p. 16] and ii. p. 421 sq. [Eng. trans, iv. p. 108], who thinks Nazara preferable to the other forms [but see WH. App. p. 160'; Tdf. Proleg. p. 120; Scrivener, Introd. eh. viii. § 5; Alford, Greek Test, vol. i. Proleg. p. 97]), Nazareth, a town of lower (ialilee, mentioned neither in the O. T., nor by .losephus, nor in the Talmud (unless it is to be recognized in the appellation 1V1 ;5, given there to Jesus Christ). It was built upon a hill, in a very lovely region (cf. Renan, Xie de .lesus, 14»• ed. p. 27 sq. [Wilbour's trans. (N. Y. 1865) p. 69 sq. ; see also Robinson, Researches, etc. ii. 336 sq.]), and was distant from Jerusalem a three days' journey, from Tiberias eight hours [or less] ; it was the home of Jesus (Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 1) ; its present name is en Nazi• rah, a town of from five to six thousand inhabitants (cf• Ναζαρηνόί 422 Ναοΰμ Baedeker, Palestine and Syria, p. 859): Mt. ii. 23; iv. 13; xxi. 11 ; Mk. i. 9; Lk. i. 26 ; ii. 4, 39, 51 ; iv. 16; Jn. i. 45 (4G) scj. ; Acts x. 39. As respects the He- brew form of the name, it is disputed whether it was 1SJ 'a sprout', '!*''oot ', (so, hesiik-s others, Henijslenberg, Christol des A. Τ ii. l-.'4 si^. [Ivng. traus. ii. lOil sq.]; but cf. Giexeler'in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1831, p. 5«.S sqO. or rr^yj ' protectress', ' ^uard ', (cf. 2 K. xvii. 9 ; so lieim u. s.) or n'lV: ' sentinel ' (so Delilzsch in the Zeitschr. f. Luth. Theoi. for 1876, p. 401). or ni.i'J 'watch-tower* (no Ε watd in the Getting, gclehrt. Anzeigen for 1867, p. 1602 S(|.). For a further account of the town cf. Rob- inson, as above, pp. 333-343 ; Tohler, Nazareth in Palas- tina. Berl. 1S6S; [Hackett in B. D. s. v. Jsazareth].* Ναζαρηνοί, -oC, 6. a Nazarene, of Nazareth, sprunf/from Ν<ιζαη•ι/ι, a patrial name a])plied by the Jews to Jesus, because he had lived at Xazareth with his parents from his birth until he made his public appearance : Mk i. 24; xiv. 67 ; xvi. 6 ; Lk. iv. 34 ; [xxiv. 19 L mrg. Ϊ Tr txt. ΛΥΗ]; and L Τ Tr WII in Mk. x. 47.* Ναζωραΐος, -ου, 6, i. q. Ναζαρηνο!, q. v. ; Jesus is so called in Mt. ii. 23 [cf. Ii. D. s. v. Nazarene ; Bleek, Synopt. Evang. ad loc] ; xxvi. 71; Mk. x. 47 RG; I^k. xviii. 37 ; xxiv. 19 RG L txt. Trmrg. ; Jn. xviii. 5, 7; xix. 19; Actsii.22; iii. 6 ; iv 10; vi. 14 ; [ix. 5. L br.] ; xxii. 8 ; xxvi. 9. o! Να^ωραΐοι [.\. V. the ^'azarenes~\, followers of ^Ιησοΐις ό Νίΐ^ωραίοί, was a name given to the Christians by the Jews, Acts xxiv. 5.* Ναθάν or (so L mrg. Τ WII) Ναίάμ, ό, (jn: [' given ' sc. of God]), Nathan : a son of David the king (2 S. v. 14), Lk. iii. 31.* Ναθαναήλ, 6, (Sxjnj gift of God), Nathanael, an inti- mate disci|)le of Jesus : Jn. i. 45—49 (46-50) ; xxi. 2. He is commonly thought to be identical with Bartlmlo- meu; because as in Jn. i. 45 (46) he is associated with Philip, so in Mt. x. 3 ; Mk. iii. 18 ; Lk. vi. 14 B.artholo- mew is ; Nathanael, on this supposition, was liis personal name, and Biirlliolomew a title derived from his father (see BupioAopoiot). But in Actsi. 13 Thomas is placed between Philip and Bartholomew ; [see Β D. s. v. Na- thaniel]. Sjidlh in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theologie, 1868, pp. 108 sq (ό) θ(ος ικκρών άλλα ζώντων, God is the guardian God not of the dead but of the living, Mt. xxii. 32; Mk. xii. 27; Lk. xx. 38. 2. trop. a. [spiritually dead i. e.] rfes/iiureo/ α life that recognizes and is devoted to God, because given veKpo'o 424 vewKopot up to trespasses and sins; indclife as respects doing rii/ht: Jn. V. 2.7; Ro. vi. 13; Epli. v. 14; Rev. iii. 1; with Toit ηαριιπτώμιισιν (dat. of cause [cf. W. 412 (384 sq.)]) added, E|>h. ii. 1, 5; (v [but Ί" Tr Wfl ora. fV] rois παρατττ. Col. ii. 13; in tlie pointed savin;; 3(f)€tTovs xficpoOt θάψαι tovs iavTUv vtKpols, leave those who are inditlerent to the sal- vation offered thtni in the gospel, to bury the bodies of their own dead, Mt.viii. 22; I,k. i.\. liO. b. mu\. desti- tute oj'fnrce or power, inactivi•, inoperative : rfi αμαρτία, unaffected by the desire to sin [cf. \V. 210 (19^); 1^• § 133, \->], Ro. vi. 11 ; of things: Αμαρτία, Ro. vii. 8; πίστκ, .las. ii. 1 7, 20 [R G], 2il ; (pya, powerless and fruit- less (see €i>yov, 3 p. 248' bot.), Heb. vi. 1 ; L\. 14. [Cf. θνητός, fin.] νίκρόω, -ώ : 1 aor. impv. ικκρώσατί; pf. pass. ptcp. ρινίκρωμίνο!', to make dead (Vulgate and Lat. Fathers viiirlijico), to put to death, slay, τινά, prop., Anthol. a|ip. 313,5; pass. ««κρωμίκοΓ, hvperbolically, triirn out, of an impotent old man, lleb. .\i. 12; also σώμα vcvfKp- Ro. iv. 19; equiv. to lo deprive 0/ power, destroy l/ie sirenr/lli oj: τα μίλη, i. e. the evil desire lurking in the members (of the body), Col. iii. 5. (τα δόγματα, Antonin. 7, 2 ; την (ξιν, Plut. de primo frig. 21 ; [άνθρωπος, of obduracy, Eiiictet. diss. 1, 5, 7].) ' ViKpuo-is, -ίωί, η, (vfκpόω) ; 1. prop, a pulling lo death (Vulg. morlificatio in 2 Co. iv. 10), killing. 2. i. q. TO ναφοΰσθαι, [the being put to death], with τοΰ Ίησηΰ added, i. e. the (protracted) death [A. V. the di/tiir/'j which .Jesus underwent in God's service [on the gen. cf. W. 189 (1 78) no(e], Paul so styles the marks of perpetual trials, misfortimes, hardships attended with peril of death, evident in his body [cf. Meyer], 2 Co. iv. 10. 3. 1. q. TO ν(ν(κρωμίΐΌν civai, Ihe dead state [A. V. deadness"], utter sluggishness, (of bodily members and organs, Galen) : Ro. iv. 19.* ν€θ-μηνΙα, see νονμηνία. vc'os, -a,-ov, [allied with Lat. norus, Germ, neu, Eng. new; Curtius § 433], as in (irk. auth. fr. Horn, down, 1. recently bom, young, youthful: Tit. ii. 4 (for "^i'J, Gen. xx.xvii. 2 ; Ex. x.N.xiii. 11); οΓνοί w'os, recently made, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22; Lk. v. 37-39 [but 39 WII in br.], (Sir. ix. 10). 2. new. 1 Co. v. 7; Heb. xii. 24; i q. born again, avBpamos (q. v. 1 f.). Col. iii. 10. [Syn. see καινός, fin.] ' vtoo-o-os and (so TWH, see νοσσιά) νοσσάς, -ov, ό, (κίΌϊ), a young (creature), young bird: Lk. ii. 24. The form νοσσός appears in the Vat. txt. of the Sept. ; but in cod. Ale.x. everywhere ι>ίοσσόί; cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. p. 1S5 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 206 sq. ; [cf. W. 24]. (In (irk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; Sept. often for J3, of the young of animals, as Lev. xii. 6, 8 ; Job xxxviii. 41.)• ν€6τη5, -ιμος, ή, (νιος), fr. Ilom. down; Sept. chiefly for D""ii> J; youth, youthjul age: 1 Tim. iv. 12; tV vtorrf ros μου, from my boyhood, from my youth, Mt. xix. 20 [R G] ; Mk. X. 20 ; Lk. xviii. 21 ; Acts .x.xvi. 4 ; Gen. viii. 21; Jobxxxi. 18, etc.* νί6-φυτθ5, -ην, {viot and φύω), newly-planted (Job xiv. 9 ; Is. V. 7, etc.) ; trop. β new convert, neophyte, [A. V. novice, i. e.j (one who has recently become a Christian): 1 Tim. iii. 6. (Eccles. writ.) • Ν(ρων [by etymoh 'brave', 'bold*],-ωμoΓ, 6, Nero, the well-known Roman emperor: 2 Tim. iv. 23 Rec. [i. e. in tlie subscription].* vtia; 1 aor. ptcp. ν(νσας; to give a nod; to signify by a nod, [A. V. to beckon'l : τιχί, foil, by an inf. of what one wishes to be done, Jn. xiii. 24; Acts xxiv. 10. (From Horn, down ; Sept. Prov. iv. 25.) [Comp. : δια-, eV, tv-, ('πι-, κατα-ν^ΰω.'] * ν€ψ<λη, -ης, η, (ν(φος), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for Ui\, but also for 3j,; and ρΠΕ?; a cloud: [v. φωτιινή, Mt. xvii. 5]; Mt. xxiv. 30; xxvi. G4; Mk. ix. 7; xiii. 26; xiv. C2 ; Lk. ix. 34 sq. ; xii. 54 ; xxi. 27 ; Acts L 9 ; 1 Th. iv. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 17 [Rec.]; Jude 12; Rev. i. 7; x. 1; xi. 12; xiv. 14 Sijq. ; of that cloud in which Jehovah is said (Ex. xiii. 21 sq., etc.) to have gone before the IsraeHtes on their march through the wilderness, and which Paul represents as spread over them (ύπο την νιφί^ην ησα», cf. Ps. civ. (cv.) 39 ; Sap. x. 1 7) : 1 Co. x. 1 sq. [Syn. see ι/ίφοΓ.] * Νίφβαλί(μ [and (so Τ edd. 2, 7, WH in Rev. vii. 6) Τ<Ι(φθάλίμ: see WII. A pp. p. 155, and s. v. I, i], 6, ("Snsj, i. e. ' my wrestling ' [cf. Gen. .xx.x. 8], or ace. to what seems to be a more correct interpretation ' my crafti- ness ' [cf. Joseph, antt. 1, 19, 8; Test. xii. Patr. test. Neph. § 1], fr. Sna unused in Kal; cf. Ruetschi in Ilerzog .X. p. 200 scp), Naphtali, the sixth son of the patriarch Jacob, by Bilhah, Rachel's maid : Rev. vii. 6 ; by meton. his posterity, the tribe of Naphtali, Mt. iv. 18, 15.* ν('ψο$, -out, [allied with Lat. nubes, nebula, etc.], τό, Sept. for 3>; and |:;•, a cloud; in the N- T. once trop. a large, dense multitude, a throng: μαρτύρων, Heb. xii. 1 often so in prof, auth., as «φ. Λ'ρώων, πιζών, ψαρύν, κο- λοίών, Horn. II. 4, 274 ; 16,66; 17,755; 2.J,133; άνθρώ- πων, Ildt. 8, 109; στρονθων, Arstph. av. 578; ακριδών, Diod. 3, 29; peditum equitumque nubes, Liv. 35, 49.* I Syn. ν4φος, ν(φί\η: vt'^os is general, «ψίλτ; specific ; the former denotes tlie great, shapeless collection of vapor obscuring the heavens ; the latter designates particular and definite masses of tlie same, suggesting form and limit. Cf. Schmidt vol. i. ih. 36 | vt^pii, -οΰ, 5, a kidney (Plat., Arstph.) ; plur. ike kid- neys, the loins, as Sept. for m'Ss, used of the inmost thoughts, feelings, purposes, of the soul : with the addi- tion of καρδίας. Rev. ii. 23, with which cf. Ps. vii. 10; Jer. xi. iO; xvii. 10; Sap. i. 6.* ve(i>-Kdpos, -ου, «5, η, (veas or ναός, and κορίω to sweep ; [questioned by some ; a hint of this deriv. is found in Philo de sacerd. honor. § 6 (cf. veaKopia, de somniis 2, 42), and Hesvch. s. v. defines the word ό τον vabv κοσμών Kopeiv yap τ6 aaipeiv ΤΚεγον (cf. s. v. σηκοκόρος ; so Etym. .Ma^'n. 407, 27, cf. s. v. ν(ωκόρος) ; yet Suidas s. v. ico/Jif p. 2157 c. says v. ου χ ό πάρων τ. ν. αλλ' 6 ΐπιμ(\ουμ(νοί αυτόν (cf. S. νν. νίωκόρος, σηκοκάρος) ; hence some connect the last half with root κορ. κο\, cf . Lat. euro, coloj) ; 1. prop, one who sweeps and cleans a temple. 2. βηί ν€ωτ€ρίκος 425 who has charge of a temple, lo keep and adorn it, a sac- ristan : Xen. an. 5, 3, 6 ; Plat. legg. 6 p. 759 a. 3. the worshipper of a deity (oCi i. e. the Israelites ό deos iavra ν(ωκόρου^ rjytv through the wilderness, Joseph, b. j. 5, 9, 4) ; as appears from coins still extant, it was an honorary title [temple-I.eeper or temple-warden (cf. 2 above)] of certain cities, esp. of Asia ilinor, in which the special worship of some deity or even of some deified human ruler had been established (cf. Stephanus, Thes. v. p. 1472 sq.; [cf. B. D. s. v. worshipper J); so v. τη! Άμτϊ- μιδο9, of Ephesus, Acts xix. 35 ; [see Bp. Lghtft. in Con- temp. Rev. for 1878, p. 294 sq. ; Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus (Lond. 1877), .\pp. passim].* ν£ωτ£ρίκ09, -η, -of, (vftuTfpos, (j. v.), peculiar to the age of ijoulh, youlhful: ίπιθυμίαι, 2 Tim. ii. 22. (3 Mace. iv. 8; Polyb. 10, 24, 7; Jo.-ej)!!. antt. IG, 11, 8.)* vcUTcpos, -a, -ov, (compar. of «Or, q. v.), [fr. Horn, down], younger; i. e. a. younger (than now), Jn. xxi. 18. b. young, youthful, [A. V. younger (rela- tively)]: 1 Tim. V. 11, 14; Tit. ii. 6; opp. to πρεσβύτε- ροι, 1 Tim. V. 1 sq. ; 1 Pet. v. 5. c. [strictly] younger by birth: Lk. xv. 12 sq. (4 Mace. xii. 1). d. an attendant, servant, (see νεανίσκο!, fin.) : Acts v. G ; infe- rior in rank; opp. to ό μείζων, Lk. xxii. 26.* νή, a particle employed in affirmations and oaths, (common in Attic), and joined to an ace. of the pers. (for the most part, a divinity) or of the thing affirmed or sworn by [B. § 149, 17]; by (Lat. per. Germ, bei) : 1 Co. XV. 31 (Gen. xlii. 15 sq.).• νήθω; to spin: Mt. vi. 28 ; Lk. xii. 27. (Plat, polit. p. 289 c. ; Anthol. ; for Πΐφ, Ex. xxxv. 25 sq.) * νψηάΐω [cf. \V. 92 (87)]; (νήπιο!, q. v.) ; to be a babe (infant): 1 Co. xiv. 20. (Hippocr. ; eccles. writ.)* νήτηοί, -α, -οκ, (fr. νη, an insep. neg. prefix [Lat. ne- /a.v. ne-qunm, ni-si, etc. cf. Curtius § 437], and error); as in Grk. writers fr. Hom. down, a. an infant, little child: Mt. xxi. IG (fr. Ps. viii. 3) ; 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; Sept. esp. for '7'^li* and I'^ij.'• b. a minor, not of age : Gal. iv. 1 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. c. metaph. childish, untaught, unsLilled, (Sept. for 'Γ13, Ps. xviii. (xLx.) 8 ; cxviii. (cxix.) 130; Prov. i. 32): Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21 ; Ro. ii. 20; Gal. iv. 3; Eph. iv. 14; opp. to τέλειοι, the more advanced in understanding and knowledge, Ileb. v. 13 sq. (Philo de agric. § 2) ; νήπ- έν Χριστώ, in things pertaining to Christ, 1 Co. iii. 1. In 1 Th. ii. 7 L λΥΠ [cf. the latter's note ad loc] have hastily received νηπιοι for the common reading ήτηοι." Νηρίύϊ [(cf. Vanicek p. 1158)], -ίωι, 6, Nereus, a Christian who lived at Rome : Ro. xvi. 15 [where Lmrg. NTjpe'a»]•* Νηρ( and (so Τ Tr WIT) ίίηρεί [see «, »], i, (fr. ij a lam])), Neri, the grandfather of Zenibbabel : Lk. iii. 27.* νησίον, -ου, το', (dimin. of νησο!), a small island: Acts ixvii. IG [(.Strabo)].* νή<Γ<«, -ov. ή, («ω to swim, prop. ' floating land '). Q» island: Acts .xiii. 6; xxvii. 26; xxviii. 1, 7, 9, 11; Rev. L 9 ; vi. 14 ; xvi. 20. (Sept. for 'K ; [fr. Hom. down].) * ι^ΚΓΤίίο, -ar, ή, {ντστενω. q. v.), a fasting, fast, i. e. ab- stinence from food, and a. voluntary, as a religione exercise: of private fasting, Mt. xvii. 21 [TWHom. Tr br. the vs.] ; Mk. ix. 29 [T \VH om. Tr mrg. br.] ; Lk. iL 37 ; Acts xiv. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5 Rec. of the public fast prescribed by the Mosaic Law (Lev. xvi. 29 sqq. ; .xxiii 27 sqq. [BB.UD. s. v. Fasts, and for reff. to .Strab., Philo, Joseph., Plut., see Sojih. Lex. s. v. 1]) and kept yearly on the great day of atonement, the tenth of the month Tisri : Acts xxvii. I) (the month Tisri comprises a part of our September and October [cf. B.D. s. v. month (at end)]; the fast, accordingly, occurred in the autumn, ή χειμίριο! ωρα, when navigation was usually dangerous on account of storms, as was the case with the voyage referred to). b. a fasting to which one is driven by want: 2 Co. vi. 5; xi. 27; (Ilippocr., Aristot., Philo, Joseph., Pint., Ael., Athen., al. ; Sept. for Dli').* νηστίύω ; f ut. νηστείσω ; 1 aor. [inf. νηστείσαι (Lk. v. 34 Τ WII Trtxt.)], l)tcp. νηστεύσα! ; (fr. v^ortt, q. v.) ; to fast (Vulg. and eccles. writ, j'ejuno), i. e. to abstain as a religious exercise from food and drink: either entirely, if the fast lasted but a single day, Mt. vi. 16-18; Lx. 14 sq.; Mk. ii. 18-20; Lk. v. 33, [34, 3.5]; xviii. 12; Acts .\. 30 Ii G ; xiii. 2, [3] ; or from customary and choice nourishment, if it continued several days, Mt. iv. 2, cf. xi. 18; νηστεύει συνέχω! και αρτον εσθιει μόνον μετά αΧα- ΤΟ! κα'ι το ποτΰν αΐτοϋ ΰδωρ. Acta Thom. § 20. (Arstph., Plut. mor. p. 626 sq. ; Ael. v. h. 5, 20; [Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 34, 5 (where see Miiller)]; Sept. for Dli•.) * νήστίϊ, ace. plur. νήστεί! and (so Tdf. [cf. Proleg. p- 118]) νήστί! (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 326; Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. p. 796 sq.; cf. [WH. App. p. 157']; B. 26 (23)), 0, ή, (fr. vr] and εσθίω, see νηπιοί), fasting, not having eaten: Mt. xv. 32; Mk. viii. 3. (llom., Aeschyl., Hip- pocr., Arstph., al.) * νηφάλ(θΐ (so Rec." in 1 Tim. iii. 2, 11. [where Rec.'" -Xaior], after a later form) and νηφάλιο! [" alone well attested" (Hort)], -ov, (in Grk. auth. generally of three term.; Ιτ. νηφω), sober, temperate ; abstaining from wine, either entirely (Joseph, antt. 3, 12, 2) or at least /rom its immoderate use : 1 Tim. iii. 2, 1 1 ; Tit. ii. 2. (In prof, auth., esp. Aeschyl. and Plut., of things free from all infusion or addition of wine, as vessels, offerings, etc.)* νήφω; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. [ilur. νή\Ι/ατε•, fr. Theogn., Soph., Xen. down ; lo be sober ; in the N. T. everywh. trop. to be calm and collected in spirit ; to be temperate, dispassionate, circumspect : 1 Th. v. 6, 8 ; 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 13; v. 8; eir τα! προσενχά!, unto (the offering of) prayer, 1 Pet. iv. 7. [Syn. see aypimvia ; and on the word see EUic. on Tim. 1. c. Comp. : ava-, έκ-νήφω.^* Ntyep, ό, (a Lat. name ['black ']), Niger, surname of the prophet Symeon : Acts xiii. 1.* Νικόνωρ, r(i. e. ' conqueror ')],-opor, 6, Nicanor, of An- tioch [?], one of the seven deacons of the church at Je- rusalem: Acts vi. 5.• νικάω, -ώ; pres. ptcp. dat. νικοϊιντι. Rev. ii. 7 Lchm. 17 LTTr, [yet all νικωνται in .xv. 2] (cf. ερωτάω, init.); fut. ΐΊκιίσω; \ &οτ. ενϊκησα; γιί.νενίκηκα; (νίκη); [fr. Hom. down] ; to conquer [A. V. overcome'\ ; a. absol. le νίκη 426 V06C* carry off the victory, come off victorious : of Christ, vic- torious over all his foes, Rev. iii. 21 ; vi. 2 ; ΐνίκησί» . ■ ■ άνοΊξαι κτΚ. hath so cotKjuered that he now has the right and power to open etc. llev. v. 5 ; of Christians, that hold fast their faith even unto death against the power of their foes, and their temptations and persecutions, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 26; iii. 5, 12, 21; .\.\i. 7; w. «κ τοΟ fli;piou added, to comiuer and thereby• free themselves from the power of the beast [R. V. to come victorious from; of. W. 367 (.«4 sq.) I B. 147 (128)], Rev. xv. 2. when one is ar- raigned or goes to law, to icin the case, maintain one's cause, (so in the Attic orators ; also vtxav δίκην, Eur. El. 955) : Ro. iii. 4 (from Sept. of Ps. 1. (li.) 6). b. with ace. of the obj. : τινά, by force, Lk. xi. 22 ; Rev. xi. 7 ; xiii. 7 [L om. WH Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; of Christ the conciueror of his foes. Rev. xvii. 14 ; τον κόσμον, to deprive it of power to harm, to subvert its influence, .In. xvi. 33 ; νικαν Tiva or η is used of one who by Christian constancy and courage keeps himself unharmed and spotless from his adversary's devices, solicitations, assaults: tlie devil, 1 .In. ii. 13 sq. ; Rev. xii. 1 1 ; false teachers, I Jn. iv. 4 ; τον κόσμον, ibid. v. 4 sq. νικάν το ττονημον iv τω ayaS^, by the force which resides in goodness, i. e. in kindness, to cause an enemy to repent of the wrong he has done one, Ro. xii. 21 ; νικΰσθαι υπό τοϋ κακοϋ, to be disturbed by an in- jury and driven to avenge it, ibid. [CoMP.: ύπΕρ-ι/«άω.] * νίκη, -ης, ή, [fr. Horn, down], victory : 1 Jn. v. 4 [cf. «Ίκοί ]. ■ Κικ68ημο$, (νίκη and δ^ /ios [i. e. 'conqueror of the people '] ), -ου, ό, Xicodeynus, (rabbin. [iTlpJ), a member of the Sanhedrin who took the part of Jesus : Jn. iii. 1, 4, 9 ; vii. 50 ; xix. 39.* ΝικολοΙτη?, -ου, ό, a follower of Nicolaus, a Nicola' itan: plur.. Rev. ii. 6, 15, — a name which, it can scarcely be doubted, refers symbolically to the same persons who in vs. 14 are charged with holding την διδαχην Βαλαάμ, i. e. after the example of Balaam, casting a stumbling-block before the church of God (Xum. xxiv. 1-3) by upholding the liberty of eating things sacrificed unto idols as well as of committing fornication ; for the Grk. name Νικό- λαοΓ coincides with the Hebr. D^^Sa ace. to the interpre- tation of the latter which regards it as signifying destruc- tion of the people. See in Βαλαάμ; [cf. BB.DD. s. vv. Nicolaitans, Nicolas ; also Comm. on Rev. 11. cc.].* Νικόλαο;, -ου, ό, (νίκη and λαοί), Nicolaits [Α. V. Nico- ids], a proselyte of Antioch and one of the seven deacons of the church at Jerusalem : Acts vi. 5.* Νικό•ΐΓολΐ5, -ews, ή, (city of victory), Nicopolis : Tit. iii. 1 2. There were many cities of this name — in Armenia, Pontus, Cilicia, Epirus, Thrace ^ — wliich were generally built, or had their name changed, by some conqueror to commemorate a victory. The one mentioned above seems to be that which Augustus founded on the promontory of Epirus, in grateful commemoration of the victory he won at Actium over Antony. The author of the spurious subscription of the Epistle seems to have had in mind the Thracian Nicopolis, founded by Trajan [(?) cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.] on the river Nestus (or Nessua), since he calls it a city ' of Macedonia.' [B. D. s. v.] • vIkos, -our, TO, a later form i. q. νίκη (cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 617; [B. 23 (20); AV. 24]), victory: 1 Co. xv. 55, 57, (2 Mace. X. 38; [1 Esdr. iii. 9]) ; «f viicos, until he have gained the victory, Mt. xii. 20 ; κατίπόθη ό θάνατο! fit viKos, [A. V. death is sivallowed up in victory] i. e. utterly van(iuished, 1 Co. xv. 54. (The Sept. sometimes trans- late the llebr. nXjS i. e. to everlasiiiKj, forever, by «r v'iKoi, 2 S. ii. 26 ; Job xxxvi. 7 ; Lam. v. 20 ; Am. i. 1 1 ; viii. 7, because nxj denotes also splendor, 1 Chr. xxix. 11, and in Syriac victory.) ' Niveut, ή, Hebr. DU'j (supposed to be compounded of J"J and nij, the abode of Ninus; [cf. Fried. Delitzsch as below; Schrader as below, pp. 102, 572]), in the (irk. and Rom. writ, ή Nti/oy [on the accent cf. Pape, Eigen- namen, s. v.], Nineveh (Vulg. Ninive [so A. V. in Lk. as below]), a great city, the capital of Assyria, built appar- ently about B. c. 2000, on the eastern bank of the Tigris opposite the modern city of Mosul. It was destroyed [about] B. c. 606, and its ruins, containing invaluable monuments of art and archaeology, began to be exca- vated in recent times (from 1840 on), especially by the labors of the Frenchman Botta and the Englishman Lay- ard ; cf. Layard, Nineveh and its Remains, Lond. 1849, 2 vols. ; and his Discoveries in the Ruins of Nineveh and Babylon, Lond. 1853; [also his art. in Smith's Diet, of the Bible] ; H. J. C. Weissenbom, Ninive u. s. Gebiet etc. 2 Pts. Erf. 1851-56; Tuch, De Nino urbe. Lips. 1844; Spiegel in Herzog x. pp. 361-381 ; [esp. Fried. Delitzsch in Ilerzog 2 (cf. Schaff-Herzog) x. pp. 587-603 ; Schrader, KeilinschrLften u. s. w. inde.x s. v. ; and in Kiehm s. V. ; W. Robertson Smith in Encyc. Brit. s. v.] ; Hilziy in Schenkel iv. 334 sqq. ; \_Ran-linson, Five Great Mon- archies etc. ; Geo. Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, (Lond. 1875)]. In the N. T. once, viz. Lk. xi. 32 R G.* [Νινίυίτη? RG (so Tr in Lk. .xi. 32), or] NiKcuiri/s [L (so Tr in Lk. xi. 30)] or ΐiιvfvfiτηs Τ λ\Ή (so Tr in Mt. xii. 41) [see ti, ι and Tdf. Proleg. p. 86; WH. A pp. p. 154''],-ου,ό. (NtKfui, q. v.), i. q. Nmor in Hdt. and Strabo; a Ninevite, an inhabitant of Nineveh: Mt. xii. 41 ; Lk. xi. 30, and L Τ Tr Wll in 32.' νΐΊΓτήρ, -ηρος, ό, (νίπτω), a vessel for washing the hands and feet, a basin : Jn. xiii. 5. (Eccles. writ.) * νίπτω: (a later form for ι/ί^ω ; of. ioi. ad Phryn. p. 241 [Veitchs.v.l/l'fω; B. 63(55); \V.88(84)]); laor. m^a; Mid., pres. νίτττομαι; 1 aor. ΐνι•\Ι/άμην; Sept. for ]'Π"^; to wash : τινά, .In. xiii. 8 ; τοϋί naSas rivas, ibid. 5 sq. 8, 12, 14 ; 1 Tim. v. 10; mid. to wash one's .se//[cf. B. § 135, 5; W. § 38, 2 b.] : Jn. ix. 7, 11, 15; τάι xe'tpns, to wash one's (own) hands, Mk. vii. 3 ; τους πό&ας, .In. xiii. 10 [T om. AVH br. τοίις π.] : viyjrai το πρόσωπον σον, Mt. vi. 1 7 ; νίπτονται τάς χίΐρας αυτών, Mt. xv. 2. [CoMP. : ατΓΟ- νίπτω. Syn. see λούω. fin.] * νοί'ω, -ω ; 1 Άοτ. (νόησα; [pres. pass. ptcp. (neut. plur.) νοούμίνα] ; (νους) ; fr. Ilom. down ; Sept. for Γ^Π and |Jl3rin, and for h'SpT) ; 1. to perceive with the mind, to understand : absol., with the addition τή καρδία, Jn. xii. νόημα 427 νομοί 40 (Is. xliv. 18) ; w. an ace. of the thing, Eph. iii. 4, 20 ; 1 Tim. i. 7 ; pass. : Ro. i. 20 ; foil, by an, Mt. xv. 17; xvi. 11 ; Mk. vii. 18; foil, by ace. w. inf., Heb. xi. 3; absol. i. q. to have understanding : Mt. xvi. 9 ; Mk. viii. 17. 2. to think upon, heed, ponder, consider : νοιίτω, sc. let him attend to the events that oecur, which will show the time to flee, Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; [similarly voet ο (RG a) λί'γω, 2 Tim. ii. 7]. [CoMP. : ei-, κατά-, μ€τα-, προ-, ύπο-νοί'ω.] * νόημα, -ror, τό, fr. Horn, down ; 1. a mental per- ception, thought. 2. spec, (an evil) purpose : αίχμα- λωτίζίΐν πάν νόημα els την ΰπακοην τον Χρίστου, to cause whoever is devising evU against Christ to desist from his purpose and submit himself to Christ (as Paul sets him forth), 2 Co. X. 5; plur. : 2 Co. ii. U (τοϋ δια;3όλου, Ignat. ad Eph. [Interpol.] 14 ; τή? καρδίας αυτών ποί'ηράς. Bar. ii. 8). 3. that which tliinks, Me mi'iirf : plur. (where the minds of many are referred to), 2 Co. iii. 14 ; iv. 4, and perh. [xi. 3] ; Phil. iv. 7, for here the word may mean thoughts and purposes ; [others would so take it also in all the exx. cited under this head (ef. καύχημα, 2)].* νόθο;, ij. -ov, lUeyitimate, bastard, i. e. born, not in law- ful wedlock, but of a concubine or female slave : Heb. xii. 8; ef. Bleek ad loe. (Sap. iv. 3; from Hom. down.) * νομή, -ής, ή, {νίμω to pasture), fr. Ilom. [i. e. batrach.] down; i. pasturage, fodder, food: in fig. discourse ΐύρησ€ί νομήυ, i. e. he shall not want the needful sup- plies for the true life, Jn. x. 9 ; (Sept. for Τ[^.^Ώ, n';7")D, nil). 2. trop. growth, increase, (Germ. Umsichfressen, Umsichgreifen) : of evils spreading like a gangrene, 2 Tim. ii. 17 (of ulcers, νομην ποιείται ΙλκοΓ, Polyb. 1, 81, 6 ; of a conflagration, to πνρ 'Καμβάν(ΐ νομψ, 11, 4 (5), 4 cf. 1, 48, 5; Joseph, b. j. 6, 2, 9).* vo|iC^u; ΐοϊψί. ίνόμιζον; I Άοτ. ίνόμχσα; impf. pass. «Vo- μιζόμην ; (νόμος) ; as in Grk. auth. fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; 1. to hold by custom or usage, own as a cus- tom or usage ; to follow custom or usage ; pass, νομίζεται it is the custom, it is the received usage : ov ίνομίζίτο πρόσ- τυχη (ΐναι, where ace. to custom was a place of prayer, Acts xvi. 13 [but LTTr AVIl read ου ίνομίζομ^ν προσ^υ- χην elv. where ice supposed there was, etc.; cf. 2 below], (2 Mace. xiv. 4). 2. to deem, think, suppose: foil. by an inf., Acts viii. 20 ; 1 Co. vii. 36 ; foil, by an ace. w. inf., Lk. ii. 44; Acts vii. 25; xiv. 19; xvi. [13 (see 1 above)], 27 ; xvu. 29 ; I Co. vii. 26 ; I Tim. vi. 5; foil, by Sn, Mt. v. 1 7 ; x. 34 [W. § 56, 1 b.] ; xx. 10 ; Acts xxi. 29 ; ώς ίνομίζ(το, as was wont to be supposed, Lk. iii. 23. [SvN. see fjyenpai, fin.] * νομικό?, -η, -όν, (νόμος), pertaining to (the) latv (Plat., Aristot , al.) : μάχαι. Tit. iii. 9 ; ό νομικός, one learned in the taw, in the N. T. an interpreter and teacher of the Mosaic law [A. V. a lawyer ; ef. γραμματείς, 2] : Mt. xxii. 35; Lk. x. 25; Tit. iii. 13; plur., Lk. vii. 30; xi. 45 sq. 52; xiv. 3.* νομ(μω$, adv., (ro^i^of), lawfully, agreeably to the law, properly : 1 Tim. i. 8 ; 2 Tim. ii. 5. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., al.)• νόμκτμα,τος,τό,{νομίζω,ι\.ν.); 1. anything received and sanctioned by usage or law (Tragg., Arstph.). 2. money, (current) coin, [cf. our lawful money] : Mt. xxii. 19 (and in Grk. writ. fr. Eur. and Arstph. down).* νομο-διδάο'καλοϊ. -ου, ό, ( νόμος and διδάσκαλοι, cf. €Ttp<^ διδάσκαλοί, 'κροδώάσκαλος, χοροδιδάσκαλος), α teacher and interpreter of the law: among the Jews [ef. •γραμματ(νς, 2], Lk. v. 17; Acts v. 34; of those who among Chris- tians also went about as champions and interpreters of the Mosaic law, 1 Tim. i. 7. (Not found elsewh. [exc. in eecl. writ.]) * νομοθίσία, -ας, ή, (νόμος, τίβημι), late-giving, legislation : Ro. ix. 4. (Plat., Aristot., Polyb., Diod., Philo, al.)* νομοθΕΤ€'ω, -ώ : Pass., pf. 3 pers. sing, ν^νομοθίτηται ; plupf. 3 pers. sing, ναιομοθίτητο (on the om. of the augm. see \V. 72(70); B. 33(29)); (lOfiofleVijf); fr. [Lys.], Xen. and Plat, down ; Sept. several times for n^in ; 1. to enact laws ; pass, laws are enacted or prescribed for one, to be legislated for, furnished with laws (often so in Plato ; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. ii. p. 391 [for e.\x.]) ; ό λαοί eV αντής (R G eV αντί]) νίνομοθίτηται ( R G ν^νομοθίτητο) the people received the Mosaic law established upon the foundation of the priesthood, Ileb. vii. 11 [W. § 39,1 b.; cf. B. 337 (290); many refer this ex. (with the gen.) to time (A. V. under it) ; see €πί, A. II., cf. B. 2 a. y.]. 2. to sanc- tion by law, enact : τί, pass. Heb. viii. 6 [cf. W. and B. u. s.].* νομο-θί'τη5, -ου, ό. (νόμος and τίθημΐ), a lawgiver: Jas. iv. 12. ([Antipho, Thuc], Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., al. ; Sept. Ps. i.K. 21.)* νόμοϊ, -ου, ό, ( νίμω to divide, distribute, apportion), in prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything received by usage, a custom, usage, law ; in Sept. very often for ΓΙιίΓ), also for ΠΡΠ, iV\, etc. In the N. T. a command, law, and 1. oi any law whatsoever: δια ποιου νόμου; Ro. iii. 27; νόμος ίικαιοσννης, a law or rule pro- ducing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance of which we are approved of (iod, Ro. ix. 31, cf. Meyer [see ed. ΤΓέώ»], Fritzsche, Phili[ipi ad loc. ; a precept or hy unction : κατά νόμον ίντο^ης σαρκ- Heb. vii. 16 ; plur. of the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x. 1 6 ; νόμος τοϋ νοός, the rule of action prescribed by reason, Ro. vii. 23 ; the mention of the divine law causes those things even which in opposition to this law impel to action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law, to be designated by the term νόμος, as ίτιρος νόμος iv toZs μί\(σΙ μου, a different law from that which God has given, i. e. the impulse to sin inherent in human nature, or 6 νόμοςτής αμαρτίας (gen. of author), Ro. vii. 23, 25; viii. 2, also ό V. τοϋ θανάτου, emanating from the power of death, Ro. viii. 2 ; with which is contrasted ό νόμος τοϋ πνινματος, the impulse to (right) action emanating from the Spirit, ibid. 2. of the Mosaic law, and referring, ace. to the context, either to the ν ο 1 u m e of the law or to its contents: w. the article, Mt. v. 18; xii. 5; xxii. 36; Lk. ii. 27; x. 26 ; xvi. 17; Jn. i. 17,45 (46) ; vii. 51; viii. 17; x. 34; XT. 25; Acts vi. 13; vii. 53 ; xviii. 13, 15; xxi. 20; xxiii. 3; Ro. ii. 13 [(bis) here LTTrWHom. art. (also G in 13')], 15, 18, 20, 23^ 26 ; iv. 15•; vu. 1', 5, 14, J'O/iOS" 428 POU. J7 ; [otliers take νόμ. here generally, i. ij. CDiilrollin^ principle; see 1 above sub lin. ami ef. \\. 557 (578) ; B. § l.")l, 15]) ; Ro. viii. 3 sip ; 1 Co. i.\. 8; .\v. 56; Gal. iii. 13, 24; Eph. ii. 15 (on which pass, see hόyμa, 2) ; 1 Tim. i. 8 ; Ileb. vii. 1 9, 28; X, 1, etc.; with the addition of Μωϋσί'ωΓ, Lk. ii. 2"i ; Jn. vii. 23 ; viii. 5 ; Acts .\iii. 38 (3i)) [here L Τ Tr Wll cm. art.]; .\v. 5; .\xviii. 23 ; iCo. ix. 9; of .tu/jiou, Lk. ii. 39 ; of ToO β(ον. [.Mt. .\v. « Τ WW mrg.] ; Ko. vii. 22 ; viii. 7. κατή τον νύμιιν, ace. to the (standard or reipiirement of tlie) law. Acts xxii. 12; Ileb. vii. 5; ix. 22. i/o/ius without the art. (in the Epp. of Paul and James and the Ep. to the Ileb.; cf. W. p. 123 (117); B. 89 (78); [some interpri'ters contend that νόμος without the art. denotes not the law of iMoses but law viewed as 'a prin- ciple', 'abstract and universal'; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. ii. 19; also "Fresh Revision," etc. p. 99; Vaughan on Ro. ii. 23; esp. Van Ilcngel on Ro. ii. 12; Giffiiril in the Speaker's Cum. on Rum. p. 41 Si\i\. (cf. Cremer s. v.). This distinction is contrary to usage (as exhibited e. g. in Saj). xviii. 4 ; Sir. xix. 1 7 ; .xxi. 1 ! ; xxxi. 8 ; xxxii. 1 ; XXXV. (xxxii.) 15, 24; xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 2, 3; 1 Mace. ii. 21 ; 4 Mace. vii. 7, and many other exx. in the Apocr. ; see Wahl, Clavis Apocrr. s. v. p. 343), and to the con- text in such Pauline pass, as the foil.: Ro. ii. 17, 25, 27; vii. 1(7); xiii. 8, 10; Gal iii. 17, 18, 23, 24, (cf. Ro. ii. 12 and iii. 19; v. 13 and 14); etc. It .should be added, perhaps, that neither the list of pass, with the art. nor of those without it, as given by Prof, (jrimm, claims to be complete]) : Ro. ii. 23% 25; iii. 31 ; iv. 15", v. 13 ; vii. 1», 2•; X.4; xiii. 10; Gal. iii. 21°; v. 23; 1 Tim. i. 9; Ileb. vii. 12, etc.; with the addition of κυρίον, Lk. ii. 23 [here L has the art.], 24 [L Τ Tr WII add the art.] ; of θί<Λ, Ko. vii. 25 ; of Μωϋσί'ωί, Ileb. x. 28 ; esp. after pre[)usitions, as θια νόμου, Ko. ii. 12; iii. 20; Gal. ii. 21 ; χ^ωρ\ί νόμου, without tlie co-operation of the law, Ro. iii. 21 ; destitute or ignorant of the law, Ro. vii. 9; wlicre no law has been prOmulged, Ro. vii. x ; ol ex νόμου, tliose who rule their life by the law, Jews, Ro. iv. 14, IG [here all edd. have the art.] ; o! eV νόμω, who are in the power of the law, i. e. bound to it, Ru. iii. 19 [but all texts here fv τω v.} ; ύπο νόμο», under dominion of the law, Ro. vi. 14 sq. ; Gal. iii. -'• ; 'V. 4, 21 ; V. 18; ol ύπο νόμον, 1 Co. ix. 20; ίικαιοϋ- πθαι (V νόμω, Gal. v. 4 ; epya νόμου (see epyov, sub fin.) ; (V νόμω apapTUvfiv, unilrr Uiw i. e. with knowledge of the law, Ro. ii. 12 (eijuiv. to ΐχοντις νόμον, cf. vs. 14) ; they to whom the -Mosaic laiv has not been made known are said νόμον μη ΐχ(ΐν. ibid. 14 ; ίαυτο'ις (Ισι νόμος, their natu- ral knowledge of right takes the i)laceof the Jlosaic law, ibid. ; νόμος ίρ-γων, the law demanding works, Ro. iii. 27 ; Slit νόμου νόμω άπίθανον, by the law itself (when I became convinced that by keeping it I could not attain to salva- tion, cf. Ro. vii. 9-24) I became utterly estranged from thelaw, Gal. ii. 19 [cf.W. 210(197); Π. § l:i3, 12]. κατά νόμον. as respects the interpretation and observance of the law. Phil. iii. 5. The observe nee of the Inw is designated by the foil, phrases : πληρούν νόμο», Ro. xiii. 8 ; TO» V. Gal. v. 11 ; πληρούν τ6 δικαίωμα τοΰ νόμου, Ro. viii. 4 ; φυλάσσ(ΐν (τον) v., .Acts xxi. 24 ; (ial. vi. I.'i ; τά 8ικαιώμ. τοΰ v. Ro. ii. 2U ; πράσσαν νόμον, Ro. ii. 25; TTotcIr Tiiv v., Jn. vii. 1 9 ; Gal. v. 3 ; τηρύν, .Acts xv. 5, 24 [Uec] ; Jas. ii. 10 ; τeλflι', Ro. ii. 27 (cf. -las. ii. 8) ; [on the other hand, άκυροϋν τον νόμ. Mt. xv. ti Τ Wll mrg.]. 6 νόμος is used of some particular ordinance of the Mosaic law in Jn. xix. 7 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; with a gen. of the obj. added, τοΰ ανδρός, the law enacted respecting the husband, i. e. bind- ing the wife to her husband, Ro. vii. 2 where Rec.'^'Om. τοΰ νόμ. (so 6 νόμος τοΰ πύσχα. Num. ix. 12; τοίϊ λΐπροΰ, Lev. xiv. 2 ; other exx. are given in J'Vilzsclic, Ep. ad Rum. ii. p. 9 ; cf. W. § 30, 2 β.). Although the Jews did not make a distinction as we do between the moral, the ceremonial, the civil, precepts of the law, but thought that all should be honored and kept with the same con- scientious and ])ious regard, )Ct in the N. T. not infre- tpiently the law is so referred to as to show that the speaker or writer has his eye on the ethical jiart of it alone, as of primary importance and among Christians also of perpetual validity, but does not care for the cere- monial and civil portions, as being written for Jews alone: thus in Gal. v. 14; Ko. xiii. 8, 10; ii. 26 sq.; vii. 21, 25 ; Mt. V. 18, and often ; τ<Ί τοΰ νόμου, the precepts, moral requirements, of the law, Ro. ii. 14. In the Ep. of James νόμος (without the article) designates only the ethical jiortion of the Mosaic law, confirmed by the au- thority of the Christian religion : ii. 9-11; iv. 11; in the Ep. to the Ileb., on the other hand, the ceremonial part of the law is the prominent idea. 3. of the Christ iati retir/inii : νόμος πίστιωί, the law demanding faith, Ro. iii. 27; τοΰ Χρίστου, the moral instruction given by Christ, esp. the precept concerning love, ( iah vi. 2 ; τήΐ ίλ(υθ£ρίας (see ίλίυθιρία, a.), Jas. i. 25 ; ii. 1 2 ; cf. ό καινοί νόμος τοΰ κυρίου ημών ^Ιησοΰ Χρίστου, αν€υ ζυγοΰ ανάγκης ων. Barn. ep. 2, 6 [see Ilarnack's note in loc.]. 4. by metonymy 6 νόμος, the name of the more imi)ortant part (i. e. the Pentateuch), is i)ut for llie entire collection of the sacred honks of tlie 0. T. : Jn. vii. 49 ; x. 34 (Ps. Ixx.xi. (Ixxxii.) fi); Jn. xii. 34(Ps.cix. (cx.)4 ; Dan. (Theodot.) ii. 44; vii.l4); Jn. xv. 25 (Ps. xxxiv. (xxxv.) 19 ; IxviiL (lxix.)15); Ro.iii.l9; 1 Co. xiv. 21 (Is. xxviii. 1 1 sq.; so 2 Mace. ii. 18, where cf. Grimm); ό νόμος κα'ι οίπροφηται, Mt.xi. 13; Jn. i. 46 ; Actsxiii.15; xxiv.l4; xxviii. 23; Ro. iii. 21, (2 Mace. xv. 9) ; i. q. the system of moraU taught in the O. T., Mt. v. 1 7 ; vii. 12 ; xxii. 40 ; ό νόμ. (οί) πμοφ. Kai ψαλμοί, the religious dispensation contained in the (). T., Lk. xxiv. 44 (ό νόμος, οί προφ. κ. τα άλλα πάτρια βιβλία, prol. to Sir.). Paul's doctrine cunrcrning ό νόμος is exhibited by (besides others) irem-, Bibl. TheoL §§ 71, 72; Pfleiilercr, Paulinismus, p. 69 sq. [Eng. trans, i. p. 68 sq. ; A. Zahn, Das Gesetz Gottes nach d. Lehre u. Erfahrungd. Apostel Paulus, Ilalle 1876 ; R. Tilinij, Die Paulinische Lehre vom νόμος nach d. vier Hauptbriefen, u.s.w. Dorpat, 1878]. νόμος does not occur in the foil. ?i. T. bks.: Mk.,2Co.,COl.,Thes8.,SiTim.,Pet.,Jude,Ju., Eev ν6ος> see νους. νησΐω 429 νυμφίσ<: νοσ^ω, -ώ ; (i/oVos) ; fr. [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down ; to be «cX•; metaph. of any ailment of the mind {άνηκίστψ πυνημία νοσίΐν Αθηναίους, Xen. mem. 3, 5, 18 and many <'ther exx. in Grk. aulli.) : Trepi τι, to be taken with such an interest in a thing as amounts to a disease, to have a morbid fondness for, 1 Tim. vi. 4 (n-tpl δόξαν, Plat. mor. (). 546 d.).• νόσημα, -rot, to, i/iseaxe, sickness : Jn. v. 4 Rec. Lchm. (Tragg., Arstpli., Thuc, Xen., Plat., sqq.)* voaos, -ou, ή, disease, sickness : Mt. iv. 23 ει|. ; viii. 1 7 ; ix. 3.-) ; X. 1 ; Mk. i. 34 ; iii. 15 [R G L] ; Lk. iv. 40 ; vi. 18(17); vii. 21; ix. 1 ; Acts xix. 12. (Deut. vii. 15; xxviii. 59; Ex. xv. 26, etc. [Horn., Hdt., al.])* votrind, -or, η, (for κοσσίά, the earlier and more com- mon form [of. \VH. App. p. 145], fr. ι/βοσσοΓ, q. v.), Sept. for Jp; 1. a nesi nfbinls. 2. ahrnodofhirds: Lk. xiii. 34 [but L txt. νοσσία, see the foil. word]. (Deut. xxxii. 11 [Gen. vi. 14; Num. xxiv. 22; Prov. xvi. 16, etc•.].) • νοσσ-ίον, -ου, τό, (see νοσσιά), a brood of birds : Mt. xxiii. 37 and Lihm. txt. in Lk. xiii. 34 [where al. νοσσιά, eee the preced. word]. (Arstph., Aristot., Ael. ; for D'n'iSX Pe. Ixxxiii. (Ixxxiv.) 4.) * voccros, see ν€οσσός. νοσφίζω : Mid., pres. ptcp. νοσφιζόμινος ; 1 aor. tvo• σφισάμην; {νόσφι afar, apart); to set apart, separate, dii'ide ; mid. to set apart or ν 430 νυνι νυμφών, -ωνο!, 6, (^ήμφη), the chamber containing the bridal bed, the bride-chamlier : oi υΐοι τοΰ ιη;/χφώμο5 (see vios, 2), of the friends o£ the bridegroom whose '. li'_)i M••• ^^^^• 21 ; Mk. xiii. 19. 2. Like our now and the Lat. nunc, it stands in a conclusion or sequence; as things now are, as the matter now stands ; under these circumstances; in the present state of affairs \ since these things are so ; as it is : Lk. xi. 39 (νΰν i. e. since ye are intent on observing the requirements of tradition ; [but al. take viv here of time — a covert allusion to a former and better state of things]) ; Col. i. 24 [al. of time; cf. Mey., Bp. Lghtft., liUic. ad loc.]; κα\ viv, 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; 2 Jn. 5 ; και viv Seipo, Acts vii. 34. viv de (and mv\ Se see wvi), but now ; now however ; hut as it is ; (often in class. Grk. ; cf. Vig. ed. Herm. p. 426 ; Matthiaeii. p. 1434 .sq.; Kuhner § 498, 2 [or ,Ielf § 719, 2]): 1 Co. vii. 14 ; .Tas. iv. IG, and R (τ in Heb. ix. 26 ; esp. after a conditional statement with el and the indie, preterite, Lk. .xix. 42; Jn. viii. 40; ix. 41; xv. 22, 24; xviii. 36; 1 Co. xii. 20; [cf. B. § 151, 26]. In liev. viv does not occur. [Syn. see ί'φτι.'] νυνί (νΰν with iota demonstr. [Kriiger § 25, 6, 4 sλ;ι t;j φωντ]. Acts xiv. 10 [R G] ; xxvi. 24, (Prov. xxvi. 25) ; yvvr) προσινχομίνη . . . άκατακαλντττω rff κ(- φάλη. 1 Co. xi. 5 ; esp. in the expression exfiv Tt, when the object and its adjective, or what is equivalent to an adjective, denotes a part of the body or something else which naturally belongs to any one (as in French, il a les e'paules larijes); so, ϊχιιν την χιφα ξηράν, Mt. xii. 10 RG; Mk. iii. 1 ; το πρόσωπον ως άνθρωπου [(Rec. ΐΊνθρω• πος^'], Rev. iv. 7; τά αισθητήρια γιγνμνασμίνα, Ileb. ν. 14 ; άπαράβατον την 'κρωσννην, Wvh. vii. 24 ; την κατοίκησιν κτλ. ^Ik. ν. 3 ; την fip eavTovs άγάπην (κτινη, 1 Pet. iv, 8. Cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 25. the gen. of a pers. pron. αυτού, ίιμών, is added to the substantive : Mt. iii. 4 ; Mk. viU. 1 7 ; Rev. ii. 1 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 2, cf. Eph. i. 1 8 ; cf. W. § 18, 2; [B. § 125,5]. g. Proper Names some- times have the article and sometimes are anarthrous ; cf. W. § 18, 5 and 6; B. § 124. 3 and 4; [Green p. 23 sq.] ; o. as respects names of Persons, the person without the article is simply named, but with the article is marked as either well known or as already mentioned; thus we find Ίησοϋι and ό 'l^s-, ΠαΰλοΓ and ό ΠαΟλ., etc. Πιλάτοί has the article everywhere in John's Gospel and also in Mark's, if xv. 43 (in R G L) be excepted (but Τ Tr AV Η insert the article there also) ; TiVos is every- where anarthrous. Indeclinable names of persons in the oblique cases almost always have the article, unless the case is made evident by a preposition : τω Ιωσήφ, Mk. xv. 45; τοκ Ίακωβ κα\ τονΉσαΰ, Heb. xi. 20, and many other exx., esp. in the genealogies, Mt. i. 1 sqq. ; I-k. iii. 23 ; but wliere perspicuity does not require the article, it is omitted also in the oblique cases, as των υ'ιων Ιωσήφ, Heb. xi. 21 ; των υιών Έμμώρ, Acts vii. 16 ; ό flfos Ισαάκ, Mt. xxii. 32; Acts vii. 32; όταν όψ-ηυθί 'Αβραάμ κ. Ισαάκ . . . και πάντας τονς προφήτας, Lk. xiii. 28. The article is commonly omitted with personal proper names to which is added an apposition indicating the race, country, office, rank, surname, or something else, (cf. Matthiae § 274) ; let the foil, sufiice as exx. : Αβραάμ 6 πατήρ ήμων, Jn. v'l'n. .56 ; Ro, iv. 1 ; Ίάκωβορ τον τοΰ Ζϊ/3ίδαίου καΐ Ίωάννην τον ά^εΧφον αυτοΰ, Mt. iv. 21 ; Μαρία ή Μαγδαληνή. Mt. xxvii. 56, etc.; Ιωάννης ο βαπτιστής, Mt. iii. 1 ; Ήρώδί/ϊ ο τετράρχης, Lk. ix. 7 ; Ίησοϋς ό λίγο' /ifvos Χριστοί, Mt. i. 16; ΣαΰλοΓ δί ό Kcu Παϋλοί SC. καλούμενο;. Acts xiii. 9 ; Σίμωνος τον λιπρον, Alk. xiv. 3 ; Βαρτι'ραιο? ό τυφλοί, Mk, χ. 46 [R (ί] ; Ζαχα• ρίην τοΰ άπολομίυηυ, Lk. xi. 51. But there are excej^ tions also to this usage : ό &€ 'Hpco8;jt ό τίτράρ;(ί)ί, Lk, UL 19; τον Σαοίλ, υ'ιον Kit, Acts xiii. 21; in the opening of the Epistles : Παΰλοί άπ•ί5στολοί, Ro. i. 1 ; 1 Co. i. 1, etc. p. Proper names of countries and re- gions have the article far more frequently than those of cities and towns, for the reason that most names of countries, being derived from adjectives, get the force of substantives only by the addition of the article, as ή Αχαΐα (but cf. 2 Co. ix. 2), ή Γαλατία, ή Γαλιλαια, ή Ιτα- λία, ή 'Ιουδαία, ή Μακίδονι'α (but of. Ro. xv. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi, 5), etc. Only Αίγυπτος, if Acts vii. 11 LTTr WH be excepted, is everywhere anarthrous. The names of cities, esp. when joined to prepositions, particularly fv, (ΐς and ί'κ, are without the article; but we find άπο (R G ck) T^f 'ρώμης in Acts xviii. 2. γ. Names of rivers and streams have the article in Mt. iii. 13; Mk. i, 5; Lk. iv, 1 ; xiii. 4 ; Jn. i. 28 ; τοΰ KcSpiiv, Jn. xviii. 1 G L Tr mrg. 2. The article is prefixed to substan- tives expanded and more precisely defined by modi- fiers; a. to nouns accompanied by a gen. of the pronouns μον, σου, ημών, ίιμών, αυτοΰ, (αυτών, αυτών: Mt, i. 21,25; v. 45 ; vi. 10-12; xii. 49 ; Mk. ix. 17; Lk. vi, 27; X, 7; xvi, 6 ; Acts .xi.x. 25 [LT Tr WII ijpiv] ; Ro. iv. 19; vi. 6, and in numberless other places; it is rarely omitted, as in Mt. xix, 28; Lk. i. 72; ii, 32; 2 Co. viii. 23; Jas. v, 20, etc.; cf. B. § 127, 27. b. The pos- sessive pronouns ΐμός, σός, ήμίτίρος, νμίτιρος, joined to substantives (if Jn, iv. 34 be excepted) always take the article, and John generally puts them after the substan- tive (ή κρίσις ή ('μή, Jn. v. 30 ; ό λόγος 6 σός, χνϋ. 17 ; ^ ΚΊΐι^ωνια ή ήμ(τίρα, 1 Jn. i. 3 ; ό καιρός ό νμίτιρος, Jn. vii, 6), very rarclv between the article and the substantive (toIs f'poit ρήμασιν, Jn. v. 47; ή ϊμή &ι8αχή, vii. 16 ; την σήν λαλιάν, iv. 42), yet this is always done by the other N. T. writ., Mt. xviii. 20 ; Mk. viii. 38 ; Lk. ix, 26 ; Acts xxiv. 6 [Rec,]; xxvi, 5; Ro, iii. 7, etc, c, AVhen adjectives arc added to substantives, either the ad- jective is placed between the article and the substantive, — as to ίδιον φορτίον. Gal. vi. 5 ; ό αγαθός άνθρωπος, Mt. xii, 35 ; τήν δικαίαν κρίσιν, Jn. vii. 24 ; ή άγαθη μίρις, Lk, χ. 42; το ayiov πν(ΰμα, Lk. xii. 10; Acts i. 8 ; ή alwVMS ζωή, Jn. χνϋ. 3, and many other ex.x.; — or the adjective preceded by an article is placed after the substantive with its article, as ro πνίΰμα το ayiov, Mk. iii. 29 ; Jn. xiv, 26; Acts i, 16; Heb, id, 7; ix, 8 ; x. 15; ή ζωή η αιώνιος, 1 Jn. i. 2 ; ii. 25 ; ό ποιμήν ό καλός, Jn. χ. 1 1 ; τήν ττϋλην τήν σώηράν, Acts xii. 10, and other exx.; — very rarely the adjective stands before a substantive which has the article, as in Acts [xiv, 10 R G]; xxvi. 24; 1 Co, Ki. 5, [cf. B. § 125, 5 ; W, § 20, 1 c.]. As to the adjeo 435 lives of quantity, oKos, πάί, πολύί, see each in its own place. d. Wiiat has been said concerning adjec- tives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ή κατ €κ\ογην πρόθίσις, Ιίο. ix. 1 1 ; η παρ' ίμοΰ 8ίαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; ό \όγο! ο του σταυρόν, 1 Co. i. 18 ; ή (U Χβίστί,ν πίστκ. Col. ϋ. 5 ; on the other hand, η ΊΓίστίί ΰμων η npos τον θ(όν, 1 Th. i. 8 ; τ^? ^ιακονία^ της fis Tols ayi'ouf, 2 Co. viii. 4 ; see many other exx. of each usage in \V. 131 (124) sqq. ; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstra- tive pronoun (jvrof, excivos) belonging to it either pre- cedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, 6 άνθρωπος ούτος, Jn. ix. 24 [oiros ΰ άνθρ. L Tr mrg. WII] ; Acts vi. 13 ; xxii. 26 ; ό λαοί ούτος, Mt. xv. 8 ; ό υιός σου ούτος, Lk. XV. 30; plur. Lk. x.\iv. 17, and numberless other exx. ; οντος 6 άνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30 ; οντος ό \αός, Mk. vii. 6 [ο λ. οίτ. L \VH mrg.] ; oiroy ό υιός μου, Lk. XV. 24 ; οίτος ό τίΚώνης, Lk. xviii. 11 [ό reX. οίτ. L mrg.]; οίτοί ό Aoyos, Jn. vii. 36 [ό λογ. oir. LTTrWH], and many other e.x.x. on cxelxof, see cxfiiOs, 2 ; on αΙτΌς ό etc., see αυτός (I. 1 b. etc.) ; on ό αυτός etc., see αυτός, nL 3. The neuter article prefi.\ed to adjec- tives changes them into substantives [cf. W. § 34, 2; B. § 12-i, 1] ; as, το ά-γαθόν, το κάΚόν (which see each in its place) : to ϊλαττον, Heb. vii. 7 ; with a gen. added, το γνωστόν τον θίοΰ, Ro. i. 1 9 ; το αδύνατον του νομού, Ro. viii. 3 ; TO άσθινΐς του θ(θϋ, 1 Co. i. 25 ; αίτης, Heb. vii. 18 ; τα αόρατα τ. θίοΰ, Ro. i. 20 ; τα κρυπτά της αισχύνης, 2 Co. iv. 2, etc. 4. The article Λvith cardinal η u- merals: elf one; 6 e?r the one (of two), see tis, 4 a.; but difi'erently ό its in Ro. v. 15, 17, the (that) one. So also oi δύο (our the twain), Mt. xLx. 5 ; o! deKa the (those) ten, and ol evvea, Lk. xvii. 1 7 ; tKUvot ol δέκα (^και) οκτώ, Lk. xiii. 4. 5. The article prefixed to partici- ples a. gives them the force of substantives [W. §§ 18, 3 ; 45, 7 ; B. §§ 129, 1 b. ; 144, 9] ; as, ό πfφάζωv, Mt. iv. 3; 1 Th. iii. ο : ό βατττίζων, Mk. vi. 14 (for which Mt. xiv. 2 ό βαπτιστής); ό σπείρων, Mt. xiii. 3; Lk. viii. 5; ό ολοθρήων, Heb. xi. 28; oi βαστάζοντας, Lk. vii. 14 ; oi βόσκοντας, Λΐΐ. viii. 33; Mk. v. 14; oi ασθίοντες, the eaters (convivae), Mt. xiv. 21 ; το όφαιλόμανον, Mt. xviii. 30, 34 ; τα υπάρχοντα (see υπάρχω, 2). b. the ptcp. with the article must be resolved into he who [and a fin. verb; cf. B. § 144, 9]: Mt. x. 40; Lk. vi. 29; xi. 23; .In. XV. 23 ; 2 Co. i. 21 ; Phil. ii. 13, and very often, πάς ό full, by a ptcp. [W. Ill (lOG)], Mt. v. 22; vii. 26; Lk. vi. 30 [T \VH om. L Tr mrg. br. art.] ; xi. 10 ; Ro. ii. 1 ; 1 Co. xvi. 16 ; Gal. iii. 13, etc. ; μακάριος ό w. a ptcp., Mt. v. 4 (.5), 6, 10, etc.; oial ίμ'ιν υ'ι w. a ptcp., Lk. vi. 25; the neut. TO with a ptcp. must be resolved into that wnich [with a fin. verb], το γαννώμανον, Lk. i. 35 ; το γαγαννημί- νον, Jn. iii. 6. c. the article with ptcp. is placed in apposition : Mk. iii. 22 ; Acts xvii. 24 ; Eph. iii. 20 ; iv. 22, 24 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; 1 Pet. i. 21, etc. 6. The neut. TO before infinitives a. gives them the force of substantives (cf. B. 261 (225) sqq. [cf. W. § 44, 2 a. : 3 c.]); as, TO καθίσαι, Mt. XX. 2.^ ; Mk. x. 40 ; ro θίΧαιν, Ro. vii. 18; 2Cu.viii.lO: to ττοι^σαί, το «TrtTtXiVat, 2 Co. viii. II, and other exx. ; τούτο κρΊνατα • το μη τιθίναι κτλ. Ro. xiv. 13. On the infin. w. the art. depending on a preposi- tion {αντ\ τοϋ, iv τω, eis τό, etc.), see under each prep, in its place. b. ^luch more frequent in the N. T. than in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ., esp. in the writings of Luke and Paul (nowhere in John's Gospel and Epistles), is the use of the gen. τοΰ w. an inf. (and in the Sept. far more freq. than in the N. T.), which is treated of at length by Fritzsche in an excursus at the end of his Com. on Mt. p. 843 sqq. ; W. § 44, 4 ; B. 266 (228) sqq. The examples fall under the foil, classes : ToO with an inf. is put a. after words which natu- rally require a genitive (of a noun also) after them; thus after άξιον, 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; ΐΚαχα, Lk. i. 9 (1 S. xiv. 47); άξαποροϋμαι, 2 Co. i. 8. β. for the simple expletive [i. e. ' complementary '] or (as it is commonly called) epexegetical infin., which serves to fill out an incom- plete idea expressed by a noun or a verb or a phrase, (where in Germ, zu is commonly used) ; thus after προ- θυμία, 2 Co. viii. 1 1 ; βραδαΐς, Lk. xxiv. 25 ; άλπϊς, Acts xxvii. 20; 1 Co. ix. 10 [not Rec] ; άζήται (ίκαιρίαν, Lk. xxii. 6 [not L mrg.] ; ό καφυς (sc. f στί) τοϋ άρξασθαι, to begin, 1 Pet. iv. 1 7 (καιρόν ϊχαιν w. the simple inf. Heb. xi. 15); Sibovai την αξονσίαν, Lk. χ. 19 {αξουσ'ιαν εχαιν with simple inf., Jn. .xix. 10; 1 Co. ix. 4); όφαιλίται άσμάν (eqidv. to ύφαίλομαν), Ro. viii. 12 (with inf. alone. Gal. V. 3); ίτοιμον eivai, Acts .x.xiii. 15 (1 Mace. iii. 58; V. 39; xiii. 37; with inf. alone, Lk. .xxii. 33); χραίαν αχαιν, Heb. ν. 1 2 ; (δωκαν οφθαλμούς τοΰ μη βΧάπαιν κα\ 2>τα τοϋ μη άκούαιν, that they should not see . . . that they should not hear [cf. B. 26 7 (230)]. Ro. xi. 8 (άχαιν ώτα elsewh. always with a simple inf.; see ους, 2); (πλ',σΰη ό χρόνος τοΰ τ(Κ(ΐν αυτήν, at which .«he shoidd be deliv- ered [cf. B. 1. c], Lk. i. 57 ; ΐπλήσθ- ήμάραι . . . τοΰ πιρι- ταμαιν αυτόν, that they should circumcise him [cf. B. 1. c], Lk. ii. 21 ; after άνάνδακτόν ϊστιν, Lk. xvii. 1 [soB. § 140, 15; (W. 328 (308) otherwise)]; quite unusually after iyiviTo [cf. B. § 140, 16 δ.; AV. 1. c], Acts x. 25 [Rec. om. art.]. γ. after verbs of deciding, entreat- ing, exhorting, commanding, etc. : after κρίναιν (see κρίνω, 4) ; iyivfTO γνώμη {^μης Τ Tr WH (see γίνομαι, 5 e. a.)]. Acts xx. 3 ; το πρόσωπον (στήριξαν, Lk. ix. 51 ; συντίθασθαι. Acts xxiii. 20 (with inf. alone, Lk. xxii. 5) ; προσαύχασθαι, Jas. v. 17; παρακάΚα'ιν, Acts xxi. 12; iv TfWf σθαι, Lk. iv. 10; iπιστi\\fιv, Acts xv. 20 (with inf. alone, xxi. 25 [R G T, but L Tr txt. λΥΗ here άττοστΛ. ; Β. 270 (232)]); καταναύαιν, Lk. v. 7. S. after verbs of hindering, restraining, removing, (wldch natu- rally require the genitive), and according to the well- known pleonasm with μή before the inf. [see μή, I. 4 a. ; B. §148, 13; AV. 325(305)]; thus, after κατί'χω τίΐ-ά, Lk. iv. 42 ; κρατούμαι, Lk. .xxiv. 16 ; κωΧΰω, Acts x. 47 ; ύπο- στίλλομαι. Acts x.x. 20, 27; παύω, 1 Pet. iii. 10; κατα- παύω, Acts xiv. 18 ; without μή before the inf. after iγκό7Γτoμa^, Ro. XV. 22. c. τοΰ with an inf. is added as a somewhat loose epexegesis : Lk. xxi. 22 ; Acts i.x. 15 ; .xiii. 47 ; Phil. iii. 21 ; (ίς άκαθαρσίαν τοΰ άτιμάζισθαι τα σώματα αυτών, to the uncleanness of their bodies' be- 436 ing dishonored, Ro. i. 24 [cf. B. § 140, 14]; W. 325 (305) 6q. J. it takes the ])lace of an entire final ilause, in on/er/Aai [W. §44, 4 b. ; B. §140, 17]; esp. after verbs implying motion: Mt.ii. 13; iii. 13; xiii. 3; xxiv. 45 ; Mk. iv. 3 (where L 'Γ WH om. Tr br. τοΰ) ; Lk. i. 77, 71i; ii. 24, 27; v. 1 [R G L txt. Trmrg.]; viii. 5 ; xii. 42 (here Lorn. Trbr. ToO) ; xxii. 31 ; xxiv. 29; Acts iii. 2; xx. 30; xxvi. 18; Ro. vi. 6; xi. 10; Gal. iii. 10; Pliil. iii. 10; Ileb. x. 7, 9 ; xi. 5. η. used of result, .so ihnt : Acts vii. 19 ; Ro. vii. 3 ; after ποιώ, to cause ihal, make to, Acts iii. 12; [cf. \V. 326 (306); B. § 140, 16 8.]. 7. The article with adverbs [B. § 125, 10 sq. ; W. § 18, 3], a. gives them the force of sub- stantives ; as, TO πίραν, the region beyond ; τα άνω, τα κάτω, το νυν, τα 'ίμημοσθΐν, τα οπίσω, etc. ; see these words in their proper places. b. is used when they stand adjectively, as η ϊίνω ^Ι^ρουσαλημ, 6 τότε κόσμος, ό ΐσω άνθρωπος, ό νΰν αιών, etc., on which see these several words. c. tlie neut. τό is used in the ace. absol., esp. in specifications of time: both with adverbs of time, το πάλιν, 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; τά νΰν or τανϋν, and with neuter ad- jectives used adverbially, as το \οιπόν, το ιτρότ(ρον (Jn. vi. 62; Gal. iv. l.'i); το πρώτον (•Ιη. χ. 40; xii. 16; xix. 39); το πλείστον (1 Co. xiv. 27); see these words them- selves. 8. The article before preposition s with their cases is very often so used that ων, uvrtt, οντά, must be supplied in thought [cf. B. § 1 2.'), 9 ; W. § 18, 3] ; thus, o! άπο ΊταΚίας, από θ(σσαλονίκη!. Acts xvii. 13; Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6] ; ό ΐν nw, Mt. vi. 9 ; Ro. viii. 1 ; neut. τά προς, Mk. ii. 2 ; o! ex τίνος, Ro. ii. 8 ; iv. 14, 16; Phil. iv. 22 etc.; o'l παρά tii/os, Mk. iii. 21 (see παρά, I. e.). τά nep'i Tti/of, Lk. xxiv. 19 ; Acts xxiv. 10 ; Phil. i. 27; [add, τά (TTrWII το) π(ρ\ ΐμοϋ, Lk. xxii. 37], etc. (see π(ρι, I. b. β.) ; τά ntpl τίνα, Phil. ii. 23 [see vtpl, II. b.] ; oi μ(τά τίνος, those with one, his compan- ions, Mt. xii. 3 ; oi πιρΊ τίνα, and many other exx. which are given under the several prepositions, the neut. τό in the ace. absol. in adverbial expressions [cf. W. 230 (216); B. §§ 125, 12; 131, 9] : τό καθ' ήμίραν, daily, da;/ bi/ da:/, Lk. xi. 3; xix. 47; Acts xvii. 11 [RG WHbr.]; TO καθόλου, at all, Acts iv. 18 [LTWIIom. τί5]; besides, in TO κατά σάρκα, as respects human origin, Ro. ix. 5 [on the force of the art. here see Al/hol in Journ. Soo. Bibl. Lit. etc. for 1883, p. 108]; τά κατ epe, as respects what relates to me, my state, my affairs. Col. iv. 7 ; Eph. vi. 21 ; TO (ξ υμών, as far as depends on you, Ro. xii. 18; TO ί'φ' ύμ'ιν, as far as respects you, if I regard you, Ro. xvi. 19 RG; τά προς (τον) Oeov, acc. absol., as respects the things pertaining to (lod, i. e. in things pertaining to God, Ro. XV. 1 7 ; Ileb. ii. 17 ; v. 1, (ifpfi τά προς τοΰί 6(θυς, στρατηγώ be τά προς τους ανθρώπους, Xen. resp. Laced. 13, 11 ; cf. Frilzsrhr. Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 262 sq.) ; TO ίκ μίρους sc. δν, that which has been granted us in part, that which is imperfect, 1 Co. xiii. 10. 9. The article, in all genders, when placed before the geni- tive of substantives indicates kinship, affinity, or some kind of connection, association or fellowship, or in gen- eral that which in some way pertains to a person or thing [cf. W. § 30, 3 ; B. § 125, 7] ; a. the masc. and the fem. article ; ^Ιάκωβος ό τον Ζίβΐ8αίου, 6 τον "Αλφα/ου, the son, Mt. .χ. 2 (3), 3; M.ipi'u ή τοΰ Ιακώβου, the mother. Mk. xvi. 1 [Tom. Trbr. τοΰ]; Lk. xxiv. 10 [L TTrAVlIj; Έμμορ τοΟ 2υ;(£'μ, of llamor, the father of Shechcm, Acts vii. 16 RG; ij τοϋ Ούριου, the Λvife, Mt. i. 6 ; o'l Χλόης, either the kinsfolk, or friends, or domes- tics, or ivork-people, or slaves, of Chloe, 1 Co. i. 11 ; also oi ^Αριστοβούλου, ol Ναρκίσσου, Ro. xvi. 10 sq.; ol τού Χριστού, the followers of Christ [A. V. they that are Christ's], 1 Co. XV. 23 G L Τ Tr ^VH ; Gal. v. 24 ; oi τών Φαρισαίων, the disciples of the Pharisees, Mk. ii. 18' Rec, 18'' R G L ; Καισαρίία ή Φιλίππου, the city of Philip, Mk. viii. 27. b. TO and τά τίνος : as τά τοΰ θ(οϋ, the cause or interests, the |)urposes, of God, opp. to τά τών ανθρώ- πων, Mt. xvi. 23 ; Mk. viii. 33 ; in the same sense τά τοΰ κυρίου, oiip. to τά τοϋ κόσμου, 1 Co. λ ii. 32-34 ; τά της σαρκός, τά τοΰ πνεύματος, Ro. viii. 5 ; τά υμών, your pos- sessions, 2 Co. xii. 14; ζητιΐν τό or τά τίνος, 1 Co. χ. 24; .xiii. 5; Phil. ii. 21; τά τής (ίρήνης, της οικοδομής, which make for, Ro. xiv. 19; τά t^s άσθfv(iaς μου, which per- tain to my \veakness, 2 Co. xi. 30 ; τά KaiVa/)os, T«k ToO θ(οΰ, due to Ca;sar, due to (iod, Mt. xxii. 21 ; Mk. xii. 1 7 ; Lk. xx. 25 ; τά τοϋ νηπίου, the things wont to be thought, said, done, by a child, 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; τά τίνος, the house of one (τά Αΰκωνος, Theocr. 2, 76 ; [fit τά τοΰ οδίλφοΟ, Lysias c. Eratostli. § 12 p. 195]; cf. iv τοις πατρικοΊς, in her father's house. Sir. xiii. 10; [Chry- sost. hom. Hi. (on Gen. xxvi. 16), vol. iv. pt. ii. coL 458 ed. Migne ; Gen. xii. 51 ; Esth. vii. 9, (Ilebr. n'3) ; .lob xviii. 19 (Ilebr. IIJ"?)]) ; with the name of a deity, the tcm/ue (τά τού Αιός, .Joseph, c. Αρ. 1, 18, 2; also τά ToO Διός, Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 231 [(orat. Att. p. 167, 15)]), Lk. ii. 49 (see other exx. in Loh. ad Phryn. p. 100). τά ToO νόμου, the precepts of the (Mosaic) law, Ro. ii. 14 ; TO της παροιμίας, the (saying) of (that which is said in) the proverb, 2 Pet. ii. 22; τά τών ^αιμονιζομίνων, what the possessed had done and experienced, Mt. viiL 33; TO τής συκής, what has been done to the fig-tree, Mt. xxi. 21. 10. The neuter τό is put a. before entire sentences, and sums them up into one conception [B. § 125, 13 ; W. 109 (103 sq.)] : tmev αιτώ τό ΕΪ δύνα- σαι πιστίϋσαι, said to him this: 'If thou canst believe', Mk. ix. 23 [but L Τ Tr WII τό ΕΪ 8ΰνη ' If thou canst! ']; cf. Blcek ad loc. ; [Riddell, The Apology etc. Digest of Idioms § 19 γ.], before the sayings and precepts of the O. T. fpioted in the New : τό Οΰ φονιϋσίΐς, the precept, 'Thou shalt not kill', Mt. xix. 18; add, Lk. xxii. 37 (where Lchm. ort for τό) ; Ro. xiii. 9 ; [1 Co. iv. C LT TrWII]; Gal. v. 14. before indir. questions : to n't etc., TO Ti' etc., TO πώς etc., Lk. i. 62 ; ix. 46 ; xix. 48 ; xxii. 2, 4, 23 sq.; Acts iv. 21 ; xxii. 30; Ro. viii. 26; 1 Th. iv. 1 ; cf. Matthiae § 280; Kruger § 50, 6, 10; Passow ii. p. 395' ; [L. and .S. s. v. B. L 3 sq.]. b. before single words vrluch are explained as parts of some discourse or statement [reff. as above] : τό'Άγαρ, the name*Ayap, Gal. iv. 25 [T L txt. AVII rarg.om. Trbr. "Aya/j]; τ* ' άνίβη ', this word άνίβη, Eph. iv. 9, [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on o^hoTjKOvia 437 oh6)* olSa, see Είδω, Π. p. 1 74. ο1κειακό$, -ή, -όν, see οικιακό';. oUeCos, -α, -ον, (οΐκοί), fr. lies, down, belonging to a house or family, domestic, intimate : belonging to one's household, related by blood, kindred, 1 Tim. v. 8 ; οϊκύοι τοϋ Oeoi, belonging to God's household, i. e. to the theoc- racy, Eph. ii. 19; in a wider sense, with a gen. of the thing, belonging to, devoted to, adherents of a thing, o! oiKeiot T^t πίστίωί, professors of the (Christian) faith. Gal. vi. 10 [butal. associate this pass, with that fr. Eph. as above; see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc] ; so οίκ. φιλοσοφίας, Strab. 1 p. 13 b. [1, 17 ed. Sieben.] ; ■γιω-^ραφίας, p. 2) a. [1, 34 ed. Sieben.] ; ολιγαρχίας, Diod. 13, 91 ; τυραννίδας, 19, 70. (Sept. for ~\Kp related by blood; Ί\Ί, 1 S. x. 14 sqq. ; rr^Ki?, consanguinity, Lev. xviii. 1 7 ; οίκ. τον σπίρματος for -\;;;3, Is. Iviii. 7.) * otKCTCia [al. -eta, cf. Chandler § 99 sqq.], -ας, ή, (υικίτης, q. v.), household i. e. body of servants (INIacrob., Appul. famulitium. Germ. Dienerschafi) : Mt. xxiv. 45 L Τ Tr WIL (Strab., Lcian., Inscrr. ; plur. Joseph, antt. 12, 2, 3•)\ ο[κ6τη5, -ου, ό, (οίκί'ω), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Ildt. down, Lat. domesticus, i. e. one who lives in the same house with another, spoken of all who are under the authority of one and the same householder. Sir. iv. 30; vi. 11, esp. a servant, domestic ; so in Lk. xvi. 13 ; Acts x. 7 ; Ro. xiv. 4 ; 1 Pet. ii. 18 ; Sept. for 13 i'. See more fully on the word, Meyer on Rom. I. c. [where he remarks that οίκ. is a more restricted term than δοΰλοί, designating a AoHse-servant, one holding closer relations to the f.nniily than other slaves ; cf. διάκονος fin., Schmidt ch. 162.] * oIkcu, -ώ ; {οίκος^ ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for 2'd\, a few times for pty ; Lat. habito, [trans.] to dwell m: τι (Hdt. and often in Attic), 1 Tim. vi. IG; [intrans. to dwell], μ(τα τίνος, with one (of the husband and wife), 1 Co. vii. 1 2 sq. ; trop. ev Ttw, to be fixed and operative in one's soul : of sin, Ro. vii. 1 7 sq. 20 ; of the Holy Spirit, Ro. viii. [9], 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 16. [CoMP. : iv-, κατ-, ίνκατ-, παρ-, ntpt-, συν-οικίω.] ' οϊκημα, -ros, τό, fr. [Find, and] Hdt. down, a dwelling- place, habitation ; euphemistically a prison, [R. V. cell], Acts xii. 7, as in Thuc. 4, 47 sq. ; Dem., Lcian. Tox. 29 ; Plut. Agis 19 ; Ael. v. h. 6, 1.* οίκητήριον, -ου, τό. (οίκητήρ), a dwelling-place, habita- tion : Jude 6 ; of the body as the dwelling-place of the spirit, 2 Co. v. 2 (2 Mace. xi. 2 ; 3 Mace. ii. 15 ; [Joseph. c. Ap. 1, 20, 7] ; Eur., Plut., Ceb. tab. 17).* oU£a, -ας, η, (οΓκογ), Sept. for n"3, [fr. Hdt. down], a house; a. prop, an inhabited edifice, a dwelling : Mt. ii. 11 ; vii. 24-27 ; Mk. i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3 ; Acts iv. 34 ; 1 Co. xi. 22 ; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often ; οϊ iv τή οικία sc. οντ^ς, JNIt. V. 15; οί ix της οικίας with gen. of pers., Phil. iv. 22 ; η οικία τοϋ {πατρός μου) θΐον, i. e. heaven, Jn. xiv. 2 ; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2 Co. V. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii. 25 ; ή οικία τινός, the household, the family of any one, Jn. iv. 53 ; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [cf. W. § 58, 4 ; B. § 129, 8 a.]; univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. c. property, wealth, goods, [cf. Lat. res familiaris]: τινός, JNIt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec. [cf. Wetst. ad loc.]; iMk. xii. 40; Lk. XX. 47 ; so οίκος in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 κατί'δουσι βιαίως οίκον Όδυσσηος, cf. 4, 318), in Ildt. 3, 53 and in Attic; Hebr. jT3, Gen. xlv. 18 (Sept. τά υπάρχοντα) ; Esth. viii. 1 (Sept. ίσα ίπηρχ^ν). Not found in Rev. [Syn. see οϊκος, fin.] οικιακό; (in prof. auth. and in some N. T. codd. also oiKftaKOf [cf. ei, i] fr. οΐκος), -οϋ, ό, (οικία), one belonging to the house (Lat. domesticus), one under the control of the master of a house, whether a son, or a servant: Mt. x. 36; opp. to ό οίκο&^σπάτης, ib. 25. (Plut. Cic. 20.)* oiKO-Sto-iroTeu, -ά> ; (οικο&(σ-πότης) ; to be master (or head) of a house; to rule a househoUl, manage family affairs: 1 Tim. V. 14. (A later Grk. word ; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373.)* oiKO-Seu-irorqs, -ou, ό, (οίκος, δ(σπότης), master of a house, householder: ilt. x. 25; xiii. 27; xx. 11; xxiv. 43 ; Mk. xiv. 14 ; Lk. xii. 39 ; xiii. 25 ; xiv. 21 ; άνθρωπος οίκοδ. (see άνθρωπος, 4 a.), Mt. ,\iii. 52 ; xx. 1 ; xxi. 33 ; oίκoδfσπ■ τί^ς οικίας, Lk. xxii. 11, on this pleonasm cf. Borncmnnn, Schol. ad loc. ; W. § G5, 2. (Alexis, a comic poet of the IV. cent. B. c. ap. Poll. 10, 4, 21 ; Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 11, 3 ; Plut. quaest. Rom. 30; Ignat. ad Eph. 6. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 373 shows that the earUer Greeks said οίκου or οικίας δεσπότης.) * οίκοδομ€ω, -ώ; impf. ωκοδόμουΐ'; f ut. οίκοδο/ζτ;(Τω ; 1 aor. ωκοδόμησα [οίκ. Tr WH in Acts vii. 47 ; see Tdf. ad loc. ; Proleg. p. 120 ; WH. App. p. 161 ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 153 ; W. § 12, 4; B. 34 (30)]; Pass., [pres. οίκοδομοΟμαι (inf. -μ(ίσθαι, Lk. vi. 48 Treg.) ; pf. inf. οικο8ομήσθαι (Lk. vi. 48 Τ WH)] ; plupf. 3 pers. sing. ώκοδάμηΓΟ ; 1 aor. ωκοδο- μήθην [οίκ. Τ WH in Jn. ii. 20] ; 1 fut. οίκοδομηθήσομαι ; (οΙκοΒόμος, q. V.) ; fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for nj3 ; to build a house, erect a building ; a. prop. a. to build (up οικοδομή 440 οικονόμος from the foundation) : absol, Lk. xi. 48 GT \VH Trtxt. ; xiv. 30 ; xvii. 28 ; οί οίκο8ομοΰντ(ί, subst., the huitder.i [cf. W.§45,7; B. § 144, U]. Mt. xxi. 42; Mk.xii. 10; Lk. XX. 1 7 ; Acts iv. 1 1 Rec. ; 1 Pet. ii. 7, fr. Vs. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22 ; eV άλλότμιον 6f^i\wv, to build upon a foundation laid by others, i. e. (ivitliout a fig.) to carry on instruction begun by others, Ro> xv. 20; υΙκο&ομ€Ίν rt, Gal. ii. 18; nipyov, Mt. xxi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1 ; Lk. xiv. 28; άποθήκαί, Lk. xii. 18 ; vaou, Mk. xiv. 58 ; pa.ss. .In. ii. 20 [on the aor. cf. 2 Esdr. V. 16] ; οΊκον, pass., 1 Pet. ii. 5 ([here Τ tVotic.], cf. W. 603 (5111), and add otKovpyf'iv τα κατά τον οίκον, Clem. l!ora. 1 Cor. 1,3); [oiVm.-, Lk. vi. 48 (cf. W.l.c.)]; σνναγωγην or οΙκόν τινι, for the use of or in honor of one, Lk. vii. .j; Acts vii. 47, 4!), (Gen. viii. 20; Ezek. xvi. 24) ; oUiav ϊπί τι, Mt. vii. 24, 26 ; Lk. vi. 49 ; πόλικ cV" όρουί, Lk. iv. 29. p. contextually i. q. to realore by buililinr/, in rebuild, repair : τι, Mt. xxiii. 29 ; xxvi. 61 ; xxvii. 40 ; Mk. XV. 29; Lk. xi. 47 and R [L br. Tr mrg.] in 48. b. metaph. a. i. q. to found : «Vl ταίιτη τη πίτρα οικοδομήσω μου την (κκλησίαν, Ί. ϋ. by reason of the strength of thy faith thou shall be my principal support in the establish- ment of my church, Mt. xvi. 18. β. Since both a Chris- tian church and ind i ν id ual Christians are likened to a building or temple in which God or the Holy Spirit dwells (1 Co. iii. 9, 16 sqq. ; 2 Co. vi. 16; Eph. ii. 21). the erection of which temple will not be completely finished till the return of Christ from heaven, those \vho, by action, instruction, exhortation, comfort, promote the Christian wisdom of others and help them to live a correspondent life are regarded as takin'.; part in the erection of that building, and hence are said οίκοδομύν, i. e. (dropping the fig.) In promote ijrowth in Chrislidii iijisdoin,affeclion, r/rare, virtue, holinexx, blessedness : absol.. Acts x.x. 32 LTTr Wll ; 1 Co. viii. 1 ; x. 23; τινά, xiv. 4 ; 1 Th. v. 11 ; ])ass. to groio in wisdom, piety, etc.. Acts ix. 31 ; 1 Co. xiv. 1 7 ; nniv. to gioe one strength and courage, dispose to : ctr την η-ίστιν, Polyc. ad. Philip. 3, 2 [yet here to be built up into (in) etc.] ; even to do what is wrong [A. V. embolden'], fls TO τα (ΐΒωλύθντα eaOldv, 1 Co. viii. 10 [cf. W. § 39, 3 N. 3]. This metaphorical use of the verb Paul, in the opinion of Frilzsche (Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 205 si\.), did not derive from the fig. of building a temple, but from the O. T., where " nj3 and D^n with an ace. of the pers. (/o build one up and to pull one down) denote to bless and to ruin, to prosper and to injure, any one"; cf. Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 5 ; .ler. xxiv. 6 ; xL (x.xxiii.) 7. [Co»lP. : av, eV-, συν-οικηδομΐω.] " οΙκα-&ομ.ή, -Γ(ί, ή, (oiKos, and ϋμω to build), a later Grk. word, condemned by Phryn., yet used by Aristot., Theophr., [(but both these thought to be doubtful)], Diod. (1, 46), Philo (vit. Moys. i. § 40 ; de monarch. ii. § 2), Joseph., Plut., Sept., and many others, for oiVo- ϋόμημα and οίκοδόμησί! ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 487 sqq. cf. p. 421; [W. 24]; 1. (the act of) building, build- ing up, i. q. TO οΙκο8ομ(ΐν ; as, τών τίΐχϊων, 1 Mace. xvi. 23; τον οϊκου τοϋ θ(οΰ, 1 Chr. xxvi. 27; in the X. T. metaph., edifying, edifcalion, i. e. the act of one who promotes another's growth in Christian wisdom, pielf/. holiness, happiness, (see οίκοίομίω, b. β. [cf. W. 35 (34)]) ! Ro. xiv. 19 ; XV. 2 ; [1 Co. xiv. 26] ; 2 Co. x. 8 [see be- low] ; xiii. 10; Eph. iv. 29; with a gen. of the person whose growth is furtlicrcd, υμών. 2 Co. xii. 19, [cf. x. 8]; ί'αυτοΟ [Tdf. αίτοΰ], ICpll. iv. 1 6 ; τοϋ σώματα! τοΰ Χρίστου• ibid. 1 2 : t^s (<κλησία!• 1 Co. xiv. 1 2 ; i. <[. το οίκοίομοϋ», what contributes to edification, or augments wisdom, etc. λαλ^ΐν, \αβ€Ίν, οικο8ομήν, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 5. 2. i. q. οικοδόμημα, n hiiildiiig (i. e. thing built, edifice) : Mk. xiii. 1 s(j.; τοΰ 'κροϋ, .Mt. xxiv. I ; u.sed of the heavenly body, the abode of the soul after death, 2 Co. v. 1 ; trop. of a body of Christians, a Christian church, (see οίκο&ομίω, h. β.), Eph. ii. 21 [cf. ττογ, I. 1 c.]; with a gen. of the owner or occupant, Ofou, 1 Co. iii. 9.* olKoSop.Ca, -at, ή, (οίκοδημίω), (the act of) building, erection, (Time, Plat., I'olyb., Plut., Lcian., etc. ; but never in the Sept.) ; metaph. οίκοδομίαν deoi την «V πίστ(ΐ, the increase which (!od desires in faith (see οικοδομή), 1 Tim. i. 4 Rec. '"^ '''; but see οικονομία. Not infrei]. oiVov. and οίκοδ. are confounded in the Mss. ; see Grimm on 4 Mace. p. 365, cf. llilgenfeld. Barn, epist. p. 28; [jrOrcilte, Chariton 8, 1 p. 599].• οίκο-δόμοΐ, -ov, 6, (oixof, δίμω to builil ; cf. οικονόμο;), a builder, an architect: Acts iv. 11 I.,TTrWH. (Ildt., Xen., Plat., Plut., al. ; Sept.) • oIkovo|u'u, -ΰ ; (οικονύμοί); to be a Steward ; to manage the affairs of a household: absol. Lk. xvi. 2. (Univ. to manage, dispense, order, regulate : Soph., Xen., Plat., Polyb., .loseph., Plut., al. ; 2 JIacc. iii. 14.) * οικονομία, -ας, ή, (οίκονομίω), fr. Xen. and Plat, down, the miiniKjcment (fa hou.tehold or vord alter- nates with πάντα and τά πάιη-α, vs. 8, which there is taken ill an absolute sense).* oiKovp'yos, -Of, (oiiiof, ΕΡΓΩ [cf. epyov], cf. άμπ(\ουργο!, yfuipyot, etc.), airinu)(jdr and κτιπουρός) ; a. prop, the (watch or) k<:i-/>er of a house (Soph., Eur., Arstph., Pans., Plut., al.). b. trop. kee/iing at home and taking care of hotisehold affairs, domestic: Tit. ii. 5 RG; cf. Frilzsrhe, De conform.atione N. T. critica etc. p. 29; [W. 100 si). (95)]; (.\escli.vl. Ag. 1626 ; Eur. Hec 1277; σώφρονα!, οίκονρηνί και φιΧάνίρους, Philo de exsecr. § 4).' οΙκτ((ρω; fut. (as if fr. οίκτιφίω, a form which does not exist) as in the Sept. οίκταρησω, for the earlier οϊκταρώ, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 741 ; [Veitch s. v.; \V. 8S (84); B. 64 (56)]; (fr. olerot pity, and this fr. the interjection oi', oh .') ; to pity, have compassion on : Ttra, Ro. ix. 1.5 (fr. Ex. xxxiii. 19. Hom., Tragg., Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem., Lcian., Plut., Ael. ; Sept. for μπ and □n">). [Syx. see ί'λίί'ω, fin.]* olKTipiuSs, -oil, i, {olκτfίpω), Sept. for 0"3Π'^ (the vis- cera, which were thought to be the seat of compassion [see σπΧάγχνον, b.]), compassion, pity, mercy : σπλάγχνα οίκτφμοϋ (Rec. οίκτιρμων), bowels in which compassion resides, a heart of compassion. Col. iii. 12; in the Script- ures mostly plural (conformably to the Hebr. Ο'ρΠ"^), emotions, lonf/iiii/s, manifestations of pity, [Eng. compas- sions'] (cf. Frit:sche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 5 sqq. ; [W. 176 (166); B. 77 (67)]), toC ftoO, Ro. xii. 1 ; Ileb. x. 28; ό πατήρ των oIkt. (gen. of quality [cf. B. § 132, 10; W. 237 (222)]), the father of mercies i. e. most merciful, 2 Co. i. 3; joined with σπλάγχνα, Phil. ii. 1. (Pind. Pyth. 1, 164.) [Syn. see fXe/a, fin.]* οίκτίρι^ων, -ov, gen. -όνος, {οΙκτ€ίρω), merciful: Lk. vi. 3';; .las. v. 11. (Theocr. 15, 75; Anth. 7, 359, 1 [Epigr. Anth. Pal. Append. 223, 5] ; Sept. for Dini..) [" In classic Grk. only a poetic term for the more common ίΧιήμων." Schmidt iii. p. 5S0.] * οΐμαι, see οΐομαι. οίνο^ιτότηϊ, -ου, ό, (oivos, and πότη! a drinker), a ivine- bibher, given to wine: Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34. (Prov. xxiii. 20; Polyb. 20, 8, 2; Anacr. frag. 98; Anthol. 7, 28, 2.) * olvos, -ov, 0, [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for t", also for CJl'TJI (must, new wine), "ipn, etc. ; wine; a. prop.: Mt. i.x. 17; [xxvii. 34 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ; Mk. xv. 23; Lk. i. 15; .Tn. ii. 3 ; Ro. xiv. 21; Eph. v. 18; 1 Tim. v. 23 ; Rev. xvii. 2, etc. ; οΐνω προσίχιιν, 1 Tim. iii. 8 ; 8ow- Xfi/fW, Tit. ii. 3. b. metaph. ; oivo! τον θυαον ('see θυμοί, 2), fiery wine, which Ciod in his wrath is repre- senleil as mixing and giving to those whom he is about to punish by their own folly and madness. Rev. xiv. 10; xvi. 19 ; xix. 15 ; with τη! itopvflai added [cf. \V. § 30, 3 N. 1 ; B. 155 (136)], a looe-potion as it were, wine excit- ing to fornication, which he is said to give who entices others to idolatry, Rev. xiv. 8; xviii. 3 [here Lom. Tr WII br. οΓν.], and he is said to be drunk with who suffers himself to be enticed. Rev. xvii. 2. c. by meton. i. q. a riiif : Rev. vi. 6. οίνοψλυγία, -a!, ή, (οΐυοφλνγΐω, and this fr. οι'νάφλυ^, which is compounded of otvo! and φΧνω, to bubble up, overflow), ilrunkcnness, [A. V. ivine-l/ibbing'] : 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen. oec. 1, 22 ; Aristot. eth. Nic. 3, 5, 15 ; Polyb. 2, 19, 4 ; Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 22 [for other exx. see Siegfried, Philo etc. p. 102] ; Ael. v. h. 8, 14.) [Cf. Trench § Ixi.] * οΕομαι, contr. o'/iat ; [fr. Hom. down] ; to suppose, think: foil, by an ace. w. inf. Jn. xxi. 25 [Tom. vs.]; by the inf. alone, where the subj. and the obj. are the same, Phil. i. 16 (17); by on, Jas. i. 7. [Syn. see ηγίομαί, fin.] * olos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], relat. pron. (correlative to the demonstr. Tolot and Toioirros), what sort of, what manner of, such as (Lat. rjitalis) : οίος . . . τοιοΰτοΓ, 1 Co. XV. 48 ; 2 Co. x. 11 ; τον αντον . . . οίον, Phil. i. 30 ; with the pron. τοιοΟτογ suppressed, Mt. xxiv. 21 ; Mk. ix. 3 ; xiii. 19 [here however the antecedent demonstr. is merely attracted into the relat. clause or perhaps repeated for rhetorical emphasis, cf. B. § 143, 8 ; W. 148 (140) ; see toioOtos, b.] ; 2 Co. xii. 20 ; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; Rev. xvi. 18 ; οίωΒηποτοΰν νοσήματι, of what kind of disease soever, Jn. V. 4 Lchm. [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 373 sq.] ; in indir. quest., Lk. i.\. 55 [Rec.]; 1 Th. i. 5. ονχ olov Si οτι «- πίτΓτωκΐν, concisely for ov to'lov ioTiv oiov on €κπ. but the thinr/ (state of the case) is not such as this, that the word of God hath fallen to the ground, i. e. the word of God hath by no means come to nought [A. V. bict not as though the word of God hath etc.], Ro. ix. 6 ; cf. W. § 64 I. 6 ; B. § 150, 1 Rem.* οΙοσ-δητΓοτοΰν, .In. v. 4 Lchm., see olos. οϋσω, see φίρω. oKvc'ci). -ώ : 1 aor. ωκνησα ; (οκνος [perh. aUied w. the frequent, cunc-tari (cf. Curtiiis p. 708)] delay) ; fr. Hom. down; to feel loath, Co be slow; to delay, hesitate: foil, by an inf. Acts ix. 38. (Num. xxii. 16 ; Judg. xviii. 9, etc.) * οκνηροί, -ά, -όν, {όκνίω), sluggish, slothful, backward: Mt. XXV. 26 ; with a dat of respect [cf. W. § 31, 6 a. ; B. § 133, 21], Ro. xii. 11 ; οΰκ οκνηρόν μοί «στι, foil, by an inf., is not irksome to me, I am not reluctant, Phil. iii. 1 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Pind., Soph., Thuc, Dem., Theocr., etc.; Sept. for '7x1;.) * όκταήμκρο;, -ov, (οκτώ, ήμίρα), eight days old; passing the eighth day : π^ριτομί) [cf. W. § 31, 6 a. ; B. § 133, 21 ; but Rec. -μήΐ οκταήμ(ρο!. circumcised on the eighth day, Phil. iii. 5; see τ^ταρταίο!: ['the word denotes prop, not interval but duration' (see Bp. Lghtft. onPhiL 1. 0.1. Graec. Ven. Gen. xvii. 12; eccl. writ.].* 443 oKopa care) ; to care little for, regard lightly, make small account of: rn«t (see Matthiae § 348; [W. § 30, 10 d.]), Heb. xii. 5 fr. Prov. iii. 11. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., Dem., Aris- tot., Philo, .Joseph., al.) * oXC-ycDi, {ολίγος), adv., a little, scarcely, [R. Y. Just (es- caping)] : 2 Pet. ii. 18 G L Τ Tr WH [for Rec. όντωίΐ (Anthol. 12, 205, 1 ; [Is. x. 7 Aq.].) * ()λοθρ€υτή5 [Rec. όλ.], -οϋ, 6, {ολοθρήω, q. v.), a de- stroyer ; found only in 1 Co. x. 10.• ολοθρ<νω and, ace. to a preferable form, 6λ(6ρ(ύω (Lchm.; see Bleeh, Hebr.-Br. ii. 2 p. 809; cf. Delitzsch, Com. on Heb. as below ; \_Tdf. Proleg. p. 81 ; WH. App. p. 152]); {Άλίθρος); an Ale.x. word [W. 92 (t^8)]; to destroy: τίκά, Heb. xi. 28. (Ex. xii. 23,; Josh. iii. 10; vii. 25 ; Jer. ii. 30 ; Hag. ii. 22, etc. ; [Philo, alleg. ii. 9].) [COMP. : €ξ-ολοθρ€ίω.γ ολοκαύτωμα, -ros, τό, (όλοκαυτόω to burn whole, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 24; Joseph, antt. 1, 13, 1 ; and this fr. όλοί and KavTos, for καυστόί, verbal adj. fr. καίω, cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 524; [W. 33]), a whole burnt offering (Lat. holocaustum), i. e. a victim the whole (and not like other victims only a part) of which is burned : Mk. xii. 33 ; Heb. x. 6, 8. (Sept. esp. for nSi' ; also for nUii, Ex. XXX. 20; Lev. v. 12; xxiii. 8, 25, 27; 1 Mace. i. 45; 2 Mace. ii. 10; not found in prof. auth. [exc. Philo da sacr. Ab. et Cain. § 33] ; Joseph, antt. 3, 9, 1 and 9, 7, 4 says όλοκαύτωσίί.)* ολοκληρία, -as. 17, {ολόκληρο!, q. v.), Lat. integritas; used of an unimpaired condition of body, in which all its members are healthy and fit for use ; Vulg. Integra sanitas [A. V. perfect soundness"]: Acts iii. 16 (joined with iiyifia, Plut. mor. p. 1063 f. ; with τοΰ σώματος added, ibid. p. 1047 e.; cf. Diog. Laert. 7, 107; corporis integritas, i. q. health, in Cic. de fin. 5, 14, 40; Sept. for Dhn, Is. i. 6).• όλό-κληροβ, -OK, {ολο! and κληρο!, prop, all that has fallen by lot), complete in all its parts, in no part wanting or unsound, complete, entire, whole : λίθοι, untouched by a tool, Deut. xxvii. 6 ; Josh. ix. 4 (viii. 31) ; 1 Mace. iv. 47; of a body without blemish or defect, whether of a priest or of a victim, Philo de vict. § 12; Joseph, antt. 3, 12, 2 [(cf. Havercamp's Joseph, ii. p. 321)]. Ethi- cally, /ree /rom sin, faultless, [R. V. entire'] : 1 Th. v. 23 ; plur., connected with τϊλιιοι and with the addition of iv μη$(νι λf iffofifKoi, Jas. i. 4 ; complete in all respects, con- summate, δικαιοσύνη. Sap. xv. 3 ; (Ισίβ(ΐα, 4 Mace. xv. 17. (Plat., Polyb., Lcian., Epict., al. ; Sept. for ohu, Deut. xxvii. 6 ; D'pn, Lev. xxiii. 15; Ezek. xv. 5.)• [Stn. ολόκληρο!, τ€λ6ΐο$ (cf. Trench § xxii.): 'in the ό\6κ\Ύΐρο5 no grace wliich ought to be in a Christian man is deficient ; in the τίλαο; no grace is merely in its weak imperfect beginnings, but all have reached a certain ripeness and maturity.'] ολολύζω; an onomatopoetic verb (cf. the similar οΐμώ- ζίΐν, αΐάζίΐν, άλαλά^ίίΐ', πιπίζίΐν. κοκκΰζ€ΐν, TifetK. Com- pare the Germ. term, -zen, as in grunzen, kriichzen, ach- zen). to howl, wail, lament : Jas. v. 1. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down of a loud cry, whether of joy or of grief; Sept. tor S'S-n.) [Syn. cf. κλαία, fin.] • ολο5, 1), -ov, Sept. for '73, [fr. Pind. (Horn.") down], 6XoTe\t}<: 444 ομνύω whole, (all) : with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times in the X. T., viz. oKov άνθ))ω-πον, Jn. vil. Ti ; iviavTov o\ov. Acts xi. Jli ; οΚη Ίί,ιαυσαλι'ιμ, xxi. ;fl ; SicruiK ΰλην, xxviii. .iO ; ολουΓ oiicous, Tit. i. 11; [to wliich add, St' ο\η! vvKTos, l^lv. V. 5 l/l'Tr WII]. usually placed before a substantive which has the article: όλ;; ή Γαλιλαία, Mt. iv. 23 ; όλη ή Συμία, 24 : καθ' όλην την πάλιν, Lk. viii. 39 ; όλον το σώμα, Mt. ν. 2» sij. ; vi. 22. sq. ; Lk. xi. 34 ; 1 Co. xii. 17; .Jas. iii. 2, etc.; [όλη ή ίκκλησία, Ho. xvi. 23 LTTr Wll]; όλην τ. ήμίραν, Mt. XX. G; Ko. viii. 3G; όλος ό νόμοί, Mt. xxii. 4i); Gal. v. 3; .Fas. ii. 10; iv όλη Tj καρδία σου, Mt. .\xii. 37; (ξ όλη! τ. Knp&ias συν, Mk. xii 30, and many other exx. it is placed after a sub- stantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B. § 125, 6] : ή πό\κ όλη, Mk. i. 33 ; Acts xix. 29 [Rec.] ; xxi. 30 — (the distinction which KrUger§50, 11,7 makes, viz. that ή όλη πύλΐΓ denotes the whole city as opp. to its parts, but that όλη ή πύλιι and ή πόλις ή όλη denotes the whole city in opp. toother ideas, as the country, the fields, etc., does not hold good at least for the N. T., where even in ij πόλΐΓ όλη the city is opposed only to its parts); add the foil, exx.: Mt. xvi. 26; xxvi. 59; Lk. i.\. 25; xi. 30"; Jn. iv. 53; Ro. xvi. 23 [RG]; 1 Jn. v. 19 ; Rev. iii. 10 ; vi. 12 G L Τ Tr \VH ; xii. 9 ; xvi. 14. It is subjoined to an adjective or a verb to show that the idea expressed by the adj. or verb belongs to the whole person or thing under consideration : Mt. xiii. 33 ; Lk. xi. 36"; xiii. 21 ; Jn. ix. 34; xiii. 10, (Xen. mem. 2, 6, 28). Neut. τοίτο Se όλον, Mt. i. 22 ; xxi. 4 (where (i L Τ Tr WII uni. όλον); xxvi. 5(j ; Si όλου. through- out, Jn. xix. 2.i. όλοτ€λή$, -if, (όλο:, TtXor), perfect, complete in all re- spects: 1 Th. V. 23. (Plut. plac. philos. 5, 21 ; [Field, Ilexapla, Lev. vi. 23; Ps. 1. 21]; eccles. writ.) ' 'Ολυμπά; [peril, contr. fr. Όλυμπιό^ωρος, W. 103 (97) ; c£. Fick; (Jr. Personennamen, pp. 1J3 sip 201], -a, [15. 20 (18)], 0, ϋΐιιιη/ιιιχ, a certain Christian: llo. xvi. 15.* όλυνθοϊ, -on, 0, OH unripe firj (Lat. «//vjssii.s), ivhich grows during the winter, yet does not come to maturity but falls off in the spring [cf. B. D. s. V. Fig] : Rev. vi. 13. (lies, fr. 14; lldt. 1, 193; Dioscorid. 1, 185; Theophr. cans, plant. 5,9, 12; Sept. cant. ii. 13.) * ίίλωί, (όλοΕ), adv., wholbi, altogether, (Lat. omnino), [with a neg. at all} : Mt. v. 34 (with which compare Xen. mem. 1, 2, 35); 1 Co. v. 1 [R. V. actually y, vi. 7; xv. 29. [(Plat., Isocr., al.)] • όμβρος, -ου, ό, (Lat. imber) a shower, i. e. a violent rain, accompanied by high wind with thunder and lightning: Lk. xii. 51. (Ueut. xxxii. 2 ; Sap. xvi. IG; in (irk. ivrit. fr. Iloin. down.) * όμίίρομαι [or όμ., see below] i. (j. ίμ^Ιρομαι ; to desire, long for, yearn afler, [A. V. to he affectionately desirous] : Tivoc, 1 Th. ii. 8 GLTTr \VU [but the last read όμ., cf. their App. p. 144 and Loh. Pathol. Element, i. 72], on the authority of all the uncial and many cursive Mss., for Rec. Ίμίΐρόμίνοι. The Avord is unknoivn to the Grk. writ., but the commentators adioc. recognize it, as do Ilesychius, Phavorinus, and Photius. and interpret it by ϊπιθυμίϊν. It is found in Ps. Ixii. 2 Symm., and ace. to some Mss. in Job iii. 21. .\cc. to the conjecture of Frit:sclii', Cora, on Mk. p. 792, it is composed of όμοϋ and ttpdv, just as Phiilius [p. 331, 8 ed. Porson] explains it ομού ήμμύσθαι [so Theo- l)hylaet (cf. Tdf.'s note)]. But there is this objection, that all the verbs compounded with όμοϋ govern the da- tive, not the genitive. Since Nicander, ther. vs. 402, uses μfίpoμatfoΓ Ίμάρομαι, some suppose that the original form is μύρομαι, to which, after the analogy of κίλλω and ϋ«λλω, cither Ί or ό is for euphony prefixed in Ίμύρ. and όμ^Ιρ. But as Ίμίίρομαι is derived from Ίμιρος, we must suppose that Xicauder drojiped the syllable i to suit the metre. Accordingly όμίίρισθαι seems not to differ at all from Ίμίίρισΰαι, and its form must be attributed to a vul- gar jjronuuciation. Cf. [WJi. App. p. 152]; W. 101 (95) ; [B. G4 (56) ; Ellic. on 1 Th. 1. c. ; (iCuenen and Cohet, N. T. Vat. p. ciii.)].* όμιλ€α>. -ά>; im|)f. ώμίλουν; 1 aor. ptcp. ό/ιιλί^σαΓ ; (βμι- λοί, q. v.); freq. in (irk. writ. fr. Horn, down; to he in company with ; to asssnciate tcilh ; to stay with ; hence to converse tvith, tali• with : τινί, with one (Dan. i. 19), Acts -xxiv. 26 ; sc. aiTo'is, Acts xx. 11 [so A. V. talked], unless one prefer to render it when he had stayed in their com• party ; irpos τίνα, Lk. xxiv. 14 (Xen. mem. 4, 3, 2 ; Joseph, antt. 11,6, 11; [cf. W. 212s(i. (200); B. §133, 8]); eV τω ί)μιλ(Ίν αντηνί S.C. άλληλοί!, ibid. 15. [CoMP. : συν-ομιλίω.]' ομιλία, -at, J], (όμίλυς), companionship, intercourse, com- munion : 1 Co. XV. 33, on which see ηθοί- (Tragg., Ar- stph., Xen., Plat., and sqq.) * ομιλο$, -ου, ό, {ομάς, όμοϋ, and Γλι; a crowd, band, [Cur- tius § GOO; Vanicek p. X97; but Fick iii. 723 fr. root tnil ' to be associated,' ' to love']), fr. Horn, down, a multitude of men gathered together, a crowd, throng : Rev. .xviii. 17 Rec* όμ(χλη, -ijr, ij, (in Ilom. όμί)(λη, fr. όμιχίω to make water), a mist, fog : 2 Pet. ii. 17 G L Τ Tr WII. (Am. iv. 13; Joel ii. 2; Sir. xxiv. 3; Sap. ii. 4.)* Ομμα, -TOf, TO, (f Γ. ότττομαι [see 6ράω~\, pf. Ζίμμαι), fr. Horn. down, on eye: plur., Mt. xx. 34 LTTr WII; Mk. viii 23. (Sept. for γΐ\, Prov. vi. 4 ; vii. 2 ; x. 26.) * όμννω (Mt. xxiii. 20s(|. ; xxvi. 74 ; Ileb. vi. 16 ; Jas. v. 12 ; [W. 24]) and όμνυμι {ΰμνϋναι, Mk. xiv. 71 G L Τ Tr WII [cf. B.45 (39)]) form their tenses fr. OMOQ; hence 1 aor. ώ/χοσα; Sept. for i'SOT ; to swear; to affirm, prom- ise, threaten, with an oath : absol., foil, by direct discourse, Mt. xxvi. 74 ; Mk. xiv. 71 : Ileb. vii. 21 ; foil, by «', Heb. iii. 11; iv. 3; see«, I. 5. ό/χν. όρκοι/ (often so in (irk. writ, fr. Ilom. down [W. 226 (212)]) ττρός τίνα, to one (Horn. Od. 14, 331; 19, 288), Lk. i. 73 ; d/ifw iv with dat. of the person to whom one promises or threatens something with an oath : foil, by direct disc. Mk. vi. 23 ; by an inf. [W. 331 (311)], Heb. iii. 18; with ορκω added. Acts ii. 30 [W. 603 (56 1 )] ; τινί τι, Acts vii. 1 7 [Rec. i. e. gen. by at- traction ; cf. B. § 143, 8; W. § 24, 1]. that by which one swears is indicated by an ace, τιι-ίί or τι (so in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down [cf. W. § 32, 1 b. y. ; B. 147 (128)]), in swearing to call a person or thing as witness, to invoke, swear hy, (Is. Ixv. 16 ; Joseph, antt. 5, 1, 2 ; 7, 14, 5) ; τβ» όμοθυμαΖον 445 ομ.οια>θΉ οίρανόν, την yfjii, Jas. v. 1 2 ; with prepositions [cf. B. u. s.] : κατά Ttvo£ (see κατά, I. 2 a.), Ileb. vi. 13, 16, (Gen. xxii. 16; xxxi. 04; 1 S. xxviii. 10 [Com p.]; Is. xlv. 23; Ixii. 8; Am. iv. 2 ; Dem. p. 553, 1 7 ; 553, 26 [al. άπομ.^, etc. ; κατά πάντων ωμνυ( θ(ών. Long. past. 4, IG) ; in imitation of tlie Hebr. ;'2JJ foil, by 3, ΐν Τίνι. is used [W. 389 (364); B. I. c. ; see iV, I. 8 b.] : Mt. v.34,36; xxiii. 16, 18, 20-22; Rev. X. 6 ; fls τί, witli the mind directed unto [W. 397 (371) ; B. as above ; see tU, B. II. i a.], Mt. v. 35.* όμοθυμαεον (fr. ομόθυμο!, and this fr. όμύί and βνμΟ!\ on advs. in-3oi/ [chieliy derived fr. nouns, and designating form or structure] as γνωμηδόν, ροιζηδόν, etc., cf. Bum. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), with one miniJ, υ /one accord, (Vulg. unanimiter [etc.]) : Ko. xv. 6 ; Acts i. 14; ii. 46; iv. 24; vii. 57 ; viii. 6 ; xii. 20 ; xv. 25 ; xviii. 1 2 ; xix. 29, and R G in ii. 1, (Arst])h., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian., Sept. Lam. ii. 8 ; Job xvii. Ki ; Xum. xxiv. 24, etc.) ; with &7ravT(s [L Τ WH jran-fs] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in class. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [cf. ii. 1 above].* όμοιάΙζω; (όμοίΟ!, [cf. W. 25]); ίο be like: Mt. .xxiii. 27 LTr txt. Wll mrg. ; Mk. xiv. 70 Rec. where see Fritz- eche p. 658 sq. ; [on the dat. cf . ^V. § 3 1 , 1 h. j. Not found elsewhere. [Co.MP. : πap-oμo^άζω■^* ό)ΐοι.οπαθή$, -is, (όμοιο;, πάσχω), suffering the like with another, of like feelings or affeclion.t: τινί, Acts xiv. 15 ; Jas. v. 17. (Plat. rep. 3, 409 b., Tim. 45 c. ; Theophr. h. pi. 5, 8 (7, 2) ; Philo, conf. ling. § 3 ; 4 Mace. xii. 13 ; yij, i. e. trodden alike by all. Sap. vii. 3 ; see exx. fr. eccles. writ. [viz. Ignat. (Interpol.) ad Trail. 10; Euseb. h. e. 1, 2, 1, (both of the incarnate Logos)] in Grimm on4 Mace, p. 344.)• δμοιοί (on the accent cf. [Chandler §§ 384, 385] ; W. 52 (51); Bum. Ausf. Spr. § 11 Anm. 9), -οία, -oio», also of two term, (once in the N. T., Rev. iv. 3 R" G L Τ Tr WH; cf. \V. §11, 1; [B. 26 (23)]), (fr.o^oi [akin to άμα (q. v.), Lat. similii, Eng. same, etc.]), [fr. Horn, down], like, similar, resembling: a. /I'te i. e. resembling : τινί, in form or look, Jn. Lx. 9; Rev. i. 13, 15; ii. 18; iv. 6 sq. ; ix. 7, 10 [but here Tr txt. AVH mrg. όμοιοιι], 19 ; xi. 1 ; xiii. 2, 11 ; xiv. 14 [but here Τ WH w. the ace us. (for dat.)] ; xvi. 13 Rec. ; opaaet, in appearance. Rev. iv. 3 ; in nature. Acts xvii. 29 ; (!al. v. 21 ; Rev. xxi. 11,18; in nature and condition, 1 .In. iii. 2 ; in mode of thinking, feeling, acting, Mt. xi. 16; xiii. 52; Lk. vi. 47-49; vii. 31 sq.; xii. 36, and LWHTrtxt. (see below) in Jn. viii. 55 ; i. q. 7nni/ be compared to a thing, so in parables : Mt. xiii. 31, 33, 44 sq. 47; xx. 1 ; Lk. xiii. 18 sq. 21. b. like i.e. corresponding or equiv. to, the same as: ομοιον τούτοΐί τρόπον, Jude 7 ; equal in strength, Rev. xiii. 4 ; in power and attractions, Rev. xviii. 18 ; in authority, Mt. xxii. 39 ; Mk. xii. 31 [here Τ WH om. Tr mrg. br. όμ.'] ; in mind and character, twos (cf. W. 195 (183), [cf. § 28, 2] ; B. § 132, 24), Jn. viii. 55 R G Τ Trmrg. (see above).* e)iou>rqs, -ητοί, ή, (όμοιοι), likeness : καθ" ομοιότητα, in like manner, Heb. iv. 15 [cf. W. 143 (13G)] ; κατά την ομοιότητα (Μί\χισ(5(κ), after the likeness, Heb. vii. 15. (Gen. i. 11; 4 Mace. xv. 4 (3); Plat., .\ristot., Isocr., Polyb., Philo, Plut.) • όμοιοω, -ω : fut. ομοιώσω ; Pass., 1 aor. ώμοιώθην, and without augm. όμοιώβΐ)!' (once Ko. ix. 29 L mrg. Τ edd- 2, 7, [but see WH. App. p. 161] ; cf. B. 34 (30) ; Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 1 24 ; [cf.] L/>b. ad Phryn. p. 153) ; I fut. όμοιωθησομαι; (ό /ioiot); fr. [Hom. and] Hdt. down; Sept. esp. for Π31; a. to make like: τικά τινι; pass, to be or to become like to one : Alt. vi. 8 ; Acts xiv. 1 1 ; Heb. ii. 1 7 ; ωμοιώθη η βασιλ. των oip-, was made like, took the likeness of, (aor. of the time when the Messiah appeared), 'Sit. xiii. 24 ; xviii. 23 ; xxii. 2 ; 6μηιωθήσ(τ:ιι (fut. of the time of the last judgment), Mt. xxv. 1 ; it τι, to be made Uke and thus to become as a thing [i. e. a blending of two thoughts ; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. iv. 31 ; B. § 133, 10 ; W. § 65, 1 a.], Ro. ix. 29 (3 n^^J Ezek. xxxii. 2). b. to liken, compare : τίΐ/ά τινι, or τί rtw, Mt. λ ii. 24 [R G (see below)]; xi. 16; .Mk. iv. 30 R L txt.Tr mrg. ; Lk. vii. 31 ; xiii. 18, 20 ; pass. Mt. vii. [24 L Τ WH Trtxt.], 26 ; to illustrate by comparison, πώί όμοιώσωμιν την βασ. τοϋ θ(ον, Mk. iv. 30 Τ WH Tr txt. L mrg. [CoMP. : αφ- ομοιόω.'] * ομοίωμα, -rof, τ<5, (όμοιο'ω), Sept. for nj^Jl, ΠηΉ, C^X^ n"J3Jl; prop, that which has been made after the likeness of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness, representation : Ps. cv. (cvi.) 20 ; 1 Mace. iii. 48 ; of the image or shape of things seen in a vision. Rev. Lx. 7 [cf. W. 604 (562)] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28, etc. Plato, in Farmen. p. 132 d., calls finite things ομοιώματα, likenesses as it were, in which τα παραπήγματα, i. e. a'l ιδίαι or τα (187, are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inas- much as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity: ruxit, Ro. vi. 5 ; viii. 3 (on which see σαρξ, 3 fin. [cf. Weiss, BibL Theol. etc. §§ 69 c. note, 78 c. note]) ; Phil. u. 7 (see μορφή); (Ικόνος, a likeness expressed by an image, i. e. an image like, Ro. i. 23 ; eVt τω όμοιώματι της παραβάσκΐο^ Αδάμ, in the same manner in which .\dam transgressed a command of God [see iV/, B. 2 a. η.], Ro. v. 14. Cf. the different views of this word set forth by Holsten, Zum Evangel, des Paulus u. Petrus, p. 437 sqq. and [esp. for exx.] in the Jahrbiich. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 451 sqq., and by Zeller, Zeitsihr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1870, p. 301 fii<[. [Syx. cf. f'lKwv. fin. : Schmidt ch. 191.]• όμ.ο£ω5, (όμοίοί), adv., [fr. Pind., Hdt. down], likewise, equally, in the same way: Mk.iv. 16 (Trmrg. br.όμ.) ; Lie. iii. 11; x. 37; xiii. 3 L Τ Tr WH ; SRGLTrmrg.; xvi. 25 ; xvii. 31 •- Jn. v. 19 ; xxi. 13 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 7; v. 5; Heb. ix. 21; Rev. ii. 15 (for Rec. i μισώ); viiL 12; όμοίωί καΐ, Mt. xxii. 26 ; xxvi. 35 ; Mk. .\v. 31 [here Rec όμ. δί καί ] ; Lk. V. 33 ; xvii. 28 R G L ; x.xii. 36 ; Jn. vi. I I ; 1 Co. vii. 22 R G ; ομοίως μίντοι καί, Jude 8 ; όμοίακ δί καί, Mt. xxvii. 41 R G (where Τ om. L br. He και, Tr br. de, WH om. 8e and br. καί) ; Lk. v. 10 ; x. 32 ; 1 Col vii. 3 (where L br. 8e), 4; Jas. ii. 25; and correctly restored by L Tr mrg. in Ro. i. 27, for R Τ Tr txt. WH ομοίως τ( καί ; cf. Fritzsche, Rom. i. p. 77 ; [AV. 571 (531); B. § 149, 8] ; ομοίως preceded by καθώς, Lk. vi. 31.• όμοΙω<Γΐ5, -tiiJt, ij. (ομοιόω ) ; 1. α making like '. opp. to άλλοίωσι;. Plat. rep. 5, 454 C. 2. liieneMi OfjLoKcrfew 446 όναώι.σμό'; (Plat., Aristot., Theophr.) : Kaff όμοίωσιν flfoi, after the likeness of God, Jas. iii. 9 fr. Gen. i. Ίύ. [Cf. Trench § XV.] • όμολογ(ω, -<>> > itnpf. ώ^λόγοιικ; fut. ομολογήσω; 1 aor. αμολήγησα; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. ofioXoyf ίται ; (fr. όμο- λογοί, and this fr. όμάν and λίγω) ; fr. [Soph, andj Hdt. down ; 1. prop, to say the same thing as another, i. e. lo agree with, assent, both absol. and w. a dat. of the pers. ; often so in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; hence 2. univ. 10 cnticeile ; i. e. a. 7wt to re/use, i. e. to promise : Tw'i τήν enayyfXiav, Acts vii. 17 LTTr WH [here R. V. vourltsa/t]; full, hy an object, inf., Mt. .\iv. 7 (Plat., Dem., Plut., al.). b. not lo dimij, \. e. lo confess; declare: joined w. ουκ αριχίσθαι, foil, by direct disc, with recitative ότι, Jn. i. 20; foil, hy on, Ileb. xi. 13 ; τινί τι, ότι, Acts xxiv. 14 ; ίο confess, i. e. to admit or declare one's self guilty of what one is accused of : ras αμαρτία!, 1 Jn. i. 9 (Sir. iv. 26). 3. to profess (the ditf. betw. the Lat. profteor [' to declare openly and voluntarily'] and con/r'ieor [' to declare fully,' implying the yielding or change of one's conviction ; cf. professio fidei, confes- sio peccatorum] is e.xhibited in Cic. pro Sest. 51, 109), i. e. to declare openly, speak out freely, [A. V. generally confess; on its constr. see B. § 133, 7] : [foil, by an inf., ii'Se'rai βίόι/, Tit. i. 16]; rm [cf. B. u. s. ; W. §31, If.] foil, by direct disc, with ϋτι recitative, Mt. vii. 23 ; one is said o/ioXoyf ix that of which he is convinced and which he holds to be true (hence όμ. is disting. fr. mcrrfieiv in Jn. xii. 42; Ro. x. 9 sq.) : pass, absol., with στόματι (dat. of instrum.) added, Ro. x. 10 ; ri, Acts xxiii. t! ; nm with a predicate ace. [B. u. s.], αίτόν Χμιστόν. Jn. ix. 22; κϋ- pioK (pred. ace.) Ίι;σοΟΐ', Ro. x. 9 [here WII το ρήμα . . . ότι κύριος etc., L mrg. Tr rarg. simply οτί etc. ; again with ότι in 1 Jn. iv. 15] ; 'liyoOUi/ Xp. iv σαρκϊ ί\ηλυθότα [Tr mrg. WH mrg. (Χη\νθ€ναι'], 1 Jn. iv. 2 and Rec. also in 3 [see below] ; (ρ)^όμ(υον iv σαρκΊ, 2 Jn. 7, [cf. B. u. s. ; W. 346 (324)]; τινά, to profess one's self the worshipper of one, 1 Jn. iv. 3 [here WII mrg. Xiei, cf. Weslcott. Epp. of Jn. p. 156 sqq.] and G L Τ Tr WII in ii. 23 ; iv with a dat. of the pers. (see iv, I. 8 c.), Alt. x. 32 ; Lk. xii. 8 ; wiih cognate ace. giving the substance of the profession [cf. B. § 131, 5; W. § 32, 2], όμολογίαν, 1 Tim. vi. 12 (also full, by nep'i Timt, Philo de raut. nom. § 8) ; ro όνημά Tiros, to declare the name (written in the book of life) to be the name of a follower of me. Rev. iii. 5 G L Τ Tr λ\ Η• 4. Ace. to a usage unknown to Grk. writ, to praise, celebrate, (see (ξομοΧογίω. 2 ; [Β. § 133, 7]) : τιι/ί, Ileb. xiii. 15. [Co.MI•. : άνθ-{.-μαι), (ξ-ομοΧογίω.] ' ομολογία, -ας, ή, {όμοΧογίω, ({. ν. [cf. W. 35 (34)]), in the Ν. τ. profession [R. V. uniformly c ο nfession^ ; a. subjectively: fip;^-ifH£a nji; ύμολ. ήμων. i. e. « lioin we pro- fess (to be ours), Ileb. iii. 1 [butal. refer this to b.]. b. objectively, y)ro/e.s.siOji [confession] i.e. what one professes [confesses] : Heb. iv. 14 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 2 (see όμολογίω, 3) ; 13 (see μαμτνρίω, a. p. 391") ; της (Χπί8ος. the substance of our profession, which we embrace with hope, Ileb. x. 23 ; fif TO fiayyfXiov τοϋ Χρίστου, relative to the gospel, 2 Co. ix. 13 (translate, ybr the obedience ye render to what ye profess concerning the gospel; cf. ή fit τον τβΟ θιοϋ Χριστον ομολογία, Justin Μ. dial. c. Try ph. c. 47, — a con- str. occasioned perhaps by ή (ίς τί>ν Χριστϋν ττίστις, Col. ii. 5; [cf. W. 381 (357)]). [(Hdt., Plat., al.)] • όμολο-γουμί'νως, (όμολογίω), adv., by consent of all, con- fessedly, irilhoul coiilrorersy : 1 Tim. iii. 16. (4 Mace, vi. 31 ; vii. 16 ; xvi. 1 ; in prof. auth. fr. 'J'huc, Xen., Plat, down ; \vith imo πάντων added, Isocr. paneg. § 33, where see Baiter's note.)* όμότίχνοϊ, -υν, (όμός and τ(χνη), practising the same trade or craft, of the same trnile: Acts xviii. 3. (Ildt. 2, 89 ; Plat.. Dem., Jose|)h., Lcian., al.) • όμον, {όμύς). [fr. Horn, down], adv., together: .In. iv. 36 ; .\x. 4 ; ttrai όμοϋ, of persons assenibleil together. Acts ii. 1 L Τ Tr WII ; xx. 18 Lchm. ; Jn. x.\i. 2. [Syn. see άμα, fin.] * όμόω. see ομνύω. όμόφρων, -ov, (όμός, φρήν'), of one mind, [A. V. like viindt'il], ronrnrilani : 1 Pet. iii. 8. (Ilom., lies., Pind., Arstph., Anthol., Plut., al.)* ομ(ι>ΐ. (όμο'ί), fr. Hom. down, yet; it occurs twice in the N. T. out of its usual position [cf. W. § 61, 5 f . ; B. § 144, 23]. viz. in 1 Co. xiv. 7, where resolve thus: τα αψνχα, καίιτ(ρ φωνην διδόιτα, ομω;, (άν διαστολών . . . πως κτλ. instruments without life, although giving forth a sound, yet, unless they give a distinction in the sounds, how shall it be known etc., Friizsche, Conject. spec. i. p. 52; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [W. 344 (323)]; again, όμα>Γ άνθρωπου . . . ον^Ας ά6ίτ(ΐ for άνθρωπου κίκυρ. 8ιαθήκην, Kaintp ανθρώπου ουσαν, ομω? oCofij κτΧ. a man's estai>- lished civenant, though it be but a man's, yet no one etc. Gal. iii. 15; όμως μί'ιτοί, but yet, nevertheless, [cf. W. 444 (413)], Jn. xii. 42.* ό'ναρ, TO, (an indecl. noun, used only in the nom. and ace. sing. ; the other cases are taken from όν(ιρός), [fr. Hom. down], ο dream: κατ όναρ, in a dream, Mt. i. 20; ii. 12 sq. 19, 22; xxvii. 19, — a later Greek phrase, for which Attic writ, used όναρ without κατά [q. v. II. 2] ; see Lob. ad Phryu. p. 422 sqq.; \_Photius, Lex. p. 149, 25 sq.].• όνάριον, -ov, TO, (dimin. of όνος; cf. [W. 24 and] yv ναικάριον), a little ass: Jn. xii. 14. (Machon ap. Athen. 13 p. oSl'c. ; [Epictet. diss. 2, 24, 18].)* ον(ΐ8£ζω ; impf. ώΐ'βίδι^οΐ' ; 1 aor. ώνί ι'δισα ; pres. pass. ον(ώίζ'ψαι: (ο«ιδοί, q• v.) ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. esp. for ητΐ ; In reproach, upbraid, revile; [on its constr. cf. W. § 32, 1 b. /3. ; B. § 133, 9] : of deserved reproach, τινά, foil, by on, Mt. xi. 20; W (the fault) τίνος, foil, by ότι, .Mk. xvi. 14. of unjust reproach, to revile : τίΐ/ά, Mt. v. H ; Mk. XV. 32 ; Lk. vi. 22 ; Ro. xv. 3 fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 10; pass. 1 Pet. iv. 14 ; foil, by ότι, 1 Tim. iv. 10 R G Tr mrg WII mrg. ; το αυτό ωνύδιζον αυτόν (Rec. αΐιτω), Mt. xxvii. 44 (see αϋτόί. III. 1). to upbraid, cast (favors received) in one's teeth : absol. Jas. i. 5 ; μ(τα τό δούναι μη όνιίδιζί, Sir. xii. 22, cf. xx. 14 ; τιν\ σωτηρίαν, deliverance obtained by us for one, Polyb. 9, 31, 4." ον(ΐ8ΐ(Γμό$, -οΰ, ό, (oxftSi'ftt)), [cf. W. 24], a reproach Ro. XV. 3 : 1 Tim. iii. 7 ; Ileb. x. 33 ; ό οναδισμος τοϋ Xpi- OV€i' δθ9 447 όνομα trroO i. e. such as Christ suffered (for the cause of God, from its enemies), Heb. xi. 26 ; xiii. 13 ; cf. \V. 189 (178). (Plut. Artax. 22 ; [Dion. Hal.] ; Sept. chiefly for Π3")π.) * oveiSos, -ovs, TO, (fr. άνομοι to blame, to revile), fr. Horn, down, reproach ; i. q. shame : Lk. i. 25. (Sept. cliiefly for riD'in ; three times for n's'pj disgrace. Is. xxx. 3 ; Mich, ii. 6; Prov. xviii. 13.)* Όνήσ-ιμΌϊ, -ov, 6, (i. e. profitable, helpful; fr. όνησκ profit), Onesimus, a Christian, the slave of Philemon : Philem. 10 ; Col. iv. 9. [Cf. Bp. Lghlfl. Com. Intr. § 4 ; Hackett in B. D.] • Όνησίφορο8, -ου, ό, [i. e. ' profit-bringer '], Onesiphorus, the name of a certain Christian : 2 Tim. i. 16 ; iv. 19." ονικός, -η, -όν, (oi/oy), of or for an o.s'.s• : μίιΧος ονίκός i. e. turned by an ass (see μύλος, 1), Alk. i.\. 42 L Τ Tr WH ; Lk. xvii. 2 Rec. ; Mt. xviii. 6. Not found elsewhere.* όνίνημ,ι : fr. Horn, down ; to be useful, to profit, help, (Lat.yuco); Mid., pres. ονίναμαι; 2 aor. ωνήμην (and later ωνάμην, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 12 sq. ; Kiihner § 343 s. v., i. p. 880 ; [Veitch s. v.]), optat. δναίμην ; to receive profit or ailrantage, be helped [or hare joy, (Lat. Juvor )] : τινός, of one, Philem. 20 [see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. (Elsewh. in the .Scriptures only in Sir. xxx. 2.) * όνομα, -τος, τό, (NOM [others ΓΝΟ ; see Vanicek p. 1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name'], with prefixed ο [but see Curtius § 44G]), Sept. for Dt?, [fr. Horn, down], the name by which a person or a thing is called, and dis- tinguished from others ; 1. univ. : of prop, names, Mk. iii. 16 ; vi. 14 ; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; των άποστοΚων τα ονόματα, Mt. χ. 2 ; Rev. xxi. 14 ; άνθρωπος or άνημ ώ όνομα, πολίί fi όν. , SC. ην, named, foil, by the name in the nom. [cf. B. § 129, 20, 3] : Lk. i. 26 sq. ; ii. 25 ; viii. 41 ; xxiv. 13, 18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1) ; oS [L ω] το όνομα, ^Ik. xiv. 32; κα\ τό ov. αυτόν, αντης, etc., Lk. i. 5, 27; ϋνομααϋτω sc. ην οτ 4στΊν [Β. U.S.],. In. i.6; iii. 1 ; xviii. 10; Rev. vi. 8 ; ονόματι, foil, by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 3 ; W. 182 (171)], Mt. xxvii. 32 ; Mk. v. 22 ; Lk. i. 5 ; x. 38; xvi. 20; xxiii. 50; Acts v. 1,31; viii. 9 ; ix. 10-12, 33, 36; X. 1 ; xi. 28; xii. 13; xvi. 1, 14; xvii. 34; xviii. 2, 7, 24 ; xix. 24 ; xx. 9 ; xxi. 10 ; xxvii. 1 ; xxviii. 7 ; Rev. ix. 11, (Xen. anab. 1, 4, 11) ; τοϋκομα (i. e. το όνομα), ace. absol.[B.§ 131,12; cf. AV. 230 (216)], i.e. by name, Mt. xxvii. 57 ; όνομα μοι sc. ΐστίν, my name is, Mk. v. 9; Lk. viii. 30, {Ουτις ίμοίγ'όνομα, Hom. Od. 9, 36G) ; ϊχιιν όνομα, foil, by the name in the nom.. Rev. ix. 1 1 ; καΚύν τό όνομα Τίνος, foil, by the ace. of the name, see καλε'ω, 2 a. ; καλιΐν Tiva ονόματι τινι, Lk. i. 61 ; ονόματι κιιΚούμίνος, Lk. xix. 2; Ka\flv Tiva fVl τώ όν. Lk. i. 59 (see tVi, B. 2 a. η. p. 233') ; icar* όνομα (see κατά, II. 3 a. y. p. 32S*) ; τα ονόματα νμων (•γράφη [(vyiypanTai Τ WH Tr] ev τοΙς οΙρανοΊς, your names have been enrolled by God in the register of the citizens of the kingdom of heaven, Lk. x. 20 : το ίνομά Tivos {(γράφη) iv βίβΧω {τω βιβλίω) ζωής, Phil. iv. 3 ; Rev. xiii. 8 ; (VI το βιβλίον τής ζ. Rev. xvii. 8 ; (κβά\\(ΐν (q. γ. 1 h.) το όνομα τινης ως πονηρόν, since the wicked- ness of the man is called to mind by his name, Lk. vi. 22 ; (ΐτικάλ^Ισθαι το όνομα τον κυρίου, see « ττίκαλ/ω, 5 ; ΐπι- Κ€κ\ηται τϋ ονομά TIVOS ίττί τίνα, see ΐπικ. 2 ; ονόματα (όνομα) βλασφημίας Ί. q. βλάσφημα (-μον) [cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; Β. § 132, 10], names by which God is blasphemed, his maj- esty assailed. Rev. xiii. 1 ; xvii. 3 [R G Tr, see γί'μω]. so used that the name is opp. to the reality: όνομα ίχΐκ, ότι ζης, και νεκρός (ϊ, tliou art said [Α. V. hast a name] to live. Rev. iii. 1 (όνομα fL\€V, ως (π Άθηνας eXavvei, Ildt. 7, 138). i. q. title : nepi ονομάτων, about titles (as of the Messiah), Acts xviii. 15; κ\ηρονομ(Ίν όνομα, Heb. i. 4; χαρίζίσθαί Tiw όνομα τι, Phil. ii. 9 (here the title ό κύριοι is meant [but crit. txts. read το όνομα etc., which many take either strictly or absolutely ; cf. Meyer and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. (see below just before 3)]) ; spec, a title of honor and authority, Eph. i. 21 [but see Meyer]; ίν τώ ονόματι Ίησον, in devout recognition of the title con- ferred on him by God (i. e. the title ό κύριος), Phil. ii. 10 [but the interp. of όνομα here follows that of όνομα in vs. 9 above; see Meyer and Bp. Lghtft., and cf. W. 390 (365)]. 2. By a usage chiefly Hebraistic the name is used for everytliing which the name covers, everything the thought or feeling of which is roused in the mind by mentioning, hearing, remembering, the name, i. e. for one's rank; authority, interests, pleasure, command, excel- lences, deeds, etc. ; thus, fir όνομα προφήτου, out of regard for [see fir, B. II. 2 d.] the nanie of prophet which he bears, i. q. because he is a ])rophet, Mt. x. 41 ; βατττίζίΐρ Tiva fir όνομα TtiOt, by baptism to bind any one to recog- nize and publicly acknowledge the dignity and authority of one [cf. βαπτίζω, II. b. (aa.)], Mt. xxviii. 19; Acts viii. IG ; xix. 5 ; 1 Co.i. 13, 15. to do a thing Ινόνόματί tivos, i. e. by one's command and authority, acting on his behalf, promoting liis cause, [cf. W. 390 (365) ; B. § 147, 10] ; as, ό ΐρχόμ^νος (V ονόματι κνρίου (fr. Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 26), of the Messiah, Mt. xxi. 9 ; xxiii. 39 ; :Mk. xi. 9; Lk. xiii. 35 ; xix. 38 ; Jn. xii. IS ', ev τω ονόματι τον πατρός μου, Jn. V. 43 ; χ. 25 ; iv τω ονόματι τω ίδίω, of his own free-will and authority, Jn. v. 43 ; to do a thing iv τώ ov. of Jesus, Acts X. 48 ; 1 Co. v. 4 ; 2 Th. iii. 6 : and L Τ Tr WH in Jas. V. 10 [but surely κ. here denotes God ; cf. 2 f. below]. Ace. to a very freq. usage in the O. T. (cf. ΠΙΠ' O'Ci), the name of God in the X. T. is used for all those qualities which to his worshippers are summed up in that name, and by which God makes himself known to men ; it is therefore equiv. to his dirinity, Lat. numen, (not his na- ture or essence as it is in itself), the dirine majesty and perfections, so far forth as these are apprehended, named, magnified, (cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 993 ; Oeh• ler in Herzog x. p. 196 sqq. ; Wittichen in Schenkel iv. p. 282 sqq.); so in the phrases ayiov το όνομα αΰτοϋ sc. iστίv. Lk. i. 49 ; άγιάζίΐν το όν. τοΰ θ(ού, Mt. vi. 9 ; Lk. xi. 2 ; όμολογ€Ϊν τώ όν. αντοΰ, Heb. xiii. 15 ; ψάλλΐΐν, Ro. χν. 9 ; δοξάζ^ιν, .Τη. χϋ. 28 ; [Rev. χν. 4] ; φαν(ροίν, γνωρί- ζ^ιν, Jn. xvii. 6, 26; φοβ(Ίσθαι τό όν. τοΟ ^foC, Rev. xi. 18 ; XV. 4 [G LT Tr WH]; SiayyiXXfiv, Ro. ix. 17 ; άπαγγιλ• λ(ΐν, Heb. ii. 1 2 ; βλάσφημων, Ro. ii. 24 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; Rev. xiii. 6 ; .\vi. 9 ; uyamjv iv&fίκvυσθaι tisTO όν. τοΰ θ(οϋ, Heb. vi. 10; τηρησον αντονς iv τω ονόματι σου, ω (by attraction for ο [cf. Β. § 143, 8 p. 286 ; W. § 24, 1 ; Rec. incorrectly out]) &ίδωκάς μοι, keep them consecrated and united to ονοβα 448 Οντων tLv name (character), which thou didst commit to me to declare and manifest (of. vs. (> ), .In. xvii. 1 1 ; [cf. iirip τοΟ ά-γΐυυ ονόματος σου, ην κατ^σκηνωσας €v τάϊς καρ^ίαις ημών, 'Teaching' etc. ch. 10, 2]. After the analogy of the pre- ceding expression, the name n/Clirisl (Ίησοϋ, Ίησοϋ Χρίσ- του, ToC κυρίου Ίΐ)σ., του κνρίου ήμων, etc.) is used in the Ν. Γ. of all those tilings which, in hearing or recalling that name, we are biihlen to recognize in Jesus and to profess, accordingly, of liia Me.i.tiunic ilif/nitij, dicine aul/iorily, memorable sufi'erings, in a word l/ie /luculiar serficc^ ami blessinf/x con/erred hi/ him on men, so far forth as tliese are believed, confessed, commemorated, [cf. Westcott on tlie Kpp. of .In. p. 232] : hence the phrases (iaγγf\ίζ(- σθαι τα nep'i τοϊι υν. Ί. Χμ. Acts viii. 12 ; ptyaXi'vav τό Sv. Acts xix. I 7 ; τώ ονόμ [liec. «V r. oi/.] αϋτοϋ (Κπίζαν, Mt. xii. 21 [B. 176 (l.");i)] ; πιστ(ύ(ΐν, 1 .In. iii. 2:i ; πιστ. «r TO όν., .In. i. 12; ii. 23; iii. 18; I .In. v. 13' [Rec, 13*•]; ττϊστκ τοΰ uv. Acts iii. 16 ; ό ΰνομίιζων το όνομα κυρίον, wlio- ever nameth the name of the Lord sc. as liis Lord (see ονομάζω, a.), 2 Tim. ii. 1!»; κρατ€ΐν, to hold fast i. e. per- severe in professing. Rev. ii. 13; ουκ apve'iaSai, Rev. iii. 8 ; TO όν. 'ΐϊ;σοϋ t vSu^dferat ev νμϊν, 2 Th. i. 1 2 ; βαστάζ€ΐν τό όν. (νώτΐΐον ίθνών (>ee βαστάζω, 3), Acts ix. 15; to do or to suffer anything «πϊ τώ ϋνύματι Xp. see ϊπί, Β. 2 a. β. p. 232''. The phrase i'l- τω ονόματι Xp. is used in various senses: a. hy the command and aulhorily of Chri.il: see exx. just above. b. in the use of Iha name of Christ i.e. the power of his name being invoked for assistance, Mk. ix. 38 R"' L Τ Tr Wll (see f. below) ; Lk. x. 17; Acts iii. 6 ; iv. 10 ; xvi. 18 ; Jas. v. 14 ; univ. ίνποίω ονόμα- τι (ποίήσατί τούτο; Acts iv. 7. c. through the power of Christ's name, pervading and governing their souls, ilk. xvi. 1 7. d. in acknnwledfjinij, emhracing, prn/ess- ins Χριστιανοί, 16). The simple dat. τω 6v. Xp. signifies by the power of Christ's name, pervading and prompting souls, Mt. vii. 22 ; so also τώ ονόματι τοΰ κυρίου (i. e. of God) λαΧιϊν, of the prophets, Jas. v. 10 RG ; τω of. σου, by uttering thy name as a spell, Mk. ix. 38 R«i>" G (see b. above), tit to όνομα τον Χριστοΐι συνάγ(σθιιι is used of those who come together to deliberate concerning any matter relating to Christ's cause, (Germ, auf den Na- men), with the mind directed unto, having regard unto, his name, Mt. xviii. 20. tvfKtv τοΰ όν. [Α. V. for mf name's sakej, i. e. on account of professing my name, Mt. xix. 29 ; also δια τΑ Sv. μου, αΰτοϋ, etc. : Sit. χ. 22 ; xxiv. 9; Mk. xiii. 13; Lk. xxi. 17; ,ln. xv. 21 ; 1 Jn. ii. 12; Rev. ii. 3. δια τοΰ όν. τοΰ κυρ. irapoKoiKeiv τίνα, to beseech one by employing Christ's name as a motive or incentive [cf. λν. 381 (3.57)], 1 Co. i. 10; by embracing and avowiiiw his name, ΰφισιν Αμαρτιών Xafidv, Acts x. 43. ύπίρ τοΰ όν. αϋτοϋ, \.ί[. for defending,spreading, strengthening, the au- thority of Christ, Acts v. 41 (see below) ; ix. 16 ; χ v. 26; xxi. 1 3 ; Ilo. i. 5 ; 3 Jn. 7 ; — [but ace. to the better txts. in Acts V. 41 ; 3 Jn. 7, τό όνομα is used absolutely, the Name, sc. κυρίου, of the Lord .lesus ; so cod. Vat. .las. v. 14; cf. Lev. xxiv. 11, 16; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. ad Eph. 3, 1 ; B. 163 (142) note; W. 594 (553). So Up. Lghtft. in Phil. ii. 9 ; (see 1 above)], npos τό όνομα Ιησού τοΰ Ναζ. (vavTia πμάξαι. Acts xxvi. 9. 3. In imita- tion of the Ilebr. nnc/ (Xum. i. 2, 18, 20; iii. 40, 43; xxvi. 53), the plur. ονόματα is used i.ij. persons reckoned upby name: Actsi.ld; Rev.iii.4; .\i. 13. 4. Like the I.at. nomen, i. q. the cause or reason named : iv τω ονό- ματι τούτω, in this cause, i. e. on this account, sc. because he suffers as a Christian, 1 Pet. iv. IG L Τ Tr WII [aL more simply take όν. here as referring to Χριστιανοί ])re• ceding] ; iv ονόματι, Srt (as in Syriac ? |'vi 4 o) Χριστοβ ί'στί, in this name, i. e. for this reason, because ye are Christ's (disciples), Mk. ix. 41. ονομάζω ; 1 aor. ώνόμασα ; Pass., pres. ο'ΐΌμά^ομαι ; 1 aor. ώνομάσθην; (όνο /ia); fr. Ilom. down; to name [cf. W. 615 (572)]; a. το όνομα. Ιο name i. e. to utter: pass. Eph. i. 21 ; τοΰ κυρίου [Rec. Χρίστου], the name of the Lord (Christ) sc. as his Lord, 2 Tim. ii. 19 (.Sept. for Π1Π" Οψ Τ3ΙΠ, to make mention of the name if.hhn• vah in praise, said of his worshippers. Is. xxvi. 13 ; Am- vi. 10) ; TO όι-ομα Ίησοϋ ini τίνα. Acts xix. 13, see ini, C. I. 1 c. p. 234" mid. b. τινά, with a proper or an appellative name as pred. ace, to name, i. e. gire name to, one : Lk. vi. 13 sq. ; pass, to be named, i. e. hear the name of, 1 Co. v. 1 1 ; t η-ω{ foil, by a noun, that which is truly etc., that tchich is indeed, {τα ovrms άγαθα η καλά, Plat. Phaedr. p. 200 a. ; την ΰιτως και άληθω! φιλΐαν, Plat. Clit. p. 409 e. ; οι όιηως βασι\{ΐς, Joseph, antt. 15, .'i, 5) ; as ή όντωι (Rec. aliiivios) ζωή, 1 Tim. vi. 19; ij όντως χήρα, a widow that is a widow indeed, not improperly called a widow (as παμβίνο! ή λίγομίνη χήρα, i. e. a virgin that has taken a vow of celibacy, in Igu- ad Smyrn. 13 [cf. Bp. Lghtft. in loc] ; cf. Baur, Die sogen. Pastoralbriefe, p. 46 sqq.), 1 Tim. V. 3, 5, 16. (Eur., Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq. ; Sept. for DJtJX, Num. xxii. 37; for px, Jer. iii. 23; for ^S. Jer. X. I'g.)* ό|ο5, -fos (-ous), TO, (οξύί), vinegar (Aeschyl., llip- pocr., Arstph., Xen., sqq.; for Ί"3Π, Ruth ii. 14; Num. vi. 3, etc.) ; used in the N. T. for Lat. po.rf, 1), Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 1 7 ; άποστίλλαν Τίνα οπίσω τινός, Lk. .\ix. 14 ; άφιστάναι, άποσπάν Ttva οπίσω αίτον, to draw one away to (join) his Jiarty, Act» V. 37; XX. 30; (κτρίπισθαι, to turn out of the right path, turn aside from rectitude, 1 Tim. v. 15 ; by a pregnant construction, after θαύμαζαν, to wonder after i. e. to be drawn away by admiration to follow one [B. 185 (160 sq.)]. Rev. xiii. 3 (πάς ό λαϊις ίξίστη οπίσω αϋτον, 1 S. .xiii. 7) ; imayt οπίσω μου, [Α. V. get thee behind me], out of my sight: Lk. iv. 8 RLbr. ; Mt. iv. 10 [GLbr.]; xvi. 23; Mk. viii. 33. b. of time, after: ίρχ(σθαι οπίσω τινός, to make his public a[)pearance after (sub- sequently to) one, Mt. iii. 11; Mk. i. 7; Jn. i. 15, 27, 30, (οπίσω τοϋ σαββάτου, Neh. xiii. 19).* όιτλίζω: [I aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. όπΧίσασθί]; (δπλον); fr. Hom. down; to arm, furni-h with arms; univ. to provide ; mid. ri, to furnish one's self with a thing (as with arms) ; metaph. την αυτήν ΐννοιαν άπ\ίσασθ(, [Α. V. arm yourselves with i. e.] take on the same mind, 1 Pet. iv. 1 (θράσος. Soph. Electr. 995). [Co.MP. : καθ- οπ\ίζω.~\ * διτλον [allied to ϊπω, Lat. sequor, socius, etc. ; Curtius § 621], -ου, TO, as in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, any tool or implement for preparing a thing, (like the Lat. anna) ; hence 1. plur. arm.i used in Avarfare, weapons: Jn. xviii. 3 ; 2 Co. x. 4 ; metaph. r^s δικαιοσύνης, which ή δικ. furnishes, 2 Co. vi. 7 ; τοΰ φωτός, adapted to the light, such as light demands, Ro. xiii. 1 2 [here L mrg. epya}. 2. an instrument : όπλα αδικίας, for commit- ting unrighteousness, opp. to όπλα δικαιοσύνης, for prac- tising righteousness, Ro. vi. 13.* όποΐο9, -οία, -οΐοΐ', (ποίος w. the rel. ό), [fr. Hom. down], of what sort or quality, what manner of: 1 Co. iii. 13: Gal. ii. 6 ; 1 Th. i. 9 ; Jas. i. 24 ; preceded by τοιούτος. [such as']. Acts xxvi. 29.* oirOTt, (πότε w. the rel. ό), [fr. Horn, down], when [cf. B. § 139, 34 ; W. § 41 b. 3] : Lk. vi. 3 R G Τ (where L Tr WH 5τ€).• οίΓου, (from iroC and the reL 6), [from Hom. down], where; 1. adv. of place, a. in which place, where; a. in relative sentences with the Indicar tive it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place; as, c'iri της γης, οπού etc. Mt. vi. 19 ; add, ib. 20 ; xiii. 5 : xxviii. 6; Mk. vi. 55; ix. 44, 46, [which verses TAVII om. Tr br.J, 48 ; Lk. xii. 33 ; Jn. i. 28 ; iv. 20, 46 : vi. 23 ; οπτανω 450 '6 7Γα>ί νϋ. 42: χ. 40; λϊ. ;iO; χϋ. 1 ; xviii. 1, 20; xix. IS, 20, 41 ; XX. 12; Acts xvii. 1 ; Kev. xi. 8; xx. 10. it refers to €K(l or (κ(1σ( to be ineutallj• supplied in what precedes or follows ; Mt. xxv. 24, 2ti ; Alk. ii. 4 ; iv. 15 ; v. 40 ; xiii. 14 ; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 62; vii. 34 ; xi. 32; xiv. 3 ; xvii. 24; XX. 19; Ro. .w. 20; Heb. ix. IG; .\. 18; Rev. ii. 13. it refers to ίκΰ expressed in what follows: Mt. vi. 21 ; Lk. xii. 84; xvii. 37; Jn. xii. 2(j ; Jas. iii. 16. in imit;ir lion of the Ilebr. Οϋί-ισΚ (Gen. xiii. 3; Eccl. ix. 10, etc.) : ότΓου i'xfi, Kev. xii. (> [G Τ Tr AVH], 14, (see «'«ι, a.) ; όπου . . . «V αυτών, Rev. .xvii. 9. όττου also refers to men, so that it is equiv. to tvilh (ainoiiy) whom, in whose house : Mt. xxvi. 57 ; [add, Rev. ii. 13; cf . \V. § ")4, 7 fin.]; in which slale (viz. of the renewed man). Col. iii. 11. it is loosely connected with the thought to which it refers, so that it is equiv. to wherein [A. V. ivhercas'], 2 Pet. ii. 11 (in the same sense in indir. quest., Xen. mem. 3, 5, 1). όπου άν, wherever, — with impf. indie, (see άν, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56 [Tdf. eaf] ; with aor. sub- junc. (I.at. fut. pf.), Mk. i.\. 18 (where LTTrWII ίττου eai>) ; ^Ik. xiv. 9 [here too Τ WII οπ. fav] ; also ότΓου f'av (see eaf, II.), Mt. xxvi. 13; Mk. vi. 10; xiv. 14", (in both which last pass. L Tr όττου Sv) ; with subj. pres. Mt. xxiv. 28. β. in indir. (juestions [yet cf. W. § 57, 2 fin.], with subjunc. aor.: Mk. xiv. 14""; Lk. xxii. 11. b. joined to verbs signifying motion into a place instead of οττοι, imo which place, whilher, (see cKfl, b.) : foil, by the indie, Jn. viii. 21 sq. ; xiii. 33, 36 ; .xiv. 4 ; xxi. 18 ; [Jas. iii. 4 Τ Tr WH (see below)] ; όττου Sv, where(ichither)soever, w. indie, pres.. Rev. xiv. 4 L Tr WII [cf. below], cf. B. § 139, 30; with subjunc. pres., Lk. ix. 57 R G Τ WII [al. όπ. ϊάν, see below] ; Jas. iii. 4 [RGL]; Rev. xiv. 4 RGT (see above); όττου iav, w. subjunc. pres., Mt. viii. 19, and L Tr in Lk. ix. 57. 2. It gets tlie force of a conditional particle if {in case thai, insofar as, [A. V. whereas (cf. 2 Pet. ii. 1 1 above)]) : 1 Co. iii. 3 (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 43, 1, and often in Grk. writ. ; cf. (!rimm on 4 Mace. ii. 14 ; Meyer on 1 Co. iii. 3; [Muller on B.arn. ep. 16, 6]).* όΐΓτάνω (ΟΠΤΩ) : to look al, behold; mid. pres. ptcp. oTTTavofif coi ; to allow one's self to lie seen, to appear: rtvl. Acts i. 3. (1 K. viii. 8 ; Tob. .xii. 19 ; [Graec. Ven. Ex. xxxiv. 24].) " oirrao-Co, -as, ή, (όιττάζω) ; 1. the act of exhibiting one's self to view : οπτασίαι κυρίου, 2 Co. xii. 1 [Λ. V. vLiions; cf. Meyer ad loc] (tV ημιμαΐ! οπτασίας μου. Add. to Esth. iv. 1. 44 (13) ; [cf. .Mai. iii. 2] ; ηλιο! iv οπτασία, coming into view, Sir. xliii. 2). 2. a sii/hl, a vision, an appearance preuented to one whether asleep or awake : ovpavios όπτ. Acts x.xvi. 1 9 ; ίωρακίναί οπτασίαν, Lk. i. 22 ; Λν. gen. of appos. ayyi\u>v, Lk. xxiv. 23. A later form for 0>|λ« [cf. W. 24], Anthol. 6, 210, 6; for nsi•?, Dan. [Theodot.] Lx. 23 ; x. 1, 7 sq.* oiTTOs, -ή, -όν, (ότττα'ω [to roast, cook]), cooked, broiled: Lk. xxiv. 42. (Ex. xii. 8, 9 ; in class. Grk. f r. Horn, down.) * 6ima, see οράύα. όπώρα, -as, ί), (derived by some fr. oirir [cf. ottiVo)], ϊπομαι, and &pa', hence, the time that follows the άρα [Curtius § 522]; by others fr. oiros [cf. our sap] juice, and &pa, i. e. the time of juicy fruits, the time when fruits become ripe), fr. Ilom. down ; 1. the season which succeeds θιμο!, from the risiny of Sirius to that of Arclurus, i. e. late summer, early autumn, our dog-days (the year being divided into seven seasons as follows; (αμ, θίροί, όπώρα, φθινόπωρον, σπομητο!, χαμών, φυτα- λιά). 2. ripe fruits (of trees) : σοΰ της ϊπιθυμία! τήι ψυχή! for 2)1/ ή >^τυχή σου ΐπιθυμίΐ. Rev. xviii. 14. (Jer. xlvii. (xl.) 10, and often in Grk. writ.)* oirus, (fr. πώς and the relat. o), with the indicative, a relat. adverb but, like the Lat. uf, assuming also the nature of a conjunction [cf. W. 449 (418 S(j.)]. I. As an Adverb; as, in tvhat manner, how; once so in the N. T. in an indir. question, with the indie. : οΐικ ΐγνως, όπως κτλ. Lk. xxiv. 20, where cf. Bornemann, Scholia etc. II. A Conjunction, Lat. ul, an- swering to the Germ, dass, that; in class. Grk. with the optat., and subjunc, and fut. indie. ; cf. esp. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 681 Sijq. But the distinction observed between these constructions by the more elegant Grk. writ, is quite neglected in the N. T., and if we except Mt. xxvi. 59 LTTr (όττωί θανατώσουσιν), [1 Co. i. 29 Ree.•'^], only the subjunctive follows this particle (for in Mk. V. i?3, for όπως . . . ζησ^ται, L txt. Τ Tr WII have correctly restored Ίνα . . . ζησ;/) ; cf. W. 289 (271) ; B. 233 (201) Sep ; [214 (185)]. 1. It denotes the pur- pose or end, in order that; icilh the design or to the end that; that; a. without όι/, — after the present, Mt. vi. 2, 16; Philem. 6; Ileb. ix. 15; after ΐστί to be supplied, 1 Pet. ii. 9; after the perfect, Acts i.\. 17; Heb. ii. 9 ; όττωϊ μή, Lk. xvi. 26 ; after the imper- fect, Mt. xxvi. 59 [R G (see above)]; Acts i.\. 24; after the aorist. Acts ix. 2, 12; xxv. 26; Ro. ix. 17; Gal. i. 4 ; όττωί μή. Acts xx. 16; 1 Co. i. 29 ; after the pluperfect, Jn. xi. 57 ; after tlie f utu re, Mt. xxiii. 35; and Rec. in Acts x.\iv. 26; after an aor. sub- junc. by which something is asked for, Mk. v. 23 Rec.; after imperatives, ^It. ii. 8; v. 16,45; vi. 4; Acts xxiii. 15, 23; 2 Co. viii. 11; όπως μή, Mt. vi. 18; after clauses with ίνα and the aor. subjunc, Lk. .xvi. 28 ; 2 Co. viii. 14; 2 Th. i. 12. Noteworthy is the phrase όπως πληρωθί], i. e. that ace. to God's purpose it might be brought to jians or might he proved bij the event, of O. T. prophecies and types (see Iva, II. 3 fin.): Mt. ii. 23; viii. 17; xii. 1 7 (where L Τ Tr WII Iva) ; xiii. 85. b. όττωί άν, that, if it he possible, Mt. vi. 5 R G; that, if what I have Just .mid shall come to pass, Lk. ii. 35 ; Acts iii. 20(19) [R. V. i/ia/.TO]; XV. 17; Ro. iii. 4 [B. 234 (201)] ; exx. fr. the Sept. are given in W. § 42, 6. 2. As in the Grk. writ, also (cf. W. 338 (317); [B. § 139, 41]), όπως with the subjunctive is used after verbs of pray- ing, entreating, asking, exhorting, to denote what one wishes to be done : Mt. viii. 34 [here L Γιό] ; i.\. 38; Lk. vii. 3; x. 2; xi. 37; Acts viii. 15, 24; ix. 2; xxiii. 20; xxv. 3; Jas. v. 16; after a verb of delibei* ating: Mt. xii. 14; xxii. 15; Mk. iii. 6, (fr. which eix^ όραμα 451 οραω it is easy to see how tne use noted in Π. arises from the original adverbial force of the particle ; for σνμβούλ. (XaSov, οττωΓ άπολίσοίσίν αυτόν, they took counsel to de- stroy him is eijuiv. to how they might destroy him, and also to to this end that they might destroy him ; cf. Kiihner § 552 Anm. 3, ii. p. S92).* ορα[ΐα, -Tos, τό, {οράω), that which is seen, a sight, spec- tacle : Acts vii. 31 ; Mt. xvii. 9 ; a sight divinely granted in an ecstasy or in sleep, a vision, Acts x. 17, 19; 8i' ορά- ματος. Acts xviii. 9 ; iu όράματι. Acts ix. 10, 12 [HG] ; X. 3 ; όραμα βλeπfιu, Acts xii. 9 ; Ideiv, Acts xi. 5 ; xvi. 10. (Xen., Aristot., Plut., Ael. v. h. 2, 3 [al. «'κών] ; Sept. several times for ΠΚ'ΐΟ, ]i;n, Chald. Xitn etc.; see οτΓτασί'α.) * opcuris. -(ως, ή, (όράω) ; 1. the act of seeing : ομ- μάτων χρήσις (Is ορασιν. Sap. .\v. 15; the sense of sight, Aristot. de anima 3, 2; Diod. 1, 59; Plut. mor. p. 440 sq. ; plur. the eyes, (κκάπτιιν τάς όρύαιις, Diod. 2, 6. 2. appearance, visible form : Rev. iv. 3 (Num. xxiv. 4 ; Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28 ; Sir. xli. 20, etc.). 3. a vision, i. e. an appearance divinely granted in an ecstasy: Rev. ix. 17; όράσας οψονται, Acts ii. 17 fr. Joel ii. 28. (Sept. chiefly fur nS"'•? and ;i;n.) ' oparos, -η, -όν. (όράω), visihle, open to view. neut. plur. substaatively, Col. i. 16. (Xen., Plat., Theocr., Philo; Sept.)• όράω, -ω \ impf. 3 pers. plur. ίώρων (Jn. vi. 2, where L Tr WH (θ(ώρονν) ; pf. έώρακα and (T Wll in Col. ii. 1, 18; [1 Co. ix. 1]; Tdf. ed. 7 also in .In. ix. 37 ; xv. 24; xx. 25; 1 Jn. iii. 6 ; iv. 20; 3 Jn. 11) ίόρακα (on which form cf. {WH. App. p. 161 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 122; Steph. The- saur. s. V. 2139 d.] ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 325; [B. 64 (56) ; Veitch s. v.]), [2 pers. sing. -κ(ς (Jn. viii. 57 Tr mrg.) see κοττιάω, init.], 3 pers. plur. (ωράκασιν (and -καν in C(j1. ii. 1 L Tr λΥΗ ; Lk. Lx. 3ii Τ Tr WH ; see γίνο- μαι, init.) : plupf. 3 pers. sing, «ωριίκίΐ (Acts vii. 44) ; fut. όψομαι (fr. ΟΠΤΩ), 2 pers. sing, όψη (cf. Bilm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 347 sq. ; Kiihner § 21 1, 3, i. p. 530), Mt. xxvii. 4 ; Jn. i. 50 (51) ; xi. 40 ; but L Τ Tr WH [G also in Jn. i. 50 (51)] have restored όψη (cf. W. § 13, 2; B. 42 sq. (37)), 2 pers. plur. όψ(σθ€, Jn. i. 39 (40) Τ Tr WH, etc.; Pass., 1 aor. ωφθην, fut. όφθησομαι ; 1 aor. mid. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. όψησθί (Lk. xiii. 2s [R G L WH txt. Tr mrg.]) fr. a Byzant. form ώψάμην (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 734, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 258 scj. ; [\'eitch s. v.]) ; Sept. for πΧ"; and Π!Π ; [fr. Horn, down] ; το see, i. e. 1. to see with the eyes : τίνα όράν, ίωρακίναι, Lk. .\vi. 23 ; Jn. viii. 57 ; xiv. 7, 9 ; xx. 18, 25, 29 ; 1 Co. ix. 1, etc. ; fut. οψομαι, Mt. xxviii. 7, 10 ; Mk. xvi. 7 ; Rev. i. 7, etc. ; τον θ(όν, 1 Jn. iv. 20 ; άόρατον ώς όρων, Heb. xi. 27 ; with a ptcp. added as a predicate [B. 301 (258) ; W. § 45, 4], Mt. xxiv. 30 ; ^Ik. xiii. 26 ; xiv. 62 ; Lk. xxi. 27 ; Jn. i. 51 (52) ; ίωρακίναι or όψ(σθαι τό πρόσωπον τίνος. Col. ii. 1 ; Acts XX. 25 ; ο (which divine majesty, i. e. τοΐι Btluv λογού) Ιωράκαμΐν τοις οφθαλμοΊς ημών (on this addition cf. W. 607 (564) ; [B. 3'J>i (341)]), 1 Jn. i. 1 ; όψ^σθαί τίνα '. e. come to see, visit, one, Heb. xiii. 23 ; ίωρακίναι Christ, L e. to have seen him exhibiting proofs of his divinity and Messiahship, Jn. vi. 36 ; ix. 37 ; xv. 24 ; όράν and όψ(σθαί with an ace. of the thing, Lk. xxiii. 49 ; Jn. i. 50 (51) ; iv. 45 ; vi. 2 [L Tr WH (θΐώραυν'] ; xix. 35 ; Acts ii. 1 7 ; vii. 44 ; Rev. xviii. 18 [Rec], etc. ; [e'px• κ. όψ(σθ( (sc. ποΟ μίνω), Jn. i. 40 (39) Τ Tr WH ; cf. B. ::!90 (250)] ; οψτ] την δήξαν του θεον, the glory of God displayed in a miracle, Jn. xi. 40. metaph. 5ψ(σθαι τόι/ deav, τον κύριον, to be admitted into intimate and blessed fellowship with God in his future kingdom, Mt. v. 8; Heb. xii. 14 ; also TO πρόσωπον τοΰ θ(οϋ. Rev. .\xii. 4 — (a fig. borrowed from those privileged to see and associate with kings ; see βλίπω, 1 b. β.) ; οίκ fiSos Beov 4ωράκατ(, trop. i. q. his divine majesty as he discloses it in the Scriptures ye have not recognized, Jn. v. 37 ; cf. ΛleyeΓ ad loc. 2. to see icilh the m i η d, to perceive, know : absol. Ro. .xv. 21 ; τινά foil, by a ptcp. in the ace. [B. § 144, 15 b. ; W. § 45, 4], Acts viii. 23 ; τί. Col. ii. 18 ; with a ptcp. added, Heb. ii. 8; foil, by on, Jas. ii. 24 ; to look at or upon, observe, give attention to : (ϊς τίνα, Jn. xix. 37 (Soph. El. 925 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 20 ; iis Ti, Solon in Diog. Laert. 1, 52) ; ίωρακίναι παρά τω πατρί, to have learned from [see παρά, Π. b.] the father (a metaphorical expression borrowed fr. sons, who learn what they see their fathers doing^, Jn. viii. 38 (twice in Rec. ; once in L Τ Tr WH) ; Christ is said to deliver to men a ίώμακ^ν, the things which he has seen, i. e. which he learned in his heavenly state with God be- fore the incarnation, i. e. things divine, the counsels of God, Jn. iii. 11, 32 ; ίωρακίναι θ(άν, to know God's will, 3 Jn. 11 ; from the intercourse and influence of Christ to have come to see (know) God's majesty, saving pur- poses, and will [cf. W. 273 (257)], Jn. xiv. 7, 9 ; in an emphatic sense, of Christ, who has an immediate and perfect knowledge of God without being taught by an- other, Jn. i. 18 ; ^-i. 46 ; όψισθαι θ(όν καθώς tcrrii', of the knowledge of God that may be looked for in his future kingdom, 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; όψισθαι Christ, is used in refer- ence to the apostles, about to perceive his invisible pres- ence among them by his influence upon their souls through the Holy Spirit, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; Christ is said όψ(σθαι the apostles, i. e. will have knowledge of them, ibid. 22. 3. to see i. e. to become acquainted ivilh by experience, to experience : ζωήν, i. q. to become a partaker of, Jn. iii. 36 ; ημίραν, (cf. Germ, erleben ; see €Ϊδω, I. 5), Lk. xvii. 22 (Soph. O. R. 831). 4. to see to, look to; i. e. a. i. q. to lake heed, beware, [see esp. B. § 139, 49; cf. W. 503 (469)] : Spa μή, with aor. sub- junc, see that . . . not, take heed lest, Mt. viii. 4 ; xviii. 10; Mk. i. 44; 1 Th. v. 15; supply roOro ποίησης in Rev. xix. 10 ; xxii. 9, [W. 601 (558) ; B. 395 (338)], (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 27, where see Poppo; Soph. Philoct. 30, 519; El. 1003) ; foil, by an impv., Mt. ix. 30 ; xxiv. 6 ; όράτΐ και προσίχ€Τ€ από, Mt. .\vi. 6 ; όρατΐ, β\ίπ€Τ( από, Mk. viii. 15 : όράτ(. κα\ φυ\άσσίσθ( από, Lk. .\ϋ. 15 ; όρο, τι μί\• Xf if ποκ'ιν. i. q. weigh well. Acts xxii. 26 Rec. {opa τί πο>(ί;, Soph. Philoct. 589). b. i. q. to care /or, pay heed to: σν όψη [R G όψίΐ (see above)], see thou to it, that will be thy concern, [cf. W. § 40, 6], Mt. xxvii. 4; plur., 24 ; Acts xviii. 15, (Epict. diss. 2, 5, 30; 4, 6, 11 sq. ; [An• foyr/ 452 ορθοτΓοΒέω tonin. η, 25 (and Gataker ad loc.)]). 5. Pass. 1 *i)r. ώφ&ην, I teas seen, showed ini/self, appeared [cf. B. 52 (40)] : Lk. ix. 31 ; Λ¥ΐΐ1ι dat. of pers. (cf. B. u. s., [also §134,2; cf. W. §31, 10]): of angels, Lk. i. 11 ; xxii. 43 [L• br. WIl reject the pass.] ; Acts vii. 30, 35, (Ex. iii. 2); of (iod. Acts vii. 2 (Gen. xii. 7; xvii. 1); of the dead, Mt. xvii. 3 : Mk. ix. 4, cf. I.k. ix. 31 ; of Jesus after his resurrection, Lk. xxiv. 34 ; Acts ix. 17; xiii. 31 ; xxvi. 16 ; 1 Co. XV. 5-8: 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; of Jesus hereafter to return, Ileb. ix. 28 ; of visions during sleep or ecstasy, Acts xvi. 9; Rev. xi. 19; xii. 1, 3; in the sense of com- ini/ iifiDit unexpecledl//. Acts ii. 3; vii. 26. fut. pass. i>ii όφθίισομαϊ σοι, on account of whicli I will appear unto tlice, .Acts xxvi. 16 ; on this pass, see W. § 39, 3 N. 1 , cf. B. 287 (247). [ComR: άφ-. καθ-, π(>ο-ηράω.] |SvN. iQDLV. β\ίττίΐι>, both iltMiote tlic physical act: 6p. in ijciieral. βλ. the siuffle look; 6p frivos prumineiiue to the discerning mind, βλ. to the partii'ular uidoiI or point. When the physical! side recedes. 6p. denotes perception in general (as resulting principally from vision), the prominence iu the word of the mental element being indicated liv the constr. of the ace. w. inf. (in contrast witli that of the ptcp. required w. βλίνΕΐΐ"), anil liy the absol. Spis; βκίν. on the other hand, when its physical side recedes, gets a purely outward sense, took (i. e. open, incline) towards, Lat. spectare, vergere. Schmidt ch. xi. Cf. θ(αρίω, σκοττίω, cfSiv, I. fin.] οργή, -ήϊ, ή, (fr. 6pyau> to teem, denoting an internal motion, csp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice [fortius § 152]; cf. ijat. turgere alicui for irasci alirui in I'laut. Cas. 2, 5, 17; Most. 3, 2, 10; cf. Germ, artf, Aergcr), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down llie natural dis- poskion, temper, character; movement or agitation of snul, imptdse, desire, ang violent emotion, but esp. (and chiclly in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indigna- tion, (on the distinction between it and θυμός, see θυμός, 1) : Eph. iv. 31 ; Col. iii. 8 ; Jas. i. 1 i) sij. ; per οργής, in- dignant, [A. V. with anger^, Mk. iii. 5 ; χωρ\ς οργής, 1 Tim. ii. 8 ; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for the punishment itself (Deni. or. in Mid. §43): of the punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii. 4 ; δια τήν όργήν, i. e. because disobedience is visited with puni^ll- ment, ib. 5. The οργή attributed to God in the X. T. is that in God whicli stands opposed to man's disobedience, obduracy (esp. in resisting the gospel) and sin, and man- ifests itself in punishing the same : Jn. iii. 36 ; Ro. i. 18 ; iv. 15; i.x. 22'; Heb.iii.ll; iv. 3 ; Rev. .\iv. 10 ; xvi.19; xix. 15; absol. ή οργή, Ro. xii. 19 [cf. W. 594 (553)]; σκ^ϋη οργής, vessels into which wrath will be poured (at the last day), explained by the addition κατηρτισμίνα Λς άπώλ€<αι>, Ro. ix. 22'' ; ή μί\\ουσα οργή, which at the last day will be exhibited in penalties, Mt. iii. 7 ; I.k. iii. 7, [al. understand in these two pass, the (national) judgments im med lately impe nd ing to be referred to — at least primarily] ; also ή οργή ή ίρχομίνη, 1 Th. i. 10; ήμϊρα οργής, the day on which the wrath of God will be made manifest in the punishment of the wicked [cf. W. § 30, 2 a.], Ro. ii. 5 ; and ή ήμϊρα ή μΐγάλη της οργής αύτοΰ (Rev. vi. 17; see ήμίρα, 3 ad fin.); ΐρχ^ται 9 °pyh '■"" ^'"^ '"^ Tiya, the wrath of God Cometh upon one in the infliction of penalty [cf. W. § 40, 2 a.], Eph. V. 6 ; Col. iii. 6 [T Tr W'll ora. L br. «W etc.]; ίφθασι [-Kfv L txt. \VH mrg.] tV αυτούς ή οργή, 1 Th. ii. 16; so ή οργή passes over into the notion of retribution and punishment, Lk. xxi. 23; Ro. [ii. 8]; iii. 5; v. 9 ; Rev. xi. 18; T€Kt>a οργής, men exposed to divine punishment, Eph. ii. 3 ; fis όργήν, unto wrath, i. e. to undergo pun- ishment in misery, 1 Th. v. 9. οργή is attributed to Christ also when he comes as Messianic judge. Rev. vi. 16. (Sept. for Π")3;*, wrath, outburst of anger, D>'I, ΠΌΠ ;ΐ-ιπ, ηνρ, etc. ; but chiefly for ηκ.) Cf. Ferd. Weber, Vom Zorne (Jottes. Eriang. 1862; lUtscld, Die christL Lehre v. d. Rechtfertigung u. Versohnung, ii. p. 1 18 sipp* όρ-γίζω : Pass., jires. οργίζομαι ; 1 aor. ωργίσθην; {οργή) ; fr. Sojjh., Eur., and Ί hue. down ; to procoke, arouse to anger ; pass, to be provoked to anger, be angrtf, be wroth, (.Sept. for Π7Π, ηγρ, also for ηχ ΓΤΐΠ etc.) : absol., Mt. xviii. 34; x.xii. 7; Lk. xiv. 21 ; xv. 28; Eph. iv. 26 [B. 290 (250); cf. W. §§ 43, 2; 55, 7]; Rev. xi. 18; rwi, Mt. v. 22; iVi Tivi. Rev. xii. 17 [Lom. (Vi] as in 1 K. xi. 9 ; [Andoc. 5, 10] ; Isocr. p. 230 c. ; [cf. W. 232 (218)]. [CoMP. : ■παρ-οργίζω.'] ' όργίλοε, -η, -ov, [οργή), prone to anger, irascible, [A. V. soon angry] : Tit. i. 7. (Prov. xxii. 24; xxLx. 22; Xen. de re equ. 9, 7; Plat. [e. g. de rep. 411 b.]; Aristot. [e.g. eth. Nic. 2, 7, 10]; al.) • όργυιά, -ας, ή, {ορίγω to Stretch out), the distance across the breast from the tip of one middle finger to the tip of the other when the arms are outstretched; five or six feet, a fathom: Acta xxvii. 28. (Horn., Udt., Xen., al.) • iptyo) : (cf. Lat. rego. Germ, recken, strecken, reichen, [Eng. reach; Curtius § 153]); fr. Ilom. down; to stretch forth, as χ^Ιρα, Ilom. II. 15, 371, etc. ; pres. mid. [cf. W. p. 252 (237) note], to stretch one's self out in order to touch or to grasp something, to reach after or desire some- thing: with a gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; Ileb. xi. 16; φϊΚαργνρίας, to give one's self up to the love of money (not (juite accurately since φίΚαργ. is itself the οριξις; [cf. Ellicott ad loc.]), 1 Tim. vi. 10.• opeivos, -ή, -όν, (όρος), mountainous, hilly; ή όρ(ΐνή [\VH όρινή, see I, ί] sc. χώρα [cf. W. 591 (550)] (which is added in Hdt. 1, 110; Xen. CjT. 1, 3, 3), the mountain- district, hill-country : Lk. i. 39, 65, (Aristot. h. a. 5, 28, 4; Sept. for 1Π, Gen. xiv. 10; Deut. xi. 11; Josh. ii. 16, etc.).* opc^is, -ίωί, ή, (ορίγομαι, q. v.), desire, longing, craving, for; eager desire, lust, appetite: of lust, Ro. i. 27. It is used both in a good and a bad sense, as well of natural and lawful and even of proper cravings (of the appetite for food. Sap. xvi. 2 sq. ; Pint. mor. p. 635 c. ; al. ; fVi- στήμης. Plat, de fin. p. 414 b.), as also of corrupt and unlawful desires, Sir. xviii. 30; xxiii. 6; άΚογοι and λο- γιστικοΊ 6ρίξ(ΐς are contrasted in Aristot. rhet. 1, 10, 7. [Cf. Trench § Ixxxvii.] * <>ρθο-ΐΓο8ίω, -ώ; (ορθόιηνς with straight feet, going straight ; and this fr. ορθός and iroir) ; to walk in a ilraight course; metaph. to act uprightly. Gal. ii. 14 [cf. ίρθΟ [W. § 24, 1 ; B. § 143, 8]) ; pass, with a pred. nom. Ro. i. 4 (for although Christ was the Son of God before his resurrection, yet he was openly appointed [ A.V. declared^ such among men by this tran- scendent and crowning event) ; ορίζω, to ordain, determine, appoint. Acts x. 42 ; foil, by an inf. Acts xi. 29 (Soph. fr. 19d. [i. e. Aegeus (539), viii. p. 8 ed. Brunck]). [CoMP. : άφ-, άπο-ϋι-, προ-ορίζω.^' [opivis, see opeii/oj.] ό'ριον, -ου, TO, (fr. opor [boundary]), [fr. Soph, down], a bound, limit, in the N. T. always in plur. (like Lat. fines) boundaries, [R. V. borders'], i. q. region, district, land, territory: Mt. ii. 16; iv. 13; viii. 34 ; xv. 22, 39; xix. 1 ; Mk. V. 17 ; vii. 24 L Τ TrAVH, 31 ; x. 1 ; Acts xiu. 50. (Sept. very often for Sl3J ; several times for nSoj.) ' ορκίζω ; (opKos) ; 1. to force to take an oath, to administer an oath to: Xen. conviv. 4, 10; Dem., Polyb.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 361. 2. to adjure, (solemnly implore), with tivo ace. of pers., viz. of the one who is adjured and of the one by whom he is adjured (cf. Mat- thiae § 413, 10; [B. 147 (128)]) : 1 Th. v. 27 RG (see (νορκίζω) ; Mk. v. 7 ; Acts xix. 13. (Sept. for ;'.'3ψη, Ttm foil, by κατά w. gen., 1 K. ii. (iii.) 42 ; 2 Chr. xxxvi. 13 ; tv, Neh. xiii. 2.i.) [Co.^lP. : ev-, (ξ-ορκίζω.] * opKos, -ου, ό, (fr. ίργω, dpyai ; i. q. tpKos an enclosure, confinement ; hence Lat. orcus), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for nj;%2O, an oath : Mt. xiv. 7, 9 ; xxvi. 72; Mk. vi. 26; Lk. L '73 [W. 628 (583) ; B. § 144, 13] ; Acts ii. 30 [W. 226 (212); 603 (561)]; Heb. vi. 16 sq.; Jas. v. 12; by meton. that which has been pledged or promised with an oath ; plur. vows, Mt. v. 33 [(cf. AViinsche ad loc.)].* όρκωμ,οσ-Ια, -at, 17. (όρκωμοτ€α> [όρκοί and όμνυμι] ; cf. άπωμοσία, άντωμοσία), ajfirmatiun made on oath, the tak- ing of an oath, (in oath: Heb. vii. 20 (21), 21, 28. (Ezek. xvii. 18 ; 1 Esdr. viii. 90 (92) ; Joseph, antt. 16, 6, 2. Cf. Delitzsch, Cora, on Heb. 1. c.)* ορμάω, -ω : 1 Άοτ. ωρμησα; (ίτ. ορμή); 1. trans. to set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on; so fr. Horn, down. 2. intrans. to .^tart forward impetuously, to rush, (so fr. Hom. down) : eir τι, Mt. viii. 32 ; Mk. v. 13 ; Lk. viii. 33 ; Acts xL\. 29; en-i τίνα. Acts vii. 57.* ορμή. -ijy, 17, [fr. r. sar to go. How; Fick i. p. 227 ; Cur- tius § 502], fr. Hom. down, a violent motion, impulse : Jas. iii. 4 ; a hostile movement, onset, assault. Acts .xiv. 5 [cf. Trench § Ixxxvii.].* δρμ,ημα, -τοί, τό, (ορμάω), a ru-di, impulse : Rev. xviii. 21 [here A. V. violence']. (For TTJii;, outburst of wrath, Am. i. 11 ; Hab. iii. 8, cf. St7(/eu.s-ner,Thesaur. iv. p. 123 ; an enterprise, venture, Hom. Π. 2, 356, 590, although in- terpreters differ about its meaning there [cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. or L. and S. s. v.] ; that to which one is impelled or hurried away by impulse, [rather, incitement, stimulus'^ Plut. mor. [de virt. mor. § 12] p. 452c.)* opueof 4Γ)4 OS opviov, -ou, TO. oftiVi/: Rev. xviii. 2; xi.\. 17,21. (Sept.; Iloni., Tliiic, Xeu., I'lat., .losei)!!. antt. 3, 1, 5.)* ορνιξ [.so codd. X DJ, i. ij. opvis (n. v.) : Lk. xiii. .34 Tdf. The num. is not found in prof, writ., but the trisyllabic forms ορι>ίχο!, όρνιχι for opviOos, etc., are used in Doric ; [I'liotius (cd. I'orson, p. 348, 2'2) Ίω«5 ομνιξ . . . και ΔωρίΕΪΓ ομι/ι|. Cf. Curtius p. 495]." o'pvis. -ιθιιί. ό, ή. (ΟΡΏ, ϋμνυμι [see ipSpos]) ; 1. a binl : so fr. 1 loni. down. 2. spec. « cod; a hen : Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 [Tdf. ο/)ιί|, q- v.]; (so Aeschyl. Eum. 8uG ; Xen. an. 4, 5, 25; Theocr., Polyb. 12, 20, 1 ; [al.:).• όροϋατία, -as, η, (fr. όροθίτης ; and tliis fr. opos [a boun- dary ; see Spiov], and τίθημι) ; a. prop, a selling of bouiiilaries, laijint/ down ΙίιηίΙ.•<. b. a definile limil ; plur. bounds, Acts xvii. 2G. (Eccl. writ. ; [W. 25].) ' opos, -oi;f, TO, (OPQ, όρνυμι [i. e. a rising; see όρθρο:]), [f]•. ΙΙϋπι. down], Sci)t. for in, a mountain: Mt. v. 14; Lk. iii. 5; Uev. vi. 14, and often; το opos, the moun- tain nearest the place spoken of, the mountain near by [but see 0, II. 1 b.], Mt. v. 1 ; Mk.iii. 13 ; Lk. ix. 28; Jn. vi. 3, 15; ])lur. ό/)ΐ), Mt.xviii. 12; xxiv. 16; Mk. v. 5 ; Rev. vi. IG, etc. ; gen. plur. ορίων (on this uncontracted form, used also in Attic, cf. Ultm. CIram. § 49 note 3 ; W. § 9, 2 c.; [B. 14 (13); Dindoif in Fleckeisen's Jahrb. for 1KG9 p. 83]), Rev. vi. 1.") ; 5ρη μ(θιστάν(ΐν a i)rovcrb. phrase, used also by rabbin, writ., Ιυ rcimive mounlains, i. e. lo accomplish mosi iliJficuU, stupendous, incrcdilde things: 1 Co. xiii. 2, cf. Mt. xvii. 20 ; xxi. 21 ; Mk. xi. 23. όρϋσ-σω : 1 aor. ωρυξα: fr. Hum. down; Sept. for tun, n^r, etc. : to dig: to make τι by dig;.;ing, Mk. xii. 1 ; τι fv τ:ι>ί, Mt. x.xi. 3.5 ; i. (p to make a pit, tv τη y!j, Mt. xxv. 18 [here TTr WII 6p. -γήνΐ. [CoMP.: δι-, ΐξ-ορύσσω.]* ορφον05, -η,-όν, (0ΡΦ02, Lat. orbus; [Curtius § 404]), fr. Horn. Od. 20, «.S down, Sept. for Din;; benj'l (of a father, of parents), .las. i. 27 [X-Y. fatherless] ; of those bereft of a teacher, guide, guardian, Jn. .\iv. 18 (Lam. V. 3).• όρχε'ομαι, -οϊμαι : 1 aor. ωρχησάμην ; (fr. χορό:, by trans- position op;(of ; cf. άρπω, άμπάζω, and Lat. rapio, μορφή and \λΙ. forma; [but these supposed transpositions are extremely doubtful, cf. Curtius § 189; Tick iv. 207, 167. Some connect ορχίομαι with r. argh 'to put in rapid mo- tion'; cf. Vanicek i>. όϋ]); to dance : Mt. xi. 17; xiv. 6; Mk. vi. 22 ; Lk. vii. 32. (From II om. down ; Sept. for ^p■;, 1 Chr. XV. 29; Ecdus. iii. 4; 2 S. vi. 21.)* o's, ij, o, the postpositive article, which has the force of I. a demonstrative pronoun, this, that, (Lat. hie, haec, hoc ; Germ, emjihat. der, die, das) ; in the N. T. only in the foil, instances : os hi, but he (Germ, er aber), Jn. v. 11 LTrAVII;[Mk.xv.23TTrtxt.WII; cf.B.§126,2]; in distributions and distinctions : Sr μϊν . . . os he, this . . . that, one . . . another, the one . . . Ike other, Mt. x.xi. 35 ; xxii. 5 L Τ Tr WII ; xxv. 15 ; Lk. xxiii. 33 ; Acts xxvii. 44; Ro. .xiv. 5; 1 Co. vii. 7 RG; xi. 21 ; 2Co. ii. 16; .Jude 22; ό μίν . . . ο hi, the one . . . the other, Ro. ix. 21 ; [S μΐν . . . ό hi . ■ ■ ο hi, some . . . some . . . some, Mt. xiii. 23 L Τ WH] ; & he ■ . ■ ό he ■ ■ ■ ό he, some . . . some . . . some, ΛΙί. xiii. 8 ; ω (masc.) μίν ■ ■ ■ πλλω (8f ) . . . «τί'ρω hi [but LTTrWHom. this δί] κτλ. 1 Co. xii. 8-10; δ μί» . . .άλλο Sf [L txt. Τ Tr WII «α'κϊλλο], Mk. iv. 4 ; with a variation of the construction al.so in the foil. pass. : ό μίν . . . κα\ cTepov, Lk. viii. 5 ; ots μίν with the omission of oCs hi by anacoluthon, 1 Co. xii. 28 ; 6y μίν . . . 6 he άσ^ίκύκ etc. one man . . . but he that is iveak etc. Ilo. xiv. 2. On this use of the pronoun, chiefly by later writers from De- mosth. down, cf. Matthiae § 289 Anni. 7 ; Kiihner § 518, 4 b. ii. p. 780; [Jelf § SUi, 3 b.] ; Bilni. (iram. § 1 26, 3 ; B. 101 (89) ; λν. 105 (100); Fritzsche on .\Ik. p. 507. II. a relative pronoun who, which, what; 1. in the common constr., ace. to which the relative agrees as respects its gender with the noun or pron. which is its antecedent, but as respects case is governed by its own verb, or by a substantive, or by a preposition : ό αστήρ ov eihov, Mt. ii. 9 ; ό . . Ίουδαίοί, οϋ 6 eiraivos κτ\. Ro. ii. 29 ; oiiros irepi ov eyia άκονω τοιαύτα, Lk. i.\. 9 ; αττό της ήμίρα:, αφ' rjs. Acts .XX. 18; Oebs hi' ού, ('ξ ου, 1 Co. viii. G, and numberless other ex.x. it refers to a more remote noun in 1 Co. i. 8, where the antecedent of or is not the nearest noun Ί7;σοϋ Χριστοί, but τω Beiu in 4 ; yet cf. \V. 157 (149); as in this passage, so very often elsewhere the relative is the subject of its own clause : άνήρ as etc. Jas. i. 12 ; nas or, Lk. xiv. 33 ; ohhe'is os, Mk. x. 29 ; Lk. xviii. 29, and many other exx. 2. in constructions peculiar in some respect ; a. the gender of the rel- ative is sometimes made to conform to that of the follow- ing noun: τήs ανΚή:, ο ΐστι πραιτώριον, Mk. χν. 16 ; λα/χ- TTUhcs, a ίίσι (ί^ ίστιν) τα πν(νματα, liev. iv. 5 [LT WII]; σπίρματι, of ΐστι Xpiaras, (ial. iii. 16 ; add, Eph. i. 14 [L WII txt. Tr mrg. 5] ; vi. 1 7 ; 1 Tim. iii. 15 ; Rev. v. 8 [T WH rarg. 5] ; cf. Ilerm. ad Vig. p. 708 ; Matthiae § 440 p. 989 sq. ; \V. § 24, 3 ; B. § 143, 3. b. in construc- tions ad sensum [cf. B. § 143, 4] ; a. the plural of the relative is used after collective nouns in tht sing. [cf. W. §21,3; B. u. s.] : πλήθος πολύ, οΊ ήλθον, Lk. vi. 17; παν το πρΐσβυτίριον, παρ' hv, .Vets .xxii. 5 ; yeveas, ev ois, Phil. ii. 1 5. p. κατά πάσαν ττολιΐ', ev ais, .\cts xv. 36 ; ταΰτην hevTepav νμ'ιν γράφω €πιστο\ην, ev αις (because the preceding context conveys the idea of two Epistles), 2 Pet. iii. 1. γ. the gender of the relative is conformed not to the grammatical but to the natural gender of its antecedent [cf. W. §21,2; B. u. s.] : παΜριον of, Jn. vi. 9 L TTr WII; θηρίον of, of Nero, as antichrist, Rev. xiii. 14 LTTrWH; «φαλ^ of. of Christ, Col. ii. 19; [add μυστήριον of etc. 1 Tim. iii. 16 G L Τ Tr WII ; cf. B. u. s. ; λν. 588 sq. (•')47)] ; σκeϋη (of men) out, Ro. ix. 24; ΐθνη o1. Acts .XV. 1 7 ; .x.xvi. 1 7 ; τίκνα, reKvia oi, .In. i. 13; Gal. iv. 19; 2 Jn. 1, (Eur. suppl. 12) ; τίκνον os, Philem. 10. c. In attractions [B.§ 143, 8; W. §§ 24, 1 ; 66, 4sqq.]; o. the accusative of the rel. pron. depending on a trans, verb is changed by attr.action into the oblique case of its antecedent: «nVfrnt ris exTioev 6 Oeos, Mk. xiii. 19 [RG]; ToC ρήματοΓ οί emev, Mk. xiv. 72 [Rec.] ; add, .In. iv. 14 ; vii. 31, 39 [but Tr mrg. WH mrg. o]; xv. 20; xxi. 10; Actsiii. 21, 25; vii. 17, 45; ix. 36 ; x. 39 ; xxii. 10; Ro. XV. 18 ; 1 Co. vi. 19 ; 2 Co. i. 6 ; x. 8, 13 ; Eph. i. 8 ; Tit ος 455 ος iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; Lx. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 Jn. iii. 24 ; Jude Ιό ; for other exx. see below ; eV ωρα ji oi γιρώ• σκ(ΐ, Mt. xxiv. 50; rg τταραδύσα g τταρίδώκατί , Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20 ; v. 9; ix. 43 ; xii. 4ti ; xxiv. 25 ; Jn. xvii. 5 ; Actsii. 22; xvii. 31 ; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6 ; cf. W. § 24, 1 ; [B. as above]. Rarely attrac- tion occurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below] : thus, Karefatnt ov eVtoreuaf θ€θΰ for κατίναντι ΰίον, ώ eViOTfuffc (see καηναντί). Ro. iv. 17; φωνής, ης (κμαξα {{or η [al ijv, cf. W. 164 (154 Sij.) B. 287 (247)]), Acts .xxiv. 21, cf. Is. vi. 4; {rjyero δϊ και των ίαυτοΰ Te πιστών, ois ηδ€το και Ζ>ν ηπίστξΐ ττολλοι/ί, for και πολΧοϋς τοίιτων, οΐς ήπίστα, Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 3!) ; lav eyi> ϊνητνχηκα oiSeit, for ouScir τούτων, off evTCT. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 a. ; Protag. p. 361 e. ; de rep. 7 p. 531 e. ; παρ' Siv βοηθ(Ις, oi- Sfpiav \ήψ€ΐ χάριν, for παρά τούτων, uiy κτ\. Aeschin. f. leg. p. 43 (117) ; cf. Frilzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 237 ; [B. § 143, 11 ; Λ\'. 163 (154) sq.; but others refuse to recognize this rare species of attraction in the N. Ϊ. ; cf. Jleyer on Eph. i. 8]). The foil, expressions, however, can hardly be brought under this construction : τής χάρι- τος ης €χαρίτωσ(ν (as if for ^), Eph. i. 6 L Τ Tr WII ; της κλήσιως, ης ϊκΚήβητί, Eph. Iv. 1 ; δια της παρακΚήσΐως ής παρακάΚοΰμίθα, 2 Co. i. 4, but must be e.xplained agree- ably to such phrases as χάριν χαριτοΰν, κλησιν κά\(ΐν, etc., [(i. e. accus. of kindred abstract subst. ; cf. W. § 32, 2 ; B. § 131, 5)] ; cf. W. [and B. u. s.J. β. The noun to which the relative refers is so conformed to the case of the relar live clause that either αα. it is itself incorporated into the relative construction, but without the article [B. §143,7; W.§24,2b.]: ov ΐγω άπ(κ€φάΚισα Ίωοιτνην, ούτος ήγίρθη, for Ιωάννης, όν κτλ. Mk. vi. 16 ; add, Lk. xxiv. 1 ; Philem.lO; Ro. vi. 17; ςίς ην οίκίαν, €Κ£Ϊ,\.(\. evTjj οΙκία, €ίς ην, Lk. ix. 4 ; or ββ. it is placed before the rela- tive clause, either with or without the article [\V. § 24, 2 a. ; B. § 144, 13] : τον αρτον ov κλώμίν, ουχί κοινωνία τον σώματος, 1 Co. Χ. 16 ; Χίθον ον αποδοκίμασαν οί οίκο^ομοϋν- τ(ς, ούτος ϊγίνηθη (for ό λίθος, δί »£τλ.), Mt. .xxi. 42 ; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. XX. 17 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7. γ. Attraction in the phrases άχρι ης ημίρας for άχρι τηί ήμίρας, § [W. § 24, 1 fin.] : Mt. xxiv. 38 ; Lk. i. 20 ; xvii. 27 ; Acts i. 2; αφ' ης ήμίρας for άπο της ημίρας, g. Col. i. 6, 9 ; hv τρόπον, as, just as, for τοντον το» τρόποι» Sv or ω, Mt. xxiii. 3 7 ; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Acts vii. 28 ; [preceded or] foil, by οΰτως. Acts i. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 8. δ. A noun common to both the principal clause and the relative is placed in the relative clause after the relative pron. [W. 165 (156)]: e'v ω κρίμαη KpivfTe, κριθτ)σ(σθο, for κριθ. iv τω κρίματι, iv ω κρίν€Τ(, Mt. vii. 2 ; xxiv. 44 ; Mk. iv. 24 ; Lk. xii. 40, etc. 3. The Neutero a. refers to nouns of the masculine and the feminine gender, and to plurals, when that which is denoted by these nouns is regarded as a thing [cf. B. § 129, 6]: λίΤΓτα δύο, ο ίστι κοδράντης, Mk. xii. 42; ά•γάπην, ο ccm σύνδΐσμος,ΟοΧ. iii. 14 L Γ Tr WH ; άρτους, 5 etc. Mt. xii. 4 L txt. Τ Tr λ\11. b. is used in the phrases [B. u. s.] — ο eVTt», ichich {term) signifies: Boa- vfpyis ο ioTiv υιοί βρ. Mk. iii. 1 7 : add, v. 41 ; vii. 11, 34; Heb. vii. 2; ο fWi μοθορμηνινόμινον, and the like: Mt. i i. 23; Mk.xv. 34; Jn. i. 38 (39), 41 (42) sq.; Lx. 7; xx. 16. c. refers to a whole sentence [B. u. s.] : toCtop άνίστησ€ν 6 θ(άς, ov . . . ΐσμίν μάρτνρίί, Acts ii. 32 ; iii. 15 ; περί ου ... ό λόγος, Heb. v. 11 ; 6 και εποίησαν (and the Uke), Acts xi. 30; GaL ii. 10; Col. i. 29; ο {which thing viz. that I write a new commandment [cf. B. § 143, 3]) ianv αληθίς, 1 Jn. ii. 8 ; ο (sc. to have one's lot as- signed in the lake of fire) iarwo θάνατος 6 δ(ϋτ(ρος, Rev. xxi. 8. 4. By an idiom to be met with from Horn. down, in the second of two coordinate clauses a pro- noun of the third person takes the place of the relative (cf. Passow ii. p. 552''; [L. and S. s. v. B. IV. 1]; B. § 143, 6 ; [W. 149 (141)]) : ος ίσται (πι τοΰ δώματος και τα σκ(ύη αυτού iv ttj οικία μη καταβάτω, Lk. .xvii. 31 ; εξ ου τα πάντα καΊ ήμ(Ίς (1ς αυτόν, 1 Co. viii. 6. 5. Sometimes, by a usage esp. Hebraistic, an oblique case of the pronoun αυτός is introduced into the relative clause redundantly ; as, ης TO θυγάτριον αύτης. Mk. vii. 25 ; see αυτός, II. 5. 6. The relative pron. very often so includes the demonstra- tive ούτος or cKe'ivos that for the sake of perspicuity a demons, pron. must be in thought supplied, either in the clause preceding the relative clause or in that which follows it [W. § 23, 2 ; B. § 127, 5]. The foU. examples may suiiice : a. a demons, jjron. must be added in thought in the preceding clause : οΐς ήτοίμασται, for τούτοις δοθήσ€ται, οΐς ήτ. Mt. XX. 23; διΊξαι (sc. ταύτα), ά δίί -γΐνίσθαι, Rev. i. 1 ; χχϋ. 6 ; ω for (κύνος ω, Lk. vii. 43, 47 ; ου for τούτω ου, Ro. χ. 14 ; with the attraction of S}v for τούτων a, Lk. Lx. 36 ; Ro. xv. 18 ; S)v for ταΰτ,ι S>v, Mt. vi. 8; with a prep, intervening, ίμαθ(ν άφ' Siv (for από τούτωι» a) ΐπαθεν, Heb. V. 8. b. a demons, pron. must be supplied in the subsequent clause : Mt. x. 38; Mk. ix. 40 ; Lk. iv. 6 ; ix. 50 ; Jn. xix. 22 ; Ro. ii. 1, and often. 7. Sometimes the purpose and end is e.x- pressed in the form of a relative clause (cf. the Lat. ijui for ul is) : άποστίλλω ayyeKov, ος (for which Lchm. in Mt. has και) κατασκευάσει, who shall etc. i. q. that he ma;/ etc., Alt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; [1 Co. ii. 16]; so also in Grk. auth., cf. Passow s. v. VIII. vol. ii. p. 553 ; [L. and S. s. V. B. IV. 4] ; Mattliiae§481,d.; [Kuhner§563, 3 b.; Jelf§836, 4; B. §139, 32]; — or the cause: Si» παρα- δέχεται, because he acknowledges him as his own, Heb. .\ii. 6 ; — or the relative stands Λvhere ώστε might be used (cf. Matthiae § 479 a.; Kriiger § 51, 13, 10; [KUhner § 563, 3 e.] ; Passow s. v. VIII. 2, iL p. 553" ; [L. and S. u. s.]) : Lk. v. 21 ; vii. 49. 8. For the interrog. τίς, τί, in indirect questions (cf. Ellendt, Lex. Soph. ii. 372; [cf. B. § 139, 58]) : οϋκ ΐχω ο παραθήσω, Lk. xi. 6; by a later Grk. usage, in a direct quest, (cf. W. §24, 4; B. § 139, 59) : εφ' ο (or Rec. iφ' ω) πάρει, Mt. xxvL SO (on which [and the more than doubtful use of or in direct quest.] see επί, Β. 2 a. ζ. p. 233'' and C. I. 2 g. γ. aa. p. 235"). 9. Joined to a preposition it forms a periphrasis for a conjunction [B. 105 (92)] : avff tuv, for avTi τούτων ότι, — because, Lk. i. 20 ; xi.x. 44 ; Acts xii. 23 ; 2 Th. ii. 10; for which reason, wherefore, Lk. xii. 3 (see αντί, 2 d.) ; εφ' ω, for that, since (see ε'πί, Β. 2 a. 8- p. 233'); άφ' ov, (from the tiise that), when, since, Lk. xiii. 25 οσάκις 45ϋ Οσο? xxiv. 21, [see από, Ι. 4 b. ρ. 58'] ; άχρκ ου, see ίίχρι, 1 ι1. ; *Ί οί, H-Aence, Phil. iii. 20 cf. \V. § 21 , 3 ; [Β. § 14.i, 4 ;i.] ; ίωί ov, utilit (see ίως, II. 1 b. a. p. 2G8''); also μίχρίί οί, Mk. xiii. 30; iv ω, ίΐ'/ϋ/ί, Mk. ii. 19; I>k. v. 34 ; .In. v. 7; fv olt, meanwhile, Lk. xii. 1; [cf. fv, I. 8 e.]. 10. With i>articles: os άν and or ϊάν, wlio.ioever, if any one erer, see Sv, II. 2 and eai', II. p. 163*; oJ taj/, whereso- ever (ti'hilhersoei-er) with subjiinc, 1 Co. xvi. 6 [cf. B. lOJ (92)]. Of y(, see yi, 2. os rat, «■/(« a/.vo, Λβ ϋ'λο, (cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 63G) : Mk. iii. 19 ; Lk. vi. 13 .sq. ; X. 39 [here Wll br. η] ; .In. xxi. 20; Acts i. 11 ; vii. 45 ; X. 39 [Uec. om. και']; xii. 4; xiii. 22 ; xxiv. 6 ; Ro. v. 2; 1 Co. xi. 23 ; 2 Co. iii. G ; Gal. ii. 10; Ileb. i. 2, etc. ; Ss και αΰτόί, >rho aiso himselj, who as welt as others: Mt. xxvii. 57. OS 8ήποτ(, whosoerer,. Jn. y. iKec; όσπιρ [^or ός irtp L Tr txt.], who especiallij, the very one ivho (cf. Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 724) : Mk. xv. 6 [but here Τ WH Tr mrg. now read δν παρ?;τοΰντο, q. V.]. 11. The genitive of, used absolutely [cf. W. 590 (549) note; Jelf § 522, Obs. 1], be>;omes an adverb (first so in Attic writ., cf. Passow II. p. 54G•; [Sleisterhans §50, 1]); a. tehere (Lat. nhi): Mt. ii. 9; xviii. 20; Lk. iv. 16sq. ; xxiii. 53; Acts i. 13; xii. 12; xvi. 13; xx. 6 [T Tr mrg. οττου] ; xxv. 10; xxviii. 14; Ro. iv. 15; ix. 26; 2 Co. iii. 17; Col. iii. 1; Ileb. iii. 9; Rev. xvii. 15; after verbs denoting motion (.-iee «fl, b. ; όπου, 1 b.) it can be rendered whither [cf. W. § 54, 7 ; B. 71 (62)], Mt. xxviii. 16 ; Lk. x. 1 ; xxiv. 28 ; 1 Co. xvi. 6. b. when (like Lat. uhi i. q. eo tempore quo, quom) : Ro. v. 20 (Eur. Iph. Taur. 320), [but .al. take ο J in Ro. I.e. locally]. όσ-άκΐΐ, (όσοί), relative adv., as ofen as; with the ad- dition of 'iv, as often soever as, 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. [RG; cf. W. S42, 5 a.; B. § 139, 34]; also of iav, [LTTrWH in 1 Co. 1. c] ; Rev. xL 6. [(Lys., Plat., al.)] ' όσ-γί, for or ye, see ye, 2. oo-ios, -a, -Dv, and once (1 Tim. ii. 8) of two termina- tions (as in Plato, Icgg. 8 p. 831 d. ; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 71 fin.; cf. W. § 11, 1; B. 26 (23); the fern, occurs in the N. T. only in the passage cited) ; fr. .\eschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. chiefly for τρπ (cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch. on Sap. p. 81 [and reff. s. v. ayiof, fin.]) ; un- (h'filed hij sin, free from wichedness, religioiisli/ ohservinq every moral ohlifjalinn, pure, holy, pious, (Plato, Gorg. p. 507 b. nefH pev ανθρώπους τά προιτηκυντα πράττων 8ΐκαι άν πράττοι,π(ρ\ 8e eeoit όσια. The distinction between dUuLos and οσιοΓ is given in the same way by Polyb. 23, 10, 8; Schol. ad Eurip. Hec. 788; Chari't. 1, 10 ; [for other exx. see Trench § Ixxxviii. ; Wetstein on Eph. iv. 24 ; but on its applicability to N. T. usage see Trench u. s. ; indeed Plato elsewh. (Euthyphro p. 12e.) makes δίκαιος the generic and Saios the specific term]) ; of men : Tit. i. 8; Ileb. vii. 26; oi όσιοι τον 0€οΰ, ■the pious towards God, G nil's pious worshippers, (Sap. iv. 15 and often in the Psalms); so in a peculiar and pre-eminent sense of the Messiah [A. V. thy Holy One] : Acts ii. 27; xiii. 35, after Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10; xe'ipes (Aes- chyl. cho. 378; Soph. O. C. 470), 1 Tim. ii. 8. of God, holy: Rev. xv. 4; xvi. 5, (also in prof. auth. occasion- ally of the gods; Orph. Arg. 27; hymn. 77, 2; of God in Deut. xxxii. 4 for ιψ'•, Ps. cxliv. (c.xlv.) 1 7 for τρπ cf. Sap. V. 19); τά όσια Aiwt8. the holy things (of God) promised to David, i. e. the ^Messianic blessings, Acts xiii. 34 fr. Is. Iv. 3.• όιηότηϊ, -ητος, η, (βσιος), piety towards God, fidelity in ohserriny the. ohllr/alions of piety, holiness : joined with Βικαιοσϋνη (see όσιοί [and δικαιοσύνη, 1 b.]) : Lk. i. 75 ; Eph. iv. 24 ; Sap. ix. 3 ; Clem. Honi. 1 Cor. 48, 4. (Xen., Plat., Isocr., al.; Sept. for ID', Duut. ix. 5 ; for Oil, 1 K. ix. 4.) [Meinke in St. u. Krit. "84 p. 743 ; Schmidt ch. 181.] • oaCids, (offtor), [fr. Eur. down], .adv., yjiOi/s/y, holily: joined with δικαίως, 1 Th. ii. 10 {ayviis κάί όσίως κ, ίι- καϊως, Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7).* ό<Γμ.ή, -ης, ή, (όζω [q. ν.]), α smell, odor: Jn. xii. 3; 2Co.ii.l4; θανάτου (LT Tr WII « ίαν.), such an odor as is emitted b}- death (i. e. by a deadly, pestiferous thing, a dead body), and itself causes death, 2 Co. ii. 16; ζωη! (or c'k ζωής) such as is diffused (or emitted) by life, and itself imparts life, ibid. [A. V. both times savorl; όσμη ίύωδι'ϋΓ. Kph. v. 2; Phil. iv. 18; see fio»- δ/α, b. (Tragg., Thuc., Xen., Plat., al.; in llom. όδμή; Sept. for Π"\.) * oiros, -η, -ov, [fr. Ilom. down], a relative adj. corre- sponding to the demon, τοσοϋτυς either expressed or un- derstood, Lsit. ijuanl us, -a, -uin; used a. of space [a.< yreat a.s] : το μήκος αϋτης (Rec. adds τοσούτον eariv) οσην και [GTTrWHom. και] το πλάτος. Rev. xxi. 16; of time \_as lony as] : irf> όσον χρόνον, for so long lime lis, so lony as, Ro. vii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 39 ; Gal. iv. 1 ; also without a prep., όσοιι χρόνον, .Mk. ii. 19 ; neut. eφ' όσον, IIS long as, Mt. ix. 15; 2 Pet. i. 13, (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 25) ; en μικρόν όσον όσον, yet a Utile how very, how very, (Vulg. modirum \idi]quiintulum), i. e. yet a very little while, Ileb. X. 37 (Is. xxvi. 20; of a very little thing, Arstph. vesp. 213; cf. flerm. ad Vig. p. 726 no. 93; \V. 247 (231) note; B. § 150, 2). b. of abundance and mul- titude; how many, as many as; how much, as much as: neut. όσον, .In. vi. 1 1 ; plur. όσοι, as- many (men) as, all who, Mt. .xiv. 36 ; Mk. iii. 10; Acts iv. G, 34 ; xiii. 48 ; Ro. ii. 12; vi. 3; Gal. iii. 10, 27; Phil. iii. 15; 1 Tim. vi. 1 ; Rev. ii. 24 ; οσαι eVayyfXiut, 2 Co. i. 20 ; όοα Ιμάτια, Acts ix. 39 ; neut. plur., absol. [A. V. often tvhntsocver], Mt. xvii. 12 ; Mk. x. 21 ; Lk. xi. 8 ; xii. 3 ; Ro. iii. 19 ; xv. 4; JudelO; Rev. i. 2. navres όσοι, [α// as many as], Mt. xxii. 10 [here Τ WH π- οίς]; Lk. iv. 40; Jn. x. 8; Acts V. 36 sq. ; neut. πάντα όσα [aW things whatsoever, all that], Mt. xiii. 46 ; xviii. 25 ; xxviii. 20 ; Mk. xii. 44 ; Lk. xviii. 22 ; Jn. iv. 29 [T AVH Tr mrg. π. S], 39 [T WH Tr txt. π. a] ; τΓολλα όσα, Jn. xxi. 25 R G, (Hom. II. 22, 380; Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 3). oooi . . . oirot, Ro. viii. 14; όσα . . . ταϊτα, Phil. iv. 8; όσα . ■ ■ e'v τούτοις, Jude 10; όσοι . . . αυτοί, .In. i. 12: Gal. vi. 16. όσοι Sv or eav, how many soever, as many soever as [cf. AV. § 42, 3] ; foil, by an indie, pret. (see 3v, II. 1), Mk. vi. 56 ; by an indie, pres. Rev. iii. 19; by a subjunc. aor., Mt. xxii. 9; Mk. iii. 28; vi. 1 1 ; Lk. ix. 5 [Rec.] ; Acts ii. 39 [here Lchm. ους Sv] ; Rev. xiii. 15 j όσα Sv, Mt. xviii. 18; ,Tn. xi. 22; xvi. 13 οσίΓΐρ 457 οσφν-ί [RG]; πάντα όσα αν, all Ihinga trhatsoevcr : foil, by sub- juno. pres. Mt. vii. 12; by subjunc. aor., Mt. xxi. 22; xxiii. 3 ; Acts iii. 22. όσα in indirect disc. ; how many tilings : Lk. ix. 10 ; Acts L\. 16 ; xv. 12 ; 2 Tim. i. 18. c. of importance: οσα, how great things, i. e. how ex- traordinary, in indir. disc, Mk. iii. 8 [Lmrg. S] ; v. 19 sq. ; Lk. viii. 39 ; Acts xiv. 27 ; xv. 4, [al. take it of number in tliese last two exx. how many ; cf . b. above] ; how great (i. e. bitter), κακά, Acts ix. 13. d. of measure and degree, in comparative sentences, ace. neut. όσον . . . μάλλον τκμισσότ^ρον, the more . . . so much the more a great deal (A. V.), Mk. vii. 3G ; καθ' όσον with a compar., by so much as witli the compar. Ileb. iii. 3; καθ' όσον . . . κατά τοσούτον [τοσούτο LTTrWII], Ileb. vii. 20, 22; καθ" όσον (iniisiiitirh) as foil, by οϋτως, Heb. ix. 27; τοσούτω with a compar. foil, by όσω with a compar., by so much . . . as, Heb. i. 4 (Xen. mem. 1, 4, 40 ; Cyr. 7, 5, 5 sip) ; without τοπ-ούτω, Ileb. viii. 6 [Λ. V. hy how m«i,7i]; τοσούτο» μάλλον, όσω (without μάλλον), Ileb. χ. 25 ; όσα . . . τοσούτον, how much . . . so much, Kev. xviii. 7; (φ' όσον, for as much as, in so Jar as, ivithout i'lrl τοσούτο, ^It. .\xv. 40, 45; Ro. xi. 13. οσπ(ρ, ijntp, orrtp, see or, ij, S, 10. όστί'ον, contr. όστονν, gen. -oC, to, [akin to Lat. os, ossis: Curtius § 213, cf. p. 41], « //oiie : Jn.xix.36; plur. όστί'α, Lk. .xxiv. 39 ; gen. οστίων, (on these uncontr. forms cf. [WH. App. p. l.'J7]; W . § 8, 2 d. ; [B. p. 13 (12)]), Mt. xxiii. 27; Eph. v. 30 [RGTrmrg.br.]; Heb. xi. 22. (From Ilom. down ; Sept. very often for DX;?.) * ooTis, ijTts, δ,τι (separated by a hypodiastole [comma], to distinguish it from ότι; but L Τ Tr write ο τι, without a hypodiastole [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. Ill], leaving a little epace between ο and τι; [WH οτι] ; cf. W. 46 (45 scp); \^Lij>sius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr. § ^"'D' S^"• ούτινος (but of the oblique cases only the ace. neut. ο,τί and the gen. ότου, in the phrase ϊω! ότου, are found in the N. T.), [fr. Horn, down], comp. of ot and T(£, hence prop, any one who ; i. e. 1. whoever, every one who: όστις simply, in the sing, chiefly at the beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in Matt. ; ΛΤ. an indie, pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice) ; Mk. viii. 34 (where L Tr WH «i tis) ; Lk. xiv. 27 ; neut. Mt. xviii. 28 Rec; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RGTrmrg.], 41 ; xxiii. 1 2, etc. ; Jas. ii. 10 R (i ; plur. oiTives, whosoever (all those who) : w. indie, pres., Mk. iv. 20 ; Lk. viii. 15 ; Gal. v. 4 ; w. indie, aor.. Rev. i. 7 ; ii. 24 ; xx. 4 ; πάς όστκ, w. indie, pres. Mt. vii. 24; w. fut. Mt. x. 32; δστίΓ w. subjunc. (where άν is wanting very rarely [cf. AV. § 42, 3 (esp. fin.); B. § 139, 31]) aor. (having the force of the fut. pf. in Lat.), Mt. xviii. 4 Rec; Jas. ii. 10 LTTrWH. όστις άν w. subjunc. aor. (Lat. fut. pf.), Mt. x. 33 [RG T]; xii. 50; w. subjunc pres. Gal. v. 10 [toi/TTrWH]; neut. w. subjunc. aor., Lk. x. 35; Jn. xiv. 13 [Trmrg. WH mrg. pres. subjunc.]; xv. 16 [Tr nirg. WH mrg. pres. subjunc] ; with subjunc. pres., Jn. ii. 5 ; 1 Co. .xvi. 2 [Tr WH eav; WH mrg. aor. subjunc] ; ό (άν τι for ό,τι άν w. subjunc. aor. Eph. vi. 8 [R (ί] ; πάν ο,τι άν or ΐάν w. subjunc. pres., Col. iii. 17, 23 [Rec. ; cf. B. § 139, 19 ; W. §42, 3]. 2. it refers to a single person or thing, but so that regard is had to a general notion or class to which this individual person or thing belongs, and thus it indicates quality: one who, such a one as, of such a nature that, (cf. Kuhner § 554 Anm. 1, ii. p. 905 ; [Jelf § 816, 5] ; Lucke on 1 Jn. i. 2, p. 210 sq.): ηγονμίνος, όστίί ηοιμανιΐ, Mt. ii. 6 ; add, Jit. vii. 26 ; xiiL 52 ; xvi. 28 ; xx. 1 ; xxv. 1 ; Mk. xv. 7 ; Lk. ii. 10 ; vii. 37; viii. 3 ; Jn. viii. 25; xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs.] ; Acts xi. 28; xvi. 12; xxiv. 1; Ro. xi. 4; 1 Co. v. 1 ; vii. 13 [Tdf. eiTis]; Gal. iv. 24, 26 ; v. 19; Phil. ii. 20; Col. ii. 23 ; 2 Tim. i. 5 ; Heb. ii. 3 ; viii. 5 ; x. 1 1 ; xii. 5 ; Jas. iv. 14 ; 1 Jn. i. 2 ; Rev. i. 12 ; ix. 4; xvii. 12 ; ό vaos τοϋ θ^οϋ άγιος ίστιν, οίτινίς toTe νμ€ΐς (where οιτινΐς makes refer- ence to ayioi) and such are ye, 1 Co. iii. 1 7 [some refer it to foot]. 3. Akin to the last usage is that whereby it serves to give a reason, such as equiv. to seeing that he, inasmuch as he: Ro. xvi. 12 [here Lchm. br. the cl.] ; Eph. iii. 13 ; [Col. iii. 5] ; Heb. viii. 6 ; plur., Mt. vii. 15; Acts X. 47; xvii. 11; Ro. i. 25, 32 ; ii. 15; vi. 2 ; i.x. 4; xvi. 7; 2 Co. viii. 10; [Phil. iv. 3 (where see Bp. Lghtft.)] ; 1 Tim. i. 4 ; Tit. i. 1 1 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 1. 4. Ace. to a later Greek usage it is put for the interroga- tive Ti's in direct questions (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 57 ; Lachmann, larger ed., vol. i. p. xliii; B. 253 (218); cf. W. 16 7 (158)); thus in the N. T. the neut. 5, τι stands for τί i. q. δώ τι in Mk. ii. 16 Τ Tr WH [cf. 7 WH mrg.] ; ix. 11, 28, (Jer. ii. 36 ; 1 Chr. xvii. 6 — for which in the parallel, 2 S. vii. 7, tva τί appears; Barnab. ep. 7, 9 [(where see MiiUer) ; cf. 7W/. Proleg. p. 125; Evang. Nicod. pars i. A. xiv. 3 p. 245 and note ; cf. also Soph. Lex. s. V. 4]) ; many interpreters bring in Jn. viii. 25 here; but respecting it see άμχή, 1 b. 5. It differs scarcely at all from the simple relative or (cf. Mattliiae p. 1073; B. § 127, 18; [Kriiger § 51, 8 ; Ellicott on Gal. iv. 24 ; cf. Jcbb in Vincent and Dickson's lldbk. to Modern Greek, App. § 24]; but cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum opuscc. p. 182 s()., who stoutly denies it): Lk. ii. 4 ; ix. 30 ; Acts xvii. 10; xxiii. 14 ; xxviii. 18; Eph. i. 23. 6. fus ότου, on which see «ωι, XL 1 b. β. p. 268'• mid. ό(Γτράκινο$, -IJ, -OK, (όστρακον baked clay), tnade of clay, earthen : σκ(ύη οστράκινα, 2 Tim. ii. 20 ; with the added suggestion of frailty, 2 Co. iv. 7. (Jer. xix. 1,11; xxxix. (xxxii.) 14; Is. xxx. 14, etc. ; Hippocr., AnthoL, [al.].)* οσφρησίί, -€ωί, η, (οσφραίνομαι [to smell]), the sense of smell, smelling: 1 Co. xii. IT. (Plat. Phaedo p. Ill b. [(yet cf. Stallbaum ad loc.)]; Aristot., Tlieophr.)' οσφύ? [or -ψθ5, so R Tr in Eph. vi. 14 ; G in Mt. iiL 4; cf. Chandler §§ 658, 659 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 101], -Cos, ή, fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; 1. the hip (loin), as that part of the body where the ζώνη was worn (Sept. for D'jrn): Sit. iii. 4 ; Mk. i. 6 ; hence π(ριζώνννσθαι tos όσφίας, to gird, gird about, the loins, Lk. xii. 35 ; Eph. vi. 14 ; and άναζώνν. τάς όσφ. [to gird up the loins], 1 Pet. i. 1 3 : on the meaning of these metaph. phrases see am- ζώννυμι. 2. a loin, Sept. several times for Ο'ΧτΠ, 458 ΟΤΙ the (two) loinx, where the Hebrews tlionght the gener:»- tive power {semen) resided [?] ; hence καρη-όί της ΰσφίο!, fruit of the loins, offspring. Acts ii. 30 (see καρποί, 1 fin.) ; (ξίρχ(σθαι ck r^t οσφΰος τιι/όί, to come forth out of one's loins i. e. derive one's origin or descent from one, Ileb. vii. 5 (see (ξίρχομαί, 2 b.) ; «n fV ry οσφίϊ TiKor, to be yet in the loins of some one (an ancestor), Ileb. vii. 10.• δταν, a particle of time, comp. of ore and άν, at the time that, wlienerer, (Germ, dann waiin; u-ann irijenil); used of things which one assumes will really occur, but tlie time of whose occurrence he does not definitely fi.\ (in prof. auth. often also of things which one assumes can occur, but wliether they really will or not he does not know; hence like our in con? IImI, as in Plato, I'rot. p. 300 b. ; PhaeJr. p. 256 e.; Phaedo p. 68 d.) ; [cf. W. §42,5; B.§139,33J; a. with the subjunctive present: Mt. vi. 2, 5; x. 23 ; Alk. .xiii. 11 [here Rec. aor.] ; .\iv. 7; Lk. .\i. 36; xii. 11 ; xiv. 12 sq. ; xxi. 7; .In. vii. 27; xvi. 21 ; Acts xxiii. 35; 1 Co. iii. 4; 2 Co. xiii. 9; 1 Jn. v. 2; Rev. x. 7; xviii. 9; preceded by a specification of time : etoy τη! ήμίρα! cKfimjs, όταν etc., Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; foil, by roVe, 1 Th. v. 3; 1 Co. XV. 28 ; i. q. as ojten as, of customary action, Mt. xv. 2 ; Jn. viii. 44 ; Ro. ii. 14 ; al the time when i. q. as long as, Lk. xi. 34; Jn. ix. 5. b. with the subjunctive aorist: i. q. the Lat. quando acciderit, ut w. subjunc. pres., Mt. v. 11 ; xii. 43; xiii. 32; xxiii. 15; xxiv. 32; Uk. iv. 15 sq. 29 [R G], 31 sq. ; xiii. 28 ; Lk. vi. 22, 26 ; viii. 13 ; xi. 24 ; xii. 54 sq. ; xxi. 30; Jn. ii. 10; x. 4 ; xvi. 21 ; 1 Tim. v. 11 [here Lmrg. fut.] ; Rev. ix. 5. i. q. quando w. fut. pf., Mt. xix. 28; xxi. 40; Mk. viii. 38; ix. 9 ; xii. 23 [G Tr \VH om. L br. the cl.], 25 ; Lk. ix. 26; xvi. 4, 9; xvii. 10; Jn. iv. 25; vii. 31 ; .xiii. 19; xiv. 29; XV. 26; xvi. 4, 13, 21; xxi. 18; Acts xxiii. 35 ; xxiv. 22; Ro. xi. 27; 1 Co. xv. 24 [here LTTrAVH pres.], 27 (where the meaning is, ' when he .shall have said that the νπόταξίί predicted in the Psalm is now accom- plished'; cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; xvi. 2 sq. 5, 12; 2 Co. x. 6; Cohiv.l6; 1 Jn. ii. 28 [LTTr WU e'oi']; 2Th.i.lO; Ileb. i. 6 (on which see (ΐσάγω, 1); Rev. xi. 7; xii. 4; xvii. 10; xx. 7. foil, by ruVf, Mt. ix. 15; x.xiv. 15; xxv. 31 ; Mk. ii. 20; xiii. 14; Lk. v. 35; x.\i. 20; Jn. viii. 28; 1 Co. xiii. 10 [G L Τ Tr WH om. τότ(] ; xv. 28, 54 ; Col. iii. 4. c. Ace. to the usage of later authors, a usage, however, not altogether unknown to the more elegant writers (W. 309 (289 sq.) ; B. 222 (192) sq. ; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 124 sq. ; WH. App. p. 171 ; for exx. additional to these given by W. and B. u. s. see Snph. Lex. s. V. ; cf. Jebh in Vincent and Dickson's Hdbk. to Mod. Grk., App. § 78]), with the indicative; o. future : when, [Mt v. 1 1 Tdf ] ; Lk. xiii. 28 Τ Tr txt. WH mrg. ; [1 Tim. v. 11 L mrg.] ; as οββη as. Rev. iv. 9 (cf. Bleek ad loc). β. present: Mk. .\i. 25 LTTr Wll; xiii. 7 Trtxt. ; [Lk. xi. 2 Tr mrg.]. γ. very rarely indeed, with the imperfect: as ofien as, ^lohen- soever'], όταν ΐθιώρουν, Mk. iii. II (Gen. xxxviii. 9; Ex. xvii. 11 ; 1 S. xvii. 34 ; see άν, II. 1). S. As in Byz- antine auth. i. (J. oTf, when, with the indie, aorist: οτα» ηνοίξιν. Rev. viii. 1 L Τ Tr WII ; [add όταν όψί ί'γί'κίτο, Mk. xi. 19 TTrt.\t.WII, cf. B. 223 (193); but ah take this of customary action, whetiever evening came (i. e. ei-erij evening, R. V.)]. 5ταν does not occur in the Epp. of Peter and .lude. ore, a particle of time, [fr. Horn, down], when ; 1. with the Indicative [W. 296 (27>;) scj,] ; indie, pres- ent (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad Vig. p. 913 sij.), while : Jn. ix. 4 ; Ileb. ix. 17; w. an his- torical pres. Mk. xi. 1. w. the imperfect (of a thing done on occasion or customary): Mk. xiv. 12; xv. 41 ; Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. x.\i. 18; Acts xii. 6; x.xii. 20; Ro. vi. 20 ; vii. 5 ; 1 Co. xiii. 1 1 ; Gal. iv. 3 ; Col. iii. 7 ; 1 Th. iii. 4; 2 Th. iii. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 20. w. an indie, aorist, Lat. quom w. plupf. (W. § 40, 5 ; [B. § 137, 6]): Mt. ix. 25; xiii. 2ΰ, 48; xvii. 25 [II G]; xxi. 34; Mk. i. 32; iv. 10; viii. 19; XV. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [3 L Τ WH], 13; xxii. 14; xxiii. 33; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where Tdf. as], etc. ; Acts i. 13 ; viii. 12, 39 ; xi. 2 ; xxi. 5, 35 ; xxvii. 39 ; xxviii. 16 ; Ro. xiii. 11 (" than when we gave in our allegiance to Christ;" Lat. quom Christo nomen dedissemus, [R. V. than ivhen we first believed^) ; Gal. i. 15; ii. 11,12, 14; iv. 4; Phil iv. 15; Heb. vii. 10; Rev. i. 17; vi. 3, 5, 7, 9, 12 ; viii. 1, etc. ; so also Mt. xii. 3 ; Mk. ii. 25 ; (Jn. xii. 41 R Tr mrg. ότί fiStv, when it had presented itself to his sight [but best texts δτι : because he saw etc.]). iyivfTo, otc mXtafv, a common phrase in Mt., viz. vii. 28 ; xi. 1; xiii. 53; xix. 1 ; xxvi. 1. otc . . . Tore, Mt. xxi. 1 ; Jn. xii. 16. w. the indie, perfect, since [R. V. now that I am become], 1 Co. xiii. 11 ; w. the indie, future: Lk. xvii. 22; Jn. iv. 21, 23; v. 25; .xvi. 25; Ro. ii. 16 [R G Τ Tr txt. WII mrg.] (Avhere Lchm. ή [ah al.]) ; 2 Tim. iv. 3. 2. with the aor. Subjunctive: ΐωί αν ηξη, oTe fiVrjre (where όταν might have been expected), until the time have come, when ye have said, Lk. xiii. 35 [RG (cf. Trbr.)]; cf. Matthiae ii. p. 1196 sq. ; Bornemann, Scholia in Lucae evang. p. 92; W. 298 (279); [Bnhdy. p. 400 ; cf. B. 231 sq.^(199)l• 0, re, η, Tf , to, Tf, see Te 2 a. oTi [properly neut. of όστις], a conjunction [fr. Horn. down], (Lat. quod [cf. W. § 53, 8 b. ; B. § 139, 51 ; § 149, 3]), marking 1. the substance or contents (of a statement), lh [T Tr W'H om. L br. cl.] ; Acts i. 5, and often ; — or is added by the narrator, to give the reason for his own opinion: ^It. ii. IS; ix. 36 ; Mk. iii. 30; vi. 34 ; .In. ii. 25; Acts i. 17; — or, in general, by a teacher, and often in such a way that it relates to his entire statement or views: .Mt. v. 45; I .In. iv. 18; 2 .In. 7; Kev. iii. 10. b. ότι makes reference to some word or words that precede or immediately follow it [cf. W. § 23, 5; § 53, 8 b. ; U. §127,6]; as, διά τοίτο, Jn. viii. 47; x. 17; xii. 3!); 1 .In. iii. 1, etc. δίάτί; Ro.ix.32; 2Co.xi.ll. χάριν τίνοί ; 1 Jn. iii. 12. οΖτωί, Rev. iii. 16. iv τούτω, 1 .In. iii. 20. ότι in the protasis, Jn. i. 50 (51) ; xx. 29. It is followed by bia toCto, Jn. χ v. 19. oi\ oTt . . . αλλ' ότι, not be- causi' . . . but because, Jn. vi. 2(); xii. 6. III. On the combination ώί on see i>s, I. 3. [ότι interrog., i. e. o, τ» or δ «, see ocrns, 4 (and ad init.).] ότου, see oortt ad init. oi, see os, ^, o, Π. 11. οΰ before a consonant, ουκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and οϋχ before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. ού;^ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LTWIlmrg. have adopted oi\ thni. Acts ii. 7 ; L Γ υυχ Ίοι/δαϊκώί, Gal. ii. 14 (see WII. Inlrod. § 409) ; L οΐχ ολίγο?, Acts xix. 23; οίχ ηγάπησαν, Rev. .\ii. 11 ; and contrariwise ουκ before an aspirate, as ουκ (i, by no means, Mt. V. 37 ; ήτω ΰμων το o5 οΰ, let your denial be truthful, .las. V. 12; on 2 Co. i. 17-19, see vai 2. It is joined to other words, — to a finite verb, simply to deny that what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of the sentence : Mt. i. 25 (ονκ ΐγΙνωσκ€ν αυτήν) ; Mk. iii. Ϊ5; Lk. vi. 43; Jn. x. 28; Acts vii. 5; Ro. i. 16, and times without number. It has the same force when conjoined to participles: as ούκ aepa δί'ρων, 1 Co. ix. 26 ; oiiK ovTos αΰτω τίκνου, at the time when he had no child. Acts vii. 5 (^μή Svtos would be, although he had no child) ; add, Ro. viii. 20 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; 2 Co. iv. 8; GaL iv.8,27; Col.ii. 19; PhiLiii.3; IIeb.xi.85; lPet.i.8; ό . . • ουκ tiv ποιμην, Jn. χ. 12 (where ace. to class, usage μή must have been emi)luyed, because such a jicr.son is imagined as is not a shejilierd ; [cf. B. 351 (301) and μή, I. 5 b.]). in relative sentences: «σικ . . . τικίτ οι οΰ marevovaiv, Jn. vi. Gi; add, Mt. x. 38; xii. 2; Lk. vi. 2; Ro. XV. 21 ; Gal. iii. 10, etc. ; οίκ ΐστιν or and oi&iv «στι» 3 foil, by a fut. : Mt. x. 26 ; Lk. viii. 17; xii. 2 ; Wr ίστιν, OS ov foil, by a pres. indie. : Acts xix. 35 ; 1 leb. xii. 7 ; cf. W. 4S1 (44.S); B. 355 (.'iOS) ; in statements introduced by oTi after verbs of understanding, perceiving, saying, etc. : .In. v. 42 ; viii. 55, etc. ; on ουκ (where οϋκ is pleo- nastic) after apvf'iaeai, 1 Jn. ii. 22 ; cf. B. § 14H, 13 ; [W. §65,2/3.]; — loan infiii., where μή might have been ex- pected: Tiff «n xpda Κίΐτά την τάζιν Μΐλχκτ. fTfpov oat' Ιστασθαι Upia κα\ οΰ κατά Tt'jV τύξιν Άαρων "Κί-^ισθαι, Ileb. vii. 11 (where the dilli, to prerent, hinder. Acts xvi. 7 ; xix. 30, (cf., on this i)lirase, Hcrin. ad Vig. ]). 887 si\.) ; owe ?χω, to be piior, Mt. xiii. 1 2 ; Mk. iv. 25, (see ϊχω, I. 2 a. J). 266"') ; τα ουκ ανήκοντα [or α ουκ άνηκΐν, L 'Γ Tr WH], uiisri'inti/, dishonorable, Eph. v. 4 (sec μή, I. 5 d. fin. p. 410•; [cf. B. § 148, 7 a. ; W. 486 (452)]); often so as to form c litotes; as, οϋκ ayvo(a>, to know well, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10) ; οϋκ ολίγο», not a few, i. e. very many, Acte xvii. 4, 12; xix. 23 s(p ; xv. 2; xiv. 28 ; xxvii. 20 ; oi π-ολλαΐ ήμίραι, a few days, Lk. χ v. 13 ; Jn. ii. 12 ; Acts L 5 ; οϋ πολύ, Acts .\xvii. 14 ; οϋ μιτρίωί. Acts xx. 12 ; οΰ« ίίσημο!, not undistinguished [A. V. no mean etc.], Acts .\xi. 39 ; οίκ (Κ μ(τρου, Jn. iii. 34. it serves to limit the term to which it is joined : οϋ πάντω!, not utior/clher, not entirelfi (see ttw'tws. c. /S ) ; οϋ πάί, not any and erery one, Mt. vii. 21 ; plur. οϋ πάντα, not all, Mt. xix. 11 ; Ro. ix. 6; X. 16; οΰ ηασα σαρξ, not every kind of flesh, 1 Co. χ v. 39 ; οΰ iraiTt τω λπώ, not to all the people. Acts x. 41 ; on the other hand, when οΰ is joined to the verb, ττάι . . . οι must be rendered nc one, no, (as in Hebrew, now Sd . . . nS, now ii^ . . .h2. cf. Winer, Lex. Hebr. et Chald. p. 513 scp) : Lk. 1.37; Eph. v. 5 ; 1 Jn. ii. 21; Rev. xxii. 3 ; πάσα σαρξ . . . οΰ w. a verb, no Jlesh, no mortal, Mt. xxiv. '^ ; Mk. xiii. 20; Ro. iii. 20 ; GaL iL 16; ef. W. §26, 1; [B. 121 (106)]. Joined to a noun it denies and annuls the idea of the noun ; as, τ6ν oi λαό», a people that is not a people (Germ, ein Nichtrolk, a no-people), Ro. ix. 25, cf. 1 Pet. ii. 10; ίπ' οϋκ idvei. 461 ovBe [R. V. with that which is no nation'], Ro. x. 19 (so Dj; nS; Ss 50, a no-god, Deut. xxxii. 21 ; yj; sS, η nnl-wood, Is. X. 15; ουκ apxKpeis, 2 Mace. iv. 13; ή ού δ'άλυσίί, Thuc. 1, 137, 4 ; 17 οϋ π(ριτ(ΐχισί! 3, 9."), 2; ή ουκ (ξουσία 5, 50, 3; δι' άπαροσίναν . . . κουκ anoSf ιξιν, Eur. ΙΙίρροΙ. 196, and other ex.\. in Grk. writ. ; non sutor. Hot. sat. 2, 3, 106; iio7icor/)us,Cic.acad. 1,39 fin.); cf. W. 476 (444); [B. § 148, 9]; ή ουκ η-γαττημίνη, Ro. ix. 2-5; οί οίκ η\€η- fteVot, 1 Pet. ii. 10. 3. followed by another nega- tive, a. it strengthens the negation : ού κρίνω oiSeva, Jn. viii. 1.5; add, Mk. v. 37; 2 Co. .\i. 9 (8); oi οΙκ ην οιδίπ-ω oiSfis κ^ίμ(νο!, Lk. xxiii. .")3 [see ούδί'πω] ; οΰκ ■ ■ • oiSev, nothing at all, Lk. iv. 2 ; Jn. vi. 63 ; xi. 49 ; xii. 19 ; XV. 5 ; οΰ μίΚ(ΐ σοι ntpl oiSfvot, Mt. xxii. 1 6 ; οΰκ . . . οΰκίτι. Acts viii. 39 ; cf. Matthiae § 609, 3 ; Kiihner ii. § .51 6 ; VV. § 55, 9 b.; [B. § 148, 11]. b. as in Latin, it changes a negation into an affirmation (cf. Matthiae § 609, 2; Klolz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 695 sq. ; AV. § 55, 9 a.; B. § 148, 12); οΰ πάρα τοΰτο ουκ ΐστιν «κ τοϋ σώματοί, not on this account is it not of the body, i. e. it belongs to the body, does not cease to be of the body, 1 Co. xii. 15 ; οΰ δυνά- μ(θα a ίϊδομ(ν και ηκούσαμ(ν μη XaXfii/, !ve are unable not to speak [A.V. we cannot but speak]. Acts iv. 20. 4. It is used in disjunctive statements where one thing is denied tiiat another may be established [\V. § 55, 8; cf. B. 356 (306)] : οΰκ . . . αλλά, Lk. viii. 52; xxiv. 6 [WH reject the cl.] ; Jn. i. 33; vii. 10, 12, 16; viii. 49; Acts x. 41; Ro. viii. 20; iCo. xv. 10; 2 Co. iii. .! ; viii. 5 ; Heb. ii. 16, etc. ; see άλλα, II. 1 ; oi';^ Ίνα . . . αλλ* 'να, Jn. iii. 1 7 ; ουχ Ίνα . . . άλλα, Jn. vi. 38 ; οΰ μόνον . . . άλλα και, see άλλα, II. 1 and μόνος. 2 ; ουκ . . . ft μή, see «, III. 8 c. ρ. 171'; οΰ μη w. subjunc. aor. foil, by (I μη, Rev. xxi. 27 [see cl as above, β.]. 5. It is joined to other particles: οΰ μη, not at all, by no means, .'surely not, in no wise, see μή, IV. ; οΰ μηκίτι w. aor. sub- junc. Mt. xxi. 19 LTTrmrg. WH. μη οϋ, ivliere μή is interrog. (Lat. nuyn) and οΰ negative [cf. B. 248 (214), 354(304); W.5n(476)]: Ro.x.l8s(|.; lCo.ix.4sq.; xi. 22. tl oi, see ft, III. 11 p. 172\ οΰ γαρ (see γάρ, I. p. ΙΟΘ'), Acts xvi. 37. 6. As in Ilebr. sS w. impf., 80 in bibl. Grk. οΰ w. 2 pers. fut. is used in emphatic prohibition (in prof. auth. it is milder; cf. W. §43, 5 c.; also 501 sq. (467); [B. §139, 64]; Fritzsche on Mt. p. 259 sq. [cf. p. 252 sq.] tliinks otherwise, but not cor- rectly) : Mt. vi. 5 ; and besides in the moral precepts of the O. T., Mt. iv. 7 ; xix. 18 ; Lk. iv. 12 ; Acts xxiii. 5; Ro. vii. 7 ; xiii. 9. 7. oi is used interrogar tively — when an affirmative answer is expected (Lat. nonne; [\V. § 57, 3 a. ; B. 247 (213)]) : Mt. vi. 26, 30; xvii. 24; Mk. iv. 21 ; xii. 24; Lk. xi. 40; Jn. iv. 35; vii. 25 : Acts ix. 21 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; 1 Co. ix. 1, 6 sq. 1 2 ; Jas. ii. 4. and often ; οΰκ οΊδατ( κτλ. ; and tlie like, see €Ϊδω, II. 1 p. 174»; άλλ' οΰ, Heb. iii. 16 (see άλλα, I. 10 p. 28») ; οΰκ άποκρίνη oiSiv; answerest thou nothing at all? Mk. xiv. 60; XV. 4 ; — where an exclamation of reproach or wonder, which denies directly, may take the place of a negative question: Mk. iv. 13, 38; Lk. xvii. 18; Acts xiii. 10 [cf. B. § 139, 65]; xxi. 38 (on which see Spa, 1); cf. W. u. s. ; oi μή πιω σΰτό; shall I not drink it? Jn. .xviii. 11 ; cf. W. p. 512 (477) ; [cf. B. § 139, 2]. οΰά, Tdf. οΰ5 [see Proleg. p. 101 ; cf. Chandler § 892], ah.' ha.' an interjection of wonder and amazement: Epict. diss. 3, 22, 34 ; 3, 23, 24 ; Dio Cass. 63, 20 ; called out by the overthrow of a boastful adversary, Mk. xv. 29.* oial, an interjection of grief or of denunciation ; Sept. chiefly for "in and 'is ; alas .' icoe .' with a dat of pers. added, Mt. xi. 21; xviii. 7; xxiii. 13-16, 23, 2.5, 27, 29; .xxiv. 19 ; xxvi. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 1 7 ; xiv. 21 ; Lk. vi. 24-26 ; X. 13 ; xi. 42-44, 46 sq. 52; xxi. 23 ; xxii. 22; Jude 11 ; Rev. xii. 12 R G L ed. min. [see below], (Num. xxi. 29 ; Is. iii. 9, and often in Sept.) ; thrice repeated, and folL by a dat., Rev. viii. 13 R G L WH mrg. [see below] ; the dat. is omitted in Lk. xvii. 1 ; twice repeated and foil, by a nom. in ])lace of a voc. Rev. xviii. 10, 16, 19, (Is. i. 24; V. 8-22; Ilab. ii. 6, 12, etc.) ; e.xceptionally, with an ace. of the pers., in Rev. viii. 13 Τ Tr WH txt., and xii. 12 L Τ Tr WH; this accus., I think, must be regarded eitlier as an ace. of e.xclamation (cf. Matthiae § 410), or as an imitation of the constr. of the ace. after verbs of injuring, (B. § 131, 14 judges otherwise); with the ad- dition of ΰπό and a gen. of the evil the infliction of which is deplored [cf. B. 322 (277) ; W. 37: (348)], Mt. xviii. 7; also of €K, Rev. viii. 13. Asasubstantive, 17 οιΐαί (the writer seems to have been led to use the fem. by the similarity of ή θλίψα or ή ταλαιπωρία; cf. W. 179 (169)) woe, calamity: Rev. ix. 12; xi. 14; δΰο οΰαι, Rev. ix. 12, (ουαΐ €π\ ούαί ίσται, Ezek. vii. 26 ; οΰαι ημάς Χήψζται, Evang. Nicod. c. 21 [Pars ii. v. 1 (ed. Tdf.)]) ; so also in the phrase ούαί μοί eVriK icoe is unto me, i. e. divine penalty threatens me, 1 Co. ix. 16, cf. IIos. ix. 12; [Jer. vi. 4]; Epict. diss. 3, 19, 1, (frequent in eccles. writ.).* οϋδαμώβ (fr. ουδαμός, not even one ; and this fr. ούϋ and άμός [allied perh. w. άμα; cf. Vanicck p. 972; Curtius § 600]), adv., fr. Hdt. [and Aeschyl.] down, by no means, in no irise : Mt. ii. C.* ovSe, [fr. Horn, down], a neg. disjunctive conjunction, compounded of ού and δ€, and therefore prop. i. q. but not ; generally, howex er, its oppositive force being lost, it serves to continue a negation. [On the elision of e when the next word begins with a vowel (observed by Tdf. in eight instances, neglected in fifty-eight), see Tilf. Proleg. p. 96 ; cf. WH. App. p. 146 ; W. § 5, 1 a. ; B. p. 10 sq.] It signifies 1. and not, continuing a nega- tion, yet differently from oCre ; for the latter connects parts or members of the same thing, since tc is adjunc- tive like the Lat. r/ue ; but oiSe places side by side things that are equal and mutually exclude each other [(?). There appears to be some mistake here in what is said about 'mutual exclusion' (cf. W. § 55, 6) : οϋδί, like δ(, always makes reference to something preceding; oCre to what follows also; the connection of clauses nega- tived by ouTf is close and internal, so that they are mu- tually complementary and combine into a unity, whereas clauses negatived by oiSe follow one another much more loosely, often almost by accident as it were ; see W. 1. c, and esp. the quotations there given from Benfey and ov^ek 462 ovKen Klotz.] It differs from μη&ί as ov does from μή [q. v. ad init.] ; after ov, where each has its own verb : Mt. v. 15 ; vi. 28 ; Mk. iv. -22 ; Lk. vi. 44 ; Acts ii. 27 ; ix. 9 ; xvu. 24 6(1. ; Gal. i. 1 7 ; iv. 14 ; ουκ ο'δα οΟδε ίπϊσταμαι, Mk. xiv. G8 KG Lmrg. [al. oCre . . . ovrf] (Cic. pro Kosc. Am. 43 "non novi ne(iue scio") ; cf. W. 4^0 (450) c; [B. 3U7 (315) note] ; ou . . . οϋδί ■ . ■ ούδί, nut . . . nor . . . nor, Mt. vi. 2G ; οΰδ£Ϊ£ . . . oOfie . . . oiBe . . . oiSi, Kev. v. 3 [R G; cf. B. 367 (315) ; W. 491 (457)]; οΰ . . . ούΒί foil, by a ' fut. . . . ούδΐ μή foil, by subjunc. aor. . . . ov8i, Kev. vii. IB. ow . . . οΰδί, the same verb being common to both: Mt.x. 24 ; XXV. 13 ; Lk. vi. 43 ; viii. 17 [cf. AV.300 (281) ; B. 355 (305) cf. § 139, 7] ; Jn. vi. 24 ; xiii. 16 ; Acts viii. 21 ; xvi. 21 ; xxiv. 18 ; Ro. ii. 28; ix. IC ; Gal. i. 1 ; iii. 28 ; 1 Th. V. 5; 1 Tim. ii. 12; Rev. xxi. 23. preceded by οΰπω, )ilk. viii. 17; — by oCSeis, Mt. ix. 17; — by Ίνα μή, which is foil, by ovSi . . . οΰδ(, where μη&( . . . μη&ί might have been expected (cf. B. § 148, 8 ; [W. 474 (442)]) : Rev. ix. 4. ουδέ γάρ, for neither, Jn. viii. 42 ; Ro. viii. 7. 2. afco noi [A. V. generally neii/ier] : Mt. vi. 15; xxi. 27 ; XXV. 45 ; Mk. xi. 26 [R L]; Lk. xvi. 31 ; Jn. xv. 4; Ro.iv. 15 ; xi. 21 ; 1 Co. xv. 13, 16 ; Gal. i. 12 (οΰδί yap (γώ [cL B. 367 (315) note ; 492 (458)]) ; Ileb. viii. 4, etc. ; αλλ' ούδί, Lk. xxiii. 15; η οΰδί, in a question, or doth not even etc. ? 1 Co. xi. 14 Rec. ; the simple oiihe, nuni ne quiilem (have ye not even etc.) in a question where a negative answer is assumed (see ou, 7) : Mk. xii. 10 ; Lk. vi. 3 ; xxiii. 40 ; and G L Τ Tr WII in 1 Co. xi. 14. 3. not even [B. 369 (316)]: Mt. vi. 29; viii. 10 ; Mk. vi. 31 ; Lk. vii. 9 ; xii. 27; Jn. xxi. 25 [Tdf. om. the vs.] ; 1 Co. v. 1 ; xiv. 21 ; ουδέ ftr [W. 173 (1G3) ; B. § 127, 32], Acts iv. 32 ; Ro. iii. 10 ; 1 Co. vi. 5 [L Τ Tr WH ούδ«ν] ; οϋδε ίΐ-, Jn. i. 3 ; αλλ' οίδ/, Acts xix. 2 ; 1 Co. iii. 2 (Rec. αλλ' oiVf) ; iv. 3 ; Gal. ii. 3. in a double negative for the sake of emphasis, ουκ . . . oiSf [B. 369 (316); W. 500 (465)]: Mt. xxvii. 14; Lk. xviii. 13; Acts vii. 5. ov8e($, oi8epia (the fern, only in these pass. : Mk. vi. 5 ; Lk. iv. 26 ; Jn. xvi. 29 ; xviii. 38 ; xix. 4 ; Acts x.xv. 18 ; xxvii. 22 ; Phil. iv. 15 ; 1 Jn. i. 5, and Rec. in Jas. iii. 12), oibfv (and, ace. to a pronunciation not infreq. fr. Aristot. and Theophr. down, oideU, οΐθίν : 1 Co. xiii. 2 R" L Τ Tr WII ; Acts xix. 27 L Τ Tr WH ; 2 Co. xi. 8 (9)LTTrWII; Lk. xxii. 35 TTrWH; xxiii. 14TTr WH ; Acts XV. 9 Τ Tr AVH txt, ; Acts xxvi. 26 Τ WH Tr br. ; 1 Co. xiii. 3 Tdf.; see μη^ιί: init. and Gbttling on .\ristot. pol. p. 278 ; [Meisterhans, Grammatik d. At• tisch. Inschriften, § 20, 5 ; see L. and S. a. v. oiedt; cf. Lob. Pathul. Elem. ii. 344] ; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. § 70 Anm. ''), (fr. ούδί and ets), [fr. Hom. down], anil not one, no one, none, no ; it differs from μι/δεί? as ov does from μή [q. V. ad init.]; 1. with nouns; masc, Lk. iv. 24; xvi. 13; 1 Co. viii. 4; oiSeis άλλος, Jn. xv. 24; ουδεμία in the passages given above ; neut., Lk. xxiii. 4 ; Jn. x. 41 ; Acts xvii. 21 ; xxiii. 9 ; xxviii. 5 ; Ro. viii. 1 ; xiv. 14 ; Gal. V. 10, etc. 2. absolutely : οΰδίίϊ, Mt. vi. 24; ix. 16 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; v. 4 ; vii. 24 ; Lk. i. 61 ; v. 89 [WH in br.] ; vii. 28; Jn. i. 18; iv. 27; Acts xviii. 10; xxv. 11 ; Ro. xiv. 7, and very often, with a partitive gen. : Lk. iv. 26 ; xiv. 24 ; Jn. xiii. 28 ; Acts v. 13 ; 1 Co. i. 14 ; ii. 8; lTim.vi.16. ούδίϊί ίί μή, Mt. xix. 1 7 Rec. ; xvii. 8; Mk. X. 18 ; Lk. xviii. 19 ; Jn. iii. 13 ; 1 Co. xii. 3 ; Rev. xix. 12, etc. ; eav μή,^η. iii. 2 ; vi. 44, 65. ούκ . . . oiSf it (sceou, 3 a.), Mt. xxii. 16; Mk.v.37; vi.5;xii.l4; Lk. viii. 43 ; Jn. viii. 15 ; xviii. 9, 31 ; Acts iv. 12; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8) ; ovKe'ri . . . οΰδίίί, Mk. ix. 8; ούδέττω . . . oidfis, I.k. xxiii. 53 [Tdf. oi&f\s . . . ούδέπω ; L Tr WH οίδίΐί οίττω] ; Jn. xix. 41 ; Acts viii. 16 [L Τ Tr WII] ; oMfls . . . ονκίτι, Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11. neut. οϋδίΐ», nothing, Mt. x. 26 [cf. λν. 300 (281); Β. 355 (305)]; xvii. 20; xxvi. 62; xxvii. 12, and very often; with a partitive gen., Lk. ix. 36; xviii. 34; Acts .xviii. 17; 1 Co. ix. 15; xiv. 10 [RG]; oi8(V (l μή, Mt. V. 13; xxi. 19; Mk. ix. 29; xi. 13; μή Tivos; with the answer oCSfvoi, Lk. xxii. 35; υυδίν ίκτάς w. gen.. Acts xxvi. 22 ; oiBei/ μοι διαφίρα. Gal. ii. 6 ; it follows another negative, thereby strengthening the ne- gation (see oiJ, 3 a.) : Mk. xv. 4 sq. ; xvi. 8 ; Lk. iv. 2 ; ix. 36; .x.x. 40; Jn. iii. 27; v. 19, 30; ix. 33; xi. 49; xiv. 30; Acts xxvi. 26 [Lchm. om.] ; 1 Co. viii. 2 [R G] ; ix. 15 [G L Τ Tr AVII] ; οΰδίν ov μή w. aor. subjunc. Lk. x. 19 [R" G WH mrg. ; see μή, IV. 2]. ovSiv, absoL, nofh- iru/ whatever, not at all, in no wise, [cf. B. § 131, 10] : dSi- Kflf (see άδι«'ω, 2 b.). Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12 ; οϋδϊν διαφί/^βίν TLvos, Gal. iv. 1 ; νστΐρΐΐν, 2 Co. xii. 1 1 ; ωφ(\(1ν, Jn. vi. 63 ; 1 Co. xiii. 3. ovbiv ΐστιν, it is nothing, of no importance, etc. [cf. B. § 129, 5] : Mt. xxiii. 16, 18 ; Jn. viii. 54 ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; with a gen., none of these things is true. Acts xxi. 24 ; xxv. 1 1 ; oiMv (Ιμι, I am nothing, of no account : 1 Co. xiii. 2 ; 2 Co. xii. 11, (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s.v. IL 2 ; Meyer on 1 Co. 1. C.]); fif oHiv λογισθήναι (see λογίζομαι, 1 a.). Acts xi.x. 27 ; (Is oidiv γίνιυθαι, to come to nought. Acts v. 36 [W. § 29, 3 a. ; c'c ού&(νί, in no respect, in nothing, Phil. :. 20 (cf. μηδιίϋ, g.)]. ovSe'iroxe. adv., denying absolutely and objectively, (fr. oiSc and ποτ(, prop, not ever), [fr. Hom. down], never Mt. vii. 23; ix. 33 ; xxvi. 33; Mk. ii. 12; [Lk. xv. 29 (bis)]•; .In. vii. 46; Acts x. 14; xi. 8 ; xiv. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 8; Ileb. X. 1, 11. interrogatively, did ye never, etc.: Mt. xxi. 16, 42; Mk. ii. 25." ούΒί'-π-ω, adv., simjily negative, (fr. οΰδί and the enclitic πώ), [fr. Aeschyl. down], tiot yet, not as yet : Jn. vii. 39 (where L Tr WH ού'πω) ; xx. 9. οϋδέττω ούδίΐί, never any one [A. Y. never man yet^, Jn. xix. 41 ; [οΰδέπω . . . ί'ττ' oiSfvl, as yet ... upon none. Acts viii. 16LTTr WH] ; ovK . . . ούδί'πω ούδ^ΐΓ (see οΰ, 3 a.), Lk. xxiii. 53 [L Tr WH ουκ . . . οΰδείί ονπω ; Tdf. ουκ . . . oidfis οΰδί'πω] ; οΰδί'ττω oCSfV (L Τ Tr WII simply οΰ?τω) not yet (any- thing), 1 Co. viii. 2.* ou6c(s, ονθίν, see oiSels, init. ovKCTi [also ivritten separately by Rec* (generally), Tr (nine times in .Jn.), Tdf. (in Pliilem. 16)], (ουκ, trt), an adv. which denies simply, and thus differs from μηκίτι (q. v.), no longer, no more, no further : Mt. xix. 6; Mk. x. 8: Lk.xv. 19, 21; Jn. iv. 42; vi. 66 ; Acts xx. 25, 38 ; Ro. vi. 9; xiv. 15; 2 Co. v. 16; Gal. iii. 25; iv. 7; Eph. ουκουν 463 ουν ii. 19 ; Philen. 16 ; Heb. χ. 18, 26, etc. ; ουκίη ηΧθον, I came not again [R. V. I forebore to come], 2 Co. i. 23. with anotlier neg. particle in order to strengthen the ne- gation : ot)5e . . . ούκίτι, Mt. xxii. 46 ; οϋκ . . . ούκ€Τΐ, Acts TUi. 39; ouSf'is ■ ■ ■ ούκίτι, Mk. xii. 34; Rev. xviii. 11 ; οιϊκίΓΐ . . . ouSeV, Mk. vii. 12; .w. 5 ; Lk. -xx. 40; οϋκίτι . . . οϋ8(ρα, Mk. ix. 8 ; ou/ttVi οϋ μή, Mk. xiv. 25 ; Lk. x.xii. 16 [U'H om. L Tr br. ούκίτί] ; Rev. xviii. 14 [Tr cm.] ; oi&i . ■ . oUKfTi oi)5ei's, Mk. v. 3 LTWHTrtxt. ούκίτι is used logically [cf. W. §65, 10] ; as, οΰκίτι €γώ ior it cannot now be said ότι ΐγώ etc., Ro. vii. 17, 20 ; ual. ii. 20; add, Ro. xi. 6; Gal. iii. 18. [(Horn., Hes., Hdt., al.)] ovKoiv, (fr. ουκ and oiv), adv., not therefore ; and since a speaker often introduces in this way his own opinion [see Kruger as below], the particle is used afBrmatively, therefore, then, the force of the negative disappearing. Hence the saying of Pilate οΰκοϊιυ βασίλ(ΰ{ fi σΰ must be taken affirmatively : then (since thou speakest of thy βασιλεία) thou art a king! (Germ, also bist du doch ein Koniij .'), Jn. xviii. 37 [cf. B. 249 (214)] ; but it is better to write ονκουν, so that Pilate, arguing from the words of Christ, asks, not without irony, art thou, not a king then f or in any case, thou art a king, art thou not ? cf. W. 512 (477). The difference between οικούν and οϋκουν is differently stated by different writers ; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 792 sqq. ; Kriiger § 69, 51, 1 and 2 ; KUhner § 508, 5 ii. p. 715 sqq., also the 3d excurs. appended to his ed. of Xen. memor. ; \_Baumlein, Partikeln, pp. 191-198].* ού μή, see μή, IV. οΰν a conj. indicating that something follows from an- other necessarily ; [al. regard the primary force of the particle as confirmatory or continuative, rather than illative ; cf. Passow, or L. and S. s. v. ; Kiihner § 508, 1 ii. p. 707 sqq. ; Baumlein p. 1 73 sqq. ; Kruger § 69, 52 ; Don- aldson p. 571 ; Rost in a program " Ueber Ableitung " u. s. w. p. 2 ; Klotz p. 717 ; Hartung ii. 4]. Hence it is used in drawing a conclusion and in connecting sen- tences together logically, then, therefore, acconlinglt/, consequently, these things being so, [(Klotz, Rost,al., have ■wished to derive the word fr. the neut. ptcp. ov (cf. όντως) ; but see Baumlein or Kiihner u. s.) ; cf. W. § 53, 8] : Mt. iii. 10 ; x. 32 (since persecutions are not to be dreaded, and consequently furnish no excuse for denyinn- me [cf. W. 455 (424)]) ; Mt. xviii. 4 ; Lk. iii. 9 ; xvi." 2?! Jn. viii. 38 (jcat νμβις ουν, and ye accordingly, i. e. * since, as is plain from my case, sons follow the example of their fatliers'; Jesus says this in sorrowful irony [W. 455 (424)]) ; Acts i. 21 (since the office of the traitor Judas must be conferred on another) ; Ro. v. 9 ; vi. 4 ; xiii. 10; 1 Co. iv. 16 (since I hold a father's place among you) ; 2 Co. v. 20 ; Jas. iv. 1 7, and many other exx. As respects details, notice that it stands a. in exhortations (to show what ought now to be done by reason of what has been said), i. q. wherefore, [our transitional there- fore]: Mt. iii. 8; v. 48; ix. 38; Lk. xi. 35; x.xi. 14, 36 [R G L mrg. Tr mrg.] ; Acts iii. 19; xiii. 40; Ro. vi. 12; xiv. 13 ; 1 Co. xvi. 11 ; 2 Co. viii. 24 ; Eph. v. 1 ; vi. 14; Phil. ii. 29 ; Col. ii. 16 ; 2 Tim. i. 8 ; Heb. iv. 1, 11 ; x. 35 ; Jas. iv. 7 ; v. 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 7 ; v. 6 ; Rev. i. 19 [G L Τ Tr AVH] ; iii. 3, 19, and often ; νϋν ουν, now therefore, Acts xvi. 36. b. in questions, then, therefore, (Lat. igitur) ; a. when the question is, what follows or seems to follow from what has been said : Mt. .xxii. 28; .xxvii. 22 [W. 455 (424)]; Mk. .\v. 12; Lk. iii. 10; x.x. 15, 33; Jn. viii. 5; τί ουν ίροϋμ(υ; Ro. vi. 1 ; vii. 7; i.x. 14 ; Ti ουν φημί; 1 Co. χ. 19 ; τί ουν; what then f i. e. how then does the matter stand? [cf. W. § 64, 2 a.], Jn. i. 21 [here \VH mrg. punct. τί ουν σϋ ;] Ro. iii. 9 ; vi. 1 5 ; xi. 7 ; also τί olu iuTiv ; \_ichat is it then ?] Acts .xxi. 22; 1 Co. xiv. 15, 26. β. when it is asked, whether this or that follows from what has just been said : Mt. .xiii. 28 ; Lk. xxii. 70 ; Jn. xviii. 39; Ro. iii. 31 ; Gal. iii. 21. γ. when it is asked, how something which is true or regarded as true, or what some one does, can be rec- onciled with what has been previously said or done: Mt. xii. 26; xiii. 27; xvii. 10 (where the thought is, -thou commandest us to tell no one about this vision we have had of Elijah; what relation then to this vision has the doctrine of the scribes concerning the coming of Elijah? Is not this doctrine confirmed by the vision?') ; Mt. xLx. 7 ; xxvi. 54 ; Lk. xx. 1 7 ; Jn. iv. 1 1 [Tdf. om. ουν] ; Acts XV. 10 (νϋν ουν, norc therefore, i. e. at this time, therefore, when God makes known his will so plainly) ; Acts xix. 3 ; Ro. iv. 1 (where the meaning is, ' If everything de- pends on foith, what shall we say that Abraham gained by outward things, i. e. by works ? ' [but note the crit. texts]); 1 Co. vi. 15; Gal. iii. 5. 8. in general, it serves simply to subjoin questions suggested by what has just been said : Ro. iii. 27 ; iv. 9 sq. ; vi. 21 ; xi. 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 5, etc. c. in epanalepsis, i. e. it serves to resume a thought or narrative interrupted by inter- vening matter (Matthiae ii. p. 1497 ; [W. 444 (414)]), hke Lat. igitur, inquam, our as was said, say I, to pro- ceed, etc. : Mk. iii. 31 [R G] (cf. 21) ; Lk. iii. 7 (cf. 3) ; Jn. iv. 45 (cf. 43) ; vi. 24 (cf. 22) ; 1 Co. viii. 4 ; xi. 20 (cf. 18) ; add, ilk. xvi. 19 [Tr mrg. br. ουν] ; Acts viii. 25 ; xii. 5 ; xiii. 4 ; xv. 3, 30 ; xxiii. 31 ; xxv. 1 ; xx%'iii. 5. It is used also when one passes at length to a subject about which he had previously intimated an intention to speak : Acts xxvi. 4, 9. d. it serves to gather up summarily what has already been said, or even what cannot be narrated at length: Mt. i. 17; vii. 24 (where no reference is made to what has just before been said [?], but all the moral precepts of the Serm. on the Mount are summed up in a single rule common to all) ; Lk. iii. 18 ; Jn. XX. 30; Acts xxvi. 22. e. it serves to adapt examples and comparisons to the case in hand : Jn. iii. 29; xvi. 22; — or to add examples to illustrate the sub- ject under consideration: Ro. xii. 20 Rec. f. In historical discourse it serves to make the transition from one thing to another, and to connect the several parts and portions of the narrative, since the new occur- rences spring from or are occasioned by what precedes [cf. W. § 60, 3] : Lk. vi. 9 R G ; numberless times so in John, as i. 22 [Lchm. om.] ; ii. 18 ; iv. 9 [Tdf. om.] ; vi. 60, 6 7 ; vii. 6 [G Τ om.], 25. 2s, 33, 35, 40 ; viii. 13, 19, 22, 25, 4(]4 ovpavot 31,57; ix. 7 8q. 10, 16; xi. 12, 16, 21, 32, 36; xii. 1-4; xiii. 12; xvi. 17, 22; xviii. 7,11 sq. 16, 27-29; xix. 20-24, 32, 38, 40 ; xxi. 5-7, etc. g. witli other conjunctions : όρα ουν, so then, Lat. hinc igitur, in Paul ; see Spa, 5. ei oiv, if then (where wliat has just been said and proved is carried over to [irove something else), see el, III. 12 ; [« μίν olv, see μίν, II. 4 J), ays'•], (ire oiv . . . (tre, ir/ielber then . . . or: 1 Co. x. 31; xv. 11. tVti oiv, since then: Heb. ii. 14 ; iv. 6 ; for which also a participle is put with oiv, as Acts ii. 30 ; xv. 2 [T Tr WH δί] ; xvii. 29 ; xix. 36 ; xxv. 17; xxvi. 22; Ko. v. 1 ; xv. 28; 2 Co. iii. 12; v. 11 ; vii. 1 ; Heb. iv. 14 ; x. 10 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 ; 2 Pet. iii. 11 [WH Tr mrg. oZriat]. iav oiv, if then ever, in case then, or rather, Ihcrefiirc if, tlmnftirn in case, (for in this formula, oiv, al- though placed in the protasis, yet belongs more to the apodosis, since it shows what will necessarily follow from what precedes if the condition introduced l)y tav shall ever take place) : Mt. v. 23 [cf. W. 455 (424)] ; vi. 22 [here Tdf. om. ουκ] ; xxiv. 26 ; Lk. iv. 7 ; Jn. vi. 62 ; viii. 36 ; Ro. ii. 26 ; 1 Co. xiv. 1 1, 23 ; 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; tav oiv μη. Rev. iii. 3 ; so also όταν oiv, when therefore : Mt. vi. 2 ; xxi. 40; xxiv. 15, and RG in Lk. xi. 34. ότί oiv, when (or afer) therefore, so when: Jn. xiii. 12, 31 [(30) Rec.•'"•'' LTTr WH]; xix. 30 ; xxi. 15; i.ti- hence it came to pass that, when etc., Jn. ii. 22 ; xix. 6, H. ά,ς oiv, when (or after) therefore: Jn. iv. 1, 40; xi. 6; xviii. 6; XX. 1 1 ; xxi. 9 ; at oiv, as therefore. Col. ii. 6. ωσπιρ oiv, Mt. xiii. 40. μίν oiv, foil, by &i [cf. B. § 149, 16], Mk. xvi. 1 9 [Tr mrg. br. οίκ] ; Jn. xi.x. 25 ; Acts i. 6 ; viii. 4, 25; 1 Co. ix. 25, etc.; without an adversative conjunc. following, see μίν, II. 4. vvv oiv, see above under a., and b. γ. h. As to position, it is never the first word in the sentence, but generally the second, sometimes the third, [sometimes even the fourth, W. §61,6]; as, [Trept της βρώσεως ουν etc. 1 Co. viii. 4] ; υί μ€ν oiv, Acts ii. 41, and often ; π-υλλά μϊν oiv, Jn. xx. 30. i. John uses this particle in his (jospel far more frequently [(more than two hunch'ed times in all)] than the other N. T. writers; in his Epistles only in tlie foil, passages: 1 Jn. ii. 24 (where G L Τ Tr WH have expunged it) ; iv. 1.") Lchm. ; 3 Jn. 8. [(From Horn, down.)] oviro), (fr. ot! and the enclitic ττώ), adv., [fr. Hom. down], (differing fr. μηπω, as oi does fr. μή [q. v. ad \mt.]),not !/el; a. in a negation : Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 7 ; Jn. ii. 4 ; iii. 24 ; vi. 1 7 L txt. Τ Tr WH ; vii. 6, 8» RL Wlltxt., 8*, 30,39; viii. 20, 57; xi. 30; xx. 17; 1 Co. iii. 2 ; Heb. ii. 8 ; xii. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 2 ; Rev. xvii. 10, 1 2 (where Lchm. ούκ) ; oidelr οΰπω, no one ever yet (see oiSet'r, 2, and cf. oi, 3 a.), Mk. xi. 2 L Τ Tr WH ; Lk. xxiii. 53 L Tr WH ; Acts viii. 16 Rec. b. in ques- tions, nondumne 1 do ye not yet etc. : Mt. xv. 1 7 R G ; xvi. 9; Mk. iv. 40 L Tr WH; viii. 17, [21 L txt. Τ Tr WII].• ovpd, -5s, ή, α tail : Rev. ix. 10, 1 9 ; xii. 4. (From Hom. down; Sept. several times for 3Ji.) * ovpavios, -ov, in class. Grk. generally of three term. [ W. § 1 1, 1 ; B. 25 (23)], (pvpavot), heavenly, i. e. a. (Iwelling in heaven : & πατήρ 6 ovp., Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32 ; xv. 13; besides L Τ Tr WII in v. 48; xviii. 35; xxiii. 9; στρατιά oip. Lk. ii. 13 (where Tr txt. WII mrg. oipa- νοϋ). b. coming from heaven : οπτασία ovp. Acts xxvi. 19. (Hom. in Cer. 55; Pind., Tragg., Arstph., al.)• ονρανόθ<ν, (^oipavos), adv., from heaven: Acts xiv. 17; xxvi. 13. (Horn., lies., Orph., 4 Maoc. iv. 10.) Cf. Lnh. ad Phryn. p. 93 sq.* ovpavos, -ov, a, [fr. a root meaning ' to cover,' ' encom- pass'; cf. Vanicek p. 895 ; Curtius §509], Aeawen ; and, in imitation of the Hebr. 0\ϋψ (i. e. prop, the heights above, the upper regions), ονρανοί,-ων, oi, the heavens [W. §27,3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the art. cf. W. 121 (115)), i. e. 1. the vaulted expanse if the sky icith all the things visible in it ; a. gener- ally : as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10, 12 ; ό oip. «c. ή γή, \Jieaveti and eurthi i. q. the universe, the world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking, inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the name of the universe, Gen. i. 1 ; xiv. 19 ; Tob. vii. 1 7 (IH) ; 1 Mace. ii. 37, etc.) : Mt. v. 18; xi. 25 ; xxiv. 35;Mk. xiii. 31 ; Lk. X. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 33 ; Acts iv. 24 ; xiv. 15; xvii. 24 ; Re V. X. 6 ; xi v. 7 ; xx. 1 1 . The ancients conceived of the expanded sky as an arch or vault the outmost edge of which touched the extreme limits of the earth [see B. D. s. v. Firmament, cf. Heaven] ; hence such expressions as ατΓ* άκρων ονρανων €ως άκρων αντων, Mt. xxiv. 31 ; απ* άκρου yijs (ως άκρου ονρανον, Mk. xiii. 27; νπο τον ουρανόν (D'pon ηΠΓΐ, Eccl. i. 13 ; ii. 3, etc.), under heaven, i. e. on earth. Acts ii. 5 ; iv. 12 ; Col. i. 23 ; «κ της (sc. χώρας, cf. W. 591 (550) ; [B. 82 (71 sq.)]) Ιπ' [here LTTr WH νπΐί τον ουρ.~\ ονρανον (Ις την ίιπ* ουρανόν, out of the one part under the heaven unto the other /inrt under heaven i. e. from one quarter of the earth to the other, Lk. xvii. 24 ; as by this form of expression the greatest longitudinal distance is described, so to one looking up from the earth heaven stands as the extreme measure of altitude ; hence, κολ- λασβαι άχρι τοΰ ουρανού, Kev. xviii. 5 [L Τ Tr WH] (on which see κολλάω) ; νψωθήναι ΐως τοΰ οϋρανοΰ, metaph. of a city that has reached the acme, zenith, of glory and prosperity, Mt. .\i. 23; Lk. x. 15, (κλίος ονρανον ικ(ΐ, Ηυιη. II. Η, 192; Od. 19, 108; προς ηνρανον βίβάζαν τινά, Soph. Ο. C. 382 (381); exx. of similar expressions fr. other writ, are given in Kyple, Observv. i. p. 62) ; καινοί ουρανοί (κα\•γη καική), better heavens which will take the place of the present after the renovation of all things, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1 ; oi mv ουρανοί, the heavens which now are, and which will one day be burnt up, 2 Pet. iii. 7 ; also 6 πρώτος ονρανός. Rev. xxi. 1, cf. Heb. xii. 26. But the heavens are also likened in poetic speech to an expanded curtain or canopy (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 2; Is. xl. 22), and to an imroUed scroll ; hence, ί\ίσσ(ΐν [Τ Tr mrg. αΚΚάσσίΐν] τονς oip. ώς π(ριβό\αιον, Heb. i. 12 (fr. Sept. of Ps. ci. (cii.) 26 cod. Alex.) ; και 6 ovp. άπ(χωρίνθη ώς βιβλίο» (Χισσόμ(νον[οΓ fΊ\ισσ.'],Rev.^■Ί.'li. b. the aerial heavens or sky, the region where the clouds and tempests gather, and where thunder and lightning are produced : 6 oip. πυρράζίΐ, Mt. xvi. 2 [T br. WH reject the pass.] i ουρανο<; 465 OV>i στνγνάζων, ib. 3 [see last ref.] ; verov fbuKf, Jas. v. 18; add Lk. ix. 54 ; xvii. 29 ; Acts ix. 3 xxii. 6 ; Rev. xiii. 1 3 ; xvi. 21 ; XX. 9 ; σημΛον ex or από τοϋ οίμ., Mt. .\vi. 1 ; Mk. viii. 11 ; Lk. xi. Hi ; xxi. 11 ; τίρατα iv τώ olp. Acts ii. 19 ; κΚ(ΐ(ΐν rov οΐρανάν, to keep the rain in the sky, hin- di;r it from falling; on the earth, Lk. iv. 25 ; Rev. xi. 6, (σννΐχίίν TOW olp. for D'OuH tVi') Deut. xi. 1 7 ; 2 Chr. vi. 2ti ; vii. 13 ; άνίχΐΐν τον οϋρ. Sir. xlviii. 3) ; αί ν(φί\αι τοϋ oip; Mt. xxiv. 30; .\.\vi. 64 ; Jlk. xiv. (J2 ; το πρόσω- πον τοϋ oip., Mt. xvi. 3 [T br. ^VII reject the pass.] ; Lk. xii. SG ; τα Trereiva τ. ovp. (gen. of place), that fly in the air (Gen. i. 26; I's. viii. 9; Bar. iii. 17; Judith xi. 7), Mt. vi. 26 ; viii. 20; xiii. 32 ; Mk. iv. 32 ; Lk. viii. 5; ix. 58; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12. These heavens are opened by being cleft asunder, and from the upper heavens, or abode of heavenly beings, come down upon earth — now the Holy Spirit, Mt. iii. 16 ; Mk. i. 10; Lk. iii. 21 stp; Jn. i. 32; now angels, .In. i. 51 (52); and now in vision ap- pear to human sight some of the things ivitliin the high- est heaven. Acts vii. 55; x. 11, 16 ; through the aerial heavens sound voices, which are uttereτά tivos els δίησιν, to hear sup- plication, 1 Pet. iii. 12; ή γραφή π\ηροϊται iv to'is ωσι ονσια 466 ουτοί Tiroy, while present and hearing, Lk. iv. 21 (Bar. i. S s(j.) ; those unwilling to hear a thing are said συνίχαν [([. V. 2 a.] τά !)τα. Ιο slop their ears, Acts vii. 57 ; ηκοϋσθη τι (Is τά Σ)τά Tivos, something was heard hj•, came to the knowledge of [Λ. V. came lo (he ears oJ"\ one, Acts xi. 22 ; likewise (Ισίρχίσθαι, Jas. v. 4 ; γίικσθαι, to come unto the ears of one, Lk. i. 44 ; aKovfiv els το ois, to hear [A. V. in the ear i. e.] in familiar converse, privately, Mt. x. 27 (fit oSs often so in class. (!rk. ; cf. Passow [L. and S.] s. V. 1) ; alsoTTpof τό oir λαλίΐν, Lk. xii. 3. 2. met- aph. i. q. tite facullij of perce'iviny with the mind, the fac- ulty of underslandintj and k'nowintj : Mt. xiii. IG ; ό (χων (or ίί Τ1Γ ίχ(ΐ) ίτα (or uvs. in Rev.) [sometimes (esp. in Mk. and Lk.) with άκουαν added ; cf. B. § 140, 3] άκουίτω, whoever has the facultv of attending and understanding, let him use it, Mt. xi. 1.5 ; xiii. 9, 43; Mk. iv. 9, 23; vii. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; Lk. viii. 8 ; xiv. 35 (34) ; Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29; iii. 6, 13, 22; .xiii. 9; τοΪ5 ώσΐ βα- pews aKoitiv, to be slow to understand or obey [A. V. their ears are dull, ofhearinr/'], ΛΙΐ. .xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27, (fr. Is. vi. 10) ; ωτα ίχοντίΐ ουκ άκούίτί, Mk. viii. 18; &τα τοϋ μη άκούΕΐι/, [ffir.f that th< >/ shoulil not hear; cf. B. 267 (230)], Ro. xi. 8 ; β(σθ( τ. Xoyous Tourouf (is τα Ζ>τα, [Α. V. let these words sink into your ears i.e.] take them into your memory and hold them there, Lk. ix. 44 ; ane- ρίτμητο! Tols ωσίν (see άπ(pίτμητos}, Acts vii. 51.* ovcrCa, -as, η, (fr. ων, ούσα, 5v, the ptcp. of (ΐμι ), tahat one has, i. e. properly, possessions, estate, [ A.V. subslancej : Lk. XV. 12 sq. (Tob. xiv. 13; lldt. 1, 92; Xen., Plat., Attic oratt., al.) * ovTe, (ov and τΐ), an adjunctive negative conj., [fr. Hom. down], (differing fr. μήτ( as oi) does f r. μή [(). v. ad init.], and fr. oiJSe' as μητ( does fr. μη8(; see μήτ( and οΰδί ), neither ; and not. 1. Examples in which ovre stands singly : a. oi3 . . ■ oCre, Rev. .xii. 8 Rec. (where G L Τ Tr WH oOSc) ; xx. 4 R G (where L Τ Tr AVH ov5() ; ouSflff a^LOS (νρίθη άνο\^αι το βιβΧίου ovre β\(π€ΐν αυτά, Rev. v. 4 ; cf. W.4I)1 (457) ; Β. 3<;7 (315) ; ού . . . οϋ8ί . . . οΰτ€, 1 Th. ii. 3 R G (where L Τ Tr WH more correctly οΰδ/) [W. 493 (459) ; B. 368 (315)]; oOSe . . . oi/Te (so that ovre answers only to the οϋ in oiSe), Gal. i. 12RGTWHtxt.[W.492(45S); B. 366 (314)]. b. οΰτ€ . . . και, like Lat. neque ... et, neither . . . and: Jn. iv. 11 ; 3 Jn. 10, (Eur. Iph. T. 591 ; but the more common Grk. usage was oi . . . τί, cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 714; Passow s. v. B. 2; [L. and S. s. v. Π. 4] ; W. § 55, 7; [B. § 149, 13 c.]). c. By a solecism οϋτ( is put for οΰδί, not . . . even : 1 Co. iii. 2 Rec. (where (ί L Τ Tr WH oiSe') [W. 493 (459) ; B. 367(315); §149, 13 f.]; Mk. V. 3 R G (where L Τ Tr WH have restored ούδί [W. 490 (456) ; B. u. s.]) ; Lk. xii. 26 R G (where L Τ Tr WH oi8( [W. u. s. and 478 (445); B. 347 (298)]) ; aSre μ(τ(νάησαν, Rev. ix. 20 R L Tr (where G AVH txt. oi, Τ ούδί not . . . even ; WH rar<;. ουτ( or oi&( [cf. B. 36 7 (315)]) ; after the question μη δύναται . . . σύκα; follows ουτ€ άλυκον y\vKv ηοιησαι ν8ωρ, Jas. iii. 1 2 G L Τ Tr λΥΙΙ (as though oCt( δύναται . . . σϋκα had previously been in the writer's mind [cf. AV. 493 (459) ; B. u. s.]). 2. used twice or more, neither . . . nor, (Lat. nee . . . nee ; ncfjue . . . neque) : Mt. vi. 20 ; xxii. 30 ; Mk. xii. 25 ; [xiv. 68 L txt. Τ Tr WH] ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ; Jn. iv. 21 ; v. 37 ; viii. 19 ; ix. 3 ; Acts xv. 10; .\ix. 37; xxv. 8; xxviii. 21 ; Ro. viii. 38 sq. (where oUre occurs ten times) ; 1 Co. iii. 7 ; vi. 9 sq. (ούτί eight times [yet Τ WH Tr mrg. the eighth time οϋ]) ; xi. 1 1 ; Gal. v. 6 : vi. 1 5 ; 1 Th. ii. 6 ; Rev. iii. 15 sq. ; ix. 20; xxi. 4 ; oSrf . . . oSrt . . . oid( (Germ, auch nicht, also not), L Tr WH in Lk. xx. 35 scp, and L Τ Tr mrg. WH in Acts xxiv. 12 sq. ; cf. W. 491 (457 sq.) ; B. 368 (315) note. ouTos, αϋτη, τοΰτο, demonstrative pron. [cf. Curtius p. 543], Hebr. nt, ntί, II. 3 p. 1 76'. II. Joined to nouns it is used like an adjective ; a. so that the article stands between the demonstrative and the noun, oCtos o, αΰτη ή, τοϋτο τό, [cf, W. § 23 fin. ; Β. § 127, 29] : Mt. xii. 32 ; xvi, 18 ; xvii. 21 [T WU om. Tr br. the vs.] ; xx. 12 ; xxvi. 29 ; Mk. ix. 29 ; Lk. vii. 44 ; x. 36 ; xiv. 30 ; xv. 24 ; Jn. iv. 15 ; vii. 46 [L WH om. Tr br. the cl.] ; viii. 20 ; x. 6 ; xi. 47 ; xii. 5 ; Acts i. 1 1 ; Ro. xi. 24; iTim.i. 18; Heb. vii. 1 ; viii. 10; [Ijn. iv. 21]; Rev. xix. 9 ; xx. 14 ; xxi. 5 ; xxii. 6, etc. ; τοΰτο το παιδίον, such a little child as ye see here, Lk. ix. 48 ; cf. Borne- mann ad loc, [who takes τοΰτο thus as representing the class, 'this and the like;' but cf. ^leyer (ed. TFeiss) ad loc], b. so that the noun stands between the arti- cle and the demonstrative [cf. W. 548 (510)] ; as, οί λι'^οι oJtoi, the stones which ye see lying near, Mt. iii. 9; iv. 3 ; add, Mt. v. 19 ; vii. 24 [L Tr WH br. toutoue], 26, 28 ; ix. 26 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. αύτι> ] ; χ. 23, etc. ; Mk. xii. 1 6 ; xiii, 30; Lk. xi. 31 ; xxiii. 47; Jn. iv. 13, 21; vii. 49; .xi. 9; xviii. 29 ; Acts vi. 13 ; .xix. 26 ; Ro. xv. 28 ; 1 Co. i. 20 ; ii, 6 ; ,xi. 26 ; 2 Co. iv. 1, 7 ; viii. 6 ; xi. 10 ; xii. 13 ; Eph. iii. 8; v. 32 ; 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; Rev. ii. 24, and very often — (which constr. is far more freq. with Paul than the other [see W. u. s.]) ; it is added to a noun which has another adjective, η χημα ή ΤΓτωχη αΰτη, Lk. xxi. 3 ; ηάντα τα ρήματα ταϋτα, Lk, ii. 19, 51 [(Τ WH L mrg. om. Ltxt. Tr mrg. br. ταϋτα) ; άπο t^s γίΐ/ίάί ttjs σκοΧιάς ταύτης. Acts ii. 40]. c. Passages in which the reading varies between ovtos 6 and ό . . . οίτο£ : viz. ovtos 6, Mk. xiv. 30 L txt, Τ Tr WH ; .In. iv. 20 R L mrg. ; Jn. vi. 60 R G; Jn. vii. 36 R G ; Jn. ix. 24 L WH Tr mrg. ; Jn. xxi. 23 L Τ Tr WH. ό . . . ouTos, Mk. xiv. 30 R G L mrg. ; Jn. iv. 20 G Ltxt. TTr WH ; Jn. vi, 60 L TTrWH; Jn. vii. 36LTTrWII; Jn. ix. 24 G Τ Tr t.xt. ; Jn. xxi. 23 RG; etc. d. with anarthrous nouns, esp. numerical specifications [W. § 37, 5 N. 1] : τρίτον τοϋτο, this third time, 2 Co, xiii. 1 ; τοΰτο τρίτον, .In. xxi. 14, (Judg. xvi. 15; 8€ύτ€ρον τοϋτο. Gen. x.xvii, 36; τούτο δίκατον, Num. xiv. 22 ; τέταρτον τοϋτο, Ildt. 5, 76). [The passages which follow, although introduced here by Prof. Grimm, are (with the exception of Acts i. 5) clearly instances of the predicative use of οίτοϊ ; cf. W. 110 (105) note; B. § 127, 31 ; Rost § 98, 3 A. c. a. sq.] : τοΰτο πάλιν Seύτepov OTjpe^ov ΐποΙησ€ν, Jn. iv, 54 ; τρίτην ταύτην ημ€ραν ayei, οντω 468 this is the third day that Israel is passing [but see Sya, 3], Lk. xxiv. 21 («ίμα» τριακοστην ταίτην ήμίμαν, this is now the thirtieth day that I He (unburied), Lcian. dial, mort. 13, 3) ; ou μ(τά πολλάί ταύτας ήμΐρας (see μιτά, II. 2 b. [W. Kil (1^2) ; 15. § 127, 4]), Acts i. 5; olros μην fKTot (trr'iv αύτη, ibis is tbe sixth iiiontli with her etc. I^k. i. 3C ; αΖτη άπογμαφη πμώτη tyivtTO, Lk. ii. 2 L ( Γ) I r Wll ; ταντην (ποίηα(ν αμχην των σημιίων, .In. ii. 11 L I Τι• Wll. οίίτω and oSjtws (formerly in printed editions ηΖτω appeared before a consonant, οίτωί before a vowel ; but [recent critical editors, following the best Mss. ("cod. Sin. has -τω but fourteen times in the N. T." Scriiiener, Collation etc. p. liv.; cf. his Introduction etc. p. 561), have restored oCtms; viz. Treg. uniformly, 205 times; Tdf. 203 times, 4 times -τω ; Lchm. 1^6 times, 7 times -τω (all before a consonant); WII 19G times, 10 times -τω (all before a consonant) ; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 37 ; 117/. App. p. 146 sq.] ; cf. W. § 5, 1 b. ; B. 9 ; [Lob. Pathol. Elementa ii. 213 sqq.] ; cf. Kriiger § 11, 12, 1 ; Kuhner § 72, 3 a.), adv., (fr. οίτοϊ), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for p, ίίΐ this manner, thus, so ; 1. by virtue of its na- tive demonstrative force it refers to what precedes ; in the manner spoken of; in the tvni/ described ; in the way it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so: Mt. vi. 30; xi. 26; xvii. 12; xix. 8; Mk. xiv. 59 ; Lk. i. 25 ; ii. 48 ; xii. 28 ; llo. xi. 5 ; 1 Co. viii. 12 ; xv. 1 1 ; Ileb. vi. 9; [2 Pet. iii. 11 WII Tr mrg.] ; ονχ οΰτωι ϊσται [L Tr AVII ί'στίν (so also Τ in Mk.)] t'v ύμ'ιν, it will not be so among you (I hope), Mt. xx. 26 ; Mk. x. 43; ίμύί ονχ οίτωΓ sc. (σ(σ6(, Lk. xxii. 26 ; eav άφωμιν αΐτον ούτω! sc. jroioCi /τα, thus as he has done hitherto [see άφίημι, 2 b.], Jn. xi. 48; it refers to similitudes and comparisons, and serves to adapt them to the case in hand, Mt. v. 16 {even so, i. e. as the lamp on the lamp-stand) ; Mt. xii. 45 ; xiii. 49; xviii. 14; xx. 16; Lk. xii. 21 [AV'Il br. the vs.] ; xv. 7, 10 ; Jn. iii. 8 ; 1 Co. ix. 24 ; likewise οΰτως «at, Mt. xvii. 12 ; xviii. 35 ; xxiv. 33 ; Mk. xiii. 29 ; Lk. xvii. 10. οίτωΓ t^tiv, to be so (Lat. sic or ita se habere) : Acts vii. 1 ; xii. 15; xvii. 11; xxiv. 9. it serves to resume participles (Joseph, antt. 8, 11, 1 ; b. j.2, 8, 5; see exx. fr. (!rk. auth. in Passow s. v. 1 h. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 7]) : Acts xx. 1 1 ; xxvii. 1 7 ; but .In. iv. 6 must not [Λvith W. § 65, 9 fin. ; B. § 144, 21] be referred to this head, see Meyer [and 5 d. below] ; on Rev. iii. 5, .«ee 5 c. below, it takes the place of an explanatory participial clause, i. q. matters being thus arroni/ed, under these circumstances, in such a con- dition of things, [B. § 149, 1 ; cf. W. § CO, 5] : Ro. v. 12 (this connection between sin and death being established [but this explanation of the οίΐτωί appears to be too gen- eral (cf. Meyer ad loc.)]); lleb. vi. 15 (i.e. since God had pledged the promise by an oath) ; i. q. things having been thus settled, this having been done, then : Mt. xi. 26 ; Acts vii. 8 ; xxviii. 14 ; 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; 1 Th. iv. 1 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 11 ; cf. Fritzsche, Com. ad Rom. i. p. 298. Closely related to this use is that of οϋτως (like Lat. ita for itnque, iqitur) in the sense of conseijuently [cf. Eng. so at the beginning of a sentence] : Mt. vii. 1 7 ; Ro. i. 15 ; vi. 1 1 ; Rev. iii. 16, ([cf. Fritzsche on Mt. [>. 220]; Passow s. v. 2; [L. and S. s. v. II.]). 2. it prepares the way for what follows : Mt. vi. 9 ; Lk. xix. 31 ; Jn. xxi. 1 ; oCrut ην, was arranged thus, was on this wise, [λ\^ 465 (434) ; B. § 1 29, 1 1 ], Mt. i. 1 8 ; οΰτω! ί'στΊ τό θί\ημα τοί θίοΰ foil, by an infin., so is the will of God, that, 1 Pet. ii. 15. be- fore language quoted from the O. T. : Mt. ii. 5 ; Acts vii. 6; xiii. 34, 47; I Co. xv. 45; lleb. iv. 4. 3. with adjectives, so [Lat. tam, marking degree of intensity] : lleb. xii. 21 ; Rev. xvi. 18; postpositive, τί SfiXoi «στ» οίτωΓ; Mk. iv. 40 [L Tr WII om.] ; in the same sense with adverbs, Gal. i. 6 ; or with verbs, .so greatly, 1 Jn. iv. 11 ; ούτω; . . . ώστί, Jn. iii. 16. oiStiroTf (φάνη οντωι, it was never seen in such fashion, i. e. such an extraor- dinary sight, Mt. i.x. 33 (ΐφάνη must be taken imperson- ally ; cf. lilcek, Synopt. Erklar. i. p. 406 [or Meyer ad loc.]) ; oiStTroTf οΰτωι tiSopfv, we never saw it so, i. e. with such astonishment, Mk. ii. 12. 4. οϋτωι or οΰτωΓ και in comparison stands antithetic to an adverb or a relative pron. [W. § 53,5 ; cf. B. 362 (311) c] : κα- ΰάπιρ . . .οίτωί, Ro. xii. 4 sq. ; 1 Co. xii. 12; 2 Co. viii. 11 ; καθω! ■ ■ ■ οΰτως, Lk. xi. SO ; xvii. 26 ; Jn. iii. 14 ; xii. 50 ; xiv. 31 ; xv. 4 ; 2 Co. i. 5 ; x. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; Heb. v. 3 ; οίτωϊ . . . καθώς, Lk. xxiv. 24 ; Ro. xi. 26 ; J'hil. iii. 17; ίύί . . . οϋτωί, Acts viii. 32; xxiii. 11 ; Ro. v. 15, 18; 1 Co. vii. 1 7 ; 2 Co. vii. 14 ; 1 Th. ii. 8 ; v. 2 ; ούτως . . . ens, Mk. iv. 26 ; Jn. vii. 46 [L WII om. Tr br. the el.] ; 1 Co. iii. 15 ; iv. 1 ; ix. 26 ; Eph. v. 28 ; Jas. ii. 1 2 ; οΖτως tot . ■ ■ μη i)S, 2 Co. ix. 5 [G L Τ Tr λνΐΐ] ; ωσπ(ρ ■ . ■ οίτωί, Mt. xii. 40; xiii. 40; xxiv. 27, 37, 39; Lk. xvii. 24 ; Jn. v. 21,26; Ro. v. 12, 19,21; vi. 4; xi. 31 ; 1 Co. xi. 12; xv. 22 ; xvi. 1 ; 2 Co. i. 7 R G ; Gal. iv. 29 ; Eph. v. 24 R G; after καθ' όσον, lleb. i.\. 27 sq.; όντως . . . ov τρόπον, Acta i. 11 ; x.xvii. 25; hv τρόπον . . ■ όντως, 2 Tim. iii. 8 (Is. Iii. 14) ; κατά την odov ην λί'γουσιΐ' atptaiv οντω κτ\. after the Way (i. e. as it re(|uires [cf. όδύί, 2 a. fin.]) so etc. Acts xxiv. 14. 5. Further, the foil, special uses deserve notice : a. (ίχιι) os [better ό] μϊν οίτωί or [better ό] δ€ οίτωί, one after this manner, another after that, i. e. different men in different ways, 1 Co. vii. 7 (ιτοτί μΐν οίτωί (cat ποτί οίτωί φάγιται ή μάχαιρα, 2 S. xi. 25). b. οίτωί, in the manner known to all, i. e. ace. to the context, so shamefully, 1 Co. v. 3. c. in that state in which one f tills one's self such as one is, [cf. W. 46.i (434)] ; τί μ( ίττοίησας οϋτως, Ro. ix. 20 ; οίτωί dvai, μίνίΐν, of those λυΙιο remain unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 26, 40 ; ό νικών όντως τ!(ριβαΚ(Ίται viz. as (i. e. because he is) victor [al. in the manner described in vs. 4], Rev. iii. 5 L Τ Tr WH. d. thus forthwith, i. e. without hesitation [cf. Eng. off-hand, without ceremony, and the colloquial right, just'] : Jn. iv. 6 ; cf. Passow s. v. 4 ; [L. and S. s. v. IV. ; see 1 above ; add Jn. xiii. 25 Τ WII Tr br. (cf. Green, Crit. Notes ad loc.)] e. in questions (Lat. sicine ?) [Eng. ex- clamatory so then, what'] : Mk. vii. 18 (Germ, sonach) [al. take οίτωί here as expressive of degree. In Mt. xxvi. 40, however, many give it the sense spoken of ; cf. too 1 Co. vi. 5] ; οίτωί άποκρίνΐ) ; i. e. so impudently, .In. xviii. 22 ; with an adjective, so (very), (ial. iii. 3. [But these <"α 469 όφθαΧμοΒουΚΐία exx., although classed together by Fritzsche also (Com. on Mark p. 150 sq.), seem to be capable of discrimination. The passage from Gal., for instance, does not seem to differ essentially from examples under 3 above.] f. In class. Grk. ovtws often, after a conditional, concessive, or temporal protasis, introduces the apodosis (cf. Passow 8. V. 1 h. ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 7]). 1 Th. iv. 14 and Rev. xi. 5 have been referred to this head ; B. 357(307); [cf. W. § 60, 5 (esp. a.)]. But questionably; for in the first passage οίτωϊ may also be taken as eijuiv. to under these circiwislances, i. e. if we believe what I have said [better cf. VV. u. 5.] ; in the second passage ούτως denotes in the manner spoken of, i. e. by fire proceeding out of their mouth. οΰχ, see οΰ. ουχί, i. q. oil, not, but stronger [cf. wvi ad init.] ; a. in simple negative sentences, hi/ no ineiinx, not at all, [A. V. noli ■ ■^^• ^'ϋ• •0 sq.; -xiv. 22; 1 Co. v. 2; vi. 1 ; foil, by ά\\ά, 1 Co. x. 29 ; 2 Co. x. 13 (L Τ Tr WH οίκ) ; in denials or contradictions [A. V. nay; not sol, Lk. i. 60; xii. 51 ; xiii. 3, 5 ; xvi. 30 ; Ro. iii. 27. b. in a question, Lat. nonne f (asking what no one denies to be true): Mt. v. 46sq.; x. 29 ; xiii. 27; xx. 13; Lk. vi. 39; xvii. 17[LTr\VHoux]; .xxiv. 26; Jn. xi. 9; Acts ii. 7 TrWHtxt.; Ro. ii. 26 (LTTr Wll οίχ); 1 Co. i. 20; Heb. i. 14, etc.; (Sept. for xSn, Gen. xl. 8; Judg. iv. 6) ; αλλ' ουχί, will he not rather, Lk. xvii. 8. όφ6ΐλ6'τη5, -ου, 6, (οφ(ί\ω), one idio owes another, a dehtiir : prop, of one who owes another money (Plat, legg. 5, 736 d. ; Plut. ; al.) ; with a gen. of the sum due, Mt. .xviii. 24. Metaph. a. one held hij some ohlif/a- tion, bound to some duti/ : οφΕΐλ/ττ)ί (Ιμί, i. q. ΰφ(ί\ω, foil. by an inf., Gal. v. 3 (Soph. Aj. 590) ; 6φ(ΐ\. (Ιμί rivos, to be one's debtor i. e. under obligations of gratitude to him for favors received, Ro. xv. 27; τιι/ι (dat. commodi), to be under obligation to do sometliing for some one, Ro. i. 14; viii. 12. b. one who has not yet made amends to one whom he has injured: Mt. vi. 12; in imi- tation of the Chald. TT\, one who owes God penalty or of whom God can demand punishment as something due, i. e. a sinner, Lk. xiii. 4.* <>ψ€ΐλή, -^f, η, (οφίίλω), that which is owed; prop, a debt: Mt. xviii. 32; metaph. plur. dues: Ro. xiii. 7; epec. of conjugal duty [R. V. her due"], 1 Co. vii. 3 G L Τ Tr WH. Found neither in the Grk. O. T. nor in prof. auth. ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 90.* (>φ<ίλημ.α, -Tor, τ6, (οφ(ΐ\ω), that which is owed; a. prop, that which is Justly or lef/aUy due, a debt ; so for ηκψ-^, Deut. xxiv. 12 (10) ; άφύναι. 1 Mace. xv. 8 ; άπο- Tii/ftc, Plat. legg. 4 p. 717 b.; άπΌδιδόναι, Aristot. eth. Nic. 9, 2, 5 [p. 1165*, 3]. κατά ί^φ(ί\ημα, as of debt, Ro. iv. 4. b. in imitation of the Chald. 31Π or K3in (which denotes both debt and ,«i)i), metaph. offence, sin, (see 6φ(ί\ίτηί. b.) ; hence, άφιίναι τικ! τα οφ(ί\. αυτόν, tc remit the penalty of one's sins, to forgive them, (Chald. I'ain pin), iMt. vi. 12. [Cf. Λν. 30, 32, 33.]* όφ£(λω; \mp(. ωφfι\ov^, pres. pass. ptcp. οφαΧόμινο!', fr. Hom. down ; to owe ; a. prop, to owe money, be in debt for: τινί τι, Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. xvi. 5; without a dat., Mt. xviii. 28; Lk. vii. 41 ; -xvi. 7; Philem. 18; τά οφίϊΚόμ^νον, that which is due, the debt, Mt. .xviii. 30 ; αϋτω (which L Tr WH om.), that due to him, ib. 34. b. metaph. : τι, pass, την eCvoiap οφαΧομϊνην, the good-will due [A. (not R.) V. due benecolenre~\, 1 Co. vii. 3 Rec. ; μηhev\ μη$ίν όφ(ίλ(τ( (here όφίίλίτί, on account of what precedes and what follows, must be taken in its broadest sense, both literal and tropical), et μη το αλλήλους αγα- πάν, owe no one anythinrj except to love one another, be- cause we must never cease loving and the debt of love can never be paid, Ro. .xiii. 8. absol. to be a debtor, be bound : Mt. x.xiii. 16, 18 ; foil, by an inf. to be under obli- gation, bound by duly or necessity, to do something; it be- hoves one; one ought; used thus of a necessity imposed either by law and duty, or by reason, or by the times, or by the nature of the matter under consideration [ace. to AVestcott (Epp. of Jn. p. 5), Cremer, al., denoting obli- gation in its s])ecial and jjersonal aspects] : Lk. xvii. 10 ; Jn. xiii. 14 ; xix. 7 (όφ(ιλ{» anodave'iv, he ought to die) ; Acts xvii. 29 ; Ro. xv. 1, 27 ; 1 Co. v. 10 ; [vii. 36 (A. V. need so requireth)'] ; ix. 10 ; xi. 7, 10 ; 2 Co. .xii. 14 ; Eph. V. 28; 2 Th. i. 3; ii. 13; Heb. ii. 17; v. 3, 12; iJn. ii. 6 ; iii. 16 ; iv. 11 ; 3 Jn. 8 ; ωφαλον σννίστασθαι, I ought to have been commended, i. e. I can demand commenda- tion, 2 Co. xii. 11. c. after the Chaldee (see όφίΐλί- της, b., οφύλημα, b.), 6φ(ΐλω τινί, to have wronged one and not yet made amends to him [A. V. indebted}, Lk. xi. 4. [CoMP. : προσ-οφί ι'λω.] * οψελον (for ώ0(λοι/, without theaugm., 2 aor. οίοφιίλω; in earlier Grk. viiui an inf., as ωφ^λον Bavtiv, I ought to have died, expressive of a wish, i. q. would that I were dead; in later Grk. it assumes the nature of an inter- jection, to be rendered) would that, where one wishes that a thing had happened Avhich has not happened, or that a thing be done which probably will not be done [cf. W. 301 sq. (283); B. § 150, 5]: with an optative pres. Rev. iii. 15 Rec; with an indicative impf., Rev. ibid. GLTTrWH; 2 Co. xi. 1, (Epict. diss. 2, 18, 15; Ignat. ad Srayrn. c. 12); with an indie, aorist, 1 Co. iv. 8 (Ps. cxviii. (cxi.x.) 5; Sφtλov άπιθάνομίν, Ex. xvi. 3; Num. xiv. 2 ; xx. 3) ; with the future. Gal. v. 12 (Lcian. soloec. [or Pseudosoph.] 1, where this construction is classed as a solecism). Cf. Passow ii. p. 603'; [L. and S. s. V. όφίΐ'λω, Π. 3].• όφίλοϊ, -out, TO, (όφί'λλω to increase), ad vantage, profit: 1 Co. XV. 32; Jas. ii. 14, 16. (From Hom. down; Sept. Job XV. 3.) • όφθαλμο-δουλεία [Τ WH -λία ; see I, c], -as, ή, (όφθαλ- μόδουλος, Constit. apost. [4, 12, Coteler. Patr. Apost.] i. p. 299»; and this fr. οφθαλμός and δούλοι), [A. V. eye- service i. e.] service performed [only] under the master's eye (μή κατ οφθαλμο8., τουτί'στί μη μόνον παρόντων τωο δϊστΓοτών και όρώντων, αλλά κα\ απόντων, Theophyl. on Eph. vi β ; " for the master's eye usually stimulates to greater diligence; his absence, on the other hand, ren- ders sluggish." H. Stephanus) : Eph. vi. 6 ; Col. iii. 22. Not found elsewhere; [cf. W. 100 (9i\^ * οφθαΧμόν 470 όχλο? όφθολμόϊ, -οϋ, ό, [fr. Γ. ότΓ to see ; allied to όψ•ΐΓ , όι/^ο- μαι, etc.; Curtius § 627], Sept. for yy, [fr. Horn, down], the eye : Mt. v. 38 ; vi. 22 ; Mk. ix. 47 ; Lk. xi. 34 ; Jn. ix. 6 ; 1 Co. xii. 16 ; Rev. vii. 1 7 ; xxi. i, and often ; ριττη όφθαϊίμοΰ, 1 Co. XV. ό2; οί οφθαλμοί μου (ώον (see the remark in γλώσσα, 1), Lk. ii. 3u; of. iv. 20; x. 23 : Mt. .xiii. 16 ; 1 Co. ii. ; Rev. i. 7 ; [άνίβλιψαν οί οφθαλμοί Mt. XX. 34 RG]; ISuv toU ύφθ.. .Mt. xiii. 1.5; .In. xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27 ; όράν τοϊγ όφθ. (see όράω, 1), 1 Jn. ι. 1 ; ή ΐπιθνμία των όφθ. desire excited by seeing, 1 Jn. ii. 16. Since the eye is the index of the raind, the foil, phrases have arisen : 6φθ. σου πονηροί ϊστιν, i. e. thou art envious, Mt. XX. 15; οφθ. πομΐ)ρΟ£^ env>', Mj5.:\ii^22 (|•;» ;?Ί, an envious man, Prov. xxiii. 6 ; xxviii. 22 ; cT. Sir. xxxiv. 13; -ynxa IJ'i' n;•";, thine eye is evil toward thy brother, i. e. tliou enviest [grudgest] thy brother, Deut. XV. 9; οφθ- πονηροί φθονιρο! eV άρτω, Sir. xiv. 10; μη φθονισάτω σου ό όφθ. Tob. iv. 7 ; the opposite, άγαθο! οφθαλμό!, is used of a willing mind, Sir. xxxii. (xxxv.) 10, 12) ; on the other hand, οφθαλμό! πονηρό! in Mt. vi. 23 is a diseased, disordered eye, just as we say a bad eye, a had Jinrjer [see πονηροί, 2 a. (where Lk. xi. 34)]. κρα- Teli» Tov! όφθ. Toil μή κτλ. [Α. V. Ιο hold the eyes i. e.] to prevent one from recognizing another, Lk. xxiv. 16; νπολαμβάνω τίνα άπο των όφθ. τινοί, by receiving one to witlidraw him from another's sight [A. V. received him out of their sight']. Acts i. 9. Metaph. of the eyes of the mind, the faculty of knowing : ΐκρΰβη άπο των όφθ. σου, hid from thine eyes, i. e. concealed from thee [cf. B. 320 (274)], Lk. xix. 42 ; StSovat τινι όφθαλμουί τοϋ μη βλίπίΐν, to cause one to be slow to understand, Ro. xi. 8 [cf. B. 2G7 (230)]; τνφλοΐιν rovif όφθ. Tiraf, Jn. xii. 40; 1 Jn. ii. 11 ; σκοτίζονται o'l όφθ. Ro. xi. 10; πιφωτισμϊνοι οφθαλ- μοί τήί 8ίανοία! [cf. Β. § 145, G], Eph. i. IS Rec. ; t^s καρ8ία! (as in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 3(5, 2), ibid. G L Τ Tr Wil ; iv όφθαλμοΊί Tixos ("3 -n'? [cf. B. § 146, 1 fin.]), in the judgment [cf. our uieio] of one, Mt. xxi. 42 ; Mk. xii. 1 1 ; ουκ ϊστι τι απίναντι των όφθ. τινοί, to neglect a thing (cf. our leave, put, out of sight), Ro. iii. 18; γυμνόν ίστί τι Tolf όφθ. TITOS (see γυμνοί. 2 a.), Heb. iv. 13 ; οί όφθ. ToC κυρίου en'i δικαίου! (sc. : 1 aor. ptcp. ό;(λθ7Γθ»ήσαΓ ; (βχ\ο!, ποιίω) ; to colled a crowil, gather the people together: Acts xvii. 5. Not found elsewhere.* όχλοϊ, -ου, ό, in the X. Τ. only in the historical bks. and five times in the Rev. ; as in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collec- tion of people ; a multitude of men who have flocked to- gether in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25 ; xv. 1 0, etc. ; Mk. ii. 4 ; iii. 9, and often ; Lk. v. 1, 1 9 ; vii. 9, etc. ; Jn. V. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32, 49, etc. ; Acts xiv. 14; xvii. 8 ; xxi. 34 ; tW «V toC όχλου. Lk. .xi. 27 ; xii. 13 ; or an» τοϋ όχλου, xix. 39 ; ix. 38 ; άπο (for i. e. on account of [cf. άττό, Π. 2 b.]) T. όχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ή βία τ. όχλου, Acts xxi. 35 ; πολϋί όχλοί and much oftener όχλοί πολύί, Mt.xiv. 14; XX. 29; xxvi,47; Mk. v.21,24; vi. 34 ; ix. 14; xiv. 43 [here Τ Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. πολ.] ; Lk. vii. 11 ; viii. 4 ; ix. 37; Jn. vi. 2, 5 ; xii. 12 [but here Trmrg. br. ΛΥΗ prefix 6 : cf. B. 91 (80)] ; Rev. xix. 1, 6 ; with the art. ό πολϋί όχλ., the great multitude present, Mk. xii. 37 ; [ό όχλοί πολϋί (the noun forming with the adj. a sin- gle composite term, like our) Ihe common people, Jn. xii. 9 Τ WH Tr mrg. ; cf. B. u. s. ; some would give the phrase the s.ame sense in Mk. 1. c] : πάμπολυί, Mk. viii. 1 [Rec] ; ικανοί, Mk. X. 46 ; Lk. vii. 1 _' : Acts xi. 24, 26 ; xix. 26 ; 6 πλείστοι όχλ. [the most part of the multitude], Mt. xxi. 8 ; πas• ό 3χλ., Mt. xiii. 2 ; Mk.ii. 13; iv. 1 ; vii. 14 [Rec.]; i.x. 15 ; xi. 18 ; Lk. xiii. 1 " ; Acts xxi. 27 ; όχλ. τοσοΟτοΓ, Mt. XV. 33 ; al μυριάδα τοϋ όχλ. Lk. xii. 1 ; οϋ μ(τα όχλου, not having a crowd with me, Acts xxiv. 18 ; άτιρ όχλου, in the absence of the multitude [(see artp)], Lk. xxii. 6. plur. oi όχλοι, very often in Mt. and Lk., as Mt. v. 1 ; vii. 28; ix. 8, 33, 36 ; xi. 7 ; xii. 46 ; xiii. 34, 36, etc. ; Lk. iii. 7, 10 ; iv. 42 ; v. 3 ; viii. 42, 45 ; ix. 11 ; xi. 14, etc. ; Acts viii. 6 ; xiii. 45 ; xiv. 11,13, 1 8 sq. ; xvii. 1 3 ; once in Jn. vii. 12 [where Tdf. the sing.] ; in Mk. only vi. 33 Rec.; and without the art. Mk. x. 1 ; όχλοι πολλοί, Mt. iv. 25 ; viii. 1 ; xii. 15 [R G] ; xiii. 2 ; χ v. 30 ; xix. 2 ; Lk. v. 15 ; xiv. 25 ; πάντα οί όχλοι, Mt. xii. 23. 2. the multi- οχυρωμα 471 οψώνίορ tude i. e. the common people, opp. to the rulers and lead- ing men : Mt. xiv. 5 ; xxi. 26 ; Mk. xii. 12 ; [Jn. vii. 12' (provided the plur. is retained in the first part of the vs.)] ; with contempt, ike ignorant multitude, the populace, Jn. vii. 49 ; ϊπισΰστασκ όχλου, a riot, a mob, Acts xxiv. 12 f L Τ Tr WII ΐπίστασι: (q. v.) &χ.]. 3. univ. a multitude : with a gen. of the class, as τ(Κα>νων, Lk. v. 29 ; μαθητών, Lk. vi. 17; ονομάτων (see ονημα,Ά), Acts i. 10; των ίίρίων. Acts vi. 7 ; the plur. όχ\οι, joined with λαο» and (θνη, in Rev. xvii. 15 seems to designate troops of men assembled together without order. (Sept. chiefly for iinn.) όχύρωμο, -tos, to, {οχυρόω [to make strong, to fortify]) ; 1. prop, a ca.-•_, Gen. xxiv. 11): Mk. xi. [11 Τ Tr mrg.WII txt. (cf. Plut. Alex. 16, 1)], 19 ; xiii. 35. b. with a gen. [W. § 54, 6], όψέ σαββάτων, the sabbath having just passed, afer the sabbath, i. e. at the early dawn of the first day of the week — (an interpretation absolutely demanded by the added specification τη ίττίφωσκ. κτλ.), Mt. x.xviii. 1 cf. Mk. .Kvi. 1 (οψί των βασιΚίω! χρόνων, long after the times of the king, Plut. Num. 1 ; οψί μυστηρίων, the mysteries being over, Philostr. vit. Apoll. 4, 18); [but an e.\amination of the instances just cited (and others) will show that they fail to sustain the ren- dering afer (although it is recognized by Passow, Pape, Schenkl, and other lexicographers) ; όψ•ί' foil, by a gen. seems always to be partitive,denoting late in the peri- od specified by the gen. (and consequently still belong- ing to it), cf. B. § 132, 7 Rem.; Kuhner §414, 5 c. β. Hence in Mt. 1. c. ^late on the sabbath']. Keim iii. p. 552 sq. [Eng. trans, vi. 303 sq.] endeavors to relieve the passage differently [by adopting the Vulg. vesptre sabbati, on the evening of the sabbath'], but without suc- cess. [(Cf. Keil, Com. iiber Matth. ad loc.)] * όψιμοι. -o», {6ψ(), late, latter, (Hom. II. 2, 325 ; ό^ιμό τατοί στιόρο!, Xen. oec. 17, 4 sq. ; «V toIs όιΙ^ίμοι; τών νδά των, of the time of subsidence of the waters of the Nile, Diod. 1,10; [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 sq.]) : Sifr. v(tos, the latter or vernal rain, which falls chiefly in the months of March and April just before the harvest (opp. to the autumnal or πρώιμος [cf. B. D. s. v. Rain]), Jas. v. 7 [but L Τ Tr WII om. ύιτόν. cod. Sin. and a few other authori- ties substitute καρπόν] ; Sept. for uiplO, Deut. xi. 14 i Jer. V. 24 ; Hos. vi. 3 ; Joel ii. 23 ; Zech. x. 1.• όψιο$, -a, -ov, (όψί), late; 1. as an adjective ([Pind.,] Thuc, Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al. ; \^Lob. ad Phryn. p. 51 sq.]) : ή ωρα, Mk. xi. 1 1 [but Τ Tr mrg. WH txt. ό\/^, q. v.] (όψία cV νυκτί, Pind. Isthm. 4, 59). 2. contrary to the usage of prof. auth. η όψία as a subst. (sc ωρα [cf. W. 591 sq. (550); B. 82 (71)]), evening: i. e. either from our three to six o'clock p. M., Mt. viii. 16; xiv. 15; xxvii. 57; Mk. iv. 35; or from our six o'clock p. M. to the beginning of night, Alt. xiv. 23 ; xvi. 2 [here Τ br. WH reject the pass.] ; xx. 8 ; xxvi. 20 ; Mk. i.32; vi.47; xiv.l7; xv.42; Jn. vi. 1 6 ; xx. 1 9, (hence D"3''i'n Γ2, between the two evenings, Ex. xii. 6 ; .\vi 12; xxix. 39 [cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. p. 1064 sq. (and addit. et emend, p. 106); B. D. s. v. Day]). Besides only in Judith xiii. 1.* όψΐ5, -ίωί, ή, (ΟΠΤΩ, όψομβι [cf. οφθαΚμ6ί\), fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for ΠΧ"}•? ; 1. seeing, sight. 2. face, countenance: Jn. xi. 44; Rev. i. 16. 3. the outicard appearance, look, [many lexicographers give this neuter and objective sense precedence] : Kptvetv κατ όψιν, Jn. vii. 24.• όψώνιον, -ου, τό, (f r. Sil^ov — on which see όψάριον, init. — and ωνίομαι to buy), a later Grk. word (cf. Slurz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 187 ; Phryn. ed. Lob. p. 418), prop, whatever is bought to be eaten with bread, as fish, flesh, and the like (see οψάριον). And as corn, meat, fruits, salt, were given to soldiers instead of pay (Caes. b. g. 1, 23, 1 ; Polyb. 1, 66 sq. ; 3, 13, 8), όψώνιον began to signify 1• univ. a soldier's pay, allowance, {Polyb. 6, 39, 12; Dion. Hal. antt. 9, 36), more com- monly in the plur. [W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)] όψώνια, prop, that part of a soldier's support given in place of pay [L e. rations] and the money in which he is paid (Polyb. 1, 67, 1 ; 6, 39, 15; 1 IMacc iii. 28; xiv. 32 ; I Esdr. iv. 56 ; Joseph, antt. 12, 2, 3) : Lk. iii. 14; 1 Co. ix. 7 [cf. W. § 31, 7 d.]. 2. metaph. wages: sing. 2 Ca 20. 8 ; τήϊ άμαρτίαί, the hire that sin pays, Bo. vi 23.• 472 ΓΙ ττα/γιΒεύω ira-yiSevu: 1 aor. subj. 3d pers. plur. πα-γΛίΰσωσιν; (παγιΈ, q. v.) ; a word unknown to tlie Greeks ; ίο en- snare, entrap : birds, Eccl. ix. 1 2 ; metapli., τίνα iv λόγω, of the attempt to elicit from one some remark which can be turned into an accusation against him, Mt. xxii. 15. ([toIs \ayuis, Prov. vi. 2 Graec. Venet. ; of. also Deut. vii. 25 ; xii. 30 in the same] ; 1 S. xxviii. 9.) * τΓογίϊ, -ίδοΓ, ή, (fr. πηγνυμι to make fast, 2 aor. fffuyoK ; prop, that which holds fast [cf. Anth. Pal. 6, 5]), Sept. for riD, ΠΗ^, typ.l'O, etc. ; β snare, trap, noose ; a. prop, of snares in which birds are entangled and caught, Prov. vi. 5 ; vii. 23 ; Ps. xc. (xci.) 3 ; cxxiii. (cxxiv.) 7 ; nayi8a! ίστάναι, Arstph. av. 527 ; hence ώί irayli, as a snare, i. e. unexpectedly, suddenly, because birds and beasts are caught unawares, Lk. xxi. 35. b. trop. a snare, i. e. whatever brings peril, loss, destruction : of a sudden and unexpected deadly peril, Ro. xi. 9 fr. Ps. Lwiii. (Ixix.) 23 ; of the allurements and -seductions of sin, (μπίητ€ΐν fls τηψασμον κ. παγίδα, 1 Tim. vi. 9 {('μπΐ- jTTft eis παγίδα αμαρτωλός, Prov. xii. 1 3, cf. xxix. 6 ; joined with σκάνδαλον, Sap. xiv. II); toC διάβολου, the allure- ments to sin by which the devil holds one bound, 2 Tim. ii. 26 ; 1 Tim. iii. 7. (In Grk. writ, also of the snares of love.) * ιτάθημα, -τοΓ, τά, (fr. παθήρ, πάσχω, as μάθημα fr. μα- θ(ίν), It. [Soph.,] Ildt. down; 1. tltat witic/i one suffers or has suffered; a. externally, a suffering, misfortune, calamiti), evil, affliction•, plur., Ro. viii. 18; 2Co. i. 6sq. ; Col. i. 24 ; 2Tim. iii. 11; lleb. ii. 10; x. 32; 1 Pet. v. 9 ; τά fU Χριστοί/, that should subsequently come unto Christ [W. 193 (182)], 1 Pet. i. 11; roi Χρίστου, which Christ endured, 1 Pet. v. 1 ; also the afllictions which Christians must undergo in behalf of the same cause for which Christ patiently endured, are called παθήματα τοϋ Χριστού [W. 189 (178) note], 2 Co. i. 5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 13. b. of an inward state, an affection, passion : Gal. v. 24 ; τώι» αμαρτιών, that lead to sins, Ro. vii. 5. 2. i. q. το πάσχfw (see καύχημα, 2), an enduring, undergoing, suj'ering, (so the plur. in Arstph. thesra. 199) : θάνατον, gen. of the obj., Heb. ii. 9. [Syn. cf. πάθος, init.] • ιταθητίϊ, -η, -άν, {πάσχω, παθί'ιν) ; 1. passible (Lat. patibilis, Cic. de nat. dcor. 3, 12, 29), endued with the capacity of suffering, capable of feeling; often in Plut., as ηαθητον σώμα. 2. subject to the necessity of suffer- ing, destined to ■■suffer, (Vulg. passibilis) : Acts xxvi. 23 (with the thought here respecting Christ as ποθητός eompare the similar language of .Justin Mart. dial. c. Tr. ec. 36, 39, 52, 68, 76, 89) ; cf. W. 97 (92) ; [B. 42 (37)]; (bo in eccl. writ, also, cf. Otto's Justin, Grk. index s. v. ; iraiSapiop Christ is said to be παθητίς and άπαθης in Ignat. ad Eph. 7, 2 ; ad Polyc. 3, 2).* ιταβοϊ, -ους, τό, (παθΛν, πάσχω), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; i. (j. πάθημα ((J. v.; [the latter differs fr. πάθος (if at all) only iu being the more individualizing and con- crete term; cf. .Schmidt, Syn. ch. 24 § 11]); 1. whatever befalls one, whether it be sad or joyous ; spec. a calamity, mishap, evil, affliction. 2. a feeling which the mind suffers, an affection of the mind, emotion, pas- sion ; passionate desire ; used by the (ireeks in either a good or a bad sense (cf. Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 4 [cf. Cope, Introd. to Aristotle's Rhet. p. 133 sqq. ; and his note on rhet. 2, 22, 16]). In the N. T. in a bad sense, depraved passion : Col. iii. 5 ; πάθη ατιμίας, vile pas.iions, Ro. i. 26 (see ατιμία) ; iv πάθ(ΐ επιθυμίας, [in the passion of lust], gen. of apposit. [W. § 59, 8 a.], 1 Th. iv. 5.• [Syn. πάθος, ίτιβυμία: ir. presents the passive, {π. the active side of a vice ; iir. is more comprehensive in meaning than IT. ; (π. is (evil) desire, π. ungovernable desire. Cf. Trench § Ixxxvii. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 5.] iraiSaYu-yos, -oC, 6, (fr. παις, and αγωγός a leader, es- cort), fr. lldt. 8, 75 down; a tutor (Lat. paedagogus) i. e. a guide and guardian of boys. Among the Greeks and Romans the name was applied to trustworthy slaves who were charged with the duty of supervising the life and morals of boys belonging to the better class. The boys v/ere not allowed so much as to step out of the house without them before arriving at the age of man- hood; cf. Fischers, v. in index i. to Aeschin. dial. Socr.; Hermann, Griech. Privatalterthiimer, §84, 15 sqq.; [Smith, Diet, of Grk. and Rom. Anticp s. v. ; Becker, Charicles (Eng. trans. 4th ed.), p. 226 sq.]. They are distinguished from o! διδάσκαλοι: Xen. de rep. Lac. 3, 2; Plat. Lys. p. 208 c. ; Diog. Laert. 3, 92. The name car- ries with it an idea of severity (as of a stern censor and enforcer of morals) in 1 Co. iv. 15, where the father is distinguished from the tutor as one whose discipline is usually milder, and in Gal. iii. 24 sq. where the Mosaic law is likened to a tutor because it arouses the consciousness of sin, and is called παιδαγωγός tit Χριστόν, i. e. preparing the soul for Christ, because those wlio have learned by experience with the law that they are not and cannot be commended to God by their works, welcome the more eagerly the hope of salvation offered them through the death and resurrection of Christ, the Son of God.* iraiSapiop, -an, n$, (dimin. of καις, see γνναικάριον), a little boy, a lad: Mt. xi. 1 6 Rec. ; Jn. vi. 9. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., son. : Sept. very often for "i;•:, also for nV.• Traioeia 473 ττακ [παιδάριον of an adult youth, Tob. vi. 2, etc. (cf. 1 1 sq.)].) [Syn. see iraiy, fin.]* iraiScCa (Tdf. -ία; [see 1, t]), -as, η. (παιδίύω), Sept. for "iOn ; 1. the whole Iraininy and education of chddren (which relates to the cultivation of mind and morals, and employs for this purpose now commands and admonitions, now reproof and punishment) : Eph. vi. 4 [cf. W. 388 (363) note] ; (in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. on, it includes also the care and training of the body.) [See esp. Trench, Syn. § .x.x.xii. ; cf. Jowett's Plato, in- de.x 8. V. Education]. 2. whatever in adults al.io cultivates the soul, esp. by correcting mislak-es and curbini/ ike passions ; hence a. instruction which aims at the increase of virtue: 2 Tim. iii. 16. b. ace. to bibl. usa^e chastisement, chasteninr/, (of the evils with which God visits men for their amendment) : Heb. .\ii. 5 (Prov. iii. U), 7 sq. [see νπομίνω, 2 b.], 11 ; (Prov. xv. 5, and often in the O. T. ; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Ildbch. on Sap. p. 51 ; [cf. (Plat.) defin. naihtia• 8νναμις θίραττίυτικη ψνχήίΐ)* ιταιδίυτήβ, -oC, ό, (πα(δ{ΐ5ω) ; 1. an instructor, pre- ceptor, teacher: Ro. ii. 20 (Sir. xxxvii. 19 ; 4 Mace. v. 34 ; Plat. legg. 7 p. 8 1 1 d., etc. ; Plut. Lycurg. c. 1 2, etc. ; Diog. Laert. 7, 7). 2. α ckastiser: Heb. xii. 9 (Hos. v. 2; Psalt. Sal. 8, 35).* παιΕίνω; impf. ijrai8(vov; 1 aor. ptcp. iraiSfiaas; Pass., pres. παιδιϋομαι; 1 aor. €7ταώ(ίθην; pf. ptop. nenaiSfv- ftiVos; (παις); Sept for τρ" ; 1. as in class. Grk. prop, to train children : τινά with a dat. of the thing in which one is instructed, in pass., σοφία [W. "227 (213) n.], Acts vii. 22 R G L WH [cf. B. § 134, 6] (γράμμασιν, Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 4 fin.) ; eV σοφία, ibid. Τ Tr ; τίνα «ατά άκρίβίίαν, in pass.. Acts xxii. 3. Pass, to be instructed or tauijhl, to learn : foil, by an inf., 1 Tim. i. 20 ; to cause one to learn: foil, by ίνα. Tit. ii. 12. 2. to chas- tise; a. to chastise OT castigate ivith words, to cor- rect : of those who are moulding the character of others by reproof and admonition, 2 Tim. ii. 25 (τινά naiSfifiv και ρυθμίζίΐν λόγω, Ael. v. h. 1, 34). b. in bibl. and eccl. use employed of God, to chasten by the infliction of evils and calamities [cf. W. § 2, 1 b.] : 1 Co. xi. 32; 2 Co. vi. 9; Heb. xii. 6; Rev. iii. 19, (Prov. xix. 18; xxix. 17; Sap. iii. 5 ; xi. 10 (9) ; 2 Mace. vi. 16 ; x. 4). c. to chastise with blows, to scourge : of a father punishing a son, Heb. xii. 7, [10]; of a judge ordering one to be scourged, Lk. .xxiii. 16, 22, [(Deut. -xxii. 18)].* TraiSio9ev, (παιδίον), adv., from cIiildhood,frotn a child, (a later word, for which the earlier writ, used « n-aiSu'y, Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 2 ; or « παώίου, mem. 2, 2, 8 ; or c'k παι- διών, oec. 3, 10 ; [cf. W. 26 (25) ; 463 (431)]) : Mk. ix. 21, where L Τ Tr WH eV παώιάθιν [cf. Win. §65,2]. (Synes. de provid. p. 91 b. ; Joann. Zonar. 4, 184 a.).* vaiSCov, -ου, τό, (dimin. of πα'ις), [fr. Hdt. down], Sept. for fjp, l;rj, ]3, etc. ; a young child, a little hoy, η little girl ; plur. τα παιδία, infants ; children ; little ones. In sing. : univ., of an infant just born, Jn. xvi. 21 ; of α (male) child recently born, Mt. ii. 8 sq. 11, 13, 14, 20 sq.; Lk. i. 59, 66, 76, 80 ; ii. 1 7, 21 [Rec], 27, 40 ; Heb. xi. 23 ; of a more advanced child, Mt. xviii. 2, 4 sq. ; Mk. ix. 3G sq. ; [.X. 15]; Lk. ix. 47sq. ; [Lk. xviii. 1 7] ; of a mature child, Mk. ix. 24 ; τινάί, the son of some one, Jn. iv. 49 ; of a girl, Mk. v. 39-41 ; [vii. 30 L txt. Τ Tr WH]. In plur. of (partly grown) children : Mt. xi. 16 G L Τ Tr WH ; xiv. 21 ; XV. 38 ; xviii. 3 ; xix. 13 sq. ; Mk. vii. 28 : x. 13 sqq. ; Lk. vii. 32 ; xviii. 16 ; [Heb. ii. 14] ; titos, of some one, Lk. xi. 7, cf. Heb. ii. 13. Metaph. παιδία Ta'is φρ^σί, children (i. e. like children) where the use of the mind is required, 1 Co. xiv. 20 ; in affectionate address, i. q. Lat. carissimi [A. V. chililren'\,,)n. xxi. 5; 1 Jn.ii. 14 (13), 18; [iii. 7 WH mrg. Syn. see παί?, fin.]• ■π•αι8(σκη, -ηί, η, (fem. of τταιδίσκο!, a young boy or slave ; a dimin. of παΪΓ, see ν(ανίσκοί) ; 1. a young girl, damsel, (Xen., Menand., Polyb., Plut., Lcian. ; Sept. Ruth iv. 12). 2. α maidservant, a young female slave; cf. Germ. Madchen [our maid'\ for a young fe- male-servant (Hdt. 1, 93; Lys., Dem., al.) : Lk. xii. 45; Acts xvi. 16; opp. to η ίΚίυθίρα. Gal. iv. 22 sq. 30 sq. ; spec, of the maid-servant who had charge of the door: JMt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 66, 69; Lk. xxii. 56; Acts xii. 13 ; ή TT- ή θυρωρός, Jn. xviii. 17 ; (also in the Sept. of a female slave, often for iTDX, ΠΠϊϋϊ). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 239. [Syn. see παίί, fin.] * ■παΰ,ω; fr. Horn, down; prop, to play like a child; then univ. to play, sport. Jest ; to give way to hilarity, esp. by joking, singing, dancing; so in 1 Co. x. 7, after Ex. xxxii. 6 where it stands for ρπϊ, as in Gen. xxi. 9; xxvi. 8 ; Judg. xvi. 25 ; also in the Sept. for pnty. [Comp. : ί'^ι-παί^ω.] * ■irats, gen. παιδάς, ό, ή, fr. Hom. down ; in the N. T. only in the Gospels and Acts ; 1. a child, boy or girl ; Sept. for ί;,'3 and TTJi'^. (Gen. xxiv. 28 ; Deut. xxii. 15, etc.) : ό παΪΓ, Mt. xvii. 18; Lk. ii. 43; ix. 42; Acts .\x. 12 ; ij παίί, Lk. viii. 51, 54 ; plur. infants, children, Jit. ii. 16 ; xxi. 15 ; όππίί nvos, the son of one, Jn. iv. 51. 2. (Like the Lat. puer, i. q.) servant, slave, (Aeschyl. cho- eph. 652 ; Arstph. nub. 18, 132; Xen. mem. 3, 13, 6 ; symp. 1, 11; 2, 23; Plat. Charm, p. 155 a.; Protag. p. 310 c. and often; Diod. 17, 76; al. ; so Sept. times with- out number for 13^' [cf. W. p. 30, no. 3] ; cf. the similar use of Germ. Bursch, [French gari;on, Eng. boy']) : Jit. viii. 6, 8, 13 ; Lk. vii. 7 cf. 10; xii. 4o ; xv. 26. an attend- ant, servant, spec, a king's attendant, minister : Mt. xiv. 2 (Diod. xvii. 36 ; hardly so in the earlier Grk. writ. ; Gen. xii. 37 sq.; 1 S. xvi. 15-17; xviii. 22, 26; Dan. ii. 7 ; 1 JIacc. i. 6, 8 ; 1 Esdr. ii. 16 ; v. 33, 35) ; hence, in imitation of the Hebr. Π1Π' 15;•, πα'ις τοΐι θ(οΰ is used of a devout worshipper of God, one ivho fulfils God's will, (Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) IS; cxii. (cxiii.) 1 ; Sap. ii. 13, etc.) ; thus, the people of Israel, Lk. i. 54 (Is. xii. 8; xlii. 19; xliv. 1 sq. 21, etc.) ; David, Lk. i. 69; Acts iv. 25, (Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 1 ; xxxv. (xxxvi.) 1 [Aid., Compl.], etc.) ; likewise any upright and godly man whose agency God employs in executing his purposes ; thus in the N. T. Jestu the Messiah : Mt. xii. 18 (fr. Is. xlii. 1) ; Acts iii. 13, 26 ; iv. 27, 30, [cf. Harnack on Barn. ep. 6, 1 and Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2] ; in the O. T. also Moses, Neh. i. 7 sq. j 474 iraXiyyeveiTia the prophets, 1 Esdr. viii. 79 (81); Bar. ii. 20, 24; and others.• [Syn. ira's, iraiSapiov,iTaiSlov, τταιίΐσκη,τ^κνοί': The Kraminarian Aristophanes is (luoteil b_v Amiiionius (s. v. y4pa>v) as (lefininj; thus : ΐΓοιβίοι/, τίι τριφόμα/ον uvb ηβη- vov' TratSap tof 54, rb iiS-q π^ριττατυνί' και ttjs \e'|e£ijs άι/τί- χόμ^νοι/• τταίίίσκο! δ", ό iv τγ 4χομ4ντι ήΚικία- π ο is δ' 6 Siaruf Ι-^κυκΚίων μαβ-ημάτα/ν Βυνάμίνο! tevai. Γΐύΐο (Λ(: muiul. o|iif. §3G) ([uotes the physician Hippocrates as follows: eV ανθρώπου φύσα ΐτττά ί'ισιν upai κ.τ λ.• παιδ /uc/ueV eVriv δχρί! ίπτά ΐτών, !ιί6ι/ταν ί'κβολΓ;? ■ Ttus ii &χρί yayiis ϊκφΰσ(ω5, ei's τα 6is €ΐΓτό• μΐίράκίον Si ίχρι yevelou λαχνώσεω!, e'j τά Tpls 4ΐΓτό. etc. AccoriliufT to iSchmidt, iraiSiov denotes exclusive- ly a little child ; TraiSapiov a cliild up to its first school years ; xois a child of any age ; (7Γαιδίσκο5 and) ταιΒίσκη, in which relerence to descent quite disappears, cover the years of late childhood aud early youth. But usajre is untrammelled : fiuni a child isexpressed either liy e(c ποιδο5 (most frequently), or 4k παιδιού, or 4κ (άπίι) παιδορίου. ttols and T6K»/oi'ilenote a child alike as respects descent and age, reference to the latter being more prominent in tlie former word, to descent in TfKiOv ; but the period irair covers is not sharply defined ; and, in classic usage as in modern, youthful designations cleave to the female sex longer than to the male. See Schmidt ch. 69 ; Uuhne in Luthardt's Zeitschrift u. s. w. for 1882, p. STsqq.] iraCu) : 1 aor. ίπαισα ; from Aeschyh and Hdt. down ; Sept. mostly for Π3Π ; to stride, smile : with the fists, Mt. xxvi. 68 [of. ραπίζω, 2] ; Lk. xxii. 64 ; with a sword, Mk. xiv. 47: Jn. xviii. 10; to sting (to strike or wound with a sting), Rev. ix. 5.* Πακατιανή, -ήί, ή, Pacatiana (Phrygia). In the fourtli century after Christ, Phrygia was divided into Phrygia Salutarisand Phrygia Pacatiana [later, Capatiana]; Lao- dicea was the metropolis of the latter : 1 Tim. vi. 22 (in the spurious subscription). [Cf. Forbiger, Hndbch. d. alt. Geogr. 2te Ausg. ii. 338, 347 sq. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Col., Introd. (esp. pp. 19, 69 sq.).]* •π-άλαι, adv. of time, fr. Horn, down ; 1. of old : Heb. i. 1 ; (as ad].) former, 2 Pet. i. 9. [ττάλπι properly designates the past not like πριν and nportpov rela- tively, i. e. with a reference, more or less explicit, to some other time (whether past, pres., or fut.), but sim- ply and absolutely.] 2. long ago: Mt. xi. 21; Lk. X. 13 ; Jude 4 ; so also of time just past, Mk. xv. 44 [ A. V. any whiW] (where L Tr txt. WH txt. η^η) \ 2 Co. xii. 1 9 L Τ Tr AVH [R. V. all this time], (so in Hom. Od. 21), 293; Joseph, antt. 14, 15, 4).• παλαιός, -ά, -όΐ', (πάλαι, q. v.). fr. Hom. down ; 1. old, ancient, (Sept. several times for [H; and ρ'ΓίχΟ : olvos naXatos (opp. to vios), Lk. v. 39 [but WH in br.] (Hom. Od. 2, 340; Sir. ix. 10); 8ιαθήκη, 2 Co. iii. 14; eirroXr) (opp. to καινή), given long since, 1 Jn. ii. 7 ; ζύμη (opp. to KcOv φίιρ.), 1 Co. V. 7 sq. ; neut. plur. παλαιά (opp. to καινά), old things, Mt. xiii. 52 (which seems to allude to such articles of food as are fit for use only after having been kept some time [al. consider clothing, jewels, etc., as referred to ; cf. θησαυρός, 1 c] ; dropping the fig., old and new commamlments ; cf. Sir. xxiv. 23; Heb. v. 12 sqq.) ; δ παλαιός ημών άνθρωπος (opp. to ό νιος), our old man, i. e. we, as we were before our mode of thought, feeling, action, had been changed, Ro. vi. 6 ; Eph. iv. 22 ; [Col. iii. 9]. 2. no longer new, worn hi/ use, the ivorse for wear, old, (for π'73, Josh. ix. 10 (4) sq.) : ιμάτιον, ασκός, Mt. ix. 16 sq. ; Mk. ii. 21 sq. ; Lk. v. 39 sq. [Syn. see αρχαίος, fin.] * ΊΓολαιότηϊ, -iJTof, ή, (πα\αιός), oldness: γράμματος, the old state of life controlled by ' the letter ' of the law, Ro. vii. 6 ; see καινότης, and γράμμα, 2 c. ([Eur.], Plat., Aes- chin.. Die Cass. 72, 8.) * ■π-αλαιόω, -ώ : pf. 7!(πα\αίωκα ; Pass., pres. ptcp. παΚαι• οίμίνος ; fut. παλαιωθήπ ομαι ; (παλαιοί) ; a. to make ancient or old, Sept. for Π^3; pass, to become old, to be worn out, Sept. for nS3, ΌΙ}^ : of things worn out by time and use, as βάλάντιον, Lk. xii. 33 ; Ίμάτιον, Heb. i. 11 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. xxi.x. 5; Josh. ix. 19 (13) ; Neh. ix. 21 ; Is. 1. 9 ; Ii. 6 ; Sir. xiv. 1 7). pass, το παλαίουμε• νον, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp. p. 208 b. ; Tim. p. 59 c). b. lo declare a thing to be old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 13 [see γψ ράσκω, fin.].* ■π-άλη, -ης, ή, (fr. πάλλω to vibrate, shake), fr. Hom. down, ivrestling (a contest between two in which each endeavors to throw the other, and whicli is decided when the victor is able θλίβαν κα'ι κατίχιιν liis i)rostiate antag- onist, i. e. hold him doivn with his hand upon his neck ; cf. Plat. legg. 7 p. 796 ; Aristot. rhet. 1, 5, 14 p. 1361", 24 ; Heliod. aethiop. 10, 31 ; [cf. Krause, Gymn. u. Agon, d. Griech. i. 1 p. 400 sqq.; Guhl and Koner p. 219 sq. ; Diet, of Antiq. s. v. luct(i]) ; the term is transferred to the struggle of Christians with the powers of evil : Eph. vi. 12.* ΐΓαλιγγίνΕο-Οα (Τ λΥΗ παλιι^^^. [cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 77 bot.]), -as, η, (πάλιν and γίν^σις), prop, ncio birth, repro- duction, reneical, re-crealion, (see Halm on Cic. pro Sest. § 140), Vulg. and Augustine regeneratio ; hence, moral renovation, regeneration, the production of a new life con- secrated to God, a radical change of mind for the better, (effected in baptism [cf. reff. s. v. βάπτισμα, 3]) : Tit. iii. 5 [cf. the Comm. ad loc. (esp. Holtzmann, where see p. 172 sq. for reff.); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. esp. §§ 84, 108; cf. Suicer, Thes. s. v.]. Commonly, however, the word denotes the restoration of a thing lo its pristine state, its renovation, as the renewal or restoration of life after death, Philo leg. ad Gaium § 41 ; de cherub. § 32 ; [de poster. Cain. § 36] ; Long. past. 3, 4 (2) (παΧιγγ. iV θανά- του) ; Lcian. encom. muscae 7 ; Schol. ad Soijh. Elec. 62 (ΤΙυθαγόρας π^ρΊ πα\ιγγ€ν€σίας €T€paT€veTo) ; Plut. mor. p. 998 c. [i. e. de esu earn. ii. 4. 4] (Sn χρώνται κοινοϊς al yj^vxa\ σώμασιν iv τοις πα\ιγγζν€σΙαις [cf. ibid. i. 7, 5 ; also de Is. et Osir. 72 ; de Ei ap. Del])!!. 9 ; etc.]) ; the renovation of the earth after the deluge, Philo de vita Moys. ii. §12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 9, 4 ; the renewal of tlie world to take place after its destruction by fire, as the Stoics taught, Philo [de incorrupt, mundi §§ 3, 14, 17]; de mund. §15; Antonin. 11, 1 [(cf. Gataker ad loc.) ; Zeller, Philos. d. Griech. iii. p. 138] ; that signal and glorious change of all things (in heaven and earth) πάΧιν •475 ττανοικι for the better, that restoration of (he primal and perfect condition of things which existed before the fall of our first parents, which the Jews looked for in connection with the advent of the Messiah, and which the primi- tive Christians expected in connection with the visible return of Jesus from heaven : Mt. xix. 28 (where the Syriac correctly I-^i-m f^^*^^, in the new age or world) ; cf. Berlholdl, Christologia Judaeorum, p. 214 sq. ; Gfrorer, Jahrhundert des Heils, ii. p. 272 sqq. ; \_Schurer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 29, 9; Weber, Altsynagog. Palast. Theol. § 89]. (Further, the word is used of Cicero's restoration to rank and fortune on his recall from exile, Cic. ad Att. 6,6; of the restoration of the Jewish nation after the exile, παλ. narpiSos, Joseph, antt. 1 1 , 3, 9 ; of the recovery of knowledge by recollection, παλιγγ. rrjs yva>- σίώϊ iWiK ij ανάμνηαΐί, Olympiodor. quoted by Cousin in the Journal des Savans for 1834, p. 488.) [Cf. Trench § xviii. ; Cremer 3te Aufl. s. v.] * τάλιν, adv., fr. Horn, down ; 1. anew, again, [but the primary meaning seems to be baci:; cf. (among oth- ers) Ellendt, Lex. Soph. s. v.ii. p. 48ό]; a. joined to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition of the action : Mt. iv. 8 ; xx. 5 ; xxi. 36 ; xxii. 1, 4 ; Mk. ii. 13; iii. 20 ; Lk. x.xiii. 20 ; Jn. i. 35; iv. 13 ; viu. 2, 8, 12, 21 ; ix. 15, 1 7 ; X. 19 ; Acts xvii. 32 ; xxvii. 28 ; Ro. xi. 23 ; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; 2 Co. xi. 16 ; Gal. i. 9 ; ii. 18 ; iv. 19 ; 2 Tet. ii. 20 ; Phil. ii. 28 ; iv. 4 ; Heb. i. 6 (where παΚιν is tacitly opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus' former life on earth) ; Heb. v. 12 ; vi. 1,6; Jas. v. 18; Rev. x. 8, 11 ; πάλιν μικρόν so. ίσται, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19 ; us το πάλιν, again (cf. Germ. zum wicderholten Male; [see ds, A. II. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii. 2 ; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning, where again combines with the notion of back ; thus with άγωμιν, Jn. xi. 7 ; ei/ond, i. e. metaph. a. i. q. contrary lo : πάρα την 8ί8αχην, Ιίο. xvi. 17 ; παρ' Λπίδα, lit. beyond hope, i e where the laws and course of nature left no room for hope, hence i. tj. withnul [A. V. af/atnst'] hope, Ro. iv. 18 (in prof, auth., of things ivhich happen against hope, beyond one's ex- pectation, cf. Fassow s. v. IIL 3, vol. ii. p. 669''; Dion. Hal. antt. 6, 25) ; παρΰ τον νόμον, contrary to tlio law, Acts xviii. 13 (πάρα tovs vd/tour, opp. to κατά τοΰί vopovs, Xen. mem. 1,1,18); παρ' S, contrary to that which, i. e. at variance with that \vhicli, Gal. i. 8 sq. ; παρά φίσιν Ro. i. 26 ; xi. 24, (Thuc. 6, 17 ; Plat. rep. 5 p. 4(16 d.) ; after άλλο?, other than, different from, 1 Co. iii. 11 (see e.Kx. fr. prof. auth. in Passovv s. v. IIL 3 fin. vol. ii. p. 670»); παρά τον κτίσαντα, omitting or passing by the Creator, Ro. i. 25, where others explain it before (above) the Creator, rather than the Creator, agreeably indeed to the use of the prep, in Grk. writ. (cf. Ast, Le.K. Plat. iii. p. 28 [cf. Hidden, Platonic Idioms, § 165 β. ; L. and S. s. v. C. L 5 d.]), but not to the thought of the passage. except, save, i. q. //" .'/"" subtract from a given sum, less: TfaaapOKovra παρά μίαν, one (stripe) excepted, 2 Co. xi. 24 (τΐσσηρύκοντα (των παρά τριάκοντα ημέρας, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 1 ; παρά neVre vaiis, five shijis being deducted, Thuc. 8, 29; [παρ' uXiyas ψήφους, Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 37, 3] ; see other exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Bnhdy. p. 258 ; [W. u. s. ; esp. Soph. Lex. s. v. 3]). b. above, beyond: παρά Kaiphv ηΚικΙας, Heb. xi. 11 ; παρ' ο δβΐ (Pint. mor. p. 83 f. [de profect. in virt. § 13]), Ro. xii. 3 ; i. (|. more than : άμαρτωΧοΙ πηρά πάντας, Lk. xiii. 2 ; ξχρισί σ( ΐλαιον παρά τους μ(τ. more copiously than [Α. V. «//«γγ] thy fellows, Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 8 ; ΰψοϋν τίνα παρά τίνα. Sir. χν. 5) ; κρ'ιναν ήμίρανπαρ' ήμίραν, to prefer one day to another (see κρίνω, 2), Ro. xiv. 5. Hence it is joined to comparatives: πλίον παρά τ. Lk. iii. 13; fita- φυρώτιρονπαρ' αίιτοΰς όνομα, Heb. i. 4 ; add, iii. 3 ; ix. 23 ; xi. 4 ; xii. 24 ; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in W. § 35, 2 b. [and as above]. ϊΧαττοϋν τίνα παρά τ., to make one inferior to another, Ileb. ii. 7, Π. 3. on account of (ci. Lat. propter i. q. ob) : παρά τηΰτο, for this reason, therefore, 1 Co. xii. 15 sq. ; cf. \V. § 4!) g. c. IV. In Composition παρά denotes 1. situation or motion either from the side of, or to the side of ; near, beside, by, to : παραθαλάσσιος, παράλιος, παροικίω, παρακο- \ηυθ€ω, παραλαμβάνω, παραλΐγομαι, παραπλίω, παρά-γω ; of what is done secretly or by stealth, as παριισίρχομαι. ναρ^ισάγω, ηαρίΐσ^ΰω: cf. [the several words and] Fritz• sche. Com. on Kom. vol. i. p. 346. by the side of i. e. ready, present, at hand, (παρά τινι) : πάραμι, παρουσία, παρίχω, etc. 2. violation, neglect, aberration, [cf. our beyond or aside i. q. amiss] : παραβαίνω, παραβάτης, παρανομίω, παρακουω, παριημι, πάρ^σις, παραλογίζομαι, παρά^οζος, παραφρονία, etc. 3. like the Germ, an (in anreizen, antreiben, etc.) : παραζηλόω, παραπικραίν(ο, παροξύνω, παμοργίζω. [Cf. Vig. ed. llerm. p. 650 sq.J ■π-αρα-βαίνω ; 2 aor. παρΐβην; prop, to go by the side o) (in Hum. twice παρβφαώς of one who stands by anoth- er's side in a war-chariot, II. 11, 522 ; 13, 708 [but here of men on foot] ); lo go past or to pass over without touch- ing a thing ; trop. to overstep, neglect, violate, transgress, w. an ace. of the thing (often so in prof. auth. fr. Aes- chyl. down [cf. παρά, IV. 1 and 2]) : την παρά5οσιν, Mt. XV. 2 ; την ΐντοΧήν τον θΐον. ibid. 3 ; 6 παραβαίνων, he that transgresseth, oversteppeth, i. e. who does not hold to the true doctrine, opp. to μίνίΐν iv τη 8ι8αχη, 2 Jn. 9 11 G [where L TTr WII ό προάγων ((J. v.)] (so ot παράβαιναν• τις, transgressors of the law. Sir. xl. 14 [cf. Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 18, 2; 29,4; 30,1]); (τήν8ιαθήκην,,Τθί'\ί.\ΊΊ. 11, 1 5 ; Ezek. xvi. 59, and often ; το ρήμα κυρίου. Num. xiv. 41 ; 1 S. XV. 24, etc. ; τάς συνθήκας, I'olyb. 7, 5, 1 ; Joseph, antt. 4. 6, 5; Ael. v. h. 10, 2; besides, παραβ. Βίκην, τον νήμον, Tois όρκους, τιίστιν, etc., in Grk. writ.), in imita- tion of the Hebr. ΊΐΟ foil, by [p, we find παραβ. ίκ τίνος and από τίνος, so to go past as to turn aside from, i. e. to depart, leave, be turned from : c'k τής όδοΟ, Ex. xxxii. 8; Deut. ix. 12; άπο των ϊντοΧων, Deut. xvii. 20; άπί) τω» λόγων, Deut. xxviii. 14 cod. Alex.; once so in the N. T. : fK (L Τ Tr WII άπο) τής αποστολής, of one who abandons his trust, [R. V. fell away]. Acts i. 25. (In the Sept. also for 13;', Τ3Π to break, ΠφΠ to deviate, turn aside.) [Syn. : παραβαίνων to overstep, παραπορίίισθαι to jirnceed by the side of παρίρχ(σθαι to go past.] * παρα-βάλλω: 2 aor. παρίβαλον; 1. tn throiv be- fore, cast to, [cf. παρά, IV. 1], (Ilom., Plat., Polyb., Dio Cass., al. ; as fodder to horses, Horn. II. 8, 504). 2. to put one thing by the side of another for the sake of comparison, to compare, liken, (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Hdian.): την βασιλύαν του θιοϋ tv παραβολή, to portray the kingdom of God (in), by the use of, a simiUtude, Mk. iv. 30 R G L mrg. Tr mrg. [cf. B. § 133, 22]. 3. rellexively, lo put one's self, betake one's self into a place or to a person (Plat., Polyb., Pint., Diog. Laiirt.); of seamen (Ildt. 7, 179 ; Dem. p. 163, 4; itf Πηηόλου?, Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 4), ci's Σάμοκ, Acts xx. 15 [/;«/ in at (R. v. touched at)]. For another use of this verb in Grk. writ, see παραβολιΰομαι.' •ΐΓορά-βασ -is, -(ως ή, (παραβαίνω, q. v.), prop, a going over; metaiih.a disregarding, violating; \ u\%. praevarica- lio, and once (Gal. iii. 19) Irnnsgressio ; [A. V. Irnnsgres• ,ήοη] : w. a gen. of the object, των όρκων, 2 Mace. xv. 10; των 5ικαίων, Plut. compar. Ages, and Pomp. 1 ; τοΰ νόμου, of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 23 (Joseph, antt. 1 8, 8, 2) ; ab- solutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified law: Ro. v. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 14, (but αμαρτία is wrong-do- 77 αραβάτης 479 τταραΎΐνομαι ino• which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty of [cf. Trench, N. T. Syn. § Ixvi.]) ; των παραβ. χάριν, ίο create transgressions, i. e. that sins might talce on the character of transgressions, and thereby the conscious- ness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption be aroused, Gal. iii. 19 ; used of the transgression of the Mosaic law, Ro. iv. 15 ; Heb. ii. 2 ; ix. 15 ; Ps. c. (ci.) 3 ; w. a gon. of the subj., των άδίκωκ, Sap. xiv. 31.* Ίταρα-βάτη?, -ου, ό, (^παραβαίνω [cf. W. 26]), α trans- gressor (Vulg. praevaricator, transgressor) : νόμου, a lam- breaker (Plaut. legirupa), Ro. ii. 25, 27; Jas. ii. 11; absol., Gal. ii. 18; Jas. ii. 9. [Aeschyl. {παρβάτηί); Graec. Ven. Deut. .xxi. 18, 20.] * παρα-βιάξομαι : 1 aor. παρ(βιασάμην ; depon. verb, to employ force contrary to nature and right [cf. παρά, IV. 2], to compel by employing force (Polyb. 26, 1,3): τινά, to constrain one by entreaties, Lk. xxiv. 29 ; Acts xvi. IS ; so Sept. in Gen. xi.x. 9 ; 1 S. xxviii. 23, etc.* -ιταραβολ£ΰο|χαι : 1 aor. mid. ptcp. παραβο\€ν(τάμ€νος ', to be παράβολο! i. e. one who rashty exposes himself to dan- gers, lo be venturesome, reckless, (cf. W. 93 (88) ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 67) ; recklessly to expose one's self to dan- ger : with a dat. of respect, τη ψυχή, as respects life ; hence, to expose one's life boldly, jeopard life, hazard life, Phil. ii. 30 G L TTr WH for the παραβου\(υσάμ. of Rec. ; en the difference between these readings cf. Gabler, Kleinere theol. Schriften, i. p. 176s. 8. v. ; esp. Fried. Delilzsch, Wo lag das Paradies? Leipzig 1881, pp. 95-97; of. Max Muller, Selected Essays, i. 1 29 sq.]), 1. amflng the Persians a grand enclosure or preserve, hunting-ground, park, shady and well-watered, in which wild animals were kept for the hunt ; it was enclosed by walls and furnished with towers for the hunters: Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14; [1, 4, 5] ; 8, 1, 38 ■ oec. 4, 13 and 14 ; anab. 1, 2, 7. 9 ; Theo- phr. h. pi. 5, 8, 1 ; Diod. 16, 41 ; 14, 80; Plut. Artax. 25, cf. Curt. 8, 1, 11. 2. univ. a garden, pleasure- ground; grove, park: Lcian. v. h. 2, 23; Ael. v. h. 1, 33; Joseph, antt. 7, 14,4; 8,7,3; 9,10, 4; 10, 3, 2 and 11, 1 ; b. j. 6, 1, 1 ; [c. Apion. 1, 19, 9 (where cf. .1/ii//er)]; Sus. 4, 7, 15, etc.; Sir. x.xiv. 30; and so it passed into the Hebr. language, Dl")?, Neh. ii. 8 ; Eecl. ii. 5 ; Cant, iv. 13; besides in Sept. mostly for M; thus for that de- lightful region, 'the garden of Eden,' in which our first parents dwell before the fall : Gen. ii. 8 sqq. ; iii. 1 S(iq. 3. that part of Hades ichirh teas thought by the later Jews to be the abode of the souls of the pious until the resurrection: Lk. xxiii. 43, cf. xvi. 23 sqq. Hut some [e.g. Dillmann (as below p. 379)] understand that pas.sage of the heavenly paradise. 4. an upper region in the heavens : 2 Co. xii. 4 (where some maintain, others deny, that the term is equiv. to ό τρίτα oipavot in vs. 2) : with the .addition of τοΟ θ(οϋ, gen. of possessor, the abode of God and heavenly beings, to Avhieh true Christians ivill be taken after death, Rev. ii. 7 (cf. Gen. xiii. 10; Ezek. xxviii. 13; xxxi. 8). According to the opinion of many of the church Fathers, the paradise in ivhich our first parents dwelt before the fall still exists, neither on earth nor in the heavens, but .above and be- yond the world; cf. Thilo, Cod. apocr. Nov. Test., on Evang. Nicod. c. xxv. p. 748 sqq. ; and Bleck thinks that the word ought to be taken in this sense in Rev. ii. 7. Cf. Dillmann s. v. Paradies in Schenkel iv. 377 sqq. ; also Hitgenfeld, Die Clement. Recogn. und Ilom. p. 87 sq. ; Klopper on 2 Co. xii. 2-4, p. 507 sqq. [((ibttingen, 1869). See also B. D. s. v. ; McC. and S. s. v. ; Hamburg- er, Real-Encyclopudie, Abtheil. ii. s. v.] * ΐΓαρα-δ(χομ.αι ; fut. 3 pers. plur. παρα^ϊζονταί; depon. mid., but in bilil. and eccles. Grk. w. 1 aor. pass, παρί- 8€χθην (Acts XV. 4 LTTrWII; 2 Mace. iv. 22; [cf. B. ^I (44)]) ; 1. in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, jirop. to receive, take up, take upon one's self. Hence 2. to admit i. e. not to reject, to accept, receive : τοκ λόγοι», Mk. iv. 20 ; ίθη, .Vets xvi. 21 ; την μαρτνρίαν. Acts xxiL 18 ; κατηγυρίαν, 1 Tim. v. 19, (τάί δοκίμου! δράχμα!, Epict. diss. 1,7, 6) ; τινά, of a son, to acknowledge as one's own [A. V. receive/h], Ileb. xii. 6 (after Prov. iii. 12, wliere for ΠΧ1) ; of a delegate or messenger, to give due re- ception to, Acts XV. 4 L Τ Tr WH. [Cf. δίχομαι. fin.] • irapo-Sia -τριβή, -ψ. η, useless occupation, empty iusi'ne.vi, misemployment (see παρά, IV. 2) : 1 Tim. vi. 5 Rec. [cf. W. 102 (96)], see ίιαπαρατριβή. Not found elsewhere; [cf. παραΒιατνπόω in Justinian (iu Koumanoudes, Af'|α ra/it/ju) ; Λΐΐ. XV. 2 sq. G ; Λίκ. vii. 3, 5,9, l:i; with των άνθμύιπων added, as opp. to the divine teachings, .Mk. vii. 8; Col. ii. 8 [ivhere see Bp. Lghtft.]; πατρικοί nupaSoaets, precepts received from the fathers, whether handed down in the O. T. books or orally, Cal. i. U [(al. restrict the word here to the extra-biblical traditions; ef. Meyer or Bp. Lghtft. ad loc). Cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Tradition.] * ■π-αρα-ζηλόω, -ώ; (ui. ■παραζηλώσω ; 1 aor. τταρί^ι^λωσα ; to jirocoke to ζηΚο; [see παρά, IV. 3] ; a. to pro- voke lo jealousy or ricalnj : τινά, Ro. xi. 11, 14, (1 K. xiv. 22 i Sir. xxx. 3) ; firl τινι (see tVi, B. 2 a. δ. fin.), Ro. x. 19 (Deut. xxxii. 21). b. lo provoke to anger : 1 Co. x. 22 [on this see Prof, llort in 11'//. App. p. 167] (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 1, 7 sq.).* ιταρα-θοιλάσσιοϊ, -α, -ov, (^παρά and θάλασσα), be.iide the sea, bn the sea : Mt. iv. 13. (Sept. ; lldt., Xen., Thuc., Polyb., Diod., al.) * ιταρα-βίωρίω, -ω : impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. παρ(θ(ω- poiivTo ; 1. (-παρά i. (J. hi/ the side of [see ηαρά, IV. i]) to examine thiiu/s placed beside each other, to com- pare, (Xen., Plut., Lcian.). 2. (παρά i. q. over, be- yond, [Lat. praeter ; see παρά, IV. 2]) to overlook, neglect : Acts vi. 1 (Dem. p. 1414, 22 ; Diod., Dion. Hal., al.).* τταρα-θήκη, -i;t, ή, (παρατίθημι, q. v.), a deposit, a trust or thing consigned to one's faithful keeping, (Vulg. de- positum) : used of the correct knowledge and pure doc- trine of the gos])el, to be held firmly and faithfully, and to be conscientiously delivered unto others : 2 Tim. i. 1 2 (μοϋ possess, gen. [Mf trust committed unto me; Rec."^'"^"*' reads here παρακαταθήκη, q-v-l) ; d LTTrWH in 1 Tim. vi. 20 and 2 Tim. i. 14, (Lev. vi. 2, 4 ; 2 Mace. iii. 10, 15 ; Hdt. 9, 45 ; [al.]). In the Grk. writ, παρακαταθήκη (q. v.) is more common; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 312; W. 102 (9G).• παρ-αιν<ω, -ώ; irapf. 3 pers. sing, παρήν^ί ; to exhort, admonish : with the addition of λίγων foil, by direct dis- course. Acts xxvii. 9 ; τινά (in class. Grk. more com- monly TiW [W. 223 (209) ; B. § 133, 9]), foD. by an inf. Acts'xxvii. 22 [B. §§ 140, 1 ; 141, 2]. (From Hdt. and Pind. down ; 2 Mace. vii. 25 sq. ; 3 Mace. v. 1 7.) * ΐΓαρ-αιτ(Όμαι, -οϋμαι, impv. pres. παραιτοϋ ; [impf. 3 pers. plur. παρητοϋντο, Mk. xv. 6 Τ WH Tr mrg., where al. όνπ€ρ tJtovvto (q. v.)] ; 1 aor. παρτ]τησάμην : pf. pass, ptcp. παρ')Γημίνος with a pass, signif. ; fr. Aesehyl. and Pind. down ; 1. prop.ioa.s^'a/on//.si'rfe (παρά [IV. 1]), beg to have near one; to obtain by entreaty ; to beg from, to ask for, supplicate : [Mk. xv. 6 (see above)]. 2. to avert (παρά asiile [see παρά, IV. 1]) by entreaty or seek to avert, to deprecate; a. prop. foil, by μή and ace. w. inf. [to intreat that . . . noi], Heb. xii. 19 (Thuc. 5, 63) ; cf. W. 604 (.i61) ; [B. § 148, 13]. b. i.q. to re- fuse, decline : το άποθαν(ϊν, Acts xxv. 11 (θαν(ΐν ην παραι- τούμαι, Joseph, de vita sua 29). c. i. (\. to shun, avoid : τι, 1 Tim. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 25 ; τινά, 1 Tim. v. 11 ; Tit. iii. 10; i.q. to refuse, reject, Heb. xii. 25. d. to avert displeasure by entreaty, i. e. to beg pardon, crave in- dulgence, to excuse : ίχ^ μι παρτ^τημίνον (see (χω, I. 1 f.), Lk. xiv. 18 sq. (of one excusing himself for not accept- ing an invitation to a feast, Joseph, antt. 7, 8, 2).* ιταρα-καθί'ίομιοι : to sit dotvn beside [παρά, IV. 1], seat one's self, (Xen., Plat., al.) ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. παρακηΑί- σθίΐ! (Joseph, antt. 6, 1 1, 9) ; πρΟ! τι, Lk. χ. 39 Τ Tr W'll [cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 269].* παρα-καθ(ζω: 1 aor. ptcp. fern, παρακαθίσασα, to make to sit down beside [(παρά, IV. 1)] ; Ιο set beside, place near ; intrans. to sit down beside : παρά τι, Lk. χ. 39 R G L [but L mrg. πρόί] (Sept. Job ii. 13 ; Plut. Marius 1 7 ; Cleom. 37 ; in this sense the mid. is more com. in the Grk. writ.).* τταρα-καλίω, -ώ ; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρ(κάλ(ΐ, 1 and 3 pers. |)lur. παρίκάλουι/ ; 1 aor. παρικάλισα ; Pass., pres. παρακαλούμαι; ]>ί.παρακ(κλημαι; 1 nor. παρ(κλήθην ] 1 fut. παρακληθήσομαι ; fr. Aesehyl. and Hdt. down ; I. as in Grk. writ, to call to one's side, call for, summon : τινά, w. an inf. indicating the purpose. Acts xxviii. 20 [al. (less naturally) refer this to II. 2, making the ace. the subj. of the inf.]. II. to address, speak to, (call to, call on), wliieh may be done in the way of exhortation, entreaty, comfort, instruction, etc. ; hence result a varie- ty of senses, on which see Knapp, Scripta varii arg. ed. 2 p. 1 1 7 sqq. ; ef. Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 32 sq. 1. as in Grk. auth., to admonish, exhort: ab.sol., Lk. iii. 18; [Acts XX. 1 (RGom.)] : Ro. xii. 8; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Heb. X. 25 ; 1 Pet. v. 12; foil, by direct disc. 2 Co. v. 20 ; foil. by λίγων w. direct disc. Acts ii. 40 ; foil, by an inf. where in Lat. ul, 1 Tim. ii. 1 ; τινά. Acts xv. 32 ; xvi. 40; 2 Co. X. 1; 1 Th. ii. 12 (11); v. 11; 1 Tim. v. 1; Heb. iii. 13; τινά λόγω πολλω. Acts xx. 2 ; τινά foil, by direct disc, 1 Co. iv. 16 ; 1 Th. V. 14 ; Heb. xiii. 22 [here L WIl mrg. inf.] ; 1 Pet. v. 1 sq. ; τινά foil, by an inf. where in Lat. ut [cf. B. §§ 140, 1 ; 141,2; "W. 332 (311) ; 335 (315) n.]: inf. pres., Acts xi. 23 ; xiv. 22 ; Phil, iv 2 ; 1 Th. iv. 10 ; Tit. ii. 6 ; 1 Pet. ii. 11 (here Lehm. adds υμάς to the inf., and AVH mrg. with codd. ACL etc. read άπίχ^σθ^) ; Jude 3 ; inf. aor.. Acts xxvii. 33 sq. ; Ro. xii. 1 ; xv. 30 ; 2 Co. ii. 8 ; vi. 1 ; Eph. iv. 1 ; 1 Tim. i. 3 ; Heb. xiii. 19 ; τινά foil, by "iva w. subjunc. [cf. B. § 139, 42 ; \\. 335 U.S.], 1 Co. i. 10; xvi. 15 sq.; 2 Co. viii. 6; 1 Th. iv. 1; 2 Th. iii. 12; to enjoin a thing by exhortation [cf. B. § 141, 2], 1 Tim. vi. 2 ; Tit. ii. 15. 2. to beg, entreat, beseech, (Joseph, antt. 6, 7, 4 ; [11, 8, 5] ; often in Epict. cf. Schweighauser,\naey. graecit. Epict. p. 411; Plut. apophth. regum, Mor. ii. p. 30 ed. Tauchn. [vi. G95 ed. Reiske ; exx. fr. Polyb., Diod., Philo, al., in Soph. Lex. s. V.]; not thus in the earlier Grk. auth. exc. where the gods are called on for aid, in the expressions. παρακαΚΛν 0fois, so θ€Ον in Joseph, antt. 6, 2, 2 and 7, 4 ; [cf. W. 22]) : [absol., Philem. 9 (yet see the Comm. ad loc.)] ; τίνα', Mt. viii. 5 ; xviii. 32 ; xxvi. 53 ; Mk. i. 40 ; Acts xvi. 9 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; πολλά, much, Mk. v. 23 ; τινά ntpi nvos. τταρακαΚύτΓτω 483 •καρακοη Philem. 1 ; foil, by direct disc. Acts ix. 38 L Τ Tr WH ; with λ/γωι/ added and direct disc, Mt. xviii. 29 ; Mk. v. 12; [Lk. vii.4 (Tdf. ηρώτων)^: without the ace. Actsxvi. 15 ; Ttra foU. by an inf. [\V. and B. u. s.], Mk. v. 1 7 ; Lk. viii. 41 ; Acts viii. 31 ; .\i.\. 31 ; .\.\viii. 14, (1 Maec. i.\. 30) ; τινά foU. by όπως, Mt. viii. 34 [here Lchm. Ίνα (see above)] ; Acts xsv. 2, (4 Mace. iv. 1 1 ; Plut. Demetr. c. 38); Tu-ofoll. by?>'a[W.§44, 8 a.; B. § 139,42], Mt. xiv. 36 ; Alk. v. 18 ; vi. 56 ; vii. 32 ; viii. 22 ; Lk. viii. 31 sq. ; [2 Co. i.x. 5] ; τινά ΰπί'ρ twos. Ίνα, 2 Co. xii. 8 ; ττοΧΚα (much) Τίνα, Ίνα, Mk. v. 10 ; 1 Co. xvi. 12; foil, by τον μή w. inf. [B. § 140, 16 δ. ; W. 325 (305)], Acts xxi. 12 ; by an inf. Acts Lx. 38 R G ; by an ace. w. inf.. Acts xiii. 42 ; xxiv. 4; [Ro. xvi. 17]. to strive to appease by entreaty: absol. 1 Co. iv. 13; τινά, Lk. xv. 28; Acts xvi. 39, (2 Mace. xiii. 23). 3. to console, to encourage and strengthen by consolation, to comfort, (Sept. for onj ; very rarely so in Grk. auth., as Plut. 0th. 16) : absol. 2 Co. ii. 7 ; τινά, 2 Co. i. 6 ; vii. 6 sq. ; iv w. a dat. of the thing with which one comforts another, 1 Th. iv. 18; τίνα 8ιά τταρα- κΧήσ^ως, 2 Co. i. 4 ; w. an ace. of the contents, 8ιά rijs τταρακΧ. ης (for ην, see of, rj, o, II. 2 e. a.) παρακαΚονμΐθα, ibid. ; in pass, to receive consolation, be comforted, Mt. ii. 18; 2 Co. xiii. 11 ; fVi τινι over (in) a thing [see eVi, B. 2 a. 8.], 2 Co. i. 4 ; of the consolation (comfort) given not in words but by the experience of a happier lot or by a happy issue, i. q. to refresh, cheer : pass., Λίΐ. v. 4 (5) ; Lk. xvi. 25 ; Acts xx. 12 ; 2 Co. vii. 13 (where a full stop must be put after παρακ(κλήμ.) ; ?v τινι, by the help of a thing, 2 Co. vii. 6 sq. ; «ττί τινι, 1 Th. iii. 7 ; with (iv) παρα- κλήσίΐ added, 2 Co. vii. 7. 4. to encourage, strength- en, [i. e. in the language of A. V. comfort (see Wright, Bible Word-Book, 2d ed., s. v.)], (in faith, piety, hope) : ras καρϋας, your hearts, Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. ii. 2 ; iv. 8; 2 Th. ii. 17, (also χείρας aaueveis. Job iv. 3 for pin ; ■γόνατα ηαράΚ(\υμ(να, Is. xxxv. 3 sq. [see the Ilebr.] for ysx). 5. it combines the ideas of exhorting and comforting and encouraging in Ro. xii. 8; 1 Co. xiv. 31 ; 1 Th. iii. 2. 6. to instruct, leach : iv tji 5ι8ασκαλία, Tit. i. 9. [CoMP. : σνμ^αρακαλίω.~\ * ΐΓορα-κολΐΐΓτω : to cover over, cover up, hide, conceal : trop. ην 7ταρακ(κα\νμμίνον απ αντων (\it was concealed from them], a Hebraism, on which see in άποκρνπτω, b.), Lk. ix. 45 (Ezek. xxii. 26 ; Plat., Plut., al.).* ΐΓαρα.-κατα.ΐήκη, -ης, ή, (παρακατατίθημι), a deposit, a trust: soRec. inl Tim.vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14; [Rec.«'= les» in 2 Tim. i. 12 also]. (Hdt., Thue., Xen., Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 8, 5 p. 1135," 4 ; Polyb., Diod. 15, 76; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 38 ; Aeh v. h. 4, 1) ; see παραθήκη above.* Ίταρά-κειμιαι ; (παρά and κ(Ίμαι) ; to lie beside [ηαρά, TV. 1], to be near (fr. Horn, down); to be present, at hand: Ro. vii. 18 (where see Meyer), 21.* ΐΓαρά-κλησ-ΐ5, -(ως, ή, (παρακά\ίω, q. V.) ; 1. prop, α calling near, summons, (esp. for help, Thuc. 4, 61 ; Dem. p. 275, 20). 2. imploration, supplication, en- treaty: 2 Co. viii. 4 (Strab. 13 p. 581 ; Joseph, antt. 3, 1,5; [c. Ap. 2, 23, 3 ττ. προς τιιν θ(6ν €στω] ; λόγοι παρα- κλήσίως, words of appeal, containing entreaties, 1 Maec. X. 24). 3. exhortation, admonition, encouragement: Acts XV. 31 [al. refer this to 4] ; 1 Co. xiv. 8 ; 2 Co. viii. 17; Phil. ii. 1 ; 1 Tim. iv. 13 ; Heb. xii. 5; Xoyos της παρακ\ήσ(ως, Heb. xiii. 22, (2 Macc. vii. 24; xv. 9 (11); Plat. def. 415 e.; Thue. 8, 92; Aeschin., Polyb., al.). 4. consolation, comfort, solace : 2 Co. i. 4-7 ; Heb. vi. 18; [add. Acts ix. 31 ; 2 Thess. ii. 16], (Jer. xvi. 7; Hos. xiii. 14; [Job xxi. 2; Nab. iii. 7]; Phalar. ep. 97 init.) ; τών γράφων, afforded by the contents of the Scriptures, Ro. xv. 4 [\V. 189 (178)] ; θιός της παρακλ., God the author and bestower of comfort, Ro. xv. 5 : 2 Co. i. 3 ; solace or cheer which comes from a happy lot or a prosperous state of things, Lk. vi. 24 ; 2 Co. vii. 4, 7, 13 [cf. W. 393 (368)]; Philem. 7; by melon, that tchich affords comfort or refreshment; thus of the Messi- anic salvation, Lk. ii. 25 (so the Rabbins call the Mes- siah the consoler, the comforter, κατ (ξοχην, ΟΠ;ρ [cf. Wunsche, Neue Beitrage u. s. w. ad loc. ; Schottgen, Horae Hebr. etc. ii. 18]). 5. univ. persuasive dis- course, stirring address, — instructive, admonitory, consol- atory; powerful hortatory discourse: Ro. xii. 8; Xoyor παρακλήσιως [A. V. word of exhortation]. Acts xiii. 15 ; νιος παρ. [a son of exhortation], a man gifted in teaching, admonishing, consoling. Acts iv. 36 ; used of the apostles' instruction or preaching, 1 Th. ii. 3.* ΐΓοφά-κλητοβ, -οι/, ό, (παρακάΚίω), prop, summoned, called to one's side, esp. called to one's aid ; hence 1. one who pleads another's cause before a judge, a pleader, counsel for defence, legal assistant ; an advocate : Dem. p. 341, 11 ; Diog. Laert. 4, 50, cf. DioCass. 46, 20. 2. univ. one who pleads another's cause with one, an inter- cessor: Philo, de mund. opif. §59; de Josepho § 40 ; in Flaccum §§ 3 and 4 ; so of Christ, in his exaltation at God's right hand, pleading with God the Father for the pardon of our sins, 1 Jn. ii. 1 (in the same sense, of the divine Logos in Philo, vita Moys. iii. § 14). 3. in the widest sense, a hel/jcr, succorer, aider, a.'^sistant ; so of the Holy Spirit destined to take the place of Christ with the apos- tles (after his ascension to the Father), to lead them to a deeper knowledge of gospel truth, and to give them the divine strength needed to enable them to undergo trials and persecutions on behalf of the divine kingdom : Jn. xiv. 16, 26; xv. 26; xvi. 7, cf. Mt. x. 19sq. ; Mk. .xiii. 11 ; Lk. xii. 11 sq. (Philo de mund. opif. § 6 init. says that God in creating the world had no need of a παρά- κλητος, an adviser, counsellor, helper. The Targums and Talmud borrow the Greek words O'Sp^i) and SD'^^p"!? and use them of any intercessor, defender, or advocate; cf. Buxtorf Lex. falm. p. 1843 [(ed. Fischer p. 916)]; so Tarj. on Job xxxiii. 23 for I'-S-p ^xSo, i• e. an angel that pleads man's cause with God ; [cf. πλουσίων παρά- κλΐ)τοι in ' Teaching ' etc. 5 sub fin. ; Barn. ep. 20, 2 ; Constitt. apost. 7, 18]). Cf. Knapp, Seripta varii Argu- ment!, p. 124 sqq. ; DUsterdieck on 1 Jn. ii. 1, p. 147 sqq. ; [ Wathins, Excursus G, in EUicott's N. T. Com. for Eng. Readers ; Westcott in the " Speaker's Com." Additional Note on Jn. xiv. 16 ; Schaff in Lange ibid.].* Ίταρ-ακοή, -ης, ή, (παρά Lat. praeter [see παρά, TV. "ΤταρακοΧουθΐω 484 irapaXvu 2]) ; 1. prop, a hearing amiss (Plat. epp. 7 p. 34 1 b.). 2. [^unwitlingjiess to hear i. e.] diii)beilience : Ro. V. 1 9 ; 2 Co. .\. « ; Heb. ii. 2. [Cf. Trench § Ixvi.] • παρ-ακολουθ('ω, -ώ ; f ut. παρακολουθήσω ; 1 aor. παρηκο- Κοΰβησα (1 Tim. iv. (i L inr<;. WII mrg. ; 2 Tim. iii. 10 L Τ Tr Wll t.\t.) ; pf. παρηκολούθηκα ; 1. to /oltuw after ; so to follow one as to be always at his siile [see παρά, IV. 1] ; to follow close, accompany, (so fr. Arstph. and Xen. down). 2. metaph. a. lo be always present, to attend one whcrei-cr he (joes : nvi, Mk. xvi. 17 [where Tr Wll t.\t. ακοΚουθ-, q. v.]. b. to follow up a thing in mind so as to attain to the knowledge of it, i. e. to understand, [cf. our follow a matter tip, trace its course, etc.] ; to examine thoroughly, investigate : πάσιν (i. e. πράγ- μασιν), all things that have taken place, Lk. i. 3 (very often so in Grk. auth., as Dem. pro cor. c. 53 [p. 285, 23]). c. to follow faithfully sc. a standard or rule, to conform one's self to : with a dat. of the thing, 1 Tim. iv. 6; 2 Tim. iii. 10, (i Mace. ix. 27). Cf. the full discus- sion of this word by Grimm in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. for 1871, p. 46sq.• παρκικούω : 1 aor. τταρήκουσα ; 1. to hear aside i. e. casually or cai-elesxly or amiss [see παρά, IV. 2] (often so in class. Grk. ; on the freq. use of this verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. (1875) p. 106). 2. lo be unwilling to hear, i. e. on hearing to neglect, to pay no heed to, (w. a gen. of the pers., Polyb. 2, 8, 3; 3, 15, 2) ; contrary to Grk. usage [but cf. Plut. Philop. § 16, 1 και παρώι'ιν τι κ. παρακοϊσαι των άμαρτα- νομίνων, / false reasoning (joined to (ξαπατάν, Epict. diss. 2, 20, 7) ; hence c. univ. to deceive, delude, circumvent: τινά. Col. ii. 4 ; Jas. i. 22, (Sept. several times for ΠΏ"!).* wapaAuTiKOs, -ή, -όν. (fr. παραλύω, q. v.), paralytic, i. e. suffering from the relaxing of the nerves of one side; univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the palsy'] : Mt. iv. 24 ; viii. 6 ; ix. 2, 6 ; Mk. ii. 3-5, 9 ; and L WII mrg. in Lk. v. 24. [Cf. Riehm, HWB. s. v. Krankheiten, 5 ; B. D. Am. ed. p. 1866".] * παρα-λνω : [pf. pass. ptcp. παραλίλυμ(νος'\ ; prop, to loose on one side or from the side [cf . παρά, IV. 1 ] ; Ut loose or part things placed side by side ; lo loosen, dissolve, τταραμΐνω 485 Ίταραρρΐω hence, to weaken, enfeeble : τταράΚΛυμίνο!, suffering from the relaxing ofihe nerves, unstrung, weak o/limb, \^palsie ; (παρά and ρίω) ; fr. Soph., Xen., and Plat, down ; lo floiv past (παραρρύον ΰδωρ. Is. xUv. 4), lo glide by : μήποτ€ παραρρνωμιν (2 aor. pass, subjunc ; cf. Btlm. Ausf . Spr. ii. p. 2>i 7 ; [ Veitch s. v. ρίω ; WH. App. p. 1 70] ; but L Τ Tr WH παραρυωμ^ν ; see P, p), lest we be carried past,pass by, [R. V. drif away from them] (missing the thing), i. e. lest the salvation which the things heard show us how to obtain slip away from us, Heb. ii. 1. In τταρασημος 486 τταραφρονία Grk. auth. παμραρΛ μοΊ τι, α thing escapes me, Soph. Philoct. 653; trop. .■iliji.i J'rom mi/ mind. Plat. legg. 6 p. 781 a. ; in tlie sense of uvijUcI, μη nappapvgs, τήρησαν Se ΐμήν βονλήν, Prov. iii. 21.' τταράσ-ημοβ, -ov, (παρά [(J. v. IV. 2], and σήμα [a mark]) ; 1. marked fiilselij, spurious, counterfeit; as coin. 2. marked beside or on the mart/in ; so of noteworthy words, which the reader of a book marks on the margin; hence 3. univ. twteil, marked, conspicuous, remark- able, (of persons, in a l)ad si'nse, notorious) ; marked with a si(/n : eV πλοι'ω παρασήμω Αιοσκυϋροί!, in a sliip marked with the image or figure of the Dioscuri, Acts x.wiii. 11 [if. R. 1). s. V. Castor and Pollux].• •ΐΓαρα-<ΓΚί«ό'ζω ; pf. pass, πapeσιh. Lex. s. v. 3].* τταρα-τίίνω : 1 aor. wapeVf ινα ; fr. Hdt. down ; to extend beside, to stretch out lengthwise, to extend ; to prolong : τον λϋγοίΊ his discourse, Acts xx. 7 (Xoyour, Aristot. poet. 17, 5 p. U.-).-/, 2 ; μίθην, 9, 4 p. 1451^ 38).» ΐΓορο-τηρί'ω, -ώ : impf. 3 pers. ρ\ιιτ. παριτήρουν ; 1 aor. παριτήρησα; Mid., pres. ■παρατηρούμαι; irapf. 3 pers. plur. παρ(τηροΐιντο ; prop, to stand beside and watch [cf. παρά, IV. 1]; '0 tcatch assiduously, observe carefully; a. to iratch, attend to, with the eyes : τα ex του οΐρανοΰ γι- ■γνήμινα, of auguries, Dio Cass. 38, 13; τινά, one, to see what he is going to do (Xen. mem. 3, 14, 4) ; contextu- ally in a bad sense, to watch insidiously, Lk. xx. 20 [Tr mrg. άποχωρι/σαιτΕί] (joined with evfSpfidv, Polyb. 17, 3,2); τινά (Polyb. 11,9, 9; Sept. Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 12; Sus. 16) foil, by the interrog. fl, Mk. iii. 2 R G Τ WH Tr txt. ; Lk. vi. 7 Rec. ; mid. to watch for one's self: Mk. iii. 2 L Tr mrg. ; Lk. vi. 7 L Τ Tr AVH, [(in both pass. foil, by interrog. ίί)] ; Lk. xiv. 1 ; active w. an ace. of place (Polyb. 1, 29, 4) : τάί ττύΧαί [foil, by 5πως, cf. B. 237 (205)], Acts ix. 24 RG, where L Τ Tr AVE give mid. παριτηροϋντο. b. to observe i. q. to keep scrupulously ; to neglect nothing requisite to the religious ohserrnnre of: i3Soiiabas, Joseph, antt. 3, 5, 5 ; [την των σαββ. ήμίραν, id. 14, 10, 25] ; mid. {for one's self, i. 6. for one's salva- tion'), ήμίραί, μήνας, καιρούς, Gal. iv. 10 (οσα προστάττοΐΐ- σιν at νύμαι, Uio Cass. 53, 10 ; [τα ei's βρώσιν oi wyo/ii- σμίνα, Joseph. C. Ap. 2, 39, 2]).* ΐΓαρα-τήρησ -is, -ίωί, ή, {παρατηρίω), observation ([Polyb. l(i, 22, 8], Diod., Joseph., Antonin., Plut., al.) : μιτάπαρα- τηρήσεως, in such a manner that it can bo watched with the eyes, i. e. in a visible manner, Lk. xvii. 20.• τταρα-τίθημι ; fut. παραθήσω ; 1 aor. τταρίθηκα ; 2 aor. suljjiinc. 3 pers. plur. παραθώσιν, infin. παραθάναι (Mk. viii. 7 R (j) ; Pass., pres. ptcp. τταρατιθίμίνος ; 1 aor. infin. ΤΓαρατ(θήναί (Mk. viii. 7 Lchm.) ; Mid., pres.παpατ^δfpαι; fut. παραθήσαμαι; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. τταρίθιντο, inqiv. παρύθαυ (2 Tim. ii. 2) ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. chiefly for Dlu ; 1. to place beside, place near [cf. παρά, IV. 1] OT set before: τινί Ti, as a. food: Mk. vi. 41; viii. 6 sq. ; Lk. ix. 16 ; xi. 6 ; τράπιζαν a table, i. e. food placed on a table. Acts .xvi. 34 (Kp. ad Diogn. 5, 7) ; τα παρα- τιθ(μ(να ύμίν, [Α.Υ. such things as are set before you^, of food, Lk. x. 8 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 30) ; sing. 1 Co. x. 27. b. to set before (one) in teaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 14 ; Sept. Ex. xix. 7) : rivi παραβολήν, Mt. xiii. 24, 31. Mid. to set forth {from one's self), to explain : foil, by ότι. Acts xvii. 3. 2. Mid. to jilace down {from one's self or for one's self) with any one, to deposit ; to intrust, commit to one's charge, (Xen. respub. Athen. 2, 16 ; Polyb. 33, 12, 3 ; Plut. Num. 9 ; Tob. iv. 1) : τι τινι, a thing to one to be cared for, Lk. xii. 48 ; a thing to be religiously kept and taught to others, 1 Tim. i. 18; 2 Tim. ii. 2; τινά Tiw, to commend one to another for protection, safety, etc.. Acts xiv. 23 ; x.x. 32, (Diod. 17, 23) ; τάς ^υχάς to God, 1 Pet. iv. 19; το πν^ϋμά μου els xeipas Beaii, Lk. xxiii. 46 ; Ps. xxx. (xxxi.) 6.* ■ΐΓορα-τνγχάνω ; fr. Hom. (IL 11, 74) down; to chance to be by [cf. παρά, IV. 1], to happen to be present, to meet by chance: Acts .xvii. 17.* ΐΓαρ-αντ£κα [cf. B. §146, 4], adv., for the moment: 2 Co. iv. 17. (Tragg., Xen., Plat., sqq.)' παρα-ψ(ρω : [1 aor. inf. napeveyKai (Lk. xxii. 42 Tdf., cf. Veitch p. 609)] ; 2 aor. inf. πapeveγκeίv (Lk. xxii. 42 RG), impv. πapevtyκe [(ibid. L Tr WH) ; pres. pass. παραφίρομαι ; see reff. s. v. φ/ρω] ; 1. to bear to [cf. παρά, IV. 1], bring to, put before : of food (Hdt., Xen., al.). 2. to lead aside [cf. παρά, IV. 2] from the right course or path, to carry away: Jude 12 [R.V. carried along'] (where Kec■πepιφtp.) ; from the truth, Hob. xiii. 9 where Rec. πepιφtp■, (Plat. Phaedr. p. 265 b. ; Plut. Timol. 6 ; Antonin. 4, 43 ; Ildian. 8, 4, 7 [4 ed. Bekk.]). 3. to carry past, lead past, i. e. to cause to pass by, to remove : τι άπα τινας, Mk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. xxii. 42.• Ίταρα-φρονίω, -ώ ; (παράφρων [fr. παρά (q. V. TV. 2) and φρήν, ' beside one's wits ']) ; to be beside one's self, out oj one's senses, void of understanding, insane: 2 Co. xi. 23. (From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; once in Sept., Zech. vii. 11.)• 'ΤΓαρα-ψρον£α, -as, η, {παράφρων [see the preceding word]), madness, insanity: 2 Pet. ii. 16. The Grk. writ τταραχειμάξω 487 Ίταρβμβόλή use not this word but παραφροσννη [cf. W. 24 ; 95 (90)].• ιταρα-χΗμάζω : fut. παραχαμάσω ; 1 aor. inf. ηαραχα- μάσαι ; pf. ptcp. παρακ^χαμακω! ; to winter, pass the win- ter, with one or at a place : Acts xxvii. 12 ; 1 Co. xvi. 6 ; eV TTJ νήσω. Acts xxviii. 11 ; c«i, Tit. iii. 12. (Dem. p. 909, 15 ; 'Polyb. 2, 64, 1 ; Diod. 19, 34; Plut. Sertor. 3; Dio Cass. 40, 4.) • τταρα-χίΐμαο-ία, -as, ή, {τίαραχαμάζω), a passing the winter, wintering : Acts xxvii. 1 2. (Polyb. 3, 34, 6 ; [3, 35, 1]; Diod. 19, 68.)• τταρο-χρήμα, (prop. i. q. irapa το χρήμα; cf. OUT on the spot), fr. Hdt. down ; immediately, forthwith, instantly : Mt. xxi. 19sq. ; Lk. i. 64; iv. 39 ; v. 25; viii. 44,47, 55 ; xiii. 13; xviii. 43 ; xix. 11; x.xii. 60 ; Acts iii. 7; v. 10; ix. 18 Rec. ; xii. 23 ; xiii. 11 ; xvi. 26 [ WH br. παραχρ.], 33. (Sap. xviii. 17; 2 Mace. iv. 34, 38, etc.; Sept. for Ditilp, Num. vi. 9 ; xii. 4; Is. xxix. 5 ; xxx. 13.) * irdpSaXis, -f ωί, ή, fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for ipj ; a pard, panther, leopard ; a very fierce Asiatic and African animal, having a tawny skin marked with large black spots [cf. Tristram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 1 1 1 sqq. ; BB. DD. s. v.] : Rev. xiii. 2.* trap-f8p13 ; νόμον, Lys. p. UI7, 52; Dem. p. 977, 14). γ. to be led by, to be carried past, be acerted : από τικογ, from one i. e. so as not to hit, not to appear to, (2 Chr. ix. 2) ; παριλθάτ» άπ' f'poC TO ποτηριυν, Mt. xxvi. 39 ; παριλθι'ιν, 42 [here G Τ Tr WH oni. I, br. άπ' ίροΟ] ; άπ' αυτοί ij ωρα, Mk. xiv. 35. 2. (παρά to [cf. παρά, IV. 1]) Ιο come 7iear, come forward, arrive: l.k. xii. 37; xvii. 7; Acts xxiv. 7 Kec. (and in (Jrk. autli. fr. Acsehyl. and Ildt. down). [Syn. see παραβαίνω, fin. CoMP. άντι-παρίρχομακ.^ ' wdpco-is, -(ως, ή, (παρίημι, q. v.), pretermission, passing over, letting pass, neglecting, disregarding : δια την πάρισι» . . . άνοχ^ Toil θ(οΰ, because God had patiently let pass the sins committed previously (to the expiatory death of Christ), i. e. had tolerated, had not punished (and so man's conception of his holiness wa.s in danger of be- coming dim, if not extinct), Ro. iii. 20, where cf. Fritz- sche ; [Trench § xxxiii. (Hippocr., Dion. Hal., al.)].* παρ-ίχω ; ini|)f. παρύχον, 3 pers. plur. παρΰχαν (Acts xxviii. 2 L Τ Tr WH ; see ίχω, init., and άπίρχημαι, iiiit.) ; fut. 3 pers. sing, παρίξ^ι (Lk. vii. 4 RG ; see below); 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. παρίσχον, ptcp. παράσχων ; Mid., [jires. παρίχομαι]; impf. παριιχόμην; fut. 2 pers. sing, παρίξη (Lk. vii. 4 L Τ Tr WH) ; fr. Horn, down ; Plautus's jn-ae- hiheo i. e. praebeo (Lat. prae fr. the (irk. παραί [but see Curtius §§ 346, 380 (cf. παρά, IV. 1 fin.)]) ; i. e. fi. to reach forth, offer: τι τινι, Lk. vi. 29. b. to show, a [ford, sti/)j)ly: τινι ήσυχίαν. Acts .xxii. 2; φιΧανβρωπίαν, Acts xxviii. 2 ; πάντα, 1 Tim. vi. 1 7. c. to be the author of, or to cause one to have ; to give, bring, cause, one something — either unfavorable: κόπους. Jit. xxvi. 10; Mk. xiv. 6; Lk. xi. 7; xviii. 5; Gal. vi. 17 (παρ. πόνον, Sir. xxix. 4 ; άγόινα. Is. vii. 13 ; πράγματα, very often fr. Ildt. down ; also όχλον, see Passow s. v. όχλος, 3 ; [L. and S. s. v. II.]) ; — or favorable : (ρ-γασίαν. Acts xvi. 16, and Lchm. in xix. 24 ; πϊστιν, [A. V. to give assurarice']. Acts xvii. 31, on which phrase cf. Fischer, De viliis lexic. N. T. pj). 37-39 ; i. q. to occasion (ζητήσίΐς, see οΐκοΐΌρια), 1 Tim. i. 4. Mid. 1. to offer, show, οτ present one's self: with ίαντόν added (λΥ. § 38, 6 ; [Β. § 135, 6]), w. an ace. of the predicate, τύπον, a pattern, Tit. ii. 7; παρά- δειγμα . . . ToiofSe favTov παρείχετο, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 39; [.Joseph, e. Ap. 2, 15, 4] ; in the act., Plut. puer. educ. c. ■-Ό init. 2. to exhibit or offer on one's oivn pari: το δίκαιον το'ις δοίλοις. Col. iv. 1 ; to render or afford from one's own resources or by one's own power : τικί τι, Lk. vii. 4 (where if we read, with Rec, παρέξει, it must be taken as the 3d pers. sing, of the fut. act. [in oj)p. to W. § 13, 2 a.], the elders being introduced as talking among themselves ; but undoubtedly the reading παρέξη should be restored [see above ad init.], and the elders are ad- dressing Jesus ; cf. Meyer ad loc. ; [and on the construc- tion, cf. B. § 139, 32]). On the mid. of this verb, cf. Kruger § 52, 8, 2 ; W. § 38, 5 end ; [EUic. and Lghtft. on Col."!, s'.].• Ίταρηγορία, -at, ij, (παρηγορεω [^to address]), prop, an ταρθενία 489 ναροικεω ctddressing, address ; i. e. a. exhortation (4 Mace. T. Π ; vi. 1 ; Apoll. Rh. 2, 1281). b. comfort, solace, relief, alleviation, consolation : Col. iv. 11 [where see Bp. Lghtft.]. (Aeschjl. Ag. yS; Pliilo, q. deus imuiort. § 14; de somn. i. § 18; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 3 ; often in Plut. ; Hierocl.) * ΐΓαρθ€ν(α, -as, ή. (παρθίνα), virginity : Lk. ii. 36. (Jer. iii. 4 ; Pind., Aeschyl., Eur., Diod., I'lut., Hdian., al. [cf. Field, Otiiiiu Norv. pars iii. ad luc.].) * •ΐΓορθί'νοί, -ου, ή, 1. a virgin : Mt. i. 23 (fr. Is. vii. 14); xxv. 1, 7, 11; Lk.i.27; Acts.\.\i.9; 1 Co. vii. 25, 28, 33(34), (fr. Horn, down; Sept. clxie% for n'7ina, several times for nii'i ; twice for ΠΟ^^' i. e. either a marriageable maiden, or a goung (married) woman. Gen. x.xiv. 43 ; Is. vii. 14, on which (last) word cf., besides Gesenius, Tlies. p. 1037, Credner, Beitrage. u.s.w. ii. p. 197 sijii. ; παρθίνο! of a young bride, newly married λτο- man, Horn. II. 2, 514) ; η παρθ- rivos, one's marriageable daughter, 1 Co. vii. 36 sqq. ; παρθ. άγρή, a pure virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2. 2. a man who has abstained from all uncleanness and whoredom attendant on idolatry, and so has kept his chastity : Rev. .\iv. 4, where see De Wette. In eccl. writ, one ivho has never had commerce with women ; so of Joseph, in Fabricius, Cod. pseudepigr. Vet. Test. ii. pp. 92, 98; of Abel and Melchizedek, in Suidas [10 a. and 2450 b.] ; esp. of the apostle John, as in Nonnus, metaph. ev. Joann. 19, 140 (Jn. xi.x. 26), ήνίδ^ napeivou via. Πάρθοι, -ου, 6, a Parthian, an inhabitant of Parthia, a district of .^sia, bounded on the N. by Ilyrcania, on the E. by Ariana, on the S. by Carmania ueserta, on the W. by Media ; plur. in Acts ii. 9 of the Jewish residents of Parthia. [B. D. s. v. Parthians ; Geo. Rawlinson, Sixth Great Oriental Monarchy, etc. (Lond. 1873).]* παρ-ίημι : 2 aor. inf. napdvai (Lk. xi. 42 L Τ Tr WH) ; pf. pass. ptcp. napapivoi ; f r. Horn, down ; 1. to let pass ; to pass by, neglect, (very often in Grk. writ. fr. Find., Aeschyl., Hdt. down), to disregard, omit : ri, Lk. xi. 42 [R G άφ(('και] (αμαρτήματα. Ιο pass over, let go un- punished. Sir. xxiii. 2 ; [τιμωρίαν, Lycurg. 148, 41]). 2. lo relax, loosen, let go, [see παρά, IV. 2], (e. g. a bow) ; pf. pass. ptcp. παρίΐμίνος, relaxed, urutrung, weakened, exhausted, (Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., al.) : χ«ρβΓ, Heb. xii. 12; Sir. ii. 13; xxv. 23, cf. Zeph. iii. 16; Jer. iv. 31 ; dpyoi και παριψίνοι «πι ίργον αγαθόν, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 34, 4 cf. 1. Cf. παραλύω.' ιταρ-ΐίΓτανω, see παρίστημι. Ίταρ-ίσ-τημι and (in later writ., and in the N. T. in Ro. VI. 13, 16) παριστάνω; fut. παραστήσω', 1 aor. irapt σττ^σα ; 2 aor. παρίστην ; pf. παρίστηκα, ptcp. παριστηκώί and jrapfo-Tcis; plupf. 3 pers. plur. παραστήκασαν (Acts i. 10 [W II παρίΓΓτ. ; see Ίστημι, init.]) ; 1 fut. mid. παραστψ σομαι; fr. Horn. down. 1. The pres., impf., fut. and 1 aor. act. have a transitive sense (Sept. chiefly for ''''?J?,n)> a. to place beside or near [παρά, IV. 1]; to set at hand ; to present ; to proffer ; to provide: κτήνη. Acts xxiii. 24 {σκάφη, 2 Mace. xii. 3) ; τικά or τί τινι, to place a person or thing at one's disposal, Mt. xxvi. 53 ; to present a person for another to see and question, Acts xxiii. 33 ; to present or show, τινά or τί with an ace. of the quality which the person or thing exliibits : oU παρίστησ(ν f αυτόν ζώντα. Acts i. 3 ; add, Ro. vi. 13, 16, 19 ; 2 Co. xi. 2 ; Eph. v. 27 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15, ("te vegetnm nobis in Graecia siste," Cic. ad Att. 10, 16, 6) ; τιχά with a pred. ace. full, by κατινώπιύν tivos. Col. i. 22 ; ίαυτον &s [ώσίΐ] Tira τινι, Ιίο. vi. 13 ; to bring, lead to, in the sense of presenting, without a dat. : Acts ix. 41 ; Col. i. 28. of sacrifices or of things consecrated to God : τα σώματα υμών θυσίαν . . . το> θιω, Ro. .xii. 1 (so also in prof. auth. : Polyb. 16, 25, 7; Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 4 ; Lcian. deor. conciL 13 ; Lat. admoveo, Verg. Aen. 12, 171 ; si.fto, Stat. Theb. 4, 445) ; τινά (a first-born) τω κυρίω, Lk. ii. 22 ; lo bring to, bring near, metaphorically, i. e. to bring into one's fel- lowship or intimacy : τίνα τω θ(ω, 1 Co. viii. 8 ; sc. τω θ(ω, 2 Co. iv. 14. b. to present (show) by argument, to prove: τί. Acts xxiv. 13 (Epict. diss. 2, 23, 47; foil, by πώί, id. 2, 26, 4 ; tiw ti, Xen. oec. 13, 1 ; Ttw, ότι, Jo- seph, antt. 4, 3, 2 ; de vita sua § 6). 2. Mid. and pf., plupf., 2 aor. act., in an intransitive sense (Sept. chiefly for Ίί?;;, also for 3Xj), to stand beside, stand by or near, lo be al hand, be present ; a. univ. to stand by : Tiv'i, lo stand beside one. Acts i. 10 ; ix. 39 ; xxiii. 2 ; x.xvii. 23; 6 παριστηκώς, a bystander, Mk. xiv. 47, 69 [here TTrWII παρί στώσιν] ; .xv. 35 [here Tdf. παρβ- στώτων, WH mrg. (στηκότων\ 39; Jn. xviii. 22 [L mrg. Tr mrg. παρεσ-τώτωι/] ; ό παρ«στώι, Mk. xiv. 70 ; Jn. xix. 26 [here anarthrous]. b. to appear: w. a pred. nom. foil, by ϊνώπιόν tivos. Acts iv. 10 [A. V. stand here'] ; before a judge, Καίσαρι, Acts xxvii. 24 ; mid. τώ βήματι τοϋ θ(οΰ [R G Χρίστου], Ro. xiv. 10. c. to be at hand, stand ready : of assailants, absol. Acts iv. 26 [A. V. stood u/)] (fr. Ps. ii. 2) ; to be at hand for service, of ser^ vants in attendance on their master (Lat. appareo), τιιά, Esth. iv. 5 ; (νώπιόν Tiras, 1 K. x. 8 ; ίνώπιον του θ(οϋ, of a presence-angel [A. V. that stand in the presence of God], Lk. i. 19, ef. Rev. viii. 2; absol. oi wapcaruyres, them that stood by, Lk. xix. 24 ; with αΰτω added (viz. the high-priest), Acts xxiii. 2, 4. d. to stand by to help, lo succor, (Germ, beistehen) : rati, Ro. xvi. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 17, (Horn. II. 10, 290; lies. th. 439; Arstph. vesp. 1388; Xen.; Dem. p. 366, 20; 1120, 26, and in other au- thors), e. to be present; to have come: of time, Mk. iv. 29.• Παρμένος [prob. contr. fr. Παρ /xf «'Sijs ' steadfast ' ; cf. W. 103 (97)], ace. -iv [cf. B. 20 (18)], ό, Parmenas, one of the seven " deacons " of the primitive church at Jerusa- lem ; Acts vi. 5.• irap-oSof. -ου, ή, (παρά, near by ; oSor), a passing by or passage : ev παρο'δω, in passing, [A. V. by the way], 1 Co. xvi. 7. (Thuc. 1, 126; v. 4; Polyb. 5, 68, 8; Cic. ad Att. 5, 20, 2 ; Lcian. dial. deor. 24, 2.) * irap-otKcm, -ω; 1 aor. παρωκησα ; 1. prop, to dwell beside (one) or in one's neighborhood [παρά, IV. 1] ; to live near; (Xen., Thuc, Isocr., al.). 2. in the Scrip- tures to be or dwell in a place as a stranger, to sojourn, (Sept. for "ilj, several times also for 1ψ\ and ρσ) : folL ■παροικία 490 by (V w. a dat. of place, Lk. xxiv. 18 R L (Gen. xx. 1 ; xxi. 34 ; xxvi. 3 ; Ex. xii. 40 cod. Alex. ; Lev. xviii. 3 [Aid.], etc.); w. an ace. of_pIace, ibid. GTTrWII (Gen. xvii. 8; Ex. vi. 4) ; els w. ace. of |)lace (in pregn. constr. ; see tU, C. i), Ileb. xi. 9. (Mutaiili. and absol. to dwell on the earth, I'hilo de cherub. § 34 [cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 and Lglitft. and llariiaik ad loc. ; Holtz- maiui, Kill!, ins X. T. j). 484 sq. Sy.v. soe κατοϋίί'ω.].) * παρ-οικία, -as, ή, (παροικίω, q. v.), abibl. and eccl. word, a dwelling near or with one ; hence a sojourning, dwelling in a strange land: prop. Acts xiii. 17 (2 Esdr. viii. 35; Ps. cxix. (cxx.) 5 ; Sap. xix. 10 ; Prol. of Sir. 21 ; cf. Fritz- sche on Judith v. 9). !Metaph. the life of man here on earth, likened to a sojourning : 1 Pet. i. 1 7 (Gen. xlvii. 9) ; see παριπίδημος [and reff. under τταροικί'ω].* πάρ -oiKos, -ov, (παρά and oiKos) ', 1. in class. Grk. dwelling near, neighboring. 2. in the Scriptures a stranger, foreigner, one who lives in a place without the right of citizenship ; [R. V. sojourner'] ; Sept. for 1J and 2ψ\Β (see ναροικίω 2, and παροικία, [and cf. Schmidt, Sjn. 43, 5 ; L. and S. s. v.]) : foil, by iv w. dat. of place, Acts vii. 6, 29 ; metaph. without citizenship in God's kinr/dom : joined with le'voi and opp. to συμπολίτης, Eph. ii. 19 (μόνος Kvpws ό 5eof πολίτης ΐστί, πάρηικον hi κα\ inljKvTuv το -γ^νητον ΰπαν, Philo de cherub. § 34 [cf. ilangey i. IGl note]) ; one who lives on earth as a stranger, a sojourner on the earth : joined with παρεπίδημος (q. v.), of Chris- tians, whose fatherland is heaven, 1 Pet. ii. 1 1. [Cf. Ep. ad Diognet. § 5, 5.] * παροιμία, -ας, ή, (παρά by, aside from [cf. παρά, IV. 2], and οΖμο; way), prop, a sai/ing out oj' the usual course or deviating from the usual manner of speaking [cf. Suidas 654, 15; but Hesych. s. v. et al. 'a saying heard by the wayside' {παρά, IV. 1), i. e. a current or trite saying, prov- erb ; cf. Curtius §611 ; Steph. Thes. s. v.], hence 1. a clever and sententious saying, a proverb, (Aeschyl. Ao•. 264 ; Soph., Plat., Aristot., Plut., al. ; exx. fr. Philo are given by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien, p. 292 sq. [as de ebriet. § 20 ; de Abr. § 40 ; de vit. Moys. i. § 28 ; ii. § 5 ; de exsecrat. § 6] ; for ^Κ/Ώ in Prov. i. 1 ; xxv. 1 cod. Alex. ; Sir. vi. 35, etc.) : το της παροιμίας, what is in the proverb (Lcian. dial. mort. 6, 2 ; 8, 1), 2Pet.ii. 22. 2. any dark saying which shadows forth some didactic truth, esp. a symbolic or β gurative saying : παροιμίαν Xeyftv, .In. xvi. 29 ; f'l/ παροιμίαις Χαλΰν, ibid. 25 ; speech or discourse in which a thing is illustrated by the use of similes and comparisons ; an allegory, i. e. extended and elaborate ' metaphor : Jn. x. 6.* ■irap-oivos, -ov, a later Grk. word for the earlier παρ- οίνιος, (παρά [q. v. IV. 1] and οΓιόγ, one who sits long at his wine), given to wine, drunken : 1 Tim. iii. 3 ; Tit. i. 7; [al. give it the secondary sense, 'quarrelsome over wine'; hence, brawling, abusive"].* παρ-«(χομαι : pf. ptcp. παρωχημένος ; to go by, pass by : as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. II. 10, 252 down, of time, Acts xiv. Ii3.• ιταρ-ομοιάζω; (fr. παρόμοιος, and this fr. παρά [q. v. IV. 1 (?)] and όμοιοί) ; to be tike ; to be not unlike : Mt. xxiii. τταρονσια (Several times also in eccl. 27 RGTTrmrg. WII txt writ.)• 'π'αρ.<}μοιο;, -ov, (also of three term, [see o/ioiot, init.]), like : Mk. vii. 8 [T WII om. Trbr. the cl.], 13. (Ildt., Thuc, Xen., Dem., I'olyb., Diod., al.) * ■παρ-οξΰνω : prop, to make sharp, to sharpen, [παρά, IV. 3] : την μάχαφαν, Deut. xxxii. 41. Metaph. (so always in prof. auth. fr. Eur., Thuc, Xen., down), a. to stimulate, spur on, urge, {προς τι, ΐπί τι). b. to irri- tate, provoke, rouse to anger; Pass., pres. παροξύνομαι; impf. παρωξυι/ό/«;ί': Acts xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiii. 5. Sejit. chieliy for yHi to scorn, despise ; besides for 0^l'Dr^ to provoke, make angry, Deut. ix. 18 ; Ps. cv. (cvi.) 29; Is. Ixv. 3 ; for ^'SPH to exasperate, Deut. ix. 7, 22, etc. ; pass, for Π";π to burn with anger, Ilos. viii. 5 ; Zech. x. 3, and for other verbs.* •π•αροξυσμ05, -οϋ, 6, (παροξύνω, q. V.) ; 1. an incit- ing, incilciaent : tU παρ. αγάπης [Α. V. to provoke unto love], Heb. x. 24. 2. irritation, [R. V. contention] : Acts XV. 39 ; Sept. twice for f|>'p, violent anger, passion, Deut. xxix. 28; Jer. xxxbc. (xxxii.) 37 ; Dem. p. 1105, 24.• ιταρ-οργίϊω; Attic fut. [cf. Β. 37 (32) ; TF/f. App. 163] παροργιω ; to rouse to wrath, to provoke, exasjierale, anger, [cf. παρά, IV. 3] : Ro. x. 19 ; Eph. vi. 4 ; and Lchni. in Col. iii. 21. (Dem. p. 805, 19; Philo de somn. ii. §26; Sept. chiefly for D'ipn.) * •π-αρ-οργισμόϊ, -οϋ, 6, (παροργίζω), indignation, exasper- ation, wrath : Eph. iv. 26. (1 K. xv. 30; 2 K. xxiii. 26; Neh. ix. 18 ; [Jer. xxi. 5 Alex.] ; not found in prof, auth.) [Syn. cf. Trench § xxxvii.] * ιταρ-οτρύνω : 1 aor. παρώτρννα; [ότρΰνω to stir up (cf. παρά, IV. 3)] ; to incite, stir up : τινά. Acts xiii. 50. (Pind. 01. 3, 68; Joseph, antt. 7, 6, 1 ; Lcian. deor. concil. 4.) * τταρ-ουσία, -ας, η. (παρών, -οϊ/σα, -όν, fr. πάρίίμι q. v.), in Grk. auth. fr. the Tragg., Thuc, I'lat., down; not found in Sept.; 1. presence: 1 Co. xvi. 17; 2 Co. X. 10 ; opp. to απουσία, Phd. ii. 12 (2 Mace. xv. 21 ; [Ar- istot. phys. 2, 3 p. 195*, 14; metaphys. 4, 2 p. 1013', 14; meteor. 4, 5 p. 382', 33 etc.]). 2. the presence of one coming, hence the coming, arrival, advent, ([yo\yh. 3,41,1.8]; Judith X. 18; 2 Mace. viii. 12; [llerm. sim. 5, 5, 3]) : 2 Co. vii. 6 sq. ; 2 Th. ii. 9 (cf. 8 άποκαλυφθί^σί- ται) ; ή . . . πάλιν προς τίνα, of a return, Phil. i. 26. In the N. T. esp. of the advent, i. e. the future, visible, relurnl from heaven of Jesus, the Messiah, to raise the dead, I hold the last judgment, and set up formally and glorious- ly the kingdom of God : Mt. xxiv. 3; ή παρ. τοϋ ν'ιοΐι τυύ ανθρώπου, [27], 37, 39 ; τοΟ κυρίου, 1 Th. iii. 13; iv. 15; v. 23 ; 2 Th. ii. 1 ; Jas. v. 7 sq. ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; Χριστοί; 2 Pet. i. 16; airoO, 1 Co. XV. 23; [lTh.ii.l9]; 2 Th. ii. 8 ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; [1 Jn. ii. 28] ; της του SeoO ήμίρας, 2 Pet. iii. 12. It is called in eccles. writ, η hevripa παρουσία, Εν. Nicod. c. 22 fin.; Justin, apol. 1, 52 [where see Otto's note]; dial. c. Tr. cc. 40, 110, 121 ; and is opp. to ή πρώτη παρ. which took place in the incarnation, birth, and earthly career of Clirist, Justin, dial. c. Tr. cc. 62, 121, cf. 14, 32, 49, etc. ; [cf. Ignat. ad Phil. 9 (and Lghtft.)] ; see eXtuiris.' frapoyjri'i 491 ΪΓΟ? irap-o+Cs, -iSos, ή, (παρά [q. v. IV. 1], and όψον, on which see οψάριον) ; 1. a side-dish, a dish of dain- ties or choice food suited not so much to satisfy as to gratify the appetite ; a side-accompaniment of the more solid food ; hence i. q. παρό-^ημα; so in Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4 and many Attic>vrit. in Athen. 9p.367d. sq. 2. the dish itself in wh ich the delicacies are served up : Mt. xxiii. 25, 26 [here Τ om. WH br. παροψ-.Ί ; Artem. oneir. 1, 74 ; Alciphr. 3, 20 ; Plut. de vitand. acre alien. § 2. This latter use of the word is condemned by the Atticists ; of. Slurz, Lex. Xen. iii. 4C3 sq. ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 176 ; [Rutherford, New rhryn. p. 265 sq.] ; Poppo on Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4.• Ίταρρησ-ία, -ut, ij, (παν and prjais ', of. άρρησία silence, κατάρρησί! accusation, ηρόρρησις prediction) ; 1. freedom in speaking, unreservedness in speech, (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.) : ή π. τιι/ογ. Acts iv. 13; χρησθαι παρ- ρησία, 2 Co. iii. 1 2 ; παρρησία adverbially, — freely : XaXeix, Jn. vii. 13, 26 ; xviii. 20 ; — openly, frankly, i. e. without concealment: Mk. viii. 32; Jn. xi. 14; — without ambi- guity or circumlocution : erne ήμϊν παρρησία (Philem. ed. Meineke p. 405), Jn. x. 24; — without the use of figures and comparisons, opp. to e'c napotpiait ; Jn. xvi. 25, and R G in 29 (where L Τ Tr \VH ei> παρρησία) ; ίν παρρησία, freely, Eph. vi. 19 ; peril παρρησίας, Actsx.wiii. 31 ; eiVeiv, Acts ii. 29; XaXfii», Acts iv. 29, 31. 2. free and fearless confidence, cheerful courage, boldness, assurance, (1 Mace. iv. 18 ; Sap. v. 1 ; Joseph, antt. 9, 10, 4 ; 15, 2, 7; [ct. W. 23]) : Phil. i. 20 (opp. to αίσχίνισθαι, cf. Wie- singer ad loc.) ; (v πίστα, resting on, 1 Tim. iii. 13, cf. Ilulher ad loc; exftv παρρησίαν etr τι, Heb. x. 19 ; πολλή pot ϋστί) παρρ. προς ίιμάί, 2 Co. vii. 4 ; of the confidence impelling one to do something, ϊχαν παρρ. with an infin. of the thing to be done, Philem. 8 [Test. xii. Patr., test. Rub. 4] ; of the undoubting confidence of Christians rela- tive to their fellowship with God, Eph. iii. 1 1 ; Heb. iii. 6; X. 35 ; ptrti παρρησίας, Heb. iv. 16 ; (\eiv παρρησίαν, oi)p. to αισχννίσθαί to be covered with shame, 1 Jn. ii. 28; before the judge, 1 Jn. iv. 17; with προς τον θ(άν added, 1 Jn. iii. 21 ; v. 14. 3. the deportment by which one becomes conspicuous or secures publicity (Philo de victim, offer. §12): iv παρρησία, before the public, in view of all, Jn. vii. 4 (opp. to ev τω κρυπτά) ; xi. 54 [with- out fV] ; Col. ii. 15 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.].* παρρησ-ιάζομαι ; impf. ('παρρησιαζόμην ; 1 aor. ίπαρρη- σιασάμην ; {παρρησία, q. v.) ; a depon. verb ; Vulg. chiefly fiducialiter ago ; to bear one's self boldly or confident- ly ; 1. to use freedom in speaking, be free-spoken ; to speak freely {[A. Y.boldlyl): Acts xviii. 26 ; xix. 8; iv τω ύνόματι τοΰ 'ίησοΰ, relying on the name of Jesus, Acts ix. 27, 2•*^ (29) ; alsotVi τώκυριω, Acts xiv. 3. 2. to grow confident, have boldne.'i.f, shore assurance, assume a bold hearing : (Ιπύν, Acts xiii. 46 [R. V. spake out boldly] ; λαλίΓκ, Acts xxvi. 26 ; παρρησ. ΐντινι, in reliance on one to take courage, foil, by an inf. of the thing to be done : \αΚήσαι, Eph. vi. 20 ; 1 Th. ii. 2. (Xen., Dem., Aeschin., Polyb., Philo, Plut, al. ; Sept.; Sir. vi. 11.)• ■nan, πάσα, πάν. gen. παντάς, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. Lchm. π'ασι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times ; Tdf. -σ• five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -σιν seventy-seven times ; Treg. -σιν eighty-two times ; WH -at fourteen times, -viv sixty-eight times; seeN, ν {ίφ(\κυστικόν)'\,'Ά(ί^τ.^2, [fr. Hom. down], all, every ; it is used I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous nouns ; a. any, every one (sc. of the class denoted by the noun annexed to πάς) ; with the Singular ; as πάν hiv&pov, Mt. iii. 10; πάσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.] ; add, IMt. v. 1 1 ; xv. 13 ; Lk. iv. 37; Jn. ii. 10; xv. 2 ; Acts ii. 43 ; v.42; Ro. xiv. 11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πάσα ψυχή ανθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πάσα άνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. p. 249 e.) ; πάσα συν(ί5ησις ανθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2 ; πάς λ(•/όμ(νος θ(ός, 2 Th. ii. 4 ; πάς ayiot iv Χριστώ, Phil. iv. 21 sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are of the class indicated by the noun : as πάντ(ς άνθρωποι. Acts xxii. 15; Ro. V. 12, 18; xii. 17 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 7; xv. 19; πάντα ayioi, Ro. xvi. 15 ; πάντες ayyeXoi θίον, Heb. i. 6; πάντα [L Τ Tr WH τά] ΐθνη. Rev. xiv. 8 ; on the phrase πάσα σαρξ, see σαρξ, 3. b. any and every, of every kind, [A. V. often all manner of~\ : πάσα νόσος καΊ μαλακία, Mt. iv. 23 ; ix. 35 ; χ. 1 ; ιυΧσγία, blessings of every kind, Eph. i. 3 ; so esp. with nouns designating virtues or vices, emo- tions, character, condition, to indicate every mode in which such virtue, vice or emotion manifests itself, or any object whatever to which the idea expressed by the noun belongs : — thus, πάσα iλπίς, Acts xxvii. 20 ; σοφία, Acts vii. 22 ; Col. i. 28 ; γνώσις, Ro. xv. 14 ; ά&ικία, άσί(ίιια, etc., Ro. i. 18,29; 2Co.x. 6; Eph. iv. 19, 31 ; v. 3; σπονδή, 2 Co. viii. 7 ; 2 Pet. i. 5 ; iπιθυμίa, Ro. vii. 8 ; χαρά, Ro. XV. 13; αυτάρκεια, 2 Co. i.\. 8; iv παντΧ λόγω κ- γνώσ€ΐ, 1 Co. i. 5 ; σοφία κ. φρονησ(ΐ etc. Eph. i. 8 ; iv π. άγαθα>' σύντ) κ- δικαιοσΰντ;, κ- άληθ(ία, Eph. ν. 9 ; αΙσθήσ(ΐ, Phil. i. 9; υπομονή, βλίψις. etc., 2 Co. i. 4 ; xii. 12 ; add. Col. i. 9-11 ;iii. 16; 2 Th. i. 11 ; ii. 9 ; 1 Tim. i. 15; v. 2; vi. 1; 2 Tim. iv. 2; Tit. ii. 15 (on ivhieh see iπιτayή)^, iii. 2; Jas. i. 21 ; 1 Pet. ii. 1 ; v. 10 ; πάσο δικαιοσύνη, i. e. ό άνη Βίκαιον, Mt. iii. 15; πάν θίΧημα τοΟ θ(οϋ, everything God wills, Col. iv. 12; πάσα υποταγή, obedience in all things, 1 Tim. ii. 11; πάση συν(ΐδησ(ΐ άγηθη, consciousness of rectitude in all things. Acts xxiii. 1 ; — or it signifies the highest degree, the maximum, of the thing which the noun denotes [cf. W. 110 (105 sq.); Ellicott on Eph. i. 8 ; Meyer on Phil. i. 20; Kriiger § 50, 11, 9 and 10] : as μ(τά πάσης παρρησίας. Acts iv. 29; -xxviii. 31 ; fifra ττάσ. ταπίΐνοφροσύνης. Acts xx. 1 9 ; προθυμίας. Acts xvii. 1 1 ; χαράς, Phil. ii. 29, cf. Jas. i. 2 ; iv πάση άσφa\fίa, Acts V. 23 ; iv παντί φόβω, 1 Pet. ii. 18; πάσα iζoυσia, Mt. xxviii. 18, (πάν jfpOTor, Soph. Phil. 142). c. the whole (all, Lat. tolus) : so before proper names of coun- tries, cities, nations ; as, πάσα Ιεροσόλυμα, Mt. ii. 3 ; πάς Ισραήλ, Ro. xi. 26; before collective terms, as πάς οίκος Ισραήλ, Acts ii. 36 ; πάση κτίσις (see κτίσις, 2 b.) ; πάσα γραφή (nearly equiv. to the όσα προίγράφη in Ro. xv. 4), 2 Tim. iii. 16 (cf. Rothe, Zur Dogmatik, p. 181) ; πάσα γερουσία υιών Ισραήλ, Ex. xii. 21 ; πάς ιτπτος Φαραώ, Ex. xiv. 23 ; πάν Βίκαιον (θνος. Add. to Esth. i. 9 ; by a some- what rare usage before other substantives also, as [πά» τταϊ 492 τται? πρόσωπον τήι yijs, Acts xvii. 26LTTrWH]; πάσα οίϊοδο/ιιί, Ε|)1ι. ϋ. 21 G L Τ'Γγ \νΐΙ, of. Harless ad loc. p. 2u2 [ul. I'liiil no necessity here for resorting to this ex- ceptional use, but render (with R. V.) each several builii- int/ (cf. Meyer)]; παν τΐμινοι, 3 Mace. i. 13 (where see Grimm) ; Havkov ■ . . as ev πάστ] (πίστοΚτ) μνημονινα νμωυ, Tgnat. ad Ejih. 12 [(vet of. Bp. Lghtft.)] ; cf. Passow s.v.w5f,2; [L.andS.'s.v. A.ir.]; \V.§18,4; [B.§127, 29] ; Kruger § 50, 1 1, 8 to 1 1 ; Kiiliner ii. 545 sq. 2. with nouns wliich have the article, all the, the ichofe, (see c. just above) : — witli tlie Singuhir ; as, πάσα ή aytXij, Ike whole herd, Mt. viii. 32 ; jrat ό όχΚοί, Mt. .xiii. 2 ; jrus 6 κόσμος, Ro. iii. 19 ; Col. i. 6 ; πάσα ή πάλι? (i. e. all its inhabitants), Mt. viii. 34; x.xi. 10, etc. ; πάσα η 'Ιουδαίο, Mt. iii. 5 ; add, Mt. .xxvii. 25 ; Mk. v. 33 ; Lk. i. 10 ; Acts vii. 14; x. 2 ; xx. 2S; xxii. 5; Ro. iv. 16 ; ix. 17 ; 1 Co. xiii. 2 (πίστιν κα\ γνώσιν in their whole compass and ex- tent) ; Eph. iv. IG; Col. i. 19; ii. 9, 19; Phil. i. 3 ; lleb. ii. 15; Rev.v. 6, etc. ; the difference between πάσα ή dXi^tt [all] and πάσα ίλίψΐΓ [«".v] appears in 2 Co. i. 4. πάί 6 Χαοΐ ο ντο ς, Lk. ix. 13 ; πάσαν την ό Ρ(ί\ην t κ^ίνην, ΛΙί. χ viii. 32; πά: placed after the nuun has the force of a predicate: την κρίσιν πάσαν δί'8ω«, the jwlrjment lie halh given tvhnll;/ [cf. W. 54S (510)], Jn. v. 22; την (ξουσίαν . . . πάσαν ποίίΐ. Rev. xiii. 12 ; it is placed between the article and noun [B. § 127, 29; W. 549 (510)], as τον πάντα χμόνον, i.e. ahva'/s. Acts xx. 18; add, Gal. v. 14; 1 Tim. i. IG [here L TTr WllSirar] ; —with a Plural, all (/he lolaliti/ of the persons or things designated by the noun) : πάντας Toic άρχίίμίΐί, Mt. ii. 4 ; add, Mt. iv. 8 ; xi. 13; Mk. iv. 13; vi. 33; Lk. i. 6, 4S; Actsx. 12, 43; Ro. i. 5 ; XV. 1 1 ; 1 Co. xii. 26 ; xv. 25 ; 2 Co. viii. 1 8, and very often; with a demonstr. pron. added, Mt. xxv. 7; Lk. ii. 19, 51 [here Τ WH om. L Tr mrg. br. the pron.] ; πάντα is placed after the noun : τάτ naXus πάσας, the cities all (of them) [cf. W. u. s.], Mt. ix. 35 ; Acts viii. 40 ; add, Mt. X. 30 ; Lk. vii. 35 [here L Tr AVH txt. πάντων των etc.]; xii. 7; Acts viii. 40; xvi. 26 ; Ro. xii. 4 ; 1 Co. vii. 17; X. 1; xiii.2; xv. 7; xvi. 20; 2 Co. xiii. 2, 12 (13); Phil. i. 13; 1 Th. v. 26 ; 2 Tim. iv. 21 [WH br.».] ; Rev. viii. 3 ; oi πάντις foil, by a noun. Acts xix. 7 ; xxvii. 37; Tois κατά τα ΐθνη πάντατ ΊουδαίουΓ, Acts x.xi. 21 [here L om. Tr br. τγ.]. II. without a substantive ; 1. masc. and fem. ever;/ one, any one : in the singular, without anv addition, Mk. ix. 49 ; Lk. xvi. 16 ; Heb. ii. 9 ; foil, by a rel. pron., πάς Βστις, Mt. vii. 24; x. 32; πάς or, Mt. xix. 29 [LTTr Αλ'ΙΙ όστις] ; Gal. iii. 10; πάς or Sv (eav Tr AVH), whoso- ever. Acts ii. 21 ; jr5r ϊξ ίμών ός, Lk. xiv. 33 ; with a ptcp. which has not the article [λν. Ill (106)]: παντίις άκηί'οντης (if any one heareth, whoever he is),Mt. xiii. 19; παντΧ otpeiKovTi ήμ'ιν, every one owing (if he owe) us any- thing, unless όφιίλοντι is to be taken substantively, every debtor of ours, Lk. xi. 4 ; with a ptcp. which has the ar- ticle and takes the place of a relative clause [W. u. s.] : jrSt ό οργιζόμίνος, every one that is angry, Mt. v. 22 ; add, Mt. vii. 8; Lk. vi.47; .Tn. iii. 8,20; vi.45; Actsx. 43 sq.; xiii. 30 ; Ro. i. 16 ; ii. 10 ; xii. 8 ; 1 Co. ix. 25 ; xvi. 16 ; Gal. iii. 13 ; 1 Jn. ii. 28 ; iii. 3 sq. 6, etc. Plural πάντ(ς, without any addition, all men : Mt. x. 22; Mk. xiii. 13; Lk. .x.x. 38; x.xi. 17; Jn.i. 7; iii. 31' [in 31' G Τ VVIl mrg. om. the cl.J ; V. 23 ; vi.45; xii. 32 ; Acts xvii. 25 ; Ro. x. 12; 1 Co. ix. 19; 2 Co. v. 14 (15); Eph. iii. 9 [ht-'re Τ WH txt.om. L br. π.] ; of a certain definite whole : all (the people), Mt. xxi. 26 ; all (we wlio hold more liberal views), 1 Co. viii. 1 ; all (the members of the church), ibid. 7 ; by hyperbole i. (\. the great majority, the mul- titude, Jn. iii. 26 ; all (just before mentioned), Mt. xiv. 20; xxii. 27 sq. ; xxvii. 22; Mk. i. 27 [here TTrWH άπavτfs], 37 ; vi. 39,42; [xi. 32 Lchm.] ; Lk. i. 63; iv. 15; Jn. ii. 15, 24, and very often; [all (about to be men- tioned), διά πάντων sc. των αγίων (as is shown by the folL κα! κτλ.), Acts ix. 32]. oi πάντις, all taken together, all collectively, [cf. W. 116 (110)]: of all men, Ro. xi. 32; of a certain definite whole, Pliil. ii. 21 ; with the 1 pere. plur. of the verb, 1 Co. X. 1 7 ; Eph. iv. 13; with a definite number, in all [cf. B. § 127, 29] : ήσαν Se oi πάντ(ς avSptt ώσίΐ SeKaSoo (or δώδίκα). Acts xi.x. 7 ; ημιθα al πάσα» ψνχα\ Ηιακόσιαι (tibl), or 2. the paschal lamb, i. e. the lamb which the Israelites were accustomed to slay and eat on the fourteenth day of the month Nisan (the first month of their year) in memory of that day on which their fathers, preparing to depart from Egypt, were bidden by God to slay and eat a lamb, and to sprinkle their door-posts with its blood, that the destroying angel, seeing the blood, might pass over their dweUings (Ex. xii. sq. ; Num. ix. ; Deut. xvi.) : iufii/ το π. (ΠΡνΙΠ any*), Mk. xiv. 12; Lk. xxii. 7, (Ex. xii. 21); Christ crucified is likened to the slain paschal lamb, 1 Co. V. 7 ; φαγιΐν το π., Mt. xxvi. 17 ; Mk. xiv. 12, 14 ; Lk. xxii. 11, 15; Jn. xviii. 28; Πρ3Π hjVi, 2 Chr. xxx. 17 sq. 3. the paschal supper: ίτοιμάζαν τά jr., Mt. xxvi. 19; Mk. xiv. 16 ; Lk. xxii. 8, 1.3 : ποκ'ιν to π. to cel- ebrate the paschal meal, Mt. xxvi. 18. 4. the pas- chal festival, the feast of Passover, extending from the fourteenth to the twentieth day of the month Nisan : Mt. xxvi. 2; Mk. xiv. 1 ; Lk. ii. 41 ; x.xii. 1 ; Jn. ii. 13, 23 ; vi. 4; xi. 55 ; xii. 1 ; xiii. 1 ; xviii. 39; xix. 14 ; Acts xii. 4 ; iTiffoiTjicf TO TT. he instituted the Passover (of Moses), Heb. xi. 28 [cf. W. 272 (256); B. 197 (170)] ; γί«ται τ6 π. the Passover is celebrated [R. V. Cometh^, Mt. xxvi. 2. [See BB.DD. s. v. Passover; DiUmann in Sehenkel iv. p. 392 sqq.; and on the question of the relation of the "Last Supper" to the Jewish Passover, see (in addition to reff. in BB.DD. u. s.) Kirchner, die Jiidische Passah- feier u. Jesu letztes Mahl. Gotha, 1870 ; Keil, Com. uber Matth. pp. 513-528; J. B. McClellan, The N. T. etc. i. pp. 473—494 ; but esp. Schiirer, Ueber φαγιίν το πάσχα, akademische Festschrift (Giessen, 1883).] • ττάσ-χο); 2 aor. ίπαθον ; \Λ.τΐ(πυνθα (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb. ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been af- fected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undert/o ; it is a vox media — used in either a good or a bad sense; as, οσα 7Γ€πόΐ'θασί και οσα avrols eyevfTo, of perils and de- liverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for ΠΧτ) ; hence κακω! πύσχαν. Ιο suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick person, Mt. xvii. 1 5 where L Tr txt. WII txt. κ. ?χίΐν (on the other hand, eS πάσχ€ΐν, to be well off, in good case, often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to be afflicted, (so everywhere in Horn, and Hes. ; also in the other Grk. writ, where it is used absol.) : absol., Lk. xxii. 15 ; .xxiv. 46 ; Acts i. 3; iii. 18; xvii. 3 ; 1 Co. xii. 26 ; Heb. ii. 18 ; ix. 26 ; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 23 ; iii. 1 7 ; iv. 15, 19 ; Heb. xiii. 12 ; 6\iyov, a little while, 1 Pet. v. 10; πάσχειντι, Mt. xxvii. 19 ; Mk. ix. 12 ; Lk. xiii. 2 ; [xxiv. 26] ; Acts xxviiL 5 ; 2 Tim. i. 12 ; [Heb. v. 8 cf. W. 166 (156) a. ; B. § 143, 10] ; Rev. ii. 10 ; παθήματα πάσχον, 2 Co. i. 6; tI aff({ w. gen. of pers., Mt. xvi. 21 ; Lk. ix. 22; xvii 25; πάσχ. νπό w. gen. of pers. Mt. xvii. 12; τΐ ίπό τΐί«0Γ, Mk. V. 26; 1 Th. ii. 14; πάσχ. νττίρ τινοί, in behalf of a pers. or thing. Acts Lx. 16 ; Phil. i. 29 ; 2 Tli. i. 5 ; with the addition of a dat. of reference or respect [cf. W. § 81, 6], σαρκί, 1 Pet. iv. 1': iv σαρκί, ibid.' [yet G L Τ Tr WH om. c„ ; cf. W. 412 (384)] ; πάσχ. πιρί w. gon. of the thing and xmip w. gen. of pers. 1 Pet. iii. 18 [UGWIImrg.; cf. W.373 (349) ; 383 (358) note] : ττασχ. δίά ^ίκαιοσίνην, 1 Pet. iii. 14. 2. in a good sense, of pleasant experiences ; but nowhere so unless either the adv. fv or an ace. of the thing be added {ίπομυησαι, ΰσα παθόντζ^ f^ αντον (i. e. θίον) και πηλίκων fi/fpytataiv μ€τα- λαβύντα αχάριστοι πρΰ: αντου γίνοιντο, Joseph, antt. 3, 15, 1 ; exx. fr. Grk. auth. are given in Passow s. v. II. 5 ; [L. and S. s. v. II. 2]) : Gal. iii. 4, on which see γί, 3 c. [CoMP. : προ-, συμ^πάσχω.^ ' Πάταρα, -άρωυ, τά, [cf. W. 176 (166)], Ρα /ara, a mar» time city of Lycia, celebrated for an oracle of Apollo : Actsxxi. 1. [B. D. s. V. Patara; Lercin, St. Paul, ii. 99s(i.]• irareurcru) : fut. πατάξω; 1 aor. ΐπάταξα; Sept. times without number for r\27] (Iliphil of TtD}, unused in Kal), also for f]:j, etc.; (in Hom. intrans. to beat, of the heart; fr. Arstph., .Soph., Plat., al. on used transitively) ; 1. to strike gently : τί (as a part or a member of the body), Acts xii. 7. 2. to strike, smite: absol., iv μαχαίρα, with the sword, Lk. x.xii. 49 ; τινά, Mt. .xxvi. 51 ; Lk. xxii. 50. by a use solely biblical, to afflict; to visit with evils, etc. : as with a deadly disease, τινά. Acts xii. 23 ; τινά iv w. dat. of the thing, Rev. xi. 6 (iLTTrWH; xix. 15, (Gen. viii. 21 ; Num. xiv. 12; Ex. xii. 23, etc.). 3. by a use solely biblical, to smile down, cut down, to kill, slay : τινά,^Ιί. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (aft«rZech. xiii. 7) ; Acts vii. 24." ιτατί'ω, -ώ; fut. πατήσω: Pass., pres. ptop. πaτoίμfvoί; 1 aor. iπaτήθψ ; f r. Pind., Aeschyl., Soph., Plat, down ; Sept. for ^ΊΊ, etc. ; to tread, i. e. a. to trample, crush with the feet: την ληνόν, Rev. xiv. 20 ; xix. 15, (Judg. ix. 27; Neh.xiii. 15; Jer. xxxi. (xlviii.)33; Lam.i.l5). b. to advance by setting font ujjun, Iread upon : iπάvω οφ<ων κάί σκορπιών και in'i πάσαν την 8ίιναμιν τοί ΐχθροϋ, to en- counter successfully the greatest perils from the machina- tions and persecutions with which Satan would fain thwart the preaching of the gospel, Lk. x. 19 (cf. Ps. xc. (xoi.) 13). c. to tread under foot, trample on, i. e. treat with insult and contempt : to desecrate the holy city by devas- tation and outrage, Lk. xxi. 24 ; Rev. xi. 2, (fr. Dan. viii. 13); see καταττατί'ω. [CoMP. : κατά-, πιρι-, €μ-π(ρι- πατ/ω] * ιτατήρ [fr. Γ. pa ; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder ; (Curtius § 348)], πατρόι, -τρΐ, -τίρα, voc. πάτ^ρ [for which the nom. ό πατήρ is five times used, and (anarthrous) πατήρ in Jn. xvii. 21 Τ Tr AVH, 24 and 25 L Τ Tr WII ; cf. B. § 129, 5; W. § 29, 2 ; WH. App. p. 158], plur. πατίρα, πατίρων, πατράσι (Heb. i. 1), πατίρας, 6. [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 3St, a father; 1. prop., i. q. gener- ator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq. ; viii. 21 ; Lk. i. 17; Jn. iv. 53 ; Acts vii. 14 ; 1 Co. v. 1, etc. ; οί πατίρα της σαρκός, fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. to 6 πατήρ των πτκνμάτων), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of hoth par- ents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof, auth., cf. Delitzsch ad loc.) ; or b. a more remote ancestor, the founder of a race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather : so Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9 ; Lk. i. 73 ; xvi. 24 ; Jn. viiL Ίτατηρ Trarpta 39, 6& ; Acts vii. 2 ; Ro. iv. 1 Rec, 1 7 sq., etc. ; Isaac, Ro. ix. 10; Jacob, Jn. iv. 12; David, Mk. xi. 10; Lk. i. 32; plur. fathers i. e. ancestors, forefathers, Mt. xxiii. 30, 32 ; Lk. vi. 23, 26 ; xi. 47 sq. ; Jn. iv. 20 ; vi. 31 ; Acts iii. 13, 25; 1 Co. X. 1, etc., and often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; so too Γ(13Χ, 1 Κ. viii. 21 ; Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 5 etc. ; in the stricter sense of the founders of a race, Jn. vii. 22 ; Ro. ix. 5 ; xi. 28. o. i. q. one advanced in years, a senior: 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. 2. metaph. ; a. the origi- nator and transmitter of anything : πατήρ ■ηιριτομηί, Ro. iv. 12 ; the author of a family or society of persons ani- mated by tlie same spirit as himself : so ττ. πάντων τών πιστεύονταν, Ro. iv. 11, cf. 12, 16, (1 Mace. ii. 54) ; one who has infused liis own spirit into others, who actuates and governs their minds, Jn. viii. 38,41 sq. 44 ; the plirase €K πατρός tikos elvai is used of one who shows himself as like another in spirit and purpose as though he had in- herited his nature from him, ibid. 44. b. one who stands in a father's place, and looks after another in a paternal way: 1 Co. iv. 15. c. a title of honor [cf. Sophocles, Lex. s. v.], applied to a. teachers, as those to whom pupils trace back the knowledge and training they have received : Mt. xxiii. 9 (of prophets, 2 K. ii. 12; vi. 21). β. the members of the Sanhedrin, whose prerogative it was, by virtue of the wisdom and experience in which they excelled, to take charge of the interests of others : Acts vii. 2 ; xxii. 1 ; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 7*. 3. God is called the Father, a. των φώτων, [Α. V. of lights i. e.] of the stars, the heaven- ly luminaries, because he is their creator, upholder, ruler, Jas. i. 17. b. of all rational and intelligent beings, whether angels or men, because he is their creator, pre- server, guardian and protector: Eph. iii. 14 sq. GLT Tr WH ; τών πνευμάτων, of spiritual beings, Heb. xii. 9 ; and, for the same reason, of all men (πατήρ τοΰ παντός ανθρώπων γίνου!, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 24) : so in the Syn- optic Gospels, esp. Matthew, Mt. vi. 4, 8, 15; xxiv. 36 ; Lk. vi. 36 ; xi. 2 ; xii. 30, 32 ; Jn. iv. 21, 23 ; Jas. iii. 9 ; ό πατήρ ό iv (τοϊε) oipavoU, the Father in heaven, Mt. v. 16, 4.5, 48 , vi. 1, 9 ; vii. 11, 21 ; xviii. 14 ; Mk. xi. 25, 26 RGL; Lk.xi. 13[ί^ούραΐΌθ; cf. Β. § 151, 2 a. ; W. § 66, 6] ; ό πατ. δ ουράνιος, the heavenly Father, Mt. vi. 14, 26, 32; XV. 13. c. o/" C/iris/i'aiis, as tho.se who through Christ have been exalted to a specially close and inti- mate relationship with God, and who no longer dread him as the stern judge of sinners, but revere him as their reconciled and loving Father. This conception, com- mon in the N. T. Epistles, shines forth with especial brightness in Ro. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6 ; in John's use of the term it seems to include the additional idea of one who by the power of his Spirit, operative in the gospel, has be- gotten them anew to a life of lioliness (see γεννάω, 2 d.) : absol., 2 Co. vi. 18; Eph. ii. 18; 1 .In. ii. 1, 14 (13), 16; iii. 1 ; θ(ος κ- πατήρ πάντων, of all Christians, Eph. iv. 6 ; with the addition of a gen. of quality [W. § 34, 3 b.; B. § 132, 10], • πατ. τών οίκτψμών, 2 Co. i. 3 ; της 8όξης, Eph. j. 17; on the phrases ό βεος κ. πατήρ ημών, θ(6ς πατήρ, etc., see βιός, 3 ρ. 288*. d. the Father of Jesus Christ, as one whom God has united to himself in the closest bond of love and intimacy, made acquainted with his purposes, appointed to explain and carry out among men the plan of salvation, and (as appears from the teaching of John) made to share also in his own divine nature ; he is so called, a. by Jesus himself : simply ό πατήρ (opp. to ό υίΟ£), Mt. xi. 25-27; Lk. x. 21 sq. ; Jn. v. 20- 23, 26, 36 sq. ; x. 15, 30, etc.; ό πατήρ μου, ^It. xi. 27; XXV. 34 ; xxvi. 53 ; Lk. x. 22 ; Jn. v. 1 7 ; viii. 1 9, 49 ; x. 18, 32, and often in John's Gospel ; Rev. ii. 28 (27) ; iii. 5, 21 ; with ό iv τοις ουρανοίς added, Mt. vii. 11, 21 ; x. 32sq.; xii. 50 ; xvi. 17; xviii.10,19; ό ουράνιος, Mt. xv. 13 ; ό iπoυpάvιoς, Mt. xviii. 35 Rec. β. by the apostles : Ro. XV. 6 ; 2 Co. i. 3 ; xi. 31 ; Eph. i. 3 ; iii. 14 Rec. ; Col. i. 3; Heb. i. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 3; Rev. i. 6. See [Tholuck (Bergrede Christi) on Mt. vi. 9 ; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T., Index s. v. Vater; C. Wittichen, Die Idee Gottes als d. Vaters, (Gbttingen, 1865); Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 27-34, and] below in υίός and τίκνον. Πάτμος, -ου, ή, Patmos, a small and rocky island in the» .S^gean Sea, reckoned as one of the Sporades (Thuc. 3, 33 ; Strab. 10 p. 488 ; Plin. h. n. 4, 23) ; now called Patmo or [chiefly "in the middle ages" (Howson)] Palmosa and havinc from four to five thousand Christian inhabitants (cf. Schubert, Reise in das Morgenland, Th. iii. pp. 425- 443 ; Bleek, Vorless. iib. die Apokalypse, p. 157 ; Kneucker in Schenkel iv. p. 403 sq. ; [BB. DD. s. v.]). In it John, tlie author of the Apocalypse, says the revelations were made to him of the approaching consummation of God'e kingdom : Rev. i. 9. It has been held by the church, ever since the time of [Just. Mart. (dial. c. Try ph. § 81 p. 308 a. cf. Euseb. h. e. 4, 18, 8; see Charteris, Canon- ieity, ch. xxxiv. and note) and] Iren. adv.haer. 5, 30, that this John is the Apostle ; see Ιωάννης, 2 and 6.* •π-ατραλωαί (Attic πατραΚοίας, Arstiih., Plat., Dem. p. 732, 14; Aristot., Lcian.), L Τ Tr WH πατρολωαϊ (see μητραΚώας). -ου, ό, a parricide : 1 Tim. i. 9.* ιτατριά, -άς, ή, (fr. πατήρ) ; 1. lineage running hack to some progenitor, ancestry. Hdt. 2, 143 ; 3,75. 2. a race or tribe, i. e. α group of families, all those who in a given people lay claim to a common origin : flal αυτιών (Βαβυλωνίων) πατριαϊ τρύς, Hdt. 1, 200. The Israelites were distributed into (twelve) m'Dp, φυλαί, tribes, de- scended from the twelve sons of Jacob; these were divided into ηίΠ3ψρ, πατριοί, deriving their descent from the several sons of Jacob's sons; and these in turn were divided into ΠύΚΠ Π'3, οίκοι, houses (οτ families) ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. i. p'. 193 ; iii. p. 1463; Win. RWB. s. V. St'amme ; \_Keil, Archaeol. § 140] ; hence f| οίκου καΐ πατριός Δαυίδ, i. e. belonging not only to the same 'house' (πατριά) as David, but to the very 'family' of David, descended from David himself, Lk. ii. 4 (αΰται αί πατρια\ τών νίών Συμ(ών, Ex. vi. 15 ; ό άνηρ αντης Μανασσης της φυΧής αίτης και της πατριός αυτής, .Judith viii. 2; τών φυ\ών κατά πάτριας αυτών, Num. i. 16; οίκοι πατριών, Ex. xii. 3 ; Num. i. 2, and often; add, Joseph, antt. 6, 4, 1 ; 7, 14, 7; 11, 3, 10). 3. family in a wider sense, i. q. nation, people : Acts iii. 25 (1 Chr. xvi. 28: Ps. xxi. <^ατριαρ•χτ)<; 496 (xxii.) 28) ; πήσα πάτρια iv oipavoU (i. e. every order of anaccls) KaicVly^s, Eph. iii. Ιϋ.' ιτατριάρχηί, -ου, ό, (πατριό and άρχω : Bee ίκατοντάρχης), a Hellenistic word [\V. 2ϋ], α patriarch, founder of a tribe, pru//eiiilor: used of David, Acts ii. 29; of the twelve sons of Jacob, founders of the several tribes of Israel, Acts vii. 8 sij. ; of Abraham, Ileb. vii. 4 ; of the same and Isaac and Jacob, 4 Mace. vii. 19; xvi. 25; used for ηΐ35*Π ΐ/Η\ 1 Clir. xxiv. 31 [but the te.\t here is uncertain]; for Ώ'ύ2ψ Ίΰ, 1 Chr. xxvii. 22; for ni'Slin -\ΰ, 2 Chr. xxiii. 20.* irarpiKOs, -ή, -όν, (πατήρ), paternal, ancestral, i. q. handed down by or received from one's fathers : Gal. i. 14. (Thuc, Xen., Plat., sqq.; Sept.) [Syn. see πατρώος, (in.]• iraTpis, -ίδοί, ή, {πατήρ), one's native country; a. as in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, one's father-land, one's (own) country : Jn. iv. 44 fcf. γάρ, Π. 1] ; i. q. a fi.xed abode (home [R. V. a country of their own'], opp. to the land where one παρίπιδι/ίχίΐ), Ileb. xi. 14. b. one's naliie (own) place i. e. city : Mt. xiii. 54, 57 ; Mk. vi. 1, 4 ; Lk. iv. 23, [24] ; so Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 36 (ίστι St' μοι Ίίροσόλυμα πατρίς) \ Joseph, antt. 10, 7, 3 ; U, 4, 6 ; φ πατρ'ί! ή ΆκυΧηΐα ην, Hdian. S, 3, 2 (1 ed. Bekk.).* Πατρόβα? [al. -βάς, as contr. fr. πατρόβιος; cf. B. D. s. V. ; Bp. Lshtft. on Philip, p. 176 sq. ; Chandler § 32], ace. -av [cf. B. 19 (17) sq. ; W. § 8, 1], Palrobas, a cer- tain Christian : Ro. xvi. 14.* -ιτατρολωαϊ, see πατραλωας- •ΐΓατρο.ιταρά-8οτο5, -ov, (πατήρ and τταραΒίδωμι), handed down from one's fathers or ancestors : 1 Pet. i. 18 [B. 91 (79)]. (Diod. 4, 8; 15, 74; 17, 4; Dion. Hal. antt. 5, 48; Theophil. ad Autol. 2, 34 ; Euseb. h. e. 4, 23, 10; 10,4, 16.)* irarpuos (poetic and Ionic πατρώΧος), -α, -ov, (πατήρ), fr. Horn, down, descending from father to son or from ancestors to their posterity as it were by right of inherit- ance ; received from the fathers : νόμος. Acts .xxii. 3 (2 Mace. vi. 1 ; Ael. v. h. 6, 10) ; θ(ός. Acts xxiv. 14 (4 Mace, xii. 19; and often in (jrk. writ. Oeoi πατρ., ZeCs πατρ. etc.); τα ΐθη τα π. Acts xxviii. 17 (.Justin dial. c. Tr. c. 63; πατρ. ΐθος, Ael. v.h. 7, 19 var.).* [Syn. πατρώο $, ττατ piKOs : on the distinction of the grammarians (see I'hotius, Suidas, Ammouius, etc. s. vv.) ace. to which irarpwos is used of property descending from father to son, νατρικόί of persons in friendship or feud, etc, see Eitendl, Lex. Soph ii. p. 5.30 sq. ; L. and S. s. V. ττατρφο5 ; Schmidt ch. 154.] Παύλος, -ου, ό, (a Lat. prop, name, Piiuliis^, Paid. Two persons of this name are mentioned in the N. T., viz. 1. Sergius Paubjs, a Roman propraetor [pro- consul ; cf. Sepyior, and B. D. s. v. Sergius Paulus], con- verted to Christ by the agency of the apostle Paul: Acts xiii. 7. 2. the apostle Paul, whose Hebrew name was Saul (see Σαοιίλ, 2aCXor). He was born at Tarsus in Cilicia (Acts ix. 11 ; xxi. 39 ; xxii. 3) of Jew- ish parents (Phil. iii. 5). His father was a Pharisee (Acts xxiii. 6) and a Roman citizen ; hence he himself was a Roman citizen by birth (Acts xxii. 28 ; xvi. 37) He was endowed with remarkable gifts, both moral and intellectual. lie learned the trade of a σκηνοποιύς (q. v.). Brought to Jerusalem in early youth, he was tliorouglily indoctrinated in the Jewish theology by tlie Pharisee (Jamaliel (Acts xxii. S; v. 34). At first he attacked and persecuted the Christians most fiercidy ; at length, on his way to Damascus, he was suddenly converted to Christ by a miracle, and became an indefatigable and undaunted preacher of Christ and the founder of many Christian churches. And not only by liis unwearied la- bors did he establish a claim to the undying esteem of tlie friends of Christianity, but also by the fact, which appears from his immortal Epistles, that he caught per- fectly the mind of his heavenly Master and taught most unequivocally that salvation was designed by God for all men who repose aliving faith in Jesus Christ, and that bondage to the Mosaic law is wholly incompatible with the sjjiritual Uberty of which Christ is the author. By his zeal and doctrine he drew upon himself the deadly hatred of the Jews, who at Jerusalem in the year 57 [or 5H ace. to the more common opinion ; yet see the chronological table in Meyer (or Lange) on Acts ; Farrar, St. Paul, ii. excurs. x.] brought about his imprisonment; and as a captive he was carried first to Cajsarea in Pal- estine, and two years later to Rome, where he suffered martyrdom (in the year 64). For the number of thos9 daily grows smaller who venture to defend the ecclesi astical tradition for which Eusebius is responsible (h. e. 2, 22, 2) [but of which traces seem to be found in Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 5, 7 ; can. Murator. (cf. Westcott, Canon, 5th ed. p. 521 sq.)], according to which Paul, released from this imprisonment, is said to have preached in Spain and Asia Minor ; and subsequently, imprisoned a second time, to have been at length put to death at Home in the year 67 or 68, while Nero was still emperor. [On this point cf. Meyer on Ro., Introd. § 1 ; Harnack on Clem. Rom. 1. c. ; Lghtft. ibid. p. 49 sq.; Hollzmann, Die Pastoralbriefe, Einl. ch. iv. p. 37 sqq.; reff. in Heini- chen's note on Euseb. h. e. as above ; v. Hofmann, Die heilige Schrift Neuen Testaments. 5ter Theil p. 4 sijq. ; Farrar, St. Paul, vol. ii. excurs. viii. ; Schaff, Hist, of Apostolic Christ. (1882) p. 331 sq.] Paul is mentioned in the N. T. not only in the Acts and in the Epp. from his pen, but also in 2 Pet. iii. 15. [For bibliog. reff. respect- ing his life and its debatable points see the art. Paulus by Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. pp. 356- 389.] παύω: 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, παυσάτω (1 Pet. iii. 10); Mid., pres. παύομαι; impf. ΐπαυόμην; fut. παίσομαι (see αναπαύω and ίπαναπαύω [and on the forms παήναι etc. cf. further Hilgenfeld, Hermae Pastor, ed. alt. proleg. p. xviii. note, also his ed. of the ' Teaching ' 4, 2 note (p. 9 7)]) ; pf. πίπαυμαι ; 1 aor. ίπαυσάμην ; f r. Horn, down ; to make to cease or desist : τ\ or τίνα από τίνος, to restrain [A. V. refrain'] a thing or a person from something, 1 Pet. iii. 10, fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 14 ; cf. W. § 30, 6 ; [(cf. 326 (305)) ; B. § 132, 5]. Mid. Sept. for Snn, n'73, n3W, Πάφοι; 497 ΐΓ€ίθα otc. to cease, leave off, [cf. W. 253 (238)] : Lk. viii. 24 ; Acts XX. 1 ; 1 Co. xiii. 8 ; the action or state desisted from is indicated by the addition of a pres. ptcp. (cf. Matthiae § 551 d. ; Passow s. v. II. 3 ; [L. and S. I. 4] ; W. §45,4; [B. § 144, 15]): ϊπαίσατο'ΚαΚων, Lk. V. 4 (Gen. xviii. 33 ; Num. xvi. 31 ; Deut. xx. 9) ; add, Acts v. 42 ; vi. 13; xiii. 10; xx. 31 ; xxi. 32; Eph. i. 16; Col. i. 9; lleb. X. 2; the ptcp. is wanting, as being evident fr. tlie context, Lk. xi. 1. Pass. [cf. W. § 39, 3 and N. 3] πίπαν ται αμαρτίας, hath got release [A. V. hath cedfed] from sin, i. e. is no longer stirred by its incitements and seduc- tions, 1 Pet. iv. 1 ; cf. Ki/pke, Observv. ad loc, and W. 0. s.; [B. § 132, 5 ; but AV^H txt. άμαρτίαΐΐ, dat., unto sins. CoMP. : ava-, ίπ-ανα-, συν-ανα- (-μαι), κατά- παύω].* Πάφο; [perh. fr. r. meaning ' to cozen ' ; cf. Pape, Ei- gennamen, s. v.], -ου, ή, Paphos [now Βαβα"], a maritime city on the island of Cyprus, with a harbor. It was the residence of the Roman proconsul. "Old Paphos" [now KukUa'], formerly noted for the worship and shrine of Venus [Aphrodite], lay some 7 miles or more S. E. of it (Mela 2, 7; Plin. h. n. 5, 31. 35 ; Tac. hist. 2, 2) : Acts xiii. 6, 13. \_Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 sqq.] * Ίταχννω: 1 aor. pass, ίπαχΰνθην; (fr. τταχϋς [thick, etout] ; cf. βραδύνω ; ταχύνω) ; to make thick; to viake fat, fatten: τα σώματα. Plat. Gorg. p. 518 c. ; βοϋν, de rep. p. 343 b.; "ιππον, Xen. oec. 12, 20. Aletaph. to make stupid (Jo render the soul dull or callous) : τας \Ι/υχάς, Plut. mor. p. 995 d. [i. e. de esu earn. 1, 6, 3] ; vovv, Philostr. vit. ApoU. 1, 8; παχ^Ϊ! Tas Siavoias, Ildian. 2, 9, 15 [11 ed. Bekk.]; την didvoiav, Ael. V. h. 13, 15 (hat. piny ue ingenium) [cf. W. 18]; (παχύνθη ή καρ8ία (Vulg. incrassatum est cor [A. V. their heart is waxed gross']) : Mt. xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27, after Is. vi. 10 (for aS JOiyn).* ΐΓί8η, -ijf, ή, (fr. n-ifa the foot, instep), a fetter, shackle for the feet: Mk. v. 4; Lk. viii. 29. (From Horn, down ; Sept.) * inSivos, -ή, -όυ, (jrfSiox [a plain], neSov [the ground]), level, plain : Lk. vi. 1 7. (Xen., Polyb., Plut., Dio Cass., al. ; Sept.) * irc^evcii; (πιζύς, q. v.) ; to travel on font (not on horse- back or in a carriage), or (if opp. to going by sea) by land: Acts xx. 13. (Xen., Isocr., Polyb., Strab., al.) * ■n-i^g (dat. fem. fr. Trefot, q. v. ; cf. Matthiae § 400), on foot or (if opp. to going by sea) hij land: Mt. xiv. 13 R G Tr L txt. WII t.\t. ; Mk. vi. 33. (Hdt., Thuc, Xen., Dem., al.) * ΐΓίζόϊ, -ή -όν, [we'fa; see π/δτ;], fr. Horn, down; 1. on foot (as opp. to riding). 2. bi/ land (as opp. to going by sea): ήκολούθησαν ττίζοί, Mt. xiv. 13 Τ L mrg. WH mrg. (so cod. Sin. also) for R G wffi,, [cf. W. § 54, 2; B. § 123, 9]. (Sept. for 'Sjt and Sji3.)• ΐΓίίθαρχί'ω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ptcp. πειθάρχησα! ; (ηίίβαρχοί; and this fr. πιίθημαι and άρχη) ; to oliey (a ruler or a superior) : θιω. Acts v. 29, 32 ; magistrates, Tit. iii. 1 [al. take it here absol. to be obedient] ; τώ λόγω τη9 ίικαιοσύνης, Polyc. ad Philipp. 9, 1 ; [A. V. to hearken tn] one advising something, .\cts xxvii. 21. (Soph., Xen., Polyb., Diod.. Joseph., Plut., al. ; on the very freq. use of the verb by Philo see Siegfried, Philo von Alex. u. s. w. p. 43 [esp. p. 108].)* π(ΐθο5 [WH πιθός; see I, »], -ή, -άν, (fr. irfWa, like φβίδόϊ fr. φείδομαι [cf.W. 96 (91)]), persuasive : {v παθοίί \6yoLs, 1 Co. ii. 4 [cf. B. 73]. Not found elsewhere [W. 24]. The (irks, say πιθανοί ; as πιθανοϊ \iyot, Joseph, antt. 8, 9, and often in Grk. auth. See Passow s. v. πιθανός, 1 e. ; [L. and S. ibid. I. 2 ; WH. App. p. 153].* Πίΐθώ, -ovs, ή, 1. Peilho, prop, name of a goddess, lit. Persuasion ; Lat. Suada or Suadela. 2. per- suasive power, persuasion : 1 Co. ii. 4 fv π£«5οϊ — ace. to certain inferior authorities. [On the word, see Miiller's note on Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 21, 3. (Hes., Hdt., al.)] * ■mlQat [(fr. r. meaning 'to bind'; allied w. πΊστκ, fides, foedus.etc.; C'urtius§327; VaniCek p. 592)]; impf. ijrci- θον; fut. ΐΓίΐ'σω; 1 aor. ?π•{ίσα; 2 ρί.πίποιθα; plupf. eVt- ποΙΘ(ΐν (Lk. xi. 22); Pass, [or Mid., pres. πείθομαι; impf. (πειθόμην]; pf. πίπεισμαι; I aor. ('πήσθην; 1 fut. πααΰψ σομαι (Lk. xvi. 31) ; fr. Horn, down; 1. Active; a. to persuade, i. e. to induce one by words to believe: absol. πείσας μετίστησεν ίκανον 5χ\ον, Acts χΐχ. 26 ; τί, to cause belief in a thing (which one sets forth). Acts xix. 8 RGT [cf. B. 150 (131) n.] (Soph. O. C. 1442); ntfd w. gen. of the thing, ibid. L Tr WH ; tjco, one. Acts xviii. 4 ; τινά τι, one of a thing. Acts xxviii. 23 Rec (Hdt. 1, 11)3 ; Plat. apol. p. 37 a., and elsewhere ; [cf. B. U.S.]) ; τιι/ά περί Tivos, concerning a thing, ibid. G LT Tr WH. b. as in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, w. an ace. of a pers., to make friends of, win one's favor, gain one's good-will. Acts xii. 20 ; or to seek to win one, strive to please one, 2 Co. v. 11 ; Gal. i. 10; to conciliate by per- suasion, Mt. xxviii. 14 [here Τ WH om. Tr br. αυτό»]; Acts xiv. 19 ; i. q. /o tranquillize [A. V. assure], τας καρ• δι'αί ημών, 1 Jn. iii. 1 9. c. to persuade unto i. e. move or induce one b// persuasion to do something : τικά foil, by an inf. [B. § 139, 46], Acts xiii. 43 ; xxvi. 28, (Xen. an. 1,3,19; Polyb. 4, C4, 2 ; Diod.11,15; 1 2, 39 ; Joseph. antt. 8, 10, 3); τινά foil, by ίνα [cf. W. 338 (317); B. § 139, 46], Mt. xxvii. 20 [Plut. apoph. Alex. 21]. 2. Passive and Middle [cf. W. 253 (238)]; a. to be persuaded, to suffer one's self to be persuaded ; to be in- duced to believe: absol., Lk. xvi. 31; Acts xvii. 4; to have faith, Heb. xi. 13 Rec; tiki, in a thing. Acts xxviii. 24 ; to believe, sc. ότι, Heb. xiii. 18 LTTrAVlI. πίπει- σμαΐ τι [on the neut. ace. cf. B. § 131, 10] περί τίκοί (gen. of pers.), to be persuaded (of) a thing concerning a person, Heb. vi. 9 [A. V. we are persuaded better thitigs of you, etc.] ; πεπεισμένος ειμί, to have persuaded one's self, and πείθομαι, to believe, [cf. Eng. to be persuaded], foil, by ace. w. inf., Lk. xx. 6 ; Acts xxvi. 26 ; πεπεισμαι ΟΤΙ, Ro. viii. 38 ; 2 Tim. i. 5, 1 2 ; with εν κνρίω added (see έν, I. 6 b.), Ro. xiv. 14 ; περί τίνος ότι, Ro. .\v. 14. b. to listen to, obey, yield to, comply with : τινί, one, Acts v. 36 sq. 39 (40) ; xxiii. 21 ; xxvii. 11 ; Ro. ii. 8 ; Gal. iii. 1 Rec; V. 7; Heb. xiii. 17; Jas. iii. 3. 3. 2 pf. irt• ποιθα (Sept. mostly for Πί33, also for Π3Π, \j.'d} Niphal of the unused ]ϊ.]ψ), intrans. to trust, have confidence, be confident : foil, by ace. w. inf., Ro. ii. 19 ; by Srt, Heb. ίΤείλατο? 498 ττειρασμος xiii. 18 Rec. ; by 5rt with a preparatory αϋτο τοϋτο [W. § 2.'t, 5], Phil. i. () ; τοϋτο wfwoitos ο'δα Srt, ibid. '25 ; πί- νοίθα w. a dat. of the pers. or thti tiling in wliioli the confi- dence reposes (so in class. Grk. [on its constr. in the N. T. see B. § 133, 5 ; W. 214 (201) ; § 33, d.]) : Phil. i. 14 ; Philem. 21, (2 K. .wiii. 20 ; Prov. xiv. 16 ; .xxviii. 26 ; Is. xxviii. 17; Sir. xxxv. (xxxii.) 24; Sap. xiv. 29) ; {αντω foil, by an inf. 2 Co. x. 7 ; ev Tim, to trust in, put confi- dence in a pers. or thing [cf. B. u. s.], Phil. iii. 3, 4 ; iv κνρίω foil, by ότι, Phil. ii. 24 ; tVi τιι/ι, Mt. xxvii. 43 L txt. WH nirg. ; Mk. x. 24 [where Τ \VH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; Lk. xi. 22 ; xviii. 9 ; 2 Co. i. 9 ; Heb. ii. 13, (and very often in Sept., as Deut. xxviii. 52 ; 2 Chr. xiv. 1 1 ; Ps.ii. 13; Prov. iii. 5 ; Is. viii. 17; xxxi. 1); eVi rtra, Mt. xxvii. 43 where L txt. WH mrg. tVi w. dat. (Is. xxxvi. 5 ; Ilab. ii. 18 ; 2 Chr. xvi. 7 sq., etc.) ; tni rtra foil, by Sri, 2 Co. ii. 3 ; 2 Th. iii. 4 ; tis τίνα foil, by on. Gal. v. 10. [COMP. : άνα-νύθω.Ι* Π<ιλάτοΐ, see Πιλάτ-οί [and cf. ft, t]. Treivaw, -ώ, inf. nfiuav (Phil. iv. 12) ; fut. ττίΐνάσω (Lk. vi. 25; Rev. vii. 16); 1 aor. indvaaa, — for the earlier forms πανην, πιινήσω, ίπιίνησα ; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 61 and 204 ; W. § 13, 3 b. ; [B. 37 (32) ; 44 (38)]; see also &ιψάω ; (fr. π(Ίνα hunger ; [see ■πίνηί'\) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for Si'"! ; to hunger, be hunijrij; a. prop.: Mt. iv. 2 ; xii.'l, 3 ; xxi. 18 ; xxv. 35, 37, 42, 44 ; Mk. ii. 25 ; .xi. 12; Lk. iv. 2; vi. 3, 25 ; i. q. to suffer want, Ro. xii. 20; 1 Co. xi. 21, 34 ; to be needy, Lk. i. 53 ; vi. 21 ; Phil. iv. 12 ; in this same sense it is joined with 8ιψαν, 1 Co. iv. 1 1 ; in figurative disc, oi ncivau κ. οί διψάν is used to describe the condition of one who is in need of nothing requisite for his real (spiritual) life and salva- tion, Jn. vi. 35; Rev. vii. 16. b. metaph. to crace ardently, to seek luith eager desire : w. ace. of the thing, την 8ικαιοσΰνην, Mt. v. 6 (in the better Grk. auth. w. a gen., as χρημάτων, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 39 ; συμμάχων, 7, 5, 50 ; (■παίνον, oec. 13, 9 ; cf. W. § 30, 10, b. fin. ; [B. § 131, 4] ; Kuinoel on Mt. v. G, and see διψ-άω, 2).* ιτίίρα, -as, η, (πίΐ/ιάω), fr. Aeschyl. down, a trial, experi- ment, attempt : πίΐ/^αν \αμβάΜΐν tivos, i. q. to attempt a thing, to male trial of a thing or a person, (a phrase com- mon in prof. auth. ; cf. Xen. mem. 1,4, 18; Cyr.3,3,38; see other exx. in Sturz, Lex. Xenoph. iii. p. 488 ; Plat. Protag. p. 342 a. ; Gorg. p. 448 a. ; Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 5 ; Ael. V. h. 12, 22; often in Polyb., cf. Schweighauser, Lex. Polyb. p. 460 ; Sept. Deut. xxviii. 56 ; [other exx. in Bleck on Heb. 1. e. ; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 146]), βάΚάπση!, to try ^vhether the sea can be crossed dry-shod like the land, Ileb. xi. 29 ; to have trial of a thing, i. e. to experience, learn to know by experience, μαστί-γων, Heb. xi. 36 (often in Polyb. ; r^s npovolas, Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 1).• ■π-ίΐράξω (a form found several times in Horn, and ApoU. Rhod. and later prose, for πιψάω [which see in Veitch] more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. ϊπίίραζον ; 1 aor. ίΤΓίίρασα; Pass., pres. πίφή^ομαι ; 1 aor. ίπίΐρίίσ^ΐ)^; pf. ptcp. π(π(ΐρασμίνοί (Heb. iv. 15; see παράω, 1); 1 ^r. mid. 2 pers. sing, ίπιφάσω (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.) ; Sept. for nD3 ; to try, i. e. 1. to try whether a thing can be done ; to attempt, endeavor : with an inf.. Acts ix. 26 L Ϊ TrWH ; xvi. 7; xxiv. 6. 2. to try, make trial of, test : τινά, for the purjjose of ascertaining his quality, or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself ; a. in a good sense : Mt. xxii. 35 [al. refer this to b.] ; Jn. vi. 6 ; [2 Co. xiii. 5] ; Rev. ii. 2. b. in a bad sense: to test one maliciously, craftily to put to the proof his feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1 ; xix. 3 ; xxii. 18, 35 ; Mk. viii. 11; x. 2; xii. 15; Lk. xi. 16; xx. 23 (where G Τ WII Tr txt. om. Tr mrg. br. the words ri μ( π(ΐράζ(τ() ; Jn. viii. 6. c. to try or test one's faith, virtue, charac- ter, by enticement to sin ; hence ace. to the context i. q. to solicit to sin, to tempt : Jas. i. 13 sq. ; Gal. vi. 1 ; Rev. ii. 10; of the temptations of the devil, Mt.iv. 1,3; Mk. i. 13 ; Lk. iv. 2; 1 Co. vii. 5 ; 1 Th. iii. 5 ; hence, ό πκρά- ζων, subst., Vulg. tentator, etc., the tempter : Mt. iv. 3 ; 1 Th. iii. 5. d. After the O. T. usage a. of God; to inflict evils upon one in order to prove his character and the steadfastness of his faith : 1 Co. x. 13; Heb. ii. 18; iv. 15 [see παράω]; xi. 17, 37 [where see WH. App.] ; Rev. iii. 10, (Gen. xxii. 1 ; Ex. xx. 20 ; Deut. viii. 2 ; Sap. iii. 5; xi. 10(9); Judith viii. 25 sq.). β. Men are said πιιράζ^ιν το» Ofov, — by exhibitions of distrust, as though they Λvished to try whether he is not justly dis- trusted ; by impious or wicked conduct to test God's justice and patience, and to challenge him, as it were, to give proof of his perfections : Acts xv. 10 ; Heb. iii. 9 RG, (E.\. xvii. 2, 7; Num. xiv. 22; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 41, 56; cv. (cvi.) 14, etc.; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdb. on Sap. p. 49) ; sc. τον Χριστοί/ [L Τ Tr txt. WH τ. κΰριον^, 1 Co. X. 9 [but L mrg. Τ λ\ΤΙ mrg. ΐξιπίίρασαν^ ; το ττνίΰμα κυρίου. Acts v. 9 ; absol. πίΐράζ(ΐν iv δοκιμπσι'α (see δοκιμα- σία), I leb. iii. 9 L Τ Tr WH. [On πfipάζω (as compared with δοκιμάζω), see Trench § Ixxiv.; cf. Cremer s. v. CoMi". : e'/i-TTfipafw.] * πειρασμός, -οϋ, ό, (πειράζω, q. v.), Sept. for HBD, an ex- periment, attempt, trial, proving; (Vulg. tentatio); a. univ. trial, proving : Sir. xxvii. 5, 7 ; τον παρασμον υμών iv Tji σαρκί μου, the trial made of you by my bodily con- dition, since this condition served to test the love of the Galatians towards Paul, Gal. iv. 14 L Τ TrWH [cf. b. below, and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]. b. spec, the trial of man's fidelity, integrity, virtue, constancy, etc. : 1 Pet. iv. 12 ; also an enticement to sin, temptation, whether aris- ing from the desires or from outward circumstances, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. x. 13; νπομίνΐίν π(φασμόν,•ΐ3^.\. 12; an internal temptation to sin, 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; of the tem])- tation by which the devil sought to divert Jesus the Messiah from his divine errand, Lk. iv. 13 ; of a condi- tion of things, or a mental state, by which we are enticed to sin, or to a lapse from faith and holiness: in the phrases (Ισφίρίΐν τινά els π«ρ•, ^It. vi. 13 ; Lk. .xi. 4 ; ίΐσ- (ρχισθαι fit π., Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38 [here Τ WII (ρχ-Ί ; Lk. xxii. 40, 46 ; adversity, affliction, trouble, [cf. our trial'], sent by God and serving to test or prove one's faith, holiness, character : ])lur., Lk. xxii. 28 ; Acts xx. 1 9 ; Jas. i. 2 ; 1 Pet. i. 6 ; τον πίΐρ. μου τον iv Tg σαρκί μον. ττειραω 499 Trevi?? vuy temptation arising from my bodily infirmity, Gal. iv. t4 Rec. [but see a. above] ; ωμα τοϋ πειρασμού, Rev. iii. 10; cK rr. ρΰ^σθαι, 2 Pet. ii. 9, (Deut. vii. 19; xxix. 3; Sir. ii. 1 ; vi. 7 ; .xxxvi. (xxxiii.) 1 ; 1 Mace. ii. 52). c. ' tp-mplalion ' (i. e. Iriat) of God by men, i. e. rebellion against God, by which his ρολνβΓ and justice are, as it were, put to the proof and cliallenged to show them- selves : Heb. iii. 8 (Deut. vi. IG ; ix. 22 ; Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8). Of. F-ied. B. Koeater, Die bibl. Lelire von der Ver- Buchiing. Gothii, 1859. (The word has not yet been found in prof. auth. exc. Diosc. praef. 1 : rohs tin παθών jr. experiments made on diseases.) * ΐΓίΐράω : impf. mid. 3 pers. (sing, and plur), ίττίΐράτο, infipiivTO ; pf. pass. ptcp. πιπ^φαμΐνο! (see below) ; com. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; lo Iry ; i. e. 1. to make a trial, to attempt, [A. V. to assay'], foil, by an infin. ; often so fr. Hom. down ; also so in the mid. in Acts ix. 26 R G; xxvi. 21, (Xen. symp. 4, 7 ; Cyr. 1, 4, 5, etc.; often in Polyb.; Ael v. h. 1,34; 2Macc. ii. 23; 3 Mace. i. 25; 4 Mace. xii. 2, etc.); hence πιπ^ιραμίνοί taught by trial, ex- perienced, lleb. iv. 15 in certain codd. and edd. ([Rec."], Tdf. formerly) [see below, and cf. τκφάζω, d. a.]. 2. In post- Hom. usage with the ace. of a pers. to test, make trial of one, put him to the proof : his mind, sentiments, temper, Plut. Brut. 10; in particular, to attempt to in- duce one to commit some (esp. a carnal) crime; cf. Passow s. V. 3 a. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. IV. 2]. Hence πιπαραμίνος in Heb. iv. 15 (see 1 above) is explained by some [cf. W. § 15 Note ad fin], tempted to sin ; but the Pass, in this sense is not found in Grk. writ. ; see Delitzsch ad loc* ΐΓ£ΐσ•μονή, -ης, η, (π(ίθω, q. V. ; like π\η(τμονη), persua- sion : in an active sense [yet cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. as below] and contextually, treacherous or deceptive persua- sion. Gal. V. 8 [cf. AV. § 68, 1 fin.]. (Found besides in Ignat. ad Rom. 3, 3 longer recens. ; Justin apol. 1, 53 init. ; [IrenEeus 4, 33, 7] ; Epiph. 30, 21 ; Chrysost. on 1 Th. i. 3; Apollon. Dys. syntax p. 195, 10 [299, 17]; Eustath. on Hom. II. a.', p. 21, 46 vs. 22 ; 99, 45 vs. 442 ; c'. p. 637, 5 vs. 131 ; and Od. χ', p. 785, 22 vs. 285.)• ■π-ίλαγοϊ, -ovs, το, [by some (e. g. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 305) connected with πλάξ, i. e. the 'flat' expanse (cf. Lat. aequor) ; but by Curtius § 367 et al. (cf. Vanicek p. 515) with πλΐ7σσω, i. e. the ' beating* waves (cf. our ' plash ')], fr. Hom. down ; a. prop, the sea i. e. the high sea, the deep, (where ships sail; accordingly but a part of the sea, θάλασσα, Aristot. Probl. sect. 23 quaest. 8 [p. 931', 14 sq.] eV τω \tμ(V^ ο\Ιγη (στ\ν η θαΚασσα, ϊν hi τώ πfλάyft βηθ(\α. Hence) το ττίλα-γος της θαλάσσης, aequor maris, [Α. V. the depth of the sea ; cf. Trench § xiii.], Mt. xviii. 6 (so too Apollon. Rhod. 2, 608 ; rt- λαγος alyaias αλός, Eur. Tro. 88; Hesych. πίλαγος• . . . βυθός, TTAOTof θαλάσσης- Cf. W. 611 (568); [Trench u. s.]). b. univ. the sea : το πίλ. τό κατά την Κιλικίαν, Acts .\xvli. 5 (see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in Passow s. v. πί- Xa^vr, 1 ; [L. and S. s. v. I.]).* ΐΓ€λίκ(ζω : pf. pass. ptcp. 7Τ€π(λ(κισμίνος ; (ηίλ(κνς, an axe or two-edged hatchet) ; to cui ojf with an axe, to behead : τινά, Rev. xx. 4. (Polyb., Diod., Strab., Joseph, antt. 20, 5, 4 ; Plut. Ant. 36 ; [cf. W. 26 (25)].) • ΐΓ€μΐΓΓθ5, -η, -αν, [it. Horn, down], fifth : Rev. vi. 9 ; ix. 1; .xvi. 10; -xxi. 20.* τΓίμπω ; fut. πίμψω ; 1 aor. ?πΕμψ•α [on its epistolary use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198 (172): Bd. Lghtft. on Phih ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11]; Pass., pres. πΐμπομαι; 1 aor. ϊπίμφθην (Lk. vii. 10) ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for nSttf; to send : τινά, absol., one to do something, Wt. xxii. 7 ; Lk. vii. 19 ; xvi. 24 ; Jn. i. 22; vii. 18; xiii. 16, 20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. άποστί'λλ.] ; 2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, etc. ; τινά or ηνάς is omitted where the ptcp. is joined to another finite verb, as ηίμψαι άπ(Κ(φάλισ( τον Ίωάννην, he sent (a deputy) and be- headed John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31 ; xxiii. 30, (for other exx. see άποστίλλω, 1 d.) ; in imitation of the Ilebr. "3 T3 nSi^ (iS.xvi. 20; 2S.xi. 14; xii. 25; 1 K. ii. 25) we find πΐμψας δια τών μαθητών αΐτοΰ, he sent by his disciples (unless with Fritz&ilie, and Bornemann, Schol. in Luc. p. Ixv., one prefer to take πίμψας absol. and to connect δια τ. μαθ. with the fell, (mev [so Mey., but see (7te Aufl. ed. Weiss), Keil, De Wette, al.]), Mt. xi. 2 L Τ Tr WH, (so άποστ(ίλας διό τοί dyycXoi;, Rev. i. 1). Teachers who come forward by God's command and with his authority are said to be (or to have been) sent by God : as, John the Baptist, Jn. i. 33 ; Jesus, Jn. iv. 34; V. 23 sq. 30, 37 ; vi. 38-40, 44 ; vii. 16, 28, etc.; Ro. viii. 3 ; the Holy Spirit, rhetorically personified, Jn. xiv. 26 ; XV. 26 ; xvi. 7. Ttra, w. dat. of the pers. to whom one is sent : 1 Co. iv. 1 7 ; Phil. ii. 1 9 ; τινά τιι»ι παρά τίνος (prop, to send one to one from one's abode [see παρά, I. a.]), Jn. XV. 26 ; προς τίνα, Lk. iv. 26 ; Jn. xvi. 7 ; Acts x. 33 ; XV. 25 ; xxiii. 30 ; [xxv. 21 R G] ; Eph. vi. 22 ; Phil, ii. 25 ; Col. iv. 8 ; Tit. iii. 12 ; with the ptcp. λίγων added (Hebr. "ΐαχ"? r\hv. Gen. xxxviil. 2i; 2 S. xiv. 32, etc.), said by messenger (Germ. Hess sagen), Lk. vii. 6, 19; τινά eh w. an ace. of place, !Mt. ii. 8 ; Lk. xv. 1 5 ; xvi. 2 7 ; Acts X. 5 ; the end, for which one is sent is indicated — by the prep. (Ις, Eph. vi. 22 ; Col. iv. 8 ; 1 Pet. ii. 14 ; by an infin., Jn. i. 33 ; 1 Co. xvi. 3; Rev. xxii. 16. Of thin" s, τί Tiw, a. to bid a thing to be carried to one: Rev. xi. 10; with ek and an ace. of place added, Rev. i. 1 1 ; ds w. an ace. indicating the purpose. Acts xi. 29; Phil.iv.l6[hereLchm.br.eir,cf.B.329(283)]. b. to send (thrust or insert) a thing into another : Rev. xiv. 15, 18, (Ael. hist. an. 12,5); τινιτίίίί tow. an inf., 2 Th- ii. 11. [CoMP. : ava-, tV, μ(τα-, προ-, συμ- πϊμπω.] ISyn. : π € μπω, αποστέλλω: πί^ιτω is the general term (liiffering from Ίημι in directing attention not to the exit but to the advent); it may even imply accompauimeut (.as when the sender is God). αποστ4\\ω includes a refer- ence to equipment, and suggi-!>ts official or authoritative send- ing. Cf. Schmidt ch. 104; Westcott on Ju. xx. 21, 'Addi- tional Note'; also 'Additional Note' ou 1 Jn. iii. 5.) τΓί'νηϊ, -ητος, 6, (πίνομαι to work for one's living; the Lat. penuria and Grk. πανάω are akin to it [cf. A'anicek p. 1164]; hence πίνης i. q. ίκ πόνον κα\ ϊν(ρ•γ(ϊας το ζη* (χων, Etym. Magn.), poor: 2 Co. ix. 9. (From Soph, and Hdt. down ; Sept. for p'3K, "Ji^, S^., U"^, etc.) " revd' epc 500 Π, ερΎαμος ISrN.irev»)!, τταχό$: "τί'η)$ occurs but once in the N.T., and then in a quotation fr. the Old, wliile πταχό! occurs between thirty and forty times. . . . Tlie irtVTjs may be so poor that he earns his bread by daily labor; the irTaixds that he only obtains his living by begging." Trench § xxxvi. ; cf. Schmidt ch. 85, 4 ; ch. 186.] irtvOcpd, Ss, η, (fem. of fffvflfpos, q. v.), α molher-in-iaw, a wife's molhei•: Mt. viii. 14; x. 35; Mk. i. :ίΟ ; Lk. iv. 38 ; xii. 53. (Dem., I'lut., Lcian., al. ; Sept. for ηίΟΠ•) * ■ir(v6(pa%,-ov,o,afalher-in-laip,!i wife's father: .In. xviii. 13. (Horn., Soph., Eurip., Plut., al. ; Sept. [for on, ion].)• ■πΐνβίω, -ώ ; fut. πίνθήσω: 1 aor. ϊπίνθησα; (πίνβοί) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chielly for ^DX ; lo mourn ; a. intrans. : Mt. v. 4 (•Ί ) : ix. 15 ; I Co. v. 2 ; πινθι^ν <■ κΧηίαν, Mk. xvi. 10 : Lk. vi. 25 ; Jas. iv. 9 ; Rev. xviii. 15, 19; «πί Tiw, over one, Rev. xviii. II R G L (Is. Ixvi. 10), (πί TtM, ibid. TTrWII (2 S. xiii. 37; 2 Chr. xxxv. 24, etc.). b. trans. /o mourn /or, /ameni, one: 2 Co. xii. 21 [cf. W. 635 sq. (590); B. § 131,4. Syn. see θρηνίω, fin.]• irtvflos, -our, TO, (πίνθω [(?) ; akin, rather, to iro^oc, πίνο- μαι (νί.π(νης) ; see Curtius p. 53; Vanicek p. 1105]), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for ^iX, mourning : Jas. iv. 9 ; Rev. xviii. 7 sq. ; xxi. 4.* irtvixpos, -a, -ov, (fr. πίνομαι, see πίνης), needy, poor : Lk. x.xi. 2. (Occasionally in Grk. auth. fr. Horn. Od. 3, 348 down ; for "J^» in Ex. xxii. 25 ; for Si in Prov. xxix. irevTOKis, adv.,^!>e times: 2 Co. xi. 24. [From Find., Aeschyl., down.] * ΐΓΕντακκΓ-χΙλιοι. -αϊ, -σ, five times a thousand, βυε thou- sand: Mt. xiv. 21; xvi. 9; Mk. vi. 44 ; viii. 19; Lk. ix. 14 ; Jn. vi. 10. [Hdt., Plat., al.]• ΐΓ6ντακόσ•ιοι,-αι, -a, fice hundred: Lk. vii. 41 ; I Co. -xv. 6. [From Horn, (-τηκ-) down.] • ire'vTt, oi, αϊ, τά, βνε : Mt. xiv. 1 7, and often. [From Ilom. down.] irevTc-Kcu-StKaTos, -i;, -ov, thefifieenth : Lk. iii. 1. [Diod., Plut., al.]• ■ΐΓ€ντήκονΓα, oi. al, τά, ./?/?.'/ : Lk. vii. 4 1 ; xvi. 6 ; Jn. viii. 57; xxi. 11 [RG η-ίπ-τ^κοι/τατριών (as one word)]; Acts xiii. 20; ava π(ντήκ. hij fflie.i [see άνά, 2], Mk. vi. 40 [here L Τ Tr WII κατά π. ; see κατά, II. 3 a. y.] ; Lk. ix. 14. [From Ilom. down.]* TTit^Koo-H), -rjs, ή, (sc. ημΐρα \ fem. of netmjKOcrros fifti- eth), [fr. Plat, down.], Pentecost (prop, the fiftieth day after the Passover, Tob. ii. 1 ; 2 Mace. xii. 32; [Philo de septen. § 21 ; de decal. § 30; cf. W. 26]), the second of the three great Jewish festivals ; celebrated at Jerusa- lem yearly, the seventh week after the Passover, in grateful recognition of the completed harvest (Ex. xxiii. 16 ; Lev. xxiii. 15 sq. ; Deut. xvi. 9) : Acts ii. 1 ; XX. 16; 1 Co. xvi. 8, (Joseph, antt. 3, 10, 6; [14, 13, 4 ; etc.]). [BB. DD. (esp. G'msburg in Alex.'s Kitto) s. v. Pentecost; Hamburger, Real-Encvcl. i. s. v. Wochen- fest ; Edersheim, The Temple, ch. xiii.] * •ΐΓϊτΓθ(βη<ηϊ, -ίωί, η, (πιίβω, 2 pf. πίποιθα). trust, confi- dence [R. v.], reliance : 2 Co. i. 15 ; iii. 4 ; x. 2 ; Eph. liL 1 2 ; fit Tiva, 2 Co. viii. 22 ; ίν tiw, Phil. iii. 4. (I'hilo de nobilit. § 7 ; Joseph, antt. 1,3, 1 ; 3, 2, 2 ; 10, 1, 4 ; [11, 7, 1 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 2, 3]; Zosim., Sext. Emp., al. ; Sept. once for !1ΠΒ3, 2 Κ. xviii. 19.) The word is con- demned by the Atticists ; cf. Loli. ad Phryn. p. 2!i5.• ΐΓί'ρ, an enclitic particle, akin to the pre]), itepi [Hcrm. de part, t'v, p. 6; Curtius §359; cf. Lob. Pathol. Elcmcn- ta, i. 290 ; al. (connect it directly with πίμαν, etc., and) give ' throughly * as its fundamental meaning ; cf. Baumlein, Partikeln, p. 198], showing that the idea of the word to which it is annexed must be taken in its fullest extent ; it corresponds to the Lat. circiter, cunque, (ierm. ttoch so sehr, immerhin, rvenigslens, ja; [Eng. how• evi'r much, very much, altogether, indeed']•, cf. Hermann ad Vig. p. 79 1 , Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 722 sqq. ; [Donald- son, New Crat. § 1 78 fin.]. In the N. T. it is affixed to the pron. of and to sundry particles, see Stantp, (άνπ€ρ, (irttp, indTTCp, (η(ΐ&ήπ(ρ, ήπ(ρ, καθάττιρ, καϊπιρ, όσπ(ρ, &σπ€ρ. [(From Horn, down.)] 7cpaiTcpci>. (fr. ncpa'iTcpoi, com par. of ttipa), adv., fr. Aeschyl. Λονιη, further, l>ei/ond, besides: Acts xix. 39 L Tr WII. for KGirepi ireprnv. With tliis compare oiSiv ζητήσ(τ( 7τ(ραιτ<ρω, Plat. Phaedo c. 56 fin. p. 107 b.• irt'pav, Ionic and Epic ττϊρην, adv., fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 15>' ; bei/ond, on the other side ; a. το nfpav, the region beyond, the opposite shore: Mt. viii. 18, 28; xiv. 22; xvi. 5; Mk. iv. 35 ; v. 21 ; vi. 45; viii. 13. b. joined (like a prep.) with a gen. [W. § 54, 6] : nipav r^s θαΚ. Jn. vi. 22, 25 ; ntpav τον Ιορδανού, Mt. iv. 15; xi.\.l; [Mk. x. iLTTrWH]; Jn.i.28; iii. 26 ; with verbs of going it marks direction towards a place [over, beyond], Jn. vi. 1, 1 7 ; x. 40 ; xviii. 1 ; of the place whence, [Mt. iv. 25] ; Mk. iii. 8. το nipav της θα^άσση!, Mk. V. 1 ; [τοϋ Ίορδάνον, Mk. χ. 1 R G] ; της λίμνης. Lk. viii. 22, (τοϋ ττοτα^ιοΟ, Xen. an. 3, 5, 2). [See Sophocles, Lex. s. v.] • irc'pas, -ατο£, τό, (πίρα beyond), fr. Aeschyl. down, ex- Iremiti/, bound, end, [see Tf'Xor, 1 a. init.] ; a. of a portion of space (bouridary, frontier) : ττίρατα τη! yfjs, [the ends of the earth], i. q. the remotest lands, Mt. xii. 42 ; Lk. xi. 31, (Hom. II. 8, 478 [πίΓραρ]; Thuc. I, «9 ; Xen. Ages. 9, 4 ; Sept. for I'^ti 'DSN [W. 30]) ; also τΐμ οίκουμίνης, Ro. X. 18 (Ps. Ixxi. (Ixxii.) 8). b. of a thing extending through a period of time (termination) : avriKoyiai, Heb. vi. 16 {των κακών, Aeschyl. Pers. 632; Jose[)h. b. j. 7, 5, 6, and other exx. in other writ.).* Πέργαμος [perh. -μον, τό, (the gend. in the N. T. is in- determinate; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 421 sq.; Pape, Eigen- namen, s. vv. )], -ου, ή, Pergamus [or Pergamum, (cf. Curtius §413)], a city of Mysia Major in Asia Minor, the seat of the dynasties of Attalus and Eumenes, cele- brated for the temple of Aesculapius, and the invention [(?) cf. Gardthausen, Griech. Palaeogr. p. 39 sq. ; Bin, Antikes Buchwesen, ch. ii.] and manufacture of parch- ment. The river Selinus flowed through it and the Cetius ran past it (Strab. 13 p. 623 ; Plin. 5, 30 (33) ; 13, 11 (21); Tac. ann. 3, 63). It was the birthplace of the Hepyq 501 trepi, physician Galen, and had a great royal library. ^Slod- ern Berghama. There was a Christian church there : Rev. i. 11; ii. 12.• Περγη, -tjs, ή, [cf. the preceding word], Perge or Perga, a town of Pamphylia, on the river Cestrus about seven miles (sixty stadia) from the sea. On a hill near the town was tlie temple of Diana [i. e. Artemis] (Strab. 14 p. 667; Mel. 1, 14; Liv. 38, 37) : Acts .xiii. 13 sq.; .\iv. 25. [BB. DD. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 134 sq.] * irepC, (akin to irepa, ττίραν; [Curtius §359]), prep., joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class. Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person or thiniT relative to which an act or state is predicated is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. cir- cum, circa; around, about. I. with the Gexitive it denotes that around which an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, etc., (Lat. de, quod altinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) [cf. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. de ; in later Lat. also circa) : after verbs of speaking, teaching, writing, etc., see under άυαγγίΧλω, άπαγ- yf λλω, άποΧογοΰμαι, 'γογγνζω* γράφω. δηΧήω. διαβίβαίον- μαι, ^tayvωρtζω, διαΧίγομιιι, διδάσκω. διηΎονμαι (Ileb. xi. 32), 8ίηγησις. απόν and ττρούπον, €π€ρωτάω and ίρωτάω, κατη)^(ω, λαλίω, Χίγω, \ayotf αΐτίω, Χίγγον αΤΓοδι'δωμι, Xoyoy δίδωμι, μαρτνρίω, μν(ΐα, μνημονεύω. TrpoKorayye λλω, ττρο- φητ€νω, ντΐομιμνησκω, \μηματίζομαι. ηχο5. φ^μ^. etc. ; after verbs of hearing, knowing, ascertaining, inquiring, see under άκοΰω, γινώσκω, ΙττΙσταμαι, ciSov, «ζίτάζω, ζητίω, (κζηηω, ίπιζητΐω, ζηττ^μα, πννθάνομαι, etc. ; after verbs of thinkint;, deciding, supposing, doubting, etc.; see under διαλογίζομαι, ίνθυμίομαι, πί- •Β€ΐσμαι, πιστίνω, διαπομίω, ΐλ^γχω, etc. b. as re- .spert-r [A. V. often {as) touching']; o. with verbs, to indicate that what is expressed by the verb (or verbal noun) holds so far forth as some person or thing is con- cerned ; with regard to, in reference to : Acts xxviii. 21 ; Heb. xi. 20 ; η irtpX σου μνΐία, 2 Tim. i. 3 ; {ζουσίαν c)(€tv, 1 Co. vii. 37; ΐπιταγην ΐχξΐν, ibid. 25; see cWeXXo/xat, €ντο\η, ΊταρακαΧίω, παραμνθ€ομαι, -ιτρόφασις, €κδίΚ0ί, λαγ- χάνω to cast lots. β. with the neut. plur. [and sing.] of the article, τα π(ρί τιι/οί the things concerning a person OT thing, i. e. wiiat relates to, can be said about, etc. : τα wepi της βασίΚίίαί ταΰ θ(θΰ. Acts ΐ. 3; viii. 12 [Rec] ; xix. 8 [here LTrWHom. τά] ; τα -nfpX TJjs όδοΰ. Acts ixiv. 22 ; with the gen. of a pers. one's affairs, his con- dition or state : Acts x.xviii. 15; Eph. vi. 22 ; Phil. i. 27; ii. 19 sq. ; Col. iv. 8 ; in a forensic sense, one's cause or case. Acts xxiv. 10 ; τα πιρί Ίησοϋ (or τοΰ κυρίου), [ίλβ (rumors) about .Tesus (as a worker of miracles), Jlk. v. 27 Τ Tr mrg. br. WH] ; the things (necessary to be known and believed) concerning Jesus, Acts xviii. 25 ; xxiii. 1 1 ; xxviii. 23 Rec, 31 ; the thinffs that befell .Tesus, his death, Lk. xxiv. 19 ; the things in the O. T. relative to him, the prophecies concerning him. ibid. 27; the career, death, appointed him by God, Lk. xxii. 37 [here Τ Tr WII ri etc.]. γ. itfpi Tii/of, absol., at the beginning of sen- tences, concerning, as to: 1 Co. vii. 1 ; viii. 1 ; xvi. 1,12; but in other places it is more properly taken with the foil, verb, Alt. xxii. 31 ; xxiv. 36; Mk. xii. 26; 1 Co. vii. 25 ; viii. 1, 4 ; xii. 1 ; 1 Th. iv. 9 ; v. 1 ; cf. W. 373 (350). c. on account o/; a. of the sub ject- matter, which at the same time occasions the action expressed by the verb : so after verbs of accusing, see f γκαλί'ω, κατηγορία), κρίνω τίνα ιτ(ρί τιι /of, etc. ; after verbs expressing e motion, see θαυμάζω, άγανακτίω. καυχάομαι, σ•η\αγχ^νίζομαι, €ν\αμιστ€ω, (νχαριστία, αΐνίω. pt\(i μοι, μεριμνάω; also after ΐυχομαι, 3 Jn. 2, see πάί, II. 2 b. 3. β. of the cause for (on account of) which a thing is done, or of that which gave occasion for the action or occurrence : Mk. i. 44 ; Lk. v. 14 ; Jn. x. 33, (wfpt τήί βλασφημίας Xa/3erf αίτό». Εν. Nic. C. 4, p. 546 ed. Thilo [p. 221 ed. Tdf.]) ; Acts xv. 2; xix. 23; x.w. 15, IS, 24; Col. ii. 1 [RG]. γ. on account of, i. e. for, for the benefit or advantage of: Mt. x.xvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24 R G ; Lk. iv. 38 ; Jn. xvi. 26 ; xvii. 9, 20 ; Heb, v. 3 ; xi. 40 ; wfpi and ίπίρ alternate in Eph. vi. 18 sq. [cf. \\\ 383 (358) n. also § 50, 3 ; B. § 147, 21. 22 ; AVieseler, Meyer, Bp. Lghtft., Ellic. on Gal. i. 4]. S. irepi is used of the design or purpose for removing something or taking it away : jrcpl αμαρτίας, to destroy sin, Ro. viiL 3 ; διδόι^αι «αυτοί/ jrfpt των αμαρτιών, to expiate, atone for, sins. Gal. i. 4 (where R WH txt. Inip [see as in y. above, and cf. imtp, I. 6]); also to ofi'er sacrifices, and simply sacrifices, wfpl αμαρτιών, Heb. v. 3 [R G inrep ; see u. S.] ; X. 18, 26 : nepl αμαρτιών ίπαβί [άπέΑαΐ'ίΐ'], 1 Pet. iiL 18 ; irfpl αμαρτίας sc. θυσίαι, sacrifices for sin, expia- tory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (fr. Ps. xxxix. (xl.) 7 ; cf. Xum. viii. 8 ; see αμαρτία, 3 ; τά πίρι της άμ. Lev. vi. 25 ; το jTf pi τ. ά. Lev. xiv. 1 9) ; ιλασμος π(ρι τ. αμαρτιών, 1 Jn. ii. 2; iv. 10. Π. with the Accusative (W. 406 (379)) ; a. of Place; about, around: as, about parts of the body, Mt. iii. 4 ; [xviii. 6 L Τ Tr WH] ; Mk. i. 6 ; ix. 42 ; Lk. xvii. 2 ; Rev. xv. 6. about jjlaces : Lk. xiii. 8 ; Acts xxii. 6 ; .Tude 7 ; τα Trfpi τόκ τόπον fKf'ivov, the neighborhood of that place, Acts xxviii. 7 ; ol nep! w. an ace. of place, those dwelling about a place or in its vicinity, Mk. iiL 8 [T Tr WH om. L br. o!]. oi nfpi τίνα, those about one i. e. with him, his companions, associates, friends, etc., Mk. iv. 10; Lk. xxii. 49 ; [add, Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) " Shorter Conclusion "] ; ace. to Grk. idiom oi π(ρΊ το» Παι'λοκ, Paul and his companions (Germ, die Paulusge- sellschaf) [cf. W. 40G (379) ; B. § 125, 8], Acts xiii. 13 ; ace. to a later Grk. usage αί π€ρ\ MapSav denotes Martha herself, Jn. xi. 19 (although others [e. g. Meyer, Weiss, Keil, Godet, al.] understand by it Martha and her at- tendants or domestics ; but L Tr WH read jrpot την (for Tat π€ρΊ) Μάρθαν) ; cf. Matthiae § 583, 2 ; Bnhdy. p. 263 ; Kiihner ii. p. 230 sq. ; [W. and B. u. s.]. in phrases the underlying notion of which is that of revolving about something: of persons engaged in any occupa- tion, oi TTfpl τα τοιαύτα ΐργάται [Α. V. the workmen of like occupation], .Vets xix. 25 ; πιρισπάσθαι, τνρβάζ^σθαι nepi τι, Lk. χ. 40, 41 [but here L Τ Tr WH txt. θορυβάζη q• v. (and λΥΗ mrg. om. jripl πολλά)], (ntpX την γίωργίαν γίντ Trepiayw 502 •ΐΓ€ρΐ€χω σθαι, - Mace. xii. 1). b. as ίο, in reference to, con- cerning : so after αδόκιμο;, 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; άστορ^ίΐκ, 1 Tim. vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. l.S ; vavayuv, 1 Tim. i. 19 ; ροσ£ΐν, 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; TTfpt πάντα iavroi* ττιιρΐχ^σΒαί τνπον, Tit. ii. 7 ; τα TTfpi i'fif, tlie state of my affairs, I'liil. ii. 23 ; al -ntpi τα λοιπά ('πίθυμίαι, i\Ik. iv. 1 1) (αϊ π€μ\ το σώμα ϊπιθνμίαι, Λγ- istot. rliet. 2, 12, 3; τα irepi ■^υχΙ}ν κ• σώμα ά-γαθά, eth. Nic. 1,8); cf. AV. §30,3Ν. 5; [Β.§12ό, 9]. ο. of Time; in a somewliat indefinite specification of time, about, near : πιρΊ τμίτην Sipav, ΛΙΙ. xx. 8 ; add, 5 sq. 9 ; xxvii. 4C ; Mk. vi. 4» ; Acts x. [3 L Τ Tr WH], 9 ; xxii. 6. III. in Composition Trepi in the X. T. signifies 1. ifi a circuit, round about, all around, as πίριάγω, irfpi- βαΚΚω, πΐμιηστράπτω, π€ρίκ€ΐμαι, ττερίοικίω, etc., etc. 2. Ιί'-ίμιηιΙ (because tliat ivliich surrounds a tiling does not belong to the thing itself but is be^-ond it) : nepUpyot, ιτίρί€ργάζομαί, ΤΓίριλβιττω, ττ^ριμίνω, ττίριονσιος, ττΐρισσόζ, πίρισσίύω. 3. tlirour/h [(?) — intensive, rather (cf. ττιριάπτω, 2)] : ττ(ριπ(ίρω. irepi -άγω; impf. nepirjyov ; ίν. Ildt. down; 1. trans. a. to lead around [cf. πιρί, III. 1]. b. i. ς ή παράΒοσις πιριίχ^ι, Euseb. h. e. 3, 1; see Grimm on 1 Mace. xi. 29. b. i. q. to lake possessioti of, to seize : τινά, Lk. v. 9 (2 Mace. iv. 16 ; Joseph, b. j. 4, 10, 1).• ΐΓίρι-ϊωνννω, or -ζώνννμι : Mid., 1 fut. πίριζώσομαι ; 1 aor. inipv. πίρΊζωσαι, ptcp. πιριζωσάμ^νος ; [)f. pass. ptcp. π(ρί(ζωσμίνος; to gird around [nfpi. III. I]; to fasten f/arments with a girdle : την οσφύν, to fasten one's cloth- ing about the loins with a girdle (Jer. i. 17), pass., Lk. xii. 35. ^lid. to gird one's self : absol., Lk. xii. 37 ; xvii. 8 ; Acts xii. 8 Bee. ; την ΰσφύν ίν άΚηθ^ία, with truth as a girdle, figuratively i. q. to equip one's self Λv^th knowl- edge of the truth, Eph. vi. 14 ; with an ace. of the thing with which one girds himself (often so in Sept., as σάκ- K.OV, Jer. iv. 8 ; vi. 26 ; Lam. ii. 1 ; στολήν 8όξης, Sir. xlv. 7 ; and in trop. expressions, δυναμιν, (ϋφροσΰνην, 1 S. ii. 4 ; Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 33 ; [B. § 135, 2J) : προς τοΊς μα- στο'ις ζώνην, Rev. i. 13; ζώνας πfp^ τα στήθη, Rev. χν. 6. (Arstph., Polyb., Pans., Plut., al. ; Sept. for Ijn and ΊϊΧ.) Cf. άυαζϋΐνιηίμί* irepi-eco-is, -ίωί, ή, (πιριτίθημι), the act of putting around [nepi, in. 1], (Yu\g. circumdalio, [A.V.wearing])•.πcpιθe- σιως χρυσίων κόσμοΓ , the adornment consisting of the gold- en ornaments wont to be placed around the head or the body, 1 Pet. iii. 3. ([ Arr. 7, 22], Galen, Sext. Empir., al.) • ■7Γ€ρι-ί<Γτημι : 2 Άοτ. π(ρύστην; pf. ptcp. πίρίΕστώί; pres. mid. impv. 2 pers. sing, πιρΰστασο (on which form see W. § 14, 1 e.; [B.47 (40), who both call it passive (but see Veitch p. 340)]) ; 1. in the pres., impf., fut, 1 aor., active, to place around (one). 2. in the perf., phipf., 2 aor. act., and the tenses of the mid., to stand around: Jn. xi. 42; Acts xxv. 7 [in LTTrWH w. an ace. ; cf. W. § 52, 4, 1 2]. Mid. to turn one's self about sc. for the purpose of avoiding something,\\ence to avoid, shun, (Joseph, antt. 4, 6, 12; 10, 10, 4; b. j. 2, 8, 6; Antonin. 3,4; Artem. oneir. 4, 59; Athen. 15 p. 675 e.; Diog. Laert. 9, 14; Jambl. vit. Pyth. 31 [p. 392 ed. Kiessl.] ; Sext. Empir. ; joined with φ^ύ-γαν, Joseph, antt. 1, 1, 4 ; with €κτρίπ(σθαί, Lcian. Hermot. § 80 ; Hesvch. περι- ιστασο • άπόφ(\τγ(, άνάτριπ^ ; [cf. further, D'Orville's Cliariton, ed. Reiske, p. 282]; this use of the verb is censured by Lcian. soloec. 5) : in the N. T. so with an ace. of the thing [cf. W. 1. c], 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit. iii. 9.• π(ρι-κάθαρμα, -rof, τό, (π(ρικαθα!ρω, to cleanse on all sides [πιρί. III. 1]), off-scouring, refuse: plur. τα nepiK. roO κόσμου [A. V. the filth of the world~\, metaph. the most abject and despicable men, 1 Co. iv. 13. (Epict. diss. 3, 22, 78; purgamenta urbis, Curt. 8, 5, 8 ; 10, 2, 7; [see Wetstein on 1 Co. 1. c] ; Sept. once for ^23, the price of expiation or redemption, Prov. xxi. 18, because the Grks. used to apply the term καθάρματα to victims sacri- ficed to make expiation for the people, and even to crim- inals who were maintained at the public expense, that on the outbreak of a pestilence or other calamity they might be offered as sacrifices to make expiation for the state.) * ΐΓ€ρι-καθ-£ζω : 1 aor. ptcp. πιρικαθίσας ; 1. in class. Grk. trans, to bid or 7iiake to sit around, to invest, besiege, a city, a fortress. 2. intrans. to sit around, be seated around ; so in Lk. xxii. 55 Lchm. txt.• irepi -καλνΐΓτω ; 1 aor. ptcp. π(ρικαλύψας ; pf. pass. ptcp. πιρικίκαΚυμμίνο! ; fr. Hom. down ; to cover all around \π(ρί. III. 1], to cover up, cover over: to πρόσωπον, Mk. xiv. 65 ; Lk. xxii. 64 [A. V. blindfold] ; τι χρυσίω, Heb. ix. 4 (Ex. xxviii. 20).* u\ηΓ.π(ρΐ(πάτουι>\ fat. irf ριπατήσω; 1 aor. nepi- (πάτησα; phipf. .'i jicrs. sing. TrfptcnfvarrfKei (Acts xiv. 8 HeC"), and without the augm. (cf. W. § 12, 9 ; [B. 33 (2ϋ)]) πίριπ-ίίτατήχίΐ (ibid. Rec." Grsb.) ; Sept. for ΙΙ^Π; to walk; [wali: about A. V. 1 Pet. v. 8]; a. prop, (as in Arstph., Xen., Plat., Isocr., Joseph., Ael., al.) : ab- sol., Mt. ix. 5; xi. 5; xv. 31 ; Mk. ii. 9 [Tdf. Cjrayf ] ; v. 42; viii. 24; xvi. 12; Lk. v. 23; vii. 22; xxiv. 17; Jn. i. 36; v. 8 sq. 1 1 sq. ; xi. 9 sq. ; Acts iii. 6, 8 sq. 12 ; xiv. 8, 10 ; 1 Pet. V. 8 ; Rev. ix. 20 ; i. q. to make one's toaij, make prog- ress, in fig. disc, equiv. to to make a due use of opportu- nities, Jn. xii. 35". Λνΐΐΐι additions : π(ριπ. γυμνής. Rev. xvi. 15 ; ίτίάνω (riWit), Lk. .xi. 44 ; διά w. gen. of the thing. Rev. xxi. 24 [G L Τ Tr AVH] ; iv w. dat. of place, i.q. to frequent, stai/ in, a place, Mk. xi. 27 ; Jn. vii. 1 ; x. 23 ; Rev. ii. 1 ; ΐν τισι, among persons, Jn. xi. 54 ; [π. oirou ^fliXff, of personal liberty, Jn. xxi. 18]; metaph. ev tj σκοτία, to be subject to error and sin, Jn. viii. 1 2 ; xii. 35"; 1 Jn. i. 6 sq. ; ii. 11; «w with dat. of the garment one is clothed in, ilk. xii. 38; Lk. xx. 46 ; Rev. iii. 4, (tv KOKKivots, Epict. diss. 3, 22, 10) ; fVl r^f θαλάσσης, [Mt. xiv. 25 RG; 26 LTTrWlI; Mk. vi. 4S, 40], see cTri, A. I. 1 a. and 2 a. ; iVt την θάλ-, ίπι τα ΰδητα, [Mt. xiv. 2ο LTTr Wn, 26 RG, 29], see eVi, C. L 1 a. ; ^παρίι την θάλασσαν, .Mt. iv. 18; Mk. i. 16 Rec, see παρά, 1Π. 1]; μfτά Tivot, to associate with one, to be one's companion, used of one's followers and votaries, Jn. vi. 66 ; Rev. iii. 4. b. Hebraistically, lo live [cf. W. 32 ; com. in Paul and John, but not found in James or in Peter (cf. ανα- στρέφω 3 b.. αναστροφή)^, i. e. a. to regulate one's life, to conduct one's self (cf. oSot, 2 a., πορεύω, h. γ.) : άξίως τινός, Eph. iv. 1 ; Col. i. 1 ; 1 Tlr. ii. 1 2 ; fiσχημύvως, Ro. .\iii. 13 ; 1 Th. iv. 12; ακριβώς, Eph. v. 15 ; ατάκτως, 2 'J'h.iii. 6, 1 1 ; is or καθώς rir, Eph. iv. 17; v. 8, 15 ; oJrtu π. καθώς, Phil. iii. 1 7 ; Ικαθώς π- οϋτω π. 1 Jn. ii. 6 (L Tr txt. Wll om. ούτω)] ; πώς, καθώς, I Th. iv. 1 ; oGriat, ώς, 1 Co. vii. 17 ; so that a nom. of (luality must be sought from what follows, ΐχθρυι τού σταυρού του Χριστού, I'hil. iii. 18. >vith a dat. of the thing to which the life is given or consecrated : κώμοις, μίθαις, etc., Ro. xiii. 13, cf. Fritz- sche on Rom. vol. iii. p. 140 sq.; w. a dat. of the standard ace. to which one governs his life [cf. Fritzsche u. s. p. 142 ; also B. § 133, 22 b. ; W. 219 (20,5)] : Acts xxi. 21 ; Gal. v. 16 ; 2 Co. xii. 18 ; foil, by e'l/ w. a dat. denoting either the state in which one is living, or the virtue or vice to which he is given [cf. ev, 1. 5 e. p. 210b bot.] : Ro. vi. 4; 2 Co. iv. 2; Eph. ii. 2, 10; i v. 17; v. 2; Col. iii. 7; iv. 5 ; 2 Jn. 4, 6 ; 3 Jn. 3 sq. ; iv βρώμασι, of those who have fellowship in the sacrificial feasts, Heb. xiii. 9 ; £» Χριστώ [see ev, I. 6 b.], to live a life conformed to the union entered into with Christ, Col. ii. 6 ; κατά w. an ace. of the pers. or thing furnishing the standard of living, [Mk. vii. 5]; 2 Jn. 6 ; κατά άνθρωπον, 1 Co. iii. 3 ; κατά σάρκα, Ro. viii. 1 Rec, 4; xiv. 15; 2 Co. x. 2. β. i. νι, Mt. -x.xi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1 ; to put a garnnMit on one, Mt. xxvii. 28 ; στίφακοκ, put on (encircle one's head with) a crown, Mk. xv. 17 (Sir. vi. 31 ; Plat. Alcib. 2 p. 151 a.) ; τι τιιί, Ιο put or bind one thing around anoth- er, Mt. xxvii. 48 ; Mk. xv. 36 ; Jn. xix. 29. b. trop. Ttvl Ti, lo present, bestow, confer, a thing upon one (so in class. Grk. fr. Hdt. down, as fKtvdfpiav, lldt. 3, 142; ba^av, Uem. p. 1417, 3 ; see Passow ii. p. 881 sq.; [L. and S. s. V. II.] ; TO όνομα. Sap. xiv. 21 ; Thuc. 4, 87) : τιμήν, 1 Co. xii. 23 ; Kslh. i. 20.* ΊΓίρι-τομή, -ης, ή, (τκριτίμναι), circumcision (on which see π(ριτ(μνω) ; a. prop. a. the act or rite oj circumcision : Jn. vii. 22 sq. ; Acts vii. 8 ; Ro. iv. 1 1 ; GaL V. 11 ; Phil. iii. 5 ; oi c'k τήί π(ριτ. (see (κ, II. 7), the cir- cumcised, they of the circumcision, used of Jews, Ko. iv. 12; of Christians gathered from among the .Jews, Acts xi. 2 ; Gal. ii. 12 ; Tit. i. 10 ; oi oi/res « irtpiT. Col. iv. 11. β. the state of circumcision, the being cir- cumcised : Ro. ii. 25-28; iii. 1 ; 1 Co. vii. 19 ; Gal. v. 6; vi. 15 ; Col. iii. 11 ; ev jrepiTopjj ων, circumcised, Ro. iv. 10. γ. by meton. 'the circumcision' tor oi πιριτμψ 6fVTtt the circumcised, i. e. Jews : Ro. iii. 30 ; iv. 9, 12; XV. 8; Gal. ii. 7-9; Eph. ii. 11 ; oi eV πιριτομψ πιστοί. Christian converts from among the Jews, Jewish Chris- tians, Acts X. 45. b. metaph. a. of Chris- tians : (ήμ«5 (σμ(ν) ή π^ριτομή, sejiarated from the un- clean multitude and truly consecrated to God, Phil. iii. 3 [(where see Bp. Lghtft.)]. β. ή πιριτομη άχ(ΐρο- ΤΓοίητο!, the extinction of the passions and the removal of spiritual impurity (see ntpirepva, fin.). Col. ii. 11*; 7 π(ριτομη KapSias in Ro. ii. 29 denotes the same thing ; ■jTfpiT. Χρίστου, of which Christ is the author, Col. ii. 11'. (The noun irtpiTop^ occurs three times in the O. T., viz. Gen. xvii. 13 ; Jer. xi. 16 ; for π'^ϊΟ, Ex. iv. 26 ; besides in Philo, whose tract nep'i ■πίριταμης is found in Mangey's ed. ii. pp. 210-212 [Richter's ed. iv. pp. 282-284] ; Jc seph. antt. 1, 10,5; [13, 11 fin.; c. Ap. 2, 13, 1.6]; plur., antt. 1, 12, 2.)• ΐΓ€ρι-τρ€ΐΓω ; to turn about \ττ(ρΊ, III. 1], to turn; to transfer or change by turning : τι or τινά iis τι, a pers. or thing 1)1/0 some stale ; once so in the N. T. viz. σί elt μανίαν nepirpend, is turning thee mad. Acts xxvi. 24 ; Toiir παρόντας fie χαραν πepιeστpfψf, .Joseph, antt. 9, 4, 4; TO θύον ei'r οργην πιρίτραπίν, 2, 14, 1. In various other uses in Grk. auth. [fr. Lys. and Plat, on].* ■ΐΓίρι-τρίχω : 2 aor. [πίρύ&ραμον Τ Tr WII], ptcp. π€ρι• SpapovTfs [RGL]; fr. [Hom.], Theogn., Xen., Plat, down ; to run around, run round about : with an ace. of place, Mk. vi. 55. (Sept. twice for aw, Jer. v. 1 ; Am. viii. 12.)• ii-epi-pos, -ov, (nepi and χώρυι), lying round about, neighlioring, (Plut., Aelian., Uio Cass.) ; in the Scrip- tures ή π(ρίχωροί, sc. γη, the region round about [q. v. in B. D.J : Mt. .\iv. 35 ; Mk. i. 28 ; vi. 55 [R G L t.xt.] ; Lk. iii. 3 ; iv. 14, 37 ; vii. 17; viii. 37 ; Acts .xiv. 6, (Gen. xix. 17; Deut. iii. 13, etc. ; τηι γη! rijs πιριχώρου. Gen. xix. 28 cod. Alex.) ; ή '"(ρϊχ• τοΰ Ιορδανού, Lk. iii. 3 (Gen. xiii. 10 sq. ; for Π^Π "<33, the region of the Jordan [cf. B. D. u. s.]) ; by nieton. for its inhabitants : Mt. iii. 5. (το π€ρίχωρον and τα περίχωρα, Deut. iii. 4 ; 1 Chr. v. 16 ; 2 Chr. iv. 17, etc.)* π£ρί-4'ημια, -tos, to, (fr. πίριι/'άω ' to wipe off all round'; and this fr. nepi [q. v. III. 1], and ψάω ' to wipe,' ' rub '), prop, what is wiped οβ'; dirt rubbed off; offscouring, scrapings: 1 Co. iv. 13, used in the same sense as Trepi- κάθαρμα, q. V. Suidas and other Greek lexicographers s. V. relate that the Athenians, in order to avert public calamities, yearly threw a criminal into the sea as an offering to Poseidon ; hence αργυρίου . . . π€ρίψημα τοΰ naidiov ήμων γένοιτο, (as if to say) let it become an expi- atory offering, a ransom, for our cliild, i. e. in comparison with the saving of our son's life let it be to us a despi- cable and worthless thing, Tob. v. 18 (where see Fritz- sche ; [cf. also Miiller on Barn. ep. 4, 9]). It is used of a man who in behalf of religion undergoes dire trials for the salvation of others, Ignat. ad Eph. 8, 1 ; 18, 1 ; [see Bp. Lghtft.'s note on the former passage].* ircpirepevo)jiai ; (to be Ttipnfpos, i. e. vain-glorious, brag- gart, Polyb. 32, 6, 5 ; 40, 6, 2 ; Epict. diss. 3, 2, 14) ; to boast one's se//'[A. V. raitnt one's self] : 1 Co. xiii. 4 (An- tonin. 5, 5 ; the comjioimd ϊμπιρπ^μ^ύ^πθαι is used of self-display, employing rhetorical embellishments in ex- tolling one's self excessively, in Cic. ad Attic. 1, 14. Hesych. nepnfpderaL• κατ(παίρ(ται) ; cf. Osiander [or Wetstein] on 1 Co. 1. c. [Gataker on Marc. Antonin. 5, . 5 p. 143].* Ilepo-Cs [lit. 'a Persian woman '], ή, ace. -/δα, Persis, a Christian woman : Ro. xvi. 12.* irepuo-i, (fr. nepas), adv., last year; the year just past : άπί) πέρυσι, for a year past, a year ago, [W. 422 (393)], 2 Co. viii. 10 ; ix. 2. ([Simon.], Arstph., Plat., Plut., Lcian.) * π(τάομ.αι, -Σιμαι; a doubtful later Grk. form for the earlier πέτομαι (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 581 ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 271 gq.; cf. W. 88 (84); [B. 65 (58) ; Veitch β. V.]) : loβy : in the N. T. found only in pres. ptcp. nt- τώμινος, Rec. in Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xiv. 6; xix. 17, where since Griesbach weTO/ierat has been restored.* wiTiivos, -ly, -OK, (Attic for πίτηνός, fr. πίτομαι), flying, winged ; in the N. T. found only in neut. plur. πττΓΐΐ'ά and τα πίτ(««<ά, as suhst., flying or winged animals, birds : Mt. xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 [G L Τ Tr AVH] ; Lk. xii. 24 ; Ro. i. 23 ; Jas. iii. 7 ; τα πβτ. τον ουρανού (Sept. for D'Dtyn ηΐ|' ■ see ουρανοί, 1 b.), the birds of heaven, i. e. flying in the heavens (air), Mt. vi. 26; viii. 20; xiii. 32; Mk. iv. 4 [Rec], 32; Lk. viii. 5 ; ix. 58 ; xiii. 19; Acts x. 12 [here L Τ Tr Wll om. τ<ί] ; .xi. 6. [(Theogn., Hdt., al.)]* ττίτομαι ; [fr. Horn, down] ; Sept. for ciij; ; to fly : Rev. iv. 7; viii. 13; xii. 14; xiv. 6; xix. 17; see ττίτάο/ιαί.* ■ΊΓί'τρο, -as, ή, f r. Horn, down ; Sept. for y'^O and Ίΐϊ ; α rock, ledge, cliff; a. prop. : Mt. vii. 24 sq. ; xxvii. 51, 60 ; Mk. XV. 46 ; Lk. vi. 48 ; 1 Co. x. 4 (on which see πνευματικός, 3 a.) ; a projecting rock, crag, Rev. vi. 15sq.; rocky ground, Lk. viii. 6,13. b. a rock; large stone : Ro. ix. 33 ; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). c. metaph. a man like a rock, by reason of his flrmness and strength of soul : Mt. xvi. 18 [some interpp. regard the distinction (gen- erally observed in classic Greek ; see the Comra. and cf. Sctimidt, Syn. ch. 51, §§ 4-6) between πέτρα, the massive living rock, and πίτρος, a detached but large fragment, as important for the correct understanding of this pas- sage ; others explain the different genders here as due first to the personal then to the material reference. Cf. Meyer, Keil, al. ; Green, Crit. Note on Jn. i. 43].* UcTpos, -ου, ό, (an appellative prop, name, signifying ' a stone,' ' a rock,' ' a ledge' or ' cliff ' ; used metaph. of a soul hard and unyielding, and so resembling a rock, Soph. O. R. 334 ; Eur. Med. 28; Here. fur. 1397; answer- ing to the Chald. Κι^φάί, q. v., Jn. i. 42 (43)), Peter, the surname of the apostle Simon. He was a native of Bethsaida, a town of Galilee, the son of a fisherman (see Ιωάννη!, 3, and Ίωνάί, 2), and dwelt with his Λvife at Capernaum, Mt. viii. 14 ; JMk. i. 30 ; Lk. iv. 38, cf. 1 Co. ix. 5. He had a brother Andrew, with whom he fol- lowed the occupation of a fisherman, Mt. iv. 18 ; Mk. i. 16 ; Lk. V. 3. Both were received by Jesus as his com- panions, Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 1 7 ; Lk. v. 10; Jn. i. 40-42 (41-43) ; and Simon, whose pre-eminent courage and firmness he discerned and especially relied on for the fu- ture establishment of the kingdom of God, he honored with the name of Peter, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; ^It. xvi. 18 ; Mk. iii. 1 6. Excelling in vigor of mind, eagerness to learn, and love for Jesus, he enjoyed, together with James and John the sons of Zebedee, the special favor and intima- cy of his divine Master. After having for some time presided, in connection with John and James the brother of our Lord [see Ίάκωβοί, 3], over the affairs of the Christians at Jerusalem, he seems to have gone abroad to preach the gospel especially to Jews (Gal. ii. 9 ; 1 Co. ix. 5 ; 1 Pet. v. 13 ; Papias in Euseb. 3, 39, 15; for Papias states that Peter employed Mark as 'interpreter' (έρμψ (Όττήί), an aid of which he had no need except beyond the borders of Palestine, especially among those who spoke Latin [but on the disputed meaning of the word 7Γ€τρώ8η<; 508 ΊΓίκραινι» 'interpreter' here, sec Morison, Com. on Mk., ed. 2, In- trod. p. xxix. sifi].]). But just as, on the night of the betrayal, Peter pro» ed so far faithless to himself as thrice to deny that he was a follower of Jesus, so also some time afterwards at Antioth he made greater conces- sions to the rigorous Jewish Christians than (Christian liberty permitted; accordingly he was rebuked by Paul for his weakness and ' dissimulation ' (ΐιπύκρίσΐί), Gal. ii. 1 1 SiY\. Nevertheless, in the patristic age Jewish Christians did not hesitate to claim the authority of Peter and of James the brother of the Lord in defence of their narrow views and practices. This is not the place to relate and refute the ecclesiastical traditions concerning Peter's being the founder of the church at Rome and bishop of it for twenty-five years and more ; the discussion of theia may be found in Hase, Protes- tant. Polemik gegen die rom.-kathol. Kirche, ed. 4, p. 123 sqcp ; [cf. Sclutff, Church History, 1882, voL i. §§ 2.5, 26 ; S'lejlerl in Ilerzog ed. 2, vol. .\i. p. 524 sqq., and (for reff.) p. 537 sc|.]. This one thing seems to be evident from Jn. xxi. ISsqq., that Peter suffered death by cru- cifixion [cf. Keil ail loc. ; others doubt whether Christ's words contain anything more than a general prediction of martyrdom]. Κ he was crucified at Rome, it must have been several years after the death of Paul. [Cf. BB. DD. and reff. u. s.] He is called in the N. T., at one time, simply Σίμων (once Συμεών, Acts xv. 14), and (and that, too, most frequently [see B. D. s. v. Peter, sub fin. (p. 2459 Am. ed.)]), Uirpos and Κι/φάϊ (q. v.), then again 2ίμων IlfVpot, Mt. xvi. 16 ; Lk. v. 8 ; Jn. [i. 42 (43)] ; vi. [8], 68; xiii. 6, 9, 24, [36] ; xviii. 10, 15, 25 ; xx. 2, 6 ; xxi. 2 sq. 7, 11, 15 ; once 2υμ€ώι/ Πί'τροί (2 Pet. i. 1 where L Wll txt. Σίμων) ; Σίμων ό Xeyo/ifKos ΠίτροΓ, Mt. iv. 18 ; X. 2 ; Σίμων ό ΐπικάλούμΐνος Ώίτρος^ Acts χ. 18 ; xi. 13 ; Σίμων ος ίπικαλ(ϊται Iltrpoff, .\cts χ. 5, 32. τΓίτρώΒηϊ, -ff, (fr. πίτρα and ίΐδοΓ ; hence prop. ' rock- like,' • having the appearance of rock '), rocky, slony : το irerpoiSes and τά π(τρώ8η, of ground full of rocks, Mt. xiii. 5, 20 ; Mk. iv. 5, 16. (Soph., Plat., Aristot., Diod. 3, 45 (44), Plut., al.) • Ίτήγανον, -ου, τό, [thought to be fr. ττήγνυμι to make solid, on account of its thick, fleshy leaves; cf. Λ'^anicek p. 457], rue : Lk. xi. 42. (Theophr. hist, plant. 1, 3, 4 ; Dioscorid. 3, 45 (52) ; Plut., al.) [K O.s.v.; Tri.tlram, Nat. Hist. etc. p. 478 ; Carruthers in the " Bible Educa- tor," iii. 216 sq.]• ιτηγή, -rjs, ή, fr. Horn, down, Sept. chiefly for l'i|0, Γχ, llp"3 ; a fountain, spring: Jas. iii. 11, and Rec. in 12; 2 Pet. ii. 17; ϋδατοϊ Λλο/ΐΕκου, Jn. iv. 14; των υδάτων. Rev. viii. 10; xiv. 7; xvi. 4; of a well fed by a spring, Jn. iv. 6. ζωη! mjyat ΙΒάτων, Rev. vii. 17; ή π• τ. vSaros rijf ζωηί. Rev. xxi. i\, (on both pass, see in ζωή, p. 274') ; ή π. ToC αΐματο!, a flow of blood, Mk. v. 29.* ιτήγνυμι : 1 aor. ίιτηξα ; fr. Horn, down ; to make fast, to fix ; to fasten together, to builil by fastening together : σκηνην, Heb. viii. 2 [A. V. pitched. CoMP. : προσ-πή- γνυμι.Ί * ΐΓη8^>ον, -ου, τό, (fr. ττηϋόν the blade of an oar, an oar), fr. Ilom. down, a ship's rudder: Acts xxvii. 40 [on tlie plur. see Smith, Voy. and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 4th ed., p. 183 sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Ship (2); cf. Graser, Das Seewesen des .\lterthums, in the Philologus for 1865, p. 266 s(j.] ; Jas. iii. 4.* τΓηλ(κοβ, -η, -υν, (fr. ηλίξ [?]), interrog., how great, how large : in a material reference (denoting geometrical magnitude as disling. fr. arithmetical, πόσοί) (Plat. Meno p.82d.; p.83e.; I'tol. 1, 3, 3 ; Zech. ii. 2, [6J), (lal. vi. 11, where cf. Winer, lliickert, Hilgcnfeld, [llackett in B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Epistle ; but see B]). Lghtft. or Meyer], in an ethical reference, i. q. how distinguished, Heb. vii. 4.• ιτηλόϊ, -oC, ό, fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; a. c/a^, which the potter uses (Is. xxix. 16; xli. 25; Nah. iii. 14) : Ro. ix. 21. b. i. q. murf [we t 'clay '] : Jo• i.K. 6, 11, Hscj.• •πήρα, -ας, ή, a wallet (a leathern sack, in which travel- lers and shepherds carried their provisions) [A. V. scrip (q. v. in B.D.)] : Mt. x. 10 ; Mk. vi. 8 ; Lk. ix. 3 ; x. 4; xxii. 35 sq. (Hom., Arstph., Joseph., Plut., Hdian., Lcian., al. ; with τώνβρωμάτων added, Judith xiii. 10.)* iriixiis• gen. πήχ^ως (ncit found in the N. T.), gen. plur. πηχών contr. fr. Ionic πηχίων (Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17; 1 K. vii. 3 (15), 39 (2) ; Esth. vii. 9 ; Ezek. xl. 5) ace. to later usage, for the earlier and Attic πήχίω», which is common in the Sept. (cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 245 sq. ; [ [VH. App. p. 157] ; W. § 9, 2 e.), ό, the fore-rtrm i. e. that part of the arm between the hand and the elbow-joint (Horn. Od. 1 7, 38 ; II. 2 1 , 1 66, etc.) ; hence a cubit, (ell, Lat. ulna), a measure of length efpial to the distance from the joint of the elbow to the tip of the middle finger [i. e. about one foot and a half, but its precise length varied and is disputed; see B. D. s. v. AVeights and Measures, II. 1]: Mt. vi. 27 ; Lk. xii. 25, [on these pass. cf. ηλικία, 1 a.] ; Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17. (Sept. very often for ΠΐΧ•)* τηάΧ,ω (Doric for πύζω, cf. B. 66 (58)) : 1 aor. (ττίασα; 1 aor. pass, (ττιάσθην; 1. to lay hold of: τίνα τήί Xeipos, Acts iii. 7 [Theocr. 4, 35]. 2. to take, cap- ture: fishes, Jn. xxi. 3, 10; βηρίον, pass., Rev. xix. 20, (Cant. ii. 15). to take i. e. apprehend: a man, in order to imprison him, Jn. vii. 30, 32, 44; viii. 20; x. 39; xi. 57; Acts xii. 4; 2 Co. xi. 32. [Comp. : ίπο-πιόίω.] * ΐΓΐίζω : pf. pass. ptcp. π^πκσμίνοί ; fr. Hom. down ; to press, press together: Lk. vi. .Ss. Sept. once for ^Ίη, Mic. vi. 15.• ιηθαναλογΟα, -ας, ή, (f r. πιθανολάγος ; and this fr. πιθανοί, on which see wft^os, and λόγος), speech adapted to per- suade, discourse in which probable arguments are ad- duced ; once so in class. Grk., viz. Plat. Theaet. p. 162 e. ; in a bad sense, persuasiveness of speech, specious dis- course leading others into error : Col. ii. 4, and several times in eccl. writers.* [iriOos, see παθός and cf. I, u] τηκροίνω : f ut. πικρανώ ; Pass., pres. πικραίνομαι ; 1 aor. €πικράνθην; (πικρός, q. v.) ; 1. prop, to make bitter: τά vSara, pass.. Rev. viii. H; τήκ κοιλίαΐ', to produce a bitter taste in the stomach (Vulg. nmarico). Rev. χ. πικρία 509 Ίτίναξ 9 sq. 2. trop. to embitter, exasperate, i. e. render angry, indignant ; pass, to be embittered, irritated, (Plat., Dem., al.) : npas τίνα, Col. iii. 19 (Athen. 6 p. 242 c. ; «Vi Tiva, E.\. xvi. 20 ; Jer. xliv. (x.\xvii.) 15; 1 Esdr. iv. 31 ; [ill Tin, Ruth i. 20]) ; conte.xtually i. q. to visit with bitter- ness, to grieve, (deal bitterly with), Job xxvii. 2 ; 1 Mace, iii. 7. [CoMP. : ηαρα-^ικραίνω•^ * TiKpCa, -as, jj, (πικροί), bitterness : χολή πικρία!, i. q. χολή πικρά [\V. 34, 3 b.; B. § 132, 10], hitter gall, i. q. extreme wickedness. Acts viii. 23 ; ρίζα πικρίας [reff. as above], α bitter root, and so producing bitter fruit, Ileb. xii. 15 (fr. Deut. xxix. 18 cod. Alex.), cf. Bleek ad loc. ; metaph. hilleniess, i. e. bitter hatred, Eph. iv. 31 ; of speech, Ro. iii. 14 after Ps. ix. 2•* (x. 7). (In various uses in Sept., [Dem., Aristot.], Theophr., Polvb., Plut., al.)• ιηκρόΐ, -ά, -01», [fr. r. meaning ' to cut,' ♦ prick ' ; Yanicek 534; Curtius § 100; Fick i. 145], fr. Horn, down, Sept. for Tp ; bitter: prop. .las. iii. 11 (opp. to τό γλυκύ); metaph. harsh, virulent, Jas. iii. 14.* iriKpus, adv., [fr. Aescliyl. down], bitterly : metaph. (κ\αυσ(, i. e. with poignant grief, Mt. xxvi. 75 ; Lk. xxii. 62 [here WH br. the cl.] ; cf. πικρον dUKpvov, Horn. Od. 4, 153.» Πιλάτοϊ, [L] Tr better Πίλάτοί ([on the accent in codd. see Tdf. Proleg. p. 103 ; cf. Chandler § 326 ; B. p. G n.] ; W. § 6, 1 m.), Ϊ WH incorrectly neiXiroc [but see Tdf. Proleg. p. 84 sq. ; WH. App. p. 155 ; and cf. fi, «], (a Lat. name, i.q. 'armed with a pilum or javelin,' like Torqiialus i. q. 'adorned with the collar or neck-chain'; [so generally ; but some would contract it from pdealus i. e. ' wearing the felt cap * (pileus), the badge of a manu- mitted slave ; cf. Leyrer in Herzog as below ; Plumptre in B. D. s. V. Pilate (note)]), -ου, ό [on the use of the art. witli the name cf. VV. 113 (107) n.], Pontius Pilate, the fifth procurator of the Roman emperor in Judtea and Samaria (having had as predecessors Coponius, Marcus Ambivius, Annius Rufus, and Valerius Gratus). [Some writ. (e.g. BB. DD. s. v.) call Pilate the sixth procura- tor, reckoning Sabinus as the first, he having had charge for a time, during the absence of Archelaus at Rome, shortly after the death of Herod; cf. Joseph, antt. 1 7, 9, 3.] He was sent into Judaea in the year 26 A. D., and remained in office ten years ; (cf. Keim, Jesus von Naz. iii. p. 485 sq. [Eng. trans, vi. 226 sq.]). Although lie saw that Jesus was innocent, yet, fearin" that the Jews would bring an accusation against him be- fore Caesar for the wrongs he had done them, and dread- ing the emperor's displeasure, he delivered up Jesus to their blood-thirsty demands and ordered him to be cru- cified. At length, in consequence of his having ordered the slaughter of the Samaritans assembled at Mt. Geri- zim, Vitellius, the governor of Syria and father of the Vi- tellius who was afterwards emperor, removed him from office and ordered him to go to Rome and answer their accusations; but before his arrival Tiberius died. Cf. Joseph, antt. 18, 2-4 and ch. 6. 5 ; b. j. 2, 9, 2 and 4 ; Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 38 ; Tac. ann. 15, 44. Eusebius (h. e. 2, 7, and Chron. ad ann. T. Gaii) reports that he died by hit own hand. Various stories about his death are related in the Evangelia apocr. ed. Tischendorf p. 426 sqq. [Eng. trans, p. 231 sq(j.]. He is mentioned in the N.T. in ΛΙΐ. xxvii. 2 sqq. ; Mk. xv. 1 sqq. ; Lk. iii. 1 ; xiiL 1 ; xxiii. 1 sqq. ; Jn. xviii. 29 sqq. ; xix. 1 sqq. ; Acts iii. 13 ; iv. 27 ; xiii. 28; 1 Tim. vi. 13. A full account of him ie given in Win, RWB. s. v. Pilatus ; [BB. DD. ibid.] ; Ewald, Geschichte Christus ' u. seiner Zeit, ed. 3 p. 82 sqq. ; Legrtr in Herzog xi. p. 663 sqq. [ed. 2 p. 685 sqq.]; Renan, Vie de Jesus, 14iue ed. p. 413 sqq. [Eng. trans. (ίί. Υ. 1S65) p. 333 sqq.]; Klopper in Schenkel iv. p. 581 sq. ; iY/iUre;•, Neutest. Zeitge.«ch. §17c. p. 252 sqq. ; [ Warneck, Pont. Pilatus u.s.w. (pp. 210. Gotha, 1867)].* ττίμπλημι (a lengthened form of the theme ΠΛΕΩ, whence πλί'οί, πλήρης [cf. Curtius § SOO]) : 1 aor. ίπΧησα; Pass., 1 f ut. πλησθήσ-ομαι ; 1 aor. ('πλήσθην ; fr. Hom. on ; Sept. for W]T2, also for >'."3ϋΠ (to satiate) and pass. ΐ'2ΰ (to be full) ; ΊοβίΙ : τι, Lk.' v. 7 ; τί tivos [W. § 30, 8 b.j, a thing with something, Mt. xxvii. 48 ; [Jn. xix. 29 RG]; in pass., Mt. xxii. 10; Acts xi.x. 29 ; [« τήϊ όσ/ιί}?, Jn. xii. 3 Tr mrg. ; cf. W. u. s. note ; B. § 132, 12]. what wholly takes possession of the mind is said to βΙΙ it : pass, φόβου, Lk. v. 26 ; βόμβου!, Acts iii. 10 ; avotas, Lk. vi. 11; ζήλυυ. Acts v. 1 7 ; xiii. 45 ; θυμοΰ, Lk. iv. 28 ; Acts iii. 10; πν(ί•ματο! άγιου, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67 ; Acts ii. 4; iv. 8,31 ; ix. 17 ; xiii. 9. prophecies are said πλησθηναι, i. e. to come to pass, to be confirmed by the event, Lk. xxi. 22GLTTr WH (for Rec. πληρωθψαι). time is said π\η(τθϊ\ναι, to be fulfilled or completed, i. e. finished, elapsed, Lk. i. 23, 57 [W. 324 (304) ; B. 267 (230)]; iL 6, 21 sq.; so kS?^ Job xv. 32; and «So to (ful-) fill the time, i. e. lo complete, fill up. Gen. xxix. 27 ; Job xxxix. 2. [CoMP. : ίμ-πίπ'Κημι-'] ' Ίημιτράω (for the more common πΐμπμημι [cf. Curtius § 378, Vanicek p. 510 sij.]) : [pres. inf. pass. πιμπράσβαι ; but R G L Tr WH πίμπρασθαι fr. the form πίμπρημι (Tdf. (μττιπράσθαι, q. v.)] ; in ( !rk. writ. fr. Hom. [(yet only the aor. fr. πρήίω)] down ; ίο Wow, ίο iuni, [on the connection betw. these meanings cf . Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. πρήθω] ; in the Scriptures four times to cause to swell, to render tumid, [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.] : γαστίρα, Num. v. 22 ; pass, to swell, become swollen, of parts of the body. Num. v. 21,27: Acts xxviii. 6 (see above and in ΐμπιπράω). [CoMP. ίμ- 7ΓΙ-7Γρίίω.] * ΊΓίνακίδιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of πινάκι!, -iios), [Aristot., al.] ; a. a i^maU tablet. b. spec, a tmiiing-tab- let: Lk. i. 63 [Tr mrg. πινακϊΒα; see the folL word]; Epict. diss. 3, 22, 74.• [irivoKts. -ΐ8ο!, ή, i.q. wivoKidiop (q. v.) : Lk. i. 63 Trmrg. (Epict., Plut., Artem., al.)*] ίτίναξ, -ακο!, 6, (com. thought to be fr. ΠΙΝ02 a pine, and so prop. 'a pine-board'; ace. to the conjecture of Buttmann, Ausf. Spr. i. 74 n., fr. ιινάξ for ν\άξ [i. e. anything broad and fiat (cf. Eng. planky] with ι in- serted, as in πινυτο! for πνυτο! [ace. to Fick i. 146 fr. Skr. pinaka, a stick, staff]), fr. Hom. down ; 1. a board, a tablet. 2. a dish, plate, platter : Mt. xiv. 8, 510 1 1 ; Mk. vi. 25, [27 Lchm. br.], 28 ; Lk. xi. 39 ; Horn. Od. 1, 111 ; It), 49; al.* iriva; impf. enivov, fut. πίομαι [of. W. 90 sq. (KG)], 2 pers. sing, πίίσαί (Lk. .xvii. 8 [(see reff. in κατακαυχάο- μαι)]) ; pf. 3 pers. sing. (Rev. xviii. 3) πίπωκί 11 G, but L Τ WII mrg. plur. -καν, for Λτΐιίΰΐι L ed. ster. Tr txt. ΛνΐΙ t.\t. read πίπτωκαν (see -γΊνομαϊ) ; 2 aor. tviov, impv. Trie (l.k. .xii. 19), inf. mf'iv ([Alt. xx. 22; .\xvii. 34 (not Tdf.); Mk. X. 3.s] ; Acts xxiii. 12 [not AVH], 21 ; Ro. xiv. 21 [not Wil], etc.), and in colloquial form πΐχ (Lchm. in .In. iv. 9 ; Rev. xvi. β), and π^Ιυ (Τ Tr Wll in Jn. iv. 7, 9 sq.; Τ WH in 1 Co. i.x. 4 ; x. 7; Rev. xvi. 6 ; Tin Mt. xxvii. 34 (bis); WW in Acts xxiii. 12, 21 ; Ro. xiv. 21, and often among the var. of the codd.) — on these forms see [esp. WH. App. p. 1 70] ; Frilzsche, De conforraatione N. T. critica etc. p. 27 sq. ; B. 66 (58) sq. ; [Curlius, Das Verbiim, ii. 103]; Sept. for ΠΠΕ/; [fr. Horn, down]; to drink: absol., Lk. xii. 19; Jn. iv. 7, 10; 1 Co. xi. 25; figuratively, to receive into the soul what serves to re- fresh, strengthen, nourish it unto life eternal, .In. vii. 37 ; on the various uses of the phrase eauUiv κ. niveiv see in (σθίω, a. ; τρώγαν κ- πίιχιν, of those living in fancied security, Mt. xxiv. .'J8 ; ττίνω with an ace. of the thing, to drink a thing [cf. W. 198 (187) n.], Mt. vi. 25 [G Tom. AVIIbr. thecl.], 31 ; xxvi. 29; Mk. .xiv. 25 ; xvi. 18; Rev. xvi. 6 ; to use a thing for drink, Lk. i. 15 ; xii. 29 ; Ro. xiv. 21 ; 1 Co. x. 4 [cf. W. § 40, 3 b.] ; το αίμα of Christ, see αίμα, fin. ; ro ποτημιον i. e. what is in the cup, 1 Co. x. 21 ; xi. 27, etc. (see ποτήριον, a.), ή γη is said nivdv τον vfTOv, to suck in, absorb, imbibe, Heb. vi. 7 (Deut. xi. 1 1 ; Ildt. 3, 117; 4, 198; Verg. eel. 3, 111 sat prata bibe- runt). πίνω e/c w. a gen. of the vessel out of which one drinks, ex τον ποτηριού, Alt. xxvi. 27 ; Mk. xiv. 23 ; 1 Co. X. 4 [cf. above]; xi. 28, (.\rstph.eqq. 12S9) ; ck w. a gen. denoting the drink of which as a supply one drinks, Mt. xxvi. 29 ; Mk. xiv. 25 ; ex τοΰ ϋίατος, Jn. iv. 13 SI). ; cK τοΰ o'mv (or θυμοϋ). Rev. xiv. 10 ; xviii. 3 [L om. Tr WII br. τοΰ οΓι/ου] ; από w. a gen. of the drink, Lk. xxii. 18. [Cf. B. § 132, 7 ; W. 199 (187). Co.mp. : κατά-, συμ-πίνω.] ΐΓΐότηϊ, ητοί, ή, (πίων !a.t), fa In ex ί! : Ro. xi. 1 7. (Aris- tot., Tlieophr., al. ; Sept. for It? 1 .) * πιπραακω : impf. Ιπ'ιπρασκον ; pf. πίπρακα \ Pass., pres. ptcp. ττίπ-ρασκόμί i/of ; pf. \iti;^. πιπραμϊνος; 1 aor. (ττρά- θην ; (fr. π(ράα> to cross, to transport to a distant land) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; Sept. for 153 ; to sell : τί, \It. xiii. 46 [on the use of the pf., cf. Soph. Glossary etc. Tntrod. § 82, 4] ; Acts ii. 45 ; iv. 34 ; v. 4 ; w. gen. of price, Mt. xxvi. 9 ; Mk. xiv. 5 ; Jn. xii. 5, (Deut. xxi. 14) ; τινά, one into slavery, Mt. xviii. 25 ; hence metaph. π^πραμί- νοί ίπ!> την άμηρτίαν, [Α. V. sold under sin'] i. e. entirely under the control of the love of sinning, Ro. vii. 14 {€πράβησαντο\3 ποιησαι TO πονηρον, 2 Κ. xvii. 17; 1 Alacc. i. 15, cf. 1 K. XX. (xxi.) 2:> : w. a dat. of the master to whom one is sold as a slave. Lev. xxv. 39 ; Deut. .xv. 1 2 ; xxviii. 68 ; Bar. iv. 6 ; Soph. Trach. 252 ; ίαυτόν tiw, of one bribed to give himself up wholly to another's will, τώ Φιλίιτπω, Dem. p. 148, 8).* irCirrw ; [impf. 'πιιττοι/ (Mk. xiv. 35 Τ Tr mrg. WH)] ; fut. π(σονμαί ; 2 aor. (πισον and ace. to the Ale.x. form (received everywhere by Lchm. [exc. Lk. xxiii. 30], Tdf. [exc. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [exc. ibid.], WII ; and also usedby RGin Rev.i.17; V. 14; vi. 13; xi.l6; xvii. 10) ΙτΓβσα (cf. [ WII. App. p. 164 ; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 724 sq. ; Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 sq., and see άπίρχομαι init.) ; pf. πίπτωκα, 2 pers. sing, -kis (Rev. ii. 5 Τ WH; see κοπιάω), 3 pers. plur. -καΐ' (Rev. xviii. 3, L ed. ster. Tr txt. WII txt.; see γίνομαι) ; (fr. ΠΕΤΩ, as τίκτω fr. ΊΈΚΩ [cf. Curlius; Etymol. §214; Ver- bum, ii. p. 398]) ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. chielly for Ssj • to fall ; used 1. of descent from a higher place to a lower ; a. prop, to fall (either from or upon, i. q. Lat. incido, deciilo) : ϊπί w. ace. of place, Alt. x. 29 ; xiii. 5, [7], 8 ; xxi. 44 [T om. L WII Tr mrg. br. the vs.] ; Mk. iv. 5; Lk. viii. G [here TTrWlI καταπ•.], 8 Rec; Rev. viii. 10 ; ftr τι (of the thing that is entered ; into), Mt. XV. 14 ; xvii. 15 ; Mk. iv. 7 [I, mrg. eVi] sq. ; Lk. vi. 3;) R (i L mrg. (but L txt. Τ Tr AVH (μπίπτ.) ; viii. 8 G L TTrWH, [14; xiv. SLTTrWH]; Jn. xii. 24; ti'r (upon) την γην, Rev. vi. 13 ; i.x. 1 ; iv μίσω, w. gen. of the thing, Lk. viii. 7 ; πάρα την όδόν, Mt. xiii. 4 ; Mk. iv. 4 ; Lk. viii. 5 ; to fall from or ilown : foil, by arto w. gen. of place, Mt. xv. 27 ; xxiv. 29 [here Tdf. «; Lk. xvi. 21] ; Acts XX. 9 ; foil, by ϊκ w. gen. of place, [Mk. xiii. 25 L Τ Tr WH] ; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 1 ; i. ([. to be thrust down, Lk. X. 18. b. metaph. : ου πίπτα ιπί τίνα 6 ^λιοί, i. e. the heat of the sun does not strike upon them or in- commode them, Rev. vii. 16; [a;(Xit ς νικρός. Rev. i. 1 7 ; πισωκ (ξ(\1τυξ(. Acts ν. 5; πίπτ. παρά (LTTr W11 προς) τυνς πόδας τινός, ibid. 10; absol. 1 Co. χ. 8 ; στόματι μαχαίρας, Lk. xxi. 24 ; absol. of the dismemberment of corpses by decay, Heb. iii. 1 7 ( Xum. xiv. 29, 32). γ. to prostrate one's self, used now of suppliants, now of persons rendering homage or worship to one : tVi τής γής, Mk. xiv. 35 ; ptcp. with προσκυνιΐν, as finite verb, Mt. ii. 1 1 ; iv. 9 ; xviii. 26 ; πίπταν κ. προσ- Kvvf'iv, Rev. V. 14; xix. 4; (π(σαπροσκυνησαι. Rev. xxii. 8; πίπτ. (Ίς Tois πόδιις (αίτοϋ). Mt. xviii. 2:i Rec; ei'r [T Tr WHwpos] T. πόδας τιιό'γ, Jn. xi. 32; προς τ. πόδας τινός, Mk. ν. 22 ; Ιπαρα τους πόδαςτινός, Lk. viii. 41] ; (μπροσθα ΙΓκτιΒίΛ 511 ττιστενω ιω¥ jroSSiv T»i/ot, Rev. xix. 10; ίνάπιόν rtvor, Rev. iv. 10; V. 8 •, iVi πρόσωπον, Mt. xxvi. 39 ; Lk. v. 12 ; fVl πράσ- tonov παρά tovs πόδαϊ tipos, Lk. xvii. 16 ; πισων cVl Toir TToSav προσίκύνησι, Acts x. 25 ; ττίσώ» «Vl πρόσωπον προσ- κύνησα, 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; cVl τα πρόσωπα και προσκυκΕΐκ, Rev. vii. 11 [tVl πρόσωπον Kec] ; xi. 16. δ. to fall out, fall from : tfpi| t « τ-^γ κεφαλής ιτεσΐΐται, i. q. shall perish, be lost, Acts xxvii. 34 Kec. €. to fall down, fall in ruin : of buildings, walls, etc., Mt. vii. 25, [27] ; Lk. vi. 49 (whereTTrWH σννίπ(σ()•, Heb. -xi. 30; oIkos iV οίκον πίπτει, Lk. xi. 1 7 [see ί'πί, C. I. 2 c] ; πυρ- yoi fVi τίνα, Lk. xiii. 4 ; σκηνή η π€πτωκυ1α, the tabernacle that has fallen down, a fig. description of the family of David and the theocracy as reduced to extreme decay [cf. σκηνή, fin.], Acts xv. 16. of a city : ίπ^σί, i. e. has been overthrown, destroyed. Rev. xi. 13 ; xiv. 8 ; xvi. 19 ; xviii. 2, (Jer. xxviii. (li.) 8). b. metaph. o. to be cast down from a stale of prosperity : πόθιν πίπτωκας, from what a height of Christian knowledge and attain- ment thou hast declined, Rev. ii. 5 G L Τ Tr WH (see above ad init.). β. to fall from a state of upright- ness, i. e. to sin: opp. to ίστάναι, 1 Co. x. 12; opp. to στήκ(ΐν, w. a dat. of the pers. whose interests suffer by the sinning [cf. W. § 31, 1 k.], Ro. xiv. 4 ; to fall into a State of wickedness, Rev. xviii. 3 L ed. ster. Tr WH txt. [see πίνω]. γ. to perish, i. e. to come to an end, dis- appear, cease : of virtues, 1 Co. xiii. 8 L Τ Tr WH [R. V. faiQ ; lo lose authority, no longer have force, of sayings, precepts, etc., Lk. xvi. 1 7 (ωστ( οΰ χαμαΐ πισί'ιται ο τι αν tinrjt, Plat. Euthyphr. §17; irrita cadunt promissa, Liv. 2, 31). i. q. to be removed from power by death, Rev. xvii. 10; to fail of participating in, miss a share in, the Mes- sianic salvation, Ro. xi. 11, [22] ; Heb. iv. 11 [(yet see €1», I. 5 f.)• CoMP. : ava-, άντί-, άπο-, (Κ-, iv-, ini-, κατά-, πάρα-, π(μι-, προσ-, συμ- πίπτω.] * Πισ -iSCa, -as, ή, Pisidia, a region of Asia Minor, bounded by Pamphylia and the Pamphylian Sea, Phrygia, and Lycaonia: Acts xiii. 14 RG; .xiv. 24. [B. D. s. v. Pisi- dia.] • nio-CSios, -a, -ov, i. q. Πισώικύς, belonging to Pisidia : Αντιόχεια ή Πισ-ιδία, i.e. taking its name from Pisidia (see Άι/τιοχ«α, 2) : Acts xiii. 14 L Τ Tr WH.* τη,στίίω ; irapf. (πίστινον; fut. πιστ(ίσω\ 1 aor. ί'πί- στευσα: \)(- π(π1στ(υκα\ plupf. (without augm., cf. W. §12, 9; [B. .'i3 (29)]) π^πιστ^Ικίΐν (Acts xiv. 23); Pass., pf. πεττίστίυμαι ; 1 aor. ϊπιστ^ύθην; (πιστόϊ); Sept. for i'OXri ; in class. Grk. fr. Aeschyl., .Soph., Eur., Thuc. down; to believe, i.e. 1. intrans. to think lo be true; to be persuaded of; lo credit, place confidence in ; a. univ. : the thing believed being evident from the preceding context, Mt. xxiv. 23, [2C] ; Mk. xiii. 21 ; 1 Co. xi. 18 ; w. an ace. of the thing. Acts xiii. 41 (LTTrWII 5 for Rec. ω) ; lo credit, have confidence, foil, by ότι. Acts ix. 26 ; τικί, to believe one's words, Mk. xvi. 13 sq. ; 1 .In. iv. 1 ; τικΐ ort, Jn. iv. 21 ; τώ ^(ihti, 2 Th. ii. 11 ; ίΤίρίτιΐΌΓ, ότι, .Jn. ix. 18. b. spec, in a moral •nd religious reference, πιστινίίν is used in the N. T. of «fe* eonviction and trust to which a man is impelled by a certain inner and higher prerogative and taw of his soid: thus it stands a. absol. to trust in Jesus or in God as able to aid either in obtaining or in doing somethino• : Mt. viii. 1 3 ; xxi. 22 ; Mk. v. 36 ; ix. 23 sq. ; Lk. viii. 50 ; Jn. xi. 40 ; foil, by 5τι, Mt. ix. 28 ; Mk. xi. 23 ; [Heb. xi. 6] ; τώ λόγω, ω (όν) tmfv ό Ίησου!, Jn. iv. 50. β. of the credence given to God's messengers and their words, w. a dat. of the person or thing: Μωίσεΐ, Jn. v. 46. to the prophets, Jn. xii. 38; Acts xxiv. 14; xxvi. 27; Ro. X. 16 ; cVi πάσίν oh (λάλησαν ο! προφήται, to place reli- ance on etc. Lk. .xxiv. 25. to an angel, Lk. i. 20; foil, by ότι, ibid. 4S. to John the Baptist, Mt. xxi. 25 (26), 32; Mk. xi. 31; Lk. xx. 5. to Christ's words, Jn. iii. 12; v. 38, 46sq.; vi. 30; viii. 45 sq.; x. [37], 38•; ToZf fpyoisoi Christ, ibid. 38'. to the teachings of e ν a n- gelists and apostles. Acts viii. 12; τ^ άληθίΐα, 2 Th. ii. 12; ίπιστίύθη το μαρτύρων, the testimony was believed, 2Th.i. 10 [cf. W. §39, 1 a. ; B. 175 (152)]; τ^γραφά, Jn. ii. 22. iv τω fiayyfXiu, to put faith in the gospel, Mk. i. 15 [B. 174 (151 sq.)'; cf. W. 213 (200 sq.)] (Ignat. ad Philad. 8, 2 [(but see Zahn's note) ; cf. Jn. iii. 15 in y. be- low]), γ. used especially of the f ai th by which a man embraces Jesus, i.e. a conviction, full of joyful trust, that Jesus is lite Messiah — the divinely appointed author of eternal salvation in the kingdom of God, con- joined tcith obedience lo Christ: πιστ. τον vlov τοΰ βιοϋ (ΐναι Ίησοϋν Χριστόν, Acts viii. 37 Rec; (πιστ(1θη (was believed on [cf. AV. § 39, la.; B. 175 (152)]) iv κόσμω, 1 Tim. iii. 16. the phrase πιστηΐ(ΐν dt τοκ Ίησοϋν, eii τ. v\ov τον 6eo\), etc., is very common ; prop, lo have a faith directed unto, believing or in faith to give one's self up lo, Jesus, etc. (cf. W. 213 (200 sq.) ; [B. 174 (151)]) : Mt. xviii. 6; Mk. ix. 42 [RGLTrtxt.]; Jn. ii. 11; iii. 15 RG, 16, 18, 36; vi. 29, 35,40,47 [RGL]; vii. 5, [38], 39,48; viii. 30 ; ix. 35 sq. ; x. 42 ; xi. 25 sq. 45, 48 ; ,xiL 11,37, 42, 44, [46]; .xiv.1,12; xvi. 9 ; xvii. 20; Acts x. 43; xix. 4; Ro. x. 14; Galii. 16; Phil i. 29; 1 Jn. v. 10; 1 Pet. i. 8 ; €ty το φως, Jn. xii. 36 ; ft? το όνομα αντον, Jn. i. 12; ii. 23; iiL 18; l,Tn.v.l3; τω όκο'μ. αύτοϋ, to com- mit one's self trustfully to the name (see όνομα, 2 p. 448*), 1 Jn. iii. 23 ; iπ' αυτόν, (πι τον κΰριον, to have a faith di- rected towards, etc. (see iπί, C. I. 2 g. a. p. 235"' [cf. W. and B. u. s., also B. § 147, 25]) : Mt. xxvii. 42 Τ Tr t.xt. WH ; Jn. iii. 1 5 L txt. ; Acts ix. 42 ; xi. 1 7 ; xvi. 31 ; xxii. 19, [(cf. Sap. xii. 2)] ; <'π' αϋτώ, to build one's faith on, to place one's faith upon, [see fVt, B. 2 a. γ. p. 233' ; B. U.S.]: Ro. ix. 33; x. 11; 1 Tim. i. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 6; iv αΙτώ, to put faith in him, Jn. iii. 15 [L mrg. ; cf. Τ Tr WH also (who prob. connect iv αυτω with the foil, ΐχτ] ; cf. Westcott, Com. ad loc, Meyer, al.)] (cf. Jer. xii. 6; Ps. Ixxvii. (Ixxviii.) 22, where πιστ. tv τινι means to put confidence in one, to trust one; [cf. Mk. i. 15 above, β. fin.]) ; iv τοΰτω πιστ(ίομ€», on this rests our faith [A.V. δ// this tve believe^, Jn. xvi. 30; with the simple dative, τώ κνρίω, to (yield faith to) believe [cf. B. 1 73 (151)]: Mt. xxvii. 42 RG L Trmrg.; Acts v. 14; xviii. 8 ; supply τούτω before oj in Ro. x. 14 ; lo trust in Christ [Godl, 2 Tim. i. 12 ; δια τινοΐ, through one's agency to 512 -TTunii be brought to faith, Jn. i. 7 ; I Co. iii. 5 ; διά Ίησοϋ tit β(όν, 1 Pet. i. 21 II G Tr mrg. ; δια της χάριτος. Acts xviii. 27 ; hia τοΰ λσ/ου αΰτώι» (is ('μί, tin. xvii. 20 ; διό τι, Jn. iv. 3y, [41], 42 ; xiv. 11. n-KTrcum foil, by Srt with a sen- tence in which either the nature and dignity of Clirist or his blessings are set forth : Jn. vi. G9 ; vUi. 24 ; x. 3S' RG; xi. 27, [42]; xiii. 19; [xiv. 10]; .\vi. 27, 30; .xvii. 8, 21 ; 1 Jn.v. 1, 5: Ko. vi. 8; 1 Th. iv. 14 ; μοι mi, Jn. xiv. 11 ; Ti, Jn. xi. 26; ττιστίίω σωθηναι. Acts .xv. 11 ; the simple ηιστ^ϋιιν is used eniphatically, of those who acknowledge Jesus as the saviour and devote theniselves to him : Mk. xv. 32 [here L adds αύτ-5] ; Lk. viii. 1 2 sq. ; x.\ii. 67; Jn. i. 50 (.'5 1 ) ; iii. 18; iv. 42, 48,53; v. 44 ; vi. 36, 64; ix. 38; x. 25 sq. ; .xii. 39, 47 Rec. ; xvi. 30; xx. 31 ; Acts V. 14 ; [xiii. 39] ; xv. 5 ; xviii. 8 ; [xxi. 25] ; Ro. i. 16; iii. 22: iv. 11; .x. 4; xv. 13; 2Co. iv. 13; Eph. i. 13, [19]; 2 Th. i. 10; Ileb. iv. 3; with ίξ ό\ης καρδίας added. Acts viii. 37 Rec. ; w. a dat. of instr. καρδία, Ιίο. χ. 10; ptcp. pres. o'l πιστιύοντα, as subst. : Acts ii. 44 ; Ro. iii. 22; 1 Co. i. 21 ; Gal. iii. 22 ; [Eph. i. 19]; 1 Th. i. 7; ii. 10, 13 ; 2 Th. i. 10 Rec.; 1 Pet. ii. 7; i. q. who are on the point of believing, 1 Co. xiv. 22, cf. 24 S(j. ; aor. ίπίστίνσα (marking entrance into a state; see|3ασιλfΓω, fin.), / became a believer, a Christian, [A. V. believed] : Actsiv. 4; viii. 13; xiii. 12,48; xiv. 1 ; xv. 7 ; xvii. 12, 34; Ro. xiii. 11 ; 1 Co. iii. 5; xv. 2, 11 ; with the addi- tion of eVi τον κύμιον (see above). Acts ix. 42 ; ptcp. πι- rrrdaat, Acts xi. 21; xix. 2; ό τηστ(νσας, Mk. .xvi. 16; plur., ibid. 1 7 ; Actsiv.32; ο'ιπίπιστ^υκύτα, they that have believed (have become believeni) : Acts xix. 18; xxi. 20; [on (John's use of) the tenses of πιστεύω see Westcott on 1 Jn.iii. 23]. It must be borne in mind, that in Paul's conception of το τηστίΰιιν (Ις Χριστοί», the prominent ele- ment is the grace of God towards sinners as manifested and pledged (and to be laid hold of by faith) in Jesus, particularly in his death and resurrection, as ap- pears esp. in Ro. iii. 25 ; iv. 24 ; x. 9 ; 1 Th. iv. 14 ; but in John's conception, it is the metaphysical relationship of Christ with (jod and close ethical intimacy with him, as well as the true ' life ' to be derived from Christ as its source; cf. Rilckert,\i3,s Abendmahl, p. 251. More- over, moTfieiv is used by John of various degrees of faith, from its first beginnings, its incipient stirring with- in the soul, up to the fullest assurance, .Jn. ii. 23 (cf. 24) ; viii. 31 ; of a faith which does not yet recognize Jesus as the Messiah, but as a prophet very like the Messiah, Jn. vii. 31 ; and to signify that one's faith is preserved, strengthened, increased, raised to the level which it ought to reach, xi. 15 ; xiii. 19 ; xiv. 29 ; xix. 35 ; xx. 31 ; 1 Jn. V. 13'' Rec; [cf. reff. s. v. ηίστκ, fin.]. -jna-Tevfiv is applied also to the faith by which one is persuaded that Jesus was raised from the dead, inasmuch as by that fact God declared him to be his Son and the >Ies- siah : Jn. xx. 8, 25, 29 ; (ντη καρδία πιστ. οτι 6 θ(6ς αντον ijytipev Ικ νικρων, Ro. χ. 9 [cf. Β. § 133, 19]. Since ace. to the conception of Christian faith Christ alone is the author of salvation, ό πιστ(ΰων repudiates all the various things which aside from Christ are commended as means of salvation (such e. g. as abstinence from flesh and wine), .and understands that all things are lawful to him which do not lead him away from Christ ; hence πιστιϋίί {τις) φαγύν πάντα, hath faith to eat all things or so that he eats all things, Ro. xiv. 2; cf. RUckert ad loo.; [\V. § 44, 3 b. ; per contra B. 273 sq. (235)]. S. πιστί ifw used in ref. to God has various senses: aa. it de- notes the mere acknowledgment of his existence : ότι ό θιος (ΐς fOTiv, Jas. ii. 19; acknowledgment joined to ai>- proi)riate trust, absol. Jude 5 ; ils Oeov, .In. xii. 44 ; xiv. 1 ; 1.(1• to believe and embrace what God has made ki\uuii either through Christ or concerning Christ τω θ(ώ, Jn. v. 24 ; Acts xvi. 34 ; Tit. iii. 8 ; 1 Jn. v. 10 ; en'i τόν Ofov, Ro. iv. 5 ; την άγάπην, ην ()(fi ά θ(ός, 1 Jn. iv. 16; ΐΐς την μαρτνρίαυ, ην κτλ., 1 Jn. ν. 10. ββ. to trust : τψ θιω, God promising a thing, Ro. iv. 3, 17 (on which see κατίναντι) : Gal. iii. 6 ; [.Jas. ii. 23] ; absol. Ro. iv. 18 ; foil, by ότι. Acts xxvii. 25. c. πιστ. is used in an ethical sense, of confidence in the goodness of men: η αγάπη ιτιστ€ν€ΐ πάντα, 1 Co. xiii. 7. τό TriOTfufti/ is opp. to ISfiv. Jn. XX. 29 ; to όμάν, ibid, and 1 Pet. i. 8, (Theoph. ad Autol. 1, 7 fin.), cf. 2 Co. v. 7 ; to dioKpivt• σθαι. Ro. iv. 1 9 sq. ; xiv. 1, 23, cf. Jas. i. 6 , to o/ioXoyti», Ro. X. 9. 2. transitively, τινι τι, to intrust a thing to one, i. e. to his fidelity : Lk. xvi. 1 1 ; ίαντόν τινι, Jn. iL 24 ; pass. πιστ(ίομαί τι, to be intrusted with a th iny : Ro. iii. 2 ; 1 Co. ix. 1 7 ; Gal. ii. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. i. 11 ; Tit. i. 3, (Ignat. ad Philad. 9; exx. fr. prof. auth. are given in AV, § 39, 1 a.). On the grammat. constr. of the word cf. B. § 133, 4 [and the summaries in EUicott on 1 Tim. i. 16 ; Vaughan on Ro. iv. 5; Cremer s. v.]. It does not occur in the Rev., nor in Philem., 2 Pet., 2 and 3 Jn. [Cf. the reEF. s. v. πι'στίί, fin.]• ΐΓίο-ηκόβ, -ή. -όν, {πιστός), pertaining to belief; a. having the power of persuading, sk'H/ul in producing be- lief: Plat. Gorg. p. 455 a. b. trusty, faithful, that can be relied on : γυνή πιστ. κα\ οίκουρος και πιιβομίνη τω άνδρί, Artem. oneir. 2, 32 ; often so in Cedrenus [also (of persons) in Epiph., Jn. Mosch., Sophron. ; cf. Soph. Le.x. s. v.] ; of commodities i. q. δόκιμοι, genuine, pure, un- adulterated : so νάρδος πιστική [but A. V. spike- (i. e. spiked) nard, after the nardi spicati of the Vulg. (in Mk.)], Mk. xiv. 3 ; Jn. xii. 3, (for nard was often adul- terated; see Plin. h. n. 12,26 ; Diosc. de mater, med. 1, (J and 7) ; hence metaph. το πιστικον της καινής διαθήκης κράμα, Euseb. demonstr. evang. 9, 8 [p. 439 d.]. Cf. the full discussion of this word in Fritzsche on Mk. p. 596 sqq. ; LUcke on Jn. xii. 3 p. 494 sqq. ; W. 97 (92) sq. ; [esp. Dr. Jas. Morison on Mk. 1. c.].* irtoTis, -(ως, ή. {π(ίθω [q. v.]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down ; Sept. for njns, several times for ΠΠΧ and nO'Dti; faith; i. e. 1. conviction of the truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.; θαυμάσια και μ(ίζω πίστεως, Diod. 1, 86) ; in the Ν. Τ. of a conviction or belief respecting man's relationship to God and divine things, generally with the included idea of trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with W. Heb. xi. 1 (where ττ/στίΓ is called (\πιζημίνων vrroaraatSt wuTTK 513 τίστι^ πραγμάτων ίλιγχο! οΰ βΧιπομίνων) ; ορρ. to ctSoc, 2 Co. V. 7 ; joined with άγάττη and ίΚπίί, 1 Co. xiii. 13. a. when it relates to God, πίστκ is the conviction that God exists and is the creator and ruier of all things, the pro- vider and beslower of eternal salvation through Christ : Heb. xi. 6 ; xii. 2 ; xiii. 7 ; πίστις tVi θ(ΰν, Ileb. vi. 1 ; ή ηίστις νμών ή itpos τίιν θίόν, by ivliich ye turned to God, 1 Th. i. 8 ; την π. υμών κ. ίλττίδα fit θ(όι>, directed unto God, 1 Pet. i. 21 ; with a gen. of the object [faith i'/i] (τώχ β(ών, Eur. Med. 414 ; τον 6tov, Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 16, 5 ; cf. Grimm, Exgt. Hdbch.on Sap. vi. 1 7 sq. p. 132 ; [cf. Meyer on Uo. iii. 22; also Mey., EUic, Bp. Lghtft. on Col. as below, W. 186 (175)]) ; η π. ttjs cvepyeiat τοϋ θ(θϋ ToC iyeipavTos αυτόν (Christ) iiTTUiv vfKpQiv, Col. ii. 12; dm πίίττίωί, by the lielp of faith, Ileb. .\i. .'i3, 3!) ; κατά πίστιν, i. q. mardovTei, Heb. .\i. 13; πίστα, dat. of means or of mode bg failli or bg believing, prompted, actuated, bg faith, Heb. .xi. 3 sq. 7-9, 17, 20-24, 27-29, 31; dat. of cause, because of faith, Heb. xi. 5, 11, 30. b. in reference to Christ, it denotes a strong and welcome conviction OT belief that Jesus is the Messiah, through whom we obtain eternal salvation in the kingdom of God (on this see more at length in πιστΕύω, 1 b. γ.) : ο. univ. : w. gen. of the object (see above, in a.), Ίι;σοϋ Χοιστοϋ, Ro. iii. 22; Gal. ii. 16; iii. 22; Eph. iii. 12; ΊησοΙ. Rev. xiv. 12; Χριστοϊι, I'Uil. iii. 'J: τοϋ νΐηϋ τοΟ θ(οϋ, (ial. ii. 20 ; τοϊ) κυρίου ημών Ίησοΰ Χρίστου, .las. ii. 1 ; μοϋ (i. e. in Christ), Rev. ii. 13, (certainly we must reject the in- terpretation, /hiVA in God of which Jesus Christ is the author, advocated by Van Hengel, Ep. ad Rom. i. p. 314 sqq., and H. P. Berlage, Dis(iuisitio de formulae Paulinae πίστίΓ 'Ii;<7oO Χρίστου signific.atione. Lugd. Bat. 18.")6) ; τοϋ (ϋαγγ(\ίου, Phil. i. 27; ά\ηθfίas, 2 Th. ii. 13. with Prepositions; «f (toward [cf. els• B. Π. 2 a.]) τον κύριον ημών ^Ιησοϋν, Acts χχ. 21 ; els Χριστόν• Acts .xxiv. 24 ; x.xvi. l.*^ ; η cts Χριστον ιτίστις υμών. Col. ii. 5; [πίστιν ίχαν fif €μί, Mk. ix. 42 Tr mrg.] ; προ: τ6ν κύρ. Philem. 5 [L Tr WH fir] ([see προΈ, Lie; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.] ; unless here we prefer to render πίστιν fdeiilg [see 2, below] ; cf. Meyer ad loc. and W. § 50, 2) ; π. ή ev Χρ. Ίησοϋ, reposed in Christ Jesus, 1 Tim. iii. 13 ; 2 Tim. iii. 15 ; η π. νμών (ν Χρ. ^\ησ. Col. i. 4 ; η κατά τίνα (see κατά, II. 1 e.) πίστα ΐντω κνρίω, Eph. i. 15 ; tv τω αίματι αντοϋ, Ro. iii. 25 [yet cf. Aleyer]. πίστις [cf. W. l.'O (1 14)] and ή πίστίί simply : Lk. xviii. 8; Acts xiii. 8 ; xiv. 22, 27; XV. 9; xvii. 31 ; Ro. [iii. 27 (on which see κόμοΓ, 3)], 31 ; iv. 14 ; v. 2 [L Tr WH br. τχ, πίστ({] ; ix. 32 ; χ. 8, 17; xii. 3, 6; 1 Co. [.xii. 9 (here of a charism)]; xvi. 13 ; 2 Co. iv. 13; [viii. 7] ; x. 15; Gal. iii. 14, 23, 25 sq.; ν.ό; vi.lO; Eph.ii.8; iii.l7; iv.5; vi.l6; 2 Th. i. 4 ; 1 Tim. i. 2, 4 (on the latter pass, see οικονομία), 19 ; ii. 7 (on which see άλήβιια. I. 2 c.); iii. 9; iv. 1, 6; V. 8; vi. 10,12,21 ; 2 Tim. i. 5; ii. 18; iii. 8, 10; iv. 7; Tit. i. 1, 4, 13 ; ii. 2 ; iii. 15 ; Jas. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 5 ; 2 Pet. i. 1, 5. with a gen. of the subject: Lk. xxii. 32 ; Ro. i. 8, 12 ; 1 Co. ii. 5 ; xv. 14, 17 ; 2 Co. i. 24 ; Phil. i. 25 ; ii. 17; 1 Th. iii. 2, .0-7, 10; 2 Th. i. 3; iii. 2; Philem. 6; Jas. i. 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 7, 9 [here WH om. gen.] ; 1 Jn. v. 4 ; 33 Rev. xiii. 10 ; πΧήρηί πίστιω! κ- πναίματο!. Acts vi. 5; πνεϋματο! κ- πίστ(ως, Acts -xi. 24 ; πίστεως κ- &vvάμ(ωt, Acts vi. 8 Rec. ; tj πίστα ίστηκϊναι, Ro. xi. 20 ; 2 Co. i. 24 ; iv rj πίστα στήκαν, 1 Co. xvi. 13 ; avcu, 2 Co. xiii. 5; μίνΐίν, 1 Tim. ii. 1 ϋ ; ϊμμίνιιν rg π. Acts xiv. 22 ; ΐπιμ*• vav, Col. i. 23 ; aTtpfus tj π. 1 Pet. v. 9 ; στ(ρ(οϋμαι r^ π. Acts xvi. 5 ; β€ίίαιοι.μαι iv [L Τ Tr WH om. cVj rj π. Col. ii. 7. Sinue faith is a power that seizes upon the soul, one who yields himself to it is said ύπακοναν ttj πίστα. Acts vi. 7 ; hence ίιπακοη τηί πίστεως, obedience ren- dered to faith [W. 186 (175)], Ro. i. 5; xvi. 26 ; ό « πίστ€ωί sc. ων, depending on faith, i. q. ό iriaTeuiDK [see «, II. 7], Ro. iii. 2iJ ; plur.. Gal. iii. 7, 9 ; ό ϊκ πίστιωί Ά3ραάμ, he who has the same faith as Abraham, Ro. iv. 16 ; (K πίστιωί firat, to be related, akin to, faith [cf. «, U.S.], Gal. iii. 12. ϋΐκαιος ix πίστ(ως, Ro. i. 17; Gal. iii. 11 ; δικαιοσίνη η iK πίστ. ΙΙυ. ix. 3'.> ; η ίκ πίστ. due. Ro. χ. 6 ; δικαιοσ- ix πίστιως tis πίστιν, sjiringing from faith (and availing) to (arouse) faith (in those who as yet have it not), Ro. i. 17; δικαιοσύνη η δια πίστίωί Χρίστου, ... ή ί κ β(οϋ δικ• «Vi rij πίστα, Phil. iii. 9 ; pass. δικαιονσθαι ffiVrft, Ro. iii. 28 ; δικαιαϋν τίνα δια ττίστίωι Χριστον, Gal. ii. 16: δια τ. πίστ^ωί, ϋο. iii. 30; δικ. τίνα iK πίστίωί. ibid. ; Gal. iii. 8 ; pass., Ro. v. 1 ; Gal. iii. 24 ; (ναγγ(λίζομαι την πίστιν, to proclaim the glad tidings of faith in Christ, Gal. i. 23 ; άκοη πίστ(ως, instruction concerning the necessity of f.iith [see ακοή, 3 a.], Gal. iii. 2, 5 ; ή πι'στίϊ is joined with η αγάπη: 1 Th. iii. 6 ; v. 8; 1 Tim. i. 14; ii. 15; iv. 12; vi. 11 ; 2Tim.ii. 22; with a subj. gen. Rev. ii. 19; πίστκ δι αγάπη! ivtpyovμivη, Gal. V. 6 ; αγάπη μΐτα πίστεως, Ej)h. vi. 23 : αγάπη iK π'ι• στ€ω! ανυπόκριτου, 1 Ί im. i. 5 ; πίστις και άγήττη ή iv Χρι- στώ ^Ιησοϋ, 2 Tim. i. 13 ; φιΧάν τίνα iv πίστ^ι, Tit. iii. 15 (where see De Wette) ; ΐργον πίστιω; (cf. 'ργον, 3 p. 248'' near bot.), 1 Th. i. 3 , 2 Th. i. 11. β. in an ethical sense, persuasion or conviction (which springs from faith in Christ as the sole author of salvation ; cf. πιστίνω, 1 b. γ. fin.) concerning things lawful for a Chris- tian : Ro. xiv. 1, 23 ; πίστιν ΐχαν, ibid. 22. c. univ. the religious belief of Christians ; a. subjectively; Eph. iv. 13, where cf. Meyer; in the sense of a mere acknowledgment of divine things and of the claims of Christianity, Jas. ii. 14. 17 sq. 20, 22, 24, 26. β. ob- jectively, the suhsfanre of Christian faith or what is be- lieved by Christians : ή παραδοθίΐσα π. Jude 3 ; ή άγιωτάτι; υμών πίστκ, ib. 20. There are some who think this meaning of the word is to be recognized also in 1 Tim. i. 4, 19 ; ii. 7 : iii. 9 ; iv. 1, 6 ; v. 8 ; vi. 10, 21, (cf. Pflei- derer, Paulinismus p. 468 [Eng. trans, ii. p. 200]) ; but Weiss (Bibl. Theol. d. X. T. § 107 a. note) correctly ob- jects, " πίστιί is rather the form in which the truth (as the substance of right doctrine) is subjectively appro- priated " ; [cf. Meyer on Ro. i. 5 (and Prof. Dwight's additional note) ; EUicott on Gal. i. 23 ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 157]. d. with the predominant idea of trust (or con^ifence) whether in God or in Christ, spring- ing from faith in the same: Mt. viii. 10; xv. 28; Lk. vii 9, 50 ; xvii. 5 ; Heb. ix. 28 Lchm. ed. ster. ; x. 22 ; Jis. TTiTTOS" 514 ττλάίίΐ? i. 6; with a gen. of the subject: Mt. ix. 2, 22, 29; xv. 28; ilk. ii. 5; v. 34; x.S2; [Lk. v. 20]; viii. 25,48; xvii. 19 ; xviii 42 ; w. a gen. of the object in wliich trust is placed: τοϋ ονόματος αυτόν. Acts iii. 16; πίστιν ΐχ(ΐν, [.Mt. xvii. 20]; .\.\i. 21; Mk. iv. 40; Lk. xvii. C; πάσαν την πίστιν, (' all the faith ' that can be thought of), 1 Co. xiii. 2 ; ίχ(ΐν πι'στιν θ(ον, to trust in God, Mk. xi. 22 ; ίχ(ΐν τιίστιν τοϋ σωδίϊΐ'αι, to be healed (see Fritzsche on Alt. |). 843 sq. ; [cf. \V. § 44, 4 a. ; B. 268 (230)]), Acts xiv. 9 ; ij dtavTOv π., awakened through him. Acts iii. 16 ; (υχη της πίσΓίωΕ, that proceeds from faith, Jas. v. 15 ; of trust in the promises of God, Ro. iv. 9, 16, 19 sq.; Ileb. iv. 2; vi. 12 ; X. .'i8 ,sq. ; w. a gen. of the subject, Ro. iv. 5, 12 ; π'ιστιι eVi θ^όν, faitli whicli relies on God who grants the forgiveness of sins to the penitent [see cVi, C. I. 2 g. a], Heb. vi. 1; δικωοσύνη Trjs ^τίστfωs [cf. AV. 186 (175)], Ro.iv. 11,13; ή κατά ττίστιν δικαιοσύνη, ΐΙ&\}.χΊ. 7. 2. fidelity, faithfulness, ι. e. the character of one who can be relied on : Mt. xxiii. 23 ; Gal. v. 22; Philem. 5 (? see above in b. a.); Tit. ii. 10. of one who keeps his promises: ή ιτίστίϊ ToC 6foii, subj. gen., Ro. iii. 3. objectively, ^j/iV/^/erf faith (often so in Attic writ. fr. Aeschyl. down) : άθ^τίΐν (see άθιτίω, a.) την πίστιν, 1 Tim. v. 12. Cf. especially Koolhaas, Diss, philol. I. et II. de vario usu et construc- tione vocum πίστίΓ, ntaros et πιστ(ϋ(ΐν in N. T. (Traj. ad Rhen. 1733, 4to.) ; Dav. Schuh, Was heisst Glauben, etc. (Leipz. 1830), p. 62 sqq. ; Riickert, Com. ub. d. Rom., 2d ed., i. p. 51 sqq.; Ltilz, Bibl. Dogmatik, p. 312 sqq.; Ilulher, Ueber ζωή u. τηστ(ύ(ΐυ im N. T., in the .Tahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. for 1N72, pp. 1-33; [Bp. Lghlfi. Com. on Gal. p. 154 sqq.]. On Paul's conception of πίσης. cf. Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungslehre, p. 94 scjq. ; Weiss, Bibl. Theol. d. N. T., § 82 c. d. (cf. the index s. v. Glaube); P/?eiWerer, Paulinismus, p. 162 sqq. [Eng. trans, i. p. 1 6 1 sqq. ; Schnedermann, De fidei notione ethica Pau- lina. (Lips. 1880)]. On the idea of faith in the Ep. to the Hebrews see Riehm, Lehrbegr. des llebr.-Br. p. 700 sqq. ; Ti^eiss, as above § 1 25 b. c. On John's con- ception, see Reuss, die Johann. Theol. § 10 in the Bei- trage zu d. theol. Wissensch. i. p. 56 sqq. [cf. his Histoire de la Theol. Chretienne, etc., 3me ed., ii. p. 508 sqq. (Eng. trans, ii. 455 sqq.)] ; Weiss, as above § 149, and the same author's Johann. Lehrbegriff, p. 18 sqq.* irtoTOs, -ή, -όν, (w(l6 [q. v.]), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. mostly for JOS J ; 1. trusty, faithful; of persons who show themselves faithful in the transaction of busi- ness, the execution of commands, or the discharge of official duties : SoiXnr, Mt. xxiv. 45 ; xxv. 21, 23 ; οικονό- μος, Lk. xii. 42 ; 1 Co. iv. 2 ; διάκανος. Eph. vi. 21 ; Col. i. 7 ; iv. 7 ; άρχκρίϋς, Heb. ii. 17 ; iii. 2 ; of God, abid- ing by his promises, 1 Co. i. 9; x. 13 ; 2 Co. i. 18 ; 1 Th. V. 24 ; 2 Th. iii. 3; Heb. x. 23; xi. 11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 13; 1 Jn. i. 9 ; 1 Pet. iv. 19 ; add, 1 Co. iv. 17; Col. iv. 9 ; 1 Tim. i. 12; Heb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; πιστία ev τιυι, in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; .xix. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 11 ; im Tt, Mt. xxv. 23; ά-χρι θανάτου. Rev. ii. 10. one who kept his plighted faith. Rev. ii. 13; worthy of trust ; that can he relied on : 1 Co. vii. 25 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; Christ is called μάρτν! 6 Ttitrrot, Rev. i. 5 ; with κα\ αΚηθινός added, Rev. iii. 14 ; [cf. xix. 11]. of things, that can he relied on: 6 λόγοϊ, 1 Tim. iii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 11 ; Tit. i. 9; [iii. 8; oCtoi oi λόγοι, Rev. xxi. 5 ; xxii. 6]; Avith ττάσης απο- δοχής άξιος added, 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9; τα όσια Δαυίδ τα πιστά (see όσιος, fin.). Acts xiii. 34. 2. easili/ pirsuaded; beliering, confiding, trusting, (Theogn., Ao- schyl.. Soph., Plat., al.) ; in the N. T. one who trusts in God's promises. Gal. iii. 9 ; is convinced that .Jesus has been raised from the dead, opp. to άπιστος, Jn. xx. 27; one who has become convinced that Jestis is the Messiah and the author of salvation (opp. to άπίστοΓ, see πιστίύω, 1 b. γ. and πίστις, 1 b.), [a believer'] : Acts xvi. 1 ; 2 Co. vi. 15 ; 1 Tim. v. 16 ; with the addition of τω κνρίω, (hit. of the pers. in whom faith or trust is reposed, Acts xvi. 15 ; plur. in Col. i. 2 [where cf. Bp. Lghtft.] ; 1 Tim. iv. 10 ; vi. 2 ; Tit. i. 6 ; Kev. xvii. 14 ; oi πιστοί, substantively [see Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 157], Acts x. 45; 1 Tim. iv. 3, 12; with tv Χριστώ Ίησοΰ added [cf. B. 174 (152)], Eph. i. 1 ; ei's θ^όν κτλ. 1 Pet. i. 21 L Τ Tr txt. WU ; πι- στον ποΐ(ΐν τι, to do something harmonizing with (Chris- tian) faith, [R. V. a faithful work], 3 Jn. 5.• ΐΓίστόω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ΐπιστώθην ; (πιστός) ; 1. to make faithful, render trustworthy, το ρήμα, 1 Κ. i. 36; τίνα ορκοις. Time. 4, 88 ; univ. to make firm, establish, 1 Chr. xvii. 14. 2. Pass. (Sept. in various senses for tDNJ) and mid. to be firmly persuaded of; to be assured of: τι (Opp. cyn. 3, 355. 417 ; Lcian. philo[)s. 5), 2 Tim. iii. 14; liesych. ΐπιστώθη ■ (πιίσθη, ΐπληροφορήθη. (In various other senses in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down.) • Ίτλονάω, -ώ ; fut. πλανήσω ; 1 aor. (πλάνησα ; Pass., pres. πλανωμαι; ]if. π(πλάνημαι; 1 nor. ΐπλανήθην; (πλάνη); fr. Aeschyl. and lldt. down; Sept. for Π;'ΓΙΠ ; to cause to stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a. prop. ; in pass., Sept. chiefly for Π>;ΓΙ, to go astray, wan- der,roam about, (first so in Hom. II. 23,321): Mt. xviii. 12 sq.; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. Uii. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 176); Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph. to lead away from the truth, to lead into error, to deceive : τινά, Mt. x.xiv. 4, 5, 11, 24 ; Mk. xiii. 5, 6; Jn. vii. 12; 1 Jn. ii. 26; iii. 7; 2 Tim. iii. 13»; Rev. ii. 20 GL Τ TrAVH ; xii. 9; xiii. 14; xix. 20; xx. 3, 8, 10; 4αυτόν, 1 Jn. i. 8; pass, tn be led into error, [R.V. be led a.'itray] : Lk. xxi. 8 ; Jn. vii. 47 ; Rev. ii. 20 Rec. ; to err, Mt. xxii. 29 ; Mk. xii. 24, 27 ; μη πλανάσθί, 1 Co. vi. 9 ; xv. 33 ; Gal. vi. 7 ; Jas. i. 16 ; esp. through ignorance to be led aside from the path of virtue, to go a.'itray, sin : Tit. iii. 3 ; Heb. v. 2 ; tj κάρδια, Heb. iii. 10; άττο της άληθ(ίας, Jas. v. 19; to wan- der orfall away from the true faith, of heretics, 2 Tim. iii. 13' ; 2 Pet. ii. 15 ; to be led away into error and sin, Rev. xviii. 23. [CoMP. : αποπλανάω.] * ιτλάνη, -ης, ή, a wandering, a straying about, whereby one, led astray from the right way, roams hither i-nd thither (Aeschyl., [Hdt.], Eur., Plat., Dem., al.). In the N. T. metaph. mental straying, i. e. error, wrong opinion relative to morals or religion : Eph. iv. 14; 1 Th. ii. 3 ; 2 Th. ii. 11 ; 2 Pet. ii. 18; iii. 17; 1 Jn. iv. 6; Jude 11 (on which [cf. W. 189 (177) and] see (κχίω, b. fin.) ! er- ΊτΧάνη'ί 615 ττλειωιι ror which shows itself in action, a wrong mode of acting : Ro. i. 27 ; πλάνη όδοΟ rivos, [R. V. error of one's way i. B.] the wrong manner of life which one follows, Jas. v. 20 (πλάνη ζωής, Sap. i. 12) ; as sometimes llie I^iat. error, i. q. thai which leads into error, deceit, fraud: Mt. xxvii. 64.* [ιτλάνηϊ, -ητο!, 6, see πλανήτη!.^ , ιτλανήτηβ, -ου, ό, (ττλαι/άω), α wanderer: άσπρα πλανη- ται, wandering slarf: (Aristot., Pint., al.), Jude 13 [where \VH mrg. αστ. πλανήτες (Xen. mem. 4, 7, 5)]; see αστήρ, fin.• irXdvos, -ov, wandering, roving ; trans, and trop. mis- leading, leading into error : πνεύματα πλάνα, 1 Tim. iv. 1 (πλάι/οι άνθρωποι, Joseph, b. j. -', 13, 4). ό πλάΐΌί substantively (Cic. aX. planus), a,^ we say, α vagabond, 'tramp,' impostor, (Diod., Atlien., al.); hence univ. a corrupter, deceiver, ( Vulg. sednclor) : Mt. .xxvii. 63 ; 2 Co. vi. 8 ; 2 Jn. 7. [Cf. ό «οσμοττλάι/οΓ, ' Teaching ' etc. 16, 4-]• ιτλάξ, -α /cos, ή, [(akin to πλάτος, etc. ; Fick iv. 161)], α flat thing, broad tablet, plane, levelsurface (as of the sea), (ef. our plate), (Find., Tragg., al. ; Sept. for niS) : ai π\άκ(<ί τήί διαθήκης (see διαθήκη, 2 p. 136'"), Heb. ix. 4 ; οϋκ iv πλαξι λιθίναις (tables of stone, such as those on which the law of Moses was written), άλλ' ev πλαξϊ καρ- δίας σαρκΐναις, 2 Co. iii. 3.* πλάσ-μα, -ror, τό, (πλάσσω), what has been moulded or /bnijerf, as f rom wax (Plat. Theaet. p. 1 97 d. and p. 200b.); the thing formed by a potter, earthen vessel, (Vulg.fgmen- tum) : Ro. ix. 20 (with πηλοϋ added, Arstph. av. 686).* ιτλάσ-ο-ω : 1 aor. ptcp. 7Γλάσα9 ; 1 aor. pass, ίπλάσθην ; [(perh. akin to πλατύ?; Curtius § 367 b)] ; fr. lies, down; Sept. chiefly for Ιϊ' ; to form, mould, (prop, something from clay, wax, etc.) ; used of a potter, Ro. ix. 20 ; of God as Creator (Gen. ii. 7 sq. 19 etc.), pass. 1 Tim. ii. 13.* Ίτλασ-ΓόΒ, -ή, -όν, (πλάσσω) ; 1. prop, moulded, formed, as from clay, wax, stone, (lies.. Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.). 2. trop. feigned : 2 Pet. ii. 3 ([Hdt. 1, 68], Eur., Xen., Lcian., al.).* irXarcIo, -or, ή, (fem. of the adj. πλατύς, sc. oSos [cf. W. 590 (549)]), a broad way, α street: Mt. vi. 5; xii. 19; Lk. X. 10; xiii. 26; xiv. 21; Acts v. 15; Rev. xi. 8 ; xxi. 21 ; xxii. 2. (Eur., Pint., al. ; in Sept. chiefly for 3m.)• ιτλάτοί, -ovt, TO, [(cf. πλάξ), fr. Ildt. down], breadth : Eph. iii. 18 (on which see μήκος) ; Rev. xxi. 16 ; carry- ing with it the suggestion of great extent, τ^ yffs, opp. to the ends or corners of the earth. Rev. xx. 9 ; (for 3πΤ3, IIab.i. 6).* ■πλατύνω; Pass., pf. 3 pers. sins;, πιπλάτυνται (see μι- αίνω); ι aor. €πλατΰνθην•, (πλατύς): to make broad, to enlarge: τί, Mt. xxiii. 5 ; η καρδία ημών π€πλάτννται, our heart expands itself sc. to receive you into it, i. e. to welcome and embrace you in love, 2 Co. vi. 1 1 (πλατυ^ιν την KapSlav for 3'? 3'Π"1Π, to open the heart sc. to in- struction, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 32 [cf. W. 30]) ; πλατύνθητι κα\ ύμί'ϊς, be ye also enlarged in heart, viz. to receive me therein, ibid. 1 3. (Xen., Plut, Anthol., al.) * ιτλατΰϊ, -eia, -ύ, [cf. Lat. planus, latus ; Curtius § 367 b; Vanicek p. 552], fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for αΠ";, broad: Mt. vii. 13.* πλέγμα, -ros, τό, (πλέκω), what is woven, plaited, or twisted together; a web, plait, braid: used thus of a net, Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 28 ; of a basket, Eur., Plat. ; πλέγμα βύβλινον, in which the infant Moses was laid, Joseph, antt. 2, 9, 4 ; by other writ, in other senses, braided hair ( Vulg. crines torli, ringlets, curls) : 1 Tim. ii. 9 (cf. 1 Pet. iii. 3).• πλ£ΐο-Γθ9, -η, -ov, (superl. of πολύς), most : plur. Mt. xi. 20 ; [όχλος πλΰστος, a very great multitude, Mk. iv. 1 Τ Tr Wfi] ; ό πλείστος όχλος, the most part of the multi- tude, Mt. xxi. 8 (Time. 7, 78; Plat. rep. 3 p. 397 d. ; λαός, Hom. II. 16, 377); ro πλύστον, adverbially, at the most, 1 Co. xiv. 27.* πλβίων, -όνος, ό, ή, neut. πλεΐον [eighteen times] and (in Lk. iii. 13; [Jn. xxi. 15 LT Tr WH] ; Acts xv. 28) πλί'ορ (cf. [ WH. App. p. 151] ; Matthiae i. p. 333 ; Kruger § 23, 7, 4 ; KUhner § 156, 3 ; Passow s. v. πολύς, Β. 1 ; [L. and S. s. V. B.]), plur. πλείονες and contr. πλ«'ουί, ace. πλύ- ονας and contr. πλείους (which forms are used indiscrim- inately in the N. T.), neut. πλβίονα and (L Τ Tr WII in Mt. xxvi. 53 ; LTin Lk. xxi. 3) contr. πλ^'ω; (compar. of τΓολύί) ; more, i.e. 1. greater in quantity: the object with which the comparison is made being added in the genitive, as πλείονας των πρώτων, more in number than the first, Mt. xxi. 36 ; πλείον (or πλείω) πάντων, more than all, Mk. xii. 43 ; Lk. xxi. 3 ; πλείονα . . . τούτων, more than these, .In. vii. 31 [here L Τ Tr WH om. the gen. (see below)]; πλείονα τών πρώτων, more than the first. Rev. ii. 19 ; πλείον τούτωΐ', more than these, Jn. xxi. 15 ; [πλείονα τιμήν εχειν τοΟ οίκον, Heb. iii. 3" (cf. W. 190 (178), 240 (225))] ; περισσεύειν πλ«ον, more than, foil, by a gen. [A. V. exceed~\, Mt. v. 20. πλείονες (πλείους) ή, Mt. xxvi. 53 R G [L πλίίω (br. ή)} ; Jn. iv. 1 [Tr mrg. om. WHbr. ^] πλείον ή, more than, Lk. ix. 13; πλίον πλην w. a gen. Acts xv. 28; πλέον παρά [ττ or τίνα (see παρά, in. 2 b.)], Lk. iii. 13; [Heb. iii. 3'] ; ^ is omitted before numerals without change of construction : ε'τών ην πλειό- νων τεσσαράκοντα ό άνθρωπος, Acts iv. 22 ; οΰ πλείους είσίν μοι ήμέραι δεκαδύο. Acts xxiv. 1 1 (here Rec. inserts η) ; ημέρας ου πλείους οκτώ η δέκα (Rec. πλείους η δέκα). Acts XXV. 6; add, Acts xxiii. 13, 21 ; as in (!rk. writ, after a neuter: πλίίω [Lchm. ^inbr.] δώδεκαλεγεώνας, Mt..\xvi. 53[TTrAVH(butTλfy^ώι'ω:')], (πλαν — Attic for πλίΓοι- — εξακόσιους, Arstph. av. 1251 ; ετη γεγονώς πλείω έβδομη- κοντα. Plat. apol. Socr. p. 1 7 d. ; see ij, 3 a. ; on the omis- sion of quam in Latin after plus and amptius, cf. Rams- horn, Lat. Gram. p. 491 ; \_Rohy, I^t. Gram. § 1273]). the objects with which the comparison is made are not added because easily supplied from the context: Jn. iv. 41; [vii. 31 (see above)]; xv. 2; Heb. vii. 23; τό πλείον, the more (viz. the greater debt mentioned), Lk. vii. 43 ; πλείον, adverbially, more, i. e. more earnestly, Lk. vii. 42; ί'πί πλείον, more tcridely, further, διανέμεσθαι. Acts iv. 17; [cf. xx. 9 WH mrg. (see below)]; προκόπτειν, 2 Tim. iii. 9 ; f πϊ πλείον ασεβείας, 2 Tim. ii. 16; έπ\ πλείον, longer (than proper). Acts xx. 9 [not WH mrg. (see TTA-e/iw 516 •7Γ\ήκτηί above)] ; xxiv. 4 ; plural TrXfiora, more, 1. e. a larger re- ward, Mt. XX. 10 [but L Tr Wll jrXiioi/] ; without com- parison, used of an indefinite number, with a subst. : Acts ii. 40; xiii. 31; xviii. -ii); xxi. 10; xxiv. 17; xxv. 14; xxvii. 20 ; xxviii. 23 ; iiiut. π(ρί πλαόνων [Α. V. of maiitj tliin;/.t], \.k. xi. 53 ; with thearticle οι nXfioves (n\(lovs), the more part, verij many: Actsxix. 32; xxvii. 12; 1 Co. ix. 19; x. 5; xv. ti ; 2 Co. ii. G ; iv. 15 ; ix. 2; Phtl. i. 14. 2. grealfir in qualit y,siiperior,more excellent: foil, by the gen. of comparison, Mt. vi. 25 ; xii. 41, 42 ; Mk. xii. 33 [here Τ W'H Trtxt. nepiaaorfpov]; Lk. xi. 31, 32; .\ii. 23 ; [irXeiova θυσίαν . . . παρά Κάϊν, Heb. xi- 4 (see παρά, u. s.). From IIi)m. down.] ' ■π•λ€'κω : 1 aor. ptcp. πλίξαντα; [(cf. Curtius § 103 ; Vanicek p. 511))]; fr. Horn, down ; to plait, braid, weave together : πλίξαντα στΐφανον, Mt. xxvii. 29 ; Mk. xv. 17 ; Jn. xi;:. 2. [Comp. : ίμ-πλί'κω.] * ιτλίον, see ιτΧίΐων. πλεονάζω; I aor. inXeovaaa; (πλί'οκ) ; Sept. for Π"1^'_ and npi ; 1. intrans. : use', rich ; a. proj). wealthy, abounding in tna- terial resources: Mt. xxvii. 57; Lk. xii. 16; xiv. 12; xvi. 1, 19; xviii. 23 ; xix. 2; ό πλούσιος, substantively, Lk. xvi. 21, 22; Jas. i. 10, 11 ; oi πλούσιοι, Lk. vi. 24; xxi. 1 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; Jas. ii. 6 ; v. 1 ; Rev. vi. 15 ; xiii. 16 ; πλού- σιοί, without the art., a rich man, Mt. xix. 23, 24 ; Mk. x. 25; xii. 41 ; Lk. xviii. 25. b. metaph. and univ. abounding, abundantly supplied : foil, by «V w. a dat. of the thing in which one abounds (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note), fv e\eet, Eph. ii. 4 ; iv πίστ(ΐ, .Jas. ii. 5 ; absol. abounding {rich) in Christian virtues and eternal possessions. Rev. ii. 9 ; iii. 1 7, on which see Diisterdieck. (πτώχ^νσι πλού- σιος ων, of Christ, ' although as the άσαρκος λό-γος he for- merly abounded in the riches of a heavenly condition, by assuming human nature he entered into a state of (earth- ly) poverty,' 2 Co. viii. 9.* πλουσ-(<ι>ϊ, adv., [fr. Hdt. down], abundantly, richly. Col. iii. 16 ; 1 Tim. vi. 17 ; Tit. iii. 6 ; 2 Pet. i. 11.• Ίτλοντίω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ίπλούτησα ; pf . πίπλουττ;κα ; (πλοΰ- τος) ; fr. Hes. down ; Sept. sometimes for "^'O^; a. to be rich, to haoe abundance : prop, of outward possessions, absol., Lk. i. 53 ; 1 Tim. vi. 9 ; 1 aor. / have been made rich, have become rich, have gotten riches (on this use of the aorist see βασϊΚ(\>ω, fin.), από τίνος. Rev. xviii. 15 (Sir. xi. 18; [cf. από, IL 2 a.]) ; also ex τίνος (see eV, II. 5), Rev. xviii. 3,19; ew rtw (cf. W. § 30, 8 b. note ; the Greeks say πλουτίίν τίΐ/οί, or τινι, or τι), 1 Tim. vi. 18. b. metaph. to be richly supplied : πλούτων {ΐς πάντας, is afflu- ent in resources so that he can give the blessings of sal- vation unto all, Ro. x. 1 2 ; πλοντίίΐ' (Ις θ(6ν (see (ΐς, Β. Π. 2 b. α.), Lk. xii. 21 ; aor. (πλούτησα, absolutely, / became rich, i. e. obtained the eternal spiritual posses- sions : 1 Co. iv. 8; 2 Co. viii. 9; Rev. iii. 18; π(πλον- τηκα, I have gotten riches. Rev. iii. 1 7.* πλουτίζω ; Pass., pres. ptcp. πλοντιζόμινος ; 1 aor. ίπλον τίσθην; (πλοΟτοί) ; to make rich, to enrich: τινά, pass. 2 Co. ix. 11 ; used of spiritual riches : τινά, 2 Co. vi. 10 ; (V with a dat. of the thing (see πλουτί'ω,α.), pass., to be richly furnished, 1 Co. i. 5. ( Aeschyl., Soph., Xen., Plut. ; Sept. for i"i:;rn.) * πλοΰτοε, -ου, ό, and (ace. to L Τ Tr WH in 2 Co. viii. 2 ; Eph. i. 7 : ii. 7 ; iii. 8, 16 ; Phil. iv. 19 ; Col. i. 27 ; ii. 2, but only in the nom. and ace; cf. \_Tdf. Proleg. p. 118 ; WH. App. p. 158] ; W. 65 (64) ; B. 22 sq. (20)) το πλοίτοΓ, (apparently i. q. πλίοτοί, fr. πλίος full [ci. πίμπλημι]), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Tiy;•, and also for [ΐοπ a mul- titude, '7'Π, ]1Π; riches, icealth; a. prop, and absoh abundance of external possessions: Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19 ; Lk. viii. 14 ; 1 Tim. vi. 1 7 ; Jas. v. 2 ; Rev. xviii. 1 7 (16). b. univ. fulness, abuttdance, plenitude : with a gen. of the excellence in which one abounds, as της χρηστότητας, Ro. ϋ.4 ; ix. 23 ; 2 Co. viii. 2 ; Eph. i. 7, 18 ; ii. 7; iii. 16; Col. i. 27; ii. 2. the πλοϋτοϊ of God is extolled, i. e. the fulness of his perfections, — of which two are mentioned, viz. σοφία and γνώσις, Ro. xi. 33 (for σοφίας κα'ι γνώσ«ύς here depend on βάθος, not on πλούτου [cf. B. 1.3.5 (13.5) ; W. § 30, 3 N. 1]); the fulness of all things in store for God's uses, Phil. iv. 19; in the same sense πλοί)τοΓ is attributed to Christ, e.xalted at the rio-ht hand of God, Rev. v. 1 2 ; in a more restricted sense, πλοϋτοί τοϋ Χριστού is used of the fulness of the things pertaining to salvation with which Christ is able to en- rich others, Eph. iii. 8. c. univ. i. q. α good [(to point an antithesis)] : Heb. xi. 26 ; i. q. that with which one is enriched, with a gen. of the person enriched, used of Christian salvation, Ro. xi. 12.* πλύνω; impf . ^πλυνον ; 1 aor. ίπλυνα ; [(cf. πλί'ω)]; fr. Hom. down ; Sejit. for D33 and ]'Π"1 ; to wash : τα &ίκτνα, Lk. V. 2 LTTr WII[(TWH mrg..ii-; see αποπλέω)]; used fr. Hom. down esp. in ref. to clothing (Gen. xlix. 11 ; Ex. xix. 10, 14 ; Lev. xiii. 6, 34, etc.) ; hence figura- tively πλνν(ΐν τάς στολάς αυτών iv τω αΧματι τοΰ άρνίον is used of those who by faith so appropriate the results of Christ's expiation as to be regarded by God as pure and •πνεύμα 520 •πνεύμα einless, Rev. vii. 14, and L Τ Tr WH in xxii. 14 ; cf. Ps. 1. (li.) 4, 9. [CoMP. : άπο-ηΚννω. Syn. see λονω, fin.]• πν(νμα -tos, to, (πνί'ω), Grk. writ, f r. Aescbyl. and Ildt. down; llcbr. T\\^, Lat. spirilux; i. e. 1. a iiiorcninil of air, (gentle) Wa.v/; a. of tlie wind : άνίμων πικνματα, Hdt. 7, 16, 1; Pans. 5, 25 ; lieiice tlm tt'Hii/ itself, .)n. iii. 8; plur. Ileb. i. 7, (1 K.xviii. 4.i; xix. 11 ; Job i. 19; Ps. ciii. (.civ.) 4, etc.; often in Grk. writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down : πνίϋμα τοϋ στόματοί, 2 Th. U. 8 (Ps. .\xxii. (xxxiii.) 6, cf. Is. xi. 4) ; πν- ζωής, Ihe breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. πνοή ζωηί, ii. 7). [πν^ΰμα and πνοή seem to have been in the main coincident terms; but πνοή became the more poetical. Both retain a suggestion of their evident et}'mology. Even in class, (irk. πν(ΰμα became as frefp and as wide in its application as άν(μος. (Schmidt ch. o5, 7 ; Trench §lxxiii.)] 2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by ivhich the bod;/ is animated [(Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.; see below)]: Lk. viii. 5.j; xxiii. 46; Jn. xix. 30 ; Acts vii. .59 ; Rev. xiii. 15 [here R.V. breath} ; άφύναι τό πνιϋμα, to breathe out the s])irit, to expire, Mt. xxvii. 50 cf. Sir. xxxviii. 23; Sap. xvi. 14 (Grk. writ, said άφύναι τήν ψυχή ν, as Gen. xxxv. 18, see άφίημι, 1 b. and Ki/pke, Observv. i. p. 140; but we also find άφύναι πνινμα θανασίμω σφαγή, Eur. Hec. 571 ) ; σώμα χ<ύμί5 ττνΐύματοί νΐκμόν ίστίν, Jas. ii. 26 ; το πνενμά ίστι το ζωυποιοΰν, ή σαρζ ουκ οιφ(\ίΐ ovSev, the spirit is that which animates and gives life, the body is of no profit (for the spirit imparts life to it, not the body in turn to the spirit; cf. Chr.Frid. Fritzsche, Nova opuscc. p. 239), Jn. vi. 63. the rational sjiiril, the power by which a human being feels, thinh, wills, ilicides; the soul: TO πνεύμα του άνθ(ίωπου το ev αύτώ, 1 Co. ii. 11 ; opp. to σαρξ (([. V. [esp. 2 a.]), Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Jlk. xiv. 38 ; 1 Co. v. 5; 2 Co. vii. 1 ; Col. ii. 5 ; opp. to το σώ/ία, Ro. viii. 10; 1 Co. vi. 1 7, 20 Rec. ; vii. 34 ; 1 Pet. iv. 6. Although for the most part the words πνιΰμα and ψυχή are used indis- criminately and so σώμα and ψυχή put in contrast (but never by Paul ; see ψυχή, esp. 2). there is also recognized a threefold distinctit)U, το πνΐνμα κα\ ή ψυχή κα\ το σώμα, 1 Th. ν. 23, ace. to ivhich το ττν^ϋμα is the rational part of man, the power of perceiving and grasping divine and eternal things, and upon which the Spirit of (iod exerts its influence ; (πvfΰμa, says Luther, " is the high- est and noblest part of man, ivhich qualifies him to lay hold of incomprehensible, invisible, eternal things; in short, it is the house where Faith and (Jod's word are at home" [see reff. at end]) : άχρι μιρισμοϋ ψυχή! και πνΐύματοζ (see μερισμός, 2), Heb. iv. 12; cV evi πνίΰματι, μια. ψυχή, Phil. i. 27 (wliere instead of μιά ψυχή Paul ace. to his mode of speaking elsewhere wouM have said more appropriately μια καρΒία). το πνίΰμά tiios, Mk. ii. 8 ; viii. 12 ; Lk. i. 47 ; Acts xvii. 16 ; Ro. i. 9 ; viii. 16 ; lCo.v.4; xvi. 18; 2Co.ii. 13; vii. 13; GaLvi. 18; [Phil iv. 23 L Τ Tr WH] ; Philem. 25 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 ; ά uds tS»v πνΐυμάτων (for which Rec. has ayluv^ των προφητών, who incites and directs the souls of the prophets. Rev. xxii. 6, where cf. DUsterdieck. the dative τω πνιΰματι is used to denote the seat (locality) where one does or suffers something, like our in spirit : (πιγινώσκ(ΐν, Mk. ii. 8; avaarfvaCdv, .Mk. viii. 12; (μβριμάσθαι, Jn. xi. 33; ταράσσιαθαι, Jn. xiii. 21 ; fefti/, Acts xviii. 25 ; Ro. xii. 11; άγαλλιάσθαι, Lk. .\. 21 (but L Τ Tr WH here add άγίω) ; dat. of respect : 1 Co. v. 3 ; Col. ii. 5 ; 1 Pet. iv. 6 ; κραταιυϋσθαι, Lk. i. SO ; ii. 40 Rec. ; αγιον civai, 1 Co. vii. 34 ; fcoojroiijdet't, 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; ζην, 1 Pet. iv. 6 ; πτω- χοί, Mt. V. 3 ; dat. of instrument, fieif^t'cof, Acts xx. 22 ; συνίχίσθαι, xviii. 5 Rec. ; θ(ω Xarpfifiv, Phil. iii. 3 R G ; dat. of advantage: άνισιν τω πνιΰματί μου, 2 Co. ii. 13 (12) ; (V τώ πνΐύματι, is used of the instrument, 1 Co. vi. 20 Rec. [it is surely better to take ev τ. π- here locally, of the 'sphere' (W. 386 (362), cf. vs. 19)] ; also iv πν>ίμα- τι, nearly i. q. πvtυμaτικώs [but see W. § 51, 1 e. note], Jn. iv. 23 ; of the seat of an action, tV τώ πνίΰμητί μου, Ro. i. 9 ; τιθίναι iv τω πν., to propose to one's self, purpose in spirit, foil, by the infin. Acts xix. 21. πν(ΰματα προφη- τών, ace. to the context the souls (spirits) of the prophets moved by the Spirit of God, 1 Co. xiv. 32 ; in a pecu- liar sense πνιϋμα is used of a soul thoroughly roused by the Holy Sjjirit and wholly intent on divine things, yet destitute of distinct self-consciousness and clear under- standing ; thus in the phrases τό πν(ϋμά μου προσιΰχιταί, opp. to 6 νους μου, 1 Co. xiv. 14 ; πνίνματι XaXelv μυστή- ρια, ibid. 2 ; προσ(ύχ(σθαι, ψάλλίΐν, cvXoye'iv, τω πν., as opp. to τώ vot, ibid. 15, 16. 3. a spirit, i. e. a simple essence, devoid of all or at least all gros.ser matter, and pos.iessed of the power of knowing, desiring, deciding, and acting ; a. generically : Lk. xxiv. 37 ; Acts xxiii. 8 (on which see μήτ(, fin.) ; ibid. 9 ; πνίΰμα σάρκα και οστία οίικ ?χίΐ, Lk. χ,χίν. 39 ; πνεύμα ζωοποιοΰν, [α life-giving spirit}, spoken of Christ as raised from the dead, 1 Co. xv. 45 ; πνιϋμα ό θ(ός {God is spirit essentially), Jn. iv. 24; πατήρ των πνιυμάτων, of God, Heb. xii. 9, where the term comprises both the spirits of men and of angels. b. a human soul thai has left the body [(Babr. 122, 8)] : plur. (Lat. manes), Heb. xii. 23; I Pet. iii. 19. c. α spirit higher than man but lower than Cod, i. e. an angel : plur. Heb. i. 14 ; used of demons, or evil spirits, who were conceived of as inhabiting the bodies of men : [Mk. ix. 20] ; Lk. ix. 39; Acts xvi. 18 ; plur., Mt. viii. 16; .xii. 45; Lk. x. 20; xi. 26; πνεύμα πύθωνο! or πύθωνα. Acts xvi. 16 ; πνεύματα δαιμονίων. Rev. xvi. 14 ; πνιϋμα δαιμονίου ακαθάρτου, Lk. iv. 33 (see δαιμόνιοι/, 2) ; πνεύμα άσθ(ν(ίαί, causing infirmity, Lk. xiii. II ; πνίϊιμα άκάθαρτον, Mt. χ. 1 ; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26, 27; iii. 11, 30; v. 2,8, 13; vi. 7; vii. 25 ; ix. 25; Lk. iv. 36 ; vi. 18; viii. 29; ix. 42; xi. 24, 2(;; Actsv. 16; viii. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2; 0X0X01-, κωφόν (for the Jews held that the same evils with which the men were afllicted affected the demons also that had taken possession of them [cf. Wetstein, N. T. i. 279 sqq. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Mes- siah, App. xvi. ; see δαιμονίζομαι etc. and reff.]), Mk. ix. 17, 25 ; πονηρόν, Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2 ; Acts xix. 12, 13, 15, 16, [(cf. Judg. ix. 23 ; 1 S. xvi. 14 ; xix. 9, etc.)]. d. ττνίνμα 521 Ίτνευμα the spiritual nature of Christ, higher than the highest an- gels, close to God and inost intimately united to him (in doctrinal phraseology the dioine nature of Christ) : 1 Tim. iii. 16; with the addition of άγιωσννη! (on which see άγιωστινη. 1 [vet cf. 4 a. below] ), Ro. i. 4 [but see JMeyer ad loc, Ellicott on 1 Tim. 1. c] ; it is called πνιϋμα αϊώ- wo», in tacit contrast with the perishable ψυχαί of sacri- ficial animals, in Ileb. i.\. 14, where cf. Delitzsch [and esp. Kurtz]. 4. The Scriptures also ascribe a πι/Λμα to God, i. e. God's power and agencji, — distinguishable in thought (or modalislice, as they say in teclinical speech) from God's essence in itself considered, — manifest in the course of affairs, and by its influence upon souls productive in the theocratic body (the church) of all the higher spiritual gifts and blessings ; [cf. the resemblances and differences in Philo's use of to ^eiov ηνιϋμα, e. g. de gigant. § 1 2 (cf. § 5 sq.) ; quis rer. div. § 53 ; de mund. opif. § 46, etc.]. a. This ττνιίιμα is called in the O. T. D'H^K Πη, n\7T πη ; in the X. T. ττνξΰμα aytovy το ayiov ττνίΰμα, ro πνίνμα το Syiou (first so in .Sap. i. δ ; ix. 1 7 ; for \y,p Π1"ΐ, in Ps. 1. (li.) 13, Is. l.\iii. 10, 11, the Sept. renders by πνήμα dyiw- σίνης), i. e. the Holy Spirit (august, full of majesty, adora- ble, utterly opposed to all impurity) : Mt. i. 18, 20 ; iii. 11 ; xii. 32 ; x.wiii. 19 ; Mk. i. 8; iii. 29 ; xii. 36 ; xiii. 11 ; Lk. i. 15, 35 ; ii. 25, 26 ; iii. 16, 22 ; iv. 1 ; .xi. 13 ; xii. 10, 12 ; Jn. i. 33 ; vii. 39 [L Τ WH om. Tr br. Sy.] ; xiv. 26; %\. 22 ; Acts i. 2, 5, 8, 16 ; ii. 33, 38 ; iv. 25 L Τ Tr WH ; V. 3, 32; viii. ]8[LTWnom.Trbr.TOay.], 19; ix. 31 ; x. 38, 44, 45,47; xi. 15, 16, 24; .xiii. 2,4, 9,52; xv. 8, 28 ; xvi. 6 ; xix. 6 ; xx. 28 ; Ro. ix. 1 ; xiv. 17; xv. 13, 16, 19 [L Tr WH in br.] ; 1 Co. vi. 19 ; xii. 3 ; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; xiii. 13 (14) ; Eph. i. 13 ; 1 Th. i. 5, 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 14 ; Tit. ui. 5 : Heb. ii. 4 ; vi. 4 ; ix. 8 ; 1 Jn. v. 7 Rec. ; Jude 20 ; oth- er e.xx. will be given below in the phrases ; (on the use and the omission of the art., see Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 105 [in opposition to llarless (on Eph. ii. 22) et al. : cf. also Meyer on Gal. v. 16; Ellicott on Gal. v. 5 ; AV. 122 (116) ; B. 89 (78)]) ; το ην. το ayiov τοΟ θ(οί, Eph. iv. 30 ; 1 Th. iv. 8 ; ττνινμα θ(οϋ, Ro. viii. 9, 14; to toC Ofoi ιτνΐνμα, 1 Pet. iv. 14 ; {το) ττνΐΰμα (του) θίοΐι, ΛΙΐ. iii. 16; .\ii. 18, 28; 1 Co. ii. 14 ; iii. 16; Eph. iii. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 2 ; TO πν, τον Bcov ημάν, 1 Co. vi. 1 1 ; to nv. του πατρός, Mt. X. 20 ; πν. θίοϋ fiajn-os, 2 Co. iii. 3 ; ro nv. του tyfipav- ΤΟΓ Ίησοϊν, Ro. viii. 11 ; το τγκ. to ίκ θ<οϋ (emanating from God and imparted unto men), 1 Co. ii. 12; τηκϋμα and TO πν. του κυρίου, i. e. of God, Lk. iv. 18 ; Acts v. 9 (cf. vs. 4 ) ; Λ iii. 39 ; κυρίου, i. e. of Christ, 2 Co. iii. 1 7, 18 [cf. B. 343 (295)]; τό πν(ϋμα 'ϊησον. since the same Spirit in a peculiar manner dwelt in Jesus, Acts xvi. 7 (where Rec. om. 'lijaoO); Χριστοί, Ro. viii. 9; *Ιΐ7σοϋ Χρίστου, Phil. i. 19; το ίν τινι (in one's soul [not WH mrg.]) πνίϋμα Χριστού, 1 Pet. i. 11 ; το πν. τοΰ νΙοϋ τοΰ ίίοϋ. Gal. iv. 6 ; simply ro πνήιμα or πνιϋμα : Mt. iv. 1 ; xii. 31, 32 ; xxii. 43 ; Mk. i. 10, 12 ; Lk. iv. 1,14; Jn. i. 32, 33 ; iii. 6, 8, 34 ; vii. 39 ; Acts ii. 4 ; viii. 29 ; x. 19 ; xi. 12, 28; xxi. 4 ; Ro. viii. 6, 16, 23, 26, 27 ; xv.30; 1 Co. ii. 4, 10, 13 (where Rec. adds αγίου) ; xii. 4, 7, 8 ; 2 Co. i. 22; iii. 6,8; V. 5; Gal. iii. 3, 5, 14 ; iv. 29; v. δ, 17, 22, 25 ; Eph. iv. 3 ; v. 9 Rec. ; vi. 1 7 ; Phil. ii. 1 ; 2 Th. ii. 13 ; 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; Jas. iv. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 22 Rec. ; 1 Jn. iii. 24 ; V. 6, 8 ; Rev. xxii. 17. Among the beneficent and very varied operations and effects ascribed to this Spirit in the N. T., the foil, are prominent : by it the man Jesus was begotten in the womb of the virgin Marv (ilt. i. 18, 20 ; Lk. i. 3.')), and at his baptism by John il is said to have descended upon Jesus (Mt. iii. 16 ; Mk. i. 10 ; Lk. iii. 22), so that he was perpetually (μίνον eV αυτόν) filled with it (Jn. i. 32, 33. cf. iii. 34 ; Mt. xii. 2Χ; Acts x. 38) ; hence to its prompting and aid the acts and words of Christ are traced, Mt. iv. 1 ; .xii. 28; Mk. i. 12 ; Lk. iv. 1, 14. After Christ's resurrection it was im- parted also to the apostles, Jn. xx. 22 ; Acts ii. Sub- sequently other followers of Christ are related to have received it through faith (Gal. iii. 2), or by the instru- mentality of baptism (.\cts ii. 38 ; 1 Co. xii. 13) and the laying on of hands (Acts xix. 5, 6), although its recep- tion was in no wise connected with baptism by any mag- ical bond. Acts viii. 12, 15; .x. 44 sqq. To its agency are referred all the blessings of the Christian religion, such as regeneration wrought in baptism (Jn. iii. 5, 6, 8 ; Tit. iii. 5, [but see the commentators on the passages, and refp. s. V. βάπτισμα, 3]) ; all sanctification (1 Co. vi. 11 ; hence αγιασμός πνιϋματο!, 2 Th. ii. 1 3 ; 1 Pet. i. 2) ; the power of suppressing evil desires and practising holi- ness (Ro. viii. 2sqq. ; Gal. v. 16 sqq. 22 ; 1 Pet. i. 22 [Rec], etc.) ; fortitude to undergo with patience all persecu- tions, losses, trials, for Christ's sake (Mt. x. 20; Lk. xii. 11,12; Ro. viii. 26) ; the knowledge of evangelical truth (Jn. xiv. 1 7, 26 ; xv. 26 ; xvi. 12, 13 ; 1 Co. ii. 6-16 ; Eph. iii. 5), — hence it is called ττνίϋμα της άΧηβιίας (Jn. 11. cc. ; 1 Jn. iv. 6), πν^ΰμα σοφίας κα\ άποκαλύψ(ως (Eph. i. 17) ; the sure and joyful hojie of a future resurrection, and of eternal blessedness (Ro. v. 5 ; viii 11 ; 2 Co. i. 22 ; v. 5; Eph. i. 13 sq.) ; for the Holy Spirit is the seal and pledge of citizenship in the kingdom of God, 2 Co. i. 22; Eph. i. 1 3. He is present to teach, guide, prompt, restrain, those Christians whose agency God employs in carrying out his counsels : Acts viii. 29, 39 ; x. 19 ; .\i. 12 ; xiii. 2, 4 ; XV. 28 ; xvi. 6, 7 ; xx. 28. He is the author of char- isms or special "gifts" (1 Co. xii. 7 sqq.; see ;ι;αρισρα), prominent among which is the power of prophesy- ing: τά ΐρχόμΐνα dyayyfXft, Jn. xvi. 13; hence ro πν€νμα της προφητείας (Rev. xix. 10) ; and his efficiency in the prophets is called ro πνιΰμα simply (1 Th. v. 19), and their utterances are introduced with these formulas: roSe Xi'yet το πνεύμα το άγιον. Acts xxi. 1 1 : το πνεύμα λίγ«, 1 Tim. iv. 1; Rev. xiv. 13; with raif ΐκκλησίαις added. Rev. ii. 7, 1 1. 1 7, 29 ; iii. 6, 13, 22. Since the Holy Spirit by his inspiration was the author also of the O.T. Scriptures (2 Pet. i. 21 ; 2 Tim. iii. 16), his utterances are cited in the foil, terms : Xe'yci or μαρτυρεί το πνεύμα το Sytov, Heb. iii. 7; χ. 15; ro wv. το ay. εΚάλησε iia Ήσαίου. Acts xxviii. 25, cf. i. 16. From among the great number of other phrases referring to the Holy Spirit the following seem to be noteworthy here: God ιτνβνμα 522 ΤΓΐ'βυμα is said δώόναι τινί το πν. το άγ-, Lk. xi. 13; Acts χν. 8; pass. Κυ. V. ο ; more jirccisolv, ck toO πνιόματο! αϋτοΰ, i.e. a portion from his S|)iril'.s fiiliioss [15. § l.ij, 7; \\'. 366 (343)], 1 Jii. iv. 13; or (κχΰν άπο τοί πικΰματο! αΰτοΰ. Acts ii. 17, 18, (for its entire fulness Christ alone re- ceives, Jn. iii. 34); men are said, 'Καμβάναν πν. ay., .Jn. .\x. 22; Acts viii. 15, 17, 19 ; xix. 2 ; orτoπι'. το &γ. Acts X. 47; or το πν. το «κ ΛοΟ, 1 Co. ii. 12; or το πΐΊνμα, (ial. iii. 2, cf. Ilo. viii. 1ϋ ; πν. θίοΰ ϊχαν, 1 Co. vii. 40 ; πνιΰμα μη €χΐίν, flude \9 ; πλημονσθαί πνΐύματος άγ/ου, Acts \iii. 52; iv πν(ΰματί, \ί\>\\.\. IS; ηΧησθηναι, πλησθησισθαι, 7Γΐ/ίΐ;μαΓ05 (iyiou, Lk. i. 15, 41, 67; Actsii.4; iv. 8, 31 ; ix. 17; xiii. 9; πνίύματο! άγιου nXijpiji, Acts vi. 5 ; vii. 55 ; xi. 24; π\ήρ(ΐ( πνιΰματο! (Hec. adds άγιου) και σοφία;, Acts vi. 3 ; πνίύματι and πν^ύματι θ(υϋ αγισΰαι, to he le€νματι Ήλιου, in the same spirit ivith which Ehjah was filled of old, Lk. i. 17; τα ρήματα . . . πν^ϊ/μά ίστιν, e.xhale a spirit (and fill be- lievers with it), .In. vi. 63 ; οίου πν(ίματΟ! cirre νμή:, [ivhat manner of spirit ye are o/"] viz. a divine spirit, that I have imparted unto you, Lk. ix. 5.5 [Rec. ; (cf. B. § 132, 11 I. ; W. § 30, 5)] ; τω πνιίματι, ω eXaXet, Acts vi. 10, where see ^leyer; πραύ και ήσίχιον πνιϋμα, 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; πνίϋμα πραότητο!, such as belongs to the meek, 1 Co. iv. 21 ; Gal. vi. 1 ; το πν. τήι προφητιίας, such as characterizes prophecy and by which the prophets are governed. Rev. .xix. 10; τη! άλι /ifias, σοφία! και άπο- καλΰψΐω!, see above p. 521' mid. (Is. xi. 2; Deut. xxxiv. 9; Sap. vii. 7) ; τη! πίστ(ωι, 2 Co. iv. 1 3 ; τ^ί υΐο^Εσιαί, such as belongs to sons, Ro. viii. 15; t^s ζωη! fV Χριστώ, of the life which one gets in fellowship with Christ, ibid. 2 ; Βννάμΐω! καΐ ayamj! και σωφρονισμού, 2 Tim. i. 7 ; ev πν^νμα eivat Λvith Christ, i. q. to be filled with the same spirit as Christ and by the bond of that spirit to be intimately united to Christ, 1 Co. vi. 17 ; tv cVi πνίίματι, by the re- ce])tion of one Spirit's efficiency, 1 Co. xii. 13; e?s Iv ■πν^ϋμα, so as to be united into one body filled with one Spirit, ibid. R G ; Ix πνήμα ποτΐζισθαι, \_7nade to drink of i. e.] imbued with one .Spirit, ibid. L Τ Tr WH [see ποτίζω]; iv σώμα κα\ ίν ■πν(ϋμα, one (social) body filled and animated by one spirit, Eph. iv. 4 ; — in all these pass, although the language is general, yet it is clear from the context that the writer means a spirit begotten of the Holy Spirit or even identical with that Spirit [(cf. Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 46, 6; Herm. sim. 9, 13. 18; Ignat. ad Magn. 7)]. In opposition to the divine Spirit stand, TO τίνίΰμα το evepyovv 4v to'h vtoir τη! άπΐΐθίία! (a spirit that comes from the devil), Eph. ii. 2 ; also το ττν^νμα τοΰ κόσμου, the spirit that actuates the unholy multitude, 1 Co. ii. 12 ; 8ov\fia!, such as characterizes and governs slaves, Ro. viii. 15 ; κατανίξ^ω!, Ro. xi. 8 ; Sf iKia!, 2 Tim. i. 7; τη! 7r\ainji, 1 Jn. iv. 6 (π\ανησ€ω!. Is. xix. 14 ; nop- V€ia!, Hos. iv. 12; v. 4) ; το τού αντίχριστου sc. πνίνμα, ι Jn. iv. 3 ; ίτιρον ττνιϋμα \aμβάvfιv, i. e. different from the Holy Spirit, 2 Co. xi. 4 ; το πν. τοΰ νοόί, the govern- ing spirit of the mind, Eph. iv. 23. Cf. Ackermann, Beitrage zur theol. Wiirdigung u. Abwagung der Begriffe πν(νμα, rais, u. Geist, in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1S39, p. 873 sqq. ; Biichsenschtilz, La doctrine de I'Esprit de Dieu selon I'ancien et nouveau testament. Strasb. 1840; Chr. Fr. Fritzsche, De Spiritu Sancto commenta- tio exegetica et dogmatica, 4 Pts. Ilal. 1840 sq., included in his Nova opuscula academica (Turici, lS4G)p. 233 sqq. ; KahnLhu:e, from what place: Mt. xv. 33; Lk. xiii. 25. 27; Jn. iii. 8; vi. 5; viii. 14; ix. 29, 30; xi.x. 9; Rev. vii. 13; from what condition, Ή,6ν. ii. 5. b. of origin or source, i. q. from what author or giver : Mt. xiii. [27], 54, 56 ; xxi. 25 ; Mk. vi. 2 ; Lk. xx. 7 ; Jn. ii. 9 ; .las. iv. 1 ; from what parentage, Jn. vii. 27 sq. (cf. vi. 42), see Mej'er ad loc. c. of cause, how is it that f how can it be that ? Mk. viii. 4; xii. 37; Lk. i. 43; ,In. i. 48 (49); iv. 11.* irota, -as, ψ [cf. Curtius § 3S7], herbage, grass : ace. to some interpreters found in Jas. iv. 14 ; but ττοία there is more correctly taken as the fem. of the adj. ποΐοί (q. v.), of what sort. (Jer. ii. 22; Mai. iii. 2; in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) * iroif'u, -ά; impf. 3 pers. sing. cVroiVc, plur. 2 pers. eVot- fiTt, 3 pers. eVoioui»; fut. ποιήσω; 1 aor. (ποίησα, 3 ])ers. |)Iur. optat. ποι.ήσ€ίαν (Lk. vi. 11 RG; cf. W. §13, 2d.; [B. 42(37)]) and TTOifiaaKu (ibid. LTTrWII [see \VH. .\pp. p. 167]); pf. ητιποίηκα; plpf. πίποιηκαν without augra. (Mk. XV. 7; see W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)); Mid., pres. ποωΟμα» ; impf. tVoiou/iiji/; fut. ποιήσο/ωκ ; 1 aor. tVot- ησάμην; pf. pass. ptcp. πίποιτ)μίΐΌΓ (Heb. xii. 27); fr. Horn, down; Ilebr. nij?;?; Lat. yacio, i.e. I. to make (Lat. efficio), 1. ri; a. with the names of the things made, to produce, construct, form, fashion, etc. : άνθρακιάν, .Jn. xviii. 18 ; (Ικηνα, Rev. xiii. H ; ιμάτια, .Vets IK. 39; ναούϊ, .\cts xix. 24 ; σκηνάς, Mt xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix. 33; rwrout. Acts vii. 43; πηΚύν, Jn. ix. 11, 14; νΚάσμα, Ro. ix. 20; ace. to some inter- preters (also \X. 256 n.' (240 n.')) όδόχ trouXv, lo make a path, Mk. ii. 23 R G Τ Tr txt. WII txt. (so that the mean- ing i.s, that the disciples of Christ made a path for them- selves through the standing grain by plucking the heads; see όδοπυκ'ω, fin. If we adopt this interpretation, we must take the ground that Mark does not give us the true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted the narrative received from others ; [those who do accept it, however, not only lay stress on the almost unvarying lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other interpretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex- pressed in the participle — an idiom apparently foreign to the N. T. (see W. 353 (331)), and to the additional circiunslance that Mk. introduces the phrase after hav- ing already ex pressed the idea of 'going', and ex- pressed it by substantially the same word {napanopfif σθοί) which Matthew (xii. 1) and Luke (vi. 1) employ and regard as of itself sulficient. On the interpretation of the pass., the alleged ' sad corruption,' etc., see Jas. Morison, Com. on Mk. 2d ed. p. 57 sq. ; on the other side, H'ciVs, Marcusevangelium, p. 100]. But see just below, under c). to create, to produce : of God, as the author of all things, τί or Tiwi, Mt. xix. 4 : Mk. x. 6 ; Lk. xi. 40; Heb. i. 2 ; Acts iv. 24 ; vii. 50 ; xvii. 24 ; Rev. xiv. 7 ; pass. Ileb. xii. 27, (Sap. i. 13 ; ix. 9; 2 JLicc. vii. 28, and often in the O.T. Apocrypha; for nij;^• in Gen. i. 7, 16, 25, etc.; for N•;! in Gen. i. 21, 27 ; v. 1, etc. ; also in Grk. writ. : yiiioi ανθρώπων, Hes. op. 109, etc. ; absol. ό ποιών, the crea- tor, rial. Tim. p. 76 c); here belongs also Heb. iii. 2, on which sec Bleek and Liinemann [(cf. below, 2 c. /3)]• In imitation of the Ilebr. Π!^^; (cf. Winer ['.s- Simonis (4th ed. 1828)], Lex. Ilebr. et Chald. p. 754 ; Clesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1074 sq.) absol. of men, to labor, lo do work, Mt. xx. 12 (Rutli ii. 19) ; i. q. /o be operative, exercise activity. Rev. xiii. 5 Rnoiei». LTTrWII [cf. Dan. xi. 28; but aL render ποίίίκ in both these exx. spend, continue, in ref. to time ; see II. d. below]. b. joined to nouns de- noting a state or condition, it signifies to be the au- thor of. localise : σκάνδαλα. Ro. xvi. 17 ; (ΐρήνην (to be the author of harmony), Eph. ii. 15 ; Jas. iii. 18 ; ίπισίστασι» [L Τ Tr WH ί-πίπτασιν']. Acts xxiv. 12 ; σνστροφήν. Acts xxiii. 12; ποιώτινί Tt, to bring, afford, a tiling to one, Lk. i. 68 ; Acts xv. 3, (so .also (irk. writ., as Xen. mem. 3, 10, 8 [cf. L. and S. s.v. A. II. la.]). c. joined to nouns involving the idea of action (or of something which is accomplished by action), so as to form a peri- phrasis for the verb cognate to the substantive, and thus to express the idea of the verb more forcibly, — in which species of periphrasis the Grks. more commonly use the middle (see 3 below, and W. 2.i6 (240) ; [B. § 135, 5]): μονην ποιώ παρά τινι, Jn. xiv. 23 (where L Τ Tr λ\ΊΙ ποιψ σόμιθα ; cf. Thuc. 1, 131) ; όδόκ, to make one's way, go, Mk. ii. 23 (where render as follows : they began, as theg went, to pluck the ears; cf. ποιζσ<^ι όδόκ αντοϋ, Judg. xvu. 8 ; the Greeks say iiov πoιfΊσβaι, Hdt. 7, 42; see above, votea 525 ander a.); ηολίμαν, Rev. xiii. 5 Rec.''"; with the addi- tion of μ(τά TWOS (i. q- ffoXf^eif), Rev. xi. 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 7 [here L cm. Wli Tr mrg. br. tlie cl.] ; xix. 1 9, (see /xera, I. 2 d. p. 403'") ; (ΐώίκησιν, Lk. xviii. 7, 8 ; rm, Acts vii. 24, (Mic. V. 15) ; ivibpav, i. q. «wSpfuw, to make an am- bush, lay wait. Acts xxv. 3 ; συμβούΧιον, i. q. σνμβονλίΰο- fidi, to hold a consultation, deliberate, Mk. iii. 6 [R G TTrmrg. AVII mrg.] ; xv. 1 [here Τ WH mrg. σνμβ. (Τοιμάσαιττΐς~\ ; σννωμοσίαν, i. q. σννόμνυμι. Acts xxiii. 1 3 (where \^Ύ Ύτ\\' \l τιοιησάμ^νοιίοτ \\.ec.■rrfπo^ηκότfs■, see in 3 below) ; κρίσιν-, to e.xecute judgment, Jn. v. 27 ; Jude 15. To this head may be referred nouns by which the mode or kind of action is more precisely defined ; as iuTOfifif, ϋναμιν, ποκϊν, ^It. vii. 22 ; xiii. 58 ; Mk. vi. 5 ; Acts xix. 11 ; την ΐξουσιαν tivos. Rev. .xiii. 12; efyov (a notable work), tpya, of Jesus, Jn. v. 36, vii. 3, 21 ; x. 25 ; xiv. 10, 12 ; xv. 24 ; κράτο!, Lk. i. 51 ; σημιϊα, τίρατα και σημΰα, [Mk. xiii. 22 Tdf.] ; Jn. ii. 23 ; iii. 2 ; iv. 54 ; vi. 2,14,30; vii.31; i.x.l6; x.41; xi.47; xii. 18,37; xx. 30; Acts ii. 22; vi. 8 ; vii. 36; viii. 6 ; xv. 12; Rev. xiii. 13, 14 ; xvi. 14; xix. 20; θαυμάσια, Mt. xxi. 15; όσα cnoUi, {ποίησαν, etc., Mk. iii. 8; vi. 30; Lk. ix. 10; in other phrases it is used of marvellous works, Mt. ix. 28 ; Lk. iv. 23 ; Jn. iv. 45 ; vii. 4 ; xi. 45, 46 ; xxi. 25 [not Tdf.] ; Acts X. 39; xiv. 11 ; xxi. 19; etc. d. i. q. to make ready, to prepare : άριστον, Lk. xiv. 12; iflnvov, Mk. vL 21 ; Lk. xiv. 16 ; Jn. xii. 2, {he'mvov Έοιύσθαι, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 25) ; 5οχήν, Lk. v. 29; xiv. 13, (Gen. x.xi. 8) ; γάμουϊ, Mt. xxii. 2 (-/άμον, Tob. viii. 19). e. of things ef- fected by generative force, to produce, bear, shoot forth : of trees, vines, grass, etc., κλάδους, Mk. iv. 32; κάμπου!, Mt. iii. 8, etc., see καρπός, 1 and 2 a. (Gen. i. 1 1 , 1 2 ; Aris- tot. de plant. [1, 4 p. «19', 31] ; 2, 10 [829", 41] ; Theophr. de caus. plant. 4, 11 [(?)]) ; eXamr, Jas. iii. 12 (τον οϊνον, of the vine, Joseph, antt. 11, 3, 5) ; of a fountain yield- ing water, ibid. f. ποιώ ϊμαυτώ τι, to acquire, to proride a thin η for one's >:elf(i. e. for one's use) : βαλάντια, Lk. xii. 33 ; φίλους, Lk. xvi. 9 ; without a dative, to gain : of tradesmen (like our colloq. to mai-e something), Mt. XXV. 16 [L Tr WH Ϊκίρ8ησ(ν'] ; Lk. xix. 18, (Polyb. 2, 62, 12; pecuniam maximamyiic-ere, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 6). 2. With additions to the accusative which define or limit the idea of making : a. τι ίκ tivos (gen. of mate- rial), to make a thing out of something, Jn. ii. 15; ix. 6 ; Ro. ix. 21 ; κατά τι, according to the pattern of a thing [see κατά, IL 3 c. a]. Acts vii. 44. with the addi- tion, to the ace. of the thing, of an adjective with which the verb so blends that, taken with the adj., it may be changed into the verb coinate to the adj. : dSdas itoi- elv (ras τρίβους), i. q. eieivctv, Mt. iii. 3; Mk. i. 3 ; Lk. iii. 4 ; τρίχα \(υκ<)ν η μίλαιναν, i. ([. \eυκa^vfιv, μίΧαίναν, Mt. V. 36; add, Acts vii. 19; Heb. xii. 13; Rev. xxi. 5. b. TO Ικανήν Tiw : see 'iKavos, a. c. ποκΐν Tiva with an accus. of the predicate, a. to (make i. e.) render one anything: τίνα ίσον τινί, Mt. xx. 12; τίνα δήλοι», Mt. x.xvi. 73 ; add, Mt. xii. 16 ; xxviii. 14 ; Mk. iii. 12; Jn.v.ll, 15; vii. 23; xvi. 2 ; Ro. ix. 28[RG,Trmrg. in br.]; Heb. i. 7; Rev. xii. 15; rivas k. vi. 47, 49 ; 5 or ο or 5, τι etc. λίγ(ΐ τις, Mt. xxiii. 3 ; Lk. vi. 46 ; Jn. ii. 5 ; Acts xxi. 23 ; A παραγγίλλιι τις, 2 Th. iii. 4 ; την ηρόθ(σιν, Eph. iii. 11 ; τα 6ιαταχθ(ντα, Lk. xvii. 10 {το προαταχβίν, .So|)h. Phil. 1010) ; ο αΐτύ Tit, Jn. xiv. 13 sq.; Eph. iii. 20 ; ο ίντίλλ^ταί τΐ9, Jn. xv. 14 ; τα 'θη. Acts xvi. 21. With nouns describing a plan or course of action, to perform, accomplish : ipya. Tit. iii. 5; ποια» τα ipya τινός, to do the same works as another, •Τη. viii. 39,41 ; τα ττρώτα fpya. Rev. ii. 5; τα fpya τοί) 6(οΰ, de- livered by (jod to be performed, Jn. x. 37 S(j. ; το tpyov, work committed to me by God, Jn. xvii. 4 ; το Ipyov (vayyfKioToi. to perform what the relations and duties of an evangelist demand, 2 Tim. iv. 5 ; tpyov τι, to com- mit an evil deed, 1 Co. v. 2 [T WHTrmrg. ττράξας']•, plur. 3 Jn. 10; ayaBov, to do good, Mt. xix. 16; [Mk. iii. 4 Tdf.] ; 1 Pet. iii. 1 1 ; το αγαθόν, Ro. xiii. 3 ; ό iav τι αγαθόν, Eph. vi. 8 ; τα αγαθά, Jn. v. 29 ; τό καλόν, Ro. vii. 21 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; Gal. vi. 9 ; Jas. iv. 1 7 ; τα άρ(στα τω θ(ώ, Jn. viii. 29 ; το άριστον ίρώτζιον τον θΐοϋ, Ileb. xiii. 21 ; 1 .In. iii. 22 ; τί πιστόν. to perform something worthy of a Christian [see πιστός, tin.], 3 Jn. 5 ; την 8ικαιοσννην, Mt. vi. 1 (for Rec. (λ(ημοσΰνην) ; 1 Jn. ii. 29; iii. 7, 10 [not Lchm. ; Rev. xxii. 11 G L Τ Tr WH] ; την άλήθιιαν (to act uprightly ; see άληθίΐα, I. 2 c), Jn. iii. 21 ; 1 .In. i. 6 ; χρηστότητα, Ro. iii. 1 2 ; ΐλιος, to show one's self merciful, .Jas. ii. 13; with μ€τά τίνος added (see iXeor, -ους, 1 and 2 b.), Lk. i. 72 ; x. 37 ; ίλίημοσύνην, Mt. vi. 2 s(j. ; plur.. Acts ix. 36 ; x. 2 (see ίλιημοσννη, 1 and 2). to commit : την άμαρτΐαν, Jn. viii. 34 ; 1 Jn. iii. 4, 8 ; άμαρ- τ'ιαν, 2 Co. xi. 7 ; Jas. v. 15 ; 1 Pet. ii. 22 ; 1 Jn. iii. 9 ; την άνομίαν, Mt. xiii. 41 ; αμάρτημα, 1 Co. vi. 18 ; τα μη καθή- κοντα, Ro. i. 28 ; ό ουκ ϊξιστιν, Mt. xii. 2 ; Mk. ii. 24 ; άξια πληγών, Lk. xii. 48 ; βδίλυγμα. Rev. xxi. 27 ; φόνον. Mk. XV. 7 ; ψ(ΰ8ος. Rev. xxi. 27 ; xxii. 15 ; κακόν, Mt. xxvii. 23 ; Mk. XV. 14 ; Lk. xxiii. 22 ; 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; το κακόν, Ro. xiii. 4 ; phir. κακά, 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; τα κακά, Ro. iii. 8. b. ποιιΐν τι with the case of a person added ; a. w. an accus. of the person: τί ποιήσω Ίησοϋν; what shall I do unto .lesus? Mt. xxvii. 22; Mk. xv. 12: cf. W. 222 (208); [B. §131, 6; Kuhner §411, 5] ; Matthiae § 415, 1 a. j3. ; also with an adverb, fv ποιώ τίνα, to do well i. e. show one's self good (kind) to one [see el, sub fin.], Mk. xiv. 7 R G ; also καλώς ποιώ, Mt. V. 44 Rec. β. w. a dative of the person, to do (a thing) unto one (to his advantage or disadvantage), rarely so in Grk. writ. [cf. AV. and Β u. s. ; Kiihner u. s. Anm. 6] : Mt. vii. 1 2 ; xviii. 35 ; XX. 32 ; xxi. 40 ; xxv. 40, 45 ; Mk. v. 19, 20 ; .x. 51 ; Lk. i. 49; vi. 11 ; viii. 39 ; xviii. 41; xx. 15; Jn. ix. 26; xii. 16; xiii. 12; Acts iv. 16; also with an adverb : καθώς, Mk. XV. 8 ; Lk. vi. 31 ; Jn. xiii. 15 ; ομοίως, Lk. vi. 31 ; οΰτωΓ, Lk. i. 25 ; ii. 48 ; ώσαΰτως, Mt. xxi. 36 ; καλώί TTOtfit/ Tivi, Lk. vi. 27 ; ev, ^Ik. xiv. 7 L Tr WH ; κακά tiw, to do evil to one. Acts ix. 13 ; τί, what (sc. κακόν), Ileb. xiii. 6 [ace. to punctuation of GLTTrWH] ; ταΟτα πάιπ-α, all these evils, .In. xv. 21 R G L mrg. ; ποκΊν τινι κατά τα αυ- τά [LTTrWH (Rec. ταΟτα)], in the same manner, Lk. τΓοιημα 527 TToXe/tet» vi. 23, 26. γ. nou'iv τι with the more remote object added by means of a preposition : e» Ttvt (Germ, an einem), to do to one, Mt. .wii. 1 2 ; Lk. .\.\iii. 31 [here A. V. 'in the green tree,' etc.] ; also eU nva, unto one, Jn. xv. 21 L t.\t. Τ Tr WH. c. God is said ποιησαί τι μ€τά Ttfos, when present with and aiding [see μ(τά, I. 2 b. 0], Acts xiv. 27 ; xv. 4. d. with designations of time [B. § 131, 1], to pass, spend : χρύι/ον, Acts xv. 33 ; xviii. 23 ; μηναί rpet j, Acts .\x. 3 ; ννχθημερον, 2 Co. xi. 25 ; eviav τον or iviavTov ίνα, .las. iv. 13, (Tub. x. 7; Joseph, antt. 6, 1, 4 fin. ; Stallbaum on Plato, Phileb. p. 50 c, gives exx. fr. Grlc. writ, [and reif. ; of. also Soph. Lex. s. v. 9] ; in the same sense Π^ί;.^ in Eccl. vi. 12 (vii. 1); and the Lat. facere : Cic. ad Att. 5, 20 Apameae quinque dies morati, . . . Iconii decern fecimus; Seneca, epp. 66 [1. 7, ep. 4, ed. Haase], quamvis autem paucissimos unayeceri'mu.s dies) ; some interpreters bring in here also Mt. .xx. 12 and Rev. xiii. 5 Rec.'""'''*• LTTrWIl; but on these pass, see I. 1 a. above. e. like the Lat. ago i. q. to celebrate, keep, with the accus. of a noun designating a feast : το πάσχα, Mt. x.wi. 18 (Josh. v. 10; but in Heb. xi. 28 the language denotes to make ready, and so at the same time lo institute, the celebration of the passover ; Germ, ver- anstalten); την ίορτην, Acts xviii. 21 Rec. f. i. q. (La,t. perficio) to perform: as opposed to \eyeiv,Mt. xxiii. 3 ; touiKfiv, 2 Co. viii. 10 sq. ; to a promise, 1 Th. v. 24. [CoMP. : trepi-, προσ- ποίί'ω.] [Syn. ποίΐΐν, π ράσσ €tv: roug;hly speakinjj^, ττ. may be said to answer to tlie Lat. facere or the Englisli do, ττρ. to arjere or Eng. practise ; π. to designate performance, irp- in- tended, earnest, habitual, performance ; π. to denote merely productive action, ττρ. definitely directed action ; π. to point to an actual result, ττρ. to the scope and character of the result. *' In Attic in certain connection.s the difference between them is great, in others hardly perceptible" {.Schmidt] ; see his Syn. ch. 23,esp. § U ; cl.Trench, N. T. Syn. § xcvi. ; Green, 'Grit. Note 'on Jn. v. 29; (cf. τράσσω, iuit. and 2). The words are associated in Jn. iii. 20, 21 ; v. 29 ; Acts xxvi. 9, 10 ; P.O. i. 32 ; ii. 3 ; vii. 15 sqf|. ; xiii. 4, etc.] ΊΓοίημια, tos, to, (ποίί'ω), that loliich has been made ; a work : of the works of God as creator, Ro. i. 20 ; those KTiauevres by God eVi epyois άγαθοΐς are spoken of as 7Γοί/;/χα τον θ(οϋ [Α. V. his workmanship'], Eph. ii. 10. (lldt., Plat., al. ; Sept. chiefly for Πί?;;•?.)* ΐΓοΙησ-ΐί, -ίωί, η, (ποιίω) ; 1. α making (Hdt. 3, 22 ; Thuc. 3, 2 ; Plat., Dem., al. ; Sept. several times for iT-?!!,"?)- 2. a iloing or performing: iv ttj ττοιήσίΐ αίτοϋ [m his doing, i. e.] in the obedience he renders to the law, Jas. i. 25; add Sir. xix. 20 (18).* τΓΟίητήϊ, -οΰ, ό, (ΐΓοι/ω) ; 1. a maker, producer, au- thor, (Xen., Plat., al.). 2. a doer, performer, (Vulg. factor) : τοϋ νόμου, one who obeys or fulfils the law, Ro. ii. 13 ; Jas. iv. 1 1 ; 1 Mace. ii. 67, (see πούω, Π. a.) ; ίργου, Jas. i. 25; λόγου, Jas. i. 22, 23. 3. a poet: Acts xvii. 28 ([Hdt. 2, 53, etc.], Aristoph., Xen., Plat., Plut., al.).• toikIXos, -i;, -ok, fr. Horn, down, various i. e. a. of divers colors, variegated : Sejjt. b. Ί. q. of divers sorts : Mt. iv. 24 ; Mk. i. 34 ; Lk. iv. 40 ; 2 Tim. iii! 6 ; Tit. iii. 3; Heb. ii. 4 ; xiii. 9 ; Jas. i. 2; 1 Pet. i. 6; iv. 10, [(A. V. in the last two exx. manifold)'].* ποιμαίνω ; fut. ποιμανά; 1 aor. impv. 2 pers. plur. n-oi- μάνατ( (1 Pet. v. 2) ; {ποιμήν, q. v.) ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for T^},\1 ; to feed, to tend aflock, keep sheep ; a. prop. : Lk. xvii. 7 ; ποίμνην, 1 Co. ix. 7. b. trop. a. to rule, govern : of rulers, τινά, Mt. ii. 6 ; Rev. ii. 27 ; xii. 5; xix. 15, (2S. V. 2; Mic. v. 6 (5' ; vii. 14, etc.; [cf. ΛΥ. 17]), (see ποιμήν, b. fin.); of the overseers (pastors) of the church, Jn. .xxi. 16 ; Acts .\x. 28 ; 1 Pet. v. 2. β. to furnish pasturage or food ; to nourish : ίαυτόν, to cher- ish one's body, to serve the body, Jude 12; to supply the requisites for the soul's needs [R. V. shall be their shepherd]. Rev. vii. 1 7. [Syn. see βόα-κω, fin.] ' τΓοιμήν, -ίνοί, δ, (akin to the noun τΓοία, q. v. ; [or fr. r. meaning ' to protect ' ; cf. Curtius§372; Fick i. 132]), fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for nj,'^, a herdsman, esp. a shep- herd; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 36 ; xxv. 32; xxvi. 31; Mk. vi. 34; xiv. 27; Lk. ii. 8, 15, 18, 20; Jn. .x. 2, 12; in the parable, he to whose care and control others have committed themselves, and whose precepts they follow, Jn. X. 11, 14. b. metaph. the presiding officer, mana- ger, director, of any assembly : so of Christ the Head of the church, Jn. x. 16 ; 1 Pet. ii. 25 ; Heb. xiii. 20, (of the Jewish Messiah, Ezek. xxxiv. 23) ; of the overseers of the Christian assemblies [A. V. pastors], Eph. iv. 11 ; cf. Ritschl, Entstehung der altkathol. Kirche, ed. 2, p. 350 sq. ; [Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1880, p. 123 sq.]. (Of kings and princes we find ποιμίν^ς λαών in Hom. and Hes.)* ΐΓοίμνη, -ηί, ή, (contr. fr. ποιμ£'η; ; sec ποιμήν), [fr. Horn. (Od. 9, 122) on], a flock (esp.) of sheep : Mt. xxvi. 31 ; Lk. ii. 8 ; 1 Co. ix. 7 ; trop. [of Christ's flock i. e.] the body of those who follow Jesus as their guide and keeper, Jn. X. 16.* ΐΓοίμνιον, -ου, το', (contr. fr. ποιμίνιον, i. q. ποίμνη, see ποιμήν; [on the accent cf. W. 52; Chandler §343 b.]), a flock (esp.) of sheep: so of a group of Christ's disci- ples, Lk. xii. 32 ; of bodies of Christians (churches) pre- sided over by elders [cf. reff. s. v. ποιμήν, b.]. Acts x.x. 28, 29 ; 1 Pet. v. 3 ; with a possessive gen. added, toC θίοϋ, 1 Pet. v. 2, as in Jer. xiii. 17 ; τοϋ Χρίστου, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 16, 1 ; 44, 3; 54, 2; 57, 2. (Hdt., Soph., Eur., Plat., Lcian., al. ; Sept. chiefly for Ti;» and [NS .) * irotos, -a, -ov, (interrog. pron., corresponding to the rel. oTot and the demonstr. Tolot), [fr. Hom. down], of what sort or nature (Lat. qualis) : absol. neutr. plur. in a di- rect question, Lk. x.xiv. 19 ; with substantives, in direct questions: Mt. xix. 18; xxi. 23 ; xxii. 36 ; Mk. xi. 28; Lk. vi. 32-34 ; Jn. x. 32 ; Acts iv. 7 ; vii. 49 ; Ro. iii. 27 ; 1 Co. XV. 35; Jas. iv. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 20; in indirect dis- course : Mt. xxi. 24, 27 ; xxiv. 43 ; Mk. xi. 29, 33 ; Lk. xii. 39; Jn. xii. 33; xviii. 32 ; xxi. 19; Acts xxiii. 34 ; Rev. iii. 3 ; els τίνα ή ποίυν κηιρόν, 1 Pet. i. 1 1 ; ποίας (Rec. δια ποίας) sc. όδοΟ. Lk. v. 1 9 ; cf . W. § 30, 11 ; [(also § 64, 5) ; B. §§ 123, 8 ; 132, 2G; cf. Tob. x. 7]. πολ€μίω, -ώ; fut. πολιμήσω; 1 aor. ίπολίμησα; (π-όλί• μοί) ; [fr. Soph, and Hdt. down] ; Sept. chiefly for οπ'?^; ΤΓθ\€μΛ; nonSp foil, by nx or D;• (Cen. xiv. 2 ; Deut. xx. 12, 20), voK. nou'iv μετά rivos, Hev. xi. 7 ; xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 7 [here L om. WHTrnirg.br. the cl.]; xix. 19, [cf. ^fra,I. 2d.]. b. a fight, a battle, [more precisely μάχη ; " in Horn, (where n. 7, 1 74 it is used even of single combat) and Hes. the sense of battle prevails ; in Attic that of tvar" (L. and S. s. V.) ; cf. Trench §I.xx.xvi. and (in partial modification) Schmidt eh. 138, 5 and 6] : 1 Co. xiv. 8 ; Ileb. xi. 34 ; Rev. ix. 7, 9 ; xii. 7 ; xvi. 14 ; xx. 8. 2. a lUspute, strife, quarrel: πόλίμοι και μάχαι, Jas. iv. 1 (Soph. El. 219; Plat. rhaeIk. iv. 5 ; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οίνος, 1 Tim. iii. S; plur. πολλοί τιλώναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοί προφ^ται, Mt. xiii. I 7 ; Lk. x. 24 ; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26 ; πατίρΐς, 1 Co. iv. 15 ; ^ννάμίΐς, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, etc.; όχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L Τ WH om. Tr br. 5;^.] ; Lk. v. 15, etc. ; 6αιμόνια, Mk. i. 34 ; and in many other exx. ; with participles used substantively, Mt. viii. 16 ; 1 Co. xvi. 9, etc. ; with the article prefixed : a'l άμαρτιαι αυτής a'l πολλοί, her sins which are many, Lk. vii. 47; τα πολλά γράμματα, the great Jearning with which I see that you are furnished, Acts \xvi. 24 ; ό πολύς όχλος, the great multitude of common people present, Mk. xii. 37 [cf. ό όχλ. πολνς, Jn. xii. 9 Τ Tr mrg. WH ; see όχλος, 1 ]. Plur. masc. πολλοί, absol. and without the art., many, a large part of mankind : πoλλoίsiraply,Mt. vii. 13, 22; xx. 28; xxvi. 28; Mk. ii. 2; iii. 10 ; x. 45 ; xiv. 24 ; Lk. i. 1, 14 ; Heb. ix. 28, and very 84 often ; opp. to ολίγοι, Mt. xx. 16 [T WH om. Tr br. the cl.] ; fTfpot πολλοί. Acts xv. 35; άλλαι πολλοί, Mk. xv. 41 ; (Ttpai πολλοί, Lk. viii. 3 ; πολλοί foil, by a partit. gen., as των Φαρισαίων, Mt. iii. 7 ; add, Lk. i. 16 ; Jn. xii. 11 ; Acts iv. 4 ; xiii. 43 ; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; Rev. viii. 11, etc. ; foil. by f ,{ποΚν!,τίμη), very valuable,of great price: Mt. xiii. 46; xxvi. 7 LTTrmrg. ; Jn. xii. 3; compar. TtoKvTipOTepov, 1 Pet. i. 7, where Rec. πολύ τιμιώτιρον. (Plut. Pomp. 5; Ildian. 1, 17,5[3ed. Bekk.] ; Anthol., al.)• πολντρίιτωϊ, (fr. πολΰτροποΓ, in use in various senses fr. Horn, down), adv., in many rtianners : Ileb. i. 1 [(Philo de incor. mund. § 24)] ; see ποΚυμιρως' Ίτόμο (.\ttic πώμα; [cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 425]), -Tdt, to, (πίνω, πίπομαι), drink: 1 Co. X. 4 ; Heb. ix. 10.* ΊΓονηρία, -at, ή, (πονηρο!), [fr. Soph, down], Sept. for ^?Ί and 7\1'1, depravity, iniquity, wickedness [(so A. V. almost uniformly)], malice : Mt. xxii. 18 ; Lk. xi. 39; Ro. i. 29 ; 1 Co. V. 8 ; Eph. vi. 1 2 ; plur. al πονηρίαι [cf. W. § 27, 3; B. § 123, 2; R. V. wickednesses'], evil purposes and desires, Mk. vii. 22 ; wicked ways [A. V. iniquities'^, Acts iii. 26. [Syn. see κακία, fin.] * ΐΓονηρίβ (on the accent cf. Lah. ad Phryn. p. 389; Goltling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 304 sq. ; [Chandler §§ 404, 405] ; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 26). -a, -ov ; com- par. ττονηρότ(ρο! (Mt. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ) ; (ποκί'ω, novos) ; fr. lies., [liom. (ep. 15, 20), Theog.] down ; Sept. often for J?"5 ; 1. full of labors, annoyances, hardships ; a. pressed and harassed by labors ; thus Hercules is called πονηρότατο! και άριστα, Hes. frag. 43, 5. b. bring- ing toils, annoyances, perils : (καιρό:. Sir. Ii. 12); ήμΐρα πονηρά, of a time full of peril to Christian faith and stead- fastness, Eph. V. 16; vi. 13, (so in the plur. ήμίμαι πον. Barn. ep. 2, 1) ; causing pain and trouble [A. V. griev- ous'], (Xkos, Rev. xvi. 2. 2. had, of a bad nature or condition ; a. in a physical sense : οφθαλμό:, dis- eased or blind, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 34, {πονηρία οφθαλμών. Plat. Hipp. min. p. 374 d. ; the Greeks use πονηρά): (χιιν or διακί'ισθαι of the sick ; cV γενετής πονηρούς νγιεις πε- wotr/Kc'i/ai, Justin apol. 1, 22 [(cf. Otto's note) ; al. take πον. in Mt.and Lk.u.s. ethically; cf.b. and Meyer on Mt.]); καρπός, Mt. vii. 1 7 sq. b. in an ethical sense, evil, tcirkeil, bad, etc. [" this use of the word is due to its as- sociation with the working (largely the servile) class; not that contempt for labor is thereby expressed, for such words as εργάτης, δραστηρ, and the like, do not take on this evil sense, which connected itself only with a word expressive of unintermitted toil and carrying no suggestion of results" (cf. Schmidt ch. 85, §1); see κακία, fin.] ; of persons: Mt. vii. 11 ; xii. 34sq.; xviii. 32; XXV. 26 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; xi. 1 3 ; xix. 22 ; Acts xvii. 5 ; 2 Th. iii. 2; 2 Tim. iii. 13; yt xea πον-, Mt. xii. 39,45; xvi. 4; Lk. xi. 29 ; πνεϋμα πονηρόν, an evil spirit (see πνεϋμα, 3 c.), Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21 ; viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq. ; substantively oi πονηροί, the wicked, bad men, opp. to 01 hiKaioi, Mt. xiii. 49; πονηροί κα'ι αγαθοί, Mt. v. 45 ; xxii. 10 ; αχάριστοι κ. πονηροί, Lk. vi. 35 ; τον πονηρόν, the wicked man, i. e. the evil-doer spoken of, 1 Co. v. 13; τω πηνηρώ, the evil man, who injures you, Mt. v. 39. 6 πονηρός is used pre-eminently of the devil, the evil one : Mt. v. 37; vi. 13; xiii. 19, 38; Lk. xi. 4 R L ; .Jn. xvii. 15; 1 Jn. ii. 13 sq. ; iii. 12; v. 18 sq. (on which see κε'ϊμαι, 2 c.) ; Eph. vi. 16. of things : αιών, Gal. i. 4 ; όνομα (q• v. 1 p. 447" bot.), Lk. vi. 22; ρα8ιούργημα. Acts xviii. 14; the heart as a storehouse out of which a man brings forth πονηρά words is called θησαυρός πονηρός, Mt. xii. 35 ; Lk. vi. 45 ; σννείδησις πονηρά, a soul conscious of wickedness, [conscious wickedness ; see συν(ίδησις,\). sub fin.], Heb. x. 22 ; Kapbia πονηρά απιστίας, an evil heart such as is re- vealed in distrusting [cf. B. § 132, 24 ; W. § 30, 4], Heb. iii. 12; οφθαλμός (q. v.), Mt. xx. 15; Mk. vii. 22; δια- λογισμοί, 'Sit. XV. 19 ; ,Jas. ii. 4 ; Ιπόνοιαι, 1 Tim. vi. 4 ; κανχησις, Jas. iv. 16; ρήμα, a reproach, Mt. v. 11 [RG; al. om. p.] : λόγοι, 3 Jn. 10 ; ίργα, Jn. iii. 19 ; vii. 7 ; 1 Jn. iii. 12; 2 Jn. 11 ; Col. i. 21 ; ίργον, (ace. to the context) wrong committed against me, 2 Tim. iv. 18 ; αίτια, charge of crime, Acts xxv. 1 8 L Τ Tr mrg. WH mrg. The neuter πονηρόν, and το πονηρόν, substantively, evil, that which is ΐΓοίΌς 531 TTopveia wicked : ei8os πονηρού (see (l8ot, 2 ; [al. take πον. here as an adj., and bring the ex. under iiSos, 1 (R. V. rarg. ap- pearance of evil)']), 1 Th. v. 22; 2 Th. iii. 3 (where τυϋ πονηρού is held by many to be the gen. of the masc. ό πο- νηρός, but of. Liinemann ad loc.) ; [τι πονηράν, Acts xxviii. 2 1 J ; opp. to TO ά-γαθήν, Lk. vi. 45 ; Ro. xii. 9 ; plur. [VV. § 34, 2], Mt. ix. 4 ; Lk. iii. 19 ; wicked deeds, Acts xxv. 18 Tr txt. WH txt. ; ταϋτα τα πονηρά, these evil things i. e. the vices just enumerated, Mk. vii. 23.' irovos, -ου, 6, {πίνομαι [see πίνηϊ]), fr. Ilom. down, Sept. for hoy, i''J", etc., labor, tod; 1. i. q. great trouble, intense desire: ίπίρ tivos (gen. of pers.). Col. iv. 13 (where Rec. has ζηλον [ef. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]). 2. pain: Rev. xvi. 10 sq.; xxi. 4. [Syn. see koitos, fin.] * Ποντικό?, -ij, -Of, (navTos, q. v.), belonging to Pontus, horn in Pontus : Acts xviii. 2. [(Hdt., al.)] * IIovTios, -ου, 6, Pontius (a Roman name), the prae- nomen of Pilate, procurator of Judaia (see Πιλάτο?) ; Mt. xxvii. 2 [R G L] ; Lk. iii. 1 ; Acts iv. 27 ; 1 Tim. vi. 13.• IlivTos, -ou, 0, Pontus, a region of eastern Asia Minor, bounded by the Euxine Sea [fr. which circumstance it took its name], Armenia, Cappadocia, Galatia, Paphla- gonia, [BB. DD. s. v.; Ed. Mei/er, Gesch. d. Konigreiches Pontes (Leip. 1879)] : Acts ii. 9 ; 1 Pet. i. 1.* Πόιτλιοϊ, -ου, ό, Publius (a Roman name), the name of a chief magistrate [(Grk. 6 πρώτοι) but see Dr.WooIsey's addition to the art. 'Publius' in B. D. (Am. ed.)] of the island of Melita ; nothing more is known of liim : Acts xxviii. 7, 8.* iropeCa, -as, ή, (πορήω), fr. Aeschyl. down ; Sept. for riD'Sn; a journey: Lk. xiii. 22 (see jroif'ia, L 3) ; Hebra^ istically (see ohas, 2 a.), α going i. e. purpose, pursuit, un- dertaking : Jas. i. 11.* πορ(ΰω : to lead over, carry over, transfer, (Pind., Soph., Thuc, Plat., al.); Mid. (fr. Ildt. down), pres. πορεύομαι; ΐηίρΐ. €πορ€υόμην', int. πορ^υσομαι: pf. ptcp. ττίπορευμενο? ; 1 aor. subjunc. 1 pers. plur. πορ^υσώμιθα (.las. iv. 13 Rec." Grsb.) ; 1 aor. pass. (πορ(ΰθην; (πόρος a ford, [cf. Eng. pore i. e. passage through ; Curtius § 356 ; Vanicek p. 479]) ; Sept. often for fl7^, ^^|ΠηΠ, ■7\h\ ; prop, to lead one's self across ; i. e. to take o/ie's way, betake one's self, set out, depart ; a. prop. : την ό8όν μου, to pursue the journey on which one has entered, continue one's journey, [A. V. go on one's ivay]. Acts viii. 39; πορ. foil, by από w. a gen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1 [R G] ; από w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41 ; Lk. iv. 42 ; iKcidev, Mt. xix. 15 ; evrddev, Lk. xiii. 31 ; foil, by els w. an ace. of place, to go, depart, to some place : Mt. ii. 20 ; xvii. 27 ; Mk. xvi. 12 ; Lk. i. 39; ii. 41 ; xxii. 39 ; xxiv. 13 ; .In. vii. 35 ; viii. 1 ; Acts i. 11, 25 ; xx. 1 ; Ro. XV. 24 sq.; Jas. iv. 13, etc.; w. an ace. denoting the state : tls (ΐρήνην, Lk. vii. 50 ; viii. 48, (also ev (Ιρήνη, Acts xvi. 36 ; see (Ιρήνη, 3) ; fis θάνατον, Lk. xxii. 33 ; foil, by ('πι w. an ace. of place, Mt. xxii. 9 ; Acts viii. 26 ; ix. 11 ; fjri w. the ace. of a pers. Acts xxv. 12 ; ΐως with a gen. of place. Acts xxiii. 23 ; πον [q. v.] for ποί, .Τη. vii. 35 ; ου [seeSs, II. 11 a.] for όττοι, Lk. xxiv. 28; 1 Co. xvi. 6 ; jrpo'r w. the ace. of a pers., Mt. xxv. 9 ; xxvi. 14 ; Lk. xi. 5; xv. 18; xvi. 30; Jn. xiv. 12, 28; xvi. 28; xx. 1 7 ; Acts xxvii. 3 ; xxviii. 26 ; κατά την obav. Acts viii. 36 ; 8ιά w. a gen. of place, Mt. xii. 1 ; [Mk. ix. 30 L txt Tr txt. WH txt.] ; the purpose of the journey is indi- cated by an infinitive : Mt. xxviii. 8 (9) Rec. ; Lk. ii. 3 ; xiv. 19, 31 ; Jn. xiv. 2 ; by the prep, ΐπί ivith an ace. [cf. f'm', C. I. 1 f.], Lk. XV. 4 ; foil, by tra, Jn. xi. 11; by σύ» w. a dat. of the attendance, Lk. vii. 6 ; Acts x. 20 ; xxvi. 13 ; 1 Co. xvi. 4 ; ΐμπροσθίν twos, to go before one, Jn. x. 4. absol. i. λ«ω), α female seller of purple or of fabrics dyed in purple (Vulg. pur- puraria) : Acts xvi. 14. (Phot., Suid., al.) * ΐΓοσ-άκΐί, (πόσος), adv., how often : Mt. xviii. 21 ; x.xuL 37 ; Lk. xiii. 34. [(Plat, ep., Aristot., al.)]• iroo-is, -ίωί, ή, (πίνω), fr. Horn, down, a drinking, drink: Jn. vi. 55; Ro. xiv. 17; Col. ii. 16, (see βρώσΐ!).* itoa-os, -η, -ov, [(cf. Curtius § 631), fr. Aeschyl. down, Ι,ίΛ. quarilus}, how great : Mt. vi. 23; 2Co. vii. II; πόσοι χρόνος, how great (a space) i. e. how long time, Mk. i.\. 21 ; neut. how much, Lk. xvi. 5, 7; πάσω, (by) how much, Mt. xii. 1 2 ; πόσω μάλλον, Mt. vii. 11; x. 25 ; Lk. xi. I .'i ; xii. 24, 28 ; Ro. xi. 12, 24 ; Philem. 16 ; Heb. ix. 14 ; πόσω χιΐρονος τιμωρίας, Heb. .\. 29 ; plur. how many : with nouns, Mt. xv. 34 ; xvi. 9 sq. ; Mk. vi. 38 ; viii. 4, 1 9 sq. ; Lk. XV. 1 7 ; Acts xxi. 20 ; πόσα, how grave, Mt. xxvii. 1 3 ; Mk. XV. 4.• ΐΓοτομόϊ, -oC, 0, fr. Hom. down, Sept. for "inj and "IN", a stream, a river : Mt. iii. 6 L Τ Tr AVH ; Mk. i. 5 ; Acts xvi. 13; 2 Co. xi. 26 [W. § 30, 2 a.]; Rev. viii. 10; ix. 14; xii. 15; xvi. 4, 12; xxii. Isq. ; i.q. α /orrcni, Mt. vii. 25, 27; Lk. vi. 48 sq. ; Rev. xii. 15 sq. ; plur. figuratively i. q. the greatest abundance [cf. coUoq. Eng. " streams," " floods "], Jn. vii. 38.• ΐΓΟταμο-φόρητοϊ, -ου, ό, (ποταμός and φορίω ; like avf- μοφόρητος [cf. W. 100 (94)]), carried aicay by a stream (i. e. whelmed, drowned in the waters) : Rev. xii. la. Besides only in Hesych. s. v. άπόιρσί.' iroToiros ([in Dion. Hal., Joseph., Philo, al.] for the older πο&απός [cf. Lob. Phryn. p. 56 sq.; Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 129; AV. 24; Curtius p. 537, 5th ed.] ; ace. to the Grk. grammarians i. q. ix ποίου ίαπίδου, from what region ; ace. to the conjecture of others i. q. tfoC άπί [( Buttmann, Lexil. i. 126, compares the Germ, wovon)], the δ being inserted for the sake of euphony, as in the Lat. prodire, proOesse; cf. Fritzsche on Mark p. 5.'J4 sq. [«till others regard -δαπ6Γ merely as an ending ; cf •jTOTe 533 Πούδη^; Apollon. Dysk., ed. Buttmann, index s. v.]), -ή, -ύν ; 1. from, what country, race, or tribe ? so fr. Aeschyl. down. 2. from Demosth. down also i. q. τγοΙογ, of what sort or qualilii ? [what manner of?~\ : absol. of persons, Mt. viii. 27; 2 Pet. iii. 11 ; with a pers. noun, Lk. vii. 39 ; w. names of things, Mk. xiii. 1 ; Lk. i. 29; 1 .In. iii. 1.* ■1ΓΟΤ6, [Curtius §631], direct interrog. adv., fr. Horn, down, when f at what time ? Mt. χ.κν. 3 7-39, 44 ; Lk. xxi. 7 ; Jn. vi. 25 ; loosely used (as sometimes even by Attic writ.) for the relative όπότι in indirect questions (\V. 510(475)): Mt. xxiv. 3; Mk. xiii. 4, 33, 35 ; Lk. .\ii. 36; xvii. 20. f ωί πότ€, how long ? in direct (juestions [cf. W. § 54, 6 fin. ; B. § 146, 4] : Mt. xvii. 1 7 ; Mk. ix. 19 ; Lk. ix. 41 ; Jn. .X. 24; Rev. vi. 10.* ΐΓοτί, an enclitic particle, fr. Horn, down ; 1. once,i. e. at some time or other, former! i^, aforetime ; a. of the Past : Jn. ix. 13 ; Ro. vii. 9 ; xi. 30 ; Gal. i. 13, 23 [cf. W. §45, 7]; Eph. ii. 2sq. 11, 13; v. 8 ; Col. i. 21 ; iii. 7 ; 1 Th. ii. 5 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; Philem. 11 ; 1 Pet. ii. 10 ; iii. 5, 20; η8η iron, now at length, Phil. iv. 10. b. of the Future: Lk. xxii. 32; ^δι; nore, now at length, Ro. i. 10. 2. ever: after a negative, oiSels nore, Eph. v. 29 [B. 202 (175)] ; ov . ■ . nori, 2 Pet. i. 21 ; μή nore (see μήτΓοτί) ; after ου μη with the aor. subjunc. 2 Pet. i. 10 ; in a question, tis ποτί, 1 Co. ix. 7 ; Heb. i. 5, 13 ; ino'ioi wore, whatsoever. Gal. ii. 6 [but some would render TTOTf heT6 formerly, once ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].* iniTepos, -a, -ov, [fr. Hom. down], which of ttvo ; πότ€- pov . . . ij, utrum . . . an, whether . . . or, [W. § 57, 1 b. ; B. 230 (215)]: Jn. vii. 17.• ΊΓΟτήριον, -ov, TO, (dimin. of ποτήρ), a cup, a drinking vessel; a. prop.: Mt. xxiii. 25 sq. ; xxvi. 27; Mk. vii. 4, 8 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; xiv. 23 ; Lk. xi. 39 ; xxii. 17, 20; 1 Co. xi. 25; Rev. xvii. 4; mvew ex τον πατηρίου, 1 Co. .xi. 28 ; το ποτήριον Trjs (υλογίας (see ei- λογία, 4), 1 Co. X. 16 ; with a gen. of the thing with which the cup is filled : ψνχρον, Mt. x. 42; iJSaTor, Mk. ix. 41 ; by meton. of the container for the contained, the contents of the cup, what is offered to be drunk, Lk. x.xii. 20' [(WH reject the pass.) cf. AVin. 635 (5S9) sq.] ; 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. ; τά ηοτήριόν tivos, gen. of the pers. giving the entertainment (cf. Rilckert, Abendraahl, p. 217 sq.) : irivfiv. 1 Co. x. 21 [cf. AV. 189 (178)] ; xi. 27 [cf. W. 441 (410)]. b. By a figure common to Hebrew, Arabic, Syriac, and not unknown to Latin writers, one's lot or e.xperience, whether joyous or adverse, divine appointments, whether favorable or unfavorable, are likened to a cup which God presents one to drink [cf. W. 32] : so of prosperity, Ps. .xv. (xvi.) 5 ; xxii. (xxiii.) 5; cxv. (cxvi.) 13; of adversity, Ps. x. (xi.) 6 ; Ixxiv. (Ixxv.) 9 ; Is. Ii. 1 7, 22. In the N. T. of the bitter lot (the sufferings) of Christ : Mt. xxvi. 39, 42 Rec. ; Mk. xiv. 36 ; Lk. xxii. 42 ; Jn. xviii. 1 1 ; nlvew TO HOT. μου or 6 f'yoi ττίρω, to undergo the same calamities which I undergo, Mt. xx. 22, 23; Mk. x. 38, 39, (Plant. Cas. 5, 2, 53 (50) ut senex hoc eodem poculo quod ego bibi biberet, i. e. that he might be treated as harshly as I was) ; used of the divine penalties : Rev. xiv. 10 ; xvi. 19 ; xviii. 6. ([Alcaeus, Sappho], Udt., Ctes., Arstph., Lcian., al. ; Sept. for 013•) * ττοτΰ,ω ; impf. (πότιζαν ; 1 aor. (πότισα ; pf. π(πότικα (Rev. xiv. 8) ; 1 aor. pass, (ποτίσθην ; (τγοτογ) ; fr. [Hip- pocr.], Xen., Plat, down ; Sept. for 7]pvr[ ; to give to drink, to furnish drink, (Vulg. in 1 Co. xii. 13 and Rev. xiv. 8 poto [but in Rev. 1. c. Tdf. gives potiono ; A. V. to make to drink]): τινά, Mt. xxv. 35, 37, 42 ; xxvii. 48 ; Mk. XV. 36; Lk. xiii. 15 ; Ro. .\ii. 20 ; τινά τι, to offer one anything to drink (W. § 32, 4 a. ; [B. § 131, 6]) : Mt. x. 42 ; Mk. ix. 41, and often in the Sept. ; in fig. discourse 7Γ. Tivis γάλα, to give one teaching easy to be apprehended, 1 Co. iii. 2 (where by zeugma oi βρώμα is added ; [cf. W. § 66, 2 e. ; B. § 151, 30 ; A. V. / have fed you with milk, etc.]) ; τίνα ix τοΟ υΐνην. Rev. xiv. 8 (see olvos, b. and θυμοί, 2); i. q. to water, irrigate, ( plants, fields, etc.) : 1 Co. iii. 6-8 (Xen. symp. 2, 25; Lcian., Athen., Geop., [Strab., Philo] ; Sept. [Gen. xiii. 10]; Ezek. xvii. 7); metaph. to imbue, saturate, tiw, one's mind, w. the addi- tion of an accus. of the thing, iv πν(ΰμα, in pass., 1 Co. xii. 13 L Τ Tr WH [W. § 32, 5 ; B. § 134, 5] ; ei'r iVjri/fO/xa, that we might be united into one body which is imbued with one spirit, ibid. R G, {τίνα ιτνίϋματι κατανύξίως, Is- xxix. 10 [cf. Sir. χ v. 3]).• Ποτίολοι, -ων, Oi, Puleoli, a city of Campania in Italy, situated on the Bay of Naples, now called Pozzuoli : Acts xxviii. 13. [Cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. 218 sqq.; Smith, Diet, of Geog. s. v.] * irOTos, -ου, 6. (ΠΟΩ [cf. ττίνω]), a drinking, carousing : 1 Pet. iv. 3. (Xen., Plat., Dem., Joseph., Plut., Ael., al. ; Sept. for ππψρ.) • iroO, [cf. Curtius § 631], an interrog. adv., fr. Horn. down, Sept. for Π'Χ, njK, "X, where ? in what place ? a. in direct questions : Mt. ii. 2 ; xxvi. 17 ; Mk. xiv. 12, 14 ; Lk. xvii. 17, 37; xxii. 9, 11 ; Jn. i. 38 (39); vii. 11; viii. 10, 19; ix. 12; xi. 34; ποΟ «σηι» [(«στ. sometimes unex- pressed)], in questions indicating that a person or thing is gone, or cannot be found, is equiv. to it is nowhere, does not exist: Lk. viii. 25; Ro. iii. 27; 1 Co. i. 20; xii. 17, 19; XV. 55; Gal. iv. 15LTTrWH; 2 Pet. iii. 4 ; πο5 φαν(1ται, [Α. V. where shall . . . appear] i. q. there will be no place for him, 1 Pet. iv. 18. b. in indirect ques- tions, for the relative όπου [cf. W. §57, 2 fin.] : foil, by the indie, Mt. ii. 4 ; ITk. xv. 47 ; Jn. i. 39 (40) ; xi. 57; XX. 2, 13, 15 ; Eev. ii. 13 [cf. W. 613 (569)] ; foU. by the subjunc, Mt. viii. 20 ; Lk. ix. 58 ; xii. 17. c. joined to verbs of going or coming, for Ttot in direct quest, [cf. our colloq. where for whither ; see W. t^ 54, 7 ; B. 71 (62)] : Jn. vii. 35 [cf. W. 300 (281) ; B. 358 (307)] ; xiii. 36 ; xvi. 5 ; in iudir. question, foil, by the indie: Jn. iii. 8; λάϋ. 14; xii. 35 ; xiv. 5 ; Heb. xi. 8 ; 1. Jn. ii. 11.* ΐΓού, an encliti.: particle, fr. Hom. down ; 1. somewhere : Heb. ii. 6 ; iv. 4. 2. it has a limiting force, nearly; with numerals somewhere about, about, (Hdt. 1,119; 7,22; Paus.8,11,2; Hdi.in. 7, 5, 3 [2 ed. Bekk.]; Ael. v. h. 13, 4 ; al.) : Ro. iv. 19.• Πον8η5. [Β. 17 (15)], Puilens, proper name of a Chris- tian mentioned in 2 Tim. iv. 21. Cf. Lipsius, Chronolo• TTOVS 534 7Γραο<; gie d. roinisch. Bischofe (1869) p. 146; [B. D. s. v., also (Am. ed.) s. v. Claudia; Bib. Sacr. for 1875, p. 174 sijci- ; Plumpire in the ' Bible Educator ' iii. 245 and in Klli- cott's ' New Test. Com.' ii. p. IHBscj.].* ■irovs (not nois, see Loh. ad Phryn. p. 7G5 ; Golllin;/, Accentl. p. 244 ; [^Chandler, Grk. Accentuation, § 5GG]; W. § 6, Id.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 48), ττοδοΓ, ό, [allied w. ttc'Soi/, πίζα, Lat. pes, etc.; Curtius § 291 ; Van- iiik p. 473], dat. plur. ττοσίν, fr. Horn, down, llebr. Sji ; afoot, both of men and of beasts: Mt. iv. 6 ; vii. 6; xxii. 13; Mk. ix. 45; Lk. i. 79; Jn. xi. 44; Acts vii. 5 ; 1 Co. xii. 15; Rev. x. 2, and often. From the oriental prac- tice of placing the foot upon the vancjuished (Josh. x. 24), come the foil, expressions : ίπο rovt πόδας αυντρΊιίαν (([. V.) rira, Ro. xvi. 20; υπότασσαν τινά, 1 Co. .\v. 27; Kph. i. 22 ; lleb. ii. 8 ; τιθΐναι, 1 Co. xv. 25 ; τιθίναι τίνα νποκάτω των πο8ων, Mt. x,\ii. 44 L Τ Tr AVIi ; υποττόδιον των ποδών, Mt. xxii. 44 R G; Mk. xii. 36 [here WH ίπο- κύτωτ. 7Γ.]; Lk. XX. 43; Acts ii. 35; Ileb. i. 13; x. 13 ; dis- ciples listening to their teacher's instruction are said πάρα (or προς) τούί πόδαί τίνος καθησθαι or παρακαθίσαι, Lk. χ. SO; Acts xxii. 3, cf. Lk. viii. 35; to lay a thing παρά (or προς) τους πόδας τίνός is used of those who consign it to his pmver and care, Mt. xv. 30; Actsiv. 35, 37; v. 2; vii. 58. In saluting, paying homage, supplicating, etc., persons are said προς τους πόδας τινός πίπτΐίν or προσπίπτίίν : ]\lk. v. 22; vii. 25; Lk. viii. 41 ; xvii. 16 παρά]; Rev. i. 17; eh τους π- riraf, Mt. xviii. 29 [Rec] ; Jn. xi. 32 [here Τ Tr WI I TTpo?] ; πίπταν (μττροσθ^ν τ. ποδών τίνος. Rev. xix. 10; προσκνν€'ϊν (μπροσθ^ν (or ΐνώπιον) των ποδών τίνος, Rev. iii. 9 ; xxii. 8 ; πίπτ. ί'ττι τούί π. Acts χ. 25. By a poetic usage that member of the body which is the chief organ or instrument in any given action is put for the man himself (see γλώσσα, 1 ) ; thus oi πόδ(ς τινός is used for the man in motion : Lk. i. 79 (Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 101) ; Acts V. 9; Ro. iii. 15; x. 15 ; Ileb. xii. 13. πράγμα, -τοΓ, τό, (πράσσω), Ιτ. [Pind.], Aeschyl., Hdt. down, Sept. chiefly for ΊΠΤ ; a. that tchlch /id.•.• been done, a deed, an accomplished fact : Lk. i. 1 ; Acts v. 4 ; 2Co. vii. 11; Ileb. vi. 18. b. what is doing or bcin// accomplished : Jas. iii. 16 ; spec, business (commercial transaction), 1 Th. iv. 6 [so W. 115 (109); al. refer this example to c. and render in the matter (spoken of, or con- ventionally understood; cf. Green, Gram. p. 26 sq.)]. c. a matter (in question), affair : Mt. xviii. 19 ; Ro. xvi. 2 ; spec, in a forensic sense, a matter at late, case, suit, (Xen. mem. 2, 9, 1 ; Dem. 1120, 26 ; Joseph, antt. 14, 10, 17) : πράγμα ίχ(ΐν προς τίνα, [Λ. V. having a matter against, etc.], 1 Co. vi. 1. d. tliot irliirh is or exists, a thing: Ileb. x. 1 ; πράγματα ov βλ(πόμ(να, Ileb. xi. 1 [see Λπι^ω].*, πραγμιατ^α [Τ WII τία ; see I, ι], -ας, ή, {πραγματιϋο- μαϊ), prosecution of any affair ; business, occnpation : plur. with the addition of τοϋ βίου, pursuits and occupa- tions pertaining to civil life, opp. to warfare [A. V. the affairs o/this /i/e], 2 Tim. ii. 4. (In the same and other senses in Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.], Xen., Plato down.)* ΊΓραγμ,ατενομαι : 1 aor. mid. impv. 2 pers. plur. πραγ- ματ(ΰσασθ(; {πράγμα) ; in Grk. prose writ. fr. Hdt. down ; to be occupied in ani/lhiiig; to carry on a business; spec. to carry on the business of a banker or trader (Plut. SuU. 17; Cat. min. 59) : Lk. xix. 13 [here WH txt. reads the infinitive (see their Intr. § 404) ; R. V. t7-ade. Comp. : δΐίΐ- πραγματεύομαι.^ * Ίτραιτώριον, -ου, τό, a Lat. word, praetorium (neut. of the adj. praetorius used substantiiely) ; the word de- notes 1. ' head-cjuarters ' in a Roman cam]), the tent of the commander-in-chief. 2. the palace in which the governor or procurator of a province resided, to which use the Romans were accustomed to appropri- ate the palaces already existing, and formerly dwelt in by the kings or princes (at Syracuse " ilia domus prae- toria, quae regis Ilieronis fuit," Cic. Verr. ii. 5, 12, 30); at Jerusalem it was that magnificent palace which Her- od the Great had built for himself, and which the Ro- man procurators seem to have occupied whenever they came from Ctesarea to Jerusalem to tran.saet public business: Mt. xxvii. 27; l\Ik. xv. 16; Jn. xviii. 28, 33; xix. 9 ; cf. Philo, leg. ad Gaium, § 38 ; Joseph, b. j. 2, 14, 8 ; also the one at Cssarea, Acts xxiii. 35. Cf. Keiin iii. p. 359 sq. [Eng. trans, vi. p. 79 ; B. D. s. v. Praeto- rium]. 3. the camp of praetorian soldiers estab- lished by Tiberius (Suet. 37) : Phil. i. 13. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Richthaus ; [Bp. Lghtft. (Com. on Philip, p. 99 sqq.) rejects, as destitute of evidence, the various attempts to give a local sense to the word in Phil. 1. c, and vindicates the meaning /ji-oeion'oii guard (so R.V.)].* πράκτωρ, -ορός, ό, (πράσσω) ; 1. one who does anything, a doer, (Soph.). 2. one who does the work of inflicting punishment or taking vengeance ; esp. the avenger of a murder (Aeschyl., Soph.) ; the exactor of a pecuniary fne ([Antipho], Dem., al.) ; an officer of Jus- tice of the lower order whose business it is to inflict punish- ment : Lk. xii. 58.* Ίτράξυ, -(ως, η, {πράσσω), fr. Horn, down; a. a doing, a mode of acting ; a deed, act, transaction : univ. πράξεις των αποστόλων (Grsb. ; Rec. inserts αγίων, L Tr WH om. των, Tdf. has simply πράξ(ΐς), the doings t. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 4.) [Syn. see (vifUda, fin. ; Trench (as there referred to, but esp.) § xlii. ; Bp. Lghtf t. on Col. iii. 13.]• •π-ρασιά, -as, ή, a plot off/round, a garden-bed, Horn. Od. 7, 127; 24, 247; Theophr. hist, jilant. 4, 4, 3; Nicand., Diosc, al. ; Sir. .xxiv. 31; άνίπ^σον πρασιαι πρασιαί (a Hebraism), i.e. they reclined in ranks or divisions, so that the several ranks formed, as it were, separate plots, Mk. vi. 40; cf. Gesemus, Lehrgeb. p. 669 ; [llebr. Gram. §106, 4; B. 30(27); W. 464 (432) also] § 37, 3 ; (where add f r. the O. T. σννηγαγον αυτούς θημωιήας θημω- νίας, Ex. viii. 14).* ■π-ράσ-σ-ω and (once viz. Acts xvii. 7 RCi) πράττω; fiit. τΓμάξω ; 1 aor. ίπραξα] pf. πίπραχα; pf. pass. ptcp. nfnpay- pems; fr. Hom. down; Sept. several times for TWj,' and '7;'3 ; to do, pi-actise, effect, i^at. agere, (but noulv to make, hat. Jacere; [see ποκ'ω, fin.]) ; i.e. 1. to exercise, practise, be busy with, carry on : τα neplepya, Acts .xi.x. 1 9 ; τα ihta, to mind one's Ολνη affairs, 1 Th. iv. 1 1 (ja ίαυτοϋ, [Soph. Electr. 678] ; Xen. mem. 2, 9, 1 ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 24 7 a.; Dem. p. 150, 21; al.); used of performing the duties of an office, 1 Co. i.x. 1 7. to undertake to do, μη&ίν irpon-ere's, Actsxix. 36. 2. to accomplish, to perform: π(πραγμ(νον ίστίν, has been accomplished, has taken place. Acts .xxvi. 26 ; elrf ayaSov, flVf κακοί/. 2 Co. v. 10; ayaSov η φαΰΚον (κακόν), Ro. ix. 11 (δίκαια η άθικα, Plat. a])ol. p. 28 b.) ; a|tu Trjs ptravoias fpya. Acts xxvi. 20 ; add, Ro. vii. 15, 19; Phil. iv. 9 ; νόμον, to do i. e. keep the law, Ro. ii. 25 ; of unworthy acts, to commit, perpetrate, (less freq. so in Grk. writ., as πολλά και ανόσια, Xen. symp. 8, 22 ; with them ποίύν [(see Schmidt, Syn. ch. 23, 11, 3; L. and S. s. v. B.)] is more com. in reference to bad conduct ; hence tovs ('πιαταμίνου! μίν ά Set πράτταν, ποιοϋντα! 8e ταναντία, Xen. mem. 3, 9, 4), Acts .xxvi. 9; 2 Co. xii. 21 ; το epyov τοϋτη, this (criminal) deed, 1 Co. v. 2 Τ WHTrmrg. ; add, Lk. xxii. 23; Acts iii. 17; v. 35 ; Ro. vii. 19 ; τά τοιαΟτα, such nameless iniijuities, Ro. i. 32 (where τιοκΊν and npaaaetv are used indiscriminately [but cf. Meyer]) ; ii. 1-3 ; Gal. v. 21 ; φαΟλα, Jn. iii. 20 ; V. 29; Ti άξιον θανάτου, Lk. xxiii. 15 ; Acts xxv. 11, 25; xxvi. 31 ; TO κακόν, Ro. vii. 1 9 ; xiii. 4 ; άτοπον, Lk. xxiii. 41 ; tI Tivi κακόν, to bring evil upon one, Acts xvi. 28. 3. to manage public affairs, transact public business, (Xen., Dem., Plut.); fr. this use has come a sense met with fr. Find., Aeschyl., Hdt. down, viz. to exact tribute, revenue, debts: Lk. iii. 13 [here R. V. extort'\; το apyipiov, Lk. xix. 23, (so age7-e in Lat., cf. the commentators on Suet. \'esp. 1 ; [cf. λν. § 42, 1 a.]). 4. intrans. to act (see ev p. 256*) : άπίναντί τινοί, contrary to a thing. Acts xvii. 7. 5. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down reflexively, me habere : τι πράσσω, how I do, the state of my affairs, Eph. vi. 21 ; d πράξίτι (see ev), Acts xv. 29 [cf. B. 300 (258)]. ^ ΐΓροϋιτάθίΐα (-θία Τ WH ; see I, i), -as, η, (πραϋπαθής [(πάσ;(ω)]), miUlncss of disposition, gentleness of spirit, meekness, (i. q. πραντης) : 1 Tim. vi. 1 1 L Τ Tr WH. (Philo de Abrah. § 37 ; Ignat. ad Trail. 8, 1.) • πραν;, see πράο:• Ίτραΰτηδ, see πραότης. Ίτρίττω ; impf. 3 pers. sing. ?πρ£πί ; 1. to stand out, to be conspicuous, to be eminent; so fr. Hom. II. 12, 104 down. 2. to be becoming, seemly, ft, (fr. Find., Aeschyl., Hdt. down) : πρίπιι τινί with a subject nom. Heb. vii. 26 (Ps. xx.xii. (xxxiii.) 1); ό or ά πρίπ-«, which becometh, befitteth, 1 Tim. ii. 10; Tit. ii. 1 ; impers. κα- θώς πρίπιι Ttw, E|)h. v. 3 ; πρίπον (στίν foil, by the inf., Mt. iii. 15 ; Heb. ii. 10; foil, by an ace. with the inf. 1 Co. xi. 13. On its constr. cf. Bttm. § 142, 2.* πρ<σ-β(ία, -ας, η, {πρ(σ0(ΰω) ; 1. age, dignity, right oflhefrst born : Aeschyl. Pers. 4 ; Plat, de rep. 6 p. 509 b. ; Paus. 3, 1, 4 ; 3, 3, 8. 2. the business wont to be intrusted to elders, spec, the office of an ambassador, an embassy, (Arstph., Xen., Plat.) ; abstr. for the con- crete, an ambassage i. e. ambassadors, Lk. xiv. 32 ; xix. 14.* ΐΓρ£σ-β«νω; {πρίσβυς an old man, an elder, [Curtius p. 479; Vanicek p. 186]); 1. to be older, prior by birth or in age, ([Soph.], Hdt. and sqq.). 2. to be an ambassador, act as an ambassador : 2 Co. v. 20 ; Eph. vi. 20, ([Hdt. 5, 93init.], Arstph., Xen., Plat., sqq.).* irpco-pvre'piov, -ov, to, {πρ^σβΰτ^ρος, q. v.), body of elders, presbytery, senate, council : of the Jewish elders (see avy• eSpiov, 2), Lk. xxii. 66 ; Acts xxii. 5 ; [cf. Dan. Theod. init. 50] ; of the elders of any body (church) of Chris- tians, 1 Tim. iv. 14 (eccl. writ. [cf. reff. s. v. πρ^σβίτιρος, 2 b.]).• ΐΓρ€σ-βΰτίρο5, -α, -ov, (compar. of πρίσβυς), [fr. Hom. down], eWer ; used 1. of age; a. where two persons are spoken of, the elder: 6 vlos 6 πρισβ- (Ael. V. h. 9, 42), Lk. .xv. 25. b. univ. advanced in life, an elder, a senior : opp. to νιανίσκοι, Acts ii. 1 7 ; opp. to ν€ώτ(ρος, 1 Tim. v. 1 sq., (Gen. xviii. 11 sq.; Sap. viii. 10; Sir. vi. 34 (33) ; vii. 14 ; 2 Mace. viii. 30). oi πρισβύ- Tfpoi, [A.V. //ic elders'], forefathers, Heb. xi. 2; παράδοσις (q. V.) των πρισβ; received from the fathers, Mt. xv. 2 ; i\Ik. vii. 3, 5. 2. a term of rank or office; as such borne by, a. among the Jews, o. members of the great council or Sanhedrin (because in early times the rulers of the people, judges, etc., were selected from the elderly men) : Mt. xvi. 21 ; xxvi. 47, 57, 59 Rec. ; xxvii. 3, 12, 20, 41; xxviii. 12; Mk. viii. 31; xi. 27; .xiv. 43, 53 ; XV. 1 ; Lk. ix. 22 ; xx. 1 ; xxii. 52 ; Jn. viii. 9 ; Acts iv. 5, 23 ; vi. 12 ; xxiii. 14 ; xxiv. 1 ; with the addition of Ίτρβσβύτης 53t> irpo ToO Ίσραηλ, Acts iv. 8 Κ (ί ; uf των 'lovSaia/v, Acts xxv. lo ; of ToO \aov, Mt. xxi. 23 ; xxvi. 3 ; xxvii. 1. β. tliose who in the separate cities managed public affairs and administered justice : Lk. vii. 3. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. Elder.] b. among Christians, those who presided over the assemblies (or churches) : Acts xi. 30 ; xiv. 23 ; χ v. 2, 4, 6, 22 sq. ; xvi. 4 ; xxi. 18 ; 1 Tim. v. 1 7, 1 9 ; Tit. i. 5 ; 2 Jn. 1 ; 3 Jn. 1 ; 1 Pet. v. 1,5; witli Trjs (κκλησίας added, Acts XX. 17 ; Jas. v. 14. That they did nut diller at all from the (ΐττίσ-κοποι) bishops or overseers (as is acknowledged also by Jerome on Tit. i. 5 [cf. Bp. Lghlft. Com. (in riiil. pp. 98 sij. 229 sq.]) is evident from the fact that the two words are used indiseriminately. Acts XX. 17, 2S ; Tit. i. 5, 7, and that the duty of presbyters is described by the terms (πισκοπΛν, 1 Pet. v. 1 S(j., and ίπισκοπί), Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 44, 1 ; accordingly only- two ecclesiastical officers, oi ί'πίσκοποι and oi διάκονοι, are distinguished in Phil. i. 1 ; 1 Tim. iii. 1, 8. The title ίπίσκοποί denotes the function, πρισβύτιμοι the d i g- n i ty ; the former was borrowed from Greek institutions, the latter from the Jewish; cf. [Bp. Lghtft., as above, pp. 95 sqq. 191 sq(|.] ; Ritschl, Die Entstehung der altka- thol. Kirche, ed. 2 p. 350 sqq. ; Hase, Protest. Polemik, ed. 4 p. 98 sqq. ; [Hatch, Bampton Lects. for 1 880, Lect. iii. and Harnack's Analecten appended to the Germ, trans, of the same (p. 229sq(].) ; also Harnack's note on Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 3 (cf. reff. at 44 init.), and Hatch in Diet, of Christ. Antiq. s. v. Priest. Cf. «ττίσκοπ-οί.]. c. the twentij-four members of the heavenlij Saiihedrin or court, seated on thrones around the throne of (Jod : Rev. iv. 4, 10; V. 5,6,8, 11, 14; vii. 11,1:!; xi. Hi; xiv. 3; xix. 4.* ιτρίσ-βύτηϊ, -ου, ό, (πρίσβυ! [see πp(σ,ifΰω^), an old man, an aged man : Lk. i. 18 ; Tit. ii. 2 ; Philem. 9 [here many (cf. R. V. mrg.) regard the word as a substitute for νρισβ^ντής, ambassador ; see Bp. Lghtfi. Cora, ad loc. ; WH. App. ad loc. ; and add to the exx. of the inter- change rrpf σβ ί υ Tepoit in Wood, Discoveries at Ephesus, App., Inscr. fr. the Great Theatre p. 24 (col. 5, 1. 72)]. (Aescliyl., Eur., Xen., Plat., al. ; Sept. for Jpf.)* ΐΓρ«σ•βΰτΐ9, -tSot, ή, (fern, oi πρισβύτης), an aged woman : Tit. ii. 3. (Aeschyl., Eur., Plat., Diod., Plut., Hdian. 5, 3, 6 (:ied. Bekk.).)• ιτρηνή?, -€Γ, [allied w. προ; Vanicek p. 484], Lat. pro- nus, headlong: Acts i. 18. (Sap. iv. 19; 3 Mace. v. 43; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, but in Attic more com. νρανηί, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 431 ; [W. 22].) * πρίζω {οτπρϊω, q. v.) : 1 aor. pass. fVptVeTji/ : to saw, lo cut in two with a saw : Heb. xi. 3 7. To be ' sawn asunder ' was a kind of punishment among the Hebrews (2 S. xii. 31; 1 Chr. xx. 3), which according to ancient tradition was inflicted on the prophet Isaiah ; cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Sage; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 135; [B. D. s. v. Saw]. (Am. i. 3; Sus. 59 ; Plat. Theag. p. 124 b. and freq. in later writ.) * irptv, [(acc. to Curtius §380 compar. προ- tov, προ -iv, πριν)], as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down 1. an adv. previously, formerly, [cf. παΚαι, 1 ] : 3 Mace. v. 28 ; vi. 4, 31 ; but never so in the N. T. 2. with the force of a conjunction, before, before that: with an acc. and aor. infin. of things past [cf. W. § 44, 6 fin. ; B. § 142, 3] ; πρϊ» Άβρααμ yfviadai, before Abraham existed, came into be- ing, Jn. viii. 58 ; also πρΊν ή (cf. Meyer on Mt. i. 18), Mt. 1.18; [Actsvii.2]; with an aor. inf. having the force of the Lat. fut. perf., of things future [cf. W. 332 (31:)]: ttp'iv αΚίκτορα φωνησαι, before the cock shall have crowed, Mt. xxvi. 34, 75 ; Mk. xiv. 72; Lk. xxii. 61; add.Jn. iv. 49 ; xiv. 29 ; also πρ\ν ij, Mk. xiv. 30 ; Acts ii. 20 (where L Τ Tr WII txt. om. η) ; πρΙν ή•, preceded by a negative sentence [B. § 139, 35], with the aor. subjunc. having the force of a fut. pf. in Lat. [B. 231 (199)], Lk. ii. 26 [RG L Τ Tr uirg., but WII br. ^], and R G in Lk. xxii. 34 ; 7rp\v η, foil, by the optat. of a thing as entertained in thought. Acts xxv. 16 [W. 297 (279) ; B. 230 (198)]. Cf. Mattliiae § 522, 2 p. 1201 sq. ; Bllm. (iram. § 139, 41 ; Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 726 sqij. ; W. [and B.] as above.* Upla-Ko,, ή, [acc. -av], Prisca (a Lat. name [lit. 'an- cient']), a Christian woman, wife of Aquila (concern- ing whom see Άκίλαί) : Ro. xvi. 3 G L Τ Tr WH ; 1 Co. xvi. 19 Led. ster. TTrWH; 2Tim.iv.l9. She is also called by the dimin. name Πρισκιλλα [better (with all edd.) Πρισκιλλα, see Chandler § 1J2; Etymol. Magn. 19, 50 S(j.] (cf. Livia, Livilla; Drusa, Drusilla ; Qiiinta, Quintilla; Secunda, Secundilla) : Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26 ; besides, Ro. xvi. 3 Rec. ; 1 Co. xvi. 19 KGL.* Πρίο-κιλλα, see the preceding word. irpCu, see πρίζω. [CoMP. : δια- πρίω.^ πρό, a prep. foil, by the Genitive, (Lat. pro), [fr. Horn, down], Sept. chiefly for 'iD^, before ; used a. of Place: ττρο τώι/ θυρών, της θύρας, etc.. Acts v. 23 R(; ; xii. 6, 14 ; xiv. 13 ; Jas. v. 9 ; by a Hebraism, προ προσώ- που with the gen. of a pers. before (the face of) one (who isfollowing)[B. 319 (274)]: Mt..xi. 10; Rlk. i. 2 ; Lk. i. 76 ; vii. 27; ix. 52 ; x. 1, (.Mai. iii. 1 ; Zech. xiv. 20; Deut. iii. 18). b. of Time: προ τούτων τών ημ€ρών. Acts V. 36 ; xxi. 38 ; [προ τοϊι πάσχα, .In. xi. 55] ; acc. to a later Greek idiom, προ (ξ ήμιρών τον πάσχα, prop, before six days reckoning from the Passover, which is equiv. to ίξ ημίραί προ τοϋ πάσχα, on the sixth day before the Pas- sover, Jn. xii. 1 (προ δύο (τών του σ€ΐσμον, Am. i. 1 ; Trpi μιαϊ ημίρας της Μαρ^οχαίκης ημίρας, 2 Alacc. XV. 36 ; exx. fr. prof. writ, are cited by W. 55 7 (518) ; [cf. B. § 131, 11]; fr. eccles. writ, by Hilgenfeld, Die Evangelien etc. pp. 298, 302; also his Paschastreit der alten Kirche, p.221 sq. ; [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v. ττρό, 1 and 2]) ; [προ rrjs ίορτης, Jn. xiii. 1] ; rrpd καιροϋ, Mt. viii. 29 ; 1 Co. iv. 5; των αιώ- νων, 1 Co. ii. 7 ; παντός του αΙώνος, Jude 25 L Τ Tr \\'H ; (τών 8(κατισσ. [fourteen years a//o], 2 Co. xii. 2 ; add, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; iv. 21 ; Tit. i. 2 ; τοϋ αρίστου, Lk. xi. 38; κατα- κλυσμοί, Mt. xxiv. 38; προ της μιταθίσίως, Heb. xi. 5; προ καταβολής κόσμου, Jn. xvii. 24 ; Ejih. i. 4 ; 1 Pet. i. 20 ; προ πάντων, [)rior to all created things. Col. i. 1 7 ; [προ ΓοΰΓων πάντων (Rec. άπάντ.), Lk. xxi. 12]; by a Hebraism, προ προσώπου with the gen. of a thing is used of time for the simple προ (W. §65, 4 b.; [B.319 (274)]), Acts xiii. 24 [(lit. before the face of his entering in)], πρό Λνΐΐΐι the gen. of a pers. : Jn. v. 7 ; x. 8 [not Tdf.] ; irpowyw 537 Ίτρόβατον \\o. xvi. 7 ; οί πρό tivos, those that existed before one, Mt. V. 12 ; with a pred. nom. added, Gal. i. 17. πρό with the gen. of an infin. that has the art., Lat. ante quam {before, before that) foil, by a fin. verb [B. § 140, 11 ; W. 329 (309)] : Mt. vi. 8 ; Lk. ii. 21 ; xxii. 15 ; Jn. i. 48 (49) ; xiii. 19 ; xvii. 5 ; Acts xxiii. 15 ; Gal. ii. 12 ; iii. 23. c. of superiority or pre-eminence [W. 372 (349)] : npo ηάντων, above all things. Jas. v. 1 2 ; 1 Pet. iv. 8. d. In Composition, πρό marks o. place: προαΰ- \iov ; motion forward ( Lat. porro), προβαίνω, πρυβάλΧω, etc. ; before another who follows, in udeance, προάγω, πρό- hpopot, προπίμπω, προτρίχω, etc. ; in public view, openly, npoSq\os, πράκ^ίμαι. β. time : before this, previously, προαραρτάνω ; in reference to the time of an occurrence, beforehanil, in advance, προβλίπω, πμογίνώσκω, προθι- σμιοί, προορίζω, etc. γ. superiority or preference : προαψίομαι. [Cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 6J8.] * ιτρο-άγιβ ; impf. προηγορ ; fut. προάξω ; 2 aor. προήγαγαν; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. trans, to lead fonrard, lead forth : τινά, one from a place in which he has lain hidden from view, — as from prison, !ξω. Acts xvi. 30 ; [from Jason's house. Acts .xvii. 5 L Τ Tr WH] ; in a forensic sense, to bring one forth to trial. Acts xii. 6 [WH t.xt. προσαγαγ^ΊνΙ ; with addition of (πι and the gen. of the pers. about to examine into the case, before whom the hearing is to be had, Acts xxv. 2(5 (ei's την δίκην, Joseph, b. j. 1, 27, 2 ; (Is ίκκΚησίαν roit «V αίτια yfvopivovi, antt. 16, 11, 7). 2. intrans. (see άγω, 4 [and cf. πρό, d. a.]), a. to go before : Lk. xviii. 39 [L mrg. παράγ-Ί ; opp. to άκολουθίω, Mt. xxi. 9 R G ; Mk. xi. 9 ; foil, by iir with an ace. of place, Mt. xiv. 22 ; Mk. vi. 4^> ; els κρίσιν, 1 Tim. V. 24 (on which pass, see ΐπακο\ονβίω) ; ptcp. προάγων, preceding i. e. prior in point of time, previous, 1 Tim. i. 18 [see προφητίία fin., and s. v. cVt, C. I. 2 g. γ. yy. (but R. V. mrg. led the way to, etc.)] ; Ileb. vii. 18. τινά, to precede one, Mt. ii. 9; Mk. x. 32; and LTTr WH in Mt. xxi. 9, [cf. Joseph, b. j. 6, 1, 6 ; B. § 130, 4] ; foil, by fls with an ace. of place, Mt. xxvi. 32 ; xxviii. 7 ; Mk. xiv. 28 ; xvi. 7 ; τίνα fls την βασί\(ίαν τοϋ θ(ον, to take precedence of one in entering into the kingdom of God, Mt. xxi. 31 [cf. B. 204 (177)]. b. to proceed, go forward : in a bad sense, to go further than is right or proper, i.q. μη piveiv iv τη 8ι8αχη, to transgress the limits of true doctrine [cf. our coUoq. ' advanced ' (views, etc.) in a disparaging sense], 2 Jn. 9 L Τ Tr WH [but R. V. mrg. taketh the lead'].* προ-αιρεω, -ώ : by prose writ. fr. Hdt. [rather, fr. Thuc. 8, 90 fin. (in poetry, fr. Arstph. Thesm. 419)] down, to bring forward, bring forth from one's stores; IMid. to bring forth for one's self, to choose for one's self before another i. e. to prefer; to purpose : Kadiis προαφ(ίτηι (L Τ Tr WH the pf. προήρηται) rfj καρδία, 2 Co. ix. 7.* ττρο-αιτιάομαι, -ωμαι ■ 1 aor. 1 pers. plur. προητιασάμ(θα ; to bring a charge against previously (i. e. in what has pre- viously been said) : τινά foil, by an infin. indicating the charge, Ro. iii. 9 ; where the prefix προ- makes refer- ence to i. 18-31 ; ii. 1-5, 17-29. Not found elsewhere.* Vpo-OKOVM: 1 »or. 2 pers. plur. προηκονσατ(; to hear before : την ίΧπϋα, the hoped for salvation, before its realization. Col. i. 5 [where cf . Bp. Lghtf t.]. (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Dem., al.) • Ίτρο-αμαρτάνω : pf. ptcp. προημαρτηκω! ; to sin before : oi πμoημapΓηκότ€s, of those who before receiving baptism had been guilty of the vices especially common among the Gentiles, 2 Co. xii. 21 ; xiii. 2 ; in this same sense also in Justin Martyr, apol. i. c. 61 ; Clem. Al. strom. 4, 12; cf. Lucke, Conjectanea Exeget. I. ((iotting. 1837) p. 14 sqq. [but on the ref. of the προ- see Meyer on 2 Co. 11. cc. (R. V. heretofore)']. (Hdian. 3, 14, 18 [14 ed. Bekk.] ; eccl. writ.) * ττρο-ανλιον, -ου. τό, (πρό and αυΚη), fore-court, porch : Mk.xiv. 68 [(cf. Pollux 1, 8, 77 and see ανΚή, 2)].• Ίτρο-βαίνω : pf. ptcp. προβ(βηκά5 ; 2 aor. ptcp. πρόβα! ; fr. Horn, down ; to go forwards, go on, [cf. πρό, d. a.] : prop, on foot, lit. iv. 21 ; Mk. i. 19 ; trop. iv rats ημίρακ πμοβίβηκώί, advanced in age, Lk. i. 7, 18; ii. 36, (see ήμίρα, fin. ; την ηΧικίαν, 2 Mace. iv. 40 ; vi. 18 ; Hdian. 2, 7, 7 [5 ed. Bekk.]; τη ηλικία, Lys. p. 169, 37; [Diod. 12, 18] ; Ta'is ήλικι'αΐΓ. Diud. 13, κίΐ ; [cf. L. and S. s. v. I. 2]).• Ίτρο-βάλλω ; 2 aor. πρθ(βαΚον ; fr. Hom. down ; to throw forward [cf. πρό, d. a.] ; of trees, to shoot forth, put out, sc. leaves; to germinate, [cf. B. § 130, 4; W. 593 (552)] (with καρπόν added, Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 19 ; Epict. 1, 15, 7) : Lk. xxi. 30 ; to push forward, thrust forward, put forward : τινά. Acts xix. 33.* τ-ροβατικόϊ, -ή, -όν, (πρόβατον), pertaining Ιο sheep: f προβατική, sc. τήλη (which is added in Neh. iii. 1, 32 ; xii. 39, for |ΚΪΓΙ "il'Ei), the sheep-gate, Jn. v. 2 [(W. 592 (551) ; B. § 123, 8) ; but some (as Meyer, Weiss, Milligan and Moulton, cf. Treg. mrg. and see Tdf.'s note ad loc.) would connect προβ. with the immediately following κοΚνμβήθρα (pointed as a dat.) ; see Tdf. u. s. ; WH. App. ad loc. On the sup[)0sed locality see B. D. s. v. Sheep Gate (Sheep-Market)].* Ίτροβάτιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of the foil, word), a little sheep: Jn. xxi. [16 Τ Tr mrg. ΛΑΊΙ t.xt.], 17 Τ Tr WH txt. (Hippocr., Arstph., Plat.) * ιτρό-βατον, -ου, τό, (f r. προβαίνω, prop. ' that which walks forward'), fr. Hom. down, Sept. chiefly for [NV, then for Πί;', sometimes for ^23 and 2ΰ2 (a lamb), prop, any four-footed, tame animal accustomed to graze, small cattle (opp. to large cattle, horses, etc.), most com. a sheep or a goat ; but esp. a sheep, and so always in the N. T. : Mt. vii. 15; X. 16; xii. 11 sq.; Mk. vi. 34 ; Lk. xv. 4, 6 ; Jn. iL 14 sq. ; X. 1-4, 11 sq. ; Acts viii. 32 (fr. Is. liii. 7) ; 1 Pet. ii. 25 ; Rev. xviii. 1 3 ; πρόβατα σφαγή5, sheep destined for the slaughter, Ro. viii. 36. metaph. πρόβατα, sheep, is used of the followers of any master : Mt. xxvi. 31 and Mk. xiv. 27, (fr. Zech. xiii. 7) ; of mankind, who as need- inf salvation obey the injunctions of him who provides it and leads them to it ; so of the followers of Christ : Jn. X. 7 sq. 15 sq. 26 sq. ; xxi. 16 [R G LTrtxt. WH mrg.], 17 [R G L WH mrg.] ; Heb. xiii. 20 ; τά πρόβατα άπο- λωλότα (see άποΚΧνμι, fin.), Mt. χ. 6 ; xv. 24 ; τά πράβ. in distinction from τα ipίφιa, are good men as distin- guished fr. bad, Mt. xxv. 33. ττρο^ιβάζω 538 ττροεναρ^^ομα•. προ-βιβάζω : 1 aor. 3 pers. plur. πρηίβίβασαν ; 1 aor. pass. plcj). ίΐΊΐι.πμο^ί/3ασί«σα; 1. prup. /ο cau^e to go forward, to lead forward, to hrintf forward, drag for- ward : Acts xix. 3;i II G [(fr. Soph, tlown)]. 2. metaph. i. q. πμοτρίπω, to incite, instigate, urge forward, set on; to induce hy persuasion: Mt. xiv. 8 («is rt, Xen. mem. 1, 5, 1 ; Plat. Prot. p. 328 b. ; [in Deut. vi. 7 Sept. with an accus. of the thing (and of the pers.) i. q. to teach]).' •π-ρο-βλί'ίΓω : to foresee (Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 13; Dion. II;ii. antt. ll.-iO); 1 aor. raid. \Λ<:[ί. προβλ(ψάμ(νο!; to prnvide: τι wepi rivos, Heb. xi. 40 [W. § 3i<, ϋ ; Β. 194 (167)].• προ-γΐνομαι : pf. ptcp. npoyeyovati ; to become or arise before, happen before, (so fr. lldt. down [in Horn. (II. 18, 525) to come forward into view]) : προγ(γονάτα αμαρτή- ματα, sins previously committed, Ro. iii. 25.• ττρο-γινώσ-κω ; 2 aor. 3 pers. sing, προί-γνω ; pf. pass, ptcp. προΐγνωσμΐνης ; to hare knoirledqe tf lif'forehand ; ,0 foreknow : sc. ταϋτα, 2 Pet. iii. 1 7, cf. 14, IG ; Ttfci, Acts xxvi. 5 ; oif προίγνω, whom he ((!od) foreknew, sc. that they would love him, or (with reference to what follows) whom he foreknew to be fit to be conformed to the like- ness of his Son, Ro. viii. 29 (των ds αίτον [Χριστον] πιστ(ύ(ΐν ■ηρο(•/νωσμ(νων, Justin Μ. dial. c. Tr. c. 42; ιτρο-γινωσκα [ό ^eoff] rtiO? 4κ μΐτανοΐας σωθήσ€(Γθαι /χελ- λοι/τα£, id. apol. i. 28) ; of προίγνω, whose character he clearly saw beforehand, Ro. xi. [1 Lchm. in br.], 2, (against those who in the preceding passages fr. Ro. explain προγινώσκΕΐΐ' as meaning to predestinate, cf. Meyer, I'hilippi, Van Hengel) ; προ(•γνωσμίνου, sc. ίπό ToO β(οϋ (foreknown by God, although not yet ' made manifest' to men), 1 Pet. i. 20. (Sap. vi. 14; viii. 8; xvili. 6 ; Eur., Xen., Plat., Hdian., Philostr., al.) * •ΐΓρό-γνωσ -is, -ews, ή, (προγινώσκω) ; 1. foreknowl- edge : .Itiilith ix. 6 ; xi. 1 !), (Plut., Lcian., Hdian.). 2. foretlioughl, pre-arrangement, (see προβΧίπω) : 1 Pet. i. 2; Acts ii. 23, [but cf. προγινώσκω, and see Mey. on Acts I.e.].• ΐΓρό-•γονο5, -ου, 0, (npoytvopat), liorn before, older: Horn. Od. 9, 221 ; plur. anceslorn, Lat. mnjores, (often so by Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down) : atro προγόνων, in tlie spirit and after the manner received from (ray) forefathers [cf. από, II. 2 d. aa. p. 59' bot.], 2 Tim. i. 3 ; used of a mother, grandparents, and (if such survive) great-grand- parents, 1 Tim. V. 4 [Λ. V. parents'] (of surviving ances- tors also in Pl.ato, legg. 11 p. 932 init.).* ιτρο-γράφω ; 1 aor. npneypa\jfa; 2 aor. pass, προεγράφην; pf. pass. ptcp. προγ(γραμμ(ΐ/ος: 1. to write before (of time) : Ro. xv. 4" R G L txt. Τ Tr Wll, 4'• Rec. ; Eph. 111. 3 ; oi πάλαι προγ€γραμμ. {Ις τούτο ro κρίμα, of old set forth or designated beforehand (in the Scriptures of the O. T. and the prophecies of Enoch) unto this condemna- tion, Jude 4. 2. to depict or porlrag openh/ [d. πρό, d- a. J : οις κατ οφθα\μους ^Ιησονς Χριστοζ ττρο^γράφη iv νμ'ιν [but iv νμ. is dropped by G L Τ Tr WH] Ιστανρωμ^ νος, before whose eyes was portrayed the picture of Jesus Christ crucified (the attentive contemplation of which picture ought to have been a preventive against that bewitchment), i.e. who were taught most defiiiilely and plainly concerning the meritorious ellicacy of the deatli of Christ, Gal. iii. 1. Since the simple γράφαν is often used of painters, and πρόγραφαν certainly signilies al.so to write before the eyes of all who can read (Pint, uemetr. 46 fin. προγράφ(ΐ nr αΰτοΰ πρϋ Ttjs σκηνής τ/}» ToO ΟίδιποδοΓ ap}^i]v), I see no reason why πρόγραφαν may not mean to depict {paint, porlrai/) before the eyes; [Κ.ν. openly set forth]. Cf. Ilofmann ad loc. [I'Orrar, St. Paul, ch. xxiv., vol. i. 470 note; al. adhere to the meaning to placard, write up publicly, see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. ; al. al. ; see .Meyer].* ■πρό-δηλοϊ, -ov, (ττρό [d. a. and] δ^λοί), openly evident, known to all, manifest : 1 Tim. v. 24 sq. ; neut. foil, by ότι, Heb. vii. 14. [(From Soph, and Hdt. down.)] * προ-δίδωμι : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. προ(δωκ(ν; 1. to give before, give first : Ro. xi. 35 (Xen., Polyb., Aris- tot.). 2. to betray: Aeschyl., Hdt., Eur., Plat., al. ; την πατρίδα. 4 Mace. iv. 1.* irpo-SoiT)s, -ou, 0, (προδίδω/χι, 2), a betrayer, traitor: Lk. vi. 16; Acts vii. .52; 2 Tim. iii. 4. (From [Aeschyl.], Hdt. down; 2 Mace. v. 15; 3 Mace. iii. 24.)• irpo-Spop.os, -ou, 0, ή, (προτρϊχω, προΒραμΰν), a forerun- ner (esp. one who is sent before to take observations or act as spy, a scout, a light-armed soldier; Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc, Polyb., Diod., Plut., al. ; cf. Sap. xii. 8) ; one who comes in advance to a place whither the rest are to follow: Heb. vi. 20.• προ-<ΐ8ον, [fr. Hom. down], 2 aor. of the verb προοράω, to foresee: Acts ii. 31 [(here WH προιδώ»» without diaer- esis; cf. I, t fin.)] ; Gal. iii. 8.* irpo-ilwov [2 aor. act. fr. an unused pres. (see tinov, init.)], 1 pers. plur. πpofίπoμ(V (1 Th. iv. 6 Grsb.), rpo- (ίπαμ(ν (ibid. RLTTrWH [see IF//. App. p. 164]); ρΐ-προίίρηκα; pf. pass, προίίρημαι (see «ποκ, p. 181* top) ; fr. Horn, [(by tmesis) ; Hdt. and Plat.] down; to say be- fore ; i. e. a. to say in what precedes, to say above : foil, by OTi, 2 Co. vii. 3 ; foil, by direct disc, [Heb. iv. 7 L Τ Tr WH txt.] ; X. 15 [Rec.]. b. to say before i. e. heretofore, formerly : foil, by ότι, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Gal. V. 21 ; foil, by direct disc., Gal. i. 9; [Heb. iv. 7 WH mrg.] ; καθώς προ('ίπαμ(ν ΰμΐν, 1 Th. iv. 6 ; [in the pas- sages under this head (exe. f!al. i. 9) some would give προ- the sense of openly, plainly, (cf. R. V. mrg.)]. c. to say beforehand i.e. before the event; so used in ref. to prophecies : τι, Acts i. 1 6 ; τα ρήματα τα προ€ΐρημίνα νπο Tivos, Jude 1 7 ; 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; προΐίρηκα νμ'ιν πάντα, Mk. xiii. 23 ; sc. αϊτό, Mt. xxiv. 25 ; foil, by direct discourse, Ro. ix. 29.• προ-€Ϊρηκα, see προΐίπον. ■προ-ίλτΓίζω : pf. ptcp. ace. plur. προι^λπικόταί ; to hope before : tv τινι, to repose hope in a person or thing before the event confirms it, Eph. i. 1 2. (Posidipp. ap. Athen. 9 p. 377 c., Dexipp., Greg. Nyss.) * Trpo-cv-apxo^ai : 1 iior. προ€νηρζάμην; to make a begin- ning before : 2 Co. viii. 6 ; τι, ib. 10 [here al. render 'to make a beginning before others,' ' to be the first to make a beginning,' fcf. Meyer ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.' 77 ^οετταγγελλω 539 ττροιστημι 'ΓΓρο-€'ΐΓ-αγγ€λλω : 1 aor. mid. 7Γρο€7Γηγγ€ΐ\άμ.ην ; pf. ptcp. τρυ(πηγγ(\μ(νος ; to announce he/ore (DioCass.); mid. to promise before : τί, Ro. i. 2, and L Τ Tr WH in 2 Co. ix. 5, ([Arr. 6, 27, 1] ; Dio Cass. 42, 32 ; 46, 40).• ττρο-ί'ρχομαι. : impf. προημχήμην; flit, προίλίίσομαι ; 2 aor. προήλ^οκ; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to go forward, yo on : μικράν, a little, Mt. xxvi. 39 [here Τ Tr WH mrg. προσιλθών (q. v. in a.)] ; Mk. xiv. 35 [Tr WH mrg. προσ- (λθ.\ ; w. an ace. of tlie way, Acts xii. 10 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 18 ; Plato, rep. 1 p. 328 e. ; 10 p. 616 b.). 2. to go he/ore; i.e. a. to (/o &i?/ore,/)i-ecerfe, (locally; Germ. vorangehen) : ΐνώπιόν τίνος, Lk. i. 17 [^{(μπροσθ^ν tivos. Gen. xxxiii. 3), WH mrg. νροσΐρχ. q. v. in a.] ; tivos, to precede one, Lk. xxii. 47 Rec. [(Judith ii. 19)]; τινά, ibid. G I., Τ Tr WH (not soconstrued in prof. writ. ; cf. B. 144 (126); Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. iii. p. 70; [W. § 52, 4, 13]; but in Lat. we find anlecedere, anteire, praeire, aliquem, and in Grk. writ, ■προθΰ.ν τίνα; see προηγίομαι) ; to outgo, outstrip, {hat. praecurrere, antecertere aliquem; for which the Greeks say φθΰνΐΐν τινά), Mk. vi. 33. b. to go before, i.e. (set out) in advance of another (Germ. vorauf!gehen) : Acts xx. 5 [Tr WH txt. προσ(\6.] ; eis [L Tr προς] ίμάϊ, unto (as far as to) ijou, 2 Co. ix. 5 ; iVi TO πλοίο•/, to the ship, Acts x.x. 13 [Tr WH mrg. προσ- eXAiiTff].• 'η:ρο-€τοιμάζω : 1 aor. προητοΐμασα ; to prepare before, to make ready beforehand : a προητοίμασιν tU 8όξαν, i. e. for whom he appointed glory beforehand (i. e. from eter- nity), and accordingly rendered them fit to receive it, Ro. i.x. 23 ; to prepare beforehand in mind and purpose, i. e. to decree, Eph. ii. 10, where οΐς stands by attraction for 5 [cf. W. 149 (141) ; B. § 143, 8]. (Is. x.xviii. 24 ; Sap. ix. 8 ; Hdt., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Geop., al.) * ΐΓρο-ί«αγγ€λίζομοι : 1 aor. 3 pers. sing. ιτρο(υηγγ(\ίσατο; to announce or promise glad tidings heforeliand (viz. be- fore the event by which the promise is made good) : Gal. iii. 8. (Philo de opif . mund. § 9 ; mutat. nom. § 29 ; By- zant. writ.) * ιτρο-ί'χω [(fr. Hom. down)] : pres. mid. 1 pers. plur. irpo- ίχόμίθα ; to have before or in advance of another, to have pre-eminence over another, to excel, to surpass ; often so in prof. auth. fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down ; mid. to excel to one's advantage (cf. KUhner § 375, 1) ; to surpass in ex- cellences which can be passed to one's credit : Ro. iii. 9 ; it does not make against this force of the middle in the present passage that the use is nowhere else met with, nor is there any objection to an interpretation which has commended itself to a great many and which the con- text plainly demands. [But on this difScult word see esp. Jas. Morison, Crit. Expos, of the Third Chap, of Rom. p. 93 sqq. ; Gifford in the ' Speaker's Com.' p. 96; W. § 38, 6 ; § 39 fin., cf. p. 554 (516).] * •π•ρ<Μΐ|•γ€Όμαι., -οϋμαι; to go before and show the way, to go before and lead, to go before as leader, (Hdt. 2, 48 ; often in Xen.; besides in Arstph., Polyb., Plut., Sept., al.) : TJi τιμτι άΧΚηΚου! προηγηνμα'οι, one going before another as an example of (Inference [A. V. in honor pre- ferring one another (on the dat. cf. W. § 31, 6 a.)], Ro. xii. 10. The Grk. writ, connect this verb now with the dat. (Arstph. Plut. 1195; Polyb. 6, 53, 8; etc.), now with the gen. (Diod. 1, 87) ; see ττροίρχομαι, 2 a.* Ίτρό-θίσ-ΐϊ, -€Mf, ή, (προτίθημι) ; 1. the setting forth of a thing, placing of it in view, (Plat., Dem., Plut.) ; ol άρτοι τηί τΓροθίσ(ωί (Vulg. panes propositionis), the shoto- bread, Sept. for D'JSn DPlS (Ex. xxxv. 13; xxxix. 18 (xxxviii. 36) ; 1 K. vii. 48 (34)), and no-ii'Sn unh (1 Chr. ix. 32 ; xxiii. 29) ; twelve loaves of wheaten bread, corresponding to the number of the tribes of Israel, which loaves were offered to God every Sabbath, and, separated into two rows, lay for seven days upon a table placed in the sanctuary or anterior portion of the tabernacle, and afterwards of the temple (cf. Winer, RWB. s. v. Schaubrode ; Roskojf in Schenkel v. p. 213 sq.; \_Edersheim, The Temple, ch. ix. p. 152 sqq. ; BB. DD.]) : Mt. xii. 4 ; Mk. ii. 26 ; Lk. vi. 4, (οι άρτοι τοΰ προσ- ώπου, sc. ΰ(οΰ, Neh. χ. 33 ; άρτοι ίΐ/ώπιοι, Ex. χχν. 29) ; ή πρόθ(σις των άρτων, (the rite of) the setting forth of the loaves, Heb. ix. 2. 2. a purpose (2 Mace. iii. 8; [Aristot.], Polyb., Diod., Plut.) : Acts xxvii. 13; Ro. viii. 28; ix. 11 ; Eph. i. 11; iii. 11 ; 2 Tim. i. 9; iii. 10; τη προθίσει rijt καρδίας, with purpose of heart, Acts xi. 23.* προ-θεσ-μιοΐ, -α, -ov, {προ [q. v. in d. ;3.] and θεσμός fi.xed, appointed), set beforehand, appointed or determined be- forehand, pre-arranged, (Lcian. Nigr. 27) ; ή προθεσμία, sc. ήμίρα, the day previously appointed ; univ. the pre-ap- pointed time : Gal. iv. 2. (Lys., Plat., Dem., Aeschin., Diod., Philo — cf. Siegfried, Philo p. 113, Joseph., Plut., al. ; eccles. writ. ; cf. Kypke and HiUjenfeld on Gal. 1. c.) * ιτροθιιμία, -ar, ή, {πρόθυμος), fr. Hom. down ; 1. zeal, spirit, eagerness ; 2. inclination ; readiness of mind : so Acts xvii. 11 ; 2 Co. viii. 11 sq. 19 ; ix. 2.* ττρόθυμοϊ, -ov, {πρό and θυμός), fr. [Soph, and] Hdt. down, ready, viilling: Mt. xxvi. 41 ; Mk. xiv. 38; neut. το πρόθυμον, i. q. ή προθυμία : Ro. i. 15, as in Thuc. 3, 82 ; Plat. legg. 9 p. 859 b.; Eur. Med. vs. 178; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 13; Hdian. 8, 3, 15 [6 ed. Bekk.] (on which cf. Irmisch) ; 3 Mace. v. 26.* τροθνμωϊ, adv., fr. Hdt. and Aeschyl. down, willingly, with alacrity : 1 Pet. v. 2.* ιτρόΐμο;, see πρώιμος. ιτρο-Ισ-τημι : 2 aor. inf. προστηναι ', pf . ptcp. προίστώς ; pres. mid. προισταμαι ; fr. Hom. II. 4, 156 down ; 1. in the trans, tenses to set or place before ; to set over. 2. in the pf. plpf. and 2 aor. act. and in the pres. and impf. mid. a. to be over, to superintend, preside over, [A.V. ridel, (^° ί""• Hdt. down) : 1 Tim. v. 17; with a gen. of the pers. or thing over which one presides, 1 Th. v. 1 2 ; 1 Tim. iii. 4 sq. 12. b. to be a protector or guar- dian ; to give aid, (Eur., Dem., Aeschin., Polyb.) : Ro. xii. 8 [(al. with A.V. to rule ; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. ; Stuart, Com. excurs. xii.)]. c. to care for, give attention to . w. a gen. of the thing, καΧών ίργων. Tit. iii. 8, 14 ; for exx. fr. prof. writ, see Kypke and Losner; [some (cf. R.V. mrg.3 would render these two exx. profess honest occu τροκαΧΐω 540 Ίτροοραω potions (see tf>yov. ! ) ; lull cf. ίμγον. 3 p. 248"• mid. and Field, Otiura Norv. pars iii. ail 1. c.].* προ-καλ€'ω, -ω : pres. mid. ptcp. ιτροκαΧοΰμτνο^ ', to call forth [cf. προ, d. a.] ; Mid. to call forth to one's self, esp. to challenge to a combat or contest with one ; often so fr. Horn, down ; hence to provoke, to irritate : (ial. v. 26 [(«t ωμότητα κ. όργήν, Ildian. 7, 1, 11, 4 ed. Bekk.)].* ιτρο-κατ-αγγίλλω : 1 aor. πμοκατηγγίΐλα ; pf. pass. ptcp. πρηκατηγγίλμ^νοί \ to announce In /' rehiin.il (tliat a thing will be) : of prophecies, — foil, bv an ate. with inf. Acts iii. 18 ; W, .\cts iii. 24 Kec. ; πίρί tivos, Acts vii. 52. To pre-announce in the sense of to promise : τί, pass. 2 Co. ix. 5 Hec. (Josepli. antt. I, 12, 3; 2, 9, 4 ; eccles. writ.) * Ίτρο-κατ-αρτίζω : 1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. plur. προκαταρ- τΐσωσι; to prepare [A. V. make «/)] beforehand : τί, 2 Co. i\. 5. (Hippocr. ; eccles. writ.) * ιτρά-καμαι ; (προ [ij. v. d. α•] and κf^μaί) ; fr. Horn, down ; 1. prop, to lie or be placed before (a person or thing), or in front (often so in Grk. writ.). 2. to be set before, i. e. a. to lie placed before the e)/es, to tie in sight ; to stand forth : with a pred. nom., δύγμα, as an e.xample, Jude 7 (καλό» ίηό&(ΐγμά σοι πρόκίΐται, Jo- .seph. b. j. 6, 2, 1). b. i. ([. to be appointed, destined: προκαμίνη t λπίί, the hope open to us, offered, given, Heb. vi. I s ; used of those things which by any appointment are destined to be done, borne, or attained by any one ; so προκί'ίμ^νο^ ayiuv, Ileb. xii. 1 ; προκίΐμ. χαρά, tlie des- tined joy (see αντί, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase τά ίβ\α προ- κίΊσθαι occurs often in prof. writ. fr. Ildt. down ; cf. Bleek; Br. an die Heb. ii. 2 p. 268 sqq.). c. to be there, be present, be at hand, (so that it can become actual or available) : 2 Co. viii. 12.* ιτρο-κηρύσ-σ-ω : 1 aor. ptcp. προκήρυξα! ; pf• pass. ptcp. νροκίκηρυγμίνος ; 1. to announce or proclaim bij herald beforehand (Xen. resp. Lac. II, 2 ; Isae. p. 60, 2 ; Polyb., Joseph., Plut., al.). 2. univ. to announce beforehand (of the herald himself. Soph. El. 684) : Ίι;- σοΰν Χριστό», i. e. his advent, works, and sufferings, pass. Acts iii. 20 Hec. ; τί, Acts .xiii. 24 (Ίίριμία! τα peWovra rij πόλ« Sftra προ(κήρνξ(ν, Joseph, antt. 10, 5, 1).* ■π-ρο-κοττή, -ηί, η, (ττροκότττω, q. v.), progress, advance- ment: Phil. i. 12, 2ύ; 1 Tim. iv. 15. (Polyb., Diod., Jo- seph., Philo, al. ; rejected by the Atticists, cf. Phrynich. ed. Lob. p. 85 ; [Sir. 11. 1 7 ; 2 Mace. viii. 8].) * •«•ρο-κό-πτω : inipf. προίκοτττον; fut. προκόψω', 1 aor. προ(κοψα ; to beat forward ; 1. to lengthen out by hammering (as a smith forges metals) ; metaph. to promote, forward, further: Hdt., Eur., Thuc, Xen., al. 2. fr. Polyb. on intransitively [cf. B. 145 (127); W. 251 (236)], to go forward, advance, proceed; of time: η νυξ vpofKoYfv, the night is advanced [A. V. is far spent"], (Γρο-νο€ω, -ώ; pres. mid. προνοούμαι; fr. Hom. down; 1. ίο perceive before, foresee. 2. to provide, think of beforehand: τινός (see Matthiae §348, vol. ii. p. 821 [but cf. §379 p. 862]; Kuhner §419, 1 b. ii. p. 325 ; [.'elf §496]; AV. §30, 10 c.), to provide for one, 1 Tim. v. 8 (where Τ Tr txt. AVH mrg. προνοΛται) ; πιρι Ttfos, Sa[). vi. 8. Mid. with an ace. of the thing, i. q. to lake thought for, care for a thing: Ro. xii. 17 ; 2 Co. viii. 21 (where L Τ Tr WH have adopted προνοοϋμ(ν).* irp<5voia, -ας, η, (πρόνοος), fr. [Aeschyl., Soph.], Hdt. down, forethought, provident care : Acts xxiv. 2 (3) [A.V. providence] ; ποίοΟ/ίαι πρόνοιάν τίνος, to make provision for a thing (see ποιίω, I. 3 p. 526* top), Ro. xiii. 14.* ιτρο-οράω, -ω; pf. ptcp. ττροίωροκώί ; impf. mid. (.Acts ii. 25) προωρώμην, and without augm. (see όμοιόω, init.) προορώμην L Τ Tr WH; fr. Hdt. down ; 1. to see - before (whether as respects place or time) : τικό, Acts ■προορίζω b41 ττροϊ xxi. 29. 2. Mid. (rare use) to keep he/ore one's eyes : metaph. ηνά, with ίνώττιόν μου added, to be mindful of onf always. Acts ii. 23 fr. Ps. xv. (.wi.) 8.* ιτρο-ορίζω : 1 aor. προώρισα ; 1 aor. pass. ptcp. προορι- σθίντα ; to predetermine, decide beforehand, Vulg. [e.xc. in Acts] praedestino, [R. V. to foreordain] : in the N. T. of God decreeing from eternity, foil, by an ace. with the inf. Acts iv. 28 ; τί, with the addition of πρό τών αιώνων, 1 Co. ii. 7; Tied, with a pred. ace, to foreordain, appoint beforehand, Ro. viii. 29 si\. ; τίνα tls τι, one to obtain a thing. Eph i. 5 ; προορισθίντίς sc. κληρωβηναι, Eph. i. 11. (lleliod. and eccl. Avrit. [Ignat. ad ICph. tit.]) ' ■π-ρο-ΐΓάίτχω : 2 aor. ptcp. προπαθόντ€ς ; (ο suffer before : 1 Th. ii. 2. (Hdt., Soph., Thuc, Plat., al.) * ΊΓρο-ιτάτωρ, -opos. 6, (πατήρ), a fore father, founder of a family or nalwn : llo. iv. 1 L TTr AVH. (Pind., Hdt., Soph., Eur., Plat., Dio Cass. 44, 37; Lcian., al. ; Plut. consol ad ApoU.c 10; Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 4 ; b.j.5,9,4, Ev. Xicod. 21. 24. 25 sq.; eccl. writ.)* ΐΓρ<ΗΐΓί'μΐΓω ; impf. προ(π(μπον ; 1 aor. act. wpoi-nepij/a ; 1 aor. pa.ss. ιιρο(π€μφθην: fr. Horn, down ; 1. to send befiire. 2. to setid forward, bring on the icay, ac- company or escort: rtva, 1 Co. .\vi. 6, 11, [al. associate these exx. with the group at the close] ; with («ΐ (for tKe'iiTf) added, Ro. xv. 24; fir with an ace, of place. Acts XX. 3S ; 2 Co. i. 16 [here R. V. set forward (see below)] ; «wf e|ai TJjr πόλ(ως, Acts xxi. 5. to set one forward, fit him out with the requisites for his journey: Acts xv. 3 [al. associate this ex. with the preceding]; Tit. iii. 13; 3 Jn. 6 ; 1 Mace. xii. 4, cf. 1 Esdr. iv. 47.* irpcrriT^s, -is, (πρό and πίτω i. e. πίπτω) ; 1. fall- in/j forwards, headlong, sloping, precipitous : Pind. Nem. 6, 107; Xen. r. eq. 1, 8; al. 2. precipitate, rash, reckless : Acts xix. 36 ; 2 Tim. iii. 4, (Prov. x. 14 ; xiii. 3 ; Sir. ix. 18 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 ; and often in Grk. writ.).* προ-πορ€νω; 1 fut. mid. ΐΓροπορ(νσομαι', to send before, to make to precede, (Ael. nat. an. 10, 22 [var.]) ; mid. to go before, to precede, [see πρό, d. a.] : rivas (on which gen. see AV. § .52, 2 c), to go before one, of a leader, Acts vii. 40; npo πρόσωπον tivos (after the Ilebr., Ex. xxxii. 34; Ueut. iii. 18 ; ix. 3), of a messenger or a herald, TA. i. 76 ; (of the van of an army, 1 Mace. ix. 11 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 23; Polyb.). [Ct ίρχομαι, dn.y irpis, a preposition, i. q. Epic προτϊ, from πρό and the adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German ror . . . hin [Curtius §:lSiJ); it is joined I. with the Accusative, to, towards, Lat. ad, denot- ing direction towards a thing, or position and state looking towards a thing (AV. §49h. p. 404 (378)): it is used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a movement is directed : προς τίνα or τι, a. prop, after verbs of going, departing, running, com- ing, etc. : άγω, Jn. xi. 15 ; αναβαίνω. Mk. vi. .51 ; Jn. xx. 17; Acts XV. 2; ανακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xviii. 21 ; ανίρ-χομαι. Gal. i. 1 7 [1, Tr mrg. άττίρ;^.]; απέρχομαι, yix. ψ xiv. 25 [Rec] ; Mk. iii. 13, etc. ; προς ίαντόν, to his house, I-k. xxiv. 12 [Tom. LTrbr. WH rejectthe vs.; Tr reads πρ. αυτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζω* (see 2 b. below)] ; Jn. .xx. 10 [T TrauroOt, WH αύτ. (cf. s. v. αΰτοΰ sub fin.)] ; ylveaOai προς τίνα, to come to one, 1 Co. ii. 3 ; xvi. 10; διαπίράω, Lk. xvi. 26 ; ΐγγίζω, Mk. xi. 1 ; Lk. xix. 29 ; ίΐσίρχομαι, Mk. vi. 25 ; Lk. i. 28 ; Acts x. 3 ; [προς τ. Αν8ίαν, into the house of L. Acts xvi. 40 (Rec. fir)]; etc. ; Rev. iii. 20 ; (Ισπορ(ίομαι, Acts xxviii. 30 ; emropd- ομαι, Mt. iii. 5 ; Mk. i. 5 ; ίξίρχομαι, Jn. xviii. 29, 38 ; 2 Co. viii. 17; Heb. xiii. 13; ΐπιστρίφω, to turn (one's self), Acts ΪΧ. 40 ; 2 Co. iii. 16 ; 1 Th. i. 9 ; ίπισυνά•γ(σβαι, Mk. i. 33 ; ίρχομαι, Mt. iii. 14 ; vii. 15, and often ; ΐ)κω, Jn. vi. 37; Acts xxviii. 23 [Rec.]; καταβαίνω, Acts x. 21 ; xiv. 11 ; Rev. xii. 12; μιταβαίνω, -T η xiii. 1 ; όρθρίζω, Lk. xxi. 38; παραγίνομαι, Mt. iii. 13; Lk. vii. 4, 20; viii. 19; xi. 6 ; [xxii. 52 Tdf.] ; πορίίομαι, Mt. x. 6 ; Lk. xi. 5 ; Jn. xiv. 12, etc. ; σννάγ(σθαι, Mt. xiii. 2; xxvii. 62 ; ilk. iv. 1 ; vi. 30; vii. 1 ; συντρίχ^ιν. Acts iii. 11 ; υπάγω, Mt. xxvi. 18 ; Mk. V. 19 ; Jn. vii. 33 ; .xiii. 3 ; xvi. 5, 10. 16 [T Tr WH om. L br. the cl.], 17 ; κατ^υθίνιιν την oSov, 1 Th. iii. 11 ; also after [kindred] nouns : f ίσοδοΓ, 1 Th. i. 9 ; ii. 1 ; προσ- αγωγή, Eph. ii. 18. after verbs of moving, lead- ing, sending, drawing, bringing, directing: 5yα. Acts ix. 2; xxii. 5; 2 Co. iii. 1 : ίντολη. Acts xvii. 1.5 ; άvάheιξtt, Lk. i. 80 ; κάμπτω τα γόνατα, Eph iii. 14; ΐκπιτάνννμι τας χι'ψα!, Ro. χ. 21 (fr. Is. Ixv. 2); πρόσωπον προς πρόσωπον, face (turned) to face, i. e. in immediate presence, 1 Co. xiii. 12 (after the Hebr., Gen. xxxii. 30; Judges vi. 22); στόμα προς στόμα, mouth (turned) to mouth, i. e. in each other's presence, 2 Jn. 12; 3 Jn. 14, (see στόμα, 1) ; λαΧΰνττροςτοοίς, the mouth being put to the ear, Lk. xii. 3. after verbs of adding, joining to; προστιθίναι τίνα προς Toir πατίρας. to lay one unto. i.e. bury him by the side of, his fathers. Acts xiii. 36 (after the Hebr., 2 K. xxii. 20; Judg. ii. 10); θάπταν τίνα προς τίνα. Acts v. 1 0. after verbs of s a y i η g (because speech is directed towards some one), invok- ing, swearinir, testifving, making known: Λν. an ace. of the pers., ανοίγω το στόμα, 2 Co. vi. 1 1 ; f ιποχ. Lk. i. 13, and very often by Luke ; Jn. iv. 48 ; vii. 3, etc. ; Heb. i. 13; \α\ίω, Lk. i. 19,55; u. 18, etc.; 1 Th. li. 2 ; Heb. V. 5 ; xi. 18 ; Χίγω, Lk. v. 36, etc. ; Jn. ii. 3 ; iv. 15, etc. ; Heb. vii. 21 ; φημί, Lk. xxii. 70; Acts ii. 38 [R G] ; x. 28, etc. ; 8ιαλί>ο/*αι, Acts xxiv. 12; αποκρίνομαι, Lk ΊΤρΟ^ 542 ΊΤρο^ iv. 4 ; Acts iii. 1 2 ; ^ίομαι, Acts viii. 24 ; βοάω, Lk. xviii. 7 [U GL]; aipdv φωνήν, Acts iv. 24 ; (ΰχομαι, 2 Co. xiii. 7 ; όμνυμι, Lk. i. 73; μαρτύς (Ίμι, Acts .\iii. 31 ; xxii. 15; δημηγομίω, Acts xii. 21 ; κατηγορίω, Ιο accuse Ιο, bring, as it were, to the judge by accusation, Jn. v. 4o; (μφανίζω, Acts xxiii. 22; -γνωρΐζίται, be made known unto, Phil. iv. 6. also after [kindred] substantives [and phrases] : απολογία, .addressed unto one. Acts xxii. 1 ; Xd-yns, 2 Co. i. IS; Xnyos παρακλήσίωί. Acts xiii. 15; o\ayos -γίνεται τ-ρ'Ίς τίνα, Jn. χ. 35 ((Jen. xv. 1,4; Jer. i. 2, 1 1 ; xiii. 8 ; Ezek. vi. I ; Hos. i. 1); γίιΐ€ται φωνή, Actsvii. 31 Rec; x. 13, 15; yiverat (nayyfXia, Acts xiii. 32 and Kec. in xxvi. 6 [where L Τ Tr Wll ftj] ; προσίνχή, Ro. xv. 30 ; 8(ησΐ!, l!o. X. 1; προσφ(ρ(ΐν δ(ήσ(ΐ!, Ileb. v. 7. προς άλλ^λουί after άΐ'τιβαλλίΐκ λόγους, Lk. xxiv. 17; Βιαλαλ(ΐν, Lk. vi. 1 1 ; 5ιαλίγ€σύαι, Mk. ix. 34 ; Βίαλογίζια-θαι, Mk. viii. 1 G ; iiVfiK, Lk. ii. 15 [(L nirg. Τ WII λαλίΐκ)] ; xxiv. 32 ; Jn. xvi. 1 7 ; xix. 24 ; λι'γιιν, Mk. iv. 41 ; Lk. viii. 25 ; Jn. iv. 33 ; Acts xxviii. 4 ; όμίλίΐν, Lk. xxiv. 14 ; crυλλa\fΊv. Lk. iv. 36. τΓροΓ ίαυτου! i. q. πρΰί άλλήλου;: after συζητ(ΐν, Mk. i. 27 [T \VH txt. read simply αϋτοίς (as subj.)] ; ix. IG ; Lk. xxii. 23 ; eiVciv, Mk. xii. 7 ; Jn. xii. 1 9 ; Xiyfiv, Mk. xvi. 3; ΰγανακτί'ιν, [K. \ . had indignation amnnr/ them- ie/ye.•!, saying], Mk. xiv. 4 Τ WH (cf. Tr) ; see 2 b. be- low, b. of a time drawing towards a given time [cf. f. below] : ττροί ia-iripav ίστίν, towards evening, Lk. xxiv. 29 (Gen. viii. 11 ; Zech. xiv. 7 ; Plato de rep. 1 p. 328 a.; Joseph, antt. 5, 4, 3; npos ήμ€ραν, Xen. anab. 4, 5, 21 ; Plato, conviv. p. 223 c.) ; [πρΟ! σάββατον. Mk. xv. 42LTrtxt.]. c. metaph. of mental direction, with words denoting desires and emotions of the mind, to, towards : ev&eiKvufiv πραντητα. Tit. iii. 2 ; μακροθυμιΐν, 1 Th. V. 14 ; ήπιοί, 2 Tim. ii. 24 ; ΐχθρα, Lk. xxiii. 12; πιποί- θησιν e^fiv, 2 Co. iii. 4 ; [«'λτη'δα 'ίχ. Acts xxiv. 15 Tdf.] ; πίστις, 1 Th. i. 8; παρρησία, 2 Co. vii. 4 ; 1 Jn. iii. 21 ; v. 14 ; with verbs signifying the mode of bearing one's self towards a pers., ίργάζ^σθαι το αγαθόν, G.al. vi. 10; Troifii/ τά αυτά, Eph. vi. 9 (Xen. mem. I, 1, G). of a hostile direction, against; so after άνταγωνίζ(σθαι, Ileb. xii. 4; στηναι, Eph. vi. 11 ; λακτίζιιν, Acts ix. 5 l\ec. ; xxvi. 14, (see Kfvrpov, 2) ; πάλι;, Eph. vi. 12 ; μάχίσθαι, Jn. vi. 52 ; διακρίνομαι. Acts .xi. 2 ; γογγυσμόί, Acts vi. 1 ; βλασφημία, Rev. xiii. 6 ; πικραίν(σθαι. Col. iii. 19; ίχαντι, Acts xxiv. 19; ΐχ€ΐν ζήτημα, xxv. 19; μομφήν, Col. iii. 13; πράγμα, 1 Co. vi. 1 ; λόγον (see λόγος, I. C), Acts xix. 38 ; (xfiv προς Tiva, lo hare something to bring against one [R. V. whereivilh lo ansirer'], 2 Co. v. 12 ; τα [which Tr txt. AVII om.] πμός τίνα, the things to be said against one, Acts xxiii. 30 [R G Tr WH ; here may be added προς πλη- σμονήν σαρκός, against (i.e. to check) the indulgence of the flesh. Col. ii. 23 (see η-λ))σμο»ή)]. d. of the issue or en d to which anything tends or leads : ή ασθίν^ια ουκ ίστι προς θάνατον, .Τη. xi. 4 ; άμαρτάνίΐν, άμαμτία προς θάνα' τον, 1 Jn. ν. lGs(]. ; α στρ^βλοΰσι προς την idiav αυτών απωλ(ΐαν, 2 Pet. iii. 16; τά προς την ΐΐρήνην sc. όντα, — now the things which tend to the restoration of peace f .A . V. conditions of peace"], Lk. xiv. 32 ; now, which tend to the attainment of safety [A. V. which belong unto peace], Lk. xix. 42 ; τά προς ζωήν και ciafiitiav, Ι^Α. V. that pertain 10110], 2 Pet. i. 3 ; πρΐις δόξαν τω θ(ω, 2 Co. i. 20; τοϋ κυρίου, 2 Co. viii. 19. e. of an intended end or jjurpose: προς νονθίσίαν τινόί, 1 Co. χ. 11 ; as other e.\.\. add, Mt. xxvi. 1 2 ; Ro. iii. 26 ; xv. 2 ; 1 Co. vi. 5 ; vii. 35 ; xii. 7; xiv. 12, 26 ; xv. 34 ; 2 Co. iv. C ; vii. 3; xi. 8; Eph. iv. 12; iTim. i. 16; Ileb. vi. II; ix. 13 ; προς τι, to what end, for what intent, Jn. xiii. 28 ; προς την ίλιημοσύνην, for the purpose of asking alms, Acts iii. 10 ; προί τό with an inf. in order lo, etc. : Mt. V. 28 ; vi. 1 ; xiii. 3υ ; xxiii. 5 ; xxvi. 1 2 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; 2 Co. iii. 13 ; Eph. vi. 1 1 ; 1 Th. ii. 9 ; 2 Th. iii. 8, also RG in Jas. iii. 3. f. of the time for which a thing has been, as it were, appointed, i.e. during which it will last ; where we use our for (Germ, filr or aiif) [cf. b. above}: προς καιρόν (Lat. nd lempus, Cic. de off. 1,8, 27 ; de amicitia 15, 53; Liv. 21, 25, 14), i. e. for a season, for a while, Lk. viii. 13; 1 Co. vii. 5; irpos καιρόν ώρας, [R. V. _/();• ίί ,s7ii9?•/ season], 1 Th. ii. 1 7 ; προς ώραν. for a short time, for an hour, Jn. v. 35 ; 2 Co. vii. 8 ; (ial. ii. 5; Philem. 15; πρϊις ολίγας ήμΐρας, IIcl). .\ii. 10; προς τό παρόν, for the present, ibid. 11 (Tluio. 2, 22; Plato legg. 5 p. 736 a. ; Joseph, antt. C, 5, 1 ; IMiiUi. 1, 3, 13 [5 ed. Bekk.] ; Dio Cass. 41, 15) ; προς ολίγον, for a little time, Jas. iv 14 (Lcian. dial. deor. 18, 1 ; Aelian V. h. 12, 63). 2. it is used of close proximity — the idea of direction, though not entirely lost, being more or less weakened ; a. answering to our a/ or i^ (Germ, nn) ; after verbs of fastening, adhering, moving(/rt): δ^δίσθαι πρίίς την Bvpav.^ik. \\. A', προσ- κυλλασθαι, Mk. χ. 7 RG Tr (in mrg. br.) ; Eph. v. 31 RG WH txt. ; προσκόπτ(ΐν, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11 ; κύσθαι, i. q. to be brought near to, Mt. iii. 10 ; Lk. iii. 9, [(cf. 2 l\Iacc. iv.33)]; TtflfVai, Acts iii. 2 ; [iv. 37 Tdf. (al. η-αρά)] ; add, β(βλήσθαι, Lk. xvi. 20 ; τά προς Trjv θνραν, the fore-court [see θνμα. Ά.], Mk. ii. 2; eivai προς την θάλασσαν (prop, towards the sea [A. V. bg the sea]), .Mk. iv. 1 ; θ(ρμαί- νισθαι προς τό φως, turned to the light [R. V. in the light], Mk. xiv. 54 ; καθήσθαι προς τό φως, Lk. xxii. 56 ; ίίση}«ι προς TO μνημύον, Jn. XX. 11 Rec. ; cf. Fritzsche on Alk. p. 201 sq. b. i. q. (Lat. apud) with, with the ace. of a person, after verbs of remaining, dwelling, tarry- in g, etc. (which reijuire one to be conceived of as always turned towards one), cf. Fritzsche u. s. : after fivai, Mt. xiii. 5G; Mk. vi. 3; ix. 19; xiv. 49; Lk. ix. 41 ; .In.i. 1 sq.; 1 Jn. i. 2 ; 1 Th. iii. 4 ; 2 Th. ii. 5 ; iii. 1 ; παρ(Ίι>αι, Acts xii. 20; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20; παρουσία. Pliil. i. 26 ; diapeveiv, CJal. ii. 5 ; παραμίν(ΐν, 1 Co. xvi. G ; f irt- pivdv, ibid. 7 ; Gal. i. 18 ; καθίζ^σθαι, Mt. xxvi. 55 [R G L Tr br.] ; ΐνδημΰν, 2 Co. v. 8 ; κατ€χ(ΐν τίνα προς ίαυτύν, Philem. 1 3. προ? ΐμαυτόν, etc., (apud animum meum), vith miiself etc., (2 Mace. xi. 13 ; exx. fr. Grk. writ, are given in Passow s. v. I. 2 p. 1 157• ; [[>. .and S. s. v. C. I. 5]), συλλογίζομαι, Lk. XX. 5 ; πρησίΰχομαι. Lk. xviii. 11 [Tdf. om. πρΟΓ e., Grsb. connects it with σταθ(ίς]•, ατγανακτάν, Mk. xiv. 4 [(cf. la. fin.); θαυμάζίΐν, Lk. xxiv. 12 (ace. to some; see above, 1 a. ad init.)]. Further, ποκ'ιν τι πρός% τίνα, Mt. xxvi. 18; ΐχω χάριν προς τίνα. Acts ii. 47; καυ• τρος 543 Ίτροσα/γω χημα (χ. πρ- Τ. to have whereof to glory with one (prop, turned 'toward' one), Ro. iv. 2 ; παράκλητον προς τίνα, I Jn. ii. 1. 3. of relation or reference to any person or thing; thus a. of fitness: joined to adjectives, αγαθή!, Eph. iv. 29 ; ϊτοιμοί. Tit. iii. 1 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15 ; Ικανός, 2 Co. ii. 16 ; hwaros, 2 Co. .x. 4 ; (ξηρτι- σμϊνος, 2 Tim. iii. 1 7 ; ωφίΚιμος, 1 Tim. iv. 8 ; 2 Tim. iii. 16 ; αδόκιμος, Tit. i. ItJ ; avfideTOs, Acts xxvii. 12; XfuKor, white and so ready for, Jn. iv. 3a ; τα προς την Xpeiav sc. άνά-γκαια, [R. V. such things as we needed^, Acts xxviii. 10. b. of the relation or close connec- tion entered (or to be entered) into by one person with another: π€ριπατ(1ν προς (Germ, im Verkehr mit, [in intercourse with (A. V. toward)'\ ; cf. Bnhdy. p. 265 ; Passow s. V. I. 2 p. 1157*; [L. and S. s. v. C. I. 5]) τίνα. Col. iv. 5 ; 1 Th. iv. 12 ; άναστρίφ^σθαι, 2 Co. i. 12 ; of ethical relationship (where we use with), άσΰμφωνος προς άΧ\η\ονς, Acts xxviii. 2-3 ; κοινωνία, σνμφώνησις προς τίνα or τι, 2 Co. vi. 15 sq. ; (Ιρήνηνΐχιιν [see (Ιρηνη, 5], Ro. v. 1 ; σννζί^ησιν ΐχ^ιν προς τον θίόν, -Vets xxiv. 16 ; Βιαθήκην (ντϊΧλομαι προς τίνα, lleb. ix. 20 [see £ντ(\Κω, fin.] ; Sia- ^ήκην διατίθημι. Acts iii. 25, (in Grk. writ, σννθηκας, σπον- 8άς, σνμμαχίον ποιΛσθαι προς τίνα, and similar expres- sions ; cf. Passow [or L. and S.] u. s.) ; μη ταπείνωση . . . προς υμάς, in my relation to you [R. V. before], 2 Co. xii. 21 ; προς ov ημΐν 6 \όγος (see λόγος, II. 5), Heb. iv, 13. Here belongs also 2 Co. iv. 2 [A. V. to every man's con- science], c. icilh regard to (any person or thing), with respect to, as to ; after verbs of saying: προς τίνα, Mk. xii. 12; Lk.xii.41; xviii. 9; xix. 9; xx. 19; Ro.x. 21; Heb. i. 7 sq. ; προς τό δεϊκ προσιύχίσθαι, Lk. xviii. 1 ; tVt- TpcVeix, γράφ(ΐν Tt προς τι, Mt. xix. 8 ; Mk. x. 5 ; άποκρι- θηυαί τι προς τι, Mt. xxvii. 14 ; άνταποκριθηναι, Lk. xiv. 6 ; τι (poiprv προς ταϋτα, Ro. viii. 31, (Xen. mem. 3, 9, 12; anab 2, 1, 20). d. pertaining to: τα προς τον Sea» (see β(6ς, 3 γ.), Ro. xv. 1 7 ; Ileb. ii. 1 7 ; v. 1 ; τΊ προς ημάς; sc. ίστίν', what is that to us f i. e. it is none of our busi- ness to care for fhat, Mt. x.xvii. 4 ; also τί προς σί ; Jn. xxi. 22, 23 [here Tdf. om.]. e. in comparison (like Lat. ad) i. q. in comparison with : so after άξιος (q. v. in a.), Ro. viii. 18 {ov Χογισθήσίται crfpor προς αυτόν. Bar. iii. 36 (35) ; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666 ; [B. § 147, 28]). f. agreeably to, according to : προς a (i. β.προς ταΰτα a) ΐπραξ^, 2 Co. v. 10 ; ποιβΐι/ προς το θίΚημά τίνος, Lk. xii. 47; 6ρθοπο8ΰν προς την αληθίίαν. Gal. ii. 14. Here belong Eph. iii. 4 ; iv. 14. g. akin to this is the use of ττρός joined to nouns denoting desires, emo- tions, virtues, etc., to form a periphrasis of the adverbs [cf. W. § 51, 2 h.] : προς φθόνον, enviously, Jas. iv. 5 ([on this pass, see φθόνος] : προς ϋργην i. ((. οργίλως. Soph. El. 369 ; προς βίαν i. q. βιαίως. Aeschyl. [Prom. 208, 353, etc.] Eum. 5 ; al. ; προς ήΒονην και προς χάριν, pleasantly and graciously, Joseph, antt. 12, 10, 3 ; [other ex.x. in L. and S. s V. C" III. 7]). n. with the Dative, at, near, hard by. denoting close local proximity (W. 395 (369 sq.)) ; so six times in the N. T. (much more freq. in the Sept. and in the O. Γ. Apocr.) : Mk. v. 1 1 G L Τ Tr WH £R. V. on the moun- tain side] ; Lk. xix. 37 ; Jn. xviii. 16 ; xx. 11 (where Rec. has προς τό μν.), 12 ; Rev. i. 13. m. with the Genitive, a. prop, used of that from which something proceeds; b. (Lat. a parte i. e.) on the side of; hence tropically προς τίνος dvai or {ιπάρχ€ΐν, to pertain to one, lie in one's interests, be to one's advantage : so once in the N. T. τούτο προς τής ίμιτίρας σωτηρίας ΰπάμχίΐ, conduces to [Α. V. is for] your safety, Acts xxvii. 34. {ΚροΙοΌς ΐΚπίσας προς ίωυτοΰ τον χρψ σμον eivai, Hdt. 1, 75 ; οΰ προς της ύμίτίρας δόξης, it will not redound to your credit, Thuc. 3, 59 ; add. Plat. Gorg. p. 459 c.; Lcian. dial. deor. 20, 3 ; Dion. Hal. antt. 10, 30; Arr. exp. Alex. 1, 19, 6; cf. Viger. ed. Herm. p. 659 sq.; JIatthiae p. 1385 sq. ; [L. and S. s. v. A. TV.] ; W. 374 (350).) IV. in Composition irpoj signifies 1. direction or motion to a goal : προσάγω, προσεγγίζω, προσέρχομαι^ προστρίχω. 2. addition, accession, JeiiV/«; προσ- ανατίθημι, προσαπίΐΚ(ω, προσοφιιΚω. 3. vicinity: προσεδρεΰω. προσμίνω. 4. our on, at, as in προσ- κόπτω ; and then of things which adhere to or are fas- tened to others, as προσηΧόω, προσπήγννμι• 5. to or for, of a thing adjusted to some standard : πρόσκαιρος. Cf. Zeune ad Viger. ed. Herm. p. 666. •π-ρο-σάββοτον, -ου, τό, the day before the sabbath : Mk. XV. 42 R G Τ WH [L Tr txt. προς σάβ. (cf. προς, I. 1 b.)]. (Judith viii. 6 ; [Ps. xcii. (xciii.) heading; Nonn. paraph, loan. 19, 66; Euseb. de mart. Pal. 6, 1].)' ττροσ-αγορίύω : 1 aor. pass. ptcp. προσαγορ^υθίίς ; to speak to, to adilress, accost, salute, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Aris- tph., Xen., Plat., al.) ; esp. to address or accost by some name, call by name : τινά with a pred. ace, and in the pass, with a pred. nom. (1 Mace. xiv. 40; 2 Mace. xiv. 37), Heb. V. 10. (to give a name to publicly, to style, τινά or τί with a pred. ace, Xen. mem. 3, 2, 1 ; Γάϊος'ΐοΰλιος Καίσαρ 6 Sia τάς πράξξΐς προσαγορίνθΐΐς θεός, Diod. 1, 4; add [Sap. xiv. 22] ; 2 Mace. iv. 7 ; x. 9 ; xiv. 37 ; φροϋριον . . . Kai- σάρίίαν ΰπ' αΰτοϋ προσαγορευθίν, Joseph, antt. 15, 8, 5.) Cf. Bleek, Brief an d. Hebr. ii. 2 p. 97 sq.* ΐΓρθ(Γ-ά'γω; 2 aor. προσήγαγον; 1 aor. pass, προσήχθην (Mt. xviii. 24 LTrWH); fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 3"")pn, iJ'jri, sometimes for Χ'ίΠ ; 1. transitively, to lead to, bring, [see πρής, IV. 1] : τίνα Zibe, Lk. ix. 41 : τινά Tivi, one to one [cf. W § 52, 4, 14], Mt. xviii. 24 L Tr WH ; Acts xvi. 20 ; to open a icay of access, ηνά τω θεώ. for [Α. V. to bring] one to God, i. e. to render one acceptable to God and assured of his grace (a fig. borrowed from those who secure for one the privilege of an interview with the sovereign), 1 Pet. iii. 18 [note- worthy is the use, without specification of the goal, in a forensic sense, to summon (to trial or punishment), Acts xii. 6 ΛλΉ txt. (where al. προάγω, q. v. 1)]. 2. in- transitively (see άγω. 4), to draw near to, approach, (Josh, iii. 9; Jer. xxvi. (xlvi.) 3, etc.) : τινί. Acts xxvii. 27 [(not WH mrg.)], where Luke speaks in nautical style phe- nomenally, the land which the sailor is approaching seeming to approach him ; cf. Kuinoel [or Wetstein] ad loc. ; [see προσανίχω 2, and προσαχίω].' Ίτροσα'γω'γη 544 Ίτροσΐρ^άζομ,αί προσ-αγωγή, -ψ, ή ; 1• 'Ae ad of hringing Ιο, a moiring to, (Time, Aristot., Polyb., al.). 2. access, approach, (Ildt. 2, 58; Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 45) [al., as Meyer on Uo. as below (yet see Weiss in the Gth ed.). EUic on Eph., insist on the transitive sense, introduction']: els την χάριν, Ro. V. 2 ; ίο God, i. e. (dropping the figure) that friendly relation with God whereby -we are acceptable to him and have assurance that he is favorably disposed towards us, Eph. ii. 18; iii. 12.* ΐΓροσ--αιτ€'ω, -ώ ; 1. to ask for in addition [(see irpos, IV. 2) ; Pind., Aeschyl., al.]. 2. to approach one with supplications, (Germ, anhetteln [to importune; cf. irpo'r, IV. 4]), to ask alms, ([lldt.], Xen., Arstph., Eur., Plut., al): Mk. .κ. 46RGL; Lk. .xviii. 35 (Avhere LT Tr WII have ίπαίτών) ; Jn. ix. 8.* ιτροσ-αίτη;, -ου, 6, η tie(j(jar : Mk. χ. 46 Τ Tr WII ; Jn. ix. 8 (where for the Rec. τυφλοί). (Plut., Lcian., Diog. Laert. , Doric for προσηχίω, to resound : Acts xjvii. 27 WII mrg. (see their App. p. 151; al. προσ- ayfti», q. v.), of the roar of the surf as indicating nearness to land to sailors at night.*] προίΓ-δαπανάω, -ω : 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. sing, προσ- 8αΓανητΐ]{, Ιο spend besides [cf. προς, IV. 2], Vulg. super- erogo: τι, Lk. x. 35. (Lcian., Themist.) * ΐΓροσ--8(Όμαι ; depon. pass, lo want besides, need in aildi• lion, [cf. πρόί, IV. 2]: προσ^(όμ(νΟ! rti/os, "quom nuUiua boni desideret accessionem" (Erasmus), [A. V. as though he needeil anything]. Acts xvii. 25. (Xen., Plat., S(if. προσ(8(χύμην; 1 aor. προσ(8(ξάμην : 1. as in (irk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down, lo receive to one's self, lo admit, lo give access to one's self : τινά, to admit one, receive into intercourse and companionship, tovs άμαρτωΧούί, Lk. xv. 2 ; to re- ceive one (coming from some place), Ro. xvi. 2 ; Phil. ii. 29, (1 Chr. xii. 18) ; τί, to accept (not to reject) a thing offered : ού προσ^• Ιο reject, Heb. xi. 35 ; πρησ^ίχονται ϊλπί&α, to aduiit (accept) hope, i. e. not to repudiate but to entertain, embrace, its substance. Acts xxiv. 15 [al. refer this to the next head (R. V. t.xt. look for)] ; not to shun, to bear, an impending evil [A. V. look the spoiling etc.], Heb. x. 34. 2. as fr. Horn, down, lo expect [A. V. look for, icait for] : τινά, Lk. xii. 36 ; τί, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. ii. 25, 38; xxiii. 51 ; [Acts xxiii. 21]; Tit. ii. 13; Jude 21 ; rat e'nayyfXiar, the fulfilment of the promises, Ileb. xi. l.'i Lchm. [Cf. Sf'^o/jat, fin.]* irpocrSoKau), -ά> ; impf. 3 pers. p\ur. προσ(8όκων (Act» xxviii. 6); (the simple verb is found only in the form δο«ΰω; πρΟ! [(j. v. IV. 1] denotes mental direction); fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down ; to expect (whether in thought, in hope, or in fear) ; to look for, wail for : when the preceding context shews who or what is expected, Mt. xxiv. 50 ; Lk. iii. 15 ; xii. 46 ; Acts xxvii. 33 ; xxviii. 6 ; τινά, one's coming or return, Mt. xi. 3 ; Lk. i. 21 ; vii. 19 sq. ; viii. 40; Acts x. 24; τί, 2 Pet. iii. 12-14 ; foil, by an ace. with infin. Acts xxviii. 6 ; foil, by an infin. be- longing to the subject, Acts iii. 5.* προσ-δοκία, -as, ij, {προσδοκάω), fr. Thuc. and Xen. down, expectation (>vhether of good or of evil) : joined Ιοφόβο! (Plut. Ant. 75; Demetr. 15) with a gen. of the object added [W. § 50, 7 b.], Lk. xxi. 26 ; τού λαοί (gen. of subject), the expectation of the people respecting Peter's execution. Acts xii. 11.* irpo(r8p€'|XU, see προστρίχω. •π-ροσ-ίάω, -ώ ; to permit one lo approach or arrive : Acta xxvii. 7 [R. V. txt. lo suffer further; (cf. npos, IV. 2; Smith, Voyage and Shipwreck of St. Paul, 3d ed., p. 78 ; Hackett ad loc.)]. Not found elsewhere.* ιτροσ-ίγγίζω : 1 aor. inf. προσ(γγίσαι ; lo approach unto [πρόί, IV. 1] : with the dat. of a pers. [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14], Mk. ii. 4 [where Τ Tr mrg. WII προσ€νίγκαι]. (Sept.; Polyb., Diod., Lcian.) * προσΕδρΕΰω; (wpoatSpos sitting near, [cf. πρόι, IV. 3]) ; 1. prop, lo sit near [(Eur., al.)]. 2. lo attend assiduously : τώ θυσιαστήρια (see παρ(8ρ(ίια), 1 Co. ix. 1 3 Rec. ; Protev. Jac. 23, 1 (where we also find the var. παρ^δρ(ίω) ; rij θ(ραπ(1α ToC θ(θΰ, Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 7, 1 ; ταΊς φίΧοπονίαΐ!, Aristot. pol. 8, 4, 4 p. 1 338', 25 ; ro'is πράγ- μασι, Dem. p. 14, 15 [i. 6. Olynth. 1, 18]; with dat. of pers. lo be in attendance upon, not to quit one's side, Jo- seph, c. Ap. 1, 9, 1 ; [cf. Dem. 914, 28].* •Kpov-tpyiloyLox: 1 aor. 3 pers. sing, ποοσηρνάσαη νροσ^ργοίίαι 545 ττροσειτχομαι Ι II G Tr), προσηργάσ. (L Τ WH ; see ίρτγάζομαι, init.) ; 1. to work besides (Eur., Plut.). 2. by working or Trading to make or gain besides : Lk. xlx 16 (Xen. Hell. 3, 1, 28).• ΐΓροα•-«ρχομ.αι ; impf. 3 pers. plur. προσήρχοντο (Acts xxviii. 9) ; [fut. 3 pers. sing, πpoσf\fίσ€τaι, Lk. i. 1 7 WH mrg.] ; 2 aor. 3 pers. plur. προσήλθαν and [so L Tr WH in Mt. ix. 28; xiii. 36; xiv. 15; TTrWIl in Mt. v. 1 ; Lk. .xiii. 31 ; WH in Mt. xix. 3 ; x.xi. 23 ; Jn. xii. 21] in the Alex, form προιτηλθαν (see απέρχομαι, and ίρχομαι) ; pf. προσ(\ήλυΰα (Heb. xii. 18, 22) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Ildt. down; Sept. for 2-\D and Uii; to come to, to approach, [ττρ.Ίί, IV. 1]; a. prop, absol., Mt. iv. 11; Lk. [i. 17 WHrarg.]; ix.42; xxiii.36; Acts viii. 29 ; .x.xviii. 9 ; προσήλθαν Xe'yon-fs•, Lk. xiii. 31 ; with rhetorical ful- ness of description (.see άνίστημι, Π. 1 c. [also ίρχομαι, p. 2.50" hot.]) the ptcp. προσιλθών is joined to a finite verb which denotes a different action : Mt. viii. 2 L Τ Tr WH, 19, 25; ix. 20; xiii. 10, 27; xiv. 12; xv. 12, 23; xvi. 1; xvii. 7 [RG]; xix. 16; xxv. 20, 22, 24; x.wi. 39TTr WH mrg. (ace. to a reading no doubt corrupt [cf. Scri- vener, Introd. p. 16]), 50, 60, 73 ; xxviii. 2, 9, 18; Mk. i. 31 ; X. 2 ; xii. 28 ; [xiv. 35 Tr Wllmrg.] ; Lk. vii. 14 ; viii. 24, 44; ix. 12, 42; x. 34; xx. 27 ; wiii. 36 ; Acts xxii. 26 sq. ; προσέρχομαι foil, by an intin. indicating the reason why one has drawn near, Mt. xxiv. 1 ; Acts vii. 31 ; xii. 13 [here Wll nir,'. προηλθι] ; with a dat. of the place (exx. fr. Grk. auth are given in Passow s. v. 1 a. p. 1 190*; [L. and S. s. v. L 1]), Heb. xii. 18, 22; with the dat. of a pers. (see Lexx. u. s.), Mt. v. 1 ; viii. 5 ; ix. 14, 28 ; xiii. 36; xiv. 15; xv. 1, 30; .xvii. 14,24; xviii. 1 ; xix. 3; xx. 20; .\xi. 14, 23 ; xxii. 23 ; .xxiv. 3; .\xvi. 7, 17, 69; Jn. xii. 21 ; Acts x. 28 ; xviii. 2 ; xxiv. 23 Rec. ; [with «Vi and the ace. Acts .xx. 13 Tr WH mrg.]. The ptcp. -ηροσ- €λθων αΰτώ with a finite verb (see above) occurs in Mt. iv. 3; xviii. 21 ; xxi. 28, 30; xxvi. 49; xxvii. 58; .ilk. vi. 35; xiv. 45; Lk. xx. 27; xxiii. 52; Acts ix. 1; xxiii. 14. b. trop. o. προσίρχ- τω θ^ω, to draw near to God in order to seek his grace and favor, Heb. vii. 25 ; xi. 6; τώ θράνω τη! χάριτο:, Heb. iv. 16; without τώ θ(ώ, Heb. χ. 1, 22, (in the Ο. Ύ.προσίρχ., simply, is used of the priests about to offer sacrifices, Lev. xxi. 17, 21 ; Deut. xxi. 5 ; with the addition of προ! θιύν, of one about to ask counsel of God, 1 S. xiv. 30; with rois θ^οΊς, of suppliants about to imp'ore the gods, Dio Cass. .56, 9) ; προί Χριστοί•, to attach one's self to Christ, to come to a participation in the benefits procured by him, 1 Pet. ii. 4 [cf. W. § 52, 3]. β. i. q. to assent to (cf. Germ. Iieltreten ["haX. accedere; Eng. come (over) to. used fig.]) : ΰγιαίνονσι λόγοις, 1 Tim. vi. 3 [Tdf. προσίχ^ται, ([. v. 3]. ■ΐΓροσ--«νχή, -Tjt, ή, (προσίνχημαι), Sep), for n^SP, i. q. (νχη προς τον θίόν [cf. πρόί, IV. 1] ; 1. prayer ad- dressed to God : Alt. xvii. 21 [T WH om. Tr br. the vs.] ; xxi. 22; Mk. ix. 29 ; Lk. xxii. 45 ; Acts iii. 1 ; vi. 4 ; x. 31; Ro. .xii. 12; 1 Co. vii. 5; Col. iv. 2; plur.. Acts ii. 42; X.4; Ro.i.lO(9); Eph.i.l6; Col.iv.l2; 1 Th. i. 2; Philem.4, 22; iPet. iii. 7; iv. 7; Rev. v. 8 ; viii. 3,4 (where τα'ις πpoσfvχais is a dat. commodi,/or, in aid of, 35 the prayers [W. §31, 6 c.; cf. Green p. 101 sq.]) ; oikos προσ(υχη!, a liouse devoted to the offering of prayer to God, Mt. x.\i. 13; Mk. xi. 17 ; Lk. xix. 46, (Is. Ivi. 7 ; 1 Mace. vii. 37) ; προσιυχη κα\ δίησκ. Acts i. 14 Rec.; Eph. vi. 18; Phil. iv. 6, (1 Iv. viii. 38; 2 Chr. vi. 29; 1 Mace. vii. 37; on the distinction between the two words see Βίησί!) ; plur., 1 Tim. ii. 1 ; v. 5 ; η πρ- τοϋ θ(οΰ, prayer to God, Lk. vi. 12 ((ϋχαριστία θ(οϋ, Sap. xvi. 28; cf. reff. in πίστις, 1 a.) ; προς τον θάνίπίρ [L Τ Tr WH Trepi] Tivos, Acts xii. 5 ; plur. Ro. .xv. 30 ; πρασίυχί} προσ• (ύχ(σθαι, a Hebraistic expression (cf. W. § 54, 3; [B. § 133, 22 a.]), to pray fervently, Jas. v. 17. 2. α place set apart or suited for the offering of prayer ; i. e. a. a synagogue (see συνα-γω-γή, 2 b.): 3 Mace. vii. 20 [ace. to tlie reading 7rpoσίυχ^^' ; see (Jri'/nHi, Com. in loc] ; Philo in Flaccum § 6 [also § 14]; leg. ad Gaium §§ 20, 43, 46 ; Ju- venal, sat. 1, 3, 2 HI ; συνά•γονται πάντες els την προσ^νχήν, μίγιστον οίκημα παλυν οχλυν €πώΐζασθαι ^υνάμίνον, Jo- seph, vita § 54. b. a place in the open air where the Jews were wont to pray, outside of those cities where they had no synagogue ; such places were situated upon the bank of a stream or the shore of the sea, where there was a supply of water for washing the hands before prayer: Acts xvi. 13, 16; Joseph, antt. 14, 10, 23, cf. Epiph. haer. 80, 1. Tertullian in his ad nationes 1, 13 makes mention of the "orationes litorales" of the Jews, and in his de jejuniis c. 16 says " Judaicum certe jeju- nium ubique celebratur, cum omissis templis per omnt lilus quocunque in aperlo aliquando jam preces ad caelum mittunt." [.Tosephus (c. Apion. 2, 2, 2) quotes Apion as representing Moses as offering αίθριοι πρόστυχοι.'] Cf. De Wette, Archaologie, § 242; [.SV/iiVi-^r, Zeitgesch. §27 vol. ii. p. 369 sqq.]. Not used by prof. auth. except in the passages eiteil above from Philo. .Tosephus. and Ju- venal [to which add Cleomedes 71. 16 : cf. Bneckh, Corp. inscrr. ii. 1004 no. 2114 b. and 1005 no. 2114 bb. (A. D. 81), see Index 8. v.].* •Ίτροσ-ίνχομαι ; depon. mid. ; impf. προσ-ηυχόμην ; fut. προσίύξομαι; \ Άον.προσηυ^άμην; [on the augm. see WH. App. p. 162; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 121]; fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; Sept. for SHann ; to offer prayers, to pray, (everywhere of prayers to the gods, or to God [cf. ^ίησκ, fin.]): absol.,Mt.vi.'5-7,9; xiv.23; xxvi. 36, 39, 44; Mk. i. 35 ; vi. 46 ; xi. 24 sq. ; xiii. 33 [L Τ WH om. Tr br. the cl.]; xiv. [32], 39; Lk. i. 10; iii. 21 ; v. 16; vi. 12; ix. 18, 28 sq.; xi. 1 sq. ; .xviii. 1, 10; xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts i. 24: vi. G ; ix. 11,40; x.9, 30; xi. 5; xii. 1 2 ; xiii. 3 ; xiv. 23 ; xvi. 25 ; xx. 36 ; xxi. 5 ; xxii. 1 7 ; xxviii. 8 ; 1 Co. xi. 4 sq. ; xiv. 14 ; 1 Th. v. 1 7 ; 1 Tim. ii. 8; Jas. V. 13, 18 ; foil, by λί-γων and direct disc, con- taining the words of the prayer, Mt. xxvi. 39, 42; Lk. xxii. 41 ; προσ^νχ. with a dat. indicating the manner or instrument, 1 Co. xi. 5 [W. § 31 , 7 d.] ; xiv. 14 sq. [cf. W. 279 (262) sq.] ; μακρά, to make long prayers, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec. ; Mk. xii. 40 ; Lk. xx. 47 ; iv πνιϋματι (see πν(ϋμα, 4 a. p. 522• mid.), Eph. vi. 18 ; iv πν. άγ'ιω. Jude 20 ; προσίυχϊι (see πpoσfvχή, 1 fin.), Jas. v. 1 7 ; προσήχ- with the ace. of a thing, Lk. xviii. U ; Ro. viii. 26 [cf. W. ττροσβχω 546 ττροσκαΧέω §41 b. 4 b. ; Β. § 139, 61 c] ; ΐπί τίνα, over one, ϊ. β. with hands extended over him, Jas. v. 14 [cf. \V. 408 (381) n.] ; sc. iVi rtva, Mt. xix. 13. as commonly in Grk. writ. with the dat. of the pers. to wliom the prayers are offered [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14] : Mt. vi. G; 1 Co. xi. 13, (Is. xhv. 1 7) ; π(ρί with the gen. of a pers., Col. i. 3 [R G Τ Wll t.vt.] ; 1 Th. V. 25 ; Ileb. xiii. 18 ; irrep with the gen. of a pers., Mt. v. 44 ; Lk. vi. 28 [where Τ Wll Tr mrg. wfpl (see irepi, 1. c. y-, also ίπίρ, I. G) ; Col. i. 3 L• Tr Wll mrg. (see reff. as above), 0] ; πμοσιύχ. foil, by ίνα, wil/i the )dcsi(jn of, 1 Co. xiv. 13, cf. Meyer in loc. [W. 400 (428)] ; itlie thing prayed for is indicated by a following Iva (see lira, II. 2 b.) : Mt. xxiv. 20; xxvi. 41; Mk. xiii. IS; xiv. 35, 38; Lk. xxii. 46, [but in Mt. xxvi. 41; Mk. xiv. 38; (Lk. xxii. 46?), iva is more com. regarded as giving the aim of the twofold command preceding] ; τοΰτο "iva, I'liil. i. 9 ; wfpi Tivos iva, Col. iv. 3 ; 2 Th. i. 1 1 ; iii. 1 ; Inep Ttvos iva. Col. i. 9 ; Ιπ€ρ Tivos οπωΓ, .las. v. 16 L WII txt. Tr mrg. ; nfpi tivos όπως. Acts viii. 15, (οπωί [q. v. II. 2] seems to indicate not so much the contents of tlie pray- er as its end and aim) ; foil, by an inf. belonging to the subject, Lk. xxii. 40 ; foil, by τοΟ with the inf., Jas. v. 1 7.* ■ΊΓροϊΓ-βχω; impf . 7Γροσ6Ϊ;(οϊ' ; ιΛ.ττροσίσχηκα] [pres. mid. 3 pers. sing. προσίχ(ται (1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf.)] ; to turn to [cf . Trpos, I V. 1 ], i. e. 1. ίο brini/ to, bring near ; thus very freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down with vavv (quite as often omitting the vaiv) and a dat. of place, or foil, by npas with an ace. of place, to bring a ship to land, and simply to touch at, put in. 2. a. τον νουν, to turn the mind to, attend to, be attentive : τινι, to a person or thing, Arstph. eqq. 503 ; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Joseph., Lcian., Plut., al. ; once so in the Bible, viz. Job vii. 17. The simple 7rpoffe;(«i'i-ii'i (Sept. for Tm7\, also for ['ΙΚΓΙ), with τον νουν omitted, is often used in the same sense from Xen. down ; so in the N. T. [cf. W. 593 (552) ; B. 144 (126)] : Acts viii. 6 ; xvi. 14 ; Ileb. ii. 1 ; 2 Pet. i. 19, (1 Mace. vii. 1 1 ; 4 Mace. i. 1 ; Sap. viii. 1 2) ; in the sense of caring for, providing for. Acts x.\. 28. b. προσ- ίχω ('μαντώ, Ιο attend Ιο one's self, i. e. to give heed to one's self (Sept. for "TDEiJ, to guard one's self, i. e. to beware, Gen. xxiv. 6 ; Ex. x. 28 ; Deut. iv. 9 ; vi. 1 2, etc.) : Lk. xvii. 3; Acts v. 35 [cf. B. 337 (290) ; W. 557 (518) ; yet see tVi, B. 2 f. a.] ; with the addition of από twos, to be on one's guard against, beware of, a thing [cf. B. § 147, 3 {άπ6, 1. 3 b.)] : Lk. xii. 1 (Tob. iv. 12 ; [Test. xii. P.atr., test. Dan 6]) ; also without the dat. προσ(χ. από tivos ■ Mt.vii. 15; x. 17; .xvi. 6, 1 1 sq. ; Lk. xx. 46, (Sir. vi. 13; xi. 33; xvii. 14; xviii. 27; ['Teaching' etc. 6, 3; 12,5]); foil, by μή with an inf., to take heed lest one do a thing, Mt. vi. 1 ; (μαντώ, μήποτ€ with the subjunc. Lk. xxi. 34 ; absol. to give attention, take heed: Sir. xiii. 13; Barn, ep. 4,9; 7, 4. 6. [9] ; foil, by πώς. Barn. ep. 7, 7 ; by the interrog. τί, lb. 15, 4 ; Iva, ib. 16, 8 ; "iva μήποτι. Barn. ep. 4, 13 [var. ; tra μή, 2 Chr. xxv. 16] ; [μήποτι. Barn. ep. 4, 14]. 3. sc. (μαυτόν, to apply one's self to, attach one's self to, hold or cleave to a person or a thing, [R.V. mostly ffive heed'\ : with the dat. of a pers. to one, Acts viii. 1 sq. ; 1 Tim. iv. 1 ; τώ ίπισκόπα ηρ. κα\ τω πρ(σβντ(ρΐω και ίια- κάνοιι, Ignat. ad Philad. 7, 1 ; ad Polyc. 6, 1 ; with the dat. of a thing, μνθυΐί, 1 Tim. i. 4 ; Tit. i. 14 ; [mid. ίγιαίνονσι Xoyois, 1 Tim. vi. 3 Tdf. (al. πμοσίρχ(ται, (j. v. b. ^i.)] ; to be given or addicted to : οΊνω, 1 Tim. iii. 8 (τρνφ;ι, Julian. Caes. 22 [p. 326 ed. Spanh.]; τρνφη κα\ μίθιι, I'olyacn. strateg. 8, 56) ; to devote tlioughl and effort to : tji άνα-γνώ- σ(ΐ κτλ. 1 Tim. iv. 13 ; τω θνσιαστηρίω, [A.V. give attend- ance}, Heb. vii. 13, (^vavTixois, Thuc. 1,15; for other exx. fr. Grk. writ, see Passow s. v. 3 c. ; [L. and S. s. v. 4 b.]).• ιτροσ-ηλόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ptcp. «τροσι^λώσαΓ ; to fasten with nads to, nail to, [cf. vpos, IV. 4] ; τϊ τώ στανρώ. Col. ii. 14. (3 Mace. iv. 9; Plat., Dem., Polyb., Dio'd., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Lcian., al.) * 'π•ρθ(Γήλυτθ5, -ου, ό, (fr. ηροσίρχομαι, pf. προσ(λη\νθα, cf. Β. 74 (64); [W. 24. 26. 97 (92)]); 1. α new- comer [Lat. advena; cf. πpόs, IV. 1]; α stranger, alien, (Schol. ad ApoU. Rhod. 1, 834; Sept. often for ΊJ [cf. Philo de monarch. 1, 7 ad init.]). 2. α proselyte, i. e. one who has come over from a Gentile religion to Judaism (I^uther, Judengenosse): Mt. xxiii. 15; Acts ii. 11 (10) ; vi. 5 ; xiii. 43. The Rabbins distinguish two classes of proselytes, viz. ρΊϊΠ 'Ii proselytes of right- eousness, who received circumcision and bound them- selves to keep the whole Mosaic law and to comply with all the requirements of Judaism, and IJ^.E'n 'Ί3 prose- lytes of the gate (a name derived apparently from E.x. XX. 10; Deut. V. 14; [xiv. 21]; xxiv. 16 (14), 21 (19)), who dwelt among the .Jews, and although uncircumcised observed certain specified laws, esp. the seven precepts of Noah (as the Rabbins called them), i. e. against the seven chief sins, idolatry, blasphemy against God, homi- cide, unchastity, theft or plundering, rebellion against rulers, and the use of " flesh with the blood thereof." [Many hold that this distinction of proselytes into classes is purely theoretical, and was of no practical moment in Christ's day; cf. Lardner, Works, xi. 306-324; cf. vi. 522-533 ; Schiirer in Riehm as below.] Cf. Leyrer in Ilerzog xii. p. 237 sqq. [rewritten in ed. 2 by Delitzsoh (xii. 293 sqq.)], Sterner m Schenkel iv. 629 sq. ; [BI?. DD.] ; Schiirer, Neutest. Zeitgesch. p. 644 [(whose views are somewhat modified, esp. as respects classes of pros- elytes, in his 2te Aufl. § 31 V. p. 567, and liis art. ' Pros- ely ten ' in Riehm p. 1 240 sq.)] and the bks. he refers to.• ιτρόίτ-κανροϊ, -OK, (i q. ό πρ6s καιρόν ων), for a season [cf. προς, IV. 5], enduring only for a while, temporary: .\It. .xiii. 21 ; Mk. iv. 17 ; 2 Co. iv. 18 ; Ileb. xi. 25. (4 .Mace. XV. 2 ; Joseph, antt. 2, 4, 4 ; Dio Cass., Dion. Hal., [.Strabo 7, 3, 11], Plut., Ildian. ; ό παρών κα'ι πρόσκαιροι κόσμος, Clem, homil. 20, 2.) * •τΓρο(Γ-καλ€'ω, -ώ : Λϋ(1., pres. ιτροσκαλοΟμαι; 1 aor. ττροίτ^ (<α\(σάμην; \)f. προσκίκλημαι; from [Antipho, Arstph., Thuc], Xen., Plat, down; to call to; in the N.T. found only in the mid. [cf. B. § 135, 4], to call to one's self; to bid to come to one's self: Ttra, a. prop. : Mt. x. 1 ; XV. 10,32; xviii. 2, 32; xx. 25; Mk. iii. 13, 23; vi. 7; viL 14; viii. 1,34; x. 42; xii. 43; xv. 44 ; Lk. vii. 18 (19); xv. 26 ; xvi. ■> ; xviii. 16 ; Acts v. 40; vi. 2 ; xiii. 7 ; xx. 1 [RG ττροιτκαρτβρβω 547 ΤΤρΟ' σκοτΓτω L]; xxiii. 17, 18, 23; Jas. v. 14. b. metaph. God is said προσκα\(Ισθαι the Gentiles, aliens as tliey are from him, by inviting and drawing them, through the preach- ing of the gospel, unto fellowship with himself in the Messiah's kingdom, Acts ii. 39 ; the Holy Spirit and Christ are said to call unio themselves [cf. W. § 39, 3] those preachers of the gospel to whom they have decided to intrust a service having reference to the extension of the gospel ; foil, by an inf. indicating the purpose. Acts xvi. 10 ; foil, by Λί τι, Acts xiii. "2 (where ο is for etj 5, ace. to that familiar Grk. usage by which a prep, pre- fixed to the antecedent is not repeated before the rela- tive ; cf. W. 421 sq. (393); [B. 342 (294)]).* 7Γρθ(Γ-καρτ€ρ€'ω, -ώ ; fut. 7τμοσκαρτ€ρησω ; (καρτεράω, fr. Kaprepos [' strong,' ' steadfast '], of which the root is (to) KUpTos for KpOTot ['strength'; cf. Curtius § 72]) ; to per- secere [' continue steadfaMly''\ in any thing [cf. πρόί, IV. 4] : of persons, with the dat. of a thing, to fjive constant attention to a thinfj. Acts ii. 42 [here Lchm. adds iv (once) in br.] ; ttj προσινχη. Acts i. 14 ; vi. 4 ; Ro. xii. 12 ; Col. iv. 2, (rais θήραις, Diod. 3, 17; tj πόΚιορκΙα, Polyb. 1, 55, 4; Diod. 14, 87; tj καθϋρα, persist in the siege, Joseph, antt. 5, 2, 6) ; with the dat. of a person, to ad- here to one, be his adherent ; to be devoted or constant to one : Acts viii. 13 ; x. 7, (Dem. p. 1386, 6 ; Polyb. 24, 5, 3 ; Diog. Laert. 8, 1, 14) ; ftf n, to be steadfastly atten- tive unto, to give unremitting care to a thing, Ro. .xiii. 6 [cf. Meyer ad loc] ; fv with a dat. of place, to continue all the time in a place. Acts ii. 46 (.Sus. 6) ; absol. to per- severe, not lo faint (in a thing), Xen. Hell. 7, 5, 14; to show one's self courageous, for ρίΠΠΓΙ, Num. .xiii. 21 (20). of a thing, with the dat. of a pers., to be in constant read- iness for one, wait on continualhj: Mk. iii. 9.* ιι•ρο(Γ-καρτ6'ρη<Γΐ5, -(ως, ή, (προσκαρτίρίω), perseverance : Eph. vi. 18. Nowhere else; \_Kouinanoudes, \ίξ. αθησ. s. V.].* προΕΓ-κεψάλαιον, -ου, τό, (fr. πρόί [q. v. IV. 3] and the adj. κίψάλαιο! [cf. κ€φάλαιον]), a pilloir, a cushion : Mk. iv. 38. (Ezek. xiii. 18, 20 ; Arstph., Plat., Pint., al.) • προτ-κληρύω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσικΧηρω- θησαν \ to add or assign to by lot, to allot : προσικληρώ- θησαν τώ Παύλω, were allotted by God to Paul, viz. as disciples, followers. Acts xvii. 4 [W. § 39, 2 fin. ; al. give it a middle force, joined their lot to, attached them- selves to, (.\. V. consorted with) ; cf. leg. ad Gaium § 10 and other exx. fr. Philo as below]. (Plut. mor. p. 738 d. ; Lcian. am. 3 ; freq. in Philo, cf. Loesner, Observv. p. 209 ΐΓρόσ•-κλησ•ΐ5, -far, r\, 1. Ο judicial summons : Arstph., Plat., Dem. 2. an invitation : μη8ίν ποιών κατά πρόσκΚησιυ, 1 Tim. v. 21 L Tr mrg. ; this reading, unless (as can hardly be doubted) it be due to itacism, must be translated by invitation, i. e. the invitation or summons of those who seek to draw you over to their side [see quotations in Tdf. ad loc. Cf. ττρ6σκ\ισΐί.'\ * ΊτροίΓ-κλίνω : 1 aor pass. 3 pers. sing. προσ(κ\ίθη ; 1. trans, (to cause) to lean against [cf. πρόί, IV, 4] (Horn., Pind.). 2. intrans. τινί, to incline towards one, lean to his side or party: Polyb. 4, 51, 5, etc.; 1 aor. pass. προσ(κ\ίθψ> with a mid. signif. to join one's self to one: Acts V. 36 L Τ Tr Wll [(cf. W. § 52, 4, 14)] ; 2 Mace, xiv. 24; ToU SiKaiois προσικλίθη, Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 1027; προσικΚίβητί Tois απόστολοι!, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 4 7, 4 and in other later writ.* ιτρόσ-κλισι;, -(ως,ή, an inclination or proclivity of mind, a joining the party of one, (Polyb., [Diod.]); partiality: κατά πρόσκλισιν, led by partiality (Vulg. in [aliam or] alteram partem declinando), 1 Tim. v. 21 [RGTWHTr txt.] ; κατά προσκΚίσιΐί, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 21, 7; &Ίχα προσκλΐσίω! ανθρωπινή!, ib. 50, 2, cf. 47, 3 sq. (Cf. πρό(Τ• κ'Κτ}σις•) * ΊτροίΓ-κολλάω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass. προσΐκοΚΚηβην ; 1 fut. pass. προσκοΧΚηθήσυμαι ; Sept. for DOT ; to glue upon, glue to, [cf. προς, IV. 4]; prop. Joseph, antt. 7, 12, 4 ; trop. in the pass, with a refiexive force, to join one's self to closely, cleave to, stick to, (Plato) : w. dat. of a pers. (Sir. vi. 34; xiii. 16), Acts v. 36 Rec. (see προσκΚίνω, 2) ; Tji yvvaiKi, Mt. xix. 5 Rec. [al. κοΧΚηθήσ^ται, q. v.] ; Mk. X. 7 Lchm. ; Eph. v. 31 L Τ Tr \Xl\ mrg. ; πρόί τηρ yvv. (fr. Gen. ii. 24), Mk. x. 7 R G Tr txt. ; Eph. v. 31 R G WH txt. [Cf. AV. § 52, 4, 14.] • τΓρ<5<Γ-κο|χμο, -ατοί, τό, (προσ-κόπτω), α stumbling-block, ΐ. e. an obstacle in the way ivliich if one strike his foot against he necessarily stumbles or falls ; trop. that over which the soul stumbles, i. e. by which it is impelled to sin: 1 Co. viii. 9 (Sir. xvii. 25 (20) ; xxxi. (xxxiv.) 19 (16) ; xxxix. 24) ; τιθΐναι πρόσκ. τινι, to put a stumbling- block in one's way, i. e. trop. to furnish one an occasion for sinning, Ro. xiv. 13 [WH mrg. om.] ; ό δια προσκόμ- ματα! ΐσθ'ιων, [A.V.] icho eateth with offence (see δίά, A. I. 2), by making no discrimination as to what he eats oc- casions another to act against his conscience, ibid. 20; Xt^os προσκόμματα! (fr. Is. viii. 14 for •■];: ρκ), prop, a stone against ivhich the foot strikes [A. V. stone oj stumbling], used figuratively of Christ Jesus, with regard to whom it especially annoyed and offended the Jews that his words, deeds, career, and particularly his igno- minious death on the cross, quite failed to correspond to their preconceptions respecting the Messiah ; hence they despised and rejected him, and by that crime brought upon themselves woe and punishment: Ro. ix. 32, 33; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7). (In the Sept. for lypn, Ex. xxiii. 33 ; xxxiv. 12; [cf. Judith viii. 22]. a sore or bruise caused by striking the foot against any object, Athen. 3 p. 97f.; a hindrance [?], Plut. mor. p. 1048 c. [i. e. de Stoic, re- pugn. 30, 8 fin.].) • προΓ-κοιτή, -η!, ή, (προσκόπτω), an occasion of stum- bling [so R.V. (but .\.V. offence)^ : 8ι8ήναι προσκοπην (sc. άλλοΐϊ), to do something which causes others to stumble, i. e. leads them into error or sin, 2 Co. vi. 3 [cf. W. 484 (451)]. (Polyb.; [for ρ^ψ 3 fall, Frov. xvi. 18 Graecus Ven.].)* προίτ-κόίΓΓω ; 1 aor. πρασίκοψα ; to strike against [cf. πρόί, IV. 4] : absol. of those ivho strike against a stone or other obstacle in the path, to stumble, Jn. xi. 9, 10; jrpoi λίθον τον πό8α, to strike the foot against a stone, i. e. προσκύλ,ίω 548 ττροσορμίζω (dropping the fig.) to meet with some harm, Mt. iv. 6 ; Lk. iv. 11, (fr. Ps. xc. (xci.) 12) ; to rush upon, beat ayainut, o! άνιμοι τή οικία, Mt. vii. 27 [L mrg. πμοσίρρηξαν, see προσ- ρήγνυμι]- tv τιι/ι, to be made to stumble hy a thing, i. e. metaph. to be induced to sin, Ko. xiv. 21 [cf. W. 5S3 (54J) ; B. § 151, 23 d.j. Since vre are angry with an obstacle in our path which v/n have struck and hurt our foot against, one is trop. said προσκύπταν, to slumlde at, a person or thing which highly displeases him; thus the Jews are said προσκόψαι τω Χίθω τυΰ ττροσκ• i. c. to have recoiled from Jesus as one who tailed to meet their ideas of the Messiah (see πρόσκομμα), Ro. ix. 32 ; the enemies of Christianity are said πρ- τώ λόγω, 1 Pet. ii. 8 [some (cf. R. V. mrg.) take πρ• here absolutely, and make τω λ. depend on άπαθίω, ([. v. in a.]. (Exx. of this and other fig. uses of the word by Polyb., Uiod., M. Antonin. are cited by I'assow [L. and S.j s. v. and Fntzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. p. 362 Sij.) * Ίτροίτ-κυλΕω : 1 aor. 7τροσ€κνΚισα ; to roll to : η rtvi, Mt. xxvii. liO [where Lchm. inserts inl] ; τί «Vi τι, Mk. xv. 46. (Arstph. vesp. 202.) * ■ΐΓρθ(Γ-κυν£'ω, -ώ ; inipf. προσίκίνουν ; fut. προσκυνήσω ; 1 aur. ττροσίκννησα; fr. Aeschyl. and lldt. down; Sept. very often for ΠΙΠΓΙΠΠ (to prostrate one's self) ; prop. to kiss the hand to (towards) one, in token of reverence : Hdt. 1, 134; [cf. K. F. Hermann, Gottesdienstl. Alter- thiimer d. Griech. §21 ; esp. Uoelemann, Die bibl. Ge- stalt. d. Anbetung in his ' Bibelstudien' i. lOG sqq.] ; hence among the Orientals, esp. the Persians, to fall ujjon the knees and touch the ground with the forehead as an expres- sion of profound reverence, [to make a ' salain '] ; Lat. veneror (Nep. Conon. 3, 3), adoro (Plin. h. n. 28, 5, 25 ; Suet. Vitell. 2) ; hence in the N. T. Oi/ kneeUnij or pros- tration to do homage (to one) or make obeisance, whether in order to express respect or to make supplication. It is used a. of homage shown to men of superior rank : absol., Mt. xx. 20 (the Jewish high-priests are spoken of in Joseph, b. j. 4, 5, 2 as προσκυνοΰμινοι) ; πισων ί'πΐ Tois πόδοΓ προσ(κΰνησ(ν, Acts χ. 25 ; τινί (ace. to the usage of later writ. ; cf. W. 36, 210 (197) ; [B. § 131, 4]; Loh. ad Phryn. p. 463), Mt. ii. 2, 8 ; viii. 2; ix. 18 ; xiv. 33; XV. 25; [xviii. 26]; xxviii. 9, 17 [RG]; Mk. v. C [here AVII Trmrg. have the ace.]; xv. 19; Jn. ix. 3H ; with τ!(σώυ preceding, Mt. ii. 11 ; iv. 9; ϊνώπιον των πο8ά>ν Tims, Rev. iii. 9 ; [it may perh. be mentioned that some would bring in here Heb. xi. 21 προσ(κίνησ(ν cVi τό άκρου τψ ράβ8ου αυτοϋ, explaining it by the (Egyptian) custom of bowing upon the magistrate's staff of office in taking an oath; cf. Chahas, Melanges Egypt. III. i. p. 80 cf. p. 91 sq. ; butseebelow]. b. of homage rendered to (!od and the ascended Christ, to heavenly beings, and to demons: absol. (our to worship) [cf. W. 593 (552)], Jn. iv. 20; xii. 20; Acts viii. 27 ; xxiv. 11 ; Heb. xi. 21 [cf. aboi e] ; Rev. xi. 1 ; πίπτί!!» και προσκυνιϊν, Rev. v. 14; T(«,Jn.iv. 21,23; Acts vii. 43; Heb. i. 6; Rev. iv. 10; vii. 11 ; xi. 16; xiv. 7 ; xvi. 2 ; xix. 4, 20 ; xxii. 8 sq.; Rev. xiii. 4 G L Τ Tr WH (twice [the 2d time WH txt. only]); xiii. 15 GTTrWHtxt. ; xx. 4 Rec. ; πισων eVl πρόσωπον προσκυνήσει τώ υίώ, 1 Co. Xiv. 25 ; πίπτΐΐν cttI τα πρόσωπα κα\ προσκυνύν τω θΐω. Rev. xi. 16 ; preceded by πιπτ(ΐν ίμπρυσθεν των ποδών Tivos, Rev. xix. 10. in accordance with the usage of the older and better writ, with Tifo or W (cf. Matthiae § 412) : Mt. iv. 10 ; Lk. iv. 8; Rev. ix. 20; xiii. 12; xiv. 9, 11 ; also xiii. 4 (Rec. twice; [WH mrg. once]), 8 [where Rec. dal.], 15 R L Wll mrg. ; xx. 4* (where Rec. dat.), 4' (where R"'" dat.) ; Lk. xxiv. 52 RG LTr br. WH reject; (the Sept. also connects the Λvord far more freq. with the dat. than with the ace. [cf. Uoelemann u. s. p. 116 sqq.]); ίνώπιόν Tivot, Lk. iv. 7 ; Rev. xv. 4.* ιτροσ-κυνητήβ, -οϋ, ό, (προσκυνάω), a worshipper : Jn. iv. 23. (Inscrr. ; [eccl. and] Byzant. writ.) * προσ-λαλΐω, -ώ ; 1 aor. inf. τΓροσλι.λί^σοι ; w. τίνί, to spent to : Acts xiii. 43 ; sc. νμ'ιν [some say μοί (see παρα- καλέω, I.)], Acts xxviii. 20. (Sap. xiii. 1 7 ; Theophr., Plut., Lcian.) ' προσ-λαρ,βάνω : 2 aor. inf. προσλαβ(ΐν (Acts xxvii. 34 Rec. see below) ; Mid., pres. προσλαμβάνομαι ; 2 aor. προσ(\αβόμην ; fr. Aeschyl. and lldt. doivn ; to lake to, take in odilition, [cf. προ!, IV. 2] ; in the N. T. found only in the Middle, to take to one's self [cf. B. § 135, 4] : τινά [cf. B. 160sq. (140)]; a. to take as one's companion [A. V. take one unto οηρ] : Acts xvii. 5 ; xviii. 26. b. to take by the hand in order to lead aside [A. V. (simply) take] : Mt. xvi. 22 ; Mk. viii. 32. c. to take or [so A. V.] receive into one's home, with the collateral idea of kindness: Philem. 12 R G, 17; into shelter, Acts xxviii. 2. d. to receive, i. e. grant one access to one's heart ; to take into friendship and inter- course : Ro. xiv. 1 ; xv. 7 ; God and Christ are said προσλαβίσθιιι (to have received) those whom, formerly es- tranged friim them, they have reunited to themselves by the blessings of the gospel, Ro. xiv. 3 ; xv. 7 ; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 49, 6, (cf. Ps. xxvi. (xxvii.) 10 ; Ixiv. (Ixv.) 5 ; Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 24). e. to take to one's self, to take : μη&ίν, [A.V. having taken nothing'} i. e. no food. Acts xxvii. 33; τροφής, (a portion of [A.V.(not R.V.) 'some']) food, cf. B. 160 sq. (HO), ibid. 36 (in vs. 34 GLTTr WH have restored μιταΧαβειν [so R. V. ('to take some food')] for πρησλαβε'ιν).* ■π-ρόσ-ληψίξ [LTTrWII -λι;^\|^ΐΓ, see Μ, μΐ, -(ως, ή. (προσλαμβάνω), Vulg. assum]>tio, a receiving: Ttras, into the kingdom of God, Ro. xi. 15. [(Plat., al.)]* τΓρο<Γ-μ.ί'νω ; 1 aor. ptcp. προσμι'ινα!, inf. προσμύναι ; f r. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down ; a. to remain with [see προς, IV. 3] : with a dat. of the pers. to continue with one, Mt. XV. 32 ; Mk. viii. 2 [here L WH mrg. cm. Tr br. the dat.] ; τώ κυρίω, to be steadfastly devoted to [A. \^. cleave untol the Lord, Acts xi. 23 (Sap. iii. 9 ; Joseph. antt. 14, 2, 1) ; tj χάριτι τοΰ Oeoi, to hold fast to [A. V. continue in} the grace of God received in the gospel. Acts xiii. 43 G LTTr WH ; Sfijaecri κ. προσίυχάϊί, [A.V. to continue in supplications and prayers], 1 Tim. v. 5. b. to remain still [cf. προς, TV. 2], stay, tarrij : Acts xviii. 18 ; foU. by cv with a dat. of place, 1 Tim. i. 3.* ■π-ροσ-ορμΟζω : 1 aor. pass. 3 pers. plur. προσαρμΐσθτισαψ; ιτροοοφεΓΚω 549 ΊτροστίθημΛ (όρμο: a roadstead, anchorage) ; to bring a skip to moor- inys (Ltian. am. 11); esp. so in the mid., prop, to take one's stalion near the shore ; to moor, come to anchor, (Hdt., Dera., Plut., al.) ; the 1 aor. pass, is used in tlie same sense (Arr. exp. Alex. 6, 4 and 20 ; Ael. v. h. 8, 5 ; Die Cass. 41, 48; 64, 1), Mk. vi. 53.* ιτροσ-οφίίλω ; to otve besides [see προΓ, IV. 2] : afavrov, i.e. besides vihat I have just asked of thee thou owest to me even thine oivn self, since it was by my agency that thou wast brought to faith in Christ, Philem. 1 9. (Thuc, Xen., Dem., Polyb., Plut.) * ΊτροίΓ-οχθίζω : 1 aor. προσώχθισα ; to be wroth or dis- pleased icilh : Tiui, Heb. iii. 10, 1 7, (fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 10) ; not found besides exc. in the Sept. for 7J?3, to loathe ; Kip, to spue out ; ]"1p, to be disgusted with, etc. ; add, Sir. vi. 25 ; XXV. 2 ; xxxviii. 4 ; [1. 25 ; Test, xii Patr., test. Jud. §18; Orac. Sibyll. 3, 272]. Profane writ, use o^flf ω, more rarely οχθίζω. trpas denotes direction towards that with which we are displeased [πρόί, IV. 1]. Cf. Dleek, Br. an d. Hebr. ii. 1 p. 441 sq.* ΊΓροίΓ-ιταίω (for the more com. προσπταίω) : 1 aor. προσ- ϊπαισα ; Ιο beat against, strike upon : intrans. ιτροσίπαισαν r§ οικία, Mt. vii. 25 Lchm. ; but cf. B. 40 (34) n. (Schol. ad Aeschyl. Prom. 885 ; [Soph. frag. 310 var.] ; Byzant. writ.) * irpicrircivos, -ov, {πύνα hunger [cf. veivaoy']), very (lit. besides, in accession, [cf. προς, IV. 2; al. (cf. R. V.) do not recognize any intensive force in irpai here]) hun- grij: Acts x. 10. Not found elsewhere.* ΊτροίΤ-ΐΓήγνυμι : 1 aor. ptcp. προσπηξας; to fasten to [see νρός, IV. 4] : Acts ii. 23 [here absol., of crucifixion]. (Dio Cass., al.) * ΐΓρο<Γ-ιι•ΙΐΓτω : impf. προσίπιπτον ; 2 aor., 3 pers. sing. jrpoaeVffff, 3 pers. plur. (Mt. vii. 25) προσίη€σον R G, -σαν Τ Tr WH [see πίπτω, init.], ptcp. fern, προσπίσον- σα ; fr. Horn, down; prop, to fall towards, fall upon, [προς, IV. 1] i.e. 1. to fall forward , to fall down, prostrate one's self before, in homage or supplication : with the dat. of a pers., at one's feet, SIk. iii. 11 ; v. 33; Lk.viii. 28, 47; Acts xvi. 29, (Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 6 ; Polyb., I'lut., al.) ; toU γόνασί τιιόγ, Lk. v. 8 (Eur. Or. 133l'; Plut.) ; προς τους πόδας τινός, I\Ik. vii. 25. 2. to rush upon, beat against : tji οικία (of winds beating against a house), Mt. vii. 25 [not Lchm.; cf. προσπαιω].* 'ΐΓροσ--^οΐ€'ω : ^lid., pres. l>tcp. προσποιηίμαιος (see be- low) ; impf. 3 pers. sing, προσιποκϊτο (Lk. xxiv. 28, for which L txt. Τ Tr WH give the 1 aor. προσ^ποιήσατο) ; in prose writ.fr. Hdt. down; to add to [cf. Germ, hinzu- viachen']•, mid. 1. to take or claim (a thing) to one's self. 2. to cotiform one's self to a thing, or rather to affect to one's self; therefore to pretend, foil, by an inf. [A. V. made as though he would etc.], Lk. xxiv. 28 ; κα- τίΎραφ^ν €is TTjv yrjv μη προσποιονμΐνυς, Jn. viii. G ace. to codd. Ε G Η Κ etc. [cf. Jlatthaei (ed. 1 803) ad loc.]. (So in Thuc, Xen., Plat., Dem., al.; Diod. 15, 46 ; Philo in Place. § 6 ; [in § 12 foil, by ptcp. ; Joseph, c. Ap. 1, 1] ; Ael. V. h. 8, 5 ; Plut. Tininl. 5 : [Test. xii. Patr., test. Jos. §3].)• irpo(r-irop€Uop.ai ; to dratc near, approach : with a dat. of the person approached, Mk. x. 35. (Sept. ; Aristot., Polyb.) • ΐΓροσ•-ρή•γνυ|ΐι, and in later writ. [W. 22] προσρήσσα; 1 aor. προσίμρηξα R G L, προσίρηξα Τ Tr Wll (see P, p) ; to break agaiiisi, tireak by dashing agai7isl : παιδία άπολΛ προσρηγννς πίτραις, Joseph, antt. 9, 4, 6 ; λί'οκτα προσ- ρήξας t'd yii. 6, 9, 3 ; intrans. (cf. W. § 38, 1 ; [B. § 130, 4]): ό ποταμός τη οικία, Lk. vi. 48, [49 ; Mt. vii. 27 Lmrg.]; in pass, τη άκρα ή τα κύματα προσρησσ^ται, Antonin. 4, 49.• ΐΓρο<Γ-τάσ•σ•ω ; 1 aor. προσίταξα ; pf. pass. ptcp. προσΎ€- ταγμίνος ; fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down ; 1. to as- sign or ascribe to. Join to. 2. to enjoin, order, pre- scribe, command : Sept. for niS ; absol. καθώς προσίταζ^, Lk. V. 14 ; with the dat. of a pers., Mt. i. 24 ; xxi. 6 R G Τ ; Ti, ]Mt. viii. 4 ; Mk. i. 44 ; τινί τι, pass. Acts x. 33 ; foU. by an ace. w. inf. Acts x. 48 ; lo appoint, to define, pass. προστ(τα•/μίνοι καιροί. Acts xvii. 26 G L (ed. ster. [larger ed. προς Tcray.]) Τ Tr WH, for the Rec. προτιταγμίνοι. [Syn. : see κ(λ(ύω, fin.] * •ΐΓρο<Γτάτΐ5, -ιδοΓ, ή, (fern, of the noun προστάτης, fr. προΐστημι) ; a. prop, a woman set over others. To. a female guardian, protectress, patroness, caring for the affairs of others and aiding them with her resources [A. X. succourer] : Ro. xvi. 2 ; cf. Passow on the Avord and under προστάτης fin. ; [Schiirer, Die Gemeindever- fassungder Jndcn in Kom, u.s.w. (Leip. 1879) p. 31 ; Hein- rici. Die Christengemeinde Korinths, in Hilgenfeld's Zeitschr. for 1876, p. 517sq.].* ιτροσ-τίθημι; impf. 3 pers. sing. προσ(τί6(ΐ (Acts ii. 47) ; 1 aor. προσΐβηκα; 2 aor. προσίθην, impv. n-poafles (Lk. xvii. 5), inf. προσθύναι, pti]). προσθάς ; Pass., iuipf. 3 pers. plur. προσιτίθιντο ; 1 aor. προσ^τίθην ; 1 fut. προστ(θτ{- σομαι; 2 aor. mid. προσ^θίμην; fr. llom. Od. 9, 3U5 down; Sept. very often for ηρ•, also for ηςΚ, etc. ; 1. prop, to put lo. 2. lo add, i.e. join lo, gather with any company, the number of one's followers or compan- ions : Tiva τη (ΚκΧησία, Acts ii. 4 7 [R G] ; τω κνρίω, Acts V. 14; xi. 24; sc. τώ κνρίω, or το7ς πιστΐνονσιν. Acts ii. 41 ; Hebraistically, προσ^τίθη προς τους πατίρας αϋτοΰ (Judg. ii. 10; 1 Mace. ii. 69), he was gathered lo his fa- thers assembled in Sheol (which is "n-S^'? li'rt Γ\'2, the house of assembly for all the living, .Tob xxx. 23), Acts xiii. 36 (others explain it, he was added to the bodies of his ancestors, buried with Ihcm in a common tomb; but cf. Knobel on Gen. xxv. 8 ; [Bollcher, De inferis, p. 54 sqq.]); i. q. lo add viz. to what one already possesses : τί. Lk. xvii. 5 [ΑΛ'. here increase'] ; jjass., Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 31 ; Mk. iv. 24 ; Heb. xii. 19 \_{μη προστιθηναι αϋτοΐς \oyov, R. V. that no word more should be spoken to them)] ; — to what already exists: (5 νόμος) προσιτύθη, was added to (su- pervened upon) sc. the ΐπαγγιΧία, Gal. iii. 19 RLTTr WH ; t\ (πι Tivi. some thing to (ujion) a thing (which has preceded [cf. i'lri, B. 2 il.]), Lk. iii. 20 : τϊ ΐπί τ(. to a thing that it may thereby be increased, Mt. vi. 27 : Lk. xii. 25. In imitation of the Hebr. (^p;) the mid. (in the Sept. the active also) foil, h) an inf. signifies (to add i. e.) In go on to do a thing, for to do further, do again, (as προστρί)(θ} 550 ΤΓροσωττυΧήτη >it Gen. iv. 2; viii. 12; xviii. 29): προσίθιτο πίμι^^αι (-"ID'l vhuh), he continued to sonil (:ιε lie had already sent), Lk. XX. 11, 12, (i. q• πι'ιλίν airfirrfiXev, Mk. xii. 4) ; προσ- (θ(το σνΚλαβύν και UeTjiov, lie besides apprehended I'eter also [A.V. lie jiruciideil ete.J, Aets xii. 3; in the same way also the ptcj). is used with a finite verb : προσθύί (hfv, i. e. he further spake [A. V. lie added and spnlre], I^k. .xi.x. 1 1 (προσβ(7σα trcKev, ( ien. .x.x.xviii. 5 ; προσθίμινο! ΐ\αβ( yvvaXKa, Gen. xxv. 1) ; cf. \V. § 54, 5 ; B. § 144, 14.* ■irpo(r-Tpe\iu ; 2 aor. act. ptcp. ττροσδραμών ; to run to : Jlk. ix. 15; x. 17; Acts viii. 30. (From Arstph. and Xen. down ; for "pi in Gen. xviii. 2, etc.) * ιτροο-φάγιον, -ου, τό, {προσφαγιΊν [cf. πρόί, IV. 2]), i. q. όψον (on ivhich see ΰψάριον), (in// lli'nuj eaten with bread (Aloeris [ed. Piers, p. 274, \'\: 'ύ^ον άττικωι, προσφάγιον ίλληνικώς) : spoken of fish boiled or broiled, Jn. xxi. 5 (Schol., Lex.x., [Moschion 55 p. 2G ; Roelil, Inscrr. grace. 395 a. 12]). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. etc. p. 697 sq. ; Slurz, Dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 191.• ιτρόσ-φατοϊ, -ox, (fr. ττρό and σφάω or σφύζω; cf. De- lilzscli, Com. on Ilebr. [as below] p. 4 78 ; [cf. Loli. Tech- nol. p. 106]); 1. prop, iately slaughtered, J'reslilt/ killed: Ilom. Π. 24, 757. 2. univ. recently or i-ery Intel ij 7niiile, new. ό86ς, lleb. x. 20 (sofr. Aescliyl. down ; φίλος πρόσφατο!. Sir. ix. 10 ; ουκ ίση παν πρόσφατον νπο τίιν ηλιυν, Eccl. i. 9). Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. S74 sq.* ιτροσ-φάτωϊ, adv., (see the preceding word), lately: Acts xviii. 2. (Deut. xxiv. 7 (5) ; Ezek. xi. 3 ; Judith iv. 3, 5 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 36 ; Polyb., Alciphr., al.) * 'ΐΓρο<Γ-φ€ρω ; inipf. προσ^φίροι/; 1 now προσην^γκα; 2 aor. ίτροσηνΐγκον ', pf. 7Γροσίΐ/ϊίΐΌ;^α ( Ileb. xi. 1 7) ; l*ass., j)res. προσφέρομαι ; 1 aor. προσηνςχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φερω^ ; fr. [Pind.], Aescliyl., and lldt. down; Sept. often for D">pn, also for Χ'3Π, iyun, etc., sometimes also for Π^^-'Π where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 K. xviii. 36 Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring to, lead to : Ttra rim, one to a person who can heal him or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24 ; viii. 16 ; ix. 2, 32 ; xiv. 35 ; xvii. 16 ; ilk. ii. 4 (sc. τινά) TWIITrmrg. ; x. 13; Lk. xviii. 15 ; pass, in Mt. xii. 22 [where L VvH txt. act.] ; xviii. 24 R G Τ ; xix. 13; — one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14; Ttva fVl ras avvayaiyai κα'ι ταί αρχάς, Lk. .xii. 1 1 [ W. § 52, 3] (where Τ Tr txt. WH (Ισφίρωσιν). προσφίρω τ», to bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20 ; τι τινι, to reach or hand a thing to one, Alt. x.xii. 19; Lk. xxiii. 36 [here A.V. offeringi; τι τω στόματί rivos, to put to, Jn. .xix. 29; a thing to one that he may accept it, to offer : χρήματα, Acts viii. 18; δώρα, Mt. ii. 11; used, as often in the Sept., of persons offering sacrifices, gifts, prayers to God (cf. Kurtz, Brief a. d. Hebr. p. 154 sqq.) : τώ βεω σφάγια και θυσίας. Acts vii. 42 ; θυσίαν. Heb. xi. 4 ; 'Κατριίαν, Jn. xvi. 2; προσφίριιν &ωρον or δώρα sc. τω θ(ω, Mt. v. 23, 24 ; viii. 4 ; Heb. viii. 3, 4 ; ix. 9 ; θυσίην. Heb. x. 12 ; plur., Heb. X. 1, 11 ; [pass. ibid. 2; θυσίας (RG -av) κα'ι προσ- φοράς (RG -paw) κα\ ολοκαυτώματα κα\ nepl αμαρτίας, ibid. 8]; δώρ^ τ( κη\ θυιτίας νπΐρ αμαρτιών, to expiate [see VTtfp, L 4] sins, Ileb. v. 1 ; αίμα ΰπΐμ 4αυτοΰ και των τον λαοϋ άγνοημάτων, Heb. ix. 7 ; την προσφοράν ύπίρ Ivht ίκάστου, pass. Acts xxi. 26 ; προσφίριιυ used absol. [cf. W. 593 (552)] : jrfpi τίνος, on account of [see πίρί, I. c. /3.], Mk. i. 44; Lk. v. 14 ; wtpt ToiJ λαοί jrepi [RG ίιπϊρ (see π(ρί, I. c. δ.)] αμαρτιών, to offer ex|)iatory sacrifices for the people, Heb. v. 3 ; rtra, sc. τώ θιώ. to offer up, i. e. immolate, one, Heb. xi. 1 7 ; ίαυτόν, of Christ, lleb. vii. 27 Τ Trmrg. WIl mrg. ; ix. [14], 25 ; προσ(ν(χθ(ίς (the pas- sive pointing to the fact that what he suffered was due to God's will) ibid. 28, (it is hardly to be found in native Grk. writ, used of offering sacrifices ; but in Joseph, antt. 3, 9, 3, we have άρνα και ϊριφου) ; προΓ τίνα (God ) Sffjaeis Τ€ κα\ Ικίτηρίας, lleb. ν. 7 (προσφ(ρ(ΐν δίησιν, Acliill. Tat. 7, 1 ; τω Λω €ϋχήν, Joseph, b. j. 3, 8, 3). 2. The jiass. with the dat. signifies to be borne towards one, to attack, assail; then figuratively, to behave one's self to- wards one, deal with one : is vlotj ϋμ'ιν προσφίριται ό θεός, Heb. xii. 7 (very often so in Attic writ. fr. Thuc. and Xen. down ; Philo de Josepho § 10; de ebrietate §16; Joseph. b.j. 7,8, 1; Ael. v.h. 12, 27 ; Hdian. 1, 13, 14 [7 ed. Bekk.]).* ■π-ροσ-φιλήβ, -if, (προς and φίΧέω), acceptable, pleasing, [X. V. Inre/y] : Phil. iv. 8. (From [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; Sir. iv. 7; xx. 13.)* ττροίΓ-φορό, -or, η, (προσφ(ρω), offering ; i. e. 1. the act of offering, a bringing to, (Plat., Aristot., Polyb.). 2. that which is offered, a gifl, a present, (Soph. O. C. 1270; Theophr. char. 30 sub fin.). In the N. T. a sac- rifice [A.V. offering'], whether bloody or not : Aets .xxi. 26 ; x.xiv. 1 7 ; Eph. v. 2 ; lleb. x. 5, 8, 14, (Sir. xiv. 1 1 ; -xxxi. (xxxiv.) 21 (19) ; xxxii. (xxxv.) 1, 6 (8); once for nnjO, Ps. xxxix. (.xl.) 7) ; π(ρ\ αμαρτίας, offering for sin, expiatory sacrifice, Heb. x. 18 ; with the gen. of the ob- ject, ToC σώματος Ίησοϋ Xp. Heb. .X. 10; των (θνών, the sacrifice which I offer in turning the (ientiles to God, Ro. XV. 16.• τ7ρο(Γ-φων€ω, -ώ ; iinpf. 3 pers. sing, προσιφώνη ; 1 aor. προσεφώνησα ; 1. to call to ; to address by calling : absol., Lk. xiii. 12 ; xxiii. 20 (where L WH add aiToIs) ; Acts xxi. 40, (Horn. Od. 5, 159 etc.) ; with the dat. of a i)ers. [cf. AV.36], Mt. xi. 16 ; Lk. vii. 32; Acts xxii. 2, (Diog. Laert. 7, 7). 2. to call to one's self, summon ; τινά (so the better Grk. writ. ; see Matthiae § 402 b. ; [W. §52,4, 14]), Lk. vi. 13.• ττρ6<Γ-χν(Γΐ%, -(ως, ή, (προσχίω to pour on), a pouring or sprinklinfj upon, affusion : του αίματος, Heb. xi. 28. (Eccles. writ. [e. g. Just. M. apol. 2, 12 χ,. 50 d.].) * ΐΓρθ(Γ-ψοΰω, to touch : τινί [cf. W. § 52, 4, 14], a thing, Lk. xi. 46. (Pind., Soph., Byzant. writ.)* ΐΓροσωίΓολητΓΤί'ω (LT Tr WH -\ημπτ(ω [see M, μ1), -ώ', a Hellenistic verb (derived fr. the foil, word [cf. Win. 33, 101 (96)]), to respect the person (i. e. the external condi- tion of a man), to have respect of persons: Jas. ii. 9.* προσ-ωπο-λήπτης (L Τ Tr WH -λήμτττης [see M, μ]), -ου, ό, (a Hellenistic formation fr. πρόσωπον and λαμβάνω ; see λαμβάνω, I. 4 p. 370' bot.), an accepter [A. V. re- specter] of persons (Vulg. personarum acceptor) : Acts .x. 34. Not found elsewhere [exc. in Chrysost.].* ττροσωτΓολ,ηι^ία 551 •προσωτΓΟΡ ιτρο<Γ<ι>ποληψ(α (L Τ Τγ WH -"Κημψία [see Μ, μ]), -as, ή, (a Hellenistic formation ; [see ττροσωτΓολήτΓΠ/ί]), re- spect of persons ( Vulg. personarum acceplio), partiality, the fault of one who when called on to requite or to give judgment has respect to the outward circumstances of men and not to their intrinsic merits, and so prefers, as the more worthy, one who is rich, high-born, or power- ful, to another who is destitute of such gifts : Ro. ii. 11; Eph. vi. 9 ; Col. iii. 20 ; plur. (which relates to the vari- ous occasions and instances in which this fault shows itself [cf.W. 176 (166); B. § 123, 2, 2]), Jas. ii. 1. (Ec- cles. writ.)* τΓρόϊΓωπον, -ου, το, (fr. ττράί and ώ^, cf. μίτωττον), fr. Horn, down; Sept. hundreds of times for D'JD, also for D"DS, etc. ; 1. a. /Ae /hce, i. e. the anterior part of the human head: Mt. vi. 16, 17; .wii. 2; -xxvi. 67; Mk. xiv. 65 ; Lk. [ix. 29] ; xxii. 64 [T Tr WH cm. Lchm. br. the cl.] ; Acts vi. 15 ; 2 Co. iii. 7, 1.•!, 18 ; [xi. 20] ; Rev. iv. 7 ; ix. 7 ; X. 1 ; τέ πρόσωπον Tijs yf KeVewr, the face with which one is born [A. V. his natural face'\, Jas. i. 23 ; πι'πτίΐΐ'ίπΐ πρόσ. [cf. W. § 27, In.; 122 (116)] and (Vt το πρήσ., Mt. xvii. 6; xxvi. 39; Lk. v. 12; xvii. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 25 ; [Rev. vii. 1 1 Rec. ; ιτίτπ-. eVl τα πρόσ.. Rev. xi. 16 ; vii. 1 1 G L Τ Tr WH] ; άγνοονμΐνύς τινι τω προσωπω, unknown to one by face, i. e. personnlli/ unk'noirii. Gal. i. 22; bereaved of one προσώπω, οΰ καρδία [.V. V. in pres- ence, Jiot in hearti, 1 Th. ii. 17; κατά πρόσωπον, in or towards (i. e. so as to look into) the face, i. e. before, in the presence of [see κατά, II. 1 c] : opp. to απών, 2 Co. x. 1 ; with Tii/os added, before (the face of) one, Lk. ii. 31 ; Acts iii. 13 ; e;^» τινά κατά πρόσωπον, i. e. to have one present in person [A. V. face to facel. Acts xxv. 16; άντίστην κατά πρόσωπον, I resisted him to the face (with a suggestion of fearlessness). Gal. ii. 11, (κατίι πρόσωπον Xeyeiv τους Xo'yous, Polyb. 25, 5, 2 ; add Job xvi. 8 ; but in Dent. vii. 24 ; ix. 2 ; Judg. ii. 14 ; 2 Chr. xiii. 7, άντι- στηναι κατά πρόσ. Ttvos simply denotes to stand afjainat, resist, withstand) ; τα κατά πρόσ. the things before the face, i. e. open, known to all, 2 Co. x. 7. Expressions modelled after the Hebrew : opaf τό πρόσωπον τιι /os, to see one's face, see him personally. Acts xx. 25 ; Co), ii. 1 ; Ihdv, 1 Th. ii. 17 ; iii. 10 ; θ(ωρ(ΐν, Acts xx. 38 [cf. β(ωρίω, 2 a.] ; particularly, βλίπαν τό πρόσ. τοΰ θ(οϋ (see βλΐπω, 1 b. β.), Mt. xviii. 10 ; όραν τ. πρ- τ. θ(οϋ (see όράω, 1), Rev. xxii. 4 ; ίμφανισθηναί τώ προσ. τον θ(οϋ, to appear before the face of God, spoken of Christ, the eternal priest, who has entered into the heavenly sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24 ; in imitation of the Hebr. D'JD-^s* D"J3 we have the phrase πρόσωπον πρός πρόσωπον, face (turned [see πρής, I. 1 a. p. 541'•]) to face (ei&o'v τίνα. Gen. xxxii. 30 ; Judg. vi. 22) : trop. β\ίπω sc. τόνθ(όν, see God face to face, i.e. discern perfectly his nature, will, purposes, 1 Co. xiii. 12; a person is said to be sent or to go προ προσώπου τινός ("3 •}βΊ) [cf. W. § 65, 4 b. fin. ; B. 319 (274)], i.e. before one, to announce his coming and re- move the obstacles from his way, Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. i. 76 ; vii. 27, (Mai. iii. 1) ; ix. 52 ; x. 1 ; jrpo προσ. TWOS» /of time) before a thing. Acts xiii. 24 (so 'J•)'? in Am. i. 1 ; Zech. viii. 10; where the Sept. simply ηρό [cf. προ, b. p. 536' hot.]), πρός φωτισμόν της γνώσιως της δό- ξης τοΰ θίοϋ {'ν προσωπω Ίησοΰ Χρίστου, that we may bring forth into the light the knowledge of the glory of God as it shines in the face of .lesus Christ, 2 Co. iv. 6 (Paul really means, the majesty of God manifest in the person of Christ; but the signification of πρόσωπον is '■face,' and Paul is led to use the word by what he had said in iii. 13 of the brightness visible in the face of Moses). b. countenance, look (Lat. vultus), i. e. the face so far forth as it is the organ of sight, and (bv its various movements and changes) the index of the inward thoughts and feelings : κΧΙναν τό πρόσ. «r την yyv, to bow the face to the earth (a characteristic of fear and anx- iety), Lk. xxiv. 5; Hebraistic phrases relating to the direction of the countenance, the look: το πρόσωπον τού κυρίου ('πι τίνα, sc. (στίν, the face of the Lord is (turned) upon one, i. e. he looks ujion and watches him, 1 Pet. iii. 1 2 (fr. Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 1 7) ; στήριζαν τό πρόσ. (Hebr. UW or □'J3 jnj ; cf. Gesenius, Thes. ii. p. 1109 on the same form of expression in Syriac, Arabic, Persian, Turkish) ToO nopeieadai (Ις with an ace. of the place [A.V. stead- fastly to set one's face to fjo etc. (see στηρίζω, a.)], Lk. ix. 51 ; moreover, even to πρόσ. τινός ί'στι πορΐυόμ(νον els with ace. of place, ib. 53 (το πρόσωπον σου πορ(υόμ(νον €v μ^σω αυτών, 2 S. xvii. 11) ; από προσώπου τινός φ^υ• yav, to flee in terror from the face (Germ. Anblic/c) of one enraged. Rev. xx. 1 1 ; κρύπτιιν τινά etc. (see κρϋτίτω, a.). Rev. vi. 16 ; άνά•^υξις από προσώπου 6foi, the re- freshing which comes from the bright and smiling coun- tenance of God to one seeking comfort, Acts iii. 20 (19) ; on 2 Th. i. 9 see από, p. 59' mid. ; μ(τά τοΰ προσώπου σου, sc. όντα, in the presence of thy joyous countenance [see μίτά, I. 2 b. /3.], Acts ii. 28 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 11); els πρόσωπον των (κκ\ησιών, turned unto [i. e. in (R.V.)] the face of the churches as the witnesses of your zeal, 2 Co. viii. 24 ; iva 4κ ποΧΚών προσώπων . . , δια ττολλών €νχαρι- στηθί/, that from many faces (turned toward God and e.\- pressing the devout and grateful feelings of the soul) thanks may be rendered by many (accordingly, both en ΐΓολλ. προσ- and δια ττολλών belong to (νχαριστηθη [cf. Meyer ad loc. ; see below]), 2 Co. i. 11. άπό προσώπου τινός ("3 'J3'p),/ra)n the sight or presence of one. Acts v. 41; \u. io [here ΑΛ^. before the face; Rev. xii. 14]; (p προσωπω Χρίστου, in the presence of Christ, i. e. Christ looking on (and approving), 2 Co. ii. 10 (Prov. viii. 30) ; [some would render πρόσωπον here and in i. 11 above person (cf. R.V.) : — here nearly i. q. on the part of (Vu\g. in persona Christi) ; there i. q. ' an individual ' (Plut. de garrul. 13 p. 509 b. ; Epiet. diss. 1, 2, 7 ; Polyb. 8, 13, 5 ; 12, 27, 10; 27,6,4; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 1 ; 47,6; Phryn. p. 379, and Lobeck's note p. 380)]. c. Hebrais- tically, the appearance one presents by his wealth or pov- erty, his rank or low condition ; outward circu7nslances, external condition ; so used in expressions which denote to regard the person in one's judgment and treatment of men : βΚίπ^ιν €ΐς πρόσωπον ανθρώπων, Alt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14 ; θαυμάζ(ΐν πρόσωπα, J ude 16 ; \αμβάν(ΐν πρόσωποι •jrp οτίίσσω 552 ττροφητΐύω (tivos), Lk. XX. 21 ; Gal. ii. G, (on ivliich see βλ/πω, 2 c, ύαυμάζω, Χαμβάνω, I. 4). κανχάσθαι eV ττροσώπω και oi καρδία, to glory in those things which they simulate in lout, viz. piety, love, righteousness, although their heart is devoid of these virtues, 2 Co. v. 12, cf. 1 .S. .\vi. 7. 2. the outward uppearance of inanimate things [A. X.face (e.\c. in Jas. as below)]: τοί) ίΊνθυυς, Jas. i. 11 ; τοΰ ονρανοΰ, τη! γη!, Mt. xvi. 3 [here Tbr. WH rejeet the i)ass.] ; Lk. xii. 56 (Ps. ciii. (civ.) 30) ; (so in Lat., naturae vullus, 0\id. metam. 1, 6; maris fades, Ver^. Aen. 5, 768 ; on this use of the noun fades see Gell. noc- tes atticae 13, 29); surface : της γη!, Lk. .x.xi. 3ϋ; .Vets xvii. 26 [on the omitted art. here cf. πα!, L 1 c.], (Gen. ii. 6 ; xi. »).* Ίτρο-τάσσω : jif. pass. ptcp. πμοτίταγμίνο! ; 1. to />liuu; l/tfore. 2. to appoint tiiforc, defiie beforehand : χρόνον. Soph. Trach. 164; καιροίΐ!, pass. Acts xvii. 26 Ucc. (see προστάσσω. 2); νάμον!, pass. 2 Mace. viii. 36.* ιτρο-τίίνω ; 1 aor. προ/ reira ; [fr. lldt. down] ; to stretch forth, stretch out : ών προΐτ^ιναν [Hec. -i/fv] αντοντοί! Ιμα- σιν, when they had stretched him out for the thongs i. e. to receive the blows of the thongs, (by t}ing him up to a beam or a pillar ; for it apjjears from vs. 2:t that Paul had already been bound), Acts xxii. 2.5 [W. § 31 init. ; al. (cf. R. V. txt.) ' with the thongs ' (cf. tpat)].* πρότεροι, -α, -ov, (compar. of προ), [fr. Iloin. down], he- fore, prior ; of tuna, forvter : η -προτίρα αναστροφή, Eph. iv. 22. Neut. adverbially, before (something else is or was done) : Jn. vii. 51 RG ; 2 Co. i. 15 ; opp. to ίπατα, lleb. vii. 27; before i.e. afaretime, in time past: Jn. vii. 50[LTr Wll]; lleb. iv. 6 ; and R Gin 1 Tim. i. 13; al.so TO npuTepov (contrasting the past with the present [cf. πάλαι, 1 fin.]), .Jn. vi. 62; ix. 8, and LTTr W'll in 1 Tim. i. 13, (1 Mace. iii. 46; v. 1; xi. 34, 39 ; Deut. ii. 12; Josh. xi. 10; Ildt. 7, 75 ; Xen., Plat.) ; i. q. our the first time, (jal. iv. 13 (on which cf. Meyer) ; it is placed between the art. and the noun, as ai πμότιρον ήμίραι, the former days, lleb. x. 32; αϊ πρότ. (πιθυμίαι, the lusts which you formerly indulged, 1 Pet. i. 14." ■π-ρο-τίθημ,ι. : 2 aor. mid. 7rpofdfp7;v; [fr. Horn, down]; 1. to place before, to set forth, [cf. προ, d. a.] ; s])ec. to set forth to be looked at, expose to view : Ex. xl. 4 ; 4 Mace, viii. 11; AeL v. h. 14, 8 ; and often in the mid. in this sense: ττοτήρια αργύρια re και χρνσία, his own cups, Ildt. 3, 148 ; to expose to public view, in which sense it is the technical term with profane authors in speaking of the bodies of the dead, [ίο let lie in state'}, (cf. PassoΛV s. v. I. 2 ; [L. and S. s. v. IL 1]; Stallbauraon Plat. Phaedop. 115 e.; [Kriiger on Thuc. 2, 34, 1]) ; the mid. points to the own- er of the thing exposed: so with τινά and a pred. ace. Ro. iii. 25 (th(! mid. seems to denote that it was his own Son whom he thus "set forth"; cf. viii. 32). 2. Mid. to set before one's self, propose to one's self; to purpose, determine, (Plato, Polyb., al.) : foil, by the inf. Ro. i. 13 ; with an ace. of the thing and iv αΰτώ [(sir) ; see πύτοΰ] added, in himself (W. § 38, G ; [cf. p. 152 (144)]), Eph. i. 9; [ah (reading Iv αΙτω with LTTr WII) render 'in him,' i. e. (probably) Christ].* ΐΓρο^ρίΐτω : 1 aor. mid. ptcp. προτριψάμίνο! ; to urge forwards, exhort, encouraye, (often so by Attic writ^ both in the act. and the mid.) : Acts xviii. 27. (Sap. xiv. 18 ; 2 Mace. .\i. 7. [From Horn, down.]) * ΤΓρο-τρ€χω : 2 aor. προίδραμον; to run before, to outrun : Jn. -\.\. 4 ; with ίμπροσθίν added, i. e. ahead, in advance, [R. V. 'to run on before 'J, cf. \V. 6(J3 (5G1) ; [B. § 151, 27], Lk. xix. 4 ; ίμπρ. with the gen. of a pers. Tob. xi. 2. (1 S. viii. 11 ; Xen., Isoer., Theo|)hr., al.) * •προ-ϋττ-άρχω : impf. 7rpou'7r^p;^oi' ; fr. Thuc. and Plato down ; to br before, exist preciouslij : with a ptc|>. Acts viii. 9; προϋιτήρχον oiTfs, Lk. xxiii. 12; cf. Bornemann, Schol. ad h. I ; \V. 350 (:!28) ; [Ii. § 144, 14].* πρό-φαοΓΐ5, -ecus, ή, (ττροφαίνω, i. e. jirop. ' to cause to shine before' [or ' forth'; but many derive πρόφασί! di- rectly fr. πρό-φημι]), fr. Horn, down; a. a pretext (alleged reason, pretended cause) : τη! πλ(ον(ξία!, such as covetousness is wont to use, 1 Th. ii. 5 ([A. V. cloak oj coretousness^ the meaning being, that he had never mis- used his apostolic ofHce in order to disguise or to hide ava- ricious designs) ; πρόφασιν ίχιιν (a phrase freii- in (!rk. auth., cf. Passow s. v. πρ. 1 b. vol. ii. p. 1251'' ; [L. and S. s. v. I. 3 e.]) nfp\ τη! αμαρτία!, Jn. XV. 22 [A. V. mrg. R. V. excuse}. b. show: προφάσ(ΐ ω! κτλ. [Α. V.] niider color as though they ivould etc. Acts xxvii. 30; προφάσιι, [A. Y.for a pretence}, in pretence, ostensibly : Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Rec.; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; Phil. i. 18.* ■προ-φε'ρω ; [fr. Horn, down] ; to bring forth : τι (< τίνα, Lk. vi. 45.* ■π-ροφητίία, -as, ή, (προφητ(ύω, i{. v.), Hebr. ΠΝΪ3^, prophecij, i. e. discourse emanating from divine inspira- tion and declaring the purposes of (jod, whether by re- proving and admonishing the wicked, or comforting the afflicted, or revealing things hidden ; esp. by foretell- ing future events. Used in the N. T. — of the utter- ances of the O. T. prophets: Mt. xiii. 14 ; 2 Pet. i. 20, 21 (on this pass, see γίνομαι, 5 e. a.) ; — of the prediction of events relating to Christ's kingdom and its speedy tri- umph, together with the consolations and admonitions pertaining thereto : Rev. xi. 6; xxii. 19; το πνιϋμα τη! προφητεία!, the spirit of jjrophecy, the divine mind, to which the prophetic faculty is due, Rev. .\ix. 10 ; o! λόγοι τη! ττροφητίίαί, Kev. i. 3 ; xxii. 7, 10, 18 ; — of the endow- ment and speech of the Christian teachers called προ- φήται (see προφήτη!, Π. 1 f.) : Ro. xii. 6 ; 1 Co. xii. 10; xiii. 2 ; xiv. (i, 22; plur. the gifts and utterances of these prophets, 1 Co. xiii. 8; 1 Th. v. 20; — spec, of the prognostication of those achievements which one set apart to teach the gospel will accomplish for the king- dom of Christ, 1 Tim. iv. 14 ; plur. i. 18 [see προάγω, 2 a. and cf. the Comm.]. ([Sejit., Joseph.] ; among native Grk. writ, used only by Leian. Alex. 40, 60 ; [to which add inscrr. (see L. and S. s. v. I.)].)* Ίτροφητίνω ; fut. ιτροφητ(νσω ; impf. 7Τρο(φήτ€νον (Acts xix. 6 RG) and ΐπροφήτίυον (ibid. LTTr AVH; [1 K. xxii. 12]; .ler. [ii. 8] ; xxiii. 21 ; xxv. 13) ; 1 aor. πρη(φή• τίυσα (RG in Mt. vii. 22; xi. 13; xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6; Lk. i. G7; [Jn. xi. 51 ; Jude 14]) and ΐπροφήτινσα (which form ■προφήτης 553 ΤΓροφήτη<{ cod. Sin. gives everywh., and TTrWII have everywh. restored, and Lchm. also ivith the single exception of Jude 14; add, Sir. .xlviii. 13; 1 Esdr. vi. 1; Jer. xxxiii. (xxvi.) 9, 11, iO; xxxv. (xxviii.) 8 ; xxxvi. (xxix.) 31 ; the Alexandrian translators more com. use the forms πμοΐφητ^υον^ ιτροεφητΐνσα, |jf. ptcp. ττρυπΐφητςυκώζ, Eus. h. e. .), 1 Γ ; pf. pass. int. πpoπfφητ(ϋσθm, ί lem. Alex. Strom, p. 603 ; on the forms used by Justin M. see Otto's prolegg. to his works, I. i. p. Ixxv. ed. 3 ; cf. [ WH. App. p. 1G2; Veitch s. v.]; W. § 12, 5; [B. 35 (30 sq.)] ; cf. Fritzsehe on ΛΙΙί. p. 208; [ώ'ο^Λ. Lex. s. v.]) ; (προφήτη:, q. v.) ; Sept. for N3J and X3jrin ; Vulg. prophelo [three times prophetizo]; to pru/jhes y, i. e. to be a pruphet, speak forth hij divine inspiration ; to predict (Hdt., Find., Eur., Plat., Plut., al.) ; a. univ. : Mt. vii. 22. b. with the idea oi foretelling future events pertaining esp. to the kingdom of God : Mt. xi. 13; Acts ii. 17, 18; xxi. 9; TTcpinvos, Mt. .xv. 7; Mk. vii. 6 ; 1 Pet. i. 10; «Vt Τίκ», over i. e. concerning one (see eVi, B. 2 f. β. p. 234"), Rev. .x. 1 1 ; its Tifa (i. e. Christ), Barn. ep. 5, 6 ; προφ. foil, by XeytaK with the words uttered by the prophet, Jude 14 ; foil, by Sti, Jn. xi. 51. c. to utter forth, declare, a thing luhich can only be known by divine revelation : Mt. xxvi. C8 ; Mk. xiv. 65 ; Lk. xxii. 64, cf. vii. 39 ; Jn. iv. 19. d. to break forth under sudden impulse in lofty discourse or in praise of the divine counsels: Lk. i. 67 ; Acts xix. 6, (1 S. X. 10, 11 ; xix. 20, 21, etc.) ; — or, underthe like prompt- ing, to leach, refute, reprove, admonish, comfort others (see ■προφήτη!, II. 1 f.), 1 Co. .xi. 4, 5; .xiii. 9; xiv. 1, 3, 4, 5, 24, 31, 39. e. to act as a prophet, discharge the prophetic office : Rev. xi. 3. [On the word see Trench, N. T. Syn. § vi.] * ■π-ροφήτηϊ, -ου, 6, (πρόφημι, to speak forth, speak out; hence prop, 'one who speaks forth'; seejrpo, d. a.), Sept. for K'5J (which comes fr. the same root as if^, 'to di- vulge,' ' make known,' ' announce ' [cf. Fleischer in De- litzsch. Com. u. d. Gen., 4te Aufl. p. 551 sq.], therefore prop. i. q. interpreter, Ex. vii. 1, cf. iv. 16 ; hence an in- terpreter or spokesman for God ; one through whom God speaks ; cf. esp. Bleek, Einl. in d. A. T. 4te Aufl. p. 309 [B. D. 8. V. Prophet and reff. there ; esp. also Day's note on Oehler's O. T. Theol. § 161, and W. Robertson Smith, Prophets of Israel, p. 389 (note on Lect. ii.)]), one who speaks forth by divine inspiration; I. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., and Pind. down 1. an interpreter of oracles (whether uttered by the gods or the μάντα:), or of other hidden things. 2. a fore- teller, soothsayer, seer. II. In the N. T. 1. one who, moved by the Spirit of God and hence his organ or spokesman, solemnly declares to men what he has re- ceived by inspiration, esp. future evetits, and in particular such as relate to the cause and kingdom of God and to hu- man salvation. The title is applied to a. the 0. T. prophets, — and with allusion to their age, life, death, deeds: Mt.v.l2; xii. 39 ; xiii. 17 ; xxiii. 29-31 ; Mk. vi. 15 ; Lk. iv. 27 ; x. 24 ; xi. 47 ; xiii. 28 ; Jn. viii. 52, 53 ; Acts iii. 25; vii. 52 ; xiii. 20; Ro. xi. 3 ; 1 Th. ii. 15; Heb. £132; Jas. v. 10 ; appeal is made to their utteran'-es as having foretold the kingdom, deeds, death, of Jesus the Messiah: Mt. i. 22 ; ii. 5, 15, 17, 23 ; iii. 3 ; iv. 14 ; viii. 17; xi. 13 ; .xii. 1 7 ; xiii. 35 ; xxi. 4 ; .xxiv. 15 ; xxvi. 56 ; xxvii. 9 ; Mk. xiii. 14 Rec. ; Lk. i. 70 ; iii. 4 ; iv. 1 7 ; xviii. 31 ; xxiv. 25 ; Jn. i. 23, 45 (46) ; xii. 38 ; Acts ii. 16 ; iii. 18,21,24; vii.37,48; x.43; xiii. 27; xv. 15; xxvi. 22 sq.; Ro. i. 2 ; lieb. i. 1 ; 1 Pet. i. 10 ; 2 Pet. iii. 2 ; Rev. x. 7 ; in the number of prophets David also is reckoned, as one who predicted the resurrection of Christ, Acts ii. 30 sq. ; so too is Balaam, 2 Pet. ii. 16 (see Βαλαάμ). by meton. ττροφηται is put for the books of the prophets : Lk. xxiv. 27, 44; Acts viii. 28; xiii. 15; xxiv. 14; xxviii. 23; it τοΐί ττροφήταΐ!, i. q. eV βίβλω των προφ. (Acts vii. 42), in the volume of the prophets (which in Hebr. has the title D"X'?J), Jn. vi. 45; Acts xiii. 40; — or for the teaching set forth in their books: Mt. v. 17 ; vii. 12; xxii. 40; Lk. xvi. 29, 31 ; Acts xxvi. 27. See νόμοι, 4. b. John the Baptist, the herald of Jesus the Messiah : Mt. xxi. 26 ; Mk. vi. 15 ; xi. 32 ; Lk. i. 76 ; xx. 6, whom Jesus declares to be greater than the O. T. prophets, be- cause in him the hope of the Jews respecting Elijah as the forerunner of the Messiah was fulfilled : Mt. xi. 9- U, 14, (cf. xvii. 11, 12; Mk. ix. 12 sq.); Lk. vii. 28 [R G Τ Tr br.]. c. That illustrious prophet whom the Jews (apparently on the ground of Deut. xviii. 15) e.x- pected to arise just before the Messiah's advent : Jn. i. 21, 25; vii. 40. those two illustrious prophets, the one Elijah, the other Enoch or Moses [but cf. the Coram. ; e. g. Stuart, Com. vol. ii. p. 219 sq.], who according to the >Triter of the Apocalypse will publicly appear shortly before the visible return of Christ from heaven : Rev. xi. 10 (cf. 3). d. the Messiah : Acts iii. 22, 23; vii. 37, after Deut. xviii. 15; Jesus the Messiah, inasmuch as he is about to fulfil the e.xpectation respecting this Messiah, Mt. xxi. 11; Jn. vi. 14. e. univ. a man filed with the Spirit of God, who by God's authority and command in words of weight pleads the cause of God and urges the sal- vation of men : Mt. xxi. 46 ; Lk. xiii. 83 ; xxiv. 19 ; Jn. vii. 52 ; in the proverb that a prophet is without honor in his own country, Mt. xiii. 57 ; Mk. vi. 4 ; Lk. iv. 24 ; Jn. iv. 44. he may be known — now by his supernatural knowledge of hidden things (even though past), Lk. vii. 39 ; Jn. iv. 19, (προφήτης άΧηθβίας eariv 6 πάντοτί πάντα €ί8ά}ς, τα μίν •yeyovoTa ως eyeVfTo, τα δι γινόμενα ω: yivfTai, τα δι (σήμανα ώί ίσται, Clem. horn. 2, G), — now by his power of working miracles, Lk. vii. 16 ; xxiv. 19 ; Jn. ix. 17; such a prophet Jesus is shown to have been by the passages cited, nor is it denied except by his enemies, Lk. vii. 39 ; Jn. vii. 52. f. The prophets that appeared in the apostolic age among the Christians: Mt. x. 41 ; xxiii. 34; Acts xv. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 29, 37 ; Rev. xxii. 6, 9; they are associated with apostles in Lk. xi. 49 ; 1 Co. .xii. 28, 29 ; Eph. ii. 20 ; iii. 5 ; iv. 1 1 ; Rev. xviii. 20 ; they discerned and did what was hest for the Christian cause. Acts xiii. 1 sq. ; foretold certain future events. Acts xi. 27 sq.; xxi. lOsqq. ; and in the religious assemblies of the Christians, being suddenly seized by the Spirit (whose 7Γρυφητικυ(; 554 ττρωτος promptings, however, do not impair tlieir self-govern- ment, 1 Co. xiv. 3'2), give utterance in glowing and ex- alted but intelligible language to those things which the Holy Spirit teaulies them, and which have power to in- struct, comfort, encourage, rebuke, convict, stimulate, their hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 3, 24. [Cf. Harnack, Lehre der Zwolf Apostel, Proleg. § 5 i. 2 p. 9.3 sqq. 119 S(iq. ; Bon- wetsch in (Luthardt's) Zeitsehr. f. kirehl. Wissen. u. s. w. 1884, pp. 408 sciq. 460 sqq.] g. Prophets both of the Old 'Pest, and of the New are grouped together under the name προφηται in Itev. xi. 1 8 ; xvi. 6 ; xviii. 24. 2. a piif'l (because poets were believed to sing under divine iiisjiiration) : so of Epimenides, Tit. i. 12. ■προφητικό?, -ή, -όν, (προφήτης), proceeding from a prophet ; prophetic : Ro. xvi. 2ii ; 2 Pet. i. 19. [Philo de migr. Abr. § 15, etc.; Lcian. Alex. 60; eccles. writ.]* ιτροφήτΐϊ, -ιδθ£, ή, (■προφήτηί), Sept. for ni<"3J, a proph- etess (Vulg., Tertull. prophetissa, propkettx), a woman to whom future events or things hidden from others are at times revealed, either hy inspiration or by dreams and visions: Lk. ii. 36; Rev. ii. 20. In Grk. usage, ο yema/e U'hr, declares or interprets oracles (Eur., Plat., Plut.) : ή προφήτις της αληθείας ιστορία, Diod. 1, 2.* •προ-φθάνω : 1 aor. προίφθασα; to come before, to antici- pate : avTov προίφβασί λίγων, he spoke before him [R.V. spake first to html, •"■ anticipated his remark, Mt. xvii. 2S (Aeschyl., Eur., Arstph., Plut. ; Sept.) * ■n-po-xitpC^M {πpόχfιpυς at hand [cf. προ, d. a.] or ready): 1 aor. mid. προιχαρισάμην; pf. pass. ptcp. ■προκίχιφισμΐ- νος \ to put into the hanil, to deliver into the liantls : far more freq. in the mid. to take into one's hands; trop. to set hejore one's self, to propose, to determine; with an ace. of the pers. to choose, to appoint, (Isocr., Polyb., Dion. Hal., Plut., al. ; 2 Mace. iii. 7 ; viii. 9 ; Ex. iv. 13) : foil. by an inf. of purpose. Acts xxii. 14 ; Ttra with a pred. ace. Acts xx vi. 16; τικά with a dat. of the pers. for one's use, Josh. iii. 12; for one's salvation, pass. Acts iii. 20 for Rec- ττροκΐκηρνγμϊνον (cf. προκηρύσσω, 2).* Ίτρο-χίΐρο-τονί'ω, -ώ : pf. pass. ptc]). προκ(χ(ΐροτονημίνος; (see χίΐροτηνίω) ; to choose or designate beforehand : Acts X. 41. (Plat. legg. 6 p. 7G5 b. c., [Aeschin., Dem.], Dio Cass. 50, 4.) • Πρόχοροΐ, [-ου, ό, (lit. ' leader of the dance ')], Proch'- orus, one of the seven ' deacons ' of the church at Jeru- salem : Acts vi. 5.• ιτρύμνα, -t;s, η, (fem. of the adj. πρνμνός, -ή, -όν, last, hindmost ; used substantively with recessive accent ; [cf. W. 22]). fr. Hom. down, the stern or hinder part of a ship: Mk. iv. 38; Acts xxvii. 29; opp. to πρώρα. ib. 41.* ■π-ρωί [WH πρωί (cf. I, t, fin.)] (Attic πρώ [cf. W. § 5, 4 d.]), adv., (fr. ττρό), fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for ipil^ in the morning, early, (opp. to όψ(') : Jn. xviii. 28 G L Τ Tr WH ; ISIt. xvi. 3 (opp. here to όψίαί -γαιομίνης [but Τ br. WH reject the pass.]) ; [xxi. 18 Τ Tr txt. WH] ; Mk. i. 35; xi. 20; xvi. 9 ; [πρωί. σκοτίας crt ονσης, Jn. xx. 1]; λίηρ πρωί, foil, [in R G] by a gen. of the day (cf. Kuhner § 414, 5 c. β. ii. p. 292), Mk. xvi. 2 ; άμα πρωί, Mt. XX. 1 ; Μ τΑ ποωΓ, Mk. χν. 1 [R G] ; άπο πρωί ίως (σποράς, Acts xxviii. 23. Used spec, of the fourth watch of the night, i. e. the time fr. 3 o'clock in the morning till 6, ace. to our reckoning [(cf. B. D. s. v. Watches of the Night)], Mk. xiii. 35.» πρωία, see πρωίας. πρώίμοϊ (for the more com. πρώϊοί ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 52), TTr WH πρόϊμοί (so also cod. Sin.; [see 117/. App. p. 152]), -i;, -ov, {πρωί), early; ifras, the early rain (llebr. rriV, Deut. xi. 14; Jer. v. 24), which fell fr. October on [(cf. B.D. s. v. Rain)], Jas. v. 7 [L Τ Tr WH om. ifT. ; cf. W. 592 (550); B. 82 (72)]. (Xen. oec. 17, 4; Geop., al.) * πρωινό? [WH πρωινός (see their App. p. 152), Tdf. ed. 7 προΊκίίί (cf. I, i)], (for the older πρώϊο?, see opipiTOt; the same term, in the Lat. serotinus, iliutinu.i), -ή, -όν, (πρωί), pertaining to the morning; 6 άστηρ 6 πρ. Rev. ii. 28 (on which see άστηρ); xxii. 16 (where Rec. op- θρινός). [Sept. ; Babr., Plut., Ath., al.] * πρώ'ιΌϊ [WH πρώίος], -a, -ov, (πρωί), early, pertaining to the morning, (fr. Hom. down) ; as a subst. ή πρωία (in full ή ωρα ή πρωία, 3 Mace. v. 24; [Diod., Josejih., al.] ; see όψιυς, 2), Sept. several times for ipi, morning : Mt. xxvii. 1 ; Jn. xviii. 28 Rec; .xxi. 4 [πρωίας ήδη γινο- μένης (TAVH Tr txt.), «Λί'η day was now breaking {Μ.Χ.)]; πρωίας, in the morning, Mt. xxi. 18 [R G L Tr mrg.].* πρώρα [so R G, πρώρα Tr], more correctly πρώρα (see Gottling, Lehre v. Accent, p. 142sq. ; [Chandler §1C4; Etym. Magn. p. 692, 34 sq. ; cf. 318, 57 sq. ; cf.I, i]), -ας (L• Τ WH -ης, cf. μάχαιρα, init.), 17, [contr. fr. προΓίρα fr. ττρό; Lob. Pathol. Element, ii. 13(j, cf. Paralip. j). 215], fr. Hom. down ; the prow or forward part of a ship [R.V. foreship'\; Acts xxvii. 30; in vs. 41 distinguished fr. ή πρνμνα.* πρωτίνω ; (πρώτος) ; to be first, hold the frst place, [A. V. have the pre-eminence']: Col. i. 18. (From Xen. and Plat, down.) * πρωτοκαθξδρία, -ας, ή, (πρώτος and κάθιδρα q. v.), a sit- ting in the frst seat, the first or chief seat ; Mt. ,\xiii. 6; Mk. xii. 39 ; Lk. xi. 43 ; xx. 46. (Eccles. writ.) * πpωτo-κλι<ΓCα, -ας, η, (πρώτος and κλισία), the frst re- cl'ining-plare, the chief place, at table [cf. Itich, Diet, of Rom. and Grk. Anticj. s. v. lectus tricliniaris ; the rela- tive ranlc of the several places at table varied among Persians, Greeks, and Romans ; and what arrangement was currently followed by the Jews in Christ's da}• can hardly, perhaps, be determined ; (yet see Edersheim, .lesus the Messiah, ii. pp. 207 sq. 494)]: Mt. xxiii. 6; Mk. xii. 39; Lk. xi. 4.i Lchm. in br.; xiv. 7, 8 ; xx. 46. (Eccles. writ.)." πρώτο?, -7), -oi',(superl. of πρό, contr. fr. πρόατος, whence the Doric πράτοΓ; the compar. πρότιρος see in its ])lace), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for pt^XI and often for ΊΠ^ and &Nl,/irsi; 1. either in time or place, in any succession of things or of persons; a. absolutely (i. e. without a noun) and substantively ; a. with the article : ό πρώτος κα\ ό ίσχατος, Ί. e. the eternal One, Rev. i. 17; ii. 8 ; x.xii. 13 ; ό πρώτος, so. τών κ(κ\ημίνων, Lk. xiv. 18; the first of two (cf. W. § 35, 4 N. 1 ; [B. 32 πρώτον 555 Ίτρωτοτοκος (28)]), Jn. xix. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 30 ; plur. opp. to o! Εσχα- τοι, Mt. XX. IG, on which see €σ;(ατοΓ, 2 a. Neut. το πρώτον, opp. to TO SfvTcpov, lleb. -x. 9 ; τά πρώτα, opp. to τά ίσχατα, one's first state, ^]t. xii. 45 ; Lk. xi. 26 ; 2 Pet. ii. 20 ; the first order of things, Rev. xxi. 4. β. without the article : Mt. x. 2 (ττρώτοΓ, sc. of the apostles to be mentioned); plur., Alt. xix. 30; Mk. x. 31; Lk. xiii. 30, (on the meaning of Λvhich three pass, see ΐσχα- ΤΟΓ, 2 a.) ; neut. eV πρώτοις, [A. \. first of all'\, among the first things delivered to jou by me, 1 Co. xv. 3. b. where it agrees with some substantive; o. anar- throus, and in place of an adjective : πρωττ/ (sc. ήμίρα) σιι03άτου, on the first day of the week, Mk. xvi. 9 ; φυλακή, opp. to SevTcpa, Acts xii. 10; as a pred. Lk. li. 2 (on \vhich of. \V. § 35, 4 N. 1 ; [B. § 127, 31]). where it is added to the subject or the object of the verb (and we often use an adv. ; W. § 54, 2 ; [B. §123,9]): (ίρίσκιι οίιτος πρώτος, Jn. i. 41 (42) (where L Tr WH πρώτον) ; add, Jn. viii. 7 ; xx. 4, 8 ; Acts xxvii. 43 ; Ro. x. 19 ; 1 Tim. i. 16; 1 Jn. iv. 19; opp. to (ΐτα, 1 Tim. ii. 13; ό πρώτος (μβάς, Jn. V. 4 (the art. belongs to ΐμβάς [(ί Τ Tr WH om. the pass.]) ; but Acts xxvi. 23 πρώτος ΐξ άι/α- στάσ€ως νικρών is to be translated as the first. By a later Grk. usage it is put where πρότερος might have been expected with the gen. (cf. Herni. ad Vig. p. 717; Passow s. v. πράτιρος, Β. I. 2 c. ii. p. 1243" ; [L. and S. ibid. B. I. 4 e.] ; Fritzsche, Ep. ad Rom. ii. 420 sq. ; W. § 35, 4 X. 1 ; B. § 123, 14) : πρώτος μου ην, Jn. i. 15, 30, (ot πρώτοι μου ταύτα άνίχνιύσαντα, Ael. nat. anim. 8, 12). β. with the article : ό (η, τό,) πρώτος (-η, -ov,), in a series which is so complete, either in fact or in thought, that other members are conceived of as fol- lowing the first in regular order ; as, τάι» πρώτον λόγοι», Acts i. 1 ; add, Mk. xiv. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 16 ; Rev. iv. 1, 7; xiii. 12, etc. ; (opp. to 6 ίσχατος), ή πρ- πλάνη, Mt. xxvii. 64; add, Mt. xx. 8, 10, 16 ; 1 Co. xv. 4-3, etc. ; also 'the first' of two, where Lat. usage requires and the Vulg. ordinarily employs prior (cf. W. [and B.] u. s.) : Mt. xxi. 28, 31 [L Tr WH ίστίρος} ; άλλους δούλου? πλείο- νας των πρώτων, Mt. x.xi. 36 ; ή πρώτη ίιαθήκη, Heb. viii. 7, 13; ix. 15, 18; ή πρώτη, sc. διαθήκη. Hell. ix. 1 (J L Τ Tr WH ; σκηνή, Heb. ix. 1 Rec, 2, 6, 8 ; ή πρ- -γή, ό πρ. ουρανός. Rev. .\xi. 1 ; άνάστασ-ις. Rev. xx. 5, 6 ; άνθρωπος, 1 Co. XV. 47 ; foil, by ό δεύτερος, τρίτος, etc. : Mt. xxii. 25; Mk. xii. 20; Lk. xix. 16; xx. 29; Rev. viii. 7; xvi. 2 ; .xxi. 19 ; foil, by έτερος, Lk. xvi. 5 ; ό πρώτος, i. q. the former, previous, pristine : την πρώτην πίστιν, the faith which they formerly plighted, 1 Tim. v. 12; ή πρώτη α-γάπη. Rev. ii. 4 ; τά πρ- έργα, ibid. 5. 2. Jirst in rank; influence, honor; chief; principal : without the art., and absol., πρώτος chief (opp. to δούλος), Mt. xx. 27; Mk. X. 44; opp. to έσχατος and διάκονος, Mk. ix. 35; added to a noun, principal, εντολή, Mt. xxii. 38 ; Mk. xii. 30 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. the cl.] ; Eph. vi. 2 ; with a partitive gen., Alk. xii. 28, 29, [see πάς, II. 2 b. γ.]; 1 Tim. i. 15 ; with the art., Lk. xv. 22; Acts xvii. 4 ; oi πρώτοι τής Γαλιλαίαί, the chief men of Galilee, Mk. vi. 21; του λαοΟ, Lk. xix. 47; της πόλεως, Acts xiii. 50; των Ιουδαίων, Acts xxv. 2 ; xxviii. 1 7 ; r^r νήσου, Acts xxviii. 7 [cf. Lewin, St. Paul, ii. p. 208 sq., but see Πό- πλιοϊ]. 3. neut. πρώτοι/ as adv., _^rsi,ai i/ie_/iVs<; a. in order of time: Lk. x. 5; Jn. xviii. 13; Acts xi. 26 [here Τ Tr WH πρώτως, q. v.] ; foU. by είτα, έπειτα, or δείιτιρον, Mk. iv. 28 ; 1 Co. xv. 46 ; 1 Th. iv. 16 ; 1 Tim. iii. 10; foil, by μετά ταΰτα, Mk. xvi. 9 cf. 12; the first time, opp. to εν τω δευτ^ρω (the second time). Acts vii. 12, 13; re πρώτον και, first and also (or afterward.»), i. e. as well as, Ro. i. 16 [but here L Tr mrg. WH br. πρ.}; ii. 9, 10; without τε, 2 Co. viii. 5; 2 Tim. i. 5. frst i.e. before anything else is done; frst of all: Mt. vi. 33; Lk. xii. 1; Jn. vii. 51 LTTrWH; Ro. i. 8; 1 Tim. v. 4 ; 2 Pet. i. 20 ; iii. 3 ; πρώτον πάντων, 1 Tim. ii. 1. frst'i.e. before something else: Mt. viii. 21; Mk. vii. 27; ix. 11,12; Lk. xi. 38; xiv. 28 ; Ro. xv. 24 ; 2 Th. ii. 3 ; 1 Pet. iv. 1 7, etc. ; before other nations. Acts iii. 26 ; .xiii. 46 ; before others [R. V. the first to partake etc.], 2 Tim. ii. 6 ; foil, by τότί or και roTe, Mt. v. 24 ; vii. 5 ; xii. 29 ; Mk. iii. 27 ; Lk. vi. 42 ; Jn. ii. 10 [T WH om. L Tr br. τότε} ; ε'με πρώτον υμών [Tdf. om. ύμ•} me before it hated ijou, Jn. xv. 18 (see 1 b. a.). to πρώτον, at the first i. e. at the time when one did a thing for the first time : Jn. .x. 40 ; xii. 16 ; .xix. 39. b. in enumer- ating several particulars ; first, then, etc. : Ro. iii. 2 ; 1 Co. XI. 18; xii. 28; Heb. vii. 2; .las. iii. 17. ιτρωτοοτάτηϊ, •ου, ό, (ττρώτοί and ΐστημι), prop, one who stands in the front rank, a front-rank man, (Thuc, Xen., Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al. ; ώσπερ στρατηγός πρωτοστάτης. Job .xv. 24) ; hence, a leader, chief, cham- pion : trop. [A. V. a ringleader} της αφέσεως. Acts xxiv. 5.• ιτρωτοτόκια, -ων, τά. (πρωτότοκος), in the Sept. also ττρωτοτοκίία [al. -κε'ια (cf. Chandler § 99), -κία, cod. Venet., Aq.], forrfioa, primor/enititre, the right of the first-born, (in class. Grk. ή πρεσβεία, and το πρεσβεΐον) : Heb. xii. 16. (Philo repeats the word after the Sept. in his alleg. legg. 3, 69 ; sacrif. Abel. § 5. Occasionally also in By- zant. writ.) * irpuTOTOKOs, -ov. (πρώτος, τίκτω), Sept. for Ί03, first- born ; a. prop. : τον υιον αντής τοι» πρωτ. Mt. i. 25 (where τοι/ πρωτότ. is omitted by L Τ Tr WH but found in cod. Sin. [see Tdf., WIL, ad loc.]) ; Lk. ii. 7; τά πρωτότοκα αυτών (gen. of the possessor [(?); αυτών is more naturally taken w. θίγη (W. § 30, 8 c), as by Prof. Grimm himself s. v. θιγγάνω]), the first-born whether of man or of beast, Heb. .\i. 23 (ίτάι» πρωτότοκον . . . άπο ανθρώπου εως κτήνους. Ex. xii. 29 ; Ps. civ. (cv.) 36 ; [Philo de cherub. § 16 ; Poll. 4, 208]). b. trop. Christ is called πρωτότο<οί πάσης κτίσεως (partit. gen. [see below], as in τα πρωτότοκα τών προβάτων, Gen. iv. 4 ; τών βοών, Dent. xii. 17 ; τώι» υιών σου, Ex. xxii. 29), who came into being through God prior to the entire universe of created things [R. V. the firstborn of all creation} (see κτίσις, 2 b.), Col. i. 15; — this passage does not with certainty prove that Paul reckoned the λόγοΓ in the number of created beings (as, among others, fTsteri, Paulin. Lehr- begriff, p. 315, and Baur, Das Christenthum der drei 7Γρωτω<; 556 Ίττυω eralen Jalirlili. 1st ed. p. 295, hold); since even Origen, who is acknowledged to have maintained the eternal generation of the Son by the Father, did not liesitate to call him (cf. Gieselar, Kirch.- Gesch. i. p. 2G1 Sij. ed. 3 ; [i. 21 (J Eng. trans, of ed. 4, edited by Smith]) τον aycVij- Tov καί ττάσηζ γίνίτής φύσβω? τίμωτόΓοκον (c. Cels. ti, 17), and even κτίσμα (a term which Clement of Alexandria also uses of the Xoyot) ; cf. Joan. Damascen. orthod. fid. 4, 8 και auTot ίκ τοϋ θ^οϋ και ij κτίσιι €Κ Γοΰ θ^οΰ; [al. would make the gen. in Col. 1. c. depend upon the compar. force in (the first half of) πρωτότ. (cf. nflanUToKos ί'γώ η σύ, 2 S. xix. 43) ; but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc. (esp. for the patri.s- tic interpretation)]. In the same sense, apparently, he is called simply ή πρωτότοκος, lleb. i. 6 ; πρ- ϊκτων νικρων, the first of the dead who was raised to life, Col. i. 18; also των ι>€κρων (partit. gen.), Rev. i. .5 [Rec. inserts «]; πρωτότοκος iv πολλοί? «ϊδίλφοίί, who Avas the Son of God long before those who by liis agency and merits are ex- alted to the nature and dignity of sons of God, with the added suggestion of the supreme rank by Λνΐιΐΰΐι he ex- cels these other sons (cf. Ps. Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 2S ; Ex. iv. 22; Jer. xx.xviii. (xxxi.) 9), Ro. viii. 29; ΐκκλησία 1rpωτoτιΊκJlV, the congregation of the pious Christian dead already exalted to the enjoyment of the blessedness of heaven (tacitly opp. to those subseciuently to follow them thither), Ileb. xii. 23; cf. De Wette ad loc. (Anthol. 8, 34; 9, 213.)• irpUTus, adv.,^r.?i : Acta xi. 26 Τ Tr WH. Cf. Passow s. v. πρότίρος fin. ; [L. and S. ib. B. IV. ; Phryn. ed. Lob. ρ 31 I s [. ; RullierfonI, New Phryn. p. 306]." ΐΓταίω ; f ut. TrraiVtu ; 1 aor. ίπταισα; (akin to ΠΕΤΩ and πίπτω [cf. Vanicek p. 406]); fr. [Pind.], Aescliyl., and Ildt. down ; 1. trans, τινά. Ιο cauxe one In sluiii- ble OT fall. 2. intrans. lo slumble : 8\ς ιτρ6ς του αυτόν \ίθον, Polyb. 31, 19, 5. trop. [cf. Eng. Irip, slumblc] a. to err, to make a mistake, (Plat. Theaet. c. 15 p. 160 d.) ; to «in: absol. Ro. xi. 11 (tSioi/ ανθρώπου φιλίΐι/ και τους πταίοντας, Antonin. 7, 22); πολλά, in many ways, .Fas. iii. 2 ; ev ivX (sc. νόμω), to stumble in, i. e. sin against, one \a,w, Jas. ii. 10 [but see (ΐς, 2 a. fin.] ; ev λο'γω (for the [more com.] simple dat.), to sin in word or speech, .Jas. iii. 2. b. lo fall into miserij, become wretched, (often so in Grk. writ.) : of the loss of salvation, 2 Pet. i. 10. [Cf. προσ-παίω.^ * irrepva, -τ^ς, η, the heel (of the foot) : (παΐρΐΐν την πτίρναν (πι τίνα, to Ιίβ up the heel against one, i. e. dropping the fi :. (which is borrowed either from kicking, or from a wrestler tripping up his antagonist), to injure one hi/ trickery, Jn. xiii. 18 after Ps. xl. (xli.) 10. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for 3Ρ|'.) * ΐΓτίρνγιον, -ου, τό, (dimin. of πτίρυξ, q. v.), Sept. for nj3; 1. a wing, little wing. 2. an;/ pointed extremity (of the fins of fishes, TSJO, Lev. xi. 9-12; Deut. xiv. 9, 10; Aristot., Theophr. ; of a part of the dress hanging down in the form of a wing, Ruth iii. 9 ; 1 S. xxiv. 5 ; [Num. xv. 38] ; Poll. 7, 14, 62) : το πτίρύ- ytnv ToO vaoi and rod Upov, the top of the temple at .Jeru- salem, Hegesipp. ap. Euseb. h. e. 2, 23, 1 1 ; τοΰ 'κροΰ. Mt. iv. 5; Lk. iv. 9; some understand this of the top or apex of the sanctuary (roC vaoi), others of the top of .Solomon's porch, and others of the top of the lio) al Portico; this last Josephus (antt. 15, 11, 5) says was of such great height ως ei τι? απ' άκρου τοΰ ταύτης τίγους (ίμφω συΐ'τιθΐϊς τά βάθη διοπτ^νοι Ο'κοτο^ινιάν, ονκ ίζικνυυ- μίνης της "ι^ΐως (Ις άμίτρητον τον βυθόν; [cf. '* Iieco\ery 111' .lerusalem,"esp. ch. v.].* ΐΓΤί'ρυξ, -υγος, ή, {πτ(ρόν a wing), fr. Hom. down, Sept. often for ']i2', " wing: of birds, Mt. xxiii. 37; Lk. xiii. 34 ; Rev. xii. 14 ; of imaginary creatures. Rev. iv. 8 ; ix. 9.• irrqvis, -ή, -όν, (πίτομαι. πτηναι), furnished unth wings; winged, jlging : τά πτηνά, birds (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down), 1 Co. xv. ;i9.• •πτοί'ω, -ώ : 1 aor. pass, ίπτοήθην ; (πτόα terror) ; from Horn, down; to terrify; pass. /o ie ierri/ierf (Sept. chiefly for nnn) : Lk. xxi. 9 ; xxiv. 37 [Tr mrg. WH mrg. βροψ eivres• Syx. see φοβίω, fin.]* ■πτόησ-ΐϊ, -(ως. ή, (πτοί'ω), terror : φοβήσθαι πτόησιν, i. q. φόβυν φοβάσθαι, to he afraid with terror [al. take πτ. objectively : R. V. txt. to he put in fear by any terror'\, 1 Pet. iii.6 (Prov. iii. 25) ; see φοβίω, 2; [W. § 32, 2; B. § 131, 5. (1 Mace. iii. 25; J'hilo, quis rer. div. her. §51)].* Πτολίμαίϊ, -tfios, ή, Plolemais, a maritime city of Phoe- nicia, which got its name, apparently, from Ptolemy Lathyrus (who captured it B. c. 103, and rebuilt it more beautifully [cf. Joseph, antt. 13, 12, 2 sq.]) ; it is called in Judg. i. 31 and in the Talmud \2j,\, in the Sept. 'λκχώ, by the Greeks *.\kij [on the varying accent cf. Pape, Eigennam. s. v. ΐΙτο\(μιης'\, and Romans Ace, and by modern Europeans [.lire or] .S7. Jean d'Acre (from a church erected there in the middle ages to St. John) ; it is now under Turkish rule and contains about 8000 in- habitants (cf. Baedeker, Pal. and Syria, Eng. ed. p. 356) : Acts xxi. 7. (Often mentioned in the books of the Mac- cabees and by Josephus under the name of ΐΙτο\(μαις, cf. esp. b. j. 2, 10, 2sq. ; [see Reland, Palaest. p. 534 sciq.; rtilirr, P.alestine, Eng. trans, iv. p. 361 sqq.].) * irriov, -ου, τά, freq. in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down, Attic πτίον W. 24, [(peril, fr. r. pu ' to cleanse'; cf. Curtius p. 498 sq.)], a winnowing-shorel [A. V. _/(ιη; cf. B. D. 8. v. Agriculture, sub fin. ; Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. vv. ventila- brum, pala 2, vannus] : Mt. iii. 1 2 ; Lk. iii. 1 7.* ττνρω: [(cf. Curtius p. 706)]; to frighten, affright: pres. pass. ptcp. πτνρόμ(νος, Phil. i. 28. (Hippocr., Plat., Diod., Pint., al.) * •πτίο-μα. -rot, τό, (πτύω, q. v.), spittle : Jn. ix. 6 ([Hip- pocr.], Polyb. 8, 14, 5; Or. Sibyll. 1, 365).* ττηύο-οτω : 1 aor. ptcp. πτΰξας; in class. Grk. fr. Horn. down ; to fold together, roll up : τό βιβλίον, Lk. iv. 20 [A. V. closedl; see αναπτύσσω, [and cf. Schloltmann in Riehm s. v. Schrift ; Sirack in Ilerzog ed. 2 s. v. Schreib• kunst, etc. Comp. : άκα-πτΰσσω.] * ΐΓτύω: [(Lat. spuo, our spue; Curtius §382)]; 1 aor. (πτνσα ; fr. Hom. down ; to spit : Mk. vii. 33 ; viii. 28; Jn. ix. 6. [COMP. : eV, (μ-πτύω.'} * πτώμα 657 πύλη ντώμΛ, -rof , τό, (πίΐΓτω, pf. ηίτττωκα) ; 1• in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. duwn, a fall, duwn/ull; metaph. a fail- ure, defeai, calamity; an error, lapse, sin. 2. l/iat which is /alien ; hence with the gen. of a pers. or with vfKpoi added, the (fallen) bodi/ of one dead or slain, a corpse, carcase ; later also with νικμοϋ omitted (Polyb., Sept., Philo, Joseph., Plut., Ildian.), cf. Thorn. Mag. p. 765 [ed. Ritschl p. 290, 14]; Phryn. ed. Lol). p. 375; [W. 23], and so in the N. T. : Mt. xiv. 1 2 L Τ Tr WH ; Mk. XV. 45 L Τ Tr WH ; Mt. xxiv. 28 ; Tivot, Mk. vi. 29 ; Rev. xi. 8, 9. ■ΒτΔ(Γΐ5, -€ωί, η, (πίπτω, pf. πί'πτωκα), a falling, down- fall : prop, τήί olicias, Mt. vii. J? (jtrwafis οίκων, Maneth. 4, 617) ; trop. «'r πτώσιν πολλών (opp. to tls άνύστασιν), that many may fall and bring upon tuemselves ruin, i. e. the loss of salvation, utter misery, Lk. ii. 34, cf. Ro. -ti. 11. (Sept. chiefly for nSJO, plague, defeat.)* «τωχίίο, -as, ψ (πτωχίύω) ; 1. beggary (Hdt. 8, 14; Arstph. Plut. 549; Plat. legg. 11 p. 936 b.; Lysias p. 898, 9 ; Aristot. poet. c. 23 p. 1459", 6). 2. in the N. T. poverty, the condition of one destitute of riches and abundance : opp. to πλοιιτίΐκ, 2 Co. viii. 9 ; opp. to rXovaiot, Rev. ii. 9 ; ή κατά (ίάθου! πτωχύα (opp. to πλοΰ- Tof), deep i. e. extieme pooerty [see κατά, 1. 1 b.], 2 Co. Tiii. 2. (Sept. chiefly for "J:•, affliction, misery.) * ΊΓτΐΛ\ίν•α: 1 aor. ίπτά>\(υσα\ (πτωχοί, q. v.); prop, to he a beggar, to beg; so in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down; in the N. T. once, to be poor : 2 Co. viii. 9, on which see πλούσιος, b. fin. (Tob. iv. 21 ; Sept. for ^'-)Ί to be weak, afflicted, .ludg. vi. 6 ; Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 8 ; for iyiu to be reduced to want, Prov. xxiii. 21 ; ii?n to be needy, Ps. xxxiii. (.xxxiv.) 11.)* ΐΓτωχόϊ, -ή, -όν, (πτώσσω, to be thoroughly frightened, to cower down or hide one's self for fear; hence πτωχο! prop, one λυΙιο slinks and crouches), often involving the idea of roving about in wretchedness [see πίνης, fin.; "but it always had a b.ad sense till it was ennobled in the Gospels ; see Mt. v. 3 ; Lk. vi. 20, cf. 2 Co. viii. 9" (L. and S. s. v. I.)]; hence 1. in class. Grk. from Ilom. down, reduced to beggary, begging, mendi- cant, asking alms: Lk. xiv. 13, 21 ; xvi. 20, 22. 2. poor, needy, (opp. to πΚούσιοί) ■ Mt. xix. 21; χ-χλί. 9, 11 ; Mk. X. 21; xii. 4-2, 43; xiv. 5, 7 ; Lk. xviii. 22; xix. 8; xxi. 3; .In. xii. 5, 6,8; xiii. 29; Ro. xv. 26; 2Co. vi. 10; Gal. ii. 10 ; Jas. ii. 2, 3, 6 ; Rev. xiii. 16; in a broader sense, destitute ofmealth, influence, position, honors; loicly, afflicted : Mt. xi. 5; Lk. iv. 18, (fr. Is. Ixi. 1); vi. 20; vii. 22 ; at ■πτωχοΊ τοϋ κόσμου (partit. gen.), the poor of the human race, Jas. ii. ο ; but the more correct reading is that (A LTTr WH viz. τω κόσμω [unto the world'\, i. e. the ungodly world being judge, cf. W. § 31, 4 a.; B. § 133, 14; [R. V. as to the tcorld (see next head, and cf. κΰσμο{, 7)]. trop. destitute of the Christian virtues and ike eternal riches. Rev. iii. 1 7 ; like the Lat. innps, i. q. helpless, powerless to accomplish an end: στοιχ(Ία, Gal. iv. 9 [' bringing no rich endowment of spiritual treasure ' (Bp. Lghtft.)]. 3. univ. tacking in anything, with a dat. of the respect: τψ nvtiitan, as respects their spirit, i. e. destitute of the wealth of learning and intel- lectual culture which the schools afford (men of ttiia class most readily gave themselves up to Christ's teach- ing and proved themselves fitted to lay hold of the heav- enly treasure, Mt. xi. 25 ; Jn. Lx. 39 ; 1 Co. i. 26, 27 ; [aL make the idea more inward and ethical: 'conscious of their spiritual need']), Mt. v. 3; compare with this the Ep. of Barn. 19, 2 : fay άπλοϋι rij rnnfiia και πλυύσκοί τώ πνίύματι, abounding in Chiistian graces and the riches of the divine kingdom. (Sept. for 'j^, ^η^ Βίτ if3K, etc.)• ιτυγμή, -rjs, ή, (πύξ, fr. ΠΥΚΩ, Lat. pungo, pupugi, [pugnus; O. H. G. 'fust', Eng. 'fist'; cf. Curtius § 3'<4]), fr. Horn, down, Sept. for ^I'^JK (Ex. xxi. 18; Is. Iviii. 4), the fist : πυγμή ι/ίπτισθω rat Xfipas, to wash the hands with the fist, i. e. so that one hand is rubbed with the clenched fist of the other [R. V. mrg. (after Theoph., al.) up to the elbow; but cf. Edersheim, Jesus the Me»- siah, ii. 11], Mk. vii. 3 (where Tdf. πυκνά, see πυκνοί). [Cf. Jas. Morison, Com. ad loc.j * ■Τίνβων, -ωνος, ό, Python; 1. in Grk. mythology the name of the Pythian serpent or dragon that dwelt in the region of Pytho at the foot of Parnassus in Phocis. and was said to have guarded the oracle of Delphi and been slain by Apollo. 2. i. q. ξαψόνιον ^ιαιτικό» (Hesych. s. v.), a spirit of divination : πν(νμα πύθωνοί or more correctly (with LTTrWH) π«ί)μα πύθωνα (on the union of two substantives one of Λvhich has the force of an .adj. see Matthiae p. 962, 4; [Kiihner § 405, 1; Lob. Paralip. 344 s(].]), Acts xvi. 16; some interpreters think that the young woman here mentioned was a ven- triloquist, appealing to Plutarch, who tells us (mor. p. 414 e. de def. orac. 9) that in his time (γγαστρίμυθοι were called πύθων^ί ; [cf. Meyer].* iruKVOs, -ή, -όν, (ΠΥΚΩ, see ιτυγμή), fr. Horn, down, thick, dense, compact; in ref. to t\me, frequent, often re- curring, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschjl. down), 1 Tim. v. 23; neut. plur. πυκνά, as adv. [W. 4G3 (432); B. § 128, 2], vigorously, diligently, ( ? [cf. Morison as in πυγμή]), Mk. vii. 3 Tdf. ; ofen, Lk. v. 33 ; πυκνότ(ρον, more fre- quently, the ofener. Acts xxiv. 26.* mjKTtwu; (πύκτης a pugilist [see πυγμή, init.]); to he a boxer, to box, [A. V.fight'] : 1 Co. ix. 26. (Eur., Xen., Plat., Plut., al.) * •πύλη, -ηί, ή. [perh. fem. of πίλος (cf. Eng. pole i. e. axis) fr. r. πίλ-ω to turn (Curtius p. 715)], fr. Horn, down ; Sept. very often for ΊΓΒ>, occasionally for ."i^T sometimes for ππΐ) ; a gate (of the larger sort, in the wall either of a city or a palace; Thorn. ^lag. [p. 292, 4] πνΚαι f πι τβίχου? • βύραι (VI οικίας) : of a town, Lk. viL 12; Actsi.x. 24; .xvi. 13 LTTrWH; Ueb.xiii.l2; of the temple. Acts iii. 10; in the wall of a prison. Acts xii. 10; πΰλαι άίου, the gates of Hades (likened to a vast prison; hence the ^ keys' of Hades, Rev. i. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (on which see κατισχύω) ; Sap. xvi. 13; 3 Maoc V. 51, and often by prof. writ. ; see Grimm on 3 Mace V. 51. in fig. disc. i. q. access or entrance into any ■tate: Mt. vii. 13*, 13•- R G Τ br. Tr WH mrg,, U RG ττυΧων 558 ττνρράζω Lbr.Tbr.TrWII; Lk. xiii. 24 RLmrg. [On its omission see προβατικΟ!•2 ' Ίτυλών, -ωκοί, ό, (πύλι;), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept. often for nnJ3, sometimes for "ι;?©; 1. alargegale: of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20 ; of a house, Acts x. 1 7 ; plur. (of the gates of a cit)), Acts xiv. 13 ; Rev. xxi. 12, 13, 15,21,25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior pari of a housf, into which one enters through the gate, jjorch : Mt. xxvi. 71 (of. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ij θύρα τοϋ πυ- λώνας, ib. Ι.'ΐ.* Ίτυνθάνομαι ; impf. ϊιτννθανόμην ; 2 aor. ΐπυθόμην ; [cf. Curtius § 328]; a depon. verb; as in class. Grk. fr. Horn, down 1. to inquire, ask : foil, by an indir. quest. — w. the indie. Acts x. 18 ; with the opt., Jn. xiii. 24 R G ; Lk. XV. 26 ; xviii. 36 ; Acts xxi. 33 ; foil, by a dir. quest.. Acts iv. 7; .x. 29; xxiii. 19; παρά τινός τι [Β. 167 (146)], Jn. iv. 52; παρά tivus foil, by an indir. quest, w. the indie. Mt. ii. 4 ; τϊ πtμ^ nvos, Acts xxiii. 20. 2. to ascertain by inquiry : foil, by on. Acts xxiii. 34 [A. V. un(lerstood'\* Trip, gen. πυρός, τό, [prob. fr. Skr. pu 'to purify' (cf. Germ, feuer) ■ Vanieek p. 541 ; Curtius § 385], fr. Hom. down; Hebr. EiX; /re: Mt. iii. 10, 12; vii. 19; xvii. 15; Mk. ix. 22 ; Lk. iii. 9,17; ix. 54 ; Jn. xv. 6 ; Acts ii. 1 9 ; xxviii. 5 ; 1 Co. iii. 13 ; Heb. xi. 34 ; Jas. iii. 5 ; v. 3 ; Rev. viii. 5, 7; ix. 17, 18; xi. 5 ; xiii. 13; xiv. 18; xv. 2; xvi. 8 ; XX. 9 ; α^τίΐν πϋρ, to kindle a fire, Lk. xxii. 55 [T Tr txt. WII πιριάπτ.] ; ΐβριξι πυρ κα\ βύον, Lk. xvii. 29; κατάκαιαν τι «V [Τ om. WII br. eV] πυρί, Rev. xvii. 16; xviii. 8 ; καίομαι πυρί, Mt. xiii. 40 [R L Τ WH κατ-ακ.] ; Heb. xii. 18 [W. § 31, 7 d.]; Rev. viii. 8; x.\i. 8; φλί,ξ πυρός, a fiery flame or flame of fire. Acts vii. 30 ; 2 Th. i. 8 L txt. Tr txt. ; Heb. i. 7; Rev. i. 14; ii. 18; xix. 12, (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Alex. ; Is. xxix. 6) ; πϋρ φλογός, a flam- ing fire or fire of flame, 2 Th. i. 8 R G L mrg. Τ Tr mig. WII (Ex. iii. 2 cod. Vat. ; Sir. xiv. 19) ; λαμπά8€ς πυρός, lamps of fire, Rev. iv. 5 ; στΐλοι πυρός, Rev. χ. 1 ; άνθρα- κας π. coals of fire, Ro. xii. 20 (see άνθμαξ) ; γλώσσαι ώσ(ΐ ττυρός, which had the shape of little flames, Acts ii. 3 ; 6οκιμύζ(ΐν δίά πυρός, 1 Pet. i. 7 ; πυροϋσθαι (see πυ- ρόω, b.) €« π. Rev. iii. 18; ώς 8ιά πυρός, as one who in a conflagration has escaped through the fire not unin- jured, i. e. dropping the fig. not tcithout damage, 1 Co. iii. 15; u/xo Sxn, Zech. iii. 2, cf. Am. iv. 11. of the fire of hell we find the foil, expressions, — which are to be taken either tropically (of the e.xtreme penal tor- ments which the wicked are to undergo after their life on earth ; so in the discourses of Jesus), or literally (so apparently in the Apocalypse) : τό πΰρ, Mk. ix. 44, 46, [T Wllom. Trbr. both verses], 48; τό πΰρ τό αιώνιοι», Mt.xviii.8; χχν. 41,cf. 4 Mace. xii. 12; aa/Sftrroi', jNIk. ix. 43, 45 [G Τ Tr WH om. L br. the cl.]; πυρός αιωνίου 8ίκην ύπ(χ€ΐν, Jude 7 ; yUvva του πυρός, Mt. v. 22 ; xviii. 9 ; Mk. ix. 47 [RGTrbr.]; κάμινος τ. τηιρός, Mt. xiii. 42, 50, (Dan. iii. 6) ; ή λίμνη τοΰ πυρός. Rev. xix. 20; xx. 10, 14, 15; mipi τηρ€ΐσθαι, 2 Pet. iii. 7; βασανισθηναι iv πυρί. Rev. xiv. 10 (cf. Lk. xvi. 24); βάπτιζαν τιχά πυρί (see /3α- rn'fo), Π. b. bb.), Mt. iii. 11; Lk. iii. 16. The tongue is called πϋρ, as though both itself on fire and setting other things on fire, partly by reason of the fiery spirit which governs it, partly by reason of the destructive power it exercises, Jas. iii. 6 ; since fire disorganizes and sunders things joined together and compact, it is used to symbolize dissension, Lk. xii. 49. INIetaphorical expressions: ΐκ πυρός άρπαζαν, io snatch from danger of destruction, Jude 23 ; πυρΊ αΚίζισθαι (see άλίζω), Mk. ix. 49; ζήλος πυρός, fiery, burning anger [see f^Xos, 1], Heb. X. 27 (πϋρ ζήλου, Zeph. i. 18 ; iii. 8) ; God is called πϋρ κατανάλισκαν, as one who when angry visits the ob- durate with penal destruction, Heb. .xii. 29.• Ίπιρά, -OS, IJ, (πϋρ), fr. Hom. down, a fire, a pile of burning fuel : Acts xxviii. 2 sq.* ττνργοϊ. -ου, ό, (akin to Germ. Burg, anciently Purg ; [yet cf. Curtius § 413]), as in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, α tower; a fortified structure rising to a consideralile lieight, to repel a hostile attack or to enable a watchman to see in every direction. The πύργος (v τω Σιλωάμ [{<[. v.)] seems to designate a tower in the walls of Jerusalem near the fountain of Siloam, Lk. xiii. 4 ; the tower occu- pied by the keepers of a vineyard is spoken of in Mt. xxi. 33 ; Mk. xii. 1, (after Is. v. 2) ; a tower-shaped building as a safe and convenient dwelling, Lk. xiv. 28.* irupeV ; (πϋρ) ; (Vulg., Cels., Senec., al. fehricito) ; to be sick with a fever: Mt. viii. 14; Mk. i. 30. (Eur., Arstph., Plut., Lcian., Galen, al.) * injp€TOs, -οϋ, ό, (πϋρ) ; 1. fery heat (Hom. II. 22, 31 [but interpreters now give it the sense of 'fever' in this pass. ; cf. Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. ; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 60 § 14]). 2. feoer: Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31 ; Lk. iv. 39 ; Jn. iv. 52 ; Acts xxviii. 8, (Hippocr., Arstph., Plat., sqq. ; Deut. xxviii. 22) ; πυρ- μίγας, Lk. iv. 38 (as Galen de different, feb. 1, 1 says σΰνηθις rois ίατρο'ις ονό- μαζαν . . . τον μίγαν Tc κα\ μικρόν πυριτόν \ [cf . \\ etstein on Lk. I.e.]).• iriipivos, -7, -ov, (πϋρ), fiery: θώρακας πυρ• i. e. .shining like fire. Rev. ix. 17. (Ezek. xxviii. 14, 16; Aristot., Polyb., Plut., al.) • ΊΓυρόω : Pass., pres. πυρονμαι ; pf. ptcp. παπυρωμίνος ; (πϋρ) ; fr. Aeschyl. and I'ind. down ; to burn with fire, to set on fire, to kindle ; in the N. T. it is used only in the pass. a. to be on fire, to burn : prop. 2 Pet. iii. 1 2 ; trop. of the heat of the passions : of g r i e f, 2 Co. xi. 29 [Eng. A'^ersions burn (often understood of indig- nation, but cf. Meyer); W. 153 (145)]; of anger, with Toir ^υμοίί added, i. q. to be incensed, indignant, 2 Mace. iv. 38 ; x. 35 ; xiv. 45 ; to be inflamed with s e .\- ual desire, 1 Co. vii. 9. b. pf. ptcp. παπυρωμί- νος, made to glow [R. V. refined']: Rev. i. 15 [(cf. B. 80 (69) n.)] ; /uW of fire; fiery, ignited : τα βάλη τα πιπ. darts filled with inflammable substances and set on fire, Eph. vi. 16 (Apollod. bib!. 2, 5, 2 § 3) ; incited by fire and purged of dross : χρυσίον πιπυρ• (Κ πυρός, [refined by fire']. Rev. iii. 18 (so πυρόω in the Sept. for γ]ΊΧ ; as TO afyyipiov. Job xxii. 25 ; Zech. xiii. 9 ; Ps. xi. (xii.) 7 ; Ixv. (Ixvi.) 10).* ττυρράζω ; i. q. πυρράς γίνομαι, to become glowing, groxo ιτυρρος 559 ττως red, be red: Mt. xvi. 2 sq. [but Tbr. WII reject the pass.] (Byzant. writ. ; πυρρίζω in Sept. and Pliilo.) * ■mippis, -ά, -OK, (fr. ττϋρ), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, hai-inr/ the color of fire, red: Rev. vi. 4; xii. 3. Sept. several times for DIX.* Πυρροί [('fiery-red'; Fick; Griech. Personennamen, p. 75)], -ου, ό, Pyrrhus, the proper name of a man : Actsx.x. 4 GLTTrWII.* inipioris, -eais, ή, (ττυρόω), η burning: Rev. xviii. 9, 18; the burning by which metals are roasted or reduced ; bv a fig. drawn fr. the refiner's fire (on which cf. Prov. xxvii. 21), calamities or trials that test character : 1 Pet. iv. 12 (TertuUian adv. Gnost. 12 ne expavescatis ustio- nem, quae agitur in vobis in tentationem), cf. i. 7 [(ή πύρωσα της δοκιμασία!, ' Teaching ' etc. 16, 5)]. (In the same and other senses by Aristot., Theophr., Plut-, al.) * [ττώ, an enclitic particle, see μηπω etc.] Ίτωλίω, -ώ ; imp{. (πώλουν; i ax>r. ('πώλησα; pres. pass. πωλούμαι ; (πί\ω, πίλομαι, to turn, turn about, [Curtius § U33 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun πωλη; Lob. in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 hot.] πωλούμαι, Lat. versor, foil, by els with ace. of place, to f recjuent a place ; cf. the Lat. venio and veneo) ; fr. Hdt. down ; Sept. for 130 ; prop, to barter, i. e. to sell : absol. (opp. to ayopa- ffti/), J>k. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; oi πωλοϋντ(ς (opp. to o! άγομάζοντα, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 1 2 ; xxv. 9 ; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with ace. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44; xix. 21 ; x.xi. 12 ; Mk. x. 21 ; xi. 15 ; Lk. [xii. 33] ; xviii. 22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14, 16; Acts v. 1 ; supply αυτόν, Acts iv. 37 ; αυτά, ib. 34 ; pass. 1 Co. x. 25 ; with a gen. of price added, Mt. x. 29 ; Lk. xii. 6.* •irmXos, -ου, ό (in class. Grk. ij also), [Lat. pullus, O. H. G.folo, Eng. /oa/; perh. allied with nais; cf. Cur- tius § 387]; 1. a colt, the youncj of the horse: so very often fr. Hom. down. 2. univ. a young crea- ture : Ael. V. h. 4, 9 ; spec, of the young of various ani- mals ; in the N. T. of a young ass, an ass's coll : Mt. x.xi. 2, 5, 7; Mk. xi. 2, [3 Lmrg.], 4, 5, 7; Lk. xix. 30, 33, 35; Jn. -xii. 15, (also in Geopon.) ; Sept. several times for Ί'^' ; for nS,'" a female ibex, Prov. v. 19.* irii-iroTe, adv., ever, at any time: Lk. xix. 30; Jn. i. 18; V. 3 7 ; vi. 35 ; viii. 33 ; iJn. iv. 1 2. [(From Hom. down.)] * ττωρόω, -ώ : 1 aor. ϊπώρωσα (Jn. xii. 40 TTrWlI); pf. π^πώρωκα \ pf. pass. ptcp. πιπωρωβίνο! ; 1 aor. pass. (πωρωθην; (πώρος, hard skin, a hardening, induration); ίο cover with a thick skin, to harden by covering with a callus, [R. V. everywhere simply ίο harden] : metaph., Kapbiav, to make the heart dull, Jn. xii. 40 ; Pass, to groio hard or callous, become dull, lose the potcer of under- standing: Ro. xi. 7 ; τα νοήματα, 2 Co. iii. 14 ; ή καμδι'α, Mk. vi. 52 ; viii. 1 7. Cf. Fritzsche, Com. on Mk. p. 78 sq. ; on Rom. ii. p. 451 sq. [(Hippocr., Aristot., al.)]* ττώρωσ-ΐϊ, -(ως, ή, (πωρόω, q. v.), prop, the covering with a callus ; trop. ohiuseness of menial discernment, dulled perception : yiyovk Tivt, the mind of one has been blunted [R. V. α hardening halh befallen], Ro. xi. 25 ; της καρδίας "[hardening of heart], of stubbornness, obduracy, Mk. iii. 5; Eph. iv. 18. '"(HioDOcr.)!* ircis, (fr. obsol. ΠΟΣ, whence πού, ποΐ, etc. [cf. Curtius § 631]), adv., [fr. Hom. down] ; I. in interroga» tion ; how? in what way f — in a direct question, f olL by a. the indicative, it is the expression a. of one seeking information and desiring to be taught: Lk. i. 34 ; x. 26 ; Jn. iii. 9 ; ix. 26 ; 1 Co. xv. 35 [cf. W. 266 (250)]; πώς ουν, Jn. ix. 10 Tdf. (but LWHbr. ουκ), 19; Ro. iv. 10. p. of one about to controvert another, and emphatically deny that the thing inquired about has happened or been done : Mt. xii. 29 ; Mk. iii. 23 ; Lk. xi. 18; Jn. iii. 4, 12; v. 44, 47; vi. 52; ix. 16; 1 Jn. iii. 1 7 ; iv. 20 ; Ro. iii. 6 ; vi. 2 ; 1 Co. xiv. 7, 9, 1 6 ; 1 Tim. iii. 5 ; Heb. ii. 3 ; zeal πώς, Mk. iv. 13; Jn. xiv. 5 [here Ltxt. Tr WH om. και] ; πώς olv, Mt. xii. 26 ; Ro. x. 14 R G ; πώς Se, Ro. x. 14' RGLmrg., W RGT, 15 RG, (on this see in b. below), where something is asserted and an affirmative answer is expected, πώς ουχί is used : Ro. viii. 32; 2 Co. iii. 8. y. of surprise, intimating that what has been done or is said could not have been done or said, or not rightly done or said, — being equiv. to hoto is it, or how has it come to pass, that etc. : Gal. ii. 14 G L Τ TrWH; Alt. xxii. 12; Jn. iv. 9 ; vi. 52 ; vii. 15; πώι Xc'yftr, λίγονσι, κτλ., Mk. xii. 35; Lk. xx. 41 ; Jn. viii. 33; και πώς, Lk. xx. 44 ; Acts ii. 8 ; καΐ πώς σϋ Xc'yeir, Jn. xii. 34 ; xiv. 9 [here L Τ WH om. Tr br. και] ; πώί ουκ, Jn. vi. 42 [here Τ WH Trtxt. πώί kCk] ; Mt. xxii. 43 ; πώς ού, how is it that . . . not, why not ? Mt. xvi. 11 ; Mk. viii. 21 RGLmrg.; iv. 40 [RGT]; Lk. .xii. 56. b. the delib. subjunctive (where the question is, how that can be done which ought to be done) : πώς πληρωθώσιν αί γραφαί, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be ful- filled; lo be fulfilled? Mt. xxvi. 54 ; πώς φΰγητ(, how shall ye (who wish to escape) escape etc. Mt. .xxiii. 33 ; add, πώς ουν, Ro. X. 14 L Τ TrWH; πώς Si, x. 14» Ltxt. Τ ΤΓλνΐΙ; 14' L TrWH; 15 LTTr WH, (Sir. .xlix. 11); cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 405 sq. c. foil, by ά» with the optative : πώς yap av δνναίμην; Acts viii. 31 (on which see av. III. p. 34'). II. By a somewhat negligent use, occasionally met with even in Attic writ, but more freq. in later authors, πώς is found in indi- rect discourse, where regularly όπως ought to have stood ; cf. W. § 57, 2 fin. ; [L. and S. s. v. IV.]. a. with the indicative — pres.: Mt. vi. 28; Mk. xii. 41; Lk. xii. 27; Acts xv. 36; iCo. iii. 10; Eph. v. 15; CoL iv. 6; iTim. iii. 15; το πώ5 (on the art. see ό, II. 10 a.); with the impf. Lk. xiv. 7; with the perf. Rev. iii. 3; with the aor., Mt. xii. 4 ; Mk. ii. 26 [here Tr WH br. πώί]; Lk. viii. 36; Acts Lx. 27, etc. ; after άvayιvώσκ€ιv, Mk. xii. 26 Τ TrWH; how it came to pass that, etc. Jn. ix. 15; with the f ut. : μιριμνά, πώς άρίσΐΐ (because the direct quest, would be πωΓ άρίσω;), 1 Co. vii. 32-34 [but L Τ Tr WH -στ;] ; (ζήτουν πώς αυτόν άπολίσουσιν, how they shall destroy him (so that they were in no uncer- tainty respecting his destruction, but were only deliber- ating about the way in which they will accomplish it), Mk. xi. 18 R G (but the more correct reading here, ace. to the best Mss., including cod. Sin., is άπολίσωσιν 'how they should destroy him' [cf. W. § 41 b. 4 b.; B. § 139, 560 Payau βΙ ; see next head]). b. with the subjunctive, of the aor. and in deliberation : Mk. xi. 18 L Τ Tr W'll ; xiv. 1, 11 [II G]; Mt. x. 19; Lk. xii. 11; to πώι, I>k. xxii. 2, i; Ac-Is iv. 21. III. in exclamation, Itow: trui ΒϋσκοΧάν (t 6νσκό\ω!, Mk. x. 23; Lk. zviii. 24; with a verl\ lioiv (greatly) : jrit σννϊχομαι, Lk. xii. 50 ; jrit ίφίλα αίτόν, .In. .\i. 36. iriis, an enclitic particle, on which see under (ϊπως [L a », III. 14] and μήπω{- [Ρ, ρ : the practice of donbling ρ (after a prep, or an sagm. ) is sometimes Jisregarded by the Mss., and accordiugly liy the critical editors ; so, too, iu the middle of a word ; see αναντίρη- TOS, άπυρίτττύβ, αραβών, &ραφο$, ξιαρ-η'γνυμι, ^πιράιττο}, firipi- ντω, τταραρίω. ^ajSSlXw, ^οι/τί^αι, ^αττί^ω, ^ίπτα», ξύομαι, etc.; pf. \V. § 13, 1 1).; Β. 32 (28 sci) ; 117/. Λρρ. p. 163; J df. I'roleg. p. 80. Recent editors. L Τ (cf. the I'roleg. to his 7th ed. p. cd.xxvi.), Kueuen and Cobct (cf. their I'raef. p. xcvi.), Wii (hut not Treg.), also follow the older ilss. in omitting the breathings from pp in the middle of a word ; cf. Lipsius, Grammat. Uutersucli. p. 18 sq. ; Greg. Corinth, ed. Bast p. 732 sc).; in opposition see Donaldson, Greek Gram. p. 16; W. 48 (47). On the smooth breathing over the initial ρ when ρ begins two successive syllables, see I.ipsius u. s. ; WH. u. s. pp. 163, 170 ; Kiilnier § 67 Anm. 4 ; GoetUimj, Ac- cent, p. 205 note; and on the general subject of the breath- ings cf. the Proleg. to Tdf. eJ. 8 p. 10.') sq. and reff. there. On the usage of modern edd. of the classics cf. Veitch s. vv. ^άτττω, β4ζω. etc.] 'Ροάβ (and 'Ραχάι3, Mt. i. 5; 'Ραχάβη. -175, in Joseph, [antt. 5, 1, 2 etc.]), ή, (^Π"; 'broad', 'ampli:'), Rahah, a harlot of Jericho: lieb. xi. 31 ; Jas. ii. 2.j. [Cf. B.D. s. v.; Bp. Lghtft. Clement of Rome, App. (Lend. 1877) p. 41.3.]• ^οββ£, Τ WH ραβ.3(: [cf. Β. p. 6 ; WH. App. p. 1.55; see ii, t], (Uebr. 'a-», fr. 3"« much, great), prop, my great one, mi/ honorable sir; (others incorrectly rej^ard the '7 as the yodh paragogic) ; Rahht, a title with whi'h the Jews were ΛνοηΙ to address their teachers (and also to honor them when not addressing them ; cf. the French monsieur, monsei'gneur) : Mt. xxiii. 7 ; translated into Greek by 5ώπσκάΧο!, Mt. xxiii. 8 GLTTrU'H; John the Baptist is addressed by this title, Jn. iii. 2G ; Jesus: both by his disciples, Mt. xxvi. 25, 49; Mk. ix. 5; xi. 21 ; Jn. i. 3S (39), 49 (50) ; iv. 3i , ix. 2 ; xi. 8 ; and by others, Jn. iii. 2 ; vi. 25 ; repeated to indicate earnest- ness [cf. W. § 65, 5 a.] ραββί. ραββί, R G in ^H. xxiii. 7 and Mk. xiv. 45 ; (so "31 '31 for •;χ •2ϊί in the Targ. on 2 K. ii. 12). Cf. Lijlilf. Horae Hebr. et Talmud, on Jit. xxiii. 7; Pressel in Herzog ed. 1 xii. p. 4 71 stj. ; [Oiua- burg in .Max.'s Kitto, s. v. Rabbi ; Hamburger, Real-En- cyclopadie, s. v. Rabban, vol. ii. p. 943 sq.].* ^αββον( (so Rec. in Mk. x. 51) and ραββοννί [WH •i/, see reff. under ραββι, init.], (Chald. ji3" lord , [3T master, chief, prince ; cf. Levy, Chald. WB. Ub. d. Tar- gumim, ii. p. 401), liubboiii, Habbuni (apparently [yet cf. reif. below] the Galihran pronunciation of 'Jiai), a title of honor and reverence by which Jesus is ad- dressed; as interpreted by John, equiv. to διδύσκαλοί: Jn. XX. 16; Mk. x. 51, (see ραββί). Cf. Keim iii. p. .ϊβΟ [Eng. trans, vi. p. 311 sq.]; DeUlzsch in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1S76, pp. 409 and 606; also for IS 78, p. 7; [Ginsbiirg and Ilamliiirjer. as in *he preced- ing word; Kautzsch, Gram. d. P>ihl.-.\ram. p. 10].* ραβείζω; 1 aor. pass, ίμραβ^ίσθηυ and (so L Τ Tr AVH) ΐμαβδίσθην (see P, p) ; (ριιβίος); ίο beat with rods: Acts xvi. 22; 2 Co. xi. 25. (Judg. vi. 11 : Ruth ii. 17; Arstph., Diod., al.) • ράβδος, -ου. ή, [prob. akin to panis, Lat. verber; cf. Curtius § 513], in various senses fr. Hom. down; Sept. for nOO, £3?"^, Spn nJi'U'?) etc., a slnft', tcalkhig-stick : i. q. α Iwig, rod, branch, Ueb. ix. 4 (Xum. xvii. 2 sqq. Hebr. text xvii. 16 sqq.) ; Rev. xi. 1 ; a rod. with which one is beaten, 1 Co. iv. 21 (Plato, legg. ο p. 700 c; Plut., al. ; πατάσσ(ΐν τίνα iv ρί'ιβδω. Ex. -xxi. 20; Is. x. 24); α staff: as used on a journey, Mt. x. 10; Mk. vi. 8; Lk. i.x. 3; or to lean upon, Heb. xi. 21 (after the Sept. of Gen. xlvii. 3 1 , where the translators read Πϋο, for Πφρ a bed ; [cf. προσκυνάω, a.]) ; or by shepherds. Rev. ii. 27; xii. 5; xix. 15, in which passages as tV όάβδω ττοιμαιναν is fig. applied to a king, so ράβ8φ σ<8ηρά, icilh ο rod 0/ iron, indicates the severest, most rigorous, rule , hence pajSot is equiv. to a royal sceptre (like U^u, Ps. ii. 9; xiv. 8; for ΰ•2Ύ^, Esth. iv. 11 ; v. 2): Ileb. i. 8 (fr. Ps. xiv. ραβδούχος, -ου. 6, (ράβδο! and ίχο); cf. ΐΰνονχοί), one who cnrrit'S the rods i. e. the fasces, a liclor (a public offi- cer who bore the fasces or staff and other insignia of office before the magistrates), [A. V. Serjeants'] : Acts xvi. 35, 38. (Polyb. ; Diod. 5, 40 ; Dion. Hal. ; Ildian. 7,8, 10 [5 ed. Bekk.] ; δια τΐ λικτάρικ Toit ραβδούχου! ονομάζουσι; Plut. quaest. Rom. c. (!7.)• ■Ρογαί [so WII] or 'Payai [RGLTTr], (ηη [i- e. 'friend']. Gen. xi. 18), ό, Ragau [A. V. Reu; (ones Rehu)'], one of the ancestors of Abraham i Lk. iiL 35. [B- D. Am. ed. s. v. Reu.^ * ραΖιούρ'^ημα 561 pern pαSιovργη■xo^ -ror, τό^ (fr. ρα^(ονργ<ω, and this fr. padc* •vi/yof, compounded of paBtot and £ΡΓΟ. A paitovpyas is one who does a thing with little effort and adroitly ; then, in a bad sense, a man who is facile and forward ui the perpetration of crime, a knave, a rogue), a piece of hmcerij, rascalily, viUany: πονηρόν. Acts xviii. 14. (Dion. Hal., Plut., Lcian. ; eccles. writ.) * ρς-Βιουργία, -ay, η, (see ρα8ιούργημα^ cf . πανουργία) ; 1. prop, ease in duing, facilitij. 2. levity or easiness in thinking and acting ; love of a lazy and effeminate life (Xen.). 3. unscrupulousness, -cunninij, mischief, [A. V. cillanyl : Acts xiii. 10. (Polyb. 12, 10, 5 ; often in Plut.)• [ραίνω ; see ραντίζω.^ ρακά (Tdf. ραχά; [the better accentuation seems to be -a; cf. Kaulzsjh, Gram. d. Bibl.-Aram. p. 8]), a Chald. word ap"[ [but ace. to Kautzsch (u.s.p. lOi not the Stat. emph. of ρ""ΐ, but shortened fr. [P'lJ (Hebr. p'l), empty, i. e. α senseless, empty-headed man, a term of reproach used by the Jews in the time of Christ [B. D. s. V. Raca ; Wiinsche, Erlauteruag u. s. w. p. 4 7] : Mt. v. 22.* paKos, -ovs, TO, (ρηγννμι), a piece lorn off; spec, a hit of cloth ; cloth : Mt. i.x. 16 ; Mk. ii. 21 [here L Tr mrg. ράκκο;]. (Horn., Hdt., Arstph., Soph., Eur., Joseph., Sept., al.) • 'Papi [T WH 'Ραμά ; cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Ramah, 1 init.], (no") i. e. a high jilace, height), ή, [indecl. AVin. 61 (GO)], Ramah, a town of the tribe of Benjamin, sit- uated si.x Roman miles north of Jerusalem on the road leading to Bethel ; now the village of er Ram : Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer. .xxxviii. (xx.xi.) 15). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v.; Graf in the Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1854, p. 851 sqq. ; Pressel in Herzog xii. p. 515 sq. ; Furrer in Schenkel BL. V. p. 37; [BB.DD.].• ραντ(ζω ; (fr. pavros besprinkled, and this fr. ραίνω); 1 aor. eppavTiaa and (so L Τ Tr AVH) ίράντισα (see P, p) ; [1 aor. mid. subjunc. ραντίσωνται (sprinkle themsetres), ilk. vii. 4 AVH txt. (so Volkmar, Weiss, al.) after codd. >5B]; pf. p\ss. ptcp. (μραντισμίνοί (Tdf. pfpai/r., L Tr WII pepavT. with smooth breathing ; see P, p) ; for ραίνω, more com. in class. Grk. ; to sprinlie: prop, τινά, Heb. LX. 13 (on the rite here referred to cf. Num. -xix. 2-10; Win. RWB. s. V. Sprengwasser ; [B. D. s. v. Purifica- tion]) ; lb. 19; τί α'ιματι, ib. 21; [Rev. .xix. 13 WII (see vfpίppJivω)'\. to cleajise by sprinklinfj, hence trop. to purifi/, cleanse : ϊρραντισμίνοι rat Kap&ias (on this ace. see B. § 134, 7) από κτλ. lleb. χ. 22. (Athen. 12 p. 521 a.; for Ilebr. Ktari, Ps. 1. (11.) 9; for niJ, Lev. vi. 27; 2 K. ix. 33.)• pavTur|i6s, -oO, 6, (ραντίζω, q. v.), used only by bibl. and eccl. writ., a sprinkling (purification) : αΐμα ραντισμοΰ, Uood of sprinkling, i. e. appointed for sprinkling (serving to purify), Heb. xii. 24 (ΰδωρ ραντισμοΰ for ΤΊ'Λ^Τ} 'Ο, Num. xix. 9, 13, 20 sq.) ; tit ραντισμον αΐματο; Ίι;σοϋ Xp. i. e. els TO ραντίζ(σθαι (or 'iva ραντίζωνται) aiuaTt *1ησ. Xp., that they may be purified (or cleansed from the guilt of their sins) by the blood of Christ, 1 Pet. i. 2 [IV. § 30, 2 O.J.• ραττίζω ; f ut. ραπίσω [cf . Β. 3 7 (3 2 sq.)] ; 1 aor. ίρράτησα and (so L Ϊ Tr WH) ΐράπισα (see P, ρ ) ; (fr. ραττίΓ a rod) ; 1. to smile with a rod or staff (Xenophanes in Diog. Laert. 8, 36 ; Hdt., Dem., Polyb., Plut., al.). 2. lo smile in the face with the palm of the hand, to box the ear: τινά, Mt. xxvi. G7 (where it is distinguished fr. κολαφίζω [ A. V. buffet~\ ; for Suidas says ραπίσαι- ■πατάσσιιν την γνί'ιβον άπλί) tj χαρί not vrhh the fist; hence the Vulg. renders it palmas in faciem ei dederunt; [A. V. mrg. (R. V. mrg.) adopt sense 1 above]) ; τίνα (V. [LT Tr txt. AVII iiV] TijV σιαγόνα, Mt. v. 39 (IIos. xi. 4). Cf. Fischer, De vitiis Lexx. etc. p. 61 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 175; \_Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113, 10; Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 71].• ράττισ-μα, -ror, to, (ραπίζω, q. V.) ; 1. a blow with a rod or a staff or a scourge, (Antiph. in Athen. 14 p. 023 b.; Anthol., Lcian.). 2. a blow with the flat of the hand, a slap in the face, box on the ear : βάλλ€ΐν τίνα ραπίσμασιν (see βάλλω, 1), Mk. xiv. 65; διδόναι τ»!-! ράπι- σμα, Jn. -wiii. 22; ραπίσματα, Jn. xix. 3, [but in all thrte e.xx. R. V. mrg. recognizes sense 1 (see reft. s. v. pa- πίζω)1* ^ ραψ($, -I'Sor, ή, (ράτττω to sew), α needle: Mt. xix. 24; Mk. X. 25 ; Lk. xviii. 25 Rec, [(cf. /tapijAor)]. Class. Grk. more com. uses βιΚόνη (q. v.) ; see Lob. ίά Phryn. p. 90 ; [λν. 25].• [ραχά, see ρακά.^ "Ραχάβ, see 'Ραά/3. 'Ραχήλ, (^Π"ΐ a ewe or sheep), ή, Rachel [cf. B. D. s. v.], the wife of the patriarch Jacob: Mt. ii. 18 (fr. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 15).* 'Ρίβ('κκα (np3"i, fr. p3"i unused in Hebrew but in Arabic ' to bind,' ' fasten ' ; hence the subst. i. q. ' en- snarer,' fascinating the men by her beauty), ή, Rebecca, the wife of Isaac : Ro. ix. 10.* ρ€'δη [al. piba; on the first vowel cf. Tdf.'s note on Rev. as below; WH. App. p. 15Γ], (aec. to Quintil. 1, 5, 57 [cf. 68] a Gallic word [cf. Vanicek, Fremdwdrter, s. V. reda]), -Tjr, ή, a chariot, " a species of vehicle having four wheels" (Isidor. Hispal. orig. 20, 12 (§ 511), [cf. Rich, Diet, of Anti(]. s. v. Rheda]): Rev. xviii. 13.• 'Ρίμφάν (R G), or 'Ριφάν (L Tr), or 'Ρομφάν (Τ), [or 'Ρομφά WII, see their App. on Acts as below], Remphan [so A. v.], or Rephan [so R.V.], Romphan, [or Rompha'\, a Coptic pr. name of Saturn : .Acts vii. 43, fr. Amos v. 26 where the Sept. render by 'Ραιφάν [or 'Ρίφάν] the Hebr. 'Λ'2, thought by many to be ecjuiv. to the Syriac * ,Λ. G - c - •ols, and the Arabic .\^jS• designations of Saturn; but by others regarded as an appellative, signifying 'stand,' 'pedestal' (Germ. Oeriiit; so Hitzig), or 'statue' (so Gesenius), formed from p3 after the analogy of such forms as pi3n, Sup, etc. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Saturn; Gesenius, Thes. p. 669»; J. G. MUller in Hei^ zog xii. 736 ; Men in Schenkel i. p. 516 sq.; Schroder in Riehm p. 234 ; [^Raudissin in Herzog ed. 2 s. v. Sat- urn, and reff. there given ; B. D. s. v. Remphan].• ρ€ω : fut. ρίύσω (in Grk. writ, more com. ρήσομοί, see ρέω 562 ρήμα \ν. 89 (85) ; [Β. 67 (59)] ; cf. Loh. ad Phryn. p. 739) ; [(Skr. sru; cf. Lat. y?uo; Eng. siream; Curtius§ 517)]; fr. Horn, down; Sept. for 311; to flow, Jn. vii. 38. [COMP. : τταραρρί'ω.] * 'ΡΕΩ, see (ΐπον. 'Ρήγιον, -ου, τό, Rhegium (now Reggio), a town and promontory at the extremity of the Bruttian peninsula, opposite Messana [^Messitia^ in Sicily ; (it seems to liave got its name from the Greek verb pijyw/it, because at that point Sicily was believed to have been ' rent away ' from Italy; so Pliny observes, hist. nat. 3, 8, (14); [Diod. Sic. 4, 85 ; Strabo 6, 258 ; Fhilo de incorrupt, mund. § 26 ; al. See Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]) : Acts xxviii. 13.* ^ήγμα, -Tor, τό, (ρήγνυμι), what has been broken or rent asunder; a. a fracture, breach, cleft: Hippocr., Dem., [Aristot.], Polyb., al.; for i!'p3, Am. vi. 11 Alex. b. plur. for 0';ττρ, rent clothes: 1 K. xi. 30 sq. ; 2 K. ii. 12. c. fail, ruin : Lk. vi. 49.* ρήγνυμι (Mt. ix. 17) and ρήσσα (Horn. H. 18, 571; 1 K. xi. 31; Mk. ii. 22 RG Lmrg.; ix. 18; [Lk. v. 37 Lmrg. ; (see below)]); fut. ρή^ω; 1 aor. ίρρηξα; pres. pass. 3 pers. plur. ρηγηνται ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. for J7p3 and I'Tp ; to rend, burst or break asunder, break up, break through ; a. univ. : tovs άσκούί, Mk. ii. 22 i Lk. v. 37; pass. Mt. ix. 17; i. q. to tear hi pieces [A.V. rend^ : τινά, Mt. vii. 6. b. sc. (υφροσννην (previously chained up, as it were), to break forth into joy : Gal. iv. 27, after Is. liv. 1 (the full phrase is found in Is. xlix. 13; lii. 9; [cf. B. § 130, 5]; in class. Grk. pηyvvvaι κΚαυθ- μόν, οίμωγην, Saxpva, esp. φωνην is used of infants or dumb persons beginning to speak ; cf. Passow s. v. 2, vol. ii. p. 1332*; [L. and S. s. v. I. 4 and 5]). o. i. q. σπα- ράσσω, to distort, convulse : of a demon causing convul- sions in a man possessed, Mk. ix. 18 ; Lk. Ix. 42; in both pass, many [so R. V. txt.] explain it to dash doicn, hurl to the ground, (a common occurrence in cases of epilepsy) ; in this sense in Artem. oneir. 1, 60 a wrestler is said ρήξαι τον άντίπαΚον. Hesych. gives ρηξαι• καταβα\(ΐν. Also pijtf ■ κατίβαλΐ. Cf. Kninoel or Fritzsche on Mk. ix. 18. [Many hold that ρήσσω in this sense is quite a different word from ρήγνυμι (and its collat. or poet. ρήσσω), and akin rather to (the onomatopoetic) άράσσω, ράσσω, to throw or dash down ; cf. Lobeck in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. § 114, s. v. ρψ/νυμι; Curtius, Das Verbum, pp. 162, 315; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 113, 7. See as exx. Sap. iv. 19; Herra. mand. 11,8; Const, apost. 6, 9 p. 165,14. Ci. προσρήγνυμι.^ (COMP. : δια-, irepi-, προσ- ρηγνυμι.) * [Svs.: ^■ή-γννμι, κατάγνυμι, θραύω: β. to rend, rend asunder, makes pointed reference to the separation of the parts ; κ. to break, denotes the destruction of a thing's unity or completeness ; β. to shatter, is suggestive of many fragments and minute dispersion. Cf. Schmidt ch. 115] {ι^μα, -TOf, TO, (fr. *PEi2, pf. pass. €'φημαι), fr. Theogn., Hdt., Pind. down ; Sept. chiefly for Ί3Τ ; also for ΙΏΝ, Π^ϊ?, Π5, ΓΤΐηΚ, etc.; 1. prop, that which is or has been uttered by the living voice, thing spoken, word, [cf. ΐποτ, also Xoyor, I. 1]; i.e. a. any sound produced by the voice and having a definite meaning : Mt. xxviL 14 ; p. yKoatrqs, Sir. iv. 24; φωνή ρημάτων, a sound of words, Heb. xii. 19 ; ρήματα άρρητα, [unspeakable words], 2 Co. xii. 4. b. Plur. τά ρήματα, speech, discourse, (because it consists of words either few or many [c£. Philo, leg. alleg. 3, 61 το Se ρήμα μίρος λόγου]) : Lk. viL 1 ; Acts ii. 14 ; words, sayings, Jn. viii. 20; x. 21 ; Act• [x. 44] ; xvi. 38 ; τά p. tivos, what one has said, Lk. x.xiv. 8, 11, or taught, Ro. x. 18 ; τα p. μου, my teaching, Jn. V. 47 ; xii. 47 sq ; xv. 7 ; τά p. ά e'yo) λαλώ, Jn. vi. 63; xiv. 10; \_ά\ηθ(ία! κ. σωφροσύνης p. άποφθ(γγοααι. Acts xxvi. 25]; ρήματα ζωήί αιωνίου ίχια, thy teaching begets eternal life, Jn. vi. 68 ; τά p. τοϋ θΐοϋ, utterances in which God through some one declares his mind, Jn. viii. 47 ; λαλίί Ttf τά p. toC Θ- speaks what God bids him, Jn. iii. 34 ; XaXciv πάντα τά ρήματα τής ζωή: ταύτη!, to de- liver the whole doctrine concerning this life, i. e. the life eternal, Acts v. 20 ; τά p. a δίδωκάί μοι, what thou hast bidden me to speak, Jn. xvii. 8 ; ρήματα \aKelv npos Ttva, (V ols etc. to teach one the things by which etc. Acts xi. 14 ; τά ρήματα τά προΐίρημίνα νπό τίνος, what one has foretold, 2 I'et. iii. 2 ; Jude 1 7 ; \α\(Ίν ρήματα βλά- σφημα €15 τίνα, to speak abusively in reference to one [see «is, B. Π. 2 c. β."]. Acts vi. 11 ; κατά τινοί, against a thing, ib. 13 [GLTTrAVHom. βλάσφ.]. c. a series of words joined together into a sentence (a declara- tion of one's mind made in words) ; a. univ. an utter- ance, declaration, (Germ, eine Aeusserung) : Mt. xxvi. 75; Mk. ix. 32; xiv. 72; Lk. ii. 50; ix. 45; xviii. 34; .\x. 26; Acts xi. 16; xxviii. 2.5; with adjectives, pij/ia apyov, IVIt. xii. 36 ; ίΐπ^'ϊν πονηρον ρήμα κατά τίνος, to assail one with abuse, Mt. v. 11 [R G ; al. om. p.]. β. a saying of any sort, as a message, a narrative: concerning some occurrence, XaXdv το p. πιρί τίνος, Lk. ii. 1 7 ; ρήμα της πίστΐως, the ivord offailh, i. e. concerning the neces- sity of putting faith in Christ, Ro. x. 8 ; α promise, Lk. i. 38; ii. 29 ; κα\ον θ(οΰ ρήμα, God's gracious, comforting promise (of salvation), Heb. vi. 5 (see καΚός, e.) ; καθα- ρίσας . . . t'v ρήματι, acc. to promise (prop, on the ground of his word of promise, viz. the promise of the pardon of sins; cf. Mk. xvi. 16), Eph. v. 26 [al. take p. here as i. q. ' the gospel,' cf. vi. 1 7, Ro. x. 8 ; (see Meyer ad loc.)]; the word by which some thing is commanded, di- rected, enjoined: Mt. iv. 4 [cf. W. 389 (364) n.] ; Lk. iv. 4 R G L Tr in br. ; Heb. xi. 3 ; a command, Lk. v. 5 ; eyiviTo ρήμα θ(οΰ (πι τίνα, Lk. iii. 2 (Jer. i. 1 ; πρ6ς τίνα. Gen. XV. 1 ; 1 Κ. xviii. 1 ) ; plur. ρήματα παρά σοΰ, xcords from thee, i. e. to be spoken by thee, Acts x. 22 ; ρήμα της δυνάμεως αντοΰ, his omnipotent command, Ileb. i. 3. doctrine, instruction, [cf. W. 123 (11")]: (rb) ρήμα (toC) 6eoi, divine instruction by the preachers of the gospel, Ro. X. 17 [RG; but LTTrWH p. XptoToC; others give p. here the sense of command, commission ; (cf. ^Nleyer)] ; saving truth which has God for its au- thor, Eph. vi. 1 7 ; also τοϋ κυρίου, 1 Pet. i. 25 ; words of prophecy, prophetic announcement, τά p. τοϋ Beov, Rev. xvii. 1 7 Rec. [al. oi \oyoi τ. 5.]. 2. L• imi- tc.tion of the Hebr. 131, the subject-matter of speech, thing Ρησά 563 ροίζ'ηΐιόν spoken of, thing; and that a. so far forth as it is a matter of narration: Lk. ii. 15; Acts x. 37; plur., Lk. i. 65 ; ii. 19, 51 ; Acts v. 32 ; xiii. 42. b. in so far as it is matter of command: Lk. i. 37 [see α^υνατία, b.] (Gen. xviii. 14 ; Deut. xvii. 8). c. a matter of dispute, case at law: ilt. xviii. 16; 2 Co. xiii. 1 [A. V. retains ' word ' here and in the preceding pass.], (Deut. xix. 15).* 'Ρησ-ά [Lchm. -σά (so Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], 6, likeaa, the son of Zerubbabel : Lk. iii. 27.* ρήσΌΌΐ, see ρηγνυμι• ρήτωρ, -οροΓ, ό, ('ΡΕί2), α speaker, απ orator, (Soph., Eur., Arstpli., Xen., Plat., al.) : of a forensic orator or advocate, Acts xxiv. 1. [Cf. Thorn. Mag. s. v. (p. 324, 15 ed. Rltschl) ; B. D. s. v. Orator, 2.] * ρητώ;, (ρητοί), adv., expressly, in express words: ρητώ: Xi'yei, 1 Tim. iv. 1. (Polyb. 3, 23, 5; Strabo 9 p. 426; Plut. Brut. 29 ; [de Stoic, repugn. 15, 10] ; Diog. Laert. 8, 71 ; [al. ; cf. Wetstein on 1 Tim. 1. c.; W. 463 (431)].)* ρίζα, -ijs, ή, (akin to Germ. Reis [cf. Lat. radix ; Eng. root; see Curtius §515; Fick, Pt. iii. 775]), fr. Hom. down ; Sept. for U/Tiy ; 1. α root : prop., Mt. iii. 10; Lk. iii. 9 ; ίκ ριζών, from the roots [cf . W. §51,1 d.], Mk. xi. 20 ; ρίζαν ίχ^ίν, to strike deep root, Mt. xiii. 6 ; Mk. iv. 6 ; trop. oi ρίζαν (χα" (v ίαντω, spoken of one who has but a superficial experience of divine truth, has not permitted it to make its way into the inmost recesses of his soul, Mt. xiii. 21 ; Mk. iv. 17 ; Lk. viii. 13 ; in fig. disc, ρίζα πικρίας (see πικρία) of a person dis- posed to apostatize and induce others to commit the same offence, Ileb. xii. 15; the progenitors of a race are called ρίζα, their descendants κλάδοι (see κλάδο;, b.), Ro. xi. 16-18. Metaph. cause, orii/i», source: πάντων των κακών, I Tim. vi. 10 ; τη! σοφίας. Sir. i. 6 (5), 20 (18); της αθανασίας, .Sap. xv. 3; της αμαρτίας, of the devil, Ev. Nicod. 23 ; άρχη κα\ ρίζα παντός άγαθοΰ, Epicur. ap. Athen. 12, 67 p. 546 stf. ; πηγή και ρίζα καλοκαγαθία! το νομίμου Tt);(fi>' παιδίίαί, Plut. de puer. educ c. 7 b. 2. after the use of the Hebr. ii'^U', that which like a root springs from a root, a sprout, shoot ; metaph. offspring, progeny : Ro. XV. 12; Rev. v. 5 ; xxii. 16, (L•. xi. 10).* ριζέω, -ώ : pf. pass. ptcp. ίρριζωμίνος [see P, p] ; (βίζα) ; fr. Ilom. down ; to cause lo strike root, to strengthen with roots ; as often in class, writ, (see Passow s. v. 8 ; [L. and S. s. V. I.]), trop. to render firm, lo fix, establish, cause a person or a thing to be thoroughly grounded : pass, i'pptfa- μίνος (Vulg. radicatus) iv άγάιττι, Eph. iii. 17 (18) [not λνΐΐ]; €v Χριστώ, in communion with Christ, Col. ii. 7. [CoMP. fVpifoa.]* ριιτή, -ης, ή, (ρίπτω), used by the Grk. poets fr. Hom. down ; a throw, stroke, beat : οφθαλμού (Vulg. ictus oculi [A. V. the twinkling of an eye']), a moment of time, 1 Co. XV. 52 [Lmrg. ροπή, q. v.].* ριπίζω : pres. pass. ptcp. ριπιζόμινος ; (fr. ptirtr a bel- lows or fan) ; hence 1. prop, to raise a breeze, put air in motion, whether for the sake of kindling a fire or of cooling one's self ; hence a. to blow up a fire : φλάνα,ιτίρ, Anthol. 5, 122, 6; Plut. Flam. 21. b. to fan i. e. cool with a fan (TeTtuli. flabello) : Plut. Anton. 26. 2. to toss to and fro, to agitate : of the wind, προς άνίμων ριπίζίταί το ΰδωρ, Philo de incorrupt, mundi § 24 ; ριπιζομίνη άχνη, Dio Cass. 70, 4 ; &ημος άστατον, κακόν και θαλασσί/ πάνθ' o/iotoK, υπ' άνεμου ριπίζίται, Dio Chr. 32 p. 368 b. ; hence joined w. άνιμίζισθαι it is used of a person whose mind wavers in uncertainty between hope and fear, between doing and not doing a thing, Jas. i. 6.* piirrti», see ρίπτω. ρίΐΓτω and ριπτίω (ριπτονντων. Acts xxii. 23 ; on the diff. views with regard to the difference in meaning betw. these two forms see Passow s. v. ρίπτω, fin. ; [ Veitch s. V. ρίπτω, fin. Hermann held that ριπτΛν differed fr. ρίπτ(ΐν as Lat. jactare fr. jacere, hence the former had a frequent, force (cf. Lob. Soph. Aj. p. 1 77 ; Cope, Aristot. rhet. vol. i. p. 91 sq.) ; some of the old grammarians associate with ριπτύν a suggestion of earnestness or effort, others of contempt]); 1 aor. fppi\jfa GTr, epp. R L, ίριψα Τ WH, [ptcp. (Lk. iv. 35) βίψαν R G Tr WH, better (cf. Tdf Proleg. p. 102; Veitch p. 512) ρΊψαν L T] ; pf. pass. 3 pers. sing, ίρριττται [G Tr ; al. epp-] (Lk. xvii. 2), ptcp. ίρριμμίνος G, (ριμμίνος Τ Tr WII, pep. (with smooth breathing) Lchm. (Mt. ix. 36); on the doubling of ρ and the use of the breathing see P, ρ ; fr. Horn, down; Sept. chiefly for ψ^ϋΠ; to cast, throw; i. q. to throw doicn : τί. Acts xxvii. 19; τι ίκ τίνος, ibid. 29 ; τιχα «f την θάλασσαν, Lk. xvii. 2. i. q. to throw off: τα ιμάτια (Plat. rep. 5 p. 474 a.), Acts xxii. 23 (they cast off their garments that they might be the better prepared to throw stones [but cf. Wendt in Mey. 5te Aurt.]) ; τα όπλα, 1 Mace. v. 43 ; vii. 44 ; xi. 51 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 33, and often in other Grk. writ. i. q. to cast forward or before : τίνα [or τί] t's rt, [Mt. xxvii. 5 (but here R G L tV τφ ναφ)] ; Lk. iv. 35 ; ηνας παρά τους nabas Ίησοϋ, to set down (with the suggestion of haste and want of care), of those who laid their sick at the feet of Jesus, leaving them at his disposal without a doubt but that he could heal them, Mt. xv. 30. i. q. to throw lo the ground, prostrate : ίρριμμίνοι, prostrated by fatigue, hunger, etc., [R. V. scattered], Mt. ix. 36 (καταλαβων ίρμιμμίνους κα\ μίθνοντας, the enemy prostrate on the ground, Polyb. 5, 48, 2 ; of the slain, Jer. xiv. 16 ; e'ppt^- /li'm σώματα, 1 Mace. xi. 4 ; for other exx. see IVald, Clavis Apocr. V.T. s. v.; τώΐ' νικρών ίρριμμίνων ί'πϊ TT)S ά-γοράς, Plut. Galb. 28, 1). [CoMP. : άπο-, tVi- ρίτττω.] ' 'Ροβοάμ, (π>'3ΠΤ i. β. 'enlarging the people', equiv. to Εύρϋ^ημος in Grk.', fr. DOT and Di;), ό, Roboam, Reho- boam, the son and successor of king Solomon: Mt. i. 7.* Τό8η, -ijs, ή, Rhoda [i. e. ' rose '], the name of a certain maidservant: Acts xii. 13.* 'PoSos, -ot), η, Rhodes, [(cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], a well-known i.4and of the Cyclades opposite Caria and Lycia, with a capital of the same name : Acts xxi. 1. ([From Ilom. down] ; 1 Mace. xv. 23.) * ροιζη8όν, {ροιζίω to make a confused noise), adv., 'with aloudnoise': 2 Pet. iii. 10. (Xicand. ther. 556; Geop., al.)• ' Ρυμφά 564 ' Ρωμ^ ["Ρομ,φά, 'Ρομφάν, see 'Ρίμψάν."] ρομφαία, -at, ij, α large sirorii ; prop, a long Thracian javelin [cf. Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. v. Rhompsa] ; also a kind of long swonl wont to be worn on the right shoul- der, (Hesych. ρομφαία • θμάκιον άμνντηριυν, μάχαιρα, ζίφος η ακόντων μακρόν; [Siiidas 3223 c. (cf. ρίμβω to revolve, vibrate)] ; ct. Plut. Aemil. 18) ; [A. V. sicoril] : Rev. i. lii; ii. 12, 1(>; vi. 8; .\ix. 15, 21; σοϋ Si airiji την ψυχην &ΐ(\(ύσ(ται ρομφαία, a fig. for ' extreme anguish shall fill (pierce, as it were) thy soul', Lk. ii. 3.5, where cf. Kuinoi•!. (Joseph, antt. 6, 12, 4; 7, 12, 1 ; in Ev. Nicod. 26 the archangel Michael, keeper of Paradise, is called ή φ\ο- γίνη ρομφαία. Very often in Sept. for 3^Π ; often also in the O. T. Apocr.) * [ροττή, -ης, ή, (ρίπω), fr. Aeschyl., Plat., down, inclinn• linn ilijwnicarij.•:, as of the turning of the scale: iv poitfi οφθαλμού, 1 Co. XV. 52 L mrg. (cf. Tdf.'s note ad loc.) ; see ριπή.'] 'Ρουβήν (in Joseph, antt. 1, 19, 8 'Ρονβηλοί), 6, (piKi, i. e. behold ye a son! Gen. .xxix. 32 [cf. B. D. s. v.]), Reuben, Jacob's firstborn eon by Leah : Rev. vii. 5.* 'Ρονβ (in Joseph, antt. 5, 9, 2 Ροίθη, -ηί), η, (nn for Γ\?>•"', a female friend), Ruth, a Moabitish woman, one of the ancestors of king David, whose history is related in the canonical book bearing her name : Mt. i. 5. [B. D. s. V. Ruth.] • ■Ροΰφοϊ, -ου, ό, Rufus [i. e. 'red', 'reddish'], a Lat. proper name of a certain Christian : Mk. xv. 21 ; Ro. xvi. 13. [B. D. s. V. Rufus.] • ρύμη, -ijr, ή, (fr. PYQ i. q. ί'ρυω ' to draw ' [but Curtius § 517; Vanicek p. 1210, al., connect it with pta 'to flow']); 1. in earlier Grk. the swing, rush, force, trail, of a body in motion. 2. in later Grk. a tract of way in a town shut in by buildings on both sides ; a sired, lane: Mt. vi. 2; Lk. xiv. 21 ; Acts ix. 11; ,\ii. 10; ef. Is. XV. 3 ; Sir. ix. 7 ; Tob. xiii. 18. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 404; IRufher/ord, New Phryn. p. 488; IVelslein on Mt. u. 8.; W. 22, 23].• ρΰομαι ; f ut. ρίσομαι ; 1 aor. ΐρρυσάμην G {4ρρνσ. R, 80 Τ in 2 Co. i. 10 ; 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; L everywh. e.\c. in 2 Tim. iii. 11 txt.) and ΐρυσάμην (so TrWII everywh., Τ in Col. i. 13; 2 Tim. iii. 11 ; Ltxt. in 2 Tim. iii. 11); a depon. mid. verb, in later Grk. w. the 1 aor. pass. ίρρίσθην G {-pp- R), and (so LTTr AVIl in 2 Tim. iv. 17) {ρΰσθην; (on the doubling of p, and the breathing, see in P, p); fr. llom. down; Sept. chiefly for '7"Sn ; also for Sk}, taSa (to cause to escape, to deliver), ySn (to draw out), dS'D, i?'!?in, etc. ; fr. PYQ to draw, hence prop, lo draw lo one's self, to rescue, to deliver: τικά, Mt. .xxvii. 43; 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; nva άττό rivos [cf. AV. § 30. 6 a.], Mt. vi. 13; Lk. xi. 4 R L; 1 Th. i. 10 [here TTr WH e'«; 2 Tim. IT. 18]; 1 aor. pass., Ro. χ v. 31 ; 2 Th. iii. 2 ; «κά ίκ τίνος [W. u. 8.]: Ro. vii. 24 [cf. W. § 41 a. 5]; 2 Co. i. 10; Col. i. 1 3 ; 2 Tim. iii. 1 1 ; 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; 1 aor. pass., Lk. i. 74 ; 2 Tim. iv. 1 7 ; ό ρυόμίνος, the deliverer, Ro. xi. 26 (after Is. lix. 20).• ^νιταίνω: (piirof, q. v.) ; to make filthy, befoid; to defile, dishonor, (Xen., Aristot., Dion. Hal., Plut., al.); 1 aor. pass. impv. 3 pers. sing, ρυπανθήτω, let him be made filthy, i. e. trop. let him continue lo defile himself with sins, lier. xxii. 11 LTTrWHtxt.• ρυπαρ^ΰομαι : 1 aor. (pass.) impv. 3 pers. sing, pinro- ρινβήτω ; (ρυπαρός, q. v.) ; to he dirty, grow filthy ; metaph. to he defiled with iniquity : Rev. xxii. 1 1 G 1. ed. ster. WHmrg. Found nowhere else; see ρύπαινα) and pimotii.* pvnropCo, -ας, ή, {ρχπταρός), fillhiness (Plut. praecept. con jug. c. 28) ; metaph. of wickedness as moral defile- ment : Jas. i. 21. [Of sordiilness, in Critias ap. Poll. S, 116; Plut. de adulat. et amic. § 19 ; al.] • ρυιταρός, -ά, -όν, (ρίπος, q. v.), filthy, dirty: prop, of clothing [A. V. vile'], Jas. ii. 2 (Sept. Zech. iii. 3 eq. ; Josei)h. antt. 7, 11, 3 ; Plut. Phoe. 18 ; Dio Cass. 65, 20; pxnrapa Koi άπλυτα, .\rtem. oneir. 2, 3 fin.; χΧαμΰς, Ael. v. h. 14, 10) ; metaph. defiltd with iniquity, base, [A. V. filthy]: Rev. xxii. 11 G L Τ Tr WH. [(In the sense ot sordid, iiifiiin, Dion. Hal., al.)] * ρνπος, -ου. ό, fr. llom. down,^/iA: 1 Pet. iii. 21 [B. § 151,14; AV. § 30, 3 N. 3].• ρνιτόω, -ώ; 1 aor. impv. 3 pers. sing, ρυπωσάτωϊ Χ- ίο make filthy, defile, soil: Horn. Od. 6. 59. 2. in- trans. for ρνπάω. tii be filthy: morally. Rev. xxii. 11 Rec* ^vo-is, -(ως, ή, (fr. an unused pres. ρϋω, from which several of the tenses of ρίω are borrowed), a flowing, issue : τηϋ αίματος, Mk. v. 25 ; I,k. viii. 43, [on the two preced. pass. cf. B. § 147, 11 ; W. § 29, 3 b.], 44, (Hip- pocr., Aristot.).* pvrCs, -ί^ος, IJ, (PYQ, to draw together, contract), a wrinlde : Eph. v. 27. (Arstph., Plat., Diod. 4, 51 ; Plut., Lcian., Anthol., al.) * 'Ρωμαϊκός, -ή. -όν, Roman, Latin : I>k. xxiii. 38 R G L br. Tr mrg. br. [(Polyb., Diod., Dion. Hal., al.)] • 'Ρωμαϊοϊ, -ou, ό, « Tioman : Jn. xi. 48; Actsii. 10 [R. V. here from Rome] ; xvi. 21, 37 sq. ; xxii. 25-27, 29 ; xxiiL 27; xxv. 16; xxviii. 17. ([Polyb., Joseph., al.] ; often in 1 and 2 Mace.) * 'Ρωμα'ιστί, adv., in the Roman fashion or language, iii Latin: Jn. xix. 20. [Epictet. diss. 1, 17, 16; Plut.. App., al.] * 'Ρώμη, -ης, ή [on the art. with it cf. AV. § 18, 5 b. ; (on its derivation cf. Curtius §517; Vanifek p. 1212; Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.)], Rome, the renowned capital of Italy and ancient head of the world : Acts xviii. 2 ; xix. 21 ; xxiii. 11; xxviii. 14, 16 ; Ro. i. 7, 15; 2 Tim. i. 1 7. (1 Mace. i. 10; vii. 1 ; [Aristot., Polyb., al.].) [On Rome in St. Raid's time cf. BB.DD. s. v.; Conybeare and Howson, Life and Epp. etc. ch. xxiv. ; Farrar, Life and AA'ork etc. chh. xxxvii., xliv., xlv. ; Lewin, St. Paul, vol. ii. ch. vi. ; Ilausralh, Xeutest. Zeitgesch. iii. 65 sqq. ; on the Jews and Christians there, see particularly Schiirer, Die Gemeindeverfassung der Juden in Rom in d. Kaiserzeit nach d. Inschriften dargest. (Leipz. 1879), Seyerlen, Enstehung u.s.w. der Christengemeinde in Rom (Tubingen, 1874); Huidekoper, Judaism at Rome, 2d ed., N. ¥.1877; Schaff, Hist, of the Chris. Church (1882) vol. i. §36.]• ρυΛννυμι 565 σαββατον ρύννυμι : ίο make strong, to strengthen ; pf. pass, tppiu- fai [see P, p], to be strong, to thrive, prosper ; hence the t pers. (sing.) impv. is the usual formula in closing a letter, ΐρρωσο, farewell : Acts xxiii. 30 [RG] ; ΐρρωσθί. Acts XV. 29 (2 ilacc. xi. 21 ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 33 ; Arteui. oneir. 3, 44, aL; ίρρωσα και Iryiaive, D'lo Cass. 61, 13^.* [2, o•, s: the practice (adopted by Griesbach, Knapp, al., after H. Stepliaiius et al. ) of employing the character j in the mid. of a comp. word has been abandoned l)y the recent crit. eiUtors ; cf. W. §5,1 c. ; Li/isiiis, (Irani. Untersucli. p. 122 ; Matthiae § 1 Anm. 5 ; Dttm. Au.sf. Sprchl. § 2 Anm. 3 ; Kiihner § 1 Anm. 1. Tdf. ed 8 writes σ also even at the end of a word, after the older Mss. On niovalile final s see ixpi(i),/it'xpi(s)> o'UTw{s). The (Ionic) coinbiuatious ρσ for fp, and σσ for ττ (cf. Fischer, Animailvers. ad Veller. etc. i. pp. 19.3 sq. 203; Kuhner § 31 pp. 124, 127), have become predominant (cf. &ρσ•ην, θαρσίω, θάρσο5, απαλλάσσω etc., γλώσσα, ?ισσων (q.v.), βάλασσα, κηρύσσω. 'πίρισσ6$, ττράσσω ((]. V.), τάσσαι, τίσσαρα, ψυΚάσσω, etc.), except in a few words, as κρ^ίττων (q. v.), the derivati\'es of 4\arTuiv (of which word i)oth forms are used indiscriminately ), ^ττ-ημα, ήττάω (yet see 2 Co. xii. 13), etc. ; cf. B. 7. Some prop, names are spelled indifferently with one σ or with two ; as, Έλισ(σ)οϊο$. ζ Is occasionally substituted for σ, esp before μ, see σβί^νυμι, 2μνρνα {σμύρνα, cf. Soph. Gloss. § 58, 3, and Lex. s. v. ; 'J'df. Proleg. p. 80; WII. App. p. 148; B. 5 ; Zii//«.Ausf. Sprchl. § 3 Anm. 6 ; Bezae cod., ed. Srrirener, p. xlviii. ; L. and S. e.v. Z. T. 3, and 2. Π. 14 c.) : so also ξ, as iuueafm 1 Pot. iv. 12 R"*^ ; cf. Kiihner § 325, 5 ; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. u. s. ; see ξύν.] σοβαχθανί, -wi Τ TrWH [see WH. App. p. 155, and ■. V. fi, t], -κθανί Lchm. [in Mt. only], {'^ηρτ^, fr. the Cha.Ul. ρτύ), thou hast for.iaken me: Alt. xxvii. 46 ; Mk. XV. 34 (fr. Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 2, for the llebr. 'JFiprj.^, which is so rendered also by the Chaldee paraphrast). [See Kaulzsch, Gram. d. Bibl.-Arara. (Leipzig 1884) p. 11.]* σ-αβαώθ (Hebr. iliX^X, plur. of S3i an army) : κϋριο! ra^ao>e (Π1Χ3Ϊ ^y^^), [ A. V. Lord of Sabaoth], i.e. lord nf the armies sc. of Israel, as those who under the lead- ership and protection of Jehovah maintain his cause in war (cf. Schrader, Ueber d. urspriingl. Sinn des Got- tesnamens Jahve Zebaoth, in the Jahrbb. f. protest. Theol. for 1875, p. 31 G sijq., and in Schenkel v. 702 s<[.; cf. H/;rm. Schultz, Alttest. Theol. ii. p. 96 sqq. ; [B.D. 8. V. Sabaoth, the Lord of. But for the other view, ace. to which the heavenly " hosts " are referred to, see Hackett in B. D., Am. ed., s. v. Tsebaoth Lord of, and Delitzsch in the Luth. Zeitschr. for 1874, p. 21 7 sqq. ; so Riehm (HWB s. v. Zebaoth) as respects the u.^e of the phrase by the prophets]. On the diverse interpreta- tions of the word cf. Oehler in Herzog .xviii. p. 400 sqq. [and in his O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) §§ 195 sq. ; cf. T. K. Cheyne, Isa., ed. 3, vol. i. 1 1 sq.]) : Ro. ix. 29 ; Jas. v. 4.• α-αββαησγύί, -ov, 6, (σαββατίζω to keep tlie sabbath) ; 1. a keeping sabbath. 2. the blessed rest from toils and troubles looked for in the age to come by the true worshippers of God and true Christians [R. V. .labbath rest'l : Heb. iv. 9. (Pint, de superstit. c. 3 ; ecel. writ.) * ο-άββατον, -ου, τό, (Ilebr. Π3Ι^), found in the N. T. only in the historical bks. exc. twice in Paul's Epp. ; sabbath ; i. e. 1. the seventh day of each week, which was a sacred festival on which the Israelites were required to abstain from all work (Ex. xx. 10 ; xxxi. IS sqq. ; Deut. v. 14) ; a. sing, σάββατόν and to σαβ- βατον : Mk. vi. 2 ; [xv. 42 LTr]; xvi. 1 ; .In. v. 9 sq., etc. ; i. q. tlie institution of tlie sabbath, tlie law for keeping holy every seventh Jay of the week : Mt. xii. 8 ; Mk. ii. 27 sip ; Lk. vi. .5; \v€iv, Jn. v, 18; τηρ^Ιν, Jn. ix. 16 ; η ημίρα τοϋ σαββάτου (ϊ^2ϋ>Γ\ DV, Ex. xx. 8 and often), the day of the sabbath, sabbath-day, Lk. xiii. 16; xiv. 5; όδΟΕ σαββάτου, a safibalh-day's Journey, the distance it is law- ful to travel on the sabbath-day, i. e. ace. to the Talmud two thousand cubits or paces, ace. to Epiphanius (haer. 66, 82) six stadia: Acts i. 12, cf. Mt. xxiv. 20, (the regulation was derived fr. Ex. .xvi. 29) ; cf. Win. RU'B. s. V. Sabbathsweg; Oehler in Herzog xiii. 203 sq. [cf. Leyrer in Herzog ed. 2 vol. ix. 3 79]; Mangold in Schen- kel v. 127 sq.; \_Ginsburg in Alexander's Kitto s. v. Sab- bath Day's Journey; Lumby on Acts i. 12 (in Cambr. Bible for Schools)]. as dat. of time [W. § 31, 9 b. •, B. § 1.33, 26] : σαββάτω, Mt. x.xiv. 20 [GLTTrWll]; Lk. xiv. 1 ; τω σαββ'άτω, Lk. vi. 9 L txt. Τ Tr AVII ; xiii. 14 sq. ; xiv. 3 ; Acts xiii. 44 ; iv σαββήτω, Mt. xii. 2 ; Jn. V. 16 ; vii. 22 [here L WH br. tV], 23 ; e'v τω σαβ- βάτω, hk. \\. 7; Jn. xix. 31. accus. το σάββ. during (on) the sabbath [cf. B. § 131, 11 ; W. §32,6] : Lk. xxiiL 5() ; κατά πάν σ. every sabbath, .\cts .xiii. 27; xv. 21; xviii. 4. plur. τα σύββατα, of several sabbaths, Acts xvii. 2 [some refer this to 2]. b. plur. τα σάββ. (for the singular) of a s i η gle sabbath, sabbath-day, (the use of the plur. being occasioned either by the plur. names of festivals, as τα ΐγκαίνια, άζυμα, yevcota, or by the Chaldaic form «n39 [W. 177 (167); B. 23 (21)]): Mt. xxviii. 1 ; Col. ii. 16, (Ex. xx. 10; Lev. xxiii. 32 etc.; την ίβ&όμην σάββατα καλοΰμιν, Joseph, antt. 8, 6, 6 ; add, 1, 1, 1 ; [14, 10, 25 ; Philo de Abrah. § 5; de cherub. § 26 ; Plut. de superstitione 8] ; την των σαββάτων (ορτηρ. σα•^ηνη 566 ^αΧαθιτηΚ Plut. symp. 4, 6, 2 ; hodie tricesima sabbata, Hor. sat. 1. 9, 69; nowhere so used by John exc. in the phrase /xi'fi τά>ν σαββάτων, on which see 2 below) ; ή ημίρα των σ., Lk. iv. 16 ; Acts xiii. 14 ; xvi. 13 (Ex. xx. 8 ; xxxv. 3 ; Deut. v. 12 ; Jer. xvii. 21 sq.) ; roir σάββασιν and fv τοις σάββασιν (so constantly [exc. Lchm. in Mt. .xii. I, 12] by metaplasm for σαββάτοις, cf. W. 63 (62) ; [B. 23 (21)]) on the sabbath-day: Mt. xii. 1 [see above], 5, 10-12 [see above]; Mk. i. 21 ; ii. 23; iii. 2,4; Lk. iv. 31 ; vi. 9 [R G L mrg.], (1 Mace. ii. 38 ; the Sept. uses the form σαββάτοΐί, and Josephus both forms). On the precepts of the Jews with regard to the observance of the sabbath, which were for the most part extremely punctilious and minute, cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Sabbath ; Oehler in Herzog xiii. 192 sqq. [revised by Orelli in ed. 2 vol. xiii. 156 sqq.]; Schiirer, Zeitgesch. 2te Aufl. §88 n. ; Mangold in Schenkel v. p. 123 sq. ; [BB.DD. s. v.; Geikie, Life and Words of Christ, ch. xxxviii. vol. iL p. 95 sqq. ; Farrai; Life of Christ, ch. xxxi. vol. i. p. 432 sq. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, vol. ii. p. 56 sqq. and App. xvii.]. 2. seven days, a week : πρώτη σαβ- βάτον, Mk. xvi. 9 ; 81s τον σα/3, twice in the week, Lk. xviii. 12. The plur. is used in the same sense in the phrase ή μία των σαββάτων, the first day of the week (see fit, 5) [Prof. Sophocles regards the gen. (dependent on ήμίρα) in such exx. as those that follow (cf. Mk. xvi. 9 above) as equiv. to /χίτά w. an ace, Ikejirst day after the sabbath ; see his Lex. p. 43 par. 6] : Mt. xxviii. 1 ; Mk. xvi. 2 ; Lk. xxiv. 1 ; Jn. xx. 1, 19 ; Acts xx. 7 ; κατά μίαν σαββάτων (L Τ Tr VVH -του), on the first day of every week, 1 Co. xvi. 2. «Γογήνη, -ης, ή, (σάσσω to load, fill), a large fishing-m.et, a drag-net (Vulg. sagena [cf. Eng. seined), used in catch- ing fish that swim in shoals [of. B. D. s. v. Net ; Trench, Syn. §lxiv.] : Mt. xiii. 47. (Sept.; Plut. solert. anim. p. 977 f.; Lcian. pise. 51; Tim. 22; Artem. oneir. 2, 14; Ael. h. a. 11, 12; [βάλλ^ιν aay- Babr. fab. 4, 1 ; 9, 6].) * SoSSouKatos, -ου, 6, a Sailducee, a member of the party of the Sadducees, who, distinguished for birth, wealth, and official position, and not averse to the favor of the Herod family and of the Romans, hated the common people, were the opponents of the Pharisees, and reject- ing tradition (see παράδοσίΓ, 2) acknowledged the au- thority of the O. T. alone in matters pertaining to faith and morals (Joseph, antt. 13, 10, 6) ; they denied not only the resurrection of the body (Mt. xxii. 23; Mk. xii. 18; Lk. xx. 27; Acts xxiii. 8), but also the immor- tality of the soul and future retribution (ψυχ^Γ re την ίίαμονην (cm τα! καβ άδον τιμωρία! και τίμα! άναιροϋσι, Joseph, b. j. 2, 8, 14, cf. antt. 18, 1, 4), as well as the existence of angels and spirits (Acts xxiii. 8). They maintained man's freedom in opposition to the doc- trine of divine predestination (ace. to Joseph, b. j. 2, 8, 14). They are mentioned in the N. T. (in addition to the pass, already referred to) in Mt. iii. 7 ; xvi. 1, 6, 11 sq., (in which passages they are associated apparently with the Pharisees contrary to the truth of history [(?) cf. the Comm. ad 11. cc.]) ; Mt. xxii. 34 ; Acts iv. 1 ; v. 1 7 ; xxiii. 6 sq. The Sadducees derived their name appar- ently not from the Hebr. ρ'Τί, as though they boasted of being pre-eminently ' righteous ' or ' upright ' (since it cannot be shown that the vowel i ever passed over into u), but, ace. to a more probable conjecture now ap- proved by many, from the Zadok (O\Ti, Sept. Σαδδοΰκ), who Λvas high-priest in the time of David and exhibited special fidelity to the king and liis house (2 S. xv. 24 Siji].; 1 K. i. 32 sqq.) ; hence the posterity of tliis priest (ρΠΧ '03, Ezek. xl. 46 ; .xliii. 19; xUv. 15 ; xlviii. 11) and all their adherents seem to have been called Σαδδουκαίοι (D'pns). Cf., besides others, Win. RWB. s. v. Sadducaer; Reuss in Herzog xiii. p. 289 sqq. ; [Sieffert in Herzog ed. 2 xiii. pp. 210-244] ; Geiger, Sadduc. u. Pharisiier (Brsl. 18G3) ; Keim i. p. 273 sqq. [Eng. trans, i. (2d ed.) p. 353 sq.] ; Hausrath in Schenkel iv. p. 518 sqq.; iichiirer, Ntl. Zeit- gesch. 2te Aufl. § 26 ; WeUhausen, Pharis. u. Sadducaer (Greifsw. 1874) ; Oiirt, De oorsprong van den naam Sad- duceen, in the Theolog. Tijdschrift for 1876, p. 605 sqq.; \_Ginsburg, in Alexander's Kitto s. v. ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, bk. iii. ch. ii. ; Geikie, Life of Christ, ch. xlv. (cf. ch. V.) ; and B. D. Am. ed. s. v. for additional refer- ences].* Σοιδώκ, (ρπϊ, a pr. name occurring often in the O. T.), 0, Sad(jc: Mt. i. 14.* o-aCvu : pres. inf. pass, σαίν^σθαι ; (2AQ, σίΐ'ω) ; 1. prop, to wag the tail : of dogs, Horn. Od. 16, 6; Ael. v. h. 13, 41 ; Aesop, fab. 229 ed. Halm [354 ed. Coray] ; with ουρΐι added, Od. 17, 302; Hes. theog. 771 ; ουράν, Aesop I.e. ; al. ; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v. I. 2. metaph. a. toflatter, fawn upon, (Aeschyl., Pind., Soph., al.). b. to move (the mind of one), a. agreeably : pass, wr ίλπίδοί, Aeschyl., Oppian ; αληθή σαίν(ΐ την ^Ιηχην, Aris- tot. metaph. 13, 3 p. 1090% 37. β. to agitate, disturb, trouble : pass. 1 Th. iii. 3 [here Α.Λ'. move (B. 263 (226))] (here Lchm. άσαίνω, q. v.) ; ot δί σαινόμ^νοι to'is Xfyo- μίνοις ίδάκρυον, Diog. Laert. 8, 41.* σ-άκκοΐ (Attic σάκοί), -ου, ό, Hebr. Τ>ϋ [cf. Vanicek, Fremdwbrter, s. v.], a sack (Lat. saccus) i. e. a. a receptacle made for holding or carrying various things, as money, food, etc. (Gen. xiii. 25, 35 ; Lev. xi. 32). b. a coarse cloth (Lat. cilicium), a dark coarse stuff made especially of the hair of animals [A. V. sackcloth^ : Rev. vi. 12; a garment of the like material, and clinging to the person like a sack, which was wont to be worn (or drawn on over the tunic instead of the cloak or mantle) by mourners, penitents, suppliants, Mt. xi. 21 ; Lk. x. 13, and also by those who, like the Hebrew prophets, led an austere life. Rev. xi. 3 (cf. what is said of the dress of John the Baptist, Mt. iii. 4 ; of Elijah, 2 K. i. 8). More fully in Win. RWB. s. v. Sack ; Roskoff in Schenkel v. 134 ; [s. v. Sackcloth in B. D. ; also in Mc- Clintock and Strong. (From Hdt. down.)] * Σαλά, {rh'u a missile), 6. Sola [so A. V. (but in Gen. Salah); properly Shelah (so R. V.)], prop, name of a man mentioned in Lk. iii. 35 (Gen. x. 24) ; [T Tr mrg. WH read Σαλά also in Lk. iii. 32, for ΊαΚμών, q. v.].* Σαλαθιηλ, (^K'n'^Kiy whom I asked of God), ό, Sala Σαλαμκ 667 Σαμάρεια Ihiel [Grk. for Shealtiel (so R.V.)], the father of Zerub- babel: Mt. i. 12; [Lk. iii. 27].• Σολαμΐ5, [on its deriv. see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.], -Ivos, ή, Salamis, the principal city of the island Cyprus : Acts xiii. 5. [BB. DD. ; Diet, of Geog. s. v. ; Lewin, St. Paul, i. 120 sq.]• SoXcip., TO, Salim, a town which ace. to Eusebius and Jerome [Onomast. (ed. Larsow and Parthey) pp. 28, 11 ; 29, 14] was eight miles S. of Scythopolis : Jn. iii. 23 ; of. Pressel in Herzog xiii. 326 ; [cf. Αΐι/ώι/]. See 2αλή/ι.* σαλεύω ; 1 aor. ϊσάλινσα; Pass., pres. ptcp. σαλινόμί- fof ; l)f. ptcp. σΐσαΚΐνμίνοί ; 1 aor. (σαΚΐΰβην ; 1 fut. σαλίυθήσομαί ; (σάλοί, i). v.) ; fr. Aeschyl. and Arstph. down ; in Sept. pass. σαΚίϋομαι for D13 and ^MJ ; a. prop, of the motion produced by winds, storms, waves, etc. ; to agitate or shake : κάλαμον, pass., J\It. .\i. 7 ; Lk. vii. 24 ; to cause to totter, τας δυνάμίΐΓ των oip-, pass., Mt. xxiv. 29; Mk. xiii. 25 ; Lk. xxi. 26; την yrjv, Heb. xii. 26 (Is. xxiv. 20 ; Am. ix. 5) ; an edifice, Lk. vi. 48 ; Acts iv. 31 ; xvi. 26; τά μη σάΚίνόμινα, the things wliich are not shaken, i. e. the perfect state of things which will exist after the return of Christ from heaven and will undergo no change, opp. to τα σα\(υόμ(να, the present order of things subject to vicissitude and decay, Heb. xii. 27. to shake thoroughly, of a measure filled by shak- ing its contents together, Lk. vi. 38. b. to shake down, overthrow, i. e. trop. to cast down from one's (secure and happy) state. Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8) ; by a trop. use foreign to prof. auth. to move or agitate the mind, to disturb one: τίνα άπο τοΟ νοός, so as to throw him out of his sober and natural mental state [B. 322 (277)], 2 Th. ii. 2; toiis (j)^Kovs, to stir up. Acts xvii. 13.• Σαλήμ, ή, (Heb. dSu), Salem: Heb. vii. 1 sq. ; cf. Gen. xiv. IS, which some (as Gesenius, Winer, Hitzig, Knobel, Delitzsch) think is the ancient name of the city of Jer- usalem, appealing to the words of Ps. Ixxvi. 3 'ΠΊ 133 0'7u3, and Joseph, antt. 1, 10, 2 την μίντοι Σολυμα Ζστίρον (καΚ(σαν'\(ροσό\υμα\ cf. b. j. 6, 10. But more correctly [yet cf. B. D. s. v. .Salem, and s. v. Melchizedek sub fin.] others (as Rosenmiiller, Bleek, Tuch, Roediger in Gesen. Thesaur. s. v. p. 1422, Dillmann), relying on the testimony of Jerome ([Ep. ad Evangelum § 7 i. e.] Ep. 73 in Vallarsi's ed. of his Opp. i. p. 446), hold that it is the same as Σαλίΐ'μ (q. v.). For the ancient name of Jerusalem was DU; (Judg. xix. 10 ; 1 Chr. xi. 4 ; [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Jebus]), and the form of the name in Ps. Ixxvi. 3 [where Sept. (Ιρήνη'\ is to be regarded as poetical, signifying 'safe.'* Σαλμών, (po'^S', Ruth iv. 21), 5, indecl., Salmon, the name of a man : ^It. i. 4 sq. ; Lk. iii. 32 [here TWH Tr mrg. 2αλά].* Σαλμώνη, -τ;?, η, Salmone, Salmonium, [also Sammo- nium~\, an eastern and partly northern promontory of Crete opposite Cnidus and Rhodes [the identification of which is somewhat uncertain ; see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Salmone, and Diet, of Geogr. s. v. Samonium] : Acts xxvii. 7.• eraXos, -ou, ό, the tossing or swell of the sea [R. V. bU- ίοίί-.ν] : Lk. xxi. 25. (Soph., Eur., al.)• σάλίΓίγξ, -lyyof, ή, a trumpet : Mt. xxiv. 31 [cf. B. 161 (141) ; 343 (295)] ; 1 Co. xiv. 8; Heb. xii. 19 ; Rev. i. 10 ; iv. 1 ; viii. 2, 6, 13; ix. 14 ; iv σάΧπιγγι θ(οϋ, a trum- pet which sounds at God's command (W. § 3C, 3 b.), 1 Th. iv. 16 ; iv ttj iaxarrj σάΚιηγγι, the trumpet which will sound at tlie last day, 1 Co. xv. 52, [4 (2) Esdr. vi. 23 ; see Comm. on 1 Th. u. s.]. (From Hom. down ; Sept. for lilliy and ΓΤίΧΪΠ.) * σ-αλιτΐζω ; fut. σαλπίσω (for the earlier σαλπιγ|ω, see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 191 ; Sept. also σαλπίώ, as Xum.x. [3], 5, 8, 10); 1 aor. «'σάλπισα (also in Sept.; Ael. v. h. 1, 26 and other later writ. [cf. A'eitch s. v.], for the earlier iσά\^τιyξa, Xen. anab. 1, 2, 17) [cf. W. 89 (85); B. 37 (32) ; WH. App. p. 1 70] ; fr. Hom. down ; Sept. chiefly for i'pn, also for ΊϊΠ ; to sound a trumpet, [Α.Λ'. (most- ly) sound']: Rev. viii. 6-10, 12sq.; ix. 1, 13 ; x. 7 ; xi. 15; σαλπίσ(» (strictly sc. ό σαλπιστήί or ή σάΚπιγξ), like our the trumpet will sound (cf. "W. § 58, 9 b. /3. ; [B. § 129, 16]), 1 Co. XV. 52; σαλπίζ^ιν ΐμπροσθ(ν ίαυτοϊι, i.e. to take care that what we do comes to everybody's ears, make a great noise about it, [cf. our do a thing ' with a flourish of trumpets'], Mt. vi. 2 (Cic. ad div. 16, 21 quod polliceris, te buccinatorem fore nostrae e.xistima- tionis ; Achill. Tat. 8, 10 airi; οϋχ ΰττο σάλπιγγι μόνον, αΚ\α και κηρυκι μοιχ(ν€ται).* σαλίΓίστήϊ (a later form, used by Theophr. char. 25; Polyb. 1, 45, 13 ; Dion. Hal. 4, 18, [al.], for the earlier and better σαλπιγκτής, Thuc. 6, 69; Xen. an. 4, 3, 29; Joseph, b. j. 3, 6, 2; and σαλπικτής, Dem. p. 284, 26 ; App. hisp. 6, 93; and in the best codd. of Xen., Diod., Plut., al. ; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 279]; fr. σαλπίζω [q. V.]), -oO. ό, a trumpeter: Rev. xviii. 22.* Σολώμη, [Hebr. 'peaceful '], -i/s, ή, Salome, the wife of Zebedee, and the mother of the apostles James the elder and John : Mk. xv. 40; xvi. 1.* Σαλωμών, see Σολο/ιών. Σαμάρίΐα [on the accent cf. Chandler §104; B. 17 (15); -ia Τ WH (see Tilf. Proleg. p. 87; cf. I, t)". on the forms see Abbot in B.D. Am. ed. s. v.], -as [cf. B. u. s.], ή [cf. W. § 18, 5a.], (Hebr. \1-\oW, Chald. [p.ni^ pron. Scha-- me-ra-in, Assyr. Samirina), [on the deriv. see B. D. s. v.], Samaria ; 1. the name of a city built by Omri king of Israel (1 K. xvi. 24), on a mountain of the same name (tl'iOli' 1Π, Am. vi. 1), situated in the tribe of Ephraim ; it was the capital of the whole region and the residence of the kings of Israel. After having been besieged three years by Shalmaneser [IV.], king of As- syria, it was taken and doubtless devastated by Sargon, his son and successor, B. c. 722, who dei)orted the ten tribes of Israel and supplied their place with other settlers ; 2 K. xvii. 5 sq. 24 sq. ; xviii. 9 sqq. After its restoration, it was utterly destroyed by John HjTcanus the .lewish prince and high-priest (see next word). Long afterwards rebuilt once more, it was given by Augus- tus to Herod [the Great], by whom it was named in honor of Augustus Sebaste, i. e. Augusta, (Strab. lib. 16, 2αμαρ€ίτηί 568 σαττροί ρ. 760; Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 3 ; 8, δ). It is now an ob- scure village bearing the name of Sebuslieh or Sebasliyth (cf. Bwleker, Palustina, p. 354 sqc). [Kng. trans, p. 340 siiq. ; Murray, llndbk. Pt. ii. p. 329 shausen in Riehm p. 1435 sqq. ; B. D. s. v. Sandal ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 621].* σαν£5, -that, ή, a hoard, a plank: Acts xxvii. 44. (Fr. Ilom. down; Sept., Cant. viii. 9; Ezek. xxvii. 6.)* Σοονλ, {"infW 'asked for'), 6. indecl. (in Josejjh. Σάου- Aot), Saul; 1. the name of the first king of Israel: Acts xiii. 21. 2. the Jewish name of the apostle Paul, but occurring only in address [cf. B. 6] : Acts ix. 4, 17; xxii. 7, 13; xxvi. 14; in the other pass, of the Acts the form ΣανΚος ((ρ v.) with the (irk. term, is used.* o-oirpos, -8pov, καρπια, opp. to xaXor, Wt. vii; 17 sq. ; xii. 33 ; Lk. vi. 43 ; fishes, Mt. xiii. 4S [here A. V. baill ; trop. Xoyos, Eph. iv. 2!J (cf. Harless ad loc.) ; δόγμα, Epict. 3, '22, ul. Cf. Lub. ad Phryn. p. 377 sip* Σαπφίίρη, dat. -τ, (RG Τ VVH), -ci (L Tr ; cf. [117/. App. p. loO]; B. U; [W. 62 («!)]), ψ (either Aram. ΚΎΒΟ i.e. 'beautiful*; Pesliitto |j ^ " ^ : or fr. σ<ίπφ«- pos, 1]. v.), Sappliira, the name of a woman: Acts v. 1.* σ-άπψειρος, -ου, ή, Ilebr. Tili?, sapphire, a precious stone [perh. our tapin lazuli, cf. B. D. s. v. Sapiihire; RiWi/n, HWB. s. v. Edelsteine, 14] : Rev. xxi. 19. (The- ophr., Diosc, al. ; Sept.) ' σ-αργάνη [(prop. ' braided-work ', fr. r. tark ; Fick, Pt. iii. p. 508 ; Vanicek p. 297)], -ης, ή; 1. a braided rape, a band, (Aeschyl. suppl. 788). 2. a basket, a ba.tkel made of ropes, a hamper [cf. B.D. s. v. Basket] : 2 Co. xi. 33 ; (Timocl. in Athen. 8 p. 339 e. ; 9 p. 407 e. ; [al.]).• SapScis, dat. -(σιν, at, [fr. Aeschyl., Ildt., down], Sar- dis [or Hordes'], the capital of Lydia, a luxurious city; now an obscure village, Sari, with extensive ruins: Rev. i. 11 ; iii. 1, 4. [Cf. iMcC. and S. s. v.]• o-apSivos, -ου, 6, Rev. iv. 3 Rec, i. q. aaphiov, q. v.* , thyself, thee : Mt. iv. 6 ; Mk. xii. 31 ; Lk. iv. 23 ; Jn. viii. 5:t ; Ro. xiv. 22 ; GaL vi. 1 ; 1 Tim. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. ii. 15 ; Jas. ii. 8 ; etc. [Cf. B. § 127, 13.] σ-Εβά^ομαι : (σίβαί reverence, awe) ; 1. to fear, be afraid : Horn. II. G, 167. 417. 2. in later auth. i. q. σίβομαι [W. § 2, 1 b.], to honor religiously, lo wor- ship : witli 1 aor. pass, (σιβάιτθηιι in an act. sense, Ro. i. 25 (OrpU. Argon. 554 ; eccl. writ.).* σί'βαο-μα, -rof, τά, (σ(βάζομαι), whatever is religiously honored, an object of worship : 2 Til. ii. 4 (Sap. xiv. 20) ; used of temples, altars, statues, etc.. Acts xvii. 23 ; of idolatrous images, Bel and the Dragon 27; Sap. xv. 17, (Dion. Hal. antt. 1, 30).* α-(βοω-τό$, -η, -όν, (σ(βάζομαϊ) ; 1. reverend, vener- able. 2. ό σιβαστός, Lat. augualus, the title of the Roman emperors: Acts .xxv. 21, 25, (Strabo, Lcian., Hdian., Dio Cass., al.); adj. -c5r, -η, -oV, Augustan i. β. taking its name fr. the emperor: a title of honor which used to be given to certain legions, or cohorts, or battal- ions, "for valor" (ala augusta ob virtutem appellata. Corpus inscrr. Lat. vii. n. 340, 341, 344) : σ -Kfipa σιβ- the A ugiislan cohort. Acts .x.'ivii. 1 (Xf γίώκ σιβαστή, Ptol. 2,3, 30; 2, 9, 18; 4, 3, 30). The subject is fully treated by Schilrer in the Zeitschr. fur wissensch. Theol. for 1875, p. 413 sqq.• σίβω, and (so everywh. in the Scriptures) σίβομαι ; f r. Iloin. down ; lo revere, lo worship : τινά (a deity), Mt. xv. 9; Mk. vii. 7; Acts xviii. 13; xix. 27, (Sap. xv. 18 etc.; for Hy, Josh. iv. 24 ; xxii. 25 ; Jon. i. 9). In the Acts, " proselytes of the gate " (see προσήλυτος, 2) are called σ(βόμ(νοι τόν θ(άν, ['men that worship God'], Acts xvi. 14; xviii. 7, (Joseph, antt. 14, 7, 2); and simply o! σ(βόμ(νοι, [A. V. the devout persons']. Acts xvii. 17; af- βόμινοι πρησηΚυτοι. [R. V. devout proselytes']. Acts xiii. 4'i ; σ^βόμιναι yvvaiKfs, ib. 50 ; oi σ^β- "Ελλι;^ s, [A. V. the devout Greeks], .Vets xvii. 4 ; in the Latin church, metuentes, verecundi, religiosi, timorati; Vulg. [exc. Acts xiii. 50] colentes ; ef. Thilo in his Cod. apocr. Nov. Test, p. 521.• , (ΓΕίρά, -as, ή, (Λρω, to fasten, bind together, [akin to Lat. sero, series, serous, etc.]; cf. Curtius § 518), fr. Horn, down ; a. η line, a rope. b. a chain : (Tfipais ζ•Ίφον. [A.V. to chains of darkness, i. e ] to dark- ness as if to -chains, 2 Pet. ii. 4 R G [but Tr WH have σίφοΪΓ, L Τ σιρηίί, which see in their place] ; μια άλνσ€ΐ σκότους πάντίς (6ίθη(ταν, Sap. xvii. 17 (18).' orapos, -oO, ό, i. q. σ^ιρά, q. v. : 2 Pet. ii. 4 Tr WH. But (Tfipof, Lat. sirus, in prof. writ, is a pit, an underground granary, [e. g. Dem. p. 100 fin. (where the Schol. τ. θψ σαυρους κ. τ. δρνγβατα (ν οΐΓ κατ(τΙΘ(ντο τα σπέρματα σφους ϊκάλουν οί θράκα κ- ο! AiiSufi) : Diod. Sic. 19, 41 ; cf. Suidas s. v. σαροί; Valesius on Harpocr. Lex. s. v. ΜίΚίνη. See Field, Otium Norv. Pars iii. ad loc. Ac- cordingly R. V. txt. follows the crit. edd. (cf. mpot) and renders "pits of darkness"].* σ-εισ-μίδ, -oO, ό, (σίίω), a shaking, a commotion : ev rj θάΚάσστ;, a tempest, Mt. viii. 24 ; as often in Grk. writ. 573 σημίίοιι fr. [Hdt. 4, 2S], Soph., Arstph. down, pre-eminently an tarlhtjualce: Mt. xxiv. 7; xxvii. 54; xxviii. 2; Mk. xiii. 8; Lk.xxi. 11; Actsxvi. 26; Rev. νί12; viii. 5; xi. 13, 19; xvi. 18; Sept. for σ>ρ..* σίίω; fut. σιίσω (Heb. xii. 2GLTTrAVH); Pass., pres. ptcp. σιιόμα/ος; 1 aor. ΐσ€ΐσθηι>; fr. Horn, down; Sept. chiefly for 'C/'^'f ; lo shaLe, tnjilate, cause to tremble: Rev. vi. 13 ; τηνγήν, Heb. xii. 26 after Ilaj. ii. 6 ; ΐσιίσθη η -γή, Mt. xxvii. -jI (Judj. V. 4 ; 2 S. xxii. 8) ; σ^ισθηνΜ άπο φό^υυ, of men, to be tlirown into a tremor, lo quake for fn I/•, Mt. xxviii. 4 ; metaph. to arjitate the mind : ίσ(Ίσθη ή ττόλΐΓ, [R. V. icas s'irred^ i. e. its inliabitants, Mt. xxi. II). [CoMP. : am-, 8ia-, κατά- σίίω.]* SekoOvSos, T Wil Si'/cowSor [Chandler §J 2:33, 2Ϊ5], -ου, ό, (a Lat. ivord), Secandus, a certain man of Thessalo- niea : Acts xx. 4.* Σίλεύκεια [Τ W'H -κία (see I, »)], -as. ή, Seleucia, a city of .Syria on the Mediterranean, about .'> m. (40 stadia, Strabo 16 p. 750) X. of the mouth of the river Orontes, about 15 m. (120 stadia) distant fr. Antioch, and oppo- site Cyprus : Acts xiii. 4 (1 Mace. xi. 8). \_Lewin, St. I'aul, i. 1 16 sqq. ; Con'/h. and fIo'0.• rity ' ; but variously explained]), Sliem, the eldest son of Xoah: Lk. iii. 36.* «τημαίνω; impf. ίσήμΉνον (Acts xi. 28 LWIItxt.); 1 aor. ίσήμανα, for {σήμη\ια wliich is the more com. form in the earlier and mure elegant (irk. writ, (see Matthiae §185; Kuhner § 343 s. v.; [Veitch s. v.] ; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 24 sq. ; W. § 15 s. v. ; B. 4 1 (35)) ; (fr. σήμα a sign ) ; fr. [Horn.], Aescliyl., Ildt. down ; lo give a sign, lo sig- nify, indicate: τι. Acts xxv. 27; foil, by indir. disc., Jn. xii. 33 ; xviii. 32; xxi. 19; i.q.lo make known: absol. Rev. i. 1 ; foil, by ace. w. inf. Acts xi. 28.* (τημείον, -ου, τό, {σημαίνω [or σήμα]), fr. Aeschyl. and ridt. down, Ilebr. niX, a sign, mark, token ; 1. univ. that by which a pers. or a thing is distinguished from others and known : Mt. xxvi. 4'<: Lk. ii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 17; σημύον τκριτομηί (explanatory gen. [cf. B. § 123, 4]), equiv. to σημ(\ον. ό ΐστι π(μιτομή, circumcision wliich should be a sign of the covenant formed with Cod, Ro. iv. 1 1 ; τα σημι'ια τοϋ αποστόλου, the tokens by which one is proved to be an apostle, 2 Co. xii. 12 ; a sign by which anything future is pre-announced, Mk. xiii. 4 ; Lk. xxi. 7 ; TO σημ. τηί σήί παρουσία!, gen. of the obj., Mt. xxiv. 3 ; ToO νιου τοϋ ανθρώπου, the sign which indicates that the Messiah will shortly, or forthwith, come from heaven in visible manifestation, ibid. 30; with a gen. of the subj. τα σημ€ία των καιρών, i.e. the indications of future events Λνΐιΐΰΐι οί καιροί furnisli, what οί καιροί portend, Mt. .xvi. 3 [ Τ br. WII reject the pass.] ; a sign by which one is warned, an admonition, 1 Co. xiv. 22. used of noteworthy personages, by whom God forcibly admonishes men and indicates to them ivhat he would have them do : thus σηαύον άντι\(γόμ(νον is said of Jesus Christ, Lk. li. 34 ; Ίωι/ά; iytvfTo σημ^Ιην τοΐ? ^tveviTais (.Ton. iii. 4), Lk. xi. 30 ; hence, τό σημιΐον Ίωι/ά, ib. 2!!, is i. q. TO σημί'ιον like to that os ηυ Ίωvάt, i• e. to the sign which \vas given by the mission and preaching of .Jonah, to prompt men to seek salvation [W. 189 (177)]; in the same sense, ό vlbs τοϋ ανθρώπου says that he will be a σημfϊov to the men of his generation, ib. 30; but in Mt. xii. 39 ; xvi. 4 τό σημ(ίον Ίωνά is the miraculous experi- ence which befell .lonali himself, cf. .xii. 40; that Luke reproduces Christ's words more correctly than Matthew is shown by De Wette and Bleek on Mt. xii. 40, by Xeander, Leben .Tesu, p. 265 sq. ed. 1 [Eng. trans. (3d ed. X. Y. IS51) § 165 p. 245 S(].], and others; [but that Luke's report is less full than Matthew's, rather than at variance with it, is shown by Meyer, Weiss, Keil, and others (on Mt. 1. c.)]. 2. α sign, prodigy, porlent, i. e. an unusual occurrence, transcending the common course of nature ; a. of signs portending remark- able events soon to happen: Lk. xxi. 11, 25; Acts ii. 19; Rev. xii. 1, 3; χ v. I. b. of miracles and wonders by which God authenticates the men sent bv him, or by which men prove that the cause they are ple.iding is (iod's: ΛΙΐ. xii. 38 sq.; xvi. 1,4; Mk. viii. 11 sq.; Χλΐ. 17, 20; Lk. xi. 16, 29; xxiii. 8; Jn. ii. 11, 18, 23; iii. 2; iv. 54: vi. 2. 14,26. 30: vii. 31 ; ix. 16: x. 41:xi47;xU σημ€ΐοω 574 σικαριο<; 18,37; XX. 30; Acts ϋ. 22,43; viii. 6 ; 1 Co. i. 22 ; but the power διδόναι σημιΊα, by which men are deceived, is ascribed also to false teachers, false prophets, and to demons : Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Rev. xiii. 13 sq. ; xvi. 14; xix. 20; 2 Th. ii. 9. σημ(1α κ. rcpara (nins Ο'ΠϋΟΟ or (yet less freij.) τίρατα κ.σημ(ία (terms which differ not in substantial meaning but only in origin ; cf. Frilzsclie, Rom. vol. iii. p. 270 sq.; [Trench § xci.]) are found conjoined : ^It. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 ; Jn. iv. 48; Acts ii. 19, 43; iv. 30; v. 12; vi. 8 ; vii. 30 ; xiv. 3 ; xv. 12 ; Ro. χ v. 19 ; 2 Th. ii. 9, (Deut. x.xviii. 46 ; xxxiv. 11 ; Neh. ix. 10; Is. viii. 18; xx. 3; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 20; Sap. viii. 8; x. 16; Polyb. 3, 112, 8; Philo, vit. Moys. i. 16 ; Joseph, antt. 20, 8, 6 ; b. j. prooera. 1 1 ; Plut. Alex. . 75 ; Ael. v. h. 12, 57) ; with κ. 8υνάμ(ΐς added, 2 Co. xii. 12; Ileb.ii.4; σημαία κ.Βννάμΐΐί^ Acts viii. 13; dwapeis κ• Tepara κ. σημεΊα, Acts ii. 22 ; δίδόναί σημξ'ια (see 8ί8ωμί, Β. η. I a.) : Mt. xxiv. 24 ; Mk. xiii. 22 (here Tdf. noiflv σημ., see πούω, I. 1 C.) ; σημαία are said -γίνισθαι δια Tivos in Actsii. 43; iv. [16], 30; v. 12; xiv. 3; xv. 12 [here Tsoifiv σημ., see above] ; το σημ^Ίον ttje ϊάσ^ωϊ, the mira- cle, which Avas the healing, Acts iv. 22.* σημ.£ΐόω, -ώ : (σημύον), to mark, note, distinguish hy marking; Mid. pres. impv. 2 pers. plur. σημαοίσθι; to mark or note for one's se//'[W. § 38, 2 b. ; B. § 135, 4] : Tifa, 2Th. iii. 14 [cf. B. 92 (80) ; W. 119 (113)]. (The- ophr., Polyb., Philo, Dion. Hal, al. ; [Ps. iv. 7 Sept.].)• σ-ήμΕρον [Attic τήμιρυν, I. e. ήμίρα with pronom. prefix (Skr. sa) ; cf. Vanicek p. 971], adv., fr. Horn, down, Sept. for DVn, to-day, this day : Mt. vi. 1 1 ; xvi. 3 [T br. WH reject the pass.] ; Lk. iv. 21 ; xix. 5 ; Acts iv. 9 ; xiii. 33, etc.; also where the speaker refers to the night just passed, Mt. xxvii. 19 ; equiv. to this night (now current), Lk. ii. 1 1 ; σήμερον ταύττ] ττ) νυκτί, Mk. xiv. 30 ; ϊως σήμ(- ρον, 2 Co. iii. 15 ; ορρ. to αΰριον, Mt. vi. 30 ; Lk. xii. 2S ; xiii. 32 sq. ; Jas. iv. 13; χθϊς κα\ σήμερον και eii τονς αχωναί, a rhet. periphrasis for ael, lleb. xiii. 8; ή σήμερον ημίρα, this (very) day, Acts xx. 26 ; ίωί της σ. ήμίρας, Ro. xi. 8 ; μίχρί τη! σήμιρον sc. ήμίρας, Mt. xi. 23 ; .x.wiii. 15 ; (MS T^t σ. Mt. x.xvii. 8 ; άχρι τηί σ. (where L Τ Tr ΛνΠ add ήμίραί), 2 Co. iii. 14 ; ^ afjpepov, i. q. what has happened to-day [al. render concerning this day's riot; B. § 1 33, 9 ; but see Meyer ad loc. ; W. § 30, 9 a.]. Acts xix. 40; TO σήμερον, the Λvord to-day, Heb. iii. 13; as a subst. : opi'ffi ήμίραν, σήμερον, "a to-day " (meaning, 'a time for embracing the salvation graciously offered ' [cf. R. V.mrg.]), Heb. iv. 7•. «τήττω : fr. Hom. down ; to make corrupt ; in the Bible also to de.^troy. Job xl. 7 (12) ; pass, to become corrupt or rotten ; 2 pf. act. σίσηπα. to (have become i. e. to) be corrupted (cf. Btlm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 82) : ό nXoCros σί- arfnfv, has perished, Jas. v. 2.' σηρικοί (Lchm. ed. maj. Τ WH σιρικόί [cf. WU. App. p. I5I]), -η, -όν. (Σηρ, 2ripes, the .^eres, a people of India [prob. mod. China; yet on the name cf. Pape, Eigen- namen, s. v.; Diet, of Geog. s. v. Serica]) ; 1. prop. pertaining tn the Seres. 2. silken : το σηρικόν. silk, i. e. the fabric, silken garments. Rev. xviii. 1 2. ([Strabo, Plut., Arr., Lcian.] ; ίσθησ^σι σηρικαϊί, Joseph, b. j. 7, 5, 4.)• oTJs, σητός, ό. (Hebr. DD, Is. Ii. 8 ; Oj,\, Job iv. 19 ; xiii. 28), a moth, the clothes-moth, [B. D. s. v. Moth ; Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Ash] : Mt. vi. 19 sq. ; Lk. xii. 33. (Pind., Ar- stph.. Aristot., Theophr., al.) * <Γητό-βρωτο5, -ov, (fr. σή^ a moth, and βρωτάι fr. βι- βρώσκω), tniith-ealen: ιματίου, Jas. v. 2 {'ιμάτια. Job xiii. 28 ; of idol-images, Sibyll. orac. in Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 36).- ο-θίνόω, -ώ : (σίί'ΐΌί [allied w. στηυαι, hence prop, stead- fastness ; Curtius p. 503 sq.] strength), to make strong, to strengthen: τινά, one's soul, 1 Pet. v. 10, where for 1 aor. opt. act. 3 pers. sing, σίίΐ/ώσαι, we must read the fut. σθ(νώσ€ΐ, with GLTTrWII. (Pass, in Rhet. Or. ed. Walz, vol. i. c. 15.) • σιαγών, -o'vos, ή, the Jaw, the Jaw-bone, [A. V. cheek'] : Mt. V. 39 ; Lk. vi. 29. (Soph., Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.; Sept. for -nS.)* σιγάω, -ώ ; 1 aor. ΐσίγησα ; pf. pass. ptcp. σίσιγι/^ίΐ/οί ; (σιγή) ; fr. Hom. down ; to keep silence, hold one's peace : Lk. i.x. 30; xviii. 39 LTTr WH; [xx. 26]; Acts xii. 17 ; .XV. 12 sq.; 1 Co. xiv. 28, 30, 34 ; pass, to be kept in silence, be concealed, Ro. xvi. 25. [Syn. see ησυχάζω.] * σιγή, -η!, ή, (fr. σίζω [onomatopoetic, Etym. Magn. 712, 29] i. e. to command silence by making the sound si or sch ; [yet σιγή prob. has no connection Avitli σίζω, but is of European origin (cf. Germ, schiceigen) ; cf. Fick, Pt. iii. 843 ; Curtius §572]), fr. Hom. down, silence: Acts xxi. 40 ; Rev. viii. 1.* σι8ήρ£ο;, -ία, -eov, contr. -oCf, -5, -οϋν, {σίδηρος), fr. Hom. down, made oj'iron: Acts xii. 10; Rev. ii. 27; ix. 9 ; xii. 5 ; xix. 15.* σίδηροί, -ου, ό, fr. Hom. down, iron : Rev. xviii. 12.* Σιδών, -ώι/οΓ [Β. 16 (14)], ή, (jITi• and p-y, fr. ΊΙΪ 'to hunt', in Aram, also 'to fish'; hence prop, taking its name from its abundance of fish ; cf. Justin 18, 3), Sidon, a very ancient I'hoenician city, formerly distinguished for wealth and traffic, situated near the Mediterranean on the borders of Judsa ; it had been assigned to the tribe of Asher (Josh. xix. 28), but the Jews vainly en- deavored to capture it [Judg. i. 31 ; iii. 3 ; x. 12] ; now Saida, containing about 10,000 [or 9,000, ace. to Porter in Murray's Ilandliook p. 376] inhabitants [Baedeker, Palestine p. 433] : .Mt. xi. 21 sq. ; xv. 21 ; Mk. iii. 8 ; vii. 24 (where Tom. WH Tr mrg. br. the words καΊ Σιδώι /or), 31; Lk.iv.26 (where LT Tr WH Σιδω^αΓ); vi. 1 7 ; x. 13 sq. ; .\cts xxvii. 3. [Cf. BB. DD. s. v. ; Scliutiz in I lerzog ed. 2 vol. xiv. 192s(|q. ; Schlottmann in Riehni s. v.] • SiSuvios, -a, -ov, (2ιδών), belonging to Sidon, of Sidnn : της Σώωνίας sc. χώρας. [R.V. in the land of Siilon], Lk. iv. 26 LT Tr WH (Hom. Od. 13, 285 [but -δοι/-]) ; Σι- δώΐΊοί, the inhabitants of Sidon, Acts xii. 20.* σικάριο;, -ου, ό, (a Latin word), an a.'!.'iassin, i. e. one who carries a dagger or short sword [Lat. sica (cf. Jo- seph, as below)] under his clothing, that he may kill secretly and treacherously any one he wishes to (a cut- throat): Acts xxi. 38. (Joseph, b. j. 2, 17, 6 σικαρίονς Tucepa 6T5 σιναιη (κάΚουν Tovs \ηστάι ίχονται νπο xois κόλπου τα ζίφη [cf. 2, 13, 3] ; also antt. 20, 8, 10 (τικάμιοι λησταί (Ισι χρώμ(νοι ξίφώίοΐ! παραπλήσιοι! μίν το μ(γ(θθ! Tois των Πίρσών άκι- νάκαίς^ (πικαμπ^σι δε και όμοίοίς ταΐς νπο 'Ρωμαίων σίκαις κα\ουμ€ναΐ5, άφ^ ^ν καΐ την ττ ροση-γορίαν οι XrjirrevovTes eXa- βον ποΚλονς avaipoivTfs•) [Syn. see ψοκίύϊ.] * σίκ€ρα, τό, (Hebr. "ΐ3"ΰ; [rather, ace. to Kautzsch (Gram, p. 11) for Κ"Ι3Π (prop, σίκρα) the stat. emphat. of IJ» (lit. 'into.\icating' drink)]), indecl. [W. 68 (66); B. 24 (21)], (yet Euseb. praep. evang. 6, 10, 8 has a gen. aiKcpos [and Soph, in his Lex. quotes fr. Cyrill. Alex. 1, 1041 d. (ed. Mi:;ne) a gen. ciKcparos]), strong drink, an intoxicating beverage, different from wine [exc. in Num. xxviii. 7 (cf. Is. xxviii. 7)] ; it was a factitious product, made of a mixture of sweet ingredients, whether derived from grain and vegetables, or from the juice of fruits (dates), or a decoction of honey : Lk. i. 15 (Lev. x. 9 ; Num. vi. 3; Deut. xiv. 25 (26) ; xxix. 6, etc. ; the same Hebr. word is rendered also by μίθυσμα, Judg. xiii. 4, 7, 14; Mic. ii. 11). Cf. W'ui. RAVB. s. v. Wein, kunst- licher ; [B. D. s. v. Drink, Strong].* Σίλα;, [gen. not found (exc. Joseph, vita 17 -a)], dat. -a, ace. -av, [B. 20 (18)], ό, Silas (contr. fr. 'S.CKovavos, q. v.; W. 103 (97)), a Roman citizen (Acts xvi. 37 sq.), the companion of the apostle Paul in several of his jour- neys, and his associate in preaching the gospel : Acts XV. 22, 27, 32, 34 Rec, 40; xvi. 19, 25, 29 ; xvii. 4, 10, 14 sq.; xviii. 5. [B. D. s. v. Silas.] * ϋιλουανόΐ, -οϋ, ό, Siloanus, the same man who in Acts is called Σι'λαΓ (q. v.) : 2 Co. i. 19 ; 1 Th. i. 1 ; 2 Th. i. 1 ; 1 Pet. v. 12. [Not infreq. written in the Mss. 'ΣϊΚβανό!, Silbanus; cf. Tdf. on 11. cc] * Σιλωόμ, (Hebr. nSi?, Is. viii. 6, which in Jn. ix. 7 is translated άπ€σΎαλμ€νος, but more correctly [see below] ' a sending out,' ^ gushing forth ' (of water) ; it is formed after the analogy of 21'K ' had in hatred ', ' persecuted ', fr. 2'K ; llS' ' born ', fr. iV ' to bring forth ' ; [" the pure- ly passive explanation, άπ(στα\μ(νο!, Jn. i.x. 7, is not so incorrect." Ewald, Ausfiihrl. I-ehrbuch d. Hebr. Spr. § 1.50, 2 a.; cf. Meyer on Jn. 1. c.]), ό (in Joseph, ή Σ., sc. πηγή, b. j. 5, 12, 2 ; 6, 8, 5 ; but also μίχρι τοϋ Σ. b. j. 2, 16,2; 6, 7,2; [Β. 21 (19)]), [indecl. ; but in Joseph, b. j. 5, 6, 1 άπο TTJs Σιλωότ], Siloam, a fountain of sweet and abundant water (.Joseph, b. j. 5, 4, 1), flowing into a basin or pool of the same name (Neh. iii. 15), both of which seem to have been situated in the southern part of Jer- usalem, although opinions vary on this point : Lk. xiii. 4 ; Jn. ix. 11, (Is. viii. 6). Cf. [B. D. s. v. Siloam]; Win. RWB. s. V. Siloah ; Rodiger in Gesen. Thesaur. p. 1416 ; Leijrer in Herzog ed. 1, xiv. p. 371 sqq. ; Robinson, Pal- estine, i. 333 sqq. ; Tohler, Die Siloaquelle u. der Oelberg (St. Gallen, 1852); Knencker, Siloah, Quelle Teich u. Thai in Jerus. (Heidelb. 1873); Fnrrer in Schenkel v. 295 sq. ; [Ritter, Palestine, etc., Eng. trans, i. 148 sq. ; Wilson, Ordnance Survey, etc., 1865 ; esp. Guthe in the Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Pal.-Vereins for 1882, pp. 205 sqq. 229 sqq. ; Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Morgenl.-Gesellsch. for 1882 p. 725 sqq.].• σΊ)ΐικ(νθιον (or σημικίνθιον), -ου, τό, (Lat. semicinctium [cf. Rich, Diet, of Antiq. s. v.], fr. semi and cingo), a narrow apron, or linen covering, which workmen and servants were accustomed to wear: Acts xix. 12 [A. V. aprons^* Σ(μ«>ν, -ωνοί [Β. 16 (14)], ό, (iU'Dty, ' a hearing *, fr. Jiljty 'to hear ' ; [there was also a Grk. name Σίμων (allied w. σιμοί, i. e. ' flat-nosed ' ; Fick, Gr. Personennamen, p. 210), but cf. B. D. s. V. Simon init. ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. p. 266 sq.]), Simon; 1. Peter, the apostle: Mt. xvii. 25 ; Mk. i. 29 sq. 36 ; Lk. iv. 38 ; v. 4 sq. 10, etc. ; see Πί'τροί. 2. the brother of Judas Lebbsus [cf. s. v. '\oihas, 8], an apostle, who is called }ίανανΊτη! [so RG, but L Τ Tr AVH -va'ioi, q. v.], Mt. x. 4 ; Mk. iii. 18, and ζηΧαπηί, Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. 3. a brother of Jesus [cf. s. V. άδίλφο'Γ, 1] : IMt. xiii. 55 ; Mk. vi. 3. 4. a certain Cyrenian, who carried the cross of Jesus : Mt. xxvii. 32 ; Mk. xv. 21 ; Lk. xxiii. 26. 5. the father of Judas Iscariot [and himself surnamed Ίσκαρ•- ώτ7)£ (see'IouSas, 6)] : Jn. vi. 71 ; xii. 4; xiii. 2, 26. 6. a certain Pharisee, Lk. vii. 40, 43 sq., who appears to [some, e. g. Grotius, Schleiermacher, Holtzmann, Schen- kel, Ewald, Keim, Hug, Bleek (see his Synopt. Erklar. on Lk. 1. c.) to] be the same as Simon the leper, Mt. xxvi. 6 ; Mk. xiv. 3 ; [but the occurrence recorded by Lk. 1. c. ia now commonly thought to be distinct fr. that narrated by Mt. and Mk. 11. cc. ; cf. Godet or Keil on Lk.]. 7. a certain tanner, living at Joppa : Acts ix. 43 ; x. 6, 1 7, 32. 8. 5im»i! (' ^Wa^us '), the Samaritan sorcerer : Acts viii. 9, 13, 18, 24. The various eccles. stories about him, as well as the opinions and conjectures of modern theologians, are reviewed at length by Lipsius in Schen- kel V. pp. 301-321 ; [cf. W. Moller in Herzog ed. 2, vol. xiv. p. 246 sqq. ; Schaff, Hist, of the Chris. Church, vol. ii. (1883) §121]. "Zivil-va WU. ; cf. Chandler §§ 135, 138], τό (sc. Spor, cf. B. 21 sq. (19)), indecl., Joseph, το Σιναϊον, antt. 3, 5, 1, and TO Τ,ιναΙον Spas, antt. 2, 12, 1 ; Hebr. 'yo [perh. 'jagged'; al. make it an adj. 'belonging to (the desert of) Sin '], (Sina or) Simii, a mountain or, rather, a moun- tainous region in the peninsula of Arabia Petraea, made famous by the giving of the Mosaic law. There are three summits : one towards the west, which is called a'll'n, a second towards the east, Sinai prop, so called, the third towards the south, now Mt. St. Catharine. But the dis- tinction between Horeb and Sinai is given differently bv different writers ; and some think that they were two different names of one and the same mountain (cf. Sir. xlviii. 7) ; cf. [AfcC. and S. Cycl. s. v. Sinai] ; Win. RWB. S.V.Sinai; Arnold in Herzog ed. 1 vol. xiv. p. 420 sq.; [Schultz in ed. 2 vol. xiv. p. 282 sqq.] ; Furrer in Schen- kel v. p. 326 sqq. ; [Eng. Ordnance Survey, 1869 ; Palmer, Desert of the Exodus, 1872; also his Sinai from the Monuments, 1878; Furrer commends Holland's " Sketch Map" etc. in the Journ. of the Royal Geog. Soc. vol. xxxix. (Lond. 1869)]. The name occurs in Acts vii. 30, 38 ; Gal. iv. 24 sq.• σ-ίναιπ. (also σίνηπι [but .^ot in the N. T.], both later V^Ml 576 σκανΒαΧις» for the Attic νάττυ [so accented in late auth., better varru], »ee Lob. ad Γ1ιγ>•π. p. 2SK). [thought to be of Egypt, ori- orin; of. r«/ii(e/•, Fremdworter, s. V. ι/ΰττν], -foir [B. 14 (13)], TO, mustiinl, the name of a plant ivhicli in oriental countries grows from a very small seed and attains to the height of ' a tree ' — ten feet and more ; hence a very small ([iiantity of a thing is likened to a kokkos aiuunfits [A. V. (I 7)•(ΐίιι nf musUinl seeil], Mt. xvii. 20 ; Lk. xvii. 6 ; and also a thing which grows to a remarkable size, Mt. xiii. 31 sq.; Mk.iv.31; Lk.xiii.13. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Mustard; Loir, Aram. Pflanzennamen, §134; Carru- l/iei:i in the ' Bible Educator ' voh i. p. 1 19 sq. ; Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 47-2 sq.; Thomson, The Land and the Book, ii. 100 si].] * crivSiiv. -6ms. η, (of uncertain origin; Skr. sindhu [Egypt. '.-.chenti' or 'sent'; cf. Vniiuek; Fremdworter, s. v.j; Sept. for ]'-\0, Judg. xiv. liscp ; Prov. xxix. 42 (xxxi. 24)), /ne clolh (Lm. .''inilon), i.e. X. linen cloth, esp. that which was fine and costly, in which the bodies of the dead were wrapped: ]Mt. xxvii. 59; Mk. XV. 4G ; Lk. xxiii. 53, (cf. Hdt. 2, 86 who says of the Egyptians, κατιίΚισσονσι πάκ τό σώμα σίνδόκοΓ βυσσινής [see Wiikinson's note in Rawlinson's Herod. 3d ed. l.c.]). 2. thinij made (if Jine clolh: so of a light and loose garment worn at night over the naked body, Mk. xiv. 51 sq. [others suppose a sheet rather than a shirt to be referred to; A. V. linen cloth ; cf. B.D. Am. ed. s. v. Sheets]. (Besides Hdt., the writers Soph., Thuc, Stra- bo, Lcian., al., use the word.) * σινίάζω: 1 aor. infin. σιυιάσαι; (σινίον 'a sieve,' 'win- nowing-van'; an eccles. and Byzant. word [cf. Macar. homil. 5 p. 73 sq. (4;it; a. ed. Migne)]) ; to sifi, shake in a sieve : nva i>s τοι» σ'ιτον, i. e., droi)ping the fig., by in- ward agitation to try one's faith to the verge of over- throw, Lk. xxii. 31. (Eccles. writ. [cf. W. 92 (87), 26 (25), and see above].) * o-ipiKOs, see σηρικό!- o-ipns, -oC, 0, i. q. σ(ΐρ6ί, q. v. : 2 Pet. ii. 4 L T.* ' ciii/ of Darid, because David captured it) ; it was the souili- westernmost and highest of the hills on which the city stood; [many now ivould identify it with the eastern hill, some with the northern ; cf. Furrer in Schenkel iii. 216 sqq.; MUhlau in Riehm s. v. ; per contra Wolcott in B. D. Am. ed. s. v.; Schultz in Herzog ed. 2 vi. p. 54S sq.]. 2. used very often for the entire city of Jeru- salem itself: Ro. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 6, (after Is. xxviiL 1 6) ; Ro. xi. 26 (fr. Is. lix. 20) ; η θυγάτηρ Σιών (see θυγάτηρ, b. /S), Mt. xxi. 5; Jn. xii. 15. 3. Since Jerusalem, becau.se the temple stood there, was called the dwelling- place of (! od (cf. Mt. v. 35 ; κΰρια την Σιώκ ήρίτΐσατο (Is κατοικίαν ίαυτω, Ps. cxxxi. (cxxxii.) 13), the expression TO Σιων Spos is transferred to heaven, as the true dwell- ing-place of God and heavenly beings, the antitype of the earthly Zion : Heb. xii. 22; Rev. xiv. 1.• «Γΐωιτάω, -ώ ; impf., 3 pers. sing, ίσιώπα, 3 pers. plur. (σιώπων: fut. σιωπήσω (Lk. xix. 40 L Τ Tr WII) ; 1 aor. (σιώπησα: (σιωπή silence); fr. Hom. down; to he silent, hold one's peace : prop., Mt. xx. 31 ; xxvi. 63; 5Ik. iii. 4; ix. 34; X. 48; xiv. 61 ; Lk. xviii. 39 R G ; xix. 40; Acts xviii. 9 ; used of one silent because dumb, Lk. i. 20 ; 4 Mace. X. 18 ; like sileo in the Lat. poets, used nietn[ih. of a calm, quiet sea [(in rhetorical command)] : Mk. iv. 39. [Syn. see ήσυχάζω-Ί' ο-κανεαλίζω; 1 aor. €σ•κοΐ'δάλισα; Pass., pres. ffKovSaXi'fo- μαι: \m]<{. (σκαν8ιι\ιζόμην: 1 aor. €'σκαΐ'δαλι'σ5ι;ΐ' [cf. Β. 52 (45)]; 1 fut. σκανίαλισθήσομαι; (σκάνδα\ον); Vulg. ,scan- dalizo ; Peshitto ''^_*^ j ; prop, to put a kumhling-block or impediment in the way, upon which another may trip and fall; to he a stumhling-hlock ; in the N. T. always metaph. [R. V. to cause or make to stumble ; A. Λ'^. In offend (cause to offend)]; a. to entice to sin (Luth. argern, i. e. arg, bos machen) : τινά, Jit. v. 29, [30] ; xviii. 6,8.sq.; Mk. ix. 42 sq. 45, 47; Lk.xvii.2; iCo.viii. 13; pass. Lat. offendor. [A. V. to be offended"], \u\q,. scanda- lizor, Peshitto 'g^ ^^ : Ro. xiv. 21 [RGLTrtxt.]; 2 Co. xi. 29 [R. V. is made to stumble; cf. W. 1 53 (1 45)]. b. to cause a person to begin to distrust and desert one irhor» he ought to trust and obey; to cause to fall au-ny, and in pass, to fall away [R. V. to stumble (cf. 'Teaching' etc. 10, 5; Herm. vis. 4, 1, 3; mand. 8, 10)]: τινά. Jn. vi. 61 : oass.. Mt. xiii. 21 : xxiv. 10 : xxvi. 33 ; Mk. iv. ικύνΒαΧον 577 σκηνή 17 ; xiv. 29 ; [Jn. xvi. 1] ; U τιη [Α. V.] Ιο be offended m one,. \ βηά occasion of stumhling in~\, i. e. to see in anotlier what I disapprove of and what hinders me from Sfknowledging his authority: Mt. xi. 6 ; xiii. 57; xxvi. 31; Alk. vi. y; xiv. 27; Llc.vii. 23; to cause one to judye liii/ctroruhli/ or uiijnslli/ nf awit/ier, Mt. xvii. 27. Since the man who stumbles or wliose foot gets entangled fi'L'ls annoyed, σκανδαλίζω means c. to cause one to feel disi/leasure nl a thing; to make indignant: τινά, pass, to be displease//, indignant, [Λ. V. oJfended'\, Mt. XV. 12. The verb σκαν8αλϊζω is found neither in prof, aulh. nor in the Sept., but only in the relics of Aquila's version of the O. T., Ps. Ixiii. (Ixiv.) 9 ; Is. viii. 15 ; [xl. 80] ; Prov. iv. 12 for ^!i)3 ; besides in Sir. ix. 5 ; xxiii. 8; XXXV. (xxxii.) 15; [Psalt. Sal. 16, 7. Cf. W. 33.] • σ-κάνδαλον, -ου, τό. a purely bibl. [(occurring some twenty-five times in the Grk. O. T., and fifteen, quotations included, in the New)] and eccles. word for σκαΛίληθμον, which occurs occasionally in native Grk. writ.; Sei>t. for fpn (a noose, a snarej and '71U'J5"p ; a. prop, t/ic mocal/le stick or tricker ('trigger') of a trap, traj>-slick; a trap, snare ; any impediment placed in the way and caus- ing one to stumble or fall, [a stumbling-block, occasion of ttumbling']: Lev. xix. 14; πίτρα σκανδάλου [.\. V. a rock of offence"], i. e. a rock which is a cau.-;e of stumbling (Lat. ojjewliculum), — fig. applied to Jesus Christ, whose person and career were so contrary to the expectations of the Jews concerning the Messiah, that they rejected him and by their obstinacy made shipwreck of salvation (see πρόσκημμα). Ho. ix. 33 and 1 Pet. ii. 8 (7), (fr. Is. viii. 14). b. metaph. any person or thing by which one is ('entrapped') drawn into error or sin [cf. AV. 32] ; a. of persons [(Josh, xxiii. 13; 1 S. xviii. 21)]: Mt. xiii. 41 ; xvi. 23 (where σκάνδαλον " non ex eff ectu, sed ex natura et condicione propria dicitur," Caloi•.); 80 Χρίστος ίσταυρωμίνος is calleil (because his ignomin- ious death on the cross roused the opposition of the Jews), 1 Co. i. 23. β. of things : τιθϊναι nvi σκάν- SaXov (literally, in Judith v. 1), to put a stumbling-block in one's way, i. e. to do tliat by whicli another is led to sin, Ro. xiv. 13; the same idea is expressed by βά\\ίΐν σκάνδαλον ΐνώπιάν Tivos [Ό cast a stumbling-block before one]. Rev. ii. 14 ; ουκ εστί σκάνδαλον ίν τινι (see dpi, V. 4 e.), 1 Jn. ii. 10; plur. σκάι-δίΐλα, words or deeds ivhich entice to sin (Sap. xiv. 11), Mt. xviii. 7 [cf. B. 322 (277) n.; W. 371 (348)] ; Lk. xvii. 1 ; σκάνδαλα notf'iv πάρα την ίιδαχην, to cause persons to be drawn awav from the true doctrine into error and sin [cf. παρά. III. 2 a.], Ro. xvi. 17; TO σκάνδ. τοΰ σταυρού, tlie offence which the cross, i. e. Christ's death on the cross, gives (cf. a. fin. above), [R. V. the stumbling-block of the cross]. Gal. v. 11 ; i. q. a cause of destruction, Ro. xi. 9, fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Ixix.) 23.• σκάιττ» ; 1 aor. ίσκαψα ; [allied w. it are Eng. ' sliip ', 'skiff•, etc.; Curtius § 109; Pick iv. 267; vii. 336]; to dig: Lk. vi. 48 (on which see βαθύνω) ; xiii. 8 [B. § 130, 6J; xvi. 3. ([Hom. h. Merc.]; Arstph., Eurip., Xen., Plat., Aristot., Theophr., al.) [CoMP. : κατα-σκάτττω.] ' (Γκόψη, -Tjf, η, (σκάπτω [ο. v.]), fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down, anything dug onl, hollow vessel, trough, tray, tub; spec, a boat: Acts xxvii. 16, 30, 32.* <ΓΚ£'λο5, -our, TO, fr. Hom. down, the leg i. e. from the hip to the toes inclusive : Jn. xix. 31 sq. 33.' (Γκ«να(Γμα, -Tof, τό, (σκιπάζω to cover), a covering, spec, clothing (.\ristot. pol. 7, 17 p. 1336", 17; Joseph, b. j. 2, 8, r>) : 1 Tim. vi. 8.* Σκ(υαβ. -ά [W. § 8, 1 ; Β. 20 (18)], ό, Sceva, a certain chief priest [cf. ap\tfpeii, 2 fin.]: Acts xix. 14.* <ΓΚ€υή, -rjs, ή, [cf. σκfΰos], fr. [Pind., Soph.], Hdt. down, any ap/iaralus, equipment, or furniture; used of the uten- sils [outfit, i.e. furniture (? — so R. Λ'. mrg.), or tackhng (?— so A. v., R. V. txt.)] of a ship (Diod. 14, 79) : Acts xxvii. 19 (Sept. Jon. i. 5).* σκίΰοί, -ους, τό, [prob. fr. r. sku 'to cover'; cf. Lat. scutum, cutis, obscurus; Curtius § 113; A^anicek p. 1115], fr. [Arstph.], Thuc. down; Sept. for •'73 ; 1. a tes- sel: Mk.xi.l6; Lk.viii.l6; Jn.xix.29; Acts x. 11,16; xi. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. ii. 27; xviii. 12: τά σκ. τής λ«- Tovpyiat, to be used in performing religious rites, Heb. ix. 21 ; σ«ΟοΕ tU τιμήν, unto honor, i. e. for honorable use, Ro. ix. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 21, (καθαρών ϊργων δοΰλα σκ(ύη. Sap. XV. 7); fi's άτιμίαν, unto dishonor, i. e. for a low use (as, a urinal), Ro. ix. 21 ; σκ(ϋη ό|ryήs, into which wrath is emptied, i. e. men appointeil by God unto woe, hence the addition κατηρησμί^α (is άπώλιιαν, Ro. ix. 22; σκιύη eXiouE, fitted to receive mercy, — explained by the ivords a προητοιμασ€ν (ίς δύζαν, ib. 23 ; το σκίϋος is used of a woman, as tlie vessel of her husband, 1 Th. iv. 4 (see κτάομαι ; [ah take it here (as in 2 Co. iv. 7 below) of the body] ) ; the female sex, as being weaker tlian the male, is likened to a σ«Οοί άσθ(ν(στ(ρον, in order to com- mend to husbands the obligations of kindness towards tlieir ^vives (for the iveaker the vessels, the greater must be the care lest they be broken), 1 Pet. iii. 7; οστράκινα σκ(ύη is applied to human bodies, as frail, 2 Co. iv. 7. 2. an implement ; plur. household utensils, do- tnestic gear: Mt. xii. 29; Mk. iii. 27; Lk. xvii. 31, [in these pass. R. V. goods] ; as the plur. often in Grk. writ, denotes the tackle and armament of I'essels (Xen. oec. 8, 1 2 ; Plat. Critias p. 11 7 d. ; Lach. p. 183 e. ; Polyb. 22, 26, 13), so tlie sing, τό σκ(νος seems to be used spec, and collectively of the sails and ropes (R. Λ^. gear) in Acts xxvii. 17. metaph. of a man : σκίϋος εκλογής (gen. of quality), a chosen instrument [or (so A. V.) 'vessel], Actsix. 15; in a base sense, an assistant in accomplishini» evil deeds [cf. Eng. 'tool'], σκ(νο! ΰπηρ(τικόν, Polyb. 13, 5, 7; 15, 25, 1.* «Γκηνή, -ης, ή, [fr. r. ska ' to cover ' etc. ; cf. σκιά, σκό- τος, etc. ; Lat. casa, cassis, castrum ; Eng. shade, etc. ; Curtius § 1 12; Vanicek p. 1054 sq.], fr. [Aeschyl.], Soph, and Thuc. down ; Sept. chiefly for Sns, often also for IliVp, also for r^30 ; a tent, tabernacle, (made of green boughs, or skins, or other materials) : Mt. xvii. 4 ; Mk. ix. 5 ; Lk. i.x. 33 ; Heb. xi. 9 ; αϊ αΐωΜοι σκηναί (see at»'• νιος. 3), f.,k. xvi. 9 (et dabo iis tabernacula aeterna quae praeparaveram illis, 4 (5) Esdr. ii. 11); of that well ακηνοττηΎΐα 578 σκιρτάω known movable temple of God after the pattern -of which the temple at Jerusalem was subsequently built [cf. B. D. s. V. Temple] : Ileb. viii. 5 ; ix. 1 Ileo.•', 21 ; with ToO μαρτυρίου added (see μαρτύριον, c. fin.), Acts \n. 44; the tenii)le is called σκηνή in Ileb. xiii. 10; σκηνή ή ιτρώτη, the front part of the tabernacle (and afterwards of the temple), the Holy place, Heb. ix. 2, B, 8; of the Holy of holies, Heb. ix. 3 ; the name is transferred to heaven, as the true divelling-jilace of God and the pro- totype of the earthly 'tabernacle' or sanctuary, Ileb. ix. Π ; Rev. xiii. 6; hence ή σκηνή ή ά\ηθιρή, heaven, Ileb. viii. 2 ; with a reference to this use of the word, it is declared that when the kingdom of God is perfectly es- tablished ή σκηνή τοϋ θ(οϋ will be μ(τα των ανθρώπων (after the analogy of σκηνοΰν μ^τά rti/os). Rev. xxi. 3 ; ό ναός της σκηνής του μαρτυρίου (see μαρτύριον^ C. fin.), the heavenly temple, in which was the tabernacle of the covenant, i. e. the inmost sanctuary or adytum, Rev. xv. 5. ή σκ. τοϋ Μολό;^, Oic lahernade i.e. portable shrine of Moloch, Acts vii. 43 (for the Orientals on their jour- neys and military expeditions used to carry with them their deities, together with shrines for them ; hence ή Upa σκηνή of the Carthaginians in Died. 20, 6a, where see Wesseling [but cf. ni3p in Muhlau and Volck's Gesen- ius, or the recent Comm. on Am. v. 26]). η σκηνή Δαυίδ (fr. Am. ix. 11 for Π3ρ), the hut (tabernacle) of Daoid, seems to be employed, in contempt, of his houae, i. e. family reduced to decay and obscurity. Acts xv. 16 (other- wise in '7ΠΧ in Is. xvi. 5).' σκηνοΊτηγία, -ας, ή, (σκηνή and ττηγνυμι, cf. Heb. viii. 2) ; 1. the construction of a taljernacle or tahcrnn- cles : ή της χ(\ώόνος σκηνοττηγία, the skill of the swallow in building its nest, Aristot. h. a. 9, 7 [p. 612', 22]. 2. the feast of tabernacles : Jn. vii. 2. This festival was observed by the Jews yearly for seven days, beginning with the 15th of the month Tisri [i. e. approximately, Oct. ; cf. BB.DD. s. v. Month], partly to perpetuate the memory of the time when their ancestors after leaving Egypt dwelt in tents on their way through the Arabian desert (Lev. xxiii. 43), partly as a season of festivity and joy on the completion of the harvest and the vintage (Deut. xvi. 13) ['the feast of ingatbe.'ng' (see below)]. In celebrating the festival the Jews were accustomed to construct booths of the leafy branches of trees, — either on the roofs or in the courts of their dwellings, or in the streets and scjuares (Neb. viii. 15, 16), and to adorn them with flowers and fruits of all kinds (Lev. xxiii. 40), — under which, throughout the period of the festival, they feasted and gave themselves up to rejoicing. This feast is called ΠΙ^ρΠ jn (ή) ίορτή (της) σκηνοττηγίας, Deut. xvi. 16 ; xxxi. 10; Zech. xiv. 16, 18 sq. ; 1 Esdr. v. 50 (51) ; 1 Mace. x. 21 ; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 12; (ή) ίορτή (των) σκηνών, Lev. xxiii. 34; Deut. xvi. 13; [2 Chr. viii. 13; Ezra iii. 4] ; 2 Mace. x. 6 ; σκηναί, Philo de septenar. § 24 ; ή σκηνοττηγία, 2 Mace. i. 9, 18; once [twice] (Ex. xxiii. 16; [xxxiv. 22]) η'ΡΚΠ :π, i.e. 'the feast of ingathering' 8c. of fruits. [Cf. BB.DD. (esp. Ginshurg in Alex.'s Kitto) ; Edersheim, The Temple, eh. xiv.] * (Γκηνοποιό;, -οϋ, ό, (σκηνή and πούω), a tent-makef, i. q. σκηνορράφος (Ael. v. h. 2, 1) ; one that made small port- able tents, of leather or cloth of goats' hair (Lat. cili- cium) or linen, for the use of travellers : Acts xviii. 3 [cf. Meyer ad loc. ; Woldemar Schmidt in Herzog ed. 2 vol. xi. p. 3.Ϊ9 sq.].* σκηνοί, -ους, τό, [Hippocr., Plat., al.], a tabernacle, a tent, everywhere [exc. Boeckh, Corp. inscrr. vol. ii. no. 3071] used metaph. of the human body, in which the soul dwells as in a tent, and which is taken down at death : 2 Co. V. 4 ; ή eViyfiof ήμων οικία τοϋ σκήνους, i- e. ό ϊστί το σκήνος [W. § .09, 7 d., 8 a.], which is the well-known tent, ibid. 1 [R. V. (he earthly house of our tabernacle^. Cf. Sap. ix. 15 and Grimm ad loc; in the same sense in (Plat.) Tim. Locr. p. 100 sqc]. and often in other philosophic writ. ; cf. Fischer, Index to Aeschin. dial. Socr. ; Passow s. v. ; [Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. p. 1 1 3 (on 2 Co. v. 1)].* σ-κηνόω, -ώ; iut. σκηνώσω; \ α,οτ. ϊσκήνωσα; to fx one's tabernacle, have one's tabernacle, abide (or live) in a talj- ernacle (or lent), tabernacle, (often in Xen. ; Dem. p. 1257, 6); God σκηνώσ(ΐ tV αΐτηΰς, icill spread his tabernacle over them, so that they may dwell in safety and security under its cover and protection. Rev. vii. 15; univ. i. q. to dwell (Judg. v. 17): foil, by tv with a dat. of place, Rev. xii. 12 ; xiii. 6, (iv τα'ις οΐκίαις, Xen. an. 5, 5, 11); ev ήμ'ιν, among us, Jn. i. 14 ; μιτά τίνος, with one. Rev. xxi. 3 ; συν rivi, to be one's tent-raate, Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 49. [Cojrp. : eVt-, κατά- σκηνόω.~\ * (Γκήνωμα, -τος, τό, {σκηνόω), α tent, tabernacle : of the temple as (iod's habitation. Acts vii. 46 (Ps. xiv. (xv.) 1; XXV. (xxvi.) 8 ; xiii. (xliii.) 3; xiv. (xlvi.) 5 ; Pausan. 3, 17, 6; of the tabernacle of the covenant, 1 K. ii. 28); metaph. of the human body as the dwelling of the soul (see σκήνος) : iv τω σκηνώματι fivai, of life on earth, 2 Pet. i. 13; άπό6(σις (the author blending the concep- tions of a tent and of a covering or garment, as Paul does in 2 Co. v. 2), ibid. 14. (Eur., Xen., Plut., al. ; Sept. for SriK and ]2ίία.) * σ-κιά, -as, ή, [(see σκηνή, init.)], fr. Hom. down, Sept. for Sx ; a. prop, shadow, i. e. shade caused bj• the interception of the light : Mk. iv. 32 (cf. Ezek. xvii. 23) ; Acts V. 15; σκιά θανάτου, shadow of death (like umiro mortis, Ovid, metam. 5, 191, and umbra Erebi, Verg. Aen. 4, 26; 6, 404), 'the densest darkness' (because from of old Hades had been regarded as enveloped in thick darkness), trop. the thick darkness of error [i. e. spirit- ual death ; see θάνατος, 1] : Mt. iv. 16 ; Lk. i. 79, (fr. Is. ix. 1, where nioSi"). b. a shadow, i. e. an image cast by an object and representing the form of that ob- ject : opp. to σώμα, the thing itself, Col. ii. 1 7 ; hence i. (j. a sketch, outline, adumbration, Heb. viii. 5 ; opp. to ιΐκών, the 'express' likeness, the very image, Heb. x. 1 (as in Cic. de off. 3, 17, 69 nos veri juris solidam et expresssam effigiem nuUam tenemus, umbra et imaginibus utimur).* σκιρτάω, -ώ : 1 aor. ίσκ'φτησα; to leap: Lk. i. 41, 44 vi. 23. (Gen. xxv. 22 ; Ps. cxiii. (cxiv.) 4, 6 ; Grk. writ fr. Hom. down.)* τκΧηοοκαρΒία 579 σκοτεινό'; (Γκληρο-καρδία, -ας, ή, (^σκληρύς and καρδία), a bibl. word, the characiensiic of uiie tcho is σκληρυς την καρδίαν (Prov. xxviii. 14), or σκληροκάρδιο! (Prov. xvii. 20 ; Ezek. iii. 7) ; hardness of hear! : ^It. xix. 8 ; Mk. x. 5 ; xvi. 14 ; for 3dS r>S"i>', Deut. X. 16 ; Jer. iv. 4 ; Sir. .xvi. 10 ; καρ- δία σκληρό, Si'r. iii. 26, 27. [Cf. W. 26, 99 (94).] ' σκληρ05, -ά, -όν, (σκελλω, σκληναι, [to dry up, be dry]), fr. [Hes., Tlieogn.], Pind., Aescliyl. down; Sept. for Πί^Ρ hard, harsh, rough, stiff, (τα σκληρά κ. τα μαλακά, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1) ; of men, metapli., harsh, stern, hard : Mt. XXV. 24 (1 S. XXV. 3 ; Is. xix. 4 ; xlviii. 4 ; many e.xx. fr. prof. auth. are given by Passow s. v. 2 b. ; [L. and S. 8. V. n. 2 ; esp. Trench § xiv.]) ; of things : avepot, vio- lent, rough, Jas. iii. 4 ; ό λόγος, offensive and intolerable, Jn. vi. 60, equiv. to or σκavδaλίζf^, 61 ; σκληρά λaλfΊv κατά Tivos, to speak hard and bitter things against one, Jude 15 (σκληρά λαλιϊν τινι is also used of one who speaks roughly, (jen. xlii. 7, 30 ; αποκρίν^σθαι σκληρά, to reply with threats, 1 K. xii. 13) ; σκληρόν (στι foil, by an inf., it is dangerous, turns out badly, [A. V. it is hard^, Acts ix. 5 Rec. ; xxvi. 14.* (Γκληρότηϊ, -ητοί, ή, (σκληρός), hardness ; trop. obsti- nacy, stubbornness : Ro. ii. 5. (Deut. ix. 27 ; [Antipho], Plat., Aristot., Theophr., Plut., al.) • σκληρο-τράχηλοί, -ov, (σκληρός and τράχηλος), prop. Stiff-necked; trop. stubborn, headstrong, obstinate : Acts vii. 51 ; Sept. for fjlj; T\Up, Ex. xxxiii. 3, 5 ; x.xxiv. 9 ; [etc.] ; Bar. ii. 30; Sir. xvi. 11; [cf. σκληροτραχηλία. Test. xii. Patr., test. Sym. § 6], Not found in prof, auth.; [cf. W. 26, 99 (94)].• σκληρύνω [cf. W. 92 (88)] ; 1 aor. subjunc. 2 pers. plur. σκληρΰνητι ; Pass., impf. ΐσκληρυνόμην ; 1 aor. ίσκληρίν- θην; (σκληρός, q. v.) ; Sept. for Τ^Ό'^Τ} and pin, to make hard, to hardeji ; prop, in Ilippocr. and Galen ; metaph. to render obstinate, stubborn, [A.V. to harden'] : τινά, Ro. ix. 18 (in opp. to those who interpret it to treat harshly, cf. Fritzsche vol. ii. p. 323 sq. ; [cf., too, Meyer ad loc.]) ; τηνκαρδίαν τίνος, Heb. iii. 8, 15 andiv. 7, (fr. Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 8 ; cf. Ex. vii. 3, 22; viii. 19; ix. 12); pass. (Sept. for ntyp and ρίΠ) to be hardened, i. e. become obsti- nate or stubborn : Acts xix. 9; Ileb. iii. 13.* <Γκολιός, -ά, -όν, (opp. to ορθός, όρθιος, ευθύς [cf . σκώληζ']), fr. Hom. down, crooked, curved : prop, of a way (Prov. xxviii. 18), τά σκαλιά, Lk. iii. 5 (opp. to ή ci0e'ia sc. όδοΓ, fr. Is. xl. 4); metaph. perverse, ivicked : ή yevea ή σκολιά. Acts ii. 40; with διεστραμμένη added, Pliil. ii. 15 (clearly so Deut. xxxii. 5); unfair, surly, froicard, (opp. to αγα- θός κ- (ΤΓκικής), 1 Pet. ii. 18.* σ-κόλοψ, -οποΓ, 6, fr. Hom. down, a pointed piece of wood, a pale, a stake : εδόθη μοι σκόλο^Ιτ τη σαρκί, α sharp stake [al. say splinter, A.V. thorn; cf. Num. .xxxiii. 55; Ezek. xxviii. 24 ; Hos. ii. 6 (8) ; Babr. fab. 122, 1. 10; al. (Sir. xliii. 19)] to pierce my flesh, appears to indicate some constant bodily ailment or infirmity, which, even when Paul had been caught up in a trance to the third heaven, sternly admonished him that he still dwelt in a frail and mortal body, 2 Co. xii. 7 (cf. 1-4) ; [cf. W. § 31, 10 N. 3 ; B. § 133, 27. On Paul's " thorn in the flesh " see Farrar, St. Paul, i. 652 sqq. (Excursus x.) ; Bp. Lghlft. Com. on (ial. p. 186 sqq. ; Schaffm his ' Popular Commentary' on Gal. p. 331 sq.] * σ-κοίΓί'ω, -ώ ; (σκοπός, q. V.) ; fr. Hom. down ; to look at, observe, contemplate. to mark : absol., foil, by μή with the indie, (see μή. III. 2), Lk. xi. 35 ; τινά, to fix one's eyes upon, direct one's attention to, any one : Ro. xvi. 17; Phil. iii. 17; σεαυτόν, foil, by μή with the subjunc. to look to, take heed to thyself lest etc. Gal. vi. 1 [see μή, II. 1 b.] ; Ti, to look at, i. e. care for, have regard to, a thing : 2 Co. iv. 18 ; Phil. ii. 4, (2 Mace. iv. 5). [Comp. : fVt-, κατα-σκοπίω•~\ * [Sym. : σκοπίϊν is more pointed than βκίττειν; often i.q. to scrutinize, observe. When the physical sense recedes, i.q. tofx one's [mind's) eye on, direct one's attention to, a. thing in order to get it, Growing to interest in it, era duty towards it. Hence often equiv. to aim at, care for, etc. Schmidt, Syn. ch. xi. Of. θ€ωρ4(ϋ, όράω.] σκοΐΓ05, -oC, ό, [(fr. a r. denoting ' to spy,' ' peer,' 'look into the distance ' ; cf. also Lat. specie, speculum, species, etc. ; Fick i. 251 sq. ; iv. 279 ; Curtius § 1 1 1)] ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. an observer, a watchman. 2. the distant rnark looked at, the goal or end one has in view : κατά σκοπόν (on this phrase see κατά, II. 1 c), Phil, iii. 14.* σκορττίϊ,ω ; 1 aor. έσκόρπισα ; 1 aor. pass. Ισκορπίσθην ; [(prob. fr. r. skarp ' to cut asunder,' ' cut to pieces ' ; akin is σκορπιοί ; cf. Lat. scalpere, scrobs, etc. ; Fick i. 240; iii. Sll, etc.)]; to scatter: 6 λΰκος σκορπίζει τά πρόβατα, Jn. χ. 12 ; ό μη σννάγων μετ εμοΐι σκορπίζει, ^It. xii. 30 ; Lk. xi. 23, (this proverb is taken from a flock, • — to which the body of Christ's followers is likened [al. regard the proverb as borrowed fr. agriculture] ; συνάγει τους εσκορπισμενους το όργανον [i. e. a trumpet], Artem. oneir. 1, 56 init.) ; τινά, in pass., of those who, routed or terror-stricken or driven by some other impulse, fly in every direction : foil, by «r w. ace. of place, Jn. xvi. 32 [cf. W. 516 (481)], (1 Mace. vi. 54; φοβηθεντες έσκορπίσθησαν, Plut. Timol. 4 ; add, Joseph, antt. 6, 6, 3). i. q. to scatter abroad (what others may collect for themselves), of one dispensing blessings liberally : 2 Co. ix. 9 fr. Ps. cxi. (cxii.) 9, [cf. W. 469 (437)]. (Ace. to Phrynichus the word was used byHecataeus; it was also used — in addition to the writ, already cited — by Strabo 4 p. 198 ; Lcian. asin. 32 ; Ael. v. h. 13, 45 [here δΐ€σκ. (ed. Hercher); λόγουΓ (cf. Lat. spargere rumores), Joseph, antt. 16, 1, 2]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 218; [W. 22; 92 (87)]; Sept. for ]"27\, 2 S. xxii. 15; Ps. xvii. (xviii.) 15. Attic writers say σκ(8ά«αι/«.) [Comp. : δια- σκορπίζομαι.] * ο-κορπ£ο5, -ov, 6, [(for deriv. see the preceding word) ; from Aeschyl. down; on its accent, cf. Chandler § 246], a scorpion, Sept. for 3'^pJ.', the name of a little animal, somewhat resembling a lobster, which in warm regions lurks esp. in stone walls ; it has a poisonous sting in its tail [McC. and S. and BB. DD. s. v.] : Lk. x. 19 ; xi. 12; Rev. ix. 3, 5, 10.• σκοτεινοί [WH σκοτινός; see I, i], -η, -όν, (jjKOirot), fM σκοτία 580 σκωΚηξ of (larkrens, covered itith dari-neur, [fr. Acschyl. flown] : opp. to φωτ(ΐνόί, Mt. vi. 23 ; Lk. xi. 34, 36, (ra σκοτ^νά «. τα φωτ€ΐνά, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 1 ; [cf. 4, 3, 4]).' σκοτία, -as, ή. [on its lienv. of. σκηνή], (Tliom. Map;, ό σ«!τοϊ κ. το σκότοΓ• το δί σκοτία οϋ« eV χμήσα fc. in Attic [cf. Moeris s. v. ; L. anil .S. s. v. σκύτοι, fin.]}, i/ari-ness: Ijrop. the darkness Jue to ivant of daylight, Jn. vi. 17; .\.\. 1 ; tV τή σκοηα (λαλίίΐ' τι), unseen, in secret, (i. q. fv κμνπτω. .In. xviii. iO), pnvilv, in private, opp. to eV τώ φωτι. Mt. .\. 27 ; Lk. .\ii. 3 ; nietaph. used of igno- rance of divine tilings, and its associated wickedness, and Uie resultant misery: Mt. iv. 16 LTrWH; Jn. i. 5; viii. 12; xii. 35, 46; 1 .Jn. i. 5; ii 8 sq 11. (Ap. Rh. 4. Ki'JS; Anih. 8, 187. 190; for Π:ΓΠ .Mio. iii. 6; for isx Job xxviii. 3.)* οΓκοτίζω : I'ass., pf. ptcp. ίσκοτισμίνοί (Eph. iv. 18 RG) ; 1 'Λον. (σ<οτΊσθην\ 1 fut. aicorta^r;ao/iai; (σκότοί); to cov- er icilli (lurkne^x, to tlarkoi ; pass. Iti be cnren-d with dark- ness, be darkeneil : prop, of the heavenl\ bodies, as de- prived of light [(Eccl. xii. 2)], Jit. .-i.xiv. 29 ; Mk. xiii. 24 ; Lk. xxiii. 4.")['Γ WIl t(tXfiV. p. 171]; (σκότος); Ιο darken, cocer imlh darkness: llev. ix. 2 LT WII ; xvi. 10; metr aph. (() uarken or liliml the nunil: (σκοτωμίνοι τή ίιαι/οία, Eph. iv. 18 L Τ Tr WIL ([Soph.], Plat., I'olyb., Plut, al. ; Sept.)• σκϋβαλον, -ου, τό. (κυσίβαΧον Tt ov. το τοις κυσ\ βα\\όμ^- νον, Suid. [ρ. 3347c.; to the same ilTect Etym. Magn. p. 719, 53 cf. 125, 44 ; al. connect it with σκώρ (cf. scoria, L.at. slercus), al. with a r. meaning 'to shiver ', 'shred '; Kick, Pt. i. p. 244]), any refuse, as the excrement of animals, offscouring, rubbish, ; [Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 2] ; Lcian. Tox. 5 sq. ; 2 Mace. iv. 47; 3 Alacc. vii. 5. [See Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. e. ; Hackett in B.D. s. v. Scythians; Ilawlinson's llerod., App. to bk. iv., Essays ii. ami iii.; Vanieek, Fremdworter, s. v.]* σ-κυθρωΐΓ09, -όν, also of three term. ; cf. Loli. ad Pliryn. p. 105 [W. § 11, 1]. (σκυθρής and ώψ), of a sad and ytoonnj countenance (opp. to φαώρός, Xen. mem. 3, 10, 4): Lk. xxiv. 17; of one who feigns or affects a sad countenance, Mt. vi. 16. (Gen. xl. 7 ; Sir. xxv. 23 ; Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) * σ-κνλλω ; pf. pass. ptcp. (σκυλμίνος ; pres. mid. impv. 2 pers. sing, σκύλλου ; (σκϋλοι/, <[. v.) ; a. to skin, flay, (Anthol.). b. to rem!, manyle, (.\eschyl. Pers. 577); to vex, trouble, annoy, (Ildian. 7, 3, 9 [4]): τινά, Mk. v. 35 ; Lk. viii. 49 ; pass. fVxuXMfVoi, ( Viilg. vexati) [R. V. distresseil], Mt. ix. 36 G L Τ Tr WII; mid. 10 yive one's self trouble, trouble one's self: μη σκύλλου, Lk. vii. 6.• σ-κϋλον [R"» GLT WH] also σκύλον ([so R««"Tr] cf. Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 44), -ου, τό, (fr. the obsol. σκΰω, ' to pull off ', allied to ξύω, ξΰλον [but cf. Curtius §113; Vanii-ek p. 1115]); a. a (beasfs) skin stripped off, a pelt. b. the arm.') stripped q/f from an enemy, spoils : plur. Lk. xi. 22. (Soph., Thuc, sqq. ; Sept.) • σ-κωληκό-βρωτο5, -ov, (σκώληξ and βιβρώσκω), eaten oj worms : Acts xii. 23, cf. 2 Mace. ix. 9. (of a tree, Theo- phr. c. pi. 5, 9, 1.)• σκύληξ, -j/ieos, ό, [perh. akin to σκολιόί], a worm (Horn. II. 13, 6.")4); spec, that kind which preys upon de.ad bodies (Sir. .X. 1 1 ; xix. 3; 2.Macc. ix. 9; Anthol. 7, 4sn, 3 ; 10, 78, 3) : ό σκωΚηξ αυτών οΰ τίλίυτα, by a fig. bor- rowed fr. Is. Lxvi. 24 (cf. Sir. vii. 17; Judith xvi. 17), 'their punishment after death will never cease' [σκ. svmbohzing perh. the loathsomeness of the penalty], .Mk.ix.44.4C, [.T WHom.Trbr. these two verse.s], 48.' T^apayhiviK 581 σοώια <Γμχφά78ινο9, -ι;, -or, (σμάραγ^ος, cf. άμίθΰστχνον, νακίν- iiros, etc.), y/' emerald, made uf ciiitrald, [see the full, word]; sc. Xi5os, Kev. iv. 3. [(Ix'ian.)]* rpApa-ySos, -ow, ό [but apparently f em. in the earlier writ., cf. Theophrast. lap. 4, 23 ; in Hdt. its gend. cannot be determined ; cf. Ulep/i. Thesaur. s. v.], Lat. sviarar/- tiaa, [A. V. emerald'], a transparent precious stone noted esp. for its light green color : Kev. xxi. 19. [From Hdt. down ; Sept. On the deriv. of the word see Vanicek, Fremdwbrter, s. v. On its relation to our 'emerald' (disputed by King, Antique Gems, p. 27 sqq.), see Riehm HWB. s. V. 'Edelsteine', 17; Deane in the 'Bible Edu- cator ', vol. ii. p. 350 sq.] * σμύρνα, -ης, ή, llebr. lb, 11"D, myrrh, a bitter gum and eostly perfume which exudes from a certain tree or Ehrub in Arabia and Ethiopia, or is obtained by incis- ions made in the bark: Mt. ii. 11 ; as an antiseptic it was used in embalming, Jn. xix. 39. Cf. Hdt. 2, 40, 86; 3, 107 ; Theophr. hist. pi. 9, 3 sq. ; Diod. 5, 41 ; Plin. h. n. 12, 33SI1.; [BB.DD. ; Birda-ood in the ' Bible Edu- cator', vol. ii. p. 151 ; Lotc, Aram. Pflanzennam. § 185].* Σμύρνα, -ης, ή, Smi/nta. an Ionian city, on the .lEgean Sea, about 40 miles X. of Ephesus; it had a harbor, and flourished in trade, commerce, and the arts ; now Ismir [B15.DD.] : Rev. i. 11 ; ii. s. Tdf. after cod. X [(cf. cod. Bezae, ed. Scrivener, p. xlviii.)] has adopted the form Ζμΰρν., found also occasionally on coins and in inscrr. ; cf Kiihner i. p. 200 e. ; [Tdf.'s note on Rev. i. 11 ; and see Σ, σ. Γ, sub fin.; Bp. Li/lilft. Ignat. ii. 3.'il note].* Σμυρναίος, -ου, 6, ή, of or hehmging to Snii/rna, an in- labilanl of Smi/rna : Rev. ii. 8 Rec. [(Find., Hdt.)] * σ-μνρνίζω: ((τμίφνα, q. v.); 1. intrans. lo be like wiyrrh (Diosc. 1, 79). 2. lo mix and so flavor with myirh : oivos (σμνρνισμΐνοί (pf. pass, ptcp.) wine [A. V. minglei] with myrrh (Vulg. murratum vinum), i. e. flavored or (Plin. h. n. 14, 15) made fragrant with myrrh: Mk. xv. 23. But since the ancients used to infuse myrrh into wine in order to give it a more agreeable fragrance and flavor, we must in this matter accept Matthew's account (xxvii. 34, viz. 'mingled with gall') as by far the more prol)able ; [but see χολή, 2].* Σό8ομα, -ων, τά, (ut?), Sodom, a city respecting the location and the destruction of which see ΓΛμορρα [and (in addition to reff. there given) McC. and S. s. v. Sodom ; SchafF-Herzog ib.]: Mt. x. 15; xi. 23 sq.; Mk. vi. 11 (R L in br.) ; Lk. x. 12 ; xvii. 29 ; Ro. Lx. 29 ; 2 Pet. ii. 6 ; Jude 7 ; Rev. xi. 8.• Σολομών (so [R"!»"!» Γτ Lin Lk. xii. 27; RLTrAVH in Acts vii. 47 (cf. Tdf. on Mt. vi. 29)]) and Σολομών [so R G L Τ Tr WH in Mt. i. 7 ; vi. 29 ; R""' Τ Tr W'll in Lk. xii. 27; G in Acts vii. 47 ; (2α\ωμών Tdf. in Acts vii. 4 7)], -ώη-οΓ (so Rec. uniformly ; [LT WH in Acts iii. U; T. 1 2 ; L in Mt. i. 6 also]), and -<5i/or (so [G L Τ Tr WH in Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31 ; Jn. x. 23 ; (ί Τ Tr WH in Mt. Le; GTrin Acts iii. 11 ; v. 12]; the forms ^v, -««ot^ ■re undoubtedly to be preferred, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. pp. 104, 110; WH. App. p. 158]: W. 67 (65); B. 16 (H ■q.)), 0, (rio'^C', i. e. 'pacific', Irenaeus. Germ. Fned- rich, Eng. Frederick), Solomon, the son of David by Bathsheba the wife of Uriah; he succeeded his father, becoming the third king of Israel (b. c. 1015-975 [ace. to the commonly accepted chronology ; but cf. the arU ' Zeitrechnung ' in Riehm's HWB. (esp. p. 1x23 S(i.)]), built the temple at Jerusalem, and was distinguished for his magnificence, splendor, and wisdom : Mt. i. 6 sq. ; vL 29 ; xii. 42; Lk. \l 31 ; xii. 27 ; Jn. x. 23 ; Acts iii. 11 ; V. 12; vii. 4 7.• o-opos, -oO. ij, an urn or receptacle for keeping the bones of the dead (Hom. II. 23, 91) ; α coβn (Gen. 1. 2G ; Hdt. 1, 68; 2, 78; Arstpli., Aeschin., Plut., al.) ; the funeral- couch or bier on which the Jews carried their dead forth to burial [see B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Coflin ; Edersheim, Jesus the Messiah, i. 555 sq.] : Lk. vii. 14.* σ05, -ή, -0», possess, pron. of the 2d pers. ; fr. Hom. down ; tliy, thine : Mt. vii. 3, 22 ; xiii. 27 ; .xxiv. 3 ; Mk. ii. 18; Lk. XV. 31; xxii. 42; Jn. iv.42 [here Tr mrg. WH rarg. read the personal σου] ; xvii. G, 9, 10, 17 ; xviii.35; Aetsv.4; xxiv. 2 (.!), 4: 1 Co. viii. 1 1 ; xiv. IG; Philem. 14 : oi σοί sc. μαθηταΐ, Lk. v. 33; absol. oj σοι, thy kins- folk, thy friends, ilk. v. 19; το σαν, what is thine, Mt. .XX. 14; XXV. 25; plur. τά σά [.Λ.. Λ^ tliy goods; cf. W. 592 (551)], Lk. vi. 30. [Cf. W. § 22, 7 sqq.; B. 115 (101) sqq.]• σον5άρίον, -ου, τό, (a Lat. word, sudarium, fr. sudor, sweat; cf. B. IS (IG)), a handkerchief, i.e. a cloth for wiping the perspiration from the face and for cleaning the nose: Lk. xix. 20; Acts xix. 12; also used in swath- ing the head of a corpse [\. V. na/ikia'], Jn. xi. 44 ; xx. 7. [Cf. BB.DD. s. V. Handkerchief.]• Σουσάννα, -ης [cf. Β. 17 (15)], ή, (n"^ic; a lily), Su- sanna, one of the women that attended Jesus on his journeys : Lk. viii. 3.• σοφ(α. -as, ή, (σοφοί), Ilebr. Π"ρ3Π, wisdom, broad and full iuielligence, [fr. Hom. down]; used of the knowl- edge of very diverse matters, so that the shade of mean- ing in which the word is taken must be discovered from the context in every particular case. a. the wis- dom which belongs to men : Univ., Lk. ii. 40, 52; si)ec. the varied knowledge of things human and divine, ac- quired by acuteness and experience, and summed up in maxims and proverbs, as was η σοφία rov ^ολομώνος, Mt. xii. 42; Lk. xi. 31 ; the science and learning τώι» Αίγν irriav. Acts vii. 22 [cf. W. 227 (213) n. ; B. § 134, 6] ; the art of interpreting dreams and always giving the sagest advice, .\cts vii. 10 ; the intelligence evinced in discov- ering the meaning of some mysterious number or vision. Rev. xiii. 18; xvii. 9; skill in the management of af- fairs. Acts vi. 3 ; a devout and proper prudence in in- tercourse ivith men not disciples of Christ. Col. iv. 5 ; skill and discretion in imparting Christian truth, Coh i. 28; iii. 16; [2 Pet. iii. 15]; the knowledge and prac- tice of the requisites for godly and upright living. .las. i. 5; iii. 13, 17; with which σηφία άνωθ(ν κατίρχομίνη is put in contrast the σοφία (πίγ^ιος, ψυχική. 8αιμονιώ5ης, such as is the craftiness of envious and quarrelsome men, Jas. iii. 15, or σαρκική σοφία (see σαρκικοί, 1), σοφία 582 στταρ'/ανοω craftiness, 2 Co. i. 12 (for the context shows that it does not differ essentially from the πανουιτγία of iv. 2; in Grk. writ, also σοφία is not infreij. used of shrewdness and cunning; cf. I'assow [or L. and S.] s. v. 2); the knoΛv•le(lge and skill in affairs requisite for the successful defence of the Christian cause against hostile accusa- tions, Lk. xxi. 15; an acquaintance with divine things and human duties, joined to a power of discoursing con- cerning them and of interpreting and ai)pl_ving sacred Scrijiture, Mt. xiii. 54; Mk. vi. 2 ; Acts vi. 10; the wis- dom or instruction Avith wliich John the Baptist and Jesus taught men the way to obtain salvation, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 35, (on these pass, see δ«αώω, 2). In Paul's Epp. : a knowledge of the divine plan, previously hidden, of providing salvation for men by the expiatory death of Christ, 1 Co. i.3U; ii. 6; Eph. i. 8 [W. Ill (105 sq.)]; )ience all the treasures of wisdom are said to be hidden in Christ, Col. ii. 3; w. the addition of 6eou (gen. of the author), 1 Co. i. 24 ; ii. 7 ; πνίυιιατικη. Col. i. 9 ; πνβΟμα σοφίας κ. άΐΓο<α\ΰψ€ω!, Eph. i. 1 7 ; Xoyof σοφία!, the ability to discourse elotjuently of this wisdom, 1 Co. xii. 8 ; opposed to this Λvisdom is — the empty conceit of wisdom which men make a parade of, a knowledge more specious than real of lofty and hidden subjects : such as the theosophy of certain Jewish Christians, Col. ii. 23 ; the philosophy of the Greeks, 1 Co. i. 21 sq. ; ii. 1 ; with τοΰ κόσμου adiled, 1 Co. i. 20 ; iii. 1 9 ; τοΰ αΙωνος τούτου, . Co. ii. ti ; τώι> σοφών, 1 Co. i. 19 ; ανθρώπων, 1 Co. ii. 5, ■in each of these last pass, the word includes also the rhetorical art, such as is taught in the schools), cf. Frilzsche, Rom. vol. i. p. 67 sq. ; σοφία τοΰ >όγου, the wisdom which shows itself in speaking [R. Λ'. iciai/om of u'ori/.s], the art of the rhetorician, 1 Co. i. 1 7 : Xoyot (άνθμωπίνης [so R in vs. 4 (all txts. in 13)]) σοφίας, dis- course conformed to philosophy and the art of rhetoric, 1 Co. ii. 4, 13. b. supreme intelligence, such as be- longs to God : Rev. vii. 12, also to Christ, exalted to God's right hand, Rev. v. 12; the wisdom of God as evinced in forming and executing his counsels, Ro. xi. 33 ; with the addition of τοΰ icoO, as manifested in the formation and government of the world, and to the Jews, moreover, in the Scriptures, 1 Co. i. 21 ; it is called πολυποίκιλος from the great variety of ways and methods by ivhich he devised and achieved salvation throu<;h Christ, Eph. iii. 10. In the noteworthy pass. Lk. xi. 49 (where Christ ascribes to ' the wisdom of God ' what in the parallel, Mt. xxiii. 34, he utters himself), the words η σοφία τοΰ fleoG (Hrfi/ seem to denote the wisrlom of God whicli is operative and emhoilied as it were in Jesus, so that the primitive Christians, when to comfort them- selves under persecution they recalled the saying of Christ, employed that formula of quotation [cf. 1 Co. i. 24, 30, etc.]; but Luke, in ignorance of this fact, took the phrase for a part of Christ's savins:. So Eusebius (h. e. 3, 32, 8), perhaps in the words of Hegesippus, calls those who had personally heard Christ οί αϋταΐς άκοαΐς της fvufov σ»φίας έπακονσαι κατηξιωμίνοι; cf. Grimm in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1853, p. 332 sga. fFor other explanations of the phenomenon see the Comm. on Lk. 1. c. Cf. SchUrer, Zeitgesch. § 33, V. 1 and reff.] • [Stn. : on the relation of σοφία to yvwais see yvuais, fin. " While σοφ. is ' mental excellence in its hij;liest and fullest sense ' (Aristot. eth. Nic. 6, 7), auvtats and <ρρ6νησι$ are both derivative and special, — appUcatious of σοφία to details: σύν. critical, apprehending the bearing of things, φρόν prac- tical, suggesting lines of action " ( Up. Lghtft. on Cul. i. 9) ; but cf. Meyer on Col. L c. ; Schmidt, ch. 13 § 10; eh. 147 § 8. See σοφός, tin.] ο-οφίζω : 1 aor. inf. σοφίσαι; (σοφός) ; 1. Ιο make tcise, teack : τινά, 2 Tim. iii. 15 (Ps. xviii. (xix.) 8; ίσύφι- σάς μ( την ϊντολήν σου, I's. cxviii. (cxix.) 98 ; οΰτ€ τ» ναυ- τιλίης σισοφισμινος, οϋτ( τι νηων, lies. ορρ. 647). 2. iMid. in Grk. writ. fr. Ildt. down, mostly as depon. to become wise, to have understanding, {ϊσοφίσατο ύπΐρ πάν τας ανθρώπους, 1 Κ. iv. 27 (31) ; add, Eccl. ii. 15, etc.; freq. in Sir.) ; to invent, play the sophist ; to devise cleverly or cunningly : pf. pass. ptcp. σ^σοφισμίνοι μϋθοι, 2 Pet. i. 16. [Co.MP. : κατα-σοφίζομαι-Ί ' σοφόϊ, -ή, -όν, (akin to σαφής and to the Lat. sapio, sapiens, sapor, 'to have a taste', etc.; Curtius § 628; [Vanitek p. 991]), Sept. for Ώ3Π ; [fr. Theogn., Pind., Aeschyl. down] ; tvise,'i.e. a. skilled, expert: eij rt, Ro. xvi. 19; of artificers (cf. Grimm, Exeg. Hdbch. on Sap. [vii. 21] p. 151): άρχιτίκτων, 1 Co. iii. 10; Is. UL 3, {δημιουργός, of God, Xen. mem. 1,4, 7). b. wise, i.e. skilled in letters, cultivated, learned: Ro. i. 14, 22; of the Greek philosophers (and orators, see σοφία, a.), 1 Co. i. 19 sq. 26 sq. ; iii. 18 sq. [20]; of the Jewish theologians, Mt. xi. 25; Lk. x. 21 ; of Christian teach- ers, Mt. xxiii. 34. c. wise in a practical sense, i. e. one who in action is governed hy piety and integrity : Eph. V. 1 5 ; Jas. iii. 1 3 ; and accordingly is a suitable per- son to settle private quarrels, 1 Co. vi. 5. d. wise in a philosophic sense, forming the best plans and us- ing the best means for their execution : so of God, Ro. xvi. 27, and Rec. in 1 Tim. i. 17; Jude 25; σοφώτ€ρον. con- tains more wisdom, is more sagaciously thought out, 1 Co. i. 25.• [SvN. : σοφός, συνετός, ψρόνι μος : σοφός wise, see' above; συνετός intelligent, denotes one who can ' put things together' (auvifVai), who has insight and comprehension, φρόνιμος prudent (A. V. uniforndy, ivise), denotes primarily one who has quick and correct perceptions, hence ' discreet,' ' circumspect,' etc. ; cf. Schmidt ch. 147. See σοφία, fin.] ΣίΓονία, -at, ή. Spain, in the apostolic age the whole peninsula S. of the P\Tenees : Ro. χ v. 24, 28. ([W. 25] ; the more com. Grk. form is 'Ισπανία, 1 ^lacc. viii. 3, [af>- parently the Phoenician or Lat. name for 'Ιβηρία; cf. Pape, Eigennamen, s. vv.].) * σ-παράσ-σω ; 1 aor. ('σπάραξα ; to convulse [al. tear'] : Tira, Mk. i. 26 ; ix. 20 R G Tr txt., 26 ; Lk. ix. 39; see ρήγνυμι, c. (τας γνάθους. Arstph. ran. 424 ; τας τρίχας, Diod. 19, 34 ; in various other senses in Grk. writ.) [CoMP. : συν- σπαράσσω.^ * στταργανόω, -ώ : 1 aor. (σπαργάνωσα : pf. pass. ptcp. (σπαργανωμίνος ; (σπάργανον a swathing band) ; to wrap στταταΧάω 583 στΓβρμα in swaaanng-clothes : an infant juet bom, Lk. iL 7, 12. (Ezek. xvi. 4 ; [Eur., Aristot.], Hippocr., Plut., al.) * σ-ιταταλάω, -ά ; 1 aor. (σπατάΚησα; (ajrardXij, riotous living, luxury) ; to live luxuriously, lead a voluptuous life, [_give one's self to pleasurej : 1 Tim. v. 6 ; Jas. v. 5. (Prov. xxL\. 21 ; Am. vi. 4 [in both these pass, καταιητ. ; Ezek. xvi. 49] ; Sir. xxi. 15; Barnab. ep. 10, 3 ; Folyb. excrpt. Vat. p. 451 [i.e. 37, 4, 6 (ed. Didot)], and occasionally in later and inferior writ.)• σ-πάω, -ώ : 1 aor. mid. ('σπασάμην ; [cogn. w. άa^τάζoμat (to draw to one's self, embrace, etc.), Eng. spasm, etc.] ; fr. Horn, down ; Sept. chiefly for 'I'jE' ; to draw : mid. with μάχαφαν [of. B. § 135, 4], to draw one's sword, Mk. xiv. 47 ; Acts xvi. 27, (Num. xxii. 31 ; την ρομφαίαν, 23 ; Judg. ix. 54, etc.). [Co.MP. : άνα-, άνο-, Sto-, tm-, jrepi- σττάω.] * «nretpa [on the accent cf. B. 1 1 ; Chandler § 161 ; TJf. Proleg.p. 102],ij,gen. -ης (Acts x. 1 ; x.\i. 31 ; xxvii. 1 ; see [Trf/. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156; and] μά- χαιρα, init.), [cogn. w. σττυρίί (q. v.)] ; a. Lat. spira ; anything roUed into a circle or ball, anything wound, roUed up, folded together. b. a military cohort (Polyb. 11, 23, 1 Tpfis oTTclpas• τοϋτο Si «oXflTai τό σύν- ταγμα των πίζων παρά 'Ρωμαίοις κοόρτίί), Ι. β. the tenth part of a legion [i. e. about 600 men (i. e. legionaries), or if auxiliaries either 500 or 1000; cf. Marquardt, Rdmisch. Alterth. III. ii. p. 371. But surely τοΟτοτό σνιτα-/μα in the quotation comprehends the rpels 'σπ•ίρμα, Mt. xxii. 2S ; άφιί ναι σπίρμα rift, ^ik. xii. 20-22 ; το σττ. τινόί, Lk. i. 5j; .In. vii. 42 ; viii. 33, 37 ; Acts iii. 25 ; vii. 5 sij. : xiii. 23 ; Ho. i. 3 ; [iv. 13] ; ix. 7; xi. 1; 2 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tira. ii. 8; Heb. ii. IG; xi. 18; in plur. : rrait ΐκ βασιλικών σ-ικμμάτων, of royal de- scent, Joseph, antt. S, 7, (i ; τ-ώκ ΆβραμιαΙων σπιρμάτων απόγονοι, 4 ilacc. xviii. 1 ; i. q. tribes, races, άνθρωποι τ€ και άνθ^<^πωυ σηίρμασι νομοθ(τονμ(ν τα νϋν, Plat. legg. 9 p. «ba c. Hy a rabbinical method of interpreting, op- posed to the usage of the Ilebr. jni, which signifies tlie offspring whetlier consisting of one person or many, Paul lavs such stress on the singular number in Gen. xiii. 15; xvii. 8 as to make it denote but one of .Abraham's posterity, and that the Messiah: (Jal. iii. 16, also 11); and yet, that the way in which Paul presses the singu- lar here is not utterly at variance with the genius of the Jewish-Greek language is evident from Άβραμιαίων σπερ- μάτων dmJyuiOi, 4 .Macc. xviii. 1, where the |ihiral is used of many descendants [(cf. Delilzsch, Br. a. d. Ubm. p. 16 note ■^; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c.)]. το σπ. {'Αβραάμ) το cK ToC νόμου, the seed which is such according to the de- cision of the law, physical offspring [see νόμοι, 2 p. 428*], TO « πίστεως 'Αβρ. those who are called Abra- ham's posterity on account of the faith by which they are akin to him [see jrioris, 1 b. a. p. SIS'• and ck, II. 7], Ro. iv. 16; add, 18; ix- 8; Gal. iii. 29; similarly Chris- tians are called, in Rev. xii. 1 7, the σπίρμα of the church (which is likened to a mother. Gal. iv. 26). β. wlinlecer possesses vital force or lifc-giring poicer: το σπέρμα τοϋ flioO [(but anarthrous)], the Holy ."^ijirit, the divine en- ergy operating within the soul by which we are regener- ated or made the τϊκνα τοΟ Beoi, 1 Jn. iii. 9.* <ΓΤΓ€ρμ«λό'γοΐ, -ox, (σπίρμα, and λί'γω to collect) ; 1. pichimi up seeds : used of birds, Plut. Demet. 28 ; Athen. 9 p. 387 f. ; esp. of llie crow or 'law thai picks up grain in the fields (Gerra. SaatLralie), Arstph. av. 232, 579; Aris- tot. h. a. 8, 3 p. 592'', 28, and other writ. 2. of men: lounging about the market-place and picking up a subsis- tence by whatever m